# admin Sfdo - Full Documentation # About Contact Standardization Learn about how to update data about your Contacts. - **[About Contact Standardization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_contact_standarization_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contact Standardization offers a scalable solution that flags, and updates, inaccurate email addresses and phone numbers so that you can either fix the Contact records or remove them from the email or phone lists. - **[Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_contact_standarization_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contact Standardization helps ensure that nonprofits have constituent's correct email addresses and phone numbers. The ability to promptly and accurately reach prospects or donors can exponentially increase a nonprofit's ability to fundraise and spread awareness for causes they are passionate about. - **[Deceased Contacts and Planned Giving](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_contact_standarization_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At some point, you will have contacts who are deceased or others who have asked to be removed from your contact lists. In either of these cases, you need to update your mailing lists to cease contact. For a deceased contact you need to ensure that the contact's name doesn't appear in outgoing communications to avoid upsetting family members. ## About Contact Standardization Contact Standardization offers a scalable solution that flags, and updates, inaccurate email addresses and phone numbers so that you can either fix the Contact records or remove them from the email or phone lists. - For email, this improves deliverability and decreases the odds of emails being marked as spam - even for those recipients with valid email addresses in their database. - For phone numbers, it saves time for fundraisers and improves trust in the system and the data. - Furthermore, this scheduled job enables nonprofits to manage effort around constituent deceased status and planned giving in a more effective and timely manner. ## Email Addresses and Phone Numbers Contact Standardization helps ensure that nonprofits have constituent's correct email addresses and phone numbers. The ability to promptly and accurately reach prospects or donors can exponentially increase a nonprofit's ability to fundraise and spread awareness for causes they are passionate about. Inaccurate email addresses have a far greater negative impact on fundraising efforts than merely going undelivered or unopened. Bad emails cause a nonprofit’s email appeals to be labeled as spam, which can decrease deliverability, even to valid constituents. This costs the average nonprofit thousand per year in lost revenue. Similarly, inaccurate phone numbers can impact voice calls as well as the success of new marketing plans implemented using Short Message Service (SMS) outreach efforts. Though individual SMS messages are cheap, incorrect data in the database prevents a new donor from ever making their second donation if the "new donor welcome SMS" program is sent to the wrong number. ## Deceased Contacts and Planned Giving At some point, you will have contacts who are deceased or others who have asked to be removed from your contact lists. In either of these cases, you need to update your mailing lists to cease contact. For a deceased contact you need to ensure that the contact's name doesn't appear in outgoing communications to avoid upsetting family members. You also build relationships with donors who are considering or have committed to a planned gift. Sometimes when the donor passes away, you might be unaware of their intentions because nonprofits are typically not the first organization that is notified. Contact Standardization alerts you when a donor with a planned gift passes away. Then you'll know to look for a notification from the estate, or reach out to inquire about the planned gift. # About Managing Duplicate Contacts Contact Merge in Data Integrity makes it easy to find and merge duplicate Contacts in Salesforce. From the Contact Merge tab, click **Search Contacts** to search for individual Contacts. You can also click **See Duplicate Contacts** to see a list of duplicate record sets, but you'll need to [set up duplicate detection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_manage_duplicate_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Matching Rules and Duplicate Rules, and run a duplicate job to see a list of duplicate records.") first. Before using Contact Merge, it's important to think about how your organization handles duplicate Contacts when they're found. For example, you may want to document a workflow or decision matrix, including the criteria you set up in your Matching Rules, to make reviewing and merging duplicates easier. # About National Change of Address Updates National Change of Address (NCOA) updates in Data Integrity make it easy for you to keep up with constituents when they update their address. NCOA updates may also qualify your organization for postal discounts. Only US, Canadian, and UK addresses are supported for NCOA updates. UK gone-away addresses are also supported. If you [set up a National Change of Address provider](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_set_up_ncoa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your Melissa Data SmartMover license for US or Canadian addresses. Similarly, set up your contract with Data8 for UK addresses.") using a Melissa Data SmartMover license or with Data8, you can schedule one-time or recurring NCOA updates to keep up with constituents when they move. When an NCOA update is found, a new Address record with a new Address ID is created for the Household Account. If the old Address record was set as the Default Address for the Household Account and its Contacts, the new Address is set as the new Default Address. # Academic Calendar Setup with AI Tools A guided session builds an academic calendar for your institution, including terms, registration windows, and add and drop deadlines. When you describe your calendar dates or provide a source file to a coding agent, the agent validates the dates and creates the academic year, term, and session records. This foundation supports registration, enrollment, and student communications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Scenario A Salesforce admin at your institution wants to set up the academic calendar before advising and registration open. To avoid entering every year, term, and session by hand, the admin connects a coding agent to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) and provides a spreadsheet with key dates. The agent validates the dates and proposes a schedule for review. After the admin approves, the agent creates the academic year, term, and session records with registration windows and deadlines. This validated calendar prepares the org for enrollment and student communications. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. For more information, see [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). ## Requirements - Education Cloud Full Access permission set. The agent checks for and assigns the required permission sets based on your privileges, so it never grants access that you don't have. - A coding agent, such as Agentforce Vibes or Claude Code, connected to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) with access to Education Cloud setup skills. For Agentforce Vibes, no installation is required. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. You can manage them from the Skills page, under Toolkit, in Agentforce Vibes. For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. ## Suggested Technology and Experience Recommended for Salesforce admins who are comfortable with Setup and with running a coding agent against a connected org. No prior experience with a specific skill is required. ## Related Documentation - [Model Your Academic Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_your_academic_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your academic year, terms, and sessions.") - [Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide) - [Salesforce Development Plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) - [Get Started with Agentforce Vibes](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/agentforcevibes/guide/afv-get-started.html) ## Agentic Tips - Describe your goal in your own words. For example: - "Create our academic calendar for next year." - "Set up a semester system with Fall, Spring, and Summer terms and two Summer sessions." - "Here's our calendar spreadsheet. Add the terms, sessions, and registration windows." - Specify your calendar system. Describe to the agent whether you run a semester, quarter, or trimester system so that it creates the right terms. - Provide complete dates. To help the agent validate the calendar, specify term start and end dates, registration open dates, and add and drop deadlines. The agent converts relative dates, such as "next Fall," to specific dates before creating records. - Review the proposed calendar before you approve. The agent shows the full structure and identifies any overlaps or conflicts. Confirm intentional overlaps, such as summer sessions, when prompted. - Avoid pasting credentials into a prompt. The agent acts as your authenticated user through the connected org. ## Design Considerations - The agent validates dates before creating records. It checks that term dates are consistent and that the year spans its terms. It also checks that registration opens before classes start and that deadlines fall within term bounds. If a date fails validation, the agent stops and asks you to correct it. - Add and drop deadlines apply to sessions. Terms don't carry an add and drop date. If your input includes a term-level deadline without sessions, the agent asks how to place the deadline rather than omitting it. - The agent creates calendar records only. It builds the academic year, terms, and sessions with their windows and deadlines. It doesn't schedule courses, create course offerings, or set up institutional accounts or campuses. - Spot-check after setup. Ask the agent to show a term or full calendar range to confirm what it created. ## Build Your Academic Calendar with a Coding Agent Describe your key dates to a coding agent to create the academic year, term, and session records with registration windows and deadlines. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To run setup skills through a coding agent: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. Before you start: - [Set up your org](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/setup-overview.html) for the Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers, including an External Client App with the `mcp_api` scope. - Activate the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). - [Connect your coding agents.](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/client-connection-overview.html) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. Then, build your academic calendar. 1. Instruct the agent to create your academic calendar, and specify whether you use a semester, quarter, or trimester system. 2. Provide your dates as a spreadsheet, CSV, PDF, or description, or enter them when prompted. 3. Have the agent validate the dates, and correct any dates that it identifies. 4. Review the proposed year, terms, and sessions, and confirm any overlaps the agent identifies. 5. Approve the calendar, and have the agent create the linked records. 6. Review the agent's summary, and spot-check a term or the full calendar in Salesforce. # Academic Certification Academic Certification represents an academic degree, diploma, or certificate. - **[Sample Uses for Academic Certification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Academic Certification identifies that a person has completed a course of study. Let's look at some uses for the Academic Certification object. - **[Academic Certification Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the preconfigured records types that come with Education Data Architecture. - **[Keep Up with Academic Certification Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create an Academic Certification Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track learners’ degrees, diplomas, or other certifications by creating Academic Certification records. ## Sample Uses for Academic Certification An Academic Certification identifies that a person has completed a course of study. Let's look at some uses for the Academic Certification object. - University—Define a degree or certificate along with its academic level and fields of study that your institution offers. - K-12—Define a diploma that your educational institution offers. ## Academic Certification Record Types Learn about the preconfigured records types that come with Education Data Architecture. - Degree—A certification related to the completion of a course of study. - Diploma—A certification related to the completion of a course of study, such as a high school diploma in the United States. - Certificate—A certification related to the completion of specific courses. ## Keep Up with Academic Certification Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118
  • Add the Academic Certification related list to the appropriate Account page layouts.

  • Add the following fields to the appropriate Education History page layouts.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Credits Earned

    • Status

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date

  • Add the Education History lookup field to the Program Enrollment object.

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
## Create an Academic Certification Record Track learners’ degrees, diplomas, or other certifications by creating Academic Certification records. 1. If the Contact record has an Academic Certification related list, click **New**. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Certifications**, and click **New**. 2. Select a record type and click **Next**. 3. Enter all relevant details. 4. Click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Academic Certification record. # Academic Certification Academic Certification represents an academic degree, diploma, or certificate. - **[Sample Uses for Academic Certification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Academic Certification identifies that a person has completed a course of study. Let's look at some uses for the Academic Certification object. - **[Academic Certification Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the preconfigured records types that come with K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Keep Up with Academic Certification Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create an Academic Certification Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track learners’ degrees, diplomas, or other certifications by creating Academic Certification records. ## Sample Uses for Academic Certification An Academic Certification identifies that a person has completed a course of study. Let's look at some uses for the Academic Certification object. - University—Define a degree or certificate along with its academic level and fields of study that your institution offers. - K-12—Define a diploma that your educational institution offers. ## Academic Certification Record Types Learn about the preconfigured records types that come with K-12 Architecture Kit. - Degree—A certification related to the completion of a course of study. - Diploma—A certification related to the completion of a course of study, such as a high school diploma in the United States. - Certificate—A certification related to the completion of specific courses. ## Keep Up with Academic Certification Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22
  • Add the Academic Certification related list to the appropriate Account page layouts.

  • Add the following fields to the appropriate Education History page layouts.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Credits Earned

    • Status

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date

  • Add the Education History lookup field to the Program Enrollment object.

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
## Create an Academic Certification Record Track learners’ degrees, diplomas, or other certifications by creating Academic Certification records. 1. If the Contact record has an Academic Certification related list, click **New**. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Certifications**, and click **New**. 2. Select a record type and click **Next**. 3. Enter all relevant details. 4. Click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Academic Certification record. # Academic Operations Discover how Education Cloud helps you manage your institution’s academic (or learning) offerings.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Academic Operations is your central location for creating and maintaining your learning-related objects and the relationships between them. Staff can: - Use Learning Wizard to create and schedule courses, programs, and customized academic offerings. - Manage prerequisites, corequisites, and recommendations for enrollment in a course or program. - Manage learning outcome items and learning foundation items, and associate them with learning achievements. - Use Learning Program Plan Builder to create, manage, and visualize program plans. The learning, course, and program entities that you set up in Academic Operations become the foundation for tools in the Recruitment & Admissions and Student Success apps. Curricula, schedule, and program data, for example, are the basis of your course catalog. And the plans that you create in Program Plan Builder flow to Intelligent Degree Planning, which informs the Learner Progress View. See Also: - [Academic Operations Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/academic-operations.html) - [Manage Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_academic_operations_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create courses and programs, define learning outcomes, build program plans, and manage academic schedules.") - [Model Your Data in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_institution_in_education_cloud_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution.") # Academic Operations Use the Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create courses and programs, define learning outcomes, build program plans, and manage academic schedules. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce admin. The Academic Operations app enables registrar staff to manage the academic (or learning) offerings of the institution. Using the app, staff can: - Use Learning Wizard to create and schedule courses, programs, and customized academic offerings. - Manage prerequisites, corequisites, and recommendations for enrollment in a course or program. - Manage learning outcome items and learning foundation items, and associate them with learning achievements. - Use Learning Program Plan Builder to create and manage program plans. To enable and set up Academic Operations, see [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). - **[Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules. - **[Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes. - **[Manage Courses, Programs, and Learning Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learning_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Learning Wizard or Business APIs in Education Cloud to manage your courses, programs, or other learning offerings. - **[Einstein Skills Generator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_einstein_skills_generator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use generative AI to find skills and associate them with your learning courses and learning programs with Einstein Skills Generator. - **[Learner Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Enroll Admitted Student action on the individual application record page in Education Cloud to enroll an admitted student into a learning program. Automate the enrollment process with Salesforce flows to enroll multiple students. - **[Course Catalog Creation with AI Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_headless_course_catalog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A guided session builds a standardized course catalog for your institution. When you describe your courses or provide a source document to a coding agent, the agent analyzes the catalog, checks data quality, and creates the course records tied to their offering college or department. This course catalog prepares your institution for scheduling, enrollment, and advising. - **[Course Search and Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_search_and_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide students with a simplified way to find and enroll in courses. Students search for courses and view details of course sections on a search results page. Students with the right permissions can add courses from the search results directly to a cart. They can review course availability and their own eligibility, and register for courses from the cart. - **[Enrollment Eligibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enrollment_eligibility_educhars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use educational characteristics to manage enrollment eligibility and communicate eligibility criteria to students during course registration. Registrars define and assign identity-based attributes to students that apply to specific time frames. The registration process evaluates a student's attributes against course requirements to determine their eligibility. - **[Course Waitlists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_waitlists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create waitlists to help students register for fully enrolled courses without constantly monitoring course availability. Add waitlists to popular courses. Configure and manage students’ enrollment priority and timing, and use prebuilt flows to send enrollment offers to students on a waitlist. - **[Holds and Blocks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_holds_and_blocks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Holds and Blocks enforce academic policies on the student body. Registrars can place holds on students who don’t meet specific criteria or requirements to block them from the administrative or academic processes. Students can manage and resolve holds in the Action Center to make sure that they comply with institution-specific policies. - **[Transfer Credit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and manage transfer equivalency relationships and the entire transfer credit process from a single place in Education Cloud that automatically matches and suggests credits. Registrars can use the guided process to review submitted documentation and to articulate transfer credit requests. Applicants request estimates for transferable credits directly in the application portal on the Experience Cloud site. - **[Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attendance turns a routine administrative task into a reliable early indicator of student engagement. It gathers signals from instructors, parents, devices, and systems, applies your institutional rules, and produces a single trusted outcome for every student. Staff and advisors act on that outcome and provide student support. - **[Faculty Access Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_faculty_access_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Faculty Access Management grants faculty access to the course and student data for the courses that they teach. It manages access through academic roles, instead of custom sharing rules. You define which academic roles can read or edit which records, and flows create the sharing from teaching assignments. Scheduled Data Processing Engine (DPE) jobs keep access accurate as course assignments change, so faculty see only the courses they're currently teaching. # Academic Score Calculations Calculate academic scores, such as term GPA, for students enrolled in an academic term by using configurable policy rules. Admins define the calculation logic once, and Education Cloud applies it to every enrollment in the term in a batch. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The academic score calculation process includes a context definition, an expression set, policy rules, and flows. The context definition defines the data that the rule reads, such as academic term enrollment, course offering participants, grades, and credits. The expression set holds the calculation logic. One policy rule wraps the expression set and context definition, while the other policy rule assigns that policy rule to an academic term. The flows run the rule-based process to calculate the GPA of the students enrolled in an academic term. ## Set Up Academic Term GPA Calculations Configure a context definition, policy rule, and flows to calculate the GPA scores of students enrolled in an academic term. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To set up academic term GPA calculations: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, make sure to turn on [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_advanced_academic_operations.htm&language=en_US). - Ensure that [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_advanced_academic_operations.htm&language=en_US) is enabled. 1. [Customize and activate the context definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_create_context_definitions.htm&language=en_US), EduTermGpaCalcCtxtDef. 2. [Create a policy rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_policy_rule_for_learning_requirements.htm&language=en_US) customized to your requirements with these details: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Usage Type | Term GPA Calculation | | Context Definition | (As created in the previous step) | Use the sample expression set template available with Education Cloud, Ready\_to\_Use\_TermGPACalculationES, to create a policy rule. 1. To validate the output, [simulate the rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.simulate_and_activate_the_expression_set.htm&language=en_US) with a sample JSON input using the advanced input mode. 2. To view the simulation results as an academic score report, select **Academic Score Report View** from the view dropdown. 3. Create an academic term policy rule record. For Policy Rule, select the policy rule created in the previous step. 4. [Customize and activate the flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US): - EDU Student Information: Calculate Academic Term GPA - EDU Student Information: Run Academic Term GPA Calculation Batch Job Flow templates must be cloned to create the corresponding flows. 5. [Provide create access to the standard user profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_configure_standard_profiles.htm&language=en_US) for the Academic Term GPA Calculation Event object. ## Run Academic Term GPA Calculations Initiate the rule-based process to calculate the GPA of the students enrolled in an academic term. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To run verification and assignment for academic term registration timelines: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, make sure to turn on [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_advanced_academic_operations.htm&language=en_US). 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Academic Terms**. 2. Select the academic term for which you want the scores calculated. 3. Click **Calculate Scores**. 4. If needed, [monitor the batch job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.task_monitor_batches.htm&language=en_US). 5. After the batch process completes, view the academic score report. 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Academic Term Enrollments**. 2. Select the academic term enrollment record. 3. Select the Academic Score Report tab and verify the results. 4. To publish the scores so students can view them in Learner Progress Summary on the learner portal, click **Publish**. 6. To view the log for a calculation run: 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Academic Term Enrollments**. 2. Select the academic term enrollment record. 3. Select the **Related** tab. 4. Under Academic Term Enrollment Policy Rule Log, select the log record. # Access Data from Different Sources and Segment Campaign Audiences in Education Donor and partner data can come from all kinds of sources and can be stored in multiple places. To access data from different sources in your Salesforce org, map objects from Fundraising to Data Cloud by using a data kit. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To map objects from Fundraising to Data Cloud:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Complete the Data Cloud Checklist and Considerations to [Get Started Using Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_product_considerations.htm&type=5). 2. Use Data Cloud Setup to configure Data Cloud features for your org. 3. Set up the Salesforce CRM connection between Data Cloud and Salesforce. 4. Install Data Kit for Salesforce. 5. Create and deploy a Salesforce CRM data stream. After you map objects to Data Cloud, you can use Data Cloud to segment the audience of your campaigns. # Access Data from Different Sources and Segment Campaign Audiences in Nonprofit Donor and partner data can come from all kinds of sources and can be stored in multiple places. To access data from different sources in your Salesforce org, map objects from Fundraising to Data Cloud by using a data kit. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To map objects from Fundraising to Data Cloud:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. Complete the Data Cloud Checklist and Considerations to [Get Started Using Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_product_considerations.htm&type=5). 2. Use Data Cloud Setup to configure Data Cloud features for your org. 3. Set up the Salesforce CRM connection between Data Cloud and Salesforce. 4. Install Data Kit for Salesforce. 5. Create and deploy a Salesforce CRM data stream. After you map objects to Data Cloud, you can use Data Cloud to segment the audience of your campaigns. # Account An Account represents either an organizational entity affiliated with a Contact or a container Account for a Contact. - **[Sample Uses for Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Account is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and record types. It can look quite different depending on how it's used. - **[Account Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which container Account record types come preconfigured. - **[Configure Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Account data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create Account Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand when to let Education Data Architecture create Account records automatically, and when and how to create Account records manually. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Account Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for how to maintain Account data for your educational institution. ## Sample Uses for Account Account is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and record types. It can look quite different depending on how it's used. - An _affiliated Account_ represents an organizational entity that a Contact is affiliated with, such as a department or an academic program that it administers, a sports team, or a business that partners with your institution. - A _container Account_ is either a _Household Account_ that contains a group of Contacts, or an _Administrative Account_ that contains just a single Contact. Here are some common ways to use affiliated Accounts. - University—Track academic departments, athletics programs, student-led campus organizations, technology transfer offices, and alumni associations. Track the degree programs that your undergraduate, graduate, or continuing education programs administer. - K-12—Within a school, track departments, programs, parent teacher associations, and organizational partners. Within a district, track your member schools, district departments, and agency partners. - Any educational institution—Track the entities that keep your institution thriving, from administrative departments to facilities and plant operations. ## Account Record Types Learn which container Account record types come preconfigured. - **Administrative—**An Account-level representation of a Contact (generally a student), in a 1-to-1 relationship. An Administrative Account contains one and only one Contact. - **Household Account—**A household that a student Contact belongs to. Household Accounts typically contain multiple Contacts besides the student. These affiliated Account record types come preconfigured. - **University Department—**A department that administers an academic program (such as the Sociology Department) or an administrative program (such as the Office of the Registrar). - **Academic Program—**In higher ed, a degree- or credential-granting program such as a B.S. in Biology or J.D. degree. In primary and secondary education, an academic, student support, or recreational program, such as an extended day program or an after school club. - **Business Organization—**An organization that partners with your institution, such as a vendor, internship sponsor, or organization in the private, nonprofit, and public sectors. - **Educational Institution—**An entity such as your entire institution or individual schools within it, such as a College of Letters and Science at a university, or Valley Elementary School within the Valley School District. - **Sports Organization—**A sports organization, like the Women’s Soccer Team or the Intramural Coed Hockey League. If your implementation requires other record types or page layouts, feel free to create them. For example, a university can create unique record types for Undergraduate Program and Graduate Program, or a page layout for a University Department Account. A K-12 school can create a record type for College Prep Program, or a layout for an Academic Department Account. ## Configure Account Set up Account data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to manage Account data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Account Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Account It's essential to understand how to manage Account data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm) - [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm) - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Account records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Account object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Account Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As with all objects, verify and customize the security settings, navigation, and layouts for Contact, as needed. Follow the general instructions in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm), keeping in mind that you're editing settings for a standard object rather than a custom object.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

  • Add the following fields to your Account page layouts, as needed.

    • Billing Address Inactive

    • Credentialing Email

  • Create a custom field for Credentialing Identifier and add it to your page layouts, as needed. See Model Certifications and Credentials.

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

1.103

Add the School Code field to your Account page layouts, if needed.
1.101

Add these Mailing County fields to your Account page layouts, as needed.

  • BillingCounty

  • Shipping County

1.74

Add the Time Block related list to your Account page layouts, if needed.
1.57 Create a separate page layout for the Academic Program Account record type. You can include the Program Plans related list on this without affecting other Account layouts.
## Create Account Records Understand when to let Education Data Architecture create Account records automatically, and when and how to create Account records manually. - **[Know When to Let Salesforce Create Container Accounts Automatically](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The best way to create Administrative or Household Account records—whichever your default account model specifies—is to let Education Data Architecture automatically create the Account record for you, when you save a new, independent Contact record. Doing so helps maintain the precise relationship between a container Account and its associated Contact by ensuring that: - **[Create a Container Account Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you need a container Account that's a different type than the type specified by your default account model, we recommend that you not let us create it automatically. Instead, create the Account record yourself, and then create its associated Contact record. - **[Create Affiliated Account Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create affiliated Account records to represent all of the departments, programs, and institutional entities that make up your campus. Typically, you create these multiple Account records when you start implementing Education Data Architecture. Later on, if while creating a Contact record you find that the person is affiliated with an entity that doesn't have an Account record yet, you can then create the Account on the spot. ### Know When to Let Salesforce Create Container Accounts Automatically The best way to create Administrative or Household Account records—whichever your default account model specifies—is to let Education Data Architecture automatically create the Account record for you, when you save a new, independent Contact record. Doing so helps maintain the precise relationship between a container Account and its associated Contact by ensuring that: - The correct type of container Account is created, consistent with your institution's default account model. - The container Account is named appropriately, consistent with your institution's account naming conventions. - The container Account is synced appropriately with its Contact, both upon creation and upon future updates to either the Contact or its Account. For details about the Account record being created with the Contact record, see [Create a Contact Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you’re integrating data from a Student Information System, course catalog, or other external system, learn about the automation that affects imported Account data and our [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm) . ### Create a Container Account Manually When you need a container Account that's a different type than the type specified by your default account model, we recommend that you not let us create it automatically. Instead, create the Account record yourself, and then create its associated Contact record. 1. Go to the Accounts tab. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Make sure that the container Account record doesn't already exist. 2. Click **New** 3. Select a record type and click **Next**. 4. Enter relevant details. 5. Click **Save**. ### Create Affiliated Account Records Create affiliated Account records to represent all of the departments, programs, and institutional entities that make up your campus. Typically, you create these multiple Account records when you start implementing Education Data Architecture. Later on, if while creating a Contact record you find that the person is affiliated with an entity that doesn't have an Account record yet, you can then create the Account on the spot. 1. Click the Accounts tab and click **New**. 2. Select a record type matching the type of Account entity you're creating, and click **Next**. 3. Enter relevant details. Fill in the Parent Account field if you're creating an Account that belongs under another Account, as part of an Account hierarchy. For example, an Account representing the school is often the parent of a department, or a specific department is often the parent of an Academic Program. 4. Click **Save**. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Account Data Review considerations for how to maintain Account data for your educational institution. Account and Contact data are tightly coupled. Updating data for a Contact that has a container Account, such as recording a name change or change of household, can trigger automatic changes to the name of the Contact's container Account. The specifics depend on your org's configuration. For details, see [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). # Account An Account represents either an organizational entity affiliated with a Contact or a container Account for a Contact. - **[Sample Uses for Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Account is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and record types. It can look quite different depending on how it's used. - **[Account Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which container Account record types come preconfigured. - **[Configure Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Account data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create Account Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand when to let K-12 Architecture Kit create Account records automatically, and when and how to create Account records manually. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Account Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for how to maintain Account data for your educational institution. ## Sample Uses for Account Account is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and record types. It can look quite different depending on how it's used. - An _affiliated Account_ represents an organizational entity that a Contact is affiliated with, such as a department or an academic program that it administers, a sports team, or a business that partners with your institution. - A _container Account_ is either a _Household Account_ that contains a group of Contacts, or an _Administrative Account_ that contains just a single Contact. Here are some common ways to use affiliated Accounts. - University—Track academic departments, athletics programs, student-led campus organizations, technology transfer offices, and alumni associations. Track the degree programs that your undergraduate, graduate, or continuing education programs administer. - K-12—Within a school, track departments, programs, parent teacher associations, and organizational partners. Within a district, track your member schools, district departments, and agency partners. - Any educational institution—Track the entities that keep your institution thriving, from administrative departments to facilities and plant operations. ## Account Record Types Learn which container Account record types come preconfigured. - **Administrative—**An Account-level representation of a Contact (generally a student), in a 1-to-1 relationship. An Administrative Account contains one and only one Contact. - **Household Account—**A household that a student Contact belongs to. Household Accounts typically contain multiple Contacts besides the student. These affiliated Account record types come preconfigured. - **Academic Department—**An academic department such as the Mathematics Department. - **Academic Program—**In higher ed, a degree- or credential-granting program such as a B.S. in Biology or J.D. degree. In primary and secondary education, an academic, student support, or recreational program, such as an extended day program or an after school club. - **Business Organization—**An organization that partners with your institution, such as a vendor, internship sponsor, or organization in the private, nonprofit, and public sectors. - **Educational Institution—**An entity such as your entire institution or individual schools within it, such as a College of Letters and Science at a university, or Valley Elementary School within the Valley School District. - **Sports Organization—**A sports organization, like the Women’s Soccer Team or the Intramural Coed Hockey League. If your implementation requires other record types or page layouts, feel free to create them. For example, a university can create unique record types for Undergraduate Program and Graduate Program, or a page layout for a University Department Account. A K-12 school can create a record type for College Prep Program, or a layout for an Academic Department Account. ## Configure Account Set up Account data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to manage Account data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Account Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Account It's essential to understand how to manage Account data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm) - [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm) - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Account records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Account object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Account Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As with all objects, verify and customize the security settings, navigation, and layouts for Contact, as needed. Follow the general instructions in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm), keeping in mind that you're editing settings for a standard object rather than a custom object.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

  • Add the following fields to your Account page layouts, as needed.

    • Billing Address Inactive

    • Credentialing Email

  • Create a custom field for Credentialing Identifier and add it to your page layouts, as needed. See Model Certifications and Credentials.

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
1.18 Add the Grade Enrollments related list to the Account's K12 Kit Educational Institution Layout.

1.17

Add the School Code field to your Account page layouts, if needed.
1.15

Add these Mailing County fields to your Account page layouts, as needed.

  • BillingCounty

  • Shipping County

1.0

Add the Time Block related list to your Account page layouts, if needed.
## Create Account Records Understand when to let K-12 Architecture Kit create Account records automatically, and when and how to create Account records manually. - **[Know When to Let Salesforce Create Container Accounts Automatically](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The best way to create Administrative or Household Account records—whichever your default account model specifies—is to let K-12 Architecture Kit automatically create the Account record for you, when you save a new, independent Contact record. Doing so helps maintain the precise relationship between a container Account and its associated Contact by ensuring that: - **[Create a Container Account Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you need a container Account that's a different type than the type specified by your default account model, we recommend that you not let us create it automatically. Instead, create the Account record yourself, and then create its associated Contact record. - **[Create Affiliated Account Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create affiliated Account records to represent all of the departments, programs, and institutional entities that make up your campus. Typically, you create these multiple Account records when you start implementing K-12 Architecture Kit. Later on, if while creating a Contact record you find that the person is affiliated with an entity that doesn't have an Account record yet, you can then create the Account on the spot. ### Know When to Let Salesforce Create Container Accounts Automatically The best way to create Administrative or Household Account records—whichever your default account model specifies—is to let K-12 Architecture Kit automatically create the Account record for you, when you save a new, independent Contact record. Doing so helps maintain the precise relationship between a container Account and its associated Contact by ensuring that: - The correct type of container Account is created, consistent with your institution's default account model. - The container Account is named appropriately, consistent with your institution's account naming conventions. - The container Account is synced appropriately with its Contact, both upon creation and upon future updates to either the Contact or its Account. For details about the Account record being created with the Contact record, see [Create a Contact Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you’re integrating data from a Student Information System, course catalog, or other external system, learn about the automation that affects imported Account data and our [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm) . ### Create a Container Account Manually When you need a container Account that's a different type than the type specified by your default account model, we recommend that you not let us create it automatically. Instead, create the Account record yourself, and then create its associated Contact record. 1. Go to the Accounts tab. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Make sure that the container Account record doesn't already exist. 2. Click **New** 3. Select a record type and click **Next**. 4. Enter relevant details. 5. Click **Save**. ### Create Affiliated Account Records Create affiliated Account records to represent all of the departments, programs, and institutional entities that make up your campus. Typically, you create these multiple Account records when you start implementing K-12 Architecture Kit. Later on, if while creating a Contact record you find that the person is affiliated with an entity that doesn't have an Account record yet, you can then create the Account on the spot. 1. Click the Accounts tab and click **New**. 2. Select a record type matching the type of Account entity you're creating, and click **Next**. 3. Enter relevant details. Fill in the Parent Account field if you're creating an Account that belongs under another Account, as part of an Account hierarchy. For example, an Account representing the school is often the parent of a department, or a specific department is often the parent of an Academic Program. 4. Click **Save**. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Account Data Review considerations for how to maintain Account data for your educational institution. Account and Contact data are tightly coupled. Updating data for a Contact that has a container Account, such as recording a name change or change of household, can trigger automatic changes to the name of the Contact's container Account. The specifics depend on your org's configuration. For details, see [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). # Accounting Field Mappings Create accounting field mappings to bring your data to custom fields on transaction journal records.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Transaction journal records include default fields populated from eligible source objects. If your accounting system requires data beyond the default fields, create custom fields and accounting field mappings in accounting sets to copy your data to those custom fields. For example, your GAU Allocation object has custom fields that represent different donor categories in your organization. To reflect this breakdown on the generated cash flows, create matching custom fields on the Transaction Journal object. - **[Mapping Behavior](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The mapping behavior controls whether Salesforce creates transaction journal records when the source data changes. - **[Compatible Data Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Mapped fields must be of compatible data types. ## Mapping Behavior The mapping behavior controls whether Salesforce creates transaction journal records when the source data changes. - Point-in-time: Copies the source field value to the transaction journal record target field when Accounting Subledger creates the record. Salesforce ignores any subsequent updates to the source field, and doesn't create more transaction journal records. - Current value: Copies the source field value to the transaction journal record target field when Accounting Subledger creates the record. Salesforce evaluates subsequent source value updates, and creates reversals and other records accordingly. Don't add automation that updates transaction journal record values. If you do, Accounting Subledger sometimes creates unnecessary reversals and transaction journal records. Instead, create a second field outside of any accounting field mapping to store the transaction journal record value, and add automation to that second field. Use the source value on the transaction journal record only for mapping and comparison. Some objects such as the Fund object don't support the current value behavior. ## Compatible Data Types Mapped fields must be of compatible data types. | Source Field Data Type | Custom Field Data Type | | --- | --- | | Checkbox | Checkbox | | Currency | Currency, number | | Date | Date | | Date/Time | Date/Time | | Email | Email, text, text area | | Number | Currency, number | | Percent | Number, percent | | Phone | Phone, text, text area | | Picklist | Picklist, picklist (multi-select), text, text area | | Picklist (combo box) | Picklist, string, text area | | Picklist (multi-select) | Picklist (multi-select), text, text area | | Reference | Email, phone, reference, text, text area | | Text area | Text, text area | See [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5) and [Create Accounting Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_create_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Generate financial data beyond the default transaction journal record fields with accounting field mappings."). # Accounting Set Example Configurations Review recommended accounting set mappings for common use cases. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Configure an Accounting Set for Recruiting and Admissions Fees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_recipe_accounting_set_ra_fees.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For educational institutions, a key part of their mission is serving learners during their application journey and matriculation into a particular school. From on-campus to online learning—and especially within higher education—these institutions interact with prospective and enrolled students across the recruiting and admissions cycle. - **[Configure an Accounting Set for Revenue Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_recipe_accounting_set_revenue_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For organizations with complex product catalogs and pricing structures, activities like generating quotes, billing customers, and collecting payments are critical. Regardless of their industry, these organizations manage many different types of records in Salesforce as they book, approve, and receive large volumes of transactions. - **[Configure an Accounting Set for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_configure_an_accounting_set_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For organizations raising funds through gifts that are designated for different purposes, it's important to track incoming gifts and their designations to make sure they accurately reconcile with finance systems. For gifts that are expected to arrive in the future that have legal contracts, revenue is also expected to be booked in advance. There's a requirement for accurate creation, adjustment, and exporting of ledger entries. # Accounting Sets Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Object Models for Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting sets enable you to specify which objects and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. It's a flexible approach that lets you map your financial data model to a logical data model, supporting from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees. - **[Map Your Source Data to Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_map_your_source_data_to_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choose which source record fields to use for transaction journal records generation by mapping them to accounting set fields. - **[Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you map source fields to accounting set destination fields, configure how Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records for each accounting set. - **[Create Accounting Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_create_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Generate financial data beyond the default transaction journal record fields with accounting field mappings. - **[Manage Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_manage_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're done configuring accounting sets, activate them. After you do so, you can no longer change the object model but you can deactivate it in order to update its other settings. - **[Considerations for Deleting or Merging Primary Object Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_delete_merge_primary_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deleting or merging records used as primary objects in accounting sets doesn't trigger reversals. - **[Accounting Set Example Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_acct_set_example_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review recommended accounting set mappings for common use cases. # Accounting States and Data Generation Accounting Subledger considers the accounting state of your source data when generating transaction journal records.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Committed Payment is expected for the revenue or expense, and you're waiting on one or more remaining payments. Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records for scheduled, paid, or written-off payments. Uncommitted For revenues and expenses in an uncommitted state, Accounting Subledger only generates transaction journal records for paid or written-off payments. # Accounting Subledger Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting department. This consolidation helps you understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated. - **[Accounting Subledger Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare consistent gift revenue and payment data for fundraising and finance services. - **[Accounting Subledger Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before configuring and running Accounting Subledger, complete the required setup tasks. - **[Transaction Journal Records in Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Transaction Journal object is the core of Accounting Subledger. It stores your financial transactions in a format optimized for export to your accounting system. - **[Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records. - **[Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger jobs generate transaction journal records. Configure and run these jobs manually or on a defined schedule. - **[Accounting Subledger Data Adjustments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjustments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you generate accounting data, adjust it as needed by updating the source records or fund allocations. - **[Accounting Subledger Data Export](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_export.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When the transaction journal records are ready, bring the data to your accounting system. - **[Accounting Subledger Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Troubleshoot the limits, limitations, and setup considerations for running Accounting Subledger. # Accounting Subledger and Translation Salesforce provides translations for Accounting Subledger in multiple languages.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
- **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Accounting Subledger. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Accounting Subledger product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Accounting Subledger."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Accounting Subledger.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Accounting Subledger. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Accounting Subledger objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Accounting Subledger See [Salesforce Language Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.faq_getstart_language_support.htm&type=5).
Language UI (Admin) Documentation
Chinese (Simplified) √ √
Chinese (Traditional) √ √
Danish √ √
Dutch √ √
English √ √
Finnish √ √
French √ √
German √ √
Italian √ √
Japanese √ √
Korean √ √
Norwegian √ √
Portuguese (Brazil) √ √
Russian √ √
Spanish √ √

Spanish (Mexico)

Defaults to Spanish for customer-defined translations

 √ √
Swedish √ √
Thai √  
### Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Accounting Subledger - [Chinese (Simplified)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_zh_CN.pdf) - [Chinese (Traditional)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_zh_TW.pdf) - [Danish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_da_DK.pdf) - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_nl_NL.pdf) - [Finnish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_fi_FI.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_fr_FR.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_de_DE.pdf) - [Italian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_it_IT.pdf) - [Japanese](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_ja_JP.pdf) - [Korean](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_ko_KR.pdf) - [Norwegian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_no_NO.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_pt_BR.pdf) - [Russian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_ru_RU.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_es_ES.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_es_MX.pdf) - [Swedish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/ASL/Accounting_Subledger_sv_SE.pdf) ### Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_pt_br.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_es_es.pdf) ### Marketing Cloud for Nonprofits Legacy - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_nl_NL.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_en_GB.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_fr_FR.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_de_DE.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_pt_BR.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Accounting Subledger product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Accounting Subledger: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language (for example, Catalan): 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Accounting Subledger Basics Prepare consistent gift revenue and payment data for fundraising and finance services. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Welcome to Accounting Subledger: From CRM to Finance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_welcome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give accounting teams neatly packaged financial CRM data for record keeping. - **[Get Started with Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare Salesforce records for your Finance department with Accounting Subledger in Education Cloud and Nonprofit Cloud. Accounting Subledger captures transactions from CRM and automates transformations to reconcile this data in an accounting-ready format. Explore a trial org and then learn about what's included, what setup we recommend, and how to get ready for your implementation. - **[Data Flows in Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_data_flows_in_accounting_subledger.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger consolidates data between your Salesforce CRM financial data and your accounting system. - **[Plan Your Accounting Subledger Implementation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_plan_implementation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the general required steps for a successful implementation. - **[Developer Resources for Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_developer_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Developers in your company or institution can use developer resources to learn about the data model and automate processes. - **[Accounting Subledger Terminology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_terminology.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting concepts are sometimes unfamiliar to Salesforce users, and vice versa. Let's review some essential terms used in Accounting Subledger. - **[Accounting Subledger and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides translations for Accounting Subledger in multiple languages. - **[Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_legacy_doc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Accounting Subledger, a platform solution. # Accounting Subledger Data Adjustments After you generate accounting data, adjust it as needed by updating the source records or fund allocations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Adjustment Types for Payment and Expense Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger assists you with adjustments by separating source records from transaction journal records. If the source record is updated, we generate new transaction journal records accordingly. - **[Considerations for Updating Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_considerations_update_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Adjust fund allocations according to the accounting sets' object model. # Accounting Subledger Data Export When the transaction journal records are ready, bring the data to your accounting system. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Ways to Transfer Your Accounting Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_ways_transfer_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger creates accounting data that you can transfer to your accounting software with minimal effort via reports or integration. - **[Export Accounting Data With the Report Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_export_report_builder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After the transaction journal records are ready, create a report with this data, and export it as a comma-separated values (CSV) file. Then, import that file into your accounting system. # Accounting Subledger Job Inputs and Impacts Choose which source records to consider in Accounting Subledger jobs using eligibility criteria and filters. When the job runs, monitor its execution and identify errors.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
When eligible source records change substantially from an accounting standpoint, the Accounting Subledger job generates transaction journal records accordingly to match the updated value on the source record. For example, Salesforce considers these changes when the job runs. - A change from unpaid to paid - A change to the amount of a finalized payment - A change to the fund allocation - A change to the payment method, if you turn on the setting Specify your own schedule for running the Accounting Subledger job in Flow Builder, or run it manually. ## Filter Source Data to Process Use these criteria to select the source data to process in Accounting Subledger jobs. Accounting Record Start Date If you specify an Accounting Record Start Date, Salesforce only generates transaction journal records for source data whose primary object's created date is on or after that date. Criteria Settings If you configure filtering criteria on accounting sets, Accounting Subledger jobs apply the criteria on the primary object and process the matching records. Accounting Data Record Type Filter If you specify an Accounting Data Record Type Filter, Salesforce only generates transaction journal records for source data whose record type matches that filter. If you don't configure criteria settings or record type filters, Accounting Subledger processes all records created on or after the accounting record start date. For example, if the accounting set's primary object is Opportunity, Accounting Subledger evaluates the Created Date of all opportunities. See [Map Your Source Data to Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_map_your_source_data_to_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Choose which source record fields to use for transaction journal records generation by mapping them to accounting set fields."). ## Potential Data Usage Impact When the Job First Runs When you run Accounting Subledger for the first time, we consider all eligible source records. Accounting Subledger generates accounting data for all eligible source records. When you run the Accounting Subledger job for the first time, Salesforce creates transaction journal records for source records that don't have them. This record creation potentially increases data use significantly, such as if you import or create source records before that first run. See [Source Records Eligibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_source_records_eligibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger applies eligibility criteria to select source records to process."). ## Errors Logged from Accounting Subledger Jobs If the Accounting Subledger job finds a discrepancy that it can't correct on its own, it logs failed records in Batch Management. See [Monitor Your Data Processing Engine Definition Runs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.reference_data_processing_engine_monitor.htm). Sometimes the Data Processing Engine reports a successful job run status even though it didn't generate all of the expected accounting data. In this case, refer to the email that you receive for details about the run. # Accounting Subledger Jobs Accounting Subledger jobs generate transaction journal records. Configure and run these jobs manually or on a defined schedule. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Accounting Subledger Job Inputs and Impacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_inputs_impacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choose which source records to consider in Accounting Subledger jobs using eligibility criteria and filters. When the job runs, monitor its execution and identify errors. - **[Enable Transaction Journal Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_enable_transaction_journal_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure accounting sets and complete all of the other requirements, turn on transaction journal creation. - **[Schedule Accounting Subledger Jobs With Flow Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_schedule_jobs_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify when to run the Accounting Subledger job to generate transaction journal records. - **[Considerations for Scheduling Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.considerations_for_scheduling_accounting_subledger_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Evaluate your transactions and data needs to determine when to run Accounting jobs. - **[Run Accounting Subledger Jobs Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_run_jobs_manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Generate transaction journal records on-demand by running the Subledger Job flow. # Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Accounting Subledger, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://drive.google.com/file/d/1aJTPjQ1EhJ1rcdqYqikjuc5dkBljkoW9/view?usp=drive_link). If you’re not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. # Accounting Subledger Limitations Troubleshoot the limits, limitations, and setup considerations for running Accounting Subledger.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note This guide provides information on how to use the Accounting Subledger product that's built on the core Salesforce platform and that was introduced in March 2023. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce admin. ## Multiple Currencies Accounting Subledger converts all data to the default currency of the integration user. Make sure that the default currency of the integration user is the same as the default currency of the writeback user. If you have multiple Salesforce orgs, make sure that the default currency is the same across all orgs. The writeback user saves the accounting set. ## Accounting Sets Character Limits Make sure that your custom field that maps to Check/Reference Number on an accounting set doesn’t exceed 40 characters. Entries with more than 40 characters can create errors in Subledger jobs. ## Accounting Sets Processing Limits When you create and process accounting sets, make sure that Accounting Subledger jobs don't run for more than 30 hours per month. To increase your monthly limit, contact your account executive. See [Data Processing Engine Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.reference_data_processing_engine_limits.htm), [Data Pipelines Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.sdp_limits.htm&type=5), and [Data Cloud Limits and Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_limits_and_guidelines.htm&type=5). To review your current usage, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Pipelines, and then select **Getting Started**. ## Accounting Sets Criteria Settings You can't select these fields in an accounting set's criteria settings to filter the records that you want to process: - CloneSourceId - IsDeleted - LastReferenceDate - LastViewedDate - Any compound field such as an address or a geolocation Moreover, you can't select fields with these data types: - Address - Base 64 - Complex value - Encrypted string - Location - Long type string - Time - URL ## Activation of Accounting Sets in Sandbox Orgs If you can't activate accounting sets in your sandbox org, you must create journal type records. Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger permission set can run this anonymous apex to create journal type records if they aren't already present. ``` List journalTypes = new List(); journalTypes.add( new JournalType( Name = 'Allocation', Description = 'Allocation journal type', ProcessType = 'AccountingSubledger' ) ); journalTypes.add( new JournalType( Name = 'Payment', Description = 'Payment journal type', ProcessType = 'AccountingSubledger' ) ); journalTypes.add( new JournalType( Name = 'Transaction', Description = 'Transaction journal type', ProcessType = 'AccountingSubledger' ) ); insert journalTypes; ``` ## Data Processing Engine Job Performance Accounting Subledger uses Data Processing Engine (DPE) and CRM Analytics. This layered technology determines how memory is used for batch jobs of different sizes. Users with low record volumes in their batches can experience long-running DPE jobs. If you encounter long run times, contact Salesforce support to adjust your memory settings. # Accounting Subledger Release Notes Spring ’23 brings a fresh start for Accounting Subledger, as it’s now built on the Salesforce platform, and designed to work with any Salesforce product. The next-generation Accounting Subledger draws the power of Salesforce to consolidate data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system. This consolidation helps you manage your accounting department and understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated, with unparalleled performance. - **[Set Up Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_set_up_accounting_sets_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records. Specify which objects—standard or custom—and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. Accounting sets support from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees. - **[Run Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_run_asl_jobs_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure and run Accounting Subledger jobs to generate transaction journal records. Choose which source records to process based on their ​​record date or record type. When the job runs, monitor its execution and identify errors in the Data Manager app or on the Monitor Workflow Services page in Setup. Specify when to run the Accounting Subledger job by using Flow Builder, or run it manually with the Subledger Job flow. - **[Generate Debits and Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_generate_debits_credits_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Accounting Subledger to format transaction journal records for single or double entry accounting, with separate fields for debit amounts and credit amounts. - **[Generate Revenue and Expenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_generate_rev_exp_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choose what type of accounting information—revenue or expense—to generate for tracking incoming and outgoing funds. - **[Assign General Ledger Codes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_assign_gl_codes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Include general ledger (GL) codes in debit and credit transaction journal records to identify specific fund accounts. - **[View Transaction Journal Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_view_tj_records_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After the Accounting Subledger job runs, view the generated financial transactions on the Transaction Journal object in a format optimized for export to your accounting system. Transaction journal records include multiple fields to help you understand the generated data related to your financial transactions. Accounting Subledger creates transaction journal records automatically for new or changed CRM financial records. - **[New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_new_changed_objects_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are the new data objects to use instead of the existing data objects in the managed package. # Accounting Subledger Release Notes Bring all your financial data to Accounting Subledger, including the data stored in custom fields. Choose what to process to generate relevant transaction journal records in a format that's ready to use for your Accounting teams. - **[Set Up Accounting Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_afm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Copy data from your source CRM objects' fields to custom fields on the Transaction Journal object, and choose whether to retain or update the copied value when your source data changes. - **[Filter Records for Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_job_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control which source records to process by setting up filtering criteria on accounting sets. Accounting Subledger jobs apply the criteria on the primary object and evaluate the matching records. - **[New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_rn_new_changed_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new and updated Accounting Subledger objects. # Accounting Subledger Setup Before configuring and running Accounting Subledger, complete the required setup tasks. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Add Accounting Subledger Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_add_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up profiles and users to represent your users. - **[Set Up Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_set_up_data_pipelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete the requirements to enable Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger. - **[Assign Accounting Subledger Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign permissions sets to your users to grant them access to features beyond what's included in their basic user licenses. - **[Keep Up with Accounting Subledger and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about product updates and release schedule. - **[Skip Reversal Logic to Reduce Processing Time](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_skip_reversal_logic_to_reduce_processing_time.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reduce Accounting Subledger's processing time by bypassing reversal logic and current value field mapping. - **[Set Up Data 360 to Run Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_set_up_data360_to_run_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Switch between Data 360 and CRM Analytics as the runtime for Accounting Subledger Data Processing Engine jobs. Set the org-wide runtime without reconfiguring entire job definitions. Turn Data 360 on and off to align accounting operations with your data strategy. # Accounting Subledger Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Accounting Subledger and Accounting Subledger for Industries (version 1.40 & version 1.7.0.1) in Summer '22. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_asl_accounting_subledger_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Accounting Subledger and Accounting Subledger for Industries (version 1.40 & version 1.7.0.1) in Summer '22. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Accounting Subledger and Accounting Subledger for Industries (version 1.40 & version 1.7.0.1) in Summer '22. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000001bgafqau): One record in a batch job with a Transaction Date outside an open Accounting Period causes the whole batch to fail. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002ckytqaw): Accounting Scheduled job fails when there are more than 200,000 Ledger Entry records. # Accounting Subledger Terminology Accounting concepts are sometimes unfamiliar to Salesforce users, and vice versa. Let's review some essential terms used in Accounting Subledger.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Accrual Accounting An accounting method that records income and expenses as soon as they're incurred or promised in good faith without waiting until they're received or paid. Payments are recorded as revenue when they're marked as paid or when the source record is marked as committed. Contrasts with cash accounting. Adjustment A debit or credit amount representing a change to a previous record of revenue or expense. Allocation (or Designation or Fund) A fund account that tracks money set aside for a specific use. Allocations let you split funds between one or more fund accounts when you record those funds as revenue or expenses. Cash Accounting An accounting method that records income and expenses only when the income is received or the expenses are paid. Payments are recorded as revenue when they're marked as paid. Payments that are promised but not yet paid aren't recorded. Contrasts with accrual accounting. Debits and Credits The side of the general ledger that reflects transaction-based activities. Assets add in the debit column and subtract in the credit column. Revenue adds in the credit column and subtracts in the debit column. The total amount of debits and credits must be equal in all ledgers. Double Entry Journal A ledger of accounting activity that includes the date, account, amount, and whether each transaction is a debit or credit. The left-hand side of the ledger is for debits, and the right-hand side is for credits. Fund Account A specific financial account in an accounting system typically identified with a unique code and a unique fund name recognizable to end users entering data in CRM. General Ledger (or GL) An organization's main record of financial activity that tracks the source and destination of all incoming, outgoing, and internal movements of funds. GL Code The general ledger label for indicating the source or destination of a transaction, such as General Fund, Cash, or Pledges Receivable. Payment In Accounting Subledger, a cash flow movement recognized as paid, that is with the corresponding checkbox selected on the source record. Refund A payment with a negative amount. Revenue Incoming funds, such as payments or donations promised or received. Revenue or Expense State: Committed Revenue or expense that's been promised and expected to be received. It can be partially paid. Revenue or Expense State: Received Revenue or expense that's been received. Reversal A negative transaction journal record that Accounting Subledger creates to apply an adjustment. A reversal has the same value as the transaction journal record that it's reversing, but is negative if originally positive, and positive if originally negative. For example, if you reverse a US$1000 payment that has multiple allocations, Accounting Subledger creates a group of transaction journal records whose total amount equals -$1000. Source Record An object record representing a transaction that you created or imported in Salesforce. After mapping it to accounting sets and running Accounting Subledger, we create transaction journal records for eligible transactions. Transaction Journal An Accounting Subledger object similar to journal entries. Transaction journal records are indelible snapshots of incoming and outgoing revenue and expenses, intended for accounting reports and systems. # Acknowledge Donations by Email Nonprofit Success Pack lets you send an acknowledgment email to a donor from a specific Opportunity record, or send multiple email acknowledgments simultaneously from the Opportunities tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Donation Acknowledgments](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_vjzQKC1vt4). When donations come through and you mark the Opportunities as Closed/Won, it's cause for celebration! After you're done throwing confetti, it's time to thank your donors. Nonprofit Success Pack lets you quickly and easily email your donors a custom thank you message, tracks who has been acknowledged, and the date the acknowledgment was sent. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Administrators: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see [Configure Acknowledge Donations by Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Salesforce to send donation acknowledgment emails automatically when you enter gifts in NPSP.") for more information. - **[Email an Acknowledgment for a Single Opportunity Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations_by_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack makes it easy for you to email an acknowledgment for a single donation (Opportunity record). - **[Email Acknowledgments for Multiple Opportunity Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations_by_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack also supports sending acknowledgment emails for multiple Opportunity records at once. ## Email an Acknowledgment for a Single Opportunity Record Nonprofit Success Pack makes it easy for you to email an acknowledgment for a single donation (Opportunity record). 1. Navigate to the Opportunity detail page. 2. Verify that the Primary Contact field lists the Contact you want to thank. 3. Click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **Email Acknowledgment**. ![Email Acknowledgment menu item](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/acknowledge_donations_menu.jpg) When you select Email Acknowledgment, NPSP takes the following actions: - Sets the Acknowledgment Status field to **Email Acknowledgment Now.** - Triggers the email workflow rule that emails the Primary Contact on Opportunities whose Acknowledgment Status is **Email Acknowledgment Now**. - If the email is successfully sent, sets the Acknowledgment Status to **Acknowledged** and the Acknowledgment Date to the current date. - If the email send fails, sets the Acknowledgment Status to **Email Acknowledgment Not Sent.** - Displays the Email Acknowledgment Results page:![Email Acknowledgments results page showing success message for one acknowledgment sent](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/email_ack_results_single_email.jpg) ## Email Acknowledgments for Multiple Opportunity Records Nonprofit Success Pack also supports sending acknowledgment emails for multiple Opportunity records at once. 1. Click the Opportunities tab. 2. Select the **To Be Acknowledged** list view. NPSP displays all Opportunities whose Acknowledgment Status is **To Be Acknowledged**. 3. From the list view, select the Opportunities you'd like to acknowledge. You can select all by selecting the checkbox on the column header. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're not able to select any Opportunities, add a list view filter: Opportunity Record Type = Donation. See [Edit List View Filters in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customviews_edit_filters_lex.htm&type=5) for more information. 4. Click **Email Acknowledgments**. ![Email Acknowledgments button on the header of To Be Acknowledged list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ack_donations_emailbutton.jpg) When you click Email Acknowledgments, NPSP takes the following actions: - Sets the Acknowledgment Status Field to **Email Acknowledgment Now** for the selected Opportunities. - Triggers the workflow rule that emails the Primary Contact on Opportunities whose Acknowledgment Status is **Email Acknowledgment Now**. - Sets the Acknowledgment Status to **Acknowledged** and the Acknowledgment Date to the current date for successful acknowledgments. - Sets the Acknowledgment Status to **Email Acknowledgment Not Sent** for any failed acknowledgments. - Displays the Email Acknowledgments Results page: ![Email Acknowledgments Results screen showing 1 sent email and one failed email](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/email_ack_results_screen.jpg) # Action Center for Learners Use the Action Center Lightning web component on your Experience site to help learners keep track of their care plans, action plans, and tasks.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
In Action Center, learners can: - View all the care plans, action plans, and tasks associated with their contact, case, and program enrollment records - View the overall progress and update the status of their tasks - View the action plan templates that are applicable to them, and use them to create self-assigned action plans ## Add Action Center to Your Learner Portal Use Experience Builder to add and configure the Action Center component to your learner portal. If you use the Education Portal template to create your learner portal, Action Center is available on the Home tab by default.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up your learner portal with the Learner Progress component:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an Experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Create or select a site. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). 3. Create a new page for Action Center: 1. Click the Page Properties icon, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, and then choose a preferred layout for the page. 3. Enter a name for the page. For example, Action Center. 4. Enter the necessary details, and then click **Create**. 4. Click **Components**, and then drag the Action Center component to your preferred location on the new page. 5. To duplicate or delete the component, or to assign users, use the Action Center dropdown menu. 6. Select the pre-configured tabs you want to show on Action Center. For example, Care Plans, Action Plans, and Tasks. 7. Apply additional customizations as necessary, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). - **[Action Plans for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_action_plans_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Action plans help learners to realize their goals by progressing through smaller, more manageable steps or tasks. Use Education Cloud to enable learners to create action plans for themselves. # Action Plans for Learners Action plans help learners to realize their goals by progressing through smaller, more manageable steps or tasks. Use Education Cloud to enable learners to create action plans for themselves.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use the action plan templates in Education Cloud to efficiently create action plans that contain common or frequently used tasks. As an advisor, you can create action plan templates that are shown on the Action Center component of the learner portal. In Action Center, learners can use the templates available to them to create action plans for themselves. If permitted, learners can also add tasks to an action plan that’s created from an action plan template. On the Action Plans tab on a learner’s case record page, an advisor can: - View the action plans assigned to the learner - Assign new action plans to the learner The target object of an action plan template can be contact, case, or program. The action plan template assignment object relates the template to a specific case record type or program record. Therefore, a learner can view the applicable action plan templates in Action Center only if: - The action plan template is assigned to the learner's contact - The learner has an open case of the specified case record type - The learner is enrolled in the specified support program You can also add an action plan template to a care plan template to easily assign and manage the tasks for a care plan. See [Create Tasks for Care Plans with Action Plan Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_care_plans_create_tasks.htm&language=en_US). Education Cloud includes these flows that automate the processes on action plans: | RESOURCE API NAME | TYPE | DESCRIPTION | | --- | --- | --- | | UpdateActnPlnStsOfTsk | Flow | Updates the action plan status of a task. | | UpdateActnPlnStsOfDci | Flow | Updates the action plan status of a document checklist item. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If the case participant associated with a care plan is changed, the assignee target field for the tasks associated with the care plan isn’t automatically updated. SEE ALSO: - [Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_action_plans.htm) - [Set Up Your Org for Student Success Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org_for_student_success_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure your org to allow learners to view information and interact with student success components on your learner portal.") - [Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Success Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_learner_portal_with_student_success_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Experience Builder to add student success components to your learner portal, and then configure them.") - **[Create an Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_action_plans_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an action plan template to enable the learners to conveniently create action plans. - **[Create an Action Plan Template Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_action_plans_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Associate your action plan template with a specific support program or case record type. - **[Add Tasks to an Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_action_plans_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the relevant tasks to your action plan template to enable the learners to conveniently create action plans. ## Create an Action Plan Template Create an action plan template to enable the learners to conveniently create action plans.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create an action plan template: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the action plan template. 4. To enable learners to add tasks to the action plan, select **Let users add items to action plans**. 5. From Action Plan Type, select **Industries**. 6. From Target Object, select **Case** or **Program Enrollment**, as required. 7. To show the template on the learner portal, select **Show on Learner Portal**. 8. Provide other relevant details and save your changes. Next, create an action plan template assignment to associate your action plan template with a specific support program or case record type. ## Create an Action Plan Template Assignment Associate your action plan template with a specific support program or case record type.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create an action plan template assignment: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Template Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Program** or **Case** as the associated object for your action plan template. 4. For Program, specify the program record. For Case, under Associated Record Type, select **Case**, and then select the case record type. 5. Select your action plan template version. 6. Save your changes. ## Add Tasks to an Action Plan Template Add the relevant tasks to your action plan template to enable the learners to conveniently create action plans.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add a task to an action plan template: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Select the template, and click **New Task**. 3. Enter the subject, priority, and days. 4. To make this task a mandatory task, select **Required**. 5. Assign the task to a specific user, or choose **Assignee Target** to automatically assign the task to a user associated with the template’s target case or program. 6. Provide other relevant details and save your changes. 7. Similarly, add more tasks. 8. To make the template available to the learners, click **Publish Template**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t edit or delete an action plan template after it’s published. However, the template can be deactivated. # Action Plans Permission Sets for Admins and Grantmakers Learn about the permission sets necessary to access Action Plans. To use Action Plans, give admins and grantmakers access to them through these permission sets. See [Use Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the available permission sets in Grants Management and create permission sets for due diligence and budget management.") to learn more about permission sets.
Permission Set Access Assign To
ActionPlans Gives access to use Action Plans

Salesforce admins

Grantmakers who create Action Plans
Document Checklist Gives access to use Document Checklist Items

Salesforce admins

Grantmakers who create Document Checklist Items on an Action Plan
Verification - Manage Gives Create, Read, and Edit access on Verification Checks

Salesforce admins

Grantmakers who create and edit Verification Checks
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Users can't apply Action Plan Templates created by another user when the org-wide sharing is set to Private. In Sharing Settings, update the default permissions for internal users to Public Read Only or create a sharing rule. We also recommend creating a due diligence permission set and assigning it to users who will create Action Plan Templates, Action Plans, Tasks, Document Checklist Items, and Verification Checks. Learn more in [Use Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the available permission sets in Grants Management and create permission sets for due diligence and budget management."). # Activate Your Site You already activated your site when you created it. But it never hurts to double check. 1. From Setup, enter Sites in the Quick Find box, then select **Sites**. 2. Look for the link under the Action column. If it says Activate, click it. If it says Deactivate, your site is already activated and ready to go. ![Site with Deactivate link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_label_link.png) # Add a Button for Comparing Learning Programs Create and add a button that advisors or other staff can use to launch the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow from records such as cases. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add a button to a page layout:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
1. From the management settings for the object you want to modify, select **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 2. Click **New Button or Link**. 3. In Label, enter Compare Program Plans. Press Tab to automatically fill the Name field. 4. From Display Type, select **Detail Page Button**. 5. From Behavior, select **Display in new window**. 6. From Content Source, select **URL**. 7. In the text box, enter the URL for your copy of the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow. Make sure to include the input variable for the object and a return URL. For example, /flow/?CaseId={!Case.Id}&retUrl=/{!Case.Id} 8. Save your changes. 9. From the object management settings for Case, select **Page Layouts**. 10. Click the page layout where you want to add the button. 11. In Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions, click **Override the predefined actions**. 12. Click **Buttons**, and then drag your button to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 13. Arrange the buttons as necessary, and then save your changes. # Add a Designation to a Gift Commitment in Education Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift commitment to gift designations of the donor's choice. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To edit gift commitments:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Open a gift commitment. 3. Click **Manage Gift Default Designations**. The Gift Default Designations section lists the gift default designations from the associated opportunity or campaign. If there are no gift default designations, then the org-wide default designation is listed with 100% allocation. 4. To add designations, click **Add Row**. Or modify an existing entry, such as change its allocation ratio. The sum of percentage values for all gift default designations must be equal to or less than 100. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To allocate or modify gift default designations for campaigns and opportunities, add the Gift Default Designations related list to the Campaign and Opportunity objects. # Add a Designation to a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift commitment to gift designations of the donor's choice. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To edit gift commitments:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Open a gift commitment. 3. Click **Manage Gift Default Designations**. The Gift Default Designations section lists the gift default designations from the associated opportunity or campaign. If there are no gift default designations, then the org-wide default designation is listed with 100% allocation. 4. To add designations, click **Add Row**. Or modify an existing entry, such as change its allocation ratio. The sum of percentage values for all gift default designations must be equal to or less than 100. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To allocate or modify gift default designations for campaigns and opportunities, add the Gift Default Designations related list to the Campaign and Opportunity objects. # Add a Designation to a Gift Transaction in Education Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift transaction to gift designations of the donor's choice. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To add a designation to a gift transaction:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Open a gift transaction. 3. Click **Manage Gift Transaction Designations**. 4. To add designations, click **Add Row**. Or modify an existing entry, such as change its allocation ratio. The sum of percentage values for all designations must be equal to or less than 100. You can add up to 50 designations to each gift transaction. 5. Save your changes. View the gift transaction designations in the related list. If the allocations total less than 100%, the remaining gift amount is automatically allocated to the org-wide default designation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure accurate record rollups, don't update the currency of a gift transaction after you associate it with a gift transaction designation. # Add a Designation to a Gift Transaction in Nonprofit Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift transaction to gift designations of the donor's choice. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To add a designation to a gift transaction:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Open a gift transaction. 3. Click **Manage Gift Transaction Designations**. 4. To add designations, click **Add Row**. Or modify an existing entry, such as change its allocation ratio. The sum of percentage values for all designations must be equal to or less than 100. You can add up to 50 designations to each gift transaction. 5. Save your changes. View the gift transaction designations in the related list. If the allocations total less than 100%, the remaining gift amount is automatically allocated to the org-wide default designation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure accurate record rollups, don't update the currency of a gift transaction after you associate it with a gift transaction designation. # Add a Gift Commitment in Education Create a record for a one-time pledge, a multipayment gift, or an open-ended recurring gift, including the schedule, amount, and gift designations of the donor’s choice. If someone influenced the donor to give, you can log gift soft credits directly on the commitment page. You can connect the gift to a campaign or opportunity and allocate the gift for a particular designation. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you create, update, or delete gift commitments, make sure that you have Create access to the Contact Profile object. You need this access because when you add or modify a recurring gift, Fundraising updates the RecurringDonorType on the donor's Contact Profile. If there isn't a Contact Profile for the donor, Fundraising creates one. You can also add recurring gift commitments in Gift Entry. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the donor details and a name for the commitment. 4. Select a schedule type. - If this is a recurring gift commitment in which the donor pays a set amount on a schedule, select **Recurring**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also create recurring commitment schedules from the Gift Entry Grid. - If this is a nonrecurring gift commitment that the donor pays in one or more installments, select **Custom**. 5. If necessary, enter the campaign and fulfillment details. 6. Save your changes. SEE ALSO - [Create a Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_a_gift_entry_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are two methods of performing gift entry. The method that comes built in Fundraising is the Gift Entry window. In this window, you can quickly and easily create a gift with a gift transaction or a gift commitment. The gift can also include soft credits or multiple designations. The second method is to use the Gift Entry Grid. This method enables the lightning-fast entry of gifts in a table by keying across the cells to enter the gift information. You can enter all aspects of the gift in the grid, including the recurring gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits.") - [Track Gift and Donor Trends](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app.") - [Gift Commitment Object Reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_giftcommitment.htm) # Add a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit Create a record for a one-time pledge, a multipayment gift, or an open-ended recurring gift, including the schedule, amount, and gift designations of the donor’s choice. If someone influenced the donor to give, you can log gift soft credits directly on the commitment page. You can connect the gift to a campaign or opportunity and allocate the gift for a particular designation. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
Before you create, update, or delete gift commitments, make sure that you have Create access to the Contact Profile object. You need this access because when you add or modify a recurring gift, Fundraising updates the RecurringDonorType on the donor's Contact Profile. If there isn't a Contact Profile for the donor, Fundraising creates one. You can also add recurring gift commitments in Gift Entry. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the donor details and a name for the commitment. 4. Select a schedule type. - If this is a recurring gift commitment in which the donor pays a set amount on a schedule, select **Recurring**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also create recurring commitment schedules from the Gift Entry Grid. - If this is a nonrecurring gift commitment that the donor pays in one or more installments, select **Custom**. 5. If necessary, enter the campaign and fulfillment details. 6. Save your changes. SEE ALSO - [Create a Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_a_gift_entry_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are two methods of performing gift entry. The method that comes built in Fundraising is the Gift Entry window. In this window, you can quickly and easily create a gift with a gift transaction or a gift commitment. The gift can also include soft credits or multiple designations. The second method is to use the Gift Entry Grid. This method enables the lightning-fast entry of gifts in a table by keying across the cells to enter the gift information. You can enter all aspects of the gift in the grid, including the recurring gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits.") - [Track Gift and Donor Trends](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app.") - [Gift Commitment Object Reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_giftcommitment.htm) # Add a Household Account Add a Household Account automatically by creating a new Contact. NPSP handles Household Account creation for you automatically, so there's no need for you to create Household Accounts yourself. When you create a new Contact, NPSP automatically creates a new Household Account for that Contact, **as long as you leave the Account Name field blank**. See [Add or Remove a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_remove_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to add or remove constituent records from a household account record.") for more details on creating Contacts and Household Accounts. # Add a Reviewer You can quickly add a reviewer directly from the Application or Application Review record pages. Or you can use the Application list view to select multiple Applications and assign multiple reviewers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Typically, only certain admissions staff members can add reviewers. If you can't complete these steps, you don't have the correct permissions. - **[Manage Reviews for a Single Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_add_reviewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a reviewer from the Application or Application Review record page. - **[Assign Reviewers to Multiple Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_add_reviewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assigning reviewers to multiple applications is similar to adding reviewers to a single application. However, you can’t manage existing assignments; you can only add reviewers. If Admissions Connect finds duplicate user reviews (because you’re trying to add a reviewer to an application that they’re already assigned to), it lets you know of the duplicate and ignores the duplicate when you save. That way, the assignments for new reviewers are saved successfully. ## Manage Reviews for a Single Application Add a reviewer from the Application or Application Review record page. 1. From the app, open an Application or Application Review record. 2. In the Application Reviews tab, click **Add Reviewers** or **Manage**. ![Reviewer Management component showing the Add Reviewers button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_reviewer_add.png) 3. In the Manage Application Reviews window, search for Users or Queues to add as reviewers. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To see search results, type at least three characters. Keep these things in mind. - If an assigned Application Review hasn't started yet, it can be removed. - If you remove assignments, you must save your changes to delete those Application Review records. - If you accidentally remove an assignment for a User, click **Cancel** instead of re-adding them. - Queues can be assigned to review the same Application multiple times, but you can't assign Queues more times than there are members. In addition, Queues must have at least one member, otherwise you see an error when assigning an Application Review. - Users can only be assigned to review an Application once. - To search a queue, it must support Application Reviews. If you want to assign a specific queue but don't see it listed, reach out to your Admissions Connect administrator. - Search results include only up to five reviewers. Similar names prevent the system from displaying some users. 4. Optionally, select or deselect **Notify new reviewers** to send Users you just assigned a Salesforce notification. Notifications aren't sent to Queues. 5. Save your changes. ## Assign Reviewers to Multiple Applications Assigning reviewers to multiple applications is similar to adding reviewers to a single application. However, you can’t manage existing assignments; you can only add reviewers. If Admissions Connect finds duplicate user reviews (because you’re trying to add a reviewer to an application that they’re already assigned to), it lets you know of the duplicate and ignores the duplicate when you save. That way, the assignments for new reviewers are saved successfully. 1. From the app, in the navigation menu, select **Applications**. 2. Select any list view, such as **All**. 3. Select the checkboxes next to the Applications you want to assign reviewers to. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Use Cmd+Shift (on MacOS) or Ctrl+Shift (on Windows) to select multiple records at a time. 4. Click **Assign Reviewers**. ![Sample list view showing the Assign Reviewers button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_reviewer_add_mass.png) 5. In the Assign Application Reviewers window, search for users or queues to add as reviewers. When you're done with your assignments, click **Next**. 6. Review your assignment details and totals, then save your changes. Admissions Connect checks for and provides a list of errors, duplicates, and queues without enough members. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The error information is informational only. You can still assign the reviews that don't have issues. 7. Click **Go Back to List** to exit. Any issues, including those previously found, are listed on the page again. # Add a Single-Payment Donation Enter one-off donations for individuals or organizations into NPSP. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip See [Manage Donations in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn fundamentals of gift entry and donor management in the Nonprofit Success Pack.") if you're just starting out and need more info about how Opportunities and donations work in Salesforce. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This article describes the process of manually recording a donation in NPSP, which is typically done when you receive a check or cash donation. This article doesn't cover payment processing. For information on an end-to-end online fundraising solution which includes payment processing, see the [Elevate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_welcome_to_elevate.htm) product documentation. - **[Individual Donations versus Organizational Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_single-payment_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack lets you enter donations from individuals, as well as donations from companies or organizations. - **[Add a Single-Payment Donation for an Individual](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_single-payment_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start from a contact record to create a simple donation record for an individual gift. The New Donation button helps you create a new opportunity. - **[Add a Single-Payment Donation for an Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_single-payment_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start from an account record to track a simple gift made by a company, foundation, or other organization. The New Donation button helps you create an opportunity. ## Individual Donations versus Organizational Donations Nonprofit Success Pack lets you enter donations from individuals, as well as donations from companies or organizations. You enter donations from individuals on the **Contact** record, and donations from organizations on the **Account** record. ## Add a Single-Payment Donation for an Individual Start from a contact record to create a simple donation record for an individual gift. The New Donation button helps you create a new opportunity. 1. Search for the Contact associated with the donation. 2. Click **New Donation**. This will create an Opportunity with the Donation record type. This is typically the best record type for one-time, received gifts. If you don't see this button on your record, see [Add or Edit a New Opportunity Button on Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended."). ![Contact record with the New Donation button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/single-payment_donation_newdon.png) 3. Fill in the donation fields. - **Close Date**: The date you expect to receive the funds. The default is today's date. - **Stage**: In the sales world, opportunities are “closed,” so we're also using that lingo for our donation. The default "Closed Won" stage has internal meaning to Salesforce overall because it triggers rollups. You can change to different default Stage if you prefer. - **Amount**: This should be the Amount that your donor will be credited for the gift. - **Primary Campaign Source**: Donations are typically attached to Campaigns. Select an existing Active Campaign or select **\+ New Campaigns** to create a new one. - **Opportunity Name** (not shown): If you have NPSP Opportunity Naming enabled, when you save the record it will be updated to the value as you've defined there. ![New Donation modal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/single-payment_donation_create.png) 4. **Save** the record. Salesforce creates a Payment record for the new donation, and that Payment appears in the Payments related list of the Opportunity record you just created. You can see the Donation (Opportunity) you just created if you look at the Opportunity related list on the Contact record. 5. Edit this Opportunity to fill in additional fields. ![Opportunities related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/single-payment_donation_edit.png) ## Add a Single-Payment Donation for an Organization Start from an account record to track a simple gift made by a company, foundation, or other organization. The New Donation button helps you create an opportunity. 1. Search for or create the Organization Account record associated with the donation. 2. On the Account record, click **New Donation**. ![Account record with the New Donation button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/single-payment_org_newdon.png) 3. Fill in the donation fields: - **Close Date**: The date you expect to receive the funds. The default is today's date. - **Stage**: Defaults to Closed Won. - **Amount**: This should be the Amount that the donor will be credited for the gift. - **Primary Campaign Source**: Donations are typically attached to Campaigns. Select an existing Active Campaign or select **\+ New Campaigns** to create a new one. Your administrator may have created other required fields for your organization, so you may need to fill those in too. ![New Donation modal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/single-payment_donation_newopp.png) 4. Click **Save**. Salesforce creates a Payment record for the new donation, and that Payment appears in the Payments related list of the Opportunity record you just created. **A bit about Household donations . . .** The Nonprofit Success Pack also lets you enter donations from a Household (i.e. from the Household Account record), in the same way that you would enter a donation from an organization. When you do so, the Primary Contact for the Household receives the hard credit for the donation, with the rest of the members in the household receiving soft credits. You get the same result when you enter Household-wide donations as individual donations from the Household's Primary Contact—most organizations enter gifts this way. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note NPSP automatically sets the Primary Contact to the first Contact associated with the Household. If you want to change it, use **Manage Household** on the Household Account record. # Add Accounting Subledger to Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes Introducing Accounting Subledger for Nonprofit Cloud! Consolidate data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated, with unparalleled performance. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license is enabled, with Data Pipelines turned on and at least one active user with the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Accounting Subledger (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger.htm) # Add Accounting Subledger Users Set up profiles and users to represent your users.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create users: | Manage Internal Users | Accounting Subledger users usually fall into one of these categories, although you can categorize your users differently. Salesforce Admins Require edit access to create and update data for tasks such as managing accounting sets or configuring Accounting Subledger. Accounting Managers Require read-only access to review data such as the transaction journal records that admins generate. After you determine the types of users that you need, create them in Setup with the Salesforce or Salesforce Platform user license. See Also: - [Add a Single User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_new_users.htm&type=5) # Add Ad Hoc Documents or Tasks to an Application Add one-off documents and tasks to an assigned Action Plan to show the items in the Application Checklist and on the Application Review page. Sometimes you might need to manually associate PDFs or other documents to applications. Same goes for tasks. Maybe an applicant emails your institution with a last-minute letter of recommendation. Or maybe you need to log a task related to the admissions process. Add those items to assigned Action Plans instead of directly to the Application record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you can’t complete these steps, ask your Admissions Connect administrator for help. 1. From the app, open an application record. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the list of Action Plans, click the Action Plan name that you want to add the document or task to. For example, Fees. If you don't see the plan you're looking for, click **View All**. ![Action Plans related list with a callout on a link to an individual Action Plan called Fees](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/action_plan_add_dci_task_link.png) 4. In the Action Plan record, click **New** on the Task or Document Checklist Item list. Remember that Tasks collect and display data from an application, while Document Checklist Items are an application's supporting documents. ![Action Plan record page with a callout on the New buttons for Tasks and Document Checklist Items](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/action_plan_add_dci_task_new_button.png) 5. For new Tasks, fill out these fields, then save your changes.  Subject Enter a name for the task. This name appears in the Application Checklist and on the Application Review page, so check with your admissions team to see if there's a naming convention to follow.  Days When the task is assigned, the task is overdue after this many days have passed. Comments Enter a brief description for users about this task. Priority Select a priority.  Required Select this checkbox if this task is required to complete the application. Name Leave blank. This field is populated with the applicant's name when the record is saved. Assigned To If the Task is for someone on the admissions team, leave this field assigned to the Action Plan Creator or specify a specific User. If the Task shows field-level data that you want applicants to see or edit in a portal, assign it to the applicant. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Automation can also be used to set this field, so check with your admissions team before updating it. 6. For new Document Checklist Items, fill out these fields, then save your changes. Name Enter a name for the document. This name appears in the Application Checklist and on the Application Review page, so check with your admissions team to see if there's a naming convention to follow. Instructions Provide any information about the document or instructions for the applicant.  Required Select this checkbox if the document is required for the application.   Document Type Select a type of document. Your admissions team may not use this field; ask your Admissions Connect administrator. File Pertains To Enter the name of the applicant. 7. To upload a document: 1. Click the name of the Document Checklist Item you just created. 2. Click **Upload Files**. You can upload any file type, except [Asset Files](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_files_asset_files.htm). Just keep in mind that unsupported file types don't show in the preview. For details about the supported file types, see [Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review some considerations before starting to work with documents in Admissions Connect."). 8. If you also approved the document or want to mark the task as done, update these fields. - For Tasks, click **Mark Complete** or update the Status field to Completed. - For Document Checklist Items, click **Accept** or update the Status field to Accepted. 9. Save your changes. On the Application record page, refresh the Application Checklist to see the items you just added. They also display in the Application Review page. # Add an Active Program Engagement Stage Set new or existing Stage values for Program Engagements as active for enhanced filtering in Nonprofit Cloud Case Management. ## Add an Active Program Engagement Stage Setting stages as active allows you to filter to see only active Program Engagements. Set an existing Stage value as active or create a custom value and set the value as active. 1. To create a value, from the object management settings for Program Engagements, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Create a value in the Stage picklist field. Learn more in [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 4. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a label for the value. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 7. For Bucket, select **Active**. 8. For Value, paste the API Name of the new picklist value. 9. Save your work. # Add an Active Program Engagement Stage Set new or existing Stage values for Program Engagements as active for enhanced filtering in Product Management Module. ## Add an Active Program Engagement Stage Setting stages as active allows you to filter to see only active Program Engagements. Set an existing Stage value as active or create a custom value and set the value as active. 1. To create a value, from the object management settings for Program Engagements, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Create a value in the Stage picklist field. Learn more in [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 4. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a label for the value. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 7. For Bucket, select **Active**. 8. For Value, paste the API Name of the new picklist value. 9. Save your work. # Add an Active Service Status When you add Status values for Services, set the values as active for enhanced filtering. ## Add an Active Service Status Setting statuses as active allows you to filter to see only active Services. Set an existing Status as active or create a custom value and set the value as active. 1. To create a value, from the object management settings for Services, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Create a value in the Status picklist field. Learn more in [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 4. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a label for the value. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 7. For Bucket, select **Service Status: Active**. 8. For Value, paste the API Name of the new picklist value. 9. Save your work. # Add an Active Service Status When you add Status values for Services, set the values as active for enhanced filtering in Product Management Module. ## Add an Active Service Status Setting statuses as active allows you to filter to see only active Services. Set an existing Status as active or create a custom value and set the value as active. 1. To create a value, from the object management settings for Services, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Create a value in the Status picklist field. Learn more in [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 4. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a label for the value. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 7. For Bucket, select **Service Status: Active**. 8. For Value, paste the API Name of the new picklist value. 9. Save your work. # Add and Manage Organization Accounts Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. Learn how to add and manage Organization Accounts. - **[Organization Account Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. These entities might be foundations that fund your work, other nonprofits that you partner with, corporations that sponsor your work, or companies that employ your donors and constituents. Organization Accounts can help you better track the companies and foundations that you and your constituents interact with. - **[Create an Organization Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record to track a foundation, company, or other organization. - **[Modify an Organization Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change details on an organization account record. - **[Relate a Contact to an Organization Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP uses Affiliations to relate Contacts to Organization Accounts. ## Organization Account Overview Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. These entities might be foundations that fund your work, other nonprofits that you partner with, corporations that sponsor your work, or companies that employ your donors and constituents. Organization Accounts can help you better track the companies and foundations that you and your constituents interact with. NPSP allows you to create and manage Organization Accounts, as well as the [Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Affiliations in NPSP to track constituent relationships with organizations, including board memberships, employment, and foundation relationships.") that your contacts have with those organizations. ## Create an Organization Account Create a record to track a foundation, company, or other organization. 1. Click the Accounts tab in the navigation bar. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the Account Name and other details. 4. Click **Save**. ## Modify an Organization Account Change details on an organization account record. 1. Navigate to the Organization Account record you would like to update. 2. Click **Edit** at the top right hand side of the screen. 3. Change the Organization as needed and click **Save** when you're finished. ## Relate a Contact to an Organization Account NPSP uses Affiliations to relate Contacts to Organization Accounts. In the [Household Account model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend."), Contacts are related directly to Household Accounts, not Organization Accounts. NPSP uses Affiliations to relate Contacts to Organization Accounts. Affiliations are great because they allow you to track a Contact's current and former Affiliations, so you can see your constituents' involvement in multiple organizations over time (as they move on to new jobs or join boards at different organizations, for example). In the Affiliations related list on a Contact record, you can see all the Organizations with which that Contact was or is involved. Learn more about how to [Create an Affiliation with an Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Affiliations in NPSP to track constituent relationships with organizations, including board memberships, employment, and foundation relationships."). # Add Appointment Users to Your Education Cloud Experience Site Grant access to learners and staff members to the appointment feature on your Education Cloud Experience Site.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add users to an Education Cloud Experience site: | Education Cloud Full Access | Before you add users to your Education Cloud Experience Site, make sure that you complete these prerequisites: 1. Create Education Cloud users. 2. Create a case record for each user. 3. Create a profile to grant access to the Experience site. To add appointment users to your Experience Cloud site: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to the site to which you want to add users. 3. Click **Administration**, and then **Members**. 4. Add the profile that you created to grant access to the appointment Experience site, and then save your changes. 5. In the left panel, click **Settings**, **Activate**, and then **OK** in the confirmation dialog. # Add Client Program Engagements Use Program Engagements to track the relationship between your client and their programs. Program Engagements track your client through application, enrollment, active service period, and program completion. For more information, see [Create Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_program_engagements.htm). 1. Click the **Program Engagements** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter any value in the **Program Engagement Name**. When you save, the Program Engagement Name is automatically populated using the default naming convention Client Name - Start Date - Program Name unless you select **Auto-Name Override**. 4. Select a **Stage**. 5. Select the **Client**. 6. Select the **Program** to enroll the client in. 7. Select the client's **Role** in the program. 8. Enter any additional client information. 9. Click **Save**. # Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field. For example, you might want to track Personal Email on the Preferred Email field, or Alternate Phone on the Preferred Email field. In those instances, first create a custom email or phone field. Then add the custom field's label as an option to the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone picklist. Other times, you might want to use an existing but not preconfigured field as a picklist value for Preferred Email or Preferred Phone (for example, Assistant Phone). In this instance, just add the existing field label as a picklist option. ## See Also: [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5) # Add Custom Fields on a Learning Course or Learning Program Create custom fields to store unique data for your courses and programs in Education Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add a custom field on a learning course or learning program: Education Cloud Full Access
1. [Add a custom field on the Learning Course or Learning Program object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&language=en_US). 2. On the Learning Wizard, populate the field under Custom Course Details or Custom Program Details. You can view the custom fields related to a course or program on its summary tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Custom fields on the Learning object aren't supported on the Learning Wizard. See Also: - [Considerations for Creating Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.adding_fields_considerations.htm&language=en_US) # Add Custom Fields on Education Cloud Objects Ensure that the required custom fields are available on the case participant and care plan objects in Education Cloud. If they aren't available, add the missing fields manually. 1. From the object management settings for case participant, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Click **New**. 3. Under Data Type, select **Text**, and then click **Next**. 4. Enter SuccessPlan Legacy ID as the field label. 5. Enter 255 as the length. 6. In Field Name, enter SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id, and then click **Next**. 7. Ensure that System Administrator and Analytics Cloud Integration User profiles are enabled for field visibility. 8. Click **Next**, and then save your changes. 9. Similarly, add the missing field for care plan. | Object | Data Type | Field Label | Length | Field Name | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Care Plan | Text | SuccessPlan Legacy ID | 255 | SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id | # Add Custom Fields on Education Cloud Objects Ensure that the required custom fields are available on the case participant, care plan, and service appointment objects in Education Cloud. If they aren't available, add the missing fields manually. 1. From the object management settings for case participant, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Click **New**. 3. Under Data Type, select **Text**, and then click **Next**. 4. Enter SuccessPlan Legacy ID as the field label. 5. Enter 255 as the length. 6. In Field Name, enter SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id, and then click **Next**. 7. Ensure that System Administrator and Analytics Cloud Integration User profiles are enabled for field visibility. 8. Click **Next**, and then save your changes. 9. Similarly, add the missing field for service appointment. | Object | Data Type | Field Label | Length | Field Name | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Service Appointment | Text | Service Resource | 255 | FSLDemoTools\_Service\_Resource | 10. If you’re migrating data from Student Success Hub, similarly, add the missing field for care plan. | Object | Data Type | Field Label | Length | Field Name | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Care Plan | Text | SuccessPlan Legacy ID | 255 | SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id | # Add Custom Fields to the Recurring Donation Entry Form NPSP provides an entry form for Recurring Donations. Add your custom Recurring Donation fields to the entry form. NPSP overrides the standard New and Edit buttons for Recurring Donations with a custom entry form. The custom entry form helps users enter Recurring Donations correctly. For example, the available fields on the entry form change based on whether the Recurring Type is Open or Fixed. When you add custom fields to the Recurring Donations page layout, they're visible on record detail pages but not editable in the entry form. If you want users to edit your custom fields, you must add them to the entry form. Let's say that your fundraising team wants to record notes about Recurring Donations as they enter or edit them. To fulfill the request, you create a text field entitled Stewardship Notes and add it to the entry form. To add a custom field to the Recurring Donation entry form: 1. In **Setup**, go to **Object Manager** | **Recurring Donation**. 2. Click **Field Sets**. 3. Click **Recurring Donations Entry Form Custom Fields**. 4. Click and drag a custom field from the list of available fields to the section labeled **In The Field Set**. In our example, we place **Stewardship Notes** in the field set. 5. Click **Save**. Your custom field appears in the **Custom Fields** section of the Recurring Donations entry form. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can only add your own custom fields to the entry form, not fields included in NPSP. # Add Donor Briefs in Education To generate your donor brief, upload customized donor brief templates and add them to your template library. Select a library template to generate a brief formatted to its specifications. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To add donor brief templates to a template library:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Docgen Designer
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Design Document Template**. 2. Click **Create Template**. 3. Enter these details in the Template Details section. 1. Enter a name for your template without any spaces between the words. For example, DonorBrief2024. 2. For Template Type, select the type of template you’re creating. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The template type is usually Microsoft Word, which is the default value. 3. In Token Mapping, retain the default entry of JSON. 4. In Token Mapping Methods, select **Omni Data Transformation**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Context Service is also available but requires you to turn on context definitions. 4. In the Document Preview section, click **Upload Files** and select a customized template file for your org. 5. Click **Done** after the file upload is complete. 6. Save your changes. 7. To make this template available for use, click **Activate**. 8. From the App Launcher, find and select **Files**. 9. Open Libraries and select **Docgen Document Template Library**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Docgen Document Template Library on the Libraries tab, add the Salesforce CRM Content User to your user profile and save. 10. Click **Manage Members**. 11. Under Add Members, select **Public Groups** and give them Viewer access. You can also add yourself as a single person (as opposed to only being part of a public group) with Library Administrator access. # Add Donor Briefs in Nonprofit To generate your donor brief, upload customized donor brief templates and add them to your template library. Select a library template to generate a brief formatted to its specifications. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To add donor brief templates to a template library:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group

AND

Docgen Designer
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Design Document Template**. 2. Click **Create Template**. 3. Enter these details in the Template Details section. 1. Enter a name for your template without any spaces between the words. For example, DonorBrief2024. 2. For Template Type, select the type of template you’re creating. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The template type is usually Microsoft Word, which is the default value. 3. In Token Mapping, retain the default entry of JSON. 4. In Token Mapping Methods, select **Omni Data Transformation**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Context Service is also available but requires you to turn on context definitions. 4. In the Document Preview section, click **Upload Files** and select a customized template file for your org. 5. Click **Done** after the file upload is complete. 6. Save your changes. 7. To make this template available for use, click **Activate**. 8. From the App Launcher, find and select **Files**. 9. Open Libraries and select **Docgen Document Template Library**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Docgen Document Template Library on the Libraries tab, add the Salesforce CRM Content User to your user profile and save. 10. Click **Manage Members**. 11. Under Add Members, select **Public Groups** and give them Viewer access. You can also add yourself as a single person (as opposed to only being part of a public group) with Library Administrator access. # Add Einstein Mentoring Summaries to the Mentoring Comparison Screen Flow To use Einstein Mentoring Summaries, configure fields in the Display Compare and Assign Mentor screen element in the Mentoring: Match Mentor and Mentee screen flow.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
See [Configure the Mentor Comparison Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_the_mentor_comparison_screen_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Clone the Mentor Comparison screen flow, and then identify the fields on the participants' mentoring profiles that you want to use to select and compare potential mentors."). # Add Experience Cloud Components to Your Donor Portal If you have an Experience Cloud site, you can add components built for the Nonprofit Success Pack right to your pages. New to Experience Cloud? Check out this [documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_overview.htm&type=5) and this [trail](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/communities) for information and guidance. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You must have an Experience Cloud license to use these components. ## Set Up Permissions for Donor Portal Components Give your donor portal users access to the Donor Portal components by setting them up with the Partner license and necessary permissions. To grant the permissions, edit or create a profile, adjust a couple things in your Experience Cloud site, and then edit or create a Sharing Set. Let’s go through it step by step. After installing the NPSP package, customize an existing profile or create a new one for your donor portal users. 1. In Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of an existing donor portal profile to edit it. Alternatively, click **New Profile**, choose a profile to clone, and save. 3. Click **Apex Class Access**, then click **Edit**, enable these Apex classes, and save: - npsp.DonationHistoryController - npsp.DonationHistorySelector - npsp.DonationHistoryService - npsp.PS\_GatewayManagement - npsp.RD2\_ETableController - npsp.RD2\_ElevateInformation\_CTRL - npsp.RD2\_EntryFormController - npsp.RD2\_QueryService - npsp.UTIL\_AuraEnabledCommon 4. In the profile, switch to **Object Settings**, and assign Read access to the following objects and fields: | Objects | Fields | | --- | --- | | Account | Primary Contact | | Campaign | N/A | | Contacts | Email, Total Gifts, Total Gifts Last Year, Total Gifts This Year | | Opportunities | Amount, Primary Contact | | Payments | Paid, Payment Method | | Recurring Donations | ACH Last 4, Card Expiration Month, Card Expiration Year, Card Last 4, Number of Paid Installments, Last Donation Date, Next Donation Date, Elevate Recurring Id | 5. Assign Read and Edit access to the following object and fields: | Object | Field | | --- | --- | | Recurring Donations | Account, Amount, Campaign, Status Reason, Contact, Date Established, Day of Month, Effective Date, Installment Frequency, Installment Period, Number of Planned Installments, Payment Method, Recurring Type, Status | Next, adjust your Experience Cloud site settings. 1. In Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to your site name. 3. Click **Administration**. 4. Click **Members**. 5. In the Select Profiles section of the Members tab, select the profile you use for donor portal users. 6. Save your work. Last, edit an existing or create a new sharing set. 1. In Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, click **Edit** next to an existing sharing set or **New**. 3. If you create a new sharing set, name it. For example, name it something like Donor Portal Sharing Set. 4. Under Select Profiles, select the profile you use for donor portal users. 5. Under Select Objects, select the Opportunity object. 1. To add the Donor History and Giving Summary components, select the Opportunity object. 2. To add the Recurring Donation object, select Recurring Donation. 6. Under Configure Access, add the following settings to your Sharing Set: 1. Select **npsp\_\_Primary\_contact\_\_c** as the Target Opportunity. 2. Opportunity object: 1. Select **Contact** as the User. 2. Select **Primary\_contact\_c** as the Target Opportunity. 3. Select **Read Only** as the access level. 4. Save your work. 3. Recurring Donations object: 1. Select Contact as the User. 2. Select npe3\_\_Contact\_\_c as the Target Recurring Donation. 3. Select Read/Write as the access level. 4. Save your work. And you’re done! Nice job. To check your work, log in as a donor portal user and view the components you added. ## Donation History Component The Donation History component gives your donors one place to view details about when and how much they’ve donated, saving them the effort of having to dig through emails for receipts. ![Donation History component showing the individual donations for a year including the date, amount, and payment method.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/donation_history_cmpnt.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Only hard credits are included. ## Giving Summary Component The Giving Summary component lets donors see how much they’ve donated over time. The component includes three totals: lifetime donations, this year’s donations, and last year’s donations. ![Giving Summary component showing the total donation amounts by lifetime, this year, and previous year.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/giving_summary_cmpnt.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Only hard credits are included. ## Recurring Donation Component Allow donors to view and update their Recurring Donations. Donors can change the amount or frequency, stop their Recurring Donations, and if the donation was initiated through Elevate, update their payment method. If you're using Elevate, customize the component table headers to show all Recurring Donations or limit it to only show Recurring Donations connected or not connected to Elevate. ![Recurring Donation component showing the options to update a Recurring Donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/donor_portal_recurring_donation.png) # Add Generate Document Button to Page Layouts in Education To access single acknowledgment generation, add the Generate Document button to the page layouts. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To add the Generate Document button to page layouts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
The Generate Document Batch button is on the Fundraising Operations Home page by default. To add the Generate Document button to the Account page of the Fundraising Strategy and Donor Engagement apps: 1. From Setup, go to Object Manager and open **Account**. 2. Click **Page Layouts** and then click **Account Layout**. 3. Drag the **Generate Document** button to the top of the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions pane. 4. Save your work. 5. Repeat these steps for Person Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). # Add Generate Document Button to Page Layouts in Nonprofit To access single acknowledgment generation, add the Generate Document button to the page layouts. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To add the Generate Document button to page layouts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
The Generate Document Batch button is on the Fundraising Operations Home page by default. To add the Generate Document button to the Account page of the Fundraising Strategy and Donor Engagement apps: 1. From Setup, go to Object Manager and open **Account**. 2. Click **Page Layouts** and then click **Account Layout**. 3. Drag the **Generate Document** button to the top of the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions pane. 4. Save your work. 5. Repeat these steps for Person Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). # Add Gift Acknowledgment and Tax Receipt Templates in Education Add gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates to generate your gift receipt letters. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin, make sure to [provision and set up Document Generation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable server-side documentation generation to automatically generate gift acknowledgement and tax receipt documents."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Design Document Template**. 2. Click **Create Template**. 3. Click **Upload Files** and select a template file that is customized for your org. 4. Click **Done** when the file upload is complete. 5. Enter these details in the Template Details pane: 1. Enter a name for your template without any spaces between the words. For example, AcknowledgementReceipt. 2. Select the type of template you’re creating. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The template type is usually the default entry of Microsoft Word. 3. In **Token Mapping**, retain the default entry of JSON. 4. Save your changes. 6. To make this template available for your use, click **Activate**. 7. From the App Launcher, find and select **Files**. 8. Open **Libraries** and select DocGen Document Template Library. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t see the DocGen Document Template Library in the Libraries tab, add the Salesforce CRM Content User to your user profile and save your changes. 9. Click **Manage Members**. 10. Under Add Members, select **Public Groups** and give them Viewer access. You can also add yourself as a single person (as opposed to only being part of a public group) with Library Administrator access. # Add Gift Acknowledgment and Tax Receipt Templates in Nonprofit Add gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates to generate your gift receipt letters. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Before you begin, make sure to [provision and set up Document Generation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable server-side documentation generation to automatically generate gift acknowledgement and tax receipt documents."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Design Document Template**. 2. Click **Create Template**. 3. Click **Upload Files** and select a template file that is customized for your org. 4. Click **Done** when the file upload is complete. 5. Enter these details in the Template Details pane: 1. Enter a name for your template without any spaces between the words. For example, AcknowledgementReceipt. 2. Select the type of template you’re creating. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The template type is usually the default entry of Microsoft Word. 3. In **Token Mapping**, retain the default entry of JSON. 4. Save your changes. 6. To make this template available for your use, click **Activate**. 7. From the App Launcher, find and select **Files**. 8. Open **Libraries** and select DocGen Document Template Library. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t see the DocGen Document Template Library in the Libraries tab, add the Salesforce CRM Content User to your user profile and save your changes. 9. Click **Manage Members**. 10. Under Add Members, select **Public Groups** and give them Viewer access. You can also add yourself as a single person (as opposed to only being part of a public group) with Library Administrator access. # Add Intelligent Degree Planner to Your Education Portal Use Experience Builder to add Intelligent Degree Planner to your Experience Cloud site.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To customize Experience Cloud sites: | Education Cloud Full Access | To implement Intelligent Degree Planner, add the Learner Pathway Builder component to your Education Portal site. To enable students to submit their degree plans for advisor review, see [Approvals in Intelligent Degree Planning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_approvals_in_intelligent_degree_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To enable learners to submit their degree plans for advisor review, you can add an approval process to the Intelligent Degree Planner."). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Click **Builder** for the site that you want to modify. 3. Go to the **Learner Pathway Detail** page. 4. In the Components menu, find **Learner Pathway Builder** under Other Components and drag it to the desired location. 5. In Record ID, enter {!recordId}**.** 6. Customize and add features to the page as needed. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). # Add Members or Case Teams to an Advising Case Add individual members or teams to the success team of an advising case.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add members or case teams to an Advising case: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. From the app navigation menu, select **Cases**. 3. Click a case with advising record type. 4. On the case record page, click the **Advising** tab. 5. Under Success Team, click **Add Member**, find and add a case team member, and then save your changes. 6. Select a program to associate with the case team or member, and save your changes. 7. Click **Add Team**, find and add predefined case teams, and then save your changes. See [Predefine Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.caseteam_predefine_team.htm). On the learner portal, on the Program Enrollments tab, the learner can click **Schedule Appointment** to schedule an appointment with any of the assigned case team members. See Also: - [Omnistudio Integration Procedures](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_integration_procedures_48334.htm) - [Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Success Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_learner_portal_with_student_success_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Experience Builder to add student success components to your learner portal, and then configure them.") # Add Metadata to Your Student Success Hub Org Use the Installation Manager in the Student Success Hub app to add unmanaged metadata to your org. The Installation Manager on the SSH Settings page lets you deploy optional, unmanaged metadata, such as permission sets and sample reports, to your org. Use it as a starting point for your implementation and customize it for your institution. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, click ![The App Launcher icon, which is a grid of dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_app_launcher_icon.png), and then search for and select **SSH Settings**. 2. On the SSH Settings page, select the **Installation Manager** tab. The first time that you use the Installation Manager, it asks for information about your org and requests access to it. 3. If prompted, select **K-12** or **Higher Education**, click **Continue**, and then click **Authorize**. 4. Expand a plan name. For more information about the plans, see [Student Success Hub K-12 Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what's included in the installation plans for K-12 Student Success Hub orgs.") or [Student Success Hub Higher Ed Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what's included in the installation plans for higher ed Student Success Hub orgs."). 5. Select an option: Validate and Install Checks whether the org meets the configuration requirements for the plan to install successfully. If it does, then the installer deploys the metadata in the plan. If not, the check returns a list of errors. Resolve the errors and then try again. Validate Checks whether the org meets the configuration requirements for the plan to install successfully. If it does, then you can install the plan. If not, the check returns a list of errors. Resolve the errors and then try again. Install Deploys the metadata in the plan. You can run the installation only after passing the validation check. Review Changes See the changes that the installer applies when it deploys the metadata. You can review changes before or after installing a plan. # Add New Clients Quickly add new clients from the Case Management home page using the New Contact button. In the Case Management app, clients are a type of Contact. ![New Contact button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/newcontact.png) 1. From the Case Management Home page, click **New Contact**. 2. Enter the client’s name. 3. Select **Client**. 4. In **Account Name**, search for and select the corresponding Household Account. See [Create an Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_client_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you use Case Management in an org that includes NPSP, a household account is automatically created when you create a new contact. If you don't have NPSP and you want to associate a contact with an account, create the account manually.") for more information. 5. Enter additional information for the client. 6. Click **Save**. - **[Create an Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_client_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Case Management in an org that includes NPSP, a household account is automatically created when you create a new contact. If you don't have NPSP and you want to associate a contact with an account, create the account manually. ## Create an Account If you use Case Management in an org that includes NPSP, a household account is automatically created when you create a new contact. If you don't have NPSP and you want to associate a contact with an account, create the account manually. To create an account: 1. Click the **Accounts** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the appropriate Account record type. Case Management includes the Branch Account. Your admin can create a Household record type for you to use for Client Households. Note that this will not include any NPSP automation. 4. Enter the account information. 5. Save your work. # Add or Remove a Contact Learn how to add or remove constituent records from a household account record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This documentation is specific to organizations using the Household Account model. For more information, see [What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") - **[Household Account Model: Contacts Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_remove_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit, Education, and Membership organizations rely on constituents to create strong and vibrant communities. These individuals might support or subscribe to an organization on their own or collectively, with a spouse and other family members. NPSP refers to these collectives as Household Accounts. - **[Add a New Contact and Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_remove_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Adding a new Contact in Nonprofit Success Pack effectively creates a new Household. Here is the basic workflow for creating a new Contact and Household. - **[Add a Contact to an Existing Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_remove_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes you need to add a spouse or a child as a new Contact for Households that already exist in your Salesforce org. These Contacts may or may not already exist in Salesforce. - **[Remove a Contact from a Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_remove_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Occasionally you might want to remove a Contact from a Household. ## Household Account Model: Contacts Overview Nonprofit, Education, and Membership organizations rely on constituents to create strong and vibrant communities. These individuals might support or subscribe to an organization on their own or collectively, with a spouse and other family members. NPSP refers to these collectives as Household Accounts. NPSP automatically connects every constituent Contact record to a Household Account, even if that Household only contains a single member. You can add additional Contacts to existing Households, or remove Contacts as necessary. ## Add a New Contact and Household Adding a new Contact in Nonprofit Success Pack effectively creates a new Household. Here is the basic workflow for creating a new Contact and Household. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Salesforce for Nonprofits How-To Series video: [Add a Contact and a Household](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SvAbDsT4jio). 1. Click the down arrow on the Contacts tab, then click **New Contact**. 2. Enter all relevant Contact details for your new Contact (including phone numbers, emails, and addresses), but **leave the Account Name field blank** (1). Leaving the Account Name field blank is the key step to creating a new Household. ![New Contact dialog, with Account Name field left blank](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_rem_contact_createcontact.png) 3. When you're finished, click **Save**. Salesforce automatically creates a new Household, and derives the name of the new Household from the name of the new Contact. Salesforce formats the Household name according to the specifications in your Household Name Settings ( **NPSP Settings** | **People** | **Households**). ![Household name reflects Contact last name](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_rem_contact_acctname.png) ## Add a Contact to an Existing Household Sometimes you need to add a spouse or a child as a new Contact for Households that already exist in your Salesforce org. These Contacts may or may not already exist in Salesforce. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Add a Contact to an Existing Household](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BNamhtWK328). 1. Search for the Household you're interested in (for example, “Davidson Household”), or click the Accounts tab to see a list of recently viewed Accounts. 2. Click the Account Name of the Household Account you want to add the Contact to. 3. On the Account page, click **Related**. 4. Find the Contacts related list and click **New**. 5. Fill out the Contact information. 6. Save the Contact record. When a household has more than one Contact, NPSP doesn't automatically update the Household Account owner when you update the owner of one of the Contacts. ## Remove a Contact from a Household Occasionally you might want to remove a Contact from a Household. 1. In NPSP, search for the Household you're interested in (for example, “Jones Household”), or click the Accounts tab to see a list of recent Accounts. 2. Click the Account Name. 3. On the Account detail page, click **Manage Household**. 4. Click the Delete ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/delete-icon.png) icon on the Contact card. ![Location of delete Household Member option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_rem_contact_remove.png) 5. Click **Save**. The Contact is no longer a member of this Household, but still exists in Salesforce. In fact, Salesforce automatically creates a new Household for this Contact. To delete a contact from Salesforce entirely (rarely recommended), navigate to the Contact record and click the **Delete** button. If the Contact is the last remaining member of their Household, Salesforce automatically deletes the Household. # Add or Remove Funding Request Collaborators Manage collaborators for a Funding Request application. Sometimes your applicants need assistance completing a Funding Request. Invite new collaborators with an email that includes a secure, time-sensitive link. After accepting the invitation, the collaborator can help complete the application. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the Manage Collaborators component on the Funding Request to invite and manage collaborators. The Manage Collaborators component includes automation to control users' access to Funding Requests. In the rare case when an applicant accidentally invites the wrong person, deactivate the invitation link by deleting the invitee's Funding Request Collaborator Invitation record. - **[Add Collaborators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_add_remove_funding_req_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Invite Collaborators in Salesforce or the grants portal. - **[Remove Collaborators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_add_remove_funding_req_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove collaborators in Salesforce or the grants portal. ## Add Collaborators Invite Collaborators in Salesforce or the grants portal. 1. On a Funding Request, click **Manage Collaborators.** 2. Click **Invite Collaborators**. 3. Complete the contact information, and click **Add**. 4. When you're done adding people, click **Invite**. 5. Click **Done** to return to the Funding Request. The collaborators you invited appear in the Invited table in the Manage Collaborators window. After the invitees accept the invitations, they appear in the Confirmed table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Collaborators who haven't created a user in your portal need to create their portal user account. After creating their portal user account, have them return to the emailed invitation to accept the invitation. ## Remove Collaborators Remove collaborators in Salesforce or the grants portal. 1. On a Funding Request, click **Manage Collaborators**. 2. Click ![View more icon.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)for the person you want to remove, then click **Remove Access**. 3. Confirm you want to remove the collaborator's access to the Funding Request. 4. Click **Done** to return to the Funding Request. # Add or Update an Address Add or update an address for Contacts, Households, or Organizations in NPSP. - **[Add or Update a Constituent Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_update_addr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you add or update a constituent address, NPSP automatically syncs address information for all Contacts in the Household Account. That way you never have to worry that you're using two different addresses for people in the same household. - **[Add or Update an Organization Account Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_update_addr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organization Accounts represent businesses. When you add or edit an Organization Account's address, the change applies to the Organization Account only and not to any related Contact records. ## Add or Update a Constituent Address When you add or update a constituent address, NPSP automatically syncs address information for all Contacts in the Household Account. That way you never have to worry that you're using two different addresses for people in the same household. To add or update an address for a constituent and their related household members: 1. Find the Contact record you want to edit. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Enter the Mailing Address information. 4. Save the Contact. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To enter an address for a Contact that’s different from what’s used for the rest of the household, select **Address Override** on the Contact. You can also change the address for a constituent and their related household members by editing the Household Account and updating the Billing Address fields. The Billing Address is the primary address for a Household Account. ## Add or Update an Organization Account Address Organization Accounts represent businesses. When you add or edit an Organization Account's address, the change applies to the Organization Account only and not to any related Contact records. To update an Organization Account address: 1. Find the Organization Account record you want to edit. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Enter Billing Address information. Optionally, enter Shipping Address information. 4. Save the Account. # Add Payment Instrument Fields in Education Add Payment Instrument fields to the page layouts. Include fields to obtain account holder and payment method details that are required to complete a transaction. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To add the new Payment Instrument fields to page layouts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Update the Gift Transaction and Gift Commitment Schedule Lightning page layouts to include the Payment Instrument fields. # Add Payment Instrument Fields in Nonprofit Add Payment Instrument fields to the page layouts. Include fields to obtain account holder and payment method details that are required to complete a transaction. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To add the new Payment Instrument fields to page layouts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Update the Gift Transaction and Gift Commitment Schedule Lightning page layouts to include the Payment Instrument fields. # Add Picklist Values to Education Cloud Fields Ensure that the picklist values in the source fields are available in the target (Education Cloud) fields. If the picklist values aren't available, add the missing values manually. Add these required picklist values:
Domain & Cluster Target Object API Name Field API Name Picklist Value
Domain 1 DPE 2 PersonLanguage SpeakingProficiencyLevel None
Domain 1 DPE 2 PersonLanguage WritingProficiencyLevel None
Domain 3 DPE 1 Learning DurationUnit Credit Hours
Domain 3 DPE 1 Learning Type

Learning Course

Learning Program
Domain 5 DPE 1 CaseParticipant Status Active
Domain 6 DPE 2 PersonExamination SubjectName Overall
Not Applicable RecordAlert Severity

Error

Warning

Info

Low

Medium

High

Urgent

Normal
SEE ALSO: - [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&language=en_US) # Add Picklist Values to Education Cloud Fields Ensure that the picklist values in the source object fields are available in the target (Education Cloud) object fields. If the picklist values aren't available, add the missing values manually. Add these standard picklist values: | Domain & Cluster | Target Object API Name | Field API Name | Picklist Value | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Domain 1 cluster 2 | PersonLanguage | SpeakingProficiencyLevel | None | | Domain 1 cluster 2 | PersonLanguage | WritingProficiencyLevel | None | | Domain 7 cluster 2 | Service Appointment | Status Category: Scheduled | Attending | SEE ALSO: - [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&language=en_US) # Add Products for Student Financials Use products to model student fees such as in-state tuition, international student tuition, lab fees, and meal plans. After you create products, you link them together in price books that you associate with academic intervals such as the current fall term. You can create multiple price books for fees that change yearly or vary based on learner attributes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To create a product for student financial account management: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, make sure that: - Set Up Student Financial Account Management is enabled. - The student financial account management objects are set up in your org. 1. From the app launcher, find and select **Student Financials**. 2. On the Home page, click **Price Books**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Fill in the fields. For more information, see [Create Custom Price Books](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.pricebooks_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. In the Price Books list view, click the newly created price book. 6. In the Related tab, click **Add Products**. 7. Add products to represent student fees. For more information, see [Product, Price Book, Price Book Entry, and Product Schedule Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.products_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Add Questions to a Rubric Create an Omniscript that includes assessment questions to use as a rubric to score applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add questions to a rubric: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **Select Questions**. 3. Select **Base Discovery Framework** as the usage type. If you don’t have Pulse Checks enabled, you don’t need to select a usage type. 4. In Omniscript Details, enter a name for the Omniscript that describes the rubric’s purpose. For example, enter Undergraduate Application Review Rubric. 5. Select a language. 6. Enter a type for the Omniscript. For example, enter Admissions. 7. Enter a subtype for the Omniscript. For example, enter Rubric. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The type and subtype fields help organize the list of Omniscripts. 8. Next to Untitled Step, click **Edit step: Untitled Step**. 9. Enter a label that describes the set of questions. For example, Criteria. 10. From Category, select **Admissions**, and then click **Select All**. 11. Click **Add Questions to Step**, and then select the value that you entered for Untitled Step. For example, select **Criteria**. 12. Click **Build Omniscript**. 13. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omniscripts**, and open the Omniscript that you previously created. For example, click **Undergraduate Application Review Rubric**. 14. Click the **Step 1** section, click **Build**, and then expand **Actions**. 15. Drag **Integration Procedure Action** below the Save-Responses step to make it the final step in the Omniscript. 16. Select **EDUAdmissions\_CalculateAndSaveAssessmentScore** as the Integration Procedure. If you previously cloned or modified the EDUAdmissions\_CalculateAndSaveAssessmentScore Integration Procedure, select that version. 17. Click the **Setup** tab. 18. Click **Step Chart Options**, and then select **Hide Step Chart**. 19. Click **Messaging Framework**, and then select **Pub/Sub**. 20. In Key, enter status. 21. In Value, enter completed. 22. Activate your Omniscript. # Add Skills to a Learning Course or Learning Program As you create a learning course or learning program, use Einstein to suggest skills that fit the course, or choose from the skills that you’ve used before. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
User Permissions Needed
To use Einstein Skills Generator:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This tool uses generative AI, which can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review for accuracy and safety before using. ![Einstein Skills Generator in the Learning Wizard.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/skills_generator_highlights.png) 1. Access Einstein Skills Generator in the Learning Wizard when you create a learning course or create a learning program. 2. After you define the course or program details and set prerequisites, corequisites, recommendations, and learning outcomes, you can select skills.. 3. Use either of these methods to find skills and associate them with your learning course or learning program. - To let Einstein generate skills based on data from the public domain and your Education Cloud org, click **Got it**. Choose from the skills that are displayed or click **Suggest More Skills** to search for more. - To choose only from the skills in your org, click **Select from Existing Skills**. Then search for and select Skill learning achievements. SEE ALSO: - [Einstein Generative AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_about.htm) - [Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") - [Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program.") # Add the Create Donor Brief Button to Page Layouts in Education To quickly generate donor briefs, you can add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts as either a Platform Action or as an Action Launcher button. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
You can add the Create Donor Brief button to the Account record page by either adding it as a platform action or as an option in the Action Launcher. Adding the button as a platform action might cause information to be duplicated with information in the Summary Card. 1. Add the option as a platform action. 1. Edit an Account record page. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, add the Highlights Panel to the top of the page. 3. Save your work. 2. Add the option as an Action Launcher option. 1. Add the donor brief flow as a Deployment for the Action Launcher Component. For more information, see [Create an Action Launcher Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.create_an_action_launcher_deployment.htm&language=en_US). 2. Edit an Account record page. 3. In the Lightning App Builder, add the Action Launcher to the page. 4. In the Action Launcher pane, set the configuration to **Action Launcher deployment**. 5. From the Action Launcher deployment field, select the donor brief deployment. 6. Save your work, and then activate the page, if necessary. # Add the Create Donor Brief Button to Page Layouts in Nonprofit To quickly generate donor briefs, you can add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts as either a Platform Action or as an Action Launcher button. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
You can add the Create Donor Brief button to the Account record page by either adding it as a platform action or as an option in the Action Launcher. Adding the button as a platform action might cause information to be duplicated with information in the Summary Card. 1. Add the option as a platform action. 1. Edit an Account record page. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, add the Highlights Panel to the top of the page. 3. Save your work. 2. Add the option as an Action Launcher option. 1. Add the donor brief flow as a Deployment for the Action Launcher Component. For more information, see [Create an Action Launcher Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.create_an_action_launcher_deployment.htm&language=en_US). 2. Edit an Account record page. 3. In the Lightning App Builder, add the Action Launcher to the page. 4. In the Action Launcher pane, set the configuration to **Action Launcher deployment**. 5. From the Action Launcher deployment field, select the donor brief deployment. 6. Save your work, and then activate the page, if necessary. # Add the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine to Your Education Portal Use Experience Builder to add the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine to your Experience Cloud site.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To customize Experience Cloud sites: | Education Cloud Full Access | To implement the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine, add the Compare Program Plans flow to your Education Portal site. 1. In Setup, find and select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Builder** for the site that you want to modify. 3. Go to the page where you want to add the comparison engine. 4. In the Components menu, find Flow under Process Automation and drag it to the desired location. 5. From Flow, select your activated flow from the list. 6. Customize and add features to the page as needed. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). # Add the My Appointment Component to Your App Utility Bar Education Cloud comes with a preconfigured app that offers a comprehensive view of your users' appointments. If you build your own app, add the My Appointment component to the app's utility bar to provide that view.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Add the My Appointments Micro Calendar Console to the Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_add_my_appointments_utility_item.htm&type=5) # Add the RFM Score to the Donor Profile in Education To see the individual scores or aggregated RFM score, add it to the Related Records Detail Display on the Donor Profile. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. In the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, edit the Donor Profile account page. 2. Select the Donor Giving Summary (Related Records Detail Display) pane. 3. To add the RFM score to this pane, click **Add Group** | **New Group** 4. In Choose Fields, select **Recency Score**, **Frequency Score**, **Monetary Score**, and **Composite RFM Score**. If you want to show only the composite score, you can add the Composite RFM Score field to the existing Giving History rollup. 5. In the Group Name field, enter a name, for example, RFM Score, for this section of the Donor Giving Summary pane. 6. Save and activate the page as an app default. # Add the RFM Score to the Donor Profile in Nonprofit To see the individual scores or aggregated RFM score, add it to the Related Records Detail Display on the Donor Profile. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. In the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, edit the Donor Profile account page. 2. Select the Donor Giving Summary (Related Records Detail Display) pane. 3. To add the RFM score to this pane, click **Add Group** | **New Group** 4. In Choose Fields, select **Recency Score**, **Frequency Score**, **Monetary Score**, and **Composite RFM Score**. If you want to show only the composite score, you can add the Composite RFM Score field to the existing Giving History rollup. 5. In the Group Name field, enter a name, for example, RFM Score, for this section of the Donor Giving Summary pane. 6. Save and activate the page as an app default. # Add the User Managed Field to the Trigger Handler Page Layout This article will walk you through adding the User Managed field to the Trigger Handler Page Layout in Education Data Architecture (EDA). In EDA version 1.37 we modified how EDA manages trigger handler objects and made it easier for developers building on top of EDA to take advantage of TDTM. Part of those changes included a field named "**Owned by Namespace**". **Owned by Namespace** is a text field that developers or admins can use to logically group their Trigger Handlers together. EDA uses **Owned by Namespace** to manage its own Trigger Handlers. The field allows EDA to know if there were changes or updates, or even if a trigger handler was deleted during an upgrade. This means if a dev or admin adds a common value to **Owned by Namespace** for all of their Trigger Handlers they will be isolated from EDA or other packages using TDTM. This isolation means they will not need to protect their trigger handlers with **"User Managed"**. If a Trigger Handler object does not have a value in **Owned by Namespace** the Trigger handler object can still be protected by the use of the **User Manage** field. This behavior has not changed. Setting **User Managed** on an EDA Trigger Handler will still allow users to override it and EDA will skip over the record during upgrade even if there were changes to the Trigger handler definition. We recommend applying the **Owned by Namespace** field with a common value for all the Trigger Handler objects a developer has created. This gives them several advantages. First, using the **Owned by Namespace** field allows the developer to store the definitions in a class which can be saved in source control. Then they can pass their configuration into the EDA TDTM Global API and EDA will perform the processing for them. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important The **Owned by Namespace** and the **User Managed** field is hidden in any EDA org where the initial package version is 1.34 or lower and needs to be added to the Trigger Handler Page Layout. This article will explain how to add these fields. - **[Add the User Managed Field (Salesforce Classic Interface)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_add_user_managed_field_to_trigger_handler_pl.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these steps to add the User Managed field in Salesforce Classic. - **[Add the User Managed Field (Lightning Experience Interface)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_add_user_managed_field_to_trigger_handler_pl.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these steps to add the User Managed field in Lightning Experience. ## Add the User Managed Field (Salesforce Classic Interface) Complete these steps to add the User Managed field in Salesforce Classic. 1. Click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter objects, then select **Objects**. 3. In the list of objects, click **Trigger Handler**. ![Trigger Handler Hyperlink](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/usr_mgd_field_trigger_handler_link.png) 4. Scroll down to the Page Layouts related list and click **Edit**. ![Edit Hyperlink](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/usr_mgd_field_trigger_handler_layout.png) 5. Drag the **Owned by Namespace** and the **User Managed** field onto the page layout. ![Page Layout Editor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/usr_mgd_field_eda_trigger_handler_ple.png) 6. Click **Save**. ## Add the User Managed Field (Lightning Experience Interface) Complete these steps to add the User Managed field in Lightning Experience. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. ![Object Manager tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/usr_mgd_field_obj_mgr_tab.png) 3. Click **Trigger Handler**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click the drop-down arrow to the right of the page layout name, then click **Edit**. ![Page Layout Assignment expanded to show Edit and Delete options.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/usr_mgd_field_page_layout_assignmt.png) 6. Drag the **User Managed** field onto the page layout. ![Page Layout Editor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/usr_mgd_field_eda_trigger_handler_ple.png) 7. Click **Save**. You can now either enable or disable any trigger and the "pushes" from new versions will not affect your customizations. We hope this has helped! # Add the Video Call Component to Your App Utility Bar Make it easy for your users to join a virtual call by adding the video call component to the Salesforce utility bar. See [Add the Video Call Utility Item to the Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_add_video_call_utility_item.htm&type=5).
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
# Add Users to Your Education Portal Grant access to your Education Cloud Experience Site by assigning a license, a profile, and permissions to portal users.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add users to your Education Cloud Experience Site: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Accounts**. 2. Click on an account. 3. On the account's contact related list, view or add the contact record for the person that you want to add to the site. 4. On the contact detail page, click![Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **Enable Customer User**. Salesforce creates a user record with some details prepopulated. See [Create Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_create_external_users.htm&type=5). 5. On the New User page, select the profile that you created to grant access to the Experience Cloud site. See [Assign a Default Experience to a User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.network_affinity.htm&type=5). 6. Populate the other fields as needed, and then save your changes. 7. Confirm that users have the correct permissions. See [Verify Permission Sets for Experience Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_verify_perm_sets_exp_users.htm&language=en_us&type=5). 8. Create a case record for the user. See [Automate Case Creation and Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&language=en_us&type=5#topic-4936). 9. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 10. Click **Workspaces** next to the site that you want to add the users to. 11. Click **Administration**, and then click **Members**. 12. Add the profile that you created to grant access to the Experience site, and then save your changes. 13. In the left panel, click **Settings**, and then click **Activate**. 14. Click **OK** to confirm. # Add Verification Items to Other Records (Optional) Allow grantmakers to see Verification Items and, if configured, search for an organization’s tax status from a Funding Request, Requirement, Disbursement, or Contact record by putting the Verification Items component on an object’s page layout. We’ll go through an example of adding this component to the Funding Request record page layout. Now, when a grantmaker is on a Funding Request record, they’ll see Verification Items related to the record and, if configured, be able to search for an organization’s tax status. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To keep track of the cloned Lightning record page, go back to Lightning Record Pages then click your cloned layout. Click **Edit** and give the page a unique name. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Before adding the Verification Items component to a record page layout, make sure you [Set Up Remote Site Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm) for tax status searches and give grantmakers at least Read access on the Verification Check object or [assign them the Verifications - Manage permission set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the available permission sets in Grants Management and create permission sets for due diligence and budget management."). 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Funding Request**. 3. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 4. Click **Funding Request Record Page**. 5. Click **Clone**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend adding tabs to the record page, but it’s not required. To add tabs, drag the Tabs component into the record page. You’ll have Related and Details tabs, but you can add additional tabs, such as a Verification Items tab. 6. Drag Verification Items into the record page or tab. 7. In the Create Verification Check Quick Action field, enter DocumentChecklistItem.sfdo\_grants\_\_CreateVerificationCheck. This field shows the Create Verification Check modal when a grantmaker clicks Create Verification Check. 8. In the Update Verification Check Quick Action field, enter sfdo\_grants\_\_VerificationCheck\_\_c.sfdo\_grants\_\_UpdateVerificationCheck in the Update Verification Check Quick Action field. This field allows a grantmaker to edit a Verification Check. 9. In the Create Tax Status Check Quick Action field, enter DocumentChecklistItem.sfdo\_grants\_\_CreateTaxStatusCheck. 10. In the Update Tax Status Check Quick Action field, enter sfdo\_grants\_\_VerificationCheck\_\_c.sfdo\_grants\_\_UpdateTaxStatusCheck. 11. Enter any Document Types and separate them by semicolons. If you configured [Tax Status Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make it easy for your staff to search for United States-based organizations based on their tax information."), you already have the Tax\_Status\_Search Document Type, but you can add more, for example, Tax\_Status\_Search;Legal;Finance. If left blank, all Document Checklist Items will show on this component. 12. Click **Save** then **Activate**. 13. Click **App Default** then **Assign as App Default**. 14. Select **Grants Management**, then click **Next**, **Next**, and **Save**. # Add Your School's Data Learn how to migrate your school's data, import it in a recommended sequence, and prevent "Duplicates Detected" errors in EDA. - **[Migrate Data in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_migrate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare to migrate your data to EDA . - **[Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to import your data into EDA. - **[Disable Matching Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_matching_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn why you receive a "Duplicates Detected" error when inserting records and how to prevent it. # Adding Badges to Contact Records Having badges auto-generated by a formula ensures data quality. ![thank\_you](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) thank\_you Special thanks to the team at [Patron Technology](https://patrontechnology.com/) as well as Francis Pindar and Greg Malpass for their help and contributions with this article. Nonprofits often request a “Type" picklist that includes values like “Donor” and “Volunteer." The trouble with that approach is that the list never gets updated after the initial setup - no-one remembers to go back and update the picklist if a Contact's status changes. Generally, it is better to have these values generated by a formula so that they can update automatically and even better to have the formula display an image, or a “badge” that indicates someone’s status at-a-glance. - **[Creating the fields on the Contact Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adding_badges_to_contact_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See some examples of creating fields on the Contact Record. - **[Add Your Images as Static Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adding_badges_to_contact_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The most time-consuming part of setting up these badges for me was creating the graphics! I used Google Drawings, but a marketing colleague could probably whip them up for you in a few minutes. ## Creating the fields on the Contact Record See some examples of creating fields on the Contact Record. Here are some examples of Contact donor badges we created at [Seattle Theatre Group](https://www.stgpresents.org/): ![Example Badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/contact_details.png) ![Example Badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/contact_details2.png) And here’s the formula that allocates a badge to a Contact, based on their giving levels (using the "Total Gifts" field from the [Nonprofit Success Pack](https://www.salesforce.org/nonprofit/nonprofit-success-pack/) ): ![Formula Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/formula_options3.png) So for anyone where the value of Total Gifts is greater than 0 and less than $2500, the Donor badge will be displayed. For anyone who has given more than $2,499, the Major Donor badge will be displayed. And for non-donors, the field will be left blank. If you’ve tried a formula like this before, I’m sure you’ll see how you could add a date range to limit to more recent gifts as well. We also have a badge for our subscribers (some people have two badges because they both donate and subscribe): ![Subscriber](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sub_and_donor_badges.png) Subscription records are in a custom object that rolls up to Contact, so we have a “Most Recent Subscription” field just like with gifts, and that drives the formula here: ![Subscriber Badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/most_recent_sub_formula.png) You could easily adapt this technique for volunteers (Total Volunteer Hours greater than 0) or for memberships (using a count of membership records or the most recent membership start date) or really any kind of related record that you can summarize on the Contact record. ## Add Your Images as Static Resources The most time-consuming part of setting up these badges for me was creating the graphics! I used Google Drawings, but a marketing colleague could probably whip them up for you in a few minutes. My badges are around 35 pixels high and between 115 and 150 wide depending on the label, and they are saved as .PNG files so they are very compact (around 5KB each). There are two ways to include images in your formulas in NPSP. I used to upload them as Documents, but now I add them as Static Resources instead. (The formula reference is simpler and the images will still be available to you in a sandbox.) Search for Static Resources (under Setup → Build → Develop) and click on \[New\]. You need to give your badge a name with no spaces (like a Field Name). Choose your graphics file and set the Cache Control to “Public”. Click \[Save\]. Then click on the View file link. The badge will open in a new window. Select the URL from "/resource" onwards and copy it - you will need this for your formula. Here’s the syntax for the formula again - note that you need to add IMAGE (“ before your reference and “, “title”) after it. ![image resource](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/formula_options4.png) If you’d rather use the Documents folder for your badge graphics (it works too!), start by creating a new Documents folder for your badges and then upload them as Externally Available Images. ![donor badge](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/document_detail_with_badge.png) This time you just need the Salesforce ID for the document. Copy the URL reference after ".com/" ![url](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/salesforce_id.png) and then your syntax formula looks like this: ![formula2](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/formula_options.png) ![forumla last](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/formula_options2.png) # Additional Alert Setup for Earlier Versions Complete these Alert setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier. If you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier, or if you didn't install the Alert metadata that Student Success Hub provides, some extra configuration is required to set up Alerts. - **[Create and Configure Alert Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Alert record types are required to determine the types of Alerts that support staff can create. Student Success Hub 1.8 and later come with a set of preconfigured Alert record types and picklist values for the Reason field; earlier versions don't. If you need to create your own record types and Reason values, here's how. - **[Add Alerts to the App Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For convenience, add Alerts to the app navigation menu. - **[Create a Lightning Record Page for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give support staff a customized detail view of Alert records. Create an Alert record page in Lightning App Builder that includes the highlights panel, the student's related activity, a Chatter feed, and more. - **[Create a Compact Layout for the Alert Highlights Panel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a compact layout to show an Alert record's key details in the highlights panel of the Alert record page. - **[Configure the Alert Highlights Panel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The highlights panel appears at the top of a record detail page and shows the most important information about the item. Configure an Alert highlights panel that's based on the Student Success Hub Alerts Compact Layout you just created. - **[Enable Alert Feed Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Chatter feed associated with an Alert shows posts and comments from the people involved. It also shows automated posts when details about the Alert have changed, such as the status or other fields of your choosing. Make these automated feed updates visible by enabling Chatter feed tracking for Alerts. - **[Configure Alerts Search Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Alert fields to search layouts. We recommend configuring Lookup Dialogs, Search Filter Fields, Search Results, and Tab search layouts to start. Feel free to add fields to others that you use. ## Create and Configure Alert Record Types Alert record types are required to determine the types of Alerts that support staff can create. Student Success Hub 1.8 and later come with a set of preconfigured Alert record types and picklist values for the Reason field; earlier versions don't. If you need to create your own record types and Reason values, here's how. First, do some planning. 1. Decide the Alert record types you need. 2. Decide the picklist values you need for the Reason field on the Alert object. 3. Decide how to map the Reason values to the appropriate record types. To see how Student Success Hub maps the default record types and Reasons values, see Step 12 below. 4. Create the Reason picklist values. 5. Create the Alert record types. For each one, define the Picklists Available for Editing. Then, configure your Alert record types. Here's how to create the Alert record types that come with Student Success Hub 1.8 and later. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. Make sure it's the Alert object with the Student Success Hub namespace prefix (sfal\_\_). 2. On the Record Types page, click **New**. 3. For the Existing Record Type, leave **Master** selected. 4. For Record Type label, enter Financial Aid and then press Tab to automatically populate the Record Type Name field with the API name Financial\_Aid. 5. Enter a Description, which displays next to the record type name, to help support staff create the appropriate type of Alert. 6. Make sure Active is selected. 7. Enable profile assignments for the support staff, System Administrator, and other profiles as needed. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Unless you have other Alert page layouts, keep the default Alert Layout applied to all profiles. 10. Save your changes. 11. In the Picklists Available for Editing section, **Edit** the Reason picklist. 12. Use this table to select the reasons that apply to Financial Aid alerts.

Picklist Value Selected for this Record Type

Academic

Career

Financial Aid

Health

Housing

Grade Concern

√

        

Failure Concern

√

        

Missing/Late Assignment

√

        

Attendance Concern

√

        

Participation Concern

√

        

Preparedness Concern

√

        

Academic Integrity

√

        

Recognition

√

√

      

Missing/Late Application

  

√

√

  

√

Qualification Not Met

    

√

    

General Health

      

√

  

Room Change

        

√

Other (Describe in Comments)

√

√

√

√

√
13. Set the default value to one of the Selected Values. 14. Save your changes. 15. Repeat these steps to create the Academic, Career, Health, and Housing record types. When you're done, assign the record types to the support staff and System Administrator profiles. ## Add Alerts to the App Navigation Menu For convenience, add Alerts to the app navigation menu. See [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). ## Create a Lightning Record Page for Alerts Give support staff a customized detail view of Alert records. Create an Alert record page in Lightning App Builder that includes the highlights panel, the student's related activity, a Chatter feed, and more. Let's start by creating the record page using a template. You can configure components on the page later, if desired. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Record Page** and then click **Next**. 4. Label your page Alert Record Page, select **Alert**, and then click **Next**. 5. Choose the Header and Three Regions page template and then click **Finish**. 6. Drag these components from the components pane into the specified region of the page. 1. Top header—Highlights Panel component. Later, you'll configure the fields in it by [creating an Alerts compact layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these Alert setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier."). 2. Left column—Record Detail component followed by a Related List - Single component (with the related list set to show Open Activities) followed by another Related List - Single component (with the related list set to show Activity History). 3. Middle column—Activities component. 4. Right column—Chatter Feed component. 7. Save your changes. 8. Activate the Lightning record page. 1. Click **Activation**. 2. Go to the App Default tab and click **Assign as App Default**. 3. Select the **Student Success Hub** app. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Review your assignments and save your changes. 9. Exit Lightning App Builder. The resulting Alert record page conveniently assembles the details of an Alert to help support staff see key information at a glance and take swift action. ## Create a Compact Layout for the Alert Highlights Panel Create a compact layout to show an Alert record's key details in the highlights panel of the Alert record page. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. On the Compact Layouts page, click **New**. 3. Label the compact layout Student Success Hub Alerts Compact Layout. 4. Tab to the Name field to automatically populate the API name, `Student_Success_Hub_Alerts_Compact_Layout`. 5. Add these fields to the Selected Fields list: Alert #, Reason, Student Contact, Owner, Status, Related To, Priority, Record Type, and Created By. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The highlights panel shows the first Selected Field in the panel header and the next six fields in the panel itself. Additional fields specified in the Compact Layout may not fit in the highlights panel. 7. Make the Compact Layout the primary layout for the Alert object. 1. On the Compact Layout Detail page, click **Compact Layout Assignment**. 2. Click **Edit Assignment**. 3. Set Primary Contact Layout to Student Success Hub Alerts Compact Layout. 4. Save your changes. By default, the compact layout assignment for a record type inherits from the primary compact layout. ## Configure the Alert Highlights Panel The highlights panel appears at the top of a record detail page and shows the most important information about the item. Configure an Alert highlights panel that's based on the Student Success Hub Alerts Compact Layout you just created. 1. If you want the highlights panel to show the Record Type (which is important because the record type determines the reason for an Alert), add the Record Type field to the Compact Layout. 1. In Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. On the Compact Layouts page, click **Student Success Hub Alerts Compact Layout**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Add Record Type to the Selected Fields list. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The highlights panel shows the first Selected Field in the header and the next six fields in the panel itself. Additional fields specified in the Compact Layout may not fit in the highlights panel. 2. Make the Compact Layout the primary layout for the Alert object. 1. On the Compact Layout Detail page, click **Compact Layout Assignment**. 2. Click **Edit Assignment**. 3. Set Primary Contact Layout to **Student Success Hub Alerts Compact Layout**. 4. Save your changes. By default, the compact layout assignment for a record type inherits from the primary compact layout. ## Enable Alert Feed Updates The Chatter feed associated with an Alert shows posts and comments from the people involved. It also shows automated posts when details about the Alert have changed, such as the status or other fields of your choosing. Make these automated feed updates visible by enabling Chatter feed tracking for Alerts. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Feed Tracking**. 2. Click the **Alert** object, then select **Enable Feed Tracking**. 3. Select the fields that automatically post feed updates when those fields are updated. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Alerts Search Layouts Add Alert fields to search layouts. We recommend configuring Lookup Dialogs, Search Filter Fields, Search Results, and Tab search layouts to start. Feel free to add fields to others that you use. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. On the Search Layouts page, click the arrow in the search layout row that you're updating and click **Edit**. 3. Add these fields to the Selected Fields list: Alert #, Student Contact, Student Record, Reason, Status, Related To, Case, Record Type (optional), Created By, and Created Date. 4. Save your changes. 5. Repeat these additions as needed for other search layouts. # Additional Automation Using Custom Apex Code Find out more about additional automation. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important This feature requires Apex coding and should only be used by a developer. - **[Post Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automation_apex_code.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're importing data records, you may have some post processing that would be easier to do with code because you can process higher volumes and perform more complex procedures. - **[Sample Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automation_apex_code.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This sample code shows a simple post-processing scenario where a "Spouse" relationship is automatically created between Contact1 and Contact2 (assuming the contacts are newly-created). ## Post Processing When you're importing data records, you may have some post processing that would be easier to do with code because you can process higher volumes and perform more complex procedures. NPSP includes an interface that you can customize to perform post-processing functionality on your data import records. The interface, `BDI_IPostProcess`, includes one method called `process`. To take advantage of this functionality, you'll need to write an Apex class that implements the interface and its method. You then specify the Apex class in the Post Process Implementing Class field in either the NPSP Data Import configuration options or in the NPSP Data Import Batch configuration options. ![Extensibility section in the Configuration Options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/extensibility_section.png) After NPSP processes the number of records you specify as the batch size (in configuration options), NPSP will call your class and perform any post processing specified in the class. ## Sample Code This sample code shows a simple post-processing scenario where a "Spouse" relationship is automatically created between Contact1 and Contact2 (assuming the contacts are newly-created). This is a working example, just to give you an idea of what is possible. We encourage you to write a post processing class that performs more complex tasks. ```java global with sharing class MyPostProcess implements npsp.BDI_IPostProcess { global void process(npsp.BDI_DataImportService bdi) { List listRel = new List(); for (npsp__DataImport__c di : bdi.listDI) { // create a relationship if both c1 and c2 are specified // and they are newly created contacts if (di.npsp__Contact1Imported__c != null && di.npsp__Contact2Imported__c != null && di.npsp__Contact1ImportStatus__c == label.npsp__bdiCreated && di.npsp__Contact2ImportStatus__c == label.npsp__bdiCreated) { listRel.add(new npe4__Relationship__c( npe4__Contact__c = di.npsp__Contact1Imported__c, npe4__RelatedContact__c = di.npsp__Contact2Imported__c, npe4__Type__c = 'Spouse', npe4__Status__c = 'Current')); } } if (listRel.size() > 0) { database.insert(listRel); } } } } ``` # Additional Success Plan Setup for Earlier Versions Complete these Success Plan setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.18 or earlier. If you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.18 or earlier, or if you didn't install the Success Plan and Success Plan Template metadata that Student Success Hub provides, some extra configuration is required to set up Success Plans. - **[Add Custom Buttons to the Success Plan Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_success_plans_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add buttons to the Success Plan page layout to let support staff mass update the statuses of Tasks under a plan and cancel a plan. - **[Create a Lightning Record Page for Success Plan Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_success_plans_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Success Plan record page to give support staff a detailed view of a Success Plan record. - **[Create Compact Layouts for Success Plans and Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_success_plans_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your staff stay organized by creating compact layouts that summarize program plans and requirements. ## Add Custom Buttons to the Success Plan Page Layout Add buttons to the Success Plan page layout to let support staff mass update the statuses of Tasks under a plan and cancel a plan. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Success Plan**. 2. On the Page Layouts page, click **Success Plan Layout**. 3. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 4. Drag **Cancel Plans** and **Update Tasks** to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section in the layout. 5. Save your changes. ## Create a Lightning Record Page for Success Plan Records Create a Success Plan record page to give support staff a detailed view of a Success Plan record. From Setup, search for then select **Lightning App Builder**, and then click **New**. We'll outline the main elements here. The process is similar to creating a record page for Alerts, so if you'd like more step-by-step details, see [Additional Alert Setup for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these Alert setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier.").

Element

What To Specify

Type of page

Record Page

Label

Success Plan

Object

Success Plan

Page Template

Console: Pinned Header

Top header region

Highlights Panel component (later, you'll configure the fields within it by creating a compact layout)

Left column

Record Detail component (you can edit the Success Plan Layout page layout to customize the fields displayed)

Middle column

First instance of the Related List - Single component with these properties:

  • Parent Record—Use This Success Plan
  • Related List—Open Activities

Second instance of the Related List - Single component with these properties:

  • Parent Record—Use This Success Plan
  • Related List—Activity History

We recommend these fields for the related lists (specify them in the Success Plan Layout page layout):

  • Subject
  • Type
  • Status
  • Priority
  • Due Date
  • Create Date (or Last Modified Date)

Right column

Tabs component with these tabs:

  • Activity
  • Chatter
If you haven't yet created any Success Plan records with related Tasks, it's handy to do so now so that you can verify how your page setup looks with data. You'll also need to create and assign the Success Plans compact layout for the correct fields to display within components. When you're done, remember to activate the page for the appropriate profiles and record types. ## Create Compact Layouts for Success Plans and Templates Help your staff stay organized by creating compact layouts that summarize program plans and requirements. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Success Plan** or **Success Plan Template**. 2. On the Compact Layouts page, click **New**. 3. For the label, enter `Success Plans Compact Layout` or `Success Plan Template Compact Layout` 4. For the API name, enter SuccessPlansCompactLayout or SuccessPlanTemplateCompactLayout. 5. Add these fields to the Selected Fields list. - For Success Plans, add Plan Name, Owner, Student Contact, Published, Open Tasks, and Record Type. - For Success Plan Templates, add Success Plan Template Name, Active, Usage Count, Active Tasks, and Record Type. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The highlights panel shows the first Selected Field in the panel header, and the next six fields within the panel itself. Additional fields specified in the compact layout may not fit within the highlights panel. # Additional Success Plan Setup for Higher Ed Configure the Student Success Hub app and your student portal to use Success Plans and Tasks. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. # Address Address represents a home, seasonal, or other address for a Contact or Account. - **[Sample Uses for Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you use multiple addresses, the Address object stores the addresses for related Contact and Account records, so you can manage the many addresses associated with a student, a household, or other entity. - **[Configure Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Address object up to date. - **[Create an Address Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. - **[Edit Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. - **[Mark an Address as Inactive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When someone moves and doesn’t provide an updated address, or when an address shouldn’t receive mail for some other reason, mark the address as inactive. ## Sample Uses for Address When you use multiple addresses, the Address object stores the addresses for related Contact and Account records, so you can manage the many addresses associated with a student, a household, or other entity. - University—Track a student's address during the school year separately from their permanent home address. - K-12—Track the two household addresses that a student splits time between. - Any educational institution—Track a seasonal address for a household separate from its primary residence. ## Configure Address Keep the Address object up to date. ### Initial Configuration for Address You need to configure the Address object only if you're using multiple addresses, so start by determining whether and where you want to use them: on Contacts, Household Accounts, Administrative Accounts, institutional and organizational Accounts, or some combination of those entities. For information on how multiple addresses work, see [Understand EDA Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm). For information on enabling multiple addresses in your org, see [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm). Regardless of the EDA version that you started with, complete these tasks to configure Address. 1. Create or customize an Address page layout. We recommend the HEDA Address Layout that we provide, and that you add the Latest End Date and Latest Start Date fields to the layout. 2. Make sure the Account layout you're using, such as HEDA Household Layout, includes the Addresses related list. 3. Make sure that the values for the Primary Address Type picklist on the Contact object match the Address Type picklist values on the Address object. The default values are Home, Work, Vacation Residence, and Other. 4. Configure state and country picklists, which protect data integrity by having users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists. See [State and Country Picklists for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_eda_state_and_country_picklists.htm). ### Keep Up with Address Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of EDA you originally installed.

If Installed Before Version

 Configuration Task
1.118 Add the Inactive checkbox to your Address page layouts, as needed. For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
1.101

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Address layout: Mailing County

    • Contact layout: Mailing County, Other County

    • Account layout: Billing County, Shipping County
1.92

  • On the Contact object, add Vacation Residence as a picklist value on the Primary Address Type and Secondary Address Type picklist fields.

1.14

  • Enable multiple addresses for Contacts. See Configure Address Settings.

  • Add the Addresses related list to the HEDA Contact layout.
## Create an Address Record Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. Always create the first address for a Contact or Account from the new Contact or Account record. See [Use Multiple Addresses for Contacts with Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm) or [Manage Multiple Addresses for Other Types of Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm) for details. Create additional Address records in any of these ways, depending on your account model. ### Create Additional Addresses for an Existing Household Account Create additional new Addresses for an existing Household Account by starting from the Account record. Do not create them from the Addresses related list of a household Contact. _Address records created from the Contact related list aren't synchronized with the related Household Account._ 1. On the Account record that requires a new address, click the **Related** tab. 2. In the Addresses related list, click **New**. 3. Complete these fields. Parent Account EDA automatically populates the Parent Account with the Account you started from. Parent Contact Leave blank. EDA automatically synchronizes the address to all related household Contacts except those marked Do Not Automatically Update. Mailing fields Enter the street, city, state, and other mailing address details in the appropriate fields. Default Address If selected, when you save, the new address replaces the existing Account Billing Address and Contact Mailing Address on the related records—except for the Mailing Address on any household Contacts that have Do Not Automatically Update selected. Seasonal Start Day, Seasonal Start Month, Seasonal Start Year To have the address automatically become the Current Address for the Account and its Contacts on a certain date, select the start day, month, and year. Leave Seasonal Start Year blank to specify that the start date recurs every year. Seasonal End Day, Seasonal End Month, Seasonal End Year Enter the day, month, and year that the address is no longer the Current Address for the Account and its Contacts. Leave Seasonal End Year blank to specify that the end date recurs every year. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Either add seasonal dates to an Address record or select Default Address. Don't do both. If an Address record has both seasonal dates and is marked as the default, then when the seasonal dates end, the same Address record—because it's also the default—continues to be the Current Address on related Contact and Account records. 4. Save your changes. ### Create Additional Addresses for an Existing Administrative Account Create additional new Addresses for an existing Administrative Account by starting from the Account's related Contact record. Additional addresses created from the Addresses related list on a Contact record are not synchronized with addresses for the Contact's related Account. 1. On the Contact record that requires a new address, click the **Related** tab. 2. In the Addresses related list, click **New**. 3. Complete these fields. Parent Account Leave blank. Parent Contact EDA automatically populates the Parent Contact with the Contact you started from. Mailing fields Enter the street, city, state, and other mailing address details in the appropriate fields. Default Address If selected, when you save, the new address replaces the existing Contact Mailing Address on the related record. Seasonal Start Day, Seasonal Start Month, Seasonal Start Year To have the address automatically become the Current Address for the Contact on a certain date, select the start day, month, and year. Leave Seasonal Start Year blank to specify that the start date recurs every year. Seasonal End Day, Seasonal End Month, Seasonal End Year Enter the day, month, and year that the address is no longer the Current Address for the Contact. Leave Seasonal End Year blank to specify that the end date recurs every year. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Either add seasonal dates to an Address record or select Default Address. Don't do both. If an Address record has both seasonal dates and is marked as the default, then when the seasonal dates end, the same Address record—because it's also the default—continues to be the Current Address on related Contact and Account records. 4. Save your changes. ### Create Additional Addresses for an Existing Institutional or Organizational Account Additional addresses created from the Addresses related list on an institutional or organizational Account record are not synchronized with addresses for the Account's Contacts. 1. On the Account record that requires a new address, click the **Related** tab. 2. In the Addresses related list, click **New**. 3. Complete these fields. Parent Account EDA automatically populates the Parent Account with the Account you started from. Parent Contact Leave blank. Mailing fields Enter the street, city, state, and other mailing address details in the appropriate fields. Default Address If selected, when you save, the new address replaces the existing Account Billing Address on the related record. Seasonal Start Day, Seasonal Start Month, Seasonal Start Year To have the address automatically become the Current Address for the Account on a certain date, select the start day, month, and year. Leave Seasonal Start Year blank to specify that the start date recurs every year. Seasonal End Day, Seasonal End Month, Seasonal End Year Enter the day, month, and year that the address is no longer the Current Address for the Account. Leave Seasonal End Year blank to specify that the end date recurs every year. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Either add seasonal dates to an Address record or select Default Address. Don't do both. If an Address record has both seasonal dates and is marked as the default, then when the seasonal dates end, the same Address record—because it's also the default—continues to be the Current Address on related Contact and Account records. 4. Save your changes. ### Create Additional Addresses for an Existing Contact Additional addresses created from the Addresses related list on a Contact record are not synchronized with addresses for the Contact's related Account. This behavior applies to all Accounts: Household, Administrative, and all other types. 1. On the Contact record that requires a new address, click the **Related** tab. 2. In the Addresses related list, click **New**. 3. Complete these fields. Parent Account Leave blank. Parent Contact EDA automatically populates the Parent Contact with the Contact you started from. Mailing fields Enter the street, city, state, and other mailing address details in the appropriate fields. Default Address If selected, when you save, the new address replaces the existing Contact Mailing Address on the related record. Seasonal Start Day, Seasonal Start Month, Seasonal Start Year To have the address automatically become the Current Address for the Contact on a certain date, select the start day, month, and year. Leave Seasonal Start Year blank to specify that the start date recurs every year. Seasonal End Day, Seasonal End Month, Seasonal End Year Enter the day, month, and year that the address is no longer the Current Address for the Contact. Leave Seasonal End Year blank to specify that the end date recurs every year. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Either add seasonal dates to an Address record or select Default Address. Don't do both. If an Address record has both seasonal dates and is marked as the default, then when the seasonal dates end, the same Address record—because it's also the default—continues to be the Current Address on related Contact and Account records. 4. Save your changes. ## Edit Addresses Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. By default, editing an Address record in any way—even a minor change such as fixing a typo—generates a new Address record with the same relationship or relationships as the original. In other words, if an Address record is related to student Sophia (the Contact) and to Sophia's Household Account, the new Address record is also related to Sophia's Contact and Household Account records. You can instruct EDA to update an Address record rather than create a new Address record when you make minor changes such as fixing typos. For details, see [Manage Simple Changes to Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important If you're _not_ using multiple addresses, just edit the address directly on the Contact or Account record. The instructions here apply to editing Address records for Contacts and Accounts with multiple addresses turned on. ### Edit Addresses for Household Accounts When using multiple addresses with Household Accounts, we recommend always editing the Address record, not the Contact's Mailing Address or the Account's Billing Address, to ensure that changes are synchronized across the Address, Account, and all household Contact records. 1. Navigate to the Account record with an address you want to update. 2. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address you want to update and select **Edit**. 3. Change the address details as needed. 4. To have your changes take effect immediately, select **Default Address**. 5. Save your changes. If you selected Default Address, the Account's Billing Address updates with the changes and so does the Contact's Mailing Address for all household Contacts except those that have Do Not Automatically Update selected. ### Edit Addresses for Non-Household Accounts Edits made to Address records for Administrative, institutional, and organizational Accounts are not synchronized with addresses for the Account's Contacts. 1. Navigate to the Account with an address you want to update. 2. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address you want to update and select **Edit**. 3. Change the address details as needed. 4. To have your changes take effect immediately on the Billing Address, select **Default Address**. 5. Save your changes. Edits made to the Billing Address are reflected on the Address record, and vice versa. ### Edit Addresses for Contacts Edits made to Address records for a Contact with a container Household Account are synchronized with the related Household Account. Edits made to Address records for a Contact under a non-Household Account are not synchronized with the Account. 1. Navigate to the Contact with an address you want to update. 2. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address you want to update and select **Edit**. 3. Change the address details as needed. 4. To have your changes take effect immediately, select **Default Address**. 5. Save your changes. Edits made to the Mailing Address are reflected on the Address record, and vice versa.  If the Contact has a Household Account, the Address record is synchronized with the Account record. And if you selected Default Address, the Contact's Mailing Address is updated on all household Contacts except those that have Do Not Automatically Update selected. ## Mark an Address as Inactive When someone moves and doesn’t provide an updated address, or when an address shouldn’t receive mail for some other reason, mark the address as inactive. - For a Household and other types of Account, navigate to the Account with the address that you want to update. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address and select Edit. Select Inactive and save your changes. - For a Contact, navigate to the Contact with the address you want to update. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address and select Edit. Select Inactive and save your changes. # Address Address represents a home, seasonal, or other address for a Contact or Account. - **[Sample Uses for Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keeping address data up-to-date helps you reach students, households, and other constituents with essential information and services. The Address object tracks address details for related Contact and Account records, so you can track the many addresses associated with a person, a household, or other entities. - **[Configure Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Address object up to date. - **[Create an Address Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. - **[Edit Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. - **[Mark an Address as Inactive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When someone moves and doesn’t provide an updated address, or when an address shouldn’t receive mail for some other reason, mark the address as inactive. - **[Specify a Seasonal Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can set up a Seasonal Address with start and end dates for a Contact or Account, so that the Seasonal Address is automatically set as the Mailing Address at the specified start date. When the end date is reached, Salesforce copies the original Address back to the Address fields. ## Sample Uses for Address Keeping address data up-to-date helps you reach students, households, and other constituents with essential information and services. The Address object tracks address details for related Contact and Account records, so you can track the many addresses associated with a person, a household, or other entities. - University—Track a student's address during the school year separately from their permanent home address. - K-12—Track the two household addresses that a student splits time between. - Any educational institution—Track a seasonal address for a household separate from its primary residence. ## Configure Address Keep the Address object up to date. ### Keep Up with Address Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.

If Installed Before Version

 Configuration Task
1.22 Add the Inactive checkbox to your Address page layouts, as needed. For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

1.16

Add the Mailing County field to your Address page layouts, as needed.

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
## Create an Address Record Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. The first address you enter on a Contact or Account record (in the Mailing Address or Billing Address fields) becomes the Default Address for the Contact or Account. If multi-addresses is enabled in your org, you can add other addresses, such as a home address, an office address, or a seasonal address. Here we show how to create an additional Address record for a Contact or Account using the Addresses related list. We're not directly editing the Mailing Address or Billing Address fields on the Contact or Account record. 1. Go to the Contact or Account record requiring a new address. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the Addresses related list, click **New**. 4. Fill in relevant Address details, such as Mailing Address, City, State, and Zip Code. If you're creating the Address from an Account record, the Parent Account field is automatically populated with the Account name. Likewise, if you're creating the Address from a Contact, the Parent Contact field is automatically populated with the Contact name. ![Create Address form shows the Parent Contact field populated when the Address is being created from a Contact record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/add_update_addr_create_addr.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important If you select the Default Address field, this Address becomes the default and is copied to the Mailing Address or Billing Address fields on the Contact or Account record. If the Contact's container Account is a Household Account, the Default Address is also copied to the Household Account Billing Address fields. 5. Click **Save** when you're done. Or click **Save & New** to create another Address record. ## Edit Addresses Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact. If you need to update an address in an org with multi-addresses enabled, we recommend editing the Address record instead of the Billing Address fields on an Account record or the Mailing Address fields on a Contact record. If you edit the address fields on the Account or Contact, sometimes an additional Address record is created for the updated data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note A simple address change, such as fixing a typo or updating a single address field, is not treated as an update if the Simple Address Change Treated as Update setting is enabled. For details, see [Manage Simple Changes to Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm). 1. Go to the Account or Contact record requiring an address update. 2. In the Addresses related list, click ![actions menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) in the Address row you're updating, and then click **Edit**. ![Access the Edit action in the Address row you're updating.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/add_update_addr_edit_addr.png) 3. Edit the address. 4. Click **Save**. If the Address was marked as the Default Address for the Account or Contact, your changes appear in the change affects the Billing or Mailing Address fields as well. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important If you're _not_ using multiple addresses, just edit the address directly on the Contact or Account record. The instructions here apply to editing Address records for Contacts and Accounts with multiple addresses turned on. ## Mark an Address as Inactive When someone moves and doesn’t provide an updated address, or when an address shouldn’t receive mail for some other reason, mark the address as inactive. - For a Household and other types of Account, navigate to the Account with the address that you want to update. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address and select Edit. Select Inactive and save your changes. - For a Contact, navigate to the Contact with the address you want to update. In the Addresses related list, click the action menu for the Address and select Edit. Select Inactive and save your changes. ## Specify a Seasonal Address You can set up a Seasonal Address with start and end dates for a Contact or Account, so that the Seasonal Address is automatically set as the Mailing Address at the specified start date. When the end date is reached, Salesforce copies the original Address back to the Address fields. To set up a Seasonal Address: 1. [Create a new address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact.") for the Contact or Account, and enter the Address information. 2. Enter the Seasonal Information: Seasonal Start Month, Seasonal Start Day, Seasonal Start Year, Seasonal End Month, Seasonal End Day, and Seasonal End Year. Note that you can leave the year fields blank if you want the Seasonal Address to replace the current Address at the same time every year. 3. Click **Save**. 4. When the Seasonal Address start date is reached, Salesforce automatically copies the Address to the Address fields on the Contact or Account record. If it's a Household Account, Salesforce also copies the seasonal address to the Mailing Address for all related Contacts who don't have **Do Not Automatically Update** enabled. ![Contact record showing a seasonal address update on the start date](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_seasonal_address.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce runs the scheduled job that sets seasonal addresses as the mailing address once per night. If you set up a new Seasonal Address that should be in effect on January 1st, for example, you won't see it copied to the Mailing Addresses until the next day (January 2nd), after the nightly scheduled job has run. The exception to this is when you set the start date for the Seasonal Address to today's date—in this case, the change will take effect immediately. # Address Management Overview Learn how NPSP can help you classify, track, update, and verify addresses for your constituents. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_address_management_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your team puts a great deal of care, time, and effort into crafting solicitation letters, event invites, and other communications. After working so hard on your mailings, you want to make sure your donors receive them and you're not wasting resources sending duplicate mailings or mailing to bad addresses. - **[Summary of Address Management Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_address_management_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP is designed to help nonprofits perform common address management tasks. - **[See Also](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_address_management_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Read these additional articles for step-by-step instructions for specific Address Management tasks. ## Introduction Your team puts a great deal of care, time, and effort into crafting solicitation letters, event invites, and other communications. After working so hard on your mailings, you want to make sure your donors receive them and you're not wasting resources sending duplicate mailings or mailing to bad addresses. Fortunately, the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) comes with robust address management tools to help you track and easily update your constituents’ addresses. NPSP makes address updates easy. Simply update the address on a Contact record, and the change is automatically applied to the other Contacts in the household and the Household Account itself. That way all records within a household share the same address. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Want help keeping up with address changes when your constituents move? Check out [Insights Platform Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.insights_platform.htm) from Salesforce.org. ## Summary of Address Management Features NPSP is designed to help nonprofits perform common address management tasks. With address management you can: - Update address information with one edit. When you update the address for one record in a household, all related records get the same update too. - Track all past addresses and address updates. - Classify addresses as home, work, or other address type. - Mark an address as undeliverable, so you don't include it in your mailings. - Verify addresses as deliverable and update address format to match postal service standards. See [Configure Address Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to configure address management features including address verification, seasonal addresses, and bad address management.") for more information. ## See Also Read these additional articles for step-by-step instructions for specific Address Management tasks. # Address Potential Duplicate Contacts from the Contact Page The NPSP Potential Duplicates component directs users to the NPSP Contact Merge page where they can review, select, and merge potential duplicate contacts. The standard Potential Duplicates component leaves anonymous households behind when used in an org with NPSP. The NPSP Potential Duplicates component fixes this problem by providing an easy way to avoid an unnecessary maintenance burden. It takes the user directly to the Contact Merge page where the potential duplicates are shown and can be resolved. To add this component to the Contact page layout, see [Set Up NPSP Potential Duplicates Pane on Contacts Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up duplicate detection and contact merge to keep your contacts organized and up-to-date."). 1. From the NPSP Potential Duplicates pane or the potential duplicate toast message on the Contact page, click **View Duplicates**. The Merge Duplicate Contact Records page opens with the potential duplicates listed in the table. 2. Follow the steps in [Merge Duplicate Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Contact Merge to find and merge duplicate constituent records."). # Adjustment Types for Payment and Expense Records Accounting Subledger assists you with adjustments by separating source records from transaction journal records. If the source record is updated, we generate new transaction journal records accordingly.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Sometimes funds arrive by chunks over long periods of time. Sometimes they're promised but don't come at all. And sometimes, we make simple errors such as inadvertently swapping two digits. The integrity of accounting data is critical. Although ideally, this data remains permanent after it's created, it occasionally requires adjustments. We recommend these approaches for specific adjustment scenarios. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note There is no Payment object in Salesforce. In the One-Object Model, payments are represented by the primary object. In all other models, payments are represented by the secondary object. See [Object Models for Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting sets enable you to specify which objects and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. It's a flexible approach that lets you map your financial data model to a logical data model, supporting from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees."). - **[Scheduled Payment Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use the four-object model for accrual accounting, we recommend that the total of the secondary object's amounts remain equal to or less than the primary object's amount. If you change either one, update the other to match. - **[Adjustments to Records Marked as Paid](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If a record is marked as paid and later determined to be incorrect, an adjustment is in order. - **[Refunds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Refunds are like other paid transactions, except that you enter them as a negative amount, and mark them as paid. - **[Write-Off Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Write-offs are standard in accrual accounting, which recognizes gift revenue when the gift is committed. Completing a write-off maintains the promised revenue amount, while acknowledging that it won't become available. - **[Differences Between Write-Offs and Refunds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Write-offs are for pledged amounts that you haven't received yet, and refunds are for completed payments that you want to reverse and return to the donor. - **[Negative Payment or Expense Amounts (Reversals)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because you can't easily delete transaction journal records, Accounting Subledger uses negative payment or expense amounts to process refunds and reversals. ## Scheduled Payment Changes If you use the four-object model for accrual accounting, we recommend that the total of the secondary object's amounts remain equal to or less than the primary object's amount. If you change either one, update the other to match. If the sum of the secondary object's amounts exceeds the primary object's amount, Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records only up to the primary object's amount. ## Adjustments to Records Marked as Paid If a record is marked as paid and later determined to be incorrect, an adjustment is in order. While you can change records at any time (for example, to correct errors made during entry), we recommend that you only do so when necessary. Before making any changes, confirm with your accounting teams that adjustments are allowed. Transaction journal records are immutable, so, to make a correction, Accounting Subledger creates adjustment transaction journal records. ### Amount Corrections If there's a mistake in the payment amount, edit the record and then save your changes. For amount increases, decreases, or adjustments, we create delta amounts to account for the difference. For significant changes, such as a change to payment dates or funds, or if a payment is refunded, we reverse the record, and then create another record with the revised values. If you’re using a three- or four-object accounting set, it can allow multiple fund account allocations, each with their own amount. When you change the related parent amount, we don’t automatically update allocations. Therefore, review each child amount and adjust them as needed so that they add up to the parent amount. - The total amount of allocation type records under a parent record must equal the same amount as the parent record. - In a four-object model, the sum of the secondary object payment or expense type records' amounts must equal the overall amount on the primary object's record. ### Payment Status Changes If a record is marked as paid or written off in error, edit the appropriate mapped field on the source record, and then save your changes. This correction creates corresponding reversal transaction journal records. ### Payment Date Changes To correct a payment date, edit the mapped field on the source record, and then save your changes. This correction creates one set of transaction journal records to reverse the existing transaction journal records, and one with the new payment date. ## Refunds Refunds are like other paid transactions, except that you enter them as a negative amount, and mark them as paid. Choose the allocations that the refund comes from and whether it's part of an existing set of records. For example, a refund, full or partial, can apply to a multiple-payment gift or to an entire payment. To reverse a record that's marked as paid, generate a refund by creating another record with a negative amount. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note In these instructions, the Amount, Payment is Paid, Payment Paid Date, and Payment Method field names refer to the accounting set's fields. They don't refer to the fields on your source records that you mapped to the accounting set's fields. When following these instructions, update the values in your corresponding source fields. For example, if the source field mapped to Payment Paid Date is called Payment Date, update the Payment Date field in step 3. 1. Create a new payment or expense record. 2. Enter the refund **Amount** as a negative number. For example, enter \-200 for a US$200 refund. 3. Select **Payment is Paid**. 4. Enter the date on which the refund was processed in **Payment Paid Date**. 5. Enter the method that was used to issue the refund in **Payment Method**. 6. Save your changes. Refunds generate the same transaction journal records as regular payments and expenses. Therefore, if the record still exists with the original amount, Salesforce also creates a debit entry in the receivables account. To avoid that, reduce the amount on the source record by the refund amount after you created the refund payment. For example, you have an opportunity amount of $100, and a donor makes a $100 donation. They later want a refund on the donation that you already marked as paid. If you create a $100 refund on the opportunity, also reduce the opportunity amount to $0 so that we don't create an entry in the receivables account. If applicable, you can also write off a payment so that the original payment is reversed. ## Write-Off Payments Write-offs are standard in accrual accounting, which recognizes gift revenue when the gift is committed. Completing a write-off maintains the promised revenue amount, while acknowledging that it won't become available. Occasionally you receive notice that a donor can't fulfill their pledge and won't send a payment. To write off a payment, follow the same steps for receiving a payment, except select Written Off instead of Paid on the source record. You don't have to set a payment method. Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records after a write-off just as it would for a payment that's marked as paid. However, the transaction and payment types of transaction journal records are marked as written off, indicating that the revenue wasn't received. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note In Accounting Subledger, a payment that's written off isn't the same as a refund. Write-offs and refunds adjust accounting data by crediting and debiting different funds. See [Adjustment Types for Payment and Expense Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger assists you with adjustments by separating source records from transaction journal records. If the source record is updated, we generate new transaction journal records accordingly."). ## Differences Between Write-Offs and Refunds Write-offs are for pledged amounts that you haven't received yet, and refunds are for completed payments that you want to reverse and return to the donor. You can use refunds to enter negative payments that aren’t associated with a specific donation. For example, create a refund for a payment processed in a different period, or to track a payment that wasn’t initially entered in Salesforce. Accounting Subledger creates transaction journal records differently depending on which adjustment you make.
Type of Adjustment Number of Transaction Journal Records Created Type of Transaction Journal Record Created Account Where Transaction Journal Records Are Created
Write-off Two* Credit Default Accrued Account Code
Debit Default Write Off Account Code
Refund Four Credit for the initial payment Payment Method
Debit for the initial payment Fund Name
Credit for the refunded payment Payment Method
Debit for the refunded payment Default Accrued Account Code
\* If you already received payments and only want to write off some of them, Accounting Subledger still creates transaction journal records for those payments like it does for refunds. ## Negative Payment or Expense Amounts (Reversals) Because you can't easily delete transaction journal records, Accounting Subledger uses negative payment or expense amounts to process refunds and reversals. The debit and credit amounts are reversed. For example, Salesforce posts debits in the original fund and credits in the cash fund. See [Accounting Subledger Terminology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_terminology.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting concepts are sometimes unfamiliar to Salesforce users, and vice versa. Let's review some essential terms used in Accounting Subledger."). You can use negative payments to refund a record that wasn't initially entered in Salesforce, even if it exceeds the original amount on the source record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note The original source record (if any) remains marked as paid. For example, you enter a record for US$100 cash to be directed to your general fund. When you run Accounting Subledger, it generates a debit transaction journal record of $100 in the cash account and a $100 credit transaction journal record in the general fund. The next day, a team member deletes the record after realizing that the $100 payment was meant for another department that uses a different system. We don't delete the generated transaction journal records, and you now likely want to reverse them. To create reversals and cancel the original transaction before the team member deleted the primary object record: 1. Change the amounts on the primary and related object records to $0. This change directs Accounting Subledger to create reversal records for any existing transaction journal records. 2. Wait until the Accounting Subledger job runs. 3. Verify that the job created reversal transaction journal records accurately. 4. Delete the primary object record and any related records. # Admissions and Recruitment Insights The Admissions and Recruitment Insights dashboard provides directors with an overall summary of the current recruitment and admission pipeline to plan activities and improve the efficiency of recruitment and the admission process.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
Here are examples of questions that the Admissions and Recruitment Insights dashboard can answer: - What’s the total count of applications received? - What’s the overall status of applications? - What’s the count of applications in each stage? - How many applications convert as admissions? - What is the admission efficiency compared to a previous period? The dashboard is divided into multiple panes with various charts to analyze the application and recruitment data based on KPIs. Admissions and Recruitment Insights | Section | Description | | --- | --- | | Application by Status | Displays the count of applications in each status. | | Total Applications | Displays the total count of applications received for the selected period. | | Application Reviews by Status | Displays the count of application reviews in each status. | | Application Decision Outcome | Displays the count of applications based on the finalized decisions. | | Yield & Admission Efficiency | Displays the efficiency in converting applications to admissions and admissions to enrollment. | | Response to RFI | Displays the total count of the RFIs and count of RFIs in each status. | | Leads by Source | Displays the lead sources and the count of applications generated from each source. | # Admissions Connect Accessibility Standards Admissions Connect is designed with accessibility in mind. We're committed to providing an on-demand enterprise app that’s accessible to all individuals, including users who work with assistive devices, such as speech recognition software and screen readers. To help meet our goal of inclusive design, Lightning Experience and Admissions Connect strive for compliance with Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG 2.1 level AA), aligning to the Revised 508 Standards, and EN 301 549 international standards. You can find Accessibility Conformance Reports (ACRs) for Admissions Connect and other Salesforce products on our [Product Accessibility Status](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/508_accessibility/) page. You can also visit [Accessibility Standards](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=accessibility_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help for general recommendations on screen readers, browsers, and more. # Admissions Connect Apex Class Descriptions Use these descriptions of the Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) in Admissions Connect to inform your decisions when using TDTM. To see a complete list of the trigger handlers that Admissions Connect uses, click the App Launcher icon and search for and select **Trigger Handlers**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you see a record on the Trigger Handlers page that isn't listed here, it's probably for EDA or another product. For descriptions of EDA triggers, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm).
Object Class Name Description
ActionPlan ActionPlanRequiredItems_TDTM When the fields Completed Required Items or Total Required Items on an Action Plan are updated, this class recalculates the Checklist Completion field on an Application. If the Action Plan is not associated with an Application, nothing happens.
Application_Material_Mapping__c ApplicationMaterialMappingValidate_TDTM

This class provides validation for Application Material Mapping records.

  • An Action Plan Template or an Action Plan Template Item must be specified, but not both.

  • If the Action Plan Template Item is a Task, an Application Material Type must be specified. 

  • If the Action Plan Template Item isn’t a Task or if the mapping record is configuring an Action Plan Template, an Application Material Type can’t be specified.  
Application_Material_Type__c ApplicationMaterialTypeValidation_TDTM This class ensures that Application Material Type records are valid.
Application_Review__c ApplicationReviewEnd_TDTM

This class ensures the integrity of the Review End Date field for Application Reviews. The field value can’t be set if:

  • A user hasn’t made an Admissions Recommendation selection

  • A user tries to submit with an Admissions Recommendation using a default value

  • A user tries to manually update the date to something in the future
Application_Review__c ApplicationReviewPreventUpdate_TDTM This class prevents the Admissions Recommendation and Review End Date field from changing on Application Reviews after the Submitted checkbox is selected. 
Application_Review__c ApplicationReviewQueues_TDTM This class ensures a Queue can’t be assigned more Application Reviews than there are members in the Queue.
Application_Review__c ApplicationReviewRollupToApp_TDTM This class counts the number of Application Reviews assigned to an Application and populates the Assigned Reviews Count field with this number. The count is also used in the Assigned Reviews field, which provides a link to manage those reviews.
Application_Review__c ApplicationReviewSingle_TDTM A user can’t review the same Application more than once. This class prevents a user from being assigned as a reviewer if they already have an Application Review record for that Application.
ContentDocumentLink ContentDocumentLink_TDTM Relates Content Document records to Document Checklist Items using Document Type Mapping custom metadata records. If a Content Version record has a Description that matches a Document Type and its related Content Document Link points to an Application, the Content Document Link is updated to point to a Document Checklist Item instead.
ContentVersion ContentVersionChangeEvent_TDTM After a new Content Version record for a Document Checklist Item is created, a Record_Change_Event__e event is published with the ID of the associated Document Checklist Item. This ID is stored in the Document_Checklist_Item_Id__c field of the platform event. The Admissions Connect Components component listens to this event and refreshes the Document Checklist Item record if there’s an event with a matching ID.
DocumentChecklistItem DocumentChecklistItemApplicant_TDTM For Document Checklist Items, when the File Pertains To field is blank and the Original Parent Record points to an Application record, this class populates the File Pertains To field with an applicant’s name. 
DocumentChecklistItem DocumentChecklistItemCompletion_TDTM When the Status field is updated on a Document Checklist Item record and the Original Parent Record is an Application, this class recalculates the Checklist Completion field on the associated Application. 
Task TaskApplicant_TDTM For Tasks, when the Name field is blank and the Related To field points to an Application record, this class populates the Name field on Tasks with the applicant’s name. 
# Admissions Connect Components Admissions Connect comes with custom components that are used in the Lightning record pages provided with Admissions Connect. Some components are available in Lightning App Builder as well as Experience Builder. Use this article as reference when creating new pages or if you want to know more about the components. - **[Admissions Connect Component Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use this table as reference when creating new pages, or to know more about the components. - **[Applicant Application Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component lets applicants submit their Application and view record and status details. You can’t customize the component to show other fields. The Submit Application button shows when the Application Status field is not specified, Started, or Incomplete. If the status is any other value, including custom ones, applicants don’t see the button. - **[Applicant Application Viewer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component lets applicants view their Application requirements in a portal. It provides a similar look and feel as the Reviewer Application Reader, with a navigation region to scan the list of requirements and a main region that provides a single scrollable view. - **[Application Checklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component gives users an at-a-glance overview of an Application and provides quick access to review and verify requirements. A progress bar shows the overall completion of the requirements. The Completed Required Items and Total Required Items fields on the Action Plan record determine the progress. Only required items count towards completion. You can refresh the component at any time. - **[Application Material Type JSON Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component lets administrators specify the JSON data shown for an Application Material Type record, if using imported Common App data. - **[Application Response Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component lets users view data the applicant provided on their application. This same data is displayed in the Reviewer Application Reader. However, this component displays only Action Plan Items that are Tasks, it doesn't display Document Checklist Items. The component’s search lets you find specific fields, including fields in tables for child records and JSON fields. Sections with search matches are auto-expanded. - **[Document Checklist Item Preview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component provides a preview of the file attached to a Document Checklist Item record. When a new version of the file is uploaded, the preview refreshes. - **[Reviewer Application Reader](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component provides a reading experience for application reviewers. The navigation region lets you quickly see the overall progress and scan the list of requirements for the application. The main region provides a single scrollable view to display Action Plans and Action Plan Items—the data and documents—associated with an Application. - **[Reviewer Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component provides a place for application reviewers to enter comments about an application and make their Admissions Recommendation. A reviewer's recommendation and comments are saved automatically while they’re reviewing the application. This allows reviewers to make a preliminary recommendation without submitting. After a reviewer submits a recommendation, the component updates with their selection and can’t be edited again. - **[Reviewer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component lets users view and manage Application Reviews for an Application. At-a-glance, the component shows the reviewers assigned to an Application and the status of each review. Users with the correct permissions can click Manage to assign Users and Queues. Optionally, you can notify users of new assignments. - **[Reviewer Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This component shows an application’s review status and final admissions decision. Users can see how many reviews are assigned and how many of those are completed. When a user is assigned a review, the component displays their current review status. When a final admissions decision is made, the component is updated. ## Admissions Connect Component Overview Use this table as reference when creating new pages, or to know more about the components.
Supported Record Page Component Name Available In
Application Admissions Connect Components Experience Builder*
Application Admissions Connect Components Experience Builder*
Application Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder
Application Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder
Application and Application Review Admissions Connect Components

Lightning App Builder and Experience Builder

In Experience Builder, the component is supported on the Application page only.

Application Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder
Application Review Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder and Experience Builder
Application Review Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder and Experience Builder
Application Material Type Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder
Document Checklist Item Admissions Connect Components Lightning App Builder
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note \*These Admissions Connect components support mobile devices in Experience Builder. ## Applicant Application Header This component lets applicants submit their Application and view record and status details. You can’t customize the component to show other fields. The Submit Application button shows when the Application Status field is not specified, Started, or Incomplete. If the status is any other value, including custom ones, applicants don’t see the button. If you’ve configured a submission window with the Open Date and Due Date fields on the Application object, applicants can submit their Application only during the window. This component includes a Status for Submission property that automatically updates the Application Status when an application is submitted to a custom value.  For details about application submission, see [Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect.") and [Verify Your Applicant Portal Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the tasks to help ensure that applicants are successful in the portal."). ![Image of the Applicant Application Header component in a portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/applicant_application_header_component.png) ## Applicant Application Viewer This component lets applicants view their Application requirements in a portal. It provides a similar look and feel as the Reviewer Application Reader, with a navigation region to scan the list of requirements and a main region that provides a single scrollable view. - On desktop, applicants see a navigation region that lets them scan the list of requirements and a main region that provides a single scrollable view of the entire application. - On mobile devices, there’s no scrollable view of requirements. The navigation region shows by default and applicants open requirements one at a time. In addition, rejected items that are required show in a carousel at the top of the page. Applicants can even use the device’s camera to submit pictures of application documents. Application Material Mapping records determine which Action Plan Items show up in the navigation and whether or not the content for an Action Plan Item gets displayed in the portal. In addition, the mapping records control custom messaging that applicants see, such as instructions for submitting a requirement or information about why the contents are hidden. For more information, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). To give applicants additional transparency, if a document is rejected, the applicant sees the Rejection Comment in the portal, too. ![Applicant Application Viewer component in a sample applicant portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/applicant_application_viewer_component.png) ## Application Checklist This component gives users an at-a-glance overview of an Application and provides quick access to review and verify requirements. A progress bar shows the overall completion of the requirements. The Completed Required Items and Total Required Items fields on the Action Plan record determine the progress. Only required items count towards completion. You can refresh the component at any time. All Action Plan Tasks and Document Checklist Items initially appear in the Incomplete Application Checklist Items list. When the Task’s Status field is Completed or the Document Checklist Item’s Status field is Accepted, the items move to the Completed Application Checklist Items list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Document Checklist Items move to the completed list when the Accepted (`IsAccepted__c`) field is true. Setting the Status field to Accepted automatically sets Accepted to true. When a user clicks on the requirement name in the Checklist Item column, a preview of the document or data displays. If a document's file type isn’t supported or there’s an error, the preview displays a blank space instead. To update an item’s status, users can click the View Record link in the dropdown menu for the row. If users have the necessary permissions, they see buttons to accept or reject documents in the preview window. For detailed permission information, see [Set Up Quick Document Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let verifiers and other members of your admissions staff verify application documents directly from the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components or the Document Checklist Item record page. From the Document Checklist Item record page, admissions staff can also upload new versions of documents and automatically see the updated document in the preview."). The Application Checklist is provided by default on the Application page for Admissions Connect. ![Application Checklist component showing items in the Completed Items and Incomplete Items lists](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_checklist_component.png) The Application Checklist also includes Test details. With the necessary permissions, users can create new Tests and associated Test Scores. When a user saves the Test and Test Score records, Admissions Connect updates the Checklist component. ![The Education History component lets users enter multiple tests and their associated scores and subject area.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_test_score.png) From the Application Checklist, users can navigate through new Education History records and edit existing ones. When creating a new Education History record, the Contact ID of the applicant is pre-populated. The footer and its respective buttons change based on whether the user edits all or a selection of records in the list. Plus, the Application Checklist component refreshes after the changes are saved. ![The Education History component lets users create and update Education History records.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_education_history.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed Admissions Connect version 1.16 or earlier, [install Admissions Connect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest) in a sandbox, and then use a [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) to move the Edit Education History field set into production. ## Application Material Type JSON Configuration This component lets administrators specify the JSON data shown for an Application Material Type record, if using imported Common App data. This component is provided by default on the Application Material Type page for Admissions Connect. It can’t be added to any other record page and is shown only when configuring an Application Material Type record for the Application JSON, Contact JSON, or Education History JSON fields. ![Image of the JSON Data Preview with some Student Personal Info fields selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_material_types_json_config_component.png) ## Application Response Details This component lets users view data the applicant provided on their application. This same data is displayed in the Reviewer Application Reader. However, this component displays only Action Plan Items that are Tasks, it doesn't display Document Checklist Items. The component’s search lets you find specific fields, including fields in tables for child records and JSON fields. Sections with search matches are auto-expanded. This component is provided by default on the Application page for Admissions Connect. The component is nested in a Tab component with the tab label Applicant Responses.  ![Application Response Details component showing an expanded region for Application Details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_response_details_component.png) ## Document Checklist Item Preview This component provides a preview of the file attached to a Document Checklist Item record. When a new version of the file is uploaded, the preview refreshes. This is provided by default on the Document Checklist Item page for Admissions Connect and can’t be added to any other record page. The Admissions Connect - Refresh Record platform event and the ContentVersionChangeEvent\_TDTM Apex class power the preview’s refresh when new documents are uploaded. For more information, see [Admissions Connect Apex Class Descriptions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_tdtm_apex_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these descriptions of the Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) in Admissions Connect to inform your decisions when using TDTM."). ![Document Checklist Item record showing the Document Checklist Item Preview component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/dci_preview_component.png) ## Reviewer Application Reader This component provides a reading experience for application reviewers. The navigation region lets you quickly see the overall progress and scan the list of requirements for the application. The main region provides a single scrollable view to display Action Plans and Action Plan Items—the data and documents—associated with an Application. This component includes a built-in PDF viewer with tools to help users focus, rotate pages, skip to the first or last page, zoom, and even see a document outline if there is one. Explore the toolbar to see what else you can do. Just keep in mind that these tools are available to PDF files only. If users have the necessary permissions, they see buttons to accept or reject documents in the main region. For detailed permission information, see [Set Up Quick Document Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let verifiers and other members of your admissions staff verify application documents directly from the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components or the Document Checklist Item record page. From the Document Checklist Item record page, admissions staff can also upload new versions of documents and automatically see the updated document in the preview."). This component is provided by default on the Application Review page for Admissions Connect. ![Reviewer Application Reader component showing a navigation menu expanded and an image of a recommendation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_materials_reader_component.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure that the Reviewer Application Reader component's continuous functionality works, don't add other components below it on the page. ## Reviewer Feedback This component provides a place for application reviewers to enter comments about an application and make their Admissions Recommendation. A reviewer's recommendation and comments are saved automatically while they’re reviewing the application. This allows reviewers to make a preliminary recommendation without submitting. After a reviewer submits a recommendation, the component updates with their selection and can’t be edited again. You can customize the component to display custom feedback questions, see [Set Up Reviewer Feedback Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the questions that you want your reviewers to consider when they assess applicants."). This component is provided by default on the Application Review page for Admissions Connect. 
Reviewer Feedback component showing a pending review with commentsReviewer Feedback component showing a submitted recommendation with comments
## Reviewer Management This component lets users view and manage Application Reviews for an Application. At-a-glance, the component shows the reviewers assigned to an Application and the status of each review. Users with the correct permissions can click Manage to assign Users and Queues. Optionally, you can notify users of new assignments. For more details about the component and the permissions required to manage Application Reviews, see [Set Up Staff to Assign a Reviewer Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Application Reviews can be assigned using automation or manually from the Application or Application Review record pages. You can even use a mass action from the Application list view to select multiple Applications and assign multiple reviewers. Most institutions use a combination of automation and manual assignment.").  This component is provided by default on the Application and Application Review pages for Admissions Connect. ![Reviewer Management component showing two open reviews](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/reviewer_management_component.png) ## Reviewer Snapshot This component shows an application’s review status and final admissions decision. Users can see how many reviews are assigned and how many of those are completed. When a user is assigned a review, the component displays their current review status. When a final admissions decision is made, the component is updated. This component is provided by default on the Application page for Admissions Connect.  
Reviewer Snapshot component showing the Start My Review buttonReviewer Snapshot component showing a Final Admission Decision of Admit
# Admissions Connect Default Page Configurations Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. Most assets are unmanaged, which means you don't receive updates automatically. Use the information in this article to keep up-to-date with releases. - **[Release Maintenance Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the available resources to keep up with release information. - **[Action Plan Compact Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a compact layout for Action Plans to select key information to display to your staff. - **[Application Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the page layout for Applications to organize the information to show your staff. - **[Application Compact Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a compact layout for applications to show key information to your staff. - **[Application Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a record page for Applications so that your staff can access relevant information. - **[Application Path](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Application Path component to guide your staff through the steps of an application. - **[Application Review Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the page layout for Application Reviews to organize the information to show your staff. - **[Application Review Compact Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a compact layout for Application Reviews to show key information to your staff. - **[Application Review Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a record page for Application Reviews so that your staff can access relevant information. - **[Application Review In-App Guidance Prompt](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Application Review in-app guidance prompt to help reviewers understand how to save and submit recommendations. - **[Application Material Mapping Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the page layout for Application Material Mappings to organize the information to show your staff. - **[Application Material Type Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the page layout for Application Material Types to organize the information to show to your staff. - **[Application Material Type Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a record page for Application Material Types so that your staff can access relevant information. - **[Document Checklist Item Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the page layout for Document Checklist Items to organize the information to show your staff. - **[Document Checklist Item Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a record page for Document Checklist Items so that your staff can access relevant information. ## Release Maintenance Information Learn about the available resources to keep up with release information. For details about changes in a specific release, such as recommendations on what to update in your org, review the posts in the [Admissions Connect Release Announcements](https://trailblazers.salesforce.com/_ui/core/chatter/groups/groupprofilepage?g=0f94s000000gxeh) group. You can also check out the [Admissions Connect Data Dictionary](https://salesforce.quip.com/ajmualdaytoe#akeacaqd1bj), which lists the version that objects and fields were first introduced. For steps on how to update these assets, see [Customize Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm). ## Action Plan Compact Layout Set up a compact layout for Action Plans to select key information to display to your staff. Package Status: Unmanaged Label: Action Plan Compact Layout - Admissions Staff API Name: Action\_Plan\_Compact\_Layout Fields: - Name - Status - Owner Name - Start Date - Target Record ## Application Page Layout Set up the page layout for Applications to organize the information to show your staff. Package Status: Managed, but updates to this layout aren't pushed Label: Application Layout - Admissions Staff Fields: - Left column - Application Name - Applicant - Applying To - Application Type - Term - Preparer - Right column - Application Status - Application Plan - Application Date - Open Date - Due Date - Application Decision Date - Applicant Decision Date Related Lists: - Action Plans - Application Reviews ## Application Compact Layout Set up a compact layout for applications to show key information to your staff. Package Status: Unmanaged Label: Application Compact Layout - Admissions Staff API Name: Application\_Compact\_Layout Fields: - Application Name - Applicant - Applying To - Term - Application Type - Application Plan - Checklist Completion ## Application Lightning Record Page Set up a record page for Applications so that your staff can access relevant information. Package Status: Unmanaged Type of page: Record Page Label: Application Record - Admissions Staff API Name: Application\_Record Object: Application Page Template: Header and Right Sidebar Header Region: Path component and Highlights Panel Main Region: Tabs component with these tab names and nested components - Checklist: Application Checklist component - Applicant Responses: Application Response Details component - Related: Action Plans List - Financial Services Cloud component - Application Details: Record Detail component Right Sidebar: Reviewer Snapshot component with a Tabs component underneath with these tab names and nested components - Application Reviews: Reviewer Management component - Feed: Chatter component ## Application Path Set up the Application Path component to guide your staff through the steps of an application. Package Status: Unmanaged Path Name: Application Review Status - Admissions API Name: Application\_Review\_Status Object: Application Record Type: --Master-- Picklist: Application Review Status Picklist Value Guidance for Success: - Incomplete: We're waiting for the applicant to submit their requirements. For an application that's almost complete, or one that was in a later stage and is now Incomplete again, consider reaching out to the applicant about their submission. - Ready for Audit: Assign this application to an admissions staff member to verify or process. - Audit: Verify that required items have been submitted. - Ready for Review: All set! You're ready to assign reviewers. - In Review: The application is in the reviewer's hands. - Reviewed: All reviewers have submitted their recommendations. ## Application Review Page Layout Set up the page layout for Application Reviews to organize the information to show your staff. Package Status: Managed, but updates to this layout aren't pushed Label: Application Review Layout - Admissions Staff Fields: - Application Review Name - Application - Review Comments ## Application Review Compact Layout Set up a compact layout for Application Reviews to show key information to your staff. Package Status: Unmanaged Name: Application Review Compact Layout - Admissions Staff API Name: Application\_Review\_Compact\_Layout Fields: - Owner - Application - Applicant - Review End Date - Review Due Date - Admissions Recommendation - Submitted ## Application Review Lightning Record Page Set up a record page for Application Reviews so that your staff can access relevant information. Package Status: Unmanaged Type of page: Record Page Label: Application Review Record - Admissions Staff API Name: Application\_Review\_Record Object: Application Review Page Template: Header and Right Sidebar Header Region: Highlights Panel Main Region: Reviewer Application Reader Right Sidebar: Tabs component with these tab names and nested components - Review: Reviewer Feedback component - Application Reviews: Reviewer Management component ## Application Review In-App Guidance Prompt Set up the Application Review in-app guidance prompt to help reviewers understand how to save and submit recommendations. Package Status: Unmanaged In-App Guidance Type: Single Prompt Prompt Type: Floating Prompt Position: Top Right Title: How does submission work? Body: Just like email drafts, we automatically save all of your review feedback. When you've finalized your review and recommendation, click Submit My Recommendation. Dismiss Button Label: Got It Action: None Schedule - Frequency - Times to Show: 2 - Days In Between: 2 Profiles: No profile restrictions Permissions: No permission restrictions Name: Application Review How To - Admissions Staff API Name: Application\_Review\_How\_To Description: Helps reviewers understand how recommendations are saved and submitted ## Application Material Mapping Page Layout Set up the page layout for Application Material Mappings to organize the information to show your staff. Package Status: Managed, but updates to this layout aren't pushed Label: Application Material Mapping Layout - Admissions Director Information section fields: - Left column - Mapping ID - Action Plan Template - Action Plan Template Item - Application Material Type - Right Column - Owner - Sequence Portal Settings section fields: - Show Navigation to Applicants - Show Content to Applicants - Let Applicants Upload Files - Applicant Instruction Message - Applicant Hidden Content Message ## Application Material Type Page Layout Set up the page layout for Application Material Types to organize the information to show to your staff. Package Status: Managed, but updates to this layout aren't pushed Label: Application Material Type Layout - Admissions Director Fields: - Left column - Application Material Type Name - Description - Source Object - Data Source Type - Child Object - Field Set for Display - Child Object Filter Field - Child Object Sort By Field - Child Object Soft Direction - Right column - Owner Related Lists: Application Material Mappings ## Application Material Type Lightning Record Page Set up a record page for Application Material Types so that your staff can access relevant information. Package Status: Unmanaged Type of page: Record Page Label: Application Material Type Record - Admissions Director API Name: Application\_Material\_Type\_Record Object: Application Material Type Page Template: Grouped Header and One Region Header Region: Highlights Panel component Main Region: Tabs component with these tab names and nested components - Related: Related Lists component - Details: Record Detail component Underneath the Tabs Component is the Application Material Type JSON Configuration component. ## Document Checklist Item Page Layout Set up the page layout for Document Checklist Items to organize the information to show your staff. Package Status: Managed, but updates to this layout aren't pushed Label: Document Checklist Item Layout - Admissions Staff Fields:  - Left Column - Name - Document Type - Original Parent Record - Instructions - Required - Right Column - Status - Owner Name - File Pertains To - Rejection Reason - Rejection Comment Related Lists: - Files - Approval History ## Document Checklist Item Lightning Record Page Set up a record page for Document Checklist Items so that your staff can access relevant information. Package Status: Unmanaged Type of page: Record Page Label: Document Checklist Item - Admissions Staff API Name: Document\_Checklist\_Item\_Record Object: Document Checklist Item Page Template: Header and Right Sidebar Header Region: Highlights Panel component configured with - Visible Action Buttons: 3 - Actions: Reject, Accept, Upload Files, Upload New Version Main Region: Document Checklist Item Preview Right Sidebar: Tabs component with these tab names and nested components - Related: Related List - Single component configured with - Parent Record: Use This Document Checklist Item - Related List: Files - Related List Type: Default - Details: Record Detail component # Admissions Connect Documentation Streamline your admissions operations and engage with applicants to help them connect with the right teams and services at your school or institution. - **[Learn About Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Transform your institution’s admissions operations with features designed to streamline your processes. From territory management to configurable application requirements and checklists, Admissions Connect makes it easier for your staff to stay focused on their tasks and support learners who seek to enroll in your institution. - **[Install Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the release notes and prerequisites, and then install Admissions Connect. - **[Admissions Connect Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides a flexible approach to security that uses standard Salesforce profiles, permission sets, and sharing settings. This approach lets you expose different data sets to different groups of users. For example, admissions directors typically have more permissions than a reviewer or verifier. - **[Set Up School Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_school_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring your institution’s data into Admissions Connect and set up your users to efficiently manage all of your admissions operations in one place. - **[Admissions Connect Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_territories.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Enterprise Territory Management to assign territories, track success metrics, and build relationships with prospective students. Recruiters can use reports to identify relationships to prioritize and to better engage with prospective students. - **[Admissions Connect Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the requirements for implementing Admissions Connect, such as understanding Action Plans and Applications. - **[Set Up Admission Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Simplify the application review process by providing a streamlined, centralized, and customizable experience that increases efficiency and productivity for your admissions staff. - **[Set Up the Admissions Connect App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Streamline application reviews, increase applicant engagement, and facilitate collaboration across institutions with the Admissions Connect app. Configure the navigation, record pages, and more, to suit your institution’s needs. - **[Build Application Forms with OmniStudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use OmniStudio with Admissions Connect to create application forms for your applicant portal. Plus, use flows to assign Action Plan Templates to applications. - **[Set Up a Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up an Admissions Connect portal so that unauthenticated guest users can interact with your institutions. For example, create a portal for applicants to upload documents and check on their application status, or for alumni to connect with one another. - **[Verify Your Admissions Connect Staff Review Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_verify_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure list views to stay on top of applications and learn how to add reviewers to manage applications. Reviewers can then verify or upload documents and make the final admission decision. - **[Report on Recruiting and Admissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_report_ht.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring application insights into one place and discover trends in your admissions cycle by using the Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator. - **[Manage Application Data and Documents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_admin_data_mgmt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to work with documents that your staff or applicants upload to Admissions Connect. - **[Admissions Connect Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about additional configurations to implement Admissions Connect, such as maintaining permission sets, page layouts, custom components, Apex classes, and accessibility standards. Get started with your implementation with the Recruitment and Admissions Workbook. - **[GDPR for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Admissions Connect. # Admissions Connect Entity Relationship Diagram Understand how objects relate to one another and how to get more information about the Admissions Connect data model. The Education Data Architecture (EDA) is the framework for Admissions Connect’s data model. Admissions Connect allows the Application object from EDA to be associated to Application Reviews and the Salesforce standard Action Plan objects. Data from Salesforce, synced from your student information system (SIS) or imported from Common App, can be displayed in the Application Review record by the Admissions Connect components. Admissions Connect provides a single Contact record that can follow a person from suspect, prospect, and student. Here’s the high-level overview of how the objects work together. - Application Review records let you associate a single Application with multiple reviews. - Action Plan Templates let you define different requirements for different types of applications. - Document Checklist Items collect and display application documents, such as PDFs and images of transcripts, supplemental materials, IDs, or other items. - Tasks collect and display application data, such as the applicant’s birth date or address. - Application Material Type records specify the field set related to the Task in an Action Plan. - Application Material Mapping records determine how the Action Plan Templates—your application requirements—display in relation to one another. - Action Plans are created from your Action Plan Templates and are assigned to Applications to let admissions staff and applicants know what requirements must be completed and submitted. Get familiar with the entity relationships and review the data model more closely using your favorite inspection tool, such as [Schema Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=schema_builder_working.htm). [Admissions Connect Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sfdo-docs.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/admissions_connect_erd.pdf) (in PDF format) ![Diagram of the Admissions Connect data architecture](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/admissions_connect_erd.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you’re looking for an accessible version of the ERD, check out [Learn About Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what Actions Plans are and how you can use them in Admissions Connect to define application requirements.") for a more detailed text explanation of the key Admissions Connect objects. # Admissions Connect Objects and Fields Familiarize yourself with the objects and fields used by Admissions Connect. View [Admissions Connect Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/ajMUALDAYtOE) (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). # Admissions Connect Permission Set Details Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution. ## Release Maintenance Information The Admissions Connect role-based permission sets are unmanaged. You don't receive updates to these permission sets automatically. Use the information in these tables to keep the permission sets up to date with releases. Just keep in mind that required fields aren't listed in the tables because they are included by default. You can also check out the [Admissions Connect Data Dictionary](https://salesforce.quip.com/ajmualdaytoe#akeacaqd1bj) to find out when a field was first introduced. - **[Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the permissions that are required to set up and manage Admissions Connect. - **[Admissions Connect - Review Applications for Internal Users Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the permissions that internal users need to review applications. - **[Admissions Connect - Review Applications for External Users Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the permissions that external users need to review applications. - **[Admissions Connect - Verify Applications Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the permissions that are required to verify applications. - **[Admissions Connect - Recruit Applicants Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the permissions that your staff needs to manage applicants. - **[Admissions Connect - Submit Applications Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set to give staff the access that they need to work with application submissions. ## Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage Permission Set Review the permissions that are required to set up and manage Admissions Connect. ### Accounts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Action Plans Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Completed Required Items | √ |   | | Status | √ | √ | | Total Required Items | √ |   | ### Action Plan Templates Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | ### Admissions Connect - Refresh Records Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | ### Application Material Mappings Tab Permissions: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan Template | √ | √ | | Action Plan Template Item | √ | √ | | Application Material Type | √ | √ | | Applicant Hidden Content Message | √ | √ | | Applicant Instruction Message | √ | √ | | Let Applicants Upload Files | √ | √ | | Show Content to Applicants | √ | √ | | Show Navigation to Applicants | √ | √ | ### Application Material Types Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Child Object | √ | √ | | Child Object Filter Field | √ | √ | | Child Object Sort By Field | √ | √ | | Child Object Sort Direction | √ | √ | | Data Source Type | √ | √ | | Description | √ | √ | | Field Set for Display | √ | √ | | JSON Metadata for Display | √ | √ | ### Applications Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Applicant | √ | √ | | Applicant Decision Date | √ | √ | | Application Date | √ | √ | | Application Decision Date | √ | √ | | Application JSON | √ | √ | | Application Plan | √ | √ | | Application Review Status | √ | √ | | Application Status | √ | √ | | Application Type | √ | √ | | Applying To | √ | √ | | Assigned Reviews | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews Count | √ |   | | Checklist Completion | √ | √ | | Due Date | √ | √ | | Initial Creation Date | √ | √ | | Open Date | √ | √ | | Preparer | √ | √ | | Term | √ | √ | ### Application Reviews Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Admissions Recommendation | √ | √ | | Applicant | √ |   | | Review Comments | √ | √ | | Review Due Date | √ | √ | | Review End Date | √ | √ | | Reviewer | √ |   | | Review Start Date | √ | √ | | Review Status | √ |   | | Submitted | √ |   | ### Contacts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Document Checklist Items Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete | √ | | View All Records | √ | | Modify All Records | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | √ | √ | | Frozen | √ | √ | | Instructions | √ | √ | | Rejection Comment | √ | √ | | Rejection Reason | √ | √ | | Required | √ | √ | | Uploaded By | √ | √ | ### Terms Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ## Admissions Connect - Review Applications for Internal Users Permission Set Learn about the permissions that internal users need to review applications. ### Accounts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Action Plans Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Completed Required Items | √ |   | | Status | √ |   | | Total Required Items | √ |   | ### Action Plan Templates Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Admissions Connect - Refresh Records Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | ### Application Material Mappings Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan Template | √ |   | | Action Plan Template Item | √ |   | | Application Material Type | √ |   | | Applicant Hidden Content Message | √ |   | | Applicant Instruction Message | √ |   | | Let Applicants Upload Files | √ |   | | Show Content to Applicants | √ |   | | Show Navigation to Applicants | √ |   | ### Application Material Types Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Child Object | √ |   | | Child Object Filter Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort By Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort Direction | √ |   | | Data Source Type | √ |   | | Description | √ |   | | Field Set for Display | √ |   | | JSON Metadata for Display | √ |   | ### Applications Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Applicant | √ |   | | Applicant Decision Date | √ |   | | Application Date | √ |   | | Application Decision Date | √ |   | | Application JSON | √ |   | | Application Plan | √ |   | | Application Review Status | √ | | | Application Status | √ |   | | Application Type | √ |   | | Applying To | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews Count | √ |   | | Checklist Completion | √ |   | | Due Date | √ |   | | Initial Creation Date | √ |   | | Open Date | √ |   | | Preparer | √ |   | | Term | √ |   | ### Application Reviews Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Admissions Recommendation | √ | √ | | Applicant | √ |   | | Review Comments | √ | √ | | Review Due Date | √ |   | | Review End Date | √ | √ | | Review Start Date | √ | √ | | Reviewer | √ |   | | Review Status | √ |   | | Submitted | √ |   | ### Contacts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Document Checklist Items Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | √ |   | | Frozen | √ |   | | Instructions | √ |   | | Rejection Comment | √ |   | | Rejection Reason | √ |   | | Required | √ |   | | Uploaded By | √ |   | ### Terms Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ## Admissions Connect - Review Applications for External Users Permission Set Learn about the permissions that external users need to review applications. ### System Permissions Access Activities ### Accounts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Action Plans Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Completed Required Items | √ |   | | Status | √ |   | | Total Required Items | √ |   | ### Action Plan Templates Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Admissions Connect - Refresh Records Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | ### Application Material Mappings Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan Template | √ |   | | Action Plan Template Item | √ |   | | Application Material Type | √ |   | | Applicant Hidden Content Message | √ |   | | Applicant Instruction Message | √ |   | | Let Applicants Upload Files | √ |   | | Show Content to Applicants | √ |   | | Show Navigation to Applicants | √ |   | ### Application Material Types Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Child Object | √ |   | | Child Object Filter Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort By Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort Direction | √ |   | | Data Source Type | √ |   | | Description | √ |   | | Field Set for Display | √ |   | | JSON Metadata for Display | √ |   | ### Applications Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Applicant | √ |   | | Applicant Decision Date | √ |   | | Application Date | √ |   | | Application Decision Date | √ |   | | Application JSON | √ |   | | Application Plan | √ |   | | Application Review Status | √ |   | | Application Status | √ |   | | Application Type | √ |   | | Applying To | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews Count | √ |   | | Checklist Completion | √ | | | Due Date | √ |   | | Initial Creation Date | √ |   | | Open Date | √ |   | | Preparer | √ |   | | Term | √ |   | ### Application Reviews Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Admissions Recommendation | √ | √ | | Applicant | √ |   | | Review Comments | √ | √ | | Review Due Date | √ |   | | Review End Date | √ | √ | | Review Start Date | √ | √ | | Review Status | √ |   | | Reviewer | √ |   | | Submitted | √ |   | ### Contacts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Document Checklist Items Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | √ |   | | Frozen | √ |   | | Instructions | √ |   | | Rejection Comment | √ |   | | Rejection Reason | √ |   | | Required | √ |   | | Uploaded By | √ |   | ### Terms Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ## Admissions Connect - Verify Applications Permission Set Review the permissions that are required to verify applications. ### Accounts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Action Plans Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Completed Required Items | √ |   | | Status | √ | √ | | Total Required Items | √ |   | ### Action Plan Templates Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Admissions Connect - Refresh Records Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | ### Application Material Mappings Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan Template | √ |   | | Action Plan Template Item | √ |   | | Application Material Type | √ |   | | Applicant Hidden Content Message | √ |   | | Applicant Instruction Message | √ |   | | Let Applicants Upload Files | √ |   | | Show Content to Applicants | √ |   | | Show Navigation to Applicants | √ |   | ### Application Material Types Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Child Object | √ |   | | Child Object Filter Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort By Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort Direction | √ |   | | Data Source Type | √ |   | | Description | √ |   | | Field Set for Display | √ |   | | JSON Metadata for Display | √ |   | ### Applications Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Applicant | √ |   | | Applicant Decision Date | √ |   | | Application Date | √ |   | | Application Decision Date | √ |   | | Application JSON | √ |   | | Application Plan | √ |   | | Application Review Status | √ |   | | Application Status | √ |   | | Application Type | √ |   | | Applying To | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews | √ |   | | Assigned Reviews Count | √ |   | | Checklist Completion | √ |   | | Due Date | √ |   | | Initial Creation Date | √ |   | | Open Date | √ |   | | Preparer | √ |   | | Term | √ |   | ### Contacts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Document Checklist Items Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | √ | √ | | Frozen | √ | √ | | Instructions | √ | √ | | Rejection Comment | √ | √ | | Rejection Reason | √ | √ | | Required | √ | √ | | Uploaded By | √ | √ | ### Terms Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ## Admissions Connect - Recruit Applicants Permission Set Review the permissions that your staff needs to manage applicants. ### Accounts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Action Plans Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Completed Required Items | √ |   | | Status | √ | √ | | Total Required Items | √ |   | ### Action Plan Templates Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Admissions Connect - Refresh Records Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | ### Application Material Mappings Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan Template | √ |   | | Action Plan Template Item | √ |   | | Application Material Type | √ |   | | Applicant Hidden Content Message | √ |   | | Applicant Instruction Message | √ |   | | Let Applicants Upload Files | √ |   | | Show Content to Applicants | √ |   | | Show Navigation to Applicants | √ |   | ### Application Material Types Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Child Object | √ |   | | Description | √ |   | | Field Set for Display | √ |   | ### Applications Tab Permission: Available & Visible Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Applicant | √ | √ | | Applicant Decision Date | √ | √ | | Application Date | √ | √ | | Application Decision Date | √ | √ | | Application JSON | √ |   | | Application Plan | √ | √ | | Application Review Status | √ | √ | | Application Status | √ | √ | | Application Type | √ | √ | | Applying To | √ | √ | | Checklist Completion | √ | √ | | Due Date | √ |   | | Initial Creation Date | √ | √ | | Open Date | √ |   | | Preparer | √ | √ | | Term | √ | √ | ### Application Reviews Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Admissions Recommendation | √ |   | | Applicant | √ |   | | Review Comments | √ |   | | Review Due Date | √ |   | | Review End Date | √ |   | | Review Start Date | √ |   | | Review Status | √ |   | | Reviewer | √ |   | | Submitted | √ |   | ### Contacts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Document Checklist Items Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | √ | √ | | Frozen | √ | √ | | Instruction | √ | √ | | Rejection Comment | √ |   | | Rejection Reason | √ |   | | Required | √ | √ | | Uploaded By | √ | √ | ### Terms Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ## Admissions Connect - Submit Applications Permission Set Set up the Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set to give staff the access that they need to work with application submissions. ### System Permissions Access Activities ### Action Plans Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan State | √ |   | | Completed Required Items | √ |   | | Total Required Items | √ |   | ### Action Plan Template Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Admissions Connect - Refresh Records Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | ### Application Material Mappings Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan Template | √ |   | | Action Plan Template Item | √ |   | | Application Material Type | √ |   | | Applicant Hidden Content Message | √ |   | | Applicant Instruction Message | √ |   | | Let Applicants Upload Files | √ |   | | Show Content to Applicants | √ |   | | Show Navigation to Applicants | √ |   | ### Application Material Types Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Child Object Filter Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort By Field | √ |   | | Child Object Sort Direction | √ |   | | Data Source Type | √ |   | | Description | √ |   | | Field Set for Display | √ |   | | JSON Metadata for Display | √ |   | | Source Child Object | √ |   | ### Applications Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | Needed For | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Applicant | √ |   |   | | Applicant Decision Date | √ |   |   | | Application Date | √ | √ | Viewing the Applicant Application Header component and submitting an application. | | Application Decision Date | √ |   |   | | Application JSON | √ |   |   | | Application Plan | √ |   |   | | Application Review Status | √ |   |   | | Application Status | √ | √ | Viewing their Application Status, updating Action Plan Items, and submitting their Application. | | Application Type | √ |   |   | | Applying To | √ |   | Viewing the Applicant Application Header component. | | Checklist Completion | √ |   | Viewing the Checklist Progress in the Applicant Application Viewer component. | | Due Date | √ |   | Viewing the Applicant Application Header component and submitting their Application. | | Initial Creation Date | √ |   |   | | Open Date | √ |   | Viewing the Applicant Application Header component and submitting their Application. | | Preparer | √ |   |   | | Term | √ |   | Viewing the Applicant Application Header component. | ### Contacts Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Birthdate | √ | √ | | Country of Origin | √ | √ | | Dual Citizenship | √ | √ | | Ethnicity | √ | √ | | Gender | √ | √ | | Military Service | √ | √ | | Race | √ | √ | ### Document Checklist Items Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | √ |   | | Frozen | √ |   | | Instruction | √ |   | | Rejection Comment | √ |   | | Required | √ |   | | Rejection Reason | √ |   | | Uploaded By | √ |   | ### Education History Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Contact | √ |   | | Educational Institution Account | √ |   | ### Relationship Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Related Contact | √ |   | ### Term Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | ### Test Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | Field Permissions | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Contact | √ |   | ### Apex Class Access - ApplicantCommunityAppReaderController - ApplicationMaterialItemHeaderController - ApplicationSubmitController - CommunityUtils - DataTable - DataTableController - DocumentChecklistItemUploadController - FieldSetService - JsonFieldSetService - NamespaceUtility - TaskCompletion - TaskFieldSetService # Admissions Connect Product Information for General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Learn how Admissions Connect complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_product_info_for_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Admissions Connect. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Admissions Connect. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Admissions Connect. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Admissions Connect. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Admissions Connect."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Admissions Connect. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Admissions Connect Reference Learn about additional configurations to implement Admissions Connect, such as maintaining permission sets, page layouts, custom components, Apex classes, and accessibility standards. Get started with your implementation with the Recruitment and Admissions Workbook. - **[Admissions Connect Permission Set Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution. - **[Admissions Connect Default Page Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. Most assets are unmanaged, which means you don't receive updates automatically. Use the information in this article to keep up-to-date with releases. - **[Admissions Connect Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect comes with custom components that are used in the Lightning record pages provided with Admissions Connect. Some components are available in Lightning App Builder as well as Experience Builder. Use this article as reference when creating new pages or if you want to know more about the components. - **[Admissions Connect Apex Class Descriptions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_tdtm_apex_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these descriptions of the Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) in Admissions Connect to inform your decisions when using TDTM. - **[Get Started: Recruitment and Admissions Workbook](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_recruitment_and_admissions_workbook.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Resources and hands-on activities for admins - **[Admissions Connect Accessibility Standards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_accessibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect is designed with accessibility in mind. We're committed to providing an on-demand enterprise app that’s accessible to all individuals, including users who work with assistive devices, such as speech recognition software and screen readers. # Admissions Connect Release Notes Review the Admissions Connect Release Notes and learn how to keep your org up to date. - **[Admissions Connect Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Admissions Connect Release Notes are posted in Salesforce.org Release Notes. - **[Keep Up With Admissions Connect and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keeping up with releases is an important part of being a Salesforce admin. You need to know when updates are released and what they include. You need a strategy for testing and implementing new features. And you have to stay on top of both Salesforce Platform releases and Admissions Connect releases from Salesforce.org. Here are some useful resources to help you with the job. - **[About Admissions Connect Releases and Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We use the standard versioning convention in which the number to the left of the dot identifies the major release and the number to the right of the dot identifies the minor release. We typically incorporate patches into the minor version number instead of denoting them with a second dot and numerical sequence. For example, 2.x is newer than any version numbered 1.x, and 2.24 is 21 releases newer than 2.3. - **[Check Your Admissions Connect Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's how to see the original version of Admissions Connect that you installed. ## Admissions Connect Release Notes The Admissions Connect Release Notes are posted in Salesforce.org Release Notes. See [Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo.htm&type=5). ## Keep Up With Admissions Connect and Salesforce Releases Keeping up with releases is an important part of being a Salesforce admin. You need to know when updates are released and what they include. You need a strategy for testing and implementing new features. And you have to stay on top of both Salesforce Platform releases and Admissions Connect releases from Salesforce.org. Here are some useful resources to help you with the job. - [Keep Up With Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Keep Up With Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) ## About Admissions Connect Releases and Versions We use the standard versioning convention in which the number to the left of the dot identifies the major release and the number to the right of the dot identifies the minor release. We typically incorporate patches into the minor version number instead of denoting them with a second dot and numerical sequence. For example, 2.x is newer than any version numbered 1.x, and 2.24 is 21 releases newer than 2.3. ## Check Your Admissions Connect Version History Here's how to see the original version of Admissions Connect that you installed. 1. In Setup, search for and then select **Installed Packages**. 2. Click **Admissions Connect** and then look for the First Installed Version Number. # Admissions Connect Release Notes Learn what's in Admissions Connect (version 1.18) in Spring '23. - **[Critical Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.admissions_connect_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Beginning March 14, 2023, Admission Connect customers will receive license entitlements to the features of the new Education Cloud product in their Salesforce org. You can't use Education Cloud alongside Admissions Connect in your org, but Education Cloud includes some capabilities that work with Admissions Connect, such as OmniStudio, Business Rules Engine, and more. Do not enable the new Education Cloud data model or Person Accounts in a production instance that has Admissions Connect implemented. This is not a supported configuration and might cause undesired behavior in your instance. Check with your Salesforce admin for more information. ## Critical Changes Beginning March 14, 2023, Admission Connect customers will receive license entitlements to the features of the new Education Cloud product in their Salesforce org. You can't use Education Cloud alongside Admissions Connect in your org, but Education Cloud includes some capabilities that work with Admissions Connect, such as OmniStudio, Business Rules Engine, and more. Do not enable the new Education Cloud data model or Person Accounts in a production instance that has Admissions Connect implemented. This is not a supported configuration and might cause undesired behavior in your instance. Check with your Salesforce admin for more information. See [Education Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_cloud_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Spring ‘23 brings you the next-generation CRM for education. Education Cloud draws on the power of Salesforce to connect insights across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners—from prospective student to engaged alum. With Salesforce at the center of your institution's information technology solution, important tasks can be completed in less time, at scale, and in collaboration between departments. Create an Experience Cloud site to be your institution's learner portal where students start their higher education journey. From this site, prospective students can request information, schedule appointments, and apply to your institution. After a student submits their application, your admissions staff can verify, review, and decide on the application in the individual application record."). ## Changes Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Admissions Connect (version 1.18) in Spring '23. - We fixed a bug that caused the Application Checklist Required Item Progress Bar to recalculate to 100% complete when a user uploads a document for an Action Plan Item that's not required. - We fixed a bug that was preventing Tasks records from being created when sending emails to a Contact. # Admissions Connect Requirements Review the requirements for implementing Admissions Connect, such as understanding Action Plans and Applications. - **[Learn About Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand what Actions Plans are and how you can use them in Admissions Connect to define application requirements. - **[Plan Your Application Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool. - **[Quick Start Asset Reference List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide. - **[Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components. - **[Configure Application Requirement Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign Action Plans to Applications so that admissions staff and applicants learn about requirements and next steps. # Admissions Connect Security To specify objects and fields users can access, use permission sets and profiles. Use organization-wide sharing settings to specify the individual records that users can view and edit. We don't exhaustively cover other security considerations, such as organization-wide defaults, sharing rules, user role hierarchies, etc. We leave it up to you to determine what's appropriate for your institution's security model. For an overview of how security works, see [Security Recommendations for Salesforce.org Products](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_security_for_products.htm). Then head over to Trailhead and check out the [Protect Your Salesforce Data](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/security) trail. Also review [Control Who Sees What](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_data_access.htm) in Salesforce Help. # Admissions Connect Security Admissions Connect provides a flexible approach to security that uses standard Salesforce profiles, permission sets, and sharing settings. This approach lets you expose different data sets to different groups of users. For example, admissions directors typically have more permissions than a reviewer or verifier. - **[Admissions Connect Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To specify objects and fields users can access, use permission sets and profiles. Use organization-wide sharing settings to specify the individual records that users can view and edit. - **[Set Up User Profiles for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create user profiles, set up app access, assign page layouts, and customize object and tab visibility. - **[Assign the Admissions Connect Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your organization-wide default sharing settings give you a baseline level of access for each object and enable you to extend that level of access to your Admissions Connect users. # Admissions Connect Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Learn about the enhancements in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Learn about the enhancements in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note Before installing Admissions Connect, check the [Get Ready to Install Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm). - **[Build Application Forms with OmniStudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect customers now have access to OmniStudio, which helps to create and customize application forms for your academic programs and terms. After you install OmniStudio and assign the OmniStudio permission sets, users can get started building an application in OmniStudio. - **[Applicant Portal Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect now includes the Applicant Portal Template, which is a pre-built portal that you can use as a sample when building your own applicant experience - **[New Education History Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Navigating through Education History is easier than ever. A new Education History component within the Application Checklist lets you create and edit Education History records from the Application. - **[Admit Applicants Automatically with a New Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We provide a sample flow that automatically admits applicants when their application meets specific criteria. - **[GPA Converter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help application processors enter and convert GPA data, we added the ability to convert applicants' reported GPA to a standard GPA scale of your institution’s choice. - **[Improvements to Test Score Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions processors can now enter tests and test scores more efficiently. When they create a Test, they can enter the associated Test Score in the same place. Plus, they can add additional Tests and Test Scores within the same screen. After the Test and Test Score records are saved, the Checklist component is updated. - **[Data Mover](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Mover is available with Admissions Connect to help you organize prospect data in Salesforce. Data Mover lets you map and move data from a staging record in Salesforce into various, and optionally related, Salesforce records. - **[Improvements for Application Reviewers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for managing application reviewers in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Improvement for Applicants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for applicants management in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Guidance Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built new Admissions Connect specific guidance so that admins can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. - **[Localization Improvements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the localization improvements in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. ### Build Application Forms with OmniStudio Admissions Connect customers now have access to OmniStudio, which helps to create and customize application forms for your academic programs and terms. After you install OmniStudio and assign the OmniStudio permission sets, users can get started building an application in OmniStudio. - We provide a sample application form template through a static resource. From Setup, go to Static Resources. Existing customers can get the static resource by creating a new sandbox and [installing Admissions Connect with Applicant Portal](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17) and then use a [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) to move the following into production (or into another sandbox). - AdmissionsConnectApplicationForm.json - AdmissionsConnectApplicationImage.png - We also include a new sample flow that assigns Action Plans to applications based on data entered into the OmniStudio application. The new flow, which is called Sample: Action Plan Assignments, can be modified to meet your needs. Existing customers can get the new flow from the [Admissions Connect Flow installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17/sample-flows). - **NOTE**: To test OmniStudio in an existing sandbox, either refresh the sandbox to add OmniStudio licenses to the sandbox, or [match production and sandbox licenses without a sandbox refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000335272&type=1). Licenses for OmniStudio will only be available in your production org after the production release. Learn more at [Build Application Forms with OmniStudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm). ### Applicant Portal Template Admissions Connect now includes the Applicant Portal Template, which is a pre-built portal that you can use as a sample when building your own applicant experience - The template includes the Start Application button. When clicked, users begin a new application from the Application page. Before applicants can create and submit applications from the portal, you must set up a few things with OmniStudio. For more information, see [Build Application Forms with OmniStudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm). - Give applicants access to the ApplicantCommunityHomePageController apex class. - Existing customers can access the Applicant Portal Template by creating a new sandbox and [installing Admissions Connect with Applicant Portal](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17), and then use a [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) to move the template into production (or into another sandbox). ### New Education History Component Navigating through Education History is easier than ever. A new Education History component within the Application Checklist lets you create and edit Education History records from the Application. The new component also includes the following benefits. - The Contact ID of the applicant is pre-populated on new Education History records. - The footer and its respective buttons change based on whether you choose to edit all or a selection of records in the list. - The Application Checklist component refreshes after all Education History records are saved. - When saving test scores and education history, the Test Score or Education History information remains visible. - When you enter or edit information on the Education History or Test components, only editable fields are shown. Existing customers need to create a new sandbox and [install Admissions Connect with Applicant Portal](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17), and then use a [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) to move the Edit Education History field set to production (or into another sandbox). ### Admit Applicants Automatically with a New Flow We provide a sample flow that automatically admits applicants when their application meets specific criteria. For details, see [Configure Application Requirement Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm) . - In Setup, go to Flows and look for Sample: Application Auto Admit. If you don’t see the sample flow, get it from the [Admissions Connect Flow installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17/sample-flows). - Use the sample flow as a basis for creating a flow with your own application criteria. ### GPA Converter To help application processors enter and convert GPA data, we added the ability to convert applicants' reported GPA to a standard GPA scale of your institution’s choice. - The GPA Converter custom metadata type is included in the Admissions Connect managed package and includes the following. - The Converted GPA field - The GPA Scale field - The Education History Layout - Admissions Staff page layout (The layout includes the Converted GPA field, but you can add the field to an existing Education History page layout.) - The default GPA scale is 4.0, but you can change the scale. From Setup, go to Custom Metadata Types. Click Manage Records next to GPA Converter, and then edit the default GPA Converter. Update the GPA scale. For details, see [Customize the Application Review Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_config.htm) . ### Improvements to Test Score Entry Admissions processors can now enter tests and test scores more efficiently. When they create a Test, they can enter the associated Test Score in the same place. Plus, they can add additional Tests and Test Scores within the same screen. After the Test and Test Score records are saved, the Checklist component is updated. Record Types let you create relationships between test types and the related subject area, making it easier to enter test information. For example, when admission processors select a specific Test Type, they see only the relevant values in the Subject Area field. - We provide new metadata with sample Test Score record types for ACT, AP, IB, and SATs. Each has a predefined Subject Area picklist values, but you can configure which values to include. The sample Test Score record types are available from [the Admissions Connect Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17). - You can also create your own Test Score record types and select which Subject Area values are available. - For details, see [Customize Test Score Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm). ### Data Mover Data Mover is available with Admissions Connect to help you organize prospect data in Salesforce. Data Mover lets you map and move data from a staging record in Salesforce into various, and optionally related, Salesforce records. Data Mover is available from the [Admissions Connect Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/1.17). ### Improvements for Application Reviewers Learn about the improvements for managing application reviewers in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - We added the ability for admissions reviewers to see the status of tasks in the Application Checklist and mark them as complete. The user must have the correct permissions to edit the task to mark it as complete. If the task is already complete, the View Record button is available to navigate the user to the task. This functionality was also added to the task headers in the Application Reader. - We added the ability for admission reviewers to see the status of tasks in the Applicant Reader. Record access and field-level security are respected, so the status is only shown if the applicant is assigned the task. - When a single application is assigned to a reviewer from an Applications list view, a notification lets the reviewer know that a single application was assigned. Previously, the notification incorrectly stated that multiple applications were assigned. - When application reviewers submit their recommendation, they now see a confirmation message reminding them that they can’t change their recommendation or update their comments. ### Improvement for Applicants Learn about the improvements for applicants management in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - For Tasks that include instructions, the instructions now appear whenever the task is visible to the applicant. Previously, the task instructions didn't always appear. How you add instructions to a Task hasn't changed. Use the Applicant Instruction Message field on the Application Material Mapping record. - To prevent users in the applicant community from navigating to invalid pages, lookup fields in the Application Details can't be clicked anymore. ### Guidance Center If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built new Admissions Connect specific guidance so that admins can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. Learn more about [Guidance Center](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/guidance-center-quick-look). ### Localization Improvements Learn about the localization improvements in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - We updated bulk manage reviewers to display duplicate User and Queue warnings correctly in a translated org. - We updated the rejection and verification logic to ensure all Document Checklist Item verification functionality works in a translated org. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000012czdqau&title=sfdo-admissionsconnect-unable-to-associate-notes-or-files-to-an-application-once-a-corresponding-dci-has-been-deleted): Customers couldn't associate Notes or Files to an Application if the corresponding Document Checklist Item was deleted. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000000xjqgqai&title=sfdo-admissionsconnect-installation-of-admissions-connect-fails-in-orgs-with-shield-platform-encryption-enabled-on-contact): Customers couldn't install Admissions Connect when Shield Platform Encryption was enabled on Contact. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000012xtjqau&title=sfdo-studentsuccesshub-mobile-tablet-display-not-displaying-correctly-when-footer-is-added-to-community): The footer was improperly displayed when viewing an applicant portal on a mobile device or tablet. - Fixed bug where data wasn't always up to date when users navigate between action plan items in the mobile applicant community. - Fixed a bug where clicking an Action Plan item with a lookup field didn't bring the user to the correct page unless they first viewed an invalid page. - Fixed a bug where applicants weren't shown the Rejection Comment if the Rejection Reason field wasn't populated. - We fixed an issue where applicant portal users weren't shown a message telling them that applications with past due dates couldn't be updated. ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Static Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata for static resources in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new flows in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata for picklist values in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata for record types in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Experience Audience and Page Variations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata for audiences and page variations in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Lightning Web Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Lightning web components in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Custom Metadata Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new custom metadata types in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new fields in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata for page layouts in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Apex classes in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. ### Static Resources Learn about the new metadata for static resources in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - AdmissionsConnectApplicationImage.png - AdmissionsConnectApplicationForm.json - DesertImage.png ### Flows Learn about the new flows in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - Sample\_Application\_Auto\_Admit - Sample\_Action\_Plan\_Assignments ### Picklist Values Learn about the new metadata for picklist values in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - hed\_\_Test\_\_c.hed\_\_Test\_Type\_\_c - hed\_\_Test\_Score\_\_c.hed\_\_Subject\_Area\_\_c ### Record Types Learn about the new metadata for record types in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - hed\_\_Test\_Score\_\_c.ACT - hed\_\_Test\_Score\_\_c.AP - hed\_\_Test\_Score\_\_c.IB - hed\_\_Test\_Score\_\_c.SAT ### Experience Audience and Page Variations Learn about the new metadata for audiences and page variations in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - Audience - Application\_New - Default\_ApplicationCommunityAudience - Page Variation - ApplicationDetailNew - Application Page - Application Detail ### Lightning Web Components Learn about the new Lightning web components in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - applicantApplicationList - applicantNewApplicationButton ### Custom Metadata Type Learn about the new custom metadata types in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - GPA Converter ### Fields Learn about the new fields in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - Converted GPA ### Page Layouts Learn about the new metadata for page layouts in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - Education History Layout - Admissions Staff - GPA Converter Layout ### Classes Learn about the new Apex classes in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - ApplicantCommunityHomePageController # Admissions Connect Territories Use Enterprise Territory Management to assign territories, track success metrics, and build relationships with prospective students. Recruiters can use reports to identify relationships to prioritize and to better engage with prospective students. - **[Learn About Recruiting Territories in Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how recruiting territories can help your institution meet its admissions goals. - **[Set Up Territory Management for Recruiting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Enterprise Territory Management and set up default access, territories, Account assignment rules, and assign Users on your recruiting team. - **[Setup for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_earlier_versions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the automated flows that copy address data from Contact and Affiliation records into Account records. - **[Report on Your Recruiting Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to identify prospects and recruiting staff assigned to territories, trends in recruitment, and more. # Admissions Insights The Admissions Insights dashboard provides admission officers insights to monitor the overall health of the admissions pipeline and analyze the application distribution based on stages, programs, and academic year to strategize the engagement plan.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
Here are examples of questions that the Admissions Insights dashboard can answer: - What’s the total count of applications received? - What’s the progress made in the count of applications compared to the previous period? - What’s the count and status of the application reviews? - How efficient is the current admission intake compared to the previous period? - What’s the count of applications stuck in different stages? - Which are the top application types to prioritize on the admission list? The dashboard is divided into multiple panes with various charts to analyze the admission efficiency based on different KPIs. You can filter admission data based on: - Application Type: Filters applications based on the type. For example, the Transfer. - Application Creation Date: Filters applications based on the date range in which the application is created. - Compare To: Compare the application data with a previous period to show the progress.
Section Description
Application by Status Displays the overall count of applications received, and the count of applications in each status. You can also view the progress in the total application count based on the selected filter.
Reviews by Status

Displays the count of reviews and the count of application reviews in each stage. You can also view the progress in the total application review count based on the selected filter.

Click View List to view the complete list of applications.
Admission Efficiency Displays the admission efficiency that indicates the progress in converting applications to admissions based on the team average. The Yield Efficiency Rate is the percentage of admit decisions that are accepted by applicants. The Admission Efficiency Rate is the percentage of applications that were granted admission.
Incomplete Application

Displays the count of incomplete applications to create the list of applications that need follow-ups.

Click View List to view the complete list of applications.
Applications Awaiting Decision

Displays the count of applications that awaits a decision from the admission team to assess if there is any delay in the admission process flow.

Click View List to view the complete list of applications.
# Adopting Marketing Cloud Business Units Business Units are separate work spaces within an organization’s Marketing Cloud, that allow various teams to manage their data and marketing functions independently. This article explores different aspects of this feature and highlights various considerations to be kept in mind, to make the best use of business units for marketing functions. - **[Introduction to Marketing Cloud Business Units](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_adopting_marketing_cloud_business_units.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Marketing Cloud Business Units help team members manage their data and marketing functions independently while sharing common assets. - **[Features of Business Units](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_adopting_marketing_cloud_business_units.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fine-tune how you segregate and manage data by using Business Units. - **[Considerations for Marketing Cloud Business Units](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_adopting_marketing_cloud_business_units.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about decisions to consider when configuring Marketing Cloud Business Units. - **[Additional Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_adopting_marketing_cloud_business_units.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these additional resources to learn more about Business Units in Marketing Cloud and Salesforce Distributed Marketing. ## Introduction to Marketing Cloud Business Units Learn how Marketing Cloud Business Units help team members manage their data and marketing functions independently while sharing common assets. Business Units in Marketing Cloud are separate  work spaces within an organization’s Marketing Cloud account, that allow different team members or departments within the same organization to manage their data and marketing functions independently while enabling sharing of common assets (such as branded templates) with ease. Business Units are created in a hierarchy. The main Business Unit at the top of the hierarchy is called the **Parent Business Unit**, and sub Business Units created under this parent are called **Child Business Units**. These children, in turn, can have their own child nodes and so on. **_Parent and Child Marketing Cloud Business Unit Hierarchy in a University_** From a business and marketing perspective, Business Units are typically created to manage marketing functions of different subdivisions  within an organization. For example, let's consider a large university which has different marketing teams under Recruitment & Admissions, Student Affairs and Advancement. Each of these subdivisions manage different segments of the audience (leads and prospects, students, Alumni, etc.) and may want to organize and manage their marketing teams and data independently. In this case, the parent IT organization managing the University might create 3 different business units for each of these divisions under the common Parent called the University Business Unit. By adopting Business Units, the University can: - Manage the users of each departments under one umbrella Marketing Account - Allow all 3 departments to view and manage just the data they need to manage. For example, expose leads and prospective students to Recruitment and Admissions division so that they can take up suitable marketing efforts with that population; similarly, allow Student Affairs division to market to current university students - Provision users into each of these business units independently. Business unit-specific custom user roles can be created if need be - Allow users to send different kinds of emails \[Recruitment emails vs Student hostel emails\] from different business units independently. If one marketer is working for both departments, they can be provisioned into both units. - Allow users to share common email templates, images and other assets across all business units ![Parent and Child Marketing Cloud Business Unit Hierarchy in a University](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries/images/business_units_01.png) Another use case for Marketing Cloud Business units is the need to manage different sub-brands or regional structures under the same brand. This is important not only in the Retail space, but also applicable to certain Higher Education and Nonprofit institutions. For example, a Nonprofit may be an association of multiple organizations which are serving different needs of the society under different brand names in different geographies. In this case, Business Units will help manage the respective marketing teams with better agility and security. Note that there is another added advantage here: adopting business units will allow subscribers to opt out of just that brand or regional entity—instead of the entire organization. ## Features of Business Units Fine-tune how you segregate and manage data by using Business Units. ### Hierarchy Consider how your organization can best use Business Unit hierarchies to structure and organize data management. While there is no right or wrong way to establish a Business Unit hierarchy, specific user requirements and data needs for subdivisions across the organization should be assessed to identify the right model. Some of the classic questions to consider are: - Are there different brands or divisions that need separate work spaces due to specific data needs or processes? - Are there different branding needs across different marketing teams? - What are the common assets and data that need to be shared? These are some of the classic questions to consider. Also, it is good to avoid too many levels or complex hierarchies which are difficult to manage. ![Child Business Units maintain their own Subscribers, Users, Roles and Email Templates](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries/images/business_units_02.png) **_Child Business Units maintain their own Subscribers, Users, Roles and Email Templates_** ### Separation and Isolation of User Experience Learn the types of data and assets that can be managed independently with Business Units. Within each Business Unit, the user experience can be unique and isolated from the user experiences in the other Business Units.  Business Units allow users to manage the following items independently: - Subscriber data and associated marketing information\*\* - Email templates, images, etc. - User roles (Custom roles can be Business unit specific) - Sender profiles and Delivery profiles - Email reports - Folder structure **\*\* Note:** The All subscribers table at the parent level maintains a master list of all subscribers across Business units. ### Marketing Cloud Connector and Data Sharing Use Marketing Cloud Connector from Salesforce to synchronize Salesforce core platform data with data in Marketing Cloud. Customers often use Marketing Cloud Connector from Salesforce to synchronize data between the Salesforce Platform (Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, etc.) and Marketing Cloud. This helps them to manage all CRM data in Sales Cloud while executing Marketing Campaigns from Marketing Cloud. ![Marketing Cloud Connector links Salesforce Core Platform and Marketing Cloud](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries/images/business_units_03.png) **_Marketing Cloud Connector links Salesforce Core Platform and Marketing Cloud_** When installing and configuring the Marketing Cloud Connector, the Parent Business Unit should/must be the **point of integration** between Marketing Cloud and Salesforce 1. By default, the Marketing Cloud Connector brings in all Salesforce CRM Data to the Parent Business Unit and stores it in **Synchronized Salesforce Data Extensions**. Note that the Marketing Cloud Admin has the option to choose those fields they want to synchronize for a given Object in CRM, but they have only limited filtering options2. Once this data is in the Parent, the Parent can then **query** and **share specific sets of data** to each Child Business Unit. This sharing would happen via a **Shared Data Extension folder**. It can be configured so that a given Shared Data Extension folder is only accessible to a particular Child Business Unit so that no other Business unit would have access to this folder and, therefore, the data. This ensures that the data in each Child Business Unit is secure and specific to their specific needs only.  Because the Parent Business Unit has access to all of the data before it is filtered to each Child Business Unit, the Parent Business Unit can be utilized for communications that need to be sent on behalf of the entire organization.  To illustrate this for Higher Ed, the Parent Business Unit–the University–would consume all relevant student data from Salesforce. The Parent University Business Unit could filter and share data for each of the various colleges to be used to send marketing communications to their relevant students. The University Business Unit, however, may be used to send University-wide communications to all students. **Footnotes:** 1 The only exception is for multi-org connected Marketing Clouds, i.e. a Marketing Cloud instance linked to multiple instance of Sales/Service Cloud - more information on that can be found [here](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=mc_co_multi_org_account_configuration.htm&type=5). 2 Filter based on a set Boolean field / Filter data from a set date onwards. ## Considerations for Marketing Cloud Business Units Learn about decisions to consider when configuring Marketing Cloud Business Units. ### Dedicated IP / Wrapping Domain Learn when to use a dedicated IP address or single wrapping domain for a Business Unit. Depending on send volume or use case, one IP address can be **shared across all Business Units** of an Organization. With proper monitoring and maintenance, sharing a dedicated IP gives the organization the ability to maintain a positive Sender Reputation while also unifying the branding. There may be some use cases where a Business Unit may wish to have their own dedicated IP. Typically this occurs if send volumes are upwards of 2.5 million per month. The additional dedicated IP can be utilized, then, when sending different types of email communications, such as Transactional vs. Commercial messaging.  When the customer has opted for Sender Authentication Package or SAP as a part of their initial setup, the entire Organization can **share one dedicated wrapping domain** across all Business Units. This domain is used to wrap all URLs and images so that they are reflecting the organization brand rather than the default Marketing Cloud brand. For example, ABC University, a higher ed institution, can designate the domain **communications.abcuniv.edu** as its wrapping domain and all image URLs and links can be wrapped using that URL. Typically, a single wrapping domain is used across all business units of an organization. However, it is also possible to configure individual wrapping domains for specific business units if necessary. This is especially required for organizations intending to use Business units to manage multiple brands. ### Opt Out / Preference Center Manage email opt-outs across your entire organization, or fine-tune opt-out options in each Business Unit. Opt-outs from emails can be managed **either at the Business Unit level or across the entire organization**. If managed at the Business Unit level, when a subscriber unsubscribes from all emails, that preference is specific to emails sent from that Business Unit. If managed at the organization level or Enterprise level, when a subscriber unsubscribes from emails, this preference is applicable across **all emails from all Business Units**. Each Business Unit can have its own dedicated Preference Center that can house different communication preferences within it. For example, preferences for different types of email content the subscriber would like to receive can be recorded and modified by the subscriber as per their choice. It is also possible for the organization to choose to manage preferences across all Business Units in one place, using Cloud Pages or other custom preference centers. See the note on Cloud Pages later in this article.  **Suppression Lists** and **Exclusion Lists** exist at a Business Unit level, which allows each unit to control who should and who should not be receiving email communications. It is also worth noting that email validity (e.g. Hard and Soft bounces) are tracked at the Parent Business unit level and applied down to all Child Business Units. ### Data Sharing / Security Share content and assets from the Parent Business Unit to Child Business Units, or between Child Business Units. Both **data and content can be shared** across Business Units within an instance. As mentioned above, data from the Parent Business Unit can be shared to the Child Business Units as required. But data **can also be shared across Child Business Units** if the need arises. The same is true for content as well as assets. Content from one Business Unit can be shared to another Business Unit. This may be the Parent Business Unit creating and managing email templates or logos for each of the Child Business Units or sharing images across two or more Child Business Units. It is important to note that in terms of sharing, once a user gets access to certain data in a business unit, you cannot limit their visibility. For example, if a user is granted access to subscriber data within the Business Unit, they will have access to all subscriber data within the unit. The same with content; if the user gets access to content, they have access to all of the content. Folders within the Business Unit help to organize and divide data or content, but cannot restrict access for users within the Business Unit. ### Cloud Pages Use Cloud Pages and Content Builder to create landing pages and keep content consistent and easy to manage across channels. Cloud Pages within Marketing Cloud allow users to build and publish landing pages or microsites. By using content saved within Content Builder, all content across channels stays consistent and easy to manage. As mentioned above Cloud Pages can be used to create, among other things, Custom Preference Centers. In turn, Preference Centers can represent/display data from within Marketing Cloud at the Child or Parent Business Unit level and even pull and update data from a connected Salesforce instance - using AmpScript.  While the content and assets that are used to build the page can be shared, Cloud Pages as built are limited to the Business Unit that they are created in and cannot be shared across different business units. ### Brand Representation Learn about some considerations for brand representation and content sharing across Business Units. In the Introduction, we briefly discussed the context of managing multiple brands using Business Units. Various divisions, departments, or brands under one organization can divide and manage their marketing functions independently using Business Units. Please note that making use of business units is just an important first step in multi-brand marketing management. Subscribers may not realize or connect with these brands, unless the email templates, images and associated content reflect the individual brand identity appropriately. For example, consider a University which runs three (3) different schools for Engineering, Business and Commerce. It is possible that these schools are marketing and communicating using their own specific branding and messages. The audience (or learners) for each of these brands are quite different; hence the marketing communication, personalization, and frequency should be tailored to suit the needs of these brand audiences / segments. It is also possible that a university wants to start a new online school for adult learners under a slightly different brand name with a totally new set of educational experiences. Under such situations, the concept of Business Units can be effectively used to manage multiple communication experiences under one Marketing Cloud account. The Parent Business Unit typically represents the parent company or university in this situation and each unique brand under that entity can be housed in their own Business Units and marketed independently. Considerations: - If there is a need to manage or control common branding assets, such as email templates or images, that can be done using Content Builder sharing - If there is a need to share Subscriber data or other information across different Business Units, the shared folders in data extension can be leveraged - Each Business Unit can host its own custom subscription center using the desired branding and templates - so that its subscribers can manage their profiles and subscriptions appropriately - Whilst some groups within an institution may see themselves as an entirely different brand that is not always true for the end audience. Consider the experience of your end constituents as well as internal audiences when setting up new Business units. ### User Base and Roles Learn about considerations and best practices for granting access to users and using standard and custom roles in Business Units. When a user is provisioned in Marketing Cloud, they can receive access to one or more Business Units. However, providing differential access to different sets of users might become very cumbersome and complex to manage. Considerations: - Limit the number of users at the Parent Business Unit to Marketing Cloud Administrators, any team members that need to see Parent Unit level data (such as Central Marketing), and any teams that create content that are shared across all Business Units (such as Brand management) - Individual marketers or technical people who work for specific divisions should have restricted access to respective Business Units only. Within that Business Unit, they might be given desired access to various tools and data - If an individual, say a marketer, handles more than one division, they can be given access to more than one Business Unit. However, these should be treated as exceptions and should not become a norm. - As far as possible, the roles within each of these Business Units need to be standardized. This is especially challenging when the different Business Units represent different entities which have very different organizational structures. Marketing Cloud does allow creating custom roles at every Business Unit level, but this can easily balloon into an Administrative burden if not managed properly. Best practice is to standardize roles across all Business Units supported by a parent entity - Note that creating custom roles is a manual process and there is no way to export custom roles from one Business Unit to another. This can be challenging if a Parent has a number of Children and every Child needs custom roles. ## Additional Information Use these additional resources to learn more about Business Units in Marketing Cloud and Salesforce Distributed Marketing. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note Thank you to Rebecca Schults Robrahn for also contributing to this article. Rebecca is a Marketing Cloud Consultant with Accenture based in the U.S. Rebecca works with higher ed customers across the country to strategize, implement, and support their Marketing Cloud instance and integrations with other Salesforce technologies. - [Business Units in Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=mc_es_business_units.htm&type=5) - [Salesforce Distributed Marketing](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=mc_dm_distributed_marketing.htm&type=5) # Advanced Academic Operations Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on, and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud platform license
Advanced Academic Operations includes SIS features such as course registration, holds management, GPA calculation, and enrollment policy enforcement. Assign the Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud permission set license to students to enable course registration, waitlists, and student portal features. Advanced Academic Operations also includes access to the Business Rules Engine (BRE) and Expression Sets, along with the quotas required to run them. Every feature in the Advanced Academic Operations feature set requires BRE and quota capacity. ## Enable Advanced Academic Operations in Your Org Turn on Advanced Academic Operations in Education Cloud to manage licenses and access to features. Turn on features for specific students, monitor usage, and manage billing all in one place. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer with Education Cloud, Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on, and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud platform license
User Permissions Needed
To enable Advanced Academic Operations: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Click **Set Up Academic Operations**. 3. Make sure that Academic Operations is turned on. 4. Turn on Advanced Academic Operations. ## Advanced Academic Operations Editions and Permissions Review the supported editions for Advanced Academic Operations. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer with Education Cloud, Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on, and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud platform license
- [User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Editions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Required Advanced Academic Operations Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Customizing Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) ### User Interface Advanced Academic Operations is available in Lightning Experience. ### Editions Advanced Academic Operations is available in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license, Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Add-On, and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud platform License licenses are enabled. ### Required Advanced Academic Operations Permissions To use Advanced Academic Operations, Salesforce admin users need the permission set Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access. Experience Cloud users need the permission sets Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Access and Education Cloud for Experience Cloud. | Permission Set | Notes | | --- | --- | | Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access | Gives full access to objects for Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations. | | Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Access | Gives Experience Cloud users access to Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations. Users also need the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud permission set. | ### Customizing Permissions If you customize Advanced Academic Operations, such as adding fields, create a custom permission set. To remove user permissions from the default permission set, create a muting permission set. Then, use permission set groups to assign users the Advanced Academic Operations permission set in addition to your custom permission sets. This approach is an alternative to cloning permission sets and makes sure that users always have the latest default permissions. See Also: - [Assign and Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Manage Muting Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups_muting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Advanced Mapping Overview Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities. Advanced Mapping is the logic that powers the NPSP Data Importer tool. Advanced Mapping gets your data to the right place, whether you use a Gift Entry form, an Elevate donation form, or import a spreadsheet. Advanced Mapping is already set up to handle typical import, Gift Entry, and Elevate donation form scenarios involving constituent and donation data. For most organizations, very little or no customization of Advanced Mapping is needed. If you want to add a custom field to a Gift Entry or Elevate form, or import data into a custom field that hasn’t yet been mapped, you’ll need to customize Advanced Mapping. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Making customizations to Advanced Mapping has the biggest payoff when you plan to use the customized mappings repeatedly. If you’re doing a complex, one-time import of custom data, consider a strategy that doesn’t involve the NPSP Data Importer tool, such as Data Loader. For more information on Data Loader, see the [Data Loader Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/230/latest/en-us/sfdc/pdf/salesforce_data_loader.pdf). To review how the NPSP Data Importer tool works, see [How NPSP Data Importer Processes Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about the import process."). See Also: - [Enable and Convert to Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions.") - [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped.") - [Extend NPSP Data Importer with Advanced Mapping](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/projects/extend-npsp-data-importer-with-advanced-mapping) Trailhead module # Advanced Mapping Recipes This article complements the existing documentation to set up Advanced Mapping, and includes instructions for creating Affiliation, Engagement Plan, Relationship, and Soft Credit records for common scenarios during data import. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article illustrates some of the great ways community members are using the flexible Advanced Mapping feature to import and create records for affiliation, engagement plan, relationship, and soft credit data. - **[Affiliation Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review how NPSP Data Importer processes Contacts and different types of Accounts before diving into recipes for Affiliations. - **[Engagement Plan Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Advanced Mapping to import Engagement Plan Template data and attach it to a Contact. - **[Relationship Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Advanced Mapping to import data about how Contacts are related to each other and create Relationship records between two related Contacts. - **[Soft Credit Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Advanced Mapping to import soft credit data and create soft credits for Contacts and Accounts. ## Overview This article illustrates some of the great ways community members are using the flexible Advanced Mapping feature to import and create records for affiliation, engagement plan, relationship, and soft credit data. This article complements the existing documentation to set up Advanced Mapping. If you're unfamiliar with that process, please read [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped.") first and reference it as you work through specific recipes below. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Some of the recipes say to use the ![spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) in Field Mapping. The spyglass icon allows you to search for any field on the NPSP Data Import object whether or not it's been mapped in another Object Group. We'll add to this article as we hear about more great ways community members are using the flexible Advanced Mapping feature. Have you created a mapping you think would be helpful to others in the community? Please post in the [SFDO Open Source Contributors](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khjasae?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group on the Hub and tag the [#Advanced Mapping](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/topics/advancedmapping?sort=last_modified_date_desc) topic. We'd love to add your recipe! ## Affiliation Recipes Review how NPSP Data Importer processes Contacts and different types of Accounts before diving into recipes for Affiliations. Before diving into recipes for Affiliation records between Contact1 or Contact2 with an Organization Account, it's worth reviewing how NPSP Data Importer processes Contacts and different types of Accounts. When you use a single row of your CSV file to import Contact1, Contact2, Account1, and Account2, NPSP Data Import will: 1. Place Contact1 and Contact2 in the same Household Account. 2. Find or create Account1 as an Organization Account. 3. Create a Primary Affiliation for Contact1 to the Account1 Organization Account. 4. Find or create Account2 as an Organization Account. 5. Create a Primary Affiliation for Contact2 to the Account2 Organization Account. - **[Add Same Organization Affiliation for Contact1 and Contact2](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have two people who live in the same household who are connected to the same family foundation (or even work at the same organization), you may want both Contacts to be connected to the same Organization Account through an Affiliation record. - **[Set Contact1 as the Primary Contact for the Account1 Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make sure Contact1 is set as the Primary Contact on Account1's Organization Account record, add a Field Mapping to Account1's Object Group. ### Add Same Organization Affiliation for Contact1 and Contact2 If you have two people who live in the same household who are connected to the same family foundation (or even work at the same organization), you may want both Contacts to be connected to the same Organization Account through an Affiliation record. If you have two people who live in the same household who are connected to the same family foundation (or even work at the same organization), you may want both Contacts to be connected to the same Organization Account through an Affiliation record. No additional mapping is necessary to create an Affiliation to the same Organization Account for Contact1 and Contact2! To create this Affiliation record, simply enter the same information for the Organization Account in the Account1 and Account2 information in your CSV. NPSP Data Importer will find the Organization Account that was found or created when Account1 was processed and create an Affiliation record for Contact2. ### Set Contact1 as the Primary Contact for the Account1 Organization To make sure Contact1 is set as the Primary Contact on Account1's Organization Account record, add a Field Mapping to Account1's Object Group. To make sure Contact1 is set as the Primary Contact on Account1's Organization Account record, add a Field Mapping to Account1's Object Group by following these steps: 1. Click **View Field Mappings** for the Account1 Object Group. 2. Click **Create New Field Mapping**: 1. Click![Spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) to search for and select Contact1 Imported (npsp\_\_Contact1Imported\_\_c), and map it to Primary Contact (npe01\_\_One2OneContact\_\_c). ## Engagement Plan Recipes Configure Advanced Mapping to import Engagement Plan Template data and attach it to a Contact. - **[Attach an Engagement Plan Template to Contact1](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your org has an Engagement Plan Template to associate with a Contact, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create an Engagement Plan Template attachment on the Contact record. ### Attach an Engagement Plan Template to Contact1 If your org has an Engagement Plan Template to associate with a Contact, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create an Engagement Plan Template attachment on the Contact record. To link an Engagement Plan Template to Contact1, follow the steps below. Because **Engagement Plan Template** is a lookup field, you'll need to include the 15 or 18 digit Salesforce ID for the Engagement Plan template in your import file. 1. Prepare Salesforce for the Engagement Plan 1 Object Group, and create these fields on the NPSP Data Import object: 1. **Engagement Plan 1 Imported** (lookup) 2. **Engagement Plan 1 Import Status** (text) 2. Add at least one additional field to map on the NPSP Data Import object, such as: 1. **Engagement Plan 1 Template** (lookup) 3. In NPSP Settings, create a new Object Group for Engagement Plan 1 with the following information: 1. **Group Name**: Engagement Plan 1 2. **Object Name**: Engagement Plan 3. **Is Child/Parent**: Child 4. **Of This Mapping Group**: Contact 1 5. **Through This Field**: Contact 6. **Link to Field**: Engagement Plan 1 Imported 7. **Import Status**: Engagement Plan 1 Import Status 4. Add Field Mappings for the Engagement Plan 1 Object Group: 1. Select Engagement Plan 1 Template (Engagement\_Plan\_1\_Template \_\_c), and map it to Engagement Plan Template (npsp\_\_Engagement\_Plan\_Template\_\_c). ## Relationship Recipes Configure Advanced Mapping to import data about how Contacts are related to each other and create Relationship records between two related Contacts. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important By default, the NPSP Data Importer links Contact1 and Contact2 together by putting them in the same Household Account. - **[Add a Relationship Between Contact1 and Contact2](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your org has data about how Contacts are related to each other, for example, as coworkers, siblings, or other relationship types, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create Relationship records between two related Contacts. ### Add a Relationship Between Contact1 and Contact2 If your org has data about how Contacts are related to each other, for example, as coworkers, siblings, or other relationship types, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create Relationship records between two related Contacts. 1. Create fields on the NPSP Data Import object: 1. **Relationship 1 Imported** (lookup to Relationship) 2. **Relationship 1 Import Status** (text (255)) 3. **Relationship 1 Type** (text (255)) 2. In NPSP Settings, create a new Object Group for Relationship 1 with the following information: 1. **Group Name**: Relationship 1 2. **Object Name**: Relationship (npe4\_\_Relationship\_\_c) 3. **Is Child/Parent**: Child 4. **Of This Mapping Group**: Contact 1 5. **Through This Field**: Contact (npe4\_\_Contact\_\_c) 6. **Link to Field**: Relationship 1 Imported (Relationship\_1\_Imported\_\_c) 7. **Import Status**: Relationship 1 Import Status (Relationship\_1\_Import\_Status\_\_c) 3. Add Field Mappings for the Relationship 1 Object Group: 1. Click **View Field Mappings** for the Relationship 1 Object Group. 2. Click **Create New Field Mapping**. 3. Click ![Spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) next to the **Source (NPSP Data Import Object)** field. Enter and select Contact2 Imported (npsp\_\_Contact2Imported\_\_c). 4. Click ![Spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) next to the **Target (Relationship 1 Object)** field. Enter and select Related Contact (npe4\_\_RelatedContact\_\_c). 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat these steps to map the **Relationship 1 Type (Relationship\_1\_Type\_\_c)** field to the **Type (npe4\_\_Type\_\_c)** field. ## Soft Credit Recipes Configure Advanced Mapping to import soft credit data and create soft credits for Contacts and Accounts. - **[Add an Account Soft Credit for Account 2](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your org has soft credit data for an account, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create a Soft Credit record for the account. - **[Add a Partial Soft Credit for Contact1](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your org has soft credit data for a Contact, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create a Soft Credit record for the Contact. ### Add an Account Soft Credit for Account 2 If your org has soft credit data for an account, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create a Soft Credit record for the account. To add an Account Soft Credit for Account2, follow the steps below. During the import, you'll map a text field for Role on the NPSP Data Import object to a picklist field on the target Account Soft Credit object. Make sure the text you enter in your import file exactly matches one of the active values in your Account Soft Credit Role picklist. 1. Prepare Salesforce for the Account2 Soft Credit Object Group, and create these fields on the NPSP Data Import object: 1. **Account2 Soft Credit Imported** (lookup) 2. **Account2 Soft Credit Import Status** (text) 2. Add at least one additional field to map on the NPSP Data Import object, such as: 1. **Account2 Soft Credit Amount** (currency) 2. **Account2 Soft Credit Role** (text) 3. In NPSP Settings, create a new Object Group for Account2 Soft Credit with the following information: 1. **Group Name**: Account2 Soft Credit 2. **Object Name**: Account Soft Credit 3. **Is Child/Parent**: Child 4. **Of This Mapping Group**: Account 2 5. **Through This Field**: Account 6. **Link to Field**: Account2 Soft Credit Imported 7. **Import Status**: Account2 Soft Credit Import Status 4. Add Field Mappings for the Account2 Soft Credit Object Group: 1. Select Account2 Soft Credit Amount (Account2\_Soft\_Credit\_Amount \_\_c), and map it to Amount (npsp\_\_Amount\_\_c). 2. Select Account2 Soft Credit Role (Account2\_Soft\_Credit\_Role \_\_c), and map it to Role (npsp\_\_Role\_\_c). 3. Click the ![Spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) to search for and select Donation Imported (npsp\_\_DonationImported\_\_c), and map it to Opportunity (npsp\_\_Opportunity\_\_c). ### Add a Partial Soft Credit for Contact1 If your org has soft credit data for a Contact, configure Advanced Mapping to import this data and create a Soft Credit record for the Contact. To add a Partial Soft Credit for Contact1, follow the steps below. During the import, you'll map a text field for Role on the NPSP Data Import object to a picklist field on the target Partial Soft Credit object. Make sure the text you enter in your import file exactly matches one of the active values in your Partial Soft Credit Role picklist. 1. Prepare Salesforce for the Partial Soft Credit 1 Object Group, and create these fields on the NPSP Data Import object: 1. **Partial Soft Credit 1 Imported** (lookup) 2. **Partial Soft Credit 1 Import Status** (text) 2. Add at least one additional field to map on the NPSP Data Import object, such as: 1. **Partial Soft Credit 1 Amount** (currency) 2. **Partial Soft Credit 1 Role** (text) 3. In NPSP Settings, create a new Object Group for Partial Soft Credit 1 with the following information: 1. **Group Name**: Partial Soft Credit 1 2. **Object Name**: Partial Soft Credit 3. **Is Child/Parent**: Child 4. **Of This Mapping Group**: Contact 1 5. **Through This Field**: Contact 6. **Link to Field**: Partial Soft Credit 1 Imported 7. **Import Status**: Partial Soft Credit 1 Import Status 4. Add Field Mappings for the Partial Soft Credit 1 Object Group: 1. Select Partial Soft Credit 1 Amount (Partial\_Soft\_Credit\_1 \_Amount \_\_c), and map it to Amount (npsp\_\_Amount\_\_c). 2. Select Partial Soft Credit 1 Role (Partial\_Soft\_Credit\_1\_Role \_\_c), and map it to Role (npsp\_\_Role\_Name\_\_c). 3. Click the ![Spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) to search for and select Contact1 Imported (npsp\_\_Contact1Imported\_\_c), and map it to Contact (npsp\_\_Contact\_\_c). 4. Click the ![Spyglass icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/spyglass_icon.png) to search for and select Donation Imported (npsp\_\_DonationImported\_\_c), and map it to Opportunity (npsp\_\_Opportunity\_\_c). # Advanced Mappings for Elevate NPSP includes field mappings that allow transactions to flow from Elevate into NPSP. NPSP includes these field mappings that allow transactions to flow from Elevate into NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Do not change any of the field mappings that come as default with the package, as this could cause issues with your payment processing.
Source Field - NPSP Data Import object Target Field - Payments object Description

Donation Elevate Recurring ID

(npsp__Donation_Elevate_Recurring_ID__c)

Elevate Recurring ID

(npsp__CommitmentId__c)

 The external, unique ID of the Recurring Donation in Elevate that this donation Opportunity is linked to.

Payment Authorized Date

(npsp__Payment_Authorized_Date__c)

Authorized Date

(npsp__Authorized_Date__c)

 The date and time the transaction was authorized.

Payment Authorized UTC Timestamp

(npsp__Payment_Authorized_ UTC_Timestamp__c)

Authorized UTC Timestamp

(npsp__Authorized_UTC_Timestamp__c)

 The exact date and time (down to the millisecond) from the payment gateway that this transaction was successfully authorized.

Payment Card Expiration Month

(npsp__Payment_Card_Expiration_Month__c)

Card Expiration Month

(npsp__Card_Expiration_Month__c)

 The expiration month of the card used for this transaction.

Payment Card Expiration_Year

(npsp__Payment_Card_Expiration_Year__c)

Card Expiration Year

(npsp__Card_Expiration_Year__c)

 The expiration year of the card used for this transaction.

Payment Card Last 4

(npsp__Payment_Card_Last_4__c)

Card Last 4

(npsp__Card_Last_4__c)

 The last four digits of the card used for this transaction.

Payment Card Network

(npsp__Payment_Card_Network__c)

Card Network

(npsp__Card_Network__c)

 The card network of the card used for this transaction.

Payment Elevate Created Date

(npsp__Payment_Elevate_Created_Date__c)

Elevate Payment Created Date

(npsp__Elevate_Payment_Created_ Date__c)

 The date and time the transaction was created.

Payment Elevate Created UTC Timestamp

(npsp__Payment_Elevate_Created_ UTC_Timestamp__c)

Elevate Payment Created UTC Timestamp

(npsp__Elevate_Payment_Created_ UTC_Timestamp__c)

 The exact date and time (down to the millisecond) from Elevate that the transaction was created.

Payment Elevate ID

(npsp__Payment_Elevate_ID__c)

Elevate Payment ID

(npsp__Elevate_Payment_ID__c)

 The unique ID for this transaction from Elevate.

Payment Elevate Original Payment ID

(npsp__Payment_Elevate_Original_ Payment_ID__c)

Elevate Original Payment ID

(npsp__Elevate_Original_Payment_ID__c)

 For refunds only. Shows the ID of the original payment transaction from Elevate.

Payment Gateway ID

(npsp__Payment_Gateway_ID__c)

Gateway ID

(npsp__Gateway_ID__c)

 The ID of the payment gateway that processed this transaction.

Payment Gateway Payment ID

(npsp__Payment_Gateway_Payment_ID__c)

Gateway Payment ID

(npsp__Gateway_Payment_ID__c)

 The unique ID for this transaction from the payment gateway.

Payment Origin ID

(npsp__Payment_Origin_ID__c)

Origin ID

(npsp__Origin_ID__c)

 The ID for the system where the transaction was initiated.

Payment Origin Name

(npsp__Payment_Origin_Name__c)

Origin Name

(npsp__Origin_Name__c)

 The name of the system where the transaction was initiated.

Payment Origin Type

(npsp__Payment_Origin_Type__c)

Origin Type

(npsp__Origin_Type__c)

 The type of system used to initiate the transaction. Available values include Engagement Hub, Giving Page, Payments API, Salesforce.

Payment Type

(npsp__Payment_Type__c)

Type

(npsp__Type__c)

 Indicates the type of transaction.
# Advanced NPSP Configurations Manage or disable trigger handlers or deploy custom code in the TDTM framework. - **[Table-Driven Trigger Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about what Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) is and how you might want to use it to customize your NPSP org. - **[Manage Trigger Handlers for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about trigger handlers that are used in Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to disable trigger handlers for all users, specific users, and with apex code. - **[Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) relies heavily on Apex to implement much of its functionality. Salesforce.org products use one trigger per object and Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) to control the execution of Apex classes. - **[Apex Class Descriptions for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_apex_class_descriptions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Below is a list of Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) along with a description of each. Some classes appear multiple times because more than one Trigger Handler can reference the same class. # Advanced NPSP Mapping Advanced Mapping is the logic that powers the NPSP Data Importer tool. Advanced Mapping is already set up to handle typical import, Gift Entry, and Elevate donation form scenarios involving constituent and donation data. If you want to add a custom field to a Gift Entry or Elevate form, or import data into a custom field that hasn't yet been mapped, you'll need to customize Advanced Mapping. - **[Advanced Mapping Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adv_mapping_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities. - **[Understand Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_understand_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article explains Field Mappings, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data - **[Understand Object Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_understand_object_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article explains Object Groups, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data. - **[Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped. - **[Connect a New Object in Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_connect_new_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advanced Mapping comes with Contacts, Accounts, Opportunities, and other objects already mapped. You can connect additional objects that are directly related to Contacts, Accounts, or Opportunities. - **[Advanced Mapping Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_di_am_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article complements the existing documentation to set up Advanced Mapping, and includes instructions for creating Affiliation, Engagement Plan, Relationship, and Soft Credit records for common scenarios during data import. - **[Standard NPSP Data Import Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article includes reference information about the fields in the NPSP Data Import object, the mapping to target NPSP objects, and information about columns in the NPSP Data Importer Templates. - **[Advanced Mappings for Elevate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_elevate_adv_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes field mappings that allow transactions to flow from Elevate into NPSP. # Advisor Insights for Student Success The Advisor Insights dashboard provides insights to monitor student care plan programs, alerts, and advisor appointments. Use the dashboard to analyze the care plans that need immediate attention and assess the utilization rate of advisor appointments.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
The Advisor Insights dashboard includes the Alerts, Care Plans, and Appointments pages. Use the metrics and charts on these pages to get an overall view of open alerts, care plans, and their distribution. You can filter the data based on the academic term and compare the data with a previous period to analyze progress. ## Alerts Here are examples of questions that the Advisor Insights dashboard - Alerts page can answer: - What’s the total count of the advisor's caseload and alerts? - What’s the total count of active alerts? - How many days does it take to resolve a case on average, and what’s the difference compared to a previous period? - What’s the alert distribution based on Case Record Type, Alert Category, and Alert Reason? - Which are the active alerts that need attention? ## Care Plans Here are examples of questions that the Advisor Insights dashboard - Care Plans page can answer: - What’s the count of students with care plans that are overdue? - What’s the count of students with care plans on track? - What’s the count of students who don't need to use the care plan service? - What’s the distribution of care plans based on case record type and the care plan status? - Which are the active alerts that need attention based on the due date? ## Appointments Here are examples of questions that the Advisor Insights dashboard - Appointments page can answer: - What’s the total count of appointments for the advisor? - What’s the utilization and cancellation rate of advisor’s appointments? - What’s the count of students who did not take any appointments? - What’s the distribution of appointments based on the case record type, appointment status, channel, and topic type? - Which are the active alerts that need attention based on the due date? You can use Appointment Analysis to get a quick view of upcoming appointments based on the appointment status, and analyze the difference in the appointment utilization rate compared to a previous period. # Affiliation Affiliation represents an affiliation between a Contact and an Account. - **[Sample Uses for Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Affiliation object represents Contact-to-Account affiliations, which means that Affiliation records relate individual Contacts to Account entities. Affiliations are essential for tracking involvement in activities and organizations, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - **[Sample Uses for Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Affiliation object represents Contact-to-Account affiliations, which means that Affiliation records relate individual Contacts to Account entities. Affiliations are essential for tracking involvement in activities and organizations, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - **[Configure Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Affiliation data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create an Affiliation Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture how learners relate to your educational institution by creating Affiliation records. - **[View a Contact's Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On a Contact record, look in the Affiliated Accounts related list to see Affiliations. - **[View a Contact's Primary Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On a Contact record, look in the Primary Affiliations section to see the special subset of Affiliations that are considered primary. Primary Affiliations are organized by record type—Primary Academic Program, Primary Department, Primary Business Organization, and so on. The exact fields and layout depend on your org's configuration. ## Sample Uses for Affiliation The Affiliation object represents Contact-to-Account affiliations, which means that Affiliation records relate individual Contacts to Account entities. Affiliations are essential for tracking involvement in activities and organizations, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - University—Track students' Affiliations with an Academic Program Account like B.S. in Biology or to a Sports Organization Account like Women’s Soccer Team. Track faculty Affiliations with a University Department like the Biology Department. - K-12—Track students' Affiliations with an Academic Program like After-School Care or Extracurricular Activities. Track teachers', staff members', and administrators' Affiliations with an Educational Institution Account, such as a school district or a school. - Any educational institution—When a Contact has more than a single Affiliation per record type, you can have one, and only one, _Primary Affiliation_ to represent a Contact's special connection to a specific organization. For example, a Primary Affiliation can connect a student to the department of her major. At this time, an Affiliation can't be used to relate an Account to another Account. ## Sample Uses for Affiliation The Affiliation object represents Contact-to-Account affiliations, which means that Affiliation records relate individual Contacts to Account entities. Affiliations are essential for tracking involvement in activities and organizations, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - University—Track students' Affiliations with an Academic Program Account like B.S. in Biology or to a Sports Organization Account like Women’s Soccer Team. Track faculty Affiliations with a University Department like the Biology Department. - K-12—Track students' Affiliations with an Academic Program like After-School Care or Extracurricular Activities. Track teachers', staff members', and administrators' Affiliations with an Educational Institution Account, such as a school district or a school. - Any educational institution—When a Contact has more than a single Affiliation per record type, you can have one, and only one, _Primary Affiliation_ to represent a Contact's special connection to a specific organization. For example, a Primary Affiliation can connect a student to the department of her major. At this time, an Affiliation can't be used to relate an Account to another Account. - **[Affiliated Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We sometimes refer to the Account side of the Contact-to-Account relationship as an affiliated Account. ### Affiliated Account We sometimes refer to the Account side of the Contact-to-Account relationship as an affiliated Account. This term helps us distinguish between two types of Accounts: - Accounts that have Contacts affiliated with them, such as an educational institution, sports organization, or business organization. - Container Accounts that have Contacts related to them, such as an administrative or household Account. For more information, see [Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm). ## Configure Affiliation Set up Affiliation data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While the Affiliation object itself comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Affiliation data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Affiliation Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Affiliation While the Affiliation object itself comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Affiliation data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Affiliation Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm) - [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) - [Prevent Affiliation Mapping Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Affiliation mappings and Table Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) automation help keep data in Contacts' Primary Affiliation fields up-to-date. However, without additional configuration, it's possible for users to create erroneous Primary Affiliation data on Contact records. To guard against an Account record type without an Affiliation mapping, enforce record type validation.") ### Keep Up with Affiliation Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.119

You can't edit Accounts if Record Type Validation is enabled and your language isn't set to English. To edit Accounts, choose an option.
## Create an Affiliation Record Capture how learners relate to your educational institution by creating Affiliation records. 1. From the Contact record that you're creating an Affiliation record from, click **New** in the Affiliated Accounts related list. In this example, Lucy Snow's Contact record is the starting point for creating an Affiliation with the Department of English, the academic department that administers Lucy's major. ![On Lucy Snow's Contact record, click New in the Affiliated Accounts related list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/contact_record_affil_accts_related_list_new.png) 2. Enter relevant details, noting these fields in particular. - Organization—Start typing the name of the affiliated Account (Department of English in our example), then select it if you see it suggested. If the Account record doesn't exist yet, click **New Account** to create it now. - Primary—If the Affiliation deserves a primary designation, select the Primary field. In our example, this departmental Affiliation represents Lucy majoring in English, and the Account record for the Department of English has a University Department record type. Consider these scenarios when deciding whether to select the Primary field.
Scenario Primary Designation for the Departmental Affiliation
Lucy is majoring in English (single course of study) When creating the Department of English as an affiliated Account record, select Primary.
Lucy is majoring in English and minoring in Biology You've created the Department of English affiliated Account record and marked it Primary. When creating the Department of Biology as an affiliated Account (a separate Account record), don't select Primary.
Lucy changes her major from English to Biology Edit the affiliated Account record for the Department of Biology and mark it Primary. Doing so automatically updates the Department of English affiliated Account record to remove its primary designation.
Lucy is double majoring in English and Biology

When creating the affiliated Account records for each major department, decide which one to treat as primary, because a Contact can have only one Primary Affiliated Account. You can pick only one for each affiliated Account record type, whether University Department, Academic Program, Education Institution, and so on.

Tip
Tip You can, however, see Lucy's multiple Program Enrollment records indicating that she’s pursuing multiple courses of study. The Program Enrollment records are typically created or updated automatically along with Academic Program records.
3. Click **Save**. As you can see from this departmental Affiliation example, creating and editing Affiliation records can trigger automatic updates to other Affiliation records. Creating, editing, and deleting Program Enrollment records can also trigger automatic updates to Affiliation records, and vice versa. The specifics depend on your org's configuration. ## View a Contact's Affiliations On a Contact record, look in the Affiliated Accounts related list to see Affiliations. For details, including an indication of which ones are Primary Affiliations, click **View All** to go to the list view (or click the Affiliated Accounts related list heading). ![On a Contact record, the Affiliated Accounts related list shows affiliated Account records.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/affiliated-accounts.png) ## View a Contact's Primary Affiliations On a Contact record, look in the Primary Affiliations section to see the special subset of Affiliations that are considered primary. Primary Affiliations are organized by record type—Primary Academic Program, Primary Department, Primary Business Organization, and so on. The exact fields and layout depend on your org's configuration. ![On a Contact record, the Primary Affiliations section shows the Affiliations that are considered primary.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/contact_record_affil_primary.png) # Affiliation Affiliation represents an affiliation between a Contact and an Account. - **[Sample Uses for Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Affiliation object represents Contact-to-Account affiliations, which means that Affiliation records relate individual Contacts to Account entities. Affiliations are essential for tracking involvement in activities and organizations, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - **[Configure Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Affiliation data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create an Affiliation Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture how learners relate to your educational institution by creating Affiliation records. - **[View a Contact's Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On a Contact record, look in the Affiliated Accounts related list to see Affiliations. - **[View a Contact's Primary Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On a Contact record, look in the Primary Affiliations section to see the special subset of Affiliations that are considered primary. Primary Affiliations are organized by record type—Primary Academic Program, Primary Department, Primary Business Organization, and so on. The exact fields and layout depend on your org's configuration. ## Sample Uses for Affiliation The Affiliation object represents Contact-to-Account affiliations, which means that Affiliation records relate individual Contacts to Account entities. Affiliations are essential for tracking involvement in activities and organizations, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - University—Track students' Affiliations with an Academic Program Account like B.S. in Biology or to a Sports Organization Account like Women’s Soccer Team. Track faculty Affiliations with a University Department like the Biology Department. - K-12—Track students' Affiliations with an Academic Program like After-School Care or Extracurricular Activities. Track teachers', staff members', and administrators' Affiliations with an Educational Institution Account, such as a school district or a school. - Any educational institution—When a Contact has more than a single Affiliation per record type, you can have one, and only one, _Primary Affiliation_ to represent a Contact's special connection to a specific organization. For example, a Primary Affiliation can connect a student to the department of her major. At this time, an Affiliation can't be used to relate an Account to another Account. ## Configure Affiliation Set up Affiliation data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While the Affiliation object itself comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Affiliation data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Affiliation Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Affiliation While the Affiliation object itself comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Affiliation data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Affiliation Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm) - [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) - [Prevent Affiliation Mapping Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Affiliation mappings and Table Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) automation help keep data in Contacts' Primary Affiliation fields up-to-date. However, without additional configuration, it's possible for users to create erroneous Primary Affiliation data on Contact records. To guard against an Account record type without an Affiliation mapping, enforce record type validation.") ### Keep Up with Affiliation Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.23

You can't edit Accounts if Record Type Validation is enabled and your language isn't set to English. To edit Accounts, choose an option.
## Create an Affiliation Record Capture how learners relate to your educational institution by creating Affiliation records. 1. From the Contact record that you're creating an Affiliation record from, click **New** in the Affiliated Accounts related list. In this example, Lucy Snow's Contact record is the starting point for creating an Affiliation with the Department of English, the academic department that administers Lucy's major. ![On Lucy Snow's Contact record, click New in the Affiliated Accounts related list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/contact_record_affil_accts_related_list_new.png) 2. Enter relevant details, noting these fields in particular. - Organization—Start typing the name of the affiliated Account (Department of English in our example), then select it if you see it suggested. If the Account record doesn't exist yet, click **New Account** to create it now. - Primary—If the Affiliation deserves a primary designation, select the Primary field. In our example, this departmental Affiliation represents Lucy majoring in English, and the Account record for the Department of English has a University Department record type. Consider these scenarios when deciding whether to select the Primary field.
Scenario Primary Designation for the Departmental Affiliation
Lucy is majoring in English (single course of study) When creating the Department of English as an affiliated Account record, select Primary.
Lucy is majoring in English and minoring in Biology You've created the Department of English affiliated Account record and marked it Primary. When creating the Department of Biology as an affiliated Account (a separate Account record), don't select Primary.
Lucy changes her major from English to Biology Edit the affiliated Account record for the Department of Biology and mark it Primary. Doing so automatically updates the Department of English affiliated Account record to remove its primary designation.
Lucy is double majoring in English and Biology

When creating the affiliated Account records for each major department, decide which one to treat as primary, because a Contact can have only one Primary Affiliated Account. You can pick only one for each affiliated Account record type, whether University Department, Academic Program, Education Institution, and so on.

Tip
Tip You can, however, see Lucy's multiple Program Enrollment records indicating that she’s pursuing multiple courses of study. The Program Enrollment records are typically created or updated automatically along with Academic Program records.
3. Click **Save**. As you can see from this departmental Affiliation example, creating and editing Affiliation records can trigger automatic updates to other Affiliation records. Creating, editing, and deleting Program Enrollment records can also trigger automatic updates to Affiliation records, and vice versa. The specifics depend on your org's configuration. ## View a Contact's Affiliations On a Contact record, look in the Affiliated Accounts related list to see Affiliations. For details, including an indication of which ones are Primary Affiliations, click **View All** to go to the list view (or click the Affiliated Accounts related list heading). ![On a Contact record, the Affiliated Accounts related list shows affiliated Account records.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/affiliated-accounts.png) ## View a Contact's Primary Affiliations On a Contact record, look in the Primary Affiliations section to see the special subset of Affiliations that are considered primary. Primary Affiliations are organized by record type—Primary Academic Program, Primary Department, Primary Business Organization, and so on. The exact fields and layout depend on your org's configuration. ![On a Contact record, the Primary Affiliations section shows the Affiliations that are considered primary.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/contact_record_affil_primary.png) # Agentforce for Education Cloud Use the power of generative AI to drive more personalized communication with prospective, current, and former students. AI agents streamline education processes and help your team work more efficiently. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. - **[Set Up Education Cloud for Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas. - **[Education Agents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_agents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the Agentforce agents that are available in Education Cloud. - **[Student Recruitment Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_student_recruitment_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your school assess and recruit new students. The agent can answer questions about your school, programs, and admissions processes. The agent can also help students apply to your school. - **[Transfer Credit Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Transfer Credit Agent helps prospective students make application decisions by providing estimates on transferable credits right in an agent session. It reduces the response time for evaluations and saves previous estimates to give students continuous access. - **[Student Advising Topics in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_advising_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Student Advising Topics in Agentforce to assist and optimize your advising team's efforts. - **[Course Search Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_search_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help students and advisors discover the right courses easily. The Course Search Agent answers questions about course information. - **[Student Goals Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_student_goals_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Student Goals Agent to help your students get specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) goal recommendations with AI-powered guidance based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Assist students in getting campus resource recommendations, including courses, support programs, and involvement groups that can keep students on track to achieve their goals. - **[Student Financials Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials_agent_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Student Financials Agent to help your students retrieve their account balances and understand the fees included. - **[Financial Aid Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_agent_for_agentforce_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Financial Aid Agent to assist prospective students, applicants, and current students with inquiries related to their financial aid. The agent provides immediate and accurate responses to help students understand their financial aid status, requirements, and awards. - **[Attendance Management Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_attendance_management_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Attendance Management Agent resolves unexpected student absences through a natural voice conversation. It captures a parent or guardian's explanation for an absence and updates the student's official attendance record, without manual review. - **[Test and Activate an Education Cloud Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_test_and_activate_an_education_cloud_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Test your AI agent to ensure that it's dependable and trustworthy. When it's ready for your customers, activate the agent. - **[Integrate an Education Cloud Agent with Messaging Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_integrate_an_education_cloud_agent_with_messaging_channels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To add your Education Cloud agent to your Experience Cloud portal or other apps, configure flows and enable messaging channels. # Agentforce for Fundraising in Education Use Agentforce agents in Fundraising to automate donor management tasks and support your fundraising team's research and engagement efforts. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Donor Support Agent in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_donor_support_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help donors pause, resume, close, or update the amount of their existing gift commitments with recurring schedules. In Agent Builder, configure an agent that uses the Manage Gift Commitments subagent to help donors manage their gift commitments in your Experience Cloud site. - **[Donor Engagement Agent in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence. - **[Philanthropic Research Subagents in Agentforce in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Leverage these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty. # Agentforce for Fundraising in Nonprofit Use Agentforce agents in Fundraising to automate donor management tasks and support your fundraising team's research and engagement efforts. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Donor Support Agent in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_donor_support_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help donors pause, resume, close, or update the amount of their existing gift commitments with recurring schedules. In Agent Builder, configure an agent that uses the Manage Gift Commitments subagent to help donors manage their gift commitments in your Experience Cloud site. - **[Donor Engagement Agent in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence. - **[Philanthropic Research Subagents in Agentforce in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Leverage these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty. # Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Use the power of generative AI to manage your fundraising initiatives, volunteer programs, and program management. AI agents streamline processes and help your team work more efficiently. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud and Einstein for Nonprofits licenses enabled.
Philanthropic Research subagents personalize donor outreach strategies. The Volunteer Management Agent streamlines volunteer shift coordination. The Participant Management Agent assists case managers with participant tracking. The Donor Support Agent enables self-service recurring gift adjustments. Finally, the Donor Engagement Agent converts meeting notes into structured interaction summaries and action items. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. - **[Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get your Nonprofit Cloud org set up to implement Agentforce agents. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Agents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the Agentforce agents that are available for fundraising, volunteer management, and program management. - **[Create a Nonprofit Cloud Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_create_a_nonprofit_cloud_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create your Nonprofit Cloud agent using the Agentforce Employee Agent template. Then, customize your agent’s messages and tone. Finally, test, activate, and assign your agent to users. # Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites Get your Nonprofit Cloud org set up to implement Agentforce agents. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud and Einstein for Nonprofits licenses enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To enable Agentforce:

Manage AI Agents AND the required permissions for your agent type

OR

Customize Application
1. [Set up Nonprofit Cloud in your Salesforce org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_set_up_nonprofit_cloud_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete prerequisites for Nonprofit Cloud and turn on the features you want to use to manage fundraising, programs, case referrals, care plans, outcomes, and volunteers."). Complete prerequisites for Nonprofit Cloud and turn on the features you want to use to manage fundraising, programs, case referrals, care plans, outcomes, and volunteers. 2. [Set Up Einstein Generative AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_enable.htm&language=en_US). Turn on Data Cloud, Einstein generative AI, the Einstein Trust Layer, and data collection for Agentforce and Generative AI. 3. [Turn on Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_setup_enable.htm&language=en_US). After you set up Einstein Generative AI, turn on Agentforce for your Salesforce org. 4. Turn on AI settings for Nonprofit Cloud. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Nonprofit, and then select **AI Settings**. 2. Turn on **Agentforce Employee Agents**. 3. Turn on **Einstein Generative AI**. # Allocations Overview Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes. - **[Donation Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use General Accounting Units (GAUs) to designate donations (or portions of a donation) to specific funding purposes. For example, an Arts Education GAU is a fund allocated specifically for arts education programs at a nonprofit. GAUs often map to an organization's chart of accounts or accounting classes. - **[Create or Modify Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create or modify GAU Allocations for a donation using the Manage Allocations page. First create the Opportunity and enter the donation amount before you allocate the contribution into the appropriate General Accounting Unit (GAU). - **[Create Allocations Automatically from a Campaign or Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you define GAU Allocations on a Campaign or Recurring Donation, NPSP creates the same GAU Allocations for each related Opportunity. - **[Work with Allocation Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** GAU Allocations comes with a series of rollups that help you track the allocations you assign to your GAUs. You can find these GAU rollups by clicking the General Accounting Unit tab in NPSP, then selecting the GAU name. - **[Allocations FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to common questions about Allocations. ## Donation Allocations Overview Use General Accounting Units (GAUs) to designate donations (or portions of a donation) to specific funding purposes. For example, an Arts Education GAU is a fund allocated specifically for arts education programs at a nonprofit. GAUs often map to an organization's chart of accounts or accounting classes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create or Modify GAU Allocations](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EaSsyfPd1wc). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see the [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm) for a list of major features in NPSP and how to configure them. Many nonprofits offer a fund designation choice on their online donation pages so that donors can direct their support to the program areas that mean the most to them. When properly configured, the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) creates the selected GAUs along with the Opportunity donation record. Learn more about online donations and fund allocations with [Salesforce.org Elevate.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.elevate.htm) GAUs are as diverse in their uses and names as the nonprofits that use Salesforce. That's why NPSP allows you to define as many GAUs as you need. You can choose to allocate to a GAU as a percentage of the donation amount, or as a specific dollar amount. Use Campaigns or Recurring Donations to manage a group of donations so that when you enter Opportunities as part of that Campaign or Recurring Donation, NPSP allocates them to the defined GAUs. ## Create or Modify Allocations Create or modify GAU Allocations for a donation using the Manage Allocations page. First create the Opportunity and enter the donation amount before you allocate the contribution into the appropriate General Accounting Unit (GAU). To create a GAU Allocation for a donation: 1. Find the Opportunity you want to allocate. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. On the GAU Allocations related list, click ![down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/drop-down-arrow.png) and **Manage Allocations**. If your administrator [enabled default allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about donation allocations."), you'll see the full amount of the donation already in your default GAU. ![GAU Allocations related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/gau_allocations_1.png) 4. The total amount of the Opportunity appears at the top of the page. Enter the name of the GAU. ![Manage Allocations for an Opportunity.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/don_alloc_mg_opp_allocations.png) 5. Enter either the amount or the percent of the donation you want to place in that GAU. 6. To allocate the donation into additional GAUs, click **Add Row**. 7. To delete a GAU Allocation, click **Delete**. 8. Save your work. To modify a GAU Allocation: 1. Open the Opportunity that contains the GAU Allocation. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the GAU Allocations related list, click ![down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/drop-down-arrow.png) and click **Manage Allocations**. 4. Change the allocation as necessary. You can change the name of the GAU, change the amount being allocated, change from a dollar amount to a percentage of the donation, add additional allocations, or delete allocations. 5. Save your work. For more information about working with Opportunity donations in NPSP, see [Manage Donations in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn fundamentals of gift entry and donor management in the Nonprofit Success Pack."). ## Create Allocations Automatically from a Campaign or Recurring Donation When you define GAU Allocations on a Campaign or Recurring Donation, NPSP creates the same GAU Allocations for each related Opportunity. Let's say you have an fundraising appeal where you'd like the gifts that are part of that appeal to share the same GAU Allocations. When you define GAU Allocations on a Campaign or Recurring Donation, NPSP creates the same GAU Allocations for each related Opportunity. To add GAU Allocations for Campaigns or Recurring Donations: 1. Find the Campaign or Recurring Donation record you want to allocate. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. On the GAU Allocations related list, click ![down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/drop-down-arrow.png) and click **Manage Allocations**. 4. Enter the name of the GAU. 5. Enter either the amount or the percent you want to place in that GAU. 6. To allocate additional GAUs, click **Add Row**. 7. Save your work. Now, when you add Opportunity donations to the Campaign or Recurring Donations, those Opportunities receive the GAU Allocations you defined. If you refund a Recurring Donation installment, the Recurring Donation's fixed-amount GAU Allocations are adjusted to percentages that reflect the proportion of the original allocation amounts. For example: if a Recurring Donation of $50 has two fixed-amount allocations for $25 each, and then you refund an installment by $25, the allocations adjust to a 50% split. ## Work with Allocation Rollups GAU Allocations comes with a series of rollups that help you track the allocations you assign to your GAUs. You can find these GAU rollups by clicking the General Accounting Unit tab in NPSP, then selecting the GAU name. The rollups come with pre-defined settings that an admin can update as needed. For more information, see [Customize Allocation Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about donation allocations."). ## Allocations FAQ Get answers to common questions about Allocations. **What happens when I modify the Opportunity amount?** When you modify the Opportunity amount, NPSP recalculates the GAU Allocation amounts for that Opportunity. If the new Opportunity amount is below the total amount of your allocations, you will receive an error and the Opportunity will not be updated. In that case, you should reduce the amount of the allocations before reducing the Opportunity amount. **What order of precedence does NPSP use when you define Allocations in multiple places?** NPSP automatically creates GAU Allocations for Opportunities when default GAUs are enabled in NPSP Settings and when you set a GAU Allocation on a Recurring Donation or a Campaign. You can also manually create Allocations through NPSP Data Import, Gift Entry, and Salesforce.org Elevate. So when you define GAU Allocations using two or more of these methods, which one "wins"? Here's the order of precedence NPSP uses to create GAU Allocations: 1. Manually created GAU Allocations 2. GAU Allocations defined on NPSP Data Import records (during data import, Gift Entry, or Elevate Giving Pages) 3. GAU Allocations defined on Recurring Donations 4. GAU Allocations defined on Campaigns 5. The default GAU Allocation defined in NPSP Settings **How do General Accounting Unit rollups work?** General Accounting Units records aggregate rollup information from Allocations assigned to Closed Won Opportunities. NPSP automatically updates these rollups nightly, but you can also update them for a General Accounting Unit by clicking the **Recalculate Rollups** action. To update Allocation rollup data for all General Accounting Units, see [Run Rollup Allocations Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job."). **Does the Allocations feature support multiple currencies?** Yes, the GAU Allocations feature supports multiple currencies. Allocations inherit the currency of the Opportunity, Campaign, or Recurring Donation with which they are associated. Changing the currency of an Opportunity, Campaign, or Recurring Donation automatically changes each Allocation's currency. You can't change an Allocation's currency individually. General Accounting Unit rollup fields respect the currency conversion of the aggregated Allocations. # Allow Fundseekers to See Funding Requests and Requirements If you used the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site installer, you already have a sharing set that gives external users, such as a fundseekers, Read access to the Funding Request and Requirement objects based on the user’s Account or Contact. If you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer, you can create a similar sharing set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **Settings**. 3. Click **New** next to Sharing Sets. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Fundseeker Sharing Set. 5. Press tab to autofill the Sharing Set Name. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. Select the profiles this sharing set applies to. For example, **Fundseeker Plus Login**. 8. Click **Add** to move the profiles to Selected Profiles. 9. Select the objects this sharing set applies to. For example, **Funding Request** and **Requirement**. 10. Click **Add** to move the objects to Selected Objects. 11. Click **Set Up** next to the object name, then make the following configurations. 1. For Funding Request: 1. Select **Contact** from User. 2. Select **outfunds\_\_Applying\_Contact\_\_c** from Target Funding Request. 3. Select **Read Only** for the Access Level. 4. Click **Update**. 2. For Requirements: 1. Select **Contact** from User. 2. Select **outfunds\_\_Assigned\_\_c.Contact** from Target Requirement. 3. Select **Read Only** for the Access Level. 4. Click **Update**. 12. Click **Save**. # Allow Fundseekers to Submit Applications Configure sharing settings so that fundseekers can submit applications. - **[Give Access to Submit Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_allow_submit_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To submit an application, fundseekers need Read access to their User record in order to transfer ownership from the site user to a default internal user. This allows fundseekers to view their submitted application. ## Give Access to Submit Applications To submit an application, fundseekers need Read access to their User record in order to transfer ownership from the site user to a default internal user. This allows fundseekers to view their submitted application. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Every org is unique, and giving Public Read Only access on the User object’s default external access may expose fields and data you otherwise would not want visible to site users. We recommend testing in a Sandbox org first. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find Box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **Public Read Only** as the Default External Access on the User object. 5. Click **Save**. # Allow Grantseekers to See Funding Requests and Requirements If you used the Grants Management and Build Community installer, you already have a sharing set that gives external users, such as a grantseekers, Read access to the Funding Request and Requirement objects based on the user’s Account or Contact. If you didn’t use the _Grants Management and Build Community_ installer, you can create a similar sharing set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **Settings**. 3. Click **New** next to Sharing Sets. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Grantseeker Sharing Set. 5. Press tab to autofill the Sharing Set Name. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. Select the profiles this sharing set applies to. For example, **Grantseeker Plus Login**. 8. Click **Add** to move the profiles to Selected Profiles. 9. Select the objects this sharing set applies to. For example, **Funding Request** and **Requirement**. 10. Click **Add** to move the objects to Selected Objects. 11. Click **Set Up** next to the object name, then make the following configurations. 1. For Funding Request: 1. Select **Contact** from User. 2. Select **outfunds\_\_Applying\_Contact\_\_c** from Target Funding Request. 3. Select **Read Only** for the Access Level. 4. Click **Update**. 2. For Requirements: 1. Select **Contact** from User. 2. Select **outfunds\_\_Primary\_\_Contact\_\_c** from Target Requirement. 3. Select **Read Only** for the Access Level. 4. Click **Update**. 12. Click **Save**. # Alumni and Advancement Education Cloud helps your institution and its alumni stay connected, while giving advancement teams a centralized location to manage relationships, drive engagement, and grow fundraising. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Alumni Relations in Education Cloud to manage and engage with alumni from your educational institution in a centralized location. - **[Set Up the Alumni Relations Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_alumni_relations_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Alumni Relations app home page where a coordinator or manager can review alumni information and identify opportunities for engagement. - **[Manage Alumni Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_alumni_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage everything about your alumni users in Education Cloud, from their access to your Experience Cloud site to the account, profile, and engagement details on their records. - **[Create an Alumni Community](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides Lightning components that you can use in your Experience Cloud site to help create a community where alumni can connect with each other. Create a profile page for alumni to share information about their education and professional experience, and a directory where users can search for and connect with one another. - **[Support Advancement in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_support_advancement_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud, Alumni Relations, Fundraising, and Data 360 to support the advancement, development, and fundraising operations in your institution. - **[Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_in_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Agentforce Education and Fundraising to support the development and fundraising operations in your educational institution. - **[Corporate Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_corporate_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Corporate Relations connects academic programs, employer relationships, and Outcome Management analytics to show how institutional partnerships translate into internships, employment, and student outcomes. Automated workflows indicate which partnerships drive workforce outcomes most effectively. # Alumni Engagement Metrics Calculated Insights Definitions Use these sample calculated insights when you set up Alumni Engagement Metrics.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
## Example: Comprehensive Using Individual ``` SELECT ssot__Individual__dlm.ssot__Id__c as IndividualId__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as EngagementActivities__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Engaged' ELSE 'Not Engaged' END as EngagementStatus__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as CommunicationActivities__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as ExperientialActivities__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as PhilanthropicActivities__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as VolunteerismActivities__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as CommunicationStatus__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as ExperientialStatus__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as PhilanthropicStatus__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as VolunteerismStatus__c FROM ( SELECT ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c as IndividualId__c, ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__Id__c as RecordId__c, ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__EngagementCategory__c as EngagementType__c FROM ssot__EngagementAction__dlm UNION SELECT ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c as IndividualId__c, ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__Id__c as RecordId__c, 'Philanthropic' as EngagementType__c FROM ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm INNER JOIN ssot__AccountContact__dlm ON ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__DonorId__c = ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__AccountId__c ) as SubQuery1 INNER JOIN ssot__Individual__dlm ON SubQuery1.IndividualId__c = ssot__Individual__dlm.ssot__Id__c GROUP BY ssot__Individual__dlm.ssot__Id__c ``` ## Example: Comprehensive Using Unified Individual ``` SELECT UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c as IndividualId__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as EngagementActivities__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Engaged' ELSE 'Not Engaged' END as EngagementStatus__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as CommunicationActivities__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as ExperientialActivities__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as PhilanthropicActivities__c, SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) as VolunteerismActivities__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Communications' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as CommunicationStatus__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Experiential' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as ExperientialStatus__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Philanthropic' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as PhilanthropicStatus__c, CASE WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN SUM( CASE WHEN SubQuery1.EngagementType__c = 'Volunteerism' THEN 1 ELSE 0 END) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as VolunteerismStatus__c FROM ( SELECT ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c as IndividualId__c, ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__Id__c as RecordId__c, ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__EngagementCategory__c as EngagementType__c FROM ssot__EngagementAction__dlm UNION SELECT ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c as IndividualId__c, ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__Id__c as RecordId__c, 'Philanthropic' as EngagementType__c FROM ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm INNER JOIN ssot__AccountContact__dlm ON ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__DonorId__c = ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__AccountId__c ) as SubQuery1 INNER JOIN IndividualIdentityLink__dlm ON SubQuery1.IndividualId__c = IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.SourceRecordId__c INNER JOIN UnifiedIndividual__dlm ON IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.UnifiedRecordId__c = UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c GROUP BY UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c ``` ## Example: Unified Individual Id on Engagement Action ``` SELECT UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c as UnifiedIndividualId__c, COUNT( ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) as VolunteerismActivities__c, CASE WHEN COUNT( ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN COUNT( ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN COUNT( ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as VolunteerismStatus__c FROM ssot__EngagementAction__dlm INNER JOIN IndividualIdentityLink__dlm ON IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.SourceRecordId__c = ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c JOIN UnifiedIndividual__dlm ON UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c = IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.UnifiedRecordId__c WHERE ssot__EngagementAction__dlm.ssot__EngagementCategory__c = 'Volunteerism' GROUP BY UnifiedIndividualId__c ``` ## Example: Unified Individual Id on Gift Transaction ``` SELECT UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c as UnifiedIndividualId__c, COUNT( ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) as PhilanthropicActivities__c, CASE WHEN COUNT( ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) > 2 THEN 'High' WHEN COUNT( ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) > 1 THEN 'Medium' WHEN COUNT( ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) > 0 THEN 'Low' ELSE 'Not Applicable' END as PhilanthropicStatus__c FROM ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm INNER JOIN ssot__AccountContact__dlm ON ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__DonorId__c = ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__AccountId__c INNER JOIN IndividualIdentityLink__dlm ON IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.SourceRecordId__c = ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c JOIN UnifiedIndividual__dlm ON UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c = IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.UnifiedRecordId__c GROUP BY UnifiedIndividualId__c ``` ## Example: Individual ID ``` SELECT COUNT( VolunteeringActivity_dlm.Id_c ) as count__c, ssot_Individual_dlm.ssot_Id_c as indvid__c FROM VolunteeringActivity__dlm LEFT JOIN ssot_Individual_dlm ON ssot_Individual_dlm.ssot_Id_c= VolunteeringActivity_dlm.Individual_c GROUP BY indvid__c ``` ## Example: Gift Transaction and Unified Individual ``` SELECT UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c AS unified_individual_id__c, CASE WHEN COUNT(ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__DonorId__c) > 5 THEN 'high' ELSE 'low' END AS status_of_giving__c, ( COUNT(ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__DonorId__c) ) AS field_for_count__c FROM ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm LEFT OUTER JOIN ssot__AccountContact__dlm ON ( ssot__GiftTransaction__dlm.ssot__DonorId__c = ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__AccountId__c ) LEFT OUTER JOIN IndividualIdentityLink__dlm ON ( ssot__AccountContact__dlm.ssot__IndividualId__c = IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.SourceRecordId__c AND ssot__AccountContact__dlm.KQ_IndividualId__c = IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.KQ_SourceRecordId__c ) JOIN UnifiedIndividual__dlm ON ( IndividualIdentityLink__dlm.UnifiedRecordId__c = UnifiedIndividual__dlm.ssot__Id__c ) GROUP BY unified_individual_id__c ``` # Alumni Engagement Metrics Flows Create flows that query DMO records that you want to use as grounding data in the prompt templates for Alumni Engagement Metrics. - **[Overall Alumni Engagements Summarization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_overall_alumni_engagements_summarization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Flow Builder to create summaries for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describe the involvement of an alumnus in alumni events, the level of communication with your institution, their volunteerism roles, and their philanthropic contributions. - **[Events and Activities Summarization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_events_and_activities_summarization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes the participation of an alumnus in events and activities that are designed to foster connection and pride within the alumni community. - **[Personal Engagement Summarization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_personal_engagement_summarization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes interactive, meaningful, and informative communication with an alumnus that deepens alumni relationships with the institution. - **[Meaningful Impact Summarization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_meaningful_impact_summarization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes the involvement of an alumnus in volunteer roles that are endorsed and highly valued by your institution. - **[Personal Investment and Philanthropy Summarization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_personal_investment_and_philanthropy_summarization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes the philanthropic contributions of an alumnus that are aligned with your institution's mission and goals. # Alumni Engagement Metrics Sample Prompts Use these sample prompts for the Engagement Visualization prompt template type when you set up Alumni Engagement Metrics.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Overall Alumni Engagements Summarization _As an Alumni Coordinator, analyze the engagement data by using the data below by focusing on the Alumni activity throughout the year and provide a high-level summary of their activities._ _You must treat equally any individuals or persons from different socioeconomic statuses, sexual orientations, religions, races, physical appearances, nationalities, gender identities, disabilities, and ages. When you don't have sufficient information, you must choose the unknown option, rather than making assumptions based on any stereotypes._ _Use clear, concise, and straightforward language using the active voice and strictly avoiding the use of filler words, phrases and redundant language._ _Make sure that the summary is presented as a single paragraph that doesn't exceed 300 characters, is detailed, and provides valuable insights for the internal staff to use in relationship building with the alumni. Use the tone of an executive summary._ _Use this data:_ _{!$Flow:Alumni\_Engagements.Prompt}_ _If no data exists, then use this text as the response: "We currently don't have any engagement data on this individual. When we do in the future, a summary will be provided here."_ ## Events and Activities Summarization _As an Alumni Coordinator, analyze the engagement data using the data below by focusing on identifying meaningful experiences that inspire our alumni, are valued by the institution, promote its mission, celebrate its achievements, and strengthen its reputation._ _Please provide a summary that does not exceed 300 characters that includes:_ _Experiences and events that have engaged our alumni._ _Specific aspects of these experiences._ _Examples of how these experiences align with and promote the institution's mission._ _You must treat equally any individuals or persons from different socioeconomic statuses, sexual orientations, religions, races, physical appearances, nationalities, gender identities, disabilities, and ages. When you do not have sufficient information, you must choose the unknown option, rather than making assumptions based on any stereotypes._ _Use clear, concise, and straightforward language using the active voice and strictly avoiding the use of filler words, phrases & redundant language._ _Make sure that the summary is presented as a single paragraph, is detailed and provides valuable insights for the internal staff to use in relationship building with the alumni._ _Use this data:_ _{!$Flow:Events\_Activities\_Summarization.Prompt}_ _If no data exists, then use this text as the response: "We currently don't have any events and activities engagement data on this individual. When we do in the future, a summary will be provided here."_ ## Personal Engagement Summarization _As an Alumni Coordinator, analyze the engagement data using the data below by focusing on active communication that align with our institution's mission, strategic goals, and reputation. Summarize the key findings in a way that highlights opportunities for relationship building._ _Provide a summary that doesn't exceed 300 characters and that includes: Frequency of interactions, types of communication (emails, events, social media, and so on), and their response._ _Topics and themes that resonate most with the alumni, including any feedback or suggestions that they have provided._ _How these interactions have supported the relationship with this specific person and the institution._ _Actionable insights for enhancing the relationship with this specific person and the institution._ _You must treat equally any individuals or persons from different socioeconomic statuses, sexual orientations, religions, races, physical appearances, nationalities, gender identities, disabilities, and ages. When you don't have sufficient information, you must choose the unknown option, rather than making assumptions based on any stereotypes._ _Use clear, concise, and straightforward language using the active voice and strictly avoiding the use of filler words, phrases and redundant language._ _Make sure that the summary is presented as a single paragraph, is detailed, and provides valuable insights for the internal staff to use in relationship building with the alumni._ _Use this data:_ _{!$Flow:Personal\_Engagement\_Summarization.Prompt}_ _If no data exists, then use this text as the response: "We currently don't have any personal engagement data on this individual. When we do in the future, a summary will be provided here."_ ## Meaningful Impact Summarization _As an Alumni Coordinator, analyze the engagement data by using the data below that focuses on their involvement in formally defined and rewarding volunteer roles. These roles must be endorsed and valued by the institution and must support its mission and strategic goals._ _Provide a summary that doesn't exceed 300 characters and that includes:_ _A brief description of their volunteer roles._ _How they participated and their key contributions and the impact made by the alumni in these roles._ _The duration and frequency of their volunteer activities._ _How these roles and the alumni's contributions align with the institution's mission and strategic goals._ _You must treat equally any individuals or persons from different socioeconomic statuses, sexual orientations, religions, races, physical appearances, nationalities, gender identities, disabilities, and ages. When you don't have sufficient information, you must choose the unknown option, rather than making assumptions based on any stereotypes._ _Use clear, concise, and straightforward language using the active voice and strictly avoiding the use of filler words, phrases and redundant language._ _Make sure that the summary is presented as a single paragraph, is detailed, and provides valuable insights for the internal staff to use in relationship building with the alumni._ _Use this data:_ _{!$Flow:Meaningful\_Impact\_Summarization.Prompt}_ _If no data exists, then use this text as the response: "We currently don't have any meaningful impact engagement data on this individual. When we do in the future, a summary will be provided here."_ ## Personal Investment and Philanthropy Summarization _As an Alumni Coordinator, analyze the engagement data by using the data below that focuses on meaningful philanthropic and personal investments that the Alumni makes to the institution that align with our institution's mission, strategic goals, and reputation._ _Provide a summary that doesn't exceed 300 characters that includes: A brief summary of the philanthropic activity, its purpose and amount, how these philanthropic items have supported our institution's mission and strategic goals._ _Any actionable insights for enhancing the strengthening relationships for this specific person based on their philanthropy activity._ _You must treat equally any individuals or persons from different socioeconomic statuses, sexual orientations, religions, races, physical appearances, nationalities, gender identities, disabilities, and ages. When you don't have sufficient information, you must choose the unknown option, rather than making assumptions based on any stereotypes._ _Use clear, concise, and straightforward language using the active voice and strictly avoiding the use of filler words, phrases and redundant language._ _Make sure that the summary is presented as a single paragraph, is detailed, and provides valuable insights for the internal staff to use in relationship building with the alumni._ _Use this data:_ _{!$Flow:Personal\_Investment\_Philanthropy\_Summarization.Prompt}_ _If no data exists, then use this text as the response: "We currently don't have any personal investment and philanthropy engagement data on this individual. When we do in the future, a summary will be provided here."_ # Alumni Insights The Alumni Insights dashboard provides alumni coordinators or managers insights to monitor the overall health of the alumni program and to identify opportunities for engagement.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
Here are some of the questions that the Alumni Insights dashboard can answer. - How many alumni users are in the org? - How many alumni users have created a profile in the portal? - How many alumni users have open alerts or cases? - What are the top occupations for alumni? - What learning achievements did alumni earn in your institution and from other institutions? The dashboard shows multiple charts that visualize alumni engagement based on KPIs. You can see alumni data for the entire institution or filter data based on college or department. | Section | Description | | --- | --- | | Top Metrics | The number of alumni in your org and the number who have created an account on your portal. | | Open Alerts | The number of alumni with open alerts. | | Open Cases | The number of alumni with open cases. | | Employed Alumni by Occupation | The occupations in which alumni are employed. | | Learning Achievements by Academic Department | The number of learning achievements alumni have earned from your institution. | | External Program Enrollment | The number of learning achievements alumni have earned from other institutions. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To use the Alumni Insights dashboard, make sure that you set up Education Analytics. See [Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators."). # Alumni Relations Learn about the powerful tools that Education Cloud provides to engage with alumni from your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
For institutions to grow and thrive, productive engagement with alumni is vital. To ensure that the engagement is valued and meaningful to your institution and alumni, your staff needs data that's current and easily accessible. Education Cloud provides a 360-degree view of learners throughout their educational journey from prospect to proud, involved alumni. ![Alumni user Account record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_alumni_relations.png) Here's how you can use Education Cloud to engage with alumni. - Enable Fundraising to support advancement and manage all types of gift commitments. - Add components designed for alumni to an Experience Cloud site so that alumni can create a profile and search a directory to connect with other alumni from your institution. - Create processes and flows from templates to maintain Alumni Directory information. - Give alumni relations coordinators and alumni relations managers a single, home page view of alumni activity. - View and update information about a single alumni user to understand how the alumni is involved in your institution. - Create action-based alerts and activities related to a specific alumni user. - Track progress toward alumni-relations goals with a variety of KPI reports. # Amazon Account Requirements for Virtual Calls Understand the requirements for using your Amazon Account for Virtual Calls.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Amazon Account Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.video_call_bring_your_own_amazon_account.htm&language=en_US) # An Introduction to Categorizing Contacts in Salesforce for Nonprofits Most organizations have a need to group Contacts together based on common interests, activities, or role. If you want to quickly and easily be able to see which people in your database are volunteers, clients, or major donors, for instance, you have to set up Salesforce to make it easy to group those Contacts for viewing, segmenting lists for campaigns, and reporting. _This article was authored by Pierre Kaluzny, CEO/Founder at Sputnik Moment and Tal Frankfurt, CEO/Founder at Cloud for Good._ - **[Why Categorize Contacts?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most organizations have a need to group Contacts together based on common interests, activities, or role. If you want to quickly and easily be able to see which people in your database are volunteers, clients, or major donors, for instance, you have to set up Salesforce to make it easy to group those Contacts for viewing, segmenting lists for campaigns, and reporting. - **[Define your Categories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each organization will have to determine what roles you want to note on your Contact records. Some common roles include: donor, volunteer, board members, and staff. Others might be based on your specific mission: parents, members, grantees, mentors, active clients, program alumni, etc. - **[Ways to Categorize Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A contact can be part of multiple categories at once. For example, contacts can be both a donor and volunteer, or a client and a volunteer. ## Why Categorize Contacts? Most organizations have a need to group Contacts together based on common interests, activities, or role. If you want to quickly and easily be able to see which people in your database are volunteers, clients, or major donors, for instance, you have to set up Salesforce to make it easy to group those Contacts for viewing, segmenting lists for campaigns, and reporting. It’s a simple concept, but there are a lot of ways to go about “categorizing” your Contacts in Salesforce. This article walks you through some of the most basic and popular methods. ## Define your Categories Each organization will have to determine what roles you want to note on your Contact records. Some common roles include: donor, volunteer, board members, and staff. Others might be based on your specific mission: parents, members, grantees, mentors, active clients, program alumni, etc. You should sit down with the appropriate people at your organization and determine what categories would be useful for people to be able to use in list views, reporting, and campaigns (email, direct mail, etc.). Some Contacts can be assigned to a category because of their activities (donations, applications submitted, cases logged, etc). For example, a contact who makes a donation becomes a “donor” or a contact who has submitted an application becomes a “client.” Other categories might be determined manually. For example you might categorize a contact based on their role (Board Member, vendor, staff) or interest in your organization (volunteer, advocate, etc.). ## Ways to Categorize Contacts A contact can be part of multiple categories at once. For example, contacts can be both a donor and volunteer, or a client and a volunteer. Here are several ways of categorizing or grouping contacts in Salesforce. - **[Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Custom Fields allow you to tailor your database to your unique business needs. While you can create up to 500 custom fields on an object, don't fall into the trap of creating custom fields just because you can. Custom fields are best used when the information is static and tracking change over time might not be necessary. - **[Contact Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Record types allow you to offer different organizational processes, picklist values, and page layouts to different users. While there are no specific limits around how many record types you can have per object, best practice is to have as few as you absolutely need. Keep it simple. - **[Salesforce Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to the common use of Campaigns as a place to manage marketing tactics or a tool to measure financial or social return on investment (ROI), Campaigns are also another strategy for managing types of people and grouping or segmenting your Contacts or Leads. - **[Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topics are words or phrases that you can associate with contact records to organize them around common themes. - **[Salesforce Report Bucket Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bucketing lets you quickly categorize report records without creating a formula or a custom field. It is a very useful and fast way to sort the information into levels and nested categories. When you create a bucket field, you define multiple categories (buckets) used to group report values. - **[Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tags can sometimes be useful for individual or groups of users at your organization depending on your needs. However, tags are very limited and we do not normally recommend activating them because they are not reportable and they lack the ability to standardize the classification across the organization. ### Custom Fields Custom Fields allow you to tailor your database to your unique business needs. While you can create up to 500 custom fields on an object, don't fall into the trap of creating custom fields just because you can. Custom fields are best used when the information is static and tracking change over time might not be necessary. Examples could include classifying a contact as a "vendor" or tracking demographic information such as ethnicity, gender, or country of origin. Custom fields on the Contact object should not include information that you collect over time or multiple times during your engagement with the Contact such as the change in their annual household income, donation amounts, or volunteer hours. If your contact record has [roll-up summary fields](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/build-platform-apps-in-lightning-experience) such as Total Giving Amount or Total Volunteer Hours, you do not need to add a custom Donor or Volunteer field on the record. You can use those fields to create custom list views, filter reports, and do everything else you might need. Your most important categories should be front and center on your Contact record. If you want your end users to be able to quickly see a Contact's status without using the roll-up summary fields, you can create “badges” for Contact categories that appear on your Contact records using formula fields. Check out [Adding Badges to Contact Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adding_badges_to_contact_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Having badges auto-generated by a formula ensures data quality.") to learn how to implement badges. ### Contact Record Types Record types allow you to offer different organizational processes, picklist values, and page layouts to different users. While there are no specific limits around how many record types you can have per object, best practice is to have as few as you absolutely need. Keep it simple. Record types can be used in various ways, the most common of which is to assign different page layouts for different kinds of records within the same object. For example, you might need to track different information about mentors and mentees. For the mentee, you might want to track their grade, class, or last transcript from school. For the mentor, their employer, availability, and mentor application would be useful to store in Salesforce. In order to reduce the clutter on the contact page layout, you can create “Mentor” and “Mentee” record types and assign different page layouts to each. These record types can also have their own picklist values available, even for the same picklist field. This is really where the different business process comes into play and are really useful. For more record types tips and tricks, [click here](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.salesforce_recordtypes_cheatsheet.meta/salesforce_recordtypes_cheatsheet/). ### Salesforce Campaigns In addition to the common use of Campaigns as a place to manage marketing tactics or a tool to measure financial or social return on investment (ROI), Campaigns are also another strategy for managing types of people and grouping or segmenting your Contacts or Leads. You can use Campaigns to manage mailing lists or to group people such as committee members, event attendees, or a donor circle or level of giving. Furthermore, you can customize the Campaign member status of each Campaign to be able to track the Contacts’ status. Campaign responses are shown on a related list on the Contact and are easily reportable or shown in list views. For example: Board Members Campaign: Campaign Member Status: Prospective, Current, and Past Board Committees Campaign: Campaign Member Status: Chair, Secretary, Treasurer Event Attendance: Campaign Member Status: Invited, Registered, Paid, Attended, No Show Special Event Planning Campaign: Campaign Member Status: Planning Committee, Chair, Volunteer, Staff Lead, Vendor Newsletter Campaign: Campaign Member Status: Received, Opened, Clicked Learn about [customizing Campaigns and customizing the Campaign Member Status](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=campaigns_setup.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Knowledge. ### Topics Topics are words or phrases that you can associate with contact records to organize them around common themes. [Topic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.collab_topics_records_admin.htm&type=5) can be used to filter your Contact [list views](https://help.salesforce.com/htviewhelpdoc?id=customviews.htm&language=en_US). And if you are using Chatter, topics added to records become links to topic detail pages, where associated records appear on the Records tab for easy access. For example, you can add a Board Members topic to a number of contacts. You could then use that topic to filter a Contact list view, or (with Chatter) view the contacts together on the Records tab of the Board Members topic page. Using Topics requires some end-user training and commitment to consistent adoption and use. ### Salesforce Report Bucket Fields Bucketing lets you quickly categorize report records without creating a formula or a custom field. It is a very useful and fast way to sort the information into levels and nested categories. When you create a bucket field, you define multiple categories (buckets) used to group report values. For example, [create a bucket field](https://help.salesforce.com/htviewhelpdoc?id=reports_bucketing_adding.htm&language=en_US) named Donor Level Based on the Total Gifts Field (NPSP). Then, create buckets that group records into “Large,” “Medium,” or “Small” ranges that you define. ### Tags Tags can sometimes be useful for individual or groups of users at your organization depending on your needs. However, tags are very limited and we do not normally recommend activating them because they are not reportable and they lack the ability to standardize the classification across the organization. With that covered, tags are words or short phrases that you can associate with most Salesforce records to describe and organize their type of data in a personalized way. Use tags to group records from various objects by a common theme or use and then use those tags in search to make finding information fast and intuitive. For example, if you met a number of contacts and leads at a conference, you might tag them all with the phrase 2015 Gala. You could then search for the 2015 Gala tag and click that tag in search results to retrieve those records. Salesforce supports two types of tags. - Personal tags are private. Only you can view any personal tags that you add to a record. - Public tags are shared among all users in an organization. Any user with access to the record can view the public tags that you add. Tags need to be activated by your administrator and are not available out of the box. There are many ways to group Contacts in Salesforce. The key is to determine the best methods for your organization and then ensure consistent use of those strategies by all your users. And don’t be afraid to apply these principles outside of the Contact object. Creating groups or categorization can also apply to organizations or what Salesforce calls Accounts. # Analyze Application Data with the IPEDS Tableau Accelerator Bring application insights into one place and discover trends in your admissions cycle by using the Integrated Postsecondary Education Data System (IPEDS) Tableau Accelerator. - **[Learn About the IPEDS Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_application_data_ipeds_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The IPEDS Tableau Accelerator with Salesforce allows you to compare acceptance rates, yield rates, enrollment, and awards/degrees between institutions. - **[Understand the Data Model Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_application_data_ipeds_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the IPEDS data sources and structure so that you can put IPEDS to work effectively at your institution. - **[Connect Salesforce to Tableau](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_application_data_ipeds_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you have a Tableau account, connect it to Education Data Architecture (EDA) to start with our ready-made dashboards. - **[Explore the Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_application_data_ipeds_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The IPEDS Tableau Accelerator includes eight dashboards. - **[Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Your Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_application_data_ipeds_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get the most out of your data analyses by adhering to proven strategies. ## Learn About the IPEDS Tableau Accelerator The IPEDS Tableau Accelerator with Salesforce allows you to compare acceptance rates, yield rates, enrollment, and awards/degrees between institutions. It also allows you to compare acceptance rates, yield rates, enrollment, and completions between IPEDS and your institution’s Salesforce data. See [Salesforce Education Cloud IPEDS Accelerator](https://exchange.tableau.com/products/622). ## Understand the Data Model Requirements Learn about the IPEDS data sources and structure so that you can put IPEDS to work effectively at your institution. The following IPEDS data sources have been built with Tableau Prep Builder and are embedded in the Accelerator: - Admissions (ADM) for 2018, 2019, and 2020 - 12-Month Enrollment (EFFY) for 2018, 2019, and 2020 - Completions (C) for 2018, 2019, and 2020 - Institutional Characteristics (HD) To add more years, beyond 2018, 2019, and 2020, to the data sources, you have two options: - Wait for the new IPEDS Tableau Accelerator to be published on the Tableau Exchange. - Manually update the data sources: 1. Download the flow from Tableau Exchange. 2. Download the files from IPEDS. 3. Open the flow in Tableau Prep Builder. 4. Rebuild the data sources with the new IPEDS files. The workbook also shows data from these Salesforce objects for the four dashboards that start with IPEDS + SF: - Account with Academic Program and Educational Institution record types - Address - Application - Contact - Education History - Term - User In addition, the model also uses geomarket codes from the College Board. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To view a visual representation of the data model in Tableau, click the Data Source tab. In general, the dashboards use a generic data model that can easily fit the needs of most institutions. Here’s how the data needs to be modeled and structured in your org. ### Application and User To filter data in the dashboard by staff member or manager, you have User records structured using this parent-child relationship. - User - User Application records specify an Owner (OwnerId) field that points to an employee at your institution. In addition, each User record specifies another employee in the Manager (ManagerId) field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note The data model requires that employees, not applicants, own Application records. Let’s look at how this model works for a recruiter named Cali Nguyen. Application Record | Application Name | Applicant | Applying To | Owner | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | APP-0123 | Marla Gianni | B.S. Computer Science | Cali Nguyen | User Record | Name | Title | Manager | | --- | --- | --- | | Cali Nguyen | Admissions Recruiter | Dimitri Trapalis | | Dimitri Trapalis | Admissions Director | \-- | ### Application and Account (for Academic Programs) To filter data in the dashboard by program, you have Account records structured using this parent-child relationship. - Institution (record type is Educational Institution) - Department (record type is University Department) - Program (record type is Academic Program) The program Account record is specified in the Applying To field on the Application record. Let’s look at how this model works for a student named Marla Gianni. Application Record | Application Name | Applicant | Applying To | Application Status | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | APP-0123 | Marla Gianni | B.S. Computer Science | Incomplete | Account Records | Account Name | Account Record Type | Parent Account | | --- | --- | --- | | B.S. Computer Science | Academic Program | Department of Computer Science | | Department of Computer Science | University Department | Connected University | | Connected University | Educational Institution | \-- | ### Education History and Account (for Educational Institutions) To filter data in the dashboard by High School District or High School, you have Account records structured using this parent-child relationship.  - District (record type is Educational Institution) - High School (record type is Educational Institution) The high school's Account is specified in the Educational Institution Account (hed\_\_Account\_\_c) field of the Contact's related Education History record. If you’re not using Accounts to identify school districts, you can still filter for high schools. Also, keep in mind that there's no qualifying logic to determine if the Account is for a high school. Therefore, college-related data can show up in the High School filter. Let’s look at how this model works for a student named Marla Gianni. Education History Record | Education History Name | Contact | Educational Institution Account | | --- | --- | --- | | EH-1234 | Marla Gianni | Trailhead Academy High School | Account Records | Account Name | Account Record Type | Parent Account | | --- | --- | --- | | Trailhead Academy High School | Educational Institution | Village East School District | | Village East School District | Educational Institution | \-- | ## Connect Salesforce to Tableau After you have a Tableau account, connect it to Education Data Architecture (EDA) to start with our ready-made dashboards. If you're new to Tableau, purchase at least one Creator license to get started. You can also [start a free 14-day trial](https://www.tableau.com/products/desktop/download). Connect using either Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop. ### Use Tableau Online 1. Go to [Tableau Online](https://www.tableau.com/tableau-login-hub) and log in. 2. On the home page, click **Accelerator Dashboards**. If you don’t land on the home page, click **Home**, and then click **See All**. 3. On the Starters page, set your Data Sources filter to **Salesforce**. 4. Click **IPEDS Tableau Accelerator**. 5. Click **Sign in to Salesforce** and log in. ### Use Tableau Desktop 1. Download the IPEDS Tableau Accelerator from [Tableau Exchange](https://exchange.tableau.com/products/622). 2. Open Tableau Desktop. 3. From the Tableau Desktop home page, click **Open a Workbook**. 4. In the Data menu, select each data source that you want to use, and then select **Edit Data Source**. 5. Log in and select **Allow** to give access to your data. ## Explore the Dashboards The IPEDS Tableau Accelerator includes eight dashboards. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Application Status values are grouped in these buckets. - Complete: Accepted Offer, Admit, Admit with Conditions, Declined Offer, Deferred Offer, Deny - In Progress: In Review, Incomplete, Received, Submitted, Waitlist To change these buckets, edit the Application Status (group) in the workbook. ### Acceptance Rate | IPEDS — Institution Comparison Compare two sets of institution acceptance rates. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS Acceptance Rate** tab. ![Acceptance Rates dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/acceptance_rates.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Rates** and **Total** dropdown lists to filter the Set 1 Acceptance Rates report by rates, counts, and totals by gender. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (4). - Use the **Total** dropdown list to filter the Set 2 Acceptance Rates report by gender. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1 Acceptance Rates graphically (6). - View the Set 2 Acceptance Rates graphically (7). ### Yield rates | IPEDS — Institution Comparison Compare two sets of institution yield rates. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS Yield Rate** tab. ![Institution yield rates comparison dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/yield_rates.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Rates** and **Total** dropdown lists to filter for admissions or enrollment rates and totals by gender. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institutional Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (4). - Use the **Rates** and **Total** dropdown lists to filter for admissions or enrollment rates and totals by gender. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1 Yield Rates graphically (6). - View the Set 2 Yield Rates graphically (7). ### Enrollment | IPEDS — Institution Comparison Compare two sets of institution 12-Month enrollments. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS Enrollment** tab. ![This dashboard compares two sets of enrollment data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/enrollment.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the Set 1: 12-Month Enrollment report by genders, races, and ethnicities. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (4). - Use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the Set 2: 12-Month Enrollment report by genders, races and ethnicities. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1: 12-Month Enrollment report graphically and use the **Grand total** menu to filter the report by genders, races, and ethnicities. (6). - View the Set 2: 12-Month Enrollment report graphically and use the **Grand total** menu to filter the report by genders, race, and ethnicities (7). ### Awards/Degrees | IPEDS — Institution Comparison Compare two sets of institution completions. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS Completers** tab. ![This dashboard compares two sets of awards and degrees conferred by selected institutions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/awards_degrees.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the Set 1: Awards/Degrees Conferred report by genders, races and ethnicities. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (4). - Use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the Set 2: Awards/Degrees Conferred report by genders, races and ethnicities. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1: 12-Month Enrollment report graphically and use the Grand total menu to filter the report by genders, races, and ethnicities (6). - View the Set 2: 12-Month Enrollment report graphically, and use the Grand total menu to filter the report by genders, races, and ethnicities (7). ### Acceptance Rates | IPEDS — Salesforce Comparison Compare institution completions from IPEDS with yours in Salesforce. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS + SF Acceptance Rate** tab. ![Compare IPEDS acceptance rates with Salesforce acceptance rates](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/accept_rates_ipedsvsf.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Rates** and **Total** dropdown lists to filter the Set 1: Acceptance Rates report by Admissions, Applicants, and gender. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 Salesforce data by Application Date, Institution Name, Term, Ethnicity, Race, Gender, and Military Service (4). - Use the **Rates** dropdown list to filter the Salesforce: Acceptance Rates report by Admissions or Applicants. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1: Acceptance Rates graphically (6). - View the Set 2 Salesforce: Acceptance Rates graphically (7). ### Yield Rates | IPEDS — Salesforce Comparison Compare institution yield rates from IPEDS with your rates in Salesforce. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS + SF Yield Rate** tab. ![This dashboard compares IPEDS yield rates with Salesforce yield rates](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/ipeds_sf_yield_rate.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Rates** and **Total** dropdown lists to filter the Set 1: Yield Rate report by Enrolled or Admissions rates, and gender. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 Salesforce data by Application Date, Institution Name, Term, Ethnicity, Race, Gender, and Military Service (4). - Use the **Rates** dropdown list to filter the Salesforce: Yield Rates report by Enrolled and Admission rates. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1: Yield Rates report graphically (6). - View the Set 2 Salesforce: Yield Rates report graphically (7). ### Enrollment | IPEDS — Salesforce Comparison Compare institution 12-Month enrollments from IPEDS with your enrollment data in Salesforce. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS + SF Enrollment** tab. ![This dashboard compares IPEDS 12-month enrollment rates with Salesforce 12-month enrollment rates](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/enrollment_ipeds_sf.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the Set 1: 12-Month Enrollment report by race, ethnicity, and gender. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 Salesforce data by Application Date, Institution Name, Term, Ethnicity, Race, Gender, and Military Service (4). - View the Salesforce: 12-Month Enrollment report. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1: 12-Month Enrollment report graphically, and use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the report by gender, race, and ethnicity (6). - View the Set 2 Salesforce: 12-Month Enrollment report graphically (7). ### Completers | IPEDS — Salesforce Comparison Compare institution completions from IPEDS with yours in Salesforce. To view this dashboard, select the **IPEDS + SF Completers** tab. ![This dashboard compares IPEDS awards and degrees conferred with Salesforce awards and degrees conferred](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/ipeds_sf_completers.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter the Set 1 data by Institution Name, School Year, OPE ID, State, Institution Level, Institution Sector, Institution Size, Title IV Eligibility, HBCU, Tribal College, and Highest Credential Level (2). - Use the **Grand Total** dropdown list to filter the Set 1: Awards/Degrees Conferred report by race, ethnicity, and gender. Hover over values for more information (3). - Filter the Set 2 Salesforce data by Graduation Year, Institution Name, Term, Ethnicity, Race, Gender, and Military Service (4). - View the Salesforce: Awards/Degrees Conferred report. Hover over values for more information (5). - View the Set 1: Awards/Degrees Conferred report graphically. Use the **Grand total** dropdown list to filter the report by race, ethnicity, and gender (6). - View the Set 2 Salesforce: Awards/Degrees Conferred report graphically (7). ## Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Your Dashboards Get the most out of your data analyses by adhering to proven strategies. - Keep your dashboards up to date with current data from your org. For more information, see [Keep Data Fresh](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_keep_data_fresh.htm) in Tableau Help. - Customize dashboards with formatting to enhance analysis and presentation. You can also remove filters that aren't relevant and add your own. For more information, see [Format Your Work](https://help.tableau.com/current/pro/desktop/en-us/formatting.htm) in Tableau Help. - Export Tableau data to various image file types for use in presentations or other communications. - If you need help, log a [support case with Tableau](https://www.tableau.com/support/case). # Analyze Student Enrollment with Office of the President Tableau Accelerator Bring enrollment insights into one place and discover trends in campus diversity. - **[Learn About the Office of the President Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_student_enrollment_president_office_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use the Office of the President Tableau Accelerator with Salesforce to help create a diverse and inclusive campus that fosters innovation and collaboration. - **[Understand the Data Model Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_student_enrollment_president_office_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In general, the dashboards use a generic data model that can easily fit the needs of most institutions. - **[Connect Salesforce to Tableau](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_student_enrollment_president_office_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you have a Tableau account, connect it to EDA to start with our ready-made dashboards. - **[Explore the Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_student_enrollment_president_office_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Office of the President Dashboard Starter includes two prebuilt dashboards. - **[Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Your Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_student_enrollment_president_office_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get the most out of your data analyses by adhering to proven strategies. ## Learn About the Office of the President Tableau Accelerator You can use the Office of the President Tableau Accelerator with Salesforce to help create a diverse and inclusive campus that fosters innovation and collaboration. Lack of diversity can discourage underrepresented students from enrolling, or make them feel alone on campus. With these dashboards, you can use filters to see historical trends in enrollment and degrees earned across diversity groups. Stakeholders can use this information to understand how your institution's student population is changing, set goals to increase diversity, and evaluate the impact of diversity initiatives. See [Salesforce Education Cloud Office of the President](https://extensiongallery.tableau.com/products/608?version=2021.2). ## Understand the Data Model Requirements In general, the dashboards use a generic data model that can easily fit the needs of most institutions. The dashboards show data from these objects: - Account - Contact - Course Connection - Course Offering - Education History - Program Enrollment - Term ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To view a visual representation of the data model in Tableau, click the **Data Source** tab. Here's how to model the data and structure it in EDA. ### Term Enrollment The dashboards use the Course Connection object to calculate historical enrollment for students (Contacts). Course Connections are associated with the Course Offering object, which has a lookup relationship to the Term object. In addition, Terms must have an associated Parent Term that relates to a school year. | Purpose | Object | Field | Related Object | Relationship Field on Related Object | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Establish a relationship between students and courses. | Contact | Contact ID | Course Connection | Contact | | Establish a relationship between courses and Course Offerings, which are mapped to Terms. | Course Connection | Course Offering ID | Course Offering | Id | | Provide access to the name and dates for Terms. | Course Offering | Term | Term | Id | | Establish a relationship between Terms and Parent Terms (for example, between Fall 2020 Term and 2020–2021 Parent Term). | Term | Parent Term | Id | Term | ### Academic Program The dashboards use the Program Enrollment object to identify students who are pursuing degrees. | Purpose | Object | Field | Related Object | Relationship Field on Related Object | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Identify students who have Program Enrollment records. | Contact | Contact ID | Program Enrollment | Contact | | Pull the Program name related to the Program Enrollment record. | Program Enrollment | Program | Account | Id | ### Graduation The dashboards use the Education History object to identify the graduation date for students who have earned degrees. | Purpose | Object | Field | Related Object | Relationship Field on Related Object | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Establish a relationship between students and their Education History record. | Contact | Contact ID | Education History | Contact | ### Institution The dashboards make three queries to the Account object. The data model requires that you structure your Academic Programs in this way: - Program (record type is Academic Program) - Department (record type is University Department) - Institution (record type is Educational Institution) For example, the Biological Sciences department at Connected University offers a Bachelors of Science (B.S.) in Biology. Here's how Account records represent these entities. - Connected University is an Account with the Educational Institution record type. - The Biological Sciences department is an Account with the University Department record type. - The B.S. in Biology is an Account with the Academic Program record type. The Biological Sciences department administers this degree, so the Academic Program's parent Account is the department's Account record. ![Queries on the Account object](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/account.png) For more details, see [Model Your Institutional Account Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A four-year university, an elementary school, and a school district all have vastly different org charts and governance models. But no matter your educational context, the Account object is foundational for modeling your institutional structure."). ## Connect Salesforce to Tableau After you have a Tableau account, connect it to EDA to start with our ready-made dashboards. If you're new to Tableau, purchase at least one Creator license to get started. You can also [start a free 14-day trial](https://www.tableau.com/products/desktop/download). Connect using either Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop. ### Use Tableau Online 1. Go to [Tableau Online](https://www.tableau.com/tableau-login-hub) and log in. 2. On the home page, click **Accelerator dashboard**. If you don't land on the home page, click **Home**, and then click **See All**. 3. On the Starters page, set your Data Sources filter to **Salesforce**. 4. Click **Office of the President Dashboard Starter**. 5. Click **Sign in to Salesforce** and log in. ### Use Tableau Desktop 1. Download the [Office of the President Accelerator](https://extensiongallery.tableau.com/products/608?version=2021.2) from Tableau Exchange . 2. Open Tableau Desktop. 3. From the Tableau Desktop home page, click **Open a Workbook**. 4. In the Data menu, select each data source that you want to share access, and then select **Edit Data Source**. 5. Log in and select **Allow** to give access to your data. ## Explore the Dashboards The Office of the President Dashboard Starter includes two prebuilt dashboards. ### Office of the President Overview Get a high-level view of your institution’s diversity and inclusion metrics using the Overview dashboard. To view this dashboard, select the **Office of The President Overview** tab. ![Overview Dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/office_of_the_president_tableau_11152021.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Filter data by Institution, Graduation Class Year, Race/Ethnicity, Gender, or Military Service (2). - Group students in the charts and graphs (3). Your selection doesn't affect the KPI tiles or the Top 10 States by Enrollment chart. - KPI tiles showing Fall Enrollment, 12-Month Enrollment, and Degrees Earned compared to the prior year's same time period (4). For example, the tiles compare Fall 2021 to Fall 2020. PYST stands for Prior Year, Same Term. - The top 10 U.S. states with the highest enrollment (5). Use the menu bar to show data for a particular school year. Click a state to open the Geographic Map dashboard, and view data by state, county, and ZIP code. - Open the Geographic Map dashboard to view enrollment data by geographic regions (6). - Fall Enrollment over the last five years by selected group (7). You can display the total count or year-over-year growth. Hover over values for additional information. - The 12-Month Enrollment over the last five school years (8) by selected group. Hover over values for additional information. - The top 10 majors by program enrollment (9) by selected group. Hover over values for additional information. - Degrees Earned over the last five years (10) by selected group. Hover over values for additional information. ### Geographic Map Access an interactive map to see Enrollment by state, county, and zip code. ![Geographic Map Dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/office_of_the_president_tableau_geomap_11152021.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about this dashboard and how you can use the reporting data (1). - Click the **Home** icon to return to the Overview dashboard (2). - Filter by Institution, Graduation Class Year, Race/Ethnicity, Gender, Military Service, or School Year (3). - Enrollments by U.S. state by number of students enrolled in a given geographic area (4). Click a state for more detailed enrollment data for related counties and ZIP codes. - Click the **Navigation** menu to move up or down after selecting a state, county, or ZIP code (5). - Enrollment data for the top 10 geographic areas in your current view (6). By default, the top 10 states with the most students enrolled are shown. When you click a county or ZIP code, the list shows the top 10 counties or ZIP codes with the most students enrolled. - Select a state, county, or ZIP code for more detailed data (5). ## Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Your Dashboards Get the most out of your data analyses by adhering to proven strategies. - Keep your dashboards fresh with current data from Salesforce. See [Keep Data Fresh](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_keep_data_fresh.htm) in Tableau Help. - Customize your dashboards with formatting to enhance analysis and presentation. You can also remove filters that aren't relevant and add your own. See [Format Your Work](https://help.tableau.com/current/pro/desktop/en-us/formatting.htm) in Tableau Help. - Export Tableau data to various image file types for use in presentations or other communications. - If you need help, log a [support case with Tableau](https://www.tableau.com/support/case). # Analyze Student Success Data with the Tableau Accelerator Visualize student and support staff data and make informed decisions by using the Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator. - **[Learn About the Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator turns your data into actionable insights. See current Alert, Appointment, and other student data in a variety of formats that you can easily filter and customize. Use the dashboards to identify and act on trends around student needs and support staff workloads. - **[Understand the Data Model Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The dashboards show data from these objects. - **[Connect Salesforce to Tableau](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you have a Tableau account, connect it to Student Success Hub to start with our ready-made dashboards. Connect using either Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop. - **[Explore the Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator includes four dashboards and a student list. - **[Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Tableau Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to make the most of Tableau dashboards. ## Learn About the Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator The Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator turns your data into actionable insights. See current Alert, Appointment, and other student data in a variety of formats that you can easily filter and customize. Use the dashboards to identify and act on trends around student needs and support staff workloads. See [Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator](https://www.tableau.com/products/dashboard-starters-downloads). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Appointment data only shows for Student Success Hub orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites. ## Understand the Data Model Requirements The dashboards show data from these objects. - Account with Academic Program - Alert - Appointment - Appointment Attendee - Case with Student Records - Contact - Course Connection - Course Offering - Program Enrollment - Term - User - Success Plan The dashboards also use predefined [case teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and [case team roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To view a visual representation of the data model in Tableau, click the **Data Source** tab. These dashboards use a generic data model that easily fits the needs of most institutions. Here’s how the dashboard data is modeled and structured in Salesforce. ### Term Enrollment The dashboards use the Course Connection object to calculate enrollment for students (Contacts). Course Connections are associated with the Course Offering object, which has a lookup relationship to the Term object.

Purpose

Object

Field

Related Object

Relationship Field on Related Object

Establish a relationship between students and courses.

Contact

Contact ID

Course Connection

Contact

Establish a relationship between courses and Course Offerings, which are mapped to Terms.

Course Connection

Course Offering ID

Course Offering

Id

Provide access to the names and dates for Terms.

Course Offering

Term

Term

Id
### Academic Program The dashboards use the Program Enrollment object to provide additional filters such as Class Year and Program.

Purpose

Object

Field

Related Object

Relationship Field on Related Object

Identify students who have Program Enrollment records.

Contact

Contact ID

Program Enrollment

Contact

Pull the Program name related to Program Enrollment record.

Program Enrollment

Program

Account

Id
## Connect Salesforce to Tableau After you have a Tableau account, connect it to Student Success Hub to start with our ready-made dashboards. Connect using either Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop. If you're new to Tableau, purchase at least one Creator license to get started. You can also [start a free 14-day trial](https://www.tableau.com/products/desktop/download). ### Use Tableau Online 1. Go to [Tableau Online](https://www.tableau.com/tableau-login-hub) and log in. 2. On the home page, click **Accelerator Dashboards**. If you don’t land on the home page, click **Home**, then click **See All**. 3. On the Starters page, set your Data Sources filter to **Salesforce**. 4. Click **Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator**. 5. Click **Sign in to Salesforce** and log in. ### Use Tableau Desktop 1. Download the [Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator](https://extensiongallery.tableau.com/products/607?version=2021.2) from Tableau Exchange. 2. Open Tableau Desktop. 3. From the Tableau Desktop home page, click **Open a Workbook**. 4. In the Data menu, select each data source that you want to use, then select **Edit Data Source**. 5. Log in and select **Allow** to give access to your data. ## Explore the Dashboards The Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator includes four dashboards and a student list. ### Support Staff Overview Understand how support staff engage with students. To view this dashboard, select the **Overview** tab. ![The Support Overview dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_tableau_overview.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about the dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Click the icon to go to the Student List tab, which contains data at the student level for appointments, alerts, grade point average, and credits earned (2). - Filter data by Term, Staff Member, Appointment Topic, Gender, and Race/Ethnicity (3). - KPI tiles show the average number of students per staff member, average number of appointments per staff member, and the number of students with and without appointments (4). Hover over the tiles for additional information. - Review the total number of appointments over the last 12 months by staff member (5). - Compare appointment volumes year-over-year (6). Hover over values for additional information. - Evaluate appointment counts by topic and subtopic (7). Hover over values for additional information. ### Individual Student View See how support staff engage with individual students. To view this dashboard, select the **Individual Student** tab. ![The Individual Student View dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_tableau_student_view.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about the dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Click the icon to go to the Overview dashboard (2). - Click the arrow to go to the Student List tab, which contains data at the student level for appointments, alerts, grade point average, and credits earned (3). - Filter data by Term, Staff Member, Gender, and Race/Ethnicity (4). - KPI tiles show the number of students with an assigned case team member, with open alerts, and with upcoming appointments (5). - View the student alerts and appointments over the last 12 months as a scatter chart. The number of appointments is plotted along the x-axis and the number of alerts is plotted along the y-axis for individual students (6). Hover over values to see student names, the date that the most recent alert was created, and the date of the most recent appointment. Select one or more students to filter the other views. - Review key student data in the Student Details Last 12 Months report. The data includes students with alerts and appointments in the last 12 months, along with their GPA and credits earned (7). - View the student appointments or alerts over the last 12 months in a graphic chart (8). Hover over columns for additional information. ### Courses See how your courses are performing with course metrics at your fingertips. To view this dashboard, select the **Courses** tab. ![The Courses dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_tod_courses_tab.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about the dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Click the icon to go to the Overview dashboard (2). - Filter data by Term, Enrollment Status, Gender, Race, Military Service, Class Standing, Course Name, or Courses (3). - Filter the Fail and Withdraw Rates for Course report by Course Fail Rate percentage and Course Withdraw Rate percentage. (4). - Review the course failure and course withdrawal rates for individual courses in a graphic report. Click a course name to filter the report for a single course (5). - Review student success data on the Students Currently Enrolled report. This report provides the following data ordered by student name (by default): Class Standing, Enrollment, Course Name, Course Start Date, Course End Date, Date Since Last Appointment, Date of Upcoming Appointment, # of Past Appointments, # of Open Success Plans, and # of Open Alerts. Hover over the data for more information or to filter the report by your selection (6). ### Retention Indicators Get an in-depth understanding of your institution’s student retention with detailed retention indicators. To view this dashboard, select the **Retention Indicators** tab. ![The Retention Indicators dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_tod_retention_indicators.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about the dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Click the icon to go to the Overview dashboard (2). - Click the arrow to go to the Student List (3). - Filter data by Term, Staff Member, Gender, Race, Military Service, Student Name, # of Open Alerts, # of Open Success Plans, # of Past Appointments, and # of Future Appointments (4). - KPI tiles show the percentage of Students with Unresolved Alerts, percentage of Students with Open Success Plans, and the percentage of Students with No Appointment in Last 12 Months (5). - Review the number of students enrolled by term (6). - Evaluate a student’s retention indicators over the last 12 months. Retention Indicator metrics include: # of Open Alerts, # of Open Success Plans, # of Past Appts., and # of Upcoming Appts for each student (7). ### Student List Track students' academic performance and support engagement. To view this list, select the **Student List** tab. ![A list of students that can be filtered by Staff Member, Student Name, and other criteria](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_tableau_student_list.png) - Hover over the icon to learn about the dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Click the icon to go to the Overview dashboard (2). - Click the arrow to go to the Individual Student dashboard (3). - Filter data by Term, Staff Member, Gender, Race/Ethnicity, Student Name, Days Since Last Appt., Credits Earned, and GPA (4). - KPI tiles show the number of students with an assigned case team member, with open alerts, and with upcoming appointments (5). - Evaluate students' academic performance and support engagement (6). ## Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Tableau Dashboards Understand how to make the most of Tableau dashboards. - Keep dashboards fresh with current data from Student Success Hub. For more information, see [Keep Data Fresh](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_keep_data_fresh.htm) in Tableau Help. - Customize dashboards with formatting to enhance analysis and presentation. You can also remove filters that aren't relevant and add your own. For more information, see [Format Your Work](https://help.tableau.com/current/pro/desktop/en-us/formatting.htm) in Tableau Help. - Export Tableau data to various image file types for use in presentations or other communications. - If you need help, log a [support case with Tableau](https://www.tableau.com/support/case). # Annexure Review the terms and conditions of the license required for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit. - **[SFDC Migration Package License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_sfdc_migration_package_license.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** License for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit. - **[LICENSE APPENDIX](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_license_appendix.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Apply the license as specified in this section. # Apex Class Descriptions for EDA Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them. These Apex classes are managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). Use these descriptions to help inform your decisions when using TDTM, for example, when [disabling Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm). For a complete list of the trigger handlers that EDA uses, click App Launcher icon (![The App Launcher icon, which is a grid of gray dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)) and search for and select **Trigger Handlers**. To stay informed about updates for Trigger Handlers, join the [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F94S000000kHOcSAM?tab=discussion&sort=LAST_MODIFIED_DATE_DESC) group. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important If you have technical questions about how a class works, refer to the [EDA GitHub code repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/eda).
Object Class Name Description
Account ACCT_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents an Account from being deleted if it has any related Address, Affiliation, Attribute, Course, Course Connection, Education History, Facility, Program Enrollment, Program Plan, Term, or Time Block records.
Account ADDR_Account_TDTM

When you update the values on Billing Address fields (Billing Street, Billing City, and so on), this class creates or updates a related Address record for Accounts that are configured for Address management in EDA Settings.

If the Account is a Household Account, the class updates the Mailing Address fields for any Contacts associated with the Household.
Account AFFL_AccRecordType_TDTM

When you change the record type of an Account, and it's a Primary Affiliation for a Contact, this class updates the Primary Affiliation to match the new record type. For example, if you change the Account's record type from Academic Program to Sports Organization, this class updates the Contact's Primary Sports Organization field.

This class does not create a new Affiliation record when the related Account type is changed. It updates the existing Primary Affiliation record to reflect the new Account Type.
Account RenameLeadConvertedAccounts_TDTM When an Account is created during Lead conversion with a record type specified in Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, this class enforces the use of the Account naming format associated with the record type in EDA.
Address__c ADDR_Addresses_TDTM When you create, update, or delete an Address record, this class sets the Latest Start Date, Latest End Date, Default, and Parent Account/Contact fields. If the Address is designated as Primary field, this class updates the related Billing Address/Mailing Address fields.
Address__c ADDR_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents an Address record from being deleted if it has any related Account (Administrative or Household) or Contact records.
Affiliation__c AFFL_AccChange_TDTM When you change or clear the Account field on an Affiliation record designated as Primary, this class updates or clears the appropriate Primary Affiliation lookup on the related Contact record.
Affiliation__c AFFL_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents an Affiliation record from being deleted if it has any related Course Connection records.
Affiliation__c AFFL_ContactChange_TDTM When you change the Contact field on an Affiliation record designated as Primary, this class clears the corresponding Primary Affiliation field on the related Contact and populates the appropriate Primary Affiliation on the updated Contact. If you clear the Contact field on an Affiliation record, this class clears the corresponding Primary Affiliation field on the related Contact.
Affiliation__c AFFL_MultiRecordType_TDTM This class ensures that a given Contact has only one Primary Affiliation per record type. If you deselect Primary on an Affiliation record, this class clears the corresponding Primary Affiliation field on the related Contact record. If you select Primary checkbox on a non-Primary Affiliation, this class populates the appropriate Primary Affiliation on the related Contact record, and any other Primary Affiliations of the same type become non-Primary. If the Affiliation type is configured for Program Enrollments in EDA Settings, this class creates the Program Enrollment record for the Contact and Account related to the Affiliation.
Application__c Application_TDTM This class verifies that the Application Due Date follows the Application Open Date. If the Application Due Date is on or before the Application Open Date, the class returns an error and doesn't save the Application.
Attendance_Event__c ATTD_CourseConnectionContact_TDTM This class validates that the same Contact is specified for a Course Connection and a related Attendance Event.
Behavior_Involvement__c BEH_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Behavior Involvement record from being deleted if it has any related Behavior Response records.
CampaignMember REL_Relationships_Cm_TDTM When you create or update a Campaign Member record with data in a custom Contact lookup field, and Relationships Autocreation is configured in EDA Settings, this class creates or updates a Relationship record between the two Contacts.
Case__c CASE_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Case record from being deleted if it has any related Behavior Involvement records.
Contact ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM

This class ensures that when the owner of a Primary Contact record that has an Administrative or Household Account is updated, the owner of the Account is also updated. It also ensures that when a Primary Contact is moved from an Administrative or Household Account, the first remaining Contact on the Account becomes the Account's Primary Contact. 

When the name of a Contact used to name an Account changes, the Account's name is updated using the Account Naming Format specified on the Systems tab in EDA Settings.

These behaviors apply to all Accounts with the Administrative or Household Account Record Type specified on the Accounts and Contacts tab in EDA Settings.
Contact ADDR_Contact_TDTM This class implements Address management on the Contact object. When you create or update a Contact with Mailing Address information, this class creates a related Address record. If the Contact is in a Household, this class creates Address records for all Contacts in the same Household (except Contacts who have Do Not Automatically Update selected).
Contact CON_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Contact from being deleted if it has any related Address, Affiliation, Application, Attendance Event, Attribute, Behavior Involvement, Contact Language, Course Connection, Course Offering (Faculty), Education History, Program Enrollment, Term Grade, or Test records.

Contact

(K-12 Architecture Kit only)

 CON_CurrentGradeLevel_TDTM When you populate the Current Grade Level field on a new Contact record, this class creates a related Grade Enrollment record for the Contact and sets its status to Current. When you update a Contact record that already has a value in the Current Grade Level field, this class creates a new Grade Enrollment record for the Contact and sets its status to Current. In this case, the previous Grade Enrollment's status is set to Former.
Contact CON_DoNotContact_TDTM When you update the Do Not Contact or Deceased settings on a Contact, this class synchronizes the Exclude From Household naming fields (Exclude From Household Name, Exclude From Household Formal Greeting, and Exclude From Household Informal Greeting) and communication preferences (Do Not Contact, Do Not Call, Email Opt Out, and Fax Opt Out). For example, if you specify Deceased for a Contact, the Exclude From Household fields are also selected.
Contact CON_Preferred_TDTM This class populates a Contact's standard Email and Phone fields based on Preferred Email and Preferred Phone selections. As of release 1.82, this class syncs Preferred Phone selections only if the enhanced Preferred Phone sync functionality isn't enabled.
Contact CON_PreferredPhone_TDTM This class syncs the value in a Contact's standard Phone field with the value in Preferred Phone. For example, if Preferred Phone is set to Mobile, with a value of 555-867-5309, this value is copied to the Contact's standard Phone field. This class returns an error if the selected Preferred Phone has an empty value. This class prompts users to specify which Phone is preferred when more than one value is entered, but Preferred Phone is not selected.
Contact CON_PrimaryAffls_TDTM When you create a Contact record that has a Primary Affiliation field or update any Primary Affiliation field on a Contact record, this class creates a related Affiliation record between the Contact and Account, and selects the Affiliation's Primary field. If an existing Primary Affiliation value is changed or cleared, this class deselects the Primary field on the previous Affiliation and creates a new Primary Affiliation.
Contact REL_Relationships_Con_TDTM When you create or update a Contact record with data in a custom Contact lookup field, and Relationships Autocreation is configured in EDA Settings, this class creates or updates a Relationship record between the two Contacts.
Contact_Language__c CLAN_PrimaryLanguage_TDTM  This class keeps the Contact's Primary Language lookup field in sync with the Language related to the Contact's primary Contact Language record.
Contact_Language__c CON_PrimaryLanguage_TDTM  This class ensures that the Contact Language record related to a Contact's Primary Language lookup field is marked as Primary, and that the Fluency value is automatically set on newly created Contact Language records when a user sets the Primary Language lookup field on a Contact.
Course__c COUR_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Course record from being deleted if it has any related Course Offering or Plan Requirement records.
Course_Connection__c CCON_PreventUpdate_TDTM When a Course Connection has a related Term Grade or Attendance Event, this class prevents changes to a Contact or Course Offering on that Course Connection.
Course_Enrollment__c CENR_AcademicProgram_TDTM When you populate or change the Program Enrollment ID field on a Course Connection record, this class sets the Academic Program field to the same Account related to the Program Enrollment.
Course_Enrollment__c CCON_Faculty_TDTM This class implements several aspects of Course Connections functionality, including updates to the Primary Faculty field on the related Course Offering, and Affiliation records between the faculty Contact and Course's Department. This class is relevant only if you have enabled Course Connections in EDA Settings.
Course_Offering__c COFF_Affiliation_TDTM When you create or update a Course Offering and populate or change the Primary Faculty field, this class creates a Course Connection that relates the faculty Contact record to the Course Offering. This class also creates an Affiliation record between the faculty Contact and the Course's Department.
Course_Offering__c COFF_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Course Offering record from being deleted if it has any related Course Connection or Course Offering Schedule records.
Course_Offering_Schedule__c COS_StartEndTime_TDTM When you create or update a Course Offering Schedule that has a related Time Block, this class populates the Start Time and End Time fields for the Course Offering Schedule with the values from the Time Block.

Education_History__c

(K-12 Architecture Kit only)

 EDUHIS_DataInteg_TDTM When you create or update an Education History record, this class evaluates whether the Educational Institution specified in the Grade Enrollment record matches the Educational Institution Account specified in the Education History record. This class returns an error if the values don't match. A blank Educational Institution field isn't considered a mismatch.

Grade_Enrollment__c

(K-12 Architecture Kit only)

 GRER_DataInteg_TDTM When you create or update a Grade Enrollment object, this class evaluates whether the Educational Institution specified in the Grade Enrollment record matches the Educational Institution Account specified in the Education History record. This class returns an error if the values don't match. A blank Educational Institution field isn't considered a mismatch.

Grade_Enrollment__c

(K-12 Architecture Kit only)

 GRER_SyncGradeLevel_TDTM

This class matches the value on a Contact's Current Grade Level field to the Grade Level set on a Grade Enrollment record with a Current status. If any other Grade Enrollment record has a Current status when another Grade Enrollment record is set to Current, this class sets the status for that record to Former.

This class also updates the Current Grade Level field on a Contact to Not Applicable when no Grade Enrollment records have a Current status.
Facility__c FACI_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Facility record from being deleted if it has any related Facility or Course Offering records. Facility records also cannot be deleted when they have related Course Offering Schedules due to the configuration of the Facility object's lookup field.
Plan_Requirement__c PReq_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Plan Requirement record from being deleted if there are any related Plan Requirement records.
Program_Enrollment__c PREN_Affiliation_TDTM This class creates an Affiliation record between the Contact and the Academic Program (Account) when you create a Program Enrollment record. When you delete a Program Enrollment record, the class either updates the related Affiliation's status or deletes the Affiliation, depending on the configuration in Affiliation settings in EDA Settings.
Program_Enrollment__c PREN_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Program Enrollment record from being deleted if it has any related Course Connection records.
Program_Enrollment__c PREN_ProgramPlan_TDTM When you create a Program Enrollment record, this class populates the Program Plan field with the Program Plan that's specified as Primary for the Academic Program. If a primary Program Plan isn't specified, then the Program Plan field isn't populated.
Program_Plan__c PPlan_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Program Plan from being deleted if is has any related Plan Requirement or Program Enrollment records.
Program_Plan__c PPlan_Primary_TDTM This class ensures there is only one primary Program Plan per Account. When you insert or update a Program Plan and set Is Primary to True, the class updates Is Primary to False for all other Program Plan records related to the same Account.
Relationship__c REL_Relationships_TDTM This class implements Reciprocal Relationship functionality. When you create a Relationship record for one Contact, this class creates a reciprocal record for the Related Contact. When you update fields like Status or Type, this class makes an equivalent update to the reciprocal Relationship based on Relationships configuration in EDA Settings.
Term__c Term_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Term record from being deleted if it has any related Course Offering, Term, or Term Grade records.
Term__c TERM_CourseOff_TDTM When you populate the Start Date or End Date on a Term record, this class copies the dates to all related Course Offering records.
Term_Grade__c TGRD_ValidateData_TDTM

This class ensures that the selected Course Connection matches the selected Contact and Course Offering. It attempts to populate the missing data based on the data provided.
Test__c TST_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Test record from being deleted if it has any related Test Score records.
Time_Block__c TB_CannotDelete_TDTM This class prevents a Time Block record from being deleted if it has any related Course Offering or Course Offering Schedule records.
Time_Block__c TB_StartEndTime_TDTM When you update the Start Time and End Time for a Time Block, this class locates related Course Offering Schedules and updates their Start Time and End Time to match the new Time Block values.
Trigger_Handler__c THAN_Filter_TDTM This class performs validation on Trigger Handler records. It prevents two Trigger Handlers from referencing the same TDTM class. The class also enforces that Trigger Handler records with Filter Field data must also have Filter Value data.
Trigger_Handler__c THAN_ClearCache_TDTM This class clears cached TDTM Tokens after you create or update a Trigger Handler record.
# Apex Class Descriptions for NPSP Below is a list of Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) along with a description of each. Some classes appear multiple times because more than one Trigger Handler can reference the same class. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Use these descriptions to help inform your decisions when using TDTM. In order to answer technical questions about how a class works, refer to our [GitHub code repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/npsp).
Object Class Name Description
Account ACCT_Accounts_TDTM

For inserted or updated Accounts, this class checks the Account Model selected in NPSP Settings and sets these system fields:

  • npe01__SYSTEM_AccountType__c
  • npe01__SYSTEMISINDIVIDUAL__c

Based on NPSP Household Naming Settings, the class also updates Household Names on any Household Accounts in the transaction (if necessary).

Account ACCT_AccountMerge_TDTM

This class supports data management during the Account Merge process. When Accounts are merged, the class:

  • Updates the Account Name, and Formal and Informal Greeting fields
  • Recalculates Household Soft Credits
  • Recalculates Opportunity rollups
  • Deletes duplicate Addresses and propagates the Default Address to the appropriate Account and Contacts
Account ACCT_CascadeDeleteLookups_TDTM When you delete an Account, this class deletes Recurring Donations, Allocations, and Relationships that are related to the Account through various lookup fields.
Account ADDR_Account_TDTM When you update the values on Billing Address fields (Billing Street, Billing City, etc), this class creates related Address records for Accounts that have Address Management enabled (in NPSP Settings). This class is suppressed when inserting new Household Contacts, as ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM creates the Address.
Account AFFL_Affiliations_TDTM When you populate or update the Primary Contact field on an Organization Account, this class creates or updates Affiliation records. The class copies the Title from the related Primary Contact and sets the Affiliation Role field to the same value. The class also sets the Affiliation Status to Current.
Account_Soft_Credit__c OPP_AccountSoftCredit_TDTM In orgs with Multiple Currencies enabled, this class syncs Account Soft Credit CurrencyIsoCode with its related Opportunity. This class also blocks manual CurrencyIsoCode changes made directly to the Account Soft Credit.
Address__c ADDR_Addresses_TDTM When you insert or update an Address record, this class updates related Account and Contact records. Specifically, this class updates the Account Billing Address fields with the current Seasonal Address or Default, clears the Default Address on non-default Addresses, and updates the Contact addresses with the current Seasonal or Default (if there is no override). This class is suppressed when inserting new Household Contacts, as ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM sets the Current Address value on the new Contact.
Address__c ADDR_Validator_TDTM If automatic Address verification is enabled, this class sets each Address's Verification Status to Pending or Verification Required. This class then calls the verification service, sends the Address to the service, and updates the Address record using the returned values.
Affiliation__c AFFL_Affiliations_TDTM This class handles changes to the Primary Affiliation field on related Contacts when you insert, update, delete, or undelete an Affiliation record.
Allocation__c ALLO_Allocations_TDTM

When you create or update a GAU Allocation record, this class prevents Allocations from exceeding the parent Amount, and calculates Amount for percentage-based Allocations.

For Recurring Donation Allocations, the class updates any open Opportunity's Allocations. It also replaces any pre-existing Allocations from a related Campaign with the Recurring Donation Allocations.
Allocation__c ALLO_PaymentSync_TDTM In orgs with Payment Allocations enabled, this class syncs changes between Opportunities and Payment Allocations.
AutoNumber__c AN_AutoNumber_TDTM In orgs with Batch Number enabled, this class adds the batch number to an NPSP Data Import Batch record when the batch is created. See Configure Batch Numbers for Donations for information on enabling Batch Number.
Campaign ALLO_Multicurrency_TDTM

When you update the CurrencyIsoCode on a Campaign, this class updates the CurrencyIsoCode to the same value on all related child GAU Allocations.

This class only applies to orgs using Multiple Currencies. Advanced Currency Management is not supported.
Campaign CAM_CascadeDeleteLookups_TDTM When you delete a Campaign, the class deletes all related GAU Allocation records.
CampaignMember REL_Relationships_Cm_TDTM When Relationships Autocreation is configured for the Campaign Member object, this class creates Relationship records per the configured values.
Contact ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM

This class implements the appropriate Account Model: Household, One-to-One, or Individual Bucket. When you insert a Contact, this class is called and creates a related Household Account, One-to-One Account, or adds the Contact to the Individual bucket Account. If address information is provided on the Contact, this class creates a related Address record.

This class also updates Household Account Name, Primary Contact, and recalculation of rollups.
Contact ADDR_Contact_TDTM This class implements Address Management on Contacts in Household Accounts. When you insert a Contact with address information or update a Contact's address information, this class creates a new default Address record (unless Address Override is set).
Contact AFFL_Affiliations_TDTM

When you populate or update the Primary Affiliation field on a Contact, the class:

  • Creates a new primary Affiliation record
  • Copies the Title from the related Contact to the Role field on the Affiliation
  • Sets the Primary field on the Affiliation to true
  • Sets the Primary field to false for all existing primary Affiliations
  • Sets the Status, Start Date, and End Date fields
Contact CON_CascadeDeleteLookups_TDTM When you delete a Contact, this class deletes all related Relationships.
Contact CON_ContactMerge_TDTM

This class supports data management during the Contact Merge process. When you merge Contacts, this class:

  • Updates the Account Name, Formal, and Informal Greeting fields
  • Reparents Opportunities to the Account of the merged Contact
  • Recalculates Household Soft Credits
  • Recalculates Opportunity rollups
  • Deletes duplicate Affiliations
  • Deletes duplicate Relationships
Contact CON_DoNotContact_TDTM

This class updates fields on the Contact when you check the Deceased or Do Not Contact checkboxes.

When you update Deceased to true on a Contact, this class sets Do Not Contact to true and removes the Contact from the Household Name.

When you update Do Not Contact to true, this class sets Do Not Call and Email Opt Out to true.

Contact HH_Households_TDTM

When you insert, update, or delete a Contact, this class:

  • Creates a Household record for a newly inserted Contact (unless excluded by Record Type)
  • Updates the Household name to reflect changes to related Contact records (respects naming exclusions)
  • Deletes the Household if there are no Contacts related to it

This class is only relevant if you're using the One-to-One or Individual Account model and are using the custom Household object (npo02_Household__c).

Contact REL_Relationships_Con_TDTM

This class implements Relationships Autocreation. If you configured Contact fields in Relationships Autocreation, this class inserts a Relationship record based on the configuration settings.

When you delete a Contact, this class deletes all related Relationship records.

Additionally, if you change the Gender field on Contact, the class updates the Relationship Type per Relationship configuration in NPSP Settings.
DataImport__c BDI_DataImportBatchStatus_TDTM

When you process a batch that uses the NPSP Data Import Batches object, this class updates the Batch Status field based on the Status of all NPSP Data Import records connected to the batch.

NPSP Data Import Batches are used by Gift Entry batches and NPSP Data Import records that are connected to an NPSP Data Import Batch record.
DataImportBatch__c BDI_DataImportBatch_TDTM

This class sets Batch Status on the NPSP Data Import Batch object to Open when a new NPSP Data Import Batch record is created.

NPSP Data Import Batches are used by Gift Entry batches and NPSP Data Import records that are connected to an NPSP Data Import Batch record.
Engagement_Plan__c EP_EngagementPlans_TDTM When you insert an Engagement Plan, this class inserts related Tasks per the Engagement Plan Template configuration. The class also validates that at least one lookup is populated when creating an Engagement Plan.
Engagement_Plan_Task__c EP_EngagementPlanTaskValidation_TDTM This class validates inserted or updated Engagement Plan Tasks to prevent recursion on dependent Tasks. It also ensures that dependent and parent Tasks belong to the same template.
Form_Template__c BGE_FormTemplate_TDTM In Gift Entry, this class prevents a user from deleting a template if it's used for a batch.
General_Accounting_Unit__c GAU_TDTM This class supports integration with other Salesforce.org products.
Household__c HH_HHObject_TDTM This class handles changes to the Household Name, Formal Greeting, and Informal Greeting when you update a Household record. The class is only important in orgs using the One-to-One or Individual Bucket account and the Household object.
Level__c LVL_Level_TDTM This class validates Level records to ensure that Levels don't overlap or have the same name as other Levels in their hierarchy. The class also ensures that there is no invalid data on amount fields or the Level Field.
Opportunity ALLO_Allocations_TDTM This class creates GAU Allocations on the Opportunity by copying from a related Campaign or Recurring Donation, and creates a default GAU (if enabled). This class also updates existing Allocations if you change the Opportunity Amount or Currency.
Opportunity CRLP_Rollup_TDTM When Customizabel Rollups are enabled, this class implements hard credit rollups. When you insert, update, delete or undelete an Opportunity, the class determines if rollups to the parent Account, Contact and/or General Accounting Unit objects are necessary (based on your rollup settings) and performs the rollup.
Opportunity HH_OppContactRoles_TDTM If Household Contact Roles are enabled in NPSP Settings, this class creates Opportunity Contact Roles for Household Members upon insert of an Opportunity. Upon update of an Opportunity's Household Account, this class updates Opportunity Contact Roles.
Opportunity MTCH_Opportunity_TDTM When you update an Opportunity's Stage to a Closed/Won Stage, this class queries for Opportunities related through the Matching Gift field, where Matching Gift Status is not Received, and updates their value to Received.
Opportunity OPP_CampaignMember_TDTM This class creates Campaign Members on a related Campaign based on the insert or update of an Opportunity record. The class uses Opportunity Contact Roles marked Primary to determine which Campaign Member to create. The Campaign Member Status is set using Primary Contact Campaign Member Status on the Opportunity or using the NPSP Settings for Campaign Member Responded Status (if Opportunity is Closed/Won) and Campaign Member Non Responded Status (if Opportunity is not Closed Won).
Opportunity OPP_CascadeDeleteLookups_TDTM When you delete an Opportunity, this class deletes all related GAU Allocation records.
Opportunity OPP_OpportunityContactRoles_TDTM

On Opportunity insert, this class creates Opportunity Contact Role records. It also updates the Opportunity Name based on Opportunity Naming configuration in NPSP Settings. On Opportunity update, this class syncs changed Honoree fields, as well as Opportunity Contact Role/Primary Contact.

Additionally, this class implements key aspects of automated soft credits. The class creates Opportunity Contact Roles based on related Relationships, Affiliations, and the Contact Role for Organizational Opps setting in NPSP Settings.
Opportunity PMT_Payment_TDTM This class performs several operations related to Payments and Opportunities. If Automatic Payment Creation is enabled in NPSP Settings, this class inserts a Payment record upon insertion of an Opportunity record. Once all Payments are marked Paid, it updates the Opportunity's Stage to Closed/Won. When an Opportunity's Stage updates to Closed/Lost, any unpaid Payments are written off.
Opportunity PSC_Opportunity_TDTM

This class updates related Partial Soft Credits' Currency if an Opportunity's Currency changes.

This class only applies to orgs using Multiple Currencies.
Opportunity RD_RecurringDonations_Opp_TDTM This class handles updates to a Recurring Donation when related Opportunities are inserted or updated. This class updates these Recurring Donations fields: Next Payment Date, Last Payment Date, Paid Amount, and Number of Paid Installments.
Opportunity RD2_RecurringDonationsOpp_TDTM This class implements automation for installment Opportunities related to Enhanced Recurring Donations, including Elevate and multi-currency support.
Opportunity RLLP_OppRollup_TDTM This class implements Account and Contact donation rollups when you insert, update, or delete an Opportunity.
OppPayment__c ALLO_Allocations_TDTM In orgs with Payment Allocations enabled, this class creates Allocations and copies data from the related Opportunity, Campaign or Recurring Donation and creates Allocations when Default Allocations are enabled. Also updates existing Allocations if the Payment amount or currency is changed.
OppPayment__c CRLP_Rollup_TDTM When Customizable Rollups are enabled, this class implements hard credit rollups. When you insert, update, delete or undelete a Payment, the class determines if rollups to the parent Account, Contact and/or General Accounting Unit objects are necessary (based on your rollup settings) and performs the rollup.
OppPayment__c PMT_CascadeDeleteLookups_TDTM When you delete a Payment, this class deletes all related GAU Allocation records.
OppPayment__c PMT_Payment_TDTM

This class performs validation that prevents a Payment from having both Paid and Written Off selected at the same time.

The class also sets the Currency of the Payment to the Currency of the related Opportunity.
Partial_Soft_Credit__c PSC_PartialSoftCredit_TDTM This class handles inserts or updates to Opportunity Contact Roles based on the insert or update of Partial Soft Credit records.
Recurring_Donation__c ALLO_Multicurrency_TDTM

When you update the CurrencyIsoCode on a Recurring Donation, this class updates the CurrencyIsoCode field on all related child GAU Allocations to the same value.

This class only applies to orgs using Multiple Currencies. Advanced Currency Management is not supported.
Recurring_Donation__c RD_CascadeDeleteLookups_TDTM When you attempt to delete a Recurring Donation, this class checks for any Closed/Won Opportunities and prevents deletion if found. Otherwise, the class deletes the Opportunities, the Recurring Donation Allocations, and its Opportunities' Allocations.
Recurring_Donation__c RD_RecurringDonations_TDTM This class inserts, updates, or deletes Opportunities when you insert a Recurring Donation or when you change field data on the Recurring Donation.
Recurring_Donation__c RD2_RecurringDonations_TDTM This class implements automation for Enhanced Recurring Donations including schedule modifications, validation, and various field updates.
Relationship__c REL_Relationships_TDTM This class implements reciprocal relationship behavior on Relationship records when you insert, update, or delete Relationship records.
Task EP_TaskDependency_TDTM This class updates Status, Due Date, and sends email for dependent Tasks related to an Engagement Plan when a Task's Status updates to Closed.
Task EP_TaskRollup_TDTM This class updates the Total Tasks and Total Completed Tasks fields on Engagement Plan records when you insert or update the Status field of related Task records.
User USER_InActiveUser_TDTM

This class handles the deactivation of a System Administrator by performing the following tasks:

  1. Sets the Error Notification Recipients to 'All Sys Admins' when set to the deactivated System Administrator.
  2. Logs an Error record to the Error Log when the deactivated System Administrator is the owner of Scheduled Jobs.
  3. Sends an email to the org's System Administrators when the deactivated System Administrator is the owner of Scheduled Jobs.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Lexa Koenig, Samuel De Rycke, Steven Hugo, David Habib, and Jess Lopez for their contributions to this document. # Apex Class Descriptions for Student Success Hub Understand the Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management in Student Success Hub. Below is a list of the Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) in Student Success Hub, along with a description of each. Use these descriptions to help inform your decisions when using TDTM. To see a complete list of the trigger handlers that Student Success Hub uses, click ![The App Launcher icon, which is a grid of gray dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png) and search for and select **Trigger Handlers**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you see a record on the Trigger Handlers page that isn't listed here, it's probably an EDA trigger. For descriptions of EDA triggers, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_folder_sharing_reports_dash.htm) in the EDA documentation.

Object

Class Name

Description

Alert__c

sfal.AlertAssignment_TDTM

This class ensures that every new and updated Alert record is assigned to the appropriate User based on the Alert's assignment rules.

Alert__c

sfal.AlertNotification_TDTM

This class posts a notification to an Alert's Chatter feed when the Alert is assigned to someone other than the User who created or updated the Alert record. For more information, see Set Up Alerts.

Alert__c

sfal.AlertRelatedToPopulation_TDTM

When an Alert record is created or updated, this class populates the Related Record Name and Related Record Id fields to ensure only one Alert relationship exists.

Alert__c

sfal.AlertSharing_TDTM

When an Alert record is created, if the owner is not the same User as the creator, this class creates a sharing record that gives the creating User Edit access to the Alert record.

Alert__c

sfal.AlertValidation_TDTM

This class ensures referential integrity for Alerts, including the assigned record type and success team role.

Appointment__c

sfal.AppointmentCreatorSharing_TDTM

When a student creates an appointment in the portal, this class shares the Appointment record with the support staff member and makes the support staff member the owner Organizer.

Appointment__c

sfal.AppointmentEventSync_TDTM

This class synchronizes the Event records that are associated with an Appointment record.

Appointment__c

sfal.AppointmentMeetingLinkSync_TDTM

When a support staff member or student schedules a virtual appointment, this class copies the Meeting Link value from the Appointment Location record to the Web Meeting Link value on an Appointment record.

Appointment__c

sfal.AppointmentUpdateEmail_TDTM

When an attendee or the Organizer of an appointment updates the appointment, this class sends a notification email to all User attendees.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AppointmentAttendeeValidation_TDTM

This class checks to confirm that when an Appointment record is created or updated, there is an active Student Record Case for the invited student Contact.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AttendeeAppointmentSharing_TDTM

When a support staff member (Organizer) creates an appointment, this class shares the Appointment record with all attendees so that they have Read and Edit access to it.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AttendeeAutoCancellation_TDTM

This class executes the cancellation logic for all appointments.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AttendeeCancelEmail_TDTM

When an attendee or Organizer cancels an appointment, this class sends a notification email to all User attendees.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AttendeeCreationEmail_TDTM

When an attendee is added to an appointment, this class sends a notification email to the support staff member.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AttendeeEventCreation_TDTM

When an Appointment Attendee record is created, this class generates an associated Event record for the attendee. This class also creates an Event record when an attendee's status changes from Cancelled to something else.

AppointmentAttendee__c

sfal.AttendeeEventDeletion_TDTM

When an appointment attendee's Status is changed to Cancelled, this class deletes the related Event record for the attendee.

AppointmentLocation__c

sfal.AppointmentLocation_Deletion_TDTM

When an Appointment Location is deleted, this class verifies that no current or future appointments use it, and that the support staff member has at least one Appointment Location saved.

Case

sfal.CaseValidation_TDTM

This class enforces that there is only one Student Record Case per student Contact.

Event

sfal.AvailabilityCreation_TDTM

This class ensures that any Events created with the Support Time record type have an associated Availability record.

Event

sfal.EventNoUpdate_TDTM

When a support staff member edits an Event, this class prevents them from updating details that don't match the related Appointment record.

QueueWaitingRoomResource__c

sfal.QueueWaitingRoomResourceValidation_TDTM

When a Queue Waiting Room Resource record is created or updated, this class checks to make sure that either the User field or the Support Pool field is populated, but not both.

SuccessPlan__c

sfal.SuccessPlanAutoApply_TDTM

When a Success Plan is created, the Auto Apply Success Plan Template checkbox is selected, and the From Template field is populated. This class retrieves the data from the template and copies it to the new record. It also adds Success Plan Template Tasks as child tasks in the new Success Plan.

SuccessPlan__c

sfal.SuccessPlanSharing_TDTM

When a support staff member creates or updates a Success Plan for a student, this class shares the Success Plan record with the student so that they can see it in the portal.

SuccessPlan__c

sfal.SuccessPlanStatusUpdate_TDTM

This class updates the Status of a Success Plan to Cancelled if the Cancelled checkbox is selected. The class also updates the Success Plan to Completed based on the number of open Tasks.

SuccessPlan__c

sfal.SuccessPlanTemplateRollup_TDTM

This class calculates the number of times a Success Plan Template was applied (the Usage Count).

SuccessPlan__c

sfal.SuccessPlanValidation_TDTM

When a Success Plan record is created or updated, this class ensures that the student Contact that is assigned to the Success Plan is related to the matching Student Record Case.

Task

sfal.SuccessPlanTaskCount_TDTM

This class calculates the number of Tasks in any given Status for display in Success Plan Task counts.

Topic__c

sfal.TopicPicklistPopulation_TDTM

This class copies the value in the Topic Name text field to the Label picklist field to facilitate translations.
# Appendix Learn about flows and available reference documentation for Grants Management. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore the available Grants Management flows that can automate your grants activities. - **[Other Reference Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_other_reference_documentation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore additional reference documentation about custom components and tax status search to help you make the most of Grants Management. # Application Application stores information about a student's application to an educational institution or program. - **[Sample Uses for Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track information about a prospective student's application to your institution, from submittal through decision. Generate reports to see the characteristics of your applicant pool. - **[Configure Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create an Application Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create an Application, you must set up an Account that you can relate it. For example, an Account that represents the entire school or a program within a school. ## Sample Uses for Application Track information about a prospective student's application to your institution, from submittal through decision. Generate reports to see the characteristics of your applicant pool. Let's look at some possible uses for the Application object. - University—Identify the academic program or major and the type of program (for example, graduate or undergraduate) an applicant has applied to. - K-12—Identify the person preparing the application and that person's relationship to the student. - Any educational institution—Determine an application's status (for example, Incomplete, In Review, Waitlist, etc.) and track important milestones. ## Configure Application Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task

1.91

To implement the newly added Application object, customize the Application page layout, related lists, and list views, if needed. For more information, see Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.

1.94

Add the Admit with Conditions picklist value, to the Application Status field on Application. For information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values. 
  • If needed, create a K-12 All Applications list view with this configuration.

    • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

    • Filter by Owner: All attributes

    • Filter by Owner: All attributes Display order: Application Name, Applicant, Applying To, Term, Application Type, Application Status, Application Date, Application Decision Date, Applicant Decision Date, Preparer. See ​​Create or Clone a List View.

1.103 To track the date applicants initially created their applications, add the Initial Creation Date field to the Application page layout. Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
1.116 Add these fields to the EDA Application Layout, as needed: Open Date and Due Date. For more information, see Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
1.117
  • Add the Started picklist value to the EDA Application Layout, as needed. For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • If you started with a version of EDA before 1.117 and want to make the Application setting visible in EDA Settings, grant Apex class access to ApplicationSettingsController for all profiles and permission sets as needed. For more information, see Enable EDA Apex Class Access.
## Create an Application Record Before you create an Application, you must set up an Account that you can relate it. For example, an Account that represents the entire school or a program within a school. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Test records to track the tests this applicant has completed and Test Score records to track the results. See [Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_test.htm). 1. If the Contact record has an Applications related list, click **New** in the related list. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Applications**, and click **New**. 2. (K-12 only) In most cases, you're creating an Application for a student, so on the New Application page, click **Student**, then click **Next**. 3. In the Contact field, select an existing Contact or click **New Contact**. 4. Enter all relevant details for your new Contact, but _leave the Account Name field blank_ to ensure that the required Administrative or Household Account is created. Click **Save**. 5. Enter all relevant Application details and specify the academic program or major the applicant is applying to. For example, you might choose an Account that has an Educational Institution, Academic Program, or custom record type. Fill in optional fields as needed. 6. Click **Save**. Or, if you're creating multiple Application records, click **Save & New**. # Application Application stores information about a student's application to an educational institution or program. - **[Sample Uses for Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track information about a prospective student's application to your institution, from submittal through decision. Generate reports to see the characteristics of your applicant pool. - **[Configure Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create an Application Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create an Application, you must set up an Account that you can relate it. For example, an Account that represents the entire school or a program within a school. ## Sample Uses for Application Track information about a prospective student's application to your institution, from submittal through decision. Generate reports to see the characteristics of your applicant pool. Let's look at some possible uses for the Application object. - University—Identify the academic program or major and the type of program (for example, graduate or undergraduate) an applicant has applied to. - K-12—Identify the person preparing the application and that person's relationship to the student. - Any educational institution—Determine an application's status (for example, Incomplete, In Review, Waitlist, etc.) and track important milestones. ## Configure Application Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task

1.5

To implement the newly added Application object, customize the Application page layout, related lists, and list views, if needed. For more information, see Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.

1.9

Add the Admit with Conditions picklist value, to the Application Status field on Application. For information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values. 
1.9
  • If needed, create a K-12 All Applications list view with this configuration.

    • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

    • Filter by Owner: All attributes

    • Filter by Owner: All attributes Display order: Application Name, Applicant, Applying To, Term, Application Type, Application Status, Application Date, Application Decision Date, Applicant Decision Date, Preparer. See ​​Create or Clone a List View.

1.17 To track the date applicants initially created their applications, add the Initial Creation Date field to the Application page layout. Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
1.21 Add these fields to the EDA Application Layout, as needed: Open Date and Due Date. For more information, see Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
1.21
  • Add the Started picklist value to the EDA Application Layout, as needed. For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • If you started with a version of EDA before 1.117 and want to make the Application setting visible in EDA Settings, grant Apex class access to ApplicationSettingsController for all profiles and permission sets as needed. For more information, see Enable EDA Apex Class Access.
## Create an Application Record Before you create an Application, you must set up an Account that you can relate it. For example, an Account that represents the entire school or a program within a school. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Test records to track the tests this applicant has completed and Test Score records to track the results. See [Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_test.htm). 1. If the Contact record has an Applications related list, click **New** in the related list. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Applications**, and click **New**. 2. (K-12 only) In most cases, you're creating an Application for a student, so on the New Application page, click **Student**, then click **Next**. 3. In the Contact field, select an existing Contact or click **New Contact**. 4. Enter all relevant details for your new Contact, but _leave the Account Name field blank_ to ensure that the required Administrative or Household Account is created. Click **Save**. 5. Enter all relevant Application details and specify the academic program or major the applicant is applying to. For example, you might choose an Account that has an Educational Institution, Academic Program, or custom record type. Fill in optional fields as needed. 6. Click **Save**. Or, if you're creating multiple Application records, click **Save & New**. # Application Form Education Cloud provides an Experience Cloud Site template for you to use for your institution. The template includes a customizable application form created with OmniStudio that prospective students can use to apply to your institution. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set assigned to them can edit the application form in OmniStudio. Users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud license can access the application form on your Experience Cloud Site. **How**: - Create and update profiles and permission so that users can access the application form. - Create and update supporting records and settings for users so that they can access the application form on your Experience Cloud Site. - Update the default sharing settings for objects so that users can see the application data and documents. See Also: - [Get Started with Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_get_started_with_applications.htm) # Application Intake and Processing When a prospective student submits an application to your institution, the application goes through the review and approval process. Conduct and manage the process of verifying, reviewing, and deciding on applications all in one place. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components or Education Cloud Reviewer permission set can access individual application records. **How**: When a prospective student submits an application, it creates an individual application record. You verify, review, and make a final decision on the application from the individual application record. See Also: - [Verify, Review, and Decide on Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_verify_review_and_decide_on_applications.htm) # Apply Care Plans to Alerts Apply a care plan to record alerts to support the respective learners.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To apply care plans to alerts: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. On the advisor console, click the dropdown navigation menu, and select **Record Alerts**. 3. Select the record alerts, and then click **Apply Care Plan**. 4. Enter a name, and choose the status of the care plan. 5. Confirm the participants, provide any other relevant details, and click **Next**. 6. Add or remove goal definitions and benefits as required, and then click **Add**. 7. Review the care plan details and save your changes. # Appointment Availability in Education Cloud When learners select an appointment topic, Salesforce checks the staff's availability based on the data that you set up, such as the mapping between topics and engagement channels.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Learners and staff members can only schedule appointments for learners who have an existing case related to them. See [Appointment Objects in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Education Cloud provides powerful and flexible objects to support your institution's data model."). When you create and assign multiple support staff teams to learners, learners can schedule appointments with assigned and unassigned teams based on their case record. For example, Stephanie, a student at Cloudy College, has two open cases: Academic and Financial Aid. Her Academic case is assigned to the Undergraduate Advising team, which includes Adam and Amy. A support pool handles the Financial Aid case. So Stephanie can schedule appointments with Adam, Amy, and anyone from the Financial Aid support pool. ## Scheduling Appointments with Other Teams By default, learners can't book appointments with staff members who aren't related to their case record. Only staff members can do so from the learner's record. Stephanie would like to learn more about the Study Abroad program, but because she’s not currently in that program, she has no assigned advisors or teams for it. Her classmate tells her about a great Study Abroad advisor, Sam. Since Sam is only in the Study Abroad pool, Stephanie can’t schedule appointments with her directly. So she goes to the Study Abroad office to inquire about meeting with Sam. Frank is a front-desk worker in that office, and can see all available support pools. He can open Stephanie’s person account record and schedule an appointment with Sam. If the Study Abroad support pool is configured to use the Academic case, Salesforce relates the appointment to Stephanie’s Academic case, but doesn’t relate the pool or Sam to her case. However, her assigned advisor sees that the appointment occurred and can consider international study topics in future discussions. ## Drop-In Availability Show drop-in availability for appointments on a staff member's profile and in the learner's portal. To see drop-in appointment times, create a shift that includes drop-ins and meets these criteria: - The related engagement channels include at least an in-person channel. - The related shift doesn’t include all topics. If it includes topics for drop-ins and scheduled appointments, Salesforce only shows the drop-in topics. Salesforce doesn’t automatically account for non-working days such as holidays, time off, or weekends. Salesforce only checks shifts (and the absence of shifts) to determine your staff’s availability. See [Considerations for Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_considerations_shifts.htm&type=5). By default, Salesforce displays the drop-in availability for the next 7 days, and you can customize that range to a maximum of 10 days. See [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud."). # Appointment Management Education Cloud provides a central self-service system for managing appointments. Learners have visibility over your staff's availability in any department, based on their configured location and appointment channels. They can view and schedule appointments, and if you set up the virtual appointments feature, they can also join virtually. Your staff can also schedule appointments on behalf of learners from their records. Unifying all departments on a single scheduling tool increases your learners' ability to use all of your services.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm&type=5). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. Education Cloud includes an initial 1,000 appointments per month, plus an additional: - 150 per month per CRM user for the Enterprise Edition. - 200 per month per CRM user for the Unlimited Edition. If you need more appointments, contact your account executive. The Appointment Scheduling data model defines the objects and relationships that power Salesforce Scheduler. Use these objects to configure topics, assign staff, and manage availability. For more information, see [Appointment Scheduling Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/appointment-scheduling.html). - **[Set Up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, and configure sharing and permissions settings. Then, create the supporting data types for appointment data modeling. - **[Set Up Your Org for Appointment Topics and Availability in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_manage_appointment_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get clear guidance at every stage to quickly set up appointment topics, assign staff, and set up their availability. These components significantly reduce the configuration time and potential errors. - **[Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** System administrators have clear guidance at every stage to quickly set up appointment scheduling topics, assign staff, and complete all prerequisite steps. - **[Manage Advisor Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_advisor_availability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly manage your working hours and set vacation or time off for yourself or colleagues. This streamlines scheduling workflows and reduces dependency on administrators. - **[Manage the Appointment Experience in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_appt_exp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many staff members and learners prefer the control and convenience of booking their appointments online rather than working through a call center. Configure your Experience site to enable them to find time slots and book appointments on their own, on desktop or mobile. - **[Set Up Virtual Appointments With AWS Chime](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_virtual_appt_aws.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, set up virtual appointments with Amazon Web Services (AWS) Chime SDK to add audio and video capabilities to the learners' portal. # Appointment Objects in Education Cloud Education Cloud provides powerful and flexible objects to support your institution's data model.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
For information about how each object relates to another, see [Developer Resources for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_developer_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where to find developer resources including the entity relationship diagram (ERD), object reference, and apex reference."). - **[Service Resources (Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Resources represent staff members available for appointments, such as academic advisors, admissions counselors, or financial aid advisors. - **[Service Territories (Characteristics and Locations)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Territories represent common characteristics for grouping appointments, usually the locations where your staff takes appointments. - **[Skills](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Skills help learners narrow down and choose the right resource for their appointments. Skills are especially useful for topics that require specific expertise, such as advanced degree planning. - **[Engagement Channel Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Engagement Channel Types store the channels that your staff uses to meet learners. - **[Work Type Groups and Work Types (Appointment Topics)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Work Type Groups and Work Types together represent appointment topics such as academic advising, admissions counseling, interviews, or campus tours and visits. - **[Appointment Categories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Appointment categories determine whether an appointment is a drop-in appointment or a scheduled one. - **[Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Shifts determine your staff's appointment availability. - **[Cases and Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Cases and Success Teams determine which case teams, assigned or unassigned, are available for appointments, based on the case record type. Salesforce uses your existing learners' Case records. For example, your institution has cases for IT support and academic advising. To make academic advising case teams bookable, map that record type through success teams. - **[Service Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Appointments represent appointments that your staff or learners schedule. ## Service Resources (Staff) Service Resources represent staff members available for appointments, such as academic advisors, admissions counselors, or financial aid advisors. See [Set Up Appointment Data Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling."). ## Service Territories (Characteristics and Locations) Service Territories represent common characteristics for grouping appointments, usually the locations where your staff takes appointments. If your university has multiple campuses, you can set up a service territory per campus. And if your staff works in different locations depending on the days of the week, or wants to use different channels depending on the topic, service territories can reflect that too. But service territories aren’t limited to locations! You can model departments or group topics. For example, you can have a service territory for admissions and another for academic advising. ## Skills Skills help learners narrow down and choose the right resource for their appointments. Skills are especially useful for topics that require specific expertise, such as advanced degree planning. ## Engagement Channel Types Engagement Channel Types store the channels that your staff uses to meet learners. A staff member can offer multiple channels at multiple locations and for multiple topics. For example, learners can schedule appointments with an advisor for in-person meetings on some days, and video calls on others. ## Work Type Groups and Work Types (Appointment Topics) Work Type Groups and Work Types together represent appointment topics such as academic advising, admissions counseling, interviews, or campus tours and visits. While work type groups represent the topics themselves, work types serve as templates for high-level appointment details such as the duration. Structure work type groups to represent a hierarchy of topics. For example, an academic advising work type group includes child work type groups for degree planning and course scheduling. When scheduling appointments, users select the topic at the lowest level of the hierarchy. They can’t select parent-level work type groups, and Salesforce doesn’t apply any work type assigned to that parent. A work type can apply to multiple work type groups to share characteristics. Conversely, we recommend that, for clarity: - You assign only one work type to each work type group. For drop-ins, if you map multiple work type groups to one work type, Salesforce only shows one work type group topic name when listing the available time slots. - When you have topics and subtopics, only assign a work type to the child work type groups. To avoid issues with appointment scheduling, create no more than 4,000 appointment topics. ## Appointment Categories Appointment categories determine whether an appointment is a drop-in appointment or a scheduled one. If your staff offers both options for a topic, we recommend that you create a topic for each option, for example Academic Advising (Drop-In) and Academic Advising (Scheduled). ## Shifts Shifts determine your staff's appointment availability. Create and update shifts with the staff’s work hours for one or more service territories. For example: - An academic advisor has an on-campus shift on Mondays and Wednesdays to advise first-year students, and a virtual shift on Fridays open to all students. - A career counselor offers drop-in consultations on Tuesday mornings, and wants Salesforce to show them as unavailable during their time off for the holidays. ## Cases and Success Teams Cases and Success Teams determine which case teams, assigned or unassigned, are available for appointments, based on the case record type. Salesforce uses your existing learners' Case records. For example, your institution has cases for IT support and academic advising. To make academic advising case teams bookable, map that record type through success teams. Success teams are technically required only for unassigned case teams to show in the appointment setup flow. But we recommend that you also map a success team for each assigned team. This configuration makes them available to learners that they’re not assigned to. For example, if a student wants to explore subjects beyond their current curriculum, they can ask a front-desk worker to meet someone that they heard about from another student. If the record type on the student's existing case matches the unassigned team's record type, Salesforce adds the appointment to their case. If it doesn't, the staff member must create a case with that record type before booking an appointment with that team. Setting up success teams is required even if your institution assigns individual staff members to learners directly instead of case teams. For best performance, we recommend that case teams have fewer than 20 members. If you create larger teams, the appointment setup flow takes longer to load the available time slots. See [Map Case Teams to Success Teams to Define Appointment Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_map_case_teams_to_success_teams_to_define_appointment_availability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success teams determine which case teams (assigned or unassigned) or staff members are available for scheduling using the case record type."). ## Service Appointments Service Appointments represent appointments that your staff or learners schedule. # Appointment Scheduling System administrators have clear guidance at every stage to quickly set up appointment scheduling topics, assign staff, and complete all prerequisite steps.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Appointment Objects in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides powerful and flexible objects to support your institution's data model. - **[Appointment Availability in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_appt_availability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When learners select an appointment topic, Salesforce checks the staff's availability based on the data that you set up, such as the mapping between topics and engagement channels. - **[Set Up Appointment Data by Using Manage Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Appointment scheduling requires configuring several foundational elements. Set up these elements to provide simplified, intuitive guidance to administrators and advisors for managing appointments within Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Appointment Data Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling. # Appointment Scheduling Provide a central self-service system for managing appointments. Learners have visibility over your staff's availability in any department, based on their configured topics and appointment channels. They can view and schedule appointments, and even join virtually if you set up that feature. Your staff can also schedule appointments on behalf of learners from their records. Unifying all departments on a single scheduling tool increases your learners' ability to use all of your services. - **[Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_set_up_appointment_scheduling_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, and control who can schedule appointments, and how. Fine-tune sharing settings to control the learners' and staff's access to Salesforce objects, and create and assign permission sets to represent your staff's availability. Build a data model that supports your institution—staff members and teams, locations, appointment topics, and much more—to create a flexible and powerful appointment scheduling solution. - **[Enable Learners to Schedule Appointments Via Self-Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_enable_leaners_self_service_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure learners as Experience Cloud users to grant them access to a preconfigured self-service portal to schedule appointments, on desktop or mobile. When learners and staff log in to the portal, they get a comprehensive view of their schedule, and see their past and upcoming appointments. From that portal, they can choose topics, time slots, appointment channels, and teams or team members for appointments. If you configure video calls with AWS Chime, learners can also start virtual appointments directly from there. - **[Customize the Appointment Self-Service Setup Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_customize_appointment_setup_flow_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The self-service appointment setup flow is built on OmniStudio components that retrieve data from the learners' records. Customize those components to best suit your institution's needs in a user-friendly, click-based interface to offer a rich, personalized experience to your users. Add static or dynamic information to increase learners' engagement and awareness such as by communicating upcoming campus events or holiday closures. - **[Set Up Virtual Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_set_up_virtual_appointments_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Host appointments from anywhere by setting up virtual calls with Amazon Web Services (AWS) Chime SDK or another video call service. Education Cloud's appointment feature seamlessly integrates with AWS, and lets your users join calls directly from the Salesforce app or the self-service portal. Turn on closed captioning to meet accessibility standards to support all your learners. # Appointment Scheduling Experience Using My Appointments Header Learners schedule appointments through your Education Portal. When you add the My Appointments Header to your portal, a student can check whether an advisor is available before selecting their preferred time slot to create the appointment.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
To schedule an appointment, learners click **Schedule Appointment** on your Education Portal. ![Schedule Appointment button in the My Appointments Header Lightning web component on the Education portal.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_schedule_appointment.png) The workflow guides the learner through a series of picklists that help determine the available teams and advisors. ![Schedule Appointment modal with callouts for the Success Team, Advisor, and Topic or Subtopic picklists, and the Check Availability button.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_appointment_modal.png) - This Success Team picklist (1) determines which advisors or teams are available for the student to select. It shows a consolidated list from these sources: - Assigned Advisors/Teams—All individuals and teams assigned to the student's active cases, but only if the case's record type is specified on an active Success Team record. - Bookable (Unassigned) Teams—Pre-defined teams that have the Can Self Schedule option checked on a Success Team record. A team will only appear here if the student has an active case with the record type specified on that same Success Team record. - The Advisor picklist (2) shows the individual members of the selected success team. If permitted by Success Team record settings, you can also see a combined availability for all members of the team, and an auto-assign option. - The Advisor picklist (2) shows the individual members of the selected success team. If permitted by Success Team record settings, you can also see a combined availability for all members of the team, and an auto-assign option. - The Topic or Subtopic picklist (3) intelligently filters the appointment topics based on who the selected advisor(s) can help with. Search results show up to 4,000 appointment topics. - The learner clicks **Check Availability** (4) to see if the selected advisors are available for appointments in the next 30 days. Shift records define availability for advisors. ## Topic and Subtopic Filtering Logic Every topic is associated with at least one advisor role. Use Work Type Groups to define topics and Case Team Roles to define advisor roles. - The system looks at the advisor's role across all active advising cases. It then shows topics that match that exact role for the assigned advisor. - When the learner selects **All Members** or **Assign someone to me**, a topic appears in the list if at least one member of the team holds the required role to service that topic. - The system uses the member's role within the predefined case team to find matching topics for a member of a bookable (unassigned) team. Every topic is associated with at least one service territory. The topics returned by matching all roles are then filtered based on the service territory of the selected advisor. - The system looks at the service territories covered by an assigned advisor. Then it shows available topics for those territories. - When the learner selects **All Members** or **Assign someone to me**, a topic appears in the list if at least one member of the team services a territory for which the topic is available. Only the topics which are linked to at least one engagement channel are displayed in the picklist. # Approvals in Intelligent Degree Planning To enable learners to submit their degree plans for advisor review, you can add an approval process to the Intelligent Degree Planner.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Set up an approval process in the CRM, and then add the Submit for Approval button to the Intelligent Degree Planner. See [Classic Approval Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.what_are_approvals.htm) and [Let Users Submit for Approval](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.approvals_let_users_submit.htm). # Are You Ready to Import Data into NPSP? Learn what it takes to import data from a spreadsheet into the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Data Import Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_are_you_ready.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're used to working in Excel, think of Salesforce as many, many spreadsheets, all related to each other in specific ways, and all stored on the internet. - **[Find More Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_are_you_ready.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Visit Salesforce's vibrant, online community, where your fellow nonprofits discuss all questions great and small. ## Data Import Overview If you're used to working in Excel, think of Salesforce as many, many spreadsheets, all related to each other in specific ways, and all stored on the internet. Salesforce is like a gigantic database in the cloud, and we commonly refer to the various "parts" of Salesforce as objects (Contacts, Household Accounts, Opportunities, and so on). You can see these as the tabs across the top of your Salesforce org. We can't lie: if you have thousands of data rows in existing spreadsheets or in-house databases, importing your data into the right Salesforce objects takes a lot of work. The good news? The Nonprofit Success Pack provides tools so you don't have to tackle this complex, time-consuming project without some help. To get started, head over to [How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about the import process."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You need to budget enough time to go through the data import process properly. Complex donor data is not something that can normally be imported in an hour or two—it could take much longer to go through all of the required steps, depending on the quality and quantity of your data. Please prepare accordingly. ## Find More Help Visit Salesforce's vibrant, online community, where your fellow nonprofits discuss all questions great and small. You'll find: - Questions and answers on virtually everything related to Salesforce and nonprofits. - Specialized Chatter groups dedicated to the types of nonprofits you're interested in. - Product documentation, workbooks, and helpful tips. - The most knowledgeable experts on Salesforce and nonprofits, anywhere in the world. [Access the online community](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazercommunity). Use your Salesforce username and password to log in—no other credentials required! # Assign Accounting Subledger Permission Sets Assign permissions sets to your users to grant them access to features beyond what's included in their basic user licenses.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
User Permissions Needed  
To assign permission sets:

Assign Permission Sets

AND

View Setup and Configuration
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To view the available permission set licenses, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Company Settings, and then select **Company Information**. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click a user. 3. In the Permission Set Assignments section, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add these permission sets. | Permission Set | Description | Recommended for | | --- | --- | --- | | Access Accounting Subledger Growth | Access and use Accounting Subledger features. | Users who only require view access to transaction journal records. | | Data Pipelines Base User | Use Data Pipelines Base features. | Users who require access to processing tasks to generate transaction journal records. | | Manage Accounting Subledger | Access and manage Accounting Subledger features. | Users who require full access to Salesforce objects for configuration tasks such as accounting sets setup. | | Run Accounting Subledger Job | Run Accounting Subledger jobs. | Users who require access to processing tasks to generate transaction journal records. | 5. Save your changes. # Assign Alert and Success Plan Record Types to Profiles Give staff and admins access to record types needed to work with Alerts and Success Plans in Student Success Hub. - **[Assign the Student Record Case Record Type to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_assign_record_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Record Cases represent students' unified records. In Student Success Hub, this Case record type acts as a container for all of a student's support interactions, such as Alerts and Success Plans. - **[Assign Alert Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_assign_record_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Alert record types determine the types of Alerts that support staff can create. Whether you use Student Success Hub's preconfigured record types or create custom record types, make sure to assign them to the appropriate support staff and System Administrator profiles. - **[Assign Success Plan and Success Plan Template Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_assign_record_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Success Plan and Success Plan Template record types determine the types of Success Plans that support staff can create. Whether you use Student Success Hub's preconfigured record types or create custom record types, make sure to assign them to the appropriate profiles, with the appropriate page layout assignments and default record type for each. ## Assign the Student Record Case Record Type to Profiles Student Record Cases represent students' unified records. In Student Success Hub, this Case record type acts as a container for all of a student's support interactions, such as Alerts and Success Plans. Before you create data for individual students, make sure the Student Record Case record type is assigned to the profile responsible for creating Student Record Cases, such as the System Administrator profile. We recommend making it the default record type, too. Student Success Hub assigns the Student Record Case record type to the support staff and System Administrator profiles it installs. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile for the users responsible for creating Student Record Cases. For example, click **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Object Settings**, click the **Cases** object, then click **Edit**. 4. Select **Assigned Record Types** and **Default Record Type** for the Student Record record type. 5. Save your changes. ## Assign Alert Record Types to Profiles Alert record types determine the types of Alerts that support staff can create. Whether you use Student Success Hub's preconfigured record types or create custom record types, make sure to assign them to the appropriate support staff and System Administrator profiles. Student Success Hub assigns the default Alert record types to the support staff and System Administrator profiles it installs. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click your support staff profile. 3. Click **Object Settings**, click the **Alerts** object, then click **Edit**. 4. Assuming you're using the default record types included with Student Success Hub, assign them as shown in the table.

Record Types

Page Layout Assignment

Assigned Record Types

Default Record Type

Academic

Alert Layout

√

√

(K-12 only) Attendance

Alert Layout

√

  

(K-12 only) Behavior

Alert Layout

√

  

Career

Alert Layout

√

  

Financial Aid

Alert Layout

√

  

Health

Alert Layout

√

  

Housing

Alert Layout

√

  
5. Save your changes, and repeat for the System Administrator profile. ## Assign Success Plan and Success Plan Template Record Types to Profiles Success Plan and Success Plan Template record types determine the types of Success Plans that support staff can create. Whether you use Student Success Hub's preconfigured record types or create custom record types, make sure to assign them to the appropriate profiles, with the appropriate page layout assignments and default record type for each. Student Success Hub assigns the Success Plan and Success Plan Template record types to the support staff, System Administrator, and student profiles it installs. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click your support staff profile. 3. Click **Object Settings**, click the **Success Plans** object, then click **Edit**. 4. Assuming you're using the default record types, assign them as shown in the table.

Record Types

Page Layout Assignment

Assigned Record Types

Default Record Type

Academic

Success Plan Layout

√

√

(K-12 only) Attendance

Success Plan Layout

√

  

(K-12 only) Behavior

Success Plan Layout

√

  

Career

Success Plan Layout

√

  

Financial Aid

Success Plan Layout

√

  

Health

Success Plan Layout

√

  

Housing

Success Plan Layout

√

  
5. Save your changes and then apply the same record types to the Success Plan Templates object for the support staff profile, as shown in the table. _It's important that your Success Plan and Success Plan Template record types match—otherwise, your templates won't work._

Record Types

Page Layout Assignment

Assigned Record Types

Default Record Type

Academic

Success Plan Template Layout

√

√

(K-12 only) Attendance

Success Plan Template Layout

√

  

(K-12 only) Behavior

Success Plan Template Layout

√

  

Career

Success Plan Template Layout

√

  

Financial Aid

Success Plan Template Layout

√

  

Health

Success Plan Template Layout

√

  

Housing

Success Plan Template Layout

√

  
6. Repeat for the System Administrator and student profiles as appropriate for your org. # Assign an Education Cloud Permission Set License to Users Users get different access to Education Cloud based on the license assigned to them.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Assign Permission Set Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you configure the app, ensure that the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license is assigned to at least one user. - **[Create a Permission Set for the Integration User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide the integration user with the permissions and access they need in Education Cloud. - **[Assign an Education Cloud Permission Set to Digital Experience Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the Education Cloud guest user permission set to anonymous users who can view Education Cloud components on an Experience site. ## Assign Permission Set Licenses Before you configure the app, ensure that the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license is assigned to at least one user. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The Education Cloud Full Access permission set license is also required for Salesforce admins to clone Education Cloud permission sets. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click the user's name. 3. In the Permission Set License Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Select the **Education Cloud Full Access** permission set license. 5. Save your changes. ## Create a Permission Set for the Integration User Provide the integration user with the permissions and access they need in Education Cloud. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a label and API name for your Integration User permission set. 4. In License, select **Education Cloud Full Access**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click **System Permissions**. 7. Click **Edit**, and then select **Access Education Cloud Objects**. 8. Save your changes. After you create the permission set, assign access to the objects and fields that the integration user needs. See Also: - [Object Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_object_perms.htm&type=5) - [Field Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_field_perms.htm&type=5) ## Assign an Education Cloud Permission Set to Digital Experience Guest Users Assign the Education Cloud guest user permission set to anonymous users who can view Education Cloud components on an Experience site. 1. Clone the Education Cloud Guest Access permission set. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Clone Education Cloud Guest Access. 3. Enter a label and API name for your permission set. 4. Save your changes. 2. Select the objects and fields to make available to your guest users. 1. Open your cloned copy of Education Cloud Guest Access. 2. Click **Object Settings**. 3. Select an object, and then click **Edit**. 4. Select the object and field permissions. 5. Save your changes. 6. Similarly, set object and field permissions for additional objects. 3. Assign the Education Cloud Guest Access permission set to your Experience site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to the site that you want to grant access to guest users, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Settings gear icon on Experience site.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloudgear.png), and then click **General**. 4. Select **Guest users can see and interact with the site without logging in**. 5. In the Guest User Profile section, click the link to the guest user profile. 6. On the user profile page, click **Assigned Users**. 7. Select the name of the guest user. 8. In the Permission Set Assignments section, click **Edit Assignments**. 9. Add your cloned copy of the Education Cloud Guest Access permission set to the Enabled Permission Sets list. 10. Save your changes. # Assign an Interest Tag to a Campaign in Education Add interest tags to a campaign to provide at-a-glance information on what the campaign is for. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To use Interest Tags with Fundraising:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Your admin sets up interest tags for you. If you have one of the Fundraising permission sets or permission set groups assigned to you, you can create interest tags by yourself. Add interest tags to a campaign to provide at-a-glance information on what the campaign is for. For example: if your campaign is for a building fund, you can add interest tags for building materials, land acquisition, permitting, in-kind donations, and legal fees. 1. On the campaign page, in the Tags pane, click **Browse Tags**. 2. Search for and select the tags relevant to your campaign. 3. Save your tags. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Tags pane on your campaign, ask your admin to turn on and configure interest tags. SEE ALSO - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5) - [Set Up and Configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US) # Assign an Interest Tag to a Campaign in Nonprofit Add interest tags to a campaign to provide at-a-glance information on what the campaign is for. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To use Interest Tags with Fundraising:

FundraisingAccess permission set

OR

Fundraising_User permission set group
Your admin sets up interest tags for you. If you have one of the Fundraising permission sets or permission set groups assigned to you, you can create interest tags by yourself. Add interest tags to a campaign to provide at-a-glance information on what the campaign is for. For example: if your campaign is for a building fund, you can add interest tags for building materials, land acquisition, permitting, in-kind donations, and legal fees. 1. On the campaign page, in the Tags pane, click **Browse Tags**. 2. Search for and select the tags relevant to your campaign. 3. Save your tags. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Tags pane on your campaign, ask your admin to turn on and configure interest tags. SEE ALSO - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5) - [Set Up and Configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US) # Assign Apex Class Access to the Higher Ed Support Staff Profile Give higher ed support staff access to the required Apex classes to use Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. To use Student Success Hub custom components, your support staff members need access to the Apex classes that control the components. Otherwise, they (and you) may encounter errors trying to do things like scheduling appointments or applying Success Plans. Unless otherwise noted, Student Success Hub assigns Apex class access to the support staff profile and to the support staff permission set included with Student Success Hub. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your higher ed support staff. 3. Click **Apex Class Access**. 4. Confirm that these Apex classes are listed. If necessary, click **Edit** and move any missing classes to the Enabled Apex Classes list. Then, save your changes. ## SSH Student Case Record - sfal.AddSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.AddTeamMemberDataProviderController - sfal.AdviseeContactCardController - sfal.AdviseeSuccessTeamController - sfal.AlertRelatedListController - sfal.RemoveSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.SuccessPlanRelatedList - sfal.SuccessPlanUpdateTasksController - sfal.TaskRelatedListController ## AlertsAppointmentsQueuingPredictionSuccess PlansGeneral ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using front-desk appointment scheduling, grant access to some Apex classes for your front-desk staff users when you [set up front desk appointment scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get front-desk appointment scheduling up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). - sfal.ActivationController - sfal.FeatureGateController - sfal.ApplySuccessPlan - sfal.AppointmentPredictionController - sfal.QueueCaseActionsController - sfal.QueueQuickAddController - sfal.AddSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.AdviseeLookupController - sfal.AdviseeLookupControllerWithNonUsers - sfal.AdvisingHoursEditorController - sfal.AdvisingPoolSchedApptController - sfal.AdvisorApptSettingsController - sfal.AdvisorLookupController - sfal.AdvisorProfileSettingsController - sfal.AppointmentAgendaViewModel - sfal.AppointmentAttendeesListController - sfal.AppointmentCancelController - sfal.AppointmentCreatePromptController - sfal.AppointmentEditController - sfal.AppointmentLocationFormController - sfal.AppointmentLocationListViewCtrl - sfal.AppointmentUtilityController - sfal.ApptActionsController - sfal.ApptUtilityLineItemController - sfal.ContactCardController - sfal.CreateTaskMassActionController - sfal.EmailEditor\_CTRL - sfal.NewEventButtonController - sfal.OneOffAvailabilityEditorController - sfal.SendEmailMassActionController - sfal.WalkInCreateController - sfal.CasesFromAlertsController # Assign Apex Class Access to the K-12 Support Staff Profile Grant K-12 support staff access to required Apex classes. To use Student Success Hub custom components, your K-12 support staff need access to the Apex classes that control the components. Otherwise, they (and you) may encounter errors trying to do things like applying Success Plans. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your K-12 support staff. 3. Click **Apex Class Access**. 4. Confirm that these Apex classes are listed. If necessary, click **Edit** and move any missing classes to the Enabled Apex Classes list. Then, save your changes. ## SSH Student Case Record - sfal.AddSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.AddTeamMemberDataProviderController - sfal.AdviseeContactCardController - sfal.AdviseeSuccessTeamController - sfal.AlertRelatedListController - sfal.RemoveSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.SuccessPlanRelatedList - sfal.SuccessPlanUpdateTasksController - sfal.TaskRelatedListController ## Alerts - sfal.CasesFromAlertsController ## Appointments - sfal.AdviseeLookupController - sfal.AdviseeLookupControllerWithNonUsers - sfal.SendEmailMassActionController ## Success Plans - sfal.ApplySuccessPlan ## General - sfal.FeatureGateController # Assign Apex Class Access to the Student Profile Give students access to the Apex classes they need to use a Student Success Hub portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. To use Student Success Hub custom components in the portal, students need access to the Apex classes that control the components. Otherwise, they may encounter errors trying to do things like scheduling appointments and managing Success Plan Tasks. Student Success Hub assigns Apex class access to the student profiles and permission set that it installs. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your student profile. 3. Click **Enabled Apex Class Access**. 4. Confirm that these Apex classes are listed. If necessary, click **Edit** and move any missing classes to the Enabled Apex Classes list. Then, save your changes. ## Appointments - sfal.AdviseeApptActionsController - sfal.AdviseeAppts\_CTRL - sfal.AdvisorProfileSettingsController - sfal.ScheduleAppointmentButtonController - sfal.SchedulingWizardController - sfal.SchedulingWizardModel ## Queuing - sfal.JoinCheckinQueueController - sfal.QueueSelfCheckInController ## Success Plans - sfal.SuccessPlanCommunityListController - sfal.SuccessPlanTasksController ## General - sfal.CommunitySuccessTeamController - sfal.FeatureGateController - sfal.LaunchpadAgendaController ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You grant access to certain Apex classes when you use queue waiting rooms. For details, see [Set Up a Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). # Assign Apex Class Access to the System Admin Profile Grant system admins access to the required Apex classes. To use Student Success Hub custom components, your system admins need access to the Apex classes that control the components. Otherwise, they (and you) may encounter errors trying to do things like scheduling appointments or applying Success Plans. Unless otherwise noted, Student Success Hub assigns Apex class access to the System Admin profile and permission set included with Student Success Hub. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your system admin staff. 3. Click **Apex Class Access**. 4. Confirm that these Apex classes are listed. If necessary, click **Edit** and move any missing classes to the Enabled Apex Classes list. Then, save your changes. ## SSH Student Case Record - sfal.AddSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.AddTeamMemberDataProviderController - sfal.AdviseeContactCardController - sfal.AdviseeSuccessTeamController - sfal.AlertRelatedListController - sfal.RemoveSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.SuccessPlanRelatedList - sfal.SuccessPlanUpdateTasksController - sfal.TaskRelatedListController ## Alerts - sfal.CasesFromAlertsController ## Appointments - sfal.AddSuccessTeamMemberController - sfal.AdviseeLookupController - sfal.AdviseeLookupControllerWithNonUsers - sfal.AdvisingHoursEditorController - sfal.AdvisingPoolSchedApptController - sfal.AdvisorApptSettingsController - sfal.AdvisorLookupController - sfal.AdvisorProfileSettingsController - sfal.AppointmentAgendaViewModel - sfal.AppointmentAttendeesListController - sfal.AppointmentCancelController - sfal.AppointmentCreatePromptController - sfal.AppointmentEditController - sfal.AppointmentLocationFormController - sfal.AppointmentLocationListViewCtrl - sfal.AppointmentUtilityController - sfal.ApptActionsController - sfal.ApptActionsQuickAction ## Appointments ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note By default, Student Success Hub doesn't add ApptActionsQuickAction to the System Admin profile. However, it's required if you [create custom quick actions for appointments.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to create appointments and see the data they need on Appointment records.") - sfal.ApptUtilityLineItemController - sfal.BookingWizardController - sfal.ContactCardController - sfal.CreateTaskMassActionController - sfal.EmailEditor\_CTRL - sfal.NewEventButtonController - sfal.OneOffAvailabilityEditorController - sfal.SchedulingWizardController - sfal.SendEmailMassActionController - sfal.WalkInCreateController ## Installer - sfal.InstallerAuthorizationController - sfal.InstallerTypeSelectionController - sfal.InstallPlansController ## Queuing - sfal.QueueCaseActionsController - sfal.QueueQuickAddController ## Prediction - sfal.AppointmentPredictionController ## Success Plans - sfal.ApplySuccessPlan ## General - sfal.ActivationController - sfal.FeatureGateController - sfal.ReleaseGateController - sfal.SalSettingsController ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using front-desk appointment scheduling, grant access to some Apex classes for your front-desk staff users when you [set up front-desk appointment scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get front-desk appointment scheduling up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). # Assign Application Reviews Assign Individual Application records to reviewers so that they can score applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To assign application reviews to users: Education Cloud Full Access
The Create and Assign Application Reviews flow assigns ownership of application review records to a queue. See [Automate the Application Review Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_the_application_review_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use flows to automatically move an individual application through the review process."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Reviews**. 2. Open the list view with the same name as the queue that you previously created. See [Prerequisites for Scoring Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_scoring_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To prepare your Salesforce org for scoring applications, enable Discovery Framework, create a queue, and update the page layout for individual applications."). 3. Transfer ownership of application review records from the queue to reviewer users. See [Change a Record's Owner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.account_owner.htm&language=en_US) and [Mass Transfer Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.admin_transfer.htm&language=en_US). # Assign Educational Characteristic Requirements to Courses To confirm a student’s eligibility during registration, assign educational characteristic requirements to a learning or a course offering. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To assign educational characteristic requirements: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
Each educational characteristic record generates an educational characteristic requirement record. For example, when the registrar creates an Honors educational characteristic, Education Cloud creates an Honors educational characteristic requirement. The requirement is available for assignment to learnings or course offerings. When you assign multiple educational characteristic requirements to a course, you create a relationship among these requirements. For example, if you define a requirement that accepts only senior students in Biology, you connect the Senior and Biology Major requirements with an AND relationship. But if you have a requirement that accepts junior or senior students with the Honors status, you have multiple relationships. Use the guided setup to streamline the creation of complex rules that have multiple or grouped relationships. See [Create a Rule for Multiple Educational Characteristic Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_complex_educhar_reqs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the guided setup to include multiple educational characteristic requirements in a rule. For example, define a requirement that accepts juniors and seniors, or one that accepts juniors or seniors only with an Honors status."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Characteristic Requirement Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select an educational characteristic requirement. 4. In Assignment Record, assign the requirement to a learning or course offering. A requirement assigned to a learning applies to learning courses and course offerings nested under it. A requirement assigned to a course offering doesn't apply to the parent learning course or learning. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat these steps for each educational characteristic requirement that you want to assign. # Assign Fundraising Permission Sets in Education Provide users with the access that they need to use Fundraising features. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- Assign the Fundraising permission set or permission set groups to the appropriate users. See [Fundraising Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them.") - Assign the Marketing User permission to the fundraisers who create and manage campaigns. - To use an integrated third-party application (for example, a donation platform) that accesses Fundraising objects, assign the Fundraising Access permission set to the API Integration user. - To make all fields across the objects readable by all users, set the organization-wide sharing settings default for Fundraising objects to Public Read Only, or for greater access, Public Read/Write. See Also: - [Fundraising Standard Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_standard_objects.htm) - [Fundraising Fields on Other Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_fields_standard_objects.htm) # Assign Fundraising Permission Sets in Nonprofit Provide users with the access that they need to use Fundraising features. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- Assign the Fundraising permission set or permission set groups to the appropriate users. See [Fundraising Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them.") - Assign the Marketing User permission to the fundraisers who create and manage campaigns. - To use an integrated third-party application (for example, a donation platform) that accesses Fundraising objects, assign the Fundraising Access permission set to the API Integration user. - To make all fields across the objects readable by all users, set the organization-wide sharing settings default for Fundraising objects to Public Read Only, or for greater access, Public Read/Write. See Also: - [Fundraising Standard Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_standard_objects.htm) - [Fundraising Fields on Other Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_fields_standard_objects.htm) # Assign Fundseeker Profiles Learn about the available Outbound Funds Module profiles and their default access to the fundseeker portal. - **[Fundseeker Plus Login Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_assign_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Fundseeker Plus Login profile is included in Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and provides a baseline of permissions to users who have registered for an account on your portal. These users are referred to as "site users." Your organization can adjust the permissions in the Fundseeker Plus Login profile based on how much or how little you want these users to see or do in your org. - **[Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_assign_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The guest user profile is available after you create an Experience Builder site. ## Fundseeker Plus Login Profile The Fundseeker Plus Login profile is included in Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and provides a baseline of permissions to users who have registered for an account on your portal. These users are referred to as "site users." Your organization can adjust the permissions in the Fundseeker Plus Login profile based on how much or how little you want these users to see or do in your org. ## Guest User Profile The guest user profile is available after you create an Experience Builder site. This profile is assigned to non-registered users and gives them limited access to your org. For example, fundseekers who are browsing your portal but not applying for a Funding Program are guest users. If you want guest users to be able to view Funding Programs, see Make Funding Programs Visible to Guest Users. # Assign General Ledger Codes Include general ledger (GL) codes in debit and credit transaction journal records to identify specific fund accounts. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license with Growth Edition is enabled, and where at least one active user has the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger can configure this feature. Only users with the Manage Accounting Subledger or Run Accounting Subledger Job permission set can run Accounting Subledger jobs. See Also: - [Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm) - [GL Codes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_gl_codes.htm) # Assign Learner Programs to Learners In order to have requirements show up in the requirements panel, the learner must have a learner program associated with them, and that learner program must have learner program requirements. | User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add users to your Education Cloud Experience Site: | Education Cloud Full Access |
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
After you create a learner program, you can create learner program requirements to associate with it from the Related tab. 1. In the App Launcher, enter Learner, and then select **Learner Programs**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Populate at least the Name, Learning Program Plan, and Learner Contact fields for the Learner Program you want to create. 4. Save your changes. 5. In the Related tab’s Learner Program Requirements section, click **New**. 6. Enter details for the new learner program requirement. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Repeat steps 5-7 for each learner program requirement you want to associate with the learner program. # Assign Permission Sets to Appointment Users in Education Cloud After you create permission sets for appointments, assign them to your staff members and learners.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign permission sets to appointment users in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To see what permission set licenses are available, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Company Setup, and then select **Company Information**. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click a user. 3. In the Permission Set Assignments section, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add these permission sets. | Permission set | Description | Recommended Users | | --- | --- | --- | | Education Cloud Full Access | Give users access to Education Cloud objects and components. | Staff members | | Omnistudio User | Give users the ability to schedule appointments. | Staff members | | Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access | Give Experience Cloud users access to Education Cloud. | Learners | | [Custom Permission Set for Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_portal_user_perms_appt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a permission set that gives portal users read and edit access to the fields that they need to book appointments.") | Give portal users read and edit access to the fields they need to book appointments. | Learners and staff members | 5. Save your changes. # Assign Profiles Learn about the available Grants Management profiles and their default access to the grants portal. - **[Grantseeker Plus Login Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_assign_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grantseeker Plus Login profile is included in Grants Management and provides a baseline of permissions to users who have registered for an account on your portal. These users are referred to as "site users." Your organization can adjust the permissions in the Grantseeker Plus Login profile based on how much or how little you want these users to see or do in your org. - **[Guest User Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_assign_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The guest user profile is available after you create an Experience Builder site. ## Grantseeker Plus Login Profile The Grantseeker Plus Login profile is included in Grants Management and provides a baseline of permissions to users who have registered for an account on your portal. These users are referred to as "site users." Your organization can adjust the permissions in the Grantseeker Plus Login profile based on how much or how little you want these users to see or do in your org. ## Guest User Profile The guest user profile is available after you create an Experience Builder site. This profile is assigned to non-registered users and gives them limited access to your org. For example, grantseekers who are browsing your portal but not applying for a Funding Program are guest users. If you want guest users to be able to view Funding Programs, see [Make Funding Programs Visible to Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm). # Assign Record Types for Appointments and Portals to Profiles Assign record types to support staff and student profiles for using appointments and portals in Student Success Hub orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Assign the Support Queue Case Record Type to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_record_types_appts_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the Support Queue Case record type to the profiles of users who will create queuing cases, such as support or front-desk staff who will check students into a queue. You don't need to assign this record type to profiles of users who will only edit queuing cases. However, do also assign it to the System Administrator profile. - **[Assign Event Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_record_types_appts_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Event record types distinguish between Events (times) that support staff have designated as available for support appointments, Events (representing Appointment object records) that have actually been scheduled with students, and Events that are unrelated to support appointments. ## Assign the Support Queue Case Record Type to Profiles Assign the Support Queue Case record type to the profiles of users who will create queuing cases, such as support or front-desk staff who will check students into a queue. You don't need to assign this record type to profiles of users who will only edit queuing cases. However, do also assign it to the System Administrator profile. Student Success Hub assigns the Support Queue Case record type to the support staff and System Administrator profiles that it installs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Support Queue Case record type is provided by default with Student Success Hub. If you need to create the record type manually, see [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") for instructions. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile for the users responsible for creating queuing cases. For example, click your support staff profile. 3. Click **Object Settings**, click the **Cases** object, and click **Edit**. 4. Select **Assigned Record Types** for the Support Queue record type. For support staff who create queuing cases, it's a good idea to also set the Default Record Type to Support Queue. 5. If appropriate for the profile, select **Default Record Type** for the Support Queue record type. 6. Save your changes, and repeat for the System Administrator profile. ## Assign Event Record Types to Profiles Event record types distinguish between Events (times) that support staff have designated as available for support appointments, Events (representing Appointment object records) that have actually been scheduled with students, and Events that are unrelated to support appointments. After you've [set up these Event record types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability."), verify their settings for the support staff, System Administrator, and student profiles. Student Support Hub assigns the Event record types to the support staff, System Administrator, and student profiles that it installs. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click your support staff profile. 3. Click **Object Settings**, click the **Events** object, and click **Edit**. 4. Assign the Support Event, Support Time, and Non-Support Event record types as shown in the table.

Record Types

Page Layout Assignment

Assigned Record Types

Default Record Type

Support Event

Support Event Layout

√

Support Time

Support Time Layout

√

  

Non-Support Event

Event Layout

√

√
5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat for the System Administrator and student profiles, assigning record types for each as follows: - System Administrator profile: Support Event, Support Time, and Non-Support Event (default) - Student profile: Support Event (default) # Assign Requirements You can assign requirements directly from an application. Say an applicant makes a mistake or changes their mind about what degree program to apply for. That might mean additional requirements are needed. Or maybe your institution handles a small amount of applications and you assign requirements individually. In Admissions Connect, requirements are Action Plans, which are created from Action Plan Templates that include the details of the requirements. Your admissions team defines the Action Plan Templates for your institution. To assign requirements, you’ll add an Action Plan to an application.   ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Your Admissions Connect administrator must configure this functionality. If you can’t complete the steps below, ask your administrator for help.  1. From the app, open an Application record. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the list of Action Plans, click **New Plan**. ![Action Plans related list with a callout on the New Plan button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/action_plan_assign_new_plan.png) 4. Fill out the details for the plan. Name Give the plan a name. We recommend naming the plan the same name as the Action Plan Template.  Start Date Enter a start date for this plan, which might be today's date. Action Plan Template Enter the name of a template. Target Record: Leave as-is. The application record is automatically linked for you.  Skip Nonwork Days for Tasks Leave as-is, unless your admissions team decides otherwise. Status Select a status for the plan. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Review the Tasks and Document Checklist Items associated with the plan, then save your changes. Refresh the application page to see the new requirements listed in the Application Checklist. The Action Plan also shows up in the Action Plans related list (where you clicked the New Plan button) and in the navigation tree on the Application Review page.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The Action Plans related list has some known issues. The Status field in the list doesn't update when all child Action Plan Items are completed. In addition, the Task Completed field doesn't update when Document Checklist Items are completed.  See Also: # Assign System Permissions to Portal User Permission Sets System permissions work with user permissions and audiences to manage portal access.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To assign system permissions to your portal user permission sets: | Education Cloud Full Access | There are three system permissions that you can assign to users based on how you want them to access the portal. - Alumni Community Pages: Provides access to the alumni-specific components and pages. - Applicant Community Pages: Provides access to the applicant-specific components and pages. - Student Community Pages: Provides access to the student-specific components and pages. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click on the name of the permission set that you want to apply system permissions to. 3. Click **System Permissions**. 4. Click **Edit** and enable the appropriate system permissions. 5. Save your changes. 6. Similarly, assign the other permission sets that you want to apply system permissions to. # Assign the Admissions Connect Permission Sets Admissions Connect provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. - **[Learn About the Different Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Admissions Connect, each user must be granted these permission sets. - **[Assign a Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the Admissions Connect - Access permission set first. This permission set assigns the Admissions Connect permission set license, which is required to assign the other Admissions Connect permission sets. - **[Permission Set Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Users with a Salesforce Platform license must also be assigned the Lightning Console permission set license to access Admissions Connect. ## Learn About the Different Permission Sets To use Admissions Connect, each user must be granted these permission sets.
Permission Set Description Required? Package Considerations
ActionPlans Provides access to the Action Plan functionality. Required for all Users. Managed
Document Checklist Provides access to the Document Checklist functionality. Required for all Users. Managed
Admissions Connect - Access Assigns the Admissions Connect permission set license. Required for all Users. Managed
Admissions Connect - Access Apex Classes for Applications Provides access to the Apex classes needed to verify and review applications.

Required for all admissions staff and external reviewers.

Applicants don't need this permission set because Apex class access is provided in the Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set.

 Managed
Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage Allows directors, strategic leaders, or IT admins to set up and configure application requirements. Only one of these role-based permission sets is required. You can also  assign multiple role-based permission sets, if needed. Unmanaged
Admissions Connect - Review Applications for Internal Users Allows internal Users to review applications.
Admissions Connect - Review Applications for External Users Allows external reviewers, such as alumni, to review applications in a portal.
Admissions Connect - Verify Applications Allows Users to verify applications.
Admissions Connect - Recruit Applicants Allows Users to recruit applicants.
Admissions Connect - Submit Applications Allow applicants to view their applications in a portal.
Admissions Connect - Access Apex Classes for Document Verification Provides access to the Apex classes needed to verify application documents. Optionally assign this permission set to Users who verify application documents. Managed
## Assign a Permission Set Assign the Admissions Connect - Access permission set first. This permission set assigns the Admissions Connect permission set license, which is required to assign the other Admissions Connect permission sets. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select the permission set that you want to assign to Users. 3. Click **Manage Assignments**, then **Add Assignments**. 4. Select the checkboxes next to the appropriate Users, and click **Assign**. ## Permission Set Considerations Users with a Salesforce Platform license must also be assigned the Lightning Console permission set license to access Admissions Connect. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Some of the Admissions Connect permission sets are managed, others are not. You receive updates to the managed permission sets automatically when the package is updated in your org. However, unmanaged Admissions Connect permission sets aren't updated automatically. You can clone the unmanaged permission sets, use them as-is, or customize them for your institution. Then use the information in [Admissions Connect Permission Set Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution.") to keep them up-to-date. Also note that managed permission sets can't be deleted, unless we delete them from the package first. You can't give Users with a Salesforce Platform license access to the Document Checklist Item object. These Users can see documents in the Admissions Connect components, but can't access the Document Checklist Item record detail pages. For details about which Admissions Connect permission sets include object permission for Document Checklist Items, see [Admissions Connect Permission Set Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution."). If your admissions staff are using Salesforce licenses instead, consider updating your permission sets to include Read access to the Document Checklist Item object. In order for Users to see data in the Admissions Connect components, give them the necessary permissions to all the fields and objects used to show data. For example, to show data from an applicant's Education History records, give your staff Read permission on the Education History object and on the fields in the field set specified by the matching Application Material Type record. Likewise, to show that same data to applicants in a portal, they also need Read (and potentially Edit) permission on the Education History object and fields, too. We recommend that only the Admissions Connect administrator or administrative staff have Edit access to these fields: - Application JSON field on Applications—This field might contain PII (personally identifiable information). - Due Date on Application Reviews—This field is typically defined by administrative staff only. # Assign the Student Management Account Record Page to Student Records Replace the regular person account layout with the student record layout by assigning Student Management Account Record Page to the person account record type. Then assign the page to profiles for advisors and registrars. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To customize the Student Management app: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Student Management**. 2. Open an Account record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To apply the flexipage template, you must use a standard Account record page, and not a Person Account record page. Assign the new layout to person accounts when you activate the page. 3. Click ![Setup menu gear icon.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png), and then click **Edit Page**. The page opens in Lightning App Builder. 4. In Label, enter Student Management Account Record Page. 5. In API Name, enter Student\_Management\_Account\_Record\_Page. 6. Save your changes. 7. Click **Activate**. 8. Click the **App, Record Type, and Profile** tab. 9. Click **Assign to Apps, Record Types, and Profiles**. 10. Select **Student Management**, and then click **Next**. 11. Select a form factor, and then click **Next**. 12. Select **Person Account** as the record type, and then click **Next**. 13. Select the profiles that you want to assign profiles to the Student Management Account Record Page, and then click **Next**. 14. Review your assignments and save your changes. See Also: - [Assign Page Layouts to Profiles or Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.layouts_assigning.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Assign Volunteers to Job Position Shifts Efficiently schedule volunteers to shifts and positions by using Nonprofit Cloud's Volunteer Management tools. To maintain adequate coverage of your volunteer initiatives, assign volunteers individually to shifts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To use Volunteer Management: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
To use Volunteer Management in Experience Cloud: Manage Volunteer Work in Experience Cloud permission set
To use Volunteer Management in Experience Cloud as a guest:

Volunteer Management in Experience Cloud Guest Access permission set

Learn more about these permissions.
Before you assign volunteers to initiatives, complete these tasks. - [Create volunteer initiatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_volunteer_initiatives.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up initiatives for volunteers to help your organization accomplish its goals. Specify start and end dates, the number of volunteers needed, and the total number of volunteer hours to be filled."). - [Create job positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives."). - Add Person Location Availability and Person Competencies, related lists to the Person Account page layout. - Enter your potential volunteers as Person Accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - [Create job position shifts.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A job position shift is a specific work shift that’s associated with a job position or a related recurrence schedule. After developing a volunteer initiative and creating job positions for it, create work shifts that volunteers who meet the position qualifications can fill.") - To mark assignments as counting toward the shift capacity, add the Count Toward Shift Capacity field to the Job Position Assignment page layout in Setup. 1. From the Volunteer Management app, go to the Job Position Shifts tab. 2. Open the job position shift that you want to assign to a volunteer. 3. From the menu buttons, select **Assign Volunteers**. The Assign Volunteers to Job Position Shifts window opens. If you don’t see the button, click ![Open action menu button options.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/down_60.png), and then select **Assign Volunteers**. 4. Select the status for the job position shift assignment. Salesforce automatically completes the volunteer initiative and job position fields with data from the job position shift. 5. Select the shift to assign to a volunteer. If you don’t select a shift, Salesforce applies the assignment to the job position, and doesn’t create a specific job position shift. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Search for and select the volunteer to assign to the job position shift. You can select multiple volunteers up to the maximum number of attendees set on the job position shift. 8. Click **Save Assignments**. Salesforce automatically provides an alphanumeric name to the assignments. A list of the created assignments appears. 9. Click **Finish**. You can create up to 600 assignment records, and can assign up to 200 shifts to a single volunteer per session. The Assign Volunteers to Job Position Shifts window refreshes so that you can assign more volunteers to the job position shift. The window also shows how many assignments remain on the shift. The assignments you created appear as a list on the Job Position Assignments tab. SEE ALSO: - [Match Volunteers to Volunteer Initiative Job Positions and Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_match_to_job_positions_and_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find volunteers by using smart matching criteria to search for the right volunteers for an initiative’s job position and job position shifts. The matching criteria include qualifications, shift or date-and-time range, location. Intelligently matched volunteers are the closest fit for the open shifts of a volunteer initiative and position.") - [Create Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create positions for your organization to delineate functional roles that are characterized by specific duties and responsibilities. You can also specify skills and qualifications that are required to hold the position. Positions can be used across multiple volunteer initiatives.") - [Create Job Position Qualifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_qualifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a job position, create qualifications to make sure that volunteers meet the requirements for the job position. Job position qualifications are additive and apply only to the specific job position. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the job.") # Assist Learners with Program Management Within the Student Success app, your institution can effectively define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey. Directors can model programs with supported benefits, and then schedule and track the benefit disbursements to recipients. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: In the Student Success app, on the director or advisor console, use the dropdown menu to open workflows to create and configure programs, program enrollments, benefits, benefit types, schedules, sessions, disbursements, and assignments. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Program Management (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm) # Associate a Pricebook with an Academic Interval Specify that a pricebook applies for a given academic session, term, or year. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To associate price book with the interval: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the app launcher, find and select **Student Financials**. 2. On the Home page, click **Price Book Academic Intervals**. 3. Click **New**. 4. In the Academic Interval field, search for and select the session, term, or year to associate with a price book, for example, Spring 2026. 5. Select the price book to associate with the interval. You can associate multiple price books with each academic interval. # Attendance Attendance turns a routine administrative task into a reliable early indicator of student engagement. It gathers signals from instructors, parents, devices, and systems, applies your institutional rules, and produces a single trusted outcome for every student. Staff and advisors act on that outcome and provide student support. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## How Attendance Works Attendance signals come from across your institution. A set of records defines the attendance codes, the rules that each attendance-taking occurrence follows, and how Attendance resolves competing signals. Code Set Defines an attendance code, such as present, absent, or tardy, and standardizes attendance outcomes across the institution for reporting, analytics, and automation. Attendance Policy Defines how your institution captures, interprets, and determines attendance. An attendance policy sets rules and determines whether attendance submission is by full roster or by exception, or whether an admin or clerk can correct the attendance submission. You assign a policy to a learning program, learning course, or course offering. Attendance Source Type Identifies the system or method that captures a raw attendance signal, such as an instructor submission, a badge or card swipe, or a parent voice call. Attendance Policy Source Type Ranks each source's priority within a policy and controls whether its signals resolve automatically. For example, Connected High School has a policy for daily homeroom attendance, with full-roster submission and a 24-hour correction window. Its code set defines present, absent, and excused. The policy ranks instructor submission first, card swipe second, and activity from a learning management system third. In everyday operation, these records capture each student's attendance and resolve it into one trusted outcome. Attendance Recording Represents one attendance-taking event, such as a class period, a school day, or a lecture, that references a specific attendance policy. Attendance Entry Documents the official attendance status for one student in one attendance recording. The entry carries the single trusted result and connects the attendance recording to the signals that inform it. Attendance Source Data Carries the raw signal about a student's attendance from a single source, such as an instructor submission or a voice call from a parent. The source data resolves into the student's attendance entry. The entry keeps the trusted outcome, while the source data preserves the audit trail of every signal that contributes to it. When more than one signal exists for the same student, Attendance decides which one to trust. It reads the priority ranking on a policy's source types and resolves competing signals into an official outcome on the attendance entry. ## Example: Resolve Absences with a Voice Agent You can create the Attendance Management Agent as a voice agent that gathers absence reasons directly from parents. See [Attendance Management Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_attendance_management_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Attendance Management Agent resolves unexpected student absences through a natural voice conversation. It captures a parent or guardian's explanation for an absence and updates the student's official attendance record, without manual review."). SEE ALSO - [Attendance Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/attendance.html) # Attendance Event Attendance Event represents information about a student's attendance. - **[Sample Uses for Attendance Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Changes in a student's attendance might indicate that something's going on in their life that could affect their educational success. For example, consistent tardiness or absence is an early warning indicator that a student might need intervention to stay on track to pass a course or graduation. The Attendance Event object can be used to track attendance. - **[Configure Attendance Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create an Attendance Event Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an attendance event record from a student’s contact record. ## Sample Uses for Attendance Event Changes in a student's attendance might indicate that something's going on in their life that could affect their educational success. For example, consistent tardiness or absence is an early warning indicator that a student might need intervention to stay on track to pass a course or graduation. The Attendance Event object can be used to track attendance. - University—Track the number of days and reasons that a student's missed a specific course. - K-12—Track a student's tardiness or absence for a class period or an entire day and the reasons. - Any educational institution—Determine a student's total participation during a term. Generate reports on the frequency of such events. ## Configure Attendance Event Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Keep Up with Attendance Event Updates
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.78
  • Add the Attendance Events related list to your Contact and Course Connection page layouts.

  • Customize the related list, list views, and compact layouts, if needed.

Learn about updating layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.

## Create an Attendance Event Record Create an attendance event record from a student’s contact record. 1. From the student’s Contact record, click **New** in the Attendance Events related list. 2. Enter a date for the tardy or absence. Don’t change the Contact name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. 4. Click **Save**. # Attendance Event Attendance Event represents information about a student's attendance. - **[Sample Uses for Attendance Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Changes in a student's attendance might indicate that something's going on in their life that could affect their educational success. For example, consistent tardiness or absence is an early warning indicator that a student might need intervention to stay on track to pass a course or graduation. The Attendance Event object can be used to track attendance. - **[Create an Attendance Event Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an attendance event record from a student’s contact record. ## Sample Uses for Attendance Event Changes in a student's attendance might indicate that something's going on in their life that could affect their educational success. For example, consistent tardiness or absence is an early warning indicator that a student might need intervention to stay on track to pass a course or graduation. The Attendance Event object can be used to track attendance. - University—Track the number of days and reasons that a student's missed a specific course. - K-12—Track a student's tardiness or absence for a class period or an entire day and the reasons. - Any educational institution—Determine a student's total participation during a term. Generate reports on the frequency of such events. ## Create an Attendance Event Record Create an attendance event record from a student’s contact record. 1. From the student’s Contact record, click **New** in the Attendance Events related list. 2. Enter a date for the tardy or absence. Don’t change the Contact name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. 4. Click **Save**. # Attendance Management Agent Considerations To use Attendance Management Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Einstein for Education Cloud add-on, Data 360, Marketing Cloud Next with the Salesforce Message Credits - SMS add-on and at least one Salesforce SMS Code Lease add-on, an applicable Salesforce Voice add-on, applicable Agentforce add-on licenses, and Slack.

For more support on Marketing Cloud Next, Salesforce Voice, and Agentforce add-on licenses, contact your Salesforce account executive.
## Language and Locale Support Attendance Management Agent supports the languages and locales supported by Agentforce Voice, as described in [Agentforce Voice Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agentforce_voice_considerations.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Attendance Management Agent is a voice agent, and voice agents are monolingual. A voice agent listens and responds only in its configured default language. ## Large Language Model Support Attendance Management Agent supports the models supported by the Agentforce Service Agent type, as described in [Considerations for Agentforce Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Attendance Management Agent supports the Einstein Trust Layer services supported by the Agentforce Service Agent type, as described in [Considerations for Agentforce Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US). ## Usage Types Consumed by Attendance Management Agent Attendance Management Agent uses Agentforce Service Agent template and consumes the same usage types as Agentforce Service Agent. For the full list, see the usage types billed in [Considerations for Agentforce Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US). Because Attendance Management Agent is a voice agent, it also consumes Agentforce Voice usage types, such as Agentforce Voice Minutes. See the billable usage types in [Agentforce Voice Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agentforce_voice_considerations.htm&language=en_US). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This feature has access to Digital Wallet, a free account management tool that offers near real-time consumption data for enabled products across your active contracts. Access Digital Wallet and start tracking your org's usage. To learn more, see [About Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_about.htm&language=en_US&type=5). # Attendance Management Agent for Education Cloud The Attendance Management Agent resolves unexpected student absences through a natural voice conversation. It captures a parent or guardian's explanation for an absence and updates the student's official attendance record, without manual review. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Einstein for Education Cloud add-on, Data 360, Marketing Cloud Next with the Salesforce Message Credits - SMS add-on and at least one Salesforce SMS Code Lease add-on, an applicable Salesforce Voice add-on, applicable Agentforce add-on licenses, and Slack.

For more support on Marketing Cloud Next, Salesforce Voice, and Agentforce add-on licenses, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Use the Attendance Management Agent to resolve unexpected student absences. When a student is marked absent, a flow sends the family an SMS message that prompts the parent or guardian to call a voice agent. A second flow routes the family to a voice conversation with the voice agent. The voice agent captures the parent or guardian's explanation and updates the student's official attendance record. You can set up a separate flow that sends the responsible instructor a Slack message about the student's attendance. Campus teams stay aligned with families. For example, a student misses two consecutive classes, and both instructors mark the student absent. A notification process texts the parent or guardian and prompts them to connect to the voice agent about the missed classes. The agent captures the reason from the voice call. Because the institution trusts a parent or guardian's call as strong evidence, both entries resolve automatically as excused, without staff review. Attendance then notifies staff and the student's next instructor with the expected arrival time. The Attendance Management Agent includes one subagent and these actions.
Subagent Description Agent Action

Attendance Feedback and Resolution

Retrieves a student's attendance details during a call, then captures the parent or guardian's explanation and resolves it into the student's official attendance record.
SEE ALSO - [Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Attendance turns a routine administrative task into a reliable early indicator of student engagement. It gathers signals from instructors, parents, devices, and systems, applies your institutional rules, and produces a single trusted outcome for every student. Staff and advisors act on that outcome and provide student support.") # Attribute Attribute represents characteristics that apply to individual students and credentials earned by students and faculty (or other Contacts). - **[Sample Uses for Attribute](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Knowing whether a faculty member has the proper credentials to teach a course or knowing whether a student has characteristics that might require additional support can improve your institution's delivery of services. - **[Configure Attribute](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Attribute object up to date. - **[Attribute Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track student credentials and characteristics by using Attribute record types. - **[Create an Attribute Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create an attribute record in Education Data Architecture. ## Sample Uses for Attribute Knowing whether a faculty member has the proper credentials to teach a course or knowing whether a student has characteristics that might require additional support can improve your institution's delivery of services. The Attribute object can be used to track these types of metrics: - University—With the Credential record type, track the agency and expiration date of a law professor's State Bar Association license. - K-12—Track characteristics like whether a student is in foster care or qualifies for free lunch, or whether a faculty member has a Multiple Subject Teaching Credential. - Any educational institution—Track student characteristics like special-needs accommodations. ## Configure Attribute Keep the Attribute object up to date. ### Keep Up with Attribute Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add the following fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Activity End Date

    • Activity Start Date

    • Credential

    • Credential Number

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Role

    • Status

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date
1.78 Add the Attributes related list to your Contact page layouts. Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
## Attribute Record Types Track student credentials and characteristics by using Attribute record types. - **Credential**—Allows educational institutions to track licenses, certifications, or endorsements earned by staff or students. - **Student Characteristic**—Allows educational institutions to track important student characteristics that might affect students' education. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To track something that is neither a credential nor a student characteristic, add your own record type to the Attribute object to track other traits. For example, create an Honor record type for students who are on the Dean's List or graduating _Magna Cum Laude_. ## Create an Attribute Record Use these steps to create an attribute record in Education Data Architecture. 1. From the student or faculty member’s Contact record, click **New** in the Attributes related list. 2. Select the record type for a credential or a student characteristic and click **Next**. 3. Enter an Attribute Name to identify this Attribute record in page layouts, related lists, and searches. Don’t change the Contact name. 4. Fill in optional fields as needed. 5. Click **Save**. # Attribute a Donation to an Outreach Source Code in Education Attribute a donation to an outreach source code from any gift entry page. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To add an outreach source code to a gift entry or gift transaction:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Start a new gift entry or gift transaction. 2. Enter the gift details and then select the campaign and code. 3. In Outreach Source Code, select the code that solicited the donation. The Campaign field will auto-populate based on the source code selected. 4. Save your work. The Outreach Source Code page contains details of the code and an Outreach Summary that shows the key outreach, donor, and gift metrics on the outreach effort. The Outreach Summary appears when Data Pipelines is turned on and the Data Processing Engine (DPE) is configured. SEE ALSO - [Set Up and Configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US) # Attribute a Donation to an Outreach Source Code in Nonprofit Attribute a donation to an outreach source code from any gift entry page. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To add an outreach source code to a gift entry or gift transaction:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. Start a new gift entry or gift transaction. 2. Enter the gift details and then select the campaign and code. 3. In Outreach Source Code, select the code that solicited the donation. The Campaign field will auto-populate based on the source code selected. 4. Save your work. The Outreach Source Code page contains details of the code and an Outreach Summary that shows the key outreach, donor, and gift metrics on the outreach effort. The Outreach Summary appears when Data Pipelines is turned on and the Data Processing Engine (DPE) is configured. SEE ALSO - [Set Up and Configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US) # Attributes Attribute represents characteristics that apply to individual students and credentials earned by students and faculty (or other Contacts). - **[Sample Uses for Attribute](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attributes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Knowing whether a faculty member has the proper credentials to teach a course or knowing whether a student has characteristics that might require additional support can improve your institution's delivery of services. - **[Configure Attribute](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attributes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Attribute object up to date. - **[Attribute Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attributes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track student credentials and characteristics by using Attribute record types. - **[Create an Attribute Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attributes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create an attribute record in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Attribute Knowing whether a faculty member has the proper credentials to teach a course or knowing whether a student has characteristics that might require additional support can improve your institution's delivery of services. The Attribute object can be used to track these types of metrics: - University—With the Credential record type, track the agency and expiration date of a law professor's State Bar Association license. - K-12—Track characteristics like whether a student is in foster care or qualifies for free lunch, or whether a faculty member has a Multiple Subject Teaching Credential. - Any educational institution—Track student characteristics like special-needs accommodations. ## Configure Attribute Keep the Attribute object up to date. ### Keep Up with Attribute Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add the following fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Activity End Date

    • Activity Start Date

    • Credential

    • Credential Number

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Role

    • Status

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date
1.5

Create a K-12 All Student Characteristics list view with this recommended configuration:

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view
  • Filter by Owner: All attributes

  • Filter | Record Type: Student Characteristic

  • Display order: Attribute Name, Attribute Type, Contact, Start Date, End Date

If needed, create a K-12 All Credentials list view with this recommended configuration:

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view
  • Filter by Owner: All attributes

  • Filter | Record Type: Credential

  • Display order: Attribute Name, Attribute Type, Subject Area, Grade Level, Start Date, End Date, Expired

Learn about creating list views in Create or Clone a List View.
## Attribute Record Types Track student credentials and characteristics by using Attribute record types. - **Credential**—Allows educational institutions to track licenses, certifications, or endorsements earned by staff or students. - **Student Characteristic**—Allows educational institutions to track important student characteristics that might affect students' education. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To track something that is neither a credential nor a student characteristic, add your own record type to the Attribute object to track other traits. For example, create an Honor record type for students who are on the Dean's List or graduating _Magna Cum Laude_. ## Create an Attribute Record Use these steps to create an attribute record in K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. From the student or faculty member’s Contact record, click **New** in the Attributes related list. 2. Select the record type for a credential or a student characteristic and click **Next**. 3. Enter an Attribute Name to identify this Attribute record in page layouts, related lists, and searches. Don’t change the Contact name. 4. Fill in optional fields as needed. 5. Click **Save**. # Authorize Data Integrity Before you can use Data Integrity, you must log in as a Salesforce user with specific permissions—also known as an integration user—to authorize the Data Integrity application to access your Salesforce org. Data Integrity activities, such as automated address updates, are attributed to this user. We recommend that you create a dedicated user that isn't tied to a specific person for this purpose. That way, even if staff changes at your organization, you’ll still have a user with the correct permissions available. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_note.png) Note If you plan to use an existing user, you must be able to log in as that user. - **[Create a User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend that you create a dedicated user with a Salesforce user license and Standard User profile that isn't tied to a specific person. If you plan to use an existing user, move on to the next section to set up permissions and authorize the Data Integrity application. - **[Set Up Admin User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set for your Salesforce Admin to configure and manage Data Integrity. - **[Verify Your Remote Site Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that remote site settings are active. If they aren't, activate the end point. - **[Authorize Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to authorize—or reauthorize—Data Integrity's access to your Salesforce org. ## Create a User We recommend that you create a dedicated user with a Salesforce user license and Standard User profile that isn't tied to a specific person. If you plan to use an existing user, move on to the next section to set up permissions and authorize the Data Integrity application. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, click **Users**, then **Users**. 3. Click **New User**. 4. Enter the user's name and email address and a unique username in the form of a email address. By default, the username is the same as the email address. Use an email that you can access to reset the password. 5. We recommend selecting the **Salesforce** User License and **Standard User** Profile. 6. Enter additional information as needed. For help, see [Add a Single User](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_new_users.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 7. Select **Generate new password and notify user immediately** to have the login name and a temporary password emailed to you. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Reset the temporary password for the new user, then log out. 10. Log back in to your administrator account. 11. Continue to the next section. ## Set Up Admin User Permissions Create a permission set for your Salesforce Admin to configure and manage Data Integrity. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, click **Users**, then **Permission Sets**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Give the Permission Set a label, then click **Save**. 5. From the new Permission Set, click **Apex Class Access**. 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select **Insights\_\_ApiEndpointUpdater**, then click **Add**. 3. Select **Insights\_AddressEstimator**, then click **Add**. 4. Select **Insights\_\_CampaignListRetriever**, then click **Add**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Click **Permission Set Overview** to return to the Permission Set. 6. Click **System Permissions**. 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select **Send Email**, **Modify All Data**, and **API Enabled**. Selecting these will enable other required permissions; hover over the information icon for details. 3. Click **Save**, then click **Save** again. 7. Click **Manage Assignments**. 1. Click **Add Assignments**. 2. Select the Data Integrity user, then click **Assign**. 3. Click **Done**. 8. Continue to the next section. ## Verify Your Remote Site Settings Make sure that remote site settings are active. If they aren't, activate the end point. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, search and click **Remote Site Settings**. 3. Verify that **ApiEndpoint\_frf** is active. 4. Continue to the next setting. ## Authorize Data Integrity Follow these steps to authorize—or reauthorize—Data Integrity's access to your Salesforce org. If you still see the Not Authorized message, verify that your license is valid and has a currently-active start date. Contact Salesforce Support if you need help. 1. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher Icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), find and select **Data Integrity**. You'll see a Not Authorized message until you complete the authorization. 2. Click **Authorize**. 3. Enter the username and password for the Data Integrity user. 4. Click **Log in to Salesforce**. 5. Click **Allow**. ### Reauthorize Data Integrity If the domain for your Salesforce org changes after you authorize Data Integrity, for example, by using My Domain or another custom domain, you'll need to reauthorize the Data Integrity app. You’ll also need to reauthorize the Data Integrity app if you change the Remote Site Setting or Custom Metadata Types. Additionally, you’ll need to re-enter the NCOA provider license information on the Settings page. 1. In Data Integrity, click the **Settings** tab. 2. Click the **App Authorization** tab. 3. Click **Reauthorize**. 4. Enter the username and password for the Data Integrity user. 5. Click **Log in to Salesforce**. 6. Click **Allow**. 7. If you’ve changed the Remote Site Setting or Custom Metadata Types, re-enter the NCOA provider license information and save your changes. See Also: [Set up National Change of Address Provider](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_set_up_ncoa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your Melissa Data SmartMover license for US or Canadian addresses. Similarly, set up your contract with Data8 for UK addresses.") # Automate Academic Processes Use flows to automate your academic processes such as creating and assigning cases, or automate the application review process.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Automate Case Creation and Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students. - **[Configure Education Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_education_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update flow elements to create and assign cases in your institution. # Automate Alert Assignment Use assignment rules to automatically assign Alerts to the most appropriate support staff User. - **[Learn About Rule-Based Alert Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides two settings to help you control how Alerts are assigned to support staff. - **[Prerequisites for Creating Alert Assignment Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because Alert assignment rules can reference different kinds of data, complete the relevant prerequisites to create and test assignment rules efficiently. - **[Alert Assignment Sample Scenarios](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review examples of how you can handle Alert assignment logic and define Alert Assignment Rule custom metadata records for each scenario. - **[Create an Alert Assignment Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you map out the assignment rules that you need to cover your Alert assignment scenarios, define each individual rule. ## Learn About Rule-Based Alert Assignment Student Success Hub provides two settings to help you control how Alerts are assigned to support staff. - A custom metadata type, Alert Assignment Rule, lets you define a set of rules for automatic assignment. If, for example, you assign Academic Alerts differently from Financial Aid Alerts or Behavior Alerts, you can create different rules for different Alert record types. You can assign Alerts to specific support roles and to specific Users. If your org uses them, you can also assign Alerts to queues. - A field on the Alert object, Assign Using Active Assignment Rules, determines whether an Alert record is subject to automatic, rule-based assignment (if you've defined Alert Assignment Rules custom metadata records). This field is deselected by default for newly created Alerts. As the Alert creator, you can choose to have the Alert assigned automatically, leave the Alert assigned to you as the owner, or save the Alert and reassign it manually. ## Prerequisites for Creating Alert Assignment Rules Because Alert assignment rules can reference different kinds of data, complete the relevant prerequisites to create and test assignment rules efficiently. - **Alert record types**—If you plan to assign according to Alert record types, make sure you've already verified the record types you're using, including any custom Alert record types. You'll likely be creating multiple assignment rules, enough to account for every record type that isn't automatically assigned to the Student Record Case owner. - **Support roles**—If you plan to assign Alerts to specific support roles, make sure you've already specified all the required case team roles. - **Queues**—If you plan to assign Alerts to queues, create the queues first, with Alert specified as the supported object and queue members added. ## Alert Assignment Sample Scenarios Review examples of how you can handle Alert assignment logic and define Alert Assignment Rule custom metadata records for each scenario. ### K-12 Sample Alert Assignments

If Creating...

Then Assign To...

Assignment Rules Required

An Academic Alert

The homeroom teacher on the student's success team; if no homeroom teacher is specified, assign to the counselor

Requires two rules because assignment involves two different roles.

  • Rule for the Academic Alert record type: Assign to the homeroom teacher. Priority 1.
  • Rule for the Academic Alert record type: Assign to the counselor role. Priority 2.

An Attendance Alert

Any attendance clerk on the student’s success team; if no attendance clerk is assigned or if there is more than one, assign to the school principal

Requires one rule because you can assign the Alert to the attendance clerk role and the default User in the same rule.

  • Rule for the Attendance Alert record type: Assign to the attendance clerk role, with the Resolve Multiple Users Per Role field set to false. Set the Eligible User or Queue field to the User ID of the school principal.

A Behavior Alert

The counselor

Requires only one rule because you’re specifying assignment to the counselor role

  • Rule for the Behavior Alert record type: Assign to the counselor
### Higher Ed Sample Alert Assignments

If Creating...

Then Assign To...

Assignment Rules Required

An Academic Alert

The primary support staff member on the student's success team; if no primary support staff member is specified, assign to the faculty support staff member

Requires two rules because assignment involves two different roles.

  • Rule for the Academic Alert record type: Assign to the primary support staff member role. Priority 1.
  • Rule for the Academic Alert record type: Assign to the faculty support staff member role. Priority 2.

A Financial Aid Alert

The Financial Aid support staff members Queue

Requires one rule because you're specifying assignment to a single queue only.

  • Rule for the Financial Aid Alert record type: Assign to the Financial Aid support staff members Queue.

A Career Alert

Any Career support staff member on the student's success team; if no career support staff member is specified, or if there is more than one career support staff member assigned, assign to the college's Careers program director (default User)

Requires one rule because you can specify assignment to the Career support staff member role and the default User in the same rule.

  • Rule for the Career Alert record type: Assign to the career role, with the Resolve Multiple Users Per Role field set to false. Set the Eligible User or Queue field to the User ID of the career program director.

A Housing Alert

The Student Record Case owner

No rule required. If you don't specify a rule for a record type, the default assignment is to the Student Record Case owner.
## Create an Alert Assignment Rule After you map out the assignment rules that you need to cover your Alert assignment scenarios, define each individual rule. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Next to Alert Assignment Rule, click **Manage Records**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Give the rule a descriptive label. 5. Review and edit the name as needed. 6. If the rule applies to a specific Alert record type: 1. Specify the API name of the record type. 2. If you're defining more than one rule _per record type_, enter an integer in the Priority field for each rule that you want to be evaluated in a precise order (1 is first, 2 is second, and so on). 7. If the rule applies to a specific support role: 1. Specify the name of the Eligible Role. 2. If more than one success team member can have the specified Eligible Role and you want to randomly assign the Alert to any one of them, select **Resolve Multiple Users Per Role**. Otherwise, leave the box unselected to skip assignment by role when multiple team members have the Eligible Role. 8. For Eligible User or Queue, enter the entity's Salesforce ID. 9. Verify the Active setting. The Alert assignment logic considers active rules only. 10. Save the rule. # Automate Alert Resolution and Creation Use workflow automation to speed the resolution and creation of Alerts in Student Success Hub. Student Success Hub includes some sample workflows for automating Alert resolution and creation processes. Explore them, learn about them, and use them for ideas to create automation for your school or institution. We recommend leaving the sample Alert processes deactivated. They aren't intended to be used in production, even in a modified form. Just keep them handy for reference as you define your own processes. - **[Automate the Alert Resolution Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_resolution_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Alert can have multiple paths to resolution. Student Success Hub provides some default Alert Status values. The Alert can have one of three Status values to indicate that it's open: New, Acknowledged: In Progress, or Acknowledged: Redirected. Or the Alert can have one of two Status values to indicate that it's closed: Closed: Action Taken or Closed: No Action Needed. You can customize these Status values. - **[Automate the Alert Creation Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_resolution_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub includes a sample process that creates an academic Alert when a student's GPA drops below 2.0 (in higher ed orgs) or when a student's term grade falls below 75 (in K-12 orgs). K-12 orgs also include a sample Alert creation process for an unexcused absence and one for when a student is involved in a behavior incident. ## Automate the Alert Resolution Process An Alert can have multiple paths to resolution. Student Success Hub provides some default Alert Status values. The Alert can have one of three Status values to indicate that it's open: New, Acknowledged: In Progress, or Acknowledged: Redirected. Or the Alert can have one of two Status values to indicate that it's closed: Closed: Action Taken or Closed: No Action Needed. You can customize these Status values. In addition, Alerts have an Is Closed field, which when selected indicates actual resolution. The Student Snapshot uses Is Closed to calculate a real-time count of unresolved Alerts—that is, Alerts with Is Closed unselected. One way to resolve Alerts is by exposing the Is Closed field and having support staff select it when they change an Alert's Status to a closed value. Or, you can resolve Alerts automatically by setting the value of Is Closed based on the value in the Status field. Using Process Builder is a good way to automate Alert resolution when an Alert's Status is changed to a closed value. Student Success Hub includes a preconfigured Alert resolution automation process in Process Builder. In K-12 orgs, it's even activated for you. Here's how to view and customize it. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Process Builder**. 2. Click the arrow to expand Alert Resolution and then click **Alert Resolution**. 3. Do any of the following. - Activate or deactivate the process. - View the process's properties. - Click a criteria or action to review it. - Clone the process. If you originally installed an early version of Student Success Hub that doesn't include the sample process, see [Automate Alert Workflows for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the automated Alert workflow processes included in Student Success Hub.") for instructions on how to create it. ## Automate the Alert Creation Process Student Success Hub includes a sample process that creates an academic Alert when a student's GPA drops below 2.0 (in higher ed orgs) or when a student's term grade falls below 75 (in K-12 orgs). K-12 orgs also include a sample Alert creation process for an unexcused absence and one for when a student is involved in a behavior incident. Again, these processes aren't intended for real-world use. Your institution likely has data and requirements that the sample processes don't consider. To see and explore the sample processes, from Setup, search for and then select **Process Builder**. If you originally installed an early version of Student Success Hub that doesn't include a sample Alert creation process, see [Automate Alert Workflows for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the automated Alert workflow processes included in Student Success Hub.") for instructions on how to create the sample academic Alert for when a student's GPA drops below 2.0. # Automate Alert Workflows for Earlier Versions Create the automated Alert workflow processes included in Student Success Hub. - **[Create the Process for Automatic Alert Resolution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you originally installed Student Success Hub 1. 6 or earlier, you can create a workflow process to automate Alert resolution. Here's how to replicate the process included in Student Success Hub 1.7 and later. - **[Create the Sample Process for Automatic Alert Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.11 or earlier, you can create a sample workflow process to automate Alert creation. Here's how to replicate the process included in Student Success Hub 1.12 and later. ## Create the Process for Automatic Alert Resolution If you originally installed Student Success Hub 1. 6 or earlier, you can create a workflow process to automate Alert resolution. Here's how to replicate the process included in Student Success Hub 1.7 and later. 1. Create the process. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Process Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the process Alert Resolution. 4. Tab to the API Name field to automatically populate the API name, Alert\_Resolution. 5. For the Description, enter If an alert's status is closed, set Is Closed to true. If an alert's status changes from closed, set Is Closed to false. 6. Set the process to start when **A record changes**. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Click the **Add Object** symbol. 9. From the Properties, select the **Alert** object. 10. Set the process to start **when a record is created or edited**. 11. Save your changes. 2. Add criteria to determine whether the Alert has been closed. 1. Click the **Add Criteria** symbol. 2. Name the criteria Alert Status Is Closed. 3. Leave **Conditions are met** selected to evaluate specified field values for the Alert record. 4. Set two filter conditions for the process to check the \[Alert\_\_c\].Status\_\_c field—the first to check for a value of Closed: Action Taken and the second for Closed: No Action Needed. 5. For Conditions, specify **Any of the conditions are met (OR)**. 6. Save your changes. 3. Add the action to execute when the Alert has been closed. 1. Under Immediate Actions, click **Add Action**. 2. For the action type, select **Update Records**. 3. Name the action Resolve Alert. 4. For Record Type, choose **Select the Alert record that started your process**. 5. Leave **No criteria—just update the records!** selected. 6. Specify the Field (Is Closed), Type (Boolean), and Value (True) for Alert records to be updated. 7. Save your changes. 4. Repeat the Add Criteria steps (Step 2 above) to add a second criteria named Alert Status Is Open. The details are similar to the first criteria, except: 1. Set two filter conditions for the process to check the \[Alert\_\_c\].Status\_\_c field for a value that does not equal Closed: Action Taken and the second for a value that does not equal Closed: No Action Needed. 2. For Conditions, specify **All of the conditions are met (AND)**. 5. Repeat the Add Action steps (Step 3 above) to add a second action named Unresolve Alert. The details are similar to the first action, except: Specify the Field (Is Closed), Type (Boolean), and Value (False) for Alert records to be updated. 6. When you're done, activate the process. Your completed Alert Resolution process looks something like this. ![Final Alert resolution process in Process Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_alert_pb_completed.png) ## Create the Sample Process for Automatic Alert Creation If you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.11 or earlier, you can create a sample workflow process to automate Alert creation. Here's how to replicate the process included in Student Success Hub 1.12 and later. 1. First create a global action, which is used later to specify the record type of the Alert that the sample process creates (an Academic Alert). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note We require a global action because every org has a unique ID per Alert record type. The sample process is designed to be generic enough to work across all orgs. Rather than specifying the exact record type ID in the process definition, we get the ID through the global action and make it available to the process. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Global Actions**. 2. Click **New Action**. 3. Specify these values: 1. Action Type—Create a Record 2. Target Object—Alert 3. Record Type—Academic 4. Label—Create Academic Alert 5. Name—Create\_Academic\_Alert 6. Create Feed Item—Leave deselected 4. Save your changes. 5. When the layout editor opens, add these fields to the fields already displayed on the action layout: Priority, Reason, Program Enrollment, Assign Using Active Assignment Rules, and Comments. 6. Save your changes. 7. On the action detail page, verify the newly created action. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Academic is one of the default Alert record types used in Student Success Hub. The sample process creates an Academic Alert. If you're using different record types than the default ones, when you create your own actual process, make sure to specify the correct record type value. And if you intend to use multiple processes to create different types of Alerts, make sure to first create multiple global actions as needed. 2. Now create the sample process. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Process Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the process \[Example\] Alert Creation - GPA 2.0 Threshold. 4. Specify the API name Alert\_Creation\_GPA\_2\_0\_Threshold. 5. For the description, enter \[Example\] Create an academic Alert when a student's GPA drops below 2.0. 6. Set the process to start when **A record changes**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Click the **Add Object** symbol. 9. From the Properties, select the **Program Enrollment** object. 10. Set the process to start **when a record is created or edited**. 11. Save your changes. 3. Add criteria to determine whether a student's GPA is below the minimum threshold. 1. Click the **Add Criteria** symbol. 2. Name the criteria GPA Is Below 2.0. 3. Select **Formula evaluates to true** for the criteria. 4. Insert this formula: ``` AND([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c < 2, NOT(ISBLANK([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c)), OR(ISBLANK(PRIORVALUE([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c)), PRIORVALUE([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c) >= 2, AND([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c <> 0, OR(PRIORVALUE([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c) == 0, ISNEW())))) ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note This formula excludes the cases when a Program Enrollment is created with a GPA value of 0.0 or a blank value, such as for newly enrolled students. A GPA meets the criteria only if it changed from a 0.0 or blank value to a value below 2.0, or if the previous value was above 2.0 and the current value is below. You may want to include additional criteria when defining your own actual processes. For example, exclude withdrawn or graduated (inactive) students, or specify different thresholds for different student categories (undergraduate versus graduate students, by college, etc.), or also consider the values of the Alert's Status, Priority, Reason fields, as well as any custom picklist values or custom fields you've added. 5. Click **Advanced** and select **Yes** to require that the action execute only upon relevant changes to the record. 6. Save your changes. 4. Add the action to execute when the GPA threshold criteria are met. 1. Under Immediate Actions, click **Add Action**. 2. For the Action Type, select **Quick Actions**. 3. Name the action Create Academic Alert. 4. Specify that the action use the global action that you created earlier: 1. Filter Search By—Global actions 2. Type—Create a Record 3. Action—Create\_Academic\_Alert 5. After Process Builder locates the Create\_Academic\_Alert action, specify these field values. (The first two fields are loaded by default. Click **Add Row** to add each of the additional fields.)
Field Type Value

Student Contact

Field Reference

[hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__Contact__r.Id

Note
Note Select the Contact ID on the related Contact object. Because of a known issue, when you initially save the completed process, the value displays as [hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__Contact__c.Id. If you exit Process Builder, return to the process, and hover on this field value, it displays with the correct __r.

Status

Picklist

New

Priority

Picklist

Urgent

Reason

Picklist

Grade Concern

Program Enrollment

Field Reference

[hed__Program_Enrollment__c].Id (Select the Record ID.)

Assign Using Active Assignment Rules

Boolean

True

Comments

Formula

"GPA has dropped to " & TEXT([hed__Program_Enrollment__c].hed__GPA__c) & "."

6. Save your changes. 5. Verify the completed sample process. ![The completed sample Alert creation process in Process Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_alert_pb_create_sample.png) # Automate Attaching Documents to Document Checklist Items Make it easy to attach documents to Document Checklist Items to save time for your staff and make document processing more efficient. - **[What Does the Automation Do and When Should You Use It?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can set up Admissions Connect to automatically attach applicant documents to Document Checklist Items when they are uploaded to Salesforce. That way, the files are always associated with the right applicant and the right application requirements. After the file is associated with a Document Checklist Item, it’s available for your admissions staff to review. - **[Records Involved in Managing Application Documents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before we describe the automation, let's review the types of records that are involved in managing application documents. - **[How Does the Automation Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides a TDTM\_ContentDocumentLink trigger handler that relates Content Document records to Document Checklist Items using Document Type Mapping custom metadata type records. These metadata records let you map the Description field of Content Version records (aka Salesforce Files) to Document Types. When a file is uploaded and a Content Document Link record is created to associate the file with an Application record, if the Content Version record Description matches a Document Type, the Content Document Link is updated to point to a Document Checklist Item instead of the Application. - **[Automation Example](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let’s look at two of the default records and see how they work together when adding documents from Common App to Salesforce. - **[Review and Create Document Type Mapping Custom Metadata Type Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides default Document Type Mapping metadata records. Remember that these records let you map the Description field of Content Version records (aka Salesforce Files) to Document Types. Review the defaults and create your own, if needed. - **[Implementation Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your institution is responsible for creating an import strategy that ensures application documents are associated with the correct applicant and include a Description. ## What Does the Automation Do and When Should You Use It? You can set up Admissions Connect to automatically attach applicant documents to Document Checklist Items when they are uploaded to Salesforce. That way, the files are always associated with the right applicant and the right application requirements. After the file is associated with a Document Checklist Item, it’s available for your admissions staff to review. This type of automation is great if you’re importing documents from other applications or databases, like Peoplesoft. Just make sure your import strategy creates the records that are required to trigger the automation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note To see a list of the file types supported in the Admissions Connect components, see [Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review some considerations before starting to work with documents in Admissions Connect."). ## Records Involved in Managing Application Documents Before we describe the automation, let's review the types of records that are involved in managing application documents. - Document Types identify the type of document that an applicant uploads. Document Types are created in Setup. You specify a Document Type when setting up your Action Plan Template Items that are Document Checklist Items. - Content Version records are how you create Content Documents via the API. Your import strategy likely uses a third-party tool to create these records. The Description you provide for the Content Version is duplicated on the Content Document’s Description. - Content Document Links associate a Content Document to another Salesforce record. These records can be automatically created when you create your Content Version records and this workflow is likely part of your import strategy. ## How Does the Automation Work? Admissions Connect provides a TDTM\_ContentDocumentLink trigger handler that relates Content Document records to Document Checklist Items using Document Type Mapping custom metadata type records. These metadata records let you map the Description field of Content Version records (aka Salesforce Files) to Document Types. When a file is uploaded and a Content Document Link record is created to associate the file with an Application record, if the Content Version record Description matches a Document Type, the Content Document Link is updated to point to a Document Checklist Item instead of the Application. If the Description doesn't match any Document Types, the Content Document Link to an Application record is left as is. If multiple Document Checklist Items related to the same Application have the same Document Type, the Content Document is linked to the first Document Checklist Item that’s marked as Required. If multiple required Document Checklist Items have the same Document Type, we use the lowest-value Sequence field on the coordinating Application Material Mapping record to determine which Document Checklist Item to link to. If there’s no Sequence value, we alphabetize the Document Checklist Items and use the first one.    To get you started, Admissions Connect provides default Document Type records and Document Type Mapping custom metadata type records. To see a list of the default records, see [Quick Start Asset Reference List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide."). ## Automation Example Let’s look at two of the default records and see how they work together when adding documents from Common App to Salesforce. - A Document Type called `Writing Supplement` (with the API name of `Writing_Supplement`). - A Document Type Mapping custom metadata type record called `Writing Supplement` that maps the Document Description of `Writing Supplement` to the Document Type API Name of `Writing_Supplement`. In this scenario, let's assume that you used a third-party tool to import application documents into Salesforce as Content Documents and linked them to the Contact and Application records through Content Document Links. Let's also assume that you've configured Admissions Connect to automatically assign Action Plans to Application records based on the details in an applicant's Application record. When Action Plans are assigned, they include Action Plan Items that are Document Checklist Items. Now all the pieces are in place for the TDTM\_ContentDocumentLink trigger handler to kick in. Using the trigger and Document Type Mapping custom metadata type records, we parse incoming Content Document records that are attached to an Application to determine whether their Description matches one of the defined Document Type records. In our example, a Content Document with a Description of Writing Supplement is attached to an Application record. The trigger removes that association and updates it to a Document Checklist Item on that same Application record that has a Document Type of Writing Supplement. Writing Supplement—the description on the Content Version record—is matched to Writing\_Supplement—the API name of the Document Checklist Item's Document Type—using one of the preconfigured Document Type Mapping custom metadata records. Here's how this looks visually. ![Concept diagram showing how the Content Document Link is updated to a Document Checklist Item.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/concept_dci_automation_trigger.png) ## Review and Create Document Type Mapping Custom Metadata Type Records Admissions Connect provides default Document Type Mapping metadata records. Remember that these records let you map the Description field of Content Version records (aka Salesforce Files) to Document Types. Review the defaults and create your own, if needed. See [Quick Start Asset Reference List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide."). 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Click **Manage Records** next to Document Type Mapping. 3. Click **New**. 4. Fill out these fields.  Label Enter a name for this Document Type Mapping record. We recommend using the text string you provide on the Document Description field. Document Type Mapping Name Enter an API name for this Document Type Mapping record. Document Type API Name Enter the API name of the Document Type.  Document Description Enter the text string that you plan to use when specifying a Description for Content Version records. Remember that the same Description gets used on the Content Document record. 5. Save your changes. ## Implementation Considerations Your institution is responsible for creating an import strategy that ensures application documents are associated with the correct applicant and include a Description. When creating your Content Version records with your ETL tool, the casing on the Description field doesn't matter, but the spacing does. For example, a Description of writing supplement is matched with the Document Type Writing Supplement. A Description of writing supplement is not matched because it has too many spaces. When setting up your automation, make sure to use the Description values that you've specified in the Document Type Mapping records. The TDTM\_ContentDocumentLink trigger handler runs on Before Insert of ContentDocumentLink records, which means the trigger can redirect the link to the Document Checklist Item only at the moment the ContentDocument is attached to the Application. Make sure that your Action Plans are assigned to Applications before uploading applicant documents. Otherwise, the documents stay attached to the Application record. Keep in mind that the TDTM\_ContentDocumentLink trigger only attaches a ContentDocument to a Document Checklist Item record if the item doesn't already have a ContentDocument attached. In other words, the trigger ignores Document Checklist Items that have files, which means you can’t use this automation to update or replace documents already attached to Document Checklist Items. Also consider the daily limit on the number of files that can be added to Salesforce. See [Salesforce CRM Content Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=content_file_size_limits.htm) and [Increase the Maximum number of 'Content Versions' published per day](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000334861&language=en_us&type=1&mode=1) in Salesforce Help. If you’re uploading large batches of files in your org, we recommend disabling the Content Version trigger to avoid [platform event limits](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.platform_events.meta/platform_events/platform_event_limits.htm). This trigger works in conjunction with the Admissions Connect - Refresh Record platform event, which allows the Document Checklist Item Preview component to automatically refresh when new versions of a document are uploaded. Turn the trigger back on after the uploads are complete. To help your admissions staff easily access files that aren't moved to Document Checklist Items, add the Files related list to the Application Lightning record page. Also add the Files related list to the Application Review Lightning record page, just make sure to configure the list to show files related to Applications. # Automate Case Creation and Assignment Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To automate case creation and assignment: | Education Cloud Full Access | Educational institutions provide support to learners in many areas, including financial aid, academic advising, and disability services. Automating processes helps your institution to make sure that learners get the support they need in a more timely manner. Use the flow templates in Education Cloud to automate cases and the assignment of success teams to learners. - **[Education Cloud Flow Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud gives you flow templates that you can customize to create and resolve cases based on specific criteria, and assign support staff to students. - **[Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you use these flows, create a support process and a case record type to manage your support cases. - **[Use Flows to Create Cases and Assign Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides flow templates that you can customize for managing cases and assigning success teams. ## Education Cloud Flow Templates Education Cloud gives you flow templates that you can customize to create and resolve cases based on specific criteria, and assign support staff to students. | Flow | What it Does | | --- | --- | | EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Failed Course Offering Participant | Assigns a success team to a student if they fail a class. | | EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment | Assigns an advisor and advising team to a learner when the learner declares a major. The flow removes the assignments if the learner abandons their major. | | EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA | Assigns an academic probation advisor to a learner when their GPA falls below 2.5. The flow removes the assignment if the learner improves their GPA to above 2.5 for the next academic term. | | EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete | Assigns a learner to an academic support team that specializes in student athletes. | | EDU Cloud: Assign Case Teams for Veterans and International Students | Assigns a learner to an academic support team that specializes in military veterans or international students. | | EDU Cloud: Close Case for Canceled or Denied Application | Automatically closes an open application case if the application is canceled or denied. | | EDU Cloud: Close Related Cases for Term | Creates a case when a learner enrolls in an academic term. | | EDU Cloud: Combine Case Team Collections Without Record Duplications | Prevents duplication of case teams. | | EDU Cloud: Create Grade Alert | Creates an alert if a learner's grade falls below a C. The flow also creates a task for the case team member if a learner has a failing grade. | | EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application | Creates a case when a person submits a new application. | ## Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams Before you use these flows, create a support process and a case record type to manage your support cases. ### Create a Support Process Be sure to build a process for handling your support cases. For instructions, see [Create a Process for Managing Support Cases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/create-a-process-for-managing-support-cases) in Trailhead. ### Create a Case Record Type For your support process, create a record type on the case object that's related to the support that you're providing. For instructions, see [Create Record Types](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/create-a-process-for-managing-support-cases/support-cases-record-types) in Trailhead. ### Create Case Team Roles Each person on a case team has a specific role. Create case team roles for people who support your cases, such as Admissions Advisor and Financial Advisor. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Case Team, and then select **Case Team Roles**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the name for the new member role. 4. Select the case access that you want the role to have. 5. Save your changes. ### Create Predefined Case Teams After you create their roles, create predefined case teams for specific groups or teams that support students in your institution. You can create a predefined team to support international applicants, another team for specific colleges, or separate teams for each academic level. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Case Team, and then select **Predefined Case Teams**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a team name. For example, Undergraduate Application. 4. Add team members and select their member roles. 5. Save your changes. ## Use Flows to Create Cases and Assign Success Teams Education Cloud provides flow templates that you can customize for managing cases and assigning success teams. Educational institutions have many people and teams who help learners with different aspects of their journey. However you organize your support staff, you can make sure that the individual cases reach the right teams. Because they're templates, you must make a copy of the flows that you want to customize. To make a copy of a flow: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Choose an EDU Cloud flow. 3. Click **Save As**. 4. Enter a label, API name, and optional description for your flow. After you make a copy of the flow, you must perform additional setup tasks and activate the flow. See Also: - [Configure Education Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_education_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update flow elements to create and assign cases in your institution.") - [Activate or Deactivate a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_distribute_activate.htm&type=5) # Automate Case Management and Success Team Assignment Educational institutions provide support to learners in many areas, including financial aid, academic advising, and disability services. Use the flow templates in Education Cloud to automate case creation and closure, and the assignment of success teams to learners. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: Before you use these flows, create a support process, case record types, case team roles, and predefined case teams to manage your support cases. Next, make a copy of the flow template that you want to use and configure it to work in your institution. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Automate Case Creation and Assignment (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Configure Education Flows (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_configure_education_flows.htm) # Automate Gift Operation Processes in Education For Fundraising, Salesforce provides flows, invocable actions, and Lightning web components that are tailored to meet specific business needs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Fundraising Flows in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising. - **[Fundraising Invocable Actions in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_invocable_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the object-level access that's required for using invocable actions in Fundraising. - **[Fundraising Lightning Web Components in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_lightning_web_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising provides screen components that extend the types of input fields available in flow screens. # Automate Gift Operation Processes in Nonprofit For Fundraising, Salesforce provides flows, invocable actions, and Lightning web components that are tailored to meet specific business needs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Fundraising Flows in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising. - **[Fundraising Invocable Actions in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_invocable_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the object-level access that's required for using invocable actions in Fundraising. - **[Fundraising Lightning Web Components in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_lightning_web_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising provides screen components that extend the types of input fields available in flow screens. # Automate Hold Placement on Students Build an automation flow by using invocable actions. Run the flow to run expression sets that evaluate students for hold violations and assign holds to a group of students. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To use expression sets and invocable actions: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
To create context definitions: Context Service Admin
To create, update, and delete expression sets: Rules Engine Designer
To run expression sets in Business Rules Engine: Rules Engine Runtime
To configure flows: Manage Flow
1. [Create a context definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_create_context_definitions.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for your policy rule. Define a node with attributes. The node requires the IsHoldApplicable attribute. Select **OUTPUT** as the attribute’s type and select **BOOLEAN** as the data type. 2. [Add a context mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_add_context_mapping.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for the node that you defined. Map the node to the Contact sObject. Make sure that you also map the isHoldApplicable attribute to a corresponding boolean field on the Contact sObject. 3. Create a policy rule. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Policy Rules**. 2. Click **New Policy Rule**. 3. Enter a name. The API name populates automatically. 4. Select **Student Information System** as the usage type. 5. Select **Default** as the usage subtype. 6. Select the context definition that you created as the context definition. 7. Save your changes. This policy rule automatically creates a policy rule version. 4. Create an expression set that executes your policy rule. 1. From the policy rule record that you created, go to the Details tab, and then select the automatically created policy rule version. 2. In Policy Rule Builder, [create an expression set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.build_your_expression_set.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. Create a compliance control record. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Compliance Controls**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and an API name. 4. Save your changes. Every compliance control that you create automatically creates a corresponding compliance control version. 5. In the New Compliance Control Version window, select **Expression Set** as the rule processor, and then select the policy rule that you defined earlier. 6. Select **Default** as the status. 7. Save your changes. 6. Map a regulation clause version record to this compliance control version record. This mapping connects the regulation clause version record to an expression set that’s stored in the compliance control version record. 1. From the compliance control version record page, go to the Related tab. 2. In the Regulation Clause Compliance Control Versions section, click **New**. 3. Select the regulation clause version that you want to map to. 4. Save your changes. 7. [Build a flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&type=5&language=en_US) that suits your needs by using these invocable actions. We recommend that you create one flow to evaluate and assign each hold definition. - Get Related Policy Rules: This action gets expression sets from all regulation clause version records that are related to a regulatory code record. It generates expression set IDs. - Run Expression Set with Context Definition: This action runs an expression set against each student ID. It generates context IDs that indicate whether a hold applies to a student. - Assign Hold on Student: This action creates and places a hold on a student’s account based on the hold definition, reasons, and the context IDs that the Run Expression Set with Context Definition action generates. If a regulatory code violation is currently placed on a student’s account, this action doesn’t place the same hold twice. - Get Restrictions Assigned To Person Account: This action checks a student's account and lists all regulatory code violations that are placed on the account. Review the flow run results in the regulatory code violation records or in a student’s case records. SEE ALSO: - [Best Practices for Executing Expression Set Rules on Large Datasets by using Salesforce Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.bre_run_expression_set_rules_on_large_datasets_by_using_salesforce_flow.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Automate Learner Enrollment Configure the Enroll Applicants flow in Education Cloud to automatically enroll admitted students. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure the flow for automatic learner enrollment: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows and select it. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Enroll Applicants flow. 3. Edit the start date, start time, and frequency as necessary. 4. Save your changes and activate the flow. See [Automate Tasks with Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow.htm). # Automate Planned Gift Calculation in Education Add a button to the Planned Gift record page that recalculates present, deferred, and future values when you refresh planned gift data. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To update Fundraising settings and page layouts:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To configure flows: Manage Flow
Before you start, complete the [prerequisites for Gift Planning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_prerequisites_for_gift_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Simplify the management of complex gift planning processes by turning on Gift Planning and Gift Agreements in Fundraising. To further improve the process, add related fields to the Fundraising page layouts. To keep gift values and gift types up-to-date, set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records.") and confirm that you have created your own active version of the Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes flow. Planned gift automations calculate the present, future, and deferred future values based on data such as principal amount, net return rate, discount rate, term, and expectancy. When the Expectancy field changes, the Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes flow recalculates these values automatically. To easily recalculate the values when other fields change, configure a button on the planned gift record page that runs the Update Planned Gift screen flow. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then find and select **Planned Gift**. 2. Select **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 3. Click **New Button or Link**. 4. Enter these values in the fields for the button. 1. Enter a label. For example, Calculate Values. 2. The name is populated automatically. 3. Select **Detail Page Button** as the display type. 4. Confirm that **Display in new window** is selected as the behavior. 5. Confirm that **URL** is selected as the content source. 6. Use this flow URL for the button content. ``` /flow/plndgiving__UpdatePlannedGift?plannedGiftId={!PlannedGift.Id }&retUrl=/{!PlannedGift.Id} ``` 5. Select **Page Layouts**, and then click **Planned Gift Layout**. 6. Click **Buttons**, and then drag **Calculate Values** to the Planned Gift Detail section as a custom button. 7. Save your changes. After you complete these steps, the **Calculate Values** button appears on planned gift record pages, where you can run the screen flow. # Automate Planned Gift Calculation in Nonprofit Add a button to the Planned Gift record page that recalculates present, deferred, and future values when you refresh planned gift data. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed
To update Fundraising settings and page layouts:

FundraisingAccess permission set
To configure flows: Manage Flow
Before you start, complete the [prerequisites for Gift Planning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_prerequisites_for_gift_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Simplify the management of complex gift planning processes by turning on Gift Planning and Gift Agreements in Fundraising. To further improve the process, add related fields to the Fundraising page layouts. To keep gift values and gift types up-to-date, set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records.") and confirm that you have created your own active version of the Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes flow. Planned gift automations calculate the present, future, and deferred future values based on data such as principal amount, net return rate, discount rate, term, and expectancy. When the Expectancy field changes, the Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes flow recalculates these values automatically. To easily recalculate the values when other fields change, configure a button on the planned gift record page that runs the Update Planned Gift screen flow. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then find and select **Planned Gift**. 2. Select **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 3. Click **New Button or Link**. 4. Enter these values in the fields for the button. 1. Enter a label. For example, Calculate Values. 2. The name is populated automatically. 3. Select **Detail Page Button** as the display type. 4. Confirm that **Display in new window** is selected as the behavior. 5. Confirm that **URL** is selected as the content source. 6. Use this flow URL for the button content. ``` /flow/plndgiving__UpdatePlannedGift?plannedGiftId={!PlannedGift.Id }&retUrl=/{!PlannedGift.Id} ``` 5. Select **Page Layouts**, and then click **Planned Gift Layout**. 6. Click **Buttons**, and then drag **Calculate Values** to the Planned Gift Detail section as a custom button. 7. Save your changes. After you complete these steps, the **Calculate Values** button appears on planned gift record pages, where you can run the screen flow. # Automate Processes in Education Cloud Use Salesforce tools to automate your academic processes, verify identities, create assessments, and provide services to constituents.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Business Rules Engine (BRE), Decision Tables, and Decision Explainer Execute business logic at scale without code. Benefits and features include: - Create custom rule sets, and then invoke them anywhere. - Build rules by using a visual designer. - Replaces the spreadsheets of business users. - Embed in any industry process and workflow by using OmniScripts and Flow Builder. - Automations call BRE, so when the business logic changes, there's no need to change the automation. - Decision Explainer explains why a decision was made in BRE. Create policy rules using expression sets in BRE. Standard use cases include: - Run GPA score calculations for students enrolled in an academic term. - Check the eligibility of students enrolling into a course. - Apply complex learning requirements for learning courses and programs. Custom use cases can include: - Route prospects to the right counselor based on attributes from their interests form. - Route learners to the right staff member to follow up on an application. - Route learners to the right advisor, care plan, or action plan. - Determine when to offer a default scholarship to a student. - Business users can change rules, such as adjust the GPA requirement from 3.2 to 3.5 to be eligible. - Match a person interested in computer science with a mentor. - Check the eligibility of a person who has an immediate need for financial aid. Identity Verification Protect sensitive information and ensure compliance with regulations, such as FERPA, GLBA, HIPAA, and PCI, by standardizing identity verification processes. These processes are flexible, provide audit trails, and combat identity fraud. Benefits and features include: - External database search - Multi-object search - Verification trail auditing - Custom admin setup Use cases include: - When a student calls an institution, the staff member can quickly confirm the student's identity. Discovery Framework Create questions and assessment forms to collect details for program enrollment. Use cases include: - Use assessments to match mentors with mentees. - Review the responses to an assessment for an advising program enrollment to determine if the program meets their needs and how best to support them. Service Process Studio Design seamless customer service processes quickly and efficiently. Staff can launch these service processes and get started with the customer service operations for the student. Use cases include: - For registrar operations, handle requests for course substitutions, course waivers, term withdrawals, transcripts, or degree and graduation certificates. - For student operations, handle requests for changing contact information, changing learning programs, or new and changed declarations of majors and minors. - For requirements and admissions, handle requests for transferring credits and credit appeals. See Also: - [Business Rules Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.business_rules_engine.htm&type=5) - [Decision Explainer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_decision_explainer.htm&type=5) - [Decision Table](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_decision_table.htm&type=5) - [Identity Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_identity_verification.htm&type=5) - [Discovery Framework and Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_setup_and_configure_discovery_framework.htm&type=5) - [Service Process Studio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.service_process_studio.htm&type=5) # Automate Recurring Donation Status Changes Automate Recurring Donation Status changes when donors miss installment payments. Sometimes donors miss their Recurring Donation installment payments, or stop donating entirely. Track these events on Recurring Donations so you and your staff know when there's a lapse in giving. In NPSP Settings, configure the Recurring Donation Status to change automatically when donations aren't received as expected. Let's follow an example scenario and walk through how to make these configuration changes. Your development director decides that recurring gifts should: - Be marked as lapsed if the donor doesn't make their scheduled donation for 20 days. - Automatically close if a donor doesn't make their scheduled donation for 45 days. In NPSP Settings: 1. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Status Automation**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Enter 20 in **Number of Days for Lapsed**. 4. Enter 45 in **Number of Days for Closed**. 5. Save these settings. Now you may be wondering, exactly when do these status updates occur? How does NPSP define a missed installment payment? Let's look at a specific gift for an example. Let's say we have a monthly donation started on June 1st, but the donor doesn't make their scheduled July payment. Salesforce begins counting Number of Days for Lapsed and Number of Days for Closed on the day after the expected installment date (July 2nd in our example). So the Recurring Donation is marked Lapsed 20 days later, on July 22nd, and marked Closed 45 days later, on August 16th. There certainly are a lot of dates to keep track of here! To help you check your understanding of these settings, we've provided a table of additional examples. | Number of Days for Lapsed | Number of Days for Closed | Lapsed Status Date | Closed Status Date | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 10 | 20 | July 12th | July 22nd | | 30 | 45 | August 1st | August 16th | | 60 | 90 | August 31st | September 30th | _Each example represents a monthly donation initiated on June 1st._ # Automate the Application Review Process Use flows to automatically move an individual application through the review process.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To automate the application review process: | Education Cloud Full Access | To automatically assign the individual application record to the person who's responsible for the next part of the review process, use these flow templates.
Flow Template What Does It Do?
Admissions: Initiate Application Reviews Invokes the Create and Assign Application Reviews Sub-Flow when the status of an individual application record is set to In Review.
Admissions: Review Application Retrieves the user's application review and rubric related to the individual application being viewed. Shows the user screens for completing the rubric and review.
Application Intake

Updates the status of an individual application from Processing to In Review.

Note
Note To start the automation process, the Intake Screen element of this flow requires that you manually mark the application as Ready for Review.
Application Review Updates the status of an individual application from In Review to Ready for Decision when all reviews are complete.
Application Decision Updates the status of an individual application from Ready for Decision to Application Decision if the Application Decision field has a value.
Application Decision Creation Creates an application decision record for an individual application, and assigns it to the decision queue if the status of an individual application is set to Ready for Decision.
Application Review Creation Sub-Flow Assigns three application review records to a preconfigured queue. The Application Auto-Admit flow uses this subflow.
Application Auto-Admit

Automatically issues an Admit decision under these conditions:

  • The status of an individual application is set to In Review.

  • The Primary Citizenship field on the applicant's Contact Profile record is set to United States.

  • All GPA records of the applicant on the Person Education object are above 75% of the grade scale.

Create and Assign Application Reviews Assigns application review records to the queue specified on Action Plan Template Assignment records. The Admissions: Initiate Application Reviews Flow uses this subflow.
- **[Get Ready to Use Application Review Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_the_application_review_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these steps before you use the application review flows. ## Get Ready to Use Application Review Flows Complete these steps before you use the application review flows. ### Create Queues for Application Review and Application Decision Creation The flows Application Review Creation Sub-Flow and Application Decision Creation require that you set up queues for each part of the process. Be sure that you include the following queue names for their respective flows. See [Create Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.setting_up_queues.htm&type=5). | Flow | Queue Name | | --- | --- | | Application Review Creation Sub-Flow | Application\_Reviews | | Application Decision Creation | Application\_Decisions | ### Copy and Activate a Flow Because they're templates, you must make a copy of the flows before you use them, and then activate the flows. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Choose a flow template. 3. Click **Save As**. 4. Enter a label, API name, and an optional description for your flow. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click **Activate**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important To prevent data problems, activate either Application Review Creation or Application Auto-Admit, but not both. # Automate the Application Review Process When a prospective student applies to your institution, the application goes through a review and approval process that involves multiple reviewers with different review purposes. Education Cloud provides flow templates to automatically assign the individual application record to the person who's responsible for the next part of the review process. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: Create queues for your application review and decision processes. Next, copy and activate the flow templates. The status of an individual application record triggers each flow. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Automate the Application Review Process (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_automate_the_application_review_process.htm) # Automated Soft Credits Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically. You can [assign a soft credit manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits."), which is great for the occasional one-off situation. But what if you routinely need to assign soft credits for certain types of donations? Fortunately, you can configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically. The most common example is the Household soft credit. When one member of a household makes a donation, all other members of that household automatically get a soft credit. This gives you a well-rounded picture of each person's contributions to your organization. Many organizations get by just fine with only Household soft credits. But some organizations have scenarios that require a little more attention. Depending on the kind of organization you work for, you might have to accommodate donor advised funds, memorial gifts, planned giving, board members, major donor portfolios, giving circles, crowdfunding, peer-to-peer fundraising, and much more. In many of these cases, you need to assign soft credits to one or more people, such as a board member, members of a family foundation, or simply relatives who don't live in the same household. Let's look at a few examples. 1. Gabriela is a board member with Universal Containers, a large shipping company. She is a vocal proponent of corporate philanthropy and environmental stewardship. She contacts Friends of Buena Vista Bay and makes a commitment that Universal Containers will reduce their non-recycleable waste by 15%. She also pledges a $50,000 corporate sponsorship for Buena Vista Bay's restoration and cleanup projects. The database administrator at Buena Vista Bay enters the sponsorship information, and includes Gabriela as the Primary Contact. This automatically generates a soft credit for Gabriela to recognize her role in coordinating the sponsorship. 2. Crystal is a fund development officer with Paws Animal Shelter and is assigned to 10 people to solicit for a new shelter facility. She solicits Rashaad who volunteers at the shelter a couple of times a month. The database administrator at the animal shelter sets up an automated soft credit on a Relationship record so that when a donation from Rashaad comes in, Crystal receives a Solicitor soft credit. The development director can also run a report of all fundraisers who have a Solicitor credit to see who has met their goals. 3. Rose, Andy, and Lauren are part of the Murray Family Foundation. The family foundation makes periodic donations to the Conservation Land Trust throughout the year, and the Land Trust wants to make sure that each member of the family foundation is recognized for the contributions. The database administrator at the land trust sets up automated soft credits on an Affiliation record for each family foundation member so that when a donation from the family foundation comes in, each member receives a soft credit. Getting all of this right is important. Donors with complex needs expect that you represent their family, businesses, associates, and financial institutions correctly, and that your organization credits the right people for the donations they've helped to bring in. NPSP lets you configure soft credit contact roles in multiple ways to accommodate these different scenarios. And since NPSP creates the soft credits automatically, you can scale your fundraising efforts while continuing to honor the wishes of your donors. NPSP can create automated soft credits for a Contact when the Contact is a: - Member of a donor's Household - Primary Contact on an Organizational Opportunity - Honoree or Notification Contact on an Opportunity - Related Contact on a Relationship record with an Individual donor - Contact on an Affiliation record with an Organizational donor Matching Gifts is an additional way that NPSP automatically assigns soft credits. Learn more in [Work with Matching Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_work_with_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Tracking Matching Gifts in Salesforce is a three-step process."). Since there are many ways to automatically create Opportunity Contact Roles and soft credits in NPSP, you may have situations where more than one automated soft credit rule applies. Fortunately, NPSP applies an order of precedence to avoid creating duplicate Contact Roles. Learn more in [NPSP Logic for Creating Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_logic_for_creating_ocrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what NPSP automation for creating soft credits takes precedence when multiple automated processes are involved."). - **[Create Automated Soft Credits for Household Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically assign soft credits to all members of a Household when one member makes a donation. - **[Create Automated Soft Credits for the Primary Contact on an Organizational Gift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes you may need to assign a soft credit to the Primary Contact of an Organizational gift. While you can create an Opportunity Contact Role manually, NPSP can automatically create one for you. - **[Create Automated Soft Credits for Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP can automatically create soft credits for Individual donations based on Relationship records. - **[Create Automated Soft Credits for Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP can automatically create soft credits for Organizational donations based on Affiliation records. - **[Calculate Soft Credit Totals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Soft Credit Totals update when the nightly batch jobs run. If you need to recalculate soft credits outside of the nightly batch, your administrator can manually recalculate the entire batch or for a single Account or Contact. ## Create Automated Soft Credits for Household Members Automatically assign soft credits to all members of a Household when one member makes a donation. With Household soft credits, everyone in the Household receives a soft credit for a donation made by anyone else in the Household. However, soft credits for existing Opportunities aren’t given to new Household Account members unless you merge their existing Household account with the new Household account while adding the new contacts to the household. There are two ways to do perform the merge: - Merge two or more Contacts, which merge their Household accounts - Use Manage Household to add an existing contact and merge both households For more information and examples, see [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When creating a new donation, assign the Primary Contact to the individual in the Household who “signed the check,” and then let the NPSP assign Household Member Contact Roles to everyone else in the Household. Let's try out an example. We'll use example data data values, but feel free to enter your own. 1. Find or or create a Contact whose Household contains more than one member. 2. Click **New Donation**. 3. Enter these values: 1. **Close Date** = Today's date 2. **Stage** = Closed Won 3. **Amount** = $100 4. Leave the remaining fields blank or with their default value. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Click the newly created Opportunity record. 6. Find the Contact Roles related list. It may be in the sidebar, or click **Related** to find it. 7. Notice that the donor and every household member has a Contact Role. NPSP assigns the Donor role to the original donor, and the Household Member role to every other household member. The Household Member role represents soft credits. ![Contact Roles related list showing two household members. One has the Donor role, and the other has Household Member.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/hh-member-ocrs.png) ## Create Automated Soft Credits for the Primary Contact on an Organizational Gift Sometimes you may need to assign a soft credit to the Primary Contact of an Organizational gift. While you can create an Opportunity Contact Role manually, NPSP can automatically create one for you. Sometimes you may need to assign a soft credit to the Primary Contact of an Organizational gift. While you can create an Opportunity Contact Role manually, NPSP can automatically create one for you. Before you begin, make sure you configured your Contact Roles settings. If you need a refresher, see [Configure Soft Credit Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring soft credit rollups."). Let's try out an example. Some data values are from the examples above, but feel free to enter your own. 1. Find or create an Organization Account. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. Find the Opportunities related list and click **New**. 4. Choose the Donation record type. 5. Enter these values: 1. **Amount** = $50,000. 2. **Close Date** = Today. 3. **Stage** = Posted (or any Closed/Won stage). NOTE: Our example uses a Closed/Won Opportunity Stage, but NPSP will create a soft credit role for any Opportunity Stage. 4. **Primary Contact** = Any Contact in your system. 6. Click **Save**. 7. You may need to click the new Opportunity's name in the confirmation message to view the record. ![New Opportunity confirmation message](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/org-donation-primary-contact-confirm.png) The resulting Opportunity should look something like this: ![Opportunity detail page with Primary Contact and soft credit role highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/org-donation-primary-contact.png) Notice that the Contact you selected for Primary Contact is listed in the Contact Roles section of the Opportunity record with the Influencer role. Now, navigate to the Contact record and look at the Related section. You should see the new Opportunity listed there. ![Opportunity related list on Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/org-donation-contact-details.png) ## Create Automated Soft Credits for Relationships NPSP can automatically create soft credits for Individual donations based on Relationship records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Relationship Automated Soft Credits](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_mG8g_V3XO4). NPSP can automatically create soft credits for Individual donations based on Relationship records. For example, a donor may request that for each gift they give, you create a soft credit for a relative who lives in a separate household. Or, you can use Relationship records to track who the solicitor is for a donor, and NPSP soft credits the solicitor when gifts are made. Use the **Related Opportunity Contact Role** field to indicate which Contact Role to assign to the Related Contact in the Relationship record. Let's try out an example. Some data values are from the examples above, but feel free to enter your own. 1. Find or create a Relationship record. 2. On the Relationship record, choose a value for **Related Opportunity Contact Role**. Let's use "Solicitor" for our example. 3. We're also using "Solicitor" in the **Type** field, but you can use whatever value is appropriate (Friend, Family, Employer, etc). Type is only used to describe the nature of the relationship between the two people, and has no bearing on how automated soft credits work. 4. Click **Save**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Set only one Related Opportunity Contact Role on a Relationship for two Contacts. If you have more than one Relationship record for the same Contacts, NPSP will use the most recently created Relationship record. ![Relationship record with Solicitor Related Opportunity Contact Role](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/relationship-solicitor.png) 5. Click the **Contact** on the Relationship, in this example, Rashaad Davis. 6. Click the **New Donation** button. 7. Enter these values: 1. **Amount** = $100. 2. **Close Date** = Today. 3. **Stage** = Posted (Closed/Won). 8. Click **Save**. 9. You may need to click the new Opportunity's name in the confirmation message to view the record. ![New Opportunity confirmation message](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/relationship-opp-confirmation.png) On the Opportunity record, you should see Contact Roles for both the Primary Donor and the Related Contact. You may also see Household Member credits if there are other Contacts in the donor's Household. ![Opportunity detail with Solicitor soft credit highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/relationship-opp-detail.png) Let's review how automated soft credits for Relationships work. When you create an Opportunity for the Contact (**1**), NPSP creates a soft credit role for the Related Contact (**2**). ![Relationship record with Contact numbered 1, and Related Contact numbered 2](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/numbered-relationship-record.png) If you create an Opportunity for the person in the Related Contact field of the Relationship record, NPSP **will not** create a soft credit role for the person in the Contact field. If you want it to work that way, set a Related Opportunity Contact Role for the reciprocal relationship. If you want NPSP to stop generating automated soft credits for a Relationship, remove the value in the Related Opportunity Contact Role field on the Relationship record and leave it blank. The Status field does not affect automated soft credits; they continue to function regardless of Status field value. ## Create Automated Soft Credits for Affiliations NPSP can automatically create soft credits for Organizational donations based on Affiliation records. NPSP can automatically create soft credits for Organizational donations based on Affiliation records. For example, perhaps the members of a family foundation want to receive a soft credit for every donation made by their family foundation. Use the **Related Opportunity Contact Role** field to indicate which Contact Role to assign to the Contact on the Affiliation record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note NPSP includes only **active** Opportunity Contact Roles for Affiliation-based automated soft credits. Let's try out an example. Some data values are from the examples above, but feel free to enter your own. 1. Find or create an Affiliation. 2. On the Affiliation record, choose a value for **Related Opportunity Contact Role**. Let's use "Soft Credit" for our example. 3. Click **Save**. 4. Optional: Find or create a few more Affiliations with the same Organization and choose "Soft Credit" for each **Related Opportunity Contact Role** field. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Set only one Related Opportunity Contact Role on an Affiliation for a given Account and Contact. If you have more than one Affiliation record for the same Account and Contact, NPSP will use the most recently created Affiliation record. ![Affiliation detail](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/affiliation-detail.png) 5. Click the **Organization** on the Affiliation, in this example, Murray Family Foundation. 6. Click the **New Donation** button. 7. Enter these values: 1. **Amount** = $1000. 2. **Close Date** = Today. 3. **Stage** = Posted (Closed/Won). Note: Our example used a Closed/Won Opportunity Stage, but NPSP will create a soft credit role for any Opportunity Stage. 8. Click **Save**. 9. You may need to click the new Opportunity's name in the confirmation message to view the record. ![New Opportunity confirmation message](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/affiliation-opp-confimation.png) On the Opportunity record, you should see a soft credit Contact Role for each Contact from the Affiliation record or records you set a Related Opportunity Contact Role for. ![Opportunity detail page with soft credit roles highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/affiliation-opp-detail.png) If you want NPSP to stop generating automated soft credits for an Affiliation, remove the value in the Related Opportunity Contact Role field on the Affiliation record and leave it blank. The Status field does not affect automated soft credits; they continue to function regardless of Status field value. ## Calculate Soft Credit Totals The Soft Credit Totals update when the nightly batch jobs run. If you need to recalculate soft credits outside of the nightly batch, your administrator can manually recalculate the entire batch or for a single Account or Contact. Recalculating rollups updates the Opportunity rollup fields (including the soft credit rollups) on your Contact, Account, and Household records. Learn more in [Manually Recalculate Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build."). # Automatic Recurring Donations Naming NPSP provides an automatic naming convention for Recurring Donations. Learn how to customize it. By default, NPSP names your Recurring Donations automatically. Here's how it works: 1. Go to the Recurring Donations tab and click **New**. 2. Fill out the required fields (Amount, Donor Type, Recurring Period, etc.). 3. Click **Save**. Once you save the record, NPSP creates the Recurring Donation Name using this format: _\[DonorName\] \[Amount\] - Recurring_ _\[DonorName\]_ is Contact Name when the Donor Type is Contact, or the Account Name when the Donor Type is Account and the Account is an Organizational Account. Let's look at some examples. - If you enter a new $100 Recurring Donation for Barbara Levy, the name becomes: - Barbara Levy $100 - Recurring - If you enter a new $500 Recurring Donation for Universal Containers, the name becomes: - Universal Containers $500 - Recurring ## Change Automatic Naming Format A system administrator can change the default naming format in NPSP Settings. Here's how: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations**. 3. Find **Recurring Donation Name Format** and select your desired format. 4. Click **Save**. ## Disable Automatic Naming If you have your own naming convention that you'd rather use, you can disable Automatic Recurring Donation Naming. When you disable naming, users will see the Recurring Donation Name field in the record entry and edit screens. 1. Go to **NPSP Settings** | **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations**. 2. Find **Recurring Donation Name Format** and select Disable Auto Naming. 3. Click **Save**. # Automatic Resource Assignment for Appointments Configure appointment assignments to efficiently manage your service resources.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
You can choose how resources in a success team are assigned to appointments. With automatic assignments and resource utilization policies, you can efficiently manage your service resources. The resource assignment type for a success team determines the schedule appointment workflow on the learner portal: | Success Team Resource Assignment Type | Schedule Appointment Workflow | | --- | --- | | Manual | Learners must select an advisor. | | Automatic | Learners can't choose the advisor. The advisor is assigned automatically based on availability and the defined scheduling policy. If no policy is in effect, the appointment distribution is random. | | Both (manual and automatic) | Learners can choose to select an advisor or be assigned one. | - **[Set Up Your Org for Automatic Resource Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org_for_automatic_resource_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your org so service resources can be automatically assigned to appointments. - **[Create a Success Team with Automatic Resource Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_success_team_with_automatic_resource_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a success team that allows automatic assignment of appointment resources. # Automatically Generate and Maintain Household Names and Greetings in Education Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time. ### Required Editions | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available in: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** editions of Nonprofit Cloud with the Automatic Household Creation and Naming add-on |
User Permissions Needed  
To set up automatic household naming:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you set up automatic household naming, complete these tasks: - [Turn on Group Membership.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_set_up.htm&language=en_US) - In Setup, under Account Settings, select **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**. - Clone and activate the Recalculate Household Names on Update record-triggered flow. If your custom naming format includes fields other than LastName, FirstName, and Salutation, add those fields to the entry criteria of the cloned flow. - Clone and activate the Recalculate Household Names on Delete record-triggered flow. If you have an active household name template, household naming generates a name for each household account from the template's naming pattern. Household Naming looks for changes to household membership and to member details, such as first name, last name, and salutation, and then recalculates the name. You can map and activate only one template to each household account destination field at a time. You can have multiple active naming and greeting templates. These examples show how common naming formats appear for a household with members Sam Smith and Sally Smith. Name Format Examples | Naming Format | Sample Household Name | | --- | --- | | {LastName} Household | Smith Household | | {each:FirstName} {LastName} Household | Sam and Sally Smith Household | | {LastName} Family | Smith Family | | {each:FirstName} {LastName} Family | Sam and Sally Smith Family | 1. In Setup, enter Household in the Quick Find box, and under Group Membership, select **Household Naming Settings**. 2. Turn on **Automatic Household Naming**. 3. To create a household naming template, click **New Template**. 4. Enter a name for the household template. 5. Select the **Household Account Destination Field API Name** to define the destination of the household template. Map a template to the Account Name field for automatic household naming. For greetings, map the template to any custom text field. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Enable Field History Tracking for the Account object and track the fields that are destinations. Field History Tracking provides an audit trail to review or reverse automatic naming changes. For more information, see [Track Object Field History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.tracking_field_history_for_standard_objects.htm&language=en_US). 6. To use this template for household naming or greetings, select **Active**. Only one naming template per household account destination field can be active at a time. Multiple templates for household greetings mapped to custom fields can be active as well. 7. Format the household name by using one of these methods. - From the Naming Pattern Formula, select a pre-defined format for the household name. - From the Naming Pattern Formula, select **Create Custom Format** and enter your own format in the formula editor. 8. If you’re formatting a custom household name: 1. From the **Person Account Field**, select the field to use in the greeting. The Merge Field Value field populates with the API name of the selected field. 2. From the **Merge Field Value**, copy the field API name and paste it into the free text area. 3. In the free text area, add text to complete the household greeting. For example, Dear {each:Name}. 4. To check that the syntax of your naming pattern is valid, click **Check Syntax**. 5. To see how your custom name format renders, click **Generate Preview**. 9. In **Name Conjunction**, enter the text that joins pairs of names for the household. If there are three or more names, commas separate the names and the name conjunction joins the last two. The default value is **and**. For example, “John & Jane”, or “John and Jane”, or “John, Jane and Jacob” or “John, Jane & Jacob”. 10. In **Maximum Member Count**, enter the maximum number of members to include in a household name. 11. To replace household members beyond the maximum member count with a group term, enter the term in **Member Limit Suffix**. The default value is **Friends**. For example, for a three-person household with a maximum member count of two, the household name is John and Jane Smith without the suffix. With the suffix, the greeting is John and Jane Smith and Friends. 12. To exclude household members from automatic household naming, complete the exclusion formula for those members and check the formula syntax before you save the template. For example, exclude an AccountContactRelation by using CONTAINS({AccountContactRelation.Roles}, "Child"). Or, exclude a household member by using {Account.IsTemporaryHouseholdMember\_\_pc} == TRUE 13. Save your changes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important If your formulas reference fields other than FirstName, LastName, and Salutation, add them to the entry criteria for the Recalculate Household Names on Update cloned flow. Household Naming uses the active naming template to name new household accounts and to recalculate names when household membership or member details change. If you remove the last member of a household, Household Naming sets the household name to Anonymous Household. - **[Considerations for Household Naming and Greetings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_household_naming_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Household Naming evaluates and orders household members. Review the ways to exclude members or opt an entire household out of updates. Find out which field access users need, and review other considerations. # Automatically Generate and Maintain Household Names and Greetings in Nonprofit Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time. ### Required Editions | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available in: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** editions of Nonprofit Cloud with the Automatic Household Creation and Naming add-on |
User Permissions Needed  
To set up automatic household naming:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Before you set up automatic household naming, complete these tasks: - [Turn on Group Membership.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_set_up.htm&language=en_US) - In Setup, under Account Settings, select **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**. - Clone and activate the Recalculate Household Names on Update record-triggered flow. If your custom naming format includes fields other than LastName, FirstName, and Salutation, add those fields to the entry criteria of the cloned flow. - Clone and activate the Recalculate Household Names on Delete record-triggered flow. If you have an active household name template, household naming generates a name for each household account from the template's naming pattern. Household Naming looks for changes to household membership and to member details, such as first name, last name, and salutation, and then recalculates the name. You can map and activate only one template to each household account destination field at a time. You can have multiple active naming and greeting templates. These examples show how common naming formats appear for a household with members Sam Smith and Sally Smith. Name Format Examples | Naming Format | Sample Household Name | | --- | --- | | {LastName} Household | Smith Household | | {each:FirstName} {LastName} Household | Sam and Sally Smith Household | | {LastName} Family | Smith Family | | {each:FirstName} {LastName} Family | Sam and Sally Smith Family | 1. In Setup, enter Household in the Quick Find box, and under Group Membership, select **Household Naming Settings**. 2. Turn on **Automatic Household Naming**. 3. To create a household naming template, click **New Template**. 4. Enter a name for the household template. 5. Select the **Household Account Destination Field API Name** to define the destination of the household template. Map a template to the Account Name field for automatic household naming. For greetings, map the template to any custom text field. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Enable Field History Tracking for the Account object and track the fields that are destinations. Field History Tracking provides an audit trail to review or reverse automatic naming changes. For more information, see [Track Object Field History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.tracking_field_history_for_standard_objects.htm&language=en_US). 6. To use this template for household naming or greetings, select **Active**. Only one naming template per household account destination field can be active at a time. Multiple templates for household greetings mapped to custom fields can be active as well. 7. Format the household name by using one of these methods. - From the Naming Pattern Formula, select a pre-defined format for the household name. - From the Naming Pattern Formula, select **Create Custom Format** and enter your own format in the formula editor. 8. If you’re formatting a custom household name: 1. From the **Person Account Field**, select the field to use in the greeting. The Merge Field Value field populates with the API name of the selected field. 2. From the **Merge Field Value**, copy the field API name and paste it into the free text area. 3. In the free text area, add text to complete the household greeting. For example, Dear {each:Name}. 4. To check that the syntax of your naming pattern is valid, click **Check Syntax**. 5. To see how your custom name format renders, click **Generate Preview**. 9. In **Name Conjunction**, enter the text that joins pairs of names for the household. If there are three or more names, commas separate the names and the name conjunction joins the last two. The default value is **and**. For example, “John & Jane”, or “John and Jane”, or “John, Jane and Jacob” or “John, Jane & Jacob”. 10. In **Maximum Member Count**, enter the maximum number of members to include in a household name. 11. To replace household members beyond the maximum member count with a group term, enter the term in **Member Limit Suffix**. The default value is **Friends**. For example, for a three-person household with a maximum member count of two, the household name is John and Jane Smith without the suffix. With the suffix, the greeting is John and Jane Smith and Friends. 12. To exclude household members from automatic household naming, complete the exclusion formula for those members and check the formula syntax before you save the template. For example, exclude an AccountContactRelation by using CONTAINS({AccountContactRelation.Roles}, "Child"). Or, exclude a household member by using {Account.IsTemporaryHouseholdMember\_\_pc} == TRUE 13. Save your changes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important If your formulas reference fields other than FirstName, LastName, and Salutation, add them to the entry criteria for the Recalculate Household Names on Update cloned flow. Household Naming uses the active naming template to name new household accounts and to recalculate names when household membership or member details change. If you remove the last member of a household, Household Naming sets the household name to Anonymous Household. - **[Considerations for Household Naming and Greetings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_household_naming_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Household Naming evaluates and orders household members. Review the ways to exclude members or opt an entire household out of updates. Find out which field access users need, and review other considerations. # Back Up Your Data Before using Data Integrity, back up your data. Data Integrity can make bulk changes to data, and reverting changes needs to be done manually. Having a backup is advised. To back up your data, follow the instructions in [Export Backup Data from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. We strongly recommend using the **Schedule Export** option to set up recurring weekly or monthly backups. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_important.png) Important Exported backup data is only available for download for 48 hours. Salesforce emails you when your export data is available, but it's also a good idea to put a reminder on your calendar. # Batch Import Overview The ability to import data in batches can be very useful. Batch Data Import allows you to have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options (instead of using the default settings). In addition, if you set up and activated a batch number format, all Opportunities and Payments associated with this batch will include the batch number in the Batch Number field. Learn more in [Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches."). In these articles, we'll tell you how to set up the Batch Data Import feature, give you a sample use case, and show you how to process a batch data import, both manually and automatically using a scheduled job. These are the articles about using the Batch Data Import feature: - [Create a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "First, you need to define the configuration that will be used on only a selected set of records. To illustrate an example, we will create a batch for the upcoming event (that we mentioned earlier).") - [Create NPSP Data Import Records Connected to a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_batch_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a batch, upload your data import file to create the data import records for the batch.") - [Process an NPSP Data Import Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_batch_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to process a batch using NPSP Data Importer and what the different batch statuses mean.") - [Schedule a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_schedule_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Now that you'll be regularly uploading files, you don't want to worry about manually processing them. This is really useful for cases like the upcoming event signup example, where you have signups coming in at different times, and you want to regularly upload the new signups.") If this is your first time using NPSP Data Import Batches, take a moment to run through the instructions in [Configure NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions."). - **[Sample Use Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_import_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each time you run the NPSP Data Importer, all unprocessed records are evaluated using the default configuration settings. So, if you have records that require different matching or other configurations, you have to reset the configuration options each time and ensure only the appropriate records are ready to be imported. ## Sample Use Case Each time you run the NPSP Data Importer, all unprocessed records are evaluated using the default configuration settings. So, if you have records that require different matching or other configurations, you have to reset the configuration options each time and ensure only the appropriate records are ready to be imported. The NPSP Data Import tab works well if you're importing a CSV file with records from the same source that require the same Contact and Donation matching, and you want to process all those records right away. But now, imagine you have an event for which you're importing spreadsheets of signups on a regular basis. You want to match these records by first name, last name, and email address. You also have a different integration for which you're frequently importing opportunities that match against a specific Contact Unique ID field and you want to be sure that they always match existing Opportunities (so you're not creating duplicate records). On top of all that, it would be so helpful to automatically process those records without having to reset the configuration. It is very time consuming to have to adjust the default configuration options and process the records each time you import new records for these two very different scenarios. With the NPSP Data Import Batch object, you can create a batch for importing the signup spreadsheets with the configuration options set to match against the first name, last name, and email fields on a Contact. Then, you can create another batch for your Opportunities with the configuration options set to match against the Contact Unique ID field and Single Match Donation Matching rule, and set up the batch to process automatically using a scheduled job. Then, when you want to import records, you just have to select the right batch record for that row in your spreadsheet, and the configuration options are automatically set to the right values when that batch is processed. # Batch Job Modes for Customizable Rollups Cusomizable Rollups are calculated by a series of batch jobs. These batch jobs run in one of three modes: Non-Skew Mode, Skew Mode, or Incremental Mode. The default is Non-Skew Mode, which is the most efficient mode for orgs without large data volumes or uneven data distribution (also called data skew). Learn more about data skew on the [Salesforce Developers' Blog](https://developer.salesforce.com/blogs/engineering/2013/04/managing-lookup-skew-to-avoid-record-lock-exceptions). For orgs with data skew, NPSP automatically uses Skew Mode which runs skewed records separately so that rollup jobs can complete successfully. In orgs with large data volumes, batch jobs may time out or take more than 24 hours to process. If this is the case, NPSP automatically uses Incremental Mode. Incremental Mode only evaluates Account and Contact records with Opportunities that were modified within a certain timeframe. It is currently only available for Contact Hard Credit and Account Hard Credit Non-Skew batch jobs. Read on to learn more about Skew Mode, Incremental Mode, and how they work with NPSP batch jobs. - **[Skew Mode](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP uses Skew Mode jobs when a single record has many records (more than 250 by default) related to it. - **[Incremental Mode](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In an effort to mitigate issues in large data volume orgs, we added Incremental Mode. Incremental processing helps to reduce overall data within the Customizable Rollups batch jobs and also reduce the occurrence of a long-running batch job. - **[Customizable Rollups Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This is a complete list of each Customizable Rollup job along with its related Apex Classes, associated NPSP Settings, and the fields it evaluates during processing. There's also a high level description of how each job works behind the scenes. ## Skew Mode NPSP uses Skew Mode jobs when a single record has many records (more than 250 by default) related to it. You can also select **Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode** on specific Accounts or Contacts with more than 250 related records to overcome CPU timeouts or heap size limits. Without Skew jobs, rollup calculations might fail. Customizable Rollups use Skew jobs to process these skewed records separately so that rollup jobs can complete successfully. Additionally, to keep processing within Salesforce Governor Limits, Skew Mode jobs use a Skew Mode Dispatcher that breaks the rollups into smaller groups of records (the default is 300). ### Skew Mode Settings You can turn on Skew Mode for individual Accounts or Contacts with the Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode field or find the Skew Mode settings in NPSP Settings, under **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Process Settings**. - **Skew Mode Threshold**—Skew mode is used when an Account, Contact, GAU, or Recurring Donation record has this number of related Opportunities. - **Contact Skew Mode Batch Size**—The number of related records, sorted by ContactId, that the batch job processes at one time. - **Account Skew Mode Batch Size**—The number of related records, sorted by AccountId, that the batch job processes at one time. - **Skew Mode Dispatcher Size**—The number of Accounts, Contacts, or GAUs that the batch job queries and rolls up data for at one time. ## Incremental Mode In an effort to mitigate issues in large data volume orgs, we added Incremental Mode. Incremental processing helps to reduce overall data within the Customizable Rollups batch jobs and also reduce the occurrence of a long-running batch job. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Incremental mode is currently only available for Recurring Donation, Contact Hard Credit, and Account Hard Credit Non-Skew batch jobs. Incremental mode only affects our nightly scheduled jobs. The Rollup Donations Batch (in NPSP Settings, under Bulk Data Processes) still calculates rollups for all records. If you use an override (especially one with a low value), we recommend that you run the Rollup Donations Batch on a periodic and ongoing basis to ensure your data is accurate. Incremental Mode only evaluates Account and Contact records with Opportunities that were modified within a certain timeframe. By default, this timeframe is the value of the largest N-Day rollup. NPSP's largest N-Day rollup by default is 2 years, but you can change it or create your own N-Day rollups. Let's look at an example of how this works. The Contact Hard Credit job queries for Contacts listed in the Primary Contact field of an Opportunity that has been modified within the last two years (or whatever the largest N-Day timeframe is) and then processes all Contact Hard Credit rollups. Incremental Mode is useful for: - Orgs that have not recently imported Opportunities (Last Modified Date is over 2 years ago, by default). - Orgs with smaller N-Day Rollups (N-Day Rollups = rolling totals — i.e. Total Gifts in Last 90 days, etc.). - **[Enable Incremental Mode](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Incremental mode is enabled and ready for use in orgs created from a Trial starting with NPSP version 3.155 (May 2019). If your org existed before this date and you have large data volumes, you can enable it. - **[Override the N-Day Value](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can override the default N-Day values if needed. ### Enable Incremental Mode Incremental mode is enabled and ready for use in orgs created from a Trial starting with NPSP version 3.155 (May 2019). If your org existed before this date and you have large data volumes, you can enable it. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, then click **Custom Settings**. 3. In the row for Customizable Rollup Settings, click **Manage**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Select these settings: - **Incremental Contact Hard Credit Non-Skew**—When checked, the Contact Hard Credit (Non-Skew) nightly job limits the number of Contacts selected for recalculation by including only records with at least one recently updated Opportunity. - **Incremental Account Hard Credit Non-Skew**—When checked, the Account Hard Credit (Non-Skew) nightly job limits the number of Accounts selected for recalculation by including only records with at least one recently updated Opportunity. - **Limit Recalculated Recurring Donations**—When checked, the Recurring Donation (Non-Skew) nightly job limits the number of recurring donations that are recalculated by including only records with at least one recently updated Opportunity. 6. Save the settings. ### Override the N-Day Value You can override the default N-Day values if needed. For example, let's say you want to filter on Opportunities with Close Dates in the last 90 days, you would enter CloseDate in the Incremental: Last N Days Field Override field and 90 in the Incremental: Last N Days Value Override field. Or if you were migrating Opportunities from a legacy system and wanted to include the last modified date of Opportunities from a custom field (called Legacy\_System\_Modified\_Date\_\_c) in the last 180 days, you would enter Legacy\_System\_Modified\_Date\_\_c in the Incremental: Last N Days Field Override field and 180 in the Incremental: Last N Days Value Override field. Be sure to test thoroughly after making changes, as N-Day rollups may be incorrect if these fields aren't set properly. For example, if you have a rollup for Total Gifts in Last 45 Days, but you override the defaults to process Accounts/Contacts with Opportunities modified in the last 30 days, the Total Gifts in Last 45 Days rollup could be incorrect since data may have dropped off. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, then click **Custom Settings**. 3. In the row for Customizable Rollup Settings, click **Manage**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To limit the Recurring Donation (non-Skew) nightly scheduled job: 1. Select **Limit Recalculated Recurring Donations**. 2. In **RD Modified in Last Number of Days**, enter the number of days after being modified that an Opportunity should be included in the Recurring Donation Rollup batch job. For example, only include Opportunities that have been modified within the last 31 days. 6. To limit all other nightly scheduled jobs, enter values in these fields: - **Incremental: Last N Days Field Override**—Overrides the field used to filter related Opportunities to determine which Accounts and Contacts are recalculated during a nightly scheduled job. The value must be a Date field on the Opportunity object. - **Incremental: Last N Days Value Override**—Overrides the calculated number of days used to filter related Opportunities to determine which Accounts and Contacts are recalculated during a nightly scheduled job. The value must be a number. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If both **Incremental: Last N Days Field Override** and **Incremental: Last N Days Value Override** are populated, the field specified in **Incremental: Last N Days Field Override** is used to test the value in that field against the numerical range specified by **Incremental: Last N Days Field Override**. 7. Save the settings. ## Customizable Rollups Jobs This is a complete list of each Customizable Rollup job along with its related Apex Classes, associated NPSP Settings, and the fields it evaluates during processing. There's also a high level description of how each job works behind the scenes. This information is intended for use by Developers and Partners. Scheduled Job: NPSP 01A - Customizable Rollups - Account Hard Credit
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_Account_BATCH On Account: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Account.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Account Hard Credit Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold
**How It Works:** Query for all Accounts with Opportunities WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = false. Process Account rollups 200 records at a time and query for relevant data. Scheduled Job: NPSP 01B - Customizable Rollups - Account Hard Credit Skew
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_AccountSkew_BATCH CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH On Account: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Account.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Account Skew Mode Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size
**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for Accounts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizeRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = true. Query for Opportunities related to those Accounts, 1,000 at a time, and process rollups until all Opportunities are looped through for those Account Batches. Then, query for the next set of Accounts and their Opportunities, and repeat. Scheduled Job: NPSP 02A - Customizable Rollups - Contact Hard Credit
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_Contact_BATCH On Contact: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Contact.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Contact Hard Credit Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold
**How it Works:** Query for all Contacts that are in the Primary Contact field (npsp\_\_Primary\_Contact\_\_c) of an Opportunity WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = false. Process Contact rollups 200 records at a time and query for relevant data. If **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact** is unchecked in NPSP Settings, additionally filter for Opportunity Account's WHERE npe01\_\_SYSTEMIsIndividual\_\_c = True. Scheduled Job: NPSP 02B - Customizable Rollups - Contact Hard Credit Skew
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings

CRLP_ContactSkew_BATCH

CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH

 On Contact: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Contact.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Contact Skew Mode Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size

**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for Contacts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = true. Query for Opportunities related to those Contacts (in the Primary Contact field), 1,000 at a time, and process rollups until all Opportunities are looped through for those Contact batches. Then query for the next set of Contacts and their Opportunities, and repeat. Note that if **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role** is unchecked in NPSP Settings, additionally filter on Opportunities WHERE npe01\_\_SYSTEMIsIndividual\_\_c = TRUE. Scheduled Job: NPSP 03A - Customizable Rollups - Account-level Contact Soft Credit
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_Account_SoftCredit_BATCH On Account: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Account.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Contact Soft Credit to Acct Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold
**How it Works:** Query for all Accounts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = false. Process Account rollups 200 records at a time by querying for Opportunity Contact Roles where the Contact's Account ID is in the batch of Account IDs and IsPrimary = false. If **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role** is unchecked in NPSP Settings, also add an OR filter for the Opportunity Account's npe01\_\_SYSTEMIsIndividual\_\_c = false. When querying for OCRs, this job will also query for relevant Partial Soft Credit records. Scheduled Job: NPSP 03B - Customizable Rollups - Account Soft Credit
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_Account_AccSoftCredit_BATCH On Account: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Account.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Account Soft Credit Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold
**How it Works:** Query for all Accounts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = false. Process Account rollups 200 records at a time by querying for/processing Account Soft Credit records Where the Account ID is in the batch of Account IDs. Scheduled Job: NPSP 03C - Customizable Rollups - Account-level Contact Soft Credit Skew
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings

CRLP_AccountSkew_SoftCredit_BATCH

CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH

 On Account: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Account.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Account Skew Mode Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size

**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for Accounts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = true. Query for Opportunity Contact Roles related to those Contacts' Account IDs, 1,000 at a time, and process rollups until all Opportunity Contact Roles are looped through for those Account batches. Then query for the next set of Accounts and their Opportunity Contact Roles, and repeat. Note that if **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role** is unchecked in NPSP Settings, additionally filter on Opportunities WHERE npe01\_\_SYSTEMIsIndividual\_\_c = false OR IsPrimary = false. (Otherwise, we just filter on IsPrimary = false). When querying for OCRs, this job will also query for relevant Partial Soft Credit records. Scheduled Job: NPSP 03D - Customizable Rollups - Account Soft Credit Skew
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings

CRLP_AccountSkew_AccSoftCredit_BATCH

CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH

On Account: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Account.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Account Skew Mode Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size

**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for Accounts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = true. Query for Account Soft Credits related to those Account IDs, 1,000 at a time, and process rollups until all Account Soft Credits are looped through for those Account batches. Then query for the next set of Accounts and their Account Soft Credits, and repeat. Scheduled Job: NPSP 04A - Customizable Rollups - Contact Soft Credit
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_Contact_SoftCredit_BATCH On Contact: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Contact.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Contact Soft Credit Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold
**How it Works:** Query for all Contacts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode\_\_c = false and that are in the Contact ID of an OCR. Process Contact rollups 200 records at a time by querying for Opportunity Contact Roles where the Contact ID is in the batch of Contact IDs. Note that if **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role** is unchecked in NPSP Settings, additionally filter on Opportunities WHERE npe01\_\_SYSTEMIsIndividual\_\_c = false OR IsPrimary = false. (Otherwise, we just filter on IsPrimary = false). When querying for OCRs, this job will also query for relevant Partial Soft Credit records. Scheduled Job: NPSP 04B - Customizable Rollups - Contact Soft Credit Skew
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings

CRLP_ContactSkew_SoftCredit_BATCH

CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH

 On Contact: Customizable Rollups: Force Skew Mode (Contact.npsp__CustomizableRollups_UseSkewMode__c)

Contact Skew Mode Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size

**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for Contacts WHERE npsp\_\_CustomizableRollups\_UseSkewMode = true. Query for Opportunity Contact Roles related to those Contacts IDs, 1,000 at a time, and process rollups until all Opportunity Contact Roles are looped through for those Contact batches. Then query for the next set of Contacts and their Opportunity Contact Roles, and repeat. Note that if **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role** is unchecked in NPSP Settings, additionally filter on Opportunities' Accounts WHERE npe01\_\_SYSTEMIsIndividual\_\_c = false OR IsPrimary = false. (Otherwise, we just filter on IsPrimary = false). When querying for OCRs, this job will also query for relevant Partial Soft Credit records. Scheduled Job: NPSP 05 - Customizable Rollups - General Accounting Units
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings

CRLP_GAU_BATCH

CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH

 N/A

GAU Batch Size

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size
**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for General Accounting Units. Query for GAU Allocations related to those General Accounting Units, 1,000 at a time, and process rollups until all GAU Allocations are looped through for those General Accounting Unit batches. Then query for the next set of General Accounting Units and their GAU Allocations, and repeat. Scheduled Job: NPSP 06A - Customizable Rollups - Recurring Donations
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings
CRLP_RD_BATCH Total Paid Installments (npe03__Total_Paid_Installments__c)

Recurring Donation Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Limit Recalculated Recurring Donations

RD Modified in Last Number of Days
**How it Works:** Query for all Recurring Donations that are in the Recurring Donation field of an Opportunity WHERE (npe03\_\_Total\_Paid\_Installments\_\_c < 250 OR npe03\_\_Total\_Paid\_Installments\_\_c = null) ; Process Recurring Donation rollups 50 records at a time and query for relevant data. Use the Limit Recalculated Recurring Donations and RD Modified in Last Number of Days settings to limit the number of recurring donations that are recalculated based on the recency of the donation. Scheduled Job: NPSP 06B - Customizable Rollups - Recurring Donations Skew
Batch Job Class Key Field Related Settings

CRLP_RDSkew_BATCH

CRLP_SkewDispatcher_BATCH

 Total Paid Installments (npe03__Total_Paid_Installments__c)

Recurring Donation Batch Size

Skew Mode Threshold

Skew Mode Dispatcher Batch Size

**How it Works:** In batches of 300, use the Skew Dispatcher to query for Recurring Donations WHERE npe03\_\_Total\_Paid\_Installments\_\_c >= 250. Query for Opportunities related to those Recurring Donations, 50 at a time, and process rollups until all Opportunities are looped through for those Recurring Donation batches. Then query for the next set of Recurring Donations and their Opportunities, and repeat. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You should never modify, deactivate, or delete the key fields (or the rollups that include them) used by the Customizable Rollups jobs. Modifying these fields can cause issues in your org, such as hitting limits because too many records are being processed in a Non-Skew mode or rollups not updating. # Before You Install Data Integrity Learn about prerequisites to install Data Integrity and what's included in the managed package. - **[Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_before_you_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure you fulfill these requirements before you install Data Integrity. - **[What's Installed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_before_you_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install the Data Integrity manage package you get access to these tools and features. ## Prerequisites Make sure you fulfill these requirements before you install Data Integrity. You must have: - A Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited edition org with a Sales Cloud or Sales and Service Cloud license, and NPSP version 3.175 or later installed. - My Domain enabled and deployed in your org. - A license for **SFDO Insights Data Integrity** with a current start date. You can install Data Integrity if the start date is in the future, but you won't be able to use the app until the date that the license is active. Conversely, if your license expires you'll receive an error message and jobs will not run. - A **SFDO Insights Data Integrity Addon Contacts** license for each additional 10,000 Contacts over the first set of 10,000 records. ## What's Installed When you install the Data Integrity manage package you get access to these tools and features. - Address standardization updates to ensure addresses meet global standards. - An active Matching Rule named Insights Platform Contact Matching Rule, and access to Duplicate Jobs to find duplicate Contacts. - National Change of Address (NCOA) updates to keep up with constituents who register a forwarding address. You'll need a Melissa Data SmartMover license for constituents in the U.S. and Canada, and a Data8 license for those in the UK. The Data Integrity application has these tabs: - Get Started—Get quick access to set up an NCOA provider, schedule address standardization and NCOA updates, set up Matching Rules, and see and merge duplicates. - Address Updates—Schedule one-time and recurring address standardization and NCOA updates. - Settings—Set up an NCOA provider, and delete or export data for data compliance purposes. - Contact Merge—See and merge duplicate Contacts. # Before You Install Einstein for Nonprofits Learn about product prerequisites and other helpful information prior to installing Einstein for Nonprofits. ## Prerequisites Before you install Einstein for Nonprofits, make sure you have: ​Reach out to your Account Executive if you do not have these licenses. You can also access [your accounts](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/)​ to easily manage your subscriptions directly in Salesforce. - Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition, with a Sales Cloud or Sales and Service Cloud license. - The latest version of [Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP)](https://install.salesforce.org/products/npsp/latest/install) installed. - The Salesforce for Nonprofits product with a current start date. - Einstein Prediction Builder (EFN) Basic Edition license. Next complete these prerequisites: 1. [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.domain_name_setup.htm&type=5) enabled and deployed for your org. 2. Salesforce [Data Privacy and Protection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) enabled. This setting is enabled by default for your org. 3. [NPSP Enhanced Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm) installed and configured, in case you have an existing org without this feature. 4. [Einstein Prediction Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_setup.htm&type=5) enabled for your org. ## What’s Installed When you install the Einstein for Nonprofits managed package, you get: - The Einstein Prediction Builder managed package to help generate custom metrics for your org. - Backup Models that provide metrics while your data grows to meet the data threshold to generate predictive insights. - The option to display Predictive Insights directly on Contact cards for constituents. The Einstein for Nonprofits app has these tabs: - **Get Started**: Get quick access to set up Einstein for Nonprofits and generate predictive insights using Einstein Prediction Builder. - **Backup Models**: Enable and schedule Backup Models to obtain the percent probability of predictive insights for future donations. # Behavior Involvement Behavior Involvement lets you associate individuals with a behavior event that's tracked as a Case. - **[Sample Uses for Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understanding a student or faculty member's role in a behavior event can help you develop appropriate responses. The Behavior Involvement object can help you track behavior events. - **[Configure Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Behavior Involvement object up to date. - **[Create a Behavior Involvement Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create a behavior involvement record in Education Data Architecture. ## Sample Uses for Behavior Involvement Understanding a student or faculty member's role in a behavior event can help you develop appropriate responses. The Behavior Involvement object can help you track behavior events. - University—Track involvement of a student who might be the victim of a theft, a roommate who might be a perpetrator of the theft, and a Resident Advisor who might be a witness or reporter of the theft. - K-12—Track involvement of a student who might be the victim of a bullying incident, another student who might be the perpetrator, and a faculty member who might be a witness or reporter of the incident. - Any educational institution—Track the frequency of a certain person’s involvement in behavior events or the frequency of certain types of events at your institution. ## Configure Behavior Involvement Keep the Behavior Involvement object up to date. ### Keep Up with Behavior Involvement Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.83
## Create a Behavior Involvement Record Use these steps to create a behavior involvement record in Education Data Architecture. Before you create a Behavior Involvement record, first create a Case record. See [Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_case.htm) . 1. From the Case record for this event, click **New** in the Behavior Involvement related list. 2. Enter a Contact name and the person's Role in the event. Don’t change the Case Number. 3. Click **Save & New** to create a Behavior Involvement record for each person involved in the incident, or click **Save** after you've entered the last person involved. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Behavior Response records to track post-incident actions for the people involved. See [Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_response.htm) . # Behavior Involvement Behavior Involvement lets you associate individuals with a behavior event that's tracked as a Case. - **[Sample Uses for Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understanding a student or faculty member's role in a behavior event can help you develop appropriate responses. The Behavior Involvement object can help you track behavior events. - **[Configure Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Behavior Involvement object up to date. - **[Create a Behavior Involvement Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create a behavior involvement record in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Behavior Involvement Understanding a student or faculty member's role in a behavior event can help you develop appropriate responses. The Behavior Involvement object can help you track behavior events. - University—Track involvement of a student who might be the victim of a theft, a roommate who might be a perpetrator of the theft, and a Resident Advisor who might be a witness or reporter of the theft. - K-12—Track involvement of a student who might be the victim of a bullying incident, another student who might be the perpetrator, and a faculty member who might be a witness or reporter of the incident. - Any educational institution—Track the frequency of a certain person’s involvement in behavior events or the frequency of certain types of events at your institution. ## Configure Behavior Involvement Keep the Behavior Involvement object up to date. ### Keep Up with Behavior Involvement Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.14 Page Layouts: Create a K12 Kit Positive Behavior Involvement Layout by cloning the existing K12 Kit Behavior Involvement Layout. The sections and fields used are the same. Assign the new layout to the appropriate user profiles, such as System Administrator.

Record Types:

  1. Create record types for Positive Behavior Involvement and Incident Involvement.

  2. Assign the K12 Kit Positive Behavior Involvement Layout to the Positive Behavior Involvement record type.

  3. Assign the K12 Kit Behavior Involvement Layout to the Incident Involvement record type.

See Migrate Behavior Involvement and Behavior Response Data to Use Record Types.
 

Picklist Values: Create a new picklist value and add it to the Role field for the Positive Behavior Involvement record type.

  1. From Setup, click the Object Manager tab.

  2. In the list of objects, click Behavior Involvement.

  3. Click Fields & Relationships.

  4. Click Role.

  5. In Values, click New.

  6. Type Participant.

  7. Select Positive Behavior Involvement. 

  8. Click Save.

  9. View the available values for the Positive Behavior Involvement record type and remove the Perpetrator and Victim values.

View the available picklist values for the Role field for the Incident Involvement record type and ensure that all available values except Participant are selected.
Compact Layouts: Add the Record Type field to the K12 Behavior Involvement Compact Layout.
Search Layouts: Add the Record Type field to the K12 Behavior Involvement Compact Layout.

List Views: Create a K12 Kit All Positive Behaviors list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All behavior involvements

  • Matching these filters: Record Type equals Positive Behavior Involvement

  • Select Fields to Display: Behavior Involvement Name, Contact, Role, Description, Case

Create a K12 Kit All Incident Involvements list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All incident involvements

  • Matching these filters: Record Type equals Incident Involvement

  • Select Fields to Display: Behavior Involvement Name, Contact, Role, Description, Case

## Create a Behavior Involvement Record Use these steps to create a behavior involvement record in K-12 Architecture Kit. Before you create a Behavior Involvement record, first create a Case record. See [Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_case.htm). 1. From the Case record for this event, click **New** in the Behavior Involvement related list. 2. Enter a Contact name and the person's Role in the event. Don’t change the Case Number. 3. Click **Save & New** to create a Behavior Involvement record for each person involved in the incident, or click **Save** after you've entered the last person involved. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Behavior Response records to track post-incident actions for the people involved. See [Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_response.htm). # Behavior Response Behavior Response helps you track corrective actions and other responses to behavior events. - **[Sample Uses for Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tracking responses to specific Behavior Involvements, and their statuses, helps ensure that reported behavior events are addressed. - **[Configure Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create a Behavior Response Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a behavior response record from a behavior involvement record. ## Sample Uses for Behavior Response Tracking responses to specific Behavior Involvements, and their statuses, helps ensure that reported behavior events are addressed. - University—Track the referral of an incident involving a student to authorities for a state offense, like a car accident on campus. - K-12—Track the probation period for a student whose action, for example bullying, goes against the school’s code of conduct. - Any educational institution—Track the number of a certain type of response (for example, expulsions or probations) or the number of responses that are in progress or have been completed. ## Configure Behavior Response Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.83
## Create a Behavior Response Record Create a behavior response record from a behavior involvement record. Before you create a Behavior Response record, create a Behavior Involvement record. 1. From the Behavior Involvement record for the behavior event, click **New** in the Behavior Response related list. 2. Enter the Type of response that resulted from the event. Don’t change the Behavior Involvement ID. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. 4. Click **Save**. ### See Also [Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_involvement.htm) # Behavior Response Behavior Response helps you track corrective actions and other responses to behavior events. - **[Sample Uses for Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tracking responses to specific Behavior Involvements, and their statuses, helps ensure that reported behavior events are addressed. - **[Configure Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create a Behavior Response Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a behavior response record from a behavior involvement record. ## Sample Uses for Behavior Response Tracking responses to specific Behavior Involvements, and their statuses, helps ensure that reported behavior events are addressed. - University—Track the referral of an incident involving a student to authorities for a state offense, like a car accident on campus. - K-12—Track the probation period for a student whose action, for example bullying, goes against the school’s code of conduct. - Any educational institution—Track the number of a certain type of response (for example, expulsions or probations) or the number of responses that are in progress or have been completed. ## Configure Behavior Response Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.12 Add these picklist values to the Type field on Behavior Response: Detention, Expulsion with Services, In-School Suspension, Out-of-School Suspension, Removal from Classroom.
1.14

Page layouts: Create a K12 Kit Positive Behavior Response Layout by cloning the existing K12 Kit Behavior Response Layout. The sections and fields used are the same. Assign the new layout to the appropriate user profiles, for example, System Administrator.

Record Types:

  1. Create record types for Positive Behavior Response and Incident Response.

  2. Assign the K12 Kit Positive Behavior Response Layout to the Positive Behavior Response record type.

  3. Assign the K12 Kit Behavior Response Layout to the Incident Response record type.

See Migrate Behavior Involvement and Behavior Response Data to Use Record Types.

Picklist Values: Create new picklist values and add them to the Type field for the Positive Behavior Response record type.

  1. From Setup, click the Object Manager tab.

  2. In the list of objects, click Behavior Response.

  3. Click Fields & Relationships.

  4. Click Type.

  5. In Values, click New.

  6. Type the following picklist values, each on their own line: Award and Verbal Recognition.

  7. Select Positive Behavior Response. 

  8. Click Save.

Create new picklist values and add them to the Type field for the Incident Response record type.

  1. From Setup, click the Object Manager tab.

  2. In the list of objects, click Behavior Response.

  3. Click Fields & Relationships.

  4. Click Type.

  5. In Values, click New.

  6. Type the names of fields used by your school, each on their own line. For example, Detention or Expulsion with Services.

  7. Select Incident Response. 

  8. Click Save.

Compact Layouts:

  1. Create a K12 Positive Behavior Response Compact Layout and add the Contact, Record Type, Type, and Status fields.

  2. Add the Record Type field to the K12 Behavior Response Compact Layout.
Search Layouts: Add the Record Type column to the Default Layout.

List Views: Create an All Positive Behavior Responses list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Matching these filters: Record Type equals Positive Behavior Response

  • Select Fields to Display: Behavior Response Name, Contact, Type, Description, Behavior Involvement, Start Date, End Date, Status

  • Filter by Owner: All behavior responses

Create an All Incident Responses list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All incident responses

  • Matching these filters: Record Type equals Incident Response

  • Select Fields to Display: Behavior Response Name, Contact, Type, Description, Behavior Involvement, Start Date, End Date, Status
## Create a Behavior Response Record Create a behavior response record from a behavior involvement record. Before you create a Behavior Response record, create a Behavior Involvement record. 1. From the Behavior Involvement record for the behavior event, click **New** in the Behavior Response related list. 2. Enter the Type of response that resulted from the event. Don’t change the Behavior Involvement ID. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. 4. Click **Save**. ### See Also [Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm) # Benefit Assignment Record Page for Mentoring Manage mentoring relationships on the benefit assignment record page.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When a mentee enrolls in a mentoring program, it creates a benefit assignment record. Mentoring facilitators can see related information and manage different aspects of the mentoring relationship from this record page. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important To create a benefit assignment record in the CRM, use the Benefit Assignments tab rather than the related list on the account record. ![Screenshot showing the benefit assignment record page layout for Mentoring](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_benefit_assignment_record.png) - See highlights of the benefit assignment record (1). - See the names and contact information for the enrollee (mentee) and benefit provider (mentor) (2). - See a timeline of mentoring activities related to the benefit assignment record (3). - Take action on the benefit assignment record, such as creating alerts, adding notes, creating tasks, and sending email (4). - See and work with related lists for alerts, action plans, interaction summaries, assessments, and more (5). - See activity for the benefit assignment record (6). # Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Your Dashboards Review some recommendations for working with Admissions Connect dashboards. - Keep your dashboards up to date with current data from your org. For more information, see [Keep Data Fresh](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_keep_data_fresh.htm) in Tableau Help. - Customize dashboards with formatting to enhance analysis and presentation. You can also remove filters that aren't relevant and add your own. For more information, see [Format Your Work](https://help.tableau.com/current/pro/desktop/en-us/formatting.htm) in Tableau Help. - Export Tableau data to various image file types for use in presentations or other communications. - If you need help, log a [support case with Tableau](https://www.tableau.com/support/case). # Build a Custom PMM Report Set up reports and dashboards to provide information to your users in the ways that work best for them. - **[Create Custom Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_build_cust_pmm_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom reports to see data that's important to you. Add reports to a custom dashboard to see reports at a glance. - **[Create Custom Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_build_cust_pmm_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build custom reports to see the data that's important to you. - **[Create a Dashboard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_build_cust_pmm_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add reports to your dashboard to track Program performance. ## Create Custom Reports and Dashboards Create custom reports to see data that's important to you. Add reports to a custom dashboard to see reports at a glance. ## Create Custom Reports Build custom reports to see the data that's important to you. For example, you may want to report on Program Engagements without an assigned Program Cohort, so you can fix them before a large number of enrollments come in. 1. Click the **Reports** tab. 2. Click **New Report**. 3. Click **Other Reports**, then click a report type. In this example, we click **Program Engagements**. ![Choose Report Type showing Program Engagements selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/programengagements-reporttype.png) 4. Click **Continue**. 5. Update the Show Me report filter to All program engagements, then click **Apply**. 6. Update the Application Date filter to All Time, then click **Apply**. ![Show me fields within New Program Engagements Report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/allprogramengagements-filter.png) 7. Add a new filter, Program Engagement:Program Engagement Name, with Operator value contains \[your program name\], then click **Apply**. ![Filter by Program Engagement: Program Engagement Name with Operator set to contains Job Readiness Program](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/jobreadinessprogram-filter.png) 8. Add one last filter, Program Cohort, with Operator value equals, then click **Apply**. ![Filter by Program Cohort with Operator value equals blank](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/programcohort-filter.png) 9. Click **Save and Run**. 10. Enter a name for the report. ![Results of the custom report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/reportname.png) Now you can run the report whenever you want and subscribe to receive a weekly email version. ## Create a Dashboard Add reports to your dashboard to track Program performance. To add a report to a dashboard: 1. From a report, click the dropdown arrow, then select **Add to Dashboard**. 2. Select **Add to new dashboard**. 3. Name the new dashboard. 4. Select the **Program Management Dashboard** folder. 5. Click **Add**. 6. Accept the defaults and click **Add**. ![Add a custom report to a dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/jobreadinessdashboard.png) # Build a Flow to Notify Tribute Recipients Create a quick way for users to email people about honor or memorial donations. 1. Refer to the step-by-step instructions in [Build a Donor Email Flow for Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/projects/build-a-donor-email-flow-for-nonprofit-success-pack-npsp). 2. Key information you need to adapt the acknowledgment flow for emailing tribute recipients: | Variable Needed | Opportunity Field | | --- | --- | | Indication to notify via email | Notification Preference | | Recipient's name | Notification Recipient Name | | Recipient email address | Notification Recipient Email | | Message to include in notification | Notification Message | | Name of the person being honored or memorialized | Honoree Name | | Indicate if notification was sent | Tribute Notification Status | | Set the date the notification was sent | Tribute Notification Date | Want to learn more about Salesforce Flows? Head over to Trailhead and explore [Build Flows with Flow Builder](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/build-flows-with-flow-builder). # Build Application Forms with OmniStudio Use OmniStudio with Admissions Connect to create application forms for your applicant portal. Plus, use flows to assign Action Plan Templates to applications. - **[Get Familiar with Omnistudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you start using Omnistudio, we recommend that you take some time to learn the basics. Here are some resources to get you started. - **[Get Users Started with OmniStudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are a few steps to complete before Admissions Connect users can use OmniStudio. - **[Create Applications with OmniStudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create applications with OmniStudio, download, activate, and add the sample application form to your applicant community. You can then customize the form to meet your needs. - **[Create and Update Profiles and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you have the component in your application portal, create and update the following profiles and permissions. - **[Update Permissions for the Sample Application Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the object and field permissions for the following objects. - **[Assign Action Plans Assignments to OmniStudio Applications Forms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create an application form with OmniStudio, use a flow to assign Action Plan Assignments based on the information that applicants enter into the form. We provide a sample flow to get you started. The sample flow associates the following Action Plan Templates to an Application. ## Get Familiar with Omnistudio Before you start using Omnistudio, we recommend that you take some time to learn the basics. Here are some resources to get you started. - [Trailhead: Omnistudio Basics](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/omnistudio-basics) - [OmniStudio Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_standard.htm&type=5&language=en_US) ## Get Users Started with OmniStudio There are a few steps to complete before Admissions Connect users can use OmniStudio. 1. [Install the OmniStudio package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_install_or_upgrade_the_omnistudio_package.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. [Assign OmniStudio permission sets to users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_permission_sets_licenses.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. If you installed Admissions Connect version 1.16 or earlier, complete these additional steps. 1. From the [Admissions Connect Flow Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest/sample-flows), install the Sample: Action Plan Assignments flow. 2. [Install Admissions Connect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest) in a sandbox, and then use a [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) to move the following files into production. - AdmissionsConnectApplicationForm.json - AdmissionsConnectApplicationImage.png ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note To test OmniStudio in an existing sandbox, either refresh the sandbox to add OmniStudio licenses to the sandbox, or [match production and sandbox licenses without a sandbox refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000335272&type=1). ## Create Applications with OmniStudio To create applications with OmniStudio, download, activate, and add the sample application form to your applicant community. You can then customize the form to meet your needs. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Confirm with your Salesforce admin that you have access to OmniStudio. ### Import the OmniStudio DataPack To help you get started building application forms, we provide an OmniStudio DataPack. It includes a sample application form that you can customize. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Static Resources, and then select **Static Resources**. 2. Click **AdmissionsConnectApplicationForm**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you don't see the static resource file, install it. 3. Right-click **View File** and select **Save Link As** to download the file to your computer. 4. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), search for and select **OmniStudio**. Make sure that OmniScripts is active in the navigation menu. 5. Click **Import**, select the file that you downloaded, and then click **Next**. 6. In the list of components to be imported, ignore any errors and leave everything selected. Click **Next**. 7. Review the selections and click **Next**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important We recommend that you don't activate the components until you're familiar with OmniStudio and have reviewed and modified the components. For more details, see [Activate DataPack OmniScripts and Integration Procedures](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.psc_activate_os_ip.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 8. Click **Activate Now**. 9. Deselect **Admissions Connect Application Form** (you activate the form later) and then click **Next**. 10. Click **Done**. ### Activate the OmniScript Application Form 1. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), search for and select **OmniStudio**. 2. In the Navigation Menu, make sure that **OmniScripts** is active. 3. Open the **Admissions Connect Application Form**. It might take longer to open the first time. 4. Click **Activate Version** and then click **Done**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Because the sample application form is based on an Application, you can use one of your own test applications to populate the form. In the OmniScript Designer, go to preview mode and enter an Application ID into the Context ID field. ### Add the OmniScript to Your Application Portal Activating the OmniScript creates the **Form/Application/English** Lightning Web Component. Add this component to your application portal. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **All Sites**. 2. Next to ApplicantPortalAccelerator, click **Builder**. 3. From the page selection menu, click **Application** and then select **Application Detail**. 4. From the page variation selection menu, select **Application Detail New**. 5. Remove the **Rich Content Editor** component from the page. 6. In the components menu, drag **Form/Application/English** into the Content section. 7. Select **Publish** and then click **Publish** to confirm. ## Create and Update Profiles and Permissions Now that you have the component in your application portal, create and update the following profiles and permissions. ### Create a Profile for OmniScript Digital Experience Users 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Customer Community Plus User**. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. In the Name field, enter Digital Experience (Community). 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you get an error stating that this name already exists, you can move to the next section without saving. ### Update User Profiles After you create the Digital Experience (Community) profile, assign the profile to users with Customer Community Plus licenses. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **All Users**. 2. Click a user. 3. Click **Edit** and then change Profile to **Digital Experience (Community)**. 4. Save your changes. ### Update the Digital Experiences Sharing Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, next to Applicant Portal Accelerator Sharing Set, click **Edit**. 3. Under Select Profiles, add **Digital Experience (Community)** to Selected Profiles. 4. Save your changes. ### Update System Permissions 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **System Permissions** and then click **Edit**. 4. Select **Enables consumers and partners to execute OmniScripts, DRs, Cards through a Community or off platform**. 5. Save your changes. ## Update Permissions for the Sample Application Form Update the object and field permissions for the following objects. ### Update Contact Languages Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Contact Languages** and then click **Edit**. 5. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Save your changes. ### Update Contacts Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Contacts** and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Field Permissions, select **Edit** for these fields: - Date Deceased - Deceased - Former Last Name 6. Save your changes. ### Update Relationship Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Relationships** and then click **Edit**. 5. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Under Field Permissions, select **Edit** for these fields: - Emergency Contact - Related Contact - Type 7. Save your changes. ### Update Education History Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Education History** and then click **Edit**. 5. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Under Field Permissions, select **Edit** for these fields: - Contact - Credits Earned - Degree Earned - Details - End Date - GPA - Graduation Date - Start Date 7. Save your changes. ### Update Tests Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Tests** and then click **Edit**. 5. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Under Field Permissions, select **Edit** for these fields: - Contact - Credits Earned - Test Date - Test Type 7. Save your changes. ### Update Test Scores Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Test Scores** and then click **Edit**. 5. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Under Field Permissions, select **Edit** for these fields: - Letter Score - Percentile - Score - Status - Subject Area - Test 7. Save your changes. ### Update Languages Settings 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Digital Experience (Community)**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Languages** and then click **Edit**. 5. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Under Field Permissions, confirm that **Edit** is selected for the Language Name field. 7. Save your changes. ## Assign Action Plans Assignments to OmniStudio Applications Forms After you create an application form with OmniStudio, use a flow to assign Action Plan Assignments based on the information that applicants enter into the form. We provide a sample flow to get you started. The sample flow associates the following Action Plan Templates to an Application. For details about these Action Plan Templates, see [Quick Start Asset Reference List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide."). - Sample: Core Application - Sample: Test Scores To access the sample flow: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Look for Sample: Action Plan Assignments. If you don't see the sample flow, [install it](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest/sample-flows). This sample flow demonstrates one approach to implementing automation for Action Plans. We recommend that you don't edit the sample flows directly and that you leave them inactive. Instead, create a flow and look in the Template tab for the sample flow that you want to start from. You can also open a sample flow and click **Save As** to create a flow. For more information, see [Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=flow.htm) in Salesforce Help. # Build Out an Admissions Connect Portal Every portal is different. It’s up to you and your admissions staff to decide what works best for your reviewers and applicants. When building your portal, refer to the Admissions Connect Components reference for a list of components that are supported in Experience Builder. See [Admissions Connect Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect comes with custom components that are used in the Lightning record pages provided with Admissions Connect. Some components are available in Lightning App Builder as well as Experience Builder. Use this article as reference when creating new pages or if you want to know more about the components."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Admissions Connect components used in applicant portals support mobile devices. Components used in reviewer portals do not - **[Add Applications to an Applicant Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When adding Applications to an applicant portal, consider these recommendations. If you used the applicant portal template that we provided, some steps are done for you. - **[Add Application Reviews to a Reviewer Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When adding Application Reviews to a reviewer portal, consider some recommendations. ## Add Applications to an Applicant Portal When adding Applications to an applicant portal, consider these recommendations. If you used the applicant portal template that we provided, some steps are done for you. If applicants are likely to have only a single Application for a given Term or school year, make sure that applicants can easily access their Application record from the Home page. For example, include a navigation item that goes directly to the Application detail page. If applicants are likely to have multiple Applications for a given Term or school year, include a list of Applications for the applicant on your Home page, or add a navigation item that goes to a page with the Application list view. If you include a list of Applications on the Home page, edit the Application page and your portal settings to ensure that applicants don’t see the Assign Reviewers button and other list view actions. Complete these steps. 1. On the Application page, in the Record List component’s header properties, deselect **Show list actions** and **Allow inline edit**. 2. In the Administration workspace, go to the Pages area and click **Go to Force.com**. In the list of Site Visualforce Pages, make sure that the BulkReviewerManagement page is not selected. 3. From Setup, verify that profiles or permission sets that you assign to applicants don’t include access to the BulkReviewerManagement Visualforce page. By default, the Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set doesn’t include this access. Here's a sample Home page that shows a list of Application records. ![Sample applicant portal home page featuring a list view for Applications](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/applicant_portal_application_listview.png)  Next, create a page for Applications.  1. Update the Application detail page layout to use the “1 full-width column” layout. 2. In the header region, add the Applicant Application Header component. 3. In the main region, add the Applicant Application Viewer component. The resulting Application page looks something like this. ![Sample Application record in an applicant portal featuring the Applicant Application Viewer component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/applicant_portal_application_page.png) If an applicant accesses the Application page from their mobile phone, the page looks like this: ![Sample Application record displayed on mobile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/applicant_portal_mobile.png) Remember that what an applicant sees in their Application record is determined by the settings of the Application Material Mapping records for the coordinating Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items and their User permissions. For details about applicant portal settings and security, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components.") and [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). ## Add Application Reviews to a Reviewer Portal When adding Application Reviews to a reviewer portal, consider some recommendations. Set up your Home page to include a list view of Application Reviews. That way, reviewers immediately see what applications are assigned to them. - Update the Home page layout to use the “1 full-width column” layout. - In the main region, add the Record List component and configure it for Application Reviews. The resulting Home page might look something like this. ![Home page of the Admissions Reviews portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/portal_reviews_home_page.png) Create a page for Application Reviews that looks similar to the default Lightning record page for Application Reviews in the Admissions Connect app. - Update the Application Review detail page layout to use the “2 columns, 2:1 ratio” layout. - In the header region, add the Record Banner component. - In the main region, add the Reviewer Application Reader component. - In the right column, add the Reviewer Feedback component. - Optionally, add the Record List component under the Reviewer Feedback component and configure it for Application Reviews. That way, reviewers can easily navigate to their next review from the current page. The resulting Application Reviews page might look something like this. ![Application Review page of the Admissions Reviews portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/portal_reviews_application_review_page.png) If your external reviewers can assign Application Reviews, consider adding the [Reviewer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect comes with custom components that are used in the Lightning record pages provided with Admissions Connect. Some components are available in Lightning App Builder as well as Experience Builder. Use this article as reference when creating new pages or if you want to know more about the components.") component to the portal. To help your reviewers stay focused and engaged with applications, consider creating page variations for different audiences. For example, you might want reviews to look different for coaches than for alumni. Or you might want to display different review questions to different groups of reviewers. See Also: [Personalization Using Audience Targeting](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=community_builder_page_visibilty_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help # Build Out Your Student Portal Add components to new and existing pages in a Student Success Hub portal, and customize the site for overall usability. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. Every portal is unique, guided by what your students need to be successful. To help you get started, here are a few examples of basic functions that you'll likely want to include in your site. You'll drag ready-to-use Student Success Hub Lightning components onto new or existing pages—such as support staff User profile pages, the Home page, and your own custom pages. We'll walk through how to add and configure components in the Experience Builder workspace, and recommend customizations for enhancing overall usability. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To optimize your student portal for mobile use, remember to confirm that the layout of components and pages works well on both large and small mobile devices. In the Experience Builder header, use the View Mode menu to toggle between device views. ![The View Mode menu in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_view_mode.png) - **[Add the Support Staff Appointment Settings Component to an Existing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's add the SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings component to the support staff User Profile page so students can see appointment availability information for support staff users. - **[Add the Success Team Component to a New Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's create a custom page that displays the SSH Success Team component. - **[Restrict Users' Access to Admin Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend hiding the App Launcher in your student portal to prevent members from accessing administrator tools. - **[Optimize the Support Staff User Profile Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When students go to a support staff member's User Profile, they usually want to check on appointment availability or schedule an appointment with that person. The User Profile's default layout is not ideal for these purposes. It shows unnecessary detail and isn't optimized for mobile viewing. Less is more for our purposes, so consider replacing the User Profile component with the simpler User Profile Detail component. - **[Create Additional Entry Points to the Scheduling Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To allow students to access the Scheduling Wizard from somewhere in the portal besides the Schedule an Appointment button in preconfigured components, add links to the Scheduling Wizard. ## Add the Support Staff Appointment Settings Component to an Existing Page Let's add the SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings component to the support staff User Profile page so students can see appointment availability information for support staff users. 1. In the site's Workspaces view, click **Builder** to open Experience Builder. 2. Click the Pages menu and select the User Profile page. 3. Click the Components icon (![A white lightning bolt icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_component_icon.png)) in the sidebar, scroll to the SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings component, and drag it to the editable content region of the page. 4. Confirm that the component looks good by checking the page on both large and small devices. 5. Publish your changes. While you're at it, feel free to add other components, such as the SSH User Profile Schedule Button Component for convenient scheduling from this page, or the SSH Success Plans Component for a quick view of any Success Plans applied to a student. ## Add the Success Team Component to a New Page Let's create a custom page that displays the SSH Success Team component. 1. In Experience Builder, click the Pages menu and select **New Page** at the bottom of the menu. 2. Select a page type. In our example, a standard page that's based on a blank layout is appropriate for the Success Team component, so click **Standard Page**. 3. Select a layout. Let's keep things simple and click **1 full-width column**. 4. Then click **Next**, give the page a unique name (such as My Team), and specify the static portion of the page's URL. 5. Click **Create**. 6. Click the Components icon (![A white lightning bolt icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_component_icon.png)) in the sidebar, then scroll to the SSH Success Team component and drag it to the editable content region of the page 7. Confirm that the component looks good by checking the page on both large and small devices. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When the page loads, you might see an error about not being able to show the success team. You can ignore this message throughout most of the setup process; the error is normal and expected. Assuming you're working in Experience Builder as a System Administrator, the error shows because you're previewing the page as a User who doesn't have anyone on their success team. When you've finished configuring your pages and components, preview the site as a student and verify that the error doesn't occur. 8. If you want the navigation menu to show a link to the new page, add the page to the menu after you've published the site but before you activate it. 1. While viewing any page, hover on and click the Navigation Menu header. 2. In the Navigation Menu component property editor, click **Edit Default Navigation**. 3. Click **Add Menu Item**. 4. Specify the fields required to add My Team as a Site Page, and position the item in the order you want. ![The Navigation Menu window with details for the My Team page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_nav_menu_edit_my_team.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To nest a menu item under another menu item, create a top-level menu item with the Menu Label type. Then take the menu item you want displayed as a submenu and drag it to the right under the menu label. For example, nest My Team under Resources. 5. Click **Save Menu**. 6. Click the menu icon (![Three horizontal white lines in a gray box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_nav_menu_icon.png)) to expand the navigation menu, and verify that My Team appears. ![The menu in Experience Builder for a page showing the menu item My Team in a call-out](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_nav_menu_preview_my_team.png) 7. **Publish** your menu changes. Now that you have the hang of adding a new page, go ahead and add other custom pages that might be valuable to your students. For example, you might want to add a Scheduling Wizard page where students can schedule an appointment, or a Success Plan page where they can view a list of their assigned Success Plans. ## Restrict Users' Access to Admin Tools We recommend hiding the App Launcher in your student portal to prevent members from accessing administrator tools. 1. In Experience Builder, hover on the Navigation Menu header that contains the App Launcher icon. ![The Navigation Menu in Experience Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_nav_menu.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the App Launcher or the Navigation Menu on the page, you may be working in a template that predates the introduction of the Navigation Menu. 2. Click the header to display the Navigation Menu component property editor, and then select **Hide App Launcher in header**. ## Optimize the Support Staff User Profile Page When students go to a support staff member's User Profile, they usually want to check on appointment availability or schedule an appointment with that person. The User Profile's default layout is not ideal for these purposes. It shows unnecessary detail and isn't optimized for mobile viewing. Less is more for our purposes, so consider replacing the User Profile component with the simpler User Profile Detail component. ![The default User Profile page on the left and the simplified User Profile Detail page on the right](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_pages_user_profile_simplified.png) 1. In Experience Builder, from the Pages menu, go to the User Profile page. 2. From the Components menu, drag the **User Profile Detail** component to the editable content region of the page, above the existing User Profile component. 3. Compare the two, and if you share our preference for the more concise Detail version, delete the User Profile component. 4. Publish your changes and view the page as a student to verify. 5. To further optimize the layout of the component, such as to remove or reorder fields, edit the page layout. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **User**. 2. On the User Profile Page Layouts page, click **New**. (Make sure that you're not on the User Page Layouts page.) 3. Base the layout on any appropriate layout, such as the default User Profile Layout. 4. In the page layout editor, remove unnecessary fields and related lists, and rearrange fields as desired. For example, remove Company Name, Manager, and Address, and move up the Phone, Email, and About Me fields. 5. Save your changes. 6. Assign the page layout to the student profile you're using. 6. View the page again as a student to verify your changes. ## Create Additional Entry Points to the Scheduling Wizard To allow students to access the Scheduling Wizard from somewhere in the portal besides the Schedule an Appointment button in preconfigured components, add links to the Scheduling Wizard. For each page, add the Rich Content Editor component to the desired region on the page, enter a text string (such as Schedule Appointment), format it as a hyperlink, and specify the Scheduling Wizard page URL, such as /scheduling-wizard. Remember to publish the pages that you've updated. # Build Sample Data in Your K-12 Architecture Kit Trial Org Create student, school, and course offering sample data in a trial org. Whether you’re familiar with Salesforce or not, we recommend you start by getting the lay of the land in K-12 Architecture Kit. Your trial org launches with a sample dashboard showing student population statistics. The dashboard would be far more useful with some data, wouldn’t it? Let’s take an approach similar to the one Valley Elementary used to build out their school’s data, but with your own data. - **[Create a Sample Student and Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create sample records for students and households to use in your K-12 Architecture Kit trial org. - **[Create a Sample Family Member](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create sample contact records for family members to use in your K-12 Architecture Kit trial org. - **[Connect Household Contacts to Each Other](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create relationships between household contacts. - **[Create a Sample District and School](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create sample accounts for a school and school district to use in your K-12 Architecture Kit trial org. - **[Connect People to Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connections between Contacts and Accounts are represented differently, depending on whether the connection is the primary Affiliation for a Contact, or a secondary one. - **[Create a Grade Level Account and Courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We've recommended that you represent grade levels using Academic Program Accounts. - **[Create a Course Offering and Connect People to It](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a specific instance of a Course, known as a Course Offering. It represents the specific Course being offered during a specific Term, at a specific time and location, taught by a specified faculty Contact. ## Create a Sample Student and Household Create sample records for students and households to use in your K-12 Architecture Kit trial org. Let’s create a student Contact record. 1. Click the Contacts tab and click **New**. 2. On the New Contact page, select **Student**, and click **Next**. 3. Enter required information and some optional information, such as birthdate and gender. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important Be sure to leave the Account Name field blank so that a Household Account is created automatically for this student. Anytime you add a new student Contact who doesn’t have an existing Household Account, let K-12 Architecture Kit create the household record for you. An exception would be if you were adding a Contact record for this student’s sibling, for example. In that case, you’d want to enter the existing Household Account name instead of leaving it blank, to avoid creating duplicate Account records. ![Locations of highlights panel, details area, and related lists section on a student Contact page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/page-layout-regions3.jpg) 4. Click **Save**. What do we see in the resulting Contact record? - In the highlights panel, we see that a Household Account record was automatically created. If you filled in a birthdate or gender, those information _fields_ are displayed, too. (1) - On the left side, we see more details that can be expanded and collapsed. (2) - On the right side, _related lists_ show groupings of things that are related to the student. Things that show up in related lists, like Program Enrollments, Course Connections, Grade Enrollments, and Relationships, are all examples of _objects_. (3) Objects might be considered the most important building block in K-12 Architecture Kit. The things that objects represent and how those things are related to each other are the foundation of your school's data model. Often, you access objects from the tabs across the top of the page. From a given tab, such as Accounts, you can access lists of the Account records created for your institution. And if you're the K-12 Architecture Kit administrator, you might customize how the user interface displays data records for different objects. We'll see more examples as we look at more data types. ## Create a Sample Family Member Create sample contact records for family members to use in your K-12 Architecture Kit trial org. Next, let’s create a Contact record for one of your student’s family members. 1. From the student’s Contact record, click the Household Account in the Account Name field. 2. From the actions menu on the Contacts related list, click **New**. ![Create a Contact record for another member of the student's household](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/family-contact.jpg) 3. This time, because you’re creating a family member Contact, select **Guardian**, then click **Next**. 4. Enter information about this family member, including essentials like a phone number. 5. Don’t change the the Account Name field. By creating this Contact record from the Household Account record, it automatically associates the person with the correct household—which is exactly what you want. 6. Click **Save**. Notice that the family member now appears in the Contacts related list on the Household Account record. But how do we capture the relationship that exists between these two Contacts? Let’s handle that, next. ## Connect Household Contacts to Each Other Create relationships between household contacts. 1. Return to the student’s Contact record. You can find your way back from anywhere in the user interface that you see the student’s name linked. 2. From the actions menu on the Relationships related list, click **New**. ![Create a new Relationship from the actions menu on the Relationships related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/relationship-contact.jpg) 3. Under Related Contact, select the family member’s name, such as the guardian whose record you just created. 4. Select the Type of relationship this person has to the student. We call this list of options a _picklist_, which is a good way to enforce consistent, standardized data entry and data reporting. 5. Click **Save**. Now, the Relationships related list on the student’s Contact record shows this connection between the student and family member. You might even see information such as whether this person is an emergency contact. ![The Relationships related list on the student's Contact record shows a Relationships record, representing the mother's Relationship to the student](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/relationship-family.jpg) And, if you go to the family member’s Contact record, you see the _reciprocal relationship_ that the family member has with the student. This view of the Relationship is created for you automatically. ![The Relationships related list on the guardian's Contact record shows a Relationships record, representing the son's reciprocal relationship with the guardian—created automatically after the guardian's Relationship was created](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/relationship-student.jpg) ## Create a Sample District and School Create sample accounts for a school and school district to use in your K-12 Architecture Kit trial org. Like we did for Valley Elementary in [Represent People and Your School](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Salesforce objects to represent students, faculty and staff, school district and schools, and community members."), let’s create Educational Institution Accounts to represent your school district and school. 1. Click the Accounts tab and click **New**. 2. On the New Account page, select **Educational Institution**, and click **Next**. 3. Enter your district’s name under Account Name, and other information such as the address and website. 4. Click **Save & New**. 5. Select **Educational Institution**, and click **Next**. 6. Enter your school’s name and other details. Then under Parent Account, enter the district name you just created. This effectively connects the school to the district and starts building out a hierarchy of Accounts. 7. If you’re done, click **Save**. Or if you’d like to create more Accounts for other district schools, click **Save & New** and repeat these steps. ## Connect People to Accounts Connections between Contacts and Accounts are represented differently, depending on whether the connection is the primary Affiliation for a Contact, or a secondary one. Here are some examples.
Contact Primary Affiliation Possible Secondary Affiliations
Student Household Account

School Account, Sports Organization Account for grade level
Teacher School Account

District Account, Academic Department Account
District Staff District Account School Accounts
Remember that an Affiliation represents a connection between a Contact and an Account, while a Relationship represents a connection between two Contacts. When you create an Affiliation between a Contact and an Account and select the Primary field on the Affiliation record, the Affiliation shows up on the respective Account’s Contacts related list. Other Affiliations are considered secondary and show up on the Account’s Affiliated Contacts related list. In this example, you see a teacher, Fred Rogers, as a Contact at the school, and a counselor, Melinda Barnes, as an Affiliated Contact; her primary Affiliation is with the district because she works at multiple schools. You also see that the sample school is identified as an elementary school. ![A school Account record with a teacher as a related Contact and a counselor as a related Affiliated Contact](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/affiliated-contact-school-type.jpg) Create an Affiliation between a faculty member and your school. 1. Make your way back to your school’s Account record. 2. From the actions menu on the Contacts related list, click **New**. By creating faculty Contact records from the school’s record, they’re automatically associated with the school’s Account record. 3. This time, because you’re creating a faculty member Contact, select **Faculty**, then click **Next**. 4. Enter information about this faculty member, including a phone number, email address, and so on. 5. Don’t change the Account Name field. By creating this related Contact record from the school's Educational Institution Account record, the correct Account name is already filled in and the correct Affiliation is created for you automatically. 6. Click **Save**. Repeat these steps for any additional Contacts or Affiliated Contacts you want to create. While you’re on the school’s Account record, you might also want to create records for Terms, Time Blocks, or Facilities. ## Create a Grade Level Account and Courses We've recommended that you represent grade levels using Academic Program Accounts. 1. Click the Accounts tab and click **New**. 2. On the New Account page, select **Academic Program**, and click **Next**. 3. Enter the grade name. Then select the name of the school you created under Parent Account. This effectively connects the grade level to the school. 4. Click **Save**. 5. On the grade level Account record, from the actions menu on the Courses related list, click **New**. By creating this related Course record from the grade level Account record, the correct Account name is already filled in and automatically connects the Course to the grade level’s Account record. 6. Enter a Course Name and other details. 7. Click **Save**. For an example grade level for Valley Elementary, see [Represent Classes and Other Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Identify how to set up courses and other programs in your school in the K-12 Architecture Kit.") After you’ve created Account records for grade levels, you can connect faculty Contacts to them through Affiliations. ## Create a Course Offering and Connect People to It Create a specific instance of a Course, known as a Course Offering. It represents the specific Course being offered during a specific Term, at a specific time and location, taught by a specified faculty Contact. 1. From the grade level’s Account record, click the name of a Course. 2. From the actions menu on the Course Offerings related list, click **New**. 3. If you haven’t created any Terms, create a new one in the Term field using the **New Term** option. 4. Enter a Course Offering ID, which might look like the Course ID followed by the Term, or Fifth Grade English 2018/2019. 5. Select the Primary Teacher. 6. Click **Save**. After you’ve added the Course Offering, the Course record looks like this: ![Course record for Fifth Grade English with a related Course Offering that defines Primary Faculty and Term offered](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/course-offering.jpg) You can now connect students or faculty to the Course Offering by creating new Course Connections from the Course Offering record. # Build Your Application Create Application Render Method records and Application Render Method Assignment records to build your application. Application render method records identify the Omniscript or Flexcard used to collect or show information. Application Render Method Assignment records link Application Render Methods with Application Stage Definitions.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create application render method and application render method assignment records: | Education Cloud Full Access | Watch the video to see how to use Application Render Method records and Application Render Method Assignment records with your application. If you aren’t able to watch the view in full screen, open the video on a new tab: [Create Applications with Salesforce for Education: Build Your Application](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/rd5eJMTv1sKQ9iVpRusZtg). - **[Create Application Render Method Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_build_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create application render method records for each Omniscript and Flexcard that you want to use in your application. - **[Create Application Render Method Assignment Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_build_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create application render method assignment records to connect your application stage definitions to their corresponding application render methods. ## Create Application Render Method Records Create application render method records for each Omniscript and Flexcard that you want to use in your application. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Render Methods**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application render method. For example, Profile Omniscript. 4. For Method Record, select **Omni Process**, and then find and select your copy of the Omniscript or Flexcard that you previously created. 5. For Method Type, select an option that matches the Omni Process that you previously selected. - Omniscript - Flexcard 6. For Usage Type, select **Recruitment and Admissions**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Similarly, create application render method records for each Omniscript and Flexcard. ## Create Application Render Method Assignment Records Create application render method assignment records to connect your application stage definitions to their corresponding application render methods. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Render Method Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application render method assignment. For example, Profile Stage. 4. To make this assignment active, select **Active**. 5. For Application Render Method, find and select the application render method associated with this assignment. For example, **Profile Omniscript**. 6. For Application Component, select the application stage definition that corresponds to the application render method that you selected. 7. Save your changes. 8. Similarly, create application render method assignment records for each application stage definition. # Campaigns for Fundraising Implementation Guide This guide is intended to help nonprofit administrators plan and implement Campaigns and Campaign hierarchies to support fundraising. Learn how Campaigns can be used to track fundraising appeals, event invitations, and key performance metrics. [Campaigns for Fundraising Implementation Guide](https://s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/sfdo-docs/Campaign_Fundraising_Guide.pdf) (in PDF format) ## Audience and Prerequisites You should have some familiarity with customizing Salesforce and with Campaigns in particular before attempting to step through this guide. If not, we recommend that you complete the [Campaign Basics Trailhead Module](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/campaign_basics) before proceeding. # Campus and Program Finder Campus and Program Finder makes information about your campus, learning programs, and support programs publicly searchable on your Experience Cloud site. It helps applicants, students, and families browse and search for campuses, schools, and programs in their area. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Create a page for your Experience Cloud education portal for current and prospective students to find campuses and programs that meet their needs. They can filter by learning program, campus or school, grade level, and other criteria. Search results present locations, academic programs, formats, or grade levels based on your configuration, in a list or on a map. - **[Create and Maintain Searchable Data for Campuses and Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_maintain_searchable_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To automatically create and maintain educational institution searchable profile records, configure the fields and records that you want to make available for filtering and searching. Then, turn on the custom Data Processing Engine definition and two custom flows that are required for Criteria-Based Search and Filter. - **[Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter to Show Search Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_criteria_based_search_and_filter.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter and make your Criteria-Based Search and Filter Lightning web component show search results in Campus and Program Finder on your Experience Cloud site. - **[Set Permissions and Make Objects Available to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_campus_finder_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant users access to Campus and Program Finder on your Experience Cloud site. - **[Populate Searchable Data and Test Your Campus and Program Finder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_populate_data_and_test_finder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run a flow to populate the Educational Institution Searchable Profile object. Then validate your data and test Campus and Program Finder to verify that the search results match your intended user experience. # Capture Giving Influence with Soft Credits in Education Streamline your fundraising efforts by tracking soft credits on Gift Commitments. Gift Entry Officers and Annual Fund Managers can capture and manage the influence of third parties on donations effectively, making sure every contribution is recognized and attributed accurately. This functionality not only simplifies the recording process but also aids in strategic donor engagement and segmentation. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create soft credits:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
If you don't see the Gift Default Soft Credit related list on the commitment page, add it to the Related tab. 1. From the commitment page, open the Related tab. 2. Next to Gift Default Soft Credits, click **New**. 3. Select the recipient of the gift soft credit. 4. Enter either the amount or percent of the gift soft credit. The soft credit can be greater than 100 percent of the gift. 5. Select the role of the soft credit recipient. For example, select Matched Donor. 6. Save your work. This gift default soft credit applies to all gifts that are a part of the selected gift commitment. SEE ALSO - [Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app.") # Capture Giving Influence with Soft Credits in Nonprofit Streamline your fundraising efforts by tracking soft credits on Gift Commitments. Gift Entry Officers and Annual Fund Managers can capture and manage the influence of third parties on donations effectively, making sure every contribution is recognized and attributed accurately. This functionality not only simplifies the recording process but also aids in strategic donor engagement and segmentation. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create soft credits:

FundraisingAccess permission set
If you don't see the Gift Default Soft Credit related list on the commitment page, add it to the Related tab. 1. From the commitment page, open the Related tab. 2. Next to Gift Default Soft Credits, click **New**. 3. Select the recipient of the gift soft credit. 4. Enter either the amount or percent of the gift soft credit. The soft credit can be greater than 100 percent of the gift. 5. Select the role of the soft credit recipient. For example, select Matched Donor. 6. Save your work. This gift default soft credit applies to all gifts that are a part of the selected gift commitment. SEE ALSO - [Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app.") # Career and Interest Assessment Library Management Take a variety of career and interest assessments to unlock personalized career and skill-building recommendations.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create a Career and Interest Assessment Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_career_interest_assessment_library.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors can create a library in Education Cloud to explore career and interest assessments. These assessments help students discover themselves, explore goals, and get personalized recommendations. - **[View and Attempt Career and Interest Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_view_attempt_career_interest_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors can view a student's assessment status and responses, and collaborate on new assessments to generate personalized career and goal recommendations. # Career Planning and Life Goals Offer personalized guidance and comprehensive tools to help students define and achieve career and life goals based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Students can access a library of career and interest assessments, explore campus involvement groups, track memberships and associated roles in involvement groups, and manage their profile and preferences more efficiently. Empower students to be career-ready by setting up action plans for goals by leveraging campus resources. Advisors can access the involvement groups and a library of career and interest assessments, and recommend the right fit to students based on the student's profile, preferences, assessment insights, and so on.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your org to allow learners to define and achieve career and life goals based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Configure the advisors profile permissions to manage student’s career and life goals. - **[Set Up Your Learner Portal with Career Planning and Life Goals Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_portal_career_planning_life_goals_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to add the career planning and life goals components to your learner portal, and then configure them. - **[Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Components for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_components_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give advisors the tools to manage student progress by adding career planning and life goals features to the Student Success app. - **[Goals Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_goals_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help students go beyond academics by setting and managing career and life goals, tracking campus activities, and building a comprehensive action plan for success. - **[Involvement Group Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_involvement_group_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Empower students to stand out to employers by showcasing their competencies from classes, clubs, and work experience. - **[Student Profile Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_profile_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create, update, and maintain a digital record of a student's competencies, traits, and affinities throughout their academic and personal journey. - **[Career and Interest Assessment Library Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_career_interest_assessment_library_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Take a variety of career and interest assessments to unlock personalized career and skill-building recommendations. - **[Example: First-Generation Student Exploring Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_example_student_exploring_career_planning_life_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This example walks you through how to set up a career planning and life goals experience on a student portal. First, the administrator configures an org for learners to define and achieve career and life goals based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. They configure the advisor's profile permissions to manage student’s career and life goals. The Student advisors create the foundational assessments, involvement groups, and competencies. Then, students log in to take assessments, explore campus groups, and set their first life goals. # Case Case represents a behavior event and can have related Behavior Involvement records. - **[Sample Uses for Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Case object is used differently in EDA than it's used in standard Salesforce. It includes two fields that are unique to EDA that help you track behavior events. Category tracks the type of event, such as a code of conduct violation or other type of school violation. Location tracks where the event occurred, such as on campus or off campus. - **[Configure Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Case object up to date. - **[Create a Case Record for a Behavior Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create a case record for a behavior event in Education Data Architecture. ## Sample Uses for Case The Case object is used differently in EDA than it's used in standard Salesforce. It includes two fields that are unique to EDA that help you track behavior events. Category tracks the type of event, such as a code of conduct violation or other type of school violation. Location tracks where the event occurred, such as on campus or off campus. Let’s look at some possible uses for the Case object. - University—Track the theft of personal property from a dorm room. - K-12—Track a bullying incident on a school bus. - Any educational institution—Track a breach in code of conduct. ## Configure Case Keep the Case object up to date. ### Keep Up with Case Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.83

If you're already using Cases, but haven't yet set up a default record type:

  1. Create a default support process for Case. See Create Multiple Business Processes.
  2. Create a default record type for Case, selecting the new process you just created. See Create Record Types.
  3. Apply the newly created record type to existing Case records.

  4. Ensure the appropriate permissions are set for the new record type for all required profiles.
 

Also consider these updates:

## Create a Case Record for a Behavior Event Use these steps to create a case record for a behavior event in Education Data Architecture. 1. Click the **Cases** tab. If you don't see the Cases tab, from the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**, and click **New**. 2. Enter the Occurrence Date, Category, and Status for the behavior event. You don’t have to relate a Case with a particular Contact at this time. You’ll use Behavior Involvement records to relate people to the behavior event (Case) later. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. 4. Click **Save**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Behavior Involvement records to track the individual people involved in this behavior event. See [Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_involvement.htm) . # Case Case represents a behavior event and can have related Behavior Involvement records. - **[Sample Uses for Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Case object is used differently in EDA than it's used in standard Salesforce. It includes two fields that are unique to EDA that help you track behavior events. Category tracks the type of event, such as a code of conduct violation or other type of school violation. Location tracks where the event occurred, such as on campus or off campus. - **[Configure Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Case object up to date. - **[Create a Case Record for a Behavior Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create a case record for a behavior event in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Case The Case object is used differently in EDA than it's used in standard Salesforce. It includes two fields that are unique to EDA that help you track behavior events. Category tracks the type of event, such as a code of conduct violation or other type of school violation. Location tracks where the event occurred, such as on campus or off campus. Let’s look at some possible uses for the Case object. - University—Track the theft of personal property from a dorm room. - K-12—Track a bullying incident on a school bus. - Any educational institution—Track a breach in code of conduct. ## Configure Case Keep the Case object up to date. ### Keep Up with Case Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.8 Update the global quick action for New Case and change the record type as described in Quick Action Considerations.
1.12

Add the following pick list values to the Location field on Case for the Behavior Response record type:

Administrative Offices Area, Athletic Field or Playground, Auditorium, Bus Stop, Cafeteria Area, Classroom, Computer Lab, Hallway or Stairs, Library/Media Center, Locker Room or Gym Areas, Online, Parking Lot, Restroom, School Bus, Stadium, Unknown, Walking to or from School. See Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
1.14 Page Layouts: Create a K12 Kit Positive Behavior Layout by cloning the existing K12 Kit Incident Layout. The sections and fields used are the same.
 

Record Types:

  1. Create a record type for Positive Behavior.

  2. Assign the K12 Kit Positive Behavior Layout to the Positive Behavior record type.

  3. Assign the K12 Kit Incident Layout to the Incident record type.
 

Picklist Values: Create new picklist values and add them to a field used by the new record type.

  1. From Setup, click the Object Manager tab.

  2. In the list of objects, click Case.

  3. Click Fields & Relationships.

  4. Click Category.

  5. In Values, click New.

  6. Type the following picklist values, each on their own line: Cooperation, Integrity, Leadership, Respect, Teamwork, and Other.

  7. Select Positive Behavior.

  8. Click Save.

Note
Note After adding new picklist values to the Category field for the Positive Behavior record type, view the available values and remove any that are also assigned to the Incident record type, for example, School Violation.
 

Compact Layouts:

  1. Create a K12 Case Compact Layout and add the Category, Record Type, Priority, and Status fields.

  2. Assign the K12 Case Compact Layout to the Positive Behavior and Incident record types.
  Search Layouts: Edit Default Layout to include the Case Number, Case Record Type, Contact Name, Category, Subject, Status, Priority, and Date Opened fields, as needed.
 

List Views: Create an All Positive Behavior Cases list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All cases

  • Matching these filters: Record Type equals Positive Behavior

  • Select Fields to Display: Case Number, Contact Name, Category, Subject, Date/Time Opened

Create an All Incident Cases list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All cases

  • Matching these filters: Record Type equals Incident

  • Select Fields to Display: Case Number, Contact Name, Category, Subject, Status, Priority, Date/Time Opened
## Create a Case Record for a Behavior Event Use these steps to create a case record for a behavior event in K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. Click the **Cases** tab. If you don't see the Cases tab, from the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**, and click **New**. 2. Enter the Occurrence Date, Category, and Status for the behavior event. You don’t have to relate a Case with a particular Contact at this time. You’ll use Behavior Involvement records to relate people to the behavior event (Case) later. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. 4. Click **Save**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Behavior Involvement records to track the individual people involved in this behavior event. See [Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm). # Case Management Welcome to Case Management, reimagined! Built on the Salesforce platform, this next-generation product enables you to track and manage your cases and participants using efficient and streamlined tools. Case Management offers care plans for organizing services, dynamic questionnaires to streamline intake and referrals, and visuals for seeing participants' relationships and timelines along with tools for recording incidents, creating notes, and tracking participation. Learn more in [Case Management Documentation for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.en_cm_np_case_management_for_nonprofits.htm). # Case Management (Managed Package) Release Notes Find and complete information faster in Case Management (version 1.34) in Summer '23. Limit program engagements and services options to show only active ones on the bulk service deliveries page. Find program cohorts, program engagements, and services easier by scanning through alphabetized lists. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Case Management managed package is installed. **Who**: Only users with the Customize Application permission can modify custom metadata types. Only users with the Case Management: Manage or Case Management: Deliver permission set can enter bulk service deliveries. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Customize Bulk Service Deliveries (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm) # Case Management (Managed Package) Release Notes Case Management pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Case Management managed package is installed. # Case Management and Translation Get answers to frequently asked questions about localization, understand what languages are available for your product, get links to documentation in other languages, and learn about translation limits. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Case Management. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Case Management product. - **[Translation Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about translation limitations for Case Management. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Case Management."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Case Management.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Case Management. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Case Management objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Case Management | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | | Spanish (Mexico) | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Case Management for Nonprofits - [Chinese (Simplified)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_zh_cn.pdf) - [Chinese (Traditional)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_zh_tw.pdf) - [Danish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_da_dk.pdf) - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_nl_nl.pdf) - [Finnish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_fi_fi.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_de_de.pdf) - [Italian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_it_it.pdf) - [Japanese](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_ja_jp.pdf) - [Korean](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_ko_kr.pdf) - [Norwegian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_no_no.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_pt_br.pdf) - [Russian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_ru_ru.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_es_es.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_es_mx.pdf) - [Swedish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/casemanagementfornonprofits/case_management_ngo_sv_se.pdf) ### Case Management Legacy - [Dutch in PDF](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/cmlegacy/case_management_legacy_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK) in PDF](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/cmlegacy/case_management_legacy_en_gb.pdf) - [French in PDF](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/cmlegacy/case_management_legacy_fr_fr.pdf) - [German in PDF](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/cmlegacy/case_management_legacy_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)in PDF](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/cmlegacy/case_management_legacy_pr_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Case Management product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Case Management: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. ## Translation Limitations Learn about translation limitations for Case Management. - Case Management can't translate the names of permission sets, reports, or dashboards in the managed package. - Case Management's Contact page includes custom sub-navigation tabs for Assessments and Case Plans that have not yet been translated. - Case Management uses Process Builder to automatically name Program Engagements using the Program Engagement Stage picklist values Applied, Active, Completed, and Withdrawn. The Process Builder process won't work if these values are translated. If you need these values translated, deactivate the process and create a new one using the translated values. - If you use Case Management with NPSP, note that NPSP provides its own translation that includes specific limitations for record type names, contact role values, recurring donations, relationships, data import mapping, household naming, and some picklist values included in workflow rules. See [Nonprofit Success Pack and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm) for details. - Salesforce doesn’t translate salutations or other picklist values. You can use Translation Workbench to provide your own translations and custom values. # Case Management Entity Relationship Diagram Case Management's architecture takes advantage of many standard Salesforce objects—Accounts, Contacts, and Cases—and includes a number of custom objects such as Case Plans, Client Notes, and Assessments. Case Management is modular; you can use it with NPSP, and other Salesforce or third-party products. ![Case Management/PMM Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/case_management_pmm_erd.png) # Case Management Feature Telemetry Case Management Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management is used by our customers. Case Management Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage and adoption of various Case Management features.**We don't collect personally identifiable information through Case Management Feature Telemetry**. We only collect information about which features an organization has enabled and the number of times those features are used. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (True/False), Integer, and Date. Case Management only collects Boolean and Integer data types. Case Management Feature Telemetry data is collected during the push upgrade process. ## System Performance Metrics - Count of Service Deliveries related to Client Notes in the last 30 days - Count of Client Notes created in the last 30 days - Count of Intake records created in the last 30 days - Count of Case Plans with Action Items with the Status In Progress modified in the last 30 days To give you a better picture of what the data looks like, here's a sample telemetry record: ![Sample Telemetry record showing Details tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/cm_feature-parameter-record.png) For information about your privacy and how feature management works, read: - [Salesforce.Org Privacy Policy](https://www.salesforce.org/legal-information/privacy-policy/) - [Salesforce Feature Management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingguide.meta/packagingguide/fma_manage_features.htm) - **[Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case Management PMM Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management PMM is used by our customers. ## Feature Telemetry Case Management PMM Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management PMM is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage and adoption of various Case Management features. **We don't collect personally identifiable information through Case Management Feature Telemetry**. We only collect information about what features an organization has enabled or not. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (True/False), Integer, and Date. Case Management only collects Integer data. Case Management Feature Telemetry data is collected during the push upgrade process. ### System Performance Metrics - Count of Service Deliveries related to Client Notes in the last 30 days - Count of Client Notes created in the last 30 days - Count of Intake records created in the last 30 days - Count of Case Plans with Action Items with the Status In Progress modified in the last 30 days - Count of Active Programs - Count of Active Programs with Active Services - Count of Active Programs with Program Cohorts - Count of Active Programs with Program Engagements created in the last 30 days - Count of Active Programs with Service Deliveries created in the last 30 days - Count of Active Services - Count of Active Services with Service Schedules - Count of Service Deliveries with an Attendance Status, created in the last 30 days - Count of Service Schedules with at least one Service Session in the future - Count of Active Programs with at least one Program Cohort. ### User Permissions - Count of users assigned the PMM: Deliver permission - Count of users assigned the PMM: Manage permission To give you a better picture of what the data looks like, here's a sample telemetry record: ![Sample Telemetry record showing Details tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/feature-parameter-record.png) For information about your privacy and how feature management works, read: - [Salesforce.org Privacy Policy](https://www.salesforce.org/legal-information/privacy-policy/) - [Salesforce Feature Management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingguide.meta/packagingguide/fma_manage_features.htm) # Case Management for Human Services Focus on your work and keep your clients' needs front and center by using Case Management for Human Services. As a case manager, your work is defined by the need to track and make sense of a seemingly unending chain of complex challenges as you serve your clients. Understanding a client's needs requires building a trusted relationship so you can support them as they progress or experience sidetracks or setbacks. To serve each client, you need the right information at the right time. But too often, keeping up with the necessary paperwork and administrative tasks can feel like a full-time job. Nonprofit Cloud Case Management makes it easier for case managers like you to get back to what you do best—helping people. And to keep your clients' needs at the center of your work, Case Management is here to help you: - See your daily events, open tasks, and client watchpoints all in one place. - Develop comprehensive case plans to support your clients' progress. - Track your clients' progress using client notes and assessments. - Schedule and log client calls, meetings, and other interactions. - Log and track incidents involving clients. - See which programs and services your clients are using. - Manage a pipeline of incoming and outgoing client referrals. - Evaluate and assist potential clients using a customizable intake process. - See reports summarizing common case plan action items and goals, the status of inbound referrals, and the status and results of client intakes. Case Management also helps you provide high-quality service using program management tools that help you:  - Define the programs and services that you provide. - Track the people, households, organizations, or other entities that have applied for and enrolled in programs, including those on a waitlist. - See service recipients grouped by common criteria, such as those who receive services at the same location. - See the number of services distributed or delivered, and to what recipients. - Report on program utilization and other trends to see how well your programs and services are performing. Case Management works in any Salesforce environment, although it works best with NPSP. Case Management uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects and includes several custom objects tailored for case management and program management. # Case Management for Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes Create Dynamic Assessments for Account, Contact, and Case objects. Use guided flows to track attendance. Preview your Care Plan Template before you publish it and use the Care Plan Summary View to see everything in one place. Set up your referral flow using easily accessible components. Use the Merge UI flow to combine Party Relationship Groups and automatically update related records. - **[Use Dynamic Assessments with Accounts, Contacts, and Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_cm_dynamic_assessments_with_account_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with dynamic assessments by creating them for accounts, contacts, and cases. For example, create an assessment for an individual or a group of individuals to determine whether they're eligible for a benefit or service. - **[Manage Benefit Schedules and Sessions and Track Disbursed Benefits with Guided Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_cm_benefit_guided_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define and manage benefit schedules and sessions with ease using guided flows. See whether and how participants exercise the benefits that you provide to them by using schedules and sessions. Enroll individuals or groups of individuals into benefit sessions on a set schedule, and then track their attendance. For example, enroll parents of a household in weekly counseling sessions, and then measure their participation by tracking their attendance. - **[Set Up the Referral Intake Guided Flow Quickly with Prebuilt Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_cm_referral_intake_guided_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize and activate prebuilt OmniStudio components to set up a guided flow for referral intake. Previously, you had to download an OmniStudio DataPack, deploy OmniStudio components in your Public Sector Solutions org, and then set up the guided flow. - **[Preview Your Care Plan Template and Use the Care Plan Summary View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_cm_preview_care_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Preview the structure of the care plan template before publishing so that you can see everything in place and make adjustments before it goes live. After publication, use the Care Plan Summary view to see all the parts of the care plan on one page. - **[Create and Merge Party Relationship Groups Using UI Flows with Ease](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_cm_prg_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save time when you create and merge party relationship groups. Using the New Group UI flow, case managers can group participants belonging to a collective unit, like a household, as members of a party relationship group, and specify member roles and relationships. They can also add related contacts, groups, and business accounts, and specify relationships with the group and its members. Using the Merge UI flow, case managers can combine two-party relationship groups and create a group having members, related contacts, and other related records from both the groups. # Case Management Objects and Fields Learn what custom objects and fields are included in Case Management. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the Case Management data schema in depth. View [Case Management Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/DiZCAUTDzh2Q) (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). # Case Management on Mobile Learn about the nonprofit Case Management managed package mobile app. - **[Take Case Management to Go with the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_on_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Available in the Salesforce mobile app, which you can download from the App Store or Google Play, the Case Management app can be accessed on your mobile device. - **[Learn What's Different On The Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_on_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Not every Lightning Experience feature is available in Case Management on the Salesforce mobile app. Learn what's different. ## Take Case Management to Go with the Salesforce Mobile App Available in the Salesforce mobile app, which you can download from the App Store or Google Play, the Case Management app can be accessed on your mobile device. In our work-anywhere world, wouldn't it be nice to take Case Management on the go? You can! Available in the Salesforce mobile app, which you can download from the App Store or Google Play, the Case Management app can be accessed on your mobile device. Simply log into the app with your Salesforce username and password. This means all the important work you do for your clients—scheduling calls, tracking client notes and assessments, you name it—can be done while you're out and about during your day, without being tied to your desk. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note To get started with the Salesforce mobile app, take the [Salesforce Mobile App Basics](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/lex_salesforce1_basics) and [Salesforce Mobile App Rollout](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/salesforce1_rollout?trail_id=salesforce1_mgmt) trails in Trailhead. You can also learn about device and platform requirements in [Requirements for the Salesforce Mobile App](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=xcloud.salesforce_app_requirements.htm&type=5). ## Learn What's Different On The Mobile App Not every Lightning Experience feature is available in Case Management on the Salesforce mobile app. Learn what's different. Differences in Case Management on the Salesforce mobile app: - For each record, click **Related** or **Details** to see additional information. - In Client Search, only First Name, Last Name, and Birthdate show in search results. - Bulk Service Deliveries aren't available. Create Service Delivery records one by one. - The Assessment chart isn't available. Refer to the Total Score field in the relevant Assessment records. - The Client Notes custom component isn't available, and Client Notes don't allow tags by default. To tag a record, a Salesforce admin can add the Topics component to the Client Notes page layout. - The Case Plan Wizard isn't available. To create Case Plans, enter information and related Goal and Action Items one by one. To view Case Plans, click each related Goal and Action Item. - The Home tab isn't available. Click **Menu** to access the Tasks, Events, and Cases pages. You can also view all related Cases, including Incidents, on a Contact's related list. - A Salesforce admin needs to add the Action Plans related list to the Intake page layout. Then each Action Plan is visible on the related list. - Contact-related fields aren't available on Intakes. Go to Contacts to update those fields or create a related Contact record. - The Track Attendance component on Service Sessions isn't available. Update the Attendance Status on individual Service Delivery records. # Case Management Product Information for GDPR Learn more about GDPR and the nonprofit Case Management managed package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Product Information for CM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about product information for CM. - **[Data Deletion for CM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about data deletion for CM. - **[Consent Management for CM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about consent management for CM. - **[Data Processing for CM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about data processing for CM. - **[Data Portability for CM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about data portability for CM. # Case Management Release Notes Learn what's in Case Management (version 1.34) in Spring '23. ## Changes We updated the Client Note Layout with the Files Related List for Case Management. # Case Management Reports and Dashboards Reporting makes it easy to extract meaningful data about your Clients and Programs. You can make copies of reports and filter them to include the Clients and Programs you manage, then add them to your personal dashboards so you can track progress. - **[View Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** - **[View Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** ## View Reports Case Management includes three report folders: Case Management Reports, Program Management Embedded Reports, and Program Management Reports (Unpackaged). You can control access to reports using folder sharing. For example, you may want to limit who has Edit access to the Program Management Embedded Reports folder, because it contains reports that are visible to all users in your org. The Case Management Reports folder includes these reports: - Closed Intake Results, Current 6 Months: Results of Intakes closed in the current and last 6 months. - Inbound Referrals by Account: A count of organizations who made referrals in the current and last 6 months. - Top Action Item Templates In Use: A list of the Action Item Templates that are most frequently used in our Case Plans. - Top Goal Templates In Use: A list of the Goal Templates that are most frequently used in our Case Plans. - Intakes In Progress by Stage: A count of the stages associated with open Intakes. - Inbound Referrals, Current 6 Months: A count of Inbound Referrals created in the current and last 6 months. - Client Note Relationships - Unparented: List of Client Notes that aren't associated with a Contact. The Program Management Embedded Reports folder includes these reports: - All Active Program Engagements: Record count of Active Program Engagements by Program. - Clients Enrolled This Month: List of Program Engagements with a start date in the current month. - Clients Enrolled This Month by Program: List of Program Engagements for the current month, grouped by Program. - Client Records Missing Phone Number: List of Clients without phone numbers. The report looks first at the Contact record and then the Account record. - Contacts Absent for Last Svc Delivery: List of Contacts who have one or more consecutive absences for at least one Program Engagement. - Contacts w/o Recent Service Deliveries: List of Contacts who haven't received a Service Delivery in over two weeks. - Contacts with 3 Consecutive Absences: List of Contacts who have three or more consecutive absences for at least one Program Engagement. - Services Delivered (Year to Date): Count of Services delivered this year, grouped by Program. - Units Delivered over last 6 Months: List and quantity of Service Deliveries over the last 6 months. The Program Management Reports (Unpackaged) folder includes these reports: - Active & Enrolled Prog. Eng. by Owner: List of Active and Enrolled Program Engagements, grouped by Owner Name. - All Program Engagements by Stage: Program Engagements grouped by Stage. - My Service Delivery by Client Last Month: Count of services you delivered last month, grouped by Client. - My Service Deliveries Last Month: Count of services you delivered in the last month. - Past Sessions in Pending Status: List of past Service Sessions with a Complete or Canceled status, grouped by Primary Service Provider. - Service Deliveries by Provider Last Month: List of Service Deliveries grouped by Service Provider. - Unique Contacts Receiving Service: Number of unduplicated Contacts with a Service Delivery, sorted by Service. To view Case Management reports:   1. Click the **Reports** tab. 2. Click **All Folders**. 3. Click **Case Management**, **Program Management Embedded Reports** or **Program Management Reports (Unpackaged)**. 4. Click the name of the report to view it. ## View Dashboards Case Management has two dashboard folders that include four dashboards. In the Case Management Dashboard folder, you'll find the Contacts Who May Require Followup dashboard and the Intake Summary dashboard. In the Program Management Dashboards folder, you'll find the Sample Program Management dashboard and the Program Management Home Page dashboard. The Contacts Who May Require Followup dashboard includes these reports: - Contacts Absent for Last Svc Delivery - Contacts with 3 Consecutive Absences - Contacts w/o Recent Service Deliveries The Intake Summary dashboard includes these reports: - Intakes in Progress by Stage - Closed Intake Results, Current 6 Months - Inbound Referrals by Account - Inbound Referrals, Current 6 Months The Sample Program Management dashboard includes these reports: - Clients Enrolled This Month by Program - Units Delivered Over the Last 6 Months - Client Records Missing Phone Number - All Active Program Engagements - Services Delivered (Year to Date) The Program Management Home Page dashboard includes these reports: - All Active Program Engagements - Client Records Missing Phone Number - Services Delivered (Year to Date) To view Case Management dashboards: 1. Click the **Dashboards** tab. 2. Click **All Folders**. 3. Click **Case Management Dashboards** or **Program Management Dashboards**. 4. Click the dashboard name. # Case Management Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_cm_case_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_cm_case_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - **[Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_cm_case_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for client notes Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - **[Guidance Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_cm_case_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built specific guidance so that admins can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. - **[Fixes and Other Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_cm_case_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. ### Client Notes Learn about the improvements for client notes Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - We added Quick Text to Client Notes. Quick Text helps you create consistent notes and save time by having some parts of the note, such as the sections, pre-populated. - We modified the tags feature so you can choose whether to let everyone create their own tags or create a standard set of tags everyone uses. - We added filters to the full note history component on the Contact record so you can search by tag or keyword. - We added the ability to print client notes. Use the filters and date limits to narrow your selection. ### Guidance Center If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built specific guidance so that admins can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. Learn more about [Guidance Center](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/guidance-center-quick-look). ### Fixes and Other Enhancements Review the fixes and minor enhancements Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - We created the Action Plan After Insert Template Flow. This flow associates tasks to the Contact, giving users more visibility into which tasks relate to which client. - We added more colors to the assessment chart component and made it so colors are reused when there are more than 12 elements on a chart. - We fixed a bug where the first field of a new Client Note wasn’t always in focus. ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. ### Lightning Web Component - Client Note History # Case Management Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Case Management (version 1.33) in Winter '23. ## Changes - We added the ability to create threshold lines for Assessment charts. These lines let you quickly determine where a client is in relation to benchmarks you determine, such as levels of financial literacy. - We added filtering so only Program Engagements from the Active bucket are available when you create a case plan. To enable this feature: 1. In Custom Metadata Types, click **Feature Gate**. 2. Click **Manage Feature Gates**. 3. Select **All** in the View menu. 4. Click **Edit** next to Filter Active Prog Eng On New Case Plans, then click **Feature Active**. 5. Save your work. - We replaced New Contact with New Intake on the Quick Actions section of the Home page. If you don't see it or want to add New Contact back, edit the page. - We added a Create Intake button to the client's Contact page. Add it to your page layout to make creating an Intake even faster. - We made it so you can share uploaded Client Note files with the Program Engagement record. - We now support Brazilian Portuguese. # Case Management with Experience Cloud Set up and customize your client Experience Cloud site for the nonprofit Case Management managed package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Case Management with Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to connect and engage directly with the people who matter most using the power of Experience Cloud. - **[Set Up Your Experience Cloud Site for Clients](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_set_up_your_expereince_cloud_site_for_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a client portal that helps clients stay on track and continue making progress on their goals. - **[Customize Your Client Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_your_client_site_1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Experience Cloud sites are highly customizable, allowing you to determine exactly how your site will look and what actions users will be able to take. To get the most out of your client site, we're providing a recommended layout and steps for how to create it. # Case Management with Experience Cloud Learn how to connect and engage directly with the people who matter most using the power of Experience Cloud. - **[Build Meaningful Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect and engage directly with the people who matter most—whether through a job training community, a recovery program support site, or a client portal—using the power of Experience Cloud. - **[Learn About Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Want to know more about creating and using an Experience Cloud site? We have a few options for you. - **[Learn Which Components Are Available](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the Case Management components that you can use on Experience Cloud site pages. ## Build Meaningful Connections Connect and engage directly with the people who matter most—whether through a job training community, a recovery program support site, or a client portal—using the power of Experience Cloud. Use Experience Cloud to create and customize a beautiful, branded home base for your users that includes relevant Salesforce data. For example, create an Experience Cloud site for clients where they can systematically engage with their Case Managers, collaboratively work on their goals, and continuously forge a path to success. To access the Case Management objects, Experience Cloud users need both an Experience Cloud license and the Case Management Permission Set License. The Nonprofit Experience Cloud SKU grants access to both required licenses. Ready to see Experience Cloud in action? Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Experience Cloud demo](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jdovogfhsxi). ## Learn About Experience Cloud Want to know more about creating and using an Experience Cloud site? We have a few options for you. The [Experience Cloud Basics](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/community_cloud_basics) and [Customize Your Experience Cloud Site](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/customize-your-community) trails in Trailhead are a great place to start. For tips on setting up your site visit [Set Up an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. When your Experience Cloud site is ready to go, give people access to it by creating partner accounts and assigning the required permission sets (Case Management Permission and Case Management: View) to their community licenses. For more details, see [Create Partner Users](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/.htm&type=5) and [Communities User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note When you assign permission sets, save yourself a heap of time by cloning the existing _Case Management: View_ permission set. Name the new permission set _Site Client: View._ ## Learn Which Components Are Available Understand the Case Management components that you can use on Experience Cloud site pages. These Case Management components are available in Experience Cloud. As a Salesforce admin, you see this selection of components automatically, and can add them to pages for your Experience Cloud users. Use sharing rules to further manage which records are visible to your users. Take the [Use Sharing Rules for External Users](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/communities_share_crm_data/sharing_rules?trail_id=customize-your-community) trail in Trailhead to learn more. - [Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm)—add this component to the Service Session object page. Create sharing rules for the Service Participant and Contact objects or manually share Contact records so users can create Service Delivery records. (PMM component) - [Service Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_service_schedules.htm)—add this component to the Service Schedule object. (PMM component) - [Case Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm)—add this component to the Case Plan object page. - [Client Card](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm)—add this component to the Contact object page. - [Client Card Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm)—add this component to the Contact object page. - [Client Photo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm)—add this component to the Contact object page. To make the photo visible in Experience Cloud, give Read access on Age, Legal Name, and Photo File ID in the _Site Client: View_ permission set. - [Program Engagement Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.work_with_program_engagements.htm)—add this component to the Contact object. Create sharing rules for the Assessment, Client Note, Case Plan, Program, Service, Service Delivery, and Program Engagement objects. - [CM: Case Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm)—add this component to a client site to give clients an overview of their case plan. - [CM: Case Plan Progress](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm)—add this component to a client site so that clients can quickly see where they are in the plan. - [CM: Action Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm)—add this component to a client site so clients can see what they need to do. - [CM: Action Item Status Picker](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_update_a_case_plan.htm)—add this component to a client site so clients can update the status of action items. - CM: My Team—add this component to a client site to display the names of the record owners for any Case Plan and Program Engagement relating to the client. Their contact info is pulled in from their user records. Want to change who’s on the list? Simply change the owner of the records. Want more? The [Nonprofit Experience Manager App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm) comes with some components as well. # Cash Flow Grouping Configure how to group transaction journal records. Depending on the type of cash flows, identify them by fund account, or fund account and due date.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
## Expected Cash Flow Grouping If your accounting department uses accrual accounting, they sometimes prefer to track when they expect to receive the revenue or expense. By default, Accounting Subledger only splits transaction journal records by fund account allocation, but you can also split by fund account allocation and due date. ## Paid Cash Flow Grouping Debits and credits alone don't necessarily tell the whole story. You can see more details by grouping transaction journal records by specific fund accounts. Such grouping is especially helpful when you need specialized GL codes. By default, Accounting Subledger only groups credits for revenue, and debits for expenses. ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_warning.png) Warning If you already generated transaction journal records grouped by specific fund accounts, we recommend that you don't change back this setting. Doing so can duplicate accounting data. Instead, deactivate your existing accounting set and create another one. Consider setting the Accounting Record Start Date to the current date to limit the number of records to reprocess. Then, activate the new accounting set. ## See Also [Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you map source fields to accounting set destination fields, configure how Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records for each accounting set.") # Change My Account Model The default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack is the Household Account model, which is the account model we strongly recommend. Only experienced Salesforce Administrators should consider changing an organization's account model. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you have existing Contact information in Salesforce that you entered using one of the older account models, develop a migration plan before switching over to the Household Account model. For more information about our account model migration tool, see [Convert to the Nonprofit Success Pack Household Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_to_household_acct_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is for users who upgraded to NPSP from a previous version and want to convert to the Household Account Model."). To change your account model: 1. From App Launcher (![App Lancher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select NPSP Settings. 2. Click **People** | **Account Model**. 3. Click **Edit**, and make your selection. 4. Click **Save**. # Change the Dates of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education Change the start and end dates of a gift commitment schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To change the dates of a recurring gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and then select **Update Dates**. 4. Select the schedule that you want to change. 5. Select the new dates. Unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the new effective dates are removed after the commitment is processed. 6. Optionally, enter an update reason. 7. Save your changes. # Change the Dates of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit Change the start and end dates of a gift commitment schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To change the dates of a recurring gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and then select **Update Dates**. 4. Select the schedule that you want to change. 5. Select the new dates. Unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the new effective dates are removed after the commitment is processed. 6. Optionally, enter an update reason. 7. Save your changes. # Change the Number of Installments Displayed in the Upcoming Installments Component To adjust the number of installments shown in Upcoming Installments, edit the record page and adjust the component settings. 1. On a Recurring Donation record, click the gear icon then click **Edit Page**. 2. Click the **Upcoming Installments** component, then update **Number of installments to display**. 12 is the default value. 3. Click **Save**. ![The Recurring Donation Upcoming Installments component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/number-of-dontions.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Upcoming Installments is a calculated display of installment Opportunities based on the field data on the Recurring Donation. If you change field data on an upcoming Opportunity, those changes won't be reflected in the Upcoming Installments visualization. # Change the Payment Method of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education You can specify different payment methods for specific periods within a commitment schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To change the payment of a recurring gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and then select **Update Payment Method**. 4. Select the schedule that you want to change. 5. Select a payment method and enter any associated payment instrument information, such as Last 4 and expiration dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 6. Select the effective start date. 7. If needed, select the effective end date, an update reason, and the campaign that the commitment applies to. If the new payment method applies to the entire schedule, in the effective start and end date fields, select the schedule start and end dates. Unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the new effective dates are removed after the commitment is processed. 8. Save your changes. # Change the Payment Method of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit You can specify different payment methods for specific periods within a commitment schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To change the payment of a recurring gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and then select **Update Payment Method**. 4. Select the schedule that you want to change. 5. Select a payment method and enter any associated payment instrument information, such as Last 4 and expiration dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 6. Select the effective start date. 7. If needed, select the effective end date, an update reason, and the campaign that the commitment applies to. If the new payment method applies to the entire schedule, in the effective start and end date fields, select the schedule start and end dates. Unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the new effective dates are removed after the commitment is processed. 8. Save your changes. # Change the Primary Contact for a Household The Primary Contact field specifies the primary point of contact for Household Accounts. With NPSP 3.0, we introduced the Primary Contact field on Account. The Contact designated as the Primary Contact on a Household Account becomes the primary Contact on Opportunities created for that Household. For example, let's say you have a Household with Contacts Keisha Smith and James Smith, and Keisha is designated as the Household's Primary Contact. When you create an Opportunity record for the Smith family's donation, Keisha is automatically set as the primary donor on the Opportunity record. By default, NPSP sets the Primary Contact on an Account to be the first Contact that was created for that Account. You can change the Primary Contact by editing the Account record: 1. Navigate to the Household Account whose Primary Contact you want to change. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Primary Contact field, click the X next to the Primary Contact name, then select the name of the Contact you wish to make Primary. 4. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Primary Contact field on the Household Account page, your admin may need to add it to your page layout. If you don't see the Primary Contact field on the Manage Households page, your admin may need to add the field to a custom field set. See [Add the Primary Contact Field to the Manage Households Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring accounts.") for more information. # Change, Close, or Delete a Legacy Recurring Donation When a donor wants to modify how much or how often they give—or if they want to end a recurring donation—you need to modify or delete their recurring donation record. When you delete a recurring donation, NPSP deletes all related opportunity records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As of April 29th, 2020, Nonprofit Success Pack offers a new version of Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm) - **[Change a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_del_legacy_rd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes you may need to change a Recurring Donation based on new information from your donor. They may decide to shorten or lengthen the time frame of giving or perhaps increase or decrease the amount of each installment. - **[Close a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_del_legacy_rd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a donor wants to end a recurring gift, you can close the recurring donation record. Related open opportunity records are marked as Closed Lost by default, while Post opportunities are unchanged. - **[Delete a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_del_legacy_rd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete a Recurring Donation, NPSP deletes associated Opportunities. ## Change a Recurring Donation Sometimes you may need to change a Recurring Donation based on new information from your donor. They may decide to shorten or lengthen the time frame of giving or perhaps increase or decrease the amount of each installment. In this situation, you can edit the Recurring Donation record but be aware that NPSP **deletes and re-inserts any related open stage Opportunity records**, which can result in lost data. For this reason we recommend that you close the Recurring Donation and create a new one. You can also click **Refresh Opportunities** to schedule future Opportunities for the Recurring Donation and recalculate rollups. ![Recurring Donation with the drop-down expanded to show the Refresh Opportunities action.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ch_cl_del_rd_refresh.png) ## Close a Recurring Donation When a donor wants to end a recurring gift, you can close the recurring donation record. Related open opportunity records are marked as Closed Lost by default, while Post opportunities are unchanged. 1. Navigate to the Recurring Donation you want to close. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select `Closed` in the Open Ended Status field. 4. (Optional) Select a Closed Reason. 5. Click **Save**. All open child donations will be changed to a Closed Lost stage by default, or whatever you've specified in your Recurring Donations settings. Donations marked Posted remain unchanged. ![Donation record showing Closed Status and Closed Reason.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ch_cl_del_rd_openendstatus.png) On the Donations related list: ![Closed Recurring Donation Opportunity related list showing all future Opportunities in a Closed Lost stage.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ch_cl_del_rd_closed_lost.png) ## Delete a Recurring Donation When you delete a Recurring Donation, NPSP deletes associated Opportunities. If there are any associated Closed/Won Opportunities, you won't be able to delete the Recurring Donation. You must first delete these records manually before you can delete the Recurring Donation. # Change, Close, or Delete a Recurring Donation Learn how to update a Recurring Donation when a donor asks to change their donation amount, or their donation schedule. Also learn how to close (cancel), or delete a Recurring Donation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Managing Recurring Donations.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eFA6lglenyo) - **[Change an Open-Ended Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes a donor asks that you change the amount, the day of the month the donation is processed, or perhaps the frequency of their Recurring Donation. - **[Change a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Often a donor chooses to set up a fixed-length donation because they have a target amount or duration that they want to donate for. Sometimes, though, your donor might ask that you change the amount, date, or length of their donation. - **[Close a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes a donor requests that you end their Recurring Donation. Other times, you might lose contact with a donor and can't get current payment information. Here's how to close a Recurring Donation. - **[Delete a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete a Recurring Donation, NPSP deletes the associated Opportunities. If there are any associated Closed Won Opportunities, first delete the associated Closed Won Opportunities, then delete the Recurring Donation. ## Change an Open-Ended Recurring Donation Sometimes a donor asks that you change the amount, the day of the month the donation is processed, or perhaps the frequency of their Recurring Donation. Let's look at an example of changing a Recurring Donation using another monthly donor, Alan Hale. Alan is a longtime donor who recently started earning more money and is ready to donate more to his favorite charitable causes. Alan asks to increase his monthly giving from $50 to $100, starting on 6/1/2020. Let's walk through how to make that update. 1. Locate or create a Recurring Donation that you'd like to update. In this example we're going to use Alan's Recurring Donation record. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Update these fields: 1. **Amount** = $100 2. **Effective Date** = 6/1/2020 4. Click **Save**. Take a look at the sidebar components on the Recurring Donation detail page. ![A Recurring Donation record with the Active Schedules and Upcoming Installments components highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/alan-rd-details.png) Active Schedules provides details about the current and future schedules. You can see that the Current Schedule is set to end on 5/31/2020, and the Future Schedule starts on 6/1/2020. ![Active Schedules on Alan Hale's Recurring Donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/alan-active-schedules.png) Upcoming Installments displays a list of planned installments. Notice that the current schedule of $50 per month runs until 6/1/2020, when the amount increases to $100 per month. ![Upcoming Installments for Alan Hale's Recurring Donation. The monthly amount is $50 through 5/1/2020. On 6/1/2020, the amount increases to $100.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/alan-upcoming-installments.png) ## Change a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation Often a donor chooses to set up a fixed-length donation because they have a target amount or duration that they want to donate for. Sometimes, though, your donor might ask that you change the amount, date, or length of their donation. Let's look at an example. Ron Morimura signed up to donate $1250 per quarter for one year (totaling $5000 for the year). However, soon after he initially signed up to donate, he called and asked to extend his giving for a second year. Let's walk through how to make that update. 1. Locate a Recurring Donation that you'd like to update. In this example we're going to use Ron's Recurring Donation record. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Update these fields: 1. **Number of Planned Installments** = 8 (previously it was 4) 2. **Effective Date** = 7/1/2020 (or whatever the current date is) 4. Click **Save**. Before the update, Ron's Recurring Donation showed four Upcoming Installments. ![Ron Morimura's Recurring Donation showing four Upcoming Installments.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/morimura-four-installments.png) After the update, Ron's Recurring Donation now shows eight Upcoming Installments. ![Ron Morimura's Recurring Donation showing eight Upcoming Installments.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/morimura-eight-installments.png) ## Close a Recurring Donation Sometimes a donor requests that you end their Recurring Donation. Other times, you might lose contact with a donor and can't get current payment information. Here's how to close a Recurring Donation. 1. Locate the Recurring Donation you wish to close. 2. Click **Close Recurring Donation**. 3. Select a **Status Reason** and an **End Date**. 4. Click **Save**. ![Example of a Recurring Donation with the Close Recurring Donation quick action highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/close-recurring-donation.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Administrators: NPSP updates the Stage for open installment Opportunities according to the behavior defined in **NPSP Settings** | **Recurring Donations** | **Open Opportunity Behavior on RD Close**. ## Delete a Recurring Donation When you delete a Recurring Donation, NPSP deletes the associated Opportunities. If there are any associated Closed Won Opportunities, first delete the associated Closed Won Opportunities, then delete the Recurring Donation. To delete a Recurring Donation, find the record to delete and click **Delete**. When you delete a Recurring Donation, NPSP deletes the associated Opportunities. If there are any associated Closed Won Opportunities, you won't be able to delete the Recurring Donation. You must delete the Closed Won Opportunities before you can delete the Recurring Donation. # Check the RFM Score Calculation Process in Education Use Monitor Workflow Services to view the statuses of RFM score calculation jobs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To view statuses of RFM score calculation jobs:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Monitor, and select **Monitor Workflow Services**. 2. To see when all score calculation processes are complete, open the RFM Score Calculation job and go to the **Tasks** tab. # Check the RFM Score Calculation Process in Nonprofit Use Monitor Workflow Services to view the statuses of RFM score calculation jobs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To view statuses of RFM score calculation jobs:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Monitor, and select **Monitor Workflow Services**. 2. To see when all score calculation processes are complete, open the RFM Score Calculation job and go to the **Tasks** tab. # Check Virtual Call Licenses and Permissions for Education Cloud To configure virtual calls for self-service, admins require specific licenses and permissions.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To check licenses and permissions in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click the admin’s name. 3. Confirm that the admin has the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license assigned to them. See [Assign an Education Cloud Permission Set License to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Users get different access to Education Cloud based on the license assigned to them."). # Clean and Format Your Data Learn to clean and format your data prior to importing it into Salesforce. Improperly formatted data causes errors during import. For complete information, see [NPSP Import Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_import_data.htm&language=en_US) for more information. - **[Transfer Your Data to the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Transfer your source data to an NPSP Data Import template. Follow these guidelines when transferring your data to the template. - **[Clean Up Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Getting your data in great shape for import is the most important step. It's also the most labor-intensive. - **[Sample Data Quality Problems](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's look together at some data quality problems and how to fix them. - **[Fix Data Quality Problems in Your Existing Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's common to find data quality problems in your existing data. In our sample data set, we found seven just within the first twenty rows. Fortunately, these problems are straightforward to fix. - **[Prepare to Match Based on Salesforce ID](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn the right way to match your imported records with existing records in Salesforce using Salesforce IDs. ## Transfer Your Data to the Template Transfer your source data to an NPSP Data Import template. Follow these guidelines when transferring your data to the template. - Copy and paste the data from your existing data source, without altering your existing data source. Keeping your original data source intact is a best practice that allows you to go back and examine it should you experience problems or conflicts later on. - Some fields are required. Each import template contains notes on which fields those are. - If you have custom fields that have no corresponding field in the default template, add them in your template as well as in Advanced Mapping before you upload your data. For more information, see [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). - Review [Clean and Format Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn to clean and format your data prior to importing it into Salesforce. Improperly formatted data causes errors during import.") if you want to link records in the template based on their Salesforce ID. - Additionally, review [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching.") if your data source contains external IDs that reference another database After you transfer your source data to the import template, clean up and format your data. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to delete any columns you're not using and save your completed worksheet (tab) as a CSV or comma-separated values file. ## Clean Up Your Data Getting your data in great shape for import is the most important step. It's also the most labor-intensive. To import into Salesforce, your data must be structured in the required format. Otherwise, Salesforce will reject it. Invest time to prepare your data properly. If you simply try to get your data into Salesforce as quickly as possible, without regard to accuracy or cleanliness, you’ll run into errors. Salesforce offers a monthly webinar about data import. Sign up for the next webinar or watch one of the recordings to get more information. Learn more in [Salesforce Fundamentals for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the various ways to get help learning and using NPSP."). ## Sample Data Quality Problems Let's look together at some data quality problems and how to fix them. Here's a sample set of 20 records in an import spreadsheet. Rows 7, 10, and 11 contain data formatting issues. Can you spot them? ![A donor tracking spreadsheet with three formatting issues.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/prelim_sample_problems_1.png) - Row 7: The ZIP Code is missing a leading zero. - Row 10: Several members of the Brontë family are grouped into the same row. Every row should represent a single person or organization. Also, the last name should be simply, "Brontë." - Row 11: "Guest of Lewis Carroll" isn't a first name, and Salesforce will reject this row because there isn’t a Last Name. Let's look at additional columns in the spreadsheet. See if you can spot other areas that are problematic. Want a hint? Rows 3, 4, 11, and 20. ![A donor tracking spreadsheet with four formatting issues.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/prelim_sample_problems_3.png) - Row 3: Each donation should have a single check reference number. If there were two checks, the donation should be either two Opportunities or one Opportunity with multiple payments. - Row 4: Date fields should be date values, which "no receipt" isn't. - Row 11: The email address is incomplete. - Row 20: Another date field, in the DOB 1 column, contains a non-date value. ## Fix Data Quality Problems in Your Existing Data It's common to find data quality problems in your existing data. In our sample data set, we found seven just within the first twenty rows. Fortunately, these problems are straightforward to fix. Check for these common data problems in your source data. - Does every field represent a single piece of information? For example, are first name and last name in separate columns? Are multiple phone numbers in separate columns? - If you have multiple donations from the same person, is each donation on its own row with the associated donor's information? - Is Contact information current and correctly formatted? - Addresses: Do you have complete address information in the correct format for mailing? Third-party tools are useful for address validation. - ZIP Codes: In spreadsheets and databases, make sure ZIP codes are formatted as text fields or else leading zeros may be removed. - Email Addresses: Make sure there is an @ symbol and a .com or other valid ending for every email address. Also make sure that there's only one email address in each email cell. Remove extraneous text like “mailto:” - Phone Numbers: If you plan to use the Phone Number as a matching field against existing Contacts, it's critical that it matches the correct format for your existing data. For example, if all of the phone numbers in your database are formatted as 123-345-4567, don't import phone numbers as 123.345.4567. - Is data for required fields present in all your import rows? For example, all Contacts must have a Last Name and all Opportunities must have a Close Date. You're done with data cleanup when every field represents a single piece of information, and every value in that field is in the correct format. "But wait!" you say. "I have a spreadsheet with 20,000 rows of data! Do I really need to review every single row and make all of my data consistent?" The answer to this question is, unfortunately, yes. Manual data cleanup is tedious, but starting with clean data pays off in the long run. There are ways to make the clean up process faster. For example, learn to use find-and-replace, formulas, deduplication, and other spreadsheet tools. Consider changing your data collection practices so that the data is closer to the format you need for import. ## Prepare to Match Based on Salesforce ID Learn the right way to match your imported records with existing records in Salesforce using Salesforce IDs. The NPSP Data Import template includes special Imported fields that are useful if you want to match Contacts, Accounts, Campaigns, Opportunities, or Payments based on their existing 15 or 18 digit Salesforce ID. It's important to understand how these work when importing data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To match Opportunities or Payments, you must set a matching rule during the data import process. For more information, see [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching."). Keep in mind that donation matching should only be used to update an open Opportunity when a Payment comes in. A successful match will change the Stage of an open Opportunity to Closed/Won and/or mark an open Payment as Paid. Let's say for example that you want to update the Work Phone and Email for existing Contacts. You can easily achieve this as part of your data import. On the Contact detail page, simply copy the Salesforce ID from the browser URL. ![Getting the Salesforce ID from the browser URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/template_find_salesforce_id.png) Then, add the ID to the appropriate field in the data import template. To update existing Contacts, use either the Contact1 Imported or Contact2 Imported field. For Accounts, use the Account1 Imported or Account2 Imported field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When uploading the file, indicate that you want to use the Salesforce.com ID to match against the Imported field. This ensures that the columns get mapped properly. See [Upload Data from the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer.") for more information. [Do a Trial Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_do_trial_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "By running a test import, you can ensure that you resolve all your data integrity issues before importing your entire set of records. A trial run of 15-20 records (rows in your template) is a good test size.") to make sure you have everything set up correctly. ![Matching against Salesforce.com ID](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/upload_match_against.png) Now that your data is cleaned and formatted, [Do a Trial Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_do_trial_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "By running a test import, you can ensure that you resolve all your data integrity issues before importing your entire set of records. A trial run of 15-20 records (rows in your template) is a good test size.") to verify that your import works. # Clone Additional Recommender Flows Make a copy of the Education Cloud admissions flows that are used to connect recommenders to survey subjects and update admissions records with recommendation information before you use them, and then activate the flows.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To clone Education Cloud flows: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Admissions: Link Application Recommender to Survey Subject**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label, API name, and an optional description for your flow. 5. Save and activate your flow. 6. Similarly, make copies of the Admissions: Update Application Recommender and Recommendation with Survey Response and Admissions: Update IAT Status According to Recommendation flows. # Clone and Customize Flows to Run the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine Job To run the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine job, configure the EDU Admissions: Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile flow or the EDU Admissions: Schedule Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile Job flow. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:
  • Education Cloud Full Access
  • Manage Flow
1. To run the Data Processing Engine job manually, clone and customize the EDU Admissions: Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile flow. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **EDU Admissions: Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label, API name, and an optional description. 5. Save and activate your flow. 2. Optionally, to run the Data Processing Engine job on a schedule, clone and customize the EDU Admissions: Schedule Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile Job flow. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **EDU Admissions: Schedule Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile Job**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label, API name, and an optional description. 5. Save your edits. 6. Click **Start** and then click **Edit** to specify the frequency for running the flow. By default, the flow runs daily at 12:00 AM in your org’s local time zone. 7. Delete the original Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile subflow element. 8. Create a subflow element that references your cloned flow. 9. Save and activate your flow. # Clone and Turn on the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine Definition Template The Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine definition template creates and maintains educational institution searchable profiles so that your data shows in Criteria-Based Search and Filter. The Data Processing Engine job updates educational institution searchable profile records and deletes them if these records no longer meet the job definition’s filtering criteria. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure Data Processing Engine definitions:
  • Education Cloud Full Access
  • Customize Application
  • Modify All Data
Before you start: - [Enable Program and Benefit Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_prereqs.htm&type=5&language=en_US) so that the Data Processing Engine definition can access support and benefit management objects, even if your org doesn’t explicitly use Program and Benefit Management. - [Enable State and Country/Territory Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.admin_state_country_picklist_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Processing Engine and then select **Data Processing Engine**. 2. In the All Data Processing Engine Definitions view, select **Maintain Searchable Campus Data**, and then save it as a new Data Processing Engine definition. 3. Accept all default configurations and save them, and then activate your new Data Processing Engine definition. Run the activated Data Processing Engine definition by using a flow or from the definitions view. Data Processing Engine jobs are subject to daily or monthly limits. See [Transform Education Cloud Data with Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transform_education_cloud_data_with_data_processing_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Data Processing Engine (DPE) to transform the data that's available in your Salesforce org and write back the transformation results as new or updated records. For example, you can use DPE and flows to set up and maintain person public profile records for your alumni community."). # Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists in Education Create Actionable Lists and Fundraising rollups and summaries with Data Pipelines and Data Processing Engine. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To clone and activate Fundraising DPE templates:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin, complete these tasks: - To create and run Data Processing Engine definitions, [enable Data Pipelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.enable-data-pipelines.htm&language=en_US). The Data Processing Engine increases processing power and data manipulation. - To set up Fundraising with DPE, clone the DonorGiftSummary, GiftDesignation, OutreachSummary, and Fundraising Account Actionable List templates and run them. - Assign the Fundraising Access permission set to the Analytics Cloud Integration User. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter data processing, and then select **Data Processing Engine**. 2. From the Data Processing Engine Definitions list, open the DonorGift Summary template. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/show_actions.png) and select **Save As**. 4. Give a name to the new template and make sure that the API Name populates from the Name field. 5. Save the cloned template. 6. Click **Activate**. By default, Salesforce recalculates your rollups nightly and you can customize the schedule in Data Processing Engine. 7. Click **Run Definition**, and click **Next**. 8. Enter the date values for the calendar input variables, and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For example: if you're setting up rollups in the year 2024, enter 1/1/2024 for This Year, 1/1/2023 for Last Year, and 1/1/2022 for Two Years Ago. 9. If you want to keep a record for troubleshooting, select **Show output record count for nodes**. You can select up to 10 nodes to track. 10. Click **Run Definition**. 11. Similarly, clone the Gift Designation, Outreach Summary, and Fundraising Account Actionable List templates. You can set up Flows to run the Data Processing Engine definitions automatically. To set up gift commitment rollup calculations, [schedule a gift commitment batch processing job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_schedule_gift_commitment_processing_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters."). # Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists in Nonprofit Create Actionable Lists and Fundraising rollups and summaries with Data Pipelines and Data Processing Engine. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To clone and activate Fundraising DPE templates:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Before you begin, complete these tasks: - To create and run Data Processing Engine definitions, [enable Data Pipelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.enable-data-pipelines.htm&language=en_US). The Data Processing Engine increases processing power and data manipulation. - To set up Fundraising with DPE, clone the DonorGiftSummary, GiftDesignation, OutreachSummary, and Fundraising Account Actionable List templates and run them. - Assign the Fundraising Access permission set to the Analytics Cloud Integration User. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter data processing, and then select **Data Processing Engine**. 2. From the Data Processing Engine Definitions list, open the DonorGift Summary template. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/show_actions.png) and select **Save As**. 4. Give a name to the new template and make sure that the API Name populates from the Name field. 5. Save the cloned template. 6. Click **Activate**. By default, Salesforce recalculates your rollups nightly and you can customize the schedule in Data Processing Engine. 7. Click **Run Definition**, and click **Next**. 8. Enter the date values for the calendar input variables, and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note For example: if you're setting up rollups in the year 2024, enter 1/1/2024 for This Year, 1/1/2023 for Last Year, and 1/1/2022 for Two Years Ago. 9. If you want to keep a record for troubleshooting, select **Show output record count for nodes**. You can select up to 10 nodes to track. 10. Click **Run Definition**. 11. Similarly, clone the Gift Designation, Outreach Summary, and Fundraising Account Actionable List templates. You can set up Flows to run the Data Processing Engine definitions automatically. To set up gift commitment rollup calculations, [schedule a gift commitment batch processing job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_schedule_gift_commitment_processing_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters."). # Clone the Recommendation Survey Invitation Flow Clone the Admissions: Invite Recommender to Complete Recommendation Survey flow that sends your survey to recommenders.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To clone Education Cloud flows: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Admissions: Invite Recommender to Complete Recommendation Survey**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label, API name, and an optional description for your flow. 5. Save and activate your flow. # Close a Gift Commitment in Education Close a gift commitment when you no longer need to track it. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To close a gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to close. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png), and then select **Close Gift Commitment**. After you close a gift commitment, the status of the unpaid or failed gift transactions is updated depending on the value of the Formal Commitment Type field. | Value of Formal Commitment Type Field | Status of Unpaid or Failed Transactions | | --- | --- | | Verbal | Canceled | | Written | Written Off | To include the Formal Commitment Type field, customize the commitment page layout. # Close a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit Close a gift commitment when you no longer need to track it. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To close a gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to close. 3. Click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png), and then select **Close Gift Commitment**. After you close a gift commitment, the status of the unpaid or failed gift transactions is updated depending on the value of the Formal Commitment Type field. | Value of Formal Commitment Type Field | Status of Unpaid or Failed Transactions | | --- | --- | | Verbal | Canceled | | Written | Written Off | To include the Formal Commitment Type field, customize the commitment page layout. # Close Recurring Donations In Elevate When you're ready to have Elevate permanently stop processing recurring donations, close all recurring donations. **Where:** This change applies to all Elevate products and editions. **Who:** Users who manage recurring donations in the Elevate admin portal. SEE ALSO [Manage Payments and Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.en-us_el_manage_payments.htm) # Collect Data to Ground Agent Recommendations for Student Goals Collect student data using the EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow to ground agent recommendations, ensuring they are personalized and context-aware. More available information generally improves agent performance.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
This flow collects information to ensure the agent’s responses are relevant, data-driven, and context-aware. | Data Type | Description | | --- | --- | | Person Traits | Unique student characteristics or attributes, such as Leader or Detail-Oriented. See [Create Person Traits.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?language=en_US&id=sfdo.ec_create_person_traits.htm) | | Person Competencies | The student’s skills and proficiencies, such as Python or Public Speaking. See [Create Person Competencies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_person_competencies.htm&language=en_US) | | Person Affinities | Maps the student’s preferences and interests, such as Sustainability or Mobile App Development. See [Create Person Affinities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_person_affinities.htm&language=en_US). | | Involvement Groups | Empowers students to explore new interests and to hone their talents. See [Create Involvement Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_involvement_group_management.htm&language=en_US). | | First-Generation Status | Flags first-generation students to tailor recommendations and support. | | Academic Profile | Gets the program of study and GPA from the student’s active term enrollment and learner program. See [Learning Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learning_management.htm&language=en_US). | | Assessments | Includes the student’s results from any submitted career or interest assessments for career and life goals. See [Career and Interest Assessment Library Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_career_interest_assessment_library_management.htm&language=en_US). | The flow collects this data and sends it to the agent’s prompt, grounding the Large Language Model (LLM) in student-specific context before generating recommendations. You must customize this flow to match the specific data your institution values and collects. - Add unique data, such as tracking student volunteer hours, mentorship program participation, or portfolio submissions in a custom entity. - Streamline process flow steps to use only the data relevant to your institution. - Modify flow logic to include data that meets certain criteria, such as club memberships where the student holds a leadership position. ## Set Up Flow for Student Goals Clone and configure the EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow. This ensures the Student Goal Agent's recommendations are grounded in the data that matters most to your institution and your students. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To set up Student Goals flow: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin, make sure that you configure involvement groups, Discovery Framework-based assessments, learner programs, and student details (affinities, competencies, and traits). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Flows**. 2. Find and select **EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name for the new flow. 5. Add, remove, or update flow elements to match your data. 6. Save and activate the flow. # Collect Recommendations Save time and improve the experience for applicants, recommenders, and admissions staff. Recommender experience simplifies the recommendation process, from sending a survey invitation to populating the individual application task with recommendation details, and enabling recommendation reminders.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To test the recommendation experience, register on your Education Portal as an applicant, start an application, and then request a recommendation. This process creates the contact and recommender records that cause the flows to run. | Flow | What it does | | --- | --- | | Admissions: Invite Recommender to Complete Recommendation Survey | Sends an email inviting an applicant's recommender to complete a recommendation survey. | | Admissions: Link Application Recommender to Survey Subject | Adds a survey subject to the application recommender record. | | Admissions: Update Application Recommender and Recommendation with Survey Response | Updates the related application recommender status and links the survey response to a new application recommendation record. | | Update IAT Status According to Recommendation | Updates the individual application task status based on the application recommender status. | - **[Feedback Management Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_ready_to_use_recommender_experience_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recommender experience flows use Salesforce Feedback Management surveys to collect recommendation details and Omnistudio components show them on the Individual Application page. - **[Recommendation Form Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_send_surveys_to_recommenders.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Salesforce Feedback Management and Education Cloud features to send recommendation surveys to applicants' references. # Collect Student Feedback Using Sentiment Surveys Use Salesforce Surveys to collect feedback from students on their support, program, and school experience at your institution. - **[Learn About Sentiment Surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sentiment surveys let you find out how students are feeling about their support and other experiences at your school. Using surveys, you can proactively identify the best ways to support your students. Review survey results with your team and with stakeholders such as a dean, provost, principal, or school board, and use the insights to improve the student experience. - **[What Do You Want to Learn?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider what you want to learn from your survey through the lens of how you can improve your student support and educational experiences. How effective are your Success Plans? How supported do students feel as they navigate virtual learning? How prepared and supported do students feel as they apply to college or graduate school, or apply for financial aid? - **[Collaborate with Your Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating a successful sentiment survey starts with your support staff—after all, they know their students the best. You might want to assemble a team of your top support staff to help with the process. Then consider these recommendations. - **[Review Your Salesforce Survey Implementation Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When planning your implementation, ask yourself these questions. - **[Create a Trial Survey](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every org has access to create one free trial Salesforce Survey. You don't set up or purchase licenses for the trial survey. We recommend that you create a trial survey before fully implementing Salesforce Surveys. - **[Set Up Your Survey Administrators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To set up your survey administrators, complete these steps. These instructions assume that you have access to the Survey Creator permission set. - **[Create a Survey](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Survey Builder to create the survey form. ## Learn About Sentiment Surveys Sentiment surveys let you find out how students are feeling about their support and other experiences at your school. Using surveys, you can proactively identify the best ways to support your students. Review survey results with your team and with stakeholders such as a dean, provost, principal, or school board, and use the insights to improve the student experience. There are many survey products out there. We'll get you started using Salesforce Surveys, but you can use the methodology for implementing surveys with any product. ## What Do You Want to Learn? Consider what you want to learn from your survey through the lens of how you can improve your student support and educational experiences. How effective are your Success Plans? How supported do students feel as they navigate virtual learning? How prepared and supported do students feel as they apply to college or graduate school, or apply for financial aid? In higher education, also ask students about: - The support experience—appointment scheduling, topics, and the check-in process. How satisfied are students with their success team? - The program experience—course offerings, department specifics, and end-of-term surveys. Did the student's coursework prepare them for a career in their desired field? - The university experience—registration, university services, and event-based feedback. Do students have concerns about their financial well-being? Do they feel prepared to enter the job market? ## Collaborate with Your Support Staff Creating a successful sentiment survey starts with your support staff—after all, they know their students the best. You might want to assemble a team of your top support staff to help with the process. Then consider these recommendations. - Identify a clear survey goal. - Research survey best practices on the web. Look at best practices and recommendations for question length, variation, balance, and style. - Think backwards and consider the future reporting data points. Think about long-term data points that allow you to see a before-and-after result that can be shared with others, such as a dean, provost, principal, or school board. - Review the [survey question types](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=reference_survey_question_types.htm) in Salesforce Help. - Keep your survey varied. Use a combination of question types, not only simple Yes or No questions. - Consider [tailoring questions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=task_add_display_logic.htm&type=0) based on responses in the survey. - Ensure that surveys comply with your institution's privacy and security policies. ## Review Your Salesforce Survey Implementation Options When planning your implementation, ask yourself these questions. - Who do you want to create surveys? - How do you want to distribute surveys? - How do you want to track survey responses? You'll probably want to give only specific people on your team permission to create surveys. Let's call them _survey administrators_. They'll work with support staff to create surveys, write questions, and coordinate survey distribution and reporting. Survey administrators require the Survey Creator permission set and access to the Survey object and tab. Only users with the Survey Creator permission set can email unique survey links that can be associated with specific students. After you know who will create surveys, decide how you want to implement the survey.
 

Generic Survey Link

Unique Survey Link

Portal Embedded

How do participants access the survey?

Generic link in an email opens the survey in a webpage

Unique link in an email opens the survey in a webpage

In the portal

How is the survey sent?

Survey administrators email participants using a preconfigured email template that includes the survey link.

Survey administrators click the Get Survey Invitation action on a student's Contact record and copy a unique link. Then they compose an email to the student and paste in the copied link.

No one sends anything. Students must know to visit the portal page hosting the survey.

How are survey results tracked?

You can view aggregate survey responses in Survey Builder. You can't see responses for a specific participant.

Survey responses are associated with a specific student and viewable via the Survey Invitations related list on the student's Contact record. You can also view aggregate survey responses in Survey Builder.

You can view aggregate survey responses in Survey Builder. You can't see responses for a specific student.

What permissions do survey senders need?

No special permissions are needed because the sender uses an email template.

The sender needs the Survey Creator permission set to see the Get Survey Invitation action.

No special permissions are needed because the survey isn't sent via a link.

Why choose this option?

You want to send surveys using an easy template. You want more control over who creates surveys.

You want to track how specific students responded.

You want to solicit feedback in your student portal.

Is this option available in the trial?

Yes

No

Yes
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You don't have to choose one implementation option. You can implement the same survey in multiple ways, or you can choose to implement each survey differently. For example, say you have a first-year orientation at the start of the fall term. You can send an email to the students that signed in at the event and you can host a survey for feedback on the event on your student portal. ## Create a Trial Survey Every org has access to create one free trial Salesforce Survey. You don't set up or purchase licenses for the trial survey. We recommend that you create a trial survey before fully implementing Salesforce Surveys. 1. [Enable surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=task_enable_surveys.htm). To create surveys that are accessible in a student portal, select your site from the picklist on the Survey Settings setup page. 2. [Configure sharing settings for surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=task_update_surveys_sharing_settings.htm). 3. Update your Student Success Hub profiles. - Verify that your System Administrator profile has access to the Survey object and tab. - If you don't want your support staff to see the Surveys item yet, verify that your support staff profile doesn't include access to the Survey tab. 4. [Add the Surveys item to the Student Success Hub app navigation menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). 5. [Create a survey](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=task_create_survey.htm). We suggest making a basic trial survey with only two or three questions. 6. For simplicity, distribute the trial survey by generating the survey link in Survey Builder and sending an email to a test Contact record. 7. Review the email that was sent to the test Contact record. If your trial was a success and you like the Salesforce Surveys experience, contact your Salesforce representative for pricing and purchasing information. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important To fully implement Salesforce Surveys, you must purchase Survey Creator licenses. You can check your available user licenses on the Company Information page in Setup. ## Set Up Your Survey Administrators To set up your survey administrators, complete these steps. These instructions assume that you have access to the Survey Creator permission set. 1. [Give users permission to create surveys.](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=concept_create_send_permission.htm&type=5) The Survey Creator license comes with a predefined Survey Creator permission set. Assign this permission set to any user who will: - Create surveys. - Send unique survey links. This implementation option allows users with the Survey Creator permission set to generate unique survey links and see a student's survey responses. 2. Give users access to the Surveys tab. Update your survey administrators' user profiles to include access to the Surveys item in the Student Success Hub app. Alternatively, you can create another permission set that gives access to the Surveys tab. 3. Optionally, verify that the Get Survey Invitation action is on your Contact page layout. If you want to send unique survey links, make sure the Contact page layout includes the Get Survey Invitation action. 4. [Optionally, add a related list to the Contact page layout](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=concept_survey_invitation_related_list.htm&type=5). If you want to send unique survey links, add the Survey Invitations related list to the Contact page layout. This related list lets survey administrators view and manage a student's survey invitations from the Contact record. ## Create a Survey Use Survey Builder to create the survey form. 1. In the Student Success Hub app navigation menu, select **Surveys**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Use Survey Builder to create a welcome page, enter your questions, and create a thank you page. You can even preview your survey to make adjustments. 4. Click **Activate** to make your survey live. To get links to your survey, click **Send** at the top of Survey Builder. Then specify the [survey invitation settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=reference_survey_invitation_settings.htm). # Common Health Check Errors Learn about errors you can encounter when you run a health check on your NPSP org. For instructions on how to run an NPSP health check, see [Run a Health Check in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_run_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Health Check looks through your org for both data and configuration inconsistencies or errors and reports back the type of error along with a description."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Health Check](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VN2W26AUnNE). - **[Opportunity Contact Roles (aka Duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix duplicate Opportunity Contact Roles that are set as primary. - **[Account Data (aka Orphaned One-to-One Accounts)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix one-to-one Accounts that don't have related Contacts. - **[Account Model Data (aka Incorrect Account Model Data)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix inconsistent or inaccurate account model types after migrating to the household account model. - **[Account Model Data (aka Mixed Account Models)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix a mix of household and one-to-one account types. - **[Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix Opportunity stages for recurring donations. - **[Household Object Data (aka Orphaned Household Object Data)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix NPSP 2 Households that don't have any related Contacts. ## Opportunity Contact Roles (aka Duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles) Learn how to fix duplicate Opportunity Contact Roles that are set as primary. **Error Text:** _There were X opportunities found that had more than one Opportunity Contact Role marked as Primary. Having multiple OpportunityContactRoles marked Primary can cause Opportunity rollups, such as Total Gifts, to be incorrectly calculated. View these Opportunities by running the Opportunities with Primary Contact Roles report in the NPSP Health Check reports folder, and looking at the records with 2 or more Primary Contact Roles._ **Reason:** There are one or more opportunities that have two or more related Opportunity Contact Roles marked as primary. This can happen if someone enters a Primary Contact Role for an opportunity that already has one, either manually or via data import tool such as the Salesforce Data Loader. This can cause issues with reports and other data, as Opportunity rollups may be miscalculated. **Steps to Fix:** Find out which opportunities are affected by running the Opportunities with Primary Contact Roles report. Then, ensure that each Opportunity only has one Contact Role marked as Primary. 1. Click the Reports tab. 2. In the left menu, click **All Folders**. 3. Click **NPSP Health Check**. 4. Click the **Opportunities with Primary Contact Roles** report. Opportunities with more than one contact role will appear at the top. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The report is limited to Opportunities with a Close Date in the last 90 days, so you may need to adjust the date filter. ![Opportunities with Primary Contact Roles sample report.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/health_check_errs_oppsprimcontactroles.png) 5. In the report, click the Opportunity Name of an opportunity you need to fix. 6. Go to the Contact Roles related list. You should see a listing of all the roles marked as Primary: ![Contact Roles related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/health_check_errs_contactroles.png) 7. Edit or delete each role until you're left with a single Contact Role marked as primary. 8. Repeat this process for all affected opportunities. If you have a large amount of opportunities, consider using the Data Importer. ## Account Data (aka Orphaned One-to-One Accounts) Learn how to fix one-to-one Accounts that don't have related Contacts. **Error Text:** _There are X One-to-One Accounts who have no Contacts. Consider deleting these unused One-to-One Accounts to save space._ **Reason:** There are one or more One-to-One Accounts (the **\_SYSTEM: AccountType** field value is One-to-One Individual) that have no related Contacts or a blank Primary Contact field. This can happen after migrating from one Account Model to another or if all Contacts get deleted from a particular Account but the Account itself isn't deleted. **Steps to Fix:** Ensure that all One-to-One Individual Accounts have related Contacts. 1. To identify the Accounts causing the error, run a report with this criteria: - **\_SYSTEM: AccountType** equal to One-to-One Individual - **Number of Household Members** set to 0 2. For each Account listed, either add Contacts or delete the Account (if it's no longer used). ## Account Model Data (aka Incorrect Account Model Data) Learn how to fix inconsistent or inaccurate account model types after migrating to the household account model. **Error Text:** _X Account records using the Household Account \[or One-to-One Individual\] record type do not have their System fields correctly set. For Household Accounts, make sure npe01\_\_SYSTEM\_AccountType\_\_c is 'Household Account'. For One-to-One Accounts, make sure npe01\_\_SYSTEM\_AccountType\_\_c is 'One-to-One Individual'. Also make sure for both, npe01\_\_SYSTEMISINDIVIDUAL\_\_c is true._ **Reason:** This can often happen after an upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack or a migration between Account Model types. If you're migrating to the Household Account Model from the One-to-One or vice versa, you may get this error if the npe01\_\_SYSTEM\_AccountType\_\_c does not match the proper record type. Additionally, you may have inadvertently changed some of these (particularly if they are exposed on your page layouts). This can impact how NPSP deals with your data, as it may not be sure which Account record is which. **Steps to Fix:** Find out which Accounts are affected by running the Individual Accounts by Account Type report. Then, update the affected Accounts' \_SYSTEM: AccountType field. 1. Click the Reports tab. 2. In the left menu, click **All Folders**. 3. Click **NPSP Health Check**. 4. Click **Individual Accounts by Account Type**. This report shows the individual Accounts by \_SYSTEM: AccountType. ![Individual Accounts screen showing different Account Types](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/health_check_errs_accttype.png) 5. To view a detailed list of Accounts, click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/health_check_errs_settingsicon.png), then select the **Details** checkbox. Click **Apply**. 6. Click on the name of an Account you need to fix. This takes you to the Account details. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Change the value in the \_SYSTEM: AccountType field to match the Record Type selected as the Account Model in NPSP Settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the \_SYSTEM: AccountType field, you may need to add it to your Account page layout. 9. Click **Save**. 10. Repeat these steps for each Account whose \_SYSTEM: AccountType needs to change. ## Account Model Data (aka Mixed Account Models) Learn how to fix a mix of household and one-to-one account types. **Error Text:** _The Account Model is set to Household Account, but Health Check has found that you're using a mixture of Account types. All of your Accounts should use the same Account Model. View all of your Accounts and their types by running the Individual Accounts by Account Type report in the NPSP Health Check reports folder._ **Reason:** This error is caused by Accounts in Salesforce having more than one individual \_SYSTEM: AccountType—typically a mix of Household Accounts and One-to-One Individual Accounts. This occurs when you: - Change from the Household Account Model to the One-to-One Individual Model in NPSP Settings without fully migrating existing Account/Contact records. Changing the Account Model in NPSP Settings only affects records created after you make the change; it doesn't update your existing records. - Migrate to Nonprofit Success Pack and convert to the Household Account model, but do not verify and delete the One-to-One Account records. **Steps to Fix:** Find out which Accounts have different Account Models using the Individual Accounts by Account Type report. Then, update the affected Accounts' \_SYSTEM: AccountType field. 1. Click the Reports tab. 2. In the left menu, click **All Folders**. 3. Click **NPSP Health Check**. 4. Click Individual Accounts by Account Type. ![Individual Accounts by Account Type list showing different Account Types](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/health_check_errs_accttype.png) 5. Click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/health_check_errs_settingsicon.png), then select the Details checkbox. This will show the names of the Accounts. 6. Click the name of Account that you need to fix. This takes you to the Account details. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Change the value in the \_SYSTEM: AccountType field to match the Record Type selected as the Account Model in NPSP Settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the \_SYSTEM: AccountType field, you may need to add it to your Account page layout. 9. Click **Save**. 10. Repeat these steps for each Account whose \_SYSTEM: AccountType needs to change. (You may need to use a data import tool to fix this issue if there are too many records to fix manually.) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you migrated from one Account Model to another and want to delete any of the leftover Accounts, ensure that all data has been moved over and everything has been related and re-parented properly. ## Recurring Donations Learn how to fix Opportunity stages for recurring donations. **Error Text:** _The Opportunity stage Pledged does not exist or is not active. Add this Opportunity Stage value in Salesforce Setup._ **Reason:** This error is caused by a Custom Label containing the value ‘Pledged', but there isn't a matching Opportunity Stage. When installing NPSP for the first time, you may see this error. **Steps to Fix:** Create the Pledged stage. To do this: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click the **Stage** field. You may need to toggle through multiple pages of fields to find the Stage field. 6. In the Opportunity Stages Picklist Values list, click **New**. 7. In the Stage Name field, enter Pledged. 8. Make sure the Type is set to Open. 9. Set a Probability and Forecast Category, then click **Save**. If your process doesn't call for a Pledged stage, you can change the Custom Label to match whatever you'd like the Recurring Donation stage to be set to. To do this: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In Setup, enter Custom Labels in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Labels** under the User Interface menu. 3. Click **RecurringDonationStageName**. 4. Click **New Local Translations/Overrides**. 5. Select English for the Language. 6. Type the value you'd like to use in the Translation Text box. 7. Click **Save**. ## Household Object Data (aka Orphaned Household Object Data) Learn how to fix NPSP 2 Households that don't have any related Contacts. **Error Text:** _There are X Household objects who have no Contacts. Consider deleting these unused Household objects to save space. If you have completed a conversion to the Household Account model and no longer need the data on the Household object records they can be deleted. View these Household objects by running the Empty Household Objects report in the NPSP Health Check reports folder._ **Reason:** This error is caused by having Household Objects (only used in One-to-One and Individual Bucket models) that have no Contacts in them. This error can happen for many reasons: - Deleting a Contact or changing the Household relationships manually. - Converting to the Household Account model may leave you with empty Households since your Contacts will move to their new Household Accounts. Accordingly, we recommend that you set the Household Object Rules setting to ‘No Contacts' in NPSP Settings (under **People** | **Households**). **Steps to Fix:** 1. Click the Reports tab. 2. In the left menu, click **All Folders**. 3. Click **NPSP Health Check**. 4. Click **Empty Household Objects**. 5. Manually delete each record listed in this report. If there are too many to delete manually, consider using a data import tool. # Compare and Assign Mentors Launch a screen flow on a benefit assignment record to compare potential mentors for a mentee and to assign a mentor to the benefit assignment. ![Screenshot showing how to launch the comparison screen flow from the benefit assignment record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_benefit_assignment.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important To run the screen flow, users need the permission set for mentoring facilitators. See [Set Up Mentoring Facilitators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring_facilitators.htm). | User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To compare and assign mentors: | Education Cloud Full Access |
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
1. On a mentee's benefit assignment record page, click **Assign a Provider**. 2. Select up to three providers to compare, and then click **Next**. 3. Select a mentor, and then click **Next**. 4. Review your selection, and then click **Next**. 5. Click **Done** to exit the screen flow. # Compare and Assign Mentors by Using a Screen Flow Use a screen flow to compare a mentee with potential mentors, and then assign a mentor to the mentee. Use the fields on the Mentoring participants' mentoring profile record to identify a match. - **[Configure the Mentor Comparison Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_the_mentor_comparison_screen_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone the Mentor Comparison screen flow, and then identify the fields on the participants' mentoring profiles that you want to use to select and compare potential mentors. - **[Update Benefit Assignment Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_benefit_assignment_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and add a button to launch the flow to compare and assign mentors. When you run the screen flow on the benefit assignment page, the flow uses the fields from the mentoring profile to compare a mentee with potential mentors. - **[Compare and Assign Mentors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_compare_and_assign_mentors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Launch a screen flow on a benefit assignment record to compare potential mentors for a mentee and to assign a mentor to the benefit assignment. # Complete a Review View relevant materials about a Funding Request and submit your review. - **[Find Open Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find all Reviews that are Not Started or In Progress using the Open Reviews list view. - **[Review and Submit Your Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the grant application and submit your feedback from the App Launcher. ## Find Open Reviews Find all Reviews that are Not Started or In Progress using the Open Reviews list view. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Reviews**. 2. From List Views, select **Open Reviews**. ![See a list of Not Started or In Progress Reviews using the Open Reviews list view.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/ofm_open_reviews.png) ## Review and Submit Your Feedback Review the grant application and submit your feedback from the App Launcher. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Grants Management**. 2. Click the **Reviews** tab. 3. Click the name of the review. 4. Review the information in the Review Workspace. 5. In the side panel, update the **Status** and enter other details. 6. Save your changes. # Complete a Review Provide feedback on a fundseeker's application. - **[Find Open Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_complete_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find all Reviews that are Not Started or In Progress using the Open Reviews list view. - **[Complete a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_complete_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you have reviewed a fundseeker’s application and are ready to provide feedback, you can complete a Review from the Funding Request. ## Find Open Reviews Find all Reviews that are Not Started or In Progress using the Open Reviews list view. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Reviews**. 2. From List Views, select **Open Reviews**. ![See a list of Not Started or In Progress Reviews using the Open Reviews list view.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/ofm_open_reviews.png) ## Complete a Review After you have reviewed a fundseeker’s application and are ready to provide feedback, you can complete a Review from the Funding Request. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Funding Requests**. 2. Select the Funding Request that has a Review to complete. 3. Click the **Reviews** tab. ![Click the Reviews tab on a Funding Request to create or edit a Review](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/ofm_complete_review2.png) 4. Click the Review Name. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Update the Status. For example, if you plan to complete the review during this session, select **Submitted**. 7. Enter Comments. 8. Save your changes. 9. Click **Submit Review**. The Submitted Date will show the current date, and Status will change to Submitted. ![Click Submit Review to complete a Review](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/ofm_complete_review3.png) 10. Save your changes. # Complete Applications Faster and Assign Application Tasks Learners can complete applications more easily now that forms autofill with data that's already stored for an applicant. We're also introducing the Individual Application Task object that you can use to create action plans for applications. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can edit application forms in OmniStudio and create action plans. Users with Education Cloud Limited Access can view action plans and applications submitted by users. Users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud license can access application forms on your Experience Cloud site. **How**: When a learner starts an application, form fields autofill with data that your institution already has stored for the applicant. The applicant can keep or update the information, and then move on to the next section. When you create an action plan template with Individual Application as the target object, you can add Tasks, Document Checklist Items, and Individual Application Task records. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Get Started with Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_get_started_with_applications.htm) # Complete Due Diligence for a Grantseeker Track due diligence requirements on a grantseeker’s Account using Action Plans. Create an Action Plan from an Action Plan Template that contains Tasks, Document Checklist Items, or a combination of both related to gathering this information.  - _Tasks_ are actionable steps that need to be taken to determine if a grantseeker is eligible for funding. For example, a Task to verify a grantseeker’s tax-exempt status. - _Document Checklist Items_ collect and store documentation about a grantseeker. For example, a Document Checklist Item for a grantseeker’s previous two years of finances. Additionally, you can create a _Verification Check_ on a Document Checklist Item. Verification Checks are a unique action specific to due diligence that allows you to upload and track the status of several files for a Document Checklist Item. For example, an Action Plan for due diligence has a Document Checklist Item requesting two years of financial records from a grantseeker. When a grantmaker receives the documentation, they can create a Verification Check on the Document Checklist Item, upload the files, and change the status to Accepted. - **[Create an Action Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_due_diligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Action Plan from Action Plan Templates that your org has published. For example, let's create an Action Plan from the US: Due Diligence Action Plan Template will help track due diligence requirements. - **[Create a Verification Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_due_diligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your admin added a Document Checklist Item to an Action Plan Template, you can use a Verification Check to track the documentation you’ve received as well as the status of the documentation. For example, if there is a Document Checklist Item requesting two years of financial records from a grantseeker, you can add both files by creating a Verification Check. - **[Edit a Verification Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_due_diligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Verification Check can be edited. For example, you can create a Verification Check for an organization's Form 990 and put it in a Pending status until you receive the documentation. Once received, you can edit the Verification Check then change the Status and upload the file. - **[Find an Organization's Tax Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_due_diligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If an admin configured the option to search for an organization’s tax status, you’ll see the option to Check Tax Status on a Verification Item. Use this to find if a grantseeking organization based in the United States is eligible for funding and store it on their Account record. ## Create an Action Plan Create an Action Plan from Action Plan Templates that your org has published. For example, let's create an Action Plan from the US: Due Diligence Action Plan Template will help track due diligence requirements. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Grants Management**. 2. Navigate to an Account. 3. Click **Action Plans**. 4. Click **New Plan**. ![Action Plans tab on the Account record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/actionplans1.png) 5. Enter a Name. For example, Takagawa Institute: Due Diligence. 6. From Action Plan Template, search and select the Action Plan. For example, **US Due Diligence**. 7. To skip weekends and company-designated holidays, select **Skip Nonwork Days For Tasks**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note See [Set Up Nonwork Days](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=ind.fsc_action_plans_admin_set_up_non_work_days.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help to set working days and holidays. 8. Enter a Start Date. 9. Target Record is auto-filled to the current Account. 10. Select a Status. 11. Click **Next**, then click **Save**. If the Action Plan Template creator selected **Let users add items to action plans**, you can add additional Tasks and Document Checklist Items to this Action Plan. ![Example of an Action Plan with Tasks and Document Checklist Items.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/actionplans2.png) ## Create a Verification Check If your admin added a Document Checklist Item to an Action Plan Template, you can use a Verification Check to track the documentation you’ve received as well as the status of the documentation. For example, if there is a Document Checklist Item requesting two years of financial records from a grantseeker, you can add both files by creating a Verification Check. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Verification Checks are only available on Document Checklist Items. Let's say you received a grantseeker's Form 990. You can now create a Verification Check on the Form 990 Document Checklist Item, upload the file, and change the status to Accepted. 1. Navigate back to the Account. 2. Click **Verification Items**. ![The Verification Items tab on an Account record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/verificationcheck1.png) 3. Click (![Show more actions button.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)), then select **Create Verification Check**. ![Create Verification Check.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/verificationcheck2.png) 4. Enter a Verification Check Name. For example, Form 990: 2019. 5. The Status defaults to New, but you can select another Status. For example, **Accepted**. 6. Enter the Date Verified. 7. Optionally, add Comments. 8. Upload the file by clicking Upload Files and selecting the file, or by dropping the file into Files. 9. Click **Done** when the file is uploaded successfully. 10. Click **Save**. ![Example of Verification Checks applied to the Verification Items tab.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/verificationcheck3.png) ## Edit a Verification Check A Verification Check can be edited. For example, you can create a Verification Check for an organization's Form 990 and put it in a Pending status until you receive the documentation. Once received, you can edit the Verification Check then change the Status and upload the file. 1. Navigate to an Account that has an existing Verification Check. 2. Click **Verification Items**. 3. From a Verification Item, click (![Show more actions button.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)), then click **Edit a Verification Check**. ![Edit a Verification Check.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/editverificationcheck1.png) 4. Make updates to the Verification Check. For example, change the Status to Accepted, add a Date Verified, and upload the file. 5. Click **Save**. ![Example of completed Verification Checks.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/editverificationcheck2.png) ## Find an Organization's Tax Status If an admin configured the option to search for an organization’s tax status, you’ll see the option to Check Tax Status on a Verification Item. Use this to find if a grantseeking organization based in the United States is eligible for funding and store it on their Account record. ![Information from the selected tax result autopopulates on a Verification Check record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_checktaxstatus3.png) 1. Navigate to an Account. 2. Click **Verification Items**. 3. From a Verification Item, click (![Show more actions button.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)), then click **Check Tax Status**. ![Select Check Tax Status from a Verification Item.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_checktaxstatus.png) 4. Enter an EIN for the organization, then click **Search**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If an EIN is specified in the Tax ID field on an Account, it automatically shows up here. 5. A result shows if a valid EIN is entered. Select it, and click **Continue**. ![An example of an organization's tax status search results.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_checktaxstatus2.png) 6. Now, you can create the Verification Check. 1. Enter a Verification Check Name. 2. Select a Status. The default is New. 3. Enter a Date Verified. 4. Add Comments if needed. 5. Upload Files if needed. 6. Click **Save**. # Complete Due Diligence for Grantseekers Grantseekers can complete the due diligence process by using Action Plans, Verification Checks, and Tax Status Search. - **[Complete Due Diligence for a Grantseeker](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_due_diligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track due diligence requirements on a grantseeker’s Account using Action Plans. Create an Action Plan from an Action Plan Template that contains Tasks, Document Checklist Items, or a combination of both related to gathering this information. # Complete Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites Before you turn on and set up Nonprofit Cloud features, configure the basics for Nonprofit Cloud such as Person Accounts, Data Pipelines, Actionable Segmentation, Interaction Summaries, Interest Tags, Record Alerts, and Timeline. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
User Permissions Needed
To set up Nonprofit Cloud features: View Setup and Configuration
1. [Enable Person Accounts and set up Group Memberships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_set_up.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Nonprofit Cloud uses Person Accounts to represent individuals, Business Accounts to represent households and other groups, and Group Membership objects to connect individuals and organizations to each other. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Grantmaking customers who make the vast majority of their grants to organizations rather than individuals are likely to find the Contact + Business Account model more appropriate than Person Accounts. Person Accounts aren't required for Grantmaking. However, they are strongly recommended for customers using other areas of Nonprofit Cloud, like Fundraising or Program Management. Grantmakers who aren't leveraging these other feature areas and only make grants to organizations will likely benefit from leaving Person Accounts off. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Set up Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_setup.htm&language=en_US). Summarize data about donors, volunteers, your fundraising efforts, and programs. Actionable Segmentation, which relies on Data Processing Engine, gives you a way to segment your constituents based on this summarized data. 3. [Enable Actionable Segmentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.actionable_segmentation_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Actionable Segmentation, which relies on Data Processing Engine, gives you a way to segment your constituents based on this summarized data. 4. [Enable Interaction Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_enable_config_interaction_summaries.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Use Interaction Summaries to store permanent, detailed notes of interactions with donors, program participants, and other stakeholders. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important When you turn on Interaction Summary, also turn on Role Hierarchy–Based Sharing for Interaction Summary, Role Hierarchy–Based Sharing for Interactions, and Enhanced Interaction Note Interface. 5. [Enable Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_enable_topics_for_objects.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Track the attributes of volunteer initiatives, job positions, shifts, donors, program participants, and other stakeholders and match them with campaigns and other outreach efforts. 6. [Enable Record Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.record_alerts_set_up.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Get alerts to the changes in records so that you can take proactive action. 7. [Enable Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.timeline.htm&type=5&language=en_US). View a history of donor and stakeholder interactions with your organization. See Also: - [How Nonprofit Cloud Models Groups and Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_how_nonprofit_cloud_models_groups_relationships.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Stakeholder Management in Nonprofit Cloud](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/stakeholder-management-in-nonprofit-cloud) # Complete Your Work Using a Convenient App Use the Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising apps to perform common nonprofit responsibilities and tasks. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: These features apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can access the Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising applications. To perform tasks in the Philanthropy & Partnerships app, users need the Fundraising\_Admin or Fundraising\_User permission set group. Enable all common components before using the Philanthropy & Partnerships app. **Why**: Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising has four apps to help group common tasks and responsibilities. Fundraising Strategy Offers a top-level understanding of fundraising activity and data. Donor Engagement Provides quick access to track and manage your marketing efforts with campaigns and source codes. Philanthropy & Partnerships Work with and record interactions with major donors, grantmakers, and planned givers on high-impact giving. Fundraising Operations Assist donors with their requests and process routine gift entry. SEE ALSO: [Learn About Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_learn_about_nonprofit_cloud_fundraising.htm) # Compute Fees Create academic orders for learners by using the Create Learner Order invocable action. Incorporate pricing resources into your workflows to set up customized academic order pricing.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
To create an academic order, use one of these: - The Create Learner Order invocable action to create an academic order for one or more learners. See [Create a Student Financial Order](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_student_financial_order.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an academic order for one or more learners with the Salesforce provided Create Learner Order invocable action."). - The Orders page to create orders and the Academic Orders page to link the order to the academic interval, track your students’ product requests, and activate your orders to automatically generate invoices. See [Create Orders and Generate Invoices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_orders_generate_invoices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create orders to track your students’ product requests. To automatically generate invoices based on billing schedules, activate your orders. An invoice shows a list of order products alongside the total amount that a student must pay."). - **[Create a Student Financial Order](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_student_financial_order.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an academic order for one or more learners with the Salesforce provided Create Learner Order invocable action. - **[Price an Academic Order](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_price_an_academic_order.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can incorporate these pricing resources into your workflows to set up academic order pricing. For example, you can customize the expression set template to apply discounts. - **[Create Orders and Generate Invoices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_orders_generate_invoices.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create orders to track your students’ product requests. To automatically generate invoices based on billing schedules, activate your orders. An invoice shows a list of order products alongside the total amount that a student must pay. # Configure a Column Modal in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Education Customize the gift entry experience by configuring interactive column modals. You can embed standard field sets or custom Lightning web components (LWC) directly into the grid to capture complex donor details without leaving the primary workflow. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure a column modal:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. In Display Columns, for the column that you want to configure, click **Edit column**. 2. Click **Modal**. 3. Select **Lightning Web Components** as the modal type. You can use an existing LWC that you created or installed from a managed package. Alternatively, you can select the fields to show by selecting the **$GiftEntryGrid.FieldsModal** standard LWC and then adding fields in the Set Fields in Modal section. 4. Select your Lightning web component as the Lightning Web Component name. 5. Enter a modal label. 6. Enter an icon to show for your modal. (our default is: utility:expand\_alt). The default icon is utility:expand\_alt, but you can choose others from the [SLDS Icon Library](https://www.lightningdesignsystem.com/2e1ef8501/p/83309d-icons). 7. Optionally, add an alternate label for the modal. If criteria are met to display the alternate, it will appear instead of the Modal Label value. ## Example: Gift Entry Grid Modal Component This sample Lightning web component code snippet shows a credit card processor and could be configured as the modal for the Payment Method field. giftEntryGridPaymentAuthModal.html ``` ``` giftEntryGridPaymentAuthModal.js ``` import { LightningElement, api, track } from 'lwc'; const CONSTANTS = { CREDIT_CARD: 'Credit Card', ACH: 'ACH' } /** * Sample Gift Entry Grid Modal Component */ export default class giftEntryGridPaymentAuthModal extends LightningElement { /** * Required input property. * Not generally used within a custom component */ @api set modalFields(value) { this._modalFields = value || []; this.initializeFields(); } get modalFields() { return this._modalFields; } /** * Required input property. * Contains all the data for the row. */ @api set rowData(value) { this._rowData = value || {}; this.initializeFields(); } get rowData() { return this._rowData; } // ------------------------------------------------------------ // Required Exposed API Functions for GiftEntryGrid // ------------------------------------------------------------ /** * Validates the component fields. * @returns {Object} An object with properties for isValid (boolean) and an inValidFields collection with errors * - isValid: true if the component fields are valid, false otherwise. * - inValidFields: A Set of field names and errors to render */ @api validate() { let isValid = true; let inValidFields = new Set(); if (!this.paymentMethod) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('PaymentMethod'); } if (this.showCreditCardFields) { if (!this.chargeCardClicked) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('ChargeCard'); } if (!this.creditCardNumber || !this.validateCreditCardNumber()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('CreditCardNumber is invalid'); } if (!this.nameOnCard) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('NameOnCard is missing'); } if (!this.expiryMonth || !this.validateExpiryMonth()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('ExpiryMonth is not valid'); } if (!this.expiryYear || !this.validateExpiryYear()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('ExpiryYear is not valid'); } if (!this.cvv || !this.validateCVV()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('CVV is not valid'); } } return { isValid, inValidFields }; } /** * Returns values to be saved to the row. These are directly applied to the rowData object within the Grid * Properties in this object do not need to be actual GiftEntry fields. Dummy properties are allowed, but * they will not persist to the GiftEntry row when the record is saved. * @returns {Object} An object with the values that represent GiftEntry fields. */ @api getComponentValues() { let result = {} result['PaymentMethod'] = this.paymentMethod; if (this.showCreditCardFields) { result['Last4'] = this.creditCardNumber ? this.creditCardNumber.slice(-4) : null; result['ExpiryMonth'] = this.expiryMonth; result['ExpiryYear'] = this.expiryYear; result['CCAuthCode__c'] = this.generateRandomString(16); result['NameOnCard__c'] = this.nameOnCard; result['Card_CVV__c'] = this.cvv; result['GatewayTransactionFee__c'] = 0.12345; result['GatewayReference__c'] = this.creditCardNumber; } else { result['Last4'] = null; result['ExpiryMonth'] = null; result['ExpiryYear'] = null; result['CCAuthCode__c'] = null; result['NameOnCard__c'] = null; result['Card_CVV__c'] = null; result['GatewayTransactionFee__c'] = null; result['GatewayReference__c'] = null; } return result; } // ------------------------------------------------------------ // Everything below this is generic custom code to illustrate the component behavior // ------------------------------------------------------------ _modalFields = []; _rowData = {}; @track paymentMethod = CONSTANTS.CREDIT_CARD; @track creditCardNumber = ''; @track nameOnCard = ''; @track expiryMonth = ''; @track expiryYear = ''; @track cvv = ''; @track gatewaytransactionfee = null; @track gatewayreference = null; @track chargeCardClicked = false; connectedCallback() { this.initializeFields(); } initializeFields() { this.paymentMethod = this._rowData['PaymentMethod'] || ''; this.creditCardNumber = (this._rowData['Last4'] ? "****-****-****-" + this._rowData['Last4'] : ''); if (this._rowData['NameOnCard__c']) { this.nameOnCard = this._rowData['NameOnCard__c']; } else if (this._rowData['FirstName'] && this._rowData['LastName']) { this.nameOnCard = this._rowData['FirstName'] + ' ' + this._rowData['LastName']; } else { this.nameOnCard = ''; } this.expiryMonth = this._rowData['ExpiryMonth'] || ''; this.expiryYear = this._rowData['ExpiryYear'] || ''; this.cvv = this._rowData['Card_CVV__c'] || ''; this.gatewayTransactionFee = this._rowData['GatewayTransactionFee__c'] || null; this.gatewayReference = this._rowData['GatewayReference__c'] || null; } handleInputChange(event) { let fieldName = event?.target?.fieldName || event?.target?.name; if (fieldName) { fieldName = fieldName.charAt(0).toLowerCase() + fieldName.slice(1); } const fieldValue = event?.target?.value; this[fieldName] = fieldValue; if (fieldName === 'paymentMethod') { if (!this.showCreditCardFields) { this.creditCardNumber = ''; this.nameOnCard = ''; this.expiryMonth = ''; this.expiryYear = ''; this.cvv = ''; } } if (fieldName === 'creditCardNumber') { this.validateCreditCardNumber(); } if (fieldName === 'expiryMonth') { this.validateExpiryMonth(); } if (fieldName === 'expiryYear') { this.validateExpiryYear(); } } handleChargeCardClick() { this.chargeCardClicked = true; } canChargeCard() { if (this.chargeCardClicked) return false; if (!this.showCreditCardFields) return false; return ( !!this.creditCardNumber && this.validateCreditCardNumber() && !!this.nameOnCard && !!this.expiryMonth && this.validateExpiryMonth() && !!this.expiryYear && this.validateExpiryYear() && !!this.cvv && this.validateCVV() ); } validateCreditCardNumber() { const regex = /^(?:\d{4}[-\s]?\d{4}[-\s]?\d{4}[-\s]?\d{4}|\d{3}[-\s]?\d{6}[-\s]?\d{5}|\d{16}|\d{15})$/; return this.creditCardNumber === '' || regex.test(this.creditCardNumber); } validateExpiryMonth() { const month = parseInt(this.expiryMonth, 10); return this.expiryMonth === '' || (month >= 1 && month <= 12); } validateExpiryYear() { let year = parseInt(this.expiryYear, 10); year = year < 99 ? 2000 + year : year; const currentYear = new Date().getFullYear(); return this.expiryYear === '' || (year >= currentYear && year <= currentYear + 10); } validateCVV() { return this.cvv === '' || /^\d{2}|\d{4}/.test(this.cvv); } generateRandomString(length) { const chars = 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789'; let result = ''; for (let i = 0; i < length; i++) { result += chars.charAt(Math.floor(Math.random() * chars.length)); } return result; } get showCreditCardFields() { return this.paymentMethod === CONSTANTS.CREDIT_CARD || this.paymentMethod === CONSTANTS.ACH; } get minExpiryYear() { return new Date().getFullYear(); } get maxExpiryYear() { return new Date().getFullYear() + 10; } get isChargeCardDisabled() { return !this.canChargeCard(); } } ``` # Configure a Column Modal in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Nonprofit Customize the gift entry experience by configuring interactive column modals. You can embed standard field sets or custom Lightning web components (LWC) directly into the grid to capture complex donor details without leaving the primary workflow. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed
To configure a column modal:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. In Display Columns, for the column that you want to configure, click **Edit column**. 2. Click **Modal**. 3. Select **Lightning Web Components** as the modal type. You can use an existing LWC that you created or installed from a managed package. Alternatively, you can select the fields to show by selecting the **$GiftEntryGrid.FieldsModal** standard LWC and then adding fields in the Set Fields in Modal section. 4. Select your Lightning web component as the Lightning Web Component name. 5. Enter a modal label. 6. Enter an icon to show for your modal. (our default is: utility:expand\_alt). The default icon is utility:expand\_alt, but you can choose others from the [SLDS Icon Library](https://www.lightningdesignsystem.com/2e1ef8501/p/83309d-icons). 7. Optionally, add an alternate label for the modal. If criteria are met to display the alternate, it will appear instead of the Modal Label value. ## Example: Gift Entry Grid Modal Component This sample Lightning web component code snippet shows a credit card processor and could be configured as the modal for the Payment Method field. giftEntryGridPaymentAuthModal.html ``` ``` giftEntryGridPaymentAuthModal.js ``` import { LightningElement, api, track } from 'lwc'; const CONSTANTS = { CREDIT_CARD: 'Credit Card', ACH: 'ACH' } /** * Sample Gift Entry Grid Modal Component */ export default class giftEntryGridPaymentAuthModal extends LightningElement { /** * Required input property. * Not generally used within a custom component */ @api set modalFields(value) { this._modalFields = value || []; this.initializeFields(); } get modalFields() { return this._modalFields; } /** * Required input property. * Contains all the data for the row. */ @api set rowData(value) { this._rowData = value || {}; this.initializeFields(); } get rowData() { return this._rowData; } // ------------------------------------------------------------ // Required Exposed API Functions for GiftEntryGrid // ------------------------------------------------------------ /** * Validates the component fields. * @returns {Object} An object with properties for isValid (boolean) and an inValidFields collection with errors * - isValid: true if the component fields are valid, false otherwise. * - inValidFields: A Set of field names and errors to render */ @api validate() { let isValid = true; let inValidFields = new Set(); if (!this.paymentMethod) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('PaymentMethod'); } if (this.showCreditCardFields) { if (!this.chargeCardClicked) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('ChargeCard'); } if (!this.creditCardNumber || !this.validateCreditCardNumber()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('CreditCardNumber is invalid'); } if (!this.nameOnCard) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('NameOnCard is missing'); } if (!this.expiryMonth || !this.validateExpiryMonth()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('ExpiryMonth is not valid'); } if (!this.expiryYear || !this.validateExpiryYear()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('ExpiryYear is not valid'); } if (!this.cvv || !this.validateCVV()) { isValid = false; inValidFields.add('CVV is not valid'); } } return { isValid, inValidFields }; } /** * Returns values to be saved to the row. These are directly applied to the rowData object within the Grid * Properties in this object do not need to be actual GiftEntry fields. Dummy properties are allowed, but * they will not persist to the GiftEntry row when the record is saved. * @returns {Object} An object with the values that represent GiftEntry fields. */ @api getComponentValues() { let result = {} result['PaymentMethod'] = this.paymentMethod; if (this.showCreditCardFields) { result['Last4'] = this.creditCardNumber ? this.creditCardNumber.slice(-4) : null; result['ExpiryMonth'] = this.expiryMonth; result['ExpiryYear'] = this.expiryYear; result['CCAuthCode__c'] = this.generateRandomString(16); result['NameOnCard__c'] = this.nameOnCard; result['Card_CVV__c'] = this.cvv; result['GatewayTransactionFee__c'] = 0.12345; result['GatewayReference__c'] = this.creditCardNumber; } else { result['Last4'] = null; result['ExpiryMonth'] = null; result['ExpiryYear'] = null; result['CCAuthCode__c'] = null; result['NameOnCard__c'] = null; result['Card_CVV__c'] = null; result['GatewayTransactionFee__c'] = null; result['GatewayReference__c'] = null; } return result; } // ------------------------------------------------------------ // Everything below this is generic custom code to illustrate the component behavior // ------------------------------------------------------------ _modalFields = []; _rowData = {}; @track paymentMethod = CONSTANTS.CREDIT_CARD; @track creditCardNumber = ''; @track nameOnCard = ''; @track expiryMonth = ''; @track expiryYear = ''; @track cvv = ''; @track gatewaytransactionfee = null; @track gatewayreference = null; @track chargeCardClicked = false; connectedCallback() { this.initializeFields(); } initializeFields() { this.paymentMethod = this._rowData['PaymentMethod'] || ''; this.creditCardNumber = (this._rowData['Last4'] ? "****-****-****-" + this._rowData['Last4'] : ''); if (this._rowData['NameOnCard__c']) { this.nameOnCard = this._rowData['NameOnCard__c']; } else if (this._rowData['FirstName'] && this._rowData['LastName']) { this.nameOnCard = this._rowData['FirstName'] + ' ' + this._rowData['LastName']; } else { this.nameOnCard = ''; } this.expiryMonth = this._rowData['ExpiryMonth'] || ''; this.expiryYear = this._rowData['ExpiryYear'] || ''; this.cvv = this._rowData['Card_CVV__c'] || ''; this.gatewayTransactionFee = this._rowData['GatewayTransactionFee__c'] || null; this.gatewayReference = this._rowData['GatewayReference__c'] || null; } handleInputChange(event) { let fieldName = event?.target?.fieldName || event?.target?.name; if (fieldName) { fieldName = fieldName.charAt(0).toLowerCase() + fieldName.slice(1); } const fieldValue = event?.target?.value; this[fieldName] = fieldValue; if (fieldName === 'paymentMethod') { if (!this.showCreditCardFields) { this.creditCardNumber = ''; this.nameOnCard = ''; this.expiryMonth = ''; this.expiryYear = ''; this.cvv = ''; } } if (fieldName === 'creditCardNumber') { this.validateCreditCardNumber(); } if (fieldName === 'expiryMonth') { this.validateExpiryMonth(); } if (fieldName === 'expiryYear') { this.validateExpiryYear(); } } handleChargeCardClick() { this.chargeCardClicked = true; } canChargeCard() { if (this.chargeCardClicked) return false; if (!this.showCreditCardFields) return false; return ( !!this.creditCardNumber && this.validateCreditCardNumber() && !!this.nameOnCard && !!this.expiryMonth && this.validateExpiryMonth() && !!this.expiryYear && this.validateExpiryYear() && !!this.cvv && this.validateCVV() ); } validateCreditCardNumber() { const regex = /^(?:\d{4}[-\s]?\d{4}[-\s]?\d{4}[-\s]?\d{4}|\d{3}[-\s]?\d{6}[-\s]?\d{5}|\d{16}|\d{15})$/; return this.creditCardNumber === '' || regex.test(this.creditCardNumber); } validateExpiryMonth() { const month = parseInt(this.expiryMonth, 10); return this.expiryMonth === '' || (month >= 1 && month <= 12); } validateExpiryYear() { let year = parseInt(this.expiryYear, 10); year = year < 99 ? 2000 + year : year; const currentYear = new Date().getFullYear(); return this.expiryYear === '' || (year >= currentYear && year <= currentYear + 10); } validateCVV() { return this.cvv === '' || /^\d{2}|\d{4}/.test(this.cvv); } generateRandomString(length) { const chars = 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789'; let result = ''; for (let i = 0; i < length; i++) { result += chars.charAt(Math.floor(Math.random() * chars.length)); } return result; } get showCreditCardFields() { return this.paymentMethod === CONSTANTS.CREDIT_CARD || this.paymentMethod === CONSTANTS.ACH; } get minExpiryYear() { return new Date().getFullYear(); } get maxExpiryYear() { return new Date().getFullYear() + 10; } get isChargeCardDisabled() { return !this.canChargeCard(); } } ``` # Configure a Data Summary Rollup in Education The Related Records Detail Display is a Lightning App that provides a summarizing component for your data. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure a data summary rollup:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
The Related Records Detail Display gives you aggregated or summarized data at a glance. An example of this component is the Outreach Summary on an Outreach Source Code or Campaign page in the Fundraising apps. The Outreach Summary shows aggregated data on a campaign. To configure the Related Records Detail Display, choose a home or record page on which to place the component. Then you select an object from which to pull summary data. Lastly, you select and group the specific data you want to show in the rollups. 1. Edit the page you want to add a Related Records Detail Display to. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, drag the Related Records Detail Display component to where you want it to be on the page. 3. For the **Detail Panel Name**, enter a name for the summary. For example, if you're creating a donation history rollup, name it Donor Giving History. 4. For Related Entity, select the object that you want to build the summary from. Donor Gift Summary is commonly used. 5. To let users create and edit this summary, select **Allow create and edit**. 6. Click **Add Group** to open the New Group pane. 7. Enter a name for the group that describes the relationship between the fields you're including in the group. For example, Campaign Summary describes a group of fields that includes Start Date, Gift Count, Response Rate, Actual Cost in Campaign, and Average Gift Amount. 8. Select the fields to include in the group. Fields can be standard or custom fields. Custom objects aren't supported. 9. To ensure that specific fields appear in the component's preview, drag them to the top of the list. Fields at the top of the list are prioritized for preview. The width of the component on the page determines the number of fields shown in the preview. 10. Repeat these steps for each group you make. 11. To add a filter to your summary component, open the Set Component Visibility pane and click **Add Filter** to set the filter parameters. 12. Save your work. 13. Activate the page if it's ready. You can also activate the page anytime by editing it. To make the page visible to users immediately, activate it as an **Org Default** or **App Default**. If you chose Campaign or Account as the object for this component, activate it as App Default and select the Fundraising apps where you want the component to appear. Campaign and Account home page customizations don't appear if the page is activated as an Org Default. # Configure a Data Summary Rollup in Nonprofit The Related Records Detail Display is a Lightning App that provides a summarizing component for your data. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To configure a data summary rollup:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
The Related Records Detail Display gives you aggregated or summarized data at a glance. An example of this component is the Outreach Summary on an Outreach Source Code or Campaign page in the Fundraising apps. The Outreach Summary shows aggregated data on a campaign. To configure the Related Records Detail Display, choose a home or record page on which to place the component. Then you select an object from which to pull summary data. Lastly, you select and group the specific data you want to show in the rollups. 1. Edit the page you want to add a Related Records Detail Display to. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, drag the Related Records Detail Display component to where you want it to be on the page. 3. For the **Detail Panel Name**, enter a name for the summary. For example, if you're creating a donation history rollup, name it Donor Giving History. 4. For Related Entity, select the object that you want to build the summary from. Donor Gift Summary is commonly used. 5. To let users create and edit this summary, select **Allow create and edit**. 6. Click **Add Group** to open the New Group pane. 7. Enter a name for the group that describes the relationship between the fields you're including in the group. For example, Campaign Summary describes a group of fields that includes Start Date, Gift Count, Response Rate, Actual Cost in Campaign, and Average Gift Amount. 8. Select the fields to include in the group. Fields can be standard or custom fields. Custom objects aren't supported. 9. To ensure that specific fields appear in the component's preview, drag them to the top of the list. Fields at the top of the list are prioritized for preview. The width of the component on the page determines the number of fields shown in the preview. 10. Repeat these steps for each group you make. 11. To add a filter to your summary component, open the Set Component Visibility pane and click **Add Filter** to set the filter parameters. 12. Save your work. 13. Activate the page if it's ready. You can also activate the page anytime by editing it. To make the page visible to users immediately, activate it as an **Org Default** or **App Default**. If you chose Campaign or Account as the object for this component, activate it as App Default and select the Fundraising apps where you want the component to appear. Campaign and Account home page customizations don't appear if the page is activated as an Org Default. # Configure a New or Enhanced Object When we release new objects, they’re not automatically displayed in your existing org. You can decide how you want to expose the objects to your users by: - Updating object permissions - Updating security settings - Customizing navigation and layouts # Configure a Post-Processing Modal for Single Gift Entry in Education Set up a post-processing modal to appear after the user clicks either Process Gift or Process & New. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure a post-processing modal:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. In the Gift Entry Post Processing section of your template, click **Add Step**. 2. From Lightning Web Component Name, select your component. 3. Add Conditions for your Lightning web component to show. For example, Gift Processing Status Equals Success. 4. Save your changes. 5. Set your template as the default for single gift entries. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. In the row for your template, click ![Actions menu icon.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png), and then select **Set as Single Entry Default**. ## Example: Create a Gift Tribute Record for Single Gift Entry Use Lightning web components to create a Gift Tribute record for single gift entry. These Lightning web component code snippets show a very basic form to create a Gift Tribute record for Single Gift Entry. giftEntryTributePostSave.html: ``` ``` giftEntryTributePostSave.js: ``` import { LightningElement, api, track } from 'lwc'; import { ShowToastEvent } from 'lightning/platformShowToastEvent'; import GIFT_TRIBUTE_OBJECT from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute'; import TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.TributeType'; import HONOREE_CONTACT_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.HonoreeContactId'; import HONOREE_NAME_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.HonoreeName'; import HONOREE_INFO_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.HonoreeInformation'; import GIFT_TRANSACTION_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.GiftTransactionId'; /** * LWC: giftEntryTributePostSave * Displays TributeType (default Honoree), HonoreeContactId, HonoreeName, HonoreeInformation * Associates GiftTransactionId via @api * Uses lightning-record-edit-form to create a GiftTribute */ export default class GiftEntryTributePostSave extends LightningElement { /** * Required input property. * Contains all the data for the row. */ @api set rowData(value) { this._rowData = value || {}; this.initializeFields(); } get rowData() { return this._rowData; } /** * Required input property. * Contains objects for templateConfig and recordId for navigation */ @api configuration; // Public API: Gift Transaction to link tribute to (hidden field) @api giftTransactionId; connectedCallback() { this.initializeFields(); } /** * Initialize form fields with data from rowData */ initializeFields() { console.log('** in initialize fields.') this.giftTransactionId = this._rowData['GiftTransactionId']; console.log('** gift transaction id: ' + this.giftTransactionId + ''); } // record-edit-form bindings objectApiName = GIFT_TRIBUTE_OBJECT; tributeTypeField = TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD; honoreeContactField = HONOREE_CONTACT_FIELD; honoreeNameField = HONOREE_NAME_FIELD; honoreeInfoField = HONOREE_INFO_FIELD; giftTransactionField = GIFT_TRANSACTION_FIELD; @track isSubmitting = false; @track errorMessage; get hasGiftTransaction() { return !!this.giftTransactionId; } // Ensure defaults and set hidden values on submit handleSubmit(event) { this.isSubmitting = true; this.errorMessage = undefined; // Prevent default submit to inject default values event.preventDefault(); // Clone and enforce defaults const fields = { ...event.detail.fields }; // Default TributeType to Honoree if not provided/changed if (!fields[TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD.fieldApiName]) { fields[TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD.fieldApiName] = 'Honoree'; } // Set hidden GiftTransaction if provided via @api if (this.giftTransactionId) { fields[GIFT_TRANSACTION_FIELD.fieldApiName] = this.giftTransactionId; } // Submit updated fields this.template.querySelector('lightning-record-edit-form').submit(fields); } handleSuccess(event) { this.isSubmitting = false; this.errorMessage = undefined; // Show a success toast using platform event this.dispatchEvent( new ShowToastEvent({ title: 'Success', message: 'Gift Tribute Created!', variant: 'success' }) ); this.closeModal(); } handleError(event) { this.isSubmitting = false; // LDS error object includes detail; surface friendly message where possible const err = event.detail; this.errorMessage = (err && (err.message || err.detail || (err.output && err.output.errors && err.output.errors[0] && err.output.errors[0].message))) || 'An unexpected error occurred while creating the tribute.'; // Show an error toast using platform event this.dispatchEvent( new ShowToastEvent({ title: 'Error', message: 'Failed to create Tribute: ' + this.errorMessage, variant: 'error' }) ); } handleCancel() { this.closeModal(); } /** * Close the modal (emit custom event) */ closeModal() { console.log('** in close modal'); this.dispatchEvent(new CustomEvent('closemodal', { detail: { componentName: 'c/giftEntryTributePostSave' } })); } /* toast helper removed; using ShowToastEvent directly */ } ``` # Configure a Post-Processing Modal for Single Gift Entry in Nonprofit Set up a post-processing modal to appear after the user clicks either Process Gift or Process & New. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed
To configure a post-processing modal:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. In the Gift Entry Post Processing section of your template, click **Add Step**. 2. From Lightning Web Component Name, select your component. 3. Add Conditions for your Lightning web component to show. For example, Gift Processing Status Equals Success. 4. Save your changes. 5. Set your template as the default for single gift entries. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. In the row for your template, click ![Actions menu icon.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png), and then select **Set as Single Entry Default**. ## Example: Create a Gift Tribute Record for Single Gift Entry Use Lightning web components to create a Gift Tribute record for single gift entry. These Lightning web component code snippets show a very basic form to create a Gift Tribute record for Single Gift Entry. giftEntryTributePostSave.html: ``` ``` giftEntryTributePostSave.js: ``` import { LightningElement, api, track } from 'lwc'; import { ShowToastEvent } from 'lightning/platformShowToastEvent'; import GIFT_TRIBUTE_OBJECT from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute'; import TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.TributeType'; import HONOREE_CONTACT_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.HonoreeContactId'; import HONOREE_NAME_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.HonoreeName'; import HONOREE_INFO_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.HonoreeInformation'; import GIFT_TRANSACTION_FIELD from '@salesforce/schema/GiftTribute.GiftTransactionId'; /** * LWC: giftEntryTributePostSave * Displays TributeType (default Honoree), HonoreeContactId, HonoreeName, HonoreeInformation * Associates GiftTransactionId via @api * Uses lightning-record-edit-form to create a GiftTribute */ export default class GiftEntryTributePostSave extends LightningElement { /** * Required input property. * Contains all the data for the row. */ @api set rowData(value) { this._rowData = value || {}; this.initializeFields(); } get rowData() { return this._rowData; } /** * Required input property. * Contains objects for templateConfig and recordId for navigation */ @api configuration; // Public API: Gift Transaction to link tribute to (hidden field) @api giftTransactionId; connectedCallback() { this.initializeFields(); } /** * Initialize form fields with data from rowData */ initializeFields() { console.log('** in initialize fields.') this.giftTransactionId = this._rowData['GiftTransactionId']; console.log('** gift transaction id: ' + this.giftTransactionId + ''); } // record-edit-form bindings objectApiName = GIFT_TRIBUTE_OBJECT; tributeTypeField = TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD; honoreeContactField = HONOREE_CONTACT_FIELD; honoreeNameField = HONOREE_NAME_FIELD; honoreeInfoField = HONOREE_INFO_FIELD; giftTransactionField = GIFT_TRANSACTION_FIELD; @track isSubmitting = false; @track errorMessage; get hasGiftTransaction() { return !!this.giftTransactionId; } // Ensure defaults and set hidden values on submit handleSubmit(event) { this.isSubmitting = true; this.errorMessage = undefined; // Prevent default submit to inject default values event.preventDefault(); // Clone and enforce defaults const fields = { ...event.detail.fields }; // Default TributeType to Honoree if not provided/changed if (!fields[TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD.fieldApiName]) { fields[TRIBUTE_TYPE_FIELD.fieldApiName] = 'Honoree'; } // Set hidden GiftTransaction if provided via @api if (this.giftTransactionId) { fields[GIFT_TRANSACTION_FIELD.fieldApiName] = this.giftTransactionId; } // Submit updated fields this.template.querySelector('lightning-record-edit-form').submit(fields); } handleSuccess(event) { this.isSubmitting = false; this.errorMessage = undefined; // Show a success toast using platform event this.dispatchEvent( new ShowToastEvent({ title: 'Success', message: 'Gift Tribute Created!', variant: 'success' }) ); this.closeModal(); } handleError(event) { this.isSubmitting = false; // LDS error object includes detail; surface friendly message where possible const err = event.detail; this.errorMessage = (err && (err.message || err.detail || (err.output && err.output.errors && err.output.errors[0] && err.output.errors[0].message))) || 'An unexpected error occurred while creating the tribute.'; // Show an error toast using platform event this.dispatchEvent( new ShowToastEvent({ title: 'Error', message: 'Failed to create Tribute: ' + this.errorMessage, variant: 'error' }) ); } handleCancel() { this.closeModal(); } /** * Close the modal (emit custom event) */ closeModal() { console.log('** in close modal'); this.dispatchEvent(new CustomEvent('closemodal', { detail: { componentName: 'c/giftEntryTributePostSave' } })); } /* toast helper removed; using ShowToastEvent directly */ } ``` # Configure Access and Sharing for Transfer Credits Assign permission sets, update sharing settings, and grant staff and portal users access to transfer credit records and flows. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set assign permissions and set sharing for transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Assign these permission sets. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US). | Permission set | Description | Recommended Users | | --- | --- | --- | | Education Cloud Full Access | Give users access to Education Cloud objects and components. | Staff members | | Omnistudio User | Give users the ability to schedule appointments. | Staff members | | Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access | Give Experience Cloud users access to Education Cloud. | Learners | 2. Update the sharing settings on objects required for transfer credits: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify the default internal access for these objects to **Public Read Only**. Learning Learning Achievement Learning Equivalency Learner Pathway 4. Modify the default internal access for these objects to Public Read/Write. Course Credit Transfer Application Learner Achievement Learner Achievement Method Learner Program Alternatively, control this access by using [Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_about_sharing_rules.htm&language=en_US). Anyone who creates program plans needs sharing and edit access to the relevant learning objects. 3. Provide users the necessary permissions to run flows. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Clone** next to Education Cloud Full Access. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your permission set. 6. Click **App Permissions**. 7. Click **Edit**, select **Run Flows**, and then save your changes. 8. Assign the new permission set to your staff users. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US). 4. Provide the required permissions for portal users: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. From the list, find Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label, API name, and description. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new permission set. 6. Click **Object Settings**, select **Cases**, and then click **Edit**. 7. For Field Permissions, select **Create** and **Edit** for the Account Name field. 8. Save your changes. 9. From Object Settings, select **Course Credit Transfer Applications**, and then click **Edit**. 10. For Object Permissions, select **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 11. For Field Permissions, select **Read access** and **Edit access** for the Case field. 12. Save your changes. 13. Assign the new permissions set to your portal user group. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). # Configure Access to Program Management Module Assign PMM permission sets, create sharing rules, and provide users access to reports and dashboards. - **[Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign Program Management Module permission sets to give users the right level of access and keep your data secure. - **[Create Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_shar_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some organizations use a model where program managers share ownership of programs. Create sharing rules to let different program managers edit a client's program-related data. - **[Grant Users Access to Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_folder_sharing_reports_dash.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a Salesforce system admin ensure that your users can see Program Management Module reports and dashboards, update the Program Management Standard User profile to provide access to shared public folders. # Configure Account Model Settings In EDA Settings, configure the settings that control your primary account model, including the Account record types used for Administrative and Household Accounts. - **[Settings for Managing Your Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The type of container Account associated with a Contact—either Administrative or Household—is controlled by these org-wide settings in EDA Settings. - **[Verify or Change the Default Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Default Account Model setting specifies your preferred, primary account model. Between Administrative and Household, you must pick a favorite. Out of the box, Administrative is the default value. In other words, whenever you create a new, independent Contact, an Administrative Account is created automatically as the Contact's container Account. - **[Verify or Change the Record Types Used for Administrative and Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type settings must specify values that are different from each other to ensure data integrity. Verify the current settings for both. If you're using a custom Account record type instead of the default Administrative or Household Account record type, then change the corresponding Account record type setting. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not to existing Accounts. - **[Things to Know About Container Versus Parent Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend using container Accounts for all the Contacts at an institution—students, faculty, and staff. In limited cases however, if data management needs for faculty and staff are simple and low volume, it's possible to use parent Accounts for these Contacts instead of container Accounts. The parent Account is typically the one that best represents a Contact's primary function. For example, the Account representing the Math Department could be the parent Account for each of the school's math teacher Contacts. ## Settings for Managing Your Account Model The type of container Account associated with a Contact—either Administrative or Household—is controlled by these org-wide settings in EDA Settings. | **Setting** | **Default Value** | | --- | --- | | Default Account Model | Administrative | | Administrative Account Record Type | Administrative | | Household Account Record Type | Household | When you've decided on your preferred, primary account model, verify all of these settings so that the correct kinds of container Accounts are created for Contacts. Keep in mind these guidelines. - For many orgs, the default values are fine as they are. - For orgs choosing a primary account model different from the out-of-the-box default value (Household when the default is Administrative), change the value in Default Account Model. - For orgs that have custom record types for Administrative or Household Accounts, specify those custom values in these settings. For example, if you have a custom Administrative Account record type called Student Account, change Administrative Account Record Type to Student Account. If your preferred, primary account model is Administrative, also change Default Account Model to Student Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Even though you can have only one preferred, primary account model, it's fine to have a mix of Contacts in your org—some with Administrative Accounts and some with Household Accounts. When creating Contact records, follow the workflow that creates the appropriate type of container Account. Refer to details in [Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm). ## Verify or Change the Default Account Model The Default Account Model setting specifies your preferred, primary account model. Between Administrative and Household, you must pick a favorite. Out of the box, Administrative is the default value. In other words, whenever you create a new, independent Contact, an Administrative Account is created automatically as the Contact's container Account. Verify that the current setting matches your intended configuration. If you have a custom Account record type for your preferred, primary account model, specify that custom record type as the Default Account Model. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not existing Accounts. 1. On the Education Cloud Settings tab, in Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher. For details, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model** and verify the Default Account Model setting. 3. To change from Administrative to Household Account or vice versa, or change to a custom record type: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select a valid value for container Accounts. Educational Institution or Business Organization aren't valid record types for container Accounts. 3. Save your changes. ## Verify or Change the Record Types Used for Administrative and Household Accounts The Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type settings must specify values that are different from each other to ensure data integrity. Verify the current settings for both. If you're using a custom Account record type instead of the default Administrative or Household Account record type, then change the corresponding Account record type setting. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not to existing Accounts. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model**. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model**. 2. Verify the values selected in Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type. Make sure that they each specify a unique record type. 3. To change either setting to a custom record type: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select the custom record type. 3. Save your changes. For details about creating custom Account record types, refer to [Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm). ## Things to Know About Container Versus Parent Accounts We recommend using container Accounts for all the Contacts at an institution—students, faculty, and staff. In limited cases however, if data management needs for faculty and staff are simple and low volume, it's possible to use parent Accounts for these Contacts instead of container Accounts. The parent Account is typically the one that best represents a Contact's primary function. For example, the Account representing the Math Department could be the parent Account for each of the school's math teacher Contacts. If you go this route, avoid overloading parent Accounts with too many child Contacts. Let's consider the data volume implications of these sample approaches. - If the Math Department is the parent Account to a dozen teachers: As the years pass and teachers come and go, the Account's child records increase in number, eventually growing to hundreds of Contacts before the school archives older records. - If the school's top-level Educational institution Account record is the parent Account to all faculty and staff: As the years pass, the Account's child records could eventually grow to number in the thousands before the school archives older records. In either case, with these kinds of data volumes, changing ownership or sharing for just one record can involve thousands of calculations to update records throughout the data hierarchy. All these calculations take time and can cause performance issues. For extra credit: If you're wondering why it's non-negotiable that a Contact have either a container or parent Account, the Salesforce security model is the reason. A Contact without a parent Account is considered private, which means the Contact record is visible only to the person who created or owns the record and to admin-level users. It can't be shared with other users who have a legitimate business need to access the Contact's data, and this limitation can lead to data quality issues. For example, if a Contact record exists but isn't visible to one of those users, the user could create a duplicate record without realizing it's a duplicate. # Configure Account Model Settings In EDA Settings, configure the settings that control your primary account model, including the Account record types used for Administrative and Household Accounts. - **[Settings for Managing Your Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The type of container Account associated with a Contact—either Administrative or Household—is controlled by these org-wide settings in EDA Settings. - **[Verify or Change the Default Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Default Account Model setting specifies your preferred, primary account model. Between Administrative and Household, you must pick a favorite. Out of the box, Administrative is the default value. In other words, whenever you create a new, independent Contact, an Administrative Account is created automatically as the Contact's container Account. - **[Verify or Change the Record Types Used for Administrative and Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type settings must specify values that are different from each other to ensure data integrity. Verify the current settings for both. If you're using a custom Account record type instead of the default Administrative or Household Account record type, then change the corresponding Account record type setting. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not to existing Accounts. - **[Things to Know About Container Versus Parent Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend using container Accounts for all the Contacts at an institution—students, faculty, and staff. In limited cases however, if data management needs for faculty and staff are simple and low volume, it's possible to use parent Accounts for these Contacts instead of container Accounts. The parent Account is typically the one that best represents a Contact's primary function. For example, the Account representing the Math Department could be the parent Account for each of the school's math teacher Contacts. ## Settings for Managing Your Account Model The type of container Account associated with a Contact—either Administrative or Household—is controlled by these org-wide settings in EDA Settings. | **Setting** | **Default Value** | | --- | --- | | Default Account Model | Administrative | | Administrative Account Record Type | Administrative | | Household Account Record Type | Household | When you've decided on your preferred, primary account model, verify all of these settings so that the correct kinds of container Accounts are created for Contacts. Keep in mind these guidelines. - For many orgs, the default values are fine as they are. - For orgs choosing a primary account model different from the out-of-the-box default value (Household when the default is Administrative), change the value in Default Account Model. - For orgs that have custom record types for Administrative or Household Accounts, specify those custom values in these settings. For example, if you have a custom Administrative Account record type called Student Account, change Administrative Account Record Type to Student Account. If your preferred, primary account model is Administrative, also change Default Account Model to Student Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Even though you can have only one preferred, primary account model, it's fine to have a mix of Contacts in your org—some with Administrative Accounts and some with Household Accounts. When creating Contact records, follow the workflow that creates the appropriate type of container Account. Refer to details in [Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm). ## Verify or Change the Default Account Model The Default Account Model setting specifies your preferred, primary account model. Between Administrative and Household, you must pick a favorite. Out of the box, Administrative is the default value. In other words, whenever you create a new, independent Contact, an Administrative Account is created automatically as the Contact's container Account. Verify that the current setting matches your intended configuration. If you have a custom Account record type for your preferred, primary account model, specify that custom record type as the Default Account Model. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not existing Accounts. 1. On the Education Cloud Settings tab, in Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher. For details, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model** and verify the Default Account Model setting. 3. To change from Administrative to Household Account or vice versa, or change to a custom record type: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select a valid value for container Accounts. Educational Institution or Business Organization aren't valid record types for container Accounts. 3. Save your changes. ## Verify or Change the Record Types Used for Administrative and Household Accounts The Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type settings must specify values that are different from each other to ensure data integrity. Verify the current settings for both. If you're using a custom Account record type instead of the default Administrative or Household Account record type, then change the corresponding Account record type setting. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not to existing Accounts. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model**. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model**. 2. Verify the values selected in Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type. Make sure that they each specify a unique record type. 3. To change either setting to a custom record type: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select the custom record type. 3. Save your changes. For details about creating custom Account record types, refer to [Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm). ## Things to Know About Container Versus Parent Accounts We recommend using container Accounts for all the Contacts at an institution—students, faculty, and staff. In limited cases however, if data management needs for faculty and staff are simple and low volume, it's possible to use parent Accounts for these Contacts instead of container Accounts. The parent Account is typically the one that best represents a Contact's primary function. For example, the Account representing the Math Department could be the parent Account for each of the school's math teacher Contacts. If you go this route, avoid overloading parent Accounts with too many child Contacts. Let's consider the data volume implications of these sample approaches. - If the Math Department is the parent Account to a dozen teachers: As the years pass and teachers come and go, the Account's child records increase in number, eventually growing to hundreds of Contacts before the school archives older records. - If the school's top-level Educational institution Account record is the parent Account to all faculty and staff: As the years pass, the Account's child records could eventually grow to number in the thousands before the school archives older records. In either case, with these kinds of data volumes, changing ownership or sharing for just one record can involve thousands of calculations to update records throughout the data hierarchy. All these calculations take time and can cause performance issues. For extra credit: If you're wondering why it's non-negotiable that a Contact have either a container or parent Account, the Salesforce security model is the reason. A Contact without a parent Account is considered private, which means the Contact record is visible only to the person who created or owns the record and to admin-level users. It can't be shared with other users who have a legitimate business need to access the Contact's data, and this limitation can lead to data quality issues. For example, if a Contact record exists but isn't visible to one of those users, the user could create a duplicate record without realizing it's a duplicate. # Configure Accounting Set Settings After you map source fields to accounting set destination fields, configure how Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records for each accounting set.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up Accounting Settings: | Manage Accounting Subledger | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Next to the accounting set to configure, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Edit**. 3. Click **Next** , and then click **Next** on the following page. 4. Configure these settings.
Field Description
Accounting Set Type Indicates whether the accounting set generates revenue or expense type transaction journal records.
Accounting Record Start Date Filters source records to process based on the date. Accounting Subledger only considers records created on or after this date.
Run Order Determines the sequence in which accounting sets run. Accounting Subledger applies this number in ascending order and processes accounting sets with an empty run order last. If you have multiple sets with the same run order, we sort by ascending order of their developer name.
Default Accrued Account Code The code for your accounting system's default accrual account. See GL Codes.
Default Write Off Account Code The code for your accounting system's written-off payments. See GL Codes.
Expected Cash Flow Grouping Determines whether Accounting Subledger groups transaction journal records by fund account or by a combination of fund account and due date. Changing this setting doesn't impact existing records; it only affects records created or reversed afterwards. See Cash Flow Grouping.
Paid Cash Flow Grouping

Determines the level of detail for generated transaction journal records:

  • Group by Summary: Accounting Subledger only splits credits for revenue and debits for expenses by fund accounts.
  • Group by Fund Account: Accounting Subledger splits all transaction journal records by fund accounts. Then, it creates secondary records for payment type records, but not for transaction type records.

Changing this setting impacts existing records, so we recommend that you don't do so if you already generated accounting data. See Cash Flow Grouping.
5. Select the condition logic to determine which records to process: - **All Conditions Are Met (AND)**: Records that meet all the criteria. - **Any Condition Is Met (OR)**: Records that meet at least one criteria. - **No Conditions Are Met**: All records except records that meet any of the criteria. 6. Set up criteria as needed: - **Resource**: Fields from the accounting set's primary object. For formula fields, Salesforce retrieves the last values sent to the Data Processing Engine, rather than the current values when processing the formula. To avoid discrepancies, we recommend that you don't use formula fields based on time boundaries. The dropdown doesn't list all fields. See [Accounting Subledger Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Troubleshoot the limits, limitations, and setup considerations for running Accounting Subledger."). - **Operator**: How to evaluate the field value. - **Value**: The field value to evaluate, depending on the select field. For example, a checkbox's possible values are True or False, and numeric values are numbers. 7. Select the record types to process from the primary object. This field is case-sensitive. 8. Click **Finish**. - **[Example Criteria Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_example_criteria_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review an example of criteria settings to generate transaction journal records only for certain types of fees. # Configure Accounting Subledger (Optional) Optionally configure Accounting Subledger to create transferable accounting records. Accounting Subledger, formerly known as Accounting Support, creates transferable accounting records from your donations and Opportunities. If it's installed in your org, see the [Accounting Subledger documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger.htm) for more information on setup. For more information on Accounting Subledger, talk to your Salesforce account executive. # Configure Accounts Find out more about configuring accounts. - **[Add the Primary Contact Field to the Manage Households Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To add or remove fields on the Manage Households page, modify the Manage Household Custom field set. ## Add the Primary Contact Field to the Manage Households Page To add or remove fields on the Manage Households page, modify the Manage Household Custom field set. To add the Primary Contact field to the Manage Households page: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **Manage Household Custom**. 6. In the Manage Household Custom section at the top of the page, click the Primary Contact field and drag it into the **In the Field Set** box below. 7. Click **Save**. # Configure Accounts, Contacts, and Related Objects Configure other Salesforce objects used in conjunction with GEM. Don’t forget, GEM is just one part of a larger suite of Salesforce CRM (constituent relationship management) software. Your users don't just use GEM. They use the rest of the system to modify or create Accounts, Contacts, Addresses, or Relationships, just like they do in EDA . Refer to the EDA documentation for more information. - [Create Accounts and Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm) - [Create Relationships between Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm) - [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm) - [Add or Update Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm) - [Specify a Seasonal Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [State and Country Picklists for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_eda_state_and_country_picklists.htm) # Configure Acknowledge Donations by Email Configure Salesforce to send donation acknowledgment emails automatically when you enter gifts in NPSP. - **[About Acknowledge Donations by Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Email Acknowledgment feature lets you send acknowledgment emails to donors, either in a batch, or as one-offs for individual gifts. - **[Add New Values to Opportunity Acknowledgment Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The workflow rule for acknowledgment emails relies on specific values in the Acknowledgment Status field. - **[Add Fields to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Opportunity record types that use Acknowledgment functionality, such as Donations and In-Kind Gifts, add the Acknowledgment Status and Acknowledgment Date fields to the corresponding page layouts. - **[Set Object and Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure the Acknowledgment Status and Acknowledgment Date fields are set to Visible for each profile that needs access to them. - **[Update Logo in Letterhead Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to update the logo. - **[Edit the NPSP Opportunity Acknowledgment Email Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to edit the NPSP opportunity acknowledgment. - **[Activate the Opportunity Email Acknowledgment Workflow Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to activate opportunity email acknowldegment workflow rule. - **[Add the Email Acknowledgments Button to the Opportunity List View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Easily send acknowledgements of selected opportunities when you add the Email Acknowledgments button to the Opportunity list view. ## About Acknowledge Donations by Email The NPSP Email Acknowledgment feature lets you send acknowledgment emails to donors, either in a batch, or as one-offs for individual gifts. NPSP Email Acknowledgments uses the following objects and features: - Opportunity: The Acknowledgment Status field triggers a workflow to send thank you emails to constituents. - Email Templates: Design the email message that NPSP sends to your donors. Learn more about email acknowledgments in [Acknowledge Donations by Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations_by_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofit Success Pack lets you send an acknowledgment email to a donor from a specific Opportunity record, or send multiple email acknowledgments simultaneously from the Opportunities tab."). ## Add New Values to Opportunity Acknowledgment Status The workflow rule for acknowledgment emails relies on specific values in the Acknowledgment Status field. Learn more about the acknowledgment email workflow in [Configure Acknowledge Donations by Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&type=5). Add values to the Acknowledgment Status field: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click the **Acknowledgment Status** field. 5. Add these values: - Email Acknowledgment Now - Email Acknowledgment Not Sent 6. Select the **Donation** record type and any other record type for which you want to email acknowledgments. 7. **Save** your work. ## Add Fields to Page Layouts For Opportunity record types that use Acknowledgment functionality, such as Donations and In-Kind Gifts, add the Acknowledgment Status and Acknowledgment Date fields to the corresponding page layouts. To edit page layouts: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Drag the **Acknowledgment Status** and **Acknowledgment Date** fields onto the page layout. 5. **Save** your work. ## Set Object and Field-Level Security Make sure the Acknowledgment Status and Acknowledgment Date fields are set to Visible for each profile that needs access to them. To check field access: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the profile you want to edit. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. In the list of objects, find and click **Opportunities**. 5. Under object permissions, select **Read**. Select additional object permissions as needed for this profile. 6. Under field permissions for the Acknowledgment Status and Acknowledgment Date fields, select **Edit Access**. 7. **Save** your changes. ## Update Logo in Letterhead Template Follow these steps to update the logo. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Letterheads then click **Classic Letterheads**. 2. Click **NPSP Sample Letterhead**. 3. Click **Edit Letterhead**. 4. In the header section of the letterhead, click **Remove Logo** to remove the NPSP logo from the section. 5. Click **Select Logo** to choose a new image to display in the header section. Your logo image file must reside in your Documents folder in Salesforce. 6. Click the name of your logo. 7. **Save** your work. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can only upload files to the Documents folder in Salesforce Classic. For more information see [Upload and Replace Items on the Documents tab](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=docs_upload.htm). ## Edit the NPSP Opportunity Acknowledgment Email Template Follow these steps to edit the NPSP opportunity acknowledgment. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Email Templates then click **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Choose **NPSP Email Templates** from the Folder drop-down menu. 3. Click **NPSP Opportunity Acknowledgment** to view the HTML and Text versions of the template. 4. Edit the HTML and Text versions to meet your organization's needs. Learn more about editing email templates in [View and Edit Email Templates in Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=admin_viewing_emailtemplates.htm&type=5&language=en_us). ## Activate the Opportunity Email Acknowledgment Workflow Rule Follow these steps to activate opportunity email acknowldegment workflow rule. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Workflow Rules then click **Workflow Rules**. 2. To view the rule's criteria, click **Opportunity Email Acknowledgment**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This workflow is part of a managed package, so you can’t change the rule criteria. If you need to make changes, clone the workflow and then edit the cloned version. To clone a workflow rule, click the Workflow Rule name, then click ****Clone**** . 3. When you’re ready to use the rule, click **Activate**. ### Change the From Email Address If you want to use a different From email address: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Organization-Wide Addresses, then click **Organization-Wide Addresses**. 2. Click **Add**. 3. Enter a Display Name and Email Address, and choose which profiles use the From address. If you want all profiles to use the email address, select **Allow All Profiles to Use this From Address**. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Salesforce sends you an email to confirm the new address. Click the link in the email to confirm. 6. Back in Salesforce Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Workflow Rule, then click **Workflow Rules**. 7. Click **Opportunity Email Acknowledgment**. 8. In the Workflow Actions section, click **Opportunity Email Acknowledgment**. 9. Click **Edit**. 10. In the From Email Address field, select the new email address. 11. **Save** your work . ## Add the Email Acknowledgments Button to the Opportunity List View Easily send acknowledgements of selected opportunities when you add the Email Acknowledgments button to the Opportunity list view. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **List View Button Layout**. 4. In the List View row, click ![More actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/more_actions.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Under Custom Buttons, move **Email Acknowledgments** from the Available Buttons list to the Selected Buttons list. 6. **Save** your work. # Configure Address Management Learn how to configure address management features including address verification, seasonal addresses, and bad address management. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video [NPSP Verify Mailing Addresses](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lWUz3UNeA7A) - **[About Address Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Address management functionality allows you to record and keep a history of different types of addresses for Accounts, such as home, work, and seasonal addresses. Address management also supports address verification services. - **[Configure Address Management Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, this setting is not selected, which means Household Accounts come out-of-the-box with Address Management functionality enabled. - **[Configure Undeliverable Address Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set these checkbox fields to Read and Edit in your profiles and permission sets. - **[Adjust the Seasonal Address Batch Size](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce runs the Seasonal Address Updates scheduled job that sets seasonal addresses as the mailing address once per night. The default batch size for this job is 10. Here's how to adjust the batch size. - **[Configure Address Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Success Pack lets you verify addresses as you enter them in Salesforce. - **[How do Address Updates Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This table outlines Address behavior in NPSP. - **[Configure Permissions for Managing Household Account Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set permissions for updating Household members. ## About Address Management Address management functionality allows you to record and keep a history of different types of addresses for Accounts, such as home, work, and seasonal addresses. Address management also supports address verification services. ## Configure Address Management Settings By default, this setting is not selected, which means Household Accounts come out-of-the-box with Address Management functionality enabled. ### Household Account Addresses Disabled To change this setting, and disable Address Management for Household Accounts: 1. From App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select NPSP Settings, and then click **People** | **Addresses**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select the **Household Account Addresses Disabled** checkbox 4. Click **Save**. ### Organizational Account Addresses Enabled By default, this setting is not selected, so Organization Accounts do not have Address Management functionality out-of-the-box. To change this setting, and enable Address Management for Organization Accounts: 1. From App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select NPSP Settings, and then click **People** | **Addresses**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select the **Organizational Account Addresses Enabled** checkbox. 4. Click **Save**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To make full use of Address Management for Organization Accounts, add the Addresses related list to the Organization Account page layout. ### Simple Address Change Treated as Update This setting indicates that any address update, including a minor correction, should simply update the existing Address record. With this setting on, NPSP doesn't create a new address record if you change capitalization or update only one address field. If you add information to an address field that was previously blank, NPSP doesn't consider this a simple change and creates a new address record. To change this behavior so that a simple edit creates a new Address record: 1. From App Launcher, find and select NPSP Settings. 2. Click **People** | **Addresses**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Deselect the **Simple Address Change Treated as Update** checkbox. 5. Click **Save**. ## Configure Undeliverable Address Management Set these checkbox fields to Read and Edit in your profiles and permission sets. - Undeliverable Mailing Address on the Contact object. - Undeliverable Billing Address on the Account object. - Undeliverable on the Address object. ## Adjust the Seasonal Address Batch Size Salesforce runs the Seasonal Address Updates scheduled job that sets seasonal addresses as the mailing address once per night. The default batch size for this job is 10. Here's how to adjust the batch size. 1. From App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select NPSP Settings, and then click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Process Settings**. 2. Click **Edit** and adjust the Seasonal Address Batch Size as needed. 3. Click **Save**. ## Configure Address Verification The Nonprofit Success Pack lets you verify addresses as you enter them in Salesforce. The Nonprofit Success Pack lets you verify addresses as you enter them in Salesforce using one of three address verification APIs. You must be using the Household Account model or have address management enabled for Organizational Accounts to use an address verification service. Address verification is not supported in the 1-to-1 or Individual "Bucket" Account models. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Address verification is not performed on addresses imported or updated using the NPSP Data Importer. Once you've set up Salesforce for address verification, Salesforce: - Checks to see if addresses exist when you try to add them - Standardizes addresses for you (i.e. converts "Street" to "St" in the saved record, etc.) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Address verification only works for records you create after you've set up address verification. Verification does not apply to contact information that you may have previously entered in Salesforce. ### Set Up Address Verification 1. From App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select NPSP Settings, and then click **People** | **Addresses**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Review the general instructions under the Verification API Account Settings section and click **Enable Automatic Verification**. 4. Select the address verification service you want to use and enter the appropriate information. For more specific guidance on the individual verification services available, see below. 5. (Optional) Select **Reject Ambiguous Addresses** to mark ambiguous addresses as invalid when the API returns more than one address. If not selected, Salesforce chooses the first suggested address as the valid address. 6. Click **Save.** 7. (Optional) Click the **Verify All Addresses** button to mass verify addresses that already exist in your organization. Remember, Salesforce only verifies those addresses you enter _after_ you've set up your address verification service. **This option is available with the Smarty API only**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To exclude an Address from being verified, select **Verified** on the Address record. Address Verification skips any record with this checkbox selected. Smarty API The Smarty Address Verification API requires you to enter both an Authentication ID and an Authentication Token. These should be available to you in the API Keys section of your Smarty account. Visit the [Smarty website](https://www.smarty.com/) for more information. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The NPSP integration with SmartyStreets Address Verification API only verifies U.S.-based addresses. Cicero API The Cicero Address Verification API requires you to enter an API Key. When using the Cicero Address Verification API, select **Prevent Address Overwrite** to prevent Cicero from overwriting existing addresses during the verification process. Google Geocoding API The Google Geocoding Address Verification API requires you to enter an API Key. This should be available to you in your Google account's [Developers Console](https://code.google.com/apis/console). ## How do Address Updates Work? This table outlines Address behavior in NPSP. For Organization Accounts, this assumes that Organizational Account Addresses Enabled is enabled in **NPSP Settings** | **People** | **Addresses**.
Change What happens on Household Accounts? What happens on Organization Accounts?
Use the Change Address button on the Manage Household page to change an address A new Address record is created in the Addresses related list. The new Address is automatically marked as Default Address and is copied to all Contacts' Mailing Address fields (except Contacts that have the Override Address box checked). N/A
Modify the Billing Address fields on an Account A new Address record is created in the Addresses related list. The new Address is automatically marked as Default Address and is copied to all Contacts' Mailing Address fields (except Contacts that have the Override Address box checked). A new Address record is created in the Addresses related list. The new Address is automatically marked as Default Address.
Modify the Mailing Address on a Contact (Override Address box IS NOT checked) A new Address record is created in the Household Account's Addresses related list. The new Address is automatically marked as Default Address and is copied to the Household Account's Billing Address fields and all Contacts' Mailing Address fields. N/A
Modify the Mailing Address on a Contact (Override Address box IS checked) A new Address record is created in the Household Account's Addresses related list, but the change only affects the Mailing Address fields on the Contact you updated. N/A
Modify an Address record marked as Default The change is copied to the Household Account's Billing Address fields and all Contacts' Mailing Address fields (except Contacts that have the Override Address box checked). The change is copied to the Organization Account's Billing Address fields.
Modify an Address record that IS NOT marked as Default The change affects the Address record you updated. If any Contacts are using this Address (with Address Override), the change is copied over to the Contact's Mailing Address fields. The change only affects the Address record you updated.
Mark an Address record as Default The Address from the record you marked as Default is copied to the Household Account's Billing Address fields and all Contacts' Mailing Address fields (except Contacts that have the Override Address box checked). The Address from the record you marked as Default is copied to the Organization Account's Billing Address fields.
Create a new Address from the Addresses related list on an Account and do NOT mark as Default A new Address record is created, but the Address IS NOT copied to the Household Account's Billing Address fields. The address IS NOT copied to the Organization Account's Billing Address fields.
Create a new Address from the Addresses related list on an Account AND mark it as Default The Address from the new record is copied to the Household Account's Billing Address fields and all Contacts' Mailing Address fields (except Contacts that have the Override Address box checked). The Address from the new record is copied to the Organization Account's Billing Address fields.
## Configure Permissions for Managing Household Account Information Set permissions for updating Household members. Ask your Salesforce admin to manage Household Accounts for things like splitting or merging Households. If your Salesforce admin is having difficulty using the Household Account management tools, double check their permissions and page layouts. Add the Manage Household Lightning Action on the Household Account page layout. These are the permissions your admin needs to manage Household Accounts: - Object access: Add Read, Create, Delete, View All Records, and Modify All Records access to Accounts, Contacts, and Addresses. - Visualforce page access: - npe01.ContactMerge - npe01.ContactNewOverride - npo02.manageHousehold - npsp.CON\_DeleteContactOverride - npsp.HH\_ManageHH - npsp.HH\_ManageHHAccount - npsp.HH\_ManageHousehold - Apex Class access: All of the classes that start with: - npsp.ACCT - npsp.ADDR - npsp.CON\_ContactMerge - npsp.HH - npsp.Addresses - npsp.ContactAndOrgSettings - npsp.FieldMappings - npsp.HouseholdId - npsp.HouseholdMembers - npsp.HouseholdName - npsp.HouseholdNamingExclusionsCheckboxes - npsp.HouseholdNamingExclusionsString - npsp.HouseholdNamingUserControlledFields - npsp.Households - npsp.HouseholdSelector - npsp.HouseholdSettings - npsp.LegacyHouseholdMembers - npsp.LegacyHouseholds - npsp.LegacyHouseholdSelector - npsp.NamingExclusions # Configure Address Settings Manage and edit addresses for Contacts and Accounts in EDA. - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA allows you to track and manage one or more addresses for Contacts and Accounts. Use EDA Address Settings to configure multiple addresses and to determine how EDA handles simple updates to Address records. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses are on by default for Contacts, which allows you to track and manage multiple mailing addresses for Contacts by using Address object records. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses for Household Accounts are always turned on in EDA. They can't be turned off. In EDA Address Settings, in the Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types table, moving Household Account between Available Account Record Types and Selected Account Record Types doesn't affect the availability of multiple addresses for Household Accounts. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Administrative Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses are on by default for Administrative Accounts, which allows you to save multiple Address records for an Account. However, additional addresses are not synchronized with the Contact under the parent, container Administrative Account. With multiple addresses off for Administrative Accounts, one Billing Address is stored on the Account record. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Other Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses are on by default for Business Organization Accounts and off by default for all other institutional and organizational Account record types: Academic Program, Educational Institution, Sports Organization, and University Department. - **[Manage Simple Changes to Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When using multiple addresses, by default EDA creates a new Address record every time you update an Address record. Sometimes, however, you only need to make a minor change—fix a typo or an incorrect house number, for example. For those types of minor updates, you can instruct EDA to update the existing Address record rather than create a new record, using the Update Address Records for Simple Changes setting in EDA Settings. - **[Configure a New or Enhanced Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When we release new objects, they’re not automatically displayed in your existing org. ## Before You Begin EDA allows you to track and manage one or more addresses for Contacts and Accounts. Use EDA Address Settings to configure multiple addresses and to determine how EDA handles simple updates to Address records. ![Address Settings in EDA Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_settings.png) Before configuring EDA Address Settings, make sure you understand when and how EDA synchronizes multiple addresses across the Contact, Account, and Address objects, and determine where and when you want to use multiple addresses. See [Understand Addresses in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm) . For information about creating and editing Address records, see [Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm) . ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Contacts Multiple addresses are on by default for Contacts, which allows you to track and manage multiple mailing addresses for Contacts by using Address object records. If you're using Household Accounts as the default account model, turning off multiple addresses for Contacts doesn't do anything; all the rules for syncing address data between Contact, Account, and Address records still apply. Turning off multiple addresses for Contacts only affects Contacts that have an Administrative Account or an organizational Account as their parent Account, and only if you've turned off multiple addresses for those Account types. If so, one mailing address is stored on the Contact record. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. Select or deselect Allow Multiple Contact Addresses. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Household Accounts Multiple addresses for Household Accounts are always turned on in EDA. They can't be turned off. In EDA Address Settings, in the Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types table, moving Household Account between Available Account Record Types and Selected Account Record Types doesn't affect the availability of multiple addresses for Household Accounts. If it's essential that you do not have multiple addresses enabled on Household Accounts, create a custom Account record type to represent households, and turn off multiple addresses for that Account type. See [Verify or Change the Record Types Used for Administrative and Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type settings must specify values that are different from each other to ensure data integrity. Verify the current settings for both. If you're using a custom Account record type instead of the default Administrative or Household Account record type, then change the corresponding Account record type setting. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not to existing Accounts."). ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Administrative Accounts Multiple addresses are on by default for Administrative Accounts, which allows you to save multiple Address records for an Account. However, additional addresses are not synchronized with the Contact under the parent, container Administrative Account. With multiple addresses off for Administrative Accounts, one Billing Address is stored on the Account record. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. To disable multiple addresses for Administrative Accounts, under Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types, move Administrative from Selected Account Record Types to Available Account Record Types. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Other Accounts Multiple addresses are on by default for Business Organization Accounts and off by default for all other institutional and organizational Account record types: Academic Program, Educational Institution, Sports Organization, and University Department. When multiple addresses are on for these Account types, additional addresses are saved as Address records and are not synchronized with their related Contacts. With multiple addresses off for these Account types, one Billing Address is stored on the Account record. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. Under Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types, move an Account type to Selected Account Record Types to turn on multiple addresses, or move it to Available Account Record Types to turn off multiple addresses. 4. Save your changes. ## Manage Simple Changes to Address Records When using multiple addresses, by default EDA creates a new Address record every time you update an Address record. Sometimes, however, you only need to make a minor change—fix a typo or an incorrect house number, for example. For those types of minor updates, you can instruct EDA to update the existing Address record rather than create a new record, using the Update Address Records for Simple Changes setting in EDA Settings. By default, Update Address Records for Simple Changes is off, which means that EDA creates a new Address record even for simple changes. If you turn it on, this setting tells EDA to not create new Address records for these minor changes: - Changes to capitalization in one or more mailing fields - Adding or removing spaces in one or more mailing fields - Changing the value in any one of these fields: - Mailing Street - Mailing Street2 - Mailing City - Mailing State/Province - Mailing Zip/Postal Code - Mailing Country - Mailing County - Address Type Here are some examples of simple changes. - Changing the Mailing Street from 123 Mission Street to 415 Mission St. - Changing the Mailing City from Sanfrancisco to San Francisco - Changing the Mailing State/Province from TX to California EDA still creates a new Address record for changes that are more complex, including changing values in two or more mailing fields. To turn on Update Address Records for Simple Changes: 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. Select **Update Address Records for Simple Changes**. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure a New or Enhanced Object When we release new objects, they’re not automatically displayed in your existing org. You can decide how you want to expose the objects to your users by: - Updating object permissions - Updating security settings - Customizing navigation and layouts # Configure Address Settings Manage and edit addresses for Contacts and Accounts in EDA. - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA allows you to track and manage one or more addresses for Contacts and Accounts. Use EDA Address Settings to configure multiple addresses and to determine how EDA handles simple updates to Address records. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses are on by default for Contacts, which allows you to track and manage multiple mailing addresses for Contacts by using Address object records. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses for Household Accounts are always turned on in EDA. They can't be turned off. In EDA Address Settings, in the Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types table, moving Household Account between Available Account Record Types and Selected Account Record Types doesn't affect the availability of multiple addresses for Household Accounts. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Administrative Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses are on by default for Administrative Accounts, which allows you to save multiple Address records for an Account. However, additional addresses are not synchronized with the Contact under the parent, container Administrative Account. With multiple addresses off for Administrative Accounts, one Billing Address is stored on the Account record. - **[Configure Multiple Addresses for Other Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Multiple addresses are on by default for Business Organization Accounts and off by default for all other institutional and organizational Account record types: Academic Program, Educational Institution, Sports Organization, and University Department. - **[Manage Simple Changes to Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When using multiple addresses, by default EDA creates a new Address record every time you update an Address record. Sometimes, however, you only need to make a minor change—fix a typo or an incorrect house number, for example. For those types of minor updates, you can instruct EDA to update the existing Address record rather than create a new record, using the Update Address Records for Simple Changes setting in EDA Settings. ## Before You Begin EDA allows you to track and manage one or more addresses for Contacts and Accounts. Use EDA Address Settings to configure multiple addresses and to determine how EDA handles simple updates to Address records. ![Address Settings in EDA Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_settings.png) Before configuring EDA Address Settings, make sure you understand when and how EDA synchronizes multiple addresses across the Contact, Account, and Address objects, and determine where and when you want to use multiple addresses. See [Understand Addresses in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm). For information about creating and editing Address records, see [Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm). ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Contacts Multiple addresses are on by default for Contacts, which allows you to track and manage multiple mailing addresses for Contacts by using Address object records. If you're using Household Accounts as the default account model, turning off multiple addresses for Contacts doesn't do anything; all the rules for syncing address data between Contact, Account, and Address records still apply. Turning off multiple addresses for Contacts only affects Contacts that have an Administrative Account or an organizational Account as their parent Account, and only if you've turned off multiple addresses for those Account types. If so, one mailing address is stored on the Contact record. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. Select or deselect Allow Multiple Contact Addresses. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Household Accounts Multiple addresses for Household Accounts are always turned on in EDA. They can't be turned off. In EDA Address Settings, in the Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types table, moving Household Account between Available Account Record Types and Selected Account Record Types doesn't affect the availability of multiple addresses for Household Accounts. If it's essential that you do not have multiple addresses enabled on Household Accounts, create a custom Account record type to represent households, and turn off multiple addresses for that Account type. See [Verify or Change the Record Types Used for Administrative and Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Administrative Account Record Type and Household Account Record Type settings must specify values that are different from each other to ensure data integrity. Verify the current settings for both. If you're using a custom Account record type instead of the default Administrative or Household Account record type, then change the corresponding Account record type setting. Changes apply only to Accounts created after the change, not to existing Accounts."). ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Administrative Accounts Multiple addresses are on by default for Administrative Accounts, which allows you to save multiple Address records for an Account. However, additional addresses are not synchronized with the Contact under the parent, container Administrative Account. With multiple addresses off for Administrative Accounts, one Billing Address is stored on the Account record. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. To disable multiple addresses for Administrative Accounts, under Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types, move Administrative from Selected Account Record Types to Available Account Record Types. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Multiple Addresses for Other Accounts Multiple addresses are on by default for Business Organization Accounts and off by default for all other institutional and organizational Account record types: Academic Program, Educational Institution, Sports Organization, and University Department. When multiple addresses are on for these Account types, additional addresses are saved as Address records and are not synchronized with their related Contacts. With multiple addresses off for these Account types, one Billing Address is stored on the Account record. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. Under Enable Multiple Addresses for Account Types, move an Account type to Selected Account Record Types to turn on multiple addresses, or move it to Available Account Record Types to turn off multiple addresses. 4. Save your changes. ## Manage Simple Changes to Address Records When using multiple addresses, by default EDA creates a new Address record every time you update an Address record. Sometimes, however, you only need to make a minor change—fix a typo or an incorrect house number, for example. For those types of minor updates, you can instruct EDA to update the existing Address record rather than create a new record, using the Update Address Records for Simple Changes setting in EDA Settings. By default, Update Address Records for Simple Changes is off, which means that EDA creates a new Address record even for simple changes. If you turn it on, this setting tells EDA to not create new Address records for these minor changes: - Changes to capitalization in one or more mailing fields - Adding or removing spaces in one or more mailing fields - Changing the value in any one of these fields: - Mailing Street - Mailing Street2 - Mailing City - Mailing State/Province - Mailing Zip/Postal Code - Mailing Country - Mailing County - Address Type Here are some examples of simple changes. - Changing the Mailing Street from 123 Mission Street to 415 Mission St. - Changing the Mailing City from Sanfrancisco to San Francisco - Changing the Mailing State/Province from TX to California EDA still creates a new Address record for changes that are more complex, including changing values in two or more mailing fields. To turn on Update Address Records for Simple Changes: 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 2. In EDA Settings, click **Addresses** and then click **Edit**. 3. Select **Update Address Records for Simple Changes**. 4. Save your changes. # Configure Affiliations Settings In EDA Settings, click Affiliations and configure the Contact fields mapped to Primary Affiliations. - **[Verify the Default Primary Affiliation Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Primary Affiliation fields on a Contact record each map to an Account record type, according to the Affiliation Mappings on the Affiliation Settings page. - **[Add Affiliation Mappings for Custom Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're using a custom Account record type that corresponds to a Primary Affiliation field on the Contact page layout, create an Affiliation mapping to sync their data. - **[Prevent Affiliation Mapping Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Affiliation mappings and Table Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) automation help keep data in Contacts' Primary Affiliation fields up-to-date. However, without additional configuration, it's possible for users to create erroneous Primary Affiliation data on Contact records. To guard against an Account record type without an Affiliation mapping, enforce record type validation. - **[Configure Affiliation Mappings to Use Translated Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As of EDA version 1.114 (Summer '21), Affiliation mappings and their related API names are automatically associated for you, so no additional work is needed to translate these values. If you created translated labels in Translation Workbench before EDA version 1.114, we recommend that you refresh your settings so that translations display properly. - **[Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default. - **[Configure Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control how Education Data Architecture handles Affiliations when their related Program Enrollments are deleted. - **[Configure Affiliations Created with Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control how Education Data Architecture handles Affiliations when Program Enrollments are created without an existing Affiliation. - **[Disable Contacts to Multiple Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If the Contacts to Multiple Accounts feature is enabled in your org, we recommend that you disable it and use Affiliations instead. ## Verify the Default Primary Affiliation Mappings The Primary Affiliation fields on a Contact record each map to an Account record type, according to the Affiliation Mappings on the Affiliation Settings page. Verify the mappings for the default Account record types (1) and their corresponding Primary Affiliation fields (2). ![Affiliation mappings in EDA Settings associate the EDA K-12 Architecture Kit default Account record types with Primary Affiliation fields on a Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/affil-mapping-new-ui.png) On the HEDA Contact Layout, only the Primary Business Organization and Primary Household fields are included by default. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note An Affiliation mapping for an Account record type can also be configured to automatically create related Program Enrollment records. By default, these auto-enrollment settings are enabled for the Academic Program record type only. For details, see [Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default."). ## Add Affiliation Mappings for Custom Record Types If you're using a custom Account record type that corresponds to a Primary Affiliation field on the Contact page layout, create an Affiliation mapping to sync their data. For example, let's say that you enroll students in a Summer Learning Program, a custom Account record type similar to the default Academic Program Account record type. 1. Verify the API name of the custom Account record type. In our example, it's Summer\_Learning\_Program. 2. Verify the field label of the corresponding Primary Affiliation field on the Contact page layout. In our example, it's Primary Summer Program. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Ideally, the Account record type and Primary Affiliation field are similarly named for consistency. 3. Create the Affiliation mapping. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Affiliation Mappings**. 2. In the Affiliation Mapping section, click **New** and then select an **Account Record Type** and **Primary Affiliation Field on Contact**. The API names automatically appear below the selection. 3. Save your changes. 4. Test the newly created Affiliation mapping. 1. Create an Account record with the Summer Learning Program record type. For example, call it Summer Learning Program '21. 2. On the student's Contact record: 1. From the Affiliated Accounts related list, click **New**. 2. In Organization, select **Summer Learning ‘21**. 3. Select **Primary**. 4. Save your changes. When you view Lucy's Contact record, Summer Learning '21 is her Primary Summer Program. ![Lucy Snow's Contact record showing her primary Affiliations with an Academic Program called B.A. English, a sports organization called Swim Team, and a summer program called Summer Learning Program ‘21](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/summer-affil.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you also want a related Program Enrollment record to be created automatically for Lucy, be sure to specify her Role in the Affiliation as Student. For more information, see [Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default."). ## Prevent Affiliation Mapping Errors Affiliation mappings and Table Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) automation help keep data in Contacts' Primary Affiliation fields up-to-date. However, without additional configuration, it's possible for users to create erroneous Primary Affiliation data on Contact records. To guard against an Account record type without an Affiliation mapping, enforce record type validation. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Record Type Validation**. 2. If the setting isn't turned on, click **Edit**, select it, and click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed Education Data Architecture before version 1.119 (Summer '22), you can't edit Accounts if Record Type Validation is enabled and your language isn't set to English. To edit Accounts, disable Record Type Validation or remove your existing Affiliation mappings and add them again. ## Configure Affiliation Mappings to Use Translated Values As of EDA version 1.114 (Summer '21), Affiliation mappings and their related API names are automatically associated for you, so no additional work is needed to translate these values. If you created translated labels in Translation Workbench before EDA version 1.114, we recommend that you refresh your settings so that translations display properly. ## Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default. When you create a Primary Affiliation for a Contact with values that match values in the default Auto-Enrollment Mappings in EDA Settings, you also create the following Affiliations: - Academic Program Account Record Type (1) - Current Auto-Enrollment Status (2) - Student Auto-Enrollment Role (3) - Program Enrollment ![Default Auto-Enrollment settings for the Academic Program record type that automatically create a Program Enrollment record when creating a Primary Affiliation with the specified status and role](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/auto-enrollment-new-ui.png) In other words, Auto-Enrollment mappings control how EDA K-12 Architecture Kit handles Program Enrollments when _Primary Affiliations_ are created. Contrast this automation with the other Program Enrollment settings, which affect Affiliations related to Program Enrollments that are deleted or created. These settings take effect only if the PREN\_Affiliation\_TDTM Trigger Handler is enabled. For Trigger Handler details, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) . For Account record types besides Academic Program (or custom versions of Academic Program), the Auto-Enrollment settings are likely not relevant. ## Configure Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments Control how Education Data Architecture handles Affiliations when their related Program Enrollments are deleted. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Program Enrollment Deletions**. 2. Review these settings: Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments By default, this setting is turned off. When a Program Enrollment is deleted, its associated Affiliation isn't deleted, but its status is set to the value specified in the next setting. If this setting is turned on and the related Affiliation has no other associated Program Enrollments, the Affiliation is deleted. Status for Affiliations Not Deleted If the related Affiliation isn't deleted with the Program Enrollment, set its status to the value specified here. This setting applies only if Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments is turned on and if the Affiliation has no other associated Program Enrollments. 3. To change the default settings, click **Edit**, and then make and save your changes. ## Configure Affiliations Created with Program Enrollments Control how Education Data Architecture handles Affiliations when Program Enrollments are created without an existing Affiliation. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Program Enrollments**. 2. Review these settings: Role for Created Affiliations By default, this setting is set to None, and Affiliations that are created when a Program Enrollment is created have no role specified. If a value is selected for this setting, Affiliations created have the role specified here. Status for Created Affiliations Set the status of Affiliations created to the value specified here. Affiliation End Date By default, this setting is turned off. Affiliations created don't specify an end date. If this setting is turned on, the End Date value is copied from the Program Enrollment. Affiliation Start Date By default, this setting is turned off. Affiliations created don't specify a start date. If this setting is turned on, the Start Date value is copied from the Program Enrollment. 3. If you need to change the default settings, click **Edit**, and then make and save your changes. ## Disable Contacts to Multiple Accounts If the Contacts to Multiple Accounts feature is enabled in your org, we recommend that you disable it and use Affiliations instead. The feature doesn't automatically relate a Contact and an Account based on a field's value (such as a Primary Business Organization) and doesn't support [automated soft credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm). If you leave Contacts to Multiple Accounts enabled, it doesn't prevent the use of Affiliations. 1. Remove the Related Contacts related list from any Account page layout where it appears. 2. Remove the Related Accounts related list from any Contact page layout where it appears. 3. From **Setup**, enter Account Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Account Settings**. 4. Click **Edit**, then deselect **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**. 5. Save your changes. # Configure Affiliations Settings In EDA Settings, click Affiliations and configure the Contact fields mapped to Primary Affiliations. - **[Verify the Default Primary Affiliation Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Primary Affiliation fields on a Contact record each map to an Account record type, according to the Affiliation Mappings on the Affiliation Settings page. - **[Add Affiliation Mappings for Custom Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're using a custom Account record type that corresponds to a Primary Affiliation field on the Contact page layout, create an Affiliation mapping to sync their data. - **[Prevent Affiliation Mapping Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Affiliation mappings and Table Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) automation help keep data in Contacts' Primary Affiliation fields up-to-date. However, without additional configuration, it's possible for users to create erroneous Primary Affiliation data on Contact records. To guard against an Account record type without an Affiliation mapping, enforce record type validation. - **[Configure Affiliation Mappings to Use Translated Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As of EDA version 1.114 (Summer '21), Affiliation mappings and their related API names are automatically associated for you, so no additional work is needed to translate these values. If you created translated labels in Translation Workbench before EDA version 1.114, we recommend that you refresh your settings so that translations display properly. - **[Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default. - **[Configure Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control how K-12 Architecture Kit handles Affiliations when their related Program Enrollments are deleted. - **[Configure Affiliations Created with Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control how K-12 Architecture Kit handles Affiliations when Program Enrollments are created without an existing Affiliation. - **[Disable Contacts to Multiple Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If the Contacts to Multiple Accounts feature is enabled in your org, we recommend that you disable it and use Affiliations instead. ## Verify the Default Primary Affiliation Mappings The Primary Affiliation fields on a Contact record each map to an Account record type, according to the Affiliation Mappings on the Affiliation Settings page. Verify the mappings for the default Account record types (1) and their corresponding Primary Affiliation fields (2). ![Affiliation mappings in EDA Settings associate the EDA K-12 Architecture Kit default Account record types with Primary Affiliation fields on a Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/affil-mapping-new-ui.png) On the HEDA Contact Layout, only the Primary Business Organization and Primary Household fields are included by default. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note An Affiliation mapping for an Account record type can also be configured to automatically create related Program Enrollment records. By default, these auto-enrollment settings are enabled for the Academic Program record type only. For details, see [Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default."). ## Add Affiliation Mappings for Custom Record Types If you're using a custom Account record type that corresponds to a Primary Affiliation field on the Contact page layout, create an Affiliation mapping to sync their data. For example, let's say that you enroll students in a Summer Learning Program, a custom Account record type similar to the default Academic Program Account record type. 1. Verify the API name of the custom Account record type. In our example, it's Summer\_Learning\_Program. 2. Verify the field label of the corresponding Primary Affiliation field on the Contact page layout. In our example, it's Primary Summer Program. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Ideally, the Account record type and Primary Affiliation field are similarly named for consistency. 3. Create the Affiliation mapping. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Affiliation Mappings**. 2. In the Affiliation Mapping section, click **New** and then select an **Account Record Type** and **Primary Affiliation Field on Contact**. The API names automatically appear below the selection. 3. Save your changes. 4. Test the newly created Affiliation mapping. 1. Create an Account record with the Summer Learning Program record type. For example, call it Summer Learning Program '21. 2. On the student's Contact record: 1. From the Affiliated Accounts related list, click **New**. 2. In Organization, select **Summer Learning ‘21**. 3. Select **Primary**. 4. Save your changes. When you view Lucy's Contact record, Summer Learning '21 is her Primary Summer Program. ![Lucy Snow's Contact record showing her primary Affiliations with an Academic Program called B.A. English, a sports organization called Swim Team, and a summer program called Summer Learning Program ‘21](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/summer-affil.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you also want a related Program Enrollment record to be created automatically for Lucy, be sure to specify her Role in the Affiliation as Student. For more information, see [Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default."). ## Prevent Affiliation Mapping Errors Affiliation mappings and Table Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) automation help keep data in Contacts' Primary Affiliation fields up-to-date. However, without additional configuration, it's possible for users to create erroneous Primary Affiliation data on Contact records. To guard against an Account record type without an Affiliation mapping, enforce record type validation. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Record Type Validation**. 2. If the setting isn't turned on, click **Edit**, select it, and click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed K-12 Architecture Kit before version 1.119 (Summer '22), you can't edit Accounts if Record Type Validation is enabled and your language isn't set to English. To edit Accounts, disable Record Type Validation or remove your existing Affiliation mappings and add them again. ## Configure Affiliation Mappings to Use Translated Values As of EDA version 1.114 (Summer '21), Affiliation mappings and their related API names are automatically associated for you, so no additional work is needed to translate these values. If you created translated labels in Translation Workbench before EDA version 1.114, we recommend that you refresh your settings so that translations display properly. ## Verify Auto-Enrollment Settings for Program Enrollments The Academic Program record type is different from other Account record types with Affiliation mappings—it's the only one with Auto-Enrollment settings specified by default. When you create a Primary Affiliation for a Contact with values that match values in the default Auto-Enrollment Mappings in EDA Settings, you also create the following Affiliations: - Academic Program Account Record Type (1) - Current Auto-Enrollment Status (2) - Student Auto-Enrollment Role (3) - Program Enrollment ![Default Auto-Enrollment settings for the Academic Program record type that automatically create a Program Enrollment record when creating a Primary Affiliation with the specified status and role](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/auto-enrollment-new-ui.png) In other words, Auto-Enrollment mappings control how EDA K-12 Architecture Kit handles Program Enrollments when _Primary Affiliations_ are created. Contrast this automation with the other Program Enrollment settings, which affect Affiliations related to Program Enrollments that are deleted or created. These settings take effect only if the PREN\_Affiliation\_TDTM Trigger Handler is enabled. For Trigger Handler details, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) . For Account record types besides Academic Program (or custom versions of Academic Program), the Auto-Enrollment settings are likely not relevant. ## Configure Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments Control how K-12 Architecture Kit handles Affiliations when their related Program Enrollments are deleted. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Program Enrollment Deletions**. 2. Review these settings: Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments By default, this setting is turned off. When a Program Enrollment is deleted, its associated Affiliation isn't deleted, but its status is set to the value specified in the next setting. If this setting is turned on and the related Affiliation has no other associated Program Enrollments, the Affiliation is deleted. Status for Affiliations Not Deleted If the related Affiliation isn't deleted with the Program Enrollment, set its status to the value specified here. This setting applies only if Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments is turned on and if the Affiliation has no other associated Program Enrollments. 3. To change the default settings, click **Edit**, and then make and save your changes. ## Configure Affiliations Created with Program Enrollments Control how K-12 Architecture Kit handles Affiliations when Program Enrollments are created without an existing Affiliation. 1. In EDA Settings, click **Program Enrollments**. 2. Review these settings: Role for Created Affiliations By default, this setting is set to None, and Affiliations that are created when a Program Enrollment is created have no role specified. If a value is selected for this setting, Affiliations created have the role specified here. Status for Created Affiliations Set the status of Affiliations created to the value specified here. Affiliation End Date By default, this setting is turned off. Affiliations created don't specify an end date. If this setting is turned on, the End Date value is copied from the Program Enrollment. Affiliation Start Date By default, this setting is turned off. Affiliations created don't specify a start date. If this setting is turned on, the Start Date value is copied from the Program Enrollment. 3. If you need to change the default settings, click **Edit**, and then make and save your changes. ## Disable Contacts to Multiple Accounts If the Contacts to Multiple Accounts feature is enabled in your org, we recommend that you disable it and use Affiliations instead. The feature doesn't automatically relate a Contact and an Account based on a field's value (such as a Primary Business Organization) and doesn't support [automated soft credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm). If you leave Contacts to Multiple Accounts enabled, it doesn't prevent the use of Affiliations. 1. Remove the Related Contacts related list from any Account page layout where it appears. 2. Remove the Related Accounts related list from any Contact page layout where it appears. 3. From **Setup**, enter Account Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Account Settings**. 4. Click **Edit**, then deselect **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**. 5. Save your changes. # Configure an Accounting Set for Fundraising For organizations raising funds through gifts that are designated for different purposes, it's important to track incoming gifts and their designations to make sure they accurately reconcile with finance systems. For gifts that are expected to arrive in the future that have legal contracts, revenue is also expected to be booked in advance. There's a requirement for accurate creation, adjustment, and exporting of ledger entries.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up accounting sets: | Manage Accounting Subledger | Mary is a Gift Manager at Hunger No More International. She receives one-time gift payments, as well as gift commitments such as recurring donations, pledges, or grants. She needs a solution to accomplish these goals: - Designate revenue from one-time gift transactions according to donor preferences. - Accurately designate revenue from incoming transactions that fulfill gift commitments according to agreements with the donors. - Adjust designations if a formal or legal gift commitment is overpaid or underpaid, and manage write-offs if the gift commitment is underpaid. - Accurately reflect all transaction designation data in ledger entries and export them to the Finance and Accounting systems. Mary uses Accounting Subledger (ASL) to unify her fundraising and finance systems and ensure consistent revenue data in both systems. Follow Mary as she configures an accounting set to generate financial records that reflect gift transaction designations. These gift transaction designations allow gift transactions to be allocated to one or more gift designations, which are financial allocations in Fundraising. Requirement - Ensure that the Gift Transaction, Gift Transaction Designation, and Gift Designation objects are present in the system and accessible to the user, with Fundraising enabled in the org. 1. Plan your accounting set field mapping by filling out this table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Mary mapped the fields based on the objects in the Fundraising Add-on. However, you can map any standard or custom object that you use to track revenue-generating records. | Transaction Journal Field | Type | Gift Transaction Field (Primary Object) | Gift Transaction Designation Field (Secondary Object) | Gift Designation Field (Fund Object) | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Amount | Currency | Current Amount | Amount | \- | | Committed Date | Date | \- | \- | \- | | Generate Expected Revenue/Expense | Checkbox | IF(ISPICKVAL(GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType, "Written"), TRUE, FALSE) | \- | \- | | Transaction Date | Date | Transaction Completion Date | \- | \- | | Check/Reference Number | Text | Payment Identifier | \- | \- | | Payment is Paid | Checkbox | Paid | \- | \- | | Written-Off | Checkbox | Written-Off | \- | \- | | Payment Scheduled Date | Date | Transaction Due Date | \- | \- | | Payment Paid Date | Date | Transaction Completion Date | \- | \- | | Payment Method | Text | Payment Method | \- | \- | | Fund Name | Text | \- | \- | Name | ![Screenshot of the Accounting Sets page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_1.png) 2. From the management settings for the objects with the fields to map to transaction journal records, go to Fields & Relationships. - For each field in the table, confirm that your custom object has a field of a type that matches the corresponding transaction journal field. For example, the field to map to Committed Date must be a date type. - If a custom object is missing a required field, or has a field of a different type, create a custom field. See [Manage Custom Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.dev_objectedit.htm&type=5). - If the platform objects are being used, to track accrued or booked revenue, add a custom field to the primary object to map to Generate Expected Revenue/Expense (see Gift Transaction field for this in the table above). the formula 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Fill these fields. ![Screenshot of a new accounting set with completed fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_2.png) | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Enter the name of your accounting set. In this setup, Mary calls it Incoming Gift Transactions. | | Number of Objects | Select **3 Object Model**. | | Primary Object | Select a transaction object. In this setup, Mary uses the Gift Transaction object. | | Secondary Object | Select the child object of the primary object. In this setup, Mary uses the Gift Transaction Designation object. | | Fund Object | Select the object for the fund that stores transactions. In this setup, Mary uses the Gift Designation object. | 6. Click **Next**. 7. Using the table that you filled out in step 1, select values on the New Accounting Set page, and then click **Next**. Here's what Mary's mappings look like for each object. ![Screenshot of the edit accounting set window with completed fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_3.png) ![Screenshot of the new accounting set window with completed fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_4.png) 8. Fill these fields, and then save your changes. ![Screenshot of a new accounting set with values for Accounting Set Type and Accounting Record Start Date fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_5.png) ![Screenshot of a new accounting set with values for Default Accrued Account Code and Default Write Off Account Code fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_6.png) | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Accounting Set Type | Select **Revenue**. | | Accounting Record Start Date | Select the earliest date that you want Accounting Subledger to process the records from. | | Default Accrued Account Code | Enter the name of the Gift Designation to use for future payments. | | Default Write Off Account Code | Enter the name of the Gift Designation to use for refunds. | 9. On the Accounting Sets page, next to the accounting set that you created, click ![Icon for the actions menu.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Activate**. ![Screenshot of the Accounting Sets page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fr_cookbook_7.png) SEE ALSO: ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_important.png) Important After you create your accounting sets, you can run the ASL job. Make sure that you give Fundraising access to the Integration User before run the job. [Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger jobs generate transaction journal records. Configure and run these jobs manually or on a defined schedule.") # Configure an Accounting Set for Recruiting and Admissions Fees For educational institutions, a key part of their mission is serving learners during their application journey and matriculation into a particular school. From on-campus to online learning—and especially within higher education—these institutions interact with prospective and enrolled students across the recruiting and admissions cycle.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up accounting sets: | Manage Accounting Subledger | Dimitri is the Director of Admissions at Astro University. As learners interact with his office, he uses Salesforce to process fees for applying to and enrolling in the university. Accounting Subledger helps him accurately track the flow of money, so that Astro's Finance department has all the information needed for financial reconciliation each school year. Follow Dimitri as he configures an accounting set to generate financial records that track incoming student fees. Requirement - Custom object for application fees such as enrollment fee. In this setup, Dimitri created the Application Fee custom object. 1. Plan your accounting set field mapping by filling out this table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Dimitri mapped the fields based on his custom object for Application Fee, but you can map any custom object that you use to track fees.
Transaction Journal Field Type Dimitri's Application Fee Field Your Application Fee Field Additional Considerations
Amount Currency Fee Amount   —
Committed Date Date Application Date   —
Generate Expected Revenue/Expense Checkbox Future Fee?   —
Transaction Date (optional) Date —   —
Check/Reference Number (optional) Text Application ID   —
Payment is Paid Checkbox Paid Fee?   —
Written-Off Checkbox Refunded Fee?   —
Payment Scheduled Date Date Due Date   Must have a value on your object if Payment is Paid is deselected.
Payment Paid Date Date Payment Date  

Must have a value on your object if either:

  • Payment is Paid is selected.
  • Written-Off is selected.
Payment Method Text Payment Method   —
Fund Name Text Fund Name   Must have a value on your object.
2. From the management settings for the object with the fields to map to transaction journal records, go to **Fields & Relationships**. - For each field in the previous table, confirm that your custom object has a field of a type that matches the corresponding transaction journal field. For example, the field to map to Committed Date must be of date type. - If your custom object is missing a required field or has a field of a different type, create a custom field. See [Manage Custom Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.dev_objectedit.htm&type=5). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Fill out these fields, and then click **Next**. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Enter the name of your accounting set. In this setup, Dimitri calls it Application Fees. | | Number of Objects | Select **1 Object Model**. | | Primary Object | Select a fee object. In this setup, Dimitri uses the Application Fee custom object. | 6. Using the table you filled out in step 1, select values on the New Accounting Set page, and then click **Next**. Here's what Dimitri's mapping looks like. ![Example Accounting set fields for application fees](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/cookbook_ra_accounting_set.png) 7. Fill out these fields, and then save your changes. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Accounting Set Type | Select **Revenue**. | | Accounting Record Start Date | Select the earliest date from which you want Accounting Subledger to process records. | | Default Accrued Account Code | Enter the name of the fund to use for future fees. | | Default Write Off Account Code | Enter the name of the fund to use for refunded fees. | | Expected Cash Flow Grouping | To view expected future fees, select **Group By Fund Account and Due Date**. | 8. On the Accounting Sets page, next to the accounting set that you created, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Activate**. # Configure an Accounting Set for Revenue Cloud For organizations with complex product catalogs and pricing structures, activities like generating quotes, billing customers, and collecting payments are critical. Regardless of their industry, these organizations manage many different types of records in Salesforce as they book, approve, and receive large volumes of transactions.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up accounting sets: | Manage Accounting Subledger | Clarissa is the Director of Sales at Ursa Major Solar. As her sales reps nurture prospective customers toward purchase commitments, she uses Salesforce to record sales quotes and invoices as they convert into recognized revenue. Accounting Subledger helps her track the flow of money accurately so that Ursa Major's accounting department has all the information needed to reconcile the books at the end of the quarter. Follow Clarissa as she configures an accounting set to generate financial records for these revenue-generating records. Requirement - The Invoice, Order, or Payment object included with Salesforce CPQ or Salesforce Billing. 1. Plan your accounting set field mapping by filling out this table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Clarissa mapped the fields based on the objects in Revenue Cloud, but you can map any standard or custom object that you use to track revenue-generating records. | Transaction Journal Field | Type | Invoice Field | Order Field | Payment Field | Your Field | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Amount | Currency | Total Amount (With Tax) | Order Amount | Amount |   | | Committed Date | Date | Invoice Date | PO Date | Payment Date |   | | Generate Expected Revenue/Expense | Checkbox | Hold Collections | Bill Now | Paid |   | | Transaction Date | Date | Invoice Posted Date | — | — |   | | Check/Reference Number | Text | — | Order ID | Check Number |   | | Payment is Paid | Checkbox | Paid | Paid | Paid |   | | Written-Off | Checkbox | Refund | Refunded | Refunded |   | | Payment Scheduled Date | Date | Invoice Date | PO Date | Payment Date |   | | Payment Paid Date | Date | Invoice Date | PO Date | Payment Date |   | | Payment Method | Text | Payment Method | Payment Method | Payment Method |   | | Fund Name | Text | Department | Department | Department |   | 2. From the management settings for the object with the fields to map to transaction journal records, go to **Fields & Relationships**. - For each field in the previous table, confirm that your custom object has a field of a type that matches the corresponding transaction journal field. For example, the field to map to Committed Date must be a date field. - If your custom object is missing a required field or has a field of a different type, create a custom field. See [Manage Custom Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.dev_objectedit.htm&type=5). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Fill out these fields, and then click **Next**. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Enter the name of your accounting set. In this setup, Clarissa calls it Invoices. | | Number of Objects | Select **1 Object Model**. | | Primary Object | Select a fee object. In this setup, Clarissa uses the Invoice, Order, or Payment object. | 6. Using the table you filled out in step 1, select values on the New Accounting Set page, and then click **Next**. Here's what Clarissa's mappings look like for each object. ![Example accounting set fields for invoice](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/accounting_set_invoices.png) ![Example accounting set fields for order](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/accounting_set_orders.png) ![Example accounting set fields for payment](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/accounting_set_payments.png) 7. Fill out these fields, and then save your changes. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Accounting Set Type | Select **Revenue**. | | Accounting Record Start Date | Select the earliest date from which you want Accounting Subledger to process records. | | Default Accrued Account Code | Enter the name of the fund to use for future payments. | | Default Write Off Account Code | Enter the name of the fund to use for refunds. | 8. On the Accounting Sets page, next to the accounting set that you created, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Activate**. # Configure an Applicant Portal for Third-Party Representatives Use Omnistudio components to set up an applicant portal for parents, guardians, and commissioned agents to apply on behalf of students.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure an applicant portal for third-party access:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Omnistudio Admin

AND

Omnistudio User

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you currently have a portal for applicants to apply for themselves, create another portal and configure it for third-party access. ## Who Is a Third Party? A third-party user is someone who submits an application on behalf of an applicant. Here are some examples of a third-party user. - Parents - Guardians - Caregivers - External commissioned agents Create a sharing set for third parties so they have access to the required records. ## Security Considerations for Educational Institutions If your institution is subject to the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model. Make sure to account for the protection of Personally Identifiable Information (PII) in the education records of students. If your institution is a HIPAA-covered organization and is subject to the HIPAA requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model. Make sure that you account for the protection of Protected Health Information (PHI) maintained outside of FERPA education records. To secure your sensitive data, implement a host of security features available with Salesforce. Here are a few examples. - Set your org-wide default sharing settings to Private, which is the most restrictive access possible. - Identify the data access requirements for the users in your various departments. Create profiles for the roles in those areas, and permission sets to grant permissions to roles or individual users. - Create a role hierarchy to give users the same level of access to the records owned by or shared with the users below them in the hierarchy. - Set field-level security to control who can access and edit certain fields on specific records. - Create sharing rules to open up record access to other users besides the record owners. - Set up authentication and authorization methods to control who sees what data, when they see the data, and from which locations and devices they can access the data. Every institution has unique privacy policies and regulatory requirements. We encourage you to consult with your security, legal, and regulatory specialists to use unique Salesforce configurations in combination with other information systems. ## Customize the Applicant Portal Home Page Update the Home page of your applicant portal so that third parties can enter information for the students that they represent and submit applications. ![Experience Cloud site applicant portal set up for third-party access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_application_third_party.png) 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your learner portal site, click **Builder**. 3. On the Home page, click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the **Flexcard** component to just above Start My Application in the Content area. 1. For Flexcard Name, select **EDUAdmissionsNoStudentData**. 2. For Exposed Attributes, enter {"ApiPageName": "Students\_\_c"}. 4. Preview and publish your site. ## Create and Configure a Students Page Add a page to your applicant portal where parents, guardians, and agents can manage the students that they represent. When a third party adds a student, the system creates Account Contact Relationship records to support the sharing application information. ![Students page on applicant portal for third-party access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_application_students_page.png) 1. In Experience Builder for your site, click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**. 3. Select **2 columns, 2:1 ratio**, and then click **Next**. 4. For Name, enter Students. The URL field fills automatically. 5. For API Name, enter Students. 6. Click **Create**. 7. Click the menu bar, and then click **Edit Default Navigation**. 8. Click **Add Menu Item**, and then specify these values. 1. For Name, enter Students. 2. For Type, select **Site Page**. 3. For Page, select **Students**. 9. Save your changes. 10. On the Students page, click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png). 11. Drag the **Rich Content Editor** component to the Content Header area. 12. Click **Edit Content**, and enter Students. Apply any additional formatting that you want. 13. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the **Flexcard** component to just below the Content Header section. 14. For Flexcard Name, select **EDUAdmissionsNewStudentButton**. 15. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the **Flexcard** component to the Content section. 16. For Flexcard Name, select **EDUAdmissionsMyStudents**. 17. Preview and publish your site. ## Update Omnistudio Data Mapper for Third-Party Access To connect a third party with the student that they're adding data for, create a separate cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsGetLoggedInUserPersonAccount Data Mapper for third-party access. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Data Mappers**. 2. Click your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsGetLoggedInUserPersonAccount Data Mapper. 3. For Account, set up the filter to **Id=**Contact:AccountId. 4. Click **Add Extract Step**. 5. For Select an Option, select **Contact**. 6. For Extract Output Path, enter Contact. 7. Set up the filter to **Id=**CurrentUser:ContactId. 8. Drag the Contact step above the Account step. 9. Click **Output**. 10. For Account:PersonContactId, click **Edit**. 11. For Extract JSON Path, select **Contact:Id**. ## Update Integration Procedure for Third-Party Access To reference the Data Mapper for third parties, update the Integration Procedure for processing and saving student application data submitted by a third party. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Integration Procedures**. 2. Click your cloned version of the EDUAdmissions/CreateMyStudents integration procedure. 3. Click **GetUserInfo**. 4. For Data Mapper Name, select your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsGetLoggedInUserPersonAccount Data Mapper for third parties. 5. From LoopStudents, select **CreateUserToStudentAccountCCR**. 6. In the Additional Input section, for ContactId, replace the formula with \=%GetUserInfo:Account:ContactId%. 7. From LoopStudents, select **CreateUserToStudentAccountACR**. 8. In the Additional Input section, for AccountId, replace the formula with \=%GetUserInfo:Account:Id%. 9. Click **CreateUserConstituentRole**. 10. In the Additional Input section, for PersonId, replace the formula with \=%GetUserInfo:Account:Id%. # Configure Application Requirement Assignment Assign Action Plans to Applications so that admissions staff and applicants learn about requirements and next steps. - **[Understand the Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've set up your application requirements and Action Plan Templates, you're ready to assign Action Plans to Applications. When an Action Plan is assigned to an Application it lets admissions staff and applicants know what requirements must be completed and submitted. Typically, each Application is assigned multiple Action Plans. For example, an Application might be assigned the following Action Plans: Core Application, Transcripts, Test Scores, and Recommendations. Based on your institution’s needs, Action Plans can be assigned automatically, manually, or both. - **[Automate Action Plan Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most institutions use automation to assign Action Plans. Maybe you have a batch job that creates Contact and Application records based on data coming in from Common App. When those Application records are created, automation can be triggered to create and associate Action Plans based on certain Application criteria. Your Application criteria can be simple or very specific. Remember that a single Action Plan can be a requirement for multiple degree programs. Your institution might use Flows, Process Builder, Apex, or other tools—the choice is up to you. - **[Automate Application Admission](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automation helps streamline the application review and admission process. - **[Set Up Staff to Assign Action Plans and Ad Hoc Action Plan Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Maybe your institution only receives a small number of applications and wants to process them manually. Or maybe your admissions process needs to track last-minute requirements. Admissions Connect gives you the flexibility to cover any admissions process. You can set up your admissions staff to assign Action Plans manually or add ad hoc documents and Tasks. For example, if an applicant changes their mind about what degree program they’re applying for, there might be additional requirements. Or maybe you want to let your verifiers add PDF copies of fee receipts. ## Understand the Basics After you've set up your application requirements and Action Plan Templates, you're ready to assign Action Plans to Applications. When an Action Plan is assigned to an Application it lets admissions staff and applicants know what requirements must be completed and submitted. Typically, each Application is assigned multiple Action Plans. For example, an Application might be assigned the following Action Plans: Core Application, Transcripts, Test Scores, and Recommendations. Based on your institution’s needs, Action Plans can be assigned automatically, manually, or both. See [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm) ## Automate Action Plan Assignment Most institutions use automation to assign Action Plans. Maybe you have a batch job that creates Contact and Application records based on data coming in from Common App. When those Application records are created, automation can be triggered to create and associate Action Plans based on certain Application criteria. Your Application criteria can be simple or very specific. Remember that a single Action Plan can be a requirement for multiple degree programs. Your institution might use Flows, Process Builder, Apex, or other tools—the choice is up to you. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Each Application record that’s assigned Action Plans, counts as a SOQL query. In addition, each Document Checklist Item and each Task associated with an Action Plan, count as separate DML statements. Keep the platform limits for SOQL queries (max 100) and DML statements (max 150) in mind when developing your automation, otherwise you risk hitting the limits for Action Plans. Also make sure that automation assigns Action Plans for a **single** Application per transaction. In other words, don’t assign Action Plans for batches of Applications in a single transaction. Ideally, the automation that assigns Action Plans directly follows the automation that creates an applicant’s Contact, Account, and Application record. For more information, see [Import Your Data into Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect gives you a complete view into your institution’s recruiting and admissions experience—from information about prospects and applicants, like their education history, to information about your institution, like degree programs and terms."). To get you started with automation, we provide a sample flow template that assigns Action Plans to a **single** Application at a time. This flow template associates our [quick start sample Action Plan Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide.") with Application records. Here’s what the flow does. - The flow runs on insert or update, only if the Application Type field is filled in and was previously blank **and** the Term field is set in the future. - All Application records get the Sample: Core Application and Sample: Transcripts Action Plan assigned to them. - If the Application Type is Graduate, the Sample: Recommendations Action Plan is also assigned. - If the Application Type is Undergraduate or Transfer, the Sample: Test Scores Action Plan is also assigned. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The sample flow assigns the owner of the Action Plans to the owner of the Application record. When you clone our template, customize these details for your own admissions process. To access the sample flow: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Look for Sample: Assign Application Requirements. If you don't see the sample flow, you can [install it](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest/sample-flows). This sample flow demonstrates one approach to implementing automation for Action Plans. We recommend that you don’t edit the sample flows directly and that you leave them inactive. Instead, create a new flow and look in the Template tab for the sample flow you want to start from. You can also open it and click Save As to create a new flow. Use our flow as a reference as you start to define your own processes. For more information, see [Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=flow.htm) in Salesforce Help. Now that Action Plans are assigned to applicants, consider [automating the attachment of documents to Document Checklist Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make it easy to attach documents to Document Checklist Items to save time for your staff and make document processing more efficient."). ## Automate Application Admission Automation helps streamline the application review and admission process. To get you started, we provide a sample flow template that admits applicants when their application meets specific criteria. The sample flow includes the following admission criteria. - The Application is in a Received state. - The Applicant is a US citizen. - All Education History is verified. - All Education History has a converted GPA of 3.2 or higher. To access the sample flow: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Look for Sample: Application Auto Admit. If you don't see the sample flow, you can [install it](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest/sample-flows). We recommend that you don’t edit the sample flow directly and that you leave them inactive. Instead, create a new flow and look in the Template tab for the sample flow you want to start from. You can also open it and click Save As to create a new flow. Use our flow as a reference as you start to define your own processes. For more information, see [Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=flow.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Set Up Staff to Assign Action Plans and Ad Hoc Action Plan Items Maybe your institution only receives a small number of applications and wants to process them manually. Or maybe your admissions process needs to track last-minute requirements. Admissions Connect gives you the flexibility to cover any admissions process. You can set up your admissions staff to assign Action Plans manually or add ad hoc documents and Tasks. For example, if an applicant changes their mind about what degree program they’re applying for, there might be additional requirements. Or maybe you want to let your verifiers add PDF copies of fee receipts. Keep in mind that assigning an entire Action Plan is different than adding ad hoc documents and Tasks. That’s because Action Plans and Action Plan Items are different things.  - Action Plans—Represent application requirements, such as transcripts. For example, the Action Plan Template for Transcripts includes two child Document Checklist Items, one for unofficial transcripts and one for official transcripts. - Action Plan Items—Represent documents and data, such as the PDF of an unofficial transcript or the actual responses the applicant entered on their application, like their birth date or details about education history. In an Action Plan for Transcripts, the individual PDFs for the unofficial and official transcripts are the Action Plan Items. To allow your admissions staff to add Action Plans or Action Plan Items, assign them Create permission on the Action Plan object. We recommend creating a new permission set or modifying one of the default ones. ### Action Plans By default, the Related tab on the Application page includes the Action Plans related list. This is where admissions staff add Action Plans to an Application. A user must be assigned Create permission for the Action Plan object to see the New Plan button in this list. Check out [Assign Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can assign requirements directly from an application. Say an applicant makes a mistake or changes their mind about what degree program to apply for. That might mean additional requirements are needed. Or maybe your institution handles a small amount of applications and you assign requirements individually.") for detailed steps.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The Action Plans related list has some known issues. The Status field in the list doesn't update when all child Action Plan Items are completed. In addition, the Task Completed field doesn't update when Document Checklist Items are completed. If you don’t intend to let your admissions staff add Action Plans to Applications, you can remove the Action Plans List - Financial Services Cloud component from the page to avoid confusion.   ### Action Plan Items To allow your admissions staff to add ad hoc documents and Tasks, configure your Action Plan Template with the **Let users add items to action plans** checkbox. Remember that once a template is published, you can’t edit it, so select this checkbox when you create the template. For detailed steps, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). ![Window to create new New Action Plan Template records with a callout around the "Let users add items to action plans" checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/action_plan_template_create_add_items.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **Let users add items to action plans** checkbox, add it to the page layout. The Action Plan Template object isn't listed in Object Manager. To edit the layout, navigate to an Action Plan Template record in the app, then click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/setup_gear_icon_bolt.png) and select **Edit Object**. Then click **Page Layouts** and edit the Action Plan Template Layout. When your admissions staff click on an Action Plan from the Related tab, they see a New button on the related lists for Tasks or Document Checklist Items. Check out [Add Ad Hoc Documents or Tasks to an Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_requirements_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add one-off documents and tasks to an assigned Action Plan to show the items in the Application Checklist and on the Application Review page.") for detailed steps. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note - The Basic Task Details field set on the Task object determines what fields show for ad hoc Tasks in the Admissions Connect components. Customize this field set for your admissions process. You can add other standard Task fields or custom fields. To create a custom field on the Task object, create it on the Activity object. Make sure to add your custom field to the Task page layout. Then update the Basic Task Details field set with the custom field. - Ad hoc Tasks and Document Checklist Items don’t have corresponding Application Material Mapping records. In the Admissions Connect components, these items display below their peer Action Plan Items sorted alphabetically. For example, if a Transcript Fee document is added to the Action Plan for Transcripts, it displays after the existing Action Plan Items for Unofficial Transcript and Official Transcript. - If you're thinking about using ad hoc Tasks in an applicant portal, see [Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect."). # Configure Application Review Assignment Application Reviews can be assigned using automation or manually from the Application or Application Review record pages. You can even use a mass action from the Application list view to select multiple Applications and assign multiple reviewers. Most institutions use a combination of automation and manual assignment. - **[Understand the Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Application Review process is unique to your institution. When an Application meets certain criteria you can assign specific individual Users or assign it to a Queue for review. Queues are a great way to make sure that a group of individuals review an Application without assigning a review to each User directly. When a member of the Queue is ready to pick up a review, they can do so from an Application Review list view that you set up for the queue. For example, you might want all undergraduate applications to go to the Undergrad Queue. Or maybe you want all graduate applications to the Computer Science program reviewed by a specific reviewer who knows the program’s requirements best. - **[Automate Application Review Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automation helps streamline the application review assignment process. To get you started with automation, we provide a sample flow that assigns Application Reviews to a queue and specific users. - **[Set Up Staff to Manually Assign Reviewers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To add a reviewer from the Reviewer Management component, a User needs Read and Create permission on the Application Review object. By default, only the Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage permission set includes this permission. If you want other admissions staff to assign reviewers, create a new permission set and assign it to your staff. Or you can modify the other Admissions Connect permission sets for this additional permission. Users without Create permission see a list of assigned reviewers, but won’t see the Manage button that is used to assign reviewers. ## Understand the Basics Your Application Review process is unique to your institution. When an Application meets certain criteria you can assign specific individual Users or assign it to a Queue for review. Queues are a great way to make sure that a group of individuals review an Application without assigning a review to each User directly. When a member of the Queue is ready to pick up a review, they can do so from an Application Review list view that you set up for the queue. For example, you might want all undergraduate applications to go to the Undergrad Queue. Or maybe you want all graduate applications to the Computer Science program reviewed by a specific reviewer who knows the program’s requirements best. Just keep in mind that a Queue can be assigned multiple times to the same Application, but you can’t assign the Queue more times than there are members. In contrast, a User can only be assigned to review an Application once. To assign reviews to a Queue, set up your Queue and make sure it supports the Application Review object, then add your members. For more information, see [Set Up Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=setting_up_queues.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When assigning reviews, consider specifying a Review Due Date to let your reviewers know when their review is due. ## Automate Application Review Assignment Automation helps streamline the application review assignment process. To get you started with automation, we provide a sample flow that assigns Application Reviews to a queue and specific users. Here's what the sample flow does. - The flow runs on create and update for Application records, only when the Checklist Completion is set to 100% and the Application Status is set to In Review from a previous value. - If the Application Type is Undergraduate or Transfer, up to three users assigned the Admissions Connect - Review Applications for Internal Users permission set are assigned a review. - If the Application Type is Graduate, three reviews are assigned to the Graduate Review Queue. To access the sample flow: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Look for Sample: Assign Application Reviews. If you don't see the sample flow, you can [install it](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest/sample-flows). We recommend that you don’t edit the sample flows directly and that you leave them inactive. Instead, create a new flow and look in the Template tab for the sample flow you want to start from. You can also open it and click Save As to create a new flow. Use our flow as a reference as you start to define your own processes. For more information, see [Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=flow.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Set Up Staff to Manually Assign Reviewers To add a reviewer from the Reviewer Management component, a User needs Read and Create permission on the Application Review object. By default, only the Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage permission set includes this permission. If you want other admissions staff to assign reviewers, create a new permission set and assign it to your staff. Or you can modify the other Admissions Connect permission sets for this additional permission. Users without Create permission see a list of assigned reviewers, but won’t see the Manage button that is used to assign reviewers. With the right permissions, users can follow the steps in [Add a Reviewer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_add_reviewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can quickly add a reviewer directly from the Application or Application Review record pages. Or you can use the Application list view to select multiple Applications and assign multiple reviewers.") to assign and manage reviewers. To get your staff up and running, here’s what we provide by default.  - The Application and Application Review record pages include the Reviewer Management component. - List views for the Application object include the Assign Reviewers button. If you don’t see the Reviewer Management component on your record pages, customize them to match what's described in [Admissions Connect Default Page Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. Most assets are unmanaged, which means you don't receive updates automatically. Use the information in this article to keep up-to-date with releases."). If the Assign Reviewers button is missing from the list view, see [Create and Customize List Views for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your staff stay focused by setting up list views that best support your institution’s application review process."). To help you and your staff manage reviews, we also include the Assigned Reviews field in the All list view for Applications. This field lists the number of assigned reviews and provides a link to manage those reviews. You can add this field to your custom list views, too. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you or your admissions staff work with split view, move the Assigned Reviews field to be one of the first four fields in your list view. That way, you can access the link to manage reviews when using split view. # Configure Application Submission and Management Options for Applicants Build additional checkpoints and flexibility into the dynamic admissions application process. Give applicants the options to edit, view, confirm, sign, submit, and cancel their applications. Choose which application details and progress indicators appear on the Application Details and Application List components. Provide applicants the option to withdraw an application after submission. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license
User Permissions Needed
To update the Experience Cloud site and edit objects: Education Cloud Full Access
## Configure the Application Details Component Configure the Application Details component to control what applicants can do with an application and which details appear in the application header. 1. In Experience Builder, go to the Pages menu, and under Preliminary Application Reference, select the **Application Detail** page. 2. To open the design attributes panel, click the **Application Details** component. 3. To set what applicants can do with their application, configure the design attributes. | Design Attribute | Description | Default | | --- | --- | --- | | **Let users view and edit tasks** | Applicants can edit the data within each application task until they’re ready to submit the full application. After submission, an applicant can view the details of each of their application tasks, but they can’t edit them. | Deselected | | **Allow application submission** | Gives applicants the option to submit after they complete all required application tasks. The status of the application updates automatically after submission. | Deselected | | **Require applicant signature for submission** | Requires applicants to provide a digital signature for each application. | Deselected | | **Allow applicants to cancel applications before submission** | Gives applicants the option to cancel unsubmitted applications. | Deselected | | **Allow applicants to withdraw application** | Gives applicants the option to withdraw a submitted application. | Deselected | 4. To require applicants to confirm that their provided information is accurate and complete before submission, enter up to five confirmation statements. Applicants must check all confirmation statements before they can submit. You must enter at least one statement to show the confirmation checkboxes to the applicant. Each confirmation statement supports a maximum of 2000 characters. 5. If necessary, enter a post-submission page URL. This URL specifies a redirect page after the applicant submits their application, instead of the default post-submission window. 6. To choose which application details appear in the application header, configure the design attributes. | Design Attribute | Description | Default | | --- | --- | --- | | **Show Application Type** | Show or hide the application type. | Selected | | **Application Type Label** | Enter text to override the default Application Type field label. | Application Type | | **Show Campus** | Show or hide the campus. | Deselected | | **Campus Label** | Enter text to override the default Campus field label. | Campus | | **Show Academic Term** | Show or hide the academic term. | Selected | | **Academic Term Label** | Enter text to override the default Academic Term field label. | Academic Term | | **Show Application Status** | Show or hide the application status. | Selected | | **Application Status Label** | Enter text to override the default Application Status field label. | Application Status | | **Show Application Deadline** | Show or hide the application deadline. When the Application Close Date Time field has a value on the application timeline record, the deadline includes the date, time, and the applicant’s local time zone. When only the Application Close Date field has a value, only the date appears. | Selected | | **Application Deadline Label** | Enter text to override the default Close Date field label. | Close Date | | **Show application progress bar** | Show or hide the progress bar that indicates how far the applicant is in completing their application. | Selected | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The Application Details Lightning web component supports Edit and View in stages that use Omnistudio components. These stages support Edit and View: Profile, Test Results, Secondary or High School Education, College or University Education, and Files. Use these Omnistudio components as templates to create any additional Omnistudio components that are required for your application. ## Configure the Application List Component Configure the Application List component to control which applications and details applicants see, and how they act on each application. 1. In Experience Builder, go to the Pages menu, and under Preliminary Application Reference, select the **Application List** page. 2. To open the design attributes panel, click the **Application List** component. 3. Configure the design attributes to set which applications and details applicants see. | Design Attribute | Description | Default | | --- | --- | --- | | **Show Withdrawn and Canceled Checkbox Filter** | Shows or hides withdrawn and canceled applications on the application list. Use this option if you give applicants the option to withdraw or cancel applications. | Deselected | | **Show View Decision Button** | Switches the call to action to View Decision for applications that have a shared admission decision. When this option is deselected, applicants see Manage Application. | Deselected | | **Show Application Type** | Show or hide the application type. | Selected | | **Application Type Label** | Enter text to override the default Application Type field label. | Application Type | | **Show Campus** | Show or hide the campus. | Deselected | | **Campus Label** | Enter text to override the default Campus field label. | Campus | | **Show Academic Term** | Show or hide the academic term. | Selected | | **Academic Term Label** | Enter text to override the default Academic Term field label. | Academic Term | | **Show Application Status** | Show or hide the application status. | Selected | | **Application Status Label** | Enter text to override the default Application Status field label. | Application Status | | **Show Application Deadline** | Show or hide the application deadline. When the Application Close Date Time field has a value on the application timeline record, the deadline includes the date, time, and the applicant’s local time zone. When only the Application Close Date field has a value, only the date appears. | Selected | | **Application Deadline Label** | Enter text to override the default Close Date field label. | Close Date | | **Show application progress bar** | Show or hide the progress bar that indicates how far the applicant is in completing their application. | Selected | 4. Publish the site. ## Add the Withdrawn Application Status If you give applicants the option to withdraw applications, add the Withdrawn status to the Application Status picklist on the Individual Application object. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then select **Individual Application**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, and then click **Application Status**. 3. In Application Status Picklist Values, click **New**. 4. In Add Picklist Values, enter Withdrawn. 5. For Record Type Name, select the name that you use for applications. 6. Save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Create Permission Sets for Internal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_permission_sets_for_internal_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create and assign permission sets for processors and internal reviewers.") - [Create Permission Sets for Applicants and External Reviewers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_permission_sets_to_applicants_and_reviewers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create and assign permission sets for applicants and external reviewers.") # Configure Automated and Manual Soft Credits Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits. - **[About Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Soft credits represent recognition credit for donations. For example, when a company matches an employee's gift, the employee gets a soft credit for the matching gift. - **[Add Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack comes with many Opportunity Contact Roles. Create additional Opportunity Contact Roles to meet your organization's need. - **[Enable Soft Credit Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign Read and Edit permissions for following fields to your System Administrator and other relevant profiles and permission sets. - **[Enable Manage Soft Credits Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Manage Soft Credits button allows users to create and edit full or partial soft credits on Opportunities. - **[Enable Automated Household Member Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP provides a unique type of soft credit for Households—the Household Member soft credit. With Household Member soft credits, everyone in the Household receives a soft credit for a donation made by anyone else in the Household. - **[Enable Contact Role for Organizational Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Organizational gifts, you may wish to assign a soft credit to someone who helped you win the gift, for example, a board member. NPSP can automatically credit the Contact named in the Primary Contact field on an Organizational Opportunity. - **[Enable Relationship and Affiliation Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP can automatically create soft credits based on Relationship and Affiliation records. - **[Enable Partial Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure the Partial Soft Credit object is accessible to all profiles that also have access to Opportunities. - **[Enable Account Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can use Account Soft Credits, you need to give users access to the Account Soft Credit object and fields, and add the Account Soft Credit related list to your page layout. You can also optionally add more Account Soft Credit roles. - **[Additional Soft Credits Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** These NPSP features use soft credits and may require configuration before use in your org. ## About Soft Credits Soft credits represent recognition credit for donations. For example, when a company matches an employee's gift, the employee gets a soft credit for the matching gift. Learn more in [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."). NPSP creates soft credits automatically in a variety of scenarios. Read [Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") for more information. You can also manually [Manually Create Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits."). ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.63 (2/3/2016). ## Add Opportunity Contact Roles Nonprofit Success Pack comes with many Opportunity Contact Roles. Create additional Opportunity Contact Roles to meet your organization's need. Nonprofit Success Pack comes with these Opportunity Contact Roles out of the box. - Donor - Household Member - Soft Credit - Matched Donor - Honoree - Notification Recipient - Grant Manager - Decision Maker - Influencer - Solicitor - Workplace Giving - Other Make sure these roles are present in your org. Create additional roles to meet your organization's needs. 1. From Setup, enter Contact Roles in the Quick Find box, then select **Contact Roles on Opportunities**. 2. Click **New** to add Opportunity Contract Roles. 3. Click **Save** to finish. ## Enable Soft Credit Fields Assign Read and Edit permissions for following fields to your System Administrator and other relevant profiles and permission sets. ### Assign Field-Level Security Contact fields: - First Soft Credit Amount - First Soft Credit Date - Largest Soft Credit Amount - Largest Soft Credit Date - Last Soft Credit Amount - Last Soft Credit Date - Number of Soft Credits - Number of Soft Credits Last N Days - Number of Soft Credits Last Year - Number of Soft Credits This Year - Number of Soft Credits Two Years Ago Relationship fields: - Related Opportunity Contact Role Affiliation fields: - Related Opportunity Contact Role For more information on setting field-level security, see [Verify Access for a Particular Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.checking_field_accessibility_for_a_particular_field.htm&type=5). . ### Add Fields to Page Layouts Add the fields listed above to these page layouts: - Add Contact fields to the Contact Layout. - Add Relationship fields to the Relationship Layout. - Add Affiliation fields to the Affiliation Layout. For more information on adding fields to page layouts, read [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layoutcustomize_pd.htm&type=5). ## Enable Manage Soft Credits Button The Manage Soft Credits button allows users to create and edit full or partial soft credits on Opportunities. ### Assign Permissions for the Manage Soft Credits Button To allow users (including admins) to manage soft credits, grant these permissions for the Partial Soft Credit object and fields: - Create and Delete access on the Partial Soft Credit object - Read and Edit access on the Amount, Contact Role Id, and Role Name fields - Read access on the Contact Name field ### Assign Manage Soft Credits Visualforce Page 1. From **Setup**, go to **Profiles**. 2. Select the profile you wish to edit. 3. Click **Visualforce Page Access**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Find and select **PSC\_ManageSoftCredits** in Available Visualforce Pages. 6. Click **Add**. 7. Click **Save**. ### Add Manage Soft Credits Button to Opportunity Page Layout 1. From **Object Manager**, find and select **Opportunity**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Select **Donation Layout**. 4. In the palette, click **Buttons**. 5. Click and drag **Manage Soft Credits** to Custom Buttons in the page layout details section. 6. Click **Save**. ### Add Manage Soft Credits Button to Partial Soft Credits Related List 1. From **Object Manager**, find and select **Opportunity**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Select **Donation Layout**. 4. In the palette, click **Related Lists**. 5. Using the wrench icon, edit the related list properties for Partial Soft Credits. 6. Click the plus-sign to expand the Buttons section. 7. In Available Button, click **Manage Soft Credits**. 8. Click **Add**. 9. Click **OK**. 10. Click **Save**. ## Enable Automated Household Member Soft Credits NPSP provides a unique type of soft credit for Households—the Household Member soft credit. With Household Member soft credits, everyone in the Household receives a soft credit for a donation made by anyone else in the Household. For more information and examples, see [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."). To enable Automated Household Member soft credits: 1. Click ![App launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), then click NPSP Settings. 2. Click **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. If it is not already selected, select **Household Contact Roles On**. 5. In the Household Member Contact Role field, select the Contact Role you want to use for automatic soft crediting. We recommend selecting the default, Household Member. 6. (Optional) In the Household OCR Excluded Record Types picklist, select any Record Types you want to exclude from automatic Household soft crediting. For example, you might use a different Record Type for children so that you can exclude children from automatic soft crediting whenever a parent makes a donation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When you exclude a record type from automatic Household soft crediting, Salesforce still creates a Household Member Opportunity Contact Role for the Contact, but does not roll up the donation Amount to the Contact's record. 7. Click **Save**. ## Enable Contact Role for Organizational Opportunities For Organizational gifts, you may wish to assign a soft credit to someone who helped you win the gift, for example, a board member. NPSP can automatically credit the Contact named in the Primary Contact field on an Organizational Opportunity. To use this [automated soft credit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") : 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Contact Roles** , and then click **Edit**. 3. In the Contact Role for Organizational Opps field, select the Contact Role to automatically assign the Contact listed in the Primary Contact field on an Organizational Opportunity. 4. Click **Save**. ## Enable Relationship and Affiliation Soft Credits NPSP can automatically create soft credits based on Relationship and Affiliation records. For more information, see [Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."). ### Create Picklist Values The Related Opportunity Contact Role field on Relationships and Affiliations has these default values: - Soft Credit - Solicitor - Tribute Create these values if they aren't already there, and add additional ones if needed. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Relationship**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **Related Opportunity Contact Role**. 5. Click **New** in the Values section to add picklist values. 6. Click **Save**. Repeat these instructions for the Affiliation object. ### Create Opportunity Contact Roles for Relationship and Affiliation Soft Credits It's important that the picklist values in Related Opportunity Contact Role on Relationships and Affiliations match the available Opportunity Contact Roles. 1. From Setup, enter Contact Roles in the Quick Find box, then click **Contact Roles on Opportunities**. 2. Click **New** in the Opportunity Contact Role Picklist Values section and add any missing Contact roles. 3. Click **Save**. ## Enable Partial Soft Credits Make sure the Partial Soft Credit object is accessible to all profiles that also have access to Opportunities. Profiles should be granted the same access to the Partial Soft Credit object as they are granted for Opportunities. For example, this is the System Administrator profile: ![System Administrator profile with enabled object permissions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sc_mg_setup_partialscperms.png) ## Enable Account Soft Credits Before you can use Account Soft Credits, you need to give users access to the Account Soft Credit object and fields, and add the Account Soft Credit related list to your page layout. You can also optionally add more Account Soft Credit roles. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To get the most value out of Account Soft Credits, you'll want to enable Customizable Rollups so you can roll up the soft credit values to the Account records. At this time, you can't roll up Account soft credits to legacy NPSP rollups or User Defined Rollups. Account Soft Credits are available as of  NPSP [version 3.137](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/cumulus/releases/tag/rel/3.137) (August 2018). If you need help figuring out which version of NPSP you're using, check out [Which Version of NPSP Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed."). ### Give Users Access to the Account Soft Credit Object and Fields 1. Click ![Gear icon that represents the Setup menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Edit the profiles of all users who will work with Account soft credits. 4. Click **Object Settings**, then click **Account Soft Credits**. 5. Click **Edit** and set the object permissions to Read, Create, Edit, and Delete. 6. In the Field Permissions section, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for each field. 7. Click **Save**. ### Add the Account Soft Credit Related List to Page Layouts If you started using NPSP from a trial at [version 3.137](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/cumulus/releases/tag/rel/3.137) or later, you can skip this section. We recommend adding the Account Soft Credit related list to your Opportunity page layouts and the Organization Account page layout. 1. Click ![Gear icon that represents the Setup menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click the name of the page layout you want to edit. 6. In the list on the left of the palette, click **Related Lists**. 7. Find the **Account Soft Credits** related list and drag it to where you want it on the page. ![Page layout editor showing that you need to drag the Account Soft Credits item from the related lists and drag it on to the page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sc_mg_setup_acctsc_pl.png) 8. Click **Save**. Now, if you go to an Opportunity record, you'll see the Account Soft Credits related list. ![Showing an Opportunity record with the Account Soft Credits related list highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sc_mg_setup_acctsc_rl.png) Repeat these steps for your other Opportunity page layouts and the Organization Account page layout. ### Add More Account Soft Credit Roles By default, Account soft credits have three default roles: Donation Source, Influencer, and Match. You may need to set up additional roles based on your org and business processes. You create new roles by editing the Role picklist values on the Account Soft Credit object. 1. Click ![Gear icon that represents the Setup menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of items, click **Account Soft Credit**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. In the list of fields, click **Role**. Then scroll down to the Values related list. 6. Click **New** and enter new Role values. Each value should be on its own line. ![Adding new values to the Role field. Each value is on its own line.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sc_mg_setup_acctsc_new_roles.png) 7. Click **Save**. ![The Values related list on the Role field. It shows the new values you entered.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sc_mg_setup_acctsc_roles.png) Now you can use these Roles in your Customizable Rollups for Account soft credits. When [creating a Customizable Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups.") for Account soft credits, be sure to [create a filter group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups.") with a filter rule that includes these values. ## Additional Soft Credits Configuration These NPSP features use soft credits and may require configuration before use in your org. For detailed information, refer to these resources: - [Configure Matching Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring matching gifts.") - [Configure Tribute Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_tribute_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make customizations to page layouts and picklists so that NPSP tributes work properly.") - [Configure Soft Credit and Matching Gift Rollup Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring soft credit rollups.") # Configure Automated Payment Collection To automatically process payments for your transactions, your admins set up a payment scheduler with specific filters, such as the desired run frequency and matching criteria. Payment batch runs process existing payment schedules and payment schedule items to collect the corresponding payments and then apply them to invoices based on the payment application level. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To schedule payments: Education Cloud Full Access
To schedule payment batch runs: Payment Operations User permission set
To schedule payment batch runs, see [Schedule Payment Batch Runs to Process Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_payment_runs_schedule.htm&language=en_US). # Configure Batch Data Import Find out more about configuring batch data import. - **[About Batch Data Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Data Import tool allows you to import your data and translate it into Salesforce objects. The NPSP Batch Data Import feature is an advanced import feature that allows you to import data in batches. You can have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options. - **[Set Permissions For Data Import Objects and Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are two Data Import objects and one Data Import page to set security for: the NPSP Data Import Batch and NPSP Data Import objects, and the BDI\_BatchOverride Visualforce page. Enable the NPSP Data Import Batches object and field for any profiles that need to create batches. - **[Edit Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to edit page layouts. - **[Set Button Overrides](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the NPSP Data Import Batch object, set the Clone, Edit, and New buttons to point to the BDI\_BatchOverride page. - **[Verify Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to verify scheduled jobs. ## About Batch Data Import The NPSP Data Import tool allows you to import your data and translate it into Salesforce objects. The NPSP Batch Data Import feature is an advanced import feature that allows you to import data in batches. You can have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options. If you set up and activated a batch number format, all Opportunities and Payments associated with this batch will include the batch number in the Batch Number field. Learn more in [Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches."). NPSP Batch Data Import uses the following objects: - NPSP Data Import Batch (custom object): Holds information about a batch of records to be imported. - NPSP Data Import (custom object): Object that records are first imported into. Holds denormalized data records that can then be imported into the Nonprofit Success Pack. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.108 (9/14/2017). ## Set Permissions For Data Import Objects and Pages There are two Data Import objects and one Data Import page to set security for: the NPSP Data Import Batch and NPSP Data Import objects, and the BDI\_BatchOverride Visualforce page. Enable the NPSP Data Import Batches object and field for any profiles that need to create batches. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the Profile you want to set field-level Security for. (For example, click System Administrator. Do **not** click the Edit button to the left of the profile name.) 4. For the NPSP Data Import object: 1. In the Tab Settings section, set the NPSP Data Imports tab to **Default On**. 2. In the Object Permissions section, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. This gives all users with this profile full access to use NPSP Data Import. Depending on the profile, you may want to grant different access. 3. In the Field Level Security section, select the **Edit Access** and **Read Access** checkboxes for all fields. 5. For the NPSP Data Import Batch object: 1. In the Custom Tab Settings section, set the NPSP Data Import Batch tab setting to **Default On** to include it in the list of tabs, or Default Off to make it accessible in App Launcher. 2. In the Object Permissions section, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. This gives all users with this profile full access to use Batch Data Import. Depending on the profile, you may want to grant different access. 3. In the Field Level Security section, click **View** next to NPSP Data Import Batch and select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for all fields. 4. Click **Back to Profile**. 6. If you have non-System Admin users who import data, ensure that they have access to the `BDI_BatchOverride` Visualforce page. 1. In the Enabled Visualforce Pages related list, click **Edit**. 2. Add `BDI_BatchOverride` to the Enabled Visualforce Pages list. 3. Click **Save**. Alternatively, you could grant Visualforce page access to multiple profiles at a time. Simply search for and select Visualforce Pages in Setup, then click **Security** next to the page name. ## Edit Page Layouts Follow these steps to edit page layouts. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **NPSP Data Import Batch**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **NPSP Data Import Batch Layout**. 5. Drag all available fields onto the layout. 6. In the palette, click **Buttons**. 7. Drag the Process Batch button to the Custom Buttons section on the layout. ![In the page layout editor, moving the Process Batch button from the palette into the Custom Buttons section](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/process_batch_on_pl.jpg) 8. Click **Save**. Now, edit the NPSP Data Import page layout to include the NPSP Data Import Batch field. 1. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **NPSP Data Import**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **NPSP Data Import Layout**. 5. Drag the NPSP Data Import Batch field onto the page layout. ![NPSP Data Import page layout, with the NPSP Data Import Batch field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/bdi_field_on_pl.png) 6. Click **Save**. For more information on adding fields and buttons to page layouts, see [Configure Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). ## Set Button Overrides On the NPSP Data Import Batch object, set the Clone, Edit, and New buttons to point to the BDI\_BatchOverride page. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **NPSP Data Import Batch**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. In the Clone row, click ![More actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Choose **BDI\_BatchOverride** Visualforce page. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat this process for the Edit and New buttons. ## Verify Scheduled Jobs Follow these steps to verify scheduled jobs. 1. From Setup, enter Scheduled Jobs in the Quick Find box, then click **Scheduled Jobs**. 2. Verify that you see NPSP 09 - Data Import Batch Processing in the list of Scheduled Jobs. ![List of NPSP Scheduled Jobs, with the NPSP 09 - Data Import Batch processing job highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sched_jobs.png) 3. If you don't see the scheduled job, check NPSP Settings. 4. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 5. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Process Settings** (doing this recreates all the default jobs), and make sure Don't Auto Schedule Default NPSP Jobs is _not_ selected. For more information on Scheduled Jobs, see [Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). # Configure Batch Numbers for Donations For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches. NPSP allows you to set up a custom batch number format and automatically attach the Batch Number to: - Payments, upon creation or when marked as Paid. - Opportunities, upon creation. When a batch number format is active, NPSP adds Batch Numbers to donations associated with NPSP Data Import Batch records. These auto-generated numbers show up on: - Donations created or updated as part of a batch in Gift Entry. - Donations tied to an NPSP Data Import Batch and imported using NPSP Data Importer. - **[Grant Batch Number Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give users access to the Batch Number feature by adding these permissions to profiles or permission sets. - **[Add Batch Number to Page Layouts and List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When active, the batch number you configured appears in the Batch Number field on Opportunities and Payments. Add the field to your page layouts. - **[Create a Batch Number Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a format for your batch numbering that works best for your org. ## Grant Batch Number Permissions Give users access to the Batch Number feature by adding these permissions to profiles or permission sets. To add the permissions through profiles: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the Profile you want to add the permissions to. 4. In the **Enabled Apex Class Access** section, click **Edit**. 5. Add npsp.BDI\_BatchNumberSettingsController to the **Enabled Apex Classes** list. 6. Save your changes. 7. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to Opportunity. 8. Click **Edit**, and select **Read Access** for the Batch Number field. 9. Save your changes. 10. Click **Back to Profile**. 11. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to Payment. 12. Click **Edit**, and select **Read Access** for the Batch Number field. 13. Save your changes. 14. Repeat these steps for all profiles that should have access to the Batch Number fields on Opportunities and Payments. ## Add Batch Number to Page Layouts and List Views When active, the batch number you configured appears in the Batch Number field on Opportunities and Payments. Add the field to your page layouts. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **NPSP Data Import Batch**, **Opportunity**, or **Payment**. 3. Click the name of the page layout you want to update. 4. Drag and drop **Batch Number** onto the layout. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Repeat these steps for all NPSP Data Import Batch, Opportunity, and Payment page layouts where you want to see the Batch Number field. 7. You may also want to add Batch Number to the Batches list views in Gift Entry. Learn more in [Configure Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form."). ## Create a Batch Number Format Create a format for your batch numbering that works best for your org. Configure a batch number format in NPSP Settings. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Go to **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping for Data Import & Gift Entry** | **Batch Number Settings**. 3. Enter a **Display Format**. Your format can be up to 30 characters, including the optional prefix. It must be unique and include the number of digits. Here are a few examples: - A sequence formatted as {0} with a starting number of 9 displays as 9, 10, 11, etc. - A sequence formatted as {00000} with a starting number of 9 displays as 00009, 00010, 00011, etc. - A sequence formatted as ABC-{0000} with a starting number of 9 displays as ABC-0009, ABC-0010, ABC-0011, etc. 4. Set a **Starting Number**. If left blank, the number will start at 1. 5. Enter a **Description**, if desired. 6. Click **Save** or **Save & Activate**. If you didn't activate the batch number when you saved it, click ![Show More icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) next to the format in the Batch Number Formats table, then click **Activate**. You can have one active batch number format at a time. # Configure Campaigns Configure campaigns so that they combine data from different sources and determine the success of the call to action. - **[About Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Campaigns combine several sources of data in one place to make it easier to analyze the results of a call to action. - **[Customize Campaign Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Types help you categorize your Campaigns. - **[Define Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Record types indicate what kind of Campaign you're creating. - **[Configure Campaign Types for each Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choose campaign types that correspond with the associated record types and that best serve the activities of your org. ## About Campaigns Campaigns combine several sources of data in one place to make it easier to analyze the results of a call to action. For example, a Campaign could summarize the number of people targeted in a fundraising appeal, how many responded, and the amount of money raised. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The following configurations simply align your Campaign record types with what is provided in the latest NPSP trial. If you're looking for more advice on how to use and implement Campaigns, see the [Campaigns for Fundraising Implementation Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_campaign_guide.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is intended to help nonprofit administrators plan and implement Campaigns and Campaign hierarchies to support fundraising. Learn how Campaigns can be used to track fundraising appeals, event invitations, and key performance metrics."). ## Customize Campaign Types Types help you categorize your Campaigns. For example, within a fundraising Campaign, you might have a direct mail appeal, an email appeal, and a gala. The NPSP Trial includes several Campaign types: ![A list of the Campaign Type picklist values: Conference, Webinar, Trade Show, Public Relations, Partners, Referral Program, Advertisement, Banner Ads, Direct Mail, Email, Telemarketing, Social Media, Training, Networking, Social Event, Workshop, and Other.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/campaign_types.png) You may choose to add more or remove Campaign types that aren't relevant to your business. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. From the list of objects, click **Campaign**. 4. Clicks **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click the **Type** field. 6. In the Campaign Type Picklist Values list, click **New**. 7. Enter new picklist values (one per line). 8. Click **Save**. Be sure to associate the Campaign types with the appropriate record types. ## Define Record Types Record types indicate what kind of Campaign you're creating. For example, you may use Campaigns to track fundraising efforts, events, or volunteer activities. The NPSP trial comes with these Campaign record types. - Event - Fundraising - General - Marketing Feel free to create additional record types that meet the needs of your organization. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. From the list of objects, click **Campaign**. 4. Click **Record Types**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a Record Type Label. For example, Fundraising. 7. Enter a description that will help your users figure out which record type to choose. For example, Use this record type for fundraising activities. 8. Select **Active**. 9. Choose the profiles who should have access to this record type. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Choose the layout where this profile should appear. 12. Click **Save**. Next, select the Campaign Types associated with this record type. ## Configure Campaign Types for each Record Type Choose campaign types that correspond with the associated record types and that best serve the activities of your org. NPSP comes with these record types and associated Type picklist values: We'll use Fundraising as an example of how to select the Type values for your record type. | Record Type | Type Picklist Values | | --- | --- | | Event | Conference, Networking, Other, Social Event, Training, Webinar, Workshop | | Fundraising | Direct Mail, Email, Networking, Other, Social Media, Telemarketing | | General | Email, Other, Social Media, Telemarketing, Training | | Marketing | Direct Mail, Email, Other, Networking, Social Media, Telemarketing | 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. From the list of objects, click **Campaign**. 4. Click **Record Types**. 5. Click **Fundraising**. 6. In the Picklists Available for Editing list, click **Edit** next to Type. 7. Move these values to the Selected Values list: - Direct Mail - Email - Networking - Other - Social Media - Telemarketing 8. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You may choose to add more or remove Campaign types that aren't relevant to your business. To add or remove types, simply edit the Campaign Type Picklist Values on the Type field. # Configure Card View and Request for Information for Learning Programs Give applicants, students, and families an easy way to view and request more information about learning programs. To present details of learning programs in cards and collect requests for information, configure the EDU Admissions: Create Inquiries from Learning Programs flow and the subflows that it calls, and then configure Flexcards. These configurations support students and applicants to request information about learning programs one at a time. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create and activate versions of Omnistudio components:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
To configure flows: Manage Flow
Students, applicants, or parents submit requests for more information by accessing the EDU Admissions: Create Inquiries from Learning Programs flow. This flow calls the EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest subflow that also calls two subflows. Configure all of these flows as part of the setup for the card view and request for information for learning programs. - EDU Admissions: Process Person Account - EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing - EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest - EDU Admissions: Create Inquiries from Learning Programs 1. Create your own versions of the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account and EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing flows. See the [Clone and Configure Inquiry Subflows section in Set Up Inquiry Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_flows_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Education Cloud inquiry management flows."). If you have cloned and configured these flows as part of inquiry management, skip this step. 2. Create your own version of the EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest subflow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Click **EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name. 5. Click **Show Advanced**, and then in How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing–Access All Data**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To make the flows function for unauthenticated guest users, you must update sharing to System Context Without Sharing–Access All Data. However, make this update only if it aligns with your institution's security model. See [Change the Flow Run Context](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_distribute_system_mode.htm&type=5). 6. Save your changes. 7. Add a subflow element after the original EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow element. 8. Select your cloned version of the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow. 9. Enter a name and API name, and then update the variables to match the original version. 10. Delete the original EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow element. 11. Similarly, replace the EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing subflow element with your own version. 12. Save and activate the flow. 3. Similarly, create and configure your own version of the EDU Admissions: Create Inquiries from Learning Programs flow. Replace the EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest subflow with your own version and update variables to match the original version. 4. [Give your Experience Cloud site guest users access to your own versions of these flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.rss_flow_guestuser.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. [Create an Omnistudio permission set for Experience Cloud site guest users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_create_an_omnistudio_permission_set_for_digital_experience_guest_users_7532.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Give the guest user profile Read access to Omni UI Card. 6. [Assign the Omnistudio permission set for Experience Cloud site guest users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_assign_an_omnistudio_permission_set_to_digital_experience_guest_users_7611.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 7. Configure and activate your own version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardChild Flexcard. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Flexcards**. 2. Click **EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardChild**. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. Update the name. 5. Save your changes. 6. On the canvas, click the **Request Information** block. 7. From the Properties panel, under Action, click **RunCreateInquiriesFromLPsFlow**. 8. In Target App Attributes, update the value of flowName to the name of your version of the EDU Admissions: Create Inquiries from Learning Programs flow. 9. Click **Activate**. 8. Configure and activate your own version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardContainer Flexcard. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Flexcards** 2. Click **EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardContainer**. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. Update the name. 5. Save your changes. 6. On the canvas, click the child card. 7. In the Properties panel, update the Flexcard name to the name of your version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardChild Flexcard. 8. Click **Activate**. 9. [Create a sharing rule for Omni UI Card for Experience Cloud site guest users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_create_sharing_rules_for_digital_experience_guest_users_7680.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. For the rule type, select **Based on criteria**. 2. Add criteria to filter sharing to your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardChild Flexcard. - For Field, select **API Name**. - For Operator, select **Equals**. - For Value, enter the API name of your version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardChild Flexcard. 3. Similarly, add criteria to filter sharing to your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardContainer Flexcard. 4. Click **Add Filter Logic**, and then enter 1 OR 2. 5. For access level, select **Read Only**. 6. Save your changes. # Configure Case Management Configure program and services and case management in the Case Management managed package ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Configure Programs and Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_programs_services.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the bulk service delivery tool, process builder automation, cohort mass update, service schedules and more. - **[Configure Client Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_client_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the client card, client notes, referrals, incidents, and more. - **[General Case Management Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_general_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand more about the nonprofit Case Management managed package and translation. Learn how to customize the Home tab. # Configure Client Management Customize the client card, client notes, referrals, incidents, and more. - **[Customize the Client Card](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Client Card displays at the top of a Contact record and shows all of the most important information about a Contact, including name, a photo, contact information, critical alerts, and Client ID. - **[Configure Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Client Note fields, display fields based on record types, and maintain client note relationships. - **[Configure Support for Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_cm_for_hhs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your organization uses Case Management to deliver case management support and program benefits to a household (for example, a food bank), update the Case Management Case Plans and Client Notes so that you see the Household Account as the beneficiary of the services delivered. - **[Create Household Account Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_household_account_record_type.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Case Management in an org without NPSP, you need to create an Account record type for Household Account. - **[Configure Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_required_setup_for_intakes_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Referrals feature was released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required set up steps. - **[Configure Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package. - **[Customize Incidents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_cust_incidents_contact_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom fields to display on the Incident component on a Contact record. - **[Customize Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize assessment scores and create multiple assessment types. - **[Customize Case Plan Goals and Action Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Goal and Action Item fields on a Case Plan. - **[Configure Goal and Action Item Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add fields about templates to page layouts. # Configure Client Notes Customize Client Note fields, display fields based on record types, and maintain client note relationships. - **[Customize Client Note Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create custom fields and show them on the Client Note. These fields also appear in the Client Notes history on the Contact tab. - **[Customize the Client Notes Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Show different Client Note fields based on the record type and show Client Note information on related objects. Add tags to be assigned to Client Notes. Turn on manual saving. To make these customizations, create a custom Case Management app for your Salesforce org. - **[Maintain Client Note Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're working with a Client Note that's related to other objects, it's helpful to see the note Subject and other details on the related objects. ## Customize Client Note Fields You can create custom fields and show them on the Client Note. These fields also appear in the Client Notes history on the Contact tab. 1. In Setup, create your custom fields on the Client Note object. 1. Make sure the fields are visible to these Profiles: Case Manager: Salesforce, Case Manager: Salesforce Platform, and System Administrator. 2. Add the fields to the Client Note Layout. 2. Add your fields to the Default field set. 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Click **Default**. 3. Drag your fields to the field set. 4. Save your work. ## Customize the Client Notes Lightning Record Page Show different Client Note fields based on the record type and show Client Note information on related objects. Add tags to be assigned to Client Notes. Turn on manual saving. To make these customizations, create a custom Case Management app for your Salesforce org. 1. Clone the Case Management app. 2. In your new case management app, click the **Client Notes** tab. 3. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png) and select **Edit Page**. 4. In the Lightning page editor, click the Client Note component. 5. In the side panel, select the features that you want to add: | | | | --- | --- | | Use fields based on Record Type | When you have different page layouts and record types, selecting this option shows fields based on the record type. | | Allow tags to be assigned to Client Notes | Selecting this option adds the ability to set tags on Client Notes. | | Add buttons to manually create or update a note and remove the auto-save option | Selecting this option disables the auto-save functionality and instead provides buttons to manually create or update a note. | 6. Save your work. 7. Activate the page. When you activate the page, you must create a copy of the managed package's Client Notes Lightning page, which you can add to your case management app. 1. In Page Settings, add your organization name to the new page to differentiate it from the other page in the package. 2. In Lightning Experience, select your organization’s case management app. 3. Save your work. ## Maintain Client Note Relationships When you're working with a Client Note that's related to other objects, it's helpful to see the note Subject and other details on the related objects. The Client Note Relationship object connects Client Notes to related objects. This object includes a parent-child relationship with Client Note, a formula field to capture the Note Subject, and lookup fields to the objects where you can relate a Client Note. Salesforce uses the related ID field to show the Note Content on the Client Note Relationship record. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important If you add new custom objects and relate them to the Client Note object, add lookup fields to those custom objects on the Client Note Relationship object and its page layout. Case Management includes the Client Note Relationships – Unparented report, whichhelps you maintain data integrity in Client Note Relationship records. This report lists all Client Note Relationships for records that have been deleted from Salesforce. You can delete the relationship objects or reparent them to another existing record. See Also [Create Lightning Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.apps_lightning_create.htm&language=en_US) # Configure Cohort Mass Update Configure a cohort mass update. - **[Enable Mass Program Cohort Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_cohort_mass_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow users to add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort directly from a Program Engagement list view. - **[Add a Quick Action to Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_cohort_mass_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action to Program Engagement list views so users can easily add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort. - **[Enable Inline Editing in List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_cohort_mass_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable your users to inline edit selected records on Program Engagement list views with a single Program Cohort, provided the list view displays the Program Cohort field. ## Enable Mass Program Cohort Updates Allow users to add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort directly from a Program Engagement list view. For example, a program manager may want to segment clients that they've recently enrolled in a Program into Program Cohorts. Or, they may want to create a Program Cohort for all the Program Engagements in a Program.  There are two ways to let users add multiple Program Engagements to a Program Cohort: - Add the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action to Program Engagement list views. - Enable inline editing in list views. If your users are already familiar with out-of-the-box list view inline editing, you may wish to use this option. This option requires the user to add the Program Cohort field to their Program Engagement list view. ## Add a Quick Action to Program Engagements Add the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action to Program Engagement list views so users can easily add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort. After you add the button, users can use it to mass add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort. See [Add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_create_program_cohorts.htm). 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Program Engagement**. 4. Click **Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic**. 5. Next to the List View layout, click ![Dropdown list icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/downarrowicon.png), then select **Edit**. 6. In the Available Quick Actions list, select **Add to Program Cohort**, then click ![Arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/addfieldarrow.png) **Add** to move it to Selected Quick Actions. 7. Click **Save**. ## Enable Inline Editing in List Views Enable your users to inline edit selected records on Program Engagement list views with a single Program Cohort, provided the list view displays the Program Cohort field. Inline editing allows your users to mass update records on list views they create for any object. 1. From **Setup**, enter User in the Quick Find box, then select **User Management Settings**. 2. Enable **Enhanced Profile User Interface**. After you enable this, users can use inline editing to update selected records in a Program Engagement list view whether or not they have the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action. # Configure Column Components in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Education Set up a component column to use custom Lightning web components for display and edit behavior in your Gift Entry Grid template. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure column components:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. In Display Columns, for the column that you want to configure, click **Edit column**. 2. Select **Component** as the column type. 3. Enter a column label. 4. From Cell Display Component, select a Lightning web component that represents your display component. 5. From Cell Edit Component, select a Lightning web component that represents your edit component. 6. From Field API Name, select a field to map to your Lightning web component. 7. Save your changes. - **[Example: Use a Custom Component to Match and Populate Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_custom_component_to_match_and_populate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a custom component that overrides the Donor column from the default template with a barcode option. When a user enters a value in the edit component, the system looks for a matching value in a custom Bar Code object. If a match is found, values from that record populate other columns in the Gift Entry Grid. # Configure Column Components in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Nonprofit Set up a component column to use custom Lightning web components for display and edit behavior in your Gift Entry Grid template. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed
To configure column components:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. In Display Columns, for the column that you want to configure, click **Edit column**. 2. Select **Component** as the column type. 3. Enter a column label. 4. From Cell Display Component, select a Lightning web component that represents your display component. 5. From Cell Edit Component, select a Lightning web component that represents your edit component. 6. From Field API Name, select a field to map to your Lightning web component. 7. Save your changes. - **[Example: Use a Custom Component to Match and Populate Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_custom_component_to_match_and_populate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a custom component that overrides the Donor column from the default template with a barcode option. When a user enters a value in the edit component, the system looks for a matching value in a custom Bar Code object. If a match is found, values from that record populate other columns in the Gift Entry Grid. # Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have the access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Configure the Grantee Portal community user object and field permissions by editing the community user profile. Here's how to configure these permissions. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png) then Setup. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find Box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the Profile Name of the Grantee Portal community user. For example, click **fC Partner Community User** . 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To configure an object's permissions, scroll down to the object and specify the minimum object permissions then click **Save**. 6. To configure field-level security, scroll down to the Field-Level Security section and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access recommended for core foundationConnect functionality to work. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed — and many standard Salesforce items are not — it means that either: - foundationConnect doesn't have a dependency on it. Your organization can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be change. In addition to these permissions, any field added to a field set requires additional permissions. - **[Account (Organization) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Account object in foundationConnect. - **[Campaign (Docket) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Campaign object in foundationConnect. - **[Campaign Quiz Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Campaign Quiz object in foundationConnect. - **[Community Configuration Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration Permissions object in foundationConnect. - **[Contact Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. - **[CustomHTML Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. - **[Document Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Document object in foundationConnect. - **[FCPageLayout Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the FCPageLayout object in foundationConnect. - **[FGM System Value Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the FGM System Value object in foundationConnect. - **[Field Value Translation Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Field Value Translation object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Line Item Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Line object in foundationConnect. - **[Lead (Inquiry) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Lead object in foundationConnect. - **[Opportunity (Request) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. - **[Opportunity (Request) Contact Role Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. - **[Opportunity (Request) Team Member Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal Account Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal Account object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal User Request Team Members Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal User Request Team Member object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Attachment Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question Attachment object in foundationConnect. - **[Quiz Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Quiz object in foundationConnect. - **[Quiz Question Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Quiz Question object in foundationConnect. - **[Recommendation Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation object in foundationConnect. - **[Recommendation Review Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation Review object in foundationConnect. - **[Related List Controller Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Related List Controller object in foundationConnect. - **[Secure Message Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Secure Message object in foundationConnect. - **[StateCountryConfig Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the StateCountryConfig object in foundationConnect. - **[User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ## Account (Organization) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Account object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
EIN FGM_Base__EIN__c √  
## Campaign (Docket) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Campaign object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Active IsActive √  
Application Parameters FGM_Portal__Parameters__c √  
Application Quiz FGM_Portal__Application_Quiz__c √  
Application Type FGM_Portal__Application_Type__c √  
Description Description √  
Docket Record Type RecordTypeID    
Email Contact FGM_Portal__Email__c √  
End Date EndDate √  
Instructions FGM_Portal__Description__c √  
LOI Prameters FGM_Portal__LOI_Prameters__c √  
LOI Quiz FGM_Portal__LOI_Quiz__c √  
Number of Recommendations FGM_Portal__No_of_Recommendation √  
Start Date StartDate √  
Status Status √  
Type Type √  
Visibility FGM_Portal__Visibility__c √  
## Campaign Quiz Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Campaign Quiz object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Instructional Text FGM_Portal__Rich_Instructional_Text__c √  
Parameters FGM_Portal__Parameters__c √  
## Community Configuration Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration Permissions object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
JsonData FGM_Portal__JsonData__c √  
## Contact Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account (Organization) Name AccountID √  
Email Email √ √
Username FGM_Portal__Username__c √  
## CustomHTML Permissions Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Description FGM_Portal__RichDescription__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
## Document Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Document object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## FCPageLayout Permissions Review the minimum required access for the FCPageLayout object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Object Name FGM_Portal__ObjectName__c √  
## FGM System Value Permissions Review the minimum required access for the FGM System Value object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
System Field Name FGM_Base__System_Field_Name__c √ √
System Values Numeric FGM_Base__System_Values_Numeric__c √ √
System Values Text FGM_Base__System_Values_Text__c √ √
## Field Value Translation Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Field Value Translation object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Translation Value FGM_Portal__Translation_Value__c √  
## Grantee Budget Line Item Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Line object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

 √

Create

Edit

Delete
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note You will need additional permissions if using Grantee Budgets. For minimum permission recommendations when using Grantee Budgets, see [Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Grantee Budgets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting Grantee Reports."). ## Lead (Inquiry) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Lead object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Address Address √ √
Email Email √ √
Quiz FGM_Portal__Quiz__c √ √
Request Number FGM_Base__Request_Number__c √  
Request Number Apex FGM_Base__Request_Number_Apex__c √ √
Request Number Legacy FGM_Base__Request_Number_Legacy__c √ √
Submission Date FGM_Base__Submission_Date__c √ √
Submitted By FGM_Base__Submitted_By__c √ √
## Opportunity (Request) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account (Organization) Name AccountId √ √
Consultant User FGM_Portal__ConsultantUser__c √ √
End Date FGM_Base__End_Date__c √ √
Primary Campaign Source CampaignId √ √
Quiz FGM_Portal__Quiz__c √ √
Request Number FGM_Base__Request_Number__c √  
Request Number Apex FGM_Base__Request_Number_Apex__c √ √
Request Number Legacy FGM_Base__Request_Number_Legacy__c √ √
Start Date FGM_Base__Start_Date__c √ √
Submitted By FGM_Base__Submitted_By__c √ √
## Opportunity (Request) Contact Role Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Contact ContactId √ √
Opportunity (Request) OpportunityID √ √
Primary IsPrimary √ √
Role Role √ √
## Opportunity (Request) Team Member Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
ContactRoleID FGM_Portal__ContactRoleID__c √ √
## Portal Account Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal Account object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √ √
## Portal User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √ √
Active FGM_Portal__IsActive__c √ √
Agree Terms and Conditions FGM_Portal__Terms_And_Conditions__c √ √
Approval Status FGM_Portal__Approval_Status__c √ √
City FGM_Portal__City__c √ √
Confirm Password FGM_Portal__Confirm_Password__c √ √
Confirmation Code FGM_Portal__Confirmation_Code__c √ √
Contact FGM_Portal__Contact__c √ √
Country FGM_Portal__Country__c √ √
Domain FGM_Portal__Domain__c √ √
EIN FGM_Portal__EIN__c √ √

Email

FGM_Portal__Email__c

√

 √
Fax FGM_Portal__Fax__c √ √
First Name FGM_Portal__FirstName__c √ √
Is Created By Opportunity Team Member FGM_Portal__IsCreatedByOpportunityTeamMember__c √ √
Last Name FGM_Portal__LastName__c √ √
Organization Legal Name FGM_Portal__Organization_Legal_Name__c √ √
Phone FGM_Portal__Phone__c √ √
Portal Account FGM_Portal__Portal_Account__c √ √
Portal Login FGM_Portal__GrantedPortalAccess__c √ √
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √ √
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √ √
Salutation FGM_Portal__Salutation__c √ √
Security Question FGM_Portal__Security_Question__c √ √
State FGM_Portal__State__c √ √
State List FGM_Portal__State_List__c √ √
Street FGM_Portal__Street_New__c √ √
Title FGM_Portal__Title__c √ √
User Profile FGM_Portal__User_Profile__c √ √
Zip Code FGM_Portal__Zip_Code__c √ √
## Portal User Request Team Members Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal User Request Team Member object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Is Shared FGM_Portal__IsShared__c √ √
User Role FGM_Portal__UserRole__c √ √
## Question Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Attachment Name Formula FGM_Portal__AttachmentNameFormula__c √  
Help Tip FGM_Portal__Help_Tip__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
Parent QuestionID FGM_Portal__Parent_QuestionID__c √  
Post-Text FGM_Portal__RichPostText__c √  
Pre-Text FGM_Portal__RichPreText__c √  
Question FGM_Portal__RichQuestion__c √  
Type FGM_Portal__Type__c √  
## Question Attachment Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question Attachment object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Label

Read Access

Edit Access
Amendment FGM_Portal__Amendment__c √ √
Benchmark FGM_Portal__Benchmark_del__c √ √
Description FGM_Portal__Description__c √ √
Grantee Report FGM_Portal__GranteeReport__c √ √
Lead FGM_Portal__Inquiry__c √ √
Question FGM_Portal__Question__c √ √
Request FGM_Portal__Opportunity__c √ √
## Quiz Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Quiz object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Active FGM_Portal__Is_Active__c √  
Introduction Text FGM_Portal__Introduction_Text__c √  
## Quiz Question Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Quiz Question object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Can upload after submission FGM_Portal__Can_upload_after_submission__c √  
Field FGM_Portal__Field__c √  
Hide Post-Text after submission? FGM_Portal__Hide_Post_Text__c √  
Hide Pre-Text after submission? FGM_Portal__Hide_Pre_Text__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
Required? FGM_Portal__Required__c √  
Sort Order FGM_Portal__Sort_Order__c √  
Tab FGM_Portal__Tab__c √  
## Recommendation Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Recommendation object and its fields are required only if you are using Recommendations. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

  

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Status FGM_Portal__Status__c √  
## Recommendation Review Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation Review object in foundationConnect. Object Permissions Field Permissions ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Recommendation object and its fields are required only if you are using Recommendations.

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Status FGM_Portal__Recommendation__c √  

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

Delete
## Related List Controller Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Related List Controller object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
# of records to display FGM_Portal__of_records_to_display__c √  
Associated FC Portal Type FGM_Portal__Associated_FC_Portal_Type__c √  
Associated Tab Type FGM_Portal__Associated_Tab_Type__c √  
Base URL FGM_Portal__BaseUrl__c √  
Cloned from FGM_Portal__Cloned_from__c √  
Enable Amendment FGM_Portal__EnableAmendment__c √  
Field Labels FGM_Portal__FieldHeaders__c √  
Field Labels (Long) FGM_Portal__Field_Labels_Long__c √  
Field Names FGM_Portal__FieldNames__c √  
Field Names (Long) FGM_Portal__Field_Names_Long__c √  
Hide Edit Link FGM_Portal__Hide_Edit_Link__c √  
Instructional Text FGM_Portal__RichInstructionalText__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
Parent Object FGM_Portal__ParentObject__c √  
Show Delete Link FGM_Portal__ShowDeleteLink__c √  
Show New Button FGM_Portal__ShowNewButton__c √  
Show Tab to Individual Users FGM_Portal__Show_Tab_to_Individual_Users__c √  
Show Tab to Organization Users FGM_Portal__Show_Tab_to_Organization_Users__c √  
Sort Field FGM_Portal__SortField__c √  
Sort Field Order FGM_Portal__SortFieldOrder__c √  
## Secure Message Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Secure Message object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Body FGM_Portal__Body__c √ √
Proposals FGM_Portal__Proposals__c √ √
Recipient FGM_Portal__Recipient__c √ √
RefId FGM_Portal__RefId__c √ √
Sender FGM_Portal__Sender__c √ √
Subject FGM_Portal__Subject__c √ √
## StateCountryConfig Permissions Review the minimum required access for the StateCountryConfig object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
PicklistValues FGM_Portal__PicklistValues__c √  
## User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Portal Account Admin FGM_Portal__Portal_Account_Admin__c √  
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √  
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √  
User Email FGM_Portal__UserEmail__c √  
User Profile FGM_Portal__UserProfile__c √  
# Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Amendments Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting the Amendments feature. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Configure the Grantee Portal community user object and field permissions if you are using Benchmarks by editing the community user profile. Here's how to configure these permissions. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png) then Setup. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find Box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the Profile Name of the Grantee Portal community user. For example, click **fC Partner Community User** . 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To configure an object's permissions, scroll down to the object and specify the minimum object permissions then click **Save**. 6. To configure field-level security, scroll down to the Field-Level Security section and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note This table documents the minimum object and field access recommended for Amendments in foundationConnect. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If you have additional fields added in a field set, those fields will need permissions as well. Make sure to review [Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have the access they need to standard and custom objects and fields.") for additional permission recommendations. - **[Amendment Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_gp_community_user_permissions_amendments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Amendment object in foundationConnect. ## Amendment Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Amendment object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Amendment object and its fields are required only if you are using Amendments. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √ √
Billing/Mailing Country FGM_Portal__Billing_Mailing_Country__c √ √
Billing/Mailing State FGM_Portal__Billing_Mailing_State__c √ √
Contact FGM_Portal__Contact__c √ √
Contact Email FGM_Portal__Contact_Email__c √ √
Current Award Amount FGM_Portal__Current_Award_Amount__c √  
Current Grant End Date FGM_Portal__Current_Grant_End_Date__c √  
Current Grant Start Date FGM_Portal__Current_Grant_Start_Date__c √  
Description FGM_Portal__Description__c √ √
Fields To Be Edited FGM_Portal__Field_To_Be_Edited__c √ √

New Account Name

FGM_Portal__New_Account_Name__c

√

 √
Parent Request FGM_Portal__ParentRequest__c √ √
Payment FGM_Portal__Payment__c √ √
Phone FGM_Portal__Phone__c √ √
Proposed Awarded Amount FGM_Portal__RequestedAmount__c √ √
Proposed Grant End Date FGM_Portal__Proposed_Grant_End_Date__c √ √
Proposed Grant Start Date FGM_Portal__Proposed_Grant_Start_Date__c √ √
Shipping Other Country FGM_Portal__Shipping_Other_Country__c √ √
Shipping Other State FGM_Portal__Shipping_Other_State__c √ √
Stage FGM_Portal__StageName__c √ √
Submission Date FGM_Portal__Submission_Date__c √ √
Submitted By FGM_Portal__Submitted_By__c √ √
# Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Benchmarks Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting the Benchmarks feature. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Configure the Grantee Portal community user object and field permissions if you are using Benchmarks by editing the community user profile. Here's how to configure these permissions. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png) then Setup. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find Box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the Profile Name of the Grantee Portal community user. For example, click **fC Partner Community User** . 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To configure an object's permissions, scroll down to the object and specify the minimum object permissions then click **Save**. 6. To configure field-level security, scroll down to the Field-Level Security section and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access recommended for Benchmarks in foundationConnect. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If you have additional fields added in a field set, those fields will need permissions as well. Make sure to review [Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have the access they need to standard and custom objects and fields.") for additional permission recommendations. - **[Benchmark Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_benchmarks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Benchmark object in foundationConnect. - **[Benchmark Update Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_benchmarks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Benchmark Update object in foundationConnect. - **[Recommendation Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_benchmarks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation object in foundationConnect. ## Benchmark Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Benchmark object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Benchmark object and its fields are required only if you are using Benchmarks. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Benchmark Type FGM_Base__Benchmark_Type__c √  
Completed FGM_Base__Completed__c √  
Completion Date FGM_Base__Completion_Date__c √  
Description FGM_Base__Description__c √  
Due Date FGM_Base__Due_Date__c √  
Include in Agreement FGM_Base__Include_in_Agreement__c √  
Number Goal FGM_Base__Number_Goal__c √  
Organization FGM_Base__Organization__c √  
Percentage Goal FGM_Base__Percentage_Goal__c √  
Request Number FGM_Base__Request_Number__c √  
Request Update on Report FGM_Base__Request_Update_on_Report__c √  
Required FGM_Base__Required__c √  
Status FGM_Base__Status__c √ √
## Benchmark Update Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Benchmark Update object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Benchmark Update object and its fields are required only if you are using Benchmarks. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Amount Update FGM_Base__Amount_Update__c √ √
Benchmark FGM_Base__Benchmark__c √ √
Completed FGM_Base__Completed__c √ √
Date Updated FGM_Base__Date_Updated__c √ √
Grantee Report FGM_Base__Grantee_Report__c √ √
Long Narrative FGM_Base__Long_Narrative__c √ √
Number Completed FGM_Base__Number_Completed__c √ √
Number Update FGM_Base__Number_Update__c √ √
Percentage Completed FGM_Base__Percentage_Completed__c √ √
Percentage Update FGM_Base__Percentage_Update__c √ √
## Recommendation Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Recommendation object is required only if you are using Benchmarks. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
# Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Grantee Reports Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting Grantee Reports. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Configure the Grantee Portal community user object and field permissions if you are using Grantee Reports by editing the community user profile. Here's how to configure these permissions. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png) then Setup. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find Box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the Profile Name of the Grantee Portal community user. For example, click **fC Partner Community User** . 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To configure an object's permissions, scroll down to the object and specify the minimum object permissions then click **Save**. 6. To configure field-level security, scroll down to the Field-Level Security section and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access recommended for Grantee Reports in foundationConnect. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If you have additional fields added in a field set, those fields will need permissions as well. Make sure to review [Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have the access they need to standard and custom objects and fields.") for additional permission recommendations. - **[Grantee Budget Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Category Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Category object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Configuration Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Configuration object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Line Item Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Line Item object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Update Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Update object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Update by Category Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Update by Category object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Report Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Report object in foundationConnect. ## Grantee Budget Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Grantee Budget object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Total Budget Amount FGM_Portal__Total_Budget_Amount__c √  
## Grantee Budget Category Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Category object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Grantee Budget Category object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Active FGM_Portal__IsActive__c √  
Parent Category FGM_Portal__Parent_Category__c √  
## Grantee Budget Configuration Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Configuration object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Grantee Budget Configuration object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Category FGM_Portal__Category__c √  
Related List Controller FGM_Portal__Related_List_Controller__c √  
Sort Order FGM_Portal__Sort_Order__c √  
## Grantee Budget Line Item Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Line Item object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Asterisks (\*) indicate access to the Grantee Budget Line Item object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√*

Edit

√*

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Amount FGM_Portal__Amount__c √* √*
Available Budget FGM_Portal__Total_Remaining__c √*  
Budget Configuration FGM_Portal__Budget_Configuration__c √* √*
Category FGM_Portal__Category__c √* √*
Expenditures to Date FGM_Portal__Total_Spent__c √* √*
Note FGM_Portal__Note__c √* √*
## Grantee Budget Update Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Update object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Grantee Budget Update object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Approved Budget FGM_Portal__Approved_Budget_New__c √  
Available Budget FGM_Portal__Available_Budget__c √  
Comment FGM_Portal__Comment__c √ √
Current Period Expenses FGM_Portal__Current_Period_Expenses__c √ √
(deprecated) FGM_Portal__Grantee_Budget_Line_Item__c √ √
Expenditures to Date FGM_Portal__Expenditures_to_Date__c √ √
Grantee Budget Category FGM_Portal__Grantee_Budget_Category__c √ √
Percentage Used FGM_Portal__Percentage_Used__c √  
## Grantee Budget Update by Category Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Update by Category object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Grantee Budget Update by Category object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Amount FGM_Portal__Amount__c √ √
Grantee Budget Line Item FGM_Portal__Grantee_Budget_Line_Item__c √ √
## Grantee Report Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Report object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Grantee Report object and its fields are required only if you are using Grantee Reports. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Address FGM_Base__Address__c √  
Award Date FGM_Base__Award_Date__c √  
Comment FGM_Base__Comment__c √  
Contact Organization FGM_Base__Contact_Organization__c √  
Display Benchmark FGM_Base__Display_Benchmark__c √  
Due Date FGM_Base__Due_Date__c √  
Due Date Year FGM_Base__Year__c √  
Fax FGM_Base__Fax__c √  
Final Report FGM_Base__Final_Report__c √  
Impact FGM_Base__Impact__c √  
Interim Report FGM_Base__Interim_Report__c √  

Is Overdue

FGM_Base__Is_Overdue__c

√
Name FGM_Base__Name__c √  
Organization FGM_Base__Organization__c √  
Phone FGM_Base__Phone__c √  
Remind Awardee FGM_Base__Remind_Awardee__c √  
Remind Staff FGM_Base__Remind_Staff__c √  
Report Contact FGM_Base__Report_Contact__c √  
Request Number FGM_Base__Request_Number__c √  
Scope FGM_Base__Type__c √  
Status FGM_Base__Status__c √ √
Submission Date FGM_Base__Submission_Date__c √ √
Submitted By FGM_Base__Submitted_By__c √ √
Title FGM_Base__Title__c √  
# Configure Community User Permissions on the Reviewer Portal Make sure your reviewers and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Configure the Reviewer Portal community user object and field permissions by editing the guest user profile. Here's how to configure these permissions. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find Box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the Profile Name of the Reviewer Portal community user. For example, click **fC Reviewer Partner Community User** . 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To configure an object's permissions, scroll down to the object and specify the minimum object permissions then click **Save**. 6. To configure field-level security, scroll down to the Field-Level Security section and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access recommended for core foundationConnect functionality to work on the Reviewer Portal. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed — and many standard Salesforce items are not — it means that either: - foundationConnect doesn't have a dependency on it. Your organization can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be changed In addition to these permissions, any field added to a field set requires additional permissions. - **[Account Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Account object in foundationConnect. - **[Contact Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. - **[Campaign (Docket) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Campaign (Docket) object in foundationConnect. - **[Campaign Quiz Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Campaign Quiz object in foundationConnect. - **[Community Configuration Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration object in foundationConnect. - **[CustomHTML Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. - **[External Review Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the External Review object in foundationConnect. - **[FCPageLayout Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the FCPageLayout object in foundationConnect. - **[Field Value Translation Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Field Value Translation object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Budget Line Item Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Line Item object in foundationConnect. - **[Grantee Report Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Report object in foundationConnect. - **[Lead (Inquiry) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Lead (Inquiry) object in foundationConnect. - **[Opportunity (Request) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. - **[Opportunity (Request) Team Member Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal Account Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal Account object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Attachment Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question Attachment object in foundationConnect. - **[Quiz Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Quiz object in foundationConnect. - **[Quiz Question Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Quiz Question object in foundationConnect. - **[Related List Controller Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Related List Controller object in foundationConnect. - **[Secure Message Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Secure Message object in foundationConnect. - **[StateCountryConfig Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the StateCountryConfig object in foundationConnect. - **[Task Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Task object in foundationConnect. - **[User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ## Account Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Account object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
EIN FGM_Base__EIN__c √  
## Contact Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Email Email √ √
Account (Organization) Name AccountId √  
Username FGM_Portal__Username__c √  
## Campaign (Docket) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Campaign (Docket) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Label

Read Access

Edit Access
Application Quiz FGM_Portal__Application_Quiz__c √  
Application Type FGM_Portal__Application_Type__c √  
Description Description √  
Email Contact FGM_Portal__Email__c √  
End Date EndDate √  
Instructions FGM_Portal__Description__c √  
LOI Prameters FGM_Portal__LOI_Prameters__c √  
LOI Quiz FGM_Portal__LOI_Quiz__c √  
Number of Recommendations FGM_Portal__No_of_Recommendation__c √  
Start Date StartDate √  
Visibility FGM_Portal__Visibility__c √  
## Campaign Quiz Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Campaign Quiz object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Instructional Text FGM_Portal__Rich_Instructional_Text__c √  
Parameters FGM_Portal__Parameters__c √  
## Community Configuration Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
JsonData FGM_Portal__JsonData__c √  
## CustomHTML Permissions Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Description FGM_Portal__RichDescription__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
## External Review Permissions Review the minimum required access for the External Review object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Deadline FC_Reviewer__Deadline__c √  
External Reviewer ID Name √  
Lead FC_Reviewer__Lead__c √  
Opportunity (Request) FC_Reviewer__Opportunity__c √ √
Status FC_Reviewer__Status__c √ √
Submitted Date FC_Reviewer__Submitted_Date__c √ √
## FCPageLayout Permissions Review the minimum required access for the FCPageLayout object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Object Name FGM_Portal__ObjectName__c √  
Record Type Id FGM_Portal__RecordTypeId__c √  
## Field Value Translation Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Field Value Translation object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Translation Value FGM_Portal__Translation_Value__c √  
## Grantee Budget Line Item Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Budget Line Item object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Amount FGM_Portal__Amount__c √  
Budget Configuration FGM_Portal__Budget_Configuration__c √  
Category FGM_Portal__Category__c √  
Note FGM_Portal__Note__c √  
## Grantee Report Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Grantee Report object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Lead (Inquiry) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Lead (Inquiry) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Quiz FGM_Portal__Quiz__c √  
Submitted By FGM_Base__Submitted_By__c √  
## Opportunity (Request) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Campaign Quiz ID FC_Reviewer__Campaign_Quiz_Id__c √  
Consultant User FGM_Portal__ConsultantUser__c √  
Primary Campaign Source CampaignId √  
Quiz FGM_Portal__Quiz__c √  
Submitted By FGM_Base__Submitted_By__c √  
## Opportunity (Request) Team Member Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
ContactRoleID FGM_Portal__ContactRoleID__c √  
## Portal Account Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal Account object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √  
## Portal User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √ √
Active FGM_Portal__IsActive__c √ √
Agree Terms and Conditions FGM_Portal__Terms_And_Conditions__c √ √
Approval Status FGM_Portal__Approval_Status__c √ √
City FGM_Portal__City__c √ √
Confirm Password FGM_Portal__Confirm_Password__c √ √
Confirmation Code FGM_Portal__Confirmation_Code__c √ √
Contact FGM_Portal__Contact__c √ √
Country FGM_Portal__Country__c √ √
Domain FGM_Portal__Domain__c √ √
EIN FGM_Portal__EIN__c √ √

Email

FGM_Portal__Email__c

√

 √
Fax FGM_Portal__Fax__c √ √
First Name FGM_Portal__FirstName__c √ √
Is Created By Opportunity Team Member FGM_Portal__IsCreatedByOpportunityTeamMember__c √ √
Last Name FGM_Portal__LastName__c √ √
Organization Legal Name FGM_Portal__Organization_Legal_Name__c √ √
Phone FGM_Portal__Phone__c √ √
Portal Account FGM_Portal__Portal_Account__c √ √
Portal Login FGM_Portal__GrantedPortalAccess__c √ √
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √ √
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √ √
Salutation FGM_Portal__Salutation__c √ √
Security Question FGM_Portal__Security_Question__c √ √
State FGM_Portal__State__c √ √
State List FGM_Portal__State_List__c √ √
Street FGM_Portal__Street_New__c √ √
Title FGM_Portal__Title__c √ √
User Profile FGM_Portal__User_Profile__c √ √
Zip Code FGM_Portal__Zip_Code__c √ √
## Question Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Attachment Name Formula FGM_Portal__AttachmentNameFormula__c √  
Help Tip FGM_Portal__Help_Tip__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
Parent QuestionID FGM_Portal__Parent_QuestionID__c √  
Post-Text FGM_Portal__RichPostText__ct √  
Pre-Text FGM_Portal__RichPreText__c √  
Question FGM_Portal__RichQuestion__c √  
Quiz FGM_Portal__Quiz__c √  
Type FGM_Portal__Type__c √  
## Question Attachment Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question Attachment object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Amendment FGM_Portal__Amendment__c √  
Benchmark FGM_Portal__Benchmark_del__c √  
Description FGM_Portal__Description__c √ √
External Review FC_Reviewer__External_Review__c √ √
Grantee Report FGM_Portal__GranteeReport__c √  
Lead (Inquiry) FGM_Portal__Inquiry__c √  
Question FGM_Portal__Question__c √ √
Opportunity (Request) Request √  
## Quiz Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Quiz object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Active FGM_Portal__Is_Active__c √  
Introduction Text FGM_Portal__Introduction_Text__c √  
## Quiz Question Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Quiz Question object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Can upload after submission FGM_Portal__Can_upload_after_submission__c √  
Field FGM_Portal__Field__c √  
Hide Post Text FC_Reviewer__Hide_Post_Text__c √  
Hide Post-Text after submission? FGM_Portal__Hide_Post_Text__c √  
Hide Pre Text FC_Reviewer__Hide_Pre_Text__c √  
Hide Pre-Text after submission? FGM_Portal__Hide_Pre_Text__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
Required? FGM_Portal__Required__c √  
Sort Order FGM_Portal__Sort_Order__c √  
Tab FGM_Portal__Tab__c √  
## Related List Controller Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Related List Controller object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
# of records to display FGM_Portal__of_records_to_display__c √  
Associated FC Portal Type FGM_Portal__Associated_FC_Portal_Type__c √  
Associated Tab Type FGM_Portal__Associated_Tab_Type__c √  
Base URL FGM_Portal__BaseUrl__c √  
Cloned from FGM_Portal__Cloned_from__c √  
Enable Amendment FGM_Portal__EnableAmendment__c √  
Field Labels FGM_Portal__FieldHeaders__c √  
Field Labels (Long) FGM_Portal__Field_Labels_Long__c √  
Field Names FGM_Portal__FieldNames__c √  
Field Names (Long) FGM_Portal__Field_Names_Long__c √  
Hide Edit Link FGM_Portal__Hide_Edit_Link__c √  
Instructional Text FGM_Portal__RichInstructionalText__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
Parent Object FGM_Portal__ParentObject__c √  
Show Delete Link FGM_Portal__ShowDeleteLink__c √  
Show New Button FGM_Portal__ShowNewButton__c √  
Show Tab to Individual Users FGM_Portal__Show_Tab_to_Individual_Users__c √  
Show Tab to Organization Users FGM_Portal__Show_Tab_to_Organization_Users__c √  
Sort Field FGM_Portal__SortField__c √  
Sort Field Order FGM_Portal__SortFieldOrder__c √  
## Secure Message Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Secure Message object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Body FGM_Portal__Body__c √ √
Proposals FGM_Portal__Proposals__c √ √
Recipient FGM_Portal__Recipient__c √ √
RefId FGM_Portal__RefId__c √ √
Sender FGM_Portal__Sender__c √ √
Subject FGM_Portal__Subject__c √ √
## StateCountryConfig Permissions Review the minimum required access for the StateCountryConfig object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
PicklistValues FGM_Portal__PicklistValues__c √  
## Task Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Task object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Portal Account Admin FGM_Portal__Portal_Account_Admin__c √  
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √  
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √  
User Email FGM_Portal__UserEmail__c √  
User Profile FGM_Portal__UserProfile__c √  
# Configure Contacts Find out more about configuring contacts. - **[Enable Contact Delete Override](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you enable Contact Delete Override, you're overriding standard Contact Delete functionality with a custom Visualforce page. This override prevents orphaned Household Account records and provides the desired deletion behavior for Contacts in NPSP. - **[Add the Relationships Viewer to the Contact Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationships Viewer provides a visual representation of how your Contacts are connected. ## Enable Contact Delete Override When you enable Contact Delete Override, you're overriding standard Contact Delete functionality with a custom Visualforce page. This override prevents orphaned Household Account records and provides the desired deletion behavior for Contacts in NPSP. To figure out if you have Contact Delete Override enabled or to enable it: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. In the row for Delete, look at the Content Source and Overridden columns. If the override is enabled, you'll see a checkmark in the Overridden column and the Visualforce page name in the Content Source column. 6. If the Content Source says Standard Salesforce Page, you need to enable the override. Click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then **Edit**. 7. Select **Override With**, then choose the `CON_DeleteContactOverride [npsp__CON_DeleteContactOverride]` Visualforce page. 8. Click **Save**. ## Add the Relationships Viewer to the Contact Page Layout The Relationships Viewer provides a visual representation of how your Contacts are connected. To add the Relationships Viewer to the Contact layout: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. From the list of objects, select **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click the name of the Contact layout you want to edit. 6. Select Mobile & Lightning Actions from the left column, drag the Relationships Viewer item to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section, and click **Save**. # Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers Manage email and phone settings for Contacts in EDA. - **[Email Address and Phone Fields—Preconfigured and Custom Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA provides preconfigured email fields and phone fields to track a Contact's email addresses and phone numbers. - **[How Email and Phone Fields Interact with Standard Contact Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because the standard Education Data Architecture email and phone fields give you finely grained control over managing Contacts' data, the standard Email and Phone fields don't show on Education Data Architecture page layouts. - **[Configure Preferred Email and Phone Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, all Contacts must have a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone, but you can change the defaults in EDA Settings from Contact Information under People and Groups. - **[Configure Translation for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you started using EDA with version 1.89 or later, and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, and your Contact page layouts use only the preconfigured Phone and Email fields, then no changes are needed to translate Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values in the languages supported by EDA. ## Email Address and Phone Fields—Preconfigured and Custom Options EDA provides preconfigured email fields and phone fields to track a Contact's email addresses and phone numbers. - Email fields - University Email - Work Email - Alternate Email - Preferred Email—Designates which field is the Contact's preferred address for communications - Phone fields - Home Phone - Work Phone - Mobile - Other Phone - Preferred Phone—Designates which field is the Contact's preferred phone number for communications If you need to track additional data, you can augment these fields with your own custom fields by adding your custom field's Field Label to the Preferred Email field or Preferred Phone field as a picklist value. Also make sure that the picklist value's label and API name match exactly. Any mismatches can cause errors when saving a custom email or phone as the Contact's Preferred Email or Preferred Phone. ![Field Label of Personal Email custom email field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/email_addr_contacts_field_label.png) ![Personal Email field added as picklist value](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/email_addr_contacts_values.png) For more information about creating custom fields and picklist values. See [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field."). ## How Email and Phone Fields Interact with Standard Contact Fields Because the standard Education Data Architecture email and phone fields give you finely grained control over managing Contacts' data, the standard Email and Phone fields don't show on Education Data Architecture page layouts. Just because they're hidden, though, doesn't mean that they're not important. You might be using those fields, and the Salesforce platform still relies on them for emailing or calling Contacts. When you install Education Data Architecture, here's how we keep all the email addresses and phone numbers in sync. - If a Contact's standard Email or Phone field has a value and custom fields (if any) don't have values, Education Data Architecture copies the value from the standard field to the Alternate field and sets the Preferred Email to Alternate or sets the Preferred Phone to Other. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you've overridden the label of the Alternate email field in the Translation Workbench (for example, changed it to Personal Email), make sure that you also update its corresponding picklist value in the Preferred Email field on Contact. Remember to update both the picklist value label (Personal Email) and the API name (Personal Email) for your newly named Personal Email field, and make sure they match exactly. - If a Contact's standard Email or Phone field has a value and one or more custom email or phone fields also have values, Education Data Architecture sets the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone field to the standard setting. - If a Contact's standard Phone field has no value and one or more custom phone fields _do_ have values, you can select a field for Preferred Phone. In EDA Settings, under **People and Groups** | **Contact Information**, select a value from the Default Preferred Phone picklist. - If a Contact has a single email or phone value in a field other than standard Email or standard Phone, Education Data Architecture sets that field as the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone and copies the value to the standard field. - If a Contact's standard Email or Phone field is blank and other email or phone fields are also blank, Education Data Architecture leaves Email or Phone blank. Whenever you add one or more email addresses or phone numbers to a Contact, the Preferred field is required—you must select one of the fields (preconfigured or custom) that has a value. Education Data Architecture then takes your selected Preferred Email or Preferred Phone and copies it to the standard field. For information about the preconfigured phone fields and other settings, see [Configure Preferred Email and Phone Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "By default, all Contacts must have a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone, but you can change the defaults in EDA Settings from Contact Information under People and Groups."). ## Configure Preferred Email and Phone Settings By default, all Contacts must have a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone, but you can change the defaults in EDA Settings from Contact Information under People and Groups. ### Enable Preferred Email or Preferred Phone for the First Time If your org doesn't currently require Contacts to have a Preferred Email or Preferred Phone and you start requiring them, after enabling the requirement, run the Preferred Email and Preferred Phone Apex job from System Tools under System in EDA Settings. The job: - Ensures that a standard or custom email address or phone number is set as a Contact's Preferred value. - Ensures that when a Contact has only standard Email Address or Phone Number records, those values are copied to the Alternate email or Other phone field and the Preferred Email is set to Alternate or the Preferred Phone is set to Other. This Apex job works only if: - Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality is selected - Require Preferred Phone is not selected - The CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM trigger handler is enabled ### Update Preferred Email and Phone Field Names and Picklist Values If you started using Education Data Architecture before version 1.89 and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, your preconfigured Preferred Email and Preferred Phone picklist values won't match the updated versions. In this case, if you want to match your pre-1.89 field labels to the updated versions (for example, to fix failing unit tests or to use translations), add these new picklist values to the Preferred Phone and Preferred Email fields on Contact. If you're not sure which version of Education Data Architecture you started with, see [Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm).
Pre-1.89 Preferred Phone Picklist NameNew Picklist Name
HomeHome Phone
WorkWork Phone
MobileMobile Phone
OtherOther Phone

Pre-1.89 Preferred Email Picklist Name

New Picklist Name

University University Email
Work Work Email
Alternate Alternate Email
See [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field."). ### Change Default Syncing Rules If the default syncing rules aren't compatible with your existing integrations or other business processes, you can change them from Contact Information under People and Groups in EDA Settings. With the initial release of the Preferred Phone functionality in EDA version 1.82, we also introduced the CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM trigger handler, which ensures that the value in the Preferred Phone field is always synced to the standard Phone field. CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM is enabled by default. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To preserve the values stored in a Contact's standard fields, enable field history tracking for Contacts and specify tracking for those fields. - To use the Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality to validate that the field selected for Default Preferred Phone has a value, but to remove the requirement for a Contact to have a Preferred Phone, turn on Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality and turn off Require Preferred Phone. - To choose which Phone field syncs with Preferred Phone when the standard Phone field has no value or when more than one Phone field has values, choose from the Default Preferred Phone picklist. While you can manage the Preferred Phone functionality by disabling this trigger handler, we strongly recommend that you manage Preferred Phone from EDA Settings, instead. Using the Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality setting ensures that the trigger handler receives future updates, which won't happen if you specify that the trigger handler is user managed. ## Configure Translation for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email Picklist Values If you started using EDA with version 1.89 or later, and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, and your Contact page layouts use only the preconfigured Phone and Email fields, then no changes are needed to translate Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values in the languages supported by EDA. However, if either of the following conditions exist, make the following changes to translate Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values correctly. - If you started using EDA before version 1.89 and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, update your Preferred Phone and Preferred Email fields and picklist values as described in [Update Preferred Email and Phone Field Names and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), then configure translation as follows. - Regardless of when you started using EDA, if Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org and your Contact page layouts use any fields other than the preconfigured fields (you use custom fields or fields that aren't listed in [Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm) ), configure translation for Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values as follows. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Search for then select **Translation Workbench | Translation Language Settings** and ensure the chosen language is active. If you need to add a language, do so now. 3. In Translation Workbench, select **Translate**. 1. Specify the Language you're translating to (in our example, Spanish). 2. From Setup Component, select **Picklist Value**. 3. From Object, specify **Contact**. 4. From the page layout that contains the non-standard field in the language to be translated to (in our example, Spanish), copy the label of the field (Teléfono del ayudante). 5. In Translation Workbench, under Picklist Value Label Translation, paste the label of the field and click **Save**. ![Paste translated field label from UI](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/translate-picklist.jpg) 6. If you created new fields and picklist values as described in [Update Preferred Email and Phone Field Names and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), repeat these steps for each new field you created. ### See Also: - [EDA and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm) - [Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm) # Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers Manage email and phone settings for Contacts in EDA. - **[Email Address and Phone Fields—Preconfigured and Custom Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA provides preconfigured email fields and phone fields to track a Contact's email addresses and phone numbers. - **[How Email and Phone Fields Interact with Standard Contact Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because the standard K-12 Architecture Kit email and phone fields give you finely grained control over managing Contacts' data, the standard Email and Phone fields don't show on K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts. - **[Configure Preferred Email and Phone Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, all Contacts must have a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone, but you can change the defaults in EDA Settings from Contact Information under People and Groups. - **[Configure Translation for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you started using EDA with version 1.89 or later, and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, and your Contact page layouts use only the preconfigured Phone and Email fields, then no changes are needed to translate Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values in the languages supported by EDA. ## Email Address and Phone Fields—Preconfigured and Custom Options EDA provides preconfigured email fields and phone fields to track a Contact's email addresses and phone numbers. - Email fields - University Email - Work Email - Alternate Email - Preferred Email—Designates which field is the Contact's preferred address for communications - Phone fields - Home Phone - Work Phone - Mobile - Other Phone - Preferred Phone—Designates which field is the Contact's preferred phone number for communications If you need to track additional data, you can augment these fields with your own custom fields by adding your custom field's Field Label to the Preferred Email field or Preferred Phone field as a picklist value. Also make sure that the picklist value's label and API name match exactly. Any mismatches can cause errors when saving a custom email or phone as the Contact's Preferred Email or Preferred Phone. ![Field Label of Personal Email custom email field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/email_addr_contacts_field_label.png) ![Personal Email field added as picklist value](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/email_addr_contacts_values.png) For more information about creating custom fields and picklist values. See [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.add_custom_picklist_values.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field."). ## How Email and Phone Fields Interact with Standard Contact Fields Because the standard K-12 Architecture Kit email and phone fields give you finely grained control over managing Contacts' data, the standard Email and Phone fields don't show on K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts. Just because they're hidden, though, doesn't mean that they're not important. You might be using those fields, and the Salesforce platform still relies on them for emailing or calling Contacts. When you install K-12 Architecture Kit, here's how we keep all the email addresses and phone numbers in sync. - If a Contact's standard Email or Phone field has a value and custom fields (if any) don't have values, K-12 Architecture Kit copies the value from the standard field to the Alternate field and sets the Preferred Email to Alternate or sets the Preferred Phone to Other. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you've overridden the label of the Alternate email field in the Translation Workbench (for example, changed it to Personal Email), make sure that you also update its corresponding picklist value in the Preferred Email field on Contact. Remember to update both the picklist value label (Personal Email) and the API name (Personal Email) for your newly named Personal Email field, and make sure they match exactly. - If a Contact's standard Email or Phone field has a value and one or more custom email or phone fields also have values, K-12 Architecture Kit sets the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone field to the standard setting. - If a Contact's standard Phone field has no value and one or more custom phone fields _do_ have values, you can select a field for Preferred Phone. In EDA Settings, under **People and Groups** | **Contact Information**, select a value from the Default Preferred Phone picklist. - If a Contact has a single email or phone value in a field other than standard Email or standard Phone, K-12 Architecture Kit sets that field as the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone and copies the value to the standard field. - If a Contact's standard Email or Phone field is blank and other email or phone fields are also blank, K-12 Architecture Kit leaves Email or Phone blank. Whenever you add one or more email addresses or phone numbers to a Contact, the Preferred field is required—you must select one of the fields (preconfigured or custom) that has a value. K-12 Architecture Kit then takes your selected Preferred Email or Preferred Phone and copies it to the standard field. For information about the preconfigured phone fields and other settings, see [Configure Preferred Email and Phone Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "By default, all Contacts must have a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone, but you can change the defaults in EDA Settings from Contact Information under People and Groups."). ## Configure Preferred Email and Phone Settings By default, all Contacts must have a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone, but you can change the defaults in EDA Settings from Contact Information under People and Groups. ### Enable Preferred Email or Preferred Phone for the First Time If your org doesn't currently require Contacts to have a Preferred Email or Preferred Phone and you start requiring them, after enabling the requirement, run the Preferred Email and Preferred Phone Apex job from System Tools under System in EDA Settings. The job: - Ensures that a standard or custom email address or phone number is set as a Contact's Preferred value. - Ensures that when a Contact has only standard Email Address or Phone Number records, those values are copied to the Alternate email or Other phone field and the Preferred Email is set to Alternate or the Preferred Phone is set to Other. This Apex job works only if: - Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality is selected - Require Preferred Phone is not selected - The CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM trigger handler is enabled ### Update Preferred Email and Phone Field Names and Picklist Values If you started using K-12 Architecture Kit before version 1.4 and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, your preconfigured Preferred Email and Preferred Phone picklist values won't match the updated versions. In this case, if you want to match your pre-1.89 field labels to the updated versions (for example, to fix failing unit tests or to use translations), add these new picklist values to the Preferred Phone and Preferred Email fields on Contact. If you're not sure which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you started with, see [Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm).
Pre- 1.4 Preferred Phone Picklist NameNew Picklist Name
HomeHome Phone
WorkWork Phone
MobileMobile Phone
OtherOther Phone

Pre- 1.4 Preferred Email Picklist Name

New Picklist Name

University University Email
Work Work Email
Alternate Alternate Email
See [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.add_custom_picklist_values.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field."). ### Change Default Syncing Rules If the default syncing rules aren't compatible with your existing integrations or other business processes, you can change them from Contact Information under People and Groups in EDA Settings. With the initial release of the Preferred Phone functionality in EDA version 1.82, we also introduced the CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM trigger handler, which ensures that the value in the Preferred Phone field is always synced to the standard Phone field. CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM is enabled by default. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To preserve the values stored in a Contact's standard fields, enable field history tracking for Contacts and specify tracking for those fields. - To use the Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality to validate that the field selected for Default Preferred Phone has a value, but to remove the requirement for a Contact to have a Preferred Phone, turn on Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality and turn off Require Preferred Phone. - To choose which Phone field syncs with Preferred Phone when the standard Phone field has no value or when more than one Phone field has values, choose from the Default Preferred Phone picklist. While you can manage the Preferred Phone functionality by disabling this trigger handler, we strongly recommend that you manage Preferred Phone from EDA Settings, instead. Using the Enhanced Preferred Phone Functionality setting ensures that the trigger handler receives future updates, which won't happen if you specify that the trigger handler is user managed. ## Configure Translation for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email Picklist Values If you started using EDA with version 1.89 or later, and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, and your Contact page layouts use only the preconfigured Phone and Email fields, then no changes are needed to translate Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values in the languages supported by EDA. However, if either of the following conditions exist, make the following changes to translate Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values correctly. - If you started using EDA before version 1.89 and Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org, update your Preferred Phone and Preferred Email fields and picklist values as described in [Update Preferred Email and Phone Field Names and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), then configure translation as follows. - Regardless of when you started using EDA, if Preferred Phone and Preferred Email are enabled in your org and your Contact page layouts use any fields other than the preconfigured fields (you use custom fields or fields that aren't listed in [Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm) ), configure translation for Preferred Phone and Preferred Email picklist values as follows. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Search for then select **Translation Workbench | Translation Language Settings** and ensure the chosen language is active. If you need to add a language, do so now. 3. In Translation Workbench, select **Translate**. 1. Specify the Language you're translating to (in our example, Spanish). 2. From Setup Component, select **Picklist Value**. 3. From Object, specify **Contact**. 4. From the page layout that contains the non-standard field in the language to be translated to (in our example, Spanish), copy the label of the field (Teléfono del ayudante). 5. In Translation Workbench, under Picklist Value Label Translation, paste the label of the field and click **Save**. ![Paste translated field label from UI](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/translate-picklist.jpg) 6. If you created new fields and picklist values as described in [Update Preferred Email and Phone Field Names and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), repeat these steps for each new field you created. ### See Also: - [EDA and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm) - [Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm) # Configure Course Waitlists Set student enrollment priority and timing, and add prebuilt flows to manage seat availability and enrollment notifications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To configure course waitlists: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Click **Set Up Academic Operations**. 3. Click **Configure Course Waitlists**. 4. Add fields to determine a student’s position on a waitlist. For each field, set its priority for consideration and a sorting order. Waitlist Score is typically the first field for consideration. Define the score based on your academic policies, such as the number of credits already earned to give senior students higher priority. The same student can have different scores on different waitlists. Set the evaluation in a descending order to put the student with the highest score at the top of the waitlist. To add students to the waitlist first-come, first-served, add the Added to Waitlist field and set the evaluation in an ascending order. 1. In the Set Waitlist Position section, click **Add Field**. 2. For Waitlist Position Determined By, select a sortable field. 3. Select a sort order for the values in this field. 4. For Waitlist Position Field Order, enter a number to specify the field’s priority. The first field that you add is in position 1 by default. 5. Click **Add Field**. 6. Repeat these steps to add more fields. 7. To reorder, edit, or delete a field, select an action from the **Action** dropdown next to each field. 5. In the Set Enrollment Offer Expiration section, for Hours, enter the number of hours that the student has to accept an enrollment offer. 6. To automate course waitlist management, in the Set Up Waitlist Management Flows section, click **Configure Flows**, and create your own versions of these prebuilt flows. - Student Information: Generate Enrollment Offers for Waitlisted Courses - Student Information: Send Enrollment Offers to Waitlisted Students - Student Information: Expire Enrollment Offers SEE ALSO: - [Create a Waitlist for a Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_course_waitlist.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To create a waitlist for a course offering, assign a waitlist status and set a waitlist capacity.") - [Manual Course Waitlist Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manual_course_waitlist_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A registrar can manually update the waitlist status of a course offering and add or remove students from a waitlist. Understand how manual actions affect the status of a waitlist and a student's position on it.") # Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter to Show Search Results Configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter and make your Criteria-Based Search and Filter Lightning web component show search results in Campus and Program Finder on your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter: Education Cloud Full Access
1. [Enable Criteria-Based Search and Filter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.criteria_based_search_filter_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. [Configure the searchable object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.criteria_based_search_filter_object.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Create a search configuration for the Educational Institution Searchable Profile object. Use these recommended fields and values for your configuration. These recommendations are based on common recruitment and admissions use cases. Include or remove fields to suit your institution’s needs. For Basic Details, enter these values.
Field Value
Name Educational Institution Searchable Profile
API Name Educational_Institution_Searchable_Profile

The API name populates automatically.
Searchable Object Educational Institution Searchable Profile
Data Synchronization Job None
For Filter Field Display Formats, use these recommended fields and formats. | Field | Format | | --- | --- | | Educational Institution Format | Checkbox | | Educational Institution Name | Picklist | | Grades Offered | Checkbox | | Learning Category | Picklist | | Learning Format | Checkbox | | Learning Grade | Picklist | | Learning Program Name | Picklist | | Provider Name | Picklist | | Support Program Format | Checkbox | | Support Program Name | Picklist | For Filter Field Parsing, select these fields to parse: - Educational Institution Format - Grades Offered - Learning Category - Learning Format - Learning Grade - Support Program Format 3. Configure the search criteria for the Educational Institution Searchable Profile object. For example, create configurations so that applicants, students, and families can search by learning program, by support program, and by campus or school. In each configuration, select fields and options based on your intended search experience for the user. - [Search by learning program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_search_by_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a search criteria configuration for your learning programs in Campus and Program Finder. Define the fields that users use as filter criteria and the fields that they see for the search results. Select the fields that users use to sort and aggregate the results. Finally, select the actions that the user can take on the search records and define the location parameters.") - [Search by campus or support program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_search_criteria_for_campuses_and_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a search criteria configuration for your campuses and support programs in Campus and Program Finder. Define the fields that users use as filter criteria and the fields that they see for the search results. Select the fields that users use to sort and aggregate the results. Finally, select the actions that the user can take on the search records and define the location parameters.") 4. To make Campus and Program Finder available to students, applicants, and families, [add the Criteria-Based Search and Filter component to a page on your Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.criteria_based_search_filter_experience_cloud.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Configure Customizable Rollups Configure NPSP versions older than 3.155 for customizable rollups. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Configure Customizable Rollups](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cjlYlOQXSsM) - **[About Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_custom_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Customizable Rollups feature lets you create highly customized rollups that roll up either data from Opportunities, Payments, or Soft Credits (including Partial Soft Credits). You can create custom donation rollup fields on Accounts, Contacts, General Allocation Units, or Recurring Donations and you can also edit the definition of legacy out-of-box rollups. - **[Grant Access to npsp.CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC Apex Class](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_custom_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To ensure that you can access and configure Customizable Rollups, verify that your profile has access to the Apex Class CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC. ## About Customizable Rollups The NPSP Customizable Rollups feature lets you create highly customized rollups that roll up either data from Opportunities, Payments, or Soft Credits (including Partial Soft Credits). You can create custom donation rollup fields on Accounts, Contacts, General Allocation Units, or Recurring Donations and you can also edit the definition of legacy out-of-box rollups. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.155 (5/15/2019). If you started using NPSP before this date or this feature isn't configured in your Salesforce org. If you started using NPSP before this date, or this feature isn't configured in your org, complete these steps. (To find your NPSP installation date, see [Find Your Installation Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_find_your_installation_date.htm)). ## Grant Access to npsp.CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC Apex Class To ensure that you can access and configure Customizable Rollups, verify that your profile has access to the Apex Class CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC. If you don't have access to this Apex class, you'll see an error when you click the Configure Customizable Rollups button in NPSP Settings. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You must use the [Enhanced Profile User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_about_enhanced_ui.htm) in order to access all available Apex classes. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the profile you want to edit. 4. Click **Apex Class Access**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Add `CRLP_RollupUI_SVC` to the Enabled Apex Class list. 7. Click **Save**. # Configure Data Access for Visualforce Pages Volunteers for Salesforce is built on Visualforce, which is a way to create custom user interfaces for Salesforce objects and data. Configure access to Visualforce pages for your volunteers user profile. 1. If you wandered away from your site to check on your Sharing Settings, go back to Sites from Setup. 2. Click the site label for your site. ![Site Label as a link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_label_link.png) 3. On the Site Detail page, click **Public Access Settings**. ![Public Access Settings button on the Site Detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_public_access_settings_button.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The following steps assume you're using the Enhanced Profile User Interface. If you're using the Original Profile Interface, the path to these settings and the actions you take are slightly different. 4. Click **Visualforce Page Access**, then click **Edit**. 5. Add these pages to the Enabled Visualforce Page Access section. Ctrl + click to select more than one page at a time. - GW\_Volunteers.JobCalendar - GW\_Volunteers.VolunteersJobListing - GW\_Volunteers.VolunteersJobListingFS - GW\_Volunteers.VolunteersReportHours - GW\_Volunteers.VolunteersSignup - GW\_Volunteers.VolunteersSignupFS 6. If you intend to set up the Volunteers Personal Site feature, also add these pages. - GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSiteContactInfo - GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSiteContactLookup - GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSiteJobCalendar - GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSiteJobListing - GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSiteReportHours - GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSiteTemplate 7. **Save** your changes. # Configure Data Access for Volunteers for Salesforce Determine how volunteers interact with information on your website, and who can access data. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_data_access_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've created a Site, configure the data access settings so that volunteers can interact with your Site's contents. - **[Configure Site Guest User Access for Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_site_guest_user_access_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The System Admin must select Grant Guest Users Update Access in Volunteer Settings to allow guest users to update records shared with them. - **[Configure Data Access in Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_data_access_owd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Establish the recommended baseline data access for all of your Salesforce users, including your website visitors. - **[Define Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_define_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have an existing Volunteers for Salesforce org that has been upgraded to the Salesforce Winter '20 release and have enabled the Secure Guest User Record Access setting, create sharing rules to give guest users access to your records. - **[Configure Data Access for Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_data_access_vf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce is built on Visualforce, which is a way to create custom user interfaces for Salesforce objects and data. Configure access to Visualforce pages for your volunteers user profile. - **[Configure Object and Field Permissions in Public Access Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_config_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The last step in configuring data access is making sure your Site's public access settings give permission to read, create, and edit the dozen or so objects that Volunteers for Salesforce needs to do its job. # Configure Data Access in Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults Establish the recommended baseline data access for all of your Salesforce users, including your website visitors. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Organization-Wide Defaults will no longer be applied to Site Guest Users for new orgs created after the [Salesforce Winter '20 release](https://releasenotes.docs.salesforce.com/en-us/winter20/release-notes/salesforce_release_notes.htm). Site Guest Users must be granted access via [Criteria Based Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_site_guest_user_access_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The System Admin must select Grant Guest Users Update Access in Volunteer Settings to allow guest users to update records shared with them."). If your org was created on or after the [Winter '20 Release](https://releasenotes.docs.salesforce.com/en-us/winter20/release-notes/salesforce_release_notes.htm), use [Criteria Based Sharing rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_site_guest_user_access_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The System Admin must select Grant Guest Users Update Access in Volunteer Settings to allow guest users to update records shared with them.") to grant access to Site Guest Users. If your org was created before the [Winter '20 Release](https://releasenotes.docs.salesforce.com/en-us/winter20/release-notes/salesforce_release_notes.htm), Organization-Wide Defaults are still enabled, but we recommend implementing Criteria Based Sharing. 1. From Setup, enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Make sure that you're managing sharing settings for All Objects. ![Manage sharing settings for all objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/sharing_settings_for_all_objects.png) 3. Review the default access settings in the Organization-Wide Defaults section. If your organization is using an external sharing model, be sure to review the external access settings as well the internal access settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note You can tell you're using an external sharing model if the button above the Organization-Wide Defaults reads **Disable External Sharing Model** instead of **Enable External Sharing Model**. ![Organization wide defaults](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/org_wide_defaults.png) Compare them to the minimum Internal Access settings that V4S requires. Make sure that these objects have at least the minimum so that V4S can save information that authenticated volunteers submit on your website. • Lead—Public Read/Write • Account—Public Read Only • Contact—Public Read/Write • Campaign—Public Read/Write (controls sharing settings for Volunteer Jobs, Shifts, and Hours, which are all set to Controlled by Parent.) What if you need more restrictive access than the minimum, for one or more of these objects? For example, what if you don't want to make all of your Campaigns public? 1. Set the organization-wide default sharing settings for Campaign to Private, the most restrictive setting. 2. Back on the Sharing Settings page, go to the Campaign Sharing Rules section. 3. Create a sharing rule to define an exception to the organization-wide sharing settings for V4S users. For example, if the record type is Volunteer Campaign and the user type is a Site Guest User, then give Public Read/Write access to Campaigns. # Configure Data Integrity Configure fields for Data Integrity, back up your data, set up your National Change of Address (NCOA) provider, and keep up with releases. - **[Configure NPSP Fields for Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_configure_data_integrity_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add fields to page layouts and configure field level security to give users access to the Data Integrity fields they need. - **[Back Up Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_back_up_your_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before using Data Integrity, back up your data. Data Integrity can make bulk changes to data, and reverting changes needs to be done manually. Having a backup is advised. - **[Set up National Change of Address Provider](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_set_up_ncoa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up your Melissa Data SmartMover license for US or Canadian addresses. Similarly, set up your contract with Data8 for UK addresses. - **[Keep Up with Data Integrity and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_keep_up_with_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Data Integrity and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about available languages for the Data Integrity product and its documentation. # Configure Delegated Access Automation Automate the access delegation lifecycle with record-triggered flows and scheduled flows. The flows create delegated users and contact-contact relationships from access requests, keep request records in sync when proxy users sign up or are deactivated, and identify access delegation requests that require updates. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To configure record triggered and scheduled flows for delegated access: 1. Clone and activate the Create Delegated User and Contact-Contact Relation record-triggered flow. If a contact exists with the email address that the student provided during proxy onboarding, but doesn't have a user record, the flow creates a user record. The flow also creates a contact-contact relationship if one doesn’t already exist. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter _Flows_, and then select **Flows**. 2. Select **Create Delegated User and Contact-Contact Relation**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name for the new flow. 5. In the Create User element, configure the field values and conditions for creating a delegated user. 6. In the Send Email to Delegated Contact element, configure the email body with the sign-up URL for the proxy portal to send a sign-up email to the specified email address. 7. Save and activate the flow. 2. Clone and activate the Update Access Delegation Requests on Proxy Signup record-triggered flow. The flow keeps access delegation requests in sync with the proxy user’s lifecycle. When a proxy user signs up, the flow changes related requests with a status of Pending to New. When the proxy user is deactivated, the flow changes related active requests to Revoke Requested. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter _Flows_, and then select **Flows**. 2. Select **Update Access Delegation Requests on Proxy Signup**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name for the new flow. 5. Save and activate the flow. 3. Clone and activate the Process Scheduled Access Delegation Requests Batch scheduled flow. The flow identifies pending access delegation requests and updates proxy access based on the latest request data. For example, if a student delegates access to grades, the flow shares all records defined by the dataset. If new grade records are added after access is delegated, the flow automatically detects and shares those records during its next scheduled run. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter _Flows_, and then select **Flows**. 2. Select **Process Scheduled Access Delegation Requests Batch**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name for the new flow. 5. To process access delegation requests on a different schedule, edit the frequency in the Start element. 6. Save and activate the flow. 4. Confirm the batch job that processes access delegation requests. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Batch Management, and select **Batch Management**. 2. Open, and if needed, customize **Process Delegated Access Sharing**. - **[How Proxy Identity is Resolved For Delegated Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_proxy_identity_resolution.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a student names a proxy, the proxy's first name, last name, and email address are matched with an existing contact and user record. If a contact record exists for the proxy, Salesforce uses the information. If no contact record exists, Salesforce sends a sign-up email. If Salesforce finds a user record for the proxy but no contact record exists, Salesforce sends a sign-up email to invite the proxy to create an Experience Cloud person account. # Configure Donation Allocations Find out more about donation allocations. - **[About Donation Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Allocations feature allows you to define General Accounting Units (GAUs) to match your chart of accounts. You can then enter and track donations as parts of a GAU—either as a percentage of the donation amount, or as a specific dollar amount. - **[Set Tab Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For every profile that should have access to General Accounting Units, set the General Accounting Units tab settings. - **[Set Security on Objects, Fields, and Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to set security. - **[Add the GAU Allocations Related List to Your Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to add the GAU allocations list to your page layouts. - **[Create General Accounting Units](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You need to create at least one General Accounting Unit (GAU) before you begin using GAU Allocations. You can do this on the General Accounting Units tab. - **[Add Custom Fields to the Manage Allocations Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add your own custom fields to the Manage Allocations page through the Manage Allocations Additional Fields field set. After adding your preferred custom fields to the field set, your newly added fields appear on the Manage Allocations page. Use the field set layout editor to indicate if a field is required or not. - **[(Optional) Enable Default Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can enable a Default GAU if you want Salesforce to allocate Opportunities to a GAU upon creation. If you have a specific Opportunity that you want to allocate to a different GAU, you can always use the Manage Allocations button to make changes. - **[(Optional) Customize Allocation Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** GAU Allocations comes with a series of rollups that help you track the allocations you assign to your GAUs. The rollups come with pre-defined settings, which you can update as needed. ## About Donation Allocations The NPSP Allocations feature allows you to define General Accounting Units (GAUs) to match your chart of accounts. You can then enter and track donations as parts of a GAU—either as a percentage of the donation amount, or as a specific dollar amount. NPSP Allocations uses these objects: - General Accounting Unit (custom object): Track your designated funds, for example, scholarship, general, etc. - GAU Allocation (custom object): Track the specific funds (GAUs) to which each donation is allocated. - Campaign (standard object): Manage a group of donations and a predetermined amount to allocate to a specific GAU for donations in that Campaign. - Opportunity (standard object): Track the amount (or percent) allocated for each. - Recurring Donation (custom object): Track the amount (or percent) allocated for recurring donations. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.25 (11/25/2014). ## Set Tab Visibility For every profile that should have access to General Accounting Units, set the General Accounting Units tab settings. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the Profile you want to set Field-Level Security for. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. In the Tab Settings section, set the General Accounting Units tab setting to one of the following: - Default On: The General Accounting Units tab appears in the list of tabs. - Default Off: The General Accounting Units tab is not in the list of tabs, but is accessible through the App Launcher. 6. Click **Save**. ## Set Security on Objects, Fields, and Visualforce Pages Follow these steps to set security. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile to which you want to grant access. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Custom Object Permissions section, select **Read**, **Edit**, **Create** and **Delete** for the GAU Allocations and General Accounting Units objects. Select **Read** for Payments and Recurring Donation Objects. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat all steps for each profile that needs access to Donation Allocations. To set field-level security: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile to which you want to grant access. 3. In the Field-Level Security section, under Custom Field-Level Security, click **View** next to GAU Allocations. 4. Make sure **Read Access** or **Edit Access** is selected for all fields. If not, click **Edit**. 5. For all fields, if Edit Access is available, select **Edit Access**. Otherwise, select **Read Access**. 6. Save your changes. 7. Click **Back to Profile**. 8. In the Field-Level Security section, under Custom Field-Level Security, click **View** next to General Accounting Units. 9. Make sure **Read Access** or **Edit Access** is selected for all fields. If not, click **Edit**. 10. For all fields, if Edit Access is available, select **Edit Access**. Otherwise, select **Read Access**. 11. Save your changes. 12. Repeat all steps for each profile that needs access to Donation Allocations. To set Visualforce page security: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile to which you want to grant access. 3. In the Enabled Visualforce Page Access section, click **Edit**. 4. Move npsp.ALLO\_ManageAllocations from Available Visualforce Pages to Enabled Visualforce Pages. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat all steps for each profile that needs access to Donation Allocations. ## Add the GAU Allocations Related List to Your Page Layouts Follow these steps to add the GAU allocations list to your page layouts. - Opportunity: Donation layout - NPSP Campaign layout - Recurring Donation layout We’ll show you how to update the Opportunity page layout. After you complete that, repeat these steps for the other layouts. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Donation Layout**. 5. In the left side of the palette, click **Related Lists**. 6. Drag the GAU Allocations related list onto the page layout. 7. In the GAU Allocations related list, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/pl_wrench_icon.png) to access the list properties. 8. Add these fields to the Selected Fields list: - General Accounting Unit - Amount - Percent 9. Click ![Expand button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/pl_expand_button.png) to expand the Buttons section. 10. Add the Manage Allocations button to the Selected Buttons section. 11. Click OK. Your related list will look like this on each page layout: ![The GAU Allocations related list, showing the GAU Allocation Name, GAU Allocation Unit, Amount, and Percent fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/gau_related_list.png) ## Create General Accounting Units You need to create at least one General Accounting Unit (GAU) before you begin using GAU Allocations. You can do this on the General Accounting Units tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can create additional GAUs at any time. If you want to transfer donations from one GAU to another, however, you will either need to do it manually in each Opportunity or use an application that allows you to manipulate data (like Salesforce [Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_loader.htm), or an app from the [AppExchange](https://appexchange.salesforce.com)). 1. Click ![App launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), then click **General Accounting Units**. 2. On the General Accounting Units page, click **New**. 3. Enter a General Account Unit Name. 4. Click **Save**, or click **Save and New** if you want to create more GAUs. ## Add Custom Fields to the Manage Allocations Page You can add your own custom fields to the Manage Allocations page through the Manage Allocations Additional Fields field set. After adding your preferred custom fields to the field set, your newly added fields appear on the Manage Allocations page. Use the field set layout editor to indicate if a field is required or not. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Make fields required using the Manage Allocations Additional Fields field set, not on the GAU Allocation object. 1. Click ![setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/setup.png) , then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Find and click the **GAU Allocation** object. 4. Click **Field Sets.** 5. Click the **Manage Allocations Additional Fields** field label. 6. Add your preferred fields by dragging them from the palette to the **In the Field Set** section. 7. (Optional) Make the field required by clicking the field properties icon ( ![field properties wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/pl_wrench_icon.png)), selecting **Required**, and clicking **OK**. 8. Click **Save**. The field set fields appear on the Manage GAU Allocations page. ## (Optional) Enable Default Allocations You can enable a Default GAU if you want Salesforce to allocate Opportunities to a GAU upon creation. If you have a specific Opportunity that you want to allocate to a different GAU, you can always use the Manage Allocations button to make changes. See [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes."). You don’t need to enable a default GAU to use GAU Allocations, but if you plan on allocating donations, make sure you set up your GAUs accordingly. A default GAU comes in handy when you want to run reports in Salesforce. For example, if you wanted to report on all of your donations (not just those allocated to particular GAUs), you could run a report that included information about allocated donations, as well as information about donations to the default GAU (often an "unrestricted" or "general fund"). NPSP comes with a standard GAU named General Fund. You can select the General Fund GAU as your default when you enable Default Allocations. 1. [Create a General Accounting Unit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about donation allocations.") that you want to use for default allocations. (If you're using the “General Fund" GAU that comes with NPSP as your default, you can skip this step.) 2. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 3. Click **Donations** | **GAU Allocations**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. In the Default Allocations Setting area, select the **Default Allocations Enabled** checkbox. 6. From the Default General Accounting Unit drop-down menu, select the GAU to use as your default. 7. Click **Save**. 8. (Optional) If you want to assign all current unallocated Opportunities to your default GAU, in NPSP Settings go to **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Create Default Allocations** and click **Run Batch**. NPSP runs through your Opportunities, looks for unallocated amounts, and assigns them to your specified default GAU. ## (Optional) Customize Allocation Rollups GAU Allocations comes with a series of rollups that help you track the allocations you assign to your GAUs. The rollups come with pre-defined settings, which you can update as needed. To update the allocation rollup settings: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups** . 4. To set an N day value or use fiscal year, in the row for the Allocation rollup you want to edit, click ![Arrow button indicating that there are more menu options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) , then click **Edit**. 1. To set a Rollup N Day Value, select Days Back in the Time Frame field, then enter the number of days back. 2. To use fiscal year instead of calendar year, select the Use Fiscal Year checkbox. This checkbox appears if the Operation is set to Years Donated, Best Year, Best Year Total OR if the Time Frame field is set to Years Ago. 5. Exclude Opportunity record types or Opportunity types using filter rules within a [filter group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups."). Within your filter group, create a filter rule with these values: 1. Object = Opportunity 2. Field = Record Type ID or Opportunity Type 3. Operator = In List 4. Selected Value = Only the record types (or Opportunity types) you want to include. All other values are excluded. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you wish to adjust which Opportunity record types or Opportunity types are excluded from default GAU Allocations, you must temporarily disable Customizable Rollups. Make your changes to Excluded Opp RecTypes and Excluded Opp Types in NPSP Settings tab, **Donations** | **GAU Allocations**. Then you can re-enable Customizable Rollups. 6. Remember to **Save** your changes! # Configure Donor Brief Generation in Education Enable document generation settings and create a public group to provide template access for donor brief generation. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure donor brief generation:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, click **Feature Settings**. 2. Click **Document Generation**, and then click **General Settings**. 3. Turn on **Design Document Templates in Salesforce**. 4. Go to **Document Generation Settings**. 5. Click **New**. 6. In the Label field, enter DocumentGenerationSetting. 7. In the Document Template Library Name field, enter DocGenDocumentTemplateLibrary. 8. In Preview Type, select **PDF**. 9. Turn on **Enable Server-Side Documentation Generation**. 10. Click **Create**. Next, provide template access for donor brief generation. 11. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and select **Public Groups**. 12. To create a new public group, click **New**. 13. In Label, enter a name. For instance, Donor Brief 2024. The Group Name field is automatically populated based on the label name. 14. In Search, select **Users**. 15. From the Available Members list, select the users who create donor briefs and add them to the Selected Members list. 16. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note In the future, if more users must create donor briefs, give them the DocGen licenses and add them to this public group. If DocGen access is removed from a user, remove the user from this public group. Users who aren't part of this public group, can't see the option to create donor briefs. # Configure Donor Brief Generation in Nonprofit Enable document generation settings and create a public group to provide template access for donor brief generation. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To configure donor brief generation:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, click **Feature Settings**. 2. Click **Document Generation**, and then click **General Settings**. 3. Turn on **Design Document Templates in Salesforce**. 4. Go to **Document Generation Settings**. 5. Click **New**. 6. In the Label field, enter DocumentGenerationSetting. 7. In the Document Template Library Name field, enter DocGenDocumentTemplateLibrary. 8. In Preview Type, select **PDF**. 9. Turn on **Enable Server-Side Documentation Generation**. 10. Click **Create**. Next, provide template access for donor brief generation. 11. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and select **Public Groups**. 12. To create a new public group, click **New**. 13. In Label, enter a name. For instance, Donor Brief 2024. The Group Name field is automatically populated based on the label name. 14. In Search, select **Users**. 15. From the Available Members list, select the users who create donor briefs and add them to the Selected Members list. 16. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note In the future, if more users must create donor briefs, give them the DocGen licenses and add them to this public group. If DocGen access is removed from a user, remove the user from this public group. Users who aren't part of this public group, can't see the option to create donor briefs. # Configure Duplicate Detection and NPSP Contact Merge Set up duplicate detection and contact merge to keep your contacts organized and up-to-date. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Grant NPSP Contact Merge tab access to your users' profiles or permission sets. They can't use NPSP Contact Merge without access to the tab. - **[Set Up Duplicate Detection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up duplicate detection with matching rules to identify duplicate contacts. - **[Set Up NPSP Duplicate Rule Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up duplicate rules to find duplicate contacts before any potential duplicates are created. - **[Customize Contact Merge Columns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the columns that appear in the Contact Merge search results. - **[Set Up NPSP Potential Duplicates Pane on Contacts Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To quickly see if a contact has potential duplicates and to resolve those duplicates, set up the NPSP Potential Duplicates component on the Contacts page. ## Set Up Duplicate Detection Set up duplicate detection with matching rules to identify duplicate contacts. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important The out-of-box Salesforce Duplicate Rules are set up to match Contacts with Leads. This causes issues in NPSP Contact Merge. We recommend that you deactivate the Duplicate Rule Standard Rule for Contacts with Duplicate Leads or set up your own rules as described in the following sections. ### Set Up Matching Rules Matching Rules tell Salesforce how to look for duplicate Contacts. A Matching Rule compares field values to determine if a record is similar enough to another record to be considered a duplicate. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Matching Rules in the Quick Find box, then click **Matching Rules**. 3. Click **New Rule**. 4. For Object, select **Contact**, then click **Next**. 5. Give the rule a name and an optional description. 6. Select the fields to compare, and the matching methods. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Click **Activate**. 9. Continue to the next section to create a Duplicate Rule. For more information, see [Customize Matching Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=matching_rules_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Set Up Duplicate Rules Duplicate Rules tell Salesforce what to do when it finds potential duplicates as users create new Contacts. To see duplicates on the Contact Merge tab, Duplicate Rules must have both Action on Create and Action on Edit set to **Allow** and **Report**. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Duplicate Rules in the Quick Find box, then click **Duplicate Rules**. 3. Click **New Rule**, then select **Contact**. 4. Give the rule a name. 5. Next to **Action on Create**, select **Allow** and **Report**. 6. Next to **Action on Edit,** select **Allow** and **Report**. 7. Under Matching Rules: 1. Select Compare Contacts With **Contacts**. 2. Select the Matching Rule you created. 8. Optionally add additional conditions. 9. Click **Save**. 10. If you have Unlimited Edition or Salesforce.org Insights Platform Data Integrity, continue to the next section. For more information, including considerations for managing multiple Duplicate Rules, see [Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=duplicate_rules_map_of_reference.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Set Up NPSP Duplicate Rule Settings Set up duplicate rules to find duplicate contacts before any potential duplicates are created. Before using Contact Merge, complete this one-time setup task. If you want to use Duplicate Rules for finding duplicates it's necessary to set this up before any potential duplicates are created. If you have custom code with the AllowSave property set to a value, that value takes precedence over this setting. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **System Tools**, then **Error Notifications**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **Respect Duplicate Rule Settings**. 5. Click **Save**. ## Customize Contact Merge Columns Customize the columns that appear in the Contact Merge search results. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Go to **Object Manager** and enter Contact in the Quick Find box. 3. Click **Field Sets**. 4. Click on the **Contact Merge Found** field set. 5. Click and drag to modify the fields shown and the order shown. 6. Save your work. ## Set Up NPSP Potential Duplicates Pane on Contacts Page To quickly see if a contact has potential duplicates and to resolve those duplicates, set up the NPSP Potential Duplicates component on the Contacts page. 1. From a Contact page, click ![Setup Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon.png) and select **Edit Page**. 2. If the Potential Duplicates component is on the page layout, delete it. 3. From the Custom - Managed component list, drag the NPSP Potential Duplicates component to the page layout. 4. Clear the checkboxes if you don't want to show the number of potential duplicates in the page card or in the toast message. These options are selected by default 5. Save and activate your changes. # Configure EDA Configurations and customizations for EDA. - **[Configure EDA Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign record types to profiles, and page layouts to record types, so that users have access to the records that they need. - **[Enable EDA Apex Class Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_enable_eda_apex_class_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them. - **[Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access and manage EDA Settings, activate the latest EDA release, and find helpful resources. - **[Configure Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA Settings, configure the settings that control your primary account model, including the Account record types used for Administrative and Household Accounts. - **[Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about, manage, and update Account names in EDA. - **[Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage email and phone settings for Contacts in EDA. - **[Understand Addresses in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how addresses are tracked and stored in EDA. - **[Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage and edit addresses for Contacts and Accounts in EDA. - **[State and Country Picklists for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_state_and_country_picklists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how EDA uses State and Country Picklists. - **[Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA Settings, click Affiliations and configure the Contact fields mapped to Primary Affiliations. - **[Configure Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to track important relationships between people and learn about optional configuration settings. - **[Configure Leads Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Lead object for use in your educational institution. - **[Configure Error Handling in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up how EDA handles and tracks errors. - **[EDA and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how EDA is localized and how to manage translations. # Configure EDA Basics Assign record types to profiles, and page layouts to record types, so that users have access to the records that they need. - **[Assign Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Depending on the version that you started with, it's possible that some record type assignments are different in your org. Make sure that these record types are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. - **[Assign Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For objects with page layout assignments that vary by record type, and for custom objects, the default page layout assignments can require configuration. Make sure that these layouts are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. - **[Assign Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make the HEDA Account Compact Layout and the HEDA Contact Compact Layout the primary compact layouts for all your record types. By default, the HEDA compact layouts aren't assigned to EDA Account and Contact record types. - **[Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field. ## Assign Record Types to Profiles Depending on the version that you started with, it's possible that some record type assignments are different in your org. Make sure that these record types are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note  Most record types are assigned by default. The Incident record type for Case is an exception. Academic Certification Certificate, Degree (default), Diploma Account Academic Program, Administrative (default), Business Organization, Educational Institution, Household Account, Sports Organization, University Department Attribute Credential (default), Student Characteristic Case Master (default), Incident (not assigned) Faculty/Staff, Guardian, Student (default) Course Connection Default, Faculty, Student (default) Credential Badge, Certification (default), License Customize record type assignments or add assignments to other profiles as needed. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile to assign record types to. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click an object, for example, **Cases**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Select **Assigned Record Types** and **Default Record Type** for the profile. 7. **Save** your changes. ## Assign Page Layouts For objects with page layout assignments that vary by record type, and for custom objects, the default page layout assignments can require configuration. Make sure that these layouts are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. Academic Certification Record Types - Certificate, Degree, and Diploma: EDA Academic Academic Certification Layout Account Record Types - Academic Department, Academic Program, Administrative (default), Business Organization, Educational Institution, Sports Organization, University Department: HEDA Organization Layout - Household Account: HEDA Household Layout Attribute Record Types - Credential: EDA Credential Layout - Student Characteristic: EDA Student Characteristic Layout Case Record Types - Master: Case Layout - Incident: EDA Incident Layout Contact Record Types - Master: HEDA Contact Layout - Custom Contact record types: HEDA Contact Layout Course Connection Record Types - Default, Faculty, and Student: HEDA Course Enrollment Layout Credential Record Types - Badge, Certification, and License: EDA Credential Layout For more help, see [Assign Page Layouts to Profiles or Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). ## Assign Compact Layouts Make the HEDA Account Compact Layout and the HEDA Contact Compact Layout the primary compact layouts for all your record types. By default, the HEDA compact layouts aren't assigned to EDA Account and Contact record types. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 4. Click **Compact Layouts**. 5. Click **Compact Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. 7. From the **Primary Compact Layout** menu, select **HEDA Account Compact Layout**. 8. **Save** your changes. 9. Repeat these steps to assign the HEDA Contact Compact Layout to the Contact object. That's it! You're now all set up to start using EDA. ## Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field. For example, you might want to track Personal Email on the Preferred Email field, or Alternate Phone on the Preferred Email field. In those instances, first create a custom email or phone field. Then add the custom field's label as an option to the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone picklist. Other times, you might want to use an existing but not preconfigured field as a picklist value for Preferred Email or Preferred Phone (for example, Assistant Phone). In this instance, just add the existing field label as a picklist option. ### See Also: [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5) # Configure EDA Data Automation with TDTM Use Table-Driven Trigger Management to manage your code and automate complex processes. - **[Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them. - **[Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how EDA uses TDTM to manage your code in Salesforce and control how Apex behaves. - **[Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.manage_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Trigger Handler records are a fundamental part of Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). The Trigger Handler object is a Salesforce object like any other (Accounts, Contacts, etc.). Fields on the object manage the behavior of the triggers built within the TDTM framework. With just a few clicks, you can change the way your code behaves. - **[Prerequisites for Managing Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.prerequisites_for_managing_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can manage Trigger Handlers, make sure they are set up correctly in your org and are ready to use. - **[View Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.view_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Trigger Handlers are records just like any other, so you can create list views to filter and sort the records. Access the Trigger Handler records via the Trigger Handlers tab. - **[Edit a Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.edit_a_trigger_handler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An administrator can edit Trigger Handler records to deactivate them, change their load order, change which users will execute the Apex class, and so on. A common reason to edit a Trigger Handler is to disable it. - **[Create a New Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_trigger_handler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the steps to add a custom Apex class to the TDTM architecture. - **[Monitor TDTM Framework Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.monitor_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you've created custom triggers, stay current with product releases to identify any changes to our TDTM framework that might require changes to your custom triggers. - **[Add the User Managed Field to the Trigger Handler Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_add_user_managed_field_to_trigger_handler_pl.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article will walk you through adding the User Managed field to the Trigger Handler Page Layout in Education Data Architecture (EDA). - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To successfully run custom code, a large data import, or an external integration, you sometimes need to disable TDTM Trigger Handlers. - **[Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to create Apex classes that use the TDTM design for EDA. # Configure Education Flows Update flow elements to create and assign cases in your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Failed Course Offering Participant](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_for_failed_course_offering_participant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically assign an academic support team to a learner if they fail a course. - **[EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_for_learner_program_major_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically assign an academic advisor to learners when they declare a major field of study. - **[EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_cloud_assign_case_team_members_for_academic_term_gpa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically assign an academic probation advisor to learners whose GPA drops to a specified level. - **[EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_to_student_athlete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically assign an academic support team to student athletes. - **[EDU Cloud: Assign Case Teams for Veterans and International Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_teams_for_veterans_and_international_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically assign an academic support team to students who are military veterans or international students. - **[EDU Cloud: Close Case for Canceled or Denied Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_cloud_close_case_for_canceled_or_denied_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically close an open application case when the application is canceled or denied. - **[EDU Cloud: Close Related Cases for Term](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_cloud_close_related_cases_for_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically close an open application case for a learner when they enroll in an academic term. - **[EDU Cloud: Create Grade Alert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_cloud_create_grade_alert.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically create a record alert when a learner's grade drops below a C, and assign an advisor if the learner has a failing grade. - **[EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_related_case_for_new_individual_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically create a case when a person submits a new application. # Configure Einstein for Nonprofits Configure model training and page layout to use Einstein for Nonprofits. ## Enable Model Training Begin here to train your model: 1. Click **Setup** and search for APEX jobs. - TGT\_RecurringDonor\_BATCH - TGT\_RecurringDonorFinish\_BATCH - TGT\_TopDonor\_BATCH - TGT\_TopDonorFinish\_BATCH 2. Check the jobs to make sure they are in **Completed** status prior to configuring Backup Models or Einstein Prediction Builder. These jobs are queued and might take some time to complete depending on other processes that are running in your org at that time. ## Add Lightning Web Components to Contact Page Layout Add the Giving History and Predictive Metrics tiles to the Contact card page layout by using Lightning Web Components (LWC). To add LWCs to a Contact page: 1. Click **Setup** gear icon from a Contact card, and then click **Edit Page**. The Lightning App Builder opens. 2. Scroll down to **Custom-Managed** under **Components** in the left navigation bar. 3. Drag either the **Giving History** or **Predictive Metrics** custom LWCs to the appropriate part of the Contact page, preferably the column on the right. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Click **Activate** on the **Page Saved** modal. 6. On the **Activation: Contact Record** page, select **Assign as Org Default**. 7. Select a form factor for your org default page. 8. Click **Save**. # Configure Email Notifications and Email Templates Automatically send reminder, notification, and thank you emails to volunteers, using email templates together with workflow rules, which define rules like "send a reminder email to everyone signed up for a shift four days before the shift." ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce limits the number of emails your organization can send per day. If your email volume approaches more than 1,000 per day, consider using a separate email automation service that integrates with Salesforce. - **[Review the Out-of-the-Box Email Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Decide which email templates to keep active and which ones to turn off. You can customize any out-of-the-box template or create your own. - **[Configure Email Templates for Brand Consistency](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure email templates so that they deliver a consistent, professional look and feel to your volunteers' inboxes. Check things like subject lines, letterhead, merge fields, and overall formatting. Each template comes in both an HTML format and a plain text format; remember to edit both versions. - **[Clone and Configure the Reminder Email Workflow Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Having Volunteers for Salesforce automatically email volunteers about upcoming shifts is a huge time-saving feature. A workflow rule controls how far in advance to send reminder emails. Clone the sample workflow rule provided in Volunteers for Salesforce and either use it as is or adjust the lead time as needed. - **[Clone and Configure the Volunteer Job Signup Workflow Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Job Signup Workflow Rule automatically sends an email to a person when they sign up for a job or shift using your website. - **[Create an Organization-Wide From Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control how Volunteers for Salesforce displays the "from" name and email address of the sender of automated volunteer emails. Your organization may want to show a generic name, such as Volunteer Coordinator, or you may want to include your coordinator's real name and job title. The email address can be for a specific person or for an inbox that multiple staff monitor and respond to. - **[Deactivate Website-Specific Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you don't intend to integrate Volunteers for Salesforce with your website, deactivate the Volunteer Job Signup, Volunteer Signup - Contact, and Volunteer Signup - Lead workflow rules. ## Review the Out-of-the-Box Email Templates Decide which email templates to keep active and which ones to turn off. You can customize any out-of-the-box template or create your own. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, select **Email Templates**, then look in the Volunteers Email Templates folder. | Template | Description | Used for Website Integration | | --- | --- | --- | | Volunteer Hours Reminder Email | Used with the time-based workflow rule, reminds all volunteers about their upcoming shift. Compared with Volunteer Shift Reminder, this is a more versatile template that can include Volunteer Hours, Job, and Contact information. |   | | Volunteer Job Reminder | Reminds all volunteers about their upcoming job (for jobs without shifts). |   | | Volunteer Job Reminder (using letterhead) | Using the letterhead format, reminds all volunteers about their upcoming job (for jobs without shifts). |   | | Volunteer Job Signup Notification | Notifies the volunteer coordinator about a new volunteer signup for a specific job or shift on a Sites page. | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Volunteer Job Signup Thank You | Thanks an individual volunteer who has signed up for a specific job or shift on a Sites page. | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Volunteer Shift Reminder | Used with the time-based workflow rule, reminds all volunteers about their upcoming shift. Compared with Volunteer Hours Reminder Email, this is a more limited template that can include Shift information only. |   | | Volunteer Shift Reminder (using letterhead) | Using the letterhead format, reminds all volunteers about their upcoming shift. |   | | Volunteer Signup Notification | Notifies the volunteer coordinator about a new volunteer signup on the general Volunteer Signup Sites page. | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Volunteer Signup Thank You | Acknowledges the volunteer for signing up on the general Volunteer Signup Sites page. | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | | Volunteers Personal Site Contact Lookup | Provides the URL for accessing a volunteer's Personal Site page. | ![Checkmark](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/checkmark_16x16.png) | ## Configure Email Templates for Brand Consistency Configure email templates so that they deliver a consistent, professional look and feel to your volunteers' inboxes. Check things like subject lines, letterhead, merge fields, and overall formatting. Each template comes in both an HTML format and a plain text format; remember to edit both versions. For more information about editing the letterheads for your HTML email templates, see [Using Letterheads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_brandtemplates.htm) in the Salesforce Help. 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Templates**. 2. Select the **Volunteers Email Templates** folder. 3. Click the name of an email template to preview the email contents. For example, here's an HTML preview of the Volunteer Job Reminder email. ![HTML preview of the Volunteer Job Reminder email](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/job_reminder_email_html_preview.png) 4. Click either **Edit HTML Version** or **Edit Text Version**. Be sure to make your edits to both the HTML and text versions. 5. Remember to **Save** your changes. If you change a template or create a new one, remember to refresh the Mass Email Volunteers page (available from the Volunteer Job page) so that it shows the latest templates. ## Clone and Configure the Reminder Email Workflow Rule Having Volunteers for Salesforce automatically email volunteers about upcoming shifts is a huge time-saving feature. A workflow rule controls how far in advance to send reminder emails. Clone the sample workflow rule provided in Volunteers for Salesforce and either use it as is or adjust the lead time as needed. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Click **Volunteers Hours Reminder Email**. 3. Click **Clone**. You're making a copy of this sample workflow rule because you can't directly edit this part of the V4S package. The existing rule should be (and should remain) inactive. 4. Edit the Rule Name to give it a unique name. For example, My Volunteering Reminder Email. 5. Edit the Description to delete the placeholder text, Template to Clone. 6. Click **Save & Next**. 7. In the Time-Dependent Workflow Actions section, click **Add Time Trigger**. ![Time trigger settings for the reminder email workflow rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/reminder_email_workflow_rule_time_trigger.png) 8. Decide how far in advance of the volunteer shift you want the reminder email sent, in days or hours. For example, 3 Days. Enter those values and select **Volunteer Hours: Planned Start Date & Time**. 9. **Save** your changes. 10. Back in the Time-Dependent Workflow Actions section, click **Add Workflow Action**, then click **Select Existing Action**. ![Select Existing Action in Add Workflow Action menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/add_workflow_action_select_existing_action.png) 11. For Choose Action Type, select **Email Alert**. 12. Add **Email Alert: Volunteer Shift Reminder Email Alert** to Selected Actions. 13. **Save** your changes. 14. Click **Done**. 15. Back on your workflow rule's detail page, click **Activate**. 16. If you get a message that the Default Workflow User must be set first: 1. Click **OK** to continue to the Workflow & Approval Settings page. 2. Choose a Default Workflow User, typically yourself or another Salesforce admin user. 3. **Save** your changes. 17. Back on your workflow rule's detail page, verify that it's now Active. ![Your workflow rule confirmed active](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/reminder_email_workflow_rule_confirmed_active.png) ## Clone and Configure the Volunteer Job Signup Workflow Rule The Volunteer Job Signup Workflow Rule automatically sends an email to a person when they sign up for a job or shift using your website. This workflow rule triggers V4S to send the email only when the Volunteer Status is set to Web Signup—the default status assigned to Contacts who sign up through the website. But, what if you want to use a different status? Or more than one status? You can easily change what triggers this email by cloning the workflow rule and changing the rule criteria. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Click **Volunteer Job Signup**. 3. Click **Clone**. You’re making a copy of this sample workflow rule because you can’t directly edit this part of the V4S package. 4. Edit the Rule Name to give it a unique name. For example, My Volunteer Job Signup Thank You Email. 5. Edit the Description to make it unique to this workflow rule. 6. In the Rule Criteria section, change the criteria to include the Status (or Statuses) you want to trigger the Thank You sign up email. For example, if you want the email to be sent any time a Contact’s Volunteer Status changes to Confirmed, you would enter Volunteer Hours: Status equals Confirmed. ![Setting the Rule Criteria for the Volunteer Job Signup workflow rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/thank_you_email_workflow_rule.png) 7. Click **Save & Next**. Now you’ll create the email alerts. 8. From the **Add Workflow Action** drop-down, select New Email Alert. 9. Enter a unique description for the template. For our example, we might enter Volunteer Confirmed Thank You Email Alert. The **Unique Name** field will automatically populate based on the description you enter. 10. Select the Volunteer Job Signup Thank You template or a custom one you created. 11. From the **Recipient Type** drop-down, select Related Contact, then move Related Contact: Contact from the Available list to the Selected Recipients list. ![Defining the Workflow Rule email alert as described in the previous steps.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/thank_you_email_workflow_email_alert.png) 12. Click **Save & New**. 13. If you also want to send an email notification to the person responsible for managing volunteers in your org, set up another email alert as follows. 1. Enter a unique description, such as Volunteer Confirmed Notification Email Alert. 2. Select the Volunteer Job Signup Notification email template or a custom one that you created. 3. Select a recipient. To use the same functionality as the original workflow that you cloned, select Owner as the **Recipient Type**, then move Contact Owner from the Available list to the Selected Recipients list. 14. Click **Save**, then click **Done**. 15. Back on the Workflow Rule Detail, click **Activate**. ![The Workflow Rule created using the steps in this document, with the Activate button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/thank_you_email_workflow_activate.png) Now, when a Contact’s Volunteer Hours: Status changes to Confirmed, Volunteers for Salesforce sends a Thank You email to the Contact and sends a notification email to the Contact Owner. ## Create an Organization-Wide From Address Control how Volunteers for Salesforce displays the "from" name and email address of the sender of automated volunteer emails. Your organization may want to show a generic name, such as Volunteer Coordinator, or you may want to include your coordinator's real name and job title. The email address can be for a specific person or for an inbox that multiple staff monitor and respond to. If you don't specify an Organization-Wide Address, because of how workflow rules are set up behind the scenes, automated emails can inadvertently show a sender name or email address that you don't want to expose publicly. 1. From Setup, enter Organization-Wide Addresses in the Quick Find box, then select **Organization-Wide Addresses**. 2. Click **Add**. 3. Give the address a Display Name (such as Volunteer Coordinator) and a valid email address. 4. Select **Allow All Profiles to Use this From Address**. 5. **Save** your changes. Salesforce sends a validation email to the specified address. 6. Click the validation link in the email to enable the address as the organization-wide From address. ## Deactivate Website-Specific Workflow Rules If you don't intend to integrate Volunteers for Salesforce with your website, deactivate the Volunteer Job Signup, Volunteer Signup - Contact, and Volunteer Signup - Lead workflow rules. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Next to Volunteer Job Signup, click **Deactivate**. 3. Repeat these steps for the Volunteer Signup - Contact and Volunteer Signup - Lead workflow rules. # Configure Email Notifications for Website Integration Set up default values for email senders and recipients, and review when to deactivate the Volunteer Signup - Contact workflow rule. - **[Configure the From Address for Thank You Emails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email_notifs_webs_integ.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've specified the Organization-Wide Address, configure email alerts to use this address for thank you emails. Email alerts are the emails that workflow rules send. - **[Configure the Recipients of Signup Notification Emails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email_notifs_webs_integ.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a volunteer signs up on your website, Volunteers for Salesforce associates the signup with a Contact or a Lead (depending on which signup form you're using and your Contact matching rules). The resulting email notification goes to the owner of the Contact or Lead. Organizations often prefer to have signup notifications sent to the volunteer coordinator instead. Make this change in Email Alerts. - **[Deactivate the Workflow Rule for Volunteer Signup—Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email_notifs_webs_integ.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're using the VolunteersSignupFS version of the Volunteer Signup page (recommended), skip this task. If you're not using VolunteersSignupFS, it's safe—and recommended—to deactivate the workflow rule called Volunteer Signup - Contact. Use the Volunteer Job Signup workflow rule instead, because it uses an email template that includes Job and Shift details. Volunteer Signup - Contact uses an email template that can't pull in those details, which means a less descriptive thank you for volunteers. ## Configure the From Address for Thank You Emails After you've specified the Organization-Wide Address, configure email alerts to use this address for thank you emails. Email alerts are the emails that workflow rules send. 1. From Setup, enter Email Alerts in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Alerts**. 2. Look for the Volunteer-related email alerts. 3. Click **Edit** next to the first thank you email alert. ![List of Volunteers email alerts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_alerts.png) 4. Set the From Email Address to the name and address that you added as the Organization-Wide Address. 5. **Save** your changes. 6. Repeat this configuration for the other thank you email alerts that you intend to use. ## Configure the Recipients of Signup Notification Emails When a volunteer signs up on your website, Volunteers for Salesforce associates the signup with a Contact or a Lead (depending on which signup form you're using and your Contact matching rules). The resulting email notification goes to the owner of the Contact or Lead. Organizations often prefer to have signup notifications sent to the volunteer coordinator instead. Make this change in Email Alerts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you haven't already created a user for your volunteer coordinator, do that first so that you can designate that user as the recipient. 1. From Setup, enter Email Alerts in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Alerts**. 2. Next to each of the Signup Notification Email Alerts, click **Edit**. ![Email Alerts with circles around the edit links for the signup notification email alerts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_alerts_signup_notif.png) 3. Remove the default owner and add your volunteer coordinator to Selected Recipients. 4. **Save** your changes. If you don't change the default recipient, the signup notification goes to the user who owns the existing Contact record, or it goes to the Volunteers Site Guest User if there's no existing Contact. ## Deactivate the Workflow Rule for Volunteer Signup—Contact If you're using the VolunteersSignupFS version of the Volunteer Signup page (recommended), skip this task. If you're not using VolunteersSignupFS, it's safe—and recommended—to deactivate the workflow rule called Volunteer Signup - Contact. Use the Volunteer Job Signup workflow rule instead, because it uses an email template that includes Job and Shift details. Volunteer Signup - Contact uses an email template that can't pull in those details, which means a less descriptive thank you for volunteers. If you leave both workflow rules active, volunteers are sent multiple thank you emails for the same signup. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Next to Volunteer Signup - Contact, click **Deactivate**. # Configure Engagement Plans Find out more about configuring engagement plans. - **[About Engagement Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Engagement Plans let you create a set of tasks (literally a "plan") that helps you engage with your constituents. Use Engagement Plans for major gifts, volunteer management, grant-making, client management, sponsor management, and more. - **[Set Tab Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For every profile that should have access to Engagement Plans, set the Engagement Plan Templates tab settings. - **[Set Object and Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Engagement Plans, you need to set object and field security. - **[Edit Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to edit page layouts. - **[Override Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can override the New, Clone, and Edit buttons to point them to the Manage Template page, where you can edit the Engagement Plan Template and Tasks all in one place. - **[Allow Activities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're planning to use Engagement Plans with a custom object such as Recurring Donations, you need to select Allow Activities. - **[(Optional) Give Users Access to the EP\_ManageEPTemplate Visualforce Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** System Administrators have access to the EP\_ManageEPTemplate Visualforce page by default, but other profiles don't. If you want users with other profiles to manage Engagement Plans, you must give them access to the Visualforce page. - **[(Optional) Enable Engagement Plans for Custom Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, you can associate Engagement Plans with Contact, Account, Cases, Opportunity, Campaign, and Recurring Donation records. But you can add an Engagement Plan to any object. Simply add a lookup field on the Engagement Plan object. - **[(Optional) Create a Tab for the Engagement Plan Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create a custom tab for Engagement Plans to help users easily access them. Be sure to set the tab to Default On only for profiles that work with Engagement Plans. Users with access to the Engagement Plan tab will also be able to search for Engagement Plans using the Engagement Plan Number. - **[(Optional) Add the Engagement Plan Templates Tab to an App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP comes with a Tab for Engagement Plan Templates. To make it easy for users to manage Engagement Plan Templates, you can add the Engagement Plan Templates tab to an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack. ## About Engagement Plans NPSP Engagement Plans let you create a set of tasks (literally a "plan") that helps you engage with your constituents. Use Engagement Plans for major gifts, volunteer management, grant-making, client management, sponsor management, and more. NPSP Engagement Plans uses the following objects: - Engagement Plan Template (custom object): Defines the process and associated set of tasks required to complete an Engagement Plan. - Engagement Plan (custom object): A set of tasks that helps you engage with your constituents. - Engagement Plan Task (custom object): Defines the details of each task that is created when applying an Engagement Plan to a record. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.81 (9/14/2016). ## Set Tab Visibility For every profile that should have access to Engagement Plans, set the Engagement Plan Templates tab settings. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the Profile you want to set security for. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. In the Custom Tab Settings section next to Engagement Plan Templates, select **Default On** to include the tab in your list of tabs or **Default Off** to make the tab accessible in App Launcher. 6. Click **Save**. ## Set Object and Field-Level Security To use Engagement Plans, you need to set object and field security. On the Engagement Plans, Engagement Plan Tasks, and Engagement Plan Templates objects: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile you want to set security for. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Edit the profiles for all users who will work with Engagement Plans to include the following object settings for the Engagement Plans, Engagement Plan Tasks, and Engagement Plan Templates objects, unless otherwise noted: - Set object permissions to **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. This gives all users with this profile full access to use Engagement Plans. Depending on the profile, you may want to grant different access. - For the System Administrator profile only, set object permissions to **Modify All Records** and **View All Records**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. In the Field Level Security section, click **View** next to Engagement Plans and select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for each field. 7. Click **Back to Profile**. 8. In the Field Level Security section, click **View** next to Engagement Plan Tasks and select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for each field. 9. Click **Back to Profile**. 10. In the Field Level Security section, click **View** next to Engagement Plan Templates and select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for each field. 11. Click **Back to Profile**. 12. In the Field Level Security section, click **View** next to Task and select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for these fields: - Engagement Plan - Engagement Plan Task - Type 13. Click **Save**. ## Edit Page Layouts Follow these steps to edit page layouts. Add the following fields to the Task page layout: - Engagement Plan - Engagement Plan Task - Type To edit the Task page layout: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Task**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Task Layout**. 5. Drag that Engagement Plan, Engagement Plan Task, and Type fields onto the page layout. ![The Task page layout, with the Type, Engagement Plan, and Engagement Plan Task fields highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ep_fields_task_pl.png) 6. Click **Save**. On Contacts, Cases, Accounts, Campaigns, Opportunities, and Recurring Donations, update the relevant page layouts to include the Engagement Plans related list. We recommend that you add the following fields as columns in each related list: - Engagement Plan Number - Engagement Plan Template - Status - Total EP Tasks - Completed Tasks - Created Date ![On the Contact page layout, the Engagement Plan related list is highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ep_related_list.png) ## Override Buttons You can override the New, Clone, and Edit buttons to point them to the Manage Template page, where you can edit the Engagement Plan Template and Tasks all in one place. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Engagement Plan Template**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. In the row for the Edit button, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Choose **Visualforce Page**, then select **EP\_ManageEPTemplate \[npsp\_\_EP\_ManageEPTemplate\]**. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for the New and Clone buttons. These button overrides replace the Manage Template button, so we recommend removing it from the page layout. To remove the Manage Template button from the Engagement Plan Template page layout: 1. Back on the Engagement Plan Template object in the Object Manager, click **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Engagement Plan Template Layout**. 3. Drag the Manage Template button from the Custom Buttons area back to the panel at the top of the page. 4. Click **Save**. ## Allow Activities If you're planning to use Engagement Plans with a custom object such as Recurring Donations, you need to select Allow Activities. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Recurring Donations**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Optional Features section, select **Allow Activities**. 5. Click **Save**. ## (Optional) Give Users Access to the EP\_ManageEPTemplate Visualforce Page System Administrators have access to the EP\_ManageEPTemplate Visualforce page by default, but other profiles don't. If you want users with other profiles to manage Engagement Plans, you must give them access to the Visualforce page. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click a Profile to edit. 3. Click **Enabled Visualforce Page Access**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Move npsp.EP\_ManageEPTemplate into the Enabled Visualforce Pages list. 6. Click **Save**. ## (Optional) Enable Engagement Plans for Custom Objects By default, you can associate Engagement Plans with Contact, Account, Cases, Opportunity, Campaign, and Recurring Donation records. But you can add an Engagement Plan to any object. Simply add a lookup field on the Engagement Plan object. When you add an Engagement Plan to an object, make sure [Allow Activities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring engagement plans.") is selected and available on the object or you’ll get an error. Engagement Plans aren’t supported on the User object because the User object doesn’t have access to Activities. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Engagement Plan**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Select the **Lookup Relationship** radio button and click **Next**. 6. Choose the object you want to associate Engagement Plans with and click **Next**. 7. Fill in the required fields. 8. Click **Save**. For more information on creating custom fields, see [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5). ## (Optional) Create a Tab for the Engagement Plan Object You can create a custom tab for Engagement Plans to help users easily access them. Be sure to set the tab to Default On only for profiles that work with Engagement Plans. Users with access to the Engagement Plan tab will also be able to search for Engagement Plans using the Engagement Plan Number. 1. From Setup, enter Tabs in the Quick Find box, then click **Tabs**. 2. Under Custom Object Tabs, click **New**. 3. Select **Engagement Plan** for the Object. 4. Choose a Tab Style. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Choose the appropriate Tab Visibility for each profile, then click **Next**. 7. Add the tab to the Nonprofit Success Pack app. 8. Click **Save**. ## (Optional) Add the Engagement Plan Templates Tab to an App NPSP comes with a Tab for Engagement Plan Templates. To make it easy for users to manage Engagement Plan Templates, you can add the Engagement Plan Templates tab to an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack. 1. From Setup, enter App Manager in the Quick Find box, then click **App Manager**. 2. In the row for the app you’d like to add the tab to, click ![More actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/more_actions_1.png), then click **Edit**. 3. In the App Settings, click **Navigation Items**. 4. Find the Engagement Plan Templates tab and move it to the Selected Items. 5. Click **Save**. # Configure Error Handling In Nonprofit Success Pack, when you enable error handling, errors are centrally trapped, collected, and stored in a single location based on your preferences. To configure error handling: 1. From the **NPSP Settings** tab, click **System Tools** | **Error Notifications**. 2. Click **Edit**. ![Error Notifications screen](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/configure_err_notifications.jpg) 3. If you'd like to enable error handling, select **Store Errors**. 4. Make other selections as appropriate for your org. 5. Click **Save**. # Configure Error Handling in EDA Set up how EDA handles and tracks errors. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Certain Education Data Architecture jobs, such as most Apex jobs, run asynchronously in the background so they don't impact critical processes. - **[Error Handling Configuration Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure asynchronous error handling using these settings from the Errors page in EDA Settings. - **[Configure Error Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To access errors stored after enabling the Store Errors setting, add the Error custom object to your Education Data Architecture app. ## Overview Certain Education Data Architecture jobs, such as most Apex jobs, run asynchronously in the background so they don't impact critical processes. Education Data Architecture includes error handling for these types of jobs, but the results aren't stored, by default. If you want to store the results of asynchronous jobs so you can view them at a time that's convenient for you, in EDA Settings, update the Error Handling setting. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note For an example of the types of jobs you can monitor this way, go to the Scheduled Jobs tab in Setup and look for jobs that are Submitted By Education Data Architecture. Education Data Architecture doesn't include error handling for code that runs synchronously because it can cause these types of problems: - Masking errors for other applications: If the error handler catches the exception, the transaction succeeds from a platform perspective. But if the application doesn't know that the transaction failed, it won't retry it or take further action. - Losing your save points: All of EDA's logic gets routed through the Trigger Handler dispatcher class. The run method is static, however a save point isn't static. This could mean that Trigger Handler runs get lost. - Using up your DML limits: Every time you set up a save point, you consume a DML statement. Learn about Apex limits in [Execution Governors and Limits](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.210.0.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_gov_limits.htm) in the Apex Developer Guide. We recommend that you avoid generic error handling for synchronous jobs. ## Error Handling Configuration Options Configure asynchronous error handling using these settings from the Errors page in EDA Settings. Store Errors Select to store errors on the Error object. To access stored errors, see [Configure Error Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To access errors stored after enabling the Store Errors setting, add the Error custom object to your Education Data Architecture app."). Error Notifications Select to post notifications to all System Administrators, a single user, or a Chatter Group when errors occur. Error Handling Select to allow error handling for asynchronous jobs, making it easier to see when scheduled jobs fail. Debug Logging Select to enable Salesforce support to view debug statements for managed packages. ## Configure Error Tracking To access errors stored after enabling the Store Errors setting, add the Error custom object to your Education Data Architecture app. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Tabs in the quick find box, then select **Tabs**. 3. In the Custom Object Tabs section, click **New**. 4. Select Error as the Object, choose a tab style, and then click **Next**. 5. Set the tab visibility to Default On for your System Administrator profiles and Default Off for all other profiles. Then click **Next**. 6. Add the tab to the Education Data Architecture app. Deselect the Include Tab checkbox to clear any existing selections, then select the checkbox just for the Education Data Architecture app. 7. Save your changes. Now the Education Data Architecture app includes an Errors tab that you can use to review errors. # Configure Error Handling in EDA Set up how EDA handles and tracks errors. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Certain K-12 Architecture Kit jobs, such as most Apex jobs, run asynchronously in the background so they don't impact critical processes. - **[Error Handling Configuration Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure asynchronous error handling using these settings from the Errors page in EDA Settings. - **[Configure Error Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To access errors stored after enabling the Store Errors setting, add the Error custom object to your Education Data Architecture app. ## Overview Certain K-12 Architecture Kit jobs, such as most Apex jobs, run asynchronously in the background so they don't impact critical processes. K-12 Architecture Kit includes error handling for these types of jobs, but the results aren't stored, by default. If you want to store the results of asynchronous jobs so you can view them at a time that's convenient for you, in EDA Settings, update the Error Handling setting. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note For an example of the types of jobs you can monitor this way, go to the Scheduled Jobs tab in Setup and look for jobs that are Submitted By K-12 Architecture Kit. K-12 Architecture Kit doesn't include error handling for code that runs synchronously because it can cause these types of problems: - Masking errors for other applications: If the error handler catches the exception, the transaction succeeds from a platform perspective. But if the application doesn't know that the transaction failed, it won't retry it or take further action. - Losing your save points: All of EDA's logic gets routed through the Trigger Handler dispatcher class. The run method is static, however a save point isn't static. This could mean that Trigger Handler runs get lost. - Using up your DML limits: Every time you set up a save point, you consume a DML statement. Learn about Apex limits in [Execution Governors and Limits](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.210.0.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_gov_limits.htm) in the Apex Developer Guide. We recommend that you avoid generic error handling for synchronous jobs. ## Error Handling Configuration Options Configure asynchronous error handling using these settings from the Errors page in EDA Settings. Store Errors Select to store errors on the Error object. To access stored errors, see [Configure Error Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To access errors stored after enabling the Store Errors setting, add the Error custom object to your Education Data Architecture app."). Error Notifications Select to post notifications to all System Administrators, a single user, or a Chatter Group when errors occur. Error Handling Select to allow error handling for asynchronous jobs, making it easier to see when scheduled jobs fail. Debug Logging Select to enable Salesforce support to view debug statements for managed packages. ## Configure Error Tracking To access errors stored after enabling the Store Errors setting, add the Error custom object to your Education Data Architecture app. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Tabs in the quick find box, then select **Tabs**. 3. In the Custom Object Tabs section, click **New**. 4. Select Error as the Object, choose a tab style, and then click **Next**. 5. Set the tab visibility to Default On for your System Administrator profiles and Default Off for all other profiles. Then click **Next**. 6. Add the tab to the Education Data Architecture app. Deselect the Include Tab checkbox to clear any existing selections, then select the checkbox just for the Education Data Architecture app. 7. Save your changes. Now the Education Data Architecture app includes an Errors tab that you can use to review errors. # Configure Fields in Volunteers for Salesforce Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization. - **[Configure Fields on the Volunteers Wizard Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteers Wizard displays a group of Campaign fields including Status, Type, and Start and End Dates. If you want users to fill out different standard or custom fields from the Campaign object, edit the `VolunteersWizardFS` field set that controls which fields the wizard displays. - **[Configure Fields on the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page displays a group of Volunteer Hours fields including Hours Worked, Number of Volunteers, and Start Date. To let users fill out different standard or custom fields from the Volunteer Hours object, edit the `MassEditVolunteerHours` field set that controls which fields the page displays. - **[Configure Fields on the Find Volunteers Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Find Volunteers page displays certain Contact fields in two places: the Criteria section, and in the table of found volunteers. To change what options users have in the Criteria section so they can search different standard or custom fields from the Contact object, edit the `VolunteersFindCriteriaFS` field set. To change the fields that users see in search results, edit the `VolunteersFindFS` field set. ## Configure Fields on the Volunteers Wizard Page The Volunteers Wizard displays a group of Campaign fields including Status, Type, and Start and End Dates. If you want users to fill out different standard or custom fields from the Campaign object, edit the `VolunteersWizardFS` field set that controls which fields the wizard displays. ![Fields in the Volunteers Wizard controlled by the VolunteersWizardFS field set](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteers_wizard_fields_in_field_set.png) 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Campaign**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **VolunteersWizardFS**. 6. Review the field set contents and update fields as needed. - Add fields by dragging and dropping them into the In the Field Set box. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The Volunteers Wizard page can display only Campaign fields. Add fields from that object only, even though the field set editor lets you drag fields from related objects. - Remove fields by hovering over the field and clicking the Delete icon. - Reorder fields by dragging and dropping. - Make fields required by hovering over the field and clicking the Tools icon. 7. **Save** your changes. If you want to verify your changes, simply click the Volunteers Wizard tab in Volunteers for Salesforce. ## Configure Fields on the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours Page The Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page displays a group of Volunteer Hours fields including Hours Worked, Number of Volunteers, and Start Date. To let users fill out different standard or custom fields from the Volunteer Hours object, edit the `MassEditVolunteerHours` field set that controls which fields the page displays. ![Fields on the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page controlled by the MassEditVolunteerHours field set](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_edit_vols_fields_in_field_set.png) 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Volunteer Hours**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **MassEditVolunteerHours**. 6. Review the field set contents and update fields as needed. - Add fields by dragging and dropping them into the In the Field Set box. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page can display only Volunteer Hours fields. Add fields from that object only, even though the field set editor lets you drag fields from related objects. - Remove fields by hovering over the field and clicking the Delete icon. - Reorder fields by dragging and dropping. - Make fields required by hovering over the field and clicking the Tools icon. 7. **Save** your changes. If you want to verify your changes, navigate to the Volunteer Hours related list on a Volunteer Job or Volunteer Shift, then click **Mass Edit Volunteer Hours**. ## Configure Fields on the Find Volunteers Page The Find Volunteers page displays certain Contact fields in two places: the Criteria section, and in the table of found volunteers. To change what options users have in the Criteria section so they can search different standard or custom fields from the Contact object, edit the `VolunteersFindCriteriaFS` field set. To change the fields that users see in search results, edit the `VolunteersFindFS` field set. Search criteria fields (1) are determined by the `VolunteersFindCriteriaFS` field set. Search results fields (2) are determined by the `VolunteersFindFS` field set. ![Search criteria fields and search result fields are determined by the VolunteersFindCriteriaFS and VolunteersFindFS field sets, respectively](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/find_volunteers_field_sets_annotated.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're looking at the Find Volunteers page and the picklist fields are blank, it's likely that picklist values aren't specified for Contact record types. To configure those picklists, from Setup, go to the Record Types section for Contact, and edit the Picklists Available for Editing for all Contact record types. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **VolunteersFindCriteriaFS**. 6. Review the field set contents and update fields as needed. - Add fields by dragging and dropping them into the In the Field Set box. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The Find Volunteers page can display only Contact fields. Add fields from that object only, even though the field set editor lets you drag fields from related objects. - Remove fields by hovering over the field and clicking the Delete icon. - Reorder fields by dragging and dropping. - Make fields required by hovering over the field and clicking the Tools icon. 7. **Save** your changes. 8. Repeat these steps for the `VolunteersFindFS` field set to change which fields are displayed in search results. # Configure Flows for Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management in Education The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management subagent uses flows to create research request cases and research profiles. Modify the existing flows based on your organization’s needs and specific business logic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Manage Flow
1. [Define a case record type specifically for philanthropic research requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to distinguish it from other types of cases. Make sure that the record type is available to the appropriate profiles. 2. Modify the Create Case flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Create Case**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Replace the Create Case Record element with a Decision element. The Decision element determines whether a case record matches the philanthropic research request type. 5. In the Yes path, add a Create Records element, and set the field value for contact ID. Set additional values as needed, such as description, record type ID, or subject. To locate the record type ID, see [Find the Salesforce ID of a Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000384487&type=1&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To avoid issues when you deploy the flow from a sandbox org production, make sure that the record ID is the same in both orgs. 6. In the No (Default) path, add a Create Records element to create a default record type. 7. Save and activate the flow. 3. Modify the Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. For the Get Case element, add a condition where the Record Type ID equals the ID of the philanthropic research request case record type. 5. (Optional) For the Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile element, set the field values for research profile phase and research profile type to your own picklist values. 6. Save and activate the flow. # Configure Flows for Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management in Nonprofit The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management subagent uses flows to create research request cases and research profiles. Modify the existing flows based on your organization’s needs and specific business logic. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group

AND

Manage Flow
1. [Define a case record type specifically for philanthropic research requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to distinguish it from other types of cases. Make sure that the record type is available to the appropriate profiles. 2. Modify the Create Case flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Create Case**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Replace the Create Case Record element with a Decision element. The Decision element determines whether a case record matches the philanthropic research request type. 5. In the Yes path, add a Create Records element, and set the field value for contact ID. Set additional values as needed, such as description, record type ID, or subject. To locate the record type ID, see [Find the Salesforce ID of a Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000384487&type=1&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To avoid issues when you deploy the flow from a sandbox org production, make sure that the record ID is the same in both orgs. 6. In the No (Default) path, add a Create Records element to create a default record type. 7. Save and activate the flow. 3. Modify the Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. For the Get Case element, add a condition where the Record Type ID equals the ID of the philanthropic research request case record type. 5. (Optional) For the Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile element, set the field values for research profile phase and research profile type to your own picklist values. 6. Save and activate the flow. # Configure Fundraising Rollup and Summary Calculations in Education Set up Fundraising with Data Processing Engine to calculate Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) scores. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_start_configure_new_data_processing_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Actionable Lists and Fundraising rollups and summaries with Data Pipelines and Data Processing Engine. - **[Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use a schedule-triggered flow to automatically receive updates to your fundraising rollup calculations. - **[Configure RFM Scoring in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_rfm_scoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Admins can set up RFM scoring in the Fundraising settings. These settings are used by the RFM Score Calculation data processing engine definition to create the scores. You can run this data processing job manually from Settings, but the recommended method is to run the job on a schedule. - **[Schedule RFM Score Calculation in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_schedule_triggered_flow_to_run_dpe_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automate the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) score calculation DPE jobs by creating a flow that runs based on a specified date, time, and frequency. - **[Check the RFM Score Calculation Process in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_check_the_rfm_score_calculation_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Monitor Workflow Services to view the statuses of RFM score calculation jobs. # Configure Fundraising Rollup and Summary Calculations in Nonprofit Set up Fundraising with Data Processing Engine to calculate Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) scores. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_start_configure_new_data_processing_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Actionable Lists and Fundraising rollups and summaries with Data Pipelines and Data Processing Engine. - **[Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use a schedule-triggered flow to automatically receive updates to your fundraising rollup calculations. - **[Configure RFM Scoring in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_rfm_scoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce Admins can set up RFM scoring in the Fundraising settings. These settings are used by the RFM Score Calculation data processing engine definition to create the scores. You can run this data processing job manually from Settings, but the recommended method is to run the job on a schedule. - **[Schedule RFM Score Calculation in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_schedule_triggered_flow_to_run_dpe_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automate the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) score calculation DPE jobs by creating a flow that runs based on a specified date, time, and frequency. - **[Check the RFM Score Calculation Process in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_check_the_rfm_score_calculation_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Monitor Workflow Services to view the statuses of RFM score calculation jobs. # Configure GEM Learn how to configure security, payment methods, and more to make the most use of GEM. - **[GEM and Localization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to frequently asked questions about localization, and learn about available languages. - **[Set Up Security Controls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_security_controls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure and assign permission sets and page layouts to give your users access to the information they need. - **[Configure Your Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_your_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your Account Model and run a data cleanup script to prepare for gift entry with GEM. - **[Configure Accounts, Contacts, and Related Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_config_accts_contacts_rel_objs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure other Salesforce objects used in conjunction with GEM. - **[Configure Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_opportunities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Opportunity names and stages to best match your org's gift process. - **[Set Up Payment Methods](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_payment_methods.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Payment Method field to add the types of payments your organization receives. - **[Enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable customizable rollups to see lifetime donation totals on donor records. - **[Set Up General Accounting Units for Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_general_acct_units_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure General Accounting Units to designate portions of gifts to multiple funds. - **[Customize the Single Gift Entry Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_customize_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Single Gift Entry form to fit the way your org enters gifts. - **[Configure Accounting Subledger (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_asl.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Optionally configure Accounting Subledger to create transferable accounting records. - **[Other GEM Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_other_setting_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the names and default values of the settings that GEM installs. # Configure Gift Entry Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video, [Configure Gift Entry](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lse1SiwgP9A) Gift Entry is a robust set of tools for creating consistent form templates that you can use to enter gifts into NPSP, either individually or in batches. You can also set defaults at the template or batch level. Gift Entry replaces the older Batch Gift Entry product. - **[Enable Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Gift Entry tool is disabled by default in Salesforce orgs. Be warned; there's more to enabling it than just flipping a switch! You must first enable Advanced Mapping and then Gift Entry. After that's done, adjust some of your actions and tabs as well as grant your users access to the new functionality. - **[Enable Enhanced Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to enable enhanced recurring donations. - **[Customize Columns on Batches & Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Gift Entry tab contains two subtabs: Batches and Templates. The Templates tab shows all gift entry form templates in your org, and the Batches tab shows all data batches created by your users. You can configure the list columns to show the information you want to see about each item, in the order you want to see it. - **[Adjust Gift Entry and Advanced Mapping to Populate Contact Address Fields (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Advanced Mapping's default mapping to the NPSP Address object doesn't work with Gift Entry's feature to automatically populate a Contact's address fields on a form. (For example, if you select a Contact from a lookup on a Gift Entry form, the Contact's address information won't auto-populate.) You can work around this limitation by adjusting your Gift Entry templates and Advanced Mapping. - **[Customize Household Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about customizing household names. ## Enable Gift Entry The Gift Entry tool is disabled by default in Salesforce orgs. Be warned; there's more to enabling it than just flipping a switch! You must first enable Advanced Mapping and then Gift Entry. After that's done, adjust some of your actions and tabs as well as grant your users access to the new functionality. To enable Advanced Mapping and Gift Entry: 1. Confirm you have My Domain enabled. Read more about [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce documentation. 2. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 3. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping for Data Import & Gift Entry**. 4. In the first section, enable Advanced Mapping. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When you enable Advanced Mapping, NPSP will convert your Help Text mappings to Advanced Mapping. This may take a little time. See [Configure NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions.") for more information. 5. When the page reloads, in the second section, enable Gift Entry. 6. If you want to number your batches, follow the instructions in [Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches."). ### Add Gift Entry Actions Gift Entry adds a new action that lets your users create a gift directly from Account and Contact records. To enter gifts with Gift Entry from the Account or Contact record, you must add these actions to your page layouts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you previously created a New Donation action per other NPSP configuration instructions, we recommend removing it. The **New Gift** action provides greater functionality and is more accessible! 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab, then click **Account**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**, then click the name of the page layout you want to update. 4. In the page layout palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 5. Drag the **New Gift** action into the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section of the layout editor. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If the actions on this page layout haven't been edited before, you may not be able to drag the action into this section yet. Click **override the predefined actions** to enable drag-and-drop. You can then add, move, or remove actions from this section. ![The Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section of the Page Layout Editor, highlighting the link to override the predefined actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/override_default_actions.png) 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for all other Account page layouts that need this action. 8. Return to the Object Manager tab, then click **Contact**. 9. Repeat these steps for all Contact page layouts that need this action. ### Set Up Gift Entry User Permissions We recommend creating a permission set to give users access to the Gift Entry tool. Permission sets are a great way to grant a group of permissions to specific users. For more information on creating and assigning permission sets, see [Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=perm_sets_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can assign these permissions at the profile level instead of using a permission set. If you're using a Profile, you first need to enable the **Enhanced Profile User Interface** setting in **Setup** | **User Management Settings**. The instructions may vary slightly if you set these permissions on the profile. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Name the permission set Gift Entry Recommended. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Click **Apex Class Access**. 7. Click **Edit**, then add these classes to the Enabled Apex Classes list: - npsp.BDI\_ManageAdvancedMappingCtrl - npsp.BDI\_MappingServiceAdvanced - npsp.BGE\_BatchGiftEntry\_UTIL - npsp.BGE\_ConfigurationWizard\_CTRL - npsp.BGE\_DataImportBatchEntry\_CTRL - npsp.BGE\_FormTemplate\_TDTM - npsp.GE\_GiftEntryController - npsp.GE\_PaymentServices - npsp.UTIL\_CustomSettingsFacade - npsp.UTIL\_CustomSettings\_API 8. Click **Save**. 9. Navigate to **Visualforce Page Access**. 10. Click **Edit**, then add these pages to the Enabled Visualforce Pages list: - npsp.BDI\_BatchOverride - npsp.BDI\_DataImport 11. Click **Save**. 12. Navigate to **Custom Setting Definition**. 13. Click **Edit**, then add this setting definition to Enabled Custom Setting Definitions list: - npsp.Custom Column Header - npsp.Data Import Settings - npsp.Gift Entry Settings 14. Click **Save**. 15. Navigate to **Object Settings**. 16. Give users access to the Gift Entry tab: 1. Click **Gift Entry**. 2. Click **Edit**​. 3. Select ​**Available**​ and ​**Visible**​. 4. Click ​**Save**​.​ 17. In Object Settings, grant object and field permissions for the following objects. 1. The following objects power Gift Entry. | Object: Read, Create, Edit, Delete | Fields: Read & Edit Access | | --- | --- | | Form Templates | All fields | | NPSP Data Import Batches | All fields | | NPSP Data Imports | All fields | 2. The following target objects and fields are mapped by default in Gift Entry. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The table below shows standard target objects and fields for Gift Entry. If you've added custom objects and fields with Advanced Mapping, you must also grant Read, Create, and Edit access to those objects, and Read and Edit access to those fields. Learn how to add custom fields to Gift Entry in [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). | Object: Read, Create, Edit | Fields: Read & Edit Access | | --- | --- | | Accounts | Account Name, Billing Address, Household Phone, Phone, Website | | Addresses | Mailing City, Mailing Country, Mailing Street, Mailing Street2, Mailing State/Province, Mailing Zip/Postal Code | | Campaigns | Campaign Name | | Contacts | Alternate Email, Birthdate, Home Phone, Mobile, Name, Other Phone, Personal Email, Preferred Email, Preferred Phone, Title, Work Email, Work Phone | | GAU Allocations | Amount, General Accounting Unit, Opportunity, Percent | | General Accounting Units | All fields | | Opportunities | Account Name, Amount, Close Date, Description, Honoree Information, Honoree Name, Member Level, Membership End Date, Membership Origin, Membership Start Date, Notification Message, Notification Recipient Email, Notification Recipient Information, Notification Recipient Name, Number of Payments, Opportunity Name, Opportunity Record Type, Primary Campaign Source, Primary Contact, Stage, Tribute Type, Type | | Payments | Check/Reference Number, Elevate Payment API Status, Paid, Payment Amount, Payment Date, Payment Method, Scheduled Date, Written Off | | Recurring Donations | Account, Amount, Campaign, Contact, Day of Month, Effective Date, End Date, Installment Frequency, Installment Period, Number of Planned Installments, Payment Method, Recurring Type | 18. Return to the Permission Set Overview. 19. Click **Manage Assignments**. 20. Click **Add Assignments**. 21. Select all users who should have access to Gift Entry. 22. Click **Assign**. 23. Click **Done**. ### Remove Batch Gift Entry Tab for All Users While Gift Entry and Batch Gift Entry are similarly named, they are quite different features. Reduce confusion by hiding the Batch Gift Entry tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note These steps include modifying the existing Batch Gift Entry permission set. The instructions may vary slightly if you need to update these permissions at the User Profile level. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter permission sets, then click **Permission Sets**. 3. Click **Batch Gift Entry**. 4. Click **Object Settings**. 5. Click **Batch Gift Entry**. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. Deselect Available and Visible. 8. Click **Save**. ## Enable Enhanced Recurring Donations Follow these steps to enable enhanced recurring donations. 1. Enable Enhanced Recurring Donations. To find out if Enhanced Recurring Donations is enabled in your org, review [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A Salesforce system administrator can determine the version of recurring donations installed in your org.") 2. Give users Read and Edit access to the Allow Recurring Donations field on the NPSP Data Import Batches object. ## Customize Columns on Batches & Templates The Gift Entry tab contains two subtabs: Batches and Templates. The Templates tab shows all gift entry form templates in your org, and the Batches tab shows all data batches created by your users. You can configure the list columns to show the information you want to see about each item, in the order you want to see it. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. From the Templates tab or Batches tab, click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png) to access the list view controls, then select **Select Fields to Display** . 3. Use the left and right arrows to move fields from the Available Fields list to the Visible Fields list. 4. Use the up and down arrows to change the display order. 5. Click **Save**. Now that you're set up to use Gift Entry, head to [Create or Edit a Gift Entry Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to create or customize Gift Entry templates to fit your donation management needs.") to get your templates ready to use. ## Adjust Gift Entry and Advanced Mapping to Populate Contact Address Fields (Optional) NPSP Advanced Mapping's default mapping to the NPSP Address object doesn't work with Gift Entry's feature to automatically populate a Contact's address fields on a form. (For example, if you select a Contact from a lookup on a Gift Entry form, the Contact's address information won't auto-populate.) You can work around this limitation by adjusting your Gift Entry templates and Advanced Mapping. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note These changes affect the address mappings for importing data with NPSP Data Importer. ### Adjust Gift Entry Templates and Advanced Mapping Here's how to adjust Gift Entry templates so that related Contact information auto-populates on your forms. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Before proceeding, complete any gift batches that haven't been processed. You must perform all of these steps in order. When you're done, you should see records created or updated as outlined in [Expected Behaviors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you've adjusted Gift Entry and Advanced Mapping for auto-population of corresponding Contact address information, what you see is highly dependent on your org's configuration."). #### Remove Address Fields from Templates Here's how to remove address field from templates. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Do this for all of your templates. 1. In the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click the **Templates** tab. 3. Click the name of the template you'd like to update. 4. Go to the **Form Fields** tab. 5. Remove these address fields: - Mailing City - Mailing Country - Mailing State/Province - Mailing Street - Mailing Zip/Postal Code 6. Click **Save & Close**. 7. Repeat these steps for all of your templates. #### Adjust Addresses Mapped in Advanced Mapping Map addresses to the Contact1 object. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Go to **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping for Data Import & Gift Entry**. 3. Click **Configure Advanced Mapping**. 4. For the Object Group named Address, click ![Show more selector icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) , then click **View Field Mappings**. 5. Delete these NPSP Data Import address mappings: - Home City - Home Country - Home State/Province - Home Street - Home Zip/Postal Code 6. Click **Back to Object Group**. 7. For the Object Group named Contact1, click the selector, and then click **View Field Mappings**. 8. Click **Create New Field Mapping** and map the home address fields on the NPSP Data Import object to the Contact mailing address fields. | Source (NPSP Data Import Object) Field | Target (Contact1 Object) Field | | --- | --- | | Home City (npsp\_\_Home\_City\_\_c) | Mailing City (MailingCity) | | Home Country (npsp\_\_Home\_Country\_\_c) | Mailing Country (MailingCountry) | | Home State/Province (npsp\_\_Home\_State\_Province\_\_c) | Mailing State/Province (MailingState) | | Home Street (npsp\_\_Home\_Street\_\_c) | Mailing Street (MailingStreet) | | Home Zip/Postal Code (npsp\_\_Home\_Zip\_Postal\_Code\_\_c) | Mailing Zip/Postal Code (MailingPostalCode) | #### Add New Address Fields to Templates Here's how to add new address fields to templates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If the new fields don't show up in Template Builder immediately, refresh your browser a time or two. 1. In the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click the **Templates** tab. 3. Click the name of the template you'd like to update. 4. Go to the **Form Fields** tab. 5. Select the section of the template where you'd like to add the fields. 6. Expand the **Address** section under **Form Fields**. 7. Select these address fields to add them to the template: - Mailing City - Mailing Country - Mailing State/Province - Mailing Street - Mailing Zip/Postal Code 8. Click **Save & Close**. ### Expected Behaviors After you've adjusted Gift Entry and Advanced Mapping for auto-population of corresponding Contact address information, what you see is highly dependent on your org's configuration. The scenarios below describe what you see if 1) the Household Account Addresses Disabled option isn't selected in NPSP Settings, and 2) the **Address Override** is not selected on the Contact's record. After adding a new Contact in Gift Entry and processing the gift, the address information appears in the Mailing Address fields on the Contact's new record. NPSP automation also updates the address on related records. Specifically, NPSP: - Creates a new Address record with the same address. - Links the Current Address field on the Contact to the Address record. - Makes the Contact's Household Account and the Billing Address the same. After finding and selecting an existing Contact in the Existing Donor Contact field on the form, the Contact address fields on the form are automatically populated. You can update or clear out the address information on the form. - If you change the address on the form and process the gift, the updated address appears in the Contact's Mailing Address fields. NPSP automation also updates the address on related records. Specifically, NPSP: - Updates the Billing Address information on Contact's Household Account. - Updates Contacts related to the household with the new Mailing Address. - Creates a new Address record and sets it as the Default Address. - If you clear out and remove all of the address information and process the gift, the Contact won't have any address information in the Mailing Address fields. NPSP Automation also updates related records. Specifically, NPSP: - Removes the Billing Address information from the Contact's Household Account. - Updates Contacts related to the household to remove Mailing Address information. - Does not set any address as the Default Address in the Address object. # Configure Goal and Action Item Templates Add fields about templates to page layouts. - **[Add Fields to Goal Template and Action Item Template Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you started using Case Management prior to the Summer '21 release (7/13/21), add these fields to your page layouts. ## Add Fields to Goal Template and Action Item Template Page Layouts If you started using Case Management prior to the Summer '21 release (7/13/21), add these fields to your page layouts. Add these fields to your page layouts if you started using Case Management prior to the Summer '21 release (7/13/21):
Object Fields to Add
Goal Template

  • Case Plan Action Item Instructions

  • Field Set

  • Required
Action Item Template
  • Field Set
Goal Action Item Template
  • Required
To add fields to page layouts: 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. Click **Goal Template**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Goal Template Layout**. 5. Drag these fields on to the page layout: - Case Plan Action Item Instructions - Field Set - Required 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for the fields on the other page layouts. # Configure Grants Find out more about configuring grants. - **[About Grants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Grants feature lets you manage incoming grant deadlines, applications, deliverables, reporting, and more. - **[Set Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that the following grant-related fields on Accounts, Opportunities, and Deliverables are set to Read Access for profiles that need to view these fields, and Edit Access for profiles that need to edit them. - **[Set Object-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that all profiles that need access to Grants have the appropriate level of access to the Deliverables object. - **[Edit the Organization Account Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Account fields Funding Focus and Grantmaker to the page layout used for Organizations. We recommend creating a separate section in your page layout for Grantmaking Information, as shown. - **[Create Grant Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes five out-of-the-box grant stages. If you installed NPSP directly from the installer on top of an existing NPSP org, you may need to configure these Stage values yourself. You can also create new values to best match your organization's grant process. - **[Create a Grant Sales Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's how to create a grants sales process. - **[Create a Grant Record Type on Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's how to create a grant record type on Opportunity. - **[Create a Tab for Deliverables](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It can be helpful to see all of your upcoming grant deadlines in one place. Create a new custom object tab for the Deliverables object so you can see at a glance what's coming down the pike. - **[Populate Grant Fields on Organization Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Select the Grantmaker field on Organization Account records for businesses or foundations that can provide Grants to your organization. ## About Grants The NPSP Grants feature lets you manage incoming grant deadlines, applications, deliverables, reporting, and more. NPSP Grants uses the following objects: - Opportunity (standard object): Track Grant applications and awards. - Deliverable (custom object): Manage deadlines and next steps. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.41 (6/9/2015). ## Set Field-Level Security Make sure that the following grant-related fields on Accounts, Opportunities, and Deliverables are set to Read Access for profiles that need to view these fields, and Edit Access for profiles that need to edit them. Account fields: - Funding Focus - Grantmaker Opportunity fields: - Grant Contract Date - Grant Period End Date - Grant Period Start Date - Grant Requirements Website - Is Grant Renewal - Next Deliverable Date - Previous Grant/Gift Opportunity - Program Area(s) - Requested Amount Deliverable fields: - Close Date - Due Date - Opportunity - Requirements To set field access: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the Profile you want to edit. 4. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to the appropriate object. 5. Make sure **Read Access** or **Edit Access** is checked for the listed fields. If not, click **Edit** and select the checkbox, then click **Save**. ## Set Object-Level Security Make sure that all profiles that need access to Grants have the appropriate level of access to the Deliverables object. To set object-level security: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile you want to set object-level security for. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Custom Object Permissions section, in the row for Deliverables, click **Read** (for profiles that need to view Deliverables) or **Edit** and **Create** (for profiles that need to create and edit Deliverables). 5. Click **Save**. ## Edit the Organization Account Page Layout Add the Account fields Funding Focus and Grantmaker to the page layout used for Organizations. We recommend creating a separate section in your page layout for Grantmaking Information, as shown. ![Grantmaking Information section on an Organization Account page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/grants_pl.png) To edit page layouts: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Organization Lightning Layout** (or whichever layout you use for Organizations). 5. If the Grantmaking section doesn’t exist, create one by dragging the Section element from the palette onto the page layout. - Name the section Grantmaking Information. - Change any other section details as needed and click **Save**. 6. Drag the Funding Focus and Grantmaker fields into the Grantmaking Information section on the layout. 7. Click **Save**. ## Create Grant Stages NPSP includes five out-of-the-box grant stages. If you installed NPSP directly from the installer on top of an existing NPSP org, you may need to configure these Stage values yourself. You can also create new values to best match your organization's grant process. The five out-of-the-box grant stages are: | Stage Name | API Name | Type | Probability | Forecast Category | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Prospecting | Prospecting | Open | 10% | Pipeline | | LOI Submitted | LOI Submitted | Open | 20% | Pipeline | | Application Submitted | Application Submitted | Open | 30% | Pipeline | | Awarded | Awarded | Closed/Won | 100% | Closed | | Withdrawn | Withdrawn | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | | Declined | Declined | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | To create new values to match your organization’s grant process: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab**.** 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click the Stage field and verify that the configured values match the table above. 5. Make any adjustments necessary to the Type, Probability, or Forecast Category to match how your organization handles grants. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If your organization uses different stage names, you’ll need to create new picklist values, as managed package picklist value names can’t be edited. For more information on working with Opportunity stages, see [Understand and Customize Sales Processes and Paths](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/opportunity-settings-in-nonprofit-success-pack/understand-and-customize-sales-process-and-path-npsp). ## Create a Grant Sales Process Here's how to create a grants sales process. 1. From Setup, enter Sales Process in the Quick Find box, then select **Sales Processes**. 2. Click **New** and create a Sales Process called Grant that includes the Stage values you configured for your organization’s Grants process. ![The select stages for the Grant sales process: Prospecting, LOI Submitted, Application Submitted, Awarded, Withdrawn, and Declined](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/grant_sales_proc_stages.png) For instructions on how to create Sales Processes, see [Understand and Customize Sales Processes and Paths](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/opportunity-settings-in-nonprofit-success-pack/understand-and-customize-sales-process-and-path-npsp). ## Create a Grant Record Type on Opportunity Here's how to create a grant record type on Opportunity. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. If you don’t see a Grant record type, create a new record type with these details: - Existing Record Type: **Master** - Record Type Label: Grant - Sales Process: **Grant** - Description: Use this record type to track grant applications. - Active: selected - Enable for Profile: select for any profile that needs access to grants ![Creating the Grant record type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/grant_rt.png) 5. Click **Next**. 6. Choose **Apply one layout to all profiles**, then select **Grant Layout**. 7. Click **Save**. ## Create a Tab for Deliverables It can be helpful to see all of your upcoming grant deadlines in one place. Create a new custom object tab for the Deliverables object so you can see at a glance what's coming down the pike. 1. From Setup, enter Tabs in the Quick Find box, then click **Tabs**. 2. Under Custom Object Tabs, click **New**. 3. Select **Deliverable** as the object, then select the Tab Style of your choice. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Select the Tab Visibility for each Profile, then click **Next**. 6. Deselect **Include Tab** for all custom apps. 7. In the row for Nonprofit Success Pack, select **Include Tab**. 8. Click **Save**. You can now see your Deliverables by clicking the Deliverables tab and choosing the All list view. ## Populate Grant Fields on Organization Accounts Select the Grantmaker field on Organization Account records for businesses or foundations that can provide Grants to your organization. Indicate the Grantor's Funding Focus. Ctrl + click to select more than one. You can edit the picklist values for the Funding Focus field on the Account record to best match your organization's processes. ![Shows the Funding Focus and Grantmaker fields on an Organization Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/grant_flds_on_account.png) # Configure Guest User Permissions on the Grantee Portal Make sure your guest users, such as grantseekers who do not have a login to your Grantee Portal, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Configure the Grantee Portal guest user object and field permissions by editing the guest user profile. Here's how to configure these permissions. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter All Communities in the Quick Find Box, then click **All Communities**. 3. Click the Workspaces link to your Grantee Portal 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Click **Pages**. 6. Click **Go to Force.com** under Advanced Customizations. A new tab will automatically switch you to Salesforce Classic. 7. Click **Public Access Settings** to open the Grantee Portal Profile page. 8. To configure an object's permissions, click **Edit** then scroll down to the object to specify the minimum object permissions. 9. Click **Save**. 10. To configure field-level security, scroll down to Field-Level Security and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 11. Click **Edit**. 12. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save.** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access recommended for core foundationConnect functionality to work. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed — and many standard Salesforce items are not — it means that either: - foundationConnect doesn't have a dependency on it. Your organization can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be changed In addition to these permissions, any field added to a field set requires additional permissions. - **[Account (Organization) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Account (Organization) object in foundationConnect. - **[Community Configuration Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration object in foundationConnect. - **[Contact Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. - **[CustomHTML Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. - **[Document Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Document object in foundationConnect. - **[FCPageLayout Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the FCPageLayout object in foundationConnect. - **[GuideStar Field Mapping Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the GuideStar Field Mapping object in foundationConnect. - **[Opportunity (Request) Team Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) Team object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal Account Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal Account object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal User Request Team Members Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal User Request Team Member object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Attachment Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question Attachment object in foundationConnect. - **[Question Response Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Question Response object in foundationConnect. - **[Quiz Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Quiz object in foundationConnect. - **[Quiz Question Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Quiz Question object in foundationConnect. - **[Recommendation Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation object in foundationConnect. - **[Related List Controller Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Related List Controller object in foundationConnect. - **[Task Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Task object in foundationConnect. - **[User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ## Account (Organization) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Account (Organization) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
EIN FGM_Base__EIN__c √ √
## Community Configuration Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
JsonData FGM_Portal__JsonData__c √  
## Contact Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Email Email √  
Organization Name AccountId √  
Username FGM_Portal__Username__c √  
## CustomHTML Permissions Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Description FGM_Portal__RichDescription__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
## Document Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Document object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## FCPageLayout Permissions Review the minimum required access for the FCPageLayout object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the FCPageLayout object and its fields are required only if you are using Recommendations. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Object Name FGM_Portal__ObjectName__c √  
## GuideStar Field Mapping Permissions Review the minimum required access for the GuideStar Field Mapping object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the GuideStar Field Mapping object is required only if you are using GuideStar. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Opportunity (Request) Team Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Opportunity (Request) Team object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
ContactRoleID FGM_Portal__ContactRoleID__c √ √
## Portal Account Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal Account object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Portal User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √ √
Active FGM_Portal__IsActive__c √ √
Approval Status FGM_Portal__Approval_Status__c √ √
City FGM_Portal__City__c √ √
Confirm Password FGM_Portal__Confirm_Password__c √ √
Confirmation Code FGM_Portal__Confirmation_Code__c √ √
Confirmation Date FGM_Portal__Confirmation_Date__c √ √
Contact FGM_Portal__Contact__c √ √
Country FGM_Portal__Country__c √ √
Default Time Zone FGM_Portal__Default_Time_Zone__c √ √
Domain FGM_Portal__Domain__c √ √
EIN FGM_Portal__EIN__c √ √

Email

FGM_Portal__Email__c

√

 √
First Name FGM_Portal__FirstName__c √ √
Is Created By Opportunity Team Member FGM_Portal__IsCreatedByOpportunityTeamMember__c √ √
Last Name FGM_Portal__LastName__c √ √
Organization Legal Name FGM_Portal__Organization_Legal_Name__c √ √
Password FGM_Portal__Password__c √ √
Portal Account FGM_Portal__Portal_Account__c √ √
Portal Language FGM_Portal__Portal_Language__c √ √
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √ √
Record Type RecordTypeId √ √
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √ √
State FGM_Portal__State__c √ √
User Profile FGM_Portal__User_Profile__c √ √
## Portal User Request Team Members Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal User Request Team Member object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Is Shared FGM_Portal__IsShared__c √ √
Portal User FGM_Portal__PortalUser__c √ √
Shared Request FGM_Portal__SharedRequest__c √ √
User Role FGM_Portal__UserRole__c √ √
## Question Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Question object and its fields are required only if you are using an Eligibility Quiz and/or Recommendations. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Active FGM_Portal__Is_Active__c

√

(only for Eligibility Quiz)

  
Attachment Name Formula FGM_Portal__AttachmentNameFormula__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Error Text FGM_Portal__Error_Text__c

√

(only for Eligibility Quiz)

  
Help Tip FGM_Portal__Help_Tip__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Parent QuestionID FGM_Portal__Parent_QuestionID__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Post-Text FGM_Portal__RichPostText__c √  
Pre-Text FGM_Portal__RichPreText__c √  
Question FGM_Portal__RichQuestion__c √  
Quiz FGM_Portal__Quiz__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Type FGM_Portal__Type__c √  
## Question Attachment Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question Attachment object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Question Attachment object and its fields are required only if you are using an Eligibility Quiz. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Description FGM_Portal__Description__c √ √
Question FGM_Portal__Question__c √ √
Recommendation FGM_Portal__Recommendation__c √ √
## Question Response Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Question Response object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Question Response object and its fields are required only if you are using an Eligibility Quiz. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Accepted Response FGM_Portal__Accepted_Response__c √  
Active FGM_Portal__Is_Active__c √  
Post-Text FGM_Portal__Post_Text__c √  
Pre-Text FGM_Portal__Pre_Text__c √  
Question FGM_Portal__Eligibility_Question__c √ √
Response FGM_Portal__Response__c √  
Sort Order FGM_Portal__Sort_Order__c √  
## Quiz Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Quiz object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Quiz object and its fields are required only if you are using an Eligibility Quiz. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Active FGM_Portal__Is_Active__c √  
Failure URL FGM_Portal__Failure_URL__c √  
Introduction Text FGM_Portal__Introduction_Text__c √  
Success URL FGM_Portal__Success_URL__c √  
## Quiz Question Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Quiz Question object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Quiz Question object and its fields are required only if you are using an Eligibility Quiz and/or Recommendations. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Can upload after submission FGM_Portal__Can_upload_after_submission__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Field FGM_Portal__Field__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Hide Post-Text after submission? FGM_Portal__Hide_Post_Text__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Hide Pre-Text after submissions? FGM_Portal__Hide_Pre_Text__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Required? FGM_Portal__Required__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
Sort Order FGM_Portal__Sort_Order__c √  
Tab FGM_Portal__Tab__c

√

(only for Recommendations)

  
## Recommendation Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Recommendation object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Recommendation object and its fields are required only if you are using Recommendations. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Status Status √ √
## Related List Controller Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Related List Controller object in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Related List Controller object and its fields are required only if you are using Recommendations. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
# of records to display FGM_Portal__of_records_to_display__c √  
Associated FC Portal Type FGM_Portal__Associated_FC_Portal_Type__c √  
Associated Tab Type FGM_Portal__Associated_Tab_Type__c √  
Base URL FGM_Portal__BaseUrl__c √  
Cloned from FGM_Portal__Cloned_from__c √  
Enable Amendment FGM_Portal__EnableAmendment__c √  
Field Labels FGM_Portal__FieldHeaders__c √  
Field Labels (Long) FGM_Portal__Field_Labels_Long__c √  
Field Names FGM_Portal__FieldNames__c √  
Field Names (Long) FGM_Portal__Field_Names_Long__c √  
Hide Edit Link FGM_Portal__Hide_Edit_Link__c √  
Instructional Text FGM_Portal__RichInstructionalText__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  

Lookup Field

FGM_Portal__LookupField__c

√

 √
Object Name FGM_Portal__ObjectName__c √ √
Parent Object FGM_Portal__ParentObject__c √  
Record Type RecordTypeId √ √
Record Type Label FGM_Portal__RecordTypeName__c √  
Related List Controller Name Name √  
Show Delete Link FGM_Portal__ShowDeleteLink__c √  
Show New Button FGM_Portal__ShowNewButton__c √  
Show Tab to Individual Users FGM_Portal__Show_Tab_to_Individual_Users__c √  
Show Tab to Organization Users FGM_Portal__Show_Tab_to_Organization_Users__c √  
Sort Field FGM_Portal__SortField__c √  
Sort Field Order FGM_Portal__SortFieldOrder__c √  
## Task Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Task object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √ √
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √ √
User Profile FGM_Portal__UserProfile__c √ √
# Configure Guest User Permissions on the Reviewer Portal Make sure your guest users, such as reviewers who do not have a login to your Reviewer Portal, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. Make sure your guest users, such as reviewers who do not have a login to your Reviewer Portal, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. Configure the Reviewer Portal guest user object and field permissions by editing the guest user profile. Here's how to configure permissions using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter All Communities in the Quick Find Box, then click **All Communities**. 3. Click the Workspaces link to your Reviewer Portal. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Click **Pages**. 6. Click **Go to Force.com** under Advanced Customizations. A new tab will automatically switch you to Salesforce Classic. 7. Click **Public Access Settings** to open the Reviewer Portal Profile page. 8. To configure an object's permissions, click **Edit** then scroll down to the object to specify the minimum object permissions. 9. Click **Save**. 10. To configure field-level security, scroll down to Field-Level Security and click **View** on the object you want to configure. 11. Click **Edit**. 12. Specify the minimum field-level security permissions, then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access recommended for core foundationConnect functionality to work on the Reviewer Portal. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed — and many standard Salesforce items are not — it means that either: - foundationConnect doesn't have a dependency on it. Your organization can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be changed In addition to these permissions, any field added to a field set requires additional permissions. - **[Account (Organization) Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Account (Organization) object in foundationConnect. - **[Community Configuration Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration object in foundationConnect. - **[Contact Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. - **[CustomHTML Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. - **[Document Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Document object in foundationConnect. - **[Portal User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. - **[Task Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the Task object in foundationConnect. - **[User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ## Account (Organization) Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Account (Organization) object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
EIN FGM_Base__EIN__c √ √
## Community Configuration Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Community Configuration object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
JsonData FGM_Portal__JsonData__c √  
## Contact Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Contact object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account (Organization) Name AccountId √  
Email Email √  
Username FGM_Portal__Username__c √  
## CustomHTML Permissions Review the minimum required access for the CustomHTML object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Description FGM_Portal__RichDescription__c √  
Language FGM_Portal__Language__c √  
## Document Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Document object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Portal User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Portal User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Account FGM_Portal__Account__c √ √
Active FGM_Portal__IsActive__c √ √
Approval Status FGM_Portal__Approval_Status__c √ √
City FGM_Portal__City__c √ √
Confirmation Code FGM_Portal__Confirmation_Code__c √ √
Confirmation Date FGM_Portal__Confirmation_Date__c √ √
Contact FGM_Portal__Contact__c √ √
Country FGM_Portal__Country__c √ √
Default Time Zone FGM_Portal__Default_Time_Zone__c √ √
Domain FGM_Portal__Domain__c √ √
EIN FGM_Portal__EIN__c √ √

Email

FGM_Portal__Email__c

√

 √
First Name FGM_Portal__FirstName__c √ √
Is Created By Opportunity Team Member FGM_Portal__IsCreatedByOpportunityTeamMember__c √ √
Last Name FGM_Portal__LastName__c √ √
Organization Legal Name FGM_Portal__Organization_Legal_Name__c √ √
Portal Account FGM_Portal__Portal_Account__c √ √
Portal Language FGM_Portal__Portal_Language__c √ √
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √ √
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √ √
State FGM_Portal__State__c √ √
User Profile FGM_Portal__User_Profile__c √ √
## Task Permissions Review the minimum required access for the Task object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## User Permissions Review the minimum required access for the User object in foundationConnect. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Label

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Profile Type FGM_Portal__ProfileType__c √ √
Return URL FGM_Portal__Return_URL__c √ √
User Profile FGM_Portal__UserProfile__c √ √
# Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your support staff and system administrators have the access they need to system functionality, standard and custom objects, and fields. To help you get your org up and running, Student Success Hub provides support staff and System Administrator profiles, as well a support staff permission set. If you clone these assets, you'll have all the base-level permissions documented here. - **[Configure Higher Ed Support Staff System Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support staff need access to some specific System Permissions, which are called General User Permissions in the original profile user interface. Configure them by editing the appropriate support staff profile using the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Object and Field Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure object and field permissions for higher ed support staff by editing their profile. Here's how to configure permissions using the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Account Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Account object for your higher ed staff. - **[Alert Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Alert object for your higher ed staff. - **[Appointment Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Appointment object for your higher ed staff. - **[Appointment Attendee Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Attendee object for your higher ed staff. - **[Appointment Location Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Location object for your higher ed staff. - **[Availability Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Availability object for your higher ed staff. - **[Availability Location Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Availability Location object for your higher ed staff. - **[Availability Topic Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Availability Topic object for your higher ed staff. - **[Case Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Case object for your higher ed staff. - **[Contact Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Contact object for your higher ed staff. - **[Course Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course object for your higher ed staff. - **[Course Connection Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Connection object for your higher ed staff. - **[Course Offering Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering object for your higher ed staff. - **[Event Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Event object for your higher ed staff. - **[Facility Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Facility object for your higher ed staff. - **[Prediction Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Prediction object for your higher ed staff. - **[Program Enrollment Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Program Enrollment object for your higher ed staff. - **[Queue Topic Setting Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Queue Topic Setting object for your higher ed staff. - **[Queue Waiting Room Resource Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Queue Waiting Room Resource object for your higher ed staff. - **[Relationship Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Relationship object for your higher ed staff. - **[Role Topic Setting Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Role Topic Setting object for your higher ed staff. - **[Success Plan Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan object for your higher ed staff. - **[Success Plan Template Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Template object for your higher ed staff. - **[Success Plan Template Task Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Task object for your higher ed staff. - **[Support Pool Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Support Pool object for your higher ed staff. - **[Task Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Task object for your higher ed staff. - **[Term Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Term object for your higher ed staff. - **[Topic Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Topic object for your higher ed staff. - **[User Topic Setting Permissions for Higher Ed Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the User Topic Setting object for your higher ed staff. ## Learn About Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions Make sure your support staff and system administrators have the access they need to system functionality, standard and custom objects, and fields. To help you get your org up and running, Student Success Hub provides support staff and System Administrator profiles, as well a support staff permission set. If you clone these assets, you'll have all the base-level permissions documented here. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Setting all permissions correctly is essential, but pay especially close attention to setting field permissions. If field permissions are incorrect, support staff are likely to encounter errors using the app. It's easy to overlook a field, and tracking down the source of errors can be tricky and time-consuming. So double-check your field permissions—or better yet, triple-check them. ## Configure Higher Ed Support Staff System Permissions Support staff need access to some specific System Permissions, which are called General User Permissions in the original profile user interface. Configure them by editing the appropriate support staff profile using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your higher ed support staff. 3. Click **System Permissions** and then click **Edit**. 4. Make sure these fields are selected: - **Edit Events** - **Edit Tasks** 5. Save your changes. ## Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Object and Field Permissions Configure object and field permissions for higher ed support staff by editing their profile. Here's how to configure permissions using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name that you want to set permissions and security for. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click the object you want to configure, click **Edit**, and specify the minimum Object Permissions and Field Permissions shown in the tables. 5. If you're configuring multiple objects, use the breadcrumb navigation to select the next object from the menu. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access required for core Student Success Hub functionality. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed—and many standard Salesforce items are not—it means that either: - Student Success Hub doesn't have a dependency on it. Your institution can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be changed. We've also noted where access is either required only for a specific feature to work, or is recommended and not required. For permissions for Pathways-specific objects, see [Configure Support Staff Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give support staff the object and field permissions they need to use Pathways in Student Success Hub."). ## Account Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Account object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Case Team Name

√

Description

√*

Parent Account

√*

Record Type

√*
\* Required for Pathways ## Alert Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Alert object for your higher ed staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Alerts object is required only if you're using Alerts. For more information, see [About Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get Alerts up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Is Closed

√

√

Student Contact

 √  

Student Record

 √  
## Appointment Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Appointment object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Additional Connection Information

√

√

Appointment Location

√

√

Appointment Subject

√

√

Attendee Limit

√

√

Description

√

√

Discoverable

√

√

Location

√

√

Related Case

√*

√*

Related Subtopic

√*

√*

Related Topic

√*

√*

Subtopic

√

√

Topic

√

√

Type

√

√

Web Meeting

√

√

Web Meeting Link

√

√
\* Required for working with queuing cases ## Appointment Attendee Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Attendee object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Attendee

√

√

Comments

√

Role

√

√

Status Comments

√

√

Status Updated By

√

√

Status Updated Date

√

√

Student Record

√

√
## Appointment Location Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Location object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Additional Details

√

√

Building

√

√

Campus

√

√

Meeting Link

√

√

Phone

√

√

Room

√

√

Sort Order

√

√

Type

√

√
## Availability Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Availability object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Attendee Limit

√

√

Availability Name

√

√

Type

√

√
## Availability Location Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Availability Location object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Availability

√

√

Location

√

√
## Availability Topic Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Availability Topic object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Availability

√

√

Topic

√

√
## Case Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Case object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Alert

√

√

Case Origin

√

√

Case Owner

√*

√*

Case Reason

 √ √

Contact Name (ContactID)

√

Description

√

√

Location

√*

√*

Parent Case

 √ √

Priority

 √ √

Proxy

√*

√*

Proxy Name

√*

√*

Status

√*

√*

Student ID

√*

√*

Subject

 √ √

Subtopic

√*

√*

Support Pool

√*

√*

Topic

√*

√*

Type

 √ √

Web Email

√*

√*

Web Name

√*

√*

Web Phone

√*

√*
\* Required for working with queuing cases or queue waiting rooms ## Contact Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Contact object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Chosen Full Name

√*

Email

√

Name

√**

  

Primary Academic Program

√

Primary Department

√

Student ID

√

Title

√
\* Required for Pathways \*\* Required for queue waiting rooms ## Course Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Course ID

√*

Credit Hours

√*

Description

√*

Extended Description

√*
\* Required for Pathways ## Course Connection Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course Connection object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Course Offering Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Event Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Event object for your higher ed staff. ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Description

√

√

Location

√

√

Public

√

√

Related To

√

√

Type

√

√
## Facility Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Facility object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√*

Delete
\* Edit access is only required for administrators who are defining queue waiting rooms based on the Facility object ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Description

√

√

Facility Name

√

√
## Prediction Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Prediction object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Alert

√

Appointment

√

Boolean

√

Case

√

Date

√

DateTime

√

Model

√

Number

√

Related Record 1

√

Text

√

Type

√

User

√

Version

√

## Program Enrollment Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Program Enrollment object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Class Year

√

Contact

√*

GPA

√

  

Program

√*

Program Plan

√*
\* Required for Pathways ## Queue Topic Setting Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Queue Topic Setting object for your higher ed staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Queue Topic Setting object is required only if you're using queue management. For more information, see [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Support Pool

√

√

Topic

√

√
## Queue Waiting Room Resource Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Queue Waiting Room Resource object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√*

Delete
\* Edit access is only required for administrators who are defining queue waiting rooms ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Sort Order

√

√

Support Pool

√

√

User

√

√

Waiting Room

√

√

Waiting Room Resource ID

√
## Relationship Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Relationship object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Role Topic Setting Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Role Topic Setting object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Role Name

√

Topic

√
## Success Plan Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan object for your higher ed staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Success Plans object is required only for users creating Success Plans. For more information, see [Set Up Success Plans, Templates, and Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Success Plans up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions \* Recommended only for administrators, not support staff, to auto-apply a Success Plan

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Auto Apply Success Plan Template √*  

Cancelled

√

√

Comments

√

√

From Template

√

√

Is Case Student Record

√

Open Tasks

√

Overdue Tasks

√

Published

√

√

Status

√

√

Student Contact

√

√

Student Record

√

√

Tasks

√
## Success Plan Template Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Template object for your higher ed staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Success Plan Templates object is required only for users creating Success Plan Templates. For more information, see [Set Up Success Plans, Templates, and Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Success Plans up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Active

√

√

Active Tasks

√

Comments

√

√

Usage Count

√
## Success Plan Template Task Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Task object for your higher ed staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Success Plan Template Tasks object is required only for users creating Success Plan Templates. For more information, see [Set Up Success Plans, Templates, and Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Success Plans up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Active

√

√

Comments

√

√

Priority

√

√

Relative Due Date

√

√

Type

√

√
## Support Pool Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Support Pool object for your higher ed staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Support Pools object is required only if you're using the Support Pools support model and for certain queue management use cases. For more information, see [Get Started with Support Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn the many ways that Student Success Hub helps you support students."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√*

Edit

√*

Delete
\* Required for users who are defining Support Pools or queue management ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Account

√

√*

Case Team Name

√

√*

Description

√

√*

Photo URL

√

√*

Pool Name

√

√*
\* Recommended for users who are defining Support Pools or queue management ## Task Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Task object for your higher ed staff. ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Due Date

√

√

Name

√

√

Related To

√

√
## Term Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Term object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

End Date

√*

Start Date

√*
\* Required for Pathways ## Topic Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the Topic object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Label

√

Parent Topic

√

Sort Order

√
## User Topic Setting Permissions for Higher Ed Staff Configure the required permissions for the User Topic Setting object for your higher ed staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Default Appointment Duration

√

√

Topic

√

√

User

√

√
# Configure How Volunteers for Salesforce Handles Sign-Ups Streamline your volunteer sign-up process by setting up automation such as automated confirmations or record creation rules. - **[Automatically Confirm Web Signups and Update Shift Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a volunteer signs up for a Shift from the website, Volunteers for Salesforce automatically creates a Volunteer Hours record with a status of Web Sign Up, which does not affect the Shift's # of Volunteers Still Needed number. So a full Shift could still display a signup link because the web signups haven't been counted.You can automatically confirm web signups by creating a workflow rule that updates the Volunteer Hours status to Confirmed. - **[Customize Rules for Matching Volunteer Signups with Existing Contacts (VolunteersSignUpFS and VolunteersJobListingFS only)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When your volunteers sign up from a Sites page, Volunteers for Salesforce tries to match the person with an existing Contact in Salesforce. By default, Volunteers for Salesforce looks for an exact match with First Name, Last Name, and Email. If you're using VolunteersSignUpFS and VolunteersJobListingFS, you can edit custom settings to match against a subset of these fields (for example, just Last Name and Email) or against additional fields. - **[Customize Rules for Matching Volunteer Signups with Existing Contacts (VolunteersSignUp and VolunteersJobListing Only)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're using the older versions of the Volunteer Sign Up and Volunteer Job Listing pages (VolunteersSignUp and VolunteersJobListing), by default they create a new Lead (VolunteersSignUp) or Contact (VolunteersJobListing) record for every new signup. To prevent duplicating volunteer records, you can edit a custom setting to require that Volunteers for Salesforce try to match the volunteer with an existing Contact in Salesforce. - **[Customize Rules for Creating Contacts with Specific Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If a volunteer signup can't be matched with an existing Contact, Volunteers for Salesforce creates a Contact record without a record type specified. If you require these newly created contacts to have a specific record type, such as Volunteer, customize one of the out-of-the-box Workflow Rules to automatically assign a record type. - **[Specify the Account Name for Automatically Created Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contacts that are automatically created from volunteer signups have an associated Account that's also created automatically. ## Automatically Confirm Web Signups and Update Shift Availability When a volunteer signs up for a Shift from the website, Volunteers for Salesforce automatically creates a Volunteer Hours record with a status of Web Sign Up, which does not affect the Shift's # of Volunteers Still Needed number. So a full Shift could still display a signup link because the web signups haven't been counted.You can automatically confirm web signups by creating a workflow rule that updates the Volunteer Hours status to Confirmed. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Click **New Rule**. 3. Select **Volunteer Hours**, then click **Next**. 4. Give the rule a name, such as Confirm Volunteer Web Signups. 5. In the Evaluation Criteria section, select **created**. 6. In the Rule Criteria section: 1. Select **criteria are met**. 2. Define the criteria as Volunteer Hours: Status for field, equals for operator, and Web Sign Up for value. ![Workflow rule assigning web signups](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/web_signup_workflow_rule.png) 7. Click **Save & Next**. 8. In the Immediate Workflow Actions section, click **Add Workflow Action**, and then select **New Field Update**. 9. Give the action a name, such as Convert Signup to Confirmed. 10. Review the Unique Name that's automatically filled in for you. 11. In Field to Update, set the values to Volunteer Hours and Status. 12. In the Specify New Field Value section, specify A specific value and Confirmed. ![Specify field value for the web signup workflow rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/web_signup_workflow_rule_field_value.png) 13. **Save** your changes. 14. Click **Done**. 15. Back on the Workflow Rule detail page, click **Activate**. ![Activate the workflow rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/web_signup_workflow_rule_activate.png) ## Customize Rules for Matching Volunteer Signups with Existing Contacts (VolunteersSignUpFS and VolunteersJobListingFS only) When your volunteers sign up from a Sites page, Volunteers for Salesforce tries to match the person with an existing Contact in Salesforce. By default, Volunteers for Salesforce looks for an exact match with First Name, Last Name, and Email. If you're using VolunteersSignUpFS and VolunteersJobListingFS, you can edit custom settings to match against a subset of these fields (for example, just Last Name and Email) or against additional fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The Contact Matching Rule, Contact Match Email Fields, and Contact Match First Name Fields custom settings apply only to the newer versions of the Volunteers Sign Up and Volunteers Job Listing pages (VolunteersSignUpFS and VolunteersJobListingFS.) 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Volunteers Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit** to edit custom settings as needed. - As you can see in Contact Matching Rule, by default, V4S requires matching on all three fields, "Firstname;Lastname;Email". Edit this setting as needed to match on a subset of these three fields, for example, Lastname;Email, or Firstname;Lastname. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using the Nonprofit Success Pack and the Contact Matching Rule includes Email, V4S tries to match against Work Email, Personal/Home Email, and Alternate Email. - To match against additional Contact email fields, you must include email in the Contact Matching Rule. Then in Contact Match Email Fields, for each custom email field you want V4S to match on, enter the field's full developer name, including the namespace prefix. Separate fields using semicolons. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note You don't need to include email fields from NPSP; they're automatically checked as long as Contact Matching Rule includes email. - To match against additional Contact first name fields, such as a nickname field, in Contact Match First Name Fields, enter each field's full developer name, including the namespace prefix. Separate fields using semicolons. Note: Contact Matching Rule must include FirstName for V4S to match against additional Contact first name fields. 4. **Save** your changes. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If signups from Sites pages aren't being recognized as existing Contacts, and you get duplicate Contacts created from signups, check the Sharing Settings for the Contact object. Make sure it's not set to Private. Refer back to [Configure Data Access in Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_data_access_owd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Establish the recommended baseline data access for all of your Salesforce users, including your website visitors."). ## Customize Rules for Matching Volunteer Signups with Existing Contacts (VolunteersSignUp and VolunteersJobListing Only) If you're using the older versions of the Volunteer Sign Up and Volunteer Job Listing pages (VolunteersSignUp and VolunteersJobListing), by default they create a new Lead (VolunteersSignUp) or Contact (VolunteersJobListing) record for every new signup. To prevent duplicating volunteer records, you can edit a custom setting to require that Volunteers for Salesforce try to match the volunteer with an existing Contact in Salesforce. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend using the newer versions of the Volunteer Sign Up and Volunteer Job Listing pages instead (VolunteersSignUpFS and VolunteersJobListingFS.) When the Signup Matches Existing Contacts custom setting is selected, V4S tries to match on First Name, Last Name, and Email. (The fields for matching are not editable.) If V4S can't find a match, it creates a new Lead record. You can have V4S create a Contact record instead by selecting the Signup Creates Contacts if no Match custom setting. ## Customize Rules for Creating Contacts with Specific Record Types If a volunteer signup can't be matched with an existing Contact, Volunteers for Salesforce creates a Contact record without a record type specified. If you require these newly created contacts to have a specific record type, such as Volunteer, customize one of the out-of-the-box Workflow Rules to automatically assign a record type. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Click **Volunteer Signup - Contact**. 3. In the Workflow Actions section, click **Edit**. 4. Click **Add Workflow Action**, and then select **New Field Update**. 5. Give the action a name, such as Set Volunteer Record Type. 6. Review the Unique Name that's automatically filled in for you. 7. In Field to Update, choose **Contact Record Type**. 8. In the Specify a New Field Value section, specify your desired Contact record type. 9. **Save** your changes. 10. Click **Done**. 11. Back on the Workflow Rule detail page, make sure your rule is Active. If not, click **Activate**. ## Specify the Account Name for Automatically Created Contacts Contacts that are automatically created from volunteer signups have an associated Account that's also created automatically. - If you're using the Nonprofit Success Pack with the Individual Bucket account model, set up V4S to assign an Account name that accommodates NPSP. (For users of the Household account model and One-to-One Individual model, the default custom setting is blank and should remain so.) - If you're not using the Nonprofit Success Pack, set up V4S to assign an Account name. As an Admin, you can allow your volunteers to update their contact information on your site pages. Here's how: 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to the "Volunteers Settings" Custom Settings. 3. If Custom Settings have not been set, click **New**. If Custom Settings have been set, click **Edit**. 4. In the Signup Bucket Account On Create field, enter the name of an existing Account (it must be unique). 5. **Save** your changes. # Configure In-Kind Gifts Find out more about configuring in-kind gifts. - **[About In-Kind Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP In-Kind Gifts feature lets you track non-monetary gifts to your organization such as computers, food, clothing, equipment or professional expertise. Keep In-Kind Gifts separate from cash donations for accurate reporting. - **[Create In-Kind Opportunity Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Opportunity stages for In-Kind Gifts. (If you already have these stages configured, you don't need to recreate them.) - **[Create an In-Kind Sales Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow the steps to create a sales process for in-kind gifts. - **[Create In-Kind Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow the steps to create a record type for in-kind gifts. - **[Choose Picklist Values for In-Kind Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow the steps to add picklist values to the in-kind record type. - **[Set Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow the steps to set access to Opportunity fields. - **[Assign Page Layout to Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you selected the In-Kind Gift Layout when you created the In-Kind Record Type, you can skip this step. Otherwise, assign the In-Kind Gift page layout to the In-Kind Gift Record Type. - **[Add a Lightning Action to Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a Lightning Action to Contacts to easily create a new In-Kind Gift from a Contact record. - **[Configure In-Kind Gift Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are in-kind gift settings related to payments and rollups that you may want to configure. - **[(Optional) Activate In-Kind Workflow Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP provides a Fair Market Value field on the In-Kind Gift Layout. You may want the Fair Market Value amount reflected as the "Amount" of the In-Kind Gift. This is useful if you want to see the Fair Market Value of an In-Kind Gift included in the automatic rollup statistics on the Contact or Account. ## About In-Kind Gifts The NPSP In-Kind Gifts feature lets you track non-monetary gifts to your organization such as computers, food, clothing, equipment or professional expertise. Keep In-Kind Gifts separate from cash donations for accurate reporting. NPSP In-Kind Gifts uses the following object: - Opportunity (standard object): Use an In-Kind Gift record type on Opportunity, and In-Kind sales process, to track In-Kind Gifts. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.66 (3/2/2016). ## Create In-Kind Opportunity Stages Create Opportunity stages for In-Kind Gifts. (If you already have these stages configured, you don't need to recreate them.) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Forecast Category is always set to Omitted since the declared value of In-Kind Gifts should not be reflected in Forecast reporting. | Stage Name | API Name | Type | Probability | Forecast Category | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | In-Kind Not Yet Received | In-Kind Not Yet Received | Open | 50% | Omitted | | In-Kind Received | In-Kind Received | Closed/Won | 100% | Omitted | | Prospecting | Prospecting | Open | 10% | Pipeline | | Withdrawn | Withdrawn | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | To add Opportunity stages: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click the **Stage** field. 6. In the Opportunity Stages Picklist Values related list, click **New**. 7. Enter the Stage Name, API Name, Type, Probability, a Forecast Category as shown in the table. 8. Click **Save**. For more information on how to create Opportunity stages, see [Understand and Customize Sales Processes and Paths](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/opportunity-settings-in-nonprofit-success-pack/understand-and-customize-sales-process-and-path-npsp). ## Create an In-Kind Sales Process Follow the steps to create a sales process for in-kind gifts. 1. From Setup, enter Sales Processes in the Quick Find box, then click **Sales Processes**. 2. Click **New** to create an In-Kind Gift sales process. - Sales Process Name: In-Kind Gift - Selected Values: Prospecting, In-Kind Not Yet Received, In-Kind Received, Withdrawn 3. Click **Save**. ![In-Kind Gift Sales Process](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/in_kind_sales_process.png) For more information on configuring Sales Processes, see [Understand and Customize Sales Processes and Paths](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/opportunity-settings-in-nonprofit-success-pack/understand-and-customize-sales-process-and-path-npsp). ## Create In-Kind Record Type Follow the steps to create a record type for in-kind gifts. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. If the In-Kind Gift record type does not already exist, create one with the following details: - Existing Record Type: Master - Record Type Label: In-Kind Gift - Sales Process: In-Kind Gift - Description: Use this record type to track In-Kind Gifts such as office supplies, etc. - Active: selected 5. Next to each profile that can select this Record Type, check the **Enable for Profile** box. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Select **Apply one layout to all profiles**, then select the In-Kind Gift Layout. 8. Click **Save**. For more information on creating record types, see [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5). ## Choose Picklist Values for In-Kind Record Type Follow the steps to add picklist values to the in-kind record type. Once you’ve created the new record type, verify that the In-Kind Type picklist field has the two values, Goods and Services, selected for the In-Kind record type. Also verify that the Matching Gift Status field has Potential, Received, and Submitted selected. To edit picklists for record types: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **In-Kind Gift**. 5. In the Picklists Available for Editing section, click **Edit** next to In-Kind Type. 6. Make sure that Goods and Services are listed as Selected Values. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Click **Edit** next to Matching Gift Status. 9. Make sure that Potential, Received, and Submitted are listed as Selected Values. 10. Click **Save**. ## Set Field-Level Security Follow the steps to set access to Opportunity fields. Check that the relevant profiles and permission sets have access to the following Opportunity fields: - Fair Market Value - In-Kind Description - In-Kind Donor Declared Value - In-Kind Type To set field access: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile you want to set field-level security for. 3. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to Opportunity. 4. Make sure the profile has the correct level of access to each of the In-Kind Gift fields. If not, click **Edit** and select the checkbox, then click **Save**. For more information on setting field-level security, see [Verify Access for a Particular Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.checking_field_accessibility_for_a_particular_field.htm&type=5). ## Assign Page Layout to Record Type If you selected the In-Kind Gift Layout when you created the In-Kind Record Type, you can skip this step. Otherwise, assign the In-Kind Gift page layout to the In-Kind Gift Record Type. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 5. Click **Edit Assignment**. 6. In the In-Kind Gift column, make sure the In-Kind Gift Layout is selected for the appropriate profiles. 7. Click **Save**. ## Add a Lightning Action to Contacts Add a Lightning Action to Contacts to easily create a new In-Kind Gift from a Contact record. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. Click **New Action**. 5. Fill in the following details: - Action Type: Create a Record - Target Object: Opportunity - Relationship Field: Primary Contact - Record Type: In-Kind Gift - Standard Label Type: New \[Record Type\] - Name: NewInKind 6. Deselect **Create Feed Item** (unless you want a Chatter post each time a user creates an In-Kind Gift with this Action). 7. Click **Save**. 8. In the Page Layout editor, add the following fields to the New In-Kind Gift quick action layout: - Opportunity Name - Close Date - Stage - In-Kind Type - In-Kind Description - Optionally, remove the Next Step field 9. Click **Save**. Next, set default values for the Close Date, Opportunity Name, and Stage fields. 10. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**, and enter these values: - Field: Close Date - Value: Today() 11. Click **Save**. 12. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**, and enter these values: - Field: Opportunity Name - Value: Contact.FirstName & " " & Contact.LastName & " In-Kind " & TEXT(MONTH(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(DAY(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(YEAR(TODAY())) 13. Click **Save**. 14. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**, and enter these values: - Field: Stage - Specific Value: In-Kind Received 15. Click **Save**. Finally, add the Lightning Action to the Contact Lightning page layout: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click the **Contact Lightning Layout**. 5. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 6. Drag the New In-Kind Gift Lightning Action to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section of the page layout. 7. Click **Save**. ## Configure In-Kind Gift Settings There are in-kind gift settings related to payments and rollups that you may want to configure. ### Disable Payments for In-Kind Gifts Since there is no payment of actual funds for an In-Kind Gift, we recommend enabling a setting that prevents the automatic creation of Payment records for In-Kind Gifts. If you started with an NPSP Trial after August 25, 2020, this is already done for you. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Payments**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **In-Kind Gift** in the **Excluded Opp Record Types** section. 5. Click **Save**. ![Excluded Opp Record Types setting in NPSP Settings.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/in-kind_gifts_donationspayments.png) ### In-Kind Gifts in Account and Contact Rollups If needed, you can set up your rollups to exclude In-Kind Gifts. If you're using Customizable Rollups and **don't** want In-Kind giving reflected in rollups: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. 4. Click **View Filter Groups**. 5. Either click **New Filter Group** or click ![Down arrow icon to indicate that there are more actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) then click **Edit** to modify an existing filter group. 6. Add a filter rule with these values: - Object = Opportunity - Field = Record Type ID - Operator = Not In List - Value = In-Kind Gift 7. Click **Save**, then Save the filter group. You can now apply this filter group to Customizable Rollups that shouldn't include In-Kind Gift Opportunities. If you're not using Customizable Rollups and **don't** want In-Kind giving reflected in Contact and Account rollups: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Donor Statistics**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **In-Kind Gift** in the **Opp RecTypes Excluded for Account Rollup** and/or **Opp RecTypes Excluded for Contact Rollup** sections. 5. Click **Save**. If you **do** want In-Kind giving reflected in Contact and Account rollups, check the out-of-box filter groups that mention record types and make sure that they don't include filter rules that exclude In-Kind Gifts. Additionally, make sure the Amount and Fair Market Value fields are populated on In-Kind opportunities. Activate the Opportunity Copy FMV to Amount workflow rule to automatically copy the Fair Market Value to the Amount field. ## (Optional) Activate In-Kind Workflow Rule NPSP provides a Fair Market Value field on the In-Kind Gift Layout. You may want the Fair Market Value amount reflected as the "Amount" of the In-Kind Gift. This is useful if you want to see the Fair Market Value of an In-Kind Gift included in the automatic rollup statistics on the Contact or Account. You can activate a workflow rule that automatically copies the Fair Market Value to the Amount field if the Amount field is left blank. To activate this workflow rule: 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then click **Workflow Rules**. 2. Click **Activate** next to the Opportunity Copy FMV to Amount workflow rule. # Configure Intakes Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package. Intake is the process by which candidates seeking support from your organization are evaluated for enrollment in your programs. Use Intakes to track this process from the initial inquiry to the final result, which could be an approval to receive services or a referral to another provider for help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. Intakes are a collection of information from the Contact, Assessment, Program Engagement, and Case objects. An edit on an Intake also edits the related record for that object. For example, changing a client's phone number on an Intake also changes the phone number on their Contact record. - **[Required Setup for Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Intakes were released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete the required setup steps. - **[Configure Intake Checklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure and use Intake Checklists. - **[Create Different Intake Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are two ways to create different Intake processes, using Intake Checklists and record types. - **[Configure Intake Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit, remove, or add new Intake Stages. - **[Configure Intake Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit, remove, or add new Intake Results values. - **[Customize Intake Fields on Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Intake-specific fields on the Intake Layout. - **[Customize the Look of Intake Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Intake Record Page includes commonly-used components like Intake Source, Client Information, Assessments, Documents, Intake Results, and Program Engagements. You can edit the page to move these components around, and within the Client Information component, you can modify the visibility of the client photo, badge, pronouns, watchlist, and Client ID elements. - **[Customize Client Information on Intake Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Client Information fields that display on Intakes, including Demographic Information, Contact Information, and Emergency Contact Information. - **[Add Client Information Sections to Intake Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create an entirely new Client Information section on the Intake Record Page, in addition to Demographic Information, Contact Information, and Emergency Contact Information. - **[Edit Referral Related Lists on Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit the fields in custom related lists for Inbound Referrals and Outbound Referrals. ## Required Setup for Intakes Intakes were released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete the required setup steps. Intakes were released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete the required setup steps. If you already have Intakes in your org, you can skip this setup. If you plan to use Referrals, also complete the required setup in [Configure Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_required_setup_for_intakes_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Referrals feature was released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required set up steps."). First, add Quick Actions to Intakes so that users can create Outbound Referrals and Program Engagements from an Intake. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Intake**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Intake Layout**. 6. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**, then: - Drag **New Outbound Referral** to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. - Drag **New Program Engagement** to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 7. Click **Save**. Next, Add the Intake field to the Program Engagement page layout. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Program Engagement**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Case Management Program Engagement Layout**. 6. Drag the **Intake** field from the palette to the Additional Details section. 7. Click **Save**. Then, let users create Intakes from Outbound Referrals. You can enable Run Flows in user profiles or permission sets, or enable Flow User on a user detail page: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Users, then click **Users**. 3. Click a user's name. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Select **Flow User**. 6. Click **Save**. Finally, if you plan to use Referrals, also complete the required setup in [Configure Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_required_setup_for_intakes_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Referrals feature was released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required set up steps."). ## Configure Intake Checklists Configure and use Intake Checklists. Create Intake Checklists to help users complete the intake process and navigate Intake records. Use Intake Checklists to guide users through necessary intake tasks, such as collecting personal information and completing assessments. Intake Checklists also help users navigate Intake records in a preferred order when you link tasks to page anchors that you configure on the Intake page layout. Intake Checklists use an existing Salesforce feature, Action Plan Templates, to create individual checklists. After you create Action Plan Templates, use Action Plan Template Groups to group the checklists by criteria meaningful to your organization, such as by program. The Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Group tabs are accessible from the App Launcher in your org but aren't added to the Case Management app. If you want to learn about other ways to use Action Plan Templates, see [Enable Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fsc_action_plans.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. After you create Intake Checklists using Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Groups, users can add them to Intake records following your organization's guidelines. On an Intake, users add an Intake Checklist by selecting an Action Plan Template Group (1), such as Housing Program. ![Select Checklist Template dialog showing the Job Readiness Program and Housing Program options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/intake_checklist_1.png) In the Action Plan Template Group, there can be one or more Action Plan Templates (2), such as Collect Personal Information, each with one or more Tasks (3), such as Collect Emergency Contact. Users can check off tasks as they complete them. ![Intake Checklist showing Action Plan Template options with tasks](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/intake_checklist_2.png) ### One-Time Setup To use Intake Checklists, complete these one-time setup tasks. 1. Give users access. See [User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_userperms.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. For users to create Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Groups, give Read, Create, and Edit access on Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Groups. Confirm Action Plan Template tab visibility on user profiles; see [View and Edit Tab Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_tab_visibility.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 2. For users to add Intake Checklists to Intake records, give Create and, optionally, Delete access on Action Plan. Give Read access on Template and Template Groups. Finally, confirm that **Edit Tasks** is enabled in System Permissions, either from a user profile or permission set. 2. Set up Sharing Settings for Action Plan, Action Plan Template, and Action Plan Template Group. See [Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=managing_the_sharing_model.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 3. If you previously made changes to the Intake record page: Edit the Intake page following [these instructions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure and use Intake Checklists.") and select either **Main Region with Header, Sticky Left Sidebar** (the checklist will not scroll with the page) or **Header and Left Sidebar** (the checklist will scroll with the page). Then, add the Action Plan Checklist component to the left sidebar, and in Field API Name of Action Plan Template Group lookup, enter caseman\_ \_ActionPlanTemplateGroup\_ \_c. ### Create an Intake Checklist To create an Intake Checklist, create Action Plan Templates first, then add the Action Plan Templates to Action Plan Template Groups. An Action Plan Template is a set of tasks for users to complete when they intake clients that can be checked off upon completion. An example of an Action Plan Template is Collect Personal Information, with the tasks Collect Emergency Contact, Collect Contact Information, and Collect Demographic Information.  After you create Action Plan Templates, add them to Action Plan Template Groups. Action Plan Template Groups are what users select when they add an Intake Checklist to an Intake record. Set up different Action Plan Template Groups for different programs to provide program-specific intake steps, for example, one for a Housing Program and one for a Job Readiness program. Although both Action Plan Template Groups are likely to include the Action Plan Template to Collect Personal Information, the Housing Program Action Plan Template Group might include an Action Plan Template named Housing Assessment, and the Job Readiness Program Action Plan Template Group might include an Action Plan Template named Employment Assessment. You can also link an Action Plan Template to a page [anchor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) on a section of the Intake page. For example, you can add a page anchor from the Action Plan Template Employment Assessment to the section of the Intake page that has employment assessment information. First, create Action Plan Templates. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 1. Give the Action Plan Template a name that describes the tasks it contains; this is the name of your checklist. Our example is Collect Personal Information. 2. Don't change the Action Plan Type—it will always be Industries. 3. From Target Object, select **Intake**. 4. Optionally, select **Let users add items to action plans** to let users add their own action plans to an Intake record. 5. Click **Save**. 3. Click **New Task**. 1. Enter a Subject, which is the name of a task. Our example is Collect Emergency Contact. 2. Select a Priority. 3. Enter the number of days that a user has to complete the task after they add the Intake Checklist to a record. 4. Optionally, make the task required. 5. Optionally, assign the task to a specific user. Tasks are automatically assigned to the person who creates the checklist on a record. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Optionally, click **New Task** to add additional tasks. In our example, we would also add Collect Contact Information and Collect Demographic Information. 4. When you're done, click **Publish Template**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note You won't be able to use the Action Plan Template until it's published. Action Plan Template tasks can't be changed after they're published. 5. Click **Publish**. 6. Optionally, create more Action Plan Templates. When you're done, move on to add Action Plan Templates to Action Plan Template Groups. Next, add the Action Plan Templates to Action Plan Template Groups. Now, users can [create Intake Checklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_intake_new_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Intakes to collect information about potential clients so you can evaluate how to best help them."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Template Groups**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the Action Plan Template Group a name, which is the name that users will see when they select a checklist on an Intake record. Our example is Housing Program. 4. From Template Object, select **Intake\_ \_c**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. On the Action Plan Template Group, click the **Related** tab. 7. Next to Action Plan Template Group Items, click **New**. 1. From Action Plan Template, search for and then select an Action Plan Template. Our example is Collect Personal Information. 2. Enter a name that reflects the Action Plan Template you chose. For example, Collect Personal Information. This name isn't visible to users. 3. Optionally, enter the order that the Action Plan Template will appear in the checklist. 0 is the top position, followed by 1, 2, 3, and so on. 4. If you want to link the Action Plan Template to a page anchor already configured on Intakes, enter a page anchor name. 5. Click **Save**. 8. Repeat step 7 to add additional Action Plan Templates. In our example, we’ll also add Housing Assessment. ### Optional: Add Anchors for Intake Checklists Add page anchors from the Intake Checklist to sections of the Intake page to help users navigate Intake records. For example, if you have an Action Plan Template named Employment Assessment, add a page anchor to Assessments on the Intake page so you can link to it from the Intake Checklist. 1. Click the **Intakes** tab. 2. Click an Intake name. 3. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 4. Under Components, enter Page Anchor in the search bar. 5. Drag **Page Anchor** to the place on the page that you will link to. 6. In the right panel, under Anchor, enter a name for the anchor. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Click **Activate**. You have a few options for activating the Intake record page. For more information, see [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - Make the page the org default for the object. - Make the page the default object record page for specific Lightning apps. - Assign the page to a combination of Lightning apps, record types, and profiles. - Assign the page to a form factor, such as a desktop or phone. 9. On the activation screen, click the tab for the option you chose, and follow the steps to activate the page. 10. Add a link to the page anchor in an [Action Plan Template Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). ### Optional: Allow the Intake Checklist to Scroll Intake Checklists appear on the left sidebar of an Intake record in a fixed position, which means that the Intake Checklist always stays in the same position on the page, even when the page is scrolled. If you want the Intake Checklist to scroll with the rest of the page, or if you want to add other components to the left sidebar, you’ll need to change the page layout. 1. Click the **Intakes** tab. 2. Click an Intake name. 3. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 4. In the right panel, next to Template, click **Change**. 5. Select **Header and Left Sidebar**. 6. Leave the mappings as default, unless you want to make additional changes. 7. Click **Done**. Then, make any additional changes to the [look of Intake record pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package."). ### Optional: Add Action Plans Related List Let users add their own Action Plans on Intake records. First, update the page layout for Intakes. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Intake**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Intake Layout**. 6. In the palette, click **Related Lists**. 7. Drag Action Plans to the page layout. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Click **Yes**. Then, add the related list to the Intake page. 1. Click the **Intakes** tab. 2. Click an Intake name. 3. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 4. From the Components panel on the left, find **Related List - Single** and drag it to the page layout. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Click **Activation…** You have a few options for activating the Intake record page:  1. Make the page the org default for the object. 2. Make the page the default object record page for specific Lightning apps. 3. Assign the page to a combination of Lightning apps, record types, and profiles. 4. Assign the page to a form factor, such as a desktop or phone. 7. On the activation screen, click the tab for the option you chose, and follow the steps to activate the page. ## Create Different Intake Processes There are two ways to create different Intake processes, using Intake Checklists and record types. Your organization may need different intake processes based on your programs, the people applying for your programs, or your organization's policies. For example, you may need one type of Intake for a job readiness program and another type of Intake for a housing program. There are two ways to create different Intake processes, using Intake Checklists and record types. - Use [Intake Checklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package.") to provide Case Managers with a list of steps tailored to different Intake processes. For example, create one Intake Checklist for your job readiness program and another Intake Checklist for your housing program. Each Intake Checklist would include tasks customized for their respective program. The housing program Intake Checklist would include housing history, housing status, and housing needs assessment, while the job readiness Intake Checklist would include collecting a resume, job history, and a skills assessment. With Intake Checklists, you don’t need to modify the Intake page layout. - Use record types when you want to modify the fields or page layout on an Intake based on different processes, or if you have different support or approval processes. For example, if your housing program requires a housing assessment but your emergency assistance program doesn't require any assessments, create a Record Type named Housing and associate it to a page layout with Assessments. Then create a Record Type named Emergency Assistance and associate it to a page layout without Assessments. - Follow the instructions in [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=creating_record_types.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help, and select **Intake** as the object. If you want to assign different page layouts for different record types, configure those first. - You may also want to create Intake Checklists for your different Record Types. You can create an Intake Checklist to match each Record Type, for example, an Intake Checklist for the housing program with steps that match the page layout for the housing program. If you use the same Record Type for multiple programs, you can create different Intake Checklists customized for each program. - If your organization uses Inbound Referrals and you want users to create Intakes from Inbound Referrals, also complete the steps in Create Intakes from Inbound Referrals using Record Types. ### Create Intakes from Inbound Referrals using Record Types If your organization uses Inbound Referrals and Intake record types, and you want users to create Intakes from Inbound Referrals, complete these setup steps. First, update the Referral to Intake flow to include Intake record types. For more information about using the Flow Builder, see [Flow Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=flow_builder.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note If you customize flows in Case Management, your org won't receive automatic upgrades to flows in future Case Management package upgrades. You will need to manually apply the updates and save a new version of your custom flow. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then click **Flows**. 3. Click **Referral to Intake**. 4. Click the Flow connector between Has Intake Id? and Set Intake Defaults, then press Delete on your keyboard to delete it. 5. Drag the **Select Intake Record Type** element to the left of Set Intake Defaults. 6. Drag the connector node from Has Intake Id? to Select Intake Record Type. 7. Drag the connector node from Select Intake Record Type to Set Intake Defaults. 8. Double-click **Set Intake Defaults**, then: 1. Click **Add Assignment**. 2. From Variable, select **varIntake.RecordTypeId**. Be sure to select the one with the period in it. 3. From Operator, select **Equals**. 4. From Value, select **varIntakeRecordTypeId**. 5. Click **Done**. 9. Click **Save As**. 1. Enter a Flow Label. 2. Note the Flow API Name—you’ll need it in the next section! 3. Click **Save**. You can ignore warnings that Lightning Runtime is required. 10. Click **Activate**. Next, create a custom button to replace the Create Intake button on Inbound Referrals. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Case**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click **New Button or Link**. 6. Enter a label for the button. The default label is Create Intake, so use a label that will make sense to users in the context of your Intake process. The Name will be created automatically. 7. Optionally enter a Description. 8. From Display Type, select **Detail Page Button**. 9. From Behavior, select **Display in existing window without sidebar or header**. 10. From Content Source, select **URL**. 11. In the large text field, enter the following, but replace ENTER\_FLOW\_API\_NAME with the Flow API Name that you noted in the previous section. /lightning/cmp/caseman\_\_flowNavigator?c\_\_caseId={!Case.Id}&c\_\_flowApiName=ENTER\_FLOW\_API\_NAME 12. Click **Save**. 13. Click **OK**. Then, replace the Create Intake button on Inbound Referrals with the custom button you created.  1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Case**. 4. Click **Case Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Inbound Referral**. 6. Under Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions, drag **Create Intake** from the page layout back to the palette. 7. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 8. Drag the custom button you created to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 9. Click **Save**. ## Configure Intake Stages Edit, remove, or add new Intake Stages. Intake Stages are used to track the stage of an Intake. The default Intake Stages are: Not Started, In Progress, Awaiting Client Input, In Review, Not Approved, and Approved. You can edit, remove, or add new Intake Stages. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Intake**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **Stage**. 6. Scroll to Values. - To create a new Intake Stage: Click **New**. If you have custom Record Types, select the Record Types to add the Stage to. Click **Save**. - To edit or delete an Intake Stage: Click **Edit** or **Del** next to the Intake Stage. ## Configure Intake Results Edit, remove, or add new Intake Results values. Intake Results are used to track the outcome of an Intake. The default Intake Results are: Approved, Not Approved: Client Declined Services, Not Approved: Referred Elsewhere, Not Approved: Rejected, and Pending. You can edit, remove, or add new Intake Results. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Intake**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **Result**. 6. Scroll to Values. - To create a new Intake Result: Click **New**. If you have custom Record Types, select the Record Types to add the Result to. Click **Save**. - To edit or delete an Intake Result: Click **Edit** or **Del** next the Intake Result. ## Customize Intake Fields on Intakes Customize Intake-specific fields on the Intake Layout. You can customize Intake-specific fields on the Intake Layout. For example, customize Intake Results and Stage. To customize Client Information fields that display on the Intake, including Demographic Information, Contact Information, and Emergency Contact Information, see [Customize Client Information on Intake Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package."). 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Intake Layouts**. 5. To add a field, drag it from the palette onto the layout. To remove a field, drag it back to the palette. 6. Click **Save**. ## Customize the Look of Intake Record Pages The Intake Record Page includes commonly-used components like Intake Source, Client Information, Assessments, Documents, Intake Results, and Program Engagements. You can edit the page to move these components around, and within the Client Information component, you can modify the visibility of the client photo, badge, pronouns, watchlist, and Client ID elements. 1. Click the **Intakes** tab. 2. Click an Intake name. 3. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 4. Add, remove, or edit sections and components. 5. When you're done, click **Save**. 6. Click **Activate**. You have a few options for activating the Intake record page. - Make the page the org default for the object. - Make the page the default object record page for specific Lightning apps. - Assign the page to a combination of Lightning apps, record types, and profiles. - Assign the page to a form factor, such as a desktop or phone. 7. On the activation screen, click the tab for the option you've chosen, and follow the steps to activate the page. For more information, see [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize Client Information on Intake Record Pages Customize Client Information fields that display on Intakes, including Demographic Information, Contact Information, and Emergency Contact Information. To customize Intake-specific fields on the Intake Layout, for example, to customize Intake Results and Intake Stage, see [Customize Intake fields on Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package."). 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click the name of the section you want to update, for example, Demographic Information. 6. Click **Edit Layout**. 7. Drag fields from the palette to the page layout. You can also hover over an existing field and click the minus button to remove a field. 8. Click **Save**. ## Add Client Information Sections to Intake Record Pages You can create an entirely new Client Information section on the Intake Record Page, in addition to Demographic Information, Contact Information, and Emergency Contact Information. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click **New Action**. 6. From Action Type, select **Update a Record**. 7. Enter a label for the section you want to create, for example, Housing Information. Then, click **Save**. 8. Drag the Contact fields from the palette to the section layout, then click **Save**. 9. Go to the Intakes tab and find an Intake with a Contact associated with it. Click the Intake Name. 10. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 11. In the left panel, find the Related Record component and drag it to where you want it to appear on the Intake Record Page. 12. In the right panel: - In Header Label, enter the name you want users to see. For example, Housing Information. - Click **Edit Lookup Field**. - For First Lookup, select **Contact**. For Second Lookup, select **Use This Contact**. Then click **Done**. - From Update Action, select the name of the section you created in step 7. 13. Click **Save**. 14. Click **Activate**.  You have a few options for activating the Intake record page. - Make the page the org default for the object. - Make the page the default object record page for specific Lightning apps. - Assign the page to a combination of Lightning apps, record types, and profiles. - Assign the page to a form factor, such as a desktop or phone. 15. On the activation screen, click the tab for the option you've chosen, and follow the steps to activate the page. For more information, see [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Edit Referral Related Lists on Intakes Edit the fields in custom related lists for Inbound Referrals and Outbound Referrals. Intakes include custom related lists for Inbound Referrals and Outbound Referrals to show inbound and outbound referrals related to an Intake. You can edit the fields in these custom related lists, just be sure that the fields you want to add are already created in Fields & Relationships on the Case object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Unlike standard related lists, when you make changes to these custom related lists, you need to click the refresh button on the related list component on the Intake to see the changes. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click **Case**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click either **Inbound Referrals Related List** or **Outbound Referrals Related List**. 6. To add a field, drag it from the palette to **In the Field Set**. To remove a field, drag it back to the palette. 7. Click **Save**. # Configure K-12 Architecture Kit Set up K-12 Architecture Kit to meet the needs of your school. - **[Configure K-12 Architecture Kit Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign record types to profiles, and page layouts to record types, so that users have access to the records that they need. - **[Configure Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_account_model_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA Settings, configure the settings that control your primary account model, including the Account record types used for Administrative and Household Accounts. - **[Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage and edit addresses for Contacts and Accounts in EDA. - **[Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_affiliations_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA Settings, click Affiliations and configure the Contact fields mapped to Primary Affiliations. - **[Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage email and phone settings for Contacts in EDA. - **[Configure Error Handling in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_error_handling_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up how EDA handles and tracks errors. - **[Configure Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA Settings, click Relationships and configure the details of creating Reciprocal Relationships and auto-creating Relationships. - **[Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about, manage, and update Account names in EDA. - **[EDA and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how EDA is localized and how to manage translations. - **[Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access and manage EDA Settings, activate the latest EDA release, and find helpful resources. - **[Enable EDA Apex Class Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.enable_k12_apex_class_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them. - **[State and Country Picklists for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_state_and_country_picklists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how EDA uses State and Country Picklists. - **[Understand Addresses in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how addresses are tracked and stored in EDA. # Configure K-12 Architecture Kit Basics Assign record types to profiles, and page layouts to record types, so that users have access to the records that they need. - **[Assign Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Depending on the version that you started with, it's possible that some record type assignments are different in your org. Make sure that these record types are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. - **[Assign Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For objects with page layout assignments that vary by record type, and for custom objects, the default page layout assignments can require configuration. Make sure that these layouts are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. - **[Specify the Household Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install K-12 Architecture Kit using the installer, the Administrative account model is enabled by default. Because family relationships are central to K-12 student success, and tracking data about a student's household can be as important as tracking data about students themselves, we recommend that you change the default Account model to Household Accounts. ## Assign Record Types to Profiles Depending on the version that you started with, it's possible that some record type assignments are different in your org. Make sure that these record types are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. Academic Certification Certificate, Degree, Diploma (default) Account Academic Department, Academic Program, Administrative (default), Business Organization, Educational Institution, Household Account, Sports Organization Attribute Credential (default), Student Characteristic Case Incident (default), Positive Behavior Contact Faculty/Staff, Guardian, Student (default) Course Connection Default, Student (default), Teacher Credential Badge (default), Certification, License Customize record type assignments or add assignments to other profiles as needed. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile to assign record types to. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click an object, for example, **Cases**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Select **Assigned Record Types** and **Default Record Type** for the profile. 7. **Save** your changes. ## Assign Page Layouts For objects with page layout assignments that vary by record type, and for custom objects, the default page layout assignments can require configuration. Make sure that these layouts are assigned to the System Administrator profile, at a minimum, and repeat this configuration for other profiles as needed. Academic Certification Record Types - Certificate, Degree, and Diploma: EDA Academic Academic Certification Layout Account Record Types - Academic Department: K12 Kit Academic Department Layout - Academic Program: K12 Kit Academic Program Layout - Administrative, Business Organization: HEDA Organization Layout - Educational Institution: K12 Kit Educational Institution Layout - Household Account: K12 Kit Household Layout - Sports Organization: K12 Kit Sports Organization Layout Attribute Record Types - Credential: K12 Kit Credential Layout - Student Characteristic: K12 Kit Student Characteristic Layout Behavior Involvement - Incident Involvement (Default): K12 Kit Behavior Involvement Layout - Positive Behavior Involvement: K12 Kit Positive Behavior Involvement Layout Behavior Response - Incident Response (Default): K12 Kit Behavior Response Layout - Positive Behavior Response: K12 Kit Positive Behavior Response Layout Case Record Types - Incident: K12 Kit Incident Layout - Positive Behavior: K12 Kit Positive Behavior Layout Contact Record Types - Faculty/Staff: K12 Faculty Staff Layout - Guardian: K12 Kit Guardian Layout - Student: K12 Kit Student Layout Course Connection Record Types - Default, Student: K12 Kit Student Course Enrollment Layout - Teacher: K12 Kit Teacher Course Enrollment Layout Credential Record Types - Badge, Certification, and License: EDA Credential Layout For more help, see [Assign Page Layouts to Profiles or Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). ## Specify the Household Account Model When you install K-12 Architecture Kit using the installer, the Administrative account model is enabled by default. Because family relationships are central to K-12 student success, and tracking data about a student's household can be as important as tracking data about students themselves, we recommend that you change the default Account model to Household Accounts. After making this change, any time you create a new, independent Contact (that is, a Contact that is not part of another Account), K-12 Architecture Kit automatically creates a Household Account for you, based on the Contact's last name. For example, if you create a new Contact record for a student named Bobby Smith, the Smith Household Account is created for you. 1. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), find and select **EDA Settings**. 2. On the System tab, click **Edit**. 3. From Default Account Model, choose **Household Account**. 4. Click **Save**. That's it! You're now all set up to start using K-12 Architecture Kit. # Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub. - **[Learn About K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your support staff and system administrators have the access they need to system functionality, standard and custom objects, and fields. - **[Configure K-12 Support Staff System Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** K-12 support staff need access to some specific System Permissions, which are called General User Permissions in the original profile user interface. Configure them by editing the appropriate profile using the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Configure K-12 Support Staff Object and Field Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure object and field permissions for K-12 support staff by editing the appropriate profile. Here's how to configure permissions using the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Account Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Account object for your K-12 staff. - **[Alert Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Alert object for your K-12 staff. - **[Case Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Case object for your K-12 staff. - **[Contact Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Contact object for your K-12 staff. - **[Course Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course object for your K-12 staff. - **[Course Connection Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Connection object for your K-12 staff. - **[Course Offering Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering object for your K-12 staff. - **[Event Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Event object for your K-12 staff. - **[Program Enrollment Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Program Enrollment object for your K-12 staff. - **[Relationship Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Relationship object for your K-12 staff. - **[Success Plan Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan object for your K-12 staff. - **[Success Plan Template Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Template object for your K-12 staff. - **[Success Plan Template Task Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Template Task object for your K-12 staff. - **[Task Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Task object for your K-12 staff. - **[Term Permissions for K-12 Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Term object for your K-12 staff. ## Learn About K-12 Support Staff Permissions Make sure your support staff and system administrators have the access they need to system functionality, standard and custom objects, and fields. To help you get started, the K-12 support staff and System Administrator profiles included with Student Success Hub are configured with the permissions documented here. The support staff permission set is also configured with these permissions. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Setting all permissions correctly is essential, but pay especially close attention to setting field permissions. If field permissions are incorrect, support staff are likely to encounter errors using the app. It's easy to overlook a field, and tracking down the source of errors can be tricky and time-consuming. So double-check your field permissions—or better yet, triple-check them. ## Configure K-12 Support Staff System Permissions K-12 support staff need access to some specific System Permissions, which are called General User Permissions in the original profile user interface. Configure them by editing the appropriate profile using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your K-12 support staff. 3. Click **System Permissions** and then click **Edit**. 4. Make sure these fields are selected: - **Edit Events** - **Edit Tasks** 5. Save your changes. ## Configure K-12 Support Staff Object and Field Permissions Configure object and field permissions for K-12 support staff by editing the appropriate profile. Here's how to configure permissions using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name that you want to set permissions and security for. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click the object you want to configure, click **Edit**, and specify the minimum Object Permissions and Field Permissions shown in the tables. 5. If you're configuring multiple objects, use the breadcrumb navigation to select the next object from the menu. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access required for core Student Success Hub functionality. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed—and many standard Salesforce items are not—it means that either: - Student Success Hub doesn't have a dependency on it. Your institution can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be changed. ## Account Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Account object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Case Team Name

√

## Alert Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Alert object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Is Closed

√

√

Student Contact

 √  

Student Record

 √  
## Case Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Case object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Alert

√

√

Case Origin

√

√

Case Reason

√

√

Contact Name

√

√

Description

 √ √

Parent Case

 √ √

Priority

 √ √

Subject

 √ √

Type

 √ √
## Contact Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Contact object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Chosen Full Name

√

Email

√

Primary Educational Institution

√

Primary Household

√

Student ID

√
## Course Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Course Connection Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course Connection object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Course Offering Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
## Event Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Event object for your K-12 staff. ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Description

√

√

Location

√

√

Related To

√

√

Type

√

√
## Program Enrollment Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Program Enrollment object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Class Year

√

GPA

√

  
## Relationship Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Relationship object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
## Success Plan Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions \* Recommended only for administrators, not support staff, to auto-apply a Success Plan

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access
Auto Apply Success Plan Template √*  

Cancelled

√

√

Comments

√

√

From Template

√

√

Is Case Student Record

√

Open Tasks

√

Overdue Tasks

√

Status

√

√

Student Contact

√

√

Student Record

√

√

Tasks

√
## Success Plan Template Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Template object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Active

√

√

Active Tasks

√

Comments

√

√

Usage Count

√
## Success Plan Template Task Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan Template Task object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Active

√

√

Comments

√

√

Priority

√

√

Relative Due Date

√

√

Type

√

√
## Task Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Task object for your K-12 staff. ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Due Date

√

√

Name

√

√

Related To

√

√
## Term Permissions for K-12 Staff Configure the required permissions for the Term object for your K-12 staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
# Configure Leads Configure leads by mapping custom lead fields and setting the default action for creating opportunities from leads. - **[Map Custom Lead Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you convert Leads, understand how standard fields map to Contact, Account, and Opportunity fields. - **[Set Your Default Action for Creating Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In NPSP, you can determine if Opportunities are created when you convert Leads. Before you decide, take a moment to reflect on your organization's processes and identify what type of prospect you're using Leads to capture. ## Map Custom Lead Fields Before you convert Leads, understand how standard fields map to Contact, Account, and Opportunity fields. For more information on mapping, see [Lead Conversion Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lead_conversion_mapping.htm&type=5). You can also map custom Lead fields. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. Click **Lead**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **Map Lead Fields**. 5. Map fields to meet your organization's needs. There are some limitations and best practices when mapping custom Lead fields. For more information, see [Guidelines for Mapping Custom Lead Fields for Lead Conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_mapleads_guidelines.htm&type=5). ### Phone and Email Fields It's important to understand the [Phone and Email Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article provides more information about the phone and email workflow rules that come with the Nonprofit Success Pack.") before setting up Lead field mapping because you can't map from the standard Lead phone and email fields to the custom NPSP phone and email fields. Let's look at an example. To fill the Personal Email field on the Contact when converting a Lead, follow these steps: Now when you convert a Lead, the standard mapping writes the Lead email field to the Contact email field and the workflow rule copies the email to the Personal Email field. Set up the same mapping for phone fields. 1. Enable the **Contact.EmailChanged\_Personal** workflow rule. 2. In **Map Lead Fields**, set **Preferred Email** under Lead Fields to Preferred Email under Contact Fields. 3. Click **Save**. ## Set Your Default Action for Creating Opportunities In NPSP, you can determine if Opportunities are created when you convert Leads. Before you decide, take a moment to reflect on your organization's processes and identify what type of prospect you're using Leads to capture. For example, if you're using Leads to find prospective donors, you likely want the Opportunity record created when you determine that the Lead will become a donor. On the contrary, if you're using Leads to find more volunteers, you may not want to create an Opportunity when you convert a Lead. [Read this article for more examples of why and how to use Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization. Once you're confident the person is going to donate, volunteer, or engage with your organization in some way, convert that Lead to a Contact or Account."). It's important to understand this setting simply determines if the Do Not Create a New Opportunity upon Conversion checkbox is selected (or not) by default on the Lead Conversion page. So, if this setting is defaulted to create an Opportunity, but you come across a Lead that shouldn't have an Opportunity when converted, you can manually change that on the Lead conversion page. By default, NPSP does NOT create an Opportunity when you convert a Lead. If you want to change that behavior: 1. On the NPSP Settings tab, click **People** | **Leads**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Edit** and select **Create Opportunity on Lead Convert**. 3. Click **Save.** # Configure Leads Settings Customize the Lead object for use in your educational institution. - **[Configure Lead for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Lead is a sales-focused standard object, which means your institution is not likely to use all of its available fields. To minimize potential confusion, we recommend that you update your security settings, navigation, and various layouts to reference only the Lead fields you need for EDA. - **[Configure Accounts Created During Lead Conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you convert a Lead to a Contact, EDA automatically creates a container Account record for the Contact using the record type you specify. However, the name of the created Account depends on these Account Model settings in EDA Settings. ## Configure Lead for EDA Lead is a sales-focused standard object, which means your institution is not likely to use all of its available fields. To minimize potential confusion, we recommend that you update your security settings, navigation, and various layouts to reference only the Lead fields you need for EDA. While making these changes, also ensure that any staff who convert Leads have the appropriate Account record type assignments. And, for future use with assignment rules and Lead processes, consider creating custom Lead Status picklist values that align with your institution's recruiting process. The Lead Settings page in Setup controls some of the basic behaviors and conversion settings for your org. We recommend these settings. Lead Queue Settings Specify the user or queue that owns the Leads when assignment rules don't apply. You can also select to notify the Lead owner. Lead Conversion Settings Select Require Validation for Converted Leads to ensure that these EDA triggers fire when a Lead is converted: ADDR\_Account\_TDTM, ADDR\_Contact\_TDTM, CON\_DoNotContact\_TDTM, CON\_Preferred\_TDTM, and CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM. For more information about these triggers, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) Select Hide Opportunity Section of Convert Lead Window if your institution doesn't use Opportunities. Lead Merge Settings If your org-wide sharing default for Leads is Public Read/Write/Transfer, select Org-Wide Merge and Delete settings to let users merge and delete Leads. To track additional information for suspects, create custom fields on the Lead object. Then consider mapping the custom Lead fields to custom fields on Account, Contact, or Opportunity. These mappings are used when you convert Leads. For detailed steps, see [Map Custom Lead Fields for Lead Conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.customize_mapleads.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help.  To direct Leads to the right owners, create Lead assignment rules. For example, to assign all Leads whose last names range from A-E to a specific user or queue, go to the Lead Assignment Rules page in Setup. For detailed steps, see [Set Up Assignment Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=service.creating_assignment_rules.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help.  Lead processes let you define which Lead Status values apply to specific Lead record types. For example, let's say that Leads from a testing service cycle through different statuses than Leads from a college fair. Most institutions do fine without using Lead processes. If you need them, first update the Lead Status picklist values. Then create a Lead Process and assign it to a Lead Record Type. We also recommend you review [Things to Know About Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_supplemental.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Configure Accounts Created During Lead Conversion When you convert a Lead to a Contact, EDA automatically creates a container Account record for the Contact using the record type you specify. However, the name of the created Account depends on these Account Model settings in EDA Settings.
Setting Default Value
Default Account Model Administrative
Administrative Account Name Format {!LastName} Administrative Account
Household Account Name Format {!LastName} Household
Automatically Rename Household Accounts Turned On
Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts

Administrative and Household Account

If you started with EDA version 1.114 (Summer ‘21), the Administrative and Household Account record types are added to the list of selected record types by default. 

If you started with an earlier version of EDA, select the record types to use.
If a Lead is converted using a record type that is specified in Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts, EDA names the Account as follows. - When Administrative or Household Account record types are selected, Leads converted using these record types have an Account name that follows the format specified in either Administrative Account Name Format or Household Account Name Format. - When other Account record types are selected, Leads converted using these record types have an Account name that follows the default EDA Account name format of {!LastName} Account. If a Lead is converted using a record type that is not specified in Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts, the Account name is based on the Company field on the Lead record, which is standard Salesforce behavior.  If your org uses Household Account as your Default Account Model, EDA names the Account as follows. - If Automatically Rename Household Accounts is turned on, Leads converted using the Household Account record type have an Account name that follows the format specified in Household Account Name Format, regardless of whether Household Account is selected in Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts. - If Automatically Rename Household Accounts is turned off and Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts doesn’t specify Household Account, Leads converted using the Household Account record type have an Account name based on the Company field. - If Automatically Rename Household Accounts is turned off and Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts does specify Household Account, Leads converted using the Household Account record type have an Account name that follows the format specified in Household Account Name Format. If a user selects an existing Account when converting a Lead, the Account name doesn’t change. Now that you understand how Account naming works for converted Leads, update your EDA Settings. 1. From Education Cloud Settings, under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. If you don’t see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher or see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. In EDA Settings, click **Account Model** and then click **Edit**. 3. For Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts, update the list of selected account record types to include the record types you want available for Account renaming when converting Leads. 4. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure the RenameLeadConvertedAccounts\_TDTM Trigger Handler is enabled, otherwise Account renaming for converted Leads doesn’t work. For Trigger Handler details, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). If you have existing automation in place for Account naming, be sure to clear the Selected Account Record Types list in Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts, including the Administrative and Household Accounts that are included by default. For information about Account record types, refer to [Customize Administrative and Household Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). # Configure Legacy Recurring Donations Find out more about configuring legacy recurring donations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As of April 29th, 2020, Nonprofit Success Pack offers a new version of Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm) - **[About Legacy Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Legacy Recurring Donations feature allows you to track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. This feature accommodates both Open-Ended Recurring Donations (no end date set) and Fixed-Length Recurring Donations (end date set). - **[Review Legacy Recurring Donation Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you begin using NPSP's Recurring Donations feature, you should review, confirm, and optionally edit your Recurring Donations settings. NPSP provides a set of default values, but you can change these values at any time. - **[Set Up Additional Recurring Donation Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Always use last day of month checkbox and Day of Month picklist fields to further define the Close Date for Recurring Donation Opportunities. These options apply only to Recurring Donations that have Monthly, Quarterly, or custom installment periods using months. - **[Create Opportunity Stage Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP's Recurring Donations feature uses two Opportunity stages in particular to keep track of donations: Pledged and Closed Lost. The Pledged stage is unique to NPSP . - **[Add a Lightning Action to Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a Lightning Action to Contacts to easily create a new Open Recurring Donation from a Contact record. - **[Automatic Recurring Donations Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, NPSP names your Recurring Donations automatically. ## About Legacy Recurring Donations The NPSP Legacy Recurring Donations feature allows you to track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. This feature accommodates both Open-Ended Recurring Donations (no end date set) and Fixed-Length Recurring Donations (end date set). NPSP Recurring Donations uses these objects: - Recurring Donation (custom object): Use Recurring Donation records to track each individual donation that’s part of an ongoing pledge. - Opportunity (standard object): Used to track future pledged and paid installments. ## Review Legacy Recurring Donation Settings Before you begin using NPSP's Recurring Donations feature, you should review, confirm, and optionally edit your Recurring Donations settings. NPSP provides a set of default values, but you can change these values at any time. 1. Click ![App launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), then click **NPSP Settings**. 1. Click ![App launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), then click **NPSP Settings**. 2. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Make changes as necessary, then click **Save**. | Setting | Description | | --- | --- | | Opportunity Forecast Months | Number of months' worth of open Opportunities that NPSP maintains on Open-Ended Recurring Donations. NPSP makes sure there are always this many months' worth of Opportunities by creating the appropriate number of new Opportunities every month. The default is 12. | | Recurring Donation Batch Size | The number of records to process at a time when running the Recurring Donations batch job. The default is 50. Reduce to a smaller number if the batch job is failing due to system limits. | | Open Opportunity Behavior on RD Close | Tells NPSP what to do with any remaining open Opportunities when you mark the status of an Open-Ended Recurring Donation as Closed. The options are: Delete open Opportunities, Mark open Opportunities as Closed Lost, No action. | | Maximum Donations | Restricts the total number of Donations (installments) for Fixed-Length Recurring Donations. The default is 50. | | Add Campaign to All Opportunities | When selected, NPSP copies the Campaign you specified on the Recurring Donation record to all of its child Opportunities. If not selected, NPSP copies the Campaign to the first child Opportunity only. | | Opportunity Record Type | The Opportunity record type assigned to the Recurring Donation's child Opportunities. | ## Set Up Additional Recurring Donation Fields Use the Always use last day of month checkbox and Day of Month picklist fields to further define the Close Date for Recurring Donation Opportunities. These options apply only to Recurring Donations that have Monthly, Quarterly, or custom installment periods using months. When you select Always use last day of month, NPSP creates Recurring Donation Opportunities with the Close Date set to the last day of the month. When you select a value in the Day of Month picklist, NPSP creates Recurring Donation Opportunities with the Close Date set to your selected day of the month. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you select Always use last day of month, it takes precedence over any value you choose in the Day of Month picklist. If you want to set the Close Date to a day that is not the last day of the month, make sure that Always use last day of month is not selected. To make the Always use last day of month and Day of Month fields available: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile you want to set field-level security for. 3. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to Recurring Donations. 4. Make sure **Edit Access** is checked for the Always use last day of month and Day of Month fields. If not, click **Edit** and select the checkbox, then click **Save**. Now, make sure the fields show up on Recurring Donations by adding them to the page layout: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Recurring Donations**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Recurring Donation Layout**. 5. Drag the fields onto the page layout. 6. Click **Save**. For more information on setting field-level security, see [Configure Access to Fields, Objects, Tabs, and Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_config_security.htm). For more information on editing page layouts, see [Configure Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). ## Create Opportunity Stage Picklist Values NPSP's Recurring Donations feature uses two Opportunity stages in particular to keep track of donations: Pledged and Closed Lost. The Pledged stage is unique to NPSP . If you installed NPSP from the Trial, you will already have these picklist values in place. If you manually installed NPSP on top of Salesforce Enterprise Edition, you may not have one or both of these picklist values in place. If that's the case, you'll need to manually add them to your picklist values in order for Recurring Donations to work. ## Add a Lightning Action to Contacts Add a Lightning Action to Contacts to easily create a new Open Recurring Donation from a Contact record. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. Click **New Action**. 5. Fill in the following details: - Action Type: Create a Record - Target Object: Recurring Donations - Standard Label Type: \-None- - Label: New Open Recurring Donation - Name: New\_Open\_Recurring\_Donation - Description: Open Ended Recurring Donation with necessary fields. ![New Lightning action for Open Recurring Donations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rd_new_action.png) 6. Optionally select **Create Feed Item** and enter a Success Message. 7. Click **Save**. 8. In the Page Layout editor, add the following fields to the New Open Recurring Donation Quick Action layout: - Amount - Installment Period - Next Donation Date 9. Click **Quick Save**. 10. Add any additional fields you’d like to the page layout. 11. When you’re done adding fields, click **Save**. ![Recurring Donation action layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rd_action_layout.png) 12. To automatically populate fields on the new Recurring Donation that’s created from the action, select **New** in the Predefined Field Values. 13. Enter the following values: - Field: Recurring Donation Name - Formula Value: Contact.FirstName & " " & Contact.LastName & " Recurring Donation " & TEXT(MONTH(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(DAY(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(YEAR(TODAY())) 14. Click **Save**. 15. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**. 16. Enter the following values: - Field: Open Ended Status - Specific Value: Open 17. Click **Save**. 18. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**. 19. Enter the following values: - Field: Schedule Type - Specific Value: Multiply By 20. Click **Save**. Finally, add the Lightning Action to the Contact Lightning page layout: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Contact Layout**. 5. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 6. Drag the New Open Recurring Donation Lightning Action to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section of the Page Layout. ![Adding the New Open Recurring Donation to the Contact page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rd_action_pl.png) 7. Click **Save**. ## Automatic Recurring Donations Naming By default, NPSP names your Recurring Donations automatically. Here's how it works: 1. Go to the Recurring Donations tab and click **New**. 2. Fill out the required fields (Amount, Donor Type, Recurring Period, etc.). 3. Click **Save**. Once you save the record, NPSP updates the Recurring Donation Name using this format: _\[DonorName\] \[Amount\] - Recurring_ _\[DonorName\]_ is Contact Name when the Donor Type is Contact, or the Account Name when the Donor Type is Account and the Account is an Organizational Account. Let's look at some examples. - If you enter a new $100 Recurring Donation for Barbara Levy, the name becomes: - Barbara Levy $100 - Recurring - If you enter a new $500 Recurring Donation for Universal Containers, the name becomes: - Universal Containers $500 - Recurring If you have your own naming convention that you'd rather use, you can disable Automatic Recurring Donation Naming. When you disable naming, users will see the Recurring Donation Name field in the record entry and edit screens. 1. Go to **NPSP Settings** | **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations**. 2. Find **Recurring Donation Name Format** and select Disable Auto Naming. 3. Click **Save**. # Configure Levels Learn about NPSP Levels, how to create new level fields, how to secure and provide access to the Level object and fields, and how to add value to target picklists. - **[About Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Levels feature lets you track your constituents' level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. - **[Set Object and Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable access to the Level object and its fields for each profile that will be using Levels. - **[Create Level Fields on Contacts, Accounts, or other Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To show Level and Previous Level on Contacts, Accounts, or other objects, create custom fields and add them to your page layouts. - **[Add Value to Target Picklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a Level structure, you choose the object that the Level structure applies to by making a selection in the Target field. By default, you can select Account or Contact. If you're tracking Level values on an object other than Account or Contact, add that object to the Target field on the Level object. - **[(Optional) Give Users Access to the npsp.LVL\_LevelEdit Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** System Administrators have access to the npsp.LVL\_LevelEdit Visualforce page by default, but other profiles don't. If you want users with other profiles to manage Levels, you must give them access to the Visualforce page. ## About Levels The NPSP Levels feature lets you track your constituents' level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. NPSP Levels uses the following objects: - Level (custom object): Each level record you configure indicates a particular level of commitment, for example, Gold, Bronze, or Silver, that you can then assign to your constituents. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.81 (9/14/2016). ## Set Object and Field-Level Security Enable access to the Level object and its fields for each profile that will be using Levels. To set object and field access: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the Profile you want to set security for. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. In the Custom Object Permissions section, select **Read**, **Edit**, **Create**, and **Delete** for the Level object. This gives all users with this profile full access to use Levels. Depending on the profile, you may want to grant different access. 6. In the Custom Tab Settings section, select **Default On** to include the Level tab in your list of tabs or **Default Off** to make the tab accessible in App Launcher. 7. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to GAU Allocations. 8. Make sure **Read Access** or **Edit Access** is checked for all fields. If not, click **Edit** and select the checkbox. 9. Click **Save**. ## Create Level Fields on Contacts, Accounts, or other Objects To show Level and Previous Level on Contacts, Accounts, or other objects, create custom fields and add them to your page layouts. These instructions are for the Account object, but they apply to Contact or any other object for which you want to display Levels. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **New** to create a new field to display Level. 5. Give the field an appropriate name (we suggest Level). 6. Select **Lookup Relationship** as the field type, then click **Next**. 7. Select **Level** as the related object, then click **Next**. 8. Enter a Description and Help Text, then click **Next**. 9. Select the appropriate Field-Level Security for each profile, then click **Next**. 10. Select Page Layouts to add the new field to, then click **Next**. 11. If you don’t want to include the related list, deselect **Add Related List**, then click **Save**. 12. Repeat these steps to create a second Lookup Relationship field called Previous Level. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To display Levels on an object other than Contact or Account, there's an additional step required. For more information, see [Configure Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about NPSP Levels, how to create new level fields, how to secure and provide access to the Level object and fields, and how to add value to target picklists."). Once you've created Level structures, the values of the Level and Previous Level fields on Account, Contact, or other objects you configured are automatically updated every night by a batch job. Learn more in [Create and Manage Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. Create and manage NPSP Levels based on your organization's practices."). ## Add Value to Target Picklist When you create a Level structure, you choose the object that the Level structure applies to by making a selection in the Target field. By default, you can select Account or Contact. If you're tracking Level values on an object other than Account or Contact, add that object to the Target field on the Level object. First, find the API name of the object you plan to add. In this example, we're using the Affiliation object, but the instructions apply to any object: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, click the name of the object you wish to add, for example, **Affiliation.** 3. Make a note of the API Name of the object. In this example, it's npe5\_\_Affiliation\_\_c. ![API Name in Details dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/object_api_name.png) Now add that value to the Target picklist on the Level object: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, click **Level**, then click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **Target**. 4. In the Values related list, click **New**, then enter the API name of the object you want to add. In this example, we enter npe5\_\_Affiliation\_\_c. 5. Save your changes. ## (Optional) Give Users Access to the npsp.LVL\_LevelEdit Page System Administrators have access to the npsp.LVL\_LevelEdit Visualforce page by default, but other profiles don't. If you want users with other profiles to manage Levels, you must give them access to the Visualforce page. This page is required to use the New and Edit buttons on Levels. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile you want to edit. 3. In the Enabled Visualforce Page Access related list, click **Edit**. 4. Move npsp.LVL\_LevelEdit into the Enabled Visualforce Pages list. ![Visualforce page access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/level_vf_page.png) 5. Click **Save**. 6. Repeat for each profile that needs access to Levels. # Configure Linked Courses Configure linked courses to support simultaneous registration of a course along with dependent sections, such as a lecture that requires labs or exams. Linked courses also help enforce degree completion requirements. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure linked courses: Education Cloud Full Access
Students can take linked courses only along with a related learning course. For example, the Experimental Psychophysiology course offers two lecture sections in Fall 2025 (1). Each lecture section is linked to three laboratory sections (2). The lecture is a primary learning course, and the laboratory is a linked course. To register for one of the lecture sections, students must also take one of the linked laboratory sections to meet the course’s completion requirement. ![The Course Details view on the Course Search page, showing one course with two different sections, each of which has multiple linked lab sections.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/linked_only_courses.png) The registrar creates a linked-only lab course and then relates it to the Experimental Psychophysiology course, which is a lecture. They then create course offerings as sections for the lecture course and the linked-only lab course. Finally, they link lab sections to lecture sections. To register for Experimental Psychophysiology, a student adds a lecture section and a linked lab section to the cart in the Course Search and Registration portal. If a learning course has multiple linked courses of the same type, students are only required to select one linked course offering of that type. For example, the Introduction to Biology Lecture course is linked to two different lab courses: Cell Structure Lab and Anatomy Lab. Students register for either a Cell Structure Lab section or an Anatomy Lab section, but not both. 1. [Create a learning course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") and make it a linked course. Under Additional Course Details, select a course type, and then select **Linked Only**. Complete the guided setup to create the linked course. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that you select a course type, so that linked courses appear and function correctly in Course Search and Registration. 2. Create more linked courses as needed. 3. To add a linked course to a learning course, [edit an existing learning course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edit_a_learning_course_or_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Learning Wizard in the Academic Operations app to modify your learning.") or create one. 1. In the guided setup, make sure that the learning course has a course type. 2. Select the **Linked Courses** tab and then add the linked courses that you created. 4. Create course offerings for the learning course. These are different sections of the learning course. For example, Introduction to Biology offers three sections: Lecture A on Mondays and Wednesdays, 9-9:50 AM; Lecture B on Tuesdays and Thursdays, 1-1:50 PM; and Lecture C on Wednesdays, 3-5 PM. 5. Create course offerings for the linked course. These are different sections of the linked course, such as various sections of the Introduction to Biology Lab. 6. Assign all applicable linked course offerings to each course offering of the learning course. 1. Open a course offering record of the learning course that you edited or created. For example, Introduction to Biology Lecture A. 2. Click **Manage Linked Sections**. 3. Select the linked course sections that you want to link to this course offering. A linked course section can link to multiple course offerings. For example, Lecture A is linked to Lab 1, Lab 2, and Lab 3. Lecture B is linked to Lab 3, Lab 4, and Lab 5. Lab 3 is a linked course section that’s assigned to both Lecture A and Lecture B. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note All the selections must be in the same academic session. SEE ALSO - [Course Search and Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_search_and_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide students with a simplified way to find and enroll in courses. Students search for courses and view details of course sections on a search results page. Students with the right permissions can add courses from the search results directly to a cart. They can review course availability and their own eligibility, and register for courses from the cart.") # Configure Manual Registration Your organization may want to manually register users instead of allowing them to register themselves. This can be done with a few configurations. - **[Update the Contact Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manual_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the Contact page layout to give grantmakers access to log in to the portal as a fundseeker. - **[Create Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manual_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the login for the fundseeker. Once created, the grantseeker will receive a welcome email that prompts them to create a password. ## Update the Contact Page Layout Update the Contact page layout to give grantmakers access to log in to the portal as a fundseeker. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager.** 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Select the Contact Layout that is assigned to the system administrator profile. For example, **Contact Layout**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note You can check what layout is assigned to the system administrator profile by clicking **Page Layout Assignments**. 5. Click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 6. Drag **Enable Customer User** and **Log in to Experience as User** into the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions. 7. Click **Save**. ## Create Login Create the login for the fundseeker. Once created, the grantseeker will receive a welcome email that prompts them to create a password. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Contacts**. 2. Select an existing Contact. 3. Click **Enable Customer User**. 4. Enter the user’s Email. 5. Press tab to autofill Username and Nickname. 6. Select **Customer Community Plus Login** as the user license. 7. Select **Grantseeker Plus Login** as the profile. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Navigate to the Contact’s record, then click **Log in to Experience as User** to view what the user will see. # Configure Matching Gifts Find out more about configuring matching gifts. - **[About Matching Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Matching Gifts to track a donation that a corporation made as a match for a donation from one of their employees. - **[Enable Matching Gift Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign field-level security to fields relating to gifts, then add the fields and related lists to page layouts to set up Matching Gifts. - **[Enable Find Matched Gifts Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Find Matched Gifts button allows users to find and associate employee-donated gifts with employer-matched gifts. - **[Enable Opportunity Picklist Values for Matching Gift Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the picklist values for the Matching Gift record type so you can select accurate matching gift statuses. - **[Create Opportunity Contact Role Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Opportunity Contact Role picklist values identify the role type of the contact. ## About Matching Gifts Use Matching Gifts to track a donation that a corporation made as a match for a donation from one of their employees. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Matching Gifts uses soft credits in NPSP. Before you configure Matching Gifts, make sure you have in [Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits.")your org. Matching Gifts use the following objects: - Opportunity (standard object): Track the Primary Contact for a donation. Use a Matching Gift record type on Opportunity to track Matching Gifts. - Opportunity Contact Role (standard object): Select roles defined as soft credits. - Account (standard object): Track information about the organization that is giving the Matching Gift. - Contact (standard object): Display soft credit rollup fields. Also provides access to fields required on the Find More Gifts page. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.63 (2/3/2016). If you started using NPSP before this date, or this feature isn't configured in your org, complete these steps. To find your NPSP installation date, see [Find Your NPSP Installation Date and Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_find_your_installation_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "With Nonprofit Success Pack, updates are automatically pushed to your org, but many new features require additional setup. If you installed NPSP prior to the most recent release, you may need to configure the latest features."). ## Enable Matching Gift Fields Assign field-level security to fields relating to gifts, then add the fields and related lists to page layouts to set up Matching Gifts. ### Assign Field-Level Security Assign Read and Edit permissions for following fields to your System Administrator and other relevant profiles and permission sets. (See [Verify Access for a Particular Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.checking_field_accessibility_for_a_particular_field.htm&type=5) for general instructions on how to configure field access.) Account fields: - Matching Gift Administrator Name - Matching Gift Amount Max - Matching Gift Amount Min - Matching Gift Annual Employee Max - Matching Gift Comments - Matching Gift Company - Matching Gift Email - Matching Gift Info Updated - Matching Gift Phone - Matching Gift Percent - Matching Gift Request Deadline Contact fields: - Account Name - First Soft Credit Amount - First Soft Credit Date - Largest Soft Credit Amount - Largest Soft Credit Date - Last Soft Credit Amount - Last Soft Credit Date - Number of Soft Credits - Number of Soft Credits Last N Days - Number of Soft Credits Last Year - Number of Soft Credits This Year - Number of Soft Credits Two Years Ago - Reports To (access required for the Find Matched Gifts page on an Opportunity) Opportunity Object: - Matching Gift - Matching Gift Account - Matching Gift Employer - Matching Gift Status ### Add Fields to Page Layouts Add the fields listed above to these page layouts: - Add Accounts fields to the Organization Layout. - Add Contact fields to the Contact Layout. - Add Opportunity fields to the Donation Layout. ### Add Related Lists to Page Layouts Add the Matched Gifts related list to the Matching Gift Layout on the Opportunity object. For more information on adding fields to page layouts, read [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layoutcustomize_pd.htm&type=5). ## Enable Find Matched Gifts Button The Find Matched Gifts button allows users to find and associate employee-donated gifts with employer-matched gifts. ### Assign Find Matched Gifts Visualforce Page 1. From **Setup**, go to **Profiles**. 2. Select the profile you wish to edit. 3. Click **Visualforce Page Access**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Find and select **MTCH\_FindGifts** in Available Visualforce Pages. 6. Click **Add**. 7. Click **Save**. ### Add Find Matched Gifts Button to Opportunity Page Layout 1. From **Object Manager**, find and select **Opportunity**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Select **Matching Gift Layout**. 4. In the palette, Click **Buttons**. 5. Click and drag **Find Matched Gifts** to Custom Buttons in the page layout details section. 6. Click **Save**. ## Enable Opportunity Picklist Values for Matching Gift Record Type Set up the picklist values for the Matching Gift record type so you can select accurate matching gift statuses. To enable picklists for the Matching Gifts record type: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Record Types**. 5. Click **Matching Gift**. 6. Scroll to the **Picklists Available for Editing** section. 7. Click **Edit** to the left of **Matching Gift Status**. 8. Add all Available Fields to the **Selected Fields** side by clicking the right-facing arrow. 9. Click **Save**. ## Create Opportunity Contact Role Values Opportunity Contact Role picklist values identify the role type of the contact. Add these Opportunity Contact Role values if they don't already exist. (For more information, see [Add or Manage Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/htviewhelpdoc?id=contactroles_add.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help & Training.) - Soft Credit - Matched Donor ![Opportunity Contact Role Picklist Values: Matched Donor and Soft Credit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sc_mg_setup_oppcontrolsplvals.png) # Configure Memberships Learn how to manage memberships in NPSP. - **[About Memberships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Memberships represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. It's up to the organization to decide the length and level of membership based on the donation amount. - **[Create Membership Opportunity Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create these Opportunity stages for Memberships. (If you already have these stages configured, you don't need to recreate them.) - **[Create an Opportunity Membership Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Steps for creating a record type on Opportunities to manage your memberships. - **[Assign Page Layout to Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit the page layout assignments so that the Membership Record Type is using the Membership Page Layout for all appropriate profiles. - **[Configure Membership Record Type For Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Where you select the Membership record type for rollups depends on if you're using Customizable Rollups, legacy out-of-box NPSP rollups, or User Defined Rollups. - **[Add a Lightning Action to Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a Lightning Action to Contacts to easily create a new Membership from a Contact record. - **[(Optional) Set a Grace Period](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a Membership expires, the Membership Status is set to Grace Period. This is the period of time (in days) before the Membership Status is set to Expired. You can choose how long you want the grace period to last. The default is 30 days. - **[(Optional) Customize Member Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes these member levels: Gold, Silver, and Bronze. You may want to customize these names or add more values. You can do so by editing the picklist values for the Member Level field on Opportunities. ## About Memberships NPSP Memberships represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. It's up to the organization to decide the length and level of membership based on the donation amount. NPSP Memberships uses the following object: - Opportunity (standard object): Use a custom Membership record type on Opportunity to track memberships. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released prior to NPSP version 3.0. If this feature isn't configured in your org, complete these steps. To find your installation date, see [Find Your Installation Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_find_your_installation_date.htm). ## Create Membership Opportunity Stages Create these Opportunity stages for Memberships. (If you already have these stages configured, you don't need to recreate them.) | Stage Name | API Name | Type | Probability | Forecast Category | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Prospecting | Prospecting | Open | 10% | Pipeline | | Pledged | Pledged | Open | 10% | Pipeline | | Closed/Lost | Closed/Lost | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | | Closed/Won | Closed/Won | Closed/Won | 100% | Closed | | Withdrawn | Withdrawn | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | | Posted | Posted | Closed/Won | 100% | Closed | To add Opportunity stages: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click the **Stage** field. 6. In the Opportunity Stages Picklist Values related list, click **New**. 7. Enter the Stage Name, API Name, Type, Probability, a Forecast Category as shown in the table. 8. Click **Save**. For more information on how to create Opportunity stages, see [Understand and Customize Sales Processes and Paths](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/opportunity-settings-in-nonprofit-success-pack/understand-and-customize-sales-process-and-path-npsp). ## Create an Opportunity Membership Record Type Steps for creating a record type on Opportunities to manage your memberships. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **New** and create a new record type with these details: - Record Type Label: Membership - Record Type Name: Membership - Sales Process: Donation - Description: Use this record type to record memberships - Active: selected - Enable for Profile: Select for any profile that needs access to memberships - Page Layout: Membership Layout ![Membership record type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/member_rt.png) 5. Click **Save**. For more information on creating record types, see [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5). ## Assign Page Layout to Record Type Edit the page layout assignments so that the Membership Record Type is using the Membership Page Layout for all appropriate profiles. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 5. Click **Edit Assignment**. 6. In the Membership column, make sure the Membership Layout is selected for the appropriate profiles. 7. Click **Save**. ## Configure Membership Record Type For Rollups Where you select the Membership record type for rollups depends on if you're using Customizable Rollups, legacy out-of-box NPSP rollups, or User Defined Rollups. If you're using Customizable Rollups, set the Membership Record Type in a filter group and then apply it to the rollups themselves. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. 4. Click **View Filter Groups**. 5. Depending on how NPSP was installed, your org may already have a filter group called **Memberships: Won**. If so, click **Edit** on the Memberships:Won filter group. Otherwise, click **New** to create a new filter group. 6. Depending on how NPSP was installed, the Memberships:Won filter group may already have a rule to filter on record type. If not, or if you've created a new filter group, add a rule with these values: - Object = Opportunity - Field = Record Type ID - Operator = In List - Value = Membership (or whichever Record Type you use for Memberships) ![Filter rule for opportunities with Membership record type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/member_filter_rule.png) Now you can use the Membership filter group in any Customizable Rollup for Memberships. If you're using legacy out-of-box NPSP rollups or User Defined Rollups, set the Membership record type in NPSP Settings: 1. In the NPSP app, click the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the NPSP Settings tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations** | **Membership**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Membership Record Type Names menu, select **Membership**. ![Membership Record Type Names setting in NPSP Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/member_npsp_setting.png) 5. Click **Save**. ## Add a Lightning Action to Contacts Add a Lightning Action to Contacts to easily create a new Membership from a Contact record. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. Click **New Action**. 5. Fill in the following details: - Action Type: Create a Record - Target Object: Opportunity - Relationship Field: Primary Contact - Record Type: Membership - Standard Label Type: New \[Record Type\] - Name: NewMembership ![New Action for Memberships](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/member_action.png) 6. Deselect **Create Feed Item** (unless you want a Chatter post each time a user creates a Membership with this Action). 7. Click **Save**. 8. In the Page Layout editor, add the following fields to the New Membership Quick Action layout: - Opportunity Name - Close Date - Stage - Amount - Member Level - Membership Start Date - Membership End Date - Membership Origin - Optionally, remove the Next Step field 9. Click **Save**. Next you’ll set default values for the Close Date and Opportunity Name fields. 10. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**, then enter the following values: - Field: Close Date - Value: Today() 11. Click **Save**. 12. In the Predefined Field Values list, click **New**, then enter the following values: - Field Name: Opportunity Name - Formula Value: Contact.FirstName & " " & Contact.LastName & " Membership " & TEXT(MONTH(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(DAY(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(YEAR(TODAY())) 13. Click **Save**. Finally, add the Lightning Action to the Contact Lightning page layout: 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Contact Layout**. 5. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 6. Drag the New Membership Lightning Action to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section of the Page Layout. ![Contact page layout with the New Membership action highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/member_action_on_pl.png) 7. Click **Save**. ## (Optional) Set a Grace Period After a Membership expires, the Membership Status is set to Grace Period. This is the period of time (in days) before the Membership Status is set to Expired. You can choose how long you want the grace period to last. The default is 30 days. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Membership**. 3. Click **Edit**, and enter a value in the Membership Grace Period field. 4. Click **Save**. ## (Optional) Customize Member Levels NPSP includes these member levels: Gold, Silver, and Bronze. You may want to customize these names or add more values. You can do so by editing the picklist values for the Member Level field on Opportunities. # Configure Mentoring Portal Access After you set up your Education Cloud Mentoring portal, assign Mentoring participants, preview the site, and then activate the site.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Assign Mentoring Participants to the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_mentoring_portal_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the mentor and mentee profiles as members of the Experience Cloud site that you're using for your Mentoring portals. - **[Preview, Test, and Activate the Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_mentoring_portal_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After configuration, preview and test your site to make sure it's working the way that you want. Then, activate the site to make it available to users. ## Assign Mentoring Participants to the Portal Add the mentor and mentee profiles as members of the Experience Cloud site that you're using for your Mentoring portals.
User Permission Needed  
To assign mentoring participants to a mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Workspaces**, and then select **Administration**. 3. Click **Members**. 4. Under Select Profiles, for Search, select **Customer**. 5. Add the profiles to the Selected Profiles list. 1. For a single portal, add both the Mentor and Mentee profiles. 2. For a separate mentee portal, add your mentee profile. 3. For a separate mentor portal, add your mentor profile. 6. Save your changes. ## Preview, Test, and Activate the Site After configuration, preview and test your site to make sure it's working the way that you want. Then, activate the site to make it available to users. See Also: - [Preview Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_preview.htm&type=5) - [Activate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_publish.htm&type=5) # Configure NPSP Data Importer Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions. - **[About NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Data Importer simplifies the import process into a single spreadsheet. What would have been several CSV files becomes one row of data combining constituent and donation data. The NPSP Data Importer, along with Advanced Mapping, then writes that data to the appropriate objects in Salesforce. - **[Set Tab Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make the NPSP Data Imports tab available in the App Launcher. - **[Set Object and Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant access to the NPSP Data Import object and fields. - **[Enable and Convert to Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about enabling and converting advanced mapping. ## About NPSP Data Importer The NPSP Data Importer simplifies the import process into a single spreadsheet. What would have been several CSV files becomes one row of data combining constituent and donation data. The NPSP Data Importer, along with Advanced Mapping, then writes that data to the appropriate objects in Salesforce. NPSP Data Importer uses the NPSP Data Import object. The information from your CSV is first imported into fields on the NPSP Data Import object, and when you process the import, that information is passed from the fields on the NPSP Data Import object to the corresponding field on the target objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend that only System Admins use the NPSP Data Importer tool. Learn how the importer tool works in [How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about the import process."). ## Set Tab Visibility Make the NPSP Data Imports tab available in the App Launcher. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 3. For each profile that you want to give access to, click the name of the profile. 4. Click **Object Settings**. 5. In the list of objects, find and click **NPSP Data Imports**. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. In Tab Settings, select **Default On**. 8. Save the profile settings. Next, grant other appropriate profiles access to the NPSP Data Imports tab. Repeat the above process for each of those profiles. ## Set Object and Field-Level Security Grant access to the NPSP Data Import object and fields. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 2. For each profile that you want to give access to, click the name of the profile. (For example, click System Administrator.) 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. In the list of objects, find and click **NPSP Data Imports**. 5. Select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete** under Object Permissions. 6. In Field Permissions, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for all fields. 7. Save the profile settings. Next, grant other appropriate profiles access to the NPSP Data Import object and fields. Repeat the above process for each of those profiles. ## Enable and Convert to Advanced Mapping Find out more about enabling and converting advanced mapping. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Enable Advanced Mapping.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0Wh6D9nLOM8) - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advanced Mapping is the logic that powers the NPSP Data Importer tool. Advanced Mapping gets your data to the right place when you import data from a spreadsheet. - **[Enable My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In order to use Advanced Mapping, My Domain must be enabled and deployed (if it isn't already). My Domain is a Salesforce identity feature that adds a subdomain to your Salesforce org. It's required for features like Advanced Mapping that are built using Lightning components in Lightning component tabs. - **[Set Advanced Mapping Apex Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You need to enable access to an Apex class to access Advanced Mapping. Advanced Mapping is an important component in the NPSP Data Importer. - **[Enable Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to enable advanced mapping. - **[Help Text Mappings that Didn't Convert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If some of your existing Help Text mappings were invalid, you'll receive a message at the bottom of the Data Import Advanced Mapping screen with a list of Help Text mappings that didn't convert. ### Overview Advanced Mapping is the logic that powers the NPSP Data Importer tool. Advanced Mapping gets your data to the right place when you import data from a spreadsheet. Advanced Mapping is already set up to handle typical import scenarios involving constituent and donation data. For most organizations, very little or no customization of Advanced Mapping is needed. Learn more about Advanced Mapping in [Advanced Mapping Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adv_mapping_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Previous versions of NPSP used Help Text Mapping to accomplish what Advanced Mapping does today. When you enable Advanced Mapping, NPSP automatically converts your Help Text mappings into Advanced Mappings. You can disable Advanced Mapping and go back to Help Text mapping at any time, but any changes you made with Advanced Mapping will be lost and won't be synced back to Help Text. ### Enable My Domain In order to use Advanced Mapping, My Domain must be enabled and deployed (if it isn't already). My Domain is a Salesforce identity feature that adds a subdomain to your Salesforce org. It's required for features like Advanced Mapping that are built using Lightning components in Lightning component tabs. To find out if My Domain is enabled in your org, go to Setup and search for My Domain. For information on setting up My Domain, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm). ### Set Advanced Mapping Apex Permissions You need to enable access to an Apex class to access Advanced Mapping. Advanced Mapping is an important component in the NPSP Data Importer. To enable this Apex class access: 1. From Setup, type Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click Profiles. 2. Select the profile you'd like to edit. 3. Select Apex Class Access. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Add the npsp.BDI\_ManageAdvancedMappingCtrl class into the Enabled Apex Classes box. 6. Click **Save**. ### Enable Advanced Mapping Follow these steps to enable advanced mapping. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping for Data Import & Gift Entry**. 3. Click the button to switch to **Enabled**. 4. It may take a few moments for NPSP to convert all of your existing Help Text mappings. When your help text has been converted to Advanced Mapping, you'll see a **Configure Advanced Mapping** button on this page. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If your org includes invalid Help Text mappings, you’ll see another section below the **Configure Advanced Mapping** button. Read more about [Help Text Mappings that Didn't Convert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If some of your existing Help Text mappings were invalid, you'll receive a message at the bottom of the Data Import Advanced Mapping screen with a list of Help Text mappings that didn't convert."). When you click **Configure Advanced Mapping**, you see a list of the out-of-box Object Groups that converted from Help Text mapping. You're ready to [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). ### Help Text Mappings that Didn't Convert If some of your existing Help Text mappings were invalid, you'll receive a message at the bottom of the Data Import Advanced Mapping screen with a list of Help Text mappings that didn't convert. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important The list of invalid Help Text mappings will not be displayed again unless you disable and re-enable Advanced Mapping; take a screenshot of this page or copy the information in the table so you know which mappings to correct. For more information about why these are invalid, see [Troubleshoot Invalid NPSP Data Import Help Text Mappings (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The legacy NPSP method to connect NPSP Data Import fields to the target fields is through the NPSP Data Import field's Help Text."). To correct these mappings, choose one of these options: - **Recommended:** Turn off Advanced Mapping and correct the invalid Help Text mappings in the NPSP Data Import object. When you re-enable Advance Mapping, the Help Text mappings are converted to Advanced Mapping. - **This option is only appropriate if you will keep Advanced Mapping enabled indefinitely.** You can keep Advanced Mapping enabled, and click the **Configure Advanced Mapping** button to create these mappings correctly using the new interface. Correcting the invalid Help Text mappings using Advanced Mapping will not correct the help text issues on the fields. If you disable and later re-enable Advanced Mapping, the mappings you corrected directly in the Advanced Mapping interface will be lost. # Configure NPSP Data Importer Options Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important These settings apply to every feature and product using NPSP Data Importer including Gift Entry and Salesforce.org Elevate. If you temporarily adjust the batch process size or matching rules for a specific operation, be sure to come back and reset them to their previous settings. - **[Access Global Matching Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's how to access the global batch size and matching settings for the NPSP Data Importer. - **[Batch Process Size](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This setting determines the number of records processed in each batch. The default is 50 records. For example, if your import file has 200 records, NPSP Data Importer processes four batches of 50 records each. - **[Contact & Account Matching Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you begin matching, make sure that you have a minimum of read access to the records and field level access to the fields referenced in the matching and duplicate rules. - **[How Contact Matching Treats Empty Fields During Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you run an NPSP Data Import, the importer applies your Contact matching rule differently to empty fields depending on whether it's comparing records within a batch or against existing contacts. Knowing this difference helps you predict when blank fields cause duplicate contacts and how to prevent them. - **[Donation Matching Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You should only use donation matching to update an open Opportunity when a Payment comes in. - **[Important Information about Unique IDs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If Contacts or Accounts in your org have unique, external IDs that reference the same Contacts or Accounts in another database, you can reference these external IDs when using NPSP Data Importer. ## Access Global Matching Settings Here's how to access the global batch size and matching settings for the NPSP Data Importer. 1. Open the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Find and select **NPSP Data Imports**. 3. Select the **To Be Imported** list view. 4. Click **Import All Data Import Records**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Clicking **Import All Data Import Records** only opens the import configuration page. No NPSP Data Importer process begins until you click either **Begin Data Import Process** or **Begin Dry Run**. ## Batch Process Size This setting determines the number of records processed in each batch. The default is 50 records. For example, if your import file has 200 records, NPSP Data Importer processes four batches of 50 records each. If NPSP Data Import records fail because of system errors like too much CPU time, reduce the batch process size and try again. ## Contact & Account Matching Options Before you begin matching, make sure that you have a minimum of read access to the records and field level access to the fields referenced in the matching and duplicate rules. For more information, go to the Impact of User Access on Rules section in [Things to Know About Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.duplicate_rules_overview.htm&type=5). These configuration options are for matching Accounts or Contacts: ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important In order to see values in either the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields, you must first create a custom Unique ID field and then create two corresponding Data Import fields with specific values. If you don't create these fields properly, you will get an error. For more information, see [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching."). - **Contact Matching Rules**—Specifies how to match Contacts in NPSP Data Import records against existing Contacts. The rules specify which set of Contact fields to use to find matches. For example: First Name, Last Name, and Email or First Name, Last Name, and Phone. Some specific things to keep in mind: - The matching rules attempt to match on any NPSP phone or email field. - Name matching uses exact string matching, but is case insensitive. For example, "Tom Smith" would not match to "Thomas Smith", but "thomas smith" would match. - Phone number matching uses exact match only. For example, if the phone number's format is 123-345-4567, then you must use that format, not 123.345.4567 or 1233454567. - **Contact Duplicate Rules**—Matches based on the active Duplicate Rules for the Contact object, in the order set by your Admin in **Setup** | **Duplicate Management**. For help setting up duplicate rules, go to [Customize Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.duplicate_rules_create.htm&type=5). Some things to keep in mind: - The logic uses the highest ranked match out of all returned matches for all active rules. - Set up your Contact Duplicate Rules to only use Contact fields that are mapped to Contact 1, Contact 2 or Home Address (which maps to the Mailing Address fields on the Contact object). - Perform a dry run of the import to determine if your rules are sufficiently strict and working as expected. - If you enabled state and country/territory picklists AND you wish to use state or country as part of one of your Contact Duplicate Rules, make sure to use the full name in the Home State/Province and Home Country fields on the Data Import record. - **Contact Custom Unique ID**—Optional ID field used for matching Contacts. This field can be any custom text or numeric field that uniquely identifies a Contact, and is used for matching Contacts in addition to the method specified in Contact Matching Rule. This option is useful if your external data source had a unique identifier for each Contact record. For example, you could add a custom field on Contact, such as MyOldID, and matching fields for Contacts in the NPSP Data Import object (Contact1\_MyOldID, Contact2\_MyOldID). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're matching based on Salesforce ID, you don't have to set anything here. Just map data to the Imported fields, and use a Contact Matching Rule. - **Account Custom Unique ID**—Optional ID field used for matching Accounts. This field can be any custom text or numeric field that uniquely identifies an Account, and is used for matching Accounts in addition to matching by Account Name. This option is useful if your external data source had a unique identifier for each Account record. For example, you could add a custom field on Account, such as MyOldID, and matching fields for Accounts in the NPSP Data Import object (Account1\_MyOldID, Account2\_MyOldID). ## How Contact Matching Treats Empty Fields During Import When you run an NPSP Data Import, the importer applies your Contact matching rule differently to empty fields depending on whether it's comparing records within a batch or against existing contacts. Knowing this difference helps you predict when blank fields cause duplicate contacts and how to prevent them. ### How the Two Matching Steps Treat Empty Fields When you process an import, NPSP Data Importer splits your records into batches and checks for matching contacts in two separate steps. It compares records only within a single batch—never across batches, even in the same import job. Matching Within the Same Branch The importer compares the NPSP Data Import records in a batch against each other before it creates any contacts. Within the same batch, the importer treats an empty field as a match. Two records for Keisha Smith that both have a blank email field match each other and create one contact. Matching Against Existing Records The importer compares each NPSP Data Import record against the contacts that exist in your org. Against existing records, the importer doesn't treat an empty field as a match. A record for Keisha Smith with a blank email field doesn't match an existing Keisha Smith contact that also has a blank email field. Each step applies a different rule to blank fields, and the difference depends on which matching option you select in the Contact Matching Rule field. For a description of each option, see [Contact & Account Matching Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you begin matching, make sure that you have a minimum of read access to the records and field level access to the fields referenced in the matching and duplicate rules."). ### Why Duplicate Contacts Can Appear The importer evaluates one batch at a time. The importer doesn't compare records in different batches to each other. So, when records for the same person have an empty value in a matching field, such as email, and fall in different batches, the importer: - Skips the batch-to-batch comparison. - Skips the match to an existing contact because the email field is empty. As a result, the importer creates a separate contact for each batch. For example, if three records for Keisha Smith have empty email fields and split across three batches, you get three contacts. ### Prevent Duplicate Contacts To avoid creating duplicate contacts, use any of these approaches: - Include a value in every field that your matching rule uses. An email address on each record is the most reliable way to match contacts. - Sort or group your import file so that all records for the same person are in the same batch. - Select the Contact Duplicate Rules option in the Contact Matching Rule field. This option applies your org's active Duplicate Rules against existing records and doesn't match on empty fields within a batch. See [Contact & Account Matching Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you begin matching, make sure that you have a minimum of read access to the records and field level access to the fields referenced in the matching and duplicate rules."). ## Donation Matching Options You should only use donation matching to update an open Opportunity when a Payment comes in. These configuration options are for matching Donations (Opportunities) or Payments: - Update the Stage of an Opportunity to Closed/Won - Mark an open Payment as Paid - **Donation Matching Rule**—Specifies the set of Donation fields to use for matching against existing Opportunities and/or Payments. If no fields are selected, the Donation Date and Donation Amount fields are used. The Donation fields specified must map to either Opportunity fields or Payment fields (with the exception of Donation Amount, which maps to both Opportunity.Amount and Payment.Payment Amount, and Donation Date which maps to Opportunity.CloseDate and Payment.Scheduled Date). If the Data Import record has the Donation Imported field or Payment Imported field populated, those fields will always be used for the match. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using multiple currencies in your org and you want to match Opportunities, be sure to select the CurrencyIsoCode field as one of the Donation Matching Rule fields. This ensures that the proper currency is used when attempting to match Opportunities. If you created your own custom field and set up a mapping for multiple currencies, select that field instead. - **Donation Matching Behavior**—Defines how the Data Importer should handle matching Opportunities and Payments. Must be one of the following values: - **Do Not Match**—No matching is attempted; new records are created. - **No Match**—Only import a record if it doesn't match an existing record. - **Single Match**—Only import a record if it matches a single existing record. - **Single Match or Create**—Import a record if it matches a single existing record; create a new record if no single match found - **Best Match**—Only import a record when it matches at least one existing record, and update the best matched record. - **Best Match or Create**—Import a record if it matches an existing record; create a new record if no match found. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you choose No Match, Single Match, or Best Match and the Data Importer can't match against an existing Opportunity or Payment, the status of the Data Import will show "Failed." However, any associated Account or Contact from the Data Import will still be created. You can evaluate the Opportunity or Payment that failed and rerun the Data Importer. - **Number of Days from Donation Date—**Specifies the number of days to consider (from the Donation date) when looking for a matching Opportunity or Payment. The Data Importer will use the matching Opportunity or Payment that falls within the number of days specified AND is closest to the Donation Date. - **Donation Matching Implementing Class**—The full developer name of an Apex class that implements the BDI\_IMatchDonations interface, in case you are working with a developer who would like to alter this behavior. When left empty, the NPSP default implementation is used. - **Calculate Donation Rollups with Batch**—When checked, NPSP calculates donor statistics when donations are processed as part of an NPSP Data Import Batch. If unchecked (the default), donor statistics are only calculated during the default nightly Scheduled Job. Note that selecting this checkbox may slow down processing of the batch. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce.org Elevate doesn't use these donation (Opportunity) matching rules. Instead, Elevate matches Opportunities using the Elevate Id only. ## Important Information about Unique IDs If Contacts or Accounts in your org have unique, external IDs that reference the same Contacts or Accounts in another database, you can reference these external IDs when using NPSP Data Importer. Field naming is critical when you're creating corresponding Unique ID fields. In order to see any values in the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields in the Data Importer Configuration options, the field you want to map must be marked as Unique and External ID. Additionally, for Unique ID fields, you must create two corresponding fields, one for Contact1 and one for Contact2 (or Account1 and Account2) and you must name them properly. The corresponding fields in the NPSP Data Import object should NOT be marked as Unique and External ID. For example, say you've created a custom Unique ID field on Contacts called Reference ID with an API name of Reference\_ID\_\_c that you want to use for matching Contacts during data import. You'll need to create two corresponding NPSP Data Import fields using this _**exact format**_ : Field for Contact1, the primary Contact **Field Label**: Contact1 (Example: Contact1 Reference ID) **Field Name**: Contact1\_ (Example: Contact1\_Reference\_ID) **API Name**: Contact1\_\_\_c (Example: Contact1\_Reference\_ID\_\_c) Field for Contact2, the secondary Contact **Field Label**: Contact2 (Example: Contact2 Reference ID) **Field Name**: Contact2\_ (Example: Contact2\_Reference\_ID) **API Name**: Contact2\_\_\_c (Example: Contact2\_Reference\_ID\_\_c) Here is an image showing the custom Contact field, **Reference ID**, and the corresponding NPSP Data Import field, **Contact1 Reference ID**, with correct Field Label and API Name. The image also shows the Contact field **Reference ID** is marked as a Unique, External ID field, but the NPSP Data Import field isn't set as a Unique, External ID field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Creating only one corresponding field (instead of two) will result in an error. ![A screenshot comparing the Contact custom field with the corresponding NPSP Data Import field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/compare_contact_data_imp_uniqueid_fields.png) When processing a record, NPSP Data Importer first attempts to match on the External ID. If a match isn't found, NPSP Data Importer tries to match on a Contact's Last Name. For Accounts without a matching External ID, NPSP Data Importer tries to match on Account Name. # Configure NPSP Features Articles for Salesforce admins about how to configure all of the NPSP features. - **[Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when). - **[Find Your NPSP Installation Date and Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_find_your_installation_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Nonprofit Success Pack, updates are automatically pushed to your org, but many new features require additional setup. If you installed NPSP prior to the most recent release, you may need to configure the latest features. - **[Configure Acknowledge Donations by Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Salesforce to send donation acknowledgment emails automatically when you enter gifts in NPSP. - **[Configure Duplicate Detection and NPSP Contact Merge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up duplicate detection and contact merge to keep your contacts organized and up-to-date. - **[Configure Address Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to configure address management features including address verification, seasonal addresses, and bad address management. - **[Configure Automated and Manual Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits. - **[Configure Batch Data Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring batch data import. - **[Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches. - **[Configure Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure campaigns so that they combine data from different sources and determine the success of the call to action. - **[Configure Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_custom_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure NPSP versions older than 3.155 for customizable rollups. - **[Customizable Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records. - **[Configure NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions. - **[Configure Donation Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_donation_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about donation allocations. - **[Configure Engagement Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_engage_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring engagement plans. - **[Configure Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about NPSP Levels, how to create new level fields, how to secure and provide access to the Level object and fields, and how to add value to target picklists. - **[Configure Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form. - **[Configure Grants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring grants. - **[Configure In-Kind Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_in_kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring in-kind gifts. - **[Configure Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure leads by mapping custom lead fields and setting the default action for creating opportunities from leads. - **[Configure Matching Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring matching gifts. - **[Configure Memberships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage memberships in NPSP. - **[Configure Tribute Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_tribute_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make customizations to page layouts and picklists so that NPSP tributes work properly. - **[Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create your own custom Opportunity Names using any fields from the Opportunity itself or fields from related records. - **[Configure Opportunity Payments in NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and manage Opportunities, Payments, and Refunds in Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Configure Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to set security permissions, deploy components, and configure settings to use Recurring Donations in your org. - **[Manage Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior. - **[Configure the Reports & Dashboards Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_reports_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you download the NPSP Reports package, configure it to meet your needs. # Configure NPSP Fields for Data Integrity Add fields to page layouts and configure field level security to give users access to the Data Integrity fields they need. - **[NPSP Fields for Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_configure_data_integrity_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add NPSP fields to the Address page layout for use with address standardization and National Change of Address (NCOA) updates in Data Integrity. - **[Configure Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_configure_data_integrity_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use field-level security to determine which users can see and edit the NPSP Fields for Data Integrity. - **[Add NPSP Fields to Address Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_configure_data_integrity_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the NPSP Fields for Data Integrity to the Address page layout. ## NPSP Fields for Data Integrity Add NPSP fields to the Address page layout for use with address standardization and National Change of Address (NCOA) updates in Data Integrity. Only add fields for features your organization will use. For example, you don't need to add the NCOA fields if you don't plan to use NCOA features. First, give users access to the fields using field-level security. Then, add the fields to the Address page layout so users with permission can see them. | **Field** | **Description** | | --- | --- | | Exclude from Updates | Excludes the address from scheduled address standardization and NCOA updates within Data Integrity when selected. | | Verified Date | The most recent date and time that an address was evaluated for standardization, or that an address was added from an NCOA update. | | NCOA Evaluation Date | The most recent date and time that an address was evaluated for NCOA updates, regardless of if a new address was found. Allows NCOA updates to be run only on records that haven’t been evaluated within a specified time frame. | | NCOA Result Code | The Melissa Data result code from the most recent NCOA evaluation. | | npsp\_\_Pre\_Verification\_Address\_\_c | Stores the entire address string if it is modified or updated. It contains the old, non-standardized version of the same address. | | Verified | Indicates that the address has been previously verified by either Data Integrity or NPSP. | | Ambiguous? | Specifies that the address is either incomplete or unclearr . | ## Configure Field-Level Security Use field-level security to determine which users can see and edit the NPSP Fields for Data Integrity. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, click **Users**, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click a profile name. 4. Click **Object Settings**. 5. Click **Addresses**. If there is more than one, click the second one in the list. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. For each field, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Optionally repeat for additional profiles. If the standard user hasn't been configured with these fields, then you need to set these NPSP fields and re-authorize Data Integrity. Run Address Standardization and NCOA jobs again. For more information, see [Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_fls.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Add NPSP Fields to Address Page Layout Add the NPSP Fields for Data Integrity to the Address page layout. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Address** (API name npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c). 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Select a page layout. 6. From the palette, click **Fields**. 7. Drag the fields you want to add to the page layout area. 8. Click **Save**. # Configure NPSP Installation Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP, and configure your NPSP organization and features. Learn about advanced NPSP configurations and optional customizations. - **[Install or Upgrade NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install_or_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn the ins and outs of installing or upgrading NPSP in your Salesforce org. # Configure Object and Field Permissions in Public Access Settings The last step in configuring data access is making sure your Site's public access settings give permission to read, create, and edit the dozen or so objects that Volunteers for Salesforce needs to do its job. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The following steps assume you're using the Enhanced Profile User Interface. If you're using the Original Profile Interface, the path to these settings and the actions you take are slightly different. 1. On the Site Detail page, click **Public Access Settings**. 2. On the Volunteers Profile page, click **Object Settings**. ![Objects Settings on the Site Guest User profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_guest_user_profile_object_settings.png) 3. For each of these standard objects, edit object permissions and field permissions. - Accounts - Campaigns - Contacts - Documents - Leads 1. Click the object name, then click **Edit**. 2. In the Object Permissions section, enable **Read** and **Create** permissions for the object. ![Object permissions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/profile_object_permissions.png) 3. In the Field Permissions section, look for all volunteer-related fields (all have "volunteer" in the field name) and enable **Read** and **Edit** permissions. For example, these are some of the Volunteer fields on the Contact object. ![Volunteer field permissions on the Contact object](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/profile_contact_field_perms.png) 4. **Save** your changes and repeat for each object listed above. 4. On the Object Settings page, click **Volunteer Hours**. 5. Click **Edit**. In the Object Permissions section, enable **Read** and **Create** permissions for the object. In the Field Permissions section, enable **Read** and **Edit** permissions for all volunteer-related fields. 6. **Save** your changes. 7. For each of these custom objects, enable **Read** permissions and field permissions: - Job Recurrence Schedules - Volunteer Jobs - Volunteer Recurrence Schedules - Volunteer Shifts - Households—Required if you're using the Household object in the Nonprofit Success Pack or in a custom configuration. If you're not sure, go ahead and enable the permission. It won't hurt anything. 1. On the Object Settings page, click the object name, then click **Edit**. 2. In the Object Permissions section, enable the **Read** permission for the object. 3. In the Field Permissions section, enable **Read** and **Edit** permissions for all volunteer-related fields. 4. **Save** your changes and repeat for each object listed above. That's it! You've done painstaking work to get access and permissions squared away. The good news is that this part of configuration is a one-time process. You're done with data access configuration unless you later add custom fields to Contact or any of the Volunteers objects. In that case, don't forget to come back to the Volunteers Profile to set Read and Create field permissions. # Configure Opportunities Configure Opportunity names and stages to best match your org's gift process. - **[Customize Opportunity Name Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_opportunities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create your own automation to customize the name format for manually created Opportunities. - **[Set Up Opportunity Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_opportunities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider the Opportunity stages for your org's gift processing solution. - **[Customize Automatic Updates to Opportunity Stage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_opportunities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the stage an Opportunity is automatically updated to when all payments are complete. ## Customize Opportunity Name Format Create your own automation to customize the name format for manually created Opportunities. The Single Gift Entry form names Opportunities after the Contacts associated with them. For example, if a gift comes from Selina Rodriguez, it's named the Selina Rodriguez Donation. Out of the box, however, this automation doesn't happen when you create a gift Opportunity outside of Single Gift Entry. You can create your own automation to customize the name format used for manually created Opportunities. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations**, then click **Opportunity Names**. 3. Click **New Opportunity Name**. 4. Specify details such as which types of Opportunities to name using these settings, as well as the actual name format. For more information, see [Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm). 5. Click **Save**. ## Set Up Opportunity Stages Consider the Opportunity stages for your org's gift processing solution. GEM and NPSP install a number of Opportunity stages (including Pledged, Posted, Declined, Closed Won). You may want to add new stages that your institution uses in your gift processing solution, such as "Prospecting" or "Under Review." For information about creating Opportunity stages or disabling stages you don't need, see [Understand and Customize Sales Process and Path](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/opportunity-settings-in-nonprofit-success-pack/understand-and-customize-sales-process-and-path-npsp) on Trailhead. When you create a Stage, verify that it's been added to the NPSP\_Default Sales Process (in Setup, search for then select **Sales Processes**). ## Customize Automatic Updates to Opportunity Stage Configure the stage an Opportunity is automatically updated to when all payments are complete. When all Payments on an Opportunity are paid, GEM automatically changes the Opportunity's Stage to Closed Won, reducing the need for manual updates. You can configure the default Stage in NPSP Settings. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations**, then click **Payments**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Under **Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid**, select the desired Stage. 5. Click **Save**. # Configure Opportunity Payments in NPSP Set up and manage Opportunities, Payments, and Refunds in Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Opportunities Automatically Create Payment Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Nonprofit Success Pack, when you save a new Opportunity, related Payment records are created. This is true even for single-payment donations (that is, donations paid in a "lump sum"). When you create a new Opportunity and set the Stage field to Posted, NPSP creates a Payment for the full donation amount and records the donation as "paid in full". - **[Map Opportunity Fields to Payment Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Payment Mappings to automatically copy values from Opportunity record fields to Payments, whenever you create a new Payment or update an open Opportunity. You may want to do this so that details from the Opportunity record also appear in the Payment record for easy reference or billing. Salesforce executes the mapping for automatically added Payments, as well as Payments created through the Payment scheduler. Manually created single Payments will not use the mappings defined here. - **[Disable Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Disable creating Payments for all Opportunities or limit creating Payments for specific Opportunity type or record type. - **[Create Missing Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you disable and re-enable Payments, some of your Opportunities may be missing Payment records. You can run a batch process to create the Payment records. - **[Set Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tell Salesforce what Stage you want an Opportunity to be when all the payments are paid. NPSP Data Importer and related features like Gift Entry and Elevate connector also use this Stage when you don't otherwise specify an Opportunity's stage. - **[Set Up Refunds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes mistakes happen. Fix a donation entry error or help a donor in need with a refund. To be able to refund donations, first set up NPSP to issue refunds. ## Opportunities Automatically Create Payment Records In Nonprofit Success Pack, when you save a new Opportunity, related Payment records are created. This is true even for single-payment donations (that is, donations paid in a "lump sum"). When you create a new Opportunity and set the Stage field to Posted, NPSP creates a Payment for the full donation amount and records the donation as "paid in full". You can override this behavior on an individual Opportunity by selecting the Do Not Automatically Create Payment checkbox when you create the Opportunity. You can also exclude specific Opportunity record types from automatic Payments in NPSP Settings. You can turn off automatic Payment behavior entirely, or for specific Opportunity record types or Opportunity types. For more information, see [Disable Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up and manage Opportunities, Payments, and Refunds in Nonprofit Success Pack."). ## Map Opportunity Fields to Payment Fields Use Payment Mappings to automatically copy values from Opportunity record fields to Payments, whenever you create a new Payment or update an open Opportunity. You may want to do this so that details from the Opportunity record also appear in the Payment record for easy reference or billing. Salesforce executes the mapping for automatically added Payments, as well as Payments created through the Payment scheduler. Manually created single Payments will not use the mappings defined here. Payment mapping **requires that you have two fields (one on Opportunity, one on Payment) of a matching type in order to create a mapping between them**. When you create a mapping, information from an Opportunity field displays in the mapped Payment field, but not vice versa. In other words, information from Opportunity fields can appear in Payments but not the other way around. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Payment Mappings**. 3. Click **New Payment Field Mapping**. 4. In the Opportunity Field list, select the Opportunity object field you want to map from. Once selected, all the fields of the matching data type on the Payments object are shown in the Payment Field list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't map an Opportunity field that has the same name as the Payment object (payment\_\_c). 5. From the Payment Field list, select the Payment field you want to map to. In the example below, the administrator has created a new field in the Opportunity object called Payment Type. When you select Payment Type from the Opportunity Field list, you can choose any field on the Payment object that uses the same data type. 6. Click the **Create Custom Mapping** button to complete your mapping. The next time a payment is created in this organization, the Payment Type from the Opportunity is saved in the Payment Method field in the Payment details. ## Disable Payments Disable creating Payments for all Opportunities or limit creating Payments for specific Opportunity type or record type. ### Disable Payment Creation for All Opportunities To disable automatic Payment creation for all Opportunities: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Payments**. 3. Click **Edit.** 4. Deselect **Automatic Payment Creation**. 5. Save your work. ### Disable Payments for Specific Opportunity Types and Record Types You can exclude specific Opportunity record types from automatic Payment creation. You can also exclude specific Opportunity types (as specified by the Type picklist.) 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Payments**. 3. Click **Edit.** 4. To disable automatic Payment creation for specific record types, select the record types in the **Exclude Opp Record Types** field. To disable automatic Payment creation for specific Opportunity types, select the types in the **Excluded Opp Types** field. 5. Save your work ![Excluded Opp Record Types and Excluded Opp Types](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/multi-pymt_dontns_exclopps.png) ## Create Missing Payments If you disable and re-enable Payments, some of your Opportunities may be missing Payment records. You can run a batch process to create the Payment records. For more information, see [Create Missing Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job."). ## Set Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid Tell Salesforce what Stage you want an Opportunity to be when all the payments are paid. NPSP Data Importer and related features like Gift Entry and Elevate connector also use this Stage when you don't otherwise specify an Opportunity's stage. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Payments**. 3. Edit the setting, and set the value in **Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid**. 4. Save your work. ## Set Up Refunds Sometimes mistakes happen. Fix a donation entry error or help a donor in need with a refund. To be able to refund donations, first set up NPSP to issue refunds. 1. Grant your users Read and Edit access to these fields on the custom Payment object: - Debit Type - Original Payment - Payment Amount 2. Give your users access to the npsp.PMT\_RefundController Apex class. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the profile you want to edit. 3. Click **Apex Class Access**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. Add **npsp.PMT\_RefundController** to the Enabled Apex Classes list. 6. Save your changes. 3. Add the refund option to your Payment pages. 1. From the object management settings for the Payment Custom Object, go to Page Layouts. 2. Click **Payment Layout**. 3. Find Mobile & Lightning Actions in the palette and drag the **Refund** action to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions panel. 4. Save your layout. # Configure Page Layouts and Record Pages for Transfer Credit Reviews Add the buttons, fields, related lists, and tabs that staff use to review transfer credit applications and academic review requests. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up page layouts and record pages for transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Configure the case page layout. 1. From the object management settings for case, go to Case Page Layouts. 2. Select **Case Layout** or create a new page layout. 3. Click **Buttons**. Drag Review Document from the palette onto the Case Detail section. 4. Drag Articulate from the palette onto the Case Detail section. 5. Click **Fields**. Drag Parent Case from the palette onto the Additional Information section. 6. Click **Related Lists**. Drag Document Checklist Items from the palette onto the Related Lists section. 7. Drag Course Credit Transfer Applications and Related Cases from the palette onto the Related Lists section. 8. Save your changes. 2. Configure the Course Credit Transfer Application page layout. 1. From the object management settings for course credit transfer application, go to Page Layouts. 2. Select **Course Credit Transfer Application Layout** or create a new page layout. 3. Click **Fields**. Drag Review Type from the palette onto the Course Credit Transfer Application Detail section. 4. Save your changes. 3. Configure the Academic Review Request page layout. 1. From the object management settings for academic review request, go to Page Layouts. 2. Select **Academic Review Request Layout** or create a new page layout. 3. Click **Buttons**. Drag Submit for Approval from the palette onto the Academic Review Request Detail section. 4. Save your changes. 4. Configure the Academic Review Request record page. 1. In the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Review Requests**. 2. Open a record. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. In Lightning App Builder, click **Add Tab**. 5. Select Approvals as the tab label, and then click **Done**. 6. Select the Approvals tab. 7. Drag and drop the **Approval Trace** and the **Orchestration Work Guide** components onto the tab. 8. In Lightning App Builder, click **Add Tab**. 9. Select Equivalency Suggestions as the tab label, and then click **Done**. 10. Select the Equivalency Suggestions tab. 11. Drag the **Learning Equivalency Mapping** component onto the tab. 12. Save your changes and activate the page. # Configure Page Layouts for Mentoring Portals Configure the objects and page layouts that support your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. | User Permission Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create and assign page layouts: | Education Cloud Full Access |
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create and Assign an Interaction Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_page_layouts_for_mentoring_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create page layouts for mentors and mentees to see details of an interaction, such as a meeting, phone call, or video conference. - **[Create and Assign an Interaction Summary Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_page_layouts_for_mentoring_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create page layouts for mentors and mentees to see a summary of an interaction. - **[Create and Assign a Provider Offering Layout for Mentees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_page_layouts_for_mentoring_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Provider Offering object to show details that are applicable to the mentee. ## Create and Assign an Interaction Page Layout Create page layouts for mentors and mentees to see details of an interaction, such as a meeting, phone call, or video conference. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Interaction**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **New**. 3. From Existing Page Layout, select **Interaction Layout**. 4. In Page Layout Name, enter Mentor Interaction Layout. 5. Save your changes. 6. For Interaction Detail, have only these fields. 1. Name 2. Interaction Type 3. Start Time 4. End Time 7. Remove all related lists except for Interaction Summaries. 8. On Interaction Summaries, click ![Related List Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_related_list_properties.png). 9. From Available Fields, add **Title**, **Status**, and **Meeting Notes** to the Selected Fields list. 10. For the mentee interaction page layout only, click **Buttons**, and then deselect **New**. 11. Click **OK**. 12. Save your changes. 13. Click **Page Layout Assignment**, and then click **Edit**. 14. Select your mentor user profile. 15. From Page Layout to Use, select **Mentor Interaction Layout**, and then save your changes. 16. Similarly, create and assign a page layout for the mentee. ## Create and Assign an Interaction Summary Page Layout Create page layouts for mentors and mentees to see a summary of an interaction. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Interaction Summary**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **New**. 3. From Existing Page Layout, select **Interaction Summary Layout**. 4. In Page Layout Name, enter Mentor Interaction Summary Layout. 5. Save your changes. 6. For Interaction Summary Detail, have only these fields. 1. Title 2. Interaction 3. Related Record 4. Status 5. Meeting Notes 7. Remove all related lists from the page layout. 8. Save your changes. 9. Click **Page Layout Assignment**, and then click **Edit**. 10. Select your mentor user profile. 11. From Page Layout to Use, select **Mentor Interaction Summary Layout**, and then save your changes. 12. Similarly, create and assign a page layout for the mentee. ## Create and Assign a Provider Offering Layout for Mentees Set up the Provider Offering object to show details that are applicable to the mentee. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Provider Offering**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **Provider Offering Layout**. 3. Next to Save, click ![Actions Menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png)and then select **Save As**. 4. In Page Layout Name, enter Mentee Provider Offering Layout. 5. Remove all buttons from the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions and Provider Offering Detail sections. 6. Click **Related Lists**, and then remove all related lists from the page layout. 7. Save your changes. 8. Click **Page Layout Assignment**, and then click **Edit**. 9. Select your mentee user profile. 10. From Page Layout to Use, select **Mentee Provider Offering Layout**, and then save your changes. # Configure Portal for External Reviews Prepare Salesforce and your grants portal for external reviewers. - **[Add Notification Information for External Reviewers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_config_portal_external_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up notifications to people to review Funding Requests in the grants portal. - **[Update Notification to Reviewer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_config_portal_external_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the email template to reflect your organization's branding and messaging. ## Add Notification Information for External Reviewers Set up notifications to people to review Funding Requests in the grants portal. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Metadata in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Grants Management Settings, click **Manage Records**. 4. Edit the **GlobalFeaturesSettings**. 5. Enter your **Grant Review Portal URL**. 6. Enter your **Salesforce Org URL**. This is the URL you use to log into Salesforce. 7. Save your work. ## Update Notification to Reviewer Update the email template to reflect your organization's branding and messaging. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Email Templates**. 2. Select **Grants Management: Reviewer Assignment Notification**. 3. Edit the template and update the message content. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're unable to edit the template, review [Select Who Can Work in Email Template Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.email_template_builder_users.htm&type=5). 4. Save your work. The [Grants Management: Email the Assigned Reviewer (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_email_the_assigned_reviewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's included in the external reviewer notification flow.") flow includes the logic for when the email is sent. Modify the flow criteria to fit your organization's needs. Learn more in [Create or Modify a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a flow or modify the Create Application flow to suit your nonprofit organization’s needs."). # Configure Program Management Module Customize and configure Program Management Module features. - **[PMM Customize Create Service Delivery Fields on Bulk Service Delivery Tool (BSDT)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add organization accounts or custom objects to program engagements and service deliveries, and and customize recipients on bulk service deliveries, quick actions, and record naming. - **[PMM Customize Process Builder Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your Program Engagement and Service Delivery naming. - **[PMM Configure Related Lists on Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_add_rls_to_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure related lists on Accounts to easily see how an Account such as a household interacts with your programs. - **[Configure Service Delivery Summary Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate the Service Delivery summary field triggers, create a scheduled job to recalculate the fields, add the fields to page layouts, and configure Absent and Present values to use the Service Delivery summary fields. - **[Customize Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update Bulk Service Deliveries settings in Program Management Module to match your organization's needs. - **[Add an Active Program Engagement Stage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_add_active_program_engmt_stage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set new or existing Stage values for Program Engagements as active for enhanced filtering in Product Management Module. - **[Add an Active Service Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_add_active_service_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you add Status values for Services, set the values as active for enhanced filtering in Product Management Module. - **[Customize the Home Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_home_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your PMM home tab. - **[PMM Configure Cohort Mass Update](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_enable_add_to_program_cohort_mass_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable mass update of program cohorts, add the Add to Program Cohort quick action to Program Engagement list views, and enable your users to inline edit multiple records on Program Engagement list views. - **[PMM Enable Mass Program Engagement Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_mass_create_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Mass creating Program Engagements for a Program reduces time and effort spent by your users. - **[Configure Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_service_schedules_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many organizations offer one-time or recurring Services for individuals or groups. For example, your organization might offer classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, community outreach events, or other types of events. Use Service Schedules to schedule and manage these events. - **[PMM Customize Fields on the Add Contact to Program Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_fields_add_to_cont.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the fields that show when you click the Add Contact to Program button. - **[PMM Customize Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_picklist_values_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add or edit picklist values to reflect the way your organization works. - **[Customize Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify how you track attendance to better suit your organization’s needs. - **[PMM and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides translations for PMM in multiple languages. # Configure Programs and Services Customize the bulk service delivery tool, process builder automation, cohort mass update, service schedules and more. - **[Customize Service Delivery Fields on Bulk Service Delivery Tool (BSDT)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize recipients, configure quick actions, customize record naming and more. - **[Customize Process Builder Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update process builder automation included in Case Management. - **[Configure Related Lists on Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_rls_on_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Related Lists on your accounts. - **[Configure Service Delivery Summary Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Service Delivery summary fields are automatically-calculated fields on the Contact, Program Engagement, Service, and Service Session objects. They track attendance and the date of a client’s last service. - **[Customize Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update Bulk Service Deliveries settings in Case Management to match your organization's needs. - **[Add an Active Program Engagement Stage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_add_active_program_engmt_stage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set new or existing Stage values for Program Engagements as active for enhanced filtering in Nonprofit Cloud Case Management. - **[Add an Active Service Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_add_active_service_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you add Status values for Services, set the values as active for enhanced filtering. - **[Configure Cohort Mass Update](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_cohort_mass_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure a cohort mass update. - **[Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_mass_create_pes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view. - **[Customize Fields on the Add Contact to Program Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_fields_contact_to_prog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many organizations offer one-time or recurring Services for individuals or groups. For example, your organization might offer classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, community outreach events, or other types of events. Use Service Schedules to schedule and manage these events. - **[Configure Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_service_schedules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many organizations offer one-time or recurring Services for individuals or groups. For example, your organization might offer classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, community outreach events, or other types of events. Use Service Schedules to schedule and manage these events. # Configure Proxy Self-Registration Set up your proxy portal so that when a student adds a proxy, the proxy self-registers. Setup includes enabling standard external profiles, configuring the registration page, and creating email templates. Registered proxies join your Experience Cloud site directly from the login page. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure emails for proxies:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Access Drag-and-Drop Content Builder permission set

AND

Manage Public Lightning Email Templates permission set
To configure proxy self-registration: 1. Give standard external profiles access to the portal. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Role and User Settings, select **Allow using standard external profiles for self-registration, user creation, and login**. 3. Save your changes. 2. Configure a self-registration page. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Do one of these actions: - To create an Experience Cloud site, see [Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). - To use an existing Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces** for the site. 3. Under My Workspaces, click **Administration**. 4. Select **Login & Registration**. 5. In the Registration Page Configuration section, select **Allow customers and partners to self-register**. 6. Make sure that the profile is **Customer Community Plus User** or **Customer Community Plus Login User**. 7. Select an account. 8. Save your changes. # Configure Recurring Donations Learn how to set security permissions, deploy components, and configure settings to use Recurring Donations in your org. - **[About Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recurring Donations allows you to track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time, including monthly, quarterly, yearly, and custom installment schedules. - **[Assign Apex Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give users access to Apex classes so they can work with Recurring Donations. - **[Review Recurring Donation Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you begin using Recurring Donations, you should review, confirm, and optionally edit your Recurring Donations settings. NPSP provides default values, but you can change them at any time. - **[Adjust Object Permissions for Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide object permissions so users can view, create, and edit recurring donations. - **[Deploy Recurring Donation Lightning Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recurring Donations include Lightning record page components that provide details about upcoming installment Opportunities and schedule information. Deploy these components to get the most out of tracking recurring donations in NPSP. - **[Assign Enhanced Recurring Donations Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the **Enhanced Recurring Donations** page layout to all user profiles that need access to Recurring Donations. ## About Recurring Donations Recurring Donations allows you to track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time, including monthly, quarterly, yearly, and custom installment schedules. This feature accommodates both Open-Ended (no end date set) and Fixed-Length (end date set) Recurring Donations. Recurring Donations primarily uses these objects: - Recurring Donation (custom object): Used to set the donor, schedule, and amount for the Recurring Donation. - Opportunity (standard object): Used to track each individual installment for the Recurring Donation. For continuous installment generation, recurring donation owners must be active users. These owners also own related opportunities. NPSP stops generating new opportunity installments if the owner becomes inactive. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Record Types are not fully supported in NPSP Recurring Donations. You can have record types configured, but your users can't select the record types in the Recurring Donations entry form. Instead, NPSP will use the default record type for their profile. ## Assign Apex Classes Give users access to Apex classes so they can work with Recurring Donations. To ensure that you can access and configure Recurring Donations, verify that user profiles have access to these Apex classes: - `npsp.RD2_ChangeLogController` - `npsp.RD2_EnablementDelegate_CTRL` - `npsp.RD2_EntryFormController` - `npsp.RD2_PauseForm_CTRL` - `npsp.RD2_StatusAutomationSettings_CTRL` - `npsp.RD2_StatusMappingSettings_CTRL` - `npsp.RD2_VisualizeScheduleController` - `npsp.UTIL_BatchJobProgress_CTRL` ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You must use the [Enhanced Profile User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_about_enhanced_ui.htm) in order to access all available Apex classes. If you don't have access to these Apex classes, you'll see an error when you click Recurring Donations in NPSP Settings and you won't have access to Recurring Donation page layout custom components. To assign Apex classes: 1. Go to Setup. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click the name of the profile you want to edit. 4. Click **Apex Class Access**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Add the appropriate apex classes to the Enabled Apex Class list. 7. Save your changes. ## Review Recurring Donation Settings Before you begin using Recurring Donations, you should review, confirm, and optionally edit your Recurring Donations settings. NPSP provides default values, but you can change them at any time. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Make changes as necessary, then click **Save**. | Setting | Description | | --- | --- | | Recurring Donation Batch Size | The number of records to process at a time when running the Recurring Donations batch job. The default is 50. Reduce to a smaller number if the batch job is failing due to system limits. | | Open Opportunity Behavior on RD Close | Tells NPSP what to do with any remaining open Opportunities when you change the Status of a Recurring Donation to Closed. The options are: Delete Open Opportunities, Mark Open Opportunities as Closed Lost, or No Action. | | Add Campaign to All Opportunities | When selected, NPSP copies the Campaign you specified on the Recurring Donation to its installment Opportunities. | | Installment Opportunity Auto-Creation | Specifies when NPSP will create installment Opportunities for Recurring Donations. The default is Always Create Next Installment. | | Enable Recurring Donation Change Log | When enabled, NPSP creates a Recurring Donation Change Log record each time amount, schedule, or campaign fields of a Recurring Donation are updated. | | Opportunity Record Type | The Opportunity record type assigned to the Recurring Donation's installment Opportunities. | | Next Donation Date Match Range | The number of days before or after the Next Donation Date that NPSP won't create a new installment Opportunity if the next open Opportunity's Close Date is changed. Applies only to Recurring Donations where Installment Period is Monthly or Yearly. We do not recommend setting a value higher than 20 days. Default is 3. | | Use Fiscal Year for Recurring Donations | When checked, this option enables fiscal year for Recurring Donation value totals. To set the fiscal year start month, go to Setup | Company Settings | Fiscal Year. NOTE: Use Standard Fiscal Year only. Do not enable Custom Fiscal Year. | | Recurring Donation Name Format | When you create a Recurring Donation, NPSP automatically populates the Name using the specified name format. Choose Disable Automatic Naming to turn this feature off. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you enable the Recurring Donation Change Log, consider [disabling field history tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_field_history_tracking.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for Recurring Donations. Seeing both could confuse your users. However, the change log and field history might track different fields. ## Adjust Object Permissions for Recurring Donations Provide object permissions so users can view, create, and edit recurring donations. Enable Read, Create, and Edit [object-level security settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_object_perms_edit.htm&type=5) on your user profiles for these objects: - Recurring Donations - Opportunities Optionally, enable Read access on your user profiles to the Recurring Donation Change Logs object if you wish to use that feature. ## Deploy Recurring Donation Lightning Components Recurring Donations include Lightning record page components that provide details about upcoming installment Opportunities and schedule information. Deploy these components to get the most out of tracking recurring donations in NPSP. Deploy these components on your Recurring Donation Lightning record pages: - Recurring Donation Active Schedules - Recurring Donation Installments - Recurring Donation Change Log To deploy the Recurring Donation Lightning components: 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Recurring Donation**. 3. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 4. Click the label of your org default Lighting record page. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Click and drag each Lightning component onto the Lightning record page. We recommend placing the components in a column next to the page details. 7. Save your changes. ## Assign Enhanced Recurring Donations Page Layout Assign the **Enhanced Recurring Donations** page layout to all user profiles that need access to Recurring Donations. Learn how in [Assign Record Types and Page Layouts in the Enhanced Profile User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_record_types.htm&type=5). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you enable the Recurring Donation Change Log, add the Recurring Donation Change Log related list to the Enhanced Recurring Donations page layout. # Configure Referrals The Referrals feature was released in Case Management version 1.14 (8/18/2020). If you started using Case Management before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required set up steps. If you already have Referrals in your org, you can skip this setup. If you plan to use Intakes, also complete the required setup in [Configure Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package."). First, assign referral record types to profiles to ensure that users can see Inbound Referral and Outbound Referral fields in Cases. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click a profile name. 4. Click **Object Settings**. 5. Click **Cases**. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. Find Case: Record Types and Page Layout Assignments. 1. Next to Inbound Referral, select the **Inbound Referral** Page Layout Assignment, then select **Assigned Record Types**. Click **OK** to confirm your selection. 2. Next to Outbound Referral, select the **Outbound Referral** Page Layout Assignment, then select **Assigned Record Types**. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Repeat as needed for additional profiles. Next, add _Case Management_ to the names of the Inbound Referrals, Outbound Referrals, and Incidents List Views. 1. Click the **Cases** tab. 2. Select the Inbound Referrals List view. 3. Click List View Controls ![List view control icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/list-view-controls.png), then click **Rename**. 4. In the List name, enter Case Management: before Inbound Referrals. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Repeat for the Outbound Referrals and Incidents List Views. Then, add Case Record Types to the Cases related list on Contacts. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Case Management Layout**. 6. Find the Cases related list. 7. Click the wrench icon. 8. Select **Case Record Type** in the Available Fields list and click **Add**. 9. Click **OK**. 10. Click **Save** Finally, if you plan to use Intakes, also complete the required setup in [Configure Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package."). # Configure Related Lists on Accounts Configure Related Lists on your accounts. - **[Configure Related Lists on Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_rls_on_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To easily see how an Account (for example, a household) is interacting with your Programs, add the Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, and Service Participants related lists to the Account page layout. ## Configure Related Lists on Accounts To easily see how an Account (for example, a household) is interacting with your Programs, add the Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, and Service Participants related lists to the Account page layout. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 4. Click on your Account layout. 5. Click **Related Lists**. 6. Drag the Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, and Service Participants related lists from the panel to the layout below the Contacts related list. 7. Click **Save**. # Configure Relationships Settings Learn how to track important relationships between people and learn about optional configuration settings. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationship object represents relationships between people, on or off campus, at your institution. You can track the status and type of relationship between two contacts using the fields on Relationship records. - **[Before You Begin: Value Considerations for Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The values that you use for Relationships require precise matches everywhere that they're used. Mismatched values that you use in reciprocal settings and as picklist values in the Type field of the Relationship object can cause errors and show as failed checks in Settings Health Check. - **[Configure the Reciprocal Method](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Reciprocal Method setting determines how Salesforce creates Reciprocal Relationships. There are two methods: the List Setting method and the Value Inversion method. - **[Custom Reciprocal Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you use List Setting or Value Inversion to create Reciprocal Relationships, additional configuration is sometimes required to customize the default values. Review the usage and configuration details in this table to see if they apply. - **[Add or Edit Reciprocal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reciprocal relationship settings define the types of relationships that you track between Contacts. Edit the provided values or add others as needed. - **[Example Custom Reciprocal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to the default list of Reciprocal Settings for Reciprocal Relationships, you can add other Reciprocal Relationships to better represent your contacts' roles. Here are a few ideas depending on the type of relationships. - **[Add or Edit Auto-Create Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Auto-created Relationships allow a custom Contact lookup field on the Contact or Campaign Member object to automatically create a new Relationship. - **[Prevent Duplicate Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, if an existing Relationship between two Contacts has the same Type as a Relationship that would be auto-created based on your settings, a duplicate Relationship can't be created. If you prefer to allow Relationship auto-creation even when it duplicates existing Relationships, edit the Prevent Duplicate Relationships setting. ## Overview The Relationship object represents relationships between people, on or off campus, at your institution. You can track the status and type of relationship between two contacts using the fields on Relationship records. When you create one relationship record, the Reciprocal Relationship feature creates a corresponding record for the other contact. For example, a Contact might have a Relationship record that connects her as a daughter to a Contact who’s her father. When you create that relationship record, EDA automatically creates a Reciprocal Relationship for the related Contact with a type of Father. For example use cases and details about creating Relationship records, see [Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm). ## Before You Begin: Value Considerations for Relationships The values that you use for Relationships require precise matches everywhere that they're used. Mismatched values that you use in reciprocal settings and as picklist values in the Type field of the Relationship object can cause errors and show as failed checks in Settings Health Check. When you configure Relationships, follow these guidelines: - Use API names for all values specified for Relationships, including picklist values and reciprocal settings. - Note that all values are case-sensitive. - Use English names. EDA supports only the picklist value name and not the label. - Deactivate, delete, or edit the API names of Type values used in a reciprocal setting only in EDA Settings. ## Configure the Reciprocal Method The Reciprocal Method setting determines how Salesforce creates Reciprocal Relationships. There are two methods: the List Setting method and the Value Inversion method. List Setting The values in the Reciprocal Settings list determine the Type of Reciprocal Relationship that's created. For example, if you create a Relationship from a male-gendered Contact record with the Type Son, EDA automatically creates a Reciprocal Relationship of Father on the son's record. Father and Son are preconfigured values in the Reciprocal Settings list. Most orgs use List Setting, which is the default Reciprocal Method. Value Inversion EDA reverses the Type value on a Relationship record to reflect the reciprocal relationship. For example, a Mother-Daughter Type of Relationship creates a reciprocal Type of Daughter-Mother. Value Inversion ignores the Reciprocal Settings list. Create picklist values on the Relationship object's Type field for Mother-Daughter, Daughter-Mother, and all other possible combinations. This example shows the word pair inverted around a hyphen, which is the default delimiter separating the Relationship roles. Verify the selected Reciprocal Method, and change it if needed. 1. Click the **Education Cloud Settings** tab. If you don't see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher. For details, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. Under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 3. Click **Relationships** and verify the Reciprocal Method value. 4. To change the Reciprocal Method: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select a different value. 3. Save your changes. ## Custom Reciprocal Relationships Whether you use List Setting or Value Inversion to create Reciprocal Relationships, additional configuration is sometimes required to customize the default values. Review the usage and configuration details in this table to see if they apply.
Reciprocal Method Optional Configuration
List Setting

Because some Reciprocal Settings' values are gender-specific, gender data is involved in determining Type values.

  • Gender and Salutation fields—The Reciprocal Settings look in a Contact's Gender field for the values of Female or Male. If the Contact's gender isn't yet determined, the Reciprocal Settings look in the Salutation field for the Female and Male values. If the gender remains undetermined, the Reciprocal Setting's value is Neutral.
  • Female and Male custom labels—The values in the Female and Male custom labels determine how Gender picklist values and Salutation picklist values map to Female or Male. To allow more gender options than the default values of Female and Male, add values to these custom labels. Separate additional values with a comma. For example, let's say that you add Trans Woman to the Female custom label value to become Female,Trans Woman. Then a gender of Trans Woman or Female would be considered Female.
Value Inversion

The delimiter that separates each Contact's role in the Relationship is specified in the Relationship_Split custom label. You can edit the custom label value to use a different delimiter than the default hyphen delimiter, as used in the Mother-Daughter example.
### Edit Custom Reciprocal Relationship Values 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter **Custom Labels**, then select **Custom Labels**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the custom label, such as Female, Male, or Relationship\_Split. 3. Edit the Value as described in [Custom Reciprocal Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Whether you use List Setting or Value Inversion to create Reciprocal Relationships, additional configuration is sometimes required to customize the default values. Review the usage and configuration details in this table to see if they apply."). 4. Save your changes. ## Add or Edit Reciprocal Settings Reciprocal relationship settings define the types of relationships that you track between Contacts. Edit the provided values or add others as needed. Salesforce names a relationship based on a Contact’s gender. Let's consider an example involving sibling relationships. First, create a reciprocal setting named Brother and specify the Reciprocal Relationship values that you want to create. After you add the new values to the Reciprocal Settings list, when you save a Relationship record with a Type (Name) of Brother, you also create a Reciprocal Relationship with one of the values specified for Female, Male, or Neutral. The List Setting method's rules that determine gender determines the gender for each Contact. We conclude our example here, but it's incomplete. Because the Contact's gender and the related (reciprocal) Contact's gender can be known or unknown, create two more reciprocal settings—one named Sister and one named Sibling—to account for other possible combinations. | **If the Related Contact Is** | **Create This Reciprocal Relationship** | | --- | --- | | Female | Sister | | Male | Brother | | Gender unknown | Sibling | To add to the Reciprocal Settings list or to edit existing settings: 1. In Education Cloud Settings, click **Reciprocal Settings**. 2. To create a mapping, click **Add Setting**. 3. Fill out the fields, select **Active**, and save your changes. 4. To change an existing setting, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) for the mapping you want to change and then click **Edit**. 5. Make and save your changes. ## Example Custom Reciprocal Settings In addition to the default list of Reciprocal Settings for Reciprocal Relationships, you can add other Reciprocal Relationships to better represent your contacts' roles. Here are a few ideas depending on the type of relationships. **Siblings**
Name Male Female Neutral
Brother Brother Sister Sibling
Sister Brother Sister Sibling
Sibling Brother Sister Sibling
**Deceased Spouses**
Name Male Female Neutral
Widow Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse
Widower Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse
Deceased Spouse Widower Widow Deceased Spouse
**Divorces and Former Spouses**
Name Male Female Neutral
Ex-Husband Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Partner
Ex-Wife Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Partner
Former Partner Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Partner
## Add or Edit Auto-Create Settings Auto-created Relationships allow a custom Contact lookup field on the Contact or Campaign Member object to automatically create a new Relationship. For example, you can create a Referee lookup field on the Campaign Member object to track the person who introduced someone to your institution. Then create an Auto-Create Setting to automatically create Referrer and Referee Relationships between the Contacts.Before adding an Auto-Create setting, complete these prerequisites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Auto-created Relationships aren't available for Leads or Campaign Member objects that reference Leads. - Create a custom Contact lookup field on either the Contact or Campaign Member object. In our example, we create a Referee lookup field on Campaign Member. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Remember to add the new field to your Campaign Member page layout and set field-level security appropriately. - Make sure that the Relationship object's Type field has picklist values that reflect the type of Relationship represented by the lookup relationship. Continuing our example, we add values for Referrer and Referee. - If you're using the List Setting method, ensure that existing Reciprocal Settings reflect the type of Relationship represented by the lookup relationship. In our example, we add settings named Referee and Referrer. To add an Auto-Create setting: 1. In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Relationship Auto-Create, click **Manage**, and then click **New**. 3. Enter Relationship Auto-Create Information. 1. Enter a name for the Relationship Auto-Create. For example, Referee. 2. If the lookup field is on the Campaign Member object, enter the Campaign Type that this Auto-Create Setting applies to. Separate multiple values with semicolons and no spaces. 3. Enter the label of the lookup field that triggers the creation of the Relationship. 4. Enter the object that has the lookup field. For example, either Campaign Member or Contact. 5. Enter the type of Relationship that you want to create. For example, Referrer. The Reciprocal Relationship is created automatically after you add the setting. 4. Save your changes. If you're deleting an existing Auto-Create setting, be sure to click **Edit** and then click the trash icon. Don't modify the field values in the setting you're removing before deleting it. ## Prevent Duplicate Relationships By default, if an existing Relationship between two Contacts has the same Type as a Relationship that would be auto-created based on your settings, a duplicate Relationship can't be created. If you prefer to allow Relationship auto-creation even when it duplicates existing Relationships, edit the Prevent Duplicate Relationships setting. 1. Click the **Education Cloud Settings** tab. If you don't see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher. For details, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. Under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 3. Click **Prevent Duplicate Relationships**. 4. Click **Edit** and turn the setting off. 5. Save your changes. # Configure Relationships Settings In EDA Settings, click Relationships and configure the details of creating Reciprocal Relationships and auto-creating Relationships. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationship object represents relationships between people, on or off campus, at your institution. You can track the status and type of relationship between two contacts using the fields on Relationship records. - **[Configure the Reciprocal Method](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Reciprocal Method setting determines how Salesforce creates Reciprocal Relationships. There are two methods: the List Setting method and the Value Inversion method. - **[Custom Reciprocal Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you use List Setting or Value Inversion to create Reciprocal Relationships, additional configuration is sometimes required to customize the default values. Review the usage and configuration details in this table to see if they apply. - **[Add or Edit Reciprocal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reciprocal relationship settings define the types of relationships that you track between Contacts. Edit the provided values or add others as needed. - **[Example Custom Reciprocal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to the default list of Reciprocal Settings for Reciprocal Relationships, you can add other Reciprocal Relationships to better represent your contacts' roles. Here are a few ideas depending on the type of relationships. - **[Add or Edit Auto-Create Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Auto-created Relationships allow a custom Contact lookup field on the Contact or Campaign Member object to automatically create a new Relationship. - **[Prevent Duplicate Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, if an existing Relationship between two Contacts has the same Type as a Relationship that would be auto-created based on your settings, a duplicate Relationship can't be created. If you prefer to allow Relationship auto-creation even when it duplicates existing Relationships, edit the Prevent Duplicate Relationships setting. ## Overview The Relationship object represents relationships between people, on or off campus, at your institution. You can track the status and type of relationship between two contacts using the fields on Relationship records. When you create one relationship record, the Reciprocal Relationship feature creates a corresponding record for the other contact. For example, a Contact might have a Relationship record that connects her as a daughter to a Contact who’s her father. When you create that relationship record, EDA automatically creates a Reciprocal Relationship for the related Contact with a type of Father. For example use cases and details about creating Relationship records, see [Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm). ## Configure the Reciprocal Method The Reciprocal Method setting determines how Salesforce creates Reciprocal Relationships. There are two methods: the List Setting method and the Value Inversion method. List Setting The values in the Reciprocal Settings list determine the Type of Reciprocal Relationship that's created. For example, if you create a Relationship from a male-gendered Contact record with the Type Son, EDA automatically creates a Reciprocal Relationship of Father on the son's record. Father and Son are preconfigured values in the Reciprocal Settings list. Most orgs use List Setting, which is the default Reciprocal Method. Value Inversion EDA reverses the Type value on a Relationship record to reflect the reciprocal relationship. For example, a Mother-Daughter Type of Relationship creates a reciprocal Type of Daughter-Mother. Value Inversion ignores the Reciprocal Settings list. Create picklist values on the Relationship object's Type field for Mother-Daughter, Daughter-Mother, and all other possible combinations. This example shows the word pair inverted around a hyphen, which is the default delimiter separating the Relationship roles. Verify the selected Reciprocal Method, and change it if needed. 1. Click the **Education Cloud Settings** tab. If you don't see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher. For details, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. Under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 3. Click **Relationships** and verify the Reciprocal Method value. 4. To change the Reciprocal Method: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select a different value. 3. Save your changes. ## Custom Reciprocal Relationships Whether you use List Setting or Value Inversion to create Reciprocal Relationships, additional configuration is sometimes required to customize the default values. Review the usage and configuration details in this table to see if they apply.
Reciprocal Method Optional Configuration
List Setting

Because some Reciprocal Settings' values are gender-specific, gender data is involved in determining Type values.

  • Gender and Salutation fields—The Reciprocal Settings look in a Contact's Gender field for the values of Female or Male. If the Contact's gender isn't yet determined, the Reciprocal Settings look in the Salutation field for the Female and Male values. If the gender remains undetermined, the Reciprocal Setting's value is Neutral.
  • Female and Male custom labels—The values in the Female and Male custom labels determine how Gender picklist values and Salutation picklist values map to Female or Male. To allow more gender options than the default values of Female and Male, add values to these custom labels. Separate additional values with a comma. For example, let's say that you add Trans Woman to the Female custom label value to become Female,Trans Woman. Then a gender of Trans Woman or Female would be considered Female.
Value Inversion

The delimiter that separates each Contact's role in the Relationship is specified in the Relationship_Split custom label. You can edit the custom label value to use a different delimiter than the default hyphen delimiter, as used in the Mother-Daughter example.
### Edit Custom Reciprocal Relationship Values 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter **Custom Labels**, then select **Custom Labels**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the custom label, such as Female, Male, or Relationship\_Split. 3. Edit the Value as described in [Custom Reciprocal Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Whether you use List Setting or Value Inversion to create Reciprocal Relationships, additional configuration is sometimes required to customize the default values. Review the usage and configuration details in this table to see if they apply."). 4. Save your changes. ## Add or Edit Reciprocal Settings Reciprocal relationship settings define the types of relationships that you track between Contacts. Edit the provided values or add others as needed. Salesforce names a relationship based on a Contact’s gender. Let's consider an example involving sibling relationships. First, create a reciprocal setting named Brother and specify the Reciprocal Relationship values that you want to create. After you add the new values to the Reciprocal Settings list, when you save a Relationship record with a Type (Name) of Brother, you also create a Reciprocal Relationship with one of the values specified for Female, Male, or Neutral. The List Setting method's rules that determine gender determines the gender for each Contact. We conclude our example here, but it's incomplete. Because the Contact's gender and the related (reciprocal) Contact's gender can be known or unknown, create two more reciprocal settings—one named Sister and one named Sibling—to account for other possible combinations. | **If the Related Contact Is** | **Create This Reciprocal Relationship** | | --- | --- | | Female | Sister | | Male | Brother | | Gender unknown | Sibling | To add to the Reciprocal Settings list or to edit existing settings: 1. In Education Cloud Settings, click **Reciprocal Settings**. 2. To create a mapping, click **Add Setting**. 3. Fill out the fields, select **Active**, and save your changes. 4. To change an existing setting, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) for the mapping you want to change and then click **Edit**. 5. Make and save your changes. ## Example Custom Reciprocal Settings In addition to the default list of Reciprocal Settings for Reciprocal Relationships, you can add other Reciprocal Relationships to better represent your contacts' roles. Here are a few ideas depending on the type of relationships. **Siblings**
Name Male Female Neutral
Brother Brother Sister Sibling
Sister Brother Sister Sibling
Sibling Brother Sister Sibling
**Deceased Spouses**
Name Male Female Neutral
Widow Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse
Widower Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse
Deceased Spouse Widower Widow Deceased Spouse
**Divorces and Former Spouses**
Name Male Female Neutral
Ex-Husband Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Partner
Ex-Wife Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Partner
Former Partner Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Partner
## Add or Edit Auto-Create Settings Auto-created Relationships allow a custom Contact lookup field on the Contact or Campaign Member object to automatically create a new Relationship. For example, you can create a Referee lookup field on the Campaign Member object to track the person who introduced someone to your institution. Then create an Auto-Create Setting to automatically create Referrer and Referee Relationships between the Contacts.Before adding an Auto-Create setting, complete these prerequisites. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Auto-created Relationships aren't available for Leads or Campaign Member objects that reference Leads. - Create a custom Contact lookup field on either the Contact or Campaign Member object. In our example, we create a Referee lookup field on Campaign Member. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Remember to add the new field to your Campaign Member page layout and set field-level security appropriately. - Make sure that the Relationship object's Type field has picklist values that reflect the type of Relationship represented by the lookup relationship. Continuing our example, we add values for Referrer and Referee. - If you're using the List Setting method, ensure that existing Reciprocal Settings reflect the type of Relationship represented by the lookup relationship. In our example, we add settings named Referee and Referrer. To add an Auto-Create setting: 1. In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Relationship Auto-Create, click **Manage**, and then click **New**. 3. Enter Relationship Auto-Create Information. 1. Enter a name for the Relationship Auto-Create. For example, Referee. 2. If the lookup field is on the Campaign Member object, enter the Campaign Type that this Auto-Create Setting applies to. Separate multiple values with semicolons and no spaces. 3. Enter the label of the lookup field that triggers the creation of the Relationship. 4. Enter the object that has the lookup field. For example, either Campaign Member or Contact. 5. Enter the type of Relationship that you want to create. For example, Referrer. The Reciprocal Relationship is created automatically after you add the setting. 4. Save your changes. If you're deleting an existing Auto-Create setting, be sure to click **Edit** and then click the trash icon. Don't modify the field values in the setting you're removing before deleting it. ## Prevent Duplicate Relationships By default, if an existing Relationship between two Contacts has the same Type as a Relationship that would be auto-created based on your settings, a duplicate Relationship can't be created. If you prefer to allow Relationship auto-creation even when it duplicates existing Relationships, edit the Prevent Duplicate Relationships setting. 1. Click the **Education Cloud Settings** tab. If you don't see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher. For details, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. Under Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. 3. Click **Prevent Duplicate Relationships**. 4. Click **Edit** and turn the setting off. 5. Save your changes. # Configure RFM Scoring in Education Salesforce Admins can set up RFM scoring in the Fundraising settings. These settings are used by the RFM Score Calculation data processing engine definition to create the scores. You can run this data processing job manually from Settings, but the recommended method is to run the job on a schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure RFM scoring:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter RFM, and then select **Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) Score**. 2. Click **Configure Scoring**. 3. Set the number of fields to use as sources for each scoring method and click **Next**. 4. Configure the recency score. 1. Set a destination object and field where the calculated score is stored. For example, choose Donor Gift Summary as the object and Recency Score as the field to have the RFM Data Processing Job write the recency score to the Donor Gift Summary in the Recency Score field. 2. Select the objects and fields to use as sources for the recency score. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The source object selected for the recency score, is also used as the source object for the frequency and monetary value score. Use fields that contain aggregated data (like rollups or fields with data that is calculated) as the source fields. Use fields that have the same units of measure for the source fields, because the RFM calculation doesn't perform conversions. 3. Set what percentage of the total recency score each of the sources provides. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use only whole numbers for the percent field. This percent indicates the weight that each of the field values have toward the total recency score. For example, if you have two source fields, and one is weighted at 80% and the other is weighted at 20%, the total recency score is calculated as 0.8\*A + 0.2\*B = total recency score. 4. To relate the source objects to the destination object, select related fields that are lookups for the destination object. If the source and destination objects are the same, the related lookup field defaults to ID. 5. Click **Next**. 5. Configure the frequency score. 6. Configure the monetary value score. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The monetary score can be in any currency, as long as the data used to source the score is consistent. 7. Set the destination for the composite RFM score and click **Next**. For example, select Donor Gift Summary for the destination object and Composite RFM Score for the destination field. 8. Select the number of ranges to include for each of the score components and click **Next**. For example, if you select 3, the scores are calculated in three groups. 9. Set the ranges for how recently the donor donated during a specified time frame and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Set the ranges in ascending order where the first range is the best scoring range and the last range is the worst scoring range. Range values can’t overlap or be duplicated. Ranges can be set with integers from zero to infinity. 10. Set the number of donations for each range of the frequency score and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Set the ranges in descending order, where the first range has the most donations and the last range has the least. Range values can’t overlap or be duplicated. Ranges can be set with integers from zero to infinity. 11. Set the amount donors have given for each range of the monetary value score and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Set the ranges in descending order, where the first range has the largest amount and the last range has the least amount donated. Range values can’t overlap or be duplicated. Ranges can be set with integers from zero to infinity. 12. Review your settings, and then save your work. # Configure RFM Scoring in Nonprofit Salesforce Admins can set up RFM scoring in the Fundraising settings. These settings are used by the RFM Score Calculation data processing engine definition to create the scores. You can run this data processing job manually from Settings, but the recommended method is to run the job on a schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To configure RFM scoring:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter RFM, and then select **Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) Score**. 2. Click **Configure Scoring**. 3. Set the number of fields to use as sources for each scoring method and click **Next**. 4. Configure the recency score. 1. Set a destination object and field where the calculated score is stored. For example, choose Donor Gift Summary as the object and Recency Score as the field to have the RFM Data Processing Job write the recency score to the Donor Gift Summary in the Recency Score field. 2. Select the objects and fields to use as sources for the recency score. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The source object selected for the recency score, is also used as the source object for the frequency and monetary value score. Use fields that contain aggregated data (like rollups or fields with data that is calculated) as the source fields. Use fields that have the same units of measure for the source fields, because the RFM calculation doesn't perform conversions. 3. Set what percentage of the total recency score each of the sources provides. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Use only whole numbers for the percent field. This percent indicates the weight that each of the field values have toward the total recency score. For example, if you have two source fields, and one is weighted at 80% and the other is weighted at 20%, the total recency score is calculated as 0.8\*A + 0.2\*B = total recency score. 4. To relate the source objects to the destination object, select related fields that are lookups for the destination object. If the source and destination objects are the same, the related lookup field defaults to ID. 5. Click **Next**. 5. Configure the frequency score. 6. Configure the monetary value score. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The monetary score can be in any currency, as long as the data used to source the score is consistent. 7. Set the destination for the composite RFM score and click **Next**. For example, select Donor Gift Summary for the destination object and Composite RFM Score for the destination field. 8. Select the number of ranges to include for each of the score components and click **Next**. For example, if you select 3, the scores are calculated in three groups. 9. Set the ranges for how recently the donor donated during a specified time frame and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Set the ranges in ascending order where the first range is the best scoring range and the last range is the worst scoring range. Range values can’t overlap or be duplicated. Ranges can be set with integers from zero to infinity. 10. Set the number of donations for each range of the frequency score and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Set the ranges in descending order, where the first range has the most donations and the last range has the least. Range values can’t overlap or be duplicated. Ranges can be set with integers from zero to infinity. 11. Set the amount donors have given for each range of the monetary value score and click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Set the ranges in descending order, where the first range has the largest amount and the last range has the least amount donated. Range values can’t overlap or be duplicated. Ranges can be set with integers from zero to infinity. 12. Review your settings, and then save your work. # Configure Scheduling of Recurring Jobs and Volunteers Automatic scheduling of Jobs and volunteers into the future saves a ton of repetitive data entry. Say you have 10 volunteer slots for meal delivery every day, from 9 a.m. to 3 p.m., in two 3-hour Shifts. You have a set of volunteers who reliably fill those Shifts. Set up the Volunteers for Salesforce batch job to run periodically and automatically create recurring Shifts and assign recurring volunteers to them. - **[Set Up Automatic Creation of Recurring Shifts and Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use batch jobs to automatically create records for you, including those that track shifts and volunteers. - **[Control How Far in the Future to Schedule Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Out-of-the-box, the Volunteers for Salesforce batch job schedules recurring Jobs—and assigns recurring volunteers to them—four months into the future. Adjust this timeframe as needed. - **[Manually Run Batch Processing of Recurring Jobs and Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The scheduled recurrence batch job runs automatically after you've scheduled it. If you want scheduled recurrences processed at other times, between scheduled runs, you can start the process manually. ## Set Up Automatic Creation of Recurring Shifts and Volunteers Use batch jobs to automatically create records for you, including those that track shifts and volunteers. V4S comes with a batch job that you can run on a set schedule. For example, set up the batch job to run once a week and automatically create Shift records for any active Job Recurrence Schedules, and assign any recurring volunteers to those shifts. Each time the batch runs, it generates new records for a few months out (or for whatever time period you've specified in the Recurring Job Future Months custom setting) and updates existing records to reflect changes in event scheduling or volunteer availability. 1. From Setup, enter Apex in the Quick Find box, then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Click **Schedule Apex**. 3. Give the job a name, such as Schedule Recurrences. 4. For Apex Class, search for and select **VOL\_BATCH\_Recurrence**. ![Search for the VOL\_BATCH\_Recurrence Apex class](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/apex_class_batch_setup.png) 5. Specify the job frequency, such as Sundays at 1 a.m. 6. Set an end date well into the future. 7. **Save** your changes. Now the batch job runs automatically on this schedule, creating recurring shifts and volunteers for active Job Recurrence Schedules. ## Control How Far in the Future to Schedule Shifts Out-of-the-box, the Volunteers for Salesforce batch job schedules recurring Jobs—and assigns recurring volunteers to them—four months into the future. Adjust this timeframe as needed. Keep in mind that the more months you schedule out, the more data needs to be crunched when the scheduling batch job runs. Salesforce sets limits on how much processing power your batch jobs can consume, so keep it to a reasonable number. For limits information, see [Apex Governor Limits](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.salesforce_app_limits_cheatsheet.meta/salesforce_app_limits_cheatsheet/salesforce_app_limits_platform_apexgov.htm) in the Salesforce Developer Documentation. 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Volunteers Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**. If there are no Custom Settings values configured, click **New**. 4. Update the value of the Recurring Job Future Months field to the desired number of months. 5. **Save** your changes. Now, every time the batch job runs (according to the frequency you specified when creating the batch job), it processes data for your chosen time period. ## Manually Run Batch Processing of Recurring Jobs and Volunteers The scheduled recurrence batch job runs automatically after you've scheduled it. If you want scheduled recurrences processed at other times, between scheduled runs, you can start the process manually. 1. Click the App Launcher ( ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png) ). 2. Find and then click **Process Recurrence Schedules**. 3. Click **Run Batch**. The page confirms when processing is finished. ![Confirmation of completed batch processing of recurrence schedules](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/batch_process_manual_confirmation.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note You may see this error after you run the batch: `Insert failed. First exception on row 0; first error: FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION, Please enter a valid URL: [External_Signup_Url__c],`. This error occurs if your External Signup Url fields on the Volunteer Job object don't start with http, https, or mailto. To resolve this issue, fix the problematic External Signup Url values and then run the batch. Alternatively, you can temporarily deactivate the ValidateExternalSignupUrl validation rule on the Volunteer Job object and run the batch, but be sure to activate the validation rule once you're finished. # Configure Search Criteria for Campuses and Support Programs Create a search criteria configuration for your campuses and support programs in Campus and Program Finder. Define the fields that users use as filter criteria and the fields that they see for the search results. Select the fields that users use to sort and aggregate the results. Finally, select the actions that the user can take on the search records and define the location parameters. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter: Education Cloud Full Access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The process for creating search criteria is the same for campuses and support programs. However, each search criteria must be set up separately. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Criteria and then select **Criteria-Based Search and Filter**. 2. On the Search Configuration tab, click **New**. 3. Select **Default Search** as the configuration type, and then click **Next**. 4. Provide basic details. 1. Enter a name for the configuration. For example, for a campus search, enter Search by Campus. The API Name populates automatically. 2. For Searchable Object, search for and select **Educational Institution Searchable Profile**. 3. For Searchable Object Configuration, select the Educational Institution Searchable Profile searchable object configuration that you created. 4. Optionally, enter a description. 5. Click **Next**. 5. Select fields for querying data for your search criteria configuration. - For a campus search, add the Educational Institution Name field. - For a support program search, add the Support Program Name field. 6. Click **Next**. 7. For the search result display format, select **List**, and then click **Next**. 8. Select fields to display search results for your search criteria configuration. - For a campus search, we recommend these fields: - Educational Institution Name - Educational Institution Type - Educational Institution Format - Grades Offered Summary - Learning Program Name - Support Program Name - For a support program search, we recommend these fields: - Support Program Name - Provider Name - Educational Institution Name - Educational Institution Type - Support Program Format 9. Click **Next**. 10. Define the distance criteria. 1. For Unit of Measure, select **Miles**. 2. For Value, enter the maximum relative distance range. For example, enter 20 and then click **Add** to find campuses or programs within a 20-mile range. 3. If desired, add distance range values of 15, 10, 5, and 1 to incrementally extend the scope of campus search. 4. For Relative Location, select **Address**. 5. Turn on **Show Map**. 6. Click **Next**. 11. Configure map markers. 1. For Map Marker Title, select **Educational Institution Name**. 2. For Map Marker Description, select **Educational Institution Type**. 3. Click **Next**. 12. For Result Display Mode, select **Multiple Fields**. Then, select up to 20 fields for your search criteria configuration. - For a campus search, we recommend these fields: - Educational Institution Name - Educational Institution Format - Grades Offered Summary - For a support program search, we recommend these fields: - Support Program Format - Support Program Name - Provider Name 13. Leave **Skip configuring advanced filters and range types** unchecked. 14. Click **Next**. 15. For Configure Range Types, click **Next**. 16. Select fields to sort search results for your search criteria configuration. - For a campus search, we recommend these fields: - Educational Institution Name - Educational Institution Type - Grades Offered Summary - For a support program search, we recommend these fields: - Educational Institution Name - Support Program Name - Provider Name 17. Click **Next**. 18. Click **Done**. 19. Click **Activate**. # Configure Search Criteria for Learning Programs Create a search criteria configuration for your learning programs in Campus and Program Finder. Define the fields that users use as filter criteria and the fields that they see for the search results. Select the fields that users use to sort and aggregate the results. Finally, select the actions that the user can take on the search records and define the location parameters. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure Criteria-Based Search and Filter: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you start, [configure card view and Request for Information for learning programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_card_rfi_for_learning_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give applicants, students, and families an easy way to view and request more information about learning programs. To present details of learning programs in cards and collect requests for information, configure the EDU Admissions: Create Inquiries from Learning Programs flow and the subflows that it calls, and then configure Flexcards. These configurations support students and applicants to request information about learning programs one at a time."). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Criteria and then select **Criteria-Based Search and Filter**. 2. On the Search Configuration tab, click **New**. 3. Select **Default Search** as the configuration type, and then click **Next**. 4. Provide basic details. 1. Enter a name for the configuration. For example, enter Search by Learning Program. The API Name populates automatically. 2. For Searchable Object, search for and select **Educational Institution Searchable Profile**. 3. For Searchable Object Configuration, select the Educational Institution Searchable Profile searchable object configuration that you created. 4. Optionally, enter a description. 5. Click **Next**. 5. Select fields for querying data. 1. Add the Learning Program Name field. 2. Click **Next**. 6. For the search result display format, select **Card**, and then click **Next**. 7. Select your version of the EDUAdmissionsLearningProgramCardContainer Flexcard as the name, and then click **Next**. 8. Define the distance criteria. 1. For Unit of Measure, select **Miles**. 2. For Value, enter the maximum relative distance range. For example, enter 20 and then click **Add** to find learning programs within a 20-mile range. 3. If desired, add distance range values of 15, 10, 5, and 1 to incrementally extend the scope of learning program search. 4. For Relative Location, select **Address**. 5. Turn on **Show Map**. 6. Click **Next**. 9. Configure map markers. 1. For Map Marker Title, select **Educational Institution Name**. 2. For Map Marker Description, select **Educational Institution Type**. 3. Click **Next**. 10. Select fields to group and aggregate search results. 1. For Result Display Mode, select **Multiple Fields**. 2. Add up to 20 selected fields. For a learning program, we recommend: - Learning Category - Learning Format - Learning Grade - Learning Program Name - Provider Name 3. Leave **Skip configuring advanced filters and range types** unchecked. 4. Click **Next**. 11. For Configure Range Types, click **Next**. 12. Select fields to sort search results. 1. Add up to 20 selected fields. For a learning program, we recommend: - Educational Institution Name - Learning Academic Level - Learning Program Name - Provider Name 2. Click **Next**. 13. Click **Done**. 14. Click **Activate**. # Configure Self-Registration Set up self-registration if you want guest users to be able to register for an account on your portal. - **[Assign the Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_self_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Fundseeker Plus Login profile is included with Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and provides baseline permission recommendations for fundseekers who have registered for an account on your fundseeker portal . - **[Enable Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_self_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on self-registration in the Experience Cloud Administration workspace for your fundseeker portal portal. - **[Assign Users to Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_self_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Person Accounts, skip this section. ## Assign the Profile The Fundseeker Plus Login profile is included with Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and provides baseline permission recommendations for fundseekers who have registered for an account on your fundseeker portal . If you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site_ installer, the Fundseeker Plus Login profile is already assigned. However, if you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer, you'll need to assign the Fundseeker Plus Login profile to give fundseekers access to the portal when they are logged in. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Workspaces** for your site. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Select **Members**. 6. Click **Search**, then select **All**. 7. Select **Fundseeker Plus Login**, then add it to Selected Profiles. 8. Save your work. ## Enable Self-Registration Turn on self-registration in the Experience Cloud Administration workspace for your fundseeker portal portal. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Workspaces** for your site. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Click **Login & Registration**. 6. Select **Allow customers and partners to self-register**. ## Assign Users to Account If you use Person Accounts, skip this section. 1. Click ![Search](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/search.png)to open Account search. 2. Enter an account name you want to associate with the registered fundseeker. 3. Click **Go!** and select the Account. 4. Save your work. See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=account_person_enable.htm&type=5). # Configure Service Delivery Summary Data The Service Delivery summary fields are automatically-calculated fields on the Contact, Program Engagement, Service, and Service Session objects. They track attendance and the date of a client’s last service. - **[Service Delivery Summary Data Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Service Delivery summary fields are automatically-calculated fields on the Contact, Program Engagement, Service, and Service Session objects. They track attendance and the date of a client’s last service. - **[Activate Service Delivery Summary Field Triggers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Delivery summary fields are available on Contacts, Program Engagements, Services, and Service Sessions. Enable them for all objects or just those that meet the needs of your org. The triggers for these fields are turned off by default. Activate the triggers for the summary fields you want to see. - **[Create a Scheduled Job to Recalculate Service Delivery Summary Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a Salesforce admin, you can schedule a job to recalculate Service Delivery summary fields on an organization-wide basis. While the triggers incrementally increase the existing summary fields as each new Service Delivery record is created, the batch jobs fully recalculate all Service Delivery records. To ensure that your calculations are always up to date and accurate, schedule the jobs to run weekly or monthly. - **[Add Service Delivery Summary Fields to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up page layouts with service delivery summary fields. - **[Configure Absent and Present Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We include three Attendance Statuses out of the box: Present, Excused Absence, and Unexcused Absence. If you need additional statuses, make sure to indicate if they are Absent or Present values so they’re factored into our summary fields. ## Service Delivery Summary Data Overview The Service Delivery summary fields are automatically-calculated fields on the Contact, Program Engagement, Service, and Service Session objects. They track attendance and the date of a client’s last service. - Attendance Rate - Attendance Summary - Consecutive Absences - Last Service Date - Number of Absent Service Deliveries - Number of Present Service Deliveries To use these fields, perform these setup steps. ## Activate Service Delivery Summary Field Triggers Service Delivery summary fields are available on Contacts, Program Engagements, Services, and Service Sessions. Enable them for all objects or just those that meet the needs of your org. The triggers for these fields are turned off by default. Activate the triggers for the summary fields you want to see. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Metadata, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Manage Records for **Feature Gate**. 3. From the View menu, select **All**. 4. Click **Edit** next to the summary field you want to use. - Roll up Service Deliveries to Contact - Roll up Service Deliveries to Service - Roll up Svc Deliveries to Svc Session - Rollup Svc Deliveries to Pgm Engagement 5. Select **Feature Active**. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for each set of object Service Delivery summary fields you want to activate. ## Create a Scheduled Job to Recalculate Service Delivery Summary Fields As a Salesforce admin, you can schedule a job to recalculate Service Delivery summary fields on an organization-wide basis. While the triggers incrementally increase the existing summary fields as each new Service Delivery record is created, the batch jobs fully recalculate all Service Delivery records. To ensure that your calculations are always up to date and accurate, schedule the jobs to run weekly or monthly. Schedule a job for each summary field Trigger you enabled. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Click **Compile All Classes**. 3. After compilation is complete, click **Schedule Apex**. 4. Enter a Job Name. For example, Service Delivery to Contact Rollup. 5. Select the Apex class. - ContactRollupsSchedulable - ProgramEngagementRollupsSchedulable - ServiceRollupsSchedulable - SessionRollupsSchedulable 6. Specify a Frequency, Start and End times, and Preferred Start Time. We recommend a Start Time when users won’t be working with Service Delivery records.  ![Scheduling an Apex job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/schedule_apex_classes.png) 7. Click **Save**. 8. To verify your scheduled job, enter then select Scheduled Jobs in the Quick Find box. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need help with this process, see [Schedule Apex Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.code_schedule_batch_apex.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Add Service Delivery Summary Fields to Page Layouts Set up page layouts with service delivery summary fields. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important We recommend that you make these fields Read-Only, as they’re automatically updated and should not be modified. On the Contact and Program Engagement objects, add these fields to your page layouts: - Attendance Summary - Consecutive Absences - Last Service Date ![The Service Delivery Summary section on a Contact, with the Attendance Summary, Consecutive Absences, and Last Service Date fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/service_delivery_summary.png) On the Service and Service Session objects, add this field to your page layouts: - Attendance Summary ![Shows the Attendance Summary field in the Information section on a Service detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/service_attendance_summary.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note The Number of Absent Service Deliveries, Number of Present Service Deliveries, and Attendance Rate fields are included in the Attendance Summary. You can optionally add them to page layouts as needed. ## Configure Absent and Present Values We include three Attendance Statuses out of the box: Present, Excused Absence, and Unexcused Absence. If you need additional statuses, make sure to indicate if they are Absent or Present values so they’re factored into our summary fields. 1. First, add the new value to the Attendance Status picklist. 1. From the object management settings for Service Deliveries go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Click **Attendance Status**. 3. In the Values related list, click **New**. 4. Add the new value. If adding multiple values, enter one on each line. For example, Partially Attended. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Copy the API Name of the new value, as you’ll need it in the next step. 2. Next, indicate if the value is either Absent or Present. 1. From Setup, click the **Home** tab. 2. Enter Metadata in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Enter a Label for the value. For example, Partially Attended. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 6. In the Bucket field, select either Absent or Present. For the Partially Attended status, we want the client marked as Present, so we’ll select Present. 7. Paste the API Name from the previous step into the Value field. ![Mark status absent or present](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/mark_status_absent_present.png) 8. Click **Save**. # Configure Service Delivery Summary Data Activate the Service Delivery summary field triggers, create a scheduled job to recalculate the fields, add the fields to page layouts, and configure Absent and Present values to use the Service Delivery summary fields. - **[Service Delivery Summary Data Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Service Delivery summary fields are automatically-calculated fields on the Contact, Program Engagement, Service, and Service Session objects. They track attendance and the date of a client’s last service. - **[Activate Service Delivery Summary Field Triggers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Delivery summary fields are available on Contacts, Program Engagements, Services, and Service Sessions. Enable them for all objects or just those that meet the needs of your org. The triggers for these fields are turned off by default. Activate the triggers for the summary fields you want to see. - **[Create a Scheduled Job to Recalculate Service Delivery Summary Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a Salesforce admin, you can schedule a job to recalculate Service Delivery summary fields on an organization-wide basis. While the triggers incrementally increase the existing summary fields as each new Service Delivery record is created, the batch jobs fully recalculate all Service Delivery records. To ensure that your calculations are always up to date and accurate, schedule the jobs to run weekly or monthly. - **[Add Service Delivery Summary Fields to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up page layouts with service delivery summary fields. - **[Configure Absent and Present Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We include three Attendance Statuses out of the box: Present, Excused Absence, and Unexcused Absence. If you need additional statuses, make sure to indicate if they are Absent or Present values so they’re factored into our summary fields. ## Service Delivery Summary Data Overview The Service Delivery summary fields are automatically-calculated fields on the Contact, Program Engagement, Service, and Service Session objects. They track attendance and the date of a client’s last service. - Attendance Rate - Attendance Summary - Consecutive Absences - Last Service Date - Number of Absent Service Deliveries - Number of Present Service Deliveries To use these fields, perform these setup steps. ## Activate Service Delivery Summary Field Triggers Service Delivery summary fields are available on Contacts, Program Engagements, Services, and Service Sessions. Enable them for all objects or just those that meet the needs of your org. The triggers for these fields are turned off by default. Activate the triggers for the summary fields you want to see. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Metadata, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Manage Records for **Feature Gate**. 3. From the View menu, select **All**. 4. Click **Edit** next to the summary field you want to use. - Roll up Service Deliveries to Contact - Roll up Service Deliveries to Service - Roll up Svc Deliveries to Svc Session - Rollup Svc Deliveries to Pgm Engagement 5. Select **Feature Active**. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for each set of object Service Delivery summary fields you want to activate. ## Create a Scheduled Job to Recalculate Service Delivery Summary Fields As a Salesforce admin, you can schedule a job to recalculate Service Delivery summary fields on an organization-wide basis. While the triggers incrementally increase the existing summary fields as each new Service Delivery record is created, the batch jobs fully recalculate all Service Delivery records. To ensure that your calculations are always up to date and accurate, schedule the jobs to run weekly or monthly. Schedule a job for each summary field Trigger you enabled. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Click **Compile All Classes**. 3. After compilation is complete, click **Schedule Apex**. 4. Enter a Job Name. For example, Service Delivery to Contact Rollup. 5. Select the Apex class. - ContactRollupsSchedulable - ProgramEngagementRollupsSchedulable - ServiceRollupsSchedulable - SessionRollupsSchedulable 6. Specify a Frequency, Start and End times, and Preferred Start Time. We recommend a Start Time when users won’t be working with Service Delivery records.  ![Scheduling an Apex job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/schedule_apex_classes.png) 7. Click **Save**. 8. To verify your scheduled job, enter then select Scheduled Jobs in the Quick Find box. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need help with this process, see [Schedule Apex Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.code_schedule_batch_apex.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Add Service Delivery Summary Fields to Page Layouts Set up page layouts with service delivery summary fields. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important We recommend that you make these fields Read-Only, as they’re automatically updated and should not be modified. On the Contact and Program Engagement objects, add these fields to your page layouts: - Attendance Summary - Consecutive Absences - Last Service Date ![The Service Delivery Summary section on a Contact, with the Attendance Summary, Consecutive Absences, and Last Service Date fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/service_delivery_summary.png) On the Service and Service Session objects, add this field to your page layouts: - Attendance Summary ![Shows the Attendance Summary field in the Information section on a Service detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/service_attendance_summary.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note The Number of Absent Service Deliveries, Number of Present Service Deliveries, and Attendance Rate fields are included in the Attendance Summary. You can optionally add them to page layouts as needed. ## Configure Absent and Present Values We include three Attendance Statuses out of the box: Present, Excused Absence, and Unexcused Absence. If you need additional statuses, make sure to indicate if they are Absent or Present values so they’re factored into our summary fields. 1. First, add the new value to the Attendance Status picklist. 1. From the object management settings for Service Deliveries go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Click **Attendance Status**. 3. In the Values related list, click **New**. 4. Add the new value. If adding multiple values, enter one on each line. For example, Partially Attended. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Copy the API Name of the new value, as you’ll need it in the next step. 2. Next, indicate if the value is either Absent or Present. 1. From Setup, click the **Home** tab. 2. Enter Metadata in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Enter a Label for the value. For example, Partially Attended. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 6. In the Bucket field, select either Absent or Present. For the Partially Attended status, we want the client marked as Present, so we’ll select Present. 7. Paste the API Name from the previous step into the Value field. ![Mark status absent or present](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/mark_status_absent_present.png) 8. Click **Save**. # Configure Service Schedules Many organizations offer one-time or recurring Services for individuals or groups. For example, your organization might offer classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, community outreach events, or other types of events. Use Service Schedules to schedule and manage these events. - **[Required Setup for Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_service_schedules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Schedules were released in PMM version 1.17 (11/05/2020). If you started using the product before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required setup steps. If you already have Service Schedules in your org, you can skip this section. - **[Customize Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_service_schedules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the information collected when a user creates a New Service Schedule by clicking New on the Service Schedules tab. - **[Customize Service Schedule Attendance Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_service_schedules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Track Attendance component on a Service Session lets users create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. ## Required Setup for Service Schedules Service Schedules were released in PMM version 1.17 (11/05/2020). If you started using the product before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required setup steps. If you already have Service Schedules in your org, you can skip this section. First, add the Service Schedules and Service Participants related lists to the Service page layout. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Service**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**, then click **Service Layout**. 5. From the palette, click **Related Lists** and drag the **Service Schedules** and **Service Participants** related lists to the page layout. 6. Click **Save**. Next, if you previously customized the Program Engagement and Contact pages, you’ll also need to add the Service Participants related list to both pages. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Program Engagement** or **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**, then click the Case Management layout for the object. 5. From the palette, click **Related Lists** and drag the **Service Participants** related list to the page layout. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat for the other object, Program Engagement or Contact, if you also customized that page. ## Customize Service Schedules Customize the information collected when a user creates a New Service Schedule by clicking New on the Service Schedules tab. To customize the Service Schedule Information fields in the New Service Schedule: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Service Schedule**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **Service Schedule Information**. 6. Drag the fields to and from the palette and In the Field Set. 7. Click **Save**. To customize the Add Service Participants fields in the New Service Schedule: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Program Engagement**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **SessionParticipantView**. 6. In the palette, click an object under Program Engagement. For example, click Household Account. 7. Drag fields to and from the palette and In the Field Set. For example, under Household Account, drag Account Name. 8. Click **Save**. ## Customize Service Schedule Attendance Tracking The Track Attendance component on a Service Session lets users create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. Track Attendance is a quick and efficient way to create Service Deliveries for all participants from a single interface. Users must have PMM: Deliver or PMM: Manage permissions to use Track Attendance.   ### Customize Track Attendance Fields By default, Track Attendance collects the following information to include in each Service Delivery: - Client: The Service Participant from the related Service Schedule. - Quantity: The amount of the service that was attended, labeled using the Unit of Measurement from the Service associated with the Service Schedule. For example, users will see _Hours_ for a Service that uses Hours as the Unit of Measurement. Users can also set a Default Service Quantity on a Service Schedule to automatically populate the Quantity. See [Schedule Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm). - Attendance Status: The status of the Service Participant in the session, which can be Present, Unexcused Absence, or Excused Absence. See [Customize Service Schedule Attendance Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_service_schedules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Track Attendance component on a Service Session lets users create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session.") to edit Attendance Status values. To add to the information collected using Track Attendance, customize the Attendance Service Deliveries field set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Service Delivery**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **Attendance Service Deliveries**. 6. Drag fields to or from the palette and the In the Field Set box. Don't remove the Client or Attendance Status fields. 7. Click **Save**. ### Customize Attendance Status Values The default Attendance Status values are Present, Excused Absence, and Unexcused Absence. Present is assigned to all Service Participants by default. Excused Absence and Unexcused Absence default the Quantity of a Service Delivery to zero.  We recommend keeping the default Attendance Status values and only adding custom values as needed. Keep in mind that custom values will always default the Quantity to zero. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Service Delivery**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **Attendance Status**. 6. Scroll to the Values section. 7. Add or edit Attendance Values. Don't change the API Name of the default Attendance Status values. # Configure Service Schedules Many organizations offer one-time or recurring Services for individuals or groups. For example, your organization might offer classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, community outreach events, or other types of events. Use Service Schedules to schedule and manage these events. - **[Required Setup for Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_service_schedules_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Service Schedules were released in PMM version 1.17 (11/05/2020). If you started using the product before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required setup steps. If you already have Service Schedules in your org, you can skip this section. - **[Customize Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_service_schedules_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the information collected when a user creates a New Service Schedule by clicking New on the Service Schedules tab. - **[Customize Service Schedule Attendance Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_service_schedules_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Track Attendance component on a Service Session lets users create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. ## Required Setup for Service Schedules Service Schedules were released in PMM version 1.17 (11/05/2020). If you started using the product before that date, or if the feature isn't configured in your org, complete these required setup steps. If you already have Service Schedules in your org, you can skip this section. First, add the Service Schedules and Service Participants related lists to the Service page layout. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Service**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**, then click **Service Layout**. 5. From the palette, click **Related Lists** and drag the **Service Schedules** and **Service Participants** related lists to the page layout. 6. Click **Save**. Next, if you previously customized the Program Engagement and Contact pages, you’ll also need to add the Service Participants related list to both pages. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Program Engagement** or **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**, then click the Case Management layout for the object. 5. From the palette, click **Related Lists** and drag the **Service Participants** related list to the page layout. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat for the other object, Program Engagement or Contact, if you also customized that page. ## Customize Service Schedules Customize the information collected when a user creates a New Service Schedule by clicking New on the Service Schedules tab. To customize the Service Schedule Information fields in the New Service Schedule: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Service Schedule**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **Service Schedule Information**. 6. Drag the fields to and from the palette and In the Field Set. 7. Click **Save**. To customize the Add Service Participants fields in the New Service Schedule: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Program Engagement**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **SessionParticipantView**. 6. In the palette, click an object under Program Engagement. For example, click Household Account. 7. Drag fields to and from the palette and In the Field Set. For example, under Household Account, drag Account Name. 8. Click **Save**. ## Customize Service Schedule Attendance Tracking The Track Attendance component on a Service Session lets users create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. Track Attendance is a quick and efficient way to create Service Deliveries for all participants from a single interface. Users must have PMM: Deliver or PMM: Manage permissions to use Track Attendance.   ### Customize Track Attendance Fields By default, Track Attendance collects the following information to include in each Service Delivery: - Client: The Service Participant from the related Service Schedule. - Quantity: The amount of the service that was attended, labeled using the Unit of Measurement from the Service associated with the Service Schedule. For example, users will see _Hours_ for a Service that uses Hours as the Unit of Measurement. Users can also set a Default Service Quantity on a Service Schedule to automatically populate the Quantity. See [Schedule Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm). - Attendance Status: The status of the Service Participant in the session, which can be Present, Unexcused Absence, or Excused Absence. See [Customize Service Schedule Attendance Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_service_schedules_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Track Attendance component on a Service Session lets users create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session.") to edit Attendance Status values. To add to the information collected using Track Attendance, customize the Attendance Service Deliveries field set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Service Delivery**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **Attendance Service Deliveries**. 6. Drag fields to or from the palette and the In the Field Set box. Don't remove the Client or Attendance Status fields. 7. Click **Save**. ### Customize Attendance Status Values The default Attendance Status values are Present, Excused Absence, and Unexcused Absence. Present is assigned to all Service Participants by default. Excused Absence and Unexcused Absence default the Quantity of a Service Delivery to zero.  We recommend keeping the default Attendance Status values and only adding custom values as needed. Keep in mind that custom values will always default the Quantity to zero. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Service Delivery**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **Attendance Status**. 6. Scroll to the Values section. 7. Add or edit Attendance Values. Don't change the API Name of the default Attendance Status values. # Configure Sharing Settings for Admissions Connect Your organization-wide default sharing settings give you a baseline level of access for each object and enable you to extend that level of access to your Admissions Connect users. In Setup, review the default organization-wide sharing settings for the objects that Admissions Connect uses. Edit them to extend or restrict access as needed. You can, of course, also use permission sets, sharing rules, role hierarchies, or portal sharing sets to fine-tune access beyond the organization-wide default options. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Review an object's Organization-Wide Defaults. Edit them or create sharing rules according to the recommendations presented here, if appropriate. 3. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Internal Access applies to Users who work for your institution and use the Admissions Connect app. External Access applies to Users who don't work for your institution and use an Experience Cloud site, such as an external reviewer or applicant. - **[Action Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Action Plans. - **[Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Action Plan Templates. - **[Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Applications. - **[Application Material Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Application Material Mappings. - **[Application Material Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Application Material Types. - **[Application Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Application Reviews. - **[Document Checklist Item](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings for Document Checklist Items. - **[EDA Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend that you also review your sharing settings for all of EDA’s objects, especially those you’ve created Application Material Type records for. We recommend these settings. ## Action Plan Configure sharing settings for Action Plans. - Default Internal Access: Private - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read/Write Allows all of your admissions staff to view application requirements. - External Access: Private Prevents external Users from seeing all Action Plans. ## Action Plan Template Configure sharing settings for Action Plan Templates. - Default Internal Access: Private - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read/Write Allows all of your admissions staff to view and assign Action Plans, if necessary. - External Access: Private Prevents external Users from seeing all Action Plan Templates. ## Application Configure sharing settings for Applications. - Default Internal Access: Public Read/Write - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read/Write Allows all of your admissions staff to access Application records once they’re assigned an Admissions Connect permission set. - External Access: Private Ensures that applicants can't see other applicants' Application records and that external reviewers only see the Application records they're assigned to review. To share records with applicants, create a sharing set. For external reviewers, manually share records or use Apex managed sharing. For more information, see [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). ## Application Material Mapping Configure sharing settings for Application Material Mappings. - Default Internal Access: Public Read/Write - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read Only Ensures that your admissions directors and administrative staff can access these records once they’re assigned an Admissions Connect permission set. Also ensures that general admissions staff can view Application records in the Admissions Connect components. - External Access: Public Read Only Ensures that external Users can view Application records in the Admissions Connect components. ## Application Material Type Configure sharing settings for Application Material Types. - Default Internal Access: Public Read/Write - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings.  - Internal Access: Public Read Only Ensures that your admissions directors and administrative staff can access these records once they’re assigned an Admissions Connect permission set. Also ensures that general admissions staff can view Application records in the Admissions Connect components. - External Access: Public Read Only Ensures that external Users can view Application or Application Review records in the Admissions Connect components. ## Application Review Configure sharing settings for Application Reviews. - Default Internal Access: Public Read/Write - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read/Write Ensures that admissions staff can access Application Reviews once they’re assigned an Admissions Connect permission set. - External Access: Private Ensures that applicants can't see Application Reviews for their Application record and also ensures that external reviewers only see Application Review records they're assigned to review. To share records with external Users, create a sharing set. For more information, see [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). ## Document Checklist Item Configure sharing settings for Document Checklist Items. - Default Internal Access: Private - Default External Access: Private We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read/Write Ensures that admissions staff can access application documents. - External Access: Public Read/Write Ensures that external reviewers and applicants can access application documents. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note After updating these settings, Document Checklist Items are still only available to Users with access to the parent Application record. If you don't set internal and external access to Public Read/Write, users see an incorrect Status for Document Checklist Items and they also can't see uploaded application documents. ## EDA Objects We recommend that you also review your sharing settings for all of EDA’s objects, especially those you’ve created Application Material Type records for. We recommend these settings. - Internal Access: Public Read/Write Ensures that admissions staff can access all of an applicant’s related records. - External Access: Private Ensures that applicants can't see other applicants' EDA records and that external reviewers only see EDA records for the applicant they're reviewing. To share records with external Users, create a sharing set and include the appropriate EDA objects for your institution's Admissions Connect configuration. For a sample sharing set, see [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). See Also: [Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=managing_the_sharing_model.htm) in Salesforce Help [Securely Share Your Experience Cloud Sites with Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.networks_secure_community.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help # Configure Sharing Settings for Appointments Control how staff members and learners access data with sharing settings.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To configure sharing settings for appointments in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | We provide recommendations for organization-wide sharing settings, but extend or restrict access as needed. Use sharing rules to fine-tune access beyond those settings. For example, let your staff create their own appointment topics or change the duration by setting the default internal access to Public Read/Write for the Work Type object. You can also create rules for specific staff members to restrict who can make changes. See [Grant Access to Records with Manual Sharing in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.granting_access_to_records_lex.htm&type=5). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Public Read Only** for these objects' default internal and external accesses: - Engagement Channel Type - Location - Operating Hours - Service Resource - Service Territory - Shift - Success Team - Work Type - Work Type Group 4. Select **Public Read Only** for the User object's default internal access. We recommend that you keep its default external access to Private. This restriction prevents learners from accessing all other users in Salesforce. To enable learners to schedule appointments with users with the support staff role, create a sharing rule that restricts access only to those users. 5. Save your changes. For information about how Salesforce applies sharing settings, see [Organization-Wide Sharing Default](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_owd_about.htm&type=5). # Configure Site Guest User Access for Volunteers The System Admin must select Grant Guest Users Update Access in Volunteer Settings to allow guest users to update records shared with them. To navigate to the Grant Guest Users Update Access checkbox: 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to Volunteer Settings. 3. View Custom Settings - If Custom Settings have not been set, click **New**. - If Custom Settings have not been set, click **Edit**.![Edit button in Volunteer Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/editcustomsettings.png) 4. Select **Grant Guest Users Update Access**. 5. **Save** your changes. ![Volunteers Custom Settings with the Grant Guest Users Update Access box outlined in red](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/customsettings.png) # Configure Soft Credit Rollups Find out more about configuring soft credit rollups. - **[About Soft Credit Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Soft Credit rollup fields on Contact records roll up as the result of data from these sources. - **[Configure Contact Roles Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Which Opportunity Contact Roles count as soft credits depends on if you're using Customizable Rollups or legacy out-of-box rollups. - **[About the Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role Checkbox](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role checkbox ONLY applies to gifts (Opportunities) from an Organization Account. When checked, if the Opportunity Account is an Organization Account and the Primary Contact field is populated, both the Account and the Primary Contact on the Opportunity receive hard credit. ## About Soft Credit Rollups The Soft Credit rollup fields on Contact records roll up as the result of data from these sources. - Opportunity Contact Roles (OCRs) you've assigned to Contacts on Opportunity records - Partial Soft Credits - Contact Role Configuration Any Opportunity Contact Role is eligible for soft credit rollups if that value is specified in NPSP Settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you configure soft credit rollups, make sure you have [configured soft credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits.") in your org. ## Configure Contact Roles Settings Which Opportunity Contact Roles count as soft credits depends on if you're using Customizable Rollups or legacy out-of-box rollups. If you're using Customizable Rollups, Contact Roles are set in filter groups and then applied to the rollups themselves: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups.** 4. Click **View Filter Groups**. 5. Either click **New** to create a new filter group with Contact Roles or click **Edit** to modify an existing filter group. 6. Add a filter rule with these values: 1. **Object** = Soft Credit 2. **Field** = Soft Credit: Role Name 3. **Operator** = In List 4. **Value** = Select the Contact Roles you want to include when calculating rollups and move them to the Selected Value list. ![Adding a filter rule for Customizable Rollups that includes Contact Roles](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cont_roles_custom_rollups.png) 7. Click **Save**. 8. Be sure to apply this filter group to the rollup(s) you want to calculate soft credits based on the Contact Roles you selected. If you're using out-of-box legacy NPSP rollups or User Defined Rollups: 1. In **NPSP Settings**, click **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Soft Credit Roles field, make sure you've specified all Contact Roles you want treated as soft credits. 4. Click **Save**. ![NPSP Soft Credit Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/soft-credit-and-matched-donor-settings.png) You also need to specify which Contact Role you want NPSP to apply to matched donors. This role should be one of the roles you selected for the Soft Credit Roles. To set this value: 1. In NPSP Settings, click **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Matched Donor Role field, select a value. We recommend using _Matched Donor_. 4. Click **Save**. For Organizational gifts, you may wish to assign a soft credit to someone who helped you win the gift, for example, a board member. NPSP can automatically credit the Contact named in the Primary Contact field on an Organizational Opportunity. To use this [automated soft credit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."), you’ll need to set the **Contact Role for Organizational Opps** in NPSP Settings. ![Contact Role for Organizational Opps in NPSP Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/npsp-settings-org-ocr.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that the value you select for Contact Role for Organizational Opps is also included in the Soft Credit Roles setting on the same page, otherwise the Contact Role for Organizational Opps will not trigger soft credit rollups. Alternatively, set the roles in a Filter Group if you're using Customizable Rollups. Learn more in [Create Filter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups.") and [Customizable Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records."). ## About the Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role Checkbox The Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role checkbox ONLY applies to gifts (Opportunities) from an Organization Account. When checked, if the Opportunity Account is an Organization Account and the Primary Contact field is populated, both the Account and the Primary Contact on the Opportunity receive hard credit. Therefore, the gift is double counted by rollups. It's important to note that Organizational gift hard credits to the Contact ARE NOT reflected on their Household Account. Additionally, the Contact doesn't receive a soft credit. While some orgs may choose to use this setting because they want to see the hard credit reflected in Contact rollups, this is not the generally accepted best practice. We recommend that you follow best practice and not use this checkbox. The **Always Roll Up to Primary Contact Role** checkbox is located in NPSP Settings. You can find it under **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. # Configure Student Permissions Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your students have the access they need to system functionality, standard and custom objects, and fields. - **[Configure Student System Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students need access to some specific System Permissions. (They're called General User Permissions in the original profile user interface.) Configure System Permissions by editing the student profile using the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Configure Student Object and Field Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure student object and field permissions by editing the student profile using the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Account Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Account object for students. - **[Appointment Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Appointment object for students. - **[Appointment Attendee Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Attendee object for students. - **[Appointment Location Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Location object for students. - **[Availability Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Availability object for students. - **[Availability Location Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Availability Location object for students. - **[Availability Topic Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Availability Topic object for students. - **[Case Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Case object for students. - **[Contact Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Contact object for students. - **[Course Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course object for students. - **[Course Connection Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Connection object for students. - **[Course Offering Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering object for students. - **[Course Offering Schedule Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering Schedule object for students. - **[Event Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Event object for students. - **[Facility Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Facility object for students. - **[Program Enrollment Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Program Enrollment object for students. - **[Queue Topic Setting Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Queue Topic Setting object for students. - **[Role Topic Setting Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Role Topic Setting object for students. - **[Success Plan Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan object for students. - **[Support Pool Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Support Pool object for students. - **[Task Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Task object for students. - **[Term Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Term object for students. - **[Topic Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Topic object for students. - **[User Topic Setting Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the User Topic Setting object for students. ## Learn About Student Permissions Make sure your students have the access they need to system functionality, standard and custom objects, and fields. To help you get your org up and running, Student Success Hub provides a permission set for students as well as two student profiles. If you clone these assets, you’ll have all the base-level permissions documented here. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Setting all permissions correctly is essential, but pay especially close attention to setting field permissions. If field permissions are incorrect, students are likely to encounter errors in the portal. It's easy to overlook a field, and tracking down the source of errors can be tricky and time-consuming. So double-check your field permissions—or better yet, triple-check them. ## Configure Student System Permissions Students need access to some specific System Permissions. (They're called General User Permissions in the original profile user interface.) Configure System Permissions by editing the student profile using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your student profile. 3. Click **System Permissions** and then click **Edit**. 4. Make sure these fields are selected: - **Access Activities** - **Edit Events** - **Edit Tasks** - **Send Email** 5. Save your changes. ## Configure Student Object and Field Permissions Configure student object and field permissions by editing the student profile using the enhanced profile user interface. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name that you want to set permissions and security for. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click the object you want to configure, click **Edit**, and specify the minimum Object Permissions and Field Permissions shown in the tables. 5. If you're configuring multiple objects, use the breadcrumb navigation to select the next object from the menu. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note These tables document the minimum object and field access required for core Student Success Hub functionality. Without these permissions in place, your users may experience errors. If an object or field isn't listed—and many standard Salesforce items are not—it means that either: - Student Success Hub doesn't have a dependency on it. Your institution can decide whether it wants to customize that setting, or - It's a default, out-of-the-box setting that can't be changed. We've also noted where access is either required only for a specific feature to work, or is recommended and not required. ## Account Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Account object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Case Team Name

√

Description

√*

Parent Account

√*

Record Type

√*
\* Required for Pathways ## Appointment Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Appointment object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Additional Connection Information

√

√

Appointment Location

√

√

Appointment Subject

√

√

Attendee Limit

√

√

Description

√

√

Discoverable

√

√

Location

√

√

Related Subtopic

√

√

Related Topic

√

√

Subtopic

√

√

Topic

√

√

Type

√

√

Web Meeting

√

√

Web Meeting Link

√

√
## Appointment Attendee Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Attendee object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Attendee

√

√

Comments

√

√

Role

√

√

Status Comments

√

√

Status Updated By

√

√

Status Updated Date

√

√

Student Record

√

√
## Appointment Location Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Appointment Location object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Additional Details

√

Building

√

Campus

√

Meeting Link

√

Phone

√

Room

√

Sort Order

√

Type

√
## Availability Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Availability object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Attendee Limit

√

Availability Name

√

Type

√
## Availability Location Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Availability Location object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Availability

√

√

Location

√

√
## Availability Topic Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Availability Topic object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Availability

√

√

Topic

√

√
## Case Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Case object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Contact Name

√
## Contact Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Contact object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Chosen Full Name

√*

Email

√

Primary Academic Program

√

Primary Department

√

Student ID

√

Title

√
\* Required for Pathways ## Course Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Course object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Course ID

√*

Course Name

√

Credit Hours

√*

Description

√*

Extended Description

√*
\* Required for Pathways ## Course Connection Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Course Connection object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Contact

√

Course Offering ID

√

Status

√
## Course Offering Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Course

√

End Date

√

Primary Faculty

√

Start Date

√

Term

√
## Course Offering Schedule Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Course Offering Schedule object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Course Offering

√

End Time

√

Facility

√

Friday

√

Monday

√

Saturday

√

Start Time

√

Sunday

√

Thursday

√

Tuesday

√

Wednesday

√
## Event Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Event object for students. ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

All-Day Event

√

Description

√

√

Location

√

√

Name

√

Public

√

√

Related To

√

√

Type

√

√
## Facility Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Facility object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Facility Name

√
## Program Enrollment Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Program Enrollment object for students. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Program Enrollments object is required for Pathways. For more information, see [Set Up Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Pathways up and running in your Student Success Hub higher ed org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Contact

√

Program

√

Program Plan

√
## Queue Topic Setting Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Queue Topic Setting object for students. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Queue Topic Setting object is required only if you're using queue management. For more information, see [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Support Pool

√

Topic

√
## Role Topic Setting Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Role Topic Setting object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Role Name

√

Topic

√
## Success Plan Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Success Plan object for students. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Success Plans object is required only if you're using Success Plans. For more information, see [Set Up Success Plans, Templates, and Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Success Plans up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Cancelled

√

Comments

√

Created By

√

Is Case Student Record

√

Last Modified By

√

Open Tasks

√

Overdue Tasks

√

Owner

√

Plan Name

√

Published

√

Record Type

√

Student Contact

√

Student Record

√

Status

√

Tasks

√
## Support Pool Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Support Pool object for students. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Access to the Support Pools object is required only if you're using unassigned Support Pools. For more information, see [Get Started with Support Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn the many ways that Student Success Hub helps you support students."). ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Case Team Name

√

Description

√

Pool Name

√
## Task Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Task object for students. ### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Comments

√

√

Due Date

√

Name

√

Public

√

√

Related To

√

√

Type

√

√
## Term Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Term object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

End Date

√

Start Date

√
## Topic Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Topic object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Label

√

Parent Topic

√

Sort Order

√
## User Topic Setting Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the User Topic Setting object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Default Appointment Duration

√

Topic

√

User

√
# Configure Student Permissions for Pathways Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Pathways in the portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Student Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your students have the access they need to the objects and fields used specifically by Pathways. - **[Course Bookmark Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Bookmark object for students. - **[Personal Program Plan Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan object for students. - **[Personal Program Plan Course Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Course object for students. - **[Personal Program Plan Term Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Term object for students. - **[Plan Requirement Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Plan Requirement object for students. - **[Program Plan Permissions for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Program Plan object for students. ## Learn About Student Permissions for Pathways Make sure your students have the access they need to the objects and fields used specifically by Pathways. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Setting all permissions correctly is essential, but pay especially close attention to setting field permissions. If field permissions are incorrect, students are likely to encounter errors in the portal. It's easy to overlook a field, and tracking down the source of errors can be tricky and time-consuming. So double-check your field permissions—or better yet, triple-check them. Students using Pathways in the portal also need access to some fields on the Account, Contact, and Course objects. For details, see [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Course Bookmark Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Course Bookmark object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Bookmark Type

√

√

Bookmarked For

√

√

Course

√

√
## Personal Program Plan Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Assigned To

√

√
## Personal Program Plan Course Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Course object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Course

√

√

Credit Hours

√

√

Placeholder Name

√

√

Sort Order

√

√
## Personal Program Plan Term Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Term object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Sequence

√

√

Term

√

√
## Plan Requirement Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Plan Requirement object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Category

√

Course

√

Credits

√

Description

√

Plan Requirement

√

Program Plan

√

Sequence

√
## Program Plan Permissions for Students Configure the required permissions for the Program Plan object for students. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Account

√

Description

√

Total Required Credits

√
# Configure Support for Household Accounts If your organization uses Case Management to deliver case management support and program benefits to a household (for example, a food bank), update the Case Management Case Plans and Client Notes so that you see the Household Account as the beneficiary of the services delivered. Some organizations, like food banks, deliver services that benefit an entire household. One designated "client of record" accepts those deliveries on the household's behalf. Update the Case Management Case Plans and Client Notes so that you see the Household Account as the beneficiary of the services delivered via the Case Management app. If your organization uses Case Management to deliver case management support and program benefits to a household (for example, a food bank), there are a set of configurations for you to put in place to indicate the relationships between Household Accounts and Case Plans, and Household Accounts and Program Engagements and Services. - **[Add Accounts to Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_cm_for_hhs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your organization uses Case Management to deliver case management support and program benefits to a household (for example, a food bank), add the Account to the highlight panel of the Case Plan. ## Add Accounts to Case Plans If your organization uses Case Management to deliver case management support and program benefits to a household (for example, a food bank), add the Account to the highlight panel of the Case Plan. If your organization uses Case Management to deliver case management support and program benefits to a household (for example, a food bank), it is helpful to see the Account in the highlight panel of the Case Plan. This is really the only way to have visibility on the Account in Case Plans. The Case Plan Wizard only supports Contacts, not Accounts. To add Accounts to the highlight panel in Case Plans, create a new custom formula field called Household Account and edit the Case Plan object's compact layout. For information on creating formula fields, see the [Create Formula Fields](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/projects/customize-a-salesforce-object/create-formula-fields) unit in Trailhead. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Case Plan**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Create a new custom formula field called Household Account and define it as a text field. 6. Set **Household Account (text) =** Contact\_\_r.Account.Name in the Advanced Formula Editor. 7. Select **Treat blank fields as blanks**. 8. Save the Household Account formula field. 9. In the left sidebar navigation, select **Compact Layouts**. 10. Select **Case Plan Compact Layout**. 11. Click **Edit** and refresh the page using Ctrl+R. 12. Use the arrows to move Household Account from Available Fields to Selected Fields. ![Household Account added to Compact Layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/addhhtocompactlayout.png) 13. Click **Save**. ![Household Account on Case Plan highlight panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/hhaccounthighlightpanel.png) # Configure Support Staff Permissions for Pathways Give support staff the object and field permissions they need to use Pathways in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Support Staff Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your support staff and System Administrators have the access they need to the objects and fields used specifically by Pathways. - **[Course Bookmark Permissions for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Course Bookmark object for your support staff. - **[Personal Program Plan Permissions for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan object for your support staff. - **[Personal Program Plan Course Permissions for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Course object for your support staff. - **[Personal Program Plan Term Permissions for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Term object for your support staff. - **[Plan Requirement Permissions for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Plan Requirement object for your support staff. - **[Program Plan Permissions for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the required permissions for the Program Plan object for your support staff. ## Learn About Support Staff Permissions for Pathways Make sure your support staff and System Administrators have the access they need to the objects and fields used specifically by Pathways. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Setting all permissions correctly is essential, but pay especially close attention to setting field permissions. If field permissions are incorrect, support staff members are likely to encounter errors using the app. It's easy to overlook a field, and tracking down the source of errors can be tricky and time-consuming. So double-check your field permissions—or better yet, triple-check them. Pathways also needs access to some fields on some Salesforce and Student Success Hub objects. For details, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."). ## Course Bookmark Permissions for Support Staff Configure the required permissions for the Course Bookmark object for your support staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Bookmark Type

√

√

Bookmarked For

√

√

Course

√

√
## Personal Program Plan Permissions for Support Staff Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan object for your support staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Assigned To

√

√
## Personal Program Plan Course Permissions for Support Staff Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Course object for your support staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Course

√

√

Credit Hours

 √ √

Placeholder Name

 √ √

Sort Order

√

√
## Personal Program Plan Term Permissions for Support Staff Configure the required permissions for the Personal Program Plan Term object for your support staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

√

Edit

√

Delete

√
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Sequence

√

√

Term

√

√
## Plan Requirement Permissions for Support Staff Configure the required permissions for the Plan Requirement object for your support staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Category

√

Course

√

Credits

√

Description

√

Plan Requirement

√

Program Plan

√

Sequence

√
## Program Plan Permissions for Support Staff Configure the required permissions for the Program Plan object for your support staff. ### Object Permissions

Permission Name

Enabled

Read

√

Create

Edit

Delete
### Field Permissions

Field Name

Read Access

Edit Access

Account

√

Description

√

Total Required Credits

√
# Configure Tax Status Search Make it easy for your staff to search for United States-based organizations based on their tax information. - **[Create a Document Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Tax Status Search document type so grantmakers can search for a United States-based organization’s tax information from a Document Checklist Item. - **[Assign the Document Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Tax Status Search document type to the Verification Items component on the Account Lightning Record Page. - **[Set Remote Site Settings for Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The tax status search uses a Salesforce service to retrieve tax information from GuideStar about an organization based in the United States. To use the tax status search, configure your remote site settings. - **[Update the Verification Check Layout (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a grantmaker searches for an organization’s tax status, they get IRS results, including the raw JSON data of the results, from GuideStar. When selected, the raw JSON data is populated in the Raw Tax Status Search Results field on the Verification Check, although this field isn’t included on the Verification Check layout by default. If you want to show this information you can add the field to the Verification Check layout. - **[Update to the Tax Status Verification Tool](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Summer ‘26 release, we modernized nonprofit tax status verification with a new API integration that protects the stability of your due diligence tools. This new system provides a more efficient way to get expanded compliance and organizational data. Migrate verification processes and automations to the new API format to unlock richer insights while maintaining the familiar user experience. ## Create a Document Type Create a Tax Status Search document type so grantmakers can search for a United States-based organization’s tax information from a Document Checklist Item. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can create additional document types to further define Document Checklist Items. Tax Status Search is only required if you want grantmakers to search for an organization's tax status from a Document Checklist Item. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Document in the Quick Find Box, then select **Document Type**. 3. Click **New Document Type**. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Tax Status Search. 5. For Name, change the automatic entry to  Tax\_Status\_Search. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note The Name field being Tax\_Status\_Search is important when you [Assign the Document Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm). 6. Leave Is Active selected. 7. Enter a Description. 8. Click **Save**. To give grantmakers the option to search for a grantseeker’s tax status, add a Document Checklist Item with the Tax Status Search document type to an Action Plan Template. See [Create an Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm) for more information. ## Assign the Document Type Add the Tax Status Search document type to the Verification Items component on the Account Lightning Record Page. When Tax Status Search is selected as the Document Checklist Item’s document type, grantmakers will see the option Check Tax Status. See [Create an Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm) for more information. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Account**. 4. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 5. Click **Grants Management - Account Lightning Record Page**. 6. Click **Clone**. 7. Click the **Verification Items tab**, then click the **Verification Items component**. ![Click the Verification Items tab, then click the Verification Items component to assign Available Document Types.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_verificationitems1.png) 8. In Available Document Types, enter Tax\_Status\_Search. This is the document type you created earlier and is needed for a grantmaker to search for a United States-based organization's tax information from a Document Checklist Item. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If you created additional document types, add them to the Available Document Types field. For example, Tax\_Status\_Search;Legal;Finance. ![Enter Tax\_Status\_Search in Available Document Types.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_verificationitems2a.png) 9. Click **Save** then **Activate**. 10. Click **App Default** then **Assign as App Default**. 11. Select **Grants Management**, then click **Next**, **Next**, and **Save**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To keep track of the cloned Lightning record page, go back to Lightning Record Pages then click your cloned layout. Click **Edit** and give the page a unique name. Save your changes. ## Set Remote Site Settings for Grants Management The tax status search uses a Salesforce service to retrieve tax information from GuideStar about an organization based in the United States. To use the tax status search, configure your remote site settings. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Remote in the Quick Find Box, then select **Remote Site Settings**. 3. Click **New Remote Site**. 4. Enter a Remote Site Name. For example, Tax\_Status\_Search. 5. Enter https://9dpx7ym8g8.execute-api.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/as in Remote Site URL. 6. Leave Disable Security Protocol unselected. 7. Enter a Description. 8. Leave Active selected. ## Update the Verification Check Layout (Optional) When a grantmaker searches for an organization’s tax status, they get IRS results, including the raw JSON data of the results, from GuideStar. When selected, the raw JSON data is populated in the Raw Tax Status Search Results field on the Verification Check, although this field isn’t included on the Verification Check layout by default. If you want to show this information you can add the field to the Verification Check layout. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Verification Check**. 3. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 4. Click **Verification Check Record Page**. 5. Click **Clone**. 6. Click **Fields**. ![Click the Fields tab in Lightning App Builder.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_vclayout1.png) 7. Drag Raw Tax Status Search Results into the field area. ![Drag Raw Tax Status Search Results from available Fields to the Verification Check layout.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_vclayout2.png) 8. Click **Save** then **Activate**. 9. Click **App Default** then **Assign as App Default**. ![Assign the Verification Check Record Page as the app default.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_vclayout3.png) 10. Select **Grants Management**, then click **Next**, **Next**, and **Save**. The cloned Verification Check layout now contains the Raw Tax Status Search Results field that shows the output from the tax status search. To view the data, click the Verification Check for an existing tax status result. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To keep track of the cloned Lightning record page, go back to Lightning Record Pages then click your cloned layout. Click **Edit** and give the page a unique name. Save your changes. ![An example of the Raw Tax Status Search Results when added to the Verification Check layout.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_vclayout4.png) ## Update to the Tax Status Verification Tool In the Summer ‘26 release, we modernized nonprofit tax status verification with a new API integration that protects the stability of your due diligence tools. This new system provides a more efficient way to get expanded compliance and organizational data. Migrate verification processes and automations to the new API format to unlock richer insights while maintaining the familiar user experience. To make sure that your organization continues to receive accurate, up-to-date compliance and tax status information, complete these steps. - Create a remote site for the Candid Premier API URL For steps, see the Set Remote Site Settings topic in this article. - Review automations If you’ve built automations (for example, flows or Apex triggers) that parse the `RawTaxStatusSearchResults__c` field on the Verification Check record, update those automations. - Review and update field values Review your processes for fields where the data format has changed (for example, "Y" vs. "True" or "501(c)(3)" vs. “03”). To prevent errors, update any automation logic that depends on specific values. - Map new fields Review the new available data points from Candid Premier to see if you can use richer data in your grants process. Find the field mapping and new data points in the [Grants Management Tax Status Verification Upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=005313655&language=en_US) knowledge article. - Review the structure To understand the improvements, compare the legacy Candid internal database payload structure with the new Candid Premier API structure. The new structure replaces the depreciated legacy structure. # Configure the Appointment Manager Complete these tasks to make it easy for support staff to work with the Appointment Manager in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Allow the Appointment Manager to Pop Out](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can enable the Appointment Manager to pop out of the utility bar into its own window. Support staff can pop out the utility, arrange it onscreen wherever they like, and then pop it back into the utility bar or close the window when they're done. - **[Expand the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Working in the Appointment Manager can feel cramped, especially when managing appointments with multiple attendees. To give support staff a better experience viewing and editing appointment and attendee details, you can make the Appointment Manager bigger. - **[Hide the Note Actions in the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're using a custom object to manage support notes instead of using Salesforce Notes, then your support staff aren't using the Appointment Manager Action menus to add Notes. To prevent confusion, hide the Note Action menu options in the Appointment Manager. ## Allow the Appointment Manager to Pop Out You can enable the Appointment Manager to pop out of the utility bar into its own window. Support staff can pop out the utility, arrange it onscreen wherever they like, and then pop it back into the utility bar or close the window when they're done. Because the Appointment Manager is a custom utility, the pop-out option is available only if you activate the critical update, Utility Bar: Enable Pop-Out for Custom Utilities. Review the critical update and see [Using Pop-Out Utilities](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sforce_api_console_lightning_utility_popout.htm) in Salesforce Help for setup details. ## Expand the Appointment Manager Working in the Appointment Manager can feel cramped, especially when managing appointments with multiple attendees. To give support staff a better experience viewing and editing appointment and attendee details, you can make the Appointment Manager bigger. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Student Success Hub and select **Edit**. 3. Select **Utility Items (Desktop Only)** from the App Settings menu. By default, the Appointment Manager is 720 by 480 pixels. Try starting with an increase of 50 percent (width) and 25 percent (height). 4. In the Appointment Manager properties, change Panel Width to **1080** and Panel Height to **600**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Back in the Student Success Hub app, see how the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels look in the Appointment Manager (you may have to refresh the page and reopen the Appointment Manager). Adjust the utility's size as needed. ## Hide the Note Actions in the Appointment Manager If you're using a custom object to manage support notes instead of using Salesforce Notes, then your support staff aren't using the Appointment Manager Action menus to add Notes. To prevent confusion, hide the Note Action menu options in the Appointment Manager. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**, then select **Disable Enhanced Notes**. 4. Save your changes. 5. Verify in the Appointment Manager that the Add Note action no longer appears in the Action menu for an attendee. Also verify that Add Note for All Attendees no longer appears in the Action menu for the appointment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you disable the actions that create Salesforce Notes in the Appointment Manager, then you likely don't want to allow access to these Notes anywhere in the Student Success Hub app, including the Notes related list on the Student Record Case, the Notes tool in the utility bar, and the Notes item in the app navigation menu. # Configure the Home Page Customize your portal's homepage to reflect your organization's branding and messaging. - **[Update the Logo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_home_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grantee Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Home page, which you can update with your own. - **[Add Other Objects to the Navigation Menu (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_home_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to the default pages in the Funding Program Portal Navigation menu, add the Cases tab for grantseekers to easily track the status of a Case. For example, a grantseeker can navigate to Cases in the portal’s navigation menu to check on their request to update their organization information. - **[Customize the Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_home_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your portal to match your nonprofit organization’s branding and update the layout with content about your organization. ## Update the Logo The Grantee Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Home page, which you can update with your own. 1. Click ![Theme](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/homepage_1.png), then select click **Images**. 2. Click the Company Logo image box. ![Update company logo](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/homepage_2.png) 3. Click **Upload Image**. 4. Select your organization's logo then click **Open**. 5. Click **Add**. ## Add Other Objects to the Navigation Menu (Optional) In addition to the default pages in the Funding Program Portal Navigation menu, add the Cases tab for grantseekers to easily track the status of a Case. For example, a grantseeker can navigate to Cases in the portal’s navigation menu to check on their request to update their organization information. If your reviewers use this portal too, add the Reviews tab to the navigation menu. This allows reviewers to quickly find their in progress or submitted reviews. 1. Click **Theme Navigation Menu**. 2. Click **Edit Funding Program Portal Navigation**, or the name of your custom navigation menu. ![Theme Navigation Menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/addcasestonav.png) 3. Click **Add Menu Item**. 4. Enter a Name that will appear in the portal. For example, Cases. 5. Select **Salesforce Object** as the Type. 6. Select **Case** as the Object Type. 7. Repeat these steps for the Reviews object. 8. Click **Save Menu**. ## Customize the Layout Customize your portal to match your nonprofit organization’s branding and update the layout with content about your organization. Use Experience Builder to quickly create, customize, and update the Grantee Portal site template. We recommend updating the sample content to fit your organization before sharing the grantee portal URL. Learn more about how to [Customize the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.community_builder_theme_customize.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Configure the Home Page Set up a home page for your fundseeker portal to welcome site visitors. - **[Update the Logo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_configure_homepage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Fundseeker Starter Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Home page, which you can update with your own. - **[Assign the Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_configure_homepage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the OFM-Portal Navigation menu to your fundseeker portal if you used one of the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template installers. The OFM-Portal Navigation menu includes predefined pages for Funding Programs and My Applications. These pages are configurable, so if you need to remove or rename a page, you can easily do so. - **[Customize the Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_configure_homepage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your portal to match your nonprofit organization’s branding and update the layout with content about your organization. ## Update the Logo The Fundseeker Starter Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Home page, which you can update with your own. 1. Click ![Theme](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/homepage_1.png), then select click **Images**. 2. Click the Company Logo image box. ![Update company logo](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/homepage_2.png) 3. Click **Upload Image**. 4. Select your organization's logo then click **Open**. 5. Click **Add**. ## Assign the Navigation Menu Assign the OFM-Portal Navigation menu to your fundseeker portal if you used one of the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template installers. The OFM-Portal Navigation menu includes predefined pages for Funding Programs and My Applications. These pages are configurable, so if you need to remove or rename a page, you can easily do so. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your site. 4. Click **Theme Navigation Menu**. ![Theme Navigation Menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_navmenu.png) 5. Select **OFM-Portal Navigation** as the Default Menu. The Fundseeker Starter Portal Template menu now displays. 6. Close the menu. You can also create your own navigation menu. Learn more about the [Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=rss_setup_nav_menu.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize the Layout Customize your portal to match your nonprofit organization’s branding and update the layout with content about your organization. We recommend updating the sample content to fit your own before sharing the fundseeker portal URL with your fundseekers. Learn more about how to [Customize the Theme of Your Experience Builder Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.community_builder_theme_customize.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Configure the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine Clone the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow, and then identify the fields on the learning programs that you want to use for learners, advisors, registrars, and faculty to select and compare programs.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To clone and configure the screen flow: | Education Cloud Full Access | ## Configure Sharing and Permissions Before you set up the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine, update the sharing settings for objects and create a permission set for community members to run flows. 1. [Create sharing sets for learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_sharing_sets_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To enable learners to view only their own degree plans, create sharing sets where their contact is set on the lookup to contact on the pathway record."). 2. To provide access for learners in the Education portal, create and assign a permission set. 1. In Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a label for your permission set, and then press Tab to fill the API name. For example, enter Community Member Flow Permission. 4. Save your changes. 5. In Find Settings, find and select **Run Flows**. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. Select **Run Flows**, and save your changes. 8. Assign the permission set to the community members who run the comparison flow. 3. Add the new permission set to your Education portal. See [Add Members to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_customize_members.htm). ## Clone the Screen Flow Clone the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow so that you can configure it for students and advisors to use. 1. In Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Click **Compare Learning Program Plans**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a flow label and an API name. 5. Save your changes. ## Configure the Selection View Identify the fields from the learning program and learning program plan records that you want to show when students, advisors, registrars, and faculty select the programs that they want to compare. 1. In your version of the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow, click the **Show Learning Program Plans to Compare** screen element, and then click **Edit Element**. 2. Click the **Program Plan Selection** component. 3. In the Select Fields to Display section on the properties panel, move the fields that you want to use for comparison from the Available list to the Selected list. 4. Click **Done**. ## Configure the Comparison View Identify the fields from the learning program and learning program plan records that you want to use to compare the student's enrolled program with the programs selected for evaluation. 1. Click the **Compare Programs** screen element, and then click **Edit Element**. 2. Click the **Program Plan Comparison View** component. 3. In the Select Fields to Display section on the properties panel, move the fields that you want to show for comparison from the Available list to the Selected list. 4. Click **Done**. ## Set the Maximum Number of Programs to Compare The maximum number of programs that users can compare is set to 100 by default. If you change this limit, for best results, we recommend setting it to a number below 500. 1. In Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Click the **Compare Learning Program Plans** flow. 3. In the flow diagram, click the element **Show Learning Program Plans to Compare**. Click **Edit Element**. ![Compare Learning Programs flow with open Show Learning Program Plans to Compare element.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_show_learning_program_plans_to_compare_element.png) 4. On the Edit Screen dialog box, select the Program Plan Selection component. 5. In the properties panel, enter a number in the Maximum Records to Show field. ![Selected Program Plan Selection component and editor.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_program_plan_selection_component.png) ## Save and Activate Your Flow After you configure the flow, save your changes and then activate the flow. See [Activate or Deactivate a Flow Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_distribute_activate.htm). # Configure the Mentor Comparison Screen Flow Clone the Mentor Comparison screen flow, and then identify the fields on the participants' mentoring profiles that you want to use to select and compare potential mentors.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To clone and configure the screen flow:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Compare Using Einstein

AND

Manage Prompt Templates
## Clone the Screen Flow Clone the Mentoring: Match Mentor and Mentee screen flow so that you can configure it for your Mentoring program. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and select **Flows**. 2. Click **Mentoring: Match Mentor and Mentee**. 3. Click **Save As**, enter a label and name, and save your changes. ## Configure the Selection View Identify the fields from the mentoring profile record that you want to use to select potential mentors. ![Selection view of the screen flow for comparing possible mentors](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentor_selection_view.png) 1. In your version of the Mentoring: Match Mentor and Mentee screen flow, click **Display Select Mentors for Comparison**, and then click **Edit Element**. ![Display Select Mentors for Comparison screen element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_select_mentors.png) 2. Click **Select Mentors for Comparison**. 3. In Select Fields to Display, select the fields that you want to show when you select possible mentors, and then click **Done**. ## Configure the Comparison View Identify the fields from the mentoring profile record that you want to use to compare mentors and to indicate a match with the mentee. ![Comparison view of the screen flow for comparing possible mentors](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_comparison_view.png) 1. Click **Display Compare and Assign Mentor**, and then click **Edit Element**. ![Display Compare and Assign Mentor screen element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_compare_assign_mentors.png) 2. Click **Compare and Assign Mentor**. 3. From Select Fields to Display, select the fields that you want to show when you compare mentors with the mentee. 4. From Select Fields for Matching, select the fields that you want to use to indicate a match. Fields that match are marked with a checkmark. 5. To use Einstein Mentoring Summaries, complete these steps. 1. Select **Enable Similarity Score**. 2. From Select fields to use for similarity score, select the fields that you want to use to generate the similarity score for the record. 3. Select **Enable prompt response**. 4. From Prompt Template, select your mentoring summaries prompt template. See [Create a Prompt Template for Einstein Mentoring Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_prompt_template_for_einstein_mentoring_summaries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Prompt Builder to set up a prompt that generates mentoring summaries."). 5. Enter a label for the prompt response. 6. Enter help text for the prompt response. 7. Enter a label for the prompt response button. 6. Click **Done**. ## Configure the Preview Screen Identify the fields from the mentoring profile record that you want to use to compare the selected mentor with the mentee. ![Preview screen comparing the mentee with the selected mentor](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentor_preview.png) 1. Click **Display Mentor Assignment Preview**, and then click **Edit Element**. ![Display Mentor Assignment Preview screen element](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentor_assign_preview.png) 2. Click **Compare and Assign Mentor**. 3. From Select Fields to Display, select the fields that you want to show when you compare the selected mentor with the mentee. 4. From Select Fields for Matching, select the fields that you want to use to indicate a match. 5. Click **Done**. ## Save and Activate Your Flow After you configure the flow, save your changes and then activate the flow. See [Activate or Deactivate a Flow Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_distribute_activate.htm&type=5). # Configure the New Application Window Set up the New Application window the way you want it to appear in your portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add users to your Education Cloud Experience Site: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. In Experience Builder, go to the Pages menu, and select the **Application List** page under Preliminary Application Reference. 2. To open the design attributes panel, click the **New Application** component. 3. Make selections in the design attributes panel based on how you want the New Application window to appear in your portal. Pay particular attention to: - **Mode** - Self mode enables users to apply on their own behalf. Proxy mode enables users to apply on behalf of others or themselves. - **Maximum Program Applications** - To enable your users to apply to one program, enter 1 or leave this field blank. To enable your users to create preliminary applications for multiple programs at once, enter 2 or more, up to a maximum of 20. When a student submits an application, a Preliminary Application Record (PAR) and an Individual Application record are created automatically. # Configure the Person Account Lightning Page on the Gift Planning App in Education Add the Person Account Lightning page to automate the fields in the Gift Planning app. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure Lightning pages:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Planning**. 2. Create a person account record or open an existing one. 3. From the Setup menu, select **Edit Page**. 4. Click **Activation**. 5. Select the level that you want to assign this record page to. - As the app default, click **APP DEFAULT**, and then click **Assign as App Default**. - As the app, record type, and profile default, click **APP, RECORD TYPE, AND PROFILE**, and then click **Assign to Apps, Record Types, and Profiles**. 6. Select **Gift Planning**, and then click **Next**. 7. Select the form factor that you want the page to apply to, and then click **Next**. 8. Select **Person Account** as the record type, and then click **Next**. If needed, add the Person Insights Grid and Account Donor Gift Grid Flexcards to the person account page to easily access key donor insights. For example, add Person Insights Grid as a card and add Account Donor Gift Grid as a Donor Gift Concepts tab. See [Add a Flexcard to a Lightning Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_activateconfigureand_publish_flexcards_24744.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Configure the Person Account Lightning Page on the Gift Planning App in Nonprofit Add the Person Account Lightning page to automate the fields in the Gift Planning app. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed
To configure Lightning pages:

FundraisingAccess permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Planning**. 2. Create a person account record or open an existing one. 3. From the Setup menu, select **Edit Page**. 4. Click **Activation**. 5. Select the level that you want to assign this record page to. - As the app default, click **APP DEFAULT**, and then click **Assign as App Default**. - As the app, record type, and profile default, click **APP, RECORD TYPE, AND PROFILE**, and then click **Assign to Apps, Record Types, and Profiles**. 6. Select **Gift Planning**, and then click **Next**. 7. Select the form factor that you want the page to apply to, and then click **Next**. 8. Select **Person Account** as the record type, and then click **Next**. If needed, add the Person Insights Grid and Account Donor Gift Grid Flexcards to the person account page to easily access key donor insights. For example, add Person Insights Grid as a card and add Account Donor Gift Grid as a Donor Gift Concepts tab. See [Add a Flexcard to a Lightning Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_activateconfigureand_publish_flexcards_24744.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Configure the Registration and Login Pages Set up the registration and login pages of your fundseeker portal. - **[Update the Logo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_login_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Fundseeker Starter Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Registration and Login pages, which you can update with your own. - **[Change the Background](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_login_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The background for the login and registration pages are light gray (RGB 250, 250, 250) by default, but this can be changed. - **[Configure the Registration Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_login_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The out-of-the-box registration page includes several components, including Rich Content Editors and Self-Registration. - **[Configure the Login Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_login_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The login page includes two Rich Content Editors, Login Form, and Employee Login Link. Similar to the registration page, this page can be configured to meet your organization’s needs and branding. ## Update the Logo The Fundseeker Starter Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Registration and Login pages, which you can update with your own. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Workspaces** for your site. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Select **Login & Registration**. 6. Next to Logo File, click **Choose File**. 7. Select your organization’s logo then click **Open**. ## Change the Background The background for the login and registration pages are light gray (RGB 250, 250, 250) by default, but this can be changed. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your site. 4. Click ![Theme](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/theme.png), then click **Images**. 5. Click the Background Image box. 6. Click **Upload Image**. 7. Select an image file to display in the background of the login and registration page, then click **Open**. 8. Click **Add**. ## Configure the Registration Page The out-of-the-box registration page includes several components, including Rich Content Editors and Self-Registration. 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/settings_2.png) next to Home. 2. Click **Login**, then **Register**. Let's add a welcome message to new registering users and add the ability for the user to create a password. 1. Click **Rich Content Editor**. 2. Click **Edit Content**. 3. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note The Rich Content Editor also lets you change the size, formatting, and alignment of the text. 4. Click anywhere to close out of the Rich Content Editor. Lastly, let's add a password field to the registration page. 1. Click **Self Registration**. 2. Select **Include Password Field?** ## Configure the Login Page The login page includes two Rich Content Editors, Login Form, and Employee Login Link. Similar to the registration page, this page can be configured to meet your organization’s needs and branding. For example, if you doesn't need the Social Login component, you can remove it. 2. Click **Login**. 3. ![Delete component on the Login page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/login_1.png) # Configure the Reports & Dashboards Package After you download the NPSP Reports package, configure it to meet your needs. - **[About the Reports & Dashboards Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_reports_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Reports contains community-contributed reports and dashboards covering donors and giving history, grants, memberships, campaign ROI, and more. This feature includes dozens of reports and several dashboards. - **[Verify Reports and Dashboards Settings are Enabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_reports_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable the reports and dashboards setting in Setup if it's not already enabled. - **[Verify Grant Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_reports_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the NPSP reports package, the Grant record type is used in report filters. Make sure the record type you use for grants is named correctly. - **[Install the Reports Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_reports_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the link to install the NPSP reports package. - **[Hide Old NPSP Reports and Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_reports_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your org has the old NPSP report folders (NPSP 3.0 Donor Management Reports, NPSP 3.0 Grants Management Reports, NPSP 3.0 Membership Management Reports), we recommend that you phase them out by hiding the folders from your users. ## About the Reports & Dashboards Package NPSP Reports contains community-contributed reports and dashboards covering donors and giving history, grants, memberships, campaign ROI, and more. This feature includes dozens of reports and several dashboards. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.90 (2/14/2017). ## Verify Reports and Dashboards Settings are Enabled Enable the reports and dashboards setting in Setup if it's not already enabled. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Reports and Dashboards in the Quick Find box, then click **Reports and Dashboards Settings**. 3. Look for an Enable button. It is typically present in older orgs. If you see the button, click it. If you don't see the button, move to the next step. ## Verify Grant Record Type In the NPSP reports package, the Grant record type is used in report filters. Make sure the record type you use for grants is named correctly. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Verify that you have a record type named Grant. 5. If you don’t see the Grant record type, create one. - Record Type Label: Grant - Record Type Name: Grant - Sales Process: Grant - Active: selected 6. Select the profiles that should have access to this record type. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Select the Grant Layout for the appropriate profiles. 9. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you already have a Grant record type but the name is something other than Grant, you still need to create a Grant record type. After installation you can point the Opportunity Record Type filter in the Grants this Year report to the correct Grant record type and delete the one you created just for the install. ## Install the Reports Package Use the link to install the NPSP reports package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You must have a System Administrator profile to install the Reports package, as the System Administrator profile has the permissions necessary to successfully install. 1. Go to the [NPSP Reports and Dashboards Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/npsp/reports). 2. Log in with your Salesforce credentials. 3. Click **Install**. ## Hide Old NPSP Reports and Folders If your org has the old NPSP report folders (NPSP 3.0 Donor Management Reports, NPSP 3.0 Grants Management Reports, NPSP 3.0 Membership Management Reports), we recommend that you phase them out by hiding the folders from your users. Administrators will still see the old folders. That way, if a user asks for a specific old report, you'll still have access to it. If users don't ask about the old reports for a particular amount of time (defined by you, of course), you can decide if you want to delete the folders and Reports. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you org existed before Summer 2013, you may need to enable enhanced folder sharing before you can hide folders. See [Turn On Enhanced Folder Sharing for Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=analytics_sharing_enable.htm) for more information. To hide the old reports folders from users: 1. Click the Reports tab. 2. In the row for the folder you want to hide, click ![Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/reports_edit.png), then click **Share**. 3. To hide this folder from the user, click the edit icon ![Edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/reports_stop_share.png) next to the user's access setting. We recommend you hide the old NPSP 3.0 folders from all non-Admin users. ![Sharing settings for report folder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/share_reports_folder.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To change folder access so that users can only view reports, but not edit them, make sure access is set to View. We recommend you give View access on the new NPSP report folders to all non-Admin users. This decreases the chance of users accidentally overwriting your base reports. 4. Click **Done**. # Configure the Student Success Chatbot in Einstein Bot Builder Complete these chatbot setup tasks in Einstein Bot Builder. - **[Update the Chatbot's Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, the Student Success chatbot is named Student Success Chatbot. The chatbot's name appears in the bot's initial greeting to the student. Update the chatbot's name for your institution. - **[Update the Chatbot User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To allow the chatbot to perform actions in your org, specify a Bot User based on the chatbot security approach that you decided to take. - **[Set Up the Chatbot Channel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you activate a chatbot, it needs to know where to work and how to work. Give the chatbot its work orders by assigning it to the Chat channel. - **[Update the Chatbot's Branding](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the chatbot window's general branding on the Embedded Service Deployment page. - **[Customize Chat Dialogs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Dialogs are conversation snippets that consist of outgoing messages, questions, actions, and rules. Dialogs control what a chatbot can do. - **[Activate the Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've configured and customized the Student Success chatbot, activate it. ## Update the Chatbot's Name By default, the Student Success chatbot is named Student Success Chatbot. The chatbot's name appears in the bot's initial greeting to the student. Update the chatbot's name for your institution. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Einstein Bots**. 2. In the My Bots section, click **Student Success Chatbot**. 3. From the Bot Builder menu, select **Overview**. 4. In the Bot Information section, click **Edit**. 5. Update the Bot Display Name. 6. Save your changes. 7. From the Bot Builder menu, select **Dialogs**. 8. From the navigation pane, select the **Welcome** dialog. 9. Edit the first welcome message that includes the chatbot's name. 10. Save your changes. ## Update the Chatbot User To allow the chatbot to perform actions in your org, specify a Bot User based on the chatbot security approach that you decided to take. See [Set Up Security for the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Decide how you want to manage the chatbot's permissions."). 1. From the Bot Builder menu, select **Overview**. 2. In the Settings section, edit the Bot User card, and then select **Custom Chatbot User**. 3. In Custom Chatbot User, specify the user. 4. Save your changes. ## Set Up the Chatbot Channel Before you activate a chatbot, it needs to know where to work and how to work. Give the chatbot its work orders by assigning it to the Chat channel. 1. From the Bot Builder menu, select **Overview**. 2. Add a channel to the bot. 1. In the Channels section, click **Add**. 2. For Channel, select **Text**. 3. For Deployment, enter your messaging SMS number. If you didn't make note of it when you set up the messaging channel, you can find it in Setup. Search for and then select **Messaging Settings**. Select **Channels**, and then select **Messaging Platform Key**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you have trouble with the search, try omitting the plus sign from the SMS number. For example, instead of searching for +15145550000, search for 15145550000. Or, if you're using an embedded service deployment, enter its name. For example, Student Success Chatbot. 4. Leave Require Agent Online unselected. 5. Save your changes. ## Update the Chatbot's Branding Configure the chatbot window's general branding on the Embedded Service Deployment page. See [Customize the General Branding for Your Chat Window](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=service.snapins_chat_branding.htm&type=5) and [Customize Additional Chat Branding](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=service.snapins_customize_additional_branding.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize Chat Dialogs Dialogs are conversation snippets that consist of outgoing messages, questions, actions, and rules. Dialogs control what a chatbot can do. The Student Success chatbot contains preconfigured dialogs. You can customize them or create your own. Before customizing or creating your own dialogs, see [Understand Einstein Bot Dialogs](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=service.bots_service_dialog_about.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Activate the Chatbot After you've configured and customized the Student Success chatbot, activate it. 1. From the Bot Builder menu, select **Overview**. 2. Click **Activate**. Now you're ready to implement the chatbot in a messaging channel or on an Experience Cloud site. # Configure the Student Success Chatbot's Custom Fields Configure the chatbot's custom fields on the Contact and Activity objects. - **[Bot Messaging Custom Fields on Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success Hub chatbot installs these custom fields on the Contact object. Students set values on these fields through conversations with the bot. Admins and support staff can also set some of the fields through the Student Success Hub app. Add these fields to the Contact page layout that you and your support staff use, and then assign the necessary permissions to users, including the bot. - **[Create a Bot Messaging Quick Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When signing students up to the Student Success Chatbot, use a quick action to send them a text message that makes them aware of the chatbot's number. Sending the message also creates a relationship between the student's Contact record and the Messaging User record. - **[Bot Messaging Custom Fields on Activity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot installs these custom fields on the Activity object, and includes them on the default Task page layout. Set permissions for these fields by going to the profile or permission set and then updating the Object Settings for Tasks. - **[Bot Messaging Custom Field Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give yourself, your staff, and the Student Success chatbot user the necessary permissions for the chatbot's custom fields. ## Bot Messaging Custom Fields on Contact The Student Success Hub chatbot installs these custom fields on the Contact object. Students set values on these fields through conversations with the bot. Admins and support staff can also set some of the fields through the Student Success Hub app. Add these fields to the Contact page layout that you and your support staff use, and then assign the necessary permissions to users, including the bot. Bot Messaging Advanced Notice The number of days before a Task is due for the student to receive a reminder. By using the bot, students can set the value as 1, 3, or 7 days. The default is 3 days. Administrators and support staff can also set this field in the Student Success Hub app on behalf of a student. Bot Messaging Allowed Indicates whether Bot Messaging Include Student and Bot Messaging Opt-In are both true and the student has not paused messaging. It's a formula field, and it controls outbound messages. Bot Messaging End Pause The last day of the messaging pause period. By using the bot, students can pause notifications for 3, 7, or 14 days. Bot Messaging Include Date The date when the last update was made to the Bot Messaging Include Student checkbox. Bot Messaging Include Modified By The last person who updated the Bot Messaging Include Student checkbox. Bot Messaging Include Student When selected, the student receives the initial opt-in message with the next scheduled flow. By default, this checkbox is deselected. Administrators, support staff, or automation can set this field. Bot Messaging Opt-In Indicates whether the student has opted to receive messages. Students opt-in by engaging with the bot. Administrators and support staff can also set this field in the Student Success Hub app on behalf of a student. Bot Messaging Opt-In Date The date when the last update was made to the Bot Messaging Opt-In field. Bot Messaging Opt-In Modified By The last person who updated the Bot Messaging Opt-In field. To allow chatbot communication with a student: 1. In Student Success Hub, open a student's Contact record. 2. Select **Bot Messaging Include Student**. 3. Save your changes. The next time that the scheduled Student Success Chatbot: Welcome flow runs, it will include the student. The student receives an SMS inviting them to manage their chatbot preferences, update their Success Plans, or reach out to a member of their success team if additional setup is required. ## Create a Bot Messaging Quick Action When signing students up to the Student Success Chatbot, use a quick action to send them a text message that makes them aware of the chatbot's number. Sending the message also creates a relationship between the student's Contact record and the Messaging User record. Right now, let's configure the Contact page layout with the quick action. You'll use the quick action later, to send the welcome email to the student. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Contact**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click the page layout assigned to your support staff. For example, click **Support Contact Layout**. 3. Drag **Sign up to Bot Messaging** from the Quick Actions palette and to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section of the page. 4. Select **Related Lists** in the palette and confirm or add the Messaging Users and Messaging Sessions related lists to the page. The Messaging Users related list shows you the connection between the Contact and the messaging platform. The Messaging Sessions related list shows the history of conversations. Messaging Session transcripts are populated after sessions end. 5. Save your changes. ## Bot Messaging Custom Fields on Activity The Student Success chatbot installs these custom fields on the Activity object, and includes them on the default Task page layout. Set permissions for these fields by going to the profile or permission set and then updating the Object Settings for Tasks. Bot Messaging Remind Date The date when the bot sends a Task due reminder to the student. The value is based on the Task's Due Date and the student's reminder preference as indicated in the Bot Messaging Advanced Notice field, and is populated by a flow. Bot Messaging Remind Today A system field that indicates that the bot needs to send a Task Due reminder today. ## Bot Messaging Custom Field Permissions Give yourself, your staff, and the Student Success chatbot user the necessary permissions for the chatbot's custom fields. ### Object Settings for Contacts Your admin, support staff, and chatbot users need these permissions.

Field Name

Permission

Bot Messaging Advanced Notice

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Allowed

Read

Bot Messaging End Pause

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Include Date

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Include Modified By

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Include Student

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Opt-In

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Opt-In Date

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Opt-In Modified By

Read and Edit
### Object Settings for Tasks Your admin, support staff, and chatbot users need these permissions.

Field Name

Permission

Bot Messaging Remind Date

Read and Edit

Bot Messaging Remind Today

Read
# Configure Transfer Credit Agent Flows To give unauthenticated guest users access to the Transfer Credit Agent, clone and modify the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account and EDU Admissions: Create Prior Learning Evaluation flows. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Flow
## Clone the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account Flow 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Admissions: Process Person Account**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label and API name. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 7. Save and activate the flow. ## Clone and Modify the EDU Admissions: Create Prior Learning Evaluation Flow 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Admissions: Create Prior Learning Evaluation**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label and API name. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 7. Save your changes. 8. From the toolbox, select **DefaultUserOwnerId**. 9. For Value, enter the system admin user ID. 10. Click **Done**. 11. Replace the Process Person Account subflow element. 1. After the Process Person Account element, click **Add element**, and then select **Subflow**. 2. Select your cloned version of the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow. 3. Enter a label and API name. 4. Turn on incomingPersonAccount, and then enter {!PersonAccountDetails}. 5. Update the remaining elements in your flow to reference the new subflow element. 6. Delete the original Process Person Account subflow element. 12. Save and activate your flow. # Configure Transfer Credit Data and Record Types Define transcript document types, picklist values, and record types for learning achievements, source accounts, and transfer credit cases. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org for transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Set up document types and picklists for document type. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Document Type, and then select **Document Type**. 2. Click **New Document Type**. 3. Enter Official Transcript as the label and enter a name. 4. Select whether the document type is active. 5. Save your changes. 6. Similarly, add Unofficial Transcript, Unofficial Score Report, Unofficial Military Experience Document, Unofficial Work Verification Letter, and Unofficial Prior Learning Document. 2. Configure picklist values for these object fields.
Object Fields Picklist API Values
Course Credit Transfer Application Status
  • Processing
  • InReview
  • OnHold
  • FacultyReview
  • Approved
  • ConditionallyApproved
  • Denied
  • Canceled
  • Withdrawn
  • Posted
Document Checklist Item Reject Reason Type Others
1. From the object management settings for the object, go to **Fields & Relationships**. 2. Select the field. 3. Add the picklist values. 4. Save your changes. 3. Create these record types for the Learning Achievement object. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&language=en_US). | Record Type Label | Record Type Name | | --- | --- | | Learning Course | Learning\_Course | | Learning Program | Learning\_Program | | Achievement Group | Achievement\_Group | | Achievement Group All | Achievement\_Group\_All | 4. Map the record types to the Achievement Group and Achievement Group All learning achievement types in Set Up Learning Achievement Configuration. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&language=en_US). | Record Type Label | Record Type Name | Learning Achievement Type | Learning Achievement Record Type | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Learning Course | Learning\_Course | Learning Course | Learning\_Course | | Learning Program | Learning\_Program | Learning Program | Learning\_Program | | Achievement Group | Achievement\_Group | Achievement Group | Achievement\_Group | | Achievement Group All | Achievement\_Group\_All | Achievement Group All | Achievement\_Group\_All | 5. Create the Business, College, Secondary School, Exam, and Military record types on the Account object. Make these account record types available to all internal and external profiles. See [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&language=en_US). These record types identify the sources of the applicant's prior learning. 6. If you have a sharing rule for the Account object, update it to make these account record types available to external users. If you don’t have a sharing rule, [create account sharing rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_account_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create the Secondary School and College record types for the Account object, create a sharing rule that grants portal users Read Only access to the records."). 1. From Setup, find and select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Scroll and find Account Sharing Rules, and then click **Edit** next to the sharing rule that you have defined. 3. To update the Criteria section, select **Business**, **College**, **Secondary School**, and **Military** as the value. 4. Save your changes. 7. Create a Transfer Credit Request record type on the Case object. Make this case record type available to all internal and external profiles. See [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&language=en_US). This record type is used to create cases for transfer credit requests. SEE ALSO - [Create Supporting Records for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_supporting_records_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud.") - [Set Up a Document Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.admin_document_automation_doc_types.htm&language=en_US) - [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&language=en_US) # Configure Tribute Gifts Make customizations to page layouts and picklists so that NPSP tributes work properly. - **[About Tribute Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_tribute_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Tribute Gifts feature allows you to track data about a donation given in honor of or in memory of someone, such as who the honoree is, and the constituents who should be notified about the donation. - **[Set Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_tribute_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure you have access to the tribute-related fields on Opportunity. - **[Configure Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_tribute_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add values to the Notification Preference and Tribute Type picklists on the Donation record type. - **[Set up Automatic Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_tribute_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can have the Nonprofit Success Pack automatically create contact roles when you fill in the Honoree Contact or Notification Contact fields. Be aware of how the contact role logic works when a contact is eligible for more than one role (such as Household Member, or other soft credit). ## About Tribute Gifts NPSP Tribute Gifts feature allows you to track data about a donation given in honor of or in memory of someone, such as who the honoree is, and the constituents who should be notified about the donation. ### Feature Release Information This feature was released in NPSP version 3.61 (1/6/2016). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Tribute Gifts uses soft credits in NPSP. Before you configure Tribute Gifts, make sure you have configured soft credits in your org. Learn more in [Configure Automated and Manual Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits."). ## Set Field-Level Security Make sure you have access to the tribute-related fields on Opportunity. Verify access for the following Opportunity fields for each profile: - Honoree Contact - Honoree Information - Honoree Name - Notification Message - Notification Preference - Notification Recipient Contact - Notification Recipient Email - Notification Recipient Information - Notification Recipient Name - Tribute Notification Date - Tribute Notification Status - Tribute Type To check field access: 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the name of the Profile you want to set field-level security for. 3. In the Field-Level Security section, click **View** next to Opportunity. 4. Make sure the profile has the correct level of access to the Tribute fields. If not, click **Edit** and select the checkbox, then click **Save**. For more information on setting field-level security, see [Verify Access for a Particular Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.checking_field_accessibility_for_a_particular_field.htm&type=5). ## Configure Picklist Values Add values to the Notification Preference and Tribute Type picklists on the Donation record type. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **Donation**. 5. Click **Edit** next to Notification Preferences under Picklists Available for Editing. ![Picklists Available for Editing with the Edit link next to the Notification Preference field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/edit_picklist.png) 6. Add all values from the Available Values to the Selected Values. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Repeat the above steps for the Tribute Type picklist. For more information on how to add picklist values to record types, see [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5). ## Set up Automatic Opportunity Contact Roles You can have the Nonprofit Success Pack automatically create contact roles when you fill in the Honoree Contact or Notification Contact fields. Be aware of how the contact role logic works when a contact is eligible for more than one role (such as Household Member, or other soft credit). Learn more in [NPSP Logic for Creating Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_logic_for_creating_ocrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what NPSP automation for creating soft credits takes precedence when multiple automated processes are involved."). 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab, click **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. 2. Enter Honoree for Honoree Opportunity Contact Role and Notification Recipient for Notification Recipient Opp Contact Role. Leaving these settings blank disables automatic contact role creation for these fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. ![Honoree and Notification Recipient Opportunity Contact Role settings.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/trib_opps_opp_contact_roles.png) For these roles to apply as soft credits, there is some setup required. If you're using Customizable Rollups, you set the Contact Roles in a filter group and apply them to the rollups themselves. Learn more in [Customizable Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records.") and [Configure Soft Credit Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring soft credit rollups."). # Configure Virtual Calls After you set up your AWS account and connection to Salesforce, configure video appointments.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Before you configure video appointments, make sure that you complete these prerequisites. 1. [Set Up Appointment Data Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling.") for the video type. 2. [Create a Page for Virtual Calls on Your Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_page_virtual_calls_exp_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Virtual Calls requires a separate page on your Experience site to add a component for it."). 3. [Create Named Credentials for Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_named_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a named credential to enter the URL of an AWS Chime callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters. Then, enter the named credential as a callout endpoint to let Salesforce handle all authentication to AWS Chime."). To configure video appointments, see [Configure Video Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_configure_video_calls.htm&type=5). # Configure Volunteer Details To better match volunteers to positions in Volunteer Management, configure their location availability and competencies. If you require examinations of your volunteers, add examination results. Make this information easy to find by adding it to the Person Account page layout. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use Volunteer Management: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Before you begin to configure volunteer details, complete the [Volunteer Management setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Volunteer Management for your organization. Assign permissions, turn on the feature, configure locations and operating hours, and set a default status for job position assignments."). ## Add Person Location Availability Add the availability of a person at specific locations of your organization or initiatives and use the information to help match volunteers to job positions. Set up locations for your organization and initiatives. For more information, see [Create Locations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help users and volunteers better understand where opportunities are, create locations in Salesforce for your organization and initiatives."). 1. From the App Launcher, search for person location and select **Person Location Availabilities**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In New Person Location Availability, find and select the account for whom you want to set their location availability. 4. Select the location. 5. If applicable, you can provide more specific information. 1. Select the Usage Type. Volunteer Management is the default. 2. Find and select the contact record. 3. Find and select (or add) operating hours. If you add operating hours, add time slots as well. For more information, see [Create Operating Hours with Time Slots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.workforce_engagement_operating_hours.htm&language=en_US). 6. Save your work. ## Add Person Competencies To better match volunteers to your initiatives, add your volunteers’ competencies that they can use while volunteering with your organization. A Person Competency has to have a Qualification Level (QL) set to appear as a match to a volunteer search. Matching evaluates the QL, which is an integer. Matching doesn’t evaluate the Proficiency Level, which is a dynamic value, such as Beginner or Intermediate. Create competencies that serve your organization’s mission and initiatives. For more information, see [Create Competencies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the skills needed for your initiatives so you can match the right volunteers to the right positions. Create competencies that meet the needs of the job positions that support your initiatives."). 1. From the App Launcher, search for person, and select **Person Competencies**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In New Person Competency, select the person’s proficiency level. 4. Select an account or contact record for the person. 5. Find and select the person’s competency. 6. Add more competency details as appropriate. 1. Add a qualification level. 2. Add the date that your organization verified the competency. 3. Add an effective start date for the competency. 4. Add an effective end date for the competency. 5. Add a summary of verification of the competency. 7. Save your work. ## Add Person Examinations Add examinations that a person has completed that qualifies them for a license or permit needed to volunteer with your organization. Create exams that qualify volunteers to fill certain positions. For more information, see [Create Examinations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create examinations that qualify volunteers for licenses or permits that are required or preferred to work with your organization."). 1. From the App Launcher, search for person, and select **Person Examinations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In New Person Examination, find and select the exam the person took. 4. Find and select the contact record for the person who took the exam. 5. To include more information about the person’s exam success, complete these fields. 1. Add an examination date and time. 2. Add an effective date and time range for the exam. 3. Add an account record for the person. 4. Add the person’s exam score. 5. Add the date and time that the exam was verified by your organization. 6. Save your work. ## Add Volunteer Details to the Person Account Page Get details on your volunteers without leaving their Person Account pages. To see all of a volunteer’s information from their account page, add their location availability, competencies, and other relevant information to the related list. 1. From Setup, go to Object Manager and open the Person Account page. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. From the Person Account Layout component, scroll down and select **Related Lists**. 4. Drag these volunteer details into the related lists sections. - Application Forms - Constituent Roles - Contact Profiles - Job Position Assignments - Person Competencies - Person Examinations - Person Location Availabilities 5. Save your work. The volunteer details appear on the person account page. # Configure Volunteer Skills and Availability Picklists The Volunteer Skills picklist provides sample skills that volunteers offer. The Volunteer Availability picklist offers sample time periods. Leads, Contacts, and Volunteer Jobs all make use of these picklists. Update the values to match your organization's unique volunteering profile and availability times. For both the Lead and Contact objects, update picklist values for these fields, as needed: - Volunteer Skills - Volunteer Availability As an example, we will show you how to update the Volunteer Skills picklist values. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select the object that you're updating. For example, click **Lead**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click the field that you're updating. For example, click **Volunteer Skills**. (If you don't see this field, click **View All** to expand the field list, and page forward until it's visible.) 5. In the Values section, click **Del** to remove unused picklist values, and click **New** to add values. For example, we add two new skills, Food prep and Bartending, each on its own line. ![Add new picklist values to the Volunteer Skills field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/add_skills_picklist_values.png) After saving your additions, they're added as Values for Volunteer Skills. ![Newly added Volunteer Skills picklist values](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/skills_picklist_values_added.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important If you change values for Lead, remember to make the same changes for Contact (and vice versa) so that users see the same set of choices for both. If you update Volunteer Skills picklist values for Lead or Contact, also update the corresponding values for the Skills Needed field on the Volunteer Job object. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Volunteer Job**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **Skills Needed**. 5. In the Picklist Values section, make the options match the Volunteer Skills options that you've specified for Leads and Contacts. 6. **Save** your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note You may be tempted to update the Days of Week and Weekly Occurrence fields on the Volunteer Recurrence Schedules and Job Recurrence Schedules to match the Volunteer Availability picklist. **Do not update the Days of Week and Weekly Occurrence fields.** The System Scheduler relies on the existing values in those fields to generate recurrence schedules properly. # Configure Volunteers for Salesforce Set up volunteers’ skills and availability, job scheduling, notifications, and other fields. Then, test your configuration to confirm that it suits your organization’s needs. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_before_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Simplify how you manage your volunteers. - **[Configure Volunteer Skills and Availability Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_skills_availability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Skills picklist provides sample skills that volunteers offer. The Volunteer Availability picklist offers sample time periods. Leads, Contacts, and Volunteer Jobs all make use of these picklists. Update the values to match your organization's unique volunteering profile and availability times. - **[Configure Scheduling of Recurring Jobs and Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatic scheduling of Jobs and volunteers into the future saves a ton of repetitive data entry. - **[Configure Email Notifications and Email Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically send reminder, notification, and thank you emails to volunteers, using email templates together with workflow rules, which define rules like "send a reminder email to everyone signed up for a shift four days before the shift." - **[Configure Fields in Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization. - **[Test and Review Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create test data to check your configuration and review the workflow rules to make sure they are what you need for your organization. # Configure Your Accounts Verify your Account Model and run a data cleanup script to prepare for gift entry with GEM. - **[Verify and Customize Your Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_your_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Default Account Model setting determines which type of Account GEM creates for Contacts that don't have a related Account. Determine which Account Model best fits your org's business processes, and configure the Account Model settings. - **[Correct Existing EDA Account Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_configure_your_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run a one-time script to clean your Account and Contact data for Single Gift Entry processing. ## Verify and Customize Your Account Model Settings The Default Account Model setting determines which type of Account GEM creates for Contacts that don't have a related Account. Determine which Account Model best fits your org's business processes, and configure the Account Model settings. With EDA installed, GEM automatically creates an Account for any Contact that doesn't have a related Account. The Default Account Model setting determines which type of Account GEM creates. (For more information, see [Salesforce, Account Models, and the EDA Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_welcome_to_eda_data_model.htm).) So which option should you choose for your default: Household or Administrative? Household Accounts are designed for tracking students as one of multiple Contacts belonging to the same family or household, a common choice for advancement offices. Administrative Accounts are designed as a container Account for a single Contact, commonly used for tracking a student primarily as an individual rather than a household member. We recommend you choose based on whether your users create more Contacts for prospective or actively enrolled students (Administrative), or for fundraising (Household). 1. Go to the EDA Settings tab. 2. Click the **System** tab. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Verify the Default Account Model setting. Household is specified by default, but you can change it to Administrative if needed. 5. Select **Automatic Household Naming**. 6. Click **Save**. If your Default Account Model is Household, also configure these settings. 1. In EDA Settings, click the **Accounts and Contacts** tab. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. For Account Types with Multi-Addresses Enabled, select **Household Account**. 4. For Account Types without Contacts to Delete, select **Household Account**. 5. Click **Save**. ## Correct Existing EDA Account Data Run a one-time script to clean your Account and Contact data for Single Gift Entry processing. Account and Contact data must meet certain criteria to be used by Single Gift Entry, and if your org already had EDA installed, their data may not be fully compatible. Some of these fields aren't typically included in Account page layouts, so to make data cleanup easier, we’ve provided a script that does it for you. You need to run this script only once, during configuration. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Developer Console**. 2. From the **Debug** menu, click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 3. Copy this Apex code and paste it in the window. ```java gem.Post_Install_Script.queueAccountProcessor(); ``` 4. Click **Execute**. # Configure Your NPSP Organization Learn about the required permissions, configuration, and post-install steps for setting up your NPSP organization. - **[Set Required Admin Permissions to Manage NPSP Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_set_required_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Almost all Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) configuration is managed from the NPSP Settings tab. In NPSP Settings, you can change key NPSP behaviors, turn on NPSP features, run a system health check, and view error logs. System admins and users with a profile containing the necessary permissions can access the NPSP settings. - **[Get Ready to Configure NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_ready_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Welcome to the Nonprofit Success Pack configuration articles! These articles contain the configuration instructions you need to complete after you install Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP). There are also articles that teach you how to configure specific NPSP features, such as Engagement Plans, In-Kind Gifts, or Batch Data Import. - **[Post Installation Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_post_install_config_steps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start here if you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on top of your existing Salesforce org. - **[Required Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended. - **[Recommended Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you have the NPSP basics set up, we recommend adding these configurations to help your users find information and create records more quickly and easily. - **[Configure Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring accounts. - **[Configure Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring contacts. - **[Configure Error Handling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_error_handling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Nonprofit Success Pack, when you enable error handling, errors are centrally trapped, collected, and stored in a single location based on your preferences. # Configure Your Site for Dynamic Applications After you create your Experience Cloud site, configure it to support dynamic applications.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add users to your Education Cloud Experience Site: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. In Experience Builder, go to the Pages menu, and select the **Individual Application Task Detail** page. 2. To open the design attributes panel, click the **Omni Viewer** component. 3. In the Record ID design attribute field, enter {!recordId}. 4. Update the Render Method Type design attribute to **OmniScript**. # Connect a New Object in Advanced Mapping Advanced Mapping comes with Contacts, Accounts, Opportunities, and other objects already mapped. You can connect additional objects that are directly related to Contacts, Accounts, or Opportunities. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Instructions in this article pertain to connecting a previously unmapped object. If you only need to connect a new field, see [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). Advanced Mapping comes with Contacts, Accounts, Opportunities, and other objects already mapped. You can connect additional objects that are directly related to Contacts, Accounts, or Opportunities. Follow along to see how to connect a new object in Advanced Mapping. We’ll use the example of Molly at Read Now, an organization dedicated to adult literacy. Molly created a custom object in Salesforce to store constituent responses to Read Now’s annual literature survey. This Survey object is a child of the Contact object, so that Molly can link survey responses to constituent records. Follow along as Molly connects her custom Survey object in Advanced Mapping. ## Create Fields on the NPSP Data Import Object To map a new object, Molly first creates two fields on the NPSP Data Import object. She uses the Advanced Mapping naming convention of **\[Object Group Name\] Import Status.** She plans to name her new Object Group Survey 1, so she uses that as the prefix for her field names. 1. Molly creates a text field on the NPSP Data Import object to store Survey 1 Import Status: ![New custom field dialog showing Survey 1 Import Status text field with length of 255](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/am2_survey_1_field.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important The Import Status field must have a length of 255. 2. Molly then creates a lookup relationship field called **Survey 1 Imported**. This field will store a link to the record that NPSP Data Importer created or updated. She relates the field to her custom Survey object. ![Custom lookup field showing selection of Survey in Related To list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/am2_custom_field_lookup_to_survey.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on creating custom objects and fields, see Trailhead modules [Custom Objects: Quick Look](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/create-a-custom-object-quick-look) and [Custom Fields: Quick Look](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/custom-fields-quick-look). Now, Molly is ready to create the Object Group. ## Create an Object Group Follow along with Molly as she creates an Object Group for her custom Survey object: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping**. 3. Click **Configure Advanced Mapping**. 4. Click **Create New Object Group**. 5. Fill in the fields as follows: - Group Name: **Survey 1 Group**. Choose any unique name for the new Object Group.The standard naming convention is \[Target Object\] Group. - Object Name: **Survey (Survey\_\_c)**.  Indicates the target object where the records ultimately end up. - Is Child/Parent: **Child**. Describes how the new Object Group is related to the Object Group in the Of this Object Group field. In this example, Survey 1 Group is a child of Contact 1. - Of this Object Group: **Contact 1**. The Object Group that the new Object Group is related to. - Through this field: **Survey 1 Survey Participant (Survey\_1\_Survey\_Participant\_\_c)**. Indicates the field on the child object that connects the Object Groups. - Link to Record: **Survey 1 Imported (Survey\_1\_Imported\_\_c).** Stores a link to the record that was created or updated. - Import Status: S**urvey 1 Import Status (Survey\_1\_Import\_Status\_\_c)**. Indicates whether NPSP Data Importer successfully processed the record.  ![Create Object Group dialog with fields populated for a new Survey 1 Group Object Group](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/am2_create_object_group.png) 6. Save your work. # Connect Amazon to Salesforce To use Virtual Calls in Education Cloud, create a connected app to connect Amazon to Salesforce.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See [Connect Amazon to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_connect_amazon_sf.htm). # Connect Mentees With Mentors Understand the needs of your mentees and get them the benefits that they need to be successful.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Match Mentees and Mentors Using Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_match_mentees_and_mentors_using_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create assessments to help facilitators match mentees with mentors. - **[Einstein Mentoring Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_einstein_mentoring_summaries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use generative AI to get a comprehensive view of the information that you need to facilitate well-suited mentoring pairings. Add Einstein Mentoring Summaries to the existing Mentor Comparison screen flow so that staff can see overviews of mentors and mentees, including the differences and similarities between them. Einstein Mentoring Summaries generates a similarity score that is a vector distance calculation that indicates potential matches between mentors and a mentee. - **[Compare and Assign Mentors by Using a Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_compare_and_assign_mentors_using_a_screen_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use a screen flow to compare a mentee with potential mentors, and then assign a mentor to the mentee. Use the fields on the Mentoring participants' mentoring profile record to identify a match. - **[Manually Assign a Mentor to a Mentee](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_a_mentor_to_a_mentee.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign or change the mentor who provides a benefit to a mentee. # Connect Rubrics to Applications Create configuration records to represent your application review and connect it to the Omniscripts that you use to score applications in Education Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create Application Render Method Records for Rubrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create application render method records for each Omniscript that you want to use to score applications. - **[Create Application Stage Definition Records for Rubrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create application stage definition records to represent your application review. - **[Create Application Render Method Assignment Records for Rubrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect your application stage definitions to their corresponding application render methods. - **[Create an Action Plan Template for Rubrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a separate action plan template to represent your application for each rubric that you create. - **[Add Individual Application Tasks to Your Action Plan Template for Rubrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign each application stage definition record to your action plan template. - **[Assign Your Action Plan Template for Rubrics to a Program Term Application Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the action plan template that represents your application to a program term application timeline record. ## Create Application Render Method Records for Rubrics Create application render method records for each Omniscript that you want to use to score applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create application render method records: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Render Methods**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application render method. Use the same convention that you used for your rubric Omniscript. For example, enter Undergraduate Application Review. See [Add Questions to a Rubric](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_questions_to_a_rubric.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an Omniscript that includes assessment questions to use as a rubric to score applications."). 4. For Method Record, select **Omni Process**, and then find and select the Omniscript that you previously created as your rubric. 5. For Method Type, select **Omniscript**. 6. For Usage Type, select **Recruitment and Admissions**. 7. Save your changes. ## Create Application Stage Definition Records for Rubrics Create application stage definition records to represent your application review. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create application stage definition records: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Stage Definitions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application stage definition. For example, enter Undergraduate Application Review. 4. Select the name of the owner of the application stage definition. 5. If necessary, enter a description for the application stage definition. 6. Select **Recruitment and Admissions** as the type. 7. Save your changes. ## Create Application Render Method Assignment Records for Rubrics Connect your application stage definitions to their corresponding application render methods. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create application render method assignment records: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Render Method Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application render method assignment. For example, Undergraduate Application Review. 4. To make this assignment active, select **Active**. 5. For Application Render Method, find and select the application render method associated with this assignment. For example, **Undergraduate Application Review**. 6. For Application Component, select the application stage definition that corresponds to the application render method that you selected. 7. Save your changes. ## Create an Action Plan Template for Rubrics Create a separate action plan template to represent your application for each rubric that you create. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create action plan templates: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the action plan template. For example, Undergraduate Application Review. 4. If required, enter a description for the action plan template. 5. Select **Industries** as the action plan template. 6. Select **Application Review** as the target object. 7. Save your changes. ## Add Individual Application Tasks to Your Action Plan Template for Rubrics Assign each application stage definition record to your action plan template. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add tasks to action plan templates: Education Cloud Full Acces
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click your action plan template. 3. Click **New Individual Application Task**. 4. Enter a name for the individual application task. For example, enter Undergraduate Application Review. 5. Find and select the application stage definition associated with this task. For example, select **Undergraduate Application Review**. 6. To make this task mandatory for the application, select **Required**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Click **Publish Template**. ## Assign Your Action Plan Template for Rubrics to a Program Term Application Timeline Add the action plan template that represents your application to a program term application timeline record. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add tasks to action plan templates: Education Cloud Full Access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that you create Program Term Application Timeline records for your application. See [Create Supporting Records for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_supporting_records_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Template Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Program Term Application Timeline** as the associated object. 4. Find and select the Program Term Application Timeline record related to your rubric. 5. In Action Plan Template Version, find and select your action plan template. 6. For Assignment Queue Name, enter the name of your application review queue that you previously created. Make sure that you enter the Queue Name, with underscores instead of spaces, and not the Label. See [Prerequisites for Scoring Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_scoring_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To prepare your Salesforce org for scoring applications, enable Discovery Framework, create a queue, and update the page layout for individual applications."). 7. For Assignment Size, enter the number of Application Review records that you want automatically created. 8. Select the assignment type. - If you haven't modified the Admissions: Initiate Application Reviews flow, select **Staff Review**. - If you have modified the flow, or created your own flow, select the option that represents the rubric's application stage. For example, Application Review, Phone Interview, or In-Person Interview. See [Prepare Your Org for Scoring Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_scoring_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To prepare your Salesforce org for scoring applications, enable Discovery Framework, create a queue, and update the page layout for individual applications."). 9. Save your changes. # Connect the Course Operations Agent to Slack Bring collaboration, course management, and student support into Slack. Faculty can interact with the Course Operations Agent without switching applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Slack, and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To integrate the Course Operations agent with Slack:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin
Before you start, [set up the Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_operations_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure a Course Operations Agent that assists faculty to manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk students, and coordinate student support."). 1. [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack). 2. Sign your Slack user into Salesforce from Slack. 1. Log in to your Slack workspace. 2. From the sidebar, click **Sign in to your Salesforce**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click **Continue to Salesforce**. 5. Enter your admin login credentials. 6. Click **Login**, and then click **Allow**. 3. To set up Salesforce record channels, update the Slack Integration User permission set. See [How Salesforce Channels Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels_setup.htm&language=en_US&type=5#slack_salesforce_channels_setup__how_works). 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Slack Integration User**, and then click **System Permissions**. 3. Click **Edit**, and then select **Enabled** for Access Education Cloud Objects. 4. Save your changes. 5. From the Slack Integration User permissions set, click **Object Settings**. 6. Select **Course Offerings**, and then click **Edit**. 7. Select **Enabled** for the appropriate access. 8. Make sure that the Record Alert object is enabled for the appropriate access. 9. Save your changes. 4. Select objects that can use Slack channels in Salesforce. 1. From Setup, find and select **Slack Channels for Records**. 2. Click **\+ Add Objects**. 3. Select **Course Offering** and **Record Alert**. 4. Click **Add Object**. 5. [Install the Slack connected app](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#connect-salesforce-and-slack). 6. [Add the Course Operations agent to Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#add-an-agent-to-slack). After the agent creates a course offering channel, it adds course offering participants and the faculty member to it. If you don’t create employee records for faculty, the agent doesn’t add the faculty member. In that case, the channel admin [adds the faculty member to the channel](https://slack.com/help/articles/201980108-Add-people-to-a-channel#desktop-1) manually. To use the agent in the course offering or record alert channels directly, add it to the channel. Then mention the agent in a message to start a conversation. # Connect to Google Analytics 4 Migrate to Google Analytics 4 before July 1, 2023, to continue tracking Giving Page performance, source codes, and donation conversion rates. Google Analytics 4 is replacing Universal Analytics. On July 1, 2023, all standard Universal Analytics properties will stop processing data. **Where**: This change applies to users with access to the Elevate admin portal. **Who**: Users who configure the Google Analytics integration in the Elevate admin portal. **How**: Add your Google Analytics 4 property ID in the new Google Analytics Property ID field. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Track Giving Pages with Google Analytics (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_track_gps_google_analytics.htm) # Connect Your Org to Tableau Connect using either Tableau Cloud or Tableau Desktop. If you're new to Tableau, purchase at least one Creator license to get started. You can also [start a free 14-day trial](https://www.tableau.com/products/desktop/download). After you have a Tableau account, connect it to your Admissions Connect org to start with our ready-made dashboards.  ## Use Tableau Cloud 1. [Sign In to Tableau Cloud](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_signin.htm) 2. On the home page, click **Accelerator Dashboards**. If you don’t land on the home page, click **Home**, and then click **See All**. 3. On the Starters page, set your Data Sources filter to **Salesforce**. 4. Click **Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator**. 5. Click **Sign in to Salesforce** and log in. ## Use Tableau Desktop 1. Download the Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator from [Tableau Exchange](https://extensiongallery.tableau.com/products/606?version=2021.2). 2. Open Tableau Desktop. 3. From the Tableau Desktop home page, click **Open a Workbook**. 4. In the Data menu, select each data source that you want to use, and then select **Edit Data Source**. 5. Log in and select **Allow** to give access to your data. # Consent Management for Admissions Connect Learn how consent management applies to Admissions Connect. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Admissions Connect. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Admissions Connect. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
An applicant or student has informed you that he or she doesn't want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your institution.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields:

  • Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

Admissions Connect is built on the EDA framework, which also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects that you may consider deleting information from too:

  • Alternate Email

  • University Email

  • Work Email

  • Work Phone

  • Address Object

For Contacts and Leads, consider using the following fields to track a person’s contact preferences:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact
Some of your applicants or students don’t want to hear from your institution, unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider using the following fields to track a person’s contact preferences:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Don’t forget to remove data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
An applicant or student has requested that you do not store his email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

You may consider deleting information in fields that store your student’s email address and phone number.

Admissions Connect is built on the EDA framework which also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email

  • University Email

  • Work Email

  • Work Phone

  • Address Object

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
# Consent Management for CM Find out more about consent management for CM. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Case Management. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Case Management. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your clients don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact fields:

  • Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

For Contacts, consider these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

For Contacts, consider using these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A volunteer has requested that you do not store her email address and phone number. Manage Contacts

Consider deleting data in any fields that store her email address and phone number.

PMM, included with the Case Management app, also includes the standard Salesforce email and phone fields and objects:

  • Email

  • Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Mobile Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Household Phone

  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to this volunteer, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A child is the recipient of services and the parent needs to give consent.   Case Management does not include data structures that specify how to obtain and track caregiver consent on behalf of minors in their care. You may consider customizing Case Management but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.
A legal guardian of a child in your organization's programs does not want the child's email address recorded.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

Consider deleting data in any fields that store the child's email address and phone number.

PMM also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Email

  • Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Mobile Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Household Phone

  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to the child, consider removing the child's email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Consent Management for EDA Learn how to manage consent and data privacy preferences in EDA. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Education Data Architecture. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Education Data Architecture. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A student doesn't want to receive informal or non-business related calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields:

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

EDA also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email
  • University Email
  • Work Email
  • Work Phone
  • Address Object

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact
Some of your students don't want to hear from your organization, unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.
# Consent Management for Einstein for Nonprofits Manage personal preferences about constituent data in Einstein for Nonprofits to comply with various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Einstein for Nonprofits. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Einstein for Nonprofits. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. Depending on Einstein for Nonprofits user configuration and consent management settings, the following output can be displayed on Contact cards: - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-einstein_for_nonprofits-264-0-0-production-enus/291bfb05-3242-402a-92b6-b757730f100a/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your constituents don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact
  • Volunteer Auto-Reminder Email Opt Out
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization, unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A volunteer has requested that you do not store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

You may consider deleting information in fields that store your volunteer's email address and phone number.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

Remind your volunteer that you won’t be able to contact her about volunteer opportunities.
# Consent Management for Grants Management Learn how consent management applies to Grants Management. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Grants Management. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Grants Management. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your grantees don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact fields:

  • Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

For Contacts, consider these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact
Some of your grantees don’t want to hear from your organization unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

For Contacts, consider using these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A grantseeker has requested that you do not store their email address and phone number. Manage Contacts

Consider deleting data in any fields that store her email address and phone number.

If you’ve created other records related to this grantseeker, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Consent Management for NPSP Find out more about consent management. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for NPSP. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for NPSP. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your constituents don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact
  • Volunteer Auto-Reminder Email Opt Out
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization, unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A volunteer has requested that you do not store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

You may consider deleting information in fields that store your volunteer's email address and phone number.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

Remind your volunteer that you won’t be able to contact her about volunteer opportunities.
# Consent Management for OFM Learn how consent management applies to Outbound Funds Module. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Outbound Funds Module. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Outbound Funds Module. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your constituents don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact fields:

  • Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

For Contacts, consider these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

For Contacts, consider using these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Consent Management for PMM Get guidance on obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and honoring individuals' preferences regarding their personal information. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Program Management Module. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Program Management Module. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your constituents don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these standard Salesforce Contact fields:

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

For Contacts, consider these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

For Contacts consider these NPSP options:

  • Email Opt Out

  • Do Not Call

  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A volunteer has requested that you do not store her email address and phone number. Manage Contacts

Consider deleting data in any fields that store the volunteer's email address and phone number.

You may consider deleting information in these standard Salesforce Contact fields.

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

If you’ve created other records or activities related to the volunteer, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A child is the recipient of services and her parent needs to give consent. Manage Contacts PMM does not include data structures that specify how to obtain and track caregiver consent on behalf of minors in their care. You may consider customizing PMM but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.
A legal guardian of a child in your organization's programs does not want the child's email address recorded.

Manage Contacts

Delete Records

Consider deleting data in any fields that store the child’s email address and phone number.

You may consider deleting information in these standard Salesforce Contact fields.

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

If you’ve created other records or activities related to the child, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Consent Management for Volunteers for Salesforce Learn how consent management applies to Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Volunteers for Salesforce. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Volunteers for Salesforce. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your constituents don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact
  • Volunteer Auto-Reminder Email Opt Out
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization, unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A volunteer has requested that you do not store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

You may consider deleting information in fields that store your volunteer’s email address and phone number.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

Remind your volunteer that you won’t be able to contact her about volunteer opportunities.
# Consider Customizing Page Layouts Customize page layouts and record types in K-12 Architecture Kit to meet the needs of your school. - **[Review of Page Layouts and Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_page_layout_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to use record types and page layouts in K-12 Architecture Kit to capture and display the appropriate information for contacts and accounts. - **[Review the Page Layouts Provided](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_page_layout_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the page layouts that are included with K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Customize the Highlights Panel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_page_layout_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The highlights panel on a student Contact record shows the fields specified in a compact layout. The compact layout can be customized. For example, if you want the highlights panel to show a student's primary language, add that field to the compact layout. - **[Add Additional Primary Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_page_layout_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The student Contact page layout in K-12 Architecture Kit shows the Primary Household and Primary Language fields by default. ## Review of Page Layouts and Record Types Understand how to use record types and page layouts in K-12 Architecture Kit to capture and display the appropriate information for contacts and accounts. In [Build Sample Data in Your K-12 Architecture Kit Trial Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create student, school, and course offering sample data in a trial org."), we talked about what we see when viewing a student’s Contact record. In particular, we talked about the highlights panel, the Details section, and related lists. The entire collection of headings, fields, and visual containers that we see in this type of record is what we call a _page layout_. Page layouts are flexible and provide a way to show the right information to the the right users. Remember that when you create a new Contact, you specify whether the person is a student, guardian, or faculty member. Your choice is reflected in the type of record that's created. For example, when you specify that a Contact is a student, the Contact record that's created has a student record type. Faculty and guardians also have their own record types. ![Record type value displayed in a student Contact record's page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/contact-record-type.jpg) If you're wondering why we create these different types of records, it's because the kind of information you capture—and show—differs from one user to the next. With different Contact record types in place, we can assign different page layouts to them. For example, our K12 Kit Student Layout and K12 Kit Guardian Layout include a FERPA indicator, but the K12 Kit Faculty Layout does not. That's because teachers don't have information that's protected by FERPA guidelines, but family members and students do, so their page layouts reflect that difference. Different types of records are also created for Account records. Now that you’re familiar with the variety of Account types that come with K-12 Architecture Kit, it should make sense that each of them are represented by a different record type. ## Review the Page Layouts Provided See the page layouts that are included with K-12 Architecture Kit. We can easily compare and contrast the provided page layouts if we take a look at the Contact object, to start. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click into the different layouts for student, guardian, and faculty members, and notice the similarities and differences between them. 6. Back in the Object Manager tab, switch to the **Account** object and look at the page layouts there, too. There are lots of ways you can customize the look of your page layouts. You can add, remove, or change the placement of items on the page. Common customizations include changing the order of related lists, renaming a section, adding a new section, and adding a custom field you may have added to an object. If you’re new to working with page layouts, we recommend spending some time with the resources listed in [Learn About Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_learn_about_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn more about K-12 Architecture Kit with these resources."). We mention below a couple of customizations you might find helpful for the student Contact page layout. ## Customize the Highlights Panel The highlights panel on a student Contact record shows the fields specified in a compact layout. The compact layout can be customized. For example, if you want the highlights panel to show a student's primary language, add that field to the compact layout. Now, when we look at a student’s Contact record, the Primary Language field is easy to spot. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Compact Layouts**. 5. From the actions menu for K12 Student Contact Compact Layout, click **Edit**. 6. From the Available Fields list, select **Primary Language**, then **Add** it to the Selected Fields list. 7. If you don’t want it to be the last field in the highlights panel, move it **Up** in the list. ![Select an extra field to add to the highlights panel through Compact Layouts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/compact-layout-fields.jpg) 8. Click **Save**. ![The newly added Primary Language field appears in the student Contact record's highlights panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/highlights-student-new.jpg) ## Add Additional Primary Affiliations The student Contact page layout in K-12 Architecture Kit shows the Primary Household and Primary Language fields by default. If your school is one of many in a large district, add the Primary Educational Institution field on the student's Contact page layout. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. From the actions menu for K12 Kit Student Layout, click **Edit**. ![Access the K12 Kit Student Layout actions menu to edit the page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/primary-affiliations.jpg) 6. Enter primary in the Quick Find box. 7. Drag the**Primary Educational Institution** field to the Primary Affiliations section. ![Drag Primary Educational Institution to the Primary Affiliations section in your page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/primary-affiliations-ac-inst.jpg) 8. Click **Save**. Now, the student’s Contact record shows the student’s connection to the school. If the field is blank, you can edit it by clicking the pencil icon. ![Newly added Primary Educational Institution field under the student Contact's Primary Affiliations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/primary-affil-ac-inst-view.jpg) # Considerations for Data Migration to Education Cloud Review some considerations to determine when and how you want to migrate your data to Education Cloud. Depending on your current setup and requirements, you can choose to migrate your data to Education Cloud in the same org or to a new org. - **[Considerations for Person Account Migration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_person_account_migration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider including these steps in your plan before you migrate account and contact records to person account records. - **[Other Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_other_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review these additional considerations before you migrate your data to Education Cloud. # Considerations for Deleting or Merging Primary Object Records Deleting or merging records used as primary objects in accounting sets doesn't trigger reversals.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
- Salesforce doesn't detect when someone deletes primary object records used in accounting sets. Therefore, the Accounting Subledger job doesn't create reversal transaction journal records. To ensure data integrity, we recommend that you prevent users from deleting such records. For example, you can remove the delete permission from their profile or from the permission set for that object. Accounting Subledger supports deletions for all other object records used in accounting sets. - If you merge records, Salesforce removes the duplicate record. For information about reversals, see [Adjustment Types for Payment and Expense Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger assists you with adjustments by separating source records from transaction journal records. If the source record is updated, we generate new transaction journal records accordingly."). # Considerations for Document Management Review some considerations before starting to work with documents in Admissions Connect. Admissions Connect provides basic document management. To see documents in the Admissions Connect components, they must be saved as a [Salesforce File](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=collab_salesforce_files_parent.htm&type=5). When a document is uploaded to a Document Checklist Item, it gets saved as a Salesforce File. You can upload any file type to a Document Checklist Item, except [Asset Files](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_files_asset_files.htm). However, only these file types display in the Admissions Connect components. - .pdf Copy-protected PDFs can't be previewed. - .doc, .docx, .xls, .xlxs, and .ppx This includes Microsoft® Office 97 through Microsoft Office 2007 Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. Some Microsoft Office documents can't be previewed and some don't display correctly in previews. For example, some documents don't provide a preview for all pages. - .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .gif, and .png - .txt, .rtf To learn about additional preview considerations, review [Content file preview issues](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000337845&type=1&mode=1&language=en_us) in Salesforce Help. Each Document Checklist Item must have a unique Salesforce File. In other words, you can't attach a Salesforce File that's already been added to another Document Checklist Item. The Salesforce File can, however, be attached to other records in Salesforce, like an Application. Your institution may want to retain documents for a certain number of years or delete them after a certain number of admissions cycles. Admissions Connect doesn't provide specialized automation or archival tools for document management. Your institution should create a plan that covers the full document life cycle. If you're worried about space limits, see [File Size and Sharing Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=collab_files_size_limits.htm) and [Data and Files Storage Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=overview_storage.htm) in Salesforce Help and talk to your Account Executive. Applicants might apply to your institution multiple times, such as an undergraduate and then again as a graduate student. Make sure that any automation you implement takes this into account. You don't want application documents associated with the wrong application.  To help admissions staff and applicants understand the status of documents more easily, we show the status of Document Checklist Items as follows. | Document Checklist Item Status | Status in Admissions Connect Components | | --- | --- | | New | Not Submitted | | Pending | Pending Approval | | Accepted | Approved | | Rejected | Admissions staff and external reviewers see Rejected and applicants see Needs Attention. | Admissions Connect provides this automation for updating Document Checklist Item Statuses. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note For these updates to work, there must be a Status value with an API name of Pending on the Document Checklist Item object. - When a user uploads a document for the first time, the Status updates from New to Pending. - When a user uploads a new version of a rejected document, the Status updates from Rejected to Pending. - When a user approves a rejected document, manually updating the Status from Pending to Approved, the Rejection Comment field is cleared. - When a user uploads a new version of an already approved document, the Status updates from Accepted to Pending. It's up to your institution to set up additional automation and validation rules for documents. Think about how the Status of a Document Checklist Item changes over the course of the entire admissions process, accounting for actions performed by your admissions staff, external reviewers, and applicants. Also think about creating validation rules which can prevent admissions staff from accepting and rejecting Document Checklist Items that don't have a file attached. # Considerations for Gift Processing Education Gift entries that aren't part of a gift batch are processed when you save them. For gift batches, complete a batch dry run and then explicitly process the gift entries in the batch. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
It's not uncommon to add gifts to batch over a period of time. You might enter some of the gifts today and finish entering them at the end of the week. And in between, the data in Fundraising might change. Tracking these changes manually is cumbersome. To help prevent errors from occurring when you process your batch, initiate a batch dry run. Batch dry runs simulate batch processing, validating the data and giving you the opportunity to correct errors. However, they don't commit anything in the database or create any records. You can address the errors and then actually process your batch. For example, the dry run alerts you that the total count of gift entries in the batch doesn't match the estimated count of gift entries. You can review the gift batch and check for any missing entries, or correct the estimated count, or skip this check altogether, and then proceed with the actual processing of the batch. During a batch dry run, you can't add or edit gift entries. After the dry run is complete, you can add, edit, or process gift entries. You can process up to 50,000 gift entries at a time in a gift batch. When you process a gift batch, these records are created or updated for each gift entry in the batch: - Gift transactions - Gift transaction designations. If a gift entry is allocated to multiple designations, then the gift is split and multiple gift transaction designation records are created according to the allocation percentage and the amount specified in the gift entry. - Gift soft credits. If a gift entry has multiple soft credit recipients, then multiple gift soft credit records are created per gift transaction. - Accounts for new donors # Considerations for Gift Processing Nonprofit Gift entries that aren't part of a gift batch are processed when you save them. For gift batches, complete a batch dry run and then explicitly process the gift entries in the batch. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

It's not uncommon to add gifts to batch over a period of time. You might enter some of the gifts today and finish entering them at the end of the week. And in between, the data in Fundraising might change. Tracking these changes manually is cumbersome. To help prevent errors from occurring when you process your batch, initiate a batch dry run. Batch dry runs simulate batch processing, validating the data and giving you the opportunity to correct errors. However, they don't commit anything in the database or create any records. You can address the errors and then actually process your batch. For example, the dry run alerts you that the total count of gift entries in the batch doesn't match the estimated count of gift entries. You can review the gift batch and check for any missing entries, or correct the estimated count, or skip this check altogether, and then proceed with the actual processing of the batch. During a batch dry run, you can't add or edit gift entries. After the dry run is complete, you can add, edit, or process gift entries. You can process up to 50,000 gift entries at a time in a gift batch. When you process a gift batch, these records are created or updated for each gift entry in the batch: - Gift transactions - Gift transaction designations. If a gift entry is allocated to multiple designations, then the gift is split and multiple gift transaction designation records are created according to the allocation percentage and the amount specified in the gift entry. - Gift soft credits. If a gift entry has multiple soft credit recipients, then multiple gift soft credit records are created per gift transaction. - Accounts for new donors # Considerations for Household Naming and Greetings Learn how Household Naming evaluates and orders household members. Review the ways to exclude members or opt an entire household out of updates. Find out which field access users need, and review other considerations. ### Required Editions | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available in: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** editions of Nonprofit Cloud with the Automatic Household Creation and Naming add-on | ## Which Household Members Are Evaluated Household Naming evaluates only members whose Account Contact Relationship is on an account that has a Party Relationship Group where **Type** is **Household**. Household Naming includes an Account Contact Relationship in a household's mapped naming fields only if the record also has these settings. - Select **Active** (`IsActive`). - Don’t select **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** (`IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`). - Select **Included in Group** (`IsIncludedInGroup`). ## How Members Are Ordered in a Household Name Household Naming orders the members in a household name in this priority. - The member whose Account Contact Relationship has **Primary Member** (`IsPrimaryMember`) selected comes first, unless you exclude that member. - Household Naming orders the remaining members according to the value in the **Household Automatic Naming Sequence** (`HouseholdAutoNamingSequence`) field on the Account Contact Relationship. This field overrides how names appear for a household. - If the sequence is blank, Household Naming orders members by `CreatedDate`, from oldest first. ## Ways to Exclude Members or Opt Out a Household Default exclusions Household Naming excludes any member whose Account Contact Relationship has **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** (`IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`) selected. It also excludes any member whose contact or person account has a value in the **Deceased Date** (`DeceasedDate`) field. Exclusion formula To exclude members based on your own criteria, complete the Exclusion Formula section of a naming or greeting template. Whole-household opt-out To opt an entire household account out of future naming updates, select **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** (`IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`) on the household's Party Relationship Group record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Add the **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** field to the page layouts for Account Contact Relationship and Party Relationship Group. If you use the [Agentforce Financial Services New Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_households_create.htm&language=en_US) feature, add the field to the household configuration's list of available fields. ## Field Access Requirements To make sure that household naming works as expected, give users a minimum of read access to these fields. Read Access | Object | Fields | | --- | --- | | Account Contact Relationship | `IsActive`, `IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`, `HouseholdAutoNamingSequence`, `IsIncludedInGroup`, `IsPrimaryMember`, and `IsPrimaryGroup` (suggested, but not required) | | Party Relationship Group | `IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming` and `Type` | | Contact | `DeceasedDate` | | Any object | Any field that's referenced in a Household Naming template's naming pattern or exclusion formula | Give users write access to any destination field that's mapped in an active Household Naming template. For example, give write access to the Account Name field or to a mapped custom field. ## Considerations - Changing the API value of, or deleting, a field that's referenced in a custom naming pattern or a template's Exclusion Formula can cause downstream errors. - Turning on Household Naming and creating templates doesn't update existing households. To backfill household names, create an automation that calls the Recalculate Household Names invocable action. - Automatic Household Creation uses a default name format if either of these is true. You didn't turn on Automatic Household Naming. You don't have an active household naming template that sets the `Account.Name` field as the destination. In these cases, the auto-generated household name format is `{LastName} Household`. # Considerations for Household Naming and Greetings Learn how Household Naming evaluates and orders household members. Review the ways to exclude members or opt an entire household out of updates. Find out which field access users need, and review other considerations. ### Required Editions | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available in: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** editions of Nonprofit Cloud with the Automatic Household Creation and Naming add-on | ## Which Household Members Are Evaluated Household Naming evaluates only members whose Account Contact Relationship is on an account that has a Party Relationship Group where **Type** is **Household**. Household Naming includes an Account Contact Relationship in a household's mapped naming fields only if the record also has these settings. - Select **Active** (`IsActive`). - Don’t select **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** (`IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`). - Select **Included in Group** (`IsIncludedInGroup`). ## How Members Are Ordered in a Household Name Household Naming orders the members in a household name in this priority. - The member whose Account Contact Relationship has **Primary Member** (`IsPrimaryMember`) selected comes first, unless you exclude that member. - Household Naming orders the remaining members according to the value in the **Household Automatic Naming Sequence** (`HouseholdAutoNamingSequence`) field on the Account Contact Relationship. This field overrides how names appear for a household. - If the sequence is blank, Household Naming orders members by `CreatedDate`, from oldest first. ## Ways to Exclude Members or Opt Out a Household Default exclusions Household Naming excludes any member whose Account Contact Relationship has **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** (`IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`) selected. It also excludes any member whose contact or person account has a value in the **Deceased Date** (`DeceasedDate`) field. Exclusion formula To exclude members based on your own criteria, complete the Exclusion Formula section of a naming or greeting template. Whole-household opt-out To opt an entire household account out of future naming updates, select **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** (`IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`) on the household's Party Relationship Group record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Add the **Exclude From Household Automatic Naming** field to the page layouts for Account Contact Relationship and Party Relationship Group. If you use the [Agentforce Financial Services New Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_households_create.htm&language=en_US) feature, add the field to the household configuration's list of available fields. ## Field Access Requirements To make sure that household naming works as expected, give users a minimum of read access to these fields. Read Access | Object | Fields | | --- | --- | | Account Contact Relationship | `IsActive`, `IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming`, `HouseholdAutoNamingSequence`, `IsIncludedInGroup`, `IsPrimaryMember`, and `IsPrimaryGroup` (suggested, but not required) | | Party Relationship Group | `IsExclFrHshldAutoNaming` and `Type` | | Contact | `DeceasedDate` | | Any object | Any field that's referenced in a Household Naming template's naming pattern or exclusion formula | Give users write access to any destination field that's mapped in an active Household Naming template. For example, give write access to the Account Name field or to a mapped custom field. ## Considerations - Changing the API value of, or deleting, a field that's referenced in a custom naming pattern or a template's Exclusion Formula can cause downstream errors. - Turning on Household Naming and creating templates doesn't update existing households. To backfill household names, create an automation that calls the Recalculate Household Names invocable action. - Automatic Household Creation uses a default name format if either of these is true. You didn't turn on Automatic Household Naming. You don't have an active household naming template that sets the `Account.Name` field as the destination. In these cases, the auto-generated household name format is `{LastName} Household`. # Considerations for Intelligent Degree Planning Get familiar with how Intelligent Degree Planner pulls and shows data from your org.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
As you model your Academic Operations data, consider the implications for Intelligent Degree Planning. ## Active and Inactive Terms and Sessions After a learner selects a year, the pathway planner offers all terms and sessions that are shared with the learner and available for the chosen year. The planner includes active and inactive terms and sessions so that you can deactivate terms and sessions without affecting degree planning. To offer only active terms and sessions, use sharing rules. ## Term and Session Naming After a learner selects a year, term, and session, the degree planner combines the term and session names into the format AcademicTerm.Name + AcademicSession.Name. For example, a term named “2024 Fall” and a session named “Session 1” appear as “2024 Fall Session 1”. To avoid repetitive or confusing titles in the degree planner, don’t include year or term names in session names. ## Picklist Values for Participation Status Review the picklist values for the Participation Status field on the Course Offering Participant object. The Participation Status field is a dynamic picklist, which means that you create the values. See [Review Picklist Values for Education Cloud Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_picklist_values.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To function properly and give your users a consistent experience, Education Cloud requires picklist values on certain fields."). ## Requirements Panel The requirements panel shows requirements when the learner is associated with a learner program that includes learner program requirements. ## Requirement Placeholders Requirement placeholders are made available according to the Elective Courses node in the learning program plan. ## Sharing Rights Sharing rights for staff and learners affect these pathway objects. - Learner Pathway - Academic Year - Academic Term - Academic Session - Course Offering - Course Offering Participant - Course Offering Participant Result - Learning Pathway Template - Learning - Learner Program ## Data Required Intelligent Degree Planning requires this data. - Learning, Learning Program, and Learning Course - Learning Outcome, Learning Outcome Item, and Learning Achievement - Learning Foundation Item (represents prerequisites and corequisites) - Learning Program Plan and Learning Program Plan Requirement - Learner Program and Learner Program Plan Requirement - Academic Year, Term, and Session - Products All data is saved in a learner pathway, and the courses within the pathway are saved as learner pathway items. Use the Learning Wizard to create courses and programs, and the Program Plan Builder to create program plans. Both are available in the Academic Operations app. This way, year or term data is created for you. Records that you configured in setup, such as achievements, outcome items, and foundations, are created automatically. # Considerations for Person Account Migration Consider including these steps in your plan before you migrate account and contact records to person account records. - Modify and validate your data to meet these requirements: - Only individual accounts with a single direct account contact relationship can successfully convert to person accounts. For each person account, the account record has only one contact record. - The account and contact have the same record owner. - The account and contact use the same currency value, if applicable. - Both the Parent Account field on the account and the Reports To field on the contact are empty. - The account isn’t a parent account of any other account records. - No other contact records relate to the contact. - The migration maps the contact name to person accounts. If you used a middle name, salutation, and suffix, the migration run includes that information in the name of the person account. - The contact cannot be associated with an active Community user. - Review third-party applications for compatibility with person accounts. - Turn off tracking for the Account Name field. - Consider any limitations of using Data Loader to migrate data. - Migrate contact-triggered automations. - Take an inventory of automations that are initiated when a contact is created, updated, or deleted. - Simplify where possible, and eliminate unused automations. - Consider best practices for setting up automations. - Decide what will be built in Flow, and in Apex after migrating to Education Cloud. - In a sandbox, recreate the automations on the account object. - For Flow and Apex, use the IsPersonAccount field to ensure that the automations don’t run for business or organization accounts. - Move Workflows and Process Builder automations to Flow or Apex. - Consider a trigger framework for Apex automations. - Migrate validation rules. - Take an inventory of validation rules on the contact object. - Simplify where possible, and eliminate rules that aren’t required. - In a sandbox, recreate the validation rules on the account object. Use the IsPersonAccount field to ensure that the validation rules don’t apply to business or organization accounts. - Migrate Experience Cloud users. - Deactivate all users associated with contacts. - Migrate contacts to person accounts. - Create new users and relate them with person accounts. - Reassociate record ownership if needed. - Create the required record types and then rebuild page layouts for person accounts. - Update lookup reference IDs, if needed. - Test your person account migration sequence in a sandbox, including page layouts and user experience. SEE ALSO: - [Considerations for Using Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_behavior.htm&language=en_US) - [When to Use Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.dataloader.meta/dataloader/when_to_use_the_data_loader.htm) - [Salesforce Automation Best Practice Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000393269&type=1) - [Migrate Account and Contact Records to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_account_and_contact_records_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Convert individual model account and contact records to person account records in Education Cloud.") # Considerations for Recording Gifts in Education Before you start recording gifts, review these considerations for each gift process. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Gift Entry - You can map custom fields for gift entry. See [Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_map_custom_fields_to_use_during_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift."). - Deleting a gift entry doesn’t automatically delete the related gift transaction. Delete the gift transaction separately. - The system sets the transaction status for each gift entry to Pending by default, except for cash payments. Gift entries that are cash or check payments automatically set the transaction status to Paid. - Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately. See [Create and Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately."). ## Gift Transactions You can change a gift transaction status, but some restrictions apply depending on the status. For example, you can only update a paid gift transaction to Unpaid, Failed, or Fully Refunded. For a complete list of allowed status updates, see [Gift Transactions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_transactions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use gift transactions to track donations that you receive as one-time gifts or as an installment to fulfill a commitment."). ## Gift Commitments When you use gift entry to indicate that a gift transaction paid against an existing gift commitment with a gift commitment schedule, you can only record one payment for each gift transaction. When using the gift entry grid to enter gifts for a batch, you can record separate gift entry rows for separate gift transactions for the same commitment. However, you can't apply one gift entry row to multiple transactions. - A gift transaction autonames to the commitment amount, even if the entry amount is different. - When the gift entry has processed the gift transaction, any edits require multiple steps and manipulation of the gift transaction status. - You can't remove a gift commitment from a gift entry after it’s applied. For a gift commitment to appear in a gift entry: - Include a date in the Effective Start Date field. - Set the status of the gift commitment to Active. - The donor must match on the gift transaction and gift commitment. - The gift transaction must be linked to both a gift commitment and a gift commitment schedule. - Make sure that the Gift Received Date is within the Installment Extension Day Count window for the Transaction Due Date for the next scheduled Gift Transaction. ## Gift Batches The processes to remove entries from and setting default values for a gift batch depends on how you process the gift batch. If you use the gift entry grid to process batches: - Delete rows from the Gift Entries related list on a gift batch. - To set default values for a batch, use the "Set Batch Defaults" quick action on a Gift Batch record. If you use the Process Gift Batch flow to process batches: - To remove an entry from a batch, edit from the entry page. If you use delete from the batch screen, it deletes the entry entirely. - To automatically fill all fields for each gift exactly as set, including donor information, select **Set as Default**. The default remains even if you exit and then return to the batch. # Considerations for Recording Gifts in Nonprofit Before you start recording gifts, review these considerations for each gift process. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

## Gift Entry - You can map custom fields for gift entry. See [Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_map_custom_fields_to_use_during_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift."). - Deleting a gift entry doesn’t automatically delete the related gift transaction. Delete the gift transaction separately. - The system sets the transaction status for each gift entry to Pending by default, except for cash payments. Gift entries that are cash or check payments automatically set the transaction status to Paid. - Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately. See [Create and Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately."). ## Gift Transactions You can change a gift transaction status, but some restrictions apply depending on the status. For example, you can only update a paid gift transaction to Unpaid, Failed, or Fully Refunded. For a complete list of allowed status updates, see [Gift Transactions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_transactions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use gift transactions to track donations that you receive as one-time gifts or as an installment to fulfill a commitment."). ## Gift Commitments When you use gift entry to indicate that a gift transaction paid against an existing gift commitment with a gift commitment schedule, you can only record one payment for each gift transaction. When using the gift entry grid to enter gifts for a batch, you can record separate gift entry rows for separate gift transactions for the same commitment. However, you can't apply one gift entry row to multiple transactions. - A gift transaction autonames to the commitment amount, even if the entry amount is different. - When the gift entry has processed the gift transaction, any edits require multiple steps and manipulation of the gift transaction status. - You can't remove a gift commitment from a gift entry after it’s applied. For a gift commitment to appear in a gift entry: - Include a date in the Effective Start Date field. - Set the status of the gift commitment to Active. - The donor must match on the gift transaction and gift commitment. - The gift transaction must be linked to both a gift commitment and a gift commitment schedule. - Make sure that the Gift Received Date is within the Installment Extension Day Count window for the Transaction Due Date for the next scheduled Gift Transaction. ## Gift Batches The processes to remove entries from and setting default values for a gift batch depends on how you process the gift batch. If you use the gift entry grid to process batches: - Delete rows from the Gift Entries related list on a gift batch. - To set default values for a batch, use the "Set Batch Defaults" quick action on a Gift Batch record. If you use the Process Gift Batch flow to process batches: - To remove an entry from a batch, edit from the entry page. If you use delete from the batch screen, it deletes the entry entirely. - To automatically fill all fields for each gift exactly as set, including donor information, select **Set as Default**. The default remains even if you exit and then return to the batch. # Considerations for Scheduling Accounting Subledger Jobs Evaluate your transactions and data needs to determine when to run Accounting jobs.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Here are some considerations to help you determine the best schedule for your business needs: - When do most of your transactions happen? If most of them occur from Monday to Friday, running a weekly Accounting Subledger job on weekends makes sense. - How granular do you want your data to be? A weekly job potentially processes more data while producing less granularity. For example, you enter a US$150 payment for your goods fund on Monday. Then you refund $50 of it on Tuesday, and change its fund to a services fund on Thursday. If the job runs weekly on Sundays, Salesforce generates one $100 payment in the services fund. - Most accounting teams reconcile their books monthly (or more frequently), so we recommend that you schedule the Accounting Subledger job to run at least one time per month. For example, set up a job run on the first day, the last day, or a few days after the month starts if you need time to finalize data. # Considerations for the Donor Engagement Agent To use the Donor Engagement Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
## Donor Engagement Agent Language and Locale Support The Donor Engagement Agent supports English in these locales. | Locale | Code | | --- | --- | | United States | en\_US | | United Kingdom | en\_GB | ## Donor Engagement Agent Large Language Model Support The Donor Engagement Agent supports the OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni). See [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support The Donor Engagement Agent supports the Trust Layer services supported by the [Agentforce Employee Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US) type. # Considerations for the Donor Engagement Agent To use the Donor Engagement Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
## Donor Engagement Agent Language and Locale Support The Donor Engagement Agent supports English in these locales. | Locale | Code | | --- | --- | | United States | en\_US | | United Kingdom | en\_GB | ## Donor Engagement Agent Large Language Model Support The Donor Engagement Agent supports the OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni). See [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support The Donor Engagement Agent supports the Trust Layer services supported by the [Agentforce Employee Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US) type. # Considerations for Updating Allocations Adjust fund allocations according to the accounting sets' object model.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
If you're using the three- or four-object model, keep in mind where fund account allocation data is stored. - In a three-object accounting set, the secondary object represents allocations of fund accounts to the source record, with an amount for each allocation. - In a four-object accounting set, the tertiary object specifies both an amount for the allocation and the fund that it's allocated to. The secondary object represents the individual amounts of a group of related payments or expenses (such as for a recurring gift or donation). And each of these individual amounts is the parent of the corresponding allocation. Use your current process to manage your allocation amounts. We recommend that the total allocation amount equal the amount of the parent record, to ensure consistency when generating accounting records. See [Object Models for Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting sets enable you to specify which objects and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. It's a flexible approach that lets you map your financial data model to a logical data model, supporting from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees."). # Contact A Contact represents an individual person. - **[Sample Uses for Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Contact object represents the people at the heart of educational institutions. These folks include students, students' family members, faculty, staff, administrators, community members, and so on. Contact is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and, in the case of K-12 Architecture Kit, record types, to help you develop a 360-degree view of your campus community. - **[Contact Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because a Contact can play multiple roles at once—an alumni of one program, a current student in another program, a tutor, and also a sports team member—we don't provide record types out of the box. Creating custom record types that don’t conflict with each other can be tricky, so in general, we don’t recommend it. If you do create them, make sure they're for Contacts for whom only one record type applies. To track a Contact's roles with various organizational entities, consider creating Affiliation records instead. - **[Configure Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up initial Contact data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create a Contact Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Represent people such as students, family members, staff, and more, by creating Contact records. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Contact Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for how to maintain Contact data for your educational institution. ## Sample Uses for Contact The Contact object represents the people at the heart of educational institutions. These folks include students, students' family members, faculty, staff, administrators, community members, and so on. Contact is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and, in the case of K-12 Architecture Kit, record types, to help you develop a 360-degree view of your campus community. - University—Track who's a financial aid applicant, or who's served in the military. - K-12—Distinguish student Contacts from faculty or guardian Contacts. - Any educational institution—Track who has dual citizenship, whose records contain HIPAA-protected information, or who has opted out of FERPA disclosure. ## Contact Record Types Because a Contact can play multiple roles at once—an alumni of one program, a current student in another program, a tutor, and also a sports team member—we don't provide record types out of the box. Creating custom record types that don’t conflict with each other can be tricky, so in general, we don’t recommend it. If you do create them, make sure they're for Contacts for whom only one record type applies. To track a Contact's roles with various organizational entities, consider creating Affiliation records instead. ## Configure Contact Set up initial Contact data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to manage Contact data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Contact Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Contact It's essential to understand how to manage Contact data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm) - [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [Configure Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm) - [Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm) - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Contact records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Contact object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Contact Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As with all objects, verify and customize the security settings, navigation, and layouts for Contact, as needed. Follow the general instructions in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm), keeping in mind that you're editing settings for a standard object rather than a custom object.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

  • Add the following fields to your Contact page layouts, as needed.

    • Disability Status

    • SMS Opt Out

    • Mailing Address Inactive

  • Create a custom field for Credentialing Identifier and add it to your page layouts, as needed. See Model Certifications and Credentials.

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
1.110 Add the picklist value, Temporary Resident, to the Citizenship Status field on Contact.
1.104 Add the picklist value, Decline to State, to the Gender field.
1.101

Add these Address-related fields to Contact page layouts, as needed: Mailing County and Other County.

Add these identification fields, as needed: Former First Name, Former Middle Name, Former Last Name, and Date Deceased.

Add the Citizenship Status picklist. Possible values include: U.S. Citizen or U.S. National; U.S. Dual Citizen; U.S. Permanent Resident; U.S. Refugee or Asylee; Other (Non-U.S.).
1.89 Add the picklist values documented in Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers to the appropriate Contact fields.
1.85 Add the Term Grades related list to Contact page layouts, as needed and if not preconfigured.

1.83

Add the Behavior Involvements related list to Contact page layouts, as needed.
1.78

Add the Attributes related list to Contact page layouts, as needed. 

1.72

Add the Contact Languages related list to Contact page layouts, as needed. 
1.57 Update Contact page layouts that show the Program Enrollments related list to also show the Program Plan field.
1.28

We added the Race field to EDA in version 1.28 to manage all ethnicity settings except Not Hispanic or Latino and Hispanic or Latino. If you used the Ethnicity field before then, use the batch job in EDA Settings to copy standard picklist or custom values except Not Hispanic or Latino and Hispanic or Latino from the legacy Ethnicity field to the Race field.

Before running the batch job:

  • Add Not Hispanic or Latino as a picklist value to the Ethnicity field.
  • Add Hispanic or Latino as a picklist value to the Ethnicity field.

After running the batch job:

  • If your org had custom picklist values for the Ethnicity field, copy them to the Race field.
  • Remove all picklist values from the Ethnicity field except for Hispanic or Latino and Not Hispanic or Latino. We recommend that you replace each removed value with a value from Race, rather than deleting them outright from existing records.
  • If reports or formula fields reference the values in the Ethnicity field, update them.
1.14 After enabling multi-addresses for Contacts, add the Addresses related list to the HEDA Contact layout.
## Create a Contact Record Represent people such as students, family members, staff, and more, by creating Contact records. 1. Click the Contacts tab and click **New**. If you don't see the Contacts tab, from the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select Contacts, and click **New**. 2. Enter relevant details, including Social Security Number, phone numbers, emails, addresses, chosen full name, and so on. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Pay close attention to the Account Name field. Depending on the type of Contact you're creating, sometimes you fill it in and sometimes you leave it blank so that Education Data Architecture can automatically create the container Account record for you when the Contact record is saved.
Default Account Model Type of New Contact How to Handle the Account Name Field
Administrative Account A student or anyone requiring a container Administrative Account (for some institutions, applies to faculty, staff, and administrators)

Leave it blank.
Household Account A student or anyone requiring a container Household Account (such as another household member)

Leave it blank unless the household has an existing Account record. If the household Account was created with a previously created Contact record, start typing the Account name in the field, then select it when you see it suggested.
Either Administrative or Household Account Anyone not requiring a container Account, such as faculty, staff, and administrators employed by the institution (if not using container Accounts for these types of Contacts) or a community member who's part of a business or organization

Don't leave it blank. Start typing the related Account name in the field (such as the educational institution, a department, a campus organization, and so on), then select it when you see it suggested.

If the Account record doesn't exist yet, create it and specify it as the Account Name.
Either Administrative or Household Account Anyone requiring a different container Account type than the default account model

Don't leave it blank. If a container Account record of the required type doesn't already exist, create it and specify it as the Account Name.
3. When you're finished, click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you've created a Contact that has a container Administrative Account and you want to also track their membership in a household, you can't use a container Household Account but you can use an Affiliation. From the student's Contact record, in the Affiliated Accounts related list, create an Affiliation record to relate the Contact to the household's Account record. See [Create an Affiliation Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Capture how learners relate to your educational institution by creating Affiliation records."). ## Things to Know About Maintaining Contact Data Review considerations for how to maintain Contact data for your educational institution. Account and Contact data are tightly coupled. Updating data for a Contact that has a container Account, such as recording a name change or change of household, can trigger automatic changes to the name of the Contact's container Account. The specifics depend on your org's configuration. For details, see [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). # Contact A Contact represents an individual person. - **[Sample Uses for Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Contact object represents the people at the heart of educational institutions. These folks include students, students' family members, faculty, staff, administrators, community members, and so on. Contact is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and, in the case of K-12 Architecture Kit, record types, to help you develop a 360-degree view of your campus community. - **[Contact Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because a Contact can play multiple roles at once—an alumni of one program, a current student in another program, a tutor, and also a sports team member—we don't provide record types out of the box. Creating custom record types that don’t conflict with each other can be tricky, so in general, we don’t recommend it. If you do create them, make sure they're for Contacts for whom only one record type applies. To track a Contact's roles with various organizational entities, consider creating Affiliation records instead. - **[Configure Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up initial Contact data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create a Contact Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Represent people such as students, family members, staff, and more, by creating Contact records. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Contact Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for how to maintain Contact data for your educational institution. ## Sample Uses for Contact The Contact object represents the people at the heart of educational institutions. These folks include students, students' family members, faculty, staff, administrators, community members, and so on. Contact is a standard Salesforce object, augmented with education-specific fields and, in the case of K-12 Architecture Kit, record types, to help you develop a 360-degree view of your campus community. - University—Track who's a financial aid applicant, or who's served in the military. - K-12—Distinguish student Contacts from faculty or guardian Contacts. - Any educational institution—Track who has dual citizenship, whose records contain HIPAA-protected information, or who has opted out of FERPA disclosure. ## Contact Record Types Because a Contact can play multiple roles at once—an alumni of one program, a current student in another program, a tutor, and also a sports team member—we don't provide record types out of the box. Creating custom record types that don’t conflict with each other can be tricky, so in general, we don’t recommend it. If you do create them, make sure they're for Contacts for whom only one record type applies. To track a Contact's roles with various organizational entities, consider creating Affiliation records instead. These Contact record types come preconfigured. - **Student—**A student at an educational institution. - **Faculty—**A faculty member at an educational institution, including teachers, staff, and administrators. - **Guardian—**A guardian of a student. Creating custom record types that don’t conflict with each other can be tricky, so in general, we don’t recommend it. If you do create them, make sure they're for Contacts for whom only one record type applies. ## Configure Contact Set up initial Contact data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to manage Contact data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Contact Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Contact It's essential to understand how to manage Contact data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Contacts' Email Addresses and Phone Numbers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_email_addresses_for_contacts.htm) - [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) - [Configure Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm) - [Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm) - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Contact records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Contact object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Contact Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As with all objects, verify and customize the security settings, navigation, and layouts for Contact, as needed. Follow the general instructions in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm), keeping in mind that you're editing settings for a standard object rather than a custom object.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

  • Add the following fields to your Contact page layouts, as needed.

    • Disability Status

    • SMS Opt Out

    • Mailing Address Inactive

  • Create a custom field for Credentialing Identifier and add it to your page layouts, as needed. See Model Certifications and Credentials.

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
1.18 Add the picklist value, Decline to State, to the Gender field.
1.16

Add these Address-related fields to Contact page layouts, as needed: Mailing County and Other County.

Add these identification fields, as needed: Former First Name, Former Middle Name, Former Last Name, and Date Deceased.

Add the Citizenship Status picklist. Possible values include: U.S. Citizen or U.S. National; U.S. Dual Citizen; U.S. Permanent Resident; U.S. Refugee or Asylee; Other (Non-U.S.).
1.2 Update Contact page layouts to keep up with Grade Enrollment updates, as needed. See Configure Grade Enrollment.

1.1

Add the Behavior Involvements related list to Contact page layouts, as needed.
1.0

Add the Attributes related list to Contact page layouts, as needed. 

Add the Attendance Events related list to Contact page layouts, as needed and if not preconfigured.

1.0

Add the Contact Languages related list to Contact page layouts, as needed. 
## Create a Contact Record Represent people such as students, family members, staff, and more, by creating Contact records. 1. Click the Contacts tab and click **New**. If you don't see the Contacts tab, from the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select Contacts, and click **New**. 2. Select a record type and click **Next**. 3. Enter relevant details, including Social Security Number, phone numbers, emails, addresses, chosen full name, and so on. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important Pay close attention to the Account Name field. Depending on the type of Contact you're creating, sometimes you fill it in and sometimes you leave it blank so that K-12 Architecture Kit can automatically create the container Account record for you when the Contact record is saved.
Default Account Model Type of New Contact How to Handle the Account Name Field
Administrative Account A student or anyone requiring a container Administrative Account (for some institutions, applies to faculty, staff, and administrators)

Leave it blank.
Household Account A student or anyone requiring a container Household Account (such as another household member)

Leave it blank unless the household has an existing Account record. If the household Account was created with a previously created Contact record, start typing the Account name in the field, then select it when you see it suggested.
Either Administrative or Household Account Anyone not requiring a container Account, such as faculty, staff, and administrators employed by the institution (if not using container Accounts for these types of Contacts) or a community member who's part of a business or organization

Don't leave it blank. Start typing the related Account name in the field (such as the educational institution, a department, a campus organization, and so on), then select it when you see it suggested.

If the Account record doesn't exist yet, create it and specify it as the Account Name.
Either Administrative or Household Account Anyone requiring a different container Account type than the default account model

Don't leave it blank. If a container Account record of the required type doesn't already exist, create it and specify it as the Account Name.
4. When you're finished, click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you've created a Contact that has a container Administrative Account and you want to also track their membership in a household, you can't use a container Household Account but you can use an Affiliation. From the student's Contact record, in the Affiliated Accounts related list, create an Affiliation record to relate the Contact to the household's Account record. See [Create an Affiliation Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Capture how learners relate to your educational institution by creating Affiliation records."). ## Things to Know About Maintaining Contact Data Review considerations for how to maintain Contact data for your educational institution. Account and Contact data are tightly coupled. Updating data for a Contact that has a container Account, such as recording a name change or change of household, can trigger automatic changes to the name of the Contact's container Account. The specifics depend on your org's configuration. For details, see [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). # Contact Language Contact Language represents a language spoken by someone connected to your institution. - **[Sample Uses for Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tracking the languages that are spoken by students, staff, and parents—as well as their fluency in each—goes a long way to creating an inclusive environment where people can get support and communication in their preferred languages. Because a Contact can be any type of individual, you have a lot of flexibility in the type of data you track. - **[Configure Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create a Contact Language Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a contact language record from the Contact Languages related list on the contact record. ## Sample Uses for Contact Language Tracking the languages that are spoken by students, staff, and parents—as well as their fluency in each—goes a long way to creating an inclusive environment where people can get support and communication in their preferred languages. Because a Contact can be any type of individual, you have a lot of flexibility in the type of data you track. - University—Track the primary language for a student, but then identify an intermediate-level language because she's studying it. - International university—Track an instructor's fluency in multiple languages, for staffing courses taught in multiple countries. - K-12—Identify the primary language for a student’s guardian to ensure that communication sent to the family is in their preferred language. ## Configure Contact Language Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Keep Up with Contact Language Updates
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.72

Page Layout:

  • Add the Contact Languages related list to your Contact page layout.

  • Add the Primary Language field to the Contact page layout. We recommend you add this field as read-only, as it's populated by the value specified in the Contact Language record when the Primary Language checkbox is selected.

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.

 

Automation:

  • If you don’t want the Primary Language field on the Contact object to be populated by default, disable the CLAN_PrimaryLanguage_TDTM trigger.
  • If you don’t want Contact Language records to be created or updated automatically when users update the Primary Language field on the Contact object, disable the CON_PrimaryLanguage_TDTM trigger.
## Create a Contact Language Record Create a contact language record from the Contact Languages related list on the contact record. Before you create a Contact Language record, create Language records to represent the languages recognized by your institution so you can relate Contacts to them. See [Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_language.htm) . 1. From the Contact record you’re updating with Language information, click **New** in the Contact Languages related list. 2. Select a language spoken by the Contact, indicate the fluency, and specify whether it’s the Contact’s primary language. Don’t change the Contact name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note When you specify a language as primary, the language you choose appears in the Primary Language field on the Contact record. 3. Click **Save**. # Contact Language Contact Language represents a language spoken by someone connected to your institution. - **[Sample Uses for Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tracking the languages that are spoken by students, staff, and parents—as well as their fluency in each—goes a long way to creating an inclusive environment where people can get support and communication in their preferred languages. Because a Contact can be any type of individual, you have a lot of flexibility in the type of data you track. - **[Create a Contact Language Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a contact language record from the Contact Languages related list on the contact record. ## Sample Uses for Contact Language Tracking the languages that are spoken by students, staff, and parents—as well as their fluency in each—goes a long way to creating an inclusive environment where people can get support and communication in their preferred languages. Because a Contact can be any type of individual, you have a lot of flexibility in the type of data you track. - University—Track the primary language for a student, but then identify an intermediate-level language because she's studying it. - International university—Track an instructor's fluency in multiple languages, for staffing courses taught in multiple countries. - K-12—Identify the primary language for a student’s guardian to ensure that communication sent to the family is in their preferred language. ## Create a Contact Language Record Create a contact language record from the Contact Languages related list on the contact record. Before you create a Contact Language record, create Language records to represent the languages recognized by your institution so you can relate Contacts to them. See [Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_language.htm). 1. From the Contact record you’re updating with Language information, click **New** in the Contact Languages related list. 2. Select a language spoken by the Contact, indicate the fluency, and specify whether it’s the Contact’s primary language. Don’t change the Contact name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note When you specify a language as primary, the language you choose appears in the Primary Language field on the Contact record. 3. Click **Save**. # Contact Standardization Updates Learn about how to set up or manage a Contact Standardization job. - **[Before You Schedule Contact Standardization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_contact_standardization_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these requirements before you schedule a Contact Standardization job. - **[Schedule Contact Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_contact_standardization_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Schedule a one-time Contact Standardization update, or schedule recurring updates. - **[Manage Scheduled Contact Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_contact_standardization_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit or skip previously scheduled Contact Standardization updates. ## Before You Schedule Contact Standardization Complete these requirements before you schedule a Contact Standardization job. - Enable insights\_\_Deceased\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c and insights\_\_Phone\_Verified\_\_c custom fields for in the Object Manager under Setup. - [Configure Field Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_configure_data_integrity_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add fields to page layouts and configure field level security to give users access to the Data Integrity fields they need.") for the new Contact fields after installation or package upgrade. ## Schedule Contact Standardization Updates Schedule a one-time Contact Standardization update, or schedule recurring updates. Contact Standardization verifies a Contact’s phone or email only if the corresponding **Phone** or **Email** field is populated. For deceased status, at least one **Email** or **Phone**, or the combined **Mailing Street**, **City**, and **State** field must be populated. 1. Click the **Data Updates** tab. 2. Click **Schedule Updates**. 3. Select **Contact Standardization** to **Select a job**. 4. For Recurring Schedule, select an update frequency, or choose One-Time to schedule a one-time update. 5. Specify a start date and time, based on your browser's time zone as set by your computer's operating system. 6. **Estimated Records** displays the total number records that are to be standardized. 7. Choose the contacts you want to standardize: - Select **All Contact records** to standardize all records. - Choose to optionally filter data updates by **Primary contact** or **Campaign lookup**. - If **Primary contact** is selected, only the primary contact for the household will be included in the standardization. - If **Campaign lookup** is selected, only the campaign members for the specified campaign will be include 8. Review the estimated number of record updates. 9. Click **Save**. ## Manage Scheduled Contact Standardization Updates Edit or skip previously scheduled Contact Standardization updates. 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the update in the **Scheduled Data Updates** section. 3. From the action menu next to the update, select one of the options: - **Edit this Update Only** to edit a one-time update or a single update in a recurring series. - **Edit All Updates in this Series** to edit all updates in a recurring series. - **Skip this Update** to skip an update. If you previously skipped an update, you can also select **Un-Skip this Update**. # Control Access to Education Portal Elements with Audiences The Education Portal template includes applicant, student, and alumni components by default. To provide tailored, relevant experiences for all your portal users, you can make portal pages and components visible only to certain audiences.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permisions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To control access to education portal elements: | Education Cloud Full Access | These steps walk you through how to create an audience on the New Audience window, which you can open from the Assign Audience window in Experience Builder. You can access the Assign Audience window from a page variation, branding set, or component. To learn how to go to the Assign Audience and New Audience windows from those different locations, see: - [Assign an Audience to a Branding Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_branding_sets.htm&type=5) - [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&type=5) - [Assign an Audience to a Component Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_personalize_components.htm&type=5) - [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5) 1. On the Assign Audience window, click **New Audience**. 2. Enter an audience name. 3. For Criteria Type, select **Permission**. Then click **Standard**. ![The New Audience window, showing where to select "Permission, Standard"](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/permission_standard.png) 4. Choose **Alumni Community Pages**, **Applicant Community Pages**, or **Student Community Pages** to include users with the applicable system permissions in the audience. ![The New Audience window, showing where to select a system permission](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/permission_standard_alumni.png) 5. From Operator, select **Equals**. 6. From Value, choose **true**. 7. Save your changes. See Also [Create an Audience for an Aura Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_builder_page_visibilty_manage.htm&type=5) # Convert a Lead to a Contact The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality to convert a Lead to a Contact. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Convert a Lead](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0d2hkTkNMhw) The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you convert Leads, review or update field mappings. For details, see [Configure Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure leads by mapping custom lead fields and setting the default action for creating opportunities from leads."). To convert a Lead to a Contact: 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, go to the page for the Lead you want to convert, and then click **Convert**. The button is in the right-hand corner of the page. ![Location of convert icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/lead_to_contact_convertbutton.png) 2. Enter the field values on the page as necessary to convert your Lead into a Contact. When you specify the Company ("PB&J Inc."), the Account and Affiliated Account options appear. ![Lead conversion with Affiliation showed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/lead_to_contact_acctaffil.png) When the Company field value is "Individual," the Account and Affiliated Account options don't appear on the Lead Convert page. ![Lead conversion without Affiliation shown](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/lead_to_contact_noacctaffil.png) - **Record Owner** (1): Select the owner of the new or merged Contact and Household Account. - **Send Email to the Owner** (2): Sends an email to the new owner with a link to the new Contact. - **Contact** (3): Includes these options: - **Create New:** Creates a Contact. If you create a Contact from the Lead, Salesforce creates a Household Account for the Contact, or you can specify an Organizational Account. - **Merge with Existing:** The NPSP Lead Conversion utility attempts to find an exact-match (not case-sensitive) Contact in the system, searching for either the email address or the Lead's full name (both First Name and Last Name). If the utility finds potential matches, they appear in the Contact picklist. Select Merge with Existing to merge the Lead into an existing Contact record. - **Account** (4): Includes these options: - **Create Household Account:** Creates a Household Account for the new Contact. - **Attach to Existing:** Selects if the Lead's Company matches an existing Organizational Account, and you want the Contact to use that for their Account. - **Create New Account:** Creates an Organizational Account that uses the Lead's Company, and to have the Contact use that for their Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note - If you merge the Lead into an existing Contact, these options don't appear because the Contact's Account remains unchanged. - If the Company name on the Lead is "self," the Lead's full name, or "Individual," the Account and Affiliated Account options don't appear on the Lead Convert page. - Avoid record-triggered flows on the Account object to assign picklist values valid only for the Organization Record Type. Doing so causes the lead conversion process to fail. Instead, build the automation on the Contact object and access the Affiliation Account via the Primary Affiliation field. - **Affiliated Account** (5): Includes these options: - **None:** NPSP doesn't create an Affiliation between the Contact and Account. - **Affiliate with Existing:** Selects if the Lead's Company matches an existing Organizational Account, and you want to create an Affiliation between the Contact and Account. - **Affiliate with New Account:** Selects to create an Affiliation between the Contact and a new Organizational Account, created from the Lead's Company. - **Opportunity Name / Do not create a new opportunity** (6): To create a new Opportunity (Donation) for the Contact after converting the Lead, deselect **Do not create an Opportunity upon conversion**, and enter a name. The new Donation record uses the converter's default Record Type. - **Converted Status** (7): If you're using multiple Lead Status values in your organization, select the appropriate value based on your business process. 3. Click **Convert** to start the Lead convert process. When completed, the page shows the newly converted or merged Contact. If you elected to create an Opportunity, you can find the new record by scrolling down to the Donations related list on the Contact page. # Convert Opportunity Rollups into Payment Rollups You can easily convert Opportunity rollups into Payment rollups just by changing a few fields. Keep in mind that you will need to do this process for each rollup you want to convert to a Payment rollup. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. If you don't see the tab in your org, you can find it from the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. 4. In the row for the Opportunity rollup you want to convert into a Payment rollup, click the down arrow ![Down arrow indicating that there are more menu options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. In the Rollup Type field, select Payment > Account (Hard Credit). 6. In the Filter Group field, select the appropriate Payments filter group. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Repeat these steps for each rollup you want to update. 9. If you want to see the updated rollup calculations immediately, you can [manually recalculate them](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build."). Otherwise, the values will update when the batch runs overnight. # Convert to the Nonprofit Success Pack Household Account Model This guide is for users who upgraded to NPSP from a previous version and want to convert to the Household Account Model. [Convert to the Nonprofit Success Pack Household Account Model](https://s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/sfdo-docs/npsp_account_model_conversion.pdf)  (in PDF format) This guide provides information on converting to the Household Account Model, including prerequisites and how long the process will take. It also walks you at a high-level through the conversion process, from pre-conversion audits to running the Conversion Utility to post-conversion testing and verification. ## Audience To use this guide to successfully convert to the Household Account Model, you must have: - Strong Salesforce Administrator skills, such as the skills necessary to pass the Salesforce Certified Administrator credential. - Extreme familiarity with your org's customizations and data. - Plenty of experience using data manipulation tools such as Excel, Data Loader, Apsona, or DemandTools to import, export, and update records. - The ability to evaluate and troubleshoot issues with profiles, record types, page layouts, workflows, validation rules, and any third-party applications that push data into your Salesforce org. - Full understanding of your legacy data model (whether that is One-to-One or Bucket Individual) and how it differs from the new Household Account Model. # Corporate Relations Corporate Relations connects academic programs, employer relationships, and Outcome Management analytics to show how institutional partnerships translate into internships, employment, and student outcomes. Automated workflows indicate which partnerships drive workforce outcomes most effectively. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Corporate Relations brings partnerships, placements, and outcome data into one connected model, so you can see how partnerships translate into student outcomes. Institutions can manage relationships with external organizations such as employers, training providers, and research partners while linking those relationships directly to student outcomes. This connected data model helps institutions see how education translates into real-world outcomes. Institutions can also identify which partnerships drive student success and make more informed decisions about where to invest and grow. ## How Corporate Relations Works Partnership agreements and partnership person placements work differently from the standard account-account relationship and account-contact relationship records model. Account-account relationship and account-contact relationship records show that a relationship exists, but they don't govern the terms of a partnership or measure its results. In Corporate Relations, a partnership agreement is a governed, time-bound agreement rather than a simple link, and a partnership person placement drives Outcome Management metrics that a relationship record can't. Corporate Relations adds two objects that work together to record partnerships and the placements delivered under them. Partnership Agreement A formal, renewable agreement that defines and governs your institution's relationship with an external organization, capturing the scope, duration, and expected outcomes of a corporate, research, or workforce partnership Partnership Person Placement A verified placement delivered under a Partnership Agreement. Each placement links a person to a specific program and partner organization, and covers experiences, such as on-campus roles, research, internships, and employment. Placements connect to Outcome Management, so career and skill outcomes roll up alongside a student's academic record. In Corporate Relations, an automated flow keeps this data current. When placements change, the flow updates the placement records and refreshes the outcome counts used in Outcome Management analytics. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Use account relationship records for general connections between accounts and contacts. Use Corporate Relations objects to govern a partnership and measure the student and workforce outcomes it produces. - **[Set Up Corporate Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_corporate_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give admins and advancement officers access to Corporate Relations features and objects. Create active versions of the flows to update partnership placement records and update outcome counts. # Course Course represents an academic course, typically offered periodically by an Account entity, such as a department or school. - **[Sample Uses for Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Course is an instance of a class that's offered at your educational institution and is typically related to the Account that offers it. - **[Keep Up with Course Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create a Course Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create Course records, first create their related Account records, representing the school or department most closely associated with a Course. ## Sample Uses for Course A Course is an instance of a class that's offered at your educational institution and is typically related to the Account that offers it. For example: While a Course is, in practice, often related to multiple Academic Programs (an Academic Program being a type of Account), each Course record is technically associated with only one Account. The type of related Account can vary by institution. - University or high school—The related Account often has the Academic Department record type, such as the English Department Account. - K-12—The related Account often has the Educational Institution record type, such as the school's Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note A Course is not the same thing as a Course Offering. A Course is _any_ instance of a class, while a Course Offering is a _specific_ instance of that Course, usually tied to a Term. For example, every fall term, the English Department (Account) might offer a Course called British Literature 100. The Course itself is distinct from the Course Offering, which represents a single occurrence of British Literature 100 during a specific Term. ## Keep Up with Course Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Academic Level

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Issuer

    • Subject

For more information, see Add Custom Picklist Values.
## Create a Course Record Before you create Course records, first create their related Account records, representing the school or department most closely associated with a Course. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Course Offering records so that you're ready to enroll students in the Course (create Course Connection records). 1. From the Account record for the entity that's related to the Course, click **New** in the Courses related list. 2. Enter the Course Name. Don't change the Department name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. Note that the Course ID (for example, ENG-211) can be a helpful text value for representing Courses in a course catalog. 4. Click **Save**. # Course Course represents an academic course, typically offered periodically by an Account entity, such as a department or school. - **[Sample Uses for Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Course is an instance of a class that's offered at your educational institution and is typically related to the Account that offers it. - **[Keep Up with Course Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create a Course Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create Course records, first create their related Account records, representing the school or department most closely associated with a Course. ## Sample Uses for Course A Course is an instance of a class that's offered at your educational institution and is typically related to the Account that offers it. For example: While a Course is, in practice, often related to multiple Academic Programs (an Academic Program being a type of Account), each Course record is technically associated with only one Account. The type of related Account can vary by institution. - University or high school—The related Account often has the Academic Department record type, such as the English Department Account. - K-12—The related Account often has the Educational Institution record type, such as the school's Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note A Course is not the same thing as a Course Offering. A Course is _any_ instance of a class, while a Course Offering is a _specific_ instance of that Course, usually tied to a Term. For example, every fall term, the English Department (Account) might offer a Course called British Literature 100. The Course itself is distinct from the Course Offering, which represents a single occurrence of British Literature 100 during a specific Term. ## Keep Up with Course Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Academic Level

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Issuer

    • Subject

For more information, see Add Custom Picklist Values.
## Create a Course Record Before you create Course records, first create their related Account records, representing the school or department most closely associated with a Course. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Course Offering records so that you're ready to enroll students in the Course (create Course Connection records). 1. From the Account record for the entity that's related to the Course, click **New** in the Courses related list. 2. Enter the Course Name. Don't change the Department name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. Note that the Course ID (for example, ENG-211) can be a helpful text value for representing Courses in a course catalog. 4. Click **Save**. # Course Catalog Creation with AI Tools A guided session builds a standardized course catalog for your institution. When you describe your courses or provide a source document to a coding agent, the agent analyzes the catalog, checks data quality, and creates the course records tied to their offering college or department. This course catalog prepares your institution for scheduling, enrollment, and advising. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Scenario A Salesforce admin at your institution wants to build a complete course catalog from department spreadsheets and PDFs before scheduling and enrollment work begins. To avoid creating course records and linking courses manually, the admin connects a coding agent to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) and provides the department files. The agent analyzes the courses, identifies missing fields, and proposes the catalog structure for review. After the admin approves, the agent creates the course records and links each course to its offering department. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. For more information, see [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). ## Requirements - Education Cloud Full Access permission set. The agent checks for and assigns the required permission sets based on your privileges, so it never grants access that you don't have. - A coding agent, such as Agentforce Vibes or Claude Code, connected to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) with access to Education Cloud setup skills. For Agentforce Vibes, no installation is required. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. You can manage them from the Skills page, under Toolkit, in Agentforce Vibes. For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. ## Suggested Technology and Experience Recommended for Salesforce admins who are comfortable with Setup and with running a coding agent against a connected org. No prior experience with a specific skill is required. ## Related Documentation - [Model Courses and Curricula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_courses_and_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learnings, courses, course offerings, and schedules.") - [Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide) - [Salesforce Development Plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) - [Get Started with Agentforce Vibes](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/agentforcevibes/guide/afv-get-started.html) ## Agentic Tips - Describe your goal in your own words. For example: - "Import our course catalog from this spreadsheet." - "Here's our catalog PDF. Create the courses for the College of Engineering." - "Set up our courses, and link the labs to their lectures." - Provide reliable sources. A structured spreadsheet or CSV file is more reliable than a web page, which can return incomplete results. Include course codes, names, and credit hours so that the agent creates complete records. - Specify the course-offering account. Courses link to the business account for the college or department that provides them. Be ready to provide that account before you start. - Decide how to handle lecture and lab pairs. When the agent finds lecture and lab pairs, it asks whether to create them as separate courses or as linked courses that students take together. State your preference before the agent creates records. - Review the data quality report. The agent reports missing fields and asks for additional sources or your approval before creating records with placeholder values. It doesn't invent missing data. - Avoid pasting credentials into a prompt. The agent acts as your authenticated user through the connected org. ## Design Considerations - The agent creates course records only. It creates course records in bulk and links them to their provider account. It doesn't create learning programs, prerequisites, course offerings, sections, or enrollment. Set those up separately. - The agent evaluates data before committing. It reports which fields are complete and which are missing, pauses on lecture and lab pairs, and identifies existing courses so that you update, skip, or review them. - Multiple formats that use the same code aren't duplicates. When one course code appears with different credit hours or delivery formats, the agent treats them as variants and asks how to represent them rather than merging them. - Confirm record visibility after import. After the agent builds the catalog, check that the running user's profile can see the created records. If needed, set field-level and record-type access in Setup. ## Build Your Course Catalog with a Coding Agent Describe your course data to a coding agent. The agent creates course records and then links courses to their offering college or department. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To run setup skills through a coding agent: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. Before you start: - [Set up your org](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/setup-overview.html) for the Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers, including an External Client App with the `mcp_api` scope. - Activate the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). - [Connect your coding agents.](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/client-connection-overview.html) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. Then, create your course catalog. 1. Instruct the agent to import your course catalog, and provide your data as a CSV, spreadsheet, PDF, or web page. 2. Specify which provider account offers the courses. 3. Have the agent analyze the source, and review its data quality report. Supply additional sources or approve placeholder values for missing fields. 4. Decide how to handle any lecture and lab pairs identified by the agent. 5. Approve the import, and have the agent create the course records in batches and link them to the provider account. 6. Review the agent's summary, and verify record visibility in Salesforce. # Course Connection Course Connection represents a relationship between a Contact, such as a student or faculty member, and a Course Offering. - **[Sample Uses for Course Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Course Connection object is used similarly in both K-12 and higher education. - **[Course Connection Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your version of software doesn't include these record types, you can either run the installer or create them manually. - **[Configure Course Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get ready to use the Course Connection object and keep it up to date. - **[Create a Course Connection Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create a Course Connection record, create the Contact and Course Offering records that are connected by the Course Connection. ## Sample Uses for Course Connection The Course Connection object is used similarly in both K-12 and higher education. - Any educational institution—Track a student's enrollments in completed and in-progress Course Offerings. Track a faculty member's involvement with Course Offerings as an instructor, advisor, or other role. ## Course Connection Record Types If your version of software doesn't include these record types, you can either run the installer or create them manually. - **Student**—Tracks a student's enrollment in a Course Offering. - **Faculty**—Tracks a faculty member's involvement with a Course Offering. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If your software version includes the preconfigured Student and Faculty record types, it also includes an additional record type, called Default. The Default record type isn't needed for Course Connections to function. To prevent confusion, we recommend hiding it from all user profiles except the System Administrator profile. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Search for then select **Profiles**. 3. For each profile that interacts with Course Connection record types, edit the profile's Record Type Settings for Course Connections to make sure that Default is not one of the Selected Record Types. See [Create Course Connection Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The installer creates a Student record type and a Faculty record type for Course Connections, but you can also create your own record types."). ## Configure Course Connection Get ready to use the Course Connection object and keep it up to date. Course Connections are enabled by default in most orgs and the following configuration doesn't apply. However, if they're not enabled in your org, or if you started using EDA with version 1.15 and the now-retired Course Enrollment object is enabled, we recommend that you complete these configuration steps to enable Course Connections. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note We encourage you to enable Course Connections, but if you don't, you can continue using Course Enrollments without record types. Whichever method you use, Course Enrollments are renamed Course Connections in all orgs. - **[Keep Up with Course Connection Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create Course Connection Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The installer creates a Student record type and a Faculty record type for Course Connections, but you can also create your own record types. - **[Enable Course Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After verifying that you have student and faculty record types, you're ready to enable Course Connections. - **[Set Record Types for Course Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When Course Connections are enabled, specify the record type that's used for each type of Course Connection, one each for student and faculty member. - **[Update Legacy Course Enrollment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're turning on Course Connections for the first time in an org where Course Offerings and Course Connections (Enrollments) previously existed, update Course Connections with the appropriate record types. Updating faculty Course Connections to the value in Default Faculty Record Type and all other Course Connections to the value in Default Student Record Type enables automation, such as the assignment of Primary Faculty on Course Offering records, to occur. ### Keep Up with Course Connection Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date

    • Display Grade

  • Add these picklist values to the Status picklist.

    • In Progress

    • Completed

    • Enrolled

    • Failed

    • On Hold

    • Withdrew

    • Audited

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
### Create Course Connection Record Types The installer creates a Student record type and a Faculty record type for Course Connections, but you can also create your own record types. For example, you might want to create a Teaching Assistant record type. At a minimum, you must have one record type for students and one for faculty. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you've already created your own student and faculty record types, you don't need to add more. Simply map them to the Default Student Record Type and Default Faculty Record Type in Course Connection Record Types in EDA Settings (see [Set Record Types for Course Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When Course Connections are enabled, specify the record type that's used for each type of Course Connection, one each for student and faculty member.")). To access the management settings for Course Connection record types: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Course Connection**, then click **Record Types**. 4. Create both required record types. For details, see [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=creating_record_types.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. ### Enable Course Connections After verifying that you have student and faculty record types, you're ready to enable Course Connections. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Course Connection Record Types**. 2. If Course Connection Record Types isn't enabled, click **Edit**, turn it on, and click **Save**. ### Set Record Types for Course Connections When Course Connections are enabled, specify the record type that's used for each type of Course Connection, one each for student and faculty member. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Course Connection Record Types**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In Default Student Record Type, select **Student** or a custom record type of your choosing. 4. In Default Faculty Record Type, select **Faculty** or a custom record type. 5. Save your changes. ### Update Legacy Course Enrollment Data If you're turning on Course Connections for the first time in an org where Course Offerings and Course Connections (Enrollments) previously existed, update Course Connections with the appropriate record types. Updating faculty Course Connections to the value in Default Faculty Record Type and all other Course Connections to the value in Default Student Record Type enables automation, such as the assignment of Primary Faculty on Course Offering records, to occur. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Legacy Course Enrollment Data**. 2. Click **Update**. 3. In the confirmation window, click **Update**. ## Create a Course Connection Record Before you create a Course Connection record, create the Contact and Course Offering records that are connected by the Course Connection. 1. From the Contact record for the student or faculty member that you're creating a Course Connection for, click **New** in the Course Connections related list. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can instead create the Course Connection from the Contact's Program Enrollment record. Creating it there makes sure that the Program Enrollment ID is automatically populated. Otherwise, look up the Program Enrollment ID on the Contact's Program Enrollments related list and keep it handy. 2. Select the Student or Faculty record type (or one of your org's custom record types). 3. Enter Course Connection details. Don't change the Contact name. 4. If the Course Connection is for a faculty member, select **Primary** if the Contact should be the main faculty member for the related Course Offering. The Primary checkbox applies only for connections with the Faculty record type. Selecting Primary for a new Contact removes the Primary status from a previously selected primary Contact, but leaves that Contact's Course Connection and Affiliation records intact. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If the Primary status of a Course Connection changes, the Status field doesn't update from Current to Former. To change Course Connections that were previously marked as Primary to reflect a Status of Former, you need to create custom automation. 5. Save your changes. The newly created Course Connection now shows on the Contact record. # Course Connection Course Connection represents a relationship between a Contact, such as a student or faculty member, and a Course Offering. - **[Sample Uses for Course Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Course Connection object is used similarly in both K-12 and higher education. - **[Course Connection Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your version of software doesn't include these record types, you can either run the installer or create them manually. - **[Configure Course Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get ready to use the Course Connection object and keep it up to date. - **[Create a Course Connection Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create a Course Connection record, create the Contact and Course Offering records that are connected by the Course Connection. ## Sample Uses for Course Connection The Course Connection object is used similarly in both K-12 and higher education. - Any educational institution—Track a student's enrollments in completed and in-progress Course Offerings. Track a faculty member's involvement with Course Offerings as an instructor, advisor, or other role. ## Course Connection Record Types If your version of software doesn't include these record types, you can either run the installer or create them manually. - **Student**—Tracks a student's enrollment in a Course Offering. - **Faculty**—Tracks a faculty member's involvement with a Course Offering. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If your software version includes the preconfigured Student and Faculty record types, it also includes an additional record type, called Default. The Default record type isn't needed for Course Connections to function. To prevent confusion, we recommend hiding it from all user profiles except the System Administrator profile. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Search for then select **Profiles**. 3. For each profile that interacts with Course Connection record types, edit the profile's Record Type Settings for Course Connections to make sure that Default is not one of the Selected Record Types. See [Create Course Connection Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The installer creates a Student record type and a Faculty record type for Course Connections, but you can also create your own record types."). ## Configure Course Connection Get ready to use the Course Connection object and keep it up to date. Course Connections are enabled by default in most orgs and the following configuration doesn't apply. However, if they're not enabled in your org, or if you started using EDA with version 1.15 and the now-retired Course Enrollment object is enabled, we recommend that you complete these configuration steps to enable Course Connections. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note We encourage you to enable Course Connections, but if you don't, you can continue using Course Enrollments without record types. Whichever method you use, Course Enrollments are renamed Course Connections in all orgs. - **[Keep Up with Course Connection Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create Course Connection Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The installer creates a Student record type and a Faculty record type for Course Connections, but you can also create your own record types. - **[Enable Course Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After verifying that you have student and faculty record types, you're ready to enable Course Connections. - **[Set Record Types for Course Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When Course Connections are enabled, specify the record type that's used for each type of Course Connection, one each for student and faculty member. - **[Update Legacy Course Enrollment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're turning on Course Connections for the first time in an org where Course Offerings and Course Connections (Enrollments) previously existed, update Course Connections with the appropriate record types. Updating faculty Course Connections to the value in Default Faculty Record Type and all other Course Connections to the value in Default Student Record Type enables automation, such as the assignment of Primary Faculty on Course Offering records, to occur. ### Keep Up with Course Connection Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date

    • Display Grade

  • Add these picklist values to the Status picklist.

    • In Progress

    • Completed

    • Enrolled

    • Failed

    • On Hold

    • Withdrew

    • Audited

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.
### Create Course Connection Record Types The installer creates a Student record type and a Faculty record type for Course Connections, but you can also create your own record types. For example, you might want to create a Teaching Assistant record type. At a minimum, you must have one record type for students and one for faculty. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you've already created your own student and faculty record types, you don't need to add more. Simply map them to the Default Student Record Type and Default Faculty Record Type in Course Connection Record Types in EDA Settings (see [Set Record Types for Course Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When Course Connections are enabled, specify the record type that's used for each type of Course Connection, one each for student and faculty member.")). To access the management settings for Course Connection record types: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Course Connection**, then click **Record Types**. 4. Create both required record types. For details, see [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=creating_record_types.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. ### Enable Course Connections After verifying that you have student and faculty record types, you're ready to enable Course Connections. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Course Connection Record Types**. 2. If Course Connection Record Types isn't enabled, click **Edit**, turn it on, and click **Save**. ### Set Record Types for Course Connections When Course Connections are enabled, specify the record type that's used for each type of Course Connection, one each for student and faculty member. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Course Connection Record Types**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In Default Student Record Type, select **Student** or a custom record type of your choosing. 4. In Default Faculty Record Type, select **Faculty** or a custom record type. 5. Save your changes. ### Update Legacy Course Enrollment Data If you're turning on Course Connections for the first time in an org where Course Offerings and Course Connections (Enrollments) previously existed, update Course Connections with the appropriate record types. Updating faculty Course Connections to the value in Default Faculty Record Type and all other Course Connections to the value in Default Student Record Type enables automation, such as the assignment of Primary Faculty on Course Offering records, to occur. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Legacy Course Enrollment Data**. 2. Click **Update**. 3. In the confirmation window, click **Update**. ## Create a Course Connection Record Before you create a Course Connection record, create the Contact and Course Offering records that are connected by the Course Connection. 1. From the Contact record for the student or faculty member that you're creating a Course Connection for, click **New** in the Course Connections related list. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can instead create the Course Connection from the Contact's Program Enrollment record. Creating it there makes sure that the Program Enrollment ID is automatically populated. Otherwise, look up the Program Enrollment ID on the Contact's Program Enrollments related list and keep it handy. 2. Select the Student or Faculty record type (or one of your org's custom record types). 3. Enter Course Connection details. Don't change the Contact name. 4. If the Course Connection is for a faculty member, select **Primary** if the Contact should be the main faculty member for the related Course Offering. The Primary checkbox applies only for connections with the Faculty record type. Selecting Primary for a new Contact removes the Primary status from a previously selected primary Contact, but leaves that Contact's Course Connection and Affiliation records intact. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If the Primary status of a Course Connection changes, the Status field doesn't update from Current to Former. To change Course Connections that were previously marked as Primary to reflect a Status of Former, you need to create custom automation. 5. Save your changes. The newly created Course Connection now shows on the Contact record. # Course Offering Course Offering represents a specific instance of a Course that's offered during a specific Term. - **[Sample Uses for Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Course like _Introduction to Statistics_ is often offered on a recurring basis, such as every fall semester. A Course Offering like _Introduction to Statistics - Fall 2020_ might appear as an entry in the course catalog of courses available in the _Fall 2020_ Term. - **[Configure Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Course Offering object up to date. - **[Create a Course Offering Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before creating Course Offering records, make sure you've created the Course and Term records they're related to. ## Sample Uses for Course Offering A Course like _Introduction to Statistics_ is often offered on a recurring basis, such as every fall semester. A Course Offering like _Introduction to Statistics - Fall 2020_ might appear as an entry in the course catalog of courses available in the _Fall 2020_ Term. - Any educational institution—Track each discrete offering of Courses, term by term. A Course Offering is always related to a Term. Other commonly related records are Course Offering Schedule, Course Connection, and Facility records. ## Configure Course Offering Keep the Course Offering object up to date. ### Keep Up with Course Offering Updates If you intend to track the physical locations of Course Offerings by relating them to Facility records, add the Facility field to your Course Offering page layout. The Facility field is not included by default. ## Create a Course Offering Record Before creating Course Offering records, make sure you've created the Course and Term records they're related to. 1. From the Course record, click **New** in the Course Offerings related list. 2. Select a Term or click **\+ New Term** to create a new one. 3. Enter the Course Offering ID, which should match the ID naming format that your institution uses. 4. If you select a faculty member in the Primary Faculty field, we automatically create a Course Connection record for that faculty member. The faculty member is also marked as Primary on the Course Connection. 5. Fill in other details as needed. Only select a Time Block if you aren't going to relate a Course Offering Schedule to this Course Offering. See [Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data.") for information about using these settings correctly. 6. Click **Save**. # Course Offering Course Offering represents a specific instance of a Course that's offered during a specific Term. - **[Sample Uses for Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Course like _Introduction to Statistics_ is often offered on a recurring basis, such as every fall semester. A Course Offering like _Introduction to Statistics - Fall 2020_ might appear as an entry in the course catalog of courses available in the _Fall 2020_ Term. - **[Configure Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Course Offering object up to date. - **[Create a Course Offering Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before creating Course Offering records, make sure you've created the Course and Term records they're related to. ## Sample Uses for Course Offering A Course like _Introduction to Statistics_ is often offered on a recurring basis, such as every fall semester. A Course Offering like _Introduction to Statistics - Fall 2020_ might appear as an entry in the course catalog of courses available in the _Fall 2020_ Term. - Any educational institution—Track each discrete offering of Courses, term by term. A Course Offering is always related to a Term. Other commonly related records are Course Offering Schedule, Course Connection, and Facility records. ## Configure Course Offering Keep the Course Offering object up to date. ### Keep Up with Course Offering Updates If you intend to track the physical locations of Course Offerings by relating them to Facility records, add the Facility field to your Course Offering page layout. The Facility field is not included by default. ## Create a Course Offering Record Before creating Course Offering records, make sure you've created the Course and Term records they're related to. 1. From the Course record, click **New** in the Course Offerings related list. 2. Select a Term or click **\+ New Term** to create a new one. 3. Enter the Course Offering ID, which should match the ID naming format that your institution uses. 4. If you select a faculty member in the Primary Faculty field, we automatically create a Course Connection record for that faculty member. The faculty member is also marked as Primary on the Course Connection. 5. Fill in other details as needed. Only select a Time Block if you aren't going to relate a Course Offering Schedule to this Course Offering. See [Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data.") for information about using these settings correctly. 6. Click **Save**. # Course Offering Schedule Course Offering Schedule relates a Course Offering with a Time Block, allowing for class schedule variations in the locations and days of a specific offering. - **[Sample Uses for Course Offering Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Offering doesn't always meet at the same time or in the same place every day of the Term. You can use the Course Offering Schedule junction object, often with the Time Block object, to track such variations by relating the Course Offering with multiple schedules. - **[Configure Course Offering Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of EDA you originally installed. - **[Create a Course Offering Schedule Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Course Offering Schedule records to represent the variations in a class schedule (locations, days of the week, times of day) for a Course Offering during a specific Term. ## Sample Uses for Course Offering Schedule Course Offering doesn't always meet at the same time or in the same place every day of the Term. You can use the Course Offering Schedule junction object, often with the Time Block object, to track such variations by relating the Course Offering with multiple schedules. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your class schedule follows a simple Monday through Friday routine, without alternating days or more complex schedule requirements, you likely don't need to use the Course Offering Schedule object. You can simply use a combination of Course Offering, Time Block, and Facility (if needed) to model your class schedule. - University—Track the daily variation in locations and times of next quarter's offering of Chem 102: Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays from 1-2 PM in Lecture Hall A, and Tuesdays and Thursdays 2-3:30 PM in the adjacent lab facility. In this case you'd create a Course Offering Schedule for the first group of classes and another Course Offering Schedule for the labs, and both Course Offering Schedules would look up to the same Course Offering. - K-12—Track alternating schedules, with one set of classes on "A" days and another set of classes on "B" days, and class schedules rotating between A and B days on a certain time cycle. Course Offering Schedules can be configured along with Time Blocks to accommodate A/B blocks with standard periods, with flex days and times, and the many other variations found in middle and high schools. ## Configure Course Offering Schedule Consider these updates, depending on which version of EDA you originally installed. | If Installed Before Version | Configuration Task | | --- | --- | | 1.74 | Add the Course Offering Schedules related list to your Course Offering page layout. | ## Create a Course Offering Schedule Record Create Course Offering Schedule records to represent the variations in a class schedule (locations, days of the week, times of day) for a Course Offering during a specific Term. By definition, a Course Offering Schedule is always related to a Course Offering. You can expect to create multiple Course Offering Schedule records to represent a course being offered on different days of the week, in different locations, and during different blocks of time. 1. From the Course Offering record, click **New** in the Course Offering Schedules related list. 2. Fill in details as needed to account for one unique combination of location, days of week, and times of day for a given class schedule. Don't change the Course Offering. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Choose to use either the Start and End Time fields, or the Time Block field—but not both. 3. Click **Save & New** to create additional records for additional combinations, or click **Save** after you've entered the last combination. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note See [Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data.") for information about using Time Blocks with Course Offering Schedules. # Course Offering Schedule Course Offering Schedule relates a Course Offering with a Time Block, allowing for class schedule variations in the locations and days of a specific offering. - **[Sample Uses for Course Offering Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Offering doesn't always meet at the same time or in the same place every day of the Term. You can use the Course Offering Schedule junction object, often with the Time Block object, to track such variations by relating the Course Offering with multiple schedules. - **[Create a Course Offering Schedule Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Course Offering Schedule records to represent the variations in a class schedule (locations, days of the week, times of day) for a Course Offering during a specific Term. ## Sample Uses for Course Offering Schedule Course Offering doesn't always meet at the same time or in the same place every day of the Term. You can use the Course Offering Schedule junction object, often with the Time Block object, to track such variations by relating the Course Offering with multiple schedules. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your class schedule follows a simple Monday through Friday routine, without alternating days or more complex schedule requirements, you likely don't need to use the Course Offering Schedule object. You can simply use a combination of Course Offering, Time Block, and Facility (if needed) to model your class schedule. - University—Track the daily variation in locations and times of next quarter's offering of Chem 102: Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays from 1-2 PM in Lecture Hall A, and Tuesdays and Thursdays 2-3:30 PM in the adjacent lab facility. In this case you'd create a Course Offering Schedule for the first group of classes and another Course Offering Schedule for the labs, and both Course Offering Schedules would look up to the same Course Offering. - K-12—Track alternating schedules, with one set of classes on "A" days and another set of classes on "B" days, and class schedules rotating between A and B days on a certain time cycle. Course Offering Schedules can be configured along with Time Blocks to accommodate A/B blocks with standard periods, with flex days and times, and the many other variations found in middle and high schools. ## Create a Course Offering Schedule Record Create Course Offering Schedule records to represent the variations in a class schedule (locations, days of the week, times of day) for a Course Offering during a specific Term. By definition, a Course Offering Schedule is always related to a Course Offering. You can expect to create multiple Course Offering Schedule records to represent a course being offered on different days of the week, in different locations, and during different blocks of time. 1. From the Course Offering record, click **New** in the Course Offering Schedules related list. 2. Fill in details as needed to account for one unique combination of location, days of week, and times of day for a given class schedule. Don't change the Course Offering. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Choose to use either the Start and End Time fields, or the Time Block field—but not both. 3. Click **Save & New** to create additional records for additional combinations, or click **Save** after you've entered the last combination. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note See [Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data.") for information about using Time Blocks with Course Offering Schedules. # Course Operations Agent for Education Cloud The Course Operations Agent assists your faculty directly in Slack. This assistant helps faculty manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk learners, and coordinate student support. With centralized course operations and student support, faculty can focus on teaching and student engagement and less on administrative tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Without leaving Slack, faculty can use the Course Operations Agent as an assistant to: - Receive advanced alerts on course load - Manage courses in automatically created course offering channels with syllabus canvases - Collaborate with students and teaching assistants in dedicated course offering channels - Identify at-risk students, view risk factors, and receive alerts on student progress - Create dedicated channels to coordinate timely intervention with advisors and support staff Real-time updates, easy access to course materials, and personalized support provide students with a unified academic experience. ## Course Operations Subagents and Actions The Course Operations Agent includes these subagents and actions.
Subagent Description Agent Action
Course Offering Channel Use this subagent to assist with course management by creating a channel for a course offering. Create Course Offering Channel
Course Syllabus Canvas Use this subagent to assist with course operations by creating syllabus canvases. Get Course Syllabus Canvas Layout
Course Load Summary Use this subagent to create course load summaries and answer questions about course offerings. Send information about course offerings in a direct message in Slack to Slack users. Create Course Load Summary
Student Risk Report Use this subagent to identify at-risk students and coordinate support. This topic creates a record alert and a related Slack channel for each student. It also automatically adds the advising case team members to this new channel.
## How the Course Operations Agent Connects Your Data to Slack The agent turns Education Cloud data into real-time collaboration in Slack. The agent actions read academic records, run flows, and create the Slack channels where faculty and support staff work together. Each advising case links to a student's contact record, which connects to that student's course offering participant and academic term enrollment records. The agent uses that connection to trace a student from an academic record to the advising case, and then create a Slack channel to coordinate support. Review the agent actions and how they connect your data to Slack. Create At-Risk Report Evaluates a course offering participant record against risk criteria. Create Course Offering Participant Insights Uses a prompt template grounded in Data 360 objects, such as course offering participant, academic term enrollment, and contact, to summarize progress. Create Record Alert Runs a flow that, given a course offering participant, finds the student's related advising case and creates a record alert. Create Record Alert Channel Runs a flow that creates a dedicated Slack channel and adds the advising case team members. Close Record Alert and Related Channel Runs a flow that closes the alert and archives its Slack channel. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Because advising-case identification varies by institution, make sure that you create an Advising Case record type and modify the Create Record Alert flow to fetch only that record type. - **[Prepare Your Org for the Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prep_org_for_course_operations_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide agent actions with the required data. Define at-risk criteria, supply data for course offering participant insights, create an advising record type for cases, and create employee records for faculty members. - **[Set Up Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_operations_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure a Course Operations Agent that assists faculty to manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk students, and coordinate student support. - **[Connect the Course Operations Agent to Slack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_course_channel_canvas_in_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring collaboration, course management, and student support into Slack. Faculty can interact with the Course Operations Agent without switching applications. # Course Operations Dashboard Gain an integrated view of course availability, scheduling efficiency, and enrollment patterns. Anticipate enrollment trends and take timely action to optimize course capacity and faculty workloads. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
The Course Operations dashboard shows course enrollment and faculty data in an academic term. | KPI | Calculation | | --- | --- | | Total Enrollments | Total enrollments in the current academic term. | | Enrollment Level | Level of enrollment across course offerings that compares seats occupied by enrolled students to available seats and waitlist size. | | Total Course Offerings per Term | Total course offerings in the current academic term. | | Overall Student-Faculty Ratio | Ratio of enrolled students to faculty members in the selected academic term. | | Overall Seat Occupancy Rate | Percentage of available seats across multiple course offerings occupied by enrolled students. | | Overall Average Waitlist Size | Average students on course offering waitlists. | # Course Search Agent Considerations To use the Course Search Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education Cloud add-on license
## Language and Locale Support Course Search Agent supports English in these locales. | Locale | Code | | --- | --- | | United Kingdom | en\_UK | | United States | en\_US | ## Large Language Model Support Course Search Agent supports these models. | Model | | --- | | OpenAI and Azure OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni) | The agent's answers to search questions can vary depending on your selected model. We support GPT models from OpenAI and Azure OpenAI for Course Search Agent. If you aren’t satisfied with the search outcomes of our supported models, in the prompt template settings, select a different model. ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Course Search Agent supports the Trust Layer services provided on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in the Einstein Trust Layer Service Support section in [Considerations for Agentforce Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Ask your Salesforce admin which Einstein Trust Layer services are enabled in your org and available for Course Search Agent. ## Region Support Course Search Agent supports the geo-aware models supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Geo-Aware LLM Request Routing on the Einstein Generative AI Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_geo_aware_routing.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Einstein Requests Usage Einstein Requests is a usage metric for generative AI. The use of generative AI capabilities, in either a production or sandbox environment, consumes Einstein Requests and possibly Data 360 credits. To learn more, see [Generative AI Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_usage.htm&type=5&language=en_US). | Card | Type | Description | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Flex Credits | Standard Action | Usage is billed through one custom billable action Get Learning Courses. | See [Flex Credits Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&type=5&language=en_US). | |   |   |   |   | When you use Course Search Agent, credits can be consumed in usage types on other consumption cards by related features such as [Agentforce Data Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.data_library_parent.htm&%3Btype=5&language=en_US) or [Audit and Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_audit_feedback_usage_types.htm&%3Btype=5&language=en_US). ## Data Cloud One Support Course Search Agent is supported in Data Cloud One companion orgs. ## Limitations Course Search Agent is based on Data 360’s Einstein Search capability. # Course Search Agent for Education Cloud Help students and advisors discover the right courses easily. The Course Search Agent answers questions about course information. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education Cloud add-on license
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. The Course Search Agent helps students find the courses that best suit their interests, schedules, and degree program requirements without making appointments with advisors. Advisors can use the agent for research and advise students effectively during registration peak seasons. The Course Search Agent includes these subagents and actions.
Subagent Description Agent Action

Course Search FAQ

Searches for, provides information on, and answers questions about courses.
- **[Course Search Agent Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_search_agentforce_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Course Search Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Set Up the Course Search Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_setup_course_search_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Course Search Agent to answer questions and support both students and advisors. Create an Agentforce Service agent for users on your Experience Cloud site. Create an Agentforce Employee agent for Standard Users of Education Cloud, such as advisors. # Course Search and Registration Provide students with a simplified way to find and enroll in courses. Students search for courses and view details of course sections on a search results page. Students with the right permissions can add courses from the search results directly to a cart. They can review course availability and their own eligibility, and register for courses from the cart. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Course Search is available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Course Registration is available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
From the course schedule search page (1), a student can add sections to the cart. In the cart, the student can view details of each added section, including section information, meeting times, instructor name, and the current enrollment number (2). The student can also remove selections from the cart. ![The Course Search and Registration page, showing a list of available courses and a selection of sections added to the cart.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/course_search_and_registration.png) During the registration process, Education Cloud verifies whether the sections added to the cart are available, whether there are scheduling conflicts, and whether the student is eligible for each course. When their registration window opens, the student can submit their final selections for registration from the cart directly. The student can see details of their registered sections in their academic records on the student portal. They can unenroll from a course section by removing it from their schedule, and easily manage and track their course enrollment. After the student completes their registration, Education Cloud creates an enrollment record that's automatically updated whenever the student updates their enrollment details, making sure that enrollment data is accurate, up-to-date, and without duplicates. ## Course Registration Considerations - Course Registration automatically blocks students who have active holds from registering for courses. To make sure that Course Registration finds holds with the right restrictions, see [Create Records for Restrictions in Prepare the Data for Holds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). - If there are holds on a student, or if a student is missing a prerequisite or corequisite for a course, Education Cloud keeps the affected course sections in the cart but prevents the student from enrolling in them. - Your custom validation rules, record-triggered flows, or Apex rules on course offerings can prevent students from enrolling in courses. The error messages for the enrollment errors caused by these rules sometimes don’t specify the reasons for the error. - Course Registration automatically checks for scheduling conflicts in the registration cart. A student receives alerts if there are time conflicts among their selected sections and waitlists in the cart, enrolled sections, and waitlists on their schedule. Automatic time conflict warnings don’t prevent the student from registering for overlapping sections. - If you turn on time conflict enforcement, Course Registration blocks registration for overlapping sections. Time conflict enforcement is optional and reversible. See [Enforce Time Conflict Validation for Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enforce_time_conflicts_for_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prevent students from registering for overlapping course sections by turning on time conflict enforcement."). SEE ALSO - [Set Up Course Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make upcoming and past courses and section details easily searchable on your Experience Cloud site, configure Course Search.") - [Set Up Course Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To streamline students' course registration on your Experience Cloud site, turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign the appropriate permission sets.") # Course Waitlists Create waitlists to help students register for fully enrolled courses without constantly monitoring course availability. Add waitlists to popular courses. Configure and manage students’ enrollment priority and timing, and use prebuilt flows to send enrollment offers to students on a waitlist. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
Students can join a waitlist in the Course Search and Registration portal if they meet eligibility criteria. A student can monitor the waitlist status and their own position on each waitlist. They receive a notification when a seat becomes available. They can accept an enrollment offer, decline it, or remove themselves from a waitlist. - **[Prerequisites for Course Waitlist Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prereqs_for_course_waitlist_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To offer waitlists for course sections in the Course Search and Registration portal, set up Course Search and Registration. - **[Create a Waitlist for a Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_course_waitlist.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create a waitlist for a course offering, assign a waitlist status and set a waitlist capacity. - **[Configure Course Waitlists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_course_waitlists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set student enrollment priority and timing, and add prebuilt flows to manage seat availability and enrollment notifications. - **[Manual Course Waitlist Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manual_course_waitlist_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A registrar can manually update the waitlist status of a course offering and add or remove students from a waitlist. Understand how manual actions affect the status of a waitlist and a student's position on it. # Create a Batch First, you need to define the configuration that will be used on only a selected set of records. To illustrate an example, we will create a batch for the upcoming event (that we mentioned earlier). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You only need to complete this configuration task if your org uses the Lightning Experience user interface. To create a new batch in NPSP: 1. Click the App Launcher (![Lightning app launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **NPSP Data Import Batches**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Fill in the required fields and any configuration options you want to apply specifically to this batch. When you select this batch in the NPSP Data Importer, the configuration options are updated to show the values you select here. ![Creating a NPSP Data Import Batch](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_data_import_batch_callouts.png) - **Batch Name**—(1) The name must be unique in your org. Be sure to use a descriptive name, since you will be searching for and selecting it when you perform your data import. (Tip: If you're using a scheduled job, you may want to name your batches "Company name - date" so that it's easier to find the right batch.) - **Batch Description**—(2) An optional description of the batch. - **Batch Process Size**—(3) The number of NPSP Data Import records you want Salesforce to process in each batch. The default is 50 records. - **Process Using Scheduled Job**—(4) When checked, the batch will be processed each day based on the schedule outlined for the scheduled job. See [Schedule a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_schedule_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Now that you'll be regularly uploading files, you don't want to worry about manually processing them. This is really useful for cases like the upcoming event signup example, where you have signups coming in at different times, and you want to regularly upload the new signups.") for more details. - **Contact Matching Rule**—(5) Specifies how to match Contacts in records against existing Contacts. The rules specify which set of Contact fields to use to find matches. For example: First Name, Last Name, and Email or First Name, Last Name, and Phone. (Keep in mind that the phone number format has to be an exact match. For example, if all of the phone numbers in your database are formatted as 123-345-4567, then you must use that format, not 123.345.4567 or 1233454567.) NPSP Data Import - **Contact Custom Unique ID**—(6) This field can be any custom text or numeric field that uniquely identifies a Contact, and is used for matching Contacts in addition to the method specified in Contact Matching Rule. This option is useful if your external data source has a unique identifier for each Contact record. For example, you could add a custom field on Contact, such as MyOldID, and matching fields for Contacts in the NPSP Data Import object (Contact1\_MyOldID, Contact2\_MyOldID). - **Account Custom Unique ID**—(7) This field can be any custom text or numeric field that uniquely identifies an Account, and is used for matching Accounts in addition to matching by Account Name. This option is useful if your external data source had a unique identifier for each Account record. For example, you could add a custom field on Account, such as MyOldID, and matching fields for Accounts in the NPSP Data Import object (Account1\_MyOldID, Account2\_MyOldID). - **Donation Matching Rule**—(8) Specifies the set of Donation fields to use for matching against existing Opportunities and/or Payments. If no fields are selected, the Donation Date and Donation Amount fields are used. The Donation fields specified must map to either Opportunity fields or Payment fields (with the exception of Donation Amount, which maps to both Opportunity.Amount and Payment.Payment Amount, and Donation Date which maps to Opportunity.CloseDate and Payment.Scheduled Date). - **Donation Matching Behavior**—(9) Defines how the Data Importer should handle matching Opportunities and Payments. Must be one of the following values: - Do Not Match—No matching is attempted; new records are created. - No Match—Only import a record if it doesn't match an existing record. - Single Match—Only import a record if it matches a single existing record. - Single Match or Create—Import a record if it matches a single existing record; create a new record if no single match found. - Best Match—Only import a record when it matches at least one existing record, and update the best matched record. - Best Match or Create—Import a record if it matches an existing record; create a new record if no match found. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you choose No Match, Single Match, or Best Match and the Data Importer can't match against an existing Opportunity or Payment, the status of the Data Import will show "Failed." However, any associated Account or Contact from the Data Import will still be created. You can evaluate the Opportunity or Payment that failed and rerun the Data Importer. - **Number of Days from Donation Date**—(10) Specifies the number of days to consider (from the Donation date) when looking for a matching Opportunity or Payment. The Data Importer will use the matching Opportunity or Payment that falls within the number of days specified AND is closest to the Donation Date. - **Calculate Donation Rollups with Batch**—(11) When checked, NPSP calculates donor statistics when donations are processed as part of an NPSP Data Import Batch. If unchecked (the default), donor statistics are only calculated during the default nightly Scheduled Job. Note that selecting this checkbox may slow down processing of this batch. - **Donation Matching Implementing Class**—(12) The full developer name of an Apex class that implements the BDI\_IMatchDonations interface, in case you are working with a developer who would like to alter this behavior. When left empty, the NPSP default implementation is used. - **Post Process Implementing Class**—(13) The full developer name of an Apex class that implements the BDI\_IPostProcess interface, in case you are working with a developer who would like to alter this behavior. For more information, see [Additional Automation Using Custom Apex Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automation_apex_code.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about additional automation."). 5. Click **Save**. ![NPSP Data Import Batch record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/data_import_batch_record.png) Next step: [Create NPSP Data Import Records Connected to a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_batch_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a batch, upload your data import file to create the data import records for the batch."). # Create a Benefits Home Page for Mentors Create and setup a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors can see the benefits for which they can register as a provider.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permission Needed  
To create and configure a page for your mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site that you use for your mentor portal, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Standard Page**, choose **Flexible Layout**, and then click **Next**. 5. In Name, enter Benefit Home Screen. 6. In URL, enter benefit-home-screen. 7. In API Name, enter Benefit\_Home\_Screen. 8. Click **Create**. 9. On the Benefit Home Screen page, click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Flexcard component to the Content area. 10. From Flexcard Name, select **MentoringBenefitHome**. 11. Click the **Navigation Menu**, and then select **Edit Default Navigation**. 12. Click **Add Menu Item**, and then enter these values. 1. In Name, enter Benefits. 2. From Type, select **Site Page**. 3. From Page, select **Benefit Home Screen**. 13. Click **Save Menu** and then click **Publish**. 14. Assign your mentor profile as the audience for this page. See [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5). # Create a Budget and a Budget Allocation Create a Budget to define the amount you expect to disburse for a specific period. Monitor funds that are committed to or disbursed from the Budget by using Budget Allocations. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Budgets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and any additional details about your budget. 4. Save your changes. 5. In the Budget Allocations related list, click **New**. 6. Enter a name and any additional details about your budget allocation. 7. Save your changes. # Create a Budget and a Budget Allocation Use budgets and budget allocations to track planned and awarded funds for a particular time period. - **[Create a Budget and a Budget Allocation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_budget_budg_allo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Budget to define the amount you expect to disburse for a specific period. Monitor funds that are committed to or disbursed from the Budget by using Budget Allocations. # Create a Campaign The Campaign is the top level of your volunteer structure. You can either create a Campaign manually or use the wizard. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create Volunteer Campaigns](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6ZQJT7XFdI0) - **[Create a Campaign Using the Volunteers Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteers Wizard speeds up creation of your Campaign, Job, and Shift structure in a couple of ways. When you create the Campaign, you can have the wizard automatically create some sample Jobs and Shifts that you can then tailor. Or, you can clone a Campaign. Cloning lets you base the new Campaign's Jobs, Shifts, and Volunteer Hours on an existing Campaign. - **[Create a Campaign Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can manually create a volunteer Campaign if you want to start from scratch. ## Create a Campaign Using the Volunteers Wizard The Volunteers Wizard speeds up creation of your Campaign, Job, and Shift structure in a couple of ways. When you create the Campaign, you can have the wizard automatically create some sample Jobs and Shifts that you can then tailor. Or, you can clone a Campaign. Cloning lets you base the new Campaign's Jobs, Shifts, and Volunteer Hours on an existing Campaign. 1. In Volunteers for Salesforce, click the Volunteers Wizard tab. 2. Enter a name for the Campaign, typically the event name. For example, Spring Fling Gala. 3. If this Campaign is related to another Campaign, select the related Campaign from the Parent Campaign ID drop-down menu. 4. Select the **Active** option. This ensures that the Campaign displays on the Shift Calendar on your website. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note We will go over how to set up website integration later. 5. Select the type of Campaign. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Your Admin may have set up custom Campaign Types for you to use. Use the Campaign Type that best fits your needs. 6. Choose a status. For example, if your event is a few months away, but you're starting to plan now, you would use the Planned status. 7. Enter the start and end dates for your event. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Although this is a one-time event, you may want to set the start date to when you will start planning for the event. The end date will typically be the date of the event itself. 8. From the Volunteer Website Time Zone drop-down, select the time zone where the event is occurring. ![Volunteers Wizard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_wizard.png) At this point you can choose to clone an existing Campaign. Cloning is useful if you plan the same event every year with the same Jobs and Shifts. You can choose instead to have the wizard simply create a number of sample jobs and shifts, which you can then edit. 9. To clone a Campaign: 1. Select the existing Campaign from the Clone Campaign drop-down menu. Additional fields appear. 2. Enter the New First Shift Date for your new Campaign. All subsequent Shifts will be created based on this date. 3. To copy Volunteer Hours from the existing Campaign to your new Campaign, select Copy Job and Shift Volunteers. 4. If you select Copy Job and Shift Volunteers, choose the Status the Volunteer Hours should be copied over with. If you don't choose a value, the Hours are copied with their existing Status values. ![Cloning an existing campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_wizard_clone.png) 10. Optionally, choose the number of sample Jobs and Shifts you want to create. ![Volunteer jobs, shifts, and hours on the Volunteer Wizard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_wizard_number_jobs.png) 11. Click **Save**. The detail page for the Campaign you created appears. If you chose to clone an existing Campaign, you see the Jobs and Shifts copied from that Campaign on the Related tab. If you chose to create sample Jobs or Shifts, they are listed as Sample Job1, Sample Job2, and so on (as shown below). ![Campaign with sample jobs](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_wizard_sample_jobs.png) ## Create a Campaign Manually You can manually create a volunteer Campaign if you want to start from scratch. 1. In Volunteers for Salesforce, click the Campaigns tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Volunteer Campaign**. ![Creating a new volunteer campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/create_campaign.png) 4. Click **Next**. 5. Enter your volunteer Campaign name. We recommend using the name of your event. 6. Select the **Active** option. This ensures that the Campaign displays on the Shift Calendar on your website. To view an example of a Shift Calendar on the website, see [Engage Volunteers on your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This section assumes your Administrator integrated Volunteers for Salesforce with your website. And we sure hope they did! Using Volunteers for Salesforce with your website provides the opportunity for volunteers to visit your website and see a calendar of the Job and Shift offerings you entered in Volunteers for Salesforce. Not only can they see the calendar or a list of Job offerings, but they can sign up right from the page and that information will be saved in Volunteers for Salesforce."). 7. Select the type of Campaign. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Your Admin may have set up custom Campaign Types for you to use. Use the Campaign Type that best fits your needs. 8. Choose a status. For example, if your event is a few months away, but you're starting to plan now, you would use the Planned status. 9. Enter the start and end dates for your event. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Although this is a one-time event, you may want to set the start date to when you will start planning for the event. The end date will typically be the date of the event itself. 10. From the Volunteer Website Time Zone drop-down, select the time zone where the event is occurring. ![New volunteer campaign form](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_volunteer_campaign.png) 11. Click **Save**. The Campaign Detail page appears. Now that you have the top level of your structure, it's time to move on to [creating Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Jobs represent the next level down in your structure. Before you start creating Jobs, it's a good idea to jot down exactly what Jobs and Shifts you need to fill.") for your Campaign. # Create a Campaign The Campaign is the top level of your recurring event structure. 1. In Volunteers for Salesforce, click the Campaigns tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Volunteer Campaign**. ![Create a new volunteer campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/create_campaign.png) 4. Click **Next**. 5. Enter your volunteer Campaign name. We recommend using the name of the agency funding your series of events. 6. Select the Active option. This ensures that the Campaign displays on the Shift Calendar on your website. 7. Select the type of event. 8. Choose a status. 9. Optionally, enter the start and end dates for the series of events. You can leave these fields blank if this is an ongoing Campaign. 10. From the Volunteer Website Time Zone drop-down, select the time zone where the events are occurring. Remember that you can also set the time zone at the Job level, if you have Jobs in different time zones. ![Create recurring campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_campaign_recurring.png) 11. Click **Save**. Now that you've got your Campaign set up, you can start [creating Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_ongoing_job.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you have Jobs with multiple Shifts occurring in the future, you need an easy way to automate the creation of those Shifts. (It would be tedious to manually enter each one!) Volunteers for Salesforce' Job Recurrence Schedules do the work for you."). # Create a Care Plan Create a care plan to help the learner overcome challenges and achieve their learning objectives.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create a care plan: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. On the advisor console, click the dropdown navigation menu, and select **Care Plans**. 3. Click **New**, and then enter a name and description for the care plan. 4. Under Case, find and select the learner’s case to associate it with the care plan. 5. Under Status, select **Draft**. 6. Under Participant, find and select the learner’s person account. 7. Provide any other relevant details and save your changes. You can now edit the new care plan to add goal definitions and benefits. When you’re ready, set the care plan status to active. # Create a Care Plan Template Create a care plan template with frequently used benefits and goals that can be reused to create care plans.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create a care plan template: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. On the advisor console, click the dropdown navigation menu, and select **Care Plan Template**. 3. Click **New**, and then enter a name and description for the care plan template. 4. Under Status, select **Draft**, and then save your changes. In the Related list view of the new care plan template, add goal definitions and benefits, and assign the template to existing care plans. When you’re ready, set the care plan template status to active. To learn more, see [Create a Care Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_care_plans_create_template.htm&language=en_US). # Create a Career and Interest Assessment Library Advisors can create a library in Education Cloud to explore career and interest assessments. These assessments help students discover themselves, explore goals, and get personalized recommendations. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create assessments:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

OmniStudio Admin permission set

AND

OmniStudio Designer

AND

OmniStudio Runtime
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) 1. Create assessment questions to understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them. See [Create an Intake Assessment Question](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_intake_assessment_question.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create an Omniscript assessment form for career and interest assessments. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **Select Questions**. 3. Select **Career And Life Goals** as the Discovery Framework usage type. 4. On the Create Form page, under OmniScript Details, enter a name. 5. Select the language. 6. Enter a type and subtype. The type and subtype are used to specify the criteria when you create sharing rules for Omniprocess. 7. Under New Omniscript, click the **Edit step** icon and enter a name for the step. Add more steps if necessary. 8. To find questions, use the search field and filters, and then drag selected questions to the appropriate step. 3. Build the Omniscript: 1. Click **Build OmniScript**. 2. On the Build tab, drag **Navigate Action** to the list of Omniscript elements. 3. Configure the navigate action for the Assessment object. See [Open Other Pages from Omniscripts with the Navigate Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_navigate_action_12710.htm&language=en_US). 4. Click **Activate Version** and then click **Done**. 4. Create a sharing rule to enable access to the Omni Process: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Sharing Settings** under Security. 2. In the Sharing Rules related list for Omni Process, click **New**. 3. Enter a label and name for the rule. 4. Under Select your rule type, select **Based on criteria**. 5. Under Select which records to be shared, add the criteria as shown: | Field | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | | Designer Customization Type | equals | Discovery Framework | | Type | equals | YourOmniscriptType | | Sub Type | equals | YourOmniscriptSubTypeUnder | 6. Select the users to share with, select **Public Groups of All Customer Portal Users**. 7. Under Select the level of access for the users, select **Read Only**. 8. Save your changes. 5. Provide access to the required apex class to run Omniscripts: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter `Profiles`, and then select **Profiles** under Users. 2. From the list of profiles, click **Customer Community Plus User**. 3. Under Enabled Apex Class Access, click **Edit**. 4. Under Available Apex Class, select **BusinessProcessDisplayController** and click **Add**. 5. Save your changes. # Create a Case Plan Case Plans are roadmaps developed by case managers and their clients to help clients achieve their goals. Case Plans include: - Goals: An outcome that the client is working toward. For example, develop financial literacy skills. - Action Item: Specific tasks for a client to complete while working toward a goal. For example, pass a basic financial literacy course or open a bank account. Create a Case Plan from a Contact record, or from another object if your admin has added[Customize New Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object."). If you create a Case Plan from a Contact, Intake, or Program Engagement, the Contact automatically populates; for all other objects, just fill in the Contact. If your Contact has a Program Engagement, you can select a Program when you create a Case Plan. Similarly, if the Program that you select has affiliated Goals and Action Items, you can select those too. If not, add Goals and Action Items after you create your Case Plan. And to provide some guidance about which Goals and Action Items to choose when creating a Case Plan, Programs and Goal Templates may also include Case Plan Instructions. - **[Create a Case Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a case plan from a Contact, or other objects where your admin has added the New Case Plan button. - **[Add Goals and Action Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add custom goals and action items to goal templates. - **[Delete Goals and Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can delete a Goal from a Case Plan, but doing so also deletes related Action items. You can't delete Goals or Action Items that are marked as Required. ## Create a Case Plan Create a case plan from a Contact, or other objects where your admin has added the New Case Plan button. 1. Navigate to a Contact or other object record. 2. Click **New Case Plan**. If you're on a Contact, click the **Case Plans** tab first. 3. Enter a Case Plan Name and optional Description. If you're creating a Case Plan from a Contact, Intake, or Program Engagement, the Contact auto-populates; from any other object, select a Contact. Click **Next**. 4. Select a Program, then click **Next**. The Contact needs to have a Program Engagement for Program selections to appear. 5. If Goals are associated with the Program you selected, optionally select them. You may see instructions that help you choose which Goals to select, and some Goals may be required based on the Program you selected. You can also add Goals later. Click **Next**. 6. If Action Items are associated with the Goal you selected, optionally select them. You may see instructions that help you choose which Action Items to select, and some Action Items may be required based on the Goal(s) you selected. You can also add Action Items later. Click **Next**. 7. Click **Save**. To add Goals and Action Items to your Case Plan, click **+New Goal** or **+Add Action Items**. For details, see [Create a Case Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Case Plans are roadmaps developed by case managers and their clients to help clients achieve their goals."). ## Add Goals and Action Items Add custom goals and action items to goal templates. 1. Navigate to the Case Plan. 2. Click **+New Goal**. 3. Select a Goal Template. You'll only see Goal Templates for the Programs the client is enrolled in. Or click **+Add Custom Goal** and enter the Goal Name. 4. Set the Status for the Goal. 5. Click **+Add Action Item**. 6. Select an Action Item. You'll only see Action Item Templates that are part of the related Goal. Or click **+Add Custom Action Item** and enter the Action Item Name. 7. Set the Due Date, Status, and who the Action Item is assigned to. 8. Optionally, add more Action Items. 9. Click **Save**. ## Delete Goals and Case Plans You can delete a Goal from a Case Plan, but doing so also deletes related Action items. You can't delete Goals or Action Items that are marked as Required. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't delete Goals or Action Items that are marked as Required. You can also delete Case Plans from the Case Plan related list on a Contact. Keep in mind that you'll be deleting all Case Plan data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note You may opt to keep completed or abandoned Case Plans as a record of your work with clients. Your organization's best practices should determine whether or not to delete Case Plans. # Create a Delegate Access Data Set Map the objects that students share with proxies, and define how they resolve to the student. Create separate datasets if proxies require access to different categories of information, such as billing statements or course schedules. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a delegate access data set:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

View Setup and Configuration permission set

AND

Manage Delegated Access and Related Objects permission set
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Check out this feature in Salesforce Go! Find a guided setup experience, explore more content, discover related features, and monitor feature usage. See [Discover and Set Up Features With Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_salesforce_go.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To create a delegate access data set: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud, and then select **Delegated Access Management**. 2. Under Delegate Access Data Sets, click **New**. 3. Enter the data set name and description. For example, enter Student academic data as the name and Data for student academic performance as the description. 4. Select **Active**. You can’t modify an active data set. 5. Under Data Set Object Details, click **Add Destination Object**. 6. Select a destination object. For example, **Academic Term Enrollment**. 7. Select the destination path to the student's contact, account, or user. 8. Select the field type and access level. For example, select **Contact** as the destination field type and **Read** as the access level. 9. Save your changes. # Create a Delegate Access Definition Combine a delegated access dataset and a permission set into an access option. Students see these definitions on the portal when delegating access to proxies. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a delegate access definition:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

View Setup and Configuration permission set
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Check out this feature in Salesforce Go! Find a guided setup experience, explore more content, discover related features, and monitor feature usage. See [Discover and Set Up Features With Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_salesforce_go.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To create delegate access definition: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud, and then select **Delegated Access Management**. 2. Under Delegate Access Definitions, click **New**. 3. Enter the definition name and description. For example, enter Student academic data as the name and Grants proxy access to student academic and enrollment data as the description. 4. Select a delegate access data set data bundle and its related permission set. For example, select **Student academic data** as the delegate access data set and **Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access** as the permission set. 5. Select **Active** and **Show On Portal**. You can’t modify an active delegate access definition. 6. Save your changes. 7. If you no longer need the definition, from the definition’s actions menu, select **Archive**. # Create a Donor Brief in Education Enhance your donor engagement with automatically generated donor briefs, designed to streamline the creation of comprehensive donor profiles. Donor briefs support major gift officers by integrating with existing profiles and customizable templates, enabling generation of tailored briefs directly from donor records. Save time and improve efficiency in preparing for critical meetings by making sure you have all the necessary information at your fingertips. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a donor brief:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

DocGen User permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To set up donor briefs on the donor profile, see [Set Up Donor Briefs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_donor_briefs.htm&language=en_US). 1. From the donor profile on the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, click **Create Donor Brief**. 2. Select the donor brief template. 3. Click **Create**. 4. On the donor profile, click the **Notes and Files** tab. 5. Under Notes & Attachments, download and share the donor brief file. # Create a Donor Brief in Nonprofit Enhance your donor engagement with automatically generated donor briefs, designed to streamline the creation of comprehensive donor profiles. Donor briefs support major gift officers by integrating with existing profiles and customizable templates, enabling generation of tailored briefs directly from donor records. Save time and improve efficiency in preparing for critical meetings by making sure you have all the necessary information at your fingertips. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a donor brief:

FundraisingAccess permission set

AND

DocGen User permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To set up donor briefs on the donor profile, see [Set Up Donor Briefs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_donor_briefs.htm&language=en_US). 1. From the donor profile on the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, click **Create Donor Brief**. 2. Select the donor brief template. 3. Click **Create**. 4. On the donor profile, click the **Notes and Files** tab. 5. Under Notes & Attachments, download and share the donor brief file. # Create a Donor Engagement Agent Create an Agentforce agent to help gift officers record and plan their engagements with major donors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with the Agentforce for Nonprofit Add-on or Agentforce 1 Edition where Fundraising is enabled.
User Permissions Needed

To set up an AI agent for Agentforce Eduction

Eduction Cloud Full Access

To use the Donor Engagement Agent in Fundraising with Agentforce Education

Agentforce For Fundraising Access permission set

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To edit the prompt template Prompt Template Manager permission set
To use the prompt template Prompt Template User permission set
Before you begin, complete these tasks. - Make sure that Fundraising is enabled in your org. - Turn on and set up Agentforce in your org. - For Nonprofit Cloud, see [Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&language=en_US&type=5). - For Education Cloud, see [Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US&type=5). - Turn on and configure Interaction Summaries. The Donor Engagement Agent includes these subagents: - Donor Meeting Notes — the agent uses this subagent to create a record of their donor meetings. - Donor Task Management — the agent uses this subagent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors. 1. Turn on the Donor Engagement template. 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Agentforce Studio**. 2. From the left column, select **Prompt Templates**. Prompt Builder opens in a new window. 3. In the Prompt Templates table, search for Prepare, and select **Prepare Donor Meeting Notes**. The prompt template controls how the agent formats raw meeting notes into structured interaction summaries. You can update the instructions, grounding data, and note template. 4. Customize the template as needed, then select **Save as a New Version** to save your changes. 5. Activate the version of the template you prefer. 2. Create an agent. 1. Return to Agentforce Studio and click **New Agent**. The Agentforce Builder template page opens. 2. Select the **Donor Engagement** template. 3. Give your agent a name and click **Let’s Go**. The agent summary opens where you can become familiar with the agent’s subagents and actions. 3. Click **Commit Version** to lock the agent and prepare it for activation. After an agent version is committed, you can’t edit it. To make changes after committing the agent, create a new version. 4. Click **Activate**. 5. Add the Donor Engagement agent to a permission set or profile so that assigned donor gift officers can use the agent. A permission set named “Agentforce Agent \[Your Agent Name\] Permissions” is created automatically. This permission set is used to customize permissions and assign agent access. SEE ALSO: - [Donor Engagement Agent in Agentforce for Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence.") - [Use the Donor Meeting Notes Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_meeting_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create a record of their donor meetings.") - [Use the Donor Task Management Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_task_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors.") # Create a Donor Engagement Agent Create an Agentforce agent to help gift officers record and plan their engagements with major donors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with the Agentforce for Nonprofit Add-on or Agentforce 1 Edition where Fundraising is enabled.
User Permissions Needed

To set up an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Agentforce Default Admin permission set

AND

Agentforce for Fundraising Access permission set

To use the Donor Engagement Agent in Fundraising with Nonprofit:

Fundraising_User or Fundraising_Admin permission set group

AND

Agentforce For Fundraising Access permission set
To edit the prompt template Prompt Template Manager permission set
To use the prompt template Prompt Template User permission set
Before you begin, complete these tasks. - Make sure that Fundraising is enabled in your org. - Turn on and set up Agentforce in your org. - For Nonprofit Cloud, see [Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&language=en_US&type=5). - For Education Cloud, see [Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US&type=5). - Turn on and configure Interaction Summaries. The Donor Engagement Agent includes these subagents: - Donor Meeting Notes — the agent uses this subagent to create a record of their donor meetings. - Donor Task Management — the agent uses this subagent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors. 1. Turn on the Donor Engagement template. 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Agentforce Studio**. 2. From the left column, select **Prompt Templates**. Prompt Builder opens in a new window. 3. In the Prompt Templates table, search for Prepare, and select **Prepare Donor Meeting Notes**. The prompt template controls how the agent formats raw meeting notes into structured interaction summaries. You can update the instructions, grounding data, and note template. 4. Customize the template as needed, then select **Save as a New Version** to save your changes. 5. Activate the version of the template you prefer. 2. Create an agent. 1. Return to Agentforce Studio and click **New Agent**. The Agentforce Builder template page opens. 2. Select the **Donor Engagement** template. 3. Give your agent a name and click **Let’s Go**. The agent summary opens where you can become familiar with the agent’s subagents and actions. 3. Click **Commit Version** to lock the agent and prepare it for activation. After an agent version is committed, you can’t edit it. To make changes after committing the agent, create a new version. 4. Click **Activate**. 5. Add the Donor Engagement agent to a permission set or profile so that assigned donor gift officers can use the agent. A permission set named “Agentforce Agent \[Your Agent Name\] Permissions” is created automatically. This permission set is used to customize permissions and assign agent access. SEE ALSO: - [Donor Engagement Agent in Agentforce for Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence.") - [Use the Donor Meeting Notes Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_meeting_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create a record of their donor meetings.") - [Use the Donor Task Management Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_task_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors.") # Create a Flow to Delete Person Examination Records Automatically delete child records when you delete a parent Person Examination record.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Education Cloud represents standardized tests data that an applicant submits as records on the Person Examination object. Some standardized tests have a two-deep hierarchy of records, including a parent Person Examination record and child Person Examination records. For example, the ACT has a composite score and individual scores for areas such as Science and Math. We recommend that you create a flow that deletes the child records when you delete a parent Person Examination record. ![Diagram showing the flow to delete person examination records.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_delete_person_exam_flow.png) ## Flow Element Details This table describes what each element does in the flow. | Flow Element | What Does It Do? | | --- | --- | | Start | Deletion of a person examination record triggers the flow. | | Get Child Person Examination Records | Finds the child person examination records where the ParentPersonExaminationId lookup field is equal to the Id of the deleted person examination record. | | Child Records Count | Assigns the count of the query result from the previous step to a variable called ChildRecordSize. This variable determines whether to run the delete step. | | Check Record Count | If the value in ChildRecordSize is zero, the default outcome is followed, and the flow ends. If the value is greater than zero, the Delete Child Person Examination Records element runs next. | | Delete Child Person Examination Records | Deletes the person examination records in the collection queried by the Get Child Person Examination Records element. Then the flow ends. | See Also: - [Flow Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow.htm&type=5) # Create a Fundseeker Portal Set up a portal for fundseekers, configure its pages to suit your organization’s needs, and then publish it to make it available to everyone. - **[OFM Create the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create a fundseeker portal by using Experience Cloud. - **[Enable Public Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_enable_public_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure which users can access the fundseeker portal. - **[Configure the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_configure_homepage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a home page for your fundseeker portal to welcome site visitors. - **[Configure the Registration and Login Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_login_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the registration and login pages of your fundseeker portal. - **[OFM Publish the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_publish_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When your fundseeker portal is ready, publish it to make it publicly available. # Create a Gift Batch in Education Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift batch:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Batches**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Screen Template Name, keep the default selection or, if you have custom templates, select the appropriate template. 4. To perform the validation check during gift batch processing, specify values in Estimated Gift Count and Estimated Batch Value, and then select **Total Gift Value Match**. 5. Save your changes. After you create a gift batch, add gift entries to the gift batch to process them all at once. SEE ALSO - [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising.") - [Gift Entry Grid Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately.") - [Process a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_process_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors.") # Create a Gift Batch in Nonprofit Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift batch:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Batches**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Screen Template Name, keep the default selection or, if you have custom templates, select the appropriate template. 4. To perform the validation check during gift batch processing, specify values in Estimated Gift Count and Estimated Batch Value, and then select **Total Gift Value Match**. 5. Save your changes. After you create a gift batch, add gift entries to the gift batch to process them all at once. SEE ALSO - [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising.") - [Gift Entry Grid Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately.") - [Process a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_process_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors.") # Create a Gift Entry in Education There are two methods of performing gift entry. The method that comes built in Fundraising is the Gift Entry window. In this window, you can quickly and easily create a gift with a gift transaction or a gift commitment. The gift can also include soft credits or multiple designations. The second method is to use the Gift Entry Grid. This method enables the lightning-fast entry of gifts in a table by keying across the cells to enter the gift information. You can enter all aspects of the gift in the grid, including the recurring gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift entry:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin, make sure that: - An active org-wide [Gift Default designation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") record exists. - Person accounts are enabled in your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts weren’t built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts aren’t already enabled in your org, don't turn them on. After you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn off the feature. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - Any gift designations, campaign, and outreach source code records that you want to relate to a gift entry are created. - If you're entering new gift commitments in the Gift Entry window, make sure that you have Create access to the Contact Profile object. You need this access because if you add a new recurring gift, Fundraising updates the RecurringDonorType on the donor's Contact Profile. If there isn't a contact profile for the donor, Fundraising creates one. - To use custom fields in gift entry, don't mark them as required in the field properties. - If you don’t see the Gift Entry Grid in Fundraising, ask your Salesforce admin to turn it on in Setup, under Gift Entry. - To create households for new person account donors during entry in the Gift Entry Grid, ask your Salesforce admin to turn on these features: in Setup, under Household Automation and Household Naming Settings: 1. In Setup, under Household Automation, turn on Automatic Household Creation. 2. In Setup, under Household Naming Settings, turn on Automatic Household Naming. 3. In Setup, under Household Naming Settings create an active [household naming template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_automatic_household_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time.") ## Create Gifts with the Gift Entry Grid Rapidly and accurately create a single gift entry, or multiple gifts for a batch, by using the tabular entry process of Gift Entry Grid. You can add up to 200 rows for gifts and their related records. Gift Entry Grid supports custom fields that are mapped to the Gift Transaction, Account, Gift Commitment, and Gift Commitment Schedule objects. Custom fields mapped to Gift Transaction appear as columns in the grid. Custom fields that are mapped to the Account object appear inside the Add or Edit Donor Details window. Custom fields that are mapped to Gift Commitment or Gift Commitment Schedule appear in the Gift Commitment window. To open the Gift Commitment window from the Gift Entry Grid, click ![Expand All icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_expand_all.png) to the right of the Gift Commitment field. To avoid cache errors, always use the Gift Entry Grid in the console view. 1. From the Fundraising Operations app, go to a gift batch, the Gift Entries list, or an Account page, and click **New Gift Entry**. The Gift Entry Grid opens. If this entry is a single gift entry, there's a single row. If this entry is a batch gift entry with a specific number of gifts, then you see that number of empty rows. If there is no expected number of gifts for the batch, ten rows are shown by default, and more rows can be added. 2. In the Donor field, select a donor, create a donor, or edit the donor details. - To select an existing donor, search accounts to find the donor of the gift. - To create a donor, click ![Expand All icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_expand_all.png) to open the Add or Edit Donor Details window to enter the new donor details. - To change or add information to an existing, selected donor, click ![Expand All icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_expand_all.png) to open the Add or Edit Donor Details window to make the update. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you add a person account as a donor, and **Automatic Household Naming** is on, select **Auto Create Household** in the Add or Edit Donor Details window. If the donor isn't in a household, Fundraising creates one and adds the donor to it when you process the gift. If you don’t see the Auto Create Household option in the grid, ask your Admin to add it to your existing gift entry templates. For new templates, clone the default template to get the option. 3. Fill out the remaining fields in the grid to complete the gift entry. You can set the gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits for the gifts. Gift transactions are matched in the Gift Commitment grid cell. Gifts can be backdated to the date on the check or the date the check was received. You can add up to 50 designations to each gift transaction. Gift Entry can fetch up to five distinct gift commitments per donor and up to 10 gift transactions per gift received date. 4. To edit any part of the gift, next to the field that needs a change, click ![Edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png). 5. To add a row to the gift batch, from the dropdown list at the end of any of the rows in the batch, select **Add Row**. 6. To remove an entry from the gift batch, from the dropdown list at the end of the row you want to remove, click **Remove Row**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t remove rows for gift entry records that are already created. 7. Save and process the gifts. - To process a single gift, click **Process Gift** or **Process & New** to process the single gift and then open the grid to create a new gift entry. - To save a gift batch that’s in progress without closing it, click **Save**. - To save and close the batch of gift entries, click **Save & Close**. - To test your batch for errors before processing it, on the gift batch page, click **Batch Dry Run**. - To process a batch of gifts, on the gift batch page, click **Process Batch**. If you encounter an error during batch processing, the error is posted to the Gift Processing Result field on the Gift Entries table of the gift batch. The rest of the batch is processed, except for the entry with the error. To fix the gift entry error in the grid, click **New Gift Entry** and edit the rows with errors. ## Create Gifts in the Gift Entry Window Create a standalone gift, create a gift commitment with the first gift transaction, or create an entry for a batch that uses the default gift batch template. The gift can include soft credits or multiple designations. Save time by adding it all in this single, simple Gift Entry window. The Gift Entry window is active by default. If the Gift Entry Grid is on, the grid replaces this window. 1. In the Fundraising Operations app, open the gift entry form. 1. For a single gift entry: - From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Entries**, and then click **New Gift Entry**. - On an Account Record Detail page, in the highlights panel, select **New Gift Entry** from the dropdown. 2. To add a gift to a gift batch, go to Gift Batches, create a batch or open an unprocessed gift batch, and then click **New Gift Entry**. 2. Select the gift type as **Individual** or **Organizational/Household**. 3. If the donor isn't prepopulated from the Account page, select or add a donor by name or donor ID. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For an Individual gift type, select a person account as a donor. For Organizational/Household, select a business account. 4. Select the date that you received the gift. You can backdate the transaction to the date on the check or the date it was received. 5. For a new gift commitment: 1. Select **New Recurring Gift**. 2. Enter the effective start date and expected end date for the commitment. 3. In Gift Transaction Period, select the gift commitment period. 4. In Gift Transaction Interval, select the gift commitment interval. 5. In Gift Transaction Day, select which date of the month the gift commitment schedule recurs. For example: A year-long commitment that's set to start today, end a year from today, with gift transactions made monthly (Gift Transaction Period), 1 every month (Gift Transaction Interval), on the 15th day of the month (Gift Transaction Day). 6. If the gift is fulfilling an existing, active, open gift commitment, select it in the table. For example, if the Installment Extension Day Count is 10 and the gift received date is March 11, then the date range is March 1 through 21. Commitment Information shows all unpaid gift transactions with a transaction due date that falls within the date range. The Matching Gift Commitments table lists active commitments with unpaid transactions that have a due date within a predefined window. That window is set according to the value of the Installment Extension Day Count setting. Gift Entry can fetch up to five distinct gift commitments per donor and up to 10 gift transactions per gift received date. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Installment Extension Day Count is a global setting found in Fundraising Settings in Setup. 7. If the gift is a response to a solicitation, enter the outreach source code. The campaign name is autopopulates after you enter the outreach source code. 8. Enter the amount of the gift. 9. Select the method of the gift payment. 10. Review the Designation Information section for any prepopulated gift designations, and update as required. You can add up to 50 designations to each gift transaction. 11. If you mapped custom fields for the gift, under Additional Fields, complete the custom fields. If no custom fields were mapped for gift entry, the Additional Fields section isn't shown. 12. In the Soft Credit Information section, list the details for any people, businesses, or household members who can get soft credits. 13. To use the values specified on this page as default values in the next gift entry in a gift batch, select **Set As Default**. 14. Save your changes. SEE ALSO - [Set Gift Batch Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_gift_batch_defaults.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To enter gift batches more quickly and with fewer errors, set gift batch default values to automatically set common values for gift batches.") - [Create a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs.") - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") # Create a Gift Entry in Nonprofit There are two methods of performing gift entry. The method that comes built in Fundraising is the Gift Entry window. In this window, you can quickly and easily create a gift with a gift transaction or a gift commitment. The gift can also include soft credits or multiple designations. The second method is to use the Gift Entry Grid. This method enables the lightning-fast entry of gifts in a table by keying across the cells to enter the gift information. You can enter all aspects of the gift in the grid, including the recurring gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift entry:

FundraisingAccess permission set
Before you begin, make sure that: - An active org-wide [Gift Default designation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") record exists. - Person accounts are enabled in your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts weren’t built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts aren’t already enabled in your org, don't turn them on. After you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn off the feature. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - Any gift designations, campaign, and outreach source code records that you want to relate to a gift entry are created. - If you're entering new gift commitments in the Gift Entry window, make sure that you have Create access to the Contact Profile object. You need this access because if you add a new recurring gift, Fundraising updates the RecurringDonorType on the donor's Contact Profile. If there isn't a contact profile for the donor, Fundraising creates one. - To use custom fields in gift entry, don't mark them as required in the field properties. - If you don’t see the Gift Entry Grid in Fundraising, ask your Salesforce admin to turn it on in Setup, under Gift Entry. - To create households for new person account donors during entry in the Gift Entry Grid, ask your Salesforce admin to turn on these features: in Setup, under Household Automation and Household Naming Settings: 1. In Setup, under Household Automation, turn on Automatic Household Creation. 2. In Setup, under Household Naming Settings, turn on Automatic Household Naming. 3. In Setup, under Household Naming Settings create an active [household naming template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_automatic_household_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time.") ## Create Gifts with the Gift Entry Grid Rapidly and accurately create a single gift entry, or multiple gifts for a batch, by using the tabular entry process of Gift Entry Grid. You can add up to 200 rows for gifts and their related records. Gift Entry Grid supports custom fields that are mapped to the Gift Transaction, Account, Gift Commitment, and Gift Commitment Schedule objects. Custom fields mapped to Gift Transaction appear as columns in the grid. Custom fields that are mapped to the Account object appear inside the Add or Edit Donor Details window. Custom fields that are mapped to Gift Commitment or Gift Commitment Schedule appear in the Gift Commitment window. To open the Gift Commitment window from the Gift Entry Grid, click ![Expand All icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_expand_all.png) to the right of the Gift Commitment field. To avoid cache errors, always use the Gift Entry Grid in the console view. 1. From the Fundraising Operations app, go to a gift batch, the Gift Entries list, or an Account page, and click **New Gift Entry**. The Gift Entry Grid opens. If this entry is a single gift entry, there's a single row. If this entry is a batch gift entry with a specific number of gifts, then you see that number of empty rows. If there is no expected number of gifts for the batch, ten rows are shown by default, and more rows can be added. 2. In the Donor field, select a donor, create a donor, or edit the donor details. - To select an existing donor, search accounts to find the donor of the gift. - To create a donor, click ![Expand All icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_expand_all.png) to open the Add or Edit Donor Details window to enter the new donor details. - To change or add information to an existing, selected donor, click ![Expand All icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_expand_all.png) to open the Add or Edit Donor Details window to make the update. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you add a person account as a donor, and **Automatic Household Naming** is on, select **Auto Create Household** in the Add or Edit Donor Details window. If the donor isn't in a household, Fundraising creates one and adds the donor to it when you process the gift. If you don’t see the Auto Create Household option in the grid, ask your Admin to add it to your existing gift entry templates. For new templates, clone the default template to get the option. 3. Fill out the remaining fields in the grid to complete the gift entry. You can set the gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits for the gifts. Gift transactions are matched in the Gift Commitment grid cell. Gifts can be backdated to the date on the check or the date the check was received. You can add up to 50 designations to each gift transaction. Gift Entry can fetch up to five distinct gift commitments per donor and up to 10 gift transactions per gift received date. 4. To edit any part of the gift, next to the field that needs a change, click ![Edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png). 5. To add a row to the gift batch, from the dropdown list at the end of any of the rows in the batch, select **Add Row**. 6. To remove an entry from the gift batch, from the dropdown list at the end of the row you want to remove, click **Remove Row**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note You can’t remove rows for gift entry records that are already created. 7. Save and process the gifts. - To process a single gift, click **Process Gift** or **Process & New** to process the single gift and then open the grid to create a new gift entry. - To save a gift batch that’s in progress without closing it, click **Save**. - To save and close the batch of gift entries, click **Save & Close**. - To test your batch for errors before processing it, on the gift batch page, click **Batch Dry Run**. - To process a batch of gifts, on the gift batch page, click **Process Batch**. If you encounter an error during batch processing, the error is posted to the Gift Processing Result field on the Gift Entries table of the gift batch. The rest of the batch is processed, except for the entry with the error. To fix the gift entry error in the grid, click **New Gift Entry** and edit the rows with errors. ## Create Gifts in the Gift Entry Window Create a standalone gift, create a gift commitment with the first gift transaction, or create an entry for a batch that uses the default gift batch template. The gift can include soft credits or multiple designations. Save time by adding it all in this single, simple Gift Entry window. The Gift Entry window is active by default. If the Gift Entry Grid is on, the grid replaces this window. 1. In the Fundraising Operations app, open the gift entry form. 1. For a single gift entry: - From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Entries**, and then click **New Gift Entry**. - On an Account Record Detail page, in the highlights panel, select **New Gift Entry** from the dropdown. 2. To add a gift to a gift batch, go to Gift Batches, create a batch or open an unprocessed gift batch, and then click **New Gift Entry**. 2. Select the gift type as **Individual** or **Organizational/Household**. 3. If the donor isn't prepopulated from the Account page, select or add a donor by name or donor ID. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note For an Individual gift type, select a person account as a donor. For Organizational/Household, select a business account. 4. Select the date that you received the gift. You can backdate the transaction to the date on the check or the date it was received. 5. For a new gift commitment: 1. Select **New Recurring Gift**. 2. Enter the effective start date and expected end date for the commitment. 3. In Gift Transaction Period, select the gift commitment period. 4. In Gift Transaction Interval, select the gift commitment interval. 5. In Gift Transaction Day, select which date of the month the gift commitment schedule recurs. For example: A year-long commitment that's set to start today, end a year from today, with gift transactions made monthly (Gift Transaction Period), 1 every month (Gift Transaction Interval), on the 15th day of the month (Gift Transaction Day). 6. If the gift is fulfilling an existing, active, open gift commitment, select it in the table. For example, if the Installment Extension Day Count is 10 and the gift received date is March 11, then the date range is March 1 through 21. Commitment Information shows all unpaid gift transactions with a transaction due date that falls within the date range. The Matching Gift Commitments table lists active commitments with unpaid transactions that have a due date within a predefined window. That window is set according to the value of the Installment Extension Day Count setting. Gift Entry can fetch up to five distinct gift commitments per donor and up to 10 gift transactions per gift received date. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Installment Extension Day Count is a global setting found in Fundraising Settings in Setup. 7. If the gift is a response to a solicitation, enter the outreach source code. The campaign name is autopopulates after you enter the outreach source code. 8. Enter the amount of the gift. 9. Select the method of the gift payment. 10. Review the Designation Information section for any prepopulated gift designations, and update as required. You can add up to 50 designations to each gift transaction. 11. If you mapped custom fields for the gift, under Additional Fields, complete the custom fields. If no custom fields were mapped for gift entry, the Additional Fields section isn't shown. 12. In the Soft Credit Information section, list the details for any people, businesses, or household members who can get soft credits. 13. To use the values specified on this page as default values in the next gift entry in a gift batch, select **Set As Default**. 14. Save your changes. SEE ALSO - [Set Gift Batch Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_gift_batch_defaults.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To enter gift batches more quickly and with fewer errors, set gift batch default values to automatically set common values for gift batches.") - [Create a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs.") - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") # Create a Gift Transaction in Education Create a gift transaction for a one-time gift payment, an installment of a gift commitment, if an installment doesn’t exist, or for a non-revenue gift. Fundraising automatically creates a gift transaction when you create a gift entry or schedule a gift commitment. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift transaction:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Specify these details. 1. Specify a name for the transaction record. 2. From Gift Type, select ​**Individual**​ or ​**Organizational/Household**​. 3. ​ ​Select a donor. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For an Individual gift type, select a person account as the donor. For organizational/household, select a business account. ​ 4. Complete the payment information for the gift transaction. If you're logging this transaction days after receiving it, you can backdate the transaction to the date on the check or the date it was received. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 5. ​ ​In **Original Amount**, enter the amount of the gift transaction.​ ​To record a non-revenue transaction, set the payment amount to zero. 4. Save your changes. # Create a Gift Transaction in Nonprofit Create a gift transaction for a one-time gift payment, an installment of a gift commitment, if an installment doesn’t exist, or for a non-revenue gift. Fundraising automatically creates a gift transaction when you create a gift entry or schedule a gift commitment. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift transaction:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Specify these details. 1. Specify a name for the transaction record. 2. From Gift Type, select ​**Individual**​ or ​**Organizational/Household**​. 3. ​ ​Select a donor. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note For an Individual gift type, select a person account as the donor. For organizational/household, select a business account. ​ 4. Complete the payment information for the gift transaction. If you're logging this transaction days after receiving it, you can backdate the transaction to the date on the check or the date it was received. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 5. ​ ​In **Original Amount**, enter the amount of the gift transaction.​ ​To record a non-revenue transaction, set the payment amount to zero. 4. Save your changes. # Create a Grants Portal Set up a grants portal for your users, configure its pages to suit your organization’s needs, and then publish it to make it available to everyone. - **[GM Create the Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a grants portal using Experience Cloud. - **[GM Enable Public Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enable_public_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure which users can access the grants portal. - **[Configure the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_home_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your portal's homepage to reflect your organization's branding and messaging. - **[GM Configure the Registration and Login Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_registration_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the registration and login pages that your users see when they access the grants portal. - **[Configure Portal for External Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_config_portal_external_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare Salesforce and your grants portal for external reviewers. - **[GM Publish the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_publish_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When your grants portal is ready, publish it to make it publicly available. # Create a Kanban View A Kanban list view is a helpful visual summary of records. It's a great way to visualize items in progress and allows you to monitor work more effectively. Update a record's status by dragging and dropping records from one column to another. Aileen at the Six Sides Fund notices their current list of active Funding Requests is a bit disorganized in the standard list view. She asks Michon if there is a more organized way to view all active Funding Requests, so Michon creates a Kanban list view. Now, the Six Sides Fund has a Kanban view of all active Funding Requests sorted by status. Aileen sees there are a few in the Submitted column that need attention. When she starts to review one, she easily moves the Funding Request from the Submitted column to the In Review column. This immediately changes the Funding Request's status. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Funding Requests**. 2. Click **Settings** (![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/settings.png)), then select **New.** ![Create a new list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/kanban_1.png) 3. Enter a List Name. For example, Active Funding Requests. 4. Press tab to autofill the List API Name. 5. Select who sees the list view. For example, select **All users can see this list view** to allow everyone to see it. 6. Click **Add Filter** to narrow the list of records. For example, select **Status** as the Field, **Equals** as the Operator, and select all active status values. 7. Click **Done**, then **Save**. 8. Click **Settings**, then select **Select Fields to Display**. 9. Select the fields to display in the Kanban view. Reorder as needed. 10. Click **Save**. ![Select fields to display](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/kanban_2.png) 11. Click the **table icon** and select **Kanban** to change the view from a table to a Kanban board. ![Change to Kanban view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/kanban_3.png) 12. Click **Settings**, then select **Kanban Settings**. 13. Two display options appear. In this example, Michon wants the Kanban view to show records by status, so he selects **Status** from Group By and leaves Summarize By to the default value of None. 14. Click **Save**. ![Funding Request Kanban board](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/kanban_4.png) # Create a Learner Pathway Global Action To simplify your learners’ pathway building experience, set up a new global action to create a learner pathway record.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create a global action: | Education Cloud Full Access | When you create the global action, hide the Status field because it’s irrelevant to learners and could cause confusion. To clearly associate a new pathway with the learner creating it, set the learner contact field to default to the contact ID. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Actions, and then select **Global Actions**. 2. Click **New Action**. 3. Select **Create a Record** as the action type. 4. Select **Learner Pathway** as the target object. 5. Enter a name and description. 6. Save your changes. 7. Leave the Status field hidden on the learner pathway layout. Arrange other fields as desired. Fill at least the Name, Learner Contact, and Description fields. 8. Save your changes. 9. In Predefined Field Values, click **New**. 10. Select **Learner Contact** as the field name. 11. In Formula Value, enter $User.ContactId. 12. Save your changes. # Create a Learning Course Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a learning course: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, complete these prerequisites. - Turn on Academic Operations. - Set up the Learning Achievement and Learning Achievement Configuration objects in your org. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Academic Operations**. 2. On the home page, from the app navigation menu, select **Learning Courses**. 3. Click **New from Learning Wizard**. 4. Enter a name for the course. 5. To make the course available, select **Active**. 6. Enter other details, and then click **Next**. 7. If needed, click the appropriate tab to specify prerequisites, corequisites, recommendations, or other criteria for enrollment in the course. 1. To apply custom conditions, click **Set Conditions**. You can add multiple conditions grouped by logic. 2. To apply learning rules, click **Set Learning Rule**, select the type, and then select the expression set. 8. Click **Next**. 9. To add key outcomes, click **Add Key Learning Outcome**, and then provide the necessary details. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - The achievement type of the key outcomes of a course is learning course. - The system automatically selects the default key-learning outcome as the primary. However, you can select any key learning outcome as the primary. 10. To add more outcomes, click **Add Additional Learning Outcome**, and then provide the necessary details. 11. Click **Finish**. See Also: - [Create a Policy Rule for Learning Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_policy_rule_for_learning_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a policy rule using an expression set in Business Rules Engine (BRE) that can be applied as a learning requirement for a course or program.") # Create a Learning Program Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a learning program: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, complete these prerequisites. - Academic Operations is enabled. - The Learning Achievement and Learning Achievement Configuration objects are set up in your org. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Academic Operations**. 2. On the home page, from the app navigation menu, select **Learning Programs**. 3. Click **New from Learning Wizard**. 4. Select a program type, and then click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Program types are available only if custom Learning Achievement Type records are configured. 5. Enter a name for the program. 6. To make the program available, select **Active**. 7. Enter other details, and then click **Next**. 8. If needed, click the appropriate tab to specify prerequisites, corequisites, recommendations, or other criteria for enrollment in the course. 1. To apply custom conditions, click **Set Conditions**. You can add multiple conditions grouped by logic. 2. To apply learning rules, click **Set Learning Rule**, select the type, and then select the expression set. 9. Click **Next**. 10. To add key outcomes, click **Add Key Learning Outcome**, and then provide the necessary details. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - The achievement type of the key outcomes of a program is learning program. - The default key learning outcome is automatically selected as primary. However, you can choose any key learning outcome as primary. 11. To add additional outcomes, click **Add Additional Learning Outcome**, and then provide the necessary details. 12. Click **Finish**. See Also: - [Create a Policy Rule for Learning Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_policy_rule_for_learning_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a policy rule using an expression set in Business Rules Engine (BRE) that can be applied as a learning requirement for a course or program.") # Create a Learning Program Plan Use Program Plan Builder to view, edit, save, cancel, and publish all your program plans. You can also organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses, and add active versions of learning courses to each element. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a learning program plan: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you create a learning program plan: - [Set up the Academic Operations app](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). - Create the necessary learning programs and learning courses. Institutions can import their existing course catalog easily by using the Course Catalog Business APIs. See [Education Cloud Business APIs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_apis.htm). To create a learning program plan: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Program Plans**. 2. To open Program Plan Builder, click **New Program Plan**. 3. Enter the name of the parent learning program, and then click **Next**. 4. Enter the plan details and save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Property panels dynamically render fields from the default page layout that's assigned to the running user. The property panel doesn’t include the Active field that’s part of the learning program plan page layout. 5. Add elements to the program plan such as categories, required courses, and elective courses, and then save your changes to the course and category node details. To include a category in a course node's property panel, place the course node in a category node. 6. To add learning course versions in any element, click **Add Courses**, search for and select the active versions, and then click **Add Selected**. When you search for courses, the results show only active versions. If a course has more than one active version, a version number distinguishes them so that you select the correct one. Any version of a course satisfies its program requirement. 7. To save your changes to the program plan, click **Save Draft** or **Save & Close**. 8. To make the program plan available to others, click **Publish**. Program plans with more than 1,000 records sometimes take longer to publish. After you publish a program plan, you can no longer edit it. See Also: - [Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") - [Create Another Learning Course Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_another_learning_course_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create another version of an existing learning course to capture changes to its name, credits, requirements, or other details without affecting students enrolled in earlier versions.") - [Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program.") - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm) # Create a List of Alumni In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to identify alumni who meet certain criteria. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this article, we walk you through a use case about connecting with your school's former football (the kind with hands, not feet) athletes. - **[Football Alumni Data: Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's get back to basics first. - **[Create a Contact & Accounts Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's create our report using a standard Salesforce report, Contacts & Accounts. - **[Create a Cross Filter for Football Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The out-of-the-box report gives us Contacts with Accounts. - **[Narrow Results to Alumni Only](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To narrow our list to alumni only, we simply edit the cross filter to add one more criteria. - **[Post Script . . .](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the eve of the publication of this article, we learned that our dear friend and colleague, Dave Perry, passed away suddenly. ## Introduction In this article, we walk you through a use case about connecting with your school's former football (the kind with hands, not feet) athletes. We're kicking off a team fundraiser to coincide with the season's home opener, which is just a few weeks from now. We'll identify alumni who are likely supporters, based on their past participation in our beloved football team (go Panthers!). See how the head coach uses Salesforce and the Education Data Architecture (EDA) to drum up support for the team. What you're looking for: - A list of alumni - Who were affiliated with the football team To arrive at our list, we'll briefly review the use of Accounts and Affiliations in the data architecture. Then we'll set up cross filters on a Contacts & Accounts report to filter for our alumni. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important The explanations and data analyses we provide in this article assume that you're already familiar with the various components of EDA . If you haven't done so already, read through all of the [EDA documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) related to building your architecture before you move on. ## Football Alumni Data: Affiliations Let's get back to basics first. EDA represents students as _Contacts_, and organizations (such as academic departments, sports organizations, and even the university itself) as _Accounts_. An Account is connected to a Contact through an _Affiliation_. For example, this type of connection tells you that a student is an athlete on the swim team. On the student's Contact record, the summary of Affiliated Accounts looks something like this: ![Student Lucy Snow's Contact record shows her swim team affiliation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/alumni_list_contact_rec.png) Affiliations are a powerful organizing concept and are central to this use case. You're about to see how the Panthers' coach uses affiliations and Salesforce reports to create the list of football alumni. If you want to follow along, you'll need to first create some sample data in your org for current students, alumni, and their affiliations with the football team. For maximum efficiency, we recommend creating records in this order. 1. If you previously created sample data for the [Create a List of Current Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to create a list of the students at your college or university who meet certain criteria.") use case, you can reuse those student records. If not, create a half dozen Contact records to represent current students (you just need first and last names), and then continue with the steps here. 2. Create another half dozen Contact records to represent alumni. You just need first and last names. If you want to see Contacts' addresses and email addresses in the resulting report—which you'd of course want for an actual fundraising campaign—you can also fill out those fields for a more realistic experience. You'll get the gist even if you don't. 3. Create an Account record to represent the football team. Choose the **Sports Organization** record type. 4. For at least a few of the current students, create an Affiliated Account record with Organization as the football team and Status as Current. 5. For at least half of the alumni, create an Affiliated Account record with Organization as the football team and Status as Alumni. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note In the real world, you would likely also set the Role field to Athlete, so that you could later filter on this field to distinguish athletes from other types of team affiliations (such as coaching staff or mascots). In this use case, to save you a few clicks, we assume that Contact records that have the football team affiliation are either current or former team athletes. Setting up this sample data is optional. If you'd rather skip the data entry, now's a great time to take a seat in the bleachers, get cozy under your stadium blanket, and spectate while our head coach gets to work identifying alumni. ## Create a Contact & Accounts Report Let's create our report using a standard Salesforce report, Contacts & Accounts. 1. Click the Reports tab. (If you don't see the Reports tab, from ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png), find and select **Reports**.) 2. Click **New Report**. 3. Expand the Accounts & Contacts folder and select the Contacts & Accounts report type. 4. Click **Create**. ![The report preview shows address information for each contact.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/alumni_list_report_preview.png) As you can see from the preview, this report works well for our purposes. It's already set up with address and other contact information that we'll need for a fundraising campaign. ## Create a Cross Filter for Football Affiliations The out-of-the-box report gives us Contacts with Accounts. We're interested in EDA\-specific Affiliated Accounts, because we're honing in on our alumni's affiliations with the football team. Adding a Cross Filter lets us narrow the list from all Contacts to our football-faithful Contacts. 1. In the new, unsaved report, click the Filters drop down menu, and add a new Cross Filter. ![Select Cross Filter in the Filters drop down menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/alumni_list_add_filters.png) 2. Set the new Cross Filter to Contacts with Affiliated Accounts. 3. Click **Add Affiliated Accounts Filter**, and add the following filters: - Affiliation Type equals `Sports Organization` - Organization equals `Football Team` 4. Click **OK**. Check your filtered results in the Preview pane. Only footballers should display. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that the report options under Filters aren't restricting your data. For example, make sure that the Show menu is set to All accounts, and the Contact: Created Date date range is set to All Time, so that your report includes all possible results, regardless of who created the records, or when. The report shows all students who have a football affiliation, which includes past, present, and even future students (our head coach recruits high school students and transfer students to maintain a healthy pipeline of Panther prospects). For our upcoming fundraising campaign, we want to contact alumni only. So, let's narrow the results further. ## Narrow Results to Alumni Only To narrow our list to alumni only, we simply edit the cross filter to add one more criteria. 1. Hover over the cross filter that you just created, and click **Edit**. ![Hover over the cross filter to show the Edit option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/alumni_list_x_filter_edit_link.png) 2. Click Add Affiliated Accounts Filter, and add the following filter: - Status equals `Alumni` 3. Click **OK**. 4. Check your filtered results in the Preview pane. Now, only the football alumni should display. Way to go, Coach! This report gives us exactly the alumni data that we want. Just a few more yards to go before we're in the end zone. 5. Click **Save**. Save it with a name like “Football Team Alumni” and a description to make it easy to find in a Reports folder. 6. Click **Save**. You can return to this report over and over again, and it will update automatically with any data you add or edit. 7. Click **Run Report**. All done. The Panthers coach has earned some high fives for creating this football alumni report. (In this example, there are four such alumni.) Coach even made it look easy. ![Report with alumni names and addresses.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/alumni_list_report.png) With this report in hand, Coach heads off to enlist the team's help with stuffing envelopes for the fundraising campaign. As you can see, EDA is key to another well-funded season for the Panthers, and key to cultivating connections with your alumni community. ## Post Script . . . On the eve of the publication of this article, we learned that our dear friend and colleague, Dave Perry, passed away suddenly. Dave was not only instrumental in helping us develop these use cases, but as the Technical Architect for EDA was instrumental in the development of the architecture itself. Dave was a lover of higher ed, a lover of Salesforce, and a lover of how the two together could help make the world a better place. We would like to dedicate this use case series to Dave's memory, and know that he'd appreciate a small tribute in a piece of technical documentation probably better than anything else. Thanks for everything, Dave . . . you will be deeply missed. ![Dave Perry](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/alumni_list_dave_perry.png) # Create a List of Current Students In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to create a list of the students at your college or university who meet certain criteria. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this article, we walk you through a simple use case that has lots of useful applications for faculty and staff. - **[Student Enrollment Data: Course Objects and Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this section we'll review how information about courses and enrollments is structured in EDA. - **[Create a Courses Custom Report Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Out of-the-box, Salesforce with EDA gives you a number of standard reports, such as Course Connections with Contact's Academic Program, Course Connections with Course Offering ID, and so on. - **[Customize Report Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that we have a custom report type that pulls Course data from multiple related objects, let's create a report based on the report type. - **[Create Filters for Academic Program, Course, and Grade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's apply a few filters to narrow our list to only the students pursuing a B.S. in Business, who earned a B grade or higher in Economics 101. ## Introduction In this article, we walk you through a simple use case that has lots of useful applications for faculty and staff. We'll identify the students who've performed well in a foundational class for their major, based on their academic program and course enrollment information. Follow along as our recruiter for the School of Business uses Salesforce and the Education Data Architecture (EDA) to identify top candidates to invite to a B school information session. What you're looking for: - A list of current students - Who are pursuing a degree in B.S. Economics - Who've earned a B grade or better in Economics 101 To arrive at our list, we'll review the handful of data objects—such as Courses, Course Offerings, and Course Connections—that EDA uses to organize data. Then we'll set up a custom report type that links together data from these related objects into a single report. Lastly, we'll use your criteria to filter for the students we're interested in. First, though, let's talk in more detail about these objects and how they relate to each other in the data architecture. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important The explanations and data analyses we provide in this article assume that you're already familiar with the various components of EDA . If you haven't done so already, read through all of the [EDA documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) related to building your architecture before you move on. ## Student Enrollment Data: Course Objects and Relationships In this section we'll review how information about courses and enrollments is structured in EDA. Chances are that you're working with students' enrollment data uploaded from your Student Information System. Once the data is in EDA, stored in Salesforce fields and objects, the bulk of the work is done. Those objects are automatically, easily accessible using Salesforce reports. Getting to the specific data set we want is simply a matter of understanding the hierarchical relationships between objects and drilling down into the data. First, let's review the relevant objects and relationships in the data architecture. - Course—A class that fulfills a certain number of credit hours, such as Economics 101. - Course Offering—A unique instance, that is, a running of a course, that is associated with a specific term and faculty member, such as Economics 101 Fall 2017, Section A. - Term—A school term or academic session that has a start and end date, such as Fall 2017. - Course Connection—An object representing the relationship between a student and a course offering, capturing credit and grade information. It can also represent a faculty member's relationship to a course offering. These objects track almost everything we need to know about a student's enrollment information in order to generate our list. This diagram summarizes the object relationships. ![Objects and relationships for tracking enrollment information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_relationships.png) The Program Enrollment object is also relevant. It's a junction object that connects a student with an academic program. For example, it tells us that a student has declared a B.S. in Business as their major. Notice that Program Enrollment is also a lookup field on the Course Connection object. The hierarchy of relationships is important because it determines how we go about creating a report to tie these related objects together. For now, this quick review is enough to set the stage for diving into reports. In the next sections, we'll show you how our B school recruiter uses Salesforce reports to create the invitee list for the information session. If you want to follow along, you'll need to first create sample data in your org for about a dozen students, their program enrollments, the ECON 101 course information, and the students' course connections to ECON 101. For maximum efficiency, we recommend creating records in this order. 1. Create Contact records for twelve different students. 2. Create an Account record to represent your school or university. Choose the **Educational Institution** record type. 3. Create Account records for a few different academic programs, one of which is B.S. Business. Choose the **Academic Program** record type for these accounts. 4. Create Account records for the departments that are associated with the academic programs that you created in the previous step. For example, create the “Economics Department” for B.S. Business. Choose the **University Department** record type for these accounts. 5. From each student's Contact record, on the Related tab, create a Program Enrollment record. Assign about half of your students to B.S. Business, and the rest to the other academic programs that you created in the previous step. 6. Create the ECON 101 course information. 1. Create a Course record. Give it a name of “Intro to Economics,” a Course ID of “ECON 101,” and associate it with the Economics Department. 2. Create a Term record, such as Fall 2016. 3. Create a Course Offering record to represent a specific occurrence of the course that's associated with the Fall 2016 term. Give it a Course Offering ID of “ECON 101 Fall 2016.” 7. Back on the Related tab of each student's contact record, click the Program Enrollment ID, such as PE-0010, to go to the student's Program Enrollment record. On the Related tab, create a Course Connections record. Associate every student with the Course Offering ID of “ECON 101 Fall 2016” and give every student a grade, but give them a range of grades, including some that are less than 80 (so that you can see filtering by grade later). While setting up this sample data is a great way to continue getting familiar with EDA, it does involve some work. If these setup tasks are more than you want to do right now, you can skip them and just sit back and watch what our B school recruiter does with the data. ## Create a Courses Custom Report Type Out of-the-box, Salesforce with EDA gives you a number of standard reports, such as Course Connections with Contact's Academic Program, Course Connections with Course Offering ID, and so on. In our case, we want a more complex report than what's available with the standard reports, so let's create our own by first creating a custom report type. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note The procedures in this document are written for the Salesforce Lightning Experience user interface. If you're using the Salesforce Classic interface, what you see on screen may differ slightly. 1. From Setup Home, enter "report" in the Quick Find box and click **Report Types**. 2. Review the introductory page about custom report types, and then click **Continue**. 3. Click **New Custom Report Type**. 4. For the Primary Object, select Courses. ![Courses selected as the report type's Primary Object](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_custreporttype.png) By setting Courses as the parent object and focus of the report, we can drill down into its child objects, Course Offerings and Course Connections, and tie everything back to a student. 5. Enter a label such as Courses with Offerings with Connections. 6. Review the name that's automatically created from the label you entered and adjust it if needed. 7. Enter a description such as: Generate a list of current students Pursuing a B.S. Economics Who earned a B grade or better in Econ 101 8. For Store in Category select Other Reports. 9. Click **Next**. 10. With Courses already selected as the primary object, define its relationships to child objects in this precise order. 1. Click **Click to relate another object** and select Course Offerings. Leave the A to B relationship requirement that each "A" record must have at least one related "B" record. ![Visual representation of the relationship options between primary and child objects.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_relate_objects.png) 2. Click **Click to relate another object** and select Course Connection. Again, leave the B to C relationship requirement that each "B" record must have at least one related "C" record. 11. Click **Save**. ## Customize Report Fields Now that we have a custom report type that pulls Course data from multiple related objects, let's create a report based on the report type. 1. Click the Reports tab. (If you don't see the Reports tab, from the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png), find and select **Reports**.) 2. Click **New Report**. 3. Expand the Other Reports folder and select the Courses with Offerings with Connections report type. (If you don't see this report type, click **Show more …** at the bottom of the list.) ![Report Type selector with "Courses with Offerings with Connections" highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_selectreporttype.png) 4. Click **Create**. The resulting report includes a few columns, for the fields that are included by default. ![Report preview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_reportpreview.png) Adding a few more fields would be helpful, making it easier to confirm that we're including the correct students in the report. 5. In the report builder, drag these fields from the Fields list into the Preview pane to add them to your report. The object that the field belongs to is shown in parentheses. - **Course ID** (Courses) - **Contact's Academic Program: Account Name** (Course Connection) - **Grade** (Course Connection) - **Contact: Full Name** (Course Connection) ![Report preview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_reportpreview2.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You might notice that the Courses object has two fields that are identically named Course ID. (If you drag both Course ID fields into the Preview, it's easy to tell which is which.) One is a standard system field in Salesforce that uniquely identifies each course with a 15-character ID. The other is an EDA field that your school uses to uniquely identify each course, such as ECON 101. For ease of use in this report, we recommend selecting the more human-readable, EDA Course ID field. ![Course ID fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_courseids.png)  ![Course ID fields, one showing 15-character ID and another showing "ECON 101"](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_courseids2.png) Great work so far. By setting up a custom report type, we've gotten Salesforce to determine all current students that could potentially be included in our list. By customizing the report with additional fields, we can easily see that some students are not B.S. Business majors, or are but don't meet our course and grade criteria. Let's narrow our results to exclude them, using report filters. ## Create Filters for Academic Program, Course, and Grade Let's apply a few filters to narrow our list to only the students pursuing a B.S. in Business, who earned a B grade or higher in Economics 101. 1. Add a filter for Academic Program. 1. Click **Add** next to the Filters option. 2. Set the filter: Contact's Academic Program: Account Name equals `B.S. Business.` ![Add the B.S. Business filter for Academic Program](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_report_filter.png) 3. Click **OK**. 2. Add another filter for the course, Economics 101. 1. Click **Add** next to the Filters option. 2. Set the filter: Course ID equals `ECON 101`. 3. Click **OK**. 3. Add another filter for Grade. 1. Click **Add** next to the Filters option. 2. Set the filter: Grade greater or equal `80.00`. 3. Click **OK**. 4. Check your filtered results in the Preview pane. Only the students who meet your criteria should display. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that the report options under Filters aren't restricting your data. For example, make sure that the Show menu is set to All Accounts, and the Date Range is set to All Time, so that your report includes all possible results, regardless of who created the records, or when. 5. Click **Save** to preserve your hard work on this report. Save it with a name like “ECON 101 Students with B Grade Minimum” and a description to make it easy to find in a Reports folder. 6. Click **Save**. You can return to this report over and over again, and it will update automatically with any data you add or edit. 7. Click **Run Report**. Here you have it. A report of current B.S. Business students who earned a B or better in ECON 101. (In this example, there are four students.) ![Sample report output with contact name, grade, and other course fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/curr_studnts_list_reportfinal.png) With all of the filtering options available in Salesforce reports, you can now take what you've learned from this use case and apply it broadly to similar situations to support student (and B school recruiter) success. # Create a List of Parents In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to create a list of parents who have business affiliations that could help students with networking and job placement. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_list_of_parents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this article, we show you a use case about tapping into the professional networks of your students' parents. - **[Relationships and Affiliations: A Quick Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_list_of_parents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this section we'll review how EDA stores information about Contacts and their relationships with other Contacts and Accounts. - **[Create a Relationships with Contact Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_list_of_parents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's create our report using EDA's Relationships with Contact standard report type. - **[Add a Joined Report with Program Enrollment Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_list_of_parents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that we have data about the parents who work for The Fullerton Company, let's turn our attention to the students that we might want to match with this employer. - **[Create Filters for GPA and Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_list_of_parents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We're almost there. ## Introduction In this article, we show you a use case about tapping into the professional networks of your students' parents. See how an advisor at the school's career center uses Salesforce and the Education Data Architecture (EDA) to sift through relationship and affiliation data to match students with potentially valuable career connections at a great local company. Our goal is to identify the parents and students we want to invite to a networking event, where they can chat about internships, jobs, and what it's like to work for the company. What you're looking for: - A list of parents - Who work for a major employer in the region - That is interested in hiring undergraduate Business students with at least a 3.0 GPA First, we'll review the use of relationships in EDA. which is a powerful way to track all of the relationships that matter to your students—with moms and dads being among the most important ones. Then we'll use a standard EDA report to identify the parents we're interested in. You'll see how we use joined reports in Salesforce to combine the parental affiliations data with student data that meet your criteria. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important The explanations and data analyses we provide in this article assume that you're already familiar with the various components of EDA . If you haven't done so already, read through all of the [EDA documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) related to building your architecture before you move on. ## Relationships and Affiliations: A Quick Review In this section we'll review how EDA stores information about Contacts and their relationships with other Contacts and Accounts. In the EDA Account model, two custom objects work in conjunction with your Contacts: - Relationships, which help you track relationships between Contacts - Affiliations, which help you track affiliations between Contacts and other Accounts This diagram shows the concept of Relationships and Affiliations for a student. ![Diagram of a student's Relationships and Affiliations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_relationships.png) For a concrete example, let's look at the Contact record for our student, Wyatt Hill. ![Contact record for Wyatt Hill](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_contact_record.png) You can see in the Affiliated Accounts related list that Wyatt is majoring in B.S. Business. In the Relationships related list, you see his parents. Just like Wyatt is a Contact, his parents are also tracked as Contacts in EDA. If you were to click through on his father's name, you'd see in Calvin's Contact record his reciprocal relationship with his son. You'd also see that Calvin has an Affiliated Account with Bellerton Vocational Training, which happens to be his employer. ![Contact record for Calvin Hill](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_contactrecord2.png) In the details of Calvin's Contact record, because he works for Bellerton Vocational Training, it's listed as his Primary Business Organization. In EDA, this type of Affiliation is a Primary Affiliation for the Business Organization record type. ![Affiliations section of Calvin Hill's Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_contactaffils.png) We're now going to use this essential piece of affiliation data to find out which of our parents have connections to one of the region's biggest employers. Doing outreach, facilitating networking, and potentially matching students with internships and jobs is a whole lot easier thanks to EDA and Salesforce reports. If you want to follow along as our career advisor uses Salesforce reports to create the invitee list for the networking event, you'll need to first create sample data in your org for about a dozen students and their parents. For maximum efficiency, we recommend creating records in this order. 1. If you previously created sample data for the [Create a List of Current Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to create a list of the students at your college or university who meet certain criteria.") use case, you can reuse those student records. If not, complete the sample data setup steps 1 through 5 in that use case, and then continue with the steps here. 2. Create at least two Account records to represent the different companies that are the parents' employers. Choose the **Business Organization** record type. Name one of the accounts, "The Fullerton Company," to match the main employer in our use case. 3. Create a couple dozen Contact records to represent the parents. When creating each Contact record, set the Primary Business Organization field to one of the companies (Accounts) that you created in the previous step. In our use case, four parent individuals work for The Fullerton Company. 4. From either the student's Contact record or the parent's, create Relationship records so that every student has relationships with a pair of parents. 5. For the half-dozen or so students who are B.S. Business majors, go to their Program Enrollments and assign them a range of GPAs, including a couple that are less than 3.0 (so that you can see filtering by GPA later). If you'd rather not set up this sample data right now, you're welcome to just sit back and watch as our career advisor works with the data. ## Create a Relationships with Contact Report Let's create our report using EDA's Relationships with Contact standard report type. It shows us contact relationships, so that we can mine the rich network of connections amongst our parents. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note The procedures in this document are written for the Salesforce Classic user interface. If you're using the Lightning Experience interface and want to follow along with the steps in this use case, switch to Salesforce Classic so that you can access joined reports. 1. Click the Reports tab. (If you don't see the Reports tab, from the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png), find and select **Reports**.) 2. Click **New Report**. 3. Expand the Other Reports folder and select the **Relationships with Contact** report type. ![Select Report Type screen](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_selectrecordtype.png) 4. Click **Create**. The resulting report is skeletal and not that useful in its out-of-the-box format. Let's fix that. ![Report preview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reportpreview.png) 5. Drag fields into and out of the Preview pane of the report builder so that you end up with these fields in your report. - **Contact: First Name** - **Contact: Last Name** - **Contact: Primary Business Organization** - **Related Contact** - **Type** ![Report preview after adding fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reportpreview2.png) 6. Add a filter to narrow our list to only the parents who work for our region's largest employer, The Fullerton Company. 1. Click **Add** next to the Filters option. 2. Set the filter: Contact: Primary Business Organization equals `The Fullerton Company`. ![Filters editor showing Contact: Primary Business Organization equals The Fullerton Company](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reportfilters.png) 3. Click **OK**. 7. Check your filtered results in the Preview pane. Only the parents who meet your criteria should display. ![Report preview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reportpreview3.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that the report options under Filters aren't restricting your data. For example, make sure that the Show menu is set to All Relationships, and the Relationship: Created Date date range is set to All Time, so that your report includes all possible results, regardless of who created the records, or when. ## Add a Joined Report with Program Enrollment Information Now that we have data about the parents who work for The Fullerton Company, let's turn our attention to the students that we might want to match with this employer. 1. From the report format menu that currently shows Tabular Format, select **Joined**. ![Select Joined from the report format menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_tabularformat.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Joined option, make sure that you're working in the Salesforce Classic user interface, not Lightning Experience. Joined reports are available only in Salesforce Classic. 2. In the joined report view, click **Add Report Type**. ![Add Report Type button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_addreporttype.png) 3. Expand the Other Reports folder and select the **Program Enrollments with Contact** report type. (If you don't see this report type, click **Show more …** at the bottom of the list.) ![Selecting an additional report type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reporttypepicker.png) 4. Click **OK**. Notice that a new block appears in the report. ![Report preview showing a new block](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_newreportblock.png) Also notice that the Fields pane updates with a new area that contains fields unique to the report type. 5. Drag fields into and out of the Program Enrollments with Contact block so that you end up with these fields in that block. - **GPA** - **Program** - **Contact: First Name** - **Contact: Last Name** ![Report preview with new fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_newreportblock2.png) ## Create Filters for GPA and Program We're almost there. Our last task is to filter for Business majors with a minimum GPA that The Fullerton Company prefers to see when considering student hires. 1. Add a filter for GPA. 1. Click **Add** next to the Filters option. 2. Set the filter: GPA greater or equal `3`. ![Add the GPA greater or equal to 3 filter](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_gpa_filter.png) 3. Click **OK**. 2. Add another filter for Business majors. 1. Click **Add** next to the Filters option. 2. Set the filter: Program equals `B.S. Business`. ![Add the Program equals B.S. Business filter](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_programfilter.png) 3. Click **OK**. 3. Check your filtered results in the Preview pane. Only the students who meet your criteria should display. ![Preview pane showing students who meet the specified criteria](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reportblock.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that the report options under Filters aren't restricting your data. For example, make sure that the Show menu is set to All Program Enrollments, and the Date Range is set appropriately, so that your report includes all possible results, regardless of who created the records, or when. 4. Click **Save** to preserve your hard work on this report. Save it with a name like “Fullerton Co. Parents with 3.0 Biz Major” and a description to make it easy to find in a Reports folder. ![Save Report dialog box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_savereport.png) 5. Click **Save**. You can return to this report over and over again, and it will update automatically with any data you add or edit. 6. Click **Run Report**. ![Run Report button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_runreport.png) And just like that, you have a report of the parents who work at The Fullerton Company combined with a report of the current B.S. Business students who have at least a 3.0 GPA. (In this example, there are four such parents and five such students.) ![Final Report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/parents_list_reportfinal.png) With this type of data at your fingertips, creating highly personalized, targeted outreach campaigns becomes a much simpler task. You can see how EDA makes it easy to tap into your constituents' networks and help students make important career connections. # Create a List of Prospective Students In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to identify high school students who've expressed interest in academic programs at your college or university. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_prospective_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's application season and high school students from all over the country will soon begin making decisions about which colleges and universities they'll apply to. - **[Prospective Students—Organizing the Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_prospective_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you're tracking a small set of high school students, or a nationwide sampling of prospects, there are many ways you can organize your data in Salesforce. - **[Create a Contact & Accounts Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_prospective_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** So how do we get the data we're after? - **[Create a Cross Filter for Current High School Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_prospective_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Next, we'll need a Cross Filter, so that we can look at data across various, integrated objects. - **[Create a Second Cross Filter for Prospective Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_prospective_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's narrow the results by adding another Cross Filter to the report. ## Introduction It's application season and high school students from all over the country will soon begin making decisions about which colleges and universities they'll apply to. College admissions recruiters have one of the toughest jobs around—keeping track of the hundreds, and often thousands of students who've expressed interest in their Higher Ed institution. In this article, we're going to let you step into the shoes of one of those admissions recruiters, and show you how Salesforce and the Education Data Architecture (EDA) turn this daunting job into something streamlined and efficient. Specifically, we'll walk you through one of the most common use cases for admissions recruiters: identifying students from a subset of high schools who've expressed interest in academic programs at your college or university. But with Salesforce and EDA, it's all about data. So as a recruiter using Salesforce, you need to think about the situation in those terms. What you're after, in particular is: - A list of current high school students - From all the high schools in the geographic region that you cover - Who've expressed interest in an academic program at your school That's three criteria you'll need to use to filter your data. But before you even think of doing that, you need to think about the data architecture itself, because with EDA, that's where it all begins. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important The explanations and data analyses we provide in this article assume that you're already familiar with the various components of EDA . If you haven't done so already, read through all of the [EDA documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) related to building your architecture before you move on. ## Prospective Students—Organizing the Data Whether you're tracking a small set of high school students, or a nationwide sampling of prospects, there are many ways you can organize your data in Salesforce. EDA provides an out-of-the-box organizational data structure you can use as a baseline, so that you don't have to plan so much on your own. In this section we'll provide some best practices advice on how to use EDA to build a totally streamlined system that gives you the results you need. So, here you are, the admissions recruiter, forced to think about how you want to track prospective students. You know the three pieces of data you need, but let's look at them again. Specifically, you need to track: - Current high school students - From all the high schools in the geographic region that you cover - Who've expressed interest in an academic program at your school What's the best way to do that in EDA? Conveniently, EDA comes with Salesforce fields and objects that let you easily set up this kind of data in an integrated way. The best way to tell you is to show you, so let's take a look at a sample record for one of the high school students you're tracking, Joseph Halloway: ![Joseph Halloway's contact record showing affiliated accounts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_contactrecord.png) You can see from Joseph's Administrative Account record that we're using the EDA Affiliations object to track the main pieces of data we're interested in. The Affiliations object is a junction object that connects Joseph Halloway to the other two Accounts you see above—Ichabod County High School, one of the schools in the geographic region you cover, and BS Biology, one of the premier programs at your college. We've set a specific Role and Status for each of these Affiliations: Joseph is a current student at Ichabod County High School. He's also a prospect for the BS Biology degree. These values are important, and you'll see why a little later. One level deeper, we see what those two Affiliated Accounts are. The Ichabod County High School record is an Account with a record type of Educational Institution. The BS Biology record is an Account with a record type of Academic Program. ![Account record types for Ichabod County High School and BS Biology records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_affiliatedaccts.png) That's really important too, because we need to understand those different Account types, and our ability to set them as Primary, if we want to get the reporting results we're after. That's the last piece of the architecture—setting each of these Account records as Primary on the Affiliations objects themselves. If we don't do that, the data will not be available to us through Joseph's Contact record, which is where we need to see it if we later want to include the information in our report. ![Joseph Halloway's Contact record showing the Primary Affiliation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_primaryaffil.png) So there you have it—a simple and elegant way to organize your data for prospective students in EDA, using Accounts, Account record types, Affiliations, and Primary Affiliations. Once your architecture is in place, and your data is in, you're ready to get some results. In the next sections, we're going to walk you through the process of actually doing something with all the data we just talked about. However, we need to show you how to do that using some sample data, which already includes Accounts, Affiliations, and so on, in our Salesforce org. If you actually want to do these steps with us, you should first go ahead and create records for 12 different students, all affiliated with a particular high school. And for 8 of those students, you'll also want to create additional affiliations to various degree programs. But you don't actually have to do all that now. You can just sit back, watch, and learn! ## Create a Contact & Accounts Report So how do we get the data we're after? We're going to use EDA in conjunction with one of Salesforce's most powerful features: Reports. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note The procedures in this document are written for the Salesforce Lightning Experience user interface. If you're using the older Salesforce Classic interface, what you see on screen may differ slightly. 1. Click the Reports tab. (If you don't see the Reports tab, from the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png), find and select **Reports**.) 2. Click **New Report**. 3. Expand the Accounts & Contacts folder and select the Contacts & Accounts report type. ![Selecting the Contacts & Accounts report type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_selectreporttype.png) 4. Lastly, click **Create**. We're using the Contacts & Accounts report in Salesforce because it's the one that will let us drill down into those all-important, EDA\-specific Affiliations. ## Create a Cross Filter for Current High School Students Next, we'll need a Cross Filter, so that we can look at data across various, integrated objects. 1. In the new, unsaved report, click the Filters drop down menu, and add a new Cross Filter. ![Selecting Cross Filter from the Filters menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_addxfilter.png) 2. Set the new Cross Filter to Contacts with Affiliated Accounts. ![Adding Contacts with Affiliated Accounts to the Cross Filter](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_xfilteredit.png) 3. Click Add Affiliated Accounts Filter, and add the following filters: - Role equals `Student` - Status equals `Current` - Organization contains `school` (We don't want to use “high school,” because not all of the schools you track have that in their name!) That covers the first few bits of data we need, right? Current students at the high schools we're tracking. In this simple example, only relevant high schools for our geo are in our database, but if you needed to sort out by state or city or zip code, you could do that too. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When lookups are available (in this example they're available for both Role and Status fields), you should use them to make selections in order to avoid typographical errors. 4. Make sure the other fields on the report are not restricting your data. For example, make sure that the Show menu is set to All Accounts, and the Date Range is set to All Time, so that your report will include as many results as possible, regardless of who created the records, or when. 5. Click **OK** to run the report. What you'll see is a list of all students you've been tracking from the four high schools in your geographic area. (In this example, there are twelve students.) ![Report preview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_xfilterpreview.png) However, these are simply the students you've tracked over time, for one reason or another. Not all of these students have necessarily expressed interest in a particular program at your college. ## Create a Second Cross Filter for Prospective Students Let's narrow the results by adding another Cross Filter to the report. 1. Click the Filters drop down menu again, and add another Cross Filter. 2. Set the new Cross Filter to Contacts with Affiliated Accounts, just as you did before. 3. Click Add Affiliated Accounts Filter, and add the following filters: - Role equals `Prospect` - Status equals `Current` - Affiliation Type equals `Academic Program` ![Cross filter for current student prospects with affiliated academic programs](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_xfilter2edit.png) 4. Click **OK** to run the report. The list of prospective students is refined to include only those students you've designated as “prospects”—that is, students who've expressed interest in a particular academic program. (In this example, there are eight.) ![Report preview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_xfilter2preview.png) “But wait!” you say—that's not exactly good enough. You want to know the programs these students have expressed interest in, and it would be nice to see which high school each student is from too. EDA and Salesforce reporting functionality allows you to see that—as long as you've set those Primary Affiliations, which we talked about earlier. 5. Scroll down in the Fields column until you hit the Contact:Custom Info folder, and look for the cluster of Primary fields ![Primary fields in Fields column](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_primaryfields.png) 6. Drag the **Primary Educational Institution** and the **Primary Academic Program** fields over to your report so that you can see the high schools and prospective programs of interest, as shown: ![Report preview showing high schools a nd prospective programs of interest](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/prosp_stdnts_list_reportpreview.png) 7. Save the report with a name like “Interested High School Students” and a description. You can return to this report over and over again, and it will update automatically with any data you add or edit. Now you've got an amazingly useful report built with Salesforce and EDA. But remember, your results will only be as good as the data you provide, so be sure to follow best practices when architecting and entering data into Salesforce. # Create a Mentoring Benefit Set up benefits for your mentoring program.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create Mentoring benefits: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![A screenshot showing a benefit record for a mentoring benefit of Networking.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_benefit.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Add the Register as a Provider and Omni Process fields to the Benefit page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5). 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Benefits**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and description for the benefit. 4. To allow a user to register as a benefit provider on an Experience Cloud site, select **Register as Provider**. 5. If you're adding an assessment, for OmniProcess, find and select the name of your assessment OmniScript. 6. Select the program that this benefit applies to. 7. Select a benefit type for the benefit. For example, select **Mentoring**. 8. To make this benefit available to users, select **Active**. 9. For Enrollment Count, enter the number of instances for the benefit. For example, if you're measuring by individual sessions, enter the total number of sessions that this benefit covers. 10. In Benefit Disbursement Field Set, enter the API name of the field set that contains benefit-specific fields on the Benefit Disbursement object. These field sets allow program managers to view additional fields from the field set when they track participant attendance. 11. Find and select the unit of measure for the benefit. Examples include hours, sessions, semesters, or whatever works for your institution. 12. Select the status of the benefit. 13. In Benefit Manager, find and select the person who oversees this benefit. 14. Enter a start date and time, and an end date and time, for the benefit. 15. In Minimum Benefit Amount, enter the lowest number of instances that satisfy the benefit. 16. In Maximum Benefit Amount, enter the highest number of instances that are allowed for this benefit. 17. Find and select the goal definition that outlines the hierarchy of goals for the mentoring benefit. For example, if the mentoring benefit is Skills Development, the goal definition can show the top desired skill along with the intermediate skills that are required to attain that top skill. 18. Save your changes. See Also: - [Create Programs, Benefit Types, and Benefits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_create_programs_benefits.htm&type=5) # Create a Mentoring Benefit Type Group your mentoring benefits under a benefit type.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create Mentoring benefit types: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Benefit Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In Benefit Type Name, enter Mentoring. 4. From Process Type, select **Education**. 5. Select the unit of measure. 6. If needed, select a type and category. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Picklist values for Category aren't provided by default. Based on the requirements of the organization, admins must add picklist values for the field in Object Manager 7. Save your changes. # Create a Mentoring Portal Create an Experience Cloud site for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. How you designate mentors and mentees in your organization determines if you can use a single Experience Cloud site for your mentoring portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
If users in your institution can be both mentors and mentees, you must create separate portals for mentees and mentors.
User Permission Needed  
To create a mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration
To create separate mentor and mentee portals: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Education Portal** and then click **Get Started**. 4. For Name, enter Mentee, and in URL, enter mentee. 5. Click **Create**. 6. Similarly, create a portal for mentors. If participants are only either mentors or mentees, and there is no overlap, you can set up your single Education Portal to support Mentoring along with your other programs such as Recruitment and Admissions, Student Success, and Alumni. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). # Create a Mentoring Profile Record Identify roles and preferences for Mentoring participants. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Creating a mentoring profile record doesn't create a user profile. You must still create and assign user profiles for mentors and mentees to access your portal. See Set Up Mentoring Users. | User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create mentoring profiles: | Education Cloud Full Access |
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Mentoring Profiles**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select a contact for the mentoring profile record. 4. From Related Record, select either the program enrollment or provider offering record that's associated with the contact. 5. Complete all relevant fields, and then save your changes. # Create a Multi-Section Application A multi-section application breaks an application into navigable sections while letting grantseekers save and return to an in-progress application. Use the provided [Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_multi_section_app_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's included in the flow for multi-section applications.") flow to create this application experience. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For more information about working with flows, see [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.flow_build.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help or [Build Flows with Flow Builder](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/build-flows-with-flow-builder) in Trailhead. - **[1\. Configure the Multi-Section Application Form Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_multi_section_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone the Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow and determine which elements to use. - **[2\. Add the Flow API to the Application Form Picklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_multi_section_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Flow API to the Application Form Picklist. - **[3\. Configure a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_multi_section_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a page variation, set up an audience, and update it to show information that’s pertinent to your nonprofit organization. ## 1\. Configure the Multi-Section Application Form Flow Clone the Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow and determine which elements to use. ### Clone the Flow To get started, clone Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample). This flow is the multi-section application screen that a grantseeker sees in the grantee portal. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample)**. 3. Click **Save As**. 4. Select **A New Flow**, then give it a unique Flow Label. For example, Community Impact Application. 5. Press Tab to autofill the Flow API Name. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't worry if you see a warning message about screens missing navigation. You can ignore this message because the Application Form - Section Navigation Lightning web component included in the flow handles the navigation. ### Review the Flow Out-of-the-box, the Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow includes four sections: User and Organization Information, Proposal Summary, Attachments, and Review and Submit. Edit the screen elements to rename existing sections and customize the information and fields included in each section. For more information about working with flows, see [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.flow_build.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note  Refer to [Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_multi_section_app_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's included in the flow for multi-section applications.") for a step-by-step review of each flow element and what it does. ### Add a New Application Section (Optional) The Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) includes default sections. To add more sections, clone one of the existing screen elements. We'll walk through creating an Additional Information section. **Create a New Stage** 1. From the Toolbox, click **Manager**. 2. Click **New Resource**. 3. Select **Stage**. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Additional Information Section. 5. Press Tab to autofill the API Name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Copy the API Name to use when you Create a New Stage Label Formula. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. Enter an Order. For example, enter 5 for the section to show last. 8. Select **Active by default**. 9. Click **Done**. **Create a New Stage Label Formula** 1. From the Toolbox, click **Manager**. 2. Click **New Resource**. 3. Select **Formula**. 4. Paste the API Name from Create a New Stage and add Label to the end of the API Name. For example, Additional\_Information\_Section\_Label. 5. Optionally, enter a Description. 6. From Data Type, select **Text**. 7. From Formula, select the API Name created in Create a New Stage. For example, **Additional\_Information\_Section**. 8. Click **Done**. **Clone and Configure the Screen Element** 1. Click one of the screen elements in the flow. For example, **Screen: Proposal Summary**. 2. Click ![Duplicate](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/duplicate.png) to duplicate the element, then double-click the duplicated element to edit. 3. Click ![Edit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/penciledit.png). 4. Enter a new Label that briefly describes the section. For example, Additional Information. 5. Enter a unique API Name. For example, Additional\_Information\_Screen. 6. Click the display text component that contains the cloned element’s content, then enter a unique API Name. For example, Applicant\_Additional\_Information. 7. Update this component with information or fields you want the grantseeker to complete. For example, remove the Display Text component, then update the existing components to give a grantseeker a place to provide additional information. 8. Click **Done**. **Clone and Configure the Assignment Element** 1. Click **Assignment: Assign Fields**. 2. Click ![Duplicate](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/duplicate.png) to duplicate the element, then double-click the element to edit. 3. Click ![Edit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/penciledit.png). 4. Enter a new Label that briefly describes the section. For example, Assign Additional Information Fields. 5. Enter a unique API Name. For example, Assign\_Additional\_Information. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. In Set Variable Values, click **X** to remove the Variable. 8. Map fields from the screen element to the corresponding Funding Request field. To do this, enter Funding, then select **FundingRequest** from Record (Single) Variables, then select the Funding Request field. 9. Click **X** to remove the Value. 10. Add values so that the fields on the screen element map to the Funding Request field. For example, for the Geographic Area Served, the values would look something like this. 1. Variable: Funding Request | Geographical Area Served 2. Operator: Equals 3. Value: _FlowAPIName_ 11. Click ![Trash can](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/trashcan.png) to remove the second variable. 12. Click **Done**. **Add Decision** 1. Double-click **Decision: Which Section Is Displayed?**. 2. Click ![Plus](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/plus.png) to add a new outcome. 3. Enter a Label for this section. For example, **Additional Information Outcome**. 4. Press Tab to autofill the Outcome API Name. 5. Click **Resources**. 6. Search for and then select **{!PendingStage}**. 7. Search for and then select the recently created stage label formula. For example, **AdditionalInformationSectionLabel**. 8. Click **Done**. **Connect the Elements** 1. Drag ![Flow connector node](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowconnector.png) from the recently created Screen element to the recently created Assignment element. 2. Drag ![Flow connector node](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowconnector.png) from the Assignment element to Update Records: Update Funding Request. 3. Drag ![Flow connector node](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowconnector.png) from the Decision Element to the recently created Screen element. ### Save and Activate the Flow When you're ready to use the cloned flow, save it and then click **Activate**. ## 2\. Add the Flow API to the Application Form Picklist Add the Flow API to the Application Form Picklist. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click ![Row-level action menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowactionarrow.png) for the flow you created in [Create a Multi-Section Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_multi_section_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A multi-section application breaks an application into navigable sections while letting grantseekers save and return to an in-progress application.") and select **View Details and Versions**. 3. Copy the cloned flow's API Name. 4. Navigate to Object Manager, then click **Funding Program**. 5. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 6. Click **Application Form**. 7. Under Values, click **New**. 8. Enter the Flow API Name, then click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to select the flow from the Funding Program’s Application Form field for grantseekers to use it. See [Create Multiple Applications Using Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm) for more information. ## 3\. Configure a Page Variation Create a page variation, set up an audience, and update it to show information that’s pertinent to your nonprofit organization. ### Create a Page Variation 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Builder** next to your grantee portal. 3. In Experience Builder, click **Page Properties** next to Home, then select **Funding Request**. 4. Click ![Page Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/builderpageactions.png) next to Funding Request Detail, then select **Page Settings**. 5. Click **Page Variations**. 6. From Record Detail, click ![Row-level action menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowactionarrow.png), then select **Duplicate**. 7. From Record Detail (1), click ![Row-level action menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowactionarrow.png), then select **Rename**. 8. Enter a Name. For example, Community Impact Application. 9. Click **Save**. ### Create and Assign an Audience for the Page Variation 1. Click ![Manage audiences icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/buildermanageaudiences.png) from the Funding Request Detail Page Variations tab. 2. Click **New Audience**. 3. Enter an Audience Name. For example, Community Impact Application. 4. From Criteria Type, click **Record** | **Funding Request** | **Funding Program** | **Application Form**. 5. From Value, select the flow to show this audience. For example, **Community Impact Application Launcher**. 6. Click **Save**. 7. With your new audience selected, click **Assign**, then **Done**. ### Update the Page Variation 1. On your newly created page variation, click ![Row-level action menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flowactionarrow.png) , then click **Edit**. 2. In the header region, remove the Record Information Tabs component and replace it with the Call to Register Org Banner and Record Banner components. 3. In the content region, add the Tabs component and configure it with two tabs named Application and Additional Details. 4. Click ![Trash icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/buildertrash.png), then click **Delete** to remove Tab 3. 5. In the Application tab, add the Application Form Flow component. 6. In the Additional Details tab, add two Related List - Single components with these configurations. 1. Related List is set to Requirements. 2. Related List is set to Disbursements. 7. After you're finished making updates, publish your changes. # Create a New Trigger Handler Review the steps to add a custom Apex class to the TDTM architecture. - Coding your custom Apex class. - Writing a test Apex class. - Creating a Trigger Handler for your custom Apex class. - Testing in a sandbox environment. - Deploying to production. Creating custom Apex classes is beyond the scope of this article. TDTM is also used in the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP). For a detailed walk-through, see [Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm). # Create a Nonprofit Cloud Agent Create your Nonprofit Cloud agent using the Agentforce Employee Agent template. Then, customize your agent’s messages and tone. Finally, test, activate, and assign your agent to users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud and Einstein for Nonprofits licenses enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create an agent:

Manage AI Agents AND the required permissions for your agent type

OR

Customize Application
1. [Create an agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Identify the required template in the documentation for the specific agent. 2. [Define system messages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_setup_system_messages.htm&language=en_US), such as welcome and error messages. 3. [Update language settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_setup_tone.htm&language=en_US) to set the tone for your agent. 4. [Add subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_configure.htm&language=en_US) to your agent. Templates that are designed for a specific agent already include the necessary topics. 5. [Test your agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_testing_center.htm&language=en_US) to make sure that it will perform reliably for your users. 6. [Activate your agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_setup_activate_deactivate.htm&language=en_US) to make it available to users. 7. [Assign users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US) to your agent. SEE ALSO: - [Nonprofit Cloud Agents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the Agentforce agents that are available for fundraising, volunteer management, and program management.") - [Agentforce for Program and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_agentforce.htm&language=en_US) - [Volunteer Management Agent (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Efficiently manage volunteer shifts and initiatives, reducing administrative tasks and improving engagement. Access the Shift Capacity and Coverage topic in the Agent Builder to identify unfilled shifts and find suitable volunteers to fill them.") # Create a Nonprofit Cloud Trial Org Get experience with Nonprofit Cloud in a full-featured trial experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important The Nonprofit Cloud Prebuilt Apps is a Non-SFDC Application as defined under, and subject to the terms of, your Main Services Agreement (f/k/a the Master Subscription Agreement) with Salesforce. Trial orgs are intended for proof of concept and guided self-exploration. Trial orgs expire in 30 days from the time you sign up. To sign up for a trial org: 1. Go to the [Developer Free Trials](https://developer.salesforce.com/free-trials) sign-up page and look for Nonprofit Cloud Free Trial on the Industry-Based Trials tab. You can also go directly to one of these trial org sign-up pages. [Learning Org](https://www.salesforce.com/form/sfdo/signup/nonprofit/nonprofit-cloud-learning-trial/) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Don’t use learning orgs for long-term projects or production environments. Use Base orgs for any implementation that you plan to convert and use for long-term environments. This fully configured org includes rich sample data and shows you the Nonprofit Cloud features in action. Use these orgs to see what a comprehensive enablement looks like. [Prerelease Trial Org](https://www.salesforce.com/form/sfdo/signup/nonprofit/nonprofit-cloud-pre-release-trial/) The prerelease trials include features in the upcoming release and are only available during sandbox preview. [Base Org](https://www.salesforce.com/nonprofit/free-trial/base-trial) This unconfigured org is a blank slate with only the necessary licenses and permissions. Use these orgs for quick proof of concept projects or general testing. 2. Enter your contact details. 3. Read and agree to the service agreement. 4. Click **Submit** or **Start my Free Trial**. After your org is created, you receive an email with the login details. Your trial org includes pre-enabled Nonprofit Cloud features and the products required for those features. # Create a Page for Virtual Calls on Your Experience Site Virtual Calls requires a separate page on your Experience site to add a component for it. See [Create Pages for Virtual Calls on Your Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_page_for_virtual_calls_experience_site.htm&type=5). # Create a Policy Rule for Learning Requirements Create a policy rule using an expression set in Business Rules Engine (BRE) that can be applied as a learning requirement for a course or program. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a policy rule: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, make sure to complete these prerequisites: - [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_advanced_academic_operations.htm&language=en_US). - [Turn on Context Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_turn_on_context_service.htm&language=en_US). To create a policy rule: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Policy Rules**. 2. Click **New Policy Rule**. 3. Enter a name and an API name for the rule. 4. Select **Student Information System** as the usage type. 5. Select **Learning Rule** as the usage subtype. 6. Select **EduLearningRules** as the context definition. 7. Save your changes. 8. In Policy Rule Versions, select the version name. 9. Click **Open in Policy Rule Builder**. 10. Customize the rule to your requirement. Use the tools and components in BRE, such as expression sets, decision matrices, and decision tables, to apply advanced logic and automate complex decision-making. 11. Save your changes. 12. Activate the rule version. See Also: - [Trailhead: Business Rules Engine](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/business-rules-engine) - [Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_context_definitions.htm&language=en_US) - [Expression Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.expression_sets.htm&language=en_US) # Create a Prompt Template for Einstein Mentoring Summaries Use Prompt Builder to set up a prompt that generates mentoring summaries.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
User Permissions Needed  
To create prompts:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Prompt Templates

AND

Compare Using Einstein
1. In Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Click **New Prompt Template**. 3. Select **Industries Records Comparison** as the prompt template type. 4. Enter a name and an API name for the prompt template. 5. Enter a description. 6. Click **Next**. 7. In the Prompt Template Workspace, add the details of your prompt template. See [Create a Prompt Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.prompt_builder_build_template.htm&type=5). 8. Save your changes. # Create a Pulse Check Template Create a pulse check template to conveniently create and assign pulse checks to learners.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To create pulse check templates: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Pulse Check Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the pulse check template. 4. Select an Omniscript assessment of the Pulse Check usage type for Omniprocess. 5. If necessary, enter other relevant details. To create a template for recurring pulse checks, select **Recurring** and specify the frequency, occurrence, and expiry in days. 6. Save your changes. # Create a Recommendation Form Create a survey for the Admissions: Invite Recommender to Complete Recommendation Survey flow to send to recommenders.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create surveys: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Surveys**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the survey, and then click **Continue**. 4. Enter a welcome message for your survey. 5. Click **Add Page**. 6. To create questions for your survey, click **Add Question**, and then select the type of question that you want to add. See [Create and Customize Surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.concept_create_surveys_overview.htm&type=5). 7. Click **Thank You Page**, and enter a thank-you message. 8. Next to Advanced Settings, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and then select **Merge Field Variables**. 9. Expand **Merge Field Access Level**. 10. In Define Merge Field Access, select **System Context - Ignore record-level access**. 11. Expand **Object Variables for Merge Fields**. 12. For Associated Object, enter the details. 1. Enter Application as the variable name. 2. Select **Individual Application** as the object. 3. Save your changes. 13. For Participant Object, enter the details. 1. Enter Recommender as the variable name. 2. Select **Contact** as the object. 3. Save your changes. 14. Click **Back to Builder**. # Create a Recurring Donation Learn how to create open-ended and fixed-length Recurring Donations. Choose monthly, quarterly, yearly, or a custom installment schedule. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Managing Recurring Donations](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NR7LaLyhJRU) - **[Create an Open-Ended Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Open Recurring Donations are when a donor agrees to donate for an indefinite amount of time. - **[Create a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fixed Recurring Donations are Recurring Donations where the donor agrees to donate for a specific number of installments. - **[Track Recurring Donor Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Using the Sustainer field on Accounts and Contacts, NPSP helps you keep track of who is a current, lapsed, or former recurring donor. ## Create an Open-Ended Recurring Donation Open Recurring Donations are when a donor agrees to donate for an indefinite amount of time. In this example, a new monthly donor, Vera Reinhold, wants to donate $50 each month by check. She responded to a fundraising solicitation on April 5th, 2020, and will send a check by the 10th of each month. You can create a Vera Reinhold Contact, or use any existing Contact you'd like for this exercise. 1. Click the **Recurring Donations** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter this information: 1. **Donor Type** = Contact 2. **Contact** = Vera Reinhold 3. **Date Established** = 4/5/2020 4. **Amount** = $50 5. **Recurring Type** = Open 6. **Day of Month** = 15 7. **Payment Method** = Check 8. **Recurring Period** = Monthly 9. **Effective Date** = 4/5/2020 4. Leave all other fields blank or with their default value. 5. Click **Save**. The new Recurring Donation is now ready to track each monthly donation. NPSP auto-generates one open installment Opportunity for you at a time. If Vera's your donor, when you receive her check, simply close the open Opportunity. When you close the Opportunity, NPSP generates the next open Opportunity. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Your administrator can change the Opportunity auto-creation behavior by going to **NPSP Settings** | **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations** and changing the Installment Opportunity Auto-Creation setting. The default behavior is to always create new installment Opportunities. ## Create a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation Fixed Recurring Donations are Recurring Donations where the donor agrees to donate for a specific number of installments. In this example, a new donor, Ron Morimura, wants to donate $1250 each quarter (every 3 months) for one year starting on 4/15/2020. He signed up for this Recurring Donation at a fundraising gala on December 10th 2019 and wants to pay using bank transfers. You can create a Ron Morimura Contact, or use any existing Contact you'd like for this exercise. 1. Click the **Recurring Donations** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter this information. 1. **Donor Type** = Contact 2. **Contact** = Ron Morimura 3. **Date Established** = 12/10/2019 4. **Amount** = $1250 5. **Recurring Type** = Fixed 6. **Number of Planned Installments** = 4 7. **Recurring Period** = Advanced 8. **Every** = 3 9. **Installment Period** = Months 10. **Day of Month** = 15 11. **Effective Date** = 4/15/2020 12. **Payment Method** = ACH 4. Leave all other fields blank or with their default value. 5. Click **Save**. The new Recurring Donation is now ready to track each quarterly donation. NPSP auto-generates one open installment Opportunity for you at a time. If Ron was your donor, you would wait until you receive his bank transfer, and then close the open Opportunity. When you close the Opportunity, NPSP generates the next open Opportunity. When all of the Opportunities are paid, NPSP closes the fixed recurring donation. ## Track Recurring Donor Status Using the Sustainer field on Accounts and Contacts, NPSP helps you keep track of who is a current, lapsed, or former recurring donor. Using the Sustainer field on Accounts and Contacts, NPSP helps you keep track of who is a current, lapsed, or former recurring donor. NPSP updates the Account and Contact Sustainer field based on the Status of the related Recurring Donations. The Sustainer fields have these values: - **Active**—The constituent has one or more Active Recurring Donations. - **Lapsed**—The constituent has one or more Lapsed Recurring Donations. - **Former**—The constituent has only Closed Recurring Donations. Use the Sustainer fields in reports and as a quick way to check the recurring donor status of a given constituent. # Create a Research Request Case Slack Channel Education Modify the Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case flow. When your team creates a research request case, the updated flow creates a Slack channel so that relationship officers and researchers can collaborate on research requests directly in Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Manage Flow
Before you start: - [Enable Salesforce for Slack integrations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_apps_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack) 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Modify the **Create Research Request Case** element. 1. Select the element, and then click the **Research Request Case** component. 2. In the Properties panel, select **Show Slack Channel**. When the flow runs, the Create Research Request Case screen shows a **Create a Slack Channel for this Research Request** checkbox. To change the checkbox text, enter a custom label. 5. Save your changes. 6. After the **Create Research Request Case Record** element, add a Decision element. The Decision element checks whether the `createSlackChannel` variable equals true. 1. Click **Add Element**. 2. Search for and select **Decision**. 3. Give the element a label. For example, enter Have Slack Channel to Create?. 4. For the New Outcome path, enter Yes as the outcome label. Also enter a distinct outcome API name. For example, HasSlackChannelToCreate. 5. For Condition Requirements to Execute Outcome, set these conditions. - For Resources, select the **Create Research Request Case** screen, select the **researchRequestCase** screen component, and then select **createSlackChannel**. - For Operator, select **Equals**. - For Value, select **True**. 7. For the Yes path, add an Action element. 1. Click **Add Element**. 2. Search for and select **Create a Salesforce Channel in Slack**. 3. Give the element a label. 4. To set the Salesforce Record ID input value, from All Resources, select **Case** from **Create Research Request Case**, and then select **Case Source ID**. 8. Make sure that both the Yes and Default Outcome paths connect to the **Success Message** screen element. 9. If you want to show an error message when the Slack action fails, add a fault path to the element. 1. From the Slack action element, click **More Actions**, and select **Add Fault Path**. 2. Click **Add Element**, and then click **Screen**. 3. Configure screen properties. You can model this element after the existing **Display Error** screen element in the flow. 10. Save and activate the flow. SEE ALSO - [Create a Salesforce Channel in Slack Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_ref_elements_actions_slack_create_salesforce_channel.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Philanthropic Research Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow.") # Create a Research Request Case Slack Channel Nonprofit Modify the Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case flow. When your team creates a research request case, the updated flow creates a Slack channel so that relationship officers and researchers can collaborate on research requests directly in Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:

FundraisingAccess permission set

AND

Manage Flow
Before you start: - [Enable Salesforce for Slack integrations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_apps_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack) 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Modify the **Create Research Request Case** element. 1. Select the element, and then click the **Research Request Case** component. 2. In the Properties panel, select **Show Slack Channel**. When the flow runs, the Create Research Request Case screen shows a **Create a Slack Channel for this Research Request** checkbox. To change the checkbox text, enter a custom label. 5. Save your changes. 6. After the **Create Research Request Case Record** element, add a Decision element. The Decision element checks whether the `createSlackChannel` variable equals true. 1. Click **Add Element**. 2. Search for and select **Decision**. 3. Give the element a label. For example, enter Have Slack Channel to Create?. 4. For the New Outcome path, enter Yes as the outcome label. Also enter a distinct outcome API name. For example, HasSlackChannelToCreate. 5. For Condition Requirements to Execute Outcome, set these conditions. - For Resources, select the **Create Research Request Case** screen, select the **researchRequestCase** screen component, and then select **createSlackChannel**. - For Operator, select **Equals**. - For Value, select **True**. 7. For the Yes path, add an Action element. 1. Click **Add Element**. 2. Search for and select **Create a Salesforce Channel in Slack**. 3. Give the element a label. 4. To set the Salesforce Record ID input value, from All Resources, select **Case** from **Create Research Request Case**, and then select **Case Source ID**. 8. Make sure that both the Yes and Default Outcome paths connect to the **Success Message** screen element. 9. If you want to show an error message when the Slack action fails, add a fault path to the element. 1. From the Slack action element, click **More Actions**, and select **Add Fault Path**. 2. Click **Add Element**, and then click **Screen**. 3. Configure screen properties. You can model this element after the existing **Display Error** screen element in the flow. 10. Save and activate the flow. SEE ALSO - [Create a Salesforce Channel in Slack Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_ref_elements_actions_slack_create_salesforce_channel.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Philanthropic Research Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow.") # Create a Rule for Multiple Educational Characteristic Requirements Use the guided setup to include multiple educational characteristic requirements in a rule. For example, define a requirement that accepts juniors and seniors, or one that accepts juniors or seniors only with an Honors status. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To create a rule for multiple educational characteristic requirements: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
## Create a Rule with AND or OR Logic 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Characteristic Requirements**. 2. Click **New from Educational Characteristic Requirements Wizard**. 3. Enter a name. 4. (Optional) Select **Visible to Student**. 5. Configure the requirement logic. 1. For Requirement Logic, select **All selected items (AND)** or **Any selected items (OR)**. 2. Click **Add**. 3. For Requirement Type, select **Educational Characteristic** or **Educational Characteristic Requirement**. 4. Select a record. Only active records are available. 5. Add more characteristics or requirements as needed. 6. Click **Create Requirement**. [Assign the educational characteristic requirement to courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_educhar_reqs_to_courses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To confirm a student’s eligibility during registration, assign educational characteristic requirements to a learning or a course offering."). ## Create a Rule with Custom Logic 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Characteristic Requirements**. 2. Click **New from Educational Characteristic Requirements Wizard**. 3. Enter a name. 4. (Optional) Select **Visible to Student**. 5. Configure the requirement logic. 1. For Requirement Logic, select **Custom**. 2. Click **Add**. 3. For Requirement Type, select **Educational Characteristic** or **Educational Characteristic Requirement**. 4. Select a record. Only active records are available. 5. Add more characteristics or requirements as needed. 6. In Custom Requirement Logic, enter your custom logic. For example, (1 AND 2) OR 3. 7. Click **Create Requirement**. [Assign the educational characteristic requirement to courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_educhar_reqs_to_courses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To confirm a student’s eligibility during registration, assign educational characteristic requirements to a learning or a course offering."). # Create a Semantic Data Model for Education Cloud Add a semantic data layer to your Education Cloud org. This semantic layer organizes your data into a single, reusable model that calculates metrics consistently across Tableau Next components, agents, and Marketing Cloud Growth campaigns. The Education Cloud semantic data model (SDM) is available in a data kit and with your Tableau Next for Education app. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Data 360
User Permissions Needed
To create a semantic data model from the Education Cloud data kit:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect
Before you start: - [Turn on Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on Education Cloud to support the entire learner experience, including managing applications, scheduling, courses, and facilities.") - [Set Up Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360.") - [Install the C360 semantic model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.sales_insights_install_c360sdm.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Deploy an Education data kit data stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_deploy_an_education_data_kit_data_stream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deploy an Education data kit data stream to collect data from Education Cloud and store it in Data 360.") The semantic data model contains semantic data objects that interpret data model objects. It forms a layer that gathers all of your Education Cloud data into a unified, comprehensive structure and interprets data points consistently across the platform. This layer of data improves the reliability of Tableau Next reports and dashboards, strengthens the intelligence of AI agent interactions, and powers targeted campaigns in Marketing Cloud Growth, helping teams analyze performance, generate data, and make decisions with confidence. 1. From the App Launcher, search and select **Data Cloud**. 2. Select the **Semantic Layer** tab, and then click **New Model**. 3. In the guided setup, click **Create from Data Kit**. 4. From the list of packages, click **Education Cloud**. 5. Make sure that **sfm\_Education\_Cloud\_SDM** is selected, and then click **Next**. 6. Click **Create**. To make sure that your semantic model is up-to-date with each release, repeat these steps to create a new Education Cloud SDM. To distinguish the current SDM from previous ones, give the current SDM a distinctive name or delete previous versions. SEE ALSO - [Set Up Education Intelligence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_edu_intelligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To access dashboards, visualizations, metrics, and the Education Cloud Semantic Data Model (SDM), install Education Intelligence.") # Create a Service in Unified Catalog Use Unified Catalog to create a service request that you can tailor to your needs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create a service:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Omnistudio Admin permission set

AND

Omnistudio Designer

AND

Omnistudio Runtime
Before you begin, [set up your org for petitions and waivers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_petitions_and_waivers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure your org to allow learners to request petitions and upload documents. Configure the Salesforce admin’s permissions to manage student petitions and waivers."). 1. Create a catalog and then create a category in the new catalog, See [Create a Catalog in Unified Catalog](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.create_a_catalog_in_uc.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create a service to streamline the intake and fulfillment processes. See [Create a Service Request in Unified Catalog](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.uc_core_services_case_incident_and_service_request.htm&language=en_US). 3. Define and add an intake form using the Service Process designer to collect information from users. These pre-configured forms help identify and match the various contexts of a student's request. 1. Create a service with screen flow-based intake form 2. Create a service with Omniscript-based intake form 4. Add the service to the category within your catalog. ## Create a Service With Screen Flow-Based Intake Form Use Unified Catalog to create a service request with screen flow-based intake form. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Unified Catalog**. 2. Click **Services** and then select the service that you created. 3. Select **Case** as the target data model and click **Next**. 4. Create data attributes to store information for processing your service request. Organize the attributes into sections for better management, or use a single section to create one intake form. 1. Click **New Section**. 2. Enter a section name and a description. 3. Drag and drop the Status and Case Origin fields onto the new section canvas. 4. Save your changes and click **Next**. 5. Add an intake form to the service process. 1. Click **Generate Intake Form**. 2. Select **Screen Flow** and click **Next**. 3. Enter a form title and a description, and click **Create**. 4. Save your changes. 5. To open the Flow Builder, click **Open Editor**. 6. Configure the flow based on the form you're designing. Set up the Case record creation upon submitting the form. 7. Save the form. 8. Activate the service process. ## Create a Service With Omniscript-Based Intake Form Use Unified Catalog to create a service request with omniscript-based intake form. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Unified Catalog**. 2. Click **Service Processes** and then select the service that you created. 3. Select **Case** as the target data model and click **Next**. 4. Create data attributes to store information for processing your service request. Organize attributes into sections for better management, or use a single section to create one intake form. 1. Click **New Section**. 2. Enter a section name and a description. 3. Drag and drop the Status and Case Origin fields on the new section canvas. 4. Save your changes and click **Next**. 5. Define and add an intake form using the Service Process designer. 1. Click **Generate Intake Form**. 2. Select **Omni Script** and click **Next**. See [Add an Intake Form to the Service Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.intake_form_service_process.htm&language=en_US). 3. Save your changes. 4. To open the Omniscript Designer, click **Open Editor**. 5. In the Default Section, add options for the Status and Origin fields. | Field | Options | | --- | --- | | Status | New, In Progress, and Closed | | Origin | Web, Mobile, and Email | 6. In SubmitIPAction, map the intake form attributes data to the IP action parameters by using the Remote Options Key-Value pair. 7. In Confirmation, add a Text block and add a confirmation message with a Case number. 8. Preview the Omniscript to confirm that the Case record is created and the confirmation shows the case number. 9. Save the form. 10. Activate the service process. ## Add the Service to the Category Within Your Catalog Use Unified Catalog to add a service to the category. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Unified Catalog**. 2. Click **Catalogs** and then select the catalog you created. 3. Select the category. 4. Click **Existing Products and Services**. 5. Select the service you created. 6. Save your changes. # Create a Sharing Set for Applicants Create a sharing set for the users who apply for themselves.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create an applicant sharing set: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, click **New**. 3. For Label, enter Applicant Portal Sharing Set. 4. Under Select Profiles, add your self-applicant profile to Selected Profiles. 5. Select the **Account** object. 6. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up**. 7. Select these fields: - User: **Account.PersonContact** - Target Account: **PersonContact** - Access Level: **Read/Write** 8. Click **Update**. 9. Save your changes. # Create a Sharing Set for Third-Party Representatives Create a sharing set for users who apply on behalf of an applicant, such as parents, guardians, or commissioned agents.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create a sharing set for third parties: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, click **New**. 3. Enter a label for the sharing set, such as K-12 Applicant Sharing. Press **Tab** to automatically fill the Sharing Set Name field. 4. For Available Profiles, add your third-party applicant profiles to the Selected Profiles column. 5. For Objects, add these objects to the Selected Objects column. - Individual Application - Individual Application Task - Person Education - Person Employment - Person Examination 6. Under Configure Access, for Individual Application, click **Set Up**. 7. Select these mapping values: - For User, select **Contact.RelatedAccount**. - For Target Account, select **Account**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Select **IndividualApplication.Account** when you configure access for Individual Application Task. - For Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 8. Click **Update**. 9. Similarly, configure access for the remaining objects. 10. Save your changes. To share a student's application records with parents or third parties, make sure the Contact and Account lookup fields are populated on the Application Decision, Person Education, Person Employment, and Person Examination records. # Create a Student Financial Order Create an academic order for one or more learners with the Salesforce provided Create Learner Order invocable action.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
The Create Learner Order invocable action creates: - An order for a given learner - An associated academic order for a given learner and academic term You can incorporate the action into your organization's workflow using flows, business APIs, and [OmniStudio Flexcards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_flexcards_24388.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To use the action for bulk calculations, we recommend using a flow and [batch management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.concept_batch_management.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Create a Success Team with Automatic Resource Assignment Create a success team that allows automatic assignment of appointment resources. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To create a success team: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Success Teams**. 2. Click **New**, or select a success team and click **Edit**. 3. Enter the name, case record type, and case team. 4. Select **Automatic** or **Both** as the resource assignment type. 5. Provide additional details and save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Student Success in Education Cloud to provide proactive and personalized support to learners across academics, financial aid, careers, and life goals.") # Create a Waitlist for a Course Offering To create a waitlist for a course offering, assign a waitlist status and set a waitlist capacity. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To create waitlists for course offerings: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. Create a course offering record or edit an existing one. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Course Offerings**. 2. Click **New** to create a record or select an existing record to edit. 2. Set the waitlist status to Open. The waitlist status determines whether a section has a waitlist and how the waitlist manages students. 3. Set a waitlist capacity. The waitlist capacity determines the maximum number of students who can join the waitlist. 4. Save your changes. Change the waitlist status and capacity as needed during registration to manage high-demand courses. Changes to the waitlist status don’t affect active enrollment offers. See [Manual Course Waitlist Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manual_course_waitlist_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A registrar can manually update the waitlist status of a course offering and add or remove students from a waitlist. Understand how manual actions affect the status of a waitlist and a student's position on it."). # Create Account Sharing Rules After you create the Secondary School and College record types for the Account object, create a sharing rule that grants portal users Read Only access to the records.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create account sharing rules: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Next to Account Sharing Rules, click **New**. 3. Enter a label name and rule name. 4. If required, enter a description. 5. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 6. For Select which records to be shared, add these criteria: - For Field, select **Account Record Type**. - For Operator, select **Equals**. - For Value, select **Business**, **College**, **Secondary School**, and **Military**. 7. For Select the users to share with, select **Public Groups** and **All Customer Portal Users**. 8. For Select the level of access for the users, select these fields: - Default Account and Contract Access: **Read Only** - Opportunity Access: **Private** - Case Access: **Private** 9. Save your changes. See [Create Criteria-Based Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_rules_criteria.htm&type=5). # Create Accounting Field Mappings Generate financial data beyond the default transaction journal record fields with accounting field mappings.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up accounting field mappings: | Manage Accounting Subledger | Before you create accounting field mappings, here are a few things to consider: - You can create up to 10 accounting field mappings in an accounting set. - You can’t edit or delete accounting field mappings used in active accounting sets. See [Manage Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_manage_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you're done configuring accounting sets, activate them. After you do so, you can no longer change the object model but you can deactivate it in order to update its other settings."). - Deleting an accounting set via API or changing its object model also deletes its related accounting field mappings. - You must create and add the custom fields to use as target fields on the Transaction Journal object. See [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5). To create accounting field mappings: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Next to the accounting set to which you want to add an accounting field mapping, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **View**. 3. Click **New Accounting Field Mapping**. 4. Select the source object to copy data from. The dropdown only lists the source objects that you included in the related accounting set’s object model. 5. Select the source field to copy data from. 6. Select a transaction journal target field to which you want to copy the data. The target field must meet these requirements: - Its data type matches the selected source field. See [Accounting Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create accounting field mappings to bring your data to custom fields on transaction journal records."). - It’s not used in another accounting field mapping within the same accounting set. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Select a mapping behavior. If you choose Current Value, don’t add automation that updates transaction journal record values. If you do, Accounting Subledger sometimes creates unnecessary reversals and transaction journal records. Instead, create a second field outside of any accounting field mapping to store the transaction journal record value, and add automation to that second field. Use the source value on the transaction journal record only for mapping and comparison. Some objects such as the Fund object don't support the current value behavior. # Create Advising Programs for Learners Use an updated workflow in Student Success to create programs with advising benefits, and associate success teams. Show programs on the learner portal, allowing learners to view details and self-enroll. Use provided flows to automatically create and update benefit disbursements when a learner schedules an appointment. Add assessments to programs to capture learner requirements during enrollment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission can access this feature. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the learner portal. **How**: In Student Success, from the app navigation menu, select **Programs** , and then click **New Advising Program**. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Support Student Success at Your Institution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_support_student_success_at_your_institution.htm) # Create Allocations for Campaigns Find out more about creating allocations for campaigns. - **[Create Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_allocs_for_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you specify allocations for a Campaign, NPSP automatically allocates the donation accordingly for every new Opportunity assigned to the Campaign. - **[Modify Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_allocs_for_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change an allocation on a Campaign. - **[Considerations for Allocations on Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_allocs_for_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are a few important things to remember about GAU Allocations and Campaigns. ## Create Allocations When you specify allocations for a Campaign, NPSP automatically allocates the donation accordingly for every new Opportunity assigned to the Campaign. Use the **Manage Allocations** button on a Campaign's GAU Allocations Related tab to create and manage allocations for your Campaigns. 1. Open the Campaign for which you want to create allocations. 2. Click the Related tab. 3. In the GAU Allocations related list, click **Manage Allocations**. 4. Enter the name of the GAU to which you want to assign the donation. ![Manage Allocations for a Campaign.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/don_alloc_mg_campaign_allocations.png) 5. Enter either the amount or the percent of the donation you want to place in that GAU. 6. To allocate the donation into additional GAUs, click **Add Row**. 7. To delete an allocation, click **Delete**. 8. Click **Save** when done allocating. See Also: - [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes.") ## Modify Allocations Change an allocation on a Campaign. 1. Open the Campaign that contains the allocation you want to change. 2. Click the Related tab. 3. In the GAU Allocations related list, click **Manage Allocations**. 4. Change the allocation as necessary. You can change the name of the GAU, change the amount being allocated, change from a dollar amount to a percentage of the donation, add additional allocations or delete allocations. 5. Click **Save** when done allocating. See Also: - [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes.") ## Considerations for Allocations on Campaigns There are a few important things to remember about GAU Allocations and Campaigns. - New Opportunities assigned to a Campaign with Allocations automatically receive those Allocations. - Campaigns are **NOT** automatically allocated to the default General Accounting Unit, but if you enter Opportunities into a Campaign and those Opportunities are for more than the Campaign's defined Allocation, then Salesforce will allocate the unallocated amount to the default GAU. If you've enabled default Allocations and run the Batch Create Default Allocations process, then Salesforce assigns all unallocated amounts in Campaign Opportunities to the default GAU. - When the amount on an Opportunity with an associated Campaign is updated from null to a value, Allocations are now created based on the Campaign's General Accounting Unit (GAU), instead of the Default Allocation GAU. - Adding a new, modifying, or deleting an existing Allocation of a Campaign only affects new Opportunities entered into the Campaign. It does **NOT** change any Opportunities you previously entered. - You can define both amount and percent-based Allocations for Campaigns. Percent-based Campaign allocations will not calculate an amount, as the amount is based on the amount of the opportunity entered into the campaign. - If Campaign allocations exceed the amount of the Opportunity, Salesforce only creates percent-based Allocations. For example, if a Campaign has two Allocations, one for $10 and one for 50% of the donation amount, and a new Opportunity is added for $5, Salesforce creates the 50% Allocation but not the $10 Allocation, as creating both would exceed the amount of the Opportunity. - An Opportunity with both a Campaign and a Recurring Donation will prioritize allocations from the Recurring Donation. - Assigning a Campaign to or removing a Campaign from an existing Opportunity does **NOT** modify the Opportunity's allocations. See Also: - [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes.") # Create Allocations for Recurring Donations Use the Manage Allocations button on a Recurring Donation's GAU Allocations related list to create and manage Allocations for your Recurring Donations. When you specify Allocations for a Recurring Donation, Salesforce automatically allocates the donation accordingly for every **open** Opportunity assigned to the Recurring Donation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're unfamiliar with General Accounting Units (GAUs) and Allocations in NPSP, learn more at [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes."). - **[Create Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_allocations_for_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign a GAU Allocation to a donation to designate a specific fund or program for that donation. - **[Modify Allocations for Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_allocations_for_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to modify allocations for recurring donations. - **[Important Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_allocations_for_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these facts when working with GAU Allocations and Recurring Donations. ## Create Allocations Assign a GAU Allocation to a donation to designate a specific fund or program for that donation. 1. Open the Recurring Donation for which you want to create GAU Allocations. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the GAU Allocations related list, click **Manage Allocations**. 4. Enter the name of the General Accounting Unit (GAU) to which you want to assign the donation. ![Manage Allocations for a Recurring Donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/don_alloc_mg_rec_don_allocations.png) 5. Enter either the amount or the percent of the donation you want to allocate. 6. To allocate the donation into additional General Accounting Units, click **Add Row**. 7. To delete an Allocation, click **Delete**. 8. Click **Save**. ## Modify Allocations for Recurring Donations Follow these steps to modify allocations for recurring donations. On an Allocation, you can: - Update General Accounting Unit. - Update the amount being allocated - Change from a dollar amount to a percentage - Add or delete Allocations To modify an Allocation: 1. Open the Recurring Donation that contains the Allocation you want to change. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the GAU Allocations related list, click **Manage Allocations**. 4. Update the Allocation as necessary. 5. Click **Save**. ## Important Considerations Consider these facts when working with GAU Allocations and Recurring Donations. There are a few important things to know about GAU Allocations and Recurring Donations: - When you add new Opportunities to an existing Recurring Donation, they automatically receive the Recurring Donation's allocations. - If you add a new Allocation, or modify or delete an existing Allocation of a Recurring Donation, Salesforce applies the new Allocation to all **open** Opportunities in the schedule of that Recurring Donation. Salesforce doesn't modify Allocations for closed Opportunities in the schedule. - Recurring donations are **NOT** automatically allocated to the default General Accounting Unit. If you enable default Allocations and run the Batch Create Default Allocations process, then all unallocated amounts in all Recurring Donations Opportunities are assigned to the default GAU. - When the amount on an Opportunity with an associated Recurring Donation is updated from null to a value, Allocations are created based on the Recurring Donation's GAU, instead of the Default Allocation GAU. - If Recurring Donation Allocations exceed the amount of the Opportunity, Salesforce only creates percent-based Allocations. For example, if a Recurring Donation has two Allocations, one for $10 and one for 50% of the donation amount, and a new $5 Opportunity is added, Salesforce only creates the 50% Allocation, and doesn't create the $10 allocation, as creating both would exceed the amount of the Opportunity. - If you enter more than one GAU Allocation on a Recurring Donation with the same General Accounting Unit and with the same amount or percent, only one Allocation populates down to the installment Opportunities. - If you refund a Recurring Donation installment, the Recurring Donation's fixed-amount GAU Allocations are adjusted to percentages that reflect the proportion of the original allocation amounts. For example: if a Recurring Donation of $50 has two fixed-amount allocations for $25 each, and then you refund an installment by $25, the allocations adjust to a 50% split. # Create an Action Plan Template An Action Plan Template is the blueprint for an Action Plan. Create an Action Plan Template and define Tasks, Document Checklist Items, or a combination of both. - **[Create the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Action Plan Template to which you can add Tasks and Document Checklist Items. - **[Add Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tasks are actions a grantmaker takes, similar to a to do list. For example, collecting supporting documentation about a grantseeker, such as their Form 990s, could be added as a Task. - **[Add Document Checklist Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Document Checklist Items allow grantmakers to define what documentation to collect and evaluate as part of the verification process about a grantseeker. - **[Publish the Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Publish the Action Plan Template so your grantmakers can create an Action Plan using the new template. ## Create the Template Create an Action Plan Template to which you can add Tasks and Document Checklist Items. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Name for your template. For example, US Due Diligence. 4. Optionally, enter a Description. 5. Leave Industries selected as the Action Plan Type. 6. Select a Template Owner. This defaults to the creator of the Action Plan Template. 7. If you want users to add their own Tasks and Documentation Checklist items to Action Plans they create, select **Let users add items to action plans**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Allow users to delete files from a Document Checklist item by updating [Change Item Deletion Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.admin_set_deletion_prefs.htm&type=5). 8. Select a Target Object, which is where the Action Plan will show up. For example, **Account**. 9. Click **Save**. ![Action Plan Template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/actionplantemplate1.png) ## Add Tasks Tasks are actions a grantmaker takes, similar to a to do list. For example, collecting supporting documentation about a grantseeker, such as their Form 990s, could be added as a Task. 1. From the Action Plan Template, select **New Task**. 2. Enter a Subject. For example, Collect IRS tax-exempt records (Form 990) for the previous two years. 3. Enter the number of Days that the Task is to be completed by. For example, 10. 4. Optionally, enter Comments about the Task. 5. Select a Priority. Medium is selected by default. 6. To make this a mandatory task, select **Required**. 7. Assign the task to either Specific User or the Action Plan Creator. Assigning the Task to a specific user means that the user will always own that Task, even if they didn’t create the Action Plan. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Continue to add as many Tasks as needed. ![Create a new Task.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/apt_tasks1.png) ![List of final Tasks in an Action Plan Template.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/apt_tasks2.png) ## Add Document Checklist Items Document Checklist Items allow grantmakers to define what documentation to collect and evaluate as part of the verification process about a grantseeker. 1. From the Action Plan Template, click **New Document Checklist Item**. 2. Enter a Name. For example, Form 990s. 3. If you have additional instructions, add them. 4. To make the Document Checklist Item mandatory, select **Required**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Continue to add as many Document Checklist Items as you need. ![Create a new Document Checklist Item.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/apt_dci1.png) ![List of final Document Checklist Items in an Action Plan Template.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/apt_dci2.png) ## Publish the Action Plan Template Publish the Action Plan Template so your grantmakers can create an Action Plan using the new template. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't edit or delete an Action Plan Template after it is published; you can only deactivate it. If you deactivate an Action Plan Template, you can't activate it again. 1. From the Action Plan Template, click **Publish Template**. 2. Click **Publish**. # Create an Admissions Connect Portal and Set Up the Basics Set up an Admissions Connect portal using the prebuilt template or a template that you created from another Experience Cloud site, and review the site's settings to ensure that it suits your institution’s needs. - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect components used in applicant portals support mobile devices. Components used in reviewer portals do not. - **[Create an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can build out your portal, you need to start with a template. Admissions Connect provides an Applicant Portal Template as a sample. To create your own template for either an applicant or reviewer portal, we recommend that you create the portal from a Digital Experience template. - **[Review Portal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While you're setting up your portal, turn off the setting for sending welcome emails to new members. You can turn it back on after you've finalized portal membership and are ready to launch. ## Before You Begin Admissions Connect components used in applicant portals support mobile devices. Components used in reviewer portals do not. ## Create an Admissions Connect Portal Before you can build out your portal, you need to start with a template. Admissions Connect provides an Applicant Portal Template as a sample. To create your own template for either an applicant or reviewer portal, we recommend that you create the portal from a Digital Experience template. 1. From Setup, search for then select **All Sites**. If you don't see this option, [enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_enable.htm) first. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select one of the templates that supports drag-and-drop components in Experience Builder (look for tiles that show the lightning bolt icon). We recommend using the Customer Service template. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name and the part of the site's URL that identifies the portal. 6. Click **Create**. ## Review Portal Settings While you're setting up your portal, turn off the setting for sending welcome emails to new members. You can turn it back on after you've finalized portal membership and are ready to launch. Also make sure to review all the portal options in the Administration workspace. For detailed setup information, see [Experience Cloud Site Setup Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_setup_basics.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Next Steps # Create an Advising Summary Use Einstein Advising Summary in Education Cloud to summarize a learner’s advising case.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To create advising summaries:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Prompt Template User
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case record of the advising case record type. 3. Go to the tab with the Einstein Summary component. 4. To accept the disclaimer and proceed, click **Got It**. Einstein analyzes and generates a summary of the case. 5. To regenerate a summary, click **Generate Summary**. 6. If necessary, edit or copy the summary. 7. Save your changes. The summary is saved as a comment related to the case. # Create an Affiliation with an Organization Use Affiliations in NPSP to track constituent relationships with organizations, including board memberships, employment, and foundation relationships. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Add Organizational Affiliations](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lqg0pgpjOcg). - **[Affiliations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your biggest champions are constituents who donate money or volunteer their time. As you identify the people who are deeply dedicated to your mission, you'll likely want to know more about them. In NPSP, track this information using Affiliations. - **[Create an Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use affiliations to track a constituent's connections to multiple organizations. - **[Modify an Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a constituent attains a new position, steps down, or joins a new organization, modify their Affiliations to track these changes. - **[Manage Multiple Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage and track a constituent's affiliations with multiple organizations. - **[Change a Contact's Primary Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Primary Affiliations indicate which organizations are most important for a Contact. Change a Contact's Primary Affiliation by editing the existing Affiliation record, or change the Primary Affiliation field on the Contact. - **[Manage Affiliations From the Account Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Just like on a Contact record, you can find Affiliation information when looking at the Account record. ## Affiliations Overview Your biggest champions are constituents who donate money or volunteer their time. As you identify the people who are deeply dedicated to your mission, you'll likely want to know more about them. In NPSP, track this information using Affiliations. Your biggest champions are constituents who donate money or volunteer their time. As you identify the people who are deeply dedicated to your mission, you'll likely want to know more about them, including their: - Current or former board membership - Volunteer experience - Donor-Advised Funds (DAF) participation - Family foundation involvement - Work history In NPSP, track this information using Affiliations. Affiliations link individuals (Contacts) with [Organization Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. Learn how to add and manage Organization Accounts."). Organization accounts are broadly used for any organization or business, such as grant makers, corporations, vendors, government institutions, and more. With Affiliations, you can track a Contact's current and former involvement with organizations over time as people move to new jobs or join boards at different organizations. Affiliations are used in other areas of NPSP as well. Use the [Primary Affiliation Contact field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Affiliations in NPSP to track constituent relationships with organizations, including board memberships, employment, and foundation relationships.") to track which organization is the most important for that person. Configure Affiliations to [automatically create soft credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") for the donor when you receive donations from their donor-advised fund or family foundation. ## Create an Affiliation Use affiliations to track a constituent's connections to multiple organizations. Let's look at an example of Affiliations in action. Hamilton Partners is a new nonprofit, focused on tackling sustainable business practices in the private sector. Its founder, Riley Hamilton, has deep connections in the nonprofit world—including important board memberships. We want to make sure Riley's robust background is reflected in the database. Let's create an Affiliation to connect Riley Hamilton to Hamilton Partners: 1. Find the Contact record you want to work with. 2. Click Related, then find the Organization Affiliations related list. 3. Click New. 4. Enter and select Hamilton Partners in the Organization field. 5. Enter any other information you have for the Affiliation record: 1. **Role** = Describe the person's organizational role. For example, Founder. 2. **Status** = Indicates whether the Affiliation is current or former. 3. **Start Date** and **End Date** = Timeframe for this Affiliation. 4. **Related Opportunity Contact Role** = Automatically creates a soft credit for the affiliated Contact when you enter a donation from this Organization Account. Learn more in [Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."). 5. **Primary** = Indicates that this is the most important Affiliation for this Contact. 6. **Description** = Enter any additional notes about this Affiliation. 6. Save the Affiliation record. The new Affiliation appears in the Related list for Riley's Contact record and on the Hamilton Partner's Organization Account record. Now, we can see Riley's current role at Hamilton Partners, along with the rest of their Affiliations. Here's how this information can help in our relationship building: - We know Riley's work experience. - We can easily check and identify potential conflicts of interest. - We can see if listed affiliated organizations have special arrangements, like matching gift policies. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Report on all Affiliations for your Contacts with a custom report. Learn more in [Create a Custom Report Type for Contacts and Affiliated Accounts](https://sfdo-docs.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/npsp_reports.pdf) in the NPSP Reports Workbook. ## Modify an Affiliation When a constituent attains a new position, steps down, or joins a new organization, modify their Affiliations to track these changes. Affiliations can change over time. Whether a constituent attains a new position, steps down, or joins a new organization, modify their Affiliations to track these changes. To edit an existing Affiliation: 1. Find the Contact record you want to work with. 2. Click **Related**, find the Affiliation to wish to modify, then click **Edit**. 3. Update the Affiliation information as needed. 4. Save the Affiliation record ## Manage Multiple Affiliations Manage and track a constituent's affiliations with multiple organizations. Riley has joined the Sustainable Schools Consortium as a board member and is involved in several committees. He'll still continue working with Hamilton Partners, but now will spend more time at Sustainable Schools going forward. To reflect this change in NPSP, let's create a new Affiliation for Sustainable Schools, and make it Riley's Primary Affiliation: 1. Find the Contact record you want to work with. 2. Click **Related**, then find the Organization Affiliations related list. 3. Click **New**. 4. In the Organization field, click **New Account**. 1. Populate the Organization Account information. 2. Save the record. 5. Enter the relevant information for the new Affiliation. 6. Select the **Primary** checkbox. 7. Save the Affiliation record. Now both Affiliations are shown in the Organization Affiliations related list on Riley's record. ![The Organization Affiliations related list showing two Affiliations.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/org-affiliations-list.png) ## Change a Contact's Primary Affiliation Primary Affiliations indicate which organizations are most important for a Contact. Change a Contact's Primary Affiliation by editing the existing Affiliation record, or change the Primary Affiliation field on the Contact. Primary Affiliations indicate what organizations are most important for a Contact. If you set an Affiliation to Primary and there's an existing Primary Affiliation for that Contact record, NPSP automatically switches the existing Primary Affiliation Status to Former and deselects the Primary checkbox. Change a Contact's Primary Affiliation by editing the existing Affiliation record, or change the Primary Affiliation field on the Contact. Here's how: 1. Find the Contact record you want to work with. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Clear the existing Primary Affiliation (if there is one). 4. Search for and select an Organization Account in the Primary Affiliation field. 5. Save the Contact record. A Contact can only have one Primary Affiliation record at a time, though a single Organization Account may be designated as the Primary Affiliation for multiple Contacts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note There are a few places you'll see the word “primary” in NPSP. To summarize, Primary Affiliation on a Contact record is the main organization connection for that person, whereas, Primary Contact on an Account record is the main point of contact for that organization. For more information, see [Primary Contact vs. Primary Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_primary_contact_vs_primary_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Primary Contact is the one go-to contact for all communication with an Organization or Household. A Primary Affiliation is the Account that the Contact is associated with more than any other Account, such as their employer."). ## Manage Affiliations From the Account Object Just like on a Contact record, you can find Affiliation information when looking at the Account record. Just like on a Contact record, you can find Affiliation information when looking at the Account record. Interested in reaching out to the Account's primary point-of-contact? Want to see if you have any matching gift information on file for a specific organization? A quick look at the Account record's Related tab has the information you need. Affiliations help with constituent engagement. For example, if Riley goes on a long vacation and is difficult to reach, check the Sustainable Schools Account to find other Affiliated Contacts that you can reach out to. To view the Affiliated Contacts for an Organization Account: 1. Find the Organization Account record you wish to view. 2. Hover over or click **Affiliated Contacts** in Related List Quick Links. ![The Affiliated Contacts related list showing three Affiliations.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/affiliations-related-list.png) # Create an Alumni Community Education Cloud provides Lightning components that you can use in your Experience Cloud site to help create a community where alumni can connect with each other. Create a profile page for alumni to share information about their education and professional experience, and a directory where users can search for and connect with one another. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See [Set Up Your Alumni Community](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Experience Builder to brand your alumni community in Education Cloud, add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes to provide an enhanced alumni experience."). # Create an Education Cloud Trial Org Get hands-on experience with Education Cloud at no additional cost. Choose a learning org with rich sample data or a base org to test your own use cases.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important The Education Cloud Prebuilt Apps is a Non-SFDC Application as defined under, and subject to the terms of, your Main Services Agreement (f/k/a the Master Subscription Agreement) with Salesforce. [https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements.jsp](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements.jsp) Trial orgs are intended for proof of concept and guided self-exploration. Each trial org expires in 30 days from the time you sign up. To sign up for a trial org: 1. Go to one of these trial org sign-up pages. [Education Cloud Learning Org](https://www.salesforce.com/form/sfdo/signup/education/education-cloud-learning-trial/): This fully configured org includes rich sample data and lets you see all the Education Cloud features in action. Use these orgs to see what a comprehensive enablement looks like. [Education Cloud for K—12 Learning Org](https://www.salesforce.com/form/industries/education/education-cloud-k-12-learning-trial-free-trial/): This org lets you use all of the Education Cloud features designed and set up for K—12 institutions. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Don’t use learning orgs for long-term projects or production environments. Use Base orgs for any implementation that you plan to convert and use for long-term environments. [Pre-Release Org](https://www.salesforce.com/form/sfdo/signup/education/pre-trial-ecda/): This org provides a sneak peek at upcoming release features. You can create these orgs only during sandbox preview windows. If the page doesn’t include a sign-up form, the preview window is closed. [Base Org](https://www.salesforce.com/form/sfdo/signup/education/education-cloud-base-trial/): This unconfigured org is a blank slate with only the necessary licenses and permissions. Use these orgs for quick proof-of-concept projects or general testing. 2. Enter the required information and click **Next**. 3. Read and agree to the main service agreement. 4. Click **Submit**. After your org is created, look for an email with login details. In your trial org, Education Cloud features and all required products for those features such as Salesforce Scheduler are already enabled. # Create an Education Portal Build a portal for your applicants, students, and alumni to access your institution's services.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create an education portal: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, you must enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&type=5). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. On the Digital Experiences page, click **New**. 3. On the Lightning Experience guided flow, choose the **Education Portal** template. Alternatively, you can choose Build Your Own to develop a custom site. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Provide a name for the site and click **Create**. 6. Click **Administration**. 7. Click **Members**. 8. Add System Administrator and all of your community profiles to the Selected Profiles section. 9. Save your changes. Use Experience Builder to customize and add features. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&type=5). If you have the required permissions but encounter errors while creating an Experience Cloud site, verify that your org has these Apex classes. To see your Apex classes, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. - `SiteLoginController` - `SiteLoginControllerTest` - `SiteRegisterController` - `SiteRegisterControllerTest` If your org doesn't have all of the required Apex classes, retrieve the missing classes from another org, such as a sandbox, and then deploy them to your org. See [Choose Your Tools for Developing and Deploying Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.code_tools_ant.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Create an Intake Assessment for a Support Program Create an Omni Process that shows assessment questions and captures responses when learners enroll in a program.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create assessments:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio Designer

AND

OmniStudio Runtime

1. Create an Omni Script assessment form: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **Select Questions**. 3. On the Create Form page, under Omni Script Details, enter a name. 4. Select the language. 5. Enter a type and subtype. The type and subtype are used to specify the criteria when you create sharing rules for Omni Process in step 3. 6. Under New Omni Script, click the **Edit step** icon and enter a name for the step. Add more steps if necessary. 7. To find questions, use the search field and filters, and then drag selected questions to the appropriate step. 2. Build the Omniscript: 1. Click **Build Omniscript**. 2. In the Build panel, find and drag **Integration Procedure Action** to the list of Omniscript elements. 3. Enter a name for Integration Procedure Action Properties. 4. Enter EDUProgramMgmt\_EnrollInProgram for Integration Procedure. 5. Activate the integration procedure. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Integration Procedures**. 2. Expand **EDUProgramMgmt/EnrollInPgm**, and then select **EnrollInPgm (Version 1)**. 3. To add or change the selections, customize the integration procedure. 4. Click **Procedure Configuration**, and then click **Activate Version**. 6. On the Build tab, drag **Navigate Action** to the list of Omniscript elements. 7. Under Navigate Action Properties, enter a name. 8. In Object API Name, enter ProgramEnrollment. 9. In Record ID, enter %programEnrollmentId%. 10. Click **Activate Version** and then click **Done**. 3. Create a sharing rule to enable access to the Omni Process: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Sharing Settings** under Security. 2. In the Sharing Rules related list for Omniprocesses, click **New**. 3. Enter a label and name for the rule. 4. Under Select your rule type, select **Based on criteria**. 5. Under Select which records to be shared, add the criteria as shown: | Field | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | | Designer Customization Type | equals | Discovery Framework | | Type | equals | _YourOmniscriptType_ | | Sub Type | equals | _YourOmniscriptSubtype_ | 6. Under Select the users to share with, select **Public Groups of All Customer Portal Users**. 7. Under Select the level of access for the users, select **Read Only**. 8. Save your changes. 4. Provide access to the required apex class to run Omniscripts: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles** under Users. 2. From the list of profiles, click **Customer Community Plus User**. 3. Under Enabled Apex Class Access, click **Edit**. 4. Under Available Apex Class, select **BusinessProcessDisplayController** and click **Add**. 5. Save your changes. # Create an Intake Assessment Question Create assessment questions to understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create assessment questions: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and developer name. 4. Select a data type, such as Text. 5. Select the category. 6. Enter the question text. 7. Select **Active**. 8. Enter any other details and save your changes. 9. Similarly, create more questions. # Create an Ongoing Job When you have Jobs with multiple Shifts occurring in the future, you need an easy way to automate the creation of those Shifts. (It would be tedious to manually enter each one!) Volunteers for Salesforce' Job Recurrence Schedules do the work for you. But first, you need to set up the ongoing Job: 1. From the Campaign detail page, click the Related tab. 2. On the Volunteer Jobs related list, click **New**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you wandered away from the Campaign, you can also go to the Volunteer Jobs tab and click **New**. You'll just need to select the Campaign. 3. Enter a Job name. 4. Select the **Ongoing** checkbox to indicate that this Job is ongoing. Keep in mind that this checkbox is mostly for reporting purposes and you still need to set up a Job Recurrence Schedule to actually implement recurring Shifts for this Job. 5. Select **Display on Website**. Selecting this option ensures that the Job will show up on your website. 6. Enter description information. The Job description appears on the website, so make it as appealing as possible. You can use formatting, pictures, and links to jazz up the listing. ![Create a new volunteer job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_volunteer_job_recurr.png) 7. Enter the location. The Location Street, Location City, Location State/Province, and Location Zip/Postal Code fields integrate with Google Maps, if you have it enabled. Admins can also configure V4S to display a corresponding map on your website. See [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.") for more information. 8. Enter any additional location information, for example, written instructions and a map to the event. ![Entering location information for a new volunteer job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_volunteer_job_recurr_location.png) 9. Optionally, link to a page on your website to provide more information. Highlight the text you want to link, click the link icon in the toolbar, and enter the URL. 10. Click **Save**. The new Job appears on the Campaign's Volunteer Jobs related list. Now that you've got an ongoing Job, you can set up the Job Recurrence Schedule. # Create and Assign a Pulse Check Create pulse checks with a template and assign them to learners to get their feedback.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To create and assign pulse checks: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Term Enrollments**. You can also assign pulse checks for learners from the list and related list view pages for Program Enrollment and Academic Term Enrollment. 2. Select the records as necessary, and then click **Assign Pulse Check**. 3. Enter a name for the pulse check. 4. Select a pulse check template. The category, type, and frequency field values are populated from the template and you can change them if necessary. 5. Select a case record type or support program to relate to the pulse check record. 6. Under Frequency and Schedule Settings, select the type, start date, and expiry in days. 7. If the type is recurring, select the schedule frequency, repeats on, and end date or end after number of recurrences. 8. Click **Next**, and then click **Assign**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - Select a start date for a recurring pulse check that's at least three days after the current date. - You can assign pulse checks only to the learners with active cases or program enrollments of the selected record type. - You can select up to 200 records at a time. - Only a support program can be related to pulse checks created from the program enrollment records. - You can’t modify the Omniprocess related to a pulse check template after pulse checks are created from the template. - To avoid issues with the score graphs, select a unique Omniprocess for each pulse check template. # Create and Assign an Opportunity Management Permission Set Create and assign a permission set to give users access to the Opportunity Management features.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create and assign a permission set: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. For Education Cloud Full Access permission set, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label for your opportunity management permission set, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name. For example, enter Education Cloud Full Access + Opportunity Management. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click your new permission set. 6. Click **Object Settings**. 7. Click **Academic Interests**, and then click **Edit**. 8. In Tab Settings, select **Visible**. 9. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 10. For Field Permissions, select **Edit Access**. 11. Save your changes. 12. Next to Academic Interests, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), select **Learning Programs**, and then click **Edit**. 13. For Field Permissions, select **Edit Access** for these fields. - Create Opportunity Record - Group Opportunities - Product 14. Save your changes. 15. Next to Learning Programs, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), select **Opportunities**, and then click **Edit**. 16. In Tab Settings, select **Visible**. 17. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 18. For Field Permissions, select **Edit Access** for these fields. - Account Name - Amount - Close Date - Description - Stage 19. Save your changes. # Create and Assign Educational Characteristics to Students To determine a student's eligibility for a course during a specific time frame, define and assign educational characteristics. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To create and assign educational characteristics: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. Create educational characteristic types, such as academic profile, undergraduate, or dean’s list. A type is a category of educational characteristics. You can create hierarchies among educational characteristic types, up to three levels. For example, you can have Academic Profile as the parent type of Undergraduate, and then nest Dean’s List below Undergraduate. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Characteristic Types**. 2. Click **New**, and enter a name and description. 3. Save your changes. 4. Repeat these steps for each educational characteristic type that you want to create. 5. (Optional) Assign each educational characteristic type a parent type. 2. Create identity-based educational characteristics, such as senior, first-generation, athlete, or English major. Each characteristic has an associated type. For example, senior is a characteristic of the Academic Profile type. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Characteristics**. 2. Click **New**, and enter a name and description. 3. Assign an educational characteristic type, and make it active. Only active educational characteristics are available for assignment to students. 4. Make the educational characteristic visible to students in the Course Search and Registration portal. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat these steps for each educational characteristic that you want to create. 3. Assign educational characteristics to students. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Characteristic Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select a student account, and select a student in the account. 4. Assign the student an educational characteristic. 5. Assign a predefined academic internal, or specify a date range. An educational characteristic assignment is valid only in the specified time frame. The time-bound assignments help you track a student’s history. For example, a student had an Athlete attribute in Fall 2024 but no longer has that attribute in Spring 2025. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - If you don’t specify an end date for a date range, the assignment remains active indefinitely. - Make sure that the date range completely overlaps with the academic session, term, or year of a course offering. Otherwise, the student loses their eligibility to register for a course offering in that year, term, or session. For example, the Spring 2026 term runs from January 1 to April 30, 2026. If you apply a date range of January 2 to April 30, 2026, the student is ineligible for the Spring 2026 term registration. - For the same student, the date range of one assignment record can’t fall within the date range of another record. For example, Assignment A has a date range of December 1, 2025 to January 1, 2026. If Assignment B has a date range of December 3, 2025 to January 1, 2026, Assignment B causes an error. 6. Save your changes. 7. Repeat these steps for each educational characteristic that you want to assign. We recommend that you create an automation to make assignments. For example, use Apex classes or a flow to assign educational characteristics automatically when a student declares their major. SEE ALSO: - [Enrollment Eligibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enrollment_eligibility_educhars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use educational characteristics to manage enrollment eligibility and communicate eligibility criteria to students during course registration. Registrars define and assign identity-based attributes to students that apply to specific time frames. The registration process evaluates a student's attributes against course requirements to determine their eligibility.") - [Prerequisites for Educational Characteristic Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prereqs_for_educhars_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you create educational characteristics and requirements for enrollment eligibility, set up Course Search and Registration.") - [Automate Tasks with Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow.htm&language=en_US) # Create and Configure Standard Profiles Set up standard profiles for Education Cloud users based on their roles in your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To add users to an Education Cloud Experience site: | Education Cloud Full Access | ## Configure Standard User Profile 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Standard User**. 3. Click **Assigned Apps**. 4. Click **Edit** and make Recruitment & Admissions visible. Optionally, you can set Recruitment & Admissions as the default application. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click **Profile Overview**. 7. Click **Object Settings**, and then click **Accounts**. 8. Click **Edit**. 9. Under Accounts: Record Types and Page Layout Assignments, select **Person Account**, **Secondary School**, and **College**. 10. Save your changes. ## Create Admissions Officer Standard User Profile 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles and then select **Profiles**. 2. Next to Standard User, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a profile name and save your changes. 4. Click **Object Settings** and make sure that the new profile has access to the desired objects. 5. Save your changes. ## Create Reviewer Standard User Profile 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles and select **Profiles**. 2. Next to Standard User, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a profile name and save your changes. 4. Click **Object Settings** and make sure that the new profile has access to the desired objects. 5. Save your changes. # Create and Customize List Views for Admissions Connect Help your staff stay focused by setting up list views that best support your institution’s application review process. - **[Default List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** List views are all about staying focused. List views let people view and access records. Admissions Connect provides some default list views to help you get started. These list views are managed, which means any field updates you make to them are overwritten by push updates. - **[Create or Customize a List View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom list views for your admissions team or for yourself based on your institution's application review process. For example, create a list view just for undergraduate applications for the fall semester applying to the B.S. in Computer Science program. - **[Add or Remove an Admissions Connect Mass Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Mass actions show as a button on a list view. These buttons allow you to select multiple records and perform an action on all selected items. Mass actions added to the List View layout show in all list views for an object. ## Default List Views List views are all about staying focused. List views let people view and access records. Admissions Connect provides some default list views to help you get started. These list views are managed, which means any field updates you make to them are overwritten by push updates. Application - All - Recently Viewed Application Review - My Application Reviews - Recently Viewed Application Material Mapping - All - Recently Viewed Application Material Type - All - Recently Viewed ## Create or Customize a List View Create custom list views for your admissions team or for yourself based on your institution's application review process. For example, create a list view just for undergraduate applications for the fall semester applying to the B.S. in Computer Science program. 1. From the Admissions Connect app, click the navigation menu and select an item such as Applications or Application Reviews. 2. In the list view, click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon_1.png) to open the List View Controls menu. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If a list view doesn't display, you likely have split view open. Change your display settings back to a table. ![Split view settings with the Display As options expanded to show the Table option selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/app_split_view_switch_table.png) 3. Click **New** and follow the prompts to create the new view. 4. Customize the list's filters. 5. To customize the fields, click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon_1.png) again, and then click **Select Fields to Display**. 6. Add the fields, then save your changes. For more information, see [Work with a List View for Rapid Reviews, Queue Pickup, and More](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "List views are your starting point for application verifications and reviews. List views help you keep track of what needs to be verified or reviewed.") ## Add or Remove an Admissions Connect Mass Action Mass actions show as a button on a list view. These buttons allow you to select multiple records and perform an action on all selected items. Mass actions added to the List View layout show in all list views for an object. Admissions Connect provides an Assign Reviewers mass action that lets you add reviewers to Applications, if you're a new customer. If you're an existing customer, configure an Assign Reviewers mass action button through a Visualforce Page first. Then, add this button to the Application object so that it's available to your admissions staff, or remove it. ### Configure an Assign Reviewers Mass Action Button 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Applications**. 2. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**, and then click **New Button or Link**. 3. Enter a Label, for example, Assign Reviewers, and then press Tab to populate the Name field. 4. From Display Type, select **List Button**. 5. From Behavior, select **Display in existing window with sidebar**. 6. From Content Source, select **Visualforce Page**. 7. From Content, select **BulkReviewerManagement \[BulkReviewerManagement\]**. 8. Save your changes. You can now add the button to the Application object as outlined in the next procedure. ### Add an Assign Reviewers Mass Actions Button 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object for the layout that you want to edit, for example, Application. 2. Click **Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic**. 3. Edit the List View layout. 4. Select or deselect the Assign Reviewers button that's listed under Custom Buttons. 5. Save your changes. For more information about the List View layout see the Other Layout Options section in [Customize Search Layouts to Show Results Users Want](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.customizing_search_layouts.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Create and Customize Reviews Create, customize, and share a side-by-side review workspace to quickly evaluate Funding Requests. - **[Create a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Review to ask for feedback from a user about a grantseeker's application. - **[Customize the Review Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about how to create a customizable review experience for your users. - **[Share a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Collaborate with external users by sharing a Review with them. Sharing a Review grants Read or Edit access depending on the Review Access Level granted. ## Create a Review Create a Review to ask for feedback from a user about a grantseeker's application. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Grants Management**. 2. Click the **Reviews** tab. 3. Click **New**. 4. Enter a **Review Name**. 5. Select a **Status**. 6. Search for and select an existing Funding Request. 7. Enter a **Due Date**. 8. If you're also providing feedback and completing the Review, complete the Submitted Date and Comments fields. 9. If you're assigning this to a person who will do the review in the grants portal, set the **Display Start Date**. 10. Save your changes. You can now customize the Review Workspace. ## Customize the Review Workspace Learn about how to create a customizable review experience for your users. Set up your reviewer's workspace to include all the records, fields, and attached files necessary to complete a review of the Funding Request. The Review Workspace displays record data in real time. 1. Go to a Review. 2. On the Review Workspace tab, click **Edit Workspace**. 3. Under **Review Field Set**, make sure you select the appropriate review field set. 4. Click **New Section**. 5. Name your section, and select whether to expand the section by default and whether to include attached files from the record. 6. Select the record and fields to include in the section. Include fields from any object supported by the User Interface API except the User and ContentDocumentLink objects. Review the list of User Interface API objects in [All Supported Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.uiapi.meta/uiapi/ui_api_all_supported_objects.htm). 1. In **Fields from**, select the Funding Request record or another type of record related to the Funding Request. 2. If needed, continue drilling down to other related records such as Applying Contact or Funding Program. 3. Select the fields you want to include from the object's available fields and move them to **Selected fields**. 4. Click **Add** or **Done**. 7. Some types of records, such as Requirements, have multiple records. Turn on **Show record** for all the records you want to include in the review. 8. If the record includes an attached file you want to include, turn on **Show file**. 9. Configure sections as needed by reordering them and deleting the ones that you no longer want. 10. Click **Edit Section** to change a section's settings. 11. When you're done, click **Save Workspace**. 12. Click the **Details** tab. 13. In **Assigned To**, find and select the reviewer. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're assigning this to a person who will review it in your grants portal, wait to assign them until after you share the review and related records. 14. Save your changes. 15. If you need to use this same setup for another reviewer, click **Clone** and adjust the Review Details for the other reviewer. The Review Workspace includes a side panel for the reviewer to fill out during the review. Customize the submitted statuses or the fields that appear in the side panel by updating the Reviewer Feedback field set. Learn more in [Set Up Submitted Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_submitted_statuses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define which Review Statuses equal a submitted state.") or [Manage Review Fields on the Review Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_review_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the fields a reviewer completes on the Review Workspace."). ## Share a Review Collaborate with external users by sharing a Review with them. Sharing a Review grants Read or Edit access depending on the Review Access Level granted. 1. Go to a Review record. 2. Click ![View more icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **Sharing**. ![Click Sharing to share a Review record with another user.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/ofm_share_review.png) 3. Select User, and then, choose the user to share the Review with. 4. Select a Review Access Level. 1. Read/Write lets the user read and edit the review. 2. Read Only lets the user see the Review record but not edit it. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat these steps for all the records related to the Review such as the Funding Request, Requirements, and any attachments. 7. In Setup, assign the portal user to the Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request permission set. # Create and Edit Gift Entry Batches Specify details about a batch in Gift Entry, including number of gifts and default values for fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create Gift Entry Batches](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bWFEcKeMwlg). - **[View Batches of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_edit_batches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View batches created with either Gift Entry or the legacy Batch Gift Entry in Gift Entry. - **[Create a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_edit_batches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you start entering gifts, set up your batch header details and determine what information users are required to enter. You can edit this information later, if necessary. - **[Edit Batch Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_edit_batches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating a batch, you can make changes. For example, after you create the batch and enter a gift, you want to update the Expected Count of Gifts field or set a default value for Donation Date. Edit the batch and make these changes. ## View Batches of Gifts View batches created with either Gift Entry or the legacy Batch Gift Entry in Gift Entry. To view gift batches: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click the **Batches** subtab. 3. Identify which tool created a batch by looking at the Form Template column. If Form Template is blank, the batch was created with the legacy Batch Gift Entry tool. ![Batches tab in Gift Entry showing the Form Template column highlighted across multiple batches, some created with the old Batch Gift Entry tool and some with Gift Entry.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/old_and_new_ge_batches.png) 4. Open the batch in the tool where it was created by clicking the Batch Name. ## Create a Batch Before you start entering gifts, set up your batch header details and determine what information users are required to enter. You can edit this information later, if necessary. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click **New Batch**. 3. Select the template to use for the batch. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Enter a Batch Name. We recommend using a unique name for each batch. 6. Enter other necessary information—such as a Description, the Expected Count of Gifts, and the Expected Total Batch Amount. 7. If you want to ensure that the count of gifts or the total amount of gifts saved to the batch matches the values you enter, select **Require Expected Totals Match**. 8. If you selected Require Expected Totals Match, then enter a value for at least one expected totals field: Expected Count of Gifts or Expected Total Batch Amount. 9. To enter recurring gifts in the batch, select **Allow Recurring Donations**. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Set default values for fields. If the template already has defaults, they appear here. If necessary, you can override the template default values for this batch. 12. **Save** your changes. If you set up and activated a batch number format, all Opportunities and Payments associated with this batch will include the batch number in the Batch Number field. Learn more in [Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches."). Now you're ready to [Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time."). If your batch includes Recurring Donations, click **Make Recurring** when entering the gift. ## Edit Batch Options After creating a batch, you can make changes. For example, after you create the batch and enter a gift, you want to update the Expected Count of Gifts field or set a default value for Donation Date. Edit the batch and make these changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't update the template you selected for this batch. Any changes you make don't affect records that you already saved to the batch. If you update default values, the updated values aren't copied to records already saved to the batch. You need to manually update the field values for existing records. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Go to the **Batches** subtab. 3. Select the name of the batch you want to update. 4. In the batch, click **Edit Batch Info**. 5. Make your changes. 6. **Save** your changes. # Create and Edit Intakes Use Intakes to collect information about potential clients so you can evaluate how to best help them. Intakes track everything from the initial inquiry to assigning a case manager, reviewing forms, conducting assessments, and enrolling in a program. You can also track the result of the Intake, for example, if the applicant was approved to receive services from your organization or referred to another provider for help. Intakes are a collection of information from Contact, Assessment, Program Engagement, and Case objects. An edit on an Intake also edits the record of that object. For example, changing a client’s phone number on an Intake also changes the phone number on their Contact record. - **[Create Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_intake_new_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Intakes from the Intakes tab or from an Inbound Referral. - **[Work With Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_intake_new_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Intakes include information about potential clients. - **[Automatically Add Intake Contact Information to Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_intake_new_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use a flow to automatically add the Contact information from the Intake record directly to the generated Action Plan tasks. After using the flow, the client's name and photo is visible on their intake tasks on the Home page. ## Create Intakes Create Intakes from the Intakes tab or from an Inbound Referral. ### Create Intakes Create a new Intake from the Intakes tab. 1. Click the **Intakes** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the Intake a name. Often, this includes the Intake date and the name of the potential client, but it could be something else depending on your organization's policies. 4. Optionally complete additional details, or you can add this information later. 5. Save your work. ### Create Intakes from Inbound Referrals If your organization uses [Inbound Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_inbound_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Inbound Referrals to track clients who have been referred to your organization.") to track potential clients who are referred for services from other organizations or between departments in your organization, you can create an Intake from an Inbound Referral. An Inbound Referral can only have one associated Intake. Creating an Intake from an Inbound Referral adds the intake information to the Intake field on the Inbound Referral. You won't be able to create another Intake if one already exists. 1. Click the **Cases** tab. 2. Click the case number of an Inbound Referral. 3. Click **Create Intake**. 4. The name of the Intake is the name of the associated Contact, if there is one, and the date. To edit the Intake name, click **Edit**, enter a new name, then click **Save**. ## Work With Intakes Intakes include information about potential clients. Intakes include an Intake Checklist (1, if configured), Client and other information (2), Intake Stage (3), and Intake Result (4). ![Intake screen with intake checklist, client information, intake stage, and intake result.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/intake_callout.png) ### Intake Checklist If [configured](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package.") by your Salesforce admin, the Intake Checklist (1) serves as a guide through the Intake process. It helps you follow the steps required by your organization and saves your progress as you mark items completed. Checklists can also help you navigate through the sections of an Intake. - To add an Intake Checklist: In the left sidebar, under Intake Checklist, select a checklist, then click **Create Checklist**. If you see an error for an inactive template, you can still use the checklist but you may want to let your admin know they need to publish an Action Plan Template. - To remove an Intake Checklist so that you can select a new one: Click ![the trash can icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/trashcan_gray.png), then click **Delete**. This deletes all of the tasks and Action Plans associated with the Intake Checklist. ### Client and Other Information If a Contact was added to an Intake, that information appears in the Client Information (2) section of the Intake. Editing Client Information on an Intake also edits the information on the related Contact record. You can also add files and add or update related records. - To add a Contact, in the Client Information section, search for a Contact by name, Client ID, or by birth date. The search includes all Contacts, not just Contacts who are also Clients. For example, you may see Contacts who are volunteers and donors, not just Clients. Select the Contact you want, then click **Select Existing Contact**. - To create a new Contact, click **Create New Contact**. The Contact fields are the same as when you create a Contact from the Contact tab but appear in a slightly different order. - If the Contact has a photo, it appears automatically. To add a photo, under Client Information, click **Upload Files** or drag a file. - If the Contact has a Client ID, it appears automatically. To add a Client ID, click **Manage Client ID**. Enter an ID or click **Generate Random Client ID**, then click **Update**. Your admin can configure the Client ID generator to meet your organization's needs. - Add or update demographic, contact, and emergency information. - Add files: - To add files to the Intake record only: Click **Intake Files**, then click **Add Files** or **Upload Files**. This is for files needed only during the Intake process. - To add files to the Intake record and the associated Contact record: Click **Client Files**, then click **Add Files** or **Upload Files**. This is for files needed throughout the client's service period. - Add or update related records: - Assessments: Add or edit Assessments that need to be completed as part of the intake process. - Program Engagements: Add or edit Program Engagements. - Outbound Referrals: Add or edit Outbound Referrals. ### Intake Stage and Result Intake Stages (3) are the stages of the intake process, from the initial inquiry to a final decision. Use Intake Stages to track the progress of Intakes. New Intakes default to the Not Started stage. You can manually change the stage of an Intake to In Progress, Awaiting Client Input, or In Review, all of which are considered open stages. To close an Intake, change the stage to Approved or Not Approved. Intake Results (4) capture your organization's decision to provide services to an applicant, to decline services, or to refer them to another provider. Your Salesforce admin can [edit the Intake Result options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and use Intakes for the nonprofit Case Management managed package."), but the default options are: Pending, Approved, Not Approved: Client Declined Services, Not Approved: Referred Elsewhere, Not Approved: Rejected. Intake Stages operate independently of Intake Results. For example, changing the Intake Stage won't change the Intake Results. - To change the Intake Stage: - If the currently-selected stage is complete and you want to progress to the next stage, click **Mark Stage as Complete**. - To select a different stage, click the stage name, then click **Mark as Current Stage**. - To change the Intake Result: 1. Under Intake Result, select a Result. For example, select **Approved** if you will offer the client services through your organization. 2. Add a close date. 3. Optionally provide information about the outcome of the Intake. For example, describe why the client was approved or not approved. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Optionally complete one of these follow-up steps depending on the Intake Result: - If the client is approved to receive services, click **New Program Engagement** to add the client to a Program. - If you will refer the client to another service provider, click **New Outbound Referral** to create an [Outbound Referral](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_outbound_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Outbound Referrals to track the referrals that you make for clients to other organizations.") for the client. ## Automatically Add Intake Contact Information to Action Plans Use a flow to automatically add the Contact information from the Intake record directly to the generated Action Plan tasks. After using the flow, the client's name and photo is visible on their intake tasks on the Home page. Before you get started, make a copy of the flow so you can modify it without overwriting the original. Here’s how: 1. In Setup, enter Process Automation in the Quick Find box and click **Flows** 2. Click **Action Plan After Insert Template**. 3. Click **Save As**. 4. Give your new flow a name. 5. Enter a description for your flow. 6. Save. That takes care of the basics. Here are some recommended optional configurations of your new flow. 1. Set up the Fault Path to determine what you want the flow to do if the tasks fail. 2. Add additional objects to copy from. 1. Edit the Check Target Object condition and add another possible outcome. 2. Add a New Get Record step to get the Contact from the Object. 3. Connect the two steps to the Has Who Id Check. 3. Save. 4. Activate the flow. Want to learn more about flows? Check out [Flow Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_builder.htm&language=en_US) and the related [Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/flow-basics). # Create and Edit Notes (Support Staff) Learn how to access, create, and format notes related to a student Case in Student Success Hub. - **[Access Your Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At different points in your workflow, you'll want to jot down a Note about a student. There are many ways to create Notes, which we'll get to in a moment. First, let's get familiar with where you can find your Notes in Student Success Hub. - **[Write a Note Related to a Student](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To write a Note related to a student, save time by starting the Note from the student record. - **[Format Your Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Notes support rich text formatting, so you can emphasize important details with bold or italic text. You can include bulleted lists and numbered lists, and even inline images. - **[Edit Your Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Only you or a Student Success Hub administrator can edit a Note that you created. Click into any Notes view and edit the Note text and details as needed. Remember to save your changes if they're not automatically saved. - **[Delete a Note](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Only you or a Student Success Hub administrator can delete a Note that you created. ## Access Your Notes At different points in your workflow, you'll want to jot down a Note about a student. There are many ways to create Notes, which we'll get to in a moment. First, let's get familiar with where you can find your Notes in Student Success Hub. - Click the app navigation menu and select **Notes**. - Or, click **Notes** in the utility bar in the footer and then click the pop-out icon to open Notes in a browser window over the app. You can resize the window as desired, and close it when you're done. In the Notes tab or in the pop-out Notes window, use the list view menu to select a list of all of your Notes, or a subset. ![The Notes list view selector showing list view options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_list_view_menu.png) - Finally, on a student record, go to the Notes tab to see a compact list view of your most recent Notes about the student. At the bottom of the Notes related list, click **View All** to open the list in its own subtab and see more details. ![Go to the Notes tab on the student record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_record_tab.png) ## Write a Note Related to a Student To write a Note related to a student, save time by starting the Note from the student record. 1. On a student record page, on the Notes tab, click **New**. In a higher ed Student Success Hub org, you can also click **New Note** in the Case highlights panel. 2. Write your note. The Note is automatically related to the student record Case. ![Start a Note from the student's Notes related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_new_from_case.png) 3. Update other details and visibility settings as needed. 4. When you're finished, click **Done** to save the Note. You can also create a Note from the Notes list view or by opening Notes from the utility bar: Just click **New**. If you create a Note in either of these ways, you'll need to [manually relate the Note](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to control the visibility of support notes, work with shared notes, and more in Student Success Hub.") to the student record. Make sure that you relate the Note to the student record _Case_, and not the student _Contact_ record. As long as the Note isn't marked as private, relating the Note to the student record Case makes it visible to other Users who have access to the Case. ## Format Your Notes Notes support rich text formatting, so you can emphasize important details with bold or italic text. You can include bulleted lists and numbered lists, and even inline images. ## Edit Your Notes Only you or a Student Success Hub administrator can edit a Note that you created. Click into any Notes view and edit the Note text and details as needed. Remember to save your changes if they're not automatically saved. If you've shared a Note with other Users, they can view the Note but they can't edit it. ## Delete a Note Only you or a Student Success Hub administrator can delete a Note that you created. 1. Open the Note in any view. 2. In most views, click **Delete**. If you're viewing the Note in the student record related list, click the action menu for the Note and select **Delete**. 3. Confirm the deletion. # Create and Maintain Searchable Data for Campuses and Programs To automatically create and maintain educational institution searchable profile records, configure the fields and records that you want to make available for filtering and searching. Then, turn on the custom Data Processing Engine definition and two custom flows that are required for Criteria-Based Search and Filter. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Populate Records and Fields to Present Your Campuses and Programs in Detailed Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_populate_records_and_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make learning programs, support programs, and campus information discoverable in Campus and Program Finder. Create and populate educational institution offering records based on specific filtering criteria. - **[Clone and Turn on the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine Definition Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_dpe_definition_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine definition template creates and maintains educational institution searchable profiles so that your data shows in Criteria-Based Search and Filter. The Data Processing Engine job updates educational institution searchable profile records and deletes them if these records no longer meet the job definition’s filtering criteria. - **[Clone and Customize Flows to Run the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine Job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_searchable_campus_data_dpe_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To run the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine job, configure the EDU Admissions: Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile flow or the EDU Admissions: Schedule Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile Job flow. - **[Enable Search By Location](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_search_by_location.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To allow users to search for addresses in a specific geographical range, optionally, turn on geocoding rules and update data manager longitude and latitude fields in Data Processing Engine. # Create and Manage Alerts (Support Staff) Use Alerts to take action when you have concerns about a student who needs support. Monitor Alerts at a glance and respond to Alerts that others create. - **[Access Alert Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access Alerts from an Alerts list view or from the student record. - **[Create an Alert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Alert to track a concern about a student. - **[Manage Alert Notifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help you stay on top of Alerts, your Student Success Hub administrator might have enabled automatic feed updates when Alerts are assigned. When automatic feed updates are enabled, Student Success Hub posts to an Alert's Chatter feed when the Alert is assigned to someone other than the User updating the Alert—either manually or because of Alert assignment rules. ## Access Alert Records Access Alerts from an Alerts list view or from the student record. - Click the app navigation menu arrow and select **Alerts**. Then select a list view to see the Alerts you have access to and some details about each one. Click the Alert number to open the Alert. - On any student record Case, click the **Alerts** tab to see related lists of Unresolved Alerts and Resolved Alerts related to the student. Click the action menu for any Alert and select **View** to open the Alert. ## Create an Alert Create an Alert to track a concern about a student. 1. On the Alerts list view page or on the Alerts tab of a student record Case, click **New**. 2. Select an Alert record type and then click **Next**. 3. Complete these fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Depending on how your org is configured, not all of these fields are available. Also, if your Student Success Hub administrator has enabled fields for relating the Alert to other objects, you might see those fields. However, no matter how many objects are listed, you can only relate an Alert to one object at a time. Student Contact Required. Confirm or select the Contact record for the student. Program Enrollment Specify a Program Enrollment only if you want to relate the Alert to the student's program of study. If you specify a Program Enrollment, you can't specify any other related object. Course Connection Specify a Course Connection only if you want to relate the Alert to one of the student's courses. If you specify a Course Connection, you can't specify any other related object. Is Closed Leave this field as is. It's typically updated automatically based on the Status field. Status Required. Priority Indicating priority can help you triage and sort Alerts by urgency. Comments Depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator has configured visibility, your comments may be visible to other users. Assign Using Active Assignment Rules If you're not sure whether to select this field, ask your Student Success Hub admin. Case Specify a Case only if you want to relate the Alert to a Case other than the student record Case, such as a facilities or IT help desk ticket. Reason These choices depend on the record type you selected. Student Record As long as you specify a Student Contact, specifying the Student Record isn't required. Student Success Hub automatically relates the Alert to the student record Case when you save the Alert. 4. Save the Alert. As the Alert creator, you can edit the Alert, change its status, change its owner, and delete it. Even if the Alert is assigned to a different owner, you as the creator retain access to this record. Other users who have access to the student record Case or the student Contact record may not have access to the related Alerts. ## Manage Alert Notifications To help you stay on top of Alerts, your Student Success Hub administrator might have enabled automatic feed updates when Alerts are assigned. When automatic feed updates are enabled, Student Success Hub posts to an Alert's Chatter feed when the Alert is assigned to someone other than the User updating the Alert—either manually or because of Alert assignment rules. ![Alert assignment Chatter post and notification in the header](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_alerts_notification.png) - The Alert assignment prompts a notification so that the assignee sees a notification badge when they log in to Student Success Hub. - The Chatter post includes an @mention of the assignee, which could prompt an email notification if the assignee has chosen to receive Chatter emails. This email notification is separate from the email notification option given that you can optionally select when changing the owner of an Alert. There might be a slight delay from when the assignment takes effect and when email notifications are sent. - Student Success Hub doesn't create the post or notification if an Alert is self-assigned. # Create and Manage Campaigns Create, manage, and track fundraising campaigns for your organization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: These features apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can create and manage campaigns. **Why**: Create campaigns and use source codes to track outreach efforts and measure performance. Tailor campaigns with audience details to reach the right people. Set up and manage campaign allocations. Track outreach and campaign trends with rollups for monitoring. SEE ALSO [Outreach Source Code Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_outreach_source_code_campaigns.htm&type=5) # Create and Manage Engagement Plans Use Engagement Plans to automatically create a series of predefined tasks to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series videos about [Engagement Plans](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VzpuBJV9_es) and [Levels with Engagement Plans](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rViKhzQHPBM). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see the [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm) for a list of major features in NPSP and how to configure them. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Engagement Plan is a set of tasks (literally a "plan") that helps you engage with your constituents. The most common example of an Engagement Plan is one that helps you track engagement activities for Major Gifts. Major donors (that is donors who are giving extremely large amounts of money to your organization) typically require a deeper level of engagement than your average donor. - **[Plan Ahead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Engagement Plans work best when the organization has a well-defined process with buy-in from individuals who will participate in the execution of the plan. Depending on the plan, this could be an extensive series of actions involving individuals from across the organization. - **[Create an Engagement Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Engagement Plan Template defines the set of tasks for the process. - **[Edit Tasks on an Engagement Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you need to make adjustments to the Engagement Plan Template, visit the Template record and click Edit. - **[Assign an Engagement Plan to a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Associate an Engagement Plan to a record. - **[Execute the Engagement Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the tasks assigned, your team is ready to execute the carefully crafted process this Engagement Plan supports. Tasks will show up on your team members' Home Page task lists and in reports. As they complete tasks, users should update the Task to a status of Completed. - **[Delete an Engagement Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete an Engagement Plan, the underlying tasks still exist, but task automation is not enforced for dependent tasks (dependent tasks won't be updated or assigned based on parent task completion). You can restore the Engagement Plan from the Recycle Bin, and task automation will resume. ## Overview An Engagement Plan is a set of tasks (literally a "plan") that helps you engage with your constituents. The most common example of an Engagement Plan is one that helps you track engagement activities for Major Gifts. Major donors (that is donors who are giving extremely large amounts of money to your organization) typically require a deeper level of engagement than your average donor. For example, an Engagement Plan with a major donor might include calling that donor to schedule a lunch, then having the lunch with the donor, then sending a follow-up email to the donor, and so on. You'd set up each of these activities as a task on the Engagement Plan, to be completed by a scheduled date. Engagement plans can be kicked-off manually by a development officer or automatically when used in conjunction with Levels. If used with Levels, the Engagement Plan starts when a donor reaches a certain Level, such as Platinum Donor. For more information, see [Create and Manage Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. Create and manage NPSP Levels based on your organization's practices."). There are many other use cases for Engagement Plans, including volunteer management, grant-making, client management, and sponsor management. This documentation will showcase a real-world scenario for Major Gifts, but the instructions are applicable for any use case. See Also: - [Moves Management with Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/moves-management-with-nonprofit-success-pack) ## Plan Ahead Engagement Plans work best when the organization has a well-defined process with buy-in from individuals who will participate in the execution of the plan. Depending on the plan, this could be an extensive series of actions involving individuals from across the organization. We recommend answering these questions before you start creating Engagement Plans in Salesforce: - What result do you want to achieve? - What series of actions will produce the result? Once you have a plan with a defined set of tasks and the team involved has given the thumbs up, you're ready to get started. But before you do, we wanted to give you an idea of what a plan might look like. We'll use a Major Donor Stewardship Plan as an example. - **Desired Result**: Donor renews gift the following year at the same or higher level. - **Series of Actions**: 1. Acknowledgements: - Day 1: Send Personal Email Acknowledgement - 7 days later: Phone Call Acknowledgement from Development Director 2. Acknowledgments: - Day 1: Send Personal Email Acknowledgment - 7 days later: Phone Call Acknowledgment from Development Director 3. Day 1: Add Donor to Honor Wall 4. Day 10: Handwritten Acknowledgment from the Executive Director 5. Day 60: Invitation from the Program manager to learn more or see the program in action 6. Day 180: Meeting Invitation extended from the Executive Director 7. Day 270: Development Director begins solicitation 8. Day 300: E.D. and Dev. Director make an Ask There might be further interactions happening outside this plan, such as invitations to exclusive events and spontaneous conversations, but we wanted to illustrate a thoughtful process that was determined to create the best chance of keeping that donor engaged year-to-year. ## Create an Engagement Plan Template The Engagement Plan Template defines the set of tasks for the process. To apply the process to a particular record, you must [assign the Engagement Plan template to the record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Engagement Plans to automatically create a series of predefined tasks to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management."). 1. Click the **Engagement Plan Templates** tab. 2. Click **New** to create a new Engagement Plan Template. 3. Give the Template a meaningful name, such as "Major Gift Follow Up". 4. Optionally configure additional settings: Automatically Update Child Task Due Date (1) If selected, dependent tasks will start based on their parent task completion. In our example, we want this option selected because we don't want the follow-up call (dependent task) to happen until after the email (parent task) has been sent. If the major gift officer is delayed in sending the email, the follow up call will happen seven days later (not seven days after the task is created). Default Assignee (2) If a Task doesn't have a named Assignee, this setting determines who is assigned the Task by default (Salesforce requires that all Tasks be assigned to a user). You can select either the User Creating Engagement Plan or the Owner of the Record that the Engagement Plan is associated with. Skip Weekends (3) If checked, due dates are automatically adjusted for weekends. For example, a Task completed on a Friday has a follow up Task two days later. Instead of having a due date of Sunday, that Task would be due the following Tuesday. Reschedule To (3) This is used only in conjunction with Skip Weekends. This would be typically be set to Monday, but if your organization is closed on Mondays, you could select a different day. Description (4) A meaningful description of the Template's use case. ![Create new Manage Engagement Plan Template screen, with fields numbered to match the descriptions in the text below.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/engagemt_plans_engplantemplate2.png) 5. Click **Add Task** to create the first task in the Engagement Plan. Some important details to remember: Days After For Task 1 in the process and other tasks that are not dependent, this field value pushes the due date out from the day of creation. For dependent tasks, it pushes the due date out from the due date of the parent task. For both types of tasks, the Days After setting respects the Skip Weekends setting (as described above). Send Email Enables the standard task notification email that is sent to the assigned user the moment the task is created. Reminder Enables the standard task reminder setting, which shows a pop-up reminder to the assigned user on the due date of the task Reminder Time Set the time for the reminder to pop up. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The reminder time is stored as a number representing "minutes after midnight." For example, a reminder time of "600" translates to 10 am. 6. Click **Add Task** to add another top-level task. Click **Add Dependent Task** to add a task that is dependent on the previously added task. 7. When finished, click **Save** at the top of the page. ## Edit Tasks on an Engagement Plan Template If you need to make adjustments to the Engagement Plan Template, visit the Template record and click Edit. ![Edit button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/engagemt_plans_edit.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Changes to the Template are not reflected in Engagement Plans created from the Template that are already assigned to records. ## Assign an Engagement Plan to a Record Associate an Engagement Plan to a record. 1. Navigate to the record where you'd like to create an Engagement Plan. For our example, it's a $50,000 donation that came in that should follow the Major Donor plan. 2. Click **New Engagement Plan** on the Engagement Plan related list. 3. The associated record (for our example, the Opportunity) should automatically be populated. ![Create Engagement Plan screen with an automatically populated Opportunity record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/engagemt_plans_create.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can only associate an Engagement Plan to a single record. If you try to connect an Engagement Plan to multiple records at the same time, such as Opportunity and Contact, you'll get an error message. 4. Click **Save**. Notice the Tasks from the Template now appear on the Engagement Plan record with the appropriate due dates and assignments. All of which are attached to the associated Opportunity record, so that your team can begin the stewardship plan. ![The tasks from the template appear on the Engagement Plan record with the appropriate information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/engagemt_plans_engplanrecord.png) ![Tasks related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/engagemt_plans_relatedtasks.png) You also see the Engagement Plan listed on the associated record's Engagement Plan related list. ## Execute the Engagement Plan With the tasks assigned, your team is ready to execute the carefully crafted process this Engagement Plan supports. Tasks will show up on your team members' Home Page task lists and in reports. As they complete tasks, users should update the Task to a status of Completed. To learn more about how Activity and Task records work, see [Activities](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=activities.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help & Training. **Dependent Tasks**: When you complete a Task with a dependent Task, the dependent Task's status is automatically updated from **Waiting on Dependent Task** to **Not Started**. **Engagement Plan**: As soon as you complete a single Task, the Status on the Engagement Plan updates from **Not Started** to **In Progress**. When the last Task is completed, the Status on the Engagement Plan is updated to **Complete**. ## Delete an Engagement Plan When you delete an Engagement Plan, the underlying tasks still exist, but task automation is not enforced for dependent tasks (dependent tasks won't be updated or assigned based on parent task completion). You can restore the Engagement Plan from the Recycle Bin, and task automation will resume. 1. Navigate to the record that the Engagement Plan is assigned to. 2. Scroll to the Engagement Plan related list. 3. In the row for the Engagement Plan, click ![Show more actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Delete**. The Engagement Plan is sent to the Recycle Bin. You can manually delete the tasks if you don't need them or if the Engagement Plan was assigned by mistake. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Melissa Barber, who also contributed to this documentation. # Create and Manage Gift Commitments Create, schedule, manage, and track gift commitments for your organization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: These features apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can create and manage gift commitments. **Why**: Create gift commitments with custom or recurring schedules. Easily associate incoming gifts with existing gift commitments. Manage gift commitments by updating the schedules, changing the commitment amount, updating the payment method, assigning gift designations, pausing and resuming the commitment, and closing gift commitments. SEE ALSO [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_gift_commitments.htm) # Create and Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates in Education Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create and manage Gift Entry Grid templates:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. Turn on the Gift Entry Grid. ## Create a New Gift Entry Grid Template Create Gift Entry Grid templates to customize the gift entry data capture for different fundraising scenarios. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Under Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, click **New Template**. 3. On the New Template window, select a template to clone as the basis for your new customized template. The Salesforce Gift Entry Standard Template is available as the first template you can clone. After you’ve created more templates, you can use those active templates to clone. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Give the new template a unique name and description. 6. Under Display Columns, customize the columns that you want to appear in the grid. - Edit (![edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png)) or delete (![delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/trashcan.png)) any of the columns listed. You can change the column label, set the column width, hide the column, make the column required, or change the functionality of the column completely. - Drag the columns to order them according to your preference. - Click **Add Column** to add new columns to the grid, and then click ![edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png) on the new column to specify the column’s content. Base columns on fields from the Gift Entry object or on Lightning Web Components. If you use components, in the Cell Edit Component field, set the cell functionality, and in the Cell Display Component field, set how the column is shown. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the hyperlink breadcrumbs at the top of the column to go back to the Display Columns list. Click **Cancel** to discard the template. - To set a window to open from a column, set the column’s Modal tab values. For more information, go to [Set up a Window to Open from the Gift Entry Grid](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize Gift Entry Grid templates to open windows directly from the grid. For example, you can set a payment window to open to capture payment details, and those details then populate in the grid. The default template indicates several windows in the grid with the expansion icon."). 7. If this template is the default single gift entry template, you can add a postprocessing step. If the conditions you’ve specified are met, this step opens after you’ve finished the entry of the gift. The postprocessing step can be any step that’s not currently supported by the Gift Entry Grid and that requires the ID of the Gift Transaction or Gift Entry record. For custom steps added within a column or modal and that need the Gift Transaction ID, create a record-triggered Flow, or some other automation, to run after the Gift Entry record is processed. For example, after processing the gift, you can add a step to create a gift tribute. 1. Under Gift Entry Post Processing, click **Add Step**. 2. On the Add Post Processing Component window, select a custom or packaged Lightning Web Component for the step. 3. To set the component visibility, click **Add Condition**, and then complete the fields and click **Done**. 4. Save your work. You can add a postprocessing step to any template, but it’s only used if the template is the default for single gift entry. 8. After your template customization is complete, save your work. Your new template is in the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates table. ## Set a Window to Open from the Gift Entry Grid You can customize Gift Entry Grid templates to open windows directly from the grid. For example, you can set a payment window to open to capture payment details, and those details then populate in the grid. The default template indicates several windows in the grid with the expansion icon. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Under Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, edit an existing template or click **New Template**. 3. To add a window, edit the column from which you want to open the window. 4. Click the **Modal** tab. 5. For the Modal Type, select **Lightning Web Components**. 6. Select a Lightning Web Component. The component can be a custom Lightning Web Component or the Gift Entry Grid fields modal. 1. To show your own custom Lightning Web Component in the window, select it from the Lightning Web Component Name field. 2. To show fields in the window, select **$GiftEntryGrid.FieldsModal** as the Lightning Web Component. The Fields modal supports strict entry into the fields you choose. 3. To customize the fields in the Fields modal, click ![Edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png). You can add visibility conditions and read-only rules, set the field as required or hidden, change the field label, and provide a field default value. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Hide any of the template default columns that you don’t want to see in the grid. You can still use fields that are hidden in postprocessing rules. 7. In the Modal Label field, enter an intuitive name for the window. 8. To specify your own icon for the window in the grid column,in the Modal Icon field, enter utility:. The icon defaults to utility:expand\_alt. You can find the icon API name in the [Lightning Design System 2 Utility icon library](https://www.lightningdesignsystem.com/2e1ef8501/p/83309d-icons). 9. To add an alternate window label, click **Add Label**. This alternate label is useful to provide a label change based on conditions. For example, "Create Donor" for a new donor or "Edit Donor" for updating an existing donor record. 1. On the Add Modal Alternate Label window, enter the name for the alternate label. 2. To add the condition that triggers the alternate label, click **Add Condition**. 3. For the condition, select a gift entry field, the operator, and the value that triggers the alternate label. For example, `Account ID (DonorId) Not Equals null`. 4. Click **Done**. 10. Save your work. ## Add Templates to Screen Template Name Picklist To use your customized Gift Entry Grid templates, add the template API names to the Screen Template Name picklist. After you add the API names to the picklist, users can select a template from the New Gift Batch window. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Under Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, note the API name of the templates that you want to make available for selection during batch gift entry. 3. Go to the Screen Template Name picklist field on the Gift Batch object using one of these methods. - In Gift Entry settings, from the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates section, click the **Object Manager** link. - In Settings, select Object Manager, go to the Gift Batch object, and open the Screen Template Name picklist field. 4. Add the template API names as values to the Screen Template Names picklist and save. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If the template is from a managed package, make sure to include the namespace and two underscores before the template API name. For example, Namspace\_\_CustomTemplate. 5. To change the template label from the API name, edit the picklist value, and in the Label field, enter the template name. 6. Save your work. After Salesforce refreshes, the new templates are available for selection in the New Gift Batch window. ## Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates Admins can manage Gift Entry Grid templates for their org. Customize the template, set it as a default, or delete it when it's no longer needed. Templates installed from a managed package can’t be changed. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. On the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates table, click ![actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) to manage the template. - To set a template as the default for single gift entry, click ![action menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select **Set As Single Gift Entry Default**. If the template you want to set as the default is from a managed package, first clone it, and then set the clone as the single gift entry default. - To edit a template, click ![action menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select **Edit**. You can change the column label, set the column width, hide or make the column required, or even change the functionality of the column completely. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Hide any of the template default columns that you don’t want to see in the grid. You can still use fields that are hidden in postprocessing rules. The Gift Entry (Editor Preview) window opens so you can customize the template. For more information, go to [Create a New Gift Entry Grid Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Gift Entry Grid templates to customize the gift entry data capture for different fundraising scenarios."). - To delete a template, first remove it from the Screen Template Names picklist, and then, on the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, click ![actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select **Delete**. SEE ALSO - [Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_map_custom_fields_to_use_during_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift.") - [Custom Lightning Web Components in Gift Entry Grid in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_entry_grid_customization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use templates to configure and customize the Gift Entry Grid to capture information and processes that are unique to your organization. Create and use a custom template for more flexible, accurate, and faster gift entry. Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid. Integrate with independent software vendor packages that handle payment processing and other functionality.") # Create and Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates in Nonprofit Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create and manage Gift Entry Grid templates:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. Turn on the Gift Entry Grid. ## Create a New Gift Entry Grid Template Create Gift Entry Grid templates to customize the gift entry data capture for different fundraising scenarios. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Under Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, click **New Template**. 3. On the New Template window, select a template to clone as the basis for your new customized template. The Salesforce Gift Entry Standard Template is available as the first template you can clone. After you’ve created more templates, you can use those active templates to clone. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Give the new template a unique name and description. 6. Under Display Columns, customize the columns that you want to appear in the grid. - Edit (![edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png)) or delete (![delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/trashcan.png)) any of the columns listed. You can change the column label, set the column width, hide the column, make the column required, or change the functionality of the column completely. - Drag the columns to order them according to your preference. - Click **Add Column** to add new columns to the grid, and then click ![edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png) on the new column to specify the column’s content. Base columns on fields from the Gift Entry object or on Lightning Web Components. If you use components, in the Cell Edit Component field, set the cell functionality, and in the Cell Display Component field, set how the column is shown. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the hyperlink breadcrumbs at the top of the column to go back to the Display Columns list. Click **Cancel** to discard the template. - To set a window to open from a column, set the column’s Modal tab values. For more information, go to [Set up a Window to Open from the Gift Entry Grid](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can customize Gift Entry Grid templates to open windows directly from the grid. For example, you can set a payment window to open to capture payment details, and those details then populate in the grid. The default template indicates several windows in the grid with the expansion icon."). 7. If this template is the default single gift entry template, you can add a postprocessing step. If the conditions you’ve specified are met, this step opens after you’ve finished the entry of the gift. The postprocessing step can be any step that’s not currently supported by the Gift Entry Grid and that requires the ID of the Gift Transaction or Gift Entry record. For custom steps added within a column or modal and that need the Gift Transaction ID, create a record-triggered Flow, or some other automation, to run after the Gift Entry record is processed. For example, after processing the gift, you can add a step to create a gift tribute. 1. Under Gift Entry Post Processing, click **Add Step**. 2. On the Add Post Processing Component window, select a custom or packaged Lightning Web Component for the step. 3. To set the component visibility, click **Add Condition**, and then complete the fields and click **Done**. 4. Save your work. You can add a postprocessing step to any template, but it’s only used if the template is the default for single gift entry. 8. After your template customization is complete, save your work. Your new template is in the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates table. ## Set a Window to Open from the Gift Entry Grid You can customize Gift Entry Grid templates to open windows directly from the grid. For example, you can set a payment window to open to capture payment details, and those details then populate in the grid. The default template indicates several windows in the grid with the expansion icon. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Under Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, edit an existing template or click **New Template**. 3. To add a window, edit the column from which you want to open the window. 4. Click the **Modal** tab. 5. For the Modal Type, select **Lightning Web Components**. 6. Select a Lightning Web Component. The component can be a custom Lightning Web Component or the Gift Entry Grid fields modal. 1. To show your own custom Lightning Web Component in the window, select it from the Lightning Web Component Name field. 2. To show fields in the window, select **$GiftEntryGrid.FieldsModal** as the Lightning Web Component. The Fields modal supports strict entry into the fields you choose. 3. To customize the fields in the Fields modal, click ![Edit icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_edit.png). You can add visibility conditions and read-only rules, set the field as required or hidden, change the field label, and provide a field default value. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Hide any of the template default columns that you don’t want to see in the grid. You can still use fields that are hidden in postprocessing rules. 7. In the Modal Label field, enter an intuitive name for the window. 8. To specify your own icon for the window in the grid column,in the Modal Icon field, enter utility:. The icon defaults to utility:expand\_alt. You can find the icon API name in the [Lightning Design System 2 Utility icon library](https://www.lightningdesignsystem.com/2e1ef8501/p/83309d-icons). 9. To add an alternate window label, click **Add Label**. This alternate label is useful to provide a label change based on conditions. For example, "Create Donor" for a new donor or "Edit Donor" for updating an existing donor record. 1. On the Add Modal Alternate Label window, enter the name for the alternate label. 2. To add the condition that triggers the alternate label, click **Add Condition**. 3. For the condition, select a gift entry field, the operator, and the value that triggers the alternate label. For example, `Account ID (DonorId) Not Equals null`. 4. Click **Done**. 10. Save your work. ## Add Templates to Screen Template Name Picklist To use your customized Gift Entry Grid templates, add the template API names to the Screen Template Name picklist. After you add the API names to the picklist, users can select a template from the New Gift Batch window. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Under Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, note the API name of the templates that you want to make available for selection during batch gift entry. 3. Go to the Screen Template Name picklist field on the Gift Batch object using one of these methods. - In Gift Entry settings, from the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates section, click the **Object Manager** link. - In Settings, select Object Manager, go to the Gift Batch object, and open the Screen Template Name picklist field. 4. Add the template API names as values to the Screen Template Names picklist and save. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If the template is from a managed package, make sure to include the namespace and two underscores before the template API name. For example, Namspace\_\_CustomTemplate. 5. To change the template label from the API name, edit the picklist value, and in the Label field, enter the template name. 6. Save your work. After Salesforce refreshes, the new templates are available for selection in the New Gift Batch window. ## Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates Admins can manage Gift Entry Grid templates for their org. Customize the template, set it as a default, or delete it when it's no longer needed. Templates installed from a managed package can’t be changed. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Gift Entry**. 2. On the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates table, click ![actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) to manage the template. - To set a template as the default for single gift entry, click ![action menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select **Set As Single Gift Entry Default**. If the template you want to set as the default is from a managed package, first clone it, and then set the clone as the single gift entry default. - To edit a template, click ![action menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select **Edit**. You can change the column label, set the column width, hide or make the column required, or even change the functionality of the column completely. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Hide any of the template default columns that you don’t want to see in the grid. You can still use fields that are hidden in postprocessing rules. The Gift Entry (Editor Preview) window opens so you can customize the template. For more information, go to [Create a New Gift Entry Grid Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Gift Entry Grid templates to customize the gift entry data capture for different fundraising scenarios."). - To delete a template, first remove it from the Screen Template Names picklist, and then, on the Gift Entry Grid Layout Templates, click ![actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select **Delete**. SEE ALSO - [Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_map_custom_fields_to_use_during_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift.") - [Custom Lightning Web Components in Gift Entry Grid in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_entry_grid_customization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use templates to configure and customize the Gift Entry Grid to capture information and processes that are unique to your organization. Create and use a custom template for more flexible, accurate, and faster gift entry. Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid. Integrate with independent software vendor packages that handle payment processing and other functionality.") # Create and Manage Gifts Learn how to create and manage gifts with GEM. - **[Launch Gift Entry Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_launch_gift_entry_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Launch the Gift Entry Manager app to access most of the tools and data you need for entering and managing gifts. - **[Gifts as Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_gifts_as_opportunities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how GEM uses Opportunity records to track gifts. - **[Get to Know the Single Gift Entry Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how the Single Gift Entry Form saves you time by letting you enter all the details of a gift on one page. - **[Manage Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_manage_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review NPSP documentation about managing donation allocations and single and multiple payment donations. # Create and Manage In-Kind Gifts An In-Kind Gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. Learn how to manage these kinds of gifts with Nonprofit Success Pack. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see the [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm) for a list of major features in NPSP and how to configure them. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_in-kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An In-Kind Gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. Examples of In-Kind Gifts include computers, food, clothing, equipment or professional expertise. In Salesforce, In-Kind Gifts should be kept separate from cash donations, as the value of the gift is not reported in the same manner as cash contributions. - **[Create In-Kind Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_in-kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create in-kind gift records with details such as contact or account, close date, in-kind gift type, and fair market value. ## Overview An In-Kind Gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. Examples of In-Kind Gifts include computers, food, clothing, equipment or professional expertise. In Salesforce, In-Kind Gifts should be kept separate from cash donations, as the value of the gift is not reported in the same manner as cash contributions. Before you even think about Salesforce, you should understand how your organization views and uses In-Kind Gifts. Do you consider In-Kind Gifts a component of your development program? Do you want to honor the donor's gift in your annual report at the same level as a cash donation? Do you need to track the gift item itself, such as donations of computer equipment that your organization refurbishes and donates to clients? The answers to these questions will guide you in configuring your setup in Salesforce. Make sure you understand how your organization wants to treat In-Kind Gifts before you start configuring your solution. Also, when it comes to In-Kind Gifts, it's important to distinguish between a thank-you and a receipt. Check the applicable laws for your country or municipality to be sure you're in compliance with how non-monetary gifts should be recorded and acknowledged. ## Create In-Kind Gifts Create in-kind gift records with details such as contact or account, close date, in-kind gift type, and fair market value. 1. Search for the Contact or Account for this gift. 2. On a Contact, click **New In-Kind Gift**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Depending on how your org is set up, you may need to click the More Actions drop-down (![Show more actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)) to find the New In-Kind Gift action. ![New In-Kind Gift button on the Contact header](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_inkind_gift.png) On an Account, click **New** in the Opportunity related list, and select the In-Kind Gift record type. 3. Fill in the information as needed. - **Close Date**: The date that you received the gift. - **In-Kind Type**: Select **Goods** or **Services**. - **Stage**: Indicate whether the gift has been Received, Not Yet Received, or Prospecting (the organization is attempting to collect the goods or services). You can also indicate Withdrawn if the donor has decided not to donate the gift after all. - **In-Kind Donor Declared Value**: If the Fair Market Value was dictated by the donor, check this box. If unchecked, it's assumed the organization will enter the Fair Market Value based on their own research. - **Fair Market Value**: The value of the In-Kind Gift if it were sold by the organization, or it's the fair market value of the service provided by the donor to your organization at the time of donation. - **In-Kind Description**: Enter a description of the gift. You can also insert pictures or links. ![In-Kind Gift entry form](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/in-kind_gifts_ikinfo.png) 4. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Thanks to Laura Maker from [Cloud for Good](https://cloud4good.com/) for her contributions to this article. # Create and Manage Levels NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. Create and manage NPSP Levels based on your organization's practices. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series videos about [Levels](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Yy9LH0RcYAk) and [Levels With Engagement Plans](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rViKhzQHPBM). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see the [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm) for a list of major features in NPSP and how to configure them. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. - **[Create a Level Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Level records to set up a Level structure to track constituent engagement. - **[Manually Recalculate Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Due to the processing involved, Level values are not applied instantly to Contacts, Accounts, and other objects for which Levels have been configured to display. Instead, Level values are updated as part of a nightly batch process. ## Overview NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. For example, you could define Levels for donors based on the total gifts they've donated over time. A donor who's donated $0 to $100 dollars would be at the Bronze Level, $101 - $1000 at the Silver Level, $1001 - $10,000 at the Gold Level, and so on. This information is important for helping to recognize milestones and determine how to continue building on and fostering the relationship. In addition, Levels work with Engagement Plans so nonprofits are able to outline what, who, how, and how often to communicate with the constituent and keep them moving up the ladder of engagement. Here's an example of a Level structure for Accounts: ![Level structure for accounts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/levels_acctslevels.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't let the field names scare you! NPSP provides drop-downs to choose from when you define and edit your Levels. Once the Level structure is in place, a nightly batch job updates the Level values on records for any objects you've configured to display Level data. For more information on configuring level data to display on Accounts, Contacts, or other objects, see [Configure Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about NPSP Levels, how to create new level fields, how to secure and provide access to the Level object and fields, and how to add value to target picklists."). ## Create a Level Structure Create Level records to set up a Level structure to track constituent engagement. 1. Click the **Levels** tab. (If you don't see it, click ![More icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), then search for Levels.) 2. Click **New.** ![Create Level screen](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/levels_createlevel.png) **Level Name (1)**—The Name that will appear in the Level field on the Account, Contact, or other object you choose. You must type in a name before you can enter any other fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you select the Target object before entering a name, you won't see values in any of the other drop-down fields. To fix this issue, clear all of the fields and enter the Level Name. You'll then be able to select a Target object and other values. **Target (2)**—The object that this Level applies to. Select Account, Contact, or another object for which Level values have been configured to display. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note By default, the available Target values are Account and Contact. See [Configure Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about NPSP Levels, how to create new level fields, how to secure and provide access to the Level object and fields, and how to add value to target picklists.") for information on configuring Levels for other objects. **Source Field (3)**—The field that will be totaled across all records to determine what Level the Contact or Account is in. For our example, we selected Total Gifts (a currency field), however, you can select any currency or number field. **Level Field (4)**—The custom field where you want the Level stored. Check with your administrator if you're not sure what to select here. **Previous Level Field (5)**—This field is optional. It stores the previous Level value if the Level changes. Check with your administrator if you're not sure what to select here. **Minimum and Maximum Amount (6)**—This defines the range of this Level. You can leave Minimum blank to cover all up to (but not including) the Maximum Amount. Likewise, you can leave Maximum Amount blank to cover all amounts over (and including) the Minimum Amount (such as your very top level). Remember, Amount is not necessarily currency. **Engagement Plan Template (7)**—If you want to have a series of Task Activities that are automatically generated when a Contact or Account reach a certain Level, this is where you would select that Engagement Plan. See [Create and Manage Engagement Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Engagement Plans to automatically create a series of predefined tasks to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management.") for information on configuring and using Engagement Plans. Make sure **Active** is checked and give your Level an appropriate **Description (8)**. 3. If this is the first Level you're creating, click **Save & New**. This will automatically clone the existing Level and adjust the Maximum and Minimum values. Just give the new Level a name. You can very quickly set up a series of Levels this way. Click **Save** on the final Level. ## Manually Recalculate Levels Due to the processing involved, Level values are not applied instantly to Contacts, Accounts, and other objects for which Levels have been configured to display. Instead, Level values are updated as part of a nightly batch process. To manually update Level values for all records, see [Run Level Assignment Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Since NPSP automatically calculates Level values on Accounts, Contacts, and other objects, it's important that you never directly update a Level field value on those objects. # Create and Manage Mandated Reports with Disclosure and Compliance Hub Organize questions and answers, and generate reports that can be easily accessed and tracked for mandated reporting requirements.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use cases include reporting for: - Integrated Postsecondary Education Data System (IPEDS) - Federal Student Aid (FSA) - National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS) - Council for Advancement and Support of Education (CASE) See Also: - [Disclosure and Compliance Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.netzero_setup_disclosure_and_compliance_hub.htm&type=5) # Create and Manage Memberships Memberships in Nonprofit Success Pack represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. Learn how to create and manage memberships with Nonprofit Success Pack. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see the [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm) for a list of major features in NPSP and how to configure them. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Memberships in Nonprofit Success Pack represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. It is up to the organization to decide the length and level of membership based on the donation amount. - **[Create a Membership](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating a Membership for an Account or Contact is just like creating any other type of donation. Simply use the New Membership option on a Contact or the New button on an Account. - **[Membership Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep in mind that Membership fields are calculated nightly by an automated process. Any manual update to the Membership fields on a Contact or Account will be overwritten by the nightly automated process. - **[When do Membership Values Roll Up?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The value of membership opportunity records rolls up to the related account or contact when certain criteria are met. ## Overview Memberships in Nonprofit Success Pack represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. It is up to the organization to decide the length and level of membership based on the donation amount. In NPSP, memberships are tracked through the Opportunity object. Memberships can't exist on an Account or Contact without an Opportunity, as any membership-related data on the Account or Contact is driven by that Opportunity. Any manual update to the Membership fields on a Contact or Account are overwritten by the nightly automated process. - **[Some info about Membership Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to standard functionality on the Membership Opportunity that you might expect, such as Membership start and end dates and Membership Level (Gold, Silver and Bronze), NPSP Memberships provide an additional rollup capability. The rollup collects donation information from related Membership Opportunities and aggregates it on a Household Account or Contact. ### Some info about Membership Rollups In addition to standard functionality on the Membership Opportunity that you might expect, such as Membership start and end dates and Membership Level (Gold, Silver and Bronze), NPSP Memberships provide an additional rollup capability. The rollup collects donation information from related Membership Opportunities and aggregates it on a Household Account or Contact. For example, if a Contact has two Memberships with two different groups, the Contact would have two Opportunities showing the amount donated to become a member (let's say $100 each). Those two amounts would be added together and appear in the Membership Information section on the Contact record. ## Create a Membership Creating a Membership for an Account or Contact is just like creating any other type of donation. Simply use the New Membership option on a Contact or the New button on an Account. 1. Search for the Contact or Account for this Membership. 2. On a Contact, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) at the top right corner of the record, then click **New Membership**. On an Account, click **New** in the Opportunity related list, and select the Membership record type. 3. Fill in the required fields: - **Opportunity Name**: Filled in by default, but you can change it if you like. - **Close Date**: The date you want to recognize the donation amount. - **Stage**: Set to Closed Won if you want to recognize the money on the first day of the membership. This will also generate a Payment for the amount entered. 4. Enter a donation **Amount**, **Membership Start Date**, **Membership End Date**, **Member Level**, and **Membership Origin**. Entering this information ensures that the Contact record will show complete rollup information. In this example, since the close date of the Opportunity is 10/2/2020 and the Stage is Closed Won, a Payment was generated. ## Membership Fields Keep in mind that Membership fields are calculated nightly by an automated process. Any manual update to the Membership fields on a Contact or Account will be overwritten by the nightly automated process. - **[Contact Membership Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The values of the membership and Opportunity fields are rolled up to the Contact and Household Account records. - **[Account Membership Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounts include the same fields as the Contact, as well as two additional fields. The primary difference between the Contact and Account fields is that for Household Accounts, the fields show membership information in aggregate for all Household members. ### Contact Membership Fields The values of the membership and Opportunity fields are rolled up to the Contact and Household Account records. These membership fields show up on the Contact: - **Membership End Date**: The most recent Membership End Date value from a Closed and Won Opportunity (Donation) defined as a membership type. - **Last Membership Level**: The most recent Membership Level from a Closed and Won Opportunity (Donation) that is defined as a membership type - **Total Membership Amount**: The aggregate sum total of the Amount from Closed and Won Opportunities (Donation) defined as a membership type. - **Last Membership Date**: The most recent Close Date from a Closed and Won Opportunity (Donation) that is defined as a membership type - **Last Membership Origin**: The most recent value from the Membership Origin field from a Closed and Won Opportunity (Donation) defined as a membership type. - **Membership Join Date**:The oldest Membership Start Date value from a Closed and Won Opportunity (Donation) defined as a membership type. - **Last Membership Amount**: The most recent Amount from a Closed and Won Opportunity (Donation) that is defined as a membership type - **Number of Memberships**: The total count of the number of Closed and Won Opportunities (Donations) defined as a membership record type. ### Account Membership Fields Accounts include the same fields as the Contact, as well as two additional fields. The primary difference between the Contact and Account fields is that for Household Accounts, the fields show membership information in aggregate for all Household members. The additional fields on the Account are: - **Membership Span**: A formula field that takes the value of the year of the Membership End Date field and subtracts the year of the Membership Join Date field. (In the screenshot above, this is 2021-2019 = 2) - **Membership Status**: A formula field using this formula: If the Membership End Date is earlier than today, Salesforce looks to see if the end date is older than 31 days from today. If so, it will show Expired. If less than 31 days, it will show Grace Period. If the Membership End Date has no value, this field will be blank. If the Membership is still active, the value will be Current. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The default Grace Period is 30 days. If you changed the Grace Period in NPSP Settings, the formula is adjusted accordingly. ## When do Membership Values Roll Up? The value of membership opportunity records rolls up to the related account or contact when certain criteria are met. 1. For new Membership records, all of the following must be true: - Amount field must a have a value ($0 is an acceptable value). - Opportunity Stage must be a Closed/Won type (Posted, or some other user-defined stage value that has the Type set to Closed/Won). 2. For updates to existing membership records, one of the following must be true: - The Stage must change from an Open or Closed/Lost stage type to a Closed/Won stage type. - The Amount value must change. - The Close Date must change. - The Account Name value must change. # Create and Merge Party Relationship Groups Using UI Flows with Ease Save time when you create and merge party relationship groups. Using the New Group UI flow, case managers can group participants belonging to a collective unit, like a household, as members of a party relationship group, and specify member roles and relationships. They can also add related contacts, groups, and business accounts, and specify relationships with the group and its members. Using the Merge UI flow, case managers can combine two-party relationship groups and create a group having members, related contacts, and other related records from both the groups. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. **Who**: To create party relationship groups using the New Group UI flow, case managers need the Group Membership permission from the Group Membership permission set license. To merge party relationship groups using the Merge UI flow, case managers need the Group Membership and the Merge and Split Groups permissions from the Group Membership permission set license. **Why**: Case managers can group case or complaint participants or participants forming a collective unit, such as a household, using the streamlined New Group UI flow. Previously, case managers created a party relationship group and then created a record for each member, related contact, group, or business account that they had to add to the group. They created a record for every relationship between two members and between a member and a related contact. Similarly, they created records for relationships between the group and its related groups and business accounts. The New Group UI flow creates these various records based on the details entered by the case manager. The flow simplifies the grouping of participants and reduces data entry effort for case managers. Case managers can merge one group with another group using the Merge UI flow. Previously, to move members, related contacts, or other records from one group to another, case managers updated relationship records that specified group association. The Merge UI flow updates relationship records based on case manager input. The flow simplifies the merge operation and reduces the effort for case managers. # Create and Set Up an Action Plan Template for Applications Create an action plan template to represent your application, add each application stage definition record as tasks to your action plan template, and assign the template to a Program Term Application Timeline record.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create and set up an action plan template for applications: | Education Cloud Full Access | Watch the video to see how to set up an action plan template for your application. If you aren’t able to watch the view in full screen, open the video on a new tab: [Create Applications with Salesforce for Education: Create an Action Plan Template](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/VbQArxBxVKcTWibBVQLMft). - **[Create an Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an action plan template to represent your application. A separate action plan template is required for each application that you create, but you can use a single action plan template for multiple programs. - **[Add Tasks to Your Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign each application stage definition record to your action plan template. - **[Assign Your Action Plan Template to a Program Term Application Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the action plan template that represents your application to a program term application timeline record. ## Create an Action Plan Template Create an action plan template to represent your application. A separate action plan template is required for each application that you create, but you can use a single action plan template for multiple programs. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the action plan template. For example, Undergraduate Application. 4. If required, enter a description for the action plan template. 5. Select **Industries** as the action plan template. 6. Select **Preliminary Application Reference**. as the target object. 7. Save your changes. ## Add Tasks to Your Action Plan Template Assign each application stage definition record to your action plan template. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click your action plan template. 3. Click **New Individual Application Task**. 4. Enter a name for the individual application task, such as Profile Stage. 5. Find and select the application stage definition associated with this task. For example, **Profile Stage**. 6. To make this task mandatory for the application, select **Required**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Repeat this process for each stage of the application. 9. To change the order of the stages, click **Reorder**, drag the stages to the desired position, and save your changes. 10. Click **Publish Template**. ## Assign Your Action Plan Template to a Program Term Application Timeline Add the action plan template that represents your application to a program term application timeline record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure that you create Program Term Application Timeline records for your application. See [Create Supporting Records for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_supporting_records_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Program Term Application Timelines**. 2. Click a program term application timeline record. 3. Click ![Actions Menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and then select **Edit**. 4. For Action Plan Template Version, find and select your action plan template. 5. Save your changes. # Create and Share Reviews Create and share Funding Request reviews with your team. - **[Create a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_share_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Review to ask for feedback from a user about a fundseeker’s application. After you create the Review, view it on the Funding Request’s Review tab. - **[Share a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_share_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Collaborate with external users by sharing a Review with them. Sharing a Review grants Read or Edit access depending on the Review Access Level granted. ## Create a Review Create a Review to ask for feedback from a user about a fundseeker’s application. After you create the Review, view it on the Funding Request’s Review tab. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Reviews**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a **Review Name**. 4. Select a **Status**. 5. Search for and select an existing Funding Request. 6. In Assigned To, search for and select the reviewer. 7. Enter a **Due Date**. 8. If you're also providing feedback and completing the Review, complete the Submitted Date and Comments fields. 9. Save your changes. ## Share a Review Collaborate with external users by sharing a Review with them. Sharing a Review grants Read or Edit access depending on the Review Access Level granted. 1. Go to a Review record. 2. Click ![View more icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **Sharing**. ![Click Sharing to share a Review record with another user.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/ofm_share_review.png) 3. Select User, and then, choose the user to share the Review with. 4. Select a Review Access Level. 1. Read/Write lets the user read and edit the review. 2. Read Only lets the user see the Review record but not edit it. 5. Save your changes. # Create and Update Campaign Members Through an Opportunity Configure NPSP to automatically add a Contact to a Campaign when you enter a donation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Automatic Campaign Member Management](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5t7KBgyNVmA). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This article assumes you're familiar with how Campaigns work in Salesforce. If you're not already familiar with Salesforce Campaigns, see [What are Campaigns and How Do They Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofits use Campaigns to plan and track fundraising appeals, solicitations, events, advocacy campaigns, and other outreach activities.") Also see the [Campaigns documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/htviewhelpdoc?id=campaigns_def.htm&language=en_US). - **[Campaign Members and Opportunities Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack includes many automatic campaign actions triggered by opportunities. For example, campaign member statuses are automatically updated when a related opportunity is closed. - **[Setup—Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To automatically create Campaign Members through an Opportunity, you need to ensure that your org is set up to do so. - **[Create Campaign Members Through an Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you specify a Contact as the Opportunity's Primary Contact, NPSP automatically adds that Contact as a Campaign Member to the Opportunity's related Campaign. - **[Update Campaign Member Status Through an Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can automatically update Campaign Member Status, right from the Opportunity object as well. - **[Opportunity Stages, Campaign Member Statuses, and Actions on the Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Opportunity's Stage and the value in the Opportunity's Primary Contact Campaign Member Status field determine the behavior of the Campaign Member record. If the Contact is not already a Member of the Campaign, Salesforce creates a new Campaign Member record. Otherwise, Salesforce updates the existing Campaign Member record for the Contact. ## Campaign Members and Opportunities Overview Nonprofit Success Pack includes many automatic campaign actions triggered by opportunities. For example, campaign member statuses are automatically updated when a related opportunity is closed. Let's say you want to make an appeal to a bunch of Campaign contacts. Your organization makes the appeal and the donations come in. Wouldn't it be nice to be able to enter those Opportunity donations in Salesforce and have the contacts' Campaign Member Statuses updated automatically, on the Campaign? The Nonprofit Success Pack does that for you, and much more, with actions triggered by the Opportunity Stage, Primary Contact, Primary Campaign Source, and Primary Contact Campaign Member Status fields on the Opportunity object. Great! Campaigns are related to Opportunities through the Primary Campaign Source field on the Opportunity: ![An Opportunities sample page with the Primary Campaign Source & Primary Contact Campaign Member Status fields highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/camp_members_thru_opp_pricampsrc.png) The Primary Contact Campaign Member Status field lets you specify the Member Status for that Contact on that related Campaign. Here's what it looks like on the Campaign's Campaign Members related list: ![A Campaign Members sample page showing a Contact field.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/camp_members_thru_opp_memberslist.png) ## Setup—Before You Begin To automatically create Campaign Members through an Opportunity, you need to ensure that your org is set up to do so. There are three settings in NPSP Settings that control this feature: - Automatic Campaign Member Management - Campaign Member Responded Status - Campaign Member Non Responded Status To access or change these settings: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations**, then click **Campaign Members**. 3. Select **Automatic Campaign Member Management**. 4. Optionally, enter a Campaign Member Responded Status. The value entered is used as the default for ALL Campaign Members that are automatically added or updated through Automatic Campaign Member Management. If you leave this field blank, Salesforce uses the first status marked as "Responded" in your list of Campaign Member Statuses. If you enter a value that doesn't already exist in your list of Statuses, it will be added to the list. 5. Optionally, enter a Campaign Member Non Responded Status. The value entered is used as the default for ALL Campaign Members that are automatically added or updated through Automatic Campaign Member Management. If you leave this field blank, Salesforce uses the first status that is NOT marked as "Responded" in your list of Campaign Member Statuses. If you enter a value that doesn't already exist in your list of Statuses, it will be added to the list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you require different statuses for different Campaigns, we recommend that you leave this field blank and carefully curate the Campaign Member Statuses for each of your Campaigns. To [manage Campaign Members Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_customize_member_status_lex.htm), navigate to your Campaign and click the Campaign Members Statuses related list. 6. Click **Save**. ## Create Campaign Members Through an Opportunity When you specify a Contact as the Opportunity's Primary Contact, NPSP automatically adds that Contact as a Campaign Member to the Opportunity's related Campaign. 1. Enter your new Opportunity donation, and specify a Primary Contact. 2. Specify the Campaign to which you want to add this contact. 3. (Optional) Set the Primary Contact Campaign Member Status if you want to set their status in the Campaign as well. See below for more details. ## Update Campaign Member Status Through an Opportunity You can automatically update Campaign Member Status, right from the Opportunity object as well. 1. Locate an existing Opportunity donation with a Primary Contact. 2. Set the Primary Contact Campaign Member Status. See below for more details. ## Opportunity Stages, Campaign Member Statuses, and Actions on the Campaign The Opportunity's Stage and the value in the Opportunity's Primary Contact Campaign Member Status field determine the behavior of the Campaign Member record. If the Contact is not already a Member of the Campaign, Salesforce creates a new Campaign Member record. Otherwise, Salesforce updates the existing Campaign Member record for the Contact. Closing an open Opportunity with a blank Primary Contact Campaign Member Status field will also update the member's status. For example, if the Opportunity Stage is an Open value and the Primary Contact Campaign Member Status field is blank, then Salesforce will assign the first non-Responded value to the Campaign Member. If you later update the Opportunity to a Closed/Won stage, then Salesforce will automatically update the Campaign Member to the first Responded value. You can use omit in the Primary Contact Campaign Member Status field to leave the Contact's current Campaign Member Status is unchanged. The following table shows Campaign Member actions as they relate to Opportunity stage types and Primary Contact Campaign Member Status values:
Opportunity Stage Type Opportunity Primary Contact Campaign Member Status Value Campaign Member Action
Closed/Won blank Contact's Campaign Member Status updated with Campaign's first Responded value.
Open blank Contact's Campaign Member Status updated with Campaign's first non-Responded value.
Any omit Contact's current Campaign Member Status is left unchanged. If the Contact is not already a Member of the Campaign, no Campaign Member record is created.
Any Any text value

If the Campaign Member Status does not already exist, Salesforce creates it. Contact's Member Status is updated to this value.

Note
Note You can edit the Campaign Member Status to a Responded value by going to the Campaign record, clicking the Advanced Setup button (in Salesforce Classic only), and editing the status to check Responded. The Campaign Member records will update to match.
# Create and Use Reusable Collections Build program plans more efficiently with reusable collections, which are course groups that appear in multiple program plans. For example, you can create a “General Education” collection of courses that applies to several different program plans. ## Create a Reusable Collection - You can create a reusable collection as a learning program with the Learning Program Wizard. Then, in the Program Plan Builder, when you add the Reusable Collection element, enter that learning program as the learning achievement. See [Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program."). - You can also create a reusable collection in the Program Plan Builder with the Learning Achievement properties section of the Elective Courses element. You can enter the name of the new reusable collection in the Learning Achievement field, and then add courses directly in the properties panel. ## Considerations for Using Reusable Collections - A learning program defined as top-level can’t be a reusable collection in another program plan. - When you create a program plan with a reusable collection, the reusable learning program plan is related to the learning program plan requirement record. - If you select a reusable collection that has a learning achievement with an Achievement Group record type, only the related courses show in the program plan summary view. # Create Another Learning Course Version Create another version of an existing learning course to capture changes to its name, credits, requirements, or other details without affecting students enrolled in earlier versions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create another learning course version: Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows: Manage Flow
Before you begin, create your own active version of the EDU Course Operations: Update Learning Status flow. This flow sets each version's status to Draft, Published, or Archived based on whether the version is active, so that related records and program plans show the correct versions. Another version of a course replaces the prior one and satisfies the same requirements. Earlier versions stay intact with their enrollment data. Multiple versions of a course can be active simultaneously to serve different student cohorts during a transition. When you're ready to retire a prior course version, make it inactive. On the Experience Cloud site, students continue to see the version they enrolled in, so their progress and records stay accurate. To create another learning course version: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Courses**. 2. Select the latest version of an existing learning course and click **New Version**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Always create course versions in the Learning Wizard. Manual updates to learning, learning outcome, or learning achievement records in a version chain break the link that identifies which version a student took. To change a learning achievement, create another course version in the Learning Wizard. 3. Enter new course version details. 1. Update the name for this course version. 2. Enter a change description. 3. Make this version active. 4. Update other course details. 4. Update details of prerequisites, corequisites, pre/corequisites, linked courses, recommendations, and other criteria. For example, to assign specific versions of learning courses as prerequisites, go to the Prerequisites tab. For Achievement Type, select **Learning Courses**, and then select the correct version of the prerequisite learning course. To review the version information of the selected learning course, click **View Details**. 5. Update learning outcomes. 6. Save your changes. After you create another course version, the learning course record shows its version number and change description. Review the full version history on the Learning Course Versions tab. SEE ALSO: - [Manage Courses, Programs, and Learning Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learning_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Learning Wizard or Business APIs in Education Cloud to manage your courses, programs, or other learning offerings.") - [Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") # Create Application The Create Application flow automates how the application initially starts for your grantseeker. This involves retrieving information about the Funding Program and user’s Contact information, autofilling fields on the application, and creating the application record. Without this flow, a grantseeker can’t apply for a Funding Request without making permission updates to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile. ![Overview of the Create Application flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/create_application.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Decision: Is Guest User? Checks if the user is a guest user or site user.
3. Get Records: Query Funding Program Searches for and stores the Funding Program record to use in the Decision step.
4. Decision: Is Funding Program Active? Checks if the Funding Program is active. If it’s not active, an error occurs.
5. Get Records: Query Community User's Contact Searches for the user’s Contact information.
6. Screen: Fill Out Application

Interface for the user to fill out the application.

Note
Note The default fields a user can update are Requested Amount and Requested For. You can add additional fields or components such as the Custom Managed Components.
7. Assignment: Autocomplete Application

Autofills several fields on the application, including:

  • Application Date

  • Applying Contact

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request Name

  • Requested Amount

  • Requested For

  • Status: In Progress

  • Applying Employee
8. Create Records: Create Application Creates the application. This creates a new Funding Request record.
9. Screen: Thank You Presents a confirmation message thanking the user.
10. Screen: Application File Allows the user to upload files to their application.
11. Screen: Navigate to the New Application Redirects the user to the newly created application page.
# Create Application Learn how the Create Application flow processes a funding request application. - **[Create Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Create Application flow automates how the application initially starts for your applicant. This involves retrieving information about the Funding Program and user's Contact information, autofilling fields on the application, and creating the application record. ## Create Application The Create Application flow automates how the application initially starts for your applicant. This involves retrieving information about the Funding Program and user's Contact information, autofilling fields on the application, and creating the application record. Without the Create Application flow, a fundseeker can't apply for a Funding Request without making permission updates to the Fundseeker Plus Login profile. ![Overview of the Create Application flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_application.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Decision: Is Guest User? Checks if the user is a guest user or site user.
3. Get Records: Query Funding Program Searches for and stores the Funding Program record to use in the Decision step.
4. Decision: Is Funding Program Active? Checks if the Funding Program is active. If it’s not active, an error occurs.
5. Get Records: Query Community User's Contact Searches for the user’s Contact information.
6. Screen: Fill Out Application

Interface for the user to fill out the application.

Note
Note The default fields a user can update are Requested Amount and Requested For, but you can add additional fields and components.
7. Assignment: Autocomplete Application

Autofills several fields on the application, including:

  • Application Date

  • Applying Contact

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request Name

  • Requested Amount

  • Requested For

  • Status: In Progress

  • Applying Employee
8. Create Records: Create Application Creates the application. This creates a new Funding Request record.
9. Screen: Thank You Presents a confirmation message thanking the user.
10. Screen: Application File Allows the user to upload files to their application.
11. Screen: Navigate to the New Application Redirects the user to the newly created application page.
# Create Applications Use Omnistudio components and Education Cloud objects to create applications for your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Creating an application involves setting up a series of interconnected objects in a specific order. Work through the topics in this section to configure these objects: - **Action Plan Templates (APTs):** Define the structure of the application. - **Render Methods:** Control how the application appears. - **Stage Definitions:** Set up the workflow. - **Program Term Application Timeline (PTAT) records:** Connect programs and timelines to the **New Application** window. - **[Plan and Prepare Your Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_plan_and_prepare_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare to create, accept, and manage applications in your institution. Identify the application stages and the Omnistudio components that are used for each stage, and understand the process of creating applications. - **[Set Up Your Application Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_application_stages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create application stage definition records to represent the different stages of your application, and copy and use Education Cloud Omniscripts and Flexcards to collect and show applicant information. - **[Set Up Application Campus Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_campus_preferences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Omnistudio components that let applicants select and rank preferred campus locations during the application process. - **[Build Your Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_build_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Application Render Method records and Application Render Method Assignment records to build your application. Application render method records identify the Omniscript or Flexcard used to collect or show information. Application Render Method Assignment records link Application Render Methods with Application Stage Definitions. - **[Create and Set Up an Action Plan Template for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an action plan template to represent your application, add each application stage definition record as tasks to your action plan template, and assign the template to a Program Term Application Timeline record. # Create Appointments (Support Staff) Learn how to schedule support appointments with students in Student Success Hub. - **[Schedule an Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For appointments that you schedule in advance, create them in the Appointment Manager or from the student record. Remember, don't use your Calendar to create support appointments. You can schedule one-on-one appointments with a single student, or group appointments with multiple students and even other support staff members. - **[Schedule a Follow-Up Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While viewing an appointment in the Appointment Manager, you can quickly schedule a follow-up appointment. Scheduling follow-up appointments from the Appointment Manager saves time because details such as the invitees' names and the appointment's Location, Topic, and Subtopic are automatically filled out. - **[Log a Walk-In Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For appointments that aren't scheduled in advance, log a walk-in appointment from the Appointment Manager when a student drops in. Logging walk-ins is quick and easy. You can create walk-in appointments at any time and for any duration—even during times that you've designated as "not available" on your Calendar. Walk-ins are for individual advising appointments only. You can't log a walk-in group appointment. - **[Schedule an Appointment for Another Staff Member](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Scheduling an appointment in advance for others on your team is similar to scheduling an appointment for yourself. ## Schedule an Appointment For appointments that you schedule in advance, create them in the Appointment Manager or from the student record. Remember, don't use your Calendar to create support appointments. You can schedule one-on-one appointments with a single student, or group appointments with multiple students and even other support staff members. 1. Click **New Appointment** in the Appointment Manager or on the Appointments tab of a student record Case page. 2. Specify the appointment details. Invitee(s) Search for and select one or more students from the list of suggestions, which can include both your own students as well as students from success teams that you're not a member of. If you're a member of the success team, you see a badge. You can also invite other support staff—anyone who's a Student Success Hub User. As you type, the search field suggests up to 15 people or the size of the success team, whichever is larger, and it shows success team members before unassigned support staff. Location Choose an Appointment Location that you've specified in your Availability Settings. Web Meeting When you specify a virtual Location, Student Success Hub selects the Web Meeting option automatically and populates the Web Meeting Link and Additional Connection Information fields with the details from your virtual Appointment Location. You can enter a different web meeting URL or connection details if desired. You'll be able to join the web meeting by clicking a button on the Appointment Details panel in the Appointment Manager, and your students will be able to click or tap a button to join the virtual meeting from the portal. If you specify a virtual Appointment Location that doesn't have a static URL, you can manually enter a URL in the Web Meeting Link field and provide any optional Additional Connection Information. Be sure to include the http:// or https:// prefix in the web meeting link. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You must create the virtual meeting separately, using a third-party service. Topic Choose a topic. Subtopic Choose a subtopic, if available for the selected Topic. Appointment Subject Enter an optional subject for the appointment. If you don't provide an Appointment Subject, Student Success Hub concatenates and uses the selected Topic and Subtopic. The Appointment Subject displays in both the agenda preview on the left side of the Appointment Manager as well as in the complete agenda in the Appointment Details panel. Description Enter an optional description for the appointment. Date and Time Choose a predefined or one-off time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note In Predefined Availability, you can choose any available time in the recurring availability blocks you've defined in your Availability Settings, regardless of which Topics and locations you've associated with the blocks. This ability to override your defined Availability Settings gives you the greatest amount of flexibility and control over your own scheduling. (But don't worry—students scheduling appointments in the portal can't override your defined Availability Settings.) 3. Save your changes. When you save the appointment, Student Success Hub creates an Appointment record as well as an Appointment Attendee record and an Event record for you and for each invited participant. Your Event record is informational only and is mainly for keeping your Calendar in sync. While you can access the Event record from your Calendar, avoid interacting with it in your Calendar. Always access and work with Appointment and Appointment Attendee records from the Appointment Manager or other points of access from the student record Case. ## Schedule a Follow-Up Appointment While viewing an appointment in the Appointment Manager, you can quickly schedule a follow-up appointment. Scheduling follow-up appointments from the Appointment Manager saves time because details such as the invitees' names and the appointment's Location, Topic, and Subtopic are automatically filled out. 1. Select an appointment in the Appointment Manager, then click **Action** below the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels and select **Schedule Follow-Up**. 2. Update the agenda details as needed. 3. Specify a date and time. - For a routine follow-up appointment, select from the time slots on the Predefined Availability tab. - For a non-routine follow-up (such as an appointment that is shorter or longer than your standard appointment length, or to schedule during a time that isn't reserved for support appointments), click the One-Off Appointment tab and specify a date and custom Start and End times. ![Specify a non-routine appointment time in the One-Off Appointment tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_followup_custom_advising_event.png) 4. Save the appointment. ## Log a Walk-In Appointment For appointments that aren't scheduled in advance, log a walk-in appointment from the Appointment Manager when a student drops in. Logging walk-ins is quick and easy. You can create walk-in appointments at any time and for any duration—even during times that you've designated as "not available" on your Calendar. Walk-ins are for individual advising appointments only. You can't log a walk-in group appointment. 1. Click **New Walk-In** in the Appointment Manager. 2. Specify the appointment details. Invitee Search for and select a student from the list of suggestions, which can include both your own students as well as students from success teams that you're not a member of. Location Choose an Appointment Location that you've specified in your Availability Settings. Topic Choose a topic. Subtopic Choose a subtopic, if available for the selected Topic. Description Enter an optional description for the appointment. Duration If the default appointment duration isn't appropriate for this appointment, choose another duration. Student Success Hub automatically sets the appointment start time to the time that you clicked the **New Walk-In** button and calculates the end time based on the duration. 3. Save the appointment. To adjust the walk-in's start time, end time, or other details, click **View Appointment** in the Appointment Manager to edit the appointment's details. ## Schedule an Appointment for Another Staff Member Scheduling an appointment in advance for others on your team is similar to scheduling an appointment for yourself. 1. Starting from the Appointment Manager or from the Appointments related list (in the Appointments tab) on the student record Case, click **New Appointment**. 2. In the Assigned Support Staff Member field, search for and select a person's name. 3. In the Invitee(s) field, search for and select one or more students. 4. Specify other appointment details as needed. 5. Save the appointment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When scheduling appointments for someone else, you typically have enough access to their Calendars to see their availability for scheduling. Depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator has configured Calendar sharing, individual support staff members may want to further extend Calendar access to specific people. Each staff member can edit their own sharing settings on the Calendar tab by clicking the action menu next to the My Events calendar. Use the **Share Calendar** option to specify who else gets access. ![Share Calendar option in the action menu next to My Events calendar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_calendar_share_calendar.png) # Create Approval Processes An approval process automates how records are approved. You can create an approval process for a task, email alert, field update, or outbound message. See [Add Automated Actions to an Approval Process](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=approvals_automated_actions.htm&type=5). - **[What is Your Approval Process?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create an approval process, we recommend mapping out your process. - **[(Optional) Consider Your Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider what fields you want to use in your approval process and make adjustments, if needed. For example, to assign a reviewed Funding Request to the Funding Program Manager for approval, you'll need to add a user lookup field to the Funding Request object. - **[Build the Approval Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define the criteria for moving a record through an approval process such as the funding status. - **[Define Approval Steps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Approval steps are milestones within your process that determine where the record moves next. - **[Add Workflow Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Adding a workflow action is the last step to create an approval process. You can create an action for approvals as well as rejections. - **[Activate the Approval Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you are ready to activate the approval process, click Activate. There can only be one active version of each approval process at a time. If you need to change anything in the approval process in the future, it must be deactivated. ## What is Your Approval Process? Before you create an approval process, we recommend mapping out your process. A few things to consider: - Who submits the record for approval? - When should a record be submitted for approval? - How should an approver be notified there is a pending approval? - Who needs to be included in the approval process? - What are the approval steps? - What are the criteria for each approval step? - What needs to happen when the record is approved or rejected? In our example, let's say you want to create an approval process for all reviewed Funding Requests to go to the Funding Program Manager for approval. We'll walk through how to set this up. ## (Optional) Consider Your Fields Consider what fields you want to use in your approval process and make adjustments, if needed. For example, to assign a reviewed Funding Request to the Funding Program Manager for approval, you'll need to add a user lookup field to the Funding Request object. Make sure to add the new field to the Funding Request page layout, then use Lightning Process Builder to populate the User field on the Funding Request object with the Funding Program Manager from the related Funding Program record. See [Lightning Process Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=process_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help for more information. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Select **Funding Request** from the list of objects. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Select **Lookup Relationship**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Select **User** from Related To. 9. Click **Next**. 10. Field Label and Field Name are auto-populated, but update them if you want another name for this field. 11. Optionally, enter a Description. 12. Optionally, enter Help Text. 13. Click **Next**. 14. Select the profiles that have edit access to the new field. 15. Click **Next**, then **Save**. ## Build the Approval Process Define the criteria for moving a record through an approval process such as the funding status. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Approval in the Quick Find box, then select **Approval Processes**. 3. Select an object from Manage Approval Process For. For this example, select **Funding Request**. 4. Click **Create New Approval Process**, then select **Use Standard Setup Wizard**. 5. Enter a name in the Process Name field. For example, Funding Request Approval. 6. Press tab to autofill the Unique Name field. 7. Enter a description in the Description field, then click **Next**. 8. Specify the criteria a record must meet to be submitted for review and approval in Specify Entry Criteria. In this example, the Funding Request needs to be in a Reviewed status to continue to the Funding Program Manager for approval. 1. Select **Funding Request: Status** from Field. 2. Select **equals** from the Operator field. 3. Enter Reviewed as the Value. ![Specify entry criteria](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_build_approval_process_1.png) 9. Click **Next**. 10. Optionally, you can add automated approvals by selecting a value from Next Automated Approver Determined By. 11. Select the Record Editability Properties. For example, select **Administrators ONLY can edit records during the approval process** to lock the record from edits outside of admins. 12. Click **Next**. 13. Search for then select a template from the Approval Assignment Email Template field. This notifies an approver that an approval request is assigned to them. This template is used for all steps in this process. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also set up approvals in Chatter. See [Let Users Respond to Approval Requests from Chatter](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=approvals_chatter.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 14. Configure the approval page layout by adding or removing Available Fields to Selected Fields. Fields added to the Selected Fields list display to the approver. ![Select fields to display](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_build_approval_process_2.png) 15. Click **Next**. 16. Select the users allowed to submit a Funding Request for approval. Refer to What Is Your Approval Process? to determine who should be allowed. In this example, the Funding Request Owner is selected by default. 17. Click **Save**. 18. With **Yes, I’d like to create an approval step** selected, click **Go!** to continue to Define Approval Steps. ## Define Approval Steps Approval steps are milestones within your process that determine where the record moves next. In our example, a Funding Request always needs approval from the Funding Program Manager. Let’s create an approval step for that scenario. 1. Enter a Name, such as Funding Program Manager Approval. 2. Press tab to autofill the Unique Name field. 3. Enter a description in the Description field. 4. Enter a Step Number if you have more than one step in your process. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Specify the criteria for the record to enter this approval step. For example, “All records should enter this step” submits every record for approval. If there are exceptions, select **Enter this step if the following**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Select the approver based on the process you outlined. For example, select **Automatically assign to approver(s)** then search for and select a specific User to be the approver. 9. Click **Save**. ![Select assigned approver](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_define_approval_steps.png) 10. With **Yes, I’d like to create a new approval action for this step now**, click **Go!** to continue to Add Workflow Actions. ## Add Workflow Actions Adding a workflow action is the last step to create an approval process. You can create an action for approvals as well as rejections. In this example, we'll create a new approval task. 1. Select **Yes, I’d like to create a new approval action for this step now**. 2. Select **Task**. 3. Click **Go!** ![Create new approval task](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_add_workflow_actions_1.png) 4. Search for then select a user in the Assigned To field. For example, **Aileen Davis**. 5. Enter an identifiable Subject name to reflect the task. For example, Funding Program Manager Approval. 6. Press Tab to autofill a Unique Name. 7. Select a Due Date. For example, **Funding Request: Application Date plus 7 days** requires Aileen to review this request 7 days after a user has submitted their application. 8. Optionally, select Protected Component. 9. Select a Status for the task. 10. Select a Priority. 11. Optionally, add additional information to the Comments field. 12. Click **Save**.![Configure approval task](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_add_workflow_actions_2.png) ## Activate the Approval Process When you are ready to activate the approval process, click Activate. There can only be one active version of each approval process at a time. If you need to change anything in the approval process in the future, it must be deactivated. ![Activate approval process](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_activate_approval_process.png) # Create Assessment Questions for Pulse Checks Create an Omniscript form with questions and configure its sharing settings for your pulse check. Create a decision matrix to map the response values, and configure the flow to calculate the response scores.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up Pulse Checks:

Education Cloud Full Access
1. Create assessments as needed. 1. Create an Omniscript form and add your assessment questions. See [Create an Assessment with Discovery Framework](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.create_an_assessment_with_discovery_framework.htm). 2. Click **Build Omniscript**. 3. Select **Pulse Check** as the usage type, and then save your changes. 4. In Omnistudio Designer, click the Save Responses remote action element to select it. 5. In Remote Action Properties, expand Messaging Framework, and then select **PubSub**. 6. Enter assessmentId as the key. 7. Enter %assessmentId% as the value. 8. Save your changes. 9. Preview and activate the form. 2. Create a sharing rule to provide access to the Omniprocess: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings and select it. 2. In the Sharing Rules related list for Omniprocesses, click **New**. 3. Enter a name and label for the rule. 4. Under Select your rule type, select **Based on criteria**. 5. Add the criteria as shown in this table: | Field | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | | Designer Customization Type | equals | Discovery Framework | | Discovery Framework Usage Type | equals | Pulse Check | | Type | equals | YourOmniScriptType | | Sub Type | equals | YourOmniScriptSubType | 6. Under Select the users to share with, select **Public Groups of All Customer Portal Users**. 7. Under Select the level of access for the users, select **Read Only**. 8. Save your changes. 3. Configure a standard decision matrix to calculate the response values scores for the submitted pulse checks. See [Create Standard Decision Matrices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.create_standard_decision_matrices_0.htm). 1. Create a standard decision matrix with these settings: | Column Header | Header Type | Data Type | | --- | --- | --- | | Question | Input | Text | | Option | Input | Text | | ResponseValueScore | Output | Number | 2. Populate the decision matrix with the questions and options from your pulse check assessment, and enter an appropriate response value score for each option. | Question | Option | ResponseValueScore | | --- | --- | --- | | How do you feel today? | Not so good | 0 | | How do you feel today? | Fine | 1 | | How do you feel today? | Good | 2 | | Are you excited about next week’s class? | Not looking forward to it | 0 | | Are you excited about next week’s class? | Maybe/A little excited | 1 | | Are you excited about next week’s class? | Yes, can’t wait! | 2 | You can also create a decision matrix for multiple assessments. 4. Use the Update Assessment Question Response Score flow template to create a record triggered flow, and then activate the flow. See [Configure and Clone the Flows to Evaluate Assessment Scores](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.hc_admin_assessments_configure_assessment_score_flow.htm). When a pulse check response is submitted, the response value score field for the related assessment question response record is updated. The response score values are used to plot the score graph for the learner's pulse check. - **[Create Assessment Questions with Icon Responses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_assessment_questions_with_icon_responses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the icon data type in Education Cloud to create pulse check assessment questions that students can respond to with emojis. Create a rating scale by assigning numeric values to the icon responses and view the student’s sentiments over time with score graphs. # Create Assessment Questions with Icon Responses Use the icon data type in Education Cloud to create pulse check assessment questions that students can respond to with emojis. Create a rating scale by assigning numeric values to the icon responses and view the student’s sentiments over time with score graphs.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To create assessment questions:

Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Icon** as the data type. 4. To make this question active, select **Active**. 5. Under Response Values, select an icon, and then enter its label and numeric value. 6. To add more rating levels, click **Add Rating Level**. 7. If needed, provide other relevant details. 8. Save your changes. An assessment question version choice is created with the rating level details. 9. Icon data type doesn’t require a decision matrix for response score calculation. However, if your assessment questions have icon and other data types, ResponseValueScore gets set to null. To avoid this: 1. Clone the Update Assessment Question Response Score flow. 2. Modify the section of the new flow as shown. ![Update Assessment Questions Response Score Flow Modified](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_update_assessment_question_response_score_flow_modified.png) 3. Activate the flow. See Also: - [Set Up Pulse Checks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_pulse_checks.htm&language=en_US) # Create Competencies A student's competencies are crucial for guiding their development. Students can track this progress in the portal throughout their academic journey, including competencies acquired through coursework, cocurricular and extracurricular activities, and off-campus experiences like internships and community service. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create competencies: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - Define values for the Category picklist in the Competency object using the Object Manager. By default, these picklists have no values. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Competencies**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name. 4. Select the category of the competency. 5. Enter a description. 6. Save your changes. # Create Custom Installment Periods for Legacy Recurring Donations NPSP Legacy Recurring Donations includes five commonly used installment periods, but you can add and remove custom installment periods as needed. For example, create an installment period for gifts made three times a year. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As of April 29th, 2020, Nonprofit Success Pack offers a new version of Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm) - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_cust_install_periods_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes five default installment periods, but you can add or remove installment periods as needed. - **[Create a Custom Installment Period](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_cust_install_periods_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a new installment period in NPSP Settings then add it to Installment Period picklist field on the Recurring Donations object to make it available to users. - **[Delete Custom Installment Periods](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_cust_install_periods_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete an installment period, Salesforce removes it from the installment period drop down list for new Recurring Donations going forward. Installments on all pre-existing Recurring Donations will remain intact. ## Overview NPSP includes five default installment periods, but you can add or remove installment periods as needed. Recurring Donations comes with these installment periods by default: - Monthly - Quarterly - Yearly - Weekly - 1st and 15th If you need additional periods, you can create them. Creating custom installment periods is a two-step process. You need to create the custom installment period in NPSP Settings, and then add the custom installment period to the actual picklist field. You can also delete installment periods from the list of options, but Salesforce will not delete installment periods for Recurring Donations you've already created. ## Create a Custom Installment Period Create a new installment period in NPSP Settings then add it to Installment Period picklist field on the Recurring Donations object to make it available to users. 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, click the **NPSP Settings** tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations Custom Installment Periods**. 3. Click **New Custom Installment Period**. 4. In the Name box, enter the picklist name for the custom installment period (for example, “Tri-Yearly”). 5. Enter a Time Period Frequency and select a Time Period Type. For example, if you are creating a Tri-Yearly custom installment period, you would enter 4 and select Months. 6. When you're finished, click **Create Custom Installment Period**. The installment period is created . . . but you're not finished. You must next add the custom installment period to your picklist field. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **ObjectManager** tab. 3. From the list of objects, click **Recurring Donations**. 4. Click **Fields and Relationships**. 5. Click the **Installment Period** field. 6. In the Values list, click **New**. 7. Add one or more installment periods. Each value must be on its own line. 8. Click **Save**. 9. (Optional) To have the installment periods appear in a different order, click the **Reorder** button and reorder the list. ## Delete Custom Installment Periods When you delete an installment period, Salesforce removes it from the installment period drop down list for new Recurring Donations going forward. Installments on all pre-existing Recurring Donations will remain intact. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, click **Recurring Donations**. 3. Click **Fields and Relationships**. 4. Click the **Installment Period** field. 5. In the Values list, click **Del** next to the Installment period you want to delete. (You'll be prompted to confirm the deletion.) # Create Customizable Rollups Find out more about customizable rollups. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Customizable Rollups Configuration](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cjlYlOQXSsM&list=plu8xqf8zasbxwahif0sb1p9_3g4vvrmxi). - **[Create a Customizable Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create as many Customizable Rollups as you need. Keep in mind that you can also edit the out-of-box NPSP rollups and any other User Defined Rollups previously created in your org. - **[Clone a Customizable Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To quickly create a new rollup that's similar to one that already exists, simply clone it. - **[Deactivate or Delete a Customizabel Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can delete or deactivate rollups as needed. ## Create a Customizable Rollup You can create as many Customizable Rollups as you need. Keep in mind that you can also edit the out-of-box NPSP rollups and any other User Defined Rollups previously created in your org. For example, say you want to know the total amount of in-kind gifts that a Contact has donated. With Customizable Rollups, you can easily find that information and put it in a custom field called Total In Kind Gifts. We illustrate how to create this sample aggregate rollup in the instructions below. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Customizable Rollups roll up data to a custom field (that you choose during the creation process). But that field must exist, so be sure to create the custom field before creating a new rollup! We recommend that you make these custom fields read only for all users (including Sys Admins). This example we walk through in the steps below assumes that you have an existing custom field on Contacts called “Total In Kind Gifts.” If you want to follow along, you'll need to [create that custom field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) first. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. If you don't see the tab in your org, you can find it from the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you see an error when you click the Configure Customizable Rollups button, your profile may not have access to the CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC Apex class. For more information, see [Configure Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_custom_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP versions older than 3.155 for customizable rollups."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need to go back to a previous screen while using Customizable Rollups, use the breadcrumbs at the top of the page. The back button will not work; it will always take you back to the NPSP Settings page. ![Breadcrumb on a Customizable Rollups page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_breadcrumbs.png) 4. On the Customizable Rollups page, click **New Rollup**. To edit an existing rollup, in the appropriate row, click the drop-down arrow and then click **Edit**. 5. Choose the Target Object and Field that the data should roll up to. The Target Object can be Account, Contact, General Allocation Unit, or Recurring Donation. The Target Field is limited to custom, writeable fields on the Target Object that aren't currently used by another rollup. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Be careful if your Target Field can only accept certain values, for example, if the target field has validation rules or is a restricted picklist. If your source value is not accepted in the Target object, you will get an error when the nightly batch job runs. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important When creating a Recurring Donation rollup, ONLY use your own custom fields as the Target field. Selecting an NPSP field as the Target field will break your Recurring Donations. To create our example rollup, choose Contact as the Target Object and Total In Kind Gifts as the Target Field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember, this is just an example and it assumes that this custom field already exists. If you want to follow along, you'll need to create the Total In Kind Gifts field. 6. Enter a detailed description of this rollup. This is very important because the description is what you (and others) will use to distinguish this rollup from all of your other rollups. For the example, enter "Sums up a Contact's total In Kind Gifts from the Opportunity Fair Market Value field." 7. Enter the Operation. Your choices are limited based on the Type of the Target field you selected. For the example, choose Sum. The type of Operation you choose determines whether your rollup will be an [aggregate rollup or a single result operation rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records."). If you want to create an aggregate rollup, you'd choose Sum, Average, or Count. If you want to create a single result operation rollup, you'd choose First, Last, Largest, Smallest, Best Year, Best Year Total, Years Donated or Donor Streak. 1. **Smallest**: Selects the minimum value stored in Field to Roll Up across all of the records that meet the time frame and filter group criteria. Specify the same field in both the Field to Roll Up and Amount Field settings. 2. **Largest**: Selects the maximum value stored in Field to Roll Up across all of the records that meet the time frame and filter group criteria. Specify the same field in both the Field to Roll Up and Amount Field settings. 3. **First**: Selects the value stored in Field to Roll Up from the first record that meets the time frame and filter group criteria when those records are sorted by Date Field in ascending order. 4. **Last**: Selects the value stored in Field to Roll Up from the last record that meets the time frame and filter group criteria when those records are sorted by Date Field in ascending order. 5. **Count**: The number of records that meet the time frame and filter group criteria. 6. **Sum**: The total of the values in Amount Field when added together across all records that meet the time frame and filter group criteria. 7. **Average**: The mean of the values in Amount Field across all records that meet the time frame and filter group criteria. 8. **Best Year**: Selects the four-digit calendar year (or fiscal year if Use Fiscal Year is enabled) from the value in Date Field that corresponds to the time frame with the largest sum of amounts in Amount Field across all records that meet the filter group criteria. 9. **Best Year Total**: Selects the largest sum of amounts from Amount Field after grouping records by the four-digit calendar year (or fiscal year if Use Fiscal Year is enabled) based on the value in Date Field across all records that meet the filter group criteria. 10. **Years Donated**: Concatenates a unique set of four digit calendar years (or fiscal years if Use Fiscal Year is enabled) separated by semi-colons (;) from the values in Date Field across all records that meet the filter group criteria. 11. **Donor Streak**: The current number of consecutive calendar years (or fiscal years if Use Fiscal Year is enabled) that records meeting the filter group criteria exist. Current is as-of this year if there's a record in the current year. Otherwise this is calculated as-of last year. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When you choose First or Last as the Operation, the First or Last record is determined based on the Date Field in the Advanced Customizations section. You can choose any of the available Date Fields listed in the drop-down. If there is more than one record that matches the criteria based on the selected Date Field, we use the Created Date as a tie-breaker to determine which record to use. 8. Choose the Timeframe for this rollup. For the example, choose All Time. 1. To roll up data for all time, choose All Time. 2. To roll up data for a certain number of days back, choose Days Back. You will then see a Days Back field where you can enter the number of days back (from today) that you want to roll up data for. It's important to note that entering a value of 0 will roll up data for today, while entering a value of 1 will roll up data for today and yesterday. The maximum number of days back you can enter is 10000. 3. To roll up data for a specific year, choose Years Ago. You will then see a Years Ago field where you can choose the number of years ago that you want to roll up data for. Keep in mind that only the data for that calendar (or fiscal) year will roll up. So, if the current year is 2018 and you choose 2 years ago, the roll up will include data for 2016. Select the Fiscal Year checkbox to calculate rollups based on fiscal year settings (instead of calendar year). 20 is the maximum amount of years ago you can select. 9. Choose the Rollup Type. The Rollup Type is a combination of the object to roll up along with whether it will be a [soft credit or hard credit rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_hard_vs_soft_cred_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understanding how NPSP determines what data rolls up to a hard credit or soft credit Customizable Rollup can be confusing."). For the example, choose Opportunity > Contact (Hard Credit). 10. Choose the [filter group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups.") to apply to this rollup. The filter group is a collection of filter rules that determine what records get rolled up. If you want to include all records, use the default No Filter Group (Include All Records). For the example, choose Opp: Won (HC). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note _You'll see all available filter groups that exist in your org, but be sure to select one that uses the same object that you selected in the Rollup Type field._ 11. In the Advanced Customizations section, enter the required information. The fields that appear are determined by the Operation you selected. 1. **Field to Roll Up**: Choose the field from the result of the rollup operation that you want to copy to the Target Field. This field is available if the Rollup Type is a single result operation (First, Last, Largest, or Smallest). Additionally, only fields with field types that are compatible with the selected Target field appear in the list. 2. **Date Field**: Choose the date field to use when calculating the rollup. The Timeframe depends on this field. 3. **Amount Field**: Choose the amount field to use when calculating the rollup. For the example, choose Opportunity: Fair Market Value. 12. Click **Save**. Your rollup will look something like this: ![A new customizable rollup for total in kind gifts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_create_in_kind.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you get a timeout error when trying to save your rollup, you may need to refresh the page. See Save Timeout Error Customizable Rollups for more information. Since we already showed you an aggregate rollup above, it's only fair that we also show you how to create a single result operation rollup. And this one is particularly cool because it provides a lookup to another record. Cue the fireworks! Let's say you want to find the largest gift that a Contact donated and link to the Campaign that brought in the donation (from the Contact's record). Here's how you do it: 1. [Create a custom field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) on the Contact object that is related to the Campaign object. Name it Largest Gift Campaign. 2. Create a new rollup with the following values: 1. Target Object = Contact 2. Target Field = Largest Gift Campaign 3. Description = A lookup on the Contact record to Campaign associated with their largest donation, as determined by the Opportunity Amount field. 4. Operation = Largest 5. Time Frame = All Time 6. Rollup Type = Opportunity > Contact (Hard Credit) 7. Filter Group = Opportunities: Won (HC) 8. Field to Roll Up: Opportunity: Campaign ID 9. Amount Field: Opportunity Amount 3. Click **Save**. ![A new rollup for Largest Gift Campaign on the Contact object.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_largest_gift_campaign.png) To see the updated field on the record right away, you'll need to [manually recalculate rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build."). Here's how it should look: ![The Contact record showing the Largest Gift Campaign field populated with a link to the Campaign record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_largest_gift_camp_on_contact.png) ### A note about creating custom fields for use in Customizable Rollups . . . As we mentioned in the steps for creating a Customizable Rollup, the field you select as the Target Field must be a unique, writeable, custom field. And the field must exist before you create the Customizable Rollup. It's also important to note that you should limit all users' access to the fields you're using as Target Fields in your rollups. We recommend that you make these custom fields read only for all users (including Sys Admins). Rollups will function properly even if the user creating the rollup or viewing the record with the rollup Target Field doesn't have Edit or View access to the field. ## Clone a Customizable Rollup To quickly create a new rollup that's similar to one that already exists, simply clone it. Keep in mind that you'll need to choose a unique Target Field for your new rollup before you save it. Use an existing field, or create a custom field to use as the Target Field. For more information on creating custom fields, see [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5). 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need to go back to a previous screen while using Customizable Rollups, use the breadcrumbs at the top of the page. The back button will not work; it will always take you back to the NPSP Settings page. 4. On the Customizable Rollups page, click the name of the rollup you want to clone. 5. Click **Clone**. NPSP clones the entire rollup, with the exception of the Target Field. 6. Select the Target Field, and optionally make any other changes. 7. Save your work. ## Deactivate or Delete a Customizabel Rollup You can delete or deactivate rollups as needed. Deactivating a rollup simply prevents NPSP from calculating the rollup moving forward, but you will still see it in the list of Customizable Rollups and could activate it again if needed. Deleting a rollup removes it from the list. Since NPSP no longer calculates deleted or deactivated rollups, you will see stale data in any deleted or deactivated rollups' Target fields. For any rollup you deactviate or delete, we recommend that you either clear the value out of the Target field or reuse the Target field in a new rollup. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You should never modify, deactivate, or delete the key fields (or the rollups that include them) used by the [Customizable Rollups jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Cusomizable Rollups are calculated by a series of batch jobs. These batch jobs run in one of three modes: Non-Skew Mode, Skew Mode, or Incremental Mode."). Modifying these fields can cause issues in your org, such as hitting limits because too many records are being processed in a non-skew mode or rollups not updating. To deactivate a rollup: 1. In the list of Customizable Rollups, click the Name of the rollup you want to deactivate. 2. Unselect the **Active** checkbox. 3. Click **Save**. ![A rollup with the Active box highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_deactivate_rollup.png) To delete a rollup: 1. In the list of Customizable Rollups, click the Name of the rollup you want to delete. 2. Click **Delete**. 3. Click **Delete** again to confirm that you want to delete. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Evan Ponter for his contributions to this article. # Create Deduplicated Mailing Lists from a Campaign Although we live in the digital age, direct mail remains an important part of fundraising and outreach activities. But sending materials through the mail isn't exactly cheap and you really don't want to send the same piece of mail more than once to a given address. Donors want to see that your organization is effective and streamlined, and doesn't waste dollars on sending unnecessary mailings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create Deduplicated Mailing Lists from a Campaign](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5B-xvi7hN5M). NPSP can provide a deduplicated mailing list so that each address only appears once in the export file. Use the **Household Mailing List** action on your Campaigns to produce a deduplicated mailing list. First, double check that the **Household Mailing List** action is available on Campaigns: 1. Find a Campaign record. 2. Click **Household Mailing List**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see **Household Mailing List** in the action buttons, try clicking ![Drop-down arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/drop-down-arrow.png). If you still don't see it, your administrator may need to add it to the **Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions** section of your Campaign layouts. ![Campaign record with Household Mailing List highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/household-mailing-list-button.png) 3. NPSP runs a special report, called NPSP Campaign Household Mailing List V2, that displays only one row per Household Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The report is V2 because it's built for Lightning Experience. 4. Export the results to save a copy of the mailing list. Here's an example of the report: ![Household Mailing List V2 report results.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/household-mailing-list-report.png) The Household Mailing List button appends the phrase "- Household Duplicate" to Campaign Member Status values of members identified as duplicates. For example, "Sent" becomes "Sent- Household Duplicate". As a result, you may need to adjust reports and automation tools that reference Status values. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed NPSP before version 3.157 (June 2019), you must unlock the Campaign ID filter in the Campaign Household Mailing List V2 report. This is necessary so the report URL can populate the Campaign ID dynamically. For instructions, read [Known Issues in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand how to resolve common configuration issues in NPSP and where to look for additional help."). # Create Donor Meeting Notes and Follow-Up Tasks in Slack Create donor meeting notes and follow-up tasks within Slack after you integrate the Donor Engagement Agent. Before you start, create a [Donor Engagement agent in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence."). 1. [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack). 2. Sign your Slack user into Salesforce from Slack. 1. Log in to your Slack workspace. 2. From the sidebar, click **Sign in to your Salesforce**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click **Continue to Salesforce**. 5. Enter your admin login credentials. 6. Click **Login** and then click **Allow**. 3. [Install the Slack connected app](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#connect-salesforce-and-slack). 4. [Add the Donor Engagement agent to Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#add-an-agent-to-slack). # Create Donor Meeting Notes and Follow-Up Tasks in Slack Create donor meeting notes and follow-up tasks within Slack after you integrate the Donor Engagement Agent. Before you start, create a [Donor Engagement agent in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence."). 1. [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack). 2. Sign your Slack user into Salesforce from Slack. 1. Log in to your Slack workspace. 2. From the sidebar, click **Sign in to your Salesforce**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click **Continue to Salesforce**. 5. Enter your admin login credentials. 6. Click **Login** and then click **Allow**. 3. [Install the Slack connected app](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#connect-salesforce-and-slack). 4. [Add the Donor Engagement agent to Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#add-an-agent-to-slack). # Create Filter Groups Find out more about creating filter groups. - **[Create a Filter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customizable Rollups come with a set of default filter groups. These filter groups work like reports. You set up criteria (filter rules) within the filter group that determines what data to include in your rollup. Filter groups make sure you only roll up the data you really need! - **[Delete a Filter Rule or Filter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can delete a filter rule even if it's used in a filter group with an associated rollup. But, keep in mind that deleting that filter rule will affect that rollup's calculations. - **[Clone a Filter Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To quickly create a new filter group that is similar to one that already exists, simply clone it. The filter group and all of its filter rules are copied to a new filter group. The new filter group will have the same name as the original, but the word (Clone) is appended to the end. ## Create a Filter Group Customizable Rollups come with a set of default filter groups. These filter groups work like reports. You set up criteria (filter rules) within the filter group that determines what data to include in your rollup. Filter groups make sure you only roll up the data you really need! You can create new filter groups or modify the defaults if you need to. You can also delete unused filter groups, but keep in mind that you won't be able to delete any filter group that has been applied to a rollup. You can see which rollups are using a filter group by visiting the filter group detail page. ![The list view showing the default filter groups.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_default_filter_grp.png) **A note about filter rules . . .** The filter rules set the criteria that determines what data to include, so that you only get the data you need. You can include as many as you want, but keep in mind that filter rules use AND criteria only (there is no OR). So, if there is more than one filter rule within a filter group, data will only be included if it matches criteria for all of the rules. However, filter rules only apply if the object used in the filter rule is the same as the object in the rollup's Rollup Type field. If the filter rule is for an object not listed for a particular rollup type, that rule simply won't apply, but the rest of the rules in the group will. This lets you use a filter group with a soft credit filter on a hard credit rollup, and that soft credit rule doesn't apply but the rest do.
If the Rollup Type is... Filter rules using these objects will apply

Opportunity > Account (Hard Credit)

Opportunity > Contact (Hard Credit)

 Opportunity

Opportunity > Contact (Soft Credit)

Opportunity > Account (Contact Soft Credit)

 Opportunity, Contact Soft Credit
Opportunity > Account (Account Soft Credit) Opportunity, Account Soft Credit

Payment > Account (Hard Credit)

Payment > Contact (Hard Credit)

 Payment, Opportunity
Opportunity > Recurring Donations Opportunity
GAU Allocation > General Accounting Unit Opportunity, GAU Allocation
1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click ****Donations** | **Customizable Rollups****. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you see an error when you click the Configure Customizable Rollups button, your profile may not have access to the CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC Apex class. For more information, see [Configure Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_custom_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP versions older than 3.155 for customizable rollups."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need to go back to a previous screen while using Customizable Rollups, use the breadcrumbs at the top of the page. The back button will not work; it will always take you back to the NPSP Settings page. 4. Click **View Filter Groups**. 5. Click **New Filter Group**. If you want to edit an existing filter group, click the filter group name, then click **Edit**. 6. Enter a name for the filter group. 7. Enter a detailed description of this filter group. We recommend that you write out exactly how the filter rules within this filter group work. That way, it will be easy for others in your org to understand if this filter group is right for their rollup. 8. Create the filter rules for this group. For each rule: 1. Select the Object. The available values are Account Soft Credit, Contact Soft Credit, GAU Allocation, Opportunity, and Payment. 2. Select the specific Field on that object. 3. Select the Operator. The available options are determined by the type of the selected Field. You'll only see operators that are valid for the field type. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The **In List** or **Not in List** operators can be used for fields other than picklists—even for text fields! If the Operator is **In List** or **Not in List** and you don't see a picklist, enter values separated by semi-colons. 4. Enter the value. What you can enter in this field is determined by the Operator you choose. ![Adding a filter rule for soft credit roles including Matched Donor, Soft Credit, and Household Member](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_add_filter_rule.png) 9. Click **Add** to add another filter rule. 10. Click **Save**. ![Filter group for Won Opportunities](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_filter_group.png) You can now select your filter group when [creating or editing a Customizable Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups."). ## Delete a Filter Rule or Filter Group You can delete a filter rule even if it's used in a filter group with an associated rollup. But, keep in mind that deleting that filter rule will affect that rollup's calculations. You can delete a filter group only if it's not used by any active or inactive rollups. If the filter group has associated rollups, they will be listed on the filter group detail page. Before you can delete, you'll need to remove the filter group from the rollups. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. If you don't see the tab in your org, you can find it from the App Launcher. 2. Click ****Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**** . 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups** . 4. Click **View Filter Groups**. 5. Click the name of the filter group. 6. To delete a filter rule: 1. Click **Edit**. 2. In the row for the rule, click the down arrow, then click **Delete**. 3. Click **Delete** again to confirm the deletion. 7. To delete a filter group, click **Delete**, then click **Delete** again to confirm**.** ![A filter group showing that there are Rollups Using This Filter Group (indicating that you can't delete this filter group).](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_filter_group_with_rollups.png) ## Clone a Filter Group To quickly create a new filter group that is similar to one that already exists, simply clone it. The filter group and all of its filter rules are copied to a new filter group. The new filter group will have the same name as the original, but the word (Clone) is appended to the end. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click ****Donations** | **Customizable Rollups****. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. 4. Click **View Filter Groups**. 5. Click the name of the filter group you want to clone. 6. Click **Clone**. 7. Edit the filter group name and any other details as needed, then click **Save**. # Create Funding Request Paths Help your users complete funding requests by creating paths that guide them through each step. - **[Enable Paths](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_funding_request_paths.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To start creating paths in Outbound Funds Module, turn it up in Setup. - **[Create a Path](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_funding_request_paths.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a path to help your teams follow a funding request status. - **[Add Path to Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_funding_request_paths.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the funding request path to a Lightning page to make it available to your users. ## Enable Paths To start creating paths in Outbound Funds Module, turn it up in Setup. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click Setup. 2. From Setup, enter Path in the Quick Find box, then select **Path Settings**. 3. Click **Enable**. ## Create a Path Create a path to help your teams follow a funding request status. 1. Click **New Path**. 2. Enter a Path Name. For example, Funding Request. 3. Press tab to autofill API Reference Name. 4. Select the object used in this path. For example, **Funding Request**. 5. Leave Master as the Record Type unless your org has record types. Paths are specific to a record type. 6. Select a field from Picklist. For example, **Status**. ![Name your path](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_create_path.png) 7. Click **Next**. Michon can now add fields and help text for each Funding Request status. Let’s add fields to the Submitted status. 8. Click **Submitted**, then click **Add/Update Fields**. 9. Choose up to 5 fields to display on the Funding Request record when its status is Submitted. For example, **Application Date**, **Funding Request Name**, and **Requested Amount**. 10. Click **Save**. 11. Optionally, add helpful information an internal user can see when the record is in Submitted. ![Add information to your path](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_create_path_2.png) 12. Repeat this for as many Statuses as desired. 13. Click **Next**. 14. Optionally, select if you want users to see confetti to celebrate their success on reaching this status. 15. Select **Activate the path**, then click **Finish**. ## Add Path to Page Layout Add the funding request path to a Lightning page to make it available to your users. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Select the object you create the path for. For example, select **Funding Request**. 4. Click **Lightning Record Pages**, then click **Funding Request Record Page**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note If there are no Lightning Pages, click **New** to create a new record page. 5. Click **Clone**. 6. Select Path from the Standard Component list, then drag it to the header region. 7. Update any other Lightning Pages, as needed. 8. Click **Activation…**. 9. Click **App Default**, then click **Assign as App Default**. 10. Select **Outbound Funds**. 11. Click **Next**, **Next**, then **Save**. 12. Click **Save**. # Create Funding Requests Track grantseekers’ applications by creating Funding Requests. - **[Create a Funding Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_request.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once the Funding Program is defined, you can create a Funding Request to track the applications. Typically, a grantseeker creates Funding Requests through the portal, but administrators can also create them. ## Create a Funding Request Once the Funding Program is defined, you can create a Funding Request to track the applications. Typically, a grantseeker creates Funding Requests through the portal, but administrators can also create them. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Funding Requests**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Funding Request Name. For example, STEPS to Leadership. 4. Optionally, configure additional details. 5. Click **Save** Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Outbound Funds Create a Funding Program and a Funding Request](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jjnesj1nckg). # Create Gift Designations in Education Specify how donors want their donation to be spent. You can identify a gift designation that's used for all unrestricted gifts and set it as the org-wide default before you begin entering gifts in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create gift designations:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Designations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Name, enter a name for the designation. For example, enter Earthquake Relief Fund. 4. To allocate the gift designation when a gift entry is processed, select **Active**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note New gift designations are saved as active, even if you don't select **Active**. 5. To use the designation for all unrestricted gifts, select **Default**. Keep in mind that processing a high number of records on a designation can cause data skew. To avoid data skew, review the parent-child data skew to determine how often to use a new default designation based on the volume of records you process on the designation. 6. Save your changes, and create other gift designations as needed. SEE ALSO [Parent-Child Data Skew](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.draes.meta/draes/draes_object_relationships_parent_child_data_skew.htm) # Create Gift Designations in Nonprofit Specify how donors want their donation to be spent. You can identify a gift designation that's used for all unrestricted gifts and set it as the org-wide default before you begin entering gifts in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create gift designations:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Designations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Name, enter a name for the designation. For example, enter Earthquake Relief Fund. 4. To allocate the gift designation when a gift entry is processed, select **Active**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note New gift designations are saved as active, even if you don't select **Active**. 5. To use the designation for all unrestricted gifts, select **Default**. Keep in mind that processing a high number of records on a designation can cause data skew. To avoid data skew, review the parent-child data skew to determine how often to use a new default designation based on the volume of records you process on the designation. 6. Save your changes, and create other gift designations as needed. SEE ALSO [Parent-Child Data Skew](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.draes.meta/draes/draes_object_relationships_parent_child_data_skew.htm) # Create Goal and Action Item Templates Learn about when to use these templates and learn how to create them. - **[What are Goal and Action Item Templates?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Managers can build Goal and Action Item Templates for their Programs as a way to introduce organization-wide best practices into the Case Plan process. Goal and Action Item templates automatically guide a Case Manager to include specific Goals and Action Items in a Program's Case Plan, making Case Plan creation more efficient. If a Program has Goal and Action Item Templates, you can select them in the Case Plan Wizard when creating a Case Plan (related to that Program). - **[Create Goal Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save time and consistently track goals using Goal Templates. - **[Create Action Item Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save time and consistently track tasks using Action Item Templates. - **[Create a Case Plan Using Goal and Action Item Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Based on how your Programs are set up, they may have related templates that provide goals and actions items you can apply to your Case Plan. ## What are Goal and Action Item Templates? Program Managers can build Goal and Action Item Templates for their Programs as a way to introduce organization-wide best practices into the Case Plan process. Goal and Action Item templates automatically guide a Case Manager to include specific Goals and Action Items in a Program's Case Plan, making Case Plan creation more efficient. If a Program has Goal and Action Item Templates, you can select them in the Case Plan Wizard when creating a Case Plan (related to that Program). The fields available on a Goal created from a Goal Template or an Action Item created from an Action Item Template are determined by field sets. By default, new Goals and Action Items use the Case Plan Viewer field set. You can create your own field sets, then apply them to your Goal or Action Item Templates as needed. For instructions, see [Customize Case Plan Goals and Action Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Goal and Action Item fields on a Case Plan."). ## Create Goal Templates Save time and consistently track goals using Goal Templates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see some of the fields, such as Field Set, Required, or Case Plan Action Item Instructions, your administrator may need to add them to the page layout. See [Configure Goal and Action Item Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add fields about templates to page layouts."). 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Goal Templates**. 2. Click **New** in the Program Goals Template section. 3. Enter a Goal Template Name. 4. Select a Program to relate the Goal Template to. 5. Optionally, select a field set for this Goal Template. By default, new Goals use the Case Plan Viewer field set. 6. Select **Required** to make the Goal required for Case Plans created for clients who have active Program Engagements for the associated Program. Required Goals are pre-selected when you create a Case Plan and you can’t remove them. 7. Enter Case Plan Action Item Instructions. Instructions help the Case Manager decide which action items, related to this goal, to choose when creating a new Case Plan. 8. Click **Save**. ## Create Action Item Templates Save time and consistently track tasks using Action Item Templates. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Goal Templates**. 2. From the Recently Viewed Goal Templates list, click the Name of the Goal template for which you are building the Action Item template. 3. Click the **Related** Tab of the selected Goal Template. 4. Click **New** in the Goal Action Item Templates section. 5. Click **\+ New Action Item Template** in the Action Item Template Search box. 6. Provide an Action Item Template Name. 7. Optionally, select a field set. By default, new Action Item Templates use the Case Plan Viewer field set. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Select **Required** to make the action item required for this Goal Template. Required action items are pre-selected when you create a Case Plan and you can’t remove them. 10. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important At this time, do not use the Save & New Button as it creates unparented Action Item Templates. ## Create a Case Plan Using Goal and Action Item Templates Based on how your Programs are set up, they may have related templates that provide goals and actions items you can apply to your Case Plan. We'll create an example Case Plan for Anthony Hill, who needs support to re-enter the workforce after an extended period of homelessness. Feel free to follow along! 1. Navigate to a client record using **Client Search**. 2. Click the **Case Plans** tab. 3. Click **New Case Plan**. ![Case Plans showing New Case Plan button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/newcaseplan.png) 4. Enter a Case Plan Name. For example, Workforce Reentry Plan - Anthony Hill. 5. Enter a description. For example, Plan to get Anthony ready to join the workforce. 6. Click **Next**. You'll see a list of Program Engagements for the client, unless the client isn't associated with any Programs. 7. Select the Program. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Select the Goals to include in this Case Plan. These Goals are from the template associated with the selected Program. If the client isn’t associated with any Programs, you see a list of available Goals. You may see instructions that help you choose which Goals to select, and some Goals may be required based on the Program(s) you selected. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Select the Action Items to include for the Goal. These Action Items are from the template associated with the selected Goals. You may see instructions that help you choose which Action Items to select, and some Action Items may be required based on the Goal(s) you selected. 12. Click **Next**. 13. Review your Case Plan and click **Save**. 14. On the Case Plan record, click **Edit**. 15. Give the Case Plan an overall status of **Not Started**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note The Case Plan Status represents the case manager’s general assessment of the Case Plan as a whole. It is not a rollup of other statuses. 16. Set an In Progress Date. ![Case Plan information to display in Case Plan highlights panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/caseplaninfo.png) 17. Click **Save**. # Create Goal Assignments Advisors can create goal assignments to help students ‌set and manage career and life goals, track campus activities, and build a comprehensive action plan for success. Students can create their own goals based on their competencies and traits through the portal. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create goal assignments: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Goal Assignments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the status of the assigned goal. 4. Select an account for the parent record. 5. Select dates when the goal is effective and by when the assigned goal is targeted to be completed. 6. Select the goal definition associated with the goal assignment. 7. Select the assignee as contact and then select the corresponding student’s contact value. 8. Select the priority of the goal assignment. 9. Enter a custom goal name for the goal assignment. 10. Select the category as **Career and Life Goals**. 11. Save your changes. # Create Household Account Record Type If you use Case Management in an org without NPSP, you need to create an Account record type for Household Account. Case Management includes a single Account record type called Branch, which is meant to represent a branch of your organization. If you use Case Management in an org with NPSP, you get the NPSP Account record types: - Household Account - Organization Account Using Case Management with NPSP also gives you the NPSP Household Account automation. See [Add a Household Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_household_account.htm) for more information. To create an Account record type for Household Account: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 4. Click **Record Types**. 5. Click **New**. 6. In the Existing Record Type field, select **Master**. 7. Enter the Record Type Label, Household Account. The Record Type Name is automatically populated. 8. Enter a Description. 9. Select **Active**. 10. Enable for all needed profiles. 11. Click **Next**. 12. Select **Apply one layout to all profiles**. 13. From the Select Page Layout List, select **Account Layout**. 14. Click **Save**. # Create Intake Assessment Questions with Einstein Create intake assessment questions using Intelligent Question Generation with Einstein generative AI. Ensure that these add-ons are installed in your org: - EducationCloudAddOn - EinsteinGPTPlatformAddOn - IntelligentQuestionGnrnAddOn
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To create assessment questions by using Intelligent Question Generation:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Intelligent Question Generation Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

Prompt Template User
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This tool uses generative AI, which can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review for accuracy and safety before using. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **Draft with Einstein Using Instructions**. 3. Select a prompt template based on your requirement. For example, select Support Program Intake Questions to generate intake assessment questions for support programs. 4. For Object and Record, select the object and specify the record. For example, select Program, and then select Career Development to generate assessment questions relevant to the Career Development program. 5. Click **Next**. 6. If necessary, under Additional Instructions, enter the details of your assessment scenario. For example, enter career development for freshmen, interests, and goals to generate questions relevant to the Career Development program for freshmen. 7. Click **Draft Questions**. 8. Modify the questions and the response values as necessary, and then click **Create**. The selected assessment questions are saved. 9. On the Create Form page, create the assessment by using Omni Script. See [Create an Intake Assessment for a Support Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_intake_assessment_for_a_support_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an Omni Process that shows assessment questions and captures responses when learners enroll in a program."). # Create Involvement Group Members Advisors create an involvement group member in Education Cloud to track membership or participation of students in the involvement groups on campus. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create involvement group members: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - Define values for the Role picklist in the Involvement Group Member object using the Object Manager. By default, these picklists have no values. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Involvement Group Members**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select a contact related to the involvement group member. This ‌must be a nonperson contact. 4. Select an involvement group. 5. Enter a description of the involvement group member. 6. Select the date the member joined the involvement group. 7. Select the role of the member in the involvement group. 8. Select the member's level of involvement in the involvement group. 9. Select ‌whether the involvement group member is related to an academic term or an academic year and then select a corresponding value. 10. Save your changes. # Create Involvement Groups Advisors create an involvement group in Education Cloud to empower students to explore new interests, hone their talents, and grow into well-rounded individuals. Meaningful involvement includes activities outside the classroom, such as participation in student organizations, social groups, leadership roles, and community service. Students can self-enroll to these involvement groups or create their own involvement groups based on their competencies and traits through the portal. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create involvement groups: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - Define values for the Type, Category, Mode, Activity Season, Status, and Leader Role picklists in the Involvement Group object using the Object Manager. By default, these picklists have no values. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Involvement Groups**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and description for the involvement group. 4. Select the date on which the involvement group was founded. 5. Select the maximum number of members allowed in the involvement group. 6. Select a status. 7. Select whether the student is allowed to self enroll in the involvement group. 8. Select whether the involvement group is sponsored. If the involvement group is sponsored, students can’t self enroll in this involvement group. 9. Provide any other relevant details and save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Education Cloud Developer Guide: InvolvementGroup](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/sforce_api_objects_involvementgroup.htm) - [Education Cloud Developer Guide: InvolvementGroupMember](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/sforce_api_objects_involvementgroupmember.htm) # Create Job Position Qualifications After you create a job position, create qualifications to make sure that volunteers meet the requirements for the job position. Job position qualifications are additive and apply only to the specific job position. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the job. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create job position qualifications: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Job positions define specific roles that link directly to broader, generic-type positions. For example, an organization that offers tutoring services could have Virtual Tutor as a position and Algebra Virtual Tutor-Pacific Time as a related job position. Job position qualifications describe the requirements for those specific jobs. 1. From the Job Position Qualifications page, click **New**. The New Job Position Qualification window opens. 2. Select the job position that this qualification is for, or [create one](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives."). 3. For the Qualification Reference Record, select either **Competency** or **Examination**. 1. To make the qualification standard a demonstrated competency, select **Competency**. 2. To make the qualification standard an exam, select **Examination**. If the examination or competency doesn’t exist, create one. 4. If applicable, enter a qualification level, select a proficiency level, and enter a description for the qualification. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To match volunteers to a position or job position, set a qualification level on both the position qualification and job position qualification. You can map qualification level integers to proficiency level dynamic values, such as Beginner, Intermediate, or Expert. You can also map them to values like Desired, Preferred, or Mandatory. 5. Save your work. The job position qualification saves to the Job Position Qualification page. Salesforce automatically assigns an alphanumeric name to the new qualification. SEE ALSO: - [Create Job Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives.") - [Create Job Position Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A job position shift is a specific work shift that’s associated with a job position or a related recurrence schedule. After developing a volunteer initiative and creating job positions for it, create work shifts that volunteers who meet the position qualifications can fill.") # Create Job Position Shifts A job position shift is a specific work shift that’s associated with a job position or a related recurrence schedule. After developing a volunteer initiative and creating job positions for it, create work shifts that volunteers who meet the position qualifications can fill. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create job position shifts: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Create job positions before you create job position shifts. To create individual shifts for any job position, from the Job Position Shifts page, click **New**. To create a schedule of multiple shifts for a job position, or to create multiple one-time shifts, do so from the Job Position page. 1. From the Job Position page, click **Create a Shift Schedule**. The Create a Shift Schedule window opens. If you don’t see the Create a Shift Schedule action button, click ![Open action menu button options.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/down_60.png), and then select **Create a Shift Schedule**. 2. Set a start date and time. 3. Set and end date and time. 4. Set the maximum number of volunteers who can be assigned to the scheduled shifts. The number of volunteer assignments are limited to this shift capacity. 5. To set a recurring schedule based on this shift, click **Add Schedule** and then select **Add Recurring Schedule**. 1. Set the start date and time, the end date and time, and the maximum number of volunteers who can be assigned to the scheduled shifts. 2. Select a recurrence option. For example, select Weekly or Biweekly to set the days of the week for the shift. Or select Monthly to have the shift occur once per month until the set end date or after completing the number of recurrences set. To set a daily schedule, select Weekly, and then select all the days of the week. 3. Set the end date or the number of shift recurrences to end the schedule after. 6. To add another one time or recurring schedule to this job position, click **Add Schedule**. 7. Save your work. The new shift is shown on the Job Position Shifts page. An alphanumeric name is automatically assigned to the shift. SEE ALSO: - [Create Job Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives.") - [Match Volunteers to Volunteer Initiative Job Positions and Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_match_to_job_positions_and_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find volunteers by using smart matching criteria to search for the right volunteers for an initiative’s job position and job position shifts. The matching criteria include qualifications, shift or date-and-time range, location. Intelligently matched volunteers are the closest fit for the open shifts of a volunteer initiative and position.") - [Assign Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_assign_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Efficiently schedule volunteers to shifts and positions by using Nonprofit Cloud's Volunteer Management tools. To maintain adequate coverage of your volunteer initiatives, assign volunteers individually to shifts.") # Create Job Positions After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create job positions: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Job positions are specific roles that often fall under a more general Position. 1. From the Job Position page, click **New**. 2. On the New Job Position window, give the job position a name. Provide a unique name that describes the position. For example, Group Leader. 3. Enter a title for the job position. Provide a unique title that specifies the position. For example, Internal Group Leader or External Group Leader. 4. If the Job Position is related to a Position, search for and select the position to associate the two. 5. Complete as many of the fields as you need for the job position, including start and end dates, status, manager, and last filled date. 6. To relate this job position to a volunteer initiative, select it or create it from the Related Volunteer Initiative list. 7. Save your work. The new job position opens and is available on the Job Positions page. After you create the job position, you can complete quick actions directly from the job position page. Click ![Open action menu options.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/down_60.png), and then select **Create a Shift Schedule**, **Find Volunteers**, or **Assign Volunteers**. SEE ALSO: - [Create Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create positions for your organization to delineate functional roles that are characterized by specific duties and responsibilities. You can also specify skills and qualifications that are required to hold the position. Positions can be used across multiple volunteer initiatives.") - [Create Volunteer Initiatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_volunteer_initiatives.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up initiatives for volunteers to help your organization accomplish its goals. Specify start and end dates, the number of volunteers needed, and the total number of volunteer hours to be filled.") - [Create Job Position Qualifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_qualifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a job position, create qualifications to make sure that volunteers meet the requirements for the job position. Job position qualifications are additive and apply only to the specific job position. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the job.") - [Create Job Position Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A job position shift is a specific work shift that’s associated with a job position or a related recurrence schedule. After developing a volunteer initiative and creating job positions for it, create work shifts that volunteers who meet the position qualifications can fill.") - [Assign Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_assign_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Efficiently schedule volunteers to shifts and positions by using Nonprofit Cloud's Volunteer Management tools. To maintain adequate coverage of your volunteer initiatives, assign volunteers individually to shifts.") # Create Job Shifts If there are multiple dates or times when you need volunteers for a Job, you can set up Shifts so you can track which volunteers are coming when. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you track volunteers by Job, but not specific dates and times, you don't have to use Shifts in V4S. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create Volunteer Job Shifts](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=J1TkNZ6d7Pw) - **[Create a Shift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Shift for each date or time when you need volunteers. - **[Clone Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you've created one Shift, you can easily clone it. The clone feature makes it much easier to create multiple Shifts for a Job. - **[Confirm Shifts on the Shift Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've created some Shifts, you can view them on the Shift calendar. This is a great way to visualize how things will look to prospective volunteers who visit your website. ## Create a Shift Create a Shift for each date or time when you need volunteers. Let's use the Spring Fling Gala Waitstaff Job as an example. You need 10 volunteers from 6 pm - 8 pm to pass appetizers and serve dinner. Then you need 6 volunteers from 8 pm - 10 pm to clear plates and serve dessert and coffee. In Volunteers for Salesforce, Shifts are located under Jobs, so you need to start on a Job record to create Shifts. 1. From the Campaign detail page, click the Related tab and go to the Volunteer Jobs related list. 2. Click the Job name. For our example, we click Waitstaff. 3. Click the Related tab and go to the Volunteer Shifts related list. 4. Click **New**. ![New button to create a shift from the Volunteer Job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_shift.png) 5. Enter the Start Date & Time, Duration, and Desired # of Volunteers. (The value in Desired # of Volunteers determines how many people can sign up for the Shift on your website). ![Creating Volunteer Shift form](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_shift_waitstaff.png) 6. Click **Save**. ## Clone Shifts Now that you've created one Shift, you can easily clone it. The clone feature makes it much easier to create multiple Shifts for a Job. 1. From the Volunteer Job page, in the Volunteer Shifts related list, click the Shift ID of the Shift to clone. ![Shift ID highlighted on the Volunteer Shifts related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_shifts_click_name.png) 2. Click **Clone**. ![Clone button on the Volunteer shift](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_shift_clone.png) 3. Change the times, duration, and number of volunteers as needed. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Repeat this process to create as many Shifts as you need for the Job. 6. To review the Shifts you created, click the name of the Volunteer Job and go to the Volunteer Shifts related list. ![Volunteer Shifts listed on the Volunteer Job record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_shifts.png) Now you can repeat this process to create Shifts for each of your Jobs. ## Confirm Shifts on the Shift Calendar After you've created some Shifts, you can view them on the Shift calendar. This is a great way to visualize how things will look to prospective volunteers who visit your website. 1. Click the Shift Calendar tab. 2. You can use the Campaign and/or Volunteer Job drop-downs to filter the calendar so that it only shows events for a certain Campaign or Job. 3. Use the arrows to scroll to the month of your event (for the Spring Fling Gala, we'll scroll to May 2017). You can click the week button to get a closer view of the Shifts. ![Shifts on Volunteer Shift Calendar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_shift_calendar_with_shifts.png) 4. Mouse over the different Shifts. You see the number of confirmed volunteers and the number of volunteer positions still available. 5. Click the **Roster** link on a Shift to view the Volunteer Roster report, which shows a list of the volunteers for the Shift. Now that you know all the ins and outs of planning a one-time event in V4S, you're ready to staff events with all the skills and passion that your volunteers bring. # Create Jobs Jobs represent the next level down in your structure. Before you start creating Jobs, it's a good idea to jot down exactly what Jobs and Shifts you need to fill. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create Volunteer Jobs](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UWIOwlaDexM) For example: ![Handwritten list of the jobs for a campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/list_of_jobs.png) - **[Create a Job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Job for each volunteer opportunity that goes along with your Campaign. - **[Clone a Job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you've created one Job, you can clone it to create more. The clone feature makes it much easier (and faster) to create multiple Jobs for one event. ## Create a Job Create a Job for each volunteer opportunity that goes along with your Campaign. 1. From the volunteer Campaign you just created, go to the Volunteer Jobs related list and click **New**. ![New button on the Volunteer Hobs related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_new_job_rel_list.png) If you wandered away from the Campaign, simply click the Campaigns tab and click the Campaign name to get to the page above. 2. Enter the name of the Job. 3. Select Display on Website. This checkbox will come into play later when you set up website integration. 4. Enter description information. The Job description appears on the website, so make it as appealing as possible. You can use formatting, pictures, and links to jazz up the listing. ![New volunteer job form](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_volunteer_job.png) 5. Enter the location. The Location Street, Location City, Location State/Province, and Location Zip/Postal Code fields integrate with Google Maps, if you have it enabled. Admins can also configure V4S to display a corresponding map on your website. See [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.") for more information. 6. Enter any additional location information, for example, written instructions and a map to the event (in case your Admin hasn't enabled the Google Maps integration mentioned in the previous step). 7. Optionally, link to a page on your website to provide more information. Highlight the text you want to link, click the link icon in the toolbar, and enter the URL. ![Adding link to your Location Information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_volunteer_job_location.png) 8. Click **Save**. If your Campaign has more than one Job, you can either create each one using the process we just outlined or [clone the Job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Jobs represent the next level down in your structure. Before you start creating Jobs, it's a good idea to jot down exactly what Jobs and Shifts you need to fill.") to create more. (Hint: cloning is faster!) ## Clone a Job Once you've created one Job, you can clone it to create more. The clone feature makes it much easier (and faster) to create multiple Jobs for one event. 1. On the Volunteer Job detail page of the Job you want to clone, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **Clone**. ![Clone button on the Volunteer Job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_job_clone.png) 2. Change the Volunteer Job name and description. 3. Click **Save**. 4. Repeat this process for each Job you need to create. You can review the Jobs you created by looking at the Volunteer Jobs related list on the Campaign: ![Volunteer jobs listed on the campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_volunteer_jobs.png) # Create Legacy Recurring Donations Create either open-ended or fixed-length recurring donations to track a donor's intent to give regularly into the future. These records are named automatically. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As of April 29th, 2020, Nonprofit Success Pack offers a new version of Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm) - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack's Recurring Donations feature helps you track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. NPSP supports two types of recurring donations: open-ended and fixed-length recurring donations. - **[Create an Open-Ended Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Open-ended recurring donations have no defined end date. Specify the gift amount and recurrence schedule. - **[Create a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fixed-length recurring donations have a defined end date. Specify the amount of each gift, a recurrence schedule, and a last gift date. - **[Create an Open-Ended Recurring Donation from a Contact Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're creating a new Open Ended Recurring Donation, you might find it easier to create it directly from the Contact record using the provided Quick Action. - **[Automatic Recurring Donations Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, NPSP names your Recurring Donations automatically. Here's how it works. ## Overview Nonprofit Success Pack's Recurring Donations feature helps you track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. NPSP supports two types of recurring donations: open-ended and fixed-length recurring donations. **Open-Ended Recurring Donations** are single donation amounts given over and over again, with no ending date defined. For example, John Smith gives your organization $100/month through his work place giving campaign, and has not specified an end date for the donation. The donation will continue until you close the Recurring Donation. **Fixed-Length Recurring Donations** are single donation amounts given over and over again, but for a defined period of time. For example John Smith has pledged to give $50 a month for 3 years. Thus, the donation continues for three years, and ends at that point. (This type of donation is similar to a standard Salesforce Opportunity with multiple Payments attached to it. See [Legacy Recurring Donations versus Opportunity Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_vs_opp_donation_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The term \"Recurring Donations\" in the nonprofit world often brings to mind a donor who has committed to giving a financial gift to your organization multiple times. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, you can track this type of donation in different ways.") for more discussion on when to use each of these methods.) When creating a recurring donation, determine the type by setting the Open Ended Status. | **Status** | **Description** | | --- | --- | | None (or blank) | This value is used for Fixed-Length recurring donations. It creates the correct number of installments based on Installment Period and Schedule Type. There are no new installments added unless the number of Installments or Schedule Type are updated. | | Open | This value is used to create Open-Ended recurring donations. It creates opportunities based on the Installment Period, but instead of creating installments it bases the number of opportunities on the Forecast Month setting in NPSP Settings. | | Closed | This value stops an open-ended recurring donation from creating additional opportunities. Existing Open opportunities are handled based on the behavior specified in NPSP Settings. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Adding custom values to the Open Ended Status field may result in errors. Only use the values included with NPSP. ## Create an Open-Ended Recurring Donation Open-ended recurring donations have no defined end date. Specify the gift amount and recurrence schedule. 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, click the **Recurring Donations** tab. If you don't see the Recurring Donations tab, click the App Launcher ( ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), then click **All Items**. 2. Click **New**. ![Location of New option to create recurring donations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_new.png) 3. In the Recurring Donation Name field, enter a name for the recurring donation. 4. Enter _either_ the Contact name or the Organization name, but not both. You can use the lookup field to locate existing contacts and organizations in Salesforce. 5. Enter the Recurring Donation's details: - **Amount** – The amount for each child donation. - **Open Ended Status** – Select **Open**. Salesforce creates opportunities based on the Installment Period but instead of doing installments it bases the number of Opportunities on the Forecast Month setting in NPSP Settings. - **Date Established** – Date you opened the recurring donation. - **Next Donation Date** – The date on which you want the next donation to occur. This date also determines the date of all future donations. For example, if you enter 4/21/18 for the Next Donation Date, and the donation is a monthly installment, then Salesforce creates the first donation for 4/21/18, then 5/21/18 and so on. - **Always use last day of month** – When you select this checkbox, NPSP creates monthly and quarterly installment Opportunities with the Close Date set to the last day of the month. When this checkbox is NOT selected and the Next Payment date is the 28th, 29th, or 30th day of the month, NPSP creates new Installment Opportunities with the Close Date set to that specific day. If the Next Payment date is the 31st, the behavior is the same as if this checkbox was selected. This checkbox applies only to Recurring Donations where the Installment Period is Quarterly or Monthly, or any custom Installment Periods where the Time Period Type is Monthly. - **Day of Month** – When you set a value, NPSP creates monthly and quarterly installment Opportunities with the Close Date set to your selected day of the month. This picklist applies only to Recurring Donations where the Installment Period is Quarterly or Monthly, or any custom Installment Periods where the Time Period Type is Monthly. If the Day of Month value is before Date Established, the first donation appears in the following month. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you select Always use last day of month, it takes precedence over any value you choose in the Day of Month picklist. If you want to set the Close Date to a day that is not the last day of the month, make sure that Always use last day of month is not selected. - **Last Donation Date** – Do Not Enter. NPSP calculates this value automatically based on the last time a child donation was marked as Posted (for example, it records the date of your most recent child donation). - **Installment Period** – How often you'll receive the donations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Changing the installment period for an existing Open-Ended Recurring Donation may result in the loss and re-creation of open opportunities. Any data associated with those opportunities may be lost. - **Installments** – Do Not Enter. This option is for Fixed-Length Recurring Donations only. For Open-Ended Recurring Donations, NPSP automatically calculates the installment number based on the Opportunity Forecast Months setting in NPSP Settings. - **Schedule Type** – Do Not Enter. For Open-Ended donations, the value is always Multiply. - **Campaign** – If you want to attach the Recurring Donation to a campaign, use the lookup field to select the campaign here. For more information on Salesforce Campaigns, see [Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/htviewhelpdoc?id=campaigns_def.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help and Training. - **Paid Amount** – Do Not Enter. NPSP calculates this value automatically as the donations are made and marked Posted. - **Total Paid Installments** – Do Not Enter. NPSP calculates this value automatically as donations are made and marked Posted. 6. Click **Save**. NPSP creates the appropriate number of child donations, and marks each donation with a Pledged staged. ![Confirm open-ended status](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_opnendstatus.png) ![Locate related donations on Related tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_relateddons.png) As you change child donation stages from Pledged to Posted, NPSP recalculates some of the fields described above. ![Confirm recalculation of donation](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_paidamt.png) ![Confirm posted status](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_posted.png) ## Create a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation Fixed-length recurring donations have a defined end date. Specify the amount of each gift, a recurrence schedule, and a last gift date. 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, click the **Recurring Donations** tab. If you don't see the Recurring Donations tab, click the App Launcher ( ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), then click **All Items**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In the Recurring Donation Name field, enter a name for the recurring donation. 4. Enter _either_ the Contact name or the Organization name, but not both. You can use the lookup field to locate existing contacts and organizations in Salesforce. 5. Enter the details of the recurring donation. - **Amount** – Enter the amount for each child donation, or a total amount if you want NPSP to divide installments up for you accordingly. - **Open Ended Status** – Select **None**. Salesforce creates the correct number of installments based on the Installment Period and Schedule Type you choose. New installments aren't added unless the Installments and/or Schedule Type are updated. The same behavior happens when you leave this field blank. - **Date Established** – Date you opened the recurring donation. - **Next Donation Date** – The date on which you want the next donation to occur. This date also determines the date of all future donations. For example, if you enter 4/21/18 for the Next Donation Date, and the donation is a monthly installment, then Salesforce creates the first donation for 4/21/18, then 5/21/18 and so on. - **Always use last day of month** – When you select this checkbox, NPSP creates monthly and quarterly installment Opportunities with the Close Date set to the last day of the month. When this checkbox is NOT selected and the Next Payment date is the 28th, 29th, or 30th day of the month, NPSP creates new Installment Opportunities with the Close Date set to that specific day. If the Next Payment date is the 31st, the behavior is the same as if this checkbox was selected. This checkbox applies only to Recurring Donations where the Installment Period is Quarterly or Monthly, or any custom Installment Periods where the Time Period Type is Monthly. - **Day of Month** – When you set a value, NPSP creates monthly and quarterly installment Opportunities with the Close Date set to your selected day of the month. This picklist applies only to Recurring Donations where the Installment Period is Quarterly or Monthly, or any custom Installment Periods where the Time Period Type is Monthly. If the Day of Month value is before Date Established, the first donation appears in the following month. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you select Always use last day of month, it takes precedence over any value you choose in the Day of Month picklist. If you want to set the Close Date to a day that is not the last day of the month, make sure that Always use last day of month is not selected. - **Last Donation Date** – Do not enter. NPSP calculates this value automatically based on the last time a child donation was marked Posted (for example, it records the date of your most recent child donation). - **Installment Period** – How often you'll receive the donations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Changing the installment period for an existing Open-Ended Recurring Donation may result in the loss and re-creation of open opportunities. Any data associated with those opportunities may be lost. - **Installments** – Enter the number of installments (donations) you expect to receive. You can specify the maximum number of installments in NPSP Settings. - **Schedule Type** – Select either Multiply or Divide. The option you choose tells Salesforce how to compute the amount for each child opportunity. Let's say your donor has pledged $100 a month for 12 months. If the number in the Amount field is $100, select Multiply. If the number in the Amount field is $1200, select Divide. NPSP will calculate the donations evenly, taking into account the necessary pennies to meet the total donation amount. - **Campaign** – If you want to attach the Recurring Donation to a campaign, use the lookup field to select the campaign here. - **Paid Amount** – Do not enter. NPSP calculates this value automatically as the donations are made and marked Posted. - **Total Paid Installments** – Do not enter. NPSP calculates this value automatically as donations are made and marked Posted. 6. Click **Save**. NPSP creates the number of child donation records (installments) and all are marked with a Pledged stage. ![Recurring Donation record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_opnendstatus2.png) ![Related tab of the record showing donations in Pledged stage](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_pledged.png) As you change child donation stages from Pledged to Posted, NPSP recalculates some of the fields described above. ![Recurring Donation record showing recalculated fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_paidamt2.png) ## Create an Open-Ended Recurring Donation from a Contact Action If you're creating a new Open Ended Recurring Donation, you might find it easier to create it directly from the Contact record using the provided Quick Action. If you don't see the button on your Contact record, see [Add or Edit a New Opportunity Button on Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended."). ![Create an Open Recurring Donation from the Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_newopenrd.png) 1. On the Contact record, click **New Open Recurring Donation**. 2. You only need to populate these fields: Recurring Donation Name, Amount, Installment Period, and Next Donation Date. ![New Open Recurring Donation dialog box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_newopenrd2.png) 3. The necessary Open Ended Status and Schedule Type fields are automatically populated with the correct values when you save the record. Click **Edit** if you need to change any other fields. ![Recurring Donation Information section showing populated Open Ended Status and Schedule Type fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_recur_do_opnendstatus3.png) ## Automatic Recurring Donations Naming By default, NPSP names your Recurring Donations automatically. Here's how it works. 1. Create a new Recurring Donation. 2. Enter placeholder text in **Recurring Donation Name** such as "New Donation". 3. Fill out the rest of the fields. 4. Click **Save**. Once you save the record, NPSP updates the Recurring Donation Name using this format: _\[DonorName\] \[Amount\] - Recurring_ For example, if you enter a new $100 Recurring Donation for Barbara Levy, the name becomes: "Barbara Levy $100 - Recurring". If you have your own naming convention that you'd rather use, you can ask your administrator to [disable Automatic Recurring Donation Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring legacy recurring donations."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When you update a Legacy Recurring Donation field used in the name format (such as Amount), NPSP doesn't update the Recurring Donation Name. For example, if the Recurring Donation Name is "Barbara Levy $100 - Recurring" and you update the Amount to $200, the record name remains unchanged. You can update the name manually if you wish. # Create Multiple Applications Using Flow Your organization may have need to have more than one application form. For example, a grant application may look and function different from a scholarship application. You can designate a specific application on a Funding Program using flows and the Application Form field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Follow these steps each time you add a new flow for an application form to make sure the flow's API name is added to the Application Form field values. - **[1\. Create a New Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create a new flow by cloning an existing flow or starting from scratch. The Create Application flow is already included in Grants Management, so we'll clone it to get started. - **[2\. Activate the Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate the flow so it can be assigned in a Funding Program's Application Form field. - **[3\. Get the Flow API Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find the flow's API name to add to the Application Form field. - **[4\. Add the API Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the API name of the flow to the Application Form field's values. The values available in the Application Form field are dependent on having an active flow and adding the flow's API Name as a value to the Application Form field on the Funding Program. - **[5\. Assign a Flow to a Funding Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the flow you created on a Funding Program. The options in the Application Form field are dependent on the values that exist in the Application Form field in the previous step. ## 1\. Create a New Flow You can create a new flow by cloning an existing flow or starting from scratch. The Create Application flow is already included in Grants Management, so we'll clone it to get started. ![Clone and save the flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/multiappsclone_flow_.png) 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then click **Flows**. 3. Click **Create Application**. 4. Click **Save As**. 5. Click **A New Flow**. 6. Enter a Flow Label. 7. The Flow API Name autopopulates, but can be updated. Once the flow is saved, you won’t be able to update the Flow API Name. 8. Optionally, enter a Description. 9. Click **Save**. From here, build a flow tailored to your organization’s needs. We recommend reviewing [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=flow_build.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help for details on creating flows. ## 2\. Activate the Flow Activate the flow so it can be assigned in a Funding Program's Application Form field. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click Setup. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then select Flows. 3. Click the down arrow button (![Show more action button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)) for the flow, then select **View Details and Versions**. 4. Click **Activate**. ![Activate the flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/multiappsactivate_flow_.png) ## 3\. Get the Flow API Name Find the flow's API name to add to the Application Form field. ![Locate the Flow API Name.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/multiappsapiname.png) 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then select **Flows**. 3. Click the down arrow button (![Show more action button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)) for the flow, then select **View Details and Versions**. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Copy the Flow API Name. This is needed for the next step. ## 4\. Add the API Name Add the API name of the flow to the Application Form field's values. The values available in the Application Form field are dependent on having an active flow and adding the flow's API Name as a value to the Application Form field on the Funding Program. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click Setup. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Funding Program**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **Application Form**. 6. Under Values, click **New**. 7. Enter the Flow API Name, then click **Save**. ## 5\. Assign a Flow to a Funding Program Assign the flow you created on a Funding Program. The options in the Application Form field are dependent on the values that exist in the Application Form field in the previous step. 1. Click App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), then search for and select **Funding Programs**. 2. Click a Funding Program. 3. Click the pencil icon (![Pencil icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/pencilicon.png)) next to Application Form. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Unable to see or update the Application Form field? Ask your admin for access. Learn more in [Set Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure field-level security for grantmakers."). 4. Select a flow. For this example, we’d select the flow we just created—**Create\_Application \_Relief\_Reinvestment**. ![Select the flow from the Application Form field.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/multiapps_appformfield.png) 5. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note An error occurs for the grantseeker if a flow isn't assigned to the Application Form field. # Create Named Credentials for Virtual Calls Create a named credential to enter the URL of an AWS Chime callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters. Then, enter the named credential as a callout endpoint to let Salesforce handle all authentication to AWS Chime.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Example named credential setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_chime_named_credential.png) See [Create a Named Credential for Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.ls_video_call_create_a_named_credential.htm). # Create NPSP Data Import Records Connected to a Batch After you create a batch, upload your data import file to create the data import records for the batch. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member Eric Grenfell-Muir for helping to improve this article. For our example, we'll use a spreadsheet of people who signed up for the upcoming event. 1. Create your data import file (csv). 2. Make sure in your data import file, you have a column called NPSP Data Import Batch. For each row in your spreadsheet that you want to include in that batch, enter the batch's Salesforce ID, or you can enter the batch name if you're using an Import tool that supports matching a record by its name, such as the Data Import Wizard. 3. Upload the CSV into the NPSP Data Import object by following the instructions in the [Upload Data from the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer.") and [Process Your Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity.") articles. If you're using the Data Import Wizard, select Salesforce.com ID in the **Which NPSP Data Import Batch field in your file do you want to match against to set the NPSP Data Import Batch lookup field?** ![Top of the Data Import Wizard import setup screen.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/batch_import_callout_top.png)![Data Import Wizard setup screen with the field to select NPSP Data Import Batch ID highlighted near the end of the list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/batch_import_callout_bottom.png) If you need more information on creating your CSV file and importing records, see [Clean and Format Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn to clean and format your data prior to importing it into Salesforce. Improperly formatted data causes errors during import."), [Upload Data from the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer."), [Process Your Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity."). If your batch setup is complete, see [Process an NPSP Data Import Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_batch_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to process a batch using NPSP Data Importer and what the different batch statuses mean."). # Create or Edit a Gift Entry Template Learn how to create or customize Gift Entry templates to fit your donation management needs. - **[Overview of Gift Entry Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create different Gift Entry Templates for different types of gifts. You can enter gifts in batches, rather than one at a time, to use multiple gift entry templates at once and streamline your workflow. - **[Template Info](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Template Info tab to name name the template and provide a description. The Template Name must be unique. - **[Form Fields and Field Bundles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Form Fields tab, define the template's sections and fields. The sidebar contains all possible fields and field bundles you can add to the form. - **[Batch Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're creating a template for gifts entered one at a time, you can skip this step. ## Overview of Gift Entry Templates Create different Gift Entry Templates for different types of gifts. You can enter gifts in batches, rather than one at a time, to use multiple gift entry templates at once and streamline your workflow. Entering stacks of checks from individual donors? Tailor a template to include only essential fields such as Contact and Check information. And set default values for fields, such as Check as the Payment Type. Perhaps you're a major gift officer who's running a capital campaign. Instead of manually entering complex gift information in an Opportunity, Payment, and GAU Allocation, create a template with fields from those related objects. Then you can use that template to accurately and efficiently enter gifts one at a time directly from the Account or Contact record. The fields your users need for gift batches, such as a stack of checks from individual donors, are probably different than the fields needed to enter individual gifts for a Contact or Organization Account. Use Gift Entry Templates to handle these different use cases. To create a new Gift Entry Template: 1. Click the **Gift Entry** tab. 2. Click the **Templates** subtab. 3. Click **Create Template**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Currently, the New Single Gift button and the New Gift actions can be used only in the Default Gift Entry Template. You can't remove buttons from the NPSP Gift Entry page. When creating or editing Gift Entry Templates, set the details of these tabs. - **Template Info:** Name your template and add a description. - **Form Fields:** Add and customize donation-related fields and groups of fields you want to include in the Gift Entry form. - **Batch Settings:** If this template is for entering batches of gifts, set up the columns to include in the batch gift table and customize the fields for your Batch Header. ## Template Info Use the Template Info tab to name name the template and provide a description. The Template Name must be unique. Then click the **Form Fields** tab or the **Next: Form Fields** button. ## Form Fields and Field Bundles In the Form Fields tab, define the template's sections and fields. The sidebar contains all possible fields and field bundles you can add to the form. The main screen, titled Configure Form Fields, contains the placement of the fields on the template. When you create a template, the form is pre-populated with recommended fields, but you can change them. Field bundles are collections of fields that serve a shared purpose and generally have special layouts or automation. The available field bundles are: - **Donation Donor**: Includes fields for selecting whether Account1 or Contact1 is the main donor. - **GAU Allocations**: Includes fields for entering multiple GAU Allocations for a gift. - **Soft Credits**: Includes fields for assigning Soft Credits. The other field groups in the sidebar correspond to the Object Groups in Advanced Mapping. You can't add some NPSP fields to Gift Entry templates. See the [full list of suppressed fields on GitHub](https://github.com/SalesforceFoundation/NPSP/blob/main/force-app/main/default/lwc/geTemplateBuilderFormFields/excludedFields.js). If you need to add custom fields or adjust existing Field Mappings, see [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). Here's some information about the Object Groups: Account 1 Fields for Organization Accounts. Do not use these fields for Household Accounts. This organization can be the donor or have an Affiliation with Contact 1. Contact 1 Fields for the primary Contact in a Household Account. This Contact can be the donor or have an Affiliation with the organization in Account 1. If you create a new Contact with Gift Entry, NPSP automatically creates a Household Account for the Contact. Account 2 Fields for Organization Accounts. Do not use these fields for Household Accounts. This organization can have an Affiliation with Contact 2. Contact 2 Fields for the secondary Contact in Contact 1's Household Account. This Contact could also have an Affiliation with the organization in Account 2. Address Address fields associated with Contact 1's Household Account. NPSP automation can populate this address in Contact 1's Household and all Contacts within the same Household. Household Fields for Contact 1's Household Account. Opportunity Fields for creating or updating Opportunities. Payment Fields for Payment details. GAU Allocation 1 or 2 Use when entering a single GAU Allocation and you have custom fields on GAU Allocations. If you don't have custom fields, use the GAU Allocations Field Bundle. Don't include the GAU Allocations Field Bundle and GAU Allocation 1 or 2 fields in the same template. - **[Add or Remove Form Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to add or remove form fields. - **[Define Form Sections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Forms start with a single section, but you can add more. - **[Set Field Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can customize the appearance and configuration of your form's fields in many ways. ### Add or Remove Form Fields Follow these steps to add or remove form fields. ![Gift Entry Form Fields tab with numbered callouts for the Account 1 Object Group name in the sidebar (1), the Donor Information section highlighted (2), and multiple fields in the Account 1 group selected in the sidebar (3).](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/form_fields-add_fields.png) 1. In the sidebar, click the Object Group name (1) to expand the fields in that group. For example, click Account1 to see all of the available fields for Account1. 2. In the main screen, click the section where you want to add the field. The selected section is highlighted in blue, with a white checkmark in the corner (2). 3. In the sidebar, select the field (3) to add it to the bottom of the selected section. To remove a field from the form, either deselect it in the sidebar or click the trash button to the right of the field (in the section). ![Warning](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_warning.png) Warning Do not remove a field that's in use by a batch that hasn't been fully processed. ### Define Form Sections Forms start with a single section, but you can add more. Simply click **Add Section** to add additional sections. Configure a section by clicking the gear button within that section. In Section Settings, you can rename the section, set it to be expanded or collapsed by default, or delete it entirely. Deleting a section from the form removes all of its fields. If any of those fields are required in all templates (such as Donation Donor), you must re-add them before you can save the template. You can also move sections within the form by clicking the up or down arrows in the section header. ### Set Field Details You can customize the appearance and configuration of your form's fields in many ways. 1. Update a field's label by changing its Field Label value. The default labels include the Object Group and the field label, which don't always translate into user-friendly field names. We highly recommend updating them! Having a friendly user interface is key to good user adoption. 2. Set a default value that the field has upon loading the form. 3. Select the Required box to make sure that users fill out that field on the form. 4. Move fields up or down within their section by clicking the up or down arrows. When you're done configuring fields, click the **Batch Header** tab or the **Next: Batch Header** button to add batch-specific information. If you don't need to configure a batch header, click **Save & Close** to finish. ## Batch Settings If you're creating a template for gifts entered one at a time, you can skip this step. - **[Configure Batch Table Columns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The batch table appears at the bottom of the page when you enter gifts as a batch instead of one at a time. If you have many fields on your form and all of these fields are included in your batch table, the columns will be collapsed down to an unreadable width. - **[Configure Batch Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This tab allows you to add information about a batch of gifts. ### Configure Batch Table Columns The batch table appears at the bottom of the page when you enter gifts as a batch instead of one at a time. If you have many fields on your form and all of these fields are included in your batch table, the columns will be collapsed down to an unreadable width. A new template includes the recommended fields, and the fields included in your form are available to add. To add form fields to your batch table, move fields from **Available Fields** to **Visible Fields** and vice versa to remove fields from the table. Use the up and down arrows to reorder the **Visible Fields**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Status and Failure Information are required for batch processing and can't be removed from the batch table. ### Configure Batch Header This tab allows you to add information about a batch of gifts. The batch header fields included in NPSP are: - Batch Name - Batch Description - Expected Count of Gifts - Expected Total Batch Amount - Require Expected Totals Match Add additional fields in the NPSP Data Import Batches object. See [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) in Salesforce help documentation for more information. This tab is similar to the Form Fields tab. Select or deselect a field in the sidebar to add or remove it from the fields list on the right. You can override the field label, set a default value, make it required, or change its display order. When you're done, click **Save & Close**. SEE ALSO: - [Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time.") # Create or Modify a Flow Create a flow or modify the Create Application flow to suit your nonprofit organization’s needs. - **[Create a New Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You may need to create a new flow. The Create Application and Submit Application flows are available as templates, and the Enhanced Application (Sample) is an example of a single page application, so you can experiment with creating your own flows without making changes to the active flows. - **[Modify the Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grants Management provides out-of-the-box flows, but certain steps may need to be added, updated, or removed to fit your process. ## Create a New Flow You may need to create a new flow. The Create Application and Submit Application flows are available as templates, and the Enhanced Application (Sample) is an example of a single page application, so you can experiment with creating your own flows without making changes to the active flows. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then click **Flows**. 3. Click **New Flow**. 4. Select a template to use an existing flow or Screen Flow to start a new flow from scratch. ![Create a new flow with a template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/new_flow.png) 5. Click **Create**. From here, build a flow tailored to your organization’s needs. We recommend reviewing [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=flow_build.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help for details on creating flows. ## Modify the Flow Grants Management provides out-of-the-box flows, but certain steps may need to be added, updated, or removed to fit your process. For example, you may need to make a simple change to an existing flow and add a URL to your website on the application screen in the Create Application flow. This is an easy addition to make to the existing flow. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then click **Flows**. 3. Select a Flow. For example, **Create Application**. 4. Double click **Screen: Fill out Application**. 5. Select **URL** from the Screen Components list, then drag it to the Create Application screen. ![Modify the URL component in the flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/modify_flow.png) 6. Update the Screen Components properties. For example, enter an API Name, such as URL, and a Value, such as [www.thehivefoundation.com](http://www.thehivefoundation.com) . The Screen Component properties vary depending on the component added. 7. Click **Done**. 8. Click **Save As**. # Create or Modify a Flow Create a flow or modify the Create Application flow to suit the needs of your nonprofit organization. - **[Create a New Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_or_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You may need to create a new flow. The Create Application and Submit Application flows are available as templates, so you can experiment with creating your own flows without making changes to the active flows. - **[Modify the Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_or_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template provides out-of-the-box flows, but certain steps may need to be added, updated, or removed to fit your process. ## Create a New Flow You may need to create a new flow. The Create Application and Submit Application flows are available as templates, so you can experiment with creating your own flows without making changes to the active flows. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then click **Flows**. 3. Click **New Flow**. 4. Select a template to use an existing flow or Screen Flow to start a new flow from scratch. ![Create a new flow with a template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/new_flow.png) 5. Click **Create**. From here, build a flow tailored to your organization’s needs. We recommend reviewing [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=flow_build.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help for details on creating flows. ## Modify the Flow Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template provides out-of-the-box flows, but certain steps may need to be added, updated, or removed to fit your process. For example, you may need to make a simple change to an existing flow and add a URL to your website on the application screen in the Create Application flow. This is an easy addition to make to the existing flow. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Flows in the Quick Find box, then click **Flows**. 3. Select a Flow. For example, **Create Application**. 4. Double click **Screen: Fill out Application**. 5. Select **URL** from the Screen Components list, then drag it to the Create Application screen. ![Modify the URL component in the flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/modify_flow.png) 6. Update the Screen Components properties. For example, enter an API Name, such as URL, and a Value, such as [www.grantwoodconservationcenter.org](http://www.grantwoodconservationcenter.org) . The Screen Component properties vary depending on the component added. 7. Click **Done**. 8. Click **Save As**. # Create Orders and Generate Invoices Create orders to track your students’ product requests. To automatically generate invoices based on billing schedules, activate your orders. An invoice shows a list of order products alongside the total amount that a student must pay. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To create orders: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you generate an invoice: - Create products, which are linked in price books associated with academic intervals. - Set up an academic structure to accurately represent your institution's schedule. 1. From the app launcher, find and select **Orders**. 2. Click **New Order**. 3. Specify an account name. 4. Specify an order start date. 5. Specify the contact that the order is billed to. 6. Enter the shipping and billing addresses as required. 7. Enter the optional values. 8. Save your changes. 9. From the list of orders, open the order that you created. 10. In the Order Products related list, click **Add Products**. 11. If a price book isn’t selected for this order, select the price book that you want to use, and then save your changes. 12. Select the products to add to your order. 13. Enter a quantity and unit price for each order product. 14. Add line descriptions if needed. 15. Save your changes. 16. To link the order to an academic interval, create an academic order. 1. From the app launcher, find and select **Student Financials**. 2. On the Home page, click **Academic Orders**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select an academic interval. 5. Select an order to link to the academic interval. 6. Save your changes. 17. To activate the order products, do one of these steps: - On the Orders page, from the actions menu, select **Activate**. - Edit the order details and change the status to Activate. 18. Save your changes. The system automatically creates a billing schedule record for each order item, which defines when and how much to invoice. Based on the billing schedule, the automated invoice is generated. See [Generate Invoices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_invoice_generation.htm&language=en_US). # Create Outreach Source Codes for a Campaign in Education Enhance your campaign management by using outreach source codes to track each appeal of a campaign with details about audience and outreach methods. Salesforce streamlines the creation of source codes, significantly reducing manual entry errors, and improving consistency across campaigns. Marketers can now dedicate more time to strategic campaign planning, ensuring better reporting accuracy and overall campaign effectiveness. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a outreach source codes:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
## Create a Single Outreach Source Code Track the effectiveness of a campaign message by using an outreach source code attached to the message. 1. Create a campaign or open an existing campaign. 2. From the campaign page, click ![Show more](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select New Outreach Source Code. Or, go to Outreach Source Codes, and click **New**. 3. Enter details for the new outreach source code. 1. Give a descriptive name. 2. If source code generation isn't enabled, enter a unique source code. If source code generation is enabled, the source code can't be edited. 3. In Campaign, search for and select the campaign that the source code is tied to. 4. In Usage Type, specify the usage of the outreach source code. This field defaults to Fundraising. 5. Indicate if the source code is active. 6. In Audience Count, enter the number of person accounts, contacts, and businesses in the audience. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you performed segmentation in Data Cloud, the focus segment appears in the Outreach Source Code, and it shows a lookup to the market segment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). 4. Save your work. The outreach source code is now available to be applied to the donations received via this fundraising effort. ## Create Multiple Outreach Source Codes Save time and effort by creating the outreach source codes for all campaign messages at once. 1. From the Campaign page, in the Bulk Outreach Source Code pane, click **Create Bulk Outreach Source Codes**. 2. Select the type of message you intend to use for this batch of outreach source codes. 3. Enter the number of messages you plan to send via the selected channel type. 4. To create source codes for different types of messages for the campaign, click **Add Message Channel** and repeat the previous steps. There's a limit of 200 messages per batch. 5. When all message types and number of messages for each message channel are listed, click **Next**. 6. In the table, double-click any empty cells to enter the outreach information. 1. To add, remove, or change columns in this table, adjust the columns in the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component in the Lightning App Builder. Save and activate the page as an app default. 2. If the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component is configured to include Message Title and Message Content, enter the message text into the table before you generate the source codes. 3. To see any change made to the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component in the Lightning App Builder, refresh the Campaign page. 7. Click **Generate Source Code**. 8. If all rows of the table are completed correctly, click **Save**. 9. On the Campaign page, scroll to find the Outreach Source Codes pane. This lists the codes you created for this campaign. You can also create source codes and edit or delete the source codes in this pane. If you don’t see this pane, add the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component to the Campaign page layout in the Lightning App Builder. ## Add the Outreach Source Code Message To keep your campaign messaging organized and well-documented, add your message content to the outreach source code. Creating the source code is only the beginning of using outreach source codes with a campaign. These codes serve as identifiers that help you track the performance of each message. After you create the outreach source codes for a campaign, add the message that's associated with each code. Or, if you're creating outreach source codes in bulk, add the message, title, content, and channel information by filling out those cells in the bulk creation table. 1. From the Outreach Source Codes pane on the Campaign page, click the source code that you want to craft a message for. 2. On the outreach source code page, under the Message Details heading, enter the message content. 1. Enter the message title. 2. Enter the message content. 3. Enter the message channel platform account. For example, enter your Facebook account for a Facebook digital ad outreach message. 4. Enter the date that this message is sent. 3. Save your work. ## Add Interest Tags to Outreach Source Codes Enhance donor segmentation by assigning interest tags to outreach source codes. Interest tags improve the visibility and organization of audience information. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re unable to add interest tags, check if interest tags are enabled on the Outreach Source Code object. To use interest tags with source codes, the interest tags must be enabled. 1. From the Outreach Source Code record page, in the Interest Tags pane, search or browse for interest tags. 2. Add the relevant interest tags to the source code. SEE ALSO - [Create or Edit a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.campaigns_edit.htm&type=5) - [Campaign Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.campaigns_fields.htm&type=5) - [Get to Know Salesforce Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.campaigns_def.htm&type=5) - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Enable Features that Enhance Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enable_features_that_enhance_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your Fundraising data and provide robust automation around Fundraising processes.") # Create Outreach Source Codes for a Campaign in Nonprofit Enhance your campaign management by using outreach source codes to track each appeal of a campaign with details about audience and outreach methods. Salesforce streamlines the creation of source codes, significantly reducing manual entry errors, and improving consistency across campaigns. Marketers can now dedicate more time to strategic campaign planning, ensuring better reporting accuracy and overall campaign effectiveness. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a outreach source codes:

FundraisingAccess permission set
## Create a Single Outreach Source Code Track the effectiveness of a campaign message by using an outreach source code attached to the message. 1. Create a campaign or open an existing campaign. 2. From the campaign page, click ![Show more](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png) and select New Outreach Source Code. Or, go to Outreach Source Codes, and click **New**. 3. Enter details for the new outreach source code. 1. Give a descriptive name. 2. If source code generation isn't enabled, enter a unique source code. If source code generation is enabled, the source code can't be edited. 3. In Campaign, search for and select the campaign that the source code is tied to. 4. In Usage Type, specify the usage of the outreach source code. This field defaults to Fundraising. 5. Indicate if the source code is active. 6. In Audience Count, enter the number of person accounts, contacts, and businesses in the audience. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you performed segmentation in Data Cloud, the focus segment appears in the Outreach Source Code, and it shows a lookup to the market segment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). 4. Save your work. The outreach source code is now available to be applied to the donations received via this fundraising effort. ## Create Multiple Outreach Source Codes Save time and effort by creating the outreach source codes for all campaign messages at once. 1. From the Campaign page, in the Bulk Outreach Source Code pane, click **Create Bulk Outreach Source Codes**. 2. Select the type of message you intend to use for this batch of outreach source codes. 3. Enter the number of messages you plan to send via the selected channel type. 4. To create source codes for different types of messages for the campaign, click **Add Message Channel** and repeat the previous steps. There's a limit of 200 messages per batch. 5. When all message types and number of messages for each message channel are listed, click **Next**. 6. In the table, double-click any empty cells to enter the outreach information. 1. To add, remove, or change columns in this table, adjust the columns in the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component in the Lightning App Builder. Save and activate the page as an app default. 2. If the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component is configured to include Message Title and Message Content, enter the message text into the table before you generate the source codes. 3. To see any change made to the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component in the Lightning App Builder, refresh the Campaign page. 7. Click **Generate Source Code**. 8. If all rows of the table are completed correctly, click **Save**. 9. On the Campaign page, scroll to find the Outreach Source Codes pane. This lists the codes you created for this campaign. You can also create source codes and edit or delete the source codes in this pane. If you don’t see this pane, add the Bulk Outreach Source Codes component to the Campaign page layout in the Lightning App Builder. ## Add the Outreach Source Code Message To keep your campaign messaging organized and well-documented, add your message content to the outreach source code. Creating the source code is only the beginning of using outreach source codes with a campaign. These codes serve as identifiers that help you track the performance of each message. After you create the outreach source codes for a campaign, add the message that's associated with each code. Or, if you're creating outreach source codes in bulk, add the message, title, content, and channel information by filling out those cells in the bulk creation table. 1. From the Outreach Source Codes pane on the Campaign page, click the source code that you want to craft a message for. 2. On the outreach source code page, under the Message Details heading, enter the message content. 1. Enter the message title. 2. Enter the message content. 3. Enter the message channel platform account. For example, enter your Facebook account for a Facebook digital ad outreach message. 4. Enter the date that this message is sent. 3. Save your work. ## Add Interest Tags to Outreach Source Codes Enhance donor segmentation by assigning interest tags to outreach source codes. Interest tags improve the visibility and organization of audience information. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re unable to add interest tags, check if interest tags are enabled on the Outreach Source Code object. To use interest tags with source codes, the interest tags must be enabled. 1. From the Outreach Source Code record page, in the Interest Tags pane, search or browse for interest tags. 2. Add the relevant interest tags to the source code. SEE ALSO - [Create or Edit a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.campaigns_edit.htm&type=5) - [Campaign Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.campaigns_fields.htm&type=5) - [Get to Know Salesforce Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.campaigns_def.htm&type=5) - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Enable Features that Enhance Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_features_that_enhance_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your Fundraising data and provide robust automation around Fundraising processes.") # Create Pathway Templates To guide learners through the planning process, set up learner pathway templates for them to build their pathways from. Learners can use templates that the institution builds, or build a pathway from scratch.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create pathway templates: | Education Cloud Full Access | To create templates with the Intelligent Degree Planner interface, make sure that you're in the Student Success app. 1. In the App Launcher, enter Learning Pathway, and then select **Learning Pathway Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the template, and then click **Save**. 4. To associate learning pathway template program plans with the template, click **Related**. This makes courses available in the pathway planner. 5. In the Learning Pathway Template Item section or the Learning Pathway Template Program Plan section, click **New**, and enter the details. For learning pathway template items, enter values for Type, Learning Pathway Template, Learning, and Learning Program Plan Requirement. 6. Save your changes. 7. Similarly, associate this template with each desired learning pathway template item and learning pathway template program plan. 8. On the Learning Pathway Template record page, click the **Pathway Planner** tab to open Intelligent Degree Planner. 9. Click **Edit Template**. 10. Arrange the years, sessions, terms, and courses on the template, and save your changes. 11. To make the template available to students, go to the template's Details tab and change the status to **Active**. SEE ALSO: - [Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program.") - [Create a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Program Plan Builder to view, edit, save, cancel, and publish all your program plans. You can also organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses, and add active versions of learning courses to each element.") # Create Permission Sets for Applicants and External Reviewers Create and assign permission sets for applicants and external reviewers.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign permission sets: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Only Customer Community Plus users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud license can submit or review applications. ## Create an Applicant Permission Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. For Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the cloned permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your cloned version of the permission set, and then click **Object Settings**. 6. Click **Accounts**, and then click **Edit**. 7. Under Account: Record Types Assignments, select **Person Account**, **Secondary School**, **College**, **Business**, and **Military**. 8. Save your changes. 9. Next to Accounts, click **Object Settings**. 10. Click **Document Checklist Items**, and then click **Edit**. 11. For Object Permissions, make sure that Read, Create, Edit, and Delete are enabled, and then save your changes. 12. From Object Settings, select **Individual Application Task**, and then click **Edit**. 13. For Object Permissions, make sure that Read is enabled, and then save your changes. 14. For Field Permissions, select **Read Access** for these fields, and then save your changes. - Application Stage Definition - Preliminary Application Ref 15. From Object Settings, select **Omni Processes**, and then click **Edit**. 16. For Field Permissions, select **Read Access** for these fields, and then save your changes. - Active - Language - Sub Type - Type - Web Component Enabled 17. From Object Settings, click **Cases**, and then click **Edit**. 18. For Field Permissions, select **Create** and **Edit** for the Account Name field, and then save your changes. 19. From Object Settings, select **Course Credit Transfer Applications**, and then click **Edit**. 20. For Object Permissions, make sure that Create, Edit, and Delete are enabled, and then save your changes. 21. For Field Permissions, select **Read access** and **Edit access** for the Case field, and then save your changes. 22. From Object Settings, select **Individual Applications**, and then click **Edit**. 23. For Object Permissions, make sure that Read, Create, and Edit are enabled, and then save your changes. 24. For Field Permissions, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for the Submitted field, and then save your changes. 25. Similarly, make sure that these object permissions are enabled. - Individual Application Task Item: Read, Create, Edit, and Delete - Person Education: Read, Create, Edit, and Delete - Person Examination: Read, Create, Edit, and Delete These object settings enable you to create, confirm, and submit applications, and view and edit application tasks. Adjust these permissions to suit your specific needs. ## Create an External Reviewer Permission Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. For Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the cloned permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your cloned version of the permission set, and then click **Object Settings**. 6. Click **Preliminary Application Reference**, and then click **Edit**. 7. For Object Permissions, select **Read**. 8. Save your changes. 9. Similarly, select **Read** for these object permissions. - Document Checklist Item - Person Education - Person Examination - Individual Application Task These object settings support typical application reviews. Adjust these permissions to suit your specific needs. # Create Permission Sets for Internal Users Create and assign permission sets for processors and internal reviewers. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To assign permission sets: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Clone the appropriate permission set for the corresponding internal users. - For users that require full access, such as processors, clone the Education Cloud Full Access permission set. - For internal reviewers, clone the Education Cloud Reviewer permission set. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the cloned permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your cloned version of the permission set, and then click **Object Settings**. 6. Click **Document Checklist Item**, and then click **Edit**. 7. For Object Permissions, make sure that Read, Create, Edit, and Delete are enabled, and then save your changes. 8. Similarly, make sure that Read, Create, Edit, and Delete permissions are enabled for these objects. - Individual Application Task Item - Person Education - Person Examination These permissions also enable processors and reviewers to edit, view, confirm, and submit applications. # Create Person Affinities Create a list of student affinities in Education Cloud to reflect their past and current interests. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create person affinities: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - Define values for the Category, Sub Category, and Source picklists in the Person Affinity object using the Object Manager. By default, these picklists have no values. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Person Affinities**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and a description. 4. Select a contact associated with the person affinity. 5. Select the type of the person affinity. 6. Select the category and sub category of the person affinity. 7. Select the information source of the person affinity. 8. Select whether the person affinity is active or not. 9. Save your changes. # Create Person Competencies Advisors create person competencies to understand each student's starting point, enabling more personalized guidance and support. Students can self-enroll for these competencies through the portal. When a student enrolls for an involvement group through the portal, the competencies related to the involvement group are shown. Students can then add these as interested or acquired competencies. Students can also create their own person competencies through the portal. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create person competencies: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - Define values for the Proficiency Level and Verification Status picklists in the Person Competency object using the Object Manager. By default, these picklists have no values. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Person Competencies**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the person's level of proficiency in the competency. 4. Select whether the person associated with the competency is an account or a contact and then select a corresponding value. 5. Select the status of the competency's verification for the person. 6. Select dates when the competency is effective and is no longer effective for the person. 7. Select the competency. 8. Select the stage of the person's competency. 9. Save your changes. # Create Person Traits Create a list of a student’s traits in Education Cloud to reflect their current profile, such as strengths and opportunities. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create person traits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - Define values for the Category, Source, and Type picklists in the Person Trait object using the Object Manager. By default, these picklists have no values. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Person Traits**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name. 4. Select the type of the person trait. 5. Select the category of the person trait. 6. Select a contact associated with the person trait. 7. Select the information source of the person trait. 8. Save your changes. # Create Personalised Goals For Students Advisors can tailor goals for students based on their individual interests, personalities, competencies, and traits. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create personalized goals: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Components for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_components_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give advisors the tools to manage student progress by adding career planning and life goals features to the Student Success app.") 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the student. 3. Go to the Student Goals tab. 4. Click **New**. 5. Select the status of the goal. 6. Select dates when the goal is effective and by when the goal is targeted to be completed. 7. Enter a custom goal name. 8. Enter the completion percentage and a goal description. 9. Save your changes. # Create Position Qualifications After you create a position, create qualifications for that position to define the requirements that apply across all related job positions. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the role. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create position qualifications: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Positions describe generic-type jobs, and you can relate them to more specific job positions. For example, an organization that offers tutoring services could have Virtual Tutor as a position and Algebra Virtual Tutor-Pacific Time as a related job position. Position qualifications describe the requirements for those generic-type jobs. 1. From the Position Qualifications page, click **New**. The New Position Qualification window opens. 2. Select the position that this qualification is for, or [create one](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create positions for your organization to delineate functional roles that are characterized by specific duties and responsibilities. You can also specify skills and qualifications that are required to hold the position. Positions can be used across multiple volunteer initiatives."). 3. For the Qualification Reference Record, select either **Competency** or **Examination**. 1. To make the qualification standard a demonstrated competency, select **Competency**. 2. To make the qualification standard an exam, select **Examination**. Volunteer matching only uses competencies, not examinations. If the examination or competency doesn't exist, create one. 4. If applicable, enter a qualification level, select a proficiency level, and enter a description for the qualification. To match volunteers to a position or job position, set a qualification level on both the position qualification and job position qualification. To help with matching, map qualification level integers to proficiency level dynamic values. Possible values include Beginner, Intermediate, Expert. Or, map qualification level integers to values such as Desired, Preferred, or Mandatory. 5. Save your work. You find the position qualification on the Position Qualification page. Salesforce automatically assigns an alphanumeric name to the new qualification. SEE ALSO: - [Create Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create positions for your organization to delineate functional roles that are characterized by specific duties and responsibilities. You can also specify skills and qualifications that are required to hold the position. Positions can be used across multiple volunteer initiatives.") - [Create Job Position Qualifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_qualifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create a job position, create qualifications to make sure that volunteers meet the requirements for the job position. Job position qualifications are additive and apply only to the specific job position. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the job.") # Create Positions Create positions for your organization to delineate functional roles that are characterized by specific duties and responsibilities. You can also specify skills and qualifications that are required to hold the position. Positions can be used across multiple volunteer initiatives. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create positions: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Positions describe generic-type jobs, and they can be related to more specific Job Positions. For example, an organization that offers tutoring services could have Virtual Tutor as a Position and Algebra Virtual Tutor- Pacific Time as a related Job Position. 1. From the Positions page, click **New**, or from the Position field on the New Job Position window, click **New Position**. 2. On the New Position window, enter a name for the new position. 3. Select a status for the position. 4. To require internal approval of the position, select **Requires Internal Approval**. The approval process is set up during Volunteer Management configuration. 5. Save your work. The new position is available on the Positions page. SEE ALSO: - [Enable and Configure Features for Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_configure_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your volunteer data and provide automation around volunteer management processes.") - [Create Job Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives.") # Create Program Cohorts Create your program cohorts. - **[Work With Program Cohorts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements based on program cycle, location, date, or any other metric that's meaningful to your organization. - **[Create a Program Cohort](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements together for tracking and reporting purposes. - **[Add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add multiple Program Engagements to a Program Cohort from a Program Engagement list view, provided you have permission to edit the objects and records on that list. ## Work With Program Cohorts Use Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements based on program cycle, location, date, or any other metric that's meaningful to your organization. An example Program Cohort is anyone enrolled in a support group for a particular program cycle. ## Create a Program Cohort Create Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements together for tracking and reporting purposes. 1. Click the **Program Cohorts** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Program Cohort Name. 4. Select a Status. 5. Select the Program. 6. Provide a description of the Program Cohort and its purpose. 7. Set the start and end dates. 8. Click **Save**. ## Add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort You can add multiple Program Engagements to a Program Cohort from a Program Engagement list view, provided you have permission to edit the objects and records on that list. This is helpful if you want to segment clients you've recently enrolled in a Program into Program Cohorts, or if you're creating a new Program Cohort for all the Program Engagements in a Program. Depending on [what your admin has enabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_cohort_mass_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allow users to add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort directly from a Program Engagement list view."), the process to add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort from a list view will involve either using a quick action or using enhanced list view functionality. 1. Click the **Program Engagements** tab. 2. From ![List view control icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/listviewscontrol.png), select **New**. 3. Enter a list view name, for example Add Program Engagements to Cohort, then click **Save**. 4. From ![List view control icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/listviewscontrol.png), select **Select Fields to Display**. 5. Move **Stage** and **Program Cohort** from Available Fields to Visible Fields, then click **Save**. 6. Optionally, click **Add Filter** to add filters so you can easily find the Program Engagements to add to the Program Cohort. 7. Depending on what your admin has enabled: - If you see the **Add to Program Cohort** button: - Select the Program Engagements to add. - Click **Add to Program Cohort**. - Search for and select the Program Cohort, then click **Save**. - Click **OK**. - Or, if you don't see the **Add to Program Cohort** button: - If your list view has multiple record types, filter the list view by a single record type. - Select the Program Engagements to add to the Program Cohort. - Next to one of the selected Program Engagements, in the Program Cohort column, click ![Edit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/pencilIcon.png) . - Search for and select a Program Cohort. - Select **Update selected items**. - Click **Apply**. ![Mass update using a list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/inlinemassedit.png) - Click **Save**. # Create Program Engagements Learn to create program engagements - **[Work With Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Engagements track the relationship between Programs and the Clients, Organization Accounts, Household Accounts, or custom objects that engage with them. - **[Create a Program Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a Program Engagement, a Client is presumed to be the subject to which the Program and Services are delivered. ## Work With Program Engagements Program Engagements track the relationship between Programs and the Clients, Organization Accounts, Household Accounts, or custom objects that engage with them. For example, a Program Engagement can track a client enrolled in a class, a school receiving curriculum kits, or an animal in a rescue program. - Many Program Engagements are Client engagements, but you can also specify volunteers, donors, and service providers using the **Role** field. - The default naming for Program Engagements is `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name`. For example, `Tom Higgins 2020-07-12: Lunch Program`. You can override the default name on a case-by-case basis, or a Salesforce admin can [customize record naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object.") for your org. - Track the progress of Program Engagements using one of these Stages: Applied, Application Denied, Waitlisted, Enrolled, Active, Completed, or Withdrawn. See all waitlisted Program Engagements using the **Waitlisted Program Engagements** related list on the Program Engagements tab. ## Create a Program Engagement When you create a Program Engagement, a Client is presumed to be the subject to which the Program and Services are delivered. You can also create Program Engagements for Household Accounts, and if your admin has configured it, for Organization Accounts or custom objects. 1. Click the **Program Engagements** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the Program Engagement a name. This name will be replaced by the automated naming configured for your org unless you select **Auto-Name Override**. 4. Select a Stage. 5. Complete one of these tasks based on the type of Program Engagement you want to create: - To create an anonymous Program Engagement, leave the **Client** field blank. The Contact name will be replaced by "Anonymous." For example, `Anonymous 2020-06-17: Hygiene Kits`. - To create a Program Engagement for a household, enter a Household Account in the **Household Account** field. - If your admin added an Organization Account field, enter an organization account. This field may be named differently depending on how your admin set it up. - If your admin added a custom object, enter a value in the custom object field. 6. Select the Program in which to enroll the client. 7. Select the Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Select the client's Role in the Program. 9. Click **Save**. # Create Programs Learn how to create programs - **[Work With Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Programs track your organization's overall work. - **[Create a Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a program to track and manage your organization's mission. - **[Add Clients to Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add clients to Programs from either the Contacts or Programs tabs. - **[End a Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a Program ends, be sure to mark it as completed. ## Work With Programs Programs track your organization's overall work. At an advocacy organization, Programs could include local school fundraising and community events. At a human services organization, Programs could include housing assistance and a food pantry. ## Create a Program Create a program to track and manage your organization's mission. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the Program a name. 4. Select a Status. 5. Optionally: - Enter a summary, which will appear in Program list views and reports. - Enter details about the Target Population that the Program is intended to help. - Enter a detailed description that provides more context about the Program’s goals. - Enter guidance to help the Case Manager choose which Goals to select when creating a Case Plan related to this Program. The Case Plan Instructions appear on the Select Goals step of the Case Plan Wizard. - Enter start and end dates for the Program. - Select a Program Issue Area, which is a description of the issue addressed by the Program, like Housing or Employment. Admins can configure additional Program Issue Areas. 6. Click **Save**. ## Add Clients to Programs Add clients to Programs from either the Contacts or Programs tabs. ### Add Clients to Programs from the Contacts Tab 1. Click the **Contacts** tab. 2. Click the client's name. 3. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 4. Search for and select the Program. 5. For the Role, select Client. 6. For the Stage, select Enrolled. 7. Select a Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Set the Start Date when this Client will begin the Program. If left blank, the Start Date defaults to today. 9. Click **Save**. ### Mass Add Clients to Programs from the Contacts Tab If enabled, you can mass create Program Engagements for a single Program using the Add to Program button on Contacts list views. For details, see[Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_mass_create_pes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view.") . 1. Click the **Contacts** tab. 2. Select the box next to each name you want to add to a Program. 3. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 4. Search for and select the Program. 5. For the Role, select Client. 6. For the Stage, select Enrolled. 7. Select a Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Set the Start Date when this Client will begin the Program. If left blank, the Start Date defaults to today. 9. Click **Save**. ### Add Clients to Programs from the Programs Tab Back on the Program page, scroll down to the Program Engagements related list and click **View All**. You'll see the Program Engagement you just created. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click the name of a program. 3. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 4. Search for and select a client. You may need to create a new Contact if you can't find the client. 5. From Role, select **Client**. 6. Select a Stage. 7. Select a Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Set the Start Date for the client in the Program. If left blank, the Start Date defaults to today. 9. Click **Save**. ![Confirm Contact added to Program via Program Engagements list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/confirmprogramengagement.png) ## End a Program When a Program ends, be sure to mark it as completed. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click the Program name. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Change the status to Completed. 5. Enter a date in the End Date field. 6. Click **Save**. # Create Quick Actions Create quick actions to give your nonprofit users convenient access to important information. - **[Create a Quick Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_quick_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An object-specific Quick Action performs a specific action in Salesforce, such as creating or updating a record. Quick Actions can help streamline your users’ experience. For example, if you know a Funding Request needs to be created when a new Contact is added, you can add an action to the Contact record that allows your staff members to do exactly that without extra navigation. - **[Add the Action to Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_quick_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the quick action to a Lightning page to make it available to your nonprofit users. ## Create a Quick Action An object-specific Quick Action performs a specific action in Salesforce, such as creating or updating a record. Quick Actions can help streamline your users’ experience. For example, if you know a Funding Request needs to be created when a new Contact is added, you can add an action to the Contact record that allows your staff members to do exactly that without extra navigation. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Select the object to create an action for. For this example, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click **New Action**. 6. Select an Action Type. For example, **Create a Record**. 7. Select a Target Object this action will create. For example, **Funding Request**. 8. Optionally, select a Standard Label Type. 9. Enter a Label. This will appear in the form of a button on the object page. For example, enter New Funding Request. 10. Press tab to autofill Name. 11. Optionally, enter a Description. 12. Optionally, select Create Feed Item. 13. Optionally, enter a Success Message. 14. Click **Save**. ![Enter action information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/create_action.png) ## Add the Action to Page Layout Add the quick action to a Lightning page to make it available to your nonprofit users. To see the new Quick Action, navigate to a Contact record and click the Action dropdown. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Select the object name you created an action for. For this example, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click the Page Layout Name to add the new quick action button to. For example, click **Contact Layout**. 6. Select **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 7. In this example, click **override the predefined actions** to customize the Contact layout. 8. Drag the new quick action into the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. ![Add new action to page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/add_action_1.png) 9. Click **Save**. ![Example of action on Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/add_action_2.png) # Create Quick Actions for Fundraising in Education To create quick actions in your Fundraising apps, create Action Launcher deployments. ### Required Editions | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Education Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Performance**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions | | Nonprofit Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions |
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create quick actions:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
For example, create a deployment on the Account object in the Fundraising Operations app that includes these flows. - Close Gift Commitment - Manage Gift Commitment Schedules - Pause | Resume - Update Recurring Gift Commitment Schedule - Upgrade | Downgrade Commitment 1. To show the Fundraising Operations Action Launcher, edit the Account record page. 2. Save the changes. 3. Activate the changes on the Fundraising Operations app. Now you have buttons on the Action Launcher to start the flows. Similarly, add flows or other actions to the Action Launcher on any record page and in any Fundraising app. # Create Quick Actions for Fundraising in Nonprofit To create quick actions in your Fundraising apps, create Action Launcher deployments. ### Required Editions | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Education Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Performance**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions | | Nonprofit Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions |
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create quick actions:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
For example, create a deployment on the Account object in the Fundraising Operations app that includes these flows. - Close Gift Commitment - Manage Gift Commitment Schedules - Pause | Resume - Update Recurring Gift Commitment Schedule - Upgrade | Downgrade Commitment 1. To show the Fundraising Operations Action Launcher, edit the Account record page. 2. Save the changes. 3. Activate the changes on the Fundraising Operations app. Now you have buttons on the Action Launcher to start the flows. Similarly, add flows or other actions to the Action Launcher on any record page and in any Fundraising app. # Create Record Alerts and Post Student Progress Configure flows to create student record alerts and send course offering participant insights directly to Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations: Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows: Manage Flow
Before you start: - [Turn on Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_turn_on_context_service.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes.") - [Prepare your org for the Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prep_org_for_course_operations_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide agent actions with the required data. Define at-risk criteria, supply data for course offering participant insights, create an advising record type for cases, and create employee records for faculty members.") 1. Modify the EDU Course Operations: Create Record Alert flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Course Operations: Create Record Alert**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. For the Get Advising Case element, add a condition where the Record Type ID equals the ID of the advising case record type. To locate the record type ID, see [Find the Salesforce ID of a Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000384487&type=1&language=en_US). 5. Save and activate the flow. 2. Modify the EDU Course Operations: Post Student Progress to Slack Channel flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Course Operations: Post Student Progress to Slack Channel**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. To post student progress on a different schedule, in the Start element, edit the frequency. 5. Save and activate the flow. # Create Research Profiles and Research Profile Canvases in Slack in Education Integrate Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce with Slack. Create party philanthropic research profiles, research requests, and research profile canvases. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Slack and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Slack and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To integrate Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce with Slack:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin
Before you start, [set up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce to get insights into philanthropic and wealth data, answer questions about prospects, and create party philanthropic research profiles, research request cases, and research profile canvases in Slack."). 1. [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack). 2. Sign your Slack user into Salesforce from Slack. 1. Sign in to your Slack workspace. 2. From the sidebar, click **Sign in to your Salesforce**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click **Continue to Salesforce**. 5. Enter your admin login credentials. 6. Click **Login** and then click **Allow**. 3. [Install the Slack connected app](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#connect-salesforce-and-slack). 4. [Add the Philanthropic Research agent to Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#add-an-agent-to-slack). # Create Research Profiles and Research Profile Canvases in Slack in Nonprofit Integrate Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce with Slack. Create party philanthropic research profiles, research requests, and research profile canvases. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Slack and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Slack and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To integrate Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce with Slack:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin
Before you start, [set up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce to get insights into philanthropic and wealth data, answer questions about prospects, and create party philanthropic research profiles, research request cases, and research profile canvases in Slack."). 1. [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack). 2. Sign your Slack user into Salesforce from Slack. 1. Sign in to your Slack workspace. 2. From the sidebar, click **Sign in to your Salesforce**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click **Continue to Salesforce**. 5. Enter your admin login credentials. 6. Click **Login** and then click **Allow**. 3. [Install the Slack connected app](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#connect-salesforce-and-slack). 4. [Add the Philanthropic Research agent to Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/36218109305875-Set-up-and-manage-Agentforce-in-Slack#add-an-agent-to-slack). # Create Rubric Assessment Questions with Apex Script Run an Apex script to create the questions that align with the scoring integration procedure that’s used for rubrics. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add questions to a rubric using Apex script: Education Cloud Full Access
`// Controls whether this script will delete records matching this data on developer name before attempting to insert. // This should only be enabled if you are ok removing the data already present, if it was previously inserted // Note: It will fail if assessment and/or assessment question responses are present Boolean doDeletes = false; // Controls whether data should be inserted. Boolean doInserts = true; // Assessment Question Set Name & Dev Name String aqsDevName = 'XApplication_Review_Questions'; String aqsName = 'Application Review Questions'; // Default Response Options String defaultResponseOpts = 'Incomplete or Unacceptable\nAcceptable\nSatisfactory\nExemplary'; // All Question Defaulted Field Values String questionDataType = 'Radio'; String questionQuestionCategory = :alert_spin:'Admissions'; String questionFormulaResponseType = 'Text'; Boolean isQuestionActive = true; Boolean isQuestionOptionSourceResponseValue = false; Map questionNameByQDevName = new Map(); Map questionByQDevName = new Map(); Map responseOptsByQDevName = new Map(); // Assessment Question 1 Definition String q1DevName = 'Application_Review_Criterion_Profile'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q1DevName, 'Application Review Criterion: Profile'); questionByQDevName.put (q1DevName, 'Is the Profile section complete?'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q1DevName, 'Incomplete\nPartly Complete\nComplete'); // Assessment Question 2 Definition String q2DevName = 'Application_Review_Criteria_Test_Result'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q2DevName, 'Application Review Criteria: Test Result'); questionByQDevName.put (q2DevName, 'Rate the applicant’s test results.'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q2DevName, defaultResponseOpts); // Assessment Question 3 Definition String q3DevName = 'Application_Review_Criteria_College_History'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q3DevName, 'Application Review Criteria: College History'); questionByQDevName.put (q3DevName, 'Rate the applicant’s college history.'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q3DevName, defaultResponseOpts); // Assessment Question 4 Definition String q4DevName = 'Application_Review_Criteria_Secondary_School'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q4DevName, 'Application Review Criteria: Secondary School'); questionByQDevName.put (q4DevName, 'Rate the applicant’s secondary school history.'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q4DevName, defaultResponseOpts); // Assessment Question 5 Definition String q5DevName = 'Application_Review_Criteria_References'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q5DevName, 'Application Review Criteria: References'); questionByQDevName.put (q5DevName, 'Rate the applicant’s references.'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q5DevName, defaultResponseOpts); // Assessment Question 6 Definition String q6DevName = 'Application_Review_Criteria_Family'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q6DevName, 'Application Review Criteria: Family'); questionByQDevName.put (q6DevName, 'Is the Family section complete?'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q6DevName, 'Incomplete\nPartly Complete\nComplete'); // Assessment Question 7 Definition String q7DevName = 'Application_Review_Criteria_Files'; questionNameByQDevName.put (q7DevName, 'Application Review Criteria: Files'); questionByQDevName.put (q7DevName, 'Have all required files been provided?'); responseOptsByQDevName.put (q7DevName, 'Not Provided\nPartly Provided\nFully Provided'); // Delete Assessment Question Set, if enabled if (doDeletes) { // Delete Assessment Question Assignment records, if any List aqasForDel = [Select Id from AssessmentQuestionAssignment where AssessmentQuestion.DeveloperName in :questionByQDevName.keyset()]; if (aqasForDel.size() > 0) { delete aqasForDel; } // Delete Assessment Question Set record, if present List aqsForDel = [select Id from AssessmentQuestionSet where DeveloperName = :aqsDevName]; if (aqsForDel.size() > 0) { delete aqsForDel; } // Delete Assessment Questions if present List assessmentQuestionsForDel = [select Id, DeveloperName from AssessmentQuestion where DeveloperName in :questionNameByQDevName.keyset()]; if (assessmentQuestionsForDel.size() > 0) { delete assessmentQuestionsForDel; } } if (doInserts) { // Define and Insert Assessment Question Set AssessmentQuestionSet assessmentQuestionSet = new AssessmentQuestionSet( Name = aqsName, DeveloperName = aqsDevName ); insert assessmentQuestionSet; // Insert Questions List assessmentQuestions = new List(); for (String qDevName : questionNameByQDevName.keyset()) { assessmentQuestions.add( new AssessmentQuestion( Name = questionNameByQDevName.get(qDevName), DeveloperName = qDevName, DataType = questionDataType, QuestionCategory = questionQuestionCategory, FormulaResponseDataType = questionFormulaResponseType ) ); } insert assessmentQuestions; // Build Map of Assessment Questions By Question Dev Name Map assessmentQuestionsByDevName = new Map(); for (AssessmentQuestion aq : assessmentQuestions) { assessmentQuestionsByDevName.put(aq.DeveloperName, aq); } // Insert Assessment Question Versions List assessmentQuestionVersions = new List(); for (String qDevName : questionNameByQDevName.keyset()) { assessmentQuestionVersions.add( new AssessmentQuestionVersion( Name = questionNameByQDevName.get(qDevName), AssessmentQuestionId = assessmentQuestionsByDevName.get(qDevName).Id, ResponseValues= responseOptsByQDevName.get(qDevName), QuestionText = questionByQDevName.get(qDevName), IsActive = isQuestionActive, IsOptionSourceResponseValue = isQuestionOptionSourceResponseValue ) ); } insert assessmentQuestionVersions; // Associate Question with Question Set via Assessment Question Assignment List assessmentQuestionAssignments = new List(); for (String qDevName : questionNameByQDevName.keyset()) { assessmentQuestionAssignments.add ( new AssessmentQuestionAssignment( assessmentQuestionId = assessmentQuestionsByDevName.get(qDevName).Id, assessmentQuestionSetId = assessmentQuestionSet.Id ) ); } insert assessmentQuestionAssignments; }` # Create Services and Service Deliveries Create services, create bulk service deliveries, schedule services, see recent service sessions, and track attendance. - **[Work with Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Services are provided to your community or individuals as part of your programs. - **[Create Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Services as part of your Programs. - **[Create Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Bulk Service Deliveries to create multiple Service Deliveries at once, either by group or by individual. - **[Schedule Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Service Schedules for one-time or recurring events for groups or individuals, such as classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, or community events. - **[See Recent Service Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the Recent Sessions section on the Home tab to see all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. - **[Track Attendance at Service Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Track Attendance on a Service Session to create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. Track Attendance is an efficient way to create Service Deliveries for all participants from a single interface. ## Work with Services Services are provided to your community or individuals as part of your programs. Services are different for each nonprofit but can include activities like delivering meals, teaching a course, or cleaning up a neighborhood. Programs often include multiple services. Every Service has a Unit of Measurement that quantifies the activity. For example, Services can be measured in minutes, a number of items, or another metric that's meaningful to your organization. A Service Delivery is a record of providing a Service to a recipient. A Service Delivery shows who received the service, how much was delivered, and when it happened. For example, Robin received 30 minutes of financial counseling on April 4th. Service Schedules are one-time or recurring events for groups or individuals. For example, classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, or community events. ## Create Services Create Services as part of your Programs. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click a Program name. 3. In the Services related list, click **New**. 4. Enter a Service Name. For example, Meal Delivery. 5. Enter a Description. 6. Enter a Unit of Measurement. For example, Number of Meals. 7. Select a Status. 8. Click **Save**. ## Create Bulk Service Deliveries Use Bulk Service Deliveries to create multiple Service Deliveries at once, either by group or by individual. For example, you might enter service deliveries for drop-ins at a workshop, or hygiene kits given to an individual client. When you make entries for a group, the same Service, Delivery Date, and Quantity is applied to the entire group, and you can then edit as needed. ### Create a Single Service Delivery There are times when you may want to create a single Service Delivery. For example, if you want to track a one-time delivery of meals to a household. 1. Click the **Service Deliveries** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the Service Delivery. This name gets replaced by the automated naming [configured for your org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When a user creates a Service Delivery, its name follows the format Contact Name Start Date: Service unless otherwise specified.") unless you select **Auto-Name Override**. 4. Select the related Service. 5. Optionally: - Select the Client to whom the service was delivered. - Select a related Program Engagement. - Select a Service Provider. - Enter the Delivery Date. - Enter the Quantity of the service that was delivered. - Select an Attendance Status, for example, Present. - Select a related Household Account. This automatically selects **Household Benefit** on the Service Delivery record. 6. Click **Save**. ### Create Service Deliveries for a Group Instead of adding participants to a service one by one, you can add them all at once, cutting down on your data entry time. 1. Click the **Bulk Service Deliveries** tab, then click **Create by Group**. 2. Search for and select a Service. 3. Enter the Delivery Date. 4. Enter the Quantity of the service that was delivered. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Click **Add** for any Contacts that received the service, or click **Add All**. You can also filter by Program Cohort. The Contacts you see have a Program Engagement—with the Status set to Active or Enrolled—for the Program that the Service rolls up to. 7. If you don't see the participant you're looking for, that means that they aren't yet related to this Program. Click **New** to create a Program Engagement. 1. Search for and select the Contact. If the Contact doesn't exist in Salesforce yet, click **New Contact** and enter the Contact name and other details. If the Contact is a client, be sure to select Client. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note You can associate a Contact with an existing Account. If you want to create a new Account for the Contact, enter a search term in the Account Name field and press enter. On the results page, click in the Account Name field again and select +New Account. You can always add the account at a later time, too. 2. Enter Program Engagement details, making sure that the Program Engagement Stare is Enrolled or Active. 3. Save your work. You'll see the Program Engagement you just created in the Selected column. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Click **\+ Add Entry** to add another Service Delivery for the same, or a different, Client. You can also make edits to any group member. 10. Click **Save** **.** ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't forget to save your work! The Bulk Service Delivery Tool doesn't auto-save. ### Create Service Deliveries for an Individual Enter Service Deliveries for multiple individuals or enter Service Deliveries for the same individual but for different Program Engagements. 1. Click the **Bulk Service Deliveries** tab, then click **Create by Individual**. 2. Search for and select a Client. 3. Select a Program Engagement or select **+New Program Engagement**. 4. Select the related Service. The page saves your data and creates a new Service Delivery record. 5. Enter the Delivery Date. 6. Enter the Quantity of the service that was delivered. 7. Click **+Add Entry** to add another Service Delivery for the same Client, or for a different Client. 8. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't forget to save your work! The Bulk Service Delivery Tool doesn't auto-save. ## Schedule Services Create Service Schedules for one-time or recurring events for groups or individuals, such as classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, or community events. Service Schedules can be on a single day or span multiple days. When you create a Service Schedule, Service Session records are created for individual event sessions and Service Participant records are created for people who are scheduled to attend the Service Sessions. Create Service Schedules from the Service Schedules tab or a Service record on the Services tab.  1. Click the **Service Schedules** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Service Schedule Name. For example, the name of the class or event. 4. Search for and select the related Service. 5. If you have service providers, enter their names. 6. If you have a participant capacity, enter it. This is for your internal planning and doesn't limit the number of Service Participants you can add. 7. To set a default quantity to be assigned to all Service Participants, enter a **Default Service Quantity**. For example, enter 2 for a two-hour Service Session to automatically populate 2 hours for all Service Participants. You can edit the quantity when taking attendance. 8. Enter the First Session Start and First Session End Date and Time, which default to the current date and time rounded to the next 30 minutes. For a recurring schedule, the same start and end times are applied to all Service Sessions, although you can change this information later. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note The time zone is determined by the time zone specified in the Salesforce user account of the person who creates the event. Changes in this time zone may affect timing for other participants. For example, if Daylight Saving Time moves ahead one hour in your time zone, the session time might change for users in time zones not affected by Daylight Saving Time. 9. The Service Schedule defaults to a One Time frequency. To make it recurring, click **Daily**, **Weekly**, or **Monthly**. 1. For a Weekly schedule: Select the days of the week. The day defaults to the day of the First Session Start Date. To create a schedule for weekdays, select **Weekly** and then choose from Monday through Friday only. 2. For a Monthly schedule: Select one of the recurrence options, which are based on the First Session Start Date. For example, on Day 21, on the Third Monday, or on the Last Day. 3. For all recurring schedules: Enter a recurrence, for example, Every 2 Months. Select when the Service Schedule ends, either on a date or after a number of Service Sessions. A Service Schedule can have up to 500 sessions. A record is created for each session in the recurring schedule unless you deselect **Create Service Sessions**. 4. You'll see the Program Engagement you created in the Selected column. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Review the Service Sessions and click **Next**. You can also add or delete sessions, or click **Back** to make additional edits. If you add or delete sessions before you click Back, those edits will be lost. 12. Select clients to add as Service Participants, then click **Add Service Participants**. The available participants are clients with Program Engagements on the Program related to the Service you selected. To filter the list, select a Cohort from **Filter by Program Cohort**. 13. If you don't see the participant you're looking for, that means they aren't yet related to this Program. Click **New** to create a Program Engagement. 1. Search for and select the Contact. If the Contact doesn't exist in Salesforce yet, click **New Contact** and enter the Contact name and other details. If the Contact is a client, be sure to select Client. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note You can associate a Contact with an existing Account. If you want to create a new Account for the Contact, enter a search term in the Account Name field and press enter. On the results page, click in the Account Name field again and select + New Account. Or you can add the Account at a later time. 2. Enter the Program Engagement details. 3. Save your work. You'll see the Program Engagement you just created in the Selected column. 14. Click **Next**. 15. Click **Save**, or **Save and New** to create another Service Schedule. This creates the Service Schedule, Service Session, and Service Participant records. ### Manage Service Sessions Edit Service Sessions on a Service Schedule to change details of an individual event, such as the time or service provider. Service Sessions can be assigned the Status of Pending, Complete, or Canceled. You can also add sessions, delete sessions, or delete sessions after a date that you specify. Editing Service Sessions doesn't change the information on the Service Schedule, nor does editing a Service Schedule change the information on its Service Sessions. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Use the Recent Sessions component on the Home tab to quickly see pending and completed Service Sessions—for example, to take attendance, edit details, or just to see what's coming up. 1. Click the **Service Schedules** tab. 2. Click a Service Schedule name, then: 1. To add a new Service Session, click **New** in the Service Sessions list. Enter the information and Save your changes. You can also add Service Sessions by clicking **Add More Sessions**. 2. To edit a Service Session, click the Service Session Name in the Service Sessions list. Edit information or track attendance, then Save your changes. 3. To delete future Service Sessions, click **Delete Future Service Sessions** at the top of the Service Schedule. Specify a date after which all Service Sessions will be deleted, then click **Delete**. 4. To change the status of the session, select **Pending**, **Complete**, or **Canceled**. When attendance is tracked for a Service Session, the status changes to Complete. ### Manage Service Participants Edit or add Service Participants—the people who will attend your Service Sessions—on a Service Schedule. Unlike Program Engagements, which show all of a person’s activity in a program (including their Service Participant records), a Service Participant record only shows a person’s activity in one Service Schedule or Service. Service Participants can be assigned the Status of Waitlisted, Enrolled, or Withdrawn. In addition to adding Service Participants from the Service Schedules tab as described here, you can also add a Service Participant to a Service Schedule from their Contact or Program Engagement record, or from a Service record if you’re not sure which Service Schedule will work for them yet. 1. Click the **Service Schedules** tab. 2. Click a Service Schedule name, then: - To add multiple Service Participants from existing Contacts, click **Add More Participants** at the top of the Service Schedule. Optionally filter by Program Cohort, select the Contacts to add, click **Add Service Participants**, then Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note If you can't find the Contact you're looking for, click **New** to create a Program engagement for that contact so you can add them to the Service Schedule. - To add a single Service Participant, either new or from an existing Contact, click **New** in the Service Participants list. Enter the information and Save your changes. - To edit a Service Participant, click the Service Participant Name in the Service Participants list. Edit information or add files and Save your changes. ## See Recent Service Sessions Review the Recent Sessions section on the Home tab to see all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows you all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. By default, the Service Sessions shown are those from the All list view on the Service Session tab, but you can select other list views. 1. From the App Manager, find and select Case Management. 2. Click the **Home** tab. 3. Under Recent Sessions, select a List View. Optionally, click the pin to make this your default view. 4. Select a Time Frame, either **This Week** or **Last Week**. 5. Expand a date to see sessions on that day. If Attendance has already been tracked for this session, you'll also see the Attendance Summary which shows a percentage of how many participants were Present out of the total participants Present and Absent. For example, if eight participants were marked present and two were marked absent, you would see 80% (8/10). ![Recent Sessions dialog showing 100% attendance.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/sessions_attendance_summary.png) 6. Click the name of a session to go to its record page. You can also configure additional Recent Sessions list views, for example, to see sessions for Programs you’re involved with, or to see sessions for which you’re the Service Provider. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Service Sessions**. 2. From the List View Controls menu, select **New**. 3. Give the list view a name. The List API Name populates automatically. 4. Select **Only I can see this list view**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Add filters and save your changes. ## Track Attendance at Service Sessions Use Track Attendance on a Service Session to create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. Track Attendance is an efficient way to create Service Deliveries for all participants from a single interface. When you submit attendance, a Service Delivery is created for all Service Participants, even if you don't enter or change any information. The Service Delivery includes the following details from the Service Schedule and the Service Session: the Client, Service, Service Session, Program Engagement, Service Provider, Delivery Date (the date of the Service Session), Quantity, and Attendance Status. All Service Participants on a Service Schedule appear in Track Attendance, provided that they have an associated Contact record. Add all Service Participants—with an associated Contact—to the related Service Schedule before tracking attendance.   ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To track attendance for an individual instead of everyone in a Service Session, create a Service Delivery from the Service Session record or the Service Deliveries tab and complete the Client, Service Session, Program Engagement, and Attendance Status fields. For example, if you know in advance that someone can't make a Service Session, create a Service Delivery and select **Excused Absence**. 1. Navigate to a Service Session from the Recent Sessions component on the Home tab or from the Service Schedules tab. 2. In Track Attendance: 1. For those who weren't present, select an Attendance Status such as Unexcused Absence or Excused Absence. 2. Enter a quantity, which is based on the Unit of Measurement for the Service associated with the Service Schedule. For example, you may see _Hours_ if the related Service is measured in hours. If a Default Service Quantity was specified when the Service Schedule was created, you’ll see that value for all participants, though you can still edit it. 3. If you don't want to create a Service Delivery for a participant, click ![No attendance icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/no_attendance.png) **Don't track attendance for this participant**. For example, if you have a drop-in class and you don't expect everyone to attend each session. 3. Click **Submit**. The Status of the Service Session changes to Complete and Service Deliveries are created for each Service Participant. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip  If you see an insufficient access error, ask your Salesforce admin to review your sharing settings to make sure you have Contact record access. 4. Refresh the page to see the new Service Deliveries. You can make changes to attendance at any time. Just click **Update** to make your changes, then click **Save**. The Service Deliveries automatically update.  You can also click **Printable View** to see, update, and print an Attendance list. For example, you may want to print an attendance list to use at an in-person session. - **[Service Delivery Summary Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are a number of Service Delivery summary fields that are automatically calculated and updated based on the Attendance Status and Last Service Date on Service Deliveries. These fields help you see trends and evaluate how clients are engaging with your organization. By tracking Consecutive Absences, for example, you may notice that a client is routinely missing service sessions and know that it’s time to reach out. ### Service Delivery Summary Fields There are a number of Service Delivery summary fields that are automatically calculated and updated based on the Attendance Status and Last Service Date on Service Deliveries. These fields help you see trends and evaluate how clients are engaging with your organization. By tracking Consecutive Absences, for example, you may notice that a client is routinely missing service sessions and know that it’s time to reach out. By default, you see an Attendance Summary field on the Recent Service Sessions component on the Home page, and on the Program Engagement snapshot on Contact records. An admin can also add other summary fields to Contacts, Program Engagements, Services, and Service Sessions.   - **Attendance Rate**: Shows the percentage of participants marked as Present out of all participants marked as either Absent or Present. This field is particularly useful in reports because it is a Percent field that you can sort. - **Attendance Summary**: Shows the attendance rate percentage alongside the number of participants marked as Present out of all participants marked as either Absent or Present. For example, if eight participants were marked Present and two were marked Absent, you would see 80% (8/10). - **Consecutive Absences**: Shows sessions in a row that a client didn’t attend (up to the current date). As soon as the client attends a session, this field resets to zero. - **Last Service Date**: The date of the last Service Delivery that has a Delivery Date and a Quantity greater than 0. - **Number of Absent Service Deliveries**: The number of times a client has been marked Absent for a Service Session. - **Number of Present Service Deliveries**: The number of times a client has been marked Present for a Service Session. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note These fields are automatically calculated and updated. If you think the Service Delivery summary fields are incorrect or outdated, your admin may need to run scheduled jobs. See [Create a Scheduled Job to Recalculate Service Delivery Summary Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "As a Salesforce admin, you can schedule a job to recalculate Service Delivery summary fields on an organization-wide basis. While the triggers incrementally increase the existing summary fields as each new Service Delivery record is created, the batch jobs fully recalculate all Service Delivery records. To ensure that your calculations are always up to date and accurate, schedule the jobs to run weekly or monthly.") for more information. # Create Sharing Rules Some organizations use a model where case managers share ownership of the client relationship. In this model, a variety of case managers deliver services to a client during the service period. Create sharing rules to let different case managers edit a client's case-related data. Here are a couple of examples of ways you could set up your case manager sharing rules. - **[Example: Set Up Case Manager Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your case managers share ownership of client relationships, use sharing rules to grant edit permissions to all case managers. Before you get started, it's a good idea to map out which objects case managers need to edit. - **[Example: Set Up Program Manager Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your program managers share ownership of programs, use sharing rules to extend edit permissions to all program managers. It's a good idea to map out which objects program managers need to edit. ## Example: Set Up Case Manager Sharing Rules If your case managers share ownership of client relationships, use sharing rules to grant edit permissions to all case managers. Before you get started, it's a good idea to map out which objects case managers need to edit. This table shows an example of sharing rules you can set up for objects that program managers typically access to manage client relationships.

Object

Rule Label

Owned by

Share with

Access Level

Action Items

Review Action Items

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Assessments

Review Assessment

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Client Alerts

Review Client Alert

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Client Notes

Review Client Note

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Program Engagements

Edit Program Engagements

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Service Deliveries

Edit Service Deliveries

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Accounts

Edit Accounts

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Cases

Edit Cases

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write

Contacts

Edit Contacts

Creator

All Case Managers

Read/Write
- **[Define a Public Group of Case Managers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To grant the appropriate access to case managers who share ownership of client relationships, first define a public group. - **[Create a Case Manager Sharing Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create a sharing rule that shares Client Alerts written and owned by any case manager in the org with all case managers in the public group. ### Define a Public Group of Case Managers To grant the appropriate access to case managers who share ownership of client relationships, first define a public group. 1. In Setup, enter Public Groups in the Quick Find box, then click **Public Groups**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name your Public Group Case Managers. 4. In the Search dropdown list, choose **Users**. 5. Select the Users to add to the Case Manager Public Group and click **Add**. 6. Click **Save.** ![Users added to Public Groups](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/pubgrp1.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As part of your staff onboarding process, be sure to add new staff to the appropriate public groups so that they're assigned the appropriate sharing rules. Next, define sharing rules for this group. ### Create a Case Manager Sharing Rule Learn how to create a sharing rule that shares Client Alerts written and owned by any case manager in the org with all case managers in the public group. To create a sharing rule that shares Client Alerts written and owned by any case manager in the org with all case managers in the public group: 1. In Setup, enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. This is the same page used to define org-wide defaults. 2. In the Manage sharing settings for dropdown list, choose **Client Alert**. This shows the org-wide defaults and sharing rules for a single object at a time, which is handy if you have many custom objects. 3. In the Client Alert Sharing Rules area, click **New**. ![Creating Client Alert Sharing Rules](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/setupsharing.png) 4. In the Label field, enter Review Records. The Rule Name populates automatically. 5. For the Rule Type, select **Based on record owner**. 6. In the Select which records to be shared section, select **Public Groups**, then choose **Case Managers**. 7. In the Select users to share with section, select **Public Groups**, then choose **Case Managers**. 8. In the Select the level of access for the users section, select **Read/Write**. 9. Click **Save**. ![Defining Client Alert Sharing Rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/sharingsettings2.png) Repeat these steps to set up sharing rules for Action Items, Assessments, Case Plans, Client Notes, Goals, Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, Accounts, Cases, and Contacts. ## Example: Set Up Program Manager Sharing Rules If your program managers share ownership of programs, use sharing rules to extend edit permissions to all program managers. It's a good idea to map out which objects program managers need to edit. This table shows an example of sharing rules you can set up for objects that program managers typically access.

Object

Rule Label

Owned by

Share with

Access Level

Programs

Edit Programs

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Program Engagements

Edit Program Engagements

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Program Cohorts

Edit Program Cohorts

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Services

Edit Services

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Service Deliveries

Edit Service Deliveries

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write
- **[Define a Public Group of Program Managers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To grant the appropriate access to program managers who share program ownership, first define a public group. - **[Create a Program Manager Sharing Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a sharing rule that allows all program managers to access programs owned by any program manager. ### Define a Public Group of Program Managers To grant the appropriate access to program managers who share program ownership, first define a public group. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As part of your staff onboarding process, be sure to add new staff to the appropriate public groups so that they're assigned the appropriate sharing rules. 1. In Setup, enter Public Groups in the Quick Find box, then click **Public Groups**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name your Public Group Program Managers. 4. In the Search dropdown list, choose **Users**. 5. Select the Users to add to the Case Manager Public Group and click **Add**. 6. Click **Save**. Next, define sharing rules for this group. ### Create a Program Manager Sharing Rule Create a sharing rule that allows all program managers to access programs owned by any program manager. To create a rule that shares programs written and owned by any program manager in the org with all program managers: 1. In Setup, enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 2. In the Manage sharing settings for dropdown list, choose **Programs**. 3. In the Program Sharing Rules area, click **New**. 4. In the Label field, enter Review Records. The Rule Name populates automatically. 5. For the Rule Type, select **Based on record owner**. 6. In the Select which records to be shared section, select **Public Groups**, then choose **Program Managers**. 7. In the Select users to share with section, select **Public Groups**, then choose **Program Managers**. 8. In the Select the level of access for the users section, select **Read/Write**. 9. Click **Save**. Repeat these steps for Programs Engagements, Program Cohorts, Services, and Service Deliveries. # Create Sharing Rules Some organizations use a model where program managers share ownership of programs. Create sharing rules to let different program managers edit a client's program-related data. Here are a couple of examples of ways you could set up your program manager sharing rules. - **[Example: Set Up Program Manager Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_shar_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your program managers share ownership of programs, use sharing rules to extend edit permissions to all program managers. It's a good idea to map out which objects program managers need to edit. ## Example: Set Up Program Manager Sharing Rules If your program managers share ownership of programs, use sharing rules to extend edit permissions to all program managers. It's a good idea to map out which objects program managers need to edit.

Object

Rule Label

Owned by

Share with

Access Level

Programs

Edit Programs

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Program Engagements

Edit Engagements

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Program Cohorts

Edit Program Cohorts

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Services

Edit Services

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write

Service Deliveries

Edit Service Deliveries

Creator

All Program Managers

Read/Write
- **[Define a Public Group of Program Managers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_shar_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create sharing rules for program managers, define a public group of program managers. - **[Create Sharing Rules for Program Managers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_shar_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a rule that shares programs written and owned by any program manager in the org with all program managers. ### Define a Public Group of Program Managers Before you create sharing rules for program managers, define a public group of program managers. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Public Groups in the Quick Find box, then click **Public Groups**. 3. Click **New**. 4. In the **Label** field, enter Program Managers. **Rule Name** populates automatically. 5. In the Search dropdown list, choose **Users**. 6. Select the Users to add to the Case Manager Public Group and click **Add**. 7. Click **Save**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As part of your staff onboarding process, be sure to add new staff to the appropriate public groups so that they're assigned the appropriate sharing rules. Next, define sharing rules for the group. ### Create Sharing Rules for Program Managers Create a rule that shares programs written and owned by any program manager in the org with all program managers. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In Setup, enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. In the Manage sharing settings for dropdown list, choose **Program**. 4. In the Program Sharing Rules area, click **New**. 5. In the Label field, enter Review Records. Rule Name populates automatically. 6. For the Rule Type, select **Based on record owner**. 7. In the Select which records to be shared section, select **Public Groups**, then choose **Program Managers**. 8. In the Select users to share with section, select **Public Groups**, then choose **Program Managers**. 9. In the Select the level of access for the users section, select **Read/Write**. 10. Click **Save**. Repeat these steps for Programs Engagements, Program Cohorts, Services, and Service Deliveries. # Create Student User Records for Your Portal Create User records for students to allow them to use a Student Success Hub portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. A User record for each student is required for students to access the portal that you'll create in a different task. Here's how you can create a small number of student User records, individually from student Contact records. Otherwise, import new Users using a data import tool. 1. On the student's Contact record, click the record's action menu and select **Enable Customer User**. 2. Enter details to create the user as either a Customer Community Plus user or Customer Community Plus Login user, with the corresponding profile—Customer Community Plus User or Customer Community Plus Login User (or a custom profile generated from those profiles). Make sure to specify the correct time zone so that Student Success Hub considers time zone differences when scheduling appointments between support staff and students. 3. Save your changes. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you can't save because of an error about an account owner missing a role, go to Setup and enter Users in the Quick Find box. Click **Users**, and then edit the profile of the User that owns the student's Account record to specify some Role (any Role that's been defined in your org's Role Hierarchy). Then try saving the student's User record again. If student Account records are created through integration, the creating user is typically the integration user. Take care when merging or deleting User or Contact records so you don’t accidentally delete student portal members. For more information, see [Considerations for Merging Contacts Associated with Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=contacts_merging_contacts_associated_with_portal_users.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Create Supporting Records for Applications Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create records in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | ## Create Application Timeline Records Create application timeline records to represent each distinct timeline on which you accept applications. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Timelines**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application timeline, such as Spring 2024. 4. Select **Admissions** as the application timeline type. 5. Enter additional information, and then save your changes. The **Application Close Date Time** and **Application Close Date** fields both set a deadline for applications. The **Application Close Date Time** field includes a time and displays the deadline in the applicant's local timezone. The **Application Close Date** field displays only a date. If both fields have values, the portal displays the **Application Close Date Time** value. To prevent late submissions, you can create a validation rule on the application object. ## Create Program Term Application Timeline (PTAT) Records Create a record that represents the learning program, academic term, and application timeline associated with an application. When you create an application, you assign a program term application timeline record to the action plan template for the application. Active PTATs also determine which programs and timelines appear in the New Application window. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Program Term Application Timelines**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Find and select the learning program, application timeline, academic term, and action plan template version that are associated with this program term application timeline. 4. Save your changes. ## Create Account Record Types When applicants enter their educational history and other transferable prior learning experience, they can identify the secondary schools and colleges that they've attended, and also their employment or military experience. To support this information, create record types for Secondary School, College, Business, and Military accounts. See [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5). ## Create Party Role Relationships Applicants provide information about their guardians and siblings. They also provide the names of the people who have written letters of recommendation. To identify the relationship between all of these individuals, create these party role relationships. | Role Name | Related role Name | | --- | --- | | Guardian | Child | | Sibling | Sibling | | Recommender | Applicant | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Party Role Relationships**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the Role Name. For example, enter Guardian. 4. Enter the Related Role Name. For example, enter Child. 5. For Relationship Object Name, select **Contact Contact Relationship**. 6. Save your changes, and repeat to create party role relationships for siblings and recommenders. ## Create Examinations So that applicants can provide standardized test scores, create examinations records for SAT, ACT, and Other. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Examinations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the examination. For example, enter SAT. 4. Save your changes, and repeat to create examinations for ACT and Other. ## Create Geo Countries Create the geo country records for the countries where the applicants reside. The application form uses these records for the Geography and Nationality fields. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Geo Countries**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the two-character alphabetic ISO code for the country. For a list of supported ISO codes, see [Standard Countries and Territories for Address Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.admin_state_country_picklists_standard_countries.htm&language=en_US). 4. Save your changes, and repeat to create records for all of the geo countries that your institution supports. ## Create Document Checklist Item Document Types Create document types for the essays, transcripts, or other documents that you want applicants to submit. See [Set Up a Document Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.admin_document_automation_doc_types.htm&type=5). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note There are no additional sharing settings or rules required for document types. You can add them in Setup. ## Automatically Create Contact Profile Records The application form automatically populates fields with information that an applicant has previously shared with your institution. To make sure that the autofill feature works properly, applicants need a contact profile record. Automate this process by using a flow. See [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_build.htm&type=5). # Create Tasks for Recommendations on Your Action Plan Template To send surveys to recommenders, create a stage for each recommendation in your application form. For example, if you want a recommendation from a parent and one from a teacher, create a separate application stage for each recommendation.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure dynamic applications:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin
1. Create a stage in your application's action plan template to send the recommendation survey. See [Set Up Your Application Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_application_stages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create application stage definition records to represent the different stages of your application, and copy and use Education Cloud Omniscripts and Flexcards to collect and show applicant information."). 2. Create application render method and application render method assignment records for your EDU Admissions/RequestRecommender Omniscript and EDUAdmissionsRecommenderRecommendationWrapper flexcard. See [Build Your Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_build_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Application Render Method records and Application Render Method Assignment records to build your application. Application render method records identify the Omniscript or Flexcard used to collect or show information. Application Render Method Assignment records link Application Render Methods with Application Stage Definitions."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can use the same application render method for each recommendation stage. 3. Assign the application stage definition record to the action plan template for your application. See [Create and Set Up an Action Plan Template for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an action plan template to represent your application, add each application stage definition record as tasks to your action plan template, and assign the template to a Program Term Application Timeline record."). # Create the Assessment Page for Mentors and Mentees Create pages for mentors and mentees to display assessment questions and responses.
User Permissions Needed  
To create a page for your mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User

Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Standard Page**, choose **Flexible Layout**, and then click **Next**. 5. Enter the name Assessment View. Press Tab to automatically fill the URL field. 6. Click **Create**. 7. Click **Components** on the top left, and drag the **Omniscript for Experience Cloud** component to the new page. # Create the Benefit Assignment Object Pages for Mentors and Mentees Create a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors and mentees can see who they are assigned to for a Mentoring benefit.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a page for your mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Object Pages**. 5. Select **Benefit Assignment**, and then click **Create**. 6. Click **Create**. 7. On the Benefit Assignment Detail page, click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png). 8. For Benefit Assignment Detail, click ![Page Action icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_action.png) and select **Page Settings**. 9. For Layout, click **Change**. 10. Select **2 Columns, 1:2 ratio**, and then click **Change**. 11. Drag the Record Banner component from the Content area to the Content Header area. 12. Assign the Record Banner component to your mentee profile. See [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&type=5). 13. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Benefit Assignment Highlights component to the Content Header area. 14. Assign the Benefit Assignment Highlights component to your mentor profile. See [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&type=5). 15. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Flexcard component to the Sidebar area. For Flexcard Name, select **MentoringParticipantCard**. 16. In the Content area, delete the Record Information Tabs component. 17. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Tab Layout component to the Sidebar area. 18. In the Tab Layout window, click **Add**. 19. Enter a name for each tab. 1. Click **Tab 1**, enter Disbursements, and save your changes. 2. Click **Tab 2**, enter Details, and save your changes. 3. Click **Tab 3**, enter Interaction Summaries, and save your changes. 4. Click **New Tab**, enter Action Plans, and save your changes. 20. In the Tab Layout component in the Content area, click **Disbursements**. 21. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Related Record List component to the Disbursements area. 1. In Parent Record Id, enter {!recordId}. 2. In Related List Name, enter BenefitDisbursementBenefitAssignments. 22. In the Tab Layout component in the Content area, click **Details**. 23. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Record Detail component to the Details area. For Record Id, enter {!recordId}. 24. In the Tab Layout component in the Content area, click **Interaction Summaries**. 25. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Related Record List component to the Interaction Summaries area. 1. In Parent Record Id, enter {!recordId}. 2. In Related List Name, enter Deals. 26. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Related Record List component to the Action Plans area. 1. In Parent Record Id, enter {!recordId}. 2. In Related List Name, enter ActionPlans. # Create the Benefit Object Page for Mentors Create a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors can see the details of a selected benefit.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permission Needed  
To create and configure a page for your mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site that you use for your mentor portal, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Object Pages**. 5. Select **Benefit**, and then click **Create**. 6. Click **Create**. 7. On the Benefit Detail page, remove all the content. 8. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Flexcard component to the Content area. From Flexcard Name, select **MentoringBenefitRecordPage**. 9. Assign your mentor profile as the audience for this page. See [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5). # Create the Program and Program Enrollment Pages for Mentees Create pages for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentees can see their available and enrolled programs.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create and configure a page for your mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to the site that you use for your mentee portal, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Object Pages**. 5. Select **Program**, and then click **Create**. 6. Click **Create**. 7. On the Program Detail page, remove all the content. 8. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Flexcard component to the Content area. In Flexcard Name, select **EDUProgramMgmtProgramOverview**. 9. Assign your mentee profile as the audience for this page. See [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5). 10. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then select **Program Enrollment Detail**. 11. Click the **EDUProgramMgmtPgmEnrlRecordPage** flexcard. 12. To hide the Schedule Appointment button on the Program Enrollment page, in Exposed Attributes, enter {"HideScheduleAppointmentButton":true}. 13. Assign your mentee profile as the audience for this page. See [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5). # Create the Provider Offering Page for Mentors Create a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors can see the benefits for which they have registered as a provider.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permission Needed  
To create and configure a page for your mentoring portal:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site that you use for your mentor portal, click **Builder**. 3. Click ![Page Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_exp_cloud_page_properties.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Object Pages**. 5. Select **Provider Offering**, and then click **Create**. 6. Click **Create**. 7. On the Provider Offering Detail page, remove all the content. 8. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the Flexcard component to the Content area. From Flexcard Name, select **MentoringProviderOfferingRecordPage**. 9. Assign your mentor profile as the audience for this page. See [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5). # Create Tribute Opportunities (Honor and Memorial Donations) Nonprofit Success Pack enables you to capture important details about donations made in honor or in memory of someone. You can track who the donation was made in honor of, as well as who should be notified about the donation and how best to notify them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Tribute Opportunities](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JeVLhrIWBLw). For example, let's say Rafael Costas made a donation in honor of his niece, Sara Costas, who is a volunteer at your organization. Rafael would like you to email Sara's mom, Fiamma Costas, about the donation. When you create the Opportunity record to track the donation, use the Tribute Information section to capture the details: 1. Select the Tribute Type. For this example, you'd select **Honor** **.** 2. Use the Honoree Contact field if the honoree is already a Contact in Salesforce or you want to track them as a Contact going forward. Otherwise, leave this field blank. In this example, since Sara is a volunteer for the organization, she already has a Contact record, so you'd find and select her Contact record here. 3. If you selected an Honoree Contact, leave the Honoree Name field blank, as Salesforce fills it in with the name of the Honoree Contact when you save the record. Otherwise, enter the Honoree Name. For this example, you'd leave the field blank. 4. If you selected an Honoree Contact, leave Honoree Information blank. Otherwise, use this field to capture details about the honoree such as address, phone, and email. For this example, you'd leave the field blank. 5. Select the Notification Preference. In this example, Rafael has asked us to email his niece's mother about his donation, so you'd select **Email**. 6. In the Notification Recipient Contact field, select the Contact who should be notified of the donation. If that person doesn't have a Contact record and you don't want to track them as a Contact, leave this field blank. For this example, since Fiamma Costas hasn't expressed interest in interacting with your organization, you'd leave the field blank. (You can always create a Contact record for Fiamma later.) 7. If you selected a Notification Recipient, leave the Notification Recipient Name blank, as Salesforce fills it in with the name from the Notification Recipient field when you save the record. Otherwise, enter the Notification Recipient Name. For this example, you'd enter Fiamma Costas. 8. In the Notification Recipient Information and Notification Recipient Email fields, enter any contact information you have about the notification recipient, such as address, phone number, and email. These fields are primarily used when there isn't a Contact record for the Notification Recipient. For this example, you'd enter Fiamma's email address in Notification Recipient Email and leave Notification Recipient Information blank. 9. In the Notification Message field, enter any message from the donor to the notification recipient about the donation. 10. If you'd like to track when you sent the notification, enter details into Tribute Notification Date and Tribute Notification Status. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Create a way for users to email tribute recipients directly from the Opportunity in Salesforce. Learn more in [Build a Flow to Notify Tribute Recipients](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_build_flow_notify_tribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a quick way for users to email people about honor or memorial donations."). By default, NPSP creates Opportunity Contact Roles for the Honoree Contact and Notification Recipient Contact (along with the donor and any Contact receiving soft credit). In this example, we've populated the Honoree Contact field: ![List of Opp Contact Roles: Rafael Costas as Donor, Sara Costas as Honoree](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/tribute_contact_roles.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see these Opportunity Contact Roles, your admin may need to configure this feature. See [Add Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits.") for more information. # Create Users for Admissions Connect Every person who uses Admissions Connect must have a User record in Salesforce. How you create your User records depends on who will be using Admissions Connect. Admissions staff or other people who work for your institution are internal users. These users can only use the Admissions Connect app. People who don’t work for your institution, like alumni reviewers or applicants, are external users. These users can only use an Experience Cloud portal. ## Create Internal Users 1. From Setup, search for and select **Users**. 2. Click **New User**. 3. Enter details for each staff member, paying special attention to these settings. User License Select an appropriate option for the users. We recommend that admissions directors or administrative staff use a Salesforce license enabled as a Service Cloud User. For other employees of the institution, such as verifiers and reviewers, we recommend using a Salesforce Platform license. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Users with a Salesforce Platform license must be assigned the Lightning Console permission set license to access the Admissions Connect app. Profile Select one that you're using for Admissions Connect. Admissions Connect doesn't provide default profiles. For more information, see [Set Up User Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create user profiles, set up app access, assign page layouts, and customize object and tab visibility."). Role Optional. If your institution isn't using roles, leave None Specified selected. 4. Save the users you've created and continue creating User records for all admissions staff members. ## Create External Users Before creating external users, review the additional considerations in [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). To allow an external user to access a portal, enable the Contact as a Customer User and specify a Customer Community Plus license. For detailed steps, see [Create Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_create_external_users.htm) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Keep in mind that users with a Customer Community Plus license must have an associated Account record. EDA's default Administrative Account fulfills this requirement. ## Next Step [Assign a permission set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets.") to give users access to objects, fields, and the Admissions Connect app. # Create Validation Rules Validation rules verify that data entered by a user meets the criteria you specify before the record can be saved. It can also prevent users from editing records that meet certain criteria, such as when a Disbursement is considered Paid. ![Example of a validation rule.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_validation_rule.png) 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Select the object name to create a validation rule for. For example, **Disbursement**. 4. Click **Validation Rules**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a Rule Name. 7. Select **Active** to activate the rule. 8. Enter a Description. 9. Enter an Error Condition Formula that will trigger an error message if the formula is true. For example, ISPICKVAL(PRIORVALUE(outfunds\_\_Status\_\_c,“Paid”) displays an error if a disbursement is Paid and a user tries to edit the record. 10. Click **Check Syntax**. 11. Enter an Error Message. 12. Select the Error Location. 13. Click **Save**. # Create Volunteer Initiatives Set up initiatives for volunteers to help your organization accomplish its goals. Specify start and end dates, the number of volunteers needed, and the total number of volunteer hours to be filled. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To create volunteer initiatives: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
1. From the Volunteer Initiatives page, click **New**. 2. On the New Volunteer Initiative window, enter the name of the initiative. 3. If this is an initiative that is part of a larger initiative, search for and select the parent volunteer initiative. You can have up to 1,000 child initiatives per parent initiative. 4. Fill out the fields that are applicable to the initiative. 5. If you have an Experience Cloud site that you want to make this initiative available in, select **Published**. 6. Save your work. The new initiative is available on the Volunteer Initiative page. SEE ALSO: - [VolunteerInitiative Object Reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/volunteer_mgmt_api_objects_volunteer_initiative.htm) # Create Your School's Data for Pathways Create Course, Term, Program Plan, and Plan Requirements data for Pathways to use. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. To use Pathways, your org needs records for Courses, Program Plans, Plan Requirements, and Terms. For more information, see [Import Your School's Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_import_school.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create data to represent your educational institution in Student Success Hub."). ## Create Your Course and Term Records To use the SSH Program Plan Builder component, you need Course and Term records. ## Create Your Program Plan and Plan Requirement Records To use the SSH Program Plan Highlights and SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary components, you need Program Plan and Plan Requirement records. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Before creating your records, review [Learn How Program Plans Work with Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand how Pathways uses EDA Program Plan and Plan Requirement records."). To create your Program Plan and Plan Requirement records, we recommend setting up a spreadsheet for each Program Plan. This spreadsheet will make your data entry easier. To be efficient, list each Plan Requirement and its necessary fields. That way you can create all your Plan Requirements at one time without getting lost in the levels. Here's what a Program Plan spreadsheet might look like for a BS in Economics for the catalog year 2019-2020.

Level of Nesting

Plan Requirement Name

Parent Plan Requirement

Program Plan

Course

Description

Category

Credits

1

Economics Major Requirement

Leave Blank

BS Economics - Catalog Year 2019-2020

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

2

Required Lower Level Coursework

Economics Major Requirements

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

14

3

Survey of Calculus 1

Required Lower Level Coursework

Leave blank

MAC 2233

Geometric and heuristic approach to calculus.

Required

3

3

Introduction to Statistics

Required Lower Level Coursework

Leave blank

STA 2023

Graphical and numerical descriptive measures.

Required

3

3

Principles of Macroeconomics

Required Lower Level Coursework

Leave blank

ECO 2013

The nature of economics, economic concepts, institutions, and more.

Required

4

3

Principles of Microeconomics

Required Lower Level Coursework

Leave blank

ECO 2023

Theories of production, determination of prices and distribution of income.

Required

4

2

Required Upper Level Coursework

Economics Major Requirements

Leave blank

Leave blank

Select from any 3000 or 4000 level course with the prefix ECO or ECN.

Leave blank

16

2

Required Upper Level Math

Economics Major Requirements

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

4

3

Required Upper Level Math (UOC)

Required Upper Level Math

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

Leave blank

4

4

Statistics for Business and Economics

Required Upper Level Math (UOC)

Leave blank

MATH 329

Applications of modern statistical methods used in business analysis and economics.

Optional

4

4

Probability and Statistics

Required Upper Level Math (UOC)

Leave blank

MATH 352

Data gathering, analysis and display. Validity of sampling methods and statistical conclusions.

Optional

4
For more information about creating Program Plans and Plan Requirements, see the EDA articles [Model Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm) and [Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm). # Create Your Student Data Create a Contact and Case record for each student in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Create Student Contact Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_student.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every student requires a Contact record. Learn how to create a small number of Contact records. You can also import Contacts using a data import tool. - **[Create Student Case Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_student.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every student requires a Case record of the Student Record record type. Here's how to create a small number of Student Record Case records. You can also import Cases using a data import tool. ## Create Student Contact Records Every student requires a Contact record. Learn how to create a small number of Contact records. You can also import Contacts using a data import tool. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, select **Contacts** from the app navigation menu. 2. On the Contacts tab, click **New**. 3. Select the Student record type, click **Next**, and fill out the details as needed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you'll be configuring a student portal, make sure to fill out one of the Email fields and set that email as the Preferred Email so that the student gets the email invitation to join the portal when you create it later. 4. Save your changes. 5. On the student's Contact record, create data on these related lists. - K-12 orgs - On Grade Enrollments, create a record that includes the student's Educational Institution, Grade Level, and other details. - On Course Connections, create records that represent the student's past and present courses. - On Attributes, create records as necessary for Free Lunch, Reduced Price Lunch, English Learners, and other attribute types that make sense for your student body. - Higher ed orgs - On Affiliated Accounts, create a record to relate the student to a University Department. - On Program Enrollment, create a record that represents the student's major. Make sure to mark it as Primary so that the student has a Primary Academic Program specified. - On Program Enrollment, create Course Connection records (with the Student record type) for the student's past and present courses. ## Create Student Case Records Every student requires a Case record of the Student Record record type. Here's how to create a small number of Student Record Case records. You can also import Cases using a data import tool. Every student can have one and only one open Student Record Case. This limit ensures that a single Case record provides a comprehensive view of all the alerts, notes, and support-related data spanning a student's time at your school or institution. Student Success Hub functionality is built to work with open Student Record Cases. For example, support staff and students will experience errors if they try to schedule appointments with a student whose Case record is closed. 1. From the student's Contact record, create a Case record of the Student Record record type. 2. Fill out field details as needed, keeping in mind these considerations. Subject The Subject is the Case name that support staff see alongside the Case number when viewing a Case record, whether in a list or on a detail page. We recommend using a naming convention that includes the student's full name, followed by "Student Record" (for example, Elijah Espozito Student Record). You can also include other information, such as a student ID number, that support staff routinely search for when looking up students. Consider using workflow rules, triggers, Process Builder, or integration to automate and standardize values in the Subject field for all Student Record Cases. Case Owner Consider how you want to handle setting ownership, depending on your Case assignment rules setup. Case Status You'll likely want to set Status using a process specifically for Student Record Cases. Good values for K-12 are Active Enrolled, On Leave, On Hold, Inactive, Graduated, and Withdrawn. Good values for higher ed are Active - Registered, Active - Not Registered, On Leave, and Withdrawn. SIS integration is a good candidate for this data. Other Essential Case Fields Case Origin, Case Reason, Priority, Status, Type, and similar picklist fields typically need values specifically for Student Record Cases. Custom Case Fields Think about which fields you'd want to include on any custom list views for support staff with different student segments, or which to populate so they're available for setting visibility, enabling reporting, automation via Process Builder or triggers, etc. 3. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Student Record Case shows under the Cases related list on a student's Contact record page. It also appears on a Student Record Case page in the Related Cases tab under the Cases for Parent Contact list. ![The Student Record Case with a call-out on the Cases for Parent Contact related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_parent_contact_related_list.png) The Parent Contact in this context refers to the parent of the Student Record Case (the student Contact record, in other words). If your support staff aren't familiar with the Salesforce terminology for parent and child records, you may want to clarify this usage of "parent" in Student Success Hub. # Create Your Support Staff and Faculty Data Create data to represent your support staff and faculty in Student Success Hub. - **[Create Users for Support Staff Who Require Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_staff_faculty.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a User record for each teacher, counselor, and other support staff member who needs to log in to Student Success Hub. - **[Create Contacts for Support Staff and Faculty Who Don't Require Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_staff_faculty.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Contact records for administrative and other staff who don't need to sign in to Student Success Hub but who do need to be represented in the organization. Learn how to create a small number of Contact records. You can also import Contacts using a data import tool. ## Create Users for Support Staff Who Require Login Create a User record for each teacher, counselor, and other support staff member who needs to log in to Student Success Hub. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Users**. 2. Click **New User** to add a single user or click **Add Multiple Users** to add up to 10 users at a time. Enter details for each user, paying special attention to these settings. 1. For User License, select **Salesforce**. 2. For Profile, select the profile you're using for your support staff. 3. If your support staff will be using and sharing Salesforce Knowledge articles with students in a portal, select **Knowledge User** now to save a step later. (See [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app.").) 4. In the Local Settings area, specify the correct time zone. 3. Save the user and continue creating User records for all support staff who require login. ## Create Contacts for Support Staff and Faculty Who Don't Require Login Create Contact records for administrative and other staff who don't need to sign in to Student Success Hub but who do need to be represented in the organization. Learn how to create a small number of Contact records. You can also import Contacts using a data import tool. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, select **Contacts** from the app navigation menu. 2. On the Contacts tab, click **New**. 3. Fill out details as needed, including using the Primary Department field to relate the Contact to a university, school, or academic department, if appropriate. 4. Save your changes. # Create, Edit, and View Contact Relationships Relationships in Nonprofit Success Pack connect one Contact to another. When you create these connections, you can also define the type of relationship (Friend, Family, Mother, Daughter, and so on), and the relationship status (Current, Former). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Manage Relationships](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QCmRl8YZGdY). - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_edit_and_view_relationships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relationships in Nonprofit Success Pack connect one Contact to another. (This is different from Affiliations, which connect Contacts with Organizations.) When you create these connections, you can also define the type of relationship (Friend, Family, Mother, Daughter, and so on), and the relationship status (Current, Former). - **[Create a New Relationship Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_edit_and_view_relationships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Relationship to track how two contacts are related, such as the relationship between a parent and child. The Relationship record determines the Opportunity Contact Role when you create an Opportunity. - **[Edit an Existing Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_edit_and_view_relationships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update a Relationship, such as changing its status from Current to Former. When you modify a Relationship, NPSP automatically updates the Reciprocal Relationship so that both records are accurate. - **[View Relationships with the Relationships Viewer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_edit_and_view_relationships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationships Viewer provides a visual representation of how your Contacts are connected. By default the Relationships Viewer shows connections for a single Contact, but you can show second- and third-level relationships as well. ## Overview Relationships in Nonprofit Success Pack connect one Contact to another. (This is different from Affiliations, which connect Contacts with Organizations.) When you create these connections, you can also define the type of relationship (Friend, Family, Mother, Daughter, and so on), and the relationship status (Current, Former). When you create a Relationship in the Nonprofit Success Pack, it automatically creates a “reciprocal relationship,” which reflects this same relationship in the other direction. For example, if you create a relationship from Roberto's Contact record, and specify Valentina as his wife, Valentina's Contact record will also reflect that she has a husband, Roberto. Reciprocal Relationships ensure that relationship types are accurate, no matter where you're viewing them from. Relationship behavior in Nonprofit Success Pack is controlled by your Relationships Settings. To learn more about these settings and the adjustments you can make, see [Manage Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior."). ## Create a New Relationship Record Create a Relationship to track how two contacts are related, such as the relationship between a parent and child. The Relationship record determines the Opportunity Contact Role when you create an Opportunity. 1. Navigate to the Contact you want to create the Relationship for. 2. Click the Related tab, then scroll to the Relationships related list. 3. Click **New**. ![Relationships related list on Contact with New button highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_new_relationship.png) 4. Enter the new Relationship information. ![New Relationship window: Contact = Jasmine Jones, Related Contact = Kailyn Jones, Type=Parent, Status=Current.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_new_rel_window.png) **Contact**—NPSP auto-populates this field with the name of the Contact the Relationship record is connected to. **Related Contact**— Specifies the Contact who's related to the person in the Contact field. **Type**—Specifies how the Related Contact is connected to the Contact. In this example, Kailyn Jones is Jasmine Jones' parent. **Status**—Specifies whether this is a current or former relationship. **Related Opportunity Contact Role**—The Opportunity Contact Role assigned to the Related Contact when you create an Opportunity for the Contact in this Relationship. To learn more about how this feature works, see [Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."). **Description**—A place to add additional information about the relationship. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important The Relationship Type describes the Related Contact's relationship to the Main Contact, not the Main Contact's relationship to the Related Contact. 5. Click **Save**. Once the Relationship record is saved, NPSP automatically creates a reciprocal Relationship attached to the Related Contact's record, and populates the Relationship Explanation field.![Relationship related list as seen from the Related Contact's record, with the Relationship Explanation: Jasmine Jones is Kailyn Jone's Child.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_relexplanation2.png) ## Edit an Existing Relationship Update a Relationship, such as changing its status from Current to Former. When you modify a Relationship, NPSP automatically updates the Reciprocal Relationship so that both records are accurate. To modify an existing Relationship: 1. Navigate to the Contact record whose Relationship you want to edit. 2. Click the Related tab, and scroll to the Relationships related list. 3. In the row for the Relationship you want to update, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **Edit.** ![Edit is highlighted on the list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_choose_edit.png) 4. When you're finished editing, click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When you update a Relationship record, NPSP automatically updates the Reciprocal Relationship to keep the two records in sync. For example, if you change the status of the Relationship record from Current to Former, NPSP updates the status to Former on the Reciprocal Relationship record. ## View Relationships with the Relationships Viewer The Relationships Viewer provides a visual representation of how your Contacts are connected. By default the Relationships Viewer shows connections for a single Contact, but you can show second- and third-level relationships as well. To launch the Relationships Viewer: 1. Navigate to the Contact whose relationships you want to see. 2. On the Lightning Actions menu, click (![(show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)), then select **Relationships Viewer**. ![List of Lightning Actions with Relationships Viewer highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_select_rel_viewer2.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Relationships Viewer option, add it to the Contact page layout. See [Add the Relationships Viewer to the Contact Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring contacts.") for more information. The Relationships Viewer displays the Contact you started from (the "base Contact", shown in purple), along with that Contact's connections. ![Relationships Viewer showing Contact Kailyn Jones, with connections to four related Contacts.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_viewer1.png) To see additional relationships, click any of the related Contacts. In this example, clicking Valencia Robledo displays her two additional connections: ![Relationships Viewer showing Contact Valencia Robledo connected to two additional Contacts.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rel_viewer2.png) Your Salesforce admin can enable Tabular View for Relationships Viewer. Tabular View shows relationship information in a nested table and is better for users of assistive technology like screen readers. Additionally, some users simply prefer the tabular view to the graphical one. Click each Contact name to expand the list of relationships for that Contact. ![Relationships Viewer Tabular View](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/tabular-relationship-viewer.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Brian Pickett, who contributed to this documentation. # Credential Track student achievements, such as badges, certifications, or licenses. - **[Sample Uses for Credential](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students can earn achievements, beyond just completing a set of courses, that help give a fuller picture of their education. You can use the Credential object to define the various achievements that learners earn. - **[Credential Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Credential represents an industry or organizational achievement. These record types come preconfigured. - **[Keep Up with Credential Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create a Credential Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture students’ achievements by creating Credential records. ## Sample Uses for Credential Students can earn achievements, beyond just completing a set of courses, that help give a fuller picture of their education. You can use the Credential object to define the various achievements that learners earn. - University–Define badges and certifications that your institution offers or would like to track for your students such as professional certifications related to a student's program. - K-12–Define awards and certifications from extracurricular activities for letters of recommendation or for scholarship applications. ## Credential Record Types Credential represents an industry or organizational achievement. These record types come preconfigured. - Badge—A symbol of achievement. - Certification—A non-credit certification that indicates that the learner has met specified requirements. - License—A credential indicating a person is licensed for certain activities. ## Keep Up with Credential Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. | If Installed Before Version | Configuration Task | | --- | --- | | 1.118 | Add the Credential related list to the appropriate Account page layouts. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). | ## Create a Credential Record Capture students’ achievements by creating Credential records. 1. If the Contact record has a Credential related list, click New. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Credential**, and click **New**. 2. Select a record type and click **Next**. 3. Enter all relevant details. 4. Click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Credential record. # Credential Track student achievement, such as badges, certifications, or licenses. - **[Sample Uses for Credential](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students can earn achievements, beyond just completing a set of courses, that help give a fuller picture of their education. You can use the Credential object to define the various achievements that learners earn. - **[Credential Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Credential represents an industry or organizational achievement. These record types come preconfigured. - **[Keep Up with Credential Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create a Credential Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture students’ achievements by creating Credential records. ## Sample Uses for Credential Students can earn achievements, beyond just completing a set of courses, that help give a fuller picture of their education. You can use the Credential object to define the various achievements that learners earn. - University–Define badges and certifications that your institution offers or would like to track for your students such as professional certifications related to a student's program. - K-12–Define awards and certifications from extracurricular activities for letters of recommendation or for scholarship applications. ## Credential Record Types Credential represents an industry or organizational achievement. These record types come preconfigured. - Badge—A symbol of achievement. - Certification—A non-credit certification that indicates that the learner has met specified requirements. - License—A credential indicating a person is licensed for certain activities. ## Keep Up with Credential Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. | If Installed Before Version | Configuration Task | | --- | --- | | 1.22 | Add the Credential related list to the appropriate Account page layouts. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). | ## Create a Credential Record Capture students’ achievements by creating Credential records. 1. If the Contact record has a Credential related list, click New. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Credential**, and click **New**. 2. Select a record type and click **Next**. 3. Enter all relevant details. 4. Click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Credential record. # Credit Influence as Gift Soft Credit on a Gift Transaction in Education Recognize constituents other than the donors for their help in bringing in the donors' gifts with gift soft credit. For example, track an influencer of the donation by adding this soft credit to the donor's gift transaction. You can also recognize tribute honorees as soft credit recipients. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create soft credits:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift soft credit can also be added to gifts during gift commitment entry. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Open the gift transaction to which you want to associate a soft credit. 3. Select the **Related** tab. 4. Next to Gift Soft Credit, click **New**. 5. Select a recipient. 6. Define a partial percentage or partial amount of the gift transaction for which the soft credit is being recorded. The soft credit can be up to 100 percent of the gift. 7. Select a role of the soft credit recipient. For example, select **Matched Donor**. 8. Save your changes. # Credit Influence as Gift Soft Credit on a Gift Transaction in Nonprofit Recognize constituents other than the donors for their help in bringing in the donors' gifts with gift soft credit. For example, track an influencer of the donation by adding this soft credit to the donor's gift transaction. You can also recognize tribute honorees as soft credit recipients. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create soft credits:

FundraisingAccess permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift soft credit can also be added to gifts during gift commitment entry. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Open the gift transaction to which you want to associate a soft credit. 3. Select the **Related** tab. 4. Next to Gift Soft Credit, click **New**. 5. Select a recipient. 6. Define a partial percentage or partial amount of the gift transaction for which the soft credit is being recorded. The soft credit can be up to 100 percent of the gift. 7. Select a role of the soft credit recipient. For example, select **Matched Donor**. 8. Save your changes. # Cultivating a Campus Through Giving Learn how to create a giving atmosphere campus Jacqueline's official title is Director of Advancement Services—but she wears many hats during her day. As she heads into her office at the public university, she sees visible reminders of her office's contributions to shaping students' daily experiences and future prospects. The on-campus food bank is open and busily serving students today, the result of one impassioned donor's giving. The rec facility annex is under construction after a successful capital campaign; it won't just meet accessibility standards but will include innovative, inclusive designs specifically for wheelchair users. Fundraising has never been more important. The needs of colleges and universities are many and growing. Rising costs and decreased government funding make it hard to focus on institutions' broader missions without scaling back. Donors who have historically helped fill those gaps look different than they have in the past. They expect more from institutions they donate to, with increased care and transparency, and are often quick to donate elsewhere when their expectations aren't met. Inside the Advancement office, Jacqueline's staff processes and manages gifts that arrive in various shapes, sizes, and complexities. Gift officers make sure that pledges are on track to be received, and kept up to date. Jacqueline partners closely with the accounting team to ensure that pledges are received, tracked, and accurately sorted into the appropriate funds. On busy days, Jacqueline "of all trades" even helps the clerks with gift entry. It's happening more often lately. Gift giving is becoming more complex, and recent college grads are defined by their commitment to new and innovative giving technologies: stocks, cryptocurrencies, charitable gift annuities, etc. These kinds of gifts take more discretion, judgment, and time to record accurately. In the past, Jacqueline experienced a number of frustrations because her office's technology hadn't evolved with the times. Legacy systems were cumbersome, if reliable, but were shut down because of security concerns about old software. Shared spreadsheets were limited to only one person editing them at a time, slowing down the whole team. Jacqueline and her staff did try out somewhat newer tools—they offered only one way of entering data, which only works well for some gifts some of the time, and is painful for all the rest. And none of these solutions worked well for the Accounting or Advancement teams, whose own tools and systems were either incompatible or required daily manual effort to stay in sync. But fortunately for Jacqueline (and all the people she works with!), her university now has Salesforce and has installed Gift Entry Manager (GEM). This solution offers: - Multiple ways to enter gifts, which affords choices that streamline data entry for simple gifts, and can also handle complex gifts. - Configuration options that help admins show only relevant fields and customize their display order, for faster data entry. - Structured gift records that allow for multiple designations on each individual payment. Today, Jacqueline and her team have a 360-degree view of their gifts and all their related data, and the right tools for each gift entry job. She works with her Salesforce admin, Joanna, who happily helps her customize those tools to show only relevant fields, saving her team valuable time and mental effort with each gift entered. She coordinates with other Advancement teams using the data and marketing tools already in Salesforce. Finally, she’s currently having conversations with IT, who are setting up an API to automatically retrieve gift records directly from her Salesforce org. Jacqueline’s team is now able to handle the gift entry work without her help, and she has more time available to coordinate with other teams and lead her own! # Curate Lists of Constituents Use Salesforce objects to create lists and identify interests so that staff can better assist and connect with constituents.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Actionable List Engagement, Actionable Segmentation, and Actionable List Member Create lists from multiple objects, collaborate with other staff, and take action within the list. Use cases include: - Prioritize applicants. - Create lists of students based on specific criteria. - Create a portfolio of prospects for relationship officers. - Create lists of parents and students. - Have a list of VIP parents to call based on a set of criteria. Interest Tags Identify key interests, preferences, and needs. Deepen relations to build a connection with recruiters or advisors by speaking a common language. Use cases include: - Identify interests of the prospects, such as which sports they're playing. - Track specific academic or extracurricular interests during the enrollment process. See Also: - [Actionable List Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.actionable_list_engagement.htm&type=5) - [Actionable List Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.actionable_list_members.htm&type=5) - [Actionable Segmentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.actionable_segmentation.htm&type=5) - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5) # Custom Lightning Web Components in Gift Entry Grid in Education Understand how custom Lightning web components move data from and to the Gift Entry Grid. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Properties Sent to a Component from the Gift Entry Grid The Gift Entry Grid passes row data to custom Lightning web components through the params property for cell components and the rowData property for modals.
Property Description
params
  • Available in the Cell Edit and Cell Display components.
  • Contains the properties of the current row within the Gift Entry Grid and the underlying grid services.
  • params.data contains field values corresponding to GiftEntry object fields in addition to object representations of lookup and picklist fields. Fields not yet populated in a new row aren’t included in the data collection.
  • Row field values can be retrieved by using params.data.{giftEntryfieldName}.
rowData
  • Available in Column Modal and Post Processing Modal.
  • Contains field values corresponding to GiftEntry object fields in addition to object representations of lookup and picklist fields. Fields not yet populated in a new row aren't included in the rowData collection.
  • Use rowData.{giftEntryfieldName} to retrieve row field values.
  • In the Post Processing Modal, rowData will also contain the ID of generated records, such as Gift Entry ID (as rowData.Id) and Gift Transaction ID (as rowData.GiftTransactionId).
## Sending Data Back to Gift Entry Grid **Column Modals** Column modals and cell edit components use different mechanisms to return data to the Gift Entry Grid. Column Modals are rendered within a wrapper lightning web component that includes the modal title (as defined in the template) as well as a Continue and a Cancel button. The Continue button is what the user will click to close your custom modal. It will call these required exposed functions:
Function Description
@api validate()

Return an object with two properties:

  • isValid: true or false indicating that the contents of the modal passes your validation rules. If true, the field values are retrieved through a call to getComponentValues() and the modal is closed.
  • invalidFields: If isValid is false, this contains a key:value set of fields api names with the associated error. This info is used to render messages within the modal.
@api getComponentValues()

Return a key:value set of properties to apply to the row:

  • { FieldApiName : value, … }
  • Each field must refer to a field that exists on the GiftEntry object. These will be persisted to the row when saved.
**Cell Edit Component** To return data back to the Gift Entry Grid from a cell edit component: - Construct an object as the message to return to the Gift Entry Grid. - Publish an event to the `lightning__giftEntryGridComponentAction` message channel. The contents of the message body are strict. Follow the structure of this example: ``` // Build the "message" object to send back to // Gift Entry Grid following the documented contract const message = { // Required properties (do not change the values below) action: "ColumnEdit", componentName: this.tagName, colId: this._params?.colDef?.colId, // 'details' is an optional property: // - include if there is data to write to the row // in Gift Entry details: { // rowId and rowIndex must be included in details rowId: this.params?.data?.id, // Required rowIndex: this.params?.data?.rowIndex, // Required // All GiftEntry fields to write to rowData // and as object in a key:value collection. // To clear the value of a field on the GiftEntry rowData // object, return null instead of undefined giftEntryFields : { key: value, ... }, // rowProperties is optional, but if passed can be // referenced by other custom components. Data in this // object are not persisted to the GiftEntry record. rowProperties: { key : value, ... }, // Special Use: If your custom column component is // forcing a matched gift transaction, use these // properties to send the matching transaction ID // and NAME back to grid for proper handling: matchingGiftTransactionId: {giftTransactionId}, matchingGiftTransactionName: {giftTransactionName} } } ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note No properties are returned to the grid from the Column Component (Display) or Cell Display Component. ## Considerations for Returning Data When returning data back to the Gift Entry Grid, consider these rules for picklist and lookup fields. Picklist field considerations: - If picklist fields are returned as a simple string, the value should represent the picklist API name in the event that the label and the API name are different. - Picklist fields can also be returned as an object in the form of `{ value: xx, displayValue: zz }`. Here's an example: ``` { giftType: { value: “Organizational”, displayValue: “Organizativo/Doméstico” } } ``` Lookup field considerations: - Lookup Fields that are not columns in the Gift Entry Grid can be returned as just an ID string only in a response object. For example, `{MyLookupFieldId__c: ‘xxx00000000’}` - Lookup fields that are field columns in the Gift Entry Grid, such as Campaign and Outreach Source Code, should be returned from a custom Lightning web component in an object form to make sure that they render properly in the grid. Here’s an example: ``` Campaign: { Id: {campaignId}, Name: {campaignName} } ``` # Custom Lightning Web Components in Gift Entry Grid in Nonprofit Understand how custom Lightning web components move data from and to the Gift Entry Grid. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

## Properties Sent to a Component from the Gift Entry Grid The Gift Entry Grid passes row data to custom Lightning web components through the params property for cell components and the rowData property for modals.
Property Description
params
  • Available in the Cell Edit and Cell Display components.
  • Contains the properties of the current row within the Gift Entry Grid and the underlying grid services.
  • params.data contains field values corresponding to GiftEntry object fields in addition to object representations of lookup and picklist fields. Fields not yet populated in a new row aren’t included in the data collection.
  • Row field values can be retrieved by using params.data.{giftEntryfieldName}.
rowData
  • Available in Column Modal and Post Processing Modal.
  • Contains field values corresponding to GiftEntry object fields in addition to object representations of lookup and picklist fields. Fields not yet populated in a new row aren't included in the rowData collection.
  • Use rowData.{giftEntryfieldName} to retrieve row field values.
  • In the Post Processing Modal, rowData will also contain the ID of generated records, such as Gift Entry ID (as rowData.Id) and Gift Transaction ID (as rowData.GiftTransactionId).
## Sending Data Back to Gift Entry Grid **Column Modals** Column modals and cell edit components use different mechanisms to return data to the Gift Entry Grid. Column Modals are rendered within a wrapper lightning web component that includes the modal title (as defined in the template) as well as a Continue and a Cancel button. The Continue button is what the user will click to close your custom modal. It will call these required exposed functions:
Function Description
@api validate()

Return an object with two properties:

  • isValid: true or false indicating that the contents of the modal passes your validation rules. If true, the field values are retrieved through a call to getComponentValues() and the modal is closed.
  • invalidFields: If isValid is false, this contains a key:value set of fields api names with the associated error. This info is used to render messages within the modal.
@api getComponentValues()

Return a key:value set of properties to apply to the row:

  • { FieldApiName : value, … }
  • Each field must refer to a field that exists on the GiftEntry object. These will be persisted to the row when saved.
**Cell Edit Component** To return data back to the Gift Entry Grid from a cell edit component: - Construct an object as the message to return to the Gift Entry Grid. - Publish an event to the `lightning__giftEntryGridComponentAction` message channel. The contents of the message body are strict. Follow the structure of this example: ``` // Build the "message" object to send back to // Gift Entry Grid following the documented contract const message = { // Required properties (do not change the values below) action: "ColumnEdit", componentName: this.tagName, colId: this._params?.colDef?.colId, // 'details' is an optional property: // - include if there is data to write to the row // in Gift Entry details: { // rowId and rowIndex must be included in details rowId: this.params?.data?.id, // Required rowIndex: this.params?.data?.rowIndex, // Required // All GiftEntry fields to write to rowData // and as object in a key:value collection. // To clear the value of a field on the GiftEntry rowData // object, return null instead of undefined giftEntryFields : { key: value, ... }, // rowProperties is optional, but if passed can be // referenced by other custom components. Data in this // object are not persisted to the GiftEntry record. rowProperties: { key : value, ... }, // Special Use: If your custom column component is // forcing a matched gift transaction, use these // properties to send the matching transaction ID // and NAME back to grid for proper handling: matchingGiftTransactionId: {giftTransactionId}, matchingGiftTransactionName: {giftTransactionName} } } ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note No properties are returned to the grid from the Column Component (Display) or Cell Display Component. ## Considerations for Returning Data When returning data back to the Gift Entry Grid, consider these rules for picklist and lookup fields. Picklist field considerations: - If picklist fields are returned as a simple string, the value should represent the picklist API name in the event that the label and the API name are different. - Picklist fields can also be returned as an object in the form of `{ value: xx, displayValue: zz }`. Here's an example: ``` { giftType: { value: “Organizational”, displayValue: “Organizativo/Doméstico” } } ``` Lookup field considerations: - Lookup Fields that are not columns in the Gift Entry Grid can be returned as just an ID string only in a response object. For example, `{MyLookupFieldId__c: ‘xxx00000000’}` - Lookup fields that are field columns in the Gift Entry Grid, such as Campaign and Outreach Source Code, should be returned from a custom Lightning web component in an object form to make sure that they render properly in the grid. Here’s an example: ``` Campaign: { Id: {campaignId}, Name: {campaignName} } ``` # Custom Managed Components Learn about the custom components included in Grants Management. Grants Management includes custom managed Lightning web components that give you the flexibility to customize processes to meet your unique needs. Use these components in your own flows or in pages that use Lightning App Builder. - **[Application Form - Next](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When added to a flow, the Application Form - Next button prompts a user to save the application section they are currently on and then moves the flow to the next element. We recommend adding an Update Records element directly after this component to save the grantseeker’s information to the Funding Request. - **[Application Form - Section Navigation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Application Form - Section Navigation shows a user all available sections of an application and lets them click and navigate between those sections. - **[File Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The File Manager component allows a user to view, upload, and delete files from a Lightning web page or any flow screen. - **[Funding Request Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grants Management includes custom components for buttons on the Funding Request. - **[Manage Account Update Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Manage Account Update Request component gives your Salesforce users a quick way to complete a constituent's information update request. - **[Tax Status Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the option for grantmakers to search for an organization's tax status from different objects without using a Verification Check. Add the Tax Status Search custom component to flow screen elements to let grantmakers initiate a tax status search from a record, and customize what happens with the data when it's returned. For example, add the Tax Status Search component to the Account object and designate that the Account record updates with the results. ## Application Form - Next When added to a flow, the Application Form - Next button prompts a user to save the application section they are currently on and then moves the flow to the next element. We recommend adding an Update Records element directly after this component to save the grantseeker’s information to the Funding Request. ## Application Form - Section Navigation The Application Form - Section Navigation shows a user all available sections of an application and lets them click and navigate between those sections. ## File Manager The File Manager component allows a user to view, upload, and delete files from a Lightning web page or any flow screen. When Manage Files is selected, a user can view, upload, and delete files from the component. Leave Manage Files deselected if you want users to only view files from the component. ## Funding Request Buttons Grants Management includes custom components for buttons on the Funding Request. Community Manage Collaborators Button Use this component in your grantee portal to allow applicants to invite and manage collaborators. This button appears only when the Funding Request is in the In Progress status. Funding Request Button Group Use this component on Salesforce Lightning record pages when you want to include the Manage Collaborators and Invite Applicant buttons on a Funding Request. Manage Collaborators Button Use this component on Salesforce Lightning record pages if you only want the Manage Collaborators button on the Funding Request and don't need the Invite Applicant button. Invite Applicant Use this component on Salesforce Lightning record pages if you only want the Invite Applicant button on the Funding Request and don't need the Manage Collaborators button. ## Manage Account Update Request The Manage Account Update Request component gives your Salesforce users a quick way to complete a constituent's information update request. Add the Manage Account Update Request component to the Case page layout, associate it with the `sfdo_grants_AccountUpdateRequest` Account Quick Action, and set a Case Close Status. Manage Account Update Request is available only on Cases created by an account update request from the grantee portal. ## Tax Status Search Add the option for grantmakers to search for an organization's tax status from different objects without using a Verification Check. Add the Tax Status Search custom component to flow screen elements to let grantmakers initiate a tax status search from a record, and customize what happens with the data when it's returned. For example, add the Tax Status Search component to the Account object and designate that the Account record updates with the results. When they use a Tax Status Search, a grantmaker receives several data points from the tax search results. | Resource Label | Resource API Name | Corresponds to | | --- | --- | --- | | Selected Legal Organization Name | selectedLegalOrganizationName | Legal Organization Name column | | Selected EIN | selectedTaxId | EIN column | | Selected IRS Subsection Code | selectedTaxStatusCode | IRS Subsection Code column | | Most Recent BMF Date | selectedMostRecentBmf | Most Recent BMF Date column | | Raw Tax Status Search Results | rawResult | — | # Custom Settings Reference This article contains a summary of the EDA Hierarchy Settings in Custom Settings. - **[Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_custom_settings_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** These settings control EDA behavior for your entire org. ## Custom Settings Reference These settings control EDA behavior for your entire org. ### EDA Hierarchy Settings We recommend not modifying the default value from within Custom Settings. Instead, make changes in EDA Settings. In some cases (for example, when functionality that's available in Hierarchy Settings is not yet available in EDA Settings), you might need to change these values in Custom Settings. This table indicates which values you can safely change. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed EDA before version 1.100, some of the descriptions you'll see in your org have been replaced with the updated descriptions below. You can safely update descriptions and help text directly in custom settings.
Field Description Can Admins Specify a Different Default Value?
Account Processor

ID of the default record type for Account. For example, if specifying Administrative (the recommended Account model), enter the ID of the Administrative record type for the Account object.

 No
Multi-Address Accounts Record Types of those Accounts that should have multi-addresses enabled. No
Accounts to Delete The record types of Accounts to be automatically deleted if all their associated Contacts have been deleted. No
Admin Account Naming Format Stores the default format for Admin Account names. No
Admin Other Name Setting Stores other info about Admin Account naming format. No
Administrative Account Record Type The Account record type used for Administrative Accounts. This setting affects management of Address records and the naming format of Administrative Accounts. No
Namespace The namespace of the Gift Entry Manager managed package. No
Affiliation Record Type Enforced If enabled, an error results when users populate a Primary field on Contact with an Account that has a record type mismatch to the record type defined in EDA Settings. The Affiliation record is not created and Primary fields on Contact are not corrected. No
Affil End Date Copy from Prog Enroll Indicates whether to set the End Date of the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. If enabled, set the End Date to the Program Enrollment's End Date. If disabled, don't specify the Affiliation's End Date. No
Affil Start Date Copy from Prog Enroll Indicates whether to set the Start Date of the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. If enabled, set the Start Date to the Program Enrollment's Start Date. If disabled, don't specify the Affiliation's Start Date. No
Affil Status When Delete Prog Enroll If the related setting, Affil Delete When Delete Prog Enroll, is disabled, this setting specifies the value to set for the Affiliation's Status, when its related Program Enrollment is deleted. No
Affil Delete When Delete Prog Enroll Indicates whether to delete an Affiliation when its related Program Enrollment is deleted. If enabled, delete the Affiliation. If disabled, set the Affiliation's status to the value specified in the related setting, Affil Status When Delete Prog Enroll. No
Affil Role When Create Prog Enroll If the related setting, Affil Set Role When Create Prog Enroll, is enabled, this setting specifies the value to set for the Role on the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. No
Affil Set Role When Create Prog Enroll Indicates whether to specify a Role for the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. If enabled, set the Affiliation's Role to the value specified in the related setting, Affil Role When Create Prog Enroll. If disabled, don't specify a Role. No
Affil Status When Create Prog Enroll The value set for the Status of an Affiliation record automatically created with a Program Enrollment. No
Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations Auto-created Relationships are deduplicated to prevent duplication of Relationship records between Contacts. Select Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations to disable this behavior and allow multiple Relationships of the same type between two Contacts. No
Async Error Check Last Run The most recent execution date of the Async Job error logger. No
Automatic Household Naming If enabled, the Household name is automatically set based on the Household Name Format settings. No
Address management support for Contacts Enables multi-address functionality for Contacts. No
Default Contact Language Fluency The Fluency value automatically set on newly created Contact Language records when users set the Primary Language lookup field on a Contact. No
Disable Error Handling If selected, the custom error handling framework is disabled. No
Disable Preferred Email Enforcement When selected, the requirements for the Preferred Email field on Contact are not enforced. No
Enable Course Connections When enabled, allows users to choose the Contact type (Faculty or Student) when creating a Course Connection record. This feature requires default Contact record types to be set for active students and faculty. No
Enable Debug Select to enable debug statements in managed package code. Yes
Enable New Preferred Phone Sync Sync the Preferred Phone field to the Contact's standard Phone field and validate that the value in Preferred Phone exists and has a value. No
Error Notification Recipients Stores the type of user to send error notifications to. No
Faculty Record Type The default Contact record type for Faculty when creating a Course Connection record. No
Household Account Naming Format Stores the Household Account Naming Format. No
Household Addresses Acc Record Type The Account record type used for Household Accounts. This setting affects management of Address records and the naming format of Household Accounts. No
Household Other Name Setting Stores other info about the Household Account naming format. No
Preferred Phone Selection Select a desired Preferred Phone when the Preferred Email/Phone Data Cleanup batch job runs. No
Prevent <object name> Deletion

Prevent the deletion of the named object's records when they have related a certain type of child record. Refer to Apex Class Descriptions for EDA for details about the child record dependencies of a given object type.

Note
Note If you enable any of the Prevent Deletion settings in Hierarchy Settings, note the following:

  • If you disable a TDTM class for an object, the associated Prevent Deletion setting will be disabled even if you try to enable it in Hierarchy Settings.

  • Disable Prevent Deletion-related settings before merging records or deleting duplicate records.

 Yes
Reciprocal Method Determines the method used to generate the reciprocal relationship. Either List Setting, which uses custom settings by gender, or Value Inversion, which inverts the type if appropriate ("Parent-Child" to "Child-Parent"). No
Relationship Name Field Id This field is currently not used in EDA. No
Relationship Name Id Field Id This field is currently not used in EDA. No
Simple Address Change Treated as Update When enabled, changes to single Contact or Account address fields are treated as updates to the existing address (for example, no new Address object is created). Also causes white space and case changes to be treated as updates. No
Store Errors Enable this feature to store errors. No
Student Record Type The default record type when creating Course Connections for active students. No
Validate Program Plan for Nested PR When selected, Plan Requirements can specify either a Program Plan or a parent Plan Requirement, but not both. For example, a Plan Requirement that has a parent Plan Requirement can't also specify a Program Plan, or vice versa. If you specify both a Program Plan and a parent Plan Requirement, an error message will prevent you from saving until only one is selected. No
# Custom Settings Reference This article contains a summary of the EDA Hierarchy Settings in Custom Settings. - **[Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_custom_settings_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** These settings control EDA behavior for your entire org. ## Custom Settings Reference These settings control EDA behavior for your entire org. ### EDA Hierarchy Settings We recommend not modifying the default value from within Custom Settings. Instead, make changes in EDA Settings. In some cases (for example, when functionality that's available in Hierarchy Settings is not yet available in EDA Settings), you might need to change these values in Custom Settings. This table indicates which values you can safely change. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed EDA before version 1.100, some of the descriptions you'll see in your org have been replaced with the updated descriptions below. You can safely update descriptions and help text directly in custom settings.
Field Description Can Admins Specify a Different Default Value?
Account Processor

ID of the default record type for Account. For example, if specifying Administrative (the recommended Account model), enter the ID of the Administrative record type for the Account object.

 No
Multi-Address Accounts Record Types of those Accounts that should have multi-addresses enabled. No
Accounts to Delete The record types of Accounts to be automatically deleted if all their associated Contacts have been deleted. No
Admin Account Naming Format Stores the default format for Admin Account names. No
Admin Other Name Setting Stores other info about Admin Account naming format. No
Administrative Account Record Type The Account record type used for Administrative Accounts. This setting affects management of Address records and the naming format of Administrative Accounts. No
Namespace The namespace of the Gift Entry Manager managed package. No
Affiliation Record Type Enforced If enabled, an error results when users populate a Primary field on Contact with an Account that has a record type mismatch to the record type defined in EDA Settings. The Affiliation record is not created and Primary fields on Contact are not corrected. No
Affil End Date Copy from Prog Enroll Indicates whether to set the End Date of the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. If enabled, set the End Date to the Program Enrollment's End Date. If disabled, don't specify the Affiliation's End Date. No
Affil Start Date Copy from Prog Enroll Indicates whether to set the Start Date of the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. If enabled, set the Start Date to the Program Enrollment's Start Date. If disabled, don't specify the Affiliation's Start Date. No
Affil Status When Delete Prog Enroll If the related setting, Affil Delete When Delete Prog Enroll, is disabled, this setting specifies the value to set for the Affiliation's Status, when its related Program Enrollment is deleted. No
Affil Delete When Delete Prog Enroll Indicates whether to delete an Affiliation when its related Program Enrollment is deleted. If enabled, delete the Affiliation. If disabled, set the Affiliation's status to the value specified in the related setting, Affil Status When Delete Prog Enroll. No
Affil Role When Create Prog Enroll If the related setting, Affil Set Role When Create Prog Enroll, is enabled, this setting specifies the value to set for the Role on the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. No
Affil Set Role When Create Prog Enroll Indicates whether to specify a Role for the Affiliation created with a Program Enrollment. If enabled, set the Affiliation's Role to the value specified in the related setting, Affil Role When Create Prog Enroll. If disabled, don't specify a Role. No
Affil Status When Create Prog Enroll The value set for the Status of an Affiliation record automatically created with a Program Enrollment. No
Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations Auto-created Relationships are deduplicated to prevent duplication of Relationship records between Contacts. Select Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations to disable this behavior and allow multiple Relationships of the same type between two Contacts. No
Async Error Check Last Run The most recent execution date of the Async Job error logger. No
Automatic Household Naming If enabled, the Household name is automatically set based on the Household Name Format settings. No
Address management support for Contacts Enables multi-address functionality for Contacts. No
Default Contact Language Fluency The Fluency value automatically set on newly created Contact Language records when users set the Primary Language lookup field on a Contact. No
Disable Error Handling If selected, the custom error handling framework is disabled. No
Disable Preferred Email Enforcement When selected, the requirements for the Preferred Email field on Contact are not enforced. No
Enable Course Connections When enabled, allows users to choose the Contact type (Faculty or Student) when creating a Course Connection record. This feature requires default Contact record types to be set for active students and faculty. No
Enable Debug Select to enable debug statements in managed package code. Yes
Enable New Preferred Phone Sync Sync the Preferred Phone field to the Contact's standard Phone field and validate that the value in Preferred Phone exists and has a value. No
Error Notification Recipients Stores the type of user to send error notifications to. No
Faculty Record Type The default Contact record type for Faculty when creating a Course Connection record. No
Household Account Naming Format Stores the Household Account Naming Format. No
Household Addresses Acc Record Type The Account record type used for Household Accounts. This setting affects management of Address records and the naming format of Household Accounts. No
Household Other Name Setting Stores other info about the Household Account naming format. No
Preferred Phone Selection Select a desired Preferred Phone when the Preferred Email/Phone Data Cleanup batch job runs. No
Prevent <object name> Deletion

Prevent the deletion of the named object's records when they have related a certain type of child record. Refer to Apex Class Descriptions for EDA for details about the child record dependencies of a given object type.

Note
Note If you enable any of the Prevent Deletion settings in Hierarchy Settings, note the following:

  • If you disable a TDTM class for an object, the associated Prevent Deletion setting will be disabled even if you try to enable it in Hierarchy Settings.

  • Disable Prevent Deletion-related settings before merging records or deleting duplicate records.

 Yes
Reciprocal Method Determines the method used to generate the reciprocal relationship. Either List Setting, which uses custom settings by gender, or Value Inversion, which inverts the type if appropriate ("Parent-Child" to "Child-Parent"). No
Relationship Name Field Id This field is currently not used in EDA. No
Relationship Name Id Field Id This field is currently not used in EDA. No
Simple Address Change Treated as Update When enabled, changes to single Contact or Account address fields are treated as updates to the existing address (for example, no new Address object is created). Also causes white space and case changes to be treated as updates. No
Store Errors Enable this feature to store errors. No
Student Record Type The default record type when creating Course Connections for active students. No
Validate Program Plan for Nested PR When selected, Plan Requirements can specify either a Program Plan or a parent Plan Requirement, but not both. For example, a Plan Requirement that has a parent Plan Requirement can't also specify a Program Plan, or vice versa. If you specify both a Program Plan and a parent Plan Requirement, an error message will prevent you from saving until only one is selected. No
# Customizable Rollups and Soft Credits Soft credits are used when a Contact or Account influenced the donation, but isn't responsible for the payment. Hard credits, on the other hand, are used when a Contact or Account directly makes a donation and is responsible for the payment. ## Soft Credits on Contact ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note With Customizable Rollups, if an Opportunity has duplicate soft credits, only one of those soft credits is included in rollups. For example, if an Opportunity includes two Partial Soft Credits for Sue Jones, only one of the soft credits is included in the soft credit rollups on Sue's Contact record. Soft Credits on Contacts In NPSP, soft credits (including any partial soft credits) and soft credit rollups are tracked on Contacts. With Customizable Rollups, all of the Contact Soft Credit Rollup fields still exist, but the rollups that populate them are now defined in Customizable Rollups. Users can edit the existing ones or create new ones. If you want to learn more about the differences between soft credit and hard credit Customizable Rollups and how they work, see [Hard Credit vs. Soft Credit Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_hard_vs_soft_cred_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understanding how NPSP determines what data rolls up to a hard credit or soft credit Customizable Rollup can be confusing."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Hard credit rollups work differently when you enable Customizable Rollups. Customizable Rollups created using a Contact (Hard Credit) rollup type are based on the person listed in the Primary Contact field on an Opportunity (the Contact who actually paid for the donation). This is different from how hard credit rollups worked before Customizable Rollups came along. Previously, hard credit rollups were based on the Contact with the Opportunity Contact Role marked as Primary. For more information, see "How Hard Credit and Soft Credit Customizable Rollups Work" in [Hard Credit vs. Soft Credit Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_hard_vs_soft_cred_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understanding how NPSP determines what data rolls up to a hard credit or soft credit Customizable Rollup can be confusing."). ## Soft Credits on Accounts With Customizable Rollups, we also offer the ability to roll up Account soft credits. An Account soft credit is a credit for a donation that the Account didn't actually make, but may have somehow influenced. For example, a Donor Advised Fund uses a bank to manage their money. When a donation comes from the Donor Advised Fund, the check is actually generated by the bank, so the bank gets the hard credit for the donation. Using Account soft credits, you can ensure that the Donor Advised Fund gets a soft credit for their donation, and you can roll up those soft credits to the Account. For information on using Account soft credits, see [Configure Automated and Manual Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits.") and [Manually Create Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits."). Additionally, you can create Customizable Rollups that roll up all Contact level soft credits to the Household Account. These soft credits are valuable if you want to be able to see the total giving for an entire Household. For example, you may have major donors that give on an annual basis, but the money is coming from a donor advised fund or family foundation (not their personal checkbook) managed by a financial institution. Thus, all donations come directly from that financial institution. This results in hard credits and the majority of the rollups pointing to the financial institution (for accounting reasons), which makes it hard to fully realize the amount of money the Contact or Household has given when you view their records in NPSP. Thanks to Customizable Rollups custom soft credit rollups, it's easy for organizations to get a complete picture of major donor giving while still following accounting best practices. For more information on soft credits, see [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."). # Customizable Rollups Overview Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Customizable Rollups Overview](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=307itOn2bvM). Imagine that you have a call with a major donor, and you want to go into it armed with the knowledge of their lifetime giving to your organization. Without the right [rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically \"roll up\" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records."), this would be a tedious, manual process that could take a tremendous amount of time. Additionally, you might have incorrect information. So, what if we told you that you could roll up Payments along with Opportunity data? And what if we told you that you could [create your own custom rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups."), where you define the field to roll up to and the filters to use? With Customizable Rollups, this is all possible. Customizable Rollups are available as part of NPSP with the Household Account Model. They are enabled by default in new NPSP Trials starting with version 3.155 (May 2019); all other orgs just need to [turn the feature on](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them."). And when you do, it will convert all of your existing User Defined Rollups (and the 87 out-of-box NPSP rollups) into Customizable Rollups. You'll be able to edit the converted rollups or create brand new ones. And as an added bonus, we support [Advanced Currency Management](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=administration_about_advanced_currency_management.htm) with Dated Exchange Rates for organizations with Customizable Rollups enabled. Please note that there are a few limitations if using ACM with NPSP. Read the [International Nonprofits FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Answers to common questions about NPSP, its limitations, and how it works for international nonprofits.") for full details. ## A note about types of rollups... When it comes down to how rollups work, there are really two types of rollups. It's important to understand what these two types are and how they work. - **Aggregate Rollups**: Summarize data from multiple records and roll it up to a target field. Aggregate Rollups are used for summing, averaging, or counting. For example, NPSP comes with aggregate rollups for Total Gifts (summing), Average Gift Amount (averaging), and Total Number of Gifts (counting). - **Single Result Operation Rollups**: Copy data from a field on a single record to the target field. These rollups are used for searching through a group of records to find the first or last date, or finding the smallest or largest number (currency, number, etc) and copying data from that record. Out-of-box in NPSP, you get single result operations such as Largest Gift Amount, First Gift Date, and Last Gift Date. But, with Customizable Rollups, you can select any field from the single Opportunity (or Payment) result and copy it to the target object. A great example that wasn't possible before is that you can configure a rollup to automatically copy the record ID of that found single record, and add it to a custom lookup field on the target object (for example, a Contact or Account record). That way you can easily click through to see the record itself (and find any information you need)! With that lookup, you can also create cross-object formula fields to pull any data you need from that Opportunity or Payment to the Contact or Account. ## See Also [Customizable Rollups and Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_softcredits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are used when a Contact or Account influenced the donation, but isn't responsible for the payment. Hard credits, on the other hand, are used when a Contact or Account directly makes a donation and is responsible for the payment.") [Hard Credit vs. Soft Credit Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_hard_vs_soft_cred_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understanding how NPSP determines what data rolls up to a hard credit or soft credit Customizable Rollup can be confusing.") [Enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them.") [Create Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups.") [Customizable Rollups Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Welcome to the Customizable Rollups Recipes cookbook!") - **[Customizable Rollups and Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_softcredits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Soft credits are used when a Contact or Account influenced the donation, but isn't responsible for the payment. Hard credits, on the other hand, are used when a Contact or Account directly makes a donation and is responsible for the payment. - **[Hard Credit vs. Soft Credit Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_hard_vs_soft_cred_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understanding how NPSP determines what data rolls up to a hard credit or soft credit Customizable Rollup can be confusing. - **[Things to Know Before Enabling Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_before_enable_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're starting from an NPSP Trial in version 3.155 (May 2019), Customizable Rollups are enabled by default. All other orgs will need to enable Customizable Rollups. - **[Test Customizable Rollups in your Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_test_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before enabling Customizable Rollups in your Production org, we highly recommend testing and validating the results in a Full or Partial Sandbox. The best way to validate rollup values after enabling Customizable Rollups is to use field history tracking. - **[Enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them. - **[Create Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about customizable rollups. - **[Create Filter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about creating filter groups. - **[Configure Soft Credit Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring soft credit rollups. - **[Convert Opportunity Rollups into Payment Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_opp_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can easily convert Opportunity rollups into Payment rollups just by changing a few fields. - **[Batch Job Modes for Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Cusomizable Rollups are calculated by a series of batch jobs. These batch jobs run in one of three modes: Non-Skew Mode, Skew Mode, or Incremental Mode. - **[Customizable Rollups Recipes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Welcome to the Customizable Rollups Recipes cookbook! - **[Set Fiscal Year Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_set_fiscal_year_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP supports rollups and reports based on your organization's fiscal year, as long as you configure your fiscal year according to the instructions below. # Customizable Rollups Recipes Welcome to the Customizable Rollups Recipes cookbook! While NPSP provides numerous rollups out of the box, we know that there are many more ideas out there. This document reflects some of the recipes we've collected from you, the people actually using the product! Please know that this is just a small sampling and we are always looking for more ideas. So, if you cooked up a great Customizable Rollup in your org, and you want to share, please post to the [Community Contributors](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/topics/customizablerollups?sort=last_modified_date_desc) group using the topic #Customizable Rollups. We would love to hear from you. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note In these recipes, we use the out-of-box filter groups (unless otherwise noted). Feel free to follow along or use custom filter groups that meet your specific needs. Also note that these filter groups may or may not exclude record types (depending on how your org was set up before you enabled Customizable Rollups). If your org does exclude record types, some out-of-box filter group names will be followed by “excl RecTypes.” This doc provides high level steps for creating these Customizable Rollup recipes. If you need step-by-step instructions, see [Create Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups.") and [Create Filter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups."). Also, please keep in mind that all field names, descriptions and help text, Customizable Rollup descriptions, and filter group names and descriptions are just suggestions. Feel free to use the naming conventions and descriptions that work best for your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Customizable Rollups require you to create custom fields, so that your data has a place to roll up to. When creating these fields, we recommend that you make them read only for all users (including System Admins). For more information, see [Create Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups."). - **[Recipe: Last Gift Fund](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use General Accounting Funds, you may have a need to see the Last Gift Fund on an Account or Contact record. Using Customizable Rollups and Process Builder, you can make this work! - **[Recipe: Last Soft Credit Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When viewing a Contact, you can already see the value of the last soft credit that the Contact received. It's an out-of-box rollup provided in NPSP (called Contact: Last Soft Credit Amount). But, perhaps you want to also see the Opportunity on which the Contact was given that soft credit. With Customizable Rollups, you can provide this info and have it link directly to the Opportunity. - **[Recipe: Roll up Payment Details to the Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While you can see a summary of the Opportunity Amount info on a Recurring Donation, you may want a summary of the Payments as well. This is useful if a Contact pays more than the Opportunity amount on a given schedule OR if a Contact's Payment falls through and they haven't paid as much as they committed to. - **[Recipe: Combine Rollups and Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can easily combine the power of Customizable Rollups with Levels to automatically calculate Levels based on rollup fields. - **[Recipe: Total Current Year Payments on Prior Year Pledges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Perhaps you want to see the Payments made this year for pledges from the prior year. Or you want to see last year's Payments on pledges from the year before that. And it's important that these fields are dynamic, so that they don't reflect a specific, hard-coded year. - **[Recipe: Track Amount Donated for Matched Gifts Only](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Currently the Matching Gift related list shows the full amount of all donations, but not the actual matched amount (which can be different if the company only matched a portion of the gift). You can easily create a Customizable Rollup that shows the matched amount. - **[Recipe: First or Last Gift Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a first or last gift campaign rollup on a contact record that's missing contact information. - **[Recipe: Total Gifts Three Years Ago](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP provides out-of-box rollups for total giving this year, last year, and two years ago. But perhaps you want to look back farther, to get a bigger picture of your donors' engagement and donation patterns. You can easily clone existing rollups and update the Years Ago field to see more of a donor's giving history. - **[Recipe: Identifying Peer-to-Peer Fundraising Influencers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_recipes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you plan events that include peer-to-peer fundraising, you want to be able to easily identify constituents who influence others to give. That way you can recognize their contribution by sending a thank you email or posting a note on your event site. ## Recipe: Last Gift Fund If you use General Accounting Funds, you may have a need to see the Last Gift Fund on an Account or Contact record. Using Customizable Rollups and Process Builder, you can make this work! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member Dana Belcher for suggesting this recipe. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This recipe assumes you're using a single GAU Allocation on each Opportunity, but that may not be a reality for you. If you set up the recipe as follows and split your Opportunities to two or more GAU Allocations, NPSP will just pick one and display it on the Target record. 1. Create a custom field on the Account object. 1. **Data Type** \= Lookup Relationship 2. **Related to** \= General Accounting Unit 3. **Field Label** \= Last Gift Fund 4. **Description** \= Displays the General Accounting Unit that this Account's most recent gift was allocated to. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 5. **Help Text** \= Displays the General Accounting Unit that this Account's most recent gift was allocated to. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 2. Create a custom field on the Opportunity object. 1. **Data Type** \= Lookup Relationship 2. **Related to** \= General Accounting Unit 3. **Field Label** \= Related GAU 4. **Description** \= Displays the General Accounting Unit from the related Allocation. Populated via Process Builder, and used in a Customizable Rollup on Account to display the Account's most recent gift allocation. 5. **Help Text** \= Displays the General Accounting Unit from the related Allocation. Populated via Process Builder, and used in a Customizable Rollup on Account to display the Account's most recent gift allocation. 3. Use Process Builder, or another tool, to copy the General Accounting Unit from the Allocation to the Opportunity. Here is how we did it in Process Builder: 1. In **The process starts when** picklist, choose to start the process when A record changes. 2. **Object** \= GAU Allocation 3. **Start the Process** \= only when a record is created 4. **Criteria Name** \= Does it have an opportunity? 5. **Criteria for Executing Actions** \= No criteria—just execute the actions! 6. Add an Immediate Action. 1. **Action Type** \= Update records 2. **Action Name** \= Copy GAU 3. **Record Type** \= Select a record related to the `npsp__Allocation__c`, then select Opportunity 4. **Criteria for Executing Actions** \= No criteria—just execute the actions! 5. **Field** \= Related GAU 6. **Type** \= Field Reference 7. **Value** \= General Accounting Unit Record ID. In the field you'll see _\[npsp\_\_Allocation\_\_c\].npsp\_\_General\_Accounting\_Unit\_\_c.Id_ 7. Be sure to click **Activate**! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Opportunities that existed before the process was created won't be updated. You can update old Opportunities manually or by performing a mass update via a tool like the Salesforce Data Loader/Data Import Wizard, or an alternate third party tool. ![Process Builder screen showing the process created in this task](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_gift_fund_process.png) 4. Depending on what Opportunities you want to roll up, you may want to create a filter group. You could also use the out-of-box Allocations: Won filter group. 5. Create a Customizable Rollup with these values: 1. **Target Object** \= Account 2. **Target Field** \= Last Gift Fund 3. **Description** \= Displays the General Accounting Unit from the most recent Allocation for this Account. 4. **Operation** \= Last 5. **Time Frame** \= All Time 6. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity > Account (Hard Credit) 7. **Filter Group** \= Allocations: Won (or whichever filter group you want to use) 8. **Field to Roll Up** \= Opportunity: Related GAU 9. **Date Field** \= Opportunity: Close Date Your rollup should look similar to this: ![Last Gift Fund Customizable Rollup definition](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_gift_fund.png) Now if you look at an Account's record, you can see the Last Gift Fund field displaying the General Accounting Unit to which the Account's last gift (Opportunity) was allocated. ## Recipe: Last Soft Credit Opportunity When viewing a Contact, you can already see the value of the last soft credit that the Contact received. It's an out-of-box rollup provided in NPSP (called Contact: Last Soft Credit Amount). But, perhaps you want to also see the Opportunity on which the Contact was given that soft credit. With Customizable Rollups, you can provide this info and have it link directly to the Opportunity. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks for Beth Breisnes for suggesting this recipe! 1. Create a custom field on the Contact object. 1. **Data Type** \= Lookup Relationship 2. **Related To** \= Opportunity 3. **Field Label** \= Last Soft Credit Opportunity 4. **Description** \= A lookup to the last Opportunity on which the Contact received a soft credit. Populated automatically by a Customizable Rollup. 5. **Help Text** \=  A lookup to the last Opportunity on which the Contact received a soft credit. Populated automatically by a Customizable Rollup. 2. Create the Customizable Rollup. 1. **Target Object** \= Contact 2. **Target Field** \= Last Soft Credit Opportunity 3. **Description** \= A link to the most recent Opportunity for which the Contact received a soft credit. 4. **Operation** \= Last 5. **Time Frame** \= All Time 6. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity > Contact (Soft Credit) 7. **Filter Group** \= Opps: Won (SC) 8. **Field to Roll Up** \= Opportunity: Opportunity ID 9. **Date Field** \= Opportunity: Close Date ![Last Soft Credit Opportunity Customizable Rollup Definition](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_soft_cred_oppty.png) And if you look at a Contact's record, you can see the lookup to the most recent Opportunity from which the Contact received soft credit. Note that you'll have to manually calculate rollups to see results right away. ![A Contact record with the Last Soft Credit Opportunity field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_soft_cred_oppty_on_cont.png) ## Recipe: Roll up Payment Details to the Recurring Donation While you can see a summary of the Opportunity Amount info on a Recurring Donation, you may want a summary of the Payments as well. This is useful if a Contact pays more than the Opportunity amount on a given schedule OR if a Contact's Payment falls through and they haven't paid as much as they committed to. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member Sarah Qunito for suggesting this recipe! 1. Create a custom field on the Recurring Donations object: 1. **Data Type** \= Currency 2. **Field Label** \= Payments Summary (Just a suggestion. Feel free to name it anything you like!) 3. **Description** \= A summary of all Payments for a Recurring Donation. Populated automatically by a Customizable Rollup. 4. **Help Text** \= A summary of all Payments for a Recurring Donation. Populated automatically by a Customizable Rollup. 2. Create a Customizable Rollup with these values. 1. **Target Object** \= Recurring Donations 2. **Target Field** \= Payments Summary 3. **Operation** \= Sum 4. **Time Frame** \= All Time 5. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity > Recurring Donations 6. **Filter Group** \= Opps Won (Recurring Donations) or use your own! 7. **Amount Field** \= Opportunity: Payment Amount Received ![Payment Summary Customizable Rollup Definition](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rd_payments_summary.png) ## Recipe: Combine Rollups and Levels You can easily combine the power of Customizable Rollups with Levels to automatically calculate Levels based on rollup fields. Let's say you have three Levels (Bronze 500-1499, Silver 1500-2999, Gold 3000+) and you want to populate them based on donations made in the last 365 days. In our example, we'll use the out-of-box Total Gifts Last N Days Customizable Rollup, which is set to roll up the last 365 days worth of data by default. But, you could easily modify the Days Back field in the rollup based on your needs OR clone this rollup and enter a different number of Days Back. ![Total Gifts Last N Days rollup with the Days Back field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/gifts_and_levels_rllp.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member Jenny Smithson for suggesting this recipe! 1. Create your Levels. If you need more info, see [Create and Manage Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. Create and manage NPSP Levels based on your organization's practices."). 1. **Level Name** \= Bronze 2. **Minimum Amount** \= 500.00 3. **Target** \= Contact (or Account) 4. **Maximum Amount** \= 1499.00 5. **Source Field** \= Total Gifts Last N Days (this is where you link this Level to the Customizable Rollup!) 6. **Level Field** \= Level 7. **Previous Level Field** \= Previous Level 2. Create your other Level fields using the same values above but giving each one a unique Level Name and amount. Now, when the **Total Gifts Last N Days** field for a Contact includes a value that corresponds with one of your Levels, the **Level** field for that Contact will reflect the appropriate value. ![Contact record showing that the value in the Total Gifts Last N Days field sets the Level field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/level_on_contact.png) ## Recipe: Total Current Year Payments on Prior Year Pledges Perhaps you want to see the Payments made this year for pledges from the prior year. Or you want to see last year's Payments on pledges from the year before that. And it's important that these fields are dynamic, so that they don't reflect a specific, hard-coded year. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member Janine Rauscher for suggesting this recipe! 1. Create a custom field on the Account object: 1. **Data Type** \= Currency 2. **Field Label** \= This Year Payments on Past Year Pledges (Just a suggestion. Feel free to name it anything you like!) 3. **Description** \= Displays the total amount of Payments made in this calendar year for pledges (Opportunities) made in past calendar years. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 4. **Help Text** \= Displays the total amount of Payments made in this calendar year for pledges (Opportunities) made in past calendar years. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 2. Create a custom field on the Payment object: 1. **Data Type** \= Formula 2. **Field Label** \= Is Opportunity From Prior Year 3. **Formula Return Type** \= Checkbox 4. **Formula** \= YEAR( npe01\_\_Opportunity\_\_r.CloseDate ) < YEAR( npe01\_\_Payment\_Date\_\_c ) 5. **Description** \= Indicates that the Opportunity associated with this Payment is from a prior calendar year. This field is populated automatically. 6. **Help Text** \= Indicates that the Opportunity associated with this Payment is from a prior calendar year. This field is populated automatically. 3. Create a Customizable Rollup filter group. 1. **Name** \= Old Payments 2. **Description** \= Includes payments where the Opportunity Close Date year is older than the year of the Payment. 3. Add a filter rule for Paid Payments: 1. **Object** \= Payment 2. **Field** \= Paid 3. **Operator** \= Equals 4. **Value** \= True 4. Add a filter rule that indicates that the Opportunity's Close Date year is older than the year the Payment was Paid. 1. **Object** \= Payment 2. **Field** \= Is Opportunity From Prior Year (this is the field you created on the Payment object earlier) 3. **Operator** \= Equals 4. **Value** \= True ![Filter group created for old payments](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/old_pmts_filter_group.png) 4. Create the Customizable Rollup. 1. **Target Object** \= Account 2. **Target Field** \= This Year Payments on Past Year Pledges (or whatever you called the field you created in step 1) 3. **Operation** \= Sum 4. **Time Frame** \= Years Ago 5. **Years Ago** \= This Year 6. **Rollup Type** \= Payment > Account (Hard Credit) 7. **Filter Group** \= Old Payments (this is the new filter group you created) 8. **Date Field** \= Payment: Payment Date 9. **Amount Field** \= Payment: Payment Amount ![Customizable Rollup definition for this year's payments on last year's pledges](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/old_payments.png) Now, you can look at the Contact and see the list of Payments for the previous year's pledges (Opportunities). ![A Contact record with the This Year Payments on Past Year Pledges field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/payments_on_contact.png) And you can verify that number by viewing the Payments on the Opportunity. ![The Payments related list on a Contact record, with the Payments from this year highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/payments_list.png) You can easily implement this for last year's payments made on pledges from any prior year. Simply create another custom field on the Account, but give it a unique name. When creating the Customizable Rollup, set the **Years Ago** field = Last Year. ![Customizable Rollup Definition for last year's payments on a previous year's pledges](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_year_payments.png) ## Recipe: Track Amount Donated for Matched Gifts Only Currently the Matching Gift related list shows the full amount of all donations, but not the actual matched amount (which can be different if the company only matched a portion of the gift). You can easily create a Customizable Rollup that shows the matched amount. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to the community for suggesting this recipe. 1. Create a custom field on the Contact. 1. **Data Type** \= Currency 2. **Field Label** \= Total Matched Amount (or Matched Gift Amount) 3. **Description** \= Displays the total amount of matching gifts that have been received as a result of this Contact's donations. Populated automatically by a Customizable Rollup. 4. **Help Text** \= Displays the total amount of matching gifts that have been received as a result of this Contact's donations. Populated automatically by a Customizable Rollup. 2. Create a filter group that includes two filter rules. The first one should limit the Opportunities to those that are Closed/Won. 1. **Object** \= Opportunity 2. **Field** \= Won 3. **Operator** \= Equals 4. **Value** \= True 3. Add a second filter rule that limits the Opportunities to only those with the Matching Gift record type. 1. **Object** \= Opportunity 2. **Field** \= Record Type ID 3. **Operator** \= In List 4. **Value** \= Matching Gift 4. Create a Customizable Rollup that sums up the Amount of matched gifts for this Contact. 1. **Target Object** \= Contact 2. **Target Field** \= Total Matched Amount 3. **Operation** \= Sum 4. **Time Frame** \= All Time 5. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity > Contact (Soft Credit) 6. **Filter Group** \= Matching Gifts (should be the filter group you created earlier) 7. **Amount Field** \= Contact Soft Credit: Amount ![Total Matched Amount Customizable Rollup definition](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total_matched_amount.png) Now, look at the Contact to see the total matched amount. Note that you'll have to manually calculate rollups to see results right away. ![A Contact record showing rollup fields, with the Total Matched Amount field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total_matched_amount_contact.png) And you can verify that the amount is correct by viewing the Contact's list of Opportunities and adding up those with the Matching Gift record type. ![A Contact's Opportunities related list, with the Matching Gift opportunities highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total_matched_amount_opps.png) ## Recipe: First or Last Gift Campaign Create a first or last gift campaign rollup on a contact record that's missing contact information. Suppose you have Contacts in your system that don't have email or mailing addresses. Why are they in your system if you can't contact them? This sounds like a use case that requires some investigation. You could run a report of Contacts where Email = blank and Mailing Address fields = blank, then start examining their related Opportunities looking for a pattern. This is a practical but time-consuming solution. Or, you could save yourself some time and create a Last Gift Campaign rollup on the Contact. When you add that field to your report, you can instantly see if there is a pattern based on Campaigns. For example, you might find that the Contacts were mostly credit card donors at the door of a tasting event where you didn't collect any personal info. But, the swiping process required the auto-creation of a Contact and an Opportunity with the Campaign field auto-set. These folks were just passing through town, bought a tasting ticket, and that's the first and last you'll hear from them. Since the Last Gift Campaign field is filled in with the same Campaign for most records on the report, you can easily group them together. Mystery solved! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member John Fine for suggesting this recipe and writing this extremely helpful use case! 1. Create a custom field for First Gift Campaign on Contact (or Account). Note that you could create a similar field for Last Gift Campaign. 1. **Data Type** \= Lookup Relationship 2. **Related to** \= Campaign 3. **Field Label** \= Last Gift Campaign 4. **Help Text** \= Displays the Campaign that brought in the Contact's most recent donation. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 5. **Description** \= Displays the Campaign that brought in the Contact's most recent donation. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 2. Create a Customizable Rollup with these values: 1. **Target Object** \= Contact (or Account if you want to roll up to Accounts instead) 2. **Target Field** \= Last Gift Campaign 3. **Description** \= A lookup on the Contact record to Campaign that brought in the Contact's most recent donation, as determined by the Opportunity Close Date field. 4. **Operation** \= Last 5. **Time Frame** \= All Time 6. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity > Contact (Hard Credit) 7. **Filter Group** \= Opps: Won (HC) 8. **Field to Roll Up** \= Opportunity: Campaign ID 9. Date**Field** \= Opportunity: Close Date ![Customizable Rollup definition for Last Gift Campaign rollup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_gift_campaign_crlp.png) After rollups are recalculated, you can see the updated Last Gift Campaign field on a Contact record. ![Contact record with the Last Gift Campaign rollup field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/last_gift_campaign_cont.png) You could also add it to the report you're using to track donors without contact information. You can easily create another rollup for First Gift Campaign by creating a custom field called First Gift Campaign, cloning the Last Gift Campaign rollup, and changing a few key fields: - **Target Field** \= First Gift Campaign - **Description** \= A lookup on the Contact record to Campaign that brought in the Contact's first donation, as determined by the Opportunity Close Date field. - **Operation** \= First ![Customizable Rollup definition for First Gift Campaign rollup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/first_gift_campaign_crlp.png) ## Recipe: Total Gifts Three Years Ago NPSP provides out-of-box rollups for total giving this year, last year, and two years ago. But perhaps you want to look back farther, to get a bigger picture of your donors' engagement and donation patterns. You can easily clone existing rollups and update the Years Ago field to see more of a donor's giving history. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Cori O'Brien for suggesting this recipe! 1. Create a custom field on the Contact object. 1. **Data Type** \= Currency 2. **Field Label** \= Total Gifts Three Years Ago 3. **Help Text** \= Displays the total amount of gifts three calendar years ago for which the Contact was listed as the Opportunity Primary Contact. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 4. **Description** \= Displays the total amount of gifts three calendar years ago for which the Contact was listed as the Opportunity Primary Contact. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 5. **Default** = 0 ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend setting the Default Value so that this field isn't blank if a Contact didn't donate three years ago. 2. Either clone the Total Gifts Two Years Ago Customizable Rollup or create a new one with these values. If you're cloning, be sure to update the Target Field and Years Ago fields! 1. **Target Object** \= Contact 2. **Target Field** \= Total Gifts Three Years Ago 3. **Description** \= The total of all gifts three calendar years ago where the Contact is the Opportunity Primary Contact 4. **Operation** \= Sum 5. **Time Frame** \= Years Ago 6. **Years Ago** \= 3 Years Ago 7. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity > Contact (Hard Credit) 8. **Filter Group** \= Opps: Won (HC) 9. **Date Field** \= Opportunity: Close Date 10. **Amount Field** \= Opportunity: Amount ![Customizable Rollup definition for Total Gifts 3 Years Ago rollup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total_gifts_3_yrs_ago.png) As you can see, you can easily create Customizable Rollups for 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 years ago (or whatever year you need to see), simply by creating a new custom field and then cloning an existing rollup and changing a couple of fields. So, now that you have giving information by year, suppose you want to see the total amount a Contact has given over the past four years (this year + last year + 2 years ago + 3 years ago). You can easily sum up this information using a formula field. 1. Create a custom field on the Contact object. 1. **Data Type** \= Formula 2. **Field Label** \= Total Gifts Last Four Years 3. **Formula Return Type** \= Currency 4. **Formula** \= npo02\_\_OppAmountThisYear\_\_c + npo02\_\_OppAmountLastYear\_\_c + npo02\_\_OppAmount2YearsAgo\_\_c + Total\_Gifts\_Three\_Years\_Ago\_\_c 5. **Description** \= Displays the total amount of gifts in the past four years for which the Contact was listed as the Opportunity Primary Contact. Populated automatically using a formula. 6. **Help Text** \= Displays the total amount of gifts in the past four years for which the Contact was listed as the Opportunity Primary Contact. This field is populated automatically. 2. Be sure to add it to the Contact page layout, then check it out on the Contact record. ![Contact record with the Total Gifts Last Four Years rollup field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total_gifts_last_4_yrs.png) ## Recipe: Identifying Peer-to-Peer Fundraising Influencers If you plan events that include peer-to-peer fundraising, you want to be able to easily identify constituents who influence others to give. That way you can recognize their contribution by sending a thank you email or posting a note on your event site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to community member Ginny Foran for suggesting this recipe! This recipe follows along with Aria Bennett, who is running in the 2018 Race for Literacy. She has been publicizing her participation in the race to raise money, and thus far has received a number of donations from friends and coworkers. In Salesforce, the Event Coordinators use Campaigns to track the event as a whole, as well as each individual fundraiser or team captain. The following setup is required: 1. Add a new value, _Fundraiser_, to the Campaign Type field (on the Campaigns object). 2. Add two new Opportunity Contact Roles: _Fundraiser_, _Team Captain_. 3. Add a custom field on the Contact object. 1. **Data Type** \= Currency 2. **Field label** \= Total Influenced Gifts 3. **Description** \= Displays the total amount of gifts that this Contact has influenced. Includes all Opportunities where the Contact received a soft credit with the role of Fundraiser or Team Captain. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 4. **Help Text** \= Displays the total amount of gifts that this Contact has influenced. Includes all Opportunities where the Contact received a soft credit with the role of Fundraiser or Team Captain. Populated automatically via a Customizable Rollup. 4. Create a Campaign for the 2018 Race for Literacy. 5. Create a Campaign for Aria Bennett 2018 Race for Literacy. Make the 2018 Race for Literacy its Parent Campaign. 6. Create the Opportunities for the people supporting Aria with donations. On each donation, make sure: 1. **Primary Campaign Source** \= Aria Bennett 2018 Race for Literacy 2. Add Aria Bennett as a Contact Role with the **Role** \= Fundraiser 7. Create a Customizable Rollup filter group that only shows Opportunities with the appropriate Contact Roles (Fundraiser, Team Captain). 1. **Name** \= Peer to Peer Opps (or whatever you want to call it) 8. Add a filter rule that includes the Fundraiser and Team Captain Contact Roles. Note: _If you only want to see Won Opportunities, add a second filter rule_. 1. **Object** \= Contact Soft Credit 2. **Field** \= Role Name 3. **Operator** \= In List 4. **Values** \= Fundraiser, Team Captain 9. Create a Customizable Rollup with these values. 1. **Target Object** \= Contact 2. **Target Field** \= Influencer 3. **Operation** \= Sum 4. **Time Frame** \= All Time 5. **Rollup Type** \= Opportunity → Contact (Soft Credit) 6. **Filter Group** \= Peer to Peer Opps (the filter group you created in the previous step) 7. **Amount field** \= Soft Credit: Amount ![Customizable Rollup definition for the Influencer rollup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/p2p_customizable_rollup.png) If you look at Aria Bennett's Contact record, you'll see the Influencer field. Reminder: To see the updated field on the record right away, you'll need to manually recalculate rollups. ![Contact record with the Influencer rollup field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/p2p_influencer_on_contact.png) And you can verify the amount that Aria has influenced by looking at and adding up the Opportunities on her fundraising Campaign. ![The list of Opportunities in the fundraising Campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/p2p_opps_on_campaign.png) Aria's off to a great start and will definitely make a big impact on the Run for Literacy! # Customize Administrative and Household Account Names Learn about, manage, and update Account names in EDA. - **[Overview: Account Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA automatically generates Administrative Account and Household Account names for you based on the names of Contacts associated with an Account. For example, when you create the Mary Jefferson Contact record, EDA creates the Jefferson Administrative Account or the Jefferson Household for you at the same time (depending on the record type you've specified for Accounts). - **[Customize the Administrative Account Name Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatic Account naming is enabled by default for Administrative Accounts and can't be disabled. Administrative Account names are automatically updated whenever the Contact's last name changes. - **[Customize the Household Account Name Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You have many options for changing the Household Account Name Format from the default option of {!Last Name} Household. - **[Turn On Automatic Household Renaming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're using the Household Account model, Household Accounts are named automatically when you create a Contact who isn't already associated with a household. Specify the naming convention to use in Automatically Rename Household Accounts from Account Model in EDA Settings. - **[Update All Administrative or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM trigger is enabled. - **[Guidelines for Custom Name Formats](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Other for an Account name format, follow these guidelines to construct a valid format. ## Overview: Account Naming EDA automatically generates Administrative Account and Household Account names for you based on the names of Contacts associated with an Account. For example, when you create the Mary Jefferson Contact record, EDA creates the Jefferson Administrative Account or the Jefferson Household for you at the same time (depending on the record type you've specified for Accounts). By default, Administrative Account and Household Account names are based on a Contact's last name. For each type of Account, you can choose a different preset naming format or choose the Other option and create your own custom format. For example: - Instead of Jefferson Administrative Account, show Mary Jefferson Administrative Account. - Instead of Jefferson Household, show Mary Jefferson Family. See [Configure Leads Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm) for special considerations that impact the naming of Accounts that are created when you convert a Lead to a Contact. The rest of this article describes how to customize automatic Account naming. ## Customize the Administrative Account Name Format Automatic Account naming is enabled by default for Administrative Accounts and can't be disabled. Administrative Account names are automatically updated whenever the Contact's last name changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Administrative Accounts typically have only one related Contact. If an Administrative Account happens to have more than one Contact, automatic naming uses the name of the primary Contact. If you want to change the Administrative Account Name Format from the default option of {!Last Name} Administrative Account, feel free to do so. 1. On the Education Cloud Settings tab, in Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. If you don’t see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher or see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. From Administrative Account Name Format, select a format. - **{!Last Name} Administrative Account**—Generates a name such as Smith Administrative Account. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!Last Name} Administrative Account**—Generates a name such as John Smith Administrative Account. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Administrative Account**—Generates a name such as Smith (John) Administrative Account. - **Other**—Specify your own naming convention. 5. Save your changes. Changing the default name format affects the naming of new Administrative Accounts and Accounts for Contacts whose last name changes. It doesn't update the format of existing, unchanged Administrative Account names. For instructions on how to update all Administrative Account names to use the format you specify, see [Update All Administrative or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM trigger is enabled."). ## Customize the Household Account Name Format You have many options for changing the Household Account Name Format from the default option of {!Last Name} Household. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model** and then click **Edit**. 2. From Household Account Name Format, select a format. - **{!LastName} Household**—Generates a name such as Smith Household or Jones and Smith Household, depending on the number of Contacts in the Household. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Household**—Generates a name such as John Smith Household or Jane and John Smith Household. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Household**—Generates a name such as Smith (John) Household, Smith (Jane and John) Household, or Doe (Jane) and Smith (John) and Household. - **{!LastName} Family**—Generates a name such as Smith Family or Jones and Smith Family. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Family**—Generates a name such as John Smith Family or Jane and John Smith Family. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Family**—Generates a name such as Smith (John) Family, Smith (Jane and John) Family, or Doe (Jane) Family and Smith (John). - **Other**—Specify your own naming convention. 3. Save your changes. Changing the default name format affects the naming format of new Household Accounts and Accounts whose last name changes. It doesn't update the format of existing Household Account names. For example, if you change from {!LastName} Household to {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Household, an existing Account named Jefferson Household is not updated to Mary Jefferson Household. However, if Mary’s last name changes to Jefferson-Soto, the Account naming format becomes Mary Jefferson-Soto Household. For instructions on how to update all Household Account names to use the format you specify, see [Update All Administrative or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM trigger is enabled."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Customizations such as specifying the number of Contacts listed or the order of their names aren't supported. ## Turn On Automatic Household Renaming When you're using the Household Account model, Household Accounts are named automatically when you create a Contact who isn't already associated with a household. Specify the naming convention to use in Automatically Rename Household Accounts from Account Model in EDA Settings. - Turn on Automatically Rename Household Accounts to rename a Household Account whenever a new Contact is added to the Household or an existing Contact is renamed, deleted, or moved to another household. - Turn off Automatically Rename Household Accounts to prevent Household Accounts from being renamed when a Contact in a household changes names or membership. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you turn off Automatically Rename Household Accounts but then run Update All Household Accounts, the setting is automatically enabled after the page refreshes. ## Update All Administrative or Household Account Names If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM trigger is enabled. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important If you have any automated processes that reference Administrative or Household Accounts (for example, workflow rules), disable them before you run either of the Update All Account Names jobs. After the job completes, restore your automation. - Update All Administrative Account Names—Update Administrative Account names using the only Contact associated with the Account. For example, in an Account where John Smith is the primary Contact, changing the Administrative Account Name Format from {!Last Name} to {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} and clicking Refresh All updates the Account name from Smith Administrative Account to John Smith Administrative Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Administrative Account renaming works only when an Account's Primary Contact is related to the Administrative Account. If the Primary Contact is not related to the Account, the Account isn't renamed. - Update All Household Account Names—Update Household Account names using _all_ Contacts associated with a Household Account. This feature enables Automatically Rename Household Accounts even if it was previously disabled. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your Household Accounts have multiple associated Contacts, avoid formats that include first names unless you want all Contacts' names in your Account names. For example, in the Smith Household, which has two adults and three children, changing from {!Last Name} to {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName}, creates an Account named Jane, Jackie, John, Joseph, and Samuel Smith Household. ## Guidelines for Custom Name Formats If you use Other for an Account name format, follow these guidelines to construct a valid format. ### Construct Custom Name Formats If you've specified Other for an Account name format, follow these guidelines to construct a valid format. - If including a Contact field, use {!fieldname}, where fieldname is the full developer name of a field on a Contact record. The field name must be of type Lookup, Text, TextArea, or Picklist. - Make sure that your Contact records have values specified for people's names. For example, a blank FirstName field for a Contact can result in a malformed Account name. - If using {!FirstName}, surround the field with an additional {! }. For example: {!Salutation} {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} This syntax specifies which fields to use from Contacts that have the same LastName. ### Include Fields in Custom Name Formats You can include any standard Contact field (except MiddleName) in the custom name (Other) format for both Administrative and Household Accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note To enable MiddleName and Suffix, go to **Setup** | **User Interface** and in Name Settings enable each setting for Person Names. Format the field as {!fieldname}. For example: Format the field as {!fieldname}. For example: {!LastName}, {!{!FirstName}} Field names are case insensitive. EDA supports these custom fields: Mailing\_County\_\_c, Other\_County\_\_c, Deceased\_\_c, and Exclude\_from\_Household\_Name\_\_c. ### Specify Account Name Formats in Custom Settings If you specify a custom naming format using the Other option, we recommend that you specify the format using the naming settings in EDA Settings. Although not recommended, you can alternatively specify it from Setup, in Custom Settings, using a combination of fields. If you do use Custom Settings, use extra caution when entering values in these fields. Make sure to enter Other in the Naming Format field and also enter the custom name format in the Other Name Setting field. For example, you must enter Other in Admin Account Naming Format and a value such as {!LastName} Admin in Admin Other Name Setting. If you specify it incorrectly, for example, you enter {!LastName} Admin in Admin Account Naming Format, and leave the Admin Other Name Setting blank, Administrative Account names sometimes display improperly when you view these fields in EDA Settings. - Admin Account Naming Format and Admin Other Name Setting - Household Account Naming Format and Household Other Name Setting # Customize Administrative and Household Account Names Learn about, manage, and update Account names in EDA. - **[Overview: Account Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA automatically generates Administrative Account and Household Account names for you based on the names of Contacts associated with an Account. For example, when you create the Mary Jefferson Contact record, EDA creates the Jefferson Administrative Account or the Jefferson Household for you at the same time (depending on the record type you've specified for Accounts). - **[Customize the Administrative Account Name Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatic Account naming is enabled by default for Administrative Accounts and can't be disabled. Administrative Account names are automatically updated whenever the Contact's last name changes. - **[Customize the Household Account Name Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You have many options for changing the Household Account Name Format from the default option of {!Last Name} Household. - **[Turn On Automatic Household Renaming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're using the Household Account model, Household Accounts are named automatically when you create a Contact who isn't already associated with a household. Specify the naming convention to use in Automatically Rename Household Accounts from Account Model in EDA Settings. - **[Update All Administrative or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM trigger is enabled. - **[Guidelines for Custom Name Formats](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Other for an Account name format, follow these guidelines to construct a valid format. ## Overview: Account Naming EDA automatically generates Administrative Account and Household Account names for you based on the names of Contacts associated with an Account. For example, when you create the Mary Jefferson Contact record, EDA creates the Jefferson Administrative Account or the Jefferson Household for you at the same time (depending on the record type you've specified for Accounts). By default, Administrative Account and Household Account names are based on a Contact's last name. For each type of Account, you can choose a different preset naming format or choose the Other option and create your own custom format. For example: - Instead of Jefferson Administrative Account, show Mary Jefferson Administrative Account. - Instead of Jefferson Household, show Mary Jefferson Family. See [Configure Leads Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm) for special considerations that impact the naming of Accounts that are created when you convert a Lead to a Contact. The rest of this article describes how to customize automatic Account naming. ## Customize the Administrative Account Name Format Automatic Account naming is enabled by default for Administrative Accounts and can't be disabled. Administrative Account names are automatically updated whenever the Contact's last name changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Administrative Accounts typically have only one related Contact. If an Administrative Account happens to have more than one Contact, automatic naming uses the name of the primary Contact. If you want to change the Administrative Account Name Format from the default option of {!Last Name} Administrative Account, feel free to do so. 1. On the Education Cloud Settings tab, in Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. If you don’t see the Education Cloud Settings tab, access it from App Launcher or see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). 2. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. From Administrative Account Name Format, select a format. - **{!Last Name} Administrative Account**—Generates a name such as Smith Administrative Account. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!Last Name} Administrative Account**—Generates a name such as John Smith Administrative Account. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Administrative Account**—Generates a name such as Smith (John) Administrative Account. - **Other**—Specify your own naming convention. 5. Save your changes. Changing the default name format affects the naming of new Administrative Accounts and Accounts for Contacts whose last name changes. It doesn't update the format of existing, unchanged Administrative Account names. For instructions on how to update all Administrative Account names to use the format you specify, see [Update All Administrative or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM trigger is enabled."). ## Customize the Household Account Name Format You have many options for changing the Household Account Name Format from the default option of {!Last Name} Household. 1. In EDA Settings, select **Account Model** and then click **Edit**. 2. From Household Account Name Format, select a format. - **{!LastName} Household**—Generates a name such as Smith Household or Jones and Smith Household, depending on the number of Contacts in the Household. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Household**—Generates a name such as John Smith Household or Jane and John Smith Household. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Household**—Generates a name such as Smith (John) Household, Smith (Jane and John) Household, or Doe (Jane) and Smith (John) and Household. - **{!LastName} Family**—Generates a name such as Smith Family or Jones and Smith Family. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Family**—Generates a name such as John Smith Family or Jane and John Smith Family. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Family**—Generates a name such as Smith (John) Family, Smith (Jane and John) Family, or Doe (Jane) Family and Smith (John). - **Other**—Specify your own naming convention. 3. Save your changes. Changing the default name format affects the naming format of new Household Accounts and Accounts whose last name changes. It doesn't update the format of existing Household Account names. For example, if you change from {!LastName} Household to {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Household, an existing Account named Jefferson Household is not updated to Mary Jefferson Household. However, if Mary’s last name changes to Jefferson-Soto, the Account naming format becomes Mary Jefferson-Soto Household. For instructions on how to update all Household Account names to use the format you specify, see [Update All Administrative or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM trigger is enabled."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Customizations such as specifying the number of Contacts listed or the order of their names aren't supported. ## Turn On Automatic Household Renaming When you're using the Household Account model, Household Accounts are named automatically when you create a Contact who isn't already associated with a household. Specify the naming convention to use in Automatically Rename Household Accounts from Account Model in EDA Settings. - Turn on Automatically Rename Household Accounts to rename a Household Account whenever a new Contact is added to the Household or an existing Contact is renamed, deleted, or moved to another household. - Turn off Automatically Rename Household Accounts to prevent Household Accounts from being renamed when a Contact in a household changes names or membership. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you turn off Automatically Rename Household Accounts but then run Update All Household Accounts, the setting is automatically enabled after the page refreshes. ## Update All Administrative or Household Account Names If you update the format used for Administrative or Household Account names and you want all existing Administrative or Household Account records to use the new format, run the Update Administrative Account Names or Update Household Account Names Apex job from System Tools in EDA Settings. These settings work only if the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM trigger is enabled. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important If you have any automated processes that reference Administrative or Household Accounts (for example, workflow rules), disable them before you run either of the Update All Account Names jobs. After the job completes, restore your automation. - Update All Administrative Account Names—Update Administrative Account names using the only Contact associated with the Account. For example, in an Account where John Smith is the primary Contact, changing the Administrative Account Name Format from {!Last Name} to {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} and clicking Refresh All updates the Account name from Smith Administrative Account to John Smith Administrative Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Administrative Account renaming works only when an Account's Primary Contact is related to the Administrative Account. If the Primary Contact is not related to the Account, the Account isn't renamed. - Update All Household Account Names—Update Household Account names using _all_ Contacts associated with a Household Account. This feature enables Automatically Rename Household Accounts even if it was previously disabled. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your Household Accounts have multiple associated Contacts, avoid formats that include first names unless you want all Contacts' names in your Account names. For example, in the Smith Household, which has two adults and three children, changing from {!Last Name} to {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName}, creates an Account named Jane, Jackie, John, Joseph, and Samuel Smith Household. ## Guidelines for Custom Name Formats If you use Other for an Account name format, follow these guidelines to construct a valid format. ### Construct Custom Name Formats If you've specified Other for an Account name format, follow these guidelines to construct a valid format. - If including a Contact field, use {!fieldname}, where fieldname is the full developer name of a field on a Contact record. The field name must be of type Lookup, Text, TextArea, or Picklist. - Make sure that your Contact records have values specified for people's names. For example, a blank FirstName field for a Contact can result in a malformed Account name. - If using {!FirstName}, surround the field with an additional {! }. For example: {!Salutation} {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} This syntax specifies which fields to use from Contacts that have the same LastName. ### Include Fields in Custom Name Formats You can include any standard Contact field (except MiddleName) in the custom name (Other) format for both Administrative and Household Accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note To enable MiddleName and Suffix, go to **Setup** | **User Interface** and in Name Settings enable each setting for Person Names. Format the field as {!fieldname}. For example: Format the field as {!fieldname}. For example: {!LastName}, {!{!FirstName}} Field names are case insensitive. EDA supports these custom fields: Mailing\_County\_\_c, Other\_County\_\_c, Deceased\_\_c, and Exclude\_from\_Household\_Name\_\_c. ### Specify Account Name Formats in Custom Settings If you specify a custom naming format using the Other option, we recommend that you specify the format using the naming settings in EDA Settings. Although not recommended, you can alternatively specify it from Setup, in Custom Settings, using a combination of fields. If you do use Custom Settings, use extra caution when entering values in these fields. Make sure to enter Other in the Naming Format field and also enter the custom name format in the Other Name Setting field. For example, you must enter Other in Admin Account Naming Format and a value such as {!LastName} Admin in Admin Other Name Setting. If you specify it incorrectly, for example, you enter {!LastName} Admin in Admin Account Naming Format, and leave the Admin Other Name Setting blank, Administrative Account names sometimes display improperly when you view these fields in EDA Settings. - Admin Account Naming Format and Admin Other Name Setting - Household Account Naming Format and Household Other Name Setting # Customize Advanced Mapping Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Sarah Amin, TJ Warfield, and Ryan Berens for helping to improve this article. - **[When to Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most organizations can use the pre-configured Advanced Mapping settings without additional customization. Customize Advanced Mapping if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped. - **[High-Level Steps to Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To customize Advanced Mapping, create the necessary objects and fields and connect them using Field Mappings. Follow along with this example scenario to see how a typical nonprofit customizes Advanced Mapping. - **[Confirm the Target Object and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The first step in customizing Advanced Mapping is to make sure you have a place for your custom data to land. - **[Create Staging Fields on the NPSP Data Import Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To import data, create a matching field on the NPSP Data Import object for any field you created on another object. - **[Connect Staging and Target Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Molly is ready for the final step—connecting the Favorite Literary Genre field on Contact with the two Favorite Literary Genre fields on the NPSP Data Import object. - **[Edit or Delete a Custom Object Group](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Object Groups are collections of field mappings that tell the NPSP Data Import tool what types of records to create or update. Edit or delete custom object groups in NPSP Settings. - **[Edit or Delete a Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Field Mappings relate fields on the NPSP Data Import object to fields on the target object for data import. Edit or delete Field Mappings in NPSP Settings. - **[Objects Available for Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the list of objects and fields already included in Advanced Mapping. ## When to Customize Advanced Mapping Most organizations can use the pre-configured Advanced Mapping settings without additional customization. Customize Advanced Mapping if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped. Most organizations can use the pre-configured Advanced Mapping settings without additional customization. Customize Advanced Mapping if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn’t yet been mapped. For example, maybe you want to track your constituents’ favorite literary genre for a monthly book club and capture that information on their Contact records. Or you want to include a custom field for Preferred Thank You Gift on your Gift Entry form. In these situations, customize Advanced Mapping to include your custom fields in the import or data entry process. Brand-new to Advanced Mapping? Here are some handy resources: - [Understand Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_understand_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article explains Field Mappings, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data") - [Understand Object Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_understand_object_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article explains Object Groups, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data.") - [Extend NPSP Data Importer with Advanced Mapping](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/extend-npsp-data-importer-with-advanced-mapping) Trailhead module ## High-Level Steps to Customize Advanced Mapping To customize Advanced Mapping, create the necessary objects and fields and connect them using Field Mappings. Follow along with this example scenario to see how a typical nonprofit customizes Advanced Mapping. Here are the high-level steps to customize Advanced Mapping: 1. **Confirm the target object and fields**. Is the data going into a custom field or object? If these objects or fields haven't yet been created, complete this step. 2. **Create staging fields on the NPSP Data Import object** that correspond to fields on the target object. For example, if you’re importing data into a custom field on Opportunity called "Thank You Gift", you’ll need a "Thank You Gift" field on NPSP Data Import. 3. **Connect a new object in Advanced Mapping (applies only in certain circumstances.)** This step applies only if you have a new custom object. See [Connect a New Object in Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_connect_new_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping comes with Contacts, Accounts, Opportunities, and other objects already mapped. You can connect additional objects that are directly related to Contacts, Accounts, or Opportunities.") for more information. 4. **Connect staging and target fields** with Field Mappings. To see how customizing Advanced Mapping works in a typical nonprofit, let’s walk through the steps with Molly, a Salesforce admin at Read Now. Read Now is a grassroots organization dedicated to promoting adult literacy. Read Now keeps track of their donors' favorite literary genres to use in marketing campaigns. Along with basic contact information, they include a question about favorite literary genre on their online donor profile forms. The donor profile form collects information about the primary Contact in a Household, as well as optional secondary Contact information. Molly plans to include the Favorite Literary Genre field for both the primary and secondary household members. Let’s follow along with Molly as she sets up Advanced Mapping to include this custom information. ## Confirm the Target Object and Fields The first step in customizing Advanced Mapping is to make sure you have a place for your custom data to land. The first step in customizing Advanced Mapping is to make sure you have a place for your data to land. Is the data going into a custom object? Into custom fields? Do those objects or fields exist? If not, you need to create them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on creating custom objects and fields, see Trailhead modules [Custom Objects: Quick Look](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/create-a-custom-object-quick-look) and [Custom Fields: Quick Look](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/custom-fields-quick-look). To store Read Now's custom donor information, Molly creates a picklist field on Contact named **Favorite Literary Genre**. Now she's ready to create corresponding staging fields on the NPSP Data Import object. ## Create Staging Fields on the NPSP Data Import Object To import data, create a matching field on the NPSP Data Import object for any field you created on another object. ### Create Fields on NPSP Data Import Since Molly created a picklist field on Contact, she creates a matching field of the same data type on the NPSP Data Import object. She makes sure both fields have the same picklist values, and the same field-level security. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can reduce the maintenance of keeping picklists in sync across objects by using Global Picklist Values. See [Create a Global Picklist Value Set](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.fields_creating_global_picklists.htm&type=5) for more information. The NPSP Data Import object contains fields that correspond to many different objects (Account, Contact, Opportunity, and more). To easily distinguish which object a field is mapped to, the Advanced Mapping field naming convention begins with the Object Group name. Molly follows the naming convention and names the new field **Contact1 Favorite Literary Genre**. The Contact1 Object Group represents the primary Contact in a Household. To include the secondary Contact in a Household on the same donor profile form, Molly creates another picklist field with the same picklist values and field-level security, and names it **Contact2 Favorite Literary Genre**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note For more information on Object Groups, see [Understand Object Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_understand_object_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article explains Object Groups, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data."). In [Connect Staging and Target Fields with Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."), you'll see how to connect these two fields to the Favorite Literary Genre field on Contact. ### Special Field Considerations When your target field is a Master/Detail or checkbox field, there are special considerations for creating the corresponding staging field on the NPSP Data Import object. For a target Master/Detail field, create the corresponding staging field on NPSP Data Import as either a lookup or an 18 character text field to hold the Salesforce ID. For a target checkbox field, create a picklist field on NPSP Data Import. Add the values of True and False to the picklist. True corresponds to a checked state, False corresponds to not checked. ## Connect Staging and Target Fields Molly is ready for the final step—connecting the Favorite Literary Genre field on Contact with the two Favorite Literary Genre fields on the NPSP Data Import object. This step requires creating two Field Mapping records. Let's follow along: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping**. 3. Click **Configure Advanced Mapping**. 4. In the Contact1 row, click ![Show actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then select **View Field Mappings**. 5. Click **Create New Field Mapping**. 6. In the new Field Mapping dialog, select **Contact1 Favorite Literary Genre (Contact1\_Favorite\_Literary\_Genre\_\_c)** as the Source. 7. Select **Favorite Literary Genre (Favorite\_Literary\_Genre\_\_c)** as the Target. 8. Save your work. Molly has created her first Field Mapping record, which connects the NPSP Data Import field Contact1 Favorite Literary Genre with the Favorite Literary Genre field on the Contact object. Now, Molly repeats the steps to connect Contact2 Favorite Literary Genre to Favorite Literary Genre on Contact. This mapping connects the information for the secondary Contact in the Household. This time, she chooses View Field Mappings from the Contact2 row, and selects Contact2 Favorite Literary Genre as the source. She connects it to the same target field on Contact, Favorite Literary Genre. And voila! Molly completed the steps to map her custom field. Now she can include it on Read Now’s donor profile form for both the primary and secondary Household members. ## Edit or Delete a Custom Object Group Object Groups are collections of field mappings that tell the NPSP Data Import tool what types of records to create or update. Edit or delete custom object groups in NPSP Settings. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping**. 3. Click **Configure Advanced Mapping**. 4. In the row for the custom Object Group to edit, click ![Show actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and select **Edit**. To delete a custom Object Group, click ![Show actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and select **Delete**. 5. Make your changes, then save your work. ## Edit or Delete a Field Mapping Field Mappings relate fields on the NPSP Data Import object to fields on the target object for data import. Edit or delete Field Mappings in NPSP Settings. To edit or delete a Field Mapping for a standard or custom Object Group: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping**. 3. Click **Configure Advanced Mapping**. 4. In the row for the Object Group with Field Mappings to edit or delete, click ![Show actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and select **View Field Mappings**. 5. In the row for the Field Mapping to edit, click ![Show actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and select **Edit**. To delete a Field Mapping, click ![Show actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and select **Delete**. 6. Make your changes, then save your work. ## Objects Available for Advanced Mapping View the list of objects and fields already included in Advanced Mapping. For a list of Object and Fields already included in Advanced Mapping see [Standard NPSP Data Import Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article includes reference information about the fields in the NPSP Data Import object, the mapping to target NPSP objects, and information about columns in the NPSP Data Importer Templates."). These are the Salesforce objects available for Advanced Mapping. Is there another object you'd like to map? Please [add an Idea on the IdeaExchange](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/ideasearch) to request it. # Customize Assessments Customize assessment scores and create multiple assessment types. - **[Customize Assessment Scores](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize assessment scores by adding custom fields on the Contact, Listening Comprehension, and Vocabulary Assessment Score objects and showing them on an Assessments tab on Contact records. - **[Create Multiple Assessment Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Assessment types for Programs that have different scoring systems. ## Customize Assessment Scores Customize assessment scores by adding custom fields on the Contact, Listening Comprehension, and Vocabulary Assessment Score objects and showing them on an Assessments tab on Contact records. An Assessment Chart can display up to eight separate Assessment Scores. Since each organization works with Assessments in different ways, we made Assessment Score fields flexible. You can continue using the scoring systems you already have in place—whether your score is on a scale of 1-10, or 1-100. As long as Assessment Scores use numeric values, Case Management can store and render them on the Assessment Chart. Out-of-the-box, Case Management has a single default score field called Total Score. You may want to create custom fields for Assessment Scores to display on an Assessment Chart. For example, let's say you have an ESL Program that includes an English Proficiency Assessment with three scores: Reading Comprehension, Listening Comprehension, and Vocabulary. First, add the custom fields on the Contact object: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Assessment**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **New** to create a new custom field. 6. Select **Number**. Assessments fields must use the Number field type. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Enter the following values: 1. Field Label: Reading Comprehension 2. Length: 18 3. Decimal Places: 0 4. Salesforce populates the Field Name for you. 9. Enter a Description and Help Text. ![Reading comprehension custom field values](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/customassessmentfield.png) 10. Click **Next**. 11. Select **Visible** for the appropriate profiles. 12. Click **Next**. 13. Add the field to the **Assessment Layout**. 14. Click **Save**. Repeat these steps for the Listening Comprehension and Vocabulary Assessment Scores. Next, place the custom field on the Assessment page layout: 1. Click **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Assessment Layout**. 3. Find the Reading Comprehension field. 4. Drag the Reading Comprehension field onto the page layout and place it before the Total Score field. 5. Click **Save**. Repeat these steps for the Listening Comprehension and Vocabulary fields. Last, add the field to the **Graph Fields** field set: 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Click **Graph Fields**. 3. Drag the Reading Comprehension field into the field set and drop it before Total Score. 4. Repeat this for the Listening Comprehension and Vocabulary fields. 5. Remove the Total Score field if you don’t want it on your Assessment Chart. ![Animation showing placement of three custom fields to the Graph Fields field set](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/assessmentscores.gif) 6. Click **Save**. Verify that your new Assessment Scores are configured properly by viewing the Assessments tab on a Contact record. See the [Add Custom Fields](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/projects/suggestion_box/suggestion_box_2) unit in Trailhead for more information on creating custom fields. ## Create Multiple Assessment Types Create Assessment types for Programs that have different scoring systems. If you run Programs that have different scoring systems or Assessments, you may need to create separate types of Assessments. For example, if you run an ESL course and a financial literacy program, you might use two different Assessments to track progress. In this case, create a separate page layout and record type for each Assessment type. Then create the custom Assessment score fields for all Assessments and assign each score to the corresponding Assessment page layout. Finally, add each custom Assessment score field to the Graph Fields field set. Let's walk through an example where we create two Assessments: one for an ESL course, and one for a financial literacy program. In the end, a user will be able to filter the Assessment Chart by record type. See [link to Manage Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use assessments, assessment scores, and charts to track your clients' progress.") for more information. First, we'll create an ESL Assessment page layout. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Assessment**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **New**. 6. In the Existing Page Layout field, select Assessment Layout. 7. Enter a Page Layout Name. For our example, we’ll use ESL Assessment Layout. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Add the fields you created in [Customize Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize assessment scores and create multiple assessment types.") to the new layout. 10. Click **Save**. Next,  create a record type: 1. Click **Record Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In the Existing Record Type field, select **Master**. 4. Enter a Record Type Label. For our example, we’ll use ESL Assessment. 5. The Record Type Name is automatically populated. 6. Enter a Description. 7. Select **Active**. 8. Enable for all appropriate profiles including: Case Manager: Salesforce, Case Manager: Salesforce Platform, and System Administrator. 9. Click **Next**. 10. Assign page Layouts to all needed profiles. We suggest Case Manager: Salesforce, Case Manager: Salesforce Platform, and System Administrator. 11. Click **Save**. Now we repeat the steps above to create a Financial Literacy Assessment custom score. Last, add the ESL Assessment and Financial Literacy fields to the **Graph Fields field set**. This will display the fields on the Financial Literacy Assessment Chart. 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Select **Graph Fields**. 3. Click **Save**. 4. Drag your custom fields into the field set. 5. Click **Save**. Now when you return to the Assessment chart, you will be able to select Financial Literacy Assessment or ESL Assessment from the Record Type filter and see the appropriate scores display. Learn more about [configuring page layouts and record types](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/lightning-knowledge-setup-and-customization/configure-page-layouts-and-record-types). # Customize Attendance Modify how you track attendance to better suit your organization’s needs. - **[Manage Fields and Field Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make Attendance fields match what you want to track. - **[Create Custom Statuses for Service Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom Service Session statuses to capture details beyond pending or complete. For example, an after school program uses custom statuses to note postponed or rescheduled field trips. - **[Modify Service Session Submitted Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, when a Service Session is submitted, the status changes from pending to complete. You can change what status applies after a session is submitted to make it match your organization's workflows. - **[Filter Attendees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make the list of participants more manageable for attendance takers by filtering who is visible on the attendance page. ## Manage Fields and Field Sets Make Attendance fields match what you want to track. Change what Attendance fields are available by adding or removing them from the Service Delivery object field set. You can also track different fields for different services by assigning an attendance field set to each service. ### Add or Remove Fields from the Service Deliveries Field Set Modify the Attendance Service Deliveries field set of the Service Delivery object to change what fields are available. 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**, then click **Service Delivery**. 2. Click **Field Sets**. 3. Click **Attendance Service Deliveries**. 4. Click and drag a field from the list of available fields to the section labeled **In The Field Set**. Reverse the action to remove a field. 5. Save. ### Add the Service Delivery Field Set Field to the Page Layout Before you create field sets to apply to specific Services, ensure that the Service Delivery Field Set field appears on Service records. 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager,** then click **Service**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Click **Service Layout**. 4. Drag the Service Delivery Field Set field on to the layout. 5. Save the page layout. ### Create and Add Field Sets for Services Create custom field sets for specific services. 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**, then click **Service Delivery**. 2. Click **Field Sets**, then click **New**. 3. Enter a name and label for your field set. For example, After School Services and After\_School\_Services for custom field to record if homework was completed. 4. Enter where you plan to use the field set. For example, Use this for after school services that track homework as complete. 5. Save. 6. Select the fields that you want to display in the field set. 7. Save. ### Select the Field Set for the Service Record Now, add your custom field set to the related Services. 1. Click **Object Manager** again, then click **Service**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then click **Service Delivery Field Set**. 3. Scroll down to Values and click **New**. 4. Enter an API name that matches your field set name you created in Create and Add Field Sets. For example, After\_School\_Services. 5. Save. 6. Click **Edit** next to the Value you just added. 7. Remove any underscores from the Label field. For example, your Label field would say After School Services. 8. Save. 9. Navigate to the Service record that uses the field set you created. Edit the Service Delivery Field Set, then, in the picklist, select the name of the field set you created. 10. Save. ## Create Custom Statuses for Service Sessions Create custom Service Session statuses to capture details beyond pending or complete. For example, an after school program uses custom statuses to note postponed or rescheduled field trips. First, add the new value to the Service Session Status picklist. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** then click **Service Session**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **Status**. 4. In the Values related list, click **New**. 5. Add the new value. For example, Postponed. 6. Save. 7. Copy the API Name of the new value, as you’ll need it in the next step. Next, indicate if the value is either Service Session Status: Complete or Service Session Status: Pending. 1. From Setup, enter Metadata in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. In the row for Bucketed Value, click **Manage Records**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Enter a label for the value. For example, Postponed. The Bucketed Value Name auto-populates. 5. In the Bucket field, select either Service Session Status: Complete or Service Session Status: Pending. 6. Paste the API Name from the previous step into the Value field. 7. Save. You can configure Attendance statuses using the same steps, with some variations. Get the details in the Configure Absent and Present Values section of [Configure Service Delivery Summary Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.cm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm). ## Modify Service Session Submitted Status By default, when a Service Session is submitted, the status changes from pending to complete. You can change what status applies after a session is submitted to make it match your organization's workflows. 1. Navigate to the Service Session page. 2. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click Edit Page. 3. Click the Attendance component to bring up the properties panel. 4. Change the value in the **Status for Service Session after attendance is submitted** Status for Service Session after attendance is submitted to match the value that makes the most sense for your organization. For example, a Waiting for Approval Status. ## Filter Attendees Make the list of participants more manageable for attendance takers by filtering who is visible on the attendance page. For example, you can set it up so that attendees who have withdrawn from a program or are on the waitlist won’t show up on the attendance list. Simply edit the page and add the statuses and roles you want excluded in the Attendance component properties. When your users view the page, they won’t see the excluded statuses. 1. Navigate to the Service Session page. 2. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 3. Click the Attendance component to bring up the properties panel. 4. Choose which parameters you want to use as filters. Your options are: - Excluded Service Participant Statuses: This could include statuses such as Withdrawn. - Excluded Program Engagement Roles: This could include roles such as Service Provider. - Excluded Program Engagement Statuses: This could include statuses such as Waitlisted. # Customize Bulk Service Deliveries Update Bulk Service Deliveries settings in Case Management to match your organization's needs. - **[Enable Bulk Service Delivery Active Filter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Filter the list of Program Engagements and Services in Bulk Service Delivery to show only active ones. - **[Create and Add Field Sets for Specific Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Since not all services need the same information tracked, use field sets to display different fields for different services. For example, for a subsidized lunch service, you can add a field that indicates the type of meal delivered, while for your after school program you can add a field to track homework completion. - **[Change the Fields on Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add and remove fields on Bulk Service Deliveries to better fit your org. - **[Customize Creating Program Engagements from Bulk Service Deliveries or Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Users can create a Program Engagement when creating an individual or group Bulk Service Delivery or when creating a Service Schedule. ## Enable Bulk Service Delivery Active Filter Filter the list of Program Engagements and Services in Bulk Service Delivery to show only active ones. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Metadata, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. In the row for Feature Gates, click **Manage Records**. 3. From the View menu, select **All**. 4. Edit **BSDT Active Filter**. 5. Select **Feature Active**. 6. Save your work. The Bucketed Values custom metatdata types control what's considered active on Program Engagements and Services. Learn more in [Add an Active Program Engagement Stage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_add_active_program_engmt_stage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Setting stages as active allows you to filter to see only active Program Engagements. Set an existing Stage value as active or create a custom value and set the value as active.") and [Add an Active Service Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_add_active_service_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Setting statuses as active allows you to filter to see only active Services. Set an existing Status as active or create a custom value and set the value as active."). ## Create and Add Field Sets for Specific Services Since not all services need the same information tracked, use field sets to display different fields for different services. For example, for a subsidized lunch service, you can add a field that indicates the type of meal delivered, while for your after school program you can add a field to track homework completion. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note The Time field type doesn't display in field sets. ### Add the Service Delivery Field Set Field to the Page Layout Before you create new field sets, make sure that the Service Delivery Field Set field appears on Service records. 1. From the object management settings for Services, go to Page Layouts. 2. Click **Service Layout**. 3. If it's not there, drag the Service Delivery Field Set field on to the layout. 4. Save your work. ### Create and Add Field Sets 1. From the object management settings for Service Deliveries, go to Field Sets. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and label for your field set. For example, **Hourly Services** and **Hourly\_Services**. 4. Enter where you plan to use the field set, such as the type of service. 5. Save your work. 6. Select the fields that you want to display in the field set. 7. Save your work. ### Select the Field Set on the Service Record 1. From the object management settings for Services, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Click **Service Delivery Field Set**. 3. Scroll down to Values and click **New**. 4. Enter an API name that matches your field set name you created in [Create and Add Field Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). The words are separated by underscores. For example, Hourly\_Services. 5. Save your work. 6. Click **Edit** next to the Value you just added. 7. Remove any underscores from the Label field. For example, your Label field would be Hourly Services. 8. Save your work. 9. Navigate to the Service record that uses the field set you created. 10. In the Information section, edit the Service Delivery Field Set, then in the picklist, select the name of the field set you created. 11. Save your work. ## Change the Fields on Bulk Service Deliveries Add and remove fields on Bulk Service Deliveries to better fit your org. While you can add other fields, we recommend that Client is the first field, Program Engagement is the second field, and Service is the third field. If your organization doesn't use the Client or Program Engagement fields, the same order applies, minus that field. Never remove the Service field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Users have to complete the Client and Program Engagement fields if they are present. If your organization doesn't use the Client or Program Engagement fields, remove them from the field set. 1. From the object management settings for Service Deliveries, go to Field Sets. 2. Click **Bulk Service Deliveries**. 3. Drag fields to and from the palette and **In the Field Set**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't remove the Service field. For information about fields for Household Account, custom object, or Organization Account, see [Customize Recipients on Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Bulk Service Deliveries to use Household Account, an Organization Account, a custom object, or to remove Client."). 4. To make a field required for users to complete, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/wrench.png) next to the field, then select **Required**. 5. Save your work. ## Customize Creating Program Engagements from Bulk Service Deliveries or Service Schedules Users can create a Program Engagement when creating an individual or group Bulk Service Delivery or when creating a Service Schedule. Simply select **New** next to **Can't find the right participant?**. Customize the fields to reflect how your organization uses Program Engagements. 1. From the object management settings for Program Engagements, go to Field Sets. 2. Click **CreateProgramEngagement**. 3. Drag fields to and from the palette and **In the Field Set**. 4. To make a field required for users to complete, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/wrenchicon.png) next to the field, then select **Required**. 5. Save your work. # Customize Bulk Service Deliveries Update Bulk Service Deliveries settings in Program Management Module to match your organization's needs. - **[Enable Bulk Service Delivery Active Filter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Filter the list of Program Engagements and Services in Bulk Service Delivery to show only active ones. - **[Create and Add Field Sets for Specific Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Since not all services need the same information tracked, use field sets to display different fields for different services. For example, for a subsidized lunch service, you can add a field that indicates the type of meal delivered, while for your after school program you can add a field to track homework completion. - **[Change the Fields on Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add and remove fields on Bulk Service Deliveries to better fit your org. - **[Customize Creating Program Engagements from Bulk Service Deliveries or Service Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Users can create a Program Engagement when creating an individual or group Bulk Service Delivery or when creating a Service Schedule. ## Enable Bulk Service Delivery Active Filter Filter the list of Program Engagements and Services in Bulk Service Delivery to show only active ones. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Metadata, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. In the row for Feature Gates, click **Manage Records**. 3. From the View menu, select **All**. 4. Edit **BSDT Active Filter**. 5. Select **Feature Active**. 6. Save your work. The Bucketed Values custom metatdata types control what's considered active on Program Engagements and Services. Learn more in [Add an Active Program Engagement Stage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_add_active_program_engmt_stage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Setting stages as active allows you to filter to see only active Program Engagements. Set an existing Stage value as active or create a custom value and set the value as active.") and [Add an Active Service Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_add_active_service_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Setting statuses as active allows you to filter to see only active Services. Set an existing Status as active or create a custom value and set the value as active."). ## Create and Add Field Sets for Specific Services Since not all services need the same information tracked, use field sets to display different fields for different services. For example, for a subsidized lunch service, you can add a field that indicates the type of meal delivered, while for your after school program you can add a field to track homework completion. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note The Time field type doesn't display in field sets. ### Add the Service Delivery Field Set Field to the Page Layout Before you create new field sets, make sure that the Service Delivery Field Set field appears on Service records. 1. From the object management settings for Services, go to Page Layouts. 2. Click **Service Layout**. 3. If it's not there, drag the Service Delivery Field Set field on to the layout. 4. Save your work. ### Create and Add Field Sets 1. From the object management settings for Service Deliveries, go to Field Sets. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and label for your field set. For example, **Hourly Services** and **Hourly\_Services**. 4. Enter where you plan to use the field set, such as the type of service. 5. Save your work. 6. Select the fields that you want to display in the field set. 7. Save your work. ### Select the Field Set on the Service Record 1. From the object management settings for Services, go to Fields & Relationships. 2. Click **Service Delivery Field Set**. 3. Scroll down to Values and click **New**. 4. Enter an API name that matches your field set name you created in [Create and Add Field Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). The words are separated by underscores. For example, Hourly\_Services. 5. Save your work. 6. Click **Edit** next to the Value you just added. 7. Remove any underscores from the Label field. For example, your Label field would be Hourly Services. 8. Save your work. 9. Navigate to the Service record that uses the field set you created. 10. In the Information section, edit the Service Delivery Field Set, then in the picklist, select the name of the field set you created. 11. Save your work. ## Change the Fields on Bulk Service Deliveries Add and remove fields on Bulk Service Deliveries to better fit your org. While you can add other fields, we recommend that Client is the first field, Program Engagement is the second field, and Service is the third field. If your organization doesn't use the Client or Program Engagement fields, the same order applies, minus that field. Never remove the Service field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note Users have to complete the Client and Program Engagement fields if they are present. If your organization doesn't use the Client or Program Engagement fields, remove them from the field set. 1. From the object management settings for Service Deliveries, go to Field Sets. 2. Click **Bulk Service Deliveries**. 3. Drag fields to and from the palette and **In the Field Set**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't remove the Service field. For information about fields for Household Account, custom object, or Organization Account, see [Customize Recipients on Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Bulk Service Deliveries to use Household Account, an Organization Account, a custom object, or to remove Client."). 4. To make a field required for users to complete, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/wrench.png) next to the field, then select **Required**. 5. Save your work. ## Customize Creating Program Engagements from Bulk Service Deliveries or Service Schedules Users can create a Program Engagement when creating an individual or group Bulk Service Delivery or when creating a Service Schedule. Simply select **New** next to **Can't find the right participant?**. Customize the fields to reflect how your organization uses Program Engagements. 1. From the object management settings for Program Engagements, go to Field Sets. 2. Click **CreateProgramEngagement**. 3. Drag fields to and from the palette and **In the Field Set**. 4. To make a field required for users to complete, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/wrenchicon.png) next to the field, then select **Required**. 5. Save your work. # Customize Case Plan Goals and Action Items Customize the Goal and Action Item fields on a Case Plan. The fields available on a Goal created from a Goal Template or an Action Item created from an Action Item Template are determined by Field Sets. By default, new Goals and Action Items use the Case Plan Viewer field set. You can add fields to that field set, but keep in mind that those fields will show for all Goals and Action Items using the Case Plan Viewer field set. Alternatively, you can create your own field sets and apply them to specific Goal or Action Item Templates, so that records created from those templates show only the relevant fields. - **[Customize Goals on Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom fields to display on Goals on a Case Plan. - **[Configure Action Items on Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom fields to display on Action Items on a Case Plan. - **[Create and Add Field Sets for Specific Goals or Action Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add field sets that apply to specific Goals or Action Items. Click Setup gear icon, then click Setup. ## Customize Goals on Case Plans Create custom fields to display on Goals on a Case Plan. 1. In Setup, [create your custom field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) on the Goal object. 1. Make sure the field is Visible to these Profiles: Case Manager: Salesforce, Case Manager: Salesforce Platform, and System Administrator. 2. Add the field to the Goal Layout. 2. Add the custom field on the Goal page layout. 1. Click **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Goal Layout**. 3. Drag your custom field into the page layout. 4. Click **Save**. 3. Add the field to the Case Plan Viewer field set. 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Click **Case Plan Viewer**. 3. Drag your custom field into the field set. 4. Click **Save**. ## Configure Action Items on Case Plans Create custom fields to display on Action Items on a Case Plan. 1. In Setup, [create your custom field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) on the Action Item object. 1. Make sure your field is Visible to these Profiles: Case Manager: Salesforce, Case Manager: Salesforce Platform, and System Administrator. 2. Add the field to the Action Item Layout. 2. Add the custom field to the Action Item page layout: 1. Click **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Action Item Layout**. 3. Find the custom field(s) you added. 4. Drag your custom field(s) onto the page layout. 5. Click **Save**. 3. Add a field to the Case Plan Viewer field  set: 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Click **Case Plan Viewer**. 3. Drag your custom field into the field set. 4. Click **Save**. When you view the Case Plan Viewer, you will see your custom Goal and Action Item fields. ![Case Plan Viewer with custom Action Item and Goals fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/customfields.png) ## Create and Add Field Sets for Specific Goals or Action Items You can add field sets that apply to specific Goals or Action Items. Click Setup gear icon, then click Setup. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. In the list of objects, select either **Goal** or **Action Item**, then click **Field Sets**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Enter a label and name for your field set. For example, Financial Goals and Financial\_Goals. 6. For “Where is this used?”, enter where you plan to use the field set. For example, Use this field set on goal templates to determine which fields a Case Manager must enter when creating a goal for the Financial Literacy Program. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Select the fields that you want to display in the field set. For example, for a Financial Goals field set, you might have created a field called Target Credit Score or Relevant Financial Principle that you want to include in your field set. ![Showing the Financial Goals field set with the fields Goal Name, Status, and Relevant Financial Principle](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/new_field_set.png) 9. Click **Save**. Next, add the field set as a value in the Field Set picklist on a Goal or Action Item template. See [Select the Field Set on the Goal or Action Item Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To show specific fields on the Goal or Action Item templates, indicate the field set.") - **[Select the Field Set on the Goal or Action Item Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To show specific fields on the Goal or Action Item templates, indicate the field set. ### Select the Field Set on the Goal or Action Item Template To show specific fields on the Goal or Action Item templates, indicate the field set. 1. Click **Object Manager**, and click **Goal Template** or **Action Item Template**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then select the field called **Field Set**. 3. Scroll down to Values and click **New**. 4. Enter an API name that exactly matches the field set name you created in [Customize Case Plan Goals and Action Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_caseplan_viewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Goal and Action Item fields on a Case Plan."). For example, Financial\_Goals. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Click **Edit** next to the Value you just added. 7. Remove any underscores from the Label field. For example, your Label field would say **Financial Goals**. ![Showing the Field Set called Field Set with the new value for Financial Goals](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/add_field_set_value.png) 8. Click **Save**. 9. Navigate to the Goal Template record or Action Item Template record that uses the field set you created. Click to edit the Field Set field, then select the name of the field set you created. 10. Click **Save**. # Customize Fields on the Add Contact to Program Action Many organizations offer one-time or recurring Services for individuals or groups. For example, your organization might offer classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, community outreach events, or other types of events. Use Service Schedules to schedule and manage these events. - **[Customize Add Contact to Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_fields_contact_to_prog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add people to Programs using the **Add Contact to Program** button on a Contact detail page. ## Customize Add Contact to Program Add people to Programs using the **Add Contact to Program** button on a Contact detail page. To customize the fields that display when you click the **Add Contact to Program** button: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 6. Click **Edit Layout**. 7. Configure fields as needed. 8. Click **Save**. # Customize Fundraising Page Layouts in Education Tailor the Fundraising pages to meet your needs. For example, include a non-monetary assets section on the Gift Commitment page or add a field to indicate if a commitment is verbal or written. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Page layouts won't update until the object metadata is cached. To see page changes sooner, log out, and then log in. - **[Update Person Account Page Layout in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_update_person_account_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout. - **[Add Payment Instrument Fields in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_payment_instrument_fields_to_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Payment Instrument fields to the page layouts. Include fields to obtain account holder and payment method details that are required to complete a transaction. - **[Create Quick Actions for Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_quick_actions_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create quick actions in your Fundraising apps, create Action Launcher deployments. - **[Set Up Donor Profiles in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_donor_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the donor profile page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnership app to contain the necessary financial, demographic, and relationship information for a donor or prospect. - **[Configure a Data Summary Rollup in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_data_summary_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Related Records Detail Display is a Lightning App that provides a summarizing component for your data. # Customize Fundraising Page Layouts in Nonprofit Tailor the Fundraising pages to meet your needs. For example, include a non-monetary assets section on the Gift Commitment page or add a field to indicate if a commitment is verbal or written. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Page layouts won't update until the object metadata is cached. To see page changes sooner, log out, and then log in. - **[Update Person Account Page Layout in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_update_person_account_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout. - **[Add Payment Instrument Fields in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_payment_instrument_fields_to_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Payment Instrument fields to the page layouts. Include fields to obtain account holder and payment method details that are required to complete a transaction. - **[Create Quick Actions for Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_quick_actions_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create quick actions in your Fundraising apps, create Action Launcher deployments. - **[Set Up Donor Profiles in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_donor_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the donor profile page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnership app to contain the necessary financial, demographic, and relationship information for a donor or prospect. - **[Configure a Data Summary Rollup in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_data_summary_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Related Records Detail Display is a Lightning App that provides a summarizing component for your data. # Customize Fundseeker Application Flows Learn about ways to use automation in Outbound Funds Module to help you manage funding requests more efficiently. - **[Create Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how the Create Application flow processes a funding request application. - **[Submit Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_submit_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Submit Application flow automates how an application is submitted to an organization. The flow retrieves the application record, makes sure the user is both a site user and owner of the application, and updates the application before it is submitted. Without this flow, the application can’t be submitted to your organization for review. - **[Create or Modify a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_or_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a flow or modify the Create Application flow to suit the needs of your nonprofit organization. # Customize Grantseekers Application Flows See the automation available in Grants Management that can help you manage funding requests more efficiently. - **[Default Application Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_defaultappflows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how the Create Application flow processes a funding request application. - **[Enhanced Application (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enhanced_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We’ve included the Enhanced Application (Sample) flow that condenses the default application experience using the Create Application flow from three screens to one screen. This is a sample flow and includes example application language, unmapped custom fields, and a file upload component within a single page. - **[Create Multiple Applications Using Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your organization may have need to have more than one application form. For example, a grant application may look and function different from a scholarship application. You can designate a specific application on a Funding Program using flows and the Application Form field. - **[Create a Multi-Section Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_multi_section_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A multi-section application breaks an application into navigable sections while letting grantseekers save and return to an in-progress application. - **[Create or Modify a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a flow or modify the Create Application flow to suit your nonprofit organization’s needs. # Customize Household Names Find out more about customizing household names. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Automatic Household Naming](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-Rf7-sKRdyY). - **[Overview: About Household Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack supports the Household Account model and automatic Household naming. - **[Customize the Household Name Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP uses the Household Name Format to determine the Household Account Name. - **[Customize the Formal Greeting Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP uses the Formal Greeting Format to determine the Household's Formal Greeting. - **[Customize the Informal Greeting Format](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP uses the Informal Greeting Format field to determine the Household's Informal Greeting. - **[Customize Name Connector, Name Overrun, and Name Sequence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The name connector, name overrun, and name sequence also affect the appearance of your Household names and greetings. - **[Other Custom Format Examples](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Choosing "other" from the Household Name Format, Formal Greeting Format, or Informal Greeting Format lets you design your own custom format. You can create your own format from scratch, or copy and paste from one of these examples. - **[Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The key to creating your own custom naming format from scratch is understanding the format components. - **[Exclude a Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can exclude Contact names from Household Names, Formal Greetings, and Informal Greetings. - **[Refresh All Household Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you've made changes to Household Name formatting, you can refresh the naming for all existing Household names and greetings. - **[Automatic Household Renaming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are certain actions that trigger an automatic update of the Household name. For example, if you update the value of a Contact field that's included in the Household Naming formula, NPSP will automatically update the Household Name. - **[Disable Automatic Household Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you don't want the NPSP to name your Households automatically for you, you can disable the automatic Household Naming feature. - **[Use Your Own Custom Household Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you've made changes to Household Name formatting, you can refresh the naming for all existing Household names and greetings. - **[Household Naming FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to common questions about household naming. Manually edit the generated name, include custom fields, understand anonymous households, and more. ## Overview: About Household Naming Nonprofit Success Pack supports the Household Account model and automatic Household naming. This means that when you create a new Contact in Salesforce, NPSP creates a new Household Account record, and generates its name based on the name of the new Contact. For example, when you create the Jamal Jones Contact record, NPSP creates the Jones Household. By default, automatic household naming functionality: - Creates the name of the new Household Account based on the last name of the new Contact. - Creates formal and informal greetings based on the Contact's name. - Updates Household names and greetings when you update Contact names, or add or remove Contacts from the Household. The best place to see this in action is in the Account Detail section of the Household Account record: ![Account Detail section of a Household Account record showing Household Name, Formal Greeting, and Informal Greeting fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_names_acctdetail.png) In this example, NPSP displays the default Household Name, Formal Greeting, and Informal Greeting based on the two Contacts in the Household: **Harold Malloy** and **Elise Malloy**. But what if you wanted your Formal Greeting to be "Mr. and Mrs. Malloy" instead of the default "Harold and Elise Malloy"? Or what if you wanted to omit a Contact name from one or both of the Greetings? The rest of this article describes how you can customize automatic Household naming to fit the needs of your organization. ## Customize the Household Name Format NPSP uses the Household Name Format to determine the Household Account Name. To change the Household name setting: 1. In NPSP Settings, click **People** | **Households**. 2. Click **Edit.** 3. Select a format from the **Household Name Format** field: - **\-none-** Does not generate a Household Name, leaving it up to the user to assign one. - **{!LastName} Household** Generates a Household name such as “Smith Household” or “Smith and Jones Household,” depending on the number of Contacts in the Household. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Household** Generates a Household name such as “John Smith Household” or “John and Jane Smith Household”. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Household** Generates a Household name such as “Smith (John) Household”, “Smith (John and Jane) Household” or “Smith (John) and Doe (Jane) Household”. - **{!LastName} Family** Generates a Household name such as “Smith Family” or “Smith and Jones Family”. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Family** Generates a Household name such as “John Smith Family” or “John and Jane Smith Family”. - **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Family** Generates a Household name such as “Smith (John) Family”, “Smith (John and Jane) Family” or “Smith (John) and Doe (Jane) Family”. - **{!{!Salutation}} {!FirstName} {!LastName} Family** Generates a Household name such as "Mr. John Smith Family" or "Mr. and Mrs. John Smith Family". - **{!Account.npe01\_\_One2OneContact\_\_r.LastName} Family** Generates a Household name such as "Smith Family". - **{!LastName} ({!Account.Billing.City}) Family** Generates a Household name such as "Smith (Seattle) Family". - **other** Allows you to specify your own naming convention. See [Other Custom Format Examples](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for sample formats you can copy and paste. See [Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for detailed information on designing your own format.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Examples for Household Name Format** field further down on the Households Settings page shows a preview of Household Names based on your current selection. The following preview is what's shown when you choose the **{!LastName} ({!{!FirstName}}) Household** option: ![Shows Household Name examples such as: "Smith (Sam) Household", "Smith (Sam and Sally) Household"](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_names_formatexamples.png) 4. Click **Save**. ## Customize the Formal Greeting Format NPSP uses the Formal Greeting Format to determine the Household's Formal Greeting. To change the formal greeting setting: 1. In NPSP Settings, click **People** | **Households**. 2. Click **Edit.** 3. Select an option from the **Formal Greeting Format** field: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Examples for Formal Greeting Format** field further down on the Households Settings page shows a preview of Formal Greetings based on your current selection. The following preview is what's shown when you choose the {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} option: ![Formal Greeting preview field showing Formal Greeting examples such as "Sam Smith", "Sam and Sally Smith"](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_name_formal_greeting_examples.png) - **\-none-** Does not generate a Formal Name at all. The field will remain blank. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName}** Generates a formal greeting such as “John Smith” or “John and Jane Smith”. - **{!{!Salutation} {!FirstName}} {!LastName}** Generates a formal greeting such as “Dr. John Smith”, or “Dr. John and Mrs. Jane Smith”. - **{!{!Salutation}} {Firstname} {Lastname}** Generates a formal greeting such as "Mr. & Mrs. John Doe". - **other** Allows you to specify your own naming convention. See [Other Custom Format Examples](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for sample formats you can copy and paste. See [Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for detailed information on designing your own format. 4. Click **Save.** ## Customize the Informal Greeting Format NPSP uses the Informal Greeting Format field to determine the Household's Informal Greeting. To change the Informal Greeting setting: 1. In NPSP Settings, click **People** | **Households**. 2. Click **Edit.** 3. Select an option from the **Informal Greeting** field: - **\-none-** Does not generate an Informal Name at all. The field will remain blank. - **{!{!FirstName}}** Generates an informal greeting such as “John” or “John and Jane”. - **{!{!FirstName}} {!LastName}** Generates an informal greeting such as “John Smith” or “John and Jane Smith”. - **other** Allows you to specify your own naming convention. See [Other Custom Format Examples](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for sample formats you can copy and paste. See [Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for detailed information on designing your own format. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Examples for Informal Greeting Format** field further down on the Households Settings page shows a preview of Informal Greetings based on your current selection. The following preview is what's shown when you choose the {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} option: ![Examples for Informal Greeting format such as "Sam", "Sam and Sally", "Sam, Sally and Suzie"](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_name_informal_greeting_examples.png) 4. Click **Save.** ## Customize Name Connector, Name Overrun, and Name Sequence The name connector, name overrun, and name sequence also affect the appearance of your Household names and greetings. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **People** | **Households**. 3. Click **Edit.** 4. Use the appropriate editable fields to customize the name connector, name overrun, or name sequence. See below for specific instructions. 5. When you're finished, click **Save**. - **[Customize the Name Connector](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Name Connector joins multiple contacts together in the Name, Formal Name, and Informal Name fields. - **[Customize the Name Overrun](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Name Overrun value is a text value that replaces a long list of names in a Household Name, Formal Greeting, or Informal Greeting. - **[Customize the Name Sequence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the order of Contact names in Household Names, Formal Greetings, and Informal Greetings ### Customize the Name Connector The Name Connector joins multiple contacts together in the Name, Formal Name, and Informal Name fields. The default value is “and”, however you can override that value with any value, such as “&” or “y”. (There are no restrictions as to the value.) ### Customize the Name Overrun The Name Overrun value is a text value that replaces a long list of names in a Household Name, Formal Greeting, or Informal Greeting. The **Contact Overrun Count** is the number that indicates the maximum number of names you want to show. For example, you might have nine members of a Household, but you certainly wouldn't want to list out all of their names in the Household name or a greetings. By setting the Contact Overrun Count to 2, and the Name Overrun value to “Other Family Members,” your Household Name Format would look as follows: ![Name Overrun](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_names_nameoverrun.png) ### Customize the Name Sequence You can change the order of Contact names in Household Names, Formal Greetings, and Informal Greetings 1. Navigate to the Household Account or Household object record whose Contact names you want to re-order. 2. Click **Manage Household**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Manage Household button, you likely have an earlier version of NPSP, and might need to [enable the button in Salesforce setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended."). 3. On the Manage Household page, drag the Contact cards from left to right to re-order them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Manage Household page, you likely upgraded to Nonprofit Success Pack or later from a previous version. For more information, see [Upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack from a Previous Version of NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upgrade_from_a_previous_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is for users considering the upgrade from a previous version of NPSP to the latest version."). 4. Click **Save**. ## Other Custom Format Examples Choosing "other" from the Household Name Format, Formal Greeting Format, or Informal Greeting Format lets you design your own custom format. You can create your own format from scratch, or copy and paste from one of these examples. For more information on creating your own format, see [Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form."). For the following examples, we're using the Smith Household, with these Household members (listed in this order on the Household record): Justin Smith (Primary Contact), Laila Smith (Spouse), Makayla Smith, Malik Smith.
If you want the naming convention to look like this: Use this format:
Mr. & Mrs. Smith

{!{!Salutation}} {!LastName}

(You must also set Contact Overrun Count to 2 AND leave Name Overrun blank.)
Justin, Laila, Makayla and Malik Smith {!{!FirstName}} {!Last Name}
Justin, Laila, Makayla and Malik Smith Family (Seattle) {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Family ({!Account.BillingCity})
Justin Smith, Laila Smith, Makayla Smith and Malik Smith {!{!FirstName} {!LastName}}
For the following examples, the Pittman Household has these Household members: Angelo Pittman, Robert Andrews, and Grace Andrews.
If you want the naming convention to look like this: Use this format:
Mr. Pittman and Mr. Andrews

{!{!Salutation}} {!LastName}

with the Contact Overrun Count set to 2)
Pittman and Andrews Family {!LastName} Family
Pittman and Andrews Family (California) {!LastName} Family ({!Account.BillingState})
Angelo Pittman and Robert and Grace Andrews {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName}
Angelo Pittman, Robert Andrews and Grace Andrews {!{!FirstName} {!LastName}}
## Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch The key to creating your own custom naming format from scratch is understanding the format components. ### Field References To reference a field whose values you want to include in the Household Name, use open and closed braces, an exclamation mark, and the API field name. Examples: ``` {!firstname} {!mailingcity} {!lastname} {!pet_name__c} {!npsp__Primary_Affiliation__c} ``` ### Static Text You can use static text in your Household Name Format. For example, if you want to append the phrase "Group" to the end of every household name, simply use the text along with any fields you want to include. For example, use the format below to yield **Smith Group** as the Household Name (for a Household with Contacts Ethan Smith and Jordan Smith). ``` {!lastname} Group ``` ### Repeating Element If there are fields whose values you want to display from every Contact in the Household, use the repeating element, which starts with an open brace and an exclamation mark, and ends with a closed brace (as highlighted below). For example: ``` {!{!firstname}} {!lastname} ``` In this example, the first name field is inside the repeating element, so the first name of every Contact in the Household will be displayed: **Ethan and Jordan Smith**. If we include the last name field inside the repeating element, like so: ``` {!{!firstname} {!lastname}} ``` Our Household Name will be **Ethan Smith and Jordan Smith**. You can include as many fields as you want inside the repeating element. But you can only use the repeating element once in your formula: This works (one repeating element): `**{!**{!salutation} {!firstname} {!lastname} ({!MailingCity}) **}**` This doesn't work (more than one repeating element): `**{!**{!firstname}**} {!**{!mailingcity}**}**` Any field that's outside of the repeating element has its value pulled from the Primary Contact. For example: ``` {!{!firstname}} ({!mailingcity}) ``` In this example, Mailing City is outside of the repeating element, so its value will be pulled from the Primary Contact's mailing city. Notice the static text parentheses around the mailing city field in the above example. This will result in parentheses around the mailing city in the Household Name: **Ethan and Jordan (Shoreline)**. ### Last Name Grouping NPSP uses the Last Name field to group repeating values. For example, you have a Household with Contacts Yididya Moore, Hannah Johnson, Diamond Johnson. And your Household Name Format is this: ``` {!{!FirstName}} {!LastName} Household ``` In this case, First Name is the repeating value. Since Hannah and Diamond have the same last name, NPSP groups them together. So your Household Name will be **Yididya Moore and Hannah and Diamond Johnson Household**. ## Exclude a Name You can exclude Contact names from Household Names, Formal Greetings, and Informal Greetings. 1. Navigate to the Household Account or Household object record whose Contact you want to exclude from a Household Name or greeting. 2. Click **Manage Household**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Manage Household button, you likely have an earlier version of the NPSP, and might need to [enable the button in Salesforce setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended."). 3. On the Manage Household page, choose your exclusions from the Contact cards. ![Manage Household example image showing exclusions checked.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_names_managehh.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Manage Household page, you likely upgraded to NPSP 3.0 or later from a previous version. For more information, see [Upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack from a Previous Version of NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upgrade_from_a_previous_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is for users considering the upgrade from a previous version of NPSP to the latest version."). 4. Click **Save**. ## Refresh All Household Names Once you've made changes to Household Name formatting, you can refresh the naming for all existing Household names and greetings. However, name refreshing is an irreversible process, and should not be done without careful consideration. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Before running this process, create a backup of your data by exporting a full report of all Household Accounts or Household object records that contain these four fields: ID, Name, Formal Greeting, Informal Greeting. 1. In NPSP Settings, click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Refresh Household Names**. 2. **Carefully review the WARNING section before refreshing Household names**. 3. If you haven't already, disable all custom validation rules. (See below for more information.) 4. Click the **Refresh All Household Names** button to start the process. **Disabling Custom Validation Rules**. Custom validation rules can prevent the automatic Household naming process from properly completing. You should disable all custom validation rules on the Account object (Household Account model) or on the Household object (One-to-One and Individual “Bucket” models) before you begin the refresh process. Once the refresh process is complete, you can re-enable your custom validation rules. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Disable custom validation rules in one of the following places: - Click **Account,** then click **Validation Rules** (Household Account model) - Click **Households**, then click **Validation Rules** (One-to-One or Individual models) ## Automatic Household Renaming There are certain actions that trigger an automatic update of the Household name. For example, if you update the value of a Contact field that's included in the Household Naming formula, NPSP will automatically update the Household Name. Here's a list of actions that will trigger NPSP to update the Household Name: - Update to any Contact field that's included in the naming formula - Adding or removing a Contact from a Household. - Updates to the npo02\_\_SYSTEM\_CUSTOM\_NAMING\_\_c field on Household - Updates to any of the naming fields directly on the Household record - Removing or deleting the last Contact in a Household and making the Primary Contact field blank. (With these two actions, NPSP will rename the Household “Anonymous”.) ## Disable Automatic Household Naming If you don't want the NPSP to name your Households automatically for you, you can disable the automatic Household Naming feature. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **People** | **Households**. 3. Click the **Edit** button at the top of the page. 4. Deselect the Automatic Household Naming checkbox and click **Save**. ## Use Your Own Custom Household Naming Once you've made changes to Household Name formatting, you can refresh the naming for all existing Household names and greetings. The new Apex Class must implement all methods specified in the interface, including methods to construct a Household's Name, Formal Greeting, and Informal Greeting. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important This field should be used with caution and only by a Developer, as modifying the default value will overwrite the standard Household Naming functionality included with the NPSP. You can find the **Implementing Class** field in NPSP Settings, under **People** | **Households**. ![Image showing the Implementing Class field.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_hh_names_implclass.png) ## Household Naming FAQ Get answers to common questions about household naming. Manually edit the generated name, include custom fields, understand anonymous households, and more. - **[What happens if I manually edit the Household Name or the Formal/Informal Greetings?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce will detect that you have manually overridden one of these three fields on the Household Account or (older) Household object, and will exclude that field from future naming. - **[How do I reset one of the 3 Name fields back to automatic naming?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter 'REPLACE' (all-caps, no quotes) in the fields you want to revert to automatic naming and save the Account record. The field will be recalculated immediately, and will be automatically named going forward. - **[How do I build my own naming format?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create your own naming format. - **[How do I include custom fields in the Household Name?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can create your own naming format. - **[How do I prevent validation rules from blocking changes to the Household Name fields?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your organization has custom validation rules that prevent saving records with missing or invalid data, those rules could block automatic Household Naming. - **[Why is my Household suddenly named "Anonymous"?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_household_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you remove or delete the last Contact in a Household, and make the Primary Contact field blank, NPSP will rename that Household "Anonymous". ### What happens if I manually edit the Household Name or the Formal/Informal Greetings? Salesforce will detect that you have manually overridden one of these three fields on the Household Account or (older) Household object, and will exclude that field from future naming. ### How do I reset one of the 3 Name fields back to automatic naming? Enter 'REPLACE' (all-caps, no quotes) in the fields you want to revert to automatic naming and save the Account record. The field will be recalculated immediately, and will be automatically named going forward. ### How do I build my own naming format? You can create your own naming format. See [Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for detailed information on how to build your own naming format. ### How do I include custom fields in the Household Name? You can create your own naming format. See [Create Your Own Custom Format From Scratch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form.") for detailed information on how to build your own naming format, including custom fields. ### How do I prevent validation rules from blocking changes to the Household Name fields? If your organization has custom validation rules that prevent saving records with missing or invalid data, those rules could block automatic Household Naming. To prevent blocking of automatic Household Naming, add this logic to the validation rules: ``` && NOT(OR(ISCHANGED(Name), ISCHANGED(np02_Formal_Greeting__c), ISCHANGED(np02_Informal_Greeting__c))) ``` Adding the above conditions to your Account or Household validation rules forces those validation rules to ignore any modifications you make to `Name`, `Informal_Greeting__c` or `Formal_Greeting__c`. ### Why is my Household suddenly named "Anonymous"? If you remove or delete the last Contact in a Household, and make the Primary Contact field blank, NPSP will rename that Household "Anonymous". # Customize Incidents Create custom fields to display on the Incident component on a Contact record. 1. In Setup, [create your custom field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) on the Case object. 1. Make sure the field is **Visible** to the appropriate Profiles. 2. Make the field available on the Incident Layout. 2. Add the custom field to the Incident page layout. 1. Click **Case Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Incident Layout**. 3. Find the custom field you added. 4. Drag your custom field onto the page layout. 5. Click **Save**. 3. Add your field to the Incident Detail field set. 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Click **Incident Detail**. 3. Drag your field into the field set. 4. Click **Save**. # Customize Labels A Custom Label is text that can be accessed by an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack, for a variety of purposes. The advantage of a Custom Label is that the text can be translated into any language that Salesforce supports. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Customizing Labels](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oazx3Sdu69Q). - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Custom Label is text that can be accessed by an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack, for a variety of purposes. NPSP uses Custom Labels for error messages or to set a Stage value for Open Recurring Donations. The advantage of a Custom Label is that the text can be translated into any language that Salesforce supports, even English. - **[Setup—Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can translate your custom labels or override labels in NPSP packages, you need to enable the Translation Workbench. - **[Edit Code Custom Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Text found in NPSP custom interfaces, such as NPSP Settings and Manage Household, are stored in Custom Labels. - **[Edit Standard Labels and Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can edit most standard tab, field, and object labels to make them better fit in your organization. - **[Override NPSP Field Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP comes with many custom fields, button, and related lists. You may need to edit the labels for these items to meet your needs. For example, you may want to change the Alternate Email field on the Contact to Other Email. ## Overview A Custom Label is text that can be accessed by an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack, for a variety of purposes. NPSP uses Custom Labels for error messages or to set a Stage value for Open Recurring Donations. The advantage of a Custom Label is that the text can be translated into any language that Salesforce supports, even English. The NPSP packages also contain custom field labels that you may need to edit to make them fit in your organization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you edit NPSP labels, they won't match what is documented for NPSP. Although you can't directly edit custom labels, you can work around this using the Translation Workbench. The Translation Workbench is a tool that you can use to enable different languages. By enabling “English” as a language in the Translation Workbench, you can then “translate” custom labels into English and use those translated versions in place of the out-of-box labels. ## Setup—Before You Begin Before you can translate your custom labels or override labels in NPSP packages, you need to enable the Translation Workbench. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Translation in the Quick Find box, then select **Translation Language Settings**. 3. Click **Enable**. Now that the Workbench is enabled, activate the English language so that you can customize your NPSP labels. 1. Click **Edit** next to English. 2. Check the **Active** box. 3. Select the users that will customize the labels and move them to the **Selected List**. 4. Click **Save**. ## Edit Code Custom Labels Text found in NPSP custom interfaces, such as NPSP Settings and Manage Household, are stored in Custom Labels. This is different than the labels on field names, which we'll cover next. There are also Custom Labels which control how NPSP functions. For example, you may want to change the out-of-box Stage for open Recurring Donations from Pledged to Not Received. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From **Setup**, enter `Custom Labels` in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Labels** under the User Interface menu. 3. Find the label you want to change and click on the Label Name. 4. Click **New Local Translations/Overrides**. 5. Select **English** from the Language menu and enter the label you want to use. 6. Click **Save**. Go to the page that contains the custom label and confirm that your translated value shows up. You may need to refresh the page to see your updates. For our example, we'll go to the Opportunity to see the updated Stage for the Recurring Donation. ## Edit Standard Labels and Objects You can edit most standard tab, field, and object labels to make them better fit in your organization. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From **Setup**, enter `Rename Tab`, then select **Rename Tabs and Labels**. 3. Click **Edit** next to the object. 4. Leave the object name labels as they are and click **Next**. 5. Update the field labels, then click **Save**. For more information on renaming standard tabs and labels, see [Rename Object, Tab, and Field Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=customize_rename.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. ## Override NPSP Field Labels NPSP comes with many custom fields, button, and related lists. You may need to edit the labels for these items to meet your needs. For example, you may want to change the Alternate Email field on the Contact to Other Email. 1. Locate the package where the field originated. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click on the name of the object that includes the field. For example, if you were looking for the Alternate Email field, you would click Contact. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Find the field and click on the Field Label. 6. In the Package Information section, you'll see the Installed Package name. 2. From Setup, enter Override in the Quick Find box, then select **Override** under the Translation Workbench menu. 3. Choose the Package that contains your field. (If you don't have this, refer back to step 1.) 4. Select English as the language. 5. Select **Custom Field** for the Setup Component. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You will most likely be changing field labels, but there are other components you may want to rename, such as buttons and links. 6. Select the appropriate object. This is the object where you see the field. 7. Select **Field Label** for the Aspect. Note that you can also edit Related List labels. 8. Find the field whose label you want to edit and double-click the Field Label Override field. 9. Enter a new label and click **Save**. When you view the appropriate record, you'll see the new label. # Customize Mentoring Portal Pages Create and configure pages for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create the Assessment Page for Mentors and Mentees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_the_assessment_page_for_mentors_and_mentees.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create pages for mentors and mentees to display assessment questions and responses. - **[Create the Benefit Assignment Object Pages for Mentors and Mentees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_the_benefit_assignment_object_pages_for_mentors_and_mentees.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors and mentees can see who they are assigned to for a Mentoring benefit. - **[Create the Program and Program Enrollment Pages for Mentees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_the_program_and_program_enrollment_pages_for_mentees.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create pages for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentees can see their available and enrolled programs. - **[Create a Benefits Home Page for Mentors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_benefits_home_page_for_mentors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and setup a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors can see the benefits for which they can register as a provider. - **[Create the Benefit Object Page for Mentors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_the_benefit_object_page_for_mentors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors can see the details of a selected benefit. - **[Create the Provider Offering Page for Mentors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_the_provider_offering_page_for_mentors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a page for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal where mentors can see the benefits for which they have registered as a provider. # Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names Create your own custom Opportunity Names using any fields from the Opportunity itself or fields from related records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Custom Opportunity Naming](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=siSfiuFvaHQ). - **[Create a Custom Opportunity Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use a custom Opportunity name or a a different naming format from default naming convention, create a custom name. - **[Opportunity Name Examples](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When creating your own Opportunity Names, simply add any Opportunity field to the list of field names. - **[Edit a Custom Opportunity Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change a custom Opportunity Name by editing it in NPSP Settings. - **[Refresh a Single Opportunity Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Refresh the name of an Opportunity to share the custom formatting of a matching custom Opportunity name. - **[Refresh all Opportunity Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Share naming formatting with preexisting, matching Opportunities by refreshing them. ## Create a Custom Opportunity Name To use a custom Opportunity name or a a different naming format from default naming convention, create a custom name. When you create a new Opportunity from a Quick Action on a Contact or Account record, NPSP names the Opportunity for you. The default naming convention is \[Account or Contact Name\] \[record type name\] \[date\]. For example, "Barnaby Jones Donation 12/12/21." Set a different naming format by choosing from several options provided by NPSP, or create your own format from scratch. NPSP also provides the ability to specify different formats by Opportunity record type. To choose from a list of pre-configured name formats, or create your own format: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. On the Opportunity Names page, click **New Opportunity Name**. 3. On the Opportunity Name Settings page, specify the settings for your custom Opportunity Name: Attribution Specifies whether you want to apply the custom naming convention to Contact donations (that is, Opportunities associated with Household, 1-to-1, or Individual "Bucket" accounts), Organization donations, or both Contact and Organization donations. NPSP treats any donation that is _not_ a Contact donation as an Organization donation. Opportunity Record Types Specifies the Opportunity record types to which you want to apply this Opportunity Name. Control or Command click to select more than one record type. "None" applies the new naming to _all_ record types. Opportunity Name Format Specifies the Opportunity Name format. Select from a number of out-of-the-box naming conventions, or choose "other" to create your own. (See [Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create your own custom Opportunity Names using any fields from the Opportunity itself or fields from related records.") for more information.) Date Format The format for any Date or DateTime fields you've included in the Opportunity Name. Choose "other" to create your own format, following the [Java SimpleDateFormat specification](http://docs.oracle.com/javase/6/docs/api/java/text/simpledateformat.html). 4. Click **Save**. NPSP will use the new custom naming convention for all Opportunities of matching record types going forward. To apply the new naming convention to previously created Opportunities, see [Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create your own custom Opportunity Names using any fields from the Opportunity itself or fields from related records.") and [Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create your own custom Opportunity Names using any fields from the Opportunity itself or fields from related records."). ## Opportunity Name Examples When creating your own Opportunity Names, simply add any Opportunity field to the list of field names. For example: `{!Amount} {!CloseDate}` You can also add static text to the custom name: `Received {!Amount} on {!CloseDate}` As well as fields from related records: `Received {!Amount} on {!CloseDate} thanks to {!Campaign.Name}` And if you really want to get fancy, you can even add fields from the Primary Contact associated with the donation: `{!Contact.Name} from {!Contact.MailingCity} gave {!Amount} on {!CloseDate} thanks to {!Campaign.Name}` Note that if a field does not contain a value, its place in the custom name will be left blank. For example, if the mailing city field for the Primary Contact were empty, the above would read: "Nicolas from gave $8 on April 29, 2015 thanks to Save the Whales." ## Edit a Custom Opportunity Name Change a custom Opportunity Name by editing it in NPSP Settings. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. On the Opportunity Names page, find the Opportunity Name you want to edit, click the Edit link, make your changes, and click **Save**. ## Refresh a Single Opportunity Name Refresh the name of an Opportunity to share the custom formatting of a matching custom Opportunity name. When you create a custom Opportunity Name, Salesforce only uses that naming convention for matching Opportunities you create _after_ that. But you can refresh the name of a preexisting, matching Opportunity, once you've specified your settings. 1. Navigate to the Opportunity whose name you want to refresh. 2. Click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Refresh Name**. ![Refresh Name menu item](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cust_opp_don_names_refresh.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see this button, you'll need to add it to your page layout. ## Refresh all Opportunity Names Share naming formatting with preexisting, matching Opportunities by refreshing them. When you create a custom Opportunity Name, Salesforce only uses that naming convention for matching Opportunities you create _after_ that. But you can refresh the names of all preexisting, matching Opportunities, once you've specified your settings. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Refreshing all Opportunity Names activates a batch process, and renames every matching Opportunity in your organization except those Opportunities whose Opportunity Name Formats you've marked as "Do Not Rename." The process is irreversible. Exercise caution when refreshing all Opportunity Names! 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, click the NPSP Settings tab, and then click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Refresh Opportunity Names**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Refresh All Opportunity Names**. You can also set up this batch job to automatically run (you determine how often and when) by scheduling the `OPP_OpportunityNaming_BATCH` Apex Class. For more information, see [Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). # Customize Person Account Page Layouts Add Contact Point Addresses, Contact Point Phones, and Contact Point Emails to the Person Account page layout. Add a dynamic related list to the Student Management Account Record Page layout to display the emergency contacts associated with person accounts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add related lists to student records: Education Cloud Full Access
1. In the object management settings for Person Account, add these related lists to the Person Account page layout. - Contact Point Addresses - Contact Point Phones - Contact Point Emails 2. In Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Lightning App Builder**. 3. Next to your Student Management Account Record Page layout, click **Edit**. 4. Drag the **Dynamic Related List - Single** component to the layout. 5. Select **Contact Contact Relationship** as the related list. 6. Enter a label for Related List Label. For example, Emergency Contacts. 7. Save your changes. See Also: - [User Interface Elements for the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customize_layoutcustomize_pd_elements.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Customize Process Builder Automation Update process builder automation included in Case Management. - **[Customize Naming for Program Engagements and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Include relevant terms, or exclude unnecessary ones from the default names of program engagements and service deliveries. - **[Customize Program Engagement Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a user creates a Program Engagement, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name` unless otherwise specified. For Program Engagements without Contacts, the default naming format is `Anonymous Start Date: Program Name`. - **[Customize Service Delivery Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a user creates a Service Delivery, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Service` unless otherwise specified. ## Customize Naming for Program Engagements and Service Deliveries Include relevant terms, or exclude unnecessary ones from the default names of program engagements and service deliveries. ## Customize Program Engagement Naming When a user creates a Program Engagement, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name` unless otherwise specified. For Program Engagements without Contacts, the default naming format is `Anonymous Start Date: Program Name`. You may want to customize your Program Engagement naming. Here are some examples. - If the majority of your Program Engagements don't include Contacts, omit the word “Anonymous” from the automated Program Engagement name. For example, rather than `Anonymous 2020-06-17: Hygiene Kits`, the Program Engagement name could be `2020-06-17: Hygiene Kits`. - If the majority of your Program Engagements reference the Account object, include the Account name in the automated Program Engagement name. For example, if your organization provides services to households, schools, or other nonprofits, your Program Engagements should include the Account name, such as `California Nonprofit Association 2020-06-17: DEI Coaching`. - If the majority of your Program Engagements reference a custom object, include the custom object name in the automated Program Engagement name. For example, if you work with a nonprofit organization that provides spay and neuter services for pets tracked in a custom object called Pets, you might have a Program Engagement named `Buck 2020-07-10: Neuter`. To customize Program Engagement automated naming: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon_1.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Process Builder in the Quick Find box, then click **Process Builder**. 3. Click ![Chevron icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/chevron.png) to expand **Template: Program Engagement Object**. 4. Click the Active version of the Template. 5. Click **Clone**. - Select **A new process**. - Name the process and optionally provide a description. - Click **Save**. 6. Next to the Update Name step, under Immediate Actions, click **Update Name**, then: - To omit the word “Anonymous” from Program Engagements without Contacts, copy the code from [Customize Program Engagement Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When a user creates a Program Engagement, its name follows the format Contact Name Start Date: Program Name unless otherwise specified. For Program Engagements without Contacts, the default naming format is Anonymous Start Date: Program Name."), paste it in the **Value** field. - To include the Account name, copy the sample code from [Add Account or Custom Object To Auto-Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), paste it in the **Value** field. - To include a custom object name, copy the sample code from [Add Account or Custom Object To Auto-Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), paste it in the **Value** field, and customize it to reflect your custom object. 7. Click **Use this Formula**. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Click **Activate** to enable the change. ### Remove "Anonymous" From Auto-Naming To remove the word “Anonymous” from Program Engagements without Contacts, follow the instructions above, and copy and paste this code in the **Value** field, customizing as needed. ``` IF(NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c)),IF( LEN( [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.FirstName + ' ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.LastName + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT(([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.FirstName + ' ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.LastName + ' ' + IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.FirstName + ' ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.LastName + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name ), IF( LEN( IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT((IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name )) ``` ### Add Account or Custom Object To Auto-Naming To include an Account or custom object in Program Engagement naming, follow the instructions above and copy and paste this code in the **Value** field, customizing as needed. If you're referencing a custom object, be sure to update this code for the custom object. ``` IF(NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c)),IF( LEN( [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c.Name + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT(([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c.Name + ' ' + IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c.Name + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name ), IF( LEN( IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT((IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name )) ``` ## Customize Service Delivery Naming When a user creates a Service Delivery, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Service` unless otherwise specified. If the default naming works for your organization, no further customization is needed. However, you may want to customize your Service Delivery naming. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Process Builder in the Quick Find box, then click Process Builder. 3. Click ![Chevron icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/chevron.png) to expand the Template: Service Delivery Object. 4. Click the Active version of the Template. 5. Click **Clone**. - Select **A new process**. - Name the process and optionally provide a description. - Click **Save**. 6. Next to the AutoName step, under Immediate Actions, click **UpdateServiceDelivery**. ![Service Delivery Object template showing UpdateServiceDelivery](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/pb-templateservicedelivery.png) 7. Paste your formula in the **Value** field. 8. Click **Use this Formula**. 9. Click **Save**. 10. Click **Activate**. # Customize Record Pages for Admissions Connect Customize page layouts, record page components, and more to make it easy for your staff to access and manage applications. - **[Admissions Connect Default Page Assets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. You can customize these assets for your institution. For example, you might want to change the fields in the highlights panel, remove or add buttons, or update Tab labels. - **[Customize the Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the fields displayed for the record page, edit the standard buttons, add related lists, and customize other aspects of page layouts. - **[Customize the Compact Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The compact layout controls which fields appear in the highlights panel at the top of the record page. You can customize the default compact layout to remove or include additional fields. - **[Customize the Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Lightning record page controls where components appear on the page. For example, on the Application page you might want the Path component to display below the highlights panel. Or you might want to change the name of some of the tabs on the page, or rearrange them entirely. You make those changes in Lightning App Builder. - **[Customize Test Score Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it easy to enter test information by using record types for the Test Score object. Record types let you configure the relationships between test types and their subject areas. Then, for example, when admission processors select a specific Test Type, they see only the relevant subjects in the Subject Area field. - **[Customize Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your admissions process is unique to your institution. Your process might require you to add or edit picklist values, such as the ones for the Admissions Recommendation field on the Application Review object. Edit picklist values in Setup. - **[Customize the Application Path Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Application page includes a Path component at the top of the page that helps admissions staff quickly view and update the Application Review Status. The Application Review Status field identifies where an Application is in the review process. - **[Customize In-App Guidance for Reviewers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help reviewers understand how recommendations are saved and submitted, customize the Application Review How To - Admissions Staff prompt. This prompt provides reviewers with information about how recommendations are saved and submitted. ## Admissions Connect Default Page Assets Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. You can customize these assets for your institution. For example, you might want to change the fields in the highlights panel, remove or add buttons, or update Tab labels. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Most of these assets are unmanaged, which means you won't receive updates to them automatically. To review detailed information, including a list of the assets and how they're configured, see [Admissions Connect Default Page Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. Most assets are unmanaged, which means you don't receive updates automatically. Use the information in this article to keep up-to-date with releases."). This article includes general steps to customize your record pages. If you’re not familiar with Salesforce and need a bit more help, review the links to Salesforce Help. ## Customize the Page Layout You can change the fields displayed for the record page, edit the standard buttons, add related lists, and customize other aspects of page layouts. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object for the layout you want to edit. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, then click one of our default page layout names. 3. Make your updates and save your changes. For more information, see [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layoutcustomize_pd.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize the Compact Layout The compact layout controls which fields appear in the highlights panel at the top of the record page. You can customize the default compact layout to remove or include additional fields. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object for the layout you want to edit. 2. Click **Compact Layouts**, then click one of our default compact layout names. 3. Make your updates and save your changes. For more information, see [Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=compact_layout_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize the Lightning Record Page The Lightning record page controls where components appear on the page. For example, on the Application page you might want the Path component to display below the highlights panel. Or you might want to change the name of some of the tabs on the page, or rearrange them entirely. You make those changes in Lightning App Builder. You can access the Lightning App Builder in a few ways. - From the Admissions Connect app, go to a record page. Click ![Gear icon with a lightning bolt inside it](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/setup_gear_icon_bolt.png), then click **Edit Page**. - From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object name for the page you want to edit. Click **Lightning Record Pages** and click on one of our default pages. Then click **Edit**. - From Setup, go to the Lightning App Builder page, then click **Edit** next to the page name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure that the Reviewer Application Reader component’s scrolling functionality works, don’t add other components below it on the page. For more information, see [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lightning_app_builder_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize Test Score Record Types Make it easy to enter test information by using record types for the Test Score object. Record types let you configure the relationships between test types and their subject areas. Then, for example, when admission processors select a specific Test Type, they see only the relevant subjects in the Subject Area field. Admissions Connect provides sample Test Score record types that have predefined Subject Area picklist values. The sample Test Score record types include ACT, AP, IB, and SAT. Whether you use the sample record types or create your own, be sure to configure the relationships between the Test Type field on the Test object and Subject Area field on the Test Score object. 1. From the object management settings for Test Score, go to Record Types. 2. Click on a Record Type, and then edit the Subject Area field. 3. Choose the Subject Area values that you want available with the record type. 4. Save your changes. 5. Check to make sure that the appropriate user profiles have access to the Test Score record types. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If creating your own Test Score record type, add a new corresponding value to the Test Type field on the Test object. Make sure that the Test Type and Record Type have the same name. ![Select which values show up in the Subject Area field for a given record type.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_record_type_test_score.png) ## Customize Picklist Values Your admissions process is unique to your institution. Your process might require you to add or edit picklist values, such as the ones for the Admissions Recommendation field on the Application Review object. Edit picklist values in Setup. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object that provides the field you want to customize. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then click the field name. 3. Click **New** in the Picklist Values list. 4. Enter your new values, then save your changes. For more information, see [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=updating_picklists.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize the Application Path Component The Application page includes a Path component at the top of the page that helps admissions staff quickly view and update the Application Review Status. The Application Review Status field identifies where an Application is in the review process. The order of the path is based on the order of the picklist values for the Application Review Status field. You can customize the values and order.  1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Application**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then click **Application Review Status**. 3. Scroll down to the Values section. 4. To reorder the values, click **Reorder**. 5. To add or update existing values, click **New** or **Edit**. 6. Save your changes. The path provides guidance for your admissions team. You can customize the text that displays for each status. You can even add a confetti celebration for when the path is complete.  ![Path component for the Application page with the Guidance for Success region expanded](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_update_status.png) 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Path Settings**. 2. Click **Edit** for the Application Review Status - Admissions path. 3. Follow along with the wizard and update the information you want. If you don’t want to use the path, edit the Application page in Lightning App Builder and remove the Path component.  For more information, see [Guide Users with Path](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=path_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize In-App Guidance for Reviewers To help reviewers understand how recommendations are saved and submitted, customize the Application Review How To - Admissions Staff prompt. This prompt provides reviewers with information about how recommendations are saved and submitted. By default, this prompt is enabled and displays for all users who access an Application Review record. The prompt is displayed two times with two days in between the occurrences. If the reviewer clicks a button to acknowledge the prompt, it’s not shown again.  ![Application Review page with default in-app guidance displayed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/app_in_app_guidance.png) You can customize this prompt to limit it to certain profiles or permissions, and to change the prompt’s message, its placement on the page, or its schedule. You can even add a custom date range so that the prompt only displays during your admissions cycle. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **In-App Guidance**. 2. In the list of prompts, click the dropdown menu for the prompt, then click **Edit**. 3. Click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon_1.png) to customize the prompt’s settings. 4. Save your changes. If you don’t want to use this prompt, select Deactivate or Delete from the dropdown action menu. For more information, see [In-App Guidance in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customhelp_lexguid.htm) in Salesforce Help. # Customize Service Delivery Fields on Bulk Service Delivery Tool (BSDT) Customize recipients, configure quick actions, customize record naming and more. - **[Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create relationships between your Organization Account or custom object and Program Engagements or Service Deliveries. - **[Customize Recipients on Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Bulk Service Deliveries to use Household Account, an Organization Account, a custom object, or to remove Client. - **[Customize Quick Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Services, Program Engagements, and Contacts have a Create New Service Delivery quick action that allows users to create a new Service Delivery from individual records. Customize the quick action for each object to reflect an Organization Account, Household Account, or a custom object. - **[Customize New Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object. - **[Customize Record Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Engagements and Service Deliveries are automatically named to reflect the associated Client. ## Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements and Service Deliveries Create relationships between your Organization Account or custom object and Program Engagements or Service Deliveries. If you haven't already set up a custom object, see ​[Create a Custom Object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=dev_objectcreate_task_parent.htm&type=5)​ before continuing. ### Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements By default, Program Engagements support Clients and Household Accounts, but you can add an Organization Account or custom object by creating a relationship. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Program Engagement**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select **Lookup Relationship**, then click **Next**. 5. Select an object: - For a custom object, select the custom object. - For Organization Account, select **Account**. 6. Click **Next**. 7. In Field Label, enter a name for the field that reflects the recipient, such as the name of the custom object or the type of organization. 8. If you want, enter additional details, then click **Next**. 9. Set appropriate field-level security, then click **Next**. 10. Select the Program Engagement Layout, then click **Next**. 11. Optionally, deselect **Add Related List** next to a page layout name if you don't want to add the object's related list. 12. Save. To remove fields you don’t plan to use, edit the Case Management Program Engagement Layout page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Service Deliveries By default, Service Deliveries support Clients and Household Accounts, but you can add an Organization Account or custom object by creating a relationship. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Service Delivery**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select **Lookup Relationship**, then click **Next**. 5. Select an object: - For a custom object, select the custom object. - For Organization Account, select **Account**. 6. Click **Next**. 7. In Field Label, enter a name for the field that reflects the recipient, such as the name of the custom object or the type of organization. 8. If you want, enter additional details, then click **Next**. 9. Set appropriate field-level security, then click **Next**. 10. Select the Service Delivery Layout, then click **Next**. 11. Optionally, deselect **Add Related List** next to a page layout name if you don't want to add the object's related list. 12. Save. To remove fields you don’t plan to use, edit the Service Delivery Layout page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize Recipients on Bulk Service Deliveries Customize Bulk Service Deliveries to use Household Account, an Organization Account, a custom object, or to remove Client. If your organization uses a custom object or Organization Account, complete the steps in [Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_configure_service_deliveries_to_fit_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create relationships between your Organization Account or custom object and Program Engagements or Service Deliveries.") first. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Service Delivery**. 2. Click **Fields Sets**. 3. Click **Bulk Service Deliveries**. 4. Drag fields to and from the palette and **In the Field Set**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't remove the Service field. The options available in each field are filtered based on user selections in the Program Engagement and Service fields, so we recommend Program Engagement as the first field and Service as the second field, regardless of which fields you add or remove. - To remove Clients, remove the Client field. - For households, add the Household Account field and optionally add the Household Benefit field. - For Organization Accounts, add the lookup field to the Organization Account, which may be named Account or may have a custom name. Remove the Client field to use an Organization Account. - For a custom object, add the lookup field to the custom object. - If you don't use Program Engagements because you don't track recipients of your services, you can remove Program Engagements. 5. To make a field required, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/wrench.png) next to the field, then select **Required**. 6. Click **Save**. ## Customize Quick Actions Services, Program Engagements, and Contacts have a Create New Service Delivery quick action that allows users to create a new Service Delivery from individual records. Customize the quick action for each object to reflect an Organization Account, Household Account, or a custom object. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Service**. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 2. Click **Create New Service Delivery**. 3. Click **Edit Layout**. 4. Drag the fields to and from the palette and the layout. - To remove Clients, remove the Client field. - For households, add the Household Account field. - For Organization Accounts, add the lookup field to the Organization Account, which may be named Account or may have a custom name. - For a custom object, add the lookup field to the custom object. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Repeat these steps, but in step 3, click **Program Engagement** to update the quick action on Program Engagements. 7. If you use Contacts, optionally repeat these steps, but in step 3, click **Contact**. You can only add Household Account to Contact. ## Customize New Case Plans Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object. 1. Navigate to a record of the object you want to modify. 2. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then select **Edit Page**. 3. In the list of components, find **New Case Plan Button** and drag it onto the page. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Click **Activate**, then choose how you want to assign the record page. For more information, see [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 6. Click **Back** to exit Lightning App Builder. ## Customize Record Naming Program Engagements and Service Deliveries are automatically named to reflect the associated Client. Program Engagements follow the format `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name` and Service Deliveries follow the format `Contact Name Start Date: Service`. To change Program Engagement and Service Delivery names to reflect non-Client recipients, see [Customize Record Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&type=5). # Customize the Application Review Experience Review the application review setup and configure it to suit your staff’s tasks. - **[Review the Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As part of Admissions Connect set up, we recommend that you review what the application review experience is like for your admissions staff. Create a sample Application record and assign it Action Plans for one of your programs. Create an Application Review for a user who has the Admissions Connect - Review Applications for Internal Users permission set and another for a user with the Admissions Connect - Verify Applications permission set. Log in as those users and review their experience. Use these questions to help guide your assessment. - **[Customize the Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the page layouts, compact layouts, and Lightning record page as needed. If appropriate, make adjustments to your Application Material Mapping records. - **[Configure the GPA Conversion Scale](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help application processors, the Admissions Connect GPA Converter converts applicants' incoming school GPA to a standard GPA scale.The default GPA scale is 4.0, but you can change the scale. - **[Configure Advanced Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up additional features to help your admissions staff stay focused and efficient. ## Review the Experience As part of Admissions Connect set up, we recommend that you review what the application review experience is like for your admissions staff. Create a sample Application record and assign it Action Plans for one of your programs. Create an Application Review for a user who has the Admissions Connect - Review Applications for Internal Users permission set and another for a user with the Admissions Connect - Verify Applications permission set. Log in as those users and review their experience. Use these questions to help guide your assessment. - Do the highlights panels on both the Application and Application Review pages show the fields you want? - What buttons are displayed in the highlights panels? Do you want your admissions staff to take these actions? Are there actions missing? - Are the requirements ordered as you expected in the navigation? - Do you want admissions staff to see a list of other reviewers in the Reviewers tab? - What happens if a reviewer comes back to an Application or Application Review record after they’ve submitted their Admissions Recommendation? What fields are shown when they click Edit? Should they be allowed to edit their own Review Comments after they’ve submitted a recommendation? ## Customize the Page Update the page layouts, compact layouts, and Lightning record page as needed. If appropriate, make adjustments to your Application Material Mapping records. See [Customize Record Pages for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize page layouts, record page components, and more to make it easy for your staff to access and manage applications.") and [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). ## Configure the GPA Conversion Scale To help application processors, the Admissions Connect GPA Converter converts applicants' incoming school GPA to a standard GPA scale.The default GPA scale is 4.0, but you can change the scale. The GPA Converter custom metadata type is included with the Admissions Connect and includes the following attributes: - Converted GPA field - GPA Scale field - Education History Layout - Admissions Staff page layout ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The Converted GPA field is included on the Education History Layout - Admissions Staff page layout, but you can add the field to any Education History page layout. Be sure to assign the layout to the necessary user profiles. To change the scale used to convert GPAs: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom Metadata Types, and then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Next to GPA Converter, click **Manage Records**. 3. Click **Edit** next to the default GPA Converter. 4. Update the GPA scale and save your changes. The Converted GPA field is recalculated for all Education History records. ![Change the GPA Scale from the GPA Converter Custom Metadata Type.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_gpa_converter.png) ## Configure Advanced Features Set up additional features to help your admissions staff stay focused and efficient. Customize Review Questions Show custom review feedback questions in the Reviewer Feedback component on Application Review records. You can even use visibility settings to show specific questions to different users or when Applications meet certain criteria. For detailed configuration steps, see [Set Up Reviewer Feedback Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the questions that you want your reviewers to consider when they assess applicants."). Add Document Verification Buttons Give your admissions staff Accept and Reject buttons to verify documents directly from the Admissions Connect components. For detailed configuration steps, see [Set Up Quick Document Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let verifiers and other members of your admissions staff verify application documents directly from the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components or the Document Checklist Item record page. From the Document Checklist Item record page, admissions staff can also upload new versions of documents and automatically see the updated document in the preview."). # Customize the Appointment Self-Service Setup Flow The self-service appointment setup flow is built on OmniStudio components that retrieve data from the learners' records. Customize those components to best suit your institution's needs in a user-friendly, click-based interface to offer a rich, personalized experience to your users. Add static or dynamic information to increase learners' engagement and awareness such as by communicating upcoming campus events or holiday closures. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components and OmniStudio Admin permission sets can access this feature. **How**: To customize OmniStudio components, go to the OmniStudio app. See Also: - [Manage the Appointment Experience in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_manage_appt_exp.htm) # Customize the Benefit Schedule Workflow to Address Your Business Needs Customize the prebuilt OmniScript for the benefit schedule workflow to offer an updated guided interaction for your program managers according to their business needs. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Program Management is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the OmniStudio Admin permission set can access this feature. # Customize the Client Card The Client Card displays at the top of a Contact record and shows all of the most important information about a Contact, including name, a photo, contact information, critical alerts, and Client ID. - **[Show or Hide Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit the Client Card to hide Client Alerts, Mailing Address, or the Manage Client ID button. - **[Exclude the Client Photo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove the Client Photo Component from the Client Card. - **[Add the Client Photo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Client Photo component to the Client Card. - **[Customize Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize which fields are displayed on the Client Card. - **[Customize Role Badges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Display badges that denote the roles a Contact plays in your organization; for example, Client, Donor, or Volunteer. - **[Customize the Client ID Generator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To generate Client IDs based on your organization's numbering convention, customize the Client ID Generator. ## Show or Hide Elements Edit the Client Card to hide Client Alerts, Mailing Address, or the Manage Client ID button. 1. Click the **Contacts** tab. 2. Click a Contact’s name. 3. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 4. Click on the Client Card component to edit Client Card Details. ![Edit page showing Client Card component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientcardcomponent.png) 5. Select the elements you want to show. ![Client Card Details checkboxes to control display](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientcarddetails.png) 6. Click **Save**. 7. Use ![Back icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/back.png) to return to the Contact record. In the Client Photo area, you can choose to hide the Badge, Pronouns, or Watchlist. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 2. Click the Client Photo component to edit its elements. ![Edit page showing Client Photo component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientphotocomponent.png) 3. Select the elements you want to show. ![Client Photo component checkboxes to control display](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientphotodetails.png) 4. Click **Save**. 5. Use ![Back icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/back.png) to return to the Contact record. ## Exclude the Client Photo Remove the Client Photo Component from the Client Card. 1. On the Contact detail page, click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 2. Click ![Trash can icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/phototrash.png) in the Client Photo Component. ![Shows an empty component slot after removal of the Client Photo](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/nophotocomponent.png) 3. Drag the Client Card details to the top component slot. ![Shows position of Client Card details to the top component slot](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientcardup2.png) 4. Click **Save**. 5. Use ![Back icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/back.png) to return to the Contact record. The Client card without a photo now looks like this: ![Client Card with no Client Photo component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientcardnophoto.png) ## Add the Client Photo Add the Client Photo component to the Client Card. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Edit Page**. 2. Search for the **Client Photo** component. 3. Drag the component back to the Client Photo slot on the page. ![Drag Client Photo component to photo slot](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/returnphoto.png) 4. Click **Save**. 5. Use ![Back icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/back.png) to return to the Contact record. ## Customize Fields Customize which fields are displayed on the Client Card. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **Client Card**. 6. Drag the field into the Client Card field set and place it where you want it to appear on the Client Card. To remove a field, drag it back to the palette. 7. Click **Save**. ## Customize Role Badges Display badges that denote the roles a Contact plays in your organization; for example, Client, Donor, or Volunteer. By default, the Case Management app includes one role badge, Client. This badge displays on the Client Card under the Client Photo. You can create additional badges as needed. In this example, we'll create a custom Donor Role Badge. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Select **Checkbox**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Enter the details of the checkbox. - Enter a Field Label. In our example, we enter Donor. - Next to Default Value, select **Unchecked**. - The field name is automatically populated. - Optionally, add a description and help text that describes to your users what the checkbox does. ![Field label, name, description and help text for Donor custom field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/rolebadgeisdonor.png) 9. Click **Next**. 10. Select **Visible** for the appropriate profiles, including Case Manager: Salesforce, Case Manager: Salesforce Platform, and System Administrator. ![Profile visibility settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/rolebadgeisdonorviz.png) 11. Click **Next**. 12. Add the field to the **Case Management Layout**. 13. Click **Save**. Next, place the custom field on the Case Management page layout: 1. Click **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Case Management Page Layout**. 3. From the field layout palette, drag the Donor field under the Client field on the page layout. ![Animation showing placement of the Donor field on the page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/fieldisdonorlayout.gif) 4. Click **Save**. Now, add a field to the Role Badges field set: 1. Click **Field Sets**. 2. Click **Role Badges**. 3. Enter the name of the role badge you created in **Quick Find**. In our example, we enter Donor. 4. Drag the Donor field from the palette to In the Field Set, under the Client field. ![Animation showing placement of the Donor field in the Role Badges field set](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/rolebadges_repeat.gif) 5. Click **Save**. ## Customize the Client ID Generator To generate Client IDs based on your organization's numbering convention, customize the Client ID Generator. When a user clicks **Manage Client ID** on a Client Card, then clicks **Generate Random Client ID**, the client is assigned a unique Client ID following a Client ID Pattern. The default Client ID Pattern is 8-randomly generated numbers. You can customize the Client ID Pattern to match the convention used by your organization. Your custom Client ID Pattern must contain at least 8 characters and can use the following placeholders: - % - random number - @ - random letter - Any other character returns itself For example, CL-@@@@%%%% could return CL-RXFD1793 or CL-THDL0485. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 3. Click **Manage** next to Client Settings. 4. Choose the part of your organization to apply the Client ID Pattern to: - To set the Client ID Pattern for everyone, click **New** above Default Organizational Level Value. If a Client ID Pattern already exists, you'll see **Edit** instead of New. Edit the pattern in **Client ID Pattern**, then click **Save**. - To set the Client ID Pattern for a specific profile or user, click **New** above Setup Owner. You can also edit or delete an existing setting. Specify a profile or user, edit the pattern in **Client ID Pattern**, then click **Save**. # Customize the Home Tab Customize your Case Management home tab. - **[Customize the Recent Sessions Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_home_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows users all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. - **[Configure the Contacts Who May Require Followup Dashboard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_home_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you started using Case Management prior to the Summer '21 release (July 13, 2021), perform these setup steps to ensure the that Contacts Who May Require Followup dashboard renders properly. ## Customize the Recent Sessions Component The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows users all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. By default, the Service Sessions shown are those from the All list view on the Service Session tab, but users can select other list views. You can change the Service Session fields that are shown on the Recent Sessions section of the Home tab. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Service Session**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **RecentSessionsView**. 6. Drag fields to or from the palette and the In the Field Set box. 7. Click **Save**. You can also configure additional list views that users can select from the Recent Sessions list. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Service Sessions**. 2. From ![List View Controls menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/list_view_controls_button.png), select **New**. 3. Give the list view a name. Salesforce populates the List API Name automatically. 4. Select **All users can see this list view** or **Share list view with groups of users**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Edit the list view filters and save your changes. ## Configure the Contacts Who May Require Followup Dashboard If you started using Case Management prior to the Summer '21 release (July 13, 2021), perform these setup steps to ensure the that Contacts Who May Require Followup dashboard renders properly. 1. Update the running user for the dashboard. 1. In Case Management, click the **Dashboards** tab. 2. In the row for the Contacts Who May Require Followup dashboard, click ![More actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 3. Click ![Edit dashboard properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/dashboard_properties.png) to edit dashboard properties. 4. In the View Dashboard As section, choose **The Dashboard Viewer**. 5. Click **Save**. 2. Add the report components for the three reports. 1. Back on the dashboard, click **+Component**. 2. Choose the Contacts with 3 Consecutive Absences report, then click **Select**. 3. Change Display As to a Metric Chart. ![Add Component to Dashboard screen, with the Metric Chart icon highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/cm_dash_component.png) 4. Click **Add**. 5. Repeat these steps for the other two reports: - Contacts Absent for Last Svc Delivery - Contacts w/o Recent Service Deliveries 3. Drag the components to arrange them in one horizontal row and resize them to fit the width of the dashboard. ![Edit mode for the Contacts Who May Require Followup dashbard on the Home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/cm_dash_components_arranged.png) 4. Click **Save**, then click **Done**. Return to the Case Management Home page to see the dashboard in action! ![The Contacts Who May Require Followup dashbard on the Home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/cm_dashboard_home.png) # Customize the Home Tab Customize your PMM home tab. - **[Customize the Recent Sessions Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_home_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows users all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. ## Customize the Recent Sessions Component The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows users all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. By default, the Service Sessions shown are those from the All list view on the Service Session tab, but users can select other list views. You can change the Service Session fields that are shown on the Recent Sessions section of the Home tab. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Service Session**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Click **RecentSessionsView**. 6. Drag fields to or from the palette and the In the Field Set box. 7. Click **Save**. You can also configure additional list views that users can select from the Recent Sessions list. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Service Sessions**. 2. From ![List View Controls menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/list_view_controls_button.png), select **New**. 3. Give the list view a name. Salesforce populates the List API Name automatically. 4. Select **All users can see this list view** or **Share list view with groups of users**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Edit the list view filters and save your changes. # Customize the Job Calendar Page Customize the contents of the Job Calendar page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Style the Job Calendar Page with CSS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Job Calendar page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the JobCalendarCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. - **[Change the Job Calendar Color Scheme](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In a given calendar month, each Job (and all of its Shifts) is displayed in a unique color. To change the color scheme, edit the color values that are stored in a custom label. - **[Customize the Job Calendar's Link Text and Styling for Past Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When someone clicks on a past Shift, or a Job with all Shifts in the past, Volunteers for SalesforceVolunteers for Salesforce displays the Job without a signup link. Instead, Volunteers for SalesforceVolunteers for Salesforce shows a message that there are no upcoming shifts and shows the date of the Job's first Shift. - **[IFRAME Tag for the Job Calendar Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Job Calendar page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. - **[Supported URL Parameters for the Job Calendar Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize how jobs and shifts are displayed in the Job Calendar. ## Style the Job Calendar Page with CSS The Job Calendar page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the JobCalendarCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. Follow the instructions provided for [styling the Volunteer Signup form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."), making sure that you edit the JobCalendarCSS.css file. Here's how the page looks with minimal styling. ![Job Calendar page with minimal styling](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_job_calendar.png) ## Change the Job Calendar Color Scheme In a given calendar month, each Job (and all of its Shifts) is displayed in a unique color. To change the color scheme, edit the color values that are stored in a custom label. 1. From Setup, enter Custom Labels in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Labels**. 2. In the list of labels, find and then click **labelColorValues**. 3. Click **New Local Translations/Overrides**. 4. Select your language. 5. In the Translation Text field, enter all of the colors that Jobs can be assigned to. Specify colors by the [names](https://www.w3schools.com/colors/colors_names.asp) that are recognized by most Web browsers, such as PowderBlue or YellowGreen. Don't include spaces within the names, surround each name with double quotes, and separate names with commas. 6. **Save** your changes. Each Job is uniquely assigned to a color and that color remains constant no matter which month of the calendar you're viewing the Job in. While you can control which colors are available, you can't control the color assignments—Volunteers for Salesforce assigns them automatically. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note V4S runs code on the JobID to map it to one of the available colors, so Jobs can end up using the same color. If you want to change the color of a Job, you can play around with adding and removing color names from the custom label, to see if that gives you results you prefer. ## Customize the Job Calendar's Link Text and Styling for Past Shifts When someone clicks on a past Shift, or a Job with all Shifts in the past, Volunteers for SalesforceVolunteers for Salesforce displays the Job without a signup link. Instead, Volunteers for SalesforceVolunteers for Salesforce shows a message that there are no upcoming shifts and shows the date of the Job's first Shift. You can customize the display of past Shifts to visually distinguish them from active Shifts. - Change the text of the message by editing the custom label, labelEventInThePast. See [Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help Volunteers for Salesforce speak the language of your volunteer program, you can replace the existing onscreen text (labels) with alternate text that uses your organization's terminology. Or you can translate all terms in the app into another language.") for more information. - Style past events differently by editing the CSS class, pastEvent, in the VolunteerJobListingCSS file. ## IFRAME Tag for the Job Calendar Page Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Job Calendar page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. Sample IFRAME in HTTP format: ```html ``` Sample IFRAME in HTTPS format: ```html ``` A few reminders to keep your code snippet clean: - mydomain is a placeholder value for your domain name. Be sure to include your actual domain name in place of the placeholder text. - yoursitelabel is a placeholder value for the Default Web Address. Include it only if you specified one when you created your Site. - There are two underscore characters between Volunteers and JobCalendar. - If you're using one or more URL parameters, add them to the end of the URL. Separate the first parameter from the rest of the URL with a ? character. Separate multiple parameters with the & character. ## Supported URL Parameters for the Job Calendar Page Use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize how jobs and shifts are displayed in the Job Calendar. For details about adding URL parameters to an IFRAME tag, see [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."). The Job Calendar supports all the URL parameters that are supported on both Job Listing pages. For the complete list of supported URL parameters for the Job Calendar, refer to the parameters in both of these sections . . . - [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.") - [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.") . . . as well as these additional parameters that are specific to the Job Calendar page:
Name Value Description
CalendarView

agendaWeek

agendaDay

month (default)

 Set the calendar's initial display format.
initialDate Today's date (default) in the format yyyy-mm-dd Set the calendar's initial display date. For example, setting this parameter to 2017-03-01 will set the calendar to display March 2017.
Print

0 (don't optimize; default)

1 (optimize)

 Show the calendar in a view that's optimized for printing on a single page.
ShowNumberAvailable

0 (hide; default)

1 (show)

Show the number of volunteers confirmed and the number still available for each Shift.

  • In a tooltip on the Shift when viewed in Month format.
  • In the Shift when viewed in Week or Day format.
Note
Note We repeat this listing of the same parameter from VolunteersJobListingFS to highlight the small differences in how the Job Calendar displays the information.
# Customize the Self-Service Appointment Setup Flow Salesforce provides the EDUScheduler Omniscript that you can customize in a user-friendly, click-based interface to offer a rich, personalized self-service appointment experience to your staff and learners.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Omniscript retrieves data to display on the pages of the appointment setup flow from the learner’s records. For example, the list of available staff members come from who’s assigned to the learner’s case record. For information about customizing Omnistudio components, see [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The SetMinsPriorToJoining step of the Omniscript represents the earliest that attendees can join an appointment, using values from the service appointment. If you edit that value on the script, make sure to enter a number of minutes in quotes. # Customize the Single Gift Entry Form Customize the Single Gift Entry form to fit the way your org enters gifts. The Single Gift Entry form is designed to be a single-page solution for entering every important detail about your gifts. However, Salesforce is a platform that lets you customize your solution, so it’d be a real shame if you couldn’t use your customizations here too, right? To that end, you can add your own custom fields to the Single Gift Entry form, and even make certain fields dependent on others, so that they appear only when a field is set to a specific value. - **[Change the Single Gift Entry Form Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_customize_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add sections and fields to the Single Gift Entry Form layout. - **[Set Up Dynamic Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_customize_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the dynamic fields feature, additional fields appear immediately when another field is set to a specific value. ## Change the Single Gift Entry Form Layout Add sections and fields to the Single Gift Entry Form layout. GEM uses a standard Salesforce page layout as its interface, letting you define the fields in the Single Gift Entry form. The top section (labeled “DO NOT EDIT”) is not editable, but you can change the layout of fields and field sections below it. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Single Gift Entry Customization**. 6. Drag a Section from the palette to below the section marked “DO NOT EDIT.” 1. Name the section, but do not change any of the other Section Properties. 2. Click **OK**. 3. Repeat as needed to add more sections. 7. Now drag fields into the sections you just created. 8. Click **Save**. Some things to note regarding the fields here: - You can make a field required on the page layout. This makes the field required on the Single Gift Entry form as well. - The Tribute and Matching Gift sections on the page layout are fully editable; you can add fields, remove them, or even remove the entire sections. - You can’t remove fields from the section marked "DO NOT EDIT." - Related lists aren’t currently supported. - These field types are supported: Currency, Date, Date/Time, Email, Lookup, Number, Percent, Phone, Text, Text (Long), Text (Rich), URL. Checkbox is supported only when set up in a specific way; see [Mapping a Checkbox in NPSP Data Import Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm) in the NPSP documentation for more information. - Neither dependent picklists, nor their controlling picklists, are supported. - Don’t forget to add any fields added here to your page layouts as well. Keep in mind that if you add a field to this page layout as you’re creating it, it's added to the DO NOT EDIT section and must be moved. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_important.png) Important Do not delete or change the name of this page layout! GEM looks for this page layout by name, and if it can't find it, the Single Gift Entry form doesn't load. If you inadvertently delete it, contact Salesforce Customer Support. After you've added your fields to the page layout, you must map the fields in the NPSP Data Import object. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_important.png) Important If you enabled Advanced Mapping, you should use the Advanced Mapping interface to connect the fields. For information about connecting fields, see [Connect Objects and Fields with Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm) in the NPSP documentation. To use Help Text mapping, follow these steps for each field that you added to the form: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **NPSP Data Import**. 4. Click **Fields and Relationships**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Create a custom field that corresponds to the added field. Make sure the field meets these requirements. 1. The field type should match the type of the original field, with one exception: we recommend using the Text type to correspond to a source picklist field. This difference doesn't cause any problems, and saves you from maintaining multiple picklist fields in the NPSP Data Import object if you need to make changes. 2. The Help Text _must_ contain the API definition of the added field, specifically the object name and the field name. For example, if you’re adding the Opportunity field, Stock Ticker, the Help Text must contain “Opportunity.Stock\_Ticker\_\_c." 7. Click **Save**. After you've created the fields, be sure to grant the new field permissions to any user with Single Gift Entry permissions. ## Set Up Dynamic Fields With the dynamic fields feature, additional fields appear immediately when another field is set to a specific value. Some pieces of data need to be collected only some of the time, so why take up space on the Single Gift Entry form until they're needed? With the dynamic fields feature, additional fields appear immediately when another field is set to a specific value, without having to first save the record. Currently, the only field that can trigger the appearance of additional fields is Payment Method. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note Configuring dependent Single Gift Entry fields requires knowing how to format a JSON input. This is similar to writing—and requires some familiarity with—basic code. Feel free to try things here (pay attention to existing formatting and Copy/Paste where you can), but make sure you preserve a copy of the original Dependent Field List value before making changes to it, in case you need to restore it. To change Payment Method dependencies: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Custom Metadata Types in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Click **Manage Records** next to Gift Entry Field Mapping. 4. Click **Edit** next to Payment. 5. This action displays the editable list of data that enables the field dependency. Edit only the **Dependent Field List** field. All other fields on this page must remain as they are for the dependency to work. 6. Click and hold the bottom-right corner of the **Dependent Field List** field, dragging it out to a comfortable, fully visible size. 7. Edit the JSON entry. 8. Click **Save**. # Customize the Student Details Component Customize the Student Details component in the Student Success Hub app to show the most relevant data for your support staff. The Student Details component on the Student Record Case layout in the app shows information about a student that complements the information in the Student Snapshot. It pulls its data from the Contact related record. The default configuration depends on the Student Success Hub org you install. By default, in K-12 orgs, the Student Details component shows these Contact fields. - Name - Student ID - Primary Educational Institution - Current Grade Level - Gender - Ethnicity - Email - Home Phone By default, higher ed orgs include a Contact Details component that we recommend customizing to make it a more useful Student Details component for your support staff. - **[Customize the K-12 Student Details Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_details.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Select the information to show in the K-12 Student Snapshot. - **[Customize the Higher Ed Contact Details Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_details.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In higher ed Student Success Hub orgs, to make the Contact Details component on the Student Record layout the most useful to support staff, we recommend customizing it. ## Customize the K-12 Student Details Component Select the information to show in the K-12 Student Snapshot. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Contact**. 2. On the Buttons, Links, and Actions page, click the **Student Panel** label and then click **Edit Layout**. 3. Drag any fields you don't want off the panel, and drag other fields onto the panel. 4. Save your changes and return to the app to see the customized Student Details panel. You may need to refresh the page. ## Customize the Higher Ed Contact Details Component In higher ed Student Success Hub orgs, to make the Contact Details component on the Student Record layout the most useful to support staff, we recommend customizing it. Here's a sample customization. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to any Student Record Case record. 2. From the page header, click the gear icon and select **Edit Page**. 3. In Lightning App Builder, select the **Contact Details** component. ![The Contact Details component selected in Lightning App Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_contact_details_component_hed.png) 4. In the Related Record properties panel, enter the Header Label Student Details. 5. Leave the Lookup Field as Contact Name. The component's layout and contents are determined by a custom action on the Contact. The default Update Action is Update Contact. We're going to change this, but first we must configure the action we're going to use. 6. Save your changes and then exit the Lightning App Builder. 7. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Contact**. 8. On the Buttons, Links, and Actions page, click **New Action**. 9. On the Contact Actions New Action page, for Action Type, choose **Update a Record**. 10. For Label, enter Student Panel, and then tab to populate Name with **Student\_Panel**. 11. Save your changes. 12. Back on the Buttons, Links, and Actions page, click the **Student Panel** label and then click **Edit Layout**. 13. Remove Account Name and Title so that only Name, Email, and Phone remain. 14. Save your changes. 15. Go back to Lightning App Builder for the Student Record Case page and select the recently renamed **Student Details** component. 16. In the Related Record properties panel, for Update Action, choose **Student Panel**. The Student Details panel refreshes and shows the student's Name, Email, and Phone. 17. Save your changes in Lightning App Builder and return to the app to see the customized Student Details panel. You may need to refresh the page. ![A customized Student Details component showing the student's Name, Email, and Phone](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_contact_details_customized.png) # Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If your org has 1,000 or more volunteer jobs—marked as **Display on Website**—from active Campaigns, the Volunteer Jobs page will not render properly and won't include the appropriate shifts for sign up. - **[Choose Between Two Versions of the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce offers two versions of the job listing page. Decide which one works best for your setup. - **[Customize Job Listing Fields (VolunteersJobListingFS Only)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Job Listing page includes a signup form for volunteers to register for a specific Job or Shift. - **[Show Job Location on a Map](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it even easier for your volunteers to commit to a Job by showing its location on a map. This feature relies on the Google Maps Embed API and the information in the location address fields on Volunteer Job records. - **[Link Volunteers to an External Signup Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have a separate system for managing Job signups, Volunteers for Salesforce can show a signup link that directs the interested volunteer to an external registration site. - **[Style the Volunteer Job Listing Page with CSS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Job Listing page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersJobListingCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. - **[IFRAME Tag for the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Volunteer Job Listing page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. - **[Supported URL Parameters for Both Volunteer Job Listing Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize how Jobs and Shifts are displayed in the job listing, regardless of whether you're using VolunteersJobListing or VolunteersJobListingFS. - **[Additional Supported URL Parameters for the VolunteersJobListingFS Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're using VolunteersJobListingFS, use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize how Jobs and Shifts are displayed in the job listing. ## Choose Between Two Versions of the Volunteer Job Listing Page Volunteers for Salesforce offers two versions of the job listing page. Decide which one works best for your setup. | Form Name | Fields Customization | Can Style with CSS? | | --- | --- | --- | | GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListingFS (recommended) | Yes, using the VolunteersJobListingFS | Yes | | GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListing | No | Yes | ## Customize Job Listing Fields (VolunteersJobListingFS Only) The Job Listing page includes a signup form for volunteers to register for a specific Job or Shift. It always requires First Name, Last Name, and Email, because these fields are used for matching volunteers to existing Contacts. The Number of Volunteers field is also required. If you use the GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListingFS page (not GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListing), you can customize the popup signup form to include any standard or custom field from the Contact object or the Volunteer Hours object. You may remember that you've already configured field sets for the Volunteers Wizard and other V4S pages. On the Object Manager tab in Setup, go to **Contacts** | **Field Sets** and click **VolunteersJobListingFS**. Refer to [Configure Fields in Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization.") for instructions on how to customize field sets. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If any fields you added to the field set don't appear on your Job Listing sign-up form, they might not be enabled for the Site Guest User profile. An error message at the top of the Job Listing page indicates which fields to enable. ![Field error on web page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/missing_field_access_error.png) Go to the Site Detail page and update the Public Access Settings for the Site Guest User profile. You previously configured the [Public Access Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_config_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The last step in configuring data access is making sure your Site's public access settings give permission to read, create, and edit the dozen or so objects that Volunteers for Salesforce needs to do its job."), but if you or another admin have added custom fields since that update, they may need to be updated again. Here's how the page might look with some customizations. ![Volunteer Sign Up form on the Job Listings page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_shift_signup.png) ## Show Job Location on a Map Make it even easier for your volunteers to commit to a Job by showing its location on a map. This feature relies on the Google Maps Embed API and the information in the location address fields on Volunteer Job records. For details about working with the Google Maps APIs, see the maps documentation in the [Google Developer Guide](https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/embed/guide). 1. Get a [Google API key](https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/embed/get-api-key). 2. Store the Google API Key in V4S Custom Settings. 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Volunteers Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**, then in the Google Maps API Key field, paste your API key. 4. **Save** your changes. 3. Verify that your copy of VolunteersJobListingCSS.css includes a CSS class for the Google Map IFRAME. Edit this markup as needed. ```html .cssGoogleMapIFrame { height: 300px; width: 400px; border: 0; } ``` Now, when you display the VolunteersJobListingFS page with the ShowLocationMap URL parameter set to 1, and the Job has location address fields filled out, the map is displayed. ## Link Volunteers to an External Signup Website If you have a separate system for managing Job signups, Volunteers for Salesforce can show a signup link that directs the interested volunteer to an external registration site. ![External sign up link on website job listing](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/external_signup_link_on_website.png) Create external signup links on a per-Job basis. Specify a URL in the External Signup Url field for the Job record. It must start with http, https, or mailto. That's all it takes to display a link. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The validation rule, ValidateExternalSignupUrl, ensures that the External Signup Url value begins with http, https, or mailto. If this causes problems in your org, you can [deactivate the validation rule](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_activating_field_validation_rules.htm&type=5). But, we recommend that you create your own validation rule to make sure the field is secure. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the External Signup Url field on the Job record, your Admin may need to add it to the Volunteer Job page layout and enable field permissions for the appropriate profiles. ![Enternal Signup URL on the Job](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/job_external_signup_url.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If the Volunteer Job's External Signup Url field has a value, but the link on the Job Listing page is still displaying the default internal signup link, verify that the Site Guest User profile has read access to the External Signup Url field on Volunteer Job. To change the link text to show something other than "external site," edit the custom label, labelExternalSignUpUrl. See [Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help Volunteers for Salesforce speak the language of your volunteer program, you can replace the existing onscreen text (labels) with alternate text that uses your organization's terminology. Or you can translate all terms in the app into another language."). To style the link or the listing detail differently, edit these CSS classes in the VolunteerJobListingCSS file: - externalJobLink - externalJob ## Style the Volunteer Job Listing Page with CSS The Volunteer Job Listing page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersJobListingCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. Follow the instructions provided for [styling the Volunteer Signup page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."), making sure that you edit the VolunteersJobListingCSS.css file. Here's how the page looks with minimal styling. ![Job Listings page with minimal styling](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_job_listings.png) ## IFRAME Tag for the Volunteer Job Listing Page Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Volunteer Job Listing page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. ```html ``` Sample IFRAME in HTTPS format: ```html ``` A few reminders to keep your code snippet clean: - mydomain is a placeholder value for your domain name. Be sure to include your actual domain name in place of the placeholder text. - yoursitelabel is a placeholder value for the Default Web Address. Include it only if you specified one when you created your Site. - Are you using the VolunteersJobListing page instead of VolunteersJobListingFS? Specify the right one. - There are two underscore characters between Volunteers and VolunteersJobListingFS. - If you're using one or more URL parameters, add them to the end of the URL. Separate the first parameter from the rest of the URL with a ? character. Separate multiple parameters with the & character. ## Supported URL Parameters for Both Volunteer Job Listing Pages Use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize how Jobs and Shifts are displayed in the job listing, regardless of whether you're using VolunteersJobListing or VolunteersJobListingFS. Add parameter names and values to the end of the URL in your IFRAME tag. Remember to: - Use a `?` character to separate the first parameter from the rest of the URL. - Use an `&` character to separate each parameter. Here's an example VolunteersJobListingFS IFRAME tag with two parameters (ShowSkills and JobID) in the last part of the URL. ```html ```
Name Value Description
CampaignId

Campaign's 15-character Salesforce ID (show a single Campaign)

null (default)

Display only the Jobs from the specified Campaign. For example: CampaignID=701410000006Qx1AAE.

Otherwise, leave blank to display all active Campaigns.
JobID

Job's 15-character Salesforce ID (show a single Job)

null (default)

Display only the specified Job. For example: JobID=a0T41000003jEKcEAM.

Otherwise, leave blank to display all active Jobs.

Note
Note Not supported on the Job Calendar Page.
ShowCampaignHierarchy

0 (hide; default)

1 (show)

 If CampaignId is specified, also show all active Campaigns that are its children.
ShowDescription

0 (hide)

1 (show; default)

 Show the Job's description.
ShowJobName

0 (hide)

1 (show; default)

 Show the Job's name.
ShowLocationAddress

0 (hide)

1 (show; default)

 Show the Job's address.
ShowLocationInfo

0 (hide)

1 (show; default)

 Show location details from the Job's Location Information field.
ShowSkills

0 (hide; default)

1 (show)

 Show the job's desired skills in a semicolon-separated list.
## Additional Supported URL Parameters for the VolunteersJobListingFS Page If you're using VolunteersJobListingFS, use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize how Jobs and Shifts are displayed in the job listing. For details about adding URL parameters to an IFRAME tag, see [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.").
Name Value Description
DateFormat EEEE m/d/yyyy (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display Shift dates. The default string displays the day as text, followed by the month, date, and year. For example: Thursday 4/6/2017.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported character sets with standard punctuation for date formatting (forward slashes, hyphens, commas, and so on).

  • MM—Include a leading zero for the first nine months of the year, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Display the first nine months of the year without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • dd—Include a leading zero for the first nine days of the month, such as 02, 09.
  • d—Display the first nine days of the month without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • yyyy—Display a four-digit year, such as 2017.
  • yy—Display a two-digit year, such as 17.
  • EEEE—Display the day as text, such as Thursday.
dtMonthFilter Today's current month in the format yyyy-mm-dd (default) The initial month to show data for. For example, to show all shifts for March 2017, dtMonthFilter=2017-03-01.
Language en (default)

Display the labels that have been translated in Salesforce into a different language. Identify the language using a two-character language code, such as en, or a five-character locale code, such as en_AU. (See Supported Languages in the Salesforce Help.)

V4S supports these languages out of the box:

  • Dutch (nl_NL)
  • English (en)
  • French (fr)
  • German (de)
  • Japanese (ja)
  • Spanish (es)

You can create your own translations in other languages. See Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology.

The specified language overrides the language that users have set in their Salesforce personal settings.
nDaysToShow 0 (default) Number of days' worth of Shifts to show per Job. Set to 1 to show a specific day's Shifts. When set to 0, we ignore this parameter. When set to anything other than 0, this value overrides nMonthsToShow.
nMonthsToShow 3 (default) Number of months' worth of Shifts to show per Job. (You don't want huge lists of Shifts for Recurring Jobs taking up too much screen real estate.)
ShowLocationMap

0 (hide)

1 (show; default)

 Show a map of the Job's location. Requires that you complete the setup steps to show Job location on a map.
ShowNumberAvailable

0 (hide; default)

1 (show)

 Show the number of volunteers confirmed and the number still available for each Shift.
TimeFormat h:mm tt (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display Shift times. The default string displays the time of day as hour and minutes with a.m. or p.m. For example: 9:30 am.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported sets of characters with standard punctuation for time formatting.

  • hh—Use 12-hour time and include a leading zero for the first nine hours of the day, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Use 12-hour time and display the first nine hours of the day without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • HH—Use 24-hour time and include a leading zero for the first nine hours of the day, such as 02, 09.
  • H—Use 24-hour time and display the first nine hours of the day without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • mm—Display minutes with a leading zero for the first nine minutes of the hour, such as 03, 06.
  • m—Display minutes without a leading zero for the first nine minutes of the hour, such as 3, 6.
  • tt—Display the time period as am or pm.
volunteerShiftId

Shift's 15-character Salesforce ID (show a single Shift)

null (default)

Display only the specified Shift. Always specify the JobID parameter along with volunteerShiftId. For example: JobID=a0T41000003jEKcEAM&volunteerShiftId=.

If Shifts recur and nMonthsToShow is set to 0, show only a single Shift. If nMonthsToShow is set to 1, show the Shifts for the month.

Otherwise, leave blank to display all upcoming Shifts for the number of months' specified in nMonthsToShow.
# Customize the Volunteer Report Hours Page Customize the contents of the Volunteer Report Hours page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Customize the Fields in the Volunteer Report Hours Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_report_hours.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the fields displayed in the Volunteer Report Hours page to make it more usable for volunteers. For example, expose the Comments field so that volunteers can leave feedback on their experience. You can include any standard or custom field on the page, as long as it's from the Volunteer Hours object. - **[Style the Volunteer Report Hours Page with CSS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_report_hours.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Report Hours page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersReportHoursCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. - **[IFRAME Tag for the Volunteer Report Hours Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_report_hours.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Volunteer Report Hours page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. - **[Supported URL Parameters for the Volunteer Report Hours Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_report_hours.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize the page for volunteers reporting their hours worked. ## Customize the Fields in the Volunteer Report Hours Page Customize the fields displayed in the Volunteer Report Hours page to make it more usable for volunteers. For example, expose the Comments field so that volunteers can leave feedback on their experience. You can include any standard or custom field on the page, as long as it's from the Volunteer Hours object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note On this page, V4S displays only a subset of all Job and Shift records. Especially if you have a lot of recurring events, keeping the drop-down lists to a reasonable length makes it easier for volunteers to find the Jobs and Shifts that they worked. - Volunteer Job displays only active Jobs, under active Campaigns. - Volunteer Shift displays only the Shifts that are scheduled within a three-month window of last month, this month, and next month. You may remember that you've already configured field sets for the Volunteers Wizard and other V4S pages. To customize the VolunteersReportHoursFS field set, on the Object Manager tab in Setup, click **Contacts** | **Field Sets**, then click **VolunteersReportHoursFS**. Refer to [Configure Fields in Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization.") for instructions on how to customize field sets. **Troubleshooting Tip**: If any fields you added to the field set don't appear on your Volunteer Report Hours page, they might not be enabled for the Site Guest User profile. An error message at the top of the page indicates which fields to enable. Go to the Site Detail page and update the [Public Access Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_config_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The last step in configuring data access is making sure your Site's public access settings give permission to read, create, and edit the dozen or so objects that Volunteers for Salesforce needs to do its job.") for the Site Guest User profile. You previously configured the Public Access Settings, but if you or another admin have added custom fields since that update, they may need to be updated again. ## Style the Volunteer Report Hours Page with CSS The Volunteer Report Hours page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersReportHoursCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. Follow the instructions provided for [styling the Volunteer Signup page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."), making sure that you edit the VolunteersReportHoursCSS.css file. ## IFRAME Tag for the Volunteer Report Hours Page Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Volunteer Report Hours page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. Sample IFRAME in HTTP format: ```html ``` Sample IFRAME in HTTPS format: ```html ``` A few reminders to keep your code snippet clean: - mydomain is a placeholder value for your domain name. Be sure to include your actual domain name in place of the placeholder text. - yoursitelabel is a placeholder value for the Default Web Address. Include it only if you specified one when you created your Site. - There are two underscore characters between `Volunteers` and `VolunteersReportHours`. - If you're using one or more URL parameters, add them to the end of the URL. Separate the first parameter from the rest of the URL with a ? character. Separate multiple parameters with the & character. ## Supported URL Parameters for the Volunteer Report Hours Page Use one or more of these optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize the page for volunteers reporting their hours worked. For details about adding URL parameters to an IFRAME tag, see [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.").
Name Value Description
DateFormat EEEE m/d/yyyy (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display Shift dates. The default string displays the day as text, followed by the month, date, and year. For example: Thursday 4/6/2017.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported character sets with standard punctuation for date formatting (forward slashes, hyphens, commas, and so on).

  • MM—Include a leading zero for the first nine months of the year, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Display the first nine months of the year without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • dd—Include a leading zero for the first nine days of the month, such as 02, 09.
  • d—Display the first nine days of the month without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • yyyy—Display a four-digit year, such as 2017.
  • yy—Display a two-digit year, such as 17.
  • EEEE—Display the day as text, such as Thursday.
Language en (default)

Display the labels that have been translated in Salesforce into a different language. Identify the language using a two-character language code, such as en, or a five-character locale code, such as en_AU. (See Supported Languages in the Salesforce Help.)

Volunteers for Salesforce supports these languages out of the box:

  • Dutch (nl_NL)
  • English (en)
  • French (fr)
  • German (de)
  • Japanese (ja)
  • Spanish (es)

You can create your own translations in other languages. See Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology.

The specified language overrides the language that users have set in their Salesforce personal settings.
TimeFormat h:mm tt (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display Shift times. The default string displays the time of day as hour and minutes with a.m. or p.m. For example: 9:30 am.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported sets of characters with standard punctuation for time formatting.

  • hh—Use 12-hour time and include a leading zero for the first nine hours of the day, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Use 12-hour time and display the first nine hours of the day without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • HH—Use 24-hour time and include a leading zero for the first nine hours of the day, such as 02, 09.
  • H—Use 24-hour time and display the first nine hours of the day without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • mm—Display minutes with a leading zero for the first nine minutes of the hour, such as 03, 06.
  • m—Display minutes without a leading zero for the first nine minutes of the hour, such as 3, 6.
  • tt—Display the time period as am or pm.
# Customize the Volunteer Signup Page Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Customize Volunteer Signup Page](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hkU9oCjBHDc) - **[Choose Between Two Versions of the Volunteer Signup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce offers two versions of the Volunteer Signup page, with the recommendation to use the newer, customizable one that creates Contacts (not Leads) from new general interest signups. The VolunteersSignupFS page is more flexible and simplifies your business process—skipping the step of converting a Lead to a Contact. If you're required to use Leads instead, we offer a couple of options. - **[Customize Volunteer Signup Fields (VolunteersSignupFS only)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the fields displayed in the Volunteer Signup page to capture the volunteer information you care about. For example, replace Business Phone with Mobile Phone, or make a minimalist signup form that asks for name and email only. If you use the GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS page (not GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignup), you can customize the page to include any standard or custom field from the Contact object. - **[Specify Field Mappings for Converting Leads to Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use a signup page that creates Leads from signups, then the Lead record gets converted to a Contact record some time later in the volunteer's lifecycle. Salesforce calls this process lead conversion. Let's define a simple one-to-one mapping of the volunteer fields to make sure information is copied cleanly from the Lead to the Contact. - **[Style the Volunteer Signup Form with CSS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Signup form page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersSignupCss.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS file with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. - **[IFRAME Tag for the Volunteer Signup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Volunteer Signup page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. ## Choose Between Two Versions of the Volunteer Signup Page Volunteers for Salesforce offers two versions of the Volunteer Signup page, with the recommendation to use the newer, customizable one that creates Contacts (not Leads) from new general interest signups. The VolunteersSignupFS page is more flexible and simplifies your business process—skipping the step of converting a Lead to a Contact. If you're required to use Leads instead, we offer a couple of options. | Form Name | Can Create from Signups | Fields Customizable? | Can Style with CSS? | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS (recommended) | Contacts only—not Leads | Yes, using the VolunteersSignupFS field set | Yes | | GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignup | Either Contacts or Leads, depending on your Custom Settings | No | Yes | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note What if you require signups to be created as Leads, but want to be able to customize which fields are displayed on the form? Consider using Salesforce's Web-to-Lead form instead of one of the V4S signup forms. Web-to-Lead generates a lead capture form for you (in HTML), which you can then provide to your web developer to add to your website. Learn more about [Web-to-Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=setting_up_web-to-lead.htm) in the Salesforce Help. ## Customize Volunteer Signup Fields (VolunteersSignupFS only) Customize the fields displayed in the Volunteer Signup page to capture the volunteer information you care about. For example, replace Business Phone with Mobile Phone, or make a minimalist signup form that asks for name and email only. If you use the GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS page (not GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignup), you can customize the page to include any standard or custom field from the Contact object. You may remember that you already configured field sets for the Volunteers Wizard and other V4S pages. To customize the VolunteersSignupFS field set, on the Object Manager tab in Setup, click **Contacts** | **Field Sets**, then click **VolunteersSignupFS**. Refer to [Configure Fields in Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization.") for instructions on how to customize field sets. **Troubleshooting Tip**: If any fields you added to the field set don't appear on your signup form, they might not be enabled for the Site Guest User profile. An error message at the top of the page indicates which fields to enable. Go to the Site Detail page and update the [Public Access Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_config_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The last step in configuring data access is making sure your Site's public access settings give permission to read, create, and edit the dozen or so objects that Volunteers for Salesforce needs to do its job.") for the Site Guest User profile. You previously configured the Public Access Settings, but if custom fields were added since that update, you may need to update the Public Access Settings again. ## Specify Field Mappings for Converting Leads to Contacts If you use a signup page that creates Leads from signups, then the Lead record gets converted to a Contact record some time later in the volunteer's lifecycle. Salesforce calls this process lead conversion. Let's define a simple one-to-one mapping of the volunteer fields to make sure information is copied cleanly from the Lead to the Contact. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Lead**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **Map Lead Fields**. ![Map Lead Fields button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/lead_map_lead_fields_button.png) 5. Click the Contact tab. 6. Specify values for these Contact fields to match the corresponding field from the Lead record. - Volunteer Availability - Volunteer Notes - Volunteer Skills - Volunteer Status ![Lead field mapping for Volunteers fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/lead_field_mappings.png) 7. **Save** your changes. ## Style the Volunteer Signup Form with CSS The Volunteer Signup form page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersSignupCss.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS file with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. 1. If you're working in Lightning Experience, [switch to Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lex_switching_uis.htm) so you can access Documents. 2. Go to the **Documents** tab. (If you don't see the Documents tab, click the + icon at the end of the tab bar, then click Documents in the list of All Tabs.) 3. Select the Volunteers Documents folder. ![Seleciting the Volunteers Documents folder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/documents_choose_volunteers_folder.png) 4. Next to VolunteersSignupCSS.css, click **View**. ![View link next to the VolunteersSignupCSS document](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/documents_view_volunteersignup_css.png) 5. Copy the CSS into your favorite text editor. Note that the file includes a commented-out "ugly" version of CSS—a high contrast version that's hard on the eyes but an easy way to see which parts of the signup page you can style. ![Sample CSS](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/sample_css.png) Here is an example of what the basic sample CSS looks like on a website. ![Web page with basic css](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/page_with_basic_css.png) 6. Work with your web developer to update this CSS as needed, and then save it to your local computer as VolunteersSignupCss.css. 7. Back on the Documents tab, upload your file. 1. Select the **Volunteers Documents** folder. 2. Click VolunteersSignupCSS.css. 3. Click **Replace Document**. ![Replace document](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/documents_replace_file.png) 4. Browse for your local copy of VolunteersSignupCss.css, and then click **Replace Document**. 8. Verify the new styles in the Volunteer Sign-Up form by refreshing the page at the same URL you used when testing your site. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If the styling is unchanged, try clearing your browser's cache and refreshing again, or open the page in a private browsing window **Upgraders**: If you're upgrading from an earlier version, newer versions of Volunteers for Salesforce sometimes offer updated CSS files (check the release notes). However, your existing CSS files in Documents are not overwritten during the upgrade process. Get the latest version of the CSS files from the [Volunteers for Salesforce source code in GitHub](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/volunteers-for-salesforce/releases/tag/rel/3.95), and manually update yours to match the latest. ## IFRAME Tag for the Volunteer Signup Page Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Volunteer Signup page into your website. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. Sample IFRAME in HTTP format: ```html ``` Sample IFRAME in HTTPS format: ```html ``` A few reminders to keep your code snippet clean: - mydomain is a placeholder value for your domain name. Be sure to include your actual domain name in place of the placeholder text. - yoursitelabel is a placeholder value for the Default Web Address. Include it only if you specified one when you created your Site. - Are you using the VolunteersSignup page instead of VolunteersSignupFS? Specify the right one. - There are two underscore characters between Volunteers and VolunteersSignupFS. # Customize the Volunteers Personal Site Contact Information Page Learn how to configure fields, URL parameters, and formatting on the Personal Site Information page. - **[Customize the Fields on the Personal Site Contact Information Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_info_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The four panels on the Personal Site Information page are controlled by a field set for each panel. Edit these field sets to display your desired combination of standard and custom fields. - **[Supported URL Parameters for the Personal Site Contact Info Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_info_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize individual volunteers' Personal Site pages. - **[Style the Personal Site Contact Lookup Page with CSS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_info_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Personal Site Contact Lookup page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. ## Customize the Fields on the Personal Site Contact Information Page The four panels on the Personal Site Information page are controlled by a field set for each panel. Edit these field sets to display your desired combination of standard and custom fields. ![Personal Site website page with callouts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_personal_site_with_callouts.png) | Field Set Name | Object | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | PersonalSiteContactInfoHistory (1) | Volunteer Hours | Controls the fields in Your Recent Volunteer History list. | | PersonalSiteContactInfoUpcomingShifts (2) | Volunteer Hours | Controls the fields in the Scheduled Volunteer Shifts list. | | PersonalSiteContactInfoPanel1FS (3) | Contact | Controls the fields in the volunteer's personal information panel in the top left of the page. | | PersonalSiteContactInfoPanel2FS (4) | Contact | Controls the fields in the volunteer's personal statistics panel. | ## Supported URL Parameters for the Personal Site Contact Info Page Use the optional URL parameters in your IFRAME tag to further customize individual volunteers' Personal Site pages. For details about adding URL parameters to an IFRAME tag, see [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.").
Name Value Description
ChartDateFormat MMM yyyy (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display dates on the X axis of the personal Volunteer Hours chart. The default string displays the month as a three-letter abbreviation followed by a four-digit year. For example: Apr 2017.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported character sets with standard punctuation for date formatting (forward slashes, hyphens, commas, and so on).

  • MM—Include a leading zero for the first nine months of the year, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Display the first nine months of the year without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • MMM—Display the month as a three-letter abbreviation, such as Apr (English only).
  • dd—Include a leading zero for the first nine days of the month, such as 02, 09.
  • d—Display the first nine days of the month without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • yyyy—Display a four-digit year, such as 2017.
  • yy—Display a two-digit year, such as 17.
  • EEEE—Display the day as text, such as Thursday.
ContactId (required parameter) Contact's 15-character Salesforce ID ID of the Contact whose page is being displayed
DateFormat E m/d/yy (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display Shift dates. The default string displays the day as text, followed by the month, date, and year. For example: Thu 4/16/17.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported character sets with standard punctuation for date formatting (forward slashes, hyphens, commas, and so on).

  • MM—Include a leading zero for the first nine months of the year, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Display the first nine months of the year without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • dd—Include a leading zero for the first nine days of the month, such as 02, 09.
  • d—Display the first nine days of the month without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • yyyy—Display a four-digit year, such as 2017.
  • yy—Display a two-digit year, such as 17.
  • EEEE—Display the day as text, such as Thursday.
  • E—Display the day as a three-letter abbreviation, such as Thu (English only).
Email Contact's email address

Email address that matches one of the Contact's email addresses of record.

If you specify this parameter, the Personal Site Requires URL Email Match custom setting must be enabled.
Language en (default)

Display the labels that have been translated in Salesforce into a different language. Identify the language using a two-character language code, such as en, or a five-character locale code, such as en_AU. (See Supported Languages in the Salesforce Help.)

V4S supports these languages out of the box:

  • Dutch (nl_NL)
  • English (en)
  • French (fr)
  • German (de)
  • Japanese (ja)
  • Spanish (es)

You can create your own translations in other languages. See Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology.

The specified language overrides the language that users have set in their Salesforce personal settings.
TimeFormat h:mm tt (default)

String format that tells V4S how to display Shift times. The default string displays the time of day as hour and minutes with a.m. or p.m. For example: 9:30 am.

You can specify a different string format by arranging these supported sets of characters with standard punctuation for time formatting.

  • hh—Use 12-hour time and include a leading zero for the first nine hours of the day, such as 01, 08.
  • M—Use 12-hour time and display the first nine hours of the day without a leading zero, such as 1, 8.
  • HH—Use 24-hour time and include a leading zero for the first nine hours of the day, such as 02, 09.
  • H—Use 24-hour time and display the first nine hours of the day without a leading zero, such as 2, 9.
  • mm—Display minutes with a leading zero for the first nine minutes of the hour, such as 03, 06.
  • m—Display minutes without a leading zero for the first nine minutes of the hour, such as 3, 6.
  • tt—Display the time period as am or pm.
## Style the Personal Site Contact Lookup Page with CSS The Personal Site Contact Lookup page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. Follow the instructions provided for [styling the Volunteer Signup page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."), making sure that you edit the VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css file. You can use CSS to style the font and the size of the form (.cssContactLookupPanel). You can change the text of the title and body of the form by [editing these custom labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help Volunteers for Salesforce speak the language of your volunteer program, you can replace the existing onscreen text (labels) with alternate text that uses your organization's terminology. Or you can translate all terms in the app into another language."): - labelContactInfoLookupTitle - labelContactLookupInstructions # Customize the Volunteers Personal Site Contact Lookup Page Review how you can customize the Personal Site Contact Lookup page for added security, embed the page in another website, and more. - **[Require Contact Information Match for Personal Site Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_lookup_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When volunteers submit the Personal Site Contact Lookup form to request access to their Personal Site, for extra security, you can require that both the ContactId and the Email URL parameter values are a match for the Contact. - **[Configure the Email Sent to Volunteers Requesting Personal Site Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_lookup_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers who complete the Personal Site Contact Lookup form receive an email with instructions for accessing their Personal Site. An email template defines the contents of the email. Edit the email template to configure the Personal Site URL, and edit custom settings to configure the email sender name. - **[Style the Personal Site Contact Information Page with CSS](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_lookup_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Personal Site Information page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. - **[IFRAME Tag for the Personal Site Contact Lookup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_lookup_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Personal Site Contact Lookup page into your website. It's just a few fields, so consider adding it as a small content area on an existing webpage rather than as a standalone page. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. - **[Supported URL Parameters for the Personal Site Contact Lookup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_lookup_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the optional URL parameter in your IFRAME tag to further customize how fields are displayed for volunteers requesting access to their Personal Site. ## Require Contact Information Match for Personal Site Access When volunteers submit the Personal Site Contact Lookup form to request access to their Personal Site, for extra security, you can require that both the ContactId and the Email URL parameter values are a match for the Contact. 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Volunteers Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**, then enable **Personal Site Requires URL Email Match**. 4. **Save** your changes. With this custom setting enabled, the Personal Site URL must include the Email parameter and its value must match the specified Contact's email address. ## Configure the Email Sent to Volunteers Requesting Personal Site Access Volunteers who complete the Personal Site Contact Lookup form receive an email with instructions for accessing their Personal Site. An email template defines the contents of the email. Edit the email template to configure the Personal Site URL, and edit custom settings to configure the email sender name. 1. From Setup, enter Email Templates in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Templates**. 2. Click the template named **Volunteers Personal Site Contact Lookup**. 3. Click **Edit HTML Version**. ![Edit HTML Version button on the Email Template Detail page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_template_edit_html_version.png) 4. Replace the placeholder text with the full URL to the Personal Site Contact Info page, which looks something like this: https://mydomain.force.com/GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo?contactId={!Contact.Id}&Email={!Contact.Email} ![HTML email body with a placeholder for the URL](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_template_html.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note We enter the URL manually because we can't use merge fields to do it all automatically. 5. Delete the instructions (shown here shaded). 6. **Save** your changes. ![Preview of the HTML email template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_template_html_preview.png) 7. Repeat this URL configuration for the text version. 8. Configure the email sender. 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to Volunteers Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**, then in the Personal Site Org-Wide Email Name field, enter the Display Name that you specified in Organization-Wide Addresses. ![Volunteers Custom Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteers_custom_settings.png) 4. **Save** your changes. 9. To test your changes, back on the Email Template Detail page, click **Send Test and Verify Merge Fields**. 10. Send the email to a test Contact associated with your email address. Verify that the URL in the email clicks through to the correct page and that the sender is the one you specified in Organization-Wide Addresses. ## Style the Personal Site Contact Information Page with CSS The Personal Site Information page uses a cascading style sheet (CSS). Volunteers for Salesforce provides the VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css file as a Document in Salesforce. Customize the CSS with your own CSS styles so that the Volunteers for Salesforce part of the webpage matches the rest of your website's look and feel. Follow the instructions provided for [styling the Volunteer Signup page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."), making sure that you edit the VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css file. ## IFRAME Tag for the Personal Site Contact Lookup Page Give your web developer this IFRAME tag so they can insert the Personal Site Contact Lookup page into your website. It's just a few fields, so consider adding it as a small content area on an existing webpage rather than as a standalone page. Use the appropriate format for HTTP sites or secure HTTPS sites. Sample IFRAME in HTTP format: ```html ``` Sample IFRAME in HTTPS format: ```html ``` A few reminders to keep your code snippet clean: - mydomain is a placeholder value for your domain name. Be sure to include your actual domain name in place of the placeholder text. - yoursitelabel is a placeholder value for the Default Web Address. Include it only if you specified one when you created your Site. - There are two underscore characters between Volunteers and PersonalSiteContactLookup. - If you're using a URL parameter, add it the end of the URL. Separate the parameter from the rest of the URL with a ? character. ## Supported URL Parameters for the Personal Site Contact Lookup Page Use the optional URL parameter in your IFRAME tag to further customize how fields are displayed for volunteers requesting access to their Personal Site. For details about adding URL parameters to an IFRAME tag, see [Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website.").
Name Value Description
Language en (default)

Display the labels that have been translated in Salesforce into a different language. Identify the language using a two-character language code, such as en, or a five-character locale code, such as en_AU. (See Supported Languages in the Salesforce Help.)

Volunteers for Salesforce supports these languages out of the box:

  • Dutch (nl_NL)
  • English (en)
  • French (fr)
  • German (de)
  • Japanese (ja)
  • Spanish (es)

You can create your own translations in other languages. See Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology.

The specified language overrides the language that users have set in their Salesforce personal settings.
# Customize the Volunteers Personal Site Pages Customize the contents of the Volunteers Personal Site pages, and make them look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Take a Tour of the Volunteers Personal Site Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteers Personal Site page shows volunteers their personal information, upcoming job shifts, and volunteer history. - **[Enable Access to Personal Site Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that you've already given the Site Guest User profile access to the Visualforce pages that make up the Personal Site page. Personal Site page names start with GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSite. - **[Customize the Overall Styling of the Volunteers Personal Site Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Site Template controls the overall page styling, header, navigation, and footer for Personal Site pages. Volunteers for Salesforce provides a Visualforce page that serves as the default Site Template. Make a copy of it and customize the styling of the page components. - **[Tell Your Site to Use Your Copy of the Personal Site Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit your Site's Site Template property to specify the page that you created based on the sample, default template. - **[Limit the Display of Jobs on the Volunteer Report Hours Page (in Personal Site Pages Only)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a volunteer reports hours, the Volunteer Job picklist by default displays the Jobs that are active, under active Campaigns. To display only the Jobs where the volunteer has an existing Volunteer Hours record, enable the custom setting that applies this filter. - **[More Personal Site Customizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To change the wording of onscreen text, messages, and warnings on Personal Site pages, you can override the existing text in custom labels, or create your own translations in other languages. Look for the category of custom labels starting with PersonalSite. ## Take a Tour of the Volunteers Personal Site Pages The Volunteers Personal Site page shows volunteers their personal information, upcoming job shifts, and volunteer history. ![Personal Site page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_personal_site.png) The Personal Site is a Visualforce page like the other V4S pages, but a bit different from the pages that you've added using IFRAME tags. - The header section includes a navigation bar with links to the four pages that make up the Personal Site. You can include different pages if you like. - Instead of an IFRAME, the page uses a Site template, PersonalSitesTemplate.page, that defines the page layout and stylesheet for all Personal Site pages. Make a copy of the sample, default template and edit it to match your website's styling. - Volunteers request access to their individual Personal Sites by submitting the Personal Site Contact Lookup form. ![Personal Site Contact Lookup form](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_personal_site_contact_lookup.png) V4S matches the requestor's information against existing Contacts and if there's a match, emails the requestor a unique URL to their Personal Site. You add the Lookup form separately with an IFRAME and style it with CSS. You're also going to configure the Volunteers Personal Site Contact Lookup email template that provides the Personal Site URL. ## Enable Access to Personal Site Pages Make sure that you've already given the Site Guest User profile access to the Visualforce pages that make up the Personal Site page. Personal Site page names start with GW\_Volunteers.PersonalSite. For more information, see [Configure Data Access for Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_data_access_vf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Volunteers for Salesforce is built on Visualforce, which is a way to create custom user interfaces for Salesforce objects and data. Configure access to Visualforce pages for your volunteers user profile."). ## Customize the Overall Styling of the Volunteers Personal Site Pages A Site Template controls the overall page styling, header, navigation, and footer for Personal Site pages. Volunteers for Salesforce provides a Visualforce page that serves as the default Site Template. Make a copy of it and customize the styling of the page components. 1. From Setup, enter Visualforce Pages in the Quick Find box, then select **Visualforce Pages**. 2. In the list of pages, click **PersonalSiteTemplate**. 3. Click **Preview** to open the page in a new window and see the default styling. ![Volunteer Personal Site page with default styling](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/pages_volunteer_personal_site_default_styling.png) 4. Because you can't edit a Visualforce page that's part of a Salesforce managed package, make a copy of the template. 1. Back on the page detail, select all the Visualforce Markup and copy it to your clipboard. 2. Go back to the Visualforce Pages list, and click **New**. 3. Give it a label such as MyPersonalSiteTemplate. 4. Review the name that it automatically assigns. 5. Select and delete all the placeholder Visualforce Markup, then paste your copied markup. 6. Edit any page or object references in the markup to include the `GW_Volunteers__` namespace (see details below). 7. **Save** your changes. 5. Edit your copy of the Site Template. Some things to note: - Be careful to preserve the jQuery, jQueryUI and Boostrap Javascript libraries that the template loads, and that other Sites pages also rely on. - When referring to any page or object within the V4S managed package, always include the `GW_Volunteers__` namespace. For example, change the page reference, `Page.PersonalSiteJobListing`, to `Page.GW_Volunteers__PersonalSiteJobListing`. Similarly, change the label reference, `Label.labelPersonalSiteJobListingTitle`, to `Label.GW_Volunteers__labelPersonalSiteJobListingTitle`. - The `` tag is used to include VolunteersPersonalSiteCSS.css for all the pages to use. - The `` tag indicates the area where content from the Personal Site Visualforce pages is inserted. ## Tell Your Site to Use Your Copy of the Personal Site Template Edit your Site's Site Template property to specify the page that you created based on the sample, default template. 1. From Setup, enter Sites in the Quick Find box, then select **Sites**. 2. Under the Action column, click **Edit**. 3. In the Site Template field, click the lookup icon. Search for and then select your newly created Visualforce page. 4. **Save** your changes. ## Limit the Display of Jobs on the Volunteer Report Hours Page (in Personal Site Pages Only) When a volunteer reports hours, the Volunteer Job picklist by default displays the Jobs that are active, under active Campaigns. To display only the Jobs where the volunteer has an existing Volunteer Hours record, enable the custom setting that applies this filter. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note This custom setting affects the Volunteer Report Hours page within the Volunteers Personal Site Pages only. 1. From Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to Volunteers Settings. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **Personal Site Report Hours Filtered**. 5. **Save** your changes. ## More Personal Site Customizations To change the wording of onscreen text, messages, and warnings on Personal Site pages, you can override the existing text in custom labels, or create your own translations in other languages. Look for the category of custom labels starting with PersonalSite. For more information, see [Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_translate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help Volunteers for Salesforce speak the language of your volunteer program, you can replace the existing onscreen text (labels) with alternate text that uses your organization's terminology. Or you can translate all terms in the app into another language."). # Customize Your Client Site Experience Cloud sites are highly customizable, allowing you to determine exactly how your site will look and what actions users will be able to take. To get the most out of your client site, we're providing a recommended layout and steps for how to create it. - **[Recommended Customizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_your_client_site_1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can customize your site in many different ways, but we recommended specific components to get the most out of your site's home page and Case Plans page. - **[Customize Your Client Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_your_client_site_1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Select a theme and customize components for your client site. - **[Customize the Login and Registration Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_your_client_site_1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You have lots of options when it comes to setting up your login and registration pages—everything from which page you use to branding and more. ## Recommended Customizations You can customize your site in many different ways, but we recommended specific components to get the most out of your site's home page and Case Plans page. Check out this [video](https://sfdc.co/client-experience) to see how we set up our recommended customizations. The home page includes these custom components: - CM: Action Items - CM: Case Plan Progress - HTML Editor - Feed - CM: My Team The Case Plans page includes these custom components: - On the list page, Record List - On the detail page, Record Banner and CM: Case Plan - On the related list page, Relate Record List ## Customize Your Client Site Select a theme and customize components for your client site. 1. In the My Workspace section, click **Builder**. 2. Click the theme icon and then click **Change Theme**. ![Change theme options for colors, images, font, and theme settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/change_theme.png) 3. Select the Jepson theme, and then click **Activate Theme**. 4. To ensure that you see all the available components, click the settings icon and then click **Advanced**. 5. Select **Show All Components**, then close the Settings modal. 6. Customize the page as you like. 1. Click the components icon to find and drag components on to the page. ![Components window with an expanded list of Action Plan options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/components_list.png) 2. To access a different page, click the Pages menu in the top toolbar. 3. To create a new page, click the Pages menu in the top toolbar and then click **New Page**. 4. To preview your site changes, click **Preview**. 7. Happy with what you see? Click **Publish** in the toolbar and the behind-the-scenes [publication process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&type=5) kicks off. You'll get an email when the site is live. Nice work! ## Customize the Login and Registration Pages You have lots of options when it comes to setting up your login and registration pages—everything from which page you use to branding and more. - [Add a Self-Registration Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.external_identity_create_registration_page.htm&type=5) takes you through the steps of setting up a page where your users can register without your assistance. - After they've registered, users can access your customized login page to enter your site. [Customize Your Login Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.identity_customize_login.htm&type=5) has all the how-to details. # Customize Your Student Success App Customize the Student Success app to suit the requirements of your institution, such as by creating layouts and features specific to different roles using Lightning App Builder.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To customize the Student Success app: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Lightning App Builder**. 3. Select a page from the list to edit, or click **New** to create one. 4. Customize the app as necessary, and then save your changes. You can add components to your app, and modify them to create custom features. See [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm). See Also: - [Set Up the Director Console for Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_ss.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a home page for the Student Success app, where a director can create programs and benefits, assign advisors, view analytics dashboards for student success, view institutional Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and more.") - [Set Up the Advisor Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_advisor_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "On the advisor console in the Student Success app, advisors can create and assign care plans, create alerts, view analytics dashboards for student success, view advisor insights and KPIs, and more. This home page is available out-of-the-box with Education Cloud, no additional setup is required.") - [Model Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects and apps to define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey.") - [Monitor Learner Performance with Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_monitor_learner_performance_with_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use record alerts in Education Cloud to monitor learner performance with respect to attendance, grades, and other metrics.") - [Support Learners with Care Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_support_learners_with_care_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Student Success app from Education Cloud to create personalized care plans that help learners achieve educational success.") # Customize Your Volunteers for Salesforce Website Understand which pages you can customize on your volunteer website, and how. - **[Customize the Volunteer Report Hours Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_report_hours.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the contents of the Volunteer Report Hours page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Configure How Volunteers for Salesforce Handles Sign-Ups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Streamline your volunteer sign-up process by setting up automation such as automated confirmations or record creation rules. - **[Manage Time Zones for Displaying Volunteer Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_time_zone.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Time zones can be complex for some organizations. Salesforce offers multiple ways to set time zone for users, Campaigns, and Jobs. - **[Configure Email Notifications for Website Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_email_notifs_webs_integ.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up default values for email senders and recipients, and review when to deactivate the Volunteer Signup - Contact workflow rule. - **[Customize the Volunteers Personal Site Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_personal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the contents of the Volunteers Personal Site pages, and make them look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Customize the Volunteers Personal Site Contact Lookup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_lookup_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review how you can customize the Personal Site Contact Lookup page for added security, embed the page in another website, and more. - **[Customize the Volunteers Personal Site Contact Information Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_cust_vols_pers_site_contact_info_pg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to configure fields, URL parameters, and formatting on the Personal Site Information page. - **[Test Your Customized Sites Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_test_site_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're happy with your Site's contents and styling, make sure that the pages load and look as intended before handing them over to your web developer. - **[Customize the Volunteer Signup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Customize the Volunteer Job Listing Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_listings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the contents of the Volunteer Job Listing page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. - **[Customize the Job Calendar Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_job_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the contents of the Job Calendar page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website. # Data 360 for Education Cloud Connect, organize, and unify large volumes of disparate student data and educational data by using the power of Data 360. Then use that data to deliver insights across the complete educational journey of a learner from prospect to engaged alumnus.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Educational institutions rely on massive amounts of data to provide the best experience to learners and to assure the school's viability and drive growth. With all this information, the institution can understand how to serve and support current learners, engage alumni, and prepare for future learners. Educational data comes from these major institutional systems. - Student information systems that contain profile information, course registrations, fee payments, attendance records, and grades. - Learning management systems that contain profile information, login credentials, usage patterns, interactions, and assessments. - Enterprise resource planning systems that contain financial records and the details of tuition and fees, financial aid, billing, and financial holds. Institutions also use data from internal systems that shed light on other aspects of student life. These systems include data on housing, dining, event registration, and many other campus services. Data 360 for Education provides a central place to connect and prepare data from multiple sources, and then harmonize the data into a unified learner profile. Use the learner profile to: - Make strategic decisions based on reliable analytics and predictions. - Automate, scale, and optimize tasks. - Ground AI in trusted data. - Create a more meaningful and customized experience for each learner in your institution. See [About Salesforce Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_cloud.htm&language=en_US). - **[Set Up Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360. - **[Education Cloud Data Model Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_data_model_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access education-specific data model objects (DMOs) within Data 360 to bring learner data from external learning management, student information, engagement, advancement, and enterprise resource planning systems into Data 360. Then you can harmonize the data to build segments, create calculated insights, and analyze key metrics. - **[Education Data Sources in Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_an_education_data_source_to_data_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To ingest education data into Data 360, connect your external data source to Data 360. - **[Education Data Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_data_kit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Populate your Data 360 implementation with the Education data kit. The data kit packages Data 360 components, such as data streams and calculated insights, and helps you deploy the components in your org. Use the components to import learner data into Data 360, fuel actionable insights, and power custom applications across the learner lifecycle. - **[Create a Semantic Data Model for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_sdm_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a semantic data layer to your Education Cloud org. This semantic layer organizes your data into a single, reusable model that calculates metrics consistently across Tableau Next components, agents, and Marketing Cloud Growth campaigns. The Education Cloud semantic data model (SDM) is available in a data kit and with your Tableau Next for Education app. - **[Data 360 for Education Related Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_related_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Data 360 for Education components show calculated insights in Salesforce. These components show Data 360 calculated insights related to an individual and Einstein generative AI prompt responses. # Data 360 for Education Related Components The Data 360 for Education components show calculated insights in Salesforce. These components show Data 360 calculated insights related to an individual and Einstein generative AI prompt responses. - **[Engagement Visualization Panel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_engagement_visualization_panel.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud's Engagement Visualization Lightning web component shows the Data 360 calculated insights related to an individual and Einstein generative AI prompt responses grounded in CRM and Data 360 data. You can configure the component to show only calculated insights, only prompt responses, or a combination of both. - **[Data 360 for Education: Alumni Engagement Metrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_alumni_engagement_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the full picture of alumni and supporter engagement with the help of Einstein and Data 360 through Alumni Engagement Metrics. Tailor the configurable component to a wide variety of use cases and extend engagement visualization capabilities throughout your Education Cloud org. - **[Set Up Data 360 for Education: Financial Aid](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_360_for_education_financial_aid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Data 360 and Agentforce for Education elements required to ingest and map your external financial aid management system data. Your data grounds the Financial Aid agent and powers the financial aid Lightning web components, ensuring that both can provide personalized, accurate information about a student's financial aid package. # Data 360 for Education: Alumni Engagement Metrics Understand the full picture of alumni and supporter engagement with the help of Einstein and Data 360 through Alumni Engagement Metrics. Tailor the configurable component to a wide variety of use cases and extend engagement visualization capabilities throughout your Education Cloud org.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When students become alumni, the ways they interact with your institution can vary widely in nature and consistency. An alum can attend or participate in anything from sporting events to speaking engagements to fundraising campaigns. And each of these activities can occur through a different area of your institution, which makes it a challenge to gain real insight into a single person's overall engagement. Alumni Engagement Metrics combines Data 360 and Einstein generative AI to not only track alumni activities, but also to provide informative translations of that data to give you a true sense of the level of engagement. - **[Set Up Data 360 for Education: Alumni Engagement Metrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_alumni_engagement_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Data Cloud, Einstein, and Education Cloud elements of the engagement visualization component for Alumni Engagement Metrics. - **[Alumni Engagement Metrics Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_engagement_metrics_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create flows that query DMO records that you want to use as grounding data in the prompt templates for Alumni Engagement Metrics. - **[Alumni Engagement Metrics Calculated Insights Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_calculated_insights_definitions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these sample calculated insights when you set up Alumni Engagement Metrics. - **[Alumni Engagement Metrics Sample Prompts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_engagement_metrics_sample_prompts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these sample prompts for the Engagement Visualization prompt template type when you set up Alumni Engagement Metrics. # Data Deletion for Admissions Connect Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Admissions Connect. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Admissions Connect. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Admissions Connect. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
An applicant has withdrawn their application and wants all of their data removed from the system.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Consider deleting these records and field data for your applicant:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields (including JSON fields)

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

If applicable, consider deactivating the applicant’s related Community User account and remove any personal information stored on the User record.

You may also need to delete:

  • Accounts

  • Addresses

  • Affiliations

  • Alerts

  • Application Reviews

  • Applications

  • Cases

  • Course Connections

  • Document Checklist Items

  • Education Histories

  • Files

  • Leads

  • Notes

  • Program Enrollments

  • Relationships

Be aware deleting certain applicant records could create conflicts with various requirements around data retention. If so, you may consider anonymizing but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
An admissions team member has retired and the institution requests that you remove all of their associated data.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

In addition to deactivating the User record and deleting their Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Application Reviews

  • Tasks

  • Cases

  • Any personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also need to delete:

  • Notes

  • Alerts

  • Addresses

  • Course Offerings

  • Leads

  • Accounts

Be aware that deleting certain records could create conflicts with various requirements around data retention. If so, you may consider anonymization instead of deletion, but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that user’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A prospect, applicant, or student doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Consider deleting data in any fields that store the person’s email address and phone number.

Admissions Connect is built on the EDA framework which also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email

  • University Email

  • Work Email

  • Work Phone

  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to the person, consider removing the email address and phone number from those records too.

If applicable, you may need to deactivate the related Community User account and remove the user email address. 

You may also want to remove data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
# Data Deletion for CM Find out more about data deletion for CM. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Case Management. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Case Management. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A client has stopped receiving services from your organization and wants their personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or field:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Cases

  • Case Plans

  • Goals

  • Action Items

  • Client Notes

  • Affiliations

  • Emergency Contact Information

  • Assessments

  • Client Alerts

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Relationships

  • Addresses

  • Households

  • Household Accounts
Note
Note In order to preserve Case Plan history for reporting totals, consider assigning Case Plans, Client Notes, Assessments, Program Engagements, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A service provider that has been fired requests that you remove all of his personal data.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Update Record Owner

In addition to deleting the service provider’s Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

If applicable, consider updating record ownership of any records that service provider owned, deactivating the faculty member’s User account, and removing any personal information stored on the User record.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Cases

  • Case Plans

  • Goals

  • Action Items

  • Client Notes

  • Affiliations

  • Emergency Contact Information

  • Assessments

  • Client Alerts

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Relationships

  • Addresses

  • Households

  • Household Accounts

Note
Note In order to preserve Case Plan history for reporting totals, consider assigning Case Plans, Client Notes, Assessments, Program Engagements, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account. If you consider anonymizing, you should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A client doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your client's email address and phone number.

The Case Management app also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Email

  • Phone

  • Work Phone

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Emergency Contact Phone

  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Data Deletion for Data Integrity Learn how to delete data in Data Integrity and considerations for constituent data-deletion requests. - **[Delete Address Data From Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Integrity collects data related to address standardization and National Change of Address updates and stores it outside of Salesforce. You can delete the information collected by Data Integrity but it will not delete information from Salesforce. To completely delete data, you must delete it from Salesforce after deleting it from Data Integrity. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Insights Platform. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Delete Address Data From Data Integrity Data Integrity collects data related to address standardization and National Change of Address updates and stores it outside of Salesforce. You can delete the information collected by Data Integrity but it will not delete information from Salesforce. To completely delete data, you must delete it from Salesforce after deleting it from Data Integrity. See [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. In Data Integrity, click the **Settings** tab. 2. Click the **Data Compliance** tab. 3. Type a name or part of a name, then click **Search**. 4. Select the Contact whose Address you want to delete. 5. If multiple addresses are found, select the ones you want to delete. If no addresses are found, move on to step 7. 6. Click **Delete Data**. 7. To completely delete data, also delete it from Salesforce. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Insights Platform. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A donor has stopped giving and wants his personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

Consider deleting these records and field data for your donor.

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • NPSP Data Import records

NOTE: In order to preserve donation history, consider assigning Opportunities to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

A volunteer has died and her spouse has requested that you remove her from the system. Delete Records

In addition to deleting the volunteer's Contact or Lead record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks
  • Notes
  • Calendar events
  • Household
  • Household Account
  • Addresses
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

NOTE: In order to preserve Volunteer Hours metrics, consider assigning Volunteer Hours to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that customer’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent's email address and phone number.

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Data Deletion for EDA Develop an action plan for erasing data in EDA. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Education Data Architecture. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Education Data Architecture. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A student has withdrawn from school and wants all of her data removed from the system. Delete Records

Consider deleting these records and field data for your student:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Course Connections
  • Program Enrollments
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Household Accounts
  • Administrative Accounts

Be aware deleting certain student records could create conflicts with various requirements around data retention. If so, you may consider anonymizing but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A faculty member has been fired and the university requests that you remove all of his personal data.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

In addition to deleting the faculty member’s Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

If applicable, consider deactivating the faculty member’s User account and remove any personal information stored on the User record.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Addresses
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Course Offerings
  • Course Connections
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Household Accounts
  • Administrative Accounts

Be aware deleting certain student records could create conflicts with various requirements around data retention. If so, you may consider anonymizing but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent’s email address and phone number.

EDA also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email
  • University Email
  • Work Email
  • Work Phone
  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Data Deletion for NPSP Find out more about data deletion. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for NPSP. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for NPSP. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A donor has stopped giving and wants his personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

Consider deleting these records and field data for your donor.

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • NPSP Data Import records

NOTE: In order to preserve donation history, consider assigning Opportunities to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

A volunteer has died and her spouse has requested that you remove her from the system. Delete Records

In addition to deleting the volunteer's Contact or Lead record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks
  • Notes
  • Calendar events
  • Household
  • Household Account
  • Addresses
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

NOTE: In order to preserve Volunteer Hours metrics, consider assigning Volunteer Hours to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that customer’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent's email address and phone number.

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Data Deletion for OFM Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Outbound Funds Module. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Outbound Funds Module. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Do
A constituent has stopped receiving services from your organization and wants their personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or field:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
An employee that has been fired requests that you remove all of their personal data.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Update Record Owner

In addition to deleting the employee’s Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

If applicable, consider updating record ownership of any records that employee owned, deactivating the employee’s User account, and removing any personal information stored on the User record.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store their email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent’s email address and phone number.

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Data Deletion for PMM Get guidance on deleting personal data as you comply with the GDPR right of erasure request. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Program Management Module. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Program Management Module. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent has stopped engaging with your programs and wants his personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

Consider deleting these records and field data for your constituent.

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields.

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Affiliations

  • Relationships

  • Addresses

  • Households

  • Household Accounts

Note
Note In order to preserve engagement history, consider assigning Program Engagements, Program Cohorts, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent has died and her spouse has requested that you remove her from the system. Delete Records

In addition to deleting the constituent's Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks

  • Notes

  • Calendar events

  • Household

  • Household Account

  • Addresses

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields.

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Affiliations

  • Relationships

  • Addresses

Note
Note In order to preserve Service Delivery metrics, consider assigning Program Engagements and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that customer’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store the constituent's email address and phone number.

You may consider deleting information in these standard Salesforce Contact fields.

  • Home Phone

  • Other Phone

  • Mobile

  • Email

  • Mailing Address

  • Other Address

If you’ve created other records or activities related to the constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Data Deletion for Volunteers for Salesforce Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Volunteers for Salesforce. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Volunteers for Salesforce. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A volunteer has moved out of the country and wants his personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

Consider deleting these records and field data for your donor.

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes

NOTE: In order to preserve Volunteer Hours metrics, consider assigning Volunteer Hours to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

A volunteer has died and her spouse has requested that you remove her from the system. Delete Records

In addition to deleting the volunteer’s Contact or Lead record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks
  • Notes
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

NOTE: In order to preserve Volunteer Hours metrics, consider assigning Volunteer Hours to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that customer’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn’t want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent’s email address and phone number.

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, be sure to remove her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
# Data Flows in Accounting Subledger Accounting Subledger consolidates data between your Salesforce CRM financial data and your accounting system.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
![Diagram of Accounting Subledger data flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_data_flows.png) 1. You capture all of your financial data in Salesforce, such as ticket revenues, purchase expenses, donations, or pledges. 2. After you [set up and configure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_plan_implementation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the general required steps for a successful implementation.") Accounting Subledger (accounting sets, accounting field mappings, scheduled job, and so on), we create transaction journal records for all eligible records. 3. The data is now ready for you to bring into your accounting system via reports, a custom integration, or a middleware solution. # Data Integrity and Translation Learn about available languages for the Data Integrity product and its documentation. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Insights Platform. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Insights Platform product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Insights Platform."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Insights Platform.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Insights Platform. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Insights Platform objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Insights Platform ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_note.png) Note These languages apply to the Data Integrity package only. | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Insights Platform - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ip/data_integrity_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ip/data_integrity_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ip/data_integrity_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ip/data_integrity_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ip/data_integrity_pt_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Insights Platform product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Insights Platform: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Data Integrity Architecture Learn about the prerequisites for Data Integrity and how it works with Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) fields. - **[Data Integrity Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_architecture_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Integrity helps maintain the integrity of your data for Address, Contact, and Account objects. - **[How Data Integrity Interacts with NPSP Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_architecture_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Data Integrity Address Standardization and National Change of Address (NCOA) updates interact with Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) objects and fields. ## Data Integrity Architecture Data Integrity helps maintain the integrity of your data for Address, Contact, and Account objects. The [Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack.htm) app is a prerequisite for Data Integrity. Data Integrity works with the NPSP Address object, and consequently updated address records are only stored in NPSP. Data Integrity interacts with and modifies objects and fields in NPSP version 3.175 or later. To start a workflow, a Salesforce administrator configures a job schedule in Data Integrity. Configuration options allow various parameters to be set, including: - Selecting how to merge duplicate Contacts - Updating  addresses that are to be standardized - Setting time and frequency of updates performed by the system Data Integrity interfaces with NPSP to process and transform the selected data. Depending on jobs that are initiated by the administrator, bulk data is deduplicated or standardized by Data Integrity. Standardized data is then pushed back to the Address object  and stored in NPSP. Related NPSP or custom triggers then initiate an update of related Account and Contact records, if required. This diagram highlights the high-level relationship between various the components and also illustrates the general workflow: ![High-Level of Overview of Data Integrity Architecture](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/insights_platform/images/npsp_dataintegrity_080422_zh_r1.png) Data Integrity has significant data processing capabilities. The system can process millions of Address records during non-business hours. Use these out-of-the box jobs to improve the quality and integrity of your data:
Job Name Description
Duplicate Jobs Duplicate Jobs makes it easy to find all of your existing duplicate records and utilize Contact Merge to resolve these duplicates in Salesforce.

Address Standardization

 Address Standardization helps correct incorrectly formatted addresses by making updates based on the specific standards of your locale's postal authority.

National Change of Address (NCOA) Updates

 NCOA Updates make it easy to keep up with constituents when they update their address with the USPS.
Contact Standardization Contact Standardization enables your nonprofit to reach out to constituents based on their latest contact information, deceased status, and planned giving intentions.
## How Data Integrity Interacts with NPSP Fields Learn how Data Integrity Address Standardization and National Change of Address (NCOA) updates interact with Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) objects and fields. ### Address Standardization Address standardization updates can access these fields on npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c: | Field Label | Field API Name | Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Address Id | Id | Read | | Ambiguous | npsp\_ \_Ambiguous\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Mailing City | npsp\_ \_MailingCity\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Mailing Country | npsp\_ \_MailingCountry\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Mailing State/Province | npsp\_ \_MailingState\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Mailing Street | npsp\_ \_MailingStreet\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Mailing Street2 | npsp\_ \_MailingStreet2\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Mailing Zip/Postal Code | npsp\_ \_MailingPostalCode\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Verified | npsp\_ \_Verified\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Verified Date | npsp\_ \_Verified\_Date\_ \_c | Write | Address standardization updates use the values of these fields on npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c to determine which records to include in updates: | Field Label | Field API Name | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | Default Address | npsp\_ \_Default\_Address\_ \_c | When selected, indicates that the address is the default address. Allows updates to be run only on default addresses. | | Exclude from Updates | npsp\_ \_Exclude\_from\_Updates\_ \_c | When selected, excludes the address from scheduled address standardization and NCOA updates within Data Integrity. | | Mailing Country | npsp\_ \_MailingCountry\_ \_c | Determines the country of the address. Only US addresses are supported. | | Verified | npsp\_ \_Verified\_ \_c | When selected, either manually or by an NPSP or Data Integrity update, excludes the address from standardization. | ### National Change of Address National Change of Address updates can access these fields: | Object Name | Field Label | Field API Name | Access | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | ID | Id | Read | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | ID | Id | Read | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Mailing Street | npsp\_ \_MailingStreet\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Mailing Street2 | npsp\_ \_MailingStreet2\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Mailing City | npsp\_ \_MailingCity\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Mailing State/Province | npsp\_ \_MailingState\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Mailing Country | npsp\_ \_MailingCountry\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Mailing Zip/Postal Code | npsp\_ \_MailingPostalCode\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Default Address | npsp\_ \_Default\_Address\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Address Type | npsp\_ \_Address\_Type\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | NCOA Evaluation Date | npsp\_ \_NCOA\_Evaluation\_Date\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | NCOA Result Code | npsp\_ \_NCOA\_Result\_Code\_ \_c | Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Verified | npsp\_ \_Verified\_ \_c | Read/Write | | npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c | Verified Date | npsp\_ \_Verified\_Date\_ \_c | Read/Write | | Contact | First Name | FirstName | Read | | Contact | Last Name | LastName | Read | National Change of Address updates use the values of these fields on npsp\_ \_Address\_ \_c to determine which records to include in updates: | Field Label | Field API Name | Comment | | --- | --- | --- | | Default Address | npsp\_ \_Default\_Address\_ \_c | When selected, indicates that the address is the default address. Allows updates to be run only on default addresses. | | Exclude from Updates | npsp\_ \_Exclude\_from\_Updates\_ \_c | When selected, excludes the address from scheduled address standardization and NCOA updates within Data Integrity. | | Mailing Country | npsp\_ \_MailingCountry\_ \_c | Determines the country of the address. Only US addresses are supported. | | NCOA Evaluation Date | npsp\_ \_NCOA\_Evaluation\_Date\_ \_c | The most recent date and time that an address was evaluated for NCOA updates, regardless of if a new address was found. Allows updates to be run only on records that haven't been evaluated within a specified time frame. | ### Contact Standardization Contact Standardization can access these fields in the Contact object: | Field Label | Field API Name | Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Deceased | npsp\_\_Deceased\_\_c | Read / Write | | Deceased Date | insights\_\_Deceased\_Date\_\_c | Read / Write | | Deceased Reviewed Date | insights\_\_Deceased\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c | Read / Write | | Email Reviewed Date | insights\_\_Email\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c | Read / Write | | Email Status | insights\_\_Email\_Status\_\_c | Read / Write | | Email Verified | insights\_\_Email\_Verified\_\_c | Read / Write | | Phone Reviewed Date | insights\_\_Phone\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c | Read / Write | | Phone Status | insights\_\_Phone\_Status\_\_c | Read / Write | | Phone Verified | insights\_\_Phone\_Verified\_\_c | Read / Write | Contact Standardization uses the values of these fields in the Contact object to determine which records to include in updates: | Field Label | Field API Name | Access | | --- | --- | --- | | First Name | First Name | Read | | Last Name | Last Name | Read | | Email | Email | Read | | Phone | Phone | Read | | Mailing City | Mailing City | Read | | Mailing Country | Mailing Country | Read | | Mailing Postal Code | Mailing Postal Code | Read | | Mailing Street | Mailing Street | Read | | Mailing State | Mailing State | Read | # Data Integrity Architecture Learn about prerequisite managed packages for Data Integrity and how it interacts with objects and fields. - **[Data Integrity Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_architecture_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the prerequisites for Data Integrity and how it works with Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) fields. # Data Integrity Documentation Insights Platform Data Integrity helps keep your contact data accurate, complete, and reliable. It provides record deduplication, email and phone number validation, mailing address standardization, automatic address updates for donors who change addresses, and more. - **[Data Integrity Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_introduction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn the basics about Data Integrity, its capabilities, and how to prepare your data for success. - **[Data Integrity Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_integrity_architecture.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about prerequisite managed packages for Data Integrity and how it interacts with objects and fields. - **[Install Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prerequisites and instructions for installing Data Integrity. After installation, authorize Data Integrity to access data in your Salesforce org. - **[Configure Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_configure_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure fields for Data Integrity, back up your data, set up your National Change of Address (NCOA) provider, and keep up with releases. - **[Manage Data Integrity Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_manage_data_integrity_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Standard addresses and get National Change of Address (NCOA) updates. - **[Standardize Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_standardize_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how you can update data about your Contacts with scheduled updates. Manage contact standardization update results and learn about error handling. - **[Manage Data Integrity Duplicates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_manage_data_integrity_duplicates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Duplicate data impacts your organization's ability to provide personalized constituent experiences. With more than one Contact for the same person, it's difficult to track personal information and interactions with your organization. Learn how Data Integrity helps manage duplicate contacts. - **[Data Integrity GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_info_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data privacy and deletion considerations. # Data Integrity GDPR Learn about data privacy and deletion considerations. - **[Product Information for IP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Data Integrity. - **[Data Deletion for Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to delete data in Data Integrity and considerations for constituent data-deletion requests. - **[IP Consent Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How Data Integrity complies with various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR. - **[Restrict Data Processing in IP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How to restrict data access to comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations. - **[Data Portability for IP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Portability considerations for Data Integrity. # Data Integrity Introduction Learn the basics about Data Integrity, its capabilities, and how to prepare your data for success. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce.org Insights Platform Data Integrity helps you format, update, and maintain your constituent's data. This critical data includes a large volume of contacts and addresses, all of which must be maintained accurately and robustly. - **[Prepare Your Data for Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_get_to_know_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Data Integrity, schedule updates to make sure that all existing and new additions to your database stay clean. Set up rules to find duplicates, then view and merge those duplicates with a few clicks. # Data Integrity Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ip_data_integrity_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Summer '22. - **[Fixes and Minor Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ip_data_integrity_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Summer '22. - We now display the full country name in the Country field when addresses are standardized or undergo an NCOA update, rather than the 3 digit country code. - We enhanced the results modal to enable searches for only new addresses for both address standardization and NCOA. SEE ALSO - [See Results of National Change of Address Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ip_see_results_ncoa_update.htm) - [See Address Standardization Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ip_see_address_standardization_results.htm) ## Fixes and Minor Enhancements Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Summer '22. - We improved accessibility for the **Select Address**, **Scheduled Address Updates**, and **Address Standardization** windows for users on keyboards. - We enhanced visual representation of the “Loading”, “Green Check mark”, and “Blue Recurring” icons to meet the minimum image contrast ratio requirements. - We moved all focus-related logic to its own file to allow for increased reusability. - We now run specified campaign contacts for Address Standardization instead of running all new addresses. # Data Integrity Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_integrity_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_integrity_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_integrity_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - We added a [Contact Standardization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ip_standardize_contacts.htm&type=5) job that checks if a person's deceased and verifies emails and phone numbers. - We renamed the **Address Updates** tab to **Data Updates**. - Insights Platform Data Integrity now supports Brazilian Portuguese. - We made multiple updates to improve accessibility, including: - Fixed decorative icon images which don't contain any alternative text for assistive technology. - Fixed decorative icon images for Timeline and Skipped which don't contain any alternative text. - Nested the heading structure on the **Get Started** and **Address Updates** pages. - Fixed empty links before the title text on the **Scheduled Address Updates** screen. - Tool tip content is accessible via keyboard focus. - We updated the upper limit for our Estimated Records query to 500,000 records and improved the query so that it doesn't time out. When more than 500,000 records are included in a job, we now display 500,000+ records. - We fixed an issue related to Data8 credentials where we were sending a hardcoded workflow name to Data8 instead of user specified details. - We added the ability for our UK users to see past updates in NCOA audit jobs n the **In Progress and Past Updates** section. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002klefqak&title=data-issues-on-ncoa-export-file): Fixed formatting of NCOA job CSV file - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002kvdtqa4&title=national-change-of-address-ncoa-export-file-has-null-value-in-current-address-id-field): Fixed issue related to Salesforce ID values in NCOA job CSV file - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002kvcgqao&title=national-change-of-address-ncoa-export-file-email-link-error): Fixed link to download NCOA job CSV file ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. ### Fields - insights\_\_Deceased\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c - insights\_\_Deceased\_Date\_\_c - insights\_\_Email\_Verified\_\_c - insights\_\_Email\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c - insights\_\_Email\_Status\_\_c - insights\_\_Phone\_Verified\_\_c - insights\_\_Phone\_Reviewed\_Date\_\_c - insights\_\_Phone\_Status\_\_c # Data Migration to Education Cloud Learn how to use the Data Migration Kit to move your data from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, and Education Data Architecture (EDA) to Education Cloud. Understand the considerations to be made, and get insights to plan your migration to Education Cloud. SEE ALSO: - [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm&type=5) - [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm&type=5) - [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm&type=5) - **[Considerations for Data Migration to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_data_migration_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some considerations to determine when and how you want to migrate your data to Education Cloud. - **[Data Processing Engine and Data Migration Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_processing_engine_domains_and_clusters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Data Processing Engine to transform and migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model within the same org, or to a new org. - **[Data Migration to Education Cloud Within Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_migration_to_education_cloud_within_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Data Processing Engine to migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model within your org. - **[Data Migration to Education Cloud in a New Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_migration_to_education_cloud_in_a_new_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Data Processing Engine to migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model in a new org. - **[Annexure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_annexure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the terms and conditions of the license required for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit. # Data Migration to Education Cloud in a New Org Use the Data Processing Engine to migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model in a new org. The unmanaged packages for data migration to Education Cloud in a new org are: | Data Migration Package | Version | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | [EDA Migration Apex Classes Setup](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t4U000000PJhJ) | 248.2 | Deploys the Apex classes and custom shadow objects in your source org. | | [EDA Migration Shadow Objects](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t4U000000PJhT) | 248.2 | Deploys the record types, custom fields, shadow objects, Apex classes, static resource (SDL) files, and Visualforce pages for the guided flow in your source org. | | [Org to Org - EDA Migration DPE Definitions](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t4U000000t7KF) | 260 | Deploys the Data Processing Engine definitions in your target (Education Cloud) org. | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important BY INSTALLING SFDC MIGRATION PACKAGE, YOU AGREE TO ITS LICENSE AND ALL DISCLAIMERS, STATED IN THE [ANNEXURE](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_annexure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the terms and conditions of the license required for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit.") OF THIS DOCUMENT. For information on how data is mapped in the Data Processing Engine definitions, see: - [Education Cloud Data Migration Kit – Object Mapping (New Org)](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1KrDH-_mQ-gGQKNwUb-mpUQ6eYwOnJQA6/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=104610145866652248877&rtpof=true&sd=true) - [Education Cloud Data Migration Kit – Field Mapping](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1sh56D2mgO0OYb0WD_0SO-tm-XwUgZZyy/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=104610145866652248877&rtpof=true&sd=true) - **[Prerequisites for Data Migration to a New Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_data_migration_to_a_new_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on features, set up permissions, and create the records and custom fields required for data migration to Education Cloud in a new org. - **[Install the Migration Packages in Your Source and Target Orgs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_install_the_migration_packages_in_your_source_and_target_orgs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install the unmanaged packages in the source org from where your data is to be migrated. - **[Use the Guided Flow for Migration to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_use_the_guided_flow_for_migration_to_education_cloud_neworg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the guided flow to ensure that you complete the migration steps in the right sequence. - **[Run the Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_run_the_data_processing_engine_definitions_neworg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run the Data Processing Engine definitions sequentially to migrate your data. After each run, confirm the accuracy of the migrated data before you proceed to run the next definition. - **[Use Data Loader to Extract and Load Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_use_data_loader_to_extract_and_load_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the required SDL files and then use Data Loader to extract and load your data into the target shadow objects. - **[Migrate User Data to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_user_data_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Loader to migrate data from the user object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. - **[Migrate Event Data to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_event_data_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Loader and Developer Console to migrate data from the user object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. - **[Migrate Task Data to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_task_data_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Loader and Developer Console to migrate data from the task object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. - **[Migrate Alert Data to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_alert_data_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Loader and Developer Console to migrate data from the record alert object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. - **[Migrate Data to New Record Types in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_data_to_new_record_types_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If required, you can migrate account and case data from your source org to new record types in Education Cloud. # Data Migration to Education Cloud Within Your Org Use the Data Processing Engine to migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model within your org. The unmanaged packages for data migration to Education Cloud within your org are: | Data Migration Package | Version | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | [EDA Migration Setup](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t6O0000011bm7) | 246.2 | Migrates data from Education Data Architecture, Admissions Connect, and Student Success Hub to Education Cloud within your org. | | [EDA Migration DPE Definitions](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t6O0000011bmC) | 246.1 | Migrates data from Education Data Architecture to Education Cloud within your org. | | [SSH Migration DPE Definitions](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t6O0000011bnj) | 246.0 | Migrates data from Student Success Hub to Education Cloud within your org. | | [AC Migration DPE Definitions](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t6O0000011bo3) | 246.0 | Migrates data from Admissions Connect to Education Cloud within your org. | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important BY INSTALLING SFDC MIGRATION PACKAGE, YOU AGREE TO ITS LICENSE AND ALL DISCLAIMERS, STATED IN THE [ANNEXURE](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_annexure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the terms and conditions of the license required for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit.") OF THIS DOCUMENT. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Objects are grouped into clusters based on the data that they represent, and clusters into domains. Each cluster has a unique Data Processing Engine definition. Run the Data Processing Engine definitions sequentially to transform and migrate your data. For information on how data is mapped in the Data Processing Engine definitions, see: - [Education Cloud Data Migration Kit – Object Mapping (Same Org)](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1ivNOJKXHeU66D5SmsalDgTfHX9Li08uZ/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=104610145866652248877&rtpof=true&sd=true) - [Education Cloud Data Migration Kit – Field Mapping](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1sh56D2mgO0OYb0WD_0SO-tm-XwUgZZyy/edit?usp=drive_link&ouid=104610145866652248877&rtpof=true&sd=true) - **[Prerequisites for Data Migration Within Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_data_migration_within_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on features, set up permissions, and create the records and custom fields required for data migration to Education Cloud within your org. - **[Install the Migration Packages in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_install_the_migration_packages_in_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install the unmanaged packages in the org where the migration is to be performed. - **[Use the Guided Flow for Migration to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_use_the_guided_flow_for_migration_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the guided flow to ensure that you complete the migration steps in the right sequence. - **[Migrate Account and Contact Records to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_account_and_contact_records_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Convert individual model account and contact records to person account records in Education Cloud. - **[Run the Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_run_the_data_processing_engine_definitions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run the Data Processing Engine definitions for each cluster sequentially to migrate your data. After each run, confirm the accuracy of the migrated data before you proceed to the next cluster. - **[Validate the Migrated Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_validate_the_migrated_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Plan and test the migrated data to ensure its accuracy and completeness. - **[Delete the Migration Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_delete_the_migration_files.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you complete the migration, you can uninstall the migration packages to delete all custom fields and files from the packages that are no longer required. # Data Mover Release Notes Learn what's in Data Mover (version 1.3.0.1) in Spring '23. ## Changes We fixed a bug that caused users with the Self Service User object to get an unexpected error when clicking on the Data Mover Mappings tab. # Data Mover Release Notes Support and updates for Data Mover are scheduled to end in all Salesforce orgs as of Winter '24. You can continue to use Data Mover after Winter '24; however, we recommend that you use an alternative tool, such as Data Processing Engine, going forward. **Where**: All Salesforce orgs. **When**: Support and updates for Data Mover end as of Winter '24. ## See Also [_Salesforce Help:_ Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.concept_data_processing_engine.htm) # Data Mover Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Data Mover (version 1.2.0.1) in Winter '23. ## Changes - We replaced the Education Data Architecture documentation link with a link to the Data Mover documentation on the post-installation message. - We fixed a bug that caused a null reference error message when creating a child object mapping using a custom object with record types. # Data Portability for Admissions Connect Learn how to manage data portability in Admissions Connect. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Admissions Connect. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Admissions Connect. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
An admissions staff member is being assigned to a new position. She asked for the personal data you collected from her. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for her.

  • User

  • Contact

  • Addresses

  • Cases

  • Tasks

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

  • Notes

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it. Make sure to consult your HR and legal department before deleting employee data. 
# Data Portability for CM Find out more about data portability for CM. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Case Management. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Case Management. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A client is moving out of state and won’t be receiving services or engaging with your organization anymore. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Case Plans

  • Goals

  • Action Items

  • Assessments

  • Client Notes

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Addresses

  • Affiliations

  • Cases

  • Household Accounts

  • Relationships

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

Note
Note In order to preserve Case Plan history for reporting totals, consider assigning Case Plans, Client Notes, Assessments, Program Engagements, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

A staff member or service provider is being assigned to a new position.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Case Plans

  • Goals

  • Action Items

  • Assessments

  • Client Notes

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Addresses

  • Affiliations

  • Cases

  • Household Accounts

  • Relationships

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

Note
Note In order to preserve Case Plan history for reporting totals, consider assigning Case Plans, Client Notes, Assessments, Program Engagements, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A former client has stopped receiving services from your organization. He has asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data, but requested you stop all processing of the data.

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Case Plans

  • Goals

  • Action Items

  • Assessments

  • Client Notes

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Addresses

  • Affiliations

  • Cases

  • Household Accounts

  • Relationships

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

Note
Note In order to preserve Case Plan history for reporting totals, consider assigning Case Plans, Client Notes, Assessments, Program Engagements, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
# Data Portability for EDA Understand how to comply with legal data portability and export requirements in EDA. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Education Data Architecture. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Education Data Architecture. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A student is moving out of state and won’t be attending your university anymore. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your student:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Household Accounts
  • Administrative Accounts
  • Course Connections
  • Program Enrollments

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

A faculty member is being assigned to a new position.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for the faculty member:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Household Accounts
  • Administrative Accounts
  • Course Offerings
  • Course Connections

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Data Portability for Grants Management Learn how to manage data portability in Grants Management. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Grants Management. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Grants Management. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A grantseeker is moving out of state and won’t be applying to future grants. They want to take their information with them. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

An employee is being assigned to a new position.

They ask for the personal data you collected from them.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A grant has been fully disbursed and closed, and your organization no longer needs a grantee’s data. However, they asked that you keep their data because they’re involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data but does not want you to process the data. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
# Data Portability for IP Data Portability considerations for Data Integrity. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Insights Platform. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Insights Platform. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent is moving out of state and will not be volunteering with you any more. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours
  • NPSP Data Import records

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

A major donor decided to not fulfill her pledge and will not make future donations.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours
  • NPSP Data Import records

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Data Portability for NPSP Find out more about data portabillity. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for NPSP. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for NPSP. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent is moving out of state and will not be volunteering with you any more. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours
  • NPSP Data Import records

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

A major donor decided to not fulfill her pledge and will not make future donations.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours
  • NPSP Data Import records

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Data Portability for PMM Export customer-related data upon request in compliance. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Program Management Module. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Program Management Module. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent is moving out of state and will not be participating in your programs anymore. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Program Engagements

  • Program Cohorts

  • Service Deliveries

  • Addresses

  • Households

  • Household Accounts

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
A constituent decided to cease engagements with your organization and will not engage with your organization again. He asked for the personal data you collected from him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Program Engagements

  • Program Cohorts

  • Service Deliveries

  • Addresses

  • Households

  • Household Accounts

Export the donor's data to retain it. The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

Note
Note In order to preserve donation history, consider assigning Opportunities to an anonymous or placeholder Account.
# Data Portability for Volunteers for Salesforce Learn how to manage data portability in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Volunteers for Salesforce. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Volunteers for Salesforce. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent is moving out of state and will not be volunteering with you any more. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

An important volunteer has decided to cease volunteering with your organization.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Data Processing Engine and Data Migration Kit Use the Data Processing Engine to transform and migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model within the same org, or to a new org. The Data Processing Engine transforms your data from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, or Education Data Architecture (EDA), and saves the transformed data as new or updated records in Education Cloud. Salesforce provides unmanaged packages as part of the Education Cloud Data Migration Kit that contain Data Processing Engine definitions for specific migration scenarios. Run the Data Processing Engine definitions sequentially to transform and migrate the data. SEE ALSO: - [Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.concept_data_processing_engine.htm&type=5) - [Education Cloud Data Model Overview](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_data_model_overview.htm) - [Admissions Connect Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_learn_dictionary.htm&type=5) - [Student Success Hub Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_data_dictionary.htm&type=5) - [Education Data Architecture Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data_dictionary.htm&type=5) # Data Processing for CM Find out more about data processing for CM. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Case Management. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Case Management. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A client has reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the client's data to retain it. Then, delete her data from Salesforce.

Work with your client to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.
A client has stopped receiving services from, or engaging with your organization and no longer needs his data. However, he asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data but does not want you to process the data. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Case Plans

  • Assessments

  • Client Notes

  • Program Engagements

  • Service Deliveries

  • Addresses

  • Affiliations

  • Cases

  • Household Accounts

  • Relationships

Export the client's data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce. The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

Note
Note In order to preserve Case Plan history for reporting totals, consider assigning Case Plans, Client Notes, Assessments, Program Engagements, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
# Data Processing Restrictions for PMM Get guidance on how to prevent the processing of your customers' data when you're required to do so. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Program Management Module. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Program Management Module. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A constituent reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the constituent's data to retain it. Then, delete her data from Salesforce.

Work with your constituent to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.
A constituent has stopped all engagement with your organization. You no longer need the data but the constituent has asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data, but requested you stop all processing of the data. Export Data

Export the constituent's data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.

Note
Note In order to preserve engagement history, consider assigning Program Engagements, Program Cohorts, and Service Deliveries to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent has requested that you keep his data on file but does not want you to profile him or analyze the data in any way. Export Data Export the constituent's data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.
# Debits and Credits Accounting Subledger follows specific definitions to determine debit and credit amount types.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
In accounting, the type of transaction determines how the amount impacts the debit and credit columns. Not all debit transactions are subtractions and not all credit transactions are additions. How do you know which transactions subtract and which ones add? In accounting terms, debits increase balances for revenue and asset accounts (such as accounts receivable) and decrease balances for expense and liability accounts (such as accounts payable). And credits increase balances for expense and liability accounts and decrease balances for revenue and asset accounts. | Items that Increase in the Debit Column and Decrease in the Credit Column | Items that Increase in the Credit Column and Decrease in the Debit Column | | --- | --- | | Expected revenue (such as pledges) | Fund accounts (such as general fund, building fund) | | Payment methods (such as cash, credit card) | — | # Decide Which Pages to Add to Your Website Which Volunteers for Salesforce pages do you want to make available on your website? Pick and choose the ones that make sense. They work independently of each other.
Page What It Looks Like
VolunteersSignupFS or VolunteersSignup (form for general signup and expressions of interest in volunteering) Website page for volunteers to express interest in volunteering

VolunteersJobListingFS or VolunteersJobListing (list of Jobs—with or without Shifts—that volunteers can sign up for)

and

VolunteersSignupFS or VolunteersSignup (form for signup for specific Jobs or Shifts)

 Website page listing Jobs available for signup and website form for signing up for a specific Shift or Job
JobCalendar (calendar view of Jobs and Shifts) Website page showing a calendar view of Jobs and Shifts
VolunteersReportHours (form for reporting hours volunteered) Website form for a volunteer to report hours volunteered
PersonalSiteContactInfo (personalized page with an individual volunteer's information) Website page where a volunteer can see their individual volunteer information
# Default Application Flows Learn how the Create Application flow processes a funding request application. - **[Create Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_defaultappflows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Create Application flow automates how the application initially starts for your applicant. This involves retrieving information about the Funding Program and user's Contact information, autofilling fields on the application, and creating the application record. - **[Submit Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_defaultappflows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Submit Application flow automates how a grantseeker’s application is submitted to an organization. The flow retrieves the application record, makes sure the user is both a site user and owner of the application, and updates the application before it is submitted. Without this flow, the grantseeker’s application can’t be submitted to your organization for review. ## Create Application The Create Application flow automates how the application initially starts for your applicant. This involves retrieving information about the Funding Program and user's Contact information, autofilling fields on the application, and creating the application record. Without the Create Application flow, a grantseeker can’t apply for a Funding Request without making permission updates to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile. ![Overview of the Create Application flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/create_application.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Decision: Is Guest User? Checks if the user is a guest user or site user.
3. Get Records: Query Funding Program Searches for and stores the Funding Program record to use in the Decision step.
4. Decision: Is Funding Program Active? Checks if the Funding Program is active. If it’s not active, an error occurs.
5. Get Records: Query Community User's Contact Searches for the user’s Contact information.
6. Screen: Fill Out Application

Interface for the user to fill out the application.

Note
Note The default fields a user can update are Requested Amount and Requested For, but you can add additional fields and components.
7. Assignment: Autocomplete Application

Autofills several fields on the application, including:

  • Application Date

  • Applying Contact

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request Name

  • Requested Amount

  • Requested For

  • Status: In Progress

  • Applying Employee
8. Create Records: Create Application Creates the application. This creates a new Funding Request record.
9. Screen: Thank You Presents a confirmation message thanking the user.
10. Screen: Application File Allows the user to upload files to their application.
11. Screen: Navigate to the New Application Redirects the user to the newly created application page.
## Submit Application The Submit Application flow automates how a grantseeker’s application is submitted to an organization. The flow retrieves the application record, makes sure the user is both a site user and owner of the application, and updates the application before it is submitted. Without this flow, the grantseeker’s application can’t be submitted to your organization for review. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember that grantseekers need Read access to their User record to submit an application. See [Give Access to to Submit Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_give_users_access.htm) for more information. ![Overview of the Submit Application flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/submit_application_gm.jpg)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Get Records: Application Retrieves the application (Funding Request) record. If no application exists, an error occurs.
3. Decision: Is Submittable? Checks if the user is a site user and the owner of the application. If both are true, the user is directed to the next step.
4. Screen: Confirm User Wants to Submit Presents the user a message confirming they want to submit the application.
5. Get Records: Community User Contact Retrieves the user’s Contact information.
6. Assignment: Change Application Owner and Status

Updates fields on the application (Funding Request), including:

  • The Funding Request Owner updates with the site user’s Contact information

  • The Funding Request Status changes to Submitted
7. Update Records: Update Application Updates the application.
8. Email Alert Sends an email to the grantseeker that the application is submitted.
9. Screen: Submit Success Presents a confirmation message that the application is submitted.
# Default Gift Entry Template Find out more about the gift entry template. - **[What Is the Default Template?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_default_ge_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you enable Gift Entry, NPSP creates a form template called Default Gift Entry Template. This template includes recommended fields for a basic gift, and is used by default when a user creates a single gift from the Gift Entry tab or the New Gift action on Accounts and Contacts. - **[Save a Backup of the Default Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_default_ge_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While you can edit the Default Gift Entry Template, we discourage it because you can't easily restore it to its original form. We recommend cloning the default template prior to making changes so that you have a backup record with the defaults. - **[Edit the Default Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_default_ge_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating a backup, you can change the Default Gift Entry Template. - **[Default Template Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_default_ge_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In case you need to reset your default template to the Default Gift Entry Template provided with Gift Entry, here are the default fields and settings. ## What Is the Default Template? When you enable Gift Entry, NPSP creates a form template called Default Gift Entry Template. This template includes recommended fields for a basic gift, and is used by default when a user creates a single gift from the Gift Entry tab or the New Gift action on Accounts and Contacts. It also provides a basis for new templates you create, as most of its fields are required for recording gifts. ## Save a Backup of the Default Template While you can edit the Default Gift Entry Template, we discourage it because you can't easily restore it to its original form. We recommend cloning the default template prior to making changes so that you have a backup record with the defaults. To clone a template: 1. Navigate to the Gift Entry tab. 2. In the row for the template, click the action menu, and then click **Clone**. 3. Name your cloned template something like Backup of Default Template. 4. Click **Save & Close**. ## Edit the Default Template After creating a backup, you can change the Default Gift Entry Template. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Default Gift Entry Template is the only supported template for the New Single Gift button and the New Gift actions at this time. You can't remove buttons from the NPSP Gift Entry page. To edit the default template: 1. In the Templates sub-tab, click the action menu in the Default Gift Entry Template row, and then click **Edit**. 2. Go to the Form Fields or Batch Header subtabs and update as necessary. See [Add or Remove Form Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Follow these steps to add or remove form fields.") and [Configure Batch Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This tab allows you to add information about a batch of gifts.") for more information about these areas of the Template Builder. 3. Click **Save & Close** when you're done. ## Default Template Fields In case you need to reset your default template to the Default Gift Entry Template provided with Gift Entry, here are the default fields and settings. Batch Header Fields | Field | Required | | --- | --- | | Batch Name | X | | Batch Description |   | | Expected Count of Gifts |   | | Expected Total Batch Amount |   | | Require Expected Totals Match |   | Form Fields | Section | Field | Field Label | Required | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Donor Information | Data Import: Donation Donor | Donor Type | X | | Donor Information | Data Import: Account1 Imported | Existing Donor Organization Account |   | | Donor Information | Data Import: Contact1 Imported | Existing Donor Contact |   | | Add or Edit Organization Account | Account 1: Account Name | Organization Account Name |   | | Add or Edit Organization Account | Account 1: Billing Street | Organization Account Street |   | | Add or Edit Organization Account | Account 1: Billing City | Organization Account City |   | | Add or Edit Organization Account | Account 1: Billing State/Province | Organization Account State/Province |   | | Add or Edit Organization Account | Account 1: Billing Zip/Postal Code | Organization Account Zip/Postal Code |   | | Add or Edit Organization Account | Account 1: Billing Country | Organization Account Country |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Contact 1: First Name | Contact First Name |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Contact 1: Last Name | Contact Last Name |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Contact 1: Personal Email | Contact Personal Email |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Contact 1: Preferred Email | Contact Preferred Email |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Address: Mailing Street | Contact Street |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Address: Mailing City | Contact City |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Address: Mailing State/Province | Contact State/Province |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Address: Mailing Zip/Postal Code | Contact Zip/Postal Code |   | | Add or Edit Contact | Address: Mailing Country | Contact Country |   | | Donation Information | Opportunity: Close Date | Donation Date | X | | Donation Information | Opportunity: Amount | Donation Amount | X | | Donation Information | Opportunity: Campaign ID | Primary Campaign Source |   | | Donation Information | Payment: Payment Method | Payment Method |   | | Donation Information | Payment: Check/Reference Number | Check/Reference Number |   | | Donation Information | GAU Allocations (field bundle) | n/a |   | # Define Fee Structure Model student fees, such as tuition and meal plans, by using products grouped into price books. Associate these price books with specific academic terms or years to manage fees that change over time or vary by student.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
- **[Add Products for Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_products_for_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use products to model student fees such as in-state tuition, international student tuition, lab fees, and meal plans. After you create products, you link them together in price books that you associate with academic intervals such as the current fall term. You can create multiple price books for fees that change yearly or vary based on learner attributes. - **[Associate a Pricebook with an Academic Interval](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_associate_a_pricebook_with_an_academic_interval.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify that a pricebook applies for a given academic session, term, or year. - **[Set Up an Academic Interval Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_interval_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build an academic interval structure to accurately represent your institution's schedule. This structure uses the academic year to define the entire year. Within that year, the academic term specifies periods for reporting and course offerings, which can also contain other nested time periods. Finally, the academic session specifies the exact time periods when courses are offered. # Define Holds Create a regulatory code record to define a hold. The guided setup for hold definitions ties the authorities, regulation clauses, and action plan templates into one hold definition. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To define holds: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Regulatory Codes**. 2. Click **New from Wizard**. 3. Enter a name, the subject, and a description. For example, enter Academic Standing Hold as the name and Restrict student from course registration as the subject. Enter a description of the specific violation, if necessary. 4. Select a regulatory authority. For example, select **Office of the Registrar**. 5. Select a value from the picklist that you defined for Regulatory Code as the type. The Type value must match the Scope value of the regulation record that you created earlier for data preparation. See [Prepare the Data for Holds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create records that populate the reasons, restrictions, and resolutions of your holds."). 6. Set the effective start and end dates and times. Typically, the effective period is the academic year. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Select all the reason-restriction pairs that apply to this hold. Make sure that regulation clauses are active during the hold’s effective period. 9. Click **Next**. 10. Select an action plan and assign it to the hold. If you don’t require the students to act on this hold, select **No Actions Needed**. For example, the registrar’s office places a hold on a student because it’s waiting for an external organization to act, such as a transcript from an international institution. 11. If you want to remove this hold automatically when it expires, turn on Automatic Resolution. 12. Save your changes. Review the description, reasons, restrictions, and resolution tasks in the Hold Summary tab. # Define Sharing Rules If you have an existing Volunteers for Salesforce org that has been upgraded to the Salesforce Winter '20 release and have enabled the Secure Guest User Record Access setting, create sharing rules to give guest users access to your records. For information about guest user sharing settings, see [Secure Guest Users’ Sharing Settings and Record Access](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_secure_guest_user_sharing.htm&type=5) . ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important Organization-Wide Defaults (OWDs) will no longer be applied to Site Guest Users for new orgs created after the [Salesforce Winter '20 release.](https://releasenotes.docs.salesforce.com/en-us/winter20/release-notes/salesforce_release_notes.htm) Site Guest Users must be granted access via [Criteria Based Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_site_guest_user_access_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The System Admin must select Grant Guest Users Update Access in Volunteer Settings to allow guest users to update records shared with them."). If your org is new, this setting will be in place by default. Existing org will need to check the Secure Guest User Record Access checkbox. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When following the [steps provided by Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_secure_guest_user_sharing.htm&type=5) to enable the Secure Guest User Record Access setting, click **Edit**. Scroll past all the Objects to Other Settings, and check **Secure Guest User Record Access**. To determine which sharing rules to create, use the criteria below - If the OWD for Contact is not set to Controlled by Parent, you need to create sharing rules for Campaign and Contact. - If the OWD for Contact is set to Controlled by Parent, you need to create sharing rules for Campaign and Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Contacts are considered private, and cannot be shared, if they're not associated with an Account. If you don't have automations like the NPSP Household Account Model that automatically assigns a Contact to an Account, consider using **Signup Bucket Account On Create** in V4S Custom Settings. The sharing rules in this article are examples. We encourage you to set up sharing based on your org's needs. ## Define Campaign Sharing Rules To define Campaign sharing rules: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note For Jobs and their related Shift and Hours records to display on the Volunteers Site, the Campaign must be shared with the Site Guest User. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Campaign Sharing Rules related list. 4. In the Campaign Sharing Rules related list, click **New**. 5. In the Label field, enter Volunteers Site Guest User. 6. In the Rule Name field, enter Leave Default derived from the Label. 7. In the Rule Type field, enter Guest user access, based on criteria. 8. Select the records to share: - **Field**: Active - **Operator**: equals - **Value**: True 9. In the Select the users to share with section, enter Volunteers Site Guest User (your site name might be different). 10. In the Select the level of access for the users section, set Campaign Access to Read Only. 11. Click **Save**. ![Criteria Based Sharing Rule for Campaign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaignsharingrule.png) ## Define Contact Sharing Rules To define Contact sharing rules: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When the Organization-Wide Default for the Contact object is set to Controlled by Parent, you will need to share at the Account level instead. Contacts are considered private, and cannot be shared, if they're not associated with an Account. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Contact Sharing Rules related list. 4. In the Contact Sharing Rule related list, click **New**. 5. In the Label field, enter Volunteers Site Guest User. 6. In the Rule Name field, enter Leave Default derived from the Label. 7. In the Rule Type field, enter Guest user access, based on criteria. 8. Select the records to share: - **Field**: Volunteer Status - **Operator**: equals - **Value**: Check all Volunteer Status options 9. In the Select the users to share with section, enter Volunteers Site Guest User (your site name might be different). 10. In the Select the level of access for the users section, set Contact Access to Read Only. 11. Click **Save**. ![Criteria Based Sharing Rule for Contacts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/contactsharingrule.png) ## Define Account Sharing Rules ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When the Organization-Wide Defaults for the Contact object is not set to Controlled by Parent, you will need to share at the Contact level instead. Contacts are considered private, and cannot be shared, if they're not associated with an Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note It's important to know which account or account type is associated with the volunteer's contact record. If your org's Account sharing criteria does not grant access to the right account for volunteers, the Guest Site User won't have access to the Contact and a duplicate Contact will be created. Not sure which account model you are using? If you're using NPSP learn more in [Which Account Model Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_account_model_am_i_using.htm) If you aren't using NPSP, check with your System Administrator to determine the best sharing rule fields and values to use for granting access to a volunteer’s account. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Account Sharing Rules related list. 4. In the Account Sharing Rules related list, click **New**. 5. In the Label field, enter Volunteers Site Guest User. 6. In the Rule Name field, leave the default Rule Name field value as is. 7. In the Rule Type field, select Guest user access, based on criteria. 8. Select the records to share. For example, if you want to share Contacts for an Account of a given industry (Nonprofit), you would enter these values: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember, these are examples. We encourage you to set up sharing for your volunteer's Account record as needed for your org. - **Field:** Industry - **Operator:** equals - **Value:** Not For Profit 9. In the Select the level of access for the users section, set Default Account and Contact Access to Read Only. 10. Click **Save**. ![Criteria Based Sharing Rule for Accounts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/accountsharingrule.png) # Delegated Access Management With delegated access management, you can assign proxies and delegate scoped, time-bound access to your information. You decide who acts on your behalf, what access you delegate, and when that access starts and ends.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
This framework supports these delegation methods: Self-Service An Experience Cloud user adds their own proxy and delegates access directly. Staff-Assisted An Education Cloud user sets up the delegation on behalf of another user. ## Core Principles of Delegated Access These core principles govern delegated access: User-Driven The information owner decides who can access their information. Time-Bound Access has defined start and end dates and expires automatically. External-Ready Proxies can be external users, including users who self-register through an Experience Cloud portal. Inherited Least Privilege A proxy can access only what the delegating user can access. - **[Delegated Access Management in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_delegated_access_management_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A self-service authorization model helps your institution meet privacy requirements and gives trusted individuals access to student data. Students grant proxies, such as parents, guardians, or other trusted individuals, access to their institutional records. - **[Set Up Your Org for Delegated Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_delegated_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Delegated Access Management, assign permissions, configure student-proxy relationships and record sharing, and add the My Proxies component to case and contact record pages. - **[Manage Delegated Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_delegated_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data privacy regulations such as FERPA and GDPR require strict access delegation. Students need control over who accesses their data and the ability to revoke access at any time. Your institution also needs audit trails to support compliance. Manage delegated access efficiently, support compliance, build trust, and improve the experience for families. - **[Staff Assisted Proxy Management and Access Delegation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_grant_delegated_access_proxy_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student advisors can grant parents, guardians, and other proxies access to selected student information for a specified time period. Select the delegated access definitions that determine which categories of information the proxy can access. - **[Delegated Access Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_delegated_access_statuses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delegated access request statuses show where a request is in the access lifecycle and whether an action is required. Use the statuses to track proxy registration, scheduled access, granting, revocation, expiration, retries, and terminal failures. # Delegated Access Management in Education A self-service authorization model helps your institution meet privacy requirements and gives trusted individuals access to student data. Students grant proxies, such as parents, guardians, or other trusted individuals, access to their institutional records.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Students don't understand database objects to delegate access. Instead, your Salesforce admin configures user-friendly delegated access definitions backed by data sets that map the underlying objects. Students select these definitions to authorize what their proxies view. Your Salesforce admin defines the available access levels to govern delegation. - A data set maps the relevant objects and defines how those records resolve to the student. Your admin structures data sets to bundle underlying records, such as billing statements, course schedules, or financial aid awards. This structure restricts proxy visibility to the intended records. - A delegated access definition combines a delegated access data set and a permission set into an access option. Your admin configures delegation definitions to map data sets to preapproved permission sets that students can grant to proxies. - With lifecycle policies, your admin can set system-wide rules for expiration dates and proxy invitation workflows, automating the delegated access lifecycle. Through a dedicated self-service portal, students maintain direct control over who interacts with their data. - Invite parents, guardians, or other trusted individuals to register on the proxy portal. - Select the access definitions that a proxy views or manages. - Update or terminate proxy access at any time. # Delegated Access Statuses Delegated access request statuses show where a request is in the access lifecycle and whether an action is required. Use the statuses to track proxy registration, scheduled access, granting, revocation, expiration, retries, and terminal failures.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| Status | Condition | | --- | --- | | Pending | No proxy user exists in the org, and a sign-up email was sent to the proxy. | | New | The delegated access request exists, but access granting hasn’t started. | | Scheduled | The delegated access request has a future access start date. | | Grant In Progress | Access is being granted to the proxy. | | Granted | The proxy has access to the student’s records. | | Needs Review | The proxy’s email address matches multiple contacts, or the matching contact is linked to multiple active users. The request requires review before processing can continue. | | Revoke Requested | An admin or student requested revocation of the proxy’s access. | | Revoke In Progress | The proxy’s access is being removed in response to a revocation request. | | Revoked | The proxy’s access was removed in response to a revocation request. | | Expiry In Progress | The proxy’s access is being removed because the access end date passed. | | Expired | The proxy’s access was removed because the access end date passed. | | Pending Retry | A temporary error interrupted processing, and the request was queued for another attempt. | | Failed | The request reached the retry limit and isn’t processed again automatically. | | Grant Failed | Access couldn’t be granted. The request is retried during the next scheduled batch job. | | Revoke Failed | Access couldn’t be revoked. The request is retried during the next scheduled batch job. | | Expiry Failed | Expired access couldn’t be removed. The request is retried during the next scheduled batch job. | # Delete a Learning Program Plan To maintain data accuracy, delete unused learning program plans. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To delete a learning program plan: Education Cloud Full Access
1. In the Learning Program Plan list view, find the program plan, click ![Actions Menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Delete**. 2. To confirm, click **Delete**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Deleting a learning program plan doesn't delete the related learning program plan requirements. SEE ALSO: - [Create a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Program Plan Builder to view, edit, save, cancel, and publish all your program plans. You can also organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses, and add active versions of learning courses to each element.") - [Edit a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edit_a_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To ensure accurate data capture and visibility, edit program plans by using the Program Plan Builder.") # Delete Application Documents and Data Understand how to remove personally identifiable information from Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To delete application documents and data: | Education Cloud Full Access | Applications contain a large amount of personal data, also known as personally identifiable information (PII). If applicants or students contact your team to remove their PII, you need a way to remove application documents and data, such as transcripts and letters of recommendation. For more information about Education Cloud and personally identifiable information, see [Data Protection and Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.data_protection_and_privacy.htm&type=5). Consider these items when you delete application documents and data. - Deleting an individual application doesn't delete its associated tasks, document checklist items, or files. - Typically, admissions directors or Salesforce administrators manage application documents and data. If other staff members are involved, make sure they have the necessary permissions. In case of issues, ask your Salesforce administrator to verify permissions. ## Delete Documents In Education Cloud, each application's related documents save as Document Checklist Item records. By default, you can't delete files from document checklist items. ### Enable Checklist Items with Attachments Before users can delete documents, enable a setting that lets them ​​delete document checklist items. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for Document Checklist Settings, and then select **Document Checklist Settings**. 2. Turn on **Checklist Items with Attachments**. After you enable the Checklist Items with Attachments setting, if you delete a file's document checklist item while they're still related, you can't delete the file from Salesforce later. ### Delete an Application Requirement Document 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Document Checklist Items**. 2. Next to the file that you want to delete, click the Actions Menu ![Actions menu icon.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) and select **Delete**. 3. Click **Delete** to confirm. ## Delete Data A variety of records store the data that results from an applicant's responses to application questions. The subject of the question determines the type of record. For example, a Contact record stores a birthdate, and a Person Education record stores the information about the college an applicant previously attended. 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select the object that has the record you want to delete. 2. Click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) and then select **Delete**. Alternatively, you can be more specific and delete individual fields from the record. 3. Click **Delete** to confirm. See [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5). # Delete Application Documents and Data in the App Review considerations for deleting documents, and learn how to delete documents or data from Admissions Connect. ## Before You Begin Working with applications means handling a lot of personal data, also known as personally identifiable information (PII). If applicants or students contact your team to remove their PII, you need a way to remove application data and documents, such as transcripts and letters of recommendation.  Deleting an Action Plan doesn't delete its associated Tasks, Document Checklist Items, or Files associated with the Document Checklist Items. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Typically, only admissions directors or Admissions Connect administrators manage application data and documents. If your institution plans to have additional staff members delete data and documents, make sure these users have the correct permissions to do so. If you're an admissions staff member completing these tasks and you can't follow along with the documented steps, ask your Admissions Connect administrator to check your permissions. - **[Delete Documents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Admissions Connect, application documents are attached to Document Checklist Item records, which are child records of an Action Plan that’s assigned to the Application. By default, you can’t delete Files from Document Checklist Items. - **[Delete Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When an applicant answers a question on their application, that information is stored in various records depending on the subject of the question. For example, a birthdate is stored in a Contact record, and the information about what college an applicant previously attended is stored in an Education History record. In Admissions Connect, applicant data is displayed in the Admissions Connect components using Tasks that are associated with Action Plans. ## Delete Documents In Admissions Connect, application documents are attached to Document Checklist Item records, which are child records of an Action Plan that’s assigned to the Application. By default, you can’t delete Files from Document Checklist Items. Before you can delete anything, go to Setup and search for and select **Document Checklist Settings**. Then enable the Checklist Items with Attachments setting. Now you’re ready to delete an Application requirement document. 1. From the app, open an Application record and navigate to the Action Plan record.  1. On the Application record, click the **Related** tab. 2. In the list of Action Plans, click on the Action Plan name that you want to remove the attached document from. If you don't see the plan you're looking for, click **View All**. 2. Delete the File attached to the Document Checklist Item.  1. On the Action Plan record, click the Document Checklist Item name related to the file that you want to delete. 2. Click the file name to open its preview. 3. Click the action menu, then click **Delete**. 3. Delete the Action Plan from the Application.  1. Go back to the Action Plan record, then click **Delete**. 4. Delete the Document Checklist Item.  1. Go back to the Document Checklist Item record. You might still have this open as a subtab of the Application. If you don’t have it open, use a Document Checklist Item list view to find the record you want to delete. 2. On the record page, click the action menu, the click **Delete**. When deleting documents, keep in mind that: - You can’t delete a Document Checklist Item record that’s associated with an Action Plan. - After enabling the Checklist Items with Attachments setting, when a File’s Document Checklist Item is deleted while it’s still associated, the File can’t be deleted from Salesforce later. ## Delete Data When an applicant answers a question on their application, that information is stored in various records depending on the subject of the question. For example, a birthdate is stored in a Contact record, and the information about what college an applicant previously attended is stored in an Education History record. In Admissions Connect, applicant data is displayed in the Admissions Connect components using Tasks that are associated with Action Plans. 1. Delete the Action Plan record assigned to an Application. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Deleting the Action Plan ensures that the data you want to delete isn’t displayed in the Admissions Connect components. Keep in mind that the data still exists in Admissions Connect until you delete it.  1. From the app, open an Application record. 2. Click the **Related** tab. 3. In the list of Action Plans, click on the Action Plan name that you want to delete. 4. Click **Delete**. 2. Delete the data. Find and open the record you want to delete, then click **Delete**. Alternatively, you can be more specific and delete individual fields from the record. See Also: [Data Portability for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_data_portability.htm) [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm) in Salesforce Help # Delete Deprecated Items from Your NPSP Org Nonprofit Success Pack has changed over the years. As we improve the product, there are inevitably deprecated items that are no longer required and as part of our cleanup efforts, we mark items for deletion so that you can safely remove them from your org if you'd like to. Keep in mind that you don't have to remove them—these deprecated items won't have any impact on your org. _**We strongly recommend you delete the metadata in an upgraded Sandbox org and test your daily processes before deleting in an upgraded production org.**_ These items can include: - Custom Fields in Objects or Settings - Custom Settings - Reports - Static Resources - Tabs - Visualforce Pages ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You will only be able to delete packaged fields that have been marked for deletion by Salesforce.org. - **[Remove Custom Fields in Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to remove custom fields in objects. - **[Remove Custom Fields in Custom Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to delete custom fields in custom settings. - **[Remove Custom Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to remove custom settings. - **[Remove Custom Tabs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to remove custom tabs. - **[Remove Lightning Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove any deprecated Lightning Components from your org. - **[Remove Static Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to remove static resources. - **[Remove Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to delete visualforce pages. - **[Items That Are Safe to Remove](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The following items are safe to remove. The list is organized by type. ## Remove Custom Fields in Objects Learn how to remove custom fields in objects. 1. In Setup, click the Object Manager tab, then click the object whose fields you want to remove. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Next to the field you want to remove, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Delete**. Note that you'll only see a Delete link next to fields that are safe to delete. ## Remove Custom Fields in Custom Settings Learn how to delete custom fields in custom settings. 1. In Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Settings**. 2. Click the name of the Custom Setting that has fields you want to remove. 3. Click **Del** next to the field. ## Remove Custom Settings Learn how to remove custom settings. 1. In Setup, enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Settings**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You may have a large number of custom settings. If so, we recommend sorting by the Namespace column so that you can easily find the right settings to remove. 2. Click **Delete** next to the Custom Setting you want to remove. ## Remove Custom Tabs Learn how to remove custom tabs. 1. In Setup, enter Tabs in the Quick Find box, then click **Tabs**. 2. Click **Del** next to the tab you want to remove. ## Remove Lightning Components Remove any deprecated Lightning Components from your org. 1. In Setup, enter Lightning Components in Quick Find, then click **Lightning Components**. 2. Click **Del** next to the component you want to remove. ## Remove Static Resources Learn how to remove static resources. 1. In Setup, enter Static in the Quick Find box, then click **Static Resources**. 2. Click **Del** next to the Static Resource you want to remove. ## Remove Visualforce Pages Learn how to delete visualforce pages. 1. In Setup, enter Visualforce Pages in the Quick Find box, then click **Visualforce Pages**. 2. Click **Del** next to the page you want to remove. ## Items That Are Safe to Remove The following items are safe to remove. The list is organized by type. | **Type** | **Name** | **Namespace** | | --- | --- | --- | | Custom Setting | DEPRECATED-RD Error Queue | npe03 | | Custom Setting Fields | Recurring Donations Settings Field: DEPRECATED-Disable Sched of Nightly Job | npe03 | | Custom Setting Fields | Recurring Donations Settings Field:DEPRECATED-Nightly Update ID | npe03 | | Custom Setting Fields | Recurring Donations Settings Field:DEPRECATED-Has Package Update | npe03 | | Custom Setting Fields | Recurring Donations Settings Field:DEPRECATED-Package Update URL | npe03 | | Custom Setting Fields | Recurring Donations Settings Field:DEPRECATED-Max Package Version | npe03 | | Custom Setting Fields | Recurring Donations Settings Field:DEPRECATED-Last Update Check | npe03 | | Custom Tab | Recurring Donations Settings | npe03 | | Lightning Component | utilCustomErrors | npsp | | Static Resource | ArborJS.resource | npe4 | | Static Resource | AToolTip.resource | npe4 | | Visualforce Page | RecurringDonationsSettings | npe03 | | Visualforce Page | RecurringDonations\_AddDonationsBTN | npe03 | # Delete Imported Records After you've successfully imported your records, you can optionally reduce data storage by deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object. Deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object does not delete your new Account, Contact, or Opportunity donation records. If you're entering batches of gifts using Gift Entry, we DO NOT recommend using the Delete All Data Import Records or Delete All Imported Records actions. Learn more in [Process a Collection of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Test processing your Gift Entry batch and then process the batch to add the gifts to NPSP."). Make sure your data was imported successfully before you delete data in the NPSP Data Import object. 1. Click the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. In the All Items section, click **NPSP Data Imports**. 3. Select a view of your imports. 4. Click one of the following: - **Delete All Data Import Records** to delete all data in the NPSP Data Import object, regardless of its import success status. - **Delete Imported Data Import Records** to delete data in the NPSP Data Import object that was successfully imported. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Depending on how Actions are organized in your page layout, you may need to click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) in order to see the Delete options. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you see an Insufficient Privileges error when trying to delete, you Admin needs to: - Add your profile to the Enabled profiles for the `BDI_DataImportDeleteBTN` Visualforce page. Access the list of Enabled Profiles in Setup by searching for Visualforce Pages. Next to `BDI_DataImportDeleteBTN`, click **Security**. - Grant your profile Delete access for the NPSP Data Imports object. 5. You see a count of the records you're about to delete. If you're ready to delete them, click **Mass Delete**. ![The Mass Delete page, with the warning that informs you how many records you're about to delete.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/mass_delete.png) Deleted records are sent to the Recycle Bin. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you see this error message: `npsp:Too many DML rows: 10001`, it means you have more than 10,000 records to delete. If this is the case, use the Salesforce Data Loader to delete the records. Learn more in [Perform Mass Deletes](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.dataloader.meta/dataloader/performing_mass_deletes.htm). # Delete the Migration Files After you complete the migration, you can uninstall the migration packages to delete all custom fields and files from the packages that are no longer required. Before you proceed, deactivate all associated Data Processing Engine definitions. See [Manage Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_view_dpe_definitions.htm&type=5). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then select **Installed Packages**. 2. Find the package that you want to delete from the list, and click **Uninstall**. 3. Select **Do not save a copy of this package's data after uninstall**. 4. Select **Yes, I want to uninstall this package and permanently delete all associated components**, and then click **Uninstall**. You are notified by email when the package is uninstalled. If you run into dependency related errors while trying to uninstall the packages, resolve the errors and then proceed. 5. Similarly, uninstall the migration files for Education Data Architecture, Student Success Hub, and Admissions Connect. # Deleting Contacts This article describes how deletion works in a new Trial org with NPSP. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important This article outlines the NPSP deletion behavior starting with release 3.89 (February 2017). It describes how deletion works in a new Trial org with NPSP, and does not account for any additional customizations (including apps, fields, and so on). - **[What Happens When I Delete a Contact (with Contact Delete Override Enabled)?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deleting_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete a Contact with Contact Delete Override enabled, NPSP deletes Opportunities (if the Contact is the Primary Contact), Recurring Donations, and Relationships in addition to standard Salesforce detail records. ## What Happens When I Delete a Contact (with Contact Delete Override Enabled)? When you delete a Contact with Contact Delete Override enabled, NPSP deletes Opportunities (if the Contact is the Primary Contact), Recurring Donations, and Relationships in addition to standard Salesforce detail records. If the Contact is not the last in the Household, and they have Closed/Won Opportunities or Organization Opportunities (where the Account is set to something other than the Contact's Household or One-to-One Account), then you can't delete the Contact. Additionally, if the Contact is the last in the Household, and they have Closed/Won Opportunities or Organization Opportunities, you can't delete the Contact and leave the Account empty. You must manually delete the Opportunities before deleting the Contact. If the Contact is the last Contact in the Household or One-to-One Account, NPSP prompts the user to either delete the Contact and leave the Account empty OR delete the Contact and the Account. ![Warning message asking for confirmation to delete the only Contact in a Household Account, with options to Delete Contact and Leave Empty Account, View Contact Record, or Delete Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/del_contacts_lastcontact.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Contact Delete Override doesn't apply when deleting records through the API or bulk deletion. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're not sure if you have Contact Delete Override enabled, or you want to learn how to enable it, see [Enable Contact Delete Override](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring contacts."). # Deluxe Custom Reports Learn how to customize NPSP reports, includes an example report scenario. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deluxe_custom_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about what deluxe custom report types are and how they can help your users. - **[Deluxe Custom Report Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deluxe_custom_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create one custom report type that covered almost all use cases for a given object - **[Example: Analyze Donations from Wolf Rocks Amphitheatre Donors by Age](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deluxe_custom_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how a nonprofit uses deluxe custom report types. - **[Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deluxe_custom_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Considerations and limitations of deluxe custom report types. ## Overview Learn about what deluxe custom report types are and how they can help your users. Because there are so many to pick from, finding the right report type can be a challenge for users. As an administrator, you can [hide unused report types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_to_manage_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to administer NPSP reports, ensure reliable reports, and improve the user experience.") or [create custom report types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_reports_workbook.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide introduces nonprofit administrators to the NPSP reports and demonstrates how you can customize the reports to meet your organization's needs."). But, even with these strategies, your users still need to know which report type to choose for a given scenario.  What if you could create one custom report type that covered almost all use cases for a given object? Let's explore a technique Evan Ponter from the nonprofit user community calls "deluxe" custom report types. ## Deluxe Custom Report Types Create one custom report type that covered almost all use cases for a given object Consider the reporting requirements for a given object in Salesforce, let's say, reports that include Opportunities. In NPSP, there are many objects that Opportunities relate to and each requires its own report type. For example: - Account - Primary Contact - Matching Gift Account - Notification Recipient Contact - Primary Campaign Source And the list goes on.  But by creating a single "deluxe" custom report type for each object and adding fields from related objects that your users will need to report on, you should be able to handle the vast majority of report requests. We'll show you how in an example scenario that you can follow along with in your own org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note With deluxe custom report types, you can include fields from objects that the Opportunity has a lookup to (like Primary Contact, Account/Organization, etc.). You can't include fields from objects that have a lookup to the Opportunity object (like Payments, GAU Allocations, Partial Soft Credits, etc.). ### Summary of Steps Creating a deluxe custom report types requires the following tasks: 1. Create custom report type, with just one Primary Object. 2. Using the available lookups in Edit Layout, add the fields you want from related objects. ## Example: Analyze Donations from Wolf Rocks Amphitheatre Donors by Age See how a nonprofit uses deluxe custom report types. Juan, the solo admin for Wolf Rocks Amphitheatre, is rolling out reporting functionality for the fundraising team. Wolf Rocks is a nonprofit organization that operates a live performance venue supporting a variety of programs.  The fundraising team is excited to see a list of donations grouped by the age of the donor. Understanding the number and total amount of donations for each age will help focus upcoming appeal efforts. Juan knows that the report needs to show a list of Opportunity records and that custom fields like Age from the Primary Contact are not included in the standard Opportunities report type. The fundraising team has more requests for donation reports waiting for Juan and he's feeling a little overwhelmed! Juan has created reports before, but he's determined to try out a new way of using them. He takes this opportunity (pun intended) to create a single custom report type to facilitate most requests for data involving the Opportunity object. Follow along as Juan creates his first "deluxe" custom report type. Now, Juan can create a new report using this Opportunities (Deluxe) report type, add the summary columns requested by the fundraising team, group by the Age field from the Primary Contact, and give the fundraising team exactly the report they need to analyze donations by donor age. 1. In Setup, Juan enters Report Types in the Quick Find box, then clicks **Report Types**. 2. He then clicks **New Custom Report Type**. 3. Juan sets these values: - Primary Object: Opportunities - Report Type Label: Opportunities (Deluxe) - Report Type Name: Opportunities\_Deluxe - Description: Every row represents an Opportunity record. Includes fields from the Contact object. - Store in Category: Opportunities - Deployment Status: Deployed 4. Juan clicks **Next**. 5. For Define Report Records Set, Juan sees that this report type will generate reports about Opportunities. Perfect! Since he doesn't need to include other objects in the definition for this custom report type, Juan clicks **Save**. ![Select Opportunities as the Primary Object for the custom report type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/select_primary_object.jpg) 6. Next, Juan scrolls to the bottom of the newly-created custom report type and clicks **Edit Layout** to add fields. ![Edit Layout option highlighted on the custom report type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/edit_layout.jpg) 7. Juan clicks **Add related fields via lookup**, so that he can select fields from related objects. ![Add related fields via lookup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_related_fields.jpg) ![Click on the Primary Contact link to access fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_related_field_primary_contact.jpg) ![Select the Age field to add it to your custom report type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_related_age_field.jpg) 8. Juan clicks **Primary Contact**, then selects **Age**. Age is a custom field in Juan's organization. 9. He clicks **OK**. 10. (Optional) You can include fields from related records, such as the Primary Contact's Account record, giving you even more flexibility. To access related fields, click **View Related Fields** next to the related record. ![View related fields link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/view_related_fields.jpg) 11. Juan keeps the custom report type layout organized by grouping fields into relevant sections—one for each object referenced. He creates a section labeled Primary Contacts and drags the Age field into it. ![Move the Age field to the new Primary Contacts section](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_field_to_section.jpg) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Sections are displayed as folder groupings in the report builder. Organize fields in a way that helps your organization understand which object the field came from or what kind of data it represents. 12. (Optional) Adjust how fields appear in reports by clicking a field, then clicking **Edit Properties**. You can change the Display As, for example, from Primary Contact: Age to Donor Age. You can also select **Checked by Default** so that the field displays as a column when you create new reports using this report type. ![Edit Field Information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/edit_field_info.jpg) 13. Click **OK** to finish. 14. With the desired fields added to the layout, Juan clicks **Save**. ![Deluxe Custom Report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/deluxe_report.png) The fundraising team is loving this report type! Now, anytime they need a report that shows Opportunity records with related record details, they use the Opportunities (Deluxe) report type. No more fumbling with various report types to find one that includes the fields they need.  Juan uses this same approach for every report requested by his organization. If the “Deluxe” report type already exists for an object, he adjusts it to include additional relevant fields. For objects that don’t have a “Deluxe” custom report type yet, he creates it and adds the desired fields.  Nice work! ## Considerations Considerations and limitations of deluxe custom report types. While deluxe custom report types work for most scenarios, there are a few limitations you should be aware of: - A custom report type layout can include a maximum of 1000 fields. - A custom report type can reference a maximum of 60 unique objects. - The “Show Me” ownership filter in the report builder references the Owner field of the primary object specified in the report type. - On deluxe custom report types you can include fields from objects that the primary object has a lookup to (for example, for Opportunities: Primary Contact, Account/Organization, etc.). You can't include fields from objects that have a lookup to the primary object records (for example, for Opportunities: Payments, GAU Allocations, Partial Soft Credits, etc.). # Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework for EDA Follow these steps to create Apex classes that use the TDTM design for EDA. Education Data Architecture (EDA) relies heavily on Apex to implement much of its functionality. Salesforce.org products use one trigger per object and Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) to control the execution of Apex classes. You should familiarize yourself with the TDTM architecture if you’re developing custom Apex code, or integrating an external system with Salesforce. You don’t need to create new triggers for common standard objects such as Contacts and Accounts, or for EDA custom objects. TDTM is extensible. When you write your own code, you only need to write Apex classes within the TDTM framework. You can create custom triggers and classes that work within the TDTM framework for your custom objects as well. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on the fundamentals of TDTM, read [Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm) . - **[Summary of Steps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's an overview of the steps to deploy your custom Apex class in the TDTM framework. - **[Technical Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In TDTM design, our triggers call the `[TDTM_TriggerHandler](https://developer.salesforce.org/eda/apexdocumentation/tdtm_triggerhandler.html)` class and pass it all the environment information. - **[Create an Apex Class](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's an example of a custom class that follows the TDTM design: - **[Create a Test Class](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating your custom Apex class, write your test class. - **[Create a Trigger Handler Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a custom class of your own, you must also create a `Trigger_Handler__c` record that references the class. ## Summary of Steps Here's an overview of the steps to deploy your custom Apex class in the TDTM framework. 1. Create your Apex class. The class must: 1. Use `Global`, not `Public` access modifier. 2. Extend the `hed.TDTM_Runnable` class. 3. Override the `TDTM_Runnable` run method, which returns a `hed.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper` and takes the following parameters: 1. `List newlist` 2. `List oldlist` 3. `hed.TDTM_Runnable.Action triggerAction` 4. `Schema.DescribeSObjectResult objResult` 4. Use `DMLWrapper` for efficient DML operations. 2. Write your test class. 3. Add a Trigger Handler record with the appropriate field data. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a best practice, use `_TDTM` as the suffix for your class (example: `OPP_MyAwesomeClass_TDTM.cls`) ## Technical Overview In TDTM design, our triggers call the `[TDTM_TriggerHandler](https://developer.salesforce.org/eda/apexdocumentation/tdtm_triggerhandler.html)` class and pass it all the environment information. The actual business logic that needs to run when an action occurs on a record is stored in classes. We created a custom object, `Trigger_Handler__c`, to store which classes should run for each object, along with the related actions. In this object, we also define whether the class is active or inactive, in which order it should execute for the same object, and other settings. The Trigger Handler then calls these classes when appropriate, which provides the advantage of running all the DML operations at the end of execution through the `[DmlWrapper](https://developer.salesforce.org/eda/apexdocumentation/tdtm_runnable.html)` class. For more information about the Trigger Handler object, read [Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_manage_trigger_handlers.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Our codebase is open source. Explore the Trigger Handler class and see how our package code implements the TDTM framework in our [GitHub repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/eda). This is a public repository and you can contribute code if you wish. Not every Salesforce object has a TDTM trigger. View the TDTM triggers we include in the EDA package here: [https://github.com/SalesforceFoundation/EDA/tree/main/force-app/main/default/triggers](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/eda/tree/main/force-app/main/default/triggers). Keep in mind that these Trigger Handlers don't appear in the Trigger Handlers tab. They trigger EDA\-specific TDTM handlers that are Active. EDA doesn't have product-specific TDTM handlers for these objects. If you create your own custom objects, or want to run a TDTM class on a standard object that doesn't have a trigger provided by the package, you can create a trigger within the TDTM framework. Use the `TDTM_Global_API` global class and reference the `hed` namespace. Here’s an example code snippet: ```java trigger TDTM_MyCustomObject on MyCustomObject__c (after delete, after insert, after undelete,after update, before delete, before insert, before update) { hed.TDTM_Global_API.run(Trigger.isBefore, Trigger.isAfter, Trigger.isInsert, Trigger.isUpdate, Trigger.isDelete, Trigger.isUndelete, Trigger.new, Trigger.old, Schema.SObjectType.MyCustomObject__c); } ``` ## Create an Apex Class Here's an example of a custom class that follows the TDTM design: ```java // Trigger Handler Class on CampaignMember, to reset any Contact's HasOptedOutOfEmail field global class CM_ClearEmailOptOut_TDTM extends hed.TDTM_Runnable { // the Trigger Handler’s Run method we must provide global override hed.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper run(List newlist, List oldlist, hed.TDTM_Runnable.Action triggerAction, Schema.DescribeSObjectResult objResult) { hed.TDTM_Runnable.dmlWrapper dmlWrapper = new hed.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper(); if (triggerAction == hed.TDTM_Runnable.Action.AfterInsert) { list listConId = new list(); for (CampaignMember cm : (list)newlist) { if (cm.ContactId != null) { listConId.add(cm.ContactId); } } list listCon = [select Id, HasOptedOutOfEmail from Contact where Id in :listConId]; for (Contact con : listCon) { con.HasOptedOutOfEmail = false; } dmlWrapper.objectsToUpdate.addAll((list)listCon); } return dmlWrapper; } } ``` Note that because the class is external, you need to declare the class and its method global, and use the `hed` prefix when calling classes inside the EDA package. If you use the public identifier instead, you won’t get an error, but you won’t see the expected behavior either. It will appear as if the class doesn’t exist or is inactive. Additionally, if the class you are writing is inside another managed package, include the package prefix when entering the class name in the `Class__c` field of the Trigger Handler record. In our example, if `CM_ClearEmailOptOut_TDTM` was inside a managed package with prefix `foo`, its name should be entered as `foo.CM_ClearEmailOptOut_TDTM`. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you have a custom trigger that calls a TDTM handler or a TDTM class for one of the objects that we already provide a trigger for, make sure to prevent re-entrancy for the object or delete your trigger to avoid calling the class twice. ## Create a Test Class After creating your custom Apex class, write your test class. 1. By default, test classes can’t see data in your org. Information about your Trigger Handler record resides in the Trigger Handler object and as a result, you must load the default Trigger Handlers into memory using the `TDTM_Global_API` class and `getTdtmToken` method. ```java List tokens = hed.TDTM_Global_API.getTdtmConfig(); ``` Read more about this globally exposed class and its methods at [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://developer.salesforce.org/eda/apexdocumentation/tdtm_global_api.html). 2. Add information about your Trigger Handler. For example: ```java tokens.add(new hed.TDTM_Global_API.TdtmToken('MyAccAwesomeClass_TDTM', 'Account', 'AfterInsert;AfterUpdate;AfterDelete', 2.00)); ``` 3. Pass your Trigger Handler configuration as a parameter of the `setTdtmConfig` method: ```java hed.TDTM_Global_API.setTdtmConfig(tokens); ``` 4. Insert your data and test your Trigger Handler: ```java // setup our test data... test.startTest(); // do some operations... test.stopTest(); // validate our results... ``` Here’s an example of a test class that follows the TDTM design: ```java @isTest public class MyTriggerHandler_TEST { @isTest static void testCMTrigger() { // first retrieve default EDA trigger handlers List tokens = hed.TDTM_Global_API.getTdtmConfig(); // Create our trigger handler using the constructor tokens.add(new hed.TDTM_Global_API.TdtmToken('MyAccAwesomeClass_TDTM', 'Account', 'AfterInsert;AfterUpdate;AfterDelete', 2.00)); // Pass trigger handler config to set method for this test run hed.TDTM_Global_API.setTdtmConfig(tokens); // setup our test data... test.startTest(); // do some operations... test.stopTest(); // validate our results... } } ``` ## Create a Trigger Handler Record When you create a custom class of your own, you must also create a `Trigger_Handler__c` record that references the class. Read [Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_manage_trigger_handlers.htm) for more information. There must be a `Trigger_Handler__c` record for each class managed by TDTM. Take a look at the Trigger Handler tab to see the list of `Trigger_Handler__c` records in your org. ![Trigger Handler List View](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/eda-trigger-handlers-list-view.png) Load Order is important in TDTM. If you want your code to fire after EDA packaged code, choose a number after the last number used for your object. For example, you could use 2 for a custom Account class. You can also use decimals if you want your code to run between two other classes. For example, you could use 2.5 for a custom Contact class. # Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework for NPSP The Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) relies heavily on Apex to implement much of its functionality. Salesforce.org products use one trigger per object and Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) to control the execution of Apex classes. You should familiarize yourself with the TDTM architecture if you’re developing your own custom Apex code, or integrating an external system with Salesforce. You don’t need to create new triggers for common standard objects such as Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities or for NPSP custom objects. TDTM is extensible. When you write your own code, you only need to write Apex classes within the TDTM framework. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on the fundamentals of TDTM, read [Table-Driven Trigger Management Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm). - **[Summary of Steps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's an overview of the steps to deploy your custom Apex class in the TDTM framework. - **[Technical Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how NPSP triggers work and the logic behind them. - **[Create an Apex Class](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's an example of a custom class that follows the TDTM design. - **[Create a Test Class](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, test classes can't see data in your org. Information about your Trigger Handler record resides in the Trigger Handler object and as a result, you must load the cached Trigger Handlers into memory. - **[Create a Trigger Handler Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a custom class of your own, you must also create a Trigger\_Handler\_\_c record that references the class. - **[Using the TDTM\_RunnableMutable Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Custom implementations of TDTM can't interact with the TDTM\_Runnable.DmlWrapper collection when it already has records in the objectsToUpdate collection. If you try to include your own DML in the objectsToUpdate collection, you'll get a Duplicate id in list error. While it's possible to run your code asynchronously or perform DML separately from theTDTM\_TriggerHandler, consider using an alternative interface called TDTM\_RunnableMutable. ## Summary of Steps Here's an overview of the steps to deploy your custom Apex class in the TDTM framework. 1. Create your Apex class. The class must: 1. Extend the `npsp.TDTM_Runnable` class. Depending on your implementation details, you may also use the [TDTM\_RunnableMutable interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) relies heavily on Apex to implement much of its functionality. Salesforce.org products use one trigger per object and Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) to control the execution of Apex classes."). 2. Override the `TDTM_Runnable` run method, which returns a `npsp.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper` and takes the following parameters: 1. `List newlist` 2. `List oldlist` 3. `npsp.TDTM_Runnable.Action triggerAction` 4. `Schema.DescribeSObjectResult objResult` 3. Use `DMLWrapper` for efficient DML operations. 2. Write your test class. 3. Add a Trigger Handler record with the appropriate field data **NPSP Settings** | **System Tools** | **Trigger Configuration**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a best practice, use `_TDTM` as the suffix for your class (example: `OPP_MyAwesomeClass_TDTM.cls`) ## Technical Overview Learn how NPSP triggers work and the logic behind them. In TDTM design, our triggers call the `` `TDTM_TriggerHandler` `` class and pass it all the environment information. The actual business logic that needs to run when an action occurs on a record is stored in plain old classes. We created a custom object, `Trigger_Handler__c`, to store which classes should run for each object, along with the related actions. In this object, we also define whether the class is active or inactive, what order it should execute in for the same object, and other settings. The Trigger Handler then calls these classes when appropriate, which provides the advantage of running all the DML operations at the end of execution through the `DmlWrapper` class. For more information about the Trigger Handler object, read [Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Our codebase is open source. Explore the Trigger Handler class and see how our package code implements this framework in our [GitHub repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/npsp). NPSP is referred to as Cumulus in Git. Cumulus is a public repository and you can contribute code if you wish. For information on contributing code, see our [code contributor's guide](https://www.salesforce.org/help/contribute-nonprofit-success-pack/). Not every Salesforce object has a TDTM trigger. You can see which objects have a TDTM trigger in [Apex Class Descriptions for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_apex_class_descriptions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Below is a list of Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) along with a description of each. Some classes appear multiple times because more than one Trigger Handler can reference the same class."). To see all Apex triggers present in your org, go to Apex Triggers in Setup. If you create your own custom objects, or want to run a TDTM class on a standard object that doesn't have a trigger provided by the package, you can create a trigger within the TDTM framework. Use the `TDTM_Config_API` global class and reference the `npsp` namespace. Here’s an example code snippet: ```java trigger TDTM_MyCustomObject on MyCustomObject__c (after delete, after insert, after undelete,after update, before delete, before insert, before update) { npsp.TDTM_Config_API.run(Trigger.isBefore, Trigger.isAfter, Trigger.isInsert, Trigger.isUpdate, Trigger.isDelete, Trigger.isUndelete, Trigger.new, Trigger.old, Schema.SObjectType.MyCustomObject__c); } ``` ## Create an Apex Class Here's an example of a custom class that follows the TDTM design. ```java global class CM_ContactRecentCampaign_TDTM extends npsp.TDTM_Runnable { global override npsp.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper run(List newlist, List oldlist, npsp.TDTM_Runnable.Action triggerAction, Schema.DescribeSObjectResult objResult) { npsp.TDTM_Runnable.dmlWrapper dmlWrapper = new npsp.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper(); List contactsToUpdate = new List(); List newCMList = (List) newlist; List oldCMList = (List) oldlist; if (triggerAction == npsp.TDTM_Runnable.Action.AfterInsert) { for (CampaignMember cm : newCMList) { if (cm.Status == 'Responded') { contactsToUpdate.add(new Contact(Id = cm.ContactId, Most_Recent_Responded_Campaign__c = cm.CampaignId)); } } } else if (triggerAction == npsp.TDTM_Runnable.Action.AfterUpdate) { for (Integer x = 0; x < newCMList.size(); x++) { if (newCMList[x].Status == 'Responded' && (newCMList[x].Status <> oldCMList[x].Status) ) { contactsToUpdate.add(new Contact(Id = newCMList[x].ContactId, Most_Recent_Responded_Campaign__c = newCMList[x].CampaignId)); } } } dmlWrapper.objectsToUpdate.addAll((List)contactsToUpdate); return dmlWrapper; } } ``` Note that because the class is external you need to use the `npsp` prefix when calling classes inside the NPSP package. Additionally, if the class you are writing is inside another managed package, include the package prefix when entering the class name in the `Class__c` field of the Trigger Handler record. In our example, if `CM_ContactRecentCampaign_TDTM` was inside a managed package with prefix `foo`, its name should be entered as `foo.CM_ContactRecentCampaign_TDTM`. ## Create a Test Class By default, test classes can't see data in your org. Information about your Trigger Handler record resides in the Trigger Handler object and as a result, you must load the cached Trigger Handlers into memory. 1. Use the global class `TDTM_Config_API` and its method `getCachedRecords`. ```java List listHandlers = npsp.TDTM_Config_API.getCachedRecords(); ``` 2. Add information about your Trigger Handler. For example: ```java npsp__Trigger_Handler__c th = new npsp__Trigger_Handler__c(); th.Name = 'MyOppAwesomeClass_TDTM'; th.npsp__Class__c = 'OPP_MyAwesomeClass_TDTM'; th.npsp__Object__c = 'Opportunity'; th.npsp__Trigger_Action__c = 'AfterInsert'; th.npsp__Active__c = true; th.npsp__Load_Order__c = 1; th.npsp__Asynchronous__c = false; ``` ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You must declare `npsp__Asynchronous__c` to be `false` or `true` in your test class. A null value causes the test to fail. 3. Add your Trigger Handler to the cached records: ```java listHandlers.add(th); ``` 4. Insert your data and test your Trigger Handler: ```java // setup our test data... test.startTest(); // do some operations... test.stopTest(); // validate our results... ``` Here’s an example of a test class that follows TDTM design: ```java @isTest private class CM_ContactRecentCampaign_TEST { static testMethod void test_CM_Responded_TDTM() { // Retrieve default NPSP Trigger Handlers List triggerHandlers = npsp.TDTM_Config_API.getCachedRecords(); // Add our Trigger Handler to cached Trigger Handlers npsp__Trigger_Handler__c th = new npsp__Trigger_Handler__c(); th.Name = 'MyCMTriggerHandler'; th.npsp__Class__c = 'CM_ContactRecentCampaign_TDTM'; th.npsp__Object__c = 'CampaignMember'; th.npsp__Trigger_Action__c = 'AfterInsert;AfterUpdate;'; th.npsp__Active__c = true; th.npsp__Load_Order__c = 1; th.npsp__Asynchronous__c = false; triggerHandlers.add(th); // set up test data Contact con1 = new Contact(FirstName = 'Jess', LastName = 'Lopez'); insert con1; List campList = new List(); campList.add(new Campaign(Name = 'Test Campaign 1', IsActive = true)); campList.add(new Campaign(Name = 'Test Campaign 2', IsActive = true)); insert campList; List campMemberList = new List(); campMemberList.add(new CampaignMember(ContactId = con1.Id, CampaignId = campList[0].Id, Status = 'Responded')); campMemberList.add(new CampaignMember(ContactId = con1.Id, CampaignId = campList[1].Id, Status = 'Sent')); insert campMemberList; test.startTest(); // Test 1: Insert 'Responded' Campaign Member and verify Contact update. con1 = [SELECT Id, Most_Recent_Responded_Campaign__c FROM Contact WHERE Id = :con1.Id]; System.assertEquals(con1.Most_Recent_Responded_Campaign__c, campList[0].Id); // Test 2: Change Status from 'Sent' to 'Responded' and verify Contact update campMemberList[1].Status = 'Responded'; update campMemberList[1]; con1 = [SELECT Id, Most_Recent_Responded_Campaign__c FROM Contact WHERE Id = :con1.Id]; System.assertEquals(con1.Most_Recent_Responded_Campaign__c, campList[1].Id); test.stopTest(); } } ``` ## Create a Trigger Handler Record When you create a custom class of your own, you must also create a Trigger\_Handler\_\_c record that references the class. Read [Manage Trigger Handlers in NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&language=en_US) for more information. There must be a `Trigger_Handler__c` record for each class managed by TDTM. Take a look at the Trigger Configuration page in **NPSP Settings** | **System Tools** | **Trigger Configuration** to see the list of `Trigger_Handler__c` records in your org. ![Trigger configuration page in NPSP Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/tdtm-npsp-trigger-config.png) Load Order is important in TDTM. If you want your code to fire after NPSP packaged code, choose a number after the last number used for the object. For example, you can use 3 for a custom Account class. Your class can also run in parallel with another class. For example, you can use 2 for a custom Contact class. However, you won't know for sure if your class or the packaged classes run first. If execution order precision is needed, it’s best to design your class to run after the packaged classes. ## Using the TDTM\_RunnableMutable Interface Custom implementations of TDTM can't interact with the TDTM\_Runnable.DmlWrapper collection when it already has records in the objectsToUpdate collection. If you try to include your own DML in the objectsToUpdate collection, you'll get a Duplicate id in list error. While it's possible to run your code asynchronously or perform DML separately from theTDTM\_TriggerHandler, consider using an alternative interface called TDTM\_RunnableMutable. ### SetFieldsOnAccount Apex Class ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Custom implementations of TDTM might break if NPSP updates its TDTM logic to start adding records into `objectsToUpdate` where it had not before. Use the `TDTM_MutableRunnable` interface in your custom Apex to avoid this possibility. The code signature for implementing `TDTM_RunnableMutable` is very similar to `TDTM_Runnable`. Let's look at a code example. In this example, we want the `NumberofEmployees` field on the Account object to increase by one every time a Contact is created for a given Account. ``` global class CON_SetFieldsOnAccount_TDTM_Mutable extends npsp.TDTM_RunnableMutable { global override void run(List listNew, List listOld, npsp.TDTM_Runnable.Action triggerAction, Schema.DescribeSObjectResult objResult, npsp.TDTM_Runnable.DmlWrapper dmlWrapper) { // cast new contacts List newRecords = (List) listNew; if(triggerAction == npsp.TDTM_Runnable.Action.AfterInsert) { // create collection to hold Account IDs Set accountIds = new Set(); // iterate over new records to collect Account IDs for(Contact newRecord : newRecords) { accountIds.add(newRecord.AccountId); } // retrieve those accounts Map accounts = getAccounts(accountIds); // create a map version of dmlWrapper's objectsToUpdate Map objectsToUpdateMap = new Map(dmlWrapper.objectsToUpdate); // iterate over contacts to set each Account's NumberOfEmployees for(Contact newRecord : newRecords) { if(accounts.containsKey(newRecord.AccountId)) { /* check whether this account is already in dmlWrapper as a record that will receive an update */ Account account; if(objectsToUpdateMap.containsKey(newRecord.AccountId)) { account = (Account) objectsToUpdateMap.get(newRecord.AccountId); } else { account = accounts.get(newRecord.AccountId); } // if this is null, initialize to 0 if(account.NumberOfEmployees == null) { account.NumberOfEmployees = 0; } // increment by 1, as this contact is part of the account account.NumberOfEmployees += 1; // put this account into the collection of records to update objectsToUpdateMap.put(account.Id, account); } } // update dmlWrapper's objectsToUpdate to reflect this collection dmlWrapper.objectsToUpdate = objectsToUpdateMap.values(); } } public static Map getAccounts(Set recordIds) { return new Map([SELECT Id, NumberOfEmployees FROM Account WHERE Id IN :recordIds]); } } ``` ### RunnableMutable Trigger Handler In this code example, we see that the `CON_SetFieldsOnAccount_TDTM_Mutable` class extends `TDTM_RunnableMutable`, not `TDTM_Runnable`. The class checks to see if the Account record from the trigger is already in `dmlWrapper.objectsToUpdate` and updates the record, or places the Account retrieved into that collection. Create a Trigger Handler record for each class that implements `TDTM_RunnableMutable`. Using the `CON_SetFieldsOnAccount_TDTM_Mutable` class example, the trigger handler would look like this: ``` npsp__Trigger_Handler__c triggerHandler = new npsp__Trigger_Handler__c(); triggerHandler.Name = 'CON_SetFieldsOnAccount_TDTM_Mutable'; triggerHandler.npsp__Active__c = true; triggerHandler.npsp__Asynchronous__c = false; triggerHandler.npsp__Class__c = 'CON_SetFieldsOnAccount_TDTM_Mutable'; triggerHandler.npsp__Load_Order__c = 2; triggerHandler.npsp__Object__c = 'Contact'; triggerHandler.npsp__Trigger_Action__c = 'AfterInsert'; insert triggerHandler; ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Roger Mitchell, Nicolas Campbell, and Matthew Poe for their design work and implementation of the RunnableMutable feature. # Deploy a Data Structure for MortarCAPS Add region-specific fields and metadata to your org's objects that align with the MortarCAPS Higher Learning Data Standards. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up MortarCAPS Compliance and Configuration: Education Cloud Full Access
If you turn on MortarCAPS Compliance and Configuration, you can't turn it off. To see how the data extension affects your org, preview MortarCAPS Compliance and Configuration in a sandbox. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Region-Specific Data Extensions, turn on **MortarCAPS Compliance and Configuration**. Fields that meet the MortarCAPS Higher Learning Data Standards are now available on all affected objects. See [Education Cloud Fields on Standard Objects for MortarCAPS Compliance and Configuration](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_standard_objects_for_mortarcaps_compliance.htm). 3. For each object that your institution uses, add a section that shows MortarCAPS-aligned fields to its page layout. See [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.layouts_customize_ple.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Deploy a Data Structure for the United Kingdom Add region-specific fields and metadata to your org that align with the Higher Education Statistics Agency (HESA) Data Futures specification. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up United Kingdom Compliance and Configuration: Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows: Manage Flow
If you turn on United Kingdom Compliance and Configuration, you can't turn it off. To see how the data extension affects your org, preview United Kingdom Compliance and Configuration in a sandbox. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Region-Specific Data Extensions, turn on **United Kingdom Compliance and Configuration**. Fields that meet the United Kingdom's HESA standard are now available on all affected objects. See [Education Cloud Fields on Standard Objects for United Kingdom Compliance and Configuration](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_standard_objects_for_uk_compliance.htm). 3. For each object that your institution uses, add a section that shows HESA-aligned fields to its page layout. See [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.layouts_customize_ple.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 4. Create your own active version of the EDU Regional Data Extension: Calculate HESA Student Identifier flow. This flow populates each learner's HESA Student Identifier automatically when they enroll in a program. 5. [Set up calculated insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_enable_calculated_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use the calculated insights that come with the Education data kit, create and activate the calculated insights from the installed data kit in Data 360. A calculated insight is a multidimensional metric that you can analyze and use to build segments.") for HESA reporting and intelligence. These calculated insights create HESA regulatory values derived from your Agentforce Education data in Data Cloud. - HESA Student Language Unified Individual - HESA Student Language - HESA Academic Term Enrl Learning Program - HESA Course Prerequisite # Deploy an Education Data Kit Data Stream Deploy an Education data kit data stream to collect data from Education Cloud and store it in Data 360.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Data 360
User Permissions Needed  
To deploy Education data kit:

Education Cloud Full Access

and

Data 360 Admin
1. In Data Cloud, go to the Data Streams tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Salesforce CRM**, then click **Next**. 4. Select the Salesforce org where your Education Cloud data resides. If you have only one org connected to Data 360, it’s selected by default. 5. In the Standard Bundles list, select one of the Education data kit bundles. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Select a data space. 8. Review and select the fields that you want to deploy. By default, all the fields from a data kit are deployed. However, to prevent deployment errors, you can deselect fields that aren’t in the org or instance. A data kit requires fields with mappings, formula fields, and their source fields to be deployed. 9. Click **Next**. 10. In the Name column, update the name of each data stream as necessary. 11. Click **Deploy**. The Data Streams tab shows the progress. When the data streams show an Active status, you’re ready to continue. # Deploy the Student Success Chatbot Test the chatbot and add it to a messaging channel or an Experience Cloud site. - **[Test the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_deploy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Thoroughly test the chatbot before activating it in your messaging channel or Experience Cloud site. Here are some tips on how to test the chatbot. - **[Add the Chatbot to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_deploy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Student Success chatbot to your Experience Cloud site, which includes updating the site's security and privacy settings. - **[Add the Chatbot to Your Messaging Channel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_deploy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To add the Student Success chatbot to a messaging channel, use the Set Up Messaging guided setup flow and then deploy the chatbot to the channel. ## Test the Student Success Chatbot Thoroughly test the chatbot before activating it in your messaging channel or Experience Cloud site. Here are some tips on how to test the chatbot. - Create records for a test student, including Contact, Success Plan, and Task records. - Update the mobile phone number on the Contact record to a phone you have access to. - Assign Tasks to the Contact record, including Tasks that are completed and in-progress. - On the test student's Contact record, set the Bot Messaging Advanced Notice as 1 day. Then, change the preference through the chatbot. - Engage with the chatbot via SMS as the test student's Contact record. Use the quick action for the Contact to send an outbound text, inviting the student to engage with the bot. This means that you don't need to wait for the scheduled flow to run. Test an Experience Cloud site by using a sandbox environment or a private website. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If text messages fail to send, make sure none of your test users have open messaging sessions. Click ![The App Launcher icon, which is a grid of dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_app_launcher_icon.png) and search for and select **Messaging Sessions**. End any open Messaging sessions in the list. ## Add the Chatbot to Your Experience Cloud Site Add the Student Success chatbot to your Experience Cloud site, which includes updating the site's security and privacy settings. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Builder** next to the site in which you plan to deploy the chatbot. 3. Update the site's security and privacy. 1. To open the site's Settings page, from Experience Builder, click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_experience_builder_settings_icon.png) and then click **Security & Privacy**. 2. In the Content Security Policy (CSP) section, set the Security Level as **Relaxed CSP** and then click **Allow**. 3. In the Trusted Sites for Scripts section, click **Add Trusted Site** and enter these details. - Name: Student Success Chatbot - URL: Enter a part of your Chat API Endpoint (from the Chat Settings page), omitting /chat/rest/ from the URL. For example, https://x.xxx-xxxx-xxx.salesforceliveagent.com - Active: Selected 4. Click **Add Site**. 5. Close the Settings page. 4. Add and configure the chat component on the site. 1. To open the Components panel, click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_experience_builder_settings_icon.png) and then search for Embedded Service Chat. 2. Drag the Embedded Service Chat component to the Template Footer region of your site's home page. 3. In the Embedded Service Chat properties pane, verify these settings. - Chat Deployment: Student\_Success\_Chatbot - Display chat button: Selected - Pre-chat fields: select as Inactive. - Button Label: Chat with Student Support 4. Close the properties pane. 5. When your site is ready to go live, click **Publish** and then click **Got It**. ## Add the Chatbot to Your Messaging Channel To add the Student Success chatbot to a messaging channel, use the Set Up Messaging guided setup flow and then deploy the chatbot to the channel. See [Set Up Messaging with a Guided Setup Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/.htm&type=5) and [Deploy Your Bot to Your Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=service.bots_service_deploy_to_channels.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Design a Donor Profile Customize the Donor Profile to meet your needs. We recommend that you make these customizations to the account page for the Donor Profile. - Add a Donor Summary card - Add Record Alerts - Add a Donor Details rollup - Add an Actionable Relationship Center graph - Add Quick Actions ## Customize and Place the Donor Summary Card The Donor Summary card is a component that shows the contact's name, addresses, photo, and other key biographical details. You can customize the card and place it on the account page by using Lightning App Builder. ## Get Record Alerts Knowing when a donor interacts with your organization can lead to a stronger, more personal relationships. An easy way to know about a donor's activity is to receive alerts about it. To receive Record Alerts on donor activity: 1. Set up and configure Record Alerts. 2. Add the component to the account page by using Lightning App Builder. ## Set Up Donor Details Rollup Donor Details is a Related Records Detail Display rollup that you design and place on the page by using Lightning App Builder. To set up Donor Details: 1. Edit the account page with the Lightning App Builder. 2. Drag the Related Records Detail Display component to where you want it to be on the page. 3. Enter a name for the panel such as Donor Details. 4. From Related Entity, select **Contact Profile**. 5. To enable users to update Contact Profile information from the Donor Profile, select **Allow create and edit**. 6. Create the groups of data that you want to show on the Donor Details. Common data groups to include are financial or asset data, demographic information, and giving history to other nonprofit organizations. 7. Select the fields to show in each group. 8. Save your changes and activate the page. 9. Assign it as the App Default for the Philanthropy and Partnerships app. ## Add Rollup to Donor Profile Use the Donor Details rollup on the Donor Profile to create or update the account's Contact Profile. 1. On the account page, in the Donor Details rollup, click![Show More icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and select **New** or **Edit**. 2. Enter or update the information. 3. Save your changes. ## Set Up the Account Relationship Graph The account relationship graph is created with an Actionable Relationship Center graph that uses a Fundraising template. To set up the account relationship graph: 1. Edit the account page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, drag the **ARC Relationship Graph** to a new tab on the page canvas. 3. For Graph Name, select the person account graph that you created from the Fundraising templates during Fundraising configuration. 4. Click **Add Filter**. 5. Define the filter. 1. From Filter Type, select **Record Field**. 2. From Field, select **Is Person Account**. 3. From Operator, select **Equal**. 4. For the Person Account graph, from Value, select **True**. For the Business Account graph, select **False**. 6. Similarly, create an ARC Relationship Graph using the business account graph you created from the Fundraising templates and setting the **Is Person Account** field to False. 7. Save your changes and activate the page. 8. Assign it as the App Default for the Philanthropy and Partnerships app. # Design a Donor Profile Customize the Donor Profile to meet your needs. We recommend that you make these customizations to the account page for the Donor Profile. - Add a Donor Summary card - Add Record Alerts - Add a Donor Details rollup - Add an Actionable Relationship Center graph - Add Quick Actions ## Customize and Place the Donor Summary Card The Donor Summary card is a component that shows the contact's name, addresses, photo, and other key biographical details. You can customize the card and place it on the account page by using Lightning App Builder. ## Get Record Alerts Knowing when a donor interacts with your organization can lead to a stronger, more personal relationships. An easy way to know about a donor's activity is to receive alerts about it. To receive Record Alerts on donor activity: 1. Set up and configure Record Alerts. 2. Add the component to the account page by using Lightning App Builder. ## Set Up Donor Details Rollup Donor Details is a Related Records Detail Display rollup that you design and place on the page by using Lightning App Builder. To set up Donor Details: 1. Edit the account page with the Lightning App Builder. 2. Drag the Related Records Detail Display component to where you want it to be on the page. 3. Enter a name for the panel such as Donor Details. 4. From Related Entity, select **Contact Profile**. 5. To enable users to update Contact Profile information from the Donor Profile, select **Allow create and edit**. 6. Create the groups of data that you want to show on the Donor Details. Common data groups to include are financial or asset data, demographic information, and giving history to other nonprofit organizations. 7. Select the fields to show in each group. 8. Save your changes and activate the page. 9. Assign it as the App Default for the Philanthropy and Partnerships app. ## Add Rollup to Donor Profile Use the Donor Details rollup on the Donor Profile to create or update the account's Contact Profile. 1. On the account page, in the Donor Details rollup, click![Show More icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and select **New** or **Edit**. 2. Enter or update the information. 3. Save your changes. ## Set Up the Account Relationship Graph The account relationship graph is created with an Actionable Relationship Center graph that uses a Fundraising template. To set up the account relationship graph: 1. Edit the account page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, drag the **ARC Relationship Graph** to a new tab on the page canvas. 3. For Graph Name, select the person account graph that you created from the Fundraising templates during Fundraising configuration. 4. Click **Add Filter**. 5. Define the filter. 1. From Filter Type, select **Record Field**. 2. From Field, select **Is Person Account**. 3. From Operator, select **Equal**. 4. For the Person Account graph, from Value, select **True**. For the Business Account graph, select **False**. 6. Similarly, create an ARC Relationship Graph using the business account graph you created from the Fundraising templates and setting the **Is Person Account** field to False. 7. Save your changes and activate the page. 8. Assign it as the App Default for the Philanthropy and Partnerships app. # Design Personalized Guided Experiences for Constituents with Omnistudio Use Omnistudio to create seamless digital experiences.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Benefits and features include: - Create constituent interfaces and interactions. - Design personalized, fully branded guided consumer forms with easy configuration. - Construct rich, dynamic user interfaces to show summarized contextual information and actions from multiple sources at a glance. - Quickly deploy and update interactions and experiences across multiple devices and channels. - Bring information from Salesforce or even external systems to guided interfaces. - Change any component delivered with Education Cloud. Use cases include: - Use Flexcards for student profile cards. - Add visuals to Flexcards. - Design Flexcards with what you want your business users to use. - Show the weather based on a prospective student's ZIP code on a Flexcard. - View the entire learning management system login history in real time on a Flexcard. - Use Omniscripts to build an entire process. See Also: - [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud.") - [Omnistudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?language=en_us&id=sf.os_omnistudio.htm) # Designate Gift Commitments and Gift Transactions Allocate commitments and transactions to specific or general funds or designations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: These features apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can create and manage gift commitments. **Why**: Fundraising supports Gift Default Designations and Gift Designations. Commitments, campaigns, and major gifts can define the default fund to which all gifts associated with them are automatically allocated. This default allocation is a Gift Default Designation. All other allocations assigned to gift transactions that are not default designations, are Gift Designations. Gift transactions can have portions of the total gift allocated to more than one designation. For example, a gift can be allocated 50% to the default designation and 50% to a specific fund (gift designation). SEE ALSO [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_gift_designations.htm) [Gift Transactions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_gift_transactions.htm) # Designate Your Availability (Support Staff) Learn how to set up staff availability. With Student Success Hub, students can schedule appointments with you from the student portal. If you're available to meet on Tuesdays from 9:30 AM to noon and you've designated 30-minute appointments, Student Success Hub allows up to five half-hour appointments. If you have walk-in availability, students can see those blocks of time and decide whether to schedule in advance or simply stop by. Spend more time engaging meaningfully with your students, and less time looking for daylight on your calendar. - **[Verify Your Time Zone](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that you and your calendar stay in sync with your students by verifying your time zone setting. - **[Specify Your Appointment Settings and Recurring Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use your Availability Settings to define the blocks of recurring times and details associated with your availability for student appointments. For example, you can customize the length of the buffer between appointments and the amount of advance notice you require for scheduled appointments. Availability Settings is also where you define the in-person, phone, and virtual locations where you can meet with students, and the topics you're available to discuss. - **[Edit One-Off Availability from the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make a one-off change to a time slot that you've designated as being available for support appointments from the Appointment Manager. - **[Understand How Appointment Buffers Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Appointment Buffers are applied between scheduled appointments, both support and non-support, within an availability block. While buffers don’t apply before the first appointment or after the last appointment in a block, buffers at the end of non-advising events can overlap with the beginning of an availability block. - **[Understand How Group Availability Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Group availability is time on your Calendar that's dedicated to appointments with groups of students—specifically, for group appointments that students sign up for in your student portal. You set these parameters for Group Availability blocks: - **[Considerations and Best Practices for Availability Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Availability Settings are just one of the factors Student Success Hub uses to optimize your available appointment times. Student Success Hub also considers times on your Calendar that you've blocked as not available, times you've defined as one-off availability, and exceptions to your recurring availability. ## Verify Your Time Zone Make sure that you and your calendar stay in sync with your students by verifying your time zone setting. 1. In the page header, click your User icon, and then click **Settings**. 2. In the My Personal Information menu, click **Language and Time Zone**. 3. If the default Time Zone setting that your school uses doesn't match your own, change it to the correct time zone. 4. Save your changes. ## Specify Your Appointment Settings and Recurring Availability Use your Availability Settings to define the blocks of recurring times and details associated with your availability for student appointments. For example, you can customize the length of the buffer between appointments and the amount of advance notice you require for scheduled appointments. Availability Settings is also where you define the in-person, phone, and virtual locations where you can meet with students, and the topics you're available to discuss. 1. Open your Availability Settings by clicking **Appointment Manager** in the footer. Then click ![Settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_settings_icon.png). 2. Specify your General Settings. Appointment Buffer Enter the number of minutes between back-to-back scheduled appointments to wrap up and prepare for the next. For more information, see [Designate Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up staff availability."). Advance Notice Specify the lead time you require for scheduling an appointment, in hours. 3. Specify your Length Settings. Custom Appointment Lengths When enabled, you can set custom appointment lengths for Topics and Subtopics. Default Appointment Length The default length, in minutes, of appointments, as set by your Student Success Hub admin. Change the default if you'd like. (You can schedule one-off appointments that run longer or shorter than the default by specifying a custom time slot when you create or edit an appointment.) 4. Create or edit your Appointment Locations. Appointment Locations are where (or how) you're available to meet with students. In Person In-person appointment locations are for on-campus meeting sites, such as conference rooms or faculty offices. You can provide these details for an in-person location: Campus, Building, Room, and Additional Details. Phone For phone locations, you can provide the Phone (number) and Additional Details. Include your phone extension, if any, in either field. Virtual For virtual locations, provide a Meeting Link (URL) and Additional Details. For example, enter your standing meeting room (a static link) for a third-party web-conferencing tool for the Meeting Link. Then provide manual, dial-in instructions in the Additional Details. Be sure to include the http:// or https:// prefix in the meeting URL. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Virtual Appointment Location Meeting Link has a limit of 255 characters. Shorten the URL to fit in the Meeting Link. Alternatively, add custom CSS in the Learner Portal: 1. .meetingLink { 2. overflow-wrap: break-word; 3. } Other For other locations, provide a descriptive Name and Additional Details. At least one Appointment Location is required. Click **Edit** for any Appointment Location record to change its details. To create additional Appointment Locations, click **New**. You can have multiple Appointment Locations of each type. For example, a Phone location for your mobile phone (for when you're working from home), and a Phone location for your office phone (for when you're on campus). Specify a unique, descriptive Name for each Appointment Location so you can distinguish locations of the same type. And enter phone numbers and web meeting links carefully; Student Success Hub doesn't perform validation on the text you enter in those fields. If desired, you can also leave the Meeting Link blank and add a URL to a scheduled virtual appointment later. When you define your recurring availability blocks for appointments (in the next step), you'll associate each block with one or more Appointment Locations. 5. Save your Appointment Location and review it on the Availability Settings page. ![Appointment Locations with In Person, Phone, and Virtual locations](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_availability_appt_locations.png) 6. Create or edit your recurring availability blocks. In the Recurring Availability section, click **New** to create an availability block or **Edit** to edit an existing block. For example, if you're routinely available for scheduled appointments on Mondays and Tuesdays from 2:30 PM to 4:30 PM, schedule a recurring availability block for those days and times. Subject Enter a Subject that indicates your availability. For example, Open for Scheduled Support Appointments. This text appears on your Calendar and your students can see it if your Student Success Hub administrator has made it visible. Type Specify whether you're available for Scheduled, Walk-In, or Group appointments. For group availability, enter an Attendee Limit—the maximum number of students who can reserve a spot in a group appointment during the block. Topic If enabled, select one or more Topic-Subtopic combinations that you're available to discuss, and click **Save**. If you don't select any, your availability shows that you can meet about all Topics. Location Select one or more in-person, phone, or virtual locations for the availability block, and click **Save**. If you don't select any, your availability will show that you can meet at all of your Appointment Locations. Date and Time Enter the start and end dates and times for this recurring availability block. Recurrence Specify the cadence of the recurring block: how many weeks the block repeats (Repeat Every), and the days of the week it repeats on (Repeat On). 7. Save your recurring availability and review it in the Current and Future Availability table on the Availability Settings page. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your record doesn't save, try choosing fewer days, a less frequent weekly pattern, or a shorter duration. ![Table showing recurring appointment availability on Mondays and Tuesdays from 2:30 PM to 4:30 PM](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_advisor_availability_recurring.png) 8. Save your Availability Settings. ## Edit One-Off Availability from the Appointment Manager Make a one-off change to a time slot that you've designated as being available for support appointments from the Appointment Manager. 1. In the Appointment Manager, go to the day with the scheduled availability. 2. Click the action menu for the available time and select **Delete Availability** or **Edit Availability**. 3. Confirm your deletion or edit the details of the availability occurrence and save your changes. If the deleted or edited occurrence was part of a recurring availability block, other occurrences are _not_ affected. One-off exceptions don't show in the Recurring Availability section of your Availability Settings page. ## Understand How Appointment Buffers Work Appointment Buffers are applied between scheduled appointments, both support and non-support, within an availability block. While buffers don’t apply before the first appointment or after the last appointment in a block, buffers at the end of non-advising events can overlap with the beginning of an availability block. For example, you have an availability block from 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM, with a non-support event for a staff meeting from 9:30 AM to 10:00 AM. Your default Appointment Length is 30 minutes and you set a 10-minute Appointment Buffer. That means two support appointments can take place during the block: one from 10:20 AM to 10:50 AM and one from 11:00 AM to 11:30 AM. In this example, there isn't time to fit a 30-minute support appointment and the 10-minute buffer before the staff meeting at 9:30 AM. The first available appointment starts at 10:20 AM because Student Success Hub first calculates the available appointment slots (accounting for buffers) and then removes the overlapping slots with scheduled events. The staff meeting overlaps with the 9:40 AM to 10:10 AM slot, followed by a 10-minute buffer, so the first available slot is 10:20 AM to 10:50 AM. Also, buffers don't explicitly appear in the Appointment Manager, on your Calendar, or on the portal. When you or a student creates an appointment, the times offered for appointments account for your buffer. ## Understand How Group Availability Works Group availability is time on your Calendar that's dedicated to appointments with groups of students—specifically, for group appointments that students sign up for in your student portal. You set these parameters for Group Availability blocks: - The number of students that can attend (Attendee Limit). - The topic that you're available to discuss. - The time and place that you're available. After you set up Group Availability, students can reserve a spot in a group appointment. For complete details on how students make group reservations and manage group appointments, see [Review How Students Experience the Portal (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what students can do in a Student Success Hub portal."). ### Considerations for Group Availability - _You_ can't invite students to group appointments in Group availability blocks. If you want to host a group appointment, invite multiple students to an appointment during a recurring Scheduled availability block, or create a one-off appointment. - When you create an appointment, the days and times in the Predefined Availability tab on the New Appointment form show only Scheduled availability. Group availability isn't listed. - Keep each Group availability block to one topic and one location. Although nothing prevents you from selecting more than one topic or more than one location for the block, it's not a good idea. Here's why. When you associate multiple topics or locations with a Group availability block, at first, students see all of the options in the Scheduling Wizard. When the first student reserves a spot in an appointment in the block, the appointment is assigned the selected topic and location. From then on, other students see only the selected topic and location for that group appointment in the wizard. If this happens for multiple appointments in the block, you might end up with several group appointments for a topic, but not at capacity. At the same time, students who want to meet to discuss other topics have fewer scheduling options to choose from. If that first student cancels their attendance and no one else has reserved a spot in that appointment, the Scheduling Wizard restores the appointment slot. The restored appointment slot has all topics and locations available. However, if the first student cancels and other students have reservations, the appointment becomes available in the Scheduling Wizard for one more student to sign up. But it's only available for the originally selected topic and location. It's all logical, but it can get messy quickly. It's better to associate Group availability blocks with just one topic and one location. - Keep your groups small. Although the Attendee Limit is 500, group availability isn't intended for large events. Consider using it for resume-writing workshops, study abroad prep sessions, and other topics that cover standard fare and have low risk of touching on privacy issues. Nothing prevents you from setting the Attendee Limit to 1. However, it doesn't make much sense to do so—that's not really a group appointment. - When you edit an existing Group availability block, Student Success Hub updates unreserved availability in the Scheduling Wizard, but preserves appointments that have already been created during the block. For example, say you create a Group availability block for 30-minute appointments on Fridays from 12 PM to 4 PM. Then, midway through the term, you want to scale back to 12 PM to 2 PM. Student Success Hub preserves both past and future appointments already created on those Fridays between 2 PM and 4 PM. However, SSH removes all unreserved availability on Fridays from 2 PM to 4 PM from the wizard. Students can continue to reserve available spots in any existing future appointments. If they cancel or reschedule, spots become available for other students to reserve. - Edit recurring group availability only through your Availability Settings. Don't change the Attendee Limit on an individual appointment in a Group availability block, and don't edit a one-off instance of group availability from the Appointment Manager. - Appointments created in the portal using group availability appear in the Appointment Manager in Student Success Hub just like scheduled group and individual appointments. You can view the appointment and attendee details, assign attendees Tasks and Success Plans, and so on. You can't, however, add or remove attendees from the appointment. ## Considerations and Best Practices for Availability Settings Availability Settings are just one of the factors Student Success Hub uses to optimize your available appointment times. Student Success Hub also considers times on your Calendar that you've blocked as not available, times you've defined as one-off availability, and exceptions to your recurring availability. - Be sure to cancel availability when you need to, and to [Keep Your Calendar Up-to-Date with Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub."). - Recurring availability blocks are subject to system limits on Event records. The more recurrences (Events) in the series, the shorter the date range you're able to schedule. In other words, if you're only available once a week, you're able to schedule farther out than if you're available several days and times per week. If possible, align your availability with your academic calendar by defining blocks that last no more than a term. You can schedule for a shorter duration (such as additional hours during registration periods), but try not to schedule a recurrence that lasts for more than a few months. - Try to not create overlapping blocks of availability. For example, say you create Scheduled availability on Mondays from 1 PM to 3 PM and Walk-In availability on Mondays from 2 PM to 4 PM. Students see both scheduled and walk-in appointments available with you between 2 PM and 3 PM. While Student Success Hub doesn't double-book you, too many concurrent or intersecting options for availability types, locations, or topics, creates a confusing experience for students in the Scheduling Wizard. - When you edit a recurring availability block or Appointment Location, the changes take effect immediately and apply to all future days in the recurrence. Anyone who schedules an appointment in Student Success Hub or in the portal sees the updated availability options. - You can't delete Appointment Locations that have upcoming appointments associated with them. Also, Student Success Hub requires at least one Appointment Location. So, if you only have one Appointment Location, you can't delete it. - When you cancel a recurring availability block: - If the recurrence has started, canceling it changes the end date to the current date. Any remaining future availability is removed from your Calendar, starting from the next day onward. The recurrence is moved to the Past Availability table, also from the next day onward. - If the recurrence hasn't started, canceling it removes all associated availability from your Calendar and deletes the entire recurrence. When you cancel a recurring availability block before it starts, the canceled recurrence isn't saved in Past Availability. - Additional Details in Appointment Locations aren't included in appointment email confirmations. However, students see the Additional Details on the appointment card in the portal and, if they have access to them, on Appointment record detail pages. - View your Appointment Settings and current or future Scheduled Recurring Availability in the Appointment Availability component on your User page. View your current, future, and past recurring availability on the Availability Settings page. - Expired and canceled recurring availability blocks show for 90 days in the Past Availability section of the Availability Settings page, and then they're archived. To see older availability, look on your Calendar. - We saved the best (and most important) item for last: Update your availability early and often! As soon as you schedule a recurring availability block, it's almost inevitable that exceptions or conflicts will arise. Remember to update your availability when they do. # Develop Your Own Approach to Modeling Your School Identify the best way to set up your school’s data in the K-12 Architecture Kit. Many schools share a common approach to thinking about data, with the student at the center. This approach to data modeling is central to Education Data Architecture (EDA), which provides a common architecture for visualizing a full picture of students’ relationships and experiences—from individual relationships with people at the school and outside the school, to academics, to extracurricular activities. EDA is designed to support the entire K-20 lifecycle. For K-12 institutions, your common use cases obviously look different than the ones from higher education. That’s where K-12 Architecture Kit comes in! We provide some pre-configured tools to help you build on top of EDA, along with a data framework that’s flexible enough for you to tailor it for _your_ school’s and _your_ students’ unique needs. Our goal is to help you think about the best way to set up your own school's data in K-12 Architecture Kit. As you learn about Valley Elementary's setup, consider how your data might fit into a similar model and look for places where it might not. We'll call out different potential approaches and explain some of the considerations that go into choosing one over another. # Developer Resources for Accounting Subledger Developers in your company or institution can use developer resources to learn about the data model and automate processes.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
To learn about the Accounting Subledger objects and fields, see [Accounting Subledger Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.asl_dev_guide.meta/asl_dev_guide/asl_intro.htm). ## Accounting Subledger Entity Relationship Diagram ![Accounting Subledger entity relationship diagram](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_erd.png) # Developer Resources for Education Cloud Learn where to find developer resources including the entity relationship diagram (ERD), object reference, and apex reference.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Refer to these resources to learn about the Education Cloud objects, data model, apex methods, and other product components. - [Education Cloud Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_intro.htm) - [Education Cloud Object Reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_standard_objects.htm) - [Education Cloud Entity Relationship Diagram (ERD)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_data_model_overview.htm) - [Fundraising Objects and APIs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_dev_guide.htm) # Director Insights for Student Success The Director Insights dashboard provides insights to monitor the activities and efficiency of advisors and improve institutional-level student performance annually. Use the dashboard to analyze the total enrollments in the advisor service, the advisor and student ratio, the overall utilization rate and cancellation rate of advisor appointments, and to identify the top-performing advisors.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
The Director Insights dashboard includes the Institutional Overview, Students Success, and Advisor Insights pages. Use the metrics and charts on these pages to get an institutional-level view of advisor activities, performance, and efficiency. You can filter the data based on the academic term and compare the data with a previous period to analyze progress. ## Institutional Overview Here are examples of questions that the Director Insights dashboard - Institutional Overview page can answer: - What’s the total count of students? - What’s the count of students who did not need to use the advisor service? - What’s the advisor and student ratio? - What’s the count of students enrolled for advisor service and the difference compared to a previous period? - What’s the average CGPA (Cumulative Grade Point Average) of students and the difference compared to a previous period? - What’s the institution's performance for the past four years based on the count of enrollment, total students, and average CGPA? ## Student Success Here are examples of questions that the Director Insights dashboard - Student Success page can answer: - What’s the total count of alerts, care plans, and appointments? - What’s the average resolution time for alerts? - What’s the distribution of alerts and care plans based on status and case record type? - What’s the total count of students without any advisor appointments? - What’s the overall utilization and cancellation rate of appointments? ## Advisor Insights Here are examples of questions that the Director Insights dashboard - Advisor Insights page can answer: - What’s the total count of students and advisors? - Who are the top-performing advisors? - Who are the least-performing advisors? - What’s the utilization and cancellation rate of each advisor for the selected academic year? # Disable Matching Rules Learn why you receive a "Duplicates Detected" error when inserting records and how to prevent it. When importing or restoring data to Salesforce you may see this error message: ``` Message: "Insert failed. First exception on row 1; first error: DUPLICATES_DETECTED, Duplicate Alert: []" ``` This error is caused by a Matching Rule. In the Salesforce Spring '16 release, Duplicate Management was added to help avoid duplicate records. If this rule is enabled, you will receive this error if duplicates are found when trying to insert records. To disable Matching Rules in your Salesforce organization: 1. Log into your Salesforce account as the System Administrator. 2. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 3. From Setup, enter Matching Rules in the Quick Find box, then click **Matching Rules**. 4. Click **Deactivate** next to the rule that needs to be disabled. ![Matching Rules setup page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/eda_faq_deactivate_match_rules.png) 5. Click **OK**. Salesforce sends you an email when the rule is successfully deactivated. You should no longer see the duplicate record error message when importing data into Salesforce. For more information on Duplicate Management, see [Manage Duplicate Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=managing_duplicates_overview.htm). # Disable NPSP Contact Role Automation There may be instances where you need to disable the NPSP automation that creates Opportunity Contact Roles on selected Opportunities. You may wish to do this so you can create or update Contact Roles yourself, using your own business logic. Common use cases include: - Data migration - ETL operations - Custom code execution - Custom integration - Opportunity records where the Primary Contact needs to be updated several times. For example, on long term family foundation gifts, corporate gifts, or grants. NPSP includes a checkbox field called Disable Contact Role Automation on the Opportunity object. When you select the field on a given record, it disables several aspects of NPSP Opportunity Contact Role automation. After you have finished making your own Contact Role updates, you may wish to deselect the field to return automation functionality to that record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Because Disable Contact Role Automation disables important NPSP functionality, you may not want to put the field on any page layouts. Misunderstanding how the field works could result in incorrect or duplicate Contact Roles. If you do need to put the field on a page layout, you can control access to it through a permission set. Disable Contact Role Automation disables NPSP's automatic creation of Opportunity Contact Roles when there are changes to the: - Opportunity Primary Contact field - Opportunity Notification Recipient Contact field - Honoree Contact field - Household members on the related Opportunity Account - Related Opportunity Contact Role on Relationship records - Related Opportunity Contact Role on Affiliation records Disable Contact Role Automation does not disable automation related to Partial Soft Credits, Matching Gifts, automation from other installed packages, or your own customizations. ## Understand Rollup Implications Although Disable Contact Role Automation disables NPSP's automatic creation of Opportunity Contact Roles, Opportunity (Donation) rollups are not disabled. There are different implications depending on what kind of rollups your organization uses. Customizable Rollups will rollup data to the Contact selected in the Opportunity Primary Contact field even if no Opportunity Contact Role is present. Legacy and User Defined rollups work only on Opportunity Contact Roles. ## NPSP Batch Jobs The following batch operations in NPSP Settings are not affected by the Disable Contact Role Automation field. These operations will modify Opportunity Contact Roles on Opportunities regardless of whether the Disable Contact Role Automation field is selected. - Remove Duplicate Primary OCRs # Disable Trigger Handlers for EDA To successfully run custom code, a large data import, or an external integration, you sometimes need to disable TDTM Trigger Handlers. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review examples of when you can disable trigger handlers. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for All Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You typically disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a custom process or custom code that replace functionality. You may also disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a use case that requires that the standard behavior of an Apex class not occur for all users. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for Specific Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In cases where you have a custom integration with another system, or need to perform periodic imports of data where you don't need certain Trigger Handlers to run, you can disable a Trigger Handler for specific users. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers with Field Criteria](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can disable a Trigger Handler based on the value of a field found on the object that the Trigger Handler is associated with, or a field value on a related record. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers with Apex](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. NPSP offers two ways to achieve this depending on whether you want to disable specific Trigger Handlers or all Trigger Handlers at once. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review examples of when you can disable trigger handlers. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for All Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You typically disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a custom process or custom code that replace functionality. You may also disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a use case that requires that the standard behavior of an Apex class not occur for all users. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for Specific Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In cases where you have a custom integration with another system, or need to perform periodic imports of data where you don't need certain Trigger Handlers to run, you can disable a Trigger Handler for specific users. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers with Field Criteria](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can disable a Trigger Handler based on the value of a field found on the object that the Trigger Handler is associated with, or a field value on a related record. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers with Apex](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. NPSP offers two ways to achieve this depending on whether you want to disable specific Trigger Handlers or all Trigger Handlers at once. ## Disable Trigger Handlers Review examples of when you can disable trigger handlers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on the fundamentals of TDTM, read [Table-Driven Trigger Management Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm). - Temporarily disable certain Apex classes when inserting a large volume of records with data that is already structured in its final format. - Disable Address-related Apex code when inserting or updating Contacts through a scheduled ETL job that always runs as a specific User. - Prevent the Primary Account lookups from changing on a Contact when that Contact meets certain criteria (such as Deceased=True). It's helpful to know what each of the Apex classes do, so that you know which Trigger Handlers to disable. Visit [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for a description of the Apex classes managed by TDTM (designated by `_TDTM` extension in the name.) Note that there are some classes that are not managed by TDTM, such as utility and settings classes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Be careful when changing Trigger Handler records. They're designed to work in conjunction, and changing or disabling them can lead to undesirable results. Always test in a Sandbox environment before changing Trigger Handlers in production! ## Disable Trigger Handlers for All Users You typically disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a custom process or custom code that replace functionality. You may also disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a use case that requires that the standard behavior of an Apex class not occur for all users. To disable a Trigger Handler: 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** tab. If you don't see it, find it in the App Launcher . 2. Click ![Down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)in the row for the Trigger Handler you want to disable, and select **Edit**. 3. Deselect the **Active** checkbox. 4. For all NPSP EDA\-packaged Trigger Handlers, select the **User Managed** checkbox. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important You must select User Managed to prevent the Trigger Handler from being reactivated during the next package update. ![Trigger Handler edit screen with Active unchecked and User Managed checked](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/trigger_handler_deactivate.png) 5. Click **Save**. To re-activate a Trigger Handler: 1. Select the **Active** checkbox. 2. Deselect **User Managed**. 3. Click **Save**. For more information on editing Trigger Handlers, see [Edit a Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_manage_trigger_handlers.htm). ## Disable Trigger Handlers for Specific Users In cases where you have a custom integration with another system, or need to perform periodic imports of data where you don't need certain Trigger Handlers to run, you can disable a Trigger Handler for specific users. For example, let's say you have an external data source that already supplies an Account for Contacts. During the integration, you wouldn't want to run the code that creates Accounts (the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM class.) To stop that code from executing when the import runs, you would exclude the integration user from the Trigger Handler record for the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM class. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note As a best practice, dedicate a user account, called an API User, for your integrations. That way, if an actual user leaves your organization, you'll always have an active user with the correct permissions available for your integration. Read [Create a Secure Salesforce API User](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000176281&type=1) in Salesforce Help for more information. To disable Trigger Handlers for specific users: 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** tab. If you don't see it, find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click ![down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)in the row for the Trigger Handler you want to disable, and select **Edit**. 3. Enter one or more usernames, separating each with a semicolon, in the **Usernames to Exclude** field. For example, integration@user.org;tester@user.org ![Trigger Handler edit page with Usernames to Exclude field populated.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-npsp-usernames-to-exclude.png) 4. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Usernames to Exclude field, you may need to add it to your page layout and assure it's visible through field-level security. For information about updating your page layout, see [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). ## Disable Trigger Handlers with Field Criteria You can disable a Trigger Handler based on the value of a field found on the object that the Trigger Handler is associated with, or a field value on a related record. The EDA Trigger Handler object contains two fields, Filter Field and Filter Value. Together, they allow you to disable a Trigger Handler when the value of a given field is present on a record. For example, let's say that if a Contact's Title = Board President, you don't want the standard email and phone fields to update when the custom email and phone fields such as Home Phone, Work Phone, University Email, change. You plan to manage the standard email and phone fields manually in this example. ![Filter Field and Filter Value populated](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-eda-filter-field-example.png) Find the Trigger Handler that controls this aspect of the platform automation. The Class field often provides a clue, but you can also read the [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for more details. In our example, the Trigger Handler we want is `CON_Preferred_TDTM`. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note As a best practice, check the **User Managed** checkbox if you are modifying an EDA Trigger Handler record. When working with Filter Field and Filter Value: - You can use only one field and one value for Filter Field & Filter Value. - Use the API Name for Filter Field (such as `FirstName`, `MailingCity`, `Citizenship__c`). - If you use an EDA packaged custom field, do not include the namespace prefix. For example use `Citizenship__c` not `hed__Citizenship__c`. - If you use a third-party packaged custom field, DO include the namespace prefix. - For Filter Value, the match is an exact character match. There aren't options for conditionals such as contains, starts with, and so on. However, the text is not case sensitive. New York City and new york city are evaluated the same way. - For checkbox fields, use True or False in the Filter Value field. - Fields on related records can be used in Filter Field. For example, on a Contact Trigger Handler, you can use `Account.BillingCity`. - Leave Filter Value blank if you want to filter on a blank (null) value. - Compound fields such as Address and Geolocation are not supported. ## Disable Trigger Handlers with Apex Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. NPSP offers two ways to achieve this depending on whether you want to disable specific Trigger Handlers or all Trigger Handlers at once. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note This section is intended for developers and advanced admins who are familiar with Apex. The bottom line is that you can temporarily disable a Trigger Handler with code instead of editing the Trigger Handler records manually. You can't use SandboxPostCopy Interface to disable trigger handlers because the code runs before Salesforce creates the trigger handlers in the sandbox. If the options for disablement discussed earlier in this article don't address your use case, know that you can manage Trigger Handlers with code, too. Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable specific Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. For example, you should do so at the start of unit tests when there’s a custom object in your org with the same API name as one released by EDA (such as Application\_\_c) and a TDTM Trigger Handler for that object. To achieve this, EDA uses the `TDTM_Global_API` class and its `tdtmToken` method that mirrors the fields on the Trigger Handler object. As such, you can disable Trigger Handlers directly in your code and only for the execution context of the current user. The `tdtmToken` method has the following behaviors: - Changes made to `tdtmToken` values persist throughout the execution context for the current User. - Changes made to `tdtmToken` do not impact other Users working in the org at the same time. - Changes made to `tdtmToken` are not committed to the database by EDA. See the [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for more information on the `TDTM_Global_API` class. **Code example**: ```java for (hed.TDTM_Global_API.TdtmToken tdtmToken : hed.TDTM_Global_API.getTdtmConfig()) { // disable for a specific trigger handler class if (tdtmToken.className == 'Application_TDTM') { tdtmToken.active = false; } // disable for an entire object else if (tdtmToken.targetObject == 'Contact') { tdtmToken.active = false; } // disable all EDA-provided trigger handlers else if (tdtmToken.ownedByNamespace == 'hed') { tdtmToken.active = false; } } ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Order of execution is important here. Let's say you create your own Apex trigger on the Contact object that disables all the Trigger Handlers on Contact. There is no guarantee that your trigger will run before or after TDTM does. Dealing with this scenario will vary depending on your specific use case. Consider execution order carefully in your code design. ## Disable Trigger Handlers Review examples of when you can disable trigger handlers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on the fundamentals of TDTM, read [Table-Driven Trigger Management Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm). - Temporarily disable certain Apex classes when inserting a large volume of records with data that is already structured in its final format. - Disable Address-related Apex code when inserting or updating Contacts through a scheduled ETL job that always runs as a specific User. - Prevent the Primary Account lookups from changing on a Contact when that Contact meets certain criteria (such as Deceased=True). It's helpful to know what each of the Apex classes do, so that you know which Trigger Handlers to disable. Visit [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for a description of the Apex classes managed by TDTM (designated by `_TDTM` extension in the name.) Note that there are some classes that are not managed by TDTM, such as utility and settings classes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Be careful when changing Trigger Handler records. They're designed to work in conjunction, and changing or disabling them can lead to undesirable results. Always test in a Sandbox environment before changing Trigger Handlers in production! ## Disable Trigger Handlers for All Users You typically disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a custom process or custom code that replace functionality. You may also disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a use case that requires that the standard behavior of an Apex class not occur for all users. To disable a Trigger Handler: 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** tab. If you don't see it, find it in the App Launcher . 2. Click ![Down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)in the row for the Trigger Handler you want to disable, and select **Edit**. 3. Deselect the **Active** checkbox. 4. For all NPSP EDA\-packaged Trigger Handlers, select the **User Managed** checkbox. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important You must select User Managed to prevent the Trigger Handler from being reactivated during the next package update. ![Trigger Handler edit screen with Active unchecked and User Managed checked](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/trigger_handler_deactivate.png) 5. Click **Save**. To re-activate a Trigger Handler: 1. Select the **Active** checkbox. 2. Deselect **User Managed**. 3. Click **Save**. For more information on editing Trigger Handlers, see [Edit a Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_manage_trigger_handlers.htm). ## Disable Trigger Handlers for Specific Users In cases where you have a custom integration with another system, or need to perform periodic imports of data where you don't need certain Trigger Handlers to run, you can disable a Trigger Handler for specific users. For example, let's say you have an external data source that already supplies an Account for Contacts. During the integration, you wouldn't want to run the code that creates Accounts (the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM class.) To stop that code from executing when the import runs, you would exclude the integration user from the Trigger Handler record for the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM class. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note As a best practice, dedicate a user account, called an API User, for your integrations. That way, if an actual user leaves your organization, you'll always have an active user with the correct permissions available for your integration. Read [Create a Secure Salesforce API User](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000176281&type=1) in Salesforce Help for more information. To disable Trigger Handlers for specific users: 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** tab. If you don't see it, find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click ![down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)in the row for the Trigger Handler you want to disable, and select **Edit**. 3. Enter one or more usernames, separating each with a semicolon, in the **Usernames to Exclude** field. For example, integration@user.org;tester@user.org ![Trigger Handler edit page with Usernames to Exclude field populated.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-npsp-usernames-to-exclude.png) 4. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Usernames to Exclude field, you may need to add it to your page layout and assure it's visible through field-level security. For information about updating your page layout, see [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). ## Disable Trigger Handlers with Field Criteria You can disable a Trigger Handler based on the value of a field found on the object that the Trigger Handler is associated with, or a field value on a related record. The EDA Trigger Handler object contains two fields, Filter Field and Filter Value. Together, they allow you to disable a Trigger Handler when the value of a given field is present on a record. For example, let's say that if a Contact's Title = Board President, you don't want the standard email and phone fields to update when the custom email and phone fields such as Home Phone, Work Phone, University Email, change. You plan to manage the standard email and phone fields manually in this example. ![Filter Field and Filter Value populated](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-eda-filter-field-example.png) Find the Trigger Handler that controls this aspect of the platform automation. The Class field often provides a clue, but you can also read the [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for more details. In our example, the Trigger Handler we want is `CON_Preferred_TDTM`. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note As a best practice, check the **User Managed** checkbox if you are modifying an EDA Trigger Handler record. When working with Filter Field and Filter Value: - You can use only one field and one value for Filter Field & Filter Value. - Use the API Name for Filter Field (such as `FirstName`, `MailingCity`, `Citizenship__c`). - If you use an EDA packaged custom field, do not include the namespace prefix. For example use `Citizenship__c` not `hed__Citizenship__c`. - If you use a third-party packaged custom field, DO include the namespace prefix. - For Filter Value, the match is an exact character match. There aren't options for conditionals such as contains, starts with, and so on. However, the text is not case sensitive. New York City and new york city are evaluated the same way. - For checkbox fields, use True or False in the Filter Value field. - Fields on related records can be used in Filter Field. For example, on a Contact Trigger Handler, you can use `Account.BillingCity`. - Leave Filter Value blank if you want to filter on a blank (null) value. - Compound fields such as Address and Geolocation are not supported. ## Disable Trigger Handlers with Apex Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. NPSP offers two ways to achieve this depending on whether you want to disable specific Trigger Handlers or all Trigger Handlers at once. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note This section is intended for developers and advanced admins who are familiar with Apex. The bottom line is that you can temporarily disable a Trigger Handler with code instead of editing the Trigger Handler records manually. You can't use SandboxPostCopy Interface to disable trigger handlers because the code runs before Salesforce creates the trigger handlers in the sandbox. If the options for disablement discussed earlier in this article don't address your use case, know that you can manage Trigger Handlers with code, too. Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable specific Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. For example, you should do so at the start of unit tests when there’s a custom object in your org with the same API name as one released by EDA (such as Application\_\_c) and a TDTM Trigger Handler for that object. To achieve this, EDA uses the `TDTM_Global_API` class and its `tdtmToken` method that mirrors the fields on the Trigger Handler object. As such, you can disable Trigger Handlers directly in your code and only for the execution context of the current user. The `tdtmToken` method has the following behaviors: - Changes made to `tdtmToken` values persist throughout the execution context for the current User. - Changes made to `tdtmToken` do not impact other Users working in the org at the same time. - Changes made to `tdtmToken` are not committed to the database by EDA. See the [EDA Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for more information on the `TDTM_Global_API` class. **Code example**: ```java for (hed.TDTM_Global_API.TdtmToken tdtmToken : hed.TDTM_Global_API.getTdtmConfig()) { // disable for a specific trigger handler class if (tdtmToken.className == 'Application_TDTM') { tdtmToken.active = false; } // disable for an entire object else if (tdtmToken.targetObject == 'Contact') { tdtmToken.active = false; } // disable all EDA-provided trigger handlers else if (tdtmToken.ownedByNamespace == 'hed') { tdtmToken.active = false; } } ``` ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Order of execution is important here. Let's say you create your own Apex trigger on the Contact object that disables all the Trigger Handlers on Contact. There is no guarantee that your trigger will run before or after TDTM does. Dealing with this scenario will vary depending on your specific use case. Consider execution order carefully in your code design. # Disable Trigger Handlers for NPSP Learn how to disable trigger handlers for all users, specific users, and with apex code. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review examples of when you can disable trigger handlers. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for All Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You typically disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a custom process or custom code that replace functionality. You may also disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a use case that requires that the standard behavior of an Apex class not occur for all users. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers for Specific Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In cases where you have a custom integration with another system, or need to perform periodic imports of data where you don't need certain Trigger Handlers to run, you can disable a Trigger Handler for specific users. - **[Disable Trigger Handlers with Apex](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. NPSP offers two ways to achieve this depending on whether you want to disable specific Trigger Handlers or all Trigger Handlers at once. ## Disable Trigger Handlers Review examples of when you can disable trigger handlers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on the fundamentals of TDTM, read [Table-Driven Trigger Management Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm). - Temporarily disable certain Apex classes when inserting a large volume of records with data that is already structured in its final format. - Disable Address-related Apex code when inserting or updating Contacts through a scheduled ETL job that always runs as a specific User. - Temporarily prevent Payment or Opportunity Contact Role records from being created when Opportunities are inserted through a third-party package from the AppExchange. It's helpful to know what each of the Apex classes do, so that you know which Trigger Handlers to disable. Visit [NPSP Codebase Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_apex_class_descriptions.htm) for a description of the Apex classes managed by TDTM (designated by `_TDTM` extension in the name.) Note that there are some classes that are not managed by TDTM, such as utility and settings classes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Be careful when changing Trigger Handler records. They're designed to work in conjunction, and changing or disabling them can lead to undesirable results. Always test in a Sandbox environment before changing Trigger Handlers in production! ## Disable Trigger Handlers for All Users You typically disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a custom process or custom code that replace functionality. You may also disable a Trigger Handler for all users if you have a use case that requires that the standard behavior of an Apex class not occur for all users. To disable a Trigger Handler: 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** tab. If you don't see it, find it in the App Launcher . ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you still don't see the Trigger Handler tab, make sure the Tab has been properly configured. For more information, read [Prerequisites for Managing Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers.htm). 2. Click ![Down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)in the row for the Trigger Handler you want to disable, and select **Edit**. 3. Deselect the **Active** checkbox. 4. For all NPSP EDA\-packaged Trigger Handlers, select the **User Managed** checkbox. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important You must select User Managed to prevent the Trigger Handler from being reactivated during the next package update. ![Trigger Handler edit screen with Active unchecked and User Managed checked](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/trigger_handler_deactivate.png) 5. Click **Save**. To re-activate a Trigger Handler: 1. Select the **Active** checkbox. 2. Deselect **User Managed**. 3. Click **Save**. For more information on editing Trigger Handlers, see [Edit a Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers.htm) . ## Disable Trigger Handlers for Specific Users In cases where you have a custom integration with another system, or need to perform periodic imports of data where you don't need certain Trigger Handlers to run, you can disable a Trigger Handler for specific users. For example, let's say you have an external data source that already supplies an Account for Contacts. During the integration, you wouldn't want to run the code that creates Accounts (the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM class.) To stop that code from executing when the import runs, you would exclude the integration user from the Trigger Handler record for the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM class. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As a best practice, dedicate a user account, called an API User, for your integrations. That way, if an actual user leaves your organization, you'll always have an active user with the correct permissions available for your integration. Read [Create a Secure Salesforce API User](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000176281&type=1) in Salesforce Help for more information. To disable Trigger Handlers for specific users: 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** tab. If you don't see it, find it in the App Launcher. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you still don't see the Trigger Handler tab, make sure the Tab has been properly configured. For more information, read [Prerequisites for Managing Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers.htm). 2. Click ![down arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)in the row for the Trigger Handler you want to disable, and select **Edit**. 3. Enter one or more usernames, separating each with a semicolon, in the **Usernames to Exclude** field. For example, integration@user.org;tester@user.org ![Trigger Handler edit page with Usernames to Exclude field populated.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/tdtm-npsp-usernames-to-exclude.png) 4. Click **Save**. ## Disable Trigger Handlers with Apex Sometimes it's necessary to temporarily disable Trigger Handlers only during the execution of Apex code. NPSP offers two ways to achieve this depending on whether you want to disable specific Trigger Handlers or all Trigger Handlers at once. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This section is intended for developers and advanced admins who are familiar with Apex. The bottom line is that you can temporarily disable a Trigger Handler with code instead of editing the Trigger Handler records manually. You can't use SandboxPostCopy Interface to disable trigger handlers because the code runs before Salesforce creates the trigger handlers in the sandbox. If the options for disablement discussed earlier in this article don't address your use case, know that you can manage Trigger Handlers with code, too. ### Disable Specific Trigger Handlers NPSP exposes a collection of Trigger Handler records through the global `TDTM_Config_API` class. As such, you can disable Trigger Handlers directly in your code and only for the execution context of the current user. The exposed Trigger Handler collection has the following behaviors: - Changes made to the collection persist throughout the execution context for the current user. - Changes made to the collection do not impact other users working in the org at the same time. - Changes made to the collection are not committed to the database by NPSP. - Salesforce.org recommends against upserting this collection to the database after making changes. See the [NPSP GitHub repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/npsp) for more information on exposed global methods. **Code example**: ```java // disable trigger that creates a new Household Account for Contacts List handlers = npsp.TDTM_Config_API.getCachedRecords(); for (npsp__Trigger_Handler__c th : handlers) { if (th.npsp__Object__c == 'Contact' && th.npsp__Class__c == 'ACCT_IndividualAccounts_TDTM') { th.npsp__Active__c = false; } } ``` ### Disable All Trigger Handlers NPSP includes a globally exposed class called `[Callable_API](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/npsp/blob/main/force-app/main/default/classes/callable_api.cls)` that implements the `System.Callable` interface. This interface is made available for external applications and developers to leverage NPSP APIs. You can use the `TDTM.DisableAllTriggers` action to disable all Trigger Handler records at once for a given execution context. **Code example**: ```java Callable npspApi = (System.Callable)Type.forName('npsp', 'Callable_API').newInstance(); Boolean isNpspTriggerDisabled = (Boolean)npspApi.call('TDTM.DisableAllTriggers', new Map()); ``` These two lines turn off all Trigger Handlers, then you can continue with your own code. ### Consider Order of Execution Consider execution order carefully in your code design. Let's say you create your own Apex trigger on the Contact object that disables all the Trigger Handlers on Contact. There is no guarantee that your trigger will run before or after TDTM does. Dealing with this scenario will vary depending on your specific use case. # Discover and Set Up Education Cloud Features With Salesforce Go Explore, set up and configure, and monitor usage of Education Cloud features in one streamlined setup location. Access content resources, such as videos, online tours, Trailhead, and Salesforce Help articles, to learn about features, and get help with configuration. Discover more Education Cloud features and add-on licenses that are available based on your Salesforce edition. And if you’ve turned on the Your Account app, you can quickly buy add-on licenses for some products directly from Salesforce Go. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
See Also: - [Discover and Set Up Features With Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_salesforce_go.htm&language=en_US) # Discover and Set Up Nonprofit Cloud Features with Salesforce Go Explore, set up and configure, and monitor usage of Nonprofit Cloud features in one streamlined setup location. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
Access content resources to learn about features, and get help with configuration. Discover more Nonprofit Cloud features and add-on licenses that are available based on your Salesforce edition. And if you’ve turned on the Your Account app, you can quickly buy add-on licenses for some products directly from Salesforce Go. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up and Maintain Your Salesforce Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_overview.htm&language=en_US) - [Discover and Set Up Features with Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_salesforce_go.htm&language=en_US) # Distinguish Benefit Schedule Participants from Benefit Session Participants Use Benefit Schedule Assignment records to identify participants added to a benefit schedule. Program managers, service providers, and volunteers can use this information to distinguish between participants added to a benefit schedule versus a benefit session and to better plan logistics for a schedule. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [_Salesforce Help_: Add Participants to a Benefit Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_pm_add_participants_to_a_benefit_schedule.htm) # Distribute a Student Survey Get your student sentiment survey into the world. - **[Send an Email Using a Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_distribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you want staff or users without the Survey Creator permission to send a survey, set up an email template to send out the survey. - **[Send an Email with a Unique Link](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_distribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you want survey responses to be associated with specific students, you can generate a survey link that's unique for each survey respondent. - **[Embed the Survey in a Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_distribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In your org has a student portal, you can make the survey available to students there by adding the Survey component to a site page. We recommend creating a Feedback page to host the survey. Keep in mind that when students complete surveys in the portal, you can't track their individual results. ## Send an Email Using a Template If you want staff or users without the Survey Creator permission to send a survey, set up an email template to send out the survey. [Create an email template](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=email_create_a_template.htm) and include the survey invitation link. Then let your support staff know about the template. ## Send an Email with a Unique Link If you want survey responses to be associated with specific students, you can generate a survey link that's unique for each survey respondent. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, open the student Contact record (not the Student Record Case). 2. Click the record's action menu and select **Get Survey Invitation**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Only users with the Survey Creator permission can see this action. 3. Fill out the survey invitation information. 1. Choose a survey. 2. Optionally select a related record, such as the student Case record. 3. Optionally select your [invitation settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=reference_survey_invitation_settings.htm) and [set an expiration date](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=concept_surveys_expiration.htm). 4. Click **Generate Invitation**. 5. Click **Copy Link** to save the unique invitation link. 6. Click **Done**. 7. Send the student an email with the unique invitation link that you copied. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Generating the survey link doesn't automatically send it to the student. ## Embed the Survey in a Student Portal In your org has a student portal, you can make the survey available to students there by adding the Survey component to a site page. We recommend creating a Feedback page to host the survey. Keep in mind that when students complete surveys in the portal, you can't track their individual results. See [Survey](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=rss_surveys.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If during your testing you receive errors that prevent the Survey component from displaying, verify that the profile associated with the site includes Surveys access. From Experience Builder, click the Settings icon, and select **General**. Then click the profile name under Guest User Profile. Verify that the profile has Read access on Survey, Read access on Survey Invitations, and Read, Create, and Edit access on Survey Responses. For advanced survey functionality, look into [automating a process for generating survey invitations](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.process_action_send_survey_invite.htm&type=5) with Process Builder. # Do a Trial Run By running a test import, you can ensure that you resolve all your data integrity issues before importing your entire set of records. A trial run of 15-20 records (rows in your template) is a good test size. To build your test import, look for records in your template with many cells populated, that will create many different types of records (i.e. two or more Contacts in a Household Account, organization Affiliations for different Contacts, multiple Opportunities, etc.). In other words, be sure you’re testing the hard cases, not the easy ones. Once you run the test import, spend some time in Salesforce checking out where your imported data landed. Make sure NPSP created the right types of records and the information in the individual CSV cells went to the right Salesforce fields. If you see unintended results, re-examine your data for integrity, validity, format in the template, as well as mappings. After you clean that up, re-run your test (or another batch of test records). Once you have this smaller group of records importing the way you should, repeat the now refined import process on your full import file. Have your test file ready to go? [Upload Data from the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer.")! # Donations Glossary Common fundraising terms and how these concepts relate to records in NPSP. Donation A gift of either goods or money to a nonprofit organization. In NPSP, we track donations using the Opportunity object. Donor Rollup Donor Rollup fields contain accumulated totals of donor history information for example, donations over a period of time. Some examples include Total Number of Gifts, Total Household Gifts, Soft Credits This Year, and so on. You'll see rollups in the Donation Information sections of the Salesforce Account and Contact objects, though they are not explicitly referred to as such. Total Gifts, for example, is a total of all the gifts over a period of time, "rolled up" into one. There are multiple kinds of rollups available in NPSP. Check out the Rollups Overview to learn more and figure out which rollups are right for your organization. GAU Allocation A designation of part or all of a donation to a specific fund or General Accounting Unit (GAU). For example, a scholarship GAU is a fund allocated specifically for scholarships. Donors can designate part or all of their donation for the scholarship fund, knowing that their money will go specifically toward that purpose. Gift Entry An NPSP feature that gives users an accurate, fast, and flexible way to enter batch and single gifts. It's designed to help users enter large volumes of gifts in a consistent way and ensure that complex gifts have the right attributes . Household or Organization Donation A donation attributed to a Household or Organization. When you receive a donation from a Household or Organization Account, the entire Household (or Organization) is credited with the donation in NPSP. Individual Donation A donation given by an individual donor or constituent. The donation is a gift from a single person (Contact), rather than from an entire Household or Organization. Depending on your NPSP configuration, the value of this gift will be reflected on the Contact's Household Account as well as other Contacts in the same household. Opportunity In Salesforce, we track all donation and grant information on the standard Salesforce Opportunity object. So any time we refer to an Opportunity, we are usually referring to a donation or grant. Generally a donation, but there are other Opportunity record types as well. Here are the types you can choose from in the Nonprofit Success Pack:  - Donation - Grant - In-Kind - Major Gift - Matching Donation - Membership You designate a type for an Opportunity when you create the Opportunity, and a description of each type is available in the user interface. You can also create your own Opportunity record types or remove types, depending on your needs. Partial Soft Credit A soft credit for an amount that is only a portion of the larger donation. For example, organizations like Network for Good and United Way collect donations on behalf of an organization's constituents, and typically share them with nonprofits on a regular basis (monthly or quarterly). The nonprofit creates a single Opportunity record for the larger check received, but needs to soft credit its individual constituents accordingly. Payment In NPSP, this is a separate record that is associated with an Opportunity to track money that is actually paid. A single opportunity can have one Payment or multiple Payments. Recurring Donation A donation that occurs more than once, over a period of time. Recurring donations can be open-ended and continue in perpetuity, or they can be fixed-length donations (such as monthly, yearly, and so on), with a start and end date. Soft Credit A soft credit is a credit for a donation that someone did not actually make themselves, and credits that someone as an "influencer" of the donation, rather than as the direct donor. Soft credits can take many forms. A classic example is the employer donation matching scenario, where an employer sends a matching gift of $100 to nonprofit A on behalf of employee B. A soft credit on employee B's Contact record in Salesforce shows that they were responsible for the employer's donation of $100, but that the employee did not make the donation directly. If you enable Customizable Rollups, you can also create soft credit rollups that aggregate the soft credits for all Contacts in a Household Account, and rolls them up to that Household Account. # Donor Engagement Agent in Education Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. - **[Donor Engagement Agent Template, Subagents, and Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Donor Engagement Agent template contains the subagents and actions that turn raw meeting notes into interaction summaries and follow-up tasks. - **[Considerations for the Donor Engagement Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Donor Engagement Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Create a Donor Engagement Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Agentforce agent to help gift officers record and plan their engagements with major donors. - **[Use the Donor Meeting Notes Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_meeting_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create a record of their donor meetings. - **[Use the Donor Task Management Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_task_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors. - **[Create Donor Meeting Notes and Follow-Up Tasks in Slack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create donor meeting notes and follow-up tasks within Slack after you integrate the Donor Engagement Agent. # Donor Engagement Agent in Nonprofit Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. - **[Donor Engagement Agent Template, Subagents, and Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Donor Engagement Agent template contains the subagents and actions that turn raw meeting notes into interaction summaries and follow-up tasks. - **[Considerations for the Donor Engagement Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Donor Engagement Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Create a Donor Engagement Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Agentforce agent to help gift officers record and plan their engagements with major donors. - **[Use the Donor Meeting Notes Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_meeting_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create a record of their donor meetings. - **[Use the Donor Task Management Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_task_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors. - **[Create Donor Meeting Notes and Follow-Up Tasks in Slack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create donor meeting notes and follow-up tasks within Slack after you integrate the Donor Engagement Agent. # Donor Engagement Agent Template, Subagents, and Actions The Donor Engagement Agent template contains the subagents and actions that turn raw meeting notes into interaction summaries and follow-up tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
Use the Donor Engagement Agent template to capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Use an assistive AI agent to convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks to preserve critical donor information. The agent template contains the subagents and actions needed to accomplish the agent’s jobs. To refine and craft a structured interaction summary from rough meeting notes, use these agent components. - Prepare Donor Meeting Notes prompt template - Donor Meeting Notes subagent - Prepare Donor Meeting Notes action To create follow-up tasks from the meeting notes, use these agent components. - Donor Task Management subagent - Create a To-Do action - Extract Fields and Values From User Input action The Agent Router subagent coordinates and guides the subagent selection within the Donor Engagement agent template.
Subagent Description Included Actions
Donor Meeting Notes Capture, edit, and save notes from donor meetings as Interaction Summaries in Salesforce.
Donor Task Management Create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors.
SEE ALSO: - [Set Up Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_setup.htm&language=en_US) - [Configure Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_configure.htm&language=en_US) - [Add a Subagent to Your Agent from the Asset Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_add_asset.htm&language=en_US) # Donor Engagement Agent Template, Subagents, and Actions The Donor Engagement Agent template contains the subagents and actions that turn raw meeting notes into interaction summaries and follow-up tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
Use the Donor Engagement Agent template to capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Use an assistive AI agent to convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks to preserve critical donor information. The agent template contains the subagents and actions needed to accomplish the agent’s jobs. To refine and craft a structured interaction summary from rough meeting notes, use these agent components. - Prepare Donor Meeting Notes prompt template - Donor Meeting Notes subagent - Prepare Donor Meeting Notes action To create follow-up tasks from the meeting notes, use these agent components. - Donor Task Management subagent - Create a To-Do action - Extract Fields and Values From User Input action The Agent Router subagent coordinates and guides the subagent selection within the Donor Engagement agent template.
Subagent Description Included Actions
Donor Meeting Notes Capture, edit, and save notes from donor meetings as Interaction Summaries in Salesforce.
Donor Task Management Create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors.
SEE ALSO: - [Set Up Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_setup.htm&language=en_US) - [Configure Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_configure.htm&language=en_US) - [Add a Subagent to Your Agent from the Asset Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_add_asset.htm&language=en_US) # Donor Profiles in Education The Donor Profile contains key information about your donors all in one place. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up and use donor profiles:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
A Donor Profile is an account page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app that is customized to contain pertinent financial, demographic, and relationship information on a donor or prospect. This comprehensive view helps fundraisers understand their donors. The financial and demographic information is pulled from the Contact Profile object, and the relationship information is built using an Actionable Relationship Center graph. You can customize both person accounts (for individual donors) and business accounts (for households and partners). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - **[Design a Donor Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_design_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Donor Profile to meet your needs. - **[Use the Donor Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_use_the_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Efficiently and thoroughly evaluate donors' suitability for major gifts requests. # Donor Profiles in Nonprofit The Donor Profile contains key information about your donors all in one place. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up and use donor profiles:

FundraisingAccess permission set

OR

Fundraising_User permission set group
A Donor Profile is an account page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app that is customized to contain pertinent financial, demographic, and relationship information on a donor or prospect. This comprehensive view helps fundraisers understand their donors. The financial and demographic information is pulled from the Contact Profile object, and the relationship information is built using an Actionable Relationship Center graph. You can customize both person accounts (for individual donors) and business accounts (for households and partners). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - **[Design a Donor Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_design_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Donor Profile to meet your needs. - **[Use the Donor Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_use_the_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Efficiently and thoroughly evaluate donors' suitability for major gifts requests. # Donor Support Agent in Education Help donors pause, resume, close, or update the amount of their existing gift commitments with recurring schedules. In Agent Builder, configure an agent that uses the Manage Gift Commitments subagent to help donors manage their gift commitments in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. With the Manage Gift Commitments subagent, donors can use an agent to manage their gift commitments. The Manage Gift Commitments subagent contains the Close Gift Commitment and the Manage Recurring Gift Commitment actions. - **[Donor Support Agent Permission Set Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_donor_support_agent_perm_set_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your agent the access to manage gift commitments by setting the object and field permissions for your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set. - **[Set Up the Donor Support Agent in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_the_donor_support_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Donor Support Agent. - **[Use the Manage Gift Commitments Subagent in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_use_the_manage_gift_commitments_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up the Donor Support agent, donors can access the agent from your Experience Cloud site donor portal. # Donor Support Agent in Nonprofit Help donors pause, resume, close, or update the amount of their existing gift commitments with recurring schedules. In Agent Builder, configure an agent that uses the Manage Gift Commitments subagent to help donors manage their gift commitments in your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. With the Manage Gift Commitments subagent, donors can use an agent to manage their gift commitments. The Manage Gift Commitments subagent contains the Close Gift Commitment and the Manage Recurring Gift Commitment actions. - **[Donor Support Agent Permission Set Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_donor_support_agent_perm_set_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your agent the access to manage gift commitments by setting the object and field permissions for your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set. - **[Set Up the Donor Support Agent in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_the_donor_support_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Donor Support Agent. - **[Use the Manage Gift Commitments Subagent in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_use_the_manage_gift_commitments_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up the Donor Support agent, donors can access the agent from your Experience Cloud site donor portal. # Donor Support Agent Permission Set Configuration Give your agent the access to manage gift commitments by setting the object and field permissions for your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To assign permission sets and set field-level security: FundraisingAccess permission set
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud:

FundraisingExperienceCloud

AND

Manage Donations with Agentforce in Experience Cloud
Before you set access to the objects and fields, clone the FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set for your donors to use the agent in your Experience Cloud site. To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud, provide your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set with the specified access to these objects and fields. Object Permissions | Object | Permissions | | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Commitment Change Attribution Log | Read, Create, Delete object permissions | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Soft Credit | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Transaction | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Transaction Designation | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Payment Instrument | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions |
Field Permissions
Object Field Permissions
Gift Commitment Change Attribution Log All fields Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Current Gift Commitment Schedule Edit Access field permissions
Donor Edit Access field permissions
Effective Start Date Edit Access field permissions
Effective Transaction Interval Edit Access field permissions
Effective Transaction Period Edit Access field permissions
Expected End Date Edit Access field permissions
Expected Total Commitment Amount Edit Access field permissions
Name Edit Access field permissions
Next Transaction Amount Edit Access field permissions
Next Transaction Date Edit Access field permissions
Status Edit Access field permissions
Total Commitment Schedule Amount Edit Access field permissions
Total Current Month Edit Access field permissions
Total Current Quarter Edit Access field permissions
Total Current Year Edit Access field permissions
Total Next Year Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Schedule Campaign Edit Access field permissions
Commitment Update Reason Edit Access field permissions
End Date Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Name Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Schedule Before Edit Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Status Edit Access field permissions
Outreach Source Code Edit Access field permissions
Payment Instrument Edit Access field permissions
Payment Method Edit Access field permissions
Total Schedule Amount Edit Access field permissions
Transaction Amount Edit Access field permissions
Transaction Day Edit Access field permissions
Transaction Interval Edit Access field permissions
# Donor Support Agent Permission Set Configuration Give your agent the access to manage gift commitments by setting the object and field permissions for your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To assign permission sets and set field-level security: FundraisingAccess permission set
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud:

FundraisingExperienceCloud

AND

Manage Donations with Agentforce in Experience Cloud
Before you set access to the objects and fields, clone the FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set for your donors to use the agent in your Experience Cloud site. To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud, provide your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set with the specified access to these objects and fields. Object Permissions | Object | Permissions | | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Commitment Change Attribution Log | Read, Create, Delete object permissions | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Soft Credit | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Transaction | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Gift Transaction Designation | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions | | Payment Instrument | Read, Create, Edit, Delete, and View All Fields object permissions |
Field Permissions
Object Field Permissions
Gift Commitment Change Attribution Log All fields Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Current Gift Commitment Schedule Edit Access field permissions
Donor Edit Access field permissions
Effective Start Date Edit Access field permissions
Effective Transaction Interval Edit Access field permissions
Effective Transaction Period Edit Access field permissions
Expected End Date Edit Access field permissions
Expected Total Commitment Amount Edit Access field permissions
Name Edit Access field permissions
Next Transaction Amount Edit Access field permissions
Next Transaction Date Edit Access field permissions
Status Edit Access field permissions
Total Commitment Schedule Amount Edit Access field permissions
Total Current Month Edit Access field permissions
Total Current Quarter Edit Access field permissions
Total Current Year Edit Access field permissions
Total Next Year Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Schedule Campaign Edit Access field permissions
Commitment Update Reason Edit Access field permissions
End Date Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Name Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Schedule Before Edit Edit Access field permissions
Gift Commitment Status Edit Access field permissions
Outreach Source Code Edit Access field permissions
Payment Instrument Edit Access field permissions
Payment Method Edit Access field permissions
Total Schedule Amount Edit Access field permissions
Transaction Amount Edit Access field permissions
Transaction Day Edit Access field permissions
Transaction Interval Edit Access field permissions
# Donor Support Profiles in Education The Donor Support Profile helps you provide fast and personal support to donors. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To customize the Donor Support Profile:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
The Donor Support Profile is an Account page in the Fundraising Operations app that's customized to contain pertinent information about gift commitments, one-time gifts, commitment installments, alerts, and event timeline on a donor or a prospect. This comprehensive view helps support staff to understand and help their donors. You can customize both Person Accounts (for individual donors) and Business Accounts (for households and partners). Customize the profile to meet the unique needs of your org and the preferences of your support staff. Use the Donor Support Profile as a one-stop-shop for helping constituents with their account, donations, and commitments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Design a Donor Support Profile Customize the Donor Support Profile to meet the unique needs of your org and support staff. You can configure the donor profile any way you want. However, we recommend this configuration. 1. On the Fundraising Operations app, edit the account page with the Lightning App Builder. 2. Change the page layout template to **Three Regions**. 3. Replace the Highlights Panel with the Summary Card at the top left of the page. 4. Customize the Summary Card with the fields that are most helpful to your org's support staff. 5. Add a Timeline component below the Summary Card. 6. Customize the Timeline or use the included Fundraising Timeline configuration. 7. At the top of the center pane, add the Action Launcher. 8. Select an Action Launcher Deployment that contains the quick actions that are most useful to the support staff. Pause Installment, Upgrade/Downgrade, and Cancel Installment are recommended actions to be included. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Ask your administrator to create the Action Launcher Deployment that you need if it doesn’t already exist. 9. On the Page Tabs component, add and configure the tabs for Overview, Gift Commitments, One-time Gifts, Cases, Donor Household, and Donor Details. 10. At the top right of the page, add a Flexcard component and configure it to show recent record alerts. 11. Below the Recent Items pane, add the Related Records Detail Display component and configure it to show the upcoming and overdue gift commitment installments. ## How to Use the Donor Support Profile Quickly address constituent requests with an easy-to-navigate page. Constituent support officers can use the Donor Support Profile to perform service processes for donors, prospective donors, volunteers, or other constituents in an efficient and accurate manner. Support processes that are accessible from the Donor Support Profile include: - Receive and respond to requests from existing or prospective donors. - Search for information to answer queries of existing or prospective donors. - Use the Recent Items Flexcard component to see and address the alerts for action needed for the constituent. - Use the timeline to see or create new cases, gift commitments, gift transactions, opportunities, and email messages. - Use the page tabs to: - Search for the donor record to match incoming interactions. - Update contact information of constituents. - Update constituent communication preferences. - Verify payment instrument details for gift transactions. - Use the Action Launcher buttons to perform requested support actions, such as: - Update constituent payment methods and payment information. - Update the amounts or dates of a gift commitment schedule. - Pause and resume a gift commitment schedule. - Cancel one or more gift commitment installments. - Close a gift commitment. SEE ALSO: - [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5) - [Configure Record Alerts in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts_lightning.htm&type=5) - [Create Quick Actions in Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm) - [Record Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts.htm&type=5) - [Show Donor Information in a Summary Card](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&type=5) - [Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.timeline.htm&type=5) # Donor Support Profiles in Nonprofit The Donor Support Profile helps you provide fast and personal support to donors. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To customize the Donor Support Profile:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
The Donor Support Profile is an Account page in the Fundraising Operations app that's customized to contain pertinent information about gift commitments, one-time gifts, commitment installments, alerts, and event timeline on a donor or a prospect. This comprehensive view helps support staff to understand and help their donors. You can customize both Person Accounts (for individual donors) and Business Accounts (for households and partners). Customize the profile to meet the unique needs of your org and the preferences of your support staff. Use the Donor Support Profile as a one-stop-shop for helping constituents with their account, donations, and commitments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Design a Donor Support Profile Customize the Donor Support Profile to meet the unique needs of your org and support staff. You can configure the donor profile any way you want. However, we recommend this configuration. 1. On the Fundraising Operations app, edit the account page with the Lightning App Builder. 2. Change the page layout template to **Three Regions**. 3. Replace the Highlights Panel with the Summary Card at the top left of the page. 4. Customize the Summary Card with the fields that are most helpful to your org's support staff. 5. Add a Timeline component below the Summary Card. 6. Customize the Timeline or use the included Fundraising Timeline configuration. 7. At the top of the center pane, add the Action Launcher. 8. Select an Action Launcher Deployment that contains the quick actions that are most useful to the support staff. Pause Installment, Upgrade/Downgrade, and Cancel Installment are recommended actions to be included. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Ask your administrator to create the Action Launcher Deployment that you need if it doesn’t already exist. 9. On the Page Tabs component, add and configure the tabs for Overview, Gift Commitments, One-time Gifts, Cases, Donor Household, and Donor Details. 10. At the top right of the page, add a Flexcard component and configure it to show recent record alerts. 11. Below the Recent Items pane, add the Related Records Detail Display component and configure it to show the upcoming and overdue gift commitment installments. ## How to Use the Donor Support Profile Quickly address constituent requests with an easy-to-navigate page. Constituent support officers can use the Donor Support Profile to perform service processes for donors, prospective donors, volunteers, or other constituents in an efficient and accurate manner. Support processes that are accessible from the Donor Support Profile include: - Receive and respond to requests from existing or prospective donors. - Search for information to answer queries of existing or prospective donors. - Use the Recent Items Flexcard component to see and address the alerts for action needed for the constituent. - Use the timeline to see or create new cases, gift commitments, gift transactions, opportunities, and email messages. - Use the page tabs to: - Search for the donor record to match incoming interactions. - Update contact information of constituents. - Update constituent communication preferences. - Verify payment instrument details for gift transactions. - Use the Action Launcher buttons to perform requested support actions, such as: - Update constituent payment methods and payment information. - Update the amounts or dates of a gift commitment schedule. - Pause and resume a gift commitment schedule. - Cancel one or more gift commitment installments. - Close a gift commitment. SEE ALSO: - [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5) - [Configure Record Alerts in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts_lightning.htm&type=5) - [Create Quick Actions in Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm) - [Record Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts.htm&type=5) - [Show Donor Information in a Summary Card](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&type=5) - [Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.timeline.htm&type=5) # Draft Summaries with Einstein Generative AI (Beta) Use Einstein generative AI to save time and effort on tedious summarization tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
- **[How Einstein Generative AI Works With Your Salesforce Data (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_how_einstein_generative_ai_works_with_your_salesforce_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein Generative AI uses data from Salesforce to automatically generate helpful documents. - **[Generate a Program and Benefits Summary (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_einstein_program_and_benefits_summary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Program and Benefits Summary to quickly draft a program and benefits summary that accurately describes the program progress to stakeholders. Program managers can can save the time spent on creating program updates to share with internal and external stakeholders. - **[Generate a Notes Summary (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_einstein_notes_summary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Notes Summary to quickly absorb information about constituents, participants, or grantees to provide them with the best service possible. Einstein Notes Summary helps major gift officers to learn about the donor before they make a solicitation call. Einstein Notes Summary helps case managers familiarize themselves with notes on the program participant before their next interaction. Quickly identify the actions or tasks that were logged in a note but not completed. - **[Generate a Funding Award Summary (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_einstein_funding_award_summary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantmaking program officers often use a funding award summary to determine the health of a specific grant. Officers use this information to decide how much engagement they need, whether they can make more funding disbursements, and whether they should provide future funding to the recipient. Gathering information to make these determinations is an arduous task. Use the Einstein Funding Award Summary to quickly identify if the grant is meeting its milestones and fulfilling its requirements. - **[Generate a Board Version of a Grant Application (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_einstein_board_version_of_grant_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant program officers provide their board members with a distilled version of the grant application that the board members can review for final approval. It can be time consuming to summarize a grant application that calls out the information that the board is most interested in. To save time by quickly generating a board version of the application, use the Einstein Board Version of Grant Application feature. # Dynamic Applications Data Sources The New Application window shows up to four picklist fields, depending on your selections in the design attributes panel. Options in all picklists except Student are based on filtering the Program Term Application Timeline (PTAT) record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Only the Application Types, Academic Terms, or Learning Programs that are associated with a PTAT can appear as picklist options on the New Application window. To send picklist options to the fields on the New Application window, a PTAT must have: - A related Academic Term record with the Active field set to true - A related Learning Program record with the Active field set to true - A related Application Timeline where: - The Application Open Date field has a value that's less than the current date - The Application Close Date field is blank or has a value that's greater than the current date Qualified PTATs are filtered based on the user's selections on the New Application window.
Field Data Source Information
Student

This picklist is available to applicants only if the New Application window is configured to use Proxy mode. Proxy mode enables users to apply on behalf of others or themselves. Data comes from the Contact records related to the running user’s Account.

In Self mode, the Student picklist doesn’t appear and application details populate based on the running user’s Contact ID, Name, and Email values.
Application Type (or Academic Level) This picklist shows all possible values found in the Academic Level field of the Learning Programs related to qualified PTATS.
Academic Term This picklist shows the name and ID of the Academic Terms related to the PTATs that are associated with the Application Type that the user selected.
Learning Program This picklist filters qualified PTATs by the chosen Academic Level and Academic term. It shows the related Learning Programs’ names and related Application Timelines’ Application Category values in the form of “[Learning Program Name] - [Application Category].” For example, “Bachelor of Arts - Regular Decision”.
# EDA and Translation Learn how EDA is localized and how to manage translations. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Education Data Architecture. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Translation Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're localizing your org on your own, you need to be aware that there are some issues and considerations due to the nature of the EDA package. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Education Data Architecture product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Education Data Architecture."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Education Data Architecture.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Education Data Architecture. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Education Data Architecture objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Education Data Architecture | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Catalan | √ |   | | Dutch | √ |   | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | Finnish | √ |   | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ |   | | Japanese | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ | √ | | Spanish (Mexico) | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Education Data Architecture - [Catalan (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_ca_ES.pdf) - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_nl_NL.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_en_GB.pdf) - [Finish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_fi_FI.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_fr_FR.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_de_DE.pdf) - [Japanese](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_ja_JP.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_es_ES.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EDA/Education_Data_Architecture_es_MX.pdf) ## Translation Limitations If you're localizing your org on your own, you need to be aware that there are some issues and considerations due to the nature of the EDA package. This list of "trouble areas" in the product cannot or should not be translated. In each area, we provide details on the appropriate way to handle the situation, whether it's through translating the items on your own, or leaving things as-is. As we update the product, where possible, we are working to address gaps that prevent EDA from being fully localized. To learn more about translating values on your own, read more [here](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=adding_and_editing_translated_languages.htm&language=en_US). To learn more about custom labels, read more [here](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=cl_translate_edit.htm&language=en_US). - **[Account Name Formats](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We've identified a known issue that sometimes prevents users from creating Contacts when they switch from one language to another language. If you experience this, in EDA Settings, reset the values for Account Name Formats in Account Model Settings. - **[Other Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do not change the picklist value API names for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email. If you want to override the language translation for any of the following picklist values, do so in the Translation Workbench. ### Account Name Formats We've identified a known issue that sometimes prevents users from creating Contacts when they switch from one language to another language. If you experience this, in EDA Settings, reset the values for Account Name Formats in Account Model Settings. ### Other Picklist Values Do not change the picklist value API names for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email. If you want to override the language translation for any of the following picklist values, do so in the Translation Workbench. - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Home - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Mobile - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Other - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Work - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_Preferred\_Email.Alternate - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_Preferred\_Email.Personal - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_Preferred\_Email.Work ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Education Data Architecture product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Education Data Architecture: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language (for example, Catalan): 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # EDA and Translation Learn how EDA is localized and how to manage translations. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Translation Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're localizing your org on your own, you need to be aware that there are some issues and considerations due to the nature of the EDA package. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your K-12 Architecture Kit product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for K-12 Architecture Kit."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for K-12 Architecture Kit. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, K-12 Architecture Kit objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### K-12 Architecture Kit | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Catalan | √ |   | | Dutch | √ |   | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | Finnish | √ |   | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ |   | | Japanese | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ | √ | | Spanish (Mexico) | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. We don't currently have localized documentation for this product. Stay tuned! ## Translation Limitations If you're localizing your org on your own, you need to be aware that there are some issues and considerations due to the nature of the EDA package. This list of "trouble areas" in the product cannot or should not be translated. In each area, we provide details on the appropriate way to handle the situation, whether it's through translating the items on your own, or leaving things as-is. As we update the product, where possible, we are working to address gaps that prevent EDA from being fully localized. To learn more about translating values on your own, read more [here](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=adding_and_editing_translated_languages.htm&language=en_US). To learn more about custom labels, read more [here](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=cl_translate_edit.htm&language=en_US). - **[Account Name Formats](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We've identified a known issue that sometimes prevents users from creating Contacts when they switch from one language to another language. If you experience this, in EDA Settings, reset the values for Account Name Formats in Account Model Settings. - **[Other Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do not change the picklist value API names for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email. If you want to override the language translation for any of the following picklist values, do so in the Translation Workbench. ### Account Name Formats We've identified a known issue that sometimes prevents users from creating Contacts when they switch from one language to another language. If you experience this, in EDA Settings, reset the values for Account Name Formats in Account Model Settings. ### Other Picklist Values Do not change the picklist value API names for Preferred Phone or Preferred Email. If you want to override the language translation for any of the following picklist values, do so in the Translation Workbench. - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Home - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Mobile - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Other - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_PreferredPhone.Work - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_Preferred\_Email.Alternate - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_Preferred\_Email.Personal - PicklistValue.Contact.hed\_\_Preferred\_Email.Work ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your K-12 Architecture Kit product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in K-12 Architecture Kit: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # EDA Entity Relationship Diagram This diagram shows the relationship between EDA custom objects and Salesforce standard objects. ![EDA Entity Relationship Diagram (ERD)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/eda_erd_200.png) [EDA Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/EDA_ERD.pdf) (in PDF format) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Any unreleased services or features referenced in this or other presentations, press releases, or public statements are not currently available and may not be delivered on time or at all. Customers who purchase our services should make their purchase decisions based upon features that are currently available. # EDA Feature Telemetry Learn how Salesforce collects EDA Feature Telemetry data to understand the level of usage and adoption of various EDA features. - **[Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Data Architecture Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. ## Feature Telemetry Education Data Architecture Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides us with valuable insight into how Education Data Architecture is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage and adoption of various Education Data Architecture features. **No personally identifiable information is collected through Education Data Architecture Feature Telemetry**. We only collect information about what features an organization has enabled or not. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (True/False), Integer, and Date. Education Data Architecture Feature Telemetry data is collected during the push upgrade process. ### Accounts and Naming - How many orgs are using the Administrative Account model as the default setting? - How many orgs are using the Household Account model as the default setting? - How many orgs are using an Administrative Account custom naming format? - How many orgs are using a Household Account custom naming format? - How many Administrative Accounts exist in the org? - How many Household Accounts exist in the org? - Is automatic household naming enabled? - How many orgs are using Household Account in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Academic Program in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Educational Institution in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Business Organization in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using University Department in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Automatically Rename Household Accounts? - How many orgs have enabled Automatically Rename Household Accounts? ### Affiliations - How many orgs are using the Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments setting? - How many orgs are using the Affiliation Start Date setting? - How many orgs are using the Affiliation End Date setting? ### Relationships - How many auto-create relationship rules exist in this org for Campaign Members? - How many auto-create relationship rules exist in this org for Contacts? - How many orgs are using Value Inversion relationships? ### Seasonal Address - How many Seasonal Addresses exist in the org? - How many Seasonal Addresses were created in the last 12 months? ### System Information - How many orgs have one or more user-managed TDTM classes? - How many orgs have disabled one or more EDA TDTM classes? - Is EDA error handling enabled in this org? - Are error logs being stored in this org? - How many orgs have All Sys Admin selected for the Error Notifications Recipients setting? ### Other Metrics - How many active record types does an org have for Course Connection? - How many records of the following types does this org have? - Errors - Program Plans - Plan Requirements - Course Connections - Course Offering Schedules - Term Grades - Facilities - How many orgs aren't using the Extended Description field on the Course object? - How many orgs have old values in the Ethnicity field on the Contact object? - How many orgs aren't using Course Connections? - When was Settings Health Check last run? - How many auto-enrollment mappings are there for Program Enrollment? - How many orgs are using the Application Window Validation setting? # EDA Integration Resources Reference to software requirements specification. - **[EDA Software Requirements Specification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_sw_reqs_spec.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How to find EDA software requirements specification. # EDA Limitations and Extension Options Keep in mind these limitations and extension options with Education Data Architecture. - **[EDA Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_limitations_and_extension_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the access, usage, and compatibility limitations in Education Data Architecture. - **[EDA Extension Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_limitations_and_extension_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The EDA framework is not typically implemented standalone as an SIS, course catalog, or system of record because of educational institutions' unique requirements for handling, processing, and retaining student, financial, and transactional data. ## EDA Limitations Understand the access, usage, and compatibility limitations in Education Data Architecture. ### Supported Browsers Supported browsers for EDA are the same as those documented at [Supported Browsers](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=getstart_browser_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. ### Salesforce Platform Limits Apply EDA is subject to Salesforce limits on Platform usage. Among other limits, we limit how much data can be stored in a single org and the aggregate amount of CPU usage. For details, see [Salesforce Developer Limits and Allocations Quick Reference](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.salesforce_app_limits_cheatsheet.meta/salesforce_app_limits_cheatsheet/salesforce_app_limits_overview.htm). In particular, EDA is subject to managed package limits, such as the number of SOQL queries per transaction. For details, see [Per-Transaction Certified Managed Package Limits](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.salesforce_app_limits_cheatsheet.meta/salesforce_app_limits_cheatsheet/salesforce_app_limits_platform_apexgov.htm). If you're new to working with managed and unmanaged packages, we recommend the overview at [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm) in Salesforce Help. ### Person Accounts Are Not Supported Person Accounts are not supported. However, it's okay if you install EDA in an org that has Person Accounts enabled. ### Nonprofit Success Pack Is Not Supported We know many of you are devoted NPSP users. For now, we don't recommend installing NPSP and EDA in the same org. ### Geographic Restrictions on Application Access To comply with U.S. export law and regulations, users in certain geographic regions are restricted from accessing Salesforce products. For details, see Export Compliance terms in the [Main Service Agreement](https://a.sfdcstatic.com/content/dam/www/ocms-backup/assets/pdf/misc/salesforce_msa.pdf). ## EDA Extension Options The EDA framework is not typically implemented standalone as an SIS, course catalog, or system of record because of educational institutions' unique requirements for handling, processing, and retaining student, financial, and transactional data. EDA is designed to integrate with and complement these other systems. It surfaces key information from your SIS and other systems to create a 360-degree view of constituents campus-wide, and enable deeper, more meaningful engagement. EDA builds on Salesforce Platform functionality. You can extend the architecture with your own customizations, enable integrations with Salesforce APIs, and enhance its functionality with other products from Salesforce.org and partners in the Salesforce ecosystem—system integrators and ISV solutions on the AppExchange. Here are some of the ways you can extend EDA to create a complete solution that supports learner and institutional success. **Recruiting and Admissions**—While EDA can represent the Relationship and Affiliation data associated with prospects and applicants, and the data associated with Applications and Test Scores, it doesn't offer business logic for managing the recruiting and admissions process. Use Admissions Connect for application review management and Salesforce Marketing Cloud for recruiting campaign management. Also look on AppExchange for industry-specific products. **Course Catalog**—You typically set up an integration for course catalog data. **Onboarding, Advising, and Degree Planning**—For managing your onboarding programs, appointment scheduling, advising, degree planning, and more, you can use Advisor Link—along with its Pathways feature—to offer a personalized, streamlined student experience for these key student services. Advisor Link delivers advisee services through Experience Cloud functionality. You can explore using an Experience Cloud site with EDA to create an advisee portal experience. **Registrar, Enrollment, and Financial Aid**—EDA provides a well-structured framework for tracking program plans, plan requirements, and courses, but minimal functionality for supporting a Registrar's administrative functions. It doesn't provide functionality for financial aid processing or management. **Learning Management System**—The details of lesson delivery, discussion boards, and assessment activities are best handled by an LMS application, not a CRM. However, if your organization has lightweight learning management needs, consider myTrailhead from Salesforce for simple guided learning journeys. **Enterprise Document Management**—In Enterprise Edition orgs, Salesforce Files offers some file management and sharing functionality. Otherwise, enterprise document management is not included. **Student Groups, Athletics, and Event Management**—Student involvement with campus activities can be tracked using Affiliations (affiliated Accounts), which relate Contacts to organized groups. In fact, we offer a preconfigured Account record type called Sports Organization. However, managing group activities, ticketing or event communications, or athletic programs is not included. **Housing and Facilities Management**—The EDA data model offers a basic framework of the Account, Facility, and Affiliation objects. Customization is required to make it suitable for managing housing applications, residential life programs, or operations of an institution's physical plant and grounds. # EDA Object Reference List of EDA objects and their descriptions. - **[Academic Certification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Academic Certification represents an academic degree, diploma, or certificate. - **[Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Account represents either an organizational entity affiliated with a Contact or a container Account for a Contact. - **[Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Address represents a home, seasonal, or other address for a Contact or Account. - **[Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Affiliation represents an affiliation between a Contact and an Account. - **[Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application stores information about a student's application to an educational institution or program. - **[Attendance Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attendance Event represents information about a student's attendance. - **[Attribute](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_attribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attribute represents characteristics that apply to individual students and credentials earned by students and faculty (or other Contacts). - **[Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Behavior Involvement lets you associate individuals with a behavior event that's tracked as a Case. - **[Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Behavior Response helps you track corrective actions and other responses to behavior events. - **[Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case represents a behavior event and can have related Behavior Involvement records. - **[Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Contact represents an individual person. - **[Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contact Language represents a language spoken by someone connected to your institution. - **[Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course represents an academic course, typically offered periodically by an Account entity, such as a department or school. - **[Course Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Connection represents a relationship between a Contact, such as a student or faculty member, and a Course Offering. - **[Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Offering represents a specific instance of a Course that's offered during a specific Term. - **[Course Offering Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Offering Schedule relates a Course Offering with a Time Block, allowing for class schedule variations in the locations and days of a specific offering. - **[Credential](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track student achievements, such as badges, certifications, or licenses. - **[Education History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education History stores information about a Contact's education history and related data. - **[Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Facility represents a school property asset. - **[Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Language represents a language spoken at your institution. - **[Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Lead represents a potential student to an educational institution or program. - **[Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Opportunity represents an official chance for a prospect to enroll at your institution. - **[Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Plan Requirement represents a required item to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program, as specified in a Program Plan. - **[Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Enrollment represents a student's (Contact's) enrollment in an Academic Program (Account). - **[Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Plan represents the course of study required to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program (Account). - **[Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relationship represents a connection between two Contacts. - **[Term](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Term represents an academic period when your institution is in session. - **[Term Grade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Term Grade stores student grades for a specific grading period. - **[Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An instance of a student taking a test. - **[Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The score on a section of a specific test or a composite score. - **[Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Time Block represents a specific period of time, often as it relates to Course Offerings. # EDA Product Information for GDPR GDPR compliance resources for EDA. - **[EDA Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about GDPR compliance resources for EDA. - **[Data Deletion for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Develop an action plan for erasing data in EDA. - **[Consent Management for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage consent and data privacy preferences in EDA. - **[Restrict Data Processing for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage restrictions on data processing in EDA. - **[Data Portability for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to comply with legal data portability and export requirements in EDA. # EDA Product Information for GDPR Learn about GDPR compliance resources for EDA. - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Education Data Architecture. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Education Data Architecture. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Education Data Architecture. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Education Data Architecture. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Education Data Architecture."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Education Data Architecture. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # EDA Security Model Considerations Designing your security and sharing model is an essential part of your implementation. Its many aspects are more than we can cover here. Controlling security in Salesforce takes a systematic, multi-layered approach at all levels of your org. However, we do highlight considerations for administrators managing sensitive student data. - **[Know the Basics of the Salesforce Security Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_security_model_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're not familiar with concepts in the Salesforce security model such as org-wide sharing, permission sets, profiles, and sharing rules—at a minimum—we strongly recommend that you first learn the basics with these resources. - **[Security Considerations for Educational Institutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_security_model_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your institution is subject to Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model. Account for the protection of Personally Identifiable Information (PII) in students' education records. Our product is preconfigured with a FERPA checkbox field on the Contact object to identify students whose records are subject to FERPA requirements. You can optionally use this field and apply your own business logic to it, as needed. ## Know the Basics of the Salesforce Security Model If you're not familiar with concepts in the Salesforce security model such as org-wide sharing, permission sets, profiles, and sharing rules—at a minimum—we strongly recommend that you first learn the basics with these resources. - [Control Who Sees What](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_data_access.htm) in Salesforce Help - [Protect Your Salesforce Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help - Trailhead: [Data Security](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/data_security) Then rejoin us here for security considerations that can apply to some educational institutions. ## Security Considerations for Educational Institutions If your institution is subject to Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model. Account for the protection of Personally Identifiable Information (PII) in students' education records. Our product is preconfigured with a FERPA checkbox field on the Contact object to identify students whose records are subject to FERPA requirements. You can optionally use this field and apply your own business logic to it, as needed. If your institution is a HIPAA-covered entity and is subject to HIPAA requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model, including accounting for the protection of Protected Health Information (PHI) maintained outside of FERPA education records. Our product comes preconfigured with a HIPAA checkbox field to identify individuals whose records are subject to HIPAA requirements and a HIPAA Detail rich text field (intended for information about the student, such as the names of Contacts authorized to communicate about the student) on the Contact object. You can optionally use these fields and apply your own business logic to them, as needed. To help secure your sensitive data, you can implement a host of security features that come with Salesforce. To name just a few examples: - Set your org-wide default sharing settings to Private, which is the most restrictive access possible. - Identify the data access requirements for users in your various departments. Create profiles for the roles in those areas, and permission sets to grant permissions to roles or individual users. - Create a role hierarchy to give users above another user in the hierarchy the same level of access to records owned by or shared with users below. - Set field-level security to control who can access and edit certain fields on specific records. - Create sharing rules to open up record access to other users besides the record owners. - Set up authentication and authorization methods to control who sees what data, when, and from which locations and devices. For some institutions, data encryption can be an additional access control tool for securing sensitive data. Salesforce offers Shield Platform Encryption as a solution for encrypting data at rest, meaning that data is encrypted when it's being stored within Salesforce. Learn more at [Strengthen Your Data's Security with Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_pe_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. As every institution has unique privacy policies and regulatory requirements, not to mention unique Salesforce.org configurations used in combination with other information systems, we encourage you to consult with your security, legal, and regulatory specialists. # EDA Software Requirements Specification How to find EDA software requirements specification. The EDA Software Requirements Specification is retired as of April 2020. Look to our [product documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) instead. # Edit a Learning Course or Learning Program Use Learning Wizard in the Academic Operations app to modify your learning. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To edit a learning course or learning program: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Operations**. 2. From the app navigation menu, select the type of learning to modify. For example, Learning Programs. 3. On the action menu for the learning record, click **Edit in Learning Wizard**. 4. Provide the required details and click **Next**. 5. If needed, add or delete conditions for prerequisites, corequisites, and recommendations, and then click **Next**. 6. If needed, add learning outcomes, and then save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - Modifying the prerequisites, corequisites, and recommendations dissociates the learning foundation item, and associates a new learning foundation item with the learning. - Resetting the conditions grouped by the OR logic deletes the associated learning foundation item record. - You can’t change or delete the learning achievement and learning outcome associated with a learning. However, you can add new learning achievements and learning outcomes. SEE ALSO: - [Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") - [Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program.") # Edit a Learning Program Plan To ensure accurate data capture and visibility, edit program plans by using the Program Plan Builder. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To edit a learning program plan: Education Cloud Full Access
1. In the Learning Program Plan list view, for the program plan that you want to update, click ![Actions Menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Clone & Edit in Builder** to create a copy of a published learning program plan. When you clone and edit a published learning program plan, you create another version of the plan. To edit an unpublished plan, select **Edit** to update it. 2. Make your changes, and then click **Save Properties**. 3. Click **Save Draft** or **Save & Close**. 4. Publish the learning program plan. SEE ALSO: - [Create a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Program Plan Builder to view, edit, save, cancel, and publish all your program plans. You can also organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses, and add active versions of learning courses to each element.") - [Delete a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_delete_a_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To maintain data accuracy, delete unused learning program plans.") # Edit a Trigger Handler An administrator can edit Trigger Handler records to deactivate them, change their load order, change which users will execute the Apex class, and so on. A common reason to edit a Trigger Handler is to disable it. For more information, read [Disable Table-Driven Trigger Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm) . 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** Tab. 2. Click the name of the Trigger Handler you want to edit. 3. Click **Edit**. ![Record edit action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-edit-button.png) You can edit these Trigger Handler details: ![Trigger Handler edit dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-npsp-edit-modal.png) ![Trigger Handler edit dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/tdtm-eda-trigger-handler-edit-old.png) **Trigger Handler Name (1)**—Trigger Handlers provided with EDA use a record ID for the record name. If you create new Trigger Handler records, you can follow your own naming convention. **Class (2)**—Name of the Apex class this Trigger Handler manages. If the class exists within a managed package you created, include the namespace prefix. **Object (3)**—Name of the object, that when modified, runs the Apex class. For EDA custom objects, omit the namespace prefix (that is, use Address\_\_c, not hed\_\_Address\_\_c). **Load Order (4)**—Order in which Apex classes for the same object will run. Uses sequential numbers with two decimal places starting with 0.00. **Filter Field (5)**—API Name of the field used to filter by. The Filter Field and Filter Value together specify when an Apex class should NOT run. Most field types are supported, including fields on related records (for example, Account.BillingStreet). If you reference an EDA packaged field, omit the namespace prefix (that is, use Citizenship\_\_c, not hed\_\_Citizenship\_\_c). **User Managed (6)**—Indicates that your org has customized this Trigger Handler and prevents it from reverting to default settings during a package upgrade. Enable User Managed on any packaged Trigger Handlers that you have modified to preserve your changes. **Usernames to Exclude (7)**—A list of semicolon-separated Salesforce usernames that this Apex class should NOT run for. Leave this field blank to allow the class to run for all users. **Trigger Action (8)**—Trigger actions that this Apex class runs on. Before Insert, After Update, and so on. **Active (9)**—Indicates whether the Trigger Handler is active or not. **Asynchronous (10)**—Allows this Apex class to run asynchronously. Requires that your Apex class supports asynchronous processing. EDA classes are not designed to run asynchronously. Test thoroughly if you enable this option. **Filter Value (11)**—The value that Filter Field uses to filter by. The Filter Field and Filter Value together specify when an Apex class should NOT run. Text values must be an exact match but are not case sensitive. **Owned by Namespace (12)**—The namespace identifies the package or class that the Trigger Handler belongs to, allowing you to group like Trigger Handlers together. EDA Trigger Handlers all have the hed namespace. We recommend specifying an Owned by Namespace value for all Trigger Handlers you create so you can easily distinguish them from others' Trigger Handlers. 4. Remember to **Save** your changes. ![Record Save action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/save-a-record.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Be careful when changing EDA Trigger Handler records. They are designed to work in conjunction with each other and changing or disabling them can lead to undesirable results. Always test in a Sandbox environment before changing Trigger Handlers in production! # Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs. - **[View Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) updates summary fields on records overnight based on a number of Scheduled Jobs that you can review and reschedule. - **[Change Scheduled Jobs User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your listed Submitted By user is not an active Salesforce user, Administrators will receive an email with error messages when NPSP runs scheduled jobs, and nightly rollups and other records won't be updated correctly. Here's how to resolve this issue so that batches roll up correctly each night. - **[Schedule or Reschedule Nightly Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP automatically runs the default batch jobs overnight in order to pose the least disruption to your organization. If you do not like the scheduled Start Times assigned, you can delete the existing Scheduled Job and create a new Scheduled Job at your preferred time. - **[Change a Job Batch Size](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the batch size for some NPSP jobs. - **[Default Batch Job Names and Apex Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what the NPSP jobs and apex classes are used for. ## View Scheduled Jobs Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) updates summary fields on records overnight based on a number of Scheduled Jobs that you can review and reschedule. You can view these jobs in Setup. Simply enter Scheduled Jobs in the Quick Find box, then select **Scheduled Jobs**. ## Change Scheduled Jobs User If your listed Submitted By user is not an active Salesforce user, Administrators will receive an email with error messages when NPSP runs scheduled jobs, and nightly rollups and other records won't be updated correctly. Here's how to resolve this issue so that batches roll up correctly each night. 1. Click **Del** to the left of any Job Name that has an inactive Submitted By user. 2. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 3. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Process Settings** (doing this actually recreates all the default jobs), and make sure **Don't Auto Schedule Default NPSP Jobs** is _not_ selected. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 4. Return to the Scheduled Jobs page in Setup and confirm that the default Scheduled Jobs appear, marked as submitted by you or another Active user. 5. Go back to the NPSP Settings tab, **Bulk Data Processes**, and run the following batches to have NPSP make updates as expected: - Rollup Donations Batch - Rollup Allocations Batch - Recurring Donations Batch - Level Assignment Batch ## Schedule or Reschedule Nightly Jobs NPSP automatically runs the default batch jobs overnight in order to pose the least disruption to your organization. If you do not like the scheduled Start Times assigned, you can delete the existing Scheduled Job and create a new Scheduled Job at your preferred time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note One job, NPSP 00 - Error Processing, is scheduled to run hourly. This is intentional and does not use unnecessary resources in your organization. You should not delete/reschedule this job. If deleted, you can go to the NPSP Settings tab to automatically recreate it as documented above. Some NPSP jobs aren't automatically scheduled, but are available to be scheduled. For a list of these jobs, see [Schedule NPSP Batch Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Some batch jobs can be scheduled. You can manually schedule them using the Apex class, but they aren't scheduled by default."). To schedule a job or reschedule jobs to a preferred time: 1. If you're rescheduling an existing scheduled job, you must delete the scheduled job first. If you're scheduling a job for the first time, skip this step. 1. From Setup, enter Scheduled Jobs in the Quick Find box, then select **Scheduled Jobs**. 2. Click **Del** to the left of the Scheduled Job you wish to reschedule. 2. From Setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then select **Apex Classes**. 3. Click **Schedule Apex** and fill out the fields: Job Name Use the Job Name found in [Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). Apex Class Click the Lookup icon and select the corresponding Apex Class. Frequency To run each night, select Weekly and then the days of the week. For example, to run each weekday night and not run on weekends, select Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. Start Date Select the day you would like to start; ideally today. End Date Select a date many years in the future. For example, change the year to 2036. Preferred Start Time Select your preferred time from the drop down menu. 4. When you're finished, click **Save**. 5. Return to the **Scheduled Jobs** listing (search **Scheduled Jobs** in Setup) and confirm that your jobs are ready to go at the time you want. ## Change a Job Batch Size You can change the batch size for some NPSP jobs. Some examples of why you might update the batch size include: - If a job is taking too long, increase the batch size in increments of 25 or 50 and assess the impact. - If you're hitting governor limit errors for a particular job, decrease the batch size. Batch Sizes are set in NPSP Settings. Simply go to the appropriate location (as listed in the table below) and update the Batch Size field. | Batch Job | Where to Change It | | --- | --- | | Level Assignment Batch | NPSP Settings | Bulk Data Processes | Batch Process Settings | | Recurring Donations Batch | NPSP Settings | Recurring Donations | Recurring Donations | | Rollups Donations Batches | NPSP Settings | Bulk Data Processes | Batch Process Settings | ## Default Batch Job Names and Apex Classes Learn what the NPSP jobs and apex classes are used for. | Job Name | Apex Class | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | | NPSP 00 - Error Processing | ERR\_AsyncErrors\_SCHED |   | | NPSP 01 - Opportunity Account Rollups | RLLP\_OppAccRollup\_BATCH | For legacy NPSP and User Defined Rollups | | NPSP 01A - Customizable Rollups - Account Hard Credit | CRLP\_Account\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 01B - Customizable Rollups - Account Hard Credit Skew | CRLP\_AccountSkew\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 02 - Opportunity Contact Rollups | RLLP\_OppContactRollup\_BATCH | For legacy NPSP and User Defined Rollups | | NPSP 02A - Customizable Rollups - Contact Hard Credit | CRLP\_Contact\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 02B - Customizable Rollups - Contact Hard Credit Skew | CRLP\_ContactSkew\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 03 - Opportunity Household Rollups | RLLP\_OppHouseholdRollup\_BATCH | For legacy NPSP and User Defined Rollups | | NPSP 03A - Customizable Rollups - Account-level Contact Soft Credit | CRLP\_Account\_SoftCredit\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 03B - Customizable Rollups - Account Soft Credit | CRLP\_Account\_AccSoftCredit\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 03C - Customizable Rollups - Account-level Contact Soft Credit Skew | CRLP\_AccountSkew\_SoftCredit\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 03D - Customizable Rollups - Account Soft Credit Skew | CRLP\_AccountSkew\_AccSoftCredit\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 04 - Opportunity Soft Credit Rollups | RLLP\_OppSoftCreditRollup\_BATCH | For legacy NPSP and User Defined Rollups | | NPSP 04A - Customizable Rollups - Contact Soft Credit | CRLP\_Contact\_SoftCredit\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 04B - Customizable Rollups - Contact Soft Credit Skew | CRLP\_ContactSkew\_SoftCredit\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 05 - GAU Allocation Rollups | ALLO\_Rollup\_SCHED | For legacy NPSP and User Defined Rollups | | NPSP 05 - Customizable Rollups - General Accounting Units | CRLP\_GAU\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 06 - Enhanced Recurring Donations Updates | RD2\_OpportunityEvaluation\_BATCH | For Enhanced Recurring Donations only | | NPSP 06 - Recurring Donation Updates | RD\_RecurringDonations\_BATCH | For legacy Recurring Donations only | | NPSP 06A - Customizable Rollups - Recurring Donations | CRLP\_RD\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 06B - Customizable Rollups - Recurring Donations Skew | CRLP\_RDSkew\_BATCH | For Customizable Rollups only | | NPSP 07 - Seasonal Address Updates | ADDR\_Seasonal\_SCHED |   | | NPSP 08 - Level Assignment Updates | LVL\_LevelAssign\_SCHED |   | | NPSP 09 - Data Import Batch Processing | BDI\_DataImportBatch\_SCHED |   | **A note about Skew jobs . . .** You may notice that some of the Customizable Rollups jobs contain the term Skew. Skew jobs are used when there are many records related to a single record, for instance, many Allocations related to a single General Accounting Unit. Without skew jobs, GAU rollup calculations might fail when there were too many associated donations. Customizable Rollups use skew jobs to process these skewed records separately so that rollup jobs can complete successfully. - **[Schedule NPSP Batch Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some batch jobs can be scheduled. You can manually schedule them using the Apex class, but they aren't scheduled by default. ### Schedule NPSP Batch Jobs Some batch jobs can be scheduled. You can manually schedule them using the Apex class, but they aren't scheduled by default. For instructions on how to schedule jobs, see [Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). - OPP\_OpportunityNaming\_BATCH # EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Failed Course Offering Participant Automatically assign an academic support team to a learner if they fail a course.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_for_failed_course_offering_participant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure you create a support process and record types to manage cases for learners who fail a course. - **[Update Flow Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_for_failed_course_offering_participant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the case record type and predefined case team elements for the flow that assigns a case team to a learner who fails a course offering. ## Before You Begin Make sure you create a support process and record types to manage cases for learners who fail a course. See [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). ## Update Flow Elements Configure the case record type and predefined case team elements for the flow that assigns a case team to a learner who fails a course offering. ### Add Case Record Type 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Failed Course Offering Participant flow. 3. Click **Get Student Case**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Click **Add Field** and select **RecordTypleId**. 5. In the Value field, enter the ID of the Case record type that you previously created. See [Find the ID of a record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384487). 6. Click **Done**. ### Update Predefined Case Team Elements 1. Click **Get Academic Predefined Case Team 1**, and then click **Edit Element**. 2. For Filter Predefined Case Team Records, set your filtering conditions. 1. Field: Enter Name. 2. Operator: Select **Equals**. 3. Value: Enter the name of the predefined case team that you want. 3. Click **Done**. 4. Repeat this process for the **Get Academic Predefined Case Team 2** element. # EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment Automatically assign an academic advisor to learners when they declare a major field of study.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign a case team for major enrollment: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_for_learner_program_major_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a support process, identify case team roles, and create learning program plans that you need to assign academic advisors to learners. - **[Update Flow Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_for_learner_program_major_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a case record type, learning program plans, and predefined case teams to your flow. ## Before You Begin Set up a support process, identify case team roles, and create learning program plans that you need to assign academic advisors to learners. - Create a case support process and a case record type for managing learner program major enrollment cases. See [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). - Create case team roles for Primary Advisor and Advisor. See [Create Case Team Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). - Create learning program plans for the major fields of study in your institution. 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Learning Program Plans**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In the Name field, enter a name for the learning program plan that includes "Major." For example, English Major. 4. Select the Learning Program that's related to this learning program plan. 5. Enter any other desired information and save your changes. ## Update Flow Elements Add a case record type, learning program plans, and predefined case teams to your flow. ### Add Case Record Type 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment flow. 3. Click **Get Student Case**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Click **Add Field** and select **RecordTypleId**. 5. In the Value field, find and select the case record type that you previously created. See [Find the ID of a record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384487). 6. Click **Done**. ### Edit Learning Program Plan Decision Elements ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Create a decision table in Business Rules Engine (BRE) and add an action element to the flow to call BRE. See [Decision Table](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_decision_table.htm&type=5). 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment flow. 3. Click **Is Learning Program Plan for an English Major?**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Update the Outcome API Name and Value fields to reflect the learning program plans that you previously created. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Repeat this process for the other **Is Learning Program Plan for an English Major?** element. ### Update Get Primary Advisor Element 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment flow. 3. Click **Get Primary Advisor**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. For Filter User Records, set your filtering conditions. 1. Field: Enter Name. 2. Operator: Select **Equals**. 3. Value: Enter the name of the primary advisor. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Repeat this process for each **Get Primary Advisor** element. ### Update Get Advising Team Element 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team for Learner Program Major Enrollment flow. 3. Click **Get Advising Team**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. For Filter Predefined Case Team Records, set your filtering conditions. 1. Field: Enter Name. 2. Operator: Select **Equals**. 3. Value: Enter the name of the predefined case team that you want. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Repeat this process for each **Get Advising Team** element. # EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA Automatically assign an academic probation advisor to learners whose GPA drops to a specified level.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign a case team for academic term GPA: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_cloud_assign_case_team_members_for_academic_term_gpa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a support process, and create predefined case teams to use with the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA flow. - **[Update Flow Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_cloud_assign_case_team_members_for_academic_term_gpa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a case record type and predefined case teams to the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA flow. ## Before You Begin Set up a support process, and create predefined case teams to use with the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA flow. - Create a support process and record type to manage cases for assigning case teams to learners on academic probation. See [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). - Make sure that you create predefined case teams that support students with last names that start with letters A–M and N–Z. ## Update Flow Elements Add a case record type and predefined case teams to the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA flow. ### Add Case Record Type 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA flow. 3. Click **Get Student Case**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Click **Add Field** and select **RecordTypleId**. 5. In the Value field, enter the ID of the Case record type that you previously created. See [Find the ID of a record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384487). 6. Click **Done**. ### Update Predefined Case Teams Elements ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note In the flow, Academic Case Team 1 is for a team that supports learners whose last name begins with the letters A-M. Academic Case Team 2 supports learners whose last name begins with the letters N-Z. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team Members for Academic Term GPA flow. 3. Click **Get Academic Predefined Case Team 1**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. For Filter Predefined Case Team Records, set your filtering conditions. 1. Field: Enter Name. 2. Operator: Select **Equals**. 3. Value: Enter the name of the predefined case team that you want. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Repeat this process for the **Get Academic Predefined Case Team 2** element. # EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete Automatically assign an academic support team to student athletes.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign a case team to student athletes: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_to_student_athlete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a support process, and create constituent roles to use with the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete flow. - **[Update Flow Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_team_to_student_athlete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a case record type and predefined case teams to the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete flow. ## Before You Begin Set up a support process, and create constituent roles to use with the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete flow. - Create a support process and case record type to assign case teams to student athletes. See [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). - Create a constituent role for Student Athletes. See [Model Faculty, Staff, and Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_faculty_staff_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Person Account object to model faculty, staff, students, and alumni."). ## Update Flow Elements Add a case record type and predefined case teams to the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete flow. ### Add Case Record Type 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete flow. 3. Click **Get Student Case**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Click **Add Field** and select **RecordTypleId**. 5. In the Value field, enter the ID of the Case record type that you previously created. See [Find the ID of a record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384487). 6. Click **Done**. ### Update Predefined Case Team Elements 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Team to Student Athlete flow. 3. Click **Get Student Athlete Predefined Case Team**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. For Filter Predefined Case Team Records, set your filtering conditions. 1. Field: Enter Name. 2. Operator: Select **Equals**. 3. Value: Enter the name of the predefined case team that you want. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Repeat this process for **Get Academic Predefined Case Team 2**. # EDU Cloud: Assign Case Teams for Veterans and International Students Automatically assign an academic support team to students who are military veterans or international students.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign case teams to veterans or international students: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_teams_for_veterans_and_international_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a support process and case record types for veterans and international students. - **[Update Flow Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_case_teams_for_veterans_and_international_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a case record type and predefined case teams to the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Teams for Veterans and International Students flow. ## Before You Begin Create a support process and case record types for veterans and international students. See [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). ## Update Flow Elements Add a case record type and predefined case teams to the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Teams for Veterans and International Students flow. ### Add Case Record Type 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Assign Case Teams for Veterans and International Students flow. 3. Click **Get Student Case**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Click **Add Field** and select **RecordTypleId**. 5. In the Value field, enter the ID of the Case record type that you previously created. See [Find the ID of a record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384487). 6. Click **Done**. ### Update Predefined Case Team Elements 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application flow. 3. Click **Get Veteran Case Team**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. For Filter Predefined Case Team Records, set your filtering conditions. 1. Field: Enter Name. 2. Operator: Select **Equals**. 3. Value: Enter the name of the predefined case team that you want. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Repeat this process for the **Get International Case Team** element. # EDU Cloud: Close Case for Canceled or Denied Application Automatically close an open application case when the application is canceled or denied.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To close cases for canceled or denied applications: | Education Cloud Full Access | This flow works without any configuration, but you can customize it to fit your institution. To customize this flow and change the criteria to close a case: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Close Case for Canceled or Denied Application flow. 3. Click **Should Related Case Be Closed?**. 4. Click **Edit Element**. 5. Change the criteria and click **Done**. # EDU Cloud: Close Related Cases for Term Automatically close an open application case for a learner when they enroll in an academic term.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To close related cases for a term: | Education Cloud Full Access | This flow works without any configuration, but you can customize it to fit your institution. To customize this flow and change the criteria to close a case: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Close Related Cases for Term flow. 3. Click the element that you want to change, then click **Edit Element**. 4. Make your changes, then click **Done**. # EDU Cloud: Create Grade Alert Automatically create a record alert when a learner's grade drops below a C, and assign an advisor if the learner has a failing grade.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create grade alerts: | Education Cloud Full Access | This flow works without any configuration. However, before you can use the flow, complete the following tasks: - Create a support process and case record types for supporting learners with low grades. - Create a case team role for Primary Advisor. This flow launches when a Course Offering Participant Result record is updated. If you want to generate an alert upon the creation of a Course Offering Participant Result record, you need to set up a separate flow. Clone the EDU Cloud: Create Grade Alter flow template and update the logic in the Start element. See Also: - [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students.") - [Use Flows to Create Cases and Assign Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students.") - [Add and Edit Elements in Auto-Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?language=en_us&id=sf.flow_build_elements_autolayout.htm) # EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application Automatically create a case when a person submits a new application.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create related cases for new applications: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_related_case_for_new_individual_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a support process and case record type for new applicants. - **[Update Flow Elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_related_case_for_new_individual_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a case record type to the EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application flow. ## Before You Begin Create a support process and case record type for new applicants. See [Before You Begin: Create a Support Process and Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). ## Update Flow Elements Add a case record type to the EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application flow. ### Add Case Record Type 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Open your copy of the EDU Cloud: Create Related Case for New Individual Application flow. 3. Click **Create Case**, and then click **Edit Element**. 4. Click **Add Field** and select **RecordTypleId**. 5. In the Value field, enter the ID of the Case record type that you previously created. See [Find the ID of a record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384487). 6. Click **Done**. # Education Agents Learn about the Agentforce agents that are available in Education Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
[Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_operations_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Course Operations Agent assists your faculty directly in Slack. This assistant helps faculty manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk learners, and coordinate student support. With centralized course operations and student support, faculty can focus on teaching and student engagement and less on administrative tasks.") Use Course Operations Topics in Agentforce to create a dedicated Slack channel for each course offering, add participants to the channel, and create a syllabus canvas. With centralized course operations in Slack, faculty can focus more on teaching and less on administrative tasks. [Course Search Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_search_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help students and advisors discover the right courses easily. The Course Search Agent answers questions about course information.") Help students and advisors discover the right courses easily. This agent answers questions about course requirements and degree planning information. [Student Advising Topics in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_advising_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Student Advising Topics in Agentforce to assist and optimize your advising team's efforts.") With Student Advising Topics enabled in Agentforce, an advisor can use the agent to quickly summarize advising cases. The agent can also answer student questions regarding campus resources and policies, such as financial aid or activities. The agent helps advisors follow up proactively by suggesting next-best actions, like creating to-dos or cases. [Student Financials Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials_agent_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Student Financials Agent to help your students retrieve their account balances and understand the fees included.") Use the Student Financials Agent to help your students retrieve their account balances and understand the fees included. [Student Goals Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_student_goals_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Student Goals Agent to help your students get specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) goal recommendations with AI-powered guidance based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Assist students in getting campus resource recommendations, including courses, support programs, and involvement groups that can keep students on track to achieve their goals.") Use the Student Goals Agent to help your students get specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) goal recommendations with AI-powered guidance based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Assist students in getting campus resource recommendations, including courses, support programs, and involvement groups that can keep students on track to achieve their goals. [Student Recruitment Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_student_recruitment_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your school assess and recruit new students. The agent can answer questions about your school, programs, and admissions processes. The agent can also help students apply to your school.") Help your school assess and recruit new students. The agent can answer questions about your school, programs, and admissions processes. The agent can also help students apply to your school. [Transfer Credit Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Transfer Credit Agent helps prospective students make application decisions by providing estimates on transferable credits right in an agent session. It reduces the response time for evaluations and saves previous estimates to give students continuous access.") Transfer Credit Agent (beta) helps prospective students make application decisions by providing estimates on transferable credits right in an agent session. It reduces the response time for evaluations and saves previous estimates to give students continuous access. # Education Analytics Use CRM Analytics in Education Cloud to create and embed customized dashboards in the app consoles for directors, recruiters, reviewers, admissions officers, and advisors. Education Analytics works seamlessly with existing Education Cloud features, enabling institutions to improve processes and learner metrics. Analytics dashboards and institutional key performance indicators (KPIs) provide insights into recruitment, admissions, learner engagement, and student success.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
You can create, customize, and embed dashboards in your app console pages by using Lightning App Builder. - **[Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators. - **[Admissions Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_admissions_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Admissions Insights dashboard provides admission officers insights to monitor the overall health of the admissions pipeline and analyze the application distribution based on stages, programs, and academic year to strategize the engagement plan. - **[Recruitment Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_recruitment_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Recruitment Insights dashboard provides recruiters insights into the candidate recruitment pipeline and the status of RFIs to analyze recruitment status, prioritize prospects, and schedule appointments effectively. - **[Admissions and Recruitment Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_admissions_and_recruitment_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Admissions and Recruitment Insights dashboard provides directors with an overall summary of the current recruitment and admission pipeline to plan activities and improve the efficiency of recruitment and the admission process. - **[Director Insights for Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_director_insights_for_student_success.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Director Insights dashboard provides insights to monitor the activities and efficiency of advisors and improve institutional-level student performance annually. Use the dashboard to analyze the total enrollments in the advisor service, the advisor and student ratio, the overall utilization rate and cancellation rate of advisor appointments, and to identify the top-performing advisors. - **[Advisor Insights for Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advisor_insights_for_student_success.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Advisor Insights dashboard provides insights to monitor student care plan programs, alerts, and advisor appointments. Use the dashboard to analyze the care plans that need immediate attention and assess the utilization rate of advisor appointments. - **[Learning Programs and Course Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learning_programs_and_course_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Learning Programs and Course Insights dashboard to gain insights into the efficiency of an institution's learning programs, application processes, and faculty management. - **[Alumni Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Alumni Insights dashboard provides alumni coordinators or managers insights to monitor the overall health of the alumni program and to identify opportunities for engagement. # Education Cloud Education Cloud connects institutions across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so that your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners — from prospective student to engaged alum. - **[Learn About Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learn_about_education_cloud_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Drive learner and institution success with Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_education_cloud_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the guided setup to turn on Education Cloud for your org, and then configure apps and features. Make sure that you assign the Education Cloud Full Access permission set to yourself, as the admin. - **[Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect, organize, and unify large volumes of disparate student data and educational data by using the power of Data 360. Then use that data to deliver insights across the complete educational journey of a learner from prospect to engaged alumnus. - **[Automate Academic Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_academic_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use flows to automate your academic processes such as creating and assigning cases, or automate the application review process. - **[Model Your Data in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_institution_in_education_cloud_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution. - **[Extend Education Cloud with Common Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_extend_education_cloud_with_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accomplish common education tasks with the features available for use in Education Cloud. - **[Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_ai_agents_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the power of generative AI to drive more personalized communication with prospective, current, and former students. AI agents streamline education processes and help your team work more efficiently. - **[Slack for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_slack_for_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn Education data and workflows across the learner lifecycle into real-time collaboration in Slack. Faculty, students, and staff can engage with timely, relevant data and AI-driven automation directly in their everyday workspace. This integration reduces administrative burden and helps your institution act faster to enhance student success. - **[Recruitment and Admissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_recruit_students_to_your_institution_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides learners with a seamless experience from application to enrollment, while enabling staff to efficiently orchestrate the admissions process. - **[Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_academic_operations_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create courses and programs, define learning outcomes, build program plans, and manage academic schedules. - **[Student Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give staff and faculty quick access to important student information. In a single, accessible view, include emergency contacts, relationships, student contact information, and enrollment data in student records. Add a relationship graph to convey students’ relationships to households. Assign access to advisors, registrars, and faculty. - **[Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_support_student_success_in_your_institution_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud to help your learners achieve their academic objectives. - **[Delegated Access Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_consent_management_and_delegated_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With delegated access management, you can assign proxies and delegate scoped, time-bound access to your information. You decide who acts on your behalf, what access you delegate, and when that access starts and ends. - **[Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bridge the gap between students and their financial accounts by setting up your fee management framework in Education Cloud. Load tuition and fees for each academic interval and apply fees to learning programs and courses. Additionally, you can incorporate the Students Financials agent to help students view their account balances, get a detailed breakdown of their fees, and obtain more information about a given fee. - **[Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_mentoring_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define and manage mentoring support programs with related benefits. - **[Alumni and Advancement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_engage_with_alumni_from_your_institution_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud helps your institution and its alumni stay connected, while giving advancement teams a centralized location to manage relationships, drive engagement, and grow fundraising. - **[Appointment Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_appointments_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides a central self-service system for managing appointments. Learners have visibility over your staff's availability in any department, based on their configured location and appointment channels. They can view and schedule appointments, and if you set up the virtual appointments feature, they can also join virtually. Your staff can also schedule appointments on behalf of learners from their records. Unifying all departments on a single scheduling tool increases your learners' ability to use all of your services. - **[Education Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_understand_education_analytics_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use CRM Analytics in Education Cloud to create and embed customized dashboards in the app consoles for directors, recruiters, reviewers, admissions officers, and advisors. Education Analytics works seamlessly with existing Education Cloud features, enabling institutions to improve processes and learner metrics. Analytics dashboards and institutional key performance indicators (KPIs) provide insights into recruitment, admissions, learner engagement, and student success. - **[Tableau Next for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_tableau_next_for_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tableau Next for Education unifies data by using the Data 360 semantic layer and Agentforce AI for context to deliver personalized and actionable insights. Education Intelligence is a data-driven solution that bundles semantic data models and academic metrics. Use this solution to track the learner lifecycle and determine how your programs meet learners' needs. The combination of academic data, key performance indicators (KPIs), and AI help your institution measure programmatic effectiveness and enhance student success. - **[Data Migration to Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_migrate_your_data_to_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to use the Data Migration Kit to move your data from Admissions Connect, Student Success Hub, and Education Data Architecture (EDA) to Education Cloud. Understand the considerations to be made, and get insights to plan your migration to Education Cloud. # Education Cloud and Translation Salesforce provides translations for Education Cloud in multiple languages.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Translate Your Education Cloud Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create translated values for fields on applications so that applicants see content in their preferred language. The system displays translated values based on each user's locale setting. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Education Cloud. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Education Cloud product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Education Cloud."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Education Cloud.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Education Cloud. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Education Cloud objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Education Cloud See [Salesforce Language Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.faq_getstart_language_support.htm&type=5). ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Education Cloud - [Chinese (Simplified)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_zh_cn.pdf) - [Chinese (Traditional)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_zh_tw.pdf) - [Danish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_da_dk.pdf) - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_nl_nl.pdf) - [Finnish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_fi_fi.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_de_de.pdf) - [Italian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_it_it.pdf) - [Japanese](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_ja_jp.pdf) - [Korean](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_ko_kr.pdf) - [Norwegian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_no_no.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_pt_br.pdf) - [Russian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_ru_ru.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_es_es.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_es_mx.pdf) - [Swedish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/EducationCloud/Education_Cloud_sv_se.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Education Cloud product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Education Cloud: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language (for example, Catalan): 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Education Cloud Data Model Objects Access education-specific data model objects (DMOs) within Data 360 to bring learner data from external learning management, student information, engagement, advancement, and enterprise resource planning systems into Data 360. Then you can harmonize the data to build segments, create calculated insights, and analyze key metrics.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Education Cloud DMOs Fundraising DMOs
  • AcademicCredential
  • AcademicInterest
  • AcademicSession
  • AcademicTarget
  • AcademicTermEnrollment
  • AcademicYear
  • AcadTermEnrlPolicyRuleLog
  • ActionPlan
  • ActionPlanItem
  • ActionPlanTemplate
  • ActionPlanTemplateItem
  • ActionPlanTemplateVersion
  • ActionPlanTemplateAssignment
  • ApplicationDecision
  • ApplicationRecommender
  • ApplicationTask
  • ApplicationTaskItem
  • Assessment
  • AssessmentQuestion
  • AssessmentQuestionSet
  • AssessmentQuestionAssignment
  • AssessmentQuestionResponse
  • AssessmentQuestionVersion
  • AttendanceEntry
  • AttendancePolicy
  • AttendancePolicySourceType
  • AttendanceRecording
  • AttendanceSourceData
  • AttendanceSourceType
  • CaseTeamParticipantProgram
  • Competency
  • CompetencyRelatedObject
  • ConstituentRole
  • ContactRequest
  • CourseCreditTransferAppln
  • CourseOfferingParticipant
  • CourseOfferingParticipantResult
  • CourseOfferingRelationship
  • CourseOfferingRgstrTimeline
  • CourseOfferingScheduleTmpl
  • CourseOfrPtcpActvtyGrd
  • CourseOfrgRubricCriterion
  • EducationalInfoRequest
  • EducInstitutionOffering
  • EducInstSearchableProfile
  • ExternalLearning
  • ExternalLearningPtcpResult
  • ExtlPtcpRsltLrnrPgmRqmt
  • InvolvementGroup
  • InvolvementGroupMember
  • LearnerCampusSpacesActivity
  • LearningEquivalency
  • LearningEqvAchvMapping
  • LearnerLearningSystemActivity
  • LearnerPathway
  • LearnerPathwayItem
  • LearnerProgram
  • LearnerProgramRequirement
  • LearnerProgramRqmtProgress
  • Learning
  • LearningAchievement
  • LearningAchievementConfig
  • LearningCourse
  • LearningFoundationItem
  • LearningOutcomeItem
  • LearningPathwayTemplate
  • LearningPathwayTemplateItem
  • LearningPathwayTmplPgmPlan
  • LearningProgram
  • LearningProgramPlan
  • LearningProgramPlanRqmt
  • MealCardActivityId
  • MentoringProfile
  • PartyPartyRelationship
  • PersonAcademicCredential
  • PersonAffinity
  • PersonDisability
  • PersonPublicProfile
  • PersonPublicProfilePrefSet
  • PersonTrait
  • PetitionableOutcome
  • PetitionType
  • ProgramTermApplicationTimeline
  • ProviderOffering
  • SearchResource
  • SuccessTeam
  • WatchlistedLearner
  • WorkTypeGroupRole
  • DocGenerationQueryResult
  • DonorGiftConcept
  • DonorGiftConceptOpportunity
  • DonorGiftSummary
  • GiftActuarialEntry
  • GiftAgreement
  • GiftBatch
  • GiftCommitment
  • GiftCmtChangeAttrLog
  • GiftCommitmentSchedule
  • GiftDefaultDesignation
  • GiftDesignation
  • GiftEntry
  • GiftRefund
  • GiftSoftCredit
  • GiftStewardship
  • GiftStewardshipActivity
  • GiftTransaction
  • GiftTransactionDesignation
  • GiftTribute
  • GiftValueForecast
  • OutreachSourceCode
  • OutreachSummary
  • PartyCategory
  • PartyPhilanthropicAssessment
  • PartyPhilanthropicIndicator
  • PartyPhilanthropicMilestone
  • PartyPhilanthropicOccurrence
  • PartyPhilanthropicRsrchPrfl
  • PaymentInstrument
  • PlannedGift
  • PlannedGiftAnnuityRate
  • PlannedGiftPerformance
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To use Data Governance features, grant permissions to the listed objects according to [Assign Data Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_dc_access.htm&language=en_US). If you have more than one data space, you must grant access to objects in each data space. Object names in non default data spaces follow the convention of \_. After you import your education data into Data 360, map the data to the required DMOs before you use the data for segmentation, activation, analytics, or any other operation. To get started with data mapping, add a connected data source to Data 360. After you connect a source, Data 360 accesses the source so that you can create mapping sets between the objects and fields within it and Data 360. To see a list of all data model objects in Data 360's standard model, see [Standard Data Model Objects (DMOs)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.c360a_api.meta/c360a_api/c360dm_datamodelobjects.htm). # Education Cloud Editions and Permissions Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- [User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Editions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Required Education Cloud Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Customizing Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) ## User Interface Education Cloud is available in Lightning Experience. ## Editions Education Cloud is available in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions. ## Required Education Cloud Permissions Review the Education Cloud permission sets for specific roles in your institution. | Permission Set Licenses | Description | Who Needs It? | | --- | --- | --- | | Education Cloud - Full Access | Gives users access to all Education objects and components. | Staff members in your institution responsible for recruiting, admissions, and student success. | | Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User | Gives Experience Cloud users access to the Education elements that they need to interact with your institution. | Users who interact with your institution through an Experience Cloud site. For example, applicants to your institution, people applying on behalf of a prospect, or enrolled students scheduling interviews. | | Education Cloud - Limited Access | Gives users access to the Education objects and components required for student advisory and application review use cases. Contact your Salesforce account executive for details. | Users who only need access to certain objects and records to complete their work, such as reviewing applications to your institution or advising students. | | Education Cloud - Guest Access | Gives authenticated users access to a set of Education objects. | Unauthenticated users who interact with your institution through an Experience Cloud site. For example, prospective applicants browsing program offerings and campus and school location information, or enrolled students browsing the course catalog. | | Education Cloud AI Agent Access | Gives internal AI agent users access to Education objects. | Assign this permission set to internal AI agent users so they can execute actions on Education objects. | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important For AI agent users to query Education Cloud objects, apply the Access Education Cloud Objects system permission in the Education Cloud AI Agent Access permission set license. If you purchased Education Cloud for Academic Operations, there are additional permission sets. See [Advanced Academic Operations Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). ## Customizing Permissions If you customize Education Cloud, such as adding fields, create a custom permission set. To remove user permissions from the default permission set, create a muting permission set. Then, use permission set groups to assign users the Education Cloud permission set in addition to your custom permission sets. This approach is an alternative to cloning permission sets and makes sure that users always have the latest default permissions. See Also: - [Assign and Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Manage Muting Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups_muting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Education Cloud Full Access Permission Set License For clarity and consistency with the other permission set licenses, we've changed the name for the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set license to Education Cloud Full Access. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **How**: See the new permission set license name in Setup under Company Information. # Education Cloud Limited Access Permission Set License As of July 2023, you can provide your users access to the features that they need by using the new standard permission set, Education Cloud Limited Access. This permission set grants wider access to Education Cloud features than Education Cloud Reviewer. For clarity, consistency, and to accommodate additional use cases, the Education Cloud Reviewer license is now Education Cloud Limited Access. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **How**: Look for the new permission set license in Setup under Company Information. Find the new permission set in Setup under Permission Sets. The Education Cloud Limited Access license has two permission sets that can be assigned to users. Education Cloud Reviewer Gives users access to Education Cloud application review features. Education Cloud Limited Access Combines access to objects and features required for Student Success use cases with the permissions included in Education Cloud Reviewer. ## See Also: Salesforce Help: [Manage Education Cloud Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_manage_education_cloud_users.htm) # Education Cloud Org Configuration with AI Tools A guided session sets up a foundation for your Education Cloud org. Describe your institution's goals to a coding agent. The agent analyzes your org and turns on domain features that meet your priorities, such as Student Success, Academic Operations, or Recruitment and Admissions. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Scenario A Salesforce admin at your institution wants to lay a foundation for Education Cloud teams by turning on the right domains and dependent features. To accomplish that without navigating multiple complex setup steps manually, the admin connects a coding agent to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) and describes the institution's priorities. The coding agent evaluates org settings, explains features, and turns on the selected domains with admin approval. It then lists any remaining manual setup steps. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. For more information, see [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). ## Requirements - Education Cloud Full Access permission set. The agent checks for and assigns the required permission sets based on your privileges, so it never grants access that you don't have. - A coding agent, such as Agentforce Vibes or Claude Code, connected to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) with access to Education Cloud setup skills. For Agentforce Vibes, no installation is required. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. You can manage them from the Skills page, under Toolkit, in Agentforce Vibes. For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. ## Suggested Technology and Experience Recommended for Salesforce admins who are comfortable with Setup and with running a coding agent against a connected org. No prior experience with a specific skill is required. ## Related Documentation - [Set Up Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_education_cloud_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the guided setup to turn on Education Cloud for your org, and then configure apps and features. Make sure that you assign the Education Cloud Full Access permission set to yourself, as the admin.") - [Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide) - [Salesforce Development Plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) - [Get Started with Agentforce Vibes](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/agentforcevibes/guide/afv-get-started.html) ## Agentic Tips - Describe your goal in your own words. For example: - "Set up Education Cloud for our student success team." - "I want to configure Recruitment and Admissions and Academic Operations for our college." - "What Education Cloud features do I need to support advising and care plans?" - Have the agent explain before it acts. The agent describes what each feature does and lists a domain's sub-features. You decide which to include before anything changes. - Approve each change. The agent pauses for your confirmation before configuring a feature. Read operations require no approval, but setup and configuration do. - Avoid pasting credentials into a prompt. The agent acts as your authenticated user through the connected org. ## Design Considerations - Some actions are irreversible. For example, when you turn on the Education Cloud foundation, Person Accounts, and domains, they can't be turned off. The agent alerts you before each of these steps and turns them on only after you confirm. - Person Accounts requires manual setup. The agent tells you when to perform this step in Setup and verifies it afterward. - Some dependent features require manual configuration. The agent configures automated features and lists any manual follow-up tasks in the summary. - The agent configures native Education Cloud features. It doesn't create custom objects or fields, deploy packages, or migrate data. ## Set Up Agentforce Education with a Coding Agent Describe your institution's priorities to a coding agent to turn on the right Education Cloud domains and features. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To run setup skills through a coding agent: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. Before you start: - [Set up your org](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/setup-overview.html) for the Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers, including an External Client App with the `mcp_api` scope. - Activate the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). - [Connect your coding agents.](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/client-connection-overview.html) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. Then, configure Agentforce Education. 1. Describe which domains or capabilities you want to set up. 2. Review the report as the agent checks your org's edition, license, and current settings. 3. Approve turning on the Education Cloud foundation, and confirm any irreversible steps when prompted. 4. When prompted by the agent, turn on Person Accounts in Setup, and then have the agent verify the change. 5. Select which domains and dependent features to turn on from the agent's list. 6. Approve each feature and verify the confirmation. 7. Complete any manual follow-up steps reported in the agent's summary. # Education Cloud Release Notes Spring ‘23 brings you the next-generation CRM for education. Education Cloud draws on the power of Salesforce to connect insights across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners—from prospective student to engaged alum. With Salesforce at the center of your institution's information technology solution, important tasks can be completed in less time, at scale, and in collaboration between departments. Create an Experience Cloud site to be your institution's learner portal where students start their higher education journey. From this site, prospective students can request information, schedule appointments, and apply to your institution. After a student submits their application, your admissions staff can verify, review, and decide on the application in the individual application record. - **[Learner Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_learner_portal_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to brand your learner portal, and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes to provide an enhanced student experience. Students can use the portal to apply to programs, track and manage their applications, raise requests for information, and more. You can use the Education Applicant Portal template, or build one from scratch. - **[Request for Information and Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_request_for_information_and_response_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prospective students can connect with your staff and inquire about programs and services through your institution's Experience Cloud site. - **[Application Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_application_form_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides an Experience Cloud Site template for you to use for your institution. The template includes a customizable application form created with OmniStudio that prospective students can use to apply to your institution. - **[Application Intake and Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_application_intake_and_processing_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a prospective student submits an application to your institution, the application goes through the review and approval process. Conduct and manage the process of verifying, reviewing, and deciding on applications all in one place. - **[Recruiting and Admissions Consoles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_recruiting_and_admissions_consoles_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud consoles give users a central place to focus on application reviews, see critical tasks, and take important next steps. When an admissions director or officer, recruiter, or reviewer opens the Recruitment & Admissions app, they arrive on a home page that's designed for their role and license type. - **[Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_appointment_scheduling_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide a central self-service system for managing appointments. Learners have visibility over your staff's availability in any department, based on their configured topics and appointment channels. They can view and schedule appointments, and even join virtually if you set up that feature. Your staff can also schedule appointments on behalf of learners from their records. Unifying all departments on a single scheduling tool increases your learners' ability to use all of your services. - **[New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_new_changed_objects_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects. # Education Cloud Release Notes Summer '23 expands Education Cloud to include features that support student success and streamline your institution's admissions processes for your staff and learners. Save time on manual tasks with automatic success team assignments and program management. Follow your learners' journey with a unified record view and dedicated director and advisor consoles. Cultivate your learners' success by tracking any roadblocks they encounter with care plans and alerts. Increase student engagement with new mobile-ready Student Success portal components, which give enrolled students access to all relevant information such as their advisors' drop-in availability. And with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education, connect more efficiently with your learners by using out-of-the box email templates. - **[Tailor User Access to Education Cloud Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_tailor_user_access_to_education_cloud_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide your users access to the features that they need by using the new standard permission set, Education Cloud Limited Access. This permission set grants wider access to Education Cloud features than Education Cloud Reviewer. For clarity, consistency, and to accommodate additional use cases, the Education Cloud Reviewer license is now Education Cloud Limited Access. - **[Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The new Student Success app provides a central place for your institution to offer proactive and personalized support to learners for academics, sports, health, financial aid, and so on. Get insights from analytics dashboards, view in-depth learner information using the student snapshot component, monitor learner progress and create alerts, design programs and individualized care plans, and assign and manage success teams. When an advisor or a director opens the app, they see a home page with features curated for their role and license type. - **[Student Success Components for Your Learner Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_student_success_components_for_your_learner_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to enhance your institution's learner portal with new mobile-ready Lightning web components for student success. From the learner portal, learners can conveniently schedule and manage appointments, view their assigned success teams and care plans, and manage their tasks. - **[Assist Learners with Program Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Within the Student Success app, your institution can effectively define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey. Directors can model programs with supported benefits, and then schedule and track the benefit disbursements to recipients. - **[Support Learners with Care Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_support_learners_with_care_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Directors and advisors can now create personalized care plans with goals and tasks to help learners achieve their objectives. Use care plan templates to quickly create care plans with frequently used goals or tasks. Use the bulk operation to apply care plans to multiple record alerts at a time. - **[Monitor Learner Performance with Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_monitor_learner_performance_with_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Directors and advisors can now create alerts that notify them about learner performance so that they can offer timely support when required. Use flows to automatically create alerts for multiple learner records. - **[Automate Case Management and Success Team Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_automate_case_management_and_success_team_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Educational institutions provide support to learners in many areas, including financial aid, academic advising, and disability services. Use the flow templates in Education Cloud to automate case creation and closure, and the assignment of success teams to learners. - **[Improve Your Admission Rate by Focusing on Prospective Students Most Likely to Join](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_improve_your_admission_rate_by_focusing_on_prospective_students_most_likely_to_join.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get predictions about the likelihood of a prospective student joining your educational institution based on their current level of engagement with the institution. Share these predictions with your admissions team so that they can focus on the right prospective students and improve your rate of admissions. - **[Automate the Application Review Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_automate_the_application_review_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a prospective student applies to your institution, the application goes through a review and approval process that involves multiple reviewers with different review purposes. Education Cloud provides flow templates to automatically assign the individual application record to the person who's responsible for the next part of the review process. - **[Set Up Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_mcei_ed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Leverage the power of Marketing Cloud Engagement with a prebuilt connector that retrieves up-to-date Education Cloud data for your marketing campaigns. Communicate efficiently with learners with out-of-the box templates to support your recruitment, admissions, and student success activities. Schedule automated emails to remind learners of upcoming application deadlines, or appointment confirmations after they schedule a meeting with your staff. - **[Set Up Drop-In Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_drop_in_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support learners seeking ad-hoc help from your staff by setting up drop-in shifts for in-person appointments. - **[Schedule Appointments on Behalf of Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_schedule_appointments_on_behalf_of_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Staff can schedule appointments on behalf of a learner from the learner's person account record. - **[Manage Appointments with Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_appts_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Beginning Summer '23, Salesforce Scheduler is available within your Salesforce org. Your users are entitled to 12,000 appointments per org per year. In addition to the entitlement per org, Salesforce Scheduler allows 1800 appointments per user license per year for the Enterprise Edition licenses. For Unlimited Edition licenses, the limit increases to 2400 appointments per user license per year. - **[Salesforce Scheduler Add-On License for Additional Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_addl_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accommodate more appointments with Salesforce Scheduler’s add-on license. Salesforce Scheduler Additional Appointments AddOn license offers an added capacity of 12,000 appointments. # Education Cloud Release Notes Support alumni engagement, manage fundraising development activities and processes, strengthen course and learning program management, and give applicants an enhanced application process. Follow your alumni's user journey with a unified record view and a dedicated alumni relations console. Keep alumni engaged and connected with each other and with your institution by using new Alumni Relations portal components to create an alumni directory. Use Fundraising features to track opportunities, manage campaigns, and coordinate fundraising activities. Maintain your course catalog and easily build learning programs by using the intuitive and flexible Learning Program Plan Builder. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[Use Education Cloud for Advancement and Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_use_education_cloud_for_advancement_and_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud for Advancement and Alumni Relations enables alumni relations team members to keep track of alumni to help them stay engaged and invested in their alma mater. Gain insights from analytics dashboards, and monitor achievements, milestones, interests, and more to ensure that the engagement is meaningful to your institution and alumni. When an alumni relations coordinator or manager opens the app, they arrive on a home page with features curated for their role and license type. - **[Gain Insights to Streamline and Enhance Alumni Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_gain_insights_to_streamline_and_enhance_alumni_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Analyze alumni engagement metrics by using the Alumni Engagement Insights dashboard in the Education Analytics app. Get an overview of the alumni community based on total alumni strength, alumni portal users, educational achievements, and employment details. Easily track open cases and alerts as cards to ensure prompt responses to alumni concerns and enhance the overall alumni engagement experience. - **[Engage Alumni on Your Experience Cloud Site with Profile Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_alumni_components_for_your_experience_cloud_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance your Experience Cloud site with new Lightning web components for alumni engagement. With the components, alumni users can create a profile and add it to an alumni directory where they can connect with other alumni from your institution. Alumni users can upload a photo to their profile, and control the information that appears in the directory. - **[Use Fundraising with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_use_fundraising_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Fundraising with Education Cloud to track opportunities, manage campaigns, and coordinate other fundraising activities. Fundraising is now included with Education Cloud to help streamline those processes. - **[Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education for Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_use_marketing_cloud_engagement_for_education_for_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Efficiently communicate with alumni by using out-of-the-box templates to support your alumni activities. Schedule automated emails to tell alumni about your institution's mission and to welcome them to the alumni portal. - **[Use the Academic Operations App to Manage Learning and Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Learning Wizard in Academic Operations to create courses, programs, and customized learning offerings, define learning requirements and outcomes, and manage academic schedules. Use the Learning Program Builder to represent and organize the components of a well-defined learning plan, including required and elective courses, so that your staff can set up learners for timely degree completion. See a summary of the learner's academic details on the updated account record page. - **[Create Advising Programs for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_enhancements_to_program_management_in_student_success.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use an updated workflow in Student Success to create programs with advising benefits, and associate success teams. Show programs on the learner portal, allowing learners to view details and self-enroll. Use provided flows to automatically create and update benefit disbursements when a learner schedules an appointment. Add assessments to programs to capture learner requirements during enrollment. - **[Enhance Your Learner Portal for Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_program_enrollment_components_for_your_learner_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add new Lightning web components for program enrollment to your Experience Cloud site, including EDUProgramMgmtProgramHome, EDUProgramMgmtProgramOverview and EDUProgramMgmtPgmEnrlRecordPage FlexCards, and new pages for Programs and Assessments. Learners can use them to explore new support programs and to self-enroll, take assessments, and view their submitted responses. - **[Use the Updated Case Record Page to View Advising Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_case_record_page_for_advising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance the case Lightning record page to enable advisors to view advising engagements for the case, add case team members, and schedule appointments. The updated page includes tabs for advising, program enrollments, appointments, tasks, and record alerts, and the Action Launcher component, which provides quick access to frequently used actions. - **[Use Guided Setup to Set Up Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_guided_setup_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Education Cloud quickly and easily with guided setup. Use guided setup to turn on features, install apps, and configure basic settings. - **[Complete Applications Faster and Assign Application Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_enhanced_application_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learners can complete applications more easily now that forms autofill with data that's already stored for an applicant. We're also introducing the Individual Application Task object that you can use to create action plans for applications. - **[Education Cloud Full Access Permission Set License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_education_cloud_full_access_permission_set_license.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For clarity and consistency with the other permission set licenses, we've changed the name for the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set license to Education Cloud Full Access. - **[Education Cloud Limited Access Permission Set License](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_education_cloud_limited_access_permission_set_license.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As of July 2023, you can provide your users access to the features that they need by using the new standard permission set, Education Cloud Limited Access. This permission set grants wider access to Education Cloud features than Education Cloud Reviewer. For clarity, consistency, and to accommodate additional use cases, the Education Cloud Reviewer license is now Education Cloud Limited Access. - **[New and Changed Objects in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_rn_new_and_changed_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects. # Education Cloud Settings Access and manage EDA Settings, activate the latest EDA release, and find helpful resources. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA 1.114 (Summer '21), EDA introduced the Education Cloud Settings page. This is a single location for all settings, tools, and resources that you need to manage your Education Cloud org. - **[Configure Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The steps to configure Education Cloud Settings vary depending on the version of EDA that you started with. ## Overview In EDA 1.114 (Summer '21), EDA introduced the Education Cloud Settings page. This is a single location for all settings, tools, and resources that you need to manage your Education Cloud org. Use Education Cloud Settings to access: - EDA Settings for org-wide administration of the Account model, contact information, Relationships, Affiliations, Courses and Enrollments, Errors, and system tools. - Settings Health Check to identify configuration inconsistencies or errors in EDA Settings and related settings in Setup. - Release Management to review and activate the latest EDA release. - Links to resources such as Trailhead, the Trailblazer Community, and the Salesforce.org YouTube channel. ## Configure Education Cloud Settings The steps to configure Education Cloud Settings vary depending on the version of EDA that you started with. - If you started with a trial org of EDA version 1.114 (Summer '21) or later, you’re ready to use Education Cloud Settings. - If you started with a version of EDA before 1.114, grant Apex class access, create the Education Data Architecture app, which includes configuring the Education Cloud Settings tab. Then, verify access to the app for all profiles and remove access to the previous EDA app. Finally, verify access to tabs for all profiles, especially System Administrator. - If you started with EDA 1.114 or later using the installer, you already have the Education Data Architecture app and the Education Cloud Settings tab. You just need to verify tab access for all profiles requiring it as described in this article. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re using a custom Lightning app instead of the EDA app, enable the Education Cloud Settings tab for that app. ### Before You Begin These changes affect how your users access EDA. Be sure to notify them before implementing them in your production org so they understand how to access EDA. Also be sure that My Domain is enabled in your org by going to Setup, then searching for and selecting **My Domain**. You won’t be able to access Education Cloud Settings if it’s not. To learn more, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. ### Grant Apex Class Access To access the Education Cloud Settings tab, users require access to certain EDA Apex classes. Depending on the EDA version that you started with, the System Administrator profile sometimes already has access, but we recommend verifying access for all profiles that need them, and for permission sets as needed. For a list of the Apex classes, see [Enable EDA Apex Class Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_enable_eda_apex_class_access.htm&type=5). ### Create the Education Data Architecture Lightning App You can only access the Education Cloud Settings tab from a Lightning app, but the EDA app released before version 1.114 was a Classic app. If you started with EDA before 1.114, create the Education Data Architecture Lightning app. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager.** 2. Click **New Lightning App**. 3. For App Name, enter Education Data Architecture and press Tab to automatically populate Developer Name with Education\_Data\_Architecture. Then, click **Next**. 4. Accept the Standard navigation style and Desktop and phone form factors. Don't specify any Utility Items. Then, click **Next**. 5. Specify the items you want to display as tabs in the Education Data Architecture app. Include Home, Accounts, Contacts, Courses, Terms, Course Offerings, Program Plans, Trigger Handlers, and Education Cloud Settings. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Specify profile access to the app. Start by granting access only to the System Administrator profile, so you can verify that the app is working before you make it available to more users. 8. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note As you configure the Education Data Architecture app, make sure that the access you provide to the new app matches what you provided for the earlier EDA app. ### Grant Education Data Architecture App Access After verifying that your Education Data Architecture Lightning app works as desired, add users to it. 1. From Setup, search for and select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Education Data Architecture and select **Edit**. 3. On the User Profiles page, add required profiles to Selected Profiles. 4. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note To make the EDA app a user's default app, specify it in the Custom App Settings of the desired profile. ### Remove EDA App Access Hide EDA, the Classic managed app that predates the Education Data Architecture Lightning app released in EDA 1.114, in the App Launcher. 1. From Setup, search for and select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for EDA and select **Edit**. 3. In Assign to Profiles, deselect Visible for all profiles. 4. Save your changes. ### Verify Tab Access If you started with a version of EDA 1.114 or earlier using the installer, verify that all profiles have access to the tabs that they need. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note The steps to verify tab access depend on whether you've enabled the Enhanced User Profile Interface in the User Management Settings. For details, see [Enable the Enhanced Profile User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_about_enhanced_ui.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If you've disabled Enhanced User Profile Interface: 1. From Setup, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile name, such as **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In Custom Tab Settings, verify the settings for the selected profile. For example, for the System Administrator profile, verify that Education Cloud Settings is set to **Default On** and that EDA Settings is set to **Hidden**. 5. Save your changes. If you've enabled Enhanced User Profile Interface: 1. From Setup, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile name, such as **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Education Cloud Settings**, and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Tab Settings, select **Default On** and save your changes. 6. Click **Object Settings**. 7. Click **EDA Settings**, and then click **Edit**. 8. Under EDA Settings, select **Tab Hidden** and save your changes. # Education Cloud Settings Access and manage EDA Settings, activate the latest EDA release, and find helpful resources. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In EDA 1.114 (Summer '21), EDA introduced the Education Cloud Settings page. This is a single location for all settings, tools, and resources that you need to manage your Education Cloud org. - **[Configure Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_cloud_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The steps to configure Education Cloud Settings vary depending on the version of EDA that you started with. ## Overview In EDA 1.114 (Summer '21), EDA introduced the Education Cloud Settings page. This is a single location for all settings, tools, and resources that you need to manage your Education Cloud org. Use Education Cloud Settings to access: - EDA Settings for org-wide administration of the Account model, contact information, Relationships, Affiliations, Courses and Enrollments, Errors, and system tools. - Settings Health Check to identify configuration inconsistencies or errors in EDA Settings and related settings in Setup. - Release Management to review and activate the latest EDA release. - Links to resources such as Trailhead, the Trailblazer Community, and the Salesforce.org YouTube channel. ## Configure Education Cloud Settings The steps to configure Education Cloud Settings vary depending on the version of EDA that you started with. - If you started with a trial org of EDA version 1.114 (Summer '21) or later, you’re ready to use Education Cloud Settings. - If you started with a version of EDA before 1.114, grant Apex class access, create the Education Data Architecture app, which includes configuring the Education Cloud Settings tab. Then, verify access to the app for all profiles and remove access to the previous EDA app. Finally, verify access to tabs for all profiles, especially System Administrator. - If you started with EDA 1.114 or later using the installer, you already have the Education Data Architecture app and the Education Cloud Settings tab. You just need to verify tab access for all profiles requiring it as described in this article. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re using a custom Lightning app instead of the EDA app, enable the Education Cloud Settings tab for that app. ### Before You Begin These changes affect how your users access EDA. Be sure to notify them before implementing them in your production org so they understand how to access EDA. Also be sure that My Domain is enabled in your org by going to Setup, then searching for and selecting **My Domain**. You won’t be able to access Education Cloud Settings if it’s not. To learn more, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. ### Grant Apex Class Access To access the Education Cloud Settings tab, users require access to certain EDA Apex classes. Depending on the EDA version that you started with, the System Administrator profile sometimes already has access, but we recommend verifying access for all profiles that need them, and for permission sets as needed. For a list of the Apex classes, see [Enable EDA Apex Class Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_enable_eda_apex_class_access.htm&type=5). ### Create the Education Data Architecture Lightning App You can only access the Education Cloud Settings tab from a Lightning app, but the EDA app released before version 1.114 was a Classic app. If you started with EDA before 1.114, create the Education Data Architecture Lightning app. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager.** 2. Click **New Lightning App**. 3. For App Name, enter Education Data Architecture and press Tab to automatically populate Developer Name with Education\_Data\_Architecture. Then, click **Next**. 4. Accept the Standard navigation style and Desktop and phone form factors. Don't specify any Utility Items. Then, click **Next**. 5. Specify the items you want to display as tabs in the Education Data Architecture app. Include Home, Accounts, Contacts, Courses, Terms, Course Offerings, Program Plans, Trigger Handlers, and Education Cloud Settings. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Specify profile access to the app. Start by granting access only to the System Administrator profile, so you can verify that the app is working before you make it available to more users. 8. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note As you configure the Education Data Architecture app, make sure that the access you provide to the new app matches what you provided for the earlier EDA app. ### Grant Education Data Architecture App Access After verifying that your Education Data Architecture Lightning app works as desired, add users to it. 1. From Setup, search for and select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Education Data Architecture and select **Edit**. 3. On the User Profiles page, add required profiles to Selected Profiles. 4. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note To make the EDA app a user's default app, specify it in the Custom App Settings of the desired profile. ### Remove EDA App Access Hide EDA, the Classic managed app that predates the Education Data Architecture Lightning app released in EDA 1.114, in the App Launcher. 1. From Setup, search for and select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for EDA and select **Edit**. 3. In Assign to Profiles, deselect Visible for all profiles. 4. Save your changes. ### Verify Tab Access If you started with a version of EDA 1.114 or earlier using the installer, verify that all profiles have access to the tabs that they need. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note The steps to verify tab access depend on whether you've enabled the Enhanced User Profile Interface in the User Management Settings. For details, see [Enable the Enhanced Profile User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_about_enhanced_ui.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If you've disabled Enhanced User Profile Interface: 1. From Setup, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile name, such as **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In Custom Tab Settings, verify the settings for the selected profile. For example, for the System Administrator profile, verify that Education Cloud Settings is set to **Default On** and that EDA Settings is set to **Hidden**. 5. Save your changes. If you've enabled Enhanced User Profile Interface: 1. From Setup, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile name, such as **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Education Cloud Settings**, and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Tab Settings, select **Default On** and save your changes. 6. Click **Object Settings**. 7. Click **EDA Settings**, and then click **Edit**. 8. Under EDA Settings, select **Tab Hidden** and save your changes. # Education Data Architecture Documentation Education Data Architecture (EDA) is a community-driven data architecture designed to help educational institutions use Salesforce. - **[Get Started with EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about EDA, including EDA limitations and extension options, the EDA entity relationship diagram, and EDA objects and fields. - **[Get Oriented to the EDA Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_get_data_model_oriented.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the typical EDA data model for your institution. - **[Install EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install EDA, including prerequisites, compatibility restrictions, and the packages installed. - **[Set Up Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the permissions in your org to give every user at your institution the right level of access. - **[Configure EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configurations and customizations for EDA. - **[Add Your School's Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_add_your_schools_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to migrate your school's data, import it in a recommended sequence, and prevent "Duplicates Detected" errors in EDA. - **[EDA Object Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** List of EDA objects and their descriptions. - **[Reporting and Analytics in EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_reporting_analytics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how Education Data Architecture provides insight and analysis for every stage of the student life cycle. - **[Configure EDA Data Automation with TDTM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_data_automation_tdtm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Table-Driven Trigger Management to manage your code and automate complex processes. - **[Ongoing Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_ongoing_administration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep up with releases, find the release version, set up new features, review custom settings and run settings health check, learn about feature telemetry, and uninstall EDA. - **[Salesforce Configuration Basics for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_salesforce_configuration_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Show new custom objects, create custom picklist values, add a lookup field, and use related lists and clone layouts to preserve your changes for EDA. - **[EDA Integration Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_integration_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reference to software requirements specification. - **[EDA Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** GDPR compliance resources for EDA. - **[For Developers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_for_developers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Education Data Architecture (EDA) is an open source, BSD-licensed package. # Education Data Architecture Objects and Fields This document provides descriptions of Education Data Architecture objects and fields. View [EDA Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/ZwCuATuQHw18), your source for all current field and object descriptions (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note To evaluate the field and object descriptions we updated in Summer ‘20 to see if you'd like to adopt them in your existing org, check out the [EDA Field and Object Description Change Log](https://salesforce.quip.com/FLKMAiKBecZf). # Education Data Architecture Release Notes Learn what's in Education Data Architecture (version 1.121) in Spring '23. ## Changes Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Education Data Architecture (version 1.121) in Spring '23. - We fixed a bug that caused an unexpected null pointer exception to occur when applying filters to TDTM Trigger Handlers. - We fixed a bug that prevented Program Enrollment records from being automatically created when non-English language users created Affiliated Account records on a Contact. # Education Data Architecture Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Fixes and Other Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Guidance Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built new EDA specific guidance so that admins of EDA orgs can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. ### Fixes and Other Enhancements Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - We changed the default affiliation mappings from English field labels to field API names in the installer script. - We added Feature Telemetry to track Accounts Without Contacts, Affiliations, Application Window Validation, Error Notifications, Program Enrollment, and Seasonal Address. Read more about EDA Telemetry here: [EDA Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_eda_feature_telemetry.htm). - We fixed a bug that caused the error message for insufficient permissions in EDA Settings to appear in the center of the page. - We fixed a bug that prevented EDA users from merging records in Contact and Account without having to disable DoNotDelete custom settings. - In Education History, to avoid confusion with other object names, we've changed the name of the **Credential Details** section to **Diploma, Degree, Certification Details**. Existing customers will need to update their Education History page layouts to get this change. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm) . - We fixed a bug that required users to manually refresh the Education Cloud Settings page to see the latest unmapped record types when creating new auto enrollment program mappings. ### Guidance Center If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built new EDA specific guidance so that admins of EDA orgs can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. Learn more about [Guidance Center](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/guidance-center-quick-look). ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dl9wqaq&title=list-index-out-of-bounds-error-is-thrown-when-updating-primary-faculty-on-2-course-offerings-in-the-same-transaction): List index out of bounds error is thrown when updating primary faculty on two course offerings in the same transaction. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dl9mqaq&title=error-notifier-no-limit-on-error-soql-query-can-result-in-50-000-row-limit-or-heap-size-errors): Error Notifier: No LIMIT on Error SOQL Query Can Result In 50,000 Row Limit or Heap Size Errors. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dl9rqaq): We fixed a typo for the word "Military" in the description and help text of the Military Background custom field on Contact. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000000xyrbqay): Unable to edit accounts when using any language other than English. ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Permission Set (unpackaged)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new unpackaged permission set in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Apex Class](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Apex classes in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. ### Permission Set (unpackaged) Learn about the new unpackaged permission set in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - Internal\_Only\_for\_Testing ### Apex Class Learn about the new Apex classes in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - EDASpring22ReleaseGate.cls - EDASpring22ReleaseGate\_TEST.cls # Education Data Kit Populate your Data 360 implementation with the Education data kit. The data kit packages Data 360 components, such as data streams and calculated insights, and helps you deploy the components in your org. Use the components to import learner data into Data 360, fuel actionable insights, and power custom applications across the learner lifecycle.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Data 360
User Permissions Needed  
To view Education data kit:

Education Cloud Full Access
## Bundles The Education data kit provides prebuilt mappings to key Education Cloud data model objects (DMOs) in six bundles. To access custom fields in a data kit bundle, create these custom fields on the corresponding DMOs and then map them manually. See [Data Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_mapping.htm&type=5&language=en_US).
Bundle Mapped Objects
Education Cloud
  • AcademicCredential
  • Account
  • ConstituentRole
  • Contact
  • ContactProfile
  • ContactRequest
  • IndividualApplication
  • Learning
  • LearningAchievement
  • LearningCourse
  • LearningFoundationItem
  • LearningOutcomeItem
  • LearningPathwayTemplate
  • LearningPathwayTemplateItem
  • LearningPathwayTmplPgmPlan
  • LearningProgram
  • LearningProgramPlan
  • LearningProgramPlanRqmt
  • ProgramTermApplnTimeline
Academic Operations
  • AcademicSession
  • AcademicTerm
  • AcademicTermEnrollment
  • AcademicTermRegstrnTimeline
  • AcademicYear
  • AttendanceEntry
  • AttendancePolicy
  • AttendancePolicySourceType
  • AttendanceRecording
  • AttendanceSourceData
  • AttendanceSourceType
  • CourseOffering
  • CourseOfferingSchedule
  • CourseOfferingScheduleTmpl
  • LearningEquivalency
  • LearningEqvAchvMapping
  • Location
  • PersonAcademicCredential
  • Regulation
  • RegulationClause
  • RegulationClauseVersion
  • RegulatoryAuthority
  • RegulatoryCode
  • RegulatoryCodeViolation
  • RgltyCodeRegClauseVer
  • RgltyCodeViolRegClVer
Alumni Engagement
  • Account
  • Assessment
  • AssessmentEnvelope
  • AssessmentEnvelopeItem
  • AssessmentQuestion
  • AssessmentQuestionAssignment
  • AssessmentQuestionResponse
  • AssessmentQuestionSet
  • AssessmentQuestionVersion
  • AssessmentSignature
  • Benefit
  • BenefitAssignment
  • BenefitDisbursement
  • BenefitSchedule
  • BenefitScheduleAssignment
  • BenefitSession
  • BenefitType
  • Contact
  • GiftTransaction
  • MentoringProfile
  • PersonPublicProfile
  • PersonPublicProfilePrefSet
  • Program
  • ProgramEnrollment
  • ProviderOffering
Fundraising
  • Account
  • Campaign
  • DonorGiftSummary
  • GiftCommitment
  • GiftCmtChangeAttrLog
  • GiftCommitmentSchedule
  • GiftDefaultDesignation
  • Gift Designation
  • GiftRefund
  • GiftSoftCredit
  • GiftTransactionDesignation
  • GiftTransaction
  • GiftTribute
  • Opportunity
  • OutreachSourceCode
  • OutreachSummary
  • PartyPhilanthropicAssessment
  • PartyPhilanthropicIndicator
  • PartyPhilanthropicMilestone
  • PartyPhilanthropicOccurrence
Recruiting and Admissions
  • AcademicInterest
  • AcademicTarget
  • ApplicationDecision
  • ApplicationRecommendation
  • ApplicationRecommender
  • ApplicationReview
  • ApplicationTimeline
  • CourseCreditTransferAppln
  • CourseOfferingRelationship
  • EducInstitutionOffering
  • EducInstSearchableProfile
  • ExternalLearning
  • IndividualApplication
  • IndividualApplicationTask
  • IndividualApplicationTaskItem
  • Lead
  • PreliminaryApplicationRef
  • ProgramTermApplnTimeline
Student Success
  • Case
  • CaseTeamMemberProgram
  • Competency
  • CompetencyRelatedObject
  • CourseOfferingParticipant
  • CourseOfferingPtcpResult
  • CourseOfrPtcpActvtyGrd
  • CourseOfrgRubricCriterion
  • EducationalInfoRequest
  • InvolvementGroup
  • InvolvementGroupMember
  • LearnerPathway
  • LearnerPathwayItem
  • LearnerProfile
  • LearnerProgram
  • LearnerProgramRequirement
  • LearnerProgramRqmtProgress
  • Opportunity
  • PersonAffinity
  • PersonDisability
  • PersonEducation
  • PersonEmployment
  • PersonExamination
  • PersonLanguage
  • PersonTrait
  • SuccessTeam
  • WatchlistedLearner
## Calculated Insights The Education data kit also provides calculated insights out-of-the-box to help you understand learner behavior.
Bundle Calculated insights
Education Cloud
  • Education Application with Academic Term
  • HESA Academic Term Enrl Learning Program
  • HESA Course Prerequisite
  • HESA Student Language
  • HESA Student Language Unified Individual
Alumni Engagement
  • Comprehensive Engagements
  • Comprehensive with Unified Individual
  • Philanthropic Status
  • Status of Giving
Student Success Student Course Percentage Calculator
## Identity Resolution The Education data kit contains an identity resolution ruleset, which includes match and reconciliation rules that link multiple sources of data into a unified profile.
Bundle Calculated insights
Alumni Engagement

EDU Alumni Identity Resolution Ruleset
- **[Deploy an Education Data Kit Data Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_deploy_an_education_data_kit_data_stream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Deploy an Education data kit data stream to collect data from Education Cloud and store it in Data 360. - **[Enable Calculated Insights for the Education Data Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_enable_calculated_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the calculated insights that come with the Education data kit, create and activate the calculated insights from the installed data kit in Data 360. A calculated insight is a multidimensional metric that you can analyze and use to build segments. # Education Data Sources in Data 360 To ingest education data into Data 360, connect your external data source to Data 360.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Educational data comes from multiple institutional systems. Student information systems contain the details of profile information, course registrations, fee payments, attendance records, and grades. Learning management systems contain the details of profile information, login credentials, usage patterns, interactions, and assessments. Enterprise resource planning systems contain financial records and the details of tuition and fees, financial aid, billing, and financial holds. Institutions also use data from internal systems that include data on housing, dining, event registration, and many other campus services. There are various prebuilt connectors to bring external data into Data Cloud. Review Data 360 documentation and complete the steps to set up and ingest your education data. - [Ingestion API](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-ingestion-api.html) - [Data Source Configuration in Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_connection_tasks.htm&language=en_US) - [Connect Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_ingestion.htm&language=en_US) - [MuleSoft Anypoint Connector for Salesforce Data Cloud](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-int/guide/c360-a-mulesoft.html) # Education History Education History stores information about a Contact's education history and related data. - **[Sample Uses for Education History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understanding a student's previous educational experience plays an important role in the recruiting and admissions process, but also has other uses. - **[Configure Education History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create an Education History Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an education history record from the Education History object or from the Education Histories related list on a contact record. ## Sample Uses for Education History Understanding a student's previous educational experience plays an important role in the recruiting and admissions process, but also has other uses. - University—Track alumni historical data for targeted mentorship or donation programs. - K-12—Track the time a student’s spent at other schools. - Any educational institution—Track a student’s educational history to help guide their educational decisions. ## Configure Education History Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118 1.22

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Academic Certification

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Credits Earned

    • Status

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date
1.103 1.17
  • Add the Education History related list to your Contact page layouts.

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Account layout: School Code

    • Application layout: Initial Creation Date

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
## Create an Education History Record Create an education history record from the Education History object or from the Education Histories related list on a contact record. Before you create an Education History record, you must first have a Contact to relate the record to. 1. If the Contact record has an Education History related list, click **New** in the related list. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select Education History, and click **New**. 2. In the Educational Institution Account field, select an existing Account or click **New Account**. 3. Enter all relevant details. 4. Click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Education History record. # Education History Education History stores information about a Contact's education history and related data. - **[Sample Uses for Education History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understanding a student's previous educational experience plays an important role in the recruiting and admissions process, but also has other uses. - **[Configure Education History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create an Education History Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an education history record from the Education History object or from the Education Histories related list on a contact record. ## Sample Uses for Education History Understanding a student's previous educational experience plays an important role in the recruiting and admissions process, but also has other uses. - University—Track alumni historical data for targeted mentorship or donation programs. - K-12—Track the time a student’s spent at other schools. - Any educational institution—Track a student’s educational history to help guide their educational decisions. ## Configure Education History Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118 1.22

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Academic Certification

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Credits Earned

    • Status

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date
1.103 1.17
  • Add the Education History related list to your Contact page layouts.

  • Add these fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Account layout: School Code

    • Application layout: Initial Creation Date

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
1.18

Page Layouts:

  • Add the Education History related list to the K12 Kit Student Layout and the K12 Kit Educational Institution Layout. Include the following fields, sorted by Start Date, Descending: Education History Name, Education Institution Account, Start Date, End Date

  • Create a K12 Kit Education History Layout with this configuration:

    • Fields: Education History Name, Educational Institution Account, Educational Institution Name, Contact, School Enrollment Status, Details, GPA, Class Rank, Class Size, and Degree Earned

    • Section: Additional Enrollment Information with these fields: Start Date, End Date, Start Reason, and End Reason

    • Related lists: Grade Enrollments (Grade Enrollment Name, Grade Level, Status, Start Date, End Date) and Notes & Attachments

    • Quick Action buttons: Edit, NewNote, NewCase, PrintableView, Change Owner, Clone, and Delete

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.
  Compact Layouts: Create a K12 Education History Compact Layout and add the Education History Name, Educational Institution Account, Contact, School Enrollment Status, Start Date, and End Date fields.
  Search Layout: Edit Default Layout for Education History to include the Education History Name, Educational Institution Account, Contact, Start Date, Start Reason, End Date, and End Reason fields, as needed.
 

List View: Create a K-12 All Education Histories list view.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All education history

  • Select Fields to Display: Education History Name, Educational Institution Account, Contact, Start Date, Start Reason, End Date, and End Reason

See ​​Create or Clone a List View.
## Create an Education History Record Create an education history record from the Education History object or from the Education Histories related list on a contact record. Before you create an Education History record, you must first have a Contact to relate the record to. 1. If the Contact record has an Education History related list, click **New** in the related list. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select Education History, and click **New**. 2. In the Educational Institution Account field, select an existing Account or click **New Account**. 3. Enter all relevant details. 4. Click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Education History record. # Education Intelligence Considerations and Requirements Use the information in this section to make sure that you set up your org correctly for the installation. To support your installation and visualizations, review the requirements for your org data, Data 360, and Tableau Next. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
## License and Permission Requirements All users require Tableau Next and Data 360 licenses, and an appropriate Tableau Next permission set and its required Data 360 permission set. See [Tableau Next Permission Sets and Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_admin_permsets_licenses.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To set up Tableau Next and install Education Intelligence, admin users need the Education Cloud Full Access, Data Cloud Architect, and Tableau Unmetered Admin or Tableau Next Admin permission sets. ## Requirements for Education Intelligence Education Cloud Org Requirements - Education Cloud is enabled. - Education Cloud apps are enabled. For example, Student Success, Academic Operations, and Advanced Academic Operations are the required apps for the Course Operations dashboard and Student Success visualizations and metrics. - The Education Cloud Full Access permission set has an assigned data space to deploy the Education Cloud data streams to. - Education Cloud records are populated. For example, to provide data for Course Operations and Student Success, make sure that these records have the correct data. - Academic Year - Academic Session - Academic Term - Learning - Learning Course - Course Offering - Learner Profile - Academic Term Enrollment - Course Offering Participant and its related Academic Term Enrollment - Course Offering Participant Results Data 360 Requirements - Data 360 for Education Cloud is enabled. - C360 semantic model is installed. - To view dashboards, visualizations, and metrics, you need to map the associated data model objects (DMOs) and refresh data streams. For example, to view the Course Operations dashboard and Student Success visualizations and metrics, deploy the Academic Operations and Student Success data stream bundles or map related DMOs and refresh data streams. Tableau Next Requirements - Tableau Next is enabled. **SEE ALSO** - [Set Up Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_education_cloud_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the guided setup to turn on Education Cloud for your org, and then configure apps and features. Make sure that you assign the Education Cloud Full Access permission set to yourself, as the admin.") - [Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Connect, organize, and unify large volumes of disparate student data and educational data by using the power of Data 360. Then use that data to deliver insights across the complete educational journey of a learner from prospect to engaged alumnus.") - [Admin: Set Up Tableau Next](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_admin.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Education Intelligence Dashboards Education Intelligence dashboards are data-driven solutions that show key performance metrics of academic operations and the learner lifecycle. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
- **[Course Operations Dashboard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_operations_dashboard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gain an integrated view of course availability, scheduling efficiency, and enrollment patterns. Anticipate enrollment trends and take timely action to optimize course capacity and faculty workloads. - **[Recruitment and Admissions Performance Center Dashboard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_recruitment_admissions_dashboard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Monitor prospective and admitted students from first inquiry through enrollment with visibility across the recruitment and admissions funnel. # Education Portal Access Management You can use permission sets, system permissions, and audiences together to control portal access and visibility by user role. Permission sets grant access and group portal users by role, system permissions link permission sets to audiences, and audiences determine the portal user groups that have access to each portal page and component.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Education Cloud includes system permissions to define applicant, student, and alumni users. Your constituents can have one or more of these permissions. - **[Education Portal Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Design and implement a security model for your portal. - **[Permission Sets for Education Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_permission_sets_for_organizing_portal_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create permission sets to assign object and field permissions so that constituents can use the components in the Education Portal template for Experience Cloud. - **[Assign System Permissions to Portal User Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_system_permissions_to_portal_user_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** System permissions work with user permissions and audiences to manage portal access. - **[Control Access to Education Portal Elements with Audiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_control_access_to_education_portal_elements_with_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Education Portal template includes applicant, student, and alumni components by default. To provide tailored, relevant experiences for all your portal users, you can make portal pages and components visible only to certain audiences. - **[Manage Guest Access to Your Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_guest_access_to_your_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To show unauthenticated site visitors information about your institution's academic schedule, student programs, financial aid options, course catalog, and so on, give guest users read access to the relevant records. - **[Configure an Applicant Portal for Third-Party Representatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_an_applicant_portal_for_agent_and_parent_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Omnistudio components to set up an applicant portal for parents, guardians, and commissioned agents to apply on behalf of students. # Education Portal Security Design and implement a security model for your portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up security for an education portal: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Portal Security Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The first step in setting up your education portal is to create a security model that works for your institution. - **[Portal User Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Portal users must be users in your org and have an Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User license. Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User licenses require you to associate a role with an account. ## Portal Security Basics The first step in setting up your education portal is to create a security model that works for your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
You can tailor your portal security using a combination of org-wide default sharing settings, permission sets, and sharing sets. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Portals support only the external users who don't work for your institution, like applicants, students, and alumni. Make sure that your security model accounts for these users. See [Securely Share Your Experience Cloud Sites with Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_secure_community.htm&type=5). ## Portal User Setup Portal users must be users in your org and have an Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User license. Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User licenses require you to associate a role with an account.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
If your portal supports more than 50,000 users at a time, consider optimizing account roles for external users. See [Optimize Account Roles to Improve Performance and Scale](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5). If you enable role optimization, portal users that belong to accounts owned by the same Salesforce user share a role. This consideration makes role-based sharing risky because the portal users can access each other's records. If you plan to optimize account roles, we recommend that you don't use role-based sharing. Also consider the limits on the number of roles and community-based users that you can have in your org. See [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't assign a community-based license to internal users. # Efficiently Collaborate with Stakeholders by Sharing Program-Related Records Program managers can now share Program and Program Enrollment records with selected users with the Share button on records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [_Salesforce Help:_ Grant Access to Records with Manual Sharing in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.granting_access_to_records_lex.htm&type=5) # Einstein Academic Insights With Einstein generative AI, get academic insights on individual students that indicate how well they’re doing and identify areas where they need assistance. Use Visual Indicator to show a student’s performance in the current term based on their course component scores.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Einstein add-on or as a standalone license

    Data 360 is required for generating current term and course offering participant insights, and for generating academic insights by using data from Data 360.
Use Einstein Academic Insights in Education Cloud to get student insights, including details of their academic, current term, course offering participant, attendance, and course participation details. Advisors can use these insights to proactively assist students who need support and help them meet their academic goals. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Features powered by Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Agents and other AI features are applied to your organization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Einstein Academic Insights uses Einstein Generative AI and consumes Einstein Requests. Einstein Generative AI Features are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation for more information. Einstein Academic Insights uses these resources in Education Cloud: Education Cloud Resources for Einstein Academic Insights | Resource Name | Resource Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | Generate Academic Insights | Prompt Template | Standard prompt template (engagement visualization type) that generates academic insights. | | Generate Current Term Insights | Prompt Template | Standard prompt template (engagement visualization type) that generates insights on the current academic term. | | Generate Course Offering Participant Insights | Prompt Template | Standard prompt template (field generation type) that generates insights on a course offering participant. | | Get Calculated Insights Data | Invocable Action | REST API action that gets the required data based on the prompt type. | The grounding data sources for the prompt templates are:
Grounding Data Sources for the Prompt Templates
Prompt Template Object Grounding Data Source
Generate Academic Insights Academic Term Enrollment CRM
Contact Profile CRM
Learner Program CRM
Record Alert CRM and Data Model Object (DMO)
Generate Current Term Insights Attendance DMO
Academic Term Enrollment CRM
Course Offering Activity Grade DMO
Course Offering Participant CRM
Course Offering Rubric DMO
Generate Course Offering Participant Insights Academic Session Attendance DMO
Course Offering Activity Grade DMO
Course Offering Attendance DMO
Course Offering Participation DMO
Course Offering Participant CRM
Course Offering Rubric DMO
See Also: - [Visual Indicator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_visual_indicator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Visual Indicator in Education Cloud to give advisors a quick view of a student’s performance in the enrolled courses of the current academic term. Based on the student’s course component scores, Visual Indicator shows their course performance in customizable categories such as At Risk, On Track, and Needs Attention.") - [Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Connect, organize, and unify large volumes of disparate student data and educational data by using the power of Data 360. Then use that data to deliver insights across the complete educational journey of a learner from prospect to engaged alumnus.") - [Expression Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.expression_sets.htm&language=en_US) - **[Set Up Einstein Academic Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_einstein_academic_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable the required org preferences and configure the components to use Einstein Academic Insights. - **[Generate Academic Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_generate_academic_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Academic Insights to generate the academic insights, or the current term insights on a student. - **[Generate Current Term Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_generate_current_term_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Academic Insights to generate the current term insights on a student. - **[Generate Course Offering Participant Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_generate_course_offering_participant_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Academic Insights to generate the course offering participant insights on a student. # Einstein Advising Summary for Advisors Use Einstein generative AI in Education Cloud to get an advising summary that can help you quickly understand a learner’s advising case. Get the details you need to prepare for an appointment or make decisions on short notice.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Use Einstein Advising Summary to generate advising case summaries that include details of a learner’s: - Academic terms (current GPA, credits, enrollment) - Case - Case engagement (active alerts, open tasks, upcoming appointments, action plans, and care plans) - Interaction summaries - Support program enrollments and intake assessment responses - Pulse check responses You can review, edit, and save the summaries to view them as comments on the learner’s related case record. The Einstein Advising Summary feature uses the Einstein Summary component with these resources from Education Cloud: | Resource Name | Resource Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | Summarize Advising Case | Prompt Template | Standard prompt template of the field generation type for summarizing advising cases. | | Summarize Learner Case | Prompt Flow | Template-triggered prompt flow that gets the details of records related to a learner’s case and sends a summary of those details to the Summarize Advising Case prompt template as prompt instructions. | | Get Academic Term Details | Invocable Action | REST API action to get the details of the academic term that the learner is enrolled in. | | Get Interaction Summaries and Care Plans | Invocable Action | REST API action to get the interaction summaries and care plans related to the learner’s case. | | Get Assessments | Invocable Action | REST API action to get the program enrollment (intake) assessments and the pulse check assessments related to the learner’s case. | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Einstein are applied to your organization. SEE ALSO: - [Einstein Summary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.einstein_summary.htm) - [Einstein Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_usage.htm) - [Einstein and Data Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_einstein_features_data_usage.htm) - **[Set Up Einstein Advising Summary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_einstein_advising_summary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Einstein and configure the Einstein Summary component to use Einstein Advising Summary. - **[Create an Advising Summary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_advising_summary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Advising Summary in Education Cloud to summarize a learner’s advising case. # Einstein Copilot in Nonprofit Cloud (Beta) Bring the power of generative AI and conversational AI to fundraising with Einstein Copilot. Ask Einstein Copilot to use data in your Salesforce org to produce draft gift proposals. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms. Major gift officers write gift proposals that appeal to high-net-worth donors and showcase the impact of the donor's contributions while communicating your organization's mission and tone. Writing these proposals is time-consuming and difficult. Copilot Actions: Fundraising Gift Proposals streamlines and expedites the process of writing compelling and personalized gift proposals by harnessing the power of Einstein generative AI and your organization's Salesforce data. SEE ALSO - [Einstein Generative AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai.htm&language=en_US) - [Einstein Copilot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.copilot_intro.htm) # Einstein for Nonprofits and Translation The Einstein for Nonprofits user interface and documentation is available in multiple languages. Get answers to your questions about localization and learn what languages are enabled for Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Einstein for Nonprofits product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Einstein for Nonprofits."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Einstein for Nonprofits. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Einstein for Nonprofits objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Einstein for Nonprofits | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. ### Einstein for Nonprofits - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/efn/einstein_for_nonprofits_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/efn/einstein_for_nonprofits_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/efn/einstein_for_nonprofits_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/efn/einstein_for_nonprofits_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/efn/einstein_for_nonprofits_pt_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Einstein for Nonprofits product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Einstein for Nonprofits: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Einstein for Nonprofits Architecture Einstein for Nonprofits uses the Contact, Opportunity, and Recurring Donation objects. Einstein for Nonprofits parses and analyzes data from these records to generate predictions about your donors. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_architecture.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about Einstein for Nonprofits architecture. - **[Predictive Insight Input Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insight_input_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about data that is parsed to generate predictive insights. # Einstein for Nonprofits Architecture Learn about Einstein for Nonprofits architecture. Einstein for Nonprofits helps you to obtain actionable insights using the Contact, Opportunity, and Recurring Donation objects. The [Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack.htm) app is a prerequisite for Einstein for Nonprofits. Einstein for Nonprofits analyzes records in the NPSP Contacts object, and uses custom fields to map and store generated metrics. Then the donor score is loaded back in NPSP. Einstein for Nonprofits interacts with and modifies objects and fields in NPSP version 3.210 or later. Einstein for Nonprofits aims to ensure the benefits of AI are accessible and inclusive for employees working at nonprofits, including admins and those involved in donor outreach or business development. The product satisfies rigorous privacy and compliance standards. Einstein for Nonprofits harnesses the power of machine learning to make predictions about future donor behavior. Einstein for Nonprofits is: - Responsible for safeguarding and protecting NPSP data on which predictions are based. - Accountable to users by providing admins with the “Don’t Profile” option for consent management. - Transparent by striving for model explainability and clear usage terms. - Empowering nonprofits by promoting growth, and benefiting society as a whole. - Inclusive and respectful of the values of our users by testing models with diverse data sets. To start a workflow, a Salesforce admin invokes Insights Prediction in Einstein for Nonprofits. Configuration options allow various parameters to be set, including: - Generating predictive insights for individual donor behavior and contribution patterns. - Deploying Backup Models to generate predictive metrics while the org is bolstering its dataset to reach the [minimum number of records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5) required by Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB). - Setting up notifications by Einstein by Nonprofits when your org reaches the required data volume to successfully obtain EPB output. You can also opt to switch back to using metrics generated by Einstein Predictions Builder. - Displaying predictive metrics data on Contact cards. The Einstein for Nonprofits AI model is trained periodically. Internal calculations are used to produce metrics that are dependent on the data in your org and subsequently produce custom metrics for your constituents. For more information, see [Predictive Insights using Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org."). # Einstein for Nonprofits Configuration Configure model training, set up backup models and predictive insights, and complete more configuration steps for Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Configure Einstein for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure model training and page layout to use Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Set Up Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_set_up_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate and configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights by using Backup Models. - **[Set up Predictive Insights using EPB](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_set_up_predictive_insights_using_epb.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights using Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB). - **[Latest Einstein for Nonprofits and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_and_salesforce_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install the latest releases installed to get the most out of Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Einstein for Nonprofits user interface and documentation is available in multiple languages. Get answers to your questions about localization and learn what languages are enabled for Einstein for Nonprofits. # Einstein for Nonprofits Data Deletion Consider these factors when deleting data in Einstein for Nonprofits to stay compliant with data protention and privacy regulations such as GDPR. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Einstein for Nonprofits. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Einstein for Nonprofits. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-einstein_for_nonprofits-264-0-0-production-enus/291bfb05-3242-402a-92b6-b757730f100a/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A donor has stopped giving and wants his personal data to be removed from your system. Delete Records

Consider deleting these records and field data for your donor.

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • NPSP Data Import records

NOTE: In order to preserve donation history, consider assigning Opportunities to an anonymous or placeholder Account.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

A volunteer has died and her spouse has requested that you remove her from the system. Delete Records

In addition to deleting the volunteer's Contact or Lead record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks
  • Notes
  • Calendar events
  • Household
  • Household Account
  • Addresses
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

NOTE: In order to preserve Volunteer Hours metrics, consider assigning Volunteer Hours to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that customer’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent's email address and phone number.

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# Einstein for Nonprofits Data Portability Prepare to respond to constituent requests for their data. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Einstein for Nonprofits. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Einstein for Nonprofits. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-einstein_for_nonprofits-264-0-0-production-enus/291bfb05-3242-402a-92b6-b757730f100a/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent is moving out of state and will not be volunteering with you any more. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours
  • NPSP Data Import records

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

A major donor decided to not fulfill her pledge and will not make future donations.

She asked for the personal data you collected from her.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your constituent:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Opportunities
  • Recurring Donations
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Cases
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Households
  • Household Accounts
  • Volunteer Shifts
  • Volunteer Hours
  • NPSP Data Import records

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Einstein for Nonprofits Installation Einstein for Nonprofits relies on Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and other products, editions, and licenses. After you meet these prerequisites, install the Einstein for Nonprofits managed package into your Salesforce org. - **[Before You Install Einstein for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_before_you_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about product prerequisites and other helpful information prior to installing Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Install Einstein for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install Einstein for Nonprofits. # Einstein for Nonprofits Introduction Einstein for Nonprofits provides predictive analytics and metrics based on your real world data. It helps identify possible first-time and high-potential donors. - **[Overview of Einstein for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein for Nonprofits to obtain predictive insights for your constituents. - **[Success for Your Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_success_for_your_nonprofit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how one nonprofit uses Einstein for Nonprofits to identify first-time or high-potential donors. # Einstein for Nonprofits Managed Package The Einstein for Nonprofits managed package generates predictive insights and metrics by modeling real world data in your org. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_introduction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein for Nonprofits provides predictive analytics and metrics based on your real world data. It helps identify possible first-time and high-potential donors. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_architecture_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein for Nonprofits uses the Contact, Opportunity, and Recurring Donation objects. Einstein for Nonprofits parses and analyzes data from these records to generate predictions about your donors. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Installation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_installation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein for Nonprofits relies on Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and other products, editions, and licenses. After you meet these prerequisites, install the Einstein for Nonprofits managed package into your Salesforce org. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure model training, set up backup models and predictive insights, and complete more configuration steps for Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Predictive Insights With EPB](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_epb_for_efn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein for Nonprofits uses EPB to generate predictions. EPB models are trained from data in only your Salesforce org. They are updated each month. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Predictive Insights With Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models_for_efn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org. These Backup Models provide metrics on the likelihood of constituents becoming first-time, recurring, or top donors. - **[GDPR for Einstein for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data privacy, deletion, consent, and portability considerations and compliance details for Einstein for Nonprofits. # Einstein for Nonprofits Predictive Insights With Backup Models Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org. These Backup Models provide metrics on the likelihood of constituents becoming first-time, recurring, or top donors. - **[Predictive Insights using Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org. - **[Understand Backup Models Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_backup_models_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about Backup Model results for your org. # Einstein for Nonprofits Predictive Insights With EPB Einstein for Nonprofits uses EPB to generate predictions. EPB models are trained from data in only your Salesforce org. They are updated each month. - **[Predictive Insights using Einstein Prediction Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_epb.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses EPB to generate predictive insights for your org. - **[Understand EPB Predictive Insights Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_epb_predictive_insights_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about EPB results for your org. # Einstein for Nonprofits Product Info for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products. - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_product_info_for_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Einstein for Nonprofits. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Einstein for Nonprofits. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Einstein for Nonprofits. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Einstein for Nonprofits. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Einstein for Nonprofits."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Einstein for Nonprofits. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Einstein for Nonprofits Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_efn_einstein_for_nonprofits_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Summer '22. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_efn_einstein_for_nonprofits_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Summer '22. - When model training jobs for Einstein Prediction Builder complete Salesforce now alerts users using the notification bell. Learn more in [Set up Predictive Insights using EPB](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.efn_set_up_predictive_insights_using_epb.htm). - We now display the Giving History Card metrics when multi-currency is enabled. These metrics either show the corresponding dollar amounts or $0 if associated fields are blank. ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Summer '22. - CustomNotificationType - Model Training Enablement # Einstein for Nonprofits Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. ## Change Einstein for Nonprofits now supports Brazilian Portuguese. # Einstein Generative AI in Nonprofit Cloud (Beta) Use the power of generative AI to support common tasks in Nonprofit Cloud. Ask Einstein to use data in your Salesforce org to produce a variety of summaries and a streamlined version of grant applications for review by the board members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Einstein Program Benefits Summary, Einstein Notes Summary, Einstein Board Version of Grant Application, and Einstein Funding Award Summary are pilot or beta services that are subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/?_ga=2.247987783.1372150065.1709219475-629000709.1639001992). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. This feature uses Einstein Generative AI and consumes Einstein Requests. Einstein Generative AI Features are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation for more information. The Non-GA Services are used in conjunction with GA Services which consume paid credits or entitlements (“entitlements”). Any corresponding consumption of entitlements arising from Customer’s use of the Non-GA Services shall not give rise to any refund or credit rights. - **[Set Up Einstein Generative AI (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_set_up_einstein_generative_ai.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use summarization tools and to create a board version of grant applications, set up Salesforce with Nonprofit Cloud features and Einstein generative AI. Then add the Einstein Summary component to your page layouts. - **[Draft Summaries with Einstein Generative AI (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_draft_summaries_with_einstein_generative_ai.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein generative AI to save time and effort on tedious summarization tasks. # Einstein Mentoring Summaries Use generative AI to get a comprehensive view of the information that you need to facilitate well-suited mentoring pairings. Add Einstein Mentoring Summaries to the existing Mentor Comparison screen flow so that staff can see overviews of mentors and mentees, including the differences and similarities between them. Einstein Mentoring Summaries generates a similarity score that is a vector distance calculation that indicates potential matches between mentors and a mentee.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Einstein are applied to your organization. ## Einstein and Data Usage in Mentoring Summaries Einstein Mentoring Summaries is a usage-based product. Usage accumulates every time you generate a similarity score or generate a prompt response in the comparison screen. Reach out to your Salesforce account executive if you have questions. See Also - [Einstein Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_usage.htm&type=5) - [Einstein and Data Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_einstein_features_data_usage.htm&type=5) - **[Einstein Mentoring Summaries Sample Prompt](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_einstein_mentoring_summaries_sample_prompt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use this sample prompt for the Industries Record Comparison prompt template type when you set up Einstein Mentoring Summaries. - **[Add Einstein Mentoring Summaries to the Mentoring Comparison Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_einstein_mentoring_summaries_to_the_mentoring_comparison_screen_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Einstein Mentoring Summaries, configure fields in the Display Compare and Assign Mentor screen element in the Mentoring: Match Mentor and Mentee screen flow. # Einstein Mentoring Summaries Sample Prompt Use this sample prompt for the Industries Record Comparison prompt template type when you set up Einstein Mentoring Summaries. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The custom fields in this example are for reference only. Use the fields that you create for the mentoring profile. See [Update the Mentoring Profile Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_the_mentoring_profile_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create and add fields to the mentoring profile record page that you want to use to compare and match mentors with a mentee."). _As a coordinator of a higher education institution who is focused on mentoring programs between two individuals, you are responsible for helping assist in the matching process between a mentor and a mentee._ _Use the following the following guidelines to summarize the best fit between the Mentor and the Mentee._ - Skills - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Skill\_\_c} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Skill\_\_c} - What to look for: Specific skills that the mentor posses which are relevant to the mentees needs. - Purpose: To ensure that the mentor can provide valuable guidance and support in areas where the mentee seeks improvement or growth. - Industry - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Industry\_\_c} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Industry\_\_c} - What to look for: The industry or industries in which the mentor has experience. - Purpose: To match mentees with mentors who have relevant industry experience, ensuring that the advice and insights provided are applicable and beneficial. - _Channel_ - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Channel\_\_c} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Channel\_\_c} - What to look for: The preferred method of communication for the mentoring sessions, whether virtual (via video calls, phone calls, etc.) or in person. - Purpose: To accommodate the preferences and logistical constraints of both the mentor and mentee, ensuring effective and comfortable communication. - Days Available - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Days\_Available\_\_c} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Days\_Available\_\_c} - What to look for: Specific days of the week when the mentor is available to meet with the mentee. - Purpose: To schedule sessions at times that are convenient for both parties, ensuring regular and consistent meetings. - Times Available - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Times\_Available\_\_c} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Times\_Available\_\_c} - What to look for: Specific times of the day when the mentor is available. - Purpose: To further refine the scheduling process, making sure that meetings can be arranged at mutually convenient times. - Location - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Location\_\_c} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Location\_\_c} - What to look for: The geographical location of the mentor, especially if in-person meetings are preferred. - Purpose: To facilitate in-person meetings if desired and to consider any potential travel requirements or constraints. - Summary - Data for Mentee: {!$Input:BaseRecord.Summary} - Data for Mentor: {!$Input:ComparisonRecord.Summary} - What to look for: A brief overview of the mentor's background, including their professional experience, education, key achievements, and any other relevant information. - Purpose: To provide a snapshot of the mentor, helping to assess their suitability and potential fit for the mentee. You must treat equally any individuals or persons from different socioeconomic statuses, sexual orientations, religions, races, physical appearances, nationalities, gender identities, disabilities, and ages. When you do not have sufficient information, you must choose the unknown option, rather than making assumptions based on any stereotypes. Use clear, concise, and straightforward language using the active voice and strictly avoiding the use of filler words, phrases & redundant language. Now summarize of the overall fit between the mentor and mentee. # Einstein Skills Generator Use generative AI to find skills and associate them with your learning courses and learning programs with Einstein Skills Generator. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
As the final step in the Learning Wizard, Einstein Skills Generator offers skills relevant to the learning course or learning program you’re creating. You can select any of Einstein’s suggested skills or choose from the skills you’ve used before. ![Einstein’s suggested skills](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/skills_generator_suggestions.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Einstein are applied to your organization. ## Einstein and Data Usage in Skills Generator Einstein Skills Generator is a usage-based product. The Skills Generator prompt sends data to Einstein from the learning record you’re creating, including course or program name and academic level. Selected skills are stored as unique learning achievement records. Usage accumulates every time you generate skills by clicking Suggest Skills or Suggest More Skills. Previously returned skills are included in the Suggest More Skills prompt so that Einstein doesn’t return duplicates. Reach out to your Salesforce account executive if you have questions. SEE ALSO: - [Enable Einstein Skills Generator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_einstein_skills_generator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Salesforce to enable Einstein Skills Generator in the Learning Wizard.") - [Add Skills to a Learning Course or Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_skills_to_a_learning_course_or_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "As you create a learning course or learning program, use Einstein to suggest skills that fit the course, or choose from the skills that you’ve used before.") - [Einstein Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_usage.htm) - [Einstein and Data Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_einstein_features_data_usage.htm) # Elevate Release Notes Learn what's in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. - **[Critical Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Elevate-connected Recurring Donations can now receive a Failing status when your gateway can't process a recent installment. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. ## Critical Changes Elevate-connected Recurring Donations can now receive a Failing status when your gateway can't process a recent installment. To see this status update in Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP): 1. Add or activate “Failing” in the Status picklist on the Recurring Donation object. If you previously added “Failing (Retrying)”, update that picklist value to “Failing”. 2. In **NPSP Settings** | **Recurring Donations** | **Status to State Mapping**, map the Failing status to the Active state. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. ### Gift Entry Enhancements Learn about the improvements for gift entry in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. - Enter a batch of Elevate-connected recurring donations using Gift Entry. To use this feature in your org, give your users Read and Edit access to the Allow Recurring Donations field on the NPSP Data Import Batches object. Learn more in [Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm). - You can now use ACH as a payment method when entering batches of gifts. - Elevate Advanced Edition users can now select the processing gateway for batch templates in Gift Entry. To use this feature in your org: 1. Turn it on in **NPSP Settings** | **System Tools** | **Elevate Gateway Management**. 2. Adjust the gateway in the Elevate Field Bundle in Gift Entry templates. ### Gateway and Payment Method Enhancements Learn about the improvements for gateway and payment methods in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. - Process ACH bank transfers with Stripe. To use this new payment method, edit your Stripe gateway and turn on ACH as a payment method. Learn more in [Manage Gateways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_manage_gateways.htm). Stripe charges an extra verification fee for ACH transactions; contact Stripe to learn more. - Donors can now select ACH bank transfer as a payment method on Giving Pages set up with the Stripe gateway. To provide this payment method for your donors, turn on the ACH payment method in individual Giving Pages. Learn more in [Create or Edit a Giving Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_create_edit_gp.htm). - Customize the frequency and number of times Elevate tries to process failed recurring donation installments. Learn more in [Configure Elevate Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_settings.htm). - Elevate now automatically updates credit cards for recurring donations that are processed by Stripe, iATS, Worldpay VAP Platform, and Paya Sage. If your donor's card number or expiration date changes, Elevate receives the updated information without a lapse in installment payments. - Elevate Advanced Edition admins can now add Paya Sage as a gateway. ### Other Enhancements Learn about other improvements in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. - Pause an Elevate-connected recurring donation within NPSP. Learn more in [Pause a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_pause_a_recurring_donation.htm). - Issue partial refunds of Elevate-connected donations in NPSP. Learn more in [Manage One-Time Donations in NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_manage_one-time_donations.htm). # Elevate Release Notes Convert Google Universal Analytics to Google Analytics 4. Set a date range for your payments and recurring donations export. Find these enhancements in Elevate in Summer '23. - **[Connect to Google Analytics 4](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.el_244_rn_google_analytics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Migrate to Google Analytics 4 before July 1, 2023, to continue tracking Giving Page performance, source codes, and donation conversion rates. Google Analytics 4 is replacing Universal Analytics. On July 1, 2023, all standard Universal Analytics properties will stop processing data. - **[Speed Up Payment and Recurring Donation Exports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.el_244_rn_payment_exports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Limit the scope of your payment and recurring donation exports in Elevate by adding a date range. To improve the speed of exports, Elevate exports multiple files when your request includes more than 10,000 records. - **[Close Recurring Donations In Elevate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.el_244_rn_close_recurring_donations_in_elevate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're ready to have Elevate permanently stop processing recurring donations, close all recurring donations. - **[Elevate Retiring on October 1, 2024](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.el_244_rn_elevate_retiring_october_1_2024.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce is retiring the Elevate family of products. This affects Elevate Advanced Edition, Elevate Power of Us Editions, and all Add-ons. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on October 1, 2023, and we anticipate that the product will be deactivated on or after October 1, 2024. # Elevate Release Notes Salesforce is retiring the Elevate family of products. This affects Elevate Advanced Edition, Elevate Power of Us Editions, and all Add-ons. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on October 1, 2023, and we anticipate that the product will be deactivated on or after October 1, 2024. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to all Elevate products and editions. SEE ALSO [_Trailblazer Community:_ The Future of Elevate](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/feed/0d54s00000jgj5wsar) # Elevate Retiring on October 1, 2024 Salesforce is retiring the Elevate family of products. This affects Elevate Advanced Edition, Elevate Power of Us Editions, and all Add-ons. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on October 1, 2023, and we anticipate that the product will be deactivated on or after October 1, 2024. **Where:** This change applies to all Elevate products and editions. SEE ALSO [The Future of Elevate](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/feed/0d54s00000jgj5wsar) # Elevate Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Elevate, Elevate Payments API, and Elevate-NPSP Connector, in Summer ‘22. - **[Elevate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Elevate in Summer '22. - **[Elevate-NPSP Connector](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Elevate Payments API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Elevate Payments API in Summer ‘22. ## Elevate Learn what's in Elevate in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Elevate in Summer ‘22. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Elevate in Summer '22. - **[Community Ideas Delivered](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. ### Changes Learn about the enhancements in Elevate in Summer ‘22. - We introduced tribute gifts made in honor or memory of a person. Add tributes to your Giving Pages or enter the tribute details when processing gifts in NPSP Gift Entry. Learn more about adding tribute fields to your Giving Pages in [Create or Edit a Giving Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.en-us_el_create_edit_gp.htm). Be sure to update your users' permissions for the new fields listed in the Import or Enter Tribute Gifts section of [Nonprofit Success Pack Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22."). - We added the ability to customize Other Amount in your Giving Pages or remove the field altogether. - We added the ability to preselect the donor cover option on Giving Pages. - We added an option to redirect donors to your own thank you page in Giving Pages setup. - We updated the Settings page to allow admins to update the Organization Name. - We added date range fields to Payments Management. You can now filter the payments by the date a payment was created and narrow down recurring donations by the next installment date. - We now support Worldpay VAP Platform as a payment provider for Elevate. ### Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Elevate in Summer '22. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000024g42qae): Unable to delete record in elevate after deleting original transaction - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002kl04qac): Elevate email receipts not displaying 'Email From Name' - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000000xqdtqau): Export files should show amounts using decimals and not base amounts - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000001cqs3qae): Tributes Options & Page Elements Display Incorrectly for Memorials ### Community Ideas Delivered Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - [Community Idea](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000ge7a7uaj/elevate-ability-to-control-stage-for-closedwon-opportunity): Elevate - Ability to control stage for Closed/Won Opportunity - [Community Idea](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdhc7uaj/in-memory-of-option-on-elevate): In Memory of option on Elevate ## Elevate-NPSP Connector Learn what's Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. ### Changes Learn about the enhancements in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Recurring Donation Improvements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for recurring donations Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Health Check Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for health check Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Fixes and Minor Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. #### Recurring Donation Improvements Learn about the improvements for recurring donations Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - We added functionality in Elevate to support the new Lapsed Recurring Donation automation in NPSP. Learn how to set up this NPSP feature in [Automate Recurring Donation Status Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_automate_rd_status.htm). - Elevate now creates or updates Recurring Donations in Salesforce using NPSP Data Importer. Previously, Elevate directly created or updated Recurring Donation records. As part of this work, we improved error handling so validation errors show on NPSP Data Import records instead of in the NPSP Error Log. - We added permissions for the Recurring Donation NPSP Data Import fields to the managed Elevate NPSP Connector permission set. - We improved how NPSP Data Import handles Recurring Donation errors. If Elevate sends an update for a Recurring Donation that doesn't exist in NPSP, Elevate creates a new Recurring Donation. #### Health Check Enhancements Learn about the improvements for health check Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - Health Check in NPSP now verifies Payment Method contains the correct value for ACH transactions. - Health Check in NPSP now provides a clearer error message when you're not connected to Elevate. #### Fixes and Minor Enhancements Review the fixes and minor enhancements Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - When you don't set an Opportunity Stage through your integration user's record type assignment or with a custom field in Elevate, NPSP Data Importer uses the value in NPSP Settings for Opportunity Stage When Fully Paid. Learn more in [Configure Opportunity Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm). - Payments and refunds are now processed in the same transaction. Previously, if refunds and payments were processed in the same transaction, refunds would fail with an error stating that the corresponding payment cannot be found. - We added the new NPSP Data Importer fields for tributes—donations made in honor or memory of someone—to the Elevate Integration User and Elevate NPSP Connector (managed) permission sets. ## Elevate Payments API Learn what's in Elevate Payments API in Summer ‘22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We added tribute fields to Payment Services. Add these fields to your endpoints for custom giving pages for one-time and recurring donations. ### Changes We added tribute fields to Payment Services. Add these fields to your endpoints for custom giving pages for one-time and recurring donations. Learn more in [productMetadata version 1.3.0](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.en-us_el_productmetadata_130.htm). # Elevate Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Elevate in Winter '23. ## Changes - You can now set up a custom email domain for receipts and alerts sent from Elevate. Learn more in [Configure a Custom Email Domain.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.configure_custom_email_domain.htm&type=5) As part of this new feature, we made some additional updates to the Reply To Email Address on the Receipt Information screen that hide the value your admin may have previously entered. We recommend reviewing your Receipt Information for accuracy. - We added the ability to issue refunds from Payment records in NPSP. Previously, you could only initiate them in Elevate Payments Management. Learn more in [Nonprofit Success Pack Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes.htm&type=5&language=en_us#guid-168d98d9-efaf-439d-ab8c-3062881647d5). - You can now switch between Elevate Power of Us and Elevate Advanced editions. Get started with Elevate Power of Us edition and upgrade when needed. Learn more about the different editions in the Nonprofit Pricing Guide linked in [Salesforce for Nonprofits Pricing](https://www.salesforce.org/?nonprofit_product=nonprofit-editions-pricing). - We now provide an Elevate Test Gateway whether you’re in Test Mode or not. We also support setting up additional test gateway sandboxes for some gateways. Learn more in [Supported Payment Providers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?language=en_us&type=5&id=sfdo.el_supported_payment_gateways.htm). - If you're a new Elevate customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up Elevate and have a successful implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We built new Elevate-specific guidance to help admins get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. Learn more about [Guidance Center](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/guidance-center-quick-look). # Eligibility Verification and Assignment for Registration Timelines Education Cloud uses the student information system policy rules framework to verify which students enrolled in an academic term qualify for a registration timeline. After verification, the same framework assigns that timeline to the students who qualify. Verification and assignment are two related phases. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Policy rules evaluate students enrolled in an academic term and assign each eligible student a registration timeline. Eligibility comes from the policy rule that you attach to an academic term registration timeline record. In the verification phase, a policy rule evaluates each student who's enrolled in the academic term. The rule uses the eligibility criteria on an academic term registration timeline record. The evaluation runs as a batch process from the Student Eligibility and Timeline Assignment component on that record. After the batch process completes, the component shows the eligibility results. In the assignment phase, a second batch process assigns the registration timeline to the students who met the criteria. Assignment starts from the same component after the eligibility batch process completes. Both phases run from the Academic Term Registration Timelines app. On the timeline record, the Student Eligibility and Timeline Assignment component is where you select the policy rule, apply verification, and then assign the registration timeline. ## Set Up Eligibility Verification and Assignment for Registration Timelines Configure a context definition, policy rule, and flows to verify eligibility and assign registration timelines for students. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To set up verification and assignment for academic term registration timelines: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you start: - Ensure that [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_advanced_academic_operations.htm&language=en_US) is enabled. 1. [Customize and activate the context definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_create_context_definitions.htm&language=en_US), EduAcadTermEnrlLrnrPrfl. 2. [Create a policy rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_policy_rule_for_learning_requirements.htm&language=en_US) customized to your requirements with these details: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Usage Type | Student Information System | | Usage Subtype | Registration Timeline | | Context Definition | (As created in the previous step) | Use the sample expression set template available with Education Cloud, RegistrationTimelineES, to create a policy rule. 3. Create an academic term registration timeline record. For Eligibility Criteria, select the policy rule created in the previous step. 4. [Customize and activate the flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US): - EDU Student Information: Calculate Registration Timeline Eligibility - EDU Student Information: Run Registration Timeline Calculation Batch Job - EDU Student Information: Apply Registration Timeline Eligibility - EDU Student Information: Run Registration Timeline Application Batch Job Flow templates must be cloned to create the corresponding flows. ## Run Eligibility Verification and Assignment for Registration Timelines Initiate the rule-based process to verify eligibility and assign registration timelines for students enrolled in an academic term. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To run verification and assignment for academic term registration timelines:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

System Administrator profile
Before you start: - Ensure that [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_advanced_academic_operations.htm&language=en_US) is enabled. 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Academic Term Registration Timelines**. 2. Select the academic term registration timeline record for which you want to run the eligibility check. 3. On the Student Eligibility and Timeline Assignment component, select the policy rule, and then click **Apply**. 4. After the batch process completes, click **Assign Registration Timeline**. # Embed Fundraising Intelligence Dashboards in Nonprofit Enhance user visibility into the Fundraising Analytics App by embedding its dashboards in Lightning Experience pages. The dashboards are automatically embedded in homepages when the app is installed. If your homepages have been customized, manually add the Fundraising Analytics Dashboard component by using the Lightning App Builder. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available with: Nonprofit Cloud or Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking in **Enterprise** and **Unlimited** Editions | | User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create and save Lightning pages in the Lightning App Builder: | Customize Application | | To view Lightning pages in the Lightning App Builder: | View Setup and Configuration | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If your homepages are customized or modified, you must manually embed the dashboards. Auto embedding is supported only on default Salesforce org homepages. 1. In your Fundraising Intelligence app, click the app navigation menu and select Home. 2. On the home page, click ![Setup menu gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png) and select **Edit Page**. 3. From the list of standard components, drag the **Fundraising Intelligence Dashboard** onto the page canvas. 4. Select the required dashboard. 5. Save your changes. # Embed Inquiry Flows Into a Third-Party Website If you don't use Experience Cloud for your admissions portal, use Lightning Out to add inquiry flows to your third-party website. See [Use Components Outside Salesforce with Lightning Out (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/lwc/guide/lightning-out.html). # Enable and Configure Features for Volunteer Management Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your volunteer data and provide automation around volunteer management processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Salesforce common components: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
1. Set up [Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_action_plans.htm&language=en_US)— Define the required tasks for a process such as a volunteer initiative or other activities. Actions plans can be applied to the Application Form, Position, and Job Position objects. 2. To create and review applications, set up [Form Framework](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_form_framework.htm&language=en_US). 3. Add [Form Framework components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_form_application_components.htm&language=en_US) to Lightning Record Pages. 4. To track stages for certain objects, set up [Stage Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.stage_management.htm&language=en_US). Stage Management can track stages for these objects. - Volunteer Initiative — For example, track an initiative’s progress through stages and internal approvals, from upcoming and in progress statuses, to completion. - Job Position Assignment — For example, track assignments that need approvals or that need hours approved. - Job Position Shift — For example, track stages to prepare internally for when a shift is upcoming or completed. - Job Position — For example, track stages to support the job positions, from development to fulfillment, and the internal review processes. - Position — For example, track stages to support positions, from development to fulfillment, and the internal review processes. - Application Form — For example, track stages to review and approve applications. 5. Add [Stage Management components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.stage_management_record_stage_overview.htm&language=en_US) to Lightning Record Pages. 6. Set up an [approval process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.approvals_getting_started.htm&language=en_US) for your volunteer initiatives. 7. As a prerequisite to creating an Experience Cloud site, [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&language=en_US). 8. [Create an Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?language=en_US&id=experience.networks_creating.htm). A volunteer portal helps volunteers complete tasks. For example, a portal built on an Experience Cloud site can provide a place for volunteers to register, complete onboarding, attend training or continuing education, view and sign up for volunteer opportunities, upload documentation, and track the hours they’ve volunteered. # Enable Calculated Insights for the Education Data Kit To use the calculated insights that come with the Education data kit, create and activate the calculated insights from the installed data kit in Data 360. A calculated insight is a multidimensional metric that you can analyze and use to build segments.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Data 360
User Permissions Needed  
To enable calculated insights:

Education Cloud Full Access

and

Data 360 Admin
Before you begin, make sure that you [deploy an education data kit data stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_deploy_an_education_data_kit_data_stream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deploy an Education data kit data stream to collect data from Education Cloud and store it in Data 360."). 1. In Data Cloud, click the **Calculated Insights** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Click **Create from a Data Kit**, then click **Next**. 4. Select a calculated insight available in the Education data kit. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Click **Check Syntax**. 7. Click **Activate**. 8. In Schedule, select a time frame to publish the calculated insight. 9. Click **Enable**. # Enable Customizable Rollups Enable customizable rollups to see lifetime donation totals on donor records. Customizable Rollups isan NPSP feature that allows your users to see lifetime donation totals for your donors, directly on the donor records. We highly recommend enabling this feature. For more information, see [Customizable Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm) in the NPSP documentation. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Select **Donations | Customizable Rollups**. 3. Enable Customizable Rollups. # Enable Customizable Rollups Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them. If you're starting from an NPSP Trial in version 3.155 (May 2019) or later, Customizable Rollups are enabled by default. All other orgs will need to enable Customizable Rollups. If you don't know which version of NPSP you're using, check out [Which Version of NPSP Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed.") to find out. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Customizable Rollups are only available in orgs using NPSP and the Household Account Model. Before enabling Customizable Rollups, be sure to review [Things to Know Before Enabling Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_before_enable_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you're starting from an NPSP Trial in version 3.155 (May 2019), Customizable Rollups are enabled by default. All other orgs will need to enable Customizable Rollups."). Also, remember that enabling Customizable Rollups disables User Defined Rollup creation in your org. The User Defined Rollup node will disappear from NPSP Settings, but all UDRs previously created in your org will be preserved and converted to Customizable Rollups. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend that you enable and try out Customizable Rollups in your Sandbox org before turning it on in your Production org. That will allow you to test it out and confirm that you're seeing expected results. Keep in mind that you can also easily move any new rollups you create in your Sandbox org to your Production org using a Change Set. For more information, see [Test Customizable Rollups in your Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_test_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before enabling Customizable Rollups in your Production org, we highly recommend testing and validating the results in a Full or Partial Sandbox. The best way to validate rollup values after enabling Customizable Rollups is to use field history tracking."). To enable Customizable Rollups: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click the button to switch to **Enabled**. ![The Customizable Rollups page in NPSP Settings, with the toggle to Enable Customizable Rollups highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_enable.png) It may take a few moments for NPSP to convert all of your existing rollups. You can safely leave the page. When the deployment is finished, you'll see a Configure Customizable Rollups button that you can use to view the list of Customizable Rollups. Keep in mind that this list will already be populated with all of the NPSP out-of-box rollups and any User Defined Rollups that already existed in your org. You're now ready to edit them or [create new ones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups.")! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you see an error when you click the Configure Customizable Rollups button, your profile may not have access to the CRLP\_RollupUI\_SVC Apex class. For more information, see [Configure Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_custom_rllps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP versions older than 3.155 for customizable rollups."). ![Customizable Rollups page in NPSP Settings. Shows that the toggle is set to Enabled, so the Configure Customizable Rollups, and Reset to Defaults buttons are present.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_enabled_npsp_settings.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When you enable Customizable Rollups, new batch jobs are scheduled to run that night. If you want the new Customizable Rollups to be calculated immediately, you'll need to manually run the batch job. To do so, go to **NPSP Settings** | **Bulk Data Processes** | **Rollup Donations Batch** and click **Run Batch**. ## Disable Customizable Rollups If you decide that Customizable Rollups aren't for you, you can go back to the original rollups functionality. When you disable, rollups go back to the way they worked before you enabled Customizable Rollups. Keep in mind that any changes made while Customizable Rollups was enabled will be retained and visible if Customizable Rollups is enabled again. While the configuration data will continue to exist, it will have no effect on your org. 1. In NPSP Settings, go to **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click the button to switch to **Disabled**. 3. Click **Save**. After you disable Customizable Rollups, the old Rollup batch jobs are re-scheduled for that night. If you want to see the rollups recalculated right away, you'll have to manually run the jobs. To do so, go to **NPSP Settings** | **Bulk Data Processes** | **Rollup Donations Batch** and click **Run Batch**. ## Reset Customizable Rollups If needed, you can reset Customizable Rollups back to its original defaults. **We recommend you use this feature with caution and only if you want to completely wipe out any changes you made while using Customizable Rollups.** Resetting Customizable Rollups makes the following changes: - Removes any new rollups, filter groups, and filter rules you created while using Customizable Rollups. - Resets all NPSP legacy rollups (including any User Defined Rollups) back to their default behavior. This means that the legacy NPSP rollups and User Defined Rollups will be reset to how they were configured when you first enabled Customizable Rollups. You'll lose any customizations you made to them since then. If you want to turn off Customizable Rollups, but preserve changes you made while using the feature, we recommend disabling the feature instead. To reset Customizable Rollups: 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Reset to Defaults**. 4. Click **OK** to confirm that you want to wipe out any changes you've made and reset Customizable Rollups. # Enable EDA Apex Class Access Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them. - **[Enable EDA Apex Class Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_enable_eda_apex_class_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Features such as EDA Settings and Settings Health Check require access to certain EDA Apex classes. Depending on the EDA version that you started with, the System Administrator profile sometimes already has access, but we recommend verifying access for all profiles that need them, and for permission sets as needed. ## Enable EDA Apex Class Access Features such as EDA Settings and Settings Health Check require access to certain EDA Apex classes. Depending on the EDA version that you started with, the System Administrator profile sometimes already has access, but we recommend verifying access for all profiles that need them, and for permission sets as needed. 1. From Setup, search for, then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile name, such as **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Enabled Apex Class Access**. 4. For each feature, make sure that the required Apex classes are enabled.
Feature Apex Classes Required
EDA Settings

  • CMP_SettingsDataProvider

  • STG_Base_CTRL

  • STG_CourseConnections

  • STG_Courses

  • UTIL_Describe

  • AccountModelSettingsController

  • AccountNamingBatchController

  • AccountNamingSettingsController

  • AddressSettingsController

  • AffiliationsSettingsController

  • AffiliationsWithProgramEnrollController

  • ApplicationSettingsController

  • ContactInfoSettingsController

  • CourseConnectionSettingsController

  • EDASettingsController

  • EducationCloudSettingsController

  • ErrorSettingsController

  • HierarchySettingsChangesController

  • PreferredPhoneEmailBatchController

  • ProgramSettingsController

  • ProgramPlanSettingsController

  • RelationshipSettingsController

  • ReleaseGateController

  • VersionCleanupBatchJobController
Settings Health Check

  • HealthCheckController

  • HealthCheckGroupController
# Enable EDA Apex Class Access Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them. - **[Enable EDA Apex Class Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.enable_k12_apex_class_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Features such as EDA Settings and Settings Health Check require access to certain EDA Apex classes. Depending on the EDA version that you started with, the System Administrator profile sometimes already has access, but we recommend verifying access for all profiles that need them, and for permission sets as needed. ## Enable EDA Apex Class Access Features such as EDA Settings and Settings Health Check require access to certain EDA Apex classes. Depending on the EDA version that you started with, the System Administrator profile sometimes already has access, but we recommend verifying access for all profiles that need them, and for permission sets as needed. 1. From Setup, search for, then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile name, such as **System Administrator**. 3. Click **Enabled Apex Class Access**. 4. For each feature, make sure that the required Apex classes are enabled.
Feature Apex Classes Required
EDA Settings

  • CMP_SettingsDataProvider

  • STG_Base_CTRL

  • STG_CourseConnections

  • STG_Courses

  • UTIL_Describe

  • AccountModelSettingsController

  • AccountNamingBatchController

  • AccountNamingSettingsController

  • AddressSettingsController

  • AffiliationsSettingsController

  • AffiliationsWithProgramEnrollController

  • ApplicationSettingsController

  • ContactInfoSettingsController

  • CourseConnectionSettingsController

  • EDASettingsController

  • EducationCloudSettingsController

  • ErrorSettingsController

  • HierarchySettingsChangesController

  • PreferredPhoneEmailBatchController

  • ProgramSettingsController

  • ProgramPlanSettingsController

  • RelationshipSettingsController

  • ReleaseGateController

  • VersionCleanupBatchJobController
Settings Health Check

  • HealthCheckController

  • HealthCheckGroupController
# Enable Einstein Mentoring Summaries Configure your Education Cloud org to use Einstein Mentoring Summaries.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable Mentoring Summaries: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Einstein Mentoring Summaries uses [Einstein Generative AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_about.htm&type=5) and consumes Einstein Requests. [Einstein Generative AI Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_solutions.htm&type=5) are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See [Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/trust-and-compliance-documentation/) for more information. 1. Turn on Mentoring. See [Set Up Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Mentoring in Education Cloud to provide and manage mentoring benefits and programs that connect learners with mentors based on shared interests and goals."). 2. Enable Einstein Comparison View. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud, turn on Einstein AI. 3. Turn on Enable Einstein Comparison View. 3. Provide the required permissions to users. 1. In Setup, find and select **Users**. 2. From the list, select the user that requires access to Einstein Mentoring Summaries. 3. Under Permission Set Assignments, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add the Einstein for Education Cloud Access permission set. 5. Save your changes. # Enable Einstein Skills Generator Configure Salesforce to enable Einstein Skills Generator in the Learning Wizard. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
User Permissions Needed
To enable Skills Generator: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you enable Einstein Skills Generator, complete these prerequisites. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). - Make sure that Academic Operations is set up for your org. - Create a skill learning achievement record type. - Map the skill learning achievement type to the skill record type by creating a skill learning achievement configuration. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Einstein Skills Generator uses [Einstein Generative AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_about.htm) and consumes Einstein Requests. [Einstein Generative AI Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_solutions.htm) are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See [Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/trust-and-compliance-documentation/) for more information. 1. Enable Einstein Skills Generator. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud, enable Einstein AI and then Einstein for Education Cloud. This action turns on only Skills Generator and no other Education Cloud generative AI features. 2. Provide the required permissions to users. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. From the list, select the user that requires access to Einstein Skills Generator. 3. Under Permission Set Assignments, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add the Einstein for Education Cloud Access permission set. 5. Save your changes. # Enable Features that Enhance Fundraising in Education Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your Fundraising data and provide robust automation around Fundraising processes. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To turn on Salesforce common components:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Action Plans Define the required tasks for a process such as a capital campaign, research and development projects, or other fundraising activities. See [Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_action_plans.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Actionable Segmentation Build datasets that contain records that join information across multiple objects according to your fundraising requirements. See [Enable Actionable Segmentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.actionable_segmentation_enable_feature.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Automatic Address Synchronization Keep the account mailing address accurate with the Contact Point Address when you add or update the mailing address on the person account record page. See [Set Up Automatic Address Synchronization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_constituent_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Address management is vital to keeping address data accurate and organized. For constituents, use the contact fields (such as Mailing Address) and for business contacts, use the account fields (such as Billing Address). Furthermore, constituents often have multiple addresses that they use at various times of the year. Track these addresses, or track the constituent's historical addresses, so that you always send outreach materials and gift acknowledgments to the address in use by the constituent."). Interest Tags ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). Interaction Summaries Capture structured, searchable notes of meetings with donors that use smart search and filters. Add tags for advancement topics to create action items, all in one place. See [Enable and Configure Interaction Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_enable_config_interaction_summaries.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Life Events Capture and visualize important life events of donors to deepen relationships by leveraging the details to identify opportunities and devise personalized offers and engagement. See [Events and Milestones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_life_events_business_milestones_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Record Alert Alert staff members who are responsible for fundraising to the changes in records that require action so that the staff can take necessary action. See [Turn on Record Alert Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.record_alerts_turn_on_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Timeline Bring in multiple objects into one list so that staff can reference a chronological view of the engagement of constituents to evaluate the progress and take action. See [Set Up a Timeline in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.timeline_client_information.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Enable Features that Enhance Fundraising in Nonprofit Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your Fundraising data and provide robust automation around Fundraising processes. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To turn on Salesforce common components:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Action Plans Define the required tasks for a process such as a capital campaign, research and development projects, or other fundraising activities. See [Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_action_plans.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Actionable Segmentation Build datasets that contain records that join information across multiple objects according to your fundraising requirements. See [Enable Actionable Segmentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.actionable_segmentation_enable_feature.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Automatic Address Synchronization Keep the account mailing address accurate with the Contact Point Address when you add or update the mailing address on the person account record page. See [Set Up Automatic Address Synchronization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_constituent_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Address management is vital to keeping address data accurate and organized. For constituents, use the contact fields (such as Mailing Address) and for business contacts, use the account fields (such as Billing Address). Furthermore, constituents often have multiple addresses that they use at various times of the year. Track these addresses, or track the constituent's historical addresses, so that you always send outreach materials and gift acknowledgments to the address in use by the constituent."). Interest Tags Identify key interests, preferences, and needs of donors. Deepen relations to build a connection with donors by speaking a common language. Users with the Fundraising\_Admin or Fundraising\_User permission set group, or Education Cloud Full Access permission set, can use Interest Tags on Accounts (including Person Accounts), Campaigns, and Outreach Source Codes (when enabled). See [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). Interaction Summaries Capture structured, searchable notes of meetings with donors that use smart search and filters. Add tags for advancement topics to create action items, all in one place. See [Enable and Configure Interaction Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_enable_config_interaction_summaries.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Life Events Capture and visualize important life events of donors to deepen relationships by leveraging the details to identify opportunities and devise personalized offers and engagement. See [Events and Milestones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_life_events_business_milestones_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Record Alert Alert staff members who are responsible for fundraising to the changes in records that require action so that the staff can take necessary action. See [Turn on Record Alert Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.record_alerts_turn_on_access.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Timeline Bring in multiple objects into one list so that staff can reference a chronological view of the engagement of constituents to evaluate the progress and take action. See [Set Up a Timeline in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.timeline_client_information.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Enable Funding Request Collaboration Prepare Salesforce and your grants portal for applicants to collaborate on Funding Requests. - **[Allow Funding Request Collaborators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enable_fnd_request_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow applicants to invite collaborators on Funding Requests in the grants portal. - **[Update Invitation to Collaborators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enable_fnd_request_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the email template to reflect your organization's branding and messaging. - **[Use a Flow to Share Related Records with Collaborators (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enable_fnd_request_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Skip this step if your organization's external sharing model is set to Read/Write or you don't want collaborators in the grants portal to see details beyond what's in the Funding Request. ## Allow Funding Request Collaborators Allow applicants to invite collaborators on Funding Requests in the grants portal. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Metadata in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Grants Management Settings, click **Manage Records**. 4. Edit the **GlobalFeaturesSettings**. 5. Select **Funding Request Collaboration** to turn on the ability to collaborate. 6. Enter how long the invitation is available in seconds in **Collaborator Invitation Time Length**. The default is 7 days (604,800 seconds). 7. Enter your **Collaborator Invitation URL**. Find the base URL in your portal by looking at the properties of the Collaborator Invitation page in Builder and append it to your portal's URL. For example, https://customdomain.yourgrantsportal.com/s/collaborator-invitation. 8. Enter the Unique Name of your self-signed certificate in **Collaborator Invitation Certificate Name**. Learn how to create a self-signed certificate in [Generate a Self-Signed Certificate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.security_keys_creating.htm&type=5). 9. Save your work. ## Update Invitation to Collaborators Update the email template to reflect your organization's branding and messaging. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), find and select **Email Templates**. 2. Select **Grants Management: Email Invitation for Collaborators**. 3. Edit the template and update the message content. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're unable to edit the template, review [Select Who Can Work in Email Template Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.email_template_builder_users.htm&type=5). 4. Save your work. The [Grants Management: Send Invitations to Collaborators (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_send_invitations_to_collaborators.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's included in the Funding Request collaborators invitation flow.") flow includes the logic for when the email is sent. Modify the flow criteria to fit your organization's needs. Learn more in [Create or Modify a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a flow or modify the Create Application flow to suit your nonprofit organization’s needs."). ## Use a Flow to Share Related Records with Collaborators (Optional) Skip this step if your organization's external sharing model is set to Read/Write or you don't want collaborators in the grants portal to see details beyond what's in the Funding Request. The Funding Request and records related to the Funding Request are automatically shared with collaborators through a public group. The Applying Organization and Applying Contact records aren't shared in the public group, and these fields are blank for collaborators in the grants portal unless you explicitly share the records. Activate the [Grants Management: Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_share_account_contact_wcollaborators.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's included in the flow that shares the Applying Organization and Applying Contact with a Funding Request Collaborator.") flow to share the applying organization's information. Modify the flow if you need to share additional records with collaborators. The Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample) flow: - Assumes Contact sharing is set to Controlled by Parent. - Isn't active by default. Activate and test this flow in a sandbox before using it in production. Record sharing in Salesforce is highly dependent on your org's configuration. # Enable Fundraising in Education To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Fundraising:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Try out Fundraising in a sandbox before turning it on in your Salesforce org. After you turn on Fundraising, you can't turn it off. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Turn on Fundraising. ## Configure Fundraising Settings in Education After you turn on Fundraising, configure general Fundraising settings for extension day and transaction counts, gift entry, and donor matching.
User Permissions Needed
To configure Fundraising settings:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. In Installment Extension Day Count, enter how many days before or after a due date Fundraising marks an unpaid gift commitment transaction as a new installment. An unpaid transaction within this grace period is considered a gift transaction. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important We don't recommend setting this count to zero because it shrinks the transaction-to-installment matching window down to only one exact date. An exact date matching window can incorrectly set unpaid gifts as lapsed. 3. In Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, specify the number of sequentially unpaid installments that changes the gift commitment status to Lapsed. If you set the Unpaid Transaction Count to zero, then the status doesn't update. 4. In Failing Transaction Count, specify the number of sequentially failed installments that changes the gift commitment status to Failing. If you set the Failing Transaction Count to zero, then the status doesn't update. 5. To autocreate the next transaction in a recurring schedule, select **Create Recurring Schedule Transaction**. If you decline to turn on this setting, always manually create the next transaction in recurring schedules. 6. To close a recurring commitment when it has no ongoing or future schedule and no unpaid transactions, select **Auto Close Recurring Commitment**. The gift commitment auto-closes when the start date and end date on the schedule has passed. 7. To use enhanced concurrent gift commitment processing, turn on **NextGen Commitment Processing**. For more information, see [Schedule a Gift Commitment Batch Processing Job in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_schedule_gift_commitment_processing_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters."). 8. To set a field to use as the external ID for donor lookup during gift entry, select the custom field from the External ID picklist. By default, Fundraising uses the donor name for the lookup. When a unique external ID matches an existing Account record, donor lookup uses the external ID and donor name. 9. To turn on donor matching for the Business Process API, in the Donor Matching Method list, select **Duplicate Management Rules**. 10. Save your changes. 11. For a flexible table format for gift entry, in Setup, search for Fundraising, select **Gift Entry**, and turn on **Gift Entry Grid**. 12. To create households automatically, go to Setup, search for household, select **Household Automation**, and turn on **Automatic Household Creation**. Automatic Household Creation uses a default name format if either of these is true: - You didn't turn on Automatic Household Naming. - You don't have an active household naming template that sets the `Account.Name` field as the destination. In these cases, the auto-generated household name format is `{LastName} Household`. 13. To create and update household names and greetings automatically, go to Setup, search for household, select **Household Naming Settings**, and turn on **Automatic Household Naming**. Before Household Naming can create household names and greetings, set up an active household naming template. See [Automatically Generate and Maintain Household Names and Greetings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_automatic_household_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time."). # Enable Fundraising in Nonprofit To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed
To turn on Fundraising:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Try out Fundraising in a sandbox before turning it on in your Salesforce org. After you turn on Fundraising, you can't turn it off. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Turn on Fundraising. ## Configure Fundraising Settings in Nonprofit After you turn on Fundraising, configure general Fundraising settings for extension day and transaction counts, gift entry, and donor matching.
User Permissions Needed
To configure Fundraising settings:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. In Installment Extension Day Count, enter how many days before or after a due date Fundraising marks an unpaid gift commitment transaction as a new installment. An unpaid transaction within this grace period is considered a gift transaction. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important We don't recommend setting this count to zero because it shrinks the transaction-to-installment matching window down to only one exact date. An exact date matching window can incorrectly set unpaid gifts as lapsed. 3. In Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, specify the number of sequentially unpaid installments that changes the gift commitment status to Lapsed. If you set the Unpaid Transaction Count to zero, then the status doesn't update. 4. In Failing Transaction Count, specify the number of sequentially failed installments that changes the gift commitment status to Failing. If you set the Failing Transaction Count to zero, then the status doesn't update. 5. To autocreate the next transaction in a recurring schedule, select **Create Recurring Schedule Transaction**. If you decline to turn on this setting, always manually create the next transaction in recurring schedules. 6. To close a recurring commitment when it has no ongoing or future schedule and no unpaid transactions, select **Auto Close Recurring Commitment**. The gift commitment auto-closes when the start date and end date on the schedule has passed. 7. To use enhanced concurrent gift commitment processing, turn on **NextGen Commitment Processing**. For more information, see [Schedule a Gift Commitment Batch Processing Job in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_schedule_gift_commitment_processing_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters."). 8. To set a field to use as the external ID for donor lookup during gift entry, select the custom field from the External ID picklist. By default, Fundraising uses the donor name for the lookup. When a unique external ID matches an existing Account record, donor lookup uses the external ID and donor name. 9. To turn on donor matching for the Business Process API, in the Donor Matching Method list, select **Duplicate Management Rules**. 10. Save your changes. 11. For a flexible table format for gift entry, in Setup, search for Fundraising, select **Gift Entry**, and turn on **Gift Entry Grid**. 12. To create households automatically, go to Setup, search for household, select **Household Automation**, and turn on **Automatic Household Creation**. Automatic Household Creation uses a default name format if either of these is true: - You didn't turn on Automatic Household Naming. - You don't have an active household naming template that sets the `Account.Name` field as the destination. In these cases, the auto-generated household name format is `{LastName} Household`. 13. To create and update household names and greetings automatically, go to Setup, search for household, select **Household Naming Settings**, and turn on **Automatic Household Naming**. Before Household Naming can create household names and greetings, set up an active household naming template. See [Automatically Generate and Maintain Household Names and Greetings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_automatic_household_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time."). # Enable Learners to Access the Appointment Setup Flow Configure sharing rules for learners to grant them the required read and write access to their service appointment records, and read access to their case records.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable learners to access appointments: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. In the Sharing Sets section, click **New**. 3. Enter a label and name, and if needed, a description. Salesforce shows the label on the user interface. The sharing set name is the unique name that the API uses. 4. Add the profile that you created for the appointment Experience site. 5. In the Select Objects section, add the **Service Appointment** object. ![Example sharing set editing](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_sharing_set1.png) 6. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up**. 7. Select the **Contact.Account** user. 8. Select the **Account** target. 9. Select the **Read/Write** access level. ![Access mapping for service appointments](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_sharing_set2.png) 10. Click **Update**. 11. On the Sharing Set page, add the **Case** object. 12. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up** next to the Case object. 13. Select the **Contact** user. 14. Select the **Account.PersonContact** target. 15. Select the **Read Only** access level. ![Access mapping for cases](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_sharing_set3.png) 16. Click **Update**. 17. Save your changes. # Enable Learners to Schedule Appointments Via Self-Service Configure learners as Experience Cloud users to grant them access to a preconfigured self-service portal to schedule appointments, on desktop or mobile. When learners and staff log in to the portal, they get a comprehensive view of their schedule, and see their past and upcoming appointments. From that portal, they can choose topics, time slots, appointment channels, and teams or team members for appointments. If you configure video calls with AWS Chime, learners can also start virtual appointments directly from there. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can configure appointment data for the learners portal. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the portal. **How**: - Set up all appointment data using Education Cloud objects. - To add users to the learners portal, go to the All Sites page in Setup. - To grant learners access to their appointment records, go to the Settings page under Digital Experiences in Setup. - To create your own portal on Experience Cloud instead of using the preconfigured one, go to the All Sites page in Setup. See Also: - [Set Up Appointment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm) - [Manage the Appointment Experience in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_manage_appt_exp.htm) # Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view. - **[Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_mass_create_pes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view. ## Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **List View Button Layout**. 5. Next to the List View layout, click ![Dropdown list icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/downarrowicon.png), then select **Edit**. 6. In the Available Quick Actions list, select **Add Contact to Program**, then click ![Arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/addfieldarrow.png) to move it to Selected Quick Actions. 7. Save your update. You can now mass create Program Engagements using the **Add Contact to Program** button. ![Shows the Add Contact to Program button on the Contacts tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/add_contacts_to_prog_quick_action.png) # Enable Person Accounts for Fundraising in Education Set up person accounts to manage Fundraising users. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable person accounts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). # Enable Person Accounts for Fundraising in Nonprofit Set up person accounts to manage Fundraising users. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To enable person accounts:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). # Enable Public Access Configure which users can access the fundseeker portal. - **[Enable Public Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_enable_public_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating the fundseeker portal, decide how visible you want it to be to people who haven’t registered for an account or logged in. These are considered guest users. ## Enable Public Access After creating the fundseeker portal, decide how visible you want it to be to people who haven’t registered for an account or logged in. These are considered guest users. For example, if you want guest users to see the home page and view Funding Programs without registering for an account, you can enable public access. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your new portal. 4. If this is your first time in your fundseeker portal, click **Continue** to learn more about using Experience Builder. If you are ready to start configuring the template, close out of the Experience Builder introduction pop-up. 5. Click ![Settings icon next to Home](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/enable_access_settings.png), then select **Public** from Page Access. This allows guest users to view the Grantee Portal Home Page. When deselected, a guest user is required to register and log in to view your portal. ![Select Public from Page Access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/enable_access_2.png) 6. Click ![Site Settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/enable_access_settings_2_1.png) to open Settings. 7. Select **Public can access the site** to allow users to view your site based on your guest user profile. This makes pages such as View Funding Programs accessible to guest users. ![Select Public can access the site.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/ofm_publicaccess.png) These settings enable guest users' access to your portal. You still need to ensure the appropriate organization-wide defaults and object and field level access are set for the guest user profile based on what you want the guest user to see. # Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud Before you set up the appointment feature, turn on Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Salesforce Scheduler Settings, and then select **Salesforce Scheduler Settings**. 2. Find and turn on: - **Event Management** - **Resource Appointment Sharing** - **Multiple Topics for Shifts** - If you already use Salesforce Scheduler, complete these [prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.ls_prereqs_multiple_topics_for_shifts.htm&type=5&language=en_US) before you turn on this setting. - **Schedule Appointments Using Engagement Channels** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You don't have to turn on the Drop In Appointment setting to configure drop-in availability. This setting is required only for [waitlists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_lobby_management_for_drop_in_appointments.htm&type=5). 3. Click **Enable** in the confirmation window. # Enable Search By Location To allow users to search for addresses in a specific geographical range, optionally, turn on geocoding rules and update data manager longitude and latitude fields in Data Processing Engine. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure data integration rules: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Configure Geocodes for Account Billing Address rule. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Integration Rules and then select **Geocodes for Account Billing Address**. 2. Activate the rule using the default settings. 2. Update the account billing longitude and latitude fields in Data Manager after you deploy the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine job. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Pipeline and then select **Getting Started**. 2. Click **Launch Data Manager** and then click **Connections**. 3. In SFDC\_LOCAL, select **Account**. 4. For the Billing Latitude and Billing Longitude columns, set Precision to 13 and Scale to 10. 5. Repeat to set the same Latitude and Longitude values for EduInstSearchableProfile. SEE ALSO: - [Activate the Data Integration Rule for a Data Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.ddc_data_integration_rule_activating.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Enable Shifts in Scheduling Policy Education Cloud uses shifts from the staff's service territory to determine their available time slots.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable shifts for Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scheduling Policies, and then select **Scheduling Policies**. 2. Next to the policy to update, click **Edit**. 3. Select **Use service territory member’s shift**, and then save your changes. # Enable Student Management Consolidate important student information in a single view. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To enable Student Management: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Next to Set Up Student Management, turn on Student Management. The Student Management app becomes available in the App Launcher. # Enable Student Success in Your Org Enable Student Success to create a central place that offers support to learners for academics, athletics, health, financial aid, and more.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable Student Success: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Student Success App, click **Enable**. When enabled: - The Student Success app is available on the App Launcher. - Configuration settings for the Timeline component are available. However, you must still enable Timeline. - Education Cloud-specific picklist values are available for fields in objects associated with case and program management. # Enable Transaction Journal Creation After you configure accounting sets and complete all of the other requirements, turn on transaction journal creation.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable transaction journal creation: | Manage Accounting Subledger | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_important.png) Important Transaction journal creation is turned off by default. Don't turn it on before your Accounting Subledger implementation is complete and tested in a sandbox. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Settings, and then select **Accounting Settings**. 2. Turn on **Transaction Journal Creation**. # Enable Virtual Calls Before you enable Virtual Calls, confirm that you configured Salesforce Scheduler.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Enable Video Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.ls_enable_video_calls.htm) - [Set Up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, and configure sharing and permissions settings. Then, create the supporting data types for appointment data modeling.") # Enforce Time Conflict Validation for Registration Prevent students from registering for overlapping course sections by turning on time conflict enforcement. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations and enforce time conflict validation: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you start, [set up Course Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To streamline students' course registration on your Experience Cloud site, turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign the appropriate permission sets."). Course Registration automatically checks for time conflicts in a student’s registration cart when a section’s schedule overlaps with another section. Time conflict validation looks for these conditions and sends warnings to the cart. - Recurrences in course offering schedules with the same start and end dates and times - Scheduling conflicts among sections in the same academic session - Sections in different academic sessions with overlapping dates The optional time conflict enforcement blocks students from registering for overlapping sections, but it ignores waitlists. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Academic Operations, make sure that Advanced Academic Operations is turned on. 3. Turn on **Enforce Time Conflicts**. Time conflict enforcement is reversible. # Engage Alumni on Your Experience Cloud Site with Profile Components Enhance your Experience Cloud site with new Lightning web components for alumni engagement. With the components, alumni users can create a profile and add it to an alumni directory where they can connect with other alumni from your institution. Alumni users can upload a photo to their profile, and control the information that appears in the directory. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can create or modify sites in Experience Builder. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the alumni portal. **How**: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. Select your portal, and then add and configure each component by using Experience Builder. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Set Up Your Alumni Community](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm) # Engage Volunteers Connect with your volunteers by sending emails, and set up your website to help volunteers learn about opportunities. - **[Stay in Touch with your Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_stay_in_touch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An important part of attracting and retaining good volunteers is making sure they feel connected to your organization and appreciated by the people who work there. Imagine signing up to volunteer for an event months before it happens, but never receiving a reminder. Or spending time volunteering at an event, but never receiving acknowledgment of your time or a simple thank you note. Appreciating your volunteers by staying in touch is key to ensuring that they come back to volunteer again. - **[Engage Volunteers on your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This section assumes your Administrator integrated Volunteers for Salesforce with your website. And we sure hope they did! Using Volunteers for Salesforce with your website provides the opportunity for volunteers to visit your website and see a calendar of the Job and Shift offerings you entered in Volunteers for Salesforce. Not only can they see the calendar or a list of Job offerings, but they can sign up right from the page and that information will be saved in Volunteers for Salesforce. # Engage Volunteers on your Website This section assumes your Administrator integrated Volunteers for Salesforce with your website. And we sure hope they did! Using Volunteers for Salesforce with your website provides the opportunity for volunteers to visit your website and see a calendar of the Job and Shift offerings you entered in Volunteers for Salesforce. Not only can they see the calendar or a list of Job offerings, but they can sign up right from the page and that information will be saved in Volunteers for Salesforce. We're going to show examples of some of the most commonly used website pages. There are additional pages that may be enabled on your website. These pages are customizable, so they may look different than what you see here. If you're the Admin for your organization and want more information about setting up any of these website features, see [Decide Which Pages to Add to Your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_decide_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Which Volunteers for Salesforce pages do you want to make available on your website? Pick and choose the ones that make sense. They work independently of each other."). - **[View a Calendar with Job and Shift Listings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the calendar view and actions that volunteers can take from your website. - **[View a Listing of Available Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From this page, volunteers can click the signup link to sign up for a particular Shift. - **[Sign Up for a Job or Shift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a volunteer clicks a signup link on either the Job Calendar or Job listing page, they see this Volunteer Sign Up window. If the volunteer fills in the required information and clicks Sign Up, Volunteers for Salesforce will try to match the first name, last name, and email against your database to see if there is a matching Contact. If there is a matching Contact, Volunteers for Salesforce updates the Contact with information about the Shift and hours. If there isn't a matching Contact, Volunteers for Salesforce creates a new Contact record with the Volunteer Status set to New Sign Up. - **[Log Volunteer Hours](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From this page, a Volunteer can log hours for a Job or Shift they worked for your organization. They can select the specific Job and Shift, and report on any extra hours worked. If a Job doesn't have shifts, a Volunteer can log hours for any date range. - **[View a Personalized Volunteer Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From this page, a volunteer can see their Contact and Volunteer Information, upcoming Job Shifts, and Volunteer History. They can also click the Report your Volunteer Hours link at the top of the page to report extra hours. ## View a Calendar with Job and Shift Listings Review the calendar view and actions that volunteers can take from your website. ![Job and Shift listsings on a calendar view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_job_calendar.png) On this page, potential volunteers can click on a Shift to see details and sign up. ![Shift detail](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_shift_detail.png) ## View a Listing of Available Opportunities From this page, volunteers can click the signup link to sign up for a particular Shift. ![Job listings on website](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_job_listings.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Volunteers for Salesforce displays up to the first 200 Shifts by default. To see a set of 200 Shifts further into the future, you can filter based on Shift ID, number of months' worth of Shifts, number of days' worth of Shifts, or Date. ## Sign Up for a Job or Shift When a volunteer clicks a signup link on either the Job Calendar or Job listing page, they see this Volunteer Sign Up window. If the volunteer fills in the required information and clicks Sign Up, Volunteers for Salesforce will try to match the first name, last name, and email against your database to see if there is a matching Contact. If there is a matching Contact, Volunteers for Salesforce updates the Contact with information about the Shift and hours. If there isn't a matching Contact, Volunteers for Salesforce creates a new Contact record with the Volunteer Status set to New Sign Up. ![Signup form on the website](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_signup.png) V4S also sends two emails: one to the person to thank them for signing up, and one to the Volunteer Manager alerting them about the new signup. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note These emails are controlled by email templates and workflow rules that come prepackaged with V4S. If the emails aren't being sent, the templates or workflow rules may be disabled. ## Log Volunteer Hours From this page, a Volunteer can log hours for a Job or Shift they worked for your organization. They can select the specific Job and Shift, and report on any extra hours worked. If a Job doesn't have shifts, a Volunteer can log hours for any date range. ![Form to report volunteer hours on the website](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_report_hours.png) ## View a Personalized Volunteer Page From this page, a volunteer can see their Contact and Volunteer Information, upcoming Job Shifts, and Volunteer History. They can also click the Report your Volunteer Hours link at the top of the page to report extra hours. ![Personalized website page for a volunteer](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_personalized_page.png) Whether in Sarah's community kitchen or at your organization's next event, we hope that showing volunteers their cumulative contributions over the days and weeks helps to inspire even higher levels of passion, commitment, and engagement. ![Volunteers in food service line](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_volunteers_serving.png) # Engagement Visualization Panel Education Cloud's Engagement Visualization Lightning web component shows the Data 360 calculated insights related to an individual and Einstein generative AI prompt responses grounded in CRM and Data 360 data. You can configure the component to show only calculated insights, only prompt responses, or a combination of both.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
You can use the Engagement Visualization component for any data stream, data model object (DMO), or calculated insight related to an individual DMO, unified individual, or unified individual link. The prompt response is equally flexible. You can configure the Engagement Visualization prompt template type to query virtually any record that you want from Data 360 or your Education Cloud CRM. To use calculated insights that contain the unified individual DMO in the Engagement Visualization component, create a Contact data stream and map it for the identity resolution process. See [Individual Object Data Modeling Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_identity_resolution_data_modeling_individual.htm&language=en_US). ## Add the Engagement Visualization Panel to Record Pages Add and configure the Engagement Visualization Panel Lightning web component to the Person Account and Contact record pages.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
User Permissions Needed  
To add the Engagement Visualization Panel:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Use Einstein Engagement Visualization

AND

Manage Prompt Templates
1. In the Alumni app, in the App Launcher, find and select **Accounts**. 2. Open a person account record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. Click **Engagement Details**. 5. Drag the Engagement Panel component to the Engagement Details section. 6. Enter a title for the component. 7. In Explainer Text, enter a description of the component. 8. Select a data space. 9. Select a calculated insight. 10. Select **UnifiedIndividual\_dtm** as the individual object reference. 11. Select **Unified Link Individual** as the unified individual link. 12. Select **Show count**. 13. Select **VolunteerismActivities\_c** as the count field. 14. Select **Show status**. 15. Select **VolunteerismStatus\_c** as the status field. 16. Select **Use prompt response**. 17. Select the prompt template that you want to use. 18. Select **Show prompt response button**. 19. Enter the label text for the button. For example, enter Run my prompts. 20. Save your changes. # Enhance Your Learner Portal for Program Enrollment Add new Lightning web components for program enrollment to your Experience Cloud site, including EDUProgramMgmtProgramHome, EDUProgramMgmtProgramOverview and EDUProgramMgmtPgmEnrlRecordPage FlexCards, and new pages for Programs and Assessments. Learners can use them to explore new support programs and to self-enroll, take assessments, and view their submitted responses. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can create or modify sites in Experience Builder. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the learner portal. **How**: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. Select your learner portal , then add and configure each component by using Experience Builder. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Success Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_learner_portal_with_student_success_components.htm) # Enhanced Application (Sample) We’ve included the Enhanced Application (Sample) flow that condenses the default application experience using the Create Application flow from three screens to one screen. This is a sample flow and includes example application language, unmapped custom fields, and a file upload component within a single page. See [Create or Modify a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm) for more information on customizing a flow for your organization. ![Overview of the Enhanced Application (Sample) flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/enhancedappflow_1.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Decision: Is Logged In? Checks if the user is logged in to the portal.
3. Screen: Log In or Sign Up Directs the user to register or log in to the portal.
4. Get Records: Get Contact

Searches for and finds the user's Contact record to display information about the user's organization as long as the Contact isn’t related to the current site's self-registration Account. 

If the user isn’t a site user or the user is related to the site's self-registration Account, no record is returned.
5. Get Records: Get Funding Program Searches for and finds the Funding Program to generate and show the Funding Program's Name on the application.
6. Screen: Application

Collects information and attachments from an applicant that are saved to a new Funding Request when submitted.

Note
Note This application includes fictitious information and unmapped custom fields. Review and test any flow prior to launching it to grantseekers.
7. Assignment: Assign to Funding Request Assigns the information submitted in the application to the new Funding Request record.
8. Create Records: Insert Funding Request Creates the new Funding Request record.
9. Loop: Link Files Creates the ContentDocumentLink record that links the uploaded attachments to the new Funding Request record.
10. Assignment: Create File Link Creates the ContentDocumentLink record to link the attachment to the new Funding Request record.
11. Assignment: Add Link to Collection Adds the ContentDocumentLink record, which links the attachment to the new Funding Request record, to the collection of ContentDocumentLink records.
12. Create Records: Insert File Links Adds the ContentDocumentLink records from the attachments to the Funding Request record.
13. Screen: Navigate to Application Navigates the user to the new Funding Request record.
# Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide This guide is for system administrators to plan and perform the upgrade from Legacy to Enhanced Recurring Donations in NPSP. Also includes information about using the Enhanced Recurring Donations features. [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/NPSP_RecurringDonations_Upgrade_Guide.pdf) (in PDF format) This guide provides information on the Enhanced Recurring Donations upgrade process, including prerequisites, considerations, and error handling. Included are step-by-step instructions for the upgrade process from testing in a Sandbox, to installing in your production org, plus detailed post-upgrade and troubleshooting tips. ## Audience and Prerequisites To use this guide successfully, you must be a System Administrator with detailed knowledge of both NPSP and the customizations present in your org. You should be comfortable with a wide variety of admin tasks, such as managing workflows, running batch processes, managing user profiles, and troubleshooting errors. # Enroll a Learner in a Learning Program Use the Enroll Admitted Student action in Education Cloud to enroll an admitted student into a learning program. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To enroll a learner in a learning program: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Individual Applications**. 2. Click the individual application record of the student that you want to enroll. 3. Click **Enroll Admitted Student**. 4. Select the learning program, learning program plan, and academic term. 5. Click **Enroll**. SEE ALSO: - [Automate Learner Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_learner_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Enroll Applicants flow in Education Cloud to automatically enroll admitted students.") # Enrollment Eligibility Use educational characteristics to manage enrollment eligibility and communicate eligibility criteria to students during course registration. Registrars define and assign identity-based attributes to students that apply to specific time frames. The registration process evaluates a student's attributes against course requirements to determine their eligibility. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
Educational characteristics define time-bound, identity-based attributes for students, such as field of study, honors status, or cohort affiliation, to determine eligibility for course registration. For example, the registrar creates Biology Major, Senior, and Junior educational characteristics for the Academic Profile type. For the Spring academic term, the registrar assigns Biology Major and Senior to Student A, and Biology Major and Junior to Student B. Each educational characteristic record generates a corresponding educational characteristic requirement record for assignment to courses. To prepare for the Spring registration period, the registrar defines and then assigns the Biology Major and Senior requirements to courses that only accept seniors in Biology. For courses open to both juniors and seniors, the registrar uses a guided setup to define the requirement logic—(Junior OR Senior) AND Biology Major. During Spring registration, Student A is eligible to register for both sets of courses. Student B is only eligible to register for courses that accept juniors. In the Course Search and Registration portal, students can see the requirements for all courses and make informed enrollment decisions. - **[Prerequisites for Educational Characteristics Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prereqs_for_educhars_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create educational characteristics and requirements for enrollment eligibility, set up Course Search and Registration. - **[Create and Assign Educational Characteristics to Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_asign_educahrs_to_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To determine a student's eligibility for a course during a specific time frame, define and assign educational characteristics. - **[Assign Educational Characteristic Requirements to Courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_educhar_reqs_to_courses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To confirm a student’s eligibility during registration, assign educational characteristic requirements to a learning or a course offering. - **[Create a Rule for Multiple Educational Characteristic Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_complex_educhar_reqs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the guided setup to include multiple educational characteristic requirements in a rule. For example, define a requirement that accepts juniors and seniors, or one that accepts juniors or seniors only with an Honors status. # Enter Additional Donations for an Existing Recurring Donation Learn how to enter an installment Opportunity when your donor asks to make an additional donation along with their regular Recurring Donation. NPSP creates installment Opportunities according to the schedule information on the Recurring Donation record. Sometimes though, a donor might make another donation in addition to their regular donation. That's great! Here's all you need to do: 1. Create an Opportunity for the additional donation. 2. Enter the Primary Contact, Amount, Close Date, and Stage, plus any additional information. 3. In the **Recurring Donation** field, add your donor's existing Recurring Donation record. 4. **Save** the record. ![An Opportunity with the Recurring Donation field populated.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/additional-donation.png) # Enter Gifts in Gift Entry Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series videos about Gift Entry: [NPSP Single Gift Entry](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=W8cXKhWREU0) and [Enter Gifts Into Gift Entry Batches.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SZBkJjc0TZc) - **[Overview of Entering Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gift Entry gives you the ability to enter gifts one at a time or as a collection. With Gift Entry, users can enter batch and single gifts in a way that's accurate, fast, and flexible. - **[Enter Single Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How you enter a single gift depends on whether the donor already exists in Salesforce or whether you create a donor. - **[Enter a Collection of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Gift Entry to enter a collection of gifts. - **[Customize Batch Table Columns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you have many fields on your form, the table at the bottom of the screen that lists the gifts can become cramped and difficult to read. Customize the form fields in the gift table. - **[Edit or Delete Gifts in an Unprocessed Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit or remove gifts in an unprocessed batch. ## Overview of Entering Gifts in Gift Entry Gift Entry gives you the ability to enter gifts one at a time or as a collection. With Gift Entry, users can enter batch and single gifts in a way that's accurate, fast, and flexible. With Gift Entry, users can enter batch and single gifts in a way that's accurate, fast, and flexible. Gift Entry uses the [NPSP Data Importer and Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_di_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer for regular data import and custom integrations. It's also the engine that powers Gift Entry and Elevate.") to add constituent and donation data in the appropriate NPSP and standard Salesforce objects. Gift Entry gives you the ability to enter gifts one at a time or as a collection. When you're on the Gift Entry form, the process is similar for either operation. How you get to the form or what you do when you save the gift varies slightly. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift Entry uses the record-matching features in NPSP Data Importer. Learn more in [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching."). ## Enter Single Gifts How you enter a single gift depends on whether the donor already exists in Salesforce or whether you create a donor. How you enter a single gift depends on whether the donor already exists in Salesforce or whether you create a donor. To enter a single donation for an existing donor: 1. Find and select the Organization Account or individual Contact for this donation. 2. Click **New Gift**. 3. Add any Organization Account or Contact information that may not have auto populated in the Single Gift Entry form. Information updated in the form, like address or phone number, is reflected on the donor's record when the gift is processed. 4. Ensure the gift is associated with the appropriate Opportunity or Payment record, so that you don't duplicate existing data. If the donor has any existing open Payments, access those records from the message about pending donations. If you don't see the message, skip this step and go to step 5. ![Pending donation message includes a link to review donations.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/pending_donations.png) 1. In the pending donations message, click **Review Donations**. 2. Review the list of Payments that haven't been paid and their related Opportunities. 3. From the potential options, choose one of the following: - Add or update Payments on an existing open Opportunity by clicking **Add new Payment** or **Update this Payment**. (For more information about Opportunities with multiple Payments, see [Manage Pledges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and manage pledges for gifts with multiple payments.").) - For an open Opportunity without any Payments, click **Add new Payment** (or **Update this Opportunity** if you don't use Payments). - If none of the existing donations match, click **Alternatively, create a new Opportunity**. As an example, let's assume you're entering a $50 donation that Antonio Gomez made on 3/31. When you click **Review Donations**, you see these existing open donations for Antonio. The open $50 Opportunity with a close date of 3/31 looks like a good match for this donation, so you might choose to add a Payment to that one. ![Review Donations pane](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/review_donations_modal.png) 4. On the Gift Entry form, verify the name of the Payment and the automatically filled in donation information. If you change your mind about the selected donation, click **Select a different donation**. You'll then have the ability to select another. 5. At the end of the Single Gift Entry form, enter the donation information. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can adjust your templates and Advanced Mapping to allow Contact Address fields to auto-populate. To learn more, see [Adjust Gift Entry and Advanced Mapping to Populate Contact Address Fields (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form."). 6. In the form, enter the Donation Date and the Donation Amount. 7. If your admin has set up campaigns, in the **Primary Campaign Source** field, search for and select the allocation. 8. From the **Payment Method** list, select how the donation was made. 9. Save the gift. To enter a single gift for a new donor: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click **New Single Gift**. 3. In the Single Gift Entry form, enter or confirm the details for the donor. Use your mouse or Tab key to navigate between cells. 4. For **Donor Type**, select either Account1 (an Organization Account donor) or Contact1 (an individual Contact donor). 5. Double-check that the donor doesn't already exist in Salesforce by searching for the donor in the corresponding Account or Contact fields. If you have several people or organizations with similar names, start typing the name and click **Show All Results for...** to see additional information about the records that are found. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Enhanced search works for any lookup field on the form. You can even use it to search for information, like external IDs, in other fields on the object. Customize the fields in the expanded search results by updating the object's Search Layout. Read more in [Customize Search Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.customizing_search_layouts.htm&type=5). 6. In the Add or Edit Contact or the Add or Edit Organization account section, enter information for the new contact. For example, here we've entered information for the new Contact, Danny Mayo. ![Danny Mayo's name and email address are added in the Add or Edit Contact section.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ge_new_contact.png) 7. Enter the Donation Date and Donation Amount. 8. If your Admin has set up campaigns, in the Primary Campaign Sources field, choose an allocation. 9. In the **Payment Method** field, select how the donation was made. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If your template includes any default values, they'll appear here. In this example, we set the Primary Campaign Source to Annual Appeal and the Payment Method to Check. ![An orange rectangle highlights the Primary Campaign Source and Payment Method fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/enter_gifts_with_defaults.png) 10. Save the gift. When you save a gift with a new Payment, the new Payment is related to the Opportunity record and marked as Paid. Additionally, if the new Payment makes the sum of all Paid Payments equal to or greater than the Opportunity amount, the Opportunity is automatically closed. The Stage is changed to the setting found on the NPSP Settings page (**Donations** | **Payments** | **Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid**). NPSP deduplicates Soft Credits you enter through Gift Entry. For example, if you enter two Influencer Soft Credits for the same person, NPSP only records one Soft Credit. Checkbox fields show as a picklist instead of a checkbox. You can select the checkbox field by selecting True, deselect the checkbox by selecting False, or retain the existing value by leaving the field blank. ## Enter a Collection of Gifts Use Gift Entry to enter a collection of gifts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note A batch can contain up to 10,000 gifts. After you [Create and Edit Gift Entry Batches](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_edit_batches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Specify details about a batch in Gift Entry, including number of gifts and default values for fields."), enter gifts. If you're not continuing from the batch that you created earlier, use the App Launcher to find and select **Gift Entry** | **Batches**, and select the batch to add gifts. 1. Enter the gift, and if your batch includes recurring donations, click **Make Recurring** when entering the gift. 2. Click **Save & Enter New Gift**. Dry run is initiated against the gift that you entered to: - Look for potential issues with your entry. Rows with issues have a Status of Dry Run - Error. Resolve the issues so that you can process the batch when you finish entering the gifts. - Match the donation based on Donation Matching, and then match the donor based on the Contact & Account Matching. 3. To enter more gifts, repeat these steps. Notice the Total Count and Total Amount update as you enter and save gifts. You can edit gifts you saved to the form before processing (see [Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time.")). After entering all gifts in your batch, you're ready to [Process a Collection of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Test processing your Gift Entry batch and then process the batch to add the gifts to NPSP.") and [Process a Collection of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Test processing your Gift Entry batch and then process the batch to add the gifts to NPSP."). Here's an example of some gift entries. Notice these details: - Antonio has a link to the Opportunity record related to the Payment we chose in the Review Donations step. - Ana has a link to the Opportunity record we updated during the Review Donations step. - Danny didn't already exist as a Contact, so, we added him in the Add or Edit Contact section. His information shows up in those Contact fields instead of the Donor and Donation columns. After the batch is processed, the Donor column contains a link to his Contact record and the Donation column has a link to the new Opportunity. ![Gift Entry page, showing the three donations in the batch list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/different_types_of_donations_in_list.png) ## Customize Batch Table Columns When you have many fields on your form, the table at the bottom of the screen that lists the gifts can become cramped and difficult to read. Customize the form fields in the gift table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also customize the columns at the template level in Template Builder. Read more about batch settings for templates in [Create or Edit a Gift Entry Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to create or customize Gift Entry templates to fit your donation management needs."). 1. In a Batch, go to the gift table. 2. Click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), and then **Select Batch Table Columns**. 3. To add fields to the table, move them from **Available Fields** to **Visible Fields**. To remove fields from the table, move them from **Visible Fields** to **Available Fields**. 4. Save your changes. ## Edit or Delete Gifts in an Unprocessed Batch Edit or remove gifts in an unprocessed batch. To edit a gift after the gift is saved in a batch that hasn't been processed yet, reopen the gift in the form from the list of gifts in the batch. 1. In the table of gifts, find the row that you want to change. 2. In the donation row that you want to change, click ![Show More icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then click **Open**. 3. Update fields as needed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't update a processed gift in Gift Entry. Clicking **View** opens a gift in the form, but the gift isn't editable. 4. To save your changes, click **Update**. To remove a gift from the batch: 1. Click ![Show More icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) in that row. 2. Click **Delete**. The Delete action removes the gift row only from the batch. Deleting the gift in the batch doesn't affect the related donor or donations (if it matched against an existing donation). If you're done entering and editing gifts and have resolved errors, you're ready to [Process a Collection of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Test processing your Gift Entry batch and then process the batch to add the gifts to NPSP."). # Enter In-Kind Gift Commitments in Education An in-kind gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. To enter in-kind gifts into Salesforce, enter them as gift commitments. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create gift commitments:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Some organizations accept non-monetary gifts from constituents and their community. For example, a nonprofit food pantry accepts donations of food, paper goods, or household cleaning products. A nonprofit after-school program accepts donations of computers, school supplies, or books. You can log the value of these donations as gift commitments in Salesforce. For in-kind gifts, it's important to distinguish between a thank-you acknowledgment and a receipt. Make sure that you're in compliance with the applicable laws on how non-monetary gifts are recorded and acknowledged in your country or municipality. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the in-kind donation fields on your New Gift Commitment entry form, your Salesforce admin can add them to the page layout. For more information, see [Configure Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the required donor details and a name for the commitment. 4. Enter a description of the in-kind gift. 5. If this in-kind gift is a non-recurring gift commitment that the donor pays in one or more installments, select the **Custom** frequency. The scheduling options change based on the schedule type that you select. 6. If this donation is associated with an opportunity and campaign, enter that information. 7. Complete these in-kind gift fields. 1. To indicate that this donation is an in-kind gift of non-monetary assets, select **Asset Transfer Expected**. 2. In Total Asset Present Value, enter the total current value of the committed assets for the in-kind gift. The present value is the value of the assets if they were to be sold in the current marketplace. 3. In Expected Asset Transfer Date, enter the expected date of transferring the committed assets for the in-kind gift. 4. In Total Expected Asset Transfer Value, enter the total expected value of the committed assets when they're transferred for the in-kind gift. 5. In Expected Asset Maturity Date, enter the expected maturity date of the committed assets for the in-kind gift. 6. In Total Expected Asset Maturity Value, enter the expected maturity value of the committed assets for the in-kind gift. If you don’t see these fields on your new gift commitment form, it's likely that your Salesforce admin chose to include fewer fields to meet your nonprofit's in-kind gift needs. 8. Save your work. # Enter In-Kind Gift Commitments in Nonprofit An in-kind gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. To enter in-kind gifts into Salesforce, enter them as gift commitments. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create gift commitments:

FundraisingAccess permission set
Some organizations accept non-monetary gifts from constituents and their community. For example, a nonprofit food pantry accepts donations of food, paper goods, or household cleaning products. A nonprofit after-school program accepts donations of computers, school supplies, or books. You can log the value of these donations as gift commitments in Salesforce. For in-kind gifts, it's important to distinguish between a thank-you acknowledgment and a receipt. Make sure that you're in compliance with the applicable laws on how non-monetary gifts are recorded and acknowledged in your country or municipality. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the in-kind donation fields on your New Gift Commitment entry form, your Salesforce admin can add them to the page layout. For more information, see [Configure Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the required donor details and a name for the commitment. 4. Enter a description of the in-kind gift. 5. If this in-kind gift is a non-recurring gift commitment that the donor pays in one or more installments, select the **Custom** frequency. The scheduling options change based on the schedule type that you select. 6. If this donation is associated with an opportunity and campaign, enter that information. 7. Complete these in-kind gift fields. 1. To indicate that this donation is an in-kind gift of non-monetary assets, select **Asset Transfer Expected**. 2. In Total Asset Present Value, enter the total current value of the committed assets for the in-kind gift. The present value is the value of the assets if they were to be sold in the current marketplace. 3. In Expected Asset Transfer Date, enter the expected date of transferring the committed assets for the in-kind gift. 4. In Total Expected Asset Transfer Value, enter the total expected value of the committed assets when they're transferred for the in-kind gift. 5. In Expected Asset Maturity Date, enter the expected maturity date of the committed assets for the in-kind gift. 6. In Total Expected Asset Maturity Value, enter the expected maturity value of the committed assets for the in-kind gift. If you don’t see these fields on your new gift commitment form, it's likely that your Salesforce admin chose to include fewer fields to meet your nonprofit's in-kind gift needs. 8. Save your work. # Events and Activities Summarization Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes the participation of an alumnus in events and activities that are designed to foster connection and pride within the alumni community.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Alumni Engagement Metrics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager

Create a template-triggered prompt flow and add and configure these elements. See [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US).

Element

 Configuration
Start

  1. Select Automatic Inputs as the input type.

  2. Select Engagement Visualization Template Capability as the prompt template type.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Contact, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Salesforce Object as the data source.

  3. Select Contact as the object.

  4. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  5. In Field, find and select Id.

  6. Select Equals as the operator.

  7. In Value, select $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID.

  8. Select Only the first record.

  9. Select Automatically store all fields.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Contact Name to the Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Name" : "{!Get_Contact.Name}", "Details": [.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Engagement Actions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select default as the data space.

  4. Select Engagement Action as the object.

  5. Enter 1 AND 2 AND 3 as the condition logic.

  6. Set these conditions.

    • ssot__IndividualId__c Equals $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID

    • ssot__EngagementCategory__c Equals ExperientialCategory

    • ssot__EngagementDateTime__c Greater Than or Equal CurrentYear

  7. Select All Records.

  8. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Engagement Actions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Assignment

  1. In Label, enter Set Channel Engagement Ids, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select ChannelEngagementIds as the variable.

  3. Select Add as the operator.

  4. In Value, select Engagement Actions > Channel Engagement.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Channel Engagements, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select Channel Engagement as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__Id__c.

  7. Select In as the operator.

  8. In Value, find and select ChannelEngagementIds.

  9. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  10. Select All Records.

  11. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Engagement Action, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Channel Engagements, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Channel Engagements as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Decision

  1. In Label, enter Match Channel Engagement, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Match and enter these details.

    1. In Label and Outcome API name, enter Match.

    2. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the outcome.

    3. Select Engagement Action > Channel Engagement as the resource.

    4. Select Equals as the operator.

    5. Select Channel Engagements > Channel Engagement Id as the value.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Channel Engagement to Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Date" "{!Loop_through_Each_Engagement_Action.ssot__EngagementDateTime__c}", "Subject" : "{!Loop_through_Channel_Engagements.ssot__Subject__c}" },.

Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Ending Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter ]}..
![Events and Activities Summarization flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_events_and_activities.png) # Example Criteria Settings Review an example of criteria settings to generate transaction journal records only for certain types of fees. You want to generate transaction journal records only for unpaid applicant fees that are due by December 31, 2023. You represent this information with these fields on the primary object: - Applicant Fees checkbox - Paid checkbox - Due Date field Configure criteria settings as follows: - All Conditions Are Met (AND) - Condition 1: - Resource: Applicant Fees - Operator: Equals - Value: True - Condition 2: - Resource: Paid - Operator: Equals - Value: False - Condition 3: - Resource: Due date - Operator: Less Than - Value: Dec 31, 2023 # Example: First-Generation Student Exploring Career Planning and Life Goals This example walks you through how to set up a career planning and life goals experience on a student portal. First, the administrator configures an org for learners to define and achieve career and life goals based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. They configure the advisor's profile permissions to manage student’s career and life goals. The Student advisors create the foundational assessments, involvement groups, and competencies. Then, students log in to take assessments, explore campus groups, and set their first life goals.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This example uses common portal configurations and field values. Customize these settings to meet your institution's needs. Sophia is a first-generation student at Connected University. Sophia wants to become a successful entrepreneur, but isn’t sure which competencies to build, which clubs to join, or how to turn that dream into a real plan. John, the Connected University admin, sets up the org for career planning and life goals, adds and configures the career planning and life goals components to the learner portal, and gives advisors the tools to manage student progress. Charlie, the Connected University advisor, sets up the career planning and life goals infrastructure; assessments, involvement groups, and competencies students can earn. Sophia logs in to the student portal to take an assessment, explore campus involvement groups, add competencies to earn, and sets the first life goal. ![Set up a career planning and life goals experience.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_goals_example.png) - **[Set Up the Org and Learner Portal for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_learner_portal_career_planning_life_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** John, the Connected University admin, sets up the org for career planning and life goals, adds and configures the career planning and life goals components to the learner portal, and gives advisors the tools to manage student progress. - **[Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Infrastructure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_infrastructure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To provide the career planning and life goals experience for students on the portal, Charlie, the Connected University advisor, creates assessments, involvement groups, and competencies. These records serve as the foundation for what students see and interact with. - **[Manage Career Planning and Life Goals Experience on the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_career_planning_life_goals_experience_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After Charlie saves the configuration, the career planning and life goals experience for students appear on the portal. Sophia logs in to Connected University's student portal and goes to the Career Planning and Life Goals page to manage her goals and plans. # Example: Use a Custom Component to Match and Populate Data Create a custom component that overrides the Donor column from the default template with a barcode option. When a user enters a value in the edit component, the system looks for a matching value in a custom Bar Code object. If a match is found, values from that record populate other columns in the Gift Entry Grid. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Cell Display Components By default, the Designations column component shows a blank value. If one designation is associated with the Gift Entry row, the column component concatenates the amount to that designation and displays it in the grid, such as $100. If there are two or more designations, the grid shows a summarized value, such as 2 Designations. Cell Display components have these requirements: - A tagName value in the JavaScriptjs file. - @api params that acts as inbound property passed from the grid. In this sample, the display component shows a BarCode column. Before any data is entered, it shows as pending. When the system finds a matching value, the column updates to show the donor’s name. giftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn.html ``` ``` giftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn.js ``` import { api, LightningElement } from 'lwc'; export default class GiftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn extends LightningElement { /** * params is the only inbound property passed to this component from Gift Entry Grid */ @api params; /** * Example Method: * This getter function displays various fields in a display component * that is specified in the yaml file configuration. * @returns {*|string} */ get columnDisplayValue() { let response = this.params?.data?.properties?.barCodeValue; if (this.params?.data?.LastName) { response = this.params?.data?.FirstName + " " + this.params?.data?.LastName; if (this.params?.data?.Salutation) { response = this.params?.data?.Salutation + " " + response; } } return response || '(pending)'; } } // Tagname is required for the component to function GiftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn.tagName = 'c-gift-entry-grid-bar-code-display-column'; ``` ## Cell Edit Components In the default template, the edit component for the Designations column has a Lightning-input field that functions similarly to a lookup field. When the user enters a value, the system looks for a matching value in a custom Bar Code object. If a match is found, values from that record populate other columns in the Gift Entry Grid. Cell Edit components have these requirements: - A `tagName` parameter in the JavaScript file. - An `isPopup` parameter in the JavaScript file that's set to true. - Usage of a Gift Entry Grid Lightning Message Service channel from `@salesforce/messageChannel/lightning__giftEntryGridComponentAction`. - Other methods and variables as called out in the following sample. giftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.html ``` ``` giftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.js ``` import { LightningElement, api } from 'lwc'; import { ShowToastEvent } from 'lightning/platformShowToastEvent'; /** * Apex controller used by this example to handle data queries, etc. */ import getBarCodeScanData from '@salesforce/apex/GiftEntryBarCodeScanLookupController.getBarCodeScanData'; /** * Lightning Message Service to enable this component to communicate back to Gift Entry Grid */ import { publish, createMessageContext } from 'lightning/messageService'; import GiftEntryGridComponentAction from "@salesforce/messageChannel/lightning__giftEntryGridComponentAction"; const messageContext = createMessageContext(); const DEFAULT_GIFT_AMOUNT = 100.00; const DEFAULT_PAYMENT_METHOD = "Credit Card"; export default class GiftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent extends LightningElement { /** * Required for the underlying grid component to properly render this as a gift entry grid cell */ static delegatesFocus = true; /** * The data entry property used in this example */ @api barCode = ""; /** * The column definition as defined within the underlying grid component * Set from data in params in the connectedCallback. */ _columnDefinition; /** * Contains properties that represent each field on the GiftEntry record/row within the grid. * Set from data in params in the connectedCallback. */ _rowData = {}; /** * _params is the only inbound property passed to this component from Gift Entry Grid * The properties retrieved in the example below are the primary ones required for grid functionality */ _params; @api get params() { return this._params; } set params(value) { this._params = value; this._rowData = this._params?.data; this._columnDefinition = this._params?.colDef; const _headerLabel = this._columnDefinition?.headerName; // informational // Useful mechanism to pull in the previously entered barcode as the default value // Values in the `properties` object of the row are transient for the current session only. They persist until the page is closed/refreshed if (this._rowData && this._rowData?.properties?.barCode) { this.barCode = this._rowData?.properties?.barCode; } } /** * Recommended Method: Ensures the column width is set properly on load */ connectedCallback() { this.template.host.style.setProperty('--min-width', this._params?.column?.actualWidth + 'px'); } /** * Example Method: * Handle a change to the entered bar code in the field * @param {*} event */ handleBarCodeChanged(event) { event.stopPropagation(); try { if (event.target?.value && event.target?.value !== "") { this.sendDataBackToGrid(event.target.value); } else if (event.target?.value === "") { this.clearCurrentRowOfAllData(); } } catch (e) { this.dispatchEvent( new ShowToastEvent({ title: 'Error', message: 'An error occurred while querying the entered barcode: ' + (e.body?.message || e.message), variant: 'error' }) ); } this.applyFocus(); } /** * Example Method: * Call the apex controller with the entered bar code * Parse the response and pass that data back to GiftEntryGrid using the Lightning Message Service channel * @param {*} barCode */ async sendDataBackToGrid(barCode) { // Call the Apex controller to query and retrieve data const result = await getBarCodeScanData({ barcodeValue: barCode }); if (result && result !== null) { // Convert the query result from the apex controller into an object of GiftEntry fields to apply to the row in the grid const giftEntryFields = this.buildResponse(result); // Build the "message" obhect to send back to Gift Entry Grid following the documented contract const message = { action: "ColumnEdit", // Required property componentName: this.tagName, // Required property (use as is) colId: this._columnDefinition.colId, // Required property (use as is) details: { // Optional property - include if there is data to write to the row in Gift Entry rowId: this.params?.data?.id, // Required (use as is) rowIndex: this.params?.data?.rowIndex, // Required (use as is) giftEntryFields, // Required - all GiftEntry fields to write to rowData rowProperties: { // Optional - use this to persist values in memory in the grid for use elsewhere, such as the Display Component barCode, // Example: Used to persist the value of the barcode on the row temporarily to retrieve elsewhere barCodeValue: result.donorName // Example: This is used by GiftEntryGridColumnDisplay }, matchingGiftTransactionId: result?.matchingGiftTransactionId, // Optional, to set a matching gift on the row matchingGiftTransactionName: result?.matchingGiftTransactionName // Optional, to set a matching gift on the row } } publish(messageContext, GiftEntryGridComponentAction, message); } } /** * Example Method: * Clear out the entire row if the barCode is set to null */ clearCurrentRowOfAllData() { const giftEntryFields = { DonorId: null, Donor: null, GiftType: "Individual" }; if (this.params && this.params.data) { const keepKeys = ['id', 'Id', 'rowId', 'rowIndex', 'properties', 'GiftType']; Object.keys(this.params.data).forEach(key => { if (!keepKeys.includes(key)) { giftEntryFields[key] = null; } }); } const message = { action: "ColumnEdit", // Required property componentName: this.tagName, // Required property (use as is) colId: this._columnDefinition.colId, // Required property (use as is) details: { // Optional property - include if there is data to write to the row in Gift Entry rowId: this.params?.data?.id, // Required (use as is) rowIndex: this.params?.data?.rowIndex, // Required (use as is) giftEntryFields, rowProperties: { barCode : null, barCodeValue: null } } }; publish(messageContext, GiftEntryGridComponentAction, message); } /** * Example Method: * * Notes * - Lookup fields such as Campaign and OutreachSourceCode should be represented as an object with "id" and "name" to allow them * render properly in the grid. This does not apply to DonorId * - Pick List fields, such as PaymentMethod, can a string representing the pick list API Name or an object as {apiName: x, value: y} * - To take advantage of Gift Entry Grid's built in Donor logic that retrieves all donor fields, including custom mapped fields, the * response object should include a property for DonorId and GiftType ("Individual" or "Organizational" only) * - Any field on GiftEntry can be included in this resonse and it will populate fields on the grid * @param {*} result from call to Apex with query results * @returns an object that represents fields on the GiftEntry object to be updated on the GiftEntryGrid row */ buildResponse(result) { const response = { GiftType: result.giftType, // Required to use the built-in donor logic DonorId: result.donorid, // Required to use the built-in donor logic // Examples(s) Populate other fields on the row GiftReceivedDate: new Date().toISOString().split('T')[0], PaymentMethod: DEFAULT_PAYMENT_METHOD, GiftAmount: DEFAULT_GIFT_AMOUNT, CampaignId: result.campaign, Campaign: { id: result.campaign, Name: result.campaignName }, OutreachSourceCodeId: result.outreachSourceCode, OutreachSourceCode: { id: result.outreachSourceCode, Name: result.outreachSourceCodeName } }; return response; } /** * For keyboard accessibility, allows the lookup component to be focused on keyboard tabbing */ applyFocus() { const _gridElement = this.template.querySelector('lightning-input'); return new Promise((resolve) => { Promise.resolve().then(() => { _gridElement.focus(); resolve(); }); }); } /** * Example Method */ handleError(event) { event.stopPropagation(); } } // Required Properties for Column Components: GiftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.tagName = 'c-gift-entry-grid-bar-code-column-component'; GiftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.isPopup = true; ``` ## Query and Pass Back Data Use this Apex code to query and pass back data to the Gift Entry Grid custom component. GiftEntryGridBarCodeScannerLookupController.apex ``` /** * Salesforce Fundraising - Gift Entry Grid Custom Component Example * * Controller class for handling barcode scan data lookup from a column component */ public with sharing class GiftEntryBarCodeScanLookupController { /** * Wrapper class to return the selected donor and any other info that would be applied to the grid row */ public class ReponseObject { @AuraEnabled public String barCode { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String giftType { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String donorid { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String donorName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String campaign { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String campaignName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String giftDesignation { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String giftDesignationName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String outreachSourceCode { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String outreachSourceCodeName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String matchingGiftTransactionId { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String matchingGiftTransactionName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public Double amount { get; set; } } /** * Retrieves barcode scan data based on the provided barcode value * @param barcodeValue The barcode value to search for * @return ReponseObject object with all fields or null if not found */ @AuraEnabled(cacheable=false) public static ReponseObject getBarCodeScanData(String barcodeValue) { try { if (String.isBlank(barcodeValue)) { return null; } // Query the BarCodeScanData__c object for the matching barcode // Include related fields from Donor (Account), Campaign, and Outreach Source Code List results = [ SELECT Id, BarCode__c, Donor__c, Donor__r.Name, Donor__r.IsPersonAccount, Campaign__c, Campaign__r.Name, OutreachSourceCode__c, OutreachSourceCode__r.Name FROM BarCodeScanData__c WHERE BarCode__c = :barcodeValue LIMIT 1 ]; if (results.isEmpty()) { return null; } BarCodeScanData__c barCodeRecord = results[0]; ReponseObject response = new ReponseObject(); // a value for DonorId and GiftType required for the donor logic to work response.donorid = barCodeRecord.Donor__c; response.giftType = (barCodeRecord.Donor__r.IsPersonAccount ? 'Individual' : 'Organizational'); // Extra fields used within this example component response.barCode = barCodeRecord.BarCode__c; response.donorName = barCodeRecord.Donor__r?.Name; response.campaign = barCodeRecord.Campaign__c; response.campaignName = barCodeRecord.Campaign__r?.Name; response.outreachSourceCode = barCodeRecord.OutreachSourceCode__c; response.outreachSourceCodeName = barCodeRecord.OutreachSourceCode__r?.Name; // Is there an unpaid gift transaction installment for a commitment for this donor? // If so, populate the GiftTransactionId field to simulate selecting a matching gift List matchingGifts = [ SELECT Id, Name, OriginalAmount, TransactionDueDate, CampaignId, Campaign.Name, OutreachSourceCodeId, OutreachSourceCode.Name, GiftCommitmentId FROM GiftTransaction WHERE DonorId = :response.donorid AND Status = 'Unpaid' ORDER BY TransactionDueDate ASC LIMIT 1 ]; if (matchingGifts.size() > 0) { response.matchingGiftTransactionId = matchingGifts[0].Id; response.matchingGiftTransactionName = matchingGifts[0].Name; response.amount = matchingGifts[0].OriginalAmount; response.campaign = matchingGifts[0].CampaignId; response.campaignName = matchingGifts[0].Campaign.Name; response.outreachSourceCode = matchingGifts[0].OutreachSourceCodeId; response.outreachSourceCodeName = matchingGifts[0].OutreachSourceCode.Name; } return response; } catch (Exception e) { // Log the error and throw a user-friendly exception System.debug(LoggingLevel.ERROR, 'Error in getBarCodeScanData: ' + e.getMessage()); throw new AuraHandledException('Error retrieving barcode scan data: ' + e.getMessage()); } } } ``` # Example: Use a Custom Component to Match and Populate Data Create a custom component that overrides the Donor column from the default template with a barcode option. When a user enters a value in the edit component, the system looks for a matching value in a custom Bar Code object. If a match is found, values from that record populate other columns in the Gift Entry Grid. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

## Cell Display Components By default, the Designations column component shows a blank value. If one designation is associated with the Gift Entry row, the column component concatenates the amount to that designation and displays it in the grid, such as $100. If there are two or more designations, the grid shows a summarized value, such as 2 Designations. Cell Display components have these requirements: - A tagName value in the JavaScriptjs file. - @api params that acts as inbound property passed from the grid. In this sample, the display component shows a BarCode column. Before any data is entered, it shows as pending. When the system finds a matching value, the column updates to show the donor’s name. giftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn.html ``` ``` giftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn.js ``` import { api, LightningElement } from 'lwc'; export default class GiftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn extends LightningElement { /** * params is the only inbound property passed to this component from Gift Entry Grid */ @api params; /** * Example Method: * This getter function displays various fields in a display component * that is specified in the yaml file configuration. * @returns {*|string} */ get columnDisplayValue() { let response = this.params?.data?.properties?.barCodeValue; if (this.params?.data?.LastName) { response = this.params?.data?.FirstName + " " + this.params?.data?.LastName; if (this.params?.data?.Salutation) { response = this.params?.data?.Salutation + " " + response; } } return response || '(pending)'; } } // Tagname is required for the component to function GiftEntryGridBarCodeDisplayColumn.tagName = 'c-gift-entry-grid-bar-code-display-column'; ``` ## Cell Edit Components In the default template, the edit component for the Designations column has a Lightning-input field that functions similarly to a lookup field. When the user enters a value, the system looks for a matching value in a custom Bar Code object. If a match is found, values from that record populate other columns in the Gift Entry Grid. Cell Edit components have these requirements: - A `tagName` parameter in the JavaScript file. - An `isPopup` parameter in the JavaScript file that's set to true. - Usage of a Gift Entry Grid Lightning Message Service channel from `@salesforce/messageChannel/lightning__giftEntryGridComponentAction`. - Other methods and variables as called out in the following sample. giftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.html ``` ``` giftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.js ``` import { LightningElement, api } from 'lwc'; import { ShowToastEvent } from 'lightning/platformShowToastEvent'; /** * Apex controller used by this example to handle data queries, etc. */ import getBarCodeScanData from '@salesforce/apex/GiftEntryBarCodeScanLookupController.getBarCodeScanData'; /** * Lightning Message Service to enable this component to communicate back to Gift Entry Grid */ import { publish, createMessageContext } from 'lightning/messageService'; import GiftEntryGridComponentAction from "@salesforce/messageChannel/lightning__giftEntryGridComponentAction"; const messageContext = createMessageContext(); const DEFAULT_GIFT_AMOUNT = 100.00; const DEFAULT_PAYMENT_METHOD = "Credit Card"; export default class GiftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent extends LightningElement { /** * Required for the underlying grid component to properly render this as a gift entry grid cell */ static delegatesFocus = true; /** * The data entry property used in this example */ @api barCode = ""; /** * The column definition as defined within the underlying grid component * Set from data in params in the connectedCallback. */ _columnDefinition; /** * Contains properties that represent each field on the GiftEntry record/row within the grid. * Set from data in params in the connectedCallback. */ _rowData = {}; /** * _params is the only inbound property passed to this component from Gift Entry Grid * The properties retrieved in the example below are the primary ones required for grid functionality */ _params; @api get params() { return this._params; } set params(value) { this._params = value; this._rowData = this._params?.data; this._columnDefinition = this._params?.colDef; const _headerLabel = this._columnDefinition?.headerName; // informational // Useful mechanism to pull in the previously entered barcode as the default value // Values in the `properties` object of the row are transient for the current session only. They persist until the page is closed/refreshed if (this._rowData && this._rowData?.properties?.barCode) { this.barCode = this._rowData?.properties?.barCode; } } /** * Recommended Method: Ensures the column width is set properly on load */ connectedCallback() { this.template.host.style.setProperty('--min-width', this._params?.column?.actualWidth + 'px'); } /** * Example Method: * Handle a change to the entered bar code in the field * @param {*} event */ handleBarCodeChanged(event) { event.stopPropagation(); try { if (event.target?.value && event.target?.value !== "") { this.sendDataBackToGrid(event.target.value); } else if (event.target?.value === "") { this.clearCurrentRowOfAllData(); } } catch (e) { this.dispatchEvent( new ShowToastEvent({ title: 'Error', message: 'An error occurred while querying the entered barcode: ' + (e.body?.message || e.message), variant: 'error' }) ); } this.applyFocus(); } /** * Example Method: * Call the apex controller with the entered bar code * Parse the response and pass that data back to GiftEntryGrid using the Lightning Message Service channel * @param {*} barCode */ async sendDataBackToGrid(barCode) { // Call the Apex controller to query and retrieve data const result = await getBarCodeScanData({ barcodeValue: barCode }); if (result && result !== null) { // Convert the query result from the apex controller into an object of GiftEntry fields to apply to the row in the grid const giftEntryFields = this.buildResponse(result); // Build the "message" obhect to send back to Gift Entry Grid following the documented contract const message = { action: "ColumnEdit", // Required property componentName: this.tagName, // Required property (use as is) colId: this._columnDefinition.colId, // Required property (use as is) details: { // Optional property - include if there is data to write to the row in Gift Entry rowId: this.params?.data?.id, // Required (use as is) rowIndex: this.params?.data?.rowIndex, // Required (use as is) giftEntryFields, // Required - all GiftEntry fields to write to rowData rowProperties: { // Optional - use this to persist values in memory in the grid for use elsewhere, such as the Display Component barCode, // Example: Used to persist the value of the barcode on the row temporarily to retrieve elsewhere barCodeValue: result.donorName // Example: This is used by GiftEntryGridColumnDisplay }, matchingGiftTransactionId: result?.matchingGiftTransactionId, // Optional, to set a matching gift on the row matchingGiftTransactionName: result?.matchingGiftTransactionName // Optional, to set a matching gift on the row } } publish(messageContext, GiftEntryGridComponentAction, message); } } /** * Example Method: * Clear out the entire row if the barCode is set to null */ clearCurrentRowOfAllData() { const giftEntryFields = { DonorId: null, Donor: null, GiftType: "Individual" }; if (this.params && this.params.data) { const keepKeys = ['id', 'Id', 'rowId', 'rowIndex', 'properties', 'GiftType']; Object.keys(this.params.data).forEach(key => { if (!keepKeys.includes(key)) { giftEntryFields[key] = null; } }); } const message = { action: "ColumnEdit", // Required property componentName: this.tagName, // Required property (use as is) colId: this._columnDefinition.colId, // Required property (use as is) details: { // Optional property - include if there is data to write to the row in Gift Entry rowId: this.params?.data?.id, // Required (use as is) rowIndex: this.params?.data?.rowIndex, // Required (use as is) giftEntryFields, rowProperties: { barCode : null, barCodeValue: null } } }; publish(messageContext, GiftEntryGridComponentAction, message); } /** * Example Method: * * Notes * - Lookup fields such as Campaign and OutreachSourceCode should be represented as an object with "id" and "name" to allow them * render properly in the grid. This does not apply to DonorId * - Pick List fields, such as PaymentMethod, can a string representing the pick list API Name or an object as {apiName: x, value: y} * - To take advantage of Gift Entry Grid's built in Donor logic that retrieves all donor fields, including custom mapped fields, the * response object should include a property for DonorId and GiftType ("Individual" or "Organizational" only) * - Any field on GiftEntry can be included in this resonse and it will populate fields on the grid * @param {*} result from call to Apex with query results * @returns an object that represents fields on the GiftEntry object to be updated on the GiftEntryGrid row */ buildResponse(result) { const response = { GiftType: result.giftType, // Required to use the built-in donor logic DonorId: result.donorid, // Required to use the built-in donor logic // Examples(s) Populate other fields on the row GiftReceivedDate: new Date().toISOString().split('T')[0], PaymentMethod: DEFAULT_PAYMENT_METHOD, GiftAmount: DEFAULT_GIFT_AMOUNT, CampaignId: result.campaign, Campaign: { id: result.campaign, Name: result.campaignName }, OutreachSourceCodeId: result.outreachSourceCode, OutreachSourceCode: { id: result.outreachSourceCode, Name: result.outreachSourceCodeName } }; return response; } /** * For keyboard accessibility, allows the lookup component to be focused on keyboard tabbing */ applyFocus() { const _gridElement = this.template.querySelector('lightning-input'); return new Promise((resolve) => { Promise.resolve().then(() => { _gridElement.focus(); resolve(); }); }); } /** * Example Method */ handleError(event) { event.stopPropagation(); } } // Required Properties for Column Components: GiftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.tagName = 'c-gift-entry-grid-bar-code-column-component'; GiftEntryGridBarCodeColumnComponent.isPopup = true; ``` ## Query and Pass Back Data Use this Apex code to query and pass back data to the Gift Entry Grid custom component. GiftEntryGridBarCodeScannerLookupController.apex ``` /** * Salesforce Fundraising - Gift Entry Grid Custom Component Example * * Controller class for handling barcode scan data lookup from a column component */ public with sharing class GiftEntryBarCodeScanLookupController { /** * Wrapper class to return the selected donor and any other info that would be applied to the grid row */ public class ReponseObject { @AuraEnabled public String barCode { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String giftType { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String donorid { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String donorName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String campaign { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String campaignName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String giftDesignation { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String giftDesignationName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String outreachSourceCode { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String outreachSourceCodeName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String matchingGiftTransactionId { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public String matchingGiftTransactionName { get; set; } @AuraEnabled public Double amount { get; set; } } /** * Retrieves barcode scan data based on the provided barcode value * @param barcodeValue The barcode value to search for * @return ReponseObject object with all fields or null if not found */ @AuraEnabled(cacheable=false) public static ReponseObject getBarCodeScanData(String barcodeValue) { try { if (String.isBlank(barcodeValue)) { return null; } // Query the BarCodeScanData__c object for the matching barcode // Include related fields from Donor (Account), Campaign, and Outreach Source Code List results = [ SELECT Id, BarCode__c, Donor__c, Donor__r.Name, Donor__r.IsPersonAccount, Campaign__c, Campaign__r.Name, OutreachSourceCode__c, OutreachSourceCode__r.Name FROM BarCodeScanData__c WHERE BarCode__c = :barcodeValue LIMIT 1 ]; if (results.isEmpty()) { return null; } BarCodeScanData__c barCodeRecord = results[0]; ReponseObject response = new ReponseObject(); // a value for DonorId and GiftType required for the donor logic to work response.donorid = barCodeRecord.Donor__c; response.giftType = (barCodeRecord.Donor__r.IsPersonAccount ? 'Individual' : 'Organizational'); // Extra fields used within this example component response.barCode = barCodeRecord.BarCode__c; response.donorName = barCodeRecord.Donor__r?.Name; response.campaign = barCodeRecord.Campaign__c; response.campaignName = barCodeRecord.Campaign__r?.Name; response.outreachSourceCode = barCodeRecord.OutreachSourceCode__c; response.outreachSourceCodeName = barCodeRecord.OutreachSourceCode__r?.Name; // Is there an unpaid gift transaction installment for a commitment for this donor? // If so, populate the GiftTransactionId field to simulate selecting a matching gift List matchingGifts = [ SELECT Id, Name, OriginalAmount, TransactionDueDate, CampaignId, Campaign.Name, OutreachSourceCodeId, OutreachSourceCode.Name, GiftCommitmentId FROM GiftTransaction WHERE DonorId = :response.donorid AND Status = 'Unpaid' ORDER BY TransactionDueDate ASC LIMIT 1 ]; if (matchingGifts.size() > 0) { response.matchingGiftTransactionId = matchingGifts[0].Id; response.matchingGiftTransactionName = matchingGifts[0].Name; response.amount = matchingGifts[0].OriginalAmount; response.campaign = matchingGifts[0].CampaignId; response.campaignName = matchingGifts[0].Campaign.Name; response.outreachSourceCode = matchingGifts[0].OutreachSourceCodeId; response.outreachSourceCodeName = matchingGifts[0].OutreachSourceCode.Name; } return response; } catch (Exception e) { // Log the error and throw a user-friendly exception System.debug(LoggingLevel.ERROR, 'Error in getBarCodeScanData: ' + e.getMessage()); throw new AuraHandledException('Error retrieving barcode scan data: ' + e.getMessage()); } } } ``` # Expand Object Capabilities in Nonprofit Cloud Your most-used Nonprofit Cloud objects now support standard Salesforce features, providing a more consistent and powerful user experience. Improve usability and operational efficiency by enabling path, kanban, and calendar for objects related to fundraising, program management, and volunteer management. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
- **[Graphically View Your Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_expand_object_capabilities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View records in a graphical way to help monitor your work and keep projects moving ahead. Kanban views are available for most objects, with exceptions such as tasks. - **[Use Path with Nonprofit Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_expand_object_capabilities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Boost productivity and help users gather complete data. Create paths to guide your users through steps of a business process, such as enrolling a participant in a program, or awarding a grant. At each step of a path, you can highlight key fields and include customized guidance for success. - **[View Data in a Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_expand_object_capabilities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Avoid scheduling conflicts after your organization enables Salesforce Calendar. Users can see their records, for example, volunteer events or benefit sessions, plotted on a calendar. This calendar helps to plan work that includes date and time fields. ## Graphically View Your Records View records in a graphical way to help monitor your work and keep projects moving ahead. Kanban views are available for most objects, with exceptions such as tasks. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
User Permissions Needed
To create list views:

Read on the type of record included in the list

AND

Create and Customize List Views
To create, edit, or delete public list views: Manage Public List Views
Kanban is available for these Nonprofit Cloud objects. - Benefit - BenefitAssignment - BenefitDisbursement - CaseParticipant - ComplaintParticipant - DonorGiftConcept - GiftAgreement - GiftCommitment - GiftRefund - GiftTransaction - GiftTribute - ProgramCohort - ProgramCohortMember Edit kanban settings on the related list view for the object. For more information on how to use kanban, go to [Use Kanban to Work with Graphical Views of Your Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.kanban.htm&language=en_US). ## Use Path with Nonprofit Objects Boost productivity and help users gather complete data. Create paths to guide your users through steps of a business process, such as enrolling a participant in a program, or awarding a grant. At each step of a path, you can highlight key fields and include customized guidance for success. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
User Permissions Needed
To administer Path:

Modify All Data

AND

Customize Application
Path is available for these Nonprofit Cloud objects. - Benefit - BenefitAssignment - BenefitDisbursement - BenefitSchedule - BenefitSession - CarePlan - CaseParticipant - ComplaintParticipant - DonorGiftConcept - GiftAgreement - GiftCommitment - GiftRefund - GiftTransaction - GiftTribute - IndividualApplication - Program - ProgramCohort - ProgramCohortMember - ProgramEnrollment - Referral Lightning record pages and the Salesforce mobile app support the use of Path. For information on how to set up and use Path, go to [Guide Users with Path](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.path_overview.htm&language=en_US). ## View Data in a Calendar Avoid scheduling conflicts after your organization enables Salesforce Calendar. Users can see their records, for example, volunteer events or benefit sessions, plotted on a calendar. This calendar helps to plan work that includes date and time fields. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Visit Calendar settings: Customize Application
To add user lists to Calendar views:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data
To create custom list views: Create and Customize List Views
Before you begin, [set up Salesforce Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.psc_admin_setup_sf_calendar.htm&language=en_US). To view Nonprofit Cloud data on a calendar, select an object and the date fields that are valuable for your organization to see. 1. From the App Launcher, search for Calendar, and then select **Calendar**. 2. To create a calendar, next to My Calendars, click ![My Calendar Options gear](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png) and select **New Calendar**. 3. Select the object that you want to add to your calendar, and click **Next**. 4. Give the calendar a name. 5. Select a field for the start of calendar items. Date fields show their records at the top of a calendar entry, and Date/Time fields show within their time blocks. 6. To define a duration of the items in your calendar, select a field for the end of calendar items. 7. To apply a filter to the data, from the Apply a Filter field, select a list view. 8. For the name to show on the calendar, select a field, such as the name or subject of your data. 9. Save your work. # Explore the Dashboards The Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator includes multiple dashboards. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Application Status values are grouped in these buckets. - Complete: Accepted Offer, Admit, Admit with Conditions, Declined Offer, Deferred Offer, Deny - In Progress: In Review, Incomplete, Received, Submitted, Waitlist To change these buckets, edit the Application Status (group) in the workbook. ## Applications Overview Get a bird’s eye view of your institution’s current and historical applications. To view this dashboard, select the **Applications Overview** tab. ![Application Overview dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_tableau_dashboard_overview.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Filter data by Term, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Department, Program, High School, High School District, Gender, and Race/Ethnicity (2). - KPI tiles show total applications, applications in progress, and applications complete. The tiles also compare the current term’s total to the prior year’s same term total. For example, Fall 2021 is compared to Fall 2020. PYST stands for Prior Year, Same Term (3). - The top 10 U.S. states with the highest volume of applications (4), shown by state or by country. Click a Geographic Area name to open the Geographic Map dashboard to view data by state, county, and ZIP code. Or you can open the Geographic Map dashboard to view the data for all areas (5). - The top 10 items selected by application volume. By default, data is shown for Department, but you can see data for Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Program, High School, and High School District (6). You can also view the full Application List by specific filters, such as High School or Application Date (7). - Year-over-year comparison of application volume. Hover over values for additional information (8). - The total application volume over months or weeks based on the Application Date for submitted applications, by default over the last 8 years (9). ## Application List View historical application volume data for Departments, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Program, High School, and High School District. To view this dashboard, select the **Application List** tab. ![Application List dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_tableau_dashboard_list.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Go to the Overview dashboard (2). - Filter data by Term, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Department, Program, High School, High School District, Gender, and Race/Ethnicity (3). - KPI tiles show total applications, in-progress applications, and completed applications. The tiles also compare the current term's total to the prior year's same term total. For example, Fall 2021 is compared to Fall 2020. PYST stands for Prior Year, Same Term (4). - The top 10 U.S. states with the highest volume of applications, shown by state or by country (5). Click a Geographic Area name to open the Geographic Map dashboard to view data by state, county, and ZIP code. - Go to the Geographic Map to see application data by geographic region (6). - Historical application volume for selected item (7). By default, data is shown for Department, but you can change your selection to see data for Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Program, High School, or High School District. ## Geographic Map Use an interactive map to navigate from state, county, geomarket code, and ZIP code. To view this dashboard, select the **Geographic Map** tab. ![Geographic Map dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_tableau_dashboard_map.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Go to the Overview dashboard (2). - Filter data by Term, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Department, High School, High School District, Gender, and Race/Ethnicity (3). - A geographic map showing application by U.S. state (4). The coloring scheme indicates the number of applications in a given geographic area. Click a state to view detailed application data for related counties and ZIP codes. - Select a state, county, or ZIP code for additional information (5). - Application data for the top 10 geographic areas in your current view (6). By default, the 10 states with the most applications are shown. When you select a county or ZIP code, the list shows the top 10 counties or ZIP codes with the most applications. ## Yield and Acceptance Rates Review your institution’s yield and acceptance rates. The Yield data reflects the percentage of total students enrolled compared to the total number of students accepted. Submission Rate percentage is the Applications Submitted divided by the Total Applications. The Acceptance Rate is the percentage of Applications Accepted compared to the number of Applications Submitted. To view this dashboard, select the **Application Yield & Acceptance** tab. ![Yield and Acceptance Rates dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_tableau_dashboard_yield_and_acceptance.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Filter data by Term, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Department, Program, High School, High School District, Gender, Race/Ethnicity, and Military Service (2). - KPI tiles show total yield percentage, acceptance rate percentage, and submission rate percentage. The tiles also compare the current term's total to the prior year's same term total. For example, Fall 2021 is compared to Fall 2020. PYST stands for Prior Year, Same Term (3). - The Yield Rates by Admissions Staff show by default, but you can see the rates by Admissions Director, Program, Department, Program, High School, and School District (4). Hover over values for more information. You can also view the full Application List by specific filters, such as High School or Application Date (5). - The Historical Yield Rates show by academic year. Hover over values for more information (6). - Acceptance Rates by Department are shown by default, but you can see rates by Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Program, High School, or School District (7). You can also view the full Application List by specific filers, such as High School or Application date. Hover over values for more information (8). - Historical Acceptance Rates show by school year. Hover over values for more information (9). ## Pipeline Counts and Rates Get a detailed overview of your institution’s pipeline counts and rates. To view this dashboard, select the **Applications Pipeline** tab. ![Pipeline Counts and Rates dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_tableau_dashboard_pipeline_counts_rates.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Filter data by Term, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Department, Program, High School, High School District, Gender, Race/Ethnicity, and Military Service (2). - The Pipeline Rates by Admissions Staff show by default, but you can see rates by Admissions Director, Program, Department, High School, and School District. Hover over values for additional information (4). You can further filter the data by specific staff members, departments, programs, schools, or districts. (5). Hover over values for more information. - Pipeline Counts by Admission Director show by default, but you can see counts for Admissions Staff, Department, Program, High School, or School District (6). You can further filter the data by specific staff members, departments, programs, schools, or districts. (7). Hover over values for more information. - Pipeline Counts by Stage and Admissions Staff show by default, but you can see counts by Stage and Admissions Director, Department, Program, High School, or School District. The table provides count data for Accepted Offer, Admit, Declined Offer, Deny, Enrolled, In Review, Incomplete, Received, Submitted, and Waitlist. Hover over values for more information (8). You can also view the full Application List by specific filters, such as High School or Application Date (9). ## Application List II Get a general and historical perspective on your institution’s application yield, acceptance rate, submission rate, and application volume data. To view this dashboard, select the **Application List — II** tab. ![Application List II dashboard with sample data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_tableau_dashboard_application_list_ii.png) - Hover over the icon to learn more about this dashboard and how you can use it (1). - Go to the Application Yield & Acceptance Rates tab (2). - Filter data by Term, Admissions Director, Admissions Staff, Department, Program, High School, School District, Gender, Race, and Military Service (3). - KPI tiles show total yield percentage, acceptance rate percentage, and submission rate percentage. The tiles also compare the current term's total to the prior year's same term total. For example, Fall 2021 is compared to Fall 2020. PYST stands for Prior Year, Same Term (4). - Use the dropdown list to view the Historical Application Volume data by Admissions Staff, Admissions Director, Department, Program, High School, or School District. Admissions Staff is selected by default. Hover over values for more information (5). # Export Accounting Data With the Report Builder After the transaction journal records are ready, create a report with this data, and export it as a comma-separated values (CSV) file. Then, import that file into your accounting system.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create, edit, and delete reports in private folders: | Create and Customize Reports | | To create, edit, and delete reports in public and private folders: | Report Builder OR Report Builder (Lightning Experience) | | To export reports: | Export Reports | ## Create a Transaction Journal Report 1. On the Reports tab, click **New Report**. 2. Select the **Transaction Journals** report type, and then click **Start Report**. 3. The report opens in edit mode, and shows a preview. Customize your report until it shows the data that you need. 4. Click **Save**, and then enter a report name. 5. Save your changes. 6. To view the report results, click **Run**. See [Build a Report in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.reports_build_lex.htm&type=5). ## Export a Transaction Journal Report 1. On the Reports tab, next to the report to export, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Export**. 2. Click **Details Only**, and then select the **Comma Delimited .csv** format. 3. Select an encoding, and then click **Export**. 4. If prompted by a browser dialog, select a location and save the file. See [Export a Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.reports_export.htm&type=5). # Expose Benefit Schedule Assignment to Experience Cloud Site Users Let external users, such as service providers, beneficiaries, and volunteers, access the new Benefit Schedule Assignment object along with other Program Management and Case Management objects in an Experience Cloud site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. **Who**: To work with Program Management and Case Management records in Experience Cloud, you need the Program and Case Management for Experience Cloud permission set. SEE ALSO: [_Salesforce Help_: Set Up a Nonprofit Cloud Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_set_up_a_nonprofit_cloud_experience_site.htm) # Extend Education Cloud with Common Features Accomplish common education tasks with the features available for use in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Curate Lists of Constituents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_curate_lists_of_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce objects to create lists and identify interests so that staff can better assist and connect with constituents. - **[Follow Your Constituents' Journey](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_follow_your_learners_journey.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use timeline and life events to get a 360-degree view of a constituent from your institution. - **[Track the Impact of Education Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_track_impact_of_academic_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Outcome Management to define, measure, and evaluate the impact of your institution's outcome strategy. To achieve the desired outcomes, an educational institution creates various programs, such as for advising, mentoring, and other non-scholastic programs. - **[Organize Tasks for Constituents and Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_organize_tasks_for_learners_and_staff.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use action plans and action launcher to provide quick and focused support to constituents in your institution. - **[Automate Processes in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_processes_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce tools to automate your academic processes, verify identities, create assessments, and provide services to constituents. - **[Manage and Visualize Relationships in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_and_visualize_relationships_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Actionable Relationship Center (ARC) to visualize relationships between the objects that you configure, such as for people and families. - **[Manage Documents in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_documents_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reduce friction and streamline the updates between students and staff by using checklists, real-time document uploading, and creating an automated document management process. - **[Prepare Your Educational Institution's Financial Data with Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_your_educational_institutions_financial_data_with_accounting_subledger.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Accounting Subledger (ASL) to process and prepare the financial data captured by various departments for the Accounting department, while providing fund allocation and integration with an external accounting system. - **[Design Personalized Guided Experiences for Constituents with Omnistudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_design_personalized_guided_experiences_for_learners_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Omnistudio to create seamless digital experiences. - **[Transform Education Cloud Data with Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transform_education_cloud_data_with_data_processing_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Processing Engine (DPE) to transform the data that's available in your Salesforce org and write back the transformation results as new or updated records. For example, you can use DPE and flows to set up and maintain person public profile records for your alumni community. - **[Manage Email Campaigns with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_email_campaigns_with_marketing_cloud_engagement_for_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to synchronize your Education Cloud CRM data with Marketing Cloud to create email campaigns. - **[Create and Manage Mandated Reports with Disclosure and Compliance Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_manage_mandated_reports_with_disclosure_and_compliance_hub.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organize questions and answers, and generate reports that can be easily accessed and tracked for mandated reporting requirements. - **[Manage Grants in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_grants_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Grantmaking with Education Cloud to manage external funding applications and internal research grants. Track funding awards, manage budgets, automate processes, measure impact, and provide an online portal for applicants to find and apply for funding opportunities. - **[Manage Employment Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_employment_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Talent Recruitment Management with Education Cloud to make recruiting and hiring intuitive, transparent, and efficient. Give recruiters and Human Resources specialists the tools to manage activities that range from position creation to employment offers. - **[Manage Volunteer Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_efficiently_manage_volunteer_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Volunteer Management in Education Cloud to streamline program management, enhance the volunteer experience, track hours, and report metrics. In Experience Cloud create a portal to post opportunities and let volunteers browse, search, and sign up for volunteer opportunities. # Facility Facility represents a school property asset. - **[Sample Uses for Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The location of a class or other property asset can be helpful when scheduling classes or other school activities. A Facility can be a classroom, a lecture hall, a laboratory, or a campus building that doesn't directly host student activity (for example, maintenance or IT facilities). Facility records can also be used to define relationships between property assets. - **[Configure Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Facility object and keep it up to date. - **[Create Facility Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Facility records for every location you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Facility data. ## Sample Uses for Facility The location of a class or other property asset can be helpful when scheduling classes or other school activities. A Facility can be a classroom, a lecture hall, a laboratory, or a campus building that doesn't directly host student activity (for example, maintenance or IT facilities). Facility records can also be used to define relationships between property assets. For example, you could create a parent Facility record for the “Smith Science Building” with nested Facility records for the “East Wing” and “Lecture Hall 103.” Facility can also help you relate Contacts to campus locations if you include the Contact lookup field on Facility. Let’s look at some possible uses for the Facility object. - University—Relate a faculty member to an office or a student to a dorm room. - K-12—Relate a faculty member to a specific classroom. - Any educational institution—Relate a Course Offering to a classroom or lecture hall. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Consider these changes to use Facility in other ways. - To identify a specific Contact as the point of contact for a Facility, add a lookup field on Facility to Contact. - To track address information directly on the Facility object, add your own address fields to the Facility object. - Customize the Display Name unmanaged formula field to match the naming format used by your school. ## Configure Facility Set up the Facility object and keep it up to date. ### Initial Configuration Tasks Add the Display Name formula field to the Facility page layout so you can see the full name of the Facility. Also include the field in any needed search layouts. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). If you installed EDA prior to version 1.73, follow the instructions in the table below to create the formula field before adding it to your page and search layouts. ### Keep Up with Facility Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of EDA you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.73 Add the Facility field to the Course Offering page layout.
 

Create the Display Name formula field:

  • Create a formula field on the Facility object. For information about creating formula fields, see Build a Formula Field in Salesforce help.

  • Paste the following code into the formula section:

    IF(
    NOT(ISBLANK(hed__Parent_Facility__c)), 
    hed__Parent_Facility__r.Name + ' - ' + Name,
    IF(
        NOT(ISBLANK(hed__Account__c)), 
        hed__Account__r.Name + ' - ' + Name,
        Name
    )
)
  • Add the field to the Facility Layout and any needed search layouts.

For more information, see Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release

## Create Facility Records Create Facility records for every location you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Facility data. 1. Go to the Facilities tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, from the App Launcher, find and select **Facilities**, and click **New**. 2. Enter a Facility Name, relate it to the Account that represents the organization that is responsible for the Facility, and specify other information like the capacity and whether it's part of a larger (parent) facility. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Once the record is saved, the Display Name formula field shows the full Facility name. For example: - Facility Name is "Room 201" - Parent Facility is "Thurgood Marshall Building" - Display Name is "Thurgood Marshall Building - Room 201" If no value is defined for Parent Facility, the value for Account is used. If neither Parent Facility nor Account is defined, the values for Facility Name and Display Name are the same. See [Configure Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the Facility object and keep it up to date.") for more information on adding Display Name to the page layout. 3. Click **Save & New**, and continue creating additional Facility records as needed. # Facility Facility represents a school property asset. - **[Sample Uses for Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The location of a class or other property asset can be helpful when scheduling classes or other school activities. A Facility can be a classroom, a lecture hall, a laboratory, or a campus building that doesn't directly host student activity (for example, maintenance or IT facilities). Facility records can also be used to define relationships between property assets. - **[Configure Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the Facility object and keep it up to date. - **[Create Facility Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Facility records for every location you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Facility data. ## Sample Uses for Facility The location of a class or other property asset can be helpful when scheduling classes or other school activities. A Facility can be a classroom, a lecture hall, a laboratory, or a campus building that doesn't directly host student activity (for example, maintenance or IT facilities). Facility records can also be used to define relationships between property assets. For example, you could create a parent Facility record for the “Smith Science Building” with nested Facility records for the “East Wing” and “Lecture Hall 103.” Facility can also help you relate Contacts to campus locations if you include the Contact lookup field on Facility. Let’s look at some possible uses for the Facility object. - University—Relate a faculty member to an office or a student to a dorm room. - K-12—Relate a faculty member to a specific classroom. - Any educational institution—Relate a Course Offering to a classroom or lecture hall. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Consider these changes to use Facility in other ways. - To identify a specific Contact as the point of contact for a Facility, add a lookup field on Facility to Contact. - To track address information directly on the Facility object, add your own address fields to the Facility object. - Customize the Display Name unmanaged formula field to match the naming format used by your school. ## Configure Facility Set up the Facility object and keep it up to date. ### Initial Configuration Tasks Add the Display Name formula field to the Facility page layout so you can see the full name of the Facility. Also include the field in any needed search layouts. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). ## Create Facility Records Create Facility records for every location you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Facility data. 1. Go to the Facilities tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, from the App Launcher, find and select **Facilities**, and click **New**. 2. Enter a Facility Name, relate it to the Account that represents the organization that is responsible for the Facility, and specify other information like the capacity and whether it's part of a larger (parent) facility. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Once the record is saved, the Display Name formula field shows the full Facility name. For example: - Facility Name is "Room 201" - Parent Facility is "Thurgood Marshall Building" - Display Name is "Thurgood Marshall Building - Room 201" If no value is defined for Parent Facility, the value for Account is used. If neither Parent Facility nor Account is defined, the values for Facility Name and Display Name are the same. See [Configure Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the Facility object and keep it up to date.") for more information on adding Display Name to the page layout. 3. Click **Save & New**, and continue creating additional Facility records as needed. # Faculty Access Management Faculty Access Management grants faculty access to the course and student data for the courses that they teach. It manages access through academic roles, instead of custom sharing rules. You define which academic roles can read or edit which records, and flows create the sharing from teaching assignments. Scheduled Data Processing Engine (DPE) jobs keep access accurate as course assignments change, so faculty see only the courses they're currently teaching. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Faculty Access Management grants faculty access to records that they need through academic roles and automated flows. You define the access with three records. Academic Role Defines a standardized instructional role, such as Primary Faculty or Instructional Staff, that determines which records its members can access. An academic role consolidates the varied role names that your institution uses into one access profile. For example, a university defines a Primary Faculty role. A school district defines an Instructional Staff role that includes its Teacher, Assistant Teacher, and Substitute Teacher role assignments. Academic Role Object Access Defines which records each academic role has access to and at what level. For example, the Primary Faculty role has read access to attendance records and edit access to grade records. Academic Role Mapping Translates an existing role value in your institution to a standardized academic role. For example, the Teacher value in the Participant Affiliation field on a course offering participant record maps to the Primary Faculty role. To consolidate several source roles into one academic role, a school district maps Teacher, Assistant Teacher, and Substitute Teacher to a single Instructional Staff role. When you create data for a course offering, such as a course offering participant, attendance, or grade record, the matching flow runs. The flow identifies the course offering's Primary Faculty and the course offering participants who have the Teacher affiliation. The flow creates a share record at the access level that's defined for each academic role. Scheduled Data Processing Engine (DPE) jobs keep access accurate as teaching assignments begin and end. For example, for the upcoming semester, you create a course offering for Introduction to Biology, with the professor as the Primary Faculty on that record. The course offering also has two graduate students as course offering participants with the Teacher affiliation. The professor receives edit access to the course offering and its attendance and grade records. The teaching assistants receive the access that's appropriate for their role. When the professor's or the teaching assistants' assignment on the course offering ends, the DPE jobs remove their access. Faculty Access Management also includes the Academic Access Log object. This log documents faculty's access to course and student data. Share records enforce the record-level access, and the academic access log keeps a separate record of how and why that access changes. Each institution sets its own logging detail and retention policy. Institutions that want an audit trail can extend the flows or DPE jobs to write an academic access log entry whenever access changes. # Feature Configuration Overview NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Enable new NPSP Features.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tIkyO9dks78) - **[Alphabetical List of Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review a list of the NPSP features in alphabetical order and learn when each were added. If your org was created before the feature's release data, you need to configure the feature before using it. - **[Features by Release Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review a list of the NPSP features and learn when each were added. If your org was created before the feature's release data, you need to configure the feature before using it. ## Alphabetical List of Features Review a list of the NPSP features in alphabetical order and learn when each were added. If your org was created before the feature's release data, you need to configure the feature before using it. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important This article lists NPSP features that require configuration by a system administrator. It is not a comprehensive list of all features available in NPSP.
Feature Name Description Version Release Date

Acknowledge Donations by Email

Email acknowledgment letters to donors, either in a batch, or as one-offs for individual gifts. 3.46 7/9/2015
Address Management Record and keep a history of different types of addresses for Accounts, such as home, work, and seasonal addresses. Prior to 3.0 NA
Advanced Mapping Import to fields on standard objects, Nonprofit Success Pack objects, your own custom objects, or even objects from a managed package as long as they're directly related to Accounts, Contacts, or Opportunities. 3.161 9/4/2019
Automated and Manual Soft Credits Configure NPSP to automatically assign soft credit Opportunity Contact Roles based on Relationships, Affiliations, and Opportunity fields. 3.63 2/3/2016
Batch Data Import Use advanced import strategies to import data in batches. 3.108 9/14/2017
Customizable Rollups Create highly customized rollups that roll up either data from Opportunities, Payments, or Soft Credits (including Partial Soft Credits). 3.155 5/15/2019
Data Importer Import your data into NPSP. 3-1.20 10/1/2014
Donation Allocations Define as many General Accounting Units (GAUs) as you need to match your chart of accounts. Enter and track donations as parts of a GAU — either as a percentage of the donation amount, or as a specific dollar amount. 3.24 11/17/2014
Engagement Plans Create a set of tasks (literally a “plan”) that helps you engage with your constituents. Use Engagement Plans for major gifts, volunteer management, grant-making, client management, and sponsor management. 3.81 9/14/2016
Gift Entry Create consistent form templates that you can use to enter gifts into NPSP, either individually or in batches. 3.171 3/4/2020
Grants Manage incoming grant deadlines, applications, deliverables, reporting, and more. 3.41 6/9/2015
Household Naming When you create a new Contact in Salesforce, NPSP creates a new Household Account record and automatically names it based on the naming convention you choose. Prior to 3.0 NA
In-Kind Gifts Track In-Kind Gifts to your organization such as computers, food, clothing, equipment, or professional expertise. Keep In-Kind Gifts separate from cash donations for accurate reporting. 3.66 3/2/2016
Levels Track your constituents' level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. 3.81 9/14/2016
Matching Gifts Track a donation that a corporation made as a match for a donation from one of their employees. 3.63 2/3/2016
Memberships Memberships in NPSP represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. Decide the length and level of membership based on the donation amount. Prior to 3.0 NA
Recurring Donations (Enhanced) Tracks gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. 3.175 4/29/2020
Recurring Donations (Legacy) Track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. Prior to 3.0 NA
Reports & Dashboards Package Community-contributed reports and dashboards covering donors and their giving history, grants, memberships, campaign ROI, and more. Includes 67 reports and 4 dashboards. 3.90 2/14/2017
Relationships Control how Relationships behave in the Nonprofit Success Pack. Relationships connect one Contact to another. Prior to 3.0 NA
Tribute Opportunities Note the honorees for a donation, and the constituents who should be notified when a donation is received. 3.61 1/6/2016
If you're looking for additional features that aren't included in NPSP, check out the [AppExchange](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/mktcollections/industry-collections/nonprofits). ## Features by Release Date Review a list of the NPSP features and learn when each were added. If your org was created before the feature's release data, you need to configure the feature before using it.
Feature Name Description Version Release Date
Address Management Record and keep a history of different types of addresses for Accounts, such as home, work, and seasonal addresses. Prior to 3.0 NA
Household Naming When you create a new Contact in Salesforce, NPSP creates a new Household Account record and automatically names it based on the naming convention you choose. Prior to 3.0 NA
Memberships Memberships in NPSP represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. Decide the length and level of membership based on the donation amount. Prior to 3.0 NA
Recurring Donations (Legacy) Track gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. Prior to 3.0 NA
Relationships Control how Relationships behave in the Nonprofit Success Pack. Relationships connect one Contact to another. Prior to 3.0 NA
Data Importer Import your data into NPSP. 3-1.20 10/1/2014
Donation Allocations Define as many General Accounting Units (GAUs) as you need to match your chart of accounts. Enter and track donations as parts of a GAU — either as a percentage of the donation amount, or as a specific dollar amount. 3.24 11/17/2014
Grants Manage incoming grant deadlines, applications, deliverables, reporting, and more. 3.41 6/9/2015

Acknowledge Donations by Email

Email acknowledgment letters to donors, either in a batch, or as one-offs for individual gifts. 3.46 7/9/2015
Tribute Opportunities Note the honorees for a donation, and the constituents who should be notified when a donation is received. 3.61 1/6/2016
Automated and Manual Soft Credits Configure NPSP to automatically assign soft credit Opportunity Contact Roles based on Relationships, Affiliations, and Opportunity fields. 3.63 2/3/2016
Matching Gifts Track a donation that a corporation made as a match for a donation from one of their employees. 3.63 2/3/2016
In-Kind Gifts Track In-Kind Gifts to your organization such as computers, food, clothing, equipment, or professional expertise. Keep In-Kind Gifts separate from cash donations for accurate reporting. 3.66 3/2/2016
Engagement Plans Create a set of tasks (literally a “plan”) that helps you engage with your constituents. Use Engagement Plans for major gifts, volunteer management, grant-making, client management, and sponsor management. 3.81 9/14/2016
Levels Track your constituents' level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. 3.81 9/14/2016
Reports & Dashboards Package Community-contributed reports and dashboards covering donors and their giving history, grants, memberships, campaign ROI, and more. Includes 67 reports and 4 dashboards. 3.90 2/14/2017
Batch Data Import Use advanced import strategies to import data in batches. 3.108 9/14/2017
Customizable Rollups Create highly customized rollups that roll up either data from Opportunities, Payments, or Soft Credits (including Partial Soft Credits). 3.155 5/15/2019
Advanced Mapping Import to fields on standard objects, Nonprofit Success Pack objects, your own custom objects, or even objects from a managed package as long as they're directly related to Accounts, Contacts, or Opportunities. 3.161 9/4/2019
Gift Entry Create consistent form templates that you can use to enter gifts into NPSP, either individually or in batches. 3.171 3/4/2020
Recurring Donations (Enhanced) Tracks gifts that donors have pledged over a period of time. 3.175 4/29/2020
# Feedback Management Configuration Recommender experience flows use Salesforce Feedback Management surveys to collect recommendation details and Omnistudio components show them on the Individual Application page. - **[Enable Surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_ready_to_use_recommender_experience_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up your Education Cloud org for users to create recommendation surveys that they can send to an applicant's references. - **[Create and Assign a Surveys Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_ready_to_use_recommender_experience_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create and manage surveys, create and assign a permission set to users. - **[Guest User Profile Access for Your Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_ready_to_use_recommender_experience_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change the access permissions for guest users of your Experience Cloud site so that recommenders can access and submit surveys. - **[Configure Guest User File Uploads for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_ready_to_use_recommender_experience_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant permission to guest users of your Experience Cloud site to upload files as part of the recommendation process. ## Enable Surveys Set up your Education Cloud org for users to create recommendation surveys that they can send to an applicant's references.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions |   | | --- | --- | | To enable Surveys: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Salesforce Surveys provides a default allowance of 300 completed survey responses per org. Only completed responses count toward this limit. If you expect higher response volumes, you can purchase more Survey Response Packs. See [Salesforce Survey Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000394564&type=1&language=en_US). 1. In Setup, find and select **Survey Settings**. 2. Turn on Surveys. 3. Select the Experience Cloud site that you use for admissions. 4. Enable Survey Owners Can Manage Responses. ## Create and Assign a Surveys Permission Set To create and manage surveys, create and assign a permission set to users.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
|   |   | | --- | --- | | To create permission sets: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. In Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a label for the permission set. Press Tab to automatically fill the API name. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click **System Permissions**, and then click **Edit**. 6. Turn on Surveys Advanced Features Starter. 7. Turn on View Setup and Configuration. 8. Save your changes. 9. Next to System Permissions, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and then select **Object Settings**. 10. Select **Surveys**, and then click **Edit**. 11. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 12. Save your changes. 13. Similarly, enable the Read, Create, Edit, and Delete object permissions for Survey Invitations, Survey Responses, and Survey Subjects. ## Guest User Profile Access for Your Portal Change the access permissions for guest users of your Experience Cloud site so that recommenders can access and submit surveys. See [Manage Guest Access to Your Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_guest_access_to_your_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To show unauthenticated site visitors information about your institution's academic schedule, student programs, financial aid options, course catalog, and so on, give guest users read access to the relevant records."). ## Configure Guest User File Uploads for Your Experience Cloud Site Grant permission to guest users of your Experience Cloud site to upload files as part of the recommendation process.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To configure guest user file uploads: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Salesforce Files, and then select **General Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Allow guest users to upload files**. 4. Save your changes. # Filter Records for Accounting Subledger Jobs Control which source records to process by setting up filtering criteria on accounting sets. Accounting Subledger jobs apply the criteria on the primary object and evaluate the matching records. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license is enabled, with Data Pipelines turned on and at least one active user with the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger permission set can access this feature. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Configure Accounting Set Settings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Accounting Subledger Jobs Inputs and Impacts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_inputs_impacts.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Accounting Subledger Limitations (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_limitations.htm) # Finalize NPSP Import Use Dry Run to verify the records you want to import, process the import, troubleshoot common import errors, and delete import records after you're done with them. - **[Verify Your Upload with Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import. - **[Process Your Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity. - **[Delete Imported Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_imported_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've successfully imported your records, you can optionally reduce data storage by deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object. Deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object does not delete your new Account, Contact, or Opportunity donation records. - **[Troubleshoot NPSP Data Importer Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to find and fix NPSP Data Import errors. # Financial Aid Agent Considerations To use the Financial Aid Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations, and security requirements. ## Identity Verification for PII Access Before providing any personalized financial aid information such as application status, award amounts, disbursement dates, or SAP status, the agent verifies the user's identity. - Authenticated Students: If the user is logged into the Experience Cloud site, the agent bypasses the email verification step. - Unauthenticated Prospects: The agent mandates a one-time password verification. The agent asks for an email address, sends a verification code, and requires the user to validate the code before answering personalized questions. ## Person Account Requirement To support guest identity verification via one-time password (OTP) verification, Person Accounts must be enabled in your org. The OTP email verification flow requires prospects to have a Person Account with a valid contact ID and email. Without these, the agent's verification chain fails. Use your organization's extract, transform, and load (ETL) tool, such as MuleSoft, Informatica, or Salesforce Data Loader, to sync individual records from your financial aid management system to Person Accounts in Salesforce CRM. ## Strict Limitations and Out of Scope Actions The Financial Aid Agent is designed to provide factual information and only answer questions. The agent operates with a neutral, non-advisory tone and can’t perform the following actions: - Give financial advice, such as recommending a specific loan, or make judgments about a user’s financial situation. - Accept or decline financial aid awards. - Submit documents or applications. - Make changes to financial aid packages. - Display financial aid information by term or semester. The agent organizes data by academic award year only. If a user asks the agent to perform these actions, the agent instructs them to contact the financial aid office or log into their student portal. ## Data Model Object (DMO) Grounding The agent relies on data from Data 360 to ground its responses. To provide this data, map your financial aid management system data to the Salesforce financial aid Data Model Objects (DMOs). Missing or incomplete DMO records prevent the agent from providing accurate student-specific answers. For more information, see [Set Up Data 360 for Education: Financial Aid](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_360_for_education_financial_aid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the Data 360 and Agentforce for Education elements required to ingest and map your external financial aid management system data. Your data grounds the Financial Aid agent and powers the financial aid Lightning web components, ensuring that both can provide personalized, accurate information about a student's financial aid package."). # Financial Aid Agent for Education Cloud Use the Financial Aid Agent to assist prospective students, applicants, and current students with inquiries related to their financial aid. The agent provides immediate and accurate responses to help students understand their financial aid status, requirements, and awards.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
- **[Financial Aid Agent Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_agent_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Financial Aid Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations, and security requirements. - **[Financial Aid Agent Topics and Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_agent_topics_and_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Financial Aid Agent topic to answer questions from password-verified prospects and authenticated students about their financial aid. - **[Set Up the Financial Aid Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_financial_aid_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Financial Aid Agent to display personalized financial aid information to students and prospects using Data 360 and Agentforce. # Financial Aid Agent Topics and Actions Use the Financial Aid Agent topic to answer questions from password-verified prospects and authenticated students about their financial aid. The Financial Aid agent uses this topic and related actions:
Topic Description Actions
Describe Financial Aid Awards Answer questions about financial aid status, award details, estimated cost of attendance, disbursement dates, and satisfactory academic progress. The topic is strictly for answering questions and doesn’t perform actions.
  • Answer Financial Aid Question
  • Send Email Verification Code
  • Verify Email Code
# Financial Aid Components Learn how the financial aid components display data and calculate totals for students, prospects, and staff. ## Component Overview Add financial aid components to an Experience Cloud portal for students and prospects, or to the Person Account record page for staff. The same components are available in both contexts. | Component | Description | | --- | --- | | Financial Aid Highlights | Shows a header that contains key financial aid fields. You can customize the background and text colors, and choose to show or hide metrics like net cost, total offered aid, total accepted aid, disbursed aid, the number of applications received, and progress status. | | Financial Aid Overview | Shows the total cost of attendance, total aid, and cost breakdown for a student. | | Financial Aid Awards | Shows information about awards that are part of a financial aid package, organized in Grants and Loans tabs. | | Financial Aid Checklist | Shows a list of the tasks that a learner must complete to receive financial aid, including status badges and instructions. | | Financial Aid Applications | Shows a student's financial aid applications and their verification statuses. | | Financial Aid Disbursements | Shows information about paid and scheduled disbursements that are part of a financial aid package. | | Financial Aid Notifications | Shows notifications about items affecting the financial aid package. | ## Display Logic The financial aid components expect specific field values to display information correctly. If your source system uses different values, remap them before mapping to the DMO. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note All Award Year and Academic Year fields must use the same value to represent the academic year. Use the format ####-####, for example 2024-2025. | Component | Field | Display Logic | | --- | --- | --- | | Financial Aid Checklist | Status on Required Document DMO | Recognizes Outstanding, In Review, Complete, Rejected, and Waived. Remaps Pending to Outstanding and Received to In Review. Displays unrecognized values as Outstanding. Complete and Waived are terminal statuses. | | Financial Aid Awards | LearnerFinancialAidType on Benefit DMO | Grant, Work-Study, and Workstudy types appear in the Grants section. Loan types appear in the Loans section. | | Financial Aid Awards | BenefitAssignmentStatus on Benefit Assignment DMO | Accepted and Offered statuses display a localized label. Other statuses display the raw value. Canceled awards are hidden from display and excluded from offered and accepted totals. | | Financial Aid Disbursements | PaymentStatus on Benefit Disbursement DMO | Records with a PaymentStatus of Paid contribute to the disbursed total. Records with a PaymentStatus of Scheduled contribute to the scheduled total. | | Financial Aid Overview | Category on Learner Cost Item DMO | Expects Indirect or Direct to categorize cost items in the cost breakdown. | | Financial Aid Notifications | VerificationSelected and VerifiedDate on Learner Financial Aid Application DMO | Shows a verification notification when an application has VerificationSelected set to true with no VerifiedDate. | | Financial Aid Notifications | Reason on Required Document DMO | Shows a notification when required documents have reasons that include packaging or disbursement and the status is not terminal. | | Financial Aid Notifications | Benefit Disbursement Hold DMO | Shows a notification when disbursements have active holds. | ## Calculation Logic The financial aid components calculate totals and summary values using the following formulas. | Value | Source | Formula | | --- | --- | --- | | Total Offered Aid | OfferedAmount on Benefit Assignment DMO | Sum of OfferedAmount for the selected award year, excluding Canceled records. | | Total Accepted Aid | AcceptedAmount on Benefit Assignment DMO | Sum of AcceptedAmount for the selected award year, excluding Canceled records. | | Total Cost of Attendance | TotalEstimatedCostAmount on Learner Cost Summary DMO | Sum of TotalEstimatedCostAmount for the selected award year. | | Estimated Cost of Attendance | Category on Learner Cost Item DMO | Total direct costs plus total indirect costs for the selected period. | | Total Aid | OfferedAmount on Benefit Assignment DMO | Sum of Grants, Loans, and Workstudy total offered amounts. | | Net Cost | Benefit Assignment DMO and Learner Cost Summary DMO | Total Cost of Attendance minus total Grants offered amount. | | Disbursed to Date | DisbursedAmount on Benefit Disbursement DMO | Sum of DisbursedAmount where PaymentStatus is Paid for the selected award year. | # Financial Aid Data Model Objects Map your external financial aid management system data to the Salesforce financial aid Data Model Objects (DMOs) to model the financial aid lifecycle from application to disbursement.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
For the complete field-level reference for each Financial Aid DMO, including field labels, API names, data types, and descriptions, see the [Data 360 DMO and Mapping Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-model-data.html). | Data Model Object | Description | | --- | --- | | [Learner Financial Aid Application DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-learnerfinancialaidapplicationdmo-dmo.html) | Represents a student's financial aid application, such as a FAFSA, scholarship, or grant application. | | [Application DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-applicationdmo-dmo.html) | A general application object that works with the Learner Financial Aid Application DMO to store core application status data. | | [Benefit DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-benefitdmo-dmo.html) | Represents a benefit offering or fund definition such as a Pell Grant. | | [Benefit Assignment DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-benefitassignmentdmo-dmo.html) | Represents the award offer assigned to a student, tracking offered amounts, accepted amounts, and statuses. | | [Required Document DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-requireddocumentdmo-dmo.html) | Represents documentation required for financial aid processing, such as tax forms or verification documents. | | [Benefit Disbursement Period DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-benefitdisbursementperioddmo-dmo.html) | Represents the payment period or academic interval during which disbursements occur. | | [Benefit Disbursement DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-benefitdisbursementdmo-dmo.html) | Represents an actual disbursement transaction to a student. | | [Benefit Disbursement Hold DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-benefitdisbursementholddmo-dmo.html) | Represents a block or hold on a benefit disbursement. | | [Learner Cost Summary DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-learnercostsummarydmo-dmo.html) | Represents the total estimated cost of attendance for a learner during a specific disbursement period. | | [Learner Cost Item DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-learnercostitemdmo-dmo.html) | Represents an individual line item that makes up the total estimated costs. | | [Learner Financial Aid Standing DMO](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/data/data-cloud-dmo-mapping/guide/c360dm-si-learnerfinancialaidstandingdmo-dmo.html) | Represents a learner's academic standing and satisfactory academic progress status. | ## DMO Relationships The financial aid DMOs connect to model a student's aid lifecycle, from application through disbursement. Understanding how they relate helps you map your data correctly. - The Individual DMO is the center of the model. Every financial aid DMO links to a student through an `IndividualId` foreign key. - A student's application is stored in the Learner Financial Aid Application DMO. Each application leads to one or more award offers in the Benefit Assignment DMO. - Each award offer pays out through one or more disbursements in the Benefit Disbursement DMO across the academic year. - The Benefit Disbursement Period DMO defines each payment period. Disbursements, cost summaries, and academic progress evaluations all tie to a period. - The Learner Cost Summary DMO holds the total estimated cost for a period. The Learner Cost Item DMO holds the individual line items that make up that total, such as tuition, fees, and housing. # Find and Merge Duplicate Contacts Use Contact Merge to find and merge duplicate constituent records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Merge Duplicate Contacts](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eIiB0urwIMk) - **[About Contact Merge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Contact Merge in NPSP to easily merge duplicate Contacts into a single record. With Contact Merge, you choose which Contact to keep and what data to preserve from each duplicate. - **[Merge Duplicate Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Merging Contacts is an irreversible process that combines up to three records into one. One of the merged contacts is the master record and the other records are deleted. We recommend that only System Administrators merge Contacts. ## About Contact Merge Use Contact Merge in NPSP to easily merge duplicate Contacts into a single record. With Contact Merge, you choose which Contact to keep and what data to preserve from each duplicate. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you don't have access to the NPSP Contact Merge tab, contact your System Administrator and request that they provide access to your profile. Unlike standard Salesforce merge, NPSP Contact Merge merges Accounts in certain circumstances. For example, if your merge leaves an Account with no Contacts, NPSP Contact Merge merges the two Accounts, re-parents all the related records from the empty Account to the main Contact’s Account, and deletes the empty Account. From the NPSP Contact Merge tab, click **Search Contacts** to search by Contact name. You can also click **See Duplicate Contacts** to see a list of duplicate record sets, but you'll need to [set up duplicate detection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up duplicate detection and contact merge to keep your contacts organized and up-to-date.") first. For both options, you merge duplicate Contacts manually. In addition to Contact Merge, we recommend the following best practices for duplicate management and prevention: - Train users to search for Contacts before entering new ones. Consider [customizing search layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=customize_searchlayout.htm&language=en_US) to give users more information about Contacts, so they can easily see if the Contact already exists. - Formulate a plan to identify duplicate Contacts, including which fields to use to determine if a Contact is a duplicate. For example, you may require entering a middle initial for common names, or you may identify a secondary field to determine a duplicate, like an address or email field. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Merging Contacts is irreversible. We recommend backing up your data before merging. See [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Merge Duplicate Contacts Merging Contacts is an irreversible process that combines up to three records into one. One of the merged contacts is the master record and the other records are deleted. We recommend that only System Administrators merge Contacts. ### Before You Merge We recommend that only the System Administrator merge Contacts, because the merge process is irreversible. To successfully merge Contacts using NPSP Contact Merge, you must have Create, Edit, and Delete permissions on the Contact object. Additionally, at least one of the following must be true: - You are the owner of the Accounts and Contacts being merged. - You are above the owners of the Contacts being merged in the role hierarchy. - You have the Modify All Records permission on Accounts and Contacts. Review the following before merging Contacts. - Examine the Accounts associated with each of the Contacts to merge and determine which one should be the master Account after the merge. - Review child records from custom objects for duplicates. When you merge Contacts, all related items from each Contact, such as Opportunities and Payments, are moved to the newly-merged Contact so that no data is lost. - If you delete a Contact who is the last member of a Household Account, the process merges that Contact's Household Account with the winning Contact's Household Account. ### Run Duplicate Jobs If you have Unlimited Edition or Salesforce.org Insights Platform Data Integrity, run a Duplicate Job to find duplicate Contacts based on your Matching Rule. For more information, see [Run Duplicate Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_duplicate_detection_and_npsp_contact_merge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up duplicate detection and contact merge to keep your contacts organized and up-to-date.") in Salesforce Help. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter **Duplicate Jobs** in the Quick Find box, then click **Duplicate Jobs**. 3. Click **New Job**. 4. Select the **Contact** object. 5. Select the Matching Rule you created. 6. Optionally change the job name. 7. Click **Run** ### Merge Duplicate Contacts 1. Click the **Contact Merge** tab. 2. Choose a method to find duplicate Contacts: - To search for individual Contacts, click **Search Contacts** and enter the name of a Contact. You can use an asterisk (\*) as a wildcard, for example, L\* Jones finds both Larry Jones and Lawrence Jones. Contact merge will look at all searchable fields including custom ones. - If you set up Matching Rules and Duplicate Rules or Duplicate Jobs, click **See Duplicate Contacts**. Select the Duplicate Record Set you want to merge. 3. Select up to three Contacts to merge. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Select one Contact as the Master Record. The Master Record determines which Account record the Contact will be associated with after the merge. Contact(s) you don't select will be deleted. ![Track master record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/merge_contacts_pickcontact.png) 6. Select the field values from any record to preserve in the final merged Contact. Unselected fields will be overwritten. For example, if two records have different phone numbers, select the phone number you want to keep. 7. Click **Merge**, then click **Merge**. # Find the Release Version Identify the current version and originally installed version of Education Data Architecture (EDA). - **[Which Version Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the version of the Education Data Architecture managed package in your org. - **[Which Version Was Originally Installed?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some new features require additional setup if you installed the product prior to a certain version or date. To figure out which version you started with, look in the Release Announcements group for the date of the major release announcement corresponding to your original installation date. ## Which Version Am I Using? Identify the version of the Education Data Architecture managed package in your org. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 3. Find the Education Data Architecture package, then look at the **Version Number**. ## Which Version Was Originally Installed? Some new features require additional setup if you installed the product prior to a certain version or date. To figure out which version you started with, look in the Release Announcements group for the date of the major release announcement corresponding to your original installation date. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages.** 3. Click the **Education Data Architecture** package name. 4. On the package detail page, look in the Installed By field (1) for the date the package was first installed. ![Package details, first installed version and last installed date](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda-pkg-details.jpg) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't rely on the number in First Installed Version (2), which isn't necessarily correct. 5. Navigate to the [EDA Release Announcements](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F94S000000kHOcSAM?tab=discussion&sort=LAST_MODIFIED_DATE_DESC) group. 6. Make sure the posts are sorted by Latest Posts instead of Most Recent Activity. 7. Scroll through the posts to find the version that was released closest to (but not after) your installation date, which is your first installed version. ![Most recent product release by date](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda-release-details.jpg) # Find the Release Version Identify the current version and originally installed version of your app. - **[Which Version Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_find_the_release_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the version of the K-12 Architecture Kit managed package in your org. - **[Which Version Was Originally Installed?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_find_the_release_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some new features require additional setup if you installed the product prior to a certain version or date. To figure out which version you started with, look in the Release Announcements group for the date of the major release announcement corresponding to your original installation date. ## Which Version Am I Using? Identify the version of the K-12 Architecture Kit managed package in your org. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 3. Find the K-12 Architecture Kit package, then look at the **Version Number**. ## Which Version Was Originally Installed? Some new features require additional setup if you installed the product prior to a certain version or date. To figure out which version you started with, look in the Release Announcements group for the date of the major release announcement corresponding to your original installation date. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages.** 3. Click the **K-12 Architecture Kit** package name. 4. On the package detail page, look in the Installed By field (1) for the date the package was first installed. ![Package details, first installed version and last installed date](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/k12-pkgd-details.jpg) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't rely on the number in First Installed Version (2), which isn't necessarily correct. 5. Navigate to the [K-12 Architecture Kit Release Announcements](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group. 6. Make sure the posts are sorted by Latest Posts instead of Most Recent Activity. 7. Scroll through the posts to find the version that was released closest to (but not after) your installation date, which is your first installed version. ![Most recent product release by date](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/k12-release-details.jpg) # Find Your NPSP Installation Date and Version With Nonprofit Success Pack, updates are automatically pushed to your org, but many new features require additional setup. If you installed NPSP prior to the most recent release, you may need to configure the latest features. ## Find Your NPSP Installation Date 1. From Setup, enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 2. Click **Nonprofit Success Pack**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see Nonprofit Success Pack in your list of Installed Packages, you're either using an earlier version of NPSP, or no version has been installed. For more information see [Which Version of NPSP Am I Using.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed.") 3. On the package details page, find the **Installed By** field. The date listed is your original installation date. ![Installed Package Detail screen with Installed By Date of 3/18/2019](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/installed_package.jpg) ## Find Your Original Installation Version 1. Follow the steps in Find Your NPSP Installation Date above. 2. Make a note of the installation date in the **Installed By** field. In the example above, it's 3/18/2019. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The version listed in the **First Installed Version Number** field may not be accurate. Use the date in the Installed By field to find your original installation version, as explained in the following steps. 3. Navigate to the [NPSP Release Announcements page](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/topics/npspreleaseannouncements?sort=last_modified_date_desc). 4. Select Latest Posts in the Sort By picklist: ![Sort By picklist with Latest Posts selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/sort_by_latest_post.jpg) 5. Scroll through the messages to find the version that was pushed to production orgs closest to (but not after) your installation date. This will be the version that was originally installed in your org. In this example, it's version 3.149: ![NPSP Release Announcement post showing version 3.149 pushed to production on March 13, 2019.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/npsp_release_announcments.jpg) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note For a list of NPSP features with the version and date they were released, see [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when)."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note See the latest NPSP release version number and date in the [NPSP GitHub repository](https://github.com/SalesforceFoundation/NPSP/releases). # Find Your Way Around Learn about the Case Management app and where to find the information you need. - **[Home Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_salesforce_instance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Home tab shows an overview of your work and is the first tab you see when you log in to Case Management. - **[Contacts Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_salesforce_instance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Contacts Tab to view all of your clients. ## Home Tab The Home tab shows an overview of your work and is the first tab you see when you log in to Case Management. - Today's Events (1) - Attendance dashboard, where you can see Contacts who may require followup (2) - Reports include: Contacts Absent for Last Service Delivery, Contacts with 3 Consecutive Absences, and Contacts without Recent Interactions   ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Due to [dynamic dashboard limits](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=analytics.rd_reports_dashboards_limits.htm&type=5), we’re shipping this dashboard as a standard dashboard. This means that the numbers on the dashboard will reflect what the installing user sees (the totals for the entire org). However, if you click through to the reports, you'll see correct data. If your org hasn't reached the dashboard limit, you can make the dashboard dynamic so that the numbers are up-to-date for the viewing user. On the dashboard component, click **Open**, then click **Edit**. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png) to edit dashboard properties. Change View Dashboard As to **The dashboard viewer**. Click **Save**, then click **Done**. - New Contact, Go To My Notes, and View My Program Engagements buttons (3) - Recent Sessions, sortable by list view or time frame (4) - Open Tasks, including overdue tasks linked to related Contact and Task records (5) - Incidents that have been recently logged (6) - Client Search, where you can search for Contacts who are designated as Clients (7) ![Home page showing today's events, contacts who may require follow up, recently logged incidents, client search, open tasks, and action buttons](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/home.png) ## Contacts Tab Use the Contacts Tab to view all of your clients. The Contacts tab is where you can see all of your Contacts. Click a Contact name to see their Contact record, with the details listed below. ### Client Card The Client Card includes the following information, unless your Salesforce admin [customized the layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Client Card displays at the top of a Contact record and shows all of the most important information about a Contact, including name, a photo, contact information, critical alerts, and Client ID."). - Client photo (1) - Client's preferred name and pronouns, and a _watch list_ icon![Watch list icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/watchlist_icon.png) if the client needs heightened attention (2) - Client's roles with your organization; default is Client (3) - Client's Full Name, Legal Name, Business Phone, and Email (4) - Critical Client Alerts (5) - Client ID generator with link to Manage Client ID (6) ![Client Card showing client photo, preferred name and pronouns, watch list icon, client roles, client contact information, critical client information, and client Id generator](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientcard.png) ### Contact Information The Contact information below the client card provides a comprehensive overview of your client's case management engagement, including: - Tabs (1) to view related records. Each tab shows a summary of information (2), and you can click the name of a record to see it - Program Engagements: See information about the Contact's Program Engagements, including the Program Engagement’s start date and last service date, the client's stage in the Program, an Attendance Summary showing percentage of participants that were Present out of the total participants Present and Absent, and related records. - Client Notes: See full history of notes for this Client. - Case Plans: See detailed information about the Contact's Case Plans, including when a Case Plan was created, status, goals, and the details of each plan. - Assessments: See a graph with the Client's Assessment scores and dates of completion. - Details: See all of the client's contact information. - Files: See or add files to the Contact. - Related: See related lists that include Intakes, Service Participants, Case Plans, Cases, Related Accounts, Client Alerts, Client Notes, Client Note Relationships, Assessments, and Relationships from NPSP, if you use NPSP. - Client Search (3) - New Note to create a New Client Note (4) - Incidents reported for the client (5) - New Event, New Task, and Log a Call to show a client's activities and event timeline (6) ![Contact information showing tabs to view Program Engagements, Case Plans, Assessments, Contact Details, and Related lists, details of the selected tab, client search, note action, reported incidents, client activities and event timeline](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/contactinformation.png) # Flexcards for Inquiry Flows Provide a variety of ways for prospects, applicants, and students to engage with your institution by adding inquiry management flows to your Education Portal. Clone and update the inquiry Flexcards before you add them to your Education Portal. You can customize the display labels and text to suit the purpose of each flow.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Make a note of the names of your cloned Flexcards. You'll need them later when you update the component in your Education Portal. - **[Configure Flexcards for the Submit an Inquiry Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_flexcards_for_inquiry_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone the Education Cloud Flexcards that are used to facilitate the Submit an Inquiry screen flow. - **[Configure the Flexcard for the Sign Up for Information Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_flexcards_for_inquiry_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone and update the EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView Flexcard to use it with the Sign Up for Information screen flow. - **[Configure the Flexcard for the Connect with Us Inquiry Submission Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_flexcards_for_inquiry_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure an Education Cloud Flexcard to use it with the Connect with Us Inquiry Submission flow. ## Configure Flexcards for the Submit an Inquiry Screen Flow Clone the Education Cloud Flexcards that are used to facilitate the Submit an Inquiry screen flow.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Flexcards:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Omnistudio Admin

AND

Omnistudio User

1. In Omnistudio, in the App Launcher, enter Flexcards, and then select **Omnistudio Flexcards**. 2. Open the EDUApplicationPortalNeedHelpSection Flexcard. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. Enter a name and title for the card. 5. Click **Clone**. 6. Click **Submit an Inquiry**. 7. In the Action Properties panel, expand the **Action** section. 8. Under Attributes, in Key, enter the name of your cloned Submit an Inquiry flow. See [Inquiry Flows Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_flows_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Education Cloud inquiry management flows."). 9. Activate the Flexcard. 10. Similarly clone the EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView Flexcard and update the Inquiry button, and clone the EDUAdmissionsRFIListViewContainer Flexcard and updated the New button. 11. Open the EDUAdmissionsRFIListViewWrapper Flexcard. 12. Click **Clone**. 13. Enter a name and title for the card. 14. Click **Clone**. 15. Select the **EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView** nested Flexcard. 16. In FlexCard Name, enter the name of your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView Flexcard. 17. Select the **EDUAdmissionsRFIListViewContainer** nested Flexcard. 18. In FlexCard Name, enter the name of your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsRFIListViewContainer Flexcard. 19. Activate the Flexcard. ## Configure the Flexcard for the Sign Up for Information Screen Flow Clone and update the EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView Flexcard to use it with the Sign Up for Information screen flow.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Flexcards:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
1. Open the EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView Flexcard. 2. Click **Clone**. 3. Enter a name and title that's suitable for a signup call to action. 4. Click **Clone**. 5. Delete the NoRFIImage element. 6. Delete the Text-1-clone-0 element. 7. Change the text in the UniversityText element to your signup message. For example, enter Sign up to receive our newsletter. 8. Click **Submit an Inquiry**, and enter an appropriate label and aria-label for the signup action. For example, enter Sign Up. 9. In the Actions section on the Action Properties panel, enter Open Sign Up for Information Flow as the action label. 10. In the Attributes section, for the flowName value, enter the name of your cloned version of the Sign Up for Information screen flow. See [Inquiry Flows Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_flows_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Education Cloud inquiry management flows."). 11. Delete any conditions. 12. Activate the Flexcard. ## Configure the Flexcard for the Connect with Us Inquiry Submission Flow Configure an Education Cloud Flexcard to use it with the Connect with Us Inquiry Submission flow.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Flexcards:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
1. Open your cloned version of the EDUAdmissionsRFIZeroResultView Flexcard. 2. Click **Clone**. 3. Enter a name and title that's suitable for a signup call to action. 4. Click **Clone**. 5. Delete the NoRFIImage element. 6. Delete the Text-1-clone-0 element. 7. Update the text element. For example, enter Connect with a recruiter. 8. Click **Sign Up**, and enter a label and aria-label. For example, enter Connect with Us. 9. In the Actions section on the Action Properties panel, enter Open Connect with Us flow as the action label. 10. In the Attributes section, for the flowName value, enter the name of your cloned version of the Connect with Us flow. See [Inquiry Flows Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_flows_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Education Cloud inquiry management flows."). 11. Activate the Flexcard. # Flows Explore the available Grants Management flows that can automate your grants activities. - **[Install Grants Management Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install the latest versions of unpackaged Grants Management flows in your org. - **[Create Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Create Application flow automates how the application initially starts for your grantseeker. This involves retrieving information about the Funding Program and user’s Contact information, autofilling fields on the application, and creating the application record. Without this flow, a grantseeker can’t apply for a Funding Request without making permission updates to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile. - **[Grants Management: Application Form Launcher (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_multi_section_app_launcher.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the flow that launches a multi-section application in your portal. - **[Grants Management: Email the Assigned Reviewer (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_email_the_assigned_reviewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the external reviewer notification flow. - **[Grants Management: Enhanced Application (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enhanced_app_1.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the flow that presents the Create Application flow on a single screen. - **[Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_multi_section_app_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the flow for multi-section applications. - **[Grants Management: Send Invitations to Collaborators (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_send_invitations_to_collaborators.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the Funding Request collaborators invitation flow. - **[Grants Management: Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_share_account_contact_wcollaborators.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the flow that shares the Applying Organization and Applying Contact with a Funding Request Collaborator. - **[Grants Management: Validate EIN (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_validate_ein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the flow that validates the tax ID for an applying organization. - **[Submit Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_submit_application_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in the flow that automates submitting an application. # Follow Your Constituents' Journey Use timeline and life events to get a 360-degree view of a constituent from your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Timeline Bring in multiple objects into one list so that staff can reference a chronological view of the engagement of applicants or students to evaluate the progress and take action. Timelines enable you to: - Create records directly from the timeline view. - Select the most relevant engagements for display. - Add multiple timelines to a page. Use cases for timelines include: - A Student Activities timeline that references cases, service appointments, record alerts, or care plans. - An Enrollment History timeline that references academic term enrollments, learner programs, or course offering participants. Life Events Capture and visualize important life events in a learner's journey. Your team can deepen learner relationships by using details to identify opportunities and devise personalized offers and engagement. Life Events enable you to: - Add personalized events to enrich engagement. - Support institution-specific event types. - Create and configure contextual actions. Life milestones that you can track include: - Graduation - New job - Marriage - Business recognitions - Awards Interaction Summary Capture structured, searchable notes that use smart search and filters. Add tags for discussed topics to create appropriate action items all in one place. Interaction Summary enable you to: - Share notes easily. - Support multiple attendees, both internal and external. - Create reports on notes. Use cases for interaction summary include: - Meeting notes - Advising notes - Contact reports for prospect management - Notes associated with learners and business accounts Record Alerts Alert your advisors and staff to the changes in records that require action so that staff can take proactive steps and leverage care plans for a learner. Record Alerts enable you to: - Use flows to automate and mass apply alerts. - Customize record alert cards by using Omnistudio. - Customize schedules. - Track the origin of an alert when triggered using integration with an external system. See Also: - [Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.timeline.htm&type=5) - [Work with Events and Milestones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_work_with_life_events_business_milestones.htm&type=5) - [Interaction Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_interaction_summaries.htm&type=5) - [Record Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts.htm&type=5) - [Monitor Learner Performance with Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_monitor_learner_performance_with_alerts.htm) # For Developers The Education Data Architecture (EDA) is an open source, BSD-licensed package. Developer contributions and involvement are welcomed and encouraged. All packages and source are currently hosted on GitHub using git. Branches as well as tags, issues lists, and release notes can be found in the [EDA repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/eda). # For Developers Volunteers for Salesforce is an open source, BSD-licensed package. Developer contributions and involvement are welcomed and encouraged. All packages and source are currently hosted on GitHub using git. Branches as well as tags, issues lists, and release notes can now be found in the [Volunteers-for-Salesforce repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/volunteers-for-salesforce). # Format Donor Briefs by Applying Custom Templates in Education Salesforce provides a sample template for donor briefs. This sample is a starting point for customizing templates for your org. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To customize donor brief templates:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Download this template as .docx file and customize it for your org: [Donor Brief Template](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1dBN4hJlrK6QcnTUJTmo-KCXYzZk1Zn40bEtWfDU7Hm0/edit?usp=drive_link) Customize the provided template with any of these fields that are available for use with the donor brief. Person Account fields ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - Name: 'DonorName' - FirstName: 'FirstName' - LastName: 'LastName' - Salutation: 'Salutation' - AnnualRevenue: 'AnnualRevenue' - Description: 'Description' - NumberOfEmployees: 'Employees' - Fax: 'Fax' - Phone: 'Phone' - PersonHomePhone: 'HomePhone' - Website: 'Website' - PersonEmail: 'Email' - PersonMailingCity: 'City' - PersonMailingState: 'State' - PersonMailingCountry: 'Country' Account fields - Name: 'DonorName' - AnnualRevenue: 'AnnualRevenue' - Description: 'Description' - NumberOfEmployees: 'Employees' - Fax: 'Fax' - Phone: 'Phone' - Website: 'Website' - BillingStreet: 'BillingStreet' - BillingCountry: 'BillingCountry' - BillingState: 'BillingState’ - BillingPostalCode: 'BillingPostalCode' - BillingCity: 'BillingCity' - ShippingStreet: 'ShippingStreet' - ShippingCountry: 'ShippingCountry' - ShippingState: 'ShippingState' - ShippingPostalCode: 'ShippingPostalCode' - ShippingCity: 'ShippingCity' - Type: 'Type' Donor Gift Summary fields - AverageGiftAmount: 'AverageGiftAmount' - BestGiftYear: 'BestGiftYear' - CurrentRecurringStartDate: 'CurrentRecurringStartDate' - CurrentYearGiftCount: 'CurrentYearGiftCount' - CompositeRfmScore: 'CompositeRfmScore' - DaysSinceLastGift: 'DaysSinceLastGift' - FirstGiftAmount: 'FirstGiftAmount' - FirstGiftDate: 'FirstGiftDate' - FirstRecurringStartDate: 'FirstRecurringStartDate' - FirstSoftCreditAmount: 'FirstSoftCreditAmount' - FirstSoftCreditDate: 'FirstSoftCreditDate' - FrequencyScore: 'FrequencyScore' - GiftCount: 'GiftCount' - GiftsLastYearAmount: 'GiftsLastYearAmount' - GiftsThisYearAmount: 'GiftsThisYearAmount' - GiftsTwoYearsAgoAmount: 'GiftsTwoYearsAgoAmount' - HighestGiftAmount: 'HighestGiftAmount' - HighestSoftCreditAmount: 'HighestSoftCreditAmount' - HighestSoftCreditDate: 'HighestSoftCreditDate' - LastGiftAmount: 'LastGiftAmount' - LastGiftDate: 'LastGiftDate' - LastRecurringPaymentDate: 'LastRecurringPaymentDate' - LastSoftCreditAmount: 'LastSoftCreditAmount' - LastSoftCreditDate: 'LastSoftCreditDate' - LastTwoYearGiftCount: 'LastTwoYearGiftCount' - LastYearGiftCount: 'LastYearGiftCount' - LowestGiftAmount: 'LowestGiftAmount' - MonetaryScore: 'MonetaryScore' - RecencyScore: 'RecencyScore' - SecondGiftDate: 'SecondGiftDate' - SoftCreditCount: 'SoftCreditCount' - TotalGiftsAmount: 'TotalGiftsAmount' - TotalHardSoftCredits: 'TotalHardSoftCredits' - TotalHardSoftCreditsAmount: 'TotalHardSoftCreditsAmount' - TotalPaidRcrInstallments: 'TotalPaidRcrInstallments' - TotalPaidRcrInstlAmt: 'TotalPaidRcrInstlAmt' # Format Donor Briefs by Applying Custom Templates in Nonprofit Salesforce provides a sample template for donor briefs. This sample is a starting point for customizing templates for your org. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To customize donor brief templates:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Download this template as .docx file and customize it for your org: [Donor Brief Template](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1dBN4hJlrK6QcnTUJTmo-KCXYzZk1Zn40bEtWfDU7Hm0/edit?usp=drive_link) Customize the provided template with any of these fields that are available for use with the donor brief. Person Account fields ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - Name: 'DonorName' - FirstName: 'FirstName' - LastName: 'LastName' - Salutation: 'Salutation' - AnnualRevenue: 'AnnualRevenue' - Description: 'Description' - NumberOfEmployees: 'Employees' - Fax: 'Fax' - Phone: 'Phone' - PersonHomePhone: 'HomePhone' - Website: 'Website' - PersonEmail: 'Email' - PersonMailingCity: 'City' - PersonMailingState: 'State' - PersonMailingCountry: 'Country' Account fields - Name: 'DonorName' - AnnualRevenue: 'AnnualRevenue' - Description: 'Description' - NumberOfEmployees: 'Employees' - Fax: 'Fax' - Phone: 'Phone' - Website: 'Website' - BillingStreet: 'BillingStreet' - BillingCountry: 'BillingCountry' - BillingState: 'BillingState’ - BillingPostalCode: 'BillingPostalCode' - BillingCity: 'BillingCity' - ShippingStreet: 'ShippingStreet' - ShippingCountry: 'ShippingCountry' - ShippingState: 'ShippingState' - ShippingPostalCode: 'ShippingPostalCode' - ShippingCity: 'ShippingCity' - Type: 'Type' Donor Gift Summary fields - AverageGiftAmount: 'AverageGiftAmount' - BestGiftYear: 'BestGiftYear' - CurrentRecurringStartDate: 'CurrentRecurringStartDate' - CurrentYearGiftCount: 'CurrentYearGiftCount' - CompositeRfmScore: 'CompositeRfmScore' - DaysSinceLastGift: 'DaysSinceLastGift' - FirstGiftAmount: 'FirstGiftAmount' - FirstGiftDate: 'FirstGiftDate' - FirstRecurringStartDate: 'FirstRecurringStartDate' - FirstSoftCreditAmount: 'FirstSoftCreditAmount' - FirstSoftCreditDate: 'FirstSoftCreditDate' - FrequencyScore: 'FrequencyScore' - GiftCount: 'GiftCount' - GiftsLastYearAmount: 'GiftsLastYearAmount' - GiftsThisYearAmount: 'GiftsThisYearAmount' - GiftsTwoYearsAgoAmount: 'GiftsTwoYearsAgoAmount' - HighestGiftAmount: 'HighestGiftAmount' - HighestSoftCreditAmount: 'HighestSoftCreditAmount' - HighestSoftCreditDate: 'HighestSoftCreditDate' - LastGiftAmount: 'LastGiftAmount' - LastGiftDate: 'LastGiftDate' - LastRecurringPaymentDate: 'LastRecurringPaymentDate' - LastSoftCreditAmount: 'LastSoftCreditAmount' - LastSoftCreditDate: 'LastSoftCreditDate' - LastTwoYearGiftCount: 'LastTwoYearGiftCount' - LastYearGiftCount: 'LastYearGiftCount' - LowestGiftAmount: 'LowestGiftAmount' - MonetaryScore: 'MonetaryScore' - RecencyScore: 'RecencyScore' - SecondGiftDate: 'SecondGiftDate' - SoftCreditCount: 'SoftCreditCount' - TotalGiftsAmount: 'TotalGiftsAmount' - TotalHardSoftCredits: 'TotalHardSoftCredits' - TotalHardSoftCreditsAmount: 'TotalHardSoftCreditsAmount' - TotalPaidRcrInstallments: 'TotalPaidRcrInstallments' - TotalPaidRcrInstlAmt: 'TotalPaidRcrInstlAmt' # Format Gift Acknowledgments, Receipts, Donor Reports by Using Templates in Education Salesforce provides sample templates for batch gift acknowledgments and single donation tax receipts. These samples are a starting point for customizing templates for your organization. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To download and customize templates:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Download these templates as .docx files and customize them for your organization: - [Acknowledgment Receipt Template](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1IaWCmwg65t46tZe7eIdUueFZajV7rume05mg4XU-YPs/edit?usp=drive_link) - [Donor Tax Summary Receipt Template](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1zvnmOinpFWpTtM5LAXybEkokoohvXfcsTO-Oee0A2YQ/edit?usp=drive_link) Customize these aspects of the templates: - Logo - All currency symbols - Tax year (for the Donor Tax Summary Receipt template) - Complimentary close - Organizational signature block For organizations that accept multiple currencies, create templates for each currency that you accept. When you generate the batch, you can filter the batch for the currency that's used in the template. If you have a custom field on the Gift Transaction object for currency type, you can add that field to the template so that the correct currency for each gift is printed on the acknowledgment. Include all the Gift Transaction fields that hold the data that you want to include in the acknowledgment letter in the template. Acknowledgment generation supports these fields. Account ("Donor") object - BillingCity, BillingCountry, BillingPostalCode, BillingState, BillingStreet - FirstName - LastName - Name - PersonMailingCity, PersonMailingCountry, PersonMailingPostalCode, PersonMailingState, PersonMailingStreet, PersonMailingTitle - Salutation Gift Commitment object (Multiple gift commitments can be related to a donor.) - EffectiveStartDate - EffectiveTransactionPeriod - ExpectedEndDate - ExpectedTotalCmtAmount - CampaignName Gift Transaction object (Multiple gift transactions can be related to a Donor and a Gift Commitment.) - CampaignName - CheckDate - CurrentAmount - DonorCoverAmount - GiftType - Id - IsPaid - NonTaxDeductibleAmount - PaymentIdentifier - PaymentMethod - Status - TransactionDate - TransactionDueDate - +1 standard or custom field of your choice (in batch acknowledgments only) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To include a Gift Transaction custom field, make sure it's added to the Transactions section of the template in camel case (styled as camelCase) format. Gift Transaction Designation object (Multiple gift designations can be related to a gift transaction.) - Amount - Name Gift Tribute object (Multiple gift tributes can be related to a Gift Commitment or Gift Transaction.) - HonoreeName - NotificationChannel - NotificationContactName - NotificationDate - NotificationStatus Aggregate Fields - TotalAllTransactions — Aggregated at the donor level - TotalNonCommitmentTransactions — Aggregated at the donor level - TotalCommitmentTransactions — Aggregated at the donor level - TransactionTotal — Aggregated at the transaction or commitment level To customize the donor report, from Settings, search for and select Report Types and copy and edit the Fundraising Acknowledged Donors custom report type. SEE ALSO - [Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_owd_about.htm&type=5) - [Configure an Accounting Set for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_an_accounting_set_for_fundraising.htm) - [Data Processing Engine (DPE)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.dpe_intro.htm) - [Run Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.dpe_run_definitions.htm) - [Use a Schedule-Triggered Flow to Run a Data Processing Engine Definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_run_dpe_schedule_triggered_flow.htm&type=5) - [Run a Data Processing Engine Definition in Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.dpe_run.htm) - [Get Started with Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_get_started.htm) - [Plan Your Accounting Subledger Implementation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_plan_implementation.htm) - [Configure an Accounting Set for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_an_accounting_set_for_fundraising.htm) - [Get Started Using Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_product_considerations.htm&type=5) - [Set up the Salesforce CRM Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_set_up_crm_connection.htm&type=5) - [Install Standard Data Bundles Powered by Data Kits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_install_standard_data_bundles_powered_by_data_kits.htm&type=5) - [Create a Salesforce CRM Data Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm) - [Data Kits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_data_package_kits.htm&type=5) - [Batch Management Workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_workflow.htm&type=5) - [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_flows.htm&language=en_US) - [Automate Gift Operation Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_automate_gift_operation_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For Fundraising, Salesforce provides flows, invocable actions, and Lightning web components that are tailored to meet specific business needs.") - [Omnistudio Document Generation Document Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.doc_gen_foundation_document_templates_392430.htm) - [Salesforce Sandbox Preview Instructions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000391927&type=1) # Format Gift Acknowledgments, Receipts, Donor Reports by Using Templates in Nonprofit Salesforce provides sample templates for batch gift acknowledgments and single donation tax receipts. These samples are a starting point for customizing templates for your organization. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To download and customize templates:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Download these templates as .docx files and customize them for your organization: - [Acknowledgment Receipt Template](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1IaWCmwg65t46tZe7eIdUueFZajV7rume05mg4XU-YPs/edit?usp=drive_link) - [Donor Tax Summary Receipt Template](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1zvnmOinpFWpTtM5LAXybEkokoohvXfcsTO-Oee0A2YQ/edit?usp=drive_link) Customize these aspects of the templates: - Logo - All currency symbols - Tax year (for the Donor Tax Summary Receipt template) - Complimentary close - Organizational signature block For organizations that accept multiple currencies, create templates for each currency that you accept. When you generate the batch, you can filter the batch for the currency that's used in the template. If you have a custom field on the Gift Transaction object for currency type, you can add that field to the template so that the correct currency for each gift is printed on the acknowledgment. Include all the Gift Transaction fields that hold the data that you want to include in the acknowledgment letter in the template. Acknowledgment generation supports these fields. Account ("Donor") object - BillingCity, BillingCountry, BillingPostalCode, BillingState, BillingStreet - FirstName - LastName - Name - PersonMailingCity, PersonMailingCountry, PersonMailingPostalCode, PersonMailingState, PersonMailingStreet, PersonMailingTitle - Salutation Gift Commitment object (Multiple gift commitments can be related to a donor.) - EffectiveStartDate - EffectiveTransactionPeriod - ExpectedEndDate - ExpectedTotalCmtAmount - CampaignName Gift Transaction object (Multiple gift transactions can be related to a Donor and a Gift Commitment.) - CampaignName - CheckDate - CurrentAmount - DonorCoverAmount - GiftType - Id - IsPaid - NonTaxDeductibleAmount - PaymentIdentifier - PaymentMethod - Status - TransactionDate - TransactionDueDate - +1 standard or custom field of your choice (in batch acknowledgments only) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To include a Gift Transaction custom field, make sure it's added to the Transactions section of the template in camel case (styled as camelCase) format. Gift Transaction Designation object (Multiple gift designations can be related to a gift transaction.) - Amount - Name Gift Tribute object (Multiple gift tributes can be related to a Gift Commitment or Gift Transaction.) - HonoreeName - NotificationChannel - NotificationContactName - NotificationDate - NotificationStatus Aggregate Fields - TotalAllTransactions — Aggregated at the donor level - TotalNonCommitmentTransactions — Aggregated at the donor level - TotalCommitmentTransactions — Aggregated at the donor level - TransactionTotal — Aggregated at the transaction or commitment level To customize the donor report, from Settings, search for and select Report Types and copy and edit the Fundraising Acknowledged Donors custom report type. SEE ALSO - [Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_owd_about.htm&type=5) - [Configure an Accounting Set for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_an_accounting_set_for_fundraising.htm) - [Data Processing Engine (DPE)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.dpe_intro.htm) - [Run Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.dpe_run_definitions.htm) - [Use a Schedule-Triggered Flow to Run a Data Processing Engine Definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_run_dpe_schedule_triggered_flow.htm&type=5) - [Run a Data Processing Engine Definition in Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.dpe_run.htm) - [Get Started with Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_get_started.htm) - [Plan Your Accounting Subledger Implementation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_plan_implementation.htm) - [Configure an Accounting Set for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_an_accounting_set_for_fundraising.htm) - [Get Started Using Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_product_considerations.htm&type=5) - [Set up the Salesforce CRM Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_set_up_crm_connection.htm&type=5) - [Install Standard Data Bundles Powered by Data Kits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_install_standard_data_bundles_powered_by_data_kits.htm&type=5) - [Create a Salesforce CRM Data Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm) - [Data Kits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=data.c360_a_data_package_kits.htm&type=5) - [Batch Management Workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_workflow.htm&type=5) - [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_flows.htm&language=en_US) - [Automate Gift Operation Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_automate_gift_operation_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For Fundraising, Salesforce provides flows, invocable actions, and Lightning web components that are tailored to meet specific business needs.") - [Omnistudio Document Generation Document Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.doc_gen_foundation_document_templates_392430.htm) - [Salesforce Sandbox Preview Instructions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000391927&type=1) # foundationConnect .NET Feature Retirement Review the impact of the .NET portal retirement and how to migrate to Experience Cloud. - **[What is Happening with .NET?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The .NET version of the foundationConnect Grantee and Reviewer Portals are being retired later this year. After October 31, 2020, the .NET portal will shut down and foundationConnect will only support organizations using Communities. - **[When is Salesforce Retiring .NET?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** October 31, 2020. After that, the .NET server that hosts all Grantee and Reviewer Portals will shut down and any links to portals hosted on .NET will result in an error when clicked on. - **[Why is Salesforce Retiring .NET?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We are retiring the foundationConnect .NET portals to provide a more secure experience for grantees and grant reviewers and to focus our ongoing development efforts on the foundationConnect Communities Portal. - **[What is the Difference Between .NET and Communities?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The .NET Grantee and Reviewer Portals have most of the same functionality as Community Grantee and Reviewer Portals, with the exception of virus scanning for attachments (which will no longer be supported) and less flexibility to hide application data on reviewer page layouts (on our product roadmap). However, the Grantee Community ("Grantee Portal") package has several key improvements. - **[How Does This Affect My Org and What Actions Do I Need to Take?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customers currently using .NET for their Grantee and Reviewer Portals will need to migrate to the Communities version of these portals. Any links to the .NET portal will result in an error when clicked on after October 31, 2020. - **[How Can I Get More Information?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about what's happening with foundationConnect .NET portal and your next steps by viewing our slide deck. ## What is Happening with .NET? The .NET version of the foundationConnect Grantee and Reviewer Portals are being retired later this year. After October 31, 2020, the .NET portal will shut down and foundationConnect will only support organizations using Communities. ## When is Salesforce Retiring .NET? October 31, 2020. After that, the .NET server that hosts all Grantee and Reviewer Portals will shut down and any links to portals hosted on .NET will result in an error when clicked on. ## Why is Salesforce Retiring .NET? We are retiring the foundationConnect .NET portals to provide a more secure experience for grantees and grant reviewers and to focus our ongoing development efforts on the foundationConnect Communities Portal. ## What is the Difference Between .NET and Communities? The .NET Grantee and Reviewer Portals have most of the same functionality as Community Grantee and Reviewer Portals, with the exception of virus scanning for attachments (which will no longer be supported) and less flexibility to hide application data on reviewer page layouts (on our product roadmap). However, the Grantee Community ("Grantee Portal") package has several key improvements. - An application designer to create custom applications - Grantee budget tracking and monitoring - Support of custom domain naming in both the Grantee and Reviewer Portals - Ability to amend contact, organization, and request records - Secure inbox messaging in both the Grantee and Reviewer Portals - Custom page layout designed to create reviewer feedback forms (Reviewer Portal only) ## How Does This Affect My Org and What Actions Do I Need to Take? Customers currently using .NET for their Grantee and Reviewer Portals will need to migrate to the Communities version of these portals. Any links to the .NET portal will result in an error when clicked on after October 31, 2020. We understand this is a big change for many organizations, and we want to make the transition to Communities as smooth as possible. We will continue to communicate with customers, host webinars, and be here for you during this transition. Here is an action plan to get you started: 1. Work with your Account Executive to get a new foundationConnect contract that includes Communities licenses. This will allow you to use Salesforce Communities and its features, which is essential to migration and continuing to use foundationConnect. 2. Update your org settings after receiving your Communities license but before installing foundationConnect. This includes: 1. Enable My Domain. 2. Enable Communities. 3. If applicable: 1. Enable Translation Settings 2. Enable Opportunities Team Settings 3. Create at least one Campaign record type 4. Create at least one Account record type 5. Create at least one Grantee Report record type 6. Configure Sharing Settings 7. Enable Partner Relationship Management 3. Engage with an experienced foundationConnect partners to assist with migration. We can connect you with a partner if you are not already working with one. ## How Can I Get More Information? Learn more about what's happening with foundationConnect .NET portal and your next steps by viewing our slide deck. See [foundationConnect .NET Portal Retirement and Communities Upgrade](https://foundation.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/#00000000hwlm/a/1e000000xi2d/er8cw4jhp_cpsl4moapufinqazeq_jmjdgzaolvqqbw). # foundationConnect FAQ Review frequently asked questions to support your foundationConnect implementation. - **[Is foundationConnect Being Retired?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. - **[What is foundationConnect?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** foundationConnect is a Salesforce.org solution to assist grantmakers and foundations more effectively and efficiently manage their grant awards. It helps facilitate every step, starting with the application or inquiry process, including review and due diligence, approval or declination, payment and report scheduling, report submission and outcomes benchmarking, all the way to grant close. foundationConnect puts all the relevant grant information in one place. Grants managers are freed up to spend more time on the most impactful parts of grants management, and grantees are enabled to deliver more on their missions. - **[How do I upgrade my version of foundationConnect?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Take a look at the If you have foundationConnect and want to upgrade section to learn how existing customers can upgrade their version of foundationConnect. - **[Where can I connect with other foundationConnect users?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There is a foundationConnect group dedicated to questions and discussions for foundationConnect users. - **[How do I log issues or get support for foundationConnect?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Log all foundationConnect issues and support requests through a Salesforce Support case. - **[Where can I find foundationConnect known issues?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Known issues specific to foundationConnect are now located on Salesforce's Known Issues page in the Trailblazer Community. - **[Where can I learn more about guest site user functionality?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the foundationConnect Guest Site User FAQ (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser) for more information about the guest site user and actions you may need to take. ## Is foundationConnect Being Retired? Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. ## What is foundationConnect? foundationConnect is a Salesforce.org solution to assist grantmakers and foundations more effectively and efficiently manage their grant awards. It helps facilitate every step, starting with the application or inquiry process, including review and due diligence, approval or declination, payment and report scheduling, report submission and outcomes benchmarking, all the way to grant close. foundationConnect puts all the relevant grant information in one place. Grants managers are freed up to spend more time on the most impactful parts of grants management, and grantees are enabled to deliver more on their missions. ## How do I upgrade my version of foundationConnect? Take a look at the If you have foundationConnect and want to upgrade section to learn how existing customers can upgrade their version of foundationConnect. See [If you have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have."). ## Where can I connect with other foundationConnect users? There is a foundationConnect group dedicated to questions and discussions for foundationConnect users. See [foundationConnect group](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khi8sae?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). ## How do I log issues or get support for foundationConnect? Log all foundationConnect issues and support requests through a Salesforce Support case. 1. Log into your Salesforce org. 2. Click the **Help & Training** icon (Question Mark icon) then **Get Support**. 3. Click **Create Case**. 4. Choose **Salesforce.org Products** as the topic and click **Next**. 5. Choose **Salesforce for Nonprofits** and click **Next**. 6. Choose **foundationConnect/Grants Management** and click **Next**. 7. Choose the type of question or issue you have and click **Next**. 8. Click **Create a Case**. 9. Complete the Case Details section and click **Next**. A Salesforce representative will be in contact soon! ## Where can I find foundationConnect known issues? Known issues specific to foundationConnect are now located on Salesforce's Known Issues page in the Trailblazer Community. See [Salesforce's Known Issues](https://success.salesforce.com/search?type=issues&keywords=foundationconnect). Release-related known issues will continue to be posted in [foundationConnect Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm) . ## Where can I learn more about guest site user functionality? View the foundationConnect Guest Site User FAQ (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser) for more information about the guest site user and actions you may need to take. See [foundationConnect Guest Site User FAQ](https://salesforce.quip.com/vfixa5nnlivi). # foundationConnect General Information Get an overview of foundationConnect, frequently asked questions, and information to support your implementation, including installation information, release notes, links to configuration guides, and more. - **[foundationConnect Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Streamline the grantmaking lifecycle — from online grant application and review to grants distribution and real-time outcome tracking — with foundationConnect (fC). - **[foundationConnect FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review frequently asked questions to support your foundationConnect implementation. - **[Install or Upgrade foundationConnect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have. - **[foundationConnect Grantee Community Configuration Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_user_guide.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access a dedicated resource for implementing the foundationConnect grantee portal. - **[foundationConnect Reviewer Portal Configuration Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_reviewer_portal_pdf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access a dedicated resource for implementing the foundationConnect reviewer portal. - **[foundationConnect Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's new in foundationConnect. - **[foundationConnect .NET Feature Retirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_net_retirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the impact of the .NET portal retirement and how to migrate to Experience Cloud. # foundationConnect Grantee Community Configuration Guide Access a dedicated resource for implementing the foundationConnect grantee portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note As of January 31st, 2026, Salesforce has retired foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. # foundationConnect Managed Package Streamline your entire grant process by automating manual tasks, setting up portals for your stakeholders, tracking outcomes in real time, and more. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note As of January 31, 2026, Salesforce has retired foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. - **[foundationConnect General Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_general.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get an overview of foundationConnect, frequently asked questions, and information to support your implementation, including installation information, release notes, links to configuration guides, and more. - **[Set Up foundationConnect Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_set_up_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand and configure the user permissions for your foundationConnect portals. # foundationConnect Overview Streamline the grantmaking lifecycle — from online grant application and review to grants distribution and real-time outcome tracking — with foundationConnect (fC). Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Manage Grants with foundationConnect](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=istlzsszglw&feature=youtu.be). # foundationConnect Release Notes Learn what's new in foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note The installer links provided in these release notes will direct you to our latest release version. If you are attempting to install a specific release that isn't the latest version, please [log a support case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm). - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - December 2023](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.54, Reviewer 4.33 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - January 23, 2023](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee Portal 11.52 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - October 4, 2022](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee Portal 11.51 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - November 16, 2021](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.49, Reviewer 4.32 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - July 13, 2021](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.48, Reviewer 4.31 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - May 18, 2021](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.32, Grantee 11.47, Reviewer 4.30 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - March 9, 2021](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.31, Grantee 11.45, Reviewer 4.28 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - January 27, 2021](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.30, Grantee 11.44, Reviewer 4.27 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - November 17, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.42, Reviewer 4.26 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - October 6, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.41, Reviewer 4.25 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - September 22, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.40, Reviewer 4.24, Budget 2.13, Grant Codes 1.19 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - August 25, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.39, Reviewer 4.23 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - July 28, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.28, Reviewer 4.22 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - May 13, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantee 11.36, Reviewer 4.20 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - March 18, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.28, Grantee 11.35, Reviewer 4.19 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - January 15, 2020](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.28, Grantee 11.34, Reviewer 4.18 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - November 18, 2019](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.27, Grantee 11.33, Reviewer 4.17 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - October 16, 2019](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reviewer 4.14 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - September 18, 2019](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Portal 11.29 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - September 11, 2019](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.25, Portal 11.28 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - June 26, 2019](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.24 - **[foundationConnect Release Notes - Mid June 2019](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Base 5.23, Portal 11.27 ## foundationConnect Release Notes - December 2023 Grantee 11.54, Reviewer 4.33 ### Issues Closed **Grantee Portal** - Security vulnerabilities on visualforce pages for signup pages, portal applications, inquiries pages for grant seekers, and application config pages for admins. - Concurrent edit issues. When an application is being edited at the same time and one edit session saves the application with a Status other than Submitted, a concurrent edit session can save changes to the application. The second edit session changes the Status back to In Progress. - When an application's data or metadata contains fields inaccessible to the grant seeker, the applicant receives an insufficient permissions error. - Questions added through community manager usually have the same order number causing the questions to move positions during the application process or in the summary view. - Untranslatable error message "This record is no longer editable, please refresh the page" when trying to update an application. **Reviewer Portal** - Security vulnerabilities on visualforce pages for user-facing visualforce pages. - Misleading field description on External Review for the Deadline field. - Untranslatable error message "This record is no longer editable, please return to Reviewer dashboard" when trying to update an application. ### Installation You need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | For instructions on using the installer, visit [Install or Upgrade foundationConnect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have."). ## foundationConnect Release Notes - January 23, 2023 Grantee Portal 11.52 ### Batch Update of Usernames We modified the batch process that updates site usernames to work with Enhanced Domains to: - Update Partner Community Login usernames in addition to Partner Community. - Exclude disabled portal users and usernames that aren't email addresses. ### Welcome Email We no longer support the Send Welcome Email feature. We recommend instead exploring Flows to automate sending welcome emails for these portals. To deactivate the Send Welcome Email feature: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to your Reviewer Portal. 3. Click **Administration**. 4. Click **Emails**. 5. Under Email Templates, deselect **Send welcome email**. 6. Save your work. ### Installation Read [Install or Upgrade foundationConnect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer to upgrade. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | ## foundationConnect Release Notes - October 4, 2022 Grantee Portal 11.51 We added a batch process to update site usernames to work with Enhanced Domains. Salesforce will require Enhanced Domains in a coming release. Learn more in [Enhanced Domains Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.domain_name_enhanced_timeline.htm&type=5). When Enhanced Domains are enabled, your site URLs change and your constituents can't log into your site because their usernames don't match the updated domain. To avoid disruption, enable Enhanced Domain for foundationConnect, and then run a batch to update your usernames for users and portal users. ### Prepare to Run Batch Update of Usernames After you enable Enhanced Domains, your site users can't log in until their usernames are updated to work with Enhanced Domains. To minimize disruption for your users, plan when to enable Enhanced Domains and run the batch update. We also recommend adding a notification to your login page to let your users know why they can't log in. Prepare to run the batch. 1. Enable [Enhanced Domains](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.domain_name_enhanced.htm&type=5). 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Domains, and then select **Domains**. 3. Select and copy the Domain Name for the Community My Domain. 4. Enter Custom Settings in the Quick Find Box, then select **Custom Settings**. 5. Click **Manage** next to Global Portal Settings. 6. Edit your Default Organization Level Value. 7. In Username Suffix, paste the domain name for your Community My Domain. 8. Save your work. 9. Delete scheduled jobs that involve the InstanceRefreshBatchable apex class. 10. Turn off your custom automation that runs on the Portal User and Users objects. This automation includes, Process Builder, Flows, Workflow, Validation Rules, and Custom Apex Triggers. The foundationConnect batch process turns off the packaged automation for these objects. ### Run Batch Update of Usernames 1. Confirm that you completed the prerequisites in Prepare to Run Batch Update of Usernames including updating the Username Suffix. 2. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Developer Console**. 3. Click **Debug** | **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 4. In the window, enter: FGM\_Portal.UserUsernameUpdateBatch ObjTestBatch = new FGM\_Portal.UserUsernameUpdateBatch(); Database.executeBatch(ObjTestBatch); 5. Click **Execute**. Salesforce sends emails to the Salesforce admin who ran the script when the batch starts and when it's done. If you don't get an email when the batch begins, check the batch job. Learn more in [Monitoring the Apex Job Queue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.code_apex_job.htm&type=5). If the batch fails, make sure you completed all the steps in Prepare to Run Batch Update of Usernames and re-run the batch. In orgs with many users, it takes a little while for the changes to take effect across your portals. The batch job only processes users of the Grantee Portal or the Reviewer Portal. Any user from another custom portal will not be affected. When the batch completes successfully and the org's been updated: - User and Portal User Usernames include the Enhanced Domain. - Your users can log into your site. - It's safe to turn on custom automation and validation for the User and Portal User objects. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_important.png) Important Update any links to your portals with the new Enhanced Domain URLs, and we recommend communicating the updated URLs to your constituents. ### Installation Read [Install or Upgrade foundationConnect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer to upgrade. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | ## foundationConnect Release Notes - November 16, 2021 Grantee 11.49, Reviewer 4.32 ### Issues Closed **Grantee Portal** - The search bar's label is split over two lines with translated values when using the enhanced styling dashboard. - Grantees can't create Amendments on the portal when the Amendment record type's label is overridden. - Two account and contact records are created when a grantee portal user is deactivated and a new user is created. - Translated values of the FC\_Continue\_ButtonLabel don't display in the ConfirmModal popup. - The portal strips number and bullet list formatting from instructional text. - Unable to use HTML tags in custom labels. - Unable to create a child record when a grantee is using the Grantee Portal in a non-English language. - A new portal user's language is set to the org default instead of the desired language. - The Company field is left blank when a person at an existing company registers as a portal user. **Reviewer Portal** - Two account and contact records are created when a reviewer portal user is deactivated and a new user is created. - Customizations in a CCS file aren't displayed in the portal. **Grantee Reports** - Colors specified in the PortalAlert custom setting don't display properly on the Community Dashboard under the parent opportunity. - Reports don't show desired fields and sort order. ### Installation You need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | For instructions on using the installer, visit [Install or Upgrade foundationConnect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have."). ## foundationConnect Release Notes - July 13, 2021 Grantee 11.48, Reviewer 4.31 ### Changes The user registration process in the grantee and reviewer portals was originally designed to store encrypted user passwords on the Portal User record. It's possible for an internal foundationConnect user to access this information if they have View Encrypted Data permissions. In an effort to provide enhanced security, we released updates to prevent future user passwords from being stored on the User record. The new user registration on grantee and reviewer portals now follow the standard Salesforce password creation process. We have included an optional Apex batch script as part of this package to update your orgs for enhanced security for new portal registrations and have provided steps to clear any existing initial portal user passwords stored within your orgs. Documentation on those steps can be found [here](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/feed/0d54s00000bueegsaf). ### Issues Closed **Grantee Portal** - The review page has duplicate buttons rendered for Back to Record, Print, and Submit. - Changing State and Country selections during grantee portal registration doesn't update the State field if a grantee updates the Country field from one that has a state to a country without states. - The Portal User Zip Code field allows up to 50 characters, but the Zip Code field on Contact and Account objects only allow 20. - When two grantee portal users are both working on the same application at the same time and one submits the application, the application still remains in an editable state. - Direct links to specific campaign records don't re-direct users to that page upon login **Reviewer Portal** - The reviewer dashboard will not render when the Lead field from the external review is added to the reviewer dashboard fieldset. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - May 18, 2021 Base 5.32, Grantee 11.47, Reviewer 4.30 ### Changes - The FC\_Validation\_Rule\_ErrorMsg error message now shows "Complete the following fields to save changes on this tab" on grantee and reviewer portals. **Grantee Portal** - We fixed an error that prevented Opportunity Team Members from registering due to a setting that required passwords to be 13 characters. This fix introduces the following changes for the invited Opportunity Team Member. - **Welcome Email Turned On** - If welcome emails are turned on in the Experience site Workspace, two emails are sent to an invited Opportunity Team Member: Reset Password and Welcome emails. Both emails contain a reset password link. The invited Opportunity Team Member should use the link in the Welcome email to register for an account. - **Welcome Email Turned Off** - If welcome emails are turned off in the Experience site Workspace, a Reset Password email is sent to the invited Opportunity Team Member. We reverted an update introduced in our previous release that required the submitted by field being blank when reopening requests for editing in the grantee portal. - The Active checkbox is selected automatically when an Opportunity Team Member registers and their account is created. **Reviewer Portal** - Checkboxes on a child object related to the Opportunity now show as "true" or "false" on the reviewer portal. ### Issues Closed **Grantee Portal** - Warning messages appear outside of the tab where the required field exists in the grantee portal. - A grantee must be the parent Opportunity owner or creator to see the delete option on an application. - Delete, View, and Edit don't show correctly on a custom tab on an application. Grantees see more records than they have access to on the Amendments tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note In this update, payment amendments created by an Opportunity Team Member aren't visible to the grantee; however, payment amendments created by the grantee are visible to the Opportunity Team Member. **Grantee Report** - Country isn't included as a data type in the address formula options in the Grantee Report. **Reviewer Portal** - Reviewers don't see errors if they try to edit and save a record when the review is in a non-editable status. - The reviewer portal doesn't show Questions of a child Opportunity that include special characters. - After sending a message in the Reviewer Inbox, the reviewer isn't redirected to the Reviewer Dashboard. - The sorting icon isn't visible on the Reviewer Dashboard when RP\_UseEnhancedStyling is turned on in custom settings. **Base** **Package** - The currency code isn't formatted correctly on the Unscheduled Payments section of the Setup Payments wizard. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - March 9, 2021 Base 5.31, Grantee 11.45, Reviewer 4.28 ### Changes - We updated `FC_ForgotPassword_Reset_CustomText` that shows when a user attempts to reset their password in the Grantee and Reviewer Portals. ### Issues Closed **Grantee Portal** - An error occurs when a grantseeker starts an application and InquiryEditableStatus or RequestEditableStatus are left blank in the Portal Configuration custom setting. - Validation errors in the Grantee Portal are duplicated when a validation error displays next to a field. - Budget categories are displayed out of order on the Budget tab. - The SiteURLRewriteHandlerGP class in the site field URL Rewriter Class results in a redirecting loop when resetting a user password in the Grantee and Reviewer Portals. **Grantee Report** - Using a field from a related object as the Sort field on the Benchmarks Update tab in a Grantee Report gives an invalid field error. **Reviewer Portal** - The grantseeker's Contact information appears on the Review and Submit page in the Reviewer Portal. - Required fields on the object show as error messages on the External Review. - A Request (Opportunity) ownership change deletes Apex sharing which prevents reviewers from viewing their external reviews. - A reviewer sees an error message if they aren't assigned Read access to all External Review fields. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - January 27, 2021 Base 5.30, Grantee 11.44, Reviewer 4.27 ### Changes - The Lookup 501c3 displays an error message on a Request (Opportunity) when an EIN isn't provided. - OFAC Check now displays an error message if a search experiences a timeout. - When moving a grantseeker's Request (Opportunity) to a status included in RequestEditableStatus, such as Reopened, a grantmaker now needs to manually remove or create automation so that the grantseeker's username in the SubmittedBy field is blank. This makes the Request editable to the grantseeker. ### Issues Closed **Base** - The Delete button on the Payment Wizard is shown to users who don't have Delete permission on the Payment object. - An error message occurs when using 501c3 Lookup for organizations with titles that include special characters. **Grantee Portal** - A grantseeker has the option to delete an Inquiry (Lead) and Request (Opportunity) if it's shared with them, even though the user doesn't have Delete permission. - The Grantee Portal Dashboard timeouts when an org includes a custom picklist field on a Request (Opportunity) not called `Status` and includes that field in the custom setting Portal Configuration Detail's RequestStatusField. - Duplicate Organization (Account) and Contact records are created during Grantee Portal registration when the Profile Type is set to Individual. - Grantseekers can no longer delete attachment records associated with a Request (Opportunity) if it has been submitted and then reopened. - Direct links to records direct grantees to a new record when they log in. - An error message isn't removed if a grantseeker completes a previously missing required field or navigates to another Related List tab. - The first field in a field set is positioned in the second column when a grantee attempts to create a new record. - Grantseekers are able to edit and save changes on a submitted Request (Opportunity) if the URL is altered from "view" to "edit." - Validation rules on custom objects used as custom profile tabs within an application.aren't shown when the grantseeker attempts to edit or save the record. - The Explore Grant Opportunities tab shows an unsubmitted applications error message for grantees starting a new application. - Required custom validation fields on objects result in repeat validation errors across tabs in the Reviewer and Grantee Portals. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Organization (Account) and Contact validate rule errors may appear when a grantseeker saves a new Request (Opportunity) and both Profile tabs are included on the application. If this happens, a grantseeker can submit their information on the Profile tab on the Grantee Portal. **Grantee Report** - Data rows aren't aligned with the column headers in the Grantee Report related list. - When a grantee is filling out a Grantee Report, they doesn't see an error message nor does the record save when validation rules are present on Grantee Report child record. - Grantees are redirected to view mode instead of edit mode when provided a specific URL with a direct link to a Grantee Report. - Related List tabs in the Grantee Report page layout are not showing error messages for required fields when a new child record is saved. - An HTML error occurs in the Grantee Portal when a user attempts to submit an application or Grantee Report and a required field is left blank. **Reviewer Portal** - The labels on Quiz Questions for Attachments in the Reviewer Portal are right-aligned instead of left-aligned. - Reviews that are not in an editable status show an option to edit when the reviewer is in the enhanced (Lightning) dashboard on the Reviewer Portal. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - November 17, 2020 Grantee 11.42, Reviewer 4.26 ### Critical Changes **Recommendation Portal** - We've introduced the new Recommendation Review object that will supplement the Recommender object due to changes in edit object permissions for guest site users. Admins will need to take the following actions: - Add all custom fields from Recommendation object to Recommendation Review object. - Remove the current Recommendation tab, which uses the FGM\_Portal\_\_Recommendation\_\_c object, from all Quizzes. - Create a new Recommendation tab that users the FGM\_Portal\_\_Recommendation\_Review\_\_c object to replace the removed Recommendation tab. - Update guest user permissions on the Recommendation object. Previously, the Recommendation object needed Read and Edit access. After this update, the Recommendation object needs Read and Create access. - Grant guest users Read and Create permissions on the Recommendation Review object. - Review the sharing rules outlined in the [Grantee Community Configuration Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_user_guide.htm) (page 72). - With this update, the recommendation process has changed for Recommenders, including: - Recommendations must be completed in one session. - Recommenders can't save an in progress recommendation. - Recommenders can't upload attachments. **Opportunity Team Member** - We made updates to the Opportunity Team Member process, which now requires the grantseeker to provide a username for the invited collaborator during the invitation process. For this functionality to work, an admin needs to: - Update the Portal User's Invite Opportunity Team Member Fields fieldset to include the username field. - Create a new welcome email template that is sent to the invited collaborator with the collaborator's username. Instructions on how to set this up are found on page 64 in the [Grantee Community Configuration Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_user_guide.htm). - Create automation, such as a workflow, that sends the welcome email to a collaborator when approved by a grantmaker. An example workflow is found on page 65 in the [Grantee Community Configuration Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_user_guide.htm). - The grantseeker experience has also changed, including: - A grantseeker must provide a username for the invited collaborator. - Only individuals in a shared organization can be invited to collaborate. - Additionally, any in progress Opportunity Team Member invitations in previous versions need to be resent using this latest release. **Reviewer Portal** - The Grantee Report object requires Read access for the Reviewer Portal to load. ### Issues Closed - An error occurs in the Reviewer Portal when an internal user tries to save a Quiz that has more than 50 Questions. - The Reviewer Dashboard timeouts when logging into the Reviewer Portal. - Records from Related List tabs are in an incorrect order on the Reviewer Portal. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - October 6, 2020 Grantee 11.41, Reviewer 4.25 ### Changes - We made changes to accommodate guest site user registration ahead of the Salesforce guest site user permission changes coming in Spring '21. ### Issues Closed - Inactive record types are available to select in the Setup Reports Wizard for Grantee Reports. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer, Grant Codes, and Budget packages to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | | Grant Codes\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-grantcodes/](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-grantcodes/) | | Budgets\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-budgets/2.12](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-budgets/2.12) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - September 22, 2020 Grantee 11.40, Reviewer 4.24, Budget 2.13, Grant Codes 1.19 ### Issues Closed - Uploaded attachments in the Grantee Portal don't immediately appear on the Attachments Visualforce component. - A Request (Opportunity) or Inquiry (Lead) won't save if there are read-only fields present on Related List tab. - A Request (Opportunity) or Inquiry (Lead) with a Portal Tab won't save if there are read-only fields present. - An External Review page won't save if there are read-only fields present. - An error occurs in the Reviewer Portal when a user views a record from a Related List with Tab that includes a lookup field. - The "Save changes" popup doesn't appear when a user makes changes to one tab and navigates to another tab in the Grantee Portal or Reviewer portal. - A related list displays the Question Record ID instead of the Question Rich Text in the Reviewer Portal. - A community user receives an error when they try to save in the Grantee Portal an auto-number field is included on an application Request (Opportunity) or Inquiry (Lead). - An error occurs if a user tries to code a grant that exceeds $1,000,000. - The Payment Scheduler doesn't automatically calculate the Unscheduled Amount when the Payment Percentage or Payment Amount is modified. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer, Grant Codes, and Budget packages to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | | Grant Codes\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-grantcodes/](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-grantcodes/) | | Budgets\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-budgets/2.12](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-budgets/2.12) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - August 25, 2020 Grantee 11.39, Reviewer 4.23 ### Changes - We fixed an issue that exceeded queueable limits within a batch. - The External Review record no longer saves when a reviewer chooses to view an application they are assigned to. ### Issues Closed - When a user makes a change to Opportunity Team Members access levels from the Grantee Portal, the record access is not updated. - When using a status value other than Review in Progress and Ready to Review on the External Review record, the record won't save internally when the reviewer makes edits to a review and clicks **Save** **.** - Only the last rich text field renders formatting correctly when a user saves a Reviewer Portal quiz that contains two or more rich text fields. - A "Required Field is Missing" error appears when attempting to save child object records as new records in a Grantee Report. - If you have a formula field on a Quiz, it won't display to a reviewer as the recalculated value when a user saves their record. - An error occurs in the Reviewer Portal if a lookup field is added to a Related List with Tab in an application then a reviewer attempts to view the record. - A user receives a "Cannot Update" error if there is a read-only field on a Related List with Tab on an application and they attempt to continue, save, or submit. - A user receives a "Cannot Update" error if there is a read-only field on the Grantee Report and they attempt to submit. ### Known Issues We found an issue with FGM\_Portal\_\_InstanceRefreshJob that caused Portal User records to be updated incorrectly. If you currently have this instance refresh job running, you will need to delete and reschedule the it because the user that the installation uses to schedule the job no longer has the access levels to run the job. To fix this issue, you will need to delete the existing job and reschedule a new instance refresh job. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Scheduled Job in the Quick Find box, then click **Scheduled Jobs**. 3. Click **Del** next to FGM\_Portal\_\_InstanceRefreshJob. Now, you can reschedule the instance refresh job. Make sure you are logged in as an system administrator to do this. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box, then click **Apex Classes**. 3. Click **Schedule Apex**. 4. Enter InstanceRefresh as the Job Name. 5. Enter InstanceRefreshSchedulable as the Apex Class. 6. Select **Weekly** and **Monday** as the Frequency. 7. Select today's date as the Start date. 8. Select an End date far in the future. For example, **09/01/2030**. 9. Select **3 AM** as the Preferred Start Time. 10. Click **Save**. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - July 28, 2020 Grantee 11.28, Reviewer 4.22 ### Changes - We fixed an issue that prevented uploaded attachments from immediately showing up in the Reviewer Portal on the Attachments Visualforce component. ### Issues Closed - When a reviewer logs in to the Reviewer Portal, the dashboard doesn't load and generates an error message if more than 25,000 Campaign Member records exist. - A reviewer doesn't advance to the next tab when they click **Save and Next** when editing a review. - Edits to rich text fields on the Reviewer Feedback tab in the Reviewer Portal appear to save to the user, but aren't updated internally. - A user who clicks the Amend icon on an application in the Grantee Portal is redirected to Salesforce Classic instead of staying within the Lightning community interface. - A user sees HTML tags in rich text fields on the Amendment and Grantee Report review page. - Duplicate Account records are created if a registering user clicks the confirmation link in their welcome email multiple times. - An error message with HTML markup displays to a user if they attempt to submit an application or Grantee Report but don't enter information in a required field. - A user doesn't see validation rule errors on the Amendment, Grantee Report, or Benchmark objects in the Grantee Portal when an error occurs. - When a guest user registers for an account after clicking a link to a Quiz, they are directed to the landing page instead of the Quiz page. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - May 13, 2020 Grantee 11.36, Reviewer 4.20 ### Changes - A user can now view both a submitted or in progress application after the Campaign End Date has passed. Previously, a pop up would inform the user the campaign had expired and wouldn't let them proceed. A user can now dismiss the pop up then view the application. - We fixed an issue that prevented Related List Tab records from saving or updating if read-only fields were present and contained values. - We fixed an issue that required a user both Read and Edit access to any lookup fields on the Opportunity Team Member layout. - We fixed an issue that didn't allow a Request (Opportunity) or Inquiry (Lead) to save if there were read-only fields present on the Related List Tab. - We fixed an issue that was not calculating the Expenditure to Date field correctly when an internal administrator deleted a Grantee Budget Update record from the Grantee Report. - We fixed an issue that prevented new user registration when the OnAccountUpdate trigger was enabled. - For customers with multiple communities, the foundationConnect Grantee Portal now supports a private external organization-wide default for the Organization (Account) object. Grantee Portal Community Users need to be granted Edit access to their Organization record in order to make updates to their information. To grant access to the Organization object while maintaining a private external sharing model, we recommend creating a [sharing set](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewsolution?urlname=foundationconnect-private-external-owd-for-the-organization-account&language=en_us). - We made security updates to several pages in foundationConnect. - We have made updates to our baseline permissions [recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have the access they need to standard and custom objects and fields."). These updates include: - **Authenticated Grantee Portal User** - Added Grantee Budget Line Item object - Added Task object - Added EIN (`FGM_Base__EIN__c`) on Organization (Account) object - Added (deprecated) (`FGM_Portal__Grantee_Budget_Line_Item__c`) on Grantee Budget Update object - Added Organization Name (`AccountId`) and Primary Campaign Source (CampaignId) on Request (Opportunity) object - Added Respondent (`FGM_Portal__ResponseBy__c`) on Task object - **Guest Grantee Portal User** - Added Task object - Added Organization Name (`AccountId`) on Contact object - **Authenticated Reviewer Portal User** - Added Portal Account object - Added Task object - Added EIN (`FGM_Base__EIN__c`) on Organization (Account) object - Added Deadline (`FC_Reviewer__Deadline__c`), External Reviewer ID (`Name`), Lead (`FC_Reviewer__Lead__c`), Opportunity (`FC_Reviewer__Opportunity__c`), and Submitted Date (`FC_Reviewer__Submitted_Date__c`) on External Review object - Added Record Type ID (`FGM_Portal__RecordTypeId__c`) on FCPageLayout object - Added Confirm Password (`FGM_Portal__Confirm_Password__c`) on Portal User object - Add Opportunity (`Request`) on Question Attachment - **Guest Reviewer Portal User** - Added Task object - Added Account Name (`AccountId`) on Contact object ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - March 18, 2020 Base 5.28, Grantee 11.35, Reviewer 4.19 ### Critical Changes - The team dove into foundationConnect to gain a deeper understanding of what basic permissions are required for each type of user. As a result or our research, we made updates to the code to be less permissive. We understand that updating and managing permissions has been a massive undertaking for our customers, so we are excited to show the work we've done to make configuring foundationConnect easier. This release includes: - Both authenticated community and guest users no longer require access to all Portal User fields. Permission configuration on the Portal User object is still required for both types of users. - Guest users no longer require read and edit access to all fields on the Recommendation object to view a recommendation page. - We have updated permission recommendations for authenticated community and guest users on the Grantee Portal and Reviewer Portal. As a reminder, these recommendations are just the basics to get an org set up in foundationConnect; any objects and fields added will need additional permissions. You can find the recommendations in **Set Up Security**. - We have published an updated version of the **Grantee Portal Configuration Guide** in Knowledge. This will continue to evolve over time with new information and features, so we recommend accessing it directly from Knowledge instead of downloading it directly. ### Changes - We fixed an issue that was causing an error if a user tried to update their Organization, Contact, or Custom Profile tab during a Request or an Inquiry when read-only fields were present on the layout. - We fixed an issue that was causing an error on the Visualforce Profile tab if a user tried to access their Organization, Contact, or Custom profile tab when read-only fields were present on the layout. - The Grantee Portal user no longer requires Read access on every field of an object to edit and save a record. Previously, a Grantee Portal user required Read access on all fields of an object, even if the object was not included in a Community Manager page layout. - We fixed an issue that displayed attachments uploaded to or modified on the Request (Opportunity), Inquiry (Lead), Amendment, Grantee Report, Recommendation, and Benchmark objects in Greenwich Mean Time. Now, a user will see only the date once the attachment is uploaded. - We fixed an issue that didn't allow a grantseeker to edit or update the Profile tab when a Request was in a post-submission status, such as Re-opened. - We fixed an issue causing the Reviewer Feedback tab in the Reviewer Portal to not load if there were formula fields present. Now, a user will see the content in the Reviewer Feedback tab and formula field values display as read only. - We fixed an issue preventing the Reviewer Portal dashboard from correctly loading updated styling from the RP\_UseEnhancedStyling custom setting. The RP\_UseEnhancedStyling custom setting, which provides a streamlined user interface on the Reviewer Portal dashboard, was introduced in a previous release (4.17). Now, orgs can take full advantage of this feature! ### Issues Closed - "Instructional Text" placeholder text displays on the Contact tab if there is no instructional text entered. - A technically-worded error message displays instead of a more user-friendly error message when a user encounters a validation rule error on a Related List record. ### Known Issues - Attachments uploaded to or modified on the Request (Opportunity), Inquiry (Lead), Amendment, Grantee Report, Recommendation, and Benchmark objects display the created date and last modified date in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) on the QuesionAttachments Visualforce page in the CRM, regardless of the user or company time zone settings. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - January 15, 2020 Base 5.28, Grantee 11.34, Reviewer 4.18 ### Changes - We removed the **Click to Continue** modal on the CommunityApplication and PageLayout pages. These were added in a previous release as a security measure to prevent cross-site request forgery. After refactoring code and a thorough review, these two pages are no longer at risk. - We updated the date and datetime columns on the Grantee Dashboard to sort and display by calendar dates. Previously, these columns sorted by string, which ordered dates alphabetically and considered "1" in "10" to come before "8" or "9." - We fixed an issue that allowed grantseekers to submit an application without completing all required fields, specifically the Salesforce Data Type and Attachment fields. Now, a grantseeker will receive a notification there are still required fields left to complete before being able to submit their application. - We fixed an issue that allowed grantees to submit an Amendment, Benchmark, or Grantee Report without completing all required fields. Now, if a grantee tries to submit without all required fields completed, they receive a notification there are additional fields to complete. - We added a Re-Opened status to the Grantee Report. - We removed the remaining HTML markup from custom labels in the Reviewer Portal. - We fixed an issue causing the previously deprecated `FGM_Portal__Instructional_Text__c` field to display on the Reviewer Portal instead of the updated `FGM_Portal__Rich_Instructional_Text__c` field. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - November 18, 2019 Base 5.27, Grantee 11.33, Reviewer 4.17 ### Critical Changes We're excited to introduce an updated user interface for the Grantee Portal and Reviewer Portal that looks and feels like Salesforce Lightning, but without the heavy-lifting of migrating your org from Visualforce. This new interface is controlled by a custom setting that allows you to enable or disable the updates. You'll notice nearly every step of the grantmaking experience, from sending emails to grantee reporting, in foundationConnect is updated in the Grantee Portal, including: Grantee Portal Dashboard - Inbox - Applications - Letters of Inquiry - Grantee Reports - Benchmarks - Amendments Internal Grantmaker - Lookup 501(c) - Verify 501(c) - OFACCheck - Payment Scheduler - Setup Reports - Setup Benchmarks - Question Attachments for: - Amendment - Grantee Report - Opportunity - Lead - Recommendation - Commitment Calculator We also have made a few updates to the Reviewer Portal, including: - Reviewer Inbox - Assigned Reviews **Enable the Updated Portal UIs** We added a toggle using custom settings to allow you to enable or disable the updated user interface for the Grantee Portal and Reviewer Portal. When the custom setting is enabled, the user will see the new user interface and any custom CSS will no longer display. When it is disabled, the legacy user interface or custom CSS displays to users. To enable the new interface on the portals: 1. From Setup, enter then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to Community Settings. 3. Click **New**. 1. To create the UI in the Grantee Portal toggle, enter UseEnhancedStyling in the Name field. 2. To create the UI in the Reviewer Portal toggle, enter RP\_UseEnhancedStyling in the Name field. 4. Make sure IsEnable is selected then click **Save**. ### Changes - We fixed an issue that generated two Grantee Budget Update Categories when creating a grantee report from an org's CRM. - We added a confirmation modal that appears when an admin selects a different language for a quiz that has not been translated yet. This modal asks the admin to confirm they want to continue to create a translated quiz to prevent a quiz being inadvertently created. - We fixed an issue that allowed a user to submit an application if they had a direct URL to an application, even if the Campaign End Date had passed. Now, users accessing an application URL after the Campaign End Date has passed receive an error message. ### Known Issues - When you attempt to send message in the Reviewer Portal, it appears that nothing has happened when you click **Send**. The message does send, but the user will remain on the compose message screen. ### Installation \*You will need the latest version of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee package for the Reviewer package to install successfully. | foundationConnect Package | Installation URL | | --- | --- | | Base and Grantee | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) | | Reviewer\* | [https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer/](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer/) | Visit [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm) for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - October 16, 2019 Reviewer 4.14 ### Critical Changes In our [previous release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's new in foundationConnect."), we replaced several existing fields on the Grantee Portal with new rich text fields so you can format text without HTML. Now, those new rich text fields display on the Reviewer Portal as well. | Object | Existing Field Name | New Field Name | Page Layout | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | CustomHTML | FGM\_Portal\_\_Description\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichDescription\_\_c | CustomHTML | | Question | FGM\_Portal\_\_Pre\_Text\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichPreText\_\_c | Question | | Question | FGM\_Portal\_\_Post\_Text\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichPostText\_\_c | Question | | Question | FGM\_Portal\_\_Question\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichQuestion\_\_c | Question | You can also now insert instructional text on the Reviewer Portal via the RichDescription\_\_c field on the CustomHTML object. Previously, formatted instructional text on the Reviewer Portal was rendered using a custom label (RP\_DashboardInstructionalText). To use this new functionality, these values must be set as follows in the CustomHTML object: - Name: RP\_DashboardInstructionalText - associated\_FC\_Portal\_Type: Reviewer - Language\_\_c: language code of the current user (for example, en\_US for English) - Community Setting: RP\_DashboardInstructionalTextEnabled and is marked enabled You will want to review your Reviewer Portal user permissions to ensure compatibility with security updates made during this release. [Log a case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm) with Salesforce support for Reviewer Portal permission recommendations prior to 4.19. If you are on Reviewer Portal 4.19 or higher, refer to [Configure Community User Permissions on the Reviewer Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm) or [Configure Guest User Permissions on the Reviewer Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm) for a starting point and guidance on our recommendations. ### Installation Existing foundationConnect users can upgrade to the latest release using the [foundationConnect Reviewer Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer/). You will need the [latest version](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) of foundationConnect's Base and Grantee packages for the Reviewer Installer to install successfully. Visit the [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") section for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - September 18, 2019 Portal 11.29 ### Critical Changes We are introducing a solution that allows orgs to install the latest foundationConnect Grantee Portal (11.29) release in their Sandbox org running the Salesforce Core Winter ’20 release preview. This solution removes the Financial Report record type from the Community Grantee Permission set User/Login License permission set during installation, which will likely need to be added back in manually by admins. There are a few different ways to add the Financial Report record type back into your Sandbox org. But first, let’s see if there are users assigned to the Community Grantee Permission set User/Login License. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select **Community Grantee Permission set User/Login License**. 3. Click **Manage Assignments.** 4. Create a new permission set with only the Financial Report record type added OR 5. Update the users’ profile to give access to the Financial Report record type If no users are assigned in your Sandbox org, you can stop here. There is nothing additional you need to do before installing. If there are users assigned to the Community Grantee Permission set User/Login License, you need to add the Financial Report record type back. There are two different ways depending on your setup: - Create a new permission set with only the Financial Report record type added OR - Update the users’ profile to give access to the Financial Report record type Create a New Permission Set This provides one place to manage the updated permission, but if you have many users to assign the permission set to, it could be a time-consuming process. Follow the steps below to create and add the new permission set to your user(s). This new permission set now needs to be assigned to the user(s) in the Community Grantee Permission set User/Login License. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Label then click **Save**. 4. Click **Object Settings**. All the objects listed here should have no access. 5. Click **Grantee Reports** then **Edit**. 6. Under Record Type Assignments, select **Financial Report** then click **Save**. You should now be able to install the latest foundationConnect package (11.29) successfully into your Sandbox org. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Users**. 2. Click the name of the user. 3. Scroll down to the Permission Set Assignment section and click **Edit** Assignments. 4. Select the newly-created permission set from the Available Permission Sets list then click the **Add** arrow to move it to Enabled Permission Sets. 5. Click **Save**. Update the Profile If you have one profile for all users, you can quickly update the profile to grant access to the Financial Report record type. This is the simplest and fastest way, but it will apply the newly-added permission to all users with that profile. You should now be able to install the latest foundationConnect package (11.29) successfully into your Sandbox org. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select **FC Partner Community User**. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Grantee Reports** then **Edit**. 5. Under Record Types and Page Layout Assignments, select **Financial Report** as the Assigned Record Type. A modal opens asking you to confirm if you are switching from Master to Financial Report as the record type. Click **OK**. 6. Click Save to add the Financial Report record type permission to the profile. ### Changes - We fixed an issue that didn't require a user to complete all required fields when inviting an Opportunity Team Member to register on the Grantee Portal. ### Potential Known Issues We discovered a known issue in Sandbox orgs running Salesforce Core Winter '20 that changes several organization-wide sharing default settings after installing the latest foundationConnect package (11.29). In these instances, the objects below have had external access changed from Public Read/Write to Private. We recommend checking your settings and changing back to Public Read/Write if needed. | Object | External Access | | --- | --- | | Amendment | Public Read/Write | | Benchmark Update | Public Read/Write | | Budget | Public Read/Write | | Community Configuration | Public Read/Write | | CustomHTML | Public Read/Write | | FGM System Value | Public Read/Write | | Grantee Budget | Public Read/Write | | Grantee Budget Category | Public Read/Write | | Guidestar Field Mapping | Public Read/Write | | Guidestar Field Mapping for Salesforce | Public Read/Write | | Portal Account | Public Read/Write | | Portal Attachment | Public Read/Write | | Portal Field | Public Read/Write | | Portal Permission | Public Read/Write | | Portal Translation Workbench | Public Read/Write | | Portal User | Public Read/Write | | Question | Public Read/Write | | Question Attachment | Public Read/Write | | Quiz | Public Read/Write | | Recommendation | Public Read/Write | | Related List Controller | Public Read Only | | Secure Message | Public Read/Write | ### Installation Existing foundationConnect users can upgrade to the latest release using the [foundationConnect Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect). Visit the [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") section for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - September 11, 2019 Base 5.25, Portal 11.28 ### Critical Changes Custom Stylesheets (CSS) for Login and Registration Pages As part of our June 2019 release, we no longer support the use of HTML style tags within the CustomHTML object. We know this is an important feature that many orgs use to customize the appearance and functionality of login (CommunitySignin) and registration (CommunitySignup) pages. As an alternative, you can now use a custom stylesheet (CSS) to replace the use of HTML on these pages. To add a custom stylesheet to your org: Your stylesheet is now included in the CommunitySignin and CommunitySignup pages. 1. Add the custom stylesheet to a zip archive on your computer then upload as a [static resource](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=pages_static_resources.htm&type=5). Follow the [Use Centralized CSS to Customize Portal Pages](https://sfdo-docs.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/fc+legacy+grantee+config+guide.pdf) section of the Legacy Grantee Community Configuration Guide for help setting up a static resource. 2. From **Setup**, enter Custom Settings in the **Quick Find** box, then select **Custom Settings**. 3. Find the **Community Static Resource** label and click **Manage**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Complete the fields: - Name: LoginAndRegistrationStylesheet - File Relative Path: The path to the stylesheet in your static resource. - Static Resource Name: The name of your static resource. 6. Click **Save**. Hide Features on Login and Registration Pages Using Custom Stylesheets (CSS) Within your new CSS files, you can also now hide these features on the login (CommunitySignin) and registration (CommunitySignup) pages: Is your org new to CSS? Check out [Creating and Using CSS Stylesheets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=siteforce_style_css_create_sheet.htm&type=5) to get started! - Language toggle (CommunitySignin): To hide the Language toggle on the CommunitySignin page, add `.ddl-portal-language { display: none !important; }` to your CSS file. - Organization/Individual radio button toggle (CommunitySignup): To hide the Organization/Individual radio button toggle on the CommunitySignup page, add `.userType { display: none !important; }` to your CSS file. Convert Existing Fields to Rich Text Fields for Custom Formatting We replaced several existing fields with new rich text fields so you can format text without HTML, as HTML is no longer supported due to a potential security risk. This update also includes a post-installation script to copy the current values from the existing fields into the new fields. The table below shows the object, existing field name, new rich text field name, and page layout where you should add the new fields. **Action required**: While the post-installation script copies over the values, there are still a few steps to get the new fields up and running. For more information about rich text field formatting, check out [Rich Text Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_using_html_editor.htm&type=5) and [Editing Rich Text Area Fields in Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_using_rich_text_area.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help & Training. | Object | Existing Field Name | New Field Name | Page Layout | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Campaign Quiz | FGM\_Portal\_\_Instructional\_Text\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_Rich\_Instructional\_Text\_\_c | Campaign Quiz | | CustomHTML | FGM\_Portal\_\_Description\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichDescription\_\_c | CustomHTML | | Question | FGM\_Portal\_\_Pre\_Text\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichPreText\_\_c | Question | | Question | FGM\_Portal\_\_Post\_Text\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichPostText\_\_c | Question | | Question | FGM\_Portal\_\_Question\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichQuestion\_\_c | Question | | Related List Controller | FGM\_Portal\_\_InstructionalText\_\_c | FGM\_Portal\_\_RichInstructionalText\_\_c | Related List Controller | 1. Add Read access to the new field(s) you are using. 2. Review the values in the new field(s) to ensure your data copied over with correct formatting. Rich text doesn’t support all HTML, so you may need to make adjustments. 3. Update the page layout listed in the table above to replace the existing field(s) with the new rich text field(s). ### Changes - The GuideStar button no longer appears for portal users if there isn’t a named credential set up for GuideStar. Previously, when a portal user clicked the button, they were incorrectly directed to the fC login page. - You can now insert instructional text on the Community Dashboard via the RichDescription\_\_c field on the CustomHTML object. Previously, formatted instructional text on the Community Dashboard was rendered using a custom label (GP\_DashboardInstructionalText). To use this new functionality, these values must be set as follows in the CustomHTML object: - Name: GP\_DashboardInstructionalText - Associated\_FC\_Portal\_Type: Grantee - Language\_\_c: language code of the current user (for example, en\_US for English) - Community Setting: GP\_DashboardInstructionalTextEnabled and is marked enabled.If the CustomHTML object record does not exist, the text in the GP\_DashboardInstructionalText custom label will display without formatting. - We replaced the **Click to Continue** button on several pages with a more descriptive pop-up modal. We know it’s still an extra click, but it’s an important step to prevent cross-site request forgery. We even have a [Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/secdev_application_logic_vulnerabilities/secdev_app_logic_csrf) dedicated to this common web vulnerability if you’d like to learn more! - We fixed an issue where new users couldn’t register for an account if there were no CustomHTML records on the CommunitySignup page. - We fixed an issue on the Campaign object where the Instructions field (FGM\_Portal\_\_Description\_\_c) was displaying HTML tags even though it is a rich text field. - We fixed an issue that allowed new users to register for an account on the portal without completing all required fields. - We fixed an issue where users could upload amendments to the portal, even if the custom setting IsAmendRequestEnabled was disabled. - We fixed an issue where default values on custom objects or custom profiles were not showing on the portal. - We fixed a portal user data mapping issue that occurred during the user sign up process. - We fixed an issue that wouldn’t load the dashboard for the grantee portal user when a field from a related object was added to a dashboard field set. - We fixed a styling issue causing the table on the Benchmarks tab to disappear when a user navigated away from the “New Record” page. - We fixed an issue that caused the Data Mapping Wizard to not load. - We fixed an issue causing the User Portal Field Mapping and Community Field Mapping pages to not display all fields. - We updated the Associated Tab Type and Associated Portal Type fields to be optional. Previously, both fields were required. - We made efficiencies to our code to prevent CPU time out. ### Issues Closed - The date columns in the dashboard display as text fields instead of date fields. - Child programs on the Setup Payments Wizard display HTML tags instead of indentations. - The Amount field on the Grantee Portal dashboard does not show a comma separator for values greater than $999.99. - The Campaign End Date is closing the application period early by one day. For example, if the application end date is 09/15/2019, the application closes on 9/14/2019 at 11:59 p.m. - The Campaign End Date is closing the application period early for grantseekers who live in a time zone behind the grantmaker. For example, if the grantmaker is in GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) and sets the Campaign End Date to 09/15/2019, a grantseeker in PDT (Pacific Daylight Time) would be unable to submit an application after 5 PM PDT on 09/14/2019. - Text on the application review page is center- and right-aligned as opposed to left-aligned. - A grant with an apostrophe (‘) in the title does not return in the Explore Grant Opportunities search results ### Known Issues - A user will get a Visualforce error if they click “View,” “Edit,” or “New” on any Custom Profile tab. ### Installation Existing foundationConnect users can upgrade to the latest release using the [foundationConnect Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect). Visit the [If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") section for instructions on using the installer. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - June 26, 2019 Base 5.24 ### Critical Changes We no longer support HTML markup for the GR\_Header\_For\_Other\_Request custom label. If you have translated this label or any other custom labels using HTML markup, the markup will no longer render to users and will display as code. We recommend reviewing your custom label translations to ensure all HTML is removed. ### Installation We strongly recommend installing this release in a Sandbox org and testing thoroughly before installing into Production. Visit [https://rcsupport.my.salesforce.com/articles/Resource/FoundationConnect-Current-Packages](https://rcsupport.my.salesforce.com/articles/resource/foundationconnect-current-packages) to install. ## foundationConnect Release Notes - Mid June 2019 Base 5.23, Portal 11.27 ### Critical Changes GuideStar We removed the custom setting for existing GuideStar integrations. To enable the GuideStar integration to continue working, follow these steps. 1. From Setup, enter Name Credentials in the Quick Find box, then click Named Credentials. 2. Click **New Named Credential** and complete these fields: 1. Label: Guide\_Star\_Credential 2. Name: Guide\_Star\_Credential 3. URL: https://apidata.guidestar.org/essentials/v1 4. Identity Type: Named Principal 5. Authentication Protocol: Password Authentication 6. Username: Your email address. 7. Password: Primary key 8. Uncheck **Generate Authorization Header**. 9. Check **Allow Merge Fields in HTTP Header**. 3. Click **Save**. Additionally, the GuideStar Essentials API is required for any org (including .NET\*) using GuideStar. Orgs upgrading to this newest release need to change the “GuideStar Field Mapping For Salesforce” and “Configure GuideStar Field Mapping” objects according to fields provided by GuideStar Essentials API. To download a trial version of the GuideStar Essentials API to test, visit [GuideStar APIs](https://learn.guidestar.org/products/business-solutions/guidestar-apis) and sign up for a free trial. \*.NET users will be notified when the change requires the GuideStar Essentials API subscription to be active. We recommend securing API keys in the meantime. ### Additional Critical Changes - Your org’s data security is important to us. To provide additional security, we no longer support custom HTML and recommend removing all HTML tags from these objects and fields: - Applications and page layouts - Custom long text fields (typically found on the below objects) - Question - Quiz - Campaign - Custom labels - CustomHTML records - To ensure your data is as secure as possible, review and update the following permissions in your org. This is critical to your org's compatibility with security updates made during this release. - Objects and fields: [log a case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.fc_faq.htm) with Salesforce Support to access the **Configure Grantee Portal Authenticated User Permissions** and **Configure Grantee Portal Guest User Permissions** spreadsheets. _These permissions are only applicable to Grantee Portal 11.27 - 11.34._ - Tabs: review Related List and Custom Profile tabs access permissions and set to "Read" or "Read/Write" access, if applicable. ### Changes - A new user invited by a Grantee Portal member is now directed to log in with a username and password. Previously, a new user would see a “Request Received” message and be unable to log in. - When a Grant Recommender accesses a new record, the status changes to “In Progress.” Previously, the status remained “New.” - Notes and attachments uploaded by an internal grant team member to the Grantee Portal are now visible to grant seekers. Notes and attachments also now transfer when a Lead converts to an Opportunity. - Campaign names now wrap on the Community Campaign page. Previously, long Campaign names were cut off. - We updated the FC\_ForgotPassword\_CustomText custom label to detail password resets. - Opportunity records are now editable by grantees if the following are true: - Application Status is editable - Application is in Edit mode - Campaign is not expired - Application is not “Submitted" - Internal grant team members can now delete more than 50 Opportunity Team Members by clicking Remove All Members. Before, the bulk deletion process rendered an error message and would not complete. - The following related object fields can now be used in any fieldset displayed on the dashboard: - Benchmark Dashboard Fields - Amendment Dashboard Fields - Grantee Report Dashboard Fields - Request Dashboard Fields - Inquiry Dashboard Fields - The following fields no longer trigger an error message when marked as “Required” in the Reviewer Portal layouts. - Number - Checkbox - Currency - Date/Time - Date - Percent - Time ### Issues Closed - IFrame tab type displays Opportunity details instead of coded URL. - Grantee Portal users accessing an Opportunity created prior to a Spring 2017 release installation see a Visualforce error. - The Grantee Report due date displays incorrectly. - Users can upload a file in the Portal even if it produces an error. - A duplicate organization is created when a new user is going through the registration process and refreshes their browser. - Users can delete grantee reports even if custom settings and profile settings are set to disallow deletion. - The “Unscheduled” field for payments calculation shows an incorrect amount to be scheduled. - When a user clicks the “Return to Record” button on an Opportunity review, they see a Visualforce error. - The Related List with Tab tab type on the Grantee portal don’t respect the sort field and sort field order settings. - New portal users see an error when using a direct link to sign in. - Users on the Grantee portal can’t designate a second role type through the “Additional Role” picklist for an existing user invited to be a team member. ### Installation Information We strongly recommend installing this release in a Sandbox org and testing thoroughly before installing into Production. Visit [https://rcsupport.my.salesforce.com/articles/Resource/FoundationConnect-Current-Packages](https://rcsupport.my.salesforce.com/articles/resource/foundationconnect-current-packages) to install. # foundationConnect Release Notes Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to all foundationConnect products and editions. **Why:** Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Introduction for Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.grmk_learn_about_grantmaking.htm&type=5) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. # foundationConnect Reviewer Portal Configuration Guide Access a dedicated resource for implementing the foundationConnect reviewer portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note As of January 31st, 2026, Salesforce has retired foundationConnect. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. # Fundraising Editions and Permissions in Education Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them. - [User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Editions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Required Fundraising Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Customizing Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) ## User Interface Fundraising is available in Lightning Experience. ## Editions Available in: **Enterprise**, **Performance**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions with Education Cloud ## Required Fundraising Permissions To use Fundraising, Salesforce admins and users need the user permission Fundraising User. Typically, a Salesforce admin assigns a permission set or permission set group, which includes this user permission. 1. Clone the Education Cloud Full Access permission set. 2. Edit the cloned permission set and update the system permissions to include Fundraising User. 3. Assign this permission set to your users. 4. For each user, edit their user record and select **Marketing User**. ## Customizing Permissions If you customize this feature, such as adding fields, create a custom permission set. To remove user permissions from the default permission set, create a muting permission set. Then, use permission set groups to assign users the default permission set in addition to your custom permission sets and muting permission set. This approach makes sure that users always have the latest default permissions and is an alternative to cloning permission sets. SEE ALSO: - [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US) - [Muting Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups_muting.htm&language=en_US) - [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm&language=en_US) # Fundraising Editions and Permissions in Nonprofit Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them. - [User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Editions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Required Fundraising Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Customizing Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) ## User Interface Fundraising is available in Lightning Experience. ## Editions Available in: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions with Nonprofit Cloud. ## Required Fundraising Permissions To use Fundraising, Salesforce admins and users need the user permission Fundraising User. Typically, a Salesforce admin assigns a permission set or permission set group, which includes this user permission. | Product | Permission Set or Permission Set Group | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | | Nonprofit Cloud | FundraisingAccess permission set | This permission set gives access to the Fundraising permission set license, user permissions, and all objects and fields. | | Nonprofit Cloud | Fundraising\_User permission set group | Assign this permission set group to people who use Fundraising features. Provides access to all Fundraising features and related pages. Some features require enablement. | | Nonprofit Cloud | Fundraising\_Admin permission set group | Assign this permission set group to Salesforce admins who set up and configure Fundraising. Provides access to all Fundraising features and related pages, plus permission sets to configure Data Processing Engine and Omnistudio. | | Nonprofit Cloud | FundraisingExperienceCloud | Assign this permission set to give Experience Cloud users access to select Fundraising objects and components. | ## Customizing Permissions If you customize this feature, such as adding fields, create a custom permission set. To remove user permissions from the default permission set, create a muting permission set. Then, use permission set groups to assign users the default permission set in addition to your custom permission sets and muting permission set. This approach makes sure that users always have the latest default permissions and is an alternative to cloning permission sets. SEE ALSO: - [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US) - [Muting Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups_muting.htm&language=en_US) - [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm&language=en_US) # Fundraising Flows in Education Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Unless noted otherwise, the flows are active and in use in your org. To customize any of them, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow. For example, you can add custom fields to the screens in the gift commitment flows. After the flow is activated, create a quick action to launch your cloned flow. ## Automate Gift Entry and Processing Learn about the Fundraising flows for creating and processing gift entries. Manage Gift Entries Creates and updates a gift entry. Process Gift Batch Processes gift entries in a specified gift batch. Process Gift Entries Processes a gift entry and generates the entry's gift transaction, gift transaction designation, and gift soft credit records. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important We don’t recommend or support the use of Gift Entry related Lightning web components for custom purposes. ## Automate Gift Commitment Processing Learn about the Fundraising flows that make managing gift commitments easy. Close Gift Commitment Updates the status of a gift commitment to Closed and updates the status of the associated gift transactions. Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing Runs batch jobs that update gift commitments based on associated gift commitment schedules and gift transactions. The Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing flow runs on a schedule that your Salesforce admin sets up. Get Gift Commitments Retrieves the active gift commitments for a donor or a gift commitment. Manage Gift Commitment Schedule Creates and updates recurring and custom gift commitment schedules. Manage Gift Designations Assigns gift designations to the associated gift commitment or gift transactions. Process Gift Commitment Processes a gift commitment associated with gift commitment schedules or gift transactions. Process Gift Commitment is triggered from the Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing flow that runs on a schedule your Salesforce admin sets up. ​To process gift commitments instantly, add a custom action to the commitment and associate the action with the Process Gift Commitment flow, or call the flow from a custom record-triggered flow. Pause | Resume Pauses a gift commitment schedule for a fixed period of time or indefinitely, and resumes a paused gift commitment schedule. Update Recurring Schedule Updates a recurring gift commitment schedule. ## Philanthropic Research Processing Store, maintain, and intuitively interact with a comprehensive variety of relationship management elements, including assignments, ratings, proposals, stages, and interests. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Assessment Record Creates a party philanthropic assessment record for philanthropic research. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone Initiates a Data Processing Engine job to create a Party Philanthropic Milestone record based on the current date, fiscal year, and constituent role types passed into the flow. Sends an email to the flow user if the job fails. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile Creates a party philanthropic research profile and links it to a case for tracking. Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case Create a case record for a research request based on the flow user’s input. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Gets interaction or philanthropic details for the prompt template that triggered the flow. Adds details of the interaction or philanthropic records to the prompt instructions. Prospect Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence Creates a party philanthropic occurrence record if one doesn't already exist for the Party Philanthropic Indicator, and associates the indicator with the new occurrence. ## Advancement-Specific Data Processing Educational institutions can maintain, look up, summarize and report on different designations, allocations, or funds as the destination for gifts. Advancement: Change Constituent Role Update the advancement type on a contact profile when a constituent role is inserted or updated, based on the rank of active constituent roles. Advancement: Create Gift Transaction Populates gift transaction fields with data from the contact profile based on the advancement type and the contact profile's most recent graduation date. Advancement: Create Gift Commitment Schedule Populates gift commitment schedule fields with data from the contact profile based on the advancement type and the contact profile's most recent graduation date. Advancement: Create Gift Soft Credit Populates gift soft credit fields with data from the contact profile based on the advancement type and the contact profile's most recent graduation date. SEE ALSO - [Automate Tasks with Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow.htm&language=en_US) - [Customize a Prepackaged Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_flows_admin_create_flows.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Quick Action for a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_flows_admin_create_quick_actions.htm&language=en_US) - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") - [Set Up Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising.") # Fundraising Flows in Nonprofit Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Unless noted otherwise, the flows are active and in use in your org. To customize any of them, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow. For example, you can add custom fields to the screens in the gift commitment flows. After the flow is activated, create a quick action to launch your cloned flow. ## Automate Gift Entry and Processing Learn about the Fundraising flows for creating and processing gift entries. Manage Gift Entries Creates and updates a gift entry. Process Gift Batch Processes gift entries in a specified gift batch. Process Gift Entries Processes a gift entry and generates the entry's gift transaction, gift transaction designation, and gift soft credit records. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important We don’t recommend or support the use of Gift Entry related Lightning web components for custom purposes. ## Automate Gift Commitment Processing Learn about the Fundraising flows that make managing gift commitments easy. Close Gift Commitment Updates the status of a gift commitment to Closed and updates the status of the associated gift transactions. Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing Runs batch jobs that update gift commitments based on associated gift commitment schedules and gift transactions. The Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing flow runs on a schedule that your Salesforce admin sets up. Get Gift Commitments Retrieves the active gift commitments for a donor or a gift commitment. Manage Gift Commitment Schedule Creates and updates recurring and custom gift commitment schedules. Manage Gift Designations Assigns gift designations to the associated gift commitment or gift transactions. Process Gift Commitment Processes a gift commitment associated with gift commitment schedules or gift transactions. Process Gift Commitment is triggered from the Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing flow that runs on a schedule your Salesforce admin sets up. ​To process gift commitments instantly, add a custom action to the commitment and associate the action with the Process Gift Commitment flow, or call the flow from a custom record-triggered flow. Pause | Resume Pauses a gift commitment schedule for a fixed period of time or indefinitely, and resumes a paused gift commitment schedule. Update Recurring Schedule Updates a recurring gift commitment schedule. ## Philanthropic Research Processing Store, maintain, and intuitively interact with a comprehensive variety of relationship management elements, including assignments, ratings, proposals, stages, and interests. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Assessment Record Creates a party philanthropic assessment record for philanthropic research. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone Initiates a Data Processing Engine job to create a Party Philanthropic Milestone record based on the current date, fiscal year, and constituent role types passed into the flow. Sends an email to the flow user if the job fails. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Research Profile Creates a party philanthropic research profile and links it to a case for tracking. Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case Create a case record for a research request based on the flow user’s input. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Gets interaction or philanthropic details for the prompt template that triggered the flow. Adds details of the interaction or philanthropic records to the prompt instructions. Prospect Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence Creates a party philanthropic occurrence record if one doesn't already exist for the Party Philanthropic Indicator, and associates the indicator with the new occurrence. ## Advancement-Specific Data Processing Educational institutions can maintain, look up, summarize and report on different designations, allocations, or funds as the destination for gifts. Advancement: Change Constituent Role Update the advancement type on a contact profile when a constituent role is inserted or updated, based on the rank of active constituent roles. Advancement: Create Gift Transaction Populates gift transaction fields with data from the contact profile based on the advancement type and the contact profile's most recent graduation date. Advancement: Create Gift Commitment Schedule Populates gift commitment schedule fields with data from the contact profile based on the advancement type and the contact profile's most recent graduation date. Advancement: Create Gift Soft Credit Populates gift soft credit fields with data from the contact profile based on the advancement type and the contact profile's most recent graduation date. SEE ALSO - [Automate Tasks with Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow.htm&language=en_US) - [Customize a Prepackaged Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_flows_admin_create_flows.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Quick Action for a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_flows_admin_create_quick_actions.htm&language=en_US) - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") - [Set Up Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising.") # Fundraising in Education Use Agentforce Education and Fundraising to support the development and fundraising operations in your educational institution. ### Required Editions
Available in:
When you turn on Fundraising in Agentforce Education, you have access to all the features, objects, fields, invocable actions, and APIs that help you manage the gifts to your institution. To get up and running with Fundraising, first enable the feature and assign permissions. Then, customize page layouts, turn on additional Fundraising settings, and set up features such as data rollups and lists, and gift acknowledgments. To make the most of Fundraising, consider using the related components that are used across Industries products, such as Action Plans, Interaction Summaries, and Record Alerts. - **[Learn About Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_learn_about_nonprofit_cloud_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising provides new and easy ways to engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with specialized tools and data-driven insights. - **[Fundraising Editions and Permissions in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them. - **[Set Up Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising. - **[Automate Gift Operation Processes in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_automate_gift_operation_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Fundraising, Salesforce provides flows, invocable actions, and Lightning web components that are tailored to meet specific business needs. - **[Agentforce for Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Agentforce agents in Fundraising to automate donor management tasks and support your fundraising team's research and engagement efforts. - **[Gift Validations in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_validations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To complete bulk data migrations as quickly and smoothly as possible, pause some gift validations. Pausing checks on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules decreases friction during the migration process. Use these tables to review gift validations and see which checks are available to pause within Fundraising Settings. - **[Gift Commitments in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions. - **[Gift Transactions in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_transactions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use gift transactions to track donations that you receive as one-time gifts or as an installment to fulfill a commitment. - **[Gift Designations in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations. - **[Gift Types in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofits and educational institutions receive and record incoming funds through various methods. Identify the different gift types and how to represent them in your organization. - **[Gift Entry and Processing in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_entry_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields. - **[Manage Constituent Addresses in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_constituent_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Address management is vital to keeping address data accurate and organized. For constituents, use the contact fields (such as Mailing Address) and for business contacts, use the account fields (such as Billing Address). Furthermore, constituents often have multiple addresses that they use at various times of the year. Track these addresses, or track the constituent's historical addresses, so that you always send outreach materials and gift acknowledgments to the address in use by the constituent. - **[Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_acknowledgments_and_tax_receipts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly and easily provide acknowledgments and tax receipts to your donors. - **[Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app. - **[Household Account Rollups in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_household_account_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rollups for household accounts aggregate gift data from the household and all its members. Learn what a household account is, the requirements to set it up, and how household rollups differ from individual donor rollups. - **[Gift Planning in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Establish multiyear philanthropic journeys for prospects and donors that include complex planned gifts, such as charitable gift annuities, trusts, life insurance, donor-advised funds, and bequests. Streamline and automate processes, reduce inefficiencies and risks, and ensure compliance with evolving legal and institutional policies. - **[Outreach Source Codes in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_outreach_source_code_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use outreach source codes to identify the outreach methods used with your campaigns to help determine which approaches are successful. - **[Scoring Frameworks Help Increase Fundraising Success in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_scoring_frameworks_help_increase_fundraising_success.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Scoring frameworks, like the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary value (RFM) score, help to identify the donors who are the best fit for each of your campaigns or outreach programs. Matching your donors to specific outreach endeavors improves your fundraising success and your relationships with your constituents. - **[Philanthropic Research in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Philanthropic research is the foundation of strategic donor engagement. Use Philanthropic Research tools in Salesforce to understand donor capacity, track wealth signals, and build meaningful relationships with individuals and organizations. With a centralized view of philanthropic data, prioritize outreach and identify opportunities for deeper engagement. - **[Donor Profiles in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_donor_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Donor Profile contains key information about your donors all in one place. - **[Donor Support Profiles in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_donor_support_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Donor Support Profile helps you provide fast and personal support to donors. - **[Create a Donor Brief in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_donor_brief.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance your donor engagement with automatically generated donor briefs, designed to streamline the creation of comprehensive donor profiles. Donor briefs support major gift officers by integrating with existing profiles and customizable templates, enabling generation of tailored briefs directly from donor records. Save time and improve efficiency in preparing for critical meetings by making sure you have all the necessary information at your fingertips. # Fundraising in Nonprofit Cloud Use Nonprofit Cloud and Fundraising to support the development and fundraising operations in your nonprofit organization. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Performance and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud
Fundraising enables nonprofit organizations to fulfill their missions and sustain their operations. Nonprofits typically rely on funds raised through donations, grants, events, and campaigns to support their programs, services, and day-to-day functions. Here are some reasons why fundraising is crucial for nonprofit organizations. Set up and configure Fundraising in Nonprofit Cloud to support and manage the fundraising operations for your institution. Track and manage individual giving, major gifts, corporate sponsorships, and fundraising events. Configure Fundraising features, page layouts, and gift operation processes to help engage donors, manage gifts, and drive successful development programs. - **[Get Started with Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising provides tools to engage donors, raise funds, and drive revenue. Gain data-driven insights that can fuel your fundraising strategy for donors of all kinds. Explore a trial org and learn about what's included, the recommended setup, and how to get ready for your implementation. - **[Learn About Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_learn_about_nonprofit_cloud_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising provides new and easy ways to engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with specialized tools and data-driven insights. - **[Fundraising Editions and Permissions in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them. - **[Set Up Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising. - **[Automate Gift Operation Processes in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_automate_gift_operation_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Fundraising, Salesforce provides flows, invocable actions, and Lightning web components that are tailored to meet specific business needs. - **[Agentforce for Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Agentforce agents in Fundraising to automate donor management tasks and support your fundraising team's research and engagement efforts. - **[Gift Validations in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_validations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To complete bulk data migrations as quickly and smoothly as possible, pause some gift validations. Pausing checks on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules decreases friction during the migration process. Use these tables to review gift validations and see which checks are available to pause within Fundraising Settings. - **[Gift Commitments in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions. - **[Gift Transactions in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_transactions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use gift transactions to track donations that you receive as one-time gifts or as an installment to fulfill a commitment. - **[Gift Designations in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations. - **[Gift Types in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofits and educational institutions receive and record incoming funds through various methods. Identify the different gift types and how to represent them in your organization. - **[Gift Entry and Processing in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_entry_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields. - **[Manage Constituent Addresses in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_constituent_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Address management is vital to keeping address data accurate and organized. For constituents, use the contact fields (such as Mailing Address) and for business contacts, use the account fields (such as Billing Address). Furthermore, constituents often have multiple addresses that they use at various times of the year. Track these addresses, or track the constituent's historical addresses, so that you always send outreach materials and gift acknowledgments to the address in use by the constituent. - **[Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_acknowledgments_and_tax_receipts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly and easily provide acknowledgments and tax receipts to your donors. - **[Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app. - **[Household Account Rollups in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_household_account_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rollups for household accounts aggregate gift data from the household and all its members. Learn what a household account is, the requirements to set it up, and how household rollups differ from individual donor rollups. - **[Gift Planning in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Establish multiyear philanthropic journeys for prospects and donors that include complex planned gifts, such as charitable gift annuities, trusts, life insurance, donor-advised funds, and bequests. Streamline and automate processes, reduce inefficiencies and risks, and ensure compliance with evolving legal and institutional policies. - **[Outreach Source Codes in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_outreach_source_code_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use outreach source codes to identify the outreach methods used with your campaigns to help determine which approaches are successful. - **[Scoring Frameworks Help Increase Fundraising Success in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_scoring_frameworks_help_increase_fundraising_success.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Scoring frameworks, like the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary value (RFM) score, help to identify the donors who are the best fit for each of your campaigns or outreach programs. Matching your donors to specific outreach endeavors improves your fundraising success and your relationships with your constituents. - **[Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Philanthropic research is the foundation of strategic donor engagement. Use Philanthropic Research tools in Salesforce to understand donor capacity, track wealth signals, and build meaningful relationships with individuals and organizations. With a centralized view of philanthropic data, prioritize outreach and identify opportunities for deeper engagement. - **[Donor Profiles in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_donor_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Donor Profile contains key information about your donors all in one place. - **[Donor Support Profiles in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_donor_support_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Donor Support Profile helps you provide fast and personal support to donors. - **[Create a Donor Brief in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_donor_brief.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance your donor engagement with automatically generated donor briefs, designed to streamline the creation of comprehensive donor profiles. Donor briefs support major gift officers by integrating with existing profiles and customizable templates, enabling generation of tailored briefs directly from donor records. Save time and improve efficiency in preparing for critical meetings by making sure you have all the necessary information at your fingertips. - **[Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_fundraising_intelligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising Intelligence offers a comprehensive suite of Tableau Next dashboards to assess fundraising performance, optimize strategies, and achieve cost-effective results. Integrated with Data 360, the dashboards feature detailed data visualizations and analysis of key performance indicators, enhancing the efficiency of fundraising strategies. # Fundraising Intelligence Dashboards in Nonprofit Maximize fundraising effectiveness with the Fundraising Intelligence dashboards. These dashboards provide detailed donor metrics, campaign analytics, and organizational health data. Use these insights to enhance donor engagement and optimize campaign strategies, directly improving fundraising outcomes. When Fundraising Intelligence is fully installed and permissions are assigned, users can view the analytics dashboards on their Philanthropy and Partnerships, Donor Engagement, and Fundraising Strategy app home pages. If the app homepages have been edited in your org, manually embed the Fundraising Analytics Dashboard component to the page. - **[Gift Commitment and Transaction Categories in Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitment_and_transaction_categories_in_fundraising_intelligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Fundraising Intelligence, categorizing gift transactions and donors is essential for effective fundraising analysis. Gift transactions and donors are classified into three categories based on their relationship to other records in the Nonprofit Cloud data model. - **[Major Donor Insights Dashboard in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_major_donor_insights_dashboard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Major Donor Insights dashboard in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app to analyze donor opportunities over a specific time period. Gain data-driven insights from key fundraising metrics to easily identify high-value donors and prioritize engagement activities. - **[Mass Market Insights Dashboard in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_mass_market_insights_dashboard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Mass Market Insights dashboard on the Donor Engagement app home page to analyze campaign performance over a specific time period by using key fundraising metrics. - **[Fundraising Performance Insights Dashboard in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_fundraising_performance_insights_dashboard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Fundraising Performance Insights dashboard to get a comprehensive overview of your fundraising campaigns. Analyze key performance metrics to evaluate the effectiveness of your initiatives based on generated revenue, donor counts, and return on investment. Focus on identifying trends and areas for improvement in your campaigns to enhance overall performance. # Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit Fundraising Intelligence offers a comprehensive suite of Tableau Next dashboards to assess fundraising performance, optimize strategies, and achieve cost-effective results. Integrated with Data 360, the dashboards feature detailed data visualizations and analysis of key performance indicators, enhancing the efficiency of fundraising strategies. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available with: Nonprofit Cloud or Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking in **Enterprise**, **Performance**, and **Unlimited** Editions | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The portions of the Services and features branded as Tableau Next are provided on separate infrastructure: (i) may involve privacy and security protections that are different than your other services; (ii) may be hosted in physical locations that are different than your other services; and (iii) are further described in the [Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/trust-and-compliance-documentation). This feature requires Customer has a Customer Data 360 subscription and consumes Data Services Credits.
User Permissions Needed  
To install the Fundraising Intelligence dashboards (Permission Sets can be added during setup):
  • Data 360 Architect Permission Set
  • Fundraising Intelligence Admin Permission Set
To use Fundraising Intelligence:
  • Data 360 User Permission Set
  • Fundraising Intelligence User Permission Set
  • Tableau Next Limited Consumer OR the Tableau Next Included App Business user
The Fundraising Intelligence app includes three embedded dashboards. Major Donor Insights on the Philanthropy and Partnerships homepage, Mass Market Insights on the Donor Engagement homepage, and Fundraising Performance Insights on the Fundraising Strategy homepage. - **[Set Up and Install Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_fundraising_intelligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Fundraising Intelligence to access dashboards and analytics. To set up Fundraising Intelligence, you need to create and map Data 360 assets and ingest Data 360 data. - **[Embed Fundraising Intelligence Dashboards in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_embed_fundraising_intelligence_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance user visibility into the Fundraising Analytics App by embedding its dashboards in Lightning Experience pages. The dashboards are automatically embedded in homepages when the app is installed. If your homepages have been customized, manually add the Fundraising Analytics Dashboard component by using the Lightning App Builder. - **[Fundraising Intelligence Dashboards in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_fundraising_intelligence_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Maximize fundraising effectiveness with the Fundraising Intelligence dashboards. These dashboards provide detailed donor metrics, campaign analytics, and organizational health data. Use these insights to enhance donor engagement and optimize campaign strategies, directly improving fundraising outcomes. # Fundraising Invocable Actions in Education Learn about the object-level access that's required for using invocable actions in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Close Gift Commitment Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | No | Yes | Manage Gift Default Designations Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | No | | Gift Designation | Yes | No | No | | Gift Default Designation | Yes | Yes | Yes | Manage Gift Transaction Designations Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Designation | Yes | No | No | | Gift Transaction | Yes | No | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | Yes | Yes | Manage Custom Gift Commitment Schedules Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | No | No | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Manage Recurring Gift Commitment Schedule Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Manage Fundraising DPE Definitions | Object | Read | Create | Upate | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | DonorGiftSummary | Yes | Yes | Yes | | GiftDesignation | Yes | Yes | Yes | | OutreachSummary | Yes | Yes | Yes | Pause Gift Commitment Schedule Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Process Gift Commitment Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | No | No | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | No | No | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | Yes | No | Process Gift Entries Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Designation | Yes | No | No | | Gift Soft Credit | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | Yes | Yes | Resume Gift Commitment Schedule Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Update Processed Gift Entries Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | No | No | | Gift Entry | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | No | No | SEE ALSO: - [Fundraising Invocable Actions](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/fundraising_actions_parent.htm) # Fundraising Invocable Actions in Nonprofit Learn about the object-level access that's required for using invocable actions in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Close Gift Commitment Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | No | Yes | Manage Gift Default Designations Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | No | | Gift Designation | Yes | No | No | | Gift Default Designation | Yes | Yes | Yes | Manage Gift Transaction Designations Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Designation | Yes | No | No | | Gift Transaction | Yes | No | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | Yes | Yes | Manage Custom Gift Commitment Schedules Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | No | No | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Manage Recurring Gift Commitment Schedule Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Manage Fundraising DPE Definitions | Object | Read | Create | Upate | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | DonorGiftSummary | Yes | Yes | Yes | | GiftDesignation | Yes | Yes | Yes | | OutreachSummary | Yes | Yes | Yes | Pause Gift Commitment Schedule Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Process Gift Commitment Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | No | No | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | No | No | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | Yes | No | Process Gift Entries Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Designation | Yes | No | No | | Gift Soft Credit | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | Yes | Yes | Resume Gift Commitment Schedule Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment | Yes | No | Yes | | Gift Commitment Schedule | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | Yes | No | | Gift Transaction Designation | Yes | No | No | Update Processed Gift Entries Action | Object | Read | Create | Update | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Account | Yes | No | No | | Gift Entry | Yes | Yes | Yes | | Gift Transaction | Yes | No | No | SEE ALSO: - [Fundraising Invocable Actions](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/fundraising_actions_parent.htm) # Fundraising Lightning Web Components in Education Fundraising provides screen components that extend the types of input fields available in flow screens. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Flow Screen Input Component: Custom Schedule Lets users add up to 30 custom schedule records to a gift commitment and optionally specify values for user-defined fields on the custom schedule records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment ID | The ID of the gift commitment record associated with the gift commitment schedule. | | Additional Fields | A collection of additional fields to show on a custom schedule. | | Deleted Gift Commitment Schedule IDs | A collection of IDs deleted from the gift commitment schedule. | | Associated Gift Commitment Schedules | A collection of the gift commitment schedule records associated with the gift commitment. | ## Flow Screen Input Component: Gift Designation Lets users allocate up to 10 gift designation records to a gift entry or a gift transaction such that total designated percent is equal to or less than 100. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Designation Type | Indicates whether the gift designation record is to be associated with a gift entry, gift commitment, or gift transaction. Valid values are GIFT\_ENTRY\_DESIGNATION, GIFT\_DEFAULT\_DESIGNATION, and GIFT\_TRANSACTION\_DESIGNATION. | | Gift Designation Count | Initially, the maximum number of gift designation records to display in the component with a maximum of 10. Updates to the number of gift designation records specified by the user. | | Total Gift Designation Amount | Initially, the total amount of all gift designations for a gift entry. Updates to the sum of the user-specified gift designations. | | Gift Designation Information | The gift transaction designation or gift default designation record, containing information like the name, amount, and percent of gift designations to allocate the gift amount to. | | Gift Designation 1 | Initially, the name of the org-wide default designation or the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the first gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the first gift designation. | | Gift Designation 1 Percent | Initially, 100 for the org-wide default designation or the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the first gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the first gift designation. | | Gift Designation 1 Amount | Initially, the total gift amount for the org-wide default designation or the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the first amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the first gift designation. | | Gift Designation 2 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the second gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the second gift designation. | | Gift Designation 2 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the second gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the second gift designation. | | Gift Designation 2 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the second amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the second gift designation. | | Gift Designation 3 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the third gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the third gift designation. | | Gift Designation 3 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the third gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the third gift designation. | | Gift Designation 3 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the third amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the third gift designation. | | Gift Designation 4 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the fourth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the fourth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 4 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fourth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the fourth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 4 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fourth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the fourth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 5 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the fifth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the fifth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 5 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fifth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the fifth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 5 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fifth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the fifth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 6 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the sixth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the sixth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 6 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the sixth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the sixth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 6 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the sixth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the sixth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 7 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the seventh gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the seventh gift designation. | | Gift Designation 7 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the seventh gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the seventh gift designation. | | Gift Designation 7 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the seventh amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the seventh gift designation. | | Gift Designation 8 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the eighth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the eighth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 8 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the eighth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the eighth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 8 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the eighth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the eighth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 9 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the ninth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the ninth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 9 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the ninth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the ninth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 9 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the ninth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the ninth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 10 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the tenth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the tenth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 10 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the tenth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the tenth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 10 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the tenth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the tenth gift designation. | ## Flow Screen Input Component: Lookup-Record Fields Lets users look up a record and displays the selected record's fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime.
Attribute Description
Object Retrieval Action

The type of action to perform to get gift commitment transaction records. Valid values are:

  • GET_COMMITMENT_MATCHING: Retrieves commitment details based on the gift received date and the account ID of the donor GET_DEFAULT_DESIGNATIONS: Retrieves gift designation details based on commitment ID
  • GET_TRANSACTION_DESIGNATIONS: Retrieves gift designation details based on Transaction ID
  • GET_GIFT_ENTRY_DESIGNATION: Retrieves either gift designations related to Campaign or Transaction. Campaign Designations are returned if the Transaction associated Campaign and Campaign passed have are different otherwise, returns the Transaction related Gift Designations
Output Object API Name

The label of the record type returned by the component. Valid values are:

  • Gift Transaction
  • Gift Default Designation
  • Gift Transaction Designation
Donor ID The account ID associated with the donor record.
Commitment ID Optional. The ID of the gift commitment record used to retrieve the give designation details.
Campaign ID Optional. The campaign ID to use to retrieve the gift designation details.
Gift Received Date Optional. The received date used to determine which transactions associated with gift commitments to retrieve.
Gift Transaction Records A collection of gift transaction records associated with the gift commitment that's retrieved.
Gift Designation Information A collection of gift transaction designation or gift default designation records that are associated with the gift commitment, gift transaction, or campaign.
## Flow Screen Input Component: Record Detail Lookup Lets users fetch all fields for a selected lookup record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Selected Object API Name | The object API name of the user-selected lookup record. | | Field API Name | The API name of a lookup field on the object specified by Object API Name. | | Object API Name | The API name of the source object used for the lookup. | | Label | The label to use for the lookup field on the flow screen at run time. | | Record ID | The ID of the default record to use for the lookup. | | Required | Requires users to enter a value before they can move to the next screen. | ## Flow Screen Input Component: Soft Credit Lets users associate up to 50 soft credit records with a gift entry. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Soft Credit Information | Initially, a JSON string used to populate the default soft credit information attributed to a person or organization for the gift transaction. Updates to a JSON string containing the user-selected soft credit information attributed to a person or organization for the gift transaction. | | Gift Amount | The amount of the individual gift entry. | # Fundraising Lightning Web Components in Nonprofit Fundraising provides screen components that extend the types of input fields available in flow screens. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

## Flow Screen Input Component: Custom Schedule Lets users add up to 30 custom schedule records to a gift commitment and optionally specify values for user-defined fields on the custom schedule records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Gift Commitment ID | The ID of the gift commitment record associated with the gift commitment schedule. | | Additional Fields | A collection of additional fields to show on a custom schedule. | | Deleted Gift Commitment Schedule IDs | A collection of IDs deleted from the gift commitment schedule. | | Associated Gift Commitment Schedules | A collection of the gift commitment schedule records associated with the gift commitment. | ## Flow Screen Input Component: Gift Designation Lets users allocate up to 10 gift designation records to a gift entry or a gift transaction such that total designated percent is equal to or less than 100. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Designation Type | Indicates whether the gift designation record is to be associated with a gift entry, gift commitment, or gift transaction. Valid values are GIFT\_ENTRY\_DESIGNATION, GIFT\_DEFAULT\_DESIGNATION, and GIFT\_TRANSACTION\_DESIGNATION. | | Gift Designation Count | Initially, the maximum number of gift designation records to display in the component with a maximum of 10. Updates to the number of gift designation records specified by the user. | | Total Gift Designation Amount | Initially, the total amount of all gift designations for a gift entry. Updates to the sum of the user-specified gift designations. | | Gift Designation Information | The gift transaction designation or gift default designation record, containing information like the name, amount, and percent of gift designations to allocate the gift amount to. | | Gift Designation 1 | Initially, the name of the org-wide default designation or the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the first gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the first gift designation. | | Gift Designation 1 Percent | Initially, 100 for the org-wide default designation or the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the first gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the first gift designation. | | Gift Designation 1 Amount | Initially, the total gift amount for the org-wide default designation or the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the first amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the first gift designation. | | Gift Designation 2 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the second gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the second gift designation. | | Gift Designation 2 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the second gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the second gift designation. | | Gift Designation 2 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the second amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the second gift designation. | | Gift Designation 3 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the third gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the third gift designation. | | Gift Designation 3 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the third gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the third gift designation. | | Gift Designation 3 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the third amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the third gift designation. | | Gift Designation 4 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the fourth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the fourth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 4 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fourth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the fourth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 4 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fourth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the fourth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 5 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the fifth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the fifth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 5 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fifth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the fifth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 5 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the fifth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the fifth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 6 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the sixth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the sixth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 6 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the sixth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the sixth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 6 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the sixth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the sixth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 7 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the seventh gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the seventh gift designation. | | Gift Designation 7 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the seventh gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the seventh gift designation. | | Gift Designation 7 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the seventh amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the seventh gift designation. | | Gift Designation 8 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the eighth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the eighth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 8 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the eighth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the eighth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 8 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the eighth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the eighth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 9 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the ninth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the ninth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 9 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the ninth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the ninth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 9 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the ninth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the ninth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 10 | Initially, the name of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction to allocate to the gift entry as the tenth gift designation. Updates to the name specified by the user for the tenth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 10 Percent | Initially, the percent of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the tenth gift designation to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the percent specified by the user for the tenth gift designation. | | Gift Designation 10 Amount | Initially, the amount of the default designation or transaction designation record for the associated campaign, commitment, opportunity, or gift transaction for the tenth amount to allocate to a gift entry. Updates to the designation amount specified by the user for the tenth gift designation. | ## Flow Screen Input Component: Lookup-Record Fields Lets users look up a record and displays the selected record's fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime.
Attribute Description
Object Retrieval Action

The type of action to perform to get gift commitment transaction records. Valid values are:

  • GET_COMMITMENT_MATCHING: Retrieves commitment details based on the gift received date and the account ID of the donor GET_DEFAULT_DESIGNATIONS: Retrieves gift designation details based on commitment ID
  • GET_TRANSACTION_DESIGNATIONS: Retrieves gift designation details based on Transaction ID
  • GET_GIFT_ENTRY_DESIGNATION: Retrieves either gift designations related to Campaign or Transaction. Campaign Designations are returned if the Transaction associated Campaign and Campaign passed have are different otherwise, returns the Transaction related Gift Designations
Output Object API Name

The label of the record type returned by the component. Valid values are:

  • Gift Transaction
  • Gift Default Designation
  • Gift Transaction Designation
Donor ID The account ID associated with the donor record.
Commitment ID Optional. The ID of the gift commitment record used to retrieve the give designation details.
Campaign ID Optional. The campaign ID to use to retrieve the gift designation details.
Gift Received Date Optional. The received date used to determine which transactions associated with gift commitments to retrieve.
Gift Transaction Records A collection of gift transaction records associated with the gift commitment that's retrieved.
Gift Designation Information A collection of gift transaction designation or gift default designation records that are associated with the gift commitment, gift transaction, or campaign.
## Flow Screen Input Component: Record Detail Lookup Lets users fetch all fields for a selected lookup record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Selected Object API Name | The object API name of the user-selected lookup record. | | Field API Name | The API name of a lookup field on the object specified by Object API Name. | | Object API Name | The API name of the source object used for the lookup. | | Label | The label to use for the lookup field on the flow screen at run time. | | Record ID | The ID of the default record to use for the lookup. | | Required | Requires users to enter a value before they can move to the next screen. | ## Flow Screen Input Component: Soft Credit Lets users associate up to 50 soft credit records with a gift entry. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This screen component requires Lightning runtime. | Attribute | Description | | --- | --- | | Soft Credit Information | Initially, a JSON string used to populate the default soft credit information attributed to a person or organization for the gift transaction. Updates to a JSON string containing the user-selected soft credit information attributed to a person or organization for the gift transaction. | | Gift Amount | The amount of the individual gift entry. | # Fundraising Performance Insights Dashboard in Nonprofit Use the Fundraising Performance Insights dashboard to get a comprehensive overview of your fundraising campaigns. Analyze key performance metrics to evaluate the effectiveness of your initiatives based on generated revenue, donor counts, and return on investment. Focus on identifying trends and areas for improvement in your campaigns to enhance overall performance. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available with: Nonprofit Cloud or Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking in **Enterprise** and **Unlimited** Editions | ![The Fundraising Performance Insights dashboard is annotated with numbers 1–6.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/Fundraising_Performance_Insights.png) - Select the time period (1) that you want to see key metrics and analytics for. - Review the key metrics (2) for the selected time period. - Select Mass Market (3) to view the overall performance of your fundraising campaigns based on these metrics. - Use the Revenue tab (4) to analyze each campaign's performance based on revenue, and view both the leading and trailing campaigns in terms of revenue generated. - Use the Donors tab (5) to view the number of donors for each fundraising campaign, and insights into the campaigns that are performing well and the ones that need improvement. - Use the ROI tab (6) to assess each campaign's performance based on return on investment, and identify campaigns with the highest and lowest ROI. ![The Fundraising Performance Insights dashboard is annotated with numbers 7–9.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/Fundraising_Performance_Instights_Cont.png) - Select Major Donor (7) to get a quick analysis of all available opportunities based on their value. - View the performance of the key metrics (8) for the selected time period. - Analyze the value of each opportunity (9) and identify leading and trailing opportunities based on their value. ## Key Performance Indicators in Fundraising Performance Insights Dashboard Learn the definitions and calculations of key metrics in the Fundraising Performance Insights dashboard. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The data presented in the Fundraising Performance Insights dashboard is categorized into three transaction categories—Major Donors, Mass Market, and Major Donor & Mass Market. This grouping is used in calculations to derive insights.
KPI Description Calculation Transaction Category
Total Funds Raised The total monetary contributions that a nonprofit organization received during a specified period, including both completed transactions and committed amounts. "SUM GiftTransaction.""Current Amount"" + SUM GiftCommitment.""Expected Total Cmt Amount"" All Transactions
Paid Gift Transactions The total cash available from completed transactions. SUM all GiftTransaction."Current Amount" WHERE GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.Status = 'Written-Off' All Transactions
Total Donors The number of unique donors within the selected time period.

COUNT(UNIQUE(GiftTransaction.Donor))

Filter by:

(GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment IS NOT NULL AND GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.Opportunity IS NOT NULL) GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType = 'Is Written'

 All Transactions
ROI The return on investment for a campaign, showing how much is earned compared to what’s spent. (SUM GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount WHERE GiftTransaction.Campaign = Campaign) / Campaign.ActualCostAmount Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
CTRD The cost-to-revenue ratio for each campaign. Campaign.ActualCostAmount / (SUM GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount WHERE GiftTransaction.Campaign = Campaign) Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
New Recurring Donors The number of new recurring donors added during the specified time period. COUNT(UNIQUE(GiftCommitment.Donor)) WHERE GiftCommitment in Query2 NOT IN QUERY1 —
Percentage of Recurring Donors The percentage of donors who made recurring donations. COUNTD([Recurring Donors])/COUNTD([Total Donors]) Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
All Time Recurring Donor Retention Rate The percentage of recurring donors who made recurring donations this year. COUNTD([IsRetentionRecurringDonor])/COUNTD([Recurring Donors]) —
Donor Retention Rate The percentage of donors who donated in the current period as well as in the previous year, compared to the total number of donors who donated in the current period.

Query 1: Total number of donors who donated last year.

Query 2: Total number of donors who donated during the selected period.

Donor Retention Rate: (Query 1 / Query 2) * 100

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Median Donation Amount The median donation amount across all donations.

"IF [Donated Amount Flag] = 'True' and

([Transaction Type] = 'Mass Market' OR [Transaction Type] = 'Mass Market & High Touch')

THEN [GiftTransaction].[Current Amount] ELSE 0 END"

 Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Source Codes The number of active outreach source codes used. COUNT Outreach Source Code WHERE OutreachSourceCode."Outreach Source Code Status" = 'Active' Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Total Opportunity Value The total amounts expected from the committed opportunities. SUM GiftCommitment.""Expected Total Cmt Amount"" WHERE GiftCommitment.Opportunity = Opportunity —
Average Donation Amount The average donation amount across selected campaigns. Sum(GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount) / count(GiftTransaction) Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Yearly Retention Rate The percentage of donors who donated in the current period as well as in the previous year, compared to the total number of donors who donated in the current period.

Query 1: Total number of donors who donated last year.

Query 2: Total number of donors who donated during the selected period.

Yearly Retention Rate: (Query 1 / Query 2) *100

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Revenue by Campaign — Leading The chart shows the total revenue generated by each campaign, arranged in descending order, providing insights into the high performing campaigns. Sum (Campaign Revenue) group by Campaign Name Order by Descending Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Revenue by Campaign — Trailing The chart shows the total revenue generated by each campaign, arranged in ascending order, providing insights into the low performing campaigns. Sum (Campaign Revenue) group by Campaign Name Order by Ascending Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Donors by Campaign — Leading The chart shows the number of unique donors for each campaign, arranged in descending order, providing insights into campaigns with the highest donor participation. Unique (Donor ID) group by Campaign Name Order by Descending Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Donors by Campaign — Trailing The chart shows the number of unique donors for each campaign, arranged in ascending order, providing insights into campaigns with the lowest donor participation. Unique (Donor ID) group by Campaign Name Order by Ascending Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
ROI by Campaign — Leading The chart shows the average return on investment (ROI) for each campaign, arranged in descending order, providing insights into the efficiency of campaigns in generating returns relative to their costs. Avg (ROI) group by Campaign Name Order by Descending Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
ROI by Campaign — Trailing The chart shows the average return on investment (ROI) for each campaign, arranged in ascending order, providing insights into the campaigns with the lowest returns. Avg (ROI) group by Campaign Name Order by Ascending Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Opportunity Value by Opportunity Name — Leading The chart shows the value of each opportunity, arranged in descending order, highlighting the highest-value opportunities. Sum(Opportunity Value) group by Opportunity Name order by Descending —
Opportunity Value by Opportunity Name — Trailing The chart shows the value of each opportunity, arranged in ascending order, providing insights into the opportunities with the lowest values. Sum(Opportunity Value) group by Opportunity Name order by Ascending —
# Fundraising Prerequisites in Education To prepare your org for Fundraising, assign permission sets, enable person accounts, and turn on and set up Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Assign Fundraising Permission Sets in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_assign_fundraising_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide users with the access that they need to use Fundraising features. - **[Enable Person Accounts for Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enable_person_accounts_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up person accounts to manage Fundraising users. - **[Enable Features that Enhance Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enable_features_that_enhance_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your Fundraising data and provide robust automation around Fundraising processes. - **[Enable Fundraising in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enable_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising. - **[Automatically Generate and Maintain Household Names and Greetings in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_automatic_household_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time. # Fundraising Prerequisites in Nonprofit To prepare your org for Fundraising, assign permission sets, enable person accounts, and turn on and set up Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Assign Fundraising Permission Sets in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_assign_fundraising_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide users with the access that they need to use Fundraising features. - **[Enable Person Accounts for Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_person_accounts_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up person accounts to manage Fundraising users. - **[Enable Features that Enhance Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_features_that_enhance_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your Fundraising data and provide robust automation around Fundraising processes. - **[Enable Fundraising in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising. - **[Automatically Generate and Maintain Household Names and Greetings in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_automatic_household_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep household account names and greetings accurate and professional as family dynamics change. Define formula-based patterns, and automatically recalculate household names whenever you add, remove, or update members. Household Naming listens for changes to household membership and member details, then recalculates names in real time. # Gain Insights to Streamline and Enhance Alumni Engagement Analyze alumni engagement metrics by using the Alumni Engagement Insights dashboard in the Education Analytics app. Get an overview of the alumni community based on total alumni strength, alumni portal users, educational achievements, and employment details. Easily track open cases and alerts as cards to ensure prompt responses to alumni concerns and enhance the overall alumni engagement experience. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Education Cloud and CRM Analytics for Education Cloud are enabled. **Who**: Only Education Cloud users with the CRM Analytics for Education Cloud license can use the Alumni Engagement Insights dashboard. **How**: To get the Education Analytics app with the Alumni Engagement Insights dashboard, go to the Configure Education Analytics page in Setup. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Set Up Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_analytics.htm) # GDPR for Admissions Connect Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Admissions Connect. - **[Admissions Connect Product Information for General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_product_info_for_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Admissions Connect complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Data Deletion for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Admissions Connect. - **[Consent Management for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how consent management applies to Admissions Connect. - **[Restrict Data Processing for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Admissions Connect. - **[Data Portability for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data portability in Admissions Connect. # GDPR for Einstein for Nonprofits Data privacy, deletion, consent, and portability considerations and compliance details for Einstein for Nonprofits. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Product Info for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_product_info_for_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Data Deletion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these factors when deleting data in Einstein for Nonprofits to stay compliant with data protention and privacy regulations such as GDPR. - **[Consent Management for Einstein for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage personal preferences about constituent data in Einstein for Nonprofits to comply with various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR. - **[Restrict Data Processing for EFN](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In order to comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Salesforce.org applications. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Data Portability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare to respond to constituent requests for their data. # GDPR for NPSP Find out more about GDPR for NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [GDPR for NPSP](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3wuWzZI50Ps). - **[Product Information for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_product_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about product information for NPSP. - **[Data Deletion for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about data deletion. - **[Consent Management for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about consent management. - **[Restrict Data Processing for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about how to restrict data processing. - **[Data Portability for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about data portabillity. # GDPR for Program Management Module Learn about General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Program Management Module. - **[Product Information on PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about Program Management Module product information for GDPR. - **[Data Deletion for PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get guidance on deleting personal data as you comply with the GDPR right of erasure request. - **[Consent Management for PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get guidance on obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and honoring individuals' preferences regarding their personal information. - **[Data Processing Restrictions for PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get guidance on how to prevent the processing of your customers' data when you're required to do so. - **[Data Portability for PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Export customer-related data upon request in compliance. # GDPR for Student Success Hub Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Student Success Hub. - **[Student Success Hub Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_product_info_for_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Student Success Hub complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Student Success Hub Data Deletion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Student Success Hub. - **[Student Success Hub Content Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how consent management applies to Student Success Hub. - **[Restrict Data Processing for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Student Success Hub. - **[Student Success Hub Data Portability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data portability in Student Success Hub. # GDPR for Volunteers for Salesforce Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Product Information on Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Volunteers for Salesforce complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Data Deletion for Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Consent Management for Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how consent management applies to Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Restrict Data Processing for Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Data Portability for Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data portability in Volunteers for Salesforce. # GEM and Localization Get answers to frequently asked questions about localization, and learn about available languages. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Gift Entry Manager product. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Gift Entry Manager. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Gift Entry Manager."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Gift Entry Manager product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Gift Entry Manager: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Gift Entry Manager. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Gift Entry Manager objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Gift Entry Manager (GEM) | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | English (UK) | √ |   | | French | √ |   | | German | √ |   | | Spanish | √ |   | | Spanish (Mexico) | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. # General Case Management Configuration Understand more about the nonprofit Case Management managed package and translation. Learn how to customize the Home tab. - **[Case Management and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to frequently asked questions about localization, understand what languages are available for your product, get links to documentation in other languages, and learn about translation limits. - **[Customize the Home Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_home_tab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize your Case Management home tab. # General Information Learn how GEM can make a difference for your institution. - **[Cultivating a Campus Through Giving](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_cultivating_a_campus.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create a giving atmosphere campus - **[How GEM Can Make a Difference for Your Institution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_can_make_a_difference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Gift Entry Management supports fundraising operations for higher ed advancement. # General Legacy NPSP Information Documentation for old NPSP setup and features like legacy account models and NPSP Data Loader help text mapping. - **[Legacy Account Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_account_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An account model describes the relationship between Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities. The Household Account Model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the one we strongly recommend. This article contains information about two legacy account models: The 1-to-1 Account Model, and the Individual Account Model. - **[Map Custom Fields Using Help Text (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP legacy Help Text mapping allows you to reference additional fields on a small number of Salesforce objects through Help Text on the NPSP Data Import fields. - **[Troubleshoot Invalid NPSP Data Import Help Text Mappings (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The legacy NPSP method to connect NPSP Data Import fields to the target fields is through the NPSP Data Import field's Help Text. # General NPSP Administration Read more about the general NPSP administration tasks. - **[Change My Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_my_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack is the Household Account model, which is the account model we strongly recommend. Only experienced Salesforce Administrators should consider changing an organization's account model. - **[Customize Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Custom Label is text that can be accessed by an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack, for a variety of purposes. The advantage of a Custom Label is that the text can be translated into any language that Salesforce supports. - **[Create and Update Campaign Members Through an Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure NPSP to automatically add a Contact to a Campaign when you enter a donation. - **[Delete Deprecated Items from Your NPSP Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_deprecated_items_from_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack has changed over the years. As we improve the product, there are inevitably deprecated items that are no longer required and as part of our cleanup efforts, we mark items for deletion so that you can safely remove them from your org if you'd like to. Keep in mind that you don't have to remove them—these deprecated items won't have any impact on your org. - **[Disable NPSP Contact Role Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_ocr_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There may be instances where you need to disable the NPSP automation that creates Opportunity Contact Roles on selected Opportunities. You may wish to do this so you can create or update Contact Roles yourself, using your own business logic. - **[Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs. - **[Keep Up With NPSP and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_keep_up_with_npsp_and_salesforce_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Manually Process Batch Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job. - **[Nonprofit Success Pack and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This document provides a list of areas in the Nonprofit Success Pack that cannot or should not be translated. - **[NPSP Data Management Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Improve data quality and learn data management best practices with these documentation articles and videos. - **[Phone and Email Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article provides more information about the phone and email workflow rules that come with the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Run a Health Check in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_run_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Health Check looks through your org for both data and configuration inconsistencies or errors and reports back the type of error along with a description. - **[Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility with NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about Shield Platform Encryption compatibility. # General Volunteers for Salesforce Information Review some frequently asked questions about Volunteers for Salesforce, and learn how to access release resources, collect metrics, and more. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some frequently asked questions for using, administering, and troubleshooting Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Keep Up With Volunteers for Salesforce and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_keep_up_with_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what’s included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. These metrics give Salesforce.org valuable insights into how our customers are using Volunteers for Salesforce. We use this information to understand usage and adoption of various Volunteers for Salesforce features. - **[Other Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_other_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about resources to support you in implementing and using Volunteers for Salesforce. # Generate a Board Version of a Grant Application (Beta) Grant program officers provide their board members with a distilled version of the grant application that the board members can review for final approval. It can be time consuming to summarize a grant application that calls out the information that the board is most interested in. To save time by quickly generating a board version of the application, use the Einstein Board Version of Grant Application feature. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
User Permissions Needed
To use Einstein Generative AI:

Context Service Admin

AND

Context Service Runtime

AND

CopilotSalesforceUserPSG permission set group

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce Admin

OR

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Prompt Template Manager

OR

Prompt Template User
To use Einstein Board Version of Grant Application: Grantmaking Manager
1. From the Grantmaking app, open the individual application that you want to create a board version of. 2. To generate a summary of the program, click the button in the Einstein Board Version of Grant Application pane. Einstein analyzes your request and provides a summary result. 3. To copy the summary so that you can paste it into a document, click **Copy**. 4. To get a different version of the summary, click **Generate**. # Generate a Funding Award Summary (Beta) Grantmaking program officers often use a funding award summary to determine the health of a specific grant. Officers use this information to decide how much engagement they need, whether they can make more funding disbursements, and whether they should provide future funding to the recipient. Gathering information to make these determinations is an arduous task. Use the Einstein Funding Award Summary to quickly identify if the grant is meeting its milestones and fulfilling its requirements. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
User Permissions Needed
To use Einstein Generative AI:

Context Service Admin

AND

Context Service Runtime

AND

CopilotSalesforceUserPSG permission set group

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce Admin

OR

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Prompt Template Manager

OR

Prompt Template User
To use Einstein Funding Award Summary: Grantmaking Manager
1. From the Grantmaking app, open the funding award that you want to summarize. 2. To generate a summary of the program, click the button in the Einstein Funding Award Summary. Einstein analyzes your request and provides a summary result. 3. To copy the summary so that you can paste it into a document, click **Copy**. 4. To get a different version of the summary, click **Generate**. # Generate a Notes Summary (Beta) Use Einstein Notes Summary to quickly absorb information about constituents, participants, or grantees to provide them with the best service possible. Einstein Notes Summary helps major gift officers to learn about the donor before they make a solicitation call. Einstein Notes Summary helps case managers familiarize themselves with notes on the program participant before their next interaction. Quickly identify the actions or tasks that were logged in a note but not completed. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
User Permissions Needed
To use Einstein Generative AI:

Context Service Admin

AND

Context Service Runtime

AND

CopilotSalesforceUserPSG permission set group

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce Admin

OR

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Prompt Template Manager

OR

Prompt Template User
To use Einstein Notes Summary: Interaction Summary
1. From any application, open the account page that has the notes that you want to summarize. 2. To generate a summary of the program, click the button in the Einstein Notes Summary pane. Einstein analyzes your request and provides a summary result. 3. To copy the summary so that you can paste it into a document, click **Copy**. 4. To get a different version of the summary, click **Generate**. # Generate a Program and Benefits Summary (Beta) Use Einstein Program and Benefits Summary to quickly draft a program and benefits summary that accurately describes the program progress to stakeholders. Program managers can can save the time spent on creating program updates to share with internal and external stakeholders. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
User Permissions Needed
To use Einstein Generative AI:
  • Context Service Admin
  • Context Service Runtime
  • CopilotSalesforceUserPSG (Permission Set Group)
  • Context Service Admin>
  • Context Service Runtime
  • Einstein Copilot for Salesforce Admin
  • Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User
  • Einstein for Service Innovations
  • Prompt Template Manager
  • Prompt Template User
To use Einstein Program and Benefits Summary:
  • Advanced Program Management
  • Program and Benefit Management Access
1. From the Program Management app, open the program that you want to summarize. 2. To generate a summary of the program, click the button in the Einstein Program and Benefits Summary pane. Einstein analyzes your request and provides a summary result. 3. To copy the summary so that you can paste it into a document, click **Copy**. 4. To get a different version of the summary, click **Generate**. # Generate a QR Code for a Waitlist Check-in Page Create a QR code that learners can use to add themselves to the waitlist of a drop in appointment. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To create an active waitlist and generate a QR code: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Create or select an active waitlist and note the waitlist ID. 2. Generate the QR code for your waitlist check-in page: 1. On the QR Code component, click **Generate QR Code**. 2. For the target URL, enter your waitlist check-in page URL and append ?recordId=WaitlistId. For example, if your waitlist check-in page URL is https://www.studentportal.edu/waitlistpage and the waitlist ID is 123abc001, then enter https://www.studentportal.edu/waitlistpage?recordId=123abc001. The URL is saved in the link field of the waitlist object. 3. Click **Generate**. 3. If necessary, save the QR code as an image file to print or share. 4. Share the QR code with learners who want to check in to the waitlist for the drop-in appointment. SEE ALSO: - [Create Waitlists for a Service Territory](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_waitlist_for_service_territory.htm&type=5) # Generate Academic Insights Use Einstein Academic Insights to generate the academic insights, or the current term insights on a student.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To generate academic and current term insights:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Omnistudio User

AND

Prompt Template User
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note **Data 360** can be used when generating academic insights, but it isn’t required. You need Data 360 as part of an Einstein add-on or as a standalone license. Users also need the Data 360 User permission set. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case record. 3. Generate academic insights using Einstein. 1. Go to the Engagement Panel component configured for academic insights. 2. To accept the disclaimer and proceed, click **Got It**. Einstein analyzes and generates the insights. 3. To regenerate the insights, click **Generate**. 4. If needed, edit or copy the insights. # Generate Course Offering Participant Insights Use Einstein Academic Insights to generate the course offering participant insights on a student.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To generate course offering participant insights:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data 360 User

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Omnistudio User

AND

Prompt Template User
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Course Offering Participants**. 2. Click any course offering participant record. 3. Go to the Einstein Summary component. 4. To accept the disclaimer and proceed, click **Got It**. Einstein analyzes and generates the insights. 5. To regenerate the insights, click **Generate**. 6. If needed, edit or copy the insights. 7. Save your changes. The insights are saved as a summary related to the course offering participant. # Generate Current Term Insights Use Einstein Academic Insights to generate the current term insights on a student.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To generate academic and current term insights:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data 360 User

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce User

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Omnistudio User

AND

Prompt Template User
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case record. 3. Generate current term insights using Einstein. 1. Go to the Engagement Panel component configured for current term insights. 2. To accept the disclaimer and proceed, click **Got It**. Einstein analyzes and generates the insights. 3. To regenerate the insights, click **Generate**. 4. If needed, edit or copy the insights. # Generate Debits and Credits Configure Accounting Subledger to format transaction journal records for single or double entry accounting, with separate fields for debit amounts and credit amounts. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license with Growth Edition is enabled, and where at least one active user has the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger can configure this feature. Only users with the Manage Accounting Subledger or Run Accounting Subledger Job permission set can run Accounting Subledger jobs. See Also: - [Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm) - [Debits and Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_debits_credits.htm) # Generate Labels for Direct Mail—For Organizations Or Contacts Generate mailing labels for Household or Organization addresses. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This functionality is only available if you are using the Household Account model in NPSP. For more information, see [What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to produce mailing labels for organizations and Households. - **[Mailing Label Workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Familiarize yourself with the process to generate mailing labels. - **[Mail to Organizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your mailing is targeted at Organizations, the process is straightforward: create an Account report filtered on Organization record type, and include the billing address fields. - **[Mail to Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you send mail to Households, you usually want to send only one piece of mail to each Household, regardless of how many of your constituents live there. - **[Mail to Contacts Not At the Default Household Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes constituents prefer to receive mail to an address that is not their default Household address. You can make this override with NPSP. ## Overview Learn how to produce mailing labels for organizations and Households. Do you have an event flyer or fundraising appeal to send out? Where do you want to send it—to Organizations or to Households? And what do you do when Contacts have a preferred mailing address that’s different from the default Household address? This article describes how to produce mailing labels for these different groups. ## Mailing Label Workflow Familiarize yourself with the process to generate mailing labels. Before we dive into the details, let's take a quick look at the overall workflow for generating mailing labels: 1. Generate the report in Salesforce, per the instructions in each section below. 2. [Export the report](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=reports_export.htm&type=5) to a .csv file. 3. Using the .csv file as your source, use the merge function in your word processor to generate mailing labels. ## Mail to Organizations If your mailing is targeted at Organizations, the process is straightforward: create an Account report filtered on Organization record type, and include the billing address fields. You may also want to include the Primary Contact field to make sure your mailing is directed to the right person at the organization. ![Mailing label report for organizations showing Account Name, Primary Contact, and Billing Address fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/organization_report.jpg) ## Mail to Households When you send mail to Households, you usually want to send only one piece of mail to each Household, regardless of how many of your constituents live there. Raise your hand if you and your partner, spouse, or roommates have ever received the exact same expensive, glossy, fundraising appeal in the mail … Built-in NPSP functionality ensures unique, non-duplicated mailing labels for each Household. To take advantage of this functionality, use Campaigns and Campaign Members, along with the NPSP Household Mailing List report. See [Create Deduplicated Mailing Lists from a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_mailing_lists_from_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Although we live in the digital age, direct mail remains an important part of fundraising and outreach activities. But sending materials through the mail isn't exactly cheap and you really don't want to send the same piece of mail more than once to a given address. Donors want to see that your organization is effective and streamlined, and doesn't waste dollars on sending unnecessary mailings.") for more information. ## Mail to Contacts Not At the Default Household Address Sometimes constituents prefer to receive mail to an address that is not their default Household address. You can make this override with NPSP. The Household Mailing List report discussed in [Generate Labels for Direct Mail—For Organizations Or Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Generate mailing labels for Household or Organization addresses.") is sufficient for the vast majority of situations where you’re sending mail to constituents. But what about Contacts who prefer to receive their mailings from you at an address that's not their default Household address? If you’ve selected Address Override for these constituents on their Contact records, you can use this field as a report filter. 1. Create a report using the Contacts and Accounts report type. 2. Add a filter for _Address Override = True_. ![Filter on a new report showing Address Override set to True](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/household_mailing_filter.png) 3. Select the First Name, Last Name, Mailing Street, Mailing City, Mailing State, and Mailing Zip/Postal Code fields. 4. **Save** and run the report. The report lists any Contact with the Address Override checkbox selected. ![Shows a Contact whose Address Override checkbox is selected, and the Mailing label report for Contacts with Address Override selected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/contacts_not_at_hh_address.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using both this report and the NPSP Household Mailing List report, keep an eye out for duplicates from the two lists: when you run the NPSP Household Mailing List report, you can’t control which unique Household Member is listed from any particular Household. This means that the NPSP Household Mailing List report may display a Household member who is not using the default Household address. # Generate Revenue and Expenses Choose what type of accounting information—revenue or expense—to generate for tracking incoming and outgoing funds. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license with Growth Edition is enabled, and where at least one active user has the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger can configure this feature. Only users with the Manage Accounting Subledger or Run Accounting Subledger Job permission set can run Accounting Subledger jobs. See Also: - [Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm) - [Revenues and Expenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_revenues_expenses.htm) # Get a 360-Degree View of a Participant Profile Gain insights about a participant by using the new Participant Profile page, which can be accessed from an Account record. This page gives program managers a single place to view a participant's personal details, their upcoming and used benefit disbursements, interaction summaries, associated complaints and alerts, and more. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [_Salesforce Help_: Review Participant Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_pm_review_participant_profile.htm) # Get Case Management Install the nonprofit Case Management managed package, complete post-installation tasks, and configure Case Management on for mobile interfaces. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Install Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_install_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install Nonprofit Cloud Case Management, you get a managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code for Case Management functionality. - **[Post-Installation Required Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_post_install_req_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant access to Case Management managed package users and assign page layouts. - **[Case Management on Mobile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_on_mobile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the nonprofit Case Management managed package mobile app. # Get Familiar with Omnistudio Learn about the Omnistudio tools and components that are used in the application form.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Clone the Education Cloud Omnistudio components that you want to use, even if you don't intend to customize them. Before you start using the application form, learn the basics of Omnistudio, Omniscripts, Omnistudio Data Mappers, and Integration Procedures. See [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud."). # Get Grants Management Install Grants Management and complete the post installation tasks. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Install Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about Grants Management, what is included, prerequisites, which installer to use, and how to install. - **[Post Installation Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_post_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you installed Grants Management and aren't familiar with the new metadata, we recommend taking time after installing to review. # Get Oriented to the EDA Data Model Understand the typical EDA data model for your institution. - **[Welcome to Your EDA Data Model Orientation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_welcome_to_eda_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start your Education Data Architecture (EDA) implementation with a solid understanding of the Salesforce data model for primary, secondary, and higher education. - **[Model Your Institutional Account Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to align the Account object in EDA to your institutional structure. - **[Model Your Physical Campus](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_physical_campus.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Facility object to model data about buildings, lab facilities, dormitories, sports facilities, and other property assets. - **[Model Faculty, Staff, and Student Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the data stored in the Contact object and custom objects to understand your students, faculty, and staff. - **[Model Your Academic Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_academic_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Term object to define and segment your institution's academic year. - **[Model Courses and Curricula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use multiple custom objects in EDA to model your institution's courses and curricula. - **[Model Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Model your institution's program offerings with the Program Plan and Plan Requirement objects. - **[Model Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Program Enrollment and Affiliation objects to track a student's enrollments in academic and other programs. - **[Model Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track student attendance and participation with the Attendance Event object. - **[Model Student Grades](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_student_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Term Grade object to build out a high-level overview of student performance. - **[Model Certifications and Credentials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_certifications_and_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep track of an individual's achievements using the Academic Certification and Credential objects. - **[Model Behavior Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_behavior_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Monitor student behavior with the Case, Contact, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response objects. - **[Model Suspects and Prospects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_suspects_and_prospects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify and recruit the best-fit applicants for your institution. - **[Model Admissions Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_admissions_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review and manage an applicant's information, education history, and qualifications. # Get Outbound Funds Module Install Outbound Funds Module, complete the post-installation tasks, and update your package if needed. - **[Install Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install Outbound Funds Module, you get a managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code. It's important to note that you can't modify the components, such as objects and fields. They're locked with limited edit access so that the managed package can be upgraded later. - **[Post-Installation Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_post_installation_tasks_npsp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once Outbound Funds Module is installed, we recommend taking time to review the new metadata. - **[Upgrade Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you were an early adopter of Outbound Funds Module and are using a version prior to 1.15, the Funding Request object has a master-detail relationship to the Funding Program object. This relationship was updated in version 1.15 (released July 2019) to be a lookup relationship that allows for greater flexibility and scalability. # Get Program Management Module Install Program Management Module and complete the required post-installation tasks. - **[Install Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete the prerequisites and then install Program Management Module to get a managed package with essential metadata and custom code and an unmanaged Program Management Standard User Profile that you can assign to your program staff. - **[Required Post-Installation Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_postinstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you install PMM, complete the required post-installation tasks. - **[PMM with Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use PMM with Experience Cloud to connect directly with your users. # Get Ready for the Release Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what's coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often. - [Key Dates for the Spring '23 Sandbox Preview](https://www.salesforce.com/blog/key-dates-spring-sandbox-preview/). See key dates for the release. - [Prepare for Salesforce Releases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/sf_release_prep). Use Trailhead to create your release strategy. - [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). Access resources and experts for all things release readiness for Education products. - [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). Access resources and experts for all things release readiness for Nonprofit products. # Get Ready for the Release Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what's coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often. - [Key Dates for the Summer '23 Sandbox Preview](https://www.salesforce.com/blog/key-dates-summer-sandbox-preview/). See key dates for the release. - [Prepare for Salesforce Releases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/sf_release_prep). Use Trailhead to create your release strategy. - [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). Access resources and experts for all things release readiness for Education products. - [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). Access resources and experts for all things release readiness for Nonprofit products. # Get Ready for the Release Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what's coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - [Key Dates for the Winter '24 Sandbox Preview](https://www.salesforce.com/blog/winter-sandbox-preview/). See key dates for the release. - [Prepare for Salesforce Releases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/sf_release_prep). Use Trailhead to create your release strategy. - [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). Access resources and experts for all things release readiness for Education products. - [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc). Access resources and experts for all things release readiness for Nonprofit products. # Get Ready to Configure NPSP Welcome to the Nonprofit Success Pack configuration articles! These articles contain the configuration instructions you need to complete after you install Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP). There are also articles that teach you how to configure specific NPSP features, such as Engagement Plans, In-Kind Gifts, or Batch Data Import. - **[Do I Need To Complete These Configurations?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_ready_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Figure out if you need to make these customizations in your NPSP org. - **[Installer vs. Trial](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_ready_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the two primary ways to get NPSP. - **[Security Model Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_ready_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prerequisites for configuring NPSP. - **[A Note of Encouragement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_ready_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This is a massive undertaking, no doubt about it. There are a lot of steps to follow, some of which may be new to you. ## Do I Need To Complete These Configurations? Figure out if you need to make these customizations in your NPSP org. These articles are for you if: - **You installed NPSP 3 on top of your existing Developer or Production org from the** [**managed package installer**](https://install.salesforce.org/products/npsp/install) **on the Salesforce.org install page,** and you’re ready to tackle the post-installation configuration steps. **Start with [Post Installation Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_post_install_config_steps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here if you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on top of your existing Salesforce org.")** . \- OR - - **You installed NPSP 3 from the** [**Trial signup form**](https://www.salesforce.org/npsp-trial/) **on the Salesforce.org trials page,** but your package version doesn't contain new features you want to configure. **Start with [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when).")** and follow the steps for the specific feature(s) you want to configure. If your organization is using a version of NPSP prior to NPSP 3, you should upgrade before configuring NPSP. For more information, read [Upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack from a Previous Version of NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upgrade_from_a_previous_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is for users considering the upgrade from a previous version of NPSP to the latest version."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you’re not sure [which version of NPSP you’re using](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed.") , explore how your org is configured and compare it with the instructions in [Post-Installation Configuration Steps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_post_install_config_steps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here if you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on top of your existing Salesforce org.") . If you already have the Sales Processes, Opportunity stages, and record types outlined in the post-installation configuration section, you can move on to [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when)."). ## Installer vs. Trial Learn about the two primary ways to get NPSP. There are two primary ways you can install NPSP in your Salesforce org: 1. Through the [managed package installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/npsp/install). 2. Through [NPSP Trial signup](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/npsp/). Nonprofit organizations that are new Salesforce customers often get NPSP by signing up for the NPSP Trial. Organizations that are already Salesforce customers often get NPSP through the managed package installer. The NPSP Trial includes many of the latest features enabled by default and is the most "complete" configuration in terms of how Salesforce intends NPSP to be used. The managed package installer does not include all the same components in the same configuration as the Trial. Therefore, if you got NPSP through the installer you'll want to follow the [Post Installation Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_post_install_config_steps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here if you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on top of your existing Salesforce org.") to enable all the features that are automatically included in the Trial. ## Security Model Considerations Prerequisites for configuring NPSP. We've written these configurations assuming that the following elements of your security model have already been deployed: - Users - Sharing Settings - Profiles - Permission Sets - Roles - Public Groups Many tasks require you to configure object and field level security, as well as assignment of record types and page layouts. It's much more efficient to perform that configuration with the key elements such as users and profiles already available in your org. If you're unfamiliar with data security configuration, here are some resources: - [Data Security Trailhead module](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/data_security) - [Salesforce Security Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.220.0.securityimplguide.meta/securityimplguide/salesforce_security_guide.htm) - [Who Sees What video series](http://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/b1bqnmfg2vyzq7v6zxqjpg) ## A Note of Encouragement This is a massive undertaking, no doubt about it. There are a lot of steps to follow, some of which may be new to you. But you don’t have to go it alone. The [Nonprofit Hub community](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f9300000001ocxcaa) is here to help answer questions and provide moral support. So please, don’t hesitate to reach out, ask questions, and connect with other NPSP users. So grab a cup of coffee, crank up the music, and dive in! # Get Ready to Install Admissions Connect Review the data requirements and considerations, and complete the prerequisites before you install Admissions Connect. - **[Review Data Requirements and Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your institution is responsible for coming up with and implementing a strategy to get applicant and Application data into Salesforce. As part of this process, most institutions use a third-party tool to import data and documents, including application documents (such as PDFs, images, or other attachments), Application records, and Contact records. - **[Operational Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the operational requirements for installing Admissions Connect. - **[Consider Your Starting Point](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect runs on top of Education Data Architecture (EDA). You must have the latest version of EDA installed, configured, and populated with data before you configure Admissions Connect. - **[Installation Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you install Admissions Connect, complete the prerequisites for the package that you want to install. ## Review Data Requirements and Considerations Your institution is responsible for coming up with and implementing a strategy to get applicant and Application data into Salesforce. As part of this process, most institutions use a third-party tool to import data and documents, including application documents (such as PDFs, images, or other attachments), Application records, and Contact records. Review [Import Your Data into Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect gives you a complete view into your institution’s recruiting and admissions experience—from information about prospects and applicants, like their education history, to information about your institution, like degree programs and terms.") for detailed considerations. If you’re already using Salesforce for recruiting and admissions and want to install Admissions Connect, know that Admissions Connect doesn't have any functionality built around Leads or Opportunities. If you’re using Opportunities, consider adding a lookup on the Application object to the Opportunity object. Also review the [Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm) object reference for detailed considerations on how to configure and use Leads in EDA. For details about the types of documents supported in the Admissions Connect components, see [Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review some considerations before starting to work with documents in Admissions Connect."). ## Operational Requirements Review the operational requirements for installing Admissions Connect. To use Admissions Connect, you need an Enterprise, Unlimited, or Developer Edition org with: - Lightning Experience enabled - Service Cloud Lightning Console enabled - Full access to Contact, Account, and other standard objects ## Consider Your Starting Point Admissions Connect runs on top of Education Data Architecture (EDA). You must have the latest version of EDA installed, configured, and populated with data before you configure Admissions Connect. - If your org doesn't already have EDA, it's automatically installed when you install Admissions Connect. - If your org already has EDA installed, verify that you have the current version. See [Keep Up with Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) and [Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm) in the EDA documentation. Your org is updated to the latest version of EDA when Admissions Connect is installed, but we recommend that you upgrade EDA before installation. Your installation sequence depends on the starting point for your implementation.
Starting With Installation Sequence
New or existing Salesforce org without EDA

  1. Take care of Admissions Connect prerequisites. 

  2. Install Admissions Connect. 

  3. Configure EDA. 

  4. Import data into EDA. 

  5. Configure Admissions Connect.
Existing Salesforce org with EDA installed and configured

  1. Complete Admissions Connect prerequisites.

  2. Install Admissions Connect. 

  3. Configure Admissions Connect. 
## Installation Prerequisites Before you install Admissions Connect, complete the prerequisites for the package that you want to install. ### Prerequisites for Admissions Connect Only 1. Register and deploy a My Domain (if you haven't already). My Domain is required for Lightning Components. From Setup, search for then select **My Domain**. For registration and deployment details, see My Domain in Salesforce Help. 2. Enable Notes. From Setup, search for then select **Notes Settings**. For setup details, see [Set Up Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=notes_admin_setup.htm) in Salesforce Help. 3. Enable Chatter. From Setup, search for then select **Chatter Settings**. For setup details, see [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=collab_enable.htm) in Salesforce Help. 4. Optionally, enable Translation Workbench if you plan to use Admissions Connect in a non-English language. From Setup, search for then select **Translation Language Settings**. For setup details, see [Enable or Disable Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm) in Salesforce Help. ### Prerequisites for Admissions Connect with Applicant Portal Choose this option if you're new to Admissions Connect and plan to use the Applicant Portal, or if you want to add Applicant Portal to your existing org. 1. Enable Digital Experiences. For setup details, see [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 2. Enable ExperienceBundle Metadata API. 1. From Setup, search for Digital Experiences then select **Settings**. 2. Select **Enable ExperienceBundle Metadata API** then save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you previously enabled Lightning Knowledge and you get an error when installing Admissions Connect, check that the Knowledge object hasn't been renamed. If it has a different name, change the Label, Plural Label, and Object Name to Knowledge. For details, see [Rename Object, Tab, and Field Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_rename.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Get Started with Accounting Subledger Prepare Salesforce records for your Finance department with Accounting Subledger in Education Cloud and Nonprofit Cloud. Accounting Subledger captures transactions from CRM and automates transformations to reconcile this data in an accounting-ready format. Explore a trial org and then learn about what's included, what setup we recommend, and how to get ready for your implementation. ![Accounting Subledger banner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_main_banner.png)

Play button in a circle

Get Oriented

What Is Accounting Subledger?

Wrench in a circle

Dive In: Learn About Recommended Core Features

Store Transaction Data in Transaction Journal Records

Map Financial Data Using Accounting Sets

Create Accounting Field Mappings

Schedule Accounting Subledger Jobs

Gears in a circle

Go Deeper: Learn About Features for Specific Business Needs

Configure an Accounting set for Recruiting and Admissions Fees

Configure an Accounting Set for Revenue Cloud

Connector in a circle

Extend Further: Learn About Additional Capabilities & Add-Ons

Export Accounting Subledger Data

Adjust Accounting Subledger Data

Play button in a circle

Get Ready for Your Implementation

Set Up Accounting Subledger

Data Protection and Privacy

Arrow in a circle

Know Your Resources & Get Help

Trailhead: Accounting Subledger for Education Quick Look

Accounting Subledger Developer Guide

Accounting Subledger Trailblazer Community
# Get Started with Applications Prepare to create, accept, and manage applications in your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up application forms:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
Education Cloud provides you with a flexible and customizable application experience. You can use Education Cloud's single-stage application template, or you can use Omnistudio components to create your own application. You can create a single-stage application where the applicant completes and submits an application all at once. Or, create a multiple-stage application where you can complete each application stage at different times or through different means. For example, an applicant submits a form to enter their name and date of birth today, then comes back later to enter their educational history. It's not necessary for applicants to complete stages linearly. Education Cloud also offers flexibility in who can submit an application for a prospective student. Not only can students submit applications for themselves, a third party can submit an application for a student, such as a parent, guardian, caretaker, or commissioned agent. Regardless of the type of application that you choose, there's common preparation and configuration to be ready to accept applications to your institution, including creating sharing settings, page layouts, and records. - **[Manage Application Permissions and Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_applicant_portal_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your users to access your application. - **[Get Familiar with Omnistudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_familiar_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the Omnistudio tools and components that are used in the application form. - **[Protect Application Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_protect_application_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use multiple strategies to make sure that data is safe from unwanted access. - **[Prepare Your Org to Manage Application Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_your_org_to_manage_application_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up features, record types, page layouts, and components to manage application records in Education Cloud. - **[Create Supporting Records for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_supporting_records_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud. # Get Started with EDA Learn about EDA, including EDA limitations and extension options, the EDA entity relationship diagram, and EDA objects and fields. - **[What's Education Data Architecture (EDA)?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_explained.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Data Architecture is a community-driven data architecture designed to help educational institutions use Salesforce out-of-the-box. - **[EDA Limitations and Extension Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_limitations_and_extension_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep in mind these limitations and extension options with Education Data Architecture. - **[EDA Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_entity_relationship_diagram.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This diagram shows the relationship between EDA custom objects and Salesforce standard objects. - **[Education Data Architecture Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This document provides descriptions of Education Data Architecture objects and fields. - **[​​Get Started with Education Data Architecture Workbook](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_get_started_with_the_workbook.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use this hands-on workbook to plan and implement EDA. - **[Getting Started: Salesforce Fundamentals for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get acquainted with Salesforce terminology, your product(s), and the basics of using Salesforce for Higher Education. # Get Started with Education Cloud Education Cloud offers a learner-first, organization-wide, stakeholder engagement and collaboration platform for Education that maximizes outcomes and experiences for lifelong learners. Explore what's offered by Education Cloud, get hands-on with a trial org, and then learn about what setup we recommend, and how to get ready for your implementation.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Education Cloud banner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_main_banner.png)

Play button in a circle

Get Oriented

Understand What's Included with Education Cloud

Explore Education Cloud with a Learning Trial Org

Wrench in a circle

Get Started: Learn About Recommended Core Features

Recruitment and Admissions

Academic Operations

Student Success

Mentoring

Alumni Relations

Gears in a circle

Go Deeper: Learn About Features for Specific Business Needs

Create Applications

Support Advancement in Education Cloud

Extend Education Cloud with Common Features

Appointment Management

Connector in a circle

Extend Further: Learn About Additional Capabilities & Add-Ons

Data Cloud for Education Cloud

AI Agents for Education Cloud

Trailhead: Accounting Subledger for Education Quick Look

Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education

Play button in a circle

Get Ready for Your Implementation

Data Migration to Education Cloud

Set Up Education Cloud for Your institution

Data Protection and Privacy

Arrow in a circle

Know Your Resources & Get Help

Trailhead: Education Cloud Basics

Education Cloud Developer Guide

Education Cloud - Trailblazer Community

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note When you're ready to set things up, go to the Guidance Center for personalized help right inside the app. Then, look for EducationCloud. # ​​Get Started with Education Data Architecture Workbook Use this hands-on workbook to plan and implement EDA. Learn how your institution can get started with Education Data Architecture (EDA) in this hands-on workbook. Understand EDA objects, when to use each, how to approach your implementation, and next steps for success. Get started with the [Education Data Architecture Workbook](https://power-of-us-hub-doc.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Get-Started-EDA-Workbook.pdf) today. # Get Started with Fundraising Fundraising provides tools to engage donors, raise funds, and drive revenue. Gain data-driven insights that can fuel your fundraising strategy for donors of all kinds. Explore a trial org and learn about what's included, the recommended setup, and how to get ready for your implementation. ![Fundraising banner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/main-banner-lm-fundraising.png)

Play button in a circle

Get Oriented

What Is Fundraising?

Trailhead: Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising: Quick Look

Create a Nonprofit Cloud Trial Org

Wrench in a circle

Dive In: Learn About Recommended Core Features

Manage Awarded Grants, Recurring Donations, and Other Gift Commitments

Track Donations and Payments Made on Commitments

View Important Donor Details on a Single Record

Gears in a circle

Go Deeper: Learn About Features for Specific Business Needs

Enter Gifts Quickly and Efficiently

Track Fundraising Campaigns and Their Results

Manage Portfolios with Actionable Lists

Examine Trends in Donor Giving With Rollup Fields

Connector in a circle

Extend Further: Learn About Additional Capabilities & Add-Ons

Configure Rollups with Data Processing Engine

Create a Donor Segment in Data 360

Visualize Donor Gifts and Relationships with Actionable Relationship Center (ARC)

Assign an Interest Tag to a Campaign or Donor

Play button in a circle

Get Ready for Your Implementation

Set Up Nonprofit Cloud

Set Up and Configure Fundraising

Fundraising Editions and Permissions

Arrow in a circle

Know Your Resources & Get Help

Fundraising Developer Guide

Trailblazer Community: Nonprofit Cloud

Trailhead: Manage Funding with Nonprofit Cloud
# Get Started with Gift Entry Grid Customization in Education Custom Lightning web components must meet specific requirements before the Gift Entry Grid can use them as post-processing modals, column modals, or column components. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Gift Entry Grid supports custom Lightning web components in these areas: - Post-processing modal for single gift entry - Column modals - Cell Display component on the Component column type - Cell Edit component on the Component column type To make a Lightning web component available in the Gift Entry Grid, make sure its `js-meta.xml` file meets these requirements: - Set `` to true. - No configured components. Use this example as a guide to set up a `js-meta.xml` file: ``` 66.0 true Gift Entry Tribute Post Save Creates a GiftTribute record as a post-processing step for Single Gift Entry ``` # Get Started with Gift Entry Grid Customization in Nonprofit Custom Lightning web components must meet specific requirements before the Gift Entry Grid can use them as post-processing modals, column modals, or column components. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

The Gift Entry Grid supports custom Lightning web components in these areas: - Post-processing modal for single gift entry - Column modals - Cell Display component on the Component column type - Cell Edit component on the Component column type To make a Lightning web component available in the Gift Entry Grid, make sure its `js-meta.xml` file meets these requirements: - Set `` to true. - No configured components. Use this example as a guide to set up a `js-meta.xml` file: ``` 66.0 true Gift Entry Tribute Post Save Creates a GiftTribute record as a post-processing step for Single Gift Entry ``` # Get Started with K-12 Architecture Kit Learn how to use K-12 Architecture Kit to model people, classes, programs, and relationships in your school. - **[K-12 Architecture Kit: Connecting the Dots](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_story.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create relationship and affiliation solutions to drive student success and wellness. - **[Develop Your Own Approach to Modeling Your School](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_develop_approach.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the best way to set up your school’s data in the K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Represent People and Your School](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce objects to represent students, faculty and staff, school district and schools, and community members. - **[Represent Classes and Other Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify how to set up courses and other programs in your school in the K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Represent Contacts' Connections to Each Other and to Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce objects to identify how the people and programs in your school relate to each other. - **[Represent Special Characteristics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_characteristics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify ways to track student performance, behavior, and characteristics in the K-12 Architecture Kit. # Get Started with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Learn how to install and use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. Send personalized emails to target audiences and create automated email campaigns. - **[Overview of Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Communicate and engage with your customers by using Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Prerequisites for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get ready to install Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries by making sure you have the required licenses and features. - **[Install the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Package into your org. - **[Launch the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Open the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries app and follow the instructions on the Get Started page to get ready to connect Marketing Cloud with Salesforce. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Assets Deployed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the assets that are available to you after you complete the Get Started flow in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Need Help?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect with resources to help you get Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries up and running smoothly. ## Overview of Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Communicate and engage with your customers by using Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries is a suite of outreach marketing tools that help you communicate with and engage your supporters, contacts, and customers on any scale. Take your messaging further with personalized emails, audience segmentation, and automated email campaigns. To help you get you up and running quickly with Marketing Cloud, we created a Get Started page in the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries app. The Get Started page walks you through the connection process and provides access to a set of specialized assets, such as emails and journeys. ## Prerequisites for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Get ready to install Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries by making sure you have the required licenses and features. Before you install Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, you will need the required licenses. Reach out to your Account Executive or directly access [your Salesforce accounts](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/)​ to manage your subscriptions. Next complete the following prerequisites to connect Marketing Cloud to your Salesforce CRM. ### Enable Lightning Experience Salesforce Lightning is the next generation of the Salesforce user experience, and is a requirement for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. If your organization isn't already in Lightning Experience, learn more in [How to Transition to Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/.htm&type=5). ### Enable My Domain My Domain helps keep your data more secure by adding a customer-specific domain name to your Salesforce org URLs, and is a requirement for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. If you haven't already rolled out My Domain in your org, learn more in [Set Up My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=xcloud.domain_name_setup.htm&type=5). ## Install the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Package Install the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Package into your org. 1. Visit the [Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/mcngo/). 2. Click **Log In** to Start Pre-Install Validation and select your org type. 3. Enter your login credentials. 4. Click **Allow**. 5. Click **Install**. You'll see a confirmation when the installation is complete. ## Launch the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries App Open the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries app and follow the instructions on the Get Started page to get ready to connect Marketing Cloud with Salesforce. 1. Log into Salesforce. 2. From the App Launcher, find and select **MC Engagement for Industries**. 3. Follow the instructions on the Get Started page. You're now ready to connect Marketing Cloud with Salesforce. ## Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Assets Deployed Learn about the assets that are available to you after you complete the Get Started flow in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. You can use assets such as these after successful completion of the Get Started flow. | Assets Deployed | Location in Marketing Cloud | | --- | --- | | Emails | Content Builder | | Journeys | Journey Builder | | Automations | Automation Studio | | Data Extensions | Contact Builder | ## Need Help? Connect with resources to help you get Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries up and running smoothly. Connecting Marketing Cloud with Salesforce can be a complex process. Join the [Trailblazer Community](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazercommunity) and reach out for help. This online community is where users connect with other Trailblazers to share ideas and ask for help. If you're still having trouble, contact Salesforce Support. See Also: - [Trailhead: Marketing Cloud Connect Setup](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/marketing-cloud-connect) - [Marketing Cloud Troubleshooting Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=mktg.mc_co_troubleshooting_guide.htm&type=5) # Get Started with Program Management and Case Management Use Program Management to increase productivity, eliminate data silos, and empower staff who manage and deliver programs to make timely decisions. Enable Case Management to equip your team with tools for intake, assessments, and guided care plans. Explore a trial org and learn about what's included, the recommended setup, and how to get ready for your implementation. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
![Program Management banner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/main-banner-lm-program-management.png)

Play button in a circle

Get Oriented

Program and Case Management

Create a Nonprofit Cloud Trial Org

Wrench in a circle

Dive In: Learn About Recommended Core Features

Create Programs, Benefit Types, and Benefits

Enroll Program Participants

Manage Benefit Schedules and Sessions

Attendance and Benefit Disbursement Tracking

Summaries of Program Participants and Benefit Disbursements

Gears in a circle

Go Deeper: Learn About Features for Specific Business Needs

Track Tasks and Documents with Action Plan Templates

Manage Case Referrals and Participant Intake

Create and Assign Care Plans to Participants

Complaint and Incident Tracking

Provider Management

Connector in a circle

Extend Further: Learn About Additional Capabilities & Add-Ons

Measure Program Performance with Outcome Management

Determine Participant Eligibility with Business Rules Engine

Evaluate Participant Needs with Discovery Framework for Assessments

Automate the Conversion of Assessments to Digital Assessments with Assessment Generation

Gain Program Insights with Data 360

Rollup Definitions for Record Rollups

Play button in a circle

Get Ready for Your Implementation

Set Up Nonprofit Cloud

Program Management Prerequisites

Program Management Editions and Permissions

Nonprofit Program Management Example: Youth Job Readiness Program

Nonprofit Program Management Example: School Kit Distribution

Arrow in a circle

Know Your Resources & Get Help

Trailhead: Manage Programs with Nonprofit Cloud

Program Management Developer Guide

Case Management Developer Guide

Trailblazer Community: Nonprofit Cloud
- **[Nonprofit Program Management Example: Youth Job Readiness Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_pm_example_1_manage_a_youth_job_readiness_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider an example nonprofit that runs a job readiness program for young people to
 enhance their employment skills and make them career-ready. - **[Nonprofit Program Management Example: School Kit Distribution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_pm_ex2_manage_a_school_kit_distribution_activity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider how an example nonprofit tracks the distribution of benefits as part of a
 school enrollment support program that helps prevent children from at-risk communities from
 dropping out of school. # Get Started with Recruitment and Admissions Understand the Recruitment and Admissions app and consoles in Education Cloud. Import your Common App data and set up permissions and sharing for applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Recruitment & Admissions App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_recruitment_admissions_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Education Cloud Recruitment & Admissions app to view and manage student applications, tasks, and appointments, track RFIs, manage prospects, draw insights from analytics, and more. - **[Understand the Admissions and Reviewer Consoles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_understand_the_admissions_and_reviewer_consoles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Admissions and Reviewer Consoles give admissions officers and application reviewers a central place to focus on application reviews, see critical tasks, and take important next steps. - **[Import Common App Data Into Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_import_common_app_data_into_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Importer for Common App to bring your Common App First-Year data into Education Cloud. Import standard applicant, suspect, prospect, and recommender data into applicable Education Cloud objects. # Get Started with Salesforce for Nonprofits Before you dig into your Salesforce trial, get acquainted with Salesforce terminology, your product(s), and the basics of using Salesforce. There are many ways to learn about Salesforce.  How you approach it depends on your learning style and preferences.  Want to learn online on your own time?  Try Trailhead.  Want to read through detailed documentation, get one-on-one assistance, or talk to your peers?  We've got you covered on all fronts!  We have an amazing collection of resources below designed to help you get started and be successful with Salesforce.  Follow along with these three easy steps to get started. - **[Step 1: Learn About Salesforce for Nonprofits and Salesforce Licensing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start with basic details about Salesforce for Nonprofits, Salesforce editions, and products like Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and Program Management Module (PMM). - **[Step 2: Understand Where to Get Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You aren't alone in your journey with Salesforce for Nonprofits. Learn about Success Plans and our active, vibrant community of Trailblazers like you. - **[Step 3: Begin Your Nonprofit Learning Journey](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grow your knowledge of Salesforce for Nonprofits through learning paths and live events. ## Step 1: Learn About Salesforce for Nonprofits and Salesforce Licensing Start with basic details about Salesforce for Nonprofits, Salesforce editions, and products like Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and Program Management Module (PMM). - **[Meet Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At Salesforce we empower mission-based organizations with the technology needed to connect with donors, track volunteers, manage campaigns, support clients, and manage nearly everything else they need to do to succeed. We call this set of solutions and purpose-built products Salesforce for Nonprofits - **[Understanding Salesforce Editions and Products](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Salesforce edition is a selected set of features and functionality that also specifies the amount of customization possible, as well as the data and file storage capacity, and access to application programming interfaces (APIs). - **[Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and Program Management Module (PMM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Typically, nonprofit Salesforce customers select Enterprise Edition (EE) and use one or more prebuilt apps to manage their business processes. NPSP and PMM are two popular options. ### Meet Salesforce for Nonprofits At Salesforce we empower mission-based organizations with the technology needed to connect with donors, track volunteers, manage campaigns, support clients, and manage nearly everything else they need to do to succeed. We call this set of solutions and purpose-built products Salesforce for Nonprofits Salesforce for Nonprofits includes apps, tools, features, services, and technology that can meet the unique needs of nonprofits. This includes the latest innovation from the Salesforce platform, including robust artificial intelligence (AI), analytics, and integration capabilities.  This combination empowers organizations to go from siloed data to actionable insights, transforming constituent engagements into lifelong relationships. ### Understanding Salesforce Editions and Products A Salesforce edition is a selected set of features and functionality that also specifies the amount of customization possible, as well as the data and file storage capacity, and access to application programming interfaces (APIs). With the Power of Us license donation program, Salesforce.org customers can sign up for 10 Enterprise Edition (EE) licenses at no cost. A license is attached to a single user, so with 10 licenses, you can have 10 users logged in to your Salesforce org at one time. If you need additional licenses or products, you can purchase them at a deep discount [by logging in and managing your subscriptions](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/). As you review Salesforce documentation, log a Customer Support ticket, or ask for help from the community, it's vital to [know the edition](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000334996&type=1&mode=1) you're using. (While we strongly recommend Enterprise Edition for most organizations, you can learn about the other editions [here](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=xcloud.overview_edition.htm&type=5).) ### Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and Program Management Module (PMM) Typically, nonprofit Salesforce customers select Enterprise Edition (EE) and use one or more prebuilt apps to manage their business processes. NPSP and PMM are two popular options. NPSP is the foundation of Salesforce for Nonprofits.  It provides a common data model that supports the entire constituent journey, including donation management, seasonal address management, campaign management, and preconfigured reports and dashboards.  Developed in collaboration with our partners and customer community, NPSP is entirely customizable, speeding up the time to a connected nonprofit and paving the way for continuous innovation.  NPSP comes pre-installed with your trial. PMM is built to help mission-driven organizations connect people, processes, and data.  With prebuilt custom objects, page layouts, automation, customizable reports and dashboards, and easily integrated third-party apps, PMM provides organizations with a 360-degree view of their constituents and their program activities. Program Management Module works best when [installed alongside NPSP](https://install.salesforce.org/products/program-management) . ## Step 2: Understand Where to Get Help You aren't alone in your journey with Salesforce for Nonprofits. Learn about Success Plans and our active, vibrant community of Trailblazers like you. - **[Your Success Team](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every Salesforce.org customer has access to a Standard Success Plan from Salesforce that includes self-guided resources to get you started. - **[Trailblazer Community](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Trailblazer Community connects Salesforce communities from all sectors. Join to participate in general product discussions and to connect with your local community group. ### Your Success Team Every Salesforce.org customer has access to a Standard Success Plan from Salesforce that includes self-guided resources to get you started. You also get access to community-based best practices and web-based support to help [How to Get Support From Salesforce Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=005167035&language=en_US). If your organization is ready for enhanced support, resources, and training to drive adoption, then you can purchase a [Salesforce Success Plan](https://www.salesforce.com/services/success-plans/) which is available at a deep discount to Salesforce.org customers. ### Trailblazer Community The Trailblazer Community connects Salesforce communities from all sectors. Join to participate in general product discussions and to connect with your local community group. Check out these groups to get started. - [Nonprofits Using Salesforce](https://trailblazers.salesforce.com/_ui/core/chatter/groups/groupprofilepage?g=0f9300000001ocxcaa) for organizations who are not current Salesforce.org customers but have questions about NPSP, PMM, or other apps - [ANZ Nonprofit Customers](https://trailblazers.salesforce.com/_ui/core/chatter/groups/groupprofilepage?g=0f93a000000hx8qsaw) specifically for organizations based in Australia or New Zealand ## Step 3: Begin Your Nonprofit Learning Journey Grow your knowledge of Salesforce for Nonprofits through learning paths and live events. - **[Learning Paths](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Our learning paths are an amazing collection of resources designed to help you get started and be successful with Salesforce for Nonprofits. We've organized multiple learning paths around your work. - **[Attend a Live Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Join a live online session to gain new insights or ask an expert for answers to your questions. ### Learning Paths Our learning paths are an amazing collection of resources designed to help you get started and be successful with Salesforce for Nonprofits. We've organized multiple learning paths around your work. Learning paths can be found on Trailhead, including: - [Explore Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/explore-nonprofit-success-pack) - [Administer Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/nonprofit_fundraising) - [Import Data With Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/import-data-with-nonprofit-success-pack-npsp) ### Attend a Live Event Join a live online session to gain new insights or ask an expert for answers to your questions. Visit the [Customer Success Events calendar](https://cs.salesforce.com/events?filter=true&product=nonprofit-cloud%2csalesforce.org) and filter by your language or region to stay in the loop on the latest events and webinars from Salesforce Customer Success.  This is also where you will find our video library. # Get Started with Support Models Learn the many ways that Student Success Hub helps you support students. - **[Learn About Support Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you're a K-12 district, a small college, or a large university, Student Success Hub offers a variety of support models to allow you to serve students' needs. Understanding the different models and how they work can help you determine which models to implement at your school or institution. - **[Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A success team is a group of individuals who support students and help them succeed. In a K-12 school, success teams may include teachers, counselors, social workers, and other support staff. In higher ed, success teams may include faculty members, academic advisors, career coaches, financial aid counselors, and other support staff. - **[Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Support Pool is a group of individuals who provide support to students around a specific function, such as college readiness, career services, or financial aid. Support Pools can be assigned or unassigned. - **[Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queues are a way to manage students who drop by for unscheduled appointments with either a support staff member or an unassigned Support Pool member. To use queue management in Student Success Hub, assign a Queue as the Owner of a Support Pool record. Queue management is only available in orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites. - **[Case Team Terminology Explained](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While describing success teams, Support Pools, and queue management, we used a couple of terms that require further explanation. ## Learn About Support Models Whether you're a K-12 district, a small college, or a large university, Student Success Hub offers a variety of support models to allow you to serve students' needs. Understanding the different models and how they work can help you determine which models to implement at your school or institution. ## Success Teams A success team is a group of individuals who support students and help them succeed. In a K-12 school, success teams may include teachers, counselors, social workers, and other support staff. In higher ed, success teams may include faculty members, academic advisors, career coaches, financial aid counselors, and other support staff. Success teams consist of individuals who are assigned to specific students. Success teams can also include predefined case teams, which are small groups of people assigned to students. Whenever we talk about an assigned support staff member, we simply mean someone who's on a student's success team. Support staff manage success team membership in the Student Success Hub app. In orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites, students communicate and schedule appointments with their success team members by using the portal. A success team is related to a student's Student Record Case. Success team functionality is similar to and based on Salesforce case teams, so we use the terms _success team_ and _case team_ interchangeably. In fact, Student Success Hub defines success team roles by using Salesforce case team roles. To set up success teams, define case team roles that support staff can choose when adding a success team member to a Student Record Case. If desired, also create predefined case teams so that support staff can quickly add a group of people to a student's success team. Finally, assign individual members and predefined case teams to success teams. For more information, see [Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Support Pools A Support Pool is a group of individuals who provide support to students around a specific function, such as college readiness, career services, or financial aid. Support Pools can be assigned or unassigned. Assigned Support Pools are for groups or departments that work collectively to support a specific student. Such Support Pools don't have Support Pool records. Configure assigned Support Pools as predefined case teams that are assigned to a student's success team. Unassigned Support Pools use the custom Support Pool object and are only available in orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites. Unassigned Support Pools use predefined case teams that serve the general student population. Departments such as Career Services and Financial Aid are often represented as unassigned Support Pools in Student Success Hub. By using the portal, students can schedule appointments with any member of the unassigned Pool who has availability. You can optionally use unassigned Support Pools in combination with success teams. To set up unassigned Support Pools, create a predefined case team for each department and then create a corresponding Support Pool record. Then, customize the Pool record to allow students to schedule appointments with Pool members by using your student portal. For more information, see [Set Up Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Support Pools up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and [Set Up Support Pools for Your Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students a way to schedule appointments with Support Pools from a record detail page in the portal."). ## Queue Management Queues are a way to manage students who drop by for unscheduled appointments with either a support staff member or an unassigned Support Pool member. To use queue management in Student Success Hub, assign a Queue as the Owner of a Support Pool record. Queue management is only available in orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites. Queue management is ideal for one-stop centers and support departments with a front desk and waiting room. When a student arrives, the support staff or front-desk staff can use a Support Queue Case record to log the student's request to meet someone. Sometimes a queue Case results in an appointment. Other times, support staff can fulfill the Case in a more simple manner. For example, when the student just needs a copy of their transcript. Support staff or front-desk staff track a student's progress through the queue by updating the Support Queue Case's Status field. You can use queue management for individuals or for groups of users. When used with Support Pools, which is a common support scenario, queues use appointment Topics and Subtopics that are specific to the support department or group. Before setting up queue management, consider the entire support model that you plan to implement. Here are some options.
Model Student and Staff Experience Create a Predefined Case Team? Create a Queue? Create a Support Pool?
Unassigned Support Pool and Queue Management

Students can schedule appointments with members of the Support Pool from the portal.

AND

The same Support Pool members cover the front desk or walk-ins.

Yes

Include the support staff with whom students can schedule appointments in the portal.

Yes

Include the same support staff members.

Yes

For Case Team Name, enter the Predefined Case Team name.

For Owner, select the Queue.

Unassigned Support Pool and Queue Management

Students can schedule appointments with members of the Support Pool from the portal.

AND

Only some Support Pool members (or a different group of users) cover the front desk or walk-ins.

Yes

Include the support staff with whom students can schedule appointments in the portal.

Yes

Include only the users who cover the front desk.

Yes

For Case Team Name, enter the Predefined Case Team name.

For Owner, select the Queue.

Queue Management

Students can't schedule appointments in the portal.

AND

Only support staff in the queue cover the front desk or walk-ins.

No

Yes

Include all users who cover the front desk.

Yes

Don't enter a Case Team Name.

For Owner, select the Queue.

To take queue management even further, you can configure queue waiting rooms. A queue waiting room provides an interface on a tablet or kiosk device that's located in a physical on-site waiting room. When students arrive, they check in on the tablet or kiosk, saving the support staff or front-desk staff from having to manually add students to the queue. Student Success Hub installs a sample queue, Campus One-Stop, and a sample queue waiting room for Campus One-Stop in higher ed orgs. Neither is meant to be used in production. Explore and use them for ideas for your own institution. For more information, see [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and [Set Up a Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Case Team Terminology Explained While describing success teams, Support Pools, and queue management, we used a couple of terms that require further explanation. First, we referred to case team roles. A support staff member's case team role determines their level of access to student data and, in orgs with student users and a portal, whether the support staff member is visible to students in the portal. Define case team roles in Setup. In K-12 orgs, case team roles usually align to job functions, such as Counselor, Social Worker, Teacher, and Principal. In higher ed, case team roles typically align to support areas, such as Academic, Career, Financial Aid, Health, and Housing. In addition to being used with success teams, case team roles are used in predefined case teams. In orgs with student users and a portal, you map case team roles to appointment Topics, associating each support staff member with the type of appointment support they provide. A predefined case team is a group of individuals who work to support a specific area of student success, such as a team dedicated to addressing chronic absenteeism (in K-12) or a Career Services office (in higher ed). Define predefined case teams in Setup and use them in success teams and Support Pools. # Get Started: Recruitment and Admissions Workbook Resources and hands-on activities for admins Salesforce has all the tools recruitment and admissions professionals need to succeed. In this workbook, we cover every stage of the admissions funnel—from building awareness to onboarding newly accepted students—and we’ll provide you with best practices, tips and tricks, and concrete examples of just how to skill up and scale up.  Check out our [Get Started with Salesforce for Recruitment and Admissions Workbook](https://power-of-us-hub-doc.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/RecruitingAdmissionsWorkbook.pdf). # Get to Know Outbound Funds Module's Data Model Learn about the objects and fields that Outbound Funds Module uses, and understand their relationships. - **[Get to Know the Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the main objects that Outbound Funds Module uses. - **[Outbound Funds Module Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_erd_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the relationships between the objects that Outbound Funds Module uses. - **[Outbound Funds Module Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what custom objects and fields are included in Outbound Funds. # Get to Know Student Success Hub App Familiarize yourself with the Student Success Hub app, and learn how to access student information, customize the app for your institution, and manage appointments. - **[Log In and Get Oriented (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_log_in.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Log in to Student Success Hub, learn your way around, and understand the terminology used in the app. - **[Work with Case-Based Student Records (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_case_based_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's contained in a student record Case and different ways to access student record Cases in Student Success Hub. - **[Personalize Your App (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_personalize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Student Success Hub app to suit your work style and personal preferences. - **[Manage Your Day With the Appointment Manager (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_manage_your_day_appointment_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn your way around the Appointment Manager in Student Success Hub. # Get to Know the Data Model Learn what's included in Salesforce Grants Management. Grants Management leverages the Outbound Funds Module data model. - **[Funding Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Funding Program represents a thematic or strategic program that an organization is championing and providing funding for. A parent and numerous children Funding Programs can exist in a hierarchy. - **[Funding Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Funding Request is an application for funding. This typically represents applications created and submitted for funding consideration by outside organizations or individuals, but can also be used for internal funding requests. A Funding Request can be linked to an Account, Contact, or User as the applicant. - **[Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Review tracks a reviewer's status and feedback about a Funding Request. - **[Funding Request Role](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Funding Request Role tracks Contacts related to a Funding Request. This allows you to add multiple Contacts to a single Funding Request. - **[Funding Request Collaborator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Funding Request Collaborator tracks users who have access to a Funding Request to collaborate on the application. Use the Manage Collaborators component on the Funding Request to manage records for this object. The Manage Collaborators component includes automation to control users' access to Funding Requests. - **[Funding Request Collaborator Invitation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Funding Request Collaborator Invitation tracks users invited to collaborate on a Funding Request. These users don't have access to the application until they accept the invitation. Use the Manage Collaborators component on the Funding Request to manage records for this object. In the rare case when an applicant accidentally invites the wrong person, deactivate the invitation link by deleting the invitee's Funding Request Collaborator Invitation record. - **[Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Requirements are deliverables or milestones that are needed for the Funding Request to either be approved or closed. - **[Disbursement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Disbursements are payments, or outgoing funds, that have been made or scheduled to be made to the funding recipient. - **[Budget](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Budget is the amount of funds you plan to award for a particular objective during a specific time frame. - **[Budget Allocation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Budget Allocation represents funds earmarked for award or that were awarded from the parent Budget. - **[GAU Expenditure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The GAU Expenditure object connects the Disbursement object to the General Accounting Unit object to show which General Accounting Unit the funds should be disbursed from. ## Funding Program A Funding Program represents a thematic or strategic program that an organization is championing and providing funding for. A parent and numerous children Funding Programs can exist in a hierarchy. ### Sample Use for Funding Program A general education grant program and a scholarship fund are both examples of a Funding Program. ## Funding Request A Funding Request is an application for funding. This typically represents applications created and submitted for funding consideration by outside organizations or individuals, but can also be used for internal funding requests. A Funding Request can be linked to an Account, Contact, or User as the applicant. ### Sample Use for Funding Request A nonprofit seeking funding for an animal welfare program and a high school senior applying for a scholarship are both examples of Funding Requests. ## Review A Review tracks a reviewer's status and feedback about a Funding Request. ### Sample Use for Review The written feedback from a program manager or grant reviewer is an example of a Review record. ## Funding Request Role The Funding Request Role tracks Contacts related to a Funding Request. This allows you to add multiple Contacts to a single Funding Request. ### Sample Use for Funding Request Role A grants manager and an external consultant collaborating on an application is an example of using the Funding Request Role to add more than one Contact to a Funding Request. ## Funding Request Collaborator The Funding Request Collaborator tracks users who have access to a Funding Request to collaborate on the application. Use the Manage Collaborators component on the Funding Request to manage records for this object. The Manage Collaborators component includes automation to control users' access to Funding Requests. ## Funding Request Collaborator Invitation The Funding Request Collaborator Invitation tracks users invited to collaborate on a Funding Request. These users don't have access to the application until they accept the invitation. Use the Manage Collaborators component on the Funding Request to manage records for this object. In the rare case when an applicant accidentally invites the wrong person, deactivate the invitation link by deleting the invitee's Funding Request Collaborator Invitation record. ## Requirement Requirements are deliverables or milestones that are needed for the Funding Request to either be approved or closed. ### Sample Use for Requirement An application and a letter of recommendation for a scholarship are both examples of a Requirement. ## Disbursement Disbursements are payments, or outgoing funds, that have been made or scheduled to be made to the funding recipient. ### Sample Use for Disbursement An initial payment of $2,500 to a grantee and a $1,000 payment to a scholarship recipient are both examples of a Disbursement. ## Budget A Budget is the amount of funds you plan to award for a particular objective during a specific time frame. ### Sample Use for Budget An example of a budget is an organization has $1,000,000 to give away for habitat restorations throughout a given year. ## Budget Allocation A Budget Allocation represents funds earmarked for award or that were awarded from the parent Budget. ### Sample Use for Budget Allocation Funds granted to a nonprofit to support a habitat restoration project is an example of a Budget Allocation. ## GAU Expenditure The GAU Expenditure object connects the Disbursement object to the General Accounting Unit object to show which General Accounting Unit the funds should be disbursed from. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note This object is only available if your organization uses NPSP. # Get to Know the Data Model Learn about the main objects that Outbound Funds Module uses. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Bill Corkill, Emily Jakubiak, and Nick Lindberg, who also contributed to this documentation. - **[Funding Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Funding Program represents a thematic or strategic program that an organization is championing and providing funding for. A parent and numerous children Funding Programs can exist in a hierarchy. - **[Funding Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Funding Request is an application for funding. This typically represents applications created and submitted for funding consideration by outside organizations or individuals, but can also be used for internal funding requests. A Funding Request can be linked to an Account, Contact, or User as the applicant. - **[Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Review tracks a reviewer's status and feedback about a Funding Request. - **[Funding Request Role](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Funding Request Role tracks Contacts related to a Funding Request. This allows you to add multiple Contacts to a single Funding Request. - **[Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Requirements are deliverables or milestones that are needed for the Funding Request to either be approved or closed. - **[Disbursement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Disbursements are payments, or outgoing funds, that have been made or scheduled to be made to the funding recipient. - **[GAU Expenditure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The GAU Expenditure object connects the Disbursement object to the General Accounting Unit object to show which General Accounting Unit the funds should be disbursed from. ## Funding Program A Funding Program represents a thematic or strategic program that an organization is championing and providing funding for. A parent and numerous children Funding Programs can exist in a hierarchy. ### Sample Use for Funding Program A general education grant program and a scholarship fund are both examples of a Funding Program. ## Funding Request A Funding Request is an application for funding. This typically represents applications created and submitted for funding consideration by outside organizations or individuals, but can also be used for internal funding requests. A Funding Request can be linked to an Account, Contact, or User as the applicant. ### Sample Use for Funding Request A nonprofit seeking funding for an animal welfare program and a high school senior applying for a scholarship are both examples of Funding Requests. ## Review A Review tracks a reviewer's status and feedback about a Funding Request. ### Sample Use for Review The written feedback from a program manager or grant reviewer is an example of a Review record. ## Funding Request Role The Funding Request Role tracks Contacts related to a Funding Request. This allows you to add multiple Contacts to a single Funding Request. ### Sample Use for Funding Request Role A grants manager and an external consultant collaborating on an application is an example of using the Funding Request Role to add more than one Contact to a Funding Request. ## Requirement Requirements are deliverables or milestones that are needed for the Funding Request to either be approved or closed. ### Sample Use for Requirement An application and a letter of recommendation for a scholarship are both examples of a Requirement. ## Disbursement Disbursements are payments, or outgoing funds, that have been made or scheduled to be made to the funding recipient. ### Sample Use for Disbursement An initial payment of $2,500 to a grantee and a $1,000 payment to a scholarship recipient are both examples of a Disbursement. ## GAU Expenditure The GAU Expenditure object connects the Disbursement object to the General Accounting Unit object to show which General Accounting Unit the funds should be disbursed from. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note This object is only available if your organization uses NPSP. # Get to Know the Single Gift Entry Form Learn how the Single Gift Entry Form saves you time by letting you enter all the details of a gift on one page. - **[Enter Data in One Place with the Single Gift Entry Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Single Gift Entry form lets you enter donor information, payments, allocations, soft credits, tributes, and matching gift information on a single page. - **[Donor and Donation Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the donor and donation information sections of the Single Gift Entry form. - **[Payment Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Payment Scheduler helps you manage multiple payments for a single gift. - **[Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Allocations are used to attribute gifts and payments to specific funds. - **[Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to use soft credits in the Single Gift Entry form to associate gifts with Contacts. - **[Tribute Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to designate gift tributes in the Single Gift Entry form. - **[Matching Gift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to use the Single Gift Entry form to track matching gifts. - **[Summary of Resulting Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review which records the Single Gift Entry form creates. ## Enter Data in One Place with the Single Gift Entry Form The Single Gift Entry form lets you enter donor information, payments, allocations, soft credits, tributes, and matching gift information on a single page. All the little pieces of a gift can add up to a lot of time and data entry if you're working in out-of-the-box Salesforce. A gift split into 12 months requires 12 individual records. A gift intended for different funds requires a separate record for each fund on each payment. A gift soft-credited to all members of a household needs a record for each person credited. There’s no other way to say it: all these records take a lot of typing, a lot of clicks, and a lot of page loading. Your users have better things to do with their time. But the GEM Single Gift Entry form presents all of these little pieces in a single form and automates data entry where it can. You can easily enter payments, allocations, soft credits, tribute information, matching gift information, and other donation information on one page, without all the clicking around to separate Opportunity records, Payment records, and so on. Payment splits are automatically calculated and scheduled, while giving you the chance to make adjustments before creation. You can even customize the form by adding your own fields. Let's look at an example of entering a typical pledge. Say we’ve just received a pledge from alumna Selina Rodriguez to pay $200 a month for six months, and Selina wants her donation handled in certain ways. The Single Gift Entry form is a one-stop location to record everything. We access it by clicking the Single Gift Entry tab, in the Gift Entry Manager app. ## Donor and Donation Information Learn about the donor and donation information sections of the Single Gift Entry form. ![The Donor Information and Donation Information sections of the Single Gift Entry form, with donor Selina Rodriguez specified as the Primary Contact.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-single-gift-entry-form.png) Notice that the fields in the top two sections sound a lot like Opportunity fields. When you create a gift in the Single Gift Entry form, GEM creates an Opportunity with the Donation record type. If the Primary Contact has an unpaid Payment or an open Opportunity with no unpaid Payments: - We're notified that the donor already has pending donations so that we don’t end up with duplicate donations. - We can click the notification to view pending donations. - If one of the displayed Opportunities is a match, we can either click **Update this Opportunity** or **Apply New Payment**. Both links load the selected Opportunity's data into the Single Gift Entry form and bring you back to the form so you can add and modify Payments. The only difference is that the Apply New Payment link takes you directly to the Payment Scheduler. ![A section of the Review Donations page, showing the Opportunity record Selina Rodriguez Donation 7/16/2019 as one potential duplicate gift Opportunity. Below the Opportunity details are options to either Update this Opportunity or Apply New Payment.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-existing-donations.png) - If none of the displayed Opportunities match the gift, we click the option to create a new Opportunity. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If we select an existing Opportunity and realize upon reviewing its data that it's not the right match, we can return to the Review Donations page (via the Update your selection link under Donor Information) and change our selection or create a new Opportunity. We can change the Opportunity selection as long as we haven't saved our edits in the Single Gift Entry form. ## Payment Scheduler Learn how Payment Scheduler helps you manage multiple payments for a single gift. The Payment Scheduler helps us split a gift into multiple payments pledged to arrive on different dates. At the end of the process, it creates a related Payment record for each payment we schedule. After we enter an amount, the number of pledged payments, and their frequency, we click **Clear and Calculate New Payments** to display each individual payment. We can then manually edit each payment line without disrupting the others. ![The Payment Scheduler section of the Single Gift Entry form, with 6 payments scheduled and a callout on Clear and Calculate New Payments.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-payment-scheduler.png) While we're looking at Payments, let’s clear up a little language. Despite its name, a Payment record doesn’t always refer to a payment received. It can be a Payment that has been promised by the donor but not yet paid. The Paid field on a Payment indicates whether you actually have that portion of the gift in hand. The Payment Method field is special, as it can make additional fields appear based on the Payment Method chosen. For example, if Check is selected, the Check/Reference Number field appears. This logic is controlled by the Gift Entry Field Mapping setting. See [Set Up Dynamic Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_customize_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Single Gift Entry form to fit the way your org enters gifts.") for more information. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If all Payments are entered as paid, the gift Opportunity’s Stage is automatically set to Closed Won (or whatever value you set in Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid, in **NPSP Settings** | **Donations** | **Payments**). ## Allocations Learn how Allocations are used to attribute gifts and payments to specific funds. Allocations (sometimes referred to as designations) are how gifts get attributed to specific funds, using your org's General Allocation Unit (GAU) records. Each gift Opportunity and each Payment has at least one related GAU Allocation record, so that every portion of every gift has direction. ![The Allocation section of the Single Gift Entry form, with one General Accounting Unit set to the Jeong Scholarship Fund 2020 at 70%, and the other set to the Vetinari Building Fund at 30%. Showing a callout on Add New Allocation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-allocations.png) We can designate multiple allocations by clicking **Add New Allocation**. We then set the GAU for each allocation, as well as the amount or percent. When the form is saved, GEM creates one Opportunity-related GAU Allocation record for each allocation, and a Payment-related record for each combination of allocation and payment. For example, if we enter two allocations and four payments, we get a total of 10 GAU Allocation records: two are related to the Opportunity and eight are related to the Payments, with two GAU Allocation records related to each of the four Payments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If we don’t set an allocation, or if the total percentage is below 100%, GEM creates GAU Allocation records and assigns the remaining percentage to the org’s Default GAU (on both the Opportunity and the Payment levels). See [Update Default GAU](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_general_acct_units_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure General Accounting Units to designate portions of gifts to multiple funds.") for more information. The two locations for GAU Allocations serve similar purposes. The GAU Allocations on the Opportunity are used as reference for new Payments; if a new Payment is created, the percentages (or allocation ratios, if percentages aren’t set) are used to determine how to allocate the new Payment. Likewise, the GAU Allocations related to Payments (labeled on the Payment as “Payment Allocations”) are used as reference for new Ledger Entries, giving them direction when a Payment is paid. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If you edit one of your Payment Allocations, the Opportunity’s GAU Allocations then serve an additional purpose: they display the current totaled amounts and percentages of all of the Opportunity’s Payment Allocations across all Payments. See [Manage Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_manage_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review NPSP documentation about managing donation allocations and single and multiple payment donations.") for more information. ## Soft Credits Learn how to use soft credits in the Single Gift Entry form to associate gifts with Contacts. Each soft credit entered in the Single Gift Entry form creates a Partial Soft Credit record linked to the gift Opportunity and the soft-credited Contact (the person credited for a gift but not the actual donor). It also creates a Contact Role with the role of “Soft Credit,” so that this person is represented in the full context of the gift and its story. ![The Soft Credits section of the Single Gift Entry form, with Kieran Lynn entered as a full soft credit and a callout on Add New Soft Credit.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-soft-credits.png) We can add multiple soft credits to a gift by clicking **Add New Soft Credit**. We then enter the person who's being credited, the amount they're being credited for, and the role under which they're being credited. For example, if we give a soft credit to Kieran Lynn, Selina’s friend and neighbor who helped her raise the money for the gift, we select the role “Soft Credit.” If Selina wishes to include her partner as a soft credit, we'd select the role “Household Member.” ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_tip.png) Tip We can add or edit role names by editing the Role Name picklist on the Partial Soft Credit object (**Setup** | **Object Manager** | **Partial Soft Credit** | **Fields and Relationships**) and the list of Opportunity Contact Roles (**Setup** | **Contact Roles on Opportunities**). ## Tribute Information Learn how to designate gift tributes in the Single Gift Entry form. Many donors make gifts in honor or in memory of others. Though this detail doesn't affect the ledgers in any way, it's essential to capture it accurately because it's often one of the most important aspects of a gift to donors. ![The Tribute Information of the Single Gift Entry form, with the Tribute Type set to Honor, Selina Rodriguez as the Notification Recipient Contact, and Marisol Rodriguez as the Honoree Contact](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-tribute-info2.png) GEM copies any data we enter in the Tribute Information section to the data's corresponding fields on the gift Opportunity. In addition, setting an Honoree Contact creates a Contact Role on the gift Opportunity, with the selected Contact and the role of “Honoree Contact." ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note While some Tribute fields mention notifications, nothing entered here automatically sends any notifications. These fields are a foundation for building your own notification automation, using built-in or third-party email marketing or document automation tools. Talk to your Account Executive or implementation partner about your options. ## Matching Gift Learn how to use the Single Gift Entry form to track matching gifts. We can enter employer-matched gift information, either by name or by linking an existing Account. If an Opportunity already exists for the match, we can enter it here as well. Finally, we can track whether the match has been received. ![The Matching Gift section of the Single Gift Entry form, with a matching gift Opportunity from Edge Communications entered as submitted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-matching-gift.png) GEM copies any data we enter in the Matching Gift section to the data's corresponding fields on the gift Opportunity. ## Summary of Resulting Records Review which records the Single Gift Entry form creates. That’s a lot of records being created from a single form! Here’s a summary. ![A diagram showing the records generated by the Single Gift Entry form and how they relate to each other.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/gem-single-gift-diagram3.png) 1. An Opportunity record for the gift itself. 2. A GAU Allocation record, related to the Opportunity, for each allocation entered. 3. A Payment record for each payment entered. 4. A GAU Allocation record, related to the Payment, for each combination of payment and allocation. These records are found in the Payment Allocations related list. 5. A Partial Soft Credit record for each soft credit entered. 6. Opportunity Contact Role records for the donor, the honoree contact, members of the donor’s household account, and each soft credit entered. # Get Volunteers for Salesforce Whether you’re an existing Salesforce user or a new Trailblazer, learn how to get and install Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Get Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review how you can sign up for a trial version of Volunteers for Salesforce as part of Nonprofit Success Pack or another Salesforce product, or perform an upgrade. - **[Install or Upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check your existing implementation to determine whether to install or upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Post-Installation Required Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've installed the standalone version of Volunteers for Salesforce, take care of these required tasks to make Volunteers for Salesforce play nicely with Salesforce features such as picklists, profiles, and page layouts. # Get Volunteers for Salesforce Review how you can sign up for a trial version of Volunteers for Salesforce as part of Nonprofit Success Pack or another Salesforce product, or perform an upgrade. - **[New to Salesforce? Add Volunteers for Salesforce to a Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) Trial](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The best way to get started with Volunteers for Salesforce is by adding it to a trial version of the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), version 3.0 and later. We recommend this route if you don't have an existing Salesforce org. - **[Already Using Salesforce?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you already have a Salesforce org and want to install Volunteers for Salesforce in it yourself, you can proceed to the install article, and download and install the Volunteers for Salesforce standalone app. Your existing org can have NPSP already installed, but it's not required for Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Using an Older Version of Volunteers for Salesforce?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have an older version of Volunteers for Salesforce, upgrading is simple. Follow the instructions in the install article as if you were doing a first-time installation, to make sure that you complete all required tasks. Some new features require configuration, which we provide instructions for in the appropriate configuration section. ## New to Salesforce? Add Volunteers for Salesforce to a Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) Trial The best way to get started with Volunteers for Salesforce is by adding it to a trial version of the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), version 3.0 and later. We recommend this route if you don't have an existing Salesforce org. 1. Go to the [Salesforce.org trials page](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/npsp/) and sign up for a free trial of NPSP. 2. Log in to your trial org. 3. [Install Volunteers for Salesforce](https://install.salesforce.org/products/v4s) . ## Already Using Salesforce? If you already have a Salesforce org and want to install Volunteers for Salesforce in it yourself, you can proceed to the install article, and download and install the Volunteers for Salesforce standalone app. Your existing org can have NPSP already installed, but it's not required for Volunteers for Salesforce. Be sure to complete the required [pre-installation tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Check your existing implementation to determine whether to install or upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce.") before installing, and then see [Install or Upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Check your existing implementation to determine whether to install or upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce."). ## Using an Older Version of Volunteers for Salesforce? If you have an older version of Volunteers for Salesforce, upgrading is simple. Follow the instructions in the install article as if you were doing a first-time installation, to make sure that you complete all required tasks. Some new features require configuration, which we provide instructions for in the appropriate configuration section. See [Install or Upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Check your existing implementation to determine whether to install or upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce."). # Get Your Org Ready for the Student Success Chatbot Complete these tasks to set up your org to use the Student Success chatbot. - **[Before You Begin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There's a lot to set up before you can activate a chatbot. The process takes time, so plan accordingly. - **[Set Up Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To deploy the Student Success chatbot, you need an SMS number. We recommend that you use a short code, which is a 5- or 6-digit phone number suitable for high-volume messaging. In the US and Canada, a toll-free 10-digit number also works. - **[Set Up Messaging Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot needs two templated messages to send to students. One asks them to engage with the bot, and the other reminds them that they have tasks to complete. You can compose messages in a voice that matches your institution’s style, but the keywords (in CAPS) are required. - **[Set Up Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To deploy the Student Success chatbot to an Experience Cloud site such as a community or portal, configure the site for public access. - **[Enable and Configure Omni-Channel](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Omni-Channel helps you manage interactions between your students and the Student Success chatbot. Configure Omni-Channel to route SMS sessions from students to the Student Success chatbot. - **[Verify and Create a Queue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To set up Chat and ensure that students can access the Student Success chatbot, create a queue. - **[Enable and Configure Chat](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that Chat is enabled and configured in your org. - **[Create an Embedded Service Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're deploying the Student Success Chatbot to an Experience Cloud site or by using a messaging channel, create an embedded service deployment. We don't provide a default deployment. - **[Configure the Chatbot Welcome Outbound Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot uses an outbound flow to invite students to interact with the bot. Customize the flow, Student Success Chatbot: Welcome, with the details of your messaging channel. - **[Configure the Chatbot Task Reminder Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot uses an outbound flow to update students about upcoming Task deadlines. Customize the flow, Student Success Chatbot: Due Date Reminder, with the details of your messaging channel. ## Before You Begin There's a lot to set up before you can activate a chatbot. The process takes time, so plan accordingly. The Student Success chatbot is designed to be accessed via SMS. Although chatbots exist independently of the messaging channels by which they are accessed, it’s useful to have a basic Experience Cloud Site that helps you test the chatbot. Use this table to help you identify which setup tasks are required.

Task

Required for SMS?

Required for Experience Cloud Site?

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Recommended

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No
## Set Up Messaging To deploy the Student Success chatbot, you need an SMS number. We recommend that you use a short code, which is a 5- or 6-digit phone number suitable for high-volume messaging. In the US and Canada, a toll-free 10-digit number also works. See [Considerations for Text Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.messaging_text_message_considerations.htm&type=5) and [SMS Messaging Carrier Filtering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.messaging_setup_sms_carrier_filtering.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. Follow the instructions to [Set Up Messaging Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.messaging_create_channels.htm&type=5). Make sure that you set the channel as **Active**. 2. When complete, make a note of your Developer Name (API Name) and Messaging Platform Key (SMS number), which you'll need later when you configure the outbound flow and set up the chatbot channel. 3. In the Routing section, add Student Success Chatbot to the Queue. 4. For Opt-In Confirmation, add this message: Thanks for opting in! I'll continue to send you messages to help you stay on top of tasks in your Success Plans. This confirmation message is used in all SMS opt-ins in your org, including any that already exist. Make sure that the message you compose can be used in all circumstances. 5. Remove **end** from the default list of opt-out keywords. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The keywords in Messaging Channel Settings take precedence over any keywords in the bot. ## Set Up Messaging Templates The Student Success chatbot needs two templated messages to send to students. One asks them to engage with the bot, and the other reminds them that they have tasks to complete. You can compose messages in a voice that matches your institution’s style, but the keywords (in CAPS) are required. 1. Create a message to welcome students and allow them to engage with the bot. 1. In Setup, search for and select **Messaging Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Template Name, enter Student Success Chatbot: Welcome and then press Tab to autopopulate the Developer Name with Student\_Success\_Chatbot\_Welcome. Make a note of the developer name, which you’ll need later. 4. For Description, enter The message that the bot sends to a student when they're added to the Student Success chatbot recipients. 5. Enter your message: Hi {!Contact.FirstName}! :wave: I'm the Student Success bot, a digital assistant. I'm here to help you have a successful student journey. Reply with PREFERENCES to manage when I contact you or SUCCESS to update your Success Plan. 6. Select **Channels: SMS**. 7. Save your changes. 2. Create a message that reminds students that they have tasks to complete. 1. Click **New**. 2. For Template Name, enter Student Success Chatbot: Task Reminder and then press Tab to autopopulate the Developer Name with Student\_Success\_Chatbot\_Task\_Reminder. 3. For Description, enter The message that the bot sends to a student to remind them that they have tasks to complete. 4. Enter your message: Hi {!Contact.FirstName}! :wave: This is a reminder that you have tasks to complete. Reply with SUCCESS to update your Success Plan or PREFERENCES to manage when I contact you. 5. Select **Channels: SMS**. 6. Save your changes. ## Set Up Your Experience Cloud Site To deploy the Student Success chatbot to an Experience Cloud site such as a community or portal, configure the site for public access. Here's how to create a basic site by using a template. If you already have a site, just make sure that it's configured for public access. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **All Sites**. If you don't see this option, [enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_enable.htm). 2. Click **New**. 3. Select a template. We recommend that you use the Customer Service template. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name and the part of the site's URL that identifies the site. 6. Click **Create**. Make sure that you consult with your support staff and other strategic leaders in your institution as you build out your Student Success chatbot site. For a comprehensive guide to the many aspects of Experience Cloud, see [Set Up and Manage Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_overview.htm&type=5). Now make sure that the site is available to your students. 1. To open Experience Builder, from the site's Workspace, click **Builder**. 2. To open the site's Settings page, click ![Gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_experience_builder_settings_icon.png). 3. On the General tab, select **Public can access this site**. When you're ready, click **Publish** so that your site is ready for the chatbot. ## Enable and Configure Omni-Channel Omni-Channel helps you manage interactions between your students and the Student Success chatbot. Configure Omni-Channel to route SMS sessions from students to the Student Success chatbot. 1. Enable Omni-Channel (if you haven't already). 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Omni-Channel Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Omni-Channel**. 3. Save your changes. 2. Verify or create the Student Success chatbot routing configuration. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Routing Configurations**. 2. Click the default **Student Success Chatbot** configuration and verify these details. If you don't have this configuration, create it. - Routing Configuration Name: Student Success Chatbot - Developer Name: Student\_Success\_Chatbot - Routing Priority: 1 - Routing Model: Most Available - Units of Capacity: 1.00 3. Save your changes. ## Verify and Create a Queue To set up Chat and ensure that students can access the Student Success chatbot, create a queue. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Queues**. 2. Click the default **Student Success Chatbot** queue and verify these details. If you don't have this queue, create it. - Label: Student Success Chatbot - Queue Name: Student\_Success\_Chatbot - Supported Objects: Messaging User, Chat Session, Chat Transcript, and Messaging Session - Routing Configuration: Student Success Chatbot - Queue Members: Leave blank if using the Basic Chatbot User, or add your custom User. 3. Save your changes. ## Enable and Configure Chat Make sure that Chat is enabled and configured in your org. 1. Enable Chat. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Chat Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Chat**. 3. Save your changes. 2. Create a new chat button. We don't provide a default button. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Chat Buttons & Invitations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Fill out these details. - Type: Chat Button - Name: Student Success Chatbot - Developer Name: Student\_Success\_Chatbot - Routing Type: Omni-Channel - Queue: Student Success Chatbot 4. Save your changes. 3. Verify or create a Student Success Agent chat deployment. 1. From Setup, in the Chat section, search for and then select **Deployments**. 2. Click the default **Chat Setup Flow** deployment and verify these details. If you don't have this deployment, create it. - Chat Deployment Name: Chat Setup Flow - Developer Name: live\_agent\_setup\_flow - Chat Window Title: Live Chat 3. Save your changes. ## Create an Embedded Service Deployment If you're deploying the Student Success Chatbot to an Experience Cloud site or by using a messaging channel, create an embedded service deployment. We don't provide a default deployment. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Embedded Service Deployments**. 2. Click **New Deployment**. 3. Choose a conversation type by selecting **Embedded Chat**, and then click **Next**. 4. Fill out these details. - Embedded Service Deployment Name: Student Success Chatbot - API Name: Student\_Success\_Chatbot - Site Endpoint: Select your Experience Cloud site. 5. Save your changes. 6. On the Student Success Chatbot page, under Chat Settings, click **Start**. 7. Verify these details. - Chat Deployment is set to the Chat Setup Flow. - Chat Button is set to the Student Success Chatbot. 8. Save your changes. 9. Switch the **Pre-Chat page** setting to inactive. 10. In the Offline support section, a warning message about Guest Access to the Support API appears. To remove this warning message, click **Enable on “Your\_Experience\_Cloud\_Site”**. ## Configure the Chatbot Welcome Outbound Flow The Student Success chatbot uses an outbound flow to invite students to interact with the bot. Customize the flow, Student Success Chatbot: Welcome, with the details of your messaging channel. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Student Success Chatbot: Welcome**. The flow has a gap that we will close with an action. 3. From Toolbox, select the **Elements** tab, and then add an Action to the canvas. 4. Select the Messaging category, and then search for and select the **Messaging Notification** action. 5. Complete these fields. Label Enter Welcome, and then press Tab to autopopulate the API Name. Description Enter a description such as Sends an SMS to students to invite them to engage with the Student Success Chatbot. Messaging Channel Unique Name The developer name that’s associated with the messaging channel, such as Text\_US\_18001231234. If you didn't make a note of the Developer Name when you set up the messaging channel, in Setup, search for and select **Messaging Settings**. In Channels, click the action menu for the number that you're using, select **Edit**, and then look for the Developer Name. Messaging Template Unique Name The developer name that’s associated with the messaging template. Enter Student\_Success\_Chatbot\_Welcome. Context Record ID A record that provides context for the merge fields. Select **Include**, and then enter {!Get\_Contact.Id}. ConversationBroadcast Record ID Don't include. Recipient Phone Number The destination phone number for the message. Select **Include**, and then enter {!Get\_Contact.MobilePhone}. Recipient Record ID The ID of a MessagingEndUser or record with a phone number. Select **Include**, and then enter {!Get\_Contact.Id}. Triggered Outbound Type Don't include. 6. Click **Done**. 7. Create a connection from the Update Records node to the Welcome Action node. 8. Create a connection from the Welcome Action node to the Assignment node. ![The Welcome Action node called out between the Update Records and Assignment nodes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_chatbot_flow_welcome.png) 9. Click **Save As**, and then select **A New Version**. 10. Keep the name, and then save and activate the new version of the flow. ## Configure the Chatbot Task Reminder Flow The Student Success chatbot uses an outbound flow to update students about upcoming Task deadlines. Customize the flow, Student Success Chatbot: Due Date Reminder, with the details of your messaging channel. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Student Success Chatbot: Due Date Reminder**. Add your send reminder text to the flow. 3. From Toolbox, select the **Elements** tab, and then add an Action to the canvas. 4. Select the Messaging category, and then search for and select the **Messaging Notification** action. 5. Complete these fields. Label Enter Send Text Reminder to Contact, and then press Tab to autopopulate the API Name. Description Enter a description such as Sends an SMS to remind the student that they have upcoming Tasks, and invites the student to provide updates. Messaging Channel Unique Name The developer name that’s associated with the messaging channel, such as Text\_US\_18001231234. If you didn't make a note of the Developer Name when you set up the messaging channel, in Setup, search for and select **Messaging Settings**. In Channels, click the action menu for the number that you're using, select **Edit**, and then look for the Developer Name. Messaging Template Unique Name The developer name that’s associated with the messaging template. Enter Student\_Success\_Chatbot\_Task\_Reminder. Context Record ID A record that provides context for the merge fields. Select **Include**, and then enter {!Get\_Contact\_to\_Message.Id}. ConversationBroadcast Record ID Don't include. Recipient Phone Number The destination phone number for the message. Select **Include**, and then enter {!Loop\_Through\_Unique\_Contacts}. Recipient Record ID The ID of a MessagingEndUser or record with a phone number. Select **Include**, and then enter {!Get\_Contact.Id}. Triggered Outbound Type Don't include. 6. Click **Done**. 7. Create a connection from the Get Contact to Message node to the Welcome Action node. 8. Create a connection from the Send Text Reminder Action node to the Loop Through Unique Contacts node. ![The task flow connections and nodes with a callout on the Send Text Reminder to Contact action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_chatbot_flow_task.png) 9. In the Start node, in the first Flow Starts section, click **Edit**. You can see here that the flow is scheduled to run every day at 5:30 PM. This is when students will be reminded about their upcoming Tasks. 10. If desired, change the time when the flow runs. 11. Click **Save As**, and then select **A New Version**. 12. Keep the name, and then save and activate the new version of the flow. Ignore the warning about the Get Tasks element. # Get Your Org Up to Speed Apply certain changes manually to update your org. GEM is updated frequently but certain types of configuration can’t be updated in existing orgs. If your version of GEM predates the release of these features and you want to use them, apply these changes manually. | Category | Configuration | Version | Sandbox Release Date | Production Release Date | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Data Import | [Update the GEM Data Import Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_org_up_to_speed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add new fields from GAU Allocations and Opportunity Contact Roles to the GEM Gift Layout") | GEM 1.9 | Oct 16, 2019 | Oct 22, 2019 | - **[Update the GEM Data Import Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_org_up_to_speed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add new fields from GAU Allocations and Opportunity Contact Roles to the GEM Gift Layout ## Update the GEM Data Import Layout Add new fields from GAU Allocations and Opportunity Contact Roles to the GEM Gift Layout If you enable Advanced Mapping for Gift Entry, several new fields for GAU Allocations and Opportunity Contact Roles (aka Soft Credits) are available out of the box. To ensure these additional fields are available in these tools, add them to the GEM Gift Layout on the NPSP Data Import object. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click NPSP Data Import. 4. Click **Page Layouts**, then click **NPSP Data Import Layout**. 5. You may want to create new sections on the page layout for: - GAU Allocation Information - Opportunity Contact Role Information 6. Drag these fields to the appropriate sections of the page layout. - GAU Allocation 1: Amount - GAU Allocation 1: GAU - GAU Allocation 1: Imported - GAU Allocation 1: Import Status - GAU Allocation 1: Percent - GAU Allocation 2: Amount - GAU Allocation 2: GAU - GAU Allocation 2: Imported - GAU Allocation 2: Import Status - GAU Allocation 2: Percent - Opportunity Contact Role 1: Imported - Opportunity Contact Role 1: Import Status - Opportunity Contact Role 1: Role - Opportunity Contact Role 2: Imported - Opportunity Contact Role 2: Import Status - Opportunity Contact Role 2: Role # Getting Started: Salesforce Fundamentals for Education Get acquainted with Salesforce terminology, your product(s), and the basics of using Salesforce for Higher Education. - **[Get Started: Salesforce Fundamentals for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are so many ways to learn about Salesforce. How you approach it depends on your learning style and preferences. Want to watch a live webinar and ask questions to Salesforce experts? Check out our webinar series. Want to learn online on your own time? Try Trailhead. Want to read through detailed documentation, get one-on-one assistance, or talk to your peers? We've got you covered on all fronts! - **[Webinars](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sign up for webinars to learn about Salesforce for Education. - **[How Salesforce Organizes your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce organizes your data into objects and records. Think of an object as a tab on a spreadsheet and a record like a single row of data. - **[Translating the Salesforce Standard Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Salesforce standard objects support your institution’s data model. - **[Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Data Architecture (EDA) is an "App" that sits on top of your Enterprise Edition and provides the basic foundation for a Connected Campus. Built in collaboration with Salesforce.org partners and customers, EDA provides out-of-the-box functionality to organize your data in Salesforce. It helps institutions of all sizes connect with students, alumni, parents, and faculty in all kinds of ways. EDA uses standard Salesforce objects such as accounts and contacts and custom objects such as relationships and affiliations to track all kinds of connections. These tracked and organized connections make it simple to find the information you need in Salesforce. - **[EDA Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Education Data Architecture (EDA) Account model, the standard Salesforce Account object acts as a kind of container account — referred to as the “Administrative Account” — with a single contact (often a student) associated with it. The relationship between the Account and Contact is 1-to-1. That is, for each contact you create in EDA, you also have a unique Administrative Account. As part of the EDA Account Model, EDA offers two important custom objects that work in conjunction with your contacts: Relationships, which help you track relationships between contacts Affiliations, which help you track affiliations between contacts and other accounts. - **[Understanding Salesforce Editions and Products](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Salesforce edition is a selected set of features and functionalities that also specifies the amount of customization possible, as well as the data and file storage capacity, and the API access available. - **[Get Oriented in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the resources to familiarize yourself with Salesforce for Education navigation. - **[Your Support Team](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every Salesforce Foundation customer has access to a Sales Cloud Standard Success Plan which includes basic training to get you started. You also get access to community-based best practices and web-based support to help solve technical issues. If you are interested in enhanced support, resources, and training to drive adoption, then you may purchase a Premier Success. If you are interested in pricing for Premier Success, please reach out to us via the Contact Me form. - **[Quicklinks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out resources available to you to help you get started with Customer Relationship Management (CRM). - **[Understand Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out resources to learn about Salesforce products for education. - **[Get Oriented](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the available resources to familiarize yourself with Salesforce for Education navigation. - **[Get Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the available resources to get help from peers or Salesforce experts. ## Get Started: Salesforce Fundamentals for Education There are so many ways to learn about Salesforce. How you approach it depends on your learning style and preferences. Want to watch a live webinar and ask questions to Salesforce experts? Check out our webinar series. Want to learn online on your own time? Try Trailhead. Want to read through detailed documentation, get one-on-one assistance, or talk to your peers? We've got you covered on all fronts! We have an amazing collection of resources below designed to help you get started & be successful with Salesforce. So keep on reading...and have fun learning! ## Webinars Sign up for webinars to learn about Salesforce for Education. - **[Get Started Webinar Series for Higher Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** CRM stands for "Customer Relationship Management." CRM technology allows you to manage relationships with your constituents (including students, alumni, staff, parents, employers, and more) and track data related to all of your interactions with those constituents. It also helps teams collaborate, both internally and externally, gather insights from social media, track important metrics, and communicate via email, phone, social, and other channels. ### Get Started Webinar Series for Higher Education CRM stands for "Customer Relationship Management." CRM technology allows you to manage relationships with your constituents (including students, alumni, staff, parents, employers, and more) and track data related to all of your interactions with those constituents. It also helps teams collaborate, both internally and externally, gather insights from social media, track important metrics, and communicate via email, phone, social, and other channels. A CRM like Salesforce allows an educational institution to have visibility into every aspect of its relationship with a student – from financial aid information to courses and grade data. And as opposed to this information being locked away in various systems scattered across campus --- it’s all in one place. So at any point in time, staff and faculty have a holistic snapshot of a student’s standing with the school and can use that information to engage in personalized and powerful ways. CRM is not new to education. Many institutions have adopted departmental CRM solutions to aid in their recruiting and advancement efforts. However, many of these solutions are not integrated with one another and/or with other institution-wide systems, making it more difficult to track and report on the institution's efforts. Increasingly, institutions are moving toward a centralized CRM solution to fulfill the diverse needs of a complex academic community. Check out this video: [Power the Future-Ready Institution](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jehyrq1z5zi) Salesforce is a single place to create, view and update your constituent data from anywhere on any device to drive lasting engagement with your customers. You don't have to install software to access Salesforce. You just need an internet connection and a web browser (or mobile App). Of course, building a CRM system isn't just about choosing the right technology, but also having the right business plan in place for a successful implementation. Check out [The Ultimate Guide to Campus-Wide CRM](https://org62.my.salesforce.com/sfc/p/#000000000062/a/0m000000aari/e1xr4zedwnp6whmsyhec7ymlol74643.mj5tuynxjrw) and the [Planning for Success Webinar](https://youtu.be/yff4hamtbey) for more information. ## How Salesforce Organizes your Data Salesforce organizes your data into objects and records. Think of an object as a tab on a spreadsheet and a record like a single row of data. Salesforce comes with standard objects already set up and ready for use. Salesforce was originally designed as a "Business-to-Business" (B2B) application to help companies improve their sales processes and maximize their sales. In the traditional B2B scenario, every company keeps track of their accounts (the other companies they are selling to). Each account has people associated with it (contacts), as well as other things like "deals" (opportunities), cases, tasks, and the like. How all these things relate to and interact with each other in Salesforce is known as an account model. With Salesforce, the account model is flexible and in the education world, of course, we keep track of things a bit differently. ![Salesforce data compared to spreadsheet](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/data_organization.png) ## Translating the Salesforce Standard Objects Learn how Salesforce standard objects support your institution’s data model. - **[Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** "Prospects" | The Leads object can be used to store data about any individual who might have an interest in your institution, but who have not yet become engaged (in whatever way you define): student prospects, donor prospects, vendor prospects, etc. - **[Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** "Individuals" | The Contacts object can be used to store information about any individual who interacts with your university including students, alumni, parents, staff, athletic ticket holders, and other constituents. - **[Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In education, accounts can act as a container account for a single student and all their interactions with your school or they can be used to relate groups of Contacts from companies, departments, athletic teams or other institutions. In Salesforce, every contact must be connected to an account. - **[Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** "Transactions" | The Opportunity object can be used to manage financial transactions between contacts and accounts and your organization. This could include tuition or other payments, donations, grants, ticket and merchandise sales and lots more. - **[Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** "Calls-to-Action" | The Campaigns object can be used to track any tactic where you are asking a contact for a response. Some common examples might include student recruitment events, fundraising campaigns, class enrollments, etc. ### Leads "Prospects" | The Leads object can be used to store data about any individual who might have an interest in your institution, but who have not yet become engaged (in whatever way you define): student prospects, donor prospects, vendor prospects, etc. ### Contacts "Individuals" | The Contacts object can be used to store information about any individual who interacts with your university including students, alumni, parents, staff, athletic ticket holders, and other constituents. ### Accounts In education, accounts can act as a container account for a single student and all their interactions with your school or they can be used to relate groups of Contacts from companies, departments, athletic teams or other institutions. In Salesforce, every contact must be connected to an account. ### Opportunities "Transactions" | The Opportunity object can be used to manage financial transactions between contacts and accounts and your organization. This could include tuition or other payments, donations, grants, ticket and merchandise sales and lots more. ### Campaigns "Calls-to-Action" | The Campaigns object can be used to track any tactic where you are asking a contact for a response. Some common examples might include student recruitment events, fundraising campaigns, class enrollments, etc. ## Education Data Architecture Education Data Architecture (EDA) is an "App" that sits on top of your Enterprise Edition and provides the basic foundation for a Connected Campus. Built in collaboration with Salesforce.org partners and customers, EDA provides out-of-the-box functionality to organize your data in Salesforce. It helps institutions of all sizes connect with students, alumni, parents, and faculty in all kinds of ways. EDA uses standard Salesforce objects such as accounts and contacts and custom objects such as relationships and affiliations to track all kinds of connections. These tracked and organized connections make it simple to find the information you need in Salesforce. EDA functionality is adapted even further to meet the needs of K-12 constituents with the K-12 Architecture Kit. Developed specifically to connect schools and districts to people, processes and data, the K-12 kit helps manage students holistically and collaboratively. Through school-specific page layouts and additional custom objects such as Attendance, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response, the K-12 Architecture Kit is designed to enhance student success and family engagement. Learn more about [Education Data Architecture (EDA)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) and read up on the [K-12 Architecture Kit](https://www.salesforce.org/k-12-education/salesforce-k-12-education-e-book/?utm_source=blog&utm_medium=website&utm_campaign=dreamforce-2018) . ## EDA Account Model In the Education Data Architecture (EDA) Account model, the standard Salesforce Account object acts as a kind of container account — referred to as the “Administrative Account” — with a single contact (often a student) associated with it. The relationship between the Account and Contact is 1-to-1. That is, for each contact you create in EDA, you also have a unique Administrative Account. As part of the EDA Account Model, EDA offers two important custom objects that work in conjunction with your contacts: Relationships, which help you track relationships between contacts Affiliations, which help you track affiliations between contacts and other accounts. Learn more about [Education Data Architecture (EDA)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm). ![EDA contact and account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/contact_relationships.png) ## Understanding Salesforce Editions and Products A Salesforce edition is a selected set of features and functionalities that also specifies the amount of customization possible, as well as the data and file storage capacity, and the API access available. With the [Power of Us](https://www.salesforce.org/nonprofit/power-of-us/) license donation program, Salesforce.org customers receive 10 [Sales Cloud Lightning and Service Cloud Lightning Enterprise Edition](https://c1.sfdcstatic.com/content/dam/web/en_us/www/documents/datasheets/ds_salescloud_edcompare.pdf) licenses at no cost. A license is attached to a single user, so with 10 licenses, you could have 10 users logged on to your Salesforce org at one time. If you need additional licenses or products, you can purchase them at a deep discount from Salesforce.org. In addition to your 10 EE licenses, you may have also chosen an App that will help you manage the student lifecycle. On the Salesforce.org website, you can choose between three trials - the [standard Enterprise Edition](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/nonprofit-ee/), [the Nonprofit Starter Pack](https://www.salesforce.org/nonprofit/get-started/) or the [Education Data Architecture](https://www.salesforce.org/highered_product/higher-ed-editions-pricing/) (EDA). Knowing what edition and what app you are using will be vital information for you to know as you review Salesforce documentation, log a tech support ticket, or ask for help from the community. ## Get Oriented in Salesforce Check out the resources to familiarize yourself with Salesforce for Education navigation. - **[Navigating Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access the Trailhead module to learn about Salesforce basics. - **[Trailhead: Free, Interactive Learning Paths for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Trailhead is a free, interactive learning path through the basic building blocks of the Salesforce Platform. Test your knowledge of the platform while earning points and badges to celebrate your achievements. ### Navigating Salesforce Access the Trailhead module to learn about Salesforce basics. See [Salesforce User Basics](https://developer.salesforce.com/trailhead/module/lex_salesforce_basics). ### Trailhead: Free, Interactive Learning Paths for Salesforce Trailhead is a free, interactive learning path through the basic building blocks of the Salesforce Platform. Test your knowledge of the platform while earning points and badges to celebrate your achievements. Start with the [CRM Essentials](https://developer.salesforce.com/trailhead/trail/getting_started_crm_basics) trail. ## Your Support Team Every Salesforce Foundation customer has access to a Sales Cloud Standard Success Plan which includes basic training to get you started. You also get access to community-based best practices and web-based support to help solve technical issues. If you are interested in enhanced support, resources, and training to drive adoption, then you may purchase a Premier Success. If you are interested in pricing for Premier Success, please reach out to us via the Contact Me form. See [Sales Cloud Standard Success Plan](https://www.salesforce.com/services-training/customer-support/overview/sales-cloud.jsp) and [Contact Me](https://www.salesforce.org/contact-us/). ## Quicklinks Check out resources available to you to help you get started with Customer Relationship Management (CRM). - **[What is CRM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about Customer Relationship Management (CRM) and cloud computing. ### What is CRM Learn about Customer Relationship Management (CRM) and cloud computing. - Trailhead Trail: [CRM Essentials](https://developer.salesforce.com/trailhead/trail/getting_started_crm_basics) - [What is Cloud Computing?](https://www.salesforce.com/cloudcomputing/) ## Understand Your Product Check out resources to learn about Salesforce products for education. - [Salesforce Edition Comparison](https://www.salesforce.org/highered_product/higher-ed-editions-pricing/) - [EDA Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm) ## Get Oriented Check out the available resources to familiarize yourself with Salesforce for Education navigation. - [Getting Started: Navigating Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/httrainingmodulesdetail?courseid=a1s30000000gjl0eai) - Trailhead Trail: [Salesforce User Basics](https://developer.salesforce.com/trailhead/module/lex_salesforce_basics) ## Get Help Check out the available resources to get help from peers or Salesforce experts. - **[Community](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access community resources to connect with other Salesforce for Education enthusiasts and learn from their experiences. - **[Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the Sales Cloud Standard Success Plan for your educational institution, technical support access, and training options. - **[Consulting Partners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_getting_started_salesforce_fundamentals_for_higher_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find a partner to help you implement Salesforce for your educational institution. ### Community Access community resources to connect with other Salesforce for Education enthusiasts and learn from their experiences. - Log into the Trailblazer Community - Sector: [Higher Ed Chatter Group](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khj3sae) - [EDA Chatter Group](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khi4sae) ### Salesforce Learn about the Sales Cloud Standard Success Plan for your educational institution, technical support access, and training options. - Your [Sales Cloud Standard Success Plan](https://www.salesforce.com/services-training/customer-support/overview/sales-cloud.jsp) - [How to Create a Case on Salesforce Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000393090&type=1) - [Training Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_salesforce_training_certification_options.htm) ### Consulting Partners Find a partner to help you implement Salesforce for your educational institution. - [Find a Partner](https://www.salesforce.org/highered/find-partner/) - [Contact](https://www.salesforce.org/contact-us/) # Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Education Quickly and easily provide acknowledgments and tax receipts to your donors. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To use Fundraising features:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

DocGen User permission set
Thank your donors for their contributions, comply with tax laws, and foster positive relationships with your constituents by providing timely, accurate and personalized gift acknowledgments. Encourage future donor support and constituent engagement when you easily create, store, share, and print tax receipts and gift acknowledgments. ## How Acknowledgment Generation Works Acknowledgment generation uses templates and Salesforce DocGen to create personalized and accurate receipts. Acknowledgment generation is powered by Salesforce DocGen and is formatted with templates that you customize for your organization. Select the filter criteria to include donations for when you conduct a batch generation of acknowledgments. When you generate single tax receipts, select the status and date range of the transaction. You can also update the acknowledgment status of the transaction record by generating the acknowledgment. ## Generate a Single Donation Receipt Create single, personalized donation receipts from the Account pages in the Fundraising Strategy or Donor Engagement apps. 1. From the Fundraising Strategy or Donor Engagement apps, go to **Accounts**. 2. Open the account and click **Generate Document**. 3. Enter a name for the document generation job. For example: Q1 Smith Receipt. The date and time is automatically appended to the file name. 4. In the **Document Template** field, select the template that you want to use for the acknowledgment. To see what the template that you selected looks like, click **Preview**. 5. Select the **Start Date** and **End Date** for the transaction date range. You must select at least one date. 6. If you want to include transaction status as a filter type, from the **Transaction Status** list, select the transaction status that you want to use as a filter. 7. To include acknowledgment status as a filter, from the Acknowledgment Status list, select the status of the acknowledgment. The number of transactions that match the criteria appears below the Transaction Status field. 8. To update the acknowledgment status of the Gift Transaction records, select **Update the acknowledgment status of these gift transactions**. 9. From the Acknowledgment Status list, select the status that you want to apply to this acknowledged transaction record. 10. Generate the receipt. The generation job begins. When it's complete, the Document Generation Query Result record opens. 11. From the Document Generation Query Result record, click the **Related** tab. The PDF file of your acknowledgment is available under Files. ## Generate a Batch of Gift Acknowledgments Quickly and easily create a batch of personalized gift acknowledgments from the Fundraising Operations app Home page. 1. From the Fundraising Operations app Home page, click **Generate Document Batch**. 2. Enter a name for the batch. For example: Q1 Donor Tax Receipts. The date and time is automatically appended to this file name. 3. In the Document Template field, search for and select the template that you want to apply to this batch. To see what the template that you selected looks like, click **Preview**. 4. To set the range for transactions that are included in this batch, select a start and end date. 5. Further filter the transactions to include by choosing an object, field, operator, and by entering a value. You can select any object that Gift Transaction has a look up to, as well as Gift Designation. 6. To further filter the number of transactions included in the batch, click **Add Filter** and repeat step 5. There's no limit on the number of rows of filter criteria that you can add. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To exclude transactions that are already acknowledged, add this criteria: Gift Transaction Acknowledgment Status Not equals Sent. 7. After you select the criteria for the gift transactions to include, click **Refresh** or **Update Matches** in the info bar to see an updated count of transactions included in the batch. 8. To automatically update the acknowledgment status on the transactions included in the batch, select **Update the Acknowledgment Status of these Gift Transactions**. 9. From the Acknowledgment Status list, select the status to apply to the transactions acknowledged in the batch. If you update the acknowledgment status, the gift transactions will be updated after the DocGen job is completed. 10. To automatically update the tax receipt status of the transactions included in the batch, click **Update the tax receipt status of these gift transactions**. 11. From the Tax Receipt Status list, select the status to apply to the transactions in the batch. 12. To include data in the acknowledgment from a Gift Transaction custom field, select **Include data from a Gift Transaction custom field**. Select this checkbox if you have a custom tax-related field that you want to include in the acknowledgment. 13. From the Gift Transaction Field list, select the custom field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you generate the batch, make sure that this custom field is included in the template. 14. To get a report of all of the donors (and their details) included in this batch, click **Generate a report with all donors included in this batch**. Generating this report for the first time creates the Fundraising Acknowledged Donors custom report type which you can modify in Settings. Find this report in the Report Folder field under the Details tab on the Document Generation Query Result page. Use the report to print mailing addresses for your acknowledgment letters. 15. Generate the acknowledgment batch. The generation job begins. When it's complete, the Document Generation Query Result record opens. 16. From the Document Generation Query Result page, click the **Related** tab. The PDF file of your batch of donor acknowledgments is available under Files. Each donor acknowledgment is on a separate page of the PDF file. ## Recent Gift Acknowledgment Batches To review the results of all batches run in the past 7 days, open the Recent Batches tab. The Recent Batches tab on the Generate Gift Acknowledgments page shows a table of all of the batches run during the past 7 days. It's a one-stop shop for auditing a week's worth of acknowledgment batches. The table includes: - Status of each batch job - Run date of each batch job - Links to the DocGenerationQueryResult object - Links to the document template that was used for each job ## Data Types Excluded From Filter Criteria For Batch Acknowledgment Generation Review the list of data types that you can't include in the criteria for a batch of acknowledgments. You can't use these data types as filter criteria for batch acknowledgment generation. - TextArea - URL - Percent - MultiPicklist - MasterRecord - Location - JunctionIdList - EncryptedString - DataCategoryGroupPreference - Calculated - AnyType - Address SEE ALSO: [Set Up Gift Acknowledgments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments_and_tax_receipts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your users quickly and easily create gift acknowledgments and tax receipts for donors. You can create these individually or in batches.") # Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Nonprofit Quickly and easily provide acknowledgments and tax receipts to your donors. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To use Fundraising features:

FundraisingAccess permission set

AND

DocGen User permission set
Thank your donors for their contributions, comply with tax laws, and foster positive relationships with your constituents by providing timely, accurate and personalized gift acknowledgments. Encourage future donor support and constituent engagement when you easily create, store, share, and print tax receipts and gift acknowledgments. ## How Acknowledgment Generation Works Acknowledgment generation uses templates and Salesforce DocGen to create personalized and accurate receipts. Acknowledgment generation is powered by Salesforce DocGen and is formatted with templates that you customize for your organization. Select the filter criteria to include donations for when you conduct a batch generation of acknowledgments. When you generate single tax receipts, select the status and date range of the transaction. You can also update the acknowledgment status of the transaction record by generating the acknowledgment. ## Generate a Single Donation Receipt Create single, personalized donation receipts from the Account pages in the Fundraising Strategy or Donor Engagement apps. 1. From the Fundraising Strategy or Donor Engagement apps, go to **Accounts**. 2. Open the account and click **Generate Document**. 3. Enter a name for the document generation job. For example: Q1 Smith Receipt. The date and time is automatically appended to the file name. 4. In the **Document Template** field, select the template that you want to use for the acknowledgment. To see what the template that you selected looks like, click **Preview**. 5. Select the **Start Date** and **End Date** for the transaction date range. You must select at least one date. 6. If you want to include transaction status as a filter type, from the **Transaction Status** list, select the transaction status that you want to use as a filter. 7. To include acknowledgment status as a filter, from the Acknowledgment Status list, select the status of the acknowledgment. The number of transactions that match the criteria appears below the Transaction Status field. 8. To update the acknowledgment status of the Gift Transaction records, select **Update the acknowledgment status of these gift transactions**. 9. From the Acknowledgment Status list, select the status that you want to apply to this acknowledged transaction record. 10. Generate the receipt. The generation job begins. When it's complete, the Document Generation Query Result record opens. 11. From the Document Generation Query Result record, click the **Related** tab. The PDF file of your acknowledgment is available under Files. ## Generate a Batch of Gift Acknowledgments Quickly and easily create a batch of personalized gift acknowledgments from the Fundraising Operations app Home page. 1. From the Fundraising Operations app Home page, click **Generate Document Batch**. 2. Enter a name for the batch. For example: Q1 Donor Tax Receipts. The date and time is automatically appended to this file name. 3. In the Document Template field, search for and select the template that you want to apply to this batch. To see what the template that you selected looks like, click **Preview**. 4. To set the range for transactions that are included in this batch, select a start and end date. 5. Further filter the transactions to include by choosing an object, field, operator, and by entering a value. You can select any object that Gift Transaction has a look up to, as well as Gift Designation. 6. To further filter the number of transactions included in the batch, click **Add Filter** and repeat step 5. There's no limit on the number of rows of filter criteria that you can add. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To exclude transactions that are already acknowledged, add this criteria: Gift Transaction Acknowledgment Status Not equals Sent. 7. After you select the criteria for the gift transactions to include, click **Refresh** or **Update Matches** in the info bar to see an updated count of transactions included in the batch. 8. To automatically update the acknowledgment status on the transactions included in the batch, select **Update the Acknowledgment Status of these Gift Transactions**. 9. From the Acknowledgment Status list, select the status to apply to the transactions acknowledged in the batch. If you update the acknowledgment status, the gift transactions will be updated after the DocGen job is completed. 10. To automatically update the tax receipt status of the transactions included in the batch, click **Update the tax receipt status of these gift transactions**. 11. From the Tax Receipt Status list, select the status to apply to the transactions in the batch. 12. To include data in the acknowledgment from a Gift Transaction custom field, select **Include data from a Gift Transaction custom field**. Select this checkbox if you have a custom tax-related field that you want to include in the acknowledgment. 13. From the Gift Transaction Field list, select the custom field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you generate the batch, make sure that this custom field is included in the template. 14. To get a report of all of the donors (and their details) included in this batch, click **Generate a report with all donors included in this batch**. Generating this report for the first time creates the Fundraising Acknowledged Donors custom report type which you can modify in Settings. Find this report in the Report Folder field under the Details tab on the Document Generation Query Result page. Use the report to print mailing addresses for your acknowledgment letters. 15. Generate the acknowledgment batch. The generation job begins. When it's complete, the Document Generation Query Result record opens. 16. From the Document Generation Query Result page, click the **Related** tab. The PDF file of your batch of donor acknowledgments is available under Files. Each donor acknowledgment is on a separate page of the PDF file. ## Recent Gift Acknowledgment Batches To review the results of all batches run in the past 7 days, open the Recent Batches tab. The Recent Batches tab on the Generate Gift Acknowledgments page shows a table of all of the batches run during the past 7 days. It's a one-stop shop for auditing a week's worth of acknowledgment batches. The table includes: - Status of each batch job - Run date of each batch job - Links to the DocGenerationQueryResult object - Links to the document template that was used for each job ## Data Types Excluded From Filter Criteria For Batch Acknowledgment Generation Review the list of data types that you can't include in the criteria for a batch of acknowledgments. You can't use these data types as filter criteria for batch acknowledgment generation. - TextArea - URL - Percent - MultiPicklist - MasterRecord - Location - JunctionIdList - EncryptedString - DataCategoryGroupPreference - Calculated - AnyType - Address SEE ALSO: [Set Up Gift Acknowledgments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments_and_tax_receipts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your users quickly and easily create gift acknowledgments and tax receipts for donors. You can create these individually or in batches.") # Gift Commitment and Transaction Categories in Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit In Fundraising Intelligence, categorizing gift transactions and donors is essential for effective fundraising analysis. Gift transactions and donors are classified into three categories based on their relationship to other records in the Nonprofit Cloud data model.
When the Gift Transaction is Associated to Transaction Type Assigned
Gift Commitment Opportunity Campaign —
Yes Yes No Major Donor
Yes No No Mass Market
Yes Yes Yes Major Donor and Mass Market
Yes No Yes Mass Market
No No Yes Mass Market
No No No Mass Market
The table summarizes how gift transactions are classified across the transaction categories. This categorization is used to calculate key metrics presented in fundraising dashboards. It helps identify high-potential donors, tailor engagement strategies, and develop outreach efforts for mass market gifts. # Gift Commitment Processing in Education Fundraising offers a structured and automated method to manage and process gift commitments based on the associated gift commitment schedule and gift transactions. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When you create a gift commitment record, Fundraising automatically runs the relevant flow to trigger these actions based on the schedule that you defined for the flow. - Identifies the next upcoming installment as per the current or next schedule and updates the Next Transaction Date and Next Transaction Amount fields - For a recurring commitment, creates a gift transaction for the next upcoming installment in the schedule if the Create Recurring Schedule Transaction setting is selected. - Updates the Current Schedule, Effective Period, and Effective Interval fields based on the current schedule Updates the commitment status based on these conditions:
Condition Commitment Type Updated Commitment Status
The type of the current schedule is Pause Transactions. Recurring Paused

The number of most recent past consecutive unpaid transactions on the commitment matches the value in the Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count setting.

When Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count setting is 0, the status doesn't update.

Recurring, Custom Lapsed

The number of most recent past or current consecutively failed transactions for a commitment matches the value in the Failing Transaction Count setting.

When Failing Transaction Count setting is 0, the status doesn’t update.

 Recurring, Custom Failing
The commitment’s initial schedule begins while the current commitment status is Draft. Recurring, Custom Active
The type of the current schedule is Create Transactions. Recurring Active
The current commitment status is Lapsed, but the number of past consecutive unpaid transactions on the commitment does not match the value in the Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count setting. Recurring, Custom Active
The current commitment status is Failing, but the number of past or current consecutively failed transactions for a commitment does not match the value in the Failing Transaction Count setting. Recurring, Custom Active
The commitment has no ongoing or future schedules and no unpaid transactions, and the Auto Close Recurring Commitment setting is selected. Recurring Closed
# Gift Commitment Processing in Nonprofit Fundraising offers a structured and automated method to manage and process gift commitments based on the associated gift commitment schedule and gift transactions. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

When you create a gift commitment record, Fundraising automatically runs the relevant flow to trigger these actions based on the schedule that you defined for the flow. - Identifies the next upcoming installment as per the current or next schedule and updates the Next Transaction Date and Next Transaction Amount fields - For a recurring commitment, creates a gift transaction for the next upcoming installment in the schedule if the Create Recurring Schedule Transaction setting is selected. - Updates the Current Schedule, Effective Period, and Effective Interval fields based on the current schedule Updates the commitment status based on these conditions:
Condition Commitment Type Updated Commitment Status
The type of the current schedule is Pause Transactions. Recurring Paused

The number of most recent past consecutive unpaid transactions on the commitment matches the value in the Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count setting.

When Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count setting is 0, the status doesn't update.

Recurring, Custom Lapsed

The number of most recent past or current consecutively failed transactions for a commitment matches the value in the Failing Transaction Count setting.

When Failing Transaction Count setting is 0, the status doesn’t update.

 Recurring, Custom Failing
The commitment’s initial schedule begins while the current commitment status is Draft. Recurring, Custom Active
The type of the current schedule is Create Transactions. Recurring Active
The current commitment status is Lapsed, but the number of past consecutive unpaid transactions on the commitment does not match the value in the Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count setting. Recurring, Custom Active
The current commitment status is Failing, but the number of past or current consecutively failed transactions for a commitment does not match the value in the Failing Transaction Count setting. Recurring, Custom Active
The commitment has no ongoing or future schedules and no unpaid transactions, and the Auto Close Recurring Commitment setting is selected. Recurring Closed
# Gift Commitments in Education Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Add a Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record for a one-time pledge, a multipayment gift, or an open-ended recurring gift, including the schedule, amount, and gift designations of the donor’s choice. If someone influenced the donor to give, you can log gift soft credits directly on the commitment page. You can connect the gift to a campaign or opportunity and allocate the gift for a particular designation. - **[Add a Designation to a Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_gift_default_designations_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift commitment to gift designations of the donor's choice. - **[Capture Giving Influence with Soft Credits in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_capture_giving_influence_with_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Streamline your fundraising efforts by tracking soft credits on Gift Commitments. Gift Entry Officers and Annual Fund Managers can capture and manage the influence of third parties on donations effectively, making sure every contribution is recognized and attributed accurately. This functionality not only simplifies the recording process but also aids in strategic donor engagement and segmentation. - **[Schedule a Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_schedule_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Schedule a recurring or custom payment of a gift commitment from a donor. The scheduling options change based on the schedule type that you select when you create the gift commitment. - **[Enter In-Kind Gift Commitments in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enter_in_kind_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An in-kind gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. To enter in-kind gifts into Salesforce, enter them as gift commitments. - **[Manage Recurring Gift Commitments in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the gift amount, schedule, and payment instrument details of a gift commitment. When you update the gift commitment record, Fundraising automatically processes the commitment and its associated records, such as the transaction and schedule. - **[Gift Commitment Processing in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_commitment_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising offers a structured and automated method to manage and process gift commitments based on the associated gift commitment schedule and gift transactions. - **[Close a Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_close_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Close a gift commitment when you no longer need to track it. # Gift Commitments in Nonprofit Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Add a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record for a one-time pledge, a multipayment gift, or an open-ended recurring gift, including the schedule, amount, and gift designations of the donor’s choice. If someone influenced the donor to give, you can log gift soft credits directly on the commitment page. You can connect the gift to a campaign or opportunity and allocate the gift for a particular designation. - **[Add a Designation to a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_gift_default_designations_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift commitment to gift designations of the donor's choice. - **[Capture Giving Influence with Soft Credits in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_capture_giving_influence_with_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Streamline your fundraising efforts by tracking soft credits on Gift Commitments. Gift Entry Officers and Annual Fund Managers can capture and manage the influence of third parties on donations effectively, making sure every contribution is recognized and attributed accurately. This functionality not only simplifies the recording process but also aids in strategic donor engagement and segmentation. - **[Schedule a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_schedule_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Schedule a recurring or custom payment of a gift commitment from a donor. The scheduling options change based on the schedule type that you select when you create the gift commitment. - **[Enter In-Kind Gift Commitments in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enter_in_kind_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An in-kind gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. To enter in-kind gifts into Salesforce, enter them as gift commitments. - **[Manage Recurring Gift Commitments in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the gift amount, schedule, and payment instrument details of a gift commitment. When you update the gift commitment record, Fundraising automatically processes the commitment and its associated records, such as the transaction and schedule. - **[Gift Commitment Processing in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitment_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising offers a structured and automated method to manage and process gift commitments based on the associated gift commitment schedule and gift transactions. - **[Close a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_close_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Close a gift commitment when you no longer need to track it. # Gift Designation Hierarchy in Education Hierarchical logic determines how gift commitments inherit gift default designations. Hierarchical logic also determines how gift transactions inherit gift transaction designations. You can manually override these designations. This hierarchy applies only to gift transactions created through gift entry and the manage designations flows. This hierarchy doesn’t affect designations for gift transactions created another way. If gift default designations or gift transaction designations aren’t defined, then the gift amounts automatically allocate to the org-wide designation. If the total percentage of allocations at any hierarchical level is less than 100%, then the remaining percentage also allocates to the org-wide designation. ## Gift Default Designation Inheritance Hierarchy Gift default designations are inherited from these sources, in the order of their availability. - The opportunity associated with the commitment - The campaign associated with the commitment - The org-wide default designation ## Gift Transaction Designation Inheritance Hierarchy for Transactions Created During Gift Entry Gift transaction designations are inherited from the gift default designations defined for these sources, in the order of their availability. - The campaign associated with the gift transaction - The commitment - The opportunity associated with the commitment - The campaign associated with the commitment - The org-wide default designation ## Gift Transaction Designation Inheritance Hierarchy for Gift Entries For one-time gift entries, the default gift transaction designations are inherited from the campaign, if available. Otherwise, the gift amounts are allocated to the org-wide default designation during gift processing. For gift entries associated with a matched commitment, the default gift transaction designations are inherited from these sources, in the order of their availability. - Gift transaction designations defined for the selected gift transaction - Gift default designations that are defined for: - The campaign associated with the gift transaction - The matching commitment - The opportunity associated with the matching commitment - The campaign associated with the matching commitment - The org-wide default designation ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you override the campaign when you create the gift entry, then gift entry's gift default designations are inherited and the hierarchical logic doesn't apply. ## SEE ALSO [Parent-Child Data Skew](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.draes.meta/draes/draes_object_relationships_parent_child_data_skew.htm) # Gift Designation Hierarchy in Nonprofit Hierarchical logic determines how gift commitments inherit gift default designations. Hierarchical logic also determines how gift transactions inherit gift transaction designations. You can manually override these designations. This hierarchy applies only to gift transactions created through gift entry and the manage designations flows. This hierarchy doesn’t affect designations for gift transactions created another way. If gift default designations or gift transaction designations aren’t defined, then the gift amounts automatically allocate to the org-wide designation. If the total percentage of allocations at any hierarchical level is less than 100%, then the remaining percentage also allocates to the org-wide designation. ## Gift Default Designation Inheritance Hierarchy Gift default designations are inherited from these sources, in the order of their availability. - The opportunity associated with the commitment - The campaign associated with the commitment - The org-wide default designation ## Gift Transaction Designation Inheritance Hierarchy for Transactions Created During Gift Entry Gift transaction designations are inherited from the gift default designations defined for these sources, in the order of their availability. - The campaign associated with the gift transaction - The commitment - The opportunity associated with the commitment - The campaign associated with the commitment - The org-wide default designation ## Gift Transaction Designation Inheritance Hierarchy for Gift Entries For one-time gift entries, the default gift transaction designations are inherited from the campaign, if available. Otherwise, the gift amounts are allocated to the org-wide default designation during gift processing. For gift entries associated with a matched commitment, the default gift transaction designations are inherited from these sources, in the order of their availability. - Gift transaction designations defined for the selected gift transaction - Gift default designations that are defined for: - The campaign associated with the gift transaction - The matching commitment - The opportunity associated with the matching commitment - The campaign associated with the matching commitment - The org-wide default designation ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you override the campaign when you create the gift entry, then gift entry's gift default designations are inherited and the hierarchical logic doesn't apply. ## SEE ALSO [Parent-Child Data Skew](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.draes.meta/draes/draes_object_relationships_parent_child_data_skew.htm) # Gift Designations in Education A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Select the gift designations to associate with gift commitments, campaigns, and opportunities so that all related incoming gifts are automatically allocated to these designations. For gifts that require multiple designations, define the percentage of each allocation. These allocations are called Gift Default Designations. Every gift requires at least one allocated designation. By default, a gift transaction inherits the gift default designations defined in the associated gift commitment, if any. You can also allocate a new gift designation or override existing allocations for gift transactions. These allocations are called Gift Transaction Designations. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Mark one gift designation as the org-wide default designation for all unrestricted gift amounts received. Set this designation before you begin entering gifts in Fundraising. For steps, see [Create a Gift Transaction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_a_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a gift transaction for a one-time gift payment, an installment of a gift commitment, if an installment doesn’t exist, or for a non-revenue gift. Fundraising automatically creates a gift transaction when you create a gift entry or schedule a gift commitment."). Only one gift designation can act as the org-wide default. However, processing a high number of records on a designation can cause data skew. To prevent this issue, create default designations, as necessary, based on the volume of records processed on the designation. If you change the org-wide default designation, existing gift allocations are unaffected. Only new allocations use the updated org-wide default designation. Fundraising provides an automated, efficient, and accurate way to reconcile donations with designations. Based on the allocations, data across the gift entry, gift commitment, gift transaction, and gift designation records is synchronized to provide accurate impact reporting to donors. A gift transaction designation is the source of truth for updating gift designation record rollups. - **[Gift Designation Hierarchy in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_designation_hierarchy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Hierarchical logic determines how gift commitments inherit gift default designations. Hierarchical logic also determines how gift transactions inherit gift transaction designations. You can manually override these designations. - **[Create Gift Designations in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_org_wide_default_other_gift_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify how donors want their donation to be spent. You can identify a gift designation that's used for all unrestricted gifts and set it as the org-wide default before you begin entering gifts in Fundraising. # Gift Designations in Nonprofit A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Select the gift designations to associate with gift commitments, campaigns, and opportunities so that all related incoming gifts are automatically allocated to these designations. For gifts that require multiple designations, define the percentage of each allocation. These allocations are called Gift Default Designations. Every gift requires at least one allocated designation. By default, a gift transaction inherits the gift default designations defined in the associated gift commitment, if any. You can also allocate a new gift designation or override existing allocations for gift transactions. These allocations are called Gift Transaction Designations. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Mark one gift designation as the org-wide default designation for all unrestricted gift amounts received. Set this designation before you begin entering gifts in Fundraising. For steps, see [Create a Gift Transaction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_a_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a gift transaction for a one-time gift payment, an installment of a gift commitment, if an installment doesn’t exist, or for a non-revenue gift. Fundraising automatically creates a gift transaction when you create a gift entry or schedule a gift commitment."). Only one gift designation can act as the org-wide default. However, processing a high number of records on a designation can cause data skew. To prevent this issue, create default designations, as necessary, based on the volume of records processed on the designation. If you change the org-wide default designation, existing gift allocations are unaffected. Only new allocations use the updated org-wide default designation. Fundraising provides an automated, efficient, and accurate way to reconcile donations with designations. Based on the allocations, data across the gift entry, gift commitment, gift transaction, and gift designation records is synchronized to provide accurate impact reporting to donors. A gift transaction designation is the source of truth for updating gift designation record rollups. - **[Gift Designation Hierarchy in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_designation_hierarchy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Hierarchical logic determines how gift commitments inherit gift default designations. Hierarchical logic also determines how gift transactions inherit gift transaction designations. You can manually override these designations. - **[Create Gift Designations in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_org_wide_default_other_gift_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify how donors want their donation to be spent. You can identify a gift designation that's used for all unrestricted gifts and set it as the org-wide default before you begin entering gifts in Fundraising. # Gift Entry and Processing in Education Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_map_custom_fields_to_use_during_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift. - **[Create and Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately. - **[Create a Gift Entry in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_a_gift_entry_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are two methods of performing gift entry. The method that comes built in Fundraising is the Gift Entry window. In this window, you can quickly and easily create a gift with a gift transaction or a gift commitment. The gift can also include soft credits or multiple designations. The second method is to use the Gift Entry Grid. This method enables the lightning-fast entry of gifts in a table by keying across the cells to enter the gift information. You can enter all aspects of the gift in the grid, including the recurring gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits. - **[Gift Entry Grid Customization in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_entry_grid_customization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use templates to configure and customize the Gift Entry Grid to capture information and processes that are unique to your organization. Create and use a custom template for more flexible, accurate, and faster gift entry. Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid. Integrate with independent software vendor packages that handle payment processing and other functionality. - **[Set Gift Batch Defaults in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_gift_batch_defaults.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To enter gift batches more quickly and with fewer errors, set gift batch default values to automatically set common values for gift batches. - **[Create a Gift Batch in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs. - **[Process a Gift Batch in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_process_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors. - **[Import Gift Entries to a Gift Batch by Using CSV Data Management for Industries Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_import_gift_entries_gift_batch_using_csv_data_management_industries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Import large volumes of donation data to Salesforce by using a gift batch and the CSV Data Management common component. CSV Data Management reduces manual data entry and the risk of errors by using CSV files to import data into Salesforce objects. - **[Considerations for Gift Processing Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_considerations_for_gift_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gift entries that aren't part of a gift batch are processed when you save them. For gift batches, complete a batch dry run and then explicitly process the gift entries in the batch. # Gift Entry and Processing in Nonprofit Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_map_custom_fields_to_use_during_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift. - **[Create and Manage Gift Entry Grid Templates in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_and_manage_geg_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Gift Entry Grid with multiple templates to build targeted and efficient experiences that help users to capture the right gift data quickly and accurately. - **[Create a Gift Entry in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_a_gift_entry_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are two methods of performing gift entry. The method that comes built in Fundraising is the Gift Entry window. In this window, you can quickly and easily create a gift with a gift transaction or a gift commitment. The gift can also include soft credits or multiple designations. The second method is to use the Gift Entry Grid. This method enables the lightning-fast entry of gifts in a table by keying across the cells to enter the gift information. You can enter all aspects of the gift in the grid, including the recurring gift commitment, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits. - **[Gift Entry Grid Customization in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_entry_grid_customization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use templates to configure and customize the Gift Entry Grid to capture information and processes that are unique to your organization. Create and use a custom template for more flexible, accurate, and faster gift entry. Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid. Integrate with independent software vendor packages that handle payment processing and other functionality. - **[Set Gift Batch Defaults in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_gift_batch_defaults.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To enter gift batches more quickly and with fewer errors, set gift batch default values to automatically set common values for gift batches. - **[Create a Gift Batch in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs. - **[Process a Gift Batch in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_process_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors. - **[Import Gift Entries to a Gift Batch by Using CSV Data Management for Industries Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_import_gift_entries_gift_batch_using_csv_data_management_industries.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Import large volumes of donation data to Salesforce by using a gift batch and the CSV Data Management common component. CSV Data Management reduces manual data entry and the risk of errors by using CSV files to import data into Salesforce objects. - **[Considerations for Gift Processing Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_considerations_for_gift_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gift entries that aren't part of a gift batch are processed when you save them. For gift batches, complete a batch dry run and then explicitly process the gift entries in the batch. # Gift Entry Grid Customization in Education Use templates to configure and customize the Gift Entry Grid to capture information and processes that are unique to your organization. Create and use a custom template for more flexible, accurate, and faster gift entry. Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid. Integrate with independent software vendor packages that handle payment processing and other functionality. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift Entry Grid customization is intended for experienced Salesforce admins, developers, and consultants when the standard features are insufficient for the needs of the organization. - **[Get Started with Gift Entry Grid Customization in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_entry_grid_customization_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Custom Lightning web components must meet specific requirements before the Gift Entry Grid can use them as post-processing modals, column modals, or column components. - **[Custom Lightning Web Components in Gift Entry Grid in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_custom_lwc_in_gift_entry_grid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how custom Lightning web components move data from and to the Gift Entry Grid. - **[Lightning Web Component Configuration in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_lwc_type_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid: post-processing modals, column modals, and column components. # Gift Entry Grid Customization in Nonprofit Use templates to configure and customize the Gift Entry Grid to capture information and processes that are unique to your organization. Create and use a custom template for more flexible, accurate, and faster gift entry. Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid. Integrate with independent software vendor packages that handle payment processing and other functionality. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift Entry Grid customization is intended for experienced Salesforce admins, developers, and consultants when the standard features are insufficient for the needs of the organization. - **[Get Started with Gift Entry Grid Customization in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_entry_grid_customization_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Custom Lightning web components must meet specific requirements before the Gift Entry Grid can use them as post-processing modals, column modals, or column components. - **[Custom Lightning Web Components in Gift Entry Grid in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_custom_lwc_in_gift_entry_grid.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how custom Lightning web components move data from and to the Gift Entry Grid. - **[Lightning Web Component Configuration in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_lwc_type_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid: post-processing modals, column modals, and column components. # Gift Entry Management Manage your gifts. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_important.png) Important Support and updates for Gift Entry Management have ended as of June 2022. You can continue to use Gift Entry Management after June 2022; however, we recommend using Education Cloud instead. - **[General Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_gen_info_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how GEM can make a difference for your institution. - **[Create and Manage Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_create_manage_gifts_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create and manage gifts with GEM. - **[Configure GEM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_install_config_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to configure security, payment methods, and more to make the most use of GEM. - **[Reference for GEM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the items included in the GEM package, how to manually update your org, and some fundraising terminology used by GEM. # Gift Planning in Education Establish multiyear philanthropic journeys for prospects and donors that include complex planned gifts, such as charitable gift annuities, trusts, life insurance, donor-advised funds, and bequests. Streamline and automate processes, reduce inefficiencies and risks, and ensure compliance with evolving legal and institutional policies. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Gift Planning app helps institutions project future gift values precisely, make long-term financial planning, and develop lifelong stewardship strategies. Your institution can strengthen donor relationships through transparent planning, personalized engagement, and stewardship that honors intent over time. Staff can use the app to: - Manage gift planning activities, gift agreements, and donor gift concepts. - Track recognition efforts related to complex planned gifts and record individual events or actions related to gift stewardship to fulfill gift agreements. - Use actuarial tools to visualize gift concepts, model complex gift structures, and project future value. - Automate gift calculation workflows. - Customize configurable gift agreements to your institution's policies. - Maintain legal oversight. Explore the following resources to get started with Gift Planning. - **[Prerequisites for Gift Planning in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_prerequisites_for_gift_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Simplify the management of complex gift planning processes by turning on Gift Planning and Gift Agreements in Fundraising. To further improve the process, add related fields to the Fundraising page layouts. To keep gift values and gift types up-to-date, set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records. - **[Gift Planning Records in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_planning_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gift Planning objects help you manage the details of donor concepts, planned gifts, and the records related to them. Use Gift Planning objects to track the status of donor concepts, planned gifts, and related records and make sure that you take care of them properly. Honor the donor's goals and align them with the institution's rules and requirements. Gift Planning involves the collaboration of these key roles—the Relationship Officer and the Planned Giving Officer. - **[Automate Planned Gift Calculation in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_calculate_values_button_planned_gift.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a button to the Planned Gift record page that recalculates present, deferred, and future values when you refresh planned gift data. - **[Visualizations for Planned Gift Types in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_visualizations_for_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The planned gift record page offers dynamic visualizations that automatically adapt to the structure of specific gift types. Select a gift type to get a Flexcard that shows only the fields that matter most, which streamlines review and data entry. - **[Configure the Person Account Lightning Page on the Gift Planning App in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_person_account_page_gift_planning_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Person Account Lightning page to automate the fields in the Gift Planning app. # Gift Planning in Nonprofit Establish multiyear philanthropic journeys for prospects and donors that include complex planned gifts, such as charitable gift annuities, trusts, life insurance, donor-advised funds, and bequests. Streamline and automate processes, reduce inefficiencies and risks, and ensure compliance with evolving legal and institutional policies. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

The Gift Planning app helps institutions project future gift values precisely, make long-term financial planning, and develop lifelong stewardship strategies. Your institution can strengthen donor relationships through transparent planning, personalized engagement, and stewardship that honors intent over time. Staff can use the app to: - Manage gift planning activities, gift agreements, and donor gift concepts. - Track recognition efforts related to complex planned gifts and record individual events or actions related to gift stewardship to fulfill gift agreements. - Use actuarial tools to visualize gift concepts, model complex gift structures, and project future value. - Automate gift calculation workflows. - Customize configurable gift agreements to your institution's policies. - Maintain legal oversight. Explore the following resources to get started with Gift Planning. - **[Prerequisites for Gift Planning in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_prerequisites_for_gift_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Simplify the management of complex gift planning processes by turning on Gift Planning and Gift Agreements in Fundraising. To further improve the process, add related fields to the Fundraising page layouts. To keep gift values and gift types up-to-date, set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records. - **[Gift Planning Records in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_planning_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gift Planning objects help you manage the details of donor concepts, planned gifts, and the records related to them. Use Gift Planning objects to track the status of donor concepts, planned gifts, and related records and make sure that you take care of them properly. Honor the donor's goals and align them with the institution's rules and requirements. Gift Planning involves the collaboration of these key roles—the Relationship Officer and the Planned Giving Officer. - **[Automate Planned Gift Calculation in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_calculate_values_button_planned_gift.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a button to the Planned Gift record page that recalculates present, deferred, and future values when you refresh planned gift data. - **[Visualizations for Planned Gift Types in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_visualizations_for_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The planned gift record page offers dynamic visualizations that automatically adapt to the structure of specific gift types. Select a gift type to get a Flexcard that shows only the fields that matter most, which streamlines review and data entry. - **[Configure the Person Account Lightning Page on the Gift Planning App in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_person_account_page_gift_planning_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Person Account Lightning page to automate the fields in the Gift Planning app. # Gift Planning Records in Education Gift Planning objects help you manage the details of donor concepts, planned gifts, and the records related to them. Use Gift Planning objects to track the status of donor concepts, planned gifts, and related records and make sure that you take care of them properly. Honor the donor's goals and align them with the institution's rules and requirements. Gift Planning involves the collaboration of these key roles—the Relationship Officer and the Planned Giving Officer. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Relationship Officer is the initial point of contact, focusing on building and maintaining relationships with potential and existing donors. They also make sure that the institution's goals are met and that planning intentions are kept throughout their lives. These objects help the Relationship Officer to accomplish their goals. Donor Gift Concept Provide a single location where all proposed gift concepts can be managed and tracked to ensure easy access in an organization to better serve their constituents. Gift Agreement Track all agreements to accept gifts. For example, an agreement to accept US$1,000,000 in exchange for the naming rights for a building. Planned Giving Officers manage the details of planned gifts, track their status, and make sure that planned gifts are handled correctly. Relationship Officers can honor the donor's goals while following the institution's policies and requirements. These objects help the Planned Giving Officer track planned gifts. Planned Gift Manage details of planned gifts, track their status, and ensure proper stewardship so that Planned Giving Officers can honor the donor's intentions while adhering to the institution's policies and requirements. Planned Gift Performance Monitor how a gift performs over time in terms of returns, expenses and payouts, so that Planned Giving Officers can make sure that the performance aligns with the financial terms outlined in the gift agreement. Planned Gift Annuity Rates Store and apply annuity rates so that Planned Giving Officers can calculate payments for charitable gift annuities. Gift Value Forecast Track the value of a gift over time, including initial value, future projections, and updates to ensure proper financial oversight. Gift Stewardship Aggregate all stewardship-related activities, preferences, and outcomes, providing a holistic view of each donor’s engagement with the institution and making sure that the donor’s intentions are honored. Gift Stewardship Activity Track and manage all stewardship efforts systematically, such as donor recognition events, site visits, program updates, and fulfillment milestones. Facilitate timely and effective engagement with donors. Gift Actuary Entry Provide the foundational data needed for accurate projections of gift values, including life expectancy and discount rates. SEE ALSO: - [Fundraising Gift Planning Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/fundraising-gift-planning.html) # Gift Planning Records in Nonprofit Gift Planning objects help you manage the details of donor concepts, planned gifts, and the records related to them. Use Gift Planning objects to track the status of donor concepts, planned gifts, and related records and make sure that you take care of them properly. Honor the donor's goals and align them with the institution's rules and requirements. Gift Planning involves the collaboration of these key roles—the Relationship Officer and the Planned Giving Officer. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

The Relationship Officer is the initial point of contact, focusing on building and maintaining relationships with potential and existing donors. They also make sure that the institution's goals are met and that planning intentions are kept throughout their lives. These objects help the Relationship Officer to accomplish their goals. Donor Gift Concept Provide a single location where all proposed gift concepts can be managed and tracked to ensure easy access in an organization to better serve their constituents. Gift Agreement Track all agreements to accept gifts. For example, an agreement to accept US$1,000,000 in exchange for the naming rights for a building. Planned Giving Officers manage the details of planned gifts, track their status, and make sure that planned gifts are handled correctly. Relationship Officers can honor the donor's goals while following the institution's policies and requirements. These objects help the Planned Giving Officer track planned gifts. Planned Gift Manage details of planned gifts, track their status, and ensure proper stewardship so that Planned Giving Officers can honor the donor's intentions while adhering to the institution's policies and requirements. Planned Gift Performance Monitor how a gift performs over time in terms of returns, expenses and payouts, so that Planned Giving Officers can make sure that the performance aligns with the financial terms outlined in the gift agreement. Planned Gift Annuity Rates Store and apply annuity rates so that Planned Giving Officers can calculate payments for charitable gift annuities. Gift Value Forecast Track the value of a gift over time, including initial value, future projections, and updates to ensure proper financial oversight. Gift Stewardship Aggregate all stewardship-related activities, preferences, and outcomes, providing a holistic view of each donor’s engagement with the institution and making sure that the donor’s intentions are honored. Gift Stewardship Activity Track and manage all stewardship efforts systematically, such as donor recognition events, site visits, program updates, and fulfillment milestones. Facilitate timely and effective engagement with donors. Gift Actuary Entry Provide the foundational data needed for accurate projections of gift values, including life expectancy and discount rates. SEE ALSO: - [Fundraising Gift Planning Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/fundraising-gift-planning.html) # Gift Transactions in Education Use gift transactions to track donations that you receive as one-time gifts or as an installment to fulfill a commitment. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
With Fundraising, you can: - Attribute gift transactions to a commitment, campaign, and donor. - Allocate transaction amounts to designations based on donor-specified percentages. - Manage refunds and soft credits. A donor can pay a transaction through multiple means, including cash, stocks, or assets. Fundraising automatically creates or updates the associated gift transactions when you process gift entries. Fundraising also automatically creates the associated gift transactions when you schedule and process a gift commitment. For example, a $200 monthly gift commitment due on the 15th starting January 2026 creates a gift transaction for the first installment on January 15, 2026. You can manually create a gift transaction for a commitment, if necessary. Use the gift commitment record’s details page to review upcoming, missed, or failed transactions, and recently paid or refunded transactions. SEE ALSO - [Gift Transactions Overview in](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_transactions_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about gift transaction statuses and considerations for tracking donations.") - [Gift Entry and Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_entry_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields.") - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") - **[Gift Transactions Overview in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_transactions_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about gift transaction statuses and considerations for tracking donations. - **[Create a Gift Transaction in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_a_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a gift transaction for a one-time gift payment, an installment of a gift commitment, if an installment doesn’t exist, or for a non-revenue gift. Fundraising automatically creates a gift transaction when you create a gift entry or schedule a gift commitment. - **[Add a Designation to a Gift Transaction in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_designation_to_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift transaction to gift designations of the donor's choice. - **[Credit Influence as Gift Soft Credit on a Gift Transaction in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_soft_credit_to_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recognize constituents other than the donors for their help in bringing in the donors' gifts with gift soft credit. For example, track an influencer of the donation by adding this soft credit to the donor's gift transaction. You can also recognize tribute honorees as soft credit recipients. - **[Provide a Full or Partial Refund in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_provide_full_or_partial_refund.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a refund to ensure that the associated gift transaction contains the complete transaction history. Return the full or a partial gift amount to the donor. Use refunds to resolve gift entry mistakes or to honor a donor's request to reverse their gift. # Gift Transactions in Nonprofit Use gift transactions to track donations that you receive as one-time gifts or as an installment to fulfill a commitment. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

With Fundraising, you can: - Attribute gift transactions to a commitment, campaign, and donor. - Allocate transaction amounts to designations based on donor-specified percentages. - Manage refunds and soft credits. A donor can pay a transaction through multiple means, including cash, stocks, or assets. Fundraising automatically creates or updates the associated gift transactions when you process gift entries. Fundraising also automatically creates the associated gift transactions when you schedule and process a gift commitment. For example, a $200 monthly gift commitment due on the 15th starting January 2026 creates a gift transaction for the first installment on January 15, 2026. You can manually create a gift transaction for a commitment, if necessary. Use the gift commitment record’s details page to review upcoming, missed, or failed transactions, and recently paid or refunded transactions. SEE ALSO - [Gift Transactions Overview in](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_transactions_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about gift transaction statuses and considerations for tracking donations.") - [Gift Entry and Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_entry_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields.") - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") - **[Gift Transactions Overview in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_transactions_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about gift transaction statuses and considerations for tracking donations. - **[Create a Gift Transaction in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_a_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a gift transaction for a one-time gift payment, an installment of a gift commitment, if an installment doesn’t exist, or for a non-revenue gift. Fundraising automatically creates a gift transaction when you create a gift entry or schedule a gift commitment. - **[Add a Designation to a Gift Transaction in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_designation_to_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate or reallocate gift amounts associated with a gift transaction to gift designations of the donor's choice. - **[Credit Influence as Gift Soft Credit on a Gift Transaction in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_soft_credit_to_gift_transaction.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recognize constituents other than the donors for their help in bringing in the donors' gifts with gift soft credit. For example, track an influencer of the donation by adding this soft credit to the donor's gift transaction. You can also recognize tribute honorees as soft credit recipients. - **[Provide a Full or Partial Refund in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_provide_full_or_partial_refund.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a refund to ensure that the associated gift transaction contains the complete transaction history. Return the full or a partial gift amount to the donor. Use refunds to resolve gift entry mistakes or to honor a donor's request to reverse their gift. # Gift Transactions Overview in Education Learn about gift transaction statuses and considerations for tracking donations. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Education Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Performance**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions | | Nonprofit Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions | Update the status of a gift transaction to indicate its current state. You can update custom fields to any status. The gift transaction status supports these updates.
Original Status Updated Status
Unpaid
  • Canceled
  • Failed
  • Paid
  • Pending
  • Written Off
Paid
  • Failed
  • Fully Refunded
  • Unpaid
Failed
  • Canceled
  • Pending
  • Paid
  • Written Off
  • Unpaid
Fully Refunded If the current amount is more than zero, you can change the status to any status. You can’t change the status of a fully refunded transaction.
Written Off
  • Canceled
  • Pending
Canceled
  • Written Off
  • Pending
  • Unpaid
  • Failed
Pending
  • Unpaid
  • Paid
  • Failed
  • Written Off
  • Canceled
## Gift Transaction Considerations Review these considerations for how gift transactions affect other objects and records. - When the payment method of a gift entry is cash or check, the created transaction status becomes paid. For payment methods other than cash or check, the created transaction status becomes pending. - Changing the currency ISO code of a gift transaction in a multicurrency org doesn’t change the currency ISO codes of the related records. This change can cause discrepancies between the amount values for the transaction and for the related records. SEE ALSO - [Gift Entry and Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_entry_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields.") - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") # Gift Transactions Overview in Nonprofit Learn about gift transaction statuses and considerations for tracking donations. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Education Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Performance**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions | | Nonprofit Cloud: **Enterprise**, **Unlimited**, and **Developer** Editions | Update the status of a gift transaction to indicate its current state. You can update custom fields to any status. The gift transaction status supports these updates.
Original Status Updated Status
Unpaid
  • Canceled
  • Failed
  • Paid
  • Pending
  • Written Off
Paid
  • Failed
  • Fully Refunded
  • Unpaid
Failed
  • Canceled
  • Pending
  • Paid
  • Written Off
  • Unpaid
Fully Refunded If the current amount is more than zero, you can change the status to any status. You can’t change the status of a fully refunded transaction.
Written Off
  • Canceled
  • Pending
Canceled
  • Written Off
  • Pending
  • Unpaid
  • Failed
Pending
  • Unpaid
  • Paid
  • Failed
  • Written Off
  • Canceled
## Gift Transaction Considerations Review these considerations for how gift transactions affect other objects and records. - When the payment method of a gift entry is cash or check, the created transaction status becomes paid. For payment methods other than cash or check, the created transaction status becomes pending. - Changing the currency ISO code of a gift transaction in a multicurrency org doesn’t change the currency ISO codes of the related records. This change can cause discrepancies between the amount values for the transaction and for the related records. SEE ALSO - [Gift Entry and Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_entry_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter gifts individually or add them to a gift batch. A gift batch uses a gift batch template that enables you to quickly create gift entries that have the same set of fields.") - [Gift Designations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_manage_designations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A gift designation is a fund that represents a specific purpose for a gift, such as an earthquake relocation fund and a fund for after-school care in an underserved community. Quickly allocate incoming donations to specific funds with gift designations.") - [Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Fundraising app to manage all types of gift commitments, both monetary and in kind. You can track gifts for particular opportunities and campaigns, change transaction schedules, and update donation amounts. Automated tasks simplify handling recurring donations. You can also easily monitor upcoming, missed, failed, and recently paid and refunded transactions.") # Gift Types in Education Nonprofits and educational institutions receive and record incoming funds through various methods. Identify the different gift types and how to represent them in your organization. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Single Payment Gift (Untracked Solicitation) Record and manage a one-time donation that wasn’t specifically solicited and has no previous commitment. Examples of this type of gift include an online donation, or a one-time donation that was made in person or through the mail. Represent these gifts with gift transaction records. Multiple Payment Gift A multiple-payment gift is one that involves several payments over time, such as a pledge or letter of intent. Organizations don’t always explicitly solicit these gifts, and it’s possible that the gifts are part of a larger marketing effort. Represent multiple-payment gifts with gift transactions and gift commitments. If it's necessary to track the solicitation of the gift, and if the payments follow a pattern, you can include opportunities and gift commitment schedules. Recurring Gift Record gifts with a set recurring schedule, often originating from external donation platforms. The donor continues donations until they cancel, or until the payment method expires or is declined. Represent recurring gifts with gift transactions, gift commitments, gift commitment schedules, and optionally, payment instruments. Matching Gift Record gifts from one body, such as an employer, that match other donations, sometimes dollar-for-dollar. Matching gifts have no schedule or previous commitment. Represent matching gifts with gift transactions. Opportunities and gift commitments aren’t necessary because you typically don’t track the solicitation of multi-payment commitments. After you enter the matching gift, link it to the relevant initial donation. Update the Matching Employer Transaction lookup field on the Gift Transaction record that represents the initial donation with the newly created matching gift. Inbound Grants Record and manage solicited donations, which typically entail an application process and you can pay as a lump sum or in multiple installments. Represent inbound grants with gift commitments, gift commitment schedules, gift transactions, and opportunities. When you relate your gift entry to a gift commitment, the system automatically creates a gift transaction. Track any written documents regarding grant distribution against a gift commitment. In-Kind Gift Manage and record non-monetary donations, such as products or goods. Organizations don’t always solicit In-kind gifts. Examples of in-kind gifts include: - Products donated as part of a sponsorship - Products donated to a food bank - Clothing or household goods donated to a thrift store Represent in-kind gifts with gift commitments. If it’s necessary to track the solicitation of the gift, or if the gift is part of a mixed or multi-payment commitment, you can create opportunities. Gift from Donor-Advised Fund Manage and record gifts from a charitable account where a donor takes an immediate tax deduction when contributing cash or securities. The funds are then invested and the recipient can donate them to charitable organizations. Represent gifts from donor-advised funds with gift transactions, gift commitments, gift commitment schedules, and gift soft credits. If it’s necessary to track the solicitation of the gift, you can use opportunities. An example of a gift from donor-advised funds is when Alex Brown makes an outright gift to Fidelity Charitable Gift Fund. Fidelity includes that transaction in their next payment to the charity. Fidelity receives the hard credit and Alex Brown receives the soft credit for the gift. - **[Considerations for Recording Gifts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_considerations_for_recording_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you start recording gifts, review these considerations for each gift process. - **[Prerequisites for Recording Gifts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_prerequisites_for_recording_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before recording each gift type, Salesforce admins and Fundraising users have specific tasks to complete. # Gift Types in Nonprofit Nonprofits and educational institutions receive and record incoming funds through various methods. Identify the different gift types and how to represent them in your organization. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Single Payment Gift (Untracked Solicitation) Record and manage a one-time donation that wasn’t specifically solicited and has no previous commitment. Examples of this type of gift include an online donation, or a one-time donation that was made in person or through the mail. Represent these gifts with gift transaction records. Multiple Payment Gift A multiple-payment gift is one that involves several payments over time, such as a pledge or letter of intent. Organizations don’t always explicitly solicit these gifts, and it’s possible that the gifts are part of a larger marketing effort. Represent multiple-payment gifts with gift transactions and gift commitments. If it's necessary to track the solicitation of the gift, and if the payments follow a pattern, you can include opportunities and gift commitment schedules. Recurring Gift Record gifts with a set recurring schedule, often originating from external donation platforms. The donor continues donations until they cancel, or until the payment method expires or is declined. Represent recurring gifts with gift transactions, gift commitments, gift commitment schedules, and optionally, payment instruments. Matching Gift Record gifts from one body, such as an employer, that match other donations, sometimes dollar-for-dollar. Matching gifts have no schedule or previous commitment. Represent matching gifts with gift transactions. Opportunities and gift commitments aren’t necessary because you typically don’t track the solicitation of multi-payment commitments. After you enter the matching gift, link it to the relevant initial donation. Update the Matching Employer Transaction lookup field on the Gift Transaction record that represents the initial donation with the newly created matching gift. Inbound Grants Record and manage solicited donations, which typically entail an application process and you can pay as a lump sum or in multiple installments. Represent inbound grants with gift commitments, gift commitment schedules, gift transactions, and opportunities. When you relate your gift entry to a gift commitment, the system automatically creates a gift transaction. Track any written documents regarding grant distribution against a gift commitment. In-Kind Gift Manage and record non-monetary donations, such as products or goods. Organizations don’t always solicit In-kind gifts. Examples of in-kind gifts include: - Products donated as part of a sponsorship - Products donated to a food bank - Clothing or household goods donated to a thrift store Represent in-kind gifts with gift commitments. If it’s necessary to track the solicitation of the gift, or if the gift is part of a mixed or multi-payment commitment, you can create opportunities. Gift from Donor-Advised Fund Manage and record gifts from a charitable account where a donor takes an immediate tax deduction when contributing cash or securities. The funds are then invested and the recipient can donate them to charitable organizations. Represent gifts from donor-advised funds with gift transactions, gift commitments, gift commitment schedules, and gift soft credits. If it’s necessary to track the solicitation of the gift, you can use opportunities. An example of a gift from donor-advised funds is when Alex Brown makes an outright gift to Fidelity Charitable Gift Fund. Fidelity includes that transaction in their next payment to the charity. Fidelity receives the hard credit and Alex Brown receives the soft credit for the gift. - **[Considerations for Recording Gifts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_considerations_for_recording_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you start recording gifts, review these considerations for each gift process. - **[Prerequisites for Recording Gifts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_prerequisites_for_recording_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before recording each gift type, Salesforce admins and Fundraising users have specific tasks to complete. # Gift Validations in Education To complete bulk data migrations as quickly and smoothly as possible, pause some gift validations. Pausing checks on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules decreases friction during the migration process. Use these tables to review gift validations and see which checks are available to pause within Fundraising Settings. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Fundraising settings:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
You can pause gift validations for data migrations from Fundraising Settings. To pause gift validations on a payload by payload basis, use the [Fundraising Business Process API](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_business_api_rest_reference.htm). ## Gift Transaction Validations
Validation Description Can Be Paused?

Original amount positive

 Confirms that the original amount of the gift transaction is greater than or equal to zero. No
Update Original Amount restricted Restricts updates to the gift transactions Original Amount field because the Status is Paid.

Yes.

If the Accounting Subledger is active, it prevents users from pausing this validation.
Update Currency ISO Code restricted Restricts updates to the gift transactions Currency ISO Code field because the Status is Paid or Fully Refunded. No
Update Donor restricted Restricts updates to the gift transactions Donor field because the Status is Paid or Fully Refunded. Yes
Update Transaction Completion Date restricted Restricts updates to the gift’s Transaction Completion Date field because the Status is Paid.

Yes.

If the Accounting Subledger is active, it prevents users from pausing this validation.
Transaction Status final Prevents invalid changes to the Gift Transaction Status field. No
Transaction Completion Date required If changing the gift transaction’s Status field value to Paid or Fully Refunded, set the Transaction Completion Date field. No
Updating the Gift Commitment Restricts editing the Gift Commitment field because the Status field value is a value other than Unpaid or Pending. Yes
Updating the Gift Commitment Schedule Restricts editing the Gift Commitment Schedule field because the Status is a value other than Unpaid or Pending. Yes
Transaction Due Date required Validates that the Transaction Due Date field is complete. No
Due Date vs. Schedule Start Date Validates that the Transaction Due Date is on or after the Gift Commitment Schedule Start Date. No
Due Date within schedule range Validates that the Transaction Due Date is between the Start Date and End Date of the Gift Commitment Schedule. No
Gift Commitment Schedule match Validates that the Gift Commitment Schedule belongs to the associated Gift Commitment. No
Single transaction for custom schedule Validates that a Custom Gift Commitment Schedule is linked to only one gift transaction. No
Campaign and outreach source match Makes sure that the gift transaction’s Outreach Source Code field value is valid for the selected campaign. No
## Gift Commitment Validations | **Validation** | **Description** | **Can Be Paused?** | | --- | --- | --- | | Expected total amount not negative | Validates that the gift commitment’s Expected Total Commitment Amount is greater than or equal to zero. | No | | End Date greater than Start Date | Prevents the gift commitment’s Expected End Date from being before the Expected Start Date. | No | | Prevent Schedule Type updates when Gift Commitment Schedule exists | Prevents updating the gift commitment’s Schedule Type field value because the Commitment has an associated Gift Commitment Schedule. | No | | Update Status to draft restricted | Prevents changing a gift commitment’s Status field value back to Draft after it’s set to Active and has associated gift transactions. | Yes | | Update Status to closed restricted | Prevents changing a gift commitment’s Status field value from Closed to any status other than Active because it has associated gift transactions. | Yes | | Update Status to paused restricted | Prevents updating the gift commitment Status field to Paused because Pause Transactions is the Current Gift Commitment Schedule Type. | No | | Update paused status restricted | Prevents updating the gift commitment Status field from Paused to any value other than Lapsed, Failing, or Active because the Current Gift Commitment Schedule Type is Create Transactions. | No | | Update Currency ISO Code restricted | Restricts updates to the gift commitment’s Currency ISO Code field value because Gift Commitment Schedule records exist. | No | ## Gift Commitment Schedule Validations | **Validation** | **Description** | **Can Be Paused?** | | --- | --- | --- | | Transaction interval positive | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Interval field value is greater than zero. | No | | Transaction Amount not negative | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Amount field value is greater than or equal to zero. | No | | End Date greater than Start Date | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s End Date isn’t earlier than the Start Date. | No | | Transaction Day required for monthly | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Day field value is greater than zero because the Transaction Period is monthly. | No | | Transaction interval less than 100 | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Interval field value is less than or equal to 100. | No | | Transaction period required for recurring | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Installment Period field is populated for recurring schedules. | No | | Prevent editing when schedule has transactions | Prevents updating fields because a gift commitment schedule has associated gift transactions. | Yes | | Schedule Start Date before transaction due date | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Start Date is before an associated earliest gift transaction’s due date. | No | | Schedule End Date should be after latest Transaction Due Date | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s End Date is after the latest associated gift transaction’s due date. | No | | Require Gift Commitment for custom schedules | Validates that custom Gift Commitment Schedules are associated with a Gift Commitment ID. | No | | Custom schedules can’t be paused | Validates that if the user creates a custom schedule, the gift commitment schedule’s Type field isn’t set to Pause Transactions. | No | | Custom schedules can only be created on Gift Commitment with a custom Schedule Type | Validates that only custom gift commitment schedules are created and associated with gift commitments that have a Schedule Type field set to Custom. | No | | Limit of 50 custom schedules | Validates that each request creates no more than 50 custom gift commitment schedules. | No | | Prevent overlapping schedules | Validate that the Gift Commitment Schedule doesn’t overlap with other schedules. | No | | Prevent schedule creation when Gift Commitment Schedule Type is blank | Validates that the Gift Commitment Schedule is only associated with a Gift Commitment that has a set Schedule Type. | No | | Prevent mismatched schedule types | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Type field value (Recurring or Custom) matches the Schedule Type of the Gift Commitment. | No | - **[Pause Gift Validations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_pause_gift_validations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Minimize friction during bulk data migrations by pausing validations on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules. # Gift Validations in Nonprofit To complete bulk data migrations as quickly and smoothly as possible, pause some gift validations. Pausing checks on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules decreases friction during the migration process. Use these tables to review gift validations and see which checks are available to pause within Fundraising Settings. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To configure Fundraising settings:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
You can pause gift validations for data migrations from Fundraising Settings. To pause gift validations on a payload by payload basis, use the [Fundraising Business Process API](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_business_api_rest_reference.htm). ## Gift Transaction Validations
Validation Description Can Be Paused?

Original amount positive

 Confirms that the original amount of the gift transaction is greater than or equal to zero. No
Update Original Amount restricted Restricts updates to the gift transactions Original Amount field because the Status is Paid.

Yes.

If the Accounting Subledger is active, it prevents users from pausing this validation.
Update Currency ISO Code restricted Restricts updates to the gift transactions Currency ISO Code field because the Status is Paid or Fully Refunded. No
Update Donor restricted Restricts updates to the gift transactions Donor field because the Status is Paid or Fully Refunded. Yes
Update Transaction Completion Date restricted Restricts updates to the gift’s Transaction Completion Date field because the Status is Paid.

Yes.

If the Accounting Subledger is active, it prevents users from pausing this validation.
Transaction Status final Prevents invalid changes to the Gift Transaction Status field. No
Transaction Completion Date required If changing the gift transaction’s Status field value to Paid or Fully Refunded, set the Transaction Completion Date field. No
Updating the Gift Commitment Restricts editing the Gift Commitment field because the Status field value is a value other than Unpaid or Pending. Yes
Updating the Gift Commitment Schedule Restricts editing the Gift Commitment Schedule field because the Status is a value other than Unpaid or Pending. Yes
Transaction Due Date required Validates that the Transaction Due Date field is complete. No
Due Date vs. Schedule Start Date Validates that the Transaction Due Date is on or after the Gift Commitment Schedule Start Date. No
Due Date within schedule range Validates that the Transaction Due Date is between the Start Date and End Date of the Gift Commitment Schedule. No
Gift Commitment Schedule match Validates that the Gift Commitment Schedule belongs to the associated Gift Commitment. No
Single transaction for custom schedule Validates that a Custom Gift Commitment Schedule is linked to only one gift transaction. No
Campaign and outreach source match Makes sure that the gift transaction’s Outreach Source Code field value is valid for the selected campaign. No
## Gift Commitment Validations | **Validation** | **Description** | **Can Be Paused?** | | --- | --- | --- | | Expected total amount not negative | Validates that the gift commitment’s Expected Total Commitment Amount is greater than or equal to zero. | No | | End Date greater than Start Date | Prevents the gift commitment’s Expected End Date from being before the Expected Start Date. | No | | Prevent Schedule Type updates when Gift Commitment Schedule exists | Prevents updating the gift commitment’s Schedule Type field value because the Commitment has an associated Gift Commitment Schedule. | No | | Update Status to draft restricted | Prevents changing a gift commitment’s Status field value back to Draft after it’s set to Active and has associated gift transactions. | Yes | | Update Status to closed restricted | Prevents changing a gift commitment’s Status field value from Closed to any status other than Active because it has associated gift transactions. | Yes | | Update Status to paused restricted | Prevents updating the gift commitment Status field to Paused because Pause Transactions is the Current Gift Commitment Schedule Type. | No | | Update paused status restricted | Prevents updating the gift commitment Status field from Paused to any value other than Lapsed, Failing, or Active because the Current Gift Commitment Schedule Type is Create Transactions. | No | | Update Currency ISO Code restricted | Restricts updates to the gift commitment’s Currency ISO Code field value because Gift Commitment Schedule records exist. | No | ## Gift Commitment Schedule Validations | **Validation** | **Description** | **Can Be Paused?** | | --- | --- | --- | | Transaction interval positive | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Interval field value is greater than zero. | No | | Transaction Amount not negative | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Amount field value is greater than or equal to zero. | No | | End Date greater than Start Date | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s End Date isn’t earlier than the Start Date. | No | | Transaction Day required for monthly | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Day field value is greater than zero because the Transaction Period is monthly. | No | | Transaction interval less than 100 | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Transaction Interval field value is less than or equal to 100. | No | | Transaction period required for recurring | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Installment Period field is populated for recurring schedules. | No | | Prevent editing when schedule has transactions | Prevents updating fields because a gift commitment schedule has associated gift transactions. | Yes | | Schedule Start Date before transaction due date | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Start Date is before an associated earliest gift transaction’s due date. | No | | Schedule End Date should be after latest Transaction Due Date | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s End Date is after the latest associated gift transaction’s due date. | No | | Require Gift Commitment for custom schedules | Validates that custom Gift Commitment Schedules are associated with a Gift Commitment ID. | No | | Custom schedules can’t be paused | Validates that if the user creates a custom schedule, the gift commitment schedule’s Type field isn’t set to Pause Transactions. | No | | Custom schedules can only be created on Gift Commitment with a custom Schedule Type | Validates that only custom gift commitment schedules are created and associated with gift commitments that have a Schedule Type field set to Custom. | No | | Limit of 50 custom schedules | Validates that each request creates no more than 50 custom gift commitment schedules. | No | | Prevent overlapping schedules | Validate that the Gift Commitment Schedule doesn’t overlap with other schedules. | No | | Prevent schedule creation when Gift Commitment Schedule Type is blank | Validates that the Gift Commitment Schedule is only associated with a Gift Commitment that has a set Schedule Type. | No | | Prevent mismatched schedule types | Validates that the gift commitment schedule’s Type field value (Recurring or Custom) matches the Schedule Type of the Gift Commitment. | No | - **[Pause Gift Validations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_pause_gift_validations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Minimize friction during bulk data migrations by pausing validations on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules. # Gifts as Opportunities Learn how GEM uses Opportunity records to track gifts. A gift is any item of value (cash, stock, or other item) that a donor gives, pledges, or promises to your organization. Remember, in Salesforce, we use Opportunity records to track gifts. Any gift created through Single Gift Entry or the Gift Entry tool results in a new Opportunity record, along with the related records to track payment and allocation information. GEM installs a number of Opportunity record types. A gift Opportunity created through Single Gift Entry always defaults to the Donation record type, **so make sure that you don't delete or rename this record type**. Other than this important caveat, the record type you choose for a gift has little impact. What matters is how you enter the gift, and the records to which it’s associated. For example, you can create a gift from an individual by associating it with a Contact, and you can create a household or organization gift by associating it with an Account. # Give Fundseekers Access to Apply to Funding Programs Set up permissions to define how your funding applicants access the fundseeker portal. - **[Give Access to Apply to Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_grantseekers_apply_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give fundseekers Read access to Funding Programs and the Application Form field so that they can apply for funding. ## Give Access to Apply to Funding Programs Give fundseekers Read access to Funding Programs and the Application Form field so that they can apply for funding. ### Funding Programs **Funding Program Permissions** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note To use a flow that creates an application for funding, give portal users the Run Flows app permission. | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create |   | | Edit |   | | Delete |   | # Give Grantseekers Access to Update Account Information External users, such as grantseekers, can use the Account Update Request to submit information about their organization to your org. When a grantseeker starts a request, they complete a form with important information about their organization, such as their organization’s name, address, and phone number. This information comes back to you through a Case. When the Case is approved by a grantmaker, the request either creates a new Account for the organization or assigns an existing Account to the grantseeker’s Contact record. Learn more about these scenarios in [Learn About Account Update Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_acct_update_req.htm). Grantseekers require additional permissions to use the Account Update Request feature, specifically on the Account, Case, and Contact objects. ## Account Permissions Additional Account permissions are required for grantseekers to view and create Account information when requesting an update to their organization information. **Account Object** **Account Fields** | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit |   | | Delete |   | Additional field permissions are required if your org wants grantseekers to be able to view and edit their Account Name and Billing Address on the Update Organization Information Request form. These fields are used in the Account Update Request global quick action. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Grantseekers also need Read and Edit access to fields added to this global quick action. | Field Label | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Account Name | √ | √ | | Billing Address | √ | √ | ## Case Permissions Additional Case permissions are required for grantseekers to create a Case when requesting an update to their organization information. **Case Object** **Case Fields** | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit |   | | Delete |   | Additional field permissions are required if your org wants grantseekers to be able to view and edit the Description on a Case. This field is used in the Account Update Request Case quick action. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Grantseekers also need Read and Edit access to fields added to this global quick action. | Field Label | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Description | √ | √ | ## Contact Permissions Additional Contact permissions are required for grantseekers to create a Case when requesting an update to their organization information. | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create |   | | Edit |   | | Delete |   | ## Apex Class Permissions Two new Apex classes are included in Grants Management to give a profile access to use the Update Account Information Request functionality: _CommunityAccountUpdateRequest_ and _InternalAccountUpdateRequest_.  The Apex class _CommunityAccountUpdateRequest_ is automatically assigned to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile. This allows a site user to view Account data on the Update Organization (Account) Information Request form from a Case. The Apex class _InternalAccountUpdateRequest_ is automatically assigned to the system administrator profile, but you can assign it to other administrator profiles as needed. This allows a user to view Account data on the Update Organization (Account) Information Request form from a Case as well as process the request. # GL Codes In an accounting system, each line in a general ledger is assigned an account or a fund account. The GL Code field on the Transaction Journal object identifies each account. We assign GL codes based on accounting set fields.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Think of accounts as buckets that track activity that has increased or decreased. For example, if a pledged cash donation is received, it's recorded as coming from the cash account and going to a specific fund. If that donation is later designated to the building fund, it's deducted from the original fund and then added to the building fund account. Accounting Subledger sets the GL code automatically based on these criteria. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note For transaction journal records related to refund payments, the GL code behavior is reversed. Salesforce allocates debit values to credits and vice versa for both revenue and expense types. See [Adjustment Types for Payment and Expense Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger assists you with adjustments by separating source records from transaction journal records. If the source record is updated, we generate new transaction journal records accordingly."). ## Debit and Credit Information for Revenue Types
Transaction Journal Type Debit or Credit Source Field Mapped to Generate Expected Revenue/Expense Selected? What Populates the GL Code
Transaction Debit —
  • For paid amounts: Payment Method
  • For written-off amounts: Default Write Off Account Code
Payment Credit Yes Default Accrual Account Code
Payment Credit No Fund Name
Allocation Debit — Default Accrual Account Code
Allocation Credit — Fund Name
## Debit and Credit Information for Expense Types
Transaction Journal Type Debit or Credit Source Field Mapped to Generate Expected Revenue/Expense Selected? What Populates the GL Code
Transaction Credit —
  • For paid amounts: Payment Method
  • For written-off amounts: Default Write Off Account Code
Payment Debit Yes Default Accrual Account Code
Payment Debit No Fund Name
Allocation Credit — Default Accrual Account Code
Allocation Debit — Fund Name
You can configure your own values to align with your accounting software. For example, if your accounting software's receivables account is called Pledges Receivable, configure Accounting Subledger to set the GL code as Pledges Receivable. Confirm with your accounting team which fund allocation account to use. Then, enter the account name on the accounting set. See [Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you map source fields to accounting set destination fields, configure how Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records for each accounting set."). # GM Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds Understand the differences between Grants Management and Outbound Funds module to choose the best product for your organization. - **[Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_compare_gms_with_ofm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds Module (OFM) is a free, open-source product that helps organizations track, manage, and deliver funds. OFM is also the foundation of Salesforce Grants Management (GMS), a paid product that helps grantmakers simplify and accelerate their grantmaking. ## Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds Module Outbound Funds Module (OFM) is a free, open-source product that helps organizations track, manage, and deliver funds. OFM is also the foundation of Salesforce Grants Management (GMS), a paid product that helps grantmakers simplify and accelerate their grantmaking. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note This article was written by Pierre Kaluzny, Judy Otto, Nick Lindberg, Catherine Zheng, and Melissa Barber at the October 2021 Open Source Community Sprint. Use this table to compare the different features available in OFM and GMS. Work with your Salesforce Account Executive to learn more about which one is best for your organization. For more information. see [Outbound Funds Module (OFM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ofm_meet.htm) and [Grants Management (GMS)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_overview.htm). | Feature | Description | OFM | GMS | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Grants Portal | Create an Experience Cloud portal for external users. | √\* | √ | | Basic Application Flow Template | Automate how an application is collected on your portal. | √ | √ | | Enhanced Application Flow Templates | Provide multi-screen forms and allow users to save and return to their grant applications. |   | √ | | Organization Self-Registration | Give grantseekers the ability to register in your portal and update their organization information. |   | √ | | Application Mapping | Connect an application to a specific Funding Program. |   | √ | | Invite-Only Applications | Invite an applicant to apply to a private funding opportunity. |   | √ | | Manage Collaborators | Invite other portal users to collaborate on Funding Requests. |   | √ | | Tax Status Check | Verify a nonprofit's tax status with GuideStar. |   | √ | | Action Plans | Use Salesforce Action Plans to standardize due diligence. |   | √ | | Internal Review | Capture review status and comments on a Review record. | √ | √ | | External Review | Review applications in your Experience Cloud portal. |   | √ | | Review Workspace | Configurable, single-screen view of an application's details and attachments. |   | √ | | Manage Disbursements | Ability to schedule and track Disbursement details against a Funding Request. | √ | √ | | Manage Expenditures | Link a Disbursement to an existing General Accounting Unit. | √\*\* | √\*\* | | Budget Management | Create budgets and monitor funds that are committed or disbursed. |   | √ | | Requirements Management | Capture details about grantee requirements such as type, due date, and status. | √ | √ | | Multiple Contacts for a Funding Request | Relate multiple contacts to a Funding Request. | √ | √ | | Reporting and Analytics | Reports included in the product to get you started. | √ | √ | \* Requires Experience Cloud licenses. \*\* Requires Nonprofit Success Pack. # GM Configure Self-Registration Set up Grants Management for self-registration by assigning a profile, enabling the feature, and assigning users to profiles and users to accounts. - **[Configure Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up self-registration if you want to let guest users register for their own account on your grantee portal. - **[Assign the Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grantseeker Plus Login profile is included with Grants Management and provides baseline permission recommendations for grantseekers who have registered for an account on your grantee portal. - **[Enable Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on self-registration in the Experience Cloud Administration workspace for your grantee portal portal. - **[Assign Users to Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You need to assign users to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile if you didn't use the Grants Management and Build Community installer. - **[Assign Users to Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use Person Accounts, skip this section. ## Configure Self-Registration Set up self-registration if you want to let guest users register for their own account on your grantee portal. ## Assign the Profile The Grantseeker Plus Login profile is included with Grants Management and provides baseline permission recommendations for grantseekers who have registered for an account on your grantee portal. If you used the _Grants Management and Build Community_ installer, the Grantseeker Plus Login profile is already assigned. However, if you used the _Grants Management_ installer, you’ll need to assign the Grantseeker Plus Login profile to give grantseekers access to the portal when they are logged in. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Workspaces** for your site. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Select **Members**. 6. Click **Search**, then select **All**. 7. Select **Grantseeker Plus Login**, then add it to Selected Profiles. 8. Save your work. ## Enable Self-Registration Turn on self-registration in the Experience Cloud Administration workspace for your grantee portal portal. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Workspaces** for your site. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Click **Login & Registration**. 6. Select **Allow customers and partners to self-register**. ## Assign Users to Profile You need to assign users to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile if you didn't use the Grants Management and Build Community installer. 1. Click **Profile**, then select **Grantseeker Plus Login**. 2. Continue to [Assign Users to Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you use Person Accounts, skip this section."), or save your work. ## Assign Users to Account If you use Person Accounts, skip this section. 1. Click ![Search](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/search.png)to open Account search. 2. Enter an account name you want to associate with the registered grantseeker. 3. Click **Go!** and select the Account. 4. Save your work. See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=account_person_enable.htm&type=5). # GM Configure the Registration and Login Pages Set up the registration and login pages that your users see when they access the grants portal. - **[Update the Logo](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_registration_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grantee Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Registration and Login pages, which you can update with your own. - **[Change the Background](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_registration_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The background for the login and registration pages are light gray (RGB 238, 238, 238) by default, but this can be changed. - **[Configure the Registration Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_registration_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The out-of-the-box registration page includes several components, including Rich Content Editors and Self-Registration. - **[Configure the Login Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_registration_login.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The login page includes two Rich Content Editors, Login Form, and Employee Login Link. Similar to the registration page, this page can be configured to meet your organization’s needs and branding. ## Update the Logo The Grantee Portal site template comes with a fictitious logo on the Registration and Login pages, which you can update with your own. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Workspaces** for your site. 4. Click **Administration**. 5. Select **Login & Registration**. 6. Next to Logo File, click **Choose File**. 7. Select your organization’s logo then click **Open**. ## Change the Background The background for the login and registration pages are light gray (RGB 238, 238, 238) by default, but this can be changed. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your site. 4. Click ![Theme](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/theme.png), then click **Images**. 5. Click the Background Image box. 6. Click **Upload Image**. 7. Select an image file to display in the background of the login and registration page, then click **Open**. 8. Click **Add**. ## Configure the Registration Page The out-of-the-box registration page includes several components, including Rich Content Editors and Self-Registration. 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/settings_2.png) next to Home. 2. Click **Login**, then **Register**. 3. Click into any of the components to edit. ![Registration page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/registration_1.png) Let's add a welcome message to new registering users and add the ability for the user to create a password. 1. Click **Rich Content Editor**. 2. Click **Edit Content**. 3. Enter a new statement. Since this is visible to registering users, enter a short welcome message.![Update welcome message on the registration page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/registration_2.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note The Rich Content Editor also lets you change the size, formatting, and alignment of the text. 4. Click anywhere to close out of the Rich Content Editor. Lastly, let's add a password field to the registration page. 1. Click **Self Registration**. 2. Select **Include Password Field?** 3. Click anywhere to close out of the Self Registration component menu to close it. The Create Password and Confirm Password fields are visible immediately.![Updated registration page with welcome message and Create Password and Confirm Password fields.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/registration_3.png) ## Configure the Login Page The login page includes two Rich Content Editors, Login Form, and Employee Login Link. Similar to the registration page, this page can be configured to meet your organization’s needs and branding. For example, if you doesn't need the Employee Login Link component, you can remove it. 1. In Experience Builder, click ![Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/settings_2.png) next to Home. 2. Click **Login**. 3. Hover over the component, then click ![Trash icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/trashicon.png) to remove a component. ![Delete component on the Login page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/login_1.png) # GM Create the Site Create a grants portal using Experience Cloud. - **[Create the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a grantseeker portal using the Grantee Portal site template. ## Create the Portal Create a grantseeker portal using the Grantee Portal site template. This is a preconfigured Experience Builder template that can be customized to fit your organization’s needs and branding. Use your portal to communicate your foundation’s mission and available Funding Programs, and provide a place for people to learn about your organization, view and apply to Funding Programs, and manage their applications. If you used the _Grants Management and Create Community_ installer, a grantee portal called Funding Program Portal is already created and you can skip this step. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select the **Grantee Portal** template then click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name for your portal. 6. Enter a URL ending to append to the portal domain. 7. Click **Create**. It will take a few minutes to create the new portal. When it’s ready, you’ll see the site's Experience Workspace. To learn more about using Experience Builder, see [Experience Builder Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you are looking to set up a multilingual portal, review [Create a Multilingual Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=community_builder_multilingual_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # GM Data Deletion Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Grants Management. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Grants Management. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Grants Management. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Do Things to Consider
A grantee is no longer receiving funds and wants their personal data removed. Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or field:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A grantseeker is not awarded a grant and asks you remove all of their personal data.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Update Record Owner

In addition to deleting the grantseeker’s Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

If applicable, consider updating record ownership of any records that user owned, deactivating the faculty member’s User account, and removing any personal information stored on the User record.

You may also consider deleting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A grantseeker doesn't want you to store their email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Consider deleting data in any fields that store that grantseeker’s email address and phone number.

If you’ve created other records or activities related to that grantseeker, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records, and from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
# GM Enable Public Access Configure which users can access the grants portal. - **[Enable Public Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enable_public_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating the grantee portal, decide how visible you want it to be to people who haven’t registered for an account or logged in. These are considered guest users. ## Enable Public Access After creating the grantee portal, decide how visible you want it to be to people who haven’t registered for an account or logged in. These are considered guest users. For example, if you want guest users to see the home page and view Funding Programs without registering for an account, you can enable public access. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your new portal. ![Click the Builder link.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/enable_access1.png) 4. If this is your first time in your fundseeker portal, click **Continue** to learn more about using Experience Builder. If you are ready to start configuring the template, close out of the Experience Builder introduction pop-up. 5. Click ![Settings icon next to Home](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/enable_access_settings.png), then select **Public** from Page Access. This allows guest users to view the Grantee Portal Home Page. When deselected, a guest user is required to register and log in to view your portal. ![Select Public from Page Access](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/enable_access_2.png) 6. Click ![Site Settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/enable_access_settings_2_1.png) to open Settings. 7. Select **Public can access the site** to allow users to view your site based on your guest user profile. This makes pages such as View Funding Programs accessible to guest users. ![Select Public can access the site.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/enable_access_3.png) These settings enable guest users' access to your portal. You still need to ensure the appropriate organization-wide defaults and object and field level access are set for the guest user profile based on what you want the guest user to see. # GM Give Grantseekers Access to Apply to Funding Programs Set up permissions to define how your users access the grants portal. - **[Give Access to Apply to Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_grantseekers_apply_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give grantseekers Read access to Funding Programs and the Application Form field and the Application Form field so that they can apply for funding. ## Give Access to Apply to Funding Programs Give grantseekers Read access to Funding Programs and the Application Form field and the Application Form field so that they can apply for funding. ### Funding Programs **Funding Program Permissions** **Funding Program Fields** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note To use a flow that creates an application for funding, give portal users the Run Flows app permission. | Field Label | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Application Form | ApplicationForm\_\_c | √ |   | | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create |   | | Edit |   | | Delete |   | # GM Give Grantseekers Access to Submit Applications Set up sharing sets to define how your users access the grants portal. - **[Give Access to Submit Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_give_users_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To submit an application, grantseekers need Read access to their User record in order to transfer ownership from the site user to a default internal user. This allows grantseekers to view their submitted application. ## Give Access to Submit Applications To submit an application, grantseekers need Read access to their User record in order to transfer ownership from the site user to a default internal user. This allows grantseekers to view their submitted application. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Every org is unique, and giving Public Read Only access on the User object’s default external access may expose fields and data you otherwise would not want visible to site users. We recommend testing in a Sandbox org first. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find Box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **Public Read Only** as the Default External Access on the User object. 5. Click **Save**. # GM Publish the Portal When your grants portal is ready, publish it to make it publicly available. - **[Publish the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_publish_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Publish your grantee portal to make the URL live, enable registration for guest users, and give login access to portal users. After you publish, you'll set up user registration and access. ## Publish the Portal Publish your grantee portal to make the URL live, enable registration for guest users, and give login access to portal users. After you publish, you'll set up user registration and access. If you used the _Grants Management and Build Community_ installer, your grantee portal is already published so you can skip this step. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your site. 4. Click **Publish**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want to set up search engine optimization and a welcome email for new users, you must also activate the site. See [Activate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_publish.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help for more information. # GM Set Funding Program Visibility Configure who can access the funding programs. - **[Choose Who Sees Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every organization is different, which is why we put the decision about who is allowed to see your Funding Programs in your hands. By default, Funding Programs are not visible to guest users on your portal, but you can choose to give access to your users based on your organization's preferences. - **[Make Funding Programs Visible to Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Open your Funding Programs to be visible to all users, even those who aren't registered on your portal. This is important if your organization wants grantseekers to find your available Funding Programs organically. ## Choose Who Sees Funding Programs Every organization is different, which is why we put the decision about who is allowed to see your Funding Programs in your hands. By default, Funding Programs are not visible to guest users on your portal, but you can choose to give access to your users based on your organization's preferences. ### Public Access Public access to Funding Programs allows your grantseekers to view all Funding Programs, regardless of status. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **Public Read Only** for the Funding Program's default external access. 5. Click **Save**. ### Criteria-based Access If you used the _Grants Management and Build Community_ installer, you already have a sharing rule that gives external users, such as a grantseekers, Read access to the Funding Request and Requirement objects based on the user's Account or Contact. If you used the _Grants Management_ installer, you can create a similar sharing rule. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Funding Program Sharing Rules, then click **New**. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Shared Based on Status. The Rule Name autofills. 5. Optionally, enter a Description. 6. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 7. Select the Field. In this example, select **Status**. 8. Select the Operator. In this example, **select not equal to**. 9. Enter the Value. In this example, enter Planned, Completed, Aborted. This hides any Funding Program with that status from the user. 10. Select **All Customer Portal Users** from the Shared with dropdown. 11. Click **Save**. ## Make Funding Programs Visible to Guest Users Open your Funding Programs to be visible to all users, even those who aren't registered on your portal. This is important if your organization wants grantseekers to find your available Funding Programs organically. ### Update the Guest User Profile 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** for your site. 4. Click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/enable_access_settings_2.png) to open Settings. 5. Click the profile listed under Guest User Profile. ![Click the guest user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/make_funding_programs_visible.png) 6. Scroll to Funding Program under Custom Field-Level Security, then click **View**. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Ensure the guest user profile has Read access to all fields. 9. Click **Save**. ### Create a Sharing Rule 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Funding Program Sharing Rules, then click **New**. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Guest Access. 5. Press tab to autofill the Rule Name. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. Select **Guest user access, based on criteria**. 8. Select the Field. In this example, select **Status**. 9. Select the Operator. In this example, select **not equal to**. 10. Enter the Value. In this example, enter Planned, Completed, Aborted. This displays only active Funding Programs to guest users. 11. Select the guest user profile from Share with. ![Configure the sharing rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/make_funding_programs_visible_2.png) 12. Click **Save**. # GM Use Manual Registration Set up Grants Management for manual registration by updating the contact page layout and creating a login for the grantseeker. - **[Configure Manual Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_manualregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your organization may want to manually register users instead of allowing them to register themselves. This can be done with a few configurations. - **[Update the Contact Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_manualregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the Contact page layout to give grantmakers access to log in to the portal as a grantseeker. - **[Create Login](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_manualregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the login for the grantseeker. Once created, the grantseeker will receive a welcome email that prompts them to create a password. ## Configure Manual Registration Your organization may want to manually register users instead of allowing them to register themselves. This can be done with a few configurations. ## Update the Contact Page Layout Update the Contact page layout to give grantmakers access to log in to the portal as a grantseeker. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager.** 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Select the Contact Layout that is assigned to the system administrator profile. For example, **Contact Layout**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note You can check what layout is assigned to the system administrator profile by clicking **Page Layout Assignments**. 5. Click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 6. Drag **Enable Customer User** and **Log in to Experience as User** into the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions. 7. Click **Save**. ## Create Login Create the login for the grantseeker. Once created, the grantseeker will receive a welcome email that prompts them to create a password. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Contacts**. 2. Select an existing Contact. 3. Click **Enable Customer User**. 4. Enter the user’s Email. 5. Press tab to autofill Username and Nickname. 6. Select **Customer Community Plus Login** as the user license. 7. Select **Grantseeker Plus Login** as the profile. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Navigate to the Contact’s record, then click **Log in to Experience as User** to view what the user will see. # Goals Management Help students go beyond academics by setting and managing career and life goals, tracking campus activities, and building a comprehensive action plan for success.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create Goal Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_goal_sssignments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors can create goal assignments to help students ‌set and manage career and life goals, track campus activities, and build a comprehensive action plan for success. Students can create their own goals based on their competencies and traits through the portal. - **[Create Personalised Goals For Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_personalised_goals_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors can tailor goals for students based on their individual interests, personalities, competencies, and traits. - **[Manage Student Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_student_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors can associate tasks with a student's goal to create or update a detailed, executable plan of action. # Grade Enrollment Grade Enrollment represents student's enrollment in a grade at an educational institution. - **[Sample Uses for Grade Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_grade_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Grade Enrollment to track student's grade level, including details such as: - **[Configure Grade Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_grade_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. - **[Create or Update a Grade Enrollment Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_grade_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and add details to grade enrollment records for your students in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Grade Enrollment Use Grade Enrollment to track student's grade level, including details such as: - The start and end date of the enrollment. - The reason a student's enrolling (for example, skipping a grade or transferring in) or the reason for exit (for example, expelled or no show). - The status (for example, "Former" for completed grade levels). ## Configure Grade Enrollment Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.18 Add the Education History lookup field to the K12 Kit Grade Enrollment Layout, as needed. Learn how to Add a Lookup Field to a Page Layout.
1.6

  • Remove the Graduated, Pre-Registered, and Transferred Out picklist values from the Status field.

  • Update the Entry Reason picklist to include Other, and alphabetize options, with Other at the end.

  • Update the Exit Reason picklist to include Skipped Grade and Other, and alphabetize options, with Other at the end.
1.5

Create a K-12 All Grade Enrollments list view with this recommended configuration.

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All grade enrollments

  • Display order: Grade Enrollment Name, Contact, Grade Level, Status, Start Date, End Date
1.2
## Create or Update a Grade Enrollment Record Create and add details to grade enrollment records for your students in K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. From the student's Contact record, enter a value for Current Grade Level. When you **Save** the record, we automatically create a Grade Enrollment record for the student and set its status to Current. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If the student already has a Grade Enrollment with a Current status, that record's status is updated to Former when you save the Contact record. 2. To add details to the Grade Enrollment record, in the Grade Enrollments related list, click **Edit** from the actions menu next to the newly created record, make your changes, and click **Save**. # Grant Users Access to Reports and Dashboards As a Salesforce system admin ensure that your users can see Program Management Module reports and dashboards, update the Program Management Standard User profile to provide access to shared public folders. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then select **Profiles**. 3. Click the **Program Management Standard User** profile or a different profile you'd like to change. 4. In the System section, click **System Permissions**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Select the level of access you want to give to them. See [Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.analytics_folder_access.htm&type=5). 7. Click **Save**. # Grants Management (Managed Package) Release Notes Grants Management pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Grants Management managed package is installed. # Grants Management and Translation Learn how Grants Management is localized and how to manage translations. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Grants Management. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Grants Management product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Grants Management."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Grants Management.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Grants Management. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Grants Management objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Grants Management | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Grants Management - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/gm/grants_management_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/gm/grants_management_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/gm/grants_management_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/gm/grants_management_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/gm/grants_management_pr_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Grants Management product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Grants Management: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Grants Management Data Dictionary The Grants Management Data Dictionary contains of list of custom objects and fields included in Outbound Funds Module and Grants Management, when they were introduced, and descriptions where available. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the Grants Management data schema in depth. [Data Dictionary](https://salesforce.quip.com/jiEtAIr7TAwt) (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser) # Grants Management Entity Relationship Diagram Review how Grants Management objects are connected to each other. - **[Grants Management Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the objects that Grants Management uses relate to each other. ## Grants Management Entity Relationship Diagram Understand how the objects that Grants Management uses relate to each other. ![Grants Management Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/grantsmanagementerd238.png) # Grants Management Managed Package The Grants Management managed package simplifies grantmaking processes and improves the grantee experience. It includes program management, financial commitments, relationship management, and a grantee portal. By streamlining these processes, Grants Management helps grantmakers save time and resources, allowing them to focus on their missions and creating impact for their communities. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Learn about Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Become familiar with Grants Management, see how it compares with Outbound Funds Module, and explore the data model and the supporting objects. - **[Get Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install Grants Management and complete the post installation tasks. - **[Set Up the Grants Experience Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_grants_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a grants portal and configure user registration. - **[Set Up the Grantseeker Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_the_grantseeker_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a grantseeker portal using Experience Cloud to streamline your funding request processes. - **[Set Up the Grantsmaker Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_the_grantsmaker_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support your organization's grantmakers by setting up robust due diligence and review processes. - **[Set Up Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the available Grants Management security settings. - **[Use Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Grants Management to manage all your grants activities, from funding requests to budgets and reviews and more. Grantseekers can also complete the due diligence process. - **[Ongoing Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_ongoing_administration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep up with releases and learn about localization and translation for Grants Management. - **[Appendix](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_appendix.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about flows and available reference documentation for Grants Management. - **[Grants Management Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Grants Management. # Grants Management Permissions Reference Find details about the Grants Management permission sets including object, field, Apex class, and Visualforce page access. We provide managed permission sets in Grants Management so that you can give your grantmaking team the access they need with a few clicks. Learn assigning these permission sets in [Use Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the available permission sets in Grants Management and create permission sets for due diligence and budget management."). - **[ActionPlans Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the ActionPlans permission set. - **[Document Checklist Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Document Checklist permission set. - **[Grants Management Base Access Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Grants Management Base Access permission set. - **[Grants Management: Review Workspace - Configure Workspace Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Grants Management: Review Workspace - Configure Workspace permission set. - **[Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request permission set. - **[Invitation Wizard Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Invitation Wizard permission set. - **[Manage Grants Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Manage Grants permission set. - **[Verification - Manage Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access details on what's included in the Verification - Manage permission set. ## ActionPlans Permission Set Access details on what's included in the ActionPlans permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Object Settings** to explore object and field access. Look for objects with at least Read access to identify the ones included in the permission set. 5. Click **System Permissions**. ## Document Checklist Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Document Checklist permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **System Permissions**. ## Grants Management Base Access Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Grants Management Base Access permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Apex Class Access**. ## Grants Management: Review Workspace - Configure Workspace Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Grants Management: Review Workspace - Configure Workspace permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Object Settings** to explore object and field access. Look for objects with at least Read access to identify the ones included in the permission set. 5. Click **Apex Class Access**. 6. Click **Custom Permission**. ## Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Object Settings** to explore object and field access. Look for objects with at least Read access to identify the ones included in the permission set. 5. Click **Apex Class Access**. ## Invitation Wizard Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Invitation Wizard permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Apex Class Access**. ## Manage Grants Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Manage Grants permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Custom Permissions**. ## Verification - Manage Permission Set Access details on what's included in the Verification - Manage permission set. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of the permission set. 4. Click **Assigned Apps**. 5. Click **Object Settings** to explore object and field access. Look for objects with at least Read access to identify the ones included in the permission set. 6. Click **Apex Class Access.** # Grants Management Product Information for GDPR Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Grants Management. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Product Information for Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_product_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Grants Management complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[GM Data Deletion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Grants Management. - **[Consent Management for Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how consent management applies to Grants Management. - **[Restrict Data Processing for Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Grants Management. - **[Data Portability for Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data portability in Grants Management. # Grants Management Release Notes Learn what's in Grants Management (version 1.23) in Spring '23. ## Changes Review the minor enhancements in Grants Management (version 1.23) in Spring '23. - We added three new Budget objects: Budget Category, Budget Period, and Budget Category Value. - We enabled a Grants Manager to set a field set while configuring a Review record to support multiple scoring roles. ## Community Ideas Delivered Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000ia8tuuaj/support-for-multiple-review-templates): Support for Multiple Review Templates. # Grants Management Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Critical Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the critical changes delivered in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. ## Critical Changes Learn about the critical changes delivered in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Review Workspace Improvements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for Review Workspace in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. ### Review Workspace Improvements Learn about the improvements for Review Workspace in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Grants portal users see the same Review Workspace you configured in Salesforce. - We improved functionality and stability of editing the Review Workspace. Users now need to save updates to the workspace because autosave is turned off. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Invite Collaboration in Grants Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your grantseekers can now invite collaborators to help complete the application. - **[Reviewers in Grants Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** External reviewers can now review Funding Requests in the grants portal. - **[Review Workspace Improvements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for Review Workspace in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Community Ideas Delivered](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. ### Invite Collaboration in Grants Portal Your grantseekers can now invite collaborators to help complete the application. - [Use the Grants Management Flow Installer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm) to add the Grants Management: Send Invitations to Collaborators (Sample) and Grants Management: Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample) flows. - Follow the instructions in [Enable Funding Request Collaboration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_enable_fnd_request_collab.htm). - In Salesforce CRM: - If grantmakers need to [Invite a Grantseeker to Apply](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_invite_grantseeker_to_apply.htm) in addition to managing collaborators, edit your Funding Request Lightning page layouts and replace the Invite Applicant component with the Funding Request Button Group component. This new component includes the Invite Applicant and Manage Collaborators buttons. - Assign the `FundingRequestInvitationController` Apex permission to the Funding Program Portal guest user profile to allow unauthenticated users to decline collaborator invitations. - Assign `FundingRequestInvitationController` and `FundingRequestCollaboratorController` Apex permissions to the Grantseeker Plus Login profile. - In the grants portal, add the Community Manage Collaborators Button component to your Funding Request object. Learn more in [Add or Remove Funding Request Collaborators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_add_remove_funding_req_collab.htm). ### Reviewers in Grants Portal External reviewers can now review Funding Requests in the grants portal. - [Use the Grants Management Flow Installer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm) to add the Grants Management: Email the Assigned Reviewer (Sample) flow. - Follow the instructions in .[Configure Portal for External Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_config_portal_external_review.htm) - In Salesforce CRM, update your Review page layouts to include Display Start Date and Display End Date. - In the grants portal: - Add the Reviews object, and set the Reviews Record List to use the Standard layout for both In Progress Reviews and Submitted Reviews list views. - Assign the Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request permission set to users submitting reviews in your grants portal. Learn more in [Create and Customize Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_manage_reviews.htm). ### Review Workspace Improvements Learn about the improvements for Review Workspace in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Grants portal users see the same Review Workspace you configured in Salesforce. - We improved functionality and stability of editing the Review Workspace. Users now need to save updates to the workspace because autosave is turned off. ### Community Ideas Delivered Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - [Idea delivered:](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdaveuaz/improve-the-sharing-sets-of-the-grantee-portal) Improve the sharing sets of the Grantee Portal - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000h3ngnuar/external-reviewer-portal): External Reviewer Portal ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new objects in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new fields in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Lightning Web Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Lightning web components in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new flows in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new permission sets in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Apex Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Apex classes in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Custom Metadata Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new custom metadata types in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. ### Objects Learn about the new objects in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Funding Request Collaborator - Funding Request Collaborator Invitation ### Fields Learn about the new fields in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Funding Request: Collaborator Group ID - Review: Display End Date - Review: Display Start Date - Review: Review URL ### Lightning Web Components Learn about the new Lightning web components in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Community Manage Collaborators Button - Funding Request Button Group - Manage Collaborators Button ### Flows Learn about the new flows in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. [Use the Grants Management Flow Installer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm) to add these flows to your org. - Grants Management: Email the Assigned Reviewer (Sample) - Grants Management: Send Invitations to Collaborators (Sample) - Grants Management: Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample) ### Permission Sets Learn about the new permission sets in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Grants Management: Funding Request - Manage Collaborators - Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request ### Apex Classes Learn about the new Apex classes in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - FundingRequestCollaboratorController - FundingRequestCollaboratorService - FundingRequestCollaboration - FundingRequestSelector - GrantsManagementSetting ### Custom Metadata Types Learn about the new custom metadata types in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - Grants Management Settings - Grants Management: Review Status Mapping # Grants Management Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Grants Management (version 1.22) in Winter '23. ## Change - Grants Management users can take advantage of improvements to Budget Management including hierarchies and availability in Experience Cloud. Learn more in Budget Management in [New and Changed Objects Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_api_objects.htm&type=5&release=240). - We now support Brazilian Portuguese. # Grants Management: Application Form Launcher (Sample) Learn what's included in the flow that launches a multi-section application in your portal. Use the Grants Management: Application Form Launcher (Sample) flow to create a new application or gather information about an existing application, and then continue the Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow. ![Overview of the Grants Management: Application Form Launcher (Sample) flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/application_launcher_flow.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Decision: Is the User Logged In? Checks if the grantseeker is logged in to the grantee portal.
3. Screen: Login or Register Prompts the grantseeker to log in or register for an account as appropriate.
4. Get Records: Get Funding Program Searches for the Funding Program that the grantseeker is applying to.
5. Decision: Is Funding Program Found? Determines if a Funding Program was found.
6. Get Records: Get User’s Contact Record

Searches for and finds the User's Contact record, then shows information about the grantseeker's organization as long as the Contact isn't related to the grantee portal’s self-registration Account.
7. Screen: Confirm User and Organization Information Shows a screen that lets the grantseeker confirm their User and organization information.
8. Assignment: Build New Funding Request Creates a new Funding Request record and sets its Status to In Progress.
9a. Create Records: Create New Funding Request Creates the new Funding Request record.
9b. Error Notification: Screen If there's a problem creating the Funding Request, the applicant sees an error message.
10. Screen: Navigate to Application Navigates the grantseeker to the new Funding Request record. This relaunches the flow from the start to show the application.
11. Get Records: Get Funding Request Searches for and finds the Funding Request.
12. Decision: Funding Request Found?

Determines if a Funding Request is found.
13. Assignment: Assign output Funding Request Assigns the Funding Request found in step 11 as the output variable that's used in the Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow.
14. Screen: Funding Request not found error If a Funding Request isn't found, the grantseeker sees an error message.
# Grants Management: Email the Assigned Reviewer (Sample) Learn what's included in the external reviewer notification flow. Grants Management uses the Grants Management: Email the Assigned Reviewer (Sample) flow to send an email to the assigned reviewer. | Flow Element | Action | | --- | --- | | 1\. Start | Includes criteria for when the flow should run. | | 2\. Decision: Send Notification Email | Checks to see if the review has a User in the Assigned To field and if the display start date has a value. | | 3\. Email Alert: Review Assignment Email Alert | Sends the email to the reviewer using the Grants Management: Reviewer Assignment Notification template. If you want to use a different template, create a new Email Alert that references your template. | ![Email the Assigned Reviewer sample flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flow_email_assigned_reviewer.png) # Grants Management: Enhanced Application (Sample) Learn what's included in the flow that presents the Create Application flow on a single screen. The Grants Management: Enhanced Application (Sample) flow creates a simple, single-screen application. This is a sample flow and includes example application language, unmapped custom fields, and a file upload component within a single page. See [Create or Modify a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_create_modify_flow.htm) for more information on customizing a flow for your organization. ![Enhanced Application sample flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/enhancedappflow.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Decision: Is Logged In? Checks if the user is logged in to the portal.
3. Screen: Log In or Sign Up Directs the user to register or log in to the portal.
4. Get Records: Get Contact

Searches for and finds the user's Contact record to display information about the user's organization as long as the Contact isn’t related to the current site's self-registration Account. 

If the user isn’t a site user or the user is related to the site's self-registration Account, no record is returned.
5. Get Records: Get Funding Program Searches for and finds the Funding Program to generate and show the Funding Program's Name on the application.
6. Screen: Application

Collects information and attachments from an applicant that are saved to a new Funding Request when submitted.

Note
Note This application includes fictitious information and unmapped custom fields. Review and test any flow prior to launching it to grantseekers.
7. Assignment: Assign to Funding Request Assigns the information submitted in the application to the new Funding Request record.
8. Create Records: Insert Funding Request Creates the new Funding Request record.
9. Loop: Link Files Creates the ContentDocumentLink record that links the uploaded attachments to the new Funding Request record.
10. Assignment: Create File Link Creates the ContentDocumentLink record to link the attachment to the new Funding Request record.
11. Assignment: Add Link to Collection Adds the ContentDocumentLink record, which links the attachment to the new Funding Request record, to the collection of ContentDocumentLink records.
12. Create Records: Insert File Links Adds the ContentDocumentLink records from the attachments to the Funding Request record.
13. Screen: Navigate to Application Navigates the user to the new Funding Request record.
# Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) Learn what's included in the flow for multi-section applications. The Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow shows a grantseeker an application with multiple sections and allows a grantseeker to save and return to the application. This flow is continuous until a grantseeker submits their application. ![Overview of the Grants Management: Multi-Section Application Form (Sample) flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/multi-section_application_form.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Subflow: Application Form Launcher Launches the Application Form Launcher flow to create or find an application.
3. Get Records: Check User's Access

Checks if the grantseeker has Edit or Read-only access to the Funding Request. 

If the grantseeker has Read-only access to the Funding Request, they're directed to a read-only version of the application that can't be edited.
4. Decision: Which Section Is Displayed? Determines which section of the application to show the grantseeker.
5. Screen: Applicant and Organization Information Lets the grantseeker review and update information about themselves and their organization.
6. Assignment:  Assign Fields Gathers the information the grantseeker added in the Applicant and Organization Information section.
7a. Update Records: Update Funding Request Updates the Funding Request with the information added in the Applicant and Organization Information section.
7b. Screen: Save Error If there's a problem displaying the Funding Request, the grantseeker sees an error message.
8. Assignment: Set Section to Display Determines which section to display to the grantseeker based on which section they click in the navigation.
9. Decision: Which Section Is Displayed? Moves the grantseeker to the next section of the application, the Proposal Summary.
10. Screen: Proposal Summary Lets the grantseeker describe their proposal and indicate the amount they are requesting.
11. Assignment: Assign Fields Gathers the information the grantseeker added in the Proposal Summary.
12a. Update Records: Update Funding Request Updates the Funding Request with the information gathered in the Assign Fields step.
12b. Screen: Save Error If there's a problem displaying the Funding Request, the grantseeker sees an error message.
13. Assignment: Set Section to Display Determines which section to display to the grantseeker based on which section they click in the navigation.
14. Decision: Which Section Is Displayed? Moves the grantseeker to the next section of the application, Attachments.
15. Screen: Attachments Lets the grantseeker add attachments to their application.
16. Assignment: Assign Fields Gathers the information the grantseeker added in Attachments.
17a. Update Records: Update Funding Request Updates the Funding Request with the information gathered in the Assign Fields step.
17b. Screen: Save Error If there's a problem displaying the Funding Request, the grantseeker sees an error message.
18. Assignment: Set Section to Display Determines which section to display to the grantseeker based on which section they click in the navigation.
19. Decision: Which Section Is Displayed? Moves the grantseeker to the last section of the application, Review and Submit.
20. Screen: Review and Submit Lets the grantseeker review their information before submitting. When the grantseekers clicks Submit, the Status changes to Submitted and the application can't be updated. The Submit button appears only when the Funding Request is in the In Progress status.
21a. Update Records: Update Funding Request Updates Funding Request with information confirmed in Review and Submit.
21b. Screen: Save Error If there's a problem displaying the Funding Request, the grantseeker sees an error message.
22. Assignment: Set Section to Display Decides which section to display to the grantseeker based on their navigation selection.
23. Decision: Which Section Is Displayed? Moves the grantseeker to a read-only version of their application.
24. Screen: Read-Only Application Shows a read-only version of the application if the grantseeker has Read access to the Funding Request. The grantseeker won't be able to create or edit an application.
# Grants Management: Send Invitations to Collaborators (Sample) Learn what's included in the Funding Request collaborators invitation flow. Grants Management uses the Grants Management: Send Invitations to Collaborators (Sample) flow to send an email that invites a person to collaborate on a Funding Request. | Flow Element | Action | | --- | --- | | 1\. Start | Includes criteria for when the flow should run. | | 2\. Email Alert: Sent Invite to Collaborator | Emails the invitation to the collaborator using the Grants Management: Email Invitation for Collaborators template. If you want to use a different template, create a new Email Alert that references your template. | ![Send Invitation to Collaborators sample flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flow_send_invite_collaborators.png) # Grants Management: Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample) Learn what's included in the flow that shares the Applying Organization and Applying Contact with a Funding Request Collaborator. Use the Grants Management: Share Account with Collaborators (Sample) flow so collaborators can see information about the Applying Organization and Applying Contact in the grants portal. The Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample) flow: - Assumes Contact sharing is set to Controlled by Parent. - Isn't active by default. Activate and test this flow in a sandbox before using it in production. Record sharing in Salesforce is highly dependent on your org's configuration. | Flow Element | Action | | --- | --- | | 1\. Start | Starts the flow when a collaborator accepts an invitation to collaborate. | | 2\. Decision: Share Applying Organization? | Checks if the Applying Organization should be shared with the Funding Request collaborator. | | 3\. Assignment: Set Applying Organization Sharing | Defines what Applying Organization information to include. | | 4\. Assignment: Add Applying Organization Sharing to List | Adds the information about what to share to a list. | | 5\. Decision: Share Applying Contact Account? | Checks if the Applying Contact's Account should be shared. | | 6\. Assignment: Set Applying Contact Account Sharing | Defines what about the Applying Contact's Account to include. | | 7\. Assignment: Add Applying Contact Account Sharing to List | Adds the information about what to share to a list. | | 8\. Create Records: Insert Account Shares | Using the lists generated in previous steps, adds the Applying Organization and the Applying Contact's Account to the public group to share the Funding Request and related records. | ![Share Account with Collaborators sample flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/flow_share_acct_contact.png) # Grants Management: Validate EIN (Sample) Learn what's included in the flow that validates the tax ID for an applying organization.
Flow Element Description
1. Start  
2. Get Records: Get Account Record Searches for and retrieves the Account record related to this flow.
3. Screen: Check Tax Status Shows the Tax Status Search component to the grantmaker, allowing them to search for a United States-based organization’s EIN and select a valid result.
4. Screen: Selected Match Results Shows tax search results from GuideStar that a grantmaker selected.
5. Assignment: Set Account Fields

Changes the fields on the Account from the selected results, including:

  • Account Name to the Name 

  • Tax ID to the EIN

6. Update Records: Update Account Updates the Account Name and Tax ID fields on the Account record.
7. Screen: Success Message Presents a confirmation message that the Account is updated.
![Step-by-step overview of the Grants Management: Validate EIN (Sample) flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/gm_validateein.png) # Grounding Data for Philanthropic Research Topics in Education Create data that aligns with the philanthropic research topics to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
See Also: - [Ground Agentforce in Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_data.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Knowledge Base with Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_whatis.htm&language=en_US) - [Agent Action: Answer Questions with Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_actions_ref_answer_questions_with_knowledge.htm&language=en_US) # Grounding Data for Philanthropic Research Topics in Nonprofit Create data that aligns with the philanthropic research topics to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
See Also: - [Ground Agentforce in Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_data.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Knowledge Base with Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_whatis.htm&language=en_US) - [Agent Action: Answer Questions with Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_actions_ref_answer_questions_with_knowledge.htm&language=en_US) # Grounding Data for Student Advising Subagents Create data and knowledge articles that align with the student advising subagents to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
Depending on the user's query, the agent: - Uses the Answer Questions with Knowledge action to find information on campus policy. [Create knowledge articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_article_create.htm&language=en_US) on policy guidance to get accurate responses from the agent. - Uses an Einstein search retriever to find information on campus resources. Ensure that data is available and accessible to the agent through data streams configured for Salesforce objects and external objects as needed. See Also: - [Ground Agentforce in Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_data.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Knowledge Base with Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_whatis.htm&language=en_US) - [Agent Action: Answer Questions with Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_actions_ref_answer_questions_with_knowledge.htm&language=en_US) # Handling Anonymous Donors With Salesforce Do you have donors who have asked that a particular gift or all gifts from them remain anonymous? Most nonprofits get this request from time to time, but how this is managed in their database varies greatly. The great thing with Salesforce is you have options to how you ensure the donor's request for anonymity is recognized while maintaining key data for your reporting and record keeping needs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Paige Van Riper, Director of Services at [Cloud for Good](https://cloud4good.com/). - **[Donation Level Anonymity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_handling_anonymous_donors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some donors just wish to have the occasional gift be anonymous for recognition purposes. - **[Donor Level Anonymity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_handling_anonymous_donors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If the donor wishes to always be anonymous there are several ways you can structure that in Salesforce depending on the level of anonymity that is needed. - **[Invisible Donors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_handling_anonymous_donors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the circumstance that the anonymous donor should not be visible to all users, things get more complicated. ## Donation Level Anonymity Some donors just wish to have the occasional gift be anonymous for recognition purposes. In this instance, I recommend creating a custom checkbox field on the Opportunity object and checking that box for those gifts the donor has requested be anonymous. When it comes time to pull lists for your annual report, website, newsletter, donor wall or other form of recognition, make sure you include a filter to exclude those gifts. ## Donor Level Anonymity If the donor wishes to always be anonymous there are several ways you can structure that in Salesforce depending on the level of anonymity that is needed. If it is okay for your staff users to know who the donor is and you simply need to ensure that their gifts are not publicly recognized, you can create a custom field on the Account and Contact objects such as a checkbox called Anonymous and in the help text clarify that checking the box means the donor wishes for all of their gifts to remain anonymous. You would then make sure that any time you run lists or reports for recognition purposes you exclude these folks or, if you include anonymous gifts in your recognition lists, make sure the name is Anonymous on those. If you have a combination of anonymous donors and anonymous gifts you could create a workflow rule that would automatically check the Anonymous box on the opportunity if the Anonymous box was checked on the Account. If the anonymity is indicated at the Contact level and not the Account level you’d need to create a [trigger](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_qs_HelloWorld.htm) to automatically check the box on all Opportunities from that Contact. You could also add a custom text field on Opportunities for recognition name. You could either manually complete that with the name the donor wishes to have used for recognition or you could create a workflow rule that fills that text field with Anonymous if the Anonymous checkbox is checked or the account name from the Opportunity if it is not marked anonymous. ## Invisible Donors In the circumstance that the anonymous donor should not be visible to all users, things get more complicated. With profiles and field level security, you could prevent most users from being able to see a certain field. You wouldn’t want to do this with the standard name fields as obviously your users need to be able to see most donors’ names. What you could do is create a custom field on the Contact (and Account if needed) object for the person’s real name and limit access to this field to only those who should see it. Then you could assign a pseudonym to be used in the standard name fields – you’ll want to have a protocol for how those pseudonyms are created such as Anonymous DonorI, Anonymous DonorII, Anonymous DonorIII, etc. Another approach would be to hide all donation data for anonymous donations from all but a select group of users. To do that you would need to change the Organization Wide Default share settings to Private for Opportunities. Then you can create a sharing rule that shares all donations which are not marked Anonymous will all users. Then create another sharing rule that shares anonymous donations with the select group of users you wish to have access. Keep in mind when users who do not have access to anonymous donations run a report, it will not include anonymous donations in the totals. If your organization shows giving roll-up summaries on the Contact, you may need to adjust the visibility on those fields as well. # Hard Credit vs. Soft Credit Customizable Rollups Understanding how NPSP determines what data rolls up to a hard credit or soft credit Customizable Rollup can be confusing. What makes a Customizable Rollup either a hard credit or soft credit rollup? And how do individual donations (from Contacts) or organization donations (from Organization Accounts) play into all of this? We're going to help you figure it all out! First, let's define what we mean when we say hard credit and soft credit. A hard credit is a credit for a donation that a Contact or Account made. In other words, the donor “signed the check.” A soft credit is a credit for a donation that a Contact or Account did not make themselves, but may have somehow influenced. For example, a Contact's employer sent in a matching gift, or the Contact is a member of the family that made the donation. When creating [Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records."), you decide whether the rollup is for soft credits or hard credits using the Rollup Type field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need a refresher on what rollups are, head on over to the [Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically \"roll up\" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records.") to learn more. Here are the Rollup Types for Contact rollups: ![The Rollup Type field showing the options for Contact rollups.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_rollup_type.png) Here are the Rollup Types for Account rollups: ![The Rollup Type field showing the options for Account rollups.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_rollup_type_acct.png) ## How Hard Credit and Soft Credit Customizable Rollups Work How hard credit and soft credit rollups work depends on whether the donation came from a Contact, a Household Account, or an Organization Account. **Contact and Household Account Donations (Opportunities)** Customizable Rollups created using a Contact (Hard Credit) rollup type are based on the person listed in the Primary Contact field on an Opportunity (the Contact who actually paid for the donation). Customizable Rollups created using a Contact (Soft Credit) rollup type are based on the soft credit Contact Role(s) on an Opportunity. For Household giving, the Primary Contact field on an Opportunity is especially important. When you create an Opportunity where the Opportunity's Primary Contact is automatically populated, such as from an Action on the Contact, that person is listed as the Primary Contact on the Opportunity (in the Primary Contact field) and gets a hard credit. The other Household members get soft credits and are assigned an Opportunity Contact Role (OCR) that is defined as indicating soft credit status (such as Household Member, Soft Credit, Influencer, etc). These roles are created and defined automatically when you started using the NPSP Trial, and were configured in NPSP Settings before Customizable Rollups was released. You now define which OCRs you want a rollup to consider using filter rules (within a filter group) that are applied to the rollup itself. For more information on filter rules and filter groups, see [Create Filter Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important It's important to note that this is different from how hard credit rollups worked before Customizable Rollups came along. Previously, hard credit rollups were based on the Contact with the Opportunity Contact Role marked as Primary. In theory, the Contact with the OCR marked as Primary and the Primary Contact on an Opportunity should be the same, but this isn't always the case, so it's important to note this distinction. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important The concept of Primary Contact can be confusing because there is a Primary Contact on the Account and a Primary Contact on the Opportunity. These are two different fields that affect how hard credits are assigned. If an admin created an Opportunity (donation) from a Household record, the Primary Contact on the Account would automatically be assigned as the Primary Contact on the Opportunity after the record is saved. But, if any of the other Household members make a donation and the Opportunity is created from their own Contact record, that Contact is assigned as the Primary Contact on the Opportunity (we'll show this in the example below). And as we mentioned before, the Primary Contact field on an Opportunity is used for hard credit rollups on Household giving, so it's important to understand how this field gets populated! **Organization Account Donations (Opportunities)** On an Organization Account Opportunity, the Primary Contact isn't required. If there is a Primary Contact listed, an Opportunity Contact Role called “Soft Credit” is automatically created for that Contact. That OCR is also marked Primary. Even though it's marked Primary, since this is an Organization Account donation, the value of the donation is only reflected in the Contact's soft credit totals. So, by default, for Organization Account Opportunities, the Account gets the hard credit and the person listed as the Primary Contact gets a soft credit. For donations that an Account didn't directly make, but may have influenced, you can assign the Account a soft credit with a specific role. Customizable Rollups created using an Opportunity > Account (Account Soft Credit) rollup type are based on the Account Soft Credit role(s) assigned on the Opportunity. When setting up an Account Soft Credit Customizable Rollup, you determine the roles to include within a filter rule (in a filter group), and then assign that filter group to your rollup. ## Example—Household Member Donation Let's look at an example that illustrates how a donation from a Contact within a Household works with Customizable Rollups. The Williams family has three members: Terrance, Josephine, and Dante. Terrance Williams is the Primary Contact on the Williams Household Account. Josephine makes a donation to a local food pantry in the amount of $500, and writes the check from her personal bank account. The food pantry receives the check and pulls up Josephine's Contact record in NPSP. They create the Opportunity in the amount of $500. ![Opportunity record showing that Josephine Williams is the Primary Contact and showing that there are 3 Contact Roles.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_pc_donation.png) You'll notice on the Opportunity record that Josephine Williams is listed as the Primary Contact (1), which means that she will get hard credit for this donation. That hard credit will be reflected in hard credits rollups to the Williams Household Account and in hard credit rollups on Josephine's Contact record. You'll also notice that three Contact Roles (2) were created on this Opportunity. Josephine gets the Donor OCR (with the Primary Checkbox checked), and Terrance and Dante are assigned the Household Members OCR. Terrance and Dante each received soft credit for this donation because they are part of the Williams Household and the Household Member role is designated as a soft credit role. So, now let's look at the Contact records and Account record to see how this all rolls up. First, we'll look at Josephine's Contact record. You see that the Total Gifts field (which is populated by a hard credit rollup) shows the $500 donation. ![Contact record for Jospehine Williams, showing that the Total Gifts field includes the $500 donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_pc_contact_hc.png) Now, if you look at Terrance or Dante's record, you'll see the $500 donation listed in the Soft Credit Totals section, because Terrance received a $500 soft credit for Josephine's donation. ![Contact record for Terrance Williams, showing that the Soft Credit Total rollup field shows the $500 donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_pc_contact_sc.png) And lastly, if you look at the Williams Account record, you'll see (1) the hard credit reflected in the Total Gifts field (which is populated by a hard credit rollup) and (2) the soft credit reflected in the Total Household Member Soft Credits field (which is populated by a rollup created using the Account (Contact Soft Credit) rollup type). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Total Household Member Soft Credit field shows data for a Customizable Rollup we created using the Account (Contact Soft Credit) rollup type. This rollup type doesn't double count soft credits, so if Dante and Terrance each received a $500 soft credit, the field will only show $500. If they each received a partial soft credit for $250, this field will only show $250. ![Account record for the Williams Household, showing that the Total Gifts field includes the $500 donation, and the Total Household Member Soft Credits field also includes the $500 donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_pc_account.png) ## Example—Organization Account Donation Now, let's look at an example that illustrates how a donation from an Organization Account works with Customizable Rollups. Josephine Williams is an employee at ABC Corp., a company that regularly donates to local nonprofits. Because Josephine is so passionate about the food pantry, she recommends to her employer's Foundation group that they make a donation. ABC Corp. agrees to make a $5000 donation and sends a check to the food pantry. The food pantry receives the check and creates an account for ABC Corp. They then create an opportunity for $5000, and since Josephine influenced the donation, list her as the Primary Contact on the Opportunity. ![Opportunity record from ABC Corp with Josephine Williams listed as the Primary Contact, and with a Soft Credit Contact Role.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_org_donation.png) Since this is an Organization Account donation, ABC Corp. will get hard credit for the donation. The $5000 will be reflected in hard credit rollups to the Account. You'll notice on the Opportunity record that Josephine Williams is listed as the Primary Contact (1). You'll also notice that there is a Contact Role (2) for Josephine on this Opportunity. Since Josephine is listed as the Primary Contact on the Opportunity, she was automatically assigned a Contact Role, which means that she will get soft credit. You'll see the $5000 soft credit reflected in soft credit rollups on Josephine's Contact record. Now, let's look at the Account and Contact records to see how this all rolls up. First, we'll look at ABC Corp.'s Account record. You'll see the $5000 hard credit in the Total Gifts field (which is populated by a hard credit rollup). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Contact Role that is automatically assigned to Josephine is determined by the value in the **Contact Role for Organizational Opps** field in NPSP Settings under **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. Keep in mind that the Contact Role assigned to Josephine must be included in a filter group applied to soft credit Customizable Rollups. Otherwise, the donation won't roll up. ![Account record for ABC Corp., showing that the Total Gifts field includes the $5000 donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_org_hc_rollup.png) Now, if we look at Josephine's Contact record, we see the $5000 in the Soft Credit Total field (which is populated by a soft credit rollup), because Josephine received a soft credit for the Organization Account donation. ![Contact record for Josephine Williams, showing that the Soft Credit Total field includes the $5000 donation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_org_sc_rollup.png) # Holds and Blocks Holds and Blocks enforce academic policies on the student body. Registrars can place holds on students who don’t meet specific criteria or requirements to block them from the administrative or academic processes. Students can manage and resolve holds in the Action Center to make sure that they comply with institution-specific policies. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
Here's a scenario. Your institution has an enrollment eligibility policy that requires students to meet certain minimum academic requirements. One of the minimum requirements is a minimum cumulative grade-point average (GPA) of 2.0 for all coursework completed at the university. To enforce this policy, the registrar defines an academic hold that represents all relevant rules and requirements. They then place this hold on students who don’t have the minimum GPA. A student with this hold can’t register for courses. They also receive a task assignment in the Action Center. This task requires the student to meet with their advisor and develop a personalized remedial strategy. After the student completes the task, their advisor clears the hold, and the student can enroll in courses for the next term. ![The Hold Summary tab in the Academic Standing Hold regulatory code record, showing the description, reasons, restrictions, and resolution tasks of this hold.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/regulatory_code_hold_summary.png) Students view all current and past holds placed on them in a dedicated section in their Action Center on the Education Cloud site. A student with holds needs to clear the restrictions before they can proceed with actions such as registering for courses, applying for financial aid, or borrowing books from the library. ![The Restrictions details in the Action Center, showing the description and a task related to a hold that’s currently placed on a student.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/action_center_hold_view.png) To enforce your institutional policies with Holds and Blocks, first prepare your data. Then use a guided setup to define holds. Finally, create records to place holds and prompt students to resolve the holds. Education Cloud provides invocable actions to help you build flows that implement policy rules and enforce holds on a group of students. Registrars can create these policy rules based on expression sets in Business Rules Engine. These rules evaluate students’ compliance with institutional policies and then use invocable actions to place holds on those who fail to meet them. Registrars can also manually place a hold on individual students under specific circumstances, such as a pending financial-aid decision or transcript from an international institution. - **[Holds and Blocks Framework](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_holds_and_blocks_framework.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Regulatory authority, regulation and regulation clause, hold definition, and hold violation objects provide the framework for defining, placing, and resolving student holds. Compliance control objects support rule-based hold creation and assignment at scale. - **[Prepare the Data for Holds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create records that populate the reasons, restrictions, and resolutions of your holds. - **[Define Holds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_define_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a regulatory code record to define a hold. The guided setup for hold definitions ties the authorities, regulation clauses, and action plan templates into one hold definition. - **[Automate Hold Placement on Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_hold_placement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build an automation flow by using invocable actions. Run the flow to run expression sets that evaluate students for hold violations and assign holds to a group of students. - **[Place Holds on Students Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_place_holds_manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the students who are in violation of a regulation clause and create a case for each student. Then create a regulatory code violation record that corresponds to the hold and assign it to each student. - **[Resolve Holds on Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_resolve_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage and resolve holds in each student's case. - **[Make Hold Details Available to Experience Cloud Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_hold_details_in_exp_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the right permissions to students and add hold details to your Experience Cloud site for students to resolve their holds. # Holds and Blocks Framework Regulatory authority, regulation and regulation clause, hold definition, and hold violation objects provide the framework for defining, placing, and resolving student holds. Compliance control objects support rule-based hold creation and assignment at scale. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
Holds and Blocks start with an office or administrative body that’s responsible for defining and managing holds. Each hold has three aspects: reasons, restrictions, and resolutions. Several objects feed data into these aspects. Additional objects store the definition of each hold, create instances of a hold violation, and place a restriction on a student. These objects support the Holds and Blocks system. ## Regulatory Authority Regulatory Authority Represents the office or administrative body that defines regulations and manages holds in your institution, such as a department, the library, or the registrar’s office. Define regulatory authorities for your institution as needed. ## Hold Definition Objects A reason uses these objects. Regulation Represents the regulatory authority’s policies. Each regulation record groups regulation clause records that represent policies in the same category. Regulation Version Stores the effective start and end dates that represent the lifetime of a regulation. Each regulation record has related regulation version records. Regulation Clause Describes a specific policy for which the institution places a hold. Regulation Clause Version Stores the effective start and end dates that represent the lifecycle of a regulation clause. Each regulation clause record has related regulation clause version records. Regulation Version Clause Version A junction that connects a regulation and a regulation clause. A restriction uses these objects. Business Operations Process Describes the process that’s under restriction. For example, a restriction that blocks students from course registration. Each business operations process record needs to be mapped to a regulation clause version. A mapped regulation clause version defines the validity period of a reason-restriction pairing that applies to a hold violation. A resolution uses these objects. Action Plan Template Represents a task assigned to a student to resolve a restriction. ## Hold Definitions A hold definition uses these objects. Regulatory Code Represents the definition of a hold. A hold definition connects regulatory authorities, regulation clauses, and action plan templates. ## Hold Violations A hold violation uses these objects. Regulatory Code Violation Represents an instance of a hold that's placed on a student. Regulatory Code Violation Regulation Clause Version A junction that connects a hold violation (regulatory code violation) to a specific rule (regulation clause version) in a hold that a student fails to meet. ## Rule-based Hold Creation and Assignment Your institution can take a rule-driven approach to enforce holds on students at scale. These objects implement policy rules that evaluate students and assign holds to them. Compliance Control Describes and defines a category of policy rules. Each compliance control record holds multiple compliance control version records. Compliance Control Version Stores a policy rule that’s based on an expression set. Regulation Clause Compliance Control Version A junction that connects a regulation clause version record to a compliance control version record. This connection gives the regulation clause version access to the expression set that’s used to evaluate students against specific rules in a hold. SEE ALSO: - [Academic Operations Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/academic-operations.html) - [Process Compliance Navigator Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.business_compliance_suite_data_model.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Understand Regulatory Compliance in Public Sector Solutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.psc_understand_regulatory_authorization.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Create Regulations and Associate Them with Business Operations Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.business_compliance_suite_regulation_creation.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Business Rules Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.business_rules_engine.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Expression Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.expression_sets.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Context Definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_context_definitions.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Household Account Rollups in Education Rollups for household accounts aggregate gift data from the household and all its members. Learn what a household account is, the requirements to set it up, and how household rollups differ from individual donor rollups. Fundraising calculates rollups for households, individuals, and business or organizations, and manages them all as account records. The main difference between these groups is scope. Individual and business rollups focus strictly on their specific gift transactions and soft credits. Household rollups provide a broader view by consolidating the transactions and soft credits of every member within that household. ## What Is a Household Account? A household account is a non-person account that has one related party relationship group record with the type Household. A household member is a person account that is associated with the household through an account contact relationship record. ## Household Rollups Prerequisites To show rollup data for household accounts, make sure that you complete these requirements: - [Assign Fundraising licenses and permissions to users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_assign_fundraising_permission_sets.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Turn on person accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_person_accounts_for_fundraising.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Assign the Group Membership permission set to necessary users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_editions_permissions.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Set up Contacts to Multiple Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.shared_contacts_set_up.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Turn on Data Pipelines for the Data Processing Engine (DPE)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_intro.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Run or schedule the DonorGiftSummary DPE job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## How Household Rollup Data Is Aggregated The Data Processing Engine (DPE) collects and flattens data before calculating household rollup values through gift transactions and soft credits. Gift Transactions The DPE collects gift transactions belonging directly to the household account and gift transactions where the donor is a household member. The DPE groups all of these gift transactions under the household and calculates them together. Soft Credits The DPE collects soft credits at the household member level. Multiple household members can each receive a soft credit tied to the same gift transaction. To prevent double-counting, the DPE removes duplicate soft credits so that the household rollup includes only one soft credit per unique gift transaction. ## How Donor Gift Summary Fields Work for Households Fundraising calculates the fields on the donor giving summary object similarly for households, individuals, and businesses. The main difference is that the source data includes the household's own records plus those records of all its members. The Soft Credit Summary fields also apply deduplication logic.
Donor Giving Summary Rollup Fields Household Behavior
Recurring Gift Summary
  • Current Recurring Gift Start Date
  • First Recurring Gift Start Date
  • Last Recurring Gift Payment Date
  • Total Paid Recurring Installments
  • Total Paid Recurring Installments Amount
 Aggregated across the household and all its members.
Soft Credit Summary
  • First Soft Credit Amount
  • First Soft Credit Date
  • Highest Soft Credit Amount
  • Highest Soft Credit Date
  • Last Soft Credit Amount
  • Last Soft Credit Date
  • Soft Credit Count
  • Total Hard and Soft Credit Amount
  • Total Hard and Soft Credits
 If you tie the soft credit directly to the household account instead of a member, gift soft credits don't roll up to these fields. Duplicate soft credits tied to the same gift transaction count only one time. However, if you link a gift transaction to one household member and soft credit another member, the Total Hard and Soft Credit Amount field doesn't deduplicate.
Notable Gift Metrics
  • Average Gift Amount
  • Best Gift Year
  • First Gift Amount
  • First Gift Campaign
  • Gift Count
  • Highest Gift Amount
  • Highest Gift Year Amount
 Aggregated across the household's own gifts and all members' gifts.
Gift History
  • First Gift Date
  • Gifts Last Year Amount
  • Gifts Two Years Ago Amount
  • Last Two Years Gift Count
  • Last Year Gift Count
  • Lowest Gift Amount
  • Second Gift Date
  • Total Gifts Amount
 Aggregated across the household's own gifts and all members' gifts.
Gift Year Summary
  • Current Year Gift Count
  • Days Since Last Gift
  • Gifts This Year Amount
  • Last Gift Amount
  • Last Gift Date
 Aggregated across the household's own gifts and all members' gifts.
Pledged Revenue
  • Booked Pledges
  • Total Bookable Revenue
 Aggregated across the household and all its members.
See Also: - [Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_start_configure_new_data_processing_engine.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Household Account Rollups in Nonprofit Rollups for household accounts aggregate gift data from the household and all its members. Learn what a household account is, the requirements to set it up, and how household rollups differ from individual donor rollups. Fundraising calculates rollups for households, individuals, and business or organizations, and manages them all as account records. The main difference between these groups is scope. Individual and business rollups focus strictly on their specific gift transactions and soft credits. Household rollups provide a broader view by consolidating the transactions and soft credits of every member within that household. ## What Is a Household Account? A household account is a non-person account that has one related party relationship group record with the type Household. A household member is a person account that is associated with the household through an account contact relationship record. ## Household Rollups Prerequisites To show rollup data for household accounts, make sure that you complete these requirements: - [Assign Fundraising licenses and permissions to users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_assign_fundraising_permission_sets.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Turn on person accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_person_accounts_for_fundraising.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Assign the Group Membership permission set to necessary users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_editions_permissions.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Set up Contacts to Multiple Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.shared_contacts_set_up.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Turn on Data Pipelines for the Data Processing Engine (DPE)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_intro.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Run or schedule the DonorGiftSummary DPE job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## How Household Rollup Data Is Aggregated The Data Processing Engine (DPE) collects and flattens data before calculating household rollup values through gift transactions and soft credits. Gift Transactions The DPE collects gift transactions belonging directly to the household account and gift transactions where the donor is a household member. The DPE groups all of these gift transactions under the household and calculates them together. Soft Credits The DPE collects soft credits at the household member level. Multiple household members can each receive a soft credit tied to the same gift transaction. To prevent double-counting, the DPE removes duplicate soft credits so that the household rollup includes only one soft credit per unique gift transaction. ## How Donor Gift Summary Fields Work for Households Fundraising calculates the fields on the donor giving summary object similarly for households, individuals, and businesses. The main difference is that the source data includes the household's own records plus those records of all its members. The Soft Credit Summary fields also apply deduplication logic.
Donor Giving Summary Rollup Fields Household Behavior
Recurring Gift Summary
  • Current Recurring Gift Start Date
  • First Recurring Gift Start Date
  • Last Recurring Gift Payment Date
  • Total Paid Recurring Installments
  • Total Paid Recurring Installments Amount
 Aggregated across the household and all its members.
Soft Credit Summary
  • First Soft Credit Amount
  • First Soft Credit Date
  • Highest Soft Credit Amount
  • Highest Soft Credit Date
  • Last Soft Credit Amount
  • Last Soft Credit Date
  • Soft Credit Count
  • Total Hard and Soft Credit Amount
  • Total Hard and Soft Credits
 If you tie the soft credit directly to the household account instead of a member, gift soft credits don't roll up to these fields. Duplicate soft credits tied to the same gift transaction count only one time. However, if you link a gift transaction to one household member and soft credit another member, the Total Hard and Soft Credit Amount field doesn't deduplicate.
Notable Gift Metrics
  • Average Gift Amount
  • Best Gift Year
  • First Gift Amount
  • First Gift Campaign
  • Gift Count
  • Highest Gift Amount
  • Highest Gift Year Amount
 Aggregated across the household's own gifts and all members' gifts.
Gift History
  • First Gift Date
  • Gifts Last Year Amount
  • Gifts Two Years Ago Amount
  • Last Two Years Gift Count
  • Last Year Gift Count
  • Lowest Gift Amount
  • Second Gift Date
  • Total Gifts Amount
 Aggregated across the household's own gifts and all members' gifts.
Gift Year Summary
  • Current Year Gift Count
  • Days Since Last Gift
  • Gifts This Year Amount
  • Last Gift Amount
  • Last Gift Date
 Aggregated across the household's own gifts and all members' gifts.
Pledged Revenue
  • Booked Pledges
  • Total Bookable Revenue
 Aggregated across the household and all its members.
See Also: - [Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_start_configure_new_data_processing_engine.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_track_gift_donor_trends_rollups.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # How Data Integrity Manages Address Standardization Incorrectly formatted addresses are costly and can lead to undeliverable mail. Address standardization in Data Integrity helps you avoid incorrectly formatted addresses by making updates based on the specific standards of your locale's postal authority. This includes city names, street abbreviations, and more. The only requirement is [selecting your base country](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ip_install_data_integrity.htm). Schedule one-time or recurring address standardization updates to ensure that your constituent addresses meet local postal service standards. Address standardization changes the Address on the Household Account; unlike NPSP address verification, address standardization doesn't create a new Address record. In addition to address standardization, you can also use [address verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm) in NPSP to see if addresses exist when you try to add them. However, using both services may be more costly. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_note.png) Note Be sure that your data is backed up before proceeding. See [Export Backup Data from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # How Einstein Generative AI Works With Your Salesforce Data (Beta) Einstein Generative AI uses data from Salesforce to automatically generate helpful documents. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note These Generative AI features are limited to 100 related records. For example, when the Einstein Notes Summary is started from an account record, it can consume up to 100 of the account's related records as grounding data. Einstein Program and Benefits Summary uses data from the Program and Benefits objects in Salesforce. Blank fields aren’t omitted from response generation and can result in incomplete outputs. For the best results, make sure that data is populated in these fields. - Benefits object fields - BenefitStatus - Description - IsActive - Name - Program object field: Name Einstein Notes Summary uses data from the Account, Interaction, and Interaction Summary objects in Salesforce. Blank fields aren’t omitted from response generation and can result in incomplete outputs. For the best results, make sure that data is populated in these fields. - Interaction object fields - Description - InteractionType - Name - StartTime - Interaction Summary object fields - MeetingNotes - Name - NextSteps - Status - Person Account object field: Name ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). Einstein Board Version of Grant Application uses data from the Individual Application and Application Review objects in Salesforce. Blank fields aren’t omitted from response generation and can result in incomplete outputs. For the best results, make sure that data is populated in these fields. - Application Review object fields - ApplicationRecommendation - Comment - DueDate - Status - SubmissionDate - Funding Opportunity object fields - Description - Name - Individual Application object fields - Account.Name - Account.Type - ApplicationName - AppliedDate - ApprovedDate - Category - Description - FundingRequestPurpose - RequestedAmount Einstein Funding Award Summary uses data from the Funding Award, Funding Award Requirement, Indicator Performance Period, Indicator Results, and Funding Disbursement objects in Salesforce. Blank fields aren’t omitted from response generation and can result in incomplete outputs. For the best results, make sure that data is populated in these fields. - Funding Award object fields - Account.Name - Amount - DecisionDate - EndDate - Name - StartDate - Status - Funding Award Requirement object fields - DueDate - Name - Status - Type - Funding Disbursement object fields - Amount - DisbursementDate - DisbursementName - PaymentMethodType - ScheduledDate - Status - Funding Opportunity object fields - Description - Name - Indicator Performance Period object fields - Description - Name - TargetProgress - Indicator Results object fields - Description - Name - ResultValue - Type # How GEM Can Make a Difference for Your Institution Learn how Gift Entry Management supports fundraising operations for higher ed advancement. - **[A Gift Entry Solution for Higher Ed Advancement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_can_make_a_difference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** GEM is designed to help you streamline the most complicated parts of tracking and entering gifts. - **[Process Gifts Singly or in Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_can_make_a_difference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Single Gift Entry from GEM to enter single gifts, or the NPSP Gift Entry Tool to enter large numbers of gifts. - **[Account for All Gift Stages with Required Financial Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_can_make_a_difference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Payment Allocations to specify designations for gifts at the payment level. - **[Take Advantage of the Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_can_make_a_difference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the standard features of the Salesforce Platform, such as Contacts and Opportunities, to help manage your donations and donors. ## A Gift Entry Solution for Higher Ed Advancement GEM is designed to help you streamline the most complicated parts of tracking and entering gifts. GEM helps you streamline the most complicated parts of tracking and entering gifts—complex reconciliations, varying gift amounts, multiple fund allocations, and multi-year pledges. With Education Data Architecture (EDA) as its base, GEM is designed to support fundraising operations for higher ed advancement. GEM also includes functionality from Non-Profit Success Pack (NPSP), so that EDA-based orgs can adopt a veteran suite of nonprofit fundraising features, including: - **Fundraising architecture**—Use custom fields and objects from NPSP, specifically designed for tracking donors and their gifts. - **Gift Entry**—Add large batches of data, on the order of tens of thousands of records, at once. Use NPSP Data Importer to enter groups of contacts and organizations, and use Gift Entry to enter collections of gifts and payments. - **Customizable Rollups**—Get visibility into important statistics such as a donor’s total lifetime giving, the total allocated to a specific fund, or a contact’s total influence via soft credits. ## Process Gifts Singly or in Batch Use Single Gift Entry from GEM to enter single gifts, or the NPSP Gift Entry Tool to enter large numbers of gifts. GEM features Single Gift Entry, which lets you enter all the important information about a single gift in a single form. We recommend using it for scheduled payments, gifts as part of a campaign, gifts that have been matched by another organization, or tribute gifts in honor or memory of another person. See [Get to Know the Single Gift Entry Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_to_know_single_gift_entry_form.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how the Single Gift Entry Form saves you time by letting you enter all the details of a gift on one page.") for more information. NPSP includes the Gift Entry tool, which is useful for entering large numbers of simple, single gifts in a uniform way. It's designed for fast, keyboard-based data entry. See [Gift Entry Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm) in the NPSP Documentation for more information. Because GEM is built on the Salesforce Platform, you can also create gifts through APIs and external tools like MuleSoft or Data Loader. These methods are, of course, more involved. ## Account for All Gift Stages with Required Financial Data Use Payment Allocations to specify designations for gifts at the payment level. Allocations (often called designations) track the funds (known as General Accounting Units, or GAUs) that the gift should be assigned to. GEM allows Allocations to be set at a more granular level than just the gift itself. With the addition of Payment Allocations, you can adjust the designations for each payment if desired. No need to create separate gifts just to accept one payment with a different allocation split! For example, a donor might designate half of their donation to a specific scholarship and the other half for unrestricted use. GEM applies 50/50 Allocations to the entire gift but they can be individualized for specific Payment records. Opportunity-level Allocations are known as GAU Allocations, and the Payment-level Allocations are known as Payment Allocations. They both share a single object, GAU Allocation. ## Take Advantage of the Salesforce Platform Use the standard features of the Salesforce Platform, such as Contacts and Opportunities, to help manage your donations and donors. The power of the Salesforce Platform gives you access to Contacts, Opportunities, and other Salesforce records used for managing donations and donors, whether they come from individuals, organizations, or third-party donors. You can also add custom fields to each object as needed. Everything in your Salesforce org is available for use by other parts of the platform, such as Reports, Campaigns/marketing tools, or other apps and integrations. # How Learners and Advisors Experience the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine Learners access the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine through your Education Portal, either directly from the page that houses the engine or from the Summary page of a learning program. Staff, such as advisors, access the engine using a button that you add to an object layout, for example Case.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Learners and advisors can choose up to three program plans to compare, with the option to include the one that a learner is currently enrolled in. ![Intelligent Program Comparison Engine selection view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_program_selection.png) The Intelligent Program Comparison Engine provides a detailed view of the requirements that the learner has fulfilled against each program. ![Intelligent Program Comparison Engine comparison view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_program_comparison.png) Learners and advisors can also generate, download, and print a What-If report for a detailed audit of a program's required and elective coursework, and the elements that the learner fulfilled. ![Intelligent Program Comparison Engine What-If report](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_what_if_report.png) # How Learners Experience the Intelligent Degree Planner Learners access the Intelligent Degree Planner through your Education Portal. They can use the drag-and-drop interface to visualize their complete learning journey with your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Intelligent Degree Planner user interface includes these main components: the planning canvas (1) and the requirements panel (2). ![Intelligent Degree Planner student view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/student_degree_planner.png) If you create learner pathway templates, learners can start off with a template by using the Apply Template link. If there are no templates available, learners can create a pathway from scratch by clicking **Add Year**. Learners begin planning by laying out years, terms, and sessions on the canvas. Terms and sessions are nested within years. The requirements panel acts like a staging area for the canvas and tracks the number of unplanned units. Learners load the panel with up to 10 required courses, placeholders, and optional courses. They then drag each course to a session on the canvas. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The learner program and learner program requirements defined in the learner's learning program plan determine the courses that can be added to the requirements panel. As learners move courses from the requirements panel to the canvas, the number of unplanned units on the requirements panel (3) decreases and the number of planned units on the canvas (4) increases accordingly. Their saved changes are also reflected in the learner progress view. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If a course is in more than one section of the requirements panel, moving that course to the canvas decreases the number of unplanned units shown for each section. The Intelligent Degree Planner notifies learners if they plan a course without planning its associated prerequisites or corequisites. It also alerts learners if a planned course violates custom rules. Notifications include the names of missing requirements, their categories, or direct links to course detail pages. Learners can view the complete list of prerequisites and corequisites on the course detail pages. ![Notification of missing prerequisites in Intelligent Degree Planner](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_intelligent_degree_planner_notifications.png) When a learner completes the creation of a plan, they can submit it to their advisor for review and approval depending on the planner's configuration. They can view their drafts and approved degree plans in the portal. SEE ALSO - [Create a Policy Rule for Learning Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_policy_rule_for_learning_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a policy rule using an expression set in Business Rules Engine (BRE) that can be applied as a learning requirement for a course or program.") - [Automate Processes in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_processes_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Salesforce tools to automate your academic processes, verify identities, create assessments, and provide services to constituents.") # How NPSP Data Importer Processes Data Use NPSP Data Importer for regular data import and custom integrations. It's also the engine that powers Gift Entry and Elevate. The NPSP Data Importer, along with Advanced Mapping, provides the automation and logic that allows admins, developers, and Salesforce products to import constituent and donation data into the appropriate NPSP and standard Salesforce objects. Use NPSP Data Importer for regular data import and custom integrations. It's also the engine that powers Gift Entry and Elevate. Here's a high-level summary of the process: 1. Admins, developers, or Salesforce products create NPSP Data Import records that contain constituent and donation data. 2. Admins, developers, or Salesforce products, process the NPSP Data Import records using NPSP Data Importer. The Advanced Mapping configuration determines how fields from the NPSP Data Import records map to the appropriate NPSP and standard Salesforce fields. 3. The NPSP Data Importer updates the NPSP Data Import records to show which records succeeded and which failed to generate the expected NPSP and standard Salesforce records. 4. Admins fix the errors on failed NPSP Data Import records and reprocess them with NPSP Data Importer. Learn more about NPSP Data Importer in [How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about the import process.") and Advanced Mapping in [Advanced Mapping Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adv_mapping_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities."). ![NPSP Data Import flow diagram.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/npsp-di-workflow.png) Let's look at an example of the NPSP Data Importer in action. New Careers, a nonprofit organization, hosts free webinars to promote their job coaching program. New Careers wants to track attendance to measure the connection between webinar attendees and program enrollment. New Careers uses Campaigns to track webinar details such as event title and date. They use the Attended Status on the Campaign Member object to track attendance. An admin imports a spreadsheet with the following data into NPSP: - Contact First Name - Contact Last Name - Contact Email - Campaign Name (Winter 2021 Career Coaching Webinar) - Campaign Member Status (Attended) NPSP creates one NPSP Data Import record for each spreadsheet row. The admin processes these records using the NPSP Data Importer. During import, NPSP uses data from each NPSP Data Import record to create one Contact and one Campaign Member associated with the webinar Campaign. The Household Account model in NPSP also automatically creates a Household Account for each Contact. Additional NPSP logic prevents the creation of any duplicate records present in the import spreadsheet. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To prevent duplicates, the NPSP Data Importer attempts to match incoming data with existing records. Learn more about matching settings and how to adjust them in [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching."). And just like that, the nonprofit admin is all done importing webinar attendees! The NPSP Data Importer can do this and much more. If the webinar was a paid event, include ticket revenue information and fund allocations. You can even map NPSP Data Import records to your own custom objects with Advanced Mapping. # How Proxy Identity is Resolved For Delegated Access When a student names a proxy, the proxy's first name, last name, and email address are matched with an existing contact and user record. If a contact record exists for the proxy, Salesforce uses the information. If no contact record exists, Salesforce sends a sign-up email. If Salesforce finds a user record for the proxy but no contact record exists, Salesforce sends a sign-up email to invite the proxy to create an Experience Cloud person account.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
This decision matrix describes the matching logic and subsequent actions: | Contact | User | Contact-Contact Relationship | Action | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Yes | Yes | Yes | The student is all set to delegate access. If a contact maps to multiple user records, Salesforce sets the access delegation request status to In Review so that the correct contact can be identified. | | Yes | Yes | No | Create the contact contact relationship, and then share. Because the contact and portal user record already exist, Salesforce doesn't send a sign-up email. | | Yes | No | Yes | Create the portal user, and then share. Because the contact is known, Salesforce provisions the portal user. To add information on the profile to be associated when a user is created and other details, update the Create Delegated User and Contact-Contact Relation flow. | | Yes | No | No | Create the portal user and contact contact relationship, and then share. Because the contact is found, the system creates the remaining records. To add information on the profile to be associated when a user is created and other details, update the Create Delegated User and Contact-Contact Relation flow. | | No | Yes | No | Send the sign-up email. The existing user record is likely an Education Cloud user. Because the proxy requires an Experience Cloud person account, Salesforce sends an invitation to sign up. | | No | No | No | Send the sign-up email. Because no contact or user record exists, Salesforce invites the proxy to self-register on the portal. | | No | Yes | Yes | A contact-contact relationship can’t exist without a contact. | | No | No | Yes | A contact-contact relationship can’t exist without a contact. | # How Success Teams Work Use Salesforce case objects to model success teams in an educational institution. Define advising workspaces, staff roles, and team structures.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use these Salesforce case objects to model your institution's advising structure. Case record types Define the different advising workspaces that your institution supports, such as Academic Advising, Career Advising, or Wellbeing. Each record type represents a distinct support context with its own processes, visibility, and staffing model. Case team roles Define the role that each support staff member plays and their level of access to the learner's advising case. Roles control whether a member has read, write, or no access to case data. Case team members Represent the individual staff assigned directly to a learner's advising workspace and customize support to each learner's unique needs. Predefined case teams Group staff members and their roles into reusable teams. Assign these teams directly to a learner's advising workspace or use them as support pools to provide flexible access to unassigned advisors. When personnel changes, update the predefined case team once; your changes apply everywhere you use that team. ## Success Team Records In an educational institution, a success team is a full network of support staff involved in the learner’s educational journey. At the same time, Success Team is an object in Education Cloud. After you define your advising workspaces and support structures, create success team records to configure how to deliver learner support. A success team record serves two purposes: - A success team record identifies a case record type as an advising workspace, enabling it for learner support. - A success team record can optionally associate a predefined case team as a support pool, making unassigned advisors available for appointment scheduling. Institutions have flexibility in how they structure support. Some advising workspaces use only assigned members and teams, requiring a success team record solely to activate the workspace. Others can also connect one or more support pools to provide broader access to unassigned advisors. Use multiple success team records when a single advising workspace needs multiple support pools. See Also: - [Success Teams for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success teams connect learners with the advisors and support staff who help them throughout their entire educational journey.") - [Support Pool Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_and_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success team records determine which support pools are available for a given advising workspace and whether learners can book appointments directly.") - [Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure case team objects, create success team records, and assign support staff to learner advising cases.") # How the Import Process Works Find out more about the import process. - **[A Step-by-Step Look at the Import Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to get donor data into Salesforce. - **[Why is It so Complicated?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You may be thinking that this process seems awfully complicated. You may also be wondering why we need an intermediate step of uploading data to the NPSP Data Import custom object. What's its purpose? ## A Step-by-Step Look at the Import Process Follow these steps to get donor data into Salesforce. 1. **[Prepare Salesforce for Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions."):** Get your Salesforce org set up and ready to receive your data set. 2. **[Prepare Your Data for Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_using_di_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here to learn how to use the NPSP Data Import Templates for your imports."):** Clean your data and put it in the [NPSP Data Importer Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these templates to import your data into Salesforce using the NPSP Data Importer object."), which mirrors the fields in the NPSP Data Import custom object. 3. **[Import to NPSP Data Import Custom Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer."):** You can use the application of your choice to import your CSV data into the NPSP Data Import object. The instructions we provide in these docs highlight using the Salesforce Data Import Wizard. But you can instead use an external data import application—such as Salesforce Data Loader, DemandTools, Apsona, Jitterbit, and Informatica—to upload your data to Salesforce. (This is the first part of the two-part import process.) 4. **[Set Up Matching and Do a Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import."):** If you already have records in your org and want to check to see if the records you're about to upload match any of those existing records, you can do a dry run. The Dry Run works like the import process, but doesn't actually import the records. This helps to prevent duplicates in your org and helps you avoid updating an existing record with incorrect data. If you'd like to save any of these NPSP Data Import configuration options, see [Batch Import Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_import_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The ability to import data in batches can be very useful. Batch Data Import allows you to have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options (instead of using the default settings)."). 5. **[Process Your Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity."):** Start the NPSP Data Import tool, which takes the organized data from the custom object's records and imports them into the Nonprofit Success Pack as multiple objects, including Contacts, Accounts, and donations (Opportunities). (This is the second part of the two-part import process.) 6. **[Delete Imported Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_imported_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you've successfully imported your records, you can optionally reduce data storage by deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object. Deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object does not delete your new Account, Contact, or Opportunity donation records."):** After you've successfully imported your records, you can optionally reduce data storage by deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object. After you complete this process, your data will reside in the following Salesforce objects created from the import process: - Contacts (donors, volunteers, advocates, and other constituents in NPSP) - Accounts (households or organizations in NPSP) - Opportunities (donations, grants, and the like in NPSP) - NPSP Payments - Campaigns - Additional objects you add to the NPSP Data Importer ## Why is It so Complicated? You may be thinking that this process seems awfully complicated. You may also be wondering why we need an intermediate step of uploading data to the NPSP Data Import custom object. What's its purpose? Without this custom object, you'd need to transfer your existing data into multiple spreadsheets—each one representing a table of Contacts, Accounts, donations (Opportunities), and so on. Then you'd need to import each spreadsheet into Salesforce, individually and in the correct sequence. First create Accounts, then Contacts, and so on. After each import, you'd need to export the data from Salesforce, get unique IDs for records, and create relationships between these records and the records in your other spreadsheets. The NPSP Data Importer not only creates exactly the objects you need from the single NPSP Data Import custom object, but it also avoids creating duplicates of existing Contacts and Accounts. We won't go into more detail here, but believe us when we say that the NPSP Data Import object can save you hours of work! # How to Manage Reports: A Guide for Admins Learn how to administer NPSP reports, ensure reliable reports, and improve the user experience. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_to_manage_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about common challenges with creating reports in NPSP. - **[The Road to Reliable Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_to_manage_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reports are a measure of the health of your data first and an analytic tool second. Before your organization can effectively use reports, you must fix any problems with your data. - **[Improve the User Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_to_manage_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it easier for users to navigate reports in NPSP. Settle on naming conventions, remove unused report types, and understand report security settings. - **[Additional Tips and Tricks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_to_manage_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Periodically tidy up your reports to remove ones that aren't used. Create a report that shows records that don't have related records. Use the Power of One to count related records in a report. ## Overview Learn about common challenges with creating reports in NPSP. People get really excited about reports. It's no surprise. Reports make your data come to life. With Salesforce reports, mailing lists are a breeze, beautiful dashboards are born, and actionable insights are discovered. However, reports can also lead to confusion and frustration. Some common challenges for users are: - Unfamiliarity with the reports that already exist in their org. - Too many reports that appear to be similar yet provide conflicting information. - Lack of trust that the data being displayed in a report reflects the truth. - Users need to adjust fields/filters for a reporting scenario and are unsure how to. - Users feel the need to create one-off reports for each reporting need that occurs. - There's a sense that "my reports" are the real ones and "your reports" are probably wrong. As a database admin, what are some things you can do to improve this situation? How can you empower yourself and the users you manage? In this guide, we'll explore some actions you can take. Effective report management involves careful attention to data quality, security, naming conventions, folder management, and staff training. With some effort you can help create an environment of trusted, coherent, and maintainable reports for your organization. _Major portions of this guide were conceived during the Portland Open Source Community Sprint in 2018. [Open Source Commons & Community Sprints](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000gwvksa0) are two-day events where the community of users, admins, implementation partners, app partners, and developers come together to make the ecosystem around our products better for everyone. Salesforce.org would like to thank the following contributors:_ ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Clement Chan, Adam Kramer, Steve Kubiak, Jessica Kwok, Clair Lam, Sara Ogilvie, Jordan Ostapiuk, and Deepa Patel ## The Road to Reliable Reports Reports are a measure of the health of your data first and an analytic tool second. Before your organization can effectively use reports, you must fix any problems with your data. You can't analyze your data if you don't have quality data. You also need a firm grasp on where the data lives in your database and what that data represents. If you try to create reports without addressing data quality and subject matter knowledge, chaos and confusion reigns. Let's explore some ways to improve the state of your data and your understanding of it. ### Know Your Database You can't create useful reports unless you understand where the data lives in your database and what that data represents. For instance, consider what information you need to create your next fundraising appeal list. Lists like this are often a combination of several pieces of information. You might need to know: - Who has already donated this year? - What is their mailing address? - Does your donor have a preferred name or salutation? - Who has opted out of solicitation mailings? - Who are your current board members, regardless of their donor history? - Who are your recently active volunteers who might be ready to donate for the first time? Solicitation lists can be complex to compile, especially if key reporting data is spread out among too many records, or too many fields. If you don't know for sure where all the data that represents these various facets is located, you’ll struggle with creating this report. ### Missing or Inconsistent Data Even if you know how to find the relevant data to compose your invitation list, you’ll still have problems if the data itself isn't reliable. Let's look at some examples: - You want to invite all your board members to an important event but you've been lazy about keeping the board info up-to-date. The new appointments are missing and those who have stepped off the board are still on your list. - Your membership manager missed putting in the period of membership dates correctly so all the newest members don’t have the right Member Status. - Your volunteer data entry person got confused and started putting email addresses in the Contact Description field. Do any of these scenarios sound familiar? These are problems that you need to address before you can reliably report on this data. When you're building out your report library, expect that the first time you run your report you're going to find things that need fixing. Data quality is like a threshold reminding you that you still have work to do! A great way to stay on top of data quality is to create a "Wall of Zeros" dashboard. Create a report for each of these items and display the record count of each on a dashboard: - Closed Donations without a Related Campaign - New Donors without a Lead Source - Payments without Payment Methods - Accounts without Contacts - Donors with no Address Info - Contacts with Duplicate Email Addresses ![Example of a Wall of Zeros dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/wall-of-zeros2.png) What other "zeros" can you think of to look for? ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Terry Cole for this awesome idea and screenshot example! ### Finding the Truth Pursuing data quality can be fruitless if you and your staff can't agree on what makes quality data in the first place. You need to have consistent processes for how you handle the data and clear definitions of terms. That can be a lot harder to do than it sounds! Here's an example from a fictional organization. Eli is the Development Director at a performing arts organization running a multi-year capital campaign to build a new theatre venue. Whenever he runs a report to check the total-to-date fundraising for the campaign, an argument ensues about the numbers. Eli's report says one thing, Hannah's finance report says something else, and Darby the Executive Director has a third report that she presents to the board. No one can agree on what the real campaign totals are. Why is this so? Eli decides to find out. He begins by performing a line by line reconciliation of gifts between the three different reports. After a few weeks of digging through the records, Eli discovers that the way pledges have been recorded has changed over time, and several prospective pledges were entered as if they were signed and ready to be fulfilled. The finance office was only counting cash flow, not the informal pledge promises. But Eli didn’t want to discount those prospective gifts, and made sure to include them in his report. Eli meets with Hannah and Darby to discuss the issue. They decide to remove some of the informal pledges as those pledges were never real commitments and no money had been realized yet. The group also agreed on some additional rules about pledge tracking. It took some time, but guess what happened. The staff began agreeing on the campaign numbers, and actually trusting the database as the single source of truth. The problem was ultimately not that Eli didn't know how to create reports (he certainly does!) but rather that there was never an agreed upon process for how pledges were supposed to be entered. ### Additional Data Quality Resources - [Explore Data Quality Fundamentals](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/explore-data-quality-fundamentals) - [Protect Your Salesforce Data](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/security) - [Duplicate Management](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/sales_admin_duplicate_management) ## Improve the User Experience Make it easier for users to navigate reports in NPSP. Settle on naming conventions, remove unused report types, and understand report security settings. ### Naming Convention Establishing a naming standard for reports is an essential way to improve the user experience for your staff. People have an easier time searching for the reports they need when the names are in a predictable format. Here are some examples of well-formatted report names: - All Oregon Contacts with Emails - New Contacts this Year - Open Cases by User Over 30 Days Old - Households with Donations Last Year - Fundraising Event Attendees Last Year - Open Opportunities Older Than 90 Days You might notice that there's a pattern to these names. The report names are written in a format like this: ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Report names are limited to a maximum of 40 characters. Use your characters wisely! **\[Status\] \[Object\] \[Timeframe\]** Make sense? Let's look at "Open Opportunities Older Than 90 Days". - Status = Open - Object = Opportunities - Timeframe = Older Than 90 Days A naming format like this helps you understand what's in the report (Opportunities), and what filters the report is using (Open, Older than 90 Days). While you won't be able to make every report fit cleanly into this format, make your best attempt to do so. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Status here could mean many things such as "Open", "New", "Closed", or "Approved". In this context, status doesn't refer to a field literally called Status. Now let's look at the same report, but with less useful names: - Recently Stale Opportunities - Donations for Follow Up - Fundraising Process Report - Gabbi's Gift Tracker V2 2017 Notice what's different? It's hard to tell what might be in these reports. For example, what does "Follow Up" mean? Or "Stale" for that matter? The report author might know what those terms mean, but you should never assume everyone will. Also, why is there a gift tracker for 2017? Maybe that's when the author created the report, or maybe it only shows 2017 gifts. It's not clear. Here's a summary of what makes a good report name format: - Use Salesforce terminology. For example, Closed Opportunities over $1000. - Include important report filters in the name. For example, All Iowa Contacts with Addresses. You should expect to find a filter for State=IA and Mailing Address is not blank in this report. - Avoid putting specific dates into report names. Instead use relative date references in the title. For example, Major Gifts Last Year instead of 2018 Major Gifts. - If you significantly change the report filters, update the report name. - Apply your report naming convention consistently across all reports. It's not a convention if only one person is doing it! Report folder names are important too. Establish a well-curated set of folders with meaningful names early on. Otherwise you may end up with a labyrinth of folders with names that are ambiguous and do little to help people find the reports they need. NPSP comes with several report folders that you can use as a starting point. Here's an example of a set of report folders including both NPSP folders and a few custom ones. ![Example of Report Folders](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/report-folders.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can create nested subfolders for your reports. Go to the report folder where you want to create a subfolder, and click New Folder. Name the folder, and click Save. ### Hide Unused Report Types Most organizations don't use every standard object in Salesforce. For example, Leads, Products or Pricebooks may not be relevant to you. In NPSP, there are many custom objects included that you also might not use when building reports. For example, GAU Allocations. Since there's a report type for every object and its related records, there can be a really long list of report types to choose from. Take a look at this slice of report types available for just Opportunities. ![List of Opportunity Report Types](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/many-opp-report-types.png) There are many, many more report types than the ones shown above. The good news is that you can hide report types to make this list much shorter. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Currently, you can't hide or expose report types in Lightning Experience. You must switch to Salesforce Classic to do this. Here's how to hide unused report types. 1. Click your user profile icon located above the tabs at the top of the screen. ![Click on the user profile icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/user-profile-icon.png) 2. In the pop-up menu, click **Switch to Salesforce Classic**. ![Switch to Salesforce Classic link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/switch-to-classic.png) 3. You're now in Classic. Next, click the **Reports** tab. 4. Click the **New Report** button. ![New Report button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/new-report-button-classic.png) 5. Click the **Select Report Types to Hide** checkbox. ![Click the Select Report Types to Hide checkbox](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/report-types-to-hide.png) 6. Now expand one of the folders such as Accounts & Contacts by clicking the plus icon. Notice that each report type has a green checkmark next to it. Click the checkmark to hide that report type (the icon changes to an orange X-mark). Here's an example: ![Example of hidden report types](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/hidden-report-types.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note There is no Save button for this process. Salesforce remembers your preferences as soon as you hide or expose a report type. 7. There are a lot of report types to look through, so it may take some time to get through them all. You can uncheck **Select Report Types to Hide** and come back to it later if you need to. 8. When you're done hiding report types, you can switch back to Lightning by clicking **Switch to Lightning Experience** at the top of your screen. ![Click Switch to Lightning Experience](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/switch-to-lex.png) ### Understand Report, Dashboard, and Folder Security Settings There are two fundamental roles when it comes to reports: Those who run reports, and those who create and edit reports. While it's empowering to allow all users to create and edit reports, doing so can cause "report bloat" and create a situation where sharing reports isn't part of the culture of your organization. Obviously, at least some users need to be able to create reports. As in all things, there's a balance to strike. Be intentional about assigning levels of access to reports and folders. Report permissions aren't managed like object permissions are. You should take some time to understand what system and user permissions control how users interact with reports. For example, consider questions like: - Should users be able to export report data? Reports can potentially include vast amounts of private information. - Should users be able to create, edit, and delete report folders? - Should users be able to edit everyone else's reports? - How can you ensure that users are able to share reports with each other? Read these help articles for more about report, dashboard, and folder permissions: - [Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=analytics_folder_access.htm&type=5) - [User Permissions for Sharing Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=analytics_sharing_permissions.htm&type=5) - [Compare Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=analytics_folder_access_chart.htm&type=5) ### Approaches to User Training As a Salesforce admin, you have a responsibility to ensure that reporting is not a roadblock to using the database. At the beginning of your organization's Salesforce journey you should: - Deliver report training to all users with an initial focus on finding and running reports. - Curate the available reports. That means ensuring users follow naming conventions, understand the report folder structure, and that you remove unused reports. - Ensure users are familiar with [Favorites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=user_userdisplay_favorites.htm&type=5), as this can be an effective way to quickly access commonly used reports from anywhere within the system. - Identify your "power users" and teach them how to create reports. Those users should have familiarity with where data is and what it represents. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip A common error many organizations make is to train users on the report builder early in their adoption of Salesforce. The problem is that you can't make good use of the report builder unless you have a fairly comprehensive understanding of where data is and what it represents. Becoming conversant and knowledgeable about the makeup of the database takes time and is hard to teach quickly. Of course, most users will eventually want to create or edit reports of their own. It's often the case that a user wants to make small changes to an existing report for their own specific needs. Train them how to save a copy of a report to their own Private folder. You still should maintain a library of official reports that aren't changed without input from key stakeholders. But, you can allow users to create or modify reports using their Private folders. Keep conversations open about reporting by creating a system for "promoting" useful reports into your official library. That way the whole organization can benefit from those reports and the efforts of the staff. ## Additional Tips and Tricks Periodically tidy up your reports to remove ones that aren't used. Create a report that shows records that don't have related records. Use the Power of One to count related records in a report. ### Find Unused Reports As part of your careful curation of your report library, you should periodically run a "report of reports" to see which reports you may need to retire because you haven’t been using them. There is no report in Salesforce called "report of reports" but you can easily create one yourself. Here's how. 1. Click the **Report** tab then click **New Report**. 2. Type Reports in the Choose Report Type quick find box and select **Reports**. ![Choose Report Type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/choose-report-type.png) 3. Click **Continue**. 4. By default all reports are included and all available columns are selected for display so there's no customizations needed. 5. Click **Save & Run** and provide a report name. You can use "Report of Reports" if you like. Choose the appropriate folder where you want this report to live and click **Save**. The resulting report should look something like this. ![Example of a Report of Reports](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/report-of-reports.png) Sort the report by Last Modified date or Last Run date to explore how users have (or haven't) been using your reports. ### Find Records with no Related Records Report types either list the name of a single object (for example, Opportunities) or an object _with_ another object (Opportunities with Payments). In the first case, the report includes Opportunities regardless of what related records there may be. In the second case, the report includes Opportunities _only with_ Payments. But what if you want to report on Opportunities that explicitly have no payments? Enter, the cross filter. You can use cross filters to include or exclude records from related objects. For example, with an Accounts report, you can apply a cross filter to include Activities, or exclude Contacts. Cross filters access all the related records for a given object, all within a single report type. Let's build out an example together. 1. Click the **Report** tab then click **New Report**. 2. Click **Opportunities** in the list of object on the left, then select **Opportunities**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click the **Filters** tab. Change the Filter by Close Date range to All Time and click **Apply**. 5. Click the arrow under the Filters tab and select **Add Cross Filter**. ![Adding a Cross Filter in the report builder.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add-cross-filter.png) 6. In the Edit Filter dialog, change Show Me to Opportunities without. Then select **Payments** in the Secondary Object drop down. Click **Apply**. The report now displays any Opportunities without Payments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're familiar with NPSP you know that the Opportunity object has a Number of Payments rollup field that you could also use to report on Opportunities with no Payments. However, there aren't rollup fields like that on every object for every relationship. Cross filters are an easy way to report that doesn’t require you to create formula or rollup fields. ### Power of One: Supercharge your Record Counts When you run a report, you get a total count of records. But that record count only includes the primary object in the report. For example, while you can display Account data in a report of Opportunities, the record count you see counts the Opportunities, not the Accounts. Consider the following report. Notice the Total Records—it's a count of Opportunities. That's nice, but how many Accounts own those Opportunities? ![An Opportunity report with 223 Total Records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/count-of-opps.png) There isn't a standard Salesforce feature that provides this secondary record count, but you can achieve it with a simple customization that's become known as the "Power of One." Let's explore the Power of One using the above example. The Power of One involves creating a formula field using just the number one on each object that you want to count in reports (hence the name). We know that formulas can be tricky but you'll love this one. It's the simplest formula you'll ever write. 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager** and select Account from the list of objects. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **New** to create a custom field. 4. Choose Formula under Data Type and click **Next**. 5. In the Field Label, enter Account Records. You can choose a different name if you prefer. 6. Select Number under Formula Return Type. For Decimal Places, select 0. 7. Click **Next**. 8. In the formula editor, enter the number 1. Yep, that's all. ![Formula editor with the number 1 entered.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/the-one.png) 9. Click **Next**. 10. Select Visible under Field-Level Security for Profile for all user profiles that should have access to this field. 11. Click **Next**. 12. Deselect all the page layouts listed and click **Save**. The Power of One formula is a "utility" field and doesn't need to be displayed on page layouts. Repeat the above steps for any additional objects where you want to use the Power of One formula. It's not a bad idea to include it on all your most commonly used objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note While you can add the Power of One formula to any object, you can only get a record count of objects that you can access in the report type you're using. For example, you can't get a count of Products in a Campaigns report. Now let's build out the report we need. 1. Click the **Report** tab then click **New Report**. 2. Click **Opportunities** in the list of object on the left, then select **Opportunities**. 3. Click **Continue**. 4. Click the **Filters** tab. Change the Filter by Close Date range to All Time and click **Apply**. 5. To make the report results more compact, remove the following columns: 1. Owner Role 2. Opportunity Owner 3. Fiscal Period 4. Expected Revenue 5. Probability 6. Age 7. Created Date 8. Next Step 9. Lead Source 10. Type 6. Click **Save & Run** and provide a name for your report. Something like "Count of Opportunities and Accounts" is fine. In the report, notice the Total Records—it's a count of Opportunities. 7. Let's add the Account total next using our Account Records formula field. Click **Edit**. 8. Add the **Account Records** field to the report columns. 9. Click the arrow next to the Total Account Records field in the preview layout. Under Summarize, select **Sum**.![Select the Sum function under Summarize for the Account Records field.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/summarize-count.png) 10. Click **Save & Run**. We now have a count of _both_ Opportunities and Accounts. ![Report showing both Total Opportunity Records and Total Account Records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total-account-records.png) What other uses can you think of for the Power of One formula field? ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The idea for the Power of One formula came from the amazing community of Salesforce users. Special thanks to Steve Molis and Tom Tobin. # How to Use Salesforce.org Release Notes Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features in products for education and nonprofit institutions. We include setup information, tips to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success. - Education and nonprofit products also use other Salesforce features. Learn what’s new in [Salesforce Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.salesforce_release_notes.htm). - The release notes include details about new and modified features. For information on known issues, visit the [Salesforce Known Issues site](http://success.salesforce.com/issues_index). - [Release Notes Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_change_log_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.") Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first. # How to Use Salesforce.org Release Notes Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features in products for education and nonprofit institutions. We include setup information, tips to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - Education and nonprofit products also use other Salesforce features. Learn what’s new in [Salesforce Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.salesforce_release_notes.htm). - The release notes include details about new and modified features. For information on known issues, visit the [Salesforce Known Issues site](http://success.salesforce.com/issues_index). - [Release Notes Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_change_log_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first.") Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first. # How to Use the Salesforce for Education and Nonprofit Release Notes Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features in products for education and nonprofit institutions. We include setup information, tips to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success. - Education and nonprofit products also use other Salesforce features. Learn what’s new in [Salesforce Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.salesforce_release_notes.htm). - The release notes include details about new and modified features. For information on known issues, visit the [Salesforce Known Issues site](http://success.salesforce.com/issues_index). - [Release Notes Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_edu_ngo_how_to_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Read about changes to the Spring '23 release notes, with the most recent changes first.") Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first. - **[Release Note Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_edu_ngo_how_to_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Read about changes to the Spring '23 release notes, with the most recent changes first. ## Release Note Changes Read about changes to the Spring '23 release notes, with the most recent changes first. ### March 13, 2023 - [Accounting Subledger Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Spring ’23 brings a fresh start for Accounting Subledger, as it’s now built on the Salesforce platform, and designed to work with any Salesforce product. The next-generation Accounting Subledger draws the power of Salesforce to consolidate data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system. This consolidation helps you manage your accounting department and understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated, with unparalleled performance.") Added a release note to announce the new Accounting Subledger product. - [Education Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_cloud_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Spring ‘23 brings you the next-generation CRM for education. Education Cloud draws on the power of Salesforce to connect insights across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners—from prospective student to engaged alum. With Salesforce at the center of your institution's information technology solution, important tasks can be completed in less time, at scale, and in collaboration between departments. Create an Experience Cloud site to be your institution's learner portal where students start their higher education journey. From this site, prospective students can request information, schedule appointments, and apply to your institution. After a student submits their application, your admissions staff can verify, review, and decide on the application in the individual application record.") Added a release note to announce the new Education Cloud product. - [Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes for Spring '23](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The new Nonprofit Cloud harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to Salesforce's full portfolio of innovative products and services.") Added a release note to announce the new Nonprofit Cloud, which includes Program Management and Case Management built on the Salesforce platform. ### March 3, 2023 - [Nonprofit Success Pack Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23.") Updated the package version number for a patch release that fixed a Known Issue. ### December 21, 2022 - [Salesforce.org Spring '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_242.htm) Published preview release notes. # Identify Faculty Slack Users for Agent Actions Several Slack for Education flows reference the EDU Course Operations: Get Faculty Slack User in a subflow element. Modify this flow to make sure that related agent actions accurately identify a faculty Slack user based on their employee record. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations: Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows:

Manage Flow
Before you start: - [Turn on Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_turn_on_context_service.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes.") - [Create employee records for faculty](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prep_org_for_course_operations_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide agent actions with the required data. Define at-risk criteria, supply data for course offering participant insights, create an advising record type for cases, and create employee records for faculty members.") To make sure that the flow maps a faculty Slack user to their employee record accurately, modify the Get Employee Record element. Based on your business needs, you can determine the fields and logic that the element uses to locate the correct employee record. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Course Operations: Get Faculty Slack User**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. For the Get Employee Record element, apply filters that meet your criteria for identifying the correct faculty employee record. The example shows a custom condition logic, which presents one approach to configure the condition requirements. 5. Save and activate the flow. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_example.png) Example Apply a custom condition logic to make sure that the flow finds the correct employee record. 1. Click **Get Employee Record**. 2. Under Filter Employee Records, for Condition Requirements, select **Custom Condition Logic is Met.** 3. For Condition Logic, enter (1 AND 8) OR (1 AND 2 AND 3 AND 4 AND 5 AND 6 AND 7). | CONDITION | FIELD | OPERATOR | VALUE | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 1 | Contact ID | Equals | contactId | | 2 | Employee Status | Equals | employeeStatus | | 3 | Employee Type | Equals | employeeType | | 4 | Employment Type | Equals | employmentType | | 5 | Employee Number | Equals | employeeNumber | | 6 | Status Start Date | Equals | statusStartDate | | 7 | Status End Date | Equals | statusEndDate | | 8 | Status End Date | Is Null | statusEndDate | # Implementation Considerations for Document Management Understand what file types are supported by Education Cloud and how to work with them.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Education Cloud provides basic document management. To see documents in the Education Cloud components, they must be saved as a Salesforce File. When applicants add documents to their applications, we automatically save them as Salesforce Files. You can access them in the individual application record and the Document Checklist Item object. These file types display in the Education Cloud components: - .pdf—Copy-protected PDFs can't be previewed. - .doc, .docx, .xls, .xlxs, and .ppx—These formats include Microsoft® Office 97 through Microsoft Office 2007 Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. Some Microsoft Office documents can't be previewed and some don't display correctly in previews. - .jpg, .jpeg, .bmp, .gif, and .png - .txt, .rtf To learn about additional preview considerations, see [Content file preview issues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000337845&type=1&mode=1&language=en_us). Each document checklist item must have a unique Salesforce File. In other words, you can't attach a Salesforce File that's already been added to another document checklist item. However, you can attach the Salesforce File to other records in Salesforce, like an individual application. Some institutions want to retain documents for a certain number of years or delete them after a certain number of admissions cycles. Education Cloud doesn't provide specialized automation or archival tools for document management. Create a plan for your institution that covers the full document lifecycle. For information about space limits, see [File Size and Sharing Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.collab_files_size_limits.htm&type=5) and [Data and Files Storage Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.overview_storage.htm&type=5). Applicants can apply to an institution multiple times, such as an undergraduate who applies as a graduate student. Make sure that any automation that you implement associates application documents with the correct application. To help admissions staff and applicants track applications, we provide these document checklist item statuses. | Document Checklist Item Status | Status in Education Cloud Components | | --- | --- | | New | Ready for Processing | | Waived | Waived | | Accepted | Approved | | Rejected | Admissions staff and external reviewers see Rejected and applicants see Needs Attention. | ## Automatically Update Status on New Document Upload Use this Apex code to automatically update the status when a student uploads a new version of the document into the same document checklist item. Apex to Update Status on New Document Upload ``` trigger ContentVersionTrigger on ContentVersion (after insert, after update) { ContentVersionTriggerHandler cvth = new ContentVersionTriggerHandler(); cvth.handleAfter(trigger.new); } ``` Class With Logic: ContentVersionTriggerHandler ``` public without sharing class ContentVersionTriggerHandler { private static final Schema.SObjectType SOBJECT_TYPE_DCI = DocumentChecklistItem.getSObjectType(); public void handleAfter(List contentVersions){ Map relatedDCIs = getDocumentChecklistItemIds(contentVersions); markAssociatedDCIAsPending(relatedDCIs.keySet()); } private static Map getDocumentChecklistItemIds(List contentVersions) { Set cdIds = new Set(); Map documentChecklistItems = new Map(); for (ContentVersion cv : contentVersions) { cdIds.add(cv.ContentDocumentId); } for (ContentDocumentLink cdlRecord : [Select LinkedEntityId FROM ContentDocumentLink WHERE ContentDocumentId IN: cdIds]) { Id linkedRecordId = cdlRecord.LinkedEntityId; if (linkedRecordId.getSObjectType() == SOBJECT_TYPE_DCI) { documentChecklistItems.put(linkedRecordId, new DocumentChecklistItem(Id = linkedRecordId)); } } return documentChecklistItems; } private static void markAssociatedDCIAsPending(Set documentChecklistItemIdSet) { List updatableDCIs = new List(); for (Id currentDciId : documentChecklistItemIdSet) { updatableDCIs.add(new DocumentChecklistItem(Id = currentDciId, Status = 'Pending')); } update updatableDCIs; } } ``` Test Class ``` @IsTest private class ContentVersionTriggerHandlerTest { @IsTest static void testHandleAfter(){ // setup test data Account acct = new Account(Name='TEST_ACCT'); insert acct; DocumentChecklistItem dci = new DocumentChecklistItem(WhoId = UserInfo.getUserId(), Name='Test DCI', Status = 'Rejected', ParentRecordId=acct.Id); insert dci; ContentVersion cv = new ContentVersion(Title = 'Test Document', PathOnClient = 'TestDocument.pdf', VersionData = Blob.valueOf('Test Content'), IsMajorVersion = true); insert cv; List cvList = [SELECT Id, Title, ContentDocumentId FROM ContentVersion WHERE Id = :cv.Id]; ContentDocumentLink cdl = new ContentDocumentLink(LinkedEntityId = dci.id, ContentDocumentId = cvList[0].ContentDocumentId, shareType = 'V'); insert cdl; //run test Test.startTest(); cv.Description = 'test update'; update cv; //assert for (DocumentChecklistItem adci : [SELECT Id, Status FROM DocumentChecklistItem WHERE Id = :dci.Id]) { System.assertEquals('Pending', adci.Status, 'Document Checklist Item should be Pending'); } Test.stopTest(); } } ``` # Import Common App Data Into Education Cloud Use Data Importer for Common App to bring your Common App First-Year data into Education Cloud. Import standard applicant, suspect, prospect, and recommender data into applicable Education Cloud objects.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Data Importer for Common App uses Data Processing Engine (DPE) to transform and save your current Common App data as new or updated records in Education Cloud. The integration tool groups objects into DPE based on the data that they represent. Each DPE has a unique definition, and the DPE definitions must run sequentially to transform and integrate the data. To learn how to get and use the Data Importer for Common App, see [Education Cloud Common App Data Integration Guide](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1jgyiJ6XDBGSKPKS7mlytfbmu6JyoBriInRT-_ujT638/edit). # Import Gift Entries to a Gift Batch by Using CSV Data Management for Industries Education Import large volumes of donation data to Salesforce by using a gift batch and the CSV Data Management common component. CSV Data Management reduces manual data entry and the risk of errors by using CSV files to import data into Salesforce objects. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To use CSV Data Management:

Basic CSV Data Import permission set

OR

Basic CSV Data Import User Permission system permission
To create and process a gift batch:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Create a gift batch and copy the Batch ID value. See [Create a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs."). 2. Prepare your data for import. See [CSV File Readiness](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prepare_csv_files.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. Add a Batch ID column to your CSV for import and paste the Batch ID value of your gift batch into every gift entry row in the import. 4. Import the gift entries by using CSV File Import. See [Import CSV Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.import_csv_file.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. Review and process the gift batch. See [Process a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_process_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors."). SEE ALSO - [CSV Data Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.csv_file_import.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Import Gift Entries to a Gift Batch by Using CSV Data Management for Industries Nonprofit Import large volumes of donation data to Salesforce by using a gift batch and the CSV Data Management common component. CSV Data Management reduces manual data entry and the risk of errors by using CSV files to import data into Salesforce objects. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To use CSV Data Management:

Basic CSV Data Import permission set

OR

Basic CSV Data Import User Permission system permission
To create and process a gift batch:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. Create a gift batch and copy the Batch ID value. See [Create a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly add multiple gift entries that use the same set of fields by creating a gift batch and process the collection of gift entries together. Every gift batch has an associated template that defines a set of fields and their display order in a gift entry. Fundraising provides a default template, and you can create customized templates to meet your unique gift entry needs."). 2. Prepare your data for import. See [CSV File Readiness](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prepare_csv_files.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. Add a Batch ID column to your CSV for import and paste the Batch ID value of your gift batch into every gift entry row in the import. 4. Import the gift entries by using CSV File Import. See [Import CSV Files](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.import_csv_file.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. Review and process the gift batch. See [Process a Gift Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_process_gift_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors."). SEE ALSO - [CSV Data Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.csv_file_import.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Import More Than Two Contacts to a Household at Once Here's how to import more than two contacts to the same household at once. Salesforce automatically creates a Household Account for each Contact record you create. If you have more than two people in the same Household, use NPSP Data Import to import the records. Here's how to adjust your import template to accommodate this. For each new Contact in the Household, add a new row containing Contact1 and include the new Contact in the Contact2 column. Salesforce will add that new Contact (in the Contact2 column) to Contact1's Household Account. You can repeat this process for any additional Contacts in the Household. For example, let's say you want to import Jane Wilcox (Contact1), her husband, and her two kids. Add Jane Wilcox's Salesforce ID in the Contact1 Imported column for each Contact you want to import into her Household. ![Import spreadsheet with Jane Wilcox's Salesforce ID in each import row.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/import_template_match_id.png) # Import Recurring Donations and Installment Opportunities Learn how to bring existing recurring gift data into NPSP. You should be familiar with editing spreadsheets and using a data import tool such as [Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_loader.htm&type=5). If you're using Elevate for your online donations, see [Import Recurring Donations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_import_rd_overview.htm). ## Setup—Before You Begin 1. Confirm that you've upgraded to Enhanced Recurring Donations. See [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A Salesforce system administrator can determine the version of recurring donations installed in your org.") 2. Confirm that you've enabled [Automatic Recurring Donation Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automatic_rd_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP provides an automatic naming convention for Recurring Donations. Learn how to customize it."). Alternatively, you can plan to include Recurring Donations Names in your import spreadsheet. 3. Confirm that you've mapped [Recurring Donation Fields to Opportunity Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_recurring_donation_fields_to_opp_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to map fields from Recurring Donation records to Opportunity records, so that NPSP copies the data to each new installment Opportunity."). ## Import Records ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The field values in the Recurring Donation entry form are slightly different than what's stored in the database. For example, there is no Donor Type field on the Recurring Donation object. Review the Recurring Donation object schema before you build your import spreadsheet. 1. Prepare your Recurring Donation spreadsheet for import. 1. If you don't want NPSP to create a future, open Opportunity for your Recurring Donations, include Disable First Installment = TRUE for all rows in your spreadsheet. 2. Import your Recurring Donation records. It's a good idea to import just a few records the first time so you can confirm that your data and field mapping is correct. 3. Prepare your Opportunity spreadsheet for import. Here are some important considerations: 1. You only need to import past Opportunity records. NPSP automation takes care of future installment Opportunities. 2. Decide if you want NPSP to create a default GAU when you import your Opportunity records. Check the Default Allocations Enabled setting in NPSP Settings. 4. Import your Opportunity records. It's a good idea to import just a few records the first time so you can confirm that your data and field mapping is correct. ## After You Import 1. In **NPSP Settings** | **Bulk Data Processes**, run the **Recurring Donations Batch** to update Recurring Donation rollup fields. # Import Your Data into Admissions Connect Admissions Connect gives you a complete view into your institution’s recruiting and admissions experience—from information about prospects and applicants, like their education history, to information about your institution, like degree programs and terms. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Admissions Connect uses Education Data Architecture, so follow the [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm). The information in this article is supplemental and covers tips and recommendations for Admissions Connect. ## Institution Data First, make sure that your institution's data, such as Account records for Academic Programs and Terms, is in EDA _before_ implementing Admissions Connect. ## Suspect and Prospect Data Most institutions import suspect and prospect data from third-party providers such as College Board or other agencies. ## Applicant Data Next comes applicant data, including Contact, Application, Education History, Test, and Test Score records. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Admissions Connect needs Application records in place before you can assign Action Plans. To create Application records, institutions typically import the data and documents using a third-party tool. Alternatively, you can set up an applicant portal and build a custom component that allows applicants to create a Contact record, related records like Education History, and the Application record itself. For more information, see [Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect."). Data integrity is essential when it comes to applications. Information such as the date and time stamps on an Application record are critical for admissions deadlines. If you import your application data into Salesforce, make sure that your records are accurate. We recommend spot checking records if you’re importing many applications. ## Action Plan Assignments After the applicant's Contact and Application record are created, consider automating the assignment of Action Plans, which are the actual application requirements, such as Transcripts and Recommendations. For more information, see [Configure Application Requirement Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assign Action Plans to Applications so that admissions staff and applicants learn about requirements and next steps."). ## Application Documents With the applicant’s assigned Action Plans in place, you can attach documents to the Document Checklist Items. Consider setting up Admissions Connect to [automatically attach PDF documents to Document Checklist Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make it easy to attach documents to Document Checklist Items to save time for your staff and make document processing more efficient.") as part of your import strategy. # Import Your School's Data Create data to represent your educational institution in Student Success Hub. Student Success Hub is designed to give your support staff a rich, complete view of their students. It can draw student information from any object related to the Contact or Case object, such as Program Enrollment or Attendance Event, to highlight essential data about a student that is tracked in EDA or K-12 Architecture Kit. ![The Student Snapshot shows Case and Contact data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_student_snapshot_k12.png) Typically, you're integrating data from your Student Information System or other external systems using common data integration tools such as Salesforce APIs or Lightning Connect. However you choose to import your data records into EDA or K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend including—at a minimum—data about your school, institution, or district's organizational structure, including current personnel and course and term information. (You'll import support staff and student data after importing and configuring your institution's data). We recommend this sequence for importing this first level of data into EDA or K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. Create these Account records. - K-12 orgs - An Educational Institution account for the top-level entity representing your district. - Educational Institution accounts for the schools that your students are affiliated with. - Academic Department accounts for the programs that your students are affiliated with. - Higher ed orgs - An Educational Institution account for the top-level entity representing your institution, such as the entire university. - University Department accounts for the departments or schools that your students are affiliated with. - Academic Program accounts for the programs that your students are affiliated with. For the Parent Account field, specify an appropriate university department. 2. Create Term records for relevant academic terms. 3. Create Course records for students' courses. 4. Create Course Offering records for students' courses. 5. If you're setting up Pathways, create Program Plan and Plan Requirement records for programs and certifications. Make sure to first review [Create Your School's Data for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Course, Term, Program Plan, and Plan Requirements data for Pathways to use."). For data import details, see [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm) in the EDA documentation or [Develop Your Own Approach to Modeling Your School](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_develop_approach.htm) in the K-12 Architecture Kit documentation. See Also: - [Student Success Hub Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Access documents with descriptions of the objects and fields used by Student Success Hub.") # Improve Recurring Donations Batch Processing Speed Reduce batch processing time by excluding closed Recurring Donations. To decrease the number of donations included in the Recurring Donations batch job, turn on the **Exclude Closed Recurring Donations** setting. This excludes closed Recurring Donations from the Recurring Donation Opportunity batch job. To turn on the setting: 1. Go to Setup. 2. In the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, then click **Custom Settings**. 3. Next to **Recurring Donations Settings**, click **Manage**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. To turn on the setting, select **Exclude Closed Recurring Donations**. 6. Save your settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Learn more about running the Recurring Donations batch job in [Manually Process Batch Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job."). # Improve Your Admission Rate by Focusing on Prospective Students Most Likely to Join Get predictions about the likelihood of a prospective student joining your educational institution based on their current level of engagement with the institution. Share these predictions with your admissions team so that they can focus on the right prospective students and improve your rate of admissions. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where Education Cloud, CRM Analytics for Education Cloud, AI Accelerator, and Scoring Framework are enabled. **Who**: The Prospect Engagement Score (Education Cloud) template configuration type in Scoring Framework is available to users with the CRM Analytics for Education Cloud license. **How**: To get predictions, go to the new Scoring Framework page in Setup. Create a CRM Analytics template configuration by using the Prospect Engagement Score (Education Cloud) template configuration type. See Also: - [Scoring Framework (Generally Available)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_scoring_framework.htm&release=244) - [_Salesforce Help_: Predictions about Prospects Conversion into Enrolled Learners by Using Scoring Framework (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_prospect_engagement_score_template_configuration_type.htm) # Inbound Referrals Use Inbound Referrals to track clients who have been referred to your organization. Clients come to your organization seeking your services in a variety of ways. Some are referred by other service providers, some may call your call center, others might complete a form online. If your organization wants to track clients that have been referred, use Inbound Referrals. Inbound Referrals are a record type on the Case object.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. To see a list of all Inbound Referrals: 1. Click the **Cases** tab. 2. From the dropdown, select **Case Management: Inbound Referrals**. - **[Create and Edit Inbound Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_inbound_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Inbound Referrals are potential clients who are referred to your organization. Inbound Referrals capture critical details, like contact information, who referred the client, and why they were referred. ## Create and Edit Inbound Referrals Inbound Referrals are potential clients who are referred to your organization. Inbound Referrals capture critical details, like contact information, who referred the client, and why they were referred. To create an Inbound Referral: 1. Click the **Cases** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Inbound Referral**, then click **Next**. 4. Optionally: - Add a subject that describes the nature of the referral. - Search for or create a Contact. - Enter any relevant information about the referral, for example, the Case Origin, or the Referral Organization. - Search for or create an associated Intake. If an Intake is created from this referral later, **Intake** will be populated automatically. 5. Select a Status. Note that you can't close the Inbound Referral from the Status dropdown. 6. Click **Save**. From an Inbound Referral, you can: - Click **Edit** to edit the details of the Inbound Referral. - Click **Create Intake** to [create an Intake](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_intake_new_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Intakes to collect information about potential clients so you can evaluate how to best help them.") to collect information and materials that you need to decide how to best help the client, either by providing them services or referring them to another provider. - Click **Closed** in the path at the top of the Inbound Referral to close it. # Inquiry and Opportunity Management in Education Cloud Use Education Cloud's inquiry management flows to help learners sign up for communications, ask questions, and request to be contacted. Use Education Cloud objects and automation to forecast and track opportunities, and maintain a robust and profitable enrollment for your institution. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Inquiry Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_flows_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Education Cloud inquiry management flows. - **[Flexcards for Inquiry Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_flexcards_for_inquiry_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide a variety of ways for prospects, applicants, and students to engage with your institution by adding inquiry management flows to your Education Portal. Clone and update the inquiry Flexcards before you add them to your Education Portal. You can customize the display labels and text to suit the purpose of each flow. - **[Embed Inquiry Flows Into a Third-Party Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_embed_inquiry_flows_into_a_third_party_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you don't use Experience Cloud for your admissions portal, use Lightning Out to add inquiry flows to your third-party website. - **[Create and Assign an Opportunity Management Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_assign_an_opportunity_management_permission_set.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and assign a permission set to give users access to the Opportunity Management features. - **[Set Up Flows for Opportunity Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_flows_for_opportunity_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone and configure Education Cloud flows to create opportunities and convert leads based on academic interests. - **[Update Records for Opportunity Management Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_learning_program_and_academic_interest_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add fields to the Learning Program record for the EDU Cloud: Create Opportunities from an Academic Interest flow. Also make sure that Academic Term records have a close date. The flow references Learning Program and Academic Term records to create an Opportunity record based on an academic interest. - **[Predict Prospects Conversion with Scoring Framework](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_predict_prospects_conversion_with_scoring_framework.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Scoring Framework to get predictions about the likelihood of a prospective learner enrolling into your educational institution. The predictions are based on a prospective learner's current level of engagement with your institution. By knowing which prospective learners are most likely to be interested, the admissions team can focus on those learners and improve your rate of admissions. # Install Admissions Connect Review the release notes and prerequisites, and then install Admissions Connect. - **[Admissions Connect Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the Admissions Connect Release Notes and learn how to keep your org up to date. - **[Get Ready to Install Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the data requirements and considerations, and complete the prerequisites before you install Admissions Connect. - **[Install the Admissions Connect Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_install_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install Admissions Connect for your institution. # Install Case Management When you install Nonprofit Cloud Case Management, you get a managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code for Case Management functionality. It's important to note that you can't modify certain components of a managed package, such as objects and fields. They're locked with limited edit access so that the managed package can be upgraded later. For details about managed and unmanaged packages, see [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm) in Salesforce Help. - **[Before You Install Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_install_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about installation prerequisites for Case Management. - **[Install Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_install_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install Case Management in your org. ## Before You Install Case Management Learn about installation prerequisites for Case Management. Before you install Case Management, make sure you have: - Purchased a license for Nonprofit Cloud Case Management, which also give you access to Action Plan licenses. To verify your licenses, click **Setup** and enter Company Information in the Quick Find box, then click **Company Information**. Under Permission Set Licenses, confirm that you have active licenses for Nonprofit Cloud Case Management and Action Plans. You won't be able to install Case Management without these licenses. [Manage your subscriptions](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/). - Set up an Enterprise or Unlimited Edition org with one of the following licenses: Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or a Restricted Use License for Service Cloud. If you don’t have a Salesforce org, you can sign up for an [NPSP trial](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/npsp/). - Enabled Lightning Experience in your org. See [Lightning Experience Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.lex_welcome_to_lex.htm). Case Management is not compatible with Salesforce Classic. - Enabled My Domain in your org. See [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. After you confirm that you have these prerequisites, continue to the next section to install Case Management. ## Install Case Management Learn how to install Case Management in your org. Salesforce recommends installing in a Sandbox environment or a Developer org before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. You may want to use an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Nonprofit Cloud Case Management](https://install.salesforce.org/products/case-management) installer page. 3. Click **Install Nonprofit Cloud Case Management - View Details**. 4. Click **Log In to Start Pre-Install Validation**, then select **Production or Developer Org** or **Sandbox or Scratch Org**. 5. Log in to the org. 6. Click **Allow**. 7. Click **Install**. You'll see a confirmation when Case Management installs successfully. 8. Click **View Org** to access your new org. 9. Complete all the steps in [Post-Installation Required Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_post_install_req_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Grant access to Case Management managed package users and assign page layouts."). # Install Data Integrity Learn how to install and perform basic configurations plus configure your Sandbox org to use Data Integrity. - **[Install Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to add the Data Integrity managed package to your Salesforce org. - **[Select Your Default Country (Required)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you first launch Data Integrity, select a base country or territory. - **[Configure Your Sandbox to Use Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you installed Data Integrity in a Sandbox org, you need to update the API endpoint in that org. If you didn't install in a Sandbox org, you can skip this step. ## Install Data Integrity Learn how to add the Data Integrity managed package to your Salesforce org. After you confirm that you have the [prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ip_before_you_install_data_integrity.htm), you’re ready to install Data Integrity. Salesforce recommends installing in a Sandbox environment before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. You may want to use an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the Data Integrity [installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/data-integrity). 3. Click **Install Data Integrity - View Details**. 4. Click **Log In to Start Pre-Install Validation** and select your org type. We recommend a Sandbox org for your initial installation. 5. Log in to the org. 6. Click **Allow**. 7. Click **Install**. You’ll see a confirmation when the installation is complete. 8. Continue to [Authorize Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you can use Data Integrity, you must log in as a Salesforce user with specific permissions—also known as an integration user—to authorize the Data Integrity application to access your Salesforce org. Data Integrity activities, such as automated address updates, are attributed to this user."). Or, if you installed in a Sandbox org, continue to the next section for additional configuration. ## Select Your Default Country (Required) When you first launch Data Integrity, select a base country or territory. You can't change your country once you set it. This selection controls your address update and data storage features: - Data from European countries is stored within the European Union (E.U.) in compliance with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - The National Change of Address (NCOA) updates feature is only supported in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom. Your base country or territory does not affect the language shown in the user interface. **Supported Languages** Data Integrity provides out-of-the-box translations for French, German, Dutch and English (UK). In addition to the standard Salesforce objects and setup that normally appear correctly when you turn on localization, the underlying objects, fields, and options also appear in that language that you selected. ## Configure Your Sandbox to Use Data Integrity If you installed Data Integrity in a Sandbox org, you need to update the API endpoint in that org. If you didn't install in a Sandbox org, you can skip this step. In your Sandbox org: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Remote Site Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Remote Site Settings**. 3. Next to the Api Endpoint remote site name, click **Edit**. 4. In the **Remote Site URL** field, enter https://data-integrity-sandbox.sfdo-insights.sfdc.sh - For non-US based organizations, add this additional endpoint: https://data-integrity-sandbox-frf.sfdo-insights.sfdc.sh 5. Click **Save**. 6. From Setup, enter Custom Metadata Types in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Metadata Types**. 7. Next to the API Endpoint label, click **Manage Records**. 8. Click **Edit**. 9. In the **URL** field, enter https://data-integrity-sandbox.sfdo-insights.sfdc.sh 10. Click **Save**. 11. Continue to [Authorize Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you can use Data Integrity, you must log in as a Salesforce user with specific permissions—also known as an integration user—to authorize the Data Integrity application to access your Salesforce org. Data Integrity activities, such as automated address updates, are attributed to this user."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_note.png) Note You’ll need to reauthorize the Data Integrity app if you change the Remote Site Setting or Custom Metadata Types. Additionally, you’ll need to re-enter the NCOA provider license information on the Settings page. # Install Data Integrity Prerequisites and instructions for installing Data Integrity. After installation, authorize Data Integrity to access data in your Salesforce org. - **[Before You Install Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_before_you_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about prerequisites to install Data Integrity and what's included in the managed package. - **[Install Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_install_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install and perform basic configurations plus configure your Sandbox org to use Data Integrity. - **[Authorize Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_authorize_data_integrity_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can use Data Integrity, you must log in as a Salesforce user with specific permissions—also known as an integration user—to authorize the Data Integrity application to access your Salesforce org. Data Integrity activities, such as automated address updates, are attributed to this user. # Install EDA Install EDA in new or existing org. - **[Install in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_install_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which products you can install Education Data Architecture) for. - **[Install Salesforce in an Existing Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_install_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you prefer to install Education Data Architecture in an existing org rather than starting with the trial, use the installer. ## Install in Your Org Learn which products you can install Education Data Architecture) for. Education Data Architecture can be installed in Enterprise and Unlimited Edition Lightning Platform orgs with licenses for these Cloud services: - Service Cloud—Manage student enrollment, counseling, or case management. - Sales Cloud—Draft quotes and invoices for students. - Marketing Cloud and Experience Cloud, as needed to support your organization's business requirements. Set up an online portal for applicants to apply, check on application status, add supporting documents, and more. The best way to get started with Education Data Architecture is with a trial, which provides the app preconfigured in a new Salesforce org. If you'd rather install Education Data Architecture in an existing org, make sure that you meet the [installation prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm). ## Install Salesforce in an Existing Org If you prefer to install Education Data Architecture in an existing org rather than starting with the trial, use the installer. 1. Make sure you're logged out of all other Salesforce orgs. Consider using an incognito window to log in to the desired org. 2. Go to the EDA [installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/eda/install). 3. Click **Log In to Start Pre-Install Validation**. 4. Choose **Production or Developer Org**, **Sandbox or Scratch Org**, or **Use Custom Domain**. 5. Acknowledge the product terms of use and click **Confirm**. 6. Click **Install**. If the installation succeeds, a confirmation page appears. If you encounter errors, get help resolving them by following the instructions in [Reporting Issues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_how_to_create_a_tech_support_case.htm). # Install EDA Learn how to install EDA, including prerequisites, compatibility restrictions, and the packages installed. - **[Prerequisites and Compatibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about installation requirements, compatibility restrictions, and other considerations when installing EDA. - **[What's Installed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_whats_installed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the packages installed with EDA, and identify the components that you can modify. - **[Install EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_install_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install EDA in new or existing org. # Install Einstein for Nonprofits Learn how to install Einstein for Nonprofits. ## Installation After you meet the [prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_before_you_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about product prerequisites and other helpful information prior to installing Einstein for Nonprofits."), install the Einstein for Nonprofits managed package. If the start date of this managed package is in the future, then you can install it but won't be able to use it until the license activation date. When your license expires, you will receive an error message. Salesforce recommends installing in a Sandbox environment before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. Salesforce recommends using an incognito window to ensure that you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Einstein for Nonprofits installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/efn/latest). 3. Click **Install Einstein for Nonprofits - View Details**. 4. Click **Log In to Start Pre-Install Validation**, and then select your org type. Salesforce recommends a Sandbox org for your initial installation. 5. Log in to the org. 6. Click **Allow**. 7. Click **Install**. A confirmation appears when the installation is completed. # Install Grants Management Learn about Grants Management, what is included, prerequisites, which installer to use, and how to install. - **[What's Included](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install Grants Management, you get a managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code. It’s important to note that you can’t modify the components, such as objects and fields. They're locked with limited edit access so that the managed package can be upgraded later. - **[Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you install Grants Management, make sure you have the required licenses and settings turned on. - **[Decide Which Installer to Use](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Setting up a new grantmaking portal can be intimidating. We have two installers to choose from depending on your experience setting up Digital Experiences and sharing sets. - **[Install Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you confirm that you have the prerequisites, you’re ready to install Grants Management. ## What's Included When you install Grants Management, you get a managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code. It’s important to note that you can’t modify the components, such as objects and fields. They're locked with limited edit access so that the managed package can be upgraded later. For details about managed and unmanaged packages, see [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Prerequisites Before you install Grants Management, make sure you have the required licenses and settings turned on. - Licenses for Grants Management and Customer Community Plus Login purchased through your account executive. You won't be able to install Grants Management without these licenses. If you aren't sure what license you have, see [View Your Organization’s Feature Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_viewing_feature_licenses.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - Lightning Experience enabled in your org. See [How to Transition to Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.lex_welcome_to_lex.htm) in Salesforce Help. - Digital Experiences enabled in your org. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - My Domain enabled in your org. See [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. - Chatter enabled in the your org. See [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=collab_enable.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Decide Which Installer to Use Setting up a new grantmaking portal can be intimidating. We have two installers to choose from depending on your experience setting up Digital Experiences and sharing sets. You can choose either the _Grants Management_ installer_,_ which includes limited configuration, or the _Grants Management and Build Community_ installer, which includes base features and additional configurations to help you quickly set up your portal. Use the _Grants Management_ installer if you have unique processes and are comfortable configuring Digital Experiences and sharing sets. This includes core features of Grants Management , including: Use the _Grants Management and Build Community_ installer if you want additional Digital Experience configuration and a preconfigured sharing set. This includes core features of Grants Management as well as: - A grantseeker profile (Grantseeker Plus Login) with preconfigured object and field permissions that gives the grantseeker access to apply for funding. - The Manage Grants, Invitation Wizard, and Manage - Verifications permission sets. These need to be individually assigned to users for full access to Grants Management . - Several flows that automate steps in the application process for a grantseeker. - Quick actions to streamline navigation and provide powerful functionality to both grantmakers and grantseekers. - A grantseeker sharing set that gives the grantseeker profile the ability to view their Funding Requests and assigned Requirements. - A new Experience Cloud site leveraging the Grantee Portal site template. This site template is preconfigured with fictitious information you can update and quickly launch your grantee portal. ## Install Grants Management After you confirm that you have the prerequisites, you’re ready to install Grants Management. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_important.png) Important An Enterprise or Unlimited Edition org with one of the following licenses is required to install Grants Management: Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or a Restricted Use License for Service Cloud _and_ Customer Community Plus Login Licenses. Reach out to your Salesforce account executive to learn more For usage restrictions that apply to this product, see the information for Service Cloud [in this document](https://www.salesforce.com/content/dam/web/en_us/www/documents/legal/misc/sales-service-contractual-restrictions.pdf). Salesforce recommends installing in a Sandbox environment or a Developer org before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. We recommend using an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Grants Management installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/grants-management) 3. Click **Log In** and select either **Production or Developer Org** or **Sandbox Org**. 4. Click **Install Grants Management and Build Community - View Details** to use the advanced configuration installer. Click **Install Grants Management - View Details** to use the base installer. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Learn about the difference in installers in [Decide What Installer to Use](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_install_parent.htm). 5. Click **Allow**. 6. Click **Install**. You'll see a confirmation when the installation is complete. 7. To access the installed org, click **View Org**. # Install Grants Management Flows Learn how to install the latest versions of unpackaged Grants Management flows in your org. - **[What's Included](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Grants Management Flow Installer to get the latest version of the unpackaged Grants Management flows in your org. - **[Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you install Grants Management Flows, ensure that you have the latest version of Grants Management. - **[Install Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you confirm that you meet the prerequisites, you’re ready to use the Grants Management Flow Installer. - **[Change the Version of a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_install_grants_management_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After installation, if necessary, you can access and activate earlier versions of previously-installed flows. ## What's Included Use the Grants Management Flow Installer to get the latest version of the unpackaged Grants Management flows in your org. Other than [Grants Management: Share Account and Contact with Collaborators (Sample)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_share_account_contact_wcollaborators.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's included in the flow that shares the Applying Organization and Applying Contact with a Funding Request Collaborator."), the flows automatically activate after installation. ## Prerequisites Before you install Grants Management Flows, ensure that you have the latest version of Grants Management. For more information, see [Keep Up with Grants Management and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_keep_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Install Flows After you confirm that you meet the prerequisites, you’re ready to use the Grants Management Flow Installer. We recommend installing in a Sandbox environment or a Developer org before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5). 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs or open the installer in an incognito window to ensure that you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Grants Management Flows Installer](https://www.google.com/url?q=https://install.salesforce.org/products/grants-management/latest/unpackaged-flows&sa=d&source=editors&ust=1632822236689000&usg=aovvaw3sbheevrfuhcxlowgng-gf) page. 3. Click **Log In** and then select an option: - **Production or Developer Org** - **Sandbox Org** 4. Click **Allow**. 5. Click **Start Pre-Install Validation**. 6. Select the flows that you want to install. 7. Click **Install**. 8. To confirm that you have read and agree to the terms of use, select the checkbox, and then click **Confirm**. When the installation finishes, a confirmation dialog appears. ## Change the Version of a Flow After installation, if necessary, you can access and activate earlier versions of previously-installed flows. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Next to a flow, click ![Show more icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **View Details and Versions**. 3. Under Flow Versions, activate the version of the flow that you want. # Install K-12 Architecture Kit Install K-12 Architecture Kit in a new or existing org. - **[Install in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_install_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which products you can install K-12 Architecture Kit) for. - **[Install Salesforce in an Existing Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_install_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you prefer to install K-12 Architecture Kit in an existing org rather than starting with the trial, use the installer. ## Install in Your Org Learn which products you can install K-12 Architecture Kit) for. K-12 Architecture Kit can be installed in Enterprise and Unlimited Edition Lightning Platform orgs with licenses for these Cloud services: - Service Cloud—Manage student enrollment, counseling, or case management. - Sales Cloud—Draft quotes and invoices for students. - Marketing Cloud and Experience Cloud, as needed to support your organization's business requirements. Set up an online portal for applicants to apply, check on application status, add supporting documents, and more. The best way to get started with K-12 Architecture Kit is with a trial, which provides the app preconfigured in a new Salesforce org. If you'd rather install K-12 Architecture Kit in an existing org, make sure that you meet the [installation prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm). ## Install Salesforce in an Existing Org If you prefer to install K-12 Architecture Kit in an existing org rather than starting with the trial, use the installer. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important We highly recommend installing in a Sandbox org and testing thoroughly before installing in an existing Production org. 1. Make sure you're logged out of all other Salesforce orgs. Consider using an incognito window to log in to the desired org. 2. Go to the K-12 Architecture Kit [installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/k12). 3. Click **Install K-12 Architecture Kit-View Details**. 4. Click **Log In to Install**. 5. Choose **Production or Developer Org**, **Sandbox or Scratch Org**, or **Use Custom Domain**. 6. Acknowledge the product terms of use and click **Confirm**. 7. Click **Install**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Unpackaged objects won't deploy unless you choose to do so in the installation process. If the installation succeeds, a confirmation page appears. If you encounter errors, get help resolving them by following the instructions in [Reporting Issues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_how_to_create_a_tech_support_case.htm). # Install K-12 Architecture Kit Review what's included with K-12 Architecture Kit, and then install the managed package. - **[What's Installed with K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_whats_installed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the packages installed with K-12 Architecture Kit, and identify the components that you can modify. - **[Install K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_install_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install K-12 Architecture Kit in a new or existing org. # Install NPSP Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is a series of managed packages, installed on top of Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP and how to resolve common installation errors. NPSP helps users manage the core relationships among individual donors, their households, and the companies they work for. If you’re just getting started with Salesforce, consider choosing [Agentforce for Nonprofit](https://www.salesforce.com/nonprofit/), which is the strongest solution for organizations of all sizes and where all future nonprofit product innovations are focused. Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP and how to resolve common installation errors. - **[If you're new to Salesforce and NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get an NPSP trial and explore what’s included. - **[If you already have NPSP and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the Nonprofit Success Pack upgrade guide for instructions on upgrading NPSP. - **[If you already have Salesforce, but don't have NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can install NPSP on any version of Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. However, this process is only recommended for experienced Salesforce admins or partners. If at all possible, sign up for a new trial version of NPSP instead. - **[Common Installation Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about possible errors when installing NPSP and how to fix them. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Common questions about NPSP versions. - **[The Fine Print](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Success Pack is an open-source, BSD-licensed package. Salesforce hosts all packages and source code on GitHub using git. ## If you're new to Salesforce and NPSP Get an NPSP trial and explore what’s included. 1. Visit the Nonprofit Success Pack [trials page](https://www.salesforce.com/form/sfdo/signup/nonprofit/npsp-free-trial/). 2. Fill out the form and click **Submit**. 3. Contact your AE when you’re ready to purchase licenses, or apply for a donation of 10 free licenses through our [Power of Us](https://www.salesforce.com/company/power-of-us/) program. ## If you already have NPSP and want to upgrade Review the Nonprofit Success Pack upgrade guide for instructions on upgrading NPSP. Follow the step-by-step upgrade instructions (complete with screenshots) in [the Nonprofit Success Pack Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upgrade_from_a_previous_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is for users considering the upgrade from a previous version of NPSP to the latest version."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're installing the latest version of NPSP, you don't need to uninstall any previous versions. ## If you already have Salesforce, but don't have NPSP You can install NPSP on any version of Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. However, this process is only recommended for experienced Salesforce admins or partners. If at all possible, sign up for a new trial version of NPSP instead. See [Install NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is a series of managed packages, installed on top of Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP and how to resolve common installation errors."). **Important Considerations** - If you start with a new trial version of NPSP as recommended (instead of installing on top of your existing org), you'll need to transfer any data or configuration over from the old org to the new one. Additionally, you'll need to transfer your licenses to the new trial org by emailing powerofus@salesforce.com. - NPSP is not supported in Professional or Group Edition. Before attempting to install the Nonprofit Success Pack, check your edition. In Salesforce Setup, enter Company Information in the Quick Find box, then click **Company Information**. Look for the Organization Edition field. - Salesforce does not recommend installing upgrades directly in production organizations. Instead, install your NPSP upgrade in one of your free sandbox environments, or a developer organization first. See [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help for more information. - My Domain must be enabled in your org before you install NPSP. To find out if My Domain is enabled in your org, go to Setup and search for My Domain. For information on setting up My Domain, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm). To install NPSP on an existing Salesforce organization: 1. Visit the [NPSP Installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/npsp/install). 2. Log in to your Salesforce organization by clicking Log In, choosing **Production or Developer Edition org** or **Sandbox org**, and entering your login credentials. 3. Review the installation list and click **Install**. 4. Once you've completed your install, see [Post Installation Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_post_install_config_steps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here if you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on top of your existing Salesforce org."). ## Common Installation Errors Learn about possible errors when installing NPSP and how to fix them. ### My NPSP installation failed with the error "Opportunity Record Types - pick list value, Prospecting not found." You are missing one or more of the default Opportunity Stages. You can fix this issue by creating them and re-running the installer. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the Object Manager tab. 3. Click **Opportunity**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then enter Stage in the Quick Find box. 5. Click the Stage field. You should have the following values in the Opportunity Stages Picklist Values list: - Prospecting - Qualification - Needs Analysis - Value Proposition - Id. Decision Makers - Perception Analysis - Proposal/Price Quote - Negotiation/Review - Closed Won - Closed Lost ### My NPSP installation failed with the error "Unmanaged custom object tab already exists." This is a common error that is easily fixed. From Setup, enter **Tabs** in the Quick Find box, then select **Tabs** under the User Interface menu. Look for the name of the tab mentioned in the error message. Click **Del** next to the tab name. Note that this only removes the tab, but not the related data. Then run the installer again. ## Frequently Asked Questions Common questions about NPSP versions. ### If I already have an earlier version of NPSP, will I have to migrate data to Nonprofit Success Pack? No. We designed NPSP so that you wouldn't need to export or modify any of your existing data. However, as with any other major change to your organization, we strongly advise that you test your upgrade in a sandbox (i.e. test) organization first. If you've customized or modified your org, those customizations may interfere with NPSP. These issues are usually easy to overcome, but they will be easier to address before upgrading your production org. ### What will happen to my existing NPSP packages? Nonprofit Success Pack will require you to upgrade your existing NPSP packages to new, code-free versions that won't work as "standalone." We'll continue to make the last stable versions of the Relationships, Recurring Donations and Affiliations packages available to those who would like to continue using them. ### Our Salesforce organization was started before 2008 and uses the Nonprofit Template. Can I upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack? While the Nonprofit Template and similar early configurations implemented by consulting firms were standard before 2008, they are not actually the NPSP. Moving to the NPSP from the Nonprofit Template would be considered an install, not an upgrade. Careful consideration will be needed when migrating data and removing the older code. Reach out to a partner for an assessment if you aren't comfortable doing this work on your own. ### How do I know which version of NPSP I'm on? You can easily figure that out by looking in your org. See [Which Version of NPSP Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed.") for more details. ## The Fine Print The Nonprofit Success Pack is an open-source, BSD-licensed package. Salesforce hosts all packages and source code on GitHub using git. You can find all code as well as tags, issues lists, and release notes in the [code repository](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/cumulus). You can find contributor instructions on the [Salesforce.org GitHub wiki](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/cumulus/wiki). # Install or Upgrade foundationConnect Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. - **[Prerequisite Installation Checklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For first time users to foundationConnect, take a minute to review the steps below before installing. These are required manual steps you will need to go through in your org before the installation runs successfully. - **[If you already have Salesforce but are new to foundationConnect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** foundationConnect deploys to your org using managed packages. Before continuing, please coordinate with your Salesforce account executive to be sure you meet all the installation criteria, including getting your org added to the allowed list for foundationConnect installations. - **[If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to upgrade foundationConnect to the latest version. ## Prerequisite Installation Checklist For first time users to foundationConnect, take a minute to review the steps below before installing. These are required manual steps you will need to go through in your org before the installation runs successfully. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note The Grantee Report record type is automatically created and configured during the installation process. 1. Enable My Domain. 1. From Setup, search for then select **My Domain**. 2. Enter a unique domain name. 3. Click **Check Availability**. 4. Click **Register Domain**. 5. You will receive an email when the domain has been successfully registered, which may take several minutes. 6. Navigate back to My Domain or refresh the page. 7. Click **Deploy to End Users**. 2. Enable Chatter. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Chatter Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Enable**. 4. Click **Save**. 3. Enable Communities. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Communities Settings.** Later in the setup process, you’ll create the community itself. For now, it’s enough to select **Enable communities**, select a domain name, and save those settings. 2. From Setup, search for then select **Company Information**. Verify that your org has the expected user licenses for community access (Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login). Contact your Account Executive if you are unsure of what licenses you have. 4. Enable Translation Settings. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Translation Language Settings**. 2. Click **Enable**. 5. Enable Opportunities Team Settings. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Opportunity Team Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Team Selling** then save. 6. Create a Campaign record type. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Campaign**. 2. On the Record Types page, click **New**. 3. Create a new Campaign record type: 1. For Existing Record Type, leave Master as the selected value. 2. Enter a name for the Record Type Label name. For example, Docket. 3. Tab to the Record Type Name field to automatically populate the API name. 4. Enter a Description. 5. Make sure **Active** is selected. 6. Click **Next** and **Next** then **Save**. 7. Create an Account record type. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Account**. 2. On the Record Types page, click **New**. 3. Create a new Account record type. 1. For Existing Record Type, leave Master as the selected value. 2. Enter a name for the Record Type Label name. For example, Organization. 3. Tab to the Record Type Name field to automatically populate the API name. 4. Enter a Description. 5. Make sure **Active** is selected. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Choose the Account layout to apply to all profiles then click **Save**. 8. Configure Sharing Settings. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Update the Lead and Opportunity objects to have both Default Internal Access and Default External Access set to Private. 3. Click **Save.** ## If you already have Salesforce but are new to foundationConnect foundationConnect deploys to your org using managed packages. Before continuing, please coordinate with your Salesforce account executive to be sure you meet all the installation criteria, including getting your org added to the allowed list for foundationConnect installations. To get started with foundationConnect: 1. Visit the [Contact Us](https://www.salesforce.org/contact-us/) page. 2. Complete the form and click **Submit**. A Sales representative will be in contact soon! 3. Once you are ready to install foundationConnect, review and complete the [Prerequisite Installation Checklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_install_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the foundationConnect installation prerequisites and considerations depending on which products you already have.") first. 4. When the prerequisite installation requirements are complete, visit the foundationConnect Installer page. This will install the latest version of the foundationConnect package.
Package Installation URL
Base and Portal https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect/
Reviewer* https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationConnect-reviewer/
* Optional package
5. Log in to your Salesforce organization by choosing **Production or Developer Edition org** or **Sandbox or Scratch org**, and entering your login credentials. We recommend first installing in a free Sandbox org to test. 6. Click **Install foundationConnect - View Details**. 7. Click **Allow** to give MetaDeploy access to install. 8. Click **Pre-Install Validation**. This will run for a few minutes. 9. Click **Install**. 10. After you read through the Product Terms of Use and Licenses, select **I confirm I have read and agree to these product terms of use and licenses** then click **Confirm**. 11. This starts installing the Base and Portal packages for foundationConnect and may take a while to run. Check your email for confirmation that the installation was successful. ## If you already have foundationConnect and want to upgrade Learn how to upgrade foundationConnect to the latest version. 1. Visit the [foundationConnect Installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect) for the Base and Portal package or [foundationConnect Reviewer Installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/foundationconnect-reviewer) for the Reviewer package. 2. Log in to your Salesforce organization by choosing **Production or Developer Edition org** or **Sandbox or Scratch org**, and entering your login credentials. We recommend first installing this upgrade in a free Sandbox org to test. 3. Click **Install foundationConnect - View Details**. 4. Click **Allow** to give MetaDeploy access to install. 5. Click **Pre-Install Validation**. This will run for a few minutes. 6. Click **Install**. 7. After you read through the Product Terms of Use and Licenses, select **I confirm I have read and agree to these product terms of use and licenses** then click **Confirm**. 8. This starts the upgrade of your org's foundationConnect instance. The upgrade may take a while to run. Check your email for confirmation that the installation was successful. # Install or Upgrade NPSP Learn the ins and outs of installing or upgrading NPSP in your Salesforce org. - **[Install NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is a series of managed packages, installed on top of Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP and how to resolve common installation errors. - **[Which Version of NPSP Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed. - **[Upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack from a Previous Version of NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upgrade_from_a_previous_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This guide is for users considering the upgrade from a previous version of NPSP to the latest version. - **[Convert to the Nonprofit Success Pack Household Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_to_household_acct_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This guide is for users who upgraded to NPSP from a previous version and want to convert to the Household Account Model. - **[Uninstall NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article provides instructions for uninstalling a default version of NPSP from your Salesforce organization. - **[Configure Your NPSP Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the required permissions, configuration, and post-install steps for setting up your NPSP organization. - **[Configure NPSP Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Articles for Salesforce admins about how to configure all of the NPSP features. - **[Advanced NPSP Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_advanced_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage or disable trigger handlers or deploy custom code in the TDTM framework. - **[Optional NPSP Customizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_optional_customizations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about optional customizations you can do in NPSP including categorizing Contacts, adding badges to Contacts, handling anonymous donors, and adding components to your Experience Cloud donor portal. # Install or Upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce Check your existing implementation to determine whether to install or upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[How to Check if You Have Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Not sure if you have Volunteers for Salesforce? Learn how to check. - **[Get Ready Before You Install Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're installing Volunteers for Salesforce yourself into an existing org, do these required steps before installation. If you're upgrading from an earlier version, check that you've met all these prerequisites. - **[Install the Volunteers for Salesforce Standalone Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're installing Volunteers for Salesforce in an existing Salesforce org, whether for the first time or to upgrade from an earlier version, download and install the Volunteers for Salesforce standalone package. - **[If You Are New to Salesforce and NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Just getting started with Salesforce? We've got some simple steps to help you get set up. ## How to Check if You Have Volunteers for Salesforce Not sure if you have Volunteers for Salesforce? Learn how to check. 1. Navigate to your Salesforce org. 2. Click Setup. 3. Search "Installed Packages" using the Quick Find. 4. Click **Installed Packages.** If Volunteers for Salesforce is installed, it will appear in the Installed Packages. ## Get Ready Before You Install Volunteers for Salesforce If you're installing Volunteers for Salesforce yourself into an existing org, do these required steps before installation. If you're upgrading from an earlier version, check that you've met all these prerequisites. - **[Enable Required Permissions for the User Installing the Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The user who installs Volunteers for Salesforce must have certain permissions, which are typically already part of the System Administrator profile. If a non-admin needs these permissions, enable them using either profiles or permission sets. - **[Compare Usage of Roll-Up Summary Fields to Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check the Campaign and Contact objects to see how many roll-up summary fields are already being used. Volunteers for Salesforce introduces more roll-up summary fields, which can cause your org to exceed per-object limits and prevent installation. ### Enable Required Permissions for the User Installing the Package The user who installs Volunteers for Salesforce must have certain permissions, which are typically already part of the System Administrator profile. If a non-admin needs these permissions, enable them using either profiles or permission sets. - "Create" permission for the Account object - "Create" permission for the Contact object - "Create" permission for the Campaign object (already enabled if "Marketing User" is selected on the user's User Detail page) - "Download AppExchange Packages" permission If you're new to managing user permissions, we recommend learning more in the [Control Access to Objects](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/modules/data_security/units/data_security_objects) unit in Trailhead. This part of the Data Security module shows you how to use profiles and permission sets. ### Compare Usage of Roll-Up Summary Fields to Limits Check the Campaign and Contact objects to see how many roll-up summary fields are already being used. Volunteers for Salesforce introduces more roll-up summary fields, which can cause your org to exceed per-object limits and prevent installation. Before you install, check your usage and limits, and ask Salesforce Support to increase limits as needed. | Object | Roll-Up Summary Fields Allowed (by default) | Roll-Up Summary Fields Installed with V4S | | --- | --- | --- | | Campaign | 25 | 5 | | Contact | 25 | 3 | 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Campaign**. 3. Click **Object Limits**. 4. Check Usage and Limit numbers for Rollup Summary Fields. ![Roll-up summary field usage and limits](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/rollup_field_limits.png) 5. Check the same numbers for the Contact object. ## Install the Volunteers for Salesforce Standalone Package If you're installing Volunteers for Salesforce in an existing Salesforce org, whether for the first time or to upgrade from an earlier version, download and install the Volunteers for Salesforce standalone package. 1\. Navigate to the [Volunteers for Salesforce Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/v4s). 2\. Click **Install Volunteers for Salesforce - View Details.** ![Install Volunteers for Salesforce - View Details button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/metadeploy.png) 3\. If you're not logged in already, you'll be prompted to log in. 4\. Follow installation instructions. ## If You Are New to Salesforce and NPSP Just getting started with Salesforce? We've got some simple steps to help you get set up. 1. Visit the Salesforce.org [trials page](https://www.salesforce.org/npsp-trial/). 2. Fill out the form and click **Submit**. 3. Once you have the credentials for your org, log in and [Install Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Check your existing implementation to determine whether to install or upgrade Volunteers for Salesforce.") . # Install Outbound Funds Module When you install Outbound Funds Module, you get a managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code. It's important to note that you can't modify the components, such as objects and fields. They're locked with limited edit access so that the managed package can be upgraded later. For details about managed and unmanaged packages, see [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm). - **[Before You Install Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the prerequisites for installing Outbound Funds Module. - **[Decide Which Installer to Use](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the differences between the available Outbound Funds Module installers. - **[Install Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you confirm that you have completed the prerequisites, you’re ready to install Outbound Funds Module. ## Before You Install Outbound Funds Module Review the prerequisites for installing Outbound Funds Module. Before you install Outbound Funds Module, make sure you have: - An Enterprise or Unlimited Edition org with a Salesforce Platform license. If you don’t have a Salesforce org, you can sign up for an [NPSP trial](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/npsp/) or a [Nonprofit Lightning Enterprise Edition trial](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/nonprofit-ee/). - Lightning Experience enabled in your org. See [How to Transition to Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.lex_welcome_to_lex.htm). - My Domain enabled in your org. See [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. - Chatter enabled in your org. See [Chatter Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=collab_enable.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - Digital Experiences enabled in your org. This is only required if you want to create a fundseeker portal using Experience Cloud. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note  If you want to create a fundseeker portal using Experience Cloud, you will also need Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, or a Restricted Use License for Service Cloud _and_ Customer Community Plus Login licenses. Reach out to your Salesforce account executive to learn more. ## Decide Which Installer to Use Understand the differences between the available Outbound Funds Module installers. Outbound Funds Module has two different installers: - The _Outbound Funds Module_ installer, which installs Outbound Funds Module. If you don’t need a fundseeker portal, this is the only installer you need. - The _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer, which is an optional and separate package designed to help you create a fundseeker portal, which is an Experience Cloud site. Make sure Outbound Funds Module is installed before using the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer. This installer has two installation paths. - Use the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer to create your own fundseeker portal from scratch. The installer includes: - A fundseeker profile (Fundseeker Plus Login) with preconfigured object and field permissions that gives the fundseekers access to apply for funding. - A new Fundseeker Starter Portal Template to create a fundseeker portal from scratch. - Several flows that automate steps in the application process for a fundseeker. - Use the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal and Build Site_ installer if you want a fundseeker portal created for you. This installer includes everything from the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template installer as well as:. - A pre-populated fundseeker portal called Fundseeker Portal. - A sharing set called FundseekerSharing that gives fundseekers access to view Funding Requests and Requirements ## Install Outbound Funds Module After you confirm that you have completed the prerequisites, you’re ready to install Outbound Funds Module. Salesforce recommends installing and testing in a Sandbox environment or a Developer org before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Install Outbound Funds Module 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. We recommend using an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Outbound Funds Module installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/outbound-funds) page. 3. Click **Log In** and select either **Production** or **Developer Org or Sandbox Org**. 4. Click **Install Outbound Funds Module - View Details**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Outbound Funds Module - NPSP Extension installs if you use NPSP. 5. Click **Allow**. 6. Click **Install**. You'll see a confirmation when the installation is complete. 7. To access the installed org, click **View Org**. ### Install Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Before using the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer, make sure you have Outbound Funds Module installed first. To see if you have Outbound Funds Module installed, click **Setup** and enter Packages in the Quick Find Box, then click **Installed Packages**. Under Package Name, confirm you have the Outbound Funds (Core) package. 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. We recommend using an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template](https://install.salesforce.org/products/outbound-funds-portal) installer page. 3. Click **Log In** and select either **Production** or **Developer Org or Sandbox Org**. 4. Click **Install Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template - View Details** to install the Fundseeker Starter Portal site template. Click **Install Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site - View Details** if you want a fundseeker portal created for you. 5. Click **Allow**. 6. Click **Install**. You'll see a confirmation when the installation is complete. 7. To access the installed org, click **View Org**. # Install Program Management Module Complete the prerequisites and then install Program Management Module to get a managed package with essential metadata and custom code and an unmanaged Program Management Standard User Profile that you can assign to your program staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Install Program Management Module](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lNbFT-KVDqM) Components within the managed package, such as objects and fields, can't be modified. They're locked with limited edit access so that the managed package can be automatically upgraded. For information about managed and unmanaged packages, see [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm) in Salesforce Help. - **[Before You Install PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You must have a Salesforce org with My Domain enabled before you can install PMM. If you don't have a Salesforce org, we recommend starting with a Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) trial. - **[Install PMM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce recommends installing in a Sandbox environment or a Developer org before installing into a Production org. ## Before You Install PMM You must have a Salesforce org with My Domain enabled before you can install PMM. If you don't have a Salesforce org, we recommend starting with a Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) trial. Before you install PMM: 1. If you don't have an org, visit the [NPSP trial page](https://www.salesforce.org/trial/npsp/) and sign up for a free trial of NPSP. If you already have an org, skip this step. 2. Log in to your trial or existing org. 3. Verify that My Domain is enabled, and if it's not, enable it. See [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce help. 4. Continue to the next section to install PMM. ## Install PMM Salesforce recommends installing in a Sandbox environment or a Developer org before installing into a Production org. For more information, see [Create a Sandbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_sandbox_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. Log out of all other Salesforce orgs. You may want to use an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. 2. Go to the [Program Management Module](https://install.salesforce.org/products/program-management) installer page. 3. Click **Install Program Management Management Module - View Details.** 4. Click **Log In to Start Pre-Install Validation**, then select **Production or Developer Org** or **Sandbox or Scratch Org**. 5. Log in to the org. 6. Click **Allow**. 7. Click **Install**. You’ll see a confirmation when PMM installs successfully. 8. Click **View Org** to access your new org. 9. Complete all the steps in [Required Post-Installation Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_postinstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you install PMM, complete the required post-installation tasks."). # Install Student Success Hub Complete the prerequisites and install the package that best suits the needs of your educational institution. - **[Install Student Success Hub for K-12](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install Student Success Hub for K-12, including the core managed packages, unmanaged metadata configurations, and sample data. - **[Install Student Success Hub for Higher Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install Student Success Hub for a higher ed org, including the core managed packages and required unmanaged metadata. - **[Add Metadata to Your Student Success Hub Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_metadata.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Installation Manager in the Student Success Hub app to add unmanaged metadata to your org. - **[Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. # Install Student Success Hub for Higher Education Learn how to install Student Success Hub for a higher ed org, including the core managed packages and required unmanaged metadata. The installation includes the Student Success Hub (SSH), Education Data Architecture, and Pathways managed packages, which deliver core functionality, as well as required metadata. Coordinate with your Salesforce Account Executive to make sure that you meet all the installation requirements. - **[Install Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the package to install Student Success Hub for higher ed. - **[Additional Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you install SSH, there's some configuration to do before you get started. To install the additional plans (such as Sample Support Reports and Dashboards or Sample Permission Sets), complete the following tasks. ## Install Student Success Hub Download the package to install Student Success Hub for higher ed. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important - We recommend that you execute all of the steps in the installer plans, including optional steps. Doing so reduces errors and ensures that you have all of the configurations in place for customizing your org. See [Student Success Hub Higher Ed Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what's included in the installation plans for higher ed Student Success Hub orgs."). - If you originally installed Student Success Hub 2.20 or earlier and you want to add Pathways to your org, install Pathways separately. See [Install the Pathways Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Pathways up and running in your Student Success Hub higher ed org."). - We recommend that you install SSH in a new org that has no customizations. Installing SSH in an existing org can affect your custom metadata. - Do _not_ deploy Student Success Hub directly to a live production environment. Instead, deploy to a sandbox, customize configurations for your district and school, and then migrate to production. 1. Go to the [Student Success Hub higher ed installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/sal). 2. Log in to the correct Salesforce org. 3. Wait for the installer to retrieve information about the org. 4. Click **Base Plan - View Details**. The base plan installs the core packages and metadata configurations for Student Success Hub higher ed orgs. See [Student Success Hub Higher Ed Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what's included in the installation plans for higher ed Student Success Hub orgs."). 5. Review the installation steps and then run the installation. ## Additional Configuration After you install SSH, there's some configuration to do before you get started. To install the additional plans (such as Sample Support Reports and Dashboards or Sample Permission Sets), complete the following tasks. ### Create a Support Process Build a process for handling your support cases. For instructions, see [Create a Process for Managing Support Cases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/create-a-process-for-managing-support-cases) in Trailhead. ### Create Custom Records To manage the advising process, create record types on the Case and Event objects using the naming conventions in this table. For instructions, see [Create Record Types](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/create-a-process-for-managing-support-cases/support-cases-record-types) in Trailhead.
Object Custom Record Type Naming Conventions
Case Advisee Record

Label Name: Advisee Record

Record Type Name: AdviseeRecord
Case Advising Queue

Label Name: Advising Queue

Record Type Name: AdvisingQueue
Event Advising Event

Label Name: Advising Event

Record Type Name: AdvisingEvent
Event Advising Time

Label Name: Advising Time

Record Type Name: AdvisingTime
### Create a Custom Lightning App Before you install sample permission sets, set up the Advisor Link custom application. See [Create Lightning Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.dev_apps_lightning_create.htm&type=5). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Use these parameters when you enter the name for your application: - App Name: Advisor Link - Developer Name: AdvisorLink ### Create Custom Fields Before you install permission sets, add custom fields to these objects using the field names in this table. See [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5). | Object | Field Label | Field Name | | --- | --- | --- | | Case | Proxy Email | Proxy\_Email | | Case | Proxy Name | Proxy\_Name | | Contact | Student ID | Student\_ID | | Facility | Waiting Room Instructions | Waiting\_Room\_Instructions | # Install Student Success Hub for K-12 Learn how to install Student Success Hub for K-12, including the core managed packages, unmanaged metadata configurations, and sample data. The installation includes the Student Success Hub and K-12 Architecture Kit managed packages, which deliver core functionality, as well as required metadata. Coordinate with your Salesforce Account Executive to make sure that you meet all the installation criteria. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important - We recommend that you execute all of the steps in the installer plans, including optional steps. Completing all steps reduces errors and ensures that you have all of the configurations in place for customizing your org. For more information about the installation plans and steps, see [Student Success Hub K-12 Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what's included in the installation plans for K-12 Student Success Hub orgs."). - We recommend that you install SSH into a new org that has no customizations. Installing SSH into an existing org can affect your custom metadata. - Do **_not_** deploy Student Success Hub directly to a live production environment. Instead, deploy to a sandbox environment, customize configurations for your school or institution, and then migrate to production. 1. Go to the [Student Success Hub K-12 installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/ssh). 2. Log in to the correct Salesforce org. 3. Wait for the installer to retrieve information about the org. 4. Choose an installation plan. Base Plan Installs the minimal, core packages required by Student Success Hub K-12 orgs. Required. Full Configuration Plan Deploys metadata configurations that help you to get Student Success Hub up and running. Install the base plan before installing the full configuration plan. Recommended for all customers. Sample Data Plan Inserts sample data that you can use to test or demo features. Install the base and full configuration plans before installing the sample data plan. Recommended for partners. 5. Review the installation steps and then run the installation. The installation can take some time to complete. Check your email for confirmation that it was successful. ## Set Up the Installation Manager The Installation Manager on the SSH Settings page lets you deploy optional, unmanaged metadata to your org. Make sure that you, as an admin, have access to it. 1. From Setup, on the System Administrator profile, under System Permissions, select **Customize Application**. 2. From Setup, on the System Administrator profile, under Apex Class Access, add **sfal.InstallerAuthorizationController**, **sfal.InstallerTypeSelectionController**, and **sfal.SalSettingsController** to the list of Enabled Apex Classes. 3. From Setup, search for and then select **Remote Site Settings**. Click **Edit** for the Tubular remote site, select **Active**, and save your changes. For more information about the Installation Manager, see [Add Metadata to Your Student Success Hub Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_metadata.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Installation Manager in the Student Success Hub app to add unmanaged metadata to your org."). # Install the Admissions Connect Package Install Admissions Connect for your institution. After you complete the [installation prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_prereq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the data requirements and considerations, and complete the prerequisites before you install Admissions Connect.") and [import your school's data into EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm), you're ready to install Admissions Connect. The installation includes the managed package, which delivers many of the features, and the unmanaged extension package, which delivers additional features and metadata. If you have questions about whether you meet the installation criteria, check with your Salesforce account executive. 1. Go to the [Admissions Connect installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest). 2. Select an option: 1. Use **Install Admissions Connect** if you don't plan to use the Applicant Portal. 2. Use **Install Admissions Connect with Applicant Portal** to install Admissions Connect and the Applicant portal, or to add the Applicant Portal to your existing Admissions Connect org. 3. Click **Log In to Start Pre-Install Validation** and select an org type. If you install Admissions Connect with Applicant Portal, you get the Applicant Portal Template, which helps you start building your applicant experience. It also includes the [quick start Action Plans and related assets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide."). To ensure that Admissions Connect works as expected, we recommend that you leave the optional installer steps selected. # Install the Migration Packages in Your Org Install the unmanaged packages in the org where the migration is to be performed. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important BY INSTALLING SFDC MIGRATION PACKAGE, YOU AGREE TO ITS LICENSE AND ALL DISCLAIMERS, STATED IN THE [ANNEXURE](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_annexure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the terms and conditions of the license required for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit.") OF THIS DOCUMENT. 1. Install the [EDA Migration Setup](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t6O0000011bm7) package required to deploy the custom fields and Visualforce pages for the guided flow. 1. Access the package URL and log in with your org credentials. 2. Click **Install for All Users**, and then click **Install**. 3. Click **Done** when prompted. You are notified by email when the installation is complete. 2. Verify that the package is installed. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then select **Installed Packages**. 2. Find the package name in the list to confirm that it’s installed. 3. If you don't have edit access to the custom fields created in step 1, provide access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator**. 3. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Learning**, and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Field Permissions, turn on read and edit access for Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c, and then save your changes. 6. Similarly, provide access for these custom fields: | Object Name | Object API Name | Custom Field | | --- | --- | --- | | Learning | Learning | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Outcome Item | LearningOutcomeItem | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Program | LearningProgram | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Account Contact Relationship | AccountContactRelation | AffiliationLegacyid\_\_c | | Record Alert | RecordAlert | Alert\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Application Timeline | ApplicationTimeline | Application\_legacyId\_\_c | | Individual Application | IndividualApplication | Application\_legacyId\_\_c | | Program Term Application Timeline | ProgramTermApplnTimeline | Application\_legacyId\_\_c | | Application Review | ApplicationReview | ApplicationReview\_legacyId\_\_c | | Service Territory Member | ServiceTerritoryMember | Appointment\_Attendee\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Appointment | ServiceAppointment | Appointment\_Attendee\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Assigned Resource | AssignedResource | Appointment\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Appointment | ServiceAppointment | Appointment\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Resource | ServiceResource | Attendee\_Legacy\_\_c | | Contact Profile | ContactProfile | Contact\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Person Language | PersonLanguage | ContactLang\_Legacy\_id\_c\_\_c | | Learning Course | LearningCourse | Course\_LearningCourse\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | Course\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Outcome Item | LearningOutcomeItem | Course\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning | Learning | Course\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering Participant | CourseOfferingParticipant | CourseConnection\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Course Offering Participant Result | CourseOfferingPtcpResult | CourseConnection\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering | CourseOffering | CourseOffering\_legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering Schedule | CourseOfferingSchedule | CourseOfferingSchedule\_LegacyId\_\_c | | Person Education | PersonEducation | Education\_History\_Legacy\_Status\_\_c | | Person Education | PersonEducation | Education\_History\_Legacy\_V\_Status\_\_c | | Person Education | PersonEducation | EducationHistory\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Location | Location | Facility\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | Learning\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Examination | Examination | Legacy\_Test\_Type\_\_c | | Contact Profile | ContactProfile | MilitaryBackground\_Legacy\_\_c | | Learning Program Plan Requirement | LearningProgramPlanRqmt | Plan\_Req\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Program Plan | LearningProgramPlan | Program\_Plan\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learner Program | LearnerProgram | ProgramEnrollment\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Contact Contact Relationship | ContactContactRelation | Relationship\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Party Role Relationship | PartyRoleRelation | Relationship\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Work Type Group Role | WorkTypeGroupRole | RoleTopicSetting\_legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Care Plan Template | CarePlanTemplate | Success\_Plan\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Care Plan | CarePlan | SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Case Participant | CaseParticipant | SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Session | AcademicSession | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Term | AcademicTerm | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Term Enrollment | AcademicTermEnrollment | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Year | AcademicYear | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering Participant Result | CourseOfferingPtcpResult | TermGrade\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Person Examination | PersonExamination | Test\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Work Type Group | WorkTypeGroup | Topic\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | 4. Similarly, provide access to the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 5. Similarly, depending on your data migration scenario, deploy the Data Processing Engine definitions using the applicable package. SEE ALSO: - [Data Migration to Education Cloud Within Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_migration_to_education_cloud_within_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Data Processing Engine to migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model within your org.") # Install the Migration Packages in Your Source and Target Orgs Install the unmanaged packages in the source org from where your data is to be migrated. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important BY INSTALLING SFDC MIGRATION PACKAGE, YOU AGREE TO ITS LICENSE AND ALL DISCLAIMERS, STATED IN THE [ANNEXURE](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_annexure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the terms and conditions of the license required for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit.") OF THIS DOCUMENT. 1. Install [EDA Migration Apex Classes Setup](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t4U000000PJhJ) to deploy the Apex classes and custom shadow objects in your source org. 1. Access the package URL and log in with your source org credentials. 2. Click **Install for All Users**, and then click **Install**. 3. Click **Done** when prompted. You are notified by email when the installation is complete. 2. Verify that the package is installed. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages, and then select **Installed Packages**. 2. Find the package name in the list to confirm that it’s installed. 3. Verify that the Apex classes and custom shadow objects are available in your source org. 4. If you don't have edit access to the custom fields created in step 1, provide access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator**. 3. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **SSH\_Shadow\_Alerts**, and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Field Permissions, turn on read and edit access for all fields, and then save your changes. 6. Similarly, provide edit access to these Education Data Architecture (EDA) objects: | EDA Custom Object Name | EDA Custom Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Shadow Task | Shadow\_Task\_\_c | | Shadow Event | Shadow\_Event\_\_c | 5. Similarly, provide access to the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 6. Install [EDA Migration Shadow Objects](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t4U000000PJhT) to deploy record types, custom fields, shadow objects, Apex classes, static resource (SDL) files, and Visualforce pages for the guided flow in your target (Education Cloud) org. 7. Verify that the package is installed. 8. If you don't have edit access to all the fields these custom fields created in step 6, provide access. | EDA Object Name | EDA Object API Name | Custom Field | | --- | --- | --- | | Learning | Learning | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Outcome Item | LearningOutcomeItem | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | Account\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Program | LearningProgram | Account\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Account Contact Relationship | AccountContactRelation | AffiliationLegacyid\_\_c | | Record Alert | RecordAlert | Alert\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Application Timeline | ApplicationTimeline | Application\_legacyId\_\_c | | Individual Application | IndividualApplication | Application\_legacyId\_\_c | | Program Term Application Timeline | ProgramTermApplnTimeline | Application\_legacyId\_\_c | | Application Review | ApplicationReview | ApplicationReview\_legacyId\_\_c | | Service Territory Member | ServiceTerritoryMember | Appointment\_Attendee\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Appointment | ServiceAppointment | Appointment\_Attendee\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Assigned Resource | AssignedResource | Appointment\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Appointment | ServiceAppointment | Appointment\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Resource | ServiceResource | Attendee\_Legacy\_\_c | | Contact Profile | ContactProfile | Contact\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Person Language | PersonLanguage | ContactLang\_Legacy\_id\_c\_\_c | | Learning Course | LearningCourse | Course\_LearningCourse\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | Course\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Outcome Item | LearningOutcomeItem | Course\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning | Learning | Course\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering Participant | CourseOfferingParticipant | CourseConnection\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Course Offering Participant Result | CourseOfferingPtcpResult | CourseConnection\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering | CourseOffering | courseOffering\_legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering Schedule | CourseOfferingSchedule | CourseOfferingSchedule\_LegacyId\_\_c | | Person Education | PersonEducation | Education\_History\_Legacy\_Status\_\_c | | Person Education | PersonEducation | Education\_History\_Legacy\_V\_Status\_\_c | | Person Education | PersonEducation | EducationHistory\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Location | Location | Facility\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | Learning\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Examination | Examination | Legacy\_Test\_Type\_\_c | | Contact Profile | ContactProfile | MilitaryBackground\_Legacy\_\_c | | Learning Program Plan Requirement | LearningProgramPlanRqmt | Plan\_Req\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Learning Program Plan | LearningProgramPlan | Program\_Plan\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Learning Program | LearningProgram | ProgramEnrollment\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Contact Contact Relationship | ContactContactRelation | Relationship\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Party Role Relationship | PartyRoleRelation | Relationship\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Work Type Group Role | WorkTypeGroupRole | RoleTopicSetting\_legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Care Plan Template | CarePlanTemplate | Success\_Plan\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Care Plan | CarePlan | SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Case Participant | CaseParticipant | SuccessPlan\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Session | AcademicSession | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Term | AcademicTerm | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Term Enrollment | AcademicTermEnrollment | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Academic Year | AcademicYear | Term\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Course Offering Participant Result | CourseOfferingPtcpResult | TermGrade\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Person Examination | PersonExamination | Test\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Work Type Group | WorkTypeGroup | Topic\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Account | Account | Account\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Case | Case | Case\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Contact | Contact | Contact\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Lead | Lead | Lead\_Legacy\_ID\_\_c | | Opportunity | Opportunity | Opportunity\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | User | User | User\_Legacy\_Id\_\_c | | Service Appointment | ServiceAppointment | ServiceResource\_Id\_\_c | 9. Similarly, provide access to the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 10. If you don't have edit access to all the fields of these objects, provide access. | Object Name | Object API Name | | --- | --- | | EDA Shadow Account\_V1 | EDA\_Shadow\_Account\_V1\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Contact | EDA\_Shadow\_Contact\_\_c | | EDA Shadow User | EDA\_Shadow\_User\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Opportunity | EDA\_Shadow\_Opportunity\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Case | EDA\_Shadow\_Case\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Lead | EDA\_Shadow\_Lead\_\_c | | EDA Shadow UserRole | EDA\_Shadow\_UserRole\_\_c | | EDA Shadow RecordType | EDA\_Shadow\_RecordType\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Relationship | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Relationship\_\_c | | EDA Shadow ContactLanguage | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Contact\_Language\_\_c | | EDA Shadow EducationHistory | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_EducationHistory\_\_c | | EDA Shadow NPSP Affiliation | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Affiliation\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Facility | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Facility\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Term | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Term\_\_c | | EDA\_Shadow\_Course | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Course\_\_c | | EDA Shadow CourseOffering | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_CourseOffering\_\_c | | EDA Shadow program plan | EDA\_Shadow\_program\_plan\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Course Offering Schedule | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Course\_Offering\_Schedule\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Plan Requirement | EDA\_Shadow\_Plan\_Requirement\_\_c | | EDA Shadow ProgramEnrollment | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Program\_Enrollment\_\_c | | EDA Shadow CourseConnection | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Course\_Enrollment\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Term Grade | EDA\_Shadow\_hed\_Term\_Grade\_\_c | | SSH\_Shadow\_Alert | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_Alert\_\_c | | SSH\_Shadow\_Success\_Plan\_Template | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_SuccessPlanTemplate\_\_c | | SSH Shadow SuccessPlan | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_SuccessPlan\_\_c | | AC Shadow Application | AC\_Shadow\_hed\_Application\_\_c | | AC Shadow Test | AC\_Shadow\_hed\_Test\_\_c | | AC Shadow TestScore | AC\_Shadow\_hed\_Test\_Score\_\_c | | AC\_Shadow\_ApplicationReview | AC\_Shadow\_randa\_Application\_Review\_\_c | | SSH Shadow Topic | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_Topic\_\_c | | SSH Shadow Appointment | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_Appointment\_\_c | | SSH Shadow Appointment Attendee | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_AppointmentAttendee\_\_c | | SSH Shadow Role Topic Setting | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_RoleTopicSetting\_\_c | | SSH\_Shadow\_Appointment Location | SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_AppointmentLocation\_\_c | | Shadow Event | Shadow\_Event\_\_c | | Shadow Task | Shadow\_Task\_\_c | | EDA Shadow Business Hours | EDA\_Shadow\_Business\_Hours\_\_c | 11. Similarly, provide access to the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 12. Install [Org to Org - EDA Migration DPE Definitions](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04t4U000000PJhx) to deploy the Data Processing Engine definitions in your target (Education Cloud) org, and verify the installation. SEE ALSO: - [Data Migration to Education Cloud in a New Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_migration_to_education_cloud_in_a_new_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Data Processing Engine to migrate your data to the Education Cloud data model in a new org.") # Install the Nonprofit Experience Manager App Install the app, along with its permission sets, and give your admins access to it. 1. Go to the [installer link](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installpackage.apexp?p0=04t4p000002feujaa0). 2. Log in to the correct Salesforce org. 3. Click the Install button. 4. Follow the prompts to finish the process. The system sends an email when the installation is complete. - **[Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_install_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Experience Manager App includes two permission sets: Manage Contact Registration Mapping and Manage Consent. - **[Give Users Access to the Nonprofit Experience Manager App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_install_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To set up Contact Registration Mappings or create new communications, admins need access to the Nonprofit Experience Manager app. ## Permission Sets The Nonprofit Experience Manager App includes two permission sets: Manage Contact Registration Mapping and Manage Consent. - Manage Contact Registration Mapping: Used to create mappings of Nonprofit Experience Cloud site registration fields to Contact fields. - Manage Consent: Gives visibility and edit access to Consent Management Objects, which are used to create communications (such as newsletter and subscriptions) that you can make available in your Nonprofit Experience Cloud sites. ## Give Users Access to the Nonprofit Experience Manager App To set up Contact Registration Mappings or create new communications, admins need access to the Nonprofit Experience Manager app. 1. In the Quick Find box in Setup, enter Permission Sets, then click **Permission Sets**. 2. Click the appropriate permission set name. 3. Click **Manage Assignments**. 4. Click **Add Assignments**. 5. Select the appropriate users, then click **Assign**. 6. Click **Done**. # Install the Student Success Chatbot Understand the operational requirements, prerequisites, and how to install the Student Success Chatbot. - **[Operational Requirements for the Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot is an optional Einstein Bot template (not a Salesforce app). To use Einstein Bots in your org, make sure that you have the correct licensing requirements. - **[Installation Prerequisites for the Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you install Student Success Chatbot, complete these prerequisites. - **[Install the Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've addressed the installation prerequisites, you're ready to install the Student Success Chatbot. ## Operational Requirements for the Chatbot The Student Success chatbot is an optional Einstein Bot template (not a Salesforce app). To use Einstein Bots in your org, make sure that you have the correct licensing requirements. See [Einstein Bots Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.bots_service_requirements.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Installation Prerequisites for the Chatbot Before you install Student Success Chatbot, complete these prerequisites. 1. Install Student Success Hub. Student Success Hub is a paid product. Student Success Chatbot requires a Student Success Hub org that is licensed and configured for student users with either a Customer Community Plus license or a Customer Community Plus Login license. For more information, see [Install Student Success Hub for Higher Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to install Student Success Hub for a higher ed org, including the core managed packages and required unmanaged metadata."). 2. Install Digital Engagement. Digital Engagement is a paid product. For detailed information, including installation prerequisites, see [Set Up Digital Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.mfs_appointment_assistant_set_up_digital_engagement.htm&type=5) and [Set Up Messaging Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.livemessage_setup.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 3. Enable Einstein Bots. From Setup, search for and then select **Einstein Bots**. Then turn on Einstein Bots. 4. Verify that your Salesforce org has at least one Messaging or Chat User feature license. From Setup, search for and then select **Company Information**. Look in the Feature Licenses related list. ## Install the Chatbot After you've addressed the installation prerequisites, you're ready to install the Student Success Chatbot. Coordinate with your Salesforce Account Executive to make sure that you meet all the installation criteria. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Student Success Chatbot deploys unmanaged metadata, so it doesn't appear in the list of Installed Packages in Setup, and you don't receive automatic pushes for new versions. Install the Student Success Chatbot metadata only once. Any customizations that you make are overwritten if you install again. Don't install to a live production environment. Instead, deploy the chatbot to a new sandbox environment, customize configurations for your institution, and then migrate to production. 1. Go to the [Student Success Chatbot installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/student-success-chatbot/latest). 2. Log in to the correct Salesforce org. 3. Wait for the installer to retrieve information about your org. 4. Click **Install**. The installation process can take some time to complete. # Institutional Data for Regional Reporting and Intelligence Configure your education data structures to meet region-specific reporting standards and institutional requirements across global regulatory frameworks. Region-specific data structures bring reporting alignment into your existing Education Cloud org without data-mapping exercises, data duplication, and custom processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Education Cloud’s regional data extension adds region-specific fields and metadata directly into an institution's existing data model. With Education Cloud as the single source of truth, registrars and data officers can validate data quality and integrity early in the reporting cycle. Institutions can reduce submission errors and improve consistency across systems. Rather than relying on external data warehouses and downstream transformations, institutions can produce validated, submission ready outputs directly from their operational data. This unified data foundation transforms reporting from a reactive process into a continuous, intelligence-driven capability. SEE ALSO - [Education Cloud Fields on Standard Objects for United Kingdom Compliance and Configuration](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_standard_objects_for_uk_compliance.htm) - [Education Cloud Fields on Standard Objects for MortarCAPS Compliance and Configuration](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_standard_objects_for_mortarcaps_compliance.htm) # Intake Assessments for Support Programs Administer intake assessments during program enrollment to understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Understanding every enrolled learner's challenges, goals, and aspirations is critical to providing a rewarding learning experience. With the Education Cloud Student Success and Mentoring apps, you can model a variety of programs and track the allocation of benefits across the institution, helping you to more effectively meet learner requirements. You can even publish the programs that you offer on your learner portal, so learners can view details and self-enroll. In Student Success and Mentoring, you can add an assessment with predefined questions to a program. The assessment questionnaire appears in the portal when a learner enrolls in the program. Automation saves the submitted responses as records related to the program enrollment. Advisors and mentorship facilitators can review the responses to clearly understand the learner's requirements and determine if the program meets their needs and how best to support them. Advising and mentoring programs offer benefits where the category of the benefit type is advising or mentoring, respectively. When a learner enrolls in a program, they're automatically enrolled in the respective advising or mentoring benefit, and a benefit assignment record is created. Learners participating in advising programs can then schedule an appointment with an assigned success team member for the program, which automatically creates a benefit disbursement. The status of the benefit disbursement is updated based on the appointment. For a mentoring program, mentors can register as a provider of the benefit in the mentor portal Experience Cloud site. Mentoring facilitators can then use the assessments to connect a mentee with a mentor on the benefit assignment record. Education Cloud includes these integration procedures, flows, and invocable actions that automate the processes in program enrollment.
Resource API Name Type Description
EDUProgramMgmt_EnrollInProgram Integration Procedure

Enrolls the learner in the support program and:

  • Creates a program enrollment record.
  • Creates a benefit assignment record.
  • Creates a task for the learner to schedule an appointment with the advisor.
    Note
    Note To provide access to tasks, enable the Edit Tasks and Access Activities in the learner's profile permissions.
  • Creates a case with related records if the program has a success team and no open case of the specific record type exists for the account.
  • Associates the assessment record with the program enrollment, if applicable.
createBenefitDisbursementForServiceAppointment Invocable Action Creates a benefit disbursement record for every service appointment ID.
CreateBnftDisbForAppt Flow Invokes the createBenefitDisbursementForServiceAppointment invocable action.
UpdateBnftDisbByAppt Flow Updates the status of the existing benefit disbursement, or creates a new one.
BatchGenBenefitDisb Flow Runs daily batch jobs that invoke the CreateBnftDisbForAppt flow.
CreateMentorEnrollmentRec Flow Creates a constituent role record of Mentor for benefit providers upon the creation of a benefit provider record.
CreateMenteeEnrollmentRec Flow Creates a benefit assignment record and a constituent role record of Mentee for a contact upon the creation of a program enrollment record.
ShareMentoringRecords Flow

Shares records between the mentor and mentee for Experience Cloud site access.

Note
Note This flow automatically shares records. Internal Public Read access on Program Enrollment causes the flow to fail.
CreaUpdtCtctCtctRelaRec Flow Creates or updates contact contact relationship records for benefit providers that represent the relationship between mentors and mentees.
UpdateMentorCstnRoleRec Flow Updates a constituent role record to inactive when the associated provider offering record is marked as inactive.
DeactvMenteeCstnRoleRec Flow Deactivates the constituent role record for a mentee when the program enrollment ends.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A program enrollment record can be created irrespective of the status of the program. We recommend that you implement restrictions as required in your org. - **[Create an Intake Assessment Question](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_intake_assessment_question.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create assessment questions to understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them. - **[Intelligent Question Generation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_intelligent_question_generation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Intake assessments help you understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them. Use Intelligent Question Generation with Einstein generative AI to easily draft questions for intake assessments. - **[Create Intake Assessment Questions with Einstein](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_intake_assessment_questions_with_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create intake assessment questions using Intelligent Question Generation with Einstein generative AI. - **[Create an Intake Assessment for a Support Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_intake_assessment_for_a_support_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Omni Process that shows assessment questions and captures responses when learners enroll in a program. # Integrate an Education Cloud Agent with Messaging Channels To add your Education Cloud agent to your Experience Cloud portal or other apps, configure flows and enable messaging channels. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
User Permissions Needed
To integrate an Education Cloud AI agent into messaging channels: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Select your Education Cloud agent. 3. Click **Setup Checklist**. 4. Refer to the referenced documentation to enable Messaging, and to manage the required flows. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can connect an inbound channel, such as an Experience Cloud site, to only one agent at a time. For example, to deploy multiple agents, you need to create separate Experience Cloud sites for each, such as one for recruitment and another for advising. See [Connect a Service Agent to Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_messaging.htm&language=en_US). # Intelligent Degree Planning Give learners a dynamic degree planning experience with Intelligent Degree Planner in the Student Success app.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Intelligent Degree Planner enables learners to visualize their possible paths to degree completion. Learner Progress helps them understand what they’ve completed and what remains so they can stay on track for graduation. Intelligent Degree Planner and Learner Progress work together to help learners plan their time accurately and efficiently. Advisors access Intelligent Degree Planner in the CRM, and learners access it through Experience Cloud. Both experiences have the same intuitive user interface. Learners can lay out courses on their pathways to graduation by year, term, and session by using an intuitive drag-and-drop canvas. They can also add placeholders as needed. For example, if a learner knows that they select from a group of elective courses but don't know which course they want to take, they can add a requirement placeholder and select a course later. Providing a clear visual cue of whether a plan meets program requirements, the planner calculates and shows the number of planned, unplanned, and required units (as in credits, credit hours, or other learning measurements) in real time. Depending on configuration, learners can submit their completed pathway for approval and see status updates as their advisor reviews it. To simplify planning for learners, advisors can create learner pathway templates to serve as a starting point. Advisors and students can stay up-to-date with learners’ progress as they proceed along their pathways with [Learner Progress](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_progress_for_learners_and_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Include the Learner Progress component from Education Cloud on your Experience Cloud site so that learners can track their academic advancement. Advisors see Learner Progress as a tab on a learner’s case record page in Student Success."). ## Verify Program Requirements The Learner Pathway Builder includes a **Verify Program Requirements** button that checks whether the prerequisites and corequisites in a learner’s pathway are properly ordered to fulfill course requirements. The same validation runs automatically when a learner or advisor clicks **Save** or **Save & Close**. When validation finds an issue, a warning icon appears on the affected course cards. Click the icon to see a message that explains the specific issue. Validation warnings don’t block the learner or advisor from saving the pathway. The button appears for all users who can view the Learner Pathway Builder, but only when the **Automatically Validate Pathway Selections** setting is off. When that setting is on, validation runs automatically and the button doesn’t appear. - **[Org Setup for Intelligent Degree Planner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org_for_intelligent_degree_planner.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To give your learners the best intelligent degree planning experience, consider the planner’s behavior when modeling your data, create a learner pathway global action, and configure sharing to suit the planner. You can also create learner pathway templates, or you can let your learners plan their pathways from scratch. - **[Add Intelligent Degree Planner to Your Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_intelligent_degree_planner_to_your_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to add Intelligent Degree Planner to your Experience Cloud site. - **[How Learners Experience the Intelligent Degree Planner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_understand_how_learners_experience_intelligent_degree_planner.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learners access the Intelligent Degree Planner through your Education Portal. They can use the drag-and-drop interface to visualize their complete learning journey with your institution. # Intelligent Program Comparison Engine The Intelligent Program Comparison Engine gives learners a side-by-side comparison of the learning program that they're enrolled in with up to three other programs that they're considering.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Intelligent Program Comparison Engine is a screen flow that you can configure and add to your Education Portal. It's only available for use with Experience Cloud. - **[Configure the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_the_intelligent_program_comparison_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow, and then identify the fields on the learning programs that you want to use for learners, advisors, registrars, and faculty to select and compare programs. - **[Add the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine to Your Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_the_intelligent_program_comparison_engine_to_your_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to add the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine to your Experience Cloud site. - **[Add a Button for Comparing Learning Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_a_button_for_comparing_learning_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and add a button that advisors or other staff can use to launch the Compare Learning Program Plans screen flow from records such as cases. - **[How Learners and Advisors Experience the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_how_learners_experience_the_intelligent_program_comparison_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learners access the Intelligent Program Comparison Engine through your Education Portal, either directly from the page that houses the engine or from the Summary page of a learning program. Staff, such as advisors, access the engine using a button that you add to an object layout, for example Case. # Intelligent Question Generation Intake assessments help you understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them. Use Intelligent Question Generation with Einstein generative AI to easily draft questions for intake assessments.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
As a director or advisor, creating assessments for enrollment into various support programs can be a tedious process. Intelligent Question Generation uses Einstein generative AI to instantly generate relevant questions. A predefined prompt template determines the context for question generation. Use the Support Program Intake Questions prompt template from Education Cloud to generate intake assessment questions for support programs. If required, provide additional instructions to specify your requirement. Einstein generates draft questions that you can modify and use to create an assessment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Einstein are applied to your organization. ## Set Up Your Org for Intelligent Question Generation Configure your org to enable Intelligent Question Generation for Education Cloud. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To set up your org: | Education Cloud Full Access | Prerequisites: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Intelligent Question Generation uses [Einstein Generative AI](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_about.htm) and consumes Einstein Requests. [Einstein Generative AI Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.generative_ai_solutions.htm) are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See [Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/trust-and-compliance-documentation/) for more information. - Student Success is enabled in your org. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Student Success in Education Cloud to provide proactive and personalized support to learners across academics, financial aid, careers, and life goals."). - Program and Benefit Management is enabled in your org. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - Einstein is enabled in your org. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - Discovery Framework is enabled in your org. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). 1. Enable Intelligent Question Generation in your org. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). 2. Provide the required permissions to users: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. From the list, select the user that requires access to Intelligent Question Generation. 3. Under Permission Set Assignments, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add these permission sets: - Education Cloud Full Access - Intelligent Question Generation Access - Prompt Template User - Omnistudio Admin 5. Save your changes. 3. Provide the required object permissions to the Standard User profile for creating assessment questions: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. From the list, select **Standard User**. 3. Click **Edit**, and then under Standard Object Permissions, provide read, create, edit, and delete access to these objects: - Assessment Question Config - Assessment Question Set Config 4. Save your changes. 4. Provide the required permissions to the Standard User profile for creating and editing assessments. See [Create a Permission Set for an Omnistudio Standard User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_create_an_omnistudio_standard_read_only_user_profile_6725_std.htm&language=en_US). # Introduction Simplify how you manage your volunteers. Spreadsheets, smartphones, and sticky notes. It's a typical toolkit for volunteer coordinators everywhere. You see it every day—your coordinator chasing volunteer data across disconnected systems, outdated email lists, and illegible event signup sheets. It doesn't have to be this hard. At Salesforce.org, we believe that your volunteer program can do even more good with a lot less work. And we'd like to show you how Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S) helps free you from sticky notes and spreadsheets, so that you can focus on what really matters. Maybe you're an experienced Salesforce admin. Or maybe you're new to basic admin tasks such as managing users and permissions, or customizing page layouts. Wherever you are, we'll take it step by step and be there with you from start to finish. Let's build the better way together. - **[What You Get Out of the Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_before_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend reviewing all of the Volunteering for Salesforce documentation before you configure, so you can see how the tools work together and how automation takes care of tracking volunteers and volunteer opportunities. - **[The Underlying Data Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_before_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Objects hold and organize the data you need to manage your volunteers. - **[Tools for Website Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_before_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While you can use Volunteers for Salesforce as a standalone system, it's even more powerful when it's an integral part of your organization's website. It's another level of automation that keeps volunteer opportunities updated automatically and allows volunteers to go online to register, report their hours worked, and take pride in their personal volunteering dashboard. - **[Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_before_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Be aware of these limitations in support for certain features. ## What You Get Out of the Box We recommend reviewing all of the Volunteering for Salesforce documentation before you configure, so you can see how the tools work together and how automation takes care of tracking volunteers and volunteer opportunities. See [Volunteers for Salesforce Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.volunteers_for_salesforce.htm). Now, with a clear vision of our end goal in mind, let's start by reviewing what comes in the V4S box. - **[Tabs in the Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_before_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteers for Salesforce user interface gives you a set of tabs, where your users go to get things done. ### Tabs in the Application The Volunteers for Salesforce user interface gives you a set of tabs, where your users go to get things done. ![Tabs in the Volunteers for Salesforce app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4s_tabs.png) As the Salesforce admin, you've done your job well when the tabs function seamlessly to make it as simple as possible to: - Find volunteers - Create one-time and recurring volunteer opportunities - Schedule volunteers - Reconcile hours - Mass email volunteers - Monitor and report on volunteer engagement ## The Underlying Data Structure Objects hold and organize the data you need to manage your volunteers. Behind the scenes, V4S comes with an underlying data structure. Contacts and Leads are used for tracking people. Contacts are known, registered volunteers, and Leads are people who have expressed interest. Contacts and Leads are standard Salesforce database objects that are customized in V4S to track extra information about individual volunteers' skills and availability. The Campaign object tracks discrete volunteer engagements, such as a community dinner or a park cleanup event. It's also a standard Salesforce object, often used for managing marketing campaigns. In Volunteers for Salesforce, it includes custom fields to automatically calculate the total number of volunteers and total hours for engagements. (We call this type of automation roll-up summary fields.) Custom objects are included to track volunteer-specific things of interest. - Volunteer Job tracks volunteer opportunities, one level below the Campaign. - Volunteer Shift tracks time-bound volunteer shifts, one level below the Volunteer Job. - Volunteer Hours tracks the number of volunteer hours, both completed and committed. - Job Recurrence Schedule tracks recurring volunteer opportunities. - Volunteer Recurrence Schedule tracks your "regulars"—volunteers who sign up for recurring jobs. ## Tools for Website Integration While you can use Volunteers for Salesforce as a standalone system, it's even more powerful when it's an integral part of your organization's website. It's another level of automation that keeps volunteer opportunities updated automatically and allows volunteers to go online to register, report their hours worked, and take pride in their personal volunteering dashboard. For a lot of organizations, website integration is the most daunting part of setup. The process involves working with features that may be less familiar to admins—templates, custom settings, field sets, and more. We hear you. The Volunteers for Salesforce articles show you, step-by-step, what you and your web developer need to do for successful integration. ## Limitations Be aware of these limitations in support for certain features. - Access to V4S requires that the user license have at least Read access to Campaigns. Support for V4S is limited with Communities licenses, for example. Only the Partner Community license allows Campaign access. - V4S is not optimized for mobile devices. # Introduction After you've created a Site, configure the data access settings so that volunteers can interact with your Site's contents. Sharing is the general term that describes how you control who sees what in Salesforce. Sharing settings control users' access to the Contact, Account, Campaign, Volunteer Jobs, and other Volunteers for Salesforce objects. - [Define Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_define_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you have an existing Volunteers for Salesforce org that has been upgraded to the Salesforce Winter '20 release and have enabled the Secure Guest User Record Access setting, create sharing rules to give guest users access to your records.") - [Configure Data Access for Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_data_access_vf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Volunteers for Salesforce is built on Visualforce, which is a way to create custom user interfaces for Salesforce objects and data. Configure access to Visualforce pages for your volunteers user profile.") - [Configure Object and Field Permissions in Public Access Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_config_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The last step in configuring data access is making sure your Site's public access settings give permission to read, create, and edit the dozen or so objects that Volunteers for Salesforce needs to do its job.") - [Configure Site Guest User Access for Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_site_guest_user_access_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The System Admin must select Grant Guest Users Update Access in Volunteer Settings to allow guest users to update records shared with them.") ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If data access and visibility in Salesforce are unfamiliar territory, the [Data Security](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/modules/data_security/units/data_security_overview) Trailhead module is a great place to get your bearings first. Then come back and get comfortable, because we're going to linger a while in the Setup menu configuring data access. # Introduction As an admin, you can embed Volunteers for Salesforce pages directly in your website so that volunteers can sign themselves up for jobs and track their own volunteer history. This part of setup and configuration is optional. Volunteers for Salesforce works standalone even if it's not tied into your website. By doing the extra work, though, you extend the feature configuration work you've already done and put it to even more powerful use. # Invite a Grantseeker to Apply Ask grantseekers to apply for a Funding Request. - **[Update the Email Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_invite_grantseeker_to_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grants Management has two email templates to invite grantseekers to apply for funding. Both templates are tailored to clearly communicate a different milestone in the funding process. - **[Invite a Grantseeker](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_invite_grantseeker_to_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Six Sides Fund, our fictitious foundation, recently connected with the Portree Arts Council's grant manager, Ali Celik. The Six Sides Fund thinks their Art at Any Age program is a great fit for the Community Impact Funding Program. The Portree Arts Council is a new nonprofit to the Six Sides Fund so this is the first time they will be applying for funding. ## Update the Email Template Grants Management has two email templates to invite grantseekers to apply for funding. Both templates are tailored to clearly communicate a different milestone in the funding process. These templates are prefilled with fictitious information and should be updated to reflect your organization’s information. | Template Name | Purpose | | --- | --- | | Applicant Invitation | Communicates to a grantseeker that they are invited to apply to a Funding Program. | | Submit Application Confirmation | Communicates to a grantseeker their application is submitted for review. | 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Email in the Quick Find Box, then select **Classic Email Templates**. 3. Select **Grantee Portal** from the Folder dropdown. 4. To update the subject line, click **Edit** next to the email template name. Make your updates, then click **Save**. 5. To update the body of the template, click the email template name. For example, **Applicant Invitation**. 6. Click **Edit Template**. 7. Make updates, then click **Save**. ![Applicant Invitation template has two locations that need the site URL added to.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/applicantinvitationemailtemplateupdate.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember to update the fictitious information in both the HTML email and plain text email text, and make sure to add your site URL to the template. ## Invite a Grantseeker The Six Sides Fund, our fictitious foundation, recently connected with the Portree Arts Council's grant manager, Ali Celik. The Six Sides Fund thinks their Art at Any Age program is a great fit for the Community Impact Funding Program. The Portree Arts Council is a new nonprofit to the Six Sides Fund so this is the first time they will be applying for funding. A few things need to happen before a grantmaker can invite Ali to apply. First, a Contact record with an email address needs to exist for the grantseeker as well as an Account record for the organization. Since Ali is a new grantseeker, the grantmaker creates a Contact record for him and an Account record for Portree Arts Council. Next, a Funding Request needs to be created for the program. The grantmaker creates a Funding Request for the Art at Any Age program. The grantmaker completes all necessary fields, verifies that the site for the invitation has been published and is active, and then selects Ali’s Contact record as the Applying Contact and the Portree Arts Council as the Applying Organization. Once the Funding Request is created, the Invite Applicant button displays. ![The invitation details modal.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/invitewizard.jpg) 1. Click **Invite Applicant**. 2. Click **Send Invitation**. When the invitation is sent, the Funding Request record ownership transfers to Ali, and he receives a community user account log in to the Six Sides Fund's portal. Ali can log in and complete the Funding Request. # Involvement Group Management Empower students to stand out to employers by showcasing their competencies from classes, clubs, and work experience.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create Involvement Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_involvement_groups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors create an involvement group in Education Cloud to empower students to explore new interests, hone their talents, and grow into well-rounded individuals. Meaningful involvement includes activities outside the classroom, such as participation in student organizations, social groups, leadership roles, and community service. Students can self-enroll to these involvement groups or create their own involvement groups based on their competencies and traits through the portal. - **[Create Involvement Group Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_involvement_group_members.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors create an involvement group member in Education Cloud to track membership or participation of students in the involvement groups on campus. - **[Record Student Involvement in Activities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_record_student_involvement_activities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors can track and document a student's participation in academic and extracurricular activities. # IP Consent Management How Data Integrity complies with various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Insights Platform. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Insights Platform. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
Some of your constituents don’t want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact
  • Volunteer Auto-Reminder Email Opt Out
Some of your constituents don’t want to hear from your organization, unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields.
A volunteer has requested that you do not store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

You may consider deleting information in fields that store your volunteer's email address and phone number.

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

NPSP also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Personal Email
  • Work Email
  • Alternate Email
  • Matching Gift Email
  • Work Phone
  • Household Phone
  • Matching Gift Phone
  • Address Object

Remind your volunteer that you won’t be able to contact her about volunteer opportunities.
# Issue Refunds Automate student refunds when they drop courses, plan adjustments, or fees are reduced. Calculate the overpayment, post a credit memo against the original invoice, and automatically return the funds to the student’s original gateway payment method while maintaining a clear audit trail in the credit memo record. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To create an invoice: Education Cloud Full Access
Create a negative invoice to issue refunds. Salesforce then converts the invoice to a credit memo. The credit memo triggers the refund orchestration process, which automatically initiates the refund to the original payment method. To issue refunds and settle balances, see [Issue Refunds and Settle Balances](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_refund_orchestration.htm&language=en_US). # K-12 Architecture Kit Documentation Get 360-degree views of student needs and outcomes, take collaborative actions, and better engage families. - **[Set Up K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_get_set_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your data for K-12 Architecture Kit, learn about dashboards and reports, and customize page layouts and record types. - **[Get Started with K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to use K-12 Architecture Kit to model people, classes, programs, and relationships in your school. - **[Prepare K12 Architecture Kit Implementation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_prepare_for_implementation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about K-12 Architecture Kit objects and fields and their relationships. - **[Install K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review what's included with K-12 Architecture Kit, and then install the managed package. - **[K-12 Architecture Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** K-12 Architecture Kit provides a flexible approach to security that uses profiles, permission sets, and sharing settings so that you expose the right data to the right users. - **[Configure K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up K-12 Architecture Kit to meet the needs of your school. - **[K-12 Salesforce Configuration Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_sf_configuration_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to complete fundamental K-12 Architecture Kit setup tasks. - **[K-12 Object Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the objects in K-12 Architecture Kit and what they represent in your school. - **[Ongoing Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_ongoing_administration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep up with K-12 Architecture Kit releases, manage settings, and uninstall the managed package. # K-12 Architecture Kit Entity Relationship Diagram This diagram shows the relationships between K-12 Architecture Kit custom objects and Salesforce standard objects. ![K-12 Architecture Kit Entity Relationship Diagram (ERD)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/k-12_architecture_kit_erd.png) [K-12 Architecture Kit Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/K-12_Architecture_Kit_ERD.pdf) (in PDF format) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Any unreleased services or features referenced in this or other presentations, press releases, or public statements are not currently available and may not be delivered on time or at all. Customers who purchase our services should make their purchase decisions based upon features that are currently available. # K-12 Architecture Kit Feature Telemetry Learn how Salesforce collects feature telemetry data to understand the level of usage and adoption of various features. - **[Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** K-12 Architecture Kit Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. ## Feature Telemetry K-12 Architecture Kit Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides us with valuable insight into how K-12 Architecture Kit is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage and adoption of various K-12 Architecture Kit features. **No personally identifiable information is collected through K-12 Architecture Kit Feature Telemetry**. We only collect information about what features an organization has enabled or not. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (True/False), Integer, and Date. K-12 Architecture Kit Feature Telemetry data is collected during the push upgrade process. ### Accounts and Naming - How many orgs are using the Administrative Account model as the default setting? - How many orgs are using the Household Account model as the default setting? - How many orgs are using an Administrative Account custom naming format? - How many orgs are using a Household Account custom naming format? - How many Administrative Accounts exist in the org? - How many Household Accounts exist in the org? - Is automatic household naming enabled? - How many orgs are using Household Account in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Academic Program in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Educational Institution in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Business Organization in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using University Department in the Accounts Without Contacts setting? - How many orgs are using Automatically Rename Household Accounts? - How many orgs have enabled Automatically Rename Household Accounts? ### Affiliations - How many orgs are using the Affiliations Related to Deleted Program Enrollments setting? - How many orgs are using the Affiliation Start Date setting? - How many orgs are using the Affiliation End Date setting? ### Relationships - How many auto-create relationship rules exist in this org for Campaign Members? - How many auto-create relationship rules exist in this org for Contacts? - How many orgs are using Value Inversion relationships? ### Seasonal Address - How many Seasonal Addresses exist in the org? - How many Seasonal Addresses were created in the last 12 months? ### System Information - How many orgs have one or more user-managed TDTM classes? - How many orgs have disabled one or more EDA TDTM classes? - Is EDA error handling enabled in this org? - Are error logs being stored in this org? - How many orgs have All Sys Admin selected for the Error Notifications Recipients setting? ### Other Metrics - How many active record types does an org have for Course Connection? - How many records of the following types does this org have? - Errors - Program Plans - Plan Requirements - Course Connections - Course Offering Schedules - Term Grades - Facilities - How many orgs aren't using the Extended Description field on the Course object? - How many orgs have old values in the Ethnicity field on the Contact object? - How many orgs aren't using Course Connections? - When was Settings Health Check last run? - How many auto-enrollment mappings are there for Program Enrollment? - How many orgs are using the Application Window Validation setting? # K-12 Architecture Kit Objects and Fields This document provides descriptions of K-12 Architecture Kit objects and fields. View [K-12 Architecture Kit Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/5vjqadu8k2vy), your source for all current field and object descriptions (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note To evaluate the field and object descriptions we updated in Summer '20 to see if you'd like to adopt them in your existing org, check out the [K-12 Architecture Kit Field and Object Description Change Log](https://salesforce.quip.com/nagzal14bbul). # K-12 Architecture Kit Security Model Considerations Designing your security and sharing model is an essential part of your implementation. Its many aspects are more than we can cover here. Controlling security in Salesforce takes a systematic, multi-layered approach at all levels of your org. However, we do highlight considerations for administrators managing sensitive student data. - **[Know the Basics of the Salesforce Security Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_security_model_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're not familiar with concepts in the Salesforce security model such as org-wide sharing, permission sets, profiles, and sharing rules—at a minimum—we strongly recommend that you first learn the basics with these resources. - **[Security Considerations for Educational Institutions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_security_model_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your institution is subject to Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model. Account for the protection of Personally Identifiable Information (PII) in students' education records. Our product is preconfigured with a FERPA checkbox field on the Contact object to identify students whose records are subject to FERPA requirements. You can optionally use this field and apply your own business logic to it, as needed. ## Know the Basics of the Salesforce Security Model If you're not familiar with concepts in the Salesforce security model such as org-wide sharing, permission sets, profiles, and sharing rules—at a minimum—we strongly recommend that you first learn the basics with these resources. - [Control Who Sees What](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_data_access.htm) in Salesforce Help - [Protect Your Salesforce Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help - Trailhead: [Data Security](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/data_security) Then rejoin us here for security considerations that can apply to some educational institutions. ## Security Considerations for Educational Institutions If your institution is subject to Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model. Account for the protection of Personally Identifiable Information (PII) in students' education records. Our product is preconfigured with a FERPA checkbox field on the Contact object to identify students whose records are subject to FERPA requirements. You can optionally use this field and apply your own business logic to it, as needed. If your institution is a HIPAA-covered entity and is subject to HIPAA requirements, consider those requirements as part of your security model, including accounting for the protection of Protected Health Information (PHI) maintained outside of FERPA education records. Our product comes preconfigured with a HIPAA checkbox field to identify individuals whose records are subject to HIPAA requirements and a HIPAA Detail rich text field (intended for information about the student, such as the names of Contacts authorized to communicate about the student) on the Contact object. You can optionally use these fields and apply your own business logic to them, as needed. To help secure your sensitive data, you can implement a host of security features that come with Salesforce. To name just a few examples: - Set your org-wide default sharing settings to Private, which is the most restrictive access possible. - Identify the data access requirements for users in your various departments. Create profiles for the roles in those areas, and permission sets to grant permissions to roles or individual users. - Create a role hierarchy to give users above another user in the hierarchy the same level of access to records owned by or shared with users below. - Set field-level security to control who can access and edit certain fields on specific records. - Create sharing rules to open up record access to other users besides the record owners. - Set up authentication and authorization methods to control who sees what data, when, and from which locations and devices. For some institutions, data encryption can be an additional access control tool for securing sensitive data. Salesforce offers Shield Platform Encryption as a solution for encrypting data at rest, meaning that data is encrypted when it's being stored within Salesforce. Learn more at [Strengthen Your Data's Security with Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_pe_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. As every institution has unique privacy policies and regulatory requirements, not to mention unique Salesforce.org configurations used in combination with other information systems, we encourage you to consult with your security, legal, and regulatory specialists. # K-12 Architecture Kit: Connecting the Dots Create relationship and affiliation solutions to drive student success and wellness. ## Elijah's Story Elijah is a great kid. He's attended Valley Elementary since kindergarten and is now in the second grade. While he's never been at the top of his class, Elijah has always turned in his homework on time, has passed most of the tests he's taken, and has been an engaged student with a ready smile. Over the past couple of months, however, second grade teacher, Mrs. Flores, has noticed some disturbing changes. Elijah has shown up late or missed school several times. He's uncharacteristically quiet in class. He often "forgets" to turn in his homework, and Mrs. Flores sees that he is tired and distracted much of the day. His grades are suffering, as are his personal relationships with other students. At home after a long day of teaching, Mrs. Flores can't stop thinking about Elijah. Are these issues a first-time occurrence, or part of a trend that started in previous grades? Who are the important people in his life, and have his relationships with them changed in any way? And is there anyone on staff with the expertise to help him and his family? Knowing the answers to these kinds of questions is key to identifying the issues that need to be addressed and rallying the right kind of support. Fortunately for Mrs. Flores and Elijah, Valley Elementary manages their data in K-12 Architecture Kit, which helps them: ![Teacher worried about her student](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/k12_elijah.png) - Monitor changes in students' performance and attendance. - Track students' relationships with family and school staff and their participation in classes and other activities. - Track other important student information, including food allergies, free or reduced lunch status, foster family status, or homelessness. - Log faculty's credentials and special certifications. The data helps give staff a complete, 360-degree view of Elijah's interests, needs, and progress, and connect him and his family with the support they need. ## Support for a Brighter Future At Mrs. Flores' suggestion, Mr. Marcos, the school counselor, pulls up Elijah's record. He sees that his performance, attendance, and behavior have been consistent until about three months ago. Since then, he's failed tests, he's frequently tardy or absent, and he's been to the school nurse with head and stomach aches several times. Mr. Marcos sees that Elijah lives with his mother, and also notes that Spanish is the primary language spoken at home. With some gentle prompting, Mr. Marcos learns that Elijah's mother left unexpectedly a few months ago, and Elijah has been living with his grandmother. She's struggling to provide for him. She can't provide consistent transportation, and because Spanish is also her primary language, communication is a barrier to her reaching out for help. With this information, Mr. Marcos arranges a meeting with Elijah's grandmother and requests that Mrs. Flores, who speaks Spanish, sit in on the meeting. Together, they find LOTS of ways to help Elijah. First, they sign him up for busing to ensure that he makes it to school. Then, they sign him up for school-provided meals; his grandmother assumed he was getting them. They also sign him up for the after-school program so he has time with his peers at the end of the school day and can spend valuable time with a tutor who helps him with homework. The administrators and staff at Valley Elementary have worked hard to create a system that captures student information in one place, so it's easier to piece together Elijah's story, to see what's getting in the way of his well-being, and to provide support for a brighter future. How might it look if you created solutions like this at your own school? ![Teacher leading her students to future success](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/k12_future.png) Let's take a closer look at what goes into modeling student and school information with K-12 Architecture Kit in [Develop Your Own Approach to Modeling Your School](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_develop_approach.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Identify the best way to set up your school’s data in the K-12 Architecture Kit."), so you can prepare for your own implementation. # K-12 Architecture Security K-12 Architecture Kit provides a flexible approach to security that uses profiles, permission sets, and sharing settings so that you expose the right data to the right users. - **[K-12 Architecture Kit Security Model Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_security_model_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Designing your security and sharing model is an essential part of your implementation. Its many aspects are more than we can cover here. Controlling security in Salesforce takes a systematic, multi-layered approach at all levels of your org. However, we do highlight considerations for administrators managing sensitive student data. - **[Set Custom Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_set_custom_field-level_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Restrict K-12 Architecture Kit users' access to view and edit specific fields. - **[Set Up Permissions and Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_set_up_permissions_and_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Restrict K-12 Architecture Kit users' access to tabs and objects. # K-12 Object Reference Learn about the objects in K-12 Architecture Kit and what they represent in your school. - **[Academic Certification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_academic_certification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Academic Certification represents an academic degree, diploma, or certificate. - **[Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Account represents either an organizational entity affiliated with a Contact or a container Account for a Contact. - **[Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Address represents a home, seasonal, or other address for a Contact or Account. - **[Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Affiliation represents an affiliation between a Contact and an Account. - **[Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application stores information about a student's application to an educational institution or program. - **[Attendance Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attendance_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attendance Event represents information about a student's attendance. - **[Attributes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_attributes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attribute represents characteristics that apply to individual students and credentials earned by students and faculty (or other Contacts). - **[Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Behavior Involvement lets you associate individuals with a behavior event that's tracked as a Case. - **[Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_response.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Behavior Response helps you track corrective actions and other responses to behavior events. - **[Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case represents a behavior event and can have related Behavior Involvement records. - **[Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Contact represents an individual person. - **[Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_contact_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contact Language represents a language spoken by someone connected to your institution. - **[Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course represents an academic course, typically offered periodically by an Account entity, such as a department or school. - **[Course Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_connection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Connection represents a relationship between a Contact, such as a student or faculty member, and a Course Offering. - **[Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Offering represents a specific instance of a Course that's offered during a specific Term. - **[Course Offering Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_course_offering_schedule.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Course Offering Schedule relates a Course Offering with a Time Block, allowing for class schedule variations in the locations and days of a specific offering. - **[Credential](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_credential.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track student achievement, such as badges, certifications, or licenses. - **[Education History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_education_history.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education History stores information about a Contact's education history and related data. - **[Facility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_facility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Facility represents a school property asset. - **[Grade Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_grade_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grade Enrollment represents student's enrollment in a grade at an educational institution. - **[Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Language represents a language spoken at your institution. - **[Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Lead represents a potential student to an educational institution or program. - **[Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Plan Requirement represents a required item to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program, as specified in a Program Plan. - **[Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Enrollment represents a student's (Contact's) enrollment in an Academic Program (Account). - **[Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Plan represents the course of study required to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program (Account). - **[Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relationship represents a connection between two Contacts. - **[Term](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Term represents an academic period when your institution is in session. - **[Term Grade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Term Grade stores student grades for a specific grading period. - **[Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An instance of a student taking a test. - **[Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The score on a section of a specific test or a composite score. - **[Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Time Block represents a specific period of time, often as it relates to Course Offerings. # K-12 Salesforce Configuration Basics Understand how to complete fundamental K-12 Architecture Kit setup tasks. ## Show a New Custom Object After a Product Release When we release new objects, they're not automatically displayed in your existing org, as not all objects are relevant to every role in the org. To make sure users see only the necessary objects, you can update object and security permissions for the profiles you assign. You can also control the visibility of these objects in your org by adding them to the App Launcher and the navigation bar. See Also: - [Object Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_object_perms.htm&type=5) - [Configure Object and Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=commerce.om_configure_object_level_security.htm&type=5) - [Personalize the Navigation Bar in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.user_userdisplay_tabs_lex.htm&type=5) - [App Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.identity_app_launcher.htm&type=5) - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5) ## Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values Customize fields and picklist values to meet the needs of your school. You can add another option to an existing field or create a custom field to capture some additional information. For example, you might want to track personal email on the Preferred Email field or alternate phone on the Preferred Phone field. To do this, create a custom email or phone field and add it as an option to the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone picklist. To use an existing but not preconfigured field as a picklist value for Preferred Email or Preferred Phone (for example, Assistant Phone), add the existing field label as a picklist option. See Also: - [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5) - [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5) ## Create and Update Layouts If you want to add a field that's not in the palette to a page layout, create a lookup relationship. By using a lookup relationship, the object can "look up" to a field on a related object. For example, to add a Language field to the course offering page layout so that you can view the language a course is taught in, create a lookup to the language object. Then you can include the related object's fields to your page layout. Also, to include elements of an object, you must customize search layouts and compact layouts for selected objects. See Also: - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5) - [Customize Search Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.customizing_search_layouts.htm&type=5) - [Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.compact_layout_overview.htm&type=5) ## Use Related Lists to Show Related Records A CRM shows all related information for a record in one place through related lists. For example, from a student contact's detail page, you can see the related program enrollments, course connections, relationships, attributes, and the many other details that tell the student's story. The location of these lists, either on the Related tab or in the sidebar, depends on your org's settings. Technically, items in a related list are records with a lookup or master-detail relationship to another record. A related list is just a section of a record detail page that lists all the items related to that record. When viewing a related list, you see only the related records you have permission to see. And if you have permission to create a new record from within a related list, you can do that without ever leaving the contact detail page. See Also: - [Work with Related Lists on Records in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.basics_understanding_related_lists_lex.htm&type=5) ## Clone Compact Layouts to Preserve Your Changes (EDA) To safeguard your customizations against automatic updates, create a copy of packaged compact layouts. Unlike regular page layouts, packaged compact layouts in products such as NPSP and EDA receive push upgrades that can overwrite your compact layout. Use a cloned compact layout to protect your customizations. 1. Clone the packaged compact layout. 2. Change the cloned layout to include your custom fields. 3. Set the cloned version as the primary compact layout. See Also: - [Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.compact_layout_overview.htm&type=5) ## Migrate Behavior Involvement and Behavior Response Data to Use Record Types K-12 Architecture Kit 1.14 introduced record types for two objects that previously didn't have record types. If you started using the Behavior Involvement and Behavior Response objects in an earlier version, create the new record types and do the configuration described in [Configure Behavior Involvement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_involvement.htm) and [Configure Behavior Response](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_behavior_response.htm). Then use a bulk data management tool, such as Data Loader, to migrate Behavior Involvement data to the Incident Involvement record type, and Behavior Response data to the Incident Response record type. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Migrate your data as soon as it's convenient for your institution. Users are prompted to choose a record type when they create Behavior Involvement and Behavior Response records, and it's best to avoid mixing older records that have no record type with records that do. Migrating data can be a tricky process, and we recommend that you work with someone with experience in this area. Skills required include: - Strong to advanced Salesforce Administrator skills, such as the skills necessary to pass the Salesforce Certified Administrator credential - Extreme familiarity with your org's customizations and data - Plenty of experience using data manipulation tools such as Excel, Data Loader, Apsona, or DemandTools to import, export, and update records Let's take a look at the top-level tasks involved. 1. Make sure you've installed a bulk data management tool. If using Data Loader, we recommend using the latest version. For details, refer to [Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_loader.htm) in Salesforce Help. 2. Generate reports to identify the Behavior Involvement and Behavior Response records requiring update. Generate a separate report for each object's records. 3. Add Record ID and Record Type ID columns to your reports. 4. Identify the Record Type IDs you want to apply (either Incident Involvement and Incident Response). 5. Export the reports as .csv files. 6. Open each .csv file and add the ID identified in step 4 to the appropriate column and save it. 7. Use Data Loader to upload the updated records. - **[Configure a New or Enhanced Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When we release new objects, they’re not automatically displayed in your existing org. - **[Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.add_custom_picklist_values.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes, you might want to add another option to an existing field. # Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Keep Up with Student Success Hub and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keeping up with releases is an important part of being a Salesforce admin. You need to know when updates are released and what they include. You need a strategy for testing and implementing new features. And you have to stay on top of both Salesforce Platform releases and Student Success Hub releases from Salesforce.org. - **[Learn About Student Success Hub Releases and Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We release major new versions of Student Success Hub three times a year. We also release minor updates (bug fixes and enhancements) with Core patch releases, as needed. - **[Check Your Student Success Hub Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's how to see the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. - **[Set Up New Features and Activate Major Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's what's new and gated in the current release, Summer '22, and what you need to do to set up these features in an existing org. ## Keep Up with Student Success Hub and Salesforce Releases Keeping up with releases is an important part of being a Salesforce admin. You need to know when updates are released and what they include. You need a strategy for testing and implementing new features. And you have to stay on top of both Salesforce Platform releases and Student Success Hub releases from Salesforce.org. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up With Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Student Success Hub Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) ## Learn About Student Success Hub Releases and Versions We release major new versions of Student Success Hub three times a year. We also release minor updates (bug fixes and enhancements) with Core patch releases, as needed. We use the standard versioning convention in which the number to the left of the dot identifies the major release and the number to the right of the dot identifies the minor release. So for example, 2._x_ is newer than any version numbered 1._x_, and 2.24 is 21 releases newer than 2.3. ## Check Your Student Success Hub Version History Here's how to see the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. 1. In Setup, search for and then select **Installed Packages**. 2. Click **SSH** and then look for the First Installed Version Number. ## Set Up New Features and Activate Major Releases Here's what's new and gated in the current release, Summer '22, and what you need to do to set up these features in an existing org. Complete these tasks _in your sandbox environment_. If desired, further customize the feature for your institution. Then, activate the release. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Complete the setup tasks for all new features in each release even if you don't intend to use them. Security settings are especially critical to keep up-to-date. _Setting up new features within one major release and keeping security settings current helps to keep support staff and students from experiencing errors when they use Student Success Hub._ ### Student Success Alerts ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note This feature is available with the installation of the Student Success Alerts managed package. You'll find this managed package on the SSH installation page. Student Success Alerts (SSA) allows support staff (like faculty members or teaching assistants) to raise concerns about students in Slack. The SSA Slack app is integrated with Student Success Hub (SSH). Support staff receive the alert in SSH so they can quickly intervene to help students get back on track. **Before You Install Student Success Alerts** To use Student Success Alerts, you need an appropriate license. Users who have a Salesforce Platform (CRM) license, won’t need another SSH license to use SSA. For users who don’t have read and write access to SSH, (likely faculty or teaching support staff) you can give them a courtesy Identity license that will provide the access necessary to use SSA. To add Identity licenses to your SSA users, contact your Account Executive (AE). All users also need Student Success Alerts Managed Package and Student Success Alerts Slack App permission set licenses (PSLs) and the Student Success Alerts permission set to use SSA. Work with your AE to get these two permission set licenses. The Student Success Alerts permission set is delivered with the latest managed package release. **Install and Set Up SSA** 1. Connect Slack to Salesforce and add SSA. 2. Add the permission set licenses to users. 3. Add SSA permission set to users. 4. Invite users to the SSA app. 5. Create a Contact record for staff users 6. Create student Contact records. 7. Route alerts to support staff. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Read [Set Up Student Success Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Student Success Alerts so your support staff can create and send alerts about students directly from Slack to SSH.") for step-by-step setup instructions. If you want to use Student Success Alerts, then you need to activate the Summer ‘22 release. If you don’t activate the Summer ‘22 release, Salesforce automatically activates it for you on the day of the next major push release (Winter ‘23). ### Calendar Sync Support staff and admins can now sync their Student Success Hub (SSH) appointments with their Microsoft® or Google™ work calendars using Salesforce calendar sync tools. To set up calendar sync using Einstein Activity Capture: 1. Enable Einstein Activity Capture. 2. Enable **Don’t attach ICS file for organizer** in custom SSH Hierarchy settings. 3. Users Connect their Google or Microsoft calendars to SSH. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Read [Set Up SSH to Sync with Work Calendars](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Einstein Activity Capture with Student Success Hub (SSH) to keep your Microsoft or Google calendar in sync with Salesforce.") for step-by-step setup instructions. If you want to use calendar sync, then you need to activate the Summer ‘22 release. If you don’t activate the Summer ‘22 release, Salesforce automatically activates it for you on the day of the next major push release (Winter ‘23). ### Set Up the Redesigned Scheduling Wizard ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note This is a Winter '22 release feature. In Student Success Hub higher ed orgs, the redesigned SSH Scheduling Wizard component makes it easier for students to schedule appointments with support staff. The new component replaces the previous component, which is now deprecated and renamed Deprecated - SSH Scheduling Wizard. To set up the new component: 1. Place the SSH Scheduling Wizard component on a new page on your student portal. In the component properties panel, specify the API name of the page where you show upcoming appointments (the SSH Appointment Scheduler Component). This page opens when a student successfully schedules an appointment using the wizard. To find the API name of a portal page, in Experience Builder, select the page in the Pages menu, click ![SSH Experience Builder Settings icon.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_experience_builder_settings_icon.png), and look in the API Name field. 2. On existing portal pages that use or call the Scheduling Wizard, specify the API name of the page that you created with the new Scheduling Wizard component. For example, on your User Profile page, select the SSH User Profile Schedule Button component and enter the Scheduling Wizard Site Page API Name. 3. On your student profile, add Apex access to sfal.SchedulingWizardController and sfal.SchedulingWizardModel. If the Winter '22 release is activated and you haven't completed these steps, then when a student clicks Schedule an Appointment, the new wizard displays in a window. When the student successfully schedules an appointment using the new component in the window, the appointment confirmation card doesn't include the View Upcoming Appointments button. So students can still schedule appointments, but they won't benefit from the full functionality of the new component. For more information about the wizard, see [Student Portal Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the custom Lightning components you can use in a Student Success Hub student portal."). ### Set up Alert Mass Actions ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note This is a Winter '22 release feature. Support staff can use mass actions to create multiple Cases or Success Plans for multiple students from selected Alerts. To make the new Alert mass action buttons available to your staff: 1. Give support staff access to an Apex class that the buttons use, sfal.CasesFromAlertsController. For instructions, see [Assign Apex Class Access to the K-12 Support Staff Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_apex_assign_staff_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Grant K-12 support staff access to required Apex classes.") or [Assign Apex Class Access to the Higher Ed Support Staff Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_apex_assign_staff_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff access to the required Apex classes to use Student Success Hub."). 2. Confirm that support staff have the necessary field-level security permissions for Alerts and Cases. For details, see [Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") or [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."). 3. Add the buttons to Alerts list views and to related lists on the Student Record Case page. For instructions, see [Set Up Mass Actions for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_mass_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your support staff to use mass action buttons to create Cases and apply Success Plans for multiple Alerts."). If you set up mass actions for Alerts but don't activate the Winter '22 release, then support staff will see the Create Case and Apply Success Plan buttons on Alerts list views and on the Alerts related lists on the Student Record Case page, but the buttons won't work. ### Set Up the Installation Manager The Installation Manager on the SSH Settings page lets you deploy optional, unmanaged metadata to your org. Make sure that you, as an admin, have access to it. From Setup: 1. Edit the System Administrator profile, click System Permissions, then select **Customize Application**. 2. Edit the System Administrator profile, click Apex Class Access, then add sfal.InstallerAuthorizationController, sfal.InstallerTypeSelectionController, and sfal.SalSettingsController to the list of Enabled Apex Classes. 3. Search for and then select Remote Site Settings. Click **Edit** for the Tubular remote site, select **Active**, and save your changes. For more information about the Installation Manager, see [Add Metadata to Your Student Success Hub Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_metadata.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Installation Manager in the Student Success Hub app to add unmanaged metadata to your org."). ### Activate the Release When you are ready to activate the release in your sandbox environment, perform these steps: ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Set up gated features and activate the current release before the next major release. When we push the next major release to Sandbox, we activate the current release on all sandboxes that are still on the previous release. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to the SSH Settings page. 2. On the Release Manager tab, click **Activate Current Release**. 3. Verify that everything works as expected in the sandbox. 4. Repeat the setup tasks and activate the release in production. # Keep Up with Accounting Subledger and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about product updates and release schedule.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
As an admin, using Salesforce to help your organization fulfill its mission is your superpower. Stay up to date with Accounting Subledger's releases and be the first to know about the new features available to your company or institution. Discover upcoming release readiness webinars, get tips from community members, and find links to release notes in the [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F94S000000kHOcSAM?tab=discussion&sort=LAST_MODIFIED_DATE_DESC) and [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F94S000000kHOXSA2) groups. For detailed information about each release, see [Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_edu.htm&type=5). See also [Prepare for Salesforce Releases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/sf_release_prep). # Keep Up with Data Integrity and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what's included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up With Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Keep Up With Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) # Keep Up with EDA and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Keep Up with Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_keep_eda_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what's included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. ## Keep Up with Salesforce Releases As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what's included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up with Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm&type=5) - [Keep Up with Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm&type=5) - [Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo.htm&type=5) # Keep Up with Education Cloud Releases Stay informed about Education Cloud product updates and release schedule.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
As an admin, leveraging Salesforce to help your organization fulfill its mission is your superpower. Stay up to date with Education Cloud's releases and be the first to know about the new features your institution can use. Discover upcoming release readiness webinars, get tips from community members, and find links to release notes in the [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F94S000000kHOcSAM?tab=discussion&sort=LAST_MODIFIED_DATE_DESC/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group. For detailed information about each product release, see [Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_edu.htm&type=5). For general information about Salesforce releases, see [Prepare for Salesforce Releases](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/sf_release_prep). # Keep Up with Grants Management and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what’s included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up With Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Keep Up With Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) # Keep Up with K-12 Architecture Kit and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Keep Up with Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_keep_eda_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what's included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. ## Keep Up with Salesforce Releases As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what's included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khocsam?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up with Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm&type=5) - [Keep Up with Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm&type=5) - [Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo.htm&type=5) # Keep Up With NPSP and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what’s included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. # Keep Up with Outbound Funds Module and Salesforce Releases Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what’s included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up With Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Keep Up With Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) # Keep Up With Volunteers for Salesforce and Salesforce Releases As an admin, keeping up with releases is an important part of the job. Staying up-to-date on frequent product releases means anticipating when your orgs will get updated, staying informed about what’s included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing new features. To stay informed about updates to the Salesforce.org products you use, we recommend joining the [Nonprofit Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khoxsa2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) group in the Trailblazer community. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up With Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Keep Up With Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) # Keep Your Accounting System Accurate in Education Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting. Using Accounting Subledger (included with Fundraising) helps you track your Fundraising accounting in your accounting system. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To use Accounting Subledger:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Assign these Accounting Subledger permission sets to the Fundraising Admin. - Access Accounting Subledger Growth - Manage Accounting Subledger - Run Accounting Subledger Job 2. (Optional) Create custom fields to generate accounting data that is in addition to the data fields on the Transaction Journal. 3. Turn on accounting data generation. After the setup is complete, you can create accounting sets and Account Subledger jobs to keep your accounting system up to date. See Also: - [Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger.htm&language=en_US) # Keep Your Accounting System Accurate in Nonprofit Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting. Using Accounting Subledger (included with Fundraising) helps you track your Fundraising accounting in your accounting system. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To use Accounting Subledger:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. Assign these Accounting Subledger permission sets to the Fundraising Admin. - Access Accounting Subledger Growth - Manage Accounting Subledger - Run Accounting Subledger Job 2. (Optional) Create custom fields to generate accounting data that is in addition to the data fields on the Transaction Journal. 3. Turn on accounting data generation. After the setup is complete, you can create accounting sets and Account Subledger jobs to keep your accounting system up to date. See Also: - [Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger.htm&language=en_US) # Keep Your Calendar Up-to-Date with Your Availability (Support Staff) Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub. Create Events on your Calendar to add one-off, date-specific times that you're available for support appointments, as well as the times that you're _not_ available. Student Success Hub takes these Events into consideration when scheduling students for appointments. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't create Events on your Calendar to represent support appointments (that is, Events whose record type is Support Event). If you do, your availability won't be blocked. Only schedule support appointments from the Appointment Manager or from the student record Case page. - **[Access Your Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Go to your Calendar to designate times you're available for support appointments and for other scheduled commitments. - **[Schedule One-Off Availability on Your Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify the one-off, date-specific times that you're available for support appointments by creating support availability Events on your Calendar. These available times round out the recurring availability that you schedule in your Availability Settings. - **[Schedule Other Events on Your Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your Calendar accurately reflects all of your scheduled commitments—not just your support appointments. It's essential to schedule non-support Events for staff meetings, other appointments, and times that you're away from your desk. Student Success Hub won't schedule support appointments during the times that you've reserved on your Calendar for non-support Events. ## Access Your Calendar Go to your Calendar to designate times you're available for support appointments and for other scheduled commitments. 1. In the app navigation menu next to your workspace tabs, click the dropdown arrow. 2. Select **Calendar**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For faster access next time, [pin the Calendar tab](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_personalize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Student Success Hub app to suit your work style and personal preferences.") next to the app navigation menu. ## Schedule One-Off Availability on Your Calendar Specify the one-off, date-specific times that you're available for support appointments by creating support availability Events on your Calendar. These available times round out the recurring availability that you schedule in your Availability Settings. 1. [Go to your Calendar.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub.") 2. Click in a time slot on the calendar or click **New Event**. 3. Select the Event record type for blocking out available support time. In our example, it's Support Time. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you're not sure what to select, open the Appointment Manager, click ![Settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_settings_icon.png)) and check the value specified in Record Type for One-Off Support Availability. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Fill out these details. - For Type, select Scheduled, Walk-In, or Group. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important - If you don't see the Type field, ask your Student Success Hub administrator to add it. - It's better to create group availability from your Availability Settings page. If you choose Group as your Event type, you'll need to set the Attendee Limit on the Availability record after you save the Event. - Enter a descriptive Subject. For example, Open for Support Appointments. This text appears on your Calendar and students see it if your Student Success Hub administrator has made it visible. - Enter a Location. This field is required for Walk-In availability and optional for Scheduled and Group availability. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Location is a text field, not an Appointment Location defined in Availability Settings. However, [editing a one-off availability Event in the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up staff availability.") converts the Location to an Appointment Location. - Specify the Start and End date and time of the event. For example, 9:30 AM to 12:00 PM. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important If you're available for an entire day, do _not_ select the All-Day Event setting. Student Success Hub ignores all-day Events and doesn't consider them when determining your availability. Always specify Start and End times instead. - Leave blank the Name and Related To fields. - Leave the Assigned To field assigned to yourself. Remember, your page layout might look different depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator has configured the page. 6. Save this Event and verify that it appears on your Calendar. The Appointment Manager is also updated with your one-off advising availability block. ## Schedule Other Events on Your Calendar Make sure your Calendar accurately reflects all of your scheduled commitments—not just your support appointments. It's essential to schedule non-support Events for staff meetings, other appointments, and times that you're away from your desk. Student Success Hub won't schedule support appointments during the times that you've reserved on your Calendar for non-support Events. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Only create non-support Events in your Calendar. Don't create them from the Appointment Manager. Create a non-support Event for every time that you're not available. 1. [Go to your Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub."). 2. Click in a time slot on the Calendar or click **New Event**. 3. Select the Non-Support Event type and then click **Next**. 4. Fill out these details. - Enter a descriptive Subject. - Sepcify the Start and End date and times for the event. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important - If you're unavailable for an entire day, do _not_ select the All-Day Event setting. Student Success Hub ignores all-day Events and does not consider them when determining your availability for support appointments. Always specify Start and End times instead. - If you have an Event that spans multiple days, the Event is not shown in the Appointment Manager. Any scheduled or group availability that conflicts with the multi-day Event is no longer eligible for students to schedule. Your scheduled and group availability remains visible in your Calendar and the Appointment Manager. However, walk-in availability remains in your Calendar, in the Appointment Manager, and for students in the portal. Remember to delete your walk-in availability if you're not available because of a multi-day Event. Keep in mind that your page layout might look different depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator has configured the page. 5. Save this Event and create others if needed. 6. When you're done, verify that the non-support Event appears on your Calendar. It also appears in the Appointment Manager. By scheduling a non-support Event, it's easy to manage your availability and maintain flexibility. If your plans change and you reschedule the non-support Event for a different day, the original time becomes available again. If you need to edit this Event later, just select the Event from your calendar and click **More Details**, then click **Edit** on the record. You can also open the Event record from the Appointment Manager by clicking **View Record** when the Event is selected. # Knowledge Articles for the Student Recruitment Agent Create knowledge articles to ground the Student Recruitment Agent’s responses. The Student Recruitment Agent includes a topic, Admissions And Enrollments FAQ, that uses the Answer Questions with Knowledge action.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
To use the Student Recruitment Agent, create knowledge articles that align with the areas that are addressed in the Admissions And Enrollments FAQ topic: - Learning programs - Support programs - Application processes - Campus and support information If your knowledge articles cover information outside of those four areas, use the default Agentforce topic or create a new topic. The more information an article contains, the better the agent performs. Refer to this [Knowledge Article](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=005167062&type=1&language=en_US) for more best practices. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important The Answer Questions with Knowledge action is usually considered a public action. Public actions are actions that your institution is comfortable taking on behalf of anyone, regardless of identity, without authentication. Make sure that your knowledge articles don’t contain non-public information and data. See [Maintain Trust with Agentforce Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.service_agentforce_trusted_private_actions.htm&language=en_US). See Also: - [Create a Knowledge Base with Salesforce Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.knowledge_whatis.htm&language=en_US) - [Agent Action: Answer Questions with Knowledge](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_actions_ref_answer_questions_with_knowledge.htm&language=en_US) # Language Language represents a language spoken at your institution. - **[Sample Uses for Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your institution might track the languages spoken by students and faculty, languages Courses are taught in, or languages that students are learning. - **[Configure Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these configuration changes, depending on your use of Language in Education Data Architecture. - **[Create Language Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Language records for every language recognized by your school. All of the languages you enter are available from the Language lookup field that you can add to your page layouts. ## Sample Uses for Language Your institution might track the languages spoken by students and faculty, languages Courses are taught in, or languages that students are learning. - University—Track languages offered as Courses at your institution. - International university—Track languages spoken by faculty, especially if courses are taught in multiple countries or in populations with more than one dominant language. - K-12—Track the preferred language of students’ households or guardians. ## Configure Language Consider these configuration changes, depending on your use of Language in Education Data Architecture. - To track the language a course is taught in, add a Language lookup field to the Course Offering page layout. - To track the language used in a household, add a Language lookup field to the Household Account page layout. For more information, see [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm) and [Add a Lookup Field to a Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_add_lookup_field.htm) . ## Create Language Records Create Language records for every language recognized by your school. All of the languages you enter are available from the Language lookup field that you can add to your page layouts. 1. Go to the Languages tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, from the App Launcher, find and select **Languages**, and click **New**. 2. On the New Language page, enter the name of a language and click **Save & New**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Contact Language records to relate a Language with its speakers. See [Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact_language.htm). # Language Language represents a language spoken at your institution. - **[Sample Uses for Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your institution might track the languages spoken by students and faculty, languages Courses are taught in, or languages that students are learning. - **[Configure Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these configuration changes, depending on your use of Language in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Create Language Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_language.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Language records for every language recognized by your school. All of the languages you enter are available from the Language lookup field that you can add to your page layouts. ## Sample Uses for Language Your institution might track the languages spoken by students and faculty, languages Courses are taught in, or languages that students are learning. - University—Track languages offered as Courses at your institution. - International university—Track languages spoken by faculty, especially if courses are taught in multiple countries or in populations with more than one dominant language. - K-12—Track the preferred language of students’ households or guardians. ## Configure Language Consider these configuration changes, depending on your use of Language in K-12 Architecture Kit. - To track the language a course is taught in, add a Language lookup field to the Course Offering page layout. - To track the language used in a household, add a Language lookup field to the Household Account page layout. For more information, see [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm) and [Add a Lookup Field to a Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_add_lookup_field.htm). ## Create Language Records Create Language records for every language recognized by your school. All of the languages you enter are available from the Language lookup field that you can add to your page layouts. 1. Go to the Languages tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, from the App Launcher, find and select **Languages**, and click **New**. 2. On the New Language page, enter the name of a language and click **Save & New**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Contact Language records to relate a Language with its speakers. See [Contact Language](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact_language.htm). # Language Translations for Student Success Hub Provide your users a translated version of Student Success Hub, giving them the option to work in a different language. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Student Success Hub. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Student Success Hub product. - **[Translation Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you enable multiple languages and Translation Workbench in Salesforce, you can translate most of the Student Success Hub interface. Exceptions include some standard Salesforce features not currently supported in Translation Workbench, along with these elements that come packaged with Student Success Hub. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Student Success Hub."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Student Success Hub.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Student Success Hub. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Student Success Hub objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Student Success Hub ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note These languages apply to the Student Success Hub package only; not Pathways. | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Catalan | √ |   | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ |   | | Spanish | √ | √ | | Spanish (Mexico) | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Student Success Hub - [Catalan](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ssh/student_success_hub_ca_es.pdf) - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ssh/student_success_hub_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ssh/student_success_hub_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ssh/student_success_hub_fr_fr.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ssh/student_success_hub_es_es.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ssh/student_success_hub_es_mx.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Student Success Hub product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Student Success Hub: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language (for example, Catalan): 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. ## Translation Limitations If you enable multiple languages and Translation Workbench in Salesforce, you can translate most of the Student Success Hub interface. Exceptions include some standard Salesforce features not currently supported in Translation Workbench, along with these elements that come packaged with Student Success Hub. - Lightning page tab labels that display in the app, such as Alerts, Success Plans, and Team. You can specify the values in a single preferred language. - Configuration labels in Student Success Hub's Lightning components, such as the labels displayed in the Properties pane of Lightning App Builder. However, component header labels shown to support staff are translated. - In higher ed orgs, when the Appointment Manager is expanded, the Appointment Manager header is not translated. You can enter the value for the Appointment Manager label shown in the utility bar in a single preferred language. - In higher ed orgs, appointment email notifications. However, appointment email notifications are translated for the supported languages. - In higher ed orgs, the Appointment Location section headers on the Availability Settings page—In Person, Phone, Virtual, and Other—can be translated. However, In Person, Phone, and Virtual aren't in the Custom Labels file. To translate those headers, you must translate their picklist values on the Type field on the Appointment Location object. For more about translation, see these resources in Salesforce Help. - [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5) - [Manage Your Translations](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=workbench_overview.htm&type=5) - [Translate Custom Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=cl_translate_edit.htm&type=5) - [Multilingual Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=community_builder_multilingual_overview.htm&type=5) # Latest Einstein for Nonprofits and Salesforce Releases Install the latest releases installed to get the most out of Einstein for Nonprofits. Staying up-to-date on product releases involves anticipating when your orgs get updated, staying informed about what's included in each release, and forming a strategy for testing and implementing the new features. For detailed information on how to keep up with releases, see: - [Keep Up With Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) - [Keep Up With Salesforce.com Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_sf_rels.htm) # Launch Gift Entry Manager Launch the Gift Entry Manager app to access most of the tools and data you need for entering and managing gifts. Most of the tools and data that your gifts team uses are in the Gift Entry Manager app. From here, users can access Accounts, Contacts, Opportunities, Reports, and the GEM gift entry tools. To access this app, click the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), then find and select Gift Entry Manager. ![The Salesforce App Launcher menu, with a callout on the Gift Entry Manager app.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/gift_entry_manager/images/giftentrymanager.png) See [Lightning App Navigation Bar Items](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_lex_nav_menus_create.htm&type=5) for information on adding more tabs to this app, or [View and Edit Assigned Apps in Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_assigning_apps.htm&type=5) and [App Permissions in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=perm_sets_app_perms.htm&type=5) for information on granting access to this app to your users. # Lead Lead represents a potential student to an educational institution or program. - **[Sample Uses for Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recruiting and admissions teams typically track two types of potential students about whom little is known—suspects and prospects. - **[Lead Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create leads record types for your institution if required. Education Data Architecture doesn't provide any record types for Leads. - **[Configure Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and maintain the Lead object in Education Data Architecture. - **[Create Lead Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create leads in Education Data Architecture by importing them or by using automation, or manually create a lead from the Lead object. - **[Convert Lead Records to Contact Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you convert a Lead is up to your institution, but we recommend doing so when a suspect signals interest, thus becoming a prospect. When converting a Lead, the fields on the record create three records: Contact, Account, and optionally Opportunity. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Lead Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check new Account records periodically to ensure their Account Names follow your naming convention. ## Sample Uses for Lead Recruiting and admissions teams typically track two types of potential students about whom little is known—suspects and prospects. Suspects haven't yet signaled interest in your institution while prospects have. In EDA K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend using Leads to represent suspects, and Contacts to represent prospects. When suspects become prospects, you can convert their Lead records to Contact, Account, and Opportunity records. Here's how some institutions use Leads in a recruiting context. - University—Track suspects, perhaps gathered from a list provided by a testing service or recruiting event, who are good candidates for your marketing efforts. - K-12—For private and charter schools, use Leads to personalize interactions and narrow the field of suspects. Leads are an excellent way to track prospects at the top of your recruiting funnel. Using Leads instead of Contacts when a potential student's data first enters EDA K-12 Architecture Kit gives you many advantages, such as native Lead scoring and personalized marketing campaigns that allow you to better track and report demonstrated interest. Separating Leads from the Contacts who are invested in your institution keeps your data clean and your marketing precise. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you'd like to use Leads for prospects too, that's fine. Just make sure that your institution has clear guidelines for converting a prospect to a Contact. Keep in mind that you can't use EDA's custom objects or features until the Lead record is converted.  ## Lead Record Types Create leads record types for your institution if required. Education Data Architecture doesn't provide any record types for Leads. ## Configure Lead Set up and maintain the Lead object in Education Data Architecture. - **[Initial Configuration for Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to configure Lead-related settings and processes in Salesforce before you create Lead data in EDA. Understanding how EDA creates and names Accounts for converted Leads is critical. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Lead Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Lead It's essential to understand how to configure Lead-related settings and processes in Salesforce before you create Lead data in EDA. Understanding how EDA creates and names Accounts for converted Leads is critical. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Lead Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm) - [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm) - A Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rule controls the naming of Account records created during Lead conversion. For more information, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Lead Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.114 (Summer '21)
## Create Lead Records Create leads in Education Data Architecture by importing them or by using automation, or manually create a lead from the Lead object. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember that when you convert a Lead, its fields are used to populate the Account, Contact, and Opportunity records. Before creating and converting Leads, learn about the settings that impact Lead-converted Account names in [Configure Accounts Created During Lead Conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm). Also review how the standard Lead fields are mapped to the Account, Contact, and Opportunity fields in [Lead Conversion Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.lead_conversion_mapping.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Create Lead Records with Import or Automation Most institutions create Leads by importing a list of suspect data. For detailed import considerations, see [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm).  If your website includes an inquiry form, you can set up Web-to-Lead to generate Leads based on the data they provide in that form. You could even set up automation using Flow and Apex to automatically convert these Leads to Contacts. Work with the person in your institution who owns the form to update it with the necessary Salesforce code. For detailed information about Web-to-Lead, see [Generate Leads from Your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.setting_up_web-to-lead.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Make sure your import process or automation takes into consideration how you’ll populate the required Company field on Lead records, and how that works with the EDA Settings that determine how Accounts are named when Leads are converted. ### Create a Lead Manually 1. Click the Leads tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, find it from the App Launcher. 2. Enter relevant details, paying attention to these fields. Last Name This field is required. Company This field is required. If you've configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, what you enter for Company isn't used to name the Account when the Lead is converted. If you haven't configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, enter a name that matches the naming conventions of the account model you're using in EDA. For example, if you're using an Administrative Account model, enter Lombard Administrative Account for a suspect named Louis Lombard.  Lead Status This field is required. Choose Open - Not Contacted, Working - Contacted, or other values that your institution has defined. 3. Save your changes. ## Convert Lead Records to Contact Records When you convert a Lead is up to your institution, but we recommend doing so when a suspect signals interest, thus becoming a prospect. When converting a Lead, the fields on the record create three records: Contact, Account, and optionally Opportunity. 1. Open the Lead record and click **Convert**. 2. Enter the relevant details for the new records, paying attention to these Account fields. Account Name If you've configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, what you enter for Company doesn't matter. You can leave the value that was inherited from the Lead record. Record Type Select a record type. Typically, this is Administrative or Household. If you've configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, select one of the record types you've specified for the setting to ensure that you name the Account appropriately. 3. If using Opportunities, specify a name for the Opportunity that makes sense for your institution. By default, the value is the Company name followed by a hyphen. 4. Click **Convert**. After a Lead is converted, we recommend creating an Affiliation record connecting the Contact record to an Account record, like the academic program the person is interested in. Then use the Role field on the Affiliation record to identify the Contact record as a prospect. For steps on how to convert a Lead, see [Convert Qualified Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_convert.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. For full mapping details, see [Lead Conversion Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.lead_conversion_mapping.htm&type=5). ## Things to Know About Maintaining Lead Data Check new Account records periodically to ensure their Account Names follow your naming convention. If you find any that don't align, you can update them from EDA Settings by selecting [Update All Administrative Account or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). If you frequently import large lists of suspects, managing Leads can be an overwhelming task. Create a dashboard to help you monitor suspects through the different stages. Then create a strategy for maintaining Leads, as some leads tend to persist over time, while others require periodic purging to maintain data integrity. Consider how to handle duplicate Leads. For example, if a suspect is included in a list from a testing service, and then again in a list for a recruiting event, two Lead records can result for the same suspect. Include duplicate cleanup in your maintenance strategy. Also review [Merge Duplicate Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_merge.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If your recruitment process requires updating Lead records after they've been converted, assign your staff the View and Edit Converted Leads permission. For more information, see [Let Users View and Edit Converted Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_view_edit_converted.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Lastly, review additional [Things to Know About Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_supplemental.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Lead Lead represents a potential student to an educational institution or program. - **[Sample Uses for Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recruiting and admissions teams typically track two types of potential students about whom little is known—suspects and prospects. - **[Lead Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create leads record types for your institution if required. K-12 Architecture Kit doesn't provide any record types for Leads. - **[Configure Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and maintain the Lead object in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Create Lead Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create leads in K-12 Architecture Kit by importing them or by using automation, or manually create a lead from the Lead object. - **[Convert Lead Records to Contact Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you convert a Lead is up to your institution, but we recommend doing so when a suspect signals interest, thus becoming a prospect. When converting a Lead, the fields on the record create three records: Contact, Account, and optionally Opportunity. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Lead Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check new Account records periodically to ensure their Account Names follow your naming convention. ## Sample Uses for Lead Recruiting and admissions teams typically track two types of potential students about whom little is known—suspects and prospects. Suspects haven't yet signaled interest in your institution while prospects have. In EDA K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend using Leads to represent suspects, and Contacts to represent prospects. When suspects become prospects, you can convert their Lead records to Contact, Account, and Opportunity records. Here's how some institutions use Leads in a recruiting context. - University—Track suspects, perhaps gathered from a list provided by a testing service or recruiting event, who are good candidates for your marketing efforts. - K-12—For private and charter schools, use Leads to personalize interactions and narrow the field of suspects. Leads are an excellent way to track prospects at the top of your recruiting funnel. Using Leads instead of Contacts when a potential student's data first enters EDA K-12 Architecture Kit gives you many advantages, such as native Lead scoring and personalized marketing campaigns that allow you to better track and report demonstrated interest. Separating Leads from the Contacts who are invested in your institution keeps your data clean and your marketing precise. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If you'd like to use Leads for prospects too, that's fine. Just make sure that your institution has clear guidelines for converting a prospect to a Contact. Keep in mind that you can't use EDA's custom objects or features until the Lead record is converted.  ## Lead Record Types Create leads record types for your institution if required. K-12 Architecture Kit doesn't provide any record types for Leads. ## Configure Lead Set up and maintain the Lead object in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Initial Configuration for Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to configure Lead-related settings and processes in Salesforce before you create Lead data in EDA. Understanding how EDA creates and names Accounts for converted Leads is critical. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Lead Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Lead It's essential to understand how to configure Lead-related settings and processes in Salesforce before you create Lead data in EDA. Understanding how EDA creates and names Accounts for converted Leads is critical. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Lead Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm) - [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm) - A Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rule controls the naming of Account records created during Lead conversion. For more information, see [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Lead Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.21 (Summer '21)
## Create Lead Records Create leads in K-12 Architecture Kit by importing them or by using automation, or manually create a lead from the Lead object. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember that when you convert a Lead, its fields are used to populate the Account, Contact, and Opportunity records. Before creating and converting Leads, learn about the settings that impact Lead-converted Account names in [Configure Accounts Created During Lead Conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_leads_settings.htm). Also review how the standard Lead fields are mapped to the Account, Contact, and Opportunity fields in [Lead Conversion Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.lead_conversion_mapping.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Create Lead Records with Import or Automation Most institutions create Leads by importing a list of suspect data. For detailed import considerations, see [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm).  If your website includes an inquiry form, you can set up Web-to-Lead to generate Leads based on the data they provide in that form. You could even set up automation using Flow and Apex to automatically convert these Leads to Contacts. Work with the person in your institution who owns the form to update it with the necessary Salesforce code. For detailed information about Web-to-Lead, see [Generate Leads from Your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.setting_up_web-to-lead.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Make sure your import process or automation takes into consideration how you’ll populate the required Company field on Lead records, and how that works with the EDA Settings that determine how Accounts are named when Leads are converted. ### Create a Lead Manually 1. Click the Leads tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, find it from the App Launcher. 2. Enter relevant details, paying attention to these fields. Last Name This field is required. Company This field is required. If you've configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, what you enter for Company isn't used to name the Account when the Lead is converted. If you haven't configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, enter a name that matches the naming conventions of the account model you're using in EDA. For example, if you're using an Administrative Account model, enter Lombard Administrative Account for a suspect named Louis Lombard.  Lead Status This field is required. Choose Open - Not Contacted, Working - Contacted, or other values that your institution has defined. 3. Save your changes. ## Convert Lead Records to Contact Records When you convert a Lead is up to your institution, but we recommend doing so when a suspect signals interest, thus becoming a prospect. When converting a Lead, the fields on the record create three records: Contact, Account, and optionally Opportunity. 1. Open the Lead record and click **Convert**. 2. Enter the relevant details for the new records, paying attention to these Account fields. Account Name If you've configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, what you enter for Company doesn't matter. You can leave the value that was inherited from the Lead record. Record Type Select a record type. Typically, this is Administrative or Household. If you've configured Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts in EDA Settings, select one of the record types you've specified for the setting to ensure that you name the Account appropriately. 3. If using Opportunities, specify a name for the Opportunity that makes sense for your institution. By default, the value is the Company name followed by a hyphen. 4. Click **Convert**. After a Lead is converted, we recommend creating an Affiliation record connecting the Contact record to an Account record, like the academic program the person is interested in. Then use the Role field on the Affiliation record to identify the Contact record as a prospect. For steps on how to convert a Lead, see [Convert Qualified Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_convert.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. For full mapping details, see [Lead Conversion Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.lead_conversion_mapping.htm&type=5). ## Things to Know About Maintaining Lead Data Check new Account records periodically to ensure their Account Names follow your naming convention. If you find any that don't align, you can update them from EDA Settings by selecting [Update All Administrative Account or Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm). If you frequently import large lists of suspects, managing Leads can be an overwhelming task. Create a dashboard to help you monitor suspects through the different stages. Then create a strategy for maintaining Leads, as some leads tend to persist over time, while others require periodic purging to maintain data integrity. Consider how to handle duplicate Leads. For example, if a suspect is included in a list from a testing service, and then again in a list for a recruiting event, two Lead records can result for the same suspect. Include duplicate cleanup in your maintenance strategy. Also review [Merge Duplicate Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_merge.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If your recruitment process requires updating Lead records after they've been converted, assign your staff the View and Edit Converted Leads permission. For more information, see [Let Users View and Edit Converted Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_view_edit_converted.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Lastly, review additional [Things to Know About Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.leads_supplemental.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Learn About Action Plans Understand what Actions Plans are and how you can use them in Admissions Connect to define application requirements. - **[What Are Action Plans?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect uses Action Plans to define application requirements, such as core application details, transcripts, and letters of recommendation. In some cases, you create Action Plans for requirements that apply to a very specific type of applicant, like an international transfer student. But more often, a single requirement applies to multiple applicant scenarios, which means that a single Action Plan can be used for multiple applicants—you don't need to define it multiple times. An Action Plan for transcripts is an example of a requirement that works for nearly all students. - **[How Are Action Plans Created?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Action Plans and Action Plan Items are created from Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items. Think of an Action Plan Template as the master copy of an Action Plan. When you assign an Action Plan, you specify the Action Plan Template to use and its details are applied to a unique instance of an Action Plan. That way, applicants can have their own instance of the master copy. - **[How Do Action Plans Display Requirements?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To display Action Plans in the Admissions Connect components, you create Application Material Mapping records for your Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items. These mapping records specify the order in which the requirements display in the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components. The details you specify for each Application Material Mapping record depends on what you create. Just keep in mind that the mapping records determine how the requirements are displayed to your verifiers and reviewers. ## What Are Action Plans? Admissions Connect uses Action Plans to define application requirements, such as core application details, transcripts, and letters of recommendation. In some cases, you create Action Plans for requirements that apply to a very specific type of applicant, like an international transfer student. But more often, a single requirement applies to multiple applicant scenarios, which means that a single Action Plan can be used for multiple applicants—you don't need to define it multiple times. An Action Plan for transcripts is an example of a requirement that works for nearly all students. Each application requirement is an Action Plan with at least one or more child _Action Plan Items_. The Action Plan Items define a specific task or document. Action Plans are assigned to Application records to let admissions staff and applicants know what requirements must be completed and submitted. An Application can be assigned multiple Action Plans. A first-year applicant might have six Action Plans, and a transfer applicant only four.  Let's look at a requirement to submit transcripts. The Action Plan is labeled Transcripts and has two child Action Plan Items labeled Unofficial Transcript and Official Transcript. This Action Plan would be one of many Action Plans assigned to an Application. ![Concept diagram showing an Action Plan for Transcripts (with child Action Plan Items for an Unofficial and Official Transcript) connected to an Application record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/concept_application_action_plan_dci.png) ## How Are Action Plans Created? Action Plans and Action Plan Items are created from Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items. Think of an Action Plan Template as the master copy of an Action Plan. When you assign an Action Plan, you specify the Action Plan Template to use and its details are applied to a unique instance of an Action Plan. That way, applicants can have their own instance of the master copy. An _Action Plan Template Item_ can either be a Document Checklist Item or a Task. The Document Checklist Item and Task information is stored in _Action Plan Template Item Value_ records. These records act as staging records for the Task and Document Checklist Items since these objects don't have an equivalent of a master copy. When you create your Action Plan Templates in the app, you won't see any mention of Action Plan Template Item Value because it's all done behind the scenes. Each Action Plan Template must have at least one Action Plan Template Item. You'll probably have Action Plan Templates with multiple Action Plan Template Items that are a mix of Document Checklist Items and Tasks.  - _Document Checklist Items_ specify an application requirement as a document. These records allow applicants to upload documents, such as PDFs and images. _Document Types_ are used to identify the type of document that is uploaded. - _Tasks_ specify an application requirement as data. These records allow you to collect and display field-level data for a specific object. Think of Tasks as the questions on your application or the form-field information you want answered, like date of birth and other basic applicant details. _Field sets_ define what fields to display, and _Application Material Type_ records map the Task to an Action Plan Item. You can even display related data records, such as an applicant's Education History records. Here's how the Action Plan Template and Action Plan objects work together.  ![Concept diagram showing the details of an Action Plan Template and Action Plan](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/concept_application_action_plan_template_details.png) ## How Do Action Plans Display Requirements? To display Action Plans in the Admissions Connect components, you create Application Material Mapping records for your Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items. These mapping records specify the order in which the requirements display in the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components. The details you specify for each Application Material Mapping record depends on what you create. Just keep in mind that the mapping records determine how the requirements are displayed to your verifiers and reviewers. So here's how everything comes together. An applicant's Action Plan records are created from Action Plan Template records. The Action Plan Items that are Tasks display data and the Action Plan Items that are Document Checklist Items store documents, like PDFs. For each Action Plan Template and Action Plan Template Item record there's a matching Application Material Mapping record. ![Concept diagram showing the details of an Action Plan with connectors to Document Type and PDFs](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/concept_application_action_plan_dci_details.png) The status of Document Checklist Items and Tasks determines the status displayed in Admissions Connect components. For example, when an applicant uploads their transcripts and it's approved, the status of the Document Checklist Item updates in the app. Now you're ready to [Plan Your Application Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool.") # Learn About Admissions Connect Transform your institution’s admissions operations with features designed to streamline your processes. From territory management to configurable application requirements and checklists, Admissions Connect makes it easier for your staff to stay focused on their tasks and support learners who seek to enroll in your institution. - **[Meet Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_learn_intro.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring your next class into focus with Admissions Connect. - **[Learn About the Verifier and Reviewer Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_learn_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help verifiers and reviewers stay efficient and focused, and concentrate on what matters most—applicants and their dreams. - **[Admissions Connect Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_learn_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how objects relate to one another and how to get more information about the Admissions Connect data model. - **[Admissions Connect Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_learn_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Familiarize yourself with the objects and fields used by Admissions Connect. # Learn About Admissions Connect Portals Portals, also called Experience Cloud sites or Communities, are a great way to give users access to just what they need in an easy-to-use web page. For example, you can limit access for some application reviewers, like external users who are alumni, because they don’t need access to Cases, Opportunities, and other Salesforce records. Or maybe you want to create an applicant portal to let applicants view, edit, and submit their Application. Every portal is unique because every admissions team has unique needs. To get you started, we provide the essentials that you need to know, and some tips and recommendations on how to set up portal pages for Admissions Connect. But ultimately, you and your admissions team decide how to design and build a portal that best supports your users' experience. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Admissions Connect includes a [portal template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect.") to get you started building your applicant experience. If you installed Admissions Connect version 1.16 or earlier, install Admissions Connect in sandbox and then use a ​ [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) ​ to move the Applicant Portal Template to production. For a comprehensive guide to the many aspects of Experience Cloud not covered here, see [Set Up and Manage Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_overview.htm). # Learn About Appointment Topics Understand the custom Topic objects and how they're used in appointment scheduling in Student Success Hub orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Topic Objects and Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_appointment_topics_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When support staff meet with students, the topics of discussion can be general, such as Academic, or specific, such as Degree Planning. To keep track of all the potential topics of discussion and use them as an organizing tool in appointment scheduling, set up the Topic objects: Topic, Role Topic Setting, User Topic Setting, and Queue Topic Setting (if you're using queue management). - **[Topic Object Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_appointment_topics_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what information you can record in each Topic object. - **[Topic Objects' Entity Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_appointment_topics_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Topic objects relate to one another. ## Topic Objects and Appointment Scheduling When support staff meet with students, the topics of discussion can be general, such as Academic, or specific, such as Degree Planning. To keep track of all the potential topics of discussion and use them as an organizing tool in appointment scheduling, set up the Topic objects: Topic, Role Topic Setting, User Topic Setting, and Queue Topic Setting (if you're using queue management). The Topic objects help determine who is available for what kinds of appointments, and when. For example, when a student requests an appointment and chooses the Academic topic, the Scheduling Wizard shows only support staff who are available to discuss the Academic topic. If the selected Topic has child topics defined, the student can also select from a list of Academic subtopics, such as Degree Planning, Grade Concerns, and Graduation Audit. A student requesting a Financial Aid appointment sees a different list of subtopics, such as Disbursement, Hardship, and so on. If support staff have designated different appointment durations for certain topics or subtopics, scheduling accounts for those conditions, too. Similarly, departments using queue management to manage walk-in appointments see only the topics and subtopics that are relevant to their department. For example, when someone at the Career Services front desk adds a student to a queue, they see only Career topics and subtopics such as Full-Time Jobs and Internships. ## Topic Object Definitions Learn what information you can record in each Topic object. Topic Defines the topics of discussion during appointments. Role Topic Setting Relates Topics to the roles that you defined for case team members when you set up success teams (roles such as Academic, Financial Aid, and so on). Only Topics can be related to roles; Subtopics can't be related. Queue Topic Setting When using queue management, relates Topics to the Support Pools that you created to manage appointments for a group of users, including support staff members and one-stop shops for front desks. User Topic Setting Relates Topics to the varying appointment lengths that individual support staff members specify for different Topics. ## Topic Objects' Entity Relationships Learn how Topic objects relate to one another. For reference, this diagram shows how support staff Users and the Topic objects are related. ![Entity relationship diagram showing how the Topic, User Topic Setting, Role Topic Setting, and Queue Topic Setting objects are related](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_erd_topic_objects.png) # Learn About Case Management Read use cases for Case Management with human services. Review a diagram that shows the relationship between objects. Learn what objects and fields are part of the nonprofit Case Management managed package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Case Management for Human Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_human_services.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Focus on your work and keep your clients' needs front and center by using Case Management for Human Services. - **[Case Management Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case Management's architecture takes advantage of many standard Salesforce objects—Accounts, Contacts, and Cases—and includes a number of custom objects such as Case Plans, Client Notes, and Assessments. - **[Case Management Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what custom objects and fields are included in Case Management. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the Case Management data schema in depth. # Learn About Education Cloud Drive learner and institution success with Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm&type=5). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. The next-generation CRM for education is here. Education Cloud is the digital foundation empowering tomorrow’s institutions today. With Education Cloud's configurable and secure platform, your institution becomes future-ready in a fast-changing digital landscape. Education Cloud draws on the power of Salesforce to connect insights across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners — from prospective student to engaged alum. With Salesforce at the center of your institution's information technology solution, important tasks can be completed in less time, at scale, and in collaboration between departments. Education Cloud provides your institution with powerful technologies including: - An online learner portal powered by Experience Cloud - Single, home page views of important departmental activities with Recruiting and Admissions Consoles - Powerful workflow automation and tailored user interfaces with Omnistudio - Customizable reports and dashboards providing actionable insights with CRM Analytics As you explore Education Cloud, get help and share ideas on best practices by connecting with our amazing user groups in the Trailblazer Community. Log in using your Salesforce credentials and join both the [Education Hub](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F9300000001ogNCAQ?tab=discussion&LAST_MODIFIED_DATE_DESC) and [Education Release Readiness](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0F94S000000kHOcSAM?tab=discussion&LAST_MODIFIED_DATE_DESC) groups. - **[Get Started with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud offers a learner-first, organization-wide, stakeholder engagement and collaboration platform for Education that maximizes outcomes and experiences for lifelong learners. Explore what's offered by Education Cloud, get hands-on with a trial org, and then learn about what setup we recommend, and how to get ready for your implementation. - **[Understand What's Included with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_understand_whats_included_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud provides educational institutions with a specialized data model and tools that support the entire learning experience. The platform includes features and capabilities for recruitment and admissions, academic operations, student success, mentoring, alumni relations, and fundraising. Educational institutions facilitate the journeys of many different stakeholders. They create and maintain recruitment and application processes, organize academic courses and programs, manage student support programs, and more. Education Cloud uses Salesforce's platform along with a specialized data model to build applications that help support the entire learning experience. - **[Create an Education Cloud Trial Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_cloud_trial_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get hands-on experience with Education Cloud at no additional cost. Choose a learning org with rich sample data or a base org to test your own use cases. - **[Discover and Set Up Education Cloud Features With Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_discover_and_set_up_education_cloud_features_with_salesforce_go.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore, set up and configure, and monitor usage of Education Cloud features in one streamlined setup location. Access content resources, such as videos, online tours, Trailhead, and Salesforce Help articles, to learn about features, and get help with configuration. Discover more Education Cloud features and add-on licenses that are available based on your Salesforce edition. And if you’ve turned on the Your Account app, you can quickly buy add-on licenses for some products directly from Salesforce Go. - **[Recruitment and Admissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_recruitment_and_admissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Discover how Education Cloud supports your recruitment and admissions activities with an online portal and powerful collaboration tools. - **[Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Discover how Education Cloud helps you manage your institution’s academic (or learning) offerings. - **[Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_success.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Education Cloud provides you with powerful tools to support learner success. - **[Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and manage mentoring programs, strengthen relationships between mentors and mentees, assign benefits, and manage assessments. - **[Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the powerful tools that Education Cloud provides to engage with alumni from your institution. - **[Developer Resources for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_developer_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn where to find developer resources including the entity relationship diagram (ERD), object reference, and apex reference. - **[Keep Up with Education Cloud Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_keep_up_with_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Education Cloud product updates and release schedule. - **[Education Cloud and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides translations for Education Cloud in multiple languages. # Learn About Email Templates Find the email templates that meet your needs and learn about using emails in Marketing Cloud. - **[Find Your Industry's Email Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_learn_about_email_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to find the right email template in Marketing Cloud for Industries for your needs. - **[Resources for Creating and Sending Emails with Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_learn_about_email_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore Marketing Cloud resources about creating, testing, and sending emails. ## Find Your Industry's Email Template Learn how to find the right email template in Marketing Cloud for Industries for your needs. Versions of email templates are saved based on their time stamp. Before you update an email, make sure you have the right template. 1. Go to the email you want to update. 2. In the Details panel, locate the name of the source template. 3. Go to the email template folder and find the source template. 4. Update as needed. ## Resources for Creating and Sending Emails with Marketing Cloud Explore Marketing Cloud resources about creating, testing, and sending emails. - [Create Synchronized Data Sources in Contact Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=mktg.mc_cab_creating_and_interacting_with_synchronized_data_sources.htm&type=5) - [Automation Studio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=mktg.mc_as_automation_studio.htm&type=5) - [Create Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=mktg.mc_ceb_create_templates.htm&type=5) - [Create Emails in Content Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=mktg.mc_ceb_create_emails.htm&type=5) - [Subscriber Preview and Test Send](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=mktg.mc_es_subscriber_preview_test_send.htm&type=5) - _Trailhead_: [Preview, Test, and Send Your Email](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/quick-start-create-and-send-an-email-with-marketing-cloud/preview-test-and-send-your-email) - _Trailhead_: [Create and Send Targeted Emails](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/create-and-send-targeted-emails-with-email-studio) # Learn About Fundraising in Education Fundraising provides new and easy ways to engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with specialized tools and data-driven insights. Fundraising is an integral part of the Salesforce Nonprofit and Education Clouds. It's designed to work for organizations of all sizes, from small community orgs to international and enterprise-sized nonprofits and educational institutions. Some of the features are: - Major gift and grant fundraising - Mass market fundraising - Tools for complex and third-party gifts - Guided flows for batch and single gift entry - Donation rollups that summarize donor, household, campaigns, and designation data - Guided flows for the most common donor support needs Use these features to take control of your fundraising data, strategies, and operations all in one product. ## Fundraising Apps and Features Use the Fundraising apps to perform common fundraising responsibilities and tasks. Fundraising Strategy This app provides a top-level understanding of fundraising activities and data. Executives and top-level managers can use it to check on their organization's fundraising progress. It also provides high-level data for planning future fundraising efforts. Donor Engagement This app provides quick access to track and manage mass market fundraising efforts. It groups engagement data like campaigns, source codes, gift commitments, and reports to make managing outreach efforts fast and effective. Philanthropy & Partnerships This app is a one-stop-shop for major giving and grant solicitations. Research major donors and grantmakers and record the interactions with them. Use this app to lay the groundwork and manage the steps needed to cultivate and solicit large gifts. Fundraising Operations This app is for the essential tasks of running the business of fundraising. Use this app to do routine gift entry and processing, and to support donors in common tasks, such as recording their commitments, updating commitment schedules, and pausing or resuming commitments. # Learn About Fundraising in Nonprofit Fundraising provides new and easy ways to engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with specialized tools and data-driven insights. Fundraising is an integral part of the Salesforce Nonprofit and Education Clouds. It's designed to work for organizations of all sizes, from small community orgs to international and enterprise-sized nonprofits and educational institutions. Some of the features are: - Major gift and grant fundraising - Mass market fundraising - Tools for complex and third-party gifts - Guided flows for batch and single gift entry - Donation rollups that summarize donor, household, campaigns, and designation data - Guided flows for the most common donor support needs Use these features to take control of your fundraising data, strategies, and operations all in one product. ## Fundraising Apps and Features Use the Fundraising apps to perform common fundraising responsibilities and tasks. Fundraising Strategy This app provides a top-level understanding of fundraising activities and data. Executives and top-level managers can use it to check on their organization's fundraising progress. It also provides high-level data for planning future fundraising efforts. Donor Engagement This app provides quick access to track and manage mass market fundraising efforts. It groups engagement data like campaigns, source codes, gift commitments, and reports to make managing outreach efforts fast and effective. Philanthropy & Partnerships This app is a one-stop-shop for major giving and grant solicitations. Research major donors and grantmakers and record the interactions with them. Use this app to lay the groundwork and manage the steps needed to cultivate and solicit large gifts. Fundraising Operations This app is for the essential tasks of running the business of fundraising. Use this app to do routine gift entry and processing, and to support donors in common tasks, such as recording their commitments, updating commitment schedules, and pausing or resuming commitments. # Learn about Grants Management Become familiar with Grants Management, see how it compares with Outbound Funds Module, and explore the data model and the supporting objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Meet Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grants Management helps grantmakers streamline their processes and get critical funding out to their communities quickly. - **[GM Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_compare_gms_with_ofm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the differences between Grants Management and Outbound Funds module to choose the best product for your organization. - **[Roles in the Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_roles_in_doc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grants Management documentation is designed to guide admins through the basic setup of Grants Management. Following this documentation, you should have a functional portal for your grantseekers to visit, and your internal users will be able to perform grantmaking tasks, such as reviewing Funding Requests, inviting a grantseeker to apply, and managing milestones through Requirements.​ - **[Get to Know the Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_get_to_know_the_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's included in Salesforce Grants Management. - **[Grants Management Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review how Grants Management objects are connected to each other. - **[Grants Management Data Dictionary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grants Management Data Dictionary contains of list of custom objects and fields included in Outbound Funds Module and Grants Management, when they were introduced, and descriptions where available. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the Grants Management data schema in depth. # Learn About NPSP Learn about Nonprofit Success Pack, how to get started, next steps, and the NPSP planning guide. - **[NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Answers to common questions about NPSP, its limitations, and how it works for international nonprofits. # Learn About Outbound Funds Module Get an overview of Outbound Funds Module and its data model. - **[Outbound Funds Module Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about good ways to use Outbound Funds Module, whether it’s the right product for your organization, and how you can use it to manage fund-seeking activities. - **[Get to Know Outbound Funds Module's Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get_to_know_the_data_model_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the objects and fields that Outbound Funds Module uses, and understand their relationships. # Learn About Program Management Module Explore and learn about the Program Management Module (PMM) package, how it integrates with NPSP, and the objects and fields that it includes. - **[Manage Your Programs with Program Management Module (PMM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what the PMM package includes, some common use cases, and how to map your programs to the PMM data model. - **[PMM and NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_npsp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you already use NPSP, you can easily integrate PMM so that you can manage your constituent, fundraising, and program data all in one place. - **[PMM Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The PMM uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects and adds the custom objects Program, Program Engagement, Program Cohort, Service, and Service Delivery. - **[PMM Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what custom objects and fields are included in PMM. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the PMM data schema in depth. # Learn About Recruiting Territories in Admissions Connect Learn how recruiting territories can help your institution meet its admissions goals. Building relationships is at the heart of recruitment. Your institution sets admissions goals and your recruiters build relationships to support those goals. Relationships are built with prospective students and their parents or guardians, counselors, and leaders from other institutions.  Admissions Connect includes Enterprise Territory Management to help you assign territories, focus on building relationships, and track key success metrics. With reports, you can easily see the number of applications received and the number of students within a specific territory or outreach program. These metrics can help recruiters predict and identify which relationships they need to focus on the most and how to best engage with a group of prospective students.  Enterprise Territory Management also gives you the advantage of being able to use your territory data alongside other departments’ data. For example, you can identify students who were admitted but haven’t filled out a housing application or signed up for an orientation. Recruiters can reach out to these students directly and save them from summer melt.  If you’re familiar with Salesforce, you might be asking yourself if this is the same Enterprise Territory Management that Sales Cloud uses. Yes, it is! The tool was created to help companies manage and maintain their sales territories. The awesome thing about Admissions Connect is that you get to use core Salesforce features like Enterprise Territory Management. And when you think about it, a company’s sales territory is really no different from a recruiting territory: Both define a region or focus area to target marketing and outreach program efforts.   Now let’s learn how to implement and use Enterprise Territory Management. # Learn About Salesforce Learn more about K-12 Architecture Kit with these resources. If you’re new to Salesforce, it’s important to know that we’ve just scratched the surface of what’s possible with K-12 Architecture Kit. There’s a lot more to explore, and we encourage you to look around more on your own. As you plan your implementation, be sure to learn more by checking out these great resources.
Name Learn how to . . .
Admin Beginner Trail Perform basic Salesforce customizations.

Think about the platform, navigate use cases, and build custom functionality.

Give your data structure with objects, fields, and relationships.
Import and export data in Salesforce.
Customize the Lightning Experience user interface without writing any code.
Visualize metrics in real-time using Lightning Experience.

Data Security Module

Control access to data using point-and-click security tools.
Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA Learn about recommendations for importing data into EDA. Similar considerations might be helpful for your K-12 Architecture Kit org.
# Learn About Student Success Hub Create connected support processes. Configure standard Salesforce elements such as list views or page layouts to help your staff be more efficient. Your staff can then focus on building better relationships with your students and boosting student success. - **[Meet Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_meet.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide an equitable, unified, and collaborative student support experience. - **[Learn About the Student Success Hub Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the functions of the app, Setup, and the portal in Student Success Hub. - **[Understand What's Included with Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_understand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about license requirements and K-12 and higher ed configurations in Student Success Hub. - **[Student Success Hub Entity Relationship Diagrams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how Student Success Hub, EDA, K-12 Architecture Kit, and Salesforce standard objects relate. - **[Student Success Hub Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access documents with descriptions of the objects and fields used by Student Success Hub. - **[Student Success Hub Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the feature and usage metrics that Student Success Hub collects. # Learn About Student Success Hub Security Configure security in Student Success Hub so that support staff have access to the tools they need to do their jobs and to use the app. When configuring security for Student Success Hub, we recommend settings for profiles, permissions, and sharing based on what the app requires for object, field, and app access. We don't exhaustively cover other security considerations, such as organization-wide defaults, sharing rules, and user role hierarchies. We leave it up to you to determine what's appropriate for your school's security model. For more information about Salesforce security, see [Control Who Sees What](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_data_access.htm) in Salesforce Help. # Learn About the Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator The Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator with Salesforce turns your recruiting and admissions data into actionable insights. See the current and historical volume of Applications your institution is receiving in a variety of formats. You can easily filter and customize the data into bar graphs, geographic heat maps, and lists. If you have enough historical data, you can also identify changes in yield and melt. Use the dashboards to better understand your recruitment funnel, meet your goals, and plan for the future. See [Salesforce Education Cloud Admissions Connect](https://extensiongallery.tableau.com/products/606?version=2021.2). # Learn About the K-12 Architecture Kit Dashboard and Reports Track student and school characteristics with dashboards and reports in K-12 Architecture Kit. With just the bit of sample data you’ve entered, you can start to see the possibilities and power of a student-centered information system like K-12 Architecture Kit. Now that you’ve put data in, let’s see what data you can get out. We give you a head start on reporting with a sample dashboard for monitoring your student population and a set of sample reports. Explore editing them and use them as inspiration for building out your own reports and dashboards. - **[Return to the Dashboard Where You Started](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_dashboard_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've added some data to your trial org, go to the Home tab and refresh the page to see how your dashboard looks with sample data. You can refresh individual charts and drill down into more detailed views of the information they represent. - **[Access the Sample Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_dashboard_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** K-12 Architecture Kit comes with sample reports for tracking student and school characteristics. ## Return to the Dashboard Where You Started After you've added some data to your trial org, go to the Home tab and refresh the page to see how your dashboard looks with sample data. You can refresh individual charts and drill down into more detailed views of the information they represent. To access the source dashboard itself, go to the Dashboards tab and click the **Sample Dashboards** folder. Click **Sample Student Demographics**, and then explore customizing its contents. ## Access the Sample Reports K-12 Architecture Kit comes with sample reports for tracking student and school characteristics. Go to the Reports tab and click the **Public Reports** folder. Data from these reports is actually pulled into the Sample Student Demographics dashboard.
Type of Item Name Description
Reports folder Public Reports Reports you can use as-is or modify as needed.
Sample report

Course Offering Roster

 A class roster view of faculty and student Contacts that are associated with a specific Course Offering, grouped by Course Offering.
Sample report

Faculty Grouped by School

 All faculty Contacts, grouped by Educational Institution Account.
Sample report

Student Population

 All student Contacts.
Sample report Student Population by Gender All student Contacts, grouped by gender.
Sample report Student Population by Race All student Contacts, grouped by race.
Sample report

Students and Guardians by Households

 Students and their guardians, grouped by Household Account.
Sample report

Term Grades Grouped by Student and Term

 Student Term Grades, grouped by Term and by Course Offering.
# Learn About the Student Success Hub Experience Understand the functions of the app, Setup, and the portal in Student Success Hub. The Student Success Hub app is optimized to quickly find, reference, and edit multiple student records. Designed as a Lightning console app and often called a console, the Student Success Hub UI displays records as tabs and subtabs across the top of the page, offers a split view list on the left, and a utility bar at the bottom. ![A Student Record Case page in the Student Success Hub app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_app_experience.png) Student Success Hub also leverages standard Salesforce elements such as list views, page layouts, related lists, reports and dashboards, and more. You can use the preconfigured Student Success Hub app or you can customize the pages, Lightning components, and Salesforce elements that it comprises. The administrative counterpart to the Student Success Hub app is the Setup interface. Admins perform most configuration tasks in Setup, but also work in the app to enter data or confirm configuration changes. In orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites, students experience Student Success Hub through a portal that's optimized for mobile devices. The portal connects students with members of their success team, lets them quickly schedule appointments with support staff, and helps students stay on top of their assigned Success Plans and Tasks. ![A success team, scheduled appointment, and task list in a student portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_experience_portal.png) You build the portal by using Experience Cloud and a combination of standard and custom Lightning components. You also configure appropriate site access and membership. Students access the portal by using a personalized login URL. # Learn About the Verifier and Reviewer Experience Help verifiers and reviewers stay efficient and focused, and concentrate on what matters most—applicants and their dreams. Folders and documents for breakfast, lunch, and dinner. That’s the world of applications. The Admissions Connect app is a Lightning console app that provides tab-based navigation and a split screen to help admissions staff quickly access their list views. Let’s follow along with a typical day for a verifier and a reviewer.  Henson Bell University has a small admissions team that’s often overloaded. Victor helps the team verify applications, and Regina reviews them. Before Admissions Connect, the team was tracking applications using manila folders and paper checklists. Their process was entirely manual, including walking stacks of folders down hallways. Now, everything is tracked in the Admissions Connect app.  Victor starts his day looking at a list view of new applications. From the list, he can quickly see what applications he needs to verify. On the Application record, he sees a list of requirements and the progress towards completion. He can preview documents, approve them, email an applicant, and open the next application to verify—all without leaving the page. For detailed information about the tasks you can complete from the Application record, see [Verify Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you verify an application, you check for overall completeness, looking at the data and documents provided by the applicant. You’ll probably look at transcripts, letters of recommendation, and more. Use an Applications list view as your starting point, then open individual application records. You can use the default All list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. as your starting point, then open individual application records. You can use the default All list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created."). ![Entire Application record page with split view open in the Admissions Connect app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_page_full.png) Now the applications are ready for Regina to review. From her list view, she sees what she needs to review today. On the Application Review record she can see a navigation panel with the list of requirements. She scrolls through the application and reviews all the requirements, without clicking, thanks to a single scrollable view. She can also see a list of other reviewers assigned to the application. Regina leaves comments and makes her admissions recommendation, all without leaving the page. For detailed information about the tasks you can complete from the Application Review record, see [Review Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you review an application, you make an admissions recommendation and leave supporting comments. Use a list view as your starting point, either for Applications or Application Reviews. You can use the default My Application Reviews list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created."). ![Entire Application Review page in the Admissions Connect app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_page_full.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can also create a reviewer portal for external reviewers, like alumni or business leaders, that don’t need full access to the Admissions Connect app because they don’t work with other Salesforce records. For more details, see [Learn About Admissions Connect Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Portals, also called Experience Cloud sites or Communities, are a great way to give users access to just what they need in an easy-to-use web page. For example, you can limit access for some application reviewers, like external users who are alumni, because they don’t need access to Cases, Opportunities, and other Salesforce records. Or maybe you want to create an applicant portal to let applicants view, edit, and submit their Application."). See Also: # Learn About Volunteers for Salesforce Understand how Volunteers for Salesforce helps your organization manage volunteer activities, and learn about the supporting data model. - **[Why it Matters](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_intro_why_it_matters.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers are critical to many nonprofits. Volunteers for Salesforce gives you a way to manage your relationships with them. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce and Your Salesforce Instance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_intro_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce uses some standard Salesforce objects—Contacts and Campaigns—to manage volunteers. Volunteers for Salesforce also introduces custom objects into your Salesforce org. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This diagram shows the relationship between Volunteers for Salesforce Custom Objects and Salesforce Standard Objects. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what custom objects and fields are included in Volunteers for Salesforce. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the Volunteers for Salesforce data schema in depth. # Learn How Program Plans Work with Pathways Understand how Pathways uses EDA Program Plan and Plan Requirement records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. To let support staff and students view Program Plans in Pathways, Student Success Hub uses two components: SSH Program Plan Highlights and SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary. These components require Program Plan and Plan Requirement records. Understanding how these EDA objects work with Pathways is critical. - **[Understand the Structure of Program Plan and Plan Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's go back to our student Stuart and look more closely at the requirements for an undergraduate degree in Economics. Here's how everything gets connected. - **[Plan Requirement Hierarchies and Nesting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Program Plan typically includes many Plan Requirements, such as general ed, elective, lower division, upper division, optional, and required. To keep things organized, Plan Requirements can be grouped hierarchically, with some Plan Requirements nested under parent Plan Requirements. - **[Common Plan Requirement Combinations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pathways is highly customizable. There are many combinations that you can make using different Plan Requirement options. - **[Program Plan Requirement Summary Component Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what information the Program Plan Requirement Summary component shows to your users. - **[Program Plan Requirements Summary Component Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before creating your Plan Requirements, keep these considerations in mind. ## Understand the Structure of Program Plan and Plan Requirements Let's go back to our student Stuart and look more closely at the requirements for an undergraduate degree in Economics. Here's how everything gets connected. ![A conceptual drawing of how Pathways connects Program Plan and Plan Requirements](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_erd.png) A Program Plan represents a specific offering for a degree or certification. To create a path for students to follow, a Program Plan uses Plan Requirements which can link to Courses. When a Program Enrollment is created for a student, the primary Program Plan associated with that Program is automatically linked to the Program Enrollment. ## Plan Requirement Hierarchies and Nesting A Program Plan typically includes many Plan Requirements, such as general ed, elective, lower division, upper division, optional, and required. To keep things organized, Plan Requirements can be grouped hierarchically, with some Plan Requirements nested under parent Plan Requirements. For example, maybe you want to group your Economics Major Requirements into three subgroups—Required Lower Level Coursework, Required Upper Level Coursework, and Required Upper Level Math. In Pathways, every discrete requirement—regardless of where it sits in the hierarchy—is represented by a Plan Requirement record. Let's take a look at our Economics Major Requirements example more closely. ![On the left, a sample of Plan Requirements grouped hierarchically, and one the righto a conceptual diagram that shows the different types of requirements in different colors](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_plan_req_hierarchies_nesting.png) You can also think about these Plan Requirements by using a handy spreadsheet. Notice the values in the Plan Requirement Option column. They indicate the purpose of a particular Plan Requirement: umbrella, umbrella with optional children, required, and optional. We'll talk about those next.

Level

Plan Requirements

Plan Requirement Option

1

Economics Major Requirements

Umbrella

2

  Required Lower Level Coursework

Umbrella

3

    Survey of Calculus 1

Required

3

    Introduction to Statistics

Required

3

    Principles of Macroeconomics

Required

3

    Principles of Microeconomics

Required

2

  Required Upper Level Coursework

    Select from any 3000 or 4000 level course...

Umbrella

2

  Required Upper Level Math

Umbrella

3

    Required Upper Level Math (UOC)

Umbrella with optional children

4

      Statistics for Business and Economics

Optional

4

      Probability and Statistics

Optional
In Pathways, there are four ways to think about Plan Requirements. There are no special record types for these options. The distinction between these Plan Requirement options is determined by the Category field, whether or not it has child Plan Requirements, and if it has a linked Course.

Plan Requirement Option

Description

Children

Category Field

Credits Specified

Has a Linked Course?

Valid in Which Levels?

Umbrella

A type of Plan Requirement that you can use to either create groupings of requirements, at varying levels and composed of different types of requirements; or represent a standalone requirement with an open-ended structure, such as electives that can be fulfilled in many different ways.

Allowed - but not mandatory

Null

Allowed - but not mandatory

No

1 and 2

Umbrella with optional children

A type of Plan Requirement that parents a single level of children. Use it to create a grouping of Plan Requirements, all of which have their Category set to "Optional." It specifies the number of credits that fulfill the requirement, by selecting from among the options listed.

This type of Plan Requirement doesn't display in the Pathways component UI like other Plan Requirement options do. It helps create the heading "Complete One" or "Complete # Credits," but the Plan Requirement name itself doesn't display. We recommend you include UOC in the name of these Plan Requirements to help you identify them more easily.

Yes - limited to exactly one level of children

Null - with all children set to Optional

Yes

No

2 and 3

Required

A Plan Requirement that must be fulfilled by completing its associated Course. It can be a standalone requirement high in the hierarchy or it can be parented by an umbrella Plan Requirement.

No

Required

Yes

Yes

2 and 3

Optional

A Plan Requirement that can be fulfilled by completing its associated Course. It only has other optional sibling Plan Requirements, and together they are all parented by an umbrella Plan Requirement.

No

Optional

Yes

Yes

3 and 4
## Common Plan Requirement Combinations Pathways is highly customizable. There are many combinations that you can make using different Plan Requirement options. **Supported Base Combinations** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Keep in mind that these are the _base_ combinations.

Level and Option

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Required

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella

    3 - Required

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella with optional children

    3 - Optional

*1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella

    3 - Umbrella with optional children

      4 - Optional
\* This combination allows four levels because the fourth level is an optional Plan Requirement. Only optional Plan Requirements can be used in level 4. You can also combine supported combinations to create other combos. For example:
Level and Option

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella

    3 - Required

    3 - Umbrella with optional children

      4 - Optional
Here's what this combination looks like. ![Component in the app showing a combination of umbrella, required, umbrella with optional children, and optional Plan Requirements](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_supported_base_combos.png) **Unsupported Base Combinations** These combinations will cause errors and may prevent the component from displaying.

Level and Option

Limitation Notes

1 - Required

You can't have a required Plan Requirement in level 1. Required Plan Requirements must be nested under an umbrella Plan Requirement.

1 - Umbrella with optional children

  2 - Optional

You can't have an umbrella with optional children in level 1. Optional Plan Requirements must be nested under two levels of umbrellas (where level 1 is an umbrella and level 2 is an umbrella with optional children).

1 - Required

  2 - Required/Optional

 Required and optional Plan Requirements can't have child Plan Requirements.

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella with optional children

    3 - Optional

      4 - Required/Optional

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Optional

  2 - Required

You can't mix optional and required Plan Requirements under an umbrella Plan Requirement. Create one umbrella Plan Requirement for optional children and one Plan Requirement for required Plan Requirements.

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella

    3 - Umbrella

You can't have three or more levels of standalone umbrella.

1 - Umbrella

  2 - Umbrella

    3 - Umbrella

      4 - Required

You can't nest more than three levels. The only exception is for optional Plan Requirements. Try restructuring to only use three levels.
Now that you understand nesting levels and combinations, you're probably thinking Pathways is a simple hierarchy of courses. But Pathways provides much more than that. Let's look at what else it can do. ## Program Plan Requirement Summary Component Features Learn what information the Program Plan Requirement Summary component shows to your users. Collapsible Sections Level 1 and level 2 Plan Requirements that are umbrellas display as colored headers to help visually identify them. These levels are collapsible. When the component initially loads, sections are collapsed by default. You can't change the colors of these headers. ![Level 1 and Level 2 Plan Requirements, which are collapsible umbrellas with colored headings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_collapsible_sections.png) Subheadings Subheadings are provided for Plan Requirements that have children. These headings can be: - **Complete All**—this header displays when all the children in an umbrella Plan Requirement are required Plan Requirements. ![A Complete All header that displays when all children in an umbrella Plan Requirement are required](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_subheadings_all.png) - **Complete One**—this header displays when a Plan Requirement can be satisfied by one optional Plan Requirement. For example, a Plan Requirement (that's an umbrella with optional children) that specifies 8 Credit Hours, and has two nested optional Plan Requirements each worth 4 Credit Hours. ![A Complete One header that displays when a single optional Plan Requirement is required](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_subheadings_one.png) - **Complete # Credit Hours**—this header displays when a Plan Requirement can be satisfied by some of its child Plan Requirements. For example, a Plan Requirement (that's an umbrella with optional children) that specifies 6 Credit Hours, and has nested Plan Requirements that total more than 6 Credit Hours. ![A Complete number of Credit Hours header that displays when some but not all children in an umbrella Plan Requirement are required](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_subheadings_credit.png) Total Credit Hours Credit hours are displayed in Pathways for: - Plan Requirements (optional or required) with associated Courses that specify credits. ![A Plan Requirement showing credit hours per course](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_credit_req.png) - Umbrella Plan Requirements that specify credits. ![A Plan Requirement showing total credit hours](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_credit_umbrella.png) - The Program Plan displays credits based on its Total Required Credits field. ![A Program Plan showing total credit hours](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_credit_plan.png) Sorting You can't control how umbrella Plan Requirements are sorted. However, groups of required Plan Requirements and optional Plan Requirements sort alphabetically by the Course ID. ![A Program Plan showing required and optional Plan Requirements sorted alphabetically by Course ID](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_feature_credit_sorting.png) ## Program Plan Requirements Summary Component Considerations Before creating your Plan Requirements, keep these considerations in mind. - Each Program Plan must have an associated Account (Academic Program). - Umbrella Plan Requirements can specify a Program Plan or a Parent Plan Requirement, but not both. - For Level 1 Plan Requirements, specify an associated Program Plan and leave the Parent Plan Requirement field blank. - For Level 2 and 3 umbrella Plan Requirements, specify a Parent Plan Requirement field blank. - There's no limit to the number of required or optional Plan Requirements that you can nest under an umbrella Plan Requirement or an umbrella with optional children Plan Requirement. - EDA and Pathways support Credit Hours out of the box. If your institution uses a unit of measurement for courses other than Credit Hours, such as Units, you can override the labels using Translation Workbench. First, override the EDA labels on the coordinating objects and fields. Then override the Pathways custom labels. For more information, see [Override Translations in Second-Generation Managed Packages and Unlocked Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=entering_translated_terms_in_packages.htm). - EDA automatically assigns Program Plans to Program Enrollments when a Program Plan associated with a Program is marked as the primary plan. This default behavior is controlled by a TDTM trigger. We don't recommend disabling this trigger. However, if you need to disable the trigger, edit the Trigger Handler record with the Class name `PREN_ProgramPlan_TDT` and deselect the Active field. # Learner Enrollment Use the Enroll Admitted Student action on the individual application record page in Education Cloud to enroll an admitted student into a learning program. Automate the enrollment process with Salesforce flows to enroll multiple students.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When you enroll a student, you can select the academic term, learning program, and learning program plan for enrollment. The (default) suffix in the picklist values indicates the student's preferences. For enrollment, make sure that these fields on the related student records have valid values:
Object Name Necessary Fields
Individual Application
  • ContactId
  • ProgramTermApplnTimelineId
Program Term Application Timeline
  • AcademicTermId
  • LearningProgramId
  • LearningProgramPlanId
These flows and invocable actions in Education Cloud are used to enroll students: | Resource Name | Resource API Name | Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | enrollLearner | enrollLearner | Invocable Action | Enrolls an admitted student in a learning program plan. | | EDU Cloud: Select Enrollment Data | eduacademics\_\_SelectEnrlData | Flow | Gets the available academic terms, learning programs, and learning program plans, and shows the student’s enrollment preferences. Calls the Enroll Applicant flow to continue the enrollment process. | | EDU Cloud: Enroll Applicant | eduacademics\_\_EnrollApplicant | Flow | Gets the individual application details and calls the Enroll Learner invocable action to enroll a student into a learning program. Creates an academic term enrollment record for the student if there isn’t one. | | EDU Cloud: Enroll Applicant Bulk | eduacademics\_\_EnrollApplicantBulk | Flow | Calls the Enroll Applicant flow to enroll multiple applicants into learning programs. | SEE ALSO: - [Set Up Learner Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up the individual application record page and configure the necessary permissions to enroll learners.") - [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules.") # Learner Portal Use Experience Builder to brand your learner portal, and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes to provide an enhanced student experience. Students can use the portal to apply to programs, track and manage their applications, raise requests for information, and more. You can use the Education Applicant Portal template, or build one from scratch. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can configure the learner portal. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the portal. **How**: - Create a learner portal. - Design and implement a security model for your learner portal using a combination of org-wide default sharing settings, permission sets, and sharing sets. - Assign the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set to learners so that they can access the portal. - Verify your portal setup. See Also: - [Set Up a Learner Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_a_learner_portal.htm) # Learner Profiles for Advisors The Learner Profile object stores student data aggregated from multiple objects. Therefore, the learner profile record page in Education Cloud provides a unified, actionable view of students. Find all the relevant details in one location where you can search, filter, and sort through learner profiles to create criteria-based list views. Then use the list views to take bulk actions.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Learner Profile object stores consolidated data from these objects: - Academic Term - Academic Term Enrollment - Case - Case Team Member - Contact - Contact Profile - Course Offering Participant Result - Learner Program - Learning Program - Learning Program Plan - Program - Program Enrollment - Success Team - User ## Update Learner Profile Records Run the Data Processing Engine (DPE) definition from Education Cloud, Update Learner Profiles with CRM Data, to update your learner profile records with the latest data from related objects. You can include additional fields by modifying the definition.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To run a Data Processing Engine definition:

Education Cloud Full Access
Configure the [object and field permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_objects_and_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US) of the writeback user for the DPE job as shown: | Object or Field | Required Access | | --- | --- | | Academic Term | Read | | Academic Term Enrollment | Read | | Case | Read | | Case Team Member | Read | | Contact | Read | | Contact Profile | Read | | Course Offering Participant Result | Read | | Learner Profile | Read and Edit | | Learning Plan | Read | | Learning Program Plan | Read | | Program | Read | | Program Enrollment | Read | With Flow Builder, you can [create a flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.task_data_processing_engine_run.htm&language=en_US) that runs a scheduled DPE job to automatically and regularly update your records. Review these considerations for data integrity before running the DPE using the Update Learner Profiles with CRM Data definition: - Unique learner profile records are created only for unique student contact records. - If there are multiple academic term enrollments that are active and current, the related learner profile is updated with any one of those academic term enrollments. This also applies to the Major, Expected Graduation Date, Primary Advisor, and Secondary Advisor fields. See Also: - [Run Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_run_definitions.htm&language=en_US) ### Sample Data Population Logic Understand the steps involved in populating learner profile records for typical scenarios. Customize the logic to suit your requirements. #### Example: Students Enrolled in Study Abroad Program ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_example.png) Example 1. [Add a data source node to the Data Processing Engine definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_create_a_node.htm&language=en_US), Update Learner Profiles with CRM Data. 2. [Configure the node](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_salesforce_object_as_data_source.htm&language=en_US) for the Program Enrollment object. 3. Add and configure a filter node for active program enrollment. 4. Add a filter node for the program name, Study Abroad. 5. Add and configure additional nodes as needed. 6. Save your changes. 7. Run the DPE to populate the learner profile records. #### Example: Students with Primary and Secondary Majors ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_example.png) Example 1. [Add a custom picklist field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&language=en_US) on the Learner Program object, for example, Major Type. 2. [Add picklist values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.fields_creating_picklists.htm&language=en_US) Primary and Secondary to Major Type. 3. Modify the Data Processing Engine Definition, Update Learner Profiles with CRM Data: 1. Add and configure a data source node for the Learner Program object. 2. Add and configure a filter node for primary learner programs. 3. Add and configure a filter node for secondary learner programs. 4. Add a join node to combine the outputs of the filter nodes. 5. Add and configure additional nodes as needed. 6. Save your changes. 7. Run the DPE to populate the learner profile records. # Learner Progress for Learners and Advisors Include the Learner Progress component from Education Cloud on your Experience Cloud site so that learners can track their academic advancement. Advisors see Learner Progress as a tab on a learner’s case record page in Student Success.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
With Learner Progress, learners and advisors can: - View enrolled learning programs. - View the details of planned, enrolled, and completed requirements for each learning program, such as grade, result, total, and completed duration. - View the details of unplanned requirements for each learning program, such as unplanned duration. - View repeated courses and the term in which they were last attempted. - View messages about unplanned or failed learning requirements that require attention. Consider these aspects when referring to courses and programs in Learner Progress: - Learner Progress shows courses and programs that are included in any one of a learner’s degree plans, regardless of the plan status (draft or approved). - For repeated courses, the course list is sorted by the start date. If the start date isn’t available for a course, the date on which it was created is considered. ## Set Up Your Org for Learner Progress Configure your org to ensure that learners can use Learner Progress.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To set up your org: | Education Cloud Full Access | Prerequisites: - Ensure that Academic Operations is enabled. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). 1. Enable access to the required objects: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Provide these access permissions for the objects: | OBJECT | DEFAULT INTERNAL ACCESS | DEFAULT EXTERNAL ACCESS | | --- | --- | --- | | Academic Session | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Academic Term | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Academic Term Enrollment | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Academic Year | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Course Offering Participant Result | Public Read Only | Private | | Learning | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Learning Achievement | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | 2. Use sharing sets to provide access to these objects. See [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm). - Course Offering Participant - Learner Pathway - Learner Program - Learner Program Requirement Progress 3. To provide access to learner portal users, assign the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). ## Set Up Your Learner Portal with Learner Progress Use Experience Builder to add the Learner Progress component to your learner portal.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up your learner portal with the Learner Progress component:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an Experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Create or select a site. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). 3. Create a new page for Learner Progress: 1. Click the Page Properties icon, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, and then choose a preferred layout for the page. 3. Enter a name for the page. For example, My Progress. 4. Enter the necessary details, and then click **Create**. 4. Click **Components**, and then drag the Learner Progress component to your preferred location on the new page. 5. Apply additional customizations as necessary, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). # Learner Progress Summary for Learners and Advisors Use Learner Progress Summary in Education Cloud to view a learner’s academic highlights.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use the Learner Progress Overview Flexcard to show Learner Progress Summary on your Experience site, so learners can get an overview of their academic progress. Learners can select the learning program and learner pathway to view the completion percentage, credits overview, enrollment, and term details. The Learner Progress Overview Flexcard also contains the Learner Progress component. Advisors can use the dropdown under Learner Overview on the learner’s case record page to navigate between the learner’s profile and the academic highlights. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The duration and duration unit of the learning outcome items related to your learning programs must be specified for the values to appear in the Credits Overview section. ## Set Up Learner Progress Summary Configure your org so learners and advisors can use Learner Progress Summary to view the academic highlights. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To set up your org: | Education Cloud Full Access | Prerequisites: - Academic Operations is enabled in your org. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). 1. Enable access to the necessary objects: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select it. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Provide these access permissions for these objects: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Academic Session | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Academic Term | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Academic Term Enrollment | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Academic Year | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Course Offering Participant Result | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Learning | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Learning Achievement | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | 2. Use sharing sets to provide access to these objects: - Course Offering Participant - Learner Pathway - Learner Program - Learner Program Requirement Progress - Learner Achievement - Learner Achievement Method 3. To provide access to learner portal users, assign the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set. ## Add Learner Progress Summary to Your Learner Portal Use Experience Builder to add the Learner Progress Overview Flexcard to your learner portal so learners can view their academic highlights.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up your Experience site with Learner Progress Summary:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

Omnistudio User
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an Experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites and select it. 2. Create or select a site. 3. Click the Page Properties icon, and select **\+ New Page**. 4. Create a page for Learner Progress Overview: 1. Select **Standard Page**, and then choose a preferred layout for the page. 2. Enter a name for the page. For example, My Progress. 3. Enter the necessary details, and then click **Create**. 5. Add and configure the Learner Progress Overview Flexcard component: 1. Click **Components**, and then drag the Flexcard component to your preferred location on the new page. 2. On the Flexcard properties, select the name **EDULearnerProgressOverview** and save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm) - [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm) - [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm) - [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm) # Learner Watchlist for Advisors Use Watchlist in Education Cloud to proactively monitor learners who require enhanced support. Ensure timely intervention to provide personalized assistance to help learners succeed.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
As an advisor, you can add a learner to the watchlist from their case record page. You can also add multiple learners to the watchlist at a time from the academic term enrollments list view page, or the cases list view page. The Watchlisted Learner object represents details of a learner’s addition to the watchlist. A watchlisted learner record is related to the advising case record type. You can escalate the record to indicate the priority or the need for expedited support. When you add learners to the watchlist, a Salesforce Chatter post is created that provides details, including the names of the learners that you can’t add. Also, learners on the watchlist have the “On Watchlist” tag on their profiles so advisors can identify them. The tag is visible only to the advisor who creates the specific watchlisted learner record. To view learners on the watchlist, from the App Launcher, find and select **Watchlisted Learners**. To remove a learner from the watchlist, edit the watchlisted learner record to provide the preferred end date. View the watchlisted learner records as a related list on the learner’s case record page for the Student Success app. - **[Set Up Watchlist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_watchlist_for_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Program and Benefit Management, configure case record types, and define the necessary picklist values to use Watchlist in Education Cloud. - **[Add Learners to the Watchlist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_watchlist_for_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add learners to the watchlist to monitor them for timely intervention and enhanced support. You can also add an individual learner to the watchlist from the associated case record page. ## Set Up Watchlist Enable Program and Benefit Management, configure case record types, and define the necessary picklist values to use Watchlist in Education Cloud.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To set up Watchlist: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Enable Program and Benefit Management. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). 2. Configure case record types for Student Success. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&type=5). 3. Define picklist values for the Category, Status, and Reason fields on the Watchlisted Learner object as necessary. See [Add Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.fields_picklist_add_values.htm&type=5). See Also: - [WatchlistedLearner in Education Cloud Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/sforce_api_objects_watchlistedlearner.htm) ## Add Learners to the Watchlist Add learners to the watchlist to monitor them for timely intervention and enhanced support. You can also add an individual learner to the watchlist from the associated case record page.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To add learners to the watchlist: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Term Enrollments**. You can also add learners to the watchlist from the list view page or the record page for the Case object. 2. Filter as necessary, and select the records related to the learners that you want to add to the watchlist, and then click **Add to Watchlist**. 3. Enter the start date and the case record type. 4. If necessary, click **Escalate** to indicate priority or the need for urgent monitoring and support. 5. If necessary, provide the program, status, and reason for the watchlisted learner record. 6. Save your changes. A watchlisted learner record is created for each learner that is available as a related list to the learner’s case. A Salesforce Chatter post is also created, and includes the names of the learners who couldn’t be added to the watchlist. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - You can add only the learners with active cases to the watchlist. - If you select multiple cases related to a learner, only the oldest case is related to the watchlisted learner record. - If you provide a program, the related program enrollment record is related to the watchlisted learner record. - If you select multiple records, they must be related to the same case record type to create the watchlisted learner records. - You can select up to 200 records at a time. # Learning Program Plan Builder After you create a learning program, use Program Plan Builder to organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses. ### Required Editions With Winter '25, you can use the builder without creating all requirements from scratch first. You can import your program plan requirements and start working with them in the Program Plan Builder. See [Education Cloud Business APIs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_apis.htm).
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Before you work with the Program Plan Builder, [set up the Academic Operations app](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). On the window that launches the Program Plan Builder, you associate a learning program with the plan that you’re about to create. Then, you can add courses to these types of grouping elements to create the plan. - The **Required Courses** element contains courses that are required to complete a learning program. - The **Elective Courses** element contains available electives or elective tracks that learners can add to their program. - The **Reusable Collection** element is a group of courses that can exist in multiple program plans. - The **Category** element contains other plan elements, such as Required Courses or Reusable Collections. ![The Program Plan Builder user interface](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/program_plan_builder.png) - **[Create a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Program Plan Builder to view, edit, save, cancel, and publish all your program plans. You can also organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses, and add active versions of learning courses to each element. - **[Edit a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edit_a_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To ensure accurate data capture and visibility, edit program plans by using the Program Plan Builder. - **[Delete a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_delete_a_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To maintain data accuracy, delete unused learning program plans. - **[Create and Use Reusable Collections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_work_with_reusable_collections.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build program plans more efficiently with reusable collections, which are course groups that appear in multiple program plans. For example, you can create a “General Education” collection of courses that applies to several different program plans. # Learning Program Plan Summary for Learners and Staff Enable learners to view the details of a learning program plan on the learner portal. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use the Learning Program Plan Summary component from Education Cloud on your Experience site to enable learners to view the details of a learning program plan, such as the description, requirements, and the details of the associated learning programs. Use the Program Plan Builder to build your learning program plans, and then show the plans as a list on the learner portal. Learners can click any program plan from the list to conveniently view its details in a comprehensive view. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The list view also shows the draft learning program plans. However, learners can’t view the details of the draft plans in Learning Program Plan Summary. Registrar staff can view the details on the Program Plan Summary tab on the record page of the respective learning program plan. ## Set Up Your Org for Learning Program Plan Summary Configure your org to enable learners to use the Learning Program Plan Summary component.
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, make sure to turn on Academic Operations. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). 1. Enable access to the required objects: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Provide these access permissions for the objects: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Learning | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Learning Achievement | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | 2. To provide access to learner portal users, assign the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). ## Set Up Your Learner Portal with Learning Program Plan Summary Use Experience Builder to add the Program Plan Summary component to your learner portal.
User Permissions Needed
To set up your learner portal with the Learning Program Plan Summary component:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Select a site or create a site. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). 3. In Experience Builder, add a list page for learning program plans on the theme navigation menu: 1. Click the theme navigation menu to view its settings. 2. Set the Max Items to Display field as required. 3. Click **Edit Default Navigation**, and then select **Add Menu Item**. 4. Configure the new menu item for learning program plans: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Learning Program Plans | | Type | Salesforce Object | | Object Type | Learning Program Plan | | Default List View | All Learning Program Plans | 5. Save your changes. 4. Add Learning Program Plan Summary to a learning program plan object page: 1. Create an object page for the learning program plan object. See [Create Custom Pages with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm). 2. On the Learning Program Plan Detail page, remove the components that aren’t required. 3. Click **Components**, and then drag the **Learning Program Plan Summary** component to the page. 5. Apply additional customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). # Learning Programs and Course Insights Use the Learning Programs and Course Insights dashboard to gain insights into the efficiency of an institution's learning programs, application processes, and faculty management.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
The dashboard includes multiple charts that analyze the applicants, enrolled students, and faculty data. ## Applicants Get data-driven insights into the application data based on the selected department. On the Applicants tab, you can: - View key metrics such as total applications, acceptance rate, and admission rate to get insights into applicant data. You can view the application trends based on the selected metrics. - View the pipeline chart that visually represents the applicant journey, showing the distribution across statuses such as enrolled, accepted, under review, and others. - Analyze application data across learning programs and academic terms to identify the most and the least performing departments and learning programs based on the volume of applications. - Get DEI insights on gender, race, and ethnicity among applicants across departments to enhance inclusivity in educational institutions and evaluate the institution's efficiency in attracting a diverse range of students. ## Enrolled Students Get a comprehensive overview of enrolled students. Customize data by applying the department and academic year filters. On the Enrolled Students tab, you can: - View key metrics such as total enrolled student count, average registered courses, learning achievements, average grades per term, and year-over-year percentage changes. - View snapshots of the new enrollments and the enrolled students who are waiting to start the learning course, the count of total available learning courses and active learning courses, and the students who are waiting for enrollment. - Use DEI Insights to ensure diversity in the enrolled students to create a more inclusive and representative learning environment. ## Faculty Get comprehensive insights into faculty performance and departmental analytics. On the Faculty tab, you can: - Filter the charts by department and academic term to view details such as total faculty count, average sections handled per faculty, enrollments, waitlists, and faculty section allocation status. - Evaluate the performance of learning courses based on metrics such as application and enrollment counts and identify the principal faculty members linked with these learning courses. - View the leading departments based on faculty count and get valuable information for effective academic planning and resource allocation. # Learning Summary for Learners and Staff With Learning Summary, learners can view details of learning programs and courses on the learner portal. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use the Learning Program Summary and Learning Course Summary components from Education Cloud on your Experience site so learners can view the details of programs, courses, and the associated learning requirements. Learning Summary is also available as a tab on the updated learning program and learning course record pages for easy access to the staff. ## Set Up Your Org for Learning Summary Configure your org so learners can use Learning Program Summary and Learning Course Summary.
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Enable Academic Operations. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). 2. Enable access to the required objects: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Provide these access permissions for the objects: | OBJECT | DEFAULT INTERNAL ACCESS | DEFAULT EXTERNAL ACCESS | | --- | --- | --- | | Learning | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Learning Achievement | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | ## Set Up Your Learner Portal with Learning Summary Use Experience Builder to add the Learning Program Summary and Learning Course Summary components to your learner portal.
User Permissions Needed
To set up your learner portal with the Learner Progress component:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an Experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Create or select a site. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). 3. Create an object page for the learning program object. See [Create Custom Pages with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_builder_create_page.htm). 4. On the Learning Program Detail page, remove the components that you don’t need. 5. Click **Components**, and then drag the Learning Program Summary component to your preferred location. 6. Similarly, create an object page for the learning course object, and then add the Learning Course Summary component to the Learning Course Detail page. 7. Apply additional customizations as necessary, and then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). # Legacy Account Models An account model describes the relationship between Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities. The Household Account Model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the one we strongly recommend. This article contains information about two legacy account models: The 1-to-1 Account Model, and the Individual Account Model. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note For more information about the recommended Household Account Model, see [What is the Household Account Model.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") For more information about changing your account model, see [Change My Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_my_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack is the Household Account model, which is the account model we strongly recommend. Only experienced Salesforce Administrators should consider changing an organization's account model."). - **[1-to-1 Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_account_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The 1-to-1 account model works by creating an Account object for each Contact you create (that is, "One Contact, one Account"). The Account is automatically created when you create a Contact, and the name of the new Account is identical to the name of the new Contact. - **[Individual ("Bucket") Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_account_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Individual account model, all Contacts are associated with a single Account, as if all of your Contacts have been dumped into one "bucket." The name of this gigantic Account is "Individual." In other words, you have one great big Account that holds all of your Contacts. ## 1-to-1 Account Model The 1-to-1 account model works by creating an Account object for each Contact you create (that is, "One Contact, one Account"). The Account is automatically created when you create a Contact, and the name of the new Account is identical to the name of the new Contact. The Account object itself, however, acts "invisibly" behind the scenes, and exists for the sole purpose of conforming to the standard Salesforce Account model (which requires all Contacts to be associated with an Account). In the Contact Details section of your Contact record, it looks like this: ![Contact Details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/account_model_contactdetails1-1.png) In the 1-to-1 account model, you must create Households by joining contacts together through a separate custom Household object (provided with NPSP.) Opportunities (donations) look like they are simply associated with Households and Contacts, but they are also "traveling through" the 1-to-1 Account. ![Opportunities are associated with Households and Contacts, but also "travel through" to the 1-to-1 account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/legacy_account_models_v01.png) The 1-to-1 account model is a legacy account model, and is no longer recommended. ## Individual ("Bucket") Account Model In the Individual account model, all Contacts are associated with a single Account, as if all of your Contacts have been dumped into one "bucket." The name of this gigantic Account is "Individual." In other words, you have one great big Account that holds all of your Contacts. In the Contact Details section of your Contact record, it looks like this: ![Contact Details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/account_model_contactdetailsindiv.png) As with the 1-to-1 account model, you create Households in the Individual account model by joining Contacts together through a separate Household object. ![Bucket account model illustration](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/legacy_account_models_v02.png) This model was developed to conform to the standard Salesforce Account model, which requires all Contacts to be associated with an Account. The Individual account model is a legacy account model, and is no longer recommended. # Legacy NP Starter Pack Legacy documentation for Nonprofit Starter Pack. - **[Nonprofit Starter Pack (NPSP) - Legacy Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This page provides documentation for previous versions of the Nonprofit Starter Pack. Please be aware that Salesforce no longer supports these versions. The information in these documents may be incomplete or inaccurate. - **[Nonprofit Starter Pack (NPSP) Documentation - Salesforce Classic Archive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organizations created from Trial starting November 9, 2016 and later use the Lightning user interface by default. This page provides an archive of documentation, written for the Salesforce Classic user interface, for NPSP versions 3.0 - 3.83. Please be aware that Salesforce.org does not maintain these versions of the docs, so the information may be incomplete or inaccurate. # Legacy NPSP Documentation Documentation for legacy NPSP features. - **[NPSP Donation Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_donations_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about legacy NPSP donation rollup summaries and how to add single-payment donations. - **[Legacy NPSP Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create, managed, and delete legacy recurring donations. Learn about standard field mappings with Opportunities and other features for legacy recurring donations. - **[General Legacy NPSP Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_general_legacy_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Documentation for old NPSP setup and features like legacy account models and NPSP Data Loader help text mapping. - **[Legacy NP Starter Pack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Legacy documentation for Nonprofit Starter Pack. # Legacy NPSP Recurring Donations Create, managed, and delete legacy recurring donations. Learn about standard field mappings with Opportunities and other features for legacy recurring donations. - **[Create Legacy Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create either open-ended or fixed-length recurring donations to track a donor's intent to give regularly into the future. These records are named automatically. - **[Change, Close, or Delete a Legacy Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_del_legacy_rd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a donor wants to modify how much or how often they give—or if they want to end a recurring donation—you need to modify or delete their recurring donation record. When you delete a recurring donation, NPSP deletes all related opportunity records. - **[Standard Field Mapping for Legacy Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_standard_field_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When NPSP creates child Opportunity records for a Recurring Donation, it copies the value of several fields from the Recurring Donation onto the Opportunity records. This is a big time saver, as it means you don't have to manually enter values for all those fields on each Opportunity record. - **[Create Custom Installment Periods for Legacy Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_cust_install_periods_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Legacy Recurring Donations includes five commonly used installment periods, but you can add and remove custom installment periods as needed. For example, create an installment period for gifts made three times a year. - **[Legacy Recurring Donations versus Opportunity Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_vs_opp_donation_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The term "Recurring Donations" in the nonprofit world often brings to mind a donor who has committed to giving a financial gift to your organization multiple times. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, you can track this type of donation in different ways. - **[Configure Legacy Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_legacy_recurr_dons.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about configuring legacy recurring donations. # Legacy Recurring Donations versus Opportunity Payments The term "Recurring Donations" in the nonprofit world often brings to mind a donor who has committed to giving a financial gift to your organization multiple times. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, you can track this type of donation in different ways. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As of April 29th, 2020, Nonprofit Success Pack offers a new version of Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm) Should you use an NPSP Recurring Donation to track a recurring gift over time, or a standard Salesforce Opportunity with multiple payments? By asking a few questions the decision can be simple: - **Is the donation open-ended?** If the donation is open-ended, you can't use a standard Salesforce Opportunity with multiple payments, because the number of payments on an Opportunity in the NPSP is fixed. You must use the Recurring Donation process. While standard Salesforce Opportunity Payments have a fixed end date, Open-Ended Recurring Donations, through the use of the Opportunity Forecast Months setting, do not. The **Opportunity Forecast Months** setting uses the number you specify to continuously generate new donation records. - **Is the donation fixed-length?** If the donation is a fixed length, then does your nonprofit organization use cash or accrual accounting? - **Cash accounting** – All income and expenses are recorded when the income is received or the expenses are paid. - **Accrual accounting** – All income and expenses are recorded when they are incurred, not when they are received or paid. For example, you would report your income when the money is pledged—not when it's received. Likewise, you would report your expenses according to the date of the bill, not the day you pay the bill. For **cash accounting**, use a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation, which has multiple close dates corresponding to each “child” donation received. Tracking recurring donations in this way gives you a record date for each donation. For **accrual accounting**, use a standard Salesforce Opportunity, which lets you have multiple "child" payments, but which has one close date for the entire opportunity. The single close date gives you the single accounting record date you need when using accrual accounting. (See [Manage Pledges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and manage pledges for gifts with multiple payments.") for more information.) # Let Grantseekers Update Their Information Set up access for grantseekers so that they can update their organization's information. Review the available optional settings, such as updating global action or quick actions, to help the process be more efficient. - **[Give Grantseekers Access to Update Account Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_grant_access_update_org_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** External users, such as grantseekers, can use the Account Update Request to submit information about their organization to your org. When a grantseeker starts a request, they complete a form with important information about their organization, such as their organization’s name, address, and phone number. This information comes back to you through a Case. When the Case is approved by a grantmaker, the request either creates a new Account for the organization or assigns an existing Account to the grantseeker’s Contact record. - **[Set Up Account Update Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_acct_update_req.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide a simple way for grantseekers to request an update to their organization’s information. - **[Optional Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_optional_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the available optional configurations to help your organization be more efficient in performing grantseeking activities. # LICENSE APPENDIX Apply the license as specified in this section. As specified in section 4 for the SFDC Migration Package License, the following notification must be applied to any and all redistribution of the work: © 2024, Salesforce, Inc. All rights reserved. Redistributions of this software must mark and include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the below disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with any redistribution in a reasonably prominent position. The names of Salesforce, Inc. and its Affiliates may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. YOU ARE PROHIBITED FROM SUBMITTING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION AS DEFINED UNDER 45 CFR § 160.103 INTO THIS WORK # Lightning Web Component Configuration in Education Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid: post-processing modals, column modals, and column components. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Configure a Post-Processing Modal for Single Gift Entry in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_configure_post_processing_modal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a post-processing modal to appear after the user clicks either Process Gift or Process & New. - **[Configure a Column Modal in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_configure_column_modal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the gift entry experience by configuring interactive column modals. You can embed standard field sets or custom Lightning web components (LWC) directly into the grid to capture complex donor details without leaving the primary workflow. - **[Configure Column Components in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_configure_column_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a component column to use custom Lightning web components for display and edit behavior in your Gift Entry Grid template. # Lightning Web Component Configuration in Nonprofit Configure custom Lightning web components for the three placement types available in the Gift Entry Grid: post-processing modals, column modals, and column components. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Configure a Post-Processing Modal for Single Gift Entry in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_post_processing_modal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a post-processing modal to appear after the user clicks either Process Gift or Process & New. - **[Configure a Column Modal in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_column_modal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the gift entry experience by configuring interactive column modals. You can embed standard field sets or custom Lightning web components (LWC) directly into the grid to capture complex donor details without leaving the primary workflow. - **[Configure Column Components in a Gift Entry Grid Template in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_column_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a component column to use custom Lightning web components for display and edit behavior in your Gift Entry Grid template. # Link a Canceled Order to the Original Order Use the Link Canceled Order to Original Order invocable action in a flow to connect a canceled order with its original order. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up an invocable action:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Billing Operations User permission set

AND

Payment Operations User permission set
To open, edit, create, activate or deactivate a flow: Manage Flow
[Build a flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US) to incorporate the Link Canceled Order to Original Order invocable action into your org's workflow. Run the flow to link a canceled order to the original order to enable refund processing. # Lobby Management for Drop In Appointments Use Drop In Appointments with Education Cloud to easily manage learners who visit the location for an in-person consultation with an advisor.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Front office staff can create waitlists, or virtual queues, for service resources, such as advisors, who are available for drop-in appointments. The staff can then generate a QR code for the waitlist, and share it with learners who wish to make an appointment. Learners can scan the QR code to check in and add themselves to the waitlist. Service resources are notified of the check-in and can accept the drop in appointment, while learners wait in the lobby. On the learner portal, learners can check the status of their check-ins and position in the queue. When a service resource accepts a check-in, the learner can view the scheduled appointment on the Upcoming appointments tab. - **[Set Up Your Org for Drop In Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org_for_drop_in_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your org to enable drop in appointments, and add the QR Code component to the waitlist record page for the staff. - **[Set Up Your Learner Portal for Drop In Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_learner_portal_for_drop_in_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a page to your Experience site where learners can select a topic and add themselves to the waitlist for a drop-in appointment. - **[Generate a QR Code for a Waitlist Check-in Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_generate_a_qr_code_for_a_waitlist_check-in_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a QR code that learners can use to add themselves to the waitlist of a drop in appointment. # Log Gifts Singly and in Batches Quickly log single gifts or batches of gifts for accounting and reporting purposes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: These features apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can manage Gift Entry. **Why**: Log individual gifts or use Gift Batch Templates to enter multiple gifts at once. Record gifts against commitments, assign designations, and add soft credits to the transactions. SEE ALSO [Gift Entry and Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_gift_entry_processing.htm) # Log In and Get Oriented (Support Staff) Log in to Student Success Hub, learn your way around, and understand the terminology used in the app. - **[Log In to Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_log_in.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Log in to the account that your school's Student Success Hub administrator has created for you. - **[Get Oriented in Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_log_in.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to get around the Student Success Hub app. - **[Student Success Hub Terminology Quick Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_log_in.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before we dive into the details of how to make the most of Student Success Hub, here's a handy reference for some commonly used terms. ## Log In to Student Success Hub Log in to the account that your school's Student Success Hub administrator has created for you. 1. Check for the welcome email with login information. 2. Follow the link in the email. 3. Complete the login process that your school requires. After you're logged in, check the app name in the navigation bar to make sure that you're in the Student Success Hub app. ![Student Success Hub in the app navigation bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_nav_bar.png) See something else? Click![The App Launcher icon, which is a grid of dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_app_launcher_icon.png) and search for and then select **Student Success Hub**. ## Get Oriented in Student Success Hub Learn how to get around the Student Success Hub app. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Components in the Student Success Hub app are built on Lightning Experience, a user interface that supports your Student Success Hub experience. This interface, sometimes called a console, can be customized. If your app looks different from our examples, it just means that your Student Success Hub administrator has customized the interface to better fit your school's needs. Contact your administrator if you have ideas for enhancing the layout. Tab navigation As you work through your caseload, you can open records for multiple students as either workspace tabs or subtabs. Workspace tabs \[1\] keep the items that you're actively working on scannable and accessible. As you click links to view record details, subtabs \[2\] open. The highlighted tab in the subtab row tells you which item you're viewing in the browser window. ![Workspace tabs and subtabs in Student Success Hub](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_tabs.png) Three-column workspace When viewing student record Cases, the column on the left features personal and academic details about the student \[1\]. And the column on the right features a compact activity feed showing what's coming up \[3\]. The middle column keeps related lists front and center, giving you a 360-degree view of Alerts, Success Plans, success team information, Notes, and more \[2\]. ![The console's three-column layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_column_layout.png) Quick access to student lists in split-view mode When you need to locate a student's record, you often consult a list of your students. [Switch into split-view mode](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_case_based_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's contained in a student record Case and different ways to access student record Cases in Student Success Hub.") to take a quick peek at your student lists and open the desired record in a new tab. Then exit split-view mode to return to the full-screen, maximum real estate view of your workspace. ![Split-view mode expanded on a student record Case](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_split_view.png) Utility bar with Notes The utility bar is a fixed footer that gives you one-click access to your Notes. Utilities open in a window over the app. Open the Notes scratchpad over the workspace to quickly jot down a case note. ![A call-out on the Notes window open over a student record, and a call-out on Notes in the utility bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_notes_utility.png) ## Student Success Hub Terminology Quick Reference Before we dive into the details of how to make the most of Student Success Hub, here's a handy reference for some commonly used terms. Case A type of record that holds all support-related data for a student, such as Notes, Alerts, Success Plans, and Tasks. Also known as a "student record." Your school may use other types of Case records to track non-student support services, such as IT Help Desk tickets. Contact A record that holds academic or personal data about a person that you want to keep track of with Student Success Hub, such as a student, faculty member, tutor, parent or guardian, and so on. A Contact can be assigned to a success team but doesn't have permission to log in to Student Success Hub. Portal In orgs that are licensed for student users and Experience Cloud sites, a portal is the online collaboration space where students go to connect with their success teams, schedule appointments with support staff members, and stay up-to-date on their tasks. Student Record A type of Case record that holds all support-related data for a student, such as Notes, Alerts, Success Plans, and Tasks. Technically, it's a "student record Case record," but that's quite a mouthful, so we often shorten it to "student record." Success Team A team of people serving in support roles for a student. Success teams can consist of both Contacts and Users. User Someone involved with day-to-day student support who is typically assigned to success teams. Users have permission to access Student Success Hub and can log in. # Major Donor Insights Dashboard in Nonprofit Use the Major Donor Insights dashboard in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app to analyze donor opportunities over a specific time period. Gain data-driven insights from key fundraising metrics to easily identify high-value donors and prioritize engagement activities. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available with: Nonprofit Cloud or Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking in **Enterprise** and **Unlimited** Editions | ![Major Donor Insights Dashboard with numbers noting important features of the dashboard.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/Major_Donor_Insights_Dashboards.png) - Select the time period (1) that you want to see key metrics and analytics for. - View the key metrics (2) for the selected period to gain insights into the effectiveness of fundraising efforts and identify donors who can make high-value contributions. - Use the Donor Opportunity Analysis (3) section to comprehensively evaluate donor opportunities across various stages, and prioritize donor engagement. - Select the Revenue tab (4) to view the values of opportunities in different stages and analyze them based on revenue. - Select the Donors tab (5) to see the number of donors at each stage. - Use the Donor Opportunity Details (6) to track which donors to reach out to, and manage high-priority opportunities by identifying follow-ups based on opportunity value, current stage, and the number of days since the last interaction. **Example Use Case**: A user preparing for a fundraising campaign can use the dashboard to assess which donor segments have the highest potential, track the stages of current opportunities, and strategize outreach efforts based on average donation amounts and retention rates. By analyzing this data, the user can effectively target high-value donors and optimize their engagement strategy. ## Key Performance Indicators in Major Donor Insights Dashboard Learn the definitions and calculations of key metrics in the Major Donor Insights dashboard. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The data presented in the Major Donor Insights dashboard is categorized into two transaction categories—Major Donor and Major Donor & Mass Market. This grouping is used in calculations to derive insights.
Metric Description Calculation Transaction Category
Total Revenue ($) The total amount of all paid donations within the selected time period.

SUM(GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount)

Filter by:

GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType = 'Is Written'

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Total Donors The number of unique donors within the selected time period.

COUNT(UNIQUE(GiftTransaction.Donor))

Filter by:

(GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment IS NOT NULL AND GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.Opportunity IS NOT NULL) GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType = 'Is Written'

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Yearly Retention Rate The percentage of donors who donated in the current year compared to the previous year.

Query 1) select all donor where transaction.TransactionDate is >= (Compare To Time Period.EndDate - 1 Year) AND <= (Compare To Time Period.EndDate)

Query 2) select all donor where transaction.TransactionDate is >= (Time Period.EndDate - 1 Year) AND <= (Time Period.EndDate)

Retention Rate: query1 / query2

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Major Gift Contribution The number of donors associated with opportunities that are won, compared to the total number of unique donors.

Query1= UNIQUE(Opportunity.Donor) from Opportunity WHERE Opportunity.IsClosed = 'True' AND Opportunity.IsWon = 'True'

Query2= COUNT(UNIQUE(GiftTransaction.Donor))

WHERE GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType = 'Is Written';

Final result: Query1 / Query2

Filter by:

GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType = 'Is Written'

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Avg. Donation Amount ($) The average amount per donation within the selected time period.

SUM(GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount) / COUNT(GiftTransaction)

Filter by:

GiftTransaction.Status = 'Paid' OR GiftTransaction.GiftCommitment.FormalCommitmentType = 'Is Written'

 Major Donor or Major Donor and Mass Market
Opportunity Value By Stage The chart shows the total opportunity value aggregated by different stages in the sales pipeline. Sum (Opportunity Value) group By Opportunity Stage —
Donors by Stage

The chart shows the count of unique donors associated with each stage of the opportunity pipeline.

 Unique (Donor ID) group by Opportunity Stage —
# Make a Final Admissions Decision When you make a final admissions decision, update the Application Status and Application Decision Date fields on the application record. You can make these updates directly on an application record, or you can mass edit these fields from an application list view. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Typically, only certain admissions staff members can make admissions decisions. If you can’t update these fields, you don’t have the correct permissions.  1. From the app, open an Application record. 2. Update the Application Status and Application Decision Date fields.  - Click the Application Details tab and click the pencil icon next to the fields. - Or, click the **Edit** button and update the fields in the edit record window. 3. Save your changes. When the fields are updated, the Reviewer Snapshot displays the final admissions decision. The snapshot might look different depending on the admissions decision and whether or not you were assigned as a reviewer.  ![Reviewer Snapshot component showing a Final Admissions Decision of Admit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_snapshot_final_decision.png) # Make a Final Admissions Decision After the application has been through the review process, it's ready for a final decision. You make the final application decision directly on an individual application record. We recommend that you access the individual application from the Admissions Console.
User Permissions Needed  
To decide on applications:

Education Cloud Full Access

OR

Education Cloud Limited Access
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Typically, only certain admissions staff members make admissions decisions. If you can't update these fields, you don't have the appropriate permissions. 1. From the Recruitment & Admissions app, open an individual application record. 2. Read the reviews for the application in the Application Reviews section. 3. In the Application Decisions section, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) and then click **New**. 4. Click **Application Recommendation** and select an option: - **Admit** - **Enroll** - **Waitlist** - **Deny** - **Cancelled** 5. Enter any other relevant information and save your changes. # Make Hold Details Available to Experience Cloud Users Assign the right permissions to students and add hold details to your Experience Cloud site for students to resolve their holds. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To assign permissions and customize the Experience Cloud site: Education Cloud Full Access
To view and manage holds in Experience Cloud:

Education Cloud for Experience Cloud

AND

Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Access

AND

Access Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Users
1. Add the Regulation Code Violation Detail page to your Experience Cloud site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences and then select **All Sites**. 2. Open the Builder of your Experience Cloud site. 3. Create an object page for Regulatory Code Violation. Use the default Regulation Code Violation Detail page. 4. From the Components panel, drag **Learner Restriction Details** to the page canvas. 5. Publish your changes. 2. Confirm that the Restrictions tab in the Action Center is turned on. 1. In the Builder, go to the Home page, and then click the **Action Center** component on the canvas. 2. In the configuration panel, verify that Restrictions is selected. The Restrictions tab is the Learner Restrictions Flexcard. Depending on your intended user experience, deselect **Restrictions** in the configuration panel to hide the Restrictions tab in the Action Center. Then add the Learner Restrictions Flexcard to any other page on your Experience Cloud site. SEE ALSO: - [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes.") # Manage a Queue Waiting Room (Support and Front-Desk Staff) Learn how to open a queue waiting room and use it to manage students who drop by for an appointment. - **[Open the Queue Waiting Room Site on the Tablet or Kiosk](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_wait_room_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue waiting rooms help you easily manage the flow of walk-ins. Students check themselves into a queue waiting room using a tablet or kiosk device, which is set up to show a site designed specifically for such check-ins (a different site from the student portal). Checking in creates a Support Queue Case record for the student that you can track through the queue. - **[Learn How Students Experience the Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_wait_room_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When students check in, they first see the waiting room (Facility or custom object) record page with the welcome banner, the waiting room name and details, and cards for available Support Pools and support staff members. - **[Associate the Student's Contact Record with the Support Queue Case Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_wait_room_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a student or their proxy has checked in to the queue waiting room, verify their identity and associate the student's Contact record with the Support Queue Case record that was created. - **[Protect Personal Data During Queue Waiting Room Self Check-In](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_wait_room_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The queue waiting room self check-in form is designed to protect students' personal information. ## Open the Queue Waiting Room Site on the Tablet or Kiosk Queue waiting rooms help you easily manage the flow of walk-ins. Students check themselves into a queue waiting room using a tablet or kiosk device, which is set up to show a site designed specifically for such check-ins (a different site from the student portal). Checking in creates a Support Queue Case record for the student that you can track through the queue. After your Student Success Hub administrator has configured your queue waiting room with the available Support Pools and support staff members, here's how to set up the device each morning or before the start of walk-in hours. 1. In a browser on the device, navigate to the queue waiting room site's URL and open the record detail page for the Facility (or custom object) that represents your waiting room. 2. Enter Full Screen mode. Here are some tips to make it even easier and safer to manage the public queue waiting room site. - Use a device solely dedicated to your queue waiting room. Don't put any apps besides the browser on the device. - Create a bookmark for the Facility (or custom object) record page for your waiting room—or add the record page to the tablet's Home screen—and open it that way. This setup prevents students from using the Back button to access the Facilities record list on the Home page. - Run your browser or device in kiosk mode (or get a kiosk add-in or extension) to control the view mode, restrict navigation options, and hide elements such as toolbars and menus. ## Learn How Students Experience the Queue Waiting Room When students check in, they first see the waiting room (Facility or custom object) record page with the welcome banner, the waiting room name and details, and cards for available Support Pools and support staff members. ![Queue waiting room check-in form with options to select a Support Pool or support staff member](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_site_queue_wait_check_in_welcome.png) Support staff members appear only if they have walk-in hours scheduled on their calendars. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Students can join the support staff member's queue waiting room right up until the member's availability ends. If availability ends at 3 PM, a student can still join the queue waiting room at 2:57 PM—even if there are 15 people ahead of her and it's unlikely she'll be seen. Students select the Support Pool or support staff member they want to see and then indicate whether they're the student or a proxy. Then they provide their name and (if you've requested it) a phone number or email where they can be reached when it's their turn to be seen. ![Queue waiting room check-in form with Attendee Information and Notification Information fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_site_queue_wait_check_in_attendee_info.png) Next, the student provides details: appointment Topic, Subtopic, and optional Comments. Then, they tap **Join Queue**. ![Queue waiting room check-in form with Agenda fields and Join Queue button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_site_queue_wait_check_in_agenda.png) Now the student is checked in to the queue waiting room. A Support Queue Case record is created and the Status is Queued (if you're using the recommended statuses in [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.")). ## Associate the Student's Contact Record with the Support Queue Case Record After a student or their proxy has checked in to the queue waiting room, verify their identity and associate the student's Contact record with the Support Queue Case record that was created. 1. Ask the student or proxy for their student ID card or other valid form of identification. 2. In Student Success Hub , choose **Cases** from the app navigation menu and click the Support Queue Case record. The record you need will display the student's name in the Web Name field (that's the field they used to provide their name during check-in), a Status of Queued, and an empty Contact Name field. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Customize your Support Queue Case list view to display the Web Name and Proxy Name fields. If the attendee who checked in is a proxy, it's convenient to see their name so that you can summon that person to your desk to request identification and associate the student Contact record to the Case record. 3. On the Support Queue Case record detail page, in the Queue Actions component, enter a Location and then click **Ready**. The Contact Lookup form shows the information that the student or their proxy provided when they checked in to the queue waiting room: the Student Name and possibly also the Student ID. 4. If the correct Student Name appears in the Contact Lookup form, click **Search for Contact**. Or, enter a different name or Student ID and then click **Search for Contact**. Student Success Hub finds results based on a first name, last name, or a combination. However, it searches for an exact match for a Student ID. 5. Select the correct student and then click **Save and Return to Record**. Now a Contact Name is associated with the Support Queue Case record, and you can [guide the student through the queue as usual.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to guide students through a queue while they wait to meet with a support staff member.") ## Protect Personal Data During Queue Waiting Room Self Check-In The queue waiting room self check-in form is designed to protect students' personal information. - Students can tap the X in the upper-right corner of any page to cancel check-in. All entered information is deleted, the first page of the form loads anew, and no case is created. - Each page of the check-in form times out after 60 seconds if no keystrokes are detected. Then, 30 seconds after the time-out is detected, all entered information is deleted, the first page of the form loads anew, and no case is created. - On the check-in confirmation page, if no one taps the Close button, the page times out after 10 seconds and then the first page of the check-in form loads anew. # Manage Account Update Requests Respond to grantseekers' requests to update their organizations’ information. - **[Manage Account Update Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_org_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An external user, such as a grantseeker, can submit an Account Update Request to create a new Account for their organization or associate an existing Account with the grantseeker’s Contact record. # Manage Account Update Requests An external user, such as a grantseeker, can submit an Account Update Request to create a new Account for their organization or associate an existing Account with the grantseeker’s Contact record.  - **[Submit an Account Update Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_org_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A new grantseeker can add their organization information to their profile in the grantee portal. - **[Approve an Account Update Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_org_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Approving an Account Updated Request closes the Case and either creates a new Account for or associates an existing Account with the grantseeker’s organization. In either scenario, it also associates the Account to the requesting user’s Contact record. ## Submit an Account Update Request A new grantseeker can add their organization information to their profile in the grantee portal. The Organization Information section reflects the information the grantseeker submitted and provides a Case Number. A grantseeker can view the Case’s status if you added Cases to your portal navigation. 1. Click the user profile in the top right corner, then click **My Organization**. 2. Click **Request an Update**. 3. Complete the form, then click **Submit Request**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note An external user can submit multiple requests to update their organization information. Grants Management uses the most recently approved Case information to either create a new Account or assign an existing Account to the grantseeker. ## Approve an Account Update Request Approving an Account Updated Request closes the Case and either creates a new Account for or associates an existing Account with the grantseeker’s organization. In either scenario, it also associates the Account to the requesting user’s Contact record. 1. From the App Launcher, search for then select **Cases**. 2. Click the Case Number. 3. Review the submitted request, then click **Process Request**. 4. Click **Process Request**. # Manage Accounting Sets When you're done configuring accounting sets, activate them. After you do so, you can no longer change the object model but you can deactivate it in order to update its other settings.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To manage accounting sets: | Manage Accounting Subledger | Only admin users can activate and deactivate accounting sets. ## Activate Accounting Sets 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Next to the accounting set to activate, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Activate**. 3. Click **OK**. Because activating accounting sets sends requests to the Data Processing Engine for data validation and creation, it can take some time to complete. ## Edit or Deactivate Accounting Sets To edit accounting sets, deactivate them first. You can't edit or delete accounting field mappings related to an active accounting set. Salesforce ignores the deactivated accounting sets' source records when creating accounting data. After you're done with your edits, reactivate the accounting sets. As with other significant changes, we recommend testing your changes in a sandbox before deploying them. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Next to the accounting set to edit, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Deactivate**. 3. Click **OK**. Because deactivating accounting sets sends requests to the Data Processing Engine for data validation, it can take some time to complete. 4. Click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) again, and then select **Edit**. 5. Make your edits and then save your changes. 6. From the Accounting Sets page, next to the accounting set to activate, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Activate**. 7. Click **OK**. # Manage Advisor Availability Quickly manage your working hours and set vacation or time off for yourself or colleagues. This streamlines scheduling workflows and reduces dependency on administrators. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To manage advisor availability: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Configure the overall settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_manage_appointment_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get clear guidance at every stage to quickly set up appointment topics, assign staff, and set up their availability. These components significantly reduce the configuration time and potential errors.") to manage appointments. - [Configure the required elements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Appointment scheduling requires configuring several foundational elements. Set up these elements to provide simplified, intuitive guidance to administrators and advisors for managing appointments within Education Cloud.") for appointment scheduling. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Manage Availability**. 2. Click **Add Availability**. 3. Select a service resource which relates a staff member with service territories. 4. Select a territory (service territory) related to the staff (service resource) and whose membership dates overlap with the dates for this availability. 5. Select a time slot type for the advisor's availability. 6. Select the advisor's availability status. 7. Select the start and end date and time when the advisor is available. This helps to find advisors who work in the right territories and within the specified hours. 8. Select the topics that students can book appointments with the advisor. To support all topics, select **All Appointment Topics**. If **Filter topics by case team roles** is selected in the Manage Availability component, **All Appointment Topics** is disabled. In this case, the list of topics shows only topics based on the selected staff (service resource). 9. Select channels for engagement to communicate, interact, and provide support to students. If the advisor supports all channels, select **All Engagement Channels**. 10. Select an appointment recurrence type. 11. Save your changes. When **Filter topics by case team roles** is enabled in the Manage Availability component, if an availability (shift) is created outside the guided setup and **All Topics Supported** is selected when associating topics by using the shift work type record, then you can't deselect **All Topics Supported** while editing the availability record. To change this setting, you must manually update the shift work type record. # Manage Alumni Users Manage everything about your alumni users in Education Cloud, from their access to your Experience Cloud site to the account, profile, and engagement details on their records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To manage alumni users: Education Cloud Full Access
- **[Set Up Alumni Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_alumni_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your alumni users to access your Experience Cloud site. - **[View and Update Information for an Alumni User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_alumni_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See account and profile details, education and employment history, ## Set Up Alumni Users Prepare your alumni users to access your Experience Cloud site. ### Create an Alumni Permission Set Create and configure a permission set for alumni users. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. For Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label and API name for the alumni permission set, and then save your changes. 4. Click your alumni permission set, and then click **Object Settings**. 5. Click **Person Educations**, and then click **Edit**. 6. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 7. Under Field Permissions, for Institution, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 8. Save your changes. 9. For Person Educations, click ![Actions menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and then select **Person Employments**. 10. Click **Edit**. 11. For Object Permissions, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 12. Save your changes. ### Create an Alumni Profile Create a profile for alumni users. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. For Customer Community Plus User, click **Clone**. 3. For Profile Name, enter Alumni Community User, and then save your changes. ### Create an Alumni Sharing Set Create a sharing set for alumni users. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, click **New**. 3. Enter a label for the sharing set, such as Alumni Sharing. Press Tab to automatically fill the Sharing Set Name field. 4. For Available Profiles, add your alumni profile to the Selected Profiles column. 5. For Objects, add **Account** and **Person Academic Credential** to the Selected Objects column. 6. Under Configure Access, for Account, click **Set Up**. 7. Select these mapping values: 1. For User, select **Contact.Account**. 2. For Target Account, select **Id**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 8. Click **Update**. 9. Under Configure Access, for Person Academic Credential, click **Set Up**. 10. Select these mapping values: 1. For User, select **Contact**. 2. For Target Person Academic Credential, select **LearnerContact**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read Only**. 11. Click **Update**. 12. Save your changes. ### Create Alumni Experience Cloud Site Users Assign a the alumni profile and permissions set to grant alumni users access to your alumni Experience Cloud site. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Accounts**. 2. Click an account. 3. On the account's Contacts related list, view or add the contact record for the person that you want to add to the site. 4. On the contact detail page, click ![Actions menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and then select **Enable Customer User**. Salesforce creates a user record with some details prepopulated. 5. On the New User page, select the profile that you created to grant access to the Experience Cloud site. 6. Populate other fields as needed, and then save your changes. 7. Assign the user the permission set that you created for alumni. ## View and Update Information for an Alumni User See account and profile details, education and employment history, ![Alumni Account record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_alumni_account_record_page.png) Here's what you can do and see on an alumni's account record page.
Component What can I do?
Highlights Panel (1) See account details for the user.
Alumni Profile Card (2)

See the details that the user added to their alumni profile page.

Note
Note The location for the user comes from the mailing address on their account record page. If you don't have a mailing address for the user, you won't see a location on the profile card.
Timeline (3) See a timeline of activities and engagement with the user. To create a case, service appointment, record alert, or care plan for the alumni user, click New. To see the new record on the timeline, click Refresh.
Action Launcher (4) Add a note, create a task, or send an email.
Life Events (5) See events and milestones in the alumni user's life. To add an event, click New Event.
Engagement (6)

See cases and alerts that are assigned to the user.

Note
Note To see record alerts that you created in the Timeline component, click Refresh in both the Timeline component and in the Alerts component. Record alerts that have the person account assigned as the parent record and a different object assigned to the What Record field don't show in the Alerts component.
Relationships (6) See the alumni user's relationships in a graph.
Education (6) See person education and person academic credential records for the alumni user. Person academic credential records are created when the user's learner program record is marked as complete.
Employment (6)

See the alumni user's employment history from the Person Employment related list. You can also create person employment records for the user.

Important
Important To show person employment records on the alumni user's profile page in the alumni portal, connect person employment records to the user's contact record.
Details (6) See user account details.
Portal Profile Preference (6) See if the alumni has made their directory profile public.
Related (6) See related lists for Individual Applications, Person Employments, Person Public Profile Preference Sets, Person Academic Credentials, and Person Educations.
Interest Tags (7) See and add tags related to the alumni user's needs, interests, and engagement opportunities.
See Also: - [Create Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_create_external_users.htm) - [Create an Alumni Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_alumni_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a profile for alumni users.") - [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Up Account Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure record pages for the Account object in Education Cloud.") # Manage and Visualize Relationships in Education Cloud Use Actionable Relationship Center (ARC) to visualize relationships between the objects that you configure, such as for people and families.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use cases include: - Parent and child relationships - Sibling relationships - Mentoring relationships - Advising relationships See Also: - [Model Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up relationships to define how your learners and other accounts connect with one another, such as for representing households.") - [Actionable Relationship Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_arc_overview.htm&type=5) # Manage Application Data and Documents Understand how to work with documents that your staff or applicants upload to Admissions Connect. - **[Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some considerations before starting to work with documents in Admissions Connect. - **[Automate Attaching Documents to Document Checklist Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_dci_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it easy to attach documents to Document Checklist Items to save time for your staff and make document processing more efficient. - **[Delete Application Documents and Data in the App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_delete.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for deleting documents, and learn how to delete documents or data from Admissions Connect. # Manage Application Decision Sharing Application decision records are automatically shared with Experience Cloud users on the decision release date and early application release date that you define on the application timeline object. | User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To manage application decision sharing: | Education Cloud Full Access |
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
For more information about decision sharing, see [Sharing Considerations for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_sharing_considerations_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Consider how and when to share application information with applicants."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The application decision object permission is granted through the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User permission set license. To prevent the automatic sharing of application decisions with portal users, disable automatic sharing in Setup. This prevents sharing in future and removes sharing from decisions that were already shared through this method. 1. In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Recruitment & Admissions, turn on Disable Automatic Decision Sharing. # Manage Application Permissions and Sharing Prepare your users to access your application.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Sharing Considerations for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_sharing_considerations_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider how and when to share application information with applicants. - **[Create Permission Sets for Internal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_permission_sets_for_internal_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and assign permission sets for processors and internal reviewers. - **[Create Permission Sets for Applicants and External Reviewers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_permission_sets_to_applicants_and_reviewers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and assign permission sets for applicants and external reviewers. - **[Create a Sharing Set for Applicants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_applicant_sharing_set.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a sharing set for the users who apply for themselves. - **[Create a Sharing Set for Third-Party Representatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_sharing_set_for_parents_guardians_and_agents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a sharing set for users who apply on behalf of an applicant, such as parents, guardians, or commissioned agents. - **[Create Account Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_account_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create the Secondary School and College record types for the Account object, create a sharing rule that grants portal users Read Only access to the records. - **[Manage Application Decision Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_application_decision_sharing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application decision records are automatically shared with Experience Cloud users on the decision release date and early application release date that you define on the application timeline object. # Manage Applications Set up and manage the application process for your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Use Flows to Manage Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_use_flows_to_manage_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create flows to assist in application reviews and manage records. - **[Verify, Review, and Decide on Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_review_and_decide_on_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Work with an application through each step of the approval process. - **[Score Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_score_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create rubrics in Education Cloud to evaluate applicants and score them based on the criteria you define. Make more informed decisions about who to offer admission to and whom to waitlist. Use rubrics to promote equity in the admissions process. - **[Implementation Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_implementation_considerations_for_document_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand what file types are supported by Education Cloud and how to work with them. - **[Delete Application Documents and Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_delete_application_documents_and_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to remove personally identifiable information from Education Cloud. # Manage Appointments (Support Staff) Learn how to edit appointment details, track no shows, and cancel appointments in Student Success Hub. - **[Edit Appointment Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit the details of an appointment by accessing it from the Appointment Manager or the student record Case. Don't edit support appointments from your Calendar. - **[Add or Change Virtual Meeting Details for an Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update details for an appointment to suit your needs and your students'. - **[Cancel an Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Cancel an appointment in the Appointment Manager. - **[End an In-Progress Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If an in-progress appointment ends earlier than expected, set the appointment's end time to the current time. - **[Track No Shows and Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes students show up late to their appointments—and sometimes they don't show up at all. Track appointment attendance in the Appointment Manager. - **[Write a Note Related to an Appointment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To write a Note related to an appointment, create it from the Appointment Manager, where you're likely already viewing the appointment details. Creating a Note from the Appointment Manager saves time because the appointment Topic is populated automatically and the Note is automatically related to both the student record Case(s) and the Appointment record. - **[Refresh the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you make changes to an appointment but don't see them reflected in the Appointment Manager, refresh the view. ## Edit Appointment Details Edit the details of an appointment by accessing it from the Appointment Manager or the student record Case. Don't edit support appointments from your Calendar. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note - You can't add or remove invitees by editing an Appointment record. To change who is invited to a scheduled appointment, cancel the appointment and create a new one with different invitees. - When editing an appointment created for you by a front-desk staff person, you can't change the Topic or Subtopic of the appointment. You can only change the location or choose a different date or time. 1. Open an appointment from one of these locations. - From the Appointment Manager, select an appointment and click **Action** below the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels. Then, click **Edit Appointment**. - To edit a past appointment's start or end time or to access Appointment Attendee details, from the Appointment Manager, select an appointment and click **View Appointment** in the Appointment Details panel. Then select **Edit** from the action menu. To see the Appointment Attendees related list, click the **Related** tab on the Appointment record. - From the student record Case, select the Appointments tab and locate the appointment. Then select **Edit** from the action menu. 2. Edit appointment details as needed. 3. Save your changes. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you check your Calendar or Appointment Manager and don't see your changes, ![The refresh icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_refresh_icon.png) to update the data. To edit a non-support Event, such as a doctor's appointment that you added to your Calendar, do so from your Calendar: With the Event selected, click **More Details**, then click **Edit** on the record. You can also access the Event record by clicking **View Appointment** in the Appointment Manager. ## Add or Change Virtual Meeting Details for an Appointment Update details for an appointment to suit your needs and your students'. ### Add a Web Meeting Link to a Virtual Appointment If you have virtual support appointments on your Calendar that don't have a meeting link specified, or you don't have a static URL for a virtual Appointment Location, not to worry! It's easy to add a meeting URL to a virtual appointment. 1. Select a virtual appointment in the Appointment Manager. Notice that the agenda preview says "Web Meeting" below the attendee's name. 2. In the Appointment Details panel, click **Add Link**. ![An appointment selected in the Appointment Manager and the Add Link button in the Appointment Details panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_am_add_link.png) 3. On the Edit Appointment form, enter a Web Meeting Link and any optional Additional Connection Information. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If the appointment was scheduled before your Student Success Hub org started using location-based availability, you'll need to click the Location menu and choose a virtual Appointment Location. If you choose one with a Web Meeting Link, Student Success Hub populates that field for you. 4. Save your changes. The appointment updates with the virtual Appointment Location in the agenda preview, and a Join Web Meeting button shows in the Appointment Details panel. If you don't see the changes, refresh the Appointment Manager. The meeting link is also included in the updated appointment email notification, and it shows on the appointment card in the portal. ![An appointment selected in the Appointment Manager and the Join Web Meeting button in the Appointment Details panel](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_am_join_web_meeting.png) Keep in mind that you've only updated the link for this individual appointment. Any other future scheduled appointments that use the same virtual Appointment Location aren't updated. ### Change an In-Person or Phone Appointment to a Virtual Appointment To change a phone or in-person appointment to a virtual appointment instead, edit the appointment. 1. Select the phone or in-person appointment in the Appointment Manager. 2. Click **Action** under the Appointment Details and then click **Edit Appointment**. 3. On the Edit Appointment form, click the Location menu and choose a virtual Appointment Location. 4. Save your changes. The appointment updates with the virtual Appointment Location, and a Join Web Meeting button shows in the Appointment Details panel. The meeting link is also included in the updated appointment email notification, and it shows on the appointment card in the portal. ### Change the Web Meeting Link for a Virtual Appointment To change the Web Meeting Link on a virtual appointment, edit the appointment. 1. Select the virtual appointment in the Appointment Manager. 2. Click **Action** under the Appointment Details and then click **Edit Appointment**. 3. On the Edit Appointment form, click the Location menu and choose a different virtual Appointment Location, or change the Web Meeting Link and the Additional Connection Details, if desired. 4. Save your changes. The appointment updates with the virtual Appointment Location, and a Join Web Meeting button shows in the Appointment Details panel. The meeting link is also included in the updated appointment email notification, and it shows on the appointment card in the portal. Keep in mind that if you changed the link on an Appointment Location, you only updated this individual appointment. Any other future scheduled appointments that use the same virtual Appointment Location are not updated. ## Cancel an Appointment Cancel an appointment in the Appointment Manager. Select the appointment, click **Action** below the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels, and then click **Cancel Appointment**. A window opens to let you enter comments about why you're canceling. Alternatively, select the appointment in the Appointment Manager, click **View Appointment** in the Appointment Details panel, and then do either of the following. - If your administrator has configured actions on the Appointment record, click **Appointment Actions** or **Cancel Appointment**. - Go to the Appointment record's Appointment Attendees related list, click the action menu next to your name, and select **Edit**. On the Edit form that opens, change your Status to Cancelled. You can also enter the cancellation reason in the Status Comments field. Here are some things to know about canceling appointments. - When you cancel an appointment, you cancel it for all attendees. - You can't undo cancellations. - Only attendees can use the Appointment Actions and Cancel Appointment buttons on the Appointment record. To cancel an appointment for another support staff member when you're not an attendee, open the Appointment record and change the staff member attendee's Status to Cancelled. - When an appointment is canceled, the Status for all attendees is updated to Cancelled and Student Success Hub sends cancellation emails to everyone. Comments captured from support staff and students when appointments are canceled are stored on the Appointment Attendee record and included in cancellation emails. - Canceled appointments don't appear in the Appointment Manager or Calendar. If you still see the appointment, refresh the Appointment Manager or Calendar. Canceled appointments show only on the student record Case in the Cancelled Appointments related list. See [Manage Appointments (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to edit appointment details, track no shows, and cancel appointments in Student Success Hub."). - Students can cancel appointments, too, from the portal. For one-on-one appointments, cancellations are simple: The student cancels and you're notified. For group appointments, students can only cancel their own attendance. However, if they're the last remaining attendee (besides you, the Organizer) in the group appointment, then canceling their own attendance cancels the appointment entirely. - In the Appointment Manager, the status for a student who cancels a reservation in a group appointment shows as Declined. ## End an In-Progress Appointment If an in-progress appointment ends earlier than expected, set the appointment's end time to the current time. You can end any in-progress support appointment from the Appointment Manager. You can't, however, end non-support Events that you created on your Calendar. 1. Select the appointment in the Appointment Manager. 2. Click **Action** below the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels and select **End Appointment**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The End Appointment option is available only if the appointment is in progress. Otherwise, it's grayed out. The appointment's scheduled end time changes to the current time. Keep in mind that the end time is updated on both the Appointment record and its corresponding Event record so that the Appointment Manager and your Calendar stay in sync. To change the end time of a past or future appointment, edit the Appointment record itself. ## Track No Shows and Attendance Sometimes students show up late to their appointments—and sometimes they don't show up at all. Track appointment attendance in the Appointment Manager. 1. Select the appointment in the Appointment Manager. 2. In the Appointment Details panel, scroll the list of attendees and find the student or non-student attendee, then click **Action** in the attendee's card and select **Mark No Show**. The attendee's Status updates to No Show. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This action is available only if the attendee's Status is Attending and the appointment has either started or ended. You can't mark someone a no show before the appointment is scheduled to start. 3. If an attendee shows up after you've marked them a no show, locate the attendee again in the Appointment Details panel, click **Action** in their card, and select **Remove No Show**. The attendee's Status updates to Attending. All appointments appear in the Appointment Manager regardless of attendees' statuses—even if all attendees for a group appointment are no shows. The only time an appointment is removed from the Appointment Manager is when the appointment itself is canceled. To see a student's attendance history, go to their student record Case and look at the Appointments tab. You can see status for upcoming, past, and canceled appointments. ## Write a Note Related to an Appointment To write a Note related to an appointment, create it from the Appointment Manager, where you're likely already viewing the appointment details. Creating a Note from the Appointment Manager saves time because the appointment Topic is populated automatically and the Note is automatically related to both the student record Case(s) and the Appointment record. From the Appointment Manager, you can write a Note that applies to all student attendees (for group appointments) or to an individual student attendee. Here's how. 1. While viewing an appointment in the Appointment Manager, do either of the following. - Click **Action** under the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels and select **Add Note for All Attendees**. The Note is added to every attendee's student record Case. If the appointment only has one student attendee, the Note is related to just that one student's Case. ![The appointment Action menu with a call-out on the Add Note for All Attendees option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_note_action_all_attendees.png) - Locate any student's card in the Appointment Details panel, click **Action** in the card, and select **Add Note**. The Note is related to that attendee's student record Case. ![The appointment attendee Action menu with a call-out on the Add Note option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_note_action_attendee.png) 2. In the Notes tab that opens, write your Note. The Note is auto-saved when you create it. 3. Update other details and visibility settings as needed. Changes are automatically saved. When you create a Note outside of the Appointment Manager, you can still relate it to an Appointment record. For instructions, see [Manage Notes (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to control the visibility of support notes, work with shared notes, and more in Student Success Hub."). ## Refresh the Appointment Manager If you make changes to an appointment but don't see them reflected in the Appointment Manager, refresh the view. Click ![The refresh icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_refresh_icon.png) to update the data. # Manage Appointments with Salesforce Scheduler Beginning Summer '23, Salesforce Scheduler is available within your Salesforce org. Your users are entitled to 12,000 appointments per org per year. In addition to the entitlement per org, Salesforce Scheduler allows 1800 appointments per user license per year for the Enterprise Edition licenses. For Unlimited Edition licenses, the limit increases to 2400 appointments per user license per year. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled with Salesforce Scheduler. # Manage Assessments Use assessments, assessment scores, and charts to track your clients' progress. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assessments are numeric measurements of characteristics related to a client's care, such as English language proficiency or a financial literacy score. - **[Enter Assessment Scores](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use assessment scores and charts to track your clients' progress. - **[Add Threshold Markers to Assessment Charts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add horizontal threshold lines to your Assessment Charts and quickly see your client's progress towards the goals you set. You decide the number of thresholds, their values, line colors, and labels. ## Overview Assessments are numeric measurements of characteristics related to a client's care, such as English language proficiency or a financial literacy score. Case Managers can track their clients’ Assessment scores over time and see a chart of those scores. Your admin will configure the available Assessment scores and Assessment types. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Since each organization works with Assessments in different ways, Assessment Score fields are flexible. You can continue using the scoring systems you already have in place (for example, a scale of 1-10 or even a monetary value, such as monthly income). As long as Assessment Scores use numeric values, Case Management can store and render them on the Assessment Chart. ## Enter Assessment Scores Use assessment scores and charts to track your clients' progress. To record Assessment Scores for a client: 1. Navigate to the client's Contact record. 2. Click the **Assessments** related list, then click **New**. ![Assessments related list showing Assessment Name, Client, Total Score, Comments, and more](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/createassessment.png) 3. Enter the **Assessment Name**. We recommend using a standardized naming convention, such as: Client Name, Assessment type, Date. 4. Enter the **Assessment Completed Date**. 5. Optionally, add a Program Engagement. 6. Enter the Assessment score. It must be a numeric value. 7. Optionally, add comments. 8. Click **Save**. ![Assessments chart showing three months of Assessments and a comment on the last score](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/assessmentchart.png) 9. Click **Refresh** to see your Assessment scores on the Assessment Chart. Note that clicking a score name in the legend toggles that score on and off. Also, hovering over the score displays the comment. If your org has configured multiple Assessment types, choose the record type and click **Next** to enter Assessment scores. ![New Assessment showing Select a record type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/chooseassessmenttype.png) To select from multiple Assessment types on the Assessment Chart, select the Assessment Record Type from the Record Type dropdown. ![Assessments chart showing Assessment type selection dropdown](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/recordtypefilter.png) You can also control the display by filtering on Start and End Dates. ## Add Threshold Markers to Assessment Charts Add horizontal threshold lines to your Assessment Charts and quickly see your client's progress towards the goals you set. You decide the number of thresholds, their values, line colors, and labels. For example, you have an assessment for measuring where a client is in terms of financial literacy. You could set threshold lines of Basic with a blue line at 20, Average with a yellow line at 40, and Advanced with a green line at 80. Create thresholds in Custom Metadata Types: 1. In Setup, enter Custom Metadata Types in Quick Find, and then click **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Next to Assessment Thresholds, click **Manage Records**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Enter your threshold details. Label is what you use internally to identify the threshold and Title is the display name. 5. Save your threshold. # Manage Benefit Providers Identify people or organizations who can provide benefits to mentees using the provider offering object.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To manage benefit providers: | Education Cloud Full Access | Here are some examples of benefit providers. - An alumnus from your institution who helps students network with professionals in their field of study. - An organization who sets up work-study programs for students. - A senior student who provides tutoring to first-year students. ![Screenshot showing a provider offering record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_provider_offering.png) To create a provider offering: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Provider Offerings**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In Benefit, find and select the benefit that's associated with this provider offering. 4. In Contact, find and select the person who provides the benefit. 5. To make the benefit offering available, select the **Active** status. 6. Save your changes. You can allow users to register as a benefit provider on an Experience Cloud site when you set up a program or create a benefit. Registering as a benefit provider from your Experience Cloud site creates a provider offering record for that user. See Also: - [Create a Mentoring Benefit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_mentoring_benefit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up benefits for your mentoring program.") - [Model Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects and apps to define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey.") # Manage Benefit Schedules and Sessions and Track Disbursed Benefits with Guided Flows Define and manage benefit schedules and sessions with ease using guided flows. See whether and how participants exercise the benefits that you provide to them by using schedules and sessions. Enroll individuals or groups of individuals into benefit sessions on a set schedule, and then track their attendance. For example, enroll parents of a household in weekly counseling sessions, and then measure their participation by tracking their attendance. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. # Manage Calendar Sync (Support Staff) To manage your SSH appointments with your work calendar application, connect it to SSH. You can stop syncing your work calendar by disconnecting it. To remove all SSH calendar content from your work calendar, you can delete it from SSH. - **[Connect Your Google or Microsoft Calendar to Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_manage_calendar_sync.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Easily keep your Student Success Hub calendar up to date by connecting your Google Calendar™ or Microsoft® calendar. - **[Disconnect and Delete Your Google or Microsoft Calendar from SSH](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_manage_calendar_sync.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you no longer want to sync your Google or Microsoft calendar to SSH, you can disconnect it. If you want to remove SSH appointments from your work calendar entirely, first disconnect your calendar, then delete it. ## Connect Your Google or Microsoft Calendar to Student Success Hub Easily keep your Student Success Hub calendar up to date by connecting your Google Calendar™ or Microsoft® calendar. 1. Click the link at the top of Student Success Hub to connect your email and calendar to Salesforce. You can also connect an account from your Personal Settings. Get the steps in ​​[Connect Your Email and Calendar to Salesforce with Einstein Activity Capture or Inbox](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.aac_connect_additional_accounts.htm&type=5). 2. Follow the prompts to connect your Google Calendar™ or Microsoft® calendar to Student Success Hub. Your appointments start syncing right away, but can take up to 48 hours to complete, depending on the number of calendar items being synced. 3. Set your availability in Student Success Hub and manage appointments in either your Student Success Hub calendar or with your connected Google or Microsoft calendar. ## Disconnect and Delete Your Google or Microsoft Calendar from SSH If you no longer want to sync your Google or Microsoft calendar to SSH, you can disconnect it. If you want to remove SSH appointments from your work calendar entirely, first disconnect your calendar, then delete it. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Disconnecting your Google or Microsoft calendar from SSH won’t completely remove the connection between the two calendars. You’ll still see SSH appointments on the other calendar, but you can only edit or delete SSH appointments in Salesforce. To completely remove all SSH appointments from your work calendar, disconnect, then delete it. 1. In SSH, search for Calendar and select **Email and Calendar Accounts**. Your connected Google or Microsoft accounts are listed. 2. Next to the calendar you want to disconnect from SSH, click **Disconnect**. Appointments will no longer sync to your calendar. 3. To remove all SSH appointments from your disconnected Google or Microsoft calendar, next to your Google or Microsoft calendar account, click **Delete**. # Manage Career Planning and Life Goals Experience on the Portal After Charlie saves the configuration, the career planning and life goals experience for students appear on the portal. Sophia logs in to Connected University's student portal and goes to the Career Planning and Life Goals page to manage her goals and plans. ![The students manage their goals and plans.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_goals_student_flow.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This example uses common portal configurations and field values. Customize these settings to meet your institution's needs. 1. Go to the Assessments tab. The tab shows Assessment Library (all assessments published to the portal) and Student Assessments (in-progress and completed assessments) sections. 2. Select the Strengths Snapshot assessment and answer the questions. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Which words would your friends use to describe you? | I love surprise projects | | How do you prefer to learn a complex topic? | I need video tutorials | | How do you prefer to work? | I love working as a team | After submitting, the assessment appears in the Student Assessments component, the Completed tab. Sophia can review responses at any time and retake the assessment as preferences evolve. 3. Go to the Involvement Groups and Competencies tab, click **Find Involvement Groups** to browse the campus group library. Sophia can see each group's description, type, category, whether it’s university-sponsored, already a member, and whether self-enrollment is available. Sophia selects **The Ink Society** and reviews the group detail page. Sophia sees the competencies that students can earn by joining. 4. Add Creative Thinking as an interested competency. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Competency | Creative Thinking | | Stage | Interested | | Start Date | Today | 5. Join The Ink Society by adding involvement. Sophia can only join groups that are open for self-enrolment. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Involvement Group | The Ink Society | | Start Date | Today | | Involvement Level | High | | Role | Member | | Membership Status | Active | After saving, The Ink Society appears in Sophia's **Involvement Groups and Competencies** list and Creative Thinking appears in the **Interested** tab of the **Student Competencies** component. 6. Go to the **Goals** tab. In the **Student Competencies** component, update the Public Speaking competency to reflect the progress made. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Competency | Public Speaking | | Stage | Acquired | After saving, Public Speaking moves from the **Interested** tab to the **Acquired** tab. 7. Add the first life goal. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Become a Successful Entrepreneur | | Description | Build the skills, network, and experience needed to open my own business | | Start Date | Today | | Target Completion Date | 3 years from today | | Status | In Progress | After saving, the goal appears in Sophia's goals list. Sophia can go to the goal to view open and completed tasks and add new tasks to track progress. # Manage Case Plans Create a case plan, create goal and action item templates, and use case plans. - **[Create a Case Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_case_plan_case_plan_wiz.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case Plans are roadmaps developed by case managers and their clients to help clients achieve their goals. - **[Create Goal and Action Item Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about when to use these templates and learn how to create them. - **[Update a Case Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_update_a_case_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the overall status and information about client progress. # Manage Client Information Manage Client information from a Contact record. - **[Manage Client ID](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Client IDs to identify and keep track of clients. - **[Add Client to a Watch List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a client to a Watch List if they need heightened attention from your staff. - **[Create Client Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Client Alerts to track important information about the client that will display on their Client Card. - **[Log a Client Incident](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use client incidents to track client events that need to be documented. ## Manage Client ID Use Client IDs to identify and keep track of clients. If your organization has client IDs from an existing system, you can add them to the Client ID field on a client's Contact record. You can also use the Client ID Generator, which your Salesforce admin can [configure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_customize_client_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Client Card displays at the top of a Contact record and shows all of the most important information about a Contact, including name, a photo, contact information, critical alerts, and Client ID."), to automatically create and assign a unique ID. 1. From a client's Contact record or an Intake, click **Manage Client ID**. 2. Enter a Client ID, or click **Generate Random Client ID**. 3. Click **Update**. ## Add Client to a Watch List Add a client to a Watch List if they need heightened attention from your staff. To add a client to a watch list: 1. On a client’s Contact record, click the **Details** tab. 2. Next to **Watch List**, click ![Pencil icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/pencilicon.png). 3. Select **Watch List**. 4. Click **Save**. To remove a client's Watch List designation, deselect **Watch List**. ## Create Client Alerts Use Client Alerts to track important information about the client that will display on their Client Card. To create a Client Alert: 1. On a client's Contact record, click the **Related** tab. 2. In the Client Alerts related list, click **New**. 3. Give the Client Alert an informative name, for example, Robin was recently released from rehab or Tom has an acute peanut allergy and carries an EpiPen. 4. Make sure **Active** is selected. 5. Click **Save**. To remove a Client Alert, deselect **Active**. ## Log a Client Incident Use client incidents to track client events that need to be documented. Create an Incident if something happened involving the client that needs to be documented. 1. At the top of a client's Contact record, click **New Incident**. 2. Enter information about the incident. 3. Click **Save**. 4. Refresh the browser page to see the Incident listed on the Incidents component. 5. Click the incident link to see incident details. Click **Back to List** to return to the list of incidents, or click **Go to Incident Details** to view the complete incident record. # Manage Clients Create client records. Search for a client. Manage client information, program engagement, client notes, and assessments in the nonprofit Case Management managed package. - **[Add New Clients](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_client_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly add new clients from the Case Management home page using the New Contact button. In the Case Management app, clients are a type of Contact. - **[Search for a Client](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_search_client.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use client search to find clients by first name, last name, preferred name, client id, or birthdate. - **[Manage Client Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage Client information from a Contact record. - **[Add Client Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Program Engagements to track the relationship between your client and their programs. - **[Take Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Client Notes are a flexible way to track client conversations, time spent with them, or your work on their behalf. You can also connect Service Deliveries, and add important files to a Client Note. - **[Manage Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_assessments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use assessments, assessment scores, and charts to track your clients' progress. # Manage Constituent Addresses in Education Address management is vital to keeping address data accurate and organized. For constituents, use the contact fields (such as Mailing Address) and for business contacts, use the account fields (such as Billing Address). Furthermore, constituents often have multiple addresses that they use at various times of the year. Track these addresses, or track the constituent's historical addresses, so that you always send outreach materials and gift acknowledgments to the address in use by the constituent. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To manage constituent addresses:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Add an Additional Address to a Constituent Account Make sure that your outreach is received, even if your constituents have multiple or seasonal addresses. Knowing where to send gift requests or acknowledgments increases the success of your outreach efforts and improves your relationships with your constituents. When your Salesforce admin [updates the Person Account page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_update_person_account_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout.") with the seasonal address fields and the Is Primary and Is Undeliverable flags from the Contact Point Address object, you can see them on account pages. 1. From the Account page that you want to add an address to, under Contact Point Addresses, click **New**. 2. Enter a name for the new address record. For example: Smith Household Winter Address. 3. Enter the new address. 4. To indicate what kind of address you're adding, in Usage Type, indicate if this address is a Home, Work, Temporary, or Inactive address. 5. If this address is the account's primary address, select **Is Primary**. Keep in mind that if the IsPrimary flag is removed from the address, the address is cleared from the Person Account mailing address fields. 6. Enter the seasonal address information: 1. Seasonal Start Month, enter the month that this new address is used. 2. In Seasonal Start Day, enter the day of the month that this new address is used. 3. In Seasonal End Month, enter the month that this new address isn't used. 4. In the Seasonal End Day, enter the day of the month that this new address isn't used. 7. Save your work. ## Log Address Standardization and Change of Address Request Status If you change or standardize a Contact Point Address, you can log that information. If you use a third-party tool for address standardization, an ISV can set up an integration that updates these fields: - Last Address Standardization Date - Last Address Standardization Status - Last Change of Address Date - Last Change of Address Status ## Automatically Sync the Person Account Mailing Address and the Contact Point Address Always keep the account mailing address accurate with Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization. When you add or update the mailing address on a person account record page, the address is automatically added to the Contact Point Address related list pane. The date that the address was created or updated is appended to the name of the address in the Contact Point Address pane. If a match between the person account mailing address and the contact point address is found, that matched address is updated with the Is Primary flag, setting it as the primary address. This feature has to be set up and turned on in Settings. ## Set Up Automatic Address Synchronization To set up Automatic Address Synchronization, first clone and activate automation flow and then turn on synchronization. 1. From Settings, search for and select **Multiple Address Management**. 2. Clone and activate the Sync Account Address flow: 1. Click **Go to Flows**. 2. Open the Sync Account Address flow. 3. Expand the Save As New Flow list, and then select **Save As New Flow**. 4. Name and save the flow. For example, name the flow SyncAccountAddressClone. 5. Activate the flow. 6. Return to the Automatic Address Synchronization settings page. 3. Turn on Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't turn on the Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization setting until you've completed the previous steps. Automatic Address Synchronization doesn't work without the cloned and activated flow. 4. For all users who work with constituent addresses, provide read and write access to the Is Undeliverable, Is Primary, and all address fields on the Contact Point Address object and person account mailing address fields. ## Manage Mailing Addresses Keeping constituent addresses updated is vital for outreach efforts and for maintaining consistent and clean account data. Never waste time and money on mailing outreach or correspondence to inactive or out-of-date addresses when you take these simple steps to keep account contact information fresh. - Use Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization to keep mailing address updates tracked and synchronized. - When mail is returned, go to the person account page, open the address in the Contact Point Address related list, and mark the address as **Undeliverable**. If the undeliverable address is marked as the primary address, Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization erases the undeliverable address from the Person Account Mailing Address to prevent sending correspondence to the undeliverable address. - Use the seasonal address fields on the contact point address to keep track of which address, such as a winter home or college dormitory, to mail to during the set time period. When the account has seasonal addresses, make sure you send to the right address by checking the seasonal address dates and choosing the right address for the date of the correspondence. - To indicate which address is the account primary address, on the contact point address page, open the address and select **Is Primary**. This indicator helps users identify the primary address on the donor's profile and pull the primary addresses into a list for mailed outreach. - If you remove the Is Primary flag from the address, the address is completely removed from the Person Account mailing address. SEE ALSO: [Update Person Account Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_update_person_account_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout.") # Manage Constituent Addresses in Nonprofit Address management is vital to keeping address data accurate and organized. For constituents, use the contact fields (such as Mailing Address) and for business contacts, use the account fields (such as Billing Address). Furthermore, constituents often have multiple addresses that they use at various times of the year. Track these addresses, or track the constituent's historical addresses, so that you always send outreach materials and gift acknowledgments to the address in use by the constituent. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To manage constituent addresses:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Add an Additional Address to a Constituent Account Make sure that your outreach is received, even if your constituents have multiple or seasonal addresses. Knowing where to send gift requests or acknowledgments increases the success of your outreach efforts and improves your relationships with your constituents. When your Salesforce admin [updates the Person Account page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_update_person_account_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout.") with the seasonal address fields and the Is Primary and Is Undeliverable flags from the Contact Point Address object, you can see them on account pages. 1. From the Account page that you want to add an address to, under Contact Point Addresses, click **New**. 2. Enter a name for the new address record. For example: Smith Household Winter Address. 3. Enter the new address. 4. To indicate what kind of address you're adding, in Usage Type, indicate if this address is a Home, Work, Temporary, or Inactive address. 5. If this address is the account's primary address, select **Is Primary**. Keep in mind that if the IsPrimary flag is removed from the address, the address is cleared from the Person Account mailing address fields. 6. Enter the seasonal address information: 1. Seasonal Start Month, enter the month that this new address is used. 2. In Seasonal Start Day, enter the day of the month that this new address is used. 3. In Seasonal End Month, enter the month that this new address isn't used. 4. In the Seasonal End Day, enter the day of the month that this new address isn't used. 7. Save your work. ## Log Address Standardization and Change of Address Request Status If you change or standardize a Contact Point Address, you can log that information. If you use a third-party tool for address standardization, an ISV can set up an integration that updates these fields: - Last Address Standardization Date - Last Address Standardization Status - Last Change of Address Date - Last Change of Address Status ## Automatically Sync the Person Account Mailing Address and the Contact Point Address Always keep the account mailing address accurate with Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization. When you add or update the mailing address on a person account record page, the address is automatically added to the Contact Point Address related list pane. The date that the address was created or updated is appended to the name of the address in the Contact Point Address pane. If a match between the person account mailing address and the contact point address is found, that matched address is updated with the Is Primary flag, setting it as the primary address. This feature has to be set up and turned on in Settings. ## Set Up Automatic Address Synchronization To set up Automatic Address Synchronization, first clone and activate automation flow and then turn on synchronization. 1. From Settings, search for and select **Multiple Address Management**. 2. Clone and activate the Sync Account Address flow: 1. Click **Go to Flows**. 2. Open the Sync Account Address flow. 3. Expand the Save As New Flow list, and then select **Save As New Flow**. 4. Name and save the flow. For example, name the flow SyncAccountAddressClone. 5. Activate the flow. 6. Return to the Automatic Address Synchronization settings page. 3. Turn on Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't turn on the Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization setting until you've completed the previous steps. Automatic Address Synchronization doesn't work without the cloned and activated flow. 4. For all users who work with constituent addresses, provide read and write access to the Is Undeliverable, Is Primary, and all address fields on the Contact Point Address object and person account mailing address fields. ## Manage Mailing Addresses Keeping constituent addresses updated is vital for outreach efforts and for maintaining consistent and clean account data. Never waste time and money on mailing outreach or correspondence to inactive or out-of-date addresses when you take these simple steps to keep account contact information fresh. - Use Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization to keep mailing address updates tracked and synchronized. - When mail is returned, go to the person account page, open the address in the Contact Point Address related list, and mark the address as **Undeliverable**. If the undeliverable address is marked as the primary address, Automatic Person Account Mailing Address Synchronization erases the undeliverable address from the Person Account Mailing Address to prevent sending correspondence to the undeliverable address. - Use the seasonal address fields on the contact point address to keep track of which address, such as a winter home or college dormitory, to mail to during the set time period. When the account has seasonal addresses, make sure you send to the right address by checking the seasonal address dates and choosing the right address for the date of the correspondence. - To indicate which address is the account primary address, on the contact point address page, open the address and select **Is Primary**. This indicator helps users identify the primary address on the donor's profile and pull the primary addresses into a list for mailed outreach. - If you remove the Is Primary flag from the address, the address is completely removed from the Person Account mailing address. SEE ALSO: [Update Person Account Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_update_person_account_page_layout.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout.") # Manage Courses, Programs, and Learning Offerings Use Learning Wizard or Business APIs in Education Cloud to manage your courses, programs, or other learning offerings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
In Education Cloud, a learning course is the basic unit on which you build more elaborate offerings, such as undergraduate or doctorate programs. Each learning course is associated with a learning record that has a default learning outcome. If needed, you can also create more learning outcomes. View the related records in the related lists of the learning record. See [Model Learning Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learning offerings. Learning objects track the structure, administration, and enrollment and completion requirements for your offerings."). ## Define Learning Requirements in the Learning Wizard You can specify learning requirements, such as prerequisites, corequisites, recommendations, and other criteria, when you create a learning. In the Learning Wizard, you can define a learning requirement by using: - - Conditions grouped by logic, represented by the Learning Foundation Item object. - Policy rules (expression sets in Business Rule Engine) with custom logic for complex use cases. The Learning Rule object is a junction between the Learning and Rule (expression set) objects. When you create a learning with a rule-based requirement, a learning rule record is created. ## Create New Course Versions to Manage Curriculum Change Curricula and courses evolve over time. You can create a course version that updates a course's name, credits, requirements, or other details without rewriting student records or building another course. Point new enrollments to the latest active version, while students who are already enrolled keep the version they started, so historical records remain accurate. To serve different cohorts during a transition, multiple versions of a course can be active simultaneously. When students and advisors view an enrollment, they see the course details from the version that the student enrolled in. ## Import a Course Catalog with Business APIs Institutions can import their existing course catalog easily by using the Course Catalog Business APIs. See [Education Cloud Business APIs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_apis.htm). - **[Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course. - **[Create Another Learning Course Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_another_learning_course_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create another version of an existing learning course to capture changes to its name, credits, requirements, or other details without affecting students enrolled in earlier versions. - **[Configure Linked Courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_linked_courses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure linked courses to support simultaneous registration of a course along with dependent sections, such as a lecture that requires labs or exams. Linked courses also help enforce degree completion requirements. - **[Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program. - **[Edit a Learning Course or Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edit_a_learning_course_or_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Learning Wizard in the Academic Operations app to modify your learning. - **[Add Custom Fields on a Learning Course or Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_custom_fields_on_a_learning_course_or_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create custom fields to store unique data for your courses and programs in Education Cloud. - **[Create a Policy Rule for Learning Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_policy_rule_for_learning_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a policy rule using an expression set in Business Rules Engine (BRE) that can be applied as a learning requirement for a course or program. - **[Learning Program Plan Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_learning_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create a learning program, use Program Plan Builder to organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses. - **[Learning Program Plan Summary for Learners and Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learning_program_plan_summary_for_learners_and_staff.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable learners to view the details of a learning program plan on the learner portal. - **[Learning Summary for Learners and Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learning_summary_for_learners_and_staff.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Learning Summary, learners can view details of learning programs and courses on the learner portal. # Manage Data Integrity Addresses Standard addresses and get National Change of Address (NCOA) updates. - **[Standardize Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_standardize_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to schedule and manage address standardization. - **[National Change of Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_national_change_of_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about National Change of Address (NCOA) updates and how to schedule, manage, and see the results of updates. # Manage Data Integrity Duplicates Duplicate data impacts your organization's ability to provide personalized constituent experiences. With more than one Contact for the same person, it's difficult to track personal information and interactions with your organization. Learn how Data Integrity helps manage duplicate contacts. - **[About Managing Duplicate Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_managing_duplicate_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contact Merge in Data Integrity makes it easy to find and merge duplicate Contacts in Salesforce. - **[Set Up Duplicate Detection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_manage_duplicate_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Matching Rules and Duplicate Rules, and run a duplicate job to see a list of duplicate records. # Manage Delegated Access Data privacy regulations such as FERPA and GDPR require strict access delegation. Students need control over who accesses their data and the ability to revoke access at any time. Your institution also needs audit trails to support compliance. Manage delegated access efficiently, support compliance, build trust, and improve the experience for families.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create a Delegate Access Data Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_delegate_access_data_set.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Map the objects that students share with proxies, and define how they resolve to the student. Create separate datasets if proxies require access to different categories of information, such as billing statements or course schedules. - **[Create a Delegate Access Definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_delegate_access_definition.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Combine a delegated access dataset and a permission set into an access option. Students see these definitions on the portal when delegating access to proxies. # Manage Disbursements Set up disbursements in Grants Management to track outgoing funds. - **[Create a Disbursement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_disbursements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Disbursement helps schedule and track outgoing funds to funding recipients. It’s important to note this doesn’t perform the act of disbursement, such as depositing funds into a recipient's bank account. ## Create a Disbursement A Disbursement helps schedule and track outgoing funds to funding recipients. It’s important to note this doesn’t perform the act of disbursement, such as depositing funds into a recipient's bank account. 1. While viewing a Funding Request that has an Awarded Amount, click **Create Disbursements**. ![Create Disbursement on the Funding Request](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/create_disbursement_1.png) 2. Enter the Number of Disbursements. For example, enter 4 for four separate payments to the awardee. 3. Select the disbursement frequency in Interval and Period. For example, an Interval of 1 and Period of Month indicates one payment every month for 4 months. 4. Select a First Date when the initial disbursement begins. 5. Enter the total Amount of the Funding Request to disburse, if different from the Amount Awarded. You can’t disburse funds greater than the Amount Awarded, but you can disburse less. 6. Click **Calculate** to calculate a disbursement schedule based on the Number of Disbursements, Interval, Period, First Date, and Amount fields. 7. Click **Save**. ![Schedule Disbursements](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/create_disbursement_2.png) # Manage Documents in Education Cloud Reduce friction and streamline the updates between students and staff by using checklists, real-time document uploading, and creating an automated document management process.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use these components to manage documents. - Document Checklist - Document Generation - Intelligent Document Reader Use Amazon S3 as an external storage system to store and access data-heavy student content, such as application portfolios, videos, and academic research files, directly from Salesforce records. Reduce storage costs, protect sensitive student data from local downloads, and maintain a complete student view. See Also: - [Implementation Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_implementation_considerations_for_document_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what file types are supported by Education Cloud and how to work with them.") - [Document Tracking and Approvals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.admin_doc_mgmt_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Intelligent Document Reader](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.intelligent_document_reader.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Intelligent Document Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.document_automation.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [External Storage of Files with Amazon S3](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.psc_external_file_storage_amazons3.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Manage Donation Payments Manage gifts, donors,and pledges in the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Manage Donations in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn fundamentals of gift entry and donor management in the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Refund Donation Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_refund_donation_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Document refunds from Payment records in NPSP. - **[Create and Edit Gift Entry Batches](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_edit_batches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify details about a batch in Gift Entry, including number of gifts and default values for fields. - **[Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time. - **[Process a Collection of Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Test processing your Gift Entry batch and then process the batch to add the gifts to NPSP. - **[Manage Pledges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track and manage pledges for gifts with multiple payments. - **[Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes. - **[Acknowledge Donations by Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations_by_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack lets you send an acknowledgment email to a donor from a specific Opportunity record, or send multiple email acknowledgments simultaneously from the Opportunities tab. - **[Donations Glossary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_donations_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Common fundraising terms and how these concepts relate to records in NPSP. - **[Working with Opportunity Sales Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_working_with_opportunity_sales_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to update Opportunity stages and sales processes in NPSP. # Manage Donations and Other Gift Types Learn how to manage donation payments, gifts, and pledges. - **[Manage Donation Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage gifts, donors,and pledges in the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Manage Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recurring giving is a dependable source of revenue for nonprofits. Donors who give regularly tend to continue giving for many years, and sometimes increase the amounts they donate. When donors want to adjust how and when they give in response to changes in their lives, your organization must be able to respond efficiently. You'll find the ability to do this and more with Recurring Donations in NPSP. - **[Manage Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. Learn about customizable rollups and legacy rollup solutions. - **[Manage Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_match_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage Soft Credits with the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Manage Special Gift Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_special_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Work with matching gifts, In-Kind Gifts, Grants, Memberships, and Tribute Gifts in the Nonprofit Success Pack. # Manage Donations in Salesforce Learn fundamentals of gift entry and donor management in the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[About Donation Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Chances are you've managed donations in another database, accounting system, or with spreadsheets. The same concepts you're familiar with apply to Salesforce and the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP). You just need to know what things are called and where to click. - **[How to Get Donations Into Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP is designed to handle all the different kinds of donations you receive, such as single donations, matching gifts, recurring donations, tributes, and more. Learn the most efficient way to enter different kinds of donations. - **[Credit Where Credit is Due](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Soft credits let you track people who contributed to getting a donation in the door. For example, you might attribute a soft credit to a board member who influenced their friend to donate to your organization. - **[Nonprofit Financial Accounting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_donations_in_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use General Accounting Units to designate a donation to specific funds, and Accounting Subledger to bridge the gap between accounting and other departments. ## About Donation Management Chances are you've managed donations in another database, accounting system, or with spreadsheets. The same concepts you're familiar with apply to Salesforce and the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP). You just need to know what things are called and where to click. Donations are called Opportunities in Salesforce. An Opportunity is a specially-designed Salesforce record for recording revenue by the amount, date, and person or organization that revenue is from. Businesses use Opportunities to track sales deals–nonprofits use Opportunities to track donations. We use the terms Donation and Opportunity interchangeably throughout the product documentation. For help with Salesforce terms you aren't familiar with, check out the [Donations Glossary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_donations_glossary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Common fundraising terms and how these concepts relate to records in NPSP."). ## How to Get Donations Into Salesforce NPSP is designed to handle all the different kinds of donations you receive, such as single donations, matching gifts, recurring donations, tributes, and more. Learn the most efficient way to enter different kinds of donations. ### Enter Single Donations or a Collection of Donations Use the NPSP Gift Entry tool to enter one-off single donations, or a collection of donations in a batch. To learn about Gift Entry, see [Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time."). ### Enter Pledges NPSP uses Opportunity and Payment records to manage pledges–a donor’s agreement to donate a set amount of money in installments. For example, to track a pledge of $400 paid in $100 installments every quarter for one year, NPSP creates one Opportunity of $400 and four related Payment records of $100 each. To learn more about Pledges, check out [Manage Pledges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and manage pledges for gifts with multiple payments."). ### Issue Refunds Refund donations on an Opportunity’s Payment record. To learn more about refunds, see [Refund Donation Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_refund_donation_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Document refunds from Payment records in NPSP."). ### Enter Recurring Donations NPSP handles recurring donations by creating Opportunity records based on the installment schedule. You can specify a monthly, quarterly, yearly, or custom installment schedule. To learn how to enter recurring donations in NPSP, see [Create a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to create open-ended and fixed-length Recurring Donations. Choose monthly, quarterly, yearly, or a custom installment schedule."). ### Collect Donations Online Salesforce.org Elevate is a powerful app that accepts and processes donations online, and automatically sends the donation data to NPSP. To learn more about Elevate, see the [Elevate Product Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.elevate.htm&type=5). ### Import Your Data Import your contacts, accounts, and donations into Salesforce with the Salesforce Data Import Wizard or another import tool of your choice. For more information about importing your data, see [How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_di_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer for regular data import and custom integrations. It's also the engine that powers Gift Entry and Elevate."). ## Credit Where Credit is Due Soft credits let you track people who contributed to getting a donation in the door. For example, you might attribute a soft credit to a board member who influenced their friend to donate to your organization. Soft credits let you track people who contributed to getting a donation in the door. For example, you might attribute a soft credit to a board member who influenced their friend to donate to your organization. You can assign soft credits manually, or configure NPSP to assign soft credits automatically based on criteria you choose. To learn more about soft credits, see the [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."). ## Nonprofit Financial Accounting Use General Accounting Units to designate a donation to specific funds, and Accounting Subledger to bridge the gap between accounting and other departments. ### Designate Specific Funds for a Donation To designate a donation (or portions of a donation) to specific funds or programs, NPSP uses General Accounting Units (GAUs). GAUs often map to an organization's chart of accounts or accounting classes. To learn more about GAUs, see [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes."). ### Bridge the Accounting Gap Accounting Subledger is a Salesforce app that helps bridge the gap between accounting and other departments. Accounting Subledger generates debits and credits from Salesforce records—automatically formatted for export to your accounting systems. To learn more, see the [Accounting Subledger Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger.htm&type=5). # Manage Education Cloud Users Add users to Education Cloud and give them the access that they need.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
There are different types of people and roles in an educational institution. Faculty, staff, learners, recruiters, admissions officers, and more. Your role, as a Salesforce administrator, is to make sure that each user gets what they need for their role. Let's get your people using Education Cloud! See [Add a Single User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_new_users.htm&type=5). - **[User Roles and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_user_roles_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider a user's role before assigning permissions. - **[Education Cloud Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them. - **[Permission Set Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_permission_set_details.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud offers features from multiple products, and some components require additional licenses. Identify the recommended permission sets for some basic roles in your institution. - **[Assign an Education Cloud Permission Set License to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Users get different access to Education Cloud based on the license assigned to them. - **[Create and Configure Standard Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_configure_standard_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up standard profiles for Education Cloud users based on their roles in your institution. # Manage Email Campaigns with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to synchronize your Education Cloud CRM data with Marketing Cloud to create email campaigns.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use cases include: - Application deadline reminders - Recruiting appointment details - Class year and fundraising campaigns - Alumni outreach See Also: - [Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm) # Manage Email Communications (Support Staff) Learn how to send and track email using Student Success Hub. - **[Learn About Sending and Tracking Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Emailing students from Student Success Hub is a natural part of managing your student communications. Emails sent from Student Success Hub are text only. They can't include images or attachments. - **[Email Students from the Cases List View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Send an email to one or more students from the Cases list view. ## Learn About Sending and Tracking Email Emailing students from Student Success Hub is a natural part of managing your student communications. Emails sent from Student Success Hub are text only. They can't include images or attachments. To let you easily refer back to communications, Student Success Hub tracks sent emails to students in two locations on the Case record: - In the Activity tab, in the Activity History related list - In the Activity feed component ![The Activity History tab on the left and the Activity feed component on the right](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_emails_tracked.png) ## Email Students from the Cases List View Send an email to one or more students from the Cases list view. 1. Select Cases from the app navigation menu and then select a list such as My Students. 2. Select the checkboxes next to the students that you want to email, and then click **Email Students**. 3. Compose and send the email. # Manage Email for Appointments (Support Staff) Learn how to manage emails related to appointments in Student Success Hub. - **[Email Students from the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From the Appointment Manager, you can send email to any student with an appointment (and a student record Case). - **[Specify Your Appointment Email Notification Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your Student Success Hub administrator has enabled appointment-related email notifications, you can use them to keep tabs on appointment activity or you can turn them off for a quieter inbox. ## Email Students from the Appointment Manager From the Appointment Manager, you can send email to any student with an appointment (and a student record Case). 1. While viewing an appointment in the Appointment Manager, do one of the following: - To email a single student, locate the card with the student's name in the Appointment Details panel, click **Action**, and then click **Send Email**. - To email all of the students in a group appointment, click **Action** under the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels and then click **Send Email to All Attendees**. 2. Write the email and send it. ## Specify Your Appointment Email Notification Preferences If your Student Success Hub administrator has enabled appointment-related email notifications, you can use them to keep tabs on appointment activity or you can turn them off for a quieter inbox. 1. Open your Email Notification Settings from the Appointment Manager or from your User profile. - In the Appointment Manager, click ![The Settings icon in the Appointment Manager](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_settings_icon.png). - In the page header, click your User icon, and then click your name. In the Appointment Availability component, click **Edit My Availability**. 2. Under Email Notification Settings, select the types of appointment emails you want to receive. - Get Appointment Confirmation Emails whenever a student schedules a new appointment with you. - Get appointment update emails whenever someone changes appointment details, such as the time or location. - Get Appointment Cancellation Emails whenever someone cancels an appointment. 3. Save your changes. Keep in mind these guidelines. - When you turn on emails, you get them regardless of who scheduled, updated, or canceled the appointment—whether it's the student, someone handling appointment scheduling on your behalf, or you yourself. - Your personal settings control only whether _you_ receive notifications. Even if you've turned off one or more notification types, students continue to receive them. - In Group Appointments, the organizer only gets email notifications when the number of attendees, including the organizer, is less than or equal to two. # Manage Employment Processes Use Talent Recruitment Management with Education Cloud to make recruiting and hiring intuitive, transparent, and efficient. Give recruiters and Human Resources specialists the tools to manage activities that range from position creation to employment offers. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Features and use cases include: - Streamline the entire recruitment and hiring process. - Define and group occupations, classify positions and pay grades, and add job positions based on your workforce needs. - Manage online job applications with a guided flow to submit applications. - Use approval processes to streamline the review and approval of recruitment requisitions and job postings. - Managing employment offers and onboarding. See Also: - [Talent Recruitment Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.psc_talent_recruitment_management.htm&language=en_US) # Manage Expenditures The Manage Expenditures feature allows you to link a Disbursement record to an existing General Accounting Unit using the GAU Expenditures object to track which account the disbursed funds come from. This is only available if you are an existing NPSP user and installed the NPSP Extension of Outbound Funds Module. - **[Set Up Manage Expenditures](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_expenditures.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage Expenditures is a Lightning component that is available on the Disbursement NPSP Record Page. You can change the location of the component or add it to a different Lightning page, if so desired. - **[Use Manage Expenditures](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_expenditures.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage expenditures from the App Launcher in Outbound Funds Module. ## Set Up Manage Expenditures Manage Expenditures is a Lightning component that is available on the Disbursement NPSP Record Page. You can change the location of the component or add it to a different Lightning page, if so desired. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Select **Disbursement** from the list of objects. 4. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 5. Select **Disbursement NPSP Record Page**. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. Select **manageExpenditures** from the Custom Component list, then drag it into the Lightning page. 8. Click **Save**. ## Use Manage Expenditures Manage expenditures from the App Launcher in Outbound Funds Module. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Funding Programs**. 2. Select a Funding Program that has at least one Disbursement record. 3. Click **Disbursements**. 4. Select a Disbursement. ![Disbursement record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/use_manage_expend_1.png) 5. Enter a value of an existing General Account Unit to tie this Disbursement to, then select it. ![Select a General Account Unit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/use_manage_expend_2.png) 6. Enter an Amount or a Percentage to disburse based on that General Account Unit. Notice the Total Amount Remaining updates based on the amount of the Disbursement. ![Enter amount to disburse](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/use_manage_expend_3.png) 7. Optionally, if the Disbursement uses more than one General Account Unit, click **Add Row**. 8. Optionally, to remove an entry, click **Delete**. 9. Click **Save Updates** to submit your allocations. 10. Refresh the page then select the **GAU Expenditures** tab to see the new record.![View GAU Expenditures record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/use_manage_expend_4.png) # Manage Funding Programs Create funding programs and then upload files for grantseekers. - **[Create a Funding Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_programs_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Funding Program can represent an overall thematic initiative or be a parent program to several children programs. This needs to be set up before applicants can apply for funding. - **[Upload Files to Funding Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_programs_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** File attachments, such as an FAQ, can be added to a Funding Program for grantseekers to view. ## Create a Funding Program A Funding Program can represent an overall thematic initiative or be a parent program to several children programs. This needs to be set up before applicants can apply for funding. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Funding Programs**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Funding Program Name. For example, Community Impact. 4. Optionally, configure additional details. 5. Click **Save**. Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Outbound Funds Create a Funding Program and Funding Request](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jjnesj1nckg). ## Upload Files to Funding Program File attachments, such as an FAQ, can be added to a Funding Program for grantseekers to view. This file is now visible to any site users who have Read access to the Funding Program. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Funding Programs**. 2. Select a Funding Program. 3. Click **Files**. 4. Click **Upload Files**. 5. Select a file, then click **Open**. 6. Click **Done**. 7. Click the file. 8. Click **Share**. 9. Click **Who Can Access**. 10. Click **Disabled** next to Customer Access. This switches the file to Enabled. 11. Click **Done**. # Manage Funding Programs Manage funding programs so that grantseekers can apply for funds. - **[Manage Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_programs_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create funding programs and then upload files for grantseekers. # Manage Funding Programs Create funding programs from the App Launcher in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Create a Funding Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Funding Program can represent an overall thematic initiative or be a parent program to several children programs. This needs to be set up before applicants can apply for funding. ## Create a Funding Program A Funding Program can represent an overall thematic initiative or be a parent program to several children programs. This needs to be set up before applicants can apply for funding. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Funding Programs**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Funding Program Name. For example, Community Impact. 4. Optionally, configure additional details. 5. Click **Save**. Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Outbound Funds Create a Funding Program and Funding Request](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jjnesj1nckg). # Manage Funding Request Roles Track the people related to Funding Requests. - **[Create a Funding Request Role](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_request_roles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Funding Request Role allows you to track people associated with a Funding Request. For example, you can create Funding Request Roles for multiple individuals at a grantseeking organization. ## Create a Funding Request Role The Funding Request Role allows you to track people associated with a Funding Request. For example, you can create Funding Request Roles for multiple individuals at a grantseeking organization. 1. While viewing a Funding Request, click **Create Funding Request Role**. ![Funding Request record with Create Funding Request Role button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/create_funding_request_role_1.png) 2. Search for or create a Contact. 3. Select the Status. For example, **Current** for active Contacts, or **Former** for inactive Contacts. 4. Select a Role. 5. Click **Save**. ![Create Funding Request Role](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/create_funding_request_role_2.png) # Manage Funding Requests Set up funding requests to track applications, associated constituents, and requirements and create disbursements. - **[Create Funding Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_request.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track grantseekers’ applications by creating Funding Requests. - **[Manage Funding Request Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_request_roles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track the people related to Funding Requests. - **[Invite a Grantseeker to Apply](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_invite_grantseeker_to_apply.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ask grantseekers to apply for a Funding Request. - **[Add or Remove Funding Request Collaborators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_add_remove_funding_req_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage collaborators for a Funding Request application. - **[Manage Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create and complete requirements in Grant Management. - **[Manage Disbursements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_disbursements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up disbursements in Grants Management to track outgoing funds. # Manage Funding Requests Set up funding requests to track applications, associated constituents, requirements, and create disbursements in Outbound Funds Module. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Bill Corkill, Emily Jakubiak, and Nick Lindberg, who also contributed to this documentation. - **[Create a Funding Request](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Once the Funding Program is defined, you can create a Funding Request to track the applications. - **[Create a Funding Request Role](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Funding Request Role allows you to track people associated with a Funding Request. - **[Create a Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Requirements allow organizations to track deliverables or milestones on a Funding Request before it’s approved or closed. - **[Create a Disbursement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Disbursement helps schedule and track outgoing funds to funding recipients. It’s important to note this doesn’t perform the act of disbursement, such as depositing funds into a recipient's bank account. ## Create a Funding Request Once the Funding Program is defined, you can create a Funding Request to track the applications. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Funding Requests**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Funding Request Name. For example, Grantwood City Food Bank 4. Optionally, configure additional details. 5. Click **Save** Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Outbound Funds Create a Funding Program and a Funding Request](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jjnesj1nckg). ## Create a Funding Request Role The Funding Request Role allows you to track people associated with a Funding Request. 1. While viewing a Funding Request, click **Create Funding Request Role**. ![Funding Request record with Create Funding Request Role button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_funding_request_role_1.png) 2. Search for or create a Contact. 3. Select the Status. For example, **Current** for active Contacts, or **Former** for inactive Contacts. 4. Select a Role. 5. Click **Save**. ![Create Funding Request Role](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_funding_request_role_2.png) ## Create a Requirement Requirements allow organizations to track deliverables or milestones on a Funding Request before it’s approved or closed. For example, you may require an application, letter of intent, and proposed budget to be submitted before the Funding Request is reviewed. You can add these as Requirements that can be managed and tracked. 1. While viewing a Funding Request, click the **Requirements** related list. ![Select Requirements on the Funding Request record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_requirement_1.png) 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Requirement Name. For example, Application. 4. Select a Primary Contact. 5. Select a Type. 6. Next to Assigned, search for and select the grantseeker user. 7. If a disbursement has been made, select or add it from Disbursement. 8. Enter a Due Date. This is when the Primary Contact is required to submit their Requirement information. 9. If completed, enter a Completed Date. 10. Select a Status. 11. Select **Is Add Files Visible?** to allow a grantseeker to upload files to the Requirement. A grantseeker won’t be able to upload files to the Requirement if this isn’t enabled. 12. Optionally, enter additional information in Requirements. 13. Click **Save**. ![Complete fields on the Requirement record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_requirements_2.png) Repeat for as many Requirements as needed. ## Create a Disbursement A Disbursement helps schedule and track outgoing funds to funding recipients. It’s important to note this doesn’t perform the act of disbursement, such as depositing funds into a recipient's bank account. 1. While viewing a Funding Request that has an Awarded Amount, click **Create Disbursements**. ![Create Disbursement on the Funding Request](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_disbursement_1.png) 2. Enter the Number of Disbursements. For example, enter 4 for four separate payments to the awardee. 3. Select the disbursement frequency in Interval and Period. For example, an Interval of 1 and Period of Month indicates one payment every month for 4 months. 4. Select a First Date when the initial disbursement begins. 5. Enter the total Amount of the Funding Request to disburse, if different from the Amount Awarded. You can’t disburse funds greater than the Amount Awarded, but you can disburse less. 6. Click **Calculate** to calculate a disbursement schedule based on the Number of Disbursements, Interval, Period, First Date, and Amount fields. 7. Click **Save**. ![Schedule Disbursements](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/create_disbursement_2.png) # Manage Gifts Review NPSP documentation about managing donation allocations and single and multiple payment donations. Because GEM requires NPSP, you can use standard NPSP methods to create gifts or manage the details of existing gifts. For more information, check out this NPSP documentation. - [Add a Single-Payment Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_single-payment_donation.htm) - [Manage Multiple-Payment Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm) - [Create and Manage Donation Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm) - **[Payment Allocations Sync Both Ways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_manage_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how GEM syncs allocations between Payments and Opportunities. ## Payment Allocations Sync Both Ways Learn how GEM syncs allocations between Payments and Opportunities. GEM keeps Payment Allocations and Opportunity Allocations in sync. If you make a change in one location, GEM also updates the other. For example, if you change an Opportunity's GAU Allocations from a 50/50 split to a 60/40 split, the Payment Allocations for all unpaid Payments on that Opportunity are automatically changed to a 60/40 split. If you change Payment Allocations first, however, the result is slightly different. Instead, Opportunity Allocations are updated to reflect the current state of all Payments for that Opportunity (excluding written off Payments). For example, let's say you created a $1000 gift, split into two equal Payments and two equal Allocations. That's two $500 Payments, each with two $250 Allocations. If you change the second Payment so that all $500 goes to a single Allocation, the Opportunity Allocations are updated to show $750/75% on one Allocation (the GAU's current allocation across all Payments) and $250/25% on the other. Regardless of whether you change the Opportunity Allocations or the Payment Allocations, the resulting sync occurs only once, in one direction at a time. So don't worry; if you make a change to a specific Payment Allocation, that change doesn't sync back to the rest of your Payments! ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_important.png) Important These synchronized updates only affect Payments that aren't yet paid. Also, deleting a Payment causes the Opportunity Allocations and Payment Allocations to fall out of sync. Because deletion doesn't trigger a sync, you must then use Manage Allocations to update the appropriate Allocations and force the sync. # Manage Grants in Education Cloud Use Grantmaking with Education Cloud to manage external funding applications and internal research grants. Track funding awards, manage budgets, automate processes, measure impact, and provide an online portal for applicants to find and apply for funding opportunities. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Agentforce 1 Edition with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_grantmaking.htm&language=en_US) # Manage Grantseeking Opportunities Track Grants your organization has applied for and Payments received for a Grant, and manage the deliverables to meet the funding organization's application and reporting requirements. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Manage Grants](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=paIp2ScIoS4). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: If this feature isn't configured in your org, or something seems to be missing, see the [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm) for a list of major features in NPSP and how to configure them. - **[Grants Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grants are donations that typically come from philanthropic organizations and are usually paid out separately from when they are awarded. Grants are often tied to specific programs and deliverables with important reporting and documentation deadlines that require thoughtful management. - **[Create a Grant Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce stores Grants as Opportunity records, just like donations. Grants are usually given by institutions, and not families. However, you can associate a Grant record with a Household Account, if appropriate. - **[Manage Deliverables](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As you communicate with the funding organization and your Grant moves along in its process from Prospecting to Awarded, you'll want to keep key data on the Grant record up to date. In Nonprofit Success Pack, you keep track of these deadlines by creating separate Deliverable records. - **[Update a Grant Record When a Grant is Awarded](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You have received word that your grant has been Awarded. Congratulations! Now you need to update your work-in-progress Grant record to indicate that you expect payment and when. There may be additional reporting requirements that you need to keep track of as well. - **[Schedule the Grant Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Often, grants are disbursed as partial payments over a fixed schedule. Once you've marked the Grant record with the Awarded stage (or a stage where the Type is Closed/Won), Nonprofit Success Pack may assume that the record contains only Paid payments. When the Grant record is in this state, you can't schedule additional Payments, so you'll need to edit the record slightly before you can schedule the Grant Payments. - **[Receive or Write Off Grant Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Record details of grant payments and handle grant schedule changes. - **[Associate a New Grant record with a Previous Grant](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As great relationships are maintained with funders, Grants are often renewed year after year. Each year or funding period, create a new Grant Opportunity to take advantage of those great relationships. To keep your Grant records related to each other, update the Previous Grant/Gift Opportunity and Is Grant Renewal fields for easy access to historic records. - **[Track Grant Communications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's not all about deliverables and deadlines. Your relationship with your grant maker is also critically important to manage. For example, what did your colleague discuss in yesterday's conversation with the Program Officer? What follow up is needed? In general, how is that relationship going? ## Grants Overview Grants are donations that typically come from philanthropic organizations and are usually paid out separately from when they are awarded. Grants are often tied to specific programs and deliverables with important reporting and documentation deadlines that require thoughtful management. In Nonprofit Success Pack, nonprofits use the Opportunity object to track their grant seeking activities. Foundations, philanthropies, and other grant makers should explore [Grants Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.grants_management.htm) from Salesforce.org. Grants Management helps foundations provide a portal where grantseekers can find funding opportunities, apply for funding, view their application status, and submit ongoing progress reports for awarded grants all in one place. ## Create a Grant Opportunity Salesforce stores Grants as Opportunity records, just like donations. Grants are usually given by institutions, and not families. However, you can associate a Grant record with a Household Account, if appropriate. 1. In the navigation bar, click **Accounts**. 2. Find the Account with which you want to associate the Grant. If you haven't yet created an Account for the organization, create a new one. 3. On the Opportunities related list, click **New**. 4. From the list of Record Types, select Grant and click **Next**. 5. Salesforce fills in the Opportunity Name and Account Name by default. Enter the following information for your Grant record: - **Requested Amount**—The amount you are requesting for the Grant. Because the ultimate amount of the Grant may differ from the requested amount, you might want to leave the Amount field blank for now. - **Stage**—Select Prospecting. As long as you don't select a Closed/Won stage such as Awarded, you'll be able to schedule payments for this Grant record. - **Close Date**—Select a date that indicates when you expect to receive the grant. Don't worry if you don't know the exact date right now. For example, you might want to enter a date that you think is somewhere within the same fiscal quarter. That way your quarterly forecast reporting can include this grant. You can always edit the date later and the changes are tracked in history. - **Campaign, Grant Requirements Website, Program Area(s)**—Enter if appropriate. 6. Click **Save**. The new Grant Opportunity is now associated with the Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Consider exploring the free, open-source [Grants Content Kit](https://github.com/SFDO-Community/GrantGuides/blob/main/README.md) to manage the text you use in your grant applications. ## Manage Deliverables As you communicate with the funding organization and your Grant moves along in its process from Prospecting to Awarded, you'll want to keep key data on the Grant record up to date. In Nonprofit Success Pack, you keep track of these deadlines by creating separate Deliverable records. Let's say your organization needs to have a Letter of Intent (LOI) for this ABC Telecom grant issued by November 1st. If the LOI is approved, you'll then need to apply for the grant by December 1st, for a decision on January 30th. Here is what you'll need to do to make sure everything is completed on time. 1. Open a Grant record that's been set to Prospecting. 2. In the Deliverables related list, click **New**. 3. Give the deliverable a Name and add additional detail. Be sure to indicate the Due Date. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Enter additional Deliverable records. You can enter as many as is appropriate. Notice that Salesforce automatically updates the Next Deliverable Date field on the main Grant Opportunity record to reflect the next deadline date. ### Best Practices for Grant Records Be sure to update Deliverable records as deadlines are met. For example, in this case even though the deadline was 11/1/2016, we note that it was in fact submitted successfully on 10/21/2016. Feel free to use this record to assign tasks to other staff members or attach relevant files. For more information, see [Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=tasks.htm&language=en_US) or [Attach Files to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=collab_files_attach_records.htm) in Salesforce Help. Also, keep in mind that when you populate a Close Date and save a Deliverable record, Salesforce automatically updates the main Grant Opportunity record to show the date of the next deadline. Be sure to also keep the Opportunity Stage updated. For example, when a Letter of Intent is submitted, update the Stage to LOI Submitted. You can use Salesforce workflow rules or Process Builder to automate this functionality. ## Update a Grant Record When a Grant is Awarded You have received word that your grant has been Awarded. Congratulations! Now you need to update your work-in-progress Grant record to indicate that you expect payment and when. There may be additional reporting requirements that you need to keep track of as well. 1. Navigate to the Opportunity record for the Grant that's been awarded, and then click **Edit**. 2. Enter the amount of the final, total grant amount in **Amount** field. This number does not necessarily have to be the same as the Requested Amount previously entered. 3. Change the Stage of the Grant Opportunity to **Awarded**. Doing this will tell Salesforce to assign the Opportunity a Closed/Won state. The total amount will then roll up to the grantor's Account record. 4. [Manage Grantseeking Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track Grants your organization has applied for and Payments received for a Grant, and manage the deliverables to meet the funding organization's application and reporting requirements."). 5. If you've enabled GAU Allocations in NPSP Settings, you should double-check the GAU Allocations related list to see that your allocations are correct. You can also add allocations at this point to indicate how funds should be distributed within your organization. See [Allocations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_donation_allocations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allocate donations into General Accounting Units (GAUs) if you want to set funds aside for specific purposes.") for more information. 6. Update the Grant record's **Grant Contract Number, Grant Contract Date, Grant Period Start Date, Grant Period End Date** as appropriate. 7. Add additional Deliverable records to track post-award requirements such as when interim reports are due. ## Schedule the Grant Payments Often, grants are disbursed as partial payments over a fixed schedule. Once you've marked the Grant record with the Awarded stage (or a stage where the Type is Closed/Won), Nonprofit Success Pack may assume that the record contains only Paid payments. When the Grant record is in this state, you can't schedule additional Payments, so you'll need to edit the record slightly before you can schedule the Grant Payments. 1. On the Grant record, go to the Payments related list and edit any existing Payment record to uncheck the Paid field. 2. Return to the Grant record and schedule payments. On the Payments related list, click **Schedule Payments**. The Schedule Payments screen appears. 3. To create a quarterly payment schedule over a single year, enter the following information: - For **# of Payments,** select 4. - For **Date of First Payment**, enter the date you expect the first payment. - For **Interval**, select 3 and Month. - For **Payment Method**, select how you anticipate the payments will be made. Leave blank if unsure. 4. Click **Calculate Payments**. The Payments to be Created appear at the bottom of the page. 5. Accept the default calculations or modify them as you see fit to match the grant payment dates. In the example above, we entered the date and checked the Paid checkbox for the first quarterly installment of this grant. 6. Click **Create Payments** to create the four Payment records associated with the grant. The Grant record has been updated to show the total completed payments and remaining balance. ## Receive or Write Off Grant Payments Record details of grant payments and handle grant schedule changes. - As you receive payments, to record the details (such as payment date): In the Payments related list next to a payment, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then **Edit**. - If the grant schedule changes or you won't receive the rest of the grant for some reason, you can write off an individual payment: In the Payments related list next to the payment, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then **Edit**. - To write off (that is, cancel) _all_ of the remaining payments in the Payments related list: Click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then **Write Off Payments**. For more information, see [Manage Pledges](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Track and manage pledges for gifts with multiple payments."). ## Associate a New Grant record with a Previous Grant As great relationships are maintained with funders, Grants are often renewed year after year. Each year or funding period, create a new Grant Opportunity to take advantage of those great relationships. To keep your Grant records related to each other, update the Previous Grant/Gift Opportunity and Is Grant Renewal fields for easy access to historic records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Dennis Jeske and Sam Knox for their great contributions to this documentation. ## Track Grant Communications It's not all about deliverables and deadlines. Your relationship with your grant maker is also critically important to manage. For example, what did your colleague discuss in yesterday's conversation with the Program Officer? What follow up is needed? In general, how is that relationship going? Salesforce offers several ways to track and provide visibility into this kind of information. We'll look at three ways here: - Tasks and Activities - Notes - Chatter ### Tasks and Activities Salesforce Tasks and Activities helps you track phone calls, emails, and other interactions. You can use Tasks and Activities to record details of a conversation that already took place—or set a reminder to make a call in a week. Let's say you want a reminder about an important, upcoming call with your Program Officer, Darnesha Goodman, at Starbucks Corporation. To create the Task: 1. Navigate to the Grant record. 2. In the Activity tab, click **Add**. 3. Fill out the Task details: - **Subject**: A short phrase describing the Task. - **Due Date**: The date by which the Task should be completed. - **Name**: Optional link to a Contact record. Populating this field will make the Task available from the Contact record. - **Related To**: The record this Task is related to. In this example, the Grant record. - **Assigned To**: The person responsible for the Task. You can assign the Task to yourself or anyone else in your organization. - **Status**: Tracks the progress of the Task, for example, not started, in progress, or complete. 4. Click **Save**. Once you've completed the call, mark the Task as complete: 1. Navigate to the Grant record where you created the Task. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also access all of your Tasks in one place from the Tasks tab. This can be a handy way to view your Tasks, especially if you have open Tasks across different Grant records. 2. On the Activities tab, in the list of Upcoming and Overdue, select the checkbox next to your Task. When you do so, Salesforce updates the Task status to completed. To learn more about Tasks and Activities, see [Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.tasks.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help and Training. ### Notes Notes (formerly Enhanced Notes) is a versatile, rich text editor. Think of Notes as a handy "scratch pad" where you can record information about the conversation you just had with your Program Officer. You can create a Note independent of any record, or attach a Note to one or more records such as Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To use Notes, your admin must enable Notes for your organization, and configure page layouts to include Notes. For more information, see [Set Up Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.notes_admin_setup.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help. To create a Note: 1. Click the Global Actions menu in the Lightning Experience header and choose New Note. 2. Enter a subject in the subject area, and the information you want to record in the Notes area. Use the rich text editor to format your Note, and optionally add images. 3. Optionally, click **Add to Records** to attach the Note to any record. Repeat to attach to multiple records. 4. Click **Done**. For more information on how to use Notes, see [Pro Tip: Boost Note-Taking With Enhanced Notes in Lightning Experience.](https://admin.salesforce.com/blog/2017/pro-tip-boost-note-taking-enhanced-notes-lightning-experience) ### Chatter Chatter is Salesforce's tool for internal communication at your organization. Use Chatter to let your colleagues know you just had a productive conversation with your Program Officer, or to remind them of an upcoming event. Unlike Tasks and Activities, Chatter has no required fields, making it a lightweight way to quickly post information. Chatter works like popular social media tools—you can at mention people in your organization, colleagues can respond to your posts, and you can include images in your post. You can also include links to any Salesforce records. To add a Chatter post to a Grant record: 1. From the Grant record, click on the **Chatter** tab. 2. Enter your post. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note To mention someone in your organization, type "@" followed by the person's name. To create a link to a record, type "**/**" followed by the record name. 3. Click **Share**. To learn more about Chatter, see [Chatter for Lightning Experience](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/chatter_basics_for_users). # Manage Guest Access to Your Portal To show unauthenticated site visitors information about your institution's academic schedule, student programs, financial aid options, course catalog, and so on, give guest users read access to the relevant records.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To manage Experience Cloud guest access: | Education Cloud Full Access | You can give guest users read access to these Education Cloud records: - Academic Session - Academic Term - Academic Year - Application Timeline - Contacts - Course Offering - Course Offering Schedule - Educational Info Request - Gift Batch - Gift Commitment - Gift Commitment Schedule - Gift Default Designation - Gift Designation - Gift Entry - Gift Refund - Gift Soft Credit - Gift Transaction - Gift Transaction Designation - Gift Tribute - Learning - Learning Achievement - Learning Course - Learning Foundation Item - Learning Outcome Item - Learning Program - Learning Program Plan - Learning Program Plan Requirement - Outreach Source Code - Outreach Summary - Surveys - Survey Invitations - Survey Responses 1. Configure permissions for guest access to your portal. 1. In Experience Builder, click **Settings**, and then select **General**. 2. In the Guest User Profile section, click the profile for your site. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Under General User Permissions, turn on Access Education Cloud as Guest. 5. Under Standard Object Permissions, select the permissions that you want to give each object. 6. Save your changes. 2. Create sharing rules for each object that you want to grant access to guest users. See [Create Guest User Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_rules_guest.htm&type=5). # Manage Notes (Support Staff) Learn how to control the visibility of support notes, work with shared notes, and more in Student Success Hub. - **[Control the Visibility of Your Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We talk a lot about context when it comes to Notes: Who or what is the Note related to? Whether it's a student Case, a Success Plan, an Alert—or not related to any record at all—the relationship determines who can see the Note. It's important to understand the visibility settings and how to restrict or expand visibility. - **[Share a Note with Another User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can share a Note with any User (but not with a Contact). Sharing gives the User access to view the Note only, not access to view any of the records related to the Note unless the User otherwise has access to the related record. If the Note is related to a student record, the User you share the Note with can be, but doesn't have to be, a member of the student's success team. - **[Access Notes Shared with You](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If someone shares a Note with you, you receive an email notification. Follow the link in the email to view the Note. Or, go to a Notes list view and select the Shared with Me list view. - **[Manually Relate a Note to a Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes a Note contains information about other people or activities in Student Success Hub. You can relate the Note to other records so that it's visible to the people who need to see it. For example, a Note about student Elijah mentions his tutor, Amanda. Let's relate the Note to Amanda's record in Student Success Hub. - **[Revert to an Earlier Version of a Note](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From the Notes page you can see earlier versions of a Note, and revert to one of the earlier versions if you need to. ## Control the Visibility of Your Notes We talk a lot about context when it comes to Notes: Who or what is the Note related to? Whether it's a student Case, a Success Plan, an Alert—or not related to any record at all—the relationship determines who can see the Note. It's important to understand the visibility settings and how to restrict or expand visibility. A Note's visibility is clearly marked. Visibility Set by Record Visibility Set by Record means that anyone who has access to view the record that the Note is related to can view the Note, too. For example, a Note related to a student record Case is visible to any User who has access to view the Case. Notes can be related to multiple records. Private Private means the Note is just for your own files and can't be viewed by other support staff unless you [selectively share it](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to control the visibility of support notes, work with shared notes, and more in Student Success Hub.") with people who need to know. There's one exception: Your Student Success Hub administrator has full access to all Notes, including private Notes. In higher ed Student Success Hub orgs, students can't see Notes in the portals, either. To make a Note private, create it without any relationship to another record. Or, restrict the Note's visibility when you relate it to other records. On the Note, click **Add to Records**, search for and select the record you want to relate the Note to, and select **Prevent note from being viewed by other users with access to this record**. ## Share a Note with Another User You can share a Note with any User (but not with a Contact). Sharing gives the User access to view the Note only, not access to view any of the records related to the Note unless the User otherwise has access to the related record. If the Note is related to a student record, the User you share the Note with can be, but doesn't have to be, a member of the student's success team. The Users you share with receive an email notification about the shared Note. 1. Open the Note and click **Share**. 2. In the Share With field, make sure the People icon is selected. Then, search for and select one or more Users to share the Note with. 3. To restrict the Note from being shared further, expand the Who Can Access section and select **Prevent others from sharing and unsharing**. 4. Add an optional message. 5. Click **Share**. ## Access Notes Shared with You If someone shares a Note with you, you receive an email notification. Follow the link in the email to view the Note. Or, go to a Notes list view and select the Shared with Me list view. ![Look in the Notes list view called Shared with Me](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_list_shared_with_me.png) 1. To share a Note that's been shared with you, click **Share** on the Note. 2. In the Share Note window, expand the **Who Can Access** section. 3. If the User you want to share with isn't in the list of those who have Viewer access, add them in the Share With field. 4. Click **Share**. If the User who originally shared with you prevented further sharing, you see an error. ## Manually Relate a Note to a Record Sometimes a Note contains information about other people or activities in Student Success Hub. You can relate the Note to other records so that it's visible to the people who need to see it. For example, a Note about student Elijah mentions his tutor, Amanda. Let's relate the Note to Amanda's record in Student Success Hub. 1. Open the Note, and then click **Add to Records**. In this example, the Note is already related to Elijah's student record 00001026. ![The Add to Records window with a callout on the Records with this note section](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_add_record.png) 2. Click the selector in the search field and select the type of record that you're relating the Note to. In this example, we choose Contact because a Chemistry tutor would be represented by a Contact record. ![Click the selector and choose the type of record that you're relating the Note to](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_share_contact.png) 3. Search for and select the appropriate record. In this example, we specify Elijah's tutor, Amanda. ![The Contact Amanda Peterson selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_share_contact_specified.png) 4. To relate the Note to additional records, click in the search field next to Amanda's name. Then, search for another Contact record, or select and search for a different type of record. 5. Click **Add**. On Amanda's Contact record, you'll see the Note in the Notes related list—just as you'd expect. ![The Notes related list on the Contact record shows the manually related Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notes_contact_related_list.png) ## Revert to an Earlier Version of a Note From the Notes page you can see earlier versions of a Note, and revert to one of the earlier versions if you need to. 1. Click the app navigation menu arrow and select **Notes**. 2. Select a Note from the list view. - To see revisions to the Note, click **View Version History**. - To revert to a previous version of the Note, click **Restore**. Otherwise, click **Back**. Even after reverting, you don't lose the history of previous versions. They all remain available from the View Version History menu. # Manage NPSP Addresses Learn about address changes, how to manage the default address, use a seasonal address, and mark an address as undeliverable in NPSP. - **[Address Management Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_address_management_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how NPSP can help you classify, track, update, and verify addresses for your constituents. - **[Add or Update an Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_update_addr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add or update an address for Contacts, Households, or Organizations in NPSP. - **[Specify a Default Mailing Address for a Household or Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_specify_default_mail_addr_for_household_or_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Indicate when a mailing address is the default for the household and contact.Learn how to specify a default address in NPSP. - **[Override the Default Household Address for a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_override_the_default_address_for_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have a Contact who prefers to receive their individual mailings at a different address than the default Household address, you can accommodate them by setting an Address Override. - **[Mark an Address as Undeliverable](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_undeliverable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To remove bad addresses from your mailing lists, mark them as undeliverable. - **[Specify a Seasonal Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_specify_seasonal_addr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to set up a Seasonal Address. # Manage NPSP Constituents Manage constituents in NPSP with Household and Organization Accounts, Contacts, and Addresses. - **[Manage NPSP Household and Organization Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_household_and_org_accts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage Contacts, Households, Organization Accounts, and Affiliations in the Household Account Model. - **[Manage NPSP Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add and remove Contacts, change the primary Contact for a Household, merge Contacts, and perform other Contact management tasks. - **[Manage NPSP Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about address changes, how to manage the default address, use a seasonal address, and mark an address as undeliverable in NPSP. # Manage NPSP Contacts Add and remove Contacts, change the primary Contact for a Household, merge Contacts, and perform other Contact management tasks. - **[Add or Remove a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_remove_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to add or remove constituent records from a household account record. - **[Change the Primary Contact for a Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_the_primary_contact_for_a_household.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Primary Contact field specifies the primary point of contact for Household Accounts. - **[Mark a Contact as Do Not Contact or Deceased](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_a_contact_as_do_not_contact_or_deceased.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At some point, you will have a contact who is deceased or a contact who has asked to be removed from your lists and not contacted again. In both of these situations, you want to remove the person from your mailing lists. For a deceased contact, you also want to make sure that the contact's name doesn't appear in the Household naming fields. - **[Find and Merge Duplicate Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Contact Merge to find and merge duplicate constituent records. - **[Address Potential Duplicate Contacts from the Contact Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_address_potential_duplicate_contacts_from_the_contact_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Potential Duplicates component directs users to the NPSP Contact Merge page where they can review, select, and merge potential duplicate contacts. - **[Create, Edit, and View Contact Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_edit_and_view_relationships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relationships in Nonprofit Success Pack connect one Contact to another. When you create these connections, you can also define the type of relationship (Friend, Family, Mother, Daughter, and so on), and the relationship status (Current, Former). - **[Specify a Preferred Phone Number and Email Address for a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_specify_preferred_phone_and_email_for_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce comes out-of-box with one email and one phone field. This is a great start, but often people have more than one phone and email. NPSP adds several custom phone and email fields, so that you can track a Contact's business and personal emails, as well as mobile, office, and home phones. NPSP also lets you specify a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone. - **[Why and How to Use Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization. Once you're confident the person is going to donate, volunteer, or engage with your organization in some way, convert that Lead to a Contact or Account. - **[Convert a Lead to a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_a_lead_to_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality to convert a Lead to a Contact. - **[Primary Contact vs. Primary Affiliation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_primary_contact_vs_primary_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Primary Contact is the one go-to contact for all communication with an Organization or Household. A Primary Affiliation is the Account that the Contact is associated with more than any other Account, such as their employer. - **[Deleting Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deleting_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article describes how deletion works in a new Trial org with NPSP. # Manage NPSP Household and Organization Accounts Manage Contacts, Households, Organization Accounts, and Affiliations in the Household Account Model. - **[What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend. - **[Add a Household Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_household_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a Household Account automatically by creating a new Contact. - **[Merge or Split Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_or_split_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Merge two different household accounts into one, and split one household into different accounts. - **[Add and Manage Organization Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. Learn how to add and manage Organization Accounts. - **[Create an Affiliation with an Organization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_an_affiliation_with_an_organization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Affiliations in NPSP to track constituent relationships with organizations, including board memberships, employment, and foundation relationships. - **[What Happens When I Delete an Account?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_happens_when_i_delete_an_account.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you delete an Account, NPSP deletes associated Recurring Donations, Allocations, and Relationships in addition to standard Salesforce detail records. # Manage NPSP Programs Program Management Module (PMM) is a simple program management tool designed to work in any Salesforce environment. Use PMM to track your organization's programs and services, and follow the journeys of the constituents involved with your programs. - **[Manage Your Programs with NPSP and Program Management Module (PMM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_progs_pmm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Program Management Module (PMM) to NPSP to include program management in your nonprofit's super-hero utility belt. # Manage Pledges Track and manage pledges for gifts with multiple payments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Manage Multiple Payments](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qaoR0ZiAyiw). - **[What is a Pledge?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the nonprofit world, a pledge is a promise to donate a set amount of money in installments over a period of time. This article explains how to track your pledges with Opportunities and Payments. - **[Enter a Pledge and Expected Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's see how you can use Opportunities and Payments to set up that $400 pledge from your donor, with a total of four $100 payments scheduled every three months. - **[Write Off One or More Scheduled Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_pledges.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When donors pledge a certain amount and cannot keep the payment schedule, or are unable to send in one or more payments, you can write off (i.e. "cancel") the payments you're expecting so that you can keep accurate donation records. ## What is a Pledge? In the nonprofit world, a pledge is a promise to donate a set amount of money in installments over a period of time. This article explains how to track your pledges with Opportunities and Payments. In the nonprofit world, a pledge is a promise to donate a set amount of money in installments over a period of time. With a pledge, you know the total amount of the gift from your donor, along with their payment schedule. For example, a donor agrees to pledge a total of $400 to your organization, paid in $100 installments every 3 months. This article explains how to track your pledges with Opportunities and Payments. This is the way to go if your organization uses accrual accounting, where all income is recorded when it's pledged rather than when it's received. For information on tracking pledges based on other accounting methods, see [Recurring Donations versus Opportunity Payments (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_vs_opp_donation_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The term \"Recurring Donations\" in the nonprofit world often brings to mind a donor who has committed to giving a financial gift to your organization multiple times. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, you can track this type of donation in different ways."). ## Enter a Pledge and Expected Payments Let's see how you can use Opportunities and Payments to set up that $400 pledge from your donor, with a total of four $100 payments scheduled every three months. 1. Create an Opportunity for the total amount that the donor has pledged. In this example, $400. You can create a new Opportunity from the Opportunities tab or from a button on the Contact or Account record (recommended). When you do the latter, Salesforce automatically pre-populates the new Opportunity with related information. 2. Set the **Stage** field to **Pledged** (or any appropriate open stage). 3. Set the **Close Date** depending on your standard practices. For example, in our quarterly example, if the first donation comes in on 4/15/2019, we set the Close Date to 4/15/2019—the start of the pledge. 4. Save the Opportunity record. 5. On the new Opportunity record, click the Related tab, then scroll to the Payments section and click **Schedule Payments**. ![Schedule Payments button on the Payments related list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/multi-pymt_dontns_schedule.png) 6. In the Create a Payment Schedule section: - Set the **# of Payments** fields to 4 (quarterly). By default, you can schedule up to 12 payments for a single donation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Depending on the needs of your organization, you can change the maximum number of payments from the NPSP Settings page (**Donations** | **Payments** | **Maximum Payments**). - Set the **Date of First Payment** to the starting date for your quarterly payments (the date when the first payment comes in). - Set the payment **Interval Number** to the amount of time between scheduled payments and the **Period** to the unit of time you want to use. For quarterly payments, the Number is 3 and the Period is Month. - Select Credit Card, Checks, or Cash as the default **Payment Method** depending on the mode of donation. ![Schedule Payments for this Opportunity](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/multi-pymt_dontns_createpaymnts.png) 7. Click **Calculate Payments**. Salesforce creates an editable list of scheduled payments. For our quarterly donation example, the payment calculator will create 4 payments with the first payment scheduled on 4/15/2019, the second one scheduled three months later (the payment interval) on 7/15/2019, and so on. At this point, you can adjust the payment amounts and dates on the payment schedule. This is helpful, for example, when you know that the final payment will be a different amount, or if the one of the payments will come in on different date. ![Payments to be created](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/multi-pymt_dontns_paymtstobe.png) 8. Click **Create Payments**. On the Opportunity Related tab, the Payments related list shows the payment schedule. ![Payments related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/multi-pymt_dontns_paymtsrl.png) 9. When a payment comes in, click **Edit** from the drop-down to the right of the Payment in the list, select **Paid**, and then save your changes. 10. When the final payment comes in and the full donation amount has been paid, the Opportunity is automatically closed. Its Stage is set to the value selected in the **Opportunity Stage for When Fully Paid** field in NPSP Settings, under **Donations** | **Payments**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Occasionally, you may receive a Payment whose amount is more than what was originally scheduled. If a Payment is marked as paid, and it pushes the total amount of Payments over the Opportunity Amount, the Opportunity will automatically be closed. According to the example above, Elise Malloy made a $400 donation that was scheduled to be paid out in four Payments. She paid the first and second as planned, and was scheduled to make her third Payment of $100 on 10/15/19 and her fourth Payment of $100 on 1/15/20. Let's say that instead, Elise pays $250 on 10/15/19. The 10/15/19 Payment will be marked as Paid and, since this Payment pushes the Opportunity Amount over the original $400 donation, the Opportunity will automatically be closed. ## Write Off One or More Scheduled Payments When donors pledge a certain amount and cannot keep the payment schedule, or are unable to send in one or more payments, you can write off (i.e. "cancel") the payments you're expecting so that you can keep accurate donation records. 1. Search for the Opportunity that contains the payment you want to write off. 2. On the Opportunity record, click the Related tab, then click **Edit** to the right of the payment. 3. Select **Written Off**. 4. Click **Save**. If, unfortunately, a donor discontinues their payments entirely, write off all of their scheduled future payments to keep your donation records accurate. 1. Search for the Opportunity that contains the payments you want to write off. 2. On the Related tab, scroll to the Payments related list. 3. Click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Write Off Payments**. 4. On the Write Off Remaining Balance page, look at the date in the Write Off Payments section. By default Salesforce shows you the current date, and will write off all remaining payments. If you want to choose a later date after which you want to write off payments, you can enter it. 5. Click **Write Off Payments**. Back on the Opportunity record, you'll see that Salesforce has automatically summed up the remaining unpaid payments and displayed them as a single unpaid write off. 6. Change the Opportunity Stage to **Posted** to close out the donation. # Manage Queues (Support and Front-Desk Staff) Learn how to guide students through a queue while they wait to meet with a support staff member. - **[Add a Student to a Queue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you're working with a queue for one support staff member or for the waiting room of a support office, department, or one-stop center, you add people to a queue the same way—it's just your entry point that might be different. - **[Guide a Student Through a Queue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you add a student to a queue or a student checks in to a queue waiting room, a Support Queue Case is created. This Case record tracks the student's request to meet with a support staff member. ## Add a Student to a Queue Whether you're working with a queue for one support staff member or for the waiting room of a support office, department, or one-stop center, you add people to a queue the same way—it's just your entry point that might be different. 1. In Student Success Hub, go to the User record or Support Pool record. - To work with a queue for a support staff member, open the support staff member's User record. You can access a User record by searching for the support staff member's name in the app. Make sure to open the User record and not the Contact record. If you're a support staff member managing your own queue, simply click on your profile icon, then click your name. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To access queues quickly, pin the User or Support Pool records you access most frequently. - To work with a queue for a department or one-stop waiting room, open the associated Support Pool record. You can see a list of all the Support Pools records by selecting **Support Pool** in the app navigation menu. 2. In the Queue Manager component, click **Add to Queue**. For support staff member walk-in queues, the Queue Manager component is dynamic. During walk-in hours, the component shows an Available Now badge and you can click the Add to Queue button. Outside of walk-in hours, the Add to Queue button doesn't work. Support Pool queues don't require this dynamic functionality, so you can always click the Add to Queue button. If a Support Pool doesn't support queue management (as in, for example, an office that doesn't accept walk-ins), a message shows in the component letting you know. ![On the left, the Queue Manager component for a support staff member and on the right, the Queue Manager for a Support Pool](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_queue_manage_add_student.png) 3. Search for and select a student, and specify a Topic and Subtopic. If the person you're adding to the queue is there on a student's behalf, you can select **Proxy**. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Fill out the Case details. For example, you can enter a priority and provide a Subject or Description to track more information about why the person wants to meet. 6. Save your changes. ## Guide a Student Through a Queue When you add a student to a queue or a student checks in to a queue waiting room, a Support Queue Case is created. This Case record tracks the student's request to meet with a support staff member. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Your Student Success Hub administrator configures the Case record that you use to manage students through a queue. Your page might not be configured with all the features we mention here, and the queuing case Status field values might be named differently. ### Status—And Why It's So Important to Managing a Queue The Support Queue Case's Status field tracks a student's progress through a queue. When you add someone to a queue, by default the case Status is set to Queued. This is the first stage in a queue. Here are all of the possible Status field values. Queued The student has been added to the queue. Ready The support staff member is ready to meet with the student. The student is notified or called in the waiting room. Abandoned The student never showed after being notified that the support staff member was ready to meet. By default, this status is a Closed value. Referred The queuing Case is closed and an appointment was created. The student and support staff member are now meeting, or a future appointment has been scheduled. By default, this status is a Closed value. Depending on how you want to implement queue management, you might not want to make this a Closed value. Fulfilled The queuing Case is closed and the student's request is addressed. This value can be used when the Case doesn't result in an appointment—for example, when a student just wanted a copy of their transcript—or after an appointment when the support staff member confirms the student's issue is resolved. By default, this status is a Closed value. If configured, the Status field value might be visually represented in a Path on the page. This lets you quickly see where a person is in the queue. ### How Do I Update a Student's Status? All the action happens on the Queue Actions component on the student record Case page. ![The Queue Actions component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_queue_case_actions_component.png) You can interact with two sections of this component. Review & Update This section includes actions you'll take while the queuing case is still in an Open state: Queued or Ready. If the case status is Queued, enter a Location to Meet and then click **Ready**. If the case status is Ready but the student never shows, click **Update to Abandoned**. Review & Close This section includes actions you'll take to close a queuing case. Keep in mind that there can be multiple Closed states. By default, the queuing case Status field values Referred and Fulfilled are both Closed states. To move the queuing case to Referred, click **Create Appointment**. The Appointment Manager opens with the appointment in view. From here you can work with the appointment just like any other appointment, such as adding a Note or creating a Task. To move the queuing case to Fulfilled, click **Update to Fulfilled**. Now you can review the next case in the queue. # Manage Recurring Donations Recurring giving is a dependable source of revenue for nonprofits. Donors who give regularly tend to continue giving for many years, and sometimes increase the amounts they donate. When donors want to adjust how and when they give in response to changes in their lives, your organization must be able to respond efficiently. You'll find the ability to do this and more with Recurring Donations in NPSP. - **[Recurring Donations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about managing sustainer donations with Recurring Donations in NPSP. - **[Create a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create open-ended and fixed-length Recurring Donations. Choose monthly, quarterly, yearly, or a custom installment schedule. - **[Process Installment Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_installment_opps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Close installment Opportunities when you receive donation payments for Recurring Donations. Closing an installment Opportunity generates the next installment Opportunity. - **[Change, Close, or Delete a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to update a Recurring Donation when a donor asks to change their donation amount, or their donation schedule. Also learn how to close (cancel), or delete a Recurring Donation. - **[Enter Additional Donations for an Existing Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_donations_for_an_existing_rd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to enter an installment Opportunity when your donor asks to make an additional donation along with their regular Recurring Donation. - **[Update the Schedule of an Annual Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_update_annual_rd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to update the schedule of an annual Recurring Donation when your donor asks to change their donation date. - **[Pause a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_pause_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to temporarily suspend donations, and restart them, when your donor wants to stop giving for a period of time. - **[Create Allocations for Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_allocations_for_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Manage Allocations button on a Recurring Donation's GAU Allocations related list to create and manage Allocations for your Recurring Donations. - **[Track Upgrades, Downgrades, and Other Recurring Giving Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_track_rd_changes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track and report on monthly and other recurring giving changes including upgrades, downgrades, payment method updates, schedule changes, and status changes. - **[Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Salesforce system administrator can determine the version of recurring donations installed in your org. - **[Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This guide is for system administrators to plan and perform the upgrade from Legacy to Enhanced Recurring Donations in NPSP. Also includes information about using the Enhanced Recurring Donations features. # Manage Recurring Gift Commitments in Education You can change the gift amount, schedule, and payment instrument details of a gift commitment. When you update the gift commitment record, Fundraising automatically processes the commitment and its associated records, such as the transaction and schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When making schedule changes to a recurring gift commitment, if the effective dates of the updated schedule match the schedule start and end dates, the update is effective for the entire schedule. Otherwise, the schedule is split in this way: - The end date of the original schedule is changed to a day before the effective start date. - A schedule is created, and the start and end dates become the effective to and from dates. - If the effective end date is earlier than the original end date, another schedule is created. The new schedule's start date is a day later than the effective end date, and the original end date doesn’t change. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To change a gift commitment, you must have delete permission for the associated gift transaction records. When you change a gift commitment, a record of the change is added to the Gift Commitment Change Attribution Log. This section, on the Related tab of the Gift Commitment or Account page, contains the details of the change. The Change Per Day Amount field in the log represents the amount of the upgrade or downgrade, broken down per day of the schedule. The campaign and outreach source code for the change are also captured in the log. If the gift commitment upgrade is intended for an additional campaign, the Gift Default Designations automatically attributes the commitment (and the transactions) to multiple campaigns in the ratio that they influenced the gift amount. This attribution provides immense value when you determine the donor lifetime value and analyze the ROI calculation for each of the campaigns. - **[Upgrade or Downgrade a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_upgrade_downgrade_recurring_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the amount of a recurring gift commitment, the schedule, or what the gift is allocated for. - **[Change the Dates of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_update_gift_commitment_dates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change the start and end dates of a gift commitment schedule. - **[Change the Payment Method of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_update_payment_method_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can specify different payment methods for specific periods within a commitment schedule. - **[Pause or Resume a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_pause_resume_schedules_recurring_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pause a recurring gift commitment to temporarily discontinue or skip some installments in an associated gift commitment schedule. You can resume the commitment when the donor is ready to restart payment. If you pause a schedule after its start date, the unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the pause period are removed. # Manage Recurring Gift Commitments in Nonprofit You can change the gift amount, schedule, and payment instrument details of a gift commitment. When you update the gift commitment record, Fundraising automatically processes the commitment and its associated records, such as the transaction and schedule. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

When making schedule changes to a recurring gift commitment, if the effective dates of the updated schedule match the schedule start and end dates, the update is effective for the entire schedule. Otherwise, the schedule is split in this way: - The end date of the original schedule is changed to a day before the effective start date. - A schedule is created, and the start and end dates become the effective to and from dates. - If the effective end date is earlier than the original end date, another schedule is created. The new schedule's start date is a day later than the effective end date, and the original end date doesn’t change. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To change a gift commitment, you must have delete permission for the associated gift transaction records. When you change a gift commitment, a record of the change is added to the Gift Commitment Change Attribution Log. This section, on the Related tab of the Gift Commitment or Account page, contains the details of the change. The Change Per Day Amount field in the log represents the amount of the upgrade or downgrade, broken down per day of the schedule. The campaign and outreach source code for the change are also captured in the log. If the gift commitment upgrade is intended for an additional campaign, the Gift Default Designations automatically attributes the commitment (and the transactions) to multiple campaigns in the ratio that they influenced the gift amount. This attribution provides immense value when you determine the donor lifetime value and analyze the ROI calculation for each of the campaigns. - **[Upgrade or Downgrade a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_upgrade_downgrade_recurring_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can change the amount of a recurring gift commitment, the schedule, or what the gift is allocated for. - **[Change the Dates of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_update_gift_commitment_dates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change the start and end dates of a gift commitment schedule. - **[Change the Payment Method of a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_update_payment_method_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can specify different payment methods for specific periods within a commitment schedule. - **[Pause or Resume a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_pause_resume_schedules_recurring_gift_commitment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pause a recurring gift commitment to temporarily discontinue or skip some installments in an associated gift commitment schedule. You can resume the commitment when the donor is ready to restart payment. If you pause a schedule after its start date, the unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the pause period are removed. # Manage Relationships Settings This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Add New Relationship Types.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=es-z7s1xd08) - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Relationships Settings control how Relationships behave in the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[General Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are three General Settings for Relationships. - **[Reciprocal Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Reciprocal Relationships list is what the List Setting uses to determine reciprocal relationships. You don't use Reciprocal Relationships settings if you are using the Value Inversion relationship method. - **[Add a New Reciprocal Relationship to the List Setting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a new relationship on the Relationship object and in NPSP Settings. - **[List Setting Scenarios](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP comes with predefined list settings for some common relationships. Here are some ideas for other common relationships you might want to add. - **[Relationships Autocreation Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Auto-created Relationships allow a custom Contact lookup field on the Contact or Campaign Member objects to automatically trigger the creation of a new Relationship type of your choice. For example, you might have a "Referred by" lookup field on the Campaign Member object to represent when a person new to your organization was brought to an event by an existing constituent. Use the Relationships Autocreation setting to have a new relationship automatically established between these two contacts. - **[Enable Tabular View for Relationships Viewer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relationships Viewer contains an optional tabular view that provides a version of Relationships Viewer for people using screen readers. ## Overview Your Relationships Settings control how Relationships behave in the Nonprofit Success Pack. There are three main areas to the settings: - General Relationships Settings - Reciprocal Relationships Settings - Relationships Autocreation Settings This document walks you through each of the major areas. You can find Relationship Settings in the Nonprofit Success Pack. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). ![View relationship settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_rels_settings_npspsettings.png) ## General Relationships Settings There are three General Settings for Relationships. - Reciprocal Method - Gender Field - Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations - Enable Custom Field Sync - Fields to Exclude from Sync - **[Reciprocal Method](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This setting is perhaps the most important of your Relationships settings, because it determines how the Nonprofit Success Pack generates your reciprocal relationships. - **[Gender Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This field specifies the gender of a Contact for the purposes of creating a reciprocal relationship. The value in the Gender field interacts with the values in the Reciprocal Method field (described above) to determine the correct reciprocal relationship. - **[Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, when an auto-created Relationship is triggered, and a Relationship between those Contacts of the same Type already exists, NPSP doesn't create a new, duplicate Relationship. Override this behavior and Salesforce will create a new Relationship each time the auto-create is triggered, regardless of any existing Relationships. - **[Enable Custom Field Sync](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Select Enable Custom Field Sync to sync the Relationship fields between the two Contacts in a relationship pair. - **[Fields to Exclude from Sync](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Select the Relationship fields you don't want synchronized between the two Contacts in a Relationship pair. This setting only applies when Enable Custom Field Sync is selected. ### Reciprocal Method This setting is perhaps the most important of your Relationships settings, because it determines how the Nonprofit Success Pack generates your reciprocal relationships. The options are: - **List Setting** (the default) works in conjunction with gender and other predefined settings from your Reciprocal Relationships Settings “list” (see below) to set the appropriate Type on the reciprocal relationship. For example, if you create a relationship from a male's Contact record with Type “Son,” the NPSP automatically creates a reciprocal relationship of “Father” on the son's record. Most people leave the List Setting as the default and don't change it. - **Value Inversion** works to reverse the relationship where it can. The key is to enter a Type with a delimiter around which the system will swap the words. So a Relationship with a type of "Mother-Daughter" would receive a reciprocal Type of "Daughter-Mother.” Value Inversion does not use any of the values in Relationship Reciprocal Settings. Instead, you only need to create picklist values on the Relationship object's Type field for both “Mother-Daughter” and “Daughter-Mother,” as in the above example. With the List Setting method, Salesforce determines the appropriate gender-specific type based on one of two methods: - **Pre-defined Gender field**: The Reciprocal Relationships setting looks for Female or Male values in a custom field on Contact records specifically for the purpose of tracking gender (see [Gender Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This field specifies the gender of a Contact for the purposes of creating a reciprocal relationship. The value in the Gender field interacts with the values in the Reciprocal Method field (described above) to determine the correct reciprocal relationship.")). **This field is not standard in Salesforce and must be created by a system administrator.** - **Salutations**: In the case where Salesforce cannot identify a gender on the contact, Salesforce evaluates the Salutation field to determine gender, if possible. (Ms. or Mrs. = Female and Mr. = Male.) ### Gender Field This field specifies the gender of a Contact for the purposes of creating a reciprocal relationship. The value in the Gender field interacts with the values in the Reciprocal Method field (described above) to determine the correct reciprocal relationship. For example, if you create a Relationship from a "Mother" Contact record to a female Contact record, the NPSP creates a reciprocal relationship of "Daughter," as opposed to "Son." The Gender field can be any custom picklist or text field on the Contact record with the required values being Male and Female. You can add other values to the picklist as well without affecting the reciprocal relationship feature. ### Allow Auto-Created Duplicate Relations By default, when an auto-created Relationship is triggered, and a Relationship between those Contacts of the same Type already exists, NPSP doesn't create a new, duplicate Relationship. Override this behavior and Salesforce will create a new Relationship each time the auto-create is triggered, regardless of any existing Relationships. This setting is specific to the feature that auto-creates relationships based on a custom lookup field. (See [Manage Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior.") for more information.) ### Enable Custom Field Sync Select Enable Custom Field Sync to sync the Relationship fields between the two Contacts in a relationship pair. This setting includes all fields on the Relationship object, except for fields that you identify in **Fields to Exclude from Sync**. ### Fields to Exclude from Sync Select the Relationship fields you don't want synchronized between the two Contacts in a Relationship pair. This setting only applies when Enable Custom Field Sync is selected. This setting only applies when **Enable Custom Field Sync** is selected. ## Reciprocal Relationships Settings The Reciprocal Relationships list is what the List Setting uses to determine reciprocal relationships. You don't use Reciprocal Relationships settings if you are using the Value Inversion relationship method. Here's how it works: If Salesforce can determine the contact's gender (based on the user-defined gender field or the salutation), then the reciprocal relationship is created using the value that matches the gender. If no Gender is specified, then Salesforce uses the Neutral value. For example, in the following image, line 1 shows that if you create a Relationship from a male Contact record to a Contact whose type is Aunt, the automatic reciprocal relationship will show the male contact as her Nephew. Similarly, if you create the Relationship from a female Contact record to an “Aunt,” Salesforce creates the reciprocal relationship showing the female contact as a Niece. If no Gender is specified on the male or female contact's record, then Salesforce uses the Neutral value, in this case, “Sibling's Child.” ![Reciprocal settings applied](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_rels_settings_relrecipsettngs.png) You can add new reciprocal relationships by clicking **New Reciprocal Relationship**. (See [Manage Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior.") for details.) To delete relationships, click **Del**; doing this does not affect any existing Relationships. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you delete a Relationship from Reciprocal Relationship Settings, you'll also need to delete the picklist value from the Type field on the Relationship object. Otherwise, users will still be able to select the Relationship Type on a record. ## Add a New Reciprocal Relationship to the List Setting Add a new relationship on the Relationship object and in NPSP Settings. To add a new Relationship option, follow these steps: - [Update the Relationship Type Picklist field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you can create a new Relationship Type, you must first add the value(s) to the Relationship object's picklist field.") - [Create the Reciprocal Relationship in Reciprocal Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up reciprocal relationships in NPSP Settings.") - **[Update the Relationship Type Picklist field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can create a new Relationship Type, you must first add the value(s) to the Relationship object's picklist field. - **[Create the Reciprocal Relationship in Reciprocal Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up reciprocal relationships in NPSP Settings. ### Update the Relationship Type Picklist field Before you can create a new Relationship Type, you must first add the value(s) to the Relationship object's picklist field. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. From the list of objects, select **Relationship.** 4. Click **Fields & Relationships.** 5. In the list of fields, click **Type**. You may have to click **View All** to find the field. 6. Under Picklist Values, click **New**. 7. Type the new values into the text box, placing each on separate line. ![Select values available as relationships](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_rels_settings_addplvals.png) 8. Click **Save**. ### Create the Reciprocal Relationship in Reciprocal Relationships Settings Set up reciprocal relationships in NPSP Settings. 1. Back at the Relationship Settings tab, under Reciprocal Relationship Settings, click **New Reciprocal Relationship**. ![Location of New Reciprocal Relationship option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_rels_settings_newreciprel.png) 2. Fill out the text boxes and click Create Reciprocal Relationship. ![Create a Reciprocal Relationship](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_rels_settings_newrecipreled.png) In this example we are saying that, whenever someone saves a relationship with a Type (Name) of “Brother”: - If the reciprocal contact is male, create a reciprocal relationship of Brother. - If the reciprocal contact is female, create a reciprocal relationship of Sister. - If the reciprocal contact's gender is undefined, create a reciprocal relationship of Sibling. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note In this use case, we would normally define two more Reciprocal Relationship Types – one for Sister and one for Sibling – so that Salesforce would know what to do with all new types we've added. ## List Setting Scenarios The NPSP comes with predefined list settings for some common relationships. Here are some ideas for other common relationships you might want to add. **Siblings** For tracking siblings we suggest that you add these List Setting entries:
Name Male Female Neutral
Brother Brother Sister Sibling
Sister Brother Sister Sibling
Sibling Brother Sister Sibling
**Deceased Spouses** For tracking deceased spouses we suggest that you add these List Setting entries:
Name Male Female Neutral
Widow Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse
Widower Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse Deceased Spouse
Deceased Spouse Widower Widow Surviving Spouse
**Divorces and Former Spouses** For tracking divorces and former spouses we suggest that you add these List Setting entries:
Name Male Female Neutral
Ex-Husband Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Spouse
Ex-Wife Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Spouse
Former Spouse Ex-Husband Ex-Wife Former Spouse
## Relationships Autocreation Settings Auto-created Relationships allow a custom Contact lookup field on the Contact or Campaign Member objects to automatically trigger the creation of a new Relationship type of your choice. For example, you might have a "Referred by" lookup field on the Campaign Member object to represent when a person new to your organization was brought to an event by an existing constituent. Use the Relationships Autocreation setting to have a new relationship automatically established between these two contacts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Relationship Autocreation](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4VsnhU9Av1E). Before adding a new Auto-Created Relationship, an administrator must do the following: 1. Create a custom contact lookup field on either the Contact or Campaign Member. 2. Update the picklist values on the Relationship object's Type field (if they don't already exist – see the previous sections). 3. Add new Reciprocal Relationships in NPSP Settings (if they don't already exist – see the previous sections). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. - **[Add a New Auto-Created Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add your custom relationship to Relationship Autocreation in NPSP Settings. ### Add a New Auto-Created Relationship Add your custom relationship to Relationship Autocreation in NPSP Settings. Navigate back to the NPSP Settings tab, select **Relationships** | **Relationships Autocreation**, and click New Automatic Relationship. Then: 1. Select the Object with which you want to make the association. 2. Select the Object Field. The example below shows a “Referred By” custom Contact lookup field, created on the Campaign Member Object. 3. Choose the Type of the Relationship. The reciprocal Type will automatically be created as well. 4. Select the Campaign Types on which this auto-create should fire. 5. Click **Create Automatic Relationship**. 6. (Optional) Create a new Automatic Relationship for each field that should trigger an auto-creation. ![Specify Automatic Relationship values](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_rels_settings_crautorel.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Brian Pickett, who also contributed to this documentation. ## Enable Tabular View for Relationships Viewer Relationships Viewer contains an optional tabular view that provides a version of Relationships Viewer for people using screen readers. 1. Click ![Setup Icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Profiles in Quick Find and select **Profiles**. 3. Find the profile you wish to edit and click its name. 4. Click **Apex Class Access**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Select and add the RelationshipsTreeGridController Apex class to Enabled Apex Classes. 7. Save the profile. 8. Repeat these steps for all other profiles you wish to enable tabular view for. Optionally, add the tabular view to a Contact Lightning Record Page: 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Find and click **Contact**. 3. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 4. Click the Lightning Page you wish to edit. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Click and drag **Relationships Navigator** onto the page layout. 7. Save your update. # Manage Requirements Learn how to create and complete requirements in Grant Management. - **[Create a Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Requirements allow organizations to track deliverables or milestones on a Funding Request before it’s approved or closed. - **[Complete a Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let’s take a look at how a grantee completes a Requirement. After logging in to the grantee portal, the grantee navigates to My Applications and selects the Funding Request she submitted. ## Create a Requirement Requirements allow organizations to track deliverables or milestones on a Funding Request before it’s approved or closed. For example, you may require quarterly progress reports from grantees to see how awarded funds are being used. You can create these as Requirements. Grantees can provide Requirements updates directly in the portal, which enables grantmakers to easily manage and track these progress reports. 1. While viewing a Funding Request, click the **Requirements** related list. ![Select Requirements on the Funding Request record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/gmrequirements.jpg) 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Requirement Name. For example, Quarterly Progress Report. 4. Select a Primary Contact. 5. Select a Type. 6. Next to Assigned, search for and select the grantseeker user. 7. If a disbursement has been made, select or add it from Disbursement. 8. Enter a Due Date. This is when the Primary Contact is required to submit their Requirement information. 9. If completed, enter a Completed Date. 10. Select a Status. 11. Select **Is Add Files Visible?** to allow a grantseeker to upload files to the Requirement. A grantseeker won’t be able to upload files to the Requirement if this isn’t enabled. 12. Optionally, enter additional information in Requirements. 13. Click **Save**. ![Complete fields on the Requirement record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/gmrequirements2.jpg) Repeat for as many Requirements as needed. ## Complete a Requirement Let’s take a look at how a grantee completes a Requirement. After logging in to the grantee portal, the grantee navigates to My Applications and selects the Funding Request she submitted. The grantee scrolls down to the Requirements section and clicks **Quarterly Progress Report.** This is the Requirement that was created in Create a Requirement Record to see how things are going with the grantee's leadership program. This opens the Requirement record where the grantee can now upload attachments. The grantee clicks **Upload Files** then selects their progress report file. They made great strides this month, and they are excited to update the foundation. They even add an additional attachment—a group photo from one of the leadership training sessions! The grantee clicks **Submit** then **Submit** to send their report to the foundation. At this point, the grantee is no longer able to make updates to the Requirement. Back on the Funding Request record, the grantmaker clicks **Requirements** and sees Quarterly Progress Report is in Complete status. They click **Quarterly Progress Report** then clicks **Files** to see the grantee's attachments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Notice Is Add Files Visible? is no longer enabled once Grace submits the Requirement. You can reenable this field to allow grantees to upload additional attachments, if needed. # Manage Review Fields on the Review Workspace Customize the fields a reviewer completes on the Review Workspace. The side panel of the Review Workspace includes fields, such as Status and Comments, that your reviewers need to complete their review. To add fields to the side panel, update the Reviewer Feedback field set on the Reviews object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note This field set controls the side panel Review fields for all Review Workspaces. Learn how to create review fields or configure other aspects of the Review Workspace for individual reviews in [Create and Customize Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create, customize, and share a side-by-side review workspace to quickly evaluate Funding Requests."). 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager.** 3. Click **Review**. 4. Click **Field Sets**. 5. Optionally, to create a customizable set of fields for your Review, click **New**. 1. Create a field set for this Review by entering values for **Field Set Label**, **Field Set Name**, and **Namespace Prefix**. 2. Click **Save**. 3. Click **Edit** for this field set record. 4. Drag and drop the Review fields administrators need to have available **In the Field Set**. By default, a Review always contains **Review Name**, **Status**, and **Comment** fields. 5. Change the order of these fields by shifting them up or down in the list. 6. Click **Save**. 6. Optionally, to update the existing or a default fieldset, click **Reviewer Feedback**. 1. Adjust the fields or position of the fields in the field set. 2. Save your changes. # Manage Reviews Evaluate grantseekers' requests, submit your review, and provide feedback. - **[Create and Customize Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create, customize, and share a side-by-side review workspace to quickly evaluate Funding Requests. - **[Complete a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View relevant materials about a Funding Request and submit your review. # Manage Rollups Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. Learn about customizable rollups and legacy rollup solutions. - **[Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically "roll up" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records. - **[Manually Recalculate Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build. # Manage Shared Components on Your Experience Cloud Sites Shared components help you make your Experience Cloud site more useful for your admins and users. They do things like let users subscribe to your communications and capture contact information as the user enters it. - **[Set Up the Preference Manager Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_manage_shared_components_on_your_experience_cloud_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Preference Manager component lists the available communications, like emails or newsletters, for your Experience Cloud site. Users can opt in to individual communications or unsubscribe as needed. - **[Set Up the Contact Information Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_manage_shared_components_on_your_experience_cloud_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Contact Information component captures contact information about your user. You can select which fields you want to include and in what order they display on your site's page. ## Set Up the Preference Manager Component The Preference Manager component lists the available communications, like emails or newsletters, for your Experience Cloud site. Users can opt in to individual communications or unsubscribe as needed. Before setting up this component in your site, define the [Data Use Purposes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Now that you've installed the app and set up user access, let's add communication and subscription management.") that represent each communication. [Add Communications to Your Site with the Preference Manager Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Now that you've installed the app and set up user access, let's add communication and subscription management.") has step-by-step instructions for configuring the component. ## Set Up the Contact Information Component The Contact Information component captures contact information about your user. You can select which fields you want to include and in what order they display on your site's page. 1. In Builder, click on the Contact Information component. If the component isn't already on your page, drag it over from the Custom Components section of the Components list. 2. In the property editor, select the fields you want to display from the dropdown lists. You can choose to display up to five fields. # Manage Sharing For Your Mentoring Program Update program sharing rules and create sharing sets for facilitators, mentors, and mentees.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Update Sharing Rules for Mentoring 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. From Manage sharing settings for, select **Programs**. 3. For Program Sharing Rules, click **New**. 4. In Label, enter Program Community Sharing. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 5. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 6. For Criteria, set these values. 1. From Field, select **Show on Learner Portal**. 2. From Operator, select **equals**. 3. From Value, select **True**. 7. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select **All Customer Portal Users**. 8. From Access Level, select **Read Only**. 9. Save your changes. ## Update Sharing Rules for Benefit Types 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. From Manage sharing settings for, select **Benefit Types**. 3. For Benefit Type Sharing Rules, click **New**. 4. In Label, enter Mentoring Benefit Type Sharing. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 5. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 6. For Criteria, set these values. 1. From Field, select **Category**. 2. From Operator, select **equals**. 3. From Value, select **Mentoring**. 7. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select **All Customer Portal Users**. 8. From Access Level, select **Read Only**. 9. Save your changes. ## Update Sharing Rules for Omni Process 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. From Manage sharing settings for, select **Omni Processes**. 3. From Omni Process Sharing Rules, click **New**. 4. In Label, enter Mentoring Omni Process Sharing. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 5. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 6. For Criteria, add these values: | Field | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | | Designer Customization Type | equals | Discovery Framework | | Type | equals | _YourOmniScriptType_ | | Sub Type | equals | _YourOmniScriptSubType_ | 7. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select **All Customer Portal Users**. 8. From Access Level, select **Read Only**. 9. Save your changes. ## Update Sharing Rules for Units of Measure 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. From Manage sharing settings for, select **Units of Measure**. 3. From Unit of Measure Sharing Rules, click **New**. 4. In Label, enter Mentoring Unit of Measure Sharing. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 5. Select **Based on record owner** as the rule type. 6. From Unit of Measure: owned by members of, select **Public Groups**, and then select **All Internal Users**. 7. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select **All Customer Portal Users**. 8. From Access Level, select **Read Only**. 9. Save your changes. ## Create a Mentee Sharing Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, click **New**. 3. Enter a label for the sharing set, such as Mentee Sharing. Press **Tab** to automatically fill the Sharing Set Name field. 4. From Available Profiles, add your mentee profile to the Selected Profiles list. 5. For Objects, add Account, Benefit Assignment, and Program Enrollment to the Selected Objects list. 6. Under Configure Access, for Account, click **Set Up**. 7. Select these mapping values. 1. For User, select **Contact.Account**. 2. For Target Account, select **Id**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read Only**. 8. Click **Update**. 9. Under Configure Access, for Benefit Assignment, click **Set Up**. 10. Select these mapping values. 1. For User, select **Contact**. 2. For Target Benefit Assignment, select **ProgramEnrollment.Contact**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read Only**. 11. Click **Update**. 12. Under Configure Access, for Program Enrollment, click **Set Up**. 13. Select these mapping values. 1. For User, select **Contact**. 2. For Target Program Enrollment, select **Contact**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read Only**. 14. Click **Update**. 15. Save your changes. ## Create a Mentor Sharing Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Under Sharing Sets, click **New**. 3. Enter a label for the sharing set, such as Mentor Sharing. Press **Tab** to automatically fill the Sharing Set Name field. 4. For Available Profiles, add your mentor profile to the Selected Profiles column. 5. For Objects, add Account, Benefit Assignment, and Provider Offering to the Selected Objects list. 6. Under Configure Access, for Account, click **Set Up**. 7. Select these mapping values. 1. For User, select **Contact.Account**. 2. For Target Account, select **Id**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 8. Click **Update**. 9. Under Configure Access, for Benefit Assignment, click **Set Up**. 10. Select these mapping values. 1. For User, select **Contact**. 2. For Target Benefit Assignment, select **Provider**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 11. Click **Update**. 12. Under Configure Access, for Provider Offering, click **Set Up**. 13. Select these mapping values. 1. For User, select **Contact**. 2. For Target Provider Offering, select **Contact**. 3. For Access Level, select **Read Only**. 14. Click **Update**. 15. Save your changes. # Manage Soft Credits Manage Soft Credits with the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence. - **[Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically. - **[Manually Create Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits. - **[NPSP Logic for Creating Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_logic_for_creating_ocrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what NPSP automation for creating soft credits takes precedence when multiple automated processes are involved. # Manage Special Gift Types Work with matching gifts, In-Kind Gifts, Grants, Memberships, and Tribute Gifts in the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Work with Matching Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_work_with_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tracking Matching Gifts in Salesforce is a three-step process. - **[Create and Manage In-Kind Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_in-kind_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An In-Kind Gift is a donation of goods or services, rather than a cash donation, to a nonprofit organization. Learn how to manage these kinds of gifts with Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Create Tribute Opportunities (Honor and Memorial Donations)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_tribute_opportunities_honor_and_memorial_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack enables you to capture important details about donations made in honor or in memory of someone. You can track who the donation was made in honor of, as well as who should be notified about the donation and how best to notify them. - **[Build a Flow to Notify Tribute Recipients](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_build_flow_notify_tribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a quick way for users to email people about honor or memorial donations. - **[Manage Grantseeking Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_manage_grants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track Grants your organization has applied for and Payments received for a Grant, and manage the deliverables to meet the funding organization's application and reporting requirements. - **[Create and Manage Memberships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Memberships in Nonprofit Success Pack represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. Learn how to create and manage memberships with Nonprofit Success Pack. # Manage Student Goals Advisors can associate tasks with a student's goal to create or update a detailed, executable plan of action. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To manage student goal action plans: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Components for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_components_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give advisors the tools to manage student progress by adding career planning and life goals features to the Student Success app.") 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the student. 3. Go to the Student Goals tab. 4. Select a goal to open the goal assignment page. 5. On the Related tab, click **New Task**. 6. Enter a subject and due date for the student to complete the task 7. Select a status and task priority. 8. Save your changes. # Manage Student Success Hub Data Set up data to represent faculty, staff, and students at your institution. - **[Import Your School's Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_import_school.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create data to represent your educational institution in Student Success Hub. - **[Create Your Support Staff and Faculty Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_staff_faculty.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create data to represent your support staff and faculty in Student Success Hub. - **[Create Your Student Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_student.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Contact and Case record for each student in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Create Student User Records for Your Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_student_user.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create User records for students to allow them to use a Student Success Hub portal. # Manage Success Teams (Support Staff) Learn how to add and remove people from a student's success team. - **[What's a Success Team?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_success_team_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Everyone who serves in a support role is considered to be part of a student's success team. For students, knowing who to ask for help removes a big barrier to seeking support. For support staff and departments, having visibility into and easy access to other success team members helps you maintain a strong, informed support network for every student. - **[Add a Success Team Member](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_success_team_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a member or predefined team of support staff to a student's success team. - **[Considerations for Removing Success Team Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_success_team_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some considerations before you remove individual members or predefined teams from a student’s success team. ## What's a Success Team? Everyone who serves in a support role is considered to be part of a student's success team. For students, knowing who to ask for help removes a big barrier to seeking support. For support staff and departments, having visibility into and easy access to other success team members helps you maintain a strong, informed support network for every student. Members of a student's success team can be individuals—such as teachers, counselors, academic advisors, and administrators—or predefined teams—such as teams dedicated to chronic absenteeism or college readiness (in K-12) or Career Services or Financial Aid offices (in higher ed). You play a part in managing the membership of success teams by keeping individual support staff information up-to-date as your students' needs evolve or your school's personnel changes. Your Student Success Hub administrator creates predefined success teams and manages their membership. Individual success team members are either Users or Contacts. - Users are involved with day-to-day success planning and represent a student's core of support. Users can log in to Student Success Hub and, in orgs with student users and portals, can schedule appointments with students. - Contacts are in secondary support roles, such as peer advising, mentoring, or tutoring. They are represented in Student Success Hub, but can't log in to Student Success Hub. In addition, Contacts aren't eligible for certain actions that Users are. For example, you can assign Tasks and Success Plans to a User, but not to a Contact. Predefined teams of support staff can include both Users and Contacts. ## Add a Success Team Member Add a member or predefined team of support staff to a student's success team. 1. In Student Success Hub, open the student record. 2. From the **Team** tab, click **Add Member**. 3. Search for and then select a User, Contact, or a predefined team to add as a member. 4. For a User or a Contact, select the Support Team Role (K-12) or Case Team Role (higher ed) that the member fulfills. 5. Save your changes. The Team related lists on the student record show the names of the team members, their roles, and, if the team member is a User, their title. Using the action menu, you can create Tasks for team members who are Users (but not for members who are Contacts). If you use appointments, the Last Meeting column shows the date of the student's last appointment with the team member. ![The action menu on the Student Success Team related list, showing two options: Create Task and Remove Member](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_success_teams_member_add.png) ## Considerations for Removing Success Team Members Review some considerations before you remove individual members or predefined teams from a student’s success team. - When you remove a member from the student's success team, they no longer appear on the Assigned tab of the Scheduling Wizard. - Removing a predefined team from a success team removes both the team and all of its members. - When someone belongs to multiple predefined teams on the same success team: - They only appear on the Team tab of the student's record under the first predefined team that they were added to. If you remove the other predefined teams that don’t show that member, then that member remains on both of those predefined teams and the success team. In addition, students can still see that support staff member on the Recent tab of the Scheduling Wizard and schedule time with them. - To remove them completely from the success team, do so for all of their predefined teams. They then appear on the Recent tab of the Scheduling Wizard as Not Available, and students can't schedule time with them. ### Remove a Success Team Member or Predefined Team Remove an individual member or a predefined team of support staff from a student's success team. 1. In Student Success Hub, open a student record. 2. Click the **Team** tab. 3. To remove a member, click the action menu for the member, then select **Remove Member**. To remove a predefined team, click **Remove Team**. 4. Click **Yes, Remove**. # Manage the Appointment Experience in Education Cloud Many staff members and learners prefer the control and convenience of booking their appointments online rather than working through a call center. Configure your Experience site to enable them to find time slots and book appointments on their own, on desktop or mobile.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Self-Service Appointments in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_self_service_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud uses the power of Experience Cloud and the flexibility of Omnistudio to let you customize the appointment experience for your users. - **[Customize the Self-Service Appointment Setup Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_customize_appt_setup_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides the EDUScheduler Omniscript that you can customize in a user-friendly, click-based interface to offer a rich, personalized self-service appointment experience to your staff and learners. - **[Schedule Appointments with My Appointments Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_schedule_appointments_with_my_appointments_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the My Appointments Header Lightning web component from Education Cloud to provide an alternative, more efficient workflow to replace the standard workflow for scheduling appointments on your learner portal. - **[Verify Permission Sets for Experience Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_perm_sets_exp_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure that learners and staff have the required permissions to access the Experience site and schedule appointments. - **[Set Up an Experience Site for Appointments in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_exp_site_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud comes with a preconfigured Education Applicant Portal template that enables learners to access the scheduling feature. These steps are only required if you want to create your own portal. - **[Enable Learners to Access the Appointment Setup Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_learners_access_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing rules for learners to grant them the required read and write access to their service appointment records, and read access to their case records. - **[Show Full Names Instead of Nicknames in the Appointment Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_show_full_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the appointment setup flow's name display for clarity. - **[Add the My Appointment Component to Your App Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_my_appt_utility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud comes with a preconfigured app that offers a comprehensive view of your users' appointments. If you build your own app, add the My Appointment component to the app's utility bar to provide that view. - **[Add Appointment Users to Your Education Cloud Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_appt_users_exp_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant access to learners and staff members to the appointment feature on your Education Cloud Experience Site. - **[Schedule Appointments for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_schedule_appointments_for_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Schedule appointments with staff members for students from the account record page. - **[Map Case Teams to Success Teams to Define Appointment Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_map_case_teams_to_success_teams_to_define_appointment_availability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Success teams determine which case teams (assigned or unassigned) or staff members are available for scheduling using the case record type. - **[Automatic Resource Assignment for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automatic_resource_assignment_for_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure appointment assignments to efficiently manage your service resources. - **[Lobby Management for Drop In Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_lobby_management_for_drop_in_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Drop In Appointments with Education Cloud to easily manage learners who visit the location for an in-person consultation with an advisor. # Manage the Intake Pipeline Use Intake reports to see Intakes in your organization. To view Intake reports: 1. Click the **Reports** tab. 2. Click **All Reports**. 3. Find and click the name of one of the Intake reports: - **Intakes in Progress by Stage**: Shows the count of open Intake records grouped by Stage, including In Progress, Awaiting Client Input, and In Review. - **Closed Intake Results, Current 6 Months**: Shows the count of Intake records closed in the current and last 6 months, grouped by Intake Results including Approved, Not Approved: Client Declined Services, Not Approved: Referred Elsewhere, and Not Approved: Rejected. You can also see these reports, along with Inbound Referrals reports, on the Intake Summary dashboard: 1. Click the **Dashboards** tab. 2. Click **All Dashboards**. 3. Find and click the **Intake Summary** dashboard. # Manage the Referral Pipeline Use the Referral reports to see Referrals in your organization. 1. Click the **Reports** tab. 2. Click **All Reports**. 3. Find and click the name of one of the Referral reports: - **Inbound Referrals by Account**: See the Inbound Referrals opened in the current and last 6 months, grouped by Referral Organization. - **Inbound Referrals, Current 6 Months**: See the Inbound Referrals opened in the current and last 6 months. You can also see these reports, along with Intake reports, on the Intake Summary dashboard: 1. Click the **Dashboards** tab. 2. Click **All Dashboards**. 3. Find and click the **Intake Summary** dashboard. # Manage Time Zones for Displaying Volunteer Jobs Time zones can be complex for some organizations. Salesforce offers multiple ways to set time zone for users, Campaigns, and Jobs. If your operations don't typically deal with time zone differences, you don't need to worry about all the options, and neither does your volunteer coordinator. Simply change the Site Guest User's default time zone to your local time, for all Campaigns and Jobs. If your coordinator happens to plan an event in a different time zone, it's easy for her to make a one-off change for a specific Campaign or Job. If your operations are more complicated—hosting events in multiple locations that cross time zones or drawing volunteers from different time zones—get familiar with how the Site Guest User's time zone interacts with the other time zone settings.
What happens when . . . Time Zone Displayed
Your volunteer coordinator or another user saves a Shift's Start Date and Time in V4S The time zone specified in the user's Salesforce user account, converted to GMT.
A different user views the saved Shift's Start Date and Time in V4S The time zone specified in the user's Salesforce user account. Users in different time zones see different times.
Your public website displays the saved Shift's Start Date and Time (on the Job Calendar or Job Listing)

The time in GMT converted to one of these time zones, in this order of precedence:

  1. The Job's Volunteer Website Time Zone, if set.
  2. The Campaign's Volunteer Website Time Zone, if set.
  3. The Site Guest User profile's time zone, if set.

If none are set, the time is displayed in GMT.
A Salesforce email displays the saved Shift's Start Date and Time

The Default Time Zone specified in your organization's Profile.

The only way to control this time zone setting is by changing it organization-wide from Setup, in Company Profile. This is a known limitation of V4S.
- **[Change the Site Guest User Profile's Default Time Zone](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_time_zone.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce defaults to showing Campaigns, Jobs, and Shifts in the GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) time zone. If your organization prefers a different standard, change the default setting in the Site Guest User profile. - **[Configure Date Time Formatting for the Site Guest User Profile (Upgrades Only)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_time_zone.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Starting in Volunteers for Salesforce version 3.0, we format date time in the backend in Salesforce rather than in the user's browser. If you're upgrading from a pre-3.0 version, update the Site Guest User profile so that the System Note field on Volunteer Shifts is visible to the profile. Otherwise, date time formatting remains inconsistent with the latest version and affects how your Shift times are displayed. ## Change the Site Guest User Profile's Default Time Zone Volunteers for Salesforce defaults to showing Campaigns, Jobs, and Shifts in the GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) time zone. If your organization prefers a different standard, change the default setting in the Site Guest User profile. 1. Back on your Site Detail page, click **Public Access Settings**. 2. Click **Assigned Users**. ![Assigned Users button on the Guest User profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/guest_profile_assigned_users.png) 3. Next to your Site Guest User, click **Edit**. ![Edit link next to the Guest User profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/guest_user_profile_edit.png) 4. Under Locale Settings, change the default Time Zone from GMT to your preferred local time zone. ![Locale settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/guest_user_locale.png) 5. **Save** your changes. ## Configure Date Time Formatting for the Site Guest User Profile (Upgrades Only) Starting in Volunteers for Salesforce version 3.0, we format date time in the backend in Salesforce rather than in the user's browser. If you're upgrading from a pre-3.0 version, update the Site Guest User profile so that the System Note field on Volunteer Shifts is visible to the profile. Otherwise, date time formatting remains inconsistent with the latest version and affects how your Shift times are displayed. # Manage Transfer Credit Requests Evaluate transfer credit requests to determine which prior academic credits meet your institution’s requirements. The registrar reviews submitted materials to establish which previously earned credits meet necessary standards. The final list of accepted transfer credits determines the applicant's time to complete a degree. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Review Applicant Documents The registrar examines all documents submitted by applicant, such as academic records, test scores, essays, and recommendations, to verify authenticity and completeness. Examines each submitted transcript for completeness and authenticity. The submitted materials include academic records, test scores, essays, and recommendations. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To review applicant’s documents: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the applicant. 3. Go to the Related tab and review the document checklist items. 4. From the actions menu, select **Review Document**. 5. Review the course credit transfer application details and set the status. 6. Select the transcript document and click **Edit**. 7. Select the type of document. 8. Confirm the validity of the document. 9. Save your changes. ## Articulate and Approve Transfer Credits for Applicants Compare coursework from other institutions with your institution’s curriculum, including its content, rigor, and learning outcomes. Approval of these credits directly influences the applicant's program. Approved credits smooth the transition and reduce repeated courses. Articulating and approving transfer credits manages enrollment quality and promotes applicant success. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To articulate and approve transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set up your org for transfer credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them.") - Define values for the Status picklists in the Course Credit Transfer Application object using the Object Manager. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the applicant. 3. From the actions menu, select **Articulate**. 4. Select the learning programs for which you want to determine equivalencies. Salesforce gets the learning programs from the individual applications and learner programs for the contact associated with the case. 5. For each course credit transfer application related to the case, select a status. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can set the status to Approved only when the course credit transfer application review type is Official. 6. Click **Select Equivalency**. 7. Select an equivalent learning related to the external program for the course credit transfer application. Select the related requirements, and then click **Select**. You can select only an equivalent learning that has requirements. 8. To view the full program requirement hierarchy, estimated completion, and impact on the degree completion. 1. Click **Select Equivalency**. 2. Select the Requirement Completion Impact Preview tab. 3. Select the requirements for the internal courses to view the impact. 9. Save your changes. ## Conditions for Selection of Equivalencies Evaluate the course credit transfer application related to the case and select an learning equivalency related to the external program for the course credit transfer application. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Course Credit Transfer Application with External Learning Exists Learning Equivalencies Available Equivalency Can Select Equivalency User Action
No Not Applicable Shows course credit transfer application not reviewed No Select the course credit transfer application when reviewing the applicant documents
Yes No Show: No Equivalency No Audit the course credit transfer application and define learning equivalency to match
Yes Yes (None selected) Empty (Salesforce will await user to select equivalency) Yes Select a learning equivalency
Yes Yes (Selected) Shows the selected equivalency and achievement details

Yes, if more than one equivalency match is found

No, if only one equivalency match is found

 If more than one equivalency match is found, select another learning equivalency.
Yes Yes (Selected, but ineligible) Show: Not eligible for transfer and a minimum numeric grade message Yes Verify the status of the course credit transfer application record
Yes Yes (Selected) Shows missing requirements Yes Select a requirement
## Create an Academic Review Request Create an academic review request to review a proposed learning equivalency for the selected course credit transfer application. Give your faculty and administrators a structured workspace to review and manage complex prior learning, such as military experience and portfolios. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create an academic review request: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the applicant. 3. From the actions menu, select **Articulate**. 4. Select the learning programs for which you want to evaluate transfer credits. The learning programs are fetched from the individual applications and learner programs based on the contact associated with the case. 5. Select course credit transfer applications with approved learning for which you want to evaluate transfer credits. 6. From the actions menu, select **New Academic Review Request**. Salesforce automatically creates a draft learning equivalency and associates it with the new academic review request record. 7. On the Equivalency Suggestions tab, click **Edit and Publish**. 8. On the External Learnings tab, enter or change the external learning information, such as minimum letter and numeric grades, duration and duration unit. 9. To associate an additional external learning with the learning equivalency, click **Add External Learning**. 10. On the Internal Learnings tab, select an action and click **Add Internal Learning** to select internal learning equivalent to the selected external learning. 11. Enter the internal learning information, such as minimum letter and numeric grades, duration and duration unit. These values are assigned to the student when this learning equivalency is approved. 12. On the Learning Program Requirements tab, select learning programs for this learning equivalency. 13. On the Learning Equivalency Details tab, enter the learning equivalency information, such as name, type, start and end dates, and learning category. 14. Save your changes. The Equivalency Suggestions tab shows the learning equivalency mapping between the external and internal learnings and the related learning program for the course credit transfer application. ## Review Academic Review Requests Before you review a request, configure the approval workflow. Review the academic review request to activate and publish the learning equivalency for the selected course credit transfer application. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To review academic review requests: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the applicant. 3. From the actions menu, select **Articulate**. 4. For a course credit transfer application, select the associated academic review request. 5. On the Equivalency Suggestions tab, click **Edit and Publish**. 6. On the Learning Equivalency Details tab, select **Active** and **Published**. 7. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A published learning equivalency can't be edited and published. To edit and publish an active record, unpublish the learning equivalency first and try again. ## Validate Transfer Credit Applications Make informed transfer credit decisions and fulfill degree requirements for a course credit transfer application. Use the Validate Course Credit Transfer Applications screen flow to validate records, and verify that each record is attached to a matching case and has an Approved status. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To validate transfer credit applications: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the applicant. 3. From the actions menu, select **Articulate**. 4. Click **Validate Transfer Credits**. 5. Review and correct the validation errors in the articulation. ## Post Transfer Credits Evaluate and assign approved transfer credits directly to student program plans and view how they affect degree requirements. Edit grades, select posting reasons, and perform bulk actions before you update the academic record. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To post transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the applicant. 3. From the actions menu, select **Articulate**. 4. Click **Post Transfer Credits**. Resolve validation errors before posting credits. You can post only credits that aren't posted. 5. Edit the Duration, Duration Units, Letter Grade, Numeric Grade, and Reason fields inline. 6. To apply the same changes to multiple course credit transfer applications, select the applications and click **Bulk Edit**. Change the duration, duration units, letter grade, numeric grade, and reason and then click **Update Selected**. 7. Click **Post**. 8. Posting transfer credits creates these records: - A learner achievement record for each internal learning. - A learner achievement method record for each course credit transfer application and learner achievement. - A learner program requirement progress record if a program plan is selected. 9. Review the high-level credit utilization and impact header metrics with a credit calculation summary and breakdown.
Inbound Credit Utilization RateComputes and displays the utilization metric.
Requirement Completion Impact EstimateComputes and shows the metrics.
# Manage Trigger Handlers Trigger Handler records are a fundamental part of Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). The Trigger Handler object is a Salesforce object like any other (Accounts, Contacts, etc.). Fields on the object manage the behavior of the triggers built within the TDTM framework. With just a few clicks, you can change the way your code behaves. For example, the Active field specifies if a piece of code, an Apex class, runs when it's called by the trigger. Load Order controls the sequence in which Apex classes for the same object run. Usernames to Exclude deactivates an Apex class, but only for the users you specify. These and other settings are controlled through fields on Trigger Handler records. Your Education Data Architecture package includes a Trigger Handler record for each of the package's Apex classes; you don't have to create them when you install Education Data Architecture. For any custom Apex class that you plan to include in the TDTM framework, create a Trigger Handler record that references it so that you can accurately control the behavior of your code. We won't go into the details of how to create Apex classes for TDTM here—just remember that when you do, Trigger Handlers are part of the deployment process. To prevent duplication of the automation caused by reentrancy, maintain one trigger per object. For more information, see [Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm). # Manage Trigger Handlers for NPSP Learn about trigger handlers that are used in Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). - **[Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Trigger Handler records are a fundamental part of Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). The Trigger Handler object is a Salesforce object like any other (Accounts, Contacts, etc.). Fields on the object manage the behavior of the triggers built within the TDTM framework. With just a few clicks, you can change the way your code behaves. - **[Prerequisites for Managing Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can manage Trigger Handlers, make sure they are set up correctly in your org and are ready to use. - **[View Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Trigger Handlers are records just like any other, so you can create list views to filter and sort the records. Access the Trigger Handler records via the Trigger Handlers tab. - **[Edit a Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An administrator can edit Trigger Handler records to deactivate them, change their load order, change which users will execute the Apex class, and so on. A common reason to edit a Trigger Handler is to disable it. - **[Create a New Trigger Handler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the steps to add a custom Apex class to the TDTM architecture. - **[Monitor TDTM Framework Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_trigger_handlers_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you've created custom triggers, stay current with product releases to identify any changes to our TDTM framework that might require changes to your custom triggers. ## Manage Trigger Handlers Trigger Handler records are a fundamental part of Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). The Trigger Handler object is a Salesforce object like any other (Accounts, Contacts, etc.). Fields on the object manage the behavior of the triggers built within the TDTM framework. With just a few clicks, you can change the way your code behaves. For example, the Active field specifies if a piece of code, an Apex class, runs when it's called by the trigger. Load Order controls the sequence in which Apex classes for the same object run. Usernames to Exclude deactivates an Apex class, but only for the users you specify. These and other settings are controlled through fields on Trigger Handler records. Your NPSP package includes a Trigger Handler record for each of the package's Apex classes; you don't have to create them when you install NPSP. For any custom Apex class that you plan to include in the TDTM framework, create a Trigger Handler record that references it so that you can accurately control the behavior of your code. We won't go into the details of how to create Apex classes for TDTM here—just remember that when you do, Trigger Handlers are part of the deployment process. To prevent duplication of the automation caused by reentrancy, maintain one trigger per object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note In Developer and Developer Pro sandboxes, you must prompt NPSP to create the default Trigger Handler records. You can either: - Load the NPSP Settings page. - Create a record in one of the objects managed by TDTM such as a Contact, Account, Opportunity, etc. For more information, see [Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm) . ## Prerequisites for Managing Trigger Handlers Before you can manage Trigger Handlers, make sure they are set up correctly in your org and are ready to use. - Enable Administrator Access to Trigger Handler Fields - Verify Fields on Trigger Handler Layout - Create a Tab - Edit List View ### Enable Administrator Access to Trigger Handler Fields Confirm that the System Administrator profile has Read and Edit access to all Trigger Handler fields. (If you're not sure how to adjust access to fields, read [Set Field Permissions in Permission Sets and Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_fls.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help.) - Active - Asynchronous After Events - Class - Load Order - Object - Trigger Action - Trigger Handler Name - User Managed - Usernames to Exclude ### Verify Fields on Trigger Handler Layout Confirm that all the Trigger Handler fields are present on the Trigger Handler Layout. (If you're not sure how to adjust page layouts, read [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help.) ### Create a Trigger Handler Tab Create a Tab for the Trigger Handler object so you can edit Trigger Handler records. (If you're not sure how to create Tabs, refer to [Create a Custom Object Tab](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=creating_custom_object_tabs.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help.) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend that you assign Tab Visibility only to the System Administrator profile. No one except your administrator should work with Trigger Handler records. Ensure that the tab is hidden for all other profiles. For more information on Tab settings, see [View and Edit Tab Settings in Permission Sets or Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_tab_visibility.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help. ### Add Columns to the Trigger Handler List View The first time you access the Trigger Handler tab, you can only see the Trigger Handler Name column. Make it easier to see what's going on by adding more columns to the view. 1. Go to the Trigger Handler tab and change the list view to All. 2. Click List View Controls ![List View icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/list-view-controls_1.png) and click **Select Fields to Display**. 3. You can choose which fields to include here, but we recommend these fields in this order: - Trigger Handler Name - Object - Class - Load Order - Trigger Action - Active - User Managed - Usernames to Exclude ## View Trigger Handlers Trigger Handlers are records just like any other, so you can create list views to filter and sort the records. Access the Trigger Handler records via the Trigger Handlers tab. 1. Click the **Trigger Handlers** tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Sometimes the Trigger Handler tab isn't visible by default. If you don't see it, click the More tab. If you still don't see it, from the App Launcher, find and select Trigger Handlers. (Items are listed alphabetically.) **Only System Administrators** should have access to the Trigger Handler tab. As a best practice, remove access for all other Profiles. 2. Select the **All** list view to see the full list of Trigger Handler records. ![Trigger Handler Tab with All List View](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/eda-trigger-handlers-tab.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also view (but not edit) your Trigger Handler records in **NPSP Settings** | **System Tools** | **Trigger Configuration**. ## Edit a Trigger Handler An administrator can edit Trigger Handler records to deactivate them, change their load order, change which users will execute the Apex class, and so on. A common reason to edit a Trigger Handler is to disable it. For more information, read [Disable Table-Driven Trigger Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_disable_trigger_handlers.htm) . 1. Click the **Trigger Handler** Tab. 2. Click the name of the Trigger Handler you want to edit. 3. Click **Edit**. ![Record edit action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/tdtm-edit-button.png) You can edit these Trigger Handler details: ![Trigger Handler edit dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/tdtm-npsp-edit-modal.png) **Trigger Handler Name (1)**—Trigger Handlers provided with NPSP use a record ID for the record name. If you create new Trigger Handler records via NPSP Settings, they will also use a record ID for the name. If you create them through the Trigger Handler tab, you can follow your own naming convention. **Class (2)**—Name of the Apex class this Trigger Handler manages. If the class exists within a managed package you created, include the namespace prefix. **Object (3)**—Name of the object, that when modified, runs the Apex class. For NPSP custom objects, omit the namespace prefix (that is, use Address\_\_c, not npsp\_\_Address\_\_c). **Trigger Action (4)**—Trigger actions that this Apex class runs on. Before Insert, After Update, and so on. **Load Order (5)**—Order in which Apex classes for the same object run. Use sequential whole numbers starting with 0. **Active (6)**—Indicates whether the Trigger Handler is active or not. **Asynchronous After Events (7)**—Allows this Apex class to run asynchronously. Requires that your Apex class supports asynchronous processing. NPSP classes are not designed to run asynchronously. Test thoroughly if you enable this option. **User Managed (8)**—Indicates that your org has customized this Trigger Handler and prevents it from reverting to default settings during a package upgrade. Enable User Managed on any packaged Trigger Handlers that you have modified to preserve your changes. **Usernames to Exclude (9)**—A list of semicolon-separated Salesforce usernames that this Apex class should NOT run for. Leave this field blank to allow the class to run for all users. ![Trigger Handler edit dialog](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/tdtm-eda-trigger-handler-edit-old.png) 4. Remember to **Save** your changes. ![Record Save action](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/save-a-record.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Be careful when changing NPSP Trigger Handler records. They are designed to work in conjunction with each other and changing or disabling them can lead to undesirable results. Always test in a Sandbox environment before changing Trigger Handlers in production! ## Create a New Trigger Handler Review the steps to add a custom Apex class to the TDTM architecture. - Coding your custom Apex class. - Writing a test Apex class. - Creating a Trigger Handler for your custom Apex class. - Testing in a sandbox environment. - Deploying to production. Creating custom Apex classes is beyond the scope of this article. For a detailed walk-through, see [Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_deploy_apex_tdtm.htm). ## Monitor TDTM Framework Changes If you've created custom triggers, stay current with product releases to identify any changes to our TDTM framework that might require changes to your custom triggers. For example, if we release Trigger Handlers for objects for which you had previously created custom triggers, we recommend deleting your custom triggers. Maintaining one trigger for each object helps avoid re-entrancy issues. # Manage Volunteer Programs Use Volunteer Management in Education Cloud to streamline program management, enhance the volunteer experience, track hours, and report metrics. In Experience Cloud create a portal to post opportunities and let volunteers browse, search, and sign up for volunteer opportunities. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Features and use cases include: - Manage volunteer programs such as alumni mentoring, parent associations, and campus events. - Communicate volunteer opportunities and facilitate sign-up on an Experience Cloud site. - Collect and evaluate volunteer applications. - Schedule volunteers and track volunteer hours. - Report on volunteer impact. # Manage Volunteers Understand which objects you use to manage volunteers and how to set up people, skills, and shifts. Access prebuilt reports and dashboards that show your organization’s volunteering activities. - **[Track and Identify Your Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_track.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Volunteers for Salesforce, Contact records are highly important because they are used to track all of your volunteers—active, inactive, and prospective. Each Contact record contains a volunteer's phone, email, and address, their special skills, the days and times they're available to volunteer, their volunteer status, and a Volunteer Hours related list where you can see how many hours they've committed to your organization. - **[Manage, Track, and Assign Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are multiple ways to assign volunteers to Shifts, including allowing volunteers to sign up directly from your website (more on that in Sign Up for a Job Shift.) You can also sign up volunteers yourself by assigning them to Shifts in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Track Volunteer Participation with Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce includes reports and dashboards that provide a ton of useful information about your volunteer program. You can use these reports and dashboards to analyze volunteer trends so that you can decide where to focus your volunteer efforts. Volunteers for Salesforce includes more than 25 reports and one dashboard. # Manage Volunteers for Salesforce Events Set up single or recurring events in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[One-Time Volunteers for Salesforce Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_1time_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review recommendations for planning one-time volunteer events, and then set up the event hierarchy, jobs, and shifts. - **[Recurring Volunteers for Salesforce Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_recurr_events.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the general steps for setting up recurring volunteer events. Then, create the event hierarchy, jobs, shifts, and schedules. # Manage Your Day With the Appointment Manager (Support Staff) Learn your way around the Appointment Manager in Student Success Hub. The Appointment Manager helps you prepare for your day and get the most out of your support engagements. - Get a high-level overview of your appointments for the day or week ahead. - Preview records for the students that you're meeting with. - Reschedule appointments, schedule a follow-up meeting, and assign tasks to a student on the spot. - Quickly log ad hoc appointments when students drop by your office. - Join a virtual appointment with the click of a button. To open the Appointment Manager, click **Appointment Manager** in the utility bar in the page footer. ![The Appointment Manager button in the utility bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_collapsed.png) The Appointment Manager window opens over the app. Select an appointment from the schedule to see its details, including the Agenda and the Attendee list in the Appointment Details panel on the left \[1\]. See key details for a selected appointment attendee in the Attendee Snapshot panel on the right \[2\]. ![The Appointment Manager with call-outs on the Appointment Details panel, the Attendee Snapshot panel, the appointment Action button, the attendee Action button, and the View Appointment button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_advising_event_panels.png) With an appointment selected, you can do many things. - Under the Appointment Details and Attendee Snapshot panels, click **Action** \[3\] to cancel, edit, end, or schedule a follow-up appointment. You can also apply a Success Plan, add a Note, or send an email to all appointment attendees who have a student record Case. - To open an Appointment record, click **View Appointment** \[4\] in the Appointment Details panel. - For virtual appointments, click **Join Web Meeting** in the Appointment Details panel to enter the meeting at the designated start time. - To perform actions for a specific student attendee, scroll in the Appointment Details panel to locate the card with the student's name, profile picture (or placeholder), and status \[5\]. Click **Action** in the student's card to add a Note, apply a Success Plan, create a Task, or send an email to that student. On or after the appointment start time, you can also mark any attendee (student or not) as a no show. - View comments an attendee has entered from the portal. The Comments header appears on the attendee card even if the student hasn't entered any comments. - With an attendee selected in the Appointment Details panel, the Attendee Snapshot panel displays the Last Appointment, Tasks, and Alerts fields from the Student Snapshot (the component that appears on the student record Case page). Below that, the Attendee Snapshot displays Contact Information for the student: Their Email, Phone, and Student ID, if available. Click **View Student Record** to go to the attendee's student record Case page. If the attendee is another support staff member and not a student, then the Attendee Snapshot shows the individual's title, photo, and Contact Information (Email and Phone) if available, and you can click **View Record** to go to their Contact or User record page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Non-support Events, such as a doctor appointment that you created from your Calendar, also appear in the Appointment Manager schedule. Just remember: - [Non-support Events](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub.") that span multiple days don't appear. - The Action button isn't available for non-support Events. - You can click **View Appointment** to open a non-support Event record. Use the date selection buttons to navigate to yesterday, today, tomorrow, or another date. Or click **Up Next** to go to your next scheduled appointment. ![The Appointment Manager with a call-out on the date selection navigation buttons](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_am_date_selectors.png) To close the Appointment Manager, click![The Minimize icon, which is a minus sign](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_appt_manager_minimize.png)) in the header. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The Appointment Manager displays as a fixed-size window that floats over the app. For more flexibility click![The Pop-out icon, which is an arrow that points up and to the right](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_popout_icon.png) in the header to open the Appointment Manager in a standalone browser window that you can freely resize. Click ![The Pop-in icon, which is an arrow that points down and to the left](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_popin_icon.png) to restore the floating window when you're done. # Manage Your Programs with NPSP and Program Management Module (PMM) Add Program Management Module (PMM) to NPSP to include program management in your nonprofit's super-hero utility belt. PMM is a simple program management tool designed to work in any Salesforce environment.  Use PMM to track your organization’s programs and services, and follow the journeys of the constituents involved with your programs. PMM lets you define a standard unit of measurement for each of your services, so you can track what you deliver to your constituents and understand how your programs are performing. The reports and dashboards included with PMM make it easy to report on the status and progress of individuals, segments, programs, and service deliveries so that you can track your daily work, evaluate program performance, and report to your donors.  When you use PMM with NPSP,  you can use Household Accounts and Relationships to deepen your understanding of your constituents, not only for fundraising but also for mission delivery. For example, if your organization provides educational assistance to at-risk youth, your development staff can use the Household Account and Relationship objects to identify and track donor prospects, and your program staff can use those same objects to track a student’s learning support network. With NPSP and PMM you get visibility into: - Fundraising and donor tracking - Program management and constituent tracking - Mission delivery performance For more information and to get started with PMM, see [Program Management Module Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.program_management_module.htm). # Manage Your Programs with Program Management Module (PMM) Learn what the PMM package includes, some common use cases, and how to map your programs to the PMM data model. As a program manager, your work is at the heart of the programs and services that benefit your constituents and advance your mission. Whether you work for a disaster relief organization running a wildfire relief program; a nature conservation organization providing habitat cleanup services; an animal welfare organization, overseeing animal rescue and placement services; a cancer awareness organization, organizing family and patient support groups; a homeless advocacy organization, distributing food as part of a community outreach program; or any other organization dedicated to making the world a better place—no matter what your mission, Program Management Module (PMM) is here to help you: - Define the programs and services that you provide. - Track the people, households, organizations, or other entities that have applied for and enrolled in programs, including those on a waitlist. - See service recipients grouped by common criteria, such as those who receive services at the same location. - See the number of services distributed or delivered, and to what recipients. - Report on program utilization and other trends to see how well your programs and services are performing. - Do all of this without spreadsheets! PMM works in any Salesforce environment, although it performs best with NPSP. PMM also comes with reports and dashboards so you can easily see trends in enrollment, Services delivered, and other key metrics to track program performance. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Program Management Module](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2aOey95tGzE). - **[PMM Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** PMM uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects and some custom objects. - **[PMM Use Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** PMM is so flexible that it works for any organization that provides programs and services. - **[Map Your Programs to the Data Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use a downloadable slide deck to help you think through mapping. ## PMM Objects PMM uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects and some custom objects. Here are the custom objects tailored specifically for program management: - Programs are thematic areas that make up your organization's mission. Examples of Programs include wildfire relief, environmental cleanup, animal rescue, patient support, or food distribution for the homeless. - Services are the activities that make up your Programs. Services in a wildfire relief program might include clean water distribution and providing emergency shelter, while services in a cancer support program might include patient support groups and caregiver education resources. - Program Engagements are the relationship between Programs and who, or what, they benefit. Program Engagements can be associated with Contacts (clients), Household Accounts (households), Organization Accounts (other organizations or schools), or custom objects (other entities, such as animals or stream beds). Program Engagements can track things like who has applied for emergency shelter, which habitat is planned for cleanup, or who is on a waitlist to join a support group. - Program Cohorts are a grouping of Program Engagements based on program cycle, location, date, or any other criteria that's meaningful to your organization. An example Program Cohort is anyone enrolled in a support group for the winter cycle of your program. - Service Deliveries represent a specific instance of a Service that was delivered, including the recipient of the service, when they received the service, and how much was delivered. An example of a Service Delivery is: Tim attended a support group on September 12th for one hour. - Service Schedules are scheduled instances of a service to be provided, like a class or event. Service Schedules can be a single session or a recurring schedule of sessions, and they can serve individuals or groups. An example of a Service Schedule is an English class held every Wednesday night from 6-8 PM for 6 weeks. - Service Participants are people who signed up for a Service Schedule. If Tom signs up for a Thursday night English class, he is a Service Participant. Tom can also be a Service Participant in other Service Schedules, and all of them will show up on his Program Engagement. A Service Participant can also be linked directly to a Service. This can be helpful for planning if you know a participant should receive a service but you aren't sure which Service Schedule will work for them yet. - Service Session is a single instance of a Service Schedule. In a Service Schedule of classes running for 6 weeks, each class is a Service Session. ## PMM Use Cases PMM is so flexible that it works for any organization that provides programs and services. ### Example 1: Managing Multiple Programs A youth development organization provides arts enrichment and college readiness programs for high school students in a large city. This organization manages multiple programs and services using PMM. Here’s how the youth development organization set up PMM: - Program: Arts Enrichment for high school students - Program Cohort: Students are grouped into cohorts by school - Program Engagement: Mary is enrolled in the Arts Enrichment program, and this information also shows up on Mary’s Contact record - Service: A watercolor class, measured by hours attended - Service Schedule: The watercolor class is offered on Monday and Wednesday afternoons from 3-4 PM - Service Participant: Mary is a participant in the Monday and Wednesday afternoon watercolor class - Service Session: Monday, October 5th watercolor class - Service Delivery: Mary attended 1 hour of the watercolor class on Monday, October 5th - Program: College Readiness  - Program Cohort: Students are grouped by grade level - Service: A college application workshop, measured by the number of applications submitted ### Example 2: Managing a Single Program An environmental organization offers one program, youth outdoor education, which is available to students of all ages in a small suburban area. This organization uses PMM to track a single program. Here’s how the environmental organization set up PMM: - Program: Youth outdoor education for students - Program Engagement: Marco is enrolled in the youth outdoor education program - Program Cohort: Participants are grouped by the Winter or Spring cycle - Service: A summer day camp, measured by days attended - Service Schedule: The Marsh Exploration Camp is held from July 5th through July 16th, Monday through Friday - Service Session: Monday, July 5th day of camp - Service Participant: Marco is a participant in the Monday, July 5th day of camp - Service Delivery: Marco attended 1 day of the Marsh Exploration Camp on Monday, July 5th ### Example 3: Providing Services to Other Organizations A financial literacy organization offers educational curriculum programs to schools. They use an Organization Account to track program engagements for schools instead of Clients. To learn more about using Organization Accounts, check out [Customize Recipients of Programs and Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add organization accounts or custom objects to program engagements and service deliveries, and and customize recipients on bulk service deliveries, quick actions, and record naming.").  Here’s how the financial literacy organization set up PMM: - Program: Financial literacy curriculum for schools provided in two program cycles, Winter and Spring - Program Engagement: North Elementary School participates in the financial literacy curriculum program - Service: Train the trainer workshop to train teachers to implement the financial literacy curriculum - Service Schedule: The train the trainer workshop is offered on the first Tuesday of every month at 4 PM - Service Delivery: Provided training to 15 teachers at North Elementary School on January 8th - Service: Financial literacy curriculum kits - Service Delivery: Provided 25 curriculum kits to North Elementary School on January 15th ### Example 4: Providing Services to Recipients other than Clients An animal rescue organization uses a custom object to track services delivered to Animals instead of Clients. To learn more about using custom objects, check out [Customize Recipients of Programs and Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add organization accounts or custom objects to program engagements and service deliveries, and and customize recipients on bulk service deliveries, quick actions, and record naming.").  Here’s how the animal rescue organization set up PMM: - Program: Animal rescue - Service: Vet checkup for rescued animals - Program Engagement: Fido is added to the animal rescue program using the Animal custom object - Program Cohort: Animals are grouped by where they came in, either the San Francisco Intake Center or the Oakland Intake Center - Service Delivery: Fido received 1 rabies booster on February 5th ### Example 5: Providing Case Management Services A human services organization has multiple types of programs. Their long-term housing program is only for enrolled clients, but they also offer an emergency assistance program available to anyone in need. PMM is perfect for tracking the emergency assistance program without the need to track individual recipients. For the long-term housing program, the organization uses [Nonprofit Cloud Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.case_management.htm) for better long-term client management. Here’s how the human services organization set up PMM and Nonprofit Cloud Case Management: - Program: Long term housing  - Program Cohort: Clients are grouped by the year they entered the program - Program Engagement: Maddie is enrolled in the long term housing program - Service: Individual counseling - Case managers work with individual clients like Maddie, using Case Management to track goals and progress towards obtaining permanent housing - Program: Emergency assistance for community members in need - Program Engagement: This organization doesn't use program engagements for the emergency assistance program because they don’t track individual service recipients - Service: Emergency food assistance - Service Delivery: Distributed 20 bags of groceries on February 15th ## Map Your Programs to the Data Model Use a downloadable slide deck to help you think through mapping. It’s important to talk with your team and decide how you want to map your organization’s programs and services to the data model. This [downloadable slide deck](https://power-of-us-hub-doc.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Mapping_Programs_Services_PMM.pptx) provides exercises, definitions, and common use cases to help you make these decisions. Complete these mapping exercises before doing any configuration so you can capture the data you need from the start, and so that reports produce the data you need. Happy mapping! # Manage Your Student Portal Customize site emails, add members, and preview, test, publish and promote your Student Success Hub portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Customize Site Emails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Email notifications sent from an Experience Cloud site are managed separately from the appointment email notifications sent to support staff and students. As part of customizing your portal's branding (not covered in this documentation), remember to also customize the branding and contents of site emails, and control when they're sent. - **[Add Site Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the users who can access your student portal. - **[Preview, Test, and Activate the Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before launching your site, test it thoroughly while logged in as a student User. Verify access to and display of all the pages you've published. Verify that the contents of email notifications are updated and that you've remembered to re-enable the welcome emails that you disabled to reduce noise during setup. - **[Promote the Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Encourage students to upload their profile photos in the portal so that support staff can put faces to names when viewing Student Record Cases in Student Success Hub. Profile photos are displayed on the Contact record. ## Customize Site Emails Email notifications sent from an Experience Cloud site are managed separately from the appointment email notifications sent to support staff and students. As part of customizing your portal's branding (not covered in this documentation), remember to also customize the branding and contents of site emails, and control when they're sent. For more information about notifications, see [Set Up Email for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to configure when and how Student Success Hub sends appointment-related emails to support staff and students."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important While you're setting up your portal, pay extra attention to the setting for sending welcome emails to new members. Make sure that it's turned off until you've finalized membership and are ready to open the site to students. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to your site's name. 3. Click the **Administration** workspace, and then click **Emails**. 4. Verify and customize settings as needed, again making sure that you disable the Send welcome email option until you're ready to launch the site. ## Add Site Members Configure the users who can access your student portal. 1. In the Administration workspace, click **Members**. 2. In the Select Profiles section, to add the Customer Community Plus User, Customer Community Plus Login User, or your own custom student profile, change the Search selection to **Customer** and add the appropriate profiles to the Selected Profiles list. To add the System Administrator, Student Success Hub support staff, or a custom support staff profile, change the Search selection to **Internal** and add the appropriate profiles. 3. Save your changes. ## Preview, Test, and Activate the Site Before launching your site, test it thoroughly while logged in as a student User. Verify access to and display of all the pages you've published. Verify that the contents of email notifications are updated and that you've remembered to re-enable the welcome emails that you disabled to reduce noise during setup. For help with common issues, see [Troubleshoot the Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn ways to resolve common problems with building and managing your Student Success Hub portal.") and [Troubleshoot Field-Level Security Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Fix permissions errors that occur in Student Success Hub."). When you're ready to launch, activate the site so that all of your customizations take effect, and then activate it to make it available to students. 1. In the site's Administration workspace, click **Settings**. 2. Click **Activate**, and then click **OK**. Your student portal is now open for business! ## Promote the Site Encourage students to upload their profile photos in the portal so that support staff can put faces to names when viewing Student Record Cases in Student Success Hub. Profile photos are displayed on the Contact record. 1. After the student logs in to the portal (following the link in the welcome email), in the page header, click the student's name, then click **My Profile**. 2. Click the camera icon next to the profile photo placeholder and upload a photo. 3. Save the changes. # Manage Your Work Find your way around the nonprofit Case Management managed package. Use Activities and Calendars. - **[Find Your Way Around](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_salesforce_instance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the Case Management app and where to find the information you need. - **[Track Your Work with Activities and Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_activities_calendar_workflow_funct.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to use standard Salesforce activities and calendar functionality in your case management work. # Manage, Track, and Assign Volunteers There are multiple ways to assign volunteers to Shifts, including allowing volunteers to sign up directly from your website (more on that in Sign Up for a Job Shift.) You can also sign up volunteers yourself by assigning them to Shifts in Volunteers for Salesforce. When you assign a volunteer to a Shift (or when a volunteer signs up for a Shift on your website), V4S creates a Volunteer Hours record for that volunteer. You can use the Volunteer Hours record to track the details of a volunteer's time, including whether the volunteer actually showed up. Volunteer Hours allow you to track volunteers at different points in the process, from prospect to confirmed to completed (or, hopefully not, no-show). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you change a volunteer's Status on the Volunteer Hours record to either Confirmed or Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact record is automatically updated to Active. Volunteer Hours records are always associated with both the Contact and the Volunteer Job. Why does this matter? Well, this means you can view an individual volunteer's Contact record to see details of all the hours they've donated to your organization. Or, you can look at a particular Job to see the list of all the Volunteer Hours contributed by various volunteers for that particular Job. - **[Assign Volunteers to Shifts (using Mass Edit Volunteer Hours)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can manually (and easily) assign volunteers in Volunteers for Salesforce. This is useful if you have a list of volunteers interested in particular Shifts. For example, when Sarah's community kitchen holds orientation sessions for their upcoming annual gala, they pass around a signup sheet where people write down which Shift they want to sign up for. Then the volunteer manager has a written list that she needs to enter into Volunteers for Salesforce. Fortunately, she can easily do this using the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours feature. - **[Assign a Volunteer from the Find Volunteers Search Results Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Find Volunteers page is very helpful for figuring out which volunteers are a match for your event. And even better, you can easily assign them to Shifts right from the Find Volunteers page. - **[Sign Up a Recurring Volunteer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're lucky enough to have a volunteer (or multiple volunteers) that want to sign up at a regular interval for a recurring Job, you can easily do that using a Volunteer Recurrence Schedule. - **[Record Hours for a Single Volunteer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can manually enter Volunteer Hours on a Contact's record. This is particularly useful if you need to enter hours for a single volunteer. For example, let's say Elizabeth Wong showed up for one of the community kitchen's food distribution shifts. She hadn't signed up for that shift, but she is a dedicated volunteer and you want to track her work in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Record Hours for a Specific Job or Shift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can enter all the Volunteer Hours for a specific Job and Shift in one place. The Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page was designed to make it easy to enter or update Volunteer Hours for multiple people and even on multiple Jobs and Shifts. - **[Reconcile Volunteer Hours](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you already entered Volunteer Hours for a Shift, you can use the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page to easily reconcile hours after volunteers complete their Shifts. ## Assign Volunteers to Shifts (using Mass Edit Volunteer Hours) You can manually (and easily) assign volunteers in Volunteers for Salesforce. This is useful if you have a list of volunteers interested in particular Shifts. For example, when Sarah's community kitchen holds orientation sessions for their upcoming annual gala, they pass around a signup sheet where people write down which Shift they want to sign up for. Then the volunteer manager has a written list that she needs to enter into Volunteers for Salesforce. Fortunately, she can easily do this using the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours feature. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Assign Volunteers to Shifts](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bLMujArgUlI) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The volunteers you want to assign must all exist as Contacts in your org. If you haven't already created Contacts for them, you must do so before editing Volunteer Hours. 1. On the Shift Calendar, click a Shift. (You can also get to a Shift from the Volunteer Shifts related list on a Volunteer Job.) 2. On the Shift detail page, click the Related tab. 3. On the Volunteer Hours related list, click **Mass Edit Volunteer Hours**. ![Mass Edit Volunteer Hours button on the Volunteer Shift record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_edit_vol_hours_button.png) Since you came to this page directly from a Shift, the Volunteer Shift field will be set to that Shift. This ensures that you're entering volunteers for the correct Shift. 4. In the first row, enter a Contact's name. You can also click the search icon to search for the Contact. 5. Enter a status for the volunteer. For example, if they asked to sign up, you might use the Confirmed status. If you think the person might be interested based on past volunteer signups, you could use Prospect. Use the Completed status only after they've completed the Shift. - Prospect—You identified the Contact as a potential volunteer for the Shift. - Confirmed—The volunteer is confirmed and expected to show up for the Shift. - Completed—The volunteer showed up for and participated in the Shift. - No-Show—The volunteer didn't show up for the Shift. - Web Signup—The volunteer signed up through your website. This status is automatically set by V4S. - Canceled—The volunteer can no longer make it to the Shift. This status prevents the system from re-assigning a recurring volunteer to this Shift. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select a Status of Confirmed or Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact is automatically updated to Active. ![Shift selected on the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_edit_vol_hours.png) 6. Click **Save**. Now, let's say you want to sign up a volunteer for a different Shift or Job. You can easily do that from this page! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't forget to save each time you finish your edits for a given Job or Shift. This page allows you to move to a different Job or Shift, and if you do so without saving, you will lose your changes. 7. Choose the Job or Shift whose hours you want to edit. 1. To choose a new Shift for the same Job, select the Shift from the Volunteer Shift drop-down. 2. To choose a new Job, select the new Job from the Volunteer Job drop-down. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want to assign volunteers to one specific Shift for the Job, choose the Shift in the Volunteer Shift drop-down. To assign volunteers to different Shifts on the new Job, leave the Volunteer Shift drop-down blank. When that field is blank, you can enter a Shift time in each volunteer row. 8. Enter the Contact name, Shift information (if you left the Volunteer Shift drop-down blank), and set the status. For example, we added two volunteers for the Wait Staff Job, but assigned them each to a different Shift. ![Higlighting the Volunteer Shift on the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_edit_vol_hours_multi_shift.png) 9. Click **Save**, then repeat this process for any other volunteers on your list. ## Assign a Volunteer from the Find Volunteers Search Results Page The Find Volunteers page is very helpful for figuring out which volunteers are a match for your event. And even better, you can easily assign them to Shifts right from the Find Volunteers page. 1. Click the Find Volunteers tab. 2. Enter criteria to search for volunteers. For example, you could search for volunteers who are available on weekday mornings and who have computer skills. 3. Click **Find**. 4. In the Volunteers section of the page, select the volunteers to assign. 5. In the Assign to a Job or Shift section, select the Campaign, Volunteer Job, Volunteer Shift, and Status. ![Assigning volunteers to a shift from the Find Volunteers search results](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/find_volunteers_assign.png) 6. Click **Assign**. You can verify the assignment by visiting one of the volunteer's Contact records. The assignment shows on the Volunteer Hours related list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note In the Assign to a Job or Shift section, all Volunteer Jobs are shown in the list regardless of their status, as long as they are part of an active Campaign. Also, only active Campaigns are shown in the drop-down list in the Assign to a Job or Shift section. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select a Status of Confirmed or Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact is automatically updated to Active. ## Sign Up a Recurring Volunteer If you're lucky enough to have a volunteer (or multiple volunteers) that want to sign up at a regular interval for a recurring Job, you can easily do that using a Volunteer Recurrence Schedule. We'll talk more about recurring volunteers in [Sign Up a Recurring Volunteer using Volunteer Recurrence Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_volunteer_vrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you have ongoing Jobs (created using a Job Recurrence Schedule), you may be lucky enough to have dedicated volunteers who want to sign up for Shifts on a regular basis. You can use the Volunteers for Salesforce Volunteer Recurrence Schedule to easily set up a recurring schedule for a regular volunteer. You can specify when the schedule starts and ends, and which days of the week and month the volunteer wants to work."). ## Record Hours for a Single Volunteer You can manually enter Volunteer Hours on a Contact's record. This is particularly useful if you need to enter hours for a single volunteer. For example, let's say Elizabeth Wong showed up for one of the community kitchen's food distribution shifts. She hadn't signed up for that shift, but she is a dedicated volunteer and you want to track her work in Volunteers for Salesforce. 1. Search for your volunteer to find her Contact record. 2. Click on the Contact's name to bring up the Contact detail page. 3. Click the Related tab, then scroll to the Volunteer Hours related list. 4. In the Volunteer Hours related list, click **New**. ![New button on the Volunteer Hours related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_volunteers_hours.png) 5. Fill in the required fields. 1. **Volunteer Job**—Find the Volunteer Job that the Contact participated in. You can optionally also select a specific Shift. 2. **Start Date**—Enter the date that the Contact volunteered. 3. **Status**—Select the status of the volunteer. - Prospect—You identified the Contact as a potential volunteer for the Shift. - Confirmed—The volunteer is confirmed and expected to show up for the Shift. - Completed—The volunteer showed up for and participated in the Shift. - No-Show—The volunteer didn't show up for the Shift. - Web Signup—The volunteer signed up through your website. This status is automatically set by V4S. - Canceled—The volunteer can no longer make it to the Shift. This status prevents the system from re-assigning a recurring volunteer to this Shift. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select a Status of Confirmed or Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact is automatically updated to Active. 4. **Number of Volunteers**—For a specific individual, this is typically 1. If the Contact is a point person for a group of multiple volunteers, set this value to the total number of people in the group. 6. Optionally fill out any other fields. ![Create Volunteer Hours record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/create_volunteer_hours_single.png) 7. Click **Save**. ## Record Hours for a Specific Job or Shift You can enter all the Volunteer Hours for a specific Job and Shift in one place. The Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page was designed to make it easy to enter or update Volunteer Hours for multiple people and even on multiple Jobs and Shifts. 1. Go to the Volunteer Job or volunteer Shift you want to enter hours for. 2. Click the Related tab. 3. On the Volunteer Hours related list, click **Mass Edit Volunteer Hours**. 4. Change the Volunteer Job or Shift as needed. If you got to the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page from a Volunteer Job, the Job is automatically selected in the Volunteer Job drop-down. If you got to this page from a volunteer Shift, the Volunteer Job and volunteer Shift are both automatically selected. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want to enter volunteers for different Shifts on the same Job, you can clear the Volunteer Shift field. When that field is clear, you can enter a Shift time in each volunteer row. 5. Enter the Contact name. You can also use the lookup to find the Contact. 6. Set the status, based on whether or not the volunteer completed their volunteer hours. - Completed—The volunteer showed up for and participated in the Shift. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select a Status of Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact is automatically updated to Active. - No-Show—The volunteer didn't show up for the Shift. - Canceled—The volunteer can no longer make it to the Shift. This status prevents the system from re-assigning a recurring volunteer to this Shift. 7. Enter the hours worked. The hours set for the Shift will automatically appear, but you can adjust the number based on how long the volunteer actually worked. ![Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page populated with volunteers](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_edit_hours_shift.png) 8. Click **Save**. 9. To enter hours for another Job or Shift, update the Volunteer Job and/or Volunteer Shift drop-downs at the top of the page. Be sure to save each time you enter info for a new Job or Shift. ## Reconcile Volunteer Hours If you already entered Volunteer Hours for a Shift, you can use the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page to easily reconcile hours after volunteers complete their Shifts. For example, you had five volunteers signed up for the March 25 Shift. They all committed to working 3 hours. Here is the sign-in sheet for the Shift: | Name | Time In | Time Out | | --- | --- | --- | | Robert Bender | 9:00 a.m. | 12:00 p.m. | | Ruth Enos | 9:00 a.m. | 12:30 p.m. | | Victor Amore | (didn't show up) |   | | Anthony King | 9:00 a.m. | 11:45 a.m. | | Linda Matsumoto | 9:00 a.m. | 12:00 p.m. | Let's get this information updated in V4S. 1. Navigate to the Volunteer Shift record. You can get there from the Volunteer Job record's related list, or by clicking on the Shift from the Shift Calendar. 2. Click the Related tab. 3. On the Volunteer Hours related list, click **Mass Edit Volunteer Hours**. 4. In the status column, change the status for everyone who showed up to Completed. If a volunteer didn't show up, change the status to No Show. If the volunteer had to cancel, change the status to Canceled. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select a Status of Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact is automatically updated to Active. 5. In the Hours Worked column, adjust the hours worked based on the time each volunteer worked. ![Changing the Hours Worked on the Mass Edit Volunteer Hours page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_edit_hours_reconcile.png) 6. Click **Save**. Now, when you return to the Shift record, you see updated hours in the Volunteer Hours related list. # Manual Course Waitlist Management A registrar can manually update the waitlist status of a course offering and add or remove students from a waitlist. Understand how manual actions affect the status of a waitlist and a student's position on it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
A registrar can take these manual actions to manage course waitlists. Change a Waitlist Status Changes to a waitlist's status don’t affect the enrollment offers that are already extended to students. As needs change, a registrar can update the status manually. For example, if a waitlist fills up quickly, you can change its status from Open to Processing Only to prevent more students from joining the waitlist. Add Students to a Waitlist A registrar can add a student by creating or updating a course offering participant record with a participation status of Waitlisted. When you add a student, populate any course offering participant fields that you’ve configured on the Configure Course Waitlists setup page so that the student’s position on the waitlist can be accurately calculated. Remove Students from a Waitlist A registrar can remove a student by deleting the corresponding course offering participant record or changing the record’s participation status to Removed from Waitlist. Because this manual action doesn’t notify the student, we recommend that you configure a flow or other automation that notifies a student when you remove them from a waitlist. Enroll a Student from the Waitlist A registrar can enroll a student from a waitlist by changing the student’s course offering participant participation status to Eligible to Enroll from Waitlist. If this course has active enrollment offers to students, increase the course’s enrollment capacity when you manually update a student’s participation status. Alternatively, configure a screen flow to increase the enrollment capacity of a course offering and immediately enroll the student. Reorder the Waitlist The Course Offering Participant object doesn’t contain a field that determines a student’s position on a waitlist. The Student Information: Generate Enrollment Offers for Waitlisted Courses flow calculates this value dynamically. To increase or decrease a student’s position, change the fields on a course offering participant record, such as Waitlist Score or Added to Waitlist. However, we don’t recommend that you reorder students’ positions on a waitlist manually. SEE ALSO: - [Create a Waitlist for a Course Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_course_waitlist.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To create a waitlist for a course offering, assign a waitlist status and set a waitlist capacity.") - [Configure Course Waitlists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_course_waitlists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set student enrollment priority and timing, and add prebuilt flows to manage seat availability and enrollment notifications.") # Manually Assign a Mentor to a Mentee Assign or change the mentor who provides a benefit to a mentee.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permission Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To assign mentors to mentees: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Benefit Assignment record page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_benefit_assignment_record_2.png) 1. On the mentee's benefit assignment record, click **Details**. 2. Under Benefit & Enrollment Details, click **Edit Provider**. 3. Select the mentor who you want to assign to the mentee. 4. Save your changes. # Manually Create Rubric Assessment Questions Create or import your own assessment questions to use as rubric criteria. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To manually create questions for a rubric: Education Cloud Full Access
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you change the criteria, scale, or weighting of the included assessment questions, you must modify the included EDUAdmissions/CalculateAndSaveAssessmentScore Omnistudio Integration Procedure . Repeat these steps for each rubric variation. 1. Create or import your own assessment questions. See [Discovery Framework Assessment Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_work_with_discovery_framework.htm&language=en_US). We recommend that you select Admissions as the question category. 2. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Integration Procedures**. 3. Click **EDUAdmissions/CalculateAndSaveAssessmentScore**, and then click **CalculateAndSaveAssessmentScore (Version 1)**. The integration procedure opens in the Integration Procedure Designer. 4. Click **Create Version**. 5. In Type, delete EDUAdmissions and enter CalculateAndSaveAssessmentScore. 6. In SubType, enter a value that corresponds to the purpose of the rubric. For example, enter UndergraduateApplicationReview. 7. Save your changes. 8. Click **QuestionPrefs**. 9. Click **Edit as JSON**. 10. In the Weights section, confirm or update the values to reflect each new or modified assessment question. 1. For MaxScore, enter an integer that reflects the highest possible numerical rating. 2. For DeveloperName, enter the value of the Developer Name field on the Assessment Question record. 3. For Weight, enter a decimal that reflects the proportion of points allowed for the assessment question. The total weight of all qustions must be 1.0. 11. In the Scores section, confirm or update these values to reflect each new or modified assessment question. 1. For RawScore, enter an integer that reflects the value of the ResponseValue. This value is used for calculations and isn't visible to end users. 2. For ResponseValue, enter a response value from the related assessment question. This value is used for calculations and isn't visible to end users. 3. For DeveloperName, enter the value of the Devloper Name field on the Assessment Question record. Make sure that your entries in the Weights and Scores section align with your new assessment questions. For example, in the Weight section, if you have seven assessment questions, make sure you have seven MaxScore, DeveloperName, and Weight entries. In the Score section, if you have seven assessment questions, each with a maximum score of three, make sure you have 21 RawScore, ResponseValue, and DeveloperName entries. # Manually Create Soft Credits Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits. - **[Full Soft Credits Versus Partial Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are two kinds of soft credits in the Nonprofit Success Pack. A full soft credit is a soft credit for the entire amount of the donation. A partial soft credit is a soft credit for an amount that is only a portion of the larger donation. - **[Assign Full Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack creates soft credits based on Opportunity Contact Roles, and the settings you've specified. - **[Assign Partial Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manually assign partial soft credits to Contacts who have a role in donations you receive. - **[Create Account Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create soft credits for Accounts to track their role in donations you receive. - **[Create Account Contact Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Account Contact Soft Credit rollups aggregate all Household members' soft credits and roll them up to the Household. ## Full Soft Credits Versus Partial Soft Credits There are two kinds of soft credits in the Nonprofit Success Pack. A full soft credit is a soft credit for the entire amount of the donation. A partial soft credit is a soft credit for an amount that is only a portion of the larger donation. There are two kinds of soft credits in the Nonprofit Success Pack: A **full soft credit** is a soft credit for the entire amount of the donation. For example, Mary gives $100, Company Awesome matches $100, Mary gets soft credit for Company Awesome's $100 donation. You can create full soft credits manually, or enable [automated soft credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."). A **partial soft credit** is a soft credit for an amount that is only a portion of the larger donation. For example, organizations like Network for Good and United Way collect donations on behalf of an organization's constituents, and typically share them with nonprofits on a regular basis (monthly or quarterly). The nonprofit creates a single Opportunity record for the larger check received, but needs to soft credit its individual constituents accordingly. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Partial soft credits are also important for matching gifts, but we'll talk about that in another section. All Soft Credit attributions appear in the Contact Roles related list on an Opportunity. However, if the Opportunity includes partial soft credits, then the Soft Credit attribution **also** appears in the Opportunity's Partial Soft Credits related list. ![screenshot of soft credit related lists](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cr_soft_creds_softcredsrl.png) In the above example, we're using the "Soft Credit” Contact Role to track Partial Soft Credits on Opportunities. The screen shot shows a single $1000 donation that's come in from Network for Passthrough, with Soft Credit Contact Roles assigned to the four donors responsible for the aggregate donation. In the Partial Soft Credits related list, you can also see the amount that each individual gave, and thus the amount that will be rolled up to the Soft Credits section of each donor's Contact record. It's perfectly fine and expected to see the same soft credit listed in both the Contact Role and Partial Soft Credits related lists. **Every Partial Soft Credit record should have a corresponding Contact Role record**. Not every Contact Role record will have a corresponding Partial Soft Credit record. ## Assign Full Soft Credits Nonprofit Success Pack creates soft credits based on Opportunity Contact Roles, and the settings you've specified. If you haven't read the [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."), [Configure Soft Credit Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credit_match_gift_rollup_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring soft credit rollups."), and [Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."), you should do so before proceeding. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Full Soft Credits](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6HwFzj1MXZk). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important For soft credits to roll up from the Opportunity to the Contact's record, the Opportunity must be of a type that rolls up. In general you should not need to worry about this, unless you've excluded specific Opportunity types or record types from rolling up. 1. Navigate to an Opportunity record. 2. On the **Contact Roles** related list**,** click **Edit Contact Roles**. 3. Enter the Contact to whom you want to assign the soft credit. 4. Set the **Role** to the correct value. It should be a role that's been configured to receive soft credits. 5. Click **Add Row** to add another Contact Role. Once you've selected all Contacts and assigned roles, click **Save**. ## Assign Partial Soft Credits Manually assign partial soft credits to Contacts who have a role in donations you receive. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Partial Soft Credits](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q44pO38dFBo). The Nonprofit Success Pack creates soft credits based on Opportunity Contact Roles, and the settings you've specified. If you haven't read the [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence.") and [Configure Automated and Manual Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits."), you should do so before proceeding. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note NPSP How-To Series: [Partial Soft Credits](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q44pO38dFBo&list=plu8xqf8zasbxwahif0sb1p9_3g4vvrmxi) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important For soft credits to roll up from the Opportunity to the Contact's record, the Opportunity must be of a type that rolls up. In general you should not need to worry about this, unless you've excluded specific Opportunity types or record types from rolling up. 1. Navigate to an Opportunity record. 2. In the top right corner of the page, click **Manage Soft Credits**. You should see all of the Contacts who have Contact Roles already assigned on this Opportunity. You may also see no Contacts listed if no Contact Roles have been assigned. 3. Assign Partial Soft Credits by clicking the Partial radio button for the appropriate Contact, and entering the amount for their partial soft credit. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You **MUST** have the Partial radio button selected to enter soft credit amounts. Selecting the Full radio button populates the Amount field with 100% of the Opportunity. This amount will not be editable. 4. Additionally, you can click **Add another soft credit**, browse to more Contacts, and assign them partial soft credits as well. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When adding new Partial Soft Credits, you'll only be able to select Contact Roles that are eligible for soft credit rollups. However, if Customizable Rollups is enabled in your org, you'll see all Contact Roles (all the values listed in **Setup** | **Contact Roles on Opportunities**). Be sure to select one that you know is included in a Soft Credit Filter Rule. Ask your admin if you are unsure. 5. (Optional) Select **Allow Soft Credit Amount more than Total Amount** if you need to credit Contacts for more than the Opportunity Amount. For example, if you have 2 Contacts who should receive Influencer soft credit for the entire $1000 Amount of the Opportunity, and a third Contact who is only credited for $100, that would bring the total soft credit amount to $2100 on a $1000 gift. 6. When you're finished, click **Save**. ## Create Account Soft Credits Create soft credits for Accounts to track their role in donations you receive. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Account Soft Credit](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vSb9cOZVA5s). Three Contacts from ABC Corp indicate that they each want a $100 donation taken out of their paycheck and given to a local food pantry. ABC Corp matches those donations. So, CorpMatch sends a check to a local food pantry in the amount of $600. Make sure that ABC Corp gets soft credit for the $300 match using an Account soft credit. 1. Enter the Opportunity from CorpMatch in the amount of $600. 2. On the Opportunity, go to the Account Soft Credits related list and click **New**. 3. Select the Account to soft credit. For our example, choose ABC Corp. 4. Enter the **Amount** of the soft credit. It can be a partial amount. Since ABC Corp. matched $300 worth of donations, we will enter that amount. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Enter a soft credit that's less than or equal to the original donation amount. Entering a larger soft credit causes your rollups to show inaccurate amounts. 5. Select the **Role**. Be sure to select a Role that is included in a filter rule applies to your Account Soft Credit rollup(s)! ![New Account Soft Credit screen.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cr_soft_creds_acctsc_new.png) 6. Click **Save**. 7. If you have Account Soft Credit [rollups configured](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_customizable_rollup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about customizable rollups."), you should now see that $300 reflected in Account soft credit rollups on ABC Corp.'s Account. ## Create Account Contact Soft Credits Account Contact Soft Credit rollups aggregate all Household members' soft credits and roll them up to the Household. If you [enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them."), you can create Account Contact Soft Credits. Account Contact Soft Credit rollups aggregate all Household members' soft credits and roll them up to the Household. To take advantage of Account Contact Soft Credits, create a rollup as follows: 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. If you don't see the tab in your org, you can find it from the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups** . 4. Click **New**. 5. Enter the rollup details. We'll provide example values for a Total Soft Credits rollup. 1. In the Target Object field, select Account. 2. Select a Target Field. For example, you might have a custom field called Total Soft Credits. 3. Enter a Description. For example, The total amount of soft credits received by Contacts in this Account. 4. Enter an Operation. For example, select Sum. 5. Enter a Time Frame. For example, All Time. 6. In the Rollup Type field, select Opportunity > Account (Contact Soft Credit). 7. (Optional) Select a Filter Group. For example, select Opps: Won (SC). 8. In the Amount Field, under Advanced Customizations, select a value. For example, Soft Credit: Amount. ![Customizable Rollup for an Account Contact Soft Credit that rolls up Contact's soft credits to a Total Soft Credit field on the Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/cr_soft_creds_crlp_ac_rollup.png) 6. Click **Save**. # Manually Process Batch Jobs NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job. - **[Run Rollup Donations Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Rollup Donations Batch recalculates all Account and Contact hard credit and soft credit rollups, and all Recurring Donation rollups. Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build. If you need the rollups updated sooner, manually run the batch process that recalculates them. - **[Run Rollup Allocations Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manually run the Rollup Allocations Batch to recalculate Allocation rollup data for all General Accounting Units. - **[Batch Create Default Allocations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Batch Create Default Allocations process to create default Allocations for all existing Opportunities, except Opportunities excluded in the GAU Allocations Rollup Settings. - **[Create Missing Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have Opportunities that are missing Payment records (for example, if you've previously disabled Payments), run a batch process to create the Payment records. - **[Refresh Household Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep Household names up-to-date by refreshing Household Names after Household Name formatting changes, and by recalculating the value in the All Household Members Deceased field on Household Accounts. - **[Refresh Opportunity Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Refresh the names of all preexisting, matching Opportunities once you've specified your custom Opportunity naming convention. - **[Refresh Opportunity Primary Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To ensure that the Primary Contact is in sync with the Opportunity Contact Role marked Primary for all Opportunities, refresh all Opportunity Primary Contacts. - **[Run Recurring Donations Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Recurring Donations Batch process runs every night to create any additional Opportunities needed for Recurring Donations. We recommend running this batch process manually if you change your Recurring Donation settings. - **[Run Level Assignment Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run the Level Assignment Batch to recalculate Levels for Accounts and Contacts. - **[Remove Duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Opportunities with more than one Opportunity Contact Role marked as primary can cause problems with Opportunity rollups. Run the Remove Duplicate Primary OCRs batch process to remove duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles. ## Run Rollup Donations Batch The Rollup Donations Batch recalculates all Account and Contact hard credit and soft credit rollups, and all Recurring Donation rollups. Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build. If you need the rollups updated sooner, manually run the batch process that recalculates them. The Rollup Donations Batch recalculates all Account and Contact hard credit and soft credit rollups, and all Recurring Donation rollups. Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build. If you need the rollups updated sooner, you can manually run the batch process that recalculates them: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Rollup Donations Batch**. 3. Click **Run Batch**. The process may take some time, but it's safe to leave the page and come back later to check the results. ## Run Rollup Allocations Batch Manually run the Rollup Allocations Batch to recalculate Allocation rollup data for all General Accounting Units. To recalculate Allocation rollup data for all General Accounting Units: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Rollup Allocations Batch**. 3. Click **Run Batch**. ## Batch Create Default Allocations Use the Batch Create Default Allocations process to create default Allocations for all existing Opportunities, except Opportunities excluded in the GAU Allocations Rollup Settings. Use the Batch Create Default Allocations process to create default Allocations for all existing Opportunities (except Opportunities excluded in the GAU Allocations Rollup Settings.) First, verify that you've enabled Default Allocations and selected a default General Accounting Unit: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **GAU Allocations**. 3. Verify that Default Allocations Enabled is selected, and that one of your General Accounting Units has been selected as default: ![Donations - GAU Allocations settings with Default Allocations Enabled selected, and "General Fund" set as the Default General Accounting Unit.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/gau_allocations.png) Once you've verified the Default Allocation Settings, you can batch create default Allocations: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Create Default Allocations**. 3. Click **Run Batch**. ## Create Missing Payments If you have Opportunities that are missing Payment records (for example, if you've previously disabled Payments), run a batch process to create the Payment records. If you have Opportunities that are missing Payment records (for example, if you've previously disabled Payments), you can run a batch process to create the Payment records. First, confirm that Automatic Payment Creation is enabled: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Donations** | **Payments**. 3. Confirm that the **Automatic Payment Creation** field is selected. Run the bulk Payment creation process: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Create Missing Payments**. 3. Follow the recommendations to disable certain processes before running the Create Missing Payments process. 4. Once you've completed the preliminary steps, click **Create Missing Payments** **.** ## Refresh Household Data Keep Household names up-to-date by refreshing Household Names after Household Name formatting changes, and by recalculating the value in the All Household Members Deceased field on Household Accounts. ### Refresh Household Names If you've made changes to Household Name formatting, you can refresh all existing Household names and greetings to update them to the new format. For more information on refreshing Household Names, see [Refresh All Household Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form."). ### Recalculate Deceased Household Accounts This utility recalculates the value in the All Household Members Deceased field on Household Accounts. Run this utility to ensure that the value correctly reflects the status of the Deceased field on related Contacts. ## Refresh Opportunity Names Refresh the names of all preexisting, matching Opportunities once you've specified your custom Opportunity naming convention. When you create a custom Opportunity Name, NPSP only uses that naming convention for matching Opportunities you create after that. But you can refresh the names of all preexisting, matching Opportunities, once you've specified your settings. For information on refreshing Opportunity names, see [Refresh all Opportunity Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customize_opportunity_donation_names.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create your own custom Opportunity Names using any fields from the Opportunity itself or fields from related records."). ## Refresh Opportunity Primary Contact To ensure that the Primary Contact is in sync with the Opportunity Contact Role marked Primary for all Opportunities, refresh all Opportunity Primary Contacts. If you have any Opportunities where there's a mismatch in value between the Primary Contact field and the Opportunity Contact Role marked Primary, it can cause your rollups to be inaccurate. To ensure that the Primary Contact is in sync with the Opportunity Contact Role marked Primary for all Opportunities: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Refresh Opportunity Primary Contact**. 3. Follow the recommendations to disable certain processes and back up your data before running the Refresh All Opportunity Primary Contacts process. 4. Click **Refresh All Opportunity Primary Contacts**. ## Run Recurring Donations Batch The Recurring Donations Batch process runs every night to create any additional Opportunities needed for Recurring Donations. We recommend running this batch process manually if you change your Recurring Donation settings. The Recurring Donations Batch process runs every night to create any additional Opportunities needed for Recurring Donations. We recommend running this batch process manually if you change your Recurring Donation settings. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Recurring Donations Batch**. 3. Click **Run Batch**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can reduce the size of the Recurring Donations batch by excluding closed Recurring Donations. Turn on the **Exclude Closed Recurring Donations** setting in Custom Settings. Go to [Configure Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set security permissions, deploy components, and configure settings to use Recurring Donations in your org.") for the steps to enable this setting. ## Run Level Assignment Batch Run the Level Assignment Batch to recalculate Levels for Accounts and Contacts. To update all your records with the correct Levels: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Process** | **Level Assignment Batch**. 3. Click **Run Batch**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Level Assignment Batch only recalculates Levels for Accounts or Contacts that were updated since the last time the batch was run. There are a few exceptions: - If a Level record is updated (for example, you change the Level name or threshold), the job will recalculate all related Levels. - If a Level references any formula fields, the job will always recalculate that Level. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The default batch size for the Level Assignment Batch is 200. You can change the batch size as needed: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Batch Process Setting**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Update the value in the Level Assignment Batch Size field. 5. Click **Save**. ## Remove Duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles Opportunities with more than one Opportunity Contact Role marked as primary can cause problems with Opportunity rollups. Run the Remove Duplicate Primary OCRs batch process to remove duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles. If you have an Opportunity with more than one Opportunity Contact Role marked as primary, it can cause problems with Opportunity rollups. Duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles result from entering a Primary Contact Role for an Opportunity that already has one, either manually or via a data import tool such as the Salesforce Data Loader. To remove duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes** | **Remove Duplicate Primary OCRs**. 3. Follow all recommended steps before starting the batch process. 4. Click **Run Batch**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also manually detect and remove duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles. See [Opportunity Contact Roles (aka Duplicate Primary Opportunity Contact Roles)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about errors you can encounter when you run a health check on your NPSP org.") for more information. # Manually Recalculate Rollups Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build. For information on the jobs, see [Default Batch Job Names and Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). But, if you need them updated sooner, you can manually recalculate the batches or recalculate an individual Account, Contact, Recurring Donation, or GAU's rollups. To manually recalculate an individual Account, Contact, Recurring Donation, or GAU's rollups: 1. Go to the detail page for the record. 2. In the list of available buttons, click **Recalculate Rollups.** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see this button, your administrator may need to add it to the appropriate page layouts. 3. The recalculation process will run in the background and you may need to refresh the page after a few minutes to see the new rollup values. For information on manually recalculating rollup batches, see [Run Rollup Donations Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job."). # Map Case Teams to Success Teams to Define Appointment Availability Success teams determine which case teams (assigned or unassigned) or staff members are available for scheduling using the case record type.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To map case teams to success teams in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | After your learners' cases are ready, map case teams or individual staff members to success teams. We recommend that you map a success team for each case team, assigned or unassigned. This configuration makes them bookable for learners who they're not assigned to. For example, if a student wants to explore subjects beyond their current curriculum, they can ask a front-desk worker to meet someone that they heard about from another student. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Success Teams**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name. 4. Select the record type of the case teams that you want to make bookable. 5. In the **Default Unassigned Case Team** field, enter the exact name of a case team. The team can include either: - Staff members assigned to learners that you want to make available to other learners, outside of their assignments. - Unassigned staff members available to all learners. If you assign individual staff members to learners directly instead of case teams, enter any value in this field, for example N/A. 6. To let learners schedule appointments with the case team through the self-service portal, select **Can Self Schedule**. 7. To turn on the success team record, select **Is Active**. 8. If needed, select the account for your institution's department to relate to the success team. 9. Save your changes. # Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry in Education Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To map custom fields:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before mapping fields, create up to 20 custom fields on the Gift Entry object. If you use the Gift Entry Grid, you can map up to 50 fields instead. Custom field mapping excludes fields that are already populated during gift entry, such as Original Amount and Address. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then under Fundraising Settings, select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click **Add Source Field**. The Select Source Fields page shows the custom fields available for selection. The page is empty if the Gift Entry object has no custom fields. If newly added custom fields don’t appear, wait 15 minutes or log out and log back in. 3. Select the fields that you want to use during gift entry, and click **Next**. Select fields that field properties don’t mark as required. The Source Field column in the Field Mapping table shows the selected custom fields. 4. Select the destination object that you want to map the source field value to. 5. Select a destination field with the same data type as the source field. Available types: - Checkbox - Currency - Date - Email - Number - Percent - Phone - Single Pick List - Text - Text Area - URL ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Two different field mappings can't use the same destination field. You can't map a source field more than once. Each mapping must use unique destination and source fields. 6. To set the order in which the fields appear during gift entry, use the arrows in the Order column. 7. To see the mapped fields on the Gift Entry setup page, save your work and refresh Salesforce. The Manage Gift Entries flow adds the mapped fields to the Additional Fields section on the gift entry form. You can change the field mappings at any time on the Gift Entry setup page. - Change the destination object and field mapped to the source field. - Change the order in which the custom fields appear in the Gift Entry form. - Add a new field mapping with the Add Source Field button. - Delete a mapping entirely by clicking ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/trashcan.png) to the right of the mapping. SEE ALSO: - [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&language=en_US) - [Enable Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enable_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising.") - [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising.") # Map Custom Fields to Use During Gift Entry in Nonprofit Track and report on gift data by adding custom fields to the Gift Entry page. Capture additional information about gifts, such as a donor’s preferred communication method and the purpose of the gift. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To map custom fields:

FundraisingAccess permission set
Before mapping fields, create up to 20 custom fields on the Gift Entry object. If you use the Gift Entry Grid, you can map up to 50 fields instead. Custom field mapping excludes fields that are already populated during gift entry, such as Original Amount and Address. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then under Fundraising Settings, select **Gift Entry**. 2. Click **Add Source Field**. The Select Source Fields page shows the custom fields available for selection. The page is empty if the Gift Entry object has no custom fields. If newly added custom fields don’t appear, wait 15 minutes or log out and log back in. 3. Select the fields that you want to use during gift entry, and click **Next**. Select fields that field properties don’t mark as required. The Source Field column in the Field Mapping table shows the selected custom fields. 4. Select the destination object that you want to map the source field value to. 5. Select a destination field with the same data type as the source field. Available types: - Checkbox - Currency - Date - Email - Number - Percent - Phone - Single Pick List - Text - Text Area - URL ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Two different field mappings can't use the same destination field. You can't map a source field more than once. Each mapping must use unique destination and source fields. 6. To set the order in which the fields appear during gift entry, use the arrows in the Order column. 7. To see the mapped fields on the Gift Entry setup page, save your work and refresh Salesforce. The Manage Gift Entries flow adds the mapped fields to the Additional Fields section on the gift entry form. You can change the field mappings at any time on the Gift Entry setup page. - Change the destination object and field mapped to the source field. - Change the order in which the custom fields appear in the Gift Entry form. - Add a new field mapping with the Add Source Field button. - Delete a mapping entirely by clicking ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/trashcan.png) to the right of the mapping. SEE ALSO: - [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&language=en_US) - [Enable Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising.") - [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the flows that are included in Fundraising.") # Map Custom Fields Using Help Text (Legacy) NPSP legacy Help Text mapping allows you to reference additional fields on a small number of Salesforce objects through Help Text on the NPSP Data Import fields. Let's walk through an example of this process. Save the World would like to have a custom field for the Contact's preferred name, and include that information in their spreadsheet and import process. As the Salesforce Administrator, you'll need to complete the steps outlined in this article in order to add the custom field to the process. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note There are two methods for mapping fields for the NPSP Data Importer: Advanced Mapping or via Help Text. We recommend using Advanced Mapping, as you can map to any Salesforce object and field—standard or custom—that is related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities. With Help Text mapping, you can only reference additional fields on certain objects. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important For every additional field you want to add to the NPSP Data Import object, you must specify a value for the field's Help Text and you must follow a specific naming convention for the Help Text value. The NPSP Data Importer will import the field only if Help Text has the correct value. Read [Troubleshoot Invalid NPSP Data Import Help Text Mappings (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The legacy NPSP method to connect NPSP Data Import fields to the target fields is through the NPSP Data Import field's Help Text.") for more information. - **[Create or Find the Field You Want to Map with Help Text](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pay close attention to the API name of the field you want to map to. - **[Create Field on the NPSP Data Import Object and Map with Help Text](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now we create a corresponding custom field on the NPSP Data Import object for our primary Contact's Preferred Name. The field must exist in both places because we need to map one to the other. - **[Update Your CSV with the New Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add your new field to your data import template CSV to ensure automatic mapping with Data Import Wizard. ## Create or Find the Field You Want to Map with Help Text Pay close attention to the API name of the field you want to map to. ### Create a New Custom Field For our example, let's create a custom text field to capture the Contact's preferred name. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships.**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Select **Text**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Complete this information: 1. **Field Label**: Preferred Name 2. **Length**: 255 3. **Field Name**: Preferred\_Name 4. Fill in **Description** and **Help Text** if needed; they're not required here. 9. Click **Next**. 10. Click **Next** again to accept default security. 11. Click **Save**. The custom field now exists within Salesforce and you see it in the Contact Fields & Relationships list. Take note of the text in the API Name column. Copy the text from the API Name column to your clipboard or a separate note as you'll need it shortly. In this case, it's Preferred\_Name\_\_c. ![List of fields with API Name highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ht_preferred_name_api.png) For more detail on creating custom fields, see [Salesforce Help & Training](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=adding_fields.htm&language=en_US). ### Find the API Name of an Existing Field If you want to map to an existing field instead of a new custom field, you just need to find the API Name and copy it to your clipboard. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Find the field you want to map. 6. Copy the API Name to your clipboard. For example, if you want to import the Work Email field, you would copy npe01\_\_WorkEmail\_\_c to your clipboard. ![Work Email API Name](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/appx_contacts_work_email_field.png) Note that fields from the Nonprofit Success Pack packages begin with namespace prefixes such as `npe01__` or `npsp__` while custom fields you create do not have a prefix. The complete API name includes both the namespace prefix (if one exists) and the trailing `__c` (double underscore 'c'). ## Create Field on the NPSP Data Import Object and Map with Help Text Now we create a corresponding custom field on the NPSP Data Import object for our primary Contact's Preferred Name. The field must exist in both places because we need to map one to the other. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **NPSP Data Import**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Select **Text**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can only map to editable fields. You can't map to formula fields and you shouldn't map to rollup fields because the information will be overwritten. You must select the same field type as the custom field you're mapping to, _except_ when the field you're matching is a relationship field (lookup or master/detail) or checkbox field. For example, if the field on the Contact record was a Date field, you'd select **Date** here. Read more about mapping [Relationship Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Relationship fields—lookup or master/detail—must be mapped as Salesforce IDs. This includes the standard Owner field, which is related to the User object.") or [Checkbox Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Checkbox fields get a little tricky when you're trying to process them in a data import tool. In order to allow you more flexibility around checkbox fields in NPSP Data Import, the corresponding field should be a picklist.") in the sections below. 7. Complete this information: - **Field Label**: Contact1 Preferred Name It doesn't matter what you name this field (unless it's a Unique ID field) but pick a label that makes it clear which record this maps to. We're picking something really obvious here—words that map exactly to the custom field we created in the previous section. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If the field is a marked as a Unique ID field, then the naming does matter. If the field isn't named correctly, it won't show up in the Data Import Configuration Options. For more information and an example, see [Important Information about Unique ID Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Naming is important when you're creating corresponding Unique ID fields. In order to see any values in the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields in the Data Importer Configuration options, the field you want to map must be marked as Unique and External ID.") below. - **Length**: 255 - **Field Name**: Contact1\_Preferred\_Name - **Help Text**: Contact1.Preferred\_Name\_\_c This help text is _critical_ and it's what will allow for the mapping to the Contact object. The Help Text field specifies the object instance and field name that you want to copy the data to, using the format ObjectGroup.Fieldname. (That last part is the API Name you copied to your clipboard, after creating the custom field in the previous section.) Read [Troubleshoot Invalid NPSP Data Import Help Text Mappings (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The legacy NPSP method to connect NPSP Data Import fields to the target fields is through the NPSP Data Import field's Help Text.") for additional help formatting the Help Text. ObjectGroup must be one of the following: - Contact1 - Contact2 - Account1 - Account2 - Household - Opportunity (the donation fields) - Address (for the home address fields) - PaymentFieldname must be the full API Name, including a namespace and/or the trailing \_\_c, if needed. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Click **Next** again to accept default security. 10. Click **Save**. ### Relationship Fields Relationship fields—lookup or master/detail—must be mapped as Salesforce IDs. This includes the standard Owner field, which is related to the User object. For a relationship field, create the corresponding NPSP Data Import field as either a **Lookup Relationship** field or a **Text** field of 18 characters to accommodate the 15 or 18 digit Salesforce ID (not the Name) of the related record. ### Checkbox Fields Checkbox fields get a little tricky when you're trying to process them in a data import tool. In order to allow you more flexibility around checkbox fields in NPSP Data Import, the corresponding field should be a picklist. This picklist translates what you want to see in the checkbox field (the checkbox as checked or unchecked) to their Boolean equivalents (True for checked and False for unchecked). Through NPSP Data Import, you're able to uncheck a previously checked checkbox field or even leave a checkbox field completely unchanged by leaving that cell empty. We'll walk through this for the Private checkbox on the Opportunity object, but remember, you can do this with any custom or standard checkbox field. To map the Private checkbox field to the NPSP Data Import object: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **NPSP Data Import**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Select **Picklist**. 7. Complete this information: - **Field Label**: Donation is Private You can choose a different name here, but pick a label that makes the mapping clear. - Select **Enter values, with each value separated by a new line** and enter the following values: - True - False - **Field Name**: Donation\_is\_Private - **Help Text**: Opportunity.IsPrivate This must match the object and field name, using the format ObjectGroup.Fieldname. The information you enter into this field links the field in **NPSP Data Import** to the appropriate field on your chosen object. Read [Troubleshoot Invalid NPSP Data Import Help Text Mappings (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The legacy NPSP method to connect NPSP Data Import fields to the target fields is through the NPSP Data Import field's Help Text.") for additional help formatting the Help Text. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Click **Next** again to accept default security. 10. Click **Save**. ### Important Information about Unique ID Fields Naming is important when you're creating corresponding Unique ID fields. In order to see any values in the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields in the Data Importer Configuration options, the field you want to map must be marked as Unique and External ID. Additionally, for Unique ID fields, you must create two corresponding fields, one for Contact1 and one for Contact2 (or Account1 and Account2) and they must be named properly. The corresponding fields should NOT be marked as Unique and External ID. For example, say you created a custom Unique ID field on Contacts called Reference ID with an API name of Reference\_ID\_\_c that you want to use for matching Contacts during data import. You'll need to create two corresponding NPSP Data Import fields using the _**exact format**_ listed below: ![Contact Custom Unique ID and Account Custom Unique ID fields highlighted in the Data Import Configuration options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/config_options_unique_id_fields_1.png) Field 1 **Field Label**: Contact1 (Example: Contact1 Reference ID) **Field Name**: Contact1\_ (Example: Contact1\_Reference\_ID) **API Name**: Contact1\_\_\_c (Example: Contact1\_Reference\_ID\_\_c) **Help Text**: Contact1.\_\_c (Example: Contact1.Reference\_ID\_\_c) Field 2 **Field Label**: Contact2 (Example: Contact2 Reference ID) **Field Name**: Contact2\_ (Example: Contact2\_Reference\_ID) **API Name**: Contact2\_\_\_c (Example: Contact2\_Reference\_ID\_\_c) **Help Text**: Contact2.\_\_c (Example: Contact2.Reference\_ID\_\_c) Here is an image showing the custom Contact field **Reference ID** and the corresponding NPSP Data Import field **Contact1 Reference ID** with correct naming. The image also shows that the Contact field **Reference ID** is marked as an External ID field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Creating only one corresponding field (instead of two) will result in an error. ![A screenshot comparing the Contact custom field with the corresponding NPSP Data Import field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/compare_contact_data_imp_uniqueid_fields_1.png) Again, only when your custom Contact or Account field is a Unique ID field AND both the fields needed on the NPSP Data Import object have been mapped and named correctly will you see the custom Contact or Account field in the drop down menu. Additionally, keep in mind that Last Name is required when trying to match Contacts using an External ID, as the Last Name is used when the External ID field isn't found. Account Name is required when trying to match Accounts using an External ID, as the Account Name is used when the External ID field isn't found. ## Update Your CSV with the New Field Add your new field to your data import template CSV to ensure automatic mapping with Data Import Wizard. If you haven't already, download the [NPSP Date Import Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these templates to import your data into Salesforce using the NPSP Data Importer object."). Your import spreadsheet needs to include a new column for the field you created **on the NPSP Data Import object**, not the original custom field. If you're using the Data Import Wizard, the column should use the Field Label. If you're using the Data Loader or other API tool, the column should use the API Name. So in our example, you would add a column with the Header text as: - Contact1 Preferred Name (if using Data Import Wizard) - Contact1\_Preferred\_Name\_\_c (if using Data Loader) You've successfully prepared Salesforce for your new field! Now head to [Using NPSP Data Import Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_using_di_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here to learn how to use the NPSP Data Import Templates for your imports.") to start preparing your data for import. # Map Custom Recurring Donation Status Values to a State When you create custom picklist values for Recurring Donation Status, map them to a State so that NPSP can process records with those custom Status values. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Your user profile must have access to the `RD2_StatusMappingSettings_CTRL` apex class to use Status to State mapping. State describes NPSP Recurring Donation processing behaviors. The following States are available: - **Active**: The donor is actively donating. NPSP creates installment Opportunities as defined by the Recurring Donation schedule. - **Lapsed**: The donor isn't making donations as expected, but NPSP still creates installment Opportunities as defined by the Recurring Donation schedule. - **Closed**: The donor stopped making donations for this Recurring Donation. NPSP doesn't create any new installment Opportunities. Here's how this works in practice. Let's say you create a Status called Expired Card to track when a donor's credit card has expired. You don't want to immediately close out the Recurring Donation because you want to ask the donor if they have updated card information first. In this example, the State behavior you want NPSP to use is Lapsed. There's going to be a lapse in the donor's giving until you can obtain new card information. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you don't map your custom Status, you won't be able to create or update Recurring Donations that use those custom Statuses. To map a custom Status value to a State: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Status to State Mapping**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Assign a State to each of your custom Status values. 5. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Recurring Donations includes standard Status values that are already mapped to their corresponding State: Active, Lapsed, and Closed. These standard Status values are required for Recurring Donations, so don't remove them from your org! # Map Recurring Donation Fields to Custom Opportunity Fields Learn how to map fields from Recurring Donation records to Opportunity records, so that NPSP copies the data to each new installment Opportunity. - **[Default Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_recurring_donation_fields_to_opp_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When NPSP creates installment Opportunity records for a Recurring Donation, it copies the values of several fields from the Recurring Donation onto the Opportunity records. This is a big time saver, as it means you don't have to manually enter values for all those fields on each Opportunity record - **[Custom Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_recurring_donation_fields_to_opp_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Recurring Donation Custom Field Mapping to copy custom fields from Recurring Donations to installment Opportunities whenever you create a new Recurring Donation. This ensures that details from the Recurring Donation record appear on the Opportunity records for easy reference. ## Default Field Mapping When NPSP creates installment Opportunity records for a Recurring Donation, it copies the values of several fields from the Recurring Donation onto the Opportunity records. This is a big time saver, as it means you don't have to manually enter values for all those fields on each Opportunity record The following table describes how NPSP maps fields from the Recurring Donation to its installment Opportunity records when the Recurring Donation is first created. | Recurring Donation Field | Opportunity Field | Explanation | | --- | --- | --- | | Created By | Created By | NPSP copies the value of the Created By field from the Recurring Donation to the Opportunity. | | Owner | Owner | NPSP copies the value of the Owner field from the Recurring Donation to the Opportunity. | | Account | Account Name | NPSP copies the Account from the Recurring Donation to the Account Name field on the Opportunity. | | Contact | Primary Contact | NPSP copies the value of the Contact field on the Recurring Donation to the Primary Contact field on the Opportunity. | | Next Donation Date | Close Date | NPSP copies the Next Donation Date from the Recurring Donation to the Close Date on the Opportunity. | | Amount | Amount | NPSP copies the Amount from the Recurring Donation to the Amount on the Opportunity. | | Campaign | Primary Campaign Source | NPSP copies the Campaign from the Recurring Donation to the Primary Campaign Source on the Opportunity. | | CurrencyISOCode | CurrencyISOCode | NPSP copies the CurrencyISOCode from the Recurring Donation to the CurrencyISOCode on the Opportunity. | The default Stage for Opportunities in a Recurring Donation is Pledged. This default can be changed by altering the Recurring Donation Stage Name Custom Label. For more information, see [Customize Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizing_labels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "A Custom Label is text that can be accessed by an app, such as Nonprofit Success Pack, for a variety of purposes. The advantage of a Custom Label is that the text can be translated into any language that Salesforce supports."). ## Custom Field Mapping Use Recurring Donation Custom Field Mapping to copy custom fields from Recurring Donations to installment Opportunities whenever you create a new Recurring Donation. This ensures that details from the Recurring Donation record appear on the Opportunity records for easy reference. Mapping requires that you have two fields (one on the Recurring Donation and one on the Opportunity) of a matching data type in order to create a mapping between them. A matching data type means that you can only map a Date field to a Date field, a Text field to a Text field, and so on. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Large Text Area fields are not supported for custom field mapping. Let's look at a field mapping example. Say that your organization sometimes receives Recurring Donations "in honor of" a person of the donor's choosing. There's already an Honoree Contact field on the Opportunity object for tracking that, but if we create an Honoree field on the Recurring Donation, we can map them together. That way you only need to enter the Honoree on the Recurring Donation, and the field data gets copied to all related Opportunities. Here's how. 1. First, make sure you've created the custom fields you want to map. In this example, we created a lookup field (to Contact) on the Recurring Donation object called Honoree. 2. Click the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 3. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donation Custom Field Mappings**. 4. Click **New Custom Field Mapping**. 5. In Recurring Donation Field, select the custom field you created on the Recurring Donation object. 6. In Opportunity Field, select the corresponding field on the Opportunity object. 7. Click **Create Custom Field Mapping**. ![New Custom Field Mapping. Honoree is selected for the Recurring Donation Field and Honoree Contact is selected for the Opportunity Field.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/custom-field-mapping.png) The new field mapping appears in the mapped fields list. ![Mapped Fields Lists showing the Honoree and Honoree Contact mapping.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/mapped-fields-list.png) If you need to delete a mapping, click **Del** under Action in the mapped fields list. When you delete a field mapping, the data that had already been copied to the Opportunity records remains unchanged. # Map Your Source Data to Accounting Sets Choose which source record fields to use for transaction journal records generation by mapping them to accounting set fields.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up accounting sets: | Manage Accounting Subledger | Before you start setting up accounting sets, make sure that the values on your source records don't exceed the allowed size in the target fields on the Transaction Journal object. For example, a Long Text Area field can contain values that are too large to store in a regular text field. Such values cause errors when the Accounting Subledger job runs. Also make sure that the source fields that you're planning to map to accounting sets exist and are of the expected type. For example, your source object must have a date type field to map to the accounting set's payment date. For examples of accounting set configurations, see [Accounting Set Example Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_acct_set_example_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review recommended accounting set mappings for common use cases."). ## Specify the Source Objects 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Enter a name for your accounting set. 3. Select the number of source objects based on the object model that you want for the accounting set. See [Object Models for Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting sets enable you to specify which objects and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. It's a flexible approach that lets you map your financial data model to a logical data model, supporting from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees."). 4. Select the primary object and additional objects as needed, keeping in mind these requirements. - Each object that you select after the primary object must be related to the previously selected objects. - The secondary object must have a lookup or master-detail relationship to the primary object. - The tertiary object must have a lookup or master-detail relationship to both the primary and secondary objects. - The object that you choose as the fund object must have a lookup relationship to the tertiary object's fund object and is always the last object that you select. - You can select an object only one time. For example, if you map the Account object to the primary object, you can't select it for another object. 5. Click **Next**. ## Specify the Source Fields Next, for each source object, map its fields to the accounting set's target fields. 1. If you're not already editing an accounting set, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Sets, and then select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Next to the accounting set to configure, click ![Show Actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), and then select **Edit**. 3. Click **Next**. 4. Select the name of the field on the source object that contains the data. The expected data type is indicated in parentheses, such as (Date) or (Checkbox). The dropdown only lists the source fields that match that data type.
Accounting Set Field Purpose

Amount

(One- or two-object model)

 The primary object's revenue or expense amount.

Amount

(Three-object model)

 The primary object's revenue or expense amount, and the secondary object's allocation amount.

Amount

(Four-object model)

 The primary object's overall amount, the secondary object's revenue or expense amount, and the tertiary object's allocation amount.
Check/Reference Number The check or reference number that's recorded when the record is marked paid or written off. Make sure that the source data value is less than or equal to 40 characters.
Committed Date The date on which the revenue or expense is first promised. If left empty, the default value is the date on which the Accounting Subledger job runs.
Fund Name The name of the fund account to which the revenue or expense is allocated. It can also be an account number. Salesforce uses this value as the GL code. Make sure that the source data value is less than or equal to 100 characters.
Generate Expected Revenue/Expense

Controls whether to apply accrual accounting or cash accounting to generate transaction journal records.

  • If this checkbox is selected on the source record, Salesforce generates records for both scheduled and paid revenue and expenses.
  • If this checkbox is deselected on the source record, Salesforce generates records only for paid revenue and expenses.

By default, this value is deselected.
Payment is Paid If selected, the source record was marked as paid.
Payment Method The payment method used. Make sure that the source data value is less than or equal to 255 characters.
Payment Paid Date The date on which the record was paid.
Scheduled Date The date on which the record is scheduled to be paid.
Transaction Date

The date on which the revenue or expense is expected, received, or adjusted. The required mapping depends on the type of revenue or expense and the object model.

  • Paid revenue or expense: In the four-object model, map an additional transaction date for the secondary object. Salesforce only uses this date for that payment or expense. Otherwise, it uses a single transaction date field for all source records. In all other object models, map the transaction date for the primary object.
  • Expected revenue or expense: For all object models, Salesforce uses the transaction date that you mapped for the primary object for all source records.
Note
Note If you mapped your own dates to the Transaction Date field, we recommend that you configure automation tools to set that date accordingly on your source records in response to other changes. For example, you can use Process Builder or Flow Builder to update the transaction date to the current date when someone creates a record or updates the payment date. Otherwise, Salesforce sets the transaction date to the date on which the accounting scheduled job runs.
Written-Off If selected, the source record was marked as written off. By default, this value is deselected.
# Mark a Contact as Do Not Contact or Deceased At some point, you will have a contact who is deceased or a contact who has asked to be removed from your lists and not contacted again. In both of these situations, you want to remove the person from your mailing lists. For a deceased contact, you also want to make sure that the contact's name doesn't appear in the Household naming fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Mark Do Not Contact or Deceased.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=t2nBvnRPylE) - **[Mark a Contact as Do Not Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_a_contact_as_do_not_contact_or_deceased.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove a contact from your mailing, phone, and email lists. Use Do Not Contact to automatically select Do Not Call and Email Opt Out on a contact. - **[Mark a Contact as Deceased](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_a_contact_as_do_not_contact_or_deceased.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you mark a contact as deceased, the Do Not Contact, Do Not Call, and Email Opt Out fields are automatically selected. The deceased individual's name is removed from their Household name. - **[Remove Contacts Marked Do Not Contact from Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_a_contact_as_do_not_contact_or_deceased.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You will want to update your reports used for communications or mailings to filter out the contacts you've marked Do Not Contact. - **[What if I don't see these fields?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_a_contact_as_do_not_contact_or_deceased.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you don't see the Do Not Contact or Deceased fields, your admin may need to adjust the field-level security or add the fields to your page layouts. ## Mark a Contact as Do Not Contact Remove a contact from your mailing, phone, and email lists. Use Do Not Contact to automatically select Do Not Call and Email Opt Out on a contact. 1. In Nonprofit Success Pack, navigate to the Contact record of the person you want to mark as Do Not Contact. 2. Click **Edit.** 3. Select **Do Not Contact**. 4. Click **Save**. When you save the record, Salesforce automatically selects the Do Not Call and Email Opt Out standard fields. ## Mark a Contact as Deceased When you mark a contact as deceased, the Do Not Contact, Do Not Call, and Email Opt Out fields are automatically selected. The deceased individual's name is removed from their Household name. 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, go to the Contact record of the person that you want to mark as deceased. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Deceased**. 4. Save your changes. When you save the record, Salesforce automatically selects the Do Not Contact, Do Not Call, and Email Opt Out fields. In addition, Salesforce makes changes to the Contact's Household Account. - Salesforce removes the deceased Contact from Household Account Name, Formal Greeting, and Informal Greeting fields. For example, in the Sanchez and Smith Household Account, if you mark Maria Sanchez as deceased, Household Name changes to Smith Household and Formal Greeting changes from Maria Sanchez and John Smith to John Smith. - If you mark the Primary Contact in a Household as deceased, Salesforce automatically assigns the Household member with the earliest creation date as the Primary Contact. - If you mark the last living Contact in a Household as deceased, Salesforce automatically selects All Household Members Deceased on the Household Account. If you accidentally mark a Contact as deceased, you must deselect Deceased on the Contact and manually update the value of the automatically changed fields. ## Remove Contacts Marked Do Not Contact from Reports You will want to update your reports used for communications or mailings to filter out the contacts you've marked Do Not Contact. 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, navigate to the Report that you want to use. 2. Click **Edit** to customize the Report. 3. Next to Filters, click the **Add** dropdown menu, and then select Field Filter. 4. Add Do Not Contact equals False to the filter. 5. Click **Save**. ## What if I don't see these fields? If you don't see the Do Not Contact or Deceased fields, your admin may need to adjust the field-level security or add the fields to your page layouts. # Mark an Address as Undeliverable To remove bad addresses from your mailing lists, mark them as undeliverable. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_undeliverable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're notified of a bad address, mark it as undeliverable in NPSP. - **[Mark an Address as Undeliverable](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_undeliverable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With address management, NPSP ensures that an edit to one record in a Household, including the Contacts, Address records, and Household Account, is copied to all the related records. So to update the Undeliverable address fields for all records in a Household, edit just one of the records. - **[Filter Undeliverable Addresses in Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mark_undeliverable.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To exclude records that have an undeliverable address from your mailing lists, use a report filter. ## Overview When you're notified of a bad address, mark it as undeliverable in NPSP. Postal mail is an important channel for donor and constituent management. After sending out your appeals, gift acknowledgments, event invitations, and other written communications, sometimes some of them come back as undeliverable. Perhaps the address was incorrect, the donor's information was incomplete information, or the postal service simply can't deliver to the address that you gave. When you're notified of a bad address, mark it as undeliverable in NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Want help keeping up with address changes when your constituents move? Explore [Insights Platform Data Integrity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.insights_platform.htm) from Salesforce.org. ## Mark an Address as Undeliverable With address management, NPSP ensures that an edit to one record in a Household, including the Contacts, Address records, and Household Account, is copied to all the related records. So to update the Undeliverable address fields for all records in a Household, edit just one of the records. NPSP tracks undeliverable addresses using these fields: - Undeliverable Mailing Address on the Contact object. - Undeliverable Billing Address on the Account object. - Undeliverable on the Address object. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If these fields aren't visible in your org, have your system administrator follow the instructions in [Configure Address Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to configure address management features including address verification, seasonal addresses, and bad address management."). With address management, NPSP ensures that an edit to one record in a Household, including the Contacts, Address records, and Household Account, is copied to all the related records. So to update the Undeliverable address fields for all records in a Household, edit just one of the records. To mark an address as undeliverable using a Contact record: 1. Locate the Contact record that you want to update. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In Address Information, select **Undeliverable Mailing Address**. 4. Save the Contact. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If a Contact record has the Address Override field selected, NPSP doesn’t change the Undeliverable Mailing Address field for that Contact. Learn more in [Override the Default Household Address for a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_override_the_default_address_for_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you have a Contact who prefers to receive their individual mailings at a different address than the default Household address, you can accommodate them by setting an Address Override."). ## Filter Undeliverable Addresses in Reports To exclude records that have an undeliverable address from your mailing lists, use a report filter. 1. Locate a report that you want to update. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Click **Filters**. 4. In Add Filter, find and select **Undeliverable Mailing Address**. 5. Select **False**. 6. Click **Apply**. 7. Save the report. # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to its fullest potential and synchronize your Education Cloud CRM data with Marketing Cloud. We recommend that you complete these integration steps with your Marketing Cloud admin. - **[Create a Synchronized Data Source for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a synchronized data source to automatically add new and updated Education Cloud data to Marketing Cloud on a recurring basis. Synchronizing your data ensures that you always have the most up-to-date information available for your marketing efforts. - **[Populate Education Cloud Data Extensions With Automation Studio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create automations to refresh your data extensions when your data source receives new data from Salesforce. - **[Set Up Emails with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education provides email templates to help you efficiently set up your institution's email campaigns. ## Create a Synchronized Data Source for Education Cloud Create a synchronized data source to automatically add new and updated Education Cloud data to Marketing Cloud on a recurring basis. Synchronizing your data ensures that you always have the most up-to-date information available for your marketing efforts. Create synchronized data sources for these objects: Account, Contact, Individual Application, Lead, Service Appointment, and User. Salesforce uses the fields on these objects in preconfigured email templates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't change relationships between synchronized objects after the initial synchronization. 1. Log into Marketing Cloud. 2. Under Audience Builder, click **Contact Builder**. 3. Click **Data Sources**. 4. Click **Synchronized**. 5. Click the available data source tile. 6. Click **Set Up Object**. 7. Click **Synchronize** on the Account tile. 8. Select these fields: - FirstName - PersonEmail - Phone - LastName ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note Required fields such as Id or RecordTypeId are selected by default. 9. Click **Next**. 10. Select how to filter the synchronized data while considering your Marketing Cloud utilization limits. For information about those limits or increasing them, contact your account executive. Alternatively, [manage your subscriptions](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/). 11. Select how often to synchronize data. We recommend every 15 minutes. 12. Save your changes. 13. If prompted, click **OK** to confirm the synchronization process. 14. Repeat steps 6–13 for these objects and fields: - Contact: FirstName, LastName, Phone - Individual Application: ApplicationCategory, ApplicationType, AppliedDate, Category, Status - Lead: FirstName, LastName, LeadSource, Name, Phone - Service Appointment: AppointmentType, ApptBookingInfoUrl, Description, Duration, SchedEndTime, SchedStartTime, Status, StatusCategory, Subject - User: CompanyName, Department, FirstName, LastName, Phone, SenderEmail, SenderName The synchronization sometimes takes several minutes depending on the number of records. After it completes, a tile shows a row count and a Synchronized status for each of the selected objects. Here's an example for the Contact object. ![Successfully synchronized Contact entity displaying a row count of 188](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/resources-product/images/sync-contact-entity.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note The data synchronization is one way from Salesforce to Marketing Cloud. So Marketing Cloud doesn't send any subsequent data changes to Education Cloud. ## Populate Education Cloud Data Extensions With Automation Studio Create automations to refresh your data extensions when your data source receives new data from Salesforce. 1. Log into Marketing Cloud. 2. Under Journey Builder, click **Automation Studio**, and then select **New Automation**. 3. Drag **Schedule** to the Start with a Starting Source dotted circle, and then click **Configure**. 4. Enter a start date and time for the automation, and then select your time zone. 5. If needed, select a frequency, and then configure the cadence. Schedule this process to run daily or weekly, depending on how often you send emails, so that you have the most recent data. 6. Click **Done**. 7. Drag **SQL Query** onto the canvas, click **Choose**, and then select **EducationCloudAccount**. 8. Enter this query: `select PersonEmail as PersonEmail, Phone as Phone, FirstName as FirstName, LastName as LastName from Account_Salesforce`. 9. Click **Done**. 10. Repeat steps 7–9 to add these activities: - **EducationCloudContact**: `select Email as Email, Phone as Phone, FirstName as FirstName, LastName as LastName from Contact_Salesforce` - **EducationCloudIndividualApplication**: `select Id as Id, AccountId as AccountId, ContactId as ContactId, ApplicationCategory as ApplicationCategory, ApplicationType as ApplicationType, Category as Category, Status as Status, AppliedDate as AppliedDate from IndividualApplication_Salesforce` - **EducationCloudLead**: `select Email as Email, Phone as Phone, FirstName as FirstName, LastName as LastName from Lead_Salesforce` - **EducationCloudServiceAppointment**: `select Id as Id, AccountId as AccountId, ContactId as ContactId, ApptBookingInfoUrl as ApptBookingInfoUrl, AppointmentType as AppointmentType, Subject as Subject, Description as Description, SchedStartTime as SchedStartTime from ServiceAppointment_Salesforce` - **EducationCloudUser**: `select Email as Email, SenderEmail as SenderEmail, Phone as Phone, SenderName as SenderName, FirstName as FirstName, LastName as LastName, Department as Department, CompanyName as CompanyName from User_Salesforce` 11. Save your changes. 12. To test the automation, click **Run Once**. ## Set Up Emails with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education provides email templates to help you efficiently set up your institution's email campaigns. Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education provides these email templates. - Recruitment & Admissions - Application Deadline: Send automated emails to remind learners of upcoming application deadlines. - Student Success - Appointment Confirmation: Send automated emails to confirm appointment details to learners after they schedule a meeting with your staff. - Alumni Engagement - Recent Graduate Portal Invitation: Send an email to invite recent graduates to join the alumni portal and to inform them of available resources, such as career services and groups. - Alumni Engagement - Institution Outreach Campaign: Send an email to alumni with information about your institution's mission, goals, and progress updates for capital campaign initiatives. ### Create Emails Using Education Cloud Email Templates Use preconfigured email templates or customize them to fit your needs. 1. Log into Marketing Cloud. 2. Under Content Builder, click **Content Builder**. 3. Click **Create**, and then select **Email Message**. 4. Select the **Template** creation option, and then click **Saved**. 5. Select the template to use, and then click **Select**. 6. Enter the email properties, and then click **Next**. 7. Enter a subject and, if needed, a preheader to display text after the subject line in an email client. A preheader isn’t required, but effective preheader text can increase the number of recipients who open your email. 8. If needed, edit the default text and personalize the email, and then click **Next**. 9. If needed, preview the email and perform a test send. 10. Save your changes. ### Send Education Cloud Emails After your emails are ready, choose when and who to send them to. 1. Log into Marketing Cloud. 2. Under Email Studio, click **Email**. 3. Select the email that you created, and then click **Send**. 4. If needed, enter email properties, and then click **Next**. 5. Click **Data Extensions**, and then drag the object representing your subscribers to the Targeted section. 6. In the Select Publication List window, if needed, select specific subscribers instead of all of them, and then click **Select**. 7. Click **Next**, configure the timing for sending the email, and then click **Next**. 8. Verify all the details of your email delivery. To make changes, click **Back**. When you’re happy with the setup, select **This information is correct and this email is ready to send.** and then click **Schedule**. SEE ALSO # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries and Translation Learn what languages we support for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_pt_br.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_es_es.pdf) ### Marketing Cloud for Nonprofits Legacy - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_nl_NL.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_en_GB.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_fr_FR.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_de_DE.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/MCNGO/Marketing_Cloud_Engagement_for_Nonprofits_pt_BR.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Documentation Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries is an outreach marketing tools suite that helps you communicate with and engage your supporters, customers, and contacts. Learn how to take your messaging further with personalized emails, audience segmentation, and automated email campaigns. - **[Get Started with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install and use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. Send personalized emails to target audiences and create automated email campaigns. - **[Learn About Email Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_learn_about_email_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find the email templates that meet your needs and learn about using emails in Marketing Cloud. - **[Adopting Marketing Cloud Business Units](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_adopting_marketing_cloud_business_units.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Business Units are separate work spaces within an organization’s Marketing Cloud, that allow various teams to manage their data and marketing functions independently. This article explores different aspects of this feature and highlights various considerations to be kept in mind, to make the best use of business units for marketing functions. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what languages we support for Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Troubleshoot Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Resolve errors and configuration issues in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement with Your Products](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_integration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish setting up Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to work with your products. # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits - NPSP Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to its fullest potential and synchronize your Nonprofit Success Pack data with Marketing Cloud. - **[Create an NPSP Synchronized Data Source](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_sync_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create synchronized data sources to bring key stakeholder information from Salesforce to Marketing Cloud. - **[Populate NPSP Data Extensions with Automation Studio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_sync_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Automation Studio to automatically refresh your Data Extension when your Data Source receives new data from Salesforce - **[Create an Elevate Email with a Donate Now Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_sync_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a Donate Now button to emails to take donors to your Giving page. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits License Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_sync_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the licensing differences between Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries and Marketing Cloud Pro Edition. ## Create an NPSP Synchronized Data Source Create synchronized data sources to bring key stakeholder information from Salesforce to Marketing Cloud. A synchronized data source automatically adds stakeholder information that you define to Marketing Cloud. Create a synchronized data source that adds new and updated contact data from Salesforce to Marketing Cloud so you'll always have the most up-to-date information available for your marketing efforts. To create a synchronized data source for contacts: 1. Log into Marketing Cloud. 2. Under Audience Builder, click **Contact Builder**. 3. Click **Data Sources**. 4. Click **Synchronized**. 5. Click the available data source tile. 6. Click **\+ Set Up New Object**. 7. Locate the Contact tile and click the **Synchronize** button for that tile. 8. Select the fields to synchronize. Salesforce for Nonprofits users select the following fields: 1. First Name 2. Last Name 3. Mailing Street 4. Mailing City 5. Mailing State/Province 6. Mailing Zip/Postal Code 7. npo02\_\_FirstCloseDate\_\_c 8. npo02\_\_LargestAmount\_\_c 9. npo02\_\_LastOppAmount\_\_c 10. npo02\_\_LastCloseDate\_\_c ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note Some required fields are already selected for you such as Id, Email, and HasOptedOutOfEmail. 11. npo02\_\_NumberOfClosedOpps\_\_c 12. npo02\_\_TotalOppAmount\_\_c 9. Click **Next**. 10. In Records Collection, choose how to filter the synchronized data. Consider Marketing Cloud utilization limits and filter your data accordingly. For information about those limits or increasing them, contact your account executive. Alternatively, [manage your subscriptions](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/). 11. In Poll Schedule, choose how often you wish to synchronize data. We recommend **15 minutes**. 12. Click **Save & Synchronize**. 13. Salesforce for Nonprofits users should repeat steps 6-12 for the Recurring Donation object. Synchronize the Next Donation Date field npe03\_\_Next\_Payment\_Date\_\_c. The synchronization process may take several minutes to complete depending on the number of records. The synchronization process is successful when you see a tile for each of the entities you synchronized, including a row count and a synchronized status. Here's an example of the tile for the synchronized Contact entity. ![Successfully synchronized Contact entity displaying a row count of 188.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/resources-product/images/sync-contact-entity.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note The data synchronization is one-way from Salesforce to Marketing Cloud. In other words, any changes you make to your contact data in Marketing Cloud doesn't get sent back to Salesforce. ## Populate NPSP Data Extensions with Automation Studio Use Automation Studio to automatically refresh your Data Extension when your Data Source receives new data from Salesforce Use Automation Studio to automatically refresh your Data Extension when your Data Source receives new data from Salesforce. We created some automations for you, but you need to run them to retrieve the data. The Salesforce for Nonprofits automations for are: - Recurring Donor Automation - General Thank You Automation - Urgent Appeal Automation - General Donor Newsletter Automation - Soon To Lapse Automation - Welcome Series Automation 1. Log into Marketing Cloud. 2. Under Journey Builder, click **Automation Studio**. 3. Go to **My Automations**. 4. Open an automation and click **Run**. 5. In the next window, click **Run Now**. 6. Repeat until you have run all the automations. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Schedule this process to run daily or weekly, depending on how often you send emails, so you have the most recent data. ## Create an Elevate Email with a Donate Now Button Add a Donate Now button to emails to take donors to your Giving page. Salesforce for Nonprofits users can combine the powers of Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries and Elevate to boost your donations. Create emails that include a Donate Now button that takes donors to your [Giving Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_populate_with_url_params.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note This option is only available to Salesforce for Nonprofits users with an Elevate license. 1. Open the Elevate email template. 2. In the body of the email, find the Donate Now button. 3. Modify the following URL sections: 1. Replace **your-subdomain** with the correct subdomain name. 2. Replace **giving-page-name?** with the name of your Giving page. 4. Save your work. ## Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits License Information Learn about the licensing differences between Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries and Marketing Cloud Pro Edition. Salesforce for Nonprofits packages Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries (MCNGO) with a balance of price and features. Our goal is to provide Marketing Cloud to as many nonprofits as possible. The MCNGO edition closely matches the features and functionality in the Marketing Cloud Pro edition, with the following exceptions: | Item | Pro Edition Total | MCNGO Edition Total | | --- | --- | --- | | API Calls | 2,000,000 | 100,000 | | Automations | 15,000 | 10,000 | | Contacts | 15,000 | 10,000 | | Data Storage | 15 | 5 | | Super Messages | 2,500,000 | 750,000 | | Users | 15 | 5 | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need to increase any of these limits, contact your Account Executive. Learn more about Marketing Cloud editions in [How to Select the Right Marketing Cloud Edition](https://www.salesforce.com/content/dam/web/en_us/www/documents/pricing/mc_email_journey_pricing_sheet.pdf). SEE ALSO # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits Release Notes Learn what's in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.6) in Spring '23. ## Changes - Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits is now called Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. To reflect the renaming, we updated the product terminology and documentation. - We moved Deploy Assets to a separate tab. # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.4) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_mcngo_marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.4) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.4) in Summer '22. - We automated the setup steps on our Getting Started page. For the steps that we couldn’t fully automate, we included instructions and buttons that redirect you to where you can complete the configuration. - We changed the product name to Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits, to keep in line with bigger Marketing Cloud changes. # Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits now supports Brazilian Portuguese. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issue that we fixed in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. ## Changes Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits now supports Brazilian Portuguese. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issue that we fixed in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000000ywjwqae&title=user-will-still-get-403-error-on-step-6-on-the-getting-started-page-when-trying-to-deploy-templates): User gets 403 error on Step 6 on the getting started page when trying to deploy templates ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. ### Marketing Cloud Templates - BR\_Awareness\_Email\_GeneralThankYou.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Awareness\_Email\_WelcomeSeries.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Awareness\_Journey\_GeneralThankYou.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Awareness\_Journey\_WelcomeSeries.resource-meta.xml - BR\_ElevateEmailTemplate.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Onboarding\_Email\_GeneralDonorNewsletter.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Onboarding\_Email\_UrgentAppeal.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Onboarding\_Journey\_GeneralDonorNewsletter.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Onboarding\_Journey\_UrgentAppeal.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Retention\_Email\_RecurringDonor.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Retention\_Email\_SoonToLapse.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Retention\_Journey\_RecurringDonor.resource-meta.xml - BR\_Retention\_Journey\_SoonToLapse.resource-meta.xml - MC\_Username\_Set\_\_c.field-meta.xml ### Object - MC\_Configuration\_Settings\_\_c.object-meta.xml ### Fields - MC\_Authorized\_Username\_\_c.field-meta.xml - MC\_MID\_\_c.field-meta.xml - MC\_Org\_Authorized\_\_c.field-meta.xml - MC\_Stack\_\_c.field-meta.xml - MC\_Username\_Set\_\_c.field-meta.xml # Marketing Cloud Engagement with Your Products Finish setting up Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to work with your products. Synchronize your CRM data with Marketing Cloud to use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to its fullest potential. Here's a high level summary of the data synchronization steps: 1. Create a synchronized data source to automatically add contact data from Salesforce to Marketing Cloud on a recurring basis. 2. Using Automation Studio, run a data query to populate your data extensions on a recurring basis. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note Work with your Marketing Cloud admin to set up Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries for your product. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to its fullest potential and synchronize your Education Cloud CRM data with Marketing Cloud. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits - NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_sync_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries to its fullest potential and synchronize your Nonprofit Success Pack data with Marketing Cloud. # Mass Market Insights Dashboard in Nonprofit Use the Mass Market Insights dashboard on the Donor Engagement app home page to analyze campaign performance over a specific time period by using key fundraising metrics. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available with: Nonprofit Cloud or Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking in **Enterprise** and **Unlimited** Editions | ![The Mass Market Insights dashboard has important aspects flagged with numbers.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/Mass_Market_Insights_dashboard.png) - Use filters (1) to customize the Mass Market Insights dashboard based on specific campaign categories, campaign names, and time period. - Review the performance of the key metrics (2) for the selected time period. - Use the Campaign Performance Analysis (3) to get insights into the performance of each fundraising campaign. - In the By Campaign tab (4), view campaign insights by revenue (5) to see the revenue generated by each campaign; by donors (6) to see the number of donors contributing to each campaign; and by ROI (7) to see the returns generated by each campaign. - In the By Time tab (8), analyze campaign performance over time by revenue to see changes in revenue over the selected period; and by donors, to see the changes in the number of donors to understand engagement patterns and seasonality. **Example Use Case**: A marketing manager can use this dashboard to evaluate the effectiveness of recent fundraising campaigns. By applying filters to compare key metrics such as Return on Investment (ROI), new donors, and average gift amounts across different campaigns, they can identify the best-performing initiatives. The manager can use the metrics to refine strategies for future campaigns, focus on the most effective channels and approaches to maximize donor engagement, and boost overall revenue. ## Key Performance Indicators in Mass Market Insights Dashboard Learn the definitions and calculations of key metrics in the Mass Market Insights dashboard. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The data presented in the Mass Market Insights dashboard is categorized into two transaction categories—Mass Market and Major Donor & Mass Market. This grouping is used in calculations to derive insights.
Metric Description Calculation Transaction Category
ROI The return on investment for a campaign, showing how much is earned compared to what’s spent. (SUM GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount WHERE GiftTransaction.Campaign = Campaign) / Campaign.ActualCostAmount Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
New Donors The number of donors who made a donation to the organization for the first time in the selected period. min((GiftTransaction.TransactionDate) where GiftTransaction.IsPaid = true) = selected time period Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Avg. Gift Amount($) The average gift amount across the selected campaigns. Sum(GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount) / count(GiftTransaction) Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
CTRD($) The cost-to-revenue ratio for each campaign. Campaign.ActualCostAmount / (SUM GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount WHERE GiftTransaction.Campaign = Campaign) Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Campaign Revenue ($) The total revenue from gift transactions or formal commitments. Sum(GiftTransaction.CurrentAmount) Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Yearly Retention Rate The percentage of donors who donated in the current period as well as in the previous year, compared to the total number of donors who donated in the current period.

Query 1: Total number of donors who donated last year.

Query 2: Total number of donors who donated during the selected period.

Yearly Retention Rate: (Query 1 / Query 2) *100

 Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Revenue by Campaign The chart shows the total revenue generated from each campaign. Sum (Campaign Revenue) group by Campaign Name Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
Donors by Campaign The chart shows the number of unique donors contributing to each campaign. Unique (Donor ID) group by Campaign Name Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
ROI by Campaign The chart shows the average return on investment (ROI) for each campaign. Avg (ROI) group by Campaign Name Mass Market or Major Donor and Mass Market
# Match Mentees and Mentors Using Assessments Create assessments to help facilitators match mentees with mentors.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create assessment questions: | Education Cloud Full Access | Add an assessment with predefined questions that appear in the portal when a mentor or mentee enrolls in the mentoring program. Automation saves submitted responses as records related to the program enrollment. Mentoring facilitators review the responses to understand the mentee's needs and what mentors can provide, and then make a mutually beneficial match. Create separate assessments for mentors and mentees. ## Create an Assessment 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Assessment Questions**. 2. Click **Select Questions**. 3. On the Create Form page, under Omni Script Details, enter a name. 4. Select the language. 5. Enter a type and subtype. The type and subtype are used to specify the criteria when creating sharing rules for Omni Process. 6. Under New Omniscript, click the Edit step icon, and enter a name for the step. Add more steps, if necessary. 7. To find questions, use the search field and filters, and then drag the selected questions to the appropriate step. 8. Click **Build Omniscript**. 9. On the new Omniscript page, in the Build panel, drag Integration Procedure Action to the list of Omniscript elements. 10. Under Integration Procedure Action Properties, enter a name. 11. Enter the Integration Procedure for your assessment. 1. For a mentee assessment, enter EDUProgramMgmt\_EnrollInProgram. 2. For a mentor assessment, enter Mentoring/EnrollInPgm. 12. Activate the integration procedure. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Integration Procedures**. 2. Expand your integration procedure, and select the version that you want to activate. 3. To add or change the checks, customize the integration procedure. 4. In the Structure panel, click **Procedure Configuration**. 5. Click **Activate Version**. 13. On the Build tab, drag Navigate Action to the list of Omniscript elements. 14. Under Navigate Action Properties, enter a name. 15. Enter an Object API name. 1. For a mentee assessment, enter ProgramEnrollment. 2. For a mentor assessment, enter ProviderOffering. 16. Enter a Record ID. 1. For a mentee assessment, enter %programEnrollmentId%. 2. For a mentor assessment, enter %providerOfferingId%. 17. Click **Activate Version** and then click **Done**. # Match Volunteers to Volunteer Initiative Job Positions and Shifts Find volunteers by using smart matching criteria to search for the right volunteers for an initiative’s job position and job position shifts. The matching criteria include qualifications, shift or date-and-time range, location. Intelligently matched volunteers are the closest fit for the open shifts of a volunteer initiative and position. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To match volunteers to job positions and shifts: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
Before you search for volunteers: - Add Person Location Availability and Person Competencies related lists to the Person Account page layout. - Create Person Accounts for your volunteers and include their availability and competencies. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - Create volunteer initiatives. - Create job positions. - Create job position shifts. Matching is inclusive. A volunteer with a Qualification Level (QL) equal to or greater than the required level is a match. For example, a requirement of 2 matches levels 2, 3, 4, and higher. 1. From the Volunteer Management app, go to the Search for Volunteers tab. 2. Select the volunteer initiative. 3. Select a job position to fulfill. 4. To match volunteers by the qualifications assigned to the job position, select which qualifications to require for volunteer eligibility. Matching considers Position Qualifications (PQs) and Job Position Qualifications (JPQs). You can deselect qualifications, as needed. To match volunteers without considering their qualification, leave the qualification unselected. 5. To match volunteers by the job position shift or by a date-and-time range, select the method and shift or date-and-time range. Shift results show today’s shifts and those shifts in the future. To match volunteers without considering the date and time, select **Don’t match volunteers by date and time**. 6. To match volunteers by the location of the position, select **Search by job position location**. To match volunteers without considering the location, select **Don’t match volunteers by location**. 7. Click **Search Volunteers**. Volunteers who match your search criteria populate the table to the right of the search parameters. If matched volunteers have already signed up to volunteer, the table notes the related Job Position Assignment (JPA) or Job Position Shift (JPS). To see the volunteer’s JPA or JPS in the table, expand the volunteer’s row in the table. 8. To get different volunteer search results, click **Reset Criteria**, and select different matching criteria. If you don’t select any matching criteria, no volunteers appear in the results. To view and manage all volunteers without filtering, use Lists instead. 9. To keep a copy of the results to use to contact potential volunteers, click **Export Results** to download a CSV file of the results. The CSV file saves to the Job Position record, on the Related tab, under Files. SEE ALL: - [Volunteer Initiatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_volunteer_initiative.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Quickly set up and manage volunteer initiatives, so that volunteers can help your organization reach its goals. Initiatives are staffed by volunteer jobs with specified shifts. After you create volunteer initiatives with the job positions and shifts that serve it, use matching criteria to find the most qualified and appropriate volunteer to fill the shift.") - [Assign Volunteers to Job Position Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_assign_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Efficiently schedule volunteers to shifts and positions by using Nonprofit Cloud's Volunteer Management tools. To maintain adequate coverage of your volunteer initiatives, assign volunteers individually to shifts.") # Meaningful Impact Summarization Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes the involvement of an alumnus in volunteer roles that are endorsed and highly valued by your institution.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Alumni Engagement Metrics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager

Create a template-triggered prompt flow and add and configure these elements. See [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US).

Element

 Configuration
Start

  1. Select Automatic Inputs as the the input type.

  2. Select Engagement Visualization Template Capability as the prompt template type.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Contact, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Salesforce Object as the data source.

  3. Select Contact as the object.

  4. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  5. In Field, find and select Id.

  6. Select Equals as the operator.

  7. In Value, select $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID.

  8. Select Only the first record.

  9. Select Automatically store all fields.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Contact Name to the Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Name" : "{!Get_Contact.Name}", "Details": [.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Engagement Actions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select default as the data space.

  4. Select Engagement Action as the object.

  5. Enter 1 AND 2 AND 3 as the condition logic.

  6. Set these conditions.

    • ssot__IndividualId__c Equals $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID

    • ssot__EngagementCategory__c Equals VolunteerismCategory

    • ssot__EngagementDateTime__c Greater Than or Equal CurrentYear

  7. Select All Records.

  8. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Engagement Actions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Assignment

  1. In Label, enter Set Channel Engagement Ids, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select ChannelEngagementIds as the variable.

  3. Select Add as the operator.

  4. In Value, select Engagement Actions > Channel Engagement.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Channel Engagements, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select Channel Engagement as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__Id__c.

  7. Select In as the operator.

  8. In Value, find and select ChannelEngagementIds.

  9. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  10. Select All Records.

  11. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Engagement Action, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Channel Engagements, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Channel Engagements as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Decision

  1. In Label, enter Match Channel Engagement, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Match and enter these details.

    1. In Label and Outcome API name, enter Match.

    2. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the outcome.

    3. Select Engagement Action > Channel Engagement as the resource.

    4. Select Equals as the operator.

    5. Select Channel Engagements > Channel Engagement Id as the value.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Channel Engagement to Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Date" "{!Loop_through_Each_Engagement_Action.ssot__EngagementDateTime__c}", "Subject" : "{!Loop_through_Channel_Engagements.ssot__Subject__c}" },.

Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Ending Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter ]}..
![Meaningful Impact Summarization flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_meaningful_impact.png) # Meet Admissions Connect Bring your next class into focus with Admissions Connect. Recruiting and admissions is where dreams intersect. Being admitted to the right school can shape and forever change the future of an applicant, and finding the top best-fit applicants can help bring an institution’s mission statement to life. From the recruiter's booth to the reviewer's desk, institutions aspire to build the best possible classes and cohorts. Let's imagine how Admissions Connect can help admissions teams find, evaluate, and connect with their dream matches. > _For years, the admissions team at Henson Bell University has been striving to admit a more diverse group of students to STEM degree programs. With Admissions Connect recently implemented, the admissions director hopes to find that elusive and more inclusive next class._  > > _Regina, a member of the review team, opens the Admissions Connect app, which brings together in one screen everything she needs for a review—applicants' personal essays, transcripts, recommendations, and other supporting materials. Next in her queue is an applicant named Marla. Marla's personal essay tells the story of an aspiring first-generation college student whose mother has cerebral palsy. Marla sees a Computer Science degree as her path to becoming a quality engineer focused on accessibility—she dreams of ensuring technology is always accessible. A quick check of Marla’s transcripts and recommendations shows that she’s highly motivated and has taken several elective technology courses, excelling in all of them._  > > _But Regina sees that in earlier rounds, reviewers raised concerns about Marla’s test scores not meeting benchmarks. Regina feels that test scores are just one consideration among many, and not even the most relevant for this otherwise compelling applicant. She writes up her feedback, citing Marla's insightful, purposeful personal essay and focused academic preparation. Here is a strong, unique applicant—just what the admissions team is looking for. Regina submits her comments along with her wholehearted recommendation to admit._ > > _Lastly, Regina loops in the admissions director on the application record so that Marla’s application isn’t lost in the shuffle. The admissions director decides to include Marla’s application in the final round of reviews and she’s admitted for the Fall semester. In August, Marla makes her way to her first Emerging Technologies class._  ![Graphic showing a split screen with a reviewer on one side and an applicant on the other. They share a thought bubble that includes an image of a university in it with a small cohort of diverse students in it and a graduate in a cap and gown.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/concept_intro_story.png) Admissions Connect helps institutions fulfill applicants’ dreams while transforming admissions operations with: - Enterprise Territory Management to assign recruiters to prospects and help you track the best outreach programs for specific territories - Configurable application requirements that let you define what’s needed for each degree program, concentration, or type of applicant - Experience Cloud sites to create customized external reviewer and applicant portals - Application checklists that show the overall completion of the application requirements, making it easy for admissions staff and applicants to quickly assess progress - A single-page application reading experience for all users that shows application materials in a single scrollable view - An integrated admissions recommendation tool on the same page as the application, so reviewers don’t have to go somewhere else to submit their recommendation - The ability to assign multiple reviewers to a single application At the foundation of Admissions Connect is Education Data Architecture (EDA), which provides a single platform to track and follow constituents as they move from suspect, prospect, applicant, student, and someday alumnus. So if your dream is to say goodbye to disparate systems, siloed data, and review processes plagued by inefficiencies, Admissions Connect can help. See Also: # Meet Grants Management Grants Management helps grantmakers streamline their processes and get critical funding out to their communities quickly. As Aileen, the Executive Director at the Six Sides Fund, reviews the year-end impact report, something suddenly jumps out to her. While the funding awarded has increased over the last year, the number of applicants hasn't. Looking through their grantees, she notices a core group of applicants made up of nonprofits that apply regularly for funding each year. That makes sense to her because they have close relationships with their grantees and regularly connect to ensure they are applying for opportunities. But what about those organizations that they don't regularly connect with? Or the organizations they don't know at all, like the nonprofit advocating for affordable housing while operating on a shoe-string budget and with limited staff? Or the recent college graduate whose passion for racial equality spurred them to create a nonprofit seeking policy reform, but who lacks knowledge about how to find funding? These are deserving organizations that have missed out on the Six Sides Fund's funding opportunities. Aileen wonders, "How can we reach more people so our funding goes further?" ![Aileen considers the other deserving organizations and individuals that the Six Sides Fund can reach with Grants Management.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/meetgm.jpeg) Grants Management helps foundations like Aileen’s launch a portal where grantseekers can find funding opportunities, apply for funding, view their application status, and submit ongoing progress reports for awarded grants all in one place. # Meet Outbound Funds Module Outbound Funds Module helps organizations manage and track funding requests and outgoing funds, such as grants and scholarships. It's designed to be a flexible, lightweight solution to meet various needs across multiple industries. Marcus knows there is a better way. Once comfortably settled into his new position as Program Coordinator with the Six Sides Fund, Marcus picks up on a few trends. First, Angela, the Executive Director, brings in the tastiest homemade lemon bars almost every Monday. Next, the small but mighty staff at the Six Sides Fund have various ways of tracking grant applications. It seems like each person uses a different way to track—most in spreadsheets, but some in authoring tools and one even on paper! The most concerning trend Marcus notices is not knowing when or if a grantee received their funding. When a new grantee reached out asking for a timeline when their funds would be deposited, Marcus realized all payments were saved in a spreadsheet on their part-time accountant's desktop, who was on vacation for the next week and forgot to send out the latest payment ledger. With everyone using a different method of tracking and information inaccessible to the staff, Marcus is determined to find a better solution. ![Marcus is looking for a solution, and Outbound Funds Module is exactly that!](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/michonofm.png) With Outbound Funds Module, organizations can: - Manage external (and even internal) requests for funding. - Track each step of an applicant's journey—from the initial application to supporting documentation to outcomes reporting. - Schedule and disburse payments to awardees. - Cultivate and maintain active relationships with applicants and awardees through a fundseeker portal (Experience Cloud required). This is exactly the solution Marcus is looking for! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Outbound Funds Module is a community-inspired and created product originally developed as part of the Salesforce.org Open Source Commons program. We want to thank the following community members who have lovingly designed and crafted Outbound Funds Module: Alexa Adams, Mark Adcock, Sarah Amin, Thom Behrens, Shari Carlson, Bill Corkill, Emily Jakubiak, Gordon Lau, Nick Lindberg, Peter Oglivie, Stan Reeser, Kim Schaefges, Junette Tan, Gabriel Vieira, TJ Warfield, and Libby Ziemelis. We also want to recognize and express our appreciation to the many community members and employees who contributed to Outbound Funds Module during community sprints over the last several years. ![An image of the core members of the community eam who created and developed Outbound Funds Module.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_community.png) # Meet Pathways Understand how Pathways can help students chart a course to graduation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. Pathways is an interface that visually summarizes the requirements for earning a degree or other credential from your institution. Forget about browsing a giant PDF. With Pathways, students can find their program more easily, picture their academic options more clearly, ask more informed questions of their support staff, and navigate decisions more confidently from term to term. Students can even create their own version of a program plan to map out which courses they'll take in each term. Let's meet Stuart. He's interested in two programs: Economics and Computer Science. He wants to see details for each program so that he can make an informed decision about which one to pursue. Pathways lets him easily see all requirements for each program. ![Pathways component showing two potential program paths: B.S. in Economics and B.S. in Computer Science](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_plan_options.png) After reviewing both programs, Stuart decides to major in Economics. He schedules an appointment with an academic counselor on his success team to discuss the decision. During the appointment, they look at the specific details for the Economics major and plan for Stuart to take some lower level required courses next term. ![Pathways component showing details for the Economics Major Requirements, including Required Lower Level Coursework, Upper Level Coursework, and Upper Level Math](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_feature_plan_sample_econ.png) In future appointments, Stuart and his counselor can review the requirements and make sure that Stuart stays on the path toward graduation. They can also create a Personal Program Plan that plots, term by term, the courses he needs to take to graduate on time. ![Pathways component showing details for a Personal Program Plan, including courses for two terms required to graduate on time with a degree in Economics.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_personal_program_plan_sample.png) # Meet Student Success Hub Provide an equitable, unified, and collaborative student support experience. At Valley School District, high school counselor Devi Gill's job has never been more challenging. A year of remote learning required her to coordinate the delivery of books, tablet devices, and Wi-Fi hotspots to students such as Elijah, who lives with his grandmother, and to help seniors with college applications from a distance. ![Counselor Devi Gill delivers books to student Elijah as part of a Student Success Hub Success Plan](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_meet_illo.png) Over at Callaras University, academic advisor Adrian Morges is busy, too. When he checked his email this morning, he saw that one student rescheduled an appointment to talk about degree planning, and he's meeting with two students later in the day. - At 10 AM: Stephanie, a sophomore, hasn't registered for next semester's classes. She's dragging her feet and questioning her choice of major. - At 2 PM: Stuart, a transfer student, needs a plan to get back on track after a year of health and financial issues hurt his academic performance. Luckily for Devi and Adrian, their educational institutions use Student Success Hub, providing them a robust set of tools to impart equitable, unified, and collaborative support to their students. With Student Success Hub in K-12 schools, teachers, counselors, and other support staff such as Devi: - Have the data they need to support students—grades, notes, pending tasks, deadlines—all in one place. - Can easily collaborate to identify and deliver assistance to students by using personalized Success Plans. - Are alerted to students who need support based on the ABCs: attendance, behavior, and courses. - Can securely track tasks, interactions, and services provided to students and measure the impact of interventions and programs. With Student Success Hub in higher education, support staff can make use of all these features and use additional tools to foster focused conversations with students about educational success. Counselors, coaches, advisors, and other higher ed support staff like Adrian can: - Schedule and manage in-person, phone, and virtual appointments with students in just a few clicks. - Create and manage Alerts especially for college and university students, such as for academics, careers, financial aid, and housing. - Assign tasks directly to students to help them achieve a goal or reach a milestone. - Communicate with students by using a dedicated portal, where students can see who's on their success team, schedule appointments for support services, and stay on top of their assigned tasks. Student Success Hub empowers educators to provide proactive and personalized support to every Elijah, Stephanie, and Stuart in their care. # Meet the Student Success Chatbot Help students keep up with tasks by using the Student Success Chatbot. Students have a lot to do: write papers, study for finals, apply for internships, and more. Keeping up with Tasks in their Success Plans is another of the many balls that students juggle. Help them stay on track with the Student Success chatbot, an Einstein bot that you can deploy to a messaging channel (SMS), an Experience Cloud site, or another digital engagement channel. ![A conversation in the Student Success Chatbot](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_chatbot_meet.png) The Student Success chatbot provides: - An Einstein Bot called Student Success Chatbot, with preconfigured dialogs, entities, and variables - Flows that support the chatbot - A preconfigured routing configuration (Student Success Chatbot) - A default queue (Student Success Chatbot) - Custom fields on the Contact object to use with the chatbot - Custom fields on the Activity (Task) object to use with the chatbot Not familiar with chatbots? Check out the [Einstein Bot Basics](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/service_bots_basics) module in Trailhead. Otherwise, see [Install the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand the operational requirements, prerequisites, and how to install the Student Success Chatbot."). # Mentoring Define and manage mentoring support programs with related benefits.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Mentoring in Education Cloud to provide and manage mentoring benefits and programs that connect learners with mentors based on shared interests and goals. - **[Mentoring Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_a_mentoring_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Education Cloud Mentoring app to create a program to connect mentees with mentors, and manage and assign mentoring benefits. - **[Mentoring Program Benefits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_benefits_for_your_mentoring_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up mentoring benefits and identify benefit providers for your mentoring program. - **[Mentoring Participants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_mentoring_participants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up profiles, permission sets, and sharing for your facilitators, mentors, and mentees. - **[Mentoring Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_mentoring_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the role, preferences, and interests of mentoring participants. - **[Mentoring Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to create a portal where mentors and mentees can discover and enroll in mentoring benefits. In the portal, users can respond to assessments that help to match a mentor with a mentee, see benefit assignments, and see details of their Mentoring interactions. - **[Connect Mentees With Mentors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_mentees_with_mentors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the needs of your mentees and get them the benefits that they need to be successful. # Mentoring Create and manage mentoring programs, strengthen relationships between mentors and mentees, assign benefits, and manage assessments.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
A mentoring program plays a pivotal role in enhancing the overall experience and personal development of members of your institution. Mentoring helps people succeed academically, professionally, and personally while creating a supportive and inclusive community. The mentorship experience can have a profound and lasting effect on participants, helping them to become confident, well-rounded individuals ready to contribute to society. A mentoring program can benefit participants in several ways. Academic Guidance Mentoring programs provide students with access to experienced mentors who can offer academic guidance. Mentors can help mentees select appropriate courses, navigate complex academic requirements, and provide insights into the best study practices. This guidance is valuable for first-year students who are unfamiliar with the university system. Career Development Mentors can assist mentees in identifying their career goals and help them develop a roadmap to achieve those goals. Mentors can provide insights into different career paths, offer advice on internships and job searches, and connect mentees with valuable professional networks. Personal Growth and Support University life can be challenging, and students often face personal issues such as stress, anxiety, and time management problems. Beyond academics and career goals, mentors can serve as a source of emotional support, providing a safe space for mentees to discuss their concerns and seek advice on managing their personal lives alongside their academics. Networking Opportunities Mentoring programs often connect mentees with a diverse group of mentors who come from various fields and backgrounds. These connections can be invaluable for expanding a mentee's professional network, potentially leading to internships, job opportunities, and collaborations. Retention and Engagement A well-structured mentoring program can contribute to higher retention rates. When students feel supported and connected with their university community, they're more likely to stay engaged in their studies and complete their degree programs. Skill Development Mentors can help mentees develop essential skills, both academic and life skills. They can provide guidance on critical thinking, problem-solving, time management, communication, and leadership, which are valuable not only during university but also in future careers. Diversity and Inclusion Mentoring programs can promote diversity and inclusion on campus. They can pair students with mentors from diverse backgrounds, helping to create a more inclusive and welcoming university environment. Long-term Success The guidance and support provided through mentoring programs can have a lasting impact on students' lives. Many students continue to maintain relationships with their mentors long after graduation, benefiting from ongoing mentorship as they navigate their careers. Here's how you can use Education Cloud to manage a mentoring program. - Create a mentoring program and track benefit disbursements. - Add components designed for mentoring to an Experience Cloud site so that mentors and mentees can enroll in your mentoring program. - Use flows to manage mentoring roles and program enrollment. - Give mentoring facilitators a single home page to view mentoring benefit assignments and benefit providers. See Also: - [Set Up Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Mentoring in Education Cloud to provide and manage mentoring benefits and programs that connect learners with mentors based on shared interests and goals.") - [Mentoring Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_a_mentoring_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Education Cloud Mentoring app to create a program to connect mentees with mentors, and manage and assign mentoring benefits.") # Mentoring Participants Set up profiles, permission sets, and sharing for your facilitators, mentors, and mentees. There are several varieties of mentors. A mentor is a senior student or staff member who provides tutoring to first-year students. An alumnus from your institution can mentor students on networking or skills development. An outside organization that sets up work-study programs for students can be a mentor. Represent mentors by using the Provider Offering object. A user becomes a mentee when they enroll in a mentoring program, or when you identify a related program enrollment record in their mentoring profile. Mentees can be students in your institution, but they can also be new staff members. Mentoring Facilitators use the Mentoring app in Education Cloud to create programs, create mentoring profiles, assign mentors to mentees, manage assessments, and so on. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Staff mentors need a separate Customer Community Plus license to access the Mentoring portal as a mentor or mentee.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Mentoring Facilitators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring_facilitators.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set and set sharing rules to provide mentoring facilitators with the access that they need to support your mentoring program. - **[Manage Sharing For Your Mentoring Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_sharing_for_your_mentoring_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update program sharing rules and create sharing sets for facilitators, mentors, and mentees. # Mentoring Portals Use Experience Builder to create a portal where mentors and mentees can discover and enroll in mentoring benefits. In the portal, users can respond to assessments that help to match a mentor with a mentee, see benefit assignments, and see details of their Mentoring interactions.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Prerequisites for Your Mentoring Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_your_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To set up and use a Mentoring portal in Education Cloud, complete these prerequisites. - **[Configure Page Layouts for Mentoring Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_page_layouts_for_mentoring_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the objects and page layouts that support your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. - **[Create a Mentoring Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Experience Cloud site for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. How you designate mentors and mentees in your organization determines if you can use a single Experience Cloud site for your mentoring portal. - **[Page and Component Access Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_page_and_component_access_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control the pages and page components that mentors and mentees can access in your Education Cloud Mentoring portal by using audiences. Create separate audiences for your mentor and mentee profiles so that portal users get the appropriate portal experience. - **[Customize Mentoring Portal Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_customize_mentoring_portal_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and configure pages for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. - **[Configure Mentoring Portal Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_mentoring_portal_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up your Education Cloud Mentoring portal, assign Mentoring participants, preview the site, and then activate the site. # Mentoring Profiles Identify the role, preferences, and interests of mentoring participants. A mentoring profile record helps you to connect a mentee with a suitable mentor. Populate the record with fields that you can use in the Mentor Comparison screen flow to compare potential mentors with a mentee and make a match. Possible fields for comparison include the subject area or industry, in-person or virtual meeting preference, location, or the days and times that the participant is available. You can add any fields that help you match the perfect mentor with the mentee. ![Screenshot showing the mentoring profile card for a mentee](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_profile.png) ![Screenshot showing the comparison of three potential mentors with a mentee](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_comparison_view.png) - **[Update the Mentoring Profile Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_the_mentoring_profile_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and add fields to the mentoring profile record page that you want to use to compare and match mentors with a mentee. - **[Create a Mentoring Profile Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_mentoring_profile_record.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify roles and preferences for Mentoring participants. # Mentoring Program Benefits Set up mentoring benefits and identify benefit providers for your mentoring program.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
There are many types of mentoring that can occur in an institution, such as networking, skill development, academic guidance, and career development. Let's look at how Astro University can involve alumni to provide current students with their career preparation. First, Astro University creates a benefit type called Mentoring. Next, they create a mentoring benefit that connects current students with alumni who can offer guidance on possible careers and connections in their field of study. Now that they have the benefit created, Astro University needs someone to be a mentor who can provide this specific benefit. Robert Alumnus graduated from Astro University with a degree in Economics. He can act as a mentor to current Economics students at Astro University and offer insight on career opportunities in Economics. Astro University can add Robert as a benefit provider in the CRM, or he can register as a benefit provider on Astro University's mentor portal. - **[Create a Mentoring Benefit Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_mentoring_benefit_type.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Group your mentoring benefits under a benefit type. - **[Create a Mentoring Benefit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_mentoring_benefit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up benefits for your mentoring program. - **[Manage Benefit Providers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_benefit_providers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify people or organizations who can provide benefits to mentees using the provider offering object. - **[Benefit Assignment Record Page for Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_explore_the_mentoring_benefit_assignment_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage mentoring relationships on the benefit assignment record page. # Mentoring Programs Use the Education Cloud Mentoring app to create a program to connect mentees with mentors, and manage and assign mentoring benefits.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
With the Mentoring app, facilitators can create and manage mentoring programs and set the benefits that they contain. Mentees enroll in these programs in the mentee portal, and mentors can register as providers of benefits in the mentor portal. Mentoring facilitators can use assessments to connect a mentee with a mentor who can address the mentee's needs and goals. ![Mentoring app home page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_program.png) To set up a mentoring program, see [Model Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects and apps to define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey."). # Merge or Split Households Merge two different household accounts into one, and split one household into different accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Merge or Split Households](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ffIgPXXr_aE) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note These steps will only work with the Household Account Model in the Nonprofit Success Pack. For more information, see [What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") - **[Merge Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_or_split_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Have you ever found yourself with two different Household Account records, both of which have the same mailing address? This often occurs during an online form integration where two of your Contacts registered with your organization separately. It can also occur as a result of a data import. - **[Split a Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_or_split_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You may also find that you need to separate members of a Household. For example, if a child moves away, or if Household members go through a divorce. ## Merge Households Have you ever found yourself with two different Household Account records, both of which have the same mailing address? This often occurs during an online form integration where two of your Contacts registered with your organization separately. It can also occur as a result of a data import. In addition to the above scenario, you might find that two of your Contacts who were previously in separate households are now living together. Luckily, the Nonprofit Success Pack lets you easily merge Household Account records together without losing any data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Use Merge Households to put two different Contacts into a single Household Account. If you have duplicate Contacts use Merge Contacts. Learn more in [Find and Merge Duplicate Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_merge_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Contact Merge to find and merge duplicate constituent records."). To merge two Households: 1. Search for the Contact that should be the Primary Contact on the final, merged Household. You can do this by typing the Contact's name in the search box at the top of Salesforce. 2. Once you're on the Contact record, click the Household Name. The Household Name is the same as the Account Name: ![Contact Details showing Account Name of Smith Household](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/account_name_hh_name.png) 3. On the Household record, click **Manage Household**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Manage Household button, your admin may need to add it to the page. See [Enable the Manage Household Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended.") for more information. In the **Find a Contact or Add a New Contact to the Household** search box, enter the name of the Contact to merge into the Household. Give it a moment to find the right record, and then click ![Add Contact Icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/merge_split_hhs_plusicon.png) ![Add Contact to Household](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/merge_split_hhs_findrecord.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Contact that’s merged into the Household will adopt the Household’s address. Learn more in [Override the Default Household Address for a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_override_the_default_address_for_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you have a Contact who prefers to receive their individual mailings at a different address than the default Household address, you can accommodate them by setting an Address Override."). 4. If the Contact you're merging into the existing Household is part of a Household with more than one Contact, you have the option of adding just that one Contact, or adding all Household members: ![Merge Household Dialog Box](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/merge_split_hhs_mergehhs.png) Add Individual Contact This option relocates the Contact to the new Household, but does not copy over any fields from the other Household, and leaves the other Household, as well as the members and Opportunity history of the Household, intact. The option does move over any Opportunities for which the Contact is the primary donor. Add All Members This option updates the existing Household to include the new members, and deletes the old Household. 5. Click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note All related records affiliated with the former Household will merge to the new Household record. ## Split a Household You may also find that you need to separate members of a Household. For example, if a child moves away, or if Household members go through a divorce. 1. Navigate to the Household record that currently contains all Household members. (If you're using the Household Account model, this is the Household Account record.) 2. Click **Manage Household**. 3. On the Manage Household page, hover over the Contact card of the Contact you want to remove, and click the Remove (x) icon. When you click the Remove icon, Salesforce moves the Contact to their own separate Household. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note When removing the Primary Contact, select a new Primary Contact or Salesforce will select a new Primary contact by default. ![Manage Household Page: Remove a contact from the household](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/merge_split_hhs_deletecontact.png) 4. Click **Save**. Depending on Household settings and how you log related records (for example, donations, Cases, Activities), the Contact leaving the Household may no longer be associated with the historical data you're expecting to see. After splitting a Household, we recommend: - [Recalculate rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build.") - Review Account and Contact rollups for both Households - Review all related records in both Households to ensure records are associated correctly # Migrate Account and Contact Records to Education Cloud Convert individual model account and contact records to person account records in Education Cloud. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Test these steps in a sandbox org before moving to production. The transformation of the individual data model to person accounts is irreversible. 1. Perform a data backup. 2. Configure your person account record types in the individual record type mapper object. 3. Export and transform all individuals to person accounts. 1. Use Data Loader to export the IDs of all individual accounts. If you have multiple record types that you want to retain, export accounts by record type and perform these steps for each record type. Export the IDs of these accounts to a CSV file. Here's a sample query: ``` Select Id from Account where recordtype.name = '%Administrative%' ``` 2. In the exported CSV file, add a column and title it PersonRecordTypeId. 3. Add the Person Account Record Type ID in this column for all records. 1. From the object management settings for person accounts, go to Record Types. 2. Click **Person Account**. 3. In your browser address bar, copy the ID and paste it into the CSV file. The ID is 18 digits long and starts with 012. 4. Similarly, add the Person Account Record Type ID for all records. 4. Use Data Loader to update the account records. 1. Map ID to ID. 2. Map PersonRecordTypeId to RecordTypeId. 3. Update accounts by using Data Loader. These individuals are converted to person accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To prevent duplication, don't use the insert operation. 5. Validate the converted records. 1. Export all records to ensure that they are converted to person accounts. 2. Open a converted record, and view all tabs (such as Relationships) to confirm that your data and relationships are accurate. SEE ALSO: - [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_enable_person_accounts.htm&type=5) - [Considerations for Person Account Migration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_person_account_migration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Consider including these steps in your plan before you migrate account and contact records to person account records.") - [IndividualRecordTypeMapper](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.246.0.health_cloud_object_reference.meta/health_cloud_object_reference/hc_api_mdt_individual_record_type_mapper.htm) - [Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.data_loader.htm&type=5) # Migrate Alert Data to Education Cloud Use Data Loader and Developer Console to migrate data from the record alert object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. Ensure that the required picklist values are available for the Severity field on the Record Alert object. See [Add Picklist Values to Education Cloud Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_picklist_values_to_education_cloud_fields_neworg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Ensure that the picklist values in the source fields are available in the target (Education Cloud) fields. If the picklist values aren't available, add the missing values manually."). 1. Export record alert data from your source org. 1. Log in to your source org 2. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 3. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 4. Enter and run this code: ``` WhatIdTypeExtractorBatch_Alert batchJob = new WhatIdTypeExtractorBatch_Alert(); Database.executeBatch(batchJob); ``` 5. Use Data Loader to export data from the SSH\_Shadow\_sfal\_Alert\_\_c object into a CSV (.csv) file. 2. Import record alert data into your target (Education Cloud) org. 1. Log in to your target org 2. Use Data Loader to import the data from the CSV file. 3. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 4. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 5. Enter and run this code: ``` NewWhatIdUpdateBatch_RecordAlert batchJob = new NewWhatIdUpdateBatch_RecordAlert(); Database.executeBatch(batchJob,40); ``` # Migrate Data in EDA Prepare to migrate your data to EDA . - **[Before You Migrate Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_migrate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before migrating data to Education Data Architecture, we recommend that you learn about the EDA data model. Understanding which objects are available and how your data maps to them can help you decide whether to migrate all of your data or just some of it. If you’re migrating all of your data and are replacing a legacy system, follow the steps for installing and configuring Education Data Architecture in a new org. If you’re integrating a legacy system with Education Data Architecture, we recommend using a middleware tool to build the integrated system, starting with the standard EDA data model, then customizing it to accommodate the data from the legacy system. - **[Modify Your Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_migrate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make sure that you're able to merge data, review the prerequisites before migrating. ## Before You Migrate Data Before migrating data to Education Data Architecture, we recommend that you learn about the EDA data model. Understanding which objects are available and how your data maps to them can help you decide whether to migrate all of your data or just some of it. If you’re migrating all of your data and are replacing a legacy system, follow the steps for installing and configuring Education Data Architecture in a new org. If you’re integrating a legacy system with Education Data Architecture, we recommend using a middleware tool to build the integrated system, starting with the standard EDA data model, then customizing it to accommodate the data from the legacy system. Familiarity with the EDA data model also helps you decide whether you can use only existing Education Data Architecture objects or whether you need custom objects. While you’re free to create as many custom objects as you need, we recommend using Education Data Architecture objects instead of creating custom objects when possible, to make sure that you can use new tools and features as they’re released. For information, see [Welcome to Your EDA Data Model Orientation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_welcome_to_eda_data_model.htm). After learning about the EDA data model, take some time to get acquainted with the automation that affects imported data and our [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm). ## Modify Your Settings To make sure that you're able to merge data, review the prerequisites before migrating. - In EDA Settings, turn off **Record Type Validation**. - Disable these EDA triggers: - ACCT\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - ADDR\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - AFFL\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - BEH\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - CASE\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - CON\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - COUR\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - COFF\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - FACI\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - PReq\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - PREN\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - PPlan\_CannotDelete\_TDTM  See [Disable Trigger Handlers for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm). You can turn these settings and triggers back on after merging your data. If your batches time out before a merge completes, include fewer records in them. Batch size processing defaults to 200 records per migration, which can be too large if you have other existing automation. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip In most cases, we recommend that you work with a partner to migrate your data and to build customizations. If you don't work with a partner, be sure to migrate data to a Sandbox org before moving it to a Production org. To migrate data from an existing org to your fresh org, you can also [Request an Org Swap](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_request_an_org_swap.htm). For additional information about migrating data in Salesforce, see [Migrate data from one organization to another](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000322219&type=1&mode=1) in Salesforce Help. # Migrate Data in K-12 Architecture Kit Prepare to migrate your data to K-12 Architecture Kit​. - **[Before You Migrate Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_migrate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before migrating data to K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend that you learn about the EDA data model. The EDA data model is the foundation of K-12 Architecture Kit, so it’s important to learn about it. Understanding which objects are available and how your data maps to them can help you decide whether to migrate all of your data or just some of it. If you’re migrating all of your data and are replacing a legacy system, follow the steps for installing and configuring K-12 Architecture Kit in a new org. If you’re integrating a legacy system with K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend using a middleware tool to build the integrated system, starting with the standard EDA data model, then customizing it to accommodate the data from the legacy system. - **[Modify Your Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_migrate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make sure that you're able to merge data, review the prerequisites before migrating. ## Before You Migrate Data Before migrating data to K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend that you learn about the EDA data model. The EDA data model is the foundation of K-12 Architecture Kit, so it’s important to learn about it. Understanding which objects are available and how your data maps to them can help you decide whether to migrate all of your data or just some of it. If you’re migrating all of your data and are replacing a legacy system, follow the steps for installing and configuring K-12 Architecture Kit in a new org. If you’re integrating a legacy system with K-12 Architecture Kit, we recommend using a middleware tool to build the integrated system, starting with the standard EDA data model, then customizing it to accommodate the data from the legacy system. Familiarity with the EDA data model also helps you decide whether you can use only existing K-12 Architecture Kit objects or whether you need custom objects. While you’re free to create as many custom objects as you need, we recommend using K-12 Architecture Kit objects instead of creating custom objects when possible, to make sure that you can use new tools and features as they’re released. For information, see [Welcome to Your EDA Data Model Orientation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_welcome_to_eda_data_model.htm). After learning about the EDA data model, take some time to get acquainted with the automation that affects imported data and our [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm). ## Modify Your Settings To make sure that you're able to merge data, review the prerequisites before migrating. - In EDA Settings, turn off **Record Type Validation**. - Disable these EDA triggers: - ACCT\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - ADDR\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - AFFL\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - BEH\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - CASE\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - CON\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - COUR\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - COFF\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - FACI\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - PReq\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - PREN\_CannotDelete\_TDTM - PPlan\_CannotDelete\_TDTM  See [Disable Trigger Handlers for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_disable_trigger_handlers.htm). You can turn these settings and triggers back on after merging your data. If your batches time out before a merge completes, include fewer records in them. Batch size processing defaults to 200 records per migration, which can be too large if you have other existing automation. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip In most cases, we recommend that you work with a partner to migrate your data and to build customizations. If you don't work with a partner, be sure to migrate data to a Sandbox org before moving it to a Production org. To migrate data from an existing org to your fresh org, you can also [Request an Org Swap](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_request_an_org_swap.htm). For additional information about migrating data in Salesforce, see [Migrate data from one organization to another](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000322219&type=1&mode=1) in Salesforce Help. # Migrate Data to New Record Types in Education Cloud If required, you can migrate account and case data from your source org to new record types in Education Cloud. 1. Map the Record Type IDs in your source and target (Education Cloud) orgs. 2. Run the Data Processing Engine definitions as required, . - For Account: EDA\_to\_EdCloud\_IntOrg\_CoreObjects\_Account\_Domain00\_DPE04\_RecTypeChange - For Case: EDA\_to\_EdCloud\_IntOrg\_CoreObjects\_Case\_Domain00\_DPE10\_RecTypeChange 3. Provide the record type IDs in the source and target orgs as mapped. | Source Org Record Type ID Field | Target Org Record Type ID Field | | --- | --- | | Var\_Source\_EDA\_RecordTypeId\_1 | Var\_Target\_EDC\_RecordTypeId\_1 | | Var\_Source\_EDA\_RecordTypeId\_2 | Var\_Target\_EDC\_RecordTypeId\_2 | | Var\_Source\_EDA\_RecordTypeId\_3 | Var\_Target\_EDC\_RecordTypeId\_3 | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can migrate up to three record types at a time. For additional record types, run the definitions again with the new record type IDs. For less than three record types in a run, provide NA where the record type ID isn't available. 4. Proceed to migrate the data. Source\_EDA\_RecordTypes data is available as Target\_EDC\_RecordTypes in your target (Education Cloud) org. # Migrate Event Data to Education Cloud Use Data Loader and Developer Console to migrate data from the user object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. 1. Export event data from your source org. 1. Log in to your source org 2. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 3. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 4. Enter and run this code: ``` WhatIdTypeExtractorBatch_Event batchJob = new WhatIdTypeExtractorBatch_Event(); Database.executeBatch(batchJob); ``` 5. Use Data Loader to export data from the Shadow\_Event\_\_c object into a CSV (.csv) file. 2. Import event data into your target (Education Cloud) org. 1. Log in to your target org 2. Use Data Loader to import the data from the CSV file. 3. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 4. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 5. Enter and run this code: ``` NewWhatIdUpdateBatch_Event batchJob = new NewWhatIdUpdateBatch_Event(); Database.executeBatch(batchJob,40); ``` # Migrate Task Data to Education Cloud Use Data Loader and Developer Console to migrate data from the task object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. 1. Export task data from your source org. 1. Log in to your source org 2. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 3. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 4. Enter and run this code: ``` WhatIdTypeExtractorBatch_Task batchJob = new WhatIdTypeExtractorBatch_Task(); Database.executeBatch(batchJob); ``` 5. Use Data Loader to export data from the Shadow\_Task\_\_c object into a CSV (.csv) file. 2. Import task data into your target (Education Cloud) org. 1. Log in to your target org 2. Use Data Loader to import the data from the CSV file. 3. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 4. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 5. Enter and run this code: ``` NewWhatIdUpdateBatch_Task batchJob = new NewWhatIdUpdateBatch_Task(); Database.executeBatch(batchJob,40); ``` # Migrate User Data to Education Cloud Use Data Loader to migrate data from the user object in your source org to your target (Education Cloud) org. 1. Log in to your source org. 2. Use Data Loader to export data from the user object into a CSV (.csv) file. 3. Open the CSV file, edit the Profile ID, User Role ID, and Username fields for each record as required, and then save your changes. 4. Log in to your target (Education Cloud) org. 5. Use Data Loader to import the data from the CSV file. 6. Run the Data Processing Engine definition EDA\_to\_EdCloud\_IntOrg\_CoreObjects\_UserRole\_Domain00\_DPE01 again. This sets up the User fields on the UserRole object in Education Cloud. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To map the current and new User Role IDs, export the user data from your source and target orgs after data migration, and then match the Developer Name for each record. SEE ALSO: - [Using Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.dataloader.meta/dataloader/configuring_the_data_loader.htm) # Model Admission Applications Use Education Cloud objects to review and manage an applicant's information, education history, and qualifications.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Application management uses multiple objects to model an applicant's information. This table explains how the admissions objects work in the application process. | Object | How It Relates to Applications | | --- | --- | | Academic Term Enrollment | Represents the academic term that the applicant enrolls in. | | Application Decision | Represents the publicly released decision for an application to an institution. | | Application Review | Represents a review performed for an application to an institution. | | Individual Application | Related to the account of the person who submits an application to an institution or a program. Can also be related to the contact who prepares an application on behalf of the applicant. | | Person Account | Stores information about a person who submits an application to an institution or program. | | Preliminary Application Reference | Stores applications that are in progress so that applicants can finish an application at a later time. | When an applicant registers on your learner portal, Education Cloud automatically creates a person account for them. To prevent duplicate records, if you convert person accounts to Experience Cloud users, make sure to include an email address on the existing person account. Education Cloud provides flow templates to automatically create a case for an applicant and assign the case to the appropriate support staff. You can also automatically close a case when an application is rejected, canceled, or when the applicant enrolls in the institution. ## Applicant Data Record Examples See an example of how Education Cloud structures data records for an applicant. Student Madison Hadzic is a senior at Daisy Bates Academy, and she's applying to Astro University for undergraduate admission in the 2023 fall term. Education Cloud creates these records for Madison's application. | Record | Record Name | Record Created When... | Record Represents... | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Application Case | 00001003 | Madison submits her application to Astro University. | The case that's assigned to Madison. | | Contact Contact Relationship | CCR-006147 | Madison enters a family member, such as a guardian or sibling, on her application. | The relationship between Madison and her family member. | | Contact Profile | 00049821 | Madison submits her application to Astro University. | Profile details related to the Madison's person account. | | Document Checklist Item | Personal Essay | Madison uploads her college application essay. | A file that's associated with Madison's application. | | Individual Application | IA-2681 | Madison submits her application to Astro University. | A person's admissions application. | | Person Account | Madison Hadzic | Madison registers on Astro University's learner portal to submit her application. | The person account for Madison. | | Person Education | High School Diploma | Madison enters her high school education history or a guardian's education level. | Details about Madison's education history at an institution or grade level. | | Person Employment | Acme Products | Madison lists an employer for her guardian. | Employment details for Madison or her guardian. | | Person Examination | PEX-005971 | Madison enters her scores from a standardized test. | The composite or single-section score for a standardized test. | | Person Language | PL-0804 | Madison enters a language in the Language Proficiency section of the application form. | Madison's proficiency in a given language. | | Preliminary Application Reference | PAR-004581 | Madison starts an application. | The initial application form before submission. | See Also: - [Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Build a portal for your applicants, students, and alumni to access your institution's services.") - [Automate Academic Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_academic_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use flows to automate your academic processes such as creating and assigning cases, or automate the application review process.") # Model Admissions Applications Review and manage an applicant's information, education history, and qualifications. - **[Model Admissions Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_admissions_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application management in EDA relies on several custom objects for modeling an applicant's information, education history, and qualifications—namely Application, Affiliation, Education History, Test, and Test Score. ## Model Admissions Applications Application management in EDA relies on several custom objects for modeling an applicant's information, education history, and qualifications—namely Application, Affiliation, Education History, Test, and Test Score. First, let's summarize the basics of these admissions-focused objects. - The Application object is related to the Contact who represents an applicant to an institution or a program. It can also be related to the Contact who prepares an Application on behalf of the applicant Contact. - An Application record is always for a specific program, and often for a specific Term. - The Education History object relates the Contact to the educational institutions (Accounts) where they've studied. - The Test and Test Score objects help you track testing-related data such as standardized tests and entrance exams, if your institution accepts test score data. A Test Score record is a child of a Test record. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_app_admissions.png) Let's see an example of how an applicant's data records can be structured in EDA. Student Madison Hadzic is a senior at Daisy Bates Academy, applying to Connected University for undergraduate admission in the 2021-2022 Fall Term. Here's how the Admissions team has tracked her budding relationship with Connected University, starting from the time that Madison first came on the university's radar. Each table summarizes what type of record was created, and when, and why. **Contact record** | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Madison Hadzic | Madison attended a Connected University virtual recruiting event during the summer between her junior and senior years, and signaled her intent to apply. | A student with qualified interest in attending Connected University. | **Account name** | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Madison Hadzic Administrative Account | Madison's Contact record was created. | The container Account for an applicant's Contact record, assuming Connected University uses the Administrative Account model. | **Affiliation name** If Madison is later admitted, this Affiliation record can be updated so that her Role is set to Student.
Record name Record created when... Record represents...
AF-123987 Madison's Contact record was created.

Madison’s interest in Connected University as a prospect.

  • Organization is set to Connected University
  • Role is set to Applicant
  • Status is set to Current
**Application record** | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | APP-2681 | Madison started filling out her application. | A student's admissions application. | **Education History record** | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | EH-8925 | Connected University receives Madison's educational history data from her Application and structures it in Education History records. | The applicant's current attendance at an educational institution, Daisy Bates Academy. | | EH-8937 | Connected University receives Madison's educational history data from her Application and structures it in Education History records. | The applicant's completion of a summer study program at an educational institution, Aroha University. | **Test record** | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | TST-6442 | Connected University receives Madison's testing data from her Application and structures it in Test records. | The first time the applicant took a standardized test, the ACT. | | TST-6443 | Connected University receives Madison's testing data from her Application and structures it in Test records. | The applicant retaking a standardized test, the ACT. | **Test Score record** | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | SCR-3160 | Connected University receives Madison's testing data from her Application and structures it in Test Score records. | The results from the first time the applicant took the ACT. | | SCR-3163 | Connected University receives Madison's testing data from her Application and structures it in Test Score records. | The results from the applicant retaking the ACT. | Additional objects for managing application requirements and the application review process are available through Admissions Connect, an application from Salesforce.org that further customizes EDA for the admissions lifecycle. Learn more in the [Admissions Connect Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm). # Model Attendance Track student attendance and participation with the Attendance Event object. - **[Model Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For attendance management, the Attendance Event object helps you track students' tardiness or absences, reasons for missed attendance, and total participation during a Term. ## Model Attendance For attendance management, the Attendance Event object helps you track students' tardiness or absences, reasons for missed attendance, and total participation during a Term. An Attendance Event record is always related to a Contact and always specifies a date. Other details, such as whether the missed attendance is for a specific Course Connection, and whether the missed attendance is unexcused, are optional. If your institution tracks tardiness or partial-day absences, you can also track arrival, departure, and return times. Let's see how a set of Attendance Event records could look for a sample Contact. Clare Karombo is a senior at Daisy Bates Academy, where all seniors participate in a project-based seminar called Senior Integrated Learning. A Course Connection record, CC-0048, represents Clare's involvement in the class. The instructor tracks attendance at the weekly check-ins. So far this term, Clare has accrued a few excused absences. **Attendance Event records** | Attendance Event Name | Course Connection | Unexcused | Date | Reason | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | AE-0128 | CC-0048 | ▢ | 10/10/19 | Family | Bereavement for grandparent. | | AE-0992 | CC-0048 | ▢ | 12/5/19 | Other | Badminton travel tournament. | | AE-1067 | CC-0048 | ▢ | 12/12/19 | Medical | Urgent doctor's visit. | Absences are sometimes a sign that something's going on in a student's life that warrants a closer look. But in Clare's case, her teacher sees that she's otherwise punctual, present, and highly engaged in her community oral history project. Clare is on track for graduation, and her Attendance Event data doesn't signal a cause for concern. # Model Behavior Management Monitor student behavior with the Case, Contact, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response objects. - **[Model Behavior Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_behavior_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes student interactions don't meet your institution's behavior expectations. Other times, student actions embody the highest values expressed in a school's honor code. For monitoring both problematic and praiseworthy behavior, use the Case, Contact, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response objects as part of an overall behavior management program. ## Model Behavior Management Sometimes student interactions don't meet your institution's behavior expectations. Other times, student actions embody the highest values expressed in a school's honor code. For monitoring both problematic and praiseworthy behavior, use the Case, Contact, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response objects as part of an overall behavior management program. EDA custom fields have been added to the standard Salesforce Case object to track the type of behavior event and when and where it occurred. An EDA custom object, Behavior Involvement, is a junction object that relates individual Contacts to the behavior event, such as the students involved and perhaps a faculty member who witnessed or reported the event. Another custom object, Behavior Response, tracks the corrective or affirmative responses applied to the Contacts involved. ![Diagram of the relationships between the Case, Contact, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_behavior.png) Let's consider a sample incident involving two students during a science lab that results in lab equipment damage and hurt feelings. This sample set of data records captures the incident and the school's responses. **Case records** | Case Number | Category | Location | Occurrence Date | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 00001026 | School Code of Conduct | On Campus | 2/23/21, 2:45 PM | **Behavior Involvement records** | Behavior Involvement Name | Case | Contact | Role | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | BI-0483 | 00001026 | Pat Runyon | Perpetrator | Engaged in verbal taunts that escalated to shoving incident. Damaged glass labware. | | BI-0484 | 00001026 | Kelly Parks | Perpetrator | Engaged in verbal taunts that escalated to shoving incident. Damaged glass labware. | | BI-0485 | 00001026 | Carol Merrit | Witness | Lab aide intervened and de-escalated the situation. | | BI-0486 | 00001026 | Israel Laban | Reporter | Chem instructor in charge. | **Behavior Response records** | Behavior Response Name | Behavior Involvement | Contact | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | BR-6580 | BI-0483 | Pat Runyon | Referred to Peer Mediation Program. Must complete mediation by 3/2/21. | | BR-6581 | BI-0483 | Pat Runyon | Assigned 5 hours of campus community service (paired with co-perpetrator). | | BR-6583 | BI-0484 | Kelly Parks | Referred to Peer Mediation Program. Must complete mediation by 3/2/21. | | BR-6584 | BI-0484 | Kelly Parks | Assigned 5 hours of campus community service (paired with co-perpetrator). | If you decide to implement EDA behavior management features, the data you gather becomes a powerful tool for continuous monitoring. Use Salesforce reports, dashboards, and data analytics to stay on top of case resolution, detect at-risk behavior patterns, and learn which interventions support student success the most. # Model Certifications and Credentials Keep track of an individual's achievements using the Academic Certification and Credential objects. - **[Model Certifications and Credentials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_certifications_and_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A student's GPA or a list of courses they took aren't the only ways to measure success. Most institutions want to see a broader and more comprehensive picture of each student. What did they achieve outside of the classroom, as well as in it? Were they recognized in other ways beyond a report card? Keeping track of similar information for faculty and employees is also a priority for most institutions. What licenses does an individual need to maintain for accreditation? What other certifications do my staff hold? You can track all of this information using the Academic Certification and Credential objects. - **[Academic Certifications Versus Credentials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_certifications_and_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** First, let's go over the differences between Academic Certification and Credential. - **[Track a Contact's Achievements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_certifications_and_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use the Academic Certification and Credential objects with the Educational History and Program Enrollment objects to get a complete understanding of a student's achievements. You can see that the student earned a degree from a specific institution by completing a program of study. - **[See Achievements on the Contact Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_certifications_and_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Looking in the Education History section of Shay's Contact record, we can see the diplomas and degrees that he previously earned. Each Educational History record lists a certification that was earned from an educational institution. - **[Add Credentialing Identifier Field to Account and Contact Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_certifications_and_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some credentials have an International Resource Identifier that uniquely identifies the credential. You can create a custom field for Credentialing Identifier and add it to the Account and Contact page layouts. ## Model Certifications and Credentials A student's GPA or a list of courses they took aren't the only ways to measure success. Most institutions want to see a broader and more comprehensive picture of each student. What did they achieve outside of the classroom, as well as in it? Were they recognized in other ways beyond a report card? Keeping track of similar information for faculty and employees is also a priority for most institutions. What licenses does an individual need to maintain for accreditation? What other certifications do my staff hold? You can track all of this information using the Academic Certification and Credential objects. ## Academic Certifications Versus Credentials First, let's go over the differences between Academic Certification and Credential. Academic Certification Represents a diploma, degree, or academic certificate that a student has earned. These records are associated with a Contact's Education History record. Here are some examples of certifications. - A high school diploma from Trailblazer Academy - A B.A. in Music from Connected University - A certificate acknowledging completion of a teacher training program Credential Represents an industry or organizational achievement. It’s a one-and-done certification that has no parts to it. Credentials can be a badge, a non-credit certification, or a license. These records are associated with a Contact’s Attribute record. Here are some examples of credentials. - A badge issued by your institution for a specific achievement - A teaching certificate issued by a state - A bus driver's Commercial Driver's License (CDL) ## Track a Contact's Achievements You can use the Academic Certification and Credential objects with the Educational History and Program Enrollment objects to get a complete understanding of a student's achievements. You can see that the student earned a degree from a specific institution by completing a program of study. For example, Shay West earned a Bachelor's Degree from Connected University in Biology. Here's how these different objects work together to create a complete story of Shay's achievements. - Shay West is a Contact. - Connected University is an Account with the Educational Institution record type. - Bachelor's Degree is an Academic Certification with the Degree record type. - B.S. in Biology is a Program Enrollment with the Academic Program record type. ![Objects showing student achievement](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/achievement_objects.png) ## See Achievements on the Contact Record Looking in the Education History section of Shay's Contact record, we can see the diplomas and degrees that he previously earned. Each Educational History record lists a certification that was earned from an educational institution. Likewise, in the Attributes section of Shay's Contact record, we can see other Credentials, such as badges, certifications, and licenses. Each Attribute record lists a credential that was earned from an educational institution. ![Shay's contact record with Education History, Academic Certification, Attribute and Credential.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/contact_achievements.png) ## Add Credentialing Identifier Field to Account and Contact Objects Some credentials have an International Resource Identifier that uniquely identifies the credential. You can create a custom field for Credentialing Identifier and add it to the Account and Contact page layouts. To add Credentialing Identifier to your page layouts: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click the object that you want to add Credentialing Identifier to. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**, and then click **New**. 5. Click **Text**, and then click **Next**. 6. In the Field Label field, enter Credentialing Identifier. 7. In the Length field, enter 255. 8. In the Field Name field, enter Credentialing\_Identifer. 9. In the Description and Help Text fields, enter An International Resource Identifier that uniquely identifies an Account for credentialing purposes. 10. Check the **Do not allow duplicate values** box. 11. Make sure **Treat "ABC" and "abc" as duplicate values (case insensitive)** is selected. 12. Check the **Set this field as the unique record identifier from an external system** box and click **Next**. 13. Select the profiles that you want to add Credentialing Identifier to and click **Next**. 14. Select the page layouts that you want Credentialing Identifier to be on and click **Save**. # Model Courses and Curricula Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learnings, courses, course offerings, and schedules.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To model courses and curricula: | Education Cloud Full Access | Modeling courses and curricula in Education Cloud relies on these objects: | Object | What the Object Represents | | --- | --- | | Learning | Information that defines a curriculum that can be made available as a course, program, or on-site experience for a contact. | | Learning Course | Information about a course that's required in a learning framework. | | Learning Program | Information about curricula in a program that's required to obtain a credential. | | Course Offering | An instance of a training course with location and date details of the training course. | | Course Offering Schedule | Information about the schedule defined for a course offering. | This diagram shows how these objects relate to one another: ![Diagram showing the relationships between objects related to courses and curricula.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/courses_curricula.png) ## Learnings and Learning Courses Learning represents information about a curriculum that you can make available to a contact as a course, program, or on-site experience. When you create a new learning record, designate whether it's represented as a learning program or learning course. For example, Biology 101 could be a learning program, or it could be an individual learning course. Astro University has Biology 101 as part of their curriculum, so they create a learning record for Biology 101. When they create that learning record, they decide that Biology 101 is best represented as a learning course. Next, they create a learning course record for Biology 101, which stores details such as course number, field of study, and course level. ## Course Offerings A course offering makes a learning course concrete in time and space. The course offering record provides specific details, including the academic session, faculty, location, start and end dates, and so on. In our example, Astro University creates a course offering record for each instance of Biology 101 that learners can choose. ## Course Offering Schedule After you create a course offering, it's important that students know when and where to show up for class. A course offering schedule captures these details and schedule variations. For example, on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, class meets from 1-2 PM in Dixit Building, Lecture Hall A. On Tuesdays and Thursdays, it meets from 2-3:30 PM in the adjacent Data Lab. Model these day-by-day schedule variations using two course offering schedules. One course offering schedule record (CSH-149723) accounts for the Monday, Wednesday, and Friday occurrences. A second course offering schedule record (CSH-149724) accounts for the Tuesday and Thursday occurrences. Manage your course offerings in the Academic Operations app. SEE ALSO: - [Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_academic_operations_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create courses and programs, define learning outcomes, build program plans, and manage academic schedules.") - [Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") # Model Courses and Curricula Use multiple custom objects in EDA to model your institution's courses and curricula. - **[Model Courses and Curricula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modeling courses and curricula in EDA relies on a number of EDA custom objects: Course, Course Offering, Course Offering Schedule, Time Block, and Course Connection. Let's see how these objects relate to one another, and to the objects covered elsewhere in more detail—Term, Account, and Facility. - **[Courses and Course Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Course on its own is an abstract idea. It's a class—a syllabus of material typically worth a certain number of credit hours. It's always under the purview of a specific department, as a child record of a department's Account record. - **[Course Offering Schedule Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A student who's lucky enough to secure a seat in the fall semester Course Offering of Probability Theory Fundamentals needs to know when and where to show up for class. On Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, class meets from 1-2 PM in Dixit Building, Lecture Hall A. On Tuesdays and Thursdays, it meets from 2-3:30 PM in the adjacent Data Lab. - **[Cross-Listed Courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every Course must have a single University Department Account as its parent. For a cross-listed Course, each collaborating department typically maintains its own Course record and its own Course Offering record, and makes sure that both Course Offerings share identical scheduling, credit hours, instructor, and other details. - **[Course Connections for Faculty, Staff, and Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Course Offering such as Probability Theory Fundamentals has over a hundred students enrolled for the Term, and a primary instructor, and several teaching assistants. Use the Course Connection object to model all of these Contacts' connections to the Course Offering. - **[Courses and Curricula Recap](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To sum up, we've looked at a number of EDA objects involved in modeling the who, what, when, and where of courses and curricula. Here's the bigger picture of these object relationships when we layer in students' Program Enrollments and Affiliations, as well. ## Model Courses and Curricula Modeling courses and curricula in EDA relies on a number of EDA custom objects: Course, Course Offering, Course Offering Schedule, Time Block, and Course Connection. Let's see how these objects relate to one another, and to the objects covered elsewhere in more detail—Term, Account, and Facility. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_courses.png) ## Courses and Course Offerings A Course on its own is an abstract idea. It's a class—a syllabus of material typically worth a certain number of credit hours. It's always under the purview of a specific department, as a child record of a department's Account record. For example, the Data Science Department offers Probability Theory Fundamentals nearly every semester as a four-unit course. In the course catalog, it's Course ID DSCI-212. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_course_account.png) A Course Offering makes a Course concrete in time and space. It relates a specific instance of a Course to a specific Term. In the Fall 2021 semester, students vie for one of the 120 coveted spots in Probability Theory Fundamentals, with the ever-popular Professor Hsu. The Course Offering record is specific about the Term, the faculty, start and end dates, capacity, and so on. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_co_course_term.png) ## Course Offering Schedule Details A student who's lucky enough to secure a seat in the fall semester Course Offering of Probability Theory Fundamentals needs to know when and where to show up for class. On Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays, class meets from 1-2 PM in Dixit Building, Lecture Hall A. On Tuesdays and Thursdays, it meets from 2-3:30 PM in the adjacent Data Lab. Model these day-by-day schedule variations using the Course Offering Schedule, Time Block, and Facility objects. Think of these pairs of records storing the data for the Course Offering. - One Course Offering Schedule record (CSH-149723) lets us account for the Monday, Wednesday, Friday occurrences. A second Course Offering Schedule record (CSH-149724) lets us account for the Tuesday, Thursday occurrences. - One Time Block record (1300-1400) represents the 1-2 PM slot. Another (1400-1530) represents the 2-3:30 PM slot. Each time slot's start and end times are automatically copied to the start and end times of their respective Course Offering Schedule records, which helps keep this data accurate and in sync across records. - One Facility record represents Lecture Hall A in Dixit Building. Another represents the Data Lab. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_cos_details.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note In this example, Connected University uses the Course Offering Schedule object along with Course Offering and Time Block because the combination allows for more flexible modeling of Course Offerings with variable schedules. K-12 schools that follow alternating A/B schedules typically need a similar degree of flexibility. If your institution's scheduling is less complicated, you're not required to use the Course Offering Schedule object at all. Instead, you can use the Time Block field on the Course Offering record, which tracks the same data as the Time Block field on the Course Offering Schedule record. ## Cross-Listed Courses Every Course must have a single University Department Account as its parent. For a cross-listed Course, each collaborating department typically maintains its own Course record and its own Course Offering record, and makes sure that both Course Offerings share identical scheduling, credit hours, instructor, and other details. If you want to indicate cross-listing in the Course Offering ID or Section ID fields, plan ahead for this use case when you decide your naming conventions. If you want to generate a combined course roster, create a report to do so. ## Course Connections for Faculty, Staff, and Students A Course Offering such as Probability Theory Fundamentals has over a hundred students enrolled for the Term, and a primary instructor, and several teaching assistants. Use the Course Connection object to model all of these Contacts' connections to the Course Offering. You can use Course Connection record types to specify the nature of a Contact's involvement in a Course Offering. In our example, EDA's preconfigured Student and Faculty record types account for most of the people involved. For Faculty Course Connection records only, use the Primary field to specify the primary instructor for a Course Offering. You could create custom record types, such as Teaching Assistant to account for the TAs, or Staff Support to account for staff providing lab setup or A/V support. ![A sampling of Course Connection records for the primary faculty, supporting faculty, and students in a Course Offering, DSCI-212 Fall 2021](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_co_cc.png) For Student Course Connections, it can be handy to know which ones count toward satisfying a Program Plan's requirements. You can use the Program Enrollment ID field on a Course Connection record to track this facet of the data. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you create the Course Connection in the context of a Contact's Program Enrollment, such as from the Course Connections related list _on the Program Enrollment record,_ the Program Enrollment ID is automatically filled in for you. If you create the Course Connection without that context, such as from the Course Connections related list _on the Contact record_, you need to separately look up the Program Enrollment ID and enter it manually. For details about tracking students' Program Enrollments, see [Model Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm). Course Connections give us useful views of related data. For example: - From a Course Offering record, see all the Term Grades issued to students enrolled in that Term's offering of Probability Theory Fundamentals. - From a faculty member's Contact record, see the history of their involvement with various Course Offerings and the distribution of their teaching responsibilities. - From a student's Contact record: - Scan through their full list of Course Connection records to see their coursework history. - From their list of Program Enrollments, drill down into a specific Program Enrollment record, and see the Course Connections that count toward the Academic Program's requirements. ## Courses and Curricula Recap To sum up, we've looked at a number of EDA objects involved in modeling the who, what, when, and where of courses and curricula. Here's the bigger picture of these object relationships when we layer in students' Program Enrollments and Affiliations, as well. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_courses_enrolls.png) # Model Enrollments Use the Program Enrollment and Affiliation objects to track a student's enrollments in academic and other programs. - **[Model Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student enrollments in academic or other program offerings are modeled with the Program Enrollment and Affiliation objects. - **[Contacts' Program Enrollments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As we previously explored, BS Biology is an example of a degree-granting Academic Program. Consider now a student, Shay West, who decides to major in Biology and officially enrolls in the Academic Program. A Program Enrollment record represents the enrollment. It relates Shay's Contact record to the BS Biology Academic Program record. - **[Program Enrollments In Parallel with Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Program Enrollment object relates a Contact to an Academic Program (Account). Specifically, it tracks a _student_ Contact's enrollment data, such as enrollment dates and enrollment status. Program Enrollment serves a more specialized purpose than the Affiliation object, which similarly relates any kind of Contact—not just students—to any kind of Account—not just Academic Program Accounts. In EDA, Program Enrollments and Affiliations are used in parallel and come preconfigured with automation to keep their data in sync. - **[Connect the Dots Between Enrollments and Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you've seen how to model the entities that administer Academic Programs, the programs themselves, and the students who enroll in those programs, we can connect the dots to create a bigger picture of these object relationships. - **[Enrollments in Programs Versus Courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Enrollments are for tracking students enrolling in degree programs, other types of academic programs, or other types of programs in general. ## Model Enrollments Student enrollments in academic or other program offerings are modeled with the Program Enrollment and Affiliation objects. ![Diagram of the relationships between the Contact, Account (Academic Program), Program Enrollment, and Affiliation objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_enrollments.png) ## Contacts' Program Enrollments As we previously explored, BS Biology is an example of a degree-granting Academic Program. Consider now a student, Shay West, who decides to major in Biology and officially enrolls in the Academic Program. A Program Enrollment record represents the enrollment. It relates Shay's Contact record to the BS Biology Academic Program record. Looking at the full list of Program Enrollments on Shay's Contact record, we can see how his interests are shaping his educational journey at Connected University. | Program Enrollment ID | Related Academic Program | Represents Student's | | --- | --- | --- | | PE-2281 | BS Biology | Major degree | | PE-2282 | Neurobiology Concentration | Concentration within the major | | PE-2405 | Philosophy Minor | Minor degree | | PE-3970 | Study Abroad | Specialized study program | Similarly, the Program Enrollment records on the Contact record for a third-grader at Delano Elementary School could look something like this example.
Program Enrollment ID Related Academic Program Represents Student's
PE-0106 Third Grade

Enrollment in third grade

Tip
Tip If you're using K-12 Architecture Kit, the Grade Enrollment object lets you model grade enrollments specifically.
PE-0158 General Ed Transportation School bus rider registration
PE-0352 Extended Day Support Program After-school program registration
See [Model Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm). ## Program Enrollments In Parallel with Affiliations The Program Enrollment object relates a Contact to an Academic Program (Account). Specifically, it tracks a _student_ Contact's enrollment data, such as enrollment dates and enrollment status. Program Enrollment serves a more specialized purpose than the Affiliation object, which similarly relates any kind of Contact—not just students—to any kind of Account—not just Academic Program Accounts. In EDA, Program Enrollments and Affiliations are used in parallel and come preconfigured with automation to keep their data in sync. For example, remember Connected University student, Shay West, who's majoring in Biology? Shay's Contact record is related to the BS Biology Academic Program (Account) record by a Program Enrollment record, PE-2281. When that Program Enrollment record was created, Affiliation record AF-005967 was created automatically at the same time. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_pe_affil.png) Even though the Affiliation connects the same two records connected by the Program Enrollment, it tracks more general-purpose data. It's one of a Contact's many affiliated Accounts, and tracks students', faculty members', and other people's involvement with campus and community organizations. Program Enrollment details don't apply to all types of Affiliations. Nor do they apply to all types of Contacts, which is why Program Enrollment data is tracked in a separate but related object. Students' Program Enrollments can be changeable, as they explore their interests and complete various prerequisites before committing to an academic plan. And of course, plans sometimes change. If Shay changes majors, departments, or even colleges, someone makes sure that his Program Enrollment details are either updated, deleted, or created anew, and EDA automation keeps his corresponding Affiliation details updated, too. ## Connect the Dots Between Enrollments and Program Offerings Now that you've seen how to model the entities that administer Academic Programs, the programs themselves, and the students who enroll in those programs, we can connect the dots to create a bigger picture of these object relationships. In this diagram, trace the connections that tell this part of the academic story for Biology major Shay West—from his Contact record to his affiliated Accounts, to his Program Enrollment in the major, to the Program Plan he's been assigned, and requirements for this academic plan. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_pe_affil_courses.png) ## Enrollments in Programs Versus Courses Program Enrollments are for tracking students enrolling in degree programs, other types of academic programs, or other types of programs in general. To track students enrolling in individual classes, use the Course Connection object, which relates a Contact to a Course Offering. See [Model Courses and Curricula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_courses_curricula.htm). # Model Faculty, Staff, and Student Contacts Use the data stored in the Contact object and custom objects to understand your students, faculty, and staff. - **[Model Faculty, Staff, and Student Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Faculty, staff, administrators, and students are modeled with the Contact object, which is a standard Salesforce object augmented with education-specific fields, such as Financial Aid Applicant and Primary Language. Custom objects in EDA store other Contact-related data, such as a person's connections on and off campus, notable attributes, the languages they speak, and so on. - **[Contacts and Their Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Affiliation object lets you model an affiliation between a Contact and an Account that the person has a meaningful connection with. - **[Contacts and Their Container Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now consider the example of a student, Stacey Bergen. - **[Common Approaches to Container Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In primary and secondary education, Household Accounts are more common. Tracking data about a student's household can be as important as tracking data about students themselves, because family relationships are central to K-12 student success. - **[Choose a Default Account Model for Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Decide whether Administrative or Household is the better container Account choice for modeling your student data, and set that type as the default account model. - **[Considerations for Faculty and Staff Container Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After choosing a preferred container Account type for students, decide whether it's also the right type for faculty and staff Contacts who work at your institution. While you're not required to use the same type of container Account for both types of Contacts, doing so simplifies data management because the Default Account Model setting takes care of creating the correct type of container Account for all faculty, staff, and student Contacts. - **[Contacts and Their Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationship object tracks how someone is connected to someone else. In other words, a Relationship record relates one Contact record to another. EDA offers a preconfigured set of Relationship values that mostly represent familial relationships—Parent, Grandparent, Guardian, and the like. While they're most relevant for tracking data about students' families and households, you can create custom Relationship values for all types of Contacts. - **[Contacts' Attributes and Credentials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Attribute object lets you track students' significant attributes, and faculty and staff members' licenses, certifications, and professional endorsements. - **[Contacts' Language Proficiency](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track Contacts' fluency with languages using the Language and Contact Language objects. ## Model Faculty, Staff, and Student Contacts Faculty, staff, administrators, and students are modeled with the Contact object, which is a standard Salesforce object augmented with education-specific fields, such as Financial Aid Applicant and Primary Language. Custom objects in EDA store other Contact-related data, such as a person's connections on and off campus, notable attributes, the languages they speak, and so on. When you've built out your data model and populated it with data, EDA can help you weave together biographic and demographic data from the Contact object with selected data from Contact-related objects. The result? A unified student record that helps you see, understand, and serve the whole person behind the data. ## Contacts and Their Affiliations The Affiliation object lets you model an affiliation between a Contact and an Account that the person has a meaningful connection with. For a faculty or staff member, an Affiliation record often represents a professional affiliation with an administrative, academic, or operational department that you've already modeled as an Account record. Similarly, for a student, Affiliations represent academic, social, or professional connections with some of those same departments, as well as other on- and off-campus Accounts. We call Accounts that represent Affiliations affiliated Accounts. ![Diagram of the Affiliation object's relationships to the Contact and Account objects, with Account representing an affiliated Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_affiliation.png) Consider the example of faculty member, Maya Iliescu, at Daisy Bates Academy. Maya has responsibilities in several areas, which are represented by these Affiliation records related to her Contact record. **Affiliation records** | Affiliation Key | Organization (Affiliated Account) | Affiliation Type (Account Record Type) | Role | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | AF-026721 | Math Department | University Department | Faculty | Geometry teacher since 2014. | | AF-028599 | PTA | Business Organization | Faculty | Faculty liaison on Curriculum Committee. | | AF-038046 | Poetry Society | Academic Program | Faculty | Club's founding sponsor. | | AF-041377 | Tennis Team | Sports Organization | Faculty | Assistant coach (temporary sub). | ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_affiliations.png) Maya has ties to external organizations, too. She's on the board of a community nonprofit and a member of the National Council of Teachers of Mathematics. If you create Account records for these external entities, you can relate them to Maya's Contact record as affiliated Accounts, as well. ## Contacts and Their Container Accounts Now consider the example of a student, Stacey Bergen. Similar to math teacher Maya, Stacey's Contact record is related to several affiliated Accounts, including the Basketball Team, the Knitting Club, and Student Council. Stacey's Contact record is also associated with a container Account, which is a specialized Account type distinct from an affiliated Account. A container Account is required because the Salesforce data model requires certain data about Contacts to be stored at the higher level of the Account, for security and other technical reasons. A container Account serves as the _parent_ record of its associated Contact record and is required, whereas an affiliated Account is _related_ to the Contact record and optional. In other words, it’s OK if Stacey’s Contact doesn’t have affiliated Accounts but Stacey’s Contact must have a parent Account. EDA offers two kinds of container Accounts, each one an Account record type. Administrative Account You can think of an Administrative Account as the Account-level representation of a Contact. An Administrative Account is a parent to one and only one Contact. The Administrative Account record for our student Stacey could be named, for example, Bergen Administrative Account. This Account that _contains_ Stacey's Contact record is different from Stacey's affiliated Accounts, which are all _related to_ her Contact record. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_affiliations_aa.png) Household Account A Household Account functions just like its name suggests, to represent the household a Contact belongs to. Unlike the Administrative Account's one-to-one relationship, a Household Account is typically a parent to multiple Contacts besides the student, such as the Contact's parents or guardians, siblings, and other household members—they're all Contacts, too. Our student Stacey lives with her grandmother, Martha, and her father, James. Their Household Account record could be named, for example, Bergen Household. This Account that _contains_ Stacey's Contact record is different from Stacey's affiliated Accounts, which are all _related to_ her Contact record. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_affiliations_hh.png) ## Common Approaches to Container Accounts In primary and secondary education, Household Accounts are more common. Tracking data about a student's household can be as important as tracking data about students themselves, because family relationships are central to K-12 student success. In higher education, Administrative Accounts are more common because while family data is still important, it’s secondary to data about the student as an independent adult. After graduation, though, Household Accounts are sometimes preferred for modeling an alum as they take their next steps in life, which can include building a household of their own. Institutions using Administrative container Accounts for student Contacts often ask how they can also model a student's membership in a household. A common solution is to: - Create a Household Account record for the household. For example, Bergen Household. - For other members of the household, such as parents or guardians, create their Contact records under the household, with the household as the parent Account for these Contacts. - Create an Affiliation record that relates the student's Contact record to the household's Account record. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_affiliations_aa_hh.png) ## Choose a Default Account Model for Contacts Decide whether Administrative or Household is the better container Account choice for modeling your student data, and set that type as the default account model. The default account model determines: - The type of container Account created automatically for every new independent Contact—that is to say, a Contact who isn't under an existing container Account. - The naming and renaming of container Accounts, which happens automatically when Contacts change their names or household memberships, based on the choice of Administrative or Household and your Account naming customizations. - Your options for managing address data for Contacts and Accounts, which is stored in the Address object. Household Accounts offer more flexibility than Administrative Accounts to track multiple addresses for a single household and for different household members. Although it's required that you choose Administrative or Household as your default account model, it's fine to have some Contacts with Administrative Accounts and others with Household Accounts within the same EDA org. It's also possible to change the type of container Account for a Contact, such as changing from Administrative to Household when a student graduates from college. See Also: [Configure Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm) [Customize Administrative and Household Account Names](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_custom_admin_and_hh_account_names.htm) [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm) ## Considerations for Faculty and Staff Container Accounts After choosing a preferred container Account type for students, decide whether it's also the right type for faculty and staff Contacts who work at your institution. While you're not required to use the same type of container Account for both types of Contacts, doing so simplifies data management because the Default Account Model setting takes care of creating the correct type of container Account for all faculty, staff, and student Contacts. In some cases, though, a different container Account type can make sense for faculty and staff. Let's say that Household Accounts is the default account model for students, but you prefer Administrative Accounts for faculty and staff because it's a lighter-weight, less data-intensive account model. This approach is fine, as long as you design your business processes accordingly. A mix of Account types means that you must avoid automatically creating container Accounts for non-student Contacts—in our example, make sure to create their Administrative Accounts manually. Whatever you decide, we recommend reviewing important details about data storage and security considerations in [Configure Account Model Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_account_model_settings.htm). ## Contacts and Their Relationships The Relationship object tracks how someone is connected to someone else. In other words, a Relationship record relates one Contact record to another. EDA offers a preconfigured set of Relationship values that mostly represent familial relationships—Parent, Grandparent, Guardian, and the like. While they're most relevant for tracking data about students' families and households, you can create custom Relationship values for all types of Contacts. ![Diagram of the Relationship object's relationship to the Contact object, showing both sides of the Relationship](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_relationship.png) For Relationships specific to faculty and staff, decide whether it's useful to create custom Relationship values such as Mentor Teacher or Classroom Aide. If you do create any custom values, remember to create values for both sides of the Relationship. The EDA data model requires that every Relationship (such as Mentor Teacher) have a reciprocal Relationship (such as Mentee Teacher). ## Contacts' Attributes and Credentials The Attribute object lets you track students' significant attributes, and faculty and staff members' licenses, certifications, and professional endorsements. The preconfigured Student Characteristic record type is designed for tracking data such as students' family considerations, Individualized Education Program participation, and so on. The preconfigured Credential record type is designed for faculty and staff, and is especially useful for tracking requirements of certificated or professionally licensed staff. ![Diagram of the Attribute object's relationship to the Contact and Account objects, with Account representing an agency that issued the credential](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_attribute.png) ## Contacts' Language Proficiency Track Contacts' fluency with languages using the Language and Contact Language objects. The Language object contains records for the languages spoken by your campus population and the languages used for instruction. The Contact Language object tracks an individual Contact's fluency with a language, and can track whether it's the Contact's primary language. ![Diagram of the relationships between the Contact, Contact Language, and Language objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_erd_languages.png) # Model Faculty, Staff, Students, and Alumni Use the Person Account object to model faculty, staff, students, and alumni.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To model faculty, staff, and students: | Education Cloud Full Access | Faculty, staff, administrators, students, and alumni are modeled with the Person Account object, which is a standard Salesforce object. The Contact Profile object is associated with the Contact object, and allows you to track a person's biographic and demographic information such as birth date, ethnicity, first-generation student status, and other details. ![Entity Relationship Diagram of Contact Profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/contactprofile_erd.png) When you've built your model and populated it with data, you can weave together biographic and demographic data from the Person Account object with selected data from related objects, such as the contact profile. The result is a unified student record that helps you see, understand, and serve the whole person behind the data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note In Salesforce Help and other documentation, the word _account_ by itself always refers to both business accounts and person accounts. We use the terms _business accounts_ and _person accounts_ when there are differences between the two types of accounts. ## Person Account Lifecycle Management Use the Constituent Role object to record information related to a person's role. Educational institutions serve individuals in a variety of different roles — suspects, prospects, applicants, students, faculty, staff, alumni, donors, parents, and so on. Understanding the current and past relationships that a constituent has with the institution is key to serving them properly. The Constituent Role object is associated with the Account and Contact objects, and records information related to a person's role, so you can track and manage their association with the institution over time. ![Entity Relationship Diagram of Constituent Role](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/constituentrole_erd.png) You can segment person accounts by role for reporting, record sharing, and communication purposes. ### Create a Constituent Role Use the Constituent Role object to record details about a person's role with the institution. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Constituent Roles**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the person type, and select the person to associate with the role. 4. Select the role type and status. 5. Add other relevant information, and save your changes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important If you're using an Education Cloud Omnistudio Flexcard that includes Constituent Role, and a contact has more than nine roles assigned to them, then update the Flexcard to make sure that the roles are shown. For a list of Education Cloud Omnistudio Flexcards, see [Education Cloud Omnistudio Components](https://salesforce.quip.com/qzpfa9rm3jyz). # Model Households, Groups, and Organizations Set up relationships to define how your learners and other accounts connect with one another, such as for representing households.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To model households: | Education Cloud Full Access | Education Cloud uses various objects to represent people, families, organizations, and relationships in your institution. Person accounts represent nearly all individuals in Education Cloud. The only individual that a person account doesn't represent is a representative from an admissions consulting firm. Use contact records to represent these commissioned agents, who submit applications on behalf of the students that they represent. To represent families, set up and create household accounts. To represent organizations, schools, colleges, departments, and services, use business accounts. To represent relationships within your institution, use the Group Membership objects, including Account Contact Relationships and Contact Contact Relationships. These relationships link an individual to a household, other individuals, services, or organizations. See Also: - [Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.account_person.htm&type=5) - [Group Membership and Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.group_membership.htm&type=5) - [How Education Cloud Models Groups and Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.group_membership_how_education_cloud_models_groups_relationships.htm&type=5) # Model Learning Program Offerings Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learning offerings. Learning objects track the structure, administration, and enrollment and completion requirements for your offerings.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To model learning offerings: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Education Cloud objects used in modeling program offerings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_AcademicOperations_DataModel.png) Learning programs can be degree or credential programs, academic support programs, recreational programs, continuing education, and so on. We use the same architectural building blocks to model each of them in Education Cloud. Learning Information that defines the curriculum that can be made available as a course, program, or on-site experience for a contact. Learning Achievement The outcome of a learning activity. Learning Course Detailed information about a specific course within a larger learning framework. Learning Foundation Item A prerequisite, co-requisite, or the recommended learning that's required for a learning outcome. Learning Outcome Item The mapping between a learning and its related outcome. Learning Pathway Template A template that a learner can apply to create a planned learning path. Learning Pathway Template Item A requirement with completion details in the learning pathway template. Learning Pathway Template Program Plan A junction between a specific learning program plan to a learning pathway template, showing how the program fits into the template. Learning Program Information about the curricula in a program that's required for a learner to obtain a credential. Learning Program Plan Details of a plan that's created to run a learning program. Learning Program Plan Requirement Information about the requirements of a learning outcome that's included in the learning program plan. Learner Pathway The learner's planned path to the completion of their enrolled learning programs. Learner Pathway Item A specific requirement within a learner's pathway, including completion details and status. Learner Program Requirement The requirement that a learner must complete in their assigned learning program plan. Learner Program Requirement Progress Information about the progress of a requirement that a learner must complete as a part of the assigned program plan. ## A Sample Degree Program Offering See an example of how Education Cloud objects represent a program offering. The Biological Sciences Department at Astro University offers an undergraduate Biology degree. This degree program is represented with these objects. - At Astro University, Biology is an example of learning. - The B.S. Biology degree is a learning program at Astro University. - Biology Catalog Year 2023–2024 is the learning program plan for B.S. Biology. - The learning program plan includes all of the learning program plan requirements, including biology, math, and general elective courses. ![Diagram showing a sample degree program offering](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/sample_degree_program_offering.png) To earn the B.S. Biology degree, students complete a sequence of study defined in the university's course catalog. These high-level requirements for the degree are organized using the learning program plan object. For the student cohort enrolling in the 2023–2024 academic year, a learning program plan record named Biology Catalog Year 2023–2024 represents the set of requirements in effect at that time. When Astro University finalizes its catalog for the next academic year, requirements likely changed slightly and are captured in another Program Plan record named Biology Catalog Year 2024–2025. ![Diagram showing two different learning program plans](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/sample_learning_program_plan.png) The learning program plan object represents a general set of requirements. The learning program plan requirement object represents the specific requirements, such as required courses, thesis work, or an internship. To help organize your programs, we recommend that you create accounts for each department or college in your institution. Then, when you create records, assign them to the appropriate account. Manage your program offerings with the Academic Operations app. SEE ALSO: - [Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_academic_operations_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create courses and programs, define learning outcomes, build program plans, and manage academic schedules.") - [Create a Learning Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning program.") - [Create a Learning Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_learning_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Program Plan Builder to view, edit, save, cancel, and publish all your program plans. You can also organize the program's specific elements, such as required and elective courses, and add active versions of learning courses to each element.") # Model Program Offerings Model your institution's program offerings with the Program Plan and Plan Requirement objects. - **[Model Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Several objects that share a theme of "programs" let you model your institution's academic and other offerings—namely an Account record type called Academic Program, the Program Plan object, and the Plan Requirement object. Use this set of objects to track how your learning offerings are structured and administered, and what they require for enrollment and completion. - **[A Sample Degree Program Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Biological Sciences Department at Connected University offers an undergraduate Biology degree. Account records represent these entities. - **[A Sample After-School Program Offering](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At Daisy Bates Academy, the Extended Day Support Program offers after-school enrichment. Account records represent these entities. - **[Go Beyond the Basics of Plan Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As you can see from our examples, different flavors of Plan Requirement records make up the hierarchy—parent or nested, required or optional, and related to a specific Course or unrelated to a specific Course. In this general orientation to the EDA data model, it's beyond our scope to cover the details of creating all these records in the correct combinations. ## Model Program Offerings Several objects that share a theme of "programs" let you model your institution's academic and other offerings—namely an Account record type called Academic Program, the Program Plan object, and the Plan Requirement object. Use this set of objects to track how your learning offerings are structured and administered, and what they require for enrollment and completion. Programs, defined liberally, can be degree or credential programs, academic support programs, recreational programs, continuing ed, and more—all across the lifelong learning continuum. But we can use the same architectural building blocks to model them in EDA. As we look at these sample data structures for a degree program and an after-school program, consider the possibilities that they suggest for modeling your institution's own offerings. ![Partial Account, Program Plan, and Plan Requirement hierarchies for a BS Biology Academic Program and an Extended Day Support Program, compared side by side](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_program_hierarchies.png) ## A Sample Degree Program Offering The Biological Sciences Department at Connected University offers an undergraduate Biology degree. Account records represent these entities. - Connected University is an Account with the Educational Institution record type. - The Biological Sciences Department is an Account with the University Department record type. - The BS Biology degree is an Account with the Academic Program record type. The Biological Sciences Department administers this degree, so the Academic Program's parent Account is the Department's Account record. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_ap_bs_acct_hierarchy.png) In order to earn the BS Biology degree, students must complete a sequence of study prescribed in the university's course catalog. These high-level requirements for the major are organized using the Program Plan object. For the student cohort enrolling in the 2020-2021 academic year, a Program Plan record named Biology Catalog Year 2020/2021 represents the set of requirements in effect at that time—indicated by the Is Primary field. Program Plans have a limited shelf life. By the time Connected University finalizes its catalog for the next academic year, requirements have usually changed slightly and are then captured in another Program Plan record named Biology Catalog Year 2021/2022. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_pp_biology.png) So the Program Plan object represents a general set of requirements, while the Plan Requirement object represents specific requirements, such as specific Courses, thesis work, an internship, and so on. Plan Requirement records are typically part of a hierarchy. Parent Plan Requirements organize higher-level categories. Underneath, child Plan Requirements can be nested at multiple levels to detail the specifics. For Biology Catalog Year 2020/2021, here's a partial snapshot of the Plan Requirements hierarchy in effect for Biology undergrads who enrolled under that Program Plan. We've excluded some details for simplicity. - Lower Division (72 units) - Core Sciences (56 units) - Biology (16 units) - BIO 10 (4 units) - BIO 20 (4 units) - ... - Chemistry (8 units) - CHEM 1A (3 units) - CHEM 1A Lab (1 unit) - CHEM 1B (3 units) - CHEM 1B Lab (1 unit) - Mathematics (8 units) - MATH 10 Applied Track (Optional) - MATH 10A (4 units) - MATH 10B (4 units) - MATH 20 Theory Track (Optional) - MATH 20A (4 units) - MATH 20B (4 units) - ... - General Electives (12 units) - Lower Division Language (4 units; any qualifying Course) - Lower Division Arts & Humanities (4 units; any qualifying Course) - Lower Division Social & Behavioral Sciences (4 units; any qualifying Course) - Service Learning (4 units; equivalent to 80 service hours) - Upper Division (48 units) - ... ## A Sample After-School Program Offering At Daisy Bates Academy, the Extended Day Support Program offers after-school enrichment. Account records represent these entities. - Daisy Bates Academy is an Account with the Educational Institution record type. - The Extended Day Support Program is an Account with the Academic Program record type. Daisy Bates Academy administers this program, so the Academic Program's parent Account is the school's Account record. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_ap_as_acct_hierarchy.png) For the 2020-2021 academic year, a Program Plan record named Extended Day 2020-2021 represents that year's after-school offerings—indicated by the Is Primary field. The Extended Day Support staff meet at the end of the school year to review and tweak the next year's programming, which means that the Extended Day 2021-2022 Program Plan is going to be even more responsive to students' needs. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_pp_after_school_support.png) So the Program Plan object represents either a general set of requirements or programs, while the Plan Requirement object represents either specific requirements or specific tracks within a program. Plan Requirement records are typically part of a hierarchy. Parent Plan Requirements organize higher-level categories. Underneath, child Plan Requirements can be nested at multiple levels to detail the specifics. For the Extended Day 2020-2021 Program Plan, here's a partial snapshot of the after-school program's Plan Requirements hierarchy. We've excluded some details for simplicity. - After-School Learn - Tutoring - 1:1 Tutoring - Group Tutoring - Drop-In Workshops (Optional) - Chess (Optional) - Art Studio (Optional) - Writing (Optional) - Gaming Garage (Optional) - Outdoor Explorers (Optional) - Mentoring (Optional) - Therapeutic Learning (Optional) - After-School Refuel and Nutrition - Meal Supplement Program - Standard Meal Supplement (Optional) - Special Diet (Optional) - Nutrition in the Kitchen (Optional) - After-School Recreation and Fitness - Basketball (Optional) - Martial Arts (Optional) - ... ## Go Beyond the Basics of Plan Requirements As you can see from our examples, different flavors of Plan Requirement records make up the hierarchy—parent or nested, required or optional, and related to a specific Course or unrelated to a specific Course. In this general orientation to the EDA data model, it's beyond our scope to cover the details of creating all these records in the correct combinations. When you're ready to design your actual Plan Requirements hierarchy, see the detailed examples and scenarios at [Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm). # Model Student Grades Use the Term Grade object to build out a high-level overview of student performance. - **[Model Student Grades](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_student_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Institutions typically use a learning management system (LMS) or student information system (SIS) to record periodic grade assessments, such as assignments and exams. With EDA, the focus is on creating a unified, 360-degree student profile that complements your LMS or SIS, rather than supplanting it. Use the Term Grade object to model students' major grade milestones, so that you can build out a higher-level overview of performance—in students' individual classes and in their academic track overall. ## Model Student Grades Institutions typically use a learning management system (LMS) or student information system (SIS) to record periodic grade assessments, such as assignments and exams. With EDA, the focus is on creating a unified, 360-degree student profile that complements your LMS or SIS, rather than supplanting it. Use the Term Grade object to model students' major grade milestones, so that you can build out a higher-level overview of performance—in students' individual classes and in their academic track overall. A Term Grade record captures a student's grade in a Course Offering, using your preferred grading scale—letter, numerical, or percentage grade. It can also categorize what the grade represents, such as Pass or Fail. Because Term Grades represent major grade milestones that correspond to the multiple grading periods within a Term, we can expect a single Course Offering to result in multiple Term Grade records for each student. For example, during the Fall 2021 Term's Course Offering of Probability Theory Fundamentals, an instructor documents these Term Grade records for student, Lexi Carvalho. **Term Grade records** | Term Grade Name | Contact | Course Offering | Course Connection | Term | Type | Numerical Grade | Result | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | TG-0330 | Lexi Carvalho | DSCI-212 Fall 2021 | CC-1805 | Fall 2021 | Mid-Term Grade | 87.00000 | Pass | | TG-0442 | Lexi Carvalho | DSCI-212 Fall 2021 | CC-1805 | Fall 2021 | Final Grade | 92.75000 | Pass | The Term Grade object has a high degree of relatedness, in that it ties together data from a number of other objects. Besides the grade-related fields, a Term Grade record has fields that look up to the: - Contact record that represents the student. - Course Offering record that represents the instance of a Course being offered. - Course Connection record that represents the student's enrollment in the Course Offering. - Term record that's implied by the Course Offering, because a Course Offering is always related to a specific Term. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_term_grade.png) This relatedness means that after collecting Term Grade data and adding the Term Grade field to page layouts for such records as Course Offering or Contact, it's easy to see students' grades in various useful contexts. From a Course Offering record, see all the Term Grades issued to students enrolled in that running of the Course. From a Contact record like Lexi Carvalho's, see all of her Term Grades and Course Connections. And, set up reports and dashboards to proactively monitor student progress and performance. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note For tracking grade point averages, use the GPA field on the Program Enrollment object. # Model Support Programs Use Education Cloud objects and apps to define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Educational institutions must offer a variety of support programs to help students succeed academically, personally, and professionally. A strong support program helps students to feel safe, valued, and confident, and can help to increase retention and graduation rates. Here are some support programs found in schools and universities. - Academic support services, such as tutoring centers, writing centers, and study skills workshops. - Advising services, such as academic advising, career counseling, and personal counseling. - Financial support services, such as financial aid and emergency financial assistance. - Health and wellness programs, such as counseling and psychological services, health clinics, and fitness centers. - Student success programs, such as first-year experience, retention, and mentoring programs. - International student services, such as international student advising, and study abroad programs. There are countless more support programs. Education Cloud offers features that enable institutions to run programs effectively and at scale. With the Student Success and Mentoring apps, directors and facilitators can model programs and set the benefits that they contain. - **[Program Management in Education Cloud Apps](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Student Success and Mentoring apps, you can launch workflows from the dropdown navigation menu to create programs, program enrollments, and benefits. - **[Use Assessments for Support Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Student Success and Mentoring, you can add an assessment with predefined questions to a program. The assessment questionnaire appears in the portal when a learner enrolls in the program. Automation saves the submitted responses as records related to the program enrollment. Advisors and mentorship facilitators can review the responses to clearly understand the learner's requirements and determine if the program meets their needs and how best to support them. - **[Support Programs with Benefits and Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Education Cloud, when you want to create a program, you have the option to create a support program. This flow is similar to the standard program setup, but includes the options to assign the Advising or Mentoring benefit types, add a benefit, assign a success team, and add an intake assessment. ## Program Management in Education Cloud Apps In the Student Success and Mentoring apps, you can launch workflows from the dropdown navigation menu to create programs, program enrollments, and benefits. ![Screenshot of creating a program from the Student Success home page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_student_success_programs.png) ![Screenshot of creating a program from the Mentoring home page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_programs.png) When an advisor adds a benefit to a learner’s care plan, Salesforce automatically enrolls the learner enrolled in the corresponding program. Mentoring facilitators can connect students with the provider of a mentoring benefit, enrolling the student in that mentoring program. But you can also let students proactively find and receive the help that they need. With Education Cloud, you can set up an Experience Cloud site as a portal where students can self-register for programs and benefits. Benefit types available with Education Cloud are: Advising Counseling and assistance for learners. Goods Items such as stationery or sports equipment. Mentoring Mentorship and guidance for learners. Monetary Scholarships or donations for learners. Session Workshops that have multiple, scheduled sessions. To learn how to create programs and benefits, see [Program and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt.htm&type=5). ## Use Assessments for Support Program Enrollment In Student Success and Mentoring, you can add an assessment with predefined questions to a program. The assessment questionnaire appears in the portal when a learner enrolls in the program. Automation saves the submitted responses as records related to the program enrollment. Advisors and mentorship facilitators can review the responses to clearly understand the learner's requirements and determine if the program meets their needs and how best to support them. To learn how to use assessments for program enrollment, see [Intake Assessments for Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_intake_assessments_for_support_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Administer intake assessments during program enrollment to understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them."). ## Support Programs with Benefits and Assessments In Education Cloud, when you want to create a program, you have the option to create a support program. This flow is similar to the standard program setup, but includes the options to assign the Advising or Mentoring benefit types, add a benefit, assign a success team, and add an intake assessment. See [Create a Support Program in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_edc_create_support_program.htm&type=5). # Model Suspects and Prospects Use Education Cloud to track and manage suspects and prospects. For example, you can define the criteria to promote a suspect to a prospect automatically or manually.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use the lead and (person) account objects to record suspect and prospect information respectively. When a prospect signals interest in your institution, create a (person) account with their details so that the recruiting team can better engage with the potential student. Because a suspect hasn't yet indicated interest, create a lead record. When a suspect does become interested, they're automatically converted to a (person) account. See [Considerations for Converting Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.leads_notes.htm&type=5). ## Example At Connected University, the recruiting team is looking for applicants from the East Coast. They have a list of recent PSAT takers in that region who have agreed to share their information with schools, but haven't reached out to Connected University. The recruiting team prepared the list and imported the data to create lead records for each suspect. Let's look more closely at one suspect, Louis Lombard. Lead Record | Record Name | Record Created When... | Record Represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Louis Lombard | Connected University imported a list acquired from a testing service. | A suspect who has not indicated interest in the university. | The recruiting team sends targeted marketing emails to the leads, and Louis responds to one asking for more information about the Computer Science program. A recruiter responds to the email and then converts Louis’s lead record to a (person) account record. Person Account Record | Record Name | Record Created When... | Record Represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Louis Lombard | Louis's lead record was converted. | A prospect who has indicated interest in the university. | Now the recruiter can deliver to Louis a more personalized experience that focuses on what the Computer Science program can offer. # Model Suspects and Prospects Identify and recruit the best-fit applicants for your institution. - **[Model Suspects and Prospects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_suspects_and_prospects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In order to find the best-fit applicants for your institution, recruiting tracks suspects and prospects. Use the standard Lead and Contact Salesforce objects to track suspects and prospects, respectively. Here's why: Prospects have signaled interest in your institution, so creating a Contact record for them gives recruiting teams more robust detail to better engage with potential students. Suspects, on the other hand, haven't yet signaled interest so it's premature to create Contacts for them. When a suspect does raise their hand, convert the Lead to a Contact and Account. ## Model Suspects and Prospects In order to find the best-fit applicants for your institution, recruiting tracks suspects and prospects. Use the standard Lead and Contact Salesforce objects to track suspects and prospects, respectively. Here's why: Prospects have signaled interest in your institution, so creating a Contact record for them gives recruiting teams more robust detail to better engage with potential students. Suspects, on the other hand, haven't yet signaled interest so it's premature to create Contacts for them. When a suspect does raise their hand, convert the Lead to a Contact and Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Your institution can choose to model suspects and prospects differently using EDA's flexible architecture. However, this approach is our recommendation for EDA. At Connected University, the recruiting team is looking for applicants from the East Coast. They have a list of recent PSAT takers in that region who have agreed to share their information with schools, but haven't specifically reached out to Connected University. The recruiting team prepared the list and imported the data to create Lead records for each suspect. Let’s look more closely at one suspect, Louis Lombard. ### Lead record The recruiting team sends targeted marketing emails to the Leads, and Louis responds to one asking for more information about the Computer Science program. A recruiting team member responds to his email and then converts Louis’s Lead record, which creates these records. | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Louis Lombard | Connected University imported a list acquired from a testing service. | A suspect who hasn't signaled interest in the university. | ### Contact record | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Louis Lombard | Louis's Lead record was converted. | A prospect who has signaled interest in the university. | ### Account record | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Lombard Administrative Account | Louis's Lead record was converted. | The container Account for a prospect's Contact record, assuming Connected University uses the Administrative Account model. | ### Opportunity record To track Louis as a prospect who's interested in the Computer Science program, the recruiter also creates an Affiliation record. | Record name | Record created when... | Record represents... | | --- | --- | --- | | Lombard- Undergrad Fall '22 | Louis's Lead record was converted. | An official chance for the prospect to enroll at the university. | ### Affiliation record
Record name Record created when... Record represents...
AF-123456 A recruiting staff member updates Louis's Contact record.

Louis's interest in the Computer Science program. 

  • Organization is set to B.S. in Computer Science

  • Role is set to Prospect

  • Status is set to Current
Now the recruiting team can deliver Louis a more personalized recruitment experience that focuses on what the Computer Science program can offer.  For more information about how to configure and use Leads in EDA, see [Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm). Also review our recommendations for importing Leads in [Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm). # Model Transfer Credits Use Education Cloud objects to model definition, submission, and evaluation of transfer credit data. ![Shows the flow of transfer credits](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_transfer_credit_flow.png) ## Create a Transfer Credit Request An applicant creates a course credit transfer application for requests and decisions at a course, degree, or experience level. The course credit transfer application includes potential transfer courses, approved learning equivalencies, and verified external learning participant results from a transcript. The registrar manages the application. The course credit transfer application also opens a case for the registrar, initiating the administrative process at a college, experience, or transcript level. A transfer credit request uses these objects. - Case Represents administrative requests and holds all the information submitted by applicants. - Course Credit Transfer Application A request to get academic credit for courses taken at another institution applied to your current degree. ## Recognize Prior Learning Learning represents information about a curriculum that you can make available to a contact as a course, program, or on-site experience. A registrar recognizes an external learning, which can be a course, exam, or experience to capture key details. This builds a knowledge base of potential transfer credits for future evaluation. The prior learning uses these objects. - Learning Information that defines a curriculum that can be made available as a course, program, or on-site experience for a contact. - External Learning Defines a training that is made available by an external provider as a course, program, or on-site experience. ## Define Equivalencies A registrar creates an equivalency rule that maps an external course to a course at the connected campus. All applicants from that college automatically receive the correct credit. An equivalency uses these objects. - Learning Equivalency The details of the equivalency between external and internal learnings. - Learning Equivalency Achievement Mapping The mapping between a learning equivalency, a source achievement group, and a target achievement group. ## Verify Transcripts and Suggest Credits The registrar evaluates the official transcript for course, experience, or exam information. They can then automatically map it to the course credit transfer application records. # Model Your Academic Calendar Use Education Cloud objects to model your academic year, terms, and sessions.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To model your academic calendar: | Education Cloud Full Access | Create a hierarchy of records to model your academic calendar using these objects: - Academic Year—Defines the entirety of your academic year. - Academic Term—Specifies an academic period, which can hold other time periods within it to create a specific timeframe for reporting and course offerings. - Academic Session—Specifies the course offering time periods based on your institution's calendar, whether that's semesters, quarters, trimesters, or something else. To get a better understanding about how these objects work together, let's look at an example from Astro University. Astro University has two semesters in its academic year, each lasting 18 weeks. While many courses at Astro University last for an entire semester, there are some that are shorter. So, Astro University divides each semester into two sessions to accommodate the shorter courses. Introduction to Economics is a course that lasts 9 weeks and is only offered twice during the academic year. The first offering is in the academic session called Fall 1, and the second offering is in the academic session called Spring 2. ![Diagram showing the objects involved in an academic year](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_academic_calendar.png) These objects are flexible, so it doesn't matter how complicated your calendar is. You can create a calendar that accommodates different schedules, like these examples from Astro University: - The School of Law and the School of Business follow different schedules. So they create a different Academic Term record for each school that relates to the same academic year. - Astro University offers virtual programs in addition to in-person instruction. Virtual programs follow nontraditional intake cycles, accommodating enrollment every six to eight weeks. Intervals for academic terms can be as short as you need. - A special immersion program runs for an extended period and overlaps with the regular academic term that non-immersion students follow. It's fine to have academic terms with overlapping dates. ## Set Up Your Academic Calendar Before you can start to accept applications, create a course schedule, or enroll people into your institution, it's necessary to set up your academic calendar. ### Create an Academic Year Record 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Years**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the academic year. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your institution has multiple academic years, use this field to identify what the academic year represents. 4. Enter the year and a description, if you like, and save your changes. ### Create an Academic Term Record 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Terms**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the academic term. 4. To make this the active term, select **Active**. 5. Enter any other relevant information and save your changes. ### Create an Academic Session Record An academic session is the period when you offer a course. You can specify time periods based on your institution's calendar whether that is semesters, quarters, trimesters, or other. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Academic Sessions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the academic session. 4. To make this the active academic session, select **Active**. 5. Enter any other relevant information and save your changes. # Model Your Academic Calendar Use the Term object to define and segment your institution's academic year. - **[Model Your Academic Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_academic_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Similar to how you create an account hierarchy to model your institutional structure, you create a hierarchy of Term records to model the academic year. A Term record represents some period of instruction, including the start and end dates. It can represent all or part of a school year, such as a semester or quarter, a specific quarter of a semester, a mini-term, and so on. ## Model Your Academic Calendar Similar to how you create an account hierarchy to model your institutional structure, you create a hierarchy of Term records to model the academic year. A Term record represents some period of instruction, including the start and end dates. It can represent all or part of a school year, such as a semester or quarter, a specific quarter of a semester, a mini-term, and so on. Here's an example of Term records for Daisy Bates Academy, which follows the semester system uniformly. | Term Name | Type | Parent Term | Grading Period Sequence | Account | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 2020-2021 School Year | School Year | None | None | Daisy Bates Academy | | 2020-2021 Fall | Semester | 2020-2021 School Year | 1 | Daisy Bates Academy | | 2020-2021 Spring | Semester | 2020-2021 School Year | 2 | Daisy Bates Academy | | 2020-2021 Summer | Semester | 2020-2021 School Year | 3 | Daisy Bates Academy | | 2020-2021 Summer Session A | Part of Term | 2020-2021 Summer Session | 1 | Daisy Bates Academy | | 2020-2021 Summer Session B | Part of Term | 2020-2021 Summer Session | 2 | Daisy Bates Academy | A Grading Period Sequence field on the Term record lets you track when a Term occurs relative to other Terms that are under the same parent Term. In our example with summer session Terms A and B, you can use 1 and 2, respectively, to track their order. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_term.png) Notice that a Term is always defined in relation to an Account—the entity that administers that chunk of the schedule, so to speak. If the entire institution follows the same instructional periods, it's simple: relate all Term records to the Account that represents the institution. If some departments follow different instructional periods, then things get more complicated. But Terms are designed to be flexible, so complicated isn't a problem for the EDA data model. - At Connected University, the School of Law and the School of Business follow different schedules, so they design two separate hierarchies. All of the Term records in one set are related to the School of Law's Account record, and all of the ones in the other set are related to the School of Business' Account record. - Connected University offers virtual programs in addition to in-person instruction. Virtual programs follow nontraditional intake cycles, accommodating enrollment every six to eight weeks. Term intervals can be as short as you need them to be. - At Daisy Bates Academy, a special immersion program runs for an extended period and overlaps with the regular Term that non-immersion students follow. It's fine to have Terms with overlapping dates. # Model Your Campus Model your campus in Education Cloud as an organizational structure of accounts and a network of physical facilities. Represent your institution and its colleges as accounts, and manage buildings, spaces, and their uses as locations. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To model your campus: Education Cloud Full Access
A campus is more than its buildings. In Education Cloud, you model a campus along two dimensions that work together: - Organization: Your institution and its academic and administrative units, represented as accounts. - Facilities: The physical buildings and spaces, and how they're used, represented as locations. Model both dimensions to connect your institution’s organizational structure with the places where activities occur. ## Model Your Campus Organization Use business accounts to represent your institution and its units. Start with a top-level account for the institution, and then add a child account for each college, school, or department. For example, model Connected University as the top-level account, and add child accounts for the College of Engineering, the College of Fine Arts, and the College of Business. The resulting account hierarchy mirrors your campus organization and helps you roll up records and reports to the appropriate unit. For details about business accounts, person accounts, and the relationships that connect people and organizations, see [Model Households, Groups, and Organizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up relationships to define how your learners and other accounts connect with one another, such as for representing households."). ## Model Your Campus Facilities Model your institution's physical facilities so you can assign space-specific uses and manage reservations and schedules. Here’s a summary of facilities-related objects: - Location: Represents information about the location of your institution's facility. - Location Use: Represents information about the general purpose of the location. - Associated Location: Represents a link between an account and a location in Education. Use this object to connect one or more locations to one or more accounts. Here’s a sample representation of locations. ![Sample of a campus model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/model_campus_sample.png) This example shows a student schedule that uses data from the entire model. ![Sample of a campus model with student schedule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/model_campus_student_schedule_sample.png) ## Create a Campus Model Define your institution's facilities and how they are used. ### Create a Location 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Locations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name, and specify the type of location. 4. Enter other relevant information, and save your changes. ### Define Location Use 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Location Use**. 2. Click **New Location Use**. 3. Enter a name and select the location type. 4. Enter other relevant information, and save your changes. ### Define Associated Location 1. Add the Associated Location related list to the Account and Location page layouts. 2. From the Account or Location record page, click **Related**. 3. In the Associated Locations related list, click **New**. 4. Enter the required information, and save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Group Memberships and Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership.htm&language=en_US) - [How Education Cloud Models Groups and Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_how_education_cloud_models_groups_relationships.htm&language=en_US) - [Display Account Hierarchies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_hierarchy_setup.htm&language=en_US) # Model Your Data in Education Cloud Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm&type=5). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Model Your Campus](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_your_campus.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Model your campus in Education Cloud as an organizational structure of accounts and a network of physical facilities. Represent your institution and its colleges as accounts, and manage buildings, spaces, and their uses as locations. - **[Model Faculty, Staff, Students, and Alumni](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_faculty_staff_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Person Account object to model faculty, staff, students, and alumni. - **[Model Households, Groups, and Organizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up relationships to define how your learners and other accounts connect with one another, such as for representing households. - **[Model Your Academic Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_your_academic_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects to model your academic year, terms, and sessions. - **[Model Courses and Curricula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_courses_and_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learnings, courses, course offerings, and schedules. - **[Model Learning Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learning offerings. Learning objects track the structure, administration, and enrollment and completion requirements for your offerings. - **[Model Suspects and Prospects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_suspects_prospects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud to track and manage suspects and prospects. For example, you can define the criteria to promote a suspect to a prospect automatically or manually. - **[Model Admission Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_admissions_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects to review and manage an applicant's information, education history, and qualifications. - **[Model Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects to model definition, submission, and evaluation of transfer credit data. - **[Model Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud objects and apps to define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey. # Model Your Institutional Account Structure Learn how to align the Account object in EDA to your institutional structure. - **[Model Your Institutional Account Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A four-year university, an elementary school, and a school district all have vastly different org charts and governance models. But no matter your educational context, the Account object is foundational for modeling your institutional structure. - **[Institutional and Organizational Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Account object is a standard Salesforce object that represents organizational entities, such as departments or the academic programs that they administer, campus organizations, and sports teams. Accounts also represent organizational entities external to an educational institution, such as the schools that students have graduated or transferred from, local businesses, vendors, and research partners. - **[Structure Account Records in a Hierarchy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Account records to model your institution's entities, including an Account record for the institution itself. You want your institutional Accounts to be well-defined and well-structured before you create Contact records to model the faculty, staff, students, and other people who have relationships with these entities. - **[Institutional Accounts: Sample Account Hierarchies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's see how account hierarchies can look in different educational contexts. - **[Institutional Accounts: Sample Account Hierarchies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_institutional_account_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's see how account hierarchies can look in different educational contexts. ## Model Your Institutional Account Structure A four-year university, an elementary school, and a school district all have vastly different org charts and governance models. But no matter your educational context, the Account object is foundational for modeling your institutional structure. ## Institutional and Organizational Accounts The Account object is a standard Salesforce object that represents organizational entities, such as departments or the academic programs that they administer, campus organizations, and sports teams. Accounts also represent organizational entities external to an educational institution, such as the schools that students have graduated or transferred from, local businesses, vendors, and research partners. To help distinguish different types of institutional and organizational Accounts, EDA comes preconfigured with these record types that can be used for internal or external entities. - Educational Institution - University Department - Sports Organization - Business Organization ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note As you develop a plan for tracking institutional and organizational entities, consider whether you need custom Account record types to track other entities, such as school districts or government agencies. A few other preconfigured Account record types are included. - Administrative Account and Household Account—Specialized record types for modeling data about individual Contacts. See [Model Faculty, Staff, and Student Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_faculty_staff_student_contacts.htm). - Academic Program—A record type for modeling any type of academic, student support, or recreational program, including degree- or credential-granting programs. In the EDA data model, an Academic Program is modeled under a parent Account that typically represents some department within the institution. ## Structure Account Records in a Hierarchy Use Account records to model your institution's entities, including an Account record for the institution itself. You want your institutional Accounts to be well-defined and well-structured before you create Contact records to model the faculty, staff, students, and other people who have relationships with these entities. Here's a small sample of Connected University's institutional Account records. **Account records** | Account Name | Parent Account | Account Record Type | | --- | --- | --- | | Connected University | None | Educational Institution | | Administration | Connected University | University Department | | Office of the President | Administration | University Department | | Finance and Administration | Office of the President | University Department | Organize your institutional Account records in a tree structure of parent and child records—what's known in Salesforce as an account hierarchy. For Accounts outside your institution, organize them into their own, separate account hierarchies, as needed. ## Institutional Accounts: Sample Account Hierarchies Let's see how account hierarchies can look in different educational contexts. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Keep in mind that these sample hierarchies don't necessarily mirror an org chart or personnel chart, nor are they supposed to. It's best to design your account hierarchies based on data management within the Salesforce security and record sharing model. Structure the data so that users have permissions to access only the data that they need and not more. Let’s take a closer look at part of the account hierarchy for Connected University. The top-level parent Account represents the university itself. Accounts underneath represent administrative departments, academic divisions, and so on. Notice that Accounts lower in the hierarchy are sometimes parent Accounts, too. - Connected University - Administration - Office of the President - Finance and Administration - IT and Data Services - Office of Admissions and Records - Registrar - Office of Student Affairs - Academic Senate - Office of Real Estate and Facilities - Physical Plant Department - Schools and Colleges - Office of the Provost - College of Arts and Humanities - Undergraduate Study - Graduate Study - School of Law Consider another example of part of an account hierarchy for a secondary school that's a feeder school for Connected University. Under the top-level Daisy Bates Academy parent Account are Accounts representing administrative departments, academic departments, and so on. - Daisy Bates Academy - Leadership Team - Curriculum and Instruction - Languages - Science - Performing Arts - Extracurricular Programs - The Bates Journal - Robotics Club - Student Support Services - Academic Counseling - Special Education - Tutoring - Facilities and Maintenance - Cafeteria Services - Custodial and Maintenance Services - Tech and Media Let's round out our examples with part of an account hierarchy for the school district that Daisy Bates Academy is in. Under the top-level Rosewood Unified School District parent Account there are Accounts representing the superintendent's office, district services, district schools, and so on. - Rosewood Unified School District - Board of Education - Superintendent's Office - Personnel - Learning and Development - Student Services - Special Enrichment Programs - Operations - Primary Education - Delano Elementary School - E.L. Kahlert Elementary School - Secondary Education - Rosewood Middle School - Daisy Bates Academy - Orange Tech High School ## Institutional Accounts: Sample Account Hierarchies Let's see how account hierarchies can look in different educational contexts. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Keep in mind that these sample hierarchies don't necessarily mirror an org chart or personnel chart, nor are they supposed to. It's best to design your account hierarchies based on data management within the Salesforce security and record sharing model. Structure the data so that users have permissions to access only the data that they need and not more. Let’s take a closer look at part of the account hierarchy for Connected University. The top-level parent Account represents the university itself. Accounts underneath represent administrative departments, academic divisions, and so on. Notice that Accounts lower in the hierarchy are sometimes parent Accounts, too. - Connected University - Administration - Office of the President - Finance and Administration - IT and Data Services - Office of Admissions and Records - Registrar - Office of Student Affairs - Academic Senate - Office of Real Estate and Facilities - Physical Plant Department - Schools and Colleges - Office of the Provost - College of Arts and Humanities - Undergraduate Study - Graduate Study - School of Law Consider another example of part of an account hierarchy for a secondary school that's a feeder school for Connected University. Under the top-level Daisy Bates Academy parent Account are Accounts representing administrative departments, academic departments, and so on. - Daisy Bates Academy - Leadership Team - Curriculum and Instruction - Languages - Science - Performing Arts - Extracurricular Programs - The Bates Journal - Robotics Club - Student Support Services - Academic Counseling - Special Education - Tutoring - Facilities and Maintenance - Cafeteria Services - Custodial and Maintenance Services - Tech and Media Let's round out our examples with part of an account hierarchy for the school district that Daisy Bates Academy is in. Under the top-level Rosewood Unified School District parent Account there are Accounts representing the superintendent's office, district services, district schools, and so on. - Rosewood Unified School District - Board of Education - Superintendent's Office - Personnel - Learning and Development - Student Services - Special Enrichment Programs - Operations - Primary Education - Delano Elementary School - E.L. Kahlert Elementary School - Secondary Education - Rosewood Middle School - Daisy Bates Academy - Orange Tech High School # Model Your Physical Campus Use the Facility object to model data about buildings, lab facilities, dormitories, sports facilities, and other property assets. - **[Model Your Physical Campus](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_physical_campus.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Facility object along with related objects to track data. ## Model Your Physical Campus Use the Facility object along with related objects to track data. Example data that you can track: - The property type and capacity. - The building (parent Facility) that a classroom is located within. - The department (Account) responsible for a Facility. - The staff or faculty member (Contact) who's a Facility's primary contact. - The student (Contact) who is assigned to a dorm room. - A class location (Course Offering). - A class location that varies by day of the week (Course Offering Schedule). Consider this example of a partial list of Facility records for the Connected University campus. | Facility Name | Facility Type | Parent Facility | Account | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Corporation Yard | Building | None | Physical Plant Department | | Ginsburg Hall | Building | None | School of Law | | Ginsburg Auditorium A | Lecture Hall | Ginsburg Hall | School of Law | | Ginsburg Auditorium B | Lecture Hall | Ginsburg Hall | School of Law | | Ginsburg Library | Library | Ginsburg Hall | School of Law | | South Campus Annex | Building | None | Office of Research and Innovation | | Recreational Sports Facility | Gymnasium | None | Office of Real Estate and Facilities | | RSF Pool | Gymnasium | Recreational Sports Facility | Office of Real Estate and Facilities | | Student Union | Building | None | Office of Real Estate and Facilities | Notice that Facility records can be organized in a hierarchy, so that you can define in detail how property assets are related, such as a Facility record under a parent Facility record. For example, the RSF Pool is part of the larger Recreational Sports Facility complex, which is administered by the Office of Real Estate and Facilities. ![Corresponding diagram of information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/edu_model_facility.png) # Modify Data Processing Engine Definitions Review the Data Processing Engine definitions. If you have custom fields that must be migrated, edit the definitions to change the data transformation operations as required. See [Create a Data Processing Engine Definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.task_data_processing_engine_create.htm&type=5). # Monitor Learner Performance with Alerts Use record alerts in Education Cloud to monitor learner performance with respect to attendance, grades, and other metrics.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up alerts: | Education Cloud Full Access | Alerts help support staff stay on top of concerns about grades, attendance, and other areas that impede student success. The Record Alert object is related to the Case object and therefore, an alert relates to a learner’s case. To learn how to create custom alert categories and assign their severity levels, see [Set Up Record Alert Categories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.record_alerts_categories.htm&language=en_US). As an advisor using the Student Success app from Education Cloud, you can manually create an alert, or set up flows to automatically create alerts and assign tasks. You can view alerts associated with a learner on the learner’s account page. You can apply a care plan to an alert, or to multiple alerts (up to 20 at a time), enabling you to proactively support learners. You can select multiple active or inactive alerts, and change their status at once. See Also - [Automate Case Creation and Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm) - [Configure Education Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_configure_education_flows.htm) ## Create an Alert Manually Create a record alert to be notified of changes to a learner’s record. 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. On the advisor console, click the dropdown navigation menu, and select **Record Alerts**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Enter relevant details and save your changes. See [Create a Record Alert Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts_create.htm&type=5). ## Change the Status of Alerts Set the status of one or more record alerts to activate or deactivate them. 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. 2. On the advisor console, click the dropdown navigation menu, and select **Record Alerts**. 3. Select record alerts with the same status, and click **Change Status**. # Monitor Learner Performance with Alerts Directors and advisors can now create alerts that notify them about learner performance so that they can offer timely support when required. Use flows to automatically create alerts for multiple learner records. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: In the Student Success app, on the director or advisor console, click **Alerts** on the dropdown menu and follow the alert creation workflow. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Alerts (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_monitor_learner_performance_with_alerts.htm) # Monitor TDTM Framework Changes If you've created custom triggers, stay current with product releases to identify any changes to our TDTM framework that might require changes to your custom triggers. For example, EDA version 1.100 introduced the `TDTM_Event`, `TDTM_Lead`, `TDTM_Task`, and `TDTM_User` Trigger Handlers. If you had previously created custom triggers for any of these objects, we recommend deleting your custom triggers. Maintaining one trigger for each object helps avoid re-entrancy issues. # Multi-Campus Institutional Hierarchy Configuration with AI Tools A guided session builds a multi-campus account hierarchy that represents your institution's system, campuses, colleges, and departments. When you describe your campus structure or provide a source document to a coding agent, the agent analyzes the source and creates the account hierarchy. This foundation supports enrollment, reporting, and role-based access. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Scenario A Salesforce admin wants to model the multi-campus system for your institution with its colleges and departments before teams configure enrollment and reporting. To avoid creating every account and linking records manually, the admin connects a coding agent to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) and provides the catalog page as the source document. The agent reads the structure, proposes a hierarchy for approval, and creates the account records and business profiles with parent-child links. Later, the admin updates the hierarchy by using the coding agent. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. For more information, see [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). ## Requirements - Education Cloud Full Access permission set. The agent checks for and assigns the required permission sets based on your privileges, so it never grants access that you don't have. - A coding agent, such as Agentforce Vibes or Claude Code, connected to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) with access to Education Cloud setup skills. For Agentforce Vibes, no installation is required. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. You can manage them from the Skills page, under Toolkit, in Agentforce Vibes. For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. ## Suggested Technology and Experience Recommended for Salesforce admins who are comfortable with Setup and with running a coding agent against a connected org. No prior experience with a specific skill is required. ## Related Documentation - [Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide) - [Salesforce Development Plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) - [Get Started with Agentforce Vibes](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/agentforcevibes/guide/afv-get-started.html) ## Agentic Tips - Describe your goal in your own words. For example: - "Help me set up our institutional hierarchy." - "Here's our website: https://www.example.com/about/campuses" - "We have a system with three campuses. Main Campus has a College of Engineering with Computer Science and Electrical Engineering departments." - "Show me the path for the English department." - Provide reliable sources. A structured spreadsheet or CSV file is more reliable than a website, which can return incomplete results. If you point the agent to a web page, instruct it to include every campus. - Approve each change. The agent proposes a hierarchy and pauses for your confirmation before creating or changing any record. Read operations require no approval. Create, update, and delete operations require your confirmation. - Avoid pasting credentials into a prompt. The agent acts as your authenticated user through the connected org. ## Design Considerations - The agent builds and updates. Describe your goals again to add, rename, or move a campus, college, or department. The agent applies only the difference. Account names must be unique within their sibling group so the agent can match records reliably. - Deletions are deliberate. The agent never removes records automatically. It reports extra records and deletes one only with your confirmation. Deleting an account also removes its business profile and child accounts. - Institution type has a fixed set of values. The Business Profile Institution Type field is a managed, restricted picklist. For an institution that doesn't fit those values, capture the detail in the Description field. - Sharing rules are a manual step. Configure sharing rules for role-based access in Setup after the hierarchy exists. ## Build Your Institutional Hierarchy with a Coding Agent Describe your campus structure or point the coding agent to a source file. Then, the agent creates the account records and business profiles with parent-child links. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To run setup skills through a coding agent: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. Before you start: - [Set up your org](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/setup-overview.html) for the Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers, including an External Client App with the `mcp_api` scope. - Activate the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). - [Connect your coding agents.](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/client-connection-overview.html) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. Then, configure a multi-campus hierarchy. 1. Instruct the agent to set up your institutional hierarchy, and provide your structure as a spreadsheet, web page, PDF, or description. 2. Have the agent read the source and propose a hierarchy of your system, campuses, colleges, and departments. 3. Review the proposed hierarchy. Approve it, or ask the agent to make changes. 4. Have the agent create the account records and business profiles and link each child to its parent. 5. Review the agent's summary of what it created, and confirm the hierarchy in Salesforce. 6. To apply later changes, describe your updated structure to the agent and approve the differences it proposes. # National Change of Address Learn about National Change of Address (NCOA) updates and how to schedule, manage, and see the results of updates. - **[About National Change of Address Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_ncoa_data_integrity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** National Change of Address (NCOA) updates in Data Integrity make it easy for you to keep up with constituents when they update their address. NCOA updates may also qualify your organization for postal discounts. - **[Schedule National Change Of Address Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_ncoa_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about considerations for scheduling NCOA updates and how to schedule, edit, and skip updates. - **[See Results of National Change of Address Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_results_ncoa_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to review the results of an NCOA update and how Data Integrity handles errors. # New and Changed Connect APIs Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate with Salesforce software and UIs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Get field set names of an entity Make a GET request to the new `/services/data/v59.0/connect/fieldset/${object api name}` resource. Remove benefit participants from a benefit schedule Make a DELETE request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/benefit-schedules/${benefitScheduleId}/benefit-assignments?ids=` resource. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [_Developer Documentation_: Program Management Business APIs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/program_mgmt_business_apis.htm) # New and Changed Objects Here are the new data objects to use instead of the existing data objects in the managed package. Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model Use the new AccountingModelConfig object instead of the abacus\_\_Accounting\_Mapping\_Set\_\_mdt object. Configure settings for the Accounting Subledger job Use the new AccountingSettings object instead of the abacus\_\_Ledger\_Entry\_Settings\_\_c object. View the generated financial transactions records Use these new and existing fields on the TransactionJournal object instead of the abacus\_\_Ledger\_Entry\_\_c object. New fields: - AccountingModelConfigName - Comment - CreditAmount - DebitAmount - DueDate - FundAccountRecordIdValue - FundAccountValue - GeneralLedgerCode - IsAccrualJournalEntry - IsAdjustmentJournalEntry - IsHistoricalJournalEntry - IsRelatedJournalEntry - IsWriteOffJournalEntry - PaymentDate - PrimaryRecordIdValue - SecondaryRecordIdValue Existing fields: - BookingDate - JournalReason - JournalType - PaymentMethod Monitor Accounting Subledger jobs Use the BatchJob and BatchJobPart objects instead of the AsyncApexJob object. Review failed Accounting Subledger jobs Use the BatchJobPartFailedRecord object instead of the abacus\_\_Subledger\_Error\_\_c object. # New and Changed Objects Do more with the new and updated Accounting Subledger objects. Specify custom field mappings to populate transaction journal records with other Salesforce data Use the new AccountingFieldMapping object. # New and Changed Objects Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects. Specify the course offering time period based on your institution's calendar Use the new AcademicSession object. Define an academic period for reporting and offerings Use the new AcademicTerm object. View information about a student's enrollment in an academic term Use the new AcademicTermEnrollment object. Define an academic year period Use the new AcademicYear object. Record the final decision performed for the specified application Use the new ApplicationDecision object. Record information about the recommendation for an individual application Use the new ApplicationRecommendation object. Link an individual application and the recommender of the application Use the new ApplicationRecommender object. View information about the review performed against a specific application Use the new ApplicationReview object. Specify milestone dates in the application process Use the new ApplicationTimeline object. View information about the roles associated with an individual Use the new ConstituentRole object. Specify additional information about an individual such as ethnicity, race, citizenship, and so on Use the new ContactProfile object. View information about a student's enrollment in a course offering Use the new CourseOfferingParticipant object. View information about the outcome of a student’s participation in a course Use the new CourseOfferingParticipantResult object. Define the schedule for a course offering Use the new CourseOfferingSchedule object. Define the schedule for a course offering using the provided template Use the new CourseOfferingScheduleTemplate object. View details about a request for information (RFI) Use the new EducationalInfoRequest object. View information about the preferences of an applicant during program enrollment Use the new IndividualApplication object. View details of a learning program plan that’s created for a learner Use the new LearnerProgram object. View requirements that a learner is required to complete in their assigned learning program plan Use the new LearnerProgramRequirement object. View information about the progress on requirements that a learner is required to complete in their assigned learning program plan Use the new LearnerProgramRequirementProgress object. Define a training that can be made available as a course, program, or on-site experience, for a contact Use the new Learning object. View information about the outcome of a learning activity Use the new LearningAchievement object. View information about a course that’s required in a learning framework Use the new LearningCourse object. View information about the prerequisite, co-requisite, or the recommended learning that’s required for a learning outcome Use the new LearningFoundationItem object. View information about the mapping between the learnings and the related outcome. Use the new LearningOutcomeItem object. View information about one or more trainings in a program that’s required to obtain a credential Use the new LearningProgram object. Represents details of a plan that’s created to execute a learning program Use the new LearningProgramPlan object. View information about the requirements of a learning outcome that’s included in the learning program plan Use the new LearningProgramPlanRequirement object. View information about the general purpose of the location Use the new LocationUse object. View information about a person's disability Use the new PersonDisability object. View information about the application timeline for a program in an academic term Use the new ProgramTermApplicationTimeline object. Define the Case Record Type and the default unassigned case team for a Success Team Use the new SuccessTeam object. Relate Work Type Groups with Case Team Roles and define activities that service resources are qualified to perform Use the new WorkTypeGroupRole object. ## Education Cloud Fields on Existing Objects Differentiate a course offering from other sections in an academic term Use the SectionNumber field on the CourseOffering object. Relate a Learning Course with a Course Offering Use the LearningCourse field on the CourseOffering object. Relate a Contact as the lead instructor of a Course Offering Use the PrimaryFaculty field on the CourseOffering object. Relate an Academic Session with a Course Offering Use the AcademicSession field on the CourseOffering object. Specify the maximum number of students that are allowed to enroll for the Course Offering Use the EnrollmentCapacity field on the CourseOffering object. Specify the maximum number of students that can be waitlisted for the Course Offering Use the WaitlistCapacity field on the CourseOffering object. Specify the current number of enrollees in the Course Offering Use the EnrolleeCount field on the CourseOffering object. Specify the current number of people on the waitlist for the Course Offering Use the WaitlistCount field on the CourseOffering object. Record the identifier as defined in the identity document for the individual Use the IndividualIdentifer field on the IdentityDocument object. Record the ethnicity of an individual Use the EthnicityId field on the Individual object. Record the race of an individual Use the Race field on the Individual object. Record an individual's country of birth Use the BirthCountry field on the Individual object. Record an individual's place of birth Use the BirthPlace field on the Individual object. Record an individual's country of primary citizenship Use the PrimaryCitizenshipCountry field on the Individual object. Record the type of primary citizenship Use the PrimaryCitizenshipType field on the Individual object. Record an individual's country of secondary citizenship Use the SecondaryCitizenshipCountry field on the Individual object. Record the type of secondary citizenship Use the SecondaryCitizenshipType field on the Individual object. Record the branch of military service of an individual Use the MilitaryBranch field on the Individual object. Record the status of military service of an individual Use the MilitaryService field on the Individual object. Indicate if the individual is a first generation, post-secondary student Use the IsFirstGenerationStudent field on the Individual object. Record the highest educational qualification of an individual Use the HighestEducationLevel field on the Individual object. Specify the maximum occupancy of a location Use the MaximumOccupancy field on the Location object. Specify the ownership status of a location Use the OwnershipStatus field on the Location object. Specify the academic rank of a student in a class Use the ClassRank field on the PersonEducation object. Specify the class rank reporting format of the student's school Use the ClassRankReportingFormat field on the PersonEducation object. Specify the GPA weighting type followed by the student's school Use the ClassRankWeightingType field on the PersonEducation object. Record a description about the education of the person Use the Comment field on the PersonEducation object. Record a student's GPA Use the CumulativeGpa field on the PersonEducation object. Specify the end date of the individual's education Use the EndDate field on the PersonEducation object. Specify the GPA scale used to calculate a student's grade point average Use the GpaScale field on the PersonEducation object. Specify the weightage given to an applicant's grades Use the GpaWeightingType field on the PersonEducation object. Specify the graduation class size Use the GraduationClassSize field on the PersonEducation object. Relate an educational institution to an applicant Use the InstitutionAccount field on the PersonEducation object. Record the annual income of an individual Use the AnnualIncome field on the PersonEmployment object. Record the address of an individual's employer Use the EmployerAddress field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify the city where an individual's employer is located Use the EmployerCity field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify the country where an individual's employer is located Use the EmployerCountry field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify the level of accuracy of an employer location's geographical coordinates compared with its physical address Use the EmployerGeocodeAccuracy field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify the latitude of the employer's location Use the EmployerLatitude field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify the longitude of the employer's location Use the EmployerLongitude field on the PersonEmployment object. Record an employer's phone number Use the EmployerPhone field on the PersonEmployment object. Record an employer's postal code Use the EmployerPostalCode field on the PersonEmployment object. Record the state where an individual's employer is located Use the EmployerState field on the PersonEmployment object. Record the street where an individual's employer is located Use the EmployerStreet field on the PersonEmployment object. Record an individual's employment status Use the EmploymentStatus field on the PersonEmployment object. Record the last date of an individual's employment Use the EndDate field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify an individual's occupation Use the Occupation field on the PersonEmployment object. Specify an individual's last position at the job Use the Position field on the PersonEmployment object. Relate an individual to the Person Employment record Use the RelatedPersonId field on the PersonEmployment object. Record the start date of an individual's employment Use the StartDate field on the PersonEmployment object. Relate a parent Person Examination to an examination Use the ParentPersonExamination field on the PersonExamination object. Specify the examination score type Use the ScoreType field on the PersonExamination object. Specify the academic subject associated with an examination Use the SubjectName field on the PersonExamination object. Relate a Location to a Service Territory Member Use the Location field on the ServiceTerritoryMember object. # New and Changed Objects in Education Cloud Do more with the new and updated Education Cloud objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Record the mapping details between a learning achievement type and a learning achievement record type Use the new LearningAchievementConfig object. Specify the minimum numeric grade for learning program plan requirement Use the new MinimumNumericGrade field on the existing LearningProgramPlanRqmt object. Specify the category for a learning program plan requirement Use the new Category field on the existing LearningProgramPlanRqmt object. Specify the minimum numeric grade for a learning outcome item Use the new MinimumNumericGrade field on the existing LearningOutcomeItem object. Specify the category for a learning outcome item Use the new Category field on the existing LearningOutcomeItem object. Specify the minimum numeric grade for a learning foundation item Use the new MinimumNumericGrade field on the existing LearningFoundationItem object. Specify the category for a learning foundation item Use the new Category field on the existing LearningFoundationItem object. Relate a support program with a success team Use the new SuccessTeam field on the existing Program object. Relate a support program with an Omni Process Use the new OmniProcess field on the existing Program object. Specify whether a support program appears on the learner portal Use the new ShouldShowOnLearnerPortal field on the existing Program object. Relate a service appointment with a benefit disbursement Use the new BenefitDisbursement field on the existing ServiceAppointment object. Specify the description for a learning course Use the new Description field in the existing LearningCourse object. Specify the description for a learning program Use the new Description field on the existing LearningProgram object. Specify the mapping details for a case team member and a support program Use the new CaseTeamMemberProgram object. Relate a benefit disbursement with a service appointment Use the new ServiceAppointment field on the existing BenefitDisbursement object. Record a learner's cumulative grade point average (GPA) for an academic term enrollment Use the new CumulativeGradePointAverage field on the existing AcademicTermEnrollment object. Record a learner's term grade point average (GPA) for an academic term enrollment Use the new TermGradePointAverage field on the existing AcademicTermEnrollment object. Create tasks for an individual application Use the new IndividualApplicationTask object. Specify the association between an application stage and application section Use the new ApplicationStageSection object. Record the tasks required to capture application data for an individual application Use the new ApplicationStageDefinition object. Record the sections of an individual application Use the new ApplicationSectionDefinition object. Record a credential that can be earned by learners Use the new AcademicCredential object. Record a learner's earned academic credential Use the new PersonAcademicCredential object. See information about a user that's shown on their public profile. Use the new PersonPublicProfile object. See a user's preferences for which data is included in their directory entry Use the new PersonPublicProfilePrefSet object. Record the location that's associated with a contact Use the new Location field on the existing ContactProfile object. Record a website that's associated with a contact Use the new Website field on the existing ContactProfile object. # New Flows for Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Use these new flows in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Close Gift Commitment Updates the status of a gift commitment to Closed and updates the status of the associated gift transactions. Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing Runs batch jobs that update gift commitments based on associated gift commitment schedules and gift transactions. Get Gift Commitments Retrieves the active gift commitments for a donor or a gift commitment. Manage Gift Commitment Schedule Creates and updates recurring and custom type of gift commitment schedules. Manage Gift Designations Assigns gift designations to the associated gift commitment of gift transactions. Manage Gift Entries Creates and updates a gift entry. Process Gift Batch Processes gift entries in a specified gift batch. Process Gift Commitment Processes a gift commitment associated with a gift commitment schedule or gift transaction. Process Gift Entries Processes a gift entry and generates the relevant gift transaction, gift transaction designation, and gift soft credit records. Pause | Resume Pauses a gift commitment schedule for a fixed time period or indefinitely, and resumes a paused gift commitment schedule. Update Recurring Schedule Updates a recurring gift commitment schedule. SEE ALSO [Fundraising Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_flows.htm) # New Invocable Actions in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Use these new invocable actions in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Update the processing status of a gift entry Use the new updateProcessedGiftEntries action. Create or update a recurring gift commitment schedule Use the new manageRcrGiftCmtSchd action. Create or update custom gift commitment schedules Use the new manageCustomGiftCmtSchds action. Pause a gift commitment schedule for a specified period of time Use the new pauseGiftCommitmentSchedule action. Create and manage gift default designations for a gift entry Use the new manageGiftDefaultDesignations action. Create and manage gift transaction designations for a gift transaction Use the new manageGiftTrxnDesignations action. Process a single or a batch of gift entries Use the new processGiftEntries action. Resume a gift commitment schedule Use the new resumeGiftCommitmentSchedule action. Close a gift commitment Use the new closeGiftCommitment action. Process a gift commitment Use the new processGiftCommitment action. SEE ALSO [Fundraising Invocable Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_invocable_actions.htm) # New Lightning Web Components for Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Use these new Lightning web components in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Custom Schedule Adds custom schedule records to a gift commitment. Used in the Manage Gift Commitment Schedule flow. Gift Designation Allocates gift designations to a gift entry, gift commitment, or gift transaction. Used in the Manage Gift Entries and Manage Gift Designations flows. Lookup-Record Fields Looks up a record and shows the selected record's fields. Used in the Manage Gift Entries and Get Gift Commitments flows. Record Detail Lookup Fetches all fields for a selected lookup record. Used in the Manage Gift Entries and Manage Gift Designations flows. Soft Credit Associates soft credit records with a gift entry. Used in the Manage Gift Entries flow. SEE ALSO [Fundraising Lightning Web Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_lightning_web_components.htm) # New Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Connect APIs Make the most of the new connect APIs in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Retrieve the gift transaction designations for a gift transaction Make a GET request to the new `/connect/fundraising/transaction/${_transactionId_}/designations` resource. New response body: Gift Transaction Designation List Retrieve the gift transactions for a gift commitment Make GET request to the new `/connect/fundraising/donor/${_donorId_}/commitments` resource. New response body: Gift Default Designation List Retrieve the gift default designations for a campaign Make a GET request to the new `/connect/fundraising/campaign/${_campaignId_}/default-designations` resource. New response body: List of Gift Transactions that are matched with the donor's Gift Commitments Retrieve the gift default designations for a gift commitment Make a GET request to the new `/fundraising/commitment/{_id_}/default-designation` resource. New response body: Gift Default Designation List Retrieve the gift transactions for a gift commitment Make a GET request to the new `/connect/fundraising/gift-commitments/{_commitmentId_}/gift-transactions` resource. New response body: Gift Transaction List Retrieve the gift transactions for a gift commitment schedule Make a GET request to the new `/connect/fundraising/gift-commitment-schedules/{_scheduleId_}/gift-transactions` resource. New response body: Gift Transaction List # New Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Metadata Type Make the most of the new metadata type in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Fundraising Setup Base Platform Object** Configure your fundraising product with a collection of settings Use the new FundraisingConfig metadata type. Introduced in API version 58.0, this field has been added to the Metadata API Developer Guide. SEE ALSO [Fundraising Tooling API Object](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.246.0.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_tooling_api_object.htm) # New Objects and Fields in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Do more with the new Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Log all gifts received by your organization Use the new GiftEntry object to enter gifts individually. With Shield Platform Encryption, you can add another layer of security to these fields on the GiftEntry object. - First Name - Last Name - Email - Mobile Phone - Home Phone - Street - City - State / Province - Country - Organization Name Log gifts in bulk Use the new GiftBatch object to enter gifts in bulk. Record gift transactions Use the new GiftTransaction object. Join a gift designation to a gift transaction Use the new GiftTransactionDesignation object. Record gift transaction designations Use the new GiftDesignation object to assign a custom designation to a gift transaction. Record gift transaction default designations Use the new GiftDefaultDesignation to allocate gifts to the default designation. Issue soft credits for a gift transaction Use the new GiftSoftCredit object. Issue full or partial donation refunds upon request Use the new GiftRefund object. Honor individuals or groups with a tribute Use the new GiftTribute object. Create donor gift commitments Use the new GiftCommitment object. Set gift commitment schedules Use the new GiftCommitmentSchedule object. Identify audience and outreach methods of campaigns Use the new OutreachSourceCode object. Track Campaign results Use the new OutreachSumary object. Summarize the giving histories of your donors Use the new DonorGiftSummary object. See a donor's financial assets and giving history Use the new ContactProfile object. SEE ALSO - [Fundraising Standard Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.246.0.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_standard_objects.htm) - [Fundraising Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.246.0.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_data_model.htm) # Nonprofit Case Management (Managed Package) Documentation Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Learn About Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Read use cases for Case Management with human services. Review a diagram that shows the relationship between objects. Learn what objects and fields are part of the nonprofit Case Management managed package. - **[Get Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install the nonprofit Case Management managed package, complete post-installation tasks, and configure Case Management on for mobile interfaces. - **[Configure Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure program and services and case management in the Case Management managed package - **[Set Up Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_config_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about security and permissions in Salesforce and the permission sets included in the Case Management managed package. - **[Work with Clients](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_work_with_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage your work, work with referrals and intakes, and manage case plans and clients in the nonprofit Case Management managed package. - **[Work with Programs and Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_work_with_programs_and_services.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create programs, program engagements, program cohorts, and service deliveries in the nonprofit Case Management managed package - **[Case Management with Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_with_experience_cloud_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and customize your client Experience Cloud site for the nonprofit Case Management managed package. - **[Reporting and Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_reporting_and_analytics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about reports and dashboards included in the nonprofit Case Management managed package and learn more about using Tableau for advanced reporting. - **[Case Management Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about GDPR and the nonprofit Case Management managed package. - **[Ongoing Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_architecture.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about feature telemetry and using Shield Encryption with the nonprofit Case Management managed package. # Nonprofit Cloud Nonprofit Cloud includes Case Management, Program Management, Fundraising, and Outcome Management and is your one-stop-shop for features that use the power of the Salesforce platform. Nonprofit Cloud is a purpose-built platform designed for nonprofits, charities, social housing associations, and social businesses to integrate funding, program delivery, and impact measurement. Nonprofit Cloud offers capabilities that unify fundraising, case management, outcome tracking, grantmaking, and constituent management. Also, the platform supports interaction summaries for permanent notes, and management tools for volunteers, care plans, and case referrals. Use generative AI to optimize your program management, volunteer operations, and fundraising drives. Intelligent AI agents automate workflows, enabling your team to boost productivity and achieve greater impact. - **[What's Included in Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_whats_included_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Cloud unifies tools for fundraising, program and case management, outcome management, and, optionally, grantmaking. Each of these tools builds on Salesforce’s platform and other shared features. - **[Create a Nonprofit Cloud Trial Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_create_nonprofit_cloud_trial_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get experience with Nonprofit Cloud in a full-featured trial experience. - **[Einstein Copilot in Nonprofit Cloud (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_einstein_copilot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring the power of generative AI and conversational AI to fundraising with Einstein Copilot. Ask Einstein Copilot to use data in your Salesforce org to produce draft gift proposals. - **[Einstein Generative AI in Nonprofit Cloud (Beta)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_einstein_generative_ai_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the power of generative AI to support common tasks in Nonprofit Cloud. Ask Einstein to use data in your Salesforce org to produce a variety of summaries and a streamlined version of grant applications for review by the board members. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_set_up_nonprofit_cloud_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete prerequisites for Nonprofit Cloud and turn on the features you want to use to manage fundraising, programs, case referrals, care plans, outcomes, and volunteers. - **[Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_ai_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the power of generative AI to manage your fundraising initiatives, volunteer programs, and program management. AI agents streamline processes and help your team work more efficiently. - **[Fundraising in Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fundraising_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Nonprofit Cloud and Fundraising to support the development and fundraising operations in your nonprofit organization. - **[Get Started with Program Management and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_pm_get_started.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Program Management to increase productivity, eliminate data silos, and empower staff who manage and deliver programs to make timely decisions. Enable Case Management to equip your team with tools for intake, assessments, and guided care plans. Explore a trial org and learn about what's included, the recommended setup, and how to get ready for your implementation. - **[Outcome Management with Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_outcome_management_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Outcome Management to define your impact strategy or theory of change, collect your data, track your progress, and evaluate the effectiveness of your programs. - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_nonprofit_cloud_for_grantmaking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Streamline the grant management process for both funders and applicants. Built on the Salesforce platform, Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking includes tools to give grants and manage your nonprofit work. - **[Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Volunteer Management to streamline program management, enhance the volunteer experience, track hours, and report metrics. In Experience Cloud, create a portal to post opportunities for volunteers to browse, search, and sign up for volunteer opportunities. # Nonprofit Cloud Agents Learn about the Agentforce agents that are available for fundraising, volunteer management, and program management. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud and Einstein for Nonprofits licenses enabled.
Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Use these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty. See [Philanthropic Research Subagents in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&language=en_US). Volunteer Management Agent Efficiently manage volunteer shifts and initiatives, reducing administrative tasks and improving engagement. Access the Shift Capacity & Coverage subagent in the Agent Builder to identify unfilled shifts and find the most suitable volunteers to fill them. See [Volunteer Management Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Efficiently manage volunteer shifts and initiatives, reducing administrative tasks and improving engagement. Access the Shift Capacity and Coverage topic in the Agent Builder to identify unfilled shifts and find suitable volunteers to fill them."). Participant Management Agentforce Agent Create an Agentforce agent to help case managers and program staff record benefits, create tasks, and update goals for participants. Name your agent, define its role, and keep a record of conversations to review agent behavior. Add the Participant Management subagent to streamline documentation and record keeping tasks. See [Participant Management Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_participant_management_agent.htm&language=en_US). Donor Support Agent Fulfill donor requests to pause, resume, close, or update the amount of their existing gift commitments with recurring schedules in an Experience Cloud site. Access the Manage Gift Commitments subagent on the Agentforce Builder to help donors manage their gift commitments. See [Donor Support Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_donor_support_agent.htm&language=en_US). Donor Engagement Agent Capture and preserve donor relationship notes for major giving officers. Convert raw notes into structured interaction summaries and follow-up tasks so that you never lose critical donor intelligence. See [Donor Engagement Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_agent_donor_engagement.htm&language=en_US). SEE ALSO: - [Design and Implement Agents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_intro.htm&language=en_US) # Nonprofit Cloud and Translation Salesforce provides translations for Nonprofit Cloud in multiple languages. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
- **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Nonprofit Cloud. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Nonprofit Cloud product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Nonprofit Cloud."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Nonprofit Cloud.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Nonprofit Cloud. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Nonprofit Cloud objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Nonprofit Cloud See [Salesforce Language Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.faq_getstart_language_support.htm&type=5). ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. ### Nonprofit Cloud - [Chinese (Simplified)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_zh_cn.pdf) - [Chinese (Traditional)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_zh_tw.pdf) - [Danish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_da_dk.pdf) - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_nl_nl.pdf) - [Finnish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_fi_fi.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_de_de.pdf) - [Italian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_it_it.pdf) - [Japanese](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_ja_jp.pdf) - [Korean](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_ko_kr.pdf) - [Norwegian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_no_no.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_pt_br.pdf) - [Russian](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_ru_ru.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_es_es.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_es_mx.pdf) - [Swedish](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/LocalizedPDFs/NPC/Nonprofit_Cloud_sv_se.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Nonprofit Cloud product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Nonprofit Cloud: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Nonprofit Cloud Case Management New and Changed Objects Do more with the new Case Management objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. Register concerns reported by constituents as public complaint records Use the ComplaintCase and PublicComplaint objects. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Case Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [_Developer Documentation_: Case Management Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_cm_data_model.htm) # Nonprofit Cloud Data Model Objects This reference lists Nonprofit Cloud data model objects by category. To use Data 360 Data Governance features for Nonprofit Cloud, grant access to the impacted objects according to an access policy. To get more granular control over users' access to data, select attribute-based access control (ABAC) or role-based access control (RBAC). Follow the instructions in [Grant Access to Data 360 Objects](http://sfdc.co/dc-objects) to assign these objects to an available policy. For more information on Data Governance, see [Get Started with Data Governance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_before_you_begin_data_gov.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Go to [Data Model Objects (DMOs)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_model_objects.htm&language=en_US) for more information. ## Associated Data 360 Objects **Standard Objects** | Data Model Object (DMO) | Additional Information | | --- | --- | | Account | Standard Object | | Campaign | Standard Object | | Opportunity | Standard Object | **Fundraising Objects**
Donor Gift SummaryFundraising Object
Gift CommitmentFundraising Object
Gift Commitment ScheduleFundraising Object
Gift Default DesignationFundraising Object
Gift DesignationFundraising Object
Gift RefundFundraising Object
Gift Soft CreditFundraising Object
Gift TransactionFundraising Object
Gift Transaction DesignationFundraising Object
Outreach Source CodeFundraising Object
Outreach SummaryFundraising Object
**Program Management Objects**
BenefitProgram Management Object
Benefit AssignmentProgram Management Object
Benefit DisbursementProgram Management Object
Benefit ScheduleProgram Management Object
Benefit Schedule AssignmentProgram Management Object
Benefit SessionProgram Management Object
Benefit TypeProgram Management Object
ProgramProgram Management Object
Program CohortProgram Management Object
Program Cohort MemberProgram Management Object
Program EnrollmentProgram Management Object
**Case Management Objects**
Care PlanCase Management Object
Care Plan TemplateCase Management Object
Care Plan Template BenefitCase Management Object
Care Plan Template GoalCase Management Object
CaseCase Management Object
Case ProgramCase Management Object
Goal AssignmentCase Management Object
Goal DefinitionCase Management Object
ReferralCase Management Object
**Outcome Management Objects**
Impact StrategyOutcome Management Object
Impact Strategy AssignmentOutcome Management Object
Indicator AssignmentOutcome Management Object
Indicator DefinitionOutcome Management Object
Indicator Performance PeriodOutcome Management Object
Indicator ResultOutcome Management Object
OutcomeOutcome Management Object
Outcome ActivityOutcome Management Object
Time PeriodOutcome Management Object
**Grantmaking Objects**
BudgetGrantmaking Object
Budget AllocationGrantmaking Object
Budget CategoryGrantmaking Object
Budget Category ValueGrantmaking Object
Budget PeriodGrantmaking Object
Funding AwardGrantmaking Object
Funding Award AmendmentGrantmaking Object
Funding Award RequirementGrantmaking Object
Funding DisbursementGrantmaking Object
Funding OpportunityGrantmaking Object
**Volunteer Management Objects**
ExaminationVolunteer Management Object
Job PositionVolunteer Management Object
Job Position AssignmentVolunteer Management Object
Job Position QualificationVolunteer Management Object
Job Position ShiftVolunteer Management Object
Person CompetencyVolunteer Management Object
Person ExaminationVolunteer Management Object
Person Location AvailabilityVolunteer Management Object
PositionVolunteer Management Object
Position BenefitVolunteer Management Object
Position QualificationVolunteer Management Object
Volunteer InitiativeVolunteer Management Object
If you have more than one data space, grant access to objects in each data space. Object names in non-default data spaces follow the convention of \_. Go to [Nonprofit Cloud Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_data_model.htm) for more information on the objects available in Nonprofit Cloud. # Nonprofit Cloud Experience Site Setup Collaborate with community users such as service providers, volunteers, and beneficiaries in Experience Cloud. Here are a few ways that you can use Experience Cloud to collaborate with your stakeholders. - Have service providers manage their assigned programs and benefits, add benefit sessions, create disbursements, and track disbursements and attendance for the benefit participants. - Encourage volunteers to track attendance, create disbursements, and add participants or remove participants from a session. - Provide a way for beneficiaries to view and enroll in programs and benefits and access and review their assigned enrollments and case information. - Create a donor portal to see information related to gift commitments, refunds, soft credits, transactions, and tributes. Before you set up sites, talk to your account executive to make sure that you have the necessary Experience Cloud license, and review your permission sets to learn what Nonprofit Cloud objects are available in Experience Cloud. When you’re ready, you can [turn on and configure Experience Cloud in your org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&language=en_US). SEE ALSO - [Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_overview.htm&language=en_US) - [Manage Your Site’s Pages and Their Properties in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_manage_pages_overview.htm&language=en_US) # Nonprofit Cloud for Case Management Create Dynamic Assessments for the Program object. Use guided flows to split Party Relationship Groups and automatically update related records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[Use Dynamic Assessments with Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_cm_use_dynamic_assessments_with_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with dynamic assessments by creating them for programs. For example, create a questionnaire to evaluate program-level feedback and identify a trend based on the scores. - **[Split Party Relationship Groups Using a Guided Workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_cm_split_party_relationship_groups_using_a_guided_workflow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Move members, related contacts, groups, and business accounts from a party relationship group to another existing group or a new group using the Split workflow. Specify member roles and relationships and the relationships of related contacts, groups, and business accounts in the split group. Review related information such as cases and complaints associated with the original group, move required records to the split group, and create reminder tasks to review any records later. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Case Management New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_cm_new_and_changed_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new Case Management objects. # Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising provides new and easy ways to engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with tools for strategic planning and data-driven insights. Built on the secure and trusted foundation of Salesforce, Fundraising helps you increase operational efficiency, collaboration, and adoption of best-in-class practices. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[Complete Your Work Using a Convenient App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_complete_your_work_using_a_convenient_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising apps to perform common nonprofit responsibilities and tasks. - **[Log Gifts Singly and in Batches](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_log_gifts_singly_and_in_batches.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly log single gifts or batches of gifts for accounting and reporting purposes. - **[Create and Manage Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_create_and_manage_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create, manage, and track fundraising campaigns for your organization. - **[Create and Manage Gift Commitments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_create_and_manage_gift_commitments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create, schedule, manage, and track gift commitments for your organization. - **[Designate Gift Commitments and Gift Transactions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_designate_gift_commitments_and_gift_transactions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allocate commitments and transactions to specific or general funds or designations. - **[Support Your Donors by Responding Quickly to Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_support_your_donors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support your donors with fast action on their requests in the Donor Support console. Review the timeline for a quick view of the requests, such as for changing commitment schedules and pausing or resuming a commitment. - **[Provide Refunds to Donors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_provide_refunds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide full or partial refunds upon request. - **[New Objects and Fields in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_objects_and_fields_in_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising objects. - **[New Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Metadata Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising_metadata_type.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make the most of the new metadata type in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. - **[New Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising Connect APIs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising_connect_apis.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make the most of the new connect APIs in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. - **[New Invocable Actions in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising_invocable_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these new invocable actions in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. - **[New Flows for Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_flows_for_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these new flows in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. - **[New Lightning Web Components for Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_lightning_web_components_for_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these new Lightning web components in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising. # Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking Streamline the grant management process for both funders and applicants. Built on the Salesforce platform, Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking includes tools to give grants and manage your nonprofit work. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
Use Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking to: - Track organizations and people involved in grants and grant applications. - Create funding opportunities that include application details. - Manage reviews and approvals of grant applications and budgets. - Use with Experience Cloud to help grant seekers to learn about and apply for funding opportunities, submit budgets, and upload supporting documents. To learn more about Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking, see [Introduction to Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_learn_about_grantmaking.htm&language=en_US), or talk to your account executive. SEE ALSO - [Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.grmk_grantmaking.htm) - _Developer Documentation:_ [Grantmaking Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud_for_grantmaking_dev_guide.meta/nonprofit_cloud_for_grantmaking_dev_guide/) # Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking Grant recipients can enter their actual budget spent in an Experience Cloud site and grant makers can see their updates in real time within Salesforce. In orgs with strict ownership-based sharing, let users share Grantmaking objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions for customers with Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking. **Who:** To use Grantmaking, you must have the Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking license. **How:** Read about the new Grantmaking features in the Grantmaking release notes. SEE ALSO [_Release Notes:_ Grantmaking release notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_grantmaking.htm&release=246) # Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking Release Notes Introducing Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking! Manage the whole lifecycle of the grants you give to stakeholders. Add details about the opportunities people or organizations can apply for. Provide an easy way to enter details of a budget down to the values for each category and period. Capture all of the information related to a grant application. Track the requirements after a grant's awarded. Provide a Grantmaking Experience Cloud site for your grant managers, applicants, and external reviewers to enter details directly in your grant records. Plus, use Nonprofit Cloud features to manage other aspects of your organization. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Grantmaking is enabled. **When:** Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking is available in Nonprofit Cloud trial orgs. You can get a Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking license starting July 18, 2023. See Also: - [Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_grmk_grantmaking.htm&release=244) - [Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofit Cloud now harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to the full portfolio of innovative Salesforce products and services.") # Nonprofit Cloud for Outcome Management Outcome Management is a new industry-disrupting tool that defines, measures, and evaluates an organization's logic model or theory of change. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Outcome Management and Nonprofit Cloud are enabled. **How:** Assign the Outcome Management permission set to users or add the Manage Outcomes system permission to your permission sets or profiles. SEE ALSO [_Release Notes:_ Outcome Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_outcome_management.htm&release=246) # Nonprofit Cloud for Program Management Use the Participant Profile page to gain insights into your participant’s details. Use field sets to view additional benefit-specific details while tracking their attendance. With the enhanced workflow to add participants to a benefit schedule, you can now easily distinguish participants added to a schedule versus participants added to individual sessions. Remove benefit participants from a benefit schedule with the new API. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[Get a 360-Degree View of a Participant Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_get_a_360-degree_view_of_a_participant_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gain insights about a participant by using the new Participant Profile page, which can be accessed from an Account record. This page gives program managers a single place to view a participant's personal details, their upcoming and used benefit disbursements, interaction summaries, associated complaints and alerts, and more. - **[Track Additional Details for a Benefit Participant With Field Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_track_additional_details_for_a_benefit_participant_with_field_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review benefit-specific additional details while tracking participant attendance by using custom fields in field sets on the Benefit Disbursement object. For example, if you’re running a counseling session, you can capture additional details such as participants' mental health, any prior experience of attending such workshops, and so on. - **[Distinguish Benefit Schedule Participants from Benefit Session Participants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_distinguish_benefit_schedule_participants_from_benefit_session_participants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Benefit Schedule Assignment records to identify participants added to a benefit schedule. Program managers, service providers, and volunteers can use this information to distinguish between participants added to a benefit schedule versus a benefit session and to better plan logistics for a schedule. - **[Remove Participants from Every Benefit Session on a Benefit Schedule at Once](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_remove_participants_from_every_benefit_session_on_a_benefit_schedule_at_once.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can now remove participants from future benefit sessions in a benefit schedule by using the `Remove participants from schedule` API, and avoid the painstaking task of removing them individually from each benefit session. When you run the API, the participant's related Benefit Disbursement records are deleted, and the Benefit Schedule Assignment records are updated to indicate their participation end date for that benefit. - **[Expose Benefit Schedule Assignment to Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_expose_benefit_schedule_assignment_to_experience_cloud_site_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let external users, such as service providers, beneficiaries, and volunteers, access the new Benefit Schedule Assignment object along with other Program Management and Case Management objects in an Experience Cloud site. - **[Efficiently Collaborate with Stakeholders by Sharing Program-Related Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_efficiently_collaborate_with_stakeholders_using_manual_sharing_of_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program managers can now share Program and Program Enrollment records with selected users with the Share button on records. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Program Management New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_new_and_changed_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new and updated Program Management objects. - **[New and Changed Connect APIs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_pm_new_and_changed_connect_apis.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect REST APIs help customers, partners, and ISVs integrate with Salesforce software and UIs. # Nonprofit Cloud Migration and Implementation Guides Assess and plan your migration from Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) into Nonprofit Cloud, and your implementation of Nonprofit Cloud, Fundraising, and Program Management. These guides are intended for experienced Salesforce admins and consultants. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
## Nonprofit Cloud Migration Guide The migration guide helps you plan your move from Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) into Nonprofit Cloud Explore platform differences, migration recommendations, and how NPSP features map to Nonprofit Cloud. View or download the [Nonprofit Cloud Migration Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/pdf/Agentforce_Nonprofit_Migration_Guide_v2.pdf) PDF. ## Nonprofit Cloud Implementation Guide The implementation guide gives you an overview of the features and strategies that you need to know to set up Nonprofit Cloud. It shares important questions to ask yourself, best practices to follow, and tips for a successful implementation. View or download the [Nonprofit Cloud Implementation Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/pdf/NPC_Implementation_Guide.pdf) PDF. ## Fundraising Implementation Guide The Fundraising implementation guide covers how to plan and configure Fundraising in Nonprofit Cloud. It shows how to activate fundraising features, configure settings, and set up permissions and automations. The guide details core fundraising processes and objects, provides information on managing special gift types, and explains how to set up and use gift entry and apply RFM scoring for donor segmentation. View or download the [Fundraising Implementation Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/pdf/Fundraising_Implementation_Guide.pdf) PDF. ## Program Management Implementation Guide The Program Management implementation guide offers an overview of the features and implementation strategies of Nonprofit Cloud Program Management. Deploying Nonprofit Cloud for Programs involves translating your organization’s service model into a structured, reportable system rather than just performing a configuration routine. The sections in this guide assist implementers in making intentional choices that balance staff operational usability, reporting data integrity, and flexibility for future expansion. View or download the [Program Management Implementation Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/rel1/doc/en-us/static/pdf/Program_Management_Implementation_Guide_V1.pdf) PDF. # Nonprofit Cloud Program Management New and Changed Objects Do more with the new and updated Program Management objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. View all the benefit participants added to a benefit schedule Use the new BenefitScheduleAssignment object. View the benefit specific custom fields on the benefit disbursement object Use the new BnftDisbFieldSetApiName field on the Benefit object. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [_Developer Documentation_: Program Management Standard Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_pm_standard_objects.htm) # Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes Nonprofit Cloud now harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to the full portfolio of innovative Salesforce products and services. Within the Nonprofit Cloud sits Nonprofit Cloud for Programs. This collection of features includes versions of Program Management and Case Management, recreated to take advantage of everything the platform has to offer. Also included are Salesforce tools, such as Life Events, Actionable Relationship Center, Accounting Subledger, and Timeline, that help streamline your business processes. Nonprofit Cloud uses a different way to record people and their relationships: Person Accounts and Party Relationship Groups. Person Accounts let you record people not just as contacts on an account, but as accounts themselves and Party Relationship Groups let you draw connections between individuals, between organizations, or between individuals and organizations. All these things combine to help you eliminate paperwork, streamline processes, and spend more time working with participants to meet your mission. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. - **[Case Management for Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_cm_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Dynamic Assessments for Account, Contact, and Case objects. Use guided flows to track attendance. Preview your Care Plan Template before you publish it and use the Care Plan Summary View to see everything in one place. Set up your referral flow using easily accessible components. Use the Merge UI flow to combine Party Relationship Groups and automatically update related records. - **[Program Management for Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_program_management_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable program managers to efficiently manage their programs by using action plans. Use field-level security to restrict users’ access to view and edit specific fields. Get a comprehensive and chronological view of your program and benefit activities. Modify the benefit schedule workflow as per your business needs. - **[Add Accounting Subledger to Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_asl_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Introducing Accounting Subledger for Nonprofit Cloud! Consolidate data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated, with unparalleled performance. # Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes Nonprofit Cloud now harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to the full portfolio of innovative Salesforce products and services. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. With Nonprofit Cloud, you can also leverage the power of these features that were updated in the Winter '24 release: - [Actionable List Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_actionable_list_members.htm&language=en_us&release=246) - [Actionable Relationship Center (ARC)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_arc.htm&release=246) - [Actionable Segmentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_common_actionable_segmentation.htm&language=en_us&release=246) - [Batch Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_batch_management.htm&language=en_us&release=246&type=5) - [Business Rules Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_business_rules_engine_intro.htm&language=en_us&release=246&type=5) - [Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_data_processing_engine.htm&language=en_us&release=246&type=5) - [Service Process Studio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_spd_service_process_studio.htm&language=en_us&release=246&type=5) - [Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_timeline.htm&language=en_us&release=246&type=5) - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising provides new and easy ways to engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with tools for strategic planning and data-driven insights. Built on the secure and trusted foundation of Salesforce, Fundraising helps you increase operational efficiency, collaboration, and adoption of best-in-class practices. - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Program Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_program_management_release_notes_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Participant Profile page to gain insights into your participant’s details. Use field sets to view additional benefit-specific details while tracking their attendance. With the enhanced workflow to add participants to a benefit schedule, you can now easily distinguish participants added to a schedule versus participants added to individual sessions. Remove benefit participants from a benefit schedule with the new API. - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_cm_release_notes_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Dynamic Assessments for the Program object. Use guided flows to split Party Relationship Groups and automatically update related records. - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Outcome Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_outcome_management_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outcome Management is a new industry-disrupting tool that defines, measures, and evaluates an organization's logic model or theory of change. - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_grantmaking_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant recipients can enter their actual budget spent in an Experience Cloud site and grant makers can see their updates in real time within Salesforce. In orgs with strict ownership-based sharing, let users share Grantmaking objects. # Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes for Spring '23 The new Nonprofit Cloud harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to Salesforce's full portfolio of innovative products and services. Within the Nonprofit Cloud sits Nonprofit Cloud for Programs. This collection of features includes new versions of Program Management and Case Management, recreated to take advantage of everything the platform has to offer. Also included are Salesforce tools, such as Life Events, Actionable Relationship Center, and Timeline, that help streamline your business processes. And we're using a new way to record people and their relationships: Person Accounts and Party Relationship Groups. Person Accounts let you record people not just as contacts on an account, but as an account themselves and Party Relationship Groups let you draw connections between individuals, between organizations, or between individuals and organizations. All these things combine to help you eliminate paperwork, streamline processes, and spend more time working with participants to meet your mission. - **[Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_case_management_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Welcome to Case Management, reimagined! Built on the Salesforce platform, this next-generation product enables you to track and manage your cases and participants using efficient and streamlined tools. - **[Program Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_program_management_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Program Management, Salesforce offers an effective solution to define, plan, and deliver your nonprofit initiatives. Built on the Salesforce platform, this next-generation product enables you to track and manage your programs and the benefits they provide. # Nonprofit Cloud Setup Complete prerequisites for Nonprofit Cloud and turn on the features you want to use to manage fundraising, programs, case referrals, care plans, outcomes, and volunteers. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
To set up Nonprofit Cloud, configure foundational prerequisites, including Person Accounts, Data Pipelines, and Interaction Summaries. Establish security and permissions, set up Experience Cloud sites, and turn on the Industries shared features that you want to use. To enhance your experience, configure data model objects and integrate Slack channels for real-time communication. - **[Complete Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_prerequisites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you turn on and set up Nonprofit Cloud features, configure the basics for Nonprofit Cloud such as Person Accounts, Data Pipelines, Actionable Segmentation, Interaction Summaries, Interest Tags, Record Alerts, and Timeline. - **[Discover and Set Up Nonprofit Cloud Features with Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_salesforce_go.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore, set up and configure, and monitor usage of Nonprofit Cloud features in one streamlined setup location. - **[Turn On and Configure Nonprofit Cloud Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_enable_and_configure_nonprofit_cloud_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In your Nonprofit Cloud org, you can use any or all of the available features. As you set up each feature, learn about Industries shared features and how to use them for different types of roles. - **[Expand Object Capabilities in Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_expand_object_capabilities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your most-used Nonprofit Cloud objects now support standard Salesforce features, providing a more consistent and powerful user experience. Improve usability and operational efficiency by enabling path, kanban, and calendar for objects related to fundraising, program management, and volunteer management. - **[Security and Permissions for Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_nonprofit_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the permission sets included in Nonprofit Cloud and how to assign them to users. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Data Model Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_data_model_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This reference lists Nonprofit Cloud data model objects by category. To use Data 360 Data Governance features for Nonprofit Cloud, grant access to the impacted objects according to an access policy. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Experience Site Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_set_up_a_nonprofit_cloud_experience_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Collaborate with community users such as service providers, volunteers, and beneficiaries in Experience Cloud. - **[Slack Channels for Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_slack_channels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Integrate Nonprofit record pages with Slack channels for real-time collaboration. Communicate directly within a record page and keep all team members connected, because conversations are accessible in both Salesforce and Slack. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Migration and Implementation Guides](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_implementation_migration_guides.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assess and plan your migration from Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) into Nonprofit Cloud, and your implementation of Nonprofit Cloud, Fundraising, and Program Management. These guides are intended for experienced Salesforce admins and consultants. # Nonprofit Experience Manager App The Nonprofit Experience Manager provides tools for managing your Nonprofit Experience Cloud sites. - **[Nonprofit Experience Manager App Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Experience Manager provides tools for managing your Nonprofit Experience Cloud sites. - **[Install the Nonprofit Experience Manager App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_install_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install the app, along with its permission sets, and give your admins access to it. - **[Use the Nonprofit Experience Manager App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you've installed the app and set up user access, let's add communication and subscription management. - **[Manage Shared Components on Your Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_manage_shared_components_on_your_experience_cloud_sites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Shared components help you make your Experience Cloud site more useful for your admins and users. They do things like let users subscribe to your communications and capture contact information as the user enters it. # Nonprofit Experience Manager App Overview The Nonprofit Experience Manager provides tools for managing your Nonprofit Experience Cloud sites. - Use Contact Registration Mapping to set up mappings of registration fields to your contact fields so you can prevent duplicates. - Use Data Use Propose to set up communication types that Nonprofit Experience Cloud site users can subscribe to. For example, you might want to set up a monthly blog post that is emailed and an annual newsletter that is sent through the mail. The Nonprofit Experience Manager App also includes some shared Experience Cloud components for managing contact information and communication preferences. This feature is available to organizations that have Experience Cloud installed and have the Partner Community License. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_experience_manager_app-264-0-0-production-enus/054f9658-b8c6-4a0d-9bba-cbb49d333698/images/icon_note.png) Note This app doesn't support sites built with the Build Your Own (LWR) template. # Nonprofit Experience Manager Managed Package The Nonprofit Experience Manager managed package provides tools for managing your Nonprofit Experience Cloud sites. - **[Nonprofit Experience Manager App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Nonprofit Experience Manager provides tools for managing your Nonprofit Experience Cloud sites. # Nonprofit Program Management Example: School Kit Distribution Consider how an example nonprofit tracks the distribution of benefits as part of a
 school enrollment support program that helps prevent children from at-risk communities from
 dropping out of school. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud
Program Create a program named School Enrollment Support. Enter Program to support and encourage children from at-risk backgrounds as the summary, and set the program as active. Benefit Type & Unit of Measure To track this distribution of kits alongside the distribution of kits of other programs, create a benefit type named Distribution with Program Management as the process type and Goods as the type. Create a unit of measure named Kits. Program Enrollment Before the distribution event, add program enrollments for children who are already in Salesforce as contacts or accounts and set their status as Applied. Children from other localities who are visiting their family can be last-minute entries to the distribution activity. To prepare for these anonymous recipients, create an active and anonymous program enrollment record to associate with these disbursements. Program Cohorts Add the program enrollments for the children into a cohort named Sitka Area. After you add the disbursements for different distribution events, you can report on how the benefit is distributed across different cohorts. Benefit Create a benefit named School Kit Distribution, select **Distribution** as the benefit type, select **Kits** as the unit of measure, and set the benefit to Active. Benefit Disbursements On the day of the event, use New Ad Hoc Benefit Disbursement on the School Kit Distribution - Sitka Area benefit to track the kids that pick up their kits. Use the Program Enrollment recipient type for the children who you enrolled in the program. Use the Anonymous recipient type for children from other localities who aren't enrolled in the program. Salesforce creates benefit assignments and disbursements for each benefit participant. See Also - [Program and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt.htm) # Nonprofit Program Management Example: Youth Job Readiness Program Consider an example nonprofit that runs a job readiness program for young people to
 enhance their employment skills and make them career-ready. ## The Benefit Model The program is designed for those people who want to enhance their employment skills in a survey. The benefits are a series of classes, workshops, and coaching sessions. | Benefit | When | Duration | | --- | --- | --- | | Confidence building session | Weekly - Monday | 5 hours | | Resume writing workshop | Weekly - Friday | 8 hours | | Interviewing skills session | Weekly - Monday, Wednesday, Friday | 4 hours | | English language coaching | Daily - All weekdays | 5 hours | | MS Word hands-on training | Daily - All weekdays | 5 hours | ## Translation of the Program and Benefit Model to Salesforce Objects Program Create a program named Job Readiness. Enter Program for individuals to enhance their skills and apply for jobs as the summary, and set the program as active. Goal Definitions Create a hierarchy of goal definitions that demonstrate readiness for applying for jobs, interviewing, and getting hired. For the first goal definition, select Top Goal as the type. Name it Hired for Job, and enter Secure employment within three months as the description. Create two other goal definitions, Verbal and Written Communication Improvement and Technical Proficiency Improvement, both with Intermediate Goal as the type. Benefit, Benefit Type, and Unit of Measure To track these coaching or hands-on training benefits against similar benefits of other programs, create two benefit types named Coaching and Hands-On Training. For both benefit types, select **Program Management** as the process type and **Service** as the type. Create a unit of measure named Hours. Create benefit records for each class, workshop, and coaching session that make up the program and set each benefit as active. Participants and Program Cohort Members To select the individuals to be enrolled in the program, click **Add Participants** on the program. The Job Readiness program is run several times a year. Make sure that individuals in this group don’t slip through the cracks by creating a program cohort and adding them as program cohort members. Benefit Schedules, Benefit Sessions, and Participants On each benefit record, create a benefit schedule according to the recurring schedule. For example, for the resume writing workshop, create a benefit schedule that recurs every Friday and set the quantity to 8 because each workshop is eight hours long. When you add participants to each benefit schedule, Salesforce creates benefit assignments, benefit schedule assignments, and disbursements for each participant. The benefit disbursement reflects the benefit quantity from the associated benefit schedule and Salesforce sets the status as Enrolled for each participant. Care Plan Template Create a care plan template named Ready for Job Hunting. Use the Care Plan Template Benefit and Care Plan Template Goal related lists to add your job readiness benefits and goals to the template. Then, assign this care plan to the program participants. Benefit Disbursements Track the attendance for each session on the Attendance tab on the benefit session. Starting with the first resume writing workshop, edit the listview on the Attendance tab to update the status to Completed, Excused, or Absent. For a person who was excused or didn't attend, update the disbursed quantity to 0, because that individual didn't receive any of the eight hours of that day's benefit. After you save the attendance updates, Salesforce updates the corresponding disbursements for the participants. See Also - [Program and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt.htm&language=en_US) - [Assign Participants to Schedules and Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_benefits_manage_participants.htm&language=en_US) # Nonprofit Starter Pack (NPSP) - Legacy Documentation This page provides documentation for previous versions of the Nonprofit Starter Pack. Please be aware that Salesforce no longer supports these versions. The information in these documents may be incomplete or inaccurate. For information and documentation about the latest version of the Nonprofit Success Pack, visit the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 households documentation. - **[Contacts & Organizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 contact and organizations documentation. - **[Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 payments documentation. - **[Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 rollups documentation. - **[Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 Recurring Donations documentation. - **[Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 relationships documentation. - **[Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 affiliations overview. - **[Data Management / General Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 data management and general administration documentation. ## Households Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 households documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/households.zip) The archive contains these topics: - Households Interface - Household Naming - Controlling Who Gets a Household - Creating Households for Contacts without Households - Installing Households v2.4 ## Contacts & Organizations Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 contact and organizations documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/contacts.zip) The archive contains these topics: - What is an Account Model? - NPSP and Person Accounts - Lead Conversion - Working with Memberships - Merging Contacts - Changing Contacts & Organizations Settings - Updating to Contacts & Organizations Version 2.1 - Soft Credits - Controlling Household Member Opportunity Contact Roles ## Payments Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 payments documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/payments.zip) The archive contains these topics: - Working With Payments - Adding Payments to Existing Opportunities - Mapping Opportunity Fields to Payments ## Rollups Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 rollups documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/rollups.zip) The archive contains these topics: - How do Rollups Work? - Fiscal Year Rollups - Controlling Opportunity Rollups - Recalculating Opportunity Rollups - Troubleshooting Rollups - Understanding Rollup Errors - User Defined Rollups ## Recurring Donations Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 Recurring Donations documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/recurringdonations.zip) The archive contains these topics: - Creating New Recurring Donations - Editing Existing Recurring Donations - Deleting Existing Recurring Donations - Configuring & Understanding Recurring Donations General Settings - Working with Custom Labels in Recurring Donations - Configuring & Understanding Custom Field Mappings - Configuring & Understanding Custom Installment Periods - Recurring Donations 2.0 Features - Updating or Installing Recurring Donations 2.0 - Understanding the Batch Process & Updating Donations ## Relationships Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 relationships documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/relationships.zip) The archive contains these topics: - Relationships General Settings - Creating New Relationships - Auto-Created Relationships - Editing Existing Relationships - Relationships 2.0 Features - Installing or Updating to Relationships 2.0 - Relationships Advanced Configuration & Settings - Reciprocal Relationships & Gender Configuration - Using the Relationships Viewer ## Affiliations Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 affiliations overview. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/affiliations.zip) The archive contains these topics: - Affiliations Overview ## Data Management / General Administration Download the legacy NPSP 2.0 data management and general administration documentation. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/administration.zip) The archive contains these topics: - Uploading Opportunities - Finding Your Package Versions - Current Package Versions - Editing Custom Labels - Installing the NPSP from the Appexchange - Uninstalling the NPSP - Nonprofit Starter Pack Conversion # Nonprofit Starter Pack (NPSP) Documentation - Salesforce Classic Archive Organizations created from Trial starting November 9, 2016 and later use the Lightning user interface by default. This page provides an archive of documentation, written for the Salesforce Classic user interface, for NPSP versions 3.0 - 3.83. Please be aware that Salesforce.org does not maintain these versions of the docs, so the information may be incomplete or inaccurate. For information and documentation about the latest version of the Nonprofit Success Pack, visit the current Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[General Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for understanding what version of NPSP you're using and troubleshooting NPSP in the Classic interface. - **[Getting Started Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for importing donor data in the Classic interface. - **[Install and Upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for installing and upgrading NPSP in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Households, Organizations, Contacts, and Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing households, organizations, contacts, and addresses in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Opportunity Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download legacy NPSP documentation for managing donation opportunities in the Classic interface. - **[Constituent Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing engagement plans and levels in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing campaigns in the Classic interface. - **[Integration and General Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for customizing labels and exporting data in the Classic interface. ## General Information Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for understanding what version of NPSP you're using and troubleshooting NPSP in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/general_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Which Version of NPSP Am I Using? - Troubleshooting the Nonprofit Success Pack ## Getting Started Resources Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for importing donor data in the Classic interface. [Download archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/npsp_data_import.pdf) This archive contains these topics: - NPSP Administrator's Guide to Importing Donor Data ## Install and Upgrade Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for installing and upgrading NPSP in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/installupgrade_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Post-Install Checklist (for "Clean slate" organizations) - Enable New Features - Uninstall NPSP ## Manage Households, Organizations, Contacts, and Addresses Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing households, organizations, contacts, and addresses in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Household and Organization Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing household and organization accounts in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing contacts in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Relationships Between Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing relationships between contacts in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing addresses in the Classic interface. ### Manage Household and Organization Accounts Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing household and organization accounts in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/households_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - What is an Account Model? - Which Account Model Am I Using? - Customize Household Names - Merge or Split Households - Enable the Manage Household Button - Add and Manage Organization Accounts ### Manage Contacts Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing contacts in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/contacts_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Add or Remove a Contact - Change the Primary Contact for a Household - Mark a Contact as Do Not Contact or Deceased - Merge Contacts - Specify a Preferred Phone Number and Email Address for a Contact - Phone and Email Workflow Rules - Convert a Lead to a Contact - Primary Contact vs. Primary Affiliation ### Manage Relationships Between Contacts Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing relationships between contacts in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/relationships_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Create, Edit, and View Relationships - Manage Relationships Settings - Customize Gender Picklist Values for Relationships - Populate Contacts Automatically for New Relationships Viewer Contacts ### Manage Addresses Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing addresses in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/addresses_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Add or Update Addresses for a Household or Organization - Specify a Default Mailing Address for a Household or Organization - Override the Default Address for a Contact - Specify a Seasonal Address - Choose the Correct Address for Your Mailing Label Report ## Manage Opportunity Donations Download legacy NPSP documentation for managing donation opportunities in the Classic interface. - **[Add and Manage Donations and Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing donations, payments, GAU allocations, and acknowledgments in the Classic interface. - **[Create and Manage Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing recurring donations in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Opportunity (Donation) Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing donation rollups in the Classic interface. - **[Manage Soft Credits and Matching Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing soft credits and matching gifts in the Classic interface. - **[Add and Manage Special Gift Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.np_starter_pack_docs_salesforce_classic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing grants, memberships, tribute gifts, in-kind gifts, and major gifts in the Classic interface. ### Add and Manage Donations and Payments Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing donations, payments, GAU allocations, and acknowledgments in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/payments_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Donation Management Overview - Add a Single-Payment Donation - Manage Multiple-Payment Donations - Create and Manage Donation Allocations - Customize Opportunity (Donation) Names - Acknowledge Donations by Email ### Create and Manage Recurring Donations Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing recurring donations in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/recurringdonations_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Recurring Donations: Overview and Setup - Create a Recurring Donation - Change, Close, or Delete a Recurring Donation - Map Recurring Donation Fields to Custom Opportunity Fields - Create Custom Installment Periods for Recurring Donations ### Manage Opportunity (Donation) Rollups Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing donation rollups in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/rollups_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Opportunity (Donation) Rollups Overview - Set Fiscal Year Rollups - Troubleshoot Rollups ### Manage Soft Credits and Matching Gifts Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing soft credits and matching gifts in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/softcredits_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Soft Credits Overview - Soft Credit and Matching Gift Setup - Configure Soft Credit and Matching Gift Rollup Settings - Create Soft Credits - Work with Matching Gifts ### Add and Manage Special Gift Types Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing grants, memberships, tribute gifts, in-kind gifts, and major gifts in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/special_gift_types_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Create and Manage Grants - Create and Manage Memberships - Create Tribute Opportunities (Honor and Memorial Donations) - Create and Manage In-Kind Gifts - Major Gift Enhancements ## Constituent Engagement Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing engagement plans and levels in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/engagementplans_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Create and Manage Engagement Plans - Create and Manage Levels ## Manage Campaigns Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for managing campaigns in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/campaigns_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Create and Update Campaign Members Through an Opportunity ## Integration and General Administration Download the archive of legacy NPSP documentation for customizing labels and exporting data in the Classic interface. [Download zip archive](https://s3.amazonaws.com/npsp-legacy-docs/admin_classic.zip) This archive contains these topics: - Customizing Labels - Exporting Data with the Apex Data Loader # Nonprofit Success Pack (Managed Package) Release Notes Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is now more secure than ever thanks to several small updates. In addition, the GitHub release notes now direct users to the Salesforce release notes. And the French translation of "Ms." now aligns with the standard French abbreviation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the NPSP managed package is installed. # Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) Managed Package Raise funds and manage donors and donations with the Nonprofit Success Pack managed package. - **[Learn About NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_learn_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about Nonprofit Success Pack, how to get started, next steps, and the NPSP planning guide. - **[Get Started with Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_get_started_with_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you dig into your Salesforce trial, get acquainted with Salesforce terminology, your product(s), and the basics of using Salesforce. - **[Salesforce Fundamentals for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the various ways to get help learning and using NPSP. - **[NPSP Objects and Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the NPSP data schema in depth. - **[NPSP Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how NPSP is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage, performance, and adoption of various NPSP features. - **[NPSP Packaged Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_packaged_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A reference spreadsheet listing all packaged NPSP rollups with their operation description, target field, and calculation timing. - **[NPSP Workflow Diagrams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_workflow_diagrams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This guide is intended for database administrators, implementation partners, and third-party software developers, interested in the technical aspects of NPSP. This reference guide provides workflow diagrams and text descriptions for several automated NPSP processes. - **[NPSP Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_entity_relationship_diagram.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This diagram shows the relationship between NPSP custom objects and Salesforce standard objects for the Household Account Model. - **[Configure NPSP Installation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP, and configure your NPSP organization and features. Learn about advanced NPSP configurations and optional customizations. - **[NPSP Import Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_import_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to prepare your data for import, use the NPSP Data Importer template to import your data, and finalize the import. - **[Ongoing NPSP Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ongoing_administration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about advanced mapping, general administration, gift entry templates, recurring donations, and how to troubleshoot NPSP. - **[Manage NPSP Constituents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_constituents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage constituents in NPSP with Household and Organization Accounts, Contacts, and Addresses. - **[Manage Donations and Other Gift Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_opp_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage donation payments, gifts, and pledges. - **[Manage NPSP Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Management Module (PMM) is a simple program management tool designed to work in any Salesforce environment. Use PMM to track your organization's programs and services, and follow the journeys of the constituents involved with your programs. - **[NPSP Manage Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How Campaigns work in NPSP, managing mailing list labels, and setting up GAU Allocations on Campaigns. - **[NPSP Reporting and Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_reporting_and_analytics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage and customize reports. Best practices to ensure that your reports are well designed and reliable as well as how to leverage ready-made NPSP reports and Tableau dashboards. - **[GDPR for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about GDPR for NPSP. - **[Legacy NPSP Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Documentation for legacy NPSP features. # Nonprofit Success Pack and Translation This document provides a list of areas in the Nonprofit Success Pack that cannot or should not be translated. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for NPSP. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your NPSP product. - **[Translation Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're localizing your org on your own, keep in mind that there are some issues and considerations due to the nature of the NPSP package. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for NPSP."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for NPSP.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for NPSP. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, NPSP objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Hebrew | √ (partial) |   | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | ### Tableau Dashboard Starters for Nonprofits ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note These languages apply to the Fundraising Dashboard (included with NPSP) and Programs Dashboard (included with Case Management and PMM). | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ |   | | English (UK) | √ |   | | French | √ |   | | German | √ |   | | Japanese | √ |   | | Spanish | √ |   | ### Unsupported Languages If we don't support your preferred language, you can localize your org to enable that language for your global users. One option is to use the Translation Workbench to translate your text customizations and override labels and translations from managed packages. You can translate everything from custom picklist values to custom fields. For more information, see [Add Translated Languages and Translators](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.adding_and_editing_translated_languages.htm&type=5) and [Translate Custom Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.cl_translate_edit.htm&type=5). ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Nonprofit Success Pack - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/npsp/nonprofit_success_pack_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/npsp/nonprofit_success_pack_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/npsp/nonprofit_success_pack_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/npsp/nonprofit_success_pack_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/npsp/nonprofit_success_pack_pr_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your NPSP product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in NPSP: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. ## Translation Limitations If you're localizing your org on your own, keep in mind that there are some issues and considerations due to the nature of the NPSP package. Here is a list of "trouble areas" in NPSP that cannot or should not be translated. In each area, we provide details on the appropriate way to handle the situation, whether it's translating the items on your own, or leaving things as-is. As we update the product, where possible, we are working to address gaps that prevent NPSP from being fully translated. Legacy Recurring Donations You can translate picklist values specific to Frequency, but do not translate the custom labels associated with Recurring Donation frequency. If you choose to translate the Frequency picklist values, keep in mind that when users in your org enter recurring donations, the Status should always be `None` or `Open` (i.e. the translated value associated with those picklist options). If users choose the translated value of `Closed`, the donations aren't created properly on the Recurring Donations related list. This is a known issue we are working to address. Translating the values of the custom labels for Recurring Donation Frequency will break the behavior that schedules the upcoming donations, so no donations are created. These custom labels should never be translated. They are internal-facing only so users are not negatively impacted. Relationships Relationships in NPSP have functionality that automatically creates a reciprocal based on the list settings in the NPSP Settings tab. Because reciprocal relationships are not packageable, we can only include them in installs or new trial orgs but we can't push translations to these values. Be very careful when translating the value of the picklists for Relationships and remember to translate the values in the NPSP Settings tab as well. Users can create new values in NPSP Settings by clicking **Relationships** | **Relationship Reciprocal Settings** | **New Reciprocal Relationship** and creating new values to match translated ones. If picklist values are translated but the Setting is not created, relationship reciprocals will not be created correctly. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. Data Import Mapping ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note These restrictions apply only if you're using the Help Text method for mapping fields for the NPSP Data Importer; you can safely ignore this information if you're using Advanced Mapping. See [Map Custom Fields Using Help Text](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP legacy Help Text mapping allows you to reference additional fields on a small number of Salesforce objects through Help Text on the NPSP Data Import fields.") for more information. When users attempt to use the NPSP Data Importer and have translated the help text for the fields used within the NPSP Data Import object, the import process will fail. We recommend that you do not translate the help text for all fields on the NPSP Data Import object, as the help text on the NPSP Data Import object should be the Developer Name of the destination field. Household Naming Behind the scenes, NPSP uses some fields as it automatically names Household Account records and Household objects (if used). Translating these fields in the Translation Workbench will break the naming functionality: - PicklistValue.npo02\_\_Household\_\_c.npo02\_\_SYSTEM\_CUSTOM\_NAMING.Name - PicklistValue.Account.npo02\_\_SYSTEM\_CUSTOM\_NAMING.Name Other Picklist Values NPSP includes picklist values for Preferred Phone such as Home, Mobile, Work, etc. These values are referenced in Contact-specific workflow rules. If these values are translated, the workflow rules won't work. The workaround is to disable the NPSP workflow rules and create identical ones using the translated values. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The related workflow rules are off by default, so users may not experience any change in behavior when values are translated. The picklist values are: - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_PreferredPhone.Home - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_PreferredPhone.Mobile - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_PreferredPhone.Other - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_PreferredPhone.Work - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_Preferred\_Email.Alternate - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_Preferred\_Email.Personal - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_Preferred\_Email.Work There are additional picklist values available in Translation Workbench that are never surfaced to users. These shouldn't be translated so as to not break functionality: - PicklistValue.npsp\_\_Schedulable\_\_c.npsp\_\_Frequency.Daily - PicklistValue.npsp\_\_Schedulable\_\_c.npsp\_\_Frequency.Hourly - PicklistValue.npsp\_\_Schedulable\_\_c.npsp\_\_Frequency.Monthly - PicklistValue.npsp\_\_Schedulable\_\_c.npsp\_\_Frequency.Quarterly - PicklistValue.npsp\_\_Schedulable\_\_c.npsp\_\_Frequency.Weekly - PicklistValue.Contact.npe01\_\_SystemAccountProcessor.One-to-One - PicklistValue.Contact.npo02\_\_SystemHouseholdProcessor.All Individual Contacts - PicklistValue.Contact.npo02\_\_SystemHouseholdProcessor.All New or Edited Contacts - PicklistValue.Contact.npo02\_\_SystemHouseholdProcessor.No Contacts # Nonprofit Success Pack Release Notes Learn what's in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. ## Changes Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. ### Gift Entry Learn about the improvements for gift entry in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. - Users can now add Recurring Donations to a batch of Elevate gifts in Gift Entry. - We improved batch processing so that the processing icon doesn't display longer than necessary. - We fixed an issue with the Elevate field bundle not loading into Gift Entry in sandbox and scratch orgs that have Enhanced Domains enabled. ### Refunds Learn about the improvements for refunds in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. - Currency GAU Allocations are now converted to percentages when you initiate a partial refund. - NPSP now supports partial Refunds. Learn more in [Refund Donation Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.refund_donation_payments.htm). ### Recurring Donations When entering Recurring Donations in Gift Entry, users can indicate that the first installment is paid on the Batch Gift Entry form. ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. ### Gift Entry Field: Enable\_Gateway\_Assignment\_\_c # Nonprofit Success Pack Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Community Ideas Delivered](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Account and Contact Sustainer Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We added Sustainer fields for tracking the recurring donor status at the Account and Contact level. The Sustainer fields indicate if an Account or Contact is an active, lapsed, or former recurring donor. The value is based on the Status of the related Recurring Donations. - **[Accessibility Improvements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the accessibility improvements for in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Deceased Household Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We introduced a new feature to help you manage deceased Contacts. When the Deceased checkbox is selected on all Contacts within a Household, NPSP selects the All Members Deceased checkbox on the related Household Account. - **[Experience Cloud Donation Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We created two Experience Cloud components that you can add to your donor site to display your donor’s hard credit giving history. The Giving Summary component shows the total amounts for lifetime donations, donations made this year, and donations made the prior year. The Donation History component provides donation details including individual amounts and dates. These components don't support Multiple Currencies. - **[Guidance Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built new NPSP specific guidance so that admins of NPSP orgs can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. - **[Import or Enter Tribute Gifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We added tribute gift fields to Gift Entry and NPSP Data Importer. The new fields on the NPSP Data Import object map to the Tribute fields on the Opportunity. These fields also work with tributes on Elevate Giving Pages. - **[NPSP Data Importer Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for NPSP Data Importer in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Recurring Donation Status Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We added Recurring Donation Status automation settings in NPSP Settings so the Recurring Donation Status updates when a donor misses installment payments. - **[Relationships Viewer Tabular Mode](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We introduced a tabular view to Relationships Viewer in order to provide a version that is accessible to those who use screen readers. Tabular view is included in the current Relationships Viewer page, but you must enable it. - **[Fixes and Minor Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. ### Account and Contact Sustainer Fields We added Sustainer fields for tracking the recurring donor status at the Account and Contact level. The Sustainer fields indicate if an Account or Contact is an active, lapsed, or former recurring donor. The value is based on the Status of the related Recurring Donations. To enable the new fields: 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Account**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Find and click Sustainer. 5. Click **Set Field-Level Security**. 6. Select **Read-Only** for each profile where you want to allow read access. 7. Save the profile settings. 8. Click **Page Layouts**. 9. Select a page layout to edit. 10. Click-and-drag **Sustainer** onto the page layout. 11. Save the page layout. 12. Repeat these steps for the Contact object. ### Accessibility Improvements Learn about the accessibility improvements for in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - We added a label for "(opens in a new window)" to several Get Started with NPSP page components. - We made accessibility improvements for assistive tech users in Get Started with NPSP. - We made accessibility improvements for assistive tech users to Gift Entry. - To assist screen readers, we added image information to the Trailhead logo on the end user Get Started page. - We added aria text labels to checkboxes used on Get Started with NPSP pages. - We improved accessibility for GAU Allocations management in Gift Entry. - We updated the NPSP Contact Merge page to make a screen reader announcement when a user selects an empty field. - We improved the error messages on the edit Level page so they are more descriptive to screen readers. - We made all Contact Merge information accessible and accurate for keyboard-only users. - We made accessibility and error message improvements to the Engagement Plan template editor. ### Deceased Household Contacts We introduced a new feature to help you manage deceased Contacts. When the Deceased checkbox is selected on all Contacts within a Household, NPSP selects the All Members Deceased checkbox on the related Household Account. To make the All Household Members Deceased field visible for users: 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Account**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Find and click **All Household Members Deceased**. 5. Click **Set Field-Level Security**. 6. Select **Read-Only** for each profile where you want to allow read access. 7. Save the profile settings. 8. Click **Page Layouts**. 9. Click **Household Layout**. 10. Click-and-drag **All Household Members Deceased** onto the page layout. 11. Save the page layout. ### Experience Cloud Donation Components We created two Experience Cloud components that you can add to your donor site to display your donor’s hard credit giving history. The Giving Summary component shows the total amounts for lifetime donations, donations made this year, and donations made the prior year. The Donation History component provides donation details including individual amounts and dates. These components don't support Multiple Currencies. ### Guidance Center If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built new NPSP specific guidance so that admins of NPSP orgs can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. Learn more about [Guidance Center](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/guidance-center-quick-look). ### Import or Enter Tribute Gifts We added tribute gift fields to Gift Entry and NPSP Data Importer. The new fields on the NPSP Data Import object map to the Tribute fields on the Opportunity. These fields also work with tributes on Elevate Giving Pages. Update your users' permissions for the new fields and add these to your page layouts: - NPSP Data Import object: - Donation\_Honoree\_Information\_\_c - Donation\_Honoree\_Name\_\_c - Donation\_Notification\_Message\_\_c - Donation\_Notification\_Preference\_\_c - Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Email\_\_c - Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Info\_\_c - Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Name\_\_c - Donation\_Tribute\_Type\_\_c - Opportunity object: - Honoree\_Information\_\_c - Notification\_Recipient\_Email\_\_c - Tribute\_Notification\_Date\_\_c - Tribute\_Notification\_Status\_\_c ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note If you have existing NPSP Data Import fields and mappings for the Opportunity tribute fields, we recommend deleting your old fields and mappings and use the packaged ones instead. ### NPSP Data Importer Enhancements Learn about the improvements for NPSP Data Importer in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - In NPSP Data Importer we added the ability to process selected records in a list view. To use this new functionality, add the Import Selected Data Import Records button to your NPSP Data Import list views. - We improved how NPSP Data Importer handles Opportunity Stages. When you've not set an Opportunity Stage on the NPSP Data Import record, NPSP Data Importer uses the value in NPSP Settings for Opportunity Stage When Fully Paid. ### Recurring Donation Status Automation We added Recurring Donation Status automation settings in NPSP Settings so the Recurring Donation Status updates when a donor misses installment payments. To access the new settings, grant access to the npsp.RD2\_StatusAutomationSettings\_CTRL Apex class to your user profile. For more info see [Assign Apex Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm). Learn more about these settings in [Automate Recurring Donation Status Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_automate_rd_status.htm). ### Relationships Viewer Tabular Mode We introduced a tabular view to Relationships Viewer in order to provide a version that is accessible to those who use screen readers. Tabular view is included in the current Relationships Viewer page, but you must enable it. See [Manage Relationship Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm) for more information. ### Fixes and Minor Enhancements Review the fixes and minor enhancements in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - We removed the API connection in the legacy NPSP Getting Started page. Users who have this tab exposed will now see static links to our YouTube playlist and GitHub releases. - We fixed an issue where the Latest Start Date on an NPSP Address record was being reset to the current date whenever the record got updated. - We removed references and links to the Power of Us Hub and replaced them with links to the Trailblazer community. - To handle aborted/failed Gift Entry batches, we added a field `Latest Apex Job Id` to help track the status of batches. This new field is a system field and doesn't need to be visible to users. - We fixed an issue where some users were receiving a "Required fields are missing:Household\_Account\_\_c" or similar error when creating Contacts. - We fixed a scenario where inserting or updating a Contact with a Primary Address Type, but no Address fields, would unnecessarily create, then delete, an Address record. - We fixed an issue in Relationship Viewer where data couldn't be sorted by Name in an org with platform encryption enabled. - We addressed a potential security vulnerability in our delete Contact behavior. - We tightened security around access to NPSP Settings. - We fixed an issue where if a Recurring Donation was created using the NPSP Data Importer, and with a Campaign defined, but no initial Opportunity defined, NPSP still created an initial Opportunity. - When a user creates a Recurring Donation using the "New" button, NPSP redirects the user to the newly created record. - We fixed an issue with the Relationship Viewer page where users would receive a 404 error when clicking the "Re-center on this Contact" link . - We've fixed a bug where an Open Recurring Donation could be considered Completed if the Number of Planned and Number of Paid Installments were both set to zero. This situation only occurred when modifying a Recurring Donation outside of the standard user interface such as through the Data Loader or Developer Console. - We tightened up cross-site scripting security vulnerabilities in NPSP Settings pages. - Deleted field mappings are now excluded when the default Gift Entry template is generated. - In the Recurring Donations tab, we added a list view showing all Recurring Donations. The display columns are Amount, Installment Period, and Next Payment Date. - We fixed a bug when creating new Recurring Donations where the Installment Number does not show when Recurring Type is "Fixed" by default. - We fixed an issue where certain Elevate-connected Recurring Donations could not be updated from NPSP. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dl9wqaa&title=gift-entry-batches-with-batch-failures-or-aborted-batches-remain-in-a-perpetually-processing-state): Gift Entry Batches with Batch Failures or Aborted Batches Remain in a Perpetually Processing State - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dl9vqaa&title=default-primary-address-type-with-blank-address-fields-cause-blank-address-record-to-be-inserted-and-deleted): Default Primary Address Type with Blank Address Fields Cause Blank Address Record to be Inserted and Deleted - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000000phnuqaq&title=404-error-in-relationships-viewer-when-clicking-re-center-on-this-contact-link): 404 Error in Relationships Viewer When Clicking Re-Center on this Contact Link - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dlcpqai&title=enhanced-recurring-donations-a-non-null-value-in-number-planned-installments-for-an-open-ended-rd-causes-next-donation-date-to-be-null): Enhanced Recurring Donations—A non-null value in "Number Planned Installments" for an Open Ended RD causes Next Donation Date to be null - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dlc6qai&title=enhanced-recurring-donations-users-cannot-enter-number-of-planned-installments-when-defaulting-the-recurring-type-field-to-fixed): Enhanced Recurring Donations—Users cannot enter Number of Planned Installments when defaulting the Recurring Type field to Fixed - [Known Issue:](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/npsp/issues/6695) BDI/NPSP Data Import—Duplicate Opportunities when importing Recurring Donations with Campaigns via BDI - [Known Issue:](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000000qangqau&title=npsp-summer-22-customers-with-state-country-picklists-are-missing-state-and-country-values-on-new-account-and-address-records) Customers with State/Country Picklists Are Missing State and Country values on new Account and Address records - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000029kddqaq): Users receive an "Unknown Error" when trying to create or edit a Recurring Donation ## Community Ideas Delivered Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - [Idea delivered:](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000ge7a7uaj/elevate-ability-to-control-stage-for-closedwon-opportunity) Elevate - Ability to control stage for Closed/Won Opportunity - [Idea delivered:](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdkqyuab/indication-on-account-when-all-household-members-are-deceased) Indication on Account when all Household members are deceased ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Apex Classes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Apex classes in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Actions and Buttons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the actions and buttons in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new fields in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Visualforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Visualforce page in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Lightning Web Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Lightning web components in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Custom Setting Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new custom setting fields in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Field Mappings (custom metadata type records)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new field mappings in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - **[Aura Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new Aura components in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. ### Apex Classes Learn about the new Apex classes in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - SfdoInstrumentationService - SfdoInstrumentationService\_TEST - SfdoInstrumentationEnum - SfdoInstrumentationMock - RD2\_StatusAutomationSettings\_CTRL - RD2\_StatusAutomationSettings\_TEST - RD2\_StatusAutomationView - RD2\_StatusAutomationService - RD2\_StatusAutomationService\_TEST - RelationshipSelector - RelationshipsService - RelationshipsTreeGridController - RelationshipsTreeGrid\_TEST - GivingSummaryController - GivingSummaryController\_TEST ### Actions and Buttons Learn about the actions and buttons in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - Import Selected Data Import Records ### Fields Learn about the new fields in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - Account.Sustainer\_\_c - Account.All\_Members\_Deceased\_\_c - Contact.Sustainer\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Honoree\_Information\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Honoree\_Name\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Notification\_Message\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Notification\_Preference\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Email\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Info\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Name\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Donation\_Tribute\_Type\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Recurring\_Donation\_ACH\_Last\_4\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Recurring\_Donation\_Card\_Expiration\_Month\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Recurring\_Donation\_Card\_Expiration\_Year\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Recurring\_Donation\_Card\_Last\_4\_\_c - DataImport\_\_c.Recurring\_Donation\_Elevate\_Event\_Version\_\_c - DataImportBatch\_\_c.Latest\_Apex\_Job\_Id\_\_c - Opportunity.Honoree\_Information\_\_c - Opportunity.Notification\_Recipient\_Email\_\_c - Opportunity.Tribute\_Notification\_Date\_\_c - Opportunity.Tribute\_Notification\_Status\_\_c ### Visualforce Pages Learn about the new Visualforce page in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - STG\_PanelRDStatusAutomationSettings.page ### Lightning Web Components Learn about the new Lightning web components in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - rd2StatusAutomationSettings - relationshipsNavigator - relationshipsTreeGrid - givingSummary - givingSummaryDetailPage ### Custom Setting Fields Learn about the new custom setting fields in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donations\_Settings\_\_c.StatusAutomationClosedValue\_\_c - npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donations\_Settings\_\_c.StatusAutomationLapsedValue\_\_c - npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donations\_Settings\_\_c.StatusAutomationDaysForClosed\_\_c - npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donations\_Settings\_\_c.StatusAutomationDaysForLapsed\_\_c ### Field Mappings (custom metadata type records) Learn about the new field mappings in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - Recurring\_Donation\_ACH\_Last\_4 - Recurring\_Donation\_Card\_Expiration\_Month - Recurring\_Donation\_Card\_Expiration\_Year - Recurring\_Donation\_Card\_Last\_4 - Recurring\_Donation\_Elevate\_Event\_Version ### Aura Components Learn about the new Aura components in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer '22. - REL\_RelationshipsApp - REL\_RelationshipsContainer # Nonprofit Success Pack Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - **[Critical Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We've improved security of NPSP Settings by restricting access to Admins only. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - **[Features Intended for Future Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We added a couple of fields to the Payments object to support a future partial refund feature. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. ## Critical Changes We've improved security of NPSP Settings by restricting access to Admins only. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. ### Recurring Donations Enhancements Learn about the improvements for recurring donations in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - We added non-Elevate Recurring Donations to Gift Entry. Let your users enter batches of Recurring Donations by granting them Read and Edit access to the **Allow Recurring Donations** field on the NPSP Data Import Batches object. - We added the ability for donors to manage their Recurring Donations in the Experience Cloud Donor Portal. Learn more in [Add Experience Cloud Components to your Donor Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_add_experience_cloud_components_to_your_site.htm&type=5). - We added new settings that filter Recurring Donation Batch jobs, based on the number of days since the child Opportunities were modified. Learn more in [Override the N-Day Value](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_custom_rllps_jobs.htm&type=5&language=en_us#topic-2208) section of the _Batch Job Modes for Customizable Rollups_ article. ### Additional NPSP Enhancements Review additional enhancements in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - Users can now process full refunds in NPSP. For set up instructions, go to Set Up Refunds in the [Configure Opportunity Payments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&type=5) article. - We added a new Contact Duplicate Rules matching option for Batch Data Import that runs all active duplicate rules for the Contacts object that are managed in **Setup** | **Duplicate Management**. ### Other NPSP Improvements Review other enhancements in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - NPSP now supports Brazilian Portuguese. - We improved security around Contact Merge. - We improved security around Customizable Rollups. - We fixed an issue where encrypted fields blocked push upgrades to the NPSP Summer '22 release (NPSP 3.217). - We now support Multiple Currencies in the Donation History and Giving Summary components for the Experience Cloud Donor Portal. ## Features Intended for Future Release We added a couple of fields to the Payments object to support a future partial refund feature. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. ### Gift Entry Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23 for gift entry. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dleoqay): Error if Account1 is Donor Type to update open Household Opportunity. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000029konqai): Field permission error persists after correcting the field level permission. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002ibswqaq): Unable to Access Gift Entry Form or Create/Edit/Clone Templates when Lightning Web Security is Enabled. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000029kriqai): Unable to load Batch for Users with certain Locales. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002iuerqam): Attempting to Change GAU Allocation on Existing Gift with Default GAU, Fails Batch, but Updates Gift. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000002dldeqay): Editing Default GAU Allocations on Existing Gifts Causes Error in Gift Entry. ### Other Issues Closed Learn about other issues that we fixed in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000001cqhrqam): NPSP Data Importer—Utilizing "Import Selected Data Import Records" button to Import Data Import Records results in SOQL Error and Failure. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000029kwnqai): Recurring Donations—The Recurring Donation Pause API cannot be called from a custom Apex class. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v00000214jpqaa): Experience Cloud Donor Portal—Giving Summary Component displays totals as $ amounts for non-$-based customers. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000001nuivqaa): SFDO Accounting Subledger—$0 Opportunity with $0 Allocations causes Divide by Zero Error. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000029kcyqaa): The "Notification Receipient Email" field (npsp\_\_Notification\_Recipient\_Email\_\_c) on Opportunity is misspelled as "Notification Receipient Email" ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. ### Fields Learn about the new fields in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - npe01\_\_OppPayment\_\_c.npsp\_\_OriginalPayment\_\_c - npe01\_\_OppPayment\_\_c.npsp\_\_DebitType\_\_c - npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donations\_Settings\_\_c.npsp\_\_ExcludeClosedRecurringDonations\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImportBatch\_\_c.npsp\_\_Allow\_Recurring\_Donations\_\_c - npsp\_\_Customizable\_Rollup\_Settings\_\_c.npsp\_\_LimitRecalculatedRecurringDonations\_\_c - npsp\_\_Customizable\_Rollup\_Settings\_\_c.npsp\_\_RecurringDonationLastNDays\_\_c - npsp\_\_Gift\_Entry\_Settings\_\_c.npsp\_\_Enable\_Recurring\_Donations\_in\_Gift\_Entry\_\_c ### Lightning Web Components Learn about the new Lightning web components in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - geRecurringGiftInfo - geModalRecurringDonation - rd2RecurringDonation - refundPayment - stopRecurringDonationModal - utilInlineText ### Apex Classes Learn about the new Apex classes in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - BDI\_ContactService\_TEST - BDI\_Donations\_TEST3 - GE\_SettingsService - GiftBatchForQueueable\_TEST - GiftBatchForQueueable - GiftsSelectorForProcessing\_TEST - GiftsSelectorForProcessing - PMT\_ValidationService\_TEST - PMT\_ValidationService - PMT\_RefundService\_TEST - PMT\_RefundService - PMT\_RefundController\_TEST - PMT\_RefundController - PaymentSelector\_TEST - PaymentSelector - RD2\_ERecurringDonationsSelector\_TEST - RD2\_ERecurringDonationsSelector - RD2\_ETableController\_TEST - RD2\_ETableController - UTIL\_DuplicateMgmt\_TEST - UTIL\_DuplicateMgmt ### Action Learn about the new action in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - Refund on Payments ### Visualforce Component Learn about the new Visualforce component in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - InsufficientPermissions # NPSP Advanced Options Advanced NPSP Data Import options including scheduling import batches or using code to customize the import. - **[Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching. - **[Batch Import Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_import_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The ability to import data in batches can be very useful. Batch Data Import allows you to have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options (instead of using the default settings). - **[Create a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** First, you need to define the configuration that will be used on only a selected set of records. To illustrate an example, we will create a batch for the upcoming event (that we mentioned earlier). - **[Create NPSP Data Import Records Connected to a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_batch_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create a batch, upload your data import file to create the data import records for the batch. - **[Process an NPSP Data Import Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_batch_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to process a batch using NPSP Data Importer and what the different batch statuses mean. - **[Schedule a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_schedule_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you'll be regularly uploading files, you don't want to worry about manually processing them. This is really useful for cases like the upcoming event signup example, where you have signups coming in at different times, and you want to regularly upload the new signups. - **[Additional Automation Using Custom Apex Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automation_apex_code.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about additional automation. - **[Import More Than Two Contacts to a Household at Once](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_import_more_than_two_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here's how to import more than two contacts to the same household at once. # NPSP Constituent Engagement Use Engagement Plans and NPSP Levels to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management, and track your constituents' level of engagement with your organization. - **[Create and Manage Engagement Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Engagement Plans to automatically create a series of predefined tasks to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management. - **[Create and Manage Levels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.create_and_manage_levels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP Levels give you a way to track a constituent's level of commitment and engagement based on criteria such as total gifts or number of hours volunteered. Create and manage NPSP Levels based on your organization's practices. # NPSP Data Importer Templates Use these templates to import your data into Salesforce using the NPSP Data Importer object. The Data Import Templates are Excel spreadsheets, but can be used with any preferred spreadsheet application. The templates are intended to be used in conjunction with the NPSP Data Importer. See the [How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about the import process.") for more details on how to use the template to import your data. Download (in Excel format): - [Accounts and Contact Import](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1f54JAjRGaodDDik3PqXP4f1xFNbyk4gV/edit?gid=1429531853#gid=1429531853) - [Donation Import (Individuals)](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1iZvQUlvcvSOyTkl9D9DYMPKqIjC5XobE/edit?gid=556904427#gid=556904427) - [Donation Import (Organizations)](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1xatDWK64pJrlhKG4zaHIA2HJSwrJqmzQ/edit?gid=1406685518#gid=1406685518) - [Recurring Donations Import](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/13xAXX0jJZRle6koHcMJ9KVF6B4RPQROl/edit?gid=1131710261#gid=1131710261) (see [Recurring Donations Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about managing sustainer donations with Recurring Donations in NPSP.")) Learn more about these templates in [Using NPSP Data Import Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_using_di_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Start here to learn how to use the NPSP Data Import Templates for your imports.") and in [Clean and Format Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn to clean and format your data prior to importing it into Salesforce. Improperly formatted data causes errors during import."). # NPSP Data Loader Introduction Assess if you're ready to import your data using NPSP Data Loader. Learn how the import process works and how NPSP Data Importer processes data. - **[Are You Ready to Import Data into NPSP?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_are_you_ready.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what it takes to import data from a spreadsheet into the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about the import process. - **[How NPSP Data Importer Processes Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_di_works.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use NPSP Data Importer for regular data import and custom integrations. It's also the engine that powers Gift Entry and Elevate. # NPSP Data Management Best Practices Improve data quality and learn data management best practices with these documentation articles and videos. ![NPSP Data Management Best Practices](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/data_management_best_practices_header.png) - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data management is central to any organization's success with Salesforce. Making sure your data is accurate and actionable can help take your organization to the next level. - **[Build a Data Management Strategy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Having a clear data strategy is the first step in taking control of your data. A strategy helps your team align on how data will be collected, reviewed, and used to drive your organization's goals. - **[Improve Data Quality with Data Entry Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Gift Entry tool in Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) provides a standardized way to enter gifts, which helps with both efficiency and data quality. Discover how it helps using these resources. - **[Improve Data Quality with Data Import Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring existing data into Salesforce to include existing records in your tracking and reporting. - **[Best Practices for Maintaining Clean Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clean data will help your team develop trust in your Salesforce instance, create actionable reports, and track progress toward goals. These best practices will help you keep your data clean. - **[Go Further with Data Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_mgmt_bp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these resources to get additional guidance, connect with Salesforce experts, and blaze your trail with data management. ## Introduction Data management is central to any organization's success with Salesforce. Making sure your data is accurate and actionable can help take your organization to the next level. In this guide, we share a mix of resources—from documentation to videos and everything in between—all designed by Salesforce experts to help you take control of your data. ## Build a Data Management Strategy Having a clear data strategy is the first step in taking control of your data. A strategy helps your team align on how data will be collected, reviewed, and used to drive your organization's goals. [**Data Quality**](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/data_quality) —Complete this Trailhead module to explore how you can assess the quality of your data and develop data standards defined in a typical management plan. ## Improve Data Quality with Data Entry Tools The Gift Entry tool in Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) provides a standardized way to enter gifts, which helps with both efficiency and data quality. Discover how it helps using these resources. **[Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time.")** —Review this documentation for information on how to enter gifts into NPSP using Gift Entry. Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: **[Create Gift Entry Batches](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bWFEcKeMwlg)** —Imagine you have a stack of checks to enter into NPSP. You can create a Gift Entry batch to help streamline your gift entry process and group them together. This video shows you how. Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [**Enter Gifts Into Gift Entry Batches**](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SZBkJjc0TZc) —Now imagine you need to enter the stack of checks into the batch. Learn how to add gifts using Gift Entry batches in this video. ## Improve Data Quality with Data Import Tools Bring existing data into Salesforce to include existing records in your tracking and reporting. [**Salesforce for Nonprofits Data Import Tool Overview**](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/ys7bqzqparjcfd5uxxzwxr?) —Check out the many tools you can use to import existing data into Salesforce and NPSP. [**Get Your Data Into NPSP**](https://cs.salesforce.com/events/7013y000000zkcgaac) —Learn how to get your data into Salesforce using the three basic tools: NPSP Data Importer, Gift Entry, and Data Loader. ### NPSP Data Importer [**NPSP Data Importer**](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/import-your-data-using-npsp-data-importer) —Imagine you have a spreadsheet of gifts from new and existing donors to enter into Salesforce. By using NPSP Data Importer—a tool included in NPSP—you can import the spreadsheet using a single file. NPSP Data Importer does the hard work of creating new records or matching and updating existing contacts and accounts. In this Trailhead project, we show you how with step-by-step instructions. [**Extend NPSP Data Importer with Advanced Mapping**](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/projects/extend-npsp-data-importer-with-advanced-mapping?trail_id=import-data-with-nonprofit-success-pack-npsp) —Your spreadsheet of donors and gifts also has information about donors' language preferences, which is a custom field on the contact record for your organization. NPSP Data Importer's advanced mapping settings enable you to import this information. This Trailhead project teaches you how to import custom fields using NPSP Data Importer. ### Salesforce Platform, AppExchange, and Other Data Import Tools [**Use the Data Import Wizard**](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/projects/import-and-export-with-data-management-tools/use-the-data-import-wizard) —The Data Import Wizard is a browser-based tool included in Salesforce. It's convenient when you need to import or update records of objects not supported by NPSP Data Importer. For example, you could use the Data Import Wizard to create program and service records for Program Management Module and later import workshop attendance records. Even better, you can find the Data Import Wizard in Setup and there's nothing to install. This Trailhead unit gives you the basics. Watch the Salesforce for Nonprofits How-To Series video: [**How to Import Tasks or Events into Current Records**](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Uo8Umt3DnKY&list=plfnbzmunjid5y-mnz6b9oqvnd6b_h3c-w&index=11) —Data Loader is a powerful tool for bulk importing, updating, exporting, and deleting data for any Salesforce object. For example, you can use the Data Loader to import a spreadsheet of tasks to assign for an upcoming fundraising event. You can also use Data Loader to archive stale campaign member records as part of your data management strategy. Watch this video to see how to use Data Loader to import tasks and events into an existing event. [**Salesforce AppExchange**](https://appexchange.salesforce.com/) —Check out the AppExchange if you want a data import tool with more bells and whistles such as a graphical user interface, automatic backups, and data transformation scenarios. ## Best Practices for Maintaining Clean Data Clean data will help your team develop trust in your Salesforce instance, create actionable reports, and track progress toward goals. These best practices will help you keep your data clean. [**Duplicate Management**](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/sales_admin_duplicate_management?trailmix_creator_id=sfdo&trailmix_slug=getting-started-import-your-data) —This Trailhead module offers a full overview of how to resolve and prevent duplicate data in Salesforce. [**Prevent Duplicates in Nonprofit Success Pack**](https://cs.salesforce.com/portraits/aCe3y000000bmmgCAA) —If your organization has a Premier Success Plan, you can request an individual expert coaching session to get personal guidance on how to prevent duplicates. ## Go Further with Data Management Use these resources to get additional guidance, connect with Salesforce experts, and blaze your trail with data management. [**Ask an Expert**](https://cs.salesforce.com/search#q=npsp&tab=coaching) —Get answers to your data management questions in a live session with an NPSP expert when you have the Premier Success Plan. [**Explore Success Events**](https://cs.salesforce.com/search#q=npsp&tab=events) —Check out the full list of upcoming and recorded NPSP Customer Success online events. # NPSP Donation Rollups Learn about legacy NPSP donation rollup summaries and how to add single-payment donations. - **[Add a Single-Payment Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_a_single-payment_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter one-off donations for individuals or organizations into NPSP. - **[NPSP Out-of-Box Donation Rollups (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Nonprofit Success Pack, rollups are tallies of donations from different Opportunity records. - **[User Defined Rollups (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the basics of legacy user defined rollups. Create a user defined rollup and use formula fields to include or exclude fields in your rollups calculations. # NPSP Entity Relationship Diagram This diagram shows the relationship between NPSP custom objects and Salesforce standard objects for the Household Account Model. [NPSP Entity Relationship Diagram](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/nonprofit-success-pack.html) # NPSP FAQ Answers to common questions about NPSP, its limitations, and how it works for international nonprofits. - **[General](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers about the basics of NPSP, how to get started, and how to troubleshoot issues. - **[Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Answers to questions about NPSP and person accounts, state and country picklists, and gift entry. - **[International Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Answers to questions about using NPSP outside of the US, with currency exchange rates, and in context of particular national rules. ## General Get answers about the basics of NPSP, how to get started, and how to troubleshoot issues. - **[What is NPSP?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is a series of managed packages, installed on top of Salesforce Enterprise Edition. The packages of NPSP make it easier for you to use Salesforce to manage the core relationships between individual donors, their households, and the companies they work for. - **[Is Nonprofit Success Pack an Open Source Project?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack is an open-source, BSD-licensed package. Developer contributions and involvement are welcome and encouraged. - **[What's the best place to get started with NPSP?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Go to Trailhead to learn about NPSP and how you can use it to manage donors and donations. It's interactive, informative, and fun. - **[Where can I find documentation, discussions, and a place to make feature suggestions?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start with the Trailblazer community and product documentation. - **[Where can I find information on troubleshooting NPSP issues?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check the troubleshooting section of NPSP documentation. ### What is NPSP? Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is a series of managed packages, installed on top of Salesforce Enterprise Edition. The packages of NPSP make it easier for you to use Salesforce to manage the core relationships between individual donors, their households, and the companies they work for. You can install NPSP in one of the following ways: - [Sign up for a trial version](https://www.salesforce.org/nonprofit/get-started/) of NPSP (which gives you Salesforce Enterprise Edition with NPSP pre-installed). This is the easiest way and is the method recommended by Salesforce.org. - Install NPSP on top of an already existing organization that uses Salesforce Enterprise Edition. ### Is Nonprofit Success Pack an Open Source Project? Nonprofit Success Pack is an open-source, BSD-licensed package. Developer contributions and involvement are welcome and encouraged. Salesforce.org hosts all packages and source code on [GitHub](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/cumulus) using git. You can find all code as well as tags, issues lists, and release notes in the code repository. You can find contributor instructions on the [Salesforce.org GitHub wiki](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/cumulus/wiki). ### What's the best place to get started with NPSP? Go to Trailhead to learn about NPSP and how you can use it to manage donors and donations. It's interactive, informative, and fun. Start by completing the [Begin with Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/trails/begin-with-nonprofit-success-pack) trail. ### Where can I find documentation, discussions, and a place to make feature suggestions? Start with the Trailblazer community and product documentation. Visit our [online Nonprofit Hub community](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f9300000001ocxcaa) for all of Salesforce's nonprofit organizations (whether or not you use NPSP). There are discussion groups, links to learning materials, and much more. Your Salesforce login will get you access. Also, be sure to check out the [NPSP documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack.htm). ### Where can I find information on troubleshooting NPSP issues? Check the troubleshooting section of NPSP documentation. We've compiled a list of common issues in [Troubleshoot the Nonprofit Success Pack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand how to resolve common configuration issues in NPSP and where to look for additional help."). ## Limitations Answers to questions about NPSP and person accounts, state and country picklists, and gift entry. - **[NPSP and Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Person accounts were designed for Business-to-Business organizations that work with individuals. Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. - **[State and Country Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** State and Country Picklists let users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists, instead of entering state and country data into text fields. State and Country Picklists help protect data integrity by preventing typos, alternate spellings, and junk data. - **[Statement on Batch Data Entry and Legacy Batch Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As of October 1, 2020, Batch Data Entry, is no longer supported, and as of July 13, 2021, legacy Batch Gift Entry is no longer supported. If you have any in-progress batches, you can still access those records, but you can't process them using these retired tools. Consider Gift Entry as an alternative to Batch Data Entry and legacy Batch Gift Entry. ### NPSP and Person Accounts Person accounts were designed for Business-to-Business organizations that work with individuals. Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. To completely remove Person Accounts, you need to apply for a new Salesforce organization and request a license transfer. You will then need to migrate existing data from your current system to the new Salesforce org. Ask your Account Executive for help with this process. For some orgs, turning Person Accounts off isn't an option. While NPSP and Person Accounts don't work together, here are some things you can do to help them coexist: - Make sure that the Person Account record type is not selected as the Household record type in NPSP Settings - If you're planning to do lead conversion, make sure that the Person Account record type isn't set as the default record type for the profile of the user who is converting the lead. ### State and Country Picklists State and Country Picklists let users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists, instead of entering state and country data into text fields. State and Country Picklists help protect data integrity by preventing typos, alternate spellings, and junk data. See ​ [Let Users Select State and Country from Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_state_country_picklists_overview.htm&type=5) ​ to learn how to set up and configure this feature. Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) supports State and Country Picklists with some limitations: 1. **Does not support default Country value**. Configuring a default Country value can cause an error if you select a Country that isn't the default. 2. **Must use predefined State and Country abbreviations on Address records**. On Address records, use the same abbreviations for State and Country as defined in the State and Country Picklists configuration. NPSP will write the full name of the State and Country on related Accounts and Contacts. For example, if you use both US and WA on the Address record you get United States and Washington on the Account and Contact records. If you use alternate spellings, NPSP will display an error. 3. **Does not support State and Country abbreviations on Manage Households page and Data Import object**. On the Manage Households page and the Data Import object, use only the full name of State and Country. There is no support for abbreviations. 4. **Does not support State and Country abbreviations in Gift Entry.** All state and province codes are displayed without the dependency to their countries. ### Statement on Batch Data Entry and Legacy Batch Gift Entry As of October 1, 2020, Batch Data Entry, is no longer supported, and as of July 13, 2021, legacy Batch Gift Entry is no longer supported. If you have any in-progress batches, you can still access those records, but you can't process them using these retired tools. Consider Gift Entry as an alternative to Batch Data Entry and legacy Batch Gift Entry. Learn more in [Configure Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your NPSP Salesforce org to add or edit donations and related information in one entry form."). Gift Entry is an NPSP feature that gives users an accurate, fast, and flexible way to enter batch and single gifts. It's designed to help users who struggle to enter large volumes of gifts in a consistent way and spend too much time ensuring that complex gifts have the right attributions. - Enter the full gift details on one form instead of creating an Opportunity and then adding related information such as Payments and GAU Allocations. Learn more in [Enter Gifts in Gift Entry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enter_gifts_in_ge.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enter donations, donors, and their related records in one form as a batch or one at a time."). - Set up different Gift Entry Templates so your users have the fields they need when entering different types of gifts. Learn more in [Create or Edit a Gift Entry Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to create or customize Gift Entry templates to fit your donation management needs."). - Set a field as required when you add it to a template. - Define field defaults at the template level or within each batch of gifts. We're continuously building on and enhancing Gift Entry and NPSP Data Importer. Let us know how these tools are working for you in the [Data Import](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f9300000009rouca2?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) and [Gift Entry](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khi3sae?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) Trailblazer Community groups. ## International Nonprofits Answers to questions about using NPSP outside of the US, with currency exchange rates, and in context of particular national rules. - **[Can I use NPSP in countries outside the U.S.?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce supports many languages and currencies. There are a few details to be aware of though. Currently, if a user sets their language to something other than English, all of Salesforce will appear in that language except for custom fields and NPSP-specific fields, buttons, etc. - **[So, can I use dated exchange rates?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use dated exchange rates within Advanced Currency Management (ACM), but only with Customizable Rollups. Legacy NPSP rollups will continue to use the default exchange rate by currency even if ACM is enabled. - **[Does NPSP support Gift Aid (UK)?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At this time there is not native functionality to support Gift Aid in the UK. However, some Salesforce partners in the UK have developed apps to handle Gift Aid. - **[Does NPSP support SEPA?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Single Euro Payment Area (SEPA) refers to electronic payment processing in the European Union. At this time NPSP does not have on-platform payment processing, so it does not support SEPA. - **[Does NPSP support Canadian tax receipts?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Out of the box, NPSP does not have functionality to address Canadian receipts. There are, however, customizations built by a variety of providers. ### Can I use NPSP in countries outside the U.S.? Salesforce supports many languages and currencies. There are a few details to be aware of though. Currently, if a user sets their language to something other than English, all of Salesforce will appear in that language except for custom fields and NPSP-specific fields, buttons, etc. The Nonprofit Success Pack provides out-of-the-box translations for Spanish, French, German, Japanese, and Dutch. Portions of NPSP are also translated for Hebrew. This does not mean that a customer or partner could not translate all the fields, but it would be time-consuming. There may be consulting firms or partners in other countries who have done translations for other languages, but they are not included in the standard NPSP configuration at this time. If you're planning to translate on your own, please read [Nonprofit Success Pack and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This document provides a list of areas in the Nonprofit Success Pack that cannot or should not be translated.") first, as there are some areas of NPSP that can't be translated. Users in countries outside the U.S. are able to set their default currency as something other than USD without a problem. Users can also enable multi-currency (MC) to allow entry of Opportunities (and any currency field) to display the currency of the org or the local currency of the user. This option only supports a single one time rate. Additionally, [Advanced Currency Management](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=administration_about_advanced_currency_management.htm) (ACM) is supported for use with NPSP as of May 2018 (version 3.129). But please keep in mind that dated exchange rates will only work with your rollups if you [enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them.") ; dated exchange rates aren't supported for use with legacy NPSP rollups. There are also a few important limitations to note if you decide to use ACM with NPSP: - If you have ACM enabled and experience issues trying to install or upgrade NPSP, or find that your version of NPSP has fallen behind current, the ACM integration may be the issue. We recommend temporarily disabling ACM and manually installing the [latest NPSP package](https://install.salesforce.org/products/npsp/3.156/install). You will not lose any ACM configurations that you set up while ACM was enabled; when you turn ACM back on, everything will go back to the way it was working before you disabled. We recommend you do this during off hours when you don’t need to process transactions. - There are four Opportunity fields that don't work when ACM is enabled: Payment Writeoff Amount, Number of Payments, Payments Made, Remaining Balance. ### So, can I use dated exchange rates? You can use dated exchange rates within Advanced Currency Management (ACM), but only with Customizable Rollups. Legacy NPSP rollups will continue to use the default exchange rate by currency even if ACM is enabled. Dated exchange rates are described in more detail [here](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=administration_about_advanced_currency_management.htm&language=en_US). Once you [enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them.") , go to Setup and [turn on Advanced Currency Management](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=administration_enable_advanced_currency_management.htm). You then need to go to NPSP Settings and indicate that you want to use dated exchange rates by setting the **Use Dated Conversion Rates if available** checkbox in NPSP Settings | Bulk Data Processes | Batch Process Settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Please note that we currently have no way of knowing if Advanced Currency Management is enabled and then disabled. So, even if you disable ACM, certain areas of NPSP code will function as if you have Advanced Currency Management enabled. This is due to a [Salesforce Known Issue](https://success.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p3a0000017yarqay). For more information on how this affects NPSP, see [Issue #4450 on GitHub](https://github.com/SalesforceFoundation/NPSP/issues/4450). ### Does NPSP support Gift Aid (UK)? At this time there is not native functionality to support Gift Aid in the UK. However, some Salesforce partners in the UK have developed apps to handle Gift Aid. Follow the [Nonprofit User Group, London, UK](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f9300000001onkcay?tab=) to learn more about these options. ### Does NPSP support SEPA? Single Euro Payment Area (SEPA) refers to electronic payment processing in the European Union. At this time NPSP does not have on-platform payment processing, so it does not support SEPA. However, any payment processor or donation/giving platform that supports SEPA could conceivably integrate with NPSP. ### Does NPSP support Canadian tax receipts? Out of the box, NPSP does not have functionality to address Canadian receipts. There are, however, customizations built by a variety of providers. Search the Trailblazer Community for further details. # NPSP Feature Telemetry NPSP Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how NPSP is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage, performance, and adoption of various NPSP features. **No personally identifiable information is collected through NPSP Feature Telemetry**. We use this data to compile metrics about feature enablement, component enablement, record counts, page load time, Apex code execution, and more. We currently collect the following data points. ## System Settings - Is the Household Account Model enabled - Is Customizable Rollups enabled - Is Automatic Payments enabled - Is Default GAU enabled - Is Advanced Mapping enabled - Is Address Verification enabled - Is Advanced Currency Management in use - Is Gift Entry enabled - Count of Non-English Languages in use - Is Enhanced Recurring Donations enabled - Is Payment Allocations enabled _(Payment Allocations is available for GEM users and isn't yet supported for use in other NPSP production orgs.)_ ## Donations - Count of all Recurring Donation related Opportunities - Count of all Open-Ended Recurring Donation related Opportunities - Count of Recurring Donations with at least one Opportunity where the amount differs from the Recurring Donation amount - Count of all Recurring Donations - Enhanced Recurring Donations upgrade status (recorded as a number indicating not upgraded, partially upgraded, or fully upgraded) - Count of NPSP Data Import records attached to Batch Gift Entry batches within the last 30 days - Count of NPSP Data Import records attached to Gift Entry batches within the last 30 days - Count of Opportunities with Multiple Payments - Maximum Number of Opportunities associated with a single Account ## System Performance - Count of NPSP Data Import records created within the last 30 days - Count of NPSP Error Log Records - Count of NPSP batch jobs that failed with a TIME\_OUT error within the last 7 days - Count (in minutes) of the NPSP batch job with the longest execution time within the last 7 days - Are Custom TDTM Trigger Handlers in use ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Data about whether Customizable Rollups are enabled is collected when you enable or disable Customizable Rollups in NPSP Settings. To give you a better picture of what the data looks like, here’s a sample telemetry record: ![A Feature Parameter record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/feature-parameter-record.png) For information about your privacy and how feature management works, read: - [Salesforce.Org Privacy Policy](https://www.salesforce.org/legal-information/privacy-policy/) - [Salesforce Feature Management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingguide.meta/packagingguide/fma_manage_features.htm) # NPSP Gift Entry Templates Find out more about NPSP gift entry templates. - **[Default Gift Entry Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_default_ge_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about the gift entry template. - **[Create or Edit a Gift Entry Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_ge_create_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create or customize Gift Entry templates to fit your donation management needs. # NPSP Import Data Learn how to prepare your data for import, use the NPSP Data Importer template to import your data, and finalize the import. - **[NPSP Data Loader Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_data_loader.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assess if you're ready to import your data using NPSP Data Loader. Learn how the import process works and how NPSP Data Importer processes data. - **[Prepare NPSP Data for Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_prepare_data_for_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get a copy of the NPSP data import templates, learn how to use them, and some tips on cleaning your data to prepare for importing. - **[NPSP Import DI Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_import_di_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The steps for getting data into the NPSP Data Import object. After this, you'll have NPSP Data Loader process the import to your target objects. - **[Finalize NPSP Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_finalize_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Dry Run to verify the records you want to import, process the import, troubleshoot common import errors, and delete import records after you're done with them. - **[NPSP Advanced Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_advanced_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advanced NPSP Data Import options including scheduling import batches or using code to customize the import. # NPSP Import DI Object The steps for getting data into the NPSP Data Import object. After this, you'll have NPSP Data Loader process the import to your target objects. - **[Do a Trial Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_do_trial_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By running a test import, you can ensure that you resolve all your data integrity issues before importing your entire set of records. A trial run of 15-20 records (rows in your template) is a good test size. - **[Upload Data from the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer. - **[Verify Data Upload](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure the data from your template uploaded successfully to the NPSP Data Import custom object. # NPSP Logic for Creating Opportunity Contact Roles Learn what NPSP automation for creating soft credits takes precedence when multiple automated processes are involved. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Opportunity Contact Roles Logic](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ycdyYj11aME). Since there are many ways to automatically create Opportunity Contact Roles and soft credits in NPSP, you may have situations where more than one automated soft credit rule applies. For example, John and Sally may be Household members, and may also have a Relationship record to track that they're siblings. If Sally makes a donation, depending on how you've configured soft credits in NPSP Settings and fields on the Relationship record, John may be eligible for both a Household member soft credit _and_ a soft credit based on his Relationship record with Sally. It would get confusing to have multiple contact roles for the same Contact on the same Opportunity. So NPSP cleverly creates just one. But how does it determine which one to create? For example, if the same Contact is listed as both the Honoree and Notification Recipient, how does NPSP decide which role to go with and which to ignore? The answer, dear friends, lies in this prioritized list: ## Order of Precedence for Contact Roles 1. Primary Contact 2. Honoree Contact 3. Notification Recipient 4. Affiliated Contact (organizational gift) or Related Contact (individual gift) 5. Household Member (individual gifts only) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Individual gift means Opportunities related to a Household, One-to-One, or Individual Account. Organizational gifts means Opportunities related to an Account that is _not_ a Household, One-to-One, or Individual Account. What the above list means is that if Bob Blackman is listed as both the Honoree Contact and the Notification Recipient on an Opportunity, NPSP will create only an Honoree Contact Role for Bob, since Honoree is higher up the chain than Notification Recipient. On a different Opportunity, if Bob is listed as the Notification Recipient and is also an Affiliated Contact, NPSP creates a Notification Recipient contact role for Bob. Or, if there's an Opportunity where Bob is the related Contact on a Relationship record with the Primary Contact, and Bob is also the Primary Contact's Household Member, NPSP creates the Contact Role based on the Relationship. ## Where does the Role value come from? For most of the Opportunity Contact Roles, NPSP gets the role value from NPSP Settings. For affiliated contact and related contact Opportunity Contact Roles, NPSP gets the role value from fields on the Affiliation or Relationship record, as shown: | Role Creation Based On | Where Role Value is Configured | NPSP Setting or Field Name | Individual or Organizational Opp | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Primary Contact | NPSP Settings | Contact Role for Organizational Opps | Organizational | | Primary Contact | NPSP Settings | Contact Role for Individual Opps | Individual | | Honoree Contact | NPSP Settings | Honoree Opportunity Contact Role | both | | Notification Recipient | NPSP Settings | Notification Recipient Contact Role | both | | Affiliated Contact | Affiliation record | Related Opportunity Contact Role | Organizational | | Related Contact | Relationship record | Related Opportunity Contact Role | Individual | | Household Member | NPSP Settings | Household Member Contact Role | Individual | ## Putting It All Together Let's look at some specific scenarios to see how all of this works. ## Scenario Overview **NPSP Settings configuration**: - Contact Role for Organizational Opps = "Influencer" - Contact Role for Individual Opps = "Donor" - Honoree Opportunity Contact Role = "Honoree" - Notification Recipient Contact Role = "Notification Contact" - Household Member Contact Role = "Household Member" **Relationships and Affiliations**: - Rufus is Trayvon's brother. They live in the same Household. The Relationship record's Related Opportunity Contact Role field has a value of "Soft Credit." - Trayvon has an Affiliation record with the Paws Animal Shelter Account. The Related Opportunity Contact Role field on the Affiliation record has a value of "Solicitor."
Scenario NPSP Creates This Opportunity Contact Role Explanation
Rufus makes a donation to your organization. On the Opportunity, he is also listed as the Honoree Contact.

Contact = Rufus

Role = Donor

 This is an Individual Opportunity (donation came from an individual, Rufus), and the Primary Contact role takes precedence over Honoree Contact.
Paws Animal Shelter makes a gift to your organization. Trayvon is listed as the Primary Contact on the Opportunity. He is also listed as the Notification Recipient.

Contact = Trayvon

Role = Influencer

 This is an Organizational Opportunity (gift is from an organization). The Primary Contact role takes precedence over the Notification Recipient.
Paws Animal Shelter makes a gift to your organization. There is no Primary Contact listed on the Opportunity.

Contact = Trayvon

Role = Solicitor

 This is an Organizational Opportunity (gift is from an organization). Since Trayvon has an Affiliation record with the organization, NPSP creates the OCR based on the Affiliation record.
Trayvon makes a gift to your organization.

Contact = Trayvon

Role = Donor

and

Contact = Rufus

Role = Soft Credit

 Trayvon gets the Primary Contact role since he made an individual gift, and Rufus is Trayvon's Household Member and brother, but Roles configured on the Relationship take precedence over Household Member roles.
# NPSP Manage Campaigns How Campaigns work in NPSP, managing mailing list labels, and setting up GAU Allocations on Campaigns. - **[What are Campaigns and How Do They Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofits use Campaigns to plan and track fundraising appeals, solicitations, events, advocacy campaigns, and other outreach activities. - **[Create Deduplicated Mailing Lists from a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_mailing_lists_from_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Although we live in the digital age, direct mail remains an important part of fundraising and outreach activities. But sending materials through the mail isn't exactly cheap and you really don't want to send the same piece of mail more than once to a given address. Donors want to see that your organization is effective and streamlined, and doesn't waste dollars on sending unnecessary mailings. - **[Generate Labels for Direct Mail—For Organizations Or Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_choose_correct_add_for_mailing_label_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Generate mailing labels for Household or Organization addresses. - **[Campaigns for Fundraising Implementation Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_campaign_guide.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This guide is intended to help nonprofit administrators plan and implement Campaigns and Campaign hierarchies to support fundraising. Learn how Campaigns can be used to track fundraising appeals, event invitations, and key performance metrics. - **[Create Allocations for Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_allocs_for_campaigns.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about creating allocations for campaigns. # NPSP Objects and Relationships This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the NPSP data schema in depth. View [NPSP Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/nonprofit-success-pack.html) for a list of objects and their relationships. # NPSP Out-of-Box Donation Rollups (Legacy) In the Nonprofit Success Pack, rollups are tallies of donations from different Opportunity records. - **[What Are NPSP Out-of-Box Rollups and How Do They Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes approximately 87 out-of-box rollups. These rollups are all based on the Opportunity Amount and Opportunity Close Date, and calculate Opportunities with a Closed/Won stage. - **[Rollup Fields on Accounts and Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The following sections on the Account and Contact objects contain information from their related Opportunities. - **[When Are Opportunity Rollups Updated?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Rollup values on a specific Account or Contact are re-tallied when key fields are updated on related Opportunities such as Amount, Stage, and Close Date. In addition, rollup values are recalculated nightly to ensure accuracy. ## What Are NPSP Out-of-Box Rollups and How Do They Work? NPSP includes approximately 87 out-of-box rollups. These rollups are all based on the Opportunity Amount and Opportunity Close Date, and calculate Opportunities with a Closed/Won stage. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This topic is specific to the NPSP out-of-box rollups and provides information on how they work. To find out more about Customizable Rollups and User Defined Rollups (the other rollup options available in NPSP), see the [Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically \"roll up\" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records."). These rollup fields appear on Accounts, Contacts, Households, Recurring Donations, and General Accounting Units, and display aggregated totals based on their related Opportunities. ![Conceptual image showing how rollup fields work](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/opp_rollups_oview_diagram.png) In the Nonprofit Success Pack, Account and Contact records include several rollup fields that display totals based on their related Opportunities: - Membership Information - Total Gifts - Soft Credits - Household Donations - Donation Statistics This image shows the Opportunity Rollups for an Organization Account. Most fields with totaled values are rollup fields that show us aggregated values from related Opportunity records. ![Donation Totals section showing calculated sums for Total Gifts and Total Number of Gifts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/opp_rollups_oview_donationtotals.png) Notice the Donation Totals section includes a Total Number of Gifts (eight Opportunities) and a Total Gifts amount of $2700. To determine the exact Opportunities and their details for this rollup, you would need to examine this Account and look at all the related Opportunities for the details. The rollup, however, gives you very useful aggregate information about all Opportunities. ## Rollup Fields on Accounts and Contacts The following sections on the Account and Contact objects contain information from their related Opportunities. - **[Donation Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This section shows useful statistics and gives you a quick, high-level overview about donations (Opportunities) associated with a particular Account. - **[Donation Totals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This section gives you running totals of donations received from this Account over different periods of time. For example, you can see the Donation totals from this year, the previous year, and from two years ago. You can also configure a custom period. - **[Membership Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This section contains the rollup information if your organization uses memberships. - **[Additional Rollup Information on Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to these sections, Contact records also include rollup information about soft credits as well as Household donation information, which is a rollup of the total donations made by everyone else in the household. Soft credits, and the contact roles responsible for creating them, are a major though complicated feature in Nonprofit Success Pack. ### Donation Information This section shows useful statistics and gives you a quick, high-level overview about donations (Opportunities) associated with a particular Account. You'll find information about donation dates, the average, largest, and smallest donation amounts, and so on. ### Donation Totals This section gives you running totals of donations received from this Account over different periods of time. For example, you can see the Donation totals from this year, the previous year, and from two years ago. You can also configure a custom period. In Total Gifts Last N Days, N can be set to a period of your choice; the default setting is 365 days. Where you set the value of _N_ depends on whether you're using Customizable Rollups, or one of the older, legacy types of rollups. See the instructions below for the type of rollups configured in your org. Customizable Rollups: 1. Click the NPSP Settings tab in the Nonprofit Success Pack. If you don't see NPSP Settings, you can find it from the App Launcher. 2. Select **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups** . 4. Find the rollup whose N day value you want to edit, and click ![Down arrow used to indicate that there are more menu options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Edit the value in the Days Back field. ![Customizable Rollup with the Days Back field highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/opp_rollups_oview_crlp_nday.png) 6. Click **Save**. Legacy Rollups (User Defined Rollups, out-of-the-box rollups): 1. Click the NPSP Settings tab in the Nonprofit Success Pack. If you don't see NPSP Settings, you can find it from the App Launcher. 2. Select **Donations** | **Donor Statistics**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This option will not be available if you're using Customizable Rollups. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Specify a different number of days for the **Rollup N Day Value**. ![Rollup N Day Value field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/opp_rollups_oview_rollupndayval.png) 5. Click **Save**. ### Membership Information This section contains the rollup information if your organization uses memberships. For more information, see [Create and Manage Memberships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_memberships.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Memberships in Nonprofit Success Pack represent an individual or household giving a donation to join a group or organization, much like a subscription. Learn how to create and manage memberships with Nonprofit Success Pack."). ### Additional Rollup Information on Contacts In addition to these sections, Contact records also include rollup information about soft credits as well as Household donation information, which is a rollup of the total donations made by everyone else in the household. Soft credits, and the contact roles responsible for creating them, are a major though complicated feature in Nonprofit Success Pack. To learn more, see [Soft Credits Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Consider rollup fields read only (and if you are the administrator for your organization, we recommend setting them as read only on page layouts). Salesforce administrators can still edit rollup fields in place, but any edits you make to these fields are overwritten when rollups are recalculated. ## When Are Opportunity Rollups Updated? Rollup values on a specific Account or Contact are re-tallied when key fields are updated on related Opportunities such as Amount, Stage, and Close Date. In addition, rollup values are recalculated nightly to ensure accuracy. You can also choose to run the rollup nightly operation (called a “batch operation” because it tallies fields for multiple records at once) at any time. For more information, see [Run Rollup Donations Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_process_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes scheduled batch jobs that are designed to calculate rollups and keep your data clean. Run any of these jobs manually if you need to perform these tasks before the next scheduled run of the batch job."). # NPSP Packaged Rollups A reference spreadsheet listing all packaged NPSP rollups with their operation description, target field, and calculation timing. The NPSP packaged rollups spreadsheet contains reference information about all the packaged NPSP rollups. This resource is intended for administrators and developers. Your org's custom rollups aren't listed in this spreadsheet. [NPSP Packaged Rollups](https://salesforce.quip.com/FJZAAdH0sKF7) (Quip spreadsheet) # NPSP Recurring Donation Administration Learn how to customize Recurring Donation forms, automatic functionality, mapping to Opportunities, how to use the API, and more. - **[Add Custom Fields to the Recurring Donation Entry Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_custom_fields_to_rd_entry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP provides an entry form for Recurring Donations. Add your custom Recurring Donation fields to the entry form. - **[Automate Recurring Donation Status Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automate_rd_status.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automate Recurring Donation Status changes when donors miss installment payments. - **[Automatic Recurring Donations Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automatic_rd_naming.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP provides an automatic naming convention for Recurring Donations. Learn how to customize it. - **[Change the Number of Installments Displayed in the Upcoming Installments Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_number_of_installments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To adjust the number of installments shown in Upcoming Installments, edit the record page and adjust the component settings. - **[Import Recurring Donations and Installment Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_import_rd2_and_opps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to bring existing recurring gift data into NPSP. - **[Map Custom Recurring Donation Status Values to a State](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_status_to_state.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create custom picklist values for Recurring Donation Status, map them to a State so that NPSP can process records with those custom Status values. - **[Map Recurring Donation Fields to Custom Opportunity Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_recurring_donation_fields_to_opp_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to map fields from Recurring Donation records to Opportunity records, so that NPSP copies the data to each new installment Opportunity. - **[Improve Recurring Donations Batch Processing Speed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.improve_recurring_donations_batch_processing_speed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reduce batch processing time by excluding closed Recurring Donations. - **[Recurring Donations Installments API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rd_installments_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Write Apex to query information about Recurring Donation Installments using the Installments API. - **[Recurring Donations Pause API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rd_pause_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Write Apex code to pause a Recurring Donation programmatically using the Pause API. - **[Recurring Donations Schedules API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rd_schedules_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Write Apex to access information about the Recurring Donation Schedule object using the Schedules API. # NPSP Reporting and Analytics Learn how to manage and customize reports. Best practices to ensure that your reports are well designed and reliable as well as how to leverage ready-made NPSP reports and Tableau dashboards. - **[How to Manage Reports: A Guide for Admins](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_how_to_manage_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to administer NPSP reports, ensure reliable reports, and improve the user experience. - **[Deluxe Custom Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_deluxe_custom_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to customize NPSP reports, includes an example report scenario. - **[NPSP Reports Workbook](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_reports_workbook.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This guide introduces nonprofit administrators to the NPSP reports and demonstrates how you can customize the reports to meet your organization's needs. - **[Tableau with NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tableau Dashboards for Nonprofit Fundraising combine the power of NPSP and Tableau, providing three ready-made dashboards for insights on your revenue, donors, campaigns, and more. # NPSP Reports Workbook This guide introduces nonprofit administrators to the NPSP reports and demonstrates how you can customize the reports to meet your organization's needs. Reports provide answers to questions. A well-designed report can answer frequently asked questions, such as: - Who donated last year but hasn't yet this year? - Who are our top 25 donors? - Which members are due for renewal next quarter? To get started, review Audience and Prerequisites, the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series [video](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jvb127CGkT0), and download the [Reports Workbook](https://sfdo-docs.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/npsp_reports.pdf) PDF file. ## Audience and Prerequisites You should have some familiarity with the Nonprofit Success Pack, Salesforce, and Salesforce reports before attempting to step through this guide. If you haven't already done so, we recommend that you complete the [Nonprofit Fundraising Trail](https://developer.salesforce.com/trailhead/trail/nonprofit_fundraising) and the [Reports & Dashboards](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/modules/lex_implementation_reports_dashboards) Trailhead Module before proceeding. # NPSP Troubleshooting Troubleshoot challenges with NPSP features, view common errors, interpret health check issues, and learn about account models. - **[View NPSP Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_view_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the error log in NPSP settings to learn more about issues in your org. - **[Common Health Check Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about errors you can encounter when you run a health check on your NPSP org. - **[Which Account Model Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_account_model_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article explains how to identify your Account Model, and which fields to analyze when troubleshooting Household Account record issues. # NPSP Workflow Diagrams This guide is intended for database administrators, implementation partners, and third-party software developers, interested in the technical aspects of NPSP. This reference guide provides workflow diagrams and text descriptions for several automated NPSP processes. [NPSP Workflow Diagrams](https://sfdo-docs.s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/npsp_workflow_diagrams.pdf) (in PDF format) # Object Models for Accounting Sets Accounting sets enable you to specify which objects and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. It's a flexible approach that lets you map your financial data model to a logical data model, supporting from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
All object models require similar data, but depending on the model that you choose, the source field that contains the required data varies. For details about mapping source fields to accounting set fields, including which source object contains the source field in each object model, see [Map Your Source Data to Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_map_your_source_data_to_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Choose which source record fields to use for transaction journal records generation by mapping them to accounting set fields."). - **[One-Object Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The one-object model offers the greatest flexibility. Use it to create your own all-in-one custom or standard object that incorporates all relevant information within a single record, without using an object hierarchy. - **[Two-Object Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The two-object model is similar to the one-object model, except that it expects the fund account information to be on a separate, related record. - **[Three-Object Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The purpose of the other two objects in this model is to allow for splitting between one or more funds via an allocation object. - **[Four-Object Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_object_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The four-object model accommodates complex structures with multiple payments or expenses rolling up to a single record. ## One-Object Model The one-object model offers the greatest flexibility. Use it to create your own all-in-one custom or standard object that incorporates all relevant information within a single record, without using an object hierarchy. ![Diagram of the primary object in the one-object model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_oneobject.png) Best used when: All required information about a financial transaction, including the fund information, is on the primary object, and each record is related to a single fund. ## Two-Object Model The two-object model is similar to the one-object model, except that it expects the fund account information to be on a separate, related record. The primary object contains all the other required data about a financial transaction; it's designed to look up to the fund account record (shown in this diagram as the fund object). ![Relationship diagram of the primary object and fund object in the two-object model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_twoobject.png) The two-object model allows the fund information to be shared across records. For example, if you have a fund named Athletics Scholarships Fund, instead of repeating this information on each record, you can reference a single record containing the fund information. Any transaction journal records generated use the fund information from the related record. Another common example is a general expenses account. Best used when: All required financial information, except for the fund information, is on the primary object, and the fund information is on a single record related by a lookup to the primary object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note If you use multi-currency, specify the same currency for the primary and secondary objects. Otherwise, Accounting Subledger could generate inaccurate transaction journal records. ## Three-Object Model The purpose of the other two objects in this model is to allow for splitting between one or more funds via an allocation object. Like the two-object model, most of the information in the three-object model is on the primary object record. The secondary object looks up to a specific fund object record and specifies the amount allocated to that fund. ![Diagram of the three-object model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_threeobject.png) Best used when: You have a single transaction that you sometimes want to split by multiple funds. All required financial information, except for the fund information, is on the primary object. The secondary object represents an allocation—including its amount—to a specific fund. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note If you use multi-currency, specify the same currency for a given primary object record and all of its related records. Otherwise, Accounting Subledger could generate inaccurate transaction journal records. ## Four-Object Model The four-object model accommodates complex structures with multiple payments or expenses rolling up to a single record. In a four-object model, the primary object represents a summary of the overall financial commitment. The secondary object represents the individual transactions. The four-object model has fund allocations for the secondary object. The tertiary object, representing these allocations, specifies both an amount for the allocation and the fund that it's allocated to. The fund object represents a fund account record. ![Diagram of the four-object model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/asl_fourobject.png) Best used when: A complex record structure rolls up to a single primary object parent record, with multiple related payment types split across one or more fund accounts. For example, your institution manages donations as groups of related transactions, such as recurring gifts, or pledges broken down into installments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note If you use multi-currency, specify the same currency for a given primary object record and all of its related records. Otherwise, Accounting Subledger could generate inaccurate transaction journal records. # OFM Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds Understand the differences between Grants Management and Outbound Funds Module so that you can choose the best product for your organization. - **[Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_compare_gms_with_ofm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds Module (OFM) is a free, open-source product that helps organizations track, manage, and deliver funds. OFM is also the foundation of Salesforce Grants Management (GMS), a paid product that helps grantmakers simplify and accelerate their grantmaking. ## Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds Module Outbound Funds Module (OFM) is a free, open-source product that helps organizations track, manage, and deliver funds. OFM is also the foundation of Salesforce Grants Management (GMS), a paid product that helps grantmakers simplify and accelerate their grantmaking. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note This article was written by Pierre Kaluzny, Judy Otto, Nick Lindberg, Catherine Zheng, and Melissa Barber at the October 2021 Open Source Community Sprint. Use this table to compare the different features available in OFM and GMS. Work with your Salesforce Account Executive to learn more about which one is best for your organization. For more information. see [Outbound Funds Module (OFM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ofm_meet.htm) and [Grants Management (GMS)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_overview.htm). | Feature | Description | OFM | GMS | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Grants Portal | Create an Experience Cloud portal for external users. | √\* | √ | | Basic Application Flow Template | Automate how an application is collected on your portal. | √ | √ | | Enhanced Application Flow Templates | Provide multi-screen forms and allow users to save and return to their grant applications. |   | √ | | Organization Self-Registration | Give grantseekers the ability to register in your portal and update their organization information. |   | √ | | Application Mapping | Connect an application to a specific Funding Program. |   | √ | | Invite-Only Applications | Invite an applicant to apply to a private funding opportunity. |   | √ | | Manage Collaborators | Invite other portal users to collaborate on Funding Requests. |   | √ | | Tax Status Check | Verify a nonprofit's tax status with GuideStar. |   | √ | | Action Plans | Use Salesforce Action Plans to standardize due diligence. |   | √ | | Internal Review | Capture review status and comments on a Review record. | √ | √ | | External Review | Review applications in your Experience Cloud portal. |   | √ | | Review Workspace | Configurable, single-screen view of an application's details and attachments. |   | √ | | Manage Disbursements | Ability to schedule and track Disbursement details against a Funding Request. | √ | √ | | Manage Expenditures | Link a Disbursement to an existing General Accounting Unit. | √\*\* | √\*\* | | Budget Management | Create budgets and monitor funds that are committed or disbursed. |   | √ | | Requirements Management | Capture details about grantee requirements such as type, due date, and status. | √ | √ | | Multiple Contacts for a Funding Request | Relate multiple contacts to a Funding Request. | √ | √ | | Reporting and Analytics | Reports included in the product to get you started. | √ | √ | \* Requires Experience Cloud licenses. \*\* Requires Nonprofit Success Pack. # OFM Create the Portal Learn how to create a fundseeker portal by using Experience Cloud. - **[Create the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a fundseeker portal using the Fundseeker Starter Portal site template. ## Create the Portal Create a fundseeker portal using the Fundseeker Starter Portal site template. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note If you used either of the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installers to create a fundseeker portal, you will also need an Enterprise Edition or Sales Cloud or Service Cloud and Customer Community Plus Login licenses. Reach out to your Salesforce account executive to learn more. This is a preconfigured Experience Builder template that can be customized to fit your organization’s needs and branding. Your fundseeker portal is where you can communicate your organization’s mission and available funding opportunities, and where fundseekers can learn about your organization, view and apply to Funding Programs, and manage their applications. If you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site_ installer, a fundseeker portal called Fundseeker Portal is already created and you can skip this step. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select the **Fundseeker Starter Portal** template then click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name for your portal. 6. Enter a URL ending to append to the portal domain. 7. Click **Create**. It will take a few minutes to create the new portal. When it’s ready, you’ll see the site's Experience Workspace. To learn more about using Experience Builder, see [Experience Builder Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you are looking to set up a multilingual portal, review [Create a Multilingual Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=community_builder_multilingual_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # OFM Data Portability Learn how to manage data portability in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Outbound Funds Module. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Outbound Funds Module. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Do
A constituent is moving out of state and won’t be engaging with your organization anymore. They want to take their information with them. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.

An employee is being assigned to a new position.

They ask for the personal data you collected from them.

 Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for the employee:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
# OFM Publish the Portal When your fundseeker portal is ready, publish it to make it publicly available. - **[Publish the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_publish_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Publish your fundseeker portal to make the URL live, enable registration for guest users, and give login access to portal users. After you publish, you'll set up user registration and access. ## Publish the Portal Publish your fundseeker portal to make the URL live, enable registration for guest users, and give login access to portal users. After you publish, you'll set up user registration and access. If you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site_ installer, your fundseeker portal is already published so you can skip this step. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** next to your site. 4. Click **Publish**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want to set up search engine optimization and a welcome email for new users, you must also activate the site. See [Activate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_publish.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help for more information. # One-Time Volunteers for Salesforce Event Review recommendations for planning one-time volunteer events, and then set up the event hierarchy, jobs, and shifts. - **[Plan a One-Time Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_one_time_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can plan your one-time event as you wish, but we have some steps that we think will help. - **[Create a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Campaign is the top level of your volunteer structure. You can either create a Campaign manually or use the wizard. - **[Create Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Jobs represent the next level down in your structure. Before you start creating Jobs, it's a good idea to jot down exactly what Jobs and Shifts you need to fill. - **[Create Job Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If there are multiple dates or times when you need volunteers for a Job, you can set up Shifts so you can track which volunteers are coming when. # Ongoing Administration Learn more about feature telemetry and using Shield Encryption with the nonprofit Case Management managed package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Case Management Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case Management Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management is used by our customers. - **[Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about shield platform encryption compatibility. # Ongoing Administration Keep up with releases, find the release version, set up new features, review custom settings and run settings health check, learn about feature telemetry, and uninstall EDA. - **[Keep Up with EDA and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_keep_eda_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_find_the_release_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the current version and originally installed version of Education Data Architecture (EDA). - **[Set Up New Features and Activate Major Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.set_up_new_features_and_activate_major_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to activate an EDA release for the latest release enhancements and bug fixes. - **[Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_custom_settings_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article contains a summary of the EDA Hierarchy Settings in Custom Settings. - **[Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings. - **[EDA Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Salesforce collects EDA Feature Telemetry data to understand the level of usage and adoption of various EDA features. - **[Uninstall EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to uninstall EDA. # Ongoing Administration Keep up with releases and learn about localization and translation for Grants Management. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Keep Up with Grants Management and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_keep_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Grants Management and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_localization.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Grants Management is localized and how to manage translations. # Ongoing Administration Keep up with K-12 Architecture Kit releases, manage settings, and uninstall the managed package. - **[Keep Up with K-12 Architecture Kit and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_keep_eda_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Find the Release Version](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_find_the_release_version.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the current version and originally installed version of your app. - **[Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_custom_settings_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This article contains a summary of the EDA Hierarchy Settings in Custom Settings. - **[K-12 Architecture Kit Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Salesforce collects feature telemetry data to understand the level of usage and adoption of various features. - **[Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings. - **[Uninstall K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to uninstall your app. # Ongoing NPSP Administration Learn about advanced mapping, general administration, gift entry templates, recurring donations, and how to troubleshoot NPSP. - **[Advanced NPSP Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advanced Mapping is the logic that powers the NPSP Data Importer tool. Advanced Mapping is already set up to handle typical import, Gift Entry, and Elevate donation form scenarios involving constituent and donation data. If you want to add a custom field to a Gift Entry or Elevate form, or import data into a custom field that hasn't yet been mapped, you'll need to customize Advanced Mapping. - **[NPSP Constituent Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_constituent_engagement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Engagement Plans and NPSP Levels to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management, and track your constituents' level of engagement with your organization. - **[General NPSP Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_general_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Read more about the general NPSP administration tasks. - **[NPSP Gift Entry Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_gift_entry_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find out more about NPSP gift entry templates. - **[NPSP Recurring Donation Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_admin.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to customize Recurring Donation forms, automatic functionality, mapping to Opportunities, how to use the API, and more. - **[NPSP Troubleshooting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshooting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Troubleshoot challenges with NPSP features, view common errors, interpret health check issues, and learn about account models. # Opportunity An Opportunity represents an official chance for a prospect to enroll at your institution. - **[Sample Uses for Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a potential student signals interest in your institution, recruiting and admissions teams have a window of chance to engage with that person and get them to enroll. The Opportunity object tracks data related to that official chance, such as the prospect’s desired start term, campus, degree level, the probability of the opportunity itself, and any other details that you want to include. - **[Opportunity Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA doesn’t provide any record types for Opportunities. Create them for your institution if required. - **[Configure Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Opportunity data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create an Opportunity Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some institutions choose to have a single Opportunity record represent the chance to enroll a prospect, regardless of how many different terms and programs the prospect is interested in. Other institutions, especially those looking for more granular data, choose to create multiple Opportunities for a single prospect, such as one for Term and one for Academic Program. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Opportunity Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help you monitor Opportunities through the different stages, consider creating a dashboard for you and your team. ## Sample Uses for Opportunity When a potential student signals interest in your institution, recruiting and admissions teams have a window of chance to engage with that person and get them to enroll. The Opportunity object tracks data related to that official chance, such as the prospect’s desired start term, campus, degree level, the probability of the opportunity itself, and any other details that you want to include. ## Opportunity Record Types EDA doesn’t provide any record types for Opportunities. Create them for your institution if required. ## Configure Opportunity Set up Opportunity data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Initial Configuration for Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA doesn't provide any settings specific for Opportunities. - **[Keep Up with Opportunity Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As with all objects, verify and customize the security settings, navigation, and layouts for Opportunity, as needed. ### Initial Configuration for Opportunity EDA doesn't provide any settings specific for Opportunities. Keep in mind that Opportunity is a sales-focused standard object, which means that your institution is unlikely to use all of the available fields. To help make the object more relevant to educational institutions, EDA includes a few custom fields on the object and a page layout. Make sure to assign this page layout to people that you want to work with Opportunity records. The Stage field can help you track how close the prospect is to enrolling at your institution. Consider updating the default picklist values for this field as they're very sales-focused. For example, you can add custom Stage values that represent your recruiting cycle: Application Started, Application Submitted, Admitted, Rejected, Enrolled. Remember to map each value to an open or closed Status. Next, you can create a Sales Process, which contains the Stages of an Opportunity, and then update the Opportunity path. For more information, see [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5), [Create Multiple Business Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_multiple_business_processes.htm&type=5), and [Create a Path](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.path_create.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Your institution can also use Opportunity Contact Roles to identify other people related to the Opportunity. For example, you can track a parent or guardian's contact information in addition to the applicant. For more information, see [Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.sales_core_opp_contact_roles.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help. To learn about the standard Opportunity settings that Salesforce provides and how to customize them for your institution, read [Set Up Opportunities and Opportunity Products](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.opp_setup.htm&type=5) and [Administer Opportunity Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.opp_team_setup.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Keep Up with Opportunity Updates As with all objects, verify and customize the security settings, navigation, and layouts for Opportunity, as needed. Follow the general instructions in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When we release new objects, they’re not automatically displayed in your existing org."), keeping in mind that you're editing settings for a standard object rather than a custom object. ## Create an Opportunity Record Some institutions choose to have a single Opportunity record represent the chance to enroll a prospect, regardless of how many different terms and programs the prospect is interested in. Other institutions, especially those looking for more granular data, choose to create multiple Opportunities for a single prospect, such as one for Term and one for Academic Program. - **[Create an Opportunity with Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your institution uses automation to create Opportunity records, make sure to link the Account Name field to the prospect’s Account record. Make sure to use a naming convention on the Opportunity Name field as EDA provides no automation to maintain this field. Also consider automating the Close Date and Stage fields as they’re required. - **[Create an Opportunity During Lead Conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you convert a Lead to a Contact, the name that you specify for the Opportunity record becomes the Opportunity Name. By default, the Opportunity record uses the Lead's Company field followed by a hyphen. When converting Leads, specify a name for the Opportunity that makes sense for your institution. - **[Create an Opportunity Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_opportunity.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manually capture opportunities for prospects to enroll at your institution, such as to track information that’s not covered by automation or conversion. ### Create an Opportunity with Automation If your institution uses automation to create Opportunity records, make sure to link the Account Name field to the prospect’s Account record. Make sure to use a naming convention on the Opportunity Name field as EDA provides no automation to maintain this field. Also consider automating the Close Date and Stage fields as they’re required. ### Create an Opportunity During Lead Conversion When you convert a Lead to a Contact, the name that you specify for the Opportunity record becomes the Opportunity Name. By default, the Opportunity record uses the Lead's Company field followed by a hyphen. When converting Leads, specify a name for the Opportunity that makes sense for your institution. For more information about converting a Lead, see [Convert Lead Records to Contact Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_lead.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you convert a Lead is up to your institution, but we recommend doing so when a suspect signals interest, thus becoming a prospect. When converting a Lead, the fields on the record create three records: Contact, Account, and optionally Opportunity."). ### Create an Opportunity Manually Manually capture opportunities for prospects to enroll at your institution, such as to track information that’s not covered by automation or conversion. 1. Click the Opportunity tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, find it from the App Launcher. 2. Enter relevant details for these required fields. - **Opportunity Name** Enter a name that matches the naming conventions defined by your institution. For example, Last\_Name - Application\_Type Term or Lombard - Undergrad Fall 22' for a prospect named Louis Lombard. - **Close Date** Enter the date you plan to close the opportunity. Sometimes this date is the start of a Term. - **Stage** Select the current stage the Opportunity is in, such as Prospecting or a custom value. 3. Specify EDA-specific details and other fields, such as Account Name, Desired Campus, Desired Start Term, Desired Degree Level and Completed FAFSA. 4. Save your changes. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Opportunity Data To help you monitor Opportunities through the different stages, consider creating a dashboard for you and your team. For additional details about creating, cloning, and sharing your Opportunities, see [Manage Your Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.opp_manage.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Optional Configuration Review the available optional configurations to help your organization be more efficient in performing grantseeking activities. - **[Create a Case Layout for External Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_optional_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Case page layout specific to external users, such as grantseekers, to review their Account Update Requests. This is an optional step. - **[Add Cases to Navigation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_optional_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Cases to the Grants Management navigation bar for grantmakers to easily access submitted requests, such an Account Update Request. This is an optional step. - **[Update the Account Update Request Global Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_optional_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Submit Account Update Request component uses the Account Update Request global quick action, which defines fields that show up to a user when requesting an organization update and controls how the fields are displayed. You can make updates to the quick action to better reflect your organization and its processes. - **[Update the Account Update Request Case Quick Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_optional_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add record types, predefined field values, and fields to the Account Update Request Case quick action. ## Create a Case Layout for External Users Create a Case page layout specific to external users, such as grantseekers, to review their Account Update Requests. This is an optional step. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), and then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Cases**. 4. Click **Case Page Layouts**. 5. Click **New**. 6. Enter a Name. For example, External User Case Layout. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Include the fields you want an external user to see. For example, Contact Name, Status, Priority, Case Origin, Date/Time Opened, Subject, Description, and Web Email. ![Case page layout for external users](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/casepagelayoutforexternalusers.jpg) 9. Click **Save**. 10. Click **Page Layout Assignments**. 11. Click **Edit Assignments**. 12. Select the external user profiles. For example, **Grantseeker Plus Login**. 13. Select the new page layout from the Page Layout To Use. For example, **External User Case Layout**. 14. Click **Save**. ## Add Cases to Navigation Add Cases to the Grants Management navigation bar for grantmakers to easily access submitted requests, such an Account Update Request. This is an optional step. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Grants Management**. 2. Click ![Pencil icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/pencil.jpg). 3. Click **Add More Items**. 4. Click **All**. 5. Click ![Plus icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/add.jpg) next to Cases. 6. Click **Add 1 Nav Item**. 7. Click **Save**. ## Update the Account Update Request Global Action The Submit Account Update Request component uses the Account Update Request global quick action, which defines fields that show up to a user when requesting an organization update and controls how the fields are displayed. You can make updates to the quick action to better reflect your organization and its processes. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), and then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Global in the Quick Find Box, then select **Global Actions**. 3. Click **Account Update Request**. ### Get a Record Type By default, doesn't set a record type for the Account Update Request global quick action. If your org has defined record types for Accounts, those can be assigned. 1. From the Account Update Request global quick action, click **Edit**. 2. Select a Grants Management Record Type. 3. Click **Save**. For more information, see [Quick Actions and Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=actions_and_record_types.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Create Predefined Field Values Create predefined field values to automatically assign a value to a field. 1. From the Account Update Request global quick action, click **New**. 2. Select a Field Name. For example, **Account Source**. 3. Select a Specific Value. For example, **Web**. ![Configure the field values for an Account Update Request](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/predefined_globalaction.jpg) 4. Enter a Formula Value, if needed. 5. Click **Save**. ### Update the Layout By default, the Account Name and Billing Address fields are visible to external users in the Account Update Request. If you need additional fields, you can add them here—just remember to give external users access to any added fields. 1. From the Account Update Request global quick action, click **Edit Layout**. 2. Drag a field from the palette. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note The Account Owner field isn't currently supported on the Account Update Request global quick action page layout. 3. Click **Save**. ## Update the Account Update Request Case Quick Action Add record types, predefined field values, and fields to the Account Update Request Case quick action. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), and then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager.** 3. Click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click **Account Update Request Case**. ### Set Record Types By default, Grants Management doesn't set a record type for the Account Update Request Case quick action. If your org has defined record types for Cases, those can be assigned. 1. From the Account Update Request Case quick action, click **Edit**. 2. Select a Record Type. 3. Click **Save**. For more information, see [Quick Actions and Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=actions_and_record_types.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Create Predefined Field Values Create predefined field values to automatically assign a value to a field. 1. From the Account Update Request Case quick action, click **New**. 2. Select a Field Name. For example, **Case Origin**. 3. Select a Specific Value. For example, **Web**. 4. Enter a Formula Value, if needed. 5. Click **Save**. ### Update the Layout By default, the Account Name and Billing Address fields are visible to external users in the Account Update Request Case. If you need additional fields, you can add them here—just remember to [give external users access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_grant_access_update_org_info.htm) to any added fields. 1. From the Account Update Request Case quick action, click **Edit Layout**. 2. Drag a field from the palette. 3. Click **Save**. # Optional NPSP Customizations Learn about optional customizations you can do in NPSP including categorizing Contacts, adding badges to Contacts, handling anonymous donors, and adding components to your Experience Cloud donor portal. - **[An Introduction to Categorizing Contacts in Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most organizations have a need to group Contacts together based on common interests, activities, or role. If you want to quickly and easily be able to see which people in your database are volunteers, clients, or major donors, for instance, you have to set up Salesforce to make it easy to group those Contacts for viewing, segmenting lists for campaigns, and reporting. - **[Adding Badges to Contact Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adding_badges_to_contact_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Having badges auto-generated by a formula ensures data quality. - **[Handling Anonymous Donors With Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_handling_anonymous_donors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do you have donors who have asked that a particular gift or all gifts from them remain anonymous? Most nonprofits get this request from time to time, but how this is managed in their database varies greatly. The great thing with Salesforce is you have options to how you ensure the donor's request for anonymity is recognized while maintaining key data for your reporting and record keeping needs. - **[Add Experience Cloud Components to Your Donor Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_experience_cloud_components_to_your_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have an Experience Cloud site, you can add components built for the Nonprofit Success Pack right to your pages. # Org Setup for Intelligent Degree Planner To give your learners the best intelligent degree planning experience, consider the planner’s behavior when modeling your data, create a learner pathway global action, and configure sharing to suit the planner. You can also create learner pathway templates, or you can let your learners plan their pathways from scratch.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Considerations for Intelligent Degree Planning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_intelligent_degree_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get familiar with how Intelligent Degree Planner pulls and shows data from your org. - **[Assign Learner Programs to Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_learner_programs_to_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In order to have requirements show up in the requirements panel, the learner must have a learner program associated with them, and that learner program must have learner program requirements. - **[Create a Learner Pathway Global Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learner_pathway_global_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To simplify your learners’ pathway building experience, set up a new global action to create a learner pathway record. - **[Create Pathway Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_pathway_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To guide learners through the planning process, set up learner pathway templates for them to build their pathways from. Learners can use templates that the institution builds, or build a pathway from scratch. - **[Approvals in Intelligent Degree Planning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_approvals_in_intelligent_degree_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To enable learners to submit their degree plans for advisor review, you can add an approval process to the Intelligent Degree Planner. # Organize Tasks for Constituents and Staff Use action plans and action launcher to provide quick and focused support to constituents in your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Action Plans Build task-managed checklists to be completed by students or staff. Use cases for action plans include: - To-do lists for learners during the application process. - Care plans for students. - Application, matriculation, and enrollment processes. Action Launcher Launch actions from record pages based on a business process. The action launcher can include flows, OmniScripts, and quick actions. Use cases for action launcher include: - Open notes from a meeting with a student or other staff member. - Send an email to an advisee. - Log a call made to a mentee. See Also: - [Create Tasks for Care Plans with Action Plan Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.psc_tasks_for_care_plans.htm) - [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5) # Other Considerations Review these additional considerations before you migrate your data to Education Cloud. - Technical debt: Run Salesforce Optimizer to identify potential issues, and address them. The common causes for issues are: - Object automation across workflows, flows, and triggers. - Custom object and custom field usage that leads to running against limits, or empty fields. - Sharing models and sharing rules that affect legacy objects. - Outdated installed packages. - Current customizations: Objects might behave differently based on how objects relate to person accounts. Review the information that relates to contact records and person account records. - Current integrations: - Replicate primary integrations with considerations for source objects and contact profiles. - Test integrations to ensure that records can be created and updated after account-contact pairs are converted to person accounts. - Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM): - Avoid TDTM as it isn’t compatible with Education Cloud. - Deactivate existing trigger handler records before you migrate your data to Education Cloud. - Transform TDTM automations and remap them to Flow or Apex-based solutions by using trigger handler best practices. Use One Per Object designs to maximize efficiency and execution control. - Consider these steps when you migrate your data from a managed package environment with TDTM: - Review which trigger handler records are active. - Review the automations that need to be migrated to Education Cloud. - Evaluate custom TDTM classes and trigger handler records for applicability or improvement. - Integration with Marketing Cloud: - Migrate the subscriber keys if the person account ID in Education Cloud is different from the contact ID or lead ID in Marketing Cloud. - Use a multi-org connector to migrate to a new org. - Reimplement Marketing Cloud Connect for new objects and triggers if required. - Consider that the Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud App dashboard might not work. - Storage limits: When migrating data, the data is copied and not moved. As a result, your org’s data storage will reflect both your original data and copied data that is created by the migration kit. Expect data bloating for frequently used objects during the migration. SEE ALSO: - [Data Processing Engine Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.reference_data_processing_engine_limits.htm&type=5) - [Improve Your Implementation with Salesforce Optimizer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.optimizer_introduction.htm&type=5) - [One Per Object Flow Design Pattern](https://admin.salesforce.com/blog/2022/automate-this-tom-hoffmans-one-per-object-flow-design-pattern) - [Automate Your Business Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.extend_click_process.htm&type=5) - [Subscriber Key in Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=mktg.mc_es_subscriber_key.htm&type=5) # Other GEM Settings Review the names and default values of the settings that GEM installs. GEM installs a number of other settings that have default values. Leave them as is unless otherwise directed by Salesforce Customer Support. | Field | Default Value | | --- | --- | | Payment Allocations Enabled | Enabled | | Automatic Payment Creation | Enabled | | Household Account Addresses Disabled | Disabled | # Other Reference Documentation Explore additional reference documentation about custom components and tax status search to help you make the most of Grants Management. - **[Custom Managed Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_custom_managed_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the custom components included in Grants Management. - **[Tax Status Search Glossary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_tax_status_search_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand what raw JSON data is received from Candid Premier (formerly known as GuideStar) when a grantmaker searches for an organization’s tax information from the Verification Items tab. # Other Resources Learn about resources to support you in implementing and using Volunteers for Salesforce. - [Manage Volunteers for Nonprofits](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trail/nonprofit_volunteer) (Trailhead) - [Release Notes](https://github.com/salesforcefoundation/volunteers-for-salesforce/releases) (versions 3.89 and beyond) - [Release Notes](https://djhconsulting.com/volunteers-for-salesforce/volunteers-for-salesforce-release-notes/) (versions before 3.89) - [Volunteers for Salesforce (Volunteers for Salesforce) App group](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khiisae?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) (online community) # Out of the Box Reports Learn which reports are available with Outbound Funds Module and how to access them. - **[Out of the Box Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_reporting_out_of_the_box.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds Module comes with some prebuilt reports. - **[View Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_reporting_out_of_the_box.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Access Outbound Funds Module reports from the App Launcher. ## Out of the Box Reports Outbound Funds Module comes with some prebuilt reports. - Awarded Requests Sorted by Program Codes - Funding Requests by Program & Status - Awarded Requests by Year by Program - Requests with Open Disbursements - Parent Funding Program Analytics - Funding Program Analytics - Requests with Upcoming Milestones - Overdue Disbursements - Unscheduled Disbursements - Upcoming Disbursements ## View Reports Access Outbound Funds Module reports from the App Launcher. 1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png)), find and select **Reports**. 2. Click **All Folders**. 3. Click **Outbound Fund Reports**. 4. Click the report name to run the report. # Outbound Funds Module (Managed Package) Release Notes Outbound Funds pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Outbound Funds Module managed package is installed. # Outbound Funds Module and Translation Learn how Outbound Funds Module is localized and how to manage translations. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Outbound Funds Module. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Outbound Funds Module product. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Outbound Funds Module."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Outbound Funds Module.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Outbound Funds Module. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Outbound Funds Module objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Outbound Funds Module | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) |   | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. ### Outbound Funds Module - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ofm/outbound_funds_module_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ofm/outbound_funds_module_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ofm/outbound_funds_module_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ofm/outbound_funds_module_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/ofm/outbound_funds_module_pt_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Outbound Funds Module product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Outbound Funds Module: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. # Outbound Funds Module Automation Options Learn about the types of automation that you can use to streamline processes for managing funding requests. - **[Create Approval Processes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_approval_processes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An approval process automates how records are approved. You can create an approval process for a task, email alert, field update, or outbound message. - **[Create Quick Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_quick_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create quick actions to give your nonprofit users convenient access to important information. - **[Create Funding Request Paths](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_funding_request_paths.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your users complete funding requests by creating paths that guide them through each step. - **[Create Validation Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_validation_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Validation rules verify that data entered by a user meets the criteria you specify before the record can be saved. It can also prevent users from editing records that meet certain criteria, such as when a Disbursement is considered Paid. # Outbound Funds Module Entity Relationship Diagram Understand the relationships between the objects that Outbound Funds Module uses. - **[Outbound Funds Module Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_erd_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the entity relationship diagram to understand how Outbound Funds Module objects relate to each other. ## Outbound Funds Module Entity Relationship Diagram Review the entity relationship diagram to understand how Outbound Funds Module objects relate to each other. ![Outbound Funds Module Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/ofm_erd.png) # Outbound Funds Module GDPR Documentation Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Outbound Funds Module. - **[Product Information on OFM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Outbound Funds Module complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Data Deletion for OFM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Consent Management for OFM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how consent management applies to Outbound Funds Module. - **[Restrict Data for OFM](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_restrict_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Outbound Funds Module. - **[OFM Data Portability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage data portability in Outbound Funds Module. # Outbound Funds Module Managed Package The Outbound Funds Module managed package is designed for foundations and nonprofit organizations to manage and track funding requests and outgoing funds. It’s a customizable foundation for managing funds awarded by an organization, such as grants, scholarships, or internal funding. - **[Learn About Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get an overview of Outbound Funds Module and its data model. - **[Get Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install Outbound Funds Module, complete the post-installation tasks, and update your package if needed. - **[Set Up the Fundseeker Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_up_the_fundseeker_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a fundseeker portal by using Experience Cloud to streamline funding requests. - **[Use Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_use_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up funding programs and funding requests to manage the fundseekers’ applications. Share those records with your team and provide feedback. If needed, create disbursements for your expenditures. Learn about localization and translation for Outbound Funds Module. - **[Keep Up with Outbound Funds Module and Salesforce Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_keep_up.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule. - **[Outbound Funds Module Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_up_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the available security settings for Outbound Funds Module. - **[Outbound Funds Module Automation Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_automation_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the types of automation that you can use to streamline processes for managing funding requests. - **[Outbound Funds Module Reporting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which reports are available with Outbound Funds Module and how to set up a kanban list view to easily visualize your work. - **[Outbound Funds Module GDPR Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Outbound Funds Module. # Outbound Funds Module Objects and Fields Learn what custom objects and fields are included in Outbound Funds. View [Outbound Funds Module Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/z0hzaxpd8da9) (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). # Outbound Funds Module Overview Learn about good ways to use Outbound Funds Module, whether it’s the right product for your organization, and how you can use it to manage fund-seeking activities. - **[Meet Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_meet.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds Module helps organizations manage and track funding requests and outgoing funds, such as grants and scholarships. It's designed to be a flexible, lightweight solution to meet various needs across multiple industries. - **[OFM Compare Grants Management with Outbound Funds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_compare_gms_with_ofm.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the differences between Grants Management and Outbound Funds Module so that you can choose the best product for your organization. - **[Use Outbound Funds Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds Module is a flexible and scalable solution designed to meet every nonprofit organization's unique needs to manage outgoing funds. # Outbound Funds Module Release Note Learn what's in Outbound Funds Module (version 1.27) in Winter '23. ## Changes We now support Brazilian Portuguese documentation translations. ## Issues Closed [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000029kbmqaq&title=sfdo-outbound-funds-module-manage-expenditures-component-on-disbursement-lightning-page): Manage Expenditures component on Disbursement Lightning Page # Outbound Funds Module Reporting Learn which reports are available with Outbound Funds Module and how to set up a kanban list view to easily visualize your work. - **[Out of the Box Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_reporting_out_of_the_box.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which reports are available with Outbound Funds Module and how to access them. - **[Create a Kanban View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_a_kanban_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Kanban list view is a helpful visual summary of records. It's a great way to visualize items in progress and allows you to monitor work more effectively. Update a record's status by dragging and dropping records from one column to another. # Outbound Funds Module Security Review the available security settings for Outbound Funds Module. - **[Set Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure field-level security for admins, fundmakers, and reviewers. # Outbound Referrals Use Outbound Referrals to track the referrals that you make for clients to other organizations. After assessing a potential client or working with a client for a while, you may identify needs that your organization isn’t able to fulfill. In these cases, you may want to refer the client to another organization to ensure they get the care they need. When you refer someone to another organization, it’s called an Outbound Referral. Outbound Referrals are record types on the Case object. To see a list of all Outbound Referrals: 1. Click the **Cases** tab. 2. From the dropdown, select **Case Management: Outbound Referrals**. - **[Refer Clients With Outbound Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_outbound_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Outbound Referral to track clients referred to other organizations to ensure that you help the client get the services they need. ## Refer Clients With Outbound Referrals Create an Outbound Referral to track clients referred to other organizations to ensure that you help the client get the services they need. To create an Outbound Referral: 1. Click the **Cases** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Outbound Referral**, then click **Next**. 4. Optionally: - Add a subject that describes the nature of the referral. - Search for or create a Contact. - Enter any relevant information about the referral, for example, the Referral Organization, Suggested Programs, or Referral Result. 5. Select a Status. Note that you can't close the Outbound Referral from the Status dropdown. 6. Click **Save**. From an Outbound Referral, you can: - Click **Edit** to edit the details of the Outbound Referral. - Click **Change Owner** assign another case owner. - Click **Closed** in the path at the top of the Outbound Referral to close it. # Outcome Management with Nonprofit Cloud Use Outcome Management to define your impact strategy or theory of change, collect your data, track your progress, and evaluate the effectiveness of your programs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
Outcome Management helps you define strategies, collect data, track progress, and evaluate program impact. Outcome Management structures this process by using specific objects, such as outcome records, indicator definitions, indicator assignments, and impact strategies, to bridge the gaps in traditional logic models. The key benefit that Outcome Management delivers is enhanced accountability and continuous monitoring through time-bound target and baseline values. Use Outcome Management with Nonprofit Cloud to track: - The programs you’re running to achieve your intended outcomes. - Your program performance to make sure that your programs deliver as planned. - If the work you’re doing is achieving your intended outcomes. SEE ALSO - [Outcome Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.outcome_management.htm) - _Developer Documentation:_ [Outcome Management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.industries_reference.meta/industries_reference/outcome_management_developer_guide.htm) # Outreach Source Code URLs in Education Track and evaluate the success of marketing, communication, and outreach efforts in digital channels with outreach source code URLs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create outreach source code URLs:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Automatically generated outreach source code URLs save fundraisers time and provide valuable insights into the sources, mediums, and campaigns that drive effective digital fundraising and outreach. These unique web links are shared across various channels to track the effectiveness of online outreach. Each outreach source code can have one URL associated with it. The URL is automatically generated using UTM parameters set by your organization’s Administrator in Fundraising Settings. The UTM Parameters are a string of code that’s added to the end of a URL. These parameters define the source, medium, and campaign that sent the donor or constituent to your donation page or social media post. ## Create Outreach Source Code URLs Quickly create a unique outreach source code URL in the Donor Engagement app. The customized outreach source code URL is shown on the Outreach Source Code page. Use the link in all outreach associated with this outreach source code. 1. From the page of the Outreach Source Code that you need a URL for, click **Generate URL**, or click ![Show more actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and select **Generate URL**. 2. In **Outreach Source Code Base URL**, enter the giving page or target URL. 3. Click **Save URL**. # Outreach Source Code URLs in Nonprofit Track and evaluate the success of marketing, communication, and outreach efforts in digital channels with outreach source code URLs. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create outreach source code URLs:

FundraisingAccess permission set
Automatically generated outreach source code URLs save fundraisers time and provide valuable insights into the sources, mediums, and campaigns that drive effective digital fundraising and outreach. These unique web links are shared across various channels to track the effectiveness of online outreach. Each outreach source code can have one URL associated with it. The URL is automatically generated using UTM parameters set by your organization’s Administrator in Fundraising Settings. The UTM Parameters are a string of code that’s added to the end of a URL. These parameters define the source, medium, and campaign that sent the donor or constituent to your donation page or social media post. ## Create Outreach Source Code URLs Quickly create a unique outreach source code URL in the Donor Engagement app. The customized outreach source code URL is shown on the Outreach Source Code page. Use the link in all outreach associated with this outreach source code. 1. From the page of the Outreach Source Code that you need a URL for, click **Generate URL**, or click ![Show more actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and select **Generate URL**. 2. In **Outreach Source Code Base URL**, enter the giving page or target URL. 3. Click **Save URL**. # Outreach Source Codes in Education Use outreach source codes to identify the outreach methods used with your campaigns to help determine which approaches are successful. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Fundraising includes access to campaigns and outreach source codes. The campaigns are standard Salesforce campaigns, but you can super-charge them with outreach source codes. Outreach source codes help you track and evaluate the success of marketing, communication, and outreach efforts, in both digital and non-digital spaces. These codes enable a campaign manager or fundraiser to track donations relating to the campaign. Staff can use information derived from the outreach source code tracking to refine, target, and strengthen communications to donors, constituents, and the public. For example, you can create three outreach source codes for one campaign. One code identifies the mass mailings you sent, one identifies a web advertisement, and one identifies a fundraising event that you held. When a donation is received, the source code that prompted the donation is manually applied to the gift transaction. Over the course of the campaign, you can review which source codes were the most successful, and then determine the methods to maintain for the current campaign, or even future campaigns. - **[Set Up Outreach Source Codes in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_outreach_source_codes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set the outreach source code parameters and generation formula. - **[Create Outreach Source Codes for a Campaign in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_outreach_source_code_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance your campaign management by using outreach source codes to track each appeal of a campaign with details about audience and outreach methods. Salesforce streamlines the creation of source codes, significantly reducing manual entry errors, and improving consistency across campaigns. Marketers can now dedicate more time to strategic campaign planning, ensuring better reporting accuracy and overall campaign effectiveness. - **[Outreach Source Code URLs in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_use_outreach_source_code_urls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track and evaluate the success of marketing, communication, and outreach efforts in digital channels with outreach source code URLs. - **[Attribute a Donation to an Outreach Source Code in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_attribute_donation_outreach_source_code.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attribute a donation to an outreach source code from any gift entry page. - **[Assign an Interest Tag to a Campaign in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_assign_interest_tag_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add interest tags to a campaign to provide at-a-glance information on what the campaign is for. - **[Track Outreach Trends With Rollups in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_track_outreach_trends_with_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get data on individual campaigns in Fundraising. # Outreach Source Codes in Nonprofit Use outreach source codes to identify the outreach methods used with your campaigns to help determine which approaches are successful. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Fundraising includes access to campaigns and outreach source codes. The campaigns are standard Salesforce campaigns, but you can super-charge them with outreach source codes. Outreach source codes help you track and evaluate the success of marketing, communication, and outreach efforts, in both digital and non-digital spaces. These codes enable a campaign manager or fundraiser to track donations relating to the campaign. Staff can use information derived from the outreach source code tracking to refine, target, and strengthen communications to donors, constituents, and the public. For example, you can create three outreach source codes for one campaign. One code identifies the mass mailings you sent, one identifies a web advertisement, and one identifies a fundraising event that you held. When a donation is received, the source code that prompted the donation is manually applied to the gift transaction. Over the course of the campaign, you can review which source codes were the most successful, and then determine the methods to maintain for the current campaign, or even future campaigns. - **[Set Up Outreach Source Codes in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_outreach_source_codes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set the outreach source code parameters and generation formula. - **[Create Outreach Source Codes for a Campaign in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_outreach_source_code_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enhance your campaign management by using outreach source codes to track each appeal of a campaign with details about audience and outreach methods. Salesforce streamlines the creation of source codes, significantly reducing manual entry errors, and improving consistency across campaigns. Marketers can now dedicate more time to strategic campaign planning, ensuring better reporting accuracy and overall campaign effectiveness. - **[Outreach Source Code URLs in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_use_outreach_source_code_urls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track and evaluate the success of marketing, communication, and outreach efforts in digital channels with outreach source code URLs. - **[Attribute a Donation to an Outreach Source Code in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_attribute_donation_outreach_source_code.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Attribute a donation to an outreach source code from any gift entry page. - **[Assign an Interest Tag to a Campaign in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_assign_interest_tag_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add interest tags to a campaign to provide at-a-glance information on what the campaign is for. - **[Track Outreach Trends With Rollups in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_track_outreach_trends_with_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get data on individual campaigns in Fundraising. # Overall Alumni Engagements Summarization Use Flow Builder to create summaries for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describe the involvement of an alumnus in alumni events, the level of communication with your institution, their volunteerism roles, and their philanthropic contributions.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Alumni Engagement Metrics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager

Create a template-triggered prompt flow and add and configure these elements. See [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US).

Element

 Configuration
Start

  1. Select Automatic Inputs as the input type.

  2. Select Engagement Visualization Template Capability as the prompt template type.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Contact, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Salesforce Object as the data source.

  3. Select Contact as the object.

  4. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  5. In Field, find and select Id.

  6. Select Equals as the operator.

  7. In Value, select $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID.

  8. Select Only the first record.

  9. Select Automatically store all fields.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Contact Name to the Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Name" : "{!Get_Contact.Name}", "Details": [.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Engagement Actions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select default as the data space.

  4. Select Engagement Action as the object.

  5. Enter 1 AND (2 OR 3 OR 4) AND 5 as the condition logic.

  6. Set these conditions.

    • ssot__IndividualId__c Equals

    • ssot__EngagementCategory__c Equals CommunicationsCategory ssot__EngagementCategory__c Equals ExperientialCategory

    • ssot__EngagementCategory__c Equals VolunteerismCategory

    • ssot__EngagementDateTime__c Greater Than or Equal CurrentYear

  7. Select All Records.

  8. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Engagement Actions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Assignment

  1. In Label, enter Set Channel Engagement Ids, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select ChannelEngagementIds as the variable.

  3. Select Add as the operator.

  4. In Value, select Engagement Actions > Channel Engagement.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Channel Engagements, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select Channel Engagement as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__Id__c.

  7. Select In as the operator.

  8. In Value, find and select ChannelEngagementIds.

  9. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  10. Select All Records.

  11. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Engagement Action, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop Through Channel Engagements, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Channel Engagements as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Decision

  1. In Label, enter Match Channel Engagement, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Match and enter these details.

    1. In Label and Outcome API name, enter Match.

    2. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the outcome.

    3. Select Engagement Action > Channel Engagement as the resource.

    4. Select Equals as the operator.

    5. Select Channel Engagements > Channel Engagement Id as the value.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Channel Engagement to Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Date" "{!Loop_through_Each_Engagement_Action.ssot__EngagementDateTime__c}", "Subject" : "{!Loop_through_Channel_Engagements.ssot__Subject__c}" },.

Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Account Contact, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select Account Contact as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirements.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__IndividualId__c.

  7. Select Equals as the operator.

  8. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  9. Select Only the first record.

  10. Select Automatically store all fields.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Gift Transactions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select GiftTransaction as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirements.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__DonorId__c.

  7. Select Equals as the operator.

  8. In Value, select Account Contact from Get_Account_Contact > ssot__AccountId__c.

  9. Click Add Condition.

  10. In Field, find and select ssot__TransactionDate__c.

  11. Select Greater Than or Equal as the operator.

  12. In Value, select CurrentYear.

  13. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  14. Select All records.

  15. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop through Gift Transactions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Gift Transactions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Gift Transaction to the Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Description" : "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__Description__c}", "Current Amount" : "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__CurrentAmount__c}", "Gift Type": "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__GiftType__c}", "Transaction Date": "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__TransactionDate__c}" },.

Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Ending Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter ]}..
![Overall Alumni Engagements Summarization flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_overall_alumni_engagements.png) # Override the Default Household Address for a Contact If you have a Contact who prefers to receive their individual mailings at a different address than the default Household address, you can accommodate them by setting an Address Override. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Override a Default Contact Address](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SVrU0wWSHQE) Many organizations send general solicitations and newsletters to Households, while sending other targeted mailings, such as Board communications, to individual Contacts. If you have a Contact who prefers to receive their individual mailings at a different address than the default Household address, you can accommodate them by setting an Address Override. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This functionality is available only if you're using the Household Account model. For more information, see [What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") 1. On the Contact where you want to specify a different mailing address, click **Edit**. (The Contact must already be in the Household.) 2. In the Address Information section, select **Address Override**. The Contact's mailing address will no longer sync up with the Default Address for the Household. 3. In the Current Address lookup field, select the new Address for this Contact. You can also manually enter a new Address in the Mailing Address fields. 4. Click **Save**. ![override default address](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/address_override_behavior.png) # Overview Salesforce.org Insights Platform Data Integrity helps you format, update, and maintain your constituent's data. This critical data includes a large volume of contacts and addresses, all of which must be maintained accurately and robustly. Data Integrity works in conjunction with [Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack.htm) to help you manage and leverage data for interaction with your donors. Successful fundraising activities rely on the preparedness of your data, regardless of whether you are running an online campaign or using direct mail. Duplicate records and outdated addresses undermine effort and impact the efficacy of your team. Data Integrity helps normalize your data to effectively manage nonprofit activities, increase accuracy of your reports, and benefit from direct cost savings. Data Integrity enables you to: Foster an Agile Data Culture Create and maintain accurate and up-to-date data. Use clean data to drive effective change, achieve positive results, and make decisions faster. Standardize Constituent Addresses Achieve higher postal delivery success rates by standardizing mailing addresses to use the USPS postal standard format. Update Stale Addresses Keep up with your donors by pulling in the latest address data from the USPS National Change of Address (NCOA) database. Manage Duplicate Records Maintain a unified and trusted donor registry by continuously identifying, merging, and preventing duplicate records. Standardize Contacts Manage effective communication with your constituents based on validated email, phone number, deceased status, and planned giving intentions. Improve Donor Experiences Better donor experiences and data driven interactions lead to higher donation volumes and conversion rates. Effective constituent engagement is critical to achieving your mission. Keep your data on track, streamline your information, and achieve your organizational goals! # Overview of Einstein for Nonprofits Use Einstein for Nonprofits to obtain predictive insights for your constituents. Einstein for Nonprofits generates predictive insights and metrics by modeling real world data in your org. The app uses artificial intelligence (AI) to train the system about possible constituent behavior based on past giving and similarities with other donors. The insights that are gleaned can help you make more informed decisions when planning campaigns and setting up marketing targets. Use predictive insights to better understand your donor base by: - Leveraging Einstein for Nonprofits to help admins [generate predictive insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_epb.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses EPB to generate predictive insights for your org.") by using the [Einstein Prediction Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder.htm&type=5) (EPB) bundled package. Obtain percent probability scores for the likelihood of each constituent to be a first-time donor, recurring donor, or top donor. - Using [Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org.") to obtain useful predictive insights if your [org doesn’t have enough data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5) for predictions using EPB. - [Configuring Contact cards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure model training and page layout to use Einstein for Nonprofits.") to display predictive metrics and scores as part of the donor's profile. These predictions can then be actioned by users within your nonprofit. Einstein for Nonprofits not only produces high-quality, cost-effective custom predictions that can be refreshed daily, but also eliminates the need for expensive consulting contracts where the analytics soon become stale. Leverage Einstein for Nonprofits to reach your fundraising targets sooner! # Page and Component Access Management Control the pages and page components that mentors and mentees can access in your Education Cloud Mentoring portal by using audiences. Create separate audiences for your mentor and mentee profiles so that portal users get the appropriate portal experience.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Set Up Mentoring Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_your_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To set up and use a Mentoring portal in Education Cloud, complete these prerequisites.") - [Assign an Audience to a Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audience_component.htm&type=5) - [Assign an Audience to a Page Variation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_audiences_page_variations.htm&type=5) # Pause a Recurring Donation Learn how to temporarily suspend donations, and restart them, when your donor wants to stop giving for a period of time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Managing Recurring Donations.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eFA6lglenyo) With their recurring giving, your loyal donors provide your organization with a consistent source of funding. But life happens and a donor sometimes asks to temporarily suspend their giving due to travel, job loss, or unexpected expenses. To fulfill this kind of request, NPSP provides you with the ability to pause up to 12 consecutive installments in a Recurring Donation. If you need to pause a Recurring Donation for more than 12 installments, it's probably best to [Change, Close, or Delete a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to update a Recurring Donation when a donor asks to change their donation amount, or their donation schedule. Also learn how to close (cancel), or delete a Recurring Donation."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're asked to pause a Recurring Donation for more than 12 installments, it's probably best to [close the Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_close_or_delete_recur.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to update a Recurring Donation when a donor asks to change their donation amount, or their donation schedule. Also learn how to close (cancel), or delete a Recurring Donation."). Here's an example scenario: Alex is a college student who donates $75 monthly to your organization. During an accident, Alex twists his knee and tears a ligament. He doesn't have insurance so treatment is likely to be expensive, and he still needs to buy books for school. Alex realizes that he has to reduce his spending and asks you to pause his monthly donations until the beginning of the new year. To pause a Recurring Donation: 1. Locate the Recurring Donation record. 2. Click **Pause**. 3. Select a Paused Reason. In our example, choose **Financial Difficulty**. 4. Select up to 12 consecutive installments from the list of future installments. In our example, select the September through December installments. 5. Save your changes. ![Recurring Donation Pause screen. The installments for September through December are selected here.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rd-pause-modal.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Your administrator can adjust the Paused Reason values by editing the values in the Status Reason picklist field. Paused Reason uses the same values that are defined in Status Reason. Your administrator can also enable field history tracking for Status and Status Reason, so you can track how these fields change over time. Now look at the Upcoming Installments for the Recurring Donation. Notice that each installment you selected is marked Paused. ![Upcoming Installments showing four Paused installments.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/paused-upcoming-installments.png) Paused installments appear in the Upcoming Installments component, but NPSP won't create Opportunities for those installments marked paused. In our example, when you close the 8/22/2020 Opportunity, the next Opportunity NPSP creates is for the 1/22/2021 installment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note NPSP reactivates paused installments if you change the Recurring Donation schedule details such as Amount, Day of Month, or Installment Frequency. Essentially, the new schedule you've defined replaces the old one. ## Edit or Remove a Pause As we've seen, things can quickly change in the life of a donor. Just as financial difficulty prompts donors to pause their donations, donors could also ask to resume their donations earlier than expected. When that happens, you can edit their paused Recurring Donation. Alex has had a fast recovery from his injury, and he received financial support from a crowdfunding campaign his friends set up for him. Now, Alex is ready to resume his $75 monthly donations. To edit a paused Recurring Donation: 1. Locate the Recurring Donation record. 2. Click **Pause**. 3. Deselect one or more installments. In our example, deselect all paused installments. 4. Save your changes. . ## Pause a Fixed-Length Recurring Donation When you pause a fixed-length Recurring Donation (Recurring Type = Fixed), your donor suspends their giving but still intends to fulfill the original amount for the Recurring Donation after the pause is over. For example, let's say you have a fixed-length Recurring Donation where a donor signs up to give $100 per month for six months. The total expected amount is $600. Your donor pays the first installment, then asks to pause their giving for three months. In this example, the original installment schedule would look like this, with six consecutive installments: ![Upcoming Installments showing six consecutive installments.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/pre-paused-fixed-rd.png) When you pause the Recurring Donation, the adjusted installment schedule would look like this: ![Upcoming Installments showing six planned installments with three paused installments in between.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/post-pause-fixed-rd.png) In both cases, your donor fulfills the entire $600. When a donor asks to pause their Recurring Donation, it takes them longer to fulfill the original planned amount. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If the intention is to skip a certain number of installments entirely, adjust the Number of Installments instead of pausing the Recurring Donation. Using the previous example, change Number of Planned Installments from 6 to 3. The result is that the donor would give a total of $300, instead of the original $600. # Pause Gift Validations Minimize friction during bulk data migrations by pausing validations on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Fundraising settings:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Only pause these gift validations during bulk data imports or migration. To preserve data integrity, turn off the Pause Gift Validation settings before go-live. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Scroll to Pause Gift Validations. 3. To pause gift validations during bulk data migrations, turn on any of these settings, as needed. - Pause Gift Transaction Validations - Pause Gift Commitment Validations - Pause Gift Commitment Schedule Validations Turn off these settings when your migration is complete. # Pause Gift Validations Minimize friction during bulk data migrations by pausing validations on gift transactions, gift commitments, and gift commitment schedules. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To configure Fundraising settings:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Only pause these gift validations during bulk data imports or migration. To preserve data integrity, turn off the Pause Gift Validation settings before go-live. 1. In Setup, search for Fundraising, and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Scroll to Pause Gift Validations. 3. To pause gift validations during bulk data migrations, turn on any of these settings, as needed. - Pause Gift Transaction Validations - Pause Gift Commitment Validations - Pause Gift Commitment Schedule Validations Turn off these settings when your migration is complete. # Pause or Resume a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education Pause a recurring gift commitment to temporarily discontinue or skip some installments in an associated gift commitment schedule. You can resume the commitment when the donor is ready to restart payment. If you pause a schedule after its start date, the unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the pause period are removed. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To pause or resume a recurring gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. ​Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. To pause a schedule, click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and then select **Pause**. 1. Select the gift commitment schedule. 2. Select the pause dates. If you pause a schedule after its start date, the schedule splits and a new schedule with the type Pause Transactions is created for the specified period. 3. Save your changes. 4. To resume a schedule, click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and then select **Resume**. 1. Select the paused schedule. 2. Select the date to resume the commitment. 3. Save your changes. # Pause or Resume a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit Pause a recurring gift commitment to temporarily discontinue or skip some installments in an associated gift commitment schedule. You can resume the commitment when the donor is ready to restart payment. If you pause a schedule after its start date, the unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the pause period are removed. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To pause or resume a recurring gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. ​Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. To pause a schedule, click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and then select **Pause**. 1. Select the gift commitment schedule. 2. Select the pause dates. If you pause a schedule after its start date, the schedule splits and a new schedule with the type Pause Transactions is created for the specified period. 3. Save your changes. 4. To resume a schedule, click ![Show More](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/actions_menu.png)and then select **Resume**. 1. Select the paused schedule. 2. Select the date to resume the commitment. 3. Save your changes. # Payment Methods Configure payment methods and their impact on transaction journal records.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To edit the Transaction Journal object or set up Accounting Settings: | Manage Accounting Subledger | | To change picklists: | Customize Application | ## Add Payment Methods Accounting Subledger doesn't include default payment methods on transaction journal records. Add them on the object while making sure that they match the methods on your source object. 1. From the object management settings for transaction journal, go to **Fields & Relationships**. 2. Search for and then select **Payment Method**. 3. In the Payment Method Picklist Values section, click **New**. 4. Enter one payment method per line. 5. Save your changes. See [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5). ## Create Adjustment Transaction Journal Records Sometimes, accounting teams want to track payment method changes on the source records. To do so, configure Accounting Subledger to generate new transaction journal records with the updated payment method, and reclass records for the accounting data that you generated previously. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting Settings, and then select **Accounting Settings**. 2. Turn on **Create Adjustments When Payment Method Changes**. If you have transaction journal records that you don't want reprocessed, consider these options. - Change your Accounting Records Start Date to a future date so that the existing records don't generate additional ones. - Update the payment method on existing records to the new method using a tool such as Salesforce Data Loader. This option can be complex, so we recommend it for advanced admins and only after you test it in a sandbox. See [When to Use Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.when_to_use_the_data_loader.htm&type=5). # Permission Set Details Education Cloud offers features from multiple products, and some components require additional licenses. Identify the recommended permission sets for some basic roles in your institution.
Role Recommended Permission Sets
Admin User
  • Access Accounting Subledger Growth
  • CRM Analytics for Education Admin
  • CRM Analytics for Education User
  • Data Pipelines Base User
    Important
    Important You can assign the Data Pipelines Base User permission to only three users, so assign it to specific admin users.
  • DocGen Designer
  • DocGen User
  • Education Cloud Full Access
  • Manage Accounting Subledger
  • OmniStudio Admin
  • OmniStudio User

  • Query for Datapipelines User

  • Run Accounting Subledger Job
Application Reviewer
  • Education Cloud Limited Access
  • Omnistudio Admin
  • Omnistudio User
Experience Cloud User
  • Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access
  • DocGen Runtime Community User
Note
Note Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access includes all required Omnistudio permissions.
# Permission Sets Extend user access to the nonprofit Case Management managed package features by using permission sets. Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. You can assign permission sets to any user, regardless of their profile. And permission sets are additive, so if you have staff who manage programs and also do casework, you can assign multiple permission sets as needed. - **[Case Management Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_per_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the permission sets that are included with the Case Management managed package. - **[A Note About Open Orgs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_per_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If all users with a login to your org can see all of the data, you have what's called an open org. We recommend you use security and sharing settings to allow specific users to see records or fields, based on criteria you specify. - **[Assign Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_per_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign permission sets to give users access to the Case Management records and objects. - **[Understand Access to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_per_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to use sharing rules to expand access to additional groups of users. ## Case Management Permission Sets Learn about the permission sets that are included with the Case Management managed package. Case Management includes these permission sets:

Permission Set

Access

Assign To
ActionPlans
  • Read on Action Plans and Action Plan Templates
 Anyone who needs to view Action Plans or Action Plan Templates
Case Management: Manage

  • Access to the Case Management app

  • Create, Read, Edit, and Delete on Action Items, Action Item Templates, Assessments, Case Plans, Client Alerts, Client Note Relationships, Client Notes, Goal Action Item Templates, Goals, Goal Templates objects and fields

  • Access to the Case Management app

  • Create, Read, Edit, and Delete on Action Items, Action Item Templates, Assessments, Case Plans, Client Alerts, Client Note Relationships, Client Notes, Goal Action Item Templates, Goals, Goal Templates objects and fields

 Salesforce Admin or Program Manager

Case Management: Deliver

  • Access to the Case Management app

  • Create, Read, Edit, and Delete on Action Items, Assessments, Case Plans, Client Alerts, Client Note Relationships, Client Notes, Goals,Intakes, and Service Deliveries

  • Read on Action Item Templates and Goal Templates

Case Manager

Case Management: View

  • Access to the Case Management app

  • Read on Action Items, Action Item Templates, Assessments, Case Plans, Client Alerts, Client Note Relationships, Client Notes, Goals, Goal Templates,Intakes, and Service Deliveries

    Note
    Note If a user is assigned the Case Management: View permission set, they will not have access to the Client Notes tab. This behavior is by design and will be revisited in a future release.

Anyone who needs view-only access

PMM: Manage

  • Read, Create, and Edit on Program Cohorts, Program Engagements, Programs, Service Deliveries, and Services objects and fields

Program Directors

Program Managers

PMM: Deliver

  • Read access on Program Cohorts, Programs, Service Deliveries, and Services objects and fields

  • Create, Read, and Edit access on Program Engagements and Services Deliveries objects and fields

Case Managers

Service Providers

PMM: View

  • Read access on Program Cohorts, Program Engagements, Programs, Service Deliveries, and Services objects and fields

Staff who need visibility into program performance and service delivery to clients, such as Executive Directors and Developmental Staff
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Case Management and PMM permissions only apply to the custom objects within those applications. To address the object-level security for standard Salesforce objects, such as Account, Contact, and Case, Admins must ensure that Read, Create, Edit, and Delete permissions are assigned to the appropriate profiles to make these permissions work. For more information, see [Control Who Sees What](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_data_access.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If you want to extend access to Case Management or PMM records beyond what's included in the permission sets, we recommend [adding sharing rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Some organizations use a model where case managers share ownership of the client relationship. In this model, a variety of case managers deliver services to a client during the service period. Create sharing rules to let different case managers edit a client's case-related data."). ## A Note About Open Orgs If all users with a login to your org can see all of the data, you have what's called an open org. We recommend you use security and sharing settings to allow specific users to see records or fields, based on criteria you specify. If all users with a login to your Salesforce org can see all of the data in your org—that is, they can see all the records and fields—you have what's called an "open org." Case Management and PMM permission sets won't limit user access in open orgs. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important Adding Case Management and PMM to an existing NPSP open org results in open access for all users to all case management and program management data. As an alternative, we recommend you use security and sharing settings to allow specific users to see records or fields, based on criteria you specify. This more secure approach ensures case management client confidentiality, especially if you have general and fundraising staff using NPSP in your org. Assigning the Manage Cases and Manage Programs permissions to your case and management staff will keep your client data visibility restricted. ## Assign Permission Sets Assign permission sets to give users access to the Case Management records and objects. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, type Permission Sets, then click **Permission Sets**. 3. Select the permission set that you want to assign to users. 4. Click **Manage Assignments**, then **Add Assignments**. 5. Select the checkboxes next to the appropriate users, and click **Assign**. ## Understand Access to Records Understand how to use sharing rules to expand access to additional groups of users. You can use sharing rules to expand access to additional groups of users. Each record owner can manually share individual records with other users using the Share button on the record. However, it's often more efficient for an Admin to share records with defined groups of users. What does this mean for NPSP, PMM, and Case Management? - Additional permissions may be granted by assigning permission sets to users. In the Case Management app, we have extended permissions to include the Case Management custom objects. - Access to records a user doesn't own is first assigned by org-wide defaults. In the Case Management app and PMM, these are _public read/write_. This means all users who have access to the objects can view and edit records for those objects. Contacts, Action Item, Client Note Relationship, Goal, and Goal Action Item Template are controlled by the parent. This means a user can view, edit, or delete a record if they can perform the same action on the record to which it belongs. Although these are the default settings, you may not want all users in your org to be able to see or edit records. Take some time to think about your sharing model and decide if you want to make it more restrictive. # Permission Sets Assign Program Management Module permission sets to give users the right level of access and keep your data secure. - **[Program Management Module Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A user only needs one Program Management Module permission set; however, it can be combined with other product permission sets as needed. Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. - **[Assign Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign permission sets to users based on their profiles. - **[A Note About Open Orgs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If all users with a login to your Salesforce org can see all data in your org—that is, they can see all the records and fields—you have what's called an "open org." - **[Understand Access to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use sharing rules to expand access to additional groups of users. ## Program Management Module Permission Sets A user only needs one Program Management Module permission set; however, it can be combined with other product permission sets as needed. Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. You can assign permission sets to any user, regardless of their profile. PMM includes these permission sets:
Permission Set Access Assign To
PMM: Manage Read, Create, Edit, and Delete access on Programs, Program Engagements, Program Cohorts, Services, Service Deliveries, Service Participants, Service Schedules, and Service Sessions objects and fields.

People who set the direction of your programs and need to configure Programs, Services, Program Engagements, Program Cohorts, and Service Deliveries in your org. This includes Salesforce admins, program directors, and program managers.
PMM: Deliver

Read access on Programs, Program Cohorts, Services, and Service Schedules objects and fields. Read and Edit access on Service Sessions objects and fields. Create, Read, and Edit access on Program Engagements and Services Deliveries objects and fields.

Create, Read, and Edit access on Program Engagements, Services Deliveries, and Service Participants objects and fields.

 Font line staff, case managers, and service providers who deliver your programs and services. People with this permission can see but not modify Programs, Program Cohorts, and Services. They can create and modify Program Engagements and Service Deliveries to support their day-to-day work.
PMM: View Read access on Programs, Program Engagements, Program Cohorts, Services, Services Deliveries, Service Participants, Service Schedules, and Service Sessions objects and fields.

Executive staff, development directors, or others who need visibility into program performance and service delivery to clients, but don't actually provide these services. People with this permission can view but not modify PMM data.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important PMM permissions only apply to the custom objects in the PMM application. To address the object-level security for standard Salesforce objects such as Account, Contact, and Case, Admins must ensure that Read, Create, Edit, and Delete access is granted to the appropriate profiles. For more information, see [Control Who Sees What](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_data_access.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If you want to extend access to program management records beyond what is included in the permission sets, we recommend [adding sharing rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_shar_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Some organizations use a model where program managers share ownership of programs. Create sharing rules to let different program managers edit a client's program-related data."). ## Assign Permission Sets Assign permission sets to users based on their profiles. To assign permission sets: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then click **Permission Sets**. 3. Select the permission set that you want to assign to users. 4. Click **Manage Assignments**, then **Add Assignments**. 5. Select the checkboxes next to the appropriate users. 6. Click **Assign**. ## A Note About Open Orgs If all users with a login to your Salesforce org can see all data in your org—that is, they can see all the records and fields—you have what's called an "open org." PMM permission sets won’t limit user access in open orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note Adding PMM to an existing NPSP open org results in open access for all users to all program management data. As an alternative, we recommend you use security and sharing settings to allow specific users to see records or fields based on criteria you specify. This more secure approach ensures client confidentiality, especially if you have general and fundraising staff using NPSP in your org. Assigning the Manage Programs permissions to your programs and management staff will keep your client data visibility restricted. ## Understand Access to Records Use sharing rules to expand access to additional groups of users. Each record owner can manually share individual records with other users by selecting the Share button on the record. However, it’s often more efficient for an admin to share records with defined groups of users. What does this mean for NPSP and PMM? - Additional permissions can be granted by assigning permission sets to users. - Access to records a user doesn’t own is first assigned by org-wide defaults. In PMM, these are public read/write. This means that all users who have access to the objects can view records for those objects, but only the record owners can edit them. Although these are the default settings, you may not want all users in your org to be able to see or edit records. Take some time to think about your sharing model and decide if you want to make it more restrictive. # Permission Sets for Education Portal Users Create permission sets to assign object and field permissions so that constituents can use the components in the Education Portal template for Experience Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
A permission set is a way to assign object and field permissions so that constituents can use the components in a portal. Permission sets can also grant access to your portal. All Education Portal users need the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User permission set license. This permission set gives users a combination of Read and Edit access to fields in the portal, depending on the use case. Additionally, system permissions, paired with audiences, help tailor constituents' experiences based on their roles. To use the Experience Cloud functionality in Education Cloud, users need the Customer Community Plus license. This license allows for the additional record sharing that’s needed for many of Education Cloud’s portal experiences. See [Experience Cloud User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&language=en_US). Control access to the content and features of education portal by creating permission sets and managing permission set assignments. For example, create one permission set for applicants, one for students, and one for alumni. See [Create Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_create.htm&type=5) and [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&type=5). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important The standard system permission sets in Education Cloud provide users the access to the relevant portal elements. To add or remove access to objects and fields, see [Edit Object Permissions in Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_object_perms_edit.htm&type=5) and [Set Field Permissions in Permission Sets and Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_fls.htm&type=5). After you assign portal users a permission set, use the permission set to grant portal access. See [Add Members to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_customize_members.htm&type=5). # Personal Engagement Summarization Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes interactive, meaningful, and informative communication with an alumnus that deepens alumni relationships with the institution.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Alumni Engagement Metrics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager

Create a template-triggered prompt flow and add and configure these elements. See [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_build.htm&type=5).

Element

 Configuration
Start

  1. Select Automatic Inputs as the input type.

  2. Select Engagement Visualization Template Capability as the prompt template type.
Get Records

  1. Enter Get Contact as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Salesforce Object as the data source.

  3. Select Contact as the object.

  4. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  5. In Field, find and select Id.

  6. Select Equals as the operator.

  7. In Value, select $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID.

  8. Select Only the first record.

  9. Select Automatically store all fields.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. Enter Add Contact Name to the Prompt as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Name" : "{!Get_Contact.Name}", "Details": [.
Get Records

  1. Enter Get Engagement Actions as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select default as the data space.

  4. Select Engagement Action as the object.

  5. Enter 1 AND 2 AND 3 as the condition logic.

  6. Set these conditions.

    • ssot__IndividualId__c Equals $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID

    • ssot__EngagementCategory__c Equals CommunicationsCategory

    • ssot__EngagementDateTime__c Greater Than or Equal CurrentYear

  7. Select All Records.

  8. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. Enter Loop Through Engagement Actions as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Assignment

  1. Enter Set Channel Engagement Ids as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select ChannelEngagementIds as the variable.

  3. Select Add as the operator.

  4. Select Engagement Actions > Channel Engagement as the value.
Get Records

  1. Enter Get Channel Engagements as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select Channel Engagement as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__Id__c.

  7. Select In as the operator.

  8. In Value, find and select ChannelEngagementIds.

  9. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  10. Select All Records.

  11. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. Enter Loop Through Engagement Action as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Engagement Actions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Loop

  1. Enter Loop Through Channel Engagements as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Channel Engagements as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item as the direction.
Decision

  1. Enter Match Channel Engagement as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Match and enter details.

    1. In Label and Outcome API name, enter Match.

    2. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the outcome.

    3. Select Engagement Action > Channel Engagement as the resource.

    4. Select Equals as the operator.

    5. Select Channel Engagements > Channel Engagement Id as the value.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. Enter Add Channel Engagement to Prompt as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Date" "{!Loop_through_Each_Engagement_Action.ssot__EngagementDateTime__c}", "Subject" : "{!Loop_through_Channel_Engagements.ssot__Subject__c}" },.

Add Prompt Instructions

  1. Enter Add Ending Prompt as the label, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter ]}..
![Personal Engagement Summarization flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_personal_engagement.png) # Personal Investment and Philanthropy Summarization Use Flow Builder to create a summary for Alumni Engagement Metrics that describes the philanthropic contributions of an alumnus that are aligned with your institution's mission and goals.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Alumni Engagement Metrics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager

Create a template-triggered prompt flow and add and configure these elements. See [Build a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US).

Element

 Configuration
Start

  1. Select Automatic Inputs as the input type.

  2. Select Engagement Visualization Template Capability as the prompt template type.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Contact, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Salesforce Object as the data source.

  3. Select Contact as the object.

  4. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirement.

  5. In Field, find and select Id.

  6. Select Equals as the operator.

  7. In Value, select $Input > ContextRecord > Contact ID.

  8. Select Only the first record.

  9. Select Automatically store all fields.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Contact Name to the Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Name" : "{!Get_Contact.Name}", "Details": [.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Account Contact, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select Account Contact as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirements.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__IndividualId__c.

  7. Select Equals as the operator.

  8. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  9. Select Only the first record.

  10. Select Automatically store all fields.
Get Records

  1. In Label, enter Get Gift Transactions, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Data Cloud Object as the data source.

  3. Select Default as the data space.

  4. Select GiftTransaction as the object.

  5. Select All Conditions Are Met (AND) as the condition requirements.

  6. In Field, find and select ssot__DonorId__c.

  7. Select Equals as the operator.

  8. In Value, select Account Contact from Get_Account_Contact > ssot__AccountId__c.

  9. Click Add Condition.

  10. In Field, find and select ssot__TransactionDate__c.

  11. Select Greater Than or Equal as the operator.

  12. In Value, select CurrentYear.

  13. Select Not Sorted as the sort order.

  14. Select All records.

  15. Select Automatically store all fields.
Loop

  1. In Label, enter Loop through Gift Transactions.

    Press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. Select Get Gift Transactions as the collection variable.

  3. Select First item to last item.
Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Gift Transaction to the Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically create the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter { "Description" : "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__Description__c}", "Current Amount" : "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__CurrentAmount__c}", "Gift Type": "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__GiftType__c}", "Transaction Date": "{!Loop_through_Gift_Transactions.ssot__TransactionDate__c}" },.

Add Prompt Instructions

  1. In Label, enter Add Ending Prompt, and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name.

  2. In Prompt Instructions, enter ]}..
![Personal Investment and Philanthropy Summarization flow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_personal_investment_philanthropy.png) # Personalize Your App (Support Staff) Customize the Student Success Hub app to suit your work style and personal preferences. - **[Manage Your Navigation Tabs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_personalize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the app navigation bar to help your staff complete their tasks. - **[Update Your Profile Photo and Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_personalize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give students and other success team members a friendly face to connect with by uploading your profile photo. Also, fill out your About Me and contact information. ## Manage Your Navigation Tabs Customize the app navigation bar to help your staff complete their tasks. Drag tabs in the app navigation bar to rearrange them. Pin essential tabs, such as Notes, to a fixed position next to the app navigation menu so that they're always visible and readily available. To pin Notes or another item, first select it from the app navigation menu. Then, click the tab's dropdown arrow and select **Pin Tab**. ![The Notes tab with its dropdown menu showing and a callout on the Pin Tab command](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_personalize_pin_notes.png) As a bonus, pinned tabs take up less space on the app navigation bar. ![The pinned Notes tab icon in the app navigation bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_app_personalize_pinned_item.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Student Success Hub remembers which tabs you had open last. When you log out and back in, you can resume right where you left off. ## Update Your Profile Photo and Information Give students and other success team members a friendly face to connect with by uploading your profile photo. Also, fill out your About Me and contact information. 1. In the page header, click your User icon, and then click your name to view your User profile. ![Click your User icon in the header, and then click your name](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_profile_header_access.png) 2. Click the camera icon next to the profile photo placeholder, upload your photo, and adjust its position. 3. Save your changes. Now, fill out your About Me and contact information. 4. From your User profile, click **Edit**. 5. Enter your details and save your changes. # Petitions and Waivers Academic petitions and waivers are requests for exceptions to academic requirements, rules, or deadlines. With Unified Catalog, students submit requests and supporting documentation, and institutions review, track, and record the outcomes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use intake forms and configurable approval workflows to manage academic petitions and waivers in one place. Centralized tracking and outcome management provide an audit trail, support regulatory compliance, and preserve petition and waiver decisions as part of each student’s record. A petition or waiver moves through these stages: ![Shows the flow of tasks for petitions and waivers](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_petitions_and_waivers_flow.png) - Through a learner portal, students submit petition requests for an exception to a standard academic rule or deadline. - Students provide all necessary fields and documentation. - The petition automatically routes to the correct advisor for review and signature via workflows and approval processes. - Students view the real-time status of the request. - The system stores the approved or denied petition or waiver on the student's 360-degree record. This action provides a complete audit trail for compliance and future advising. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up Your Org for Petitions and Waivers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_petitions_and_waivers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure your org to allow learners to request petitions and upload documents. Configure the Salesforce admin’s permissions to manage student petitions and waivers.") # Philanthropic Research Automation in Education Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Prospect Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence Flow Creates a party philanthropic occurrence record if one doesn't already exist for the Party Philanthropic Indicator, and associates the indicator with the new occurrence. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone Flow Initiates a DPE job to create a Party Philanthropic Milestone record based on the current date, fiscal year, and constituent role types passed into the flow. Sends an email to the flow user if the job fails. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This flow contains two values in the ConstituentRoleRoleTypes variable. If you add constituent roles, make sure you place a comma between the roles without spaces. Create Party Categories DPE Definition Creates party category records with appropriate classifications based on a donor's giving status. If the donor gave last year but not this year, the job assigns the LYBUNT and Lapsed Donor classifications. If the donor’s last giving was before last year and hasn’t given since then, the job assigns SYBUNT and Lapsed Donor. If the donor gives in the current year, the job clears these classifications. Create Prospect Research Milestone DPE Definition Creates a Party Philanthropic Milestone with a milestone date of current job run that combines the data from the person account and contact profile. The job then iterates through each Party Philanthropic Assessment record, filling in missing financial information using the latest assessment’s data. It also counts the Party Philanthropic indicators, occurrences, and assessments, totaling them and setting the value on the Party Philanthropic Milestone. Before you run a DPE job, clone and activate it. To avoid problems with the Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone flow, leave the API name for the DPE job as Create\_Prospect\_Research\_Milestone when you save the DPE job. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case Flow Creates a case for a philanthropic research request. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Flow Gets the details of the interaction summary, party philanthropic assessment, party philanthropic indicator, or party philanthropic occurrence record. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Flow Gets the details of the interaction summary, party philanthropic assessment, party philanthropic indicator, or party philanthropic occurrence record. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Flow Gets the details of the interaction summary, party philanthropic assessment, party philanthropic indicator, or party philanthropic occurrence record. Update Planned Gift Flow Updates the deferred future value, future value, and present value of the planned gift with an ID that matches the plannedGiftId that’s passed into the screen flow. Update Planned Gift Values Flow Updates the deferred future value, future value, and present value of a planned gift based on the gift type passed into the subflow. Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes Flow Updates the deferred future value, future value, and present value of a planned gift when the expectancy field of the planned gift record changes. # Philanthropic Research Automation in Nonprofit Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Prospect Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence Flow Creates a party philanthropic occurrence record if one doesn't already exist for the Party Philanthropic Indicator, and associates the indicator with the new occurrence. Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone Flow Initiates a DPE job to create a Party Philanthropic Milestone record based on the current date, fiscal year, and constituent role types passed into the flow. Sends an email to the flow user if the job fails. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note This flow contains two values in the ConstituentRoleRoleTypes variable. If you add constituent roles, make sure you place a comma between the roles without spaces. Create Party Categories DPE Definition Creates party category records with appropriate classifications based on a donor's giving status. If the donor gave last year but not this year, the job assigns the LYBUNT and Lapsed Donor classifications. If the donor’s last giving was before last year and hasn’t given since then, the job assigns SYBUNT and Lapsed Donor. If the donor gives in the current year, the job clears these classifications. Create Prospect Research Milestone DPE Definition Creates a Party Philanthropic Milestone with a milestone date of current job run that combines the data from the person account and contact profile. The job then iterates through each Party Philanthropic Assessment record, filling in missing financial information using the latest assessment’s data. It also counts the Party Philanthropic indicators, occurrences, and assessments, totaling them and setting the value on the Party Philanthropic Milestone. Before you run a DPE job, clone and activate it. To avoid problems with the Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone flow, leave the API name for the DPE job as Create\_Prospect\_Research\_Milestone when you save the DPE job. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case Flow Creates a case for a philanthropic research request. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Flow Gets the details of the interaction summary, party philanthropic assessment, party philanthropic indicator, or party philanthropic occurrence record. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Flow Gets the details of the interaction summary, party philanthropic assessment, party philanthropic indicator, or party philanthropic occurrence record. Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details Flow Gets the details of the interaction summary, party philanthropic assessment, party philanthropic indicator, or party philanthropic occurrence record. Update Planned Gift Flow Updates the deferred future value, future value, and present value of the planned gift with an ID that matches the plannedGiftId that’s passed into the screen flow. Update Planned Gift Values Flow Updates the deferred future value, future value, and present value of a planned gift based on the gift type passed into the subflow. Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes Flow Updates the deferred future value, future value, and present value of a planned gift when the expectancy field of the planned gift record changes. # Philanthropic Research in Education Philanthropic research is the foundation of strategic donor engagement. Use Philanthropic Research tools in Salesforce to understand donor capacity, track wealth signals, and build meaningful relationships with individuals and organizations. With a centralized view of philanthropic data, prioritize outreach and identify opportunities for deeper engagement. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Philanthropic Research brings together data, automation, and collaboration tools to support your fundraising strategy. Use these features to research prospective donors, assess wealth capacity, and act on insights across your team. - Manage philanthropic records—track party philanthropic indicator, assessment, occurrence, and milestone records for a holistic view of donor wealth and engagement. - Work from a centralized app—the Philanthropic Research Lightning app centralizes cases, donor profiles, wealth signals, and constituent roles for efficient research management. - Automate key workflows—automate record creation, planned gift updates, and donor classification using built-in flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions. - Collaborate in Slack—integrate Salesforce with Slack to create research request channels, ensuring real-time alignment between researchers and relationship officers. Relationship officers and prospect researchers can use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize philanthropic engagement and research efforts. - **[Prerequisites for Philanthropic Research in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_prerequisites_for_philanthropic_research.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To prepare your Salesforce org to use Philanthropic Research, complete these prerequisites. - **[Philanthropic Research Records in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build philanthropic relationships by using Fundraising objects to identify, track, and act on data of a person or an organization. - **[Philanthropic Research Lightning App in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage your philanthropic research requests and insights in one place with the Philanthropic Research Lightning app. - **[Philanthropic Research Automation in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow. - **[Create a Research Request Case Slack Channel Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_research_request_slack_channel.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify the Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case flow. When your team creates a research request case, the updated flow creates a Slack channel so that relationship officers and researchers can collaborate on research requests directly in Slack. # Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit Philanthropic research is the foundation of strategic donor engagement. Use Philanthropic Research tools in Salesforce to understand donor capacity, track wealth signals, and build meaningful relationships with individuals and organizations. With a centralized view of philanthropic data, prioritize outreach and identify opportunities for deeper engagement. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Philanthropic Research brings together data, automation, and collaboration tools to support your fundraising strategy. Use these features to research prospective donors, assess wealth capacity, and act on insights across your team. - Manage philanthropic records—track party philanthropic indicator, assessment, occurrence, and milestone records for a holistic view of donor wealth and engagement. - Work from a centralized app—the Philanthropic Research Lightning app centralizes cases, donor profiles, wealth signals, and constituent roles for efficient research management. - Automate key workflows—automate record creation, planned gift updates, and donor classification using built-in flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions. - Collaborate in Slack—integrate Salesforce with Slack to create research request channels, ensuring real-time alignment between researchers and relationship officers. Relationship officers and prospect researchers can use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize philanthropic engagement and research efforts. - **[Prerequisites for Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_prerequisites_for_philanthropic_research.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To prepare your Salesforce org to use Philanthropic Research, complete these prerequisites. - **[Philanthropic Research Records in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build philanthropic relationships by using Fundraising objects to identify, track, and act on data of a person or an organization. - **[Philanthropic Research Lightning App in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage your philanthropic research requests and insights in one place with the Philanthropic Research Lightning app. - **[Philanthropic Research Automation in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow. - **[Create a Research Request Case Slack Channel Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_research_request_slack_channel.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify the Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case flow. When your team creates a research request case, the updated flow creates a Slack channel so that relationship officers and researchers can collaborate on research requests directly in Slack. # Philanthropic Research Lightning App in Education Manage your philanthropic research requests and insights in one place with the Philanthropic Research Lightning app. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Philanthropic research is the foundation of strategic donor engagement. It empowers advancement professionals to understand the motivations, values, capacity, and networks of individuals, households, and organizations. The Philanthropic Research Lightning app optimizes philanthropic research by enabling you to manage cases, identify raw indicators, review wealth assessments, and examine the overall profiles of donors at a glance. Additionally, create contacts, opportunities, and cases to fuel insights. The app includes these sections. ## Cases Create and manage philanthropic research cases. For example, assign a case to a new owner or add it to a watchlist. ## Accounts Create and manage institutional and person accounts. For example, import accounts and discover new companies using a Lightning Data package. Schedule appointments or create new contacts from an account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Contact Create and manage donor accounts. For example, add a donor to a campaign and send a donor an email. ## Contact Profiles Create and manage contact profiles. For example, review demographic data about a contact such as birthplace and whether the contact is a first generation student. ## Party Philanthropic Research Profiles Create and manage party philanthropic research profiles. For example, identify the researcher assigned to the profile and when the profile was started. See the progression of the profile, including how many artifacts have been collected to date. Review wealth indicators such as the estimated annual wealth growth rate. Review wealth assessments and signals. ## Party Philanthropic Indicators Create and manage party philanthropic indicators. For example, review the estimated value and source of the indicator. ## Party Philanthropic Occurrences Create and manage party philanthropic occurrences. For example, review the estimated value of the occurrence and whether the occurrence was verified or inferred. ## Party Philanthropic Assessments Create and manage party philanthropic assessments. For example, review the assessment type and rating. Use the AI-generated short and extended summaries to quickly identify opportunities. ## Party Philanthropic Milestones Create and manage party philanthropic milestones. For example, review the milestone’s strength and drawbacks. Use the AI-generated short and extended summaries to quickly identify opportunities. ## Party Categories Create and manage party categories. For example, review an account’s classification such as LYBUNT (last year but unfortunately not this). ## Interaction Summaries Create and manage interaction summaries. For example, review an interaction’s purpose and confidentiality. ## Donor Gift Summaries Create and manage donor gift summaries. For example, review a donor’s best gift year and gift count. ## Constituent Roles Create and manage constituent roles. For example, review the role type and effective start date for an account, contact, or individual. # Philanthropic Research Lightning App in Nonprofit Manage your philanthropic research requests and insights in one place with the Philanthropic Research Lightning app. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Philanthropic research is the foundation of strategic donor engagement. It empowers advancement professionals to understand the motivations, values, capacity, and networks of individuals, households, and organizations. The Philanthropic Research Lightning app optimizes philanthropic research by enabling you to manage cases, identify raw indicators, review wealth assessments, and examine the overall profiles of donors at a glance. Additionally, create contacts, opportunities, and cases to fuel insights. The app includes these sections. ## Cases Create and manage philanthropic research cases. For example, assign a case to a new owner or add it to a watchlist. ## Accounts Create and manage institutional and person accounts. For example, import accounts and discover new companies using a Lightning Data package. Schedule appointments or create new contacts from an account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Contact Create and manage donor accounts. For example, add a donor to a campaign and send a donor an email. ## Contact Profiles Create and manage contact profiles. For example, review demographic data about a contact such as birthplace and whether the contact is a first generation student. ## Party Philanthropic Research Profiles Create and manage party philanthropic research profiles. For example, identify the researcher assigned to the profile and when the profile was started. See the progression of the profile, including how many artifacts have been collected to date. Review wealth indicators such as the estimated annual wealth growth rate. Review wealth assessments and signals. ## Party Philanthropic Indicators Create and manage party philanthropic indicators. For example, review the estimated value and source of the indicator. ## Party Philanthropic Occurrences Create and manage party philanthropic occurrences. For example, review the estimated value of the occurrence and whether the occurrence was verified or inferred. ## Party Philanthropic Assessments Create and manage party philanthropic assessments. For example, review the assessment type and rating. Use the AI-generated short and extended summaries to quickly identify opportunities. ## Party Philanthropic Milestones Create and manage party philanthropic milestones. For example, review the milestone’s strength and drawbacks. Use the AI-generated short and extended summaries to quickly identify opportunities. ## Party Categories Create and manage party categories. For example, review an account’s classification such as LYBUNT (last year but unfortunately not this). ## Interaction Summaries Create and manage interaction summaries. For example, review an interaction’s purpose and confidentiality. ## Donor Gift Summaries Create and manage donor gift summaries. For example, review a donor’s best gift year and gift count. ## Constituent Roles Create and manage constituent roles. For example, review the role type and effective start date for an account, contact, or individual. # Philanthropic Research Records in Education Build philanthropic relationships by using Fundraising objects to identify, track, and act on data of a person or an organization. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To work with philanthropic records:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
## Create a Party Philanthropic Indicator Record Party Philanthropic Indicator records represent an unconfirmed or soft indication that highlights a person's wealth or growth potential. If you have a person or organization whose involvement makes them a good candidate for building a relationship, create a Party Philanthropic Indicator record for that account. 1. From the account page for a person or an organization, on the Party Philanthropic Indicators related list, click **New**. 2. Enter the relevant information, and then save your changes. ## Create a Party Philanthropic Assessment Record Party Philanthropic Assessment records represent a formalized assessment of wealth when a rating takes place, such as a third-party wealth assessment, a property valuation, a financial asset assessment, or an internal assessment. 1. From the account page for a person or an organization, under Party Philanthropic Assessments, click **New**. 2. Enter the relevant information, and then save your changes. ## Create a Party Philanthropic Occurrence Record Launch a flow from a Party Philanthropic Indicator record to create a Party Philanthropic Occurrence record for a person or an organization. Party Philanthropic Occurrence records represent a confirmed or financially quantifiable occurrence in which a person’s wealth changes. Before you create an occurrence record, review the party philanthropic assessment records for the account, and make sure you have enough information to move forward with that person or organization. ![Verify Indicator button on the Party Philanthropic Indicator record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/fundraising_verify_indicator.png) 1. From the account page for an individual or organization, open a Party Philanthropic Indicator record. 2. Click **Verify Indicator**. The flow creates a Party Philanthropic Occurrence record for the individual or organization and updates the status of the Party Philanthropic Indicator record to Promoted. ## Create a Party Philanthropic Milestone Record Run a schedule-triggered flow to create a Party Philanthropic Milestone record based on the current date, fiscal year, and constituent role types passed into the flow. Run the Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone flow. See [Philanthropic Research Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow."). # Philanthropic Research Records in Nonprofit Build philanthropic relationships by using Fundraising objects to identify, track, and act on data of a person or an organization. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To work with philanthropic records:

FundraisingAccess permission set
## Create a Party Philanthropic Indicator Record Party Philanthropic Indicator records represent an unconfirmed or soft indication that highlights a person's wealth or growth potential. If you have a person or organization whose involvement makes them a good candidate for building a relationship, create a Party Philanthropic Indicator record for that account. 1. From the account page for a person or an organization, on the Party Philanthropic Indicators related list, click **New**. 2. Enter the relevant information, and then save your changes. ## Create a Party Philanthropic Assessment Record Party Philanthropic Assessment records represent a formalized assessment of wealth when a rating takes place, such as a third-party wealth assessment, a property valuation, a financial asset assessment, or an internal assessment. 1. From the account page for a person or an organization, under Party Philanthropic Assessments, click **New**. 2. Enter the relevant information, and then save your changes. ## Create a Party Philanthropic Occurrence Record Launch a flow from a Party Philanthropic Indicator record to create a Party Philanthropic Occurrence record for a person or an organization. Party Philanthropic Occurrence records represent a confirmed or financially quantifiable occurrence in which a person’s wealth changes. Before you create an occurrence record, review the party philanthropic assessment records for the account, and make sure you have enough information to move forward with that person or organization. ![Verify Indicator button on the Party Philanthropic Indicator record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/fundraising_verify_indicator.png) 1. From the account page for an individual or organization, open a Party Philanthropic Indicator record. 2. Click **Verify Indicator**. The flow creates a Party Philanthropic Occurrence record for the individual or organization and updates the status of the Party Philanthropic Indicator record to Promoted. ## Create a Party Philanthropic Milestone Record Run a schedule-triggered flow to create a Party Philanthropic Milestone record based on the current date, fiscal year, and constituent role types passed into the flow. Run the Prospect Research: Create Party Philanthropic Milestone flow. See [Philanthropic Research Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use flows and Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions to create and manage philanthropic research records. To customize a flow, clone, make your changes, and then activate the cloned flow."). # Philanthropic Research Subagents in Agentforce in Education Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Leverage these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. With Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce enabled, relationship officers and prospect researchers can use the agent to: - Summarize the philanthropic milestones and wealth capacities of prospects - Get philanthropic assessments on prospects - Create philanthropic research requests - Get answers to questions about a prospect’s household wealth, professional affiliations, and philanthropic events - Create agent prepared assessments - Create party philanthropic research profiles and research requests or case records in Slack - Create party philanthropic research profile canvases in Slack Philanthropic Research in Agentforce includes these subagents and actions:
Subagent Agent Action
Philanthropic Milestones Research
Wealth Capacity Research
Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management
Party Philanthropic Research Profile Canvas Management
- **[Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce Considerations in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Grounding Data for Philanthropic Research Topics in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_grounding_data_for_philanthropic_research_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create data that aligns with the philanthropic research topics to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs. - **[Set Up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce to get insights into philanthropic and wealth data, answer questions about prospects, and create party philanthropic research profiles, research request cases, and research profile canvases in Slack. - **[Create Research Profiles and Research Profile Canvases in Slack in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_create_research_profile_canvas_in_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Integrate Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce with Slack. Create party philanthropic research profiles, research requests, and research profile canvases. - **[Configure Flows for Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_config_flows_research_profile_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management subagent uses flows to create research request cases and research profiles. Modify the existing flows based on your organization’s needs and specific business logic. - **[Show Research Profile Cards in Slack in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_show_research_profile_cards_in_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Canvas Management subagent creates the Research Profile Summary canvas in Slack. To show research profile record cards on the canvas, add your org’s domain URL to the Create Slack Canvas Layout for Party Philanthropic Research Profile prompt template. # Philanthropic Research Subagents in Agentforce in Nonprofit Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Leverage these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. With Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce enabled, relationship officers and prospect researchers can use the agent to: - Summarize the philanthropic milestones and wealth capacities of prospects - Get philanthropic assessments on prospects - Create philanthropic research requests - Get answers to questions about a prospect’s household wealth, professional affiliations, and philanthropic events - Create agent prepared assessments - Create party philanthropic research profiles and research requests or case records in Slack - Create party philanthropic research profile canvases in Slack Philanthropic Research in Agentforce includes these subagents and actions:
Subagent Agent Action
Philanthropic Milestones Research
Wealth Capacity Research
Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management
Party Philanthropic Research Profile Canvas Management
- **[Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce Considerations in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Grounding Data for Philanthropic Research Topics in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_grounding_data_for_philanthropic_research_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create data that aligns with the philanthropic research topics to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs. - **[Set Up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce to get insights into philanthropic and wealth data, answer questions about prospects, and create party philanthropic research profiles, research request cases, and research profile canvases in Slack. - **[Create Research Profiles and Research Profile Canvases in Slack in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_research_profile_canvas_in_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Integrate Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce with Slack. Create party philanthropic research profiles, research requests, and research profile canvases. - **[Configure Flows for Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_config_flows_research_profile_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management subagent uses flows to create research request cases and research profiles. Modify the existing flows based on your organization’s needs and specific business logic. - **[Show Research Profile Cards in Slack in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_show_research_profile_cards_in_slack.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Canvas Management subagent creates the Research Profile Summary canvas in Slack. To show research profile record cards on the canvas, add your org’s domain URL to the Create Slack Canvas Layout for Party Philanthropic Research Profile prompt template. # Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce Considerations in Education To use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
## Language and Locale Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports English in these locales. | Language | Locale | Code | | --- | --- | --- | | English | English (United States) | en\_US | | English | English (United Kingdom) | en\_GB | ## Large Language Model Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports these geo-aware models. | Model | | --- | | OpenAI and Azure OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni) | Agent actions can make calls to other predefined LLMs. Bring-Your-Own-Model isn’t supported, but custom actions that execute prompt templates can use any Salesforce-managed model. See [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US&type=5). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports the Trust Layer services supported by the [Agentforce Employee Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US&type=5) type. ## Feature Region Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports the geo-aware models supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Geo-Aware LLM Request Routing on the Einstein Generative AI Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_geo_aware_routing.htm&language=en_US). ## Data Cloud One Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce isn't supported in Data Cloud One companion orgs. # Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce Considerations in Nonprofit To use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
## Language and Locale Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports English in these locales. | Language | Locale | Code | | --- | --- | --- | | English | English (United States) | en\_US | | English | English (United Kingdom) | en\_GB | ## Large Language Model Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports these geo-aware models. | Model | | --- | | OpenAI and Azure OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni) | Agent actions can make calls to other predefined LLMs. Bring-Your-Own-Model isn’t supported, but custom actions that execute prompt templates can use any Salesforce-managed model. See [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US&type=5). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports the Trust Layer services supported by the [Agentforce Employee Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US&type=5) type. ## Feature Region Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce supports the geo-aware models supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Geo-Aware LLM Request Routing on the Einstein Generative AI Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_geo_aware_routing.htm&language=en_US). ## Data Cloud One Support Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce isn't supported in Data Cloud One companion orgs. # Phone and Email Workflow Rules This article provides more information about the phone and email workflow rules that come with the Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Salesforce, a workflow rule causes certain actions to happen, when certain criteria are met. For example, the Contact.EmailChanged\_Work workflow rules tells Salesforce to fill in the Work Email field with the value in the standard email field, every time you change or enter a standard email for a new or existing Contact. The Nonprofit Success Pack comes with a number of workflow rules, which you can adjust or disable to your liking. - **[Where to Find Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find NPSP email workflow rules in Setup. - **[Email and Phone Fields and Workflow Rules for NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your organization uses the custom NPSP phone and email fields, these workflow rules enforce your organization's business rules and help you to maintain consistent data. - **[Workflow Rule Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Things to keep in mind when using NPSP email and phone workflow rules. ## Overview In Salesforce, a workflow rule causes certain actions to happen, when certain criteria are met. For example, the Contact.EmailChanged\_Work workflow rules tells Salesforce to fill in the Work Email field with the value in the standard email field, every time you change or enter a standard email for a new or existing Contact. The Nonprofit Success Pack comes with a number of workflow rules, which you can adjust or disable to your liking. ## Where to Find Workflow Rules Find NPSP email workflow rules in Setup. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 3. Read the "What is Workflow" page if you haven't ever done that before! 4. Click **Continue**. You will see a list of all workflow rules in your Salesforce org. 5. Click on the rule name to see the rule detail and related workflow actions. For more information about workflow rules, see [Workflow](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=customize_wf.htm&language=en_US) and [Create a Workflow Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=workflow_rules_new.htm&language=en_US) in the Salesforce Help & Training. ## Email and Phone Fields and Workflow Rules for NPSP If your organization uses the custom NPSP phone and email fields, these workflow rules enforce your organization's business rules and help you to maintain consistent data. - **[NPSP Custom Fields Used in Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the NPSP fields that are used in workflow rules. - **[Email Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the NPSP workflow rules for managing email addresses. - **[Phone Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_phone_and_email_workflow_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the NPSP workflow rules for managing phone numbers. ### NPSP Custom Fields Used in Workflow Rules Learn about the NPSP fields that are used in workflow rules. - **Preferred Phone** - Picklist field used to identify the phone number preferred by this Contact; home, work, mobile or other. The standard Phone field is updated with the preferred phone number. - **Home Phone** - Phone number field for the Contact's home phone number. - **Work Phone** - Phone number field for the Contact's work phone number. - **Mobile Phone** - Phone number field for the Contact's mobile phone number. - **Other Phone** - Phone number field for an additional phone number for the Contact. - **Preferred Email** - Picklist field used to identify the email address preferred by this Contact; personal, work, or alternate. - **Personal Email** - Email field for the Contact's personal email address. - **Work Email** - Email field for the Contact's work email address. - **Alternate Email** - Email field for an additional email address for this Contact. ### Email Workflow Rules Learn about the NPSP workflow rules for managing email addresses.
Workflow Rule Description When Run/Evaluated
Contact.EmailChanged_Alternate If the standard Email field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Email picklist is set to Alternate THEN Salesforce will fill in the Alternate Email field with the email address entered in the standard Email field. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.EmailChanged_Personal If the standard Email field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Email picklist is set to Personal or Home THEN Salesforce will fill in the Personal Email field with the email address entered in the standard Email field When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.EmailChanged_Work If the standard Email field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Email picklist is set to Work THEN Salesforce will fill in the Work Email field with the email address entered in the standard Email field. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.Preferred_Email__c This workflow OVERWRITES the existing value in the standard Email field based on the Preferred Email field value, and on which custom email fields are populated. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Email only: Paste to Work If there is a value in the standard Email field AND no values in any NPSP email fields (Personal, Work or Alternate) AND there is no value selected in the Preferred Email picklist, this Workflow updates two fields: Work Email is updated with the email address in the standard Email field and Preferred Email is set to Work. Evaluate the rule when a contact is created, and any time it's edited to subsequently meet the criteria.
### Phone Workflow Rules Learn about the NPSP workflow rules for managing phone numbers.
Workflow Rule Description When Run/Evaluated
Contact.PhoneChanged_Home If the standard Phone field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Phone picklist is set to Home THEN Salesforce will fill in the Home Phone field with the phone number entered in the standard Phone field. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.PhoneChanged_Mobile If the standard Phone field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Phone picklist is set to Mobile THEN Salesforce will fill in the Mobile Phone field with the phone number entered in the standard Phone field. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.PhoneChanged_Other If the standard Phone field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Phone picklist is set to Other THEN Salesforce will fill in the Other Phone field with the phone number entered in the standard Phone field. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.PhoneChanged_Work If the standard Phone field is newly entered or changed AND the Preferred Phone picklist is set to Work THEN Salesforce will fill in the Work Phone field with the phone number entered in the standard Phone field. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Contact.Preferred_Phone__c This workflow OVERWRITES the existing value in the standard Phone field based on the Preferred Phone field value. When a contact is created, and every time it's edited.
Phone only: Paste to Work If there is a value in the standard Phone field AND no values in any of the NPSP phone fields (Home, Work, Mobile or Other) AND there is no value selected in the Preferred Phone picklist, Salesforce updates two fields: Work Phone is updated with the phone number in the standard Phone field and Preferred Phone is set to Work. Evaluate the rule when a contact is created, and any time it's edited to subsequently meet the criteria.
## Workflow Rule Considerations Things to keep in mind when using NPSP email and phone workflow rules. - If you are setting the standard **Email** field via import or a third party app, the NPSP **Email only: Paste to Work** workflow keeps the standard **Email** field in sync with the NPSP custom fields. - If you are using only the standard Email and Phone fields and removed the NPSP custom fields from your page layouts (i.e., they are not in use), it does no harm to leave the workflow rules activated. You can simply ignore them. In fact, it may help to keep them active in case you change your process in the future and/or your third party email marketing tool interfaces with these fields. # Place Holds on Students Manually Identify the students who are in violation of a regulation clause and create a case for each student. Then create a regulatory code violation record that corresponds to the hold and assign it to each student. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To place holds: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. Create a case for a student who is in violation of an academic policy. For example, a student whose GPA is less than 2.0. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Contacts**. 2. Click the student's account. 3. In the Related tab, go to Cases, and then click **New**. 4. Enter the details of this case. 5. Save your changes. 2. Create a regulatory code violation record that represents the violation of a specific hold. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Regulatory Code Violations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select a regulatory code record. For example, select **Academic Standing Hold**. 4. Select **Open** as the status. 5. Enter the date and time. 6. Set the compliance due date to define a target timeline for the student to resolve the hold. 7. Specify if the violation is recurring. 8. Select **Case** as the assessment context, and then select the student’s case. This selection assigns the regulatory code violation to a student. 9. Save your changes. 3. Create a regulatory code violation regulation clause version record. This record connects the hold (regulatory code violation) to specific rules (regulation clause versions) that the student fails to meet. 1. From the regulatory code violation record that you created, go to the Related tab. 2. In the Regulatory Code Viol Reg Clause Versions section, click **New**. 3. Select the appropriate regulation clause version. For example, select **GPA Requirement\_V1**. 4. Save your changes. 5. To add more regulation clause versions applicable to this violation, create additional regulatory code violation regulation clause version records . 4. Assign an action plan to the student’s case. 1. Go to the student's case and click the **Action Plans** tab. 2. Select **Add Action Plan**. 3. Enter a name. For example, enter Create a remedial plan with your advisor. 4. Set a start date. 5. Select an action plan template that you defined. 6. Select **Regulatory Code Violation** as the target record, and then select the record that you created for the student. 7. Click **Next** and save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Automate Hold Placement on Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_hold_placement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Build an automation flow by using invocable actions. Run the flow to run expression sets that evaluate students for hold violations and assign holds to a group of students.") - [Resolve Holds on Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_resolve_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Manage and resolve holds in each student's case.") # Plan a One-Time Event You can plan your one-time event as you wish, but we have some steps that we think will help. To plan a one-time event, we recommend you: 1. [Sketch Out the Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_one_time_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you're planning an event that relies on volunteer help, it's essential to first visualize (perhaps even sketch out) the event structure so that you can translate it into Salesforce.") 2. [Set Up a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Campaign is the top level of your volunteer structure. You can either create a Campaign manually or use the wizard.") 3. [Create Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Jobs represent the next level down in your structure. Before you start creating Jobs, it's a good idea to jot down exactly what Jobs and Shifts you need to fill.") 4. [Create Job Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If there are multiple dates or times when you need volunteers for a Job, you can set up Shifts so you can track which volunteers are coming when.") - **[Sketch Out the Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_one_time_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you're planning an event that relies on volunteer help, it's essential to first visualize (perhaps even sketch out) the event structure so that you can translate it into Salesforce. ## Sketch Out the Structure When you're planning an event that relies on volunteer help, it's essential to first visualize (perhaps even sketch out) the event structure so that you can translate it into Salesforce. Many small to medium nonprofits hold events that require many volunteers. For example, the event planner at Sarah's local community kitchen puts on an annual gala where she needs to schedule setup crew, waitstaff, bartenders, cleanup crew, and more. And on top of all those volunteer positions, she needs different volunteers at different times. The planner at the community kitchen knows she needs volunteers at these times: - Setup Crew 4 pm - 6 pm (10 people) - Guest Check In 6 pm - 7 pm (2 people) - Waitstaff 6 pm - 8 pm (10 people), 8 pm - 10 pm (6 people) - Bartender 6 pm - 8 pm (2 people), 8 pm - 10 pm (2 people) - Cleanup Crew 10 pm - 12 am (10 people) Think of the big fundraising event as the Campaign, since it is the top level of the structure. The event has specific volunteer tasks, such as setup and cleanup, that are represented by Jobs. You can further break down Jobs into Shifts that require a certain number of volunteers on specific dates and times. ![Structure with campaign on top, then jobs, then shifts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4s_one_time_event_structure.png) The way you structure your data affects how your volunteer requests appear on your website. For more information on website integration, see [Website Integration—A Tag Team Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_integration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Salesforce features and tools and streamline working with your web developer to integrate your website."). Now that you have a vision of how you want your event structure laid out, go ahead and start creating it in V4S. First up, create the Campaign. # Plan a Recurring Event Learn about the steps for planning a recurring event in Volunteers for Salesforce. 1. [Sketch Out the Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Many nonprofit organizations need to plan multiple events throughout the year. Perhaps you hold weekend park cleanups, perhaps you plan monthly fun runs, or maybe your organization serves free community dinners multiple times per week.") 2. [Create the Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_create_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Campaign is the top level of your recurring event structure.") 3. [Create an Ongoing Job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_ongoing_job.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you have Jobs with multiple Shifts occurring in the future, you need an easy way to automate the creation of those Shifts. (It would be tedious to manually enter each one!) Volunteers for Salesforce' Job Recurrence Schedules do the work for you.") 4. [Schedule Recurring Shifts Using Job Recurrence Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_shifts_jrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Job Recurrence Schedules provide an easy way to schedule multiple future Job shifts. You determine when and how often the shifts occur.") 5. [Sign Up a Recurring Volunteer Using Volunteer Recurrence Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_volunteer_vrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you have ongoing Jobs (created using a Job Recurrence Schedule), you may be lucky enough to have dedicated volunteers who want to sign up for Shifts on a regular basis. You can use the Volunteers for Salesforce Volunteer Recurrence Schedule to easily set up a recurring schedule for a regular volunteer. You can specify when the schedule starts and ends, and which days of the week and month the volunteer wants to work.") - **[Sketch Out the Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many nonprofit organizations need to plan multiple events throughout the year. Perhaps you hold weekend park cleanups, perhaps you plan monthly fun runs, or maybe your organization serves free community dinners multiple times per week. - **[A note about Time Zones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many organizations have multiple events, in multiple locations, across multiple states. Having events in multiple time zones can be confusing if volunteers don't know what time the event begins in their local time. Volunteers for Salesforce solves this issue by allowing you to set an event's time zone at multiple levels. ## Sketch Out the Structure Many nonprofit organizations need to plan multiple events throughout the year. Perhaps you hold weekend park cleanups, perhaps you plan monthly fun runs, or maybe your organization serves free community dinners multiple times per week. Whether managing one volunteer event or hundreds, it's important to consider how you would structure the Campaigns, Jobs, and Shifts in Volunteers for Salesforce. Remember that the Campaign represents the highest level of your structure. Jobs represent the specific volunteer tasks, and Shifts are the specific dates and times you need volunteers. The best way to figure out the structure you need is by laying out what volunteer opportunities you need to fill. Let's say your organization works with City Services to serve dinner two nights a week throughout the year. City Services funds the events. Here is the high-level schedule. | Agency | Facility/Dining Room | Schedule | Total # of Events (yearly) | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | City Services | City Dining Room | Monday 5 p.m. - 8 p.m. | 50 | | City Services | City Church | Thursday 4:30 p.m. - 8:00 p.m. | 50 | When you start to sketch out your structure, you need to take into account the agency that funds the event, the facilities where the events will occur, and the dates/times of the events themselves. It's important to note that the roll-up summary fields on Campaigns in V4S provide important data for reports, such as the number of events, how many volunteers turned up, and how many volunteers worked in total. These reports are particularly important for agencies who fund the events. So, in a case like our example, the Campaign should represent City Services, since they are the organization funding the events. Next, since the facilities represent where the events occur, we use Jobs to represent the facilities. Last, the Shifts represent the dates and times of the events. ![Campaign structure](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4s_recurring_event.png) ## A note about Time Zones Many organizations have multiple events, in multiple locations, across multiple states. Having events in multiple time zones can be confusing if volunteers don't know what time the event begins in their local time. Volunteers for Salesforce solves this issue by allowing you to set an event's time zone at multiple levels. When you create a Shift in Volunteers for Salesforce, Salesforce assumes that the time entered is in your time zone and encodes it that way. Your employees in your "home" Salesforce org aren't affected, because they always see the Shift time in the time zone they set for Salesforce. But, volunteers on your website who aren't in your timezone don't see the correct time. To have the Shift display in a different timezone than the one entered by the user who created the Shift, you define the time zone at either the Campaign or Job level. - **Campaign**—If the entire volunteer Campaign is located in one time zone, set the Volunteer Website Time Zone for all Jobs and Shifts on the Campaign level. For example, if you're planning an event that takes place in San Francisco, CA, the Volunteer Website Time Zone on the Campaign is set to America/Los\_Angeles. - **Job**—If Jobs within a Campaign are located in different time zones, set the Volunteer Website Time Zone at the Job level. For example, your organization is hosting a nationwide fundraising run and you need volunteers in multiple states. For the Jobs in California, set the Volunteer Website Time Zone to America/Los\_Angeles. For the Jobs in New York, set the Volunteer Website Time Zone to America/New\_York, and so on. Now when a volunteer accesses the Shift information on your website, the start time of the Shift is the start time in the selected time zone. # Plan and Prepare Your Application Prepare to create, accept, and manage applications in your institution. Identify the application stages and the Omnistudio components that are used for each stage, and understand the process of creating applications.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Watch the video to see an overview of creating dynamic applications for your institution. If you aren’t able to watch the view in full screen, open the video on a new tab: [Create Applications with Salesforce for Education: Preparation and Overview](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/YgZMCtHBSN9zu9PQgUKW2N). - **[Application Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_plan_and_prepare_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Identify the stages for your application and the Omnistudio components that are used for each stage. - **[Omnistudio Components For Representing Application Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_plan_and_prepare_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you make some preliminary design, identify the Omnistudio components to represent your application. ## Application Considerations Identify the stages for your application and the Omnistudio components that are used for each stage. Before you start to build your application in Education Cloud, it's important to think about the application experience that you want to create. ### Define the Purpose and Objective of the Application Clearly define the purpose of your application. Is it for undergraduate or graduate admission? Is it a general application that works for your entire institution, or is it for a specific program or department? ### Identify the Format for the Application Do you want a single-stage application that the applicant completes and submits all at once? Or, do you want to create a multi-stage application where each application stage can be completed at different times or through different means? For example, an applicant can complete the first stage today and submit a form by entering only their name and date of birth. A week later, they can come back to complete the second stage and enter their educational history. Applicants don't have to complete stages linearly. ### Categorize the Information To Collect Outline the objectives of the application, such as showcasing the applicant's academic achievements, extracurricular activities, and personal qualities. Include all necessary fields for academic and personal information. Here's an example of an outline that shows possible application stages and the data that each section collects. | Application Stage | Collected Data | | --- | --- | | Profile | Contact information and demographic details of the applicant. | | Family | Information about the applicant's parents, guardians, and siblings. | | Test Results | Test result information for the applicant, including scores and test dates. | | Secondary or High School Education | Secondary schools attended by the applicant. | | College or University Education | Colleges or universities attended by the applicant. | | Files | Documents required for the application, such as transcripts or a personal essay. | ### Create a Transfer Credit Stage Add a Transfer Credit stage in your dynamic admissions applications to receive transfer credit evaluation requests. Applicants enter prior learning details and upload supporting documents in each application. When the applicant submits their information, the application automatically creates official transfer credit requests for a review. To create the Transfer Credit stage, [prepare your org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them.") and [set up the applicant experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_transfer_credits_for_applicants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the TransferCreditWrapper Omniscript, add a Transfer Credit dynamic application stage, and set up Experience Cloud access so that applicants can submit transfer credit information."). If the applicant has previously received unofficial transfer credit estimates from the [Transfer Credit Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit_agent.htm&language=en_US&type=5), they can reuse these to prefill their applications. ### Prefill Applicant Information in Applications Education Cloud automatically prefills applicant information that you store in the Test Results, Secondary or High School Education, College or University Education, and Files stages. For example, test scores that an applicant entered in a previous application appear in the Test Results stage in the current application. In an ongoing application, the Omnistudio components automatically create individual application task item records to store the data that applicants provide. Individual application task item records support applicants to specify which prefilled information they want to include for consideration in the current application. They can also edit or delete the data that they provide for the current application. These options give applicants control over the specific prefilled data that they want to present to reviewers. ## Omnistudio Components For Representing Application Stages After you make some preliminary design, identify the Omnistudio components to represent your application. Education Cloud provides Omniscripts and Flexcards that you can copy and use to collect and show applicant information. Use Omniscripts to collect the information from applicants and Flexcards to show the information for reviewers. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Clone the Education Cloud Omnistudio components that you want to use, even if you don't intend to customize them. Here's an example of an application and an outline that shows the Omniscripts to be used for each stage. ![Sample application on an Experience Cloud site applicant portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_application_view.png) | Application Stage | Applicant Omniscript | What information does it collect | | --- | --- | --- | | Profile | EDUAdmissions/ProfileWrapper | Collects and saves the applicant's profile information. | | Family | EDUAdmissions/FamilySectionWrapper | Collects and saves the applicant's family information. | | Testing | EDUAdmissions/NewTestResultSectionWrapper | Collects and saves the applicant's test results. | | Secondary or High School Education | EDUAdmissions/NewSecondaryEducationSectionWrapper | Collects and saves the applicant's education information. | | College or University Education | EDUAdmissions/CollegeSectionWrapper | Collects and saves the applicant's college information. | | Files | EDUAdmissions/NewFileSectionWrapper | Collects and saves the applicant's files. | For reviewers to assess the application in the CRM, use Flexcards to display the information collected from the applicant. ![Individual Application record page layout for reviewers](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_application_review.png) Here are the Education Cloud Flexcards that work for our example application. | Application Stage | Reviewer Flexcard | | --- | --- | | Profile | EDUAdmissionsProfileSection | | Family | EDUAdmissionsFamilySection | | Testing | EDUAdmissionsTestResultsSection | | Secondary or High School Education | EDUAdmissionsSecondaryEducationSection | | College or University Education | EDUAdmissionsCollegeSection | | Files | EDUAdmissionsFilesSection | Education Cloud provides more Omnistudio components than the ones listed in the example. You can copy the components and customize them to meet your needs. # Plan Requirement Plan Requirement represents a required item to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program, as specified in a Program Plan. - **[Sample Uses for Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the Plan Requirement object, you can detail the set of requirements for a Program Plan, such as coursework, thesis, or internship. Students must fulfill the requirements to earn the degree or credential that's associated with the Program Plan. - **[Plan Requirement Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some institutions use record types to help distinguish between parent Plan Requirements and child Plan Requirements. - **[Configure Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Plan Requirement data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Create Plan Requirement Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some considerations to efficiently set up Program Plan Requirements for your educational institution. - **[Maintaining Plan Requirement Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for how to maintain Plan Requirement data for your educational institution. ## Sample Uses for Plan Requirement With the Plan Requirement object, you can detail the set of requirements for a Program Plan, such as coursework, thesis, or internship. Students must fulfill the requirements to earn the degree or credential that's associated with the Program Plan. - University—Define the requirements for students declaring a major, pursuing a graduate degree, or pursuing a credential or certification. - K-12—Define graduation requirements or requirements that satisfy a Program Plan such as a College Prep Plan. It's common to create a hierarchy of Plan Requirement records with child requirements nested under parent requirements. For example, an undergraduate degree in Biology requires 12 units of General Electives. The Program Plan defines this requirement through a parent Plan Requirement and several child Plan Requirements. ![Example of a Program Plan's parent and child requirements.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/help_eda_datadoc_planrequirement_031622v2_zh.png) ## Plan Requirement Record Types Some institutions use record types to help distinguish between parent Plan Requirements and child Plan Requirements. We don’t provide preconfigured record types for Plan Requirements, but you can try this solution: - To summarize the high level requirements, use a page layout for parent Plan Requirements (such as Biochemistry). - Use a separate, more detailed page layout for the child Plan Requirements (such as Structural Biochemistry, Metabolic Biochemistry, and other options lower in the hierarchy). ## Configure Plan Requirement Set up Plan Requirement data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Initial Configuration for Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you begin creating Plan Requirement data, review some guidelines. - **[Keep Up with Plan Requirement Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Depending on the version of Education Data Architecture that you originally installed, consider these updates. ### Initial Configuration for Plan Requirement Before you begin creating Plan Requirement data, review some guidelines. - You can relate a Plan Requirement to only one parent record. If the requirement is a parent Plan Requirement, the related parent record must be a Program Plan. If the requirement is a child Plan Requirement, the related parent record must be a parent Plan Requirement. - EDA K-12 Architecture Kit includes validations to make sure that you relate the correct type of parent record and to maintain your hierarchical structures. The Plan Requirement Hierarchy setting, in EDA Settings, is enabled by default from Program Plans under Courses and Enrollments. - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules automates the creation, update, and deletion of Plan Requirement records and related records. Review the classes that affect the Plan Requirement object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Plan Requirement Updates Depending on the version of Education Data Architecture that you originally installed, consider these updates.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
EDA 1.57

Plan Requirements are typically created as a hierarchical set of records with parent Plan Requirements related to a Program Plan. Because of this relationship, it’s best to create parent records from the Program Plan record and child records from a parent Plan Requirement record. So, we recommend that you remove the New button from the Plan Requirements list view and prevent access to Plan Requirements form the App Launcher.

To remove the New button from the Plan Requirements list view:

  1. Click your profile image, and then click Switch to Salesforce Classic.

  2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select Objects.

  3. Click Plan Requirement.

  4. Under Search Layouts, next to Plan Requirements List View, click Edit.

  5. Deselect New.

  6. Save your changes.

To prevent access to Plan Requirements from the App Launcher:

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and select Profiles.

  2. For the profile you want to change access, click Edit.

  3. In the Custom Tab Settings section, for Plan Requirements, select Tab Hidden.
## Create Plan Requirement Records Review some considerations to efficiently set up Program Plan Requirements for your educational institution. - **[Design the Program Plan's Requirements Hierarchy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can control a lot about how Plan Requirements are configured. For example, make requirements required or optional. Create parent and child relationships. And relate requirements to a specific Course. When you use these strategies together, you create a hierarchical structure for a given Program Plan. Let's consider some common ways you can set up Plan Requirements to create a hierarchy. - **[Prepare Your Program Plan Hierarchy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before creating Plan Requirement records, make sure to create the required records. - **[Sample Program Plan and Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Academic Program, B.S. Biology, has a Program Plan called Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019. Students pursuing this degree must satisfy 72 units of lower division requirements and 48 units of upper division requirements. - **[Create a Plan Requirement Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Represent the required items of an Academic Program by creating Plan Requirement records. ### Design the Program Plan's Requirements Hierarchy You can control a lot about how Plan Requirements are configured. For example, make requirements required or optional. Create parent and child relationships. And relate requirements to a specific Course. When you use these strategies together, you create a hierarchical structure for a given Program Plan. Let's consider some common ways you can set up Plan Requirements to create a hierarchy. - A required Plan Requirement _with_ a specific Course that students must complete to satisfy a Program Plan. - A required Plan Requirement _without_ a specific Course that serves as a parent Plan Requirement with the number of credits that must be completed. - Child Plan Requirements that are: - Required, _with_ a specific Course that students must complete to satisfy a parent Plan Requirement. - Required, _without_ a specific Course, but with specific criteria (such as Any humanities course level 200 or above) and a number of credits required. - Optional, with or without a specific Course. Students can select which optional requirements they complete to satisfy the total credits required by a parent Plan Requirement. ### Prepare Your Program Plan Hierarchy Before creating Plan Requirement records, make sure to create the required records. - An Academic Program record to represent one of the offered programs. For example, B.S. Biology. For more information, see [Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_account.htm) . - A Program Plan record for the current academic year, or perhaps for a previous or future academic year. For example, Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019. For more information, see [Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm) . - Course records to represent the Courses that can satisfy the Program Plan's requirements. For more details, see [Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_course.htm) . ### Sample Program Plan and Requirements An Academic Program, B.S. Biology, has a Program Plan called Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019. Students pursuing this degree must satisfy 72 units of lower division requirements and 48 units of upper division requirements. ![Sample Biology Program Plan](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/course-catalog.png) If we map the Program Plan B.S. Biology's sample degree requirements to our Plan Requirements structure, we can apply these methods row by row, as summarized in this table. | General Category and Units Required | Courses to Satisfy | Plan Requirement Structure | | --- | --- | --- | | Lower Division (72 units) |   |   | | Biology (16 units) | BIO 10, 20, 30, and 40 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Chemistry (16 units) | CHEM 10, 20, 30, and 40 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Organic Chemistry (8 units) | CHEM 50 and 51 | A required parent Plan Requirement with required child Plan Requirements. | | Mathematics (12 units) | MATH 10A, 10B, and 11 or 20A, 20B, and 11 | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | Physics (12 units) | PHYS 1A/1A Lab, 1B/1B Lab, and 1C/1C Lab | A required parent Plan Requirement with required child Plan Requirements. | | General Electives (8 units) | Any | A required Plan Requirement without a specific Course. | | Upper Division (48 units) |   |   | | Genetics (4 units) | GEN 100 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Molecular Biology (4 units) | BIOM 100 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Human Physiology (4 units) | BIOPHYS 100 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Biochemistry (4 units) | Structural Biochem (BIOC 101) or Metabolic Biochem (BIOC 102) | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | Ecology, Behavior, Evolution (4 units) | Intro Ecology (ECOL 100), Intro Evolution (EVOL 100), or Intro Animal Behavior (BEHV 100) | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | Biology Labs (8 units) | BIOM 100 Lab, BIOC 101 Lab or BIOC 102 Lab | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | General Electives (20 units) | Any | A required Plan Requirement without a specific Course. | ### Create a Plan Requirement Record Represent the required items of an Academic Program by creating Plan Requirement records. 1. From the **Program Plans** tab, click the Program Plan that you're creating a Plan Requirement for. If you don't see the tab, search for it from the App Launcher. 2. From the Plan Requirements related list, click **New**. 3. Enter the details, noting the following fields.
Field Details
Plan Requirement Name Because Program Plans can change every year, it's helpful to reference the Program Plan and academic year along with the name of the course. For example, Organic Chemistry - Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019.
Program Plan

Because you're starting from the Program Plan record, the Program Plan Name is filled in automatically.

  • If you're creating a parent Plan Requirement, leave the value filled in.

  • If you're creating a child Plan Requirement, clear this field. Child Plan Requirements look up to their parent Plan Requirement only—not to the Program Plan.

Parent Plan Requirement

  • If you're creating a parent Plan Requirement, leave this field blank.

  • If you're creating a child Plan Requirement, start entering the name of the parent Plan Requirement, and select it when you see it suggested.

Category

Your selection in the Category field depends on the type of Course.

  • If the Course is one of multiple required Courses under the parent Plan Requirement, select Required.

  • If the Course is one of multiple optional Courses, select Optional.

We recommend that all the child requirements under a parent Plan Requirement share the same Category.
Sequence Specify where this Plan Requirement falls in a progression through the Program Plan. For example, enter 1 to indicate Semester 1 or 2 to indicate Semester 2.
Course

  • If a single Course satisfies the Plan Requirement, enter the name of the Course, and select it when you see it suggested.

  • If the Plan Requirement doesn't require a specific course, leave this field blank.

  • If this requirement is a parent Plan Requirement that has Courses specified under child Plan Requirements, leave this field blank.

Credits

  • Enter the credit units required. For example, a specific, single-Course Plan Requirement for a Course like CHEM 50 requires 4 credits.

  • Make sure this value matches the number of credit hours specified on the Course record.

  • A more general Plan Requirement like General Electives typically requires a total number of credits, such as 20 credits.

Description

  • If you're creating a general Plan Requirement without specific Courses, use the Description field to spell out the criteria, such as Any upper division courses.

  • For other Plan Requirements, use the field to provide context for the requirement, such as 1 of 2 required Organic Chemistry Courses.

4. Save the information. #### Plan Requirement for a Single Required Course The following example shows a single-Course Plan Requirement for an introductory Genetics class. ![Example of a single-course Plan Requirement](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/plan_requirement_single_course.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Course (4) - Credits (5) #### Plan Requirement Without Specific Courses For a general Plan Requirement that students can satisfy by completing any Course, the record looks like this example of a General Electives requirement. ![Example of a Plan Requirement without a specific course](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/plan_without_specifics.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Credits (4) - Description (5) #### Parent Plan Requirement with Required Child Requirements For a parent Plan Requirement that contains multiple required Courses, create the parent Plan Requirement record first, before the child Plan Requirement records. The record looks like this example of an Organic Chemistry requirement. ![Example of a parent Program Plan with multiple required courses](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/parent_plan_required_child_requirements.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Description (4) #### Child Plan Requirement The record looks like this example of an Organic Chemistry I requirement. ![Example of a child Plan Requirement](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/child_plan_requirement.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Parent Plan Requirement (4) - Course (5) - Credits (6) - Description (7) ## Maintaining Plan Requirement Data Review considerations for how to maintain Plan Requirement data for your educational institution. - By default, Plan Requirement records are related to Academic Program records, Program Plan records, and Program Enrollment records. - Before deleting a Program Plan record, delete any related Plan Requirement records, including Plan Requirements nested under parent Plan Requirements. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit validates deletion of related records to prevent orphaned data. - It's easiest to edit related records from the Program Plan's Plan Requirements related list. # Plan Requirement Plan Requirement represents a required item to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program, as specified in a Program Plan. - **[Sample Uses for Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the Plan Requirement object, you can detail the set of requirements for a Program Plan, such as coursework, thesis, or internship. Students must fulfill the requirements to earn the degree or credential that's associated with the Program Plan. - **[Plan Requirement Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some institutions use record types to help distinguish between parent Plan Requirements and child Plan Requirements. - **[Configure Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Plan Requirement data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Create Plan Requirement Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some considerations to efficiently set up Program Plan Requirements for your educational institution. - **[Maintaining Plan Requirement Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review considerations for how to maintain Plan Requirement data for your educational institution. ## Sample Uses for Plan Requirement With the Plan Requirement object, you can detail the set of requirements for a Program Plan, such as coursework, thesis, or internship. Students must fulfill the requirements to earn the degree or credential that's associated with the Program Plan. - University—Define the requirements for students declaring a major, pursuing a graduate degree, or pursuing a credential or certification. - K-12—Define graduation requirements or requirements that satisfy a Program Plan such as a College Prep Plan. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This documentation shows sample Plan Requirements for an undergraduate degree program. The same principles apply to high schools defining requirements for graduation or completion of a College Prep Plan program, for example. It's common to create a hierarchy of Plan Requirement records with child requirements nested under parent requirements. For example, an undergraduate degree in Biology requires 12 units of General Electives. The Program Plan defines this requirement through a parent Plan Requirement and several child Plan Requirements. ![Example of a Program Plan's parent and child requirements.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/help_eda_datadoc_planrequirement_031622v2_zh.png) ## Plan Requirement Record Types Some institutions use record types to help distinguish between parent Plan Requirements and child Plan Requirements. We don’t provide preconfigured record types for Plan Requirements, but you can try this solution: - To summarize the high level requirements, use a page layout for parent Plan Requirements (such as Biochemistry). - Use a separate, more detailed page layout for the child Plan Requirements (such as Structural Biochemistry, Metabolic Biochemistry, and other options lower in the hierarchy). ## Configure Plan Requirement Set up Plan Requirement data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Initial Configuration for Plan Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you begin creating Plan Requirement data, review some guidelines. ### Initial Configuration for Plan Requirement Before you begin creating Plan Requirement data, review some guidelines. - You can relate a Plan Requirement to only one parent record. If the requirement is a parent Plan Requirement, the related parent record must be a Program Plan. If the requirement is a child Plan Requirement, the related parent record must be a parent Plan Requirement. - EDA K-12 Architecture Kit includes validations to make sure that you relate the correct type of parent record and to maintain your hierarchical structures. The Plan Requirement Hierarchy setting, in EDA Settings, is enabled by default from Program Plans under Courses and Enrollments. - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules automates the creation, update, and deletion of Plan Requirement records and related records. Review the classes that affect the Plan Requirement object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ## Create Plan Requirement Records Review some considerations to efficiently set up Program Plan Requirements for your educational institution. - **[Design the Program Plan's Requirements Hierarchy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can control a lot about how Plan Requirements are configured. For example, make requirements required or optional. Create parent and child relationships. And relate requirements to a specific Course. When you use these strategies together, you create a hierarchical structure for a given Program Plan. Let's consider some common ways you can set up Plan Requirements to create a hierarchy. - **[Prepare Your Program Plan Hierarchy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before creating Plan Requirement records, make sure to create the required records. - **[Sample Program Plan and Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Academic Program, B.S. Biology, has a Program Plan called Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019. Students pursuing this degree must satisfy 72 units of lower division requirements and 48 units of upper division requirements. - **[Create a Plan Requirement Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_plan_requirement.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Represent the required items of an Academic Program by creating Plan Requirement records. ### Design the Program Plan's Requirements Hierarchy You can control a lot about how Plan Requirements are configured. For example, make requirements required or optional. Create parent and child relationships. And relate requirements to a specific Course. When you use these strategies together, you create a hierarchical structure for a given Program Plan. Let's consider some common ways you can set up Plan Requirements to create a hierarchy. - A required Plan Requirement _with_ a specific Course that students must complete to satisfy a Program Plan. - A required Plan Requirement _without_ a specific Course that serves as a parent Plan Requirement with the number of credits that must be completed. - Child Plan Requirements that are: - Required, _with_ a specific Course that students must complete to satisfy a parent Plan Requirement. - Required, _without_ a specific Course, but with specific criteria (such as Any humanities course level 200 or above) and a number of credits required. - Optional, with or without a specific Course. Students can select which optional requirements they complete to satisfy the total credits required by a parent Plan Requirement. ### Prepare Your Program Plan Hierarchy Before creating Plan Requirement records, make sure to create the required records. - An Academic Program record to represent one of the offered programs. For example, B.S. Biology. For more information, see [Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_account.htm). - A Program Plan record for the current academic year, or perhaps for a previous or future academic year. For example, Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019. For more information, see [Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm). - Course records to represent the Courses that can satisfy the Program Plan's requirements. For more details, see [Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_course.htm). ### Sample Program Plan and Requirements An Academic Program, B.S. Biology, has a Program Plan called Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019. Students pursuing this degree must satisfy 72 units of lower division requirements and 48 units of upper division requirements. ![Sample Biology Program Plan](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/course-catalog.png) If we map the Program Plan B.S. Biology's sample degree requirements to our Plan Requirements structure, we can apply these methods row by row, as summarized in this table. | General Category and Units Required | Courses to Satisfy | Plan Requirement Structure | | --- | --- | --- | | Lower Division (72 units) |   |   | | Biology (16 units) | BIO 10, 20, 30, and 40 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Chemistry (16 units) | CHEM 10, 20, 30, and 40 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Organic Chemistry (8 units) | CHEM 50 and 51 | A required parent Plan Requirement with required child Plan Requirements. | | Mathematics (12 units) | MATH 10A, 10B, and 11 or 20A, 20B, and 11 | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | Physics (12 units) | PHYS 1A/1A Lab, 1B/1B Lab, and 1C/1C Lab | A required parent Plan Requirement with required child Plan Requirements. | | General Electives (8 units) | Any | A required Plan Requirement without a specific Course. | | Upper Division (48 units) |   |   | | Genetics (4 units) | GEN 100 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Molecular Biology (4 units) | BIOM 100 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Human Physiology (4 units) | BIOPHYS 100 | A required Plan Requirement with a specific Course. | | Biochemistry (4 units) | Structural Biochem (BIOC 101) or Metabolic Biochem (BIOC 102) | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | Ecology, Behavior, Evolution (4 units) | Intro Ecology (ECOL 100), Intro Evolution (EVOL 100), or Intro Animal Behavior (BEHV 100) | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | Biology Labs (8 units) | BIOM 100 Lab, BIOC 101 Lab or BIOC 102 Lab | A required parent Plan Requirement with optional child Plan Requirements. | | General Electives (20 units) | Any | A required Plan Requirement without a specific Course. | ### Create a Plan Requirement Record Represent the required items of an Academic Program by creating Plan Requirement records. 1. From the **Program Plans** tab, click the Program Plan that you're creating a Plan Requirement for. If you don't see the tab, search for it from the App Launcher. 2. From the Plan Requirements related list, click **New**. 3. Enter the details, noting the following fields.
Field Details
Plan Requirement Name Because Program Plans can change every year, it's helpful to reference the Program Plan and academic year along with the name of the course. For example, Organic Chemistry - Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019.
Program Plan

Because you're starting from the Program Plan record, the Program Plan Name is filled in automatically.

  • If you're creating a parent Plan Requirement, leave the value filled in.

  • If you're creating a child Plan Requirement, clear this field. Child Plan Requirements look up to their parent Plan Requirement only—not to the Program Plan.

Parent Plan Requirement

  • If you're creating a parent Plan Requirement, leave this field blank.

  • If you're creating a child Plan Requirement, start entering the name of the parent Plan Requirement, and select it when you see it suggested.

Category

Your selection in the Category field depends on the type of Course.

  • If the Course is one of multiple required Courses under the parent Plan Requirement, select Required.

  • If the Course is one of multiple optional Courses, select Optional.

We recommend that all the child requirements under a parent Plan Requirement share the same Category.
Sequence Specify where this Plan Requirement falls in a progression through the Program Plan. For example, enter 1 to indicate Semester 1 or 2 to indicate Semester 2.
Course

  • If a single Course satisfies the Plan Requirement, enter the name of the Course, and select it when you see it suggested.

  • If the Plan Requirement doesn't require a specific course, leave this field blank.

  • If this requirement is a parent Plan Requirement that has Courses specified under child Plan Requirements, leave this field blank.

Credits

  • Enter the credit units required. For example, a specific, single-Course Plan Requirement for a Course like CHEM 50 requires 4 credits.

  • Make sure this value matches the number of credit hours specified on the Course record.

  • A more general Plan Requirement like General Electives typically requires a total number of credits, such as 20 credits.

Description

  • If you're creating a general Plan Requirement without specific Courses, use the Description field to spell out the criteria, such as Any upper division courses.

  • For other Plan Requirements, use the field to provide context for the requirement, such as 1 of 2 required Organic Chemistry Courses.

4. Save the information. #### Plan Requirement for a Single Required Course The following example shows a single-Course Plan Requirement for an introductory Genetics class. ![Example of a single-course Plan Requirement](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/plan_requirement_single_course.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Course (4) - Credits (5) #### Plan Requirement Without Specific Courses For a general Plan Requirement that students can satisfy by completing any Course, the record looks like this example of a General Electives requirement. ![Example of a Plan Requirement without a specific course](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/plan_without_specifics.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Credits (4) - Description (5) #### Parent Plan Requirement with Required Child Requirements For a parent Plan Requirement that contains multiple required Courses, create the parent Plan Requirement record first, before the child Plan Requirement records. The record looks like this example of an Organic Chemistry requirement. ![Example of a parent Program Plan with multiple required courses](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/parent_plan_required_child_requirements.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Description (4) #### Child Plan Requirement The record looks like this example of an Organic Chemistry I requirement. ![Example of a child Plan Requirement](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/child_plan_requirement.png) Be sure to complete the following fields. - Plan Requirement Name (1) - Program Plan (2) - Category (3) - Parent Plan Requirement (4) - Course (5) - Credits (6) - Description (7) ## Maintaining Plan Requirement Data Review considerations for how to maintain Plan Requirement data for your educational institution. - By default, Plan Requirement records are related to Academic Program records, Program Plan records, and Program Enrollment records. - Before deleting a Program Plan record, delete any related Plan Requirement records, including Plan Requirements nested under parent Plan Requirements. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit validates deletion of related records to prevent orphaned data. - It's easiest to edit related records from the Program Plan's Plan Requirements related list. # Plan Your Accounting Subledger Implementation Learn about the general required steps for a successful implementation.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Your institution has taken the leap and you have approval to implement Accounting Subledger. It can seem like a daunting task, but it doesn’t have to be! Here are the general considerations to think about: 1. Add users: Decide who in your company or institution accesses, uses, and administers Accounting Subledger. See [Add Accounting Subledger Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_add_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up profiles and users to represent your users."). 2. Set up Data Pipelines: Assign at least one active user to the Data Pipelines Base User permission set and enable Data Pipelines. See [Set Up Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_set_up_data_pipelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete the requirements to enable Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger."). 3. Set up permissions: Specify who can do what. For example, enable your accountants to view the generated accounting data, but not map the financial data in accounting sets. [Assign Accounting Subledger Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assign permissions sets to your users to grant them access to features beyond what's included in their basic user licenses."). 4. Create custom fields: To generate accounting data beyond the default fields on the Transaction Journal object, add custom fields to that object. See [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5). 5. Configure Accounting Subledger: Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model through accounting sets. Also configure page layouts and specify how Salesforce generates and splits the accounting data. If you added custom fields on the Transaction Journal object, set up accounting field mappings to copy your data to those fields. We recommend that you consult your accounting and finance teams to capture all their needs. See [Transaction Journal Records in Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Transaction Journal object is the core of Accounting Subledger. It stores your financial transactions in a format optimized for export to your accounting system.") and [Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records."). 6. Turn on accounting data generation: Test your configuration in a sandbox first. When everything looks good, enable transaction journal creation and schedule the Accounting Subledger job. See [Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger jobs generate transaction journal records. Configure and run these jobs manually or on a defined schedule."). 7. Consolidate data: After Salesforce generates the accounting data, bring it into your accounting system. Create a report with this data and export as CSV files, which you then import into your accounting system. You can also develop a custom integration, or use a middleware solution. Accounting Subledger doesn’t perform automatic posting because of legal implications. See [Ways to Transfer Your Accounting Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_ways_transfer_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Accounting Subledger creates accounting data that you can transfer to your accounting software with minimal effort via reports or integration."). For recommended configurations and mapping exercises, see the [Accounting Subledger Implementation Planning Guide](https://sforce.co/Accounting_Subledger_Planning_Guide) and [Accounting Set Example Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_acct_set_example_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review recommended accounting set mappings for common use cases."). # Plan Your Applicant Experience Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect. - **[Use the Applicant Portal Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help you build your applicant experience, Admissions Connect provides a pre-built portal that you can use as a template. - **[Define the Basics of Your Applicant Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When it comes to planning your portal, first answer these basic questions. - **[Control What Applicants See in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When creating your Application Material Mapping records, use fields to control what applicants see in the portal. - **[Allow Applicants to Edit Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There is no field on the Application Material Mapping record to control whether an applicant can edit a specific item. Instead, applicants must be the owner of the Task and have the appropriate field access. - **[Review Portal Considerations for Ad Hoc Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ad hoc items don't have mapping records, so you can't control applicant settings such as custom messaging or file upload. - **[Define an Application Submission Window](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Open Date and Due Date fields on the Application object to define an application submission window. The Open Date is the first date that applicants can submit their Applications, and the Due Date is the last date that they can submit. - **[Create a Portal Planning Spreadsheet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Plan your applicant portal settings far in advance of launch. If you're creating a planning spreadsheet for your mapping records, make sure to include the applicant portal setting fields. ## Use the Applicant Portal Template To help you build your applicant experience, Admissions Connect provides a pre-built portal that you can use as a template. ![The Home page of the Applicant Portal Template shows submitted applications.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/ac_applicant_portal_template.png) The template provides these key components. - A Home page where applicants see submitted applications and their status. - A Start Application button that allows applicants to begin a new application. The steps for creating an applicant portal with the Applicant Portal Template are similar to creating any portal. However, there are a few things to keep in mind. - The Applicant Portal Template is included when you [Install the Admissions Connect Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_install_package.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Install Admissions Connect for your institution."). However, if you installed Admissions Connect version 1.16 or earlier, access the Applicant Portal Template by installing Admissions Connect in a sandbox, and then use a [change set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.changesets.htm&type=5) to move the template into production. - Use [OmniStudio to create application forms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_build_application_forms_with_omnistudio.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use OmniStudio with Admissions Connect to create application forms for your applicant portal. Plus, use flows to assign Action Plan Templates to applications.") to add to the portal. - Be sure to grant applicants access to the ApplicantCommunityHomePageController apex class. ## Define the Basics of Your Applicant Portal When it comes to planning your portal, first answer these basic questions. - How will applicants enter and access the portal? - How will Application and other related records, such as Account, Contact, Education History, and so on, get created? And who will own these records? Admissions Connect doesn’t provide any components or functionality that allows applicants to create records. The Admissions Connect components work with existing Application records.  Typically, most institutions import applicant data and documents using a third-party tool, which means the Application record and all the applicant’s records are created during the import process. If you want applicants to create Application-related records, your institution can build a custom component, set up automation, or implement other functionality that allows applicants to create those records. If you choose this route, consider automating the sharing of applicant-created records with your admissions staff and external reviewers. Review [Import Your Data into Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect gives you a complete view into your institution’s recruiting and admissions experience—from information about prospects and applicants, like their education history, to information about your institution, like degree programs and terms.") for more information about creating records. To support on-the-go applicants, the Admissions Connect components that you use in an applicant portal support mobile devices—and without any additional setup tasks. The components simply work as-is, with slight display differences. For more information, see [Admissions Connect Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect comes with custom components that are used in the Lightning record pages provided with Admissions Connect. Some components are available in Lightning App Builder as well as Experience Builder. Use this article as reference when creating new pages or if you want to know more about the components.").  ## Control What Applicants See in the Portal When creating your Application Material Mapping records, use fields to control what applicants see in the portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note For Action Plan Items to show in the portal, you must add correlating Application Material Mapping records, except for ad hoc items. For details, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components.") Show Navigation to Applicants Determines whether an item is visible. Show Content to Applicants Determines whether an item’s content is visible. For example, whether an applicant can see teacher evaluations. Applicant Hidden Content Message Provides custom messaging if you decide not to show the contents for an item. For example, if applicants can’t see teacher evaluations, you can provide a custom message telling them why they can’t see these evaluations. Applicant Instruction Message Provides custom messaging about how applicants can submit documents or complete specific tasks. Let Applicants Upload Files Determines whether applicants can upload files. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can optionally restrict which file types they can upload. For more information, see [Limit Files in Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable_file_limits.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. For full details about the applicant portal settings, including the prerequisites for these settings to work, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components.") and [Verify Your Applicant Portal Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the tasks to help ensure that applicants are successful in the portal."). ## Allow Applicants to Edit Fields There is no field on the Application Material Mapping record to control whether an applicant can edit a specific item. Instead, applicants must be the owner of the Task and have the appropriate field access. The Assigned To field on a Task determines ownership, so make sure you specify the applicant in this field. Then ensure the applicant has Read and Edit access to fields shown in the applicant portal. We also recommend marking the fields that you want applicants to fill out as Required in the Task's coordinating field set. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Applicants can't edit fields that show in a related list, which means the item's corresponding Application Material Type record specifies a Child Object. We don't recommend using these types of Tasks in an applicant portal, unless you plan to make the Task optional and use automation to populate the fields. When planning out the fields to include in the applicant portal, consider how EDA's triggers and other automation can impact the applicant's experience. For example, if your org has turned on EDA's CON\_PreferredPhone\_TDTM trigger handler and you use the Contact object's Preferred Phone field in the portal, applicants can't update this field if data is already populated in it because the trigger overwrites their edits upon save. For more information about setting up Tasks in a portal, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components.") and [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). ## Review Portal Considerations for Ad Hoc Items Ad hoc items don't have mapping records, so you can't control applicant settings such as custom messaging or file upload. Ad hoc Tasks show in the applicant portal if the applicant has access to the Task's associated Application record and the Task is assigned to the applicant or marked as Public (isVisibleInSelfService). However, applicants can't edit Ad hoc Tasks in the portal, even with the appropriate field-level Edit access. Required ad hoc Tasks that show in the portal are included in the percent complete total that applicants see in the Checklist Progress, which means the Tasks are required for submission. Because of these considerations, we recommend not using ad hoc Tasks in the applicant portal. You can still use ad hoc Tasks in the Admissions Connect app, just make sure to assign these Tasks to admissions staff members and don't mark them as Public. Ad hoc Document Checklist Items don't show in the applicant portal, which means Required ad hoc documents aren't actually required for application submission and they aren't included in the percent complete total reported in the Checklist Progress. ## Define an Application Submission Window Use the Open Date and Due Date fields on the Application object to define an application submission window. The Open Date is the first date that applicants can submit their Applications, and the Due Date is the last date that they can submit. The submission window is just one of the factors that determines what applicants can see and do from the portal. For example, the Application is editable and the Submit Application button shows only when the submission window is open. If an applicant hasn’t finished their Application and the submission window closes, their Application becomes read-only and they can no longer submit. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Defining a submission window is optional. Alternatively, you can specify an Open Date or a Due Date, but not both. How you set up your submission window is up to you. If you specify both fields, EDA's Application\_TDTM trigger handler ensures that the submission window is valid. We recommend that you set up automation to set the Open Date and Due Date fields on Application records. For example, create a flow that sets these fields based on the Term the applicant is applying to.  When creating portal Users for your applicants, make sure to set the correct time zone for each applicant based on their location. An applicant’s local time zone determines whether the submission window is open for them. For example, if you set your Due Date to February 1, 2022, and your institution is based in New York, an applicant from California can still submit their Application right up until January 31 at 11:59 PM and 58 seconds, Pacific Standard Time.  To learn more about the other factors that affect Application submission, see [Verify Your Applicant Portal Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the tasks to help ensure that applicants are successful in the portal.").  ## Create a Portal Planning Spreadsheet Plan your applicant portal settings far in advance of launch. If you're creating a planning spreadsheet for your mapping records, make sure to include the applicant portal setting fields. See [Plan Your Application Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool."). We also recommend creating a separate spreadsheet or matrix for thinking through how applicants see Document Checklist Items and Tasks as they move through different Statuses during the admissions cycle. For example, if you configure an Application Material Mapping record for a Document Checklist Item with Show Navigation to Applicants and Show Content to Applicants both selected, as well as a custom instruction message, that message shows only when the document Status is New. After an applicant submits the document, the Status updates to Pending and the instruction message goes away. Thinking through all the statuses helps ensure applicants are successful. See Also: - [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm) # Plan Your Application Requirements Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool. - **[Planning Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start by making sure that you understand how all the Action Plan objects and Document Checklist objects work together. - **[Understand the Big Picture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let’s pretend we’ve already configured everything in Admissions Connect. On the Application Review record, requirements display in a collapsible navigation region and a main scrollable view. This page is where your reviewers spend most of their time looking at Applications. Look at the navigation tree. Core Application is a parent to Application Details and Applicant Details. And Core Application is peer to Transcripts. And so on. - **[General Planning Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As you start to plan, think about your application requirements holistically. Some application requirements for a transfer student and a first-year student overlap. Other requirements are unique. When creating your Action Plan Templates, think of all the requirements across all your Applications, even things like application fees. Then think about the order you want all those requirements to show in. ## Planning Overview Start by making sure that you understand how all the Action Plan objects and Document Checklist objects work together. See [Learn About Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what Actions Plans are and how you can use them in Admissions Connect to define application requirements.").  When working on your mapping records, remember that Action Plan Templates have child Action Plan Template Items. This parent/child relationship will help you think about how verifiers, reviewers, and applicants will interact with the Application requirements. ## Understand the Big Picture Let’s pretend we’ve already configured everything in Admissions Connect. On the Application Review record, requirements display in a collapsible navigation region and a main scrollable view. This page is where your reviewers spend most of their time looking at Applications. Look at the navigation tree. Core Application is a parent to Application Details and Applicant Details. And Core Application is peer to Transcripts. And so on. ![Application Review page with the navigation menu for the Reviewer Application Reader fully expanded.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_materials_reader_full_nav.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When viewing the All list view for the Application Material Mapping object, you can sort it by the Sequence field to make it mirror the navigation for your application requirements. And here’s what a planning spreadsheet might look like for those same records.  | Sequence | Action Plan Template  | Action Plan Template Item | Task (Data) or Document Checklist Item (Attachment)?  | For Tasks - Application Material Type / Field Set  | For Document Checklist Items - Document Type  | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 1.00 | Core Application |   |   |   |   | | 1.10 |   | Application Details | Task | Application Details / Core\_Application |   | | 1.20 |   | Applicant Details | Task | Applicant Details    / Applicant\_Details |   | | 1.30 |   | Education Details | Task | Education Details / Applicant\_Education\_History\_Details |   | | 1.40 |   | Family Details | Task | Family Details / Applicant\_Family\_Details |   | | 2.00 | Transcripts |   |   |   |   | | 2.10 |   | Official Transcript | Document Checklist Item |   | Transcript | | 2.20 |   | Unofficial Transcript | Document Checklist Item |   | Transcript | | 3.00 | Test Scores |   |   |   |   | | 3.10 |   | SAT Report | Document Checklist Item |   | Test Score | | 3.20 |   | Test Details | Task | Test Details / Applicant\_Test\_Details |   | | 4.00 | Recommendations |   |   |   |   | | 4.10 |   | Counselor Recommendation | Document Checklist Item |   | Recommendation | ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Use the column headings in this sample table to create your own planning spreadsheet.  ## General Planning Guidelines As you start to plan, think about your application requirements holistically. Some application requirements for a transfer student and a first-year student overlap. Other requirements are unique. When creating your Action Plan Templates, think of all the requirements across all your Applications, even things like application fees. Then think about the order you want all those requirements to show in. Keep these guidelines in mind when planning. - After an Action Plan Template is published, you can’t edit it—which means you can’t add child Action Plan Items to it. To make changes, clone the template. - When creating mapping records, what you specify depends on what you’re creating. - For a parent Action Plan, specify: Action Plan Template and Sequence - For a child Action Plan Item that's a Task, specify: Action Plan Template Item, Sequence, Application Material Type - For a child Action Plan Item that's a Document Checklist Item, specify: Action Plan Template Item and Sequence ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note There are other optional fields that control the applicant portal experience. If you plan to create an applicant portal, review [Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect."). - The labels that display for Action Plans and Action Plan Items in Admissions Connect components, such as the navigation tree of the Reviewer Application Reader, are determined by: - Action Plan - Name field - Task - Subject field - Document Checklist Item - Name field These labels are what your admissions staff see in the app. If users assign Action Plans manually or create ad hoc Action Plan Items, the names they enter show in the Admissions Connect components. Remember that users can’t edit Action Plan Items when assigning an Action Plan, so the name you give your Action Plan Template Items is what displays in the components. - All of your Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items must have associated Application Material Mapping records. If they don't, assigned Action Plans display as sequence 1 items in alphabetical order in the Admissions Connect app, which might not be what you expect. In a portal, items without a mapping record don't show at all. Ad hoc Action Plan Items don't have mapping records. These items show below other peer Action Plan Items in alphabetical order. If you're using a portal, see [https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac\_setup\_portal.htm](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_setup_portal.htm). - The Sequence field on the mapping record specifies the display order relative to other items at its level. The Sequence field for Action Plan Templates is relative to other Action Plan Templates. Likewise, the Sequence field for Action Plan Template Items is relative to other related Action Plan Template Items for the same Action Plan Template. In our planning spreadsheet example, the Action Plan Template mapping for Transcripts has a Sequence of 2.00, because it’s relative to other Action Plan Templates. Its child Action Plan Template Item mappings for Unofficial Transcript and Official Transcript are sequence 2.10 and 2.20, because they're relative to each other. Think of the Sequence field as your table of contents order.  ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip We recommend using whole numbers (like 1.00) for parent Action Plan Templates and decimals for the same whole number (like 1.10) for corresponding child Action Plan Template Items. This can help you sort mapping records in a list view. Just keep in mind that if you update a Sequence field later, the Sequence fields of child Action Plan Template Items aren't updated automatically. - We recommend creating a unique field set for each Task. Think about a situation in which you want to display 10 fields for first-year applicants, but only 5 of those fields for transfer applicants. You can't reuse the same field set in this scenario. - If you create an applicant portal, review the applicant experience carefully and keep these things in mind when defining your mappings. - On mobile devices, the Applicant Hidden Content Message isn’t visible for parent Action Plans. In addition, if an Action Plan has no child Action Plan Items visible to the applicant, the parent Action Plan is hidden. - On desktop, the Applicant Hidden Content Message is visible for parent Action Plans. The parent Action Plan is hidden only if there are no child Action Plan Items and no custom hidden message specified. ### Next Steps # PMM and NPSP If you already use NPSP, you can easily integrate PMM so that you can manage your constituent, fundraising, and program data all in one place. If you're a new customer and you don't yet have NPSP, see [Install Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete the prerequisites and then install Program Management Module to get a managed package with essential metadata and custom code and an unmanaged Program Management Standard User Profile that you can assign to your program staff.") to learn how to start with a free trial. NPSP is where you: - Manage your constituents, household information, and communications - Manage all fundraising and development activities PMM is where you: - Define your Programs and Services - Record, segment, and track clients in your Programs - Record the Service Deliveries to the clients in your Programs using standardized units of measure - Report and analyze your Program data # PMM and Translation Salesforce provides translations for PMM in multiple languages. - **[Frequently Asked Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. - **[Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the list of languages available for Program Management Module. - **[Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get links to documentation in other languages. - **[Enable Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable localization in Salesforce for your Program Management Module product. - **[Translation Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about limitations in PMM translations. ## Frequently Asked Questions Get answers to questions about localization, including frequency, languages, and documentation. How often do you localize Salesforce.org products? We localize our product labels and text as part of every major seasonal release. What languages do you localize into? Salesforce.org localizes by package, not by product, so the languages vary. See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Program Management Module."). Salesforce offers three levels of language support: fully supported languages, end-user languages, and platform-only languages. For more information, see [Supported Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_getstart_what_languages_does.htm&type=5). Do you localize product documentation? We currently localize documentation for these products: Accounting Subledger, Accounting Subledger Legacy, Case Management, Education Cloud, Education Data Architecture (EDA), Grants Management, Insights Platform Data Integrity, Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries, Nonprofit Cloud, Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Outbound Funds Module, Program Management Module (PMM), and Student Success Hub (SSH). See [Available Languages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "See the list of languages available for Program Management Module.") for details. See [Localized Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get links to documentation in other languages.") for a list of links to documentation. I noticed a mistake or something missing from a translation. Where do I report it? Keep in mind that we update translations only for major releases, so they can be out of sync after minor releases. To report a mistake, [create a case](https://help.salesforce.com/supportandservices) with the Topic set to Setup and Security, and the Category set to Globalization and Localization. Can I override translations? Absolutely. You can use the Translation Workbench to override translations. To learn more, see [Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.workbench.htm&type=5). What's the difference between language and locale? In Salesforce, you'll see both Language and Locale settings. Locale determines the display formats for date and time, addresses, phone numbers, and commas and periods in numbers. Language determines the language that objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in. Do you accept translations from the community? Even though many of our products are open source, we don't currently accept GitHub pull requests for localization contributions. The localization process requires a level of maintenance that's not realistic or sustainable for community contributors, and we therefore rely on our own localization programs to deliver high-quality, timely translations. ## Available Languages See the list of languages available for Program Management Module. Salesforce.org provides translations into these languages. When you choose one of the supported languages during user (or org-wide) setup, Program Management Module objects, fields, settings, and user interface text appear in that language. ### Program Management Module | Language | UI | Documentation | | --- | --- | --- | | Dutch | √ | √ | | English (UK) | √ | √ | | French | √ | √ | | German | √ | √ | | Japanese | √ |   | | Portuguese (Brazil) | √ | √ | | Spanish | √ |   | | Spanish (Mexico) | √ |   | ## Localized Documentation Get links to documentation in other languages. Use these links to access the localized documentation for each available language. ### Program Management for Nonprofits - [Chinese (Simplified)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_zh_cn.pdf) - [Chinese (Traditional)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_zh_tw.pdf) - [Danish (Denmark)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_da_dk.pdf) - [German (Germany)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_de_de.pdf) - [Spanish (Spain)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_es_es.pdf) - [Spanish (Mexico)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_es_mx.pdf) - [Finnish (Finland)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_fi_fi.pdf) - [French (France)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_fr_fr.pdf) - [Italian (Italy)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_it_it.pdf) - [Japanese (Japan)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_ja_jp.pdf) - [Korean (Korea)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_ko_kr.pdf) - [Dutch (The Netherlands)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_nl_nl.pdf) - [Norwegian (Norway)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_no_no.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_pt_br.pdf) - [Russian (Russia)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_ru_ru.pdf) - [Swedish (Sweden)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/programmanagementfornonprofits/program_management_ngo_sv_se.pdf) ### Program Management Module Legacy Documentation - [Dutch](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/pmmlegacy/program_management_legacy_nl_nl.pdf) - [English (UK)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/pmmlegacy/program_management_legacy_en_gb.pdf) - [French](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/pmmlegacy/program_management_legacy_fr_fr.pdf) - [German](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/pmmlegacy/program_management_legacy_de_de.pdf) - [Portuguese (Brazil)](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/localizedpdfs/pmmlegacy/program_management_legacy_pr_br.pdf) ## Enable Languages Enable localization in Salesforce for your Program Management Module product. We recommend that you complete these steps to enable a language for use in Program Management Module: 1. Before using any translated languages, enable Translation Workbench in Setup. For information, see [Enable and Disable the Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wbench.htm). 2. If you're enabling a platform-only language: 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Enable platform-only languages**. 2. Move the desired language to the Displayed Languages list. 3. Save your changes. ## Translation Limitations Learn about limitations in PMM translations. - PMM can’t translate the names of permission sets, reports, and dashboards in the managed package. - PMM uses Process Builder to automatically name Program Engagements using the Program Engagement Stage picklist values Applied, Active, Completed, and Withdrawn. The Process Builder process won’t work if these values are translated. If you need these values translated, deactivate the process and create a new one using the translated values. - If you use PMM with NPSP, note that NPSP provides its own translations and limitations. See [Nonprofit Success Pack and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_and_translation.htm) for details. - Salesforce doesn't translate salutations and other picklist values. You can use Translation Workbench to provide your own translations and custom values. # PMM Configure Cohort Mass Update Enable mass update of program cohorts, add the Add to Program Cohort quick action to Program Engagement list views, and enable your users to inline edit multiple records on Program Engagement list views. - **[Enable Mass Program Cohort Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_enable_add_to_program_cohort_mass_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow users to add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort directly from a Program Engagement list view. - **[Add a Quick Action to Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_enable_add_to_program_cohort_mass_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action to Program Engagement list views so users can easily add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort. - **[Enable Inline Editing in List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_enable_add_to_program_cohort_mass_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable your users to inline edit selected records on Program Engagement list views with a single Program Cohort, provided the list view displays the Program Cohort field. ## Enable Mass Program Cohort Updates Allow users to add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort directly from a Program Engagement list view. For example, a program manager may want to segment clients that they've recently enrolled in a Program into Program Cohorts. Or, they may want to create a Program Cohort for all the Program Engagements in a Program.  There are two ways to let users add multiple Program Engagements to a Program Cohort: - Add the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action to Program Engagement list views. - Enable inline editing in list views. If your users are already familiar with out-of-the-box list view inline editing, you may wish to use this option. This option requires the user to add the Program Cohort field to their Program Engagement list view. ## Add a Quick Action to Program Engagements Add the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action to Program Engagement list views so users can easily add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort. After you add the button, users can use it to mass add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort. See [Add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_create_program_cohorts.htm). 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Program Engagement**. 4. Click **Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic**. 5. Next to the List View layout, click ![Dropdown list icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/downarrowicon.png), then select **Edit**. 6. In the Available Quick Actions list, select **Add to Program Cohort**, then click ![Arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/addfieldarrow.png) **Add** to move it to Selected Quick Actions. 7. Click **Save**. ## Enable Inline Editing in List Views Enable your users to inline edit selected records on Program Engagement list views with a single Program Cohort, provided the list view displays the Program Cohort field. Inline editing allows your users to mass update records on list views they create for any object. 1. From **Setup**, enter User in the Quick Find box, then select **User Management Settings**. 2. Enable **Enhanced Profile User Interface**. After you enable this, users can use inline editing to update selected records in a Program Engagement list view whether or not they have the **Add to Program Cohort** quick action. # PMM Configure Related Lists on Accounts Configure related lists on Accounts to easily see how an Account such as a household interacts with your programs. - **[Configure Related Lists on Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_add_rls_to_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To easily see how an Account (for example, a household) is interacting with your Programs, add the Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, and Service Participants related lists to the Account page layout. ## Configure Related Lists on Accounts To easily see how an Account (for example, a household) is interacting with your Programs, add the Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, and Service Participants related lists to the Account page layout. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 4. Click on your Account layout. 5. Click **Related Lists**. 6. Drag the Program Engagements, Service Deliveries, and Service Participants related lists from the panel to the layout below the Contacts related list. 7. Click **Save**. # PMM Create Program Cohorts Create and work with program cohorts. Add program engagements to a program cohort. - **[Work With Program Cohorts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements based on program cycle, location, date, or any other metric that's meaningful to your organization. - **[Create a Program Cohort](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements together for tracking and reporting purposes. - **[Add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add multiple Program Engagements to a Program Cohort from a Program Engagement list view, provided you have permission to edit the objects and records on that list. ## Work With Program Cohorts Use Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements based on program cycle, location, date, or any other metric that's meaningful to your organization. An example Program Cohort is anyone enrolled in a support group for a particular program cycle. ## Create a Program Cohort Create Program Cohorts to group Program Engagements together for tracking and reporting purposes. 1. Click the **Program Cohorts** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Program Cohort Name. 4. Select a Status. 5. Select the Program. 6. Provide a description of the Program Cohort and its purpose. 7. Set the start and end dates. 8. Click **Save**. ## Add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort You can add multiple Program Engagements to a Program Cohort from a Program Engagement list view, provided you have permission to edit the objects and records on that list. This is helpful if you want to segment clients you've recently enrolled in a Program into Program Cohorts, or if you're creating a new Program Cohort for all the Program Engagements in a Program. Depending on [what your admin has enabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_enable_add_to_program_cohort_mass_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allow users to add multiple Program Engagements to a single Program Cohort directly from a Program Engagement list view."), the process to add Program Engagements to a Program Cohort from a list view will involve either using a quick action or using enhanced list view functionality. 1. Click the **Program Engagements** tab. 2. From ![List view control icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/listviewscontrol.png), select **New**. 3. Enter a list view name, for example Add Program Engagements to Cohort, then click **Save**. 4. From ![List view control icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/listviewscontrol.png), select **Select Fields to Display**. 5. Move **Stage** and **Program Cohort** from Available Fields to Visible Fields, then click **Save**. 6. Optionally, click **Add Filter** to add filters so you can easily find the Program Engagements to add to the Program Cohort. 7. Depending on what your admin has enabled: - If you see the **Add to Program Cohort** button: - Select the Program Engagements to add. - Click **Add to Program Cohort**. - Search for and select the Program Cohort, then click **Save**. - Click **OK**. - Or, if you don't see the **Add to Program Cohort** button: - If your list view has multiple record types, filter the list view by a single record type. - Select the Program Engagements to add to the Program Cohort. - Next to one of the selected Program Engagements, in the Program Cohort column, click ![Edit](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/pencilIcon.png) . - Search for and select a Program Cohort. - Select **Update selected items**. - Click **Apply**. ![Mass update using a list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/inlinemassedit.png) - Click **Save**. # PMM Create Program Engagements Create and work with program engagements. - **[Work With Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Engagements track the relationship between Programs and the Clients, Organization Accounts, Household Accounts, or custom objects that engage with them. - **[Create a Program Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a Program Engagement, a Client is presumed to be the subject to which the Program and Services are delivered. - **[Customize New Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object. ## Work With Program Engagements Program Engagements track the relationship between Programs and the Clients, Organization Accounts, Household Accounts, or custom objects that engage with them. For example, a Program Engagement can track a client enrolled in a class, a school receiving curriculum kits, or an animal in a rescue program. - Many Program Engagements are Client engagements, but you can also specify volunteers, donors, and service providers using the **Role** field. - The default naming for Program Engagements is `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name`. For example, `Tom Higgins 2020-07-12: Lunch Program`. You can override the default name on a case-by-case basis, or a Salesforce admin can [customize record naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object.") for your org. - Track the progress of Program Engagements using one of these Stages: Applied, Application Denied, Waitlisted, Enrolled, Active, Completed, or Withdrawn. See all waitlisted Program Engagements using the **Waitlisted Program Engagements** related list on the Program Engagements tab. ## Create a Program Engagement When you create a Program Engagement, a Client is presumed to be the subject to which the Program and Services are delivered. You can also create Program Engagements for Household Accounts, and if your admin has configured it, for Organization Accounts or custom objects. 1. Click the **Program Engagements** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the Program Engagement a name. This name will be replaced by the automated naming configured for your org unless you select **Auto-Name Override**. 4. Select a Stage. 5. Complete one of these tasks based on the type of Program Engagement you want to create: - To create an anonymous Program Engagement, leave the **Client** field blank. The Contact name will be replaced by "Anonymous." For example, `Anonymous 2020-06-17: Hygiene Kits`. - To create a Program Engagement for a household, enter a Household Account in the **Household Account** field. - If your admin added an Organization Account field, enter an organization account. This field may be named differently depending on how your admin set it up. - If your admin added a custom object, enter a value in the custom object field. 6. Select the Program in which to enroll the client. 7. Select the Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Select the client's Role in the Program. 9. Click **Save**. ## Customize New Case Plans Create a Case Plan from any object using the New Case Plan button. The button already appears on Contacts, and you can add it to any other object. 1. Navigate to a record of the object you want to modify. 2. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then select **Edit Page**. 3. In the list of components, find **New Case Plan Button** and drag it onto the page. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Click **Activate**, then choose how you want to assign the record page. For more information, see [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 6. Click **Back** to exit Lightning App Builder. # PMM Create Programs Create a program, add clients to programs, and mark a program complete when it ends. - **[Work With Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Programs track your organization's overall work. - **[Create a Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a program to track and manage your organization's mission. - **[Add Clients to Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add clients to Programs from either the Contacts or Programs tabs. - **[End a Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a Program ends, be sure to mark it as completed. ## Work With Programs Programs track your organization's overall work. At an advocacy organization, Programs could include local school fundraising and community events. At a human services organization, Programs could include housing assistance and a food pantry. ## Create a Program Create a program to track and manage your organization's mission. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give the Program a name. 4. Select a Status. 5. Optionally: - Enter a summary, which will appear in Program list views and reports. - Enter details about the Target Population that the Program is intended to help. - Enter a detailed description that provides more context about the Program’s goals. - Enter start and end dates for the Program. - Select a Program Issue Area, which is a description of the issue addressed by the Program, like Housing or Employment. Admins can configure additional Program Issue Areas. 6. Click **Save**. ## Add Clients to Programs Add clients to Programs from either the Contacts or Programs tabs. ### Add Clients to Programs from the Contacts Tab 1. Click the **Contacts** tab. 2. Click the client's name. 3. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 4. Search for and select the Program. 5. For the Role, select Client. 6. For the Stage, select Enrolled. 7. Select a Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Set the Start Date when this Client will begin the Program. If left blank, the Start Date defaults to today. 9. Click **Save**. ### Mass Add Clients to Programs from the Contacts Tab If enabled, you can mass create Program Engagements for a single Program using the Add to Program button on Contacts list views. For details, see[Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_mass_create_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view.") . 1. Click the **Contacts** tab. 2. Select the box next to each name you want to add to a Program. 3. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 4. Search for and select the Program. 5. For the Role, select Client. 6. For the Stage, select Enrolled. 7. Select a Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Set the Start Date when this Client will begin the Program. If left blank, the Start Date defaults to today. 9. Click **Save**. ### Add Clients to Programs from the Programs Tab Back on the Program page, scroll down to the Program Engagements related list and click **View All**. You'll see the Program Engagement you just created. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click the name of a program. 3. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 4. Search for and select a client. You may need to create a new Contact if you can't find the client. 5. From Role, select **Client**. 6. Select a Stage. 7. Select a Program Cohort, if applicable. 8. Set the Start Date for the client in the Program. If left blank, the Start Date defaults to today. 9. Click **Save**. ![Confirm Contact added to Program via Program Engagements list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/confirmprogramengagement.png) ## End a Program When a Program ends, be sure to mark it as completed. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click the Program name. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Change the status to Completed. 5. Enter a date in the End Date field. 6. Click **Save**. # PMM Create Services and Service Deliveries Create services and service deliveries, schedule services, and track attendance at service sessions. - **[Work with Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Services are provided to your community or individuals as part of your programs. - **[Create Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Services as part of your Programs. - **[Create Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Bulk Service Deliveries to create multiple Service Deliveries at once, either by group or by individual. - **[Schedule Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Service Schedules for one-time or recurring events for groups or individuals, such as classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, or community events. - **[Track Attendance at Service Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Track Attendance on a Service Session to create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. Track Attendance is an efficient way to create Service Deliveries for all participants from a single interface. - **[See Recent Service Sessions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows you all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. ## Work with Services Services are provided to your community or individuals as part of your programs. Services are different for each nonprofit but can include activities like delivering meals, teaching a course, or cleaning up a neighborhood. Programs often include multiple services. Every Service has a Unit of Measurement that quantifies the activity. For example, Services can be measured in minutes, a number of items, or another metric that's meaningful to your organization. A Service Delivery is a record of providing a Service to a recipient. A Service Delivery shows who received the service, how much was delivered, and when it happened. For example, Robin received 30 minutes of financial counseling on April 4th. Service Schedules are one-time or recurring events for groups or individuals. For example, classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, or community events. ## Create Services Create Services as part of your Programs. 1. Click the **Programs** tab. 2. Click a Program name. 3. In the Services related list, click **New**. 4. Enter a Service Name. For example, Meal Delivery. 5. Enter a Description. 6. Enter a Unit of Measurement. For example, Number of Meals. 7. Select a Status. 8. Click **Save**. ## Create Bulk Service Deliveries Use Bulk Service Deliveries to create multiple Service Deliveries at once, either by group or by individual. For example, you might enter service deliveries for drop-ins at a workshop, or hygiene kits given to an individual client. When you make entries for a group, the same Service, Delivery Date, and Quantity is applied to the entire group, and you can then edit as needed. ### Create a Single Service Delivery There are times when you may want to create a single Service Delivery. For example, if you want to track a one-time delivery of meals to a household. 1. Click the **Service Deliveries** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the Service Delivery. This name gets replaced by the automated naming [configured for your org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When a user creates a Service Delivery, its name follows the format Contact Name Start Date: Service unless otherwise specified.") unless you select **Auto-Name Override**. 4. Select the related Service. 5. Optionally: - Select the Client to whom the service was delivered. - Select a related Program Engagement. - Select a Service Provider. - Enter the Delivery Date. - Enter the Quantity of the service that was delivered. - Select an Attendance Status, for example, Present. - Select a related Household Account. This automatically selects **Household Benefit** on the Service Delivery record. 6. Click **Save**. ### Create Service Deliveries for a Group Instead of adding participants to a service one by one, you can add them all at once, cutting down on your data entry time. 1. Click the **Bulk Service Deliveries** tab, then click **Create by Group**. 2. Search for and select a Service. 3. Enter the Delivery Date. 4. Enter the Quantity of the service that was delivered. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Click **Add** for any Contacts that received the service, or click **Add All**. You can also filter by Program Cohort. The Contacts you see have a Program Engagement—with the Status set to Active or Enrolled—for the Program that the Service rolls up to. 7. If you don't see the participant you're looking for, that means that they aren't yet related to this Program. Click **New** to create a Program Engagement. 1. Search for and select the Contact. If the Contact doesn't exist in Salesforce yet, click **New Contact** and enter the Contact name and other details. If the Contact is a client, be sure to select Client. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can associate a Contact with an existing Account. If you want to create a new Account for the Contact, enter a search term in the Account Name field and press enter. On the results page, click in the Account Name field again and select +New Account. You can always add the account at a later time, too. 2. Enter Program Engagement details, making sure that the Program Engagement Stare is Enrolled or Active. 3. Save your work. You'll see the Program Engagement you just created in the Selected column. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Click **\+ Add Entry** to add another Service Delivery for the same, or a different, Client. You can also make edits to any group member. 10. Click **Save** **.** ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't forget to save your work! The Bulk Service Delivery Tool doesn't auto-save. ### Create Service Deliveries for an Individual Enter Service Deliveries for multiple individuals or enter Service Deliveries for the same individual but for different Program Engagements. 1. Click the **Bulk Service Deliveries** tab, then click **Create by Individual**. 2. Search for and select a Client. 3. Select a Program Engagement or select **+New Program Engagement**. 4. Select the related Service. The page saves your data and creates a new Service Delivery record. 5. Enter the Delivery Date. 6. Enter the Quantity of the service that was delivered. 7. Click **+Add Entry** to add another Service Delivery for the same Client, or for a different Client. 8. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't forget to save your work! The Bulk Service Delivery Tool doesn't auto-save. ## Schedule Services Create Service Schedules for one-time or recurring events for groups or individuals, such as classes, mentoring sessions, support groups, or community events. Service Schedules can be on a single day or span multiple days. When you create a Service Schedule, Service Session records are created for individual event sessions and Service Participant records are created for people who are scheduled to attend the Service Sessions. Create Service Schedules from the Service Schedules tab or a Service record on the Services tab.  1. Click the **Service Schedules** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Service Schedule Name. For example, the name of the class or event. 4. Search for and select the related Service. 5. If you have service providers, enter their names. 6. If you have a participant capacity, enter it. This is for your internal planning and doesn't limit the number of Service Participants you can add. 7. To set a default quantity to be assigned to all Service Participants, enter a **Default Service Quantity**. For example, enter 2 for a two-hour Service Session to automatically populate 2 hours for all Service Participants. You can edit the quantity when taking attendance. 8. Enter the First Session Start and First Session End Date and Time, which default to the current date and time rounded to the next 30 minutes. For a recurring schedule, the same start and end times are applied to all Service Sessions, although you can change this information later. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note The time zone is determined by the time zone specified in the Salesforce user account of the person who creates the event. Changes in this time zone may affect timing for other participants. For example, if Daylight Saving Time moves ahead one hour in your time zone, the session time might change for users in time zones not affected by Daylight Saving Time. 9. The Service Schedule defaults to a One Time frequency. To make it recurring, click **Daily**, **Weekly**, or **Monthly**. 1. For a Weekly schedule: Select the days of the week. The day defaults to the day of the First Session Start Date. To create a schedule for weekdays, select **Weekly** and then choose from Monday through Friday only. 2. For a Monthly schedule: Select one of the recurrence options, which are based on the First Session Start Date. For example, on Day 21, on the Third Monday, or on the Last Day. 3. For all recurring schedules: Enter a recurrence, for example, Every 2 Months. Select when the Service Schedule ends, either on a date or after a number of Service Sessions. A Service Schedule can have up to 500 sessions. A record is created for each session in the recurring schedule unless you deselect **Create Service Sessions**. 4. You'll see the Program Engagement you created in the Selected column. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Review the Service Sessions and click **Next**. You can also add or delete sessions, or click **Back** to make additional edits. If you add or delete sessions before you click Back, those edits will be lost. 12. Select clients to add as Service Participants, then click **Add Service Participants**. The available participants are clients with Program Engagements on the Program related to the Service you selected. To filter the list, select a Cohort from **Filter by Program Cohort**. 13. If you don't see the participant you're looking for, that means they aren't yet related to this Program. Click **New** to create a Program Engagement. 1. Search for and select the Contact. If the Contact doesn't exist in Salesforce yet, click **New Contact** and enter the Contact name and other details. If the Contact is a client, be sure to select Client. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can associate a Contact with an existing Account. If you want to create a new Account for the Contact, enter a search term in the Account Name field and press enter. On the results page, click in the Account Name field again and select + New Account. Or you can add the Account at a later time. 2. Enter the Program Engagement details. 3. Save your work. You'll see the Program Engagement you just created in the Selected column. 14. Click **Next**. 15. Click **Save**, or **Save and New** to create another Service Schedule. This creates the Service Schedule, Service Session, and Service Participant records. ### Manage Service Sessions Edit Service Sessions on a Service Schedule to change details of an individual event, such as the time or service provider. Service Sessions can be assigned the Status of Pending, Complete, or Canceled. You can also add sessions, delete sessions, or delete sessions after a date that you specify. Editing Service Sessions doesn't change the information on the Service Schedule, nor does editing a Service Schedule change the information on its Service Sessions. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Use the Recent Sessions component on the Home tab to quickly see pending and completed Service Sessions—for example, to take attendance, edit details, or just to see what's coming up. 1. Click the **Service Schedules** tab. 2. Click a Service Schedule name, then: 1. To add a new Service Session, click **New** in the Service Sessions list. Enter the information and Save your changes. You can also add Service Sessions by clicking **Add More Sessions**. 2. To edit a Service Session, click the Service Session Name in the Service Sessions list. Edit information or track attendance, then Save your changes. 3. To delete future Service Sessions, click **Delete Future Service Sessions** at the top of the Service Schedule. Specify a date after which all Service Sessions will be deleted, then click **Delete**. 4. To change the status of the session, select **Pending**, **Complete**, or **Canceled**. When attendance is tracked for a Service Session, the status changes to Complete. ### Manage Service Participants Edit or add Service Participants—the people who will attend your Service Sessions—on a Service Schedule. Unlike Program Engagements, which show all of a person’s activity in a program (including their Service Participant records), a Service Participant record only shows a person’s activity in one Service Schedule or Service. Service Participants can be assigned the Status of Waitlisted, Enrolled, or Withdrawn. In addition to adding Service Participants from the Service Schedules tab as described here, you can also add a Service Participant to a Service Schedule from their Contact or Program Engagement record, or from a Service record if you’re not sure which Service Schedule will work for them yet. 1. Click the **Service Schedules** tab. 2. Click a Service Schedule name, then: - To add multiple Service Participants from existing Contacts, click **Add More Participants** at the top of the Service Schedule. Optionally filter by Program Cohort, select the Contacts to add, click **Add Service Participants**, then Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you can't find the Contact you're looking for, click **New** to create a Program engagement for that contact so you can add them to the Service Schedule. - To add a single Service Participant, either new or from an existing Contact, click **New** in the Service Participants list. Enter the information and Save your changes. - To edit a Service Participant, click the Service Participant Name in the Service Participants list. Edit information or add files and Save your changes. ## Track Attendance at Service Sessions Use Track Attendance on a Service Session to create Service Deliveries for everyone who attended or was absent from that session. Track Attendance is an efficient way to create Service Deliveries for all participants from a single interface. When you submit attendance, a Service Delivery is created for all Service Participants, even if you don't enter or change any information. The Service Delivery includes the following details from the Service Schedule and the Service Session: the Client, Service, Service Session, Program Engagement, Service Provider, Delivery Date (the date of the Service Session), Quantity, and Attendance Status. All Service Participants on a Service Schedule appear in Track Attendance, provided that they have an associated Contact record. Add all Service Participants—with an associated Contact—to the related Service Schedule before tracking attendance.   ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To track attendance for an individual instead of everyone in a Service Session, create a Service Delivery from the Service Session record or the Service Deliveries tab and complete the Client, Service Session, Program Engagement, and Attendance Status fields. For example, if you know in advance that someone can't make a Service Session, create a Service Delivery and select **Excused Absence**. 1. Navigate to a Service Session from the Recent Sessions component on the Home tab or from the Service Schedules tab. 2. In Track Attendance: 1. For those who weren't present, select an Attendance Status such as Unexcused Absence or Excused Absence. 2. Enter a quantity, which is based on the Unit of Measurement for the Service associated with the Service Schedule. For example, you may see _Hours_ if the related Service is measured in hours. If a Default Service Quantity was specified when the Service Schedule was created, you’ll see that value for all participants, though you can still edit it. 3. If you don't want to create a Service Delivery for a participant, click ![No attendance icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/no_attendance.png) **Don't track attendance for this participant**. For example, if you have a drop-in class and you don't expect everyone to attend each session. 3. Click **Submit**. The Status of the Service Session changes to Complete and Service Deliveries are created for each Service Participant. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip  If you see an insufficient access error, ask your Salesforce admin to review your sharing settings to make sure you have Contact record access. 4. Refresh the page to see the new Service Deliveries. You can make changes to attendance at any time. Just click **Update** to make your changes, then click **Save**. The Service Deliveries automatically update.  You can also click **Printable View** to see, update, and print an Attendance list. For example, you may want to print an attendance list to use at an in-person session. - **[Service Delivery Summary Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are a number of Service Delivery summary fields that are automatically calculated and updated based on the Attendance Status and Last Service Date on Service Deliveries. These fields help you see trends and evaluate how clients are engaging with your organization. By tracking Consecutive Absences, for example, you may notice that a client is routinely missing service sessions and know that it’s time to reach out. ### Service Delivery Summary Fields There are a number of Service Delivery summary fields that are automatically calculated and updated based on the Attendance Status and Last Service Date on Service Deliveries. These fields help you see trends and evaluate how clients are engaging with your organization. By tracking Consecutive Absences, for example, you may notice that a client is routinely missing service sessions and know that it’s time to reach out. By default, you see an Attendance Summary field on the Recent Service Sessions component on the Home page, and on the Program Engagement snapshot on Contact records. An admin can also add other summary fields to Contacts, Program Engagements, Services, and Service Sessions.   - **Attendance Rate**: Shows the percentage of participants marked as Present out of all participants marked as either Absent or Present. This field is particularly useful in reports because it is a Percent field that you can sort. - **Attendance Summary**: Shows the attendance rate percentage alongside the number of participants marked as Present out of all participants marked as either Absent or Present. For example, if eight participants were marked Present and two were marked Absent, you would see 80% (8/10). - **Consecutive Absences**: Shows sessions in a row that a client didn’t attend (up to the current date). As soon as the client attends a session, this field resets to zero. - **Last Service Date**: The date of the last Service Delivery that has a Delivery Date and a Quantity greater than 0. - **Number of Absent Service Deliveries**: The number of times a client has been marked Absent for a Service Session. - **Number of Present Service Deliveries**: The number of times a client has been marked Present for a Service Session. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note These fields are automatically calculated and updated. If you think the Service Delivery summary fields are incorrect or outdated, your admin may need to run scheduled jobs. See [Create a Scheduled Job to Recalculate Service Delivery Summary Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "As a Salesforce admin, you can schedule a job to recalculate Service Delivery summary fields on an organization-wide basis. While the triggers incrementally increase the existing summary fields as each new Service Delivery record is created, the batch jobs fully recalculate all Service Delivery records. To ensure that your calculations are always up to date and accurate, schedule the jobs to run weekly or monthly.") for more information. ## See Recent Service Sessions The Recent Sessions section on the Home tab shows you all completed and pending Service Sessions from the current and previous week. By default, the Service Sessions shown are those from the All list view on the Service Session tab, but you can select other list views. 1. Click the Home tab. 2. Under Recent Sessions, select a List View. Optionally, click ![Pin](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/program_management_module/images/pin.png) to make this your default view. 3. Select a Time Frame, either **This Week** or **Last Week**. 4. Expand a date to see sessions on that day.  If Attendance has already been tracked for this session, you’ll also see the Attendance Summary which shows a percentage of how many participants were Present out of the total participants Present and Absent. For example, if eight participants were marked present and two were marked absent, you would see 80% (8/10). 5. Click the name of a session to go to its record page. You can also configure additional Recent Sessions list views, for example, to see sessions for Programs you’re involved with, or to see sessions for which you’re the Service Provider. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Service Sessions** 2. From ![List View Controls menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/list_view_controls_button.png), select **New**. 3. Give the list view a name. The List API Name populates automatically. 4. Select **Only I can see this list view**. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Add filters and save your changes. # PMM Customize Create Service Delivery Fields on Bulk Service Delivery Tool (BSDT) Add organization accounts or custom objects to program engagements and service deliveries, and and customize recipients on bulk service deliveries, quick actions, and record naming. - **[Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create relationships between your Organization Account or custom object and Program Engagements or Service Deliveries. - **[Customize Recipients on Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Bulk Service Deliveries to use Household Account, an Organization Account, a custom object, or to remove Client. - **[Customize Quick Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Services, Program Engagements, and Contacts have a Create New Service Delivery quick action that allows users to create a new Service Delivery from individual records. Customize the quick action for each object to reflect an Organization Account, Household Account, or a custom object. - **[Customize Record Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Engagements and Service Deliveries are automatically named to reflect the associated Client. ## Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements and Service Deliveries Create relationships between your Organization Account or custom object and Program Engagements or Service Deliveries. If you haven't already set up a custom object, see ​[Create a Custom Object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=dev_objectcreate_task_parent.htm&type=5)​ before continuing. ### Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements By default, Program Engagements support Clients and Household Accounts, but you can add an Organization Account or custom object by creating a relationship. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Program Engagement**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select **Lookup Relationship**, then click **Next**. 5. Select an object: - For a custom object, select the custom object. - For Organization Account, select **Account**. 6. Click **Next**. 7. In Field Label, enter a name for the field that reflects the recipient, such as the name of the custom object or the type of organization. 8. If you want, enter additional details, then click **Next**. 9. Set appropriate field-level security, then click **Next**. 10. Select the Program Engagement Layout, then click **Next**. 11. Optionally, deselect **Add Related List** next to a page layout name if you don't want to add the object's related list. 12. Save. To remove fields you don’t plan to use, edit the Case Management Program Engagement Layout page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ### Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Service Deliveries By default, Service Deliveries support Clients and Household Accounts, but you can add an Organization Account or custom object by creating a relationship. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Service Delivery**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select **Lookup Relationship**, then click **Next**. 5. Select an object: - For a custom object, select the custom object. - For Organization Account, select **Account**. 6. Click **Next**. 7. In Field Label, enter a name for the field that reflects the recipient, such as the name of the custom object or the type of organization. 8. If you want, enter additional details, then click **Next**. 9. Set appropriate field-level security, then click **Next**. 10. Select the Service Delivery Layout, then click **Next**. 11. Optionally, deselect **Add Related List** next to a page layout name if you don't want to add the object's related list. 12. Save. To remove fields you don’t plan to use, edit the Service Delivery Layout page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize Recipients on Bulk Service Deliveries Customize Bulk Service Deliveries to use Household Account, an Organization Account, a custom object, or to remove Client. If your organization uses a custom object or Organization Account, complete the steps in [Add Organization Accounts or Custom Objects to Program Engagements and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_service_deliveries_for_your_data_tracking_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create relationships between your Organization Account or custom object and Program Engagements or Service Deliveries.") first. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Service Delivery**. 2. Click **Fields Sets**. 3. Click **Bulk Service Deliveries**. 4. Drag fields to and from the palette and **In the Field Set**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't remove the Service field. The options available in each field are filtered based on user selections in the Program Engagement and Service fields, so we recommend Program Engagement as the first field and Service as the second field, regardless of which fields you add or remove. - To remove Clients, remove the Client field. - For households, add the Household Account field and optionally add the Household Benefit field. - For Organization Accounts, add the lookup field to the Organization Account, which may be named Account or may have a custom name. Remove the Client field to use an Organization Account. - For a custom object, add the lookup field to the custom object. - If you don't use Program Engagements because you don't track recipients of your services, you can remove Program Engagements. 5. To make a field required, click ![Wrench icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/wrench.png) next to the field, then select **Required**. 6. Click **Save**. ## Customize Quick Actions Services, Program Engagements, and Contacts have a Create New Service Delivery quick action that allows users to create a new Service Delivery from individual records. Customize the quick action for each object to reflect an Organization Account, Household Account, or a custom object. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab, then click **Service**. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 2. Click **Create New Service Delivery**. 3. Click **Edit Layout**. 4. Drag the fields to and from the palette and the layout. - To remove Clients, remove the Client field. - For households, add the Household Account field. - For Organization Accounts, add the lookup field to the Organization Account, which may be named Account or may have a custom name. - For a custom object, add the lookup field to the custom object. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Repeat these steps, but in step 3, click **Program Engagement** to update the quick action on Program Engagements. 7. If you use Contacts, optionally repeat these steps, but in step 3, click **Contact**. You can only add Household Account to Contact. ## Customize Record Naming Program Engagements and Service Deliveries are automatically named to reflect the associated Client. Program Engagements follow the format `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name` and Service Deliveries follow the format `Contact Name Start Date: Service`. To change Program Engagement and Service Delivery names to reflect non-Client recipients, see [Customize Record Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&type=5). # PMM Customize Fields on the Add Contact to Program Action Customize the fields that show when you click the Add Contact to Program button. - **[Customize Add Contact to Program](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_fields_add_to_cont.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add people to Programs using the **Add Contact to Program** button on a Contact detail page. ## Customize Add Contact to Program Add people to Programs using the **Add Contact to Program** button on a Contact detail page. To customize the fields that display when you click the **Add Contact to Program** button: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 5. Click **Add Contact to Program**. 6. Click **Edit Layout**. 7. Configure fields as needed. 8. Click **Save**. # PMM Customize Picklist Values Add or edit picklist values to reflect the way your organization works. - **[Customize Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_picklist_values_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can configure these picklists: Program Issue Area and Status of a Program, Role and Stage of a Program Engagement, Status of a Program Cohort, Status of a Service. ## Customize Picklist Values You can configure these picklists: Program Issue Area and Status of a Program, Role and Stage of a Program Engagement, Status of a Program Cohort, Status of a Service. To add or edit picklist values: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. Click the name of the object for which you want to update a picklist. For example, **Program**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click the picklist field label. For example, **Status**. 6. Scroll down to Value and customize the picklist values as needed: - Click **New** to create a new value. - Click **Edit** next to a value to edit it. - Click **Reorder** to change the order picklist values appear in the dropdown. - Click **Replace** to replace an existing value you don't need. For more information, see [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=updating_picklists.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # PMM Customize Process Builder Automation Customize your Program Engagement and Service Delivery naming. - **[Customize Program Engagement Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a user creates a Program Engagement, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name` unless otherwise specified. For Program Engagements without Contacts, the default naming format is `Anonymous Start Date: Program Name`. - **[Customize Service Delivery Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a user creates a Service Delivery, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Service` unless otherwise specified. ## Customize Program Engagement Naming When a user creates a Program Engagement, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Program Name` unless otherwise specified. For Program Engagements without Contacts, the default naming format is `Anonymous Start Date: Program Name`. You may want to customize your Program Engagement naming. Here are some examples. - If the majority of your Program Engagements don't include Contacts, omit the word “Anonymous” from the automated Program Engagement name. For example, rather than `Anonymous 2020-06-17: Hygiene Kits`, the Program Engagement name could be `2020-06-17: Hygiene Kits`. - If the majority of your Program Engagements reference the Account object, include the Account name in the automated Program Engagement name. For example, if your organization provides services to households, schools, or other nonprofits, your Program Engagements should include the Account name, such as `California Nonprofit Association 2020-06-17: DEI Coaching`. - If the majority of your Program Engagements reference a custom object, include the custom object name in the automated Program Engagement name. For example, if you work with a nonprofit organization that provides spay and neuter services for pets tracked in a custom object called Pets, you might have a Program Engagement named `Buck 2020-07-10: Neuter`. To customize Program Engagement automated naming: 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon_1.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Process Builder in the Quick Find box, then click **Process Builder**. 3. Click ![Chevron icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/chevron.png) to expand **Template: Program Engagement Object**. 4. Click the Active version of the Template. 5. Click **Clone**. - Select **A new process**. - Name the process and optionally provide a description. - Click **Save**. 6. Next to the Update Name step, under Immediate Actions, click **Update Name**, then: - To omit the word “Anonymous” from Program Engagements without Contacts, copy the code from [Customize Program Engagement Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When a user creates a Program Engagement, its name follows the format Contact Name Start Date: Program Name unless otherwise specified. For Program Engagements without Contacts, the default naming format is Anonymous Start Date: Program Name."), paste it in the **Value** field. - To include the Account name, copy the sample code from [Add Account or Custom Object To Auto-Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), paste it in the **Value** field. - To include a custom object name, copy the sample code from [Add Account or Custom Object To Auto-Naming](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_cust_process_builder_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5), paste it in the **Value** field, and customize it to reflect your custom object. 7. Click **Use this Formula**. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Click **Activate** to enable the change. ### Remove "Anonymous" From Auto-Naming To remove the word “Anonymous” from Program Engagements without Contacts, follow the instructions above, and copy and paste this code in the **Value** field, customizing as needed. ``` IF(NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c)),IF( LEN( [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.FirstName + ' ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.LastName + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT(([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.FirstName + ' ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.LastName + ' ' + IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.FirstName + ' ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Contact__c.LastName + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name ), IF( LEN( IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT((IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name )) ``` ### Add Account or Custom Object To Auto-Naming To include an Account or custom object in Program Engagement naming, follow the instructions above and copy and paste this code in the **Value** field, customizing as needed. If you're referencing a custom object, be sure to update this code for the custom object. ``` IF(NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c)),IF( LEN( [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c.Name + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT(([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c.Name + ' ' + IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Account__c.Name + ' ' + IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name ), IF( LEN( IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name) > 77, LEFT((IF (NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10)) + ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name),77) + '...', IF( NOT(ISBLANK([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c)), TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__StartDate__c) , LEFT(TEXT([pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].CreatedDate),10 ))+ ': ' + [pmdm__ProgramEngagement__c].pmdm__Program__c.Name )) ``` ## Customize Service Delivery Naming When a user creates a Service Delivery, its name follows the format `Contact Name Start Date: Service` unless otherwise specified. If the default naming works for your organization, no further customization is needed. However, you may want to customize your Service Delivery naming. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Process Builder in the Quick Find box, then click Process Builder. 3. Click ![Chevron icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/chevron.png) to expand the Template: Service Delivery Object. 4. Click the Active version of the Template. 5. Click **Clone**. - Select **A new process**. - Name the process and optionally provide a description. - Click **Save**. 6. Next to the AutoName step, under Immediate Actions, click **UpdateServiceDelivery**. ![Service Delivery Object template showing UpdateServiceDelivery](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/pb-templateservicedelivery.png) 7. Paste your formula in the **Value** field. 8. Click **Use this Formula**. 9. Click **Save**. 10. Click **Activate**. # PMM Enable Mass Program Engagement Creation Mass creating Program Engagements for a Program reduces time and effort spent by your users. - **[Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_mass_create_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view. ## Enable Mass Creation of Program Engagements Allow users to mass create Program Engagements for a single Program directly from a Contact list view. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 4. Click **List View Button Layout**. 5. Next to the List View layout, click ![Dropdown list icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/downarrowicon.png), then select **Edit**. 6. In the Available Quick Actions list, select **Add Contact to Program**, then click ![Arrow icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/addfieldarrow.png) to move it to Selected Quick Actions. 7. Save your update. You can now mass create Program Engagements using the **Add Contact to Program** button. ![Shows the Add Contact to Program button on the Contacts tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/add_contacts_to_prog_quick_action.png) # PMM Entity Relationship Diagram The PMM uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects and adds the custom objects Program, Program Engagement, Program Cohort, Service, and Service Delivery. ![Program Management Module Entity Relationship Diagram](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/program_management_module/images/pmm-erd.png) # PMM Feature Telemetry PMM Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. - **[Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case Management PMM Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management PMM is used by our customers. ## Feature Telemetry Case Management PMM Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides Salesforce.org with valuable insight into how Case Management PMM is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage and adoption of various Program Management Module features. **We don't collect personally identifiable information through Program Management Module Feature Telemetry**. We only collect information about what features an organization has enabled or not. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (True/False), Integer, and Date. Program Management Module only collects Integer data. Program Management Module Feature Telemetry data is collected during the push upgrade process. ### System Performance Metrics - Count of Active Programs - Count of Active Programs with Active Services - Count of Active Programs with Program Cohorts - Count of Active Programs with Program Engagements created in the last 30 days - Count of Active Programs with Service Deliveries created in the last 30 days - Count of Active Services - Count of Active Services with Service Schedules - Count of Service Deliveries with an Attendance Status, created in the last 30 days - Count of Service Schedules with at least one Service Session in the future - Count of Active Programs with at least one Program Cohort. ### User Permissions - Count of users assigned the PMM: Deliver permission - Count of users assigned the PMM: Manage permission To give you a better picture of what the data looks like, here's a sample telemetry record: ![Sample Telemetry record showing Details tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/feature-parameter-record.png) For information about your privacy and how feature management works, read: - [Salesforce.org Privacy Policy](https://www.salesforce.org/legal-information/privacy-policy/) - [Salesforce Feature Management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingguide.meta/packagingguide/fma_manage_features.htm) # PMM Objects and Fields Learn what custom objects and fields are included in PMM. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the PMM data schema in depth. View Program Management Module [Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/TE3DASrEJl7t) (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). # PMM Reports and Dashboards PMM reporting makes it easy to extract meaningful data about your Programs to share with your stakeholders. PMMYou can make copies of reports and filter them to include the Programs you manage, then add them to your personal dashboards so you can track Program performance. - **[View Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_reports_and_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** PMM includes two reports folders: Program Management Embedded Reports, where you can find the reports that appear on the Program Management Home Page Dashboard and the Programs and Services page layouts, and Program Management Reports (Unpackaged), where you can find additional reports. - **[View Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_reports_and_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** PMM includes two dashboards, the Sample Program Management Dashboard and the Program Management Home Page Dashboard. ## View Reports PMM includes two reports folders: Program Management Embedded Reports, where you can find the reports that appear on the Program Management Home Page Dashboard and the Programs and Services page layouts, and Program Management Reports (Unpackaged), where you can find additional reports. You can control access to reports using folder sharing. For example, you may want to limit who has Edit access to the Program Management Embedded Reports folder, because it contains reports that are visible to all users in your org. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_important.png) Important Don't move the reports in the Program Management Embedded Reports folder into private folders, because this will prevent future upgrades to your PMM package. The Program Management Embedded Reports folder includes these reports: - All Active Program Engagements: Record count of Active Program Engagements by Program. - Clients Enrolled This Month: List of Program Engagements with a start date in the current month. - Clients Enrolled This Month by Program: List of Program Engagements for the current month, grouped by Program. - Client Records Missing Phone Number: List of Clients without phone numbers. The report looks first at the Contact record and then the Account record. - Contacts Absent for Last Svc Delivery: List of Contacts who have one or more consecutive absences for at least one Program Engagement. - Contacts w/o Recent Service Deliveries: List of Contacts who haven't received a Service Delivery in over two weeks. - Contacts with 3 Consecutive Absences: List of Contacts who have three or more consecutive absences for at least one Program Engagement. - Services Delivered (Year to Date): Count of Services delivered this year, grouped by Program. - Units Delivered over last 6 Months: List and quantity of Service Deliveries over the last 6 months. The Program Management Reports (Unpackaged) folder includes these reports: - Active & Enrolled Prog. Eng. by Owner: List of Active and Enrolled Program Engagements, grouped by Owner Name. - All Program Engagements by Stage: Program Engagements grouped by Stage. - My Service Delivery by Client Last Month: Count of services you delivered last month, grouped by Client. - My Service Deliveries Last Month: Count of services you delivered in the last month. - Past Sessions in Pending Status: List of past Service Sessions with a Complete or Canceled status, grouped by Primary Service Provider. - Service Deliveries by Provider Last Month: List of Service Deliveries grouped by Service Provider. - Unique Contacts Receiving Service: Number of unduplicated Contacts with a Service Delivery, sorted by Service. To view PMM reports:   1. Click the **Reports** tab. 2. Click **All Folders**. 3. Click **Program Management Embedded Reports** or **Program Management Reports (Unpackaged)**. 4. Click the name of the report to view it. ## View Dashboards PMM includes two dashboards, the Sample Program Management Dashboard and the Program Management Home Page Dashboard. The Sample Program Management dashboard includes these reports: - Clients Enrolled This Month by Program - Units Delivered Over the Last 6 Months - Client Records Missing Phone Number - All Active Program Engagements - Services Delivered (Year to Date) The Program Management Home Page dashboard includes these reports: - All Active Program Engagements - Client Records Missing Phone Number - Services Delivered (Year to Date) To view PMM dashboards: 1. Click the **Dashboards** tab. 2. Click **All Folders**. 3. Click **Program Management Dashboards**. 4. Click the dashboard name. # PMM Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility Learn about the Shield Platform Encryption add-on for PMM and its known limitations. - **[Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide extra protection to your sensitive information with Shield Platform Encryption. - **[What is Shield Platform Encryption?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Shield Platform Encryption is an add-on feature for Salesforce that allows you to encrypt your data at rest, rather than just during transmission over a network. - **[Enabling Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When using Shield Platform Encryption, be aware that you can't encrypt certain fields, particularly with SOQL queries and formulas. - **[Known Limitations: Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn the limitations of encrypting standard or custom fields. - **[Known Limitations: Functionality](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enabling encryption doesn't result in any known limitations on functionality. - **[Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out these resources to learn more about Shield Platform Encryption. ## Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility Provide extra protection to your sensitive information with Shield Platform Encryption. ## What is Shield Platform Encryption? Shield Platform Encryption is an add-on feature for Salesforce that allows you to encrypt your data at rest, rather than just during transmission over a network. [Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) allows you to protect data in some standard fields, certain types of custom fields, files and attachments that are stored on the platform, and search indexes. [Standard encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.fields_about_encrypted_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US) is included with your Salesforce licenses. Shield Platform Encryption requires an additional fee. The encryption type for standard encryption is 128-bit Advanced Encryption Standard, while Shield is 256-bit. Standard encryption provides an encrypted text field type, while Shield Platform Encryption can be applied to many different types of fields, files, attachments, and search indexes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note Shield Platform Encryption isn't for everyone. Consider the industry your organization works in, your regulatory requirements, contractual obligations, and internal policies before deciding to enable Shield Platform Encryption. ## Enabling Shield Platform Encryption When using Shield Platform Encryption, be aware that you can't encrypt certain fields, particularly with SOQL queries and formulas. ## Known Limitations: Fields Learn the limitations of encrypting standard or custom fields. Read [General Shield Platform Encryption Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_considerations_general.htm&language=en_US) for more information. You can't encrypt the Session Start field on the Service Session object, the Delivery Date field on the Service Delivery object, or the Application Date field on the Program Engagement object. ## Known Limitations: Functionality Enabling encryption doesn't result in any known limitations on functionality. ## Resources Check out these resources to learn more about Shield Platform Encryption. - [Shield Platform Encryption Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/spe_admins) - [Tradeoffs and Limitations of Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Shield Platform Encryption Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_best_practices.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Strengthen Your Data’s Security with Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Shield Platform Encryption White Paper](https://www.salesforce.com/form/conf/platform/platform-encryption-architecture/?conf-redirect=true) - [General Shield Platform Encryption Considerations](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.securityimplguide.meta/securityimplguide/security_pe_considerations_general.htm) # PMM Tableau Advanced Reporting Use Tableau Dashboard Accelerators with Salesforce and explore your data with the ready-made dashboards. - **[Tableau for Advanced Reporting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Tableau Dashboard Accelerators with Salesforce to turn your client and program data into actionable insights that can help you improve your program performance and increase your organization's impact. - **[Connect Tableau to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect your Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop account to Salesforce. - **[Best Practice for Tableau Dashboard Accelerators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To maximize the benefits of your Tableau Dashboard Accelerators, follow the best practices whenever possible. - **[Explore the Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore your PMM data with the Client Enrollment and Participation, Service Delivery Trends, Staff Capacity & Client Service, and Additional Resources dashboards. ## Tableau for Advanced Reporting Use Tableau Dashboard Accelerators with Salesforce to turn your client and program data into actionable insights that can help you improve your program performance and increase your organization's impact. For example, get insights about things like how well your clients are being served, if your services are leading to successful program completion, and if your organization is on track for meeting service delivery goals. For details, see [Tableau Dashboard Accelerators](https://www.tableau.com/products/dashboard-starters-downloads). If you already use Tableau, simply connect Tableau to your Salesforce org to start with ready-made dashboards, then customize the dashboards to fit your data needs. If you're new to Tableau, purchase at least one Creator license to get started, or check to see if you're eligible for a [Tableau license donation](https://www.tableau.com/foundation/license-donations). You can also [start a free 14-day trial](https://www.tableau.com/products/desktop/download). ## Connect Tableau to Salesforce Connect your Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop account to Salesforce. ### Use Tableau Online 1. Go to [Tableau Online](https://sso.online.tableau.com/public/idp/sso) and log in. 2. On the home page, click **Dashboard Starters**. If you didn't land on the home page, click **Home**, then click **See All**. 3. On the Starters page, set your Data Sources filter to **Salesforce**. 4. Click the Dashboard Starter that you want to use. 5. Click **Sign in to Salesforce** and log in. ### Use Tableau Desktop 1. Download the [Salesforce Nonprofit Program Management](https://exchange.tableau.com/products/415?version=2021.2) accelerator. 2. From the Tableau Desktop home page, click the workbook you want to open. 3. In the Data menu, select each data source that you want to use, then select **Edit Data Source** **.** 4. Log in and select **Allow** to give access to your data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note If worksheets are blank, navigate to the worksheet, then replace reference fields by right-clicking on the fields with red exclamation marks as necessary. ## Best Practice for Tableau Dashboard Accelerators To maximize the benefits of your Tableau Dashboard Accelerators, follow the best practices whenever possible. - Keep your dashboards fresh with the most current data in your org. See [Keep Data Fresh](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_keep_data_fresh.htm). - Customize your dashboards with formatting to enhance analysis and presentation. See [Format Your Work](https://help.tableau.com/current/pro/desktop/en-us/formatting.htm). You can also remove filters that aren't relevant and add your own. - Export Tableau data to various file types for use in presentations or other communications. - Get help by logging a [support case with Tableau](https://www.tableau.com/support/case). ## Explore the Dashboards Explore your PMM data with the Client Enrollment and Participation, Service Delivery Trends, Staff Capacity & Client Service, and Additional Resources dashboards. - **[Client Enrollment and Participation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See an overview of your clients and the programs they're enrolled in using the Client Enrollment and Participation Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Clients tab. - **[Service Delivery Trends](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See a high-level view of Service Delivery trends and learn if you're on track to meet Service Delivery goals using the Service Delivery Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Service Delivery tab. - **[Staff Capacity & Client Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how staff are performing and managing clients using the Staff Capacity & Client Service dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Staff Capacity tab. - **[Additional Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out these resources to learn more about Tableau. ### Client Enrollment and Participation See an overview of your clients and the programs they're enrolled in using the Client Enrollment and Participation Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Clients tab. ![Client Enrollment and Participation Trends dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/client_enrollment_callouts.png) 1. Filter: Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, or a date range (Engagement Start Date and Engagement End Date). 2. Charts: - Number of Clients: How many unique participants had Program Engagements in any status. - Average Programs per Client: How many Program Engagements each Contact has. - Average Days in Program: Time between the Program Engagement's start date and either end date or today's date, if there isn't an end date. - Clients by Engagement Stage: Shows current Program Engagements. - Clients by Location: Larger circles represent more clients. The map can be changed from US to another geographic location. - Clients by Age: Grouped into default age buckets of 5 years, but can be customized. 3. Client Program Mix: Programs used simultaneously. For example, 114 clients are enrolled in intensive case management; 34 of those 114 are also enrolled in job training. ### Service Delivery Trends See a high-level view of Service Delivery trends and learn if you're on track to meet Service Delivery goals using the Service Delivery Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Service Delivery tab. ![Service Delivery Trends dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/service_delivery_callouts.png) 1. Service Delivery Count: Shows all Programs and Services to show those used most often. This chart is not affected by the filters in #2. 2. Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, or Service Name. Program Issue Area and Program Name narrow down options on the Service Name filter, and you must select a Service Name to use the charts. The Unit of Measurement associated with the selected Service Name dictates chart titles. This dashboard doesn't have a date range filter; it always shows year-over-year data. 3. Charts: - \[Unit of Measurement\] Delivered (for example, Kits Delivered): Choose to compare this year's data to the previous year or goal. If you choose the goal, enter the goal in Service Yearly Goal. - Clients Receiving \[Unit of Measurement\] (for example, Clients Receiving Kits): Choose to compare this year's data to the previous year or goal. If you choose the goal, enter the goal in Clients Yearly Goal. - Average \[Unit of Measurement\] per Client (for example, Average Kits per Client): Service delivered divided by the clients receiving the Service. 4. By Service Provider: Shows the same data as shown in #3, broken down by Service Provider. 5. \[Unit of Measurement\] by State (for example, Kits by State): Larger circles represent more units. The map can be changed to another location or level or granularity. ### Staff Capacity & Client Service See how staff are performing and managing clients using the Staff Capacity & Client Service dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Staff Capacity tab. ![Staff Capacity & Client Service dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/staff_capacity_callouts.png) 1. Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, Owner, or a date range (Engagement Start Date and Engagement End Date). 2. Set Goals: Set Average Days since Participation Goal and Client per Staff Goal. 3. Charts: - Stage by Start Month: Shows Program Engagements based on the month the Program Engagement started, with the colors indicating the current stage. Refer to the legend at the bottom to see which color corresponds to which stage. - Program Engagement Stage: Shows the current Stage of all Program Engagements created during the selected date range. - Average Days Since Participation: Compared to goal, shows a breakdown by date range in 0-30, 31-60, 61-90, and 90+ day increments (for example, how many clients have participated in 0-30 days). - % of Case Plan Goals Complete: For all Case Plan Goals created during the time frame, what percentage are completed, and how many days they took to complete. - Clients per Staff: Total number of active Program Engagements divided by owners of Program Engagements. 4. Selections: Show by Program Name, Program Issue Area, or Owner. Sort by Engagements, Clients per Staff, Average Days Since Participation, or % of Goals Completed. Sort by keeps your Show by selections, but further determines the order in which rows appear. ### Additional Resources Check out these resources to learn more about Tableau. - [Tableau Basics for Nonprofits Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/tableau-basics-for-nonprofits) - [Tableau Support - Knowledge Base](https://www.tableau.com/support/knowledgebase) - [Tableau Desktop and Web Authoring Help](https://www.tableau.com/support/help?_ga=2.122432207.53292504.1601650353-825761632.1601650353&_fsi=bwsfkjzr) # PMM with Experience Cloud Use PMM with Experience Cloud to connect directly with your users. - **[Build Meaningful Connections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect and engage directly with the people who matter most—whether through a job training community, a recovery program support site, or a participant portal—using the power of Experience Cloud. - **[Learn About Experience Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Want to know more about creating and using an Experience Cloud site? We have a few options for you. - **[Learn Which Components are Available](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_with_experience_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add these PMM components to pages for your Experience Cloud users: Attendance, Service Schedule, Recent Sessions, Bulk Service Delivery Tool. ## Build Meaningful Connections Connect and engage directly with the people who matter most—whether through a job training community, a recovery program support site, or a participant portal—using the power of Experience Cloud. Use Experience Cloud to create and customize a beautiful, branded home base for your users that includes relevant Salesforce data. Ready to see Experience Cloud in action? Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Experience Cloud demo](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jdovogfhsxi). ## Learn About Experience Cloud Want to know more about creating and using an Experience Cloud site? We have a few options for you. The [Experience Cloud Basics](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/community_cloud_basics) and [Customize Your Experience Cloud Site](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/customize-your-community) trails in Trailhead are a great place to start. For tips on setting up your site visit [Set Up an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. When your Experience Cloud site is ready to go, give people access to it by creating partner accounts (if you're using the Partner Community license) and assigning the required permission sets to their community licenses. For more details, see [Create Partner Users](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=https://help.salesforce.com/s/.htm&type=5) and [Communities User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/images/icon_note.png) Note When you assign permission sets, save yourself a heap of time by cloning the existing _PMM: View_ permission set. Name the new permission set _Site Participant : View._ ## Learn Which Components are Available Add these PMM components to pages for your Experience Cloud users: Attendance, Service Schedule, Recent Sessions, Bulk Service Delivery Tool. Use sharing rules to further manage which records are visible to your users. Take the [Use Sharing Rules for External Users](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/projects/communities_share_crm_data/sharing_rules?trail_id=customize-your-community) trail in Trailhead to learn more. - Attendance—add this component to the Service Session object page. Create sharing rules for the Service Participant and Contact objects or manually share Contact records so users can create Service Delivery records. - Service Schedule—add this component to the Service Schedule object. - Recent Sessions—add this component to Experience Cloud site pages. - Bulk Service Delivery Tool—add this component to Experience Cloud site pages. # Policy Rules Framework Prerequisites Before you set up the Policy Rules Framework in Education Cloud, make sure that Advanced Academic Operations is turned on and that you create the required Decision Explainer records. Decision Explainer records capture logs for every rule run, so you can see how and why a decision, such as student eligibility or score calculation, was made. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations: Education Cloud Full Access
To create Decision Explainer records: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Make sure that [Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes.") is turned on. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Decision Explainer, and then select **Business Process Type Definition**. 3. Select **New Business Process Type Definition**. 1. Enter a label for the record. 2. Enter EduGpaCalc as the developer name. 3. Select **Explainability Service** as the application usage type. 4. Save your changes. 4. In the sidebar, select **Application Subtype Definition**. 5. Select **New Application Subtype Definition**. 1. Enter a label for the record. 2. Enter EduGpaCalc as the developer name. 3. Select **Explainability Service** as the application usage type. 4. Save your changes. 6. In the sidebar, select **Explainability Action Definition**. 7. Select **New Explainability Action Definition**. 1. Enter a label for the record. 2. Enter EduGpaCalc as the developer name. 3. Find and select **EduGpaCalc** as the business process type. 4. Select **Education Cloud** as the application type. 5. Select **Other** as the action log schema type. 6. Find and select **EduGpaCalc** as the application subtype. 7. Save your changes. 8. In the sidebar, select **Explainability Action Version**. 9. Select **New Explainability Action Version**. 1. Enter EduGpaCalc as the label. 2. Find and select **EduGpaCalc** as the explainability action definition. 3. Select **Active**. 4. Save your changes. SEE ALSO: - [Decision Explainer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.concept_decision_explainer.htm&language=en_US) # Populate Records and Fields to Present Your Campuses and Programs in Detailed Profiles Make learning programs, support programs, and campus information discoverable in Campus and Program Finder. Create and populate educational institution offering records based on specific filtering criteria. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To populate records and fields: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Create one educational institution offering record for each campus that offers a learning program or a support program. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Institution Offerings**, and then click **New**. 2. Search for and select your educational institution account record. 3. For each educational institution offering record, search for and select one learning program or one program. 4. Make sure that both **Active** and **Publicly Searchable** are selected. 5. Save your changes. 6. Similarly, create an educational institution offering record for each additional campus that offers a learning program or a support program. 2. To make your campus details also available for filtering and searching, populate relevant fields in your educational institution account record and business profile record. 3. Configure the related account, business profile, learning program, and program records according to these Data Processing Engine job filtering criteria.
Object Record Criteria
Account
  • Has a related business profile record that’s publicly searchable
  • Is linked to an active and publicly searchable educational institution offering record
  • Is linked to a learning program or a program that's configured according to these Data Processing Engine job filtering criteria
Business Profile
  • Is publicly searchable
  • Is related to an account that's linked to an eligible educational institution offering record
Learning Program
  • Is active
  • The related learning record is active
  • Is linked to an active and publicly searchable educational institution offering record
Program
  • Is active
  • Is linked to an active and publicly searchable educational institution offering record
SEE ALSO: - [Model Learning Program Offerings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_program_offerings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learning offerings. Learning objects track the structure, administration, and enrollment and completion requirements for your offerings.") - [Model Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assist_learners_with_program_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects and apps to define, plan, and deliver non-scholastic services and initiatives that support each learner’s journey.") # Populate Searchable Data and Test Your Campus and Program Finder Run a flow to populate the Educational Institution Searchable Profile object. Then validate your data and test Campus and Program Finder to verify that the search results match your intended user experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To run Data Processing Engine jobs and use Campus and Program Finder: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Run the EDU Admissions: Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile flow. After the initial run, run this flow regularly to keep your searchable profile data up-to-date in Campus and Program Finder. Alternatively, [configure the EDU Admissions: Schedule Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile Job flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_searchable_campus_data_dpe_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To run the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine job, configure the EDU Admissions: Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile flow or the EDU Admissions: Schedule Populate Educational Institution Searchable Profile Job flow.") to update your data on a schedule. 2. [Monitor the Maintain Searchable Campus Data Data Processing Engine job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_monitor.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Wait for the run to complete and then address any warnings or errors. 3. Review all educational institution searchable profile records. Verify that the data appears as what you want it to in the search results. If it doesn’t, modify your data and then run the flow again. 4. [Validate the search and filter functions on your Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.criteria_based_search_filter_use.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. Open the Criteria-Based Search and Filter component on your Experience Cloud site. 2. Use the search and filter functions to validate that your Educational Institution Searchable Profile data in the search results matches your intended user experience. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Criteria-Based Search and Filter searches identify matches by the exact word order of the field value. For example, search for the Biology learning program by entering B.S. Biology instead of Biology, and search for the Art History learning program by entering B.A. Art. # Post Installation Configuration Start here if you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) on top of your existing Salesforce org. If you installed NPSP from the Trial, the required and recommended configuration steps have been done for you. You can skip ahead to [Feature Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when)."). 1. [Required Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended.")—Outlines the configuration needed to make NPSP function as intended, like the Trial. 2. [Recommended Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you have the NPSP basics set up, we recommend adding these configurations to help your users find information and create records more quickly and easily.")—We highly recommend performing these steps as they will help your users find information and work more efficiently. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Always install products and test configuration in a Sandbox environment before doing so in your Production organization. Use the Sandbox to verify that you don’t unintentionally overwrite any of your own custom page layouts, record types, or other customizations. # Post Installation Tasks If you installed Grants Management and aren't familiar with the new metadata, we recommend taking time after installing to review. - The custom objects—Funding Programs, Funding Requests, Funding Request Roles, Requirements, Reviews Disbursements—to ensure they meet the needs of your organization. For example, your organization can add an additional field for notes on the Disbursements object. - The picklist values within the new custom objects. You can change the values that don't quite align with your organization. For example, your organization can configure the Population Served field on the Funding Request object. It’s simple to update, add, or remove values. See [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=updating_picklists.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help for more information. - The page layouts for the new custom objects. Some fields may need to be added or removed based on your organization and its users. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help for more information. - **[Assign the Requirement Compact Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_post_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Requirement Compact Layout is included to provide a simplified view of Requirement records and used in various locations in Grants Management. - **[Assign the Grants Management Requirement Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_post_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grants Management Requirement Layout includes the Is Add Files Visible? field on the Requirement. When a grantmaker creates a Requirement and selects Is Add Files Visible?, a grantseeker is able to upload attachments to their assigned Requirement. - **[Assign the Grants Management Review Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_post_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Grants Management Review Layout is streamlined for the Review Workspace. ## Assign the Requirement Compact Page Layout The Requirement Compact Layout is included to provide a simplified view of Requirement records and used in various locations in Grants Management. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), and then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Requirements**. 4. Click **Compact Layouts**. 5. Select **Requirement Compact Layout** as the Primary Compact Layout. 6. Save your work. ## Assign the Grants Management Requirement Layout The Grants Management Requirement Layout includes the Is Add Files Visible? field on the Requirement. When a grantmaker creates a Requirement and selects Is Add Files Visible?, a grantseeker is able to upload attachments to their assigned Requirement. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Requirement**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. 7. Select the profiles to assign the Grants Management Requirement Layout to. Profiles assigned will have the Is Add Files Visible? field available on a Requirement, which a grantmaker can select to allow a grantseeker or grantee to upload attachments to an assigned Requirement. 8. From Page Layout to Use, select **Grants Management Requirement Layout**. 9. Save your work. ## Assign the Grants Management Review Layout The Grants Management Review Layout is streamlined for the Review Workspace. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Review**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. 7. Select profiles to assign the Grants Management Review Layout to. 8. From Page Layout To Use, select **Grants Management Review Layout**. 9. Save your work. # Post-Installation Required Tasks Grant access to Case Management managed package users and assign page layouts. - **[Grant Access to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_post_install_req_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you've installed Nonprofit Cloud Case Management, it's time to give users access. A - **[Assign Case Management Page Layouts to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_post_install_req_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update page layout assignments for all profiles assigned to your Case Management Users. These page layouts give your users access to our custom Case Management pages. ## Grant Access to Users Now that you've installed Nonprofit Cloud Case Management, it's time to give users access. A ### Assign the Case Management Permission Set In order to use Nonprofit Cloud Case Management, users need the **Case Management Permission** permission set. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, type Permission Sets, then click **Permission Sets**. 3. Select **Case Management Permission**. 4. Click **Manage Assignments**, then **Add Assignments**. 5. Select the appropriate users and click **Assign**. ### Assign a Functional Case Management Permission Set Now that users have access to Case Management, assign other permission sets to determine what they can do in Case Management. The available permission sets are: - Case Management: Manage - Assign to Salesforce Admin and Program Manager. - Case Management: Deliver - Assign to Case Manager. - Case Management: View - Assign to anyone who needs view-only access. For detailed information on these permission sets, see [Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_per_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Extend user access to the nonprofit Case Management managed package features by using permission sets."). ## Assign Case Management Page Layouts to Profiles Update page layout assignments for all profiles assigned to your Case Management Users. These page layouts give your users access to our custom Case Management pages. - Account: Branch page layout - Contact: Case Management page layout - Case: Incident layout See [Update Page Layout Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm) for instructions on assigning page layouts. # Post-Installation Required Tasks After you've installed the standalone version of Volunteers for Salesforce, take care of these required tasks to make Volunteers for Salesforce play nicely with Salesforce features such as picklists, profiles, and page layouts. - **[Verify Picklist Values for the Volunteer Campaign Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce adds a new Campaign record type, Volunteer Campaign, to distinguish volunteer opportunities from other types of outreach or marketing campaigns. Check the values and default values for Campaign picklist fields to make sure that users see appropriate choices when creating Volunteer Campaigns. - **[Verify Picklist Values If You Use Contact Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce adds custom picklist fields to the Contact object. On Contact page layouts, these fields must have appropriate values defined or else they display blank or disabled. If your org uses record types for Contact, check the picklist values for each record type to make sure that they're appropriate. If you don't use Contact record types, skip this task. - **[Verify the App Logo, Tabs, and Profile Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the Volunteers for Salesforce app's settings to verify that the Volunteers for Salesforce tabs and logo are displayed in the user interface, and that the app is visible to the appropriate user profiles. - **[Add Fields and Related Lists to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce adds custom fields to the Contact and Lead objects. Add these fields to the Contact and Lead page layouts. Also add Volunteer related lists to page layouts. - **[Add Custom Buttons and Related Lists to Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce provides custom buttons for various features. Add these buttons to the Campaign, Job, and Shift page layouts. If you're upgrading from an earlier version, remember to make these required updates. - **[Create a Volunteers for Salesforce Lightning App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_post_install_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're currently using the Volunteers for Salesforce Classic App, we recommend you create a Volunteers for Salesforce Lightning App. ## Verify Picklist Values for the Volunteer Campaign Record Type Volunteers for Salesforce adds a new Campaign record type, Volunteer Campaign, to distinguish volunteer opportunities from other types of outreach or marketing campaigns. Check the values and default values for Campaign picklist fields to make sure that users see appropriate choices when creating Volunteer Campaigns. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Campaign**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **Volunteer Campaign**. 5. In the Picklists Available for Editing section, click **Edit** next to each field, and make sure the Selected Values and Default values are appropriate. If you've added any custom picklist fields to the Campaign object, pay special attention to make sure they show up where you expect them to. **Upgraders:** If you're upgrading from an earlier version, Volunteer Website Time Zone is a new field in V4S. Make sure to select appropriate picklist values and a default value for the Volunteer Website Time Zone field. ## Verify Picklist Values If You Use Contact Record Types Volunteers for Salesforce adds custom picklist fields to the Contact object. On Contact page layouts, these fields must have appropriate values defined or else they display blank or disabled. If your org uses record types for Contact, check the picklist values for each record type to make sure that they're appropriate. If you don't use Contact record types, skip this task. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Contact**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. For each record type listed: 1. Click the record type label. 2. In the Picklists Available for Editing section, click **Edit** next to these picklist fields, and make sure the Selected Values are appropriate. - Volunteer Availability - Volunteer Skills - Volunteer Status ## Verify the App Logo, Tabs, and Profile Assignments Review the Volunteers for Salesforce app's settings to verify that the Volunteers for Salesforce tabs and logo are displayed in the user interface, and that the app is visible to the appropriate user profiles. 1. From Setup, enter App Manager in the Quick Find box, then select **App Manager**. 2. In the list of apps, find Volunteers, then click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 3. Add a logo. 1. Click **Insert an Image**. ![Choose a logo image](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/choose_logo.png) 2. Change the File Location to **Volunteers Documents**. 3. Click **Volunteers Logo V3**. 4. Move these tabs to the Selected Tabs list. - Volunteers Help - Volunteers Wizard - Volunteer Jobs - Shift Calendar - Find Volunteers Make your list of Selected Tabs look like this. ![A list of selected tabs for the app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/app_selected_tabs.png) 5. Lastly, check the Assign to Profiles section and make sure the app is Visible to all appropriate profiles. If you later create profiles for volunteers, volunteer coordinators, or other distinct roles, remember to update this visibility setting. ![Profiles with access to app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/app_profile_visibility.png) 6. **Save** your changes. ## Add Fields and Related Lists to Page Layouts Volunteers for Salesforce adds custom fields to the Contact and Lead objects. Add these fields to the Contact and Lead page layouts. Also add Volunteer related lists to page layouts. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Contact**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click one of the page layouts associated with a profile that needs access to volunteer information on Contacts. 5. With Fields selected in the left-hand palette, look for the Volunteer-related fields that you can add to your page layout. ![Contact page layout fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/contact_page_layout_fields.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Enter volunteer in the Quick Find box for a shortcut to view just the Volunteer fields. ![Search for volunteer fields to add to the page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_fields_to_add_to_contact_layout.png) 6. Decide where you want to place the fields in the page layout. We recommend first creating a Volunteer Information section in the layout to contain the fields. 1. From the first column of the fields list, drag Section to the page layout and drop it where you want the section. ![Section option on a page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/page_layout_add_section.png) 2. Give the section a name and click **OK**. ![Page layout section details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/page_layout_section_details.png) 7. From the fields list, select all the Volunteer fields (Shift-click or Cmd-click to select multiple), then drag and drop them into the Volunteer Information section. Arrange them in a user-friendly order and you have something like this. ![Volunteer fields on the Contact page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_fields_on_contact_layout.png) 8. Back in the left-hand palette, select **Related Lists**, then look for these Volunteer related lists: Volunteer Hours and Volunteer Recurrence Schedules. ![Volunteer related lists](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_related_lists_to_add_to_contact_layout.png) 9. Drag and drop these related lists into the page layout, wherever you like. ![Volunteer related lists on the Contact page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_related_lists_on_contact_layout.png) 10. **Save** your changes and exit the page layout editor. 11. Repeat these steps for any Contact layout associated with a profile that needs access to volunteer information on Contacts. 12. Back in the Object Manager, from the list of objects, select **Lead**. 13. Click **Page Layouts**. 14. Click one of the Lead layouts associated with a profile that needs access to volunteer information on Leads. 15. With Fields selected in the left-hand palette, look for the Volunteer-related fields that you can add to your page layout. As before, enter volunteer in the Quick Find box for a shortcut to view just the Volunteer fields. ![Volunteer fields to add to Lead layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_fields_to_add_to_lead_layout.png) 16. Decide where you want to place the fields in the page layout. We recommend first creating a Volunteer Information section to contain the fields, just like you did for the Contact Layout. 17. From the fields list, drag and drop all the Volunteer fields into the Volunteer Information section. Arrange them in a user-friendly order and you have something like this. ![Volunteer fields on the Lead page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_fields_on_lead_layout.png) 18. **Save** your changes and exit the page layout editor. 19. Repeat these steps for any Lead layout associated with profiles that need access to volunteer information on Leads. ## Add Custom Buttons and Related Lists to Page Layouts Volunteers for Salesforce provides custom buttons for various features. Add these buttons to the Campaign, Job, and Shift page layouts. If you're upgrading from an earlier version, remember to make these required updates. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. From the list of objects, select **Campaign**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Volunteers Campaign Layout**. 5. With Fields selected in the left-hand palette, verify that all of the Volunteer-related fields are grayed out, which means that they're already on your page layout. ![Volunteer fields grayed out on page layout, indicating that they were already added](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_fields_added_to_campaign_layout.png) If any aren't grayed out, drag and drop them to the Volunteers section in the page layout. 6. Back in the left-hand palette, select **Buttons**, then look for these buttons: Mass Email Volunteers, Shift Calendar, Volunteer Roster, and Find Volunteers. If any aren't grayed out, drag and drop them into the Custom Buttons section. ![Custom Buttons on the Campaign page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_custom_buttons.png) 7. **Save** your changes. 8. Now, repeat the same updates for the Volunteer Job Layout, along with verifying that Volunteer related lists are part of page layouts. 1. In the Object Manager, from the list of objects, select **Volunteer Job**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Click **Volunteers Job Layout**. 4. Verify that all of the Volunteer-related fields are in your page layout. If any aren't, drag and drop them in the Volunteers section. 5. Verify that these buttons are in the Custom Buttons section: Mass Email Volunteers, Shift Calendar, Volunteer Roster, and Find Volunteers. If any aren't, add them. 6. Back in the left-hand palette, select **Related Lists**, then verify that these related lists are on the page layout: Job Recurrence Schedules, Volunteer Shifts, Volunteer Recurrence Schedules, and Volunteer Hours. If any aren't, add them. 7. Click the wrench icon on the Volunteer Hours related list's tab. ![Edit icon on the Volunteer Hours related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/edit_vol_hours_related_list.png) 8. Select the fields you want displayed. ![Fields displayed on the Volunteer Hours related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_hours_related_list_fields.png) 9. Expand the Buttons section and verify that Mass Edit Volunteer Hours is one of the Selected Buttons. ![Click the plus icon on the Buttons section to show buttons on related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/related_list_buttons.png) ![Selected buttons on the related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_hours_related_list_buttons.png) 10. Click **OK**, then confirm the related list updates. ![Volunteer Hours related list with changes](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/vol_job_layout_vol_hours_related_list.png) 11. **Save** your changes. 9. Lastly, repeat the same tasks for the Volunteer Shift Layout. 1. In the Object Manager, from the list of objects, select **Volunteer Shift**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Click **Volunteer Shift Layout**. 4. Verify that the appropriate volunteer fields are on your page layout. If any aren't, drag and drop them in the Volunteer Information section. 5. Verify that these buttons are in the Custom Buttons section: Mass Email Volunteers, Shift Calendar, Volunteer Roster, and Find Volunteers. If any aren't, add them. 6. Back in the left-hand palette, select **Related Lists**, then verify that the Volunteer Hours related list is on the page layout. 7. Click the wrench icon on the Volunteer Hours related list's tab. ![Edit icon on the Volunteer Hours related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/edit_vol_hours_related_list.png) 8. Select the fields you want displayed. ![Selected fields on the Volunteer Hours related list on the Volunteer Shift layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_shift_selected_fields.png) 9. Expand the Buttons section and verify that Mass Edit Volunteer Hours is one of the Selected Buttons. 10. Click **OK**, then confirm the related list updates. ![Volunteer Hours related list on the Volunteer Shift layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/vol_shift_layout_vol_hours_related_list.png) 11. **Save** your changes. That's it. You're finished with the required post-installation tasks. Well done! Next up is feature configuration. Get the most out of V4S by tailoring the app to work the way your organization does. ## Create a Volunteers for Salesforce Lightning App If you're currently using the Volunteers for Salesforce Classic App, we recommend you create a Volunteers for Salesforce Lightning App. You can learn more about Lightning apps [here](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=dev_apps_lightning.htm). You can also create multiple Lightning apps based on the needs of different groups of users. For example, your org could show a different version based on whether the user logging in is an Admin or a Volunteer Coordinator. With Lightning apps, you can: - Choose which tabs to show and the order in which they appear - Easily control who sees the apps, by choosing which profiles to assign the apps to - Update colors and logos 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/setupgear.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter App in the Quick Find box, then click **App Manager**. You should see the Lightning Experience App Manager. 3. Click **New Lightning App**. 4. Enter the following information: - **App Name**: Volunteers - **Developer Name** (gets filled in automatically): Volunteers - **Description**: (Lightning Experience) Manage your volunteer processes. - **Choose a logo**. Here is the logo we use: ![Volunteers for Salesforce logo](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4slogo.png) - **Primary Color Hex Value**: #0070D2 5. Click **Next**. 6. On the App Options tab, select **Standard Navigation**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. On the Utility Items tab, click **Next**. 9. On the Navigation Items tab, add the following tabs to the Selected Items (in this order): - Volunteers Help - Home - Volunteers Wizard - Volunteer Jobs - Shift Calendar - Find Volunteers - Leads - Contacts - Campaigns - Reports - Dashboards 10. Click **Next**. 11. On the User Profiles tab, choose the appropriate profiles. 12. Click **Save & Finish**. You should now see the new Lightning app in the Lightning App Manager list. ![Lightning Experience App Manager with Volunteers for Salesforce Lightning app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/lightningexperienceappmanager.png) And see the new tile in the App Launcher. ![App Launcher with Volunteers for Salesforce Lightning app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/applauncher.png) And when you click on the tile in the app launcher, you see the Volunteers Help tab. ![Volunteers Help tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteershelp.png) # Post-Installation Tasks Once Outbound Funds Module is installed, we recommend taking time to review the new metadata. - The five new custom objects—Funding Programs, Funding Requests, Funding Request Roles, Requirements, Disbursements—to ensure they meet the needs of your organization. For example, your organization can add an additional field for notes on the Disbursements object. - The picklist values within the new custom objects. You can change the out-of-the-box values that don't quite align with your organization. For example, your organization can configure the Population Served field on the Funding Request object. It's simple to update, add, or remove values. See [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=updating_picklists.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - The page layouts for the new custom objects. Some fields may need to be added or removed based on your organization and its users. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - **[Post-Installation Tasks for the Fundseeker Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_post_installation_tasks_npsp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you used one of the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template installers, you will need to update the Funding Request, Funding Program, and Requirement page layouts then assign these updated page layouts to the Fundseeker Plus Login profile. - **[Post-Installation Tasks for NPSP Extension](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_post_installation_tasks_npsp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have NPSP, you'll need to update page layout assignments and Lightning record pages. ## Post-Installation Tasks for the Fundseeker Portal If you used one of the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template installers, you will need to update the Funding Request, Funding Program, and Requirement page layouts then assign these updated page layouts to the Fundseeker Plus Login profile. ### Update the Funding Request Page Layout Add the Submit button to the Funding Request page layout so fundseekers can submit their applications to you. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Funding Request**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **OFM Funding Request Site Layout**. 6. Click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 7. Drag **Submit Application** to Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions. 8. Click **Save**. ### Update the Funding Program Page Layout Add the Apply button to the Funding Program page layout so fundseekers can apply to Funding Programs. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Funding Program**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **OFM Funding Program Site Layout**. 6. Click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 7. Drag **Apply** to Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions. 8. Click **Save**. ### Update the Requirement Page Layout Add the Submit button to the Requirement page layout so fundseekers can submit information on a Requirement. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. Click **Requirement**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **OFM Requirements Site Layout**. 6. Click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 7. Drag **Submit** to Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions. 8. Click **Save**. ### Assign Page Layouts Assign the updated Funding Request, Funding Program, and Requirement page layouts to the Fundseeker Plus Login profile so they are able to apply to Funding Programs and submit Funding Requests and Requirements. 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 3. Click **Fundseeker Plus Login**. 4. In the **Find Settings...** box, enter the name of the object you want and select it from the list. For example, Funding Request. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. For the Page Layout Assignment, select the page layout you added the Mobile and Lightning Action to. For example, **OFM Funding Request Site Layout**. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Repeat for the Funding Program and Requirement objects. ## Post-Installation Tasks for NPSP Extension If you have NPSP, you'll need to update page layout assignments and Lightning record pages. ### Page Assignments Return to step 2 and and select the General Accounting Unit object, then assign the GAU Outbound Funds Layout page layout. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. In the list of objects, click **Disbursement**. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. 7. Select which profiles to assign the Disbursement NPSP Layout to. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note Click and drag or click and press Shift to select more than one profile. 8. Select **Disbursement NPSP Layout** from Page Layout To Use. 9. Click **Save**. ### Lightning Record Pages Repeat this for the General Account Unit (GAU Outbound Funds Record Page) and GAU Expenditure (GAU Expenditure Record Page) objects. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click **Object Manager**. 3. In the list of objects, click **Disbursement**. 4. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 5. Click **Disbursement NPSP Record Page**. 6. Click **Edit**. 7. Click **Activation...**. ![Disbursement NPSP record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/install_lightning_record_pages.png) 8. Click **App Default**, then click **Assign as App Default**. 9. Select **Outbound Funds**. 10. Click **Next**, **Next**, then **Save**. 11. Click **Save**. # Predict Prospects Conversion with Scoring Framework Use Scoring Framework to get predictions about the likelihood of a prospective learner enrolling into your educational institution. The predictions are based on a prospective learner's current level of engagement with your institution. By knowing which prospective learners are most likely to be interested, the admissions team can focus on those learners and improve your rate of admissions.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a CRM Analytics template configuration:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Education Cloud Intelligence
To get predictions, create a CRM Analytics template configuration in Scoring Framework with Prospect Engagement Score (Education Cloud) as the template configuration type. To define a predefined target variable, select **Prospect Engagement Score (Education Cloud)**. See Also: - [Create and Set Up a CRM Analytics Template Configuration for Predictions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.create_and_set_up_template_configurations.htm&type=5) # Predictive Insight Input Fields Learn more about data that is parsed to generate predictive insights. Einstein for Nonprofits parses and analyzes data from [Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack.htm). Depending on jobs that are initiated by admins, bulk data is analyzed by using [Einstein Prediction Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder.htm&type=5) or Backup Models to generate predictions about constituents. Insights and scores from Einstein Prediction Builder or Backup Models can be used to segment or target specific constituents to further refine the prediction output. ## First-Time Donor Predictive insights about constituents becoming first-time donors provides fundraising employees with an understanding about which supporters, with no previous donations, can be converted to donors. However, there are no guarantees about who becomes a first-time donor. The tool predicts future donors based on on past giving and similarities with other donors. This table shows Einstein Prediction Builder input fields. | Standard Contact Fields | Nonprofit Success Pack Contact Fields | | --- | --- | | Birthdate | npe01\_\_PreferredPhone\_\_c | | Email | npe01\_\_Preferred\_Email\_\_c | | Title | npe01\_\_Work\_Address\_\_c | | Description | npe01\_\_Primary\_Address\_Type\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Other\_Address\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Secondary\_Address\_Type\_\_c | This table shows Backup Models input fields: | Standard Contact Fields | Nonprofit Success Pack Contact Fields | | --- | --- | | Birthdate | npe01\_\_Primary\_Address\_Type\_\_c | | HomePhone | npsp\_\_Current\_Address\_\_c | | MailingCity |   | | MailingCountry |   | | MailingPostalCode |   | | MailingState |   | | MobilePhone |   | | Phone |   | ## Recurring Donor Predictive insights about constituents becoming recurring donors provide nonprofit fundraising staff with an understanding about supporters who can be converted to repeat donors. However, there are no guarantees as to who becomes a recurring donor or about the ability to predict future revenue from recurring donations. This table shows Einstein Prediction Builder input fields. | Standard Contact Fields | Nonprofit Success Pack Contact Fields | | --- | --- | | Title | npe01\_\_AlternateEmail\_\_c | | Birthdate | npo02\_\_AverageAmount\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_Best\_Gift\_Year\_Total\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_FirstCloseDate\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Home\_Address\_\_c | |   | npsp\_\_Largest\_Soft\_Credit\_Amount\_\_c | |   | npsp\_\_Number\_of\_Soft\_Credits\_\_c | |   | npsp\_\_Number\_of\_Soft\_Credits\_Last\_N\_Days\_\_c | |   | npsp\_\_Number\_of\_Soft\_Credits\_Last\_Year\_\_c | |   | npsp\_\_Number\_of\_Soft\_Credits\_This\_Year\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Other\_Address\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Preferred\_Email\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_PreferredPhone\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Primary\_Address\_Type\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_SmallestAmount\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_Soft\_Credit\_Last\_Year\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_Soft\_Credit\_This\_Year\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_Soft\_Credit\_Total\_\_c | |   | npo02\_\_Soft\_Credit\_Two\_Years\_Ago\_\_c | |   | npe01\_\_Work\_Address\_\_c | This table shows Backup Models input fields: | Standard Contact Fields | Nonprofit Success Pack Contact Fields | | --- | --- | | MailingPostalCode | npe01\_\_WorkEmail\_\_c | | MailingState | npe01\_\_HomeEmail\_\_c | | MailingCity | npe01\_\_AlternateEmail\_\_c | | Email | npe01\_\_WorkPhone\_\_c | | Phone | npsp\_\_Do\_Not\_Contact\_\_c | | HomePhone |   | | MobilePhone |   | | IsEmailBounced |   | ## Top Donor Top donors are constituents whose donation amounts fall within the top 25% of all contributions over the last 36 months. Predictive insights about constituents becoming top donors provides nonprofit fundraising staff with an understanding about constituents who donate enough to move them past the top-donor threshold. However, there are no guarantees as to who donates in the future or about future revenue amounts from donors. This table shows Einstein Prediction Builder input fields: | Nonprofit Success Pack Contact Fields |   | | --- | --- | | npo02\_\_OppsClosedLastNDays\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_OppsClosedLastYear\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_OppsClosedThisYear\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_OppsClosed2YearsAgo\_\_c |   | | npe01\_\_Primary\_Address\_Type\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_SmallestAmount\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_NumberOfClosedOpps\_\_c |   | This table shows Backup Models input fields: | NPSP Contact Fields |   | | --- | --- | | npo02\_\_OppsClosedLastNDays\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_OppsClosedLastYear\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_OppsClosedThisYear\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_OppsClosed2YearsAgo\_\_c |   | | npe01\_\_Primary\_Address\_Type\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_SmallestAmount\_\_c |   | | npo02\_\_NumberOfClosedOpps\_\_c |   | # Predictive Insights using Backup Models Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org. Backup Models provide metrics on the likelihood of constituents becoming first-time, recurring, or top donors. Backup Models provide predictive metrics even when your org doesn’t meet data thresholds for Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB) to generate your metrics. EPB needs a [minimum threshold of records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5) to be able to generate predictions. Einstein for by Nonprofits informs you via the notification bell when your org meets this threshold. Backup Models use a set of calculations specific to your org to generate scores. If Backup Models are enabled at the same time as EPB, then the generated EPB results appear on the Contact cards. You should set up Backup Models at the same time as EPB. Backup Models produce percent probability scores similar to those generated by EPB. However, for higher accuracy and org-specific customized output, Salesforce recommends that you use data from your org to obtain EPB predictive insights. The status of an EPB job shows **Model Failed** when EPB fails to generate a prediction. If EPB is unable to model the data set and generate scores due to insufficient data volumes or an application error, then the results from Backup Models appear on the Contact cards instead. Ensure that Backup Models are enabled for your org. Failure to activate Backup Models may result in a lack of predictive insights for your Contact cards. Backup Models include constituents data, except Contacts that are set to **Don't Profile**. The **Don't Profile** field is located on the Individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. Similar to EPB, Backup Models also analyze data to compute scores for three predictions: - **Likelihood to become a first time donor**: Provides fundraisers with insight about supporters who have no previous donations, but can possibly be converted to donors. - **Likelihood to become a recurring donor**: Provides fundraisers with insight about supporters who can probably be converted to repeat donors.​ If a contact has a recurring donation record with Status "Active" and Recurring Type "Open", then that contact is a recurring donor. - **Likelihood to become a top donor**: Provides fundraisers with insight about constituents who have donated enough over the past three years to move them past the top donor threshold.​ The top donor threshold is calculated as follows: 1. Consider all contacts who donated two years ago. Among these, find the giving threshold for the top 25% of donors from two years ago and refer to this group as the "two years ago threshold". 2. Consider all of the contacts who donated last year. Among these, find the giving threshold for the top 25% of donors from last year and refer to this group as the "last year threshold". 3. For each contact, if any of these are true, that contact is considered a top donor: - ​​A contact's giving for the last two years is greater than the two year threshold. ​ - A contact's giving this year is greater than the last year's threshold. - A contact's giving last year is greater than the last year's threshold. You can enable or disable any of these models. By displaying Backup Models predictive insights on Contact cards, these metrics are visible to users within the nonprofit. The set of input fields used by Backup Models has been selected by Salesforce.org after careful study of opt-in customer research and ethical data considerations. The [set of fields that are used as model inputs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org.") is different for each predictive field. The automated process determines which of the set of model input fields to use in your org’s model, and what relative influence each field has on the model’s output. Each model is an arithmetic and logical formula. It is impossible to extract any aspect of user data from the Backup Model. You will need to ​[set up Backup Models to generate predictions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_set_up_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Activate and configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights by using Backup Models.")​ and [display insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure model training and page layout to use Einstein for Nonprofits.")​. # Predictive Insights using Einstein Prediction Builder Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses EPB to generate predictive insights for your org. Einstein for Nonprofits helps admins generate predictive insights by using the [Einstein Prediction Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder.htm&type=5) (EPB) bundled package. You can obtain predictions for the likelihood of each constituent becoming a first-time donor, recurring donor, or top donor by using built-in AI tools. EPB models are single-customer models. These models are trained using data from only one customer org. EPB models data for all constituents, except Contacts that are set to **Don't Profile**. The **Don't Profile** field is located on the Individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. Einstein for Nonprofits analyzes uses EPB to compute scores for these three predictions: - **Likelihood to become a first time donor**: Provides fundraisers with insight about supporters who have no previous donations, but can possibly be converted to donors. - **Likelihood to become a recurring donor**: Provides fundraisers with insight about supporters who can probably be converted to repeat donors.​ If a contact has a recurring donation record with Status "Active" and Recurring Type "Open", then that contact is a recurring donor. - **Likelihood to become a top donor**: Provides fundraisers with insight about constituents who have donated enough over the past three years to move them past the top donor threshold.​ The top donor threshold is calculated as follows: 1. Consider all contacts who donated two years ago. Among these, find the giving threshold for the top 25% of donors from two years ago and refer to this group as the "two years ago threshold". 2. Consider all of the contacts who donated last year. Among these, find the giving threshold for the top 25% of donors from last year and refer to this group as the "last year threshold". 3. ​​If any of these are true for each contact, then that contact is considered a top donor: - A contact's giving for the last two years is greater than the two year threshold. ​ - A contact's giving this year is greater than the last year's threshold. - A contact's giving last year is greater than the last year's threshold. These predictive metrics enable you to make smart decisions by quickly evaluating a prospect’s donation history or trends. Audiences can be tailored for a particular campaign by using the latest constituent data. EPB trains multiple single-customer models with different configurations, and uses the configuration with the best model performance metrics. Your org’s models are trained by an automated process, not by a person. The [set of fields that are used as model inputs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insight_input_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn more about data that is parsed to generate predictive insights.") are different for each predictive field. This set of input fields was selected by [Salesforce.org](http://salesforce.org) after careful study of opt-in customer research and ethical data considerations. The automated process determines which of the set of model input fields to use in your org’s model, and what relative influence each field has on the model’s output. EPB has [data requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5) for the org before it can generate predictions. EFP requires a minimum of 400 Contact records. Of these records, at least 100 must be for a first-time donor, recurring donor, or top donor, and at least 100 records must not be associated with any of these categories. EPB jobs display a **Model Failed** status if they are unable to model the data set and generate scores due to insufficient data volumes or an application error. If EPB fails to generate a prediction, then the results from [Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org.") appear on Contact cards instead. Ensure that [Backup Models are enabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_set_up_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Activate and configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights by using Backup Models.") for your org. Otherwise your Contact cards might not show predictive insights. EPB models are updated each month. The system retrains each predictive field to consider changes in the org data. Retraining the models ensures that you always have access to the most accurate insights. These changes in the org can result in a new way to generate individual scores at the Contact level, which are automatically reflected in custom predictive insights. You will need to [set up EPB to generate predictions and display insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_set_up_predictive_insights_using_epb.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights using Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB)."). # Prepare K12 Architecture Kit Implementation Learn about K-12 Architecture Kit objects and fields and their relationships. - **[K-12 Architecture Kit Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_erd.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This diagram shows the relationships between K-12 Architecture Kit custom objects and Salesforce standard objects. - **[K-12 Architecture Kit Objects and Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_data_dictionary.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This document provides descriptions of K-12 Architecture Kit objects and fields. - **[Learn About Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_learn_about_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about K-12 Architecture Kit with these resources. # Prepare NPSP Data for Import Get a copy of the NPSP data import templates, learn how to use them, and some tips on cleaning your data to prepare for importing. - **[NPSP Data Importer Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these templates to import your data into Salesforce using the NPSP Data Importer object. - **[Using NPSP Data Import Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_using_di_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start here to learn how to use the NPSP Data Import Templates for your imports. - **[Clean and Format Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn to clean and format your data prior to importing it into Salesforce. Improperly formatted data causes errors during import. # Prepare Recommender Omniscript and Flexcard Clone and configure the Omniscript and Flexcard that are used to collect and show survey responses as part of the recommendation process. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Clone and Update Recommender Omniscript](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_recommender_omniscript_and_flexcard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the EDUAdmissions/RequestRecommender Omniscript that's used to collect survey responses from recommenders on your Experience Cloud site. - **[Clone the Recommender Flexcard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_recommender_omniscript_and_flexcard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make a copy of the EDUAdmissionsRecommenderRecommendationWrapper flexcard that shows the survey responses to reviewers in Salesforce. ## Clone and Update Recommender Omniscript Configure the EDUAdmissions/RequestRecommender Omniscript that's used to collect survey responses from recommenders on your Experience Cloud site.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Omniscripts:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omniscripts**. 2. Expand EDUAdmissions/RequestRecommender, and click **RequestRecommender**. 3. Click **New Version**. 4. Click **PresetValues**. 5. Click **SurveyDeveloperName**. 6. In Value, enter the developer name for your recommender survey. 7. Save your changes. 8. Activate your Omniscript. ## Clone the Recommender Flexcard Make a copy of the EDUAdmissionsRecommenderRecommendationWrapper flexcard that shows the survey responses to reviewers in Salesforce.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Flexcards:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Flexcards**. 2. Expand EDUAdmissionsRecommenderRecommendationWrapper, and click **EDUAdmissionsRecommenderRecommendationWrapper**. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. Change the name of the Flexcard, and then click **Clone**. # Prepare the Data for Holds Create records that populate the reasons, restrictions, and resolutions of your holds. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To populate objects: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
Before your start, [turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes.") to access the required objects. ## Create a Regulatory Authority Record 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Regulatory Authorities**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and a description. For example, enter Office of the Registrar as the name. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Fields on the Regulation and Regulatory Code Objects 1. Configure the Scope picklist on the Regulation object. See [Customize Standard Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customize_stdfields.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The picklist values reflect different categories of institutional policies. For example, Student Enrollment and Degree Progression or Course Registration. 2. Similarly, configure the Type picklist on the Regulatory Code object. Make sure that this picklist has all the values in the Scope picklist on the Regulation object. ## Create Records for Reasons 1. Create a regulation record and a regulation version record. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Regulations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and a description. For example, enter Academic Standing Policy as the name. 4. For Scope, select a value from the picklist that you defined. For example, select **Student Enrollment and Degree Progression**. 5. Select a regulatory authority record. For example, select **Office of the Registrar**. 6. Specify a regulation manager and add comments and reference document links as needed. 7. Save your changes. 8. In the Edit Regulation Version window, set the effective start and end dates. The effective period defines the lifetime of the regulation. 9. Update the summary and add links to the reference document list as needed. 10. Save your changes. Every regulation that you create automatically creates a corresponding regulation version in draft status. The record name has a V1 suffix by default. 11. Go to the Related tab and review the regulation version. Leave the regulation version in draft status until you’re ready to connect it to regulation clauses. Update its status after you make the connection. 2. Create a regulation clause record and a regulation clause version record. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Regulation Clauses**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and a description. For example, enter GPA Requirement as the name. 4. Select a regulation record. For example, select **Academic Standing Policy**. 5. Add comments and reference document links as needed. 6. Save your changes. 7. In the Edit Regulation Clause Version window, enter the effective start and end dates. The effective period defines the lifetime of the regulation clause. 8. Save your changes. Every regulation clause that you create automatically creates a corresponding regulation clause version in draft status. The record name has a V1 suffix by default. 9. Go to the Related tab and review the regulation clause version. 3. Map a regulation clause version to a regulation version. 1. From the regulation clause version record that you viewed earlier, go to the Related tab. 2. In the Regulation Version Regulation Clause Versions section, click **New**. 3. Select the regulation version that you want to map to this regulation clause version. For example, select the **Academic Standing Policy\_V1** regulation version. The mapping is viable only if both the regulation version and the regulation clause version are in draft status. 4. Save your changes. 4. Publish the regulation clause version and its related regulation version. 1. From the same regulation clause version record, go to the Details tab. 2. Update the status to Published, and then to Active. 3. From the regulation version record that you selected for mapping earlier, go to the Details tab. 4. Update the status to Published, and then to Active. ## Create Records for Restrictions 1. Create a business operations process record. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Business Operations Process**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name, an API name, and a description. For example, enter Course Registration as the name. 4. Select the functional owner and technical owner, specify the status and the parent business operations process, and add comments as needed. 5. Save your changes. 2. Map a regulation clause version to the business operations process record that you created. This mapping creates a reason-restriction pair. If a violation of this regulation clause occurs, the system puts a restriction on the mapped business operation process. 1. From the business operations process record page, go to the Related tab. 2. In the Business Operations Process Regulation Clause Versions section, click **New**. 3. Select the regulation clause version that you want to map the business operations process to. For example, select **GPA Requirement\_V1**. 4. Save your changes. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Course Registration automatically blocks students who have active holds from registering for courses. To make sure that Course Registration finds holds with the right restrictions, create a business operations process record and give it the API name of Course\_Registration. See [Course Registration Considerations in Course Search and Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_search_and_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide students with a simplified way to find and enroll in courses. Students search for courses and view details of course sections on a search results page. Students with the right permissions can add courses from the search results directly to a cart. They can review course availability and their own eligibility, and register for courses from the cart."). ## Create an Action Plan Template for Resolutions 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Templates**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name and a description. For example, enter Create a remedial plan with your advisor as the name. 4. Select **Regulatory Code Violation** as the target object. 5. Select **Industries** as the action plan type. 6. Save your changes. 7. To add a task to the action plan template, in the Items tab, click **New Task**. 8. Enter a subject, select the task priority, and set the number of days for the student to initiate the task. 9. If the task is mandatory, select **Required**. 10. To dynamically assign the task to a specific student, under Task Assignment, select **Regulatory Code Violation.Response Context ID** as the assignee target. 11. Save your changes and then publish your template. # Prepare Your Data for Success With Data Integrity, schedule updates to make sure that all existing and new additions to your database stay clean. Set up rules to find duplicates, then view and merge those duplicates with a few clicks. To learn more about Data Integrity, we’d like to introduce you to Max Bristol, a development associate at SF Scholars. SF Scholars is a nonprofit organization that promotes social and economic equity through educational enrichment and college readiness programs. Both Max and SF Scholars are fictional, but we think you’ll relate to their challenges. Max manages a large database with hundreds of thousands of supporters. He has to manage multiple third party vendors to ensure that addresses are standardized, capture address changes when constituents move, and catch duplicates. There are a lot of duplicates! Max also has to make sure all of the third party updates make their way back to Salesforce. Max sometimes felt overwhelmed with the tedious task of keeping constituent information up-to-date. Max now uses Data Integrity to help his organization streamline and automate data management processes by improving the quality of constituent information. Data Integrity gives him the ability to: - [Standardize global address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_address_stand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Incorrectly formatted addresses are costly and can lead to undeliverable mail. Address standardization in Data Integrity helps you avoid incorrectly formatted addresses by making updates based on the specific standards of your locale's postal authority. This includes city names, street abbreviations, and more.") to ensure constituent addresses follow the postal service standards for a specific locale. This includes a region's city names, street abbreviations, and more. - Update constituent information by leveraging data in the USPS [National Change of Address (NCOA)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_set_up_ncoa.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your Melissa Data SmartMover license for US or Canadian addresses. Similarly, set up your contract with Data8 for UK addresses.") database. - Use [contact management tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_managing_duplicate_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Contact Merge in Data Integrity makes it easy to find and merge duplicate Contacts in Salesforce.") to find and merge duplicate Contacts in Salesforce using Contact Merge and Duplicate Jobs. - Use [Contact Standardization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_standardize_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how you can update data about your Contacts with scheduled updates. Manage contact standardization update results and learn about error handling.") to ensure that you have validated communication methods as well as updates for deceased status and planned giving to increase efficiency for marketing outreach and planned giving. Using Data Integrity Max can schedule updates to make sure that all existing and new additions to the database stay clean. He can also set up rules to find duplicates, then view and merge those duplicates with just a few clicks. Max is back to volunteering for social and economic equity. He now has time to spare with the hours saved using Data Integrity! # Prepare Your Educational Institution's Financial Data with Accounting Subledger Use Accounting Subledger (ASL) to process and prepare the financial data captured by various departments for the Accounting department, while providing fund allocation and integration with an external accounting system.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use cases include: - Grants - Scholarships - Donations - Tuition - Library fees - Food programs - Application fees See Also: - [Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger.htm) # Prepare Your Org for Scoring Applications To prepare your Salesforce org for scoring applications, enable Discovery Framework, create a queue, and update the page layout for individual applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up application scoring: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Enable Discovery Framework. Education Cloud uses Discovery Framework to collect and manage application data by using OmniStudio. See [Set Up Common Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). 2. Create an Assessment Question category. Add a new picklist value to organize Scoring Assessment Questions. For example, Admissions. See [Create Assessment Question Categories, Questions, and Question Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_create_questions.htm&language=en_US). 3. Clone and activate these application review flows. - Admissions: Initiate Application Reviews ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This flow is set up to create Application Review records of type Staff Review when the Status field changes to In Review. If you want to use different rubrics for each stage of the application review, modify the flow to trigger based on a different field or criteria. - Admissions: Create and Assign Application Reviews - Admissions: Review Application 4. Create a queue. Create a queue to organize application reviews for applications. Select **Application Review** as the supported object. See [Create Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.setting_up_queues.htm&language=en_US). 5. If you want to use different rubrics for each stage of the application review, create picklist values for the Assignment Type field on the Action Plan Template Assignment record that represent each stage of the application review. See [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&language=en_US). For example, Application Review, Phone Interview, and In-Person Interview. 6. Update the Individual Application page layout to include the Type field on the Application Reviews related list. See [Customize Related Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customizing_related_lists.htm&language=en_US). 7. Add the Admissions: Review Application screen flow to the individual application page layout. 1. Open an Individual Application record. 2. Click ![Setup menu gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png) and then click **Edit Page**. 3. Drag the **Flow** component to the right column. 4. In Flow, find and select your cloned version of the Admissions: Review Application flow. 5. Select **Pass record ID into this variable**. 6. Save your changes. 8. Add the Rubrics Responses View to the application review page. 1. Clone and activate the EDUAdmissionsGetAssessmentWrapper Flexcard. 2. Edit the Application Review Lightning Page. 3. Add a tab named Review Answers. 4. Add the cloned version of EDUAdmissionsGetAssessmentWrapper to the tab. 5. Save your changes. # Prepare Your Org for Student Financials Enable student financial account management options and configure the necessary permissions for students and staff. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up student financial account management: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin: - [Turn on Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on Education Cloud to support the entire learner experience, including managing applications, scheduling, courses, and facilities.") 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on **Set Up Student Financial Account Management**. 3. If prompted to confirm, click **Turn On**. 4. To manage order creation settings for your organization, click **Configure Orders**. For more information, see [Enable Order Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.customize_order_enable.htm&language=en_US). 5. To manage pricing settings such as price book options for your organization, click **Configure Pricing**. For more information, see [Salesforce Pricing Basic Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.pricing_set_up_salesforce_pricing.htm&language=en_US). 6. To manage billing and payments settings for your organization, click **Configure Billing and Payments**. For more information, see [Set Up Billing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_setup.htm&language=en_US). 7. Update the sharing settings on objects required for student financial account management: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify the default internal access for these objects to **Public Read Only.** - Academic Term Enrollment - Order - Order Product - Academic Order - Contact Profile - Account 4. Modify the default internal access for these objects to **Public Read/Write.** - Academic Year - Academic Term - Academic Session - Product - Billing Schedule Group - Payment Schedule Distribution Method - Payment Schedule Policy - Payment Schedule Treatment - Pending Service Routing - Price Adjustment Schedule 5. Modify the default external access for these objects to **Public Read.** - Academic Year - Academic Term - Academic Session - Product - Billing Schedule Group You can also control this access with [Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_about_sharing_rules.htm&language=en_US&type=5). Anyone who creates program plans needs sharing and edit access to the relevant learning objects. 8. Set the field-level security for the Order Details Identifier field on the Academic Order object to Visible. 1. From the Object Manager settings for Academic Order, go to **Fields & Relationships**, and then click **Order Details Identifier**. 2. Click **Set Field-Level Security**, and then select **Visible** for all the profiles that use student financial account management. 3. Save your changes. 9. Provide users the necessary permissions to run flows: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets and select it. 2. Click **Clone** next to Education Cloud Full Access. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click on your permission set. 6. Click **App Permissions**. 7. Click **Edit**, select **Run Flows**, and then save your changes. 8. Assign the new permission set to your staff users. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US). 10. Clone the Order To Billing Schedule Flow record-triggered flow to configure it for students and advisors to use. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Order To Billing Schedule Flow**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a flow label and an API name. 5. Save your changes. 6. Activate the flow. See [Activate or Deactivate a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_distribute_activate.htm&language=en_US). 11. To use document templates to generate invoices as PDFs: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Billing Settings, and then select **Billing Settings**. 2. Turn on **Document Generation**. 3. Select a default template to generate PDFs of invoices. 4. Select a default template to generate PDFs of invoice previews. 12. Set up the default mechanism for document generation. See [Create the Document Generation Setting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.doc_gen_pi_create_document_generation_setting_for_docgen_winter25.htm&language=en_US). # Prepare Your Org for the Course Operations Agent Provide agent actions with the required data. Define at-risk criteria, supply data for course offering participant insights, create an advising record type for cases, and create employee records for faculty members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To manage objects: Education Cloud Full Access
To set up Data 360 and create or refresh data streams: Data Cloud Architect
To modify and run flows: Manage Flow
To update integration procedures: Omnistudio Admin
## Set Up the Data for Student Risk Reports Before you start, [set up Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&type=5&language=en_US) To provide input to the Student Risk Report subagent's actions, prepare grounding data that categorizes student performance and supplies course offering participant insights. 1. Make sure that your CourseScoreCategorization decision matrix and the required data streams are current. See [steps 3 and 4 in Visual Indicator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_visual_indicator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Visual Indicator in Education Cloud to give advisors a quick view of a student’s performance in the enrolled courses of the current academic term. Based on the student’s course component scores, Visual Indicator shows their course performance in customizable categories such as At Risk, On Track, and Needs Attention."). Agent actions use these resources to create at-risk reports. If you don’t have a decision matrix that categorizes student performance into categories, create one. If you have an existing decision matrix but want to create a different version, update the Decision Matrix action in the integration procedure. | Resource Name | Resource Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | GenerateRiskResult | Integration Procedure | Retrieves all course offering participants for a given course offering, gets their component grades, calculates final scores using the Course Score Calculation expression set, and returns a risk result for each participant. | | Course Score Calculation | Expression Set | Calculates a learner's score percentage in a course based on the weighted average of its components. | | CourseScoreCategorization | Decision Matrix | Defines the course score categories, and the text and icon format for each category. | 2. Prepare the data for course offering participant insights. Refresh the data streams to make sure that these required fields have valid values in Data 360. These values are grounding data sources for the prompt template that creates course offering participant insights.
Prompt Template Data model object Grounding Data Source
Create Course Offering Participant Insights Course Offering Activity Grade
  • Course Offering Participant
  • Academic Term Enrollment
  • Contact
Course Offering Participation
  • Course Offering Participant
  • Academic Term Enrollment
Course Offering Participant
  • Course Offering
  • Academic Term Enrollment
  • Contact
Course Offering Rubric Course Offering
3. Create a support process for the advising case type. 1. From Setup, find and select **Support Processes**. 2. Click **New**, and then enter Advising as the name. 3. Define the case statuses for your advising cases. 4. Save your changes. 4. [Define a case record type specifically for advising support cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to distinguish it from other types of cases. For Support Process, select **Advising**. Make sure that the record type is available to the appropriate profiles. ## Create Employee Records for Faculty Before you start, [customize the Create Employee flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_simplify_faculty_employee2_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Create Employee flow to collect specific information when it creates employee records for faculty. Agent actions use these fields to identify faculty Slack users."). An employee record links a faculty contact record to their Slack user ID. Agent actions use this mapping to add faculty to course offering channels and send direct messages to them in Slack. 1. Update the Employee Status field on the Employee object with the API name Employee2. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then select **Employee** with the API name Employee2. 2. From the sidebar, click **Fields & Relationships**, and then click **Employee Status**. 3. In Employee Status Picklist Values, click **New**. 4. Enter Active and Inactive as picklist values. 5. Save your changes. 2. To create employee records for faculty, run your version of the Create Employee flow. # Prepare Your Org to Manage Application Records Set up features, record types, page layouts, and components to manage application records in Education Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up features, record types, page layouts, and components to manage application records: Education Cloud Full Access
## Enable Name Suffixes and Middle Names To save suffixes and middle names so that they can be autofilled in future applications, enable name suffixes and middle names. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter User Interface, and then select **User Interface**. 2. Select **Enable Middle Names for Person Names**. 3. Select **Enable Name Suffixes for Person Names**. 4. Save your changes. ## Define State and County Picklists So that applicants can use the lookup fields in the application for states and countries, configure state and country picklists in Salesforce. See [Configure State and Country/Territory Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_state_country_picklists_configure.htm&type=5). ## Set Up an Individual Application Record Type 1. Create the individual application record type. 1. From the object management settings for individual application, go to **Record Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a record type label, and then press Tab to automatically fill the record type name. 4. Select the profiles that you want to grant access to this record type. 5. Select the page layout that users with this profile see for records with this record type. 6. Save your changes. 2. Configure the application record type. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Feature Settings, and then select **Application RecordType Config**. 2. Click **New Application RecordType Config**. 3. Enter a label. 4. For Application Usage Type, select **Education Cloud**. 5. For Object Name, select **Individual Application**. 6. For Record Type Name, enter the label for the record type that you previously created. 7. Save your changes. ## Configure the Program Term Application Timeline Page Layout 1. From the object management settings for Program Term Application Timeline, go to Page Layouts. 2. Click **Program Term Application Timeline Layout**. 3. Drag the **Action Plan Template Version** field to the information section of the page layout. 4. Save your changes. ## Configure the Individual Application Page Highlights Component 1. Open the individual application record page. 1. From the object management settings for individual application, go to **Lightning Record Pages**. 2. Click **Individual Application Record Page**, and then, for Lightning Page Detail click **Edit**. 2. Configure the highlights panel. 1. Click the **Highlights Panel** component. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you started using Education Cloud before Summer '23, remove the **EDUAdmissionsIndividualApplicationHighlightsPanel** Flexcard below the **Highlights Panel** component. 2. In the properties panel, make sure that **Show as collapsed (desktop only)** is unchecked. 3. For Set Fields Using Compact Layouts, click **System Default**. 3. Create a compact layout. 1. Click **Clone**. 2. Enter a label and name. 3. Add the fields that you want to show to the Selected Fields column. We suggest **Account**, **Contact**, **Learning Program**, **Academic Term**, and **Application Type**. 4. Save your changes. 4. Assign the compact layout. 1. Click **Compact Layout Assignment**. 2. For Primary Compact Layout, select the layout that you created in the previous steps. 3. Save your changes. In Lightning App Builder, refresh the individual application record page and make sure that the new layout is selected for Set Fields Using Compact Layouts. ## Add a Status Path to the Individual Application Record Page 1. Create a path on the Individual Application object that references the Application Status picklist. See [Guide Users with Path](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.path_overview.htm&type=5). 2. Add the path to the individual application record page. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Individual Applications**. 2. Open an individual application record. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. Drag the **Path** component to the page and save your changes. 5. Click **Activate**. 6. Click **Assign as Org Default**, and then click **Next**. 7. Save your changes. ## Add Item Status Summary to the Individual Application Record Page 1. In Omnistudio, clone and activate the EDUAdmissionsApplicationItemsContainer Flexcard. See [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud."). 2. Add the Flexcard to the individual application record page. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Individual Applications**. 2. Open an individual application record. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. Drag the **Flexcard** component to the page. 5. For Flexcard Name, enter EDUAdmissionsApplicationItemsContainer. 6. Adjust component visibility as required. 7. Save your changes. ## Set Access for Learning Program Field on Individual Application Give users who verify, review, or decide on applications read access to the Learning Program field on the individual application object. See [Set Field-Level Security for a Field on All Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_fields_fls.htm&type=5). # Prerequisites and Compatibility Learn about installation requirements, compatibility restrictions, and other considerations when installing EDA. - **[Operational Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can install EDA in Enterprise and Unlimited Edition Lightning Platform orgs. The profiles and layouts that come with Enterprise Edition or higher are required. For development and testing, you can use a Developer Edition org. - **[NPSP and EDA Compatibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA and Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) are not intended to be installed in the same org. If you install them together, Salesforce.org cannot provide support for your org. - **[Existing Salesforce Orgs and EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're considering installing EDA in an existing org, analyze custom objects you've created and map them to EDA objects to determine whether it's a good fit. If processes in your existing org are very different from your intended use of EDA and you expect little to no overlap between your current org's data and the data in EDA, consider implementing EDA in its own org with an integration to your existing org. - **[EDA and Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_prereqs_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA doesn't support Person Accounts. However, you can install it in an org with Person Accounts enabled. ## Operational Requirements You can install EDA in Enterprise and Unlimited Edition Lightning Platform orgs. The profiles and layouts that come with Enterprise Edition or higher are required. For development and testing, you can use a Developer Edition org. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit is primarily a data architecture providing objects configured for education. Access to the standard Account and Contact objects is required. Access to the standard Case object is required if you use the preconfigured behavior management features.  License requirements depend on your business requirements. If you have questions about license types, see [User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_understanding_license_types.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help and consult with your Account Executive. - Implementations commonly rely on Service Cloud licenses (typically to manage student enrollment, counseling, or case management) or Sales Cloud licenses (typically to draft quotes and invoices for students). - If your requirements include setting up an online portal for applicants to apply, check on application status, and add supporting documents, consider augmenting with Marketing Cloud and communities licenses. - With a Lightning Platform license, users can access EDA K-12 Architecture Kit in that they can access the Account object, the Contact object, and the package's custom objects. However, this limited access can be insufficient for CRM workflows commonly used alongside EDA K-12 Architecture Kit, such as those using the Case, Lead, Opportunity, or Campaign objects. - If you're using a Salesforce for Education product built on top of EDA, such as Advisor Link or Gift Entry Manager, keep in mind that each product has its own operational requirements. - My Domain must be enabled in your org before you install EDA K-12 Architecture Kit. To find out if My Domain is enabled, from Setup, search for and select **My Domain**. To learn more, including how to enable My Domain, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## NPSP and EDA Compatibility EDA and Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) are not intended to be installed in the same org. If you install them together, Salesforce.org cannot provide support for your org. There are multiple reasons why the two products can't coexist, such as: - We don't test this scenario, so any release could potentially introduce changes with unintended and unpredictable results. - Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) in EDA and NPSP conflict in their handling of Accounts, Addresses, Affiliations, Relationships, and Contacts. - Both NPSP and EDA have Household Account models, but they behave differently. Including both of these products in the same org can lead to unpredictable trigger behavior. ## Existing Salesforce Orgs and EDA If you're considering installing EDA in an existing org, analyze custom objects you've created and map them to EDA objects to determine whether it's a good fit. If processes in your existing org are very different from your intended use of EDA and you expect little to no overlap between your current org's data and the data in EDA, consider implementing EDA in its own org with an integration to your existing org. ## EDA and Person Accounts EDA doesn't support Person Accounts. However, you can install it in an org with Person Accounts enabled. If Person Accounts aren’t already enabled, don't enable them because you can't turn off the feature after it's enabled. To completely remove Person Accounts, you need to apply for a new Salesforce org and request a license transfer. Then migrate existing data from your current org to the new one. Ask your Account Executive for help with this process. If you must leave Person Accounts enabled: - Make sure that you do not use the Person Account record type to manage your student records. Instead, use the Administrative or Household Account record type. - If you plan to do lead conversion, make sure that the Person Account record type isn't set as the default record type for the profile of the user who is converting the lead. # Prerequisites for Course Waitlist Management To offer waitlists for course sections in the Course Search and Registration portal, set up Course Search and Registration. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations and set up Course Search and Registration: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). Advanced Academic Operations is required for Course Registration. 2. [Set up Course Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make upcoming and past courses and section details easily searchable on your Experience Cloud site, configure Course Search."). Course Search is a necessary prerequisite for Course Registration. 3. [Set up Course Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To streamline students' course registration on your Experience Cloud site, turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign the appropriate permission sets."). Course Registration is necessary to offer waitlists for courses. # Prerequisites for Data Migration to a New Org Turn on features, set up permissions, and create the records and custom fields required for data migration to Education Cloud in a new org. - **[Set Up Your Source Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_source_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on features and set up permissions to prepare your source org for data migration. - **[Set Up Your Target Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_target_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on features and set up permissions to prepare your new org with Education Cloud for data migration. - **[Add Custom Fields on Education Cloud Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_custom_fields_on_education_cloud_objects_neworg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ensure that the required custom fields are available on the case participant and care plan objects in Education Cloud. If they aren't available, add the missing fields manually. - **[Set Up Duplicate Rules in Your Target Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_duplicate_rules_in_your_target_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create rules to remove duplicate records on the account, contact, and lead objects in your target (Education Cloud) org. - **[Add Picklist Values to Education Cloud Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_picklist_values_to_education_cloud_fields_neworg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ensure that the picklist values in the source fields are available in the target (Education Cloud) fields. If the picklist values aren't available, add the missing values manually. # Prerequisites for Data Migration Within Your Org Turn on features, set up permissions, and create the records and custom fields required for data migration to Education Cloud within your org. - **[Set Up Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on features and set up permissions to prepare your org for data migration to Education Cloud. - **[Add Custom Fields on Education Cloud Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_custom_fields_on_education_cloud_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ensure that the required custom fields are available on the case participant, care plan, and service appointment objects in Education Cloud. If they aren't available, add the missing fields manually. - **[Modify Data Processing Engine Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_modify_data_processing_engine_definitions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the Data Processing Engine definitions. If you have custom fields that must be migrated, edit the definitions to change the data transformation operations as required. - **[Add Picklist Values to Education Cloud Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_picklist_values_to_education_cloud_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Ensure that the picklist values in the source object fields are available in the target (Education Cloud) object fields. If the picklist values aren't available, add the missing values manually. - **[Set Up Learning Objects in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_objects_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If a required field on a target object doesn’t have the corresponding lookup in the source object, the migration run fails. Create dummy records on such target objects to avoid failures due to unavailable lookup fields. - **[Set Up Record Alert Category in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_record_alert_category_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're migrating data from Student Success Hub, to use alerts in Education Cloud, create a record alert category for each record type on the alert object. - **[Set Up Individual Application in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_individual_application_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To store the preferences of an applicant during enrollment, set up the individual application object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Application Record Type Configuration in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_record_type_configuration_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use applications with Education Cloud, configure an application record type for the individual application object. - **[Set Up Engagement Channel Types in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_engagement_channel_types_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Engagement channel types store the channels that the staff use to meet learners. If you're migrating data from Student Success Hub, to use appointments with Education Cloud, create engagement channel types. - **[Set Up Appointment Categories in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_categories_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're migrating from Student Success Hub, to use appointments with Education Cloud, create appointment categories. - **[Set Up Service Territories for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_service_territories_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're migrating from Student Success Hub, to use group appointments with Education Cloud, configure service territories. # Prerequisites for Educational Characteristics Configuration Before you create educational characteristics and requirements for enrollment eligibility, set up Course Search and Registration. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations and set up Course Search and Registration: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
1. [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). Advanced Academic Operations is required for Course Registration. 2. [Set up Course Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make upcoming and past courses and section details easily searchable on your Experience Cloud site, configure Course Search."). Course Search is a necessary prerequisite for Course Registration. 3. [Set up Course Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To streamline students' course registration on your Experience Cloud site, turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign the appropriate permission sets."). Educational characteristics define attributes for students to determine eligibility for course registration. 4. Make the necessary objects available to Experience Cloud users. [Set your external organization-wide sharing defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_owd_external_setting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to give Experience Cloud users Public Read access to these objects. - Educational Characteristic - Educational Characteristic Type - Educational Characteristic Assignment - Educational Characteristic Requirement - Educational Characteristic Requirement Assignment - Educational Characteristic Requirement Relationship # Prerequisites for Gift Planning in Education Simplify the management of complex gift planning processes by turning on Gift Planning and Gift Agreements in Fundraising. To further improve the process, add related fields to the Fundraising page layouts. To keep gift values and gift types up-to-date, set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To update Fundraising settings and page layouts and to assign permission sets to users:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To configure flows: Manage Flow
To add Flexcards: Omnistudio Admin
## Set Up the Gift Planning App 1. In Setup, find and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Turn on **Gift Planning**. 3. Turn on **Gift Agreements**. 4. Add fields and related lists to page layouts. 1. On the Gift Transaction object, add the Donor Gift Concept, Party Philanthropic Research Profile, and Gift Agreement fields, and add the Gift Stewardship related list. 2. On the Gift Commitment object, add the Party Philanthropic Research Profile, Planned Gift, Donor Gift Concept, and Gift Agreement fields, and add the Gift Stewardship related list. 3. On the Gift Soft Credit object, add the Party Philanthropic Research Profile field. 4. On the Planned Gift object, add the Gift Stewardship related list. 5. On the Gift Value Forecast object, add the Gift Actuarial Entry field. 5. Make the necessary objects and fields available to users. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select the cloned version of the Education Cloud Full Access permission set that you assigned to Fundraising users. See [Fundraising Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them."). 3. Click **Object Settings**, and then click **Gift Stewardships**. 4. In Tab Settings, select **Visible**. 5. Select the object permissions that you want to assign. 6. In Field Permissions, select the access that you want to assign. 7. Save your changes. 8. Similarly, configure the settings for the Gift Stewardship Activities, Gift Actuarial Entries, and Donor Gift Concept Opportunities objects. Also assign at least Read access to all fields on the Planned Gift object. 6. To make sure that users can add and view Flexcards on the Planned Gift record pages, assign Omnistudio permission sets. - To add Flexcards, users need the Omnistudio Admin permission set. - To view Flexcards, users need the Omnistudio User permission set. ## Set Up Calculation and Visualization for Planned Gifts To set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records, you work in the Gift Planning app, the Planned Gift Lightning page, and Flow Builder. You also populate planned gift data in bulk. These tasks make sure that all of the gift types have the correct data and that flows calculate the correct values. 1. Confirm that the Planned Gift Insights Flexcard is on the Planned Gift Lightning page. The Planned Gift Insights Flexcard dynamically renders child Flexcards for specific gift types. If the parent Flexcard isn't on the record page, add it. See [Add a Flexcard to a Lightning Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_activateconfigureand_publish_flexcards_24744.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create your own active version of the Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes flow. This flow calculates present, deferred, and future values and updates planned gift records when the Expectancy field changes. 3. To make sure that automations calculate present, deferred, and future gift values correctly, populate these fields on your planned gift records in bulk. Use Data Loader, an Apex script, or another method of your choice. - Principal Amount - Net Return Rate - Payout Rate - Term - Discount Rate - Deferral Period - Expectancy - Face Value - Principal Percentage - Expected Estate Value 4. To make sure that automations calculate annuity rates correctly, create a planned gift annuity rate record and populate the Rate field for these gift types: Immediate Gift Annuity and Deferred Gift Annuity. 5. To make sure that planned gift records of different types show the correct data, populate type-specific fields in bulk. Use Data Loader, an Apex script, or another method of your choice. To learn which fields need data insertion for specific gift types, see [Visualizations for Planned Gift Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_visualizations_for_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The planned gift record page offers dynamic visualizations that automatically adapt to the structure of specific gift types. Select a gift type to get a Flexcard that shows only the fields that matter most, which streamlines review and data entry."). SEE ALSO - [Omnistudio Flexcards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_flexcards_24388.htm&language=en_US) # Prerequisites for Gift Planning in Nonprofit Simplify the management of complex gift planning processes by turning on Gift Planning and Gift Agreements in Fundraising. To further improve the process, add related fields to the Fundraising page layouts. To keep gift values and gift types up-to-date, set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To update Fundraising settings and page layouts and to assign permission sets to users:

FundraisingAccess permission set
To configure flows: Manage Flow
To add Flexcards: Omnistudio Admin
## Set Up the Gift Planning App 1. In Setup, find and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Turn on **Gift Planning**. 3. Turn on **Gift Agreements**. 4. Add fields and related lists to page layouts. 1. On the Gift Transaction object, add the Donor Gift Concept, Party Philanthropic Research Profile, and Gift Agreement fields, and add the Gift Stewardship related list. 2. On the Gift Commitment object, add the Party Philanthropic Research Profile, Planned Gift, Donor Gift Concept, and Gift Agreement fields, and add the Gift Stewardship related list. 3. On the Gift Soft Credit object, add the Party Philanthropic Research Profile field. 4. On the Planned Gift object, add the Gift Stewardship related list. 5. On the Gift Value Forecast object, add the Gift Actuarial Entry field. 5. Make the necessary objects and fields available to users. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select the cloned version of the FundraisingAccess permission set that you assigned to Fundraising users. 3. Click **Object Settings**, and then click **Gift Stewardships**. 4. In Tab Settings, select **Visible**. 5. Select the object permissions that you want to assign. 6. In Field Permissions, select the access that you want to assign. 7. Save your changes. 8. Similarly, configure the settings for the Gift Stewardship Activities, Gift Actuarial Entries, and Donor Gift Concept Opportunities objects. Also assign at least Read access to all fields on the Planned Gift object. 6. To make sure that users can add and view Flexcards on the Planned Gift record pages, assign Omnistudio permission sets. - To add Flexcards, users need the Omnistudio Admin permission set. - To view Flexcards, users need the Omnistudio User permission set. ## Set Up Calculation and Visualization for Planned Gifts To set up calculation and visualization for planned gift records, you work in the Gift Planning app, the Planned Gift Lightning page, and Flow Builder. You also populate planned gift data in bulk. These tasks make sure that all of the gift types have the correct data and that flows calculate the correct values. 1. Confirm that the Planned Gift Insights Flexcard is on the Planned Gift Lightning page. The Planned Gift Insights Flexcard dynamically renders child Flexcards for specific gift types. If the parent Flexcard isn't on the record page, add it. See [Add a Flexcard to a Lightning Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_activateconfigureand_publish_flexcards_24744.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create your own active version of the Update Planned Gift When Expectancy Changes flow. This flow calculates present, deferred, and future values and updates planned gift records when the Expectancy field changes. 3. To make sure that automations calculate present, deferred, and future gift values correctly, populate these fields on your planned gift records in bulk. Use Data Loader, an Apex script, or another method of your choice. - Principal Amount - Net Return Rate - Payout Rate - Term - Discount Rate - Deferral Period - Expectancy - Face Value - Principal Percentage - Expected Estate Value 4. To make sure that automations calculate annuity rates correctly, create a planned gift annuity rate record and populate the Rate field for these gift types: Immediate Gift Annuity and Deferred Gift Annuity. 5. To make sure that planned gift records of different types show the correct data, populate type-specific fields in bulk. Use Data Loader, an Apex script, or another method of your choice. To learn which fields need data insertion for specific gift types, see [Visualizations for Planned Gift Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_visualizations_for_gift_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The planned gift record page offers dynamic visualizations that automatically adapt to the structure of specific gift types. Select a gift type to get a Flexcard that shows only the fields that matter most, which streamlines review and data entry."). SEE ALSO - [Omnistudio Flexcards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_flexcards_24388.htm&language=en_US) # Prerequisites for Managing Trigger Handlers Before you can manage Trigger Handlers, make sure they are set up correctly in your org and are ready to use. - Enable Administrator Access to Trigger Handler Fields - Verify Fields on Trigger Handler Layout ## Enable Administrator Access to Trigger Handler Fields Confirm that the System Administrator profile has Read and Edit access to all Trigger Handler fields. (If you're not sure how to adjust access to fields, read [Set Field Permissions in Permission Sets and Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_fls.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help.) - Active - Asynchronous - Class - Filter Field - Filter Value - Load Order - Object - Owned by Namespace - Trigger Action - Trigger Handler Name - User Managed - Usernames to Exclude ## Verify Fields on Trigger Handler Layout Confirm that all the Trigger Handler fields are present on the Trigger Handler Layout. (If you're not sure how to adjust page layouts, read [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help.) # Prerequisites for Philanthropic Research in Education To prepare your Salesforce org to use Philanthropic Research, complete these prerequisites. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Turn on Einstein Generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_turn_on_einstein_for_philanthropic_research.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Einstein features in the Prospect Research: Create Research Request and Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details flows, turn on Einstein generative AI in your Salesforce org. - **[Update Philanthropic Research Page Layouts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add buttons to Philanthropic Research record pages to easily launch the Philanthropic Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence and Create Research Request Case flows. # Prerequisites for Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit To prepare your Salesforce org to use Philanthropic Research, complete these prerequisites. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Turn on Einstein Generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_turn_on_einstein_for_philanthropic_research.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Einstein features in the Prospect Research: Create Research Request and Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details flows, turn on Einstein generative AI in your Salesforce org. - **[Update Philanthropic Research Page Layouts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add buttons to Philanthropic Research record pages to easily launch the Philanthropic Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence and Create Research Request Case flows. # Prerequisites for Recording Gifts in Education Before recording each gift type, Salesforce admins and Fundraising users have specific tasks to complete. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Salesforce Admin Prerequisites Review the required Salesforce admin tasks for each gift type.
Gift Type Admin Tasks
Single Payment Gift (Untracked Solicitation)
Multiple Payment Gift
Recurring Gift
Matching Gift
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • Optionally, create a custom field at the Business Account level to capture matching policies for the matching gift donor.
Inbound Grant
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • For gift commitments to be available when creating a gift entry, set the Installment Extension Day Count, Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, and Failing Transaction Count in General Fundraising Settings.
  • Set up grant solicitation processes on the Opportunity object (record type, stage values, Sales Process).
  • Create custom fields on the Opportunity object for grant-specific information.
  • Set up a grant-specific page layout for the Opportunity object.
  • Create and assign a permission set for anyone who needs access to grant-related functionality.
In-Kind Gift
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • For gift commitments to be available when creating a gift entry, set the Installment Extension Day Count, Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, and Failing Transaction Count in General Fundraising Settings.
  • Review and modify Gift Vehicle picklist values on the Gift Commitment object as needed.
  • Optionally, add a custom field for tracking description and quantity. Also add this custom field to the Gift Entry Flow, if necessary.
Gift from Donor-Advised Fund
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • For gift commitments to be available when creating a gift entry, set the Installment Extension Day Count, Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, and Failing Transaction Count in General Fundraising Settings.
  • Confirm that Gift Soft Credits are available on the Gift Entry template and Gift Transaction related list.
  • Optionally, add Pledge record type to the Gift Commitment object.
## Fundraising User Prerequisites Review the required Fundraising user tasks for each gift type.
Gift Type Fundraising User Tasks

Single Payment Gift (Untracked Solicitation)

Multiple Payment Gift

Recurring Gift

Matching Gift

Inbound Grants

In-Kind Gift
Gift from Donor-Advised Fund
# Prerequisites for Recording Gifts in Nonprofit Before recording each gift type, Salesforce admins and Fundraising users have specific tasks to complete. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

## Salesforce Admin Prerequisites Review the required Salesforce admin tasks for each gift type.
Gift Type Admin Tasks
Single Payment Gift (Untracked Solicitation)
Multiple Payment Gift
Recurring Gift
Matching Gift
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • Optionally, create a custom field at the Business Account level to capture matching policies for the matching gift donor.
Inbound Grant
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • For gift commitments to be available when creating a gift entry, set the Installment Extension Day Count, Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, and Failing Transaction Count in General Fundraising Settings.
  • Set up grant solicitation processes on the Opportunity object (record type, stage values, Sales Process).
  • Create custom fields on the Opportunity object for grant-specific information.
  • Set up a grant-specific page layout for the Opportunity object.
  • Create and assign a permission set for anyone who needs access to grant-related functionality.
In-Kind Gift
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • For gift commitments to be available when creating a gift entry, set the Installment Extension Day Count, Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, and Failing Transaction Count in General Fundraising Settings.
  • Review and modify Gift Vehicle picklist values on the Gift Commitment object as needed.
  • Optionally, add a custom field for tracking description and quantity. Also add this custom field to the Gift Entry Flow, if necessary.
Gift from Donor-Advised Fund
  • Set up Gift Default Designations.
  • For gift commitments to be available when creating a gift entry, set the Installment Extension Day Count, Lapsed Unpaid Transaction Count, and Failing Transaction Count in General Fundraising Settings.
  • Confirm that Gift Soft Credits are available on the Gift Entry template and Gift Transaction related list.
  • Optionally, add Pledge record type to the Gift Commitment object.
## Fundraising User Prerequisites Review the required Fundraising user tasks for each gift type.
Gift Type Fundraising User Tasks

Single Payment Gift (Untracked Solicitation)

Multiple Payment Gift

Recurring Gift

Matching Gift

Inbound Grants

In-Kind Gift
Gift from Donor-Advised Fund
# Prerequisites for Your Mentoring Portal To set up and use a Mentoring portal in Education Cloud, complete these prerequisites.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Mentoring Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_your_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and manage Mentoring benefits in Education Cloud to support learners in a variety of areas, such as networking, skill development, academic guidance, and career development. - **[Determine How Many Portals You Need](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_your_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How you designate mentors and mentees in your organization determines if you can use a single Experience Cloud site for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. - **[Set Up Mentoring Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_your_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your users to access your mentoring Experience Cloud site. ## Set Up Mentoring Programs Create and manage Mentoring benefits in Education Cloud to support learners in a variety of areas, such as networking, skill development, academic guidance, and career development. See Also: - [Mentoring Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_a_mentoring_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Education Cloud Mentoring app to create a program to connect mentees with mentors, and manage and assign mentoring benefits.") - [Mentoring Program Benefits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_benefits_for_your_mentoring_program.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up mentoring benefits and identify benefit providers for your mentoring program.") ## Determine How Many Portals You Need How you designate mentors and mentees in your organization determines if you can use a single Experience Cloud site for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. If participants are only either mentors or mentees, and there is no overlap, you can set up your single Education Portal to support Mentoring along with your other programs such as Recruitment and Admissions, Student Success, and Alumni. If users in your institution can be both mentors and mentees, you must create separate portals for mentees and mentors. See Also: - [Create a Mentoring Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_mentoring_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an Experience Cloud site for your Education Cloud Mentoring portal. How you designate mentors and mentees in your organization determines if you can use a single Experience Cloud site for your mentoring portal.") ## Set Up Mentoring Portal Users Prepare your users to access your mentoring Experience Cloud site.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To manage Mentoring users: | Education Cloud Full Access | ### Create Profiles for Mentors and Mentees 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. For Customer Community Plus User, click **Clone**. 3. In Profile Name, enter a name for the Mentor user and then save your changes. 4. Similarly, create the Mentee user profile. ### Create and Assign a Mentor Permission Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. For Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label and API name for your mentor permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Assign the permission set to mentor users. ### Set Field Permissions for Your Mentor Permission Set 1. Click your mentor permission set. 2. Click **Object Settings**. 3. Click **Benefit Assignments**, and then click **Edit**. 4. Add these field permissions. 1. For End Date Time, select **Read Access**. 2. For Provider, select **Read Access**. 3. For Start Date Time, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 4. For Status, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 5. For Unit of Measure, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Next to Benefit Assignments, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and select **Benefit Disbursements**. 7. Click **Edit**, and then add these field permissions. 1. For Disbursement Status, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 2. For Unit of Measure, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 8. Save your changes. 9. Next to Benefit Disbursements, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and select **Programs**. 10. Click **Edit**. 11. For End Date, select **Read Access**, and then save your changes. 12. Next to Programs, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and select **Program Enrollments**. 13. Click **Edit**, and then add these field permissions. 1. For Application Date, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 2. For Contact, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 3. For End Date, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 4. For Is Active, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 5. For Start Date, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 6. For Status, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 14. Save your changes. ### Create and Assign a Mentee Permission Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. For Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label and API name for your mentee permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Assign this permission set to mentee users. ### Set Field Permissions for Your Mentee Permission Set 1. Click your mentee permission set. 2. Click **Object Settings**. 3. Click **Benefit Assignments**, and then click **Edit**. 4. Add these field permissions. 1. For End Date Time, select **Read Access**. 2. For Provider, select **Read Access**. 3. For Start Date Time, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 4. For Status, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 5. For Unit of Measure, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Next to Benefit Assignments, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and select **Benefit Disbursements**. 7. Click **Edit**, and then add these field permissions. 1. For Disbursement Status, select **Read Access**. 2. For Unit of Measure, select **Read Access**. 8. Save your changes. 9. Next to Benefit Disbursements, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and select **Programs**. 10. Click **Edit**. 11. For End Date, select **Read Access**, and then save your changes. 12. Next to Programs, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) and select **Program Enrollments**. 13. Click **Edit**. 14. For Object Permissions, select **Create**. 15. Add these field permissions. 1. For Application Date, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 2. For Contact, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 3. For End Date, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 4. For Is Active, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 5. For Start Date, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 6. For Status, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access**. 16. Save your changes. ### Create a Permission Set for Action Plans 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a label for your permission set, then press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 4. For License, select **None**, and then save your changes. 5. Click **System Permissions**, and then click **Edit**. 6. Enable **Access Activities** and **Edit Tasks**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Assign this permission set to both mentee and mentor users. # Preview Your Care Plan Template and Use the Care Plan Summary View Preview the structure of the care plan template before publishing so that you can see everything in place and make adjustments before it goes live. After publication, use the Care Plan Summary view to see all the parts of the care plan on one page. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. # Price an Academic Order You can incorporate these pricing resources into your workflows to set up academic order pricing. For example, you can customize the expression set template to apply discounts.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
| Resource Name | Resource API Name | Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Pricing Procedure Template Expression Set | PricingProcedureTemplateExpressionSet | Expression Set Template | Provides a pricing procedure template for student fee calculations. | | EduOrder | EduOrder\_stdctx | Context definition | Provides the context definition for events related to orders and order items. | | Price Book Academic Interval Entries | Price\_Book\_Academic\_Interval\_Entries | Decision Table | Provides a decision table template for price book entries in an academic interval. | # Primary Contact vs. Primary Affiliation The Primary Contact is the one go-to contact for all communication with an Organization or Household. A Primary Affiliation is the Account that the Contact is associated with more than any other Account, such as their employer. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Organization Primary Contact](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BZRZXRyeEI8). - **[What is a Primary Contact?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_primary_contact_vs_primary_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From the perspective of an Account, the Primary Contact is the one go-to contact for all communication with that Organization or Household. On a Household, the Household's first Contact (likely the Contact you used to create the Household) is automatically assigned as the Primary Contact. On an Organization, the Primary Contact is manually assigned. An Organization or Household may have one and only one Primary Contact. - **[What is a Primary Affiliation?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_primary_contact_vs_primary_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Primary Affiliation is the Account that the Contact is associated with more than any other Account, such as their employer. While the Primary Affiliation is typically used for representing the employer/employee connection between an Organization Account and a Contact, it could also be used to represent a donor who's a board member for a specific foundation. - **[So, What's Causing the Confusion?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_primary_contact_vs_primary_affiliation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Primary Contact for a Household is a relatively clear concept. Each Household has one contact that's designated as the "Head of Household." When you start looking at Organization Accounts, however, the concept gets a bit more confusing. ## What is a Primary Contact? From the perspective of an Account, the Primary Contact is the one go-to contact for all communication with that Organization or Household. On a Household, the Household's first Contact (likely the Contact you used to create the Household) is automatically assigned as the Primary Contact. On an Organization, the Primary Contact is manually assigned. An Organization or Household may have one and only one Primary Contact. For information on changing the Primary Contact for a Household, see [Change the Primary Contact for a Household](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_the_primary_contact_for_a_household.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Primary Contact field specifies the primary point of contact for Household Accounts."). To change the Primary Contact for an Organization, simply edit the Account record's Details section to select a different Primary Contact. ## What is a Primary Affiliation? A Primary Affiliation is the Account that the Contact is associated with more than any other Account, such as their employer. While the Primary Affiliation is typically used for representing the employer/employee connection between an Organization Account and a Contact, it could also be used to represent a donor who's a board member for a specific foundation. A Contact may have one and only one Primary Affiliation, though a single Organization Account may be designated as the Primary Affiliation for multiple Contacts. For information on creating or modifying Affiliations, see [Add and Manage Organization Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. Learn how to add and manage Organization Accounts."). ## So, What's Causing the Confusion? The Primary Contact for a Household is a relatively clear concept. Each Household has one contact that's designated as the "Head of Household." When you start looking at Organization Accounts, however, the concept gets a bit more confusing. The use of the word “Primary” for both Primary Contact and Primary Affiliation, as they relate to Organization Accounts, has caused the confusion. Let's look at an example of how these two things work within the context of an Organization Account. John, Sally, and Veronica all work for Test Foundation. John and Sally are employees, and Veronica is the CEO. They each have Affiliations with other Organizations (for example, the ABC Foundation), and have an Affiliation record in Salesforce for each of those Affiliations. But since the Test Foundation is John, Sally, and Veronica's employer, it's listed as the Primary Affiliation for all of them. On John's Contact record, you can see his list of Affiliations to other Organizations: ![Contact screen for John Jones with related list of his Organization Affiliations.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/primary_contact_v_affil_orgaffils.png) And in the Details section of his Contact record you can see the designation that Test Foundation is his Primary Affiliation: ![Contact screen for John Jones showing the Primary Affiliation field with value Test Foundation.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/primary_contact_v_affil_priaffil.png) Now, if you look directly at John's Test Foundation Affiliation record, you'll see that the Primary checkbox is checked. That checkbox indicates that Test Foundation is John's Primary Affiliation, however, it does not necessarily mean that John is the Primary Contact at Test Foundation. ![Affiliation record screen for John's Test Foundation affiliation, showing Primary field checked .](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/primary_contact_v_affil_pricheckbox.png) Over on the Test Foundation Account record, we see something different with respect to "Primary." There can only be one Primary Contact for the organization—and it's Veronica, since she's the CEO and the point-of-contact at the Test Foundation. ![Test Foundation account record screen, showing Primary Contact of Veronica Miller..](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/primary_contact_v_affil_pricontact.png) As for Sally and John, while they work at Test Foundation and it's their Primary Affiliation, they aren't the main points-of-contact for that organization. They're listed as Affiliated Contacts for Test Foundation, rather than as Primary Contacts. ![Test Foundation Account screen, showing related list of Affiliated Contacts.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/primary_contact_v_affil_affilcontacts.png) # Process a Collection of Gifts Test processing your Gift Entry batch and then process the batch to add the gifts to NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series Video [NPSP Gift Entry: Process a Batch](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JSKIkMOl23I). - **[Test Your Batch with Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To catch and resolve errors before you process your batch, use the Batch Dry Run. - **[Process a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you enter all gifts, process the batch to commit the records into NPSP. Keep in mind that you must resolve all errors first. You may see an error when trying to process the batch if you selected the Required Expected Totals Match checkbox, but either the Total Amount or Total Count fields don't match the expected totals you entered when creating the batch. - **[A Word About Batch Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to viewing the status of each record within a batch, you can view the status of the entire batch in the Batch Status field. - **[Delete Gift Entry Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_collection_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Since the Gift Entry records provide a link between the batch in which the gift was entered and the Payment or Opportunity record, we recommend that you do not delete them. Deleting Gift Entry records erases the entry history, which is sometimes needed for accounting or audit purposes. ## Test Your Batch with Dry Run To catch and resolve errors before you process your batch, use the Batch Dry Run. As you enter gifts, NPSP performs a dry run to make sure they will process correctly. That's great if you enter everything in one sitting and process the batch right away, but often the workday of people entering gifts isn't quite that streamlined. Instead, you might enter some of the gifts today, and return days later to finish entering and processing the whole batch. And in that time, other Opportunities or Payments may have been entered or modified in NPSP. As a result, when you go to process your batch, some of the older donations might not match up correctly anymore. To catch and resolve pesky errors before you process your batch, click **Batch Dry Run**. ![Batch Dry Run button highlighted in a sample batch.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/batch_dry_run.png) While Batch Dry Run is working, you can't enter or edit gifts. When it's done, you'll be able to add, edit, or process gifts. Any problematic donation line items are flagged with a Dry Run - Error status. You can expand the Error column to see details. ![Dry Run error status for a record in a batch list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_error_-_left.png) After you've identified the issue, scroll to the right end of the batch list and click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png). Select **Open** to edit the gift in the Gift Entry form or click **Delete** to remove the gift from the batch. ![The action menu for a gift flagged with a Dry Run error, showing options to open or delete the gift.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_error_-_right.png) Now that you've resolved errors, you’re ready to process your batch. ## Process a Batch After you enter all gifts, process the batch to commit the records into NPSP. Keep in mind that you must resolve all errors first. You may see an error when trying to process the batch if you selected the Required Expected Totals Match checkbox, but either the Total Amount or Total Count fields don't match the expected totals you entered when creating the batch. 1. Click **Process Batch**. 2. When the batch finishes processing, verify the updated Status for each record. If you set up and activated a batch number format, all Opportunities and Payments associated with this batch will include the batch number in the Batch Number field. Learn more in [Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches."). ## A Word About Batch Status In addition to viewing the status of each record within a batch, you can view the status of the entire batch in the Batch Status field. The Batch Status is based on the Import Status of the records within the batch. The values in Batch Status are: Open NPSP Data Importer hasn't processed the records and sent the information to the target objects. Completed NPSP Data Importer has processed all of the records in the batch. Failed - Needs Review One or more records in the batch failed to process. You can add your own values to the Batch Status picklist. For example, if batches need to be reviewed before processing, you may want values like Ready for Review or Ready to Process. NPSP will overwrite any custom values to Completed or Failed - Needs Review when the batch is processed. ## Delete Gift Entry Records Since the Gift Entry records provide a link between the batch in which the gift was entered and the Payment or Opportunity record, we recommend that you do not delete them. Deleting Gift Entry records erases the entry history, which is sometimes needed for accounting or audit purposes. If you absolutely must delete Gift Entry records, these are the two objects where you'll find Gift Entry batch information. NPSP Data Import Batches These records include Batch Name, Batch Description, or the Form Template used for the batch. NPSP Data Imports The Gift Entry records for the donations entered within a batch. The NPSP Data Import records are related to NPSP Data Import Batch records through a lookup field. If you have a lot of Gift Entry records to delete, use Salesforce Data Loader. For details, see [Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_loader.htm) and [Insert, Update, or Delete Data Using Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=inserting_updating_or_deleting_data.htm). After you delete all of the Gift Entry records in a batch and want to delete the batch itself, go to the NPSP Data Import Batches tab. # Process a Gift Batch in Education Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To process a gift batch:

View Developer Name system permission

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Batches**. 2. Click an unprocessed gift batch. 3. To simulate the batch processing, click **Batch Dry Run**. Otherwise, click **Process Batch**. 4. To review the status of the processing, refresh your browser. 5. Depending on the status of your batch, take one of these actions.
Gift Batch Status Description Next Action
Unprocessed The gift batch is yet to be processed. Dry run or process the gift batch.
In Progress The processing of the gift batch is in progress. You can’t initiate a dry run or actual processing a gift batch that's in progress. Periodically refresh the browser to check the updated status.
Processed The gift batch processing completed without any errors.

In the Related tab, review the processing details for each gift entry. In the Details tab, review the updated field values, such as the last processed date time.

You can’t add an entry to a gift batch or edit an entry in a gift batch after the batch is processed.
Partially Processed; Failed Some or all gift entries in the batch processed with errors.

To see which gift entry or entries failed and why, in the Related tab, review the Gift Processing Status and Gift Processing Result values for each gift entry. Resolve the errors, and then process the gift batch again.
# Process a Gift Batch in Nonprofit Add gift entries to a gift batch to process them all at once. For a gift batch to process successfully, every gift entry must process without any errors. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To process a gift batch:

View Developer Name system permission

AND

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Batches**. 2. Click an unprocessed gift batch. 3. To simulate the batch processing, click **Batch Dry Run**. Otherwise, click **Process Batch**. 4. To review the status of the processing, refresh your browser. 5. Depending on the status of your batch, take one of these actions.
Gift Batch Status Description Next Action
Unprocessed The gift batch is yet to be processed. Dry run or process the gift batch.
In Progress The processing of the gift batch is in progress. You can’t initiate a dry run or actual processing a gift batch that's in progress. Periodically refresh the browser to check the updated status.
Processed The gift batch processing completed without any errors.

In the Related tab, review the processing details for each gift entry. In the Details tab, review the updated field values, such as the last processed date time.

You can’t add an entry to a gift batch or edit an entry in a gift batch after the batch is processed.
Partially Processed; Failed Some or all gift entries in the batch processed with errors.

To see which gift entry or entries failed and why, in the Related tab, review the Gift Processing Status and Gift Processing Result values for each gift entry. Resolve the errors, and then process the gift batch again.
# Process an NPSP Data Import Batch Learn how to process a batch using NPSP Data Importer and what the different batch statuses mean. - **[Process Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_batch_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you have records associated with your batch, you can process them so that they're imported into your organization. This is the step that will bring the data from your spreadsheet into NPSP. - **[A Word About Batch Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_batch_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In addition to viewing the status of each record within a batch, you can view the status of the entire batch in the Batch Status field. ## Process Batch Now that you have records associated with your batch, you can process them so that they're imported into your organization. This is the step that will bring the data from your spreadsheet into NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can do a dry run of your batch to check for potential duplicates or errors before processing. Keep in mind that when you validate a batch record using dry run, the batch record itself won't be updated with Success and Failure counts. Those values are only updated upon actual import of records. For more information on performing a dry run, see [Verify Your Upload with Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import."). Keep in mind that when you process a batch, it only processes records for that particular batch. It doesn't process records for any other Data Import Batch. 1. In the App Launcher, click **NPSP Data Import Batches**. 2. Find your batch and click the Batch Name. 3. Click **Process Batch**. ![Process Batch button on an NPSP Data Import Batch](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/process_batch_button.png) 4. Confirm Configuration Settings. You can click **Edit** if you need to update the settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you edit settings while the Batch is selected and save, it updates the default configuration options for that batch. ![Edit button near the NPSP Data Import Configuration Options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/edit_button_for_batch_config.png) 5. Click **Begin Data Import Process**. 6. Wait until the confirmation page shows that the import completed successfully. ![Message showing results of batch processing](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/batch_complete.png) 7. Close the page to return to the NPSP Data Import Batches tab. Review your imported records on the related list on the batch record. ![NPSP Data Imports related list on a Data Import Batch record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/data_imports_related_list.png) After the records for this batch are processed, the Last Processed On field is updated with the date and time. The Records Successfully Processed and Records Failed fields are also updated accordingly. Each time the batch is processed, these fields are overwritten with the new date/time and record counts. If you set up and activated a batch number format, all Opportunities and Payments associated with this batch will include the batch number in the Batch Number field. Learn more in [Configure Batch Numbers for Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_batch_numbers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "For audit purposes, use auto-generated batch numbers to track Opportunity and Payment records created in batches."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Enable field history on the Last Processed On, Records Successfully Processed, and Records Failed fields, so that you have a history of batch results (since these values are overwritten each time a batch runs.) You can [enable field history](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_field_history_tracking.htm&type=5&language=en_US) in the Object Manager in Setup. ![Field history for the Last Processed On, Records Failed, and Records Successfully Processed fields](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/batch_field_history.png) ![An NPSP Data Import Batch record showing when the batch was last processed, how many records were successfully processed and how many failed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/processed_batch.png) If you'd like to run this batch on a recurring basis, see [Schedule a Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_schedule_batch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Now that you'll be regularly uploading files, you don't want to worry about manually processing them. This is really useful for cases like the upcoming event signup example, where you have signups coming in at different times, and you want to regularly upload the new signups."). ## A Word About Batch Status In addition to viewing the status of each record within a batch, you can view the status of the entire batch in the Batch Status field. The Batch Status is based on the Import Status of the records within the batch. The values in Batch Status are: Open NPSP Data Importer hasn't processed the records and sent the information to the target objects. Completed NPSP Data Importer has processed all of the records in the batch. Failed - Needs Review One or more records in the batch failed to process. You can add your own values to the Batch Status picklist. For example, if batches need to be reviewed before processing, you may want values like Ready for Review or Ready to Process. NPSP will overwrite any custom values to Completed or Failed - Needs Review when the batch is processed. # Process Fundraising Records Automatically with Batch Management in Education Set up Batch Management to streamline your fundraising operations. Batch Management lets you automate record processing in scheduled flows, so you can manage a high volume of standard and custom object records efficiently. Create batch jobs and set filter criteria to select records for processing. Track the progress and status of batch jobs and their components after execution. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up Batch Management:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To automate the processing of records in scheduled flows, set up [Batch Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_batch_management.htm&type=5). # Process Fundraising Records Automatically with Batch Management in Nonprofit Set up Batch Management to streamline your fundraising operations. Batch Management lets you automate record processing in scheduled flows, so you can manage a high volume of standard and custom object records efficiently. Create batch jobs and set filter criteria to select records for processing. Track the progress and status of batch jobs and their components after execution. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up Batch Management:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
To automate the processing of records in scheduled flows, set up [Batch Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.concept_batch_management.htm&type=5). # Process Installment Opportunities Close installment Opportunities when you receive donation payments for Recurring Donations. Closing an installment Opportunity generates the next installment Opportunity. - **[Close an Installment Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_installment_opps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Process installment payments with NPSP. - **[Close an Installment Opportunity Before or After the Next Donation Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_installment_opps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes a donor pays their monthly installment early or late. Learn how NPSP handles these scenarios. ## Close an Installment Opportunity Process installment payments with NPSP. Vera Reinhold is a new monthly donor and she just sent in her first check. Let's process the installment Opportunity. 1. On Vera's Recurring Donations, click the **Related** tab and find the Opportunities related list. 2. Click the Opportunity record **Vera Reinhold (1) 1/10/2020**. ![Vera Reinhold's first installment Opportunity](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/related-reinhold-opp.png) 3. Click the **Closed** stage in the path bar, then click **Select Closed Stage**. ![The Opportunity Path bar](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/select-stage.png) 4. Select **Closed Won**. Your Closed Won stage might be labeled something else (such as Posted). 5. Click **Save**. With this Opportunity closed, Vera's payment is recorded. On the Recurring Donation record, Total Paid Amount and Number of Paid Installments show that the first installment of $50 has been paid. ![The Total Paid Amount and Number of Paid Installments fields on the Recurring Donation record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/total-paid.png) When Vera closes the open Opportunity, NPSP generates the next open Opportunity for 2/10/2020. To the right of the Recurring Donations details, you can see a list of the next twelve installments. ![The Upcoming Installment component on Vera's Recurring Donation record showing 12 future monthly installments](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/upcoming-schedule.png) Upcoming Installments is a calculated display of installment Opportunities based on the field data on the Recurring Donation. If you change field data on an installment Opportunity, those changes aren't reflected in the Upcoming Installments visualization. ## Close an Installment Opportunity Before or After the Next Donation Date Sometimes a donor pays their monthly installment early or late. Learn how NPSP handles these scenarios. Sometimes a donor might pay their monthly installment a little early or a little late. That's perfectly fine, of course, but there are a couple of things to consider: - If the Close Date is within three days of the Next Donation Date, NPSP doesn't create an installment for the same month. - If those dates are more than three days apart, NPSP generates a new installment for the same month. This functionality exists to prevent duplicate installments. Let's look at an example scenario. 1. Your donor's Recurring Donation has a Next Donation Date of 4/15/2020, but they send their payment on 4/12/2020. 2. When you update the installment Opportunity's Stage to Closed Won, the Close Date updates to 4/12/2020. 3. In this case, NPSP doesn't generate the next installment for 4/15/2020 because 4/12/2020 falls within three days of the Next Donation Date. Instead, the next installment is generated for 5/15/2020. Here's another example. 1. Your donor's Recurring Donation has a Next Donation Date of 6/15/2020, but they send their payment on 6/1/2020. 2. When you update the installment Opportunity's Stage to Closed Won, the Close Date updates to 6/1/2020. 3. In this case, NPSP generates the next installment for 6/15/2020 because 6/1/2020 is more than three days from the Next Donation Date. This produces _two installment Opportunities_ for the month of June. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Your administrator can adjust the range of days that NPSP considers when an Opportunity matches the intended schedule using the Next Donation Date Match Range in **NPSP Settings** | **Recurring Donations**. We do not recommend setting a value higher than 20 days. The default value is three days. # Process Your Import Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity. Run the NPSP Data Importer tool to bring data from the NPSP Data Import custom object into your Salesforce objects. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note For Opportunities that don't include a Stage, the field will use the value set in Opportunity Stage When Fully Paid. Learn more about this NPSP setting in [Configure Opportunity Payments in NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_opportunity_payments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up and manage Opportunities, Payments, and Refunds in Nonprofit Success Pack."). 1. On the NPSP Data Imports tab, make sure that you select the **To Be Imported** List View. 2. Click **Import All Data Import Records** or **Import Selected Data Import Records**. 3. Review the summary page. ![The beginning of the data import process. Review your configuration options and the number of records to be processed before clicking Begin Data Import Process.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/import_data_1.png) 1. Look at the number of records that Salesforce will process.The importer always attempts to process all NPSP Data Import records that don't have an "Imported" status, including all records that have a "Failed" status. (Import isn't limited to the records displayed in the To Be Imported view.) 2. If you want to change the batch process size or rules used to match duplicate records, click **Edit**, change the default configuration options, then click **Save**. See [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching.") for details. (Is this an import you'll do often? Save these configuration options for future imports. Check out [Batch Import Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_import_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The ability to import data in batches can be very useful. Batch Data Import allows you to have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options (instead of using the default settings).") to learn more.) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you included a Salesforce ID in a Contact Imported field, the ID will be used for matching regardless of your selection in the Contact Matching Rule field. 4. Click **Begin Data Import Process**. You can monitor progress on the status page as the import proceeds; it may take a few minutes for the import to start. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important We recommend you leave this tab open until the import finishes so that you can see the detailed results. 5. Wait for the status page to show a status of Completed and a summary of the results. ![NPSP Data Import completed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/import_data_2.png) 6. Click **Close** to return to the NPSP Data Imports tab. 7. If import failed for a record, check that record's Failure Information field to see the error. It may have failed because of the order in which the objects where processed, and you may be able to correct the issue by processing the failed records again. For more help with errors, post a question to our [online community](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazercommunity). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you set the **Donation Matching Behavior** (see [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching.") for more info) to either No Match, Single Match, or Best Match and the Data Importer can't match against an existing Opportunity or Payment, the status of the Data Import will show "Failed." However, any associated Account or Contact from the Data Import will still be created. You can evaluate the Opportunity or Payment that failed and rerun the Data Importer. 8. Spend some time in Salesforce checking where your imported data landed. Make sure NPSP created the right types of records and the information in the individual CSV cells went to the right Salesforce fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If your CSV data didn't populate all of the fields you expected in the NPSP Data Import records, you may have run into a Data Import Wizard limitation. Please see this [Data Import Wizard Known Issue](https://success.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p3a0000017xyiqay) for more information. Delete any columns you aren't using in your import to get around this limitation. If you'd like to import more than 65 columns, use an API-based import tool such as Salesforce Data Loader. Once your users start working with your new records, you may not need to keep the NPSP Data Import records. See [Delete Imported Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_imported_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you've successfully imported your records, you can optionally reduce data storage by deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object. Deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object does not delete your new Account, Contact, or Opportunity donation records.") for more information. # Product Information for CM Find out more about product information for CM. - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Case Management. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Case Management. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Case Management. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Case Management. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Case Management."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Case Management. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Product Information for Grants Management Learn how Grants Management complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_product_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Grants Management. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Grants Management. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Grants Management. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Grants Management. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Grants Management."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Grants Management. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Product Information for IP Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Data Integrity. - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Insights Platform. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Insights Platform. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Insights Platform. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Insights Platform. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Insights Platform."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Insights Platform. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Product Information for NPSP Find out more about product information for NPSP. - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_product_information.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including NPSP. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including NPSP. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for NPSP. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for NPSP. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for NPSP."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for NPSP. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Product Information on OFM Learn how Outbound Funds Module complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Outbound Funds Module. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Outbound Funds Module. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Outbound Funds Module. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Outbound Funds Module. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_restrict_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Outbound Funds Module."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Outbound Funds Module. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Product Information on PMM Learn about Program Management Module product information for GDPR. - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Program Management Module. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Program Management Module. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Program Management Module. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Program Management Module. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Program Management Module."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Program Management Module. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Product Information on Volunteers for Salesforce Learn how Volunteers for Salesforce complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_product_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Volunteers for Salesforce. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Volunteers for Salesforce. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Volunteers for Salesforce. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Volunteers for Salesforce. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Volunteers for Salesforce."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Volunteers for Salesforce. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Program Enrollment Program Enrollment represents a student's (Contact's) enrollment in an Academic Program (Account). - **[Sample Uses for Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track students' past and present Program Enrollments to see the arc of their educational journeys, as they explore courses of study and commit to majors, minors, or specialized programs. - **[Configure Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Program Enrollment data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Create a Program Enrollment Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating a Program Enrollment record represents enrolling a Contact in an Academic Program. Typically, your institution has already created a series of Account records with the Academic Program record type to represent all of the programs on offer. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Program Enrollment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a Contact's newly created Program Enrollment record is saved, an Affiliation record between the Contact and the Academic Program is created automatically (if one didn't already exist). These Program Enrollment and Affiliation records are automatically kept in sync thereafter. For example, if the student changes majors, departments, or even colleges, and Program Enrollment records are updated, deleted, or created anew, those changes can trigger automatic updates to Affiliation records, and vice versa. ## Sample Uses for Program Enrollment Track students' past and present Program Enrollments to see the arc of their educational journeys, as they explore courses of study and commit to majors, minors, or specialized programs. - University—Track enrollments in undergraduate, graduate, and continuing education programs that grant degrees or credentials. - K-12—Track enrollments in academic, support, and recreational programs at a school or district level. ## Configure Program Enrollment Set up Program Enrollment data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Initial Configuration for Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While the Program Enrollment object comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Program Enrollment data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Program Enrollment While the Program Enrollment object comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Program Enrollment data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - EDA K-12 Architecture Kit comes with default automation that keeps Program Enrollment records in sync with both Academic Program Account records and Affiliation records. For details, see [Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm). - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Program Enrollment records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Program Enrollment object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). Program Enrollment is a junction object that relates the Contact and Account objects—specifically, relating a student Contact with an Academic Program (Account record type). For example, let's say that an institution's undergraduate English major is represented by an Academic Program record called B.A. English. When a student declares her major as English and officially enrolls in the major, a Program Enrollment record is created to relate her Contact record to the B.A. English Academic Program record. ![A Contact and an Account connected by the Program Enrollment and Affiliation junction objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/academ_progs_enrollmts_contactacctdiagram.png) ### Keep Up with Program Enrollment Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. | If Installed Before Version | Configuration Task | | --- | --- | | 1.118 | Add the Education History field to your page layouts, as needed. For more information, see [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_add_custom_picklist_values.htm). | ## Create a Program Enrollment Record Creating a Program Enrollment record represents enrolling a Contact in an Academic Program. Typically, your institution has already created a series of Account records with the Academic Program record type to represent all of the programs on offer. 1. From the Contact record that you're adding enrollment information to, click **New** in the Program Enrollments related list. 2. Enter relevant details, such as enrollment-related dates and standing in the Academic Program. Note these fields in particular. - Program—Start typing the name of the Academic Program, and select it when you see it suggested. - Eligible to Enroll—Select this field to indicate that this Contact can enroll in Courses. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This field can be useful in a SIS (Student Information System) integration with Education Data Architecture. Perhaps the SIS populates a student's registration information in the Program Enrollment record, and automatically selects Eligible to Enroll to indicate that the student is an active record, eligible to enroll. - Program Plan—If the field is visible, leave it blank. After you've saved this record, we automatically fill in the Program Plan that's designated as Primary for the Academic Program. If you don't see it filled in after saving, that either means that the Program hasn't designated a primary Program Plan or perhaps your institution has disabled this automatic feature. - Credits Attempted, Credits Earned, and GPA—Use these fields to store calculated, cumulative data. Education Data Architecture doesn't provide rollup calculations out of the box because institutions vary a lot in how they prefer to calculate overall credits or GPA. We let you customize your own approach, such as using Flow or custom code to recalculate the values upon individual record updates for a Contact or in a batch process. 3. Click **Save**. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Program Enrollment Data After a Contact's newly created Program Enrollment record is saved, an Affiliation record between the Contact and the Academic Program is created automatically (if one didn't already exist). These Program Enrollment and Affiliation records are automatically kept in sync thereafter. For example, if the student changes majors, departments, or even colleges, and Program Enrollment records are updated, deleted, or created anew, those changes can trigger automatic updates to Affiliation records, and vice versa. For more information about Program Enrollments and Affiliations, see [Program Enrollments In Parallel with Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm). # Program Enrollment Program Enrollment represents a student's (Contact's) enrollment in an Academic Program (Account). - **[Sample Uses for Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track students' past and present Program Enrollments to see the arc of their educational journeys, as they explore courses of study and commit to majors, minors, or specialized programs. - **[Configure Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Program Enrollment data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Create a Program Enrollment Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Creating a Program Enrollment record represents enrolling a Contact in an Academic Program. Typically, your institution has already created a series of Account records with the Academic Program record type to represent all of the programs on offer. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Program Enrollment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a Contact's newly created Program Enrollment record is saved, an Affiliation record between the Contact and the Academic Program is created automatically (if one didn't already exist). These Program Enrollment and Affiliation records are automatically kept in sync thereafter. For example, if the student changes majors, departments, or even colleges, and Program Enrollment records are updated, deleted, or created anew, those changes can trigger automatic updates to Affiliation records, and vice versa. ## Sample Uses for Program Enrollment Track students' past and present Program Enrollments to see the arc of their educational journeys, as they explore courses of study and commit to majors, minors, or specialized programs. - University—Track enrollments in undergraduate, graduate, and continuing education programs that grant degrees or credentials. - K-12—Track enrollments in academic, support, and recreational programs at a school or district level. ## Configure Program Enrollment Set up Program Enrollment data for your educational institution and learn about the steps required to maintain it. - **[Initial Configuration for Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While the Program Enrollment object comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Program Enrollment data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - **[Keep Up with Program Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Program Enrollment While the Program Enrollment object comes preconfigured and doesn't require additional configuration beyond your own preferred customizations, it's essential to understand how to manage Program Enrollment data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - EDA K-12 Architecture Kit comes with default automation that keeps Program Enrollment records in sync with both Academic Program Account records and Affiliation records. For details, see [Configure Affiliations Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_affiliations_settings.htm). - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Program Enrollment records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Program Enrollment object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). Program Enrollment is a junction object that relates the Contact and Account objects—specifically, relating a student Contact with an Academic Program (Account record type). For example, let's say that an institution's undergraduate English major is represented by an Academic Program record called B.A. English. When a student declares her major as English and officially enrolls in the major, a Program Enrollment record is created to relate her Contact record to the B.A. English Academic Program record. ![A Contact and an Account connected by the Program Enrollment and Affiliation junction objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/academ_progs_enrollmts_contactacctdiagram.png) ### Keep Up with Program Enrollment Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. | If Installed Before Version | Configuration Task | | --- | --- | | 1.22 | Add the Education History field to your page layouts, as needed. For more information, see [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_add_custom_picklist_values.htm). | ## Create a Program Enrollment Record Creating a Program Enrollment record represents enrolling a Contact in an Academic Program. Typically, your institution has already created a series of Account records with the Academic Program record type to represent all of the programs on offer. 1. From the Contact record that you're adding enrollment information to, click **New** in the Program Enrollments related list. 2. Enter relevant details, such as enrollment-related dates and standing in the Academic Program. Note these fields in particular. - Program—Start typing the name of the Academic Program, and select it when you see it suggested. - Eligible to Enroll—Select this field to indicate that this Contact can enroll in Courses. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This field can be useful in a SIS (Student Information System) integration with K-12 Architecture Kit. Perhaps the SIS populates a student's registration information in the Program Enrollment record, and automatically selects Eligible to Enroll to indicate that the student is an active record, eligible to enroll. - Program Plan—If the field is visible, leave it blank. After you've saved this record, we automatically fill in the Program Plan that's designated as Primary for the Academic Program. If you don't see it filled in after saving, that either means that the Program hasn't designated a primary Program Plan or perhaps your institution has disabled this automatic feature. - Credits Attempted, Credits Earned, and GPA—Use these fields to store calculated, cumulative data. K-12 Architecture Kit doesn't provide rollup calculations out of the box because institutions vary a lot in how they prefer to calculate overall credits or GPA. We let you customize your own approach, such as using Flow or custom code to recalculate the values upon individual record updates for a Contact or in a batch process. 3. Click **Save**. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Program Enrollment Data After a Contact's newly created Program Enrollment record is saved, an Affiliation record between the Contact and the Academic Program is created automatically (if one didn't already exist). These Program Enrollment and Affiliation records are automatically kept in sync thereafter. For example, if the student changes majors, departments, or even colleges, and Program Enrollment records are updated, deleted, or created anew, those changes can trigger automatic updates to Affiliation records, and vice versa. For more information about Program Enrollments and Affiliations, see [Program Enrollments In Parallel with Affiliations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_enrollments.htm). # Program Management With Program Management, Salesforce offers an effective solution to define, plan, and deliver your nonprofit initiatives. Built on the Salesforce platform, this next-generation product enables you to track and manage your programs and the benefits they provide. Program Management serves as a one-stop shop of key program and benefit details that helps organizations with insights into the most up-to-date information. You can use the power of the streamlined workflows to schedule benefits, enroll participants, track their attendance, and manage the benefit deliveries, with efficiency and ease. - **[New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_program_management_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Do more with the new and updated Program Management objects. - **[New Connect REST API Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_program_management_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** These resources are new for Program Management. ## New and Changed Objects Do more with the new and updated Program Management objects. Manage enrollment and disbursement of benefits in a program Use the new Program object. Manage participant enrollments in a program Use the new ProgramEnrollment object. Manage case participant enrollments in a program Use the new CaseProgram object. Manage the plan for delivering the benefit Use the new BenefitSchedule object. Manage an instance of a planned benefit delivery Use the new BenefitSession object. Manage benefits in a program Use these new fields and the existing ones on the Benefit object. - CurrentMonthDisbursedQty - CurrentYearAssignedQty - CurrentYearDisbursedQty - PreviousMonthDisbursedQty - PreviousYearAssignedQty - PreviousYearDisbursedQty - ProgramId Manage benefit types that group benefits in a program Use the new Type and UnitofMeasureId fields and the existing ones on the BenefitType object. Manage participants in a benefit Use the new ProgramEnrollmentId and UnitofMeasureId fields and the existing ones on the BenefitAssignment object. Manage disbursing benefits to participants and recipients Use these new fields and the existing ones on the BenefitDisbursement object. - BenefitSessionId - Description - DisbursedQuantity - DisbursementStatus - ProgramEnrollmentId - RecipientCount - RecipientType - UnitOfMeasureId ## New Connect REST API Resources These resources are new for Program Management. Add the case program to a benefit session Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/case-programs/${caseId}` resource. New request body: Case Programs Input New response body: Case Programs Output Add participants to a benefit schedule Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/benefit-schedules/${benefitScheduleId}/participants` resource. New request body: Benefit Schedule Participants Input New response body: Benefit Schedule Participants Output Add participants to a benefit session Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/benefit-schedules/${benefitScheduleId}/benefit-sessions/${benefitSessionId}/participants` resource. New request body: Benefit Session Participants Input New response body: Benefit Session Participants Output Create benefit disbursements for adhoc walk-in participants Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/benefit/${benefitId}/benefit-disbursements` resource. New request body: Benefit Disbursements Input New response body: Benefit Disbursements Output Create a preview of the benefit scheduling session Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/benefit-schedules` resource. New request body: Preview Benefit Sessions Input New response body: Preview Benefit Sessions Output Enroll participants in a program Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/programs/${programId}/enrollments` resource. New request body: Program Enrollments Input New response body: Program Enrollments Output Generate a benefit schedule for a benefit session Make a POST request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/benefit-schedules/${benefitScheduleId}/sessions` resource. New response body: Generate Benefit Session Output Update program participants Make a PUT request to the new `/connect/program-mgmt/programs/${programId}/enrollments` resource. New request body: Program Enrollments Input New response body: Program Enrollments Output # Program Management for Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes Enable program managers to efficiently manage their programs by using action plans. Use field-level security to restrict users’ access to view and edit specific fields. Get a comprehensive and chronological view of your program and benefit activities. Modify the benefit schedule workflow as per your business needs. - **[Use Action Plans to Efficiently Track Tasks and Documents for Your Programs and Benefits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_pm_efficiently_manage_tasks_doc_checklist_items.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define a checklist of operational tasks and documentation requirements or approvals for your programs and benefits by using action plans. - **[Use the Field-Level Security Setting to Restrict Your Users' Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_pm_field-level_security_to_restrict_users_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Restrict your users’ access to view and edit specific fields by using field-level security on the Program, Program Enrollment, Benefit Assignment, and Benefit Disbursement objects. - **[Track Program and Benefit Activities Chronologically](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_pm_track_program_and_benefit_activities_chronologically.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Timeline component to get a comprehensive and chronological view of your program and benefit activities. View all your past, current, and upcoming sessions or participant interactions for a program or benefit in one place. - **[Customize the Benefit Schedule Workflow to Address Your Business Needs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_244_npc_pm_customize_benefit_schedule_flow_for_business_needs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the prebuilt OmniScript for the benefit schedule workflow to offer an updated guided interaction for your program managers according to their business needs. # Program Management Module Architecture Learn about PMM architecture - **[PMM Feature Telemetry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_feature_telemetry.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** PMM Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. - **[PMM Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the Shield Platform Encryption add-on for PMM and its known limitations. # Program Management Module Managed Package The Program Management Module (PMM) managed package is a standard framework for NGOs to track programs, services, and constituents' or cohorts' program engagements and service delivery. - **[Learn About Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore and learn about the Program Management Module (PMM) package, how it integrates with NPSP, and the objects and fields that it includes. - **[Get Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install Program Management Module and complete the required post-installation tasks. - **[Configure Access to Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign PMM permission sets, create sharing rules, and provide users access to reports and dashboards. - **[Configure Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize and configure Program Management Module features. - **[Program Management Module Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use programs to track your organization's overall work. Learn how you can work with programs, program engagements, program cohorts, services, and service deliveries. - **[Program Management Module Reporting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_reporting_and_analytics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track program performance with reports and dashboards. Connect Tableau to your org to use the ready-made dashboards, and create custom reports and dashboards, too. - **[GDPR for Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Program Management Module. - **[Program Management Module Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_architecture.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about PMM architecture # Program Management Module Programs Use programs to track your organization's overall work. Learn how you can work with programs, program engagements, program cohorts, services, and service deliveries. - **[PMM Create Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a program, add clients to programs, and mark a program complete when it ends. - **[PMM Create Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_work_with_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and work with program engagements. - **[PMM Create Program Cohorts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and work with program cohorts. Add program engagements to a program cohort. - **[PMM Create Services and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create services and service deliveries, schedule services, and track attendance at service sessions. # Program Management Module Release Notes Learn what's in Program Management Module (version 1.31) in Spring '23. ## Changes Review the minor enhancements in Program Management Module (version 1.31) in Spring '23. - We enabled the Program Management Module (PMM) App and the Attendance Component on the Salesforce Mobile App. - We made improvements to the Bulk Service Delivery Tool (BSDT) participant selector to view a selected list of PEs in a specific stage. ## Community Ideas Delivered Check out the feature delivered thanks to community input. - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000i9biyuar/enable-program-management-on-mobile): Enable Program Management on mobile. # Program Management Module Release Notes Find and complete information faster in Program Management Module (version 1.32) in Summer '23. Limit program engagements and services options to show only active ones on the bulk service deliveries page. Find program cohorts, program engagements, and services easier by scanning through alphabetized lists. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management Module is installed. **Who**: Only users with the Customize Application permission can modify custom metadata types. Only users with the PMM: Deliver or PMM: Manage permission set can enter bulk service deliveries. See Also: - [Customize Bulk Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_bulk_service_deliveries.htm) # Program Management Module Release Notes Learn what's in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Community Ideas Delivered](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Attendance Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for the Attendance Component in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - **[Guidance Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built specific guidance so that admins can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. - **[Fixes and Other Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. ### Attendance Component Learn about the improvements for the Attendance Component in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - We updated the Attendance Component so you can track different fields for different services by assigning an attendance field set to each service. - We added the ability to customize attendance statuses to fit your business needs by using buckets and updating the status after it’s been submitted. - We added filters to make the list of participants more manageable. For example, you can filter out participants that have withdrawn or are waitlisted. - We added the ability to sort the attendance list by participant’s first or last name. ### Guidance Center If you are a new Salesforce customer, look for Guidance Center to help you to understand how to get started with setting up your org, and to be sure that you have a successful Salesforce implementation. Guidance Center is an in-app hub for admins to access resources for common tasks. We have built specific guidance so that admins can get information on preparation, implementation best practices, and customization options. Learn more about [Guidance Center](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/guidance-center-quick-look). ### Fixes and Other Enhancements Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. - We made it so you can use the Recent Sessions and Bulk Service Delivery Tool components in Experience Cloud sites. Thank you Pedro Fernandez for the contribution. - We added Attendance Field Set to the Service Object. This field allows you to specify which field set is used on the service session attendance component, based on the selection in the related Service. To use Attendance Field Set, give your users permission to view it and add it to page layouts. - We created an Active bucket for Program Engagement statuses so you control which program engagements show up in the participant selector panel of Bulk Service Delivery and New Service Schedule. ## Community Ideas Delivered Check out the features delivered thanks to community input. - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdpgauaj/pmm-make-track-attendance-component-on-service-session-dynamic): PMM: Make 'Track Attendance' Component on Service Session Dynamic - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdhbruaj/filtering-service-participants-that-shows-up-on-track-attendance): Filtering Service Participants that shows up on Track Attendance - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdh8iuar/allow-custom-program-engagement-fields-to-work-with-pmm-service-schedules): Allow Custom Program Engagement Fields to Work with PMM Service Schedules - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdoxkuar/allow-configuration-of-stage-filter-for-the-bulk-service-delivery-group-function): Allow configuration of Stage filter for the Bulk Service Delivery Group function - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000h4bbyuav/show-service-participants-on-track-attendance-in-alphabetical-order): Show Service Participants on Track Attendance in Alphabetical Order - [Idea delivered](https://ideas.salesforce.com/s/idea/a0b8w00000gdndzuab/enable-experiencecommunity-availability-for-lwcaura-components): Enable Experience/Community Availability for LWC/Aura Components ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. ### Field - AttendanceFieldSet\_\_c # Program Management Module Reporting Track program performance with reports and dashboards. Connect Tableau to your org to use the ready-made dashboards, and create custom reports and dashboards, too. - **[PMM Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_reports_and_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** PMM reporting makes it easy to extract meaningful data about your Programs to share with your stakeholders. - **[Build a Custom PMM Report](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_build_cust_pmm_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up reports and dashboards to provide information to your users in the ways that work best for them. - **[PMM Tableau Advanced Reporting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Tableau Dashboard Accelerators with Salesforce and explore your data with the ready-made dashboards. # Program Management Module Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Program Management Module (version 1.30) in Winter ‘23. ## Changes - We created a wizard to help you add sessions to an existing Service Schedule. Run the ServiceScheduleRollupsSchedulable batch job to make sure all your sessions are captured. - We added an Attendance Summary field. You can add this field to your pages by modifying the object’s page layouts. Run a [batch job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_config_svc_del_sum_data.htm&type=5) to make sure all your records are captured. To enable this feature: 1. In Custom Metadata Types, click **Feature Gate**. 2. Click **Manage Feature Gates**. 3. Select **All** in the View menu. 4. Click **Edit** next to Roll up Svc Deliveries to Svc Session, then click **Feature Active**. 5. Save your work. - We added a Participants Enrolled field so you can quickly compare the Service Schedule capacity and the number of people enrolled. You can add this field to your pages by modifying the object’s page layouts. To enable this feature: 1. In Custom Metadata Types, click **Feature Gate**. 2. Click **Manage Feature Gates**. 3. Select **All** in the View menu. 4. Click **Edit** next to Rollup Svc Participants to Svc Schedule, then click **Feature Active**. 5. Save your work. - We added the ability to delete Service Deliveries from a Service Session. - We made it so that, when you’re tracking attendance for a Service Session and check Don’t track attendance for this participant, the status persists even if you navigate away from the page. - We added the ability to filter which cohorts are visible in the participant selector. - We made multiple updates to improve accessibility. - We now support Brazilian Portuguese. # Program Plan Program Plan represents the course of study required to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program (Account). - **[Sample Uses for Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Program Plan object represents a snapshot in time of the requirements for a specific student cohort enrolling in an Academic Program. The program itself tends to be a reliable offering year after year, while the requirements for completion tend to evolve over time. Use Program Plan along with the Academic Program (Account) record type and the Plan Requirement object to manage your requirements data. - **[Configure Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and maintain the Program Plan object in Education Data Architecture. - **[Create a Program Plan Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Typically, your institution has already created Academic Program records to represent all of the programs on offer. Now, for a given Academic Program, create a Program Plan record for the current academic year, or perhaps for a previous or future academic year. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Program Plan Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, Program Plan records are related to Academic Program records, Plan Requirement records, and Program Enrollment records. ## Sample Uses for Program Plan The Program Plan object represents a snapshot in time of the requirements for a specific student cohort enrolling in an Academic Program. The program itself tends to be a reliable offering year after year, while the requirements for completion tend to evolve over time. Use Program Plan along with the Academic Program (Account) record type and the Plan Requirement object to manage your requirements data. - University—Represent the academic plan for a degree or credential offering. For example, a Biology Catalog Year 2017/2018 Program Plan record represents a snapshot in time of the requirements for a specific student cohort enrolling in the BS Biology Academic Program. - K-12—Represent the academic plans for a student's post-graduation path. For example, Program Plan records such as College Prep Plan, Vocational Plan, and Life Skills Plan can be created for students enrolling in a Graduation Academic Program. Thanks to Adeline Moore, one of our community members, for the EDA idea that inspired several discussions (in the Hub and during the 2017 London Sprint) and led to the development of this feature. ## Configure Program Plan Set up and maintain the Program Plan object in Education Data Architecture. - **[Initial Configuration for Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to manage Program Plan data and configure related settings. - **[Keep Up with Program Plan Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Program Plan It's essential to understand how to manage Program Plan data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Program Plan records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Program Plan object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Program Plan Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.57

  • Add the Program Plan field to the HEDA Program Enrollment Layout. We recommend adding it in the Information section, near the Program field that shows the Academic Program's Account.

  • For existing Contact page layouts, add the Program Plan field to the Program Enrollments related list.

  • If you're using a dedicated page layout for the Academic Program record type, consider adding the Program Plans related list to it. (Viewing related Program Plans from the Academic Program's Account record can be more convenient for some users, while others sometimes prefer to work from a list view of all Program Plans.)
## Create a Program Plan Record Typically, your institution has already created Academic Program records to represent all of the programs on offer. Now, for a given Academic Program, create a Program Plan record for the current academic year, or perhaps for a previous or future academic year. 1. Go to the Program Plans tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, find it from the App Launcher. 2. Enter relevant details, noting these fields in particular. ![Fields filled out on a new Program Plan record, including the Program Plan Name, Biology Catalog Year 2017/2018.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/program_plan_record_new.png) - Program Plan Name—Enter a name representing a versioned set of degree requirements, such as Biology Catalog Year 2017/2018. In this example, it represents the current academic year’s plan and requirements for earning an undergraduate Biology degree. For the next year, create a separate Program Plan record, Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019, to represent the latest plan and requirements. - Account—Start typing the name of the Academic Program, and select it when you see it suggested. For example, BS Biology. - Start Date and End Date—Specify the plan's effective dates, which are typically bookended by the first date when students can enroll in the Academic Program, and the last possible date of enrollment eligibility. - Status—If the plan still applies to some enrollees, select **Current**. Otherwise, select **Archive**. - Version—Enter additional version information that's not reflected in the Program Plan Name. - Is Primary—If this Program Plan is in effect for current enrollees, select **Is Primary**. Doing so automatically deselects the Is Primary field on a previous year's Program Plan and relates this Program Plan record to students' Program Enrollment records, so that new enrollees are always assigned the most current catalog of degree requirements. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note After a Program Plan is assigned to a student, it remains in effect for the duration of the student's enrollment in the program—even if subsequently a new plan is marked Primary and new enrollees are assigned the new plan. In other words, changing the Primary setting for a Program Plan doesn't affect previously assigned enrollees. 3. Click **Save**. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Program Plan Data By default, Program Plan records are related to Academic Program records, Plan Requirement records, and Program Enrollment records. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit validates deletion of related records to prevent orphaned data. - Before deleting an Academic Program record or a Program Enrollment record, you must first delete any related Program Plans. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip It's easiest to edit these related records from the Program Plans related list. - Before deleting a Program Plan record, you must first delete any related Plan Requirement records (including Plan Requirements nested under parent Plan Requirements). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip It's easiest to edit these related records from the Plan Requirements related list. # Program Plan Program Plan represents the course of study required to fulfill the requirements of an Academic Program (Account). - **[Sample Uses for Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Program Plan object represents a snapshot in time of the requirements for a specific student cohort enrolling in an Academic Program. The program itself tends to be a reliable offering year after year, while the requirements for completion tend to evolve over time. Use Program Plan along with the Academic Program (Account) record type and the Plan Requirement object to manage your requirements data. - **[Configure Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and maintain the Program Plan object in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Create a Program Plan Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Typically, your institution has already created Academic Program records to represent all of the programs on offer. Now, for a given Academic Program, create a Program Plan record for the current academic year, or perhaps for a previous or future academic year. - **[Things to Know About Maintaining Program Plan Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, Program Plan records are related to Academic Program records, Plan Requirement records, and Program Enrollment records. ## Sample Uses for Program Plan The Program Plan object represents a snapshot in time of the requirements for a specific student cohort enrolling in an Academic Program. The program itself tends to be a reliable offering year after year, while the requirements for completion tend to evolve over time. Use Program Plan along with the Academic Program (Account) record type and the Plan Requirement object to manage your requirements data. - University—Represent the academic plan for a degree or credential offering. For example, a Biology Catalog Year 2017/2018 Program Plan record represents a snapshot in time of the requirements for a specific student cohort enrolling in the BS Biology Academic Program. - K-12—Represent the academic plans for a student's post-graduation path. For example, Program Plan records such as College Prep Plan, Vocational Plan, and Life Skills Plan can be created for students enrolling in a Graduation Academic Program. Thanks to Adeline Moore, one of our community members, for the EDA idea that inspired several discussions (in the Hub and during the 2017 London Sprint) and led to the development of this feature. ## Configure Program Plan Set up and maintain the Program Plan object in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Initial Configuration for Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_program_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's essential to understand how to manage Program Plan data and configure related settings. ### Initial Configuration for Program Plan It's essential to understand how to manage Program Plan data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Program Plan records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Program Plan object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ## Create a Program Plan Record Typically, your institution has already created Academic Program records to represent all of the programs on offer. Now, for a given Academic Program, create a Program Plan record for the current academic year, or perhaps for a previous or future academic year. 1. Go to the Program Plans tab and click **New**. If you don't see the tab, find it from the App Launcher. 2. Enter relevant details, noting these fields in particular. ![Fields filled out on a new Program Plan record, including the Program Plan Name, Biology Catalog Year 2017/2018.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/program_plan_record_new.png) - Program Plan Name—Enter a name representing a versioned set of degree requirements, such as Biology Catalog Year 2017/2018. In this example, it represents the current academic year’s plan and requirements for earning an undergraduate Biology degree. For the next year, create a separate Program Plan record, Biology Catalog Year 2018/2019, to represent the latest plan and requirements. - Account—Start typing the name of the Academic Program, and select it when you see it suggested. For example, BS Biology. - Start Date and End Date—Specify the plan's effective dates, which are typically bookended by the first date when students can enroll in the Academic Program, and the last possible date of enrollment eligibility. - Status—If the plan still applies to some enrollees, select **Current**. Otherwise, select **Archive**. - Version—Enter additional version information that's not reflected in the Program Plan Name. - Is Primary—If this Program Plan is in effect for current enrollees, select **Is Primary**. Doing so automatically deselects the Is Primary field on a previous year's Program Plan and relates this Program Plan record to students' Program Enrollment records, so that new enrollees are always assigned the most current catalog of degree requirements. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note After a Program Plan is assigned to a student, it remains in effect for the duration of the student's enrollment in the program—even if subsequently a new plan is marked Primary and new enrollees are assigned the new plan. In other words, changing the Primary setting for a Program Plan doesn't affect previously assigned enrollees. 3. Click **Save**. ## Things to Know About Maintaining Program Plan Data By default, Program Plan records are related to Academic Program records, Plan Requirement records, and Program Enrollment records. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit validates deletion of related records to prevent orphaned data. - Before deleting an Academic Program record or a Program Enrollment record, you must first delete any related Program Plans. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip It's easiest to edit these related records from the Program Plans related list. - Before deleting a Program Plan record, you must first delete any related Plan Requirement records (including Plan Requirements nested under parent Plan Requirements). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip It's easiest to edit these related records from the Plan Requirements related list. # Protect Application Data Use multiple strategies to make sure that data is safe from unwanted access.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
In the application process, you collect data from the applicant across multiple objects. By default, the Salesforce record creator is the owner. To protect access to data after it's created, consider implementing one or more of these security measures to protect applicant and application data. | Security Measure | What Can I Do? | | --- | --- | | Object-Level Security | Use permission sets to protect objects that you don't want Experience Cloud users to access. | | Field-Level Security | Prevent users from seeing or editing specific fields on an object. For example, it's reasonable for the applicant to have read access to the Amount Paid field on the individual application record so that they can see the amount collected. However, to protect against the accidental or fraudulent changing of values, don't give permission to edit Amount Paid. | | Record-Level Security | Grant access to only specific records to Experience Cloud users. | | Ownership Transfer | Transfer the ownership of specific records, such as an individual application record, from the creator to the appropriate parties. | | Sharing Sets | Use sharing sets for Experience Cloud users to have access to the appropriate records. | See [Manage Data Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_data_access_mgmt.htm&type=5). # Provide a Full or Partial Refund in Education Create a refund to ensure that the associated gift transaction contains the complete transaction history. Return the full or a partial gift amount to the donor. Use refunds to resolve gift entry mistakes or to honor a donor's request to reverse their gift. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create gift refunds:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Click the paid gift transaction that you want to process a refund for. 3. Click **Related**, and in the Gift Refunds section, click **New**. 4. Enter the refund amount and the refund date. 5. Select the refund status. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select Completed and save the refund, Salesforce updates the refund amount and the current amount fields on the related gift transaction. The original amount on the related gift transaction does not change. 6. Save your changes. 7. In the gift transaction record, update the status field as needed. Your Salesforce admin can add a validation rule that verifies the accuracy of the status update. For example, if the refunded amount doesn't match the original amount, a validation rule ensures that the status can't be set to Fully Refunded. # Provide a Full or Partial Refund in Nonprofit Create a refund to ensure that the associated gift transaction contains the complete transaction history. Return the full or a partial gift amount to the donor. Use refunds to resolve gift entry mistakes or to honor a donor's request to reverse their gift. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create gift refunds:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Transactions**. 2. Click the paid gift transaction that you want to process a refund for. 3. Click **Related**, and in the Gift Refunds section, click **New**. 4. Enter the refund amount and the refund date. 5. Select the refund status. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select Completed and save the refund, Salesforce updates the refund amount and the current amount fields on the related gift transaction. The original amount on the related gift transaction does not change. 6. Save your changes. 7. In the gift transaction record, update the status field as needed. Your Salesforce admin can add a validation rule that verifies the accuracy of the status update. For example, if the refunded amount doesn't match the original amount, a validation rule ensures that the status can't be set to Fully Refunded. # Provide Refunds to Donors Provide full or partial refunds upon request. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This feature applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set can provide refunds. SEE ALSO [Provide a Full or Partial Refund](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_fr_provide_full_or_partial_refund.htm) # Provide Template Access for Acknowledgment Generation in Education Create a public group to assign users with the permissions and access to generate gift acknowledgments. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To provide access to templates and gift acknowledgment generation:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To generate gift acknowledgments and tax receipts, a user must belong to a public group that has access to your templates. Users who aren't part of this group can't see the option to generate gift acknowledgments or receipts. Document generation requires these conditions: - The user has the DocGen licenses and the DocGen User permission set. - The user is a member of the public group. - The public group has access to the DocGen Document Template Library. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and select **Public Groups**. 2. To create a new public group, click **New**. 3. In Label, enter a name. For instance, Gift Acknowledgments & Tax Receipts. The Group Name field automatically populates from the Label field. 4. In Search, select **Users**. 5. From the Available Members list, select the users who create Gift Acknowledgments and add them to the Selected Members list. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note In the future, if more users must create gift acknowledgments, give them the DocGen licenses and add them to this public group. If DocGen access is removed from a user, remove the user from this public group. Users who aren't part of this public group can't see the option to generate gift acknowledgments or receipts. Grant the public group access to your templates to finish setting up acknowledgment generation. To grant the group access to the DocGen Document Template Library, complete [Add Gift Acknowledgment and Tax Receipt Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_gift_acknowledgment_and_tax_receipt_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates to generate your gift receipt letters."). # Provide Template Access for Acknowledgment Generation in Nonprofit Create a public group to assign users with the permissions and access to generate gift acknowledgments. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To provide access to templates and gift acknowledgment generation:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
To generate gift acknowledgments and tax receipts, a user must belong to a public group that has access to your templates. Users who aren't part of this group can't see the option to generate gift acknowledgments or receipts. Document generation requires these conditions: - The user has the DocGen licenses and the DocGen User permission set. - The user is a member of the public group. - The public group has access to the DocGen Document Template Library. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and select **Public Groups**. 2. To create a new public group, click **New**. 3. In Label, enter a name. For instance, Gift Acknowledgments & Tax Receipts. The Group Name field automatically populates from the Label field. 4. In Search, select **Users**. 5. From the Available Members list, select the users who create Gift Acknowledgments and add them to the Selected Members list. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note In the future, if more users must create gift acknowledgments, give them the DocGen licenses and add them to this public group. If DocGen access is removed from a user, remove the user from this public group. Users who aren't part of this public group can't see the option to generate gift acknowledgments or receipts. Grant the public group access to your templates to finish setting up acknowledgment generation. To grant the group access to the DocGen Document Template Library, complete [Add Gift Acknowledgment and Tax Receipt Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_gift_acknowledgment_and_tax_receipt_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates to generate your gift receipt letters."). # Pulse Checks for Learner Feedback Use Pulse Checks in Education Cloud to get learner feedback and assess their engagement, satisfaction, and overall wellbeing.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Advisors can create recurring or one-time pulse checks from templates and assign them to learners. Learners are notified when pulse checks are assigned to them, and can respond on the learner portal. On the Pulse Checks tab of a learner’s case record page, you can: - View the status of the assigned pulse checks. - View the instances of an assigned pulse check and the submitted responses. - View the pulse check score graphs to track and understand the learner’s sentiment over time. A pulse check record is related to a learner’s case record type or support program. These objects represent the pulse checks data: - Assessment Envelope - Assessment Envelope Item - Pulse Check - Pulse Check Template - **[Set Up Pulse Checks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_pulse_checks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your org preferences and object sharing settings to enable pulse checks. - **[Create Assessment Questions for Pulse Checks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_assessment_questions_for_pulse_checks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Omniscript form with questions and configure its sharing settings for your pulse check. Create a decision matrix to map the response values, and configure the flow to calculate the response scores. - **[Create a Pulse Check Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_pulse_check_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a pulse check template to conveniently create and assign pulse checks to learners. - **[Create and Assign a Pulse Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_assign_a_pulse_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create pulse checks with a template and assign them to learners to get their feedback. # Quick Start Asset Reference List Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The quick start sample assets are unmanaged, unless otherwise noted, which means you won't see updated or new assets that we release after your initial installation. Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items - Sample: Core Application - Application Details (Task) - Applicant Details (Task) - Education Details (Task) - Family Details (Task) - Writing Supplement (Document Checklist Item) - Sample: Transcripts - Official Transcript (child Document Checklist Item) - Unofficial Transcript (child Document Checklist Item) - Sample: Test Scores - Test Details (child Task) - SAT Report (child Document Checklist Item) - Sample: Recommendations - Counselor Recommendation (child Document Checklist Item) - Teach Evaluation (child Document Checklist Item) - Other Evaluation (child Document Checklist Item) - Sample: Other Materials (allows ad hoc items) - Early Decision Agreement (child Document Checklist Item) - Fee Waiver (child Document Checklist Item) - Sample: Reports from Common App - Application PDF (child Document Checklist Item) - School Report (child Document Checklist Item) - School Report Transcript (child Document Checklist Item) - Optional Report (child Document Checklist Item) - Optional Report Transcript (child Document Checklist Item) - Mid Year Report (child Document Checklist Item) - Mid Year Report Transcript (child Document Checklist Item) - Final Report (child Document Checklist Item) - Final Report Transcript (child Document Checklist Item) - Sample: Reports from Common App - Transfer - Full Application (child Document Checklist Item) - Applicant Uploaded Document (child Document Checklist Item) - Letter of Reference (child Document Checklist Item) - Foreign Evaluation (child Document Checklist Item) - Transcript - Transfer (child Document Checklist Item) - Sample: JSON Data from Common App - Application Questions (child Task) - Applicant Questions (child Task) - Education History Questions (child Task) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The sample Action Plan Templates aren't published, so make sure to customize them before publishing. After an Action Plan Template is published, you can’t edit it—which means you can’t add child Action Plan Items to it. Before you publish the Action Plan Template, edit the Name and update the child items.  Field Sets - Applicant Details (on the Contact object) - Core Application  (on the Application object) - Applicant Education History Details (on the Education History object) - Edit Education History (on the Education History object) - Applicant Family Details (on the Relationship object) - Applicant Test Details (on the Test object) - Basic Task Details (on the Task object - this field set is managed) Application Material Types - Applicant Details - Applicant JSON - Application Details - Application JSON - Education Details - Education History JSON - Family Details - Test Details Document Types - Application - Applicant Uploaded Document - Counselor Recommendation - Early Decision Agreement - Fee Waiver - Final Report - Final Report Transcript - Foreign Evaluation - Full Application - Letter of Reference - Mid Year Report - Mid Year Report Transcript - Optional Report - Optional Report Transcript - Other Evaluation - School Report - School Report Transcript - Teacher Evaluation - Test Score - Transcript - Writing Supplement Custom Metadata for Document Type Mapping - Application - Applicant Uploaded Document - Counselor Recommendation - Early Decision Agreement - Fee Waiver - Final Report - Final Report Transcript - Foreign Evaluation - Full Application - Letter of Reference - Mid Year Report - Mid Year Report Transcript - Optional Report - Optional Report Transcript - Other Evaluation - School Report - School Report Transcript - Teacher Evaluation - Transcript - Writing Supplement For a refresher on how these records and assets work together, see [Learn About Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what Actions Plans are and how you can use them in Admissions Connect to define application requirements."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note We don’t provide Application Material Mapping records. Create these on your own. See [Plan Your Application Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool.") and [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). # Recommendation Form Configuration Use the Salesforce Feedback Management and Education Cloud features to send recommendation surveys to applicants' references. - **[Create a Recommendation Form](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_recommender_survey.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a survey for the Admissions: Invite Recommender to Complete Recommendation Survey flow to send to recommenders. - **[Prepare Recommender Omniscript and Flexcard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_recommender_omniscript_and_flexcard.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone and configure the Omniscript and Flexcard that are used to collect and show survey responses as part of the recommendation process. - **[Clone the Recommendation Survey Invitation Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_clone_the_recommendation_survey_invitation_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone the Admissions: Invite Recommender to Complete Recommendation Survey flow that sends your survey to recommenders. - **[Create Tasks for Recommendations on Your Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_tasks_for_recommendations_on_your_action_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To send surveys to recommenders, create a stage for each recommendation in your application form. For example, if you want a recommendation from a parent and one from a teacher, create a separate application stage for each recommendation. - **[Clone Additional Recommender Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_clone_additional_recommender_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make a copy of the Education Cloud admissions flows that are used to connect recommenders to survey subjects and update admissions records with recommendation information before you use them, and then activate the flows. # Recommended Configuration Once you have the NPSP basics set up, we recommend adding these configurations to help your users find information and create records more quickly and easily. These recommended steps aren't essential for NPSP to function—but they will help your users find information and create records more quickly and easily. - **[Add the NPSP Lightning App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a new Lightning App for Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Configure Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Compact layouts determine what fields you see on the highlights panel of a record, and when you hover over a lookup field. They also determine the fields you see in the highlights area of a record on the Salesforce mobile app. - **[Add “Mx.” to Salutation Field on Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's important to use the right salutation for each constituent in mailings and other communications. Add the value of Mx. to the Salutation field on Contact to include people who prefer it. - **[Enable the Get Started with NPSP Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes a Get Started page designed for new users who are at the beginning of their journeys with Nonprofit Success Pack. We very intentionally selected the content, links, and videos on the pages to help new users learn about different aspects of the Nonprofit Success Pack in a logical order so that they can quickly get up and running and on their way to being power users. ## Add the NPSP Lightning App Create a new Lightning App for Nonprofit Success Pack. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter App in the Quick Find box, then click **App Manager**. You should see the Lightning Experience App Manager. 3. Click **New Lightning App**. 4. Enter the following information: - **App Name**: Nonprofit Success Pack - **Developer Name** (gets filled in automatically): Nonprofit\_Success\_Pack - **Description**: (Lightning Experience) Manage your nonprofit processes. - **Choose a logo**: Upload a graphic. - **Primary Color Hex Value**: #00A1E0 5. Click **Next**. 6. On the App Options tab, select **Standard Navigation** and for the Setup Experience select **Setup (full set of Setup options)**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. On the Utility Items (Desktop Only) tab, click **Next**. 9. On the Navigation Items tab, add the following tabs to the Selected Items (in this order): - Getting Started - Home - Accounts - Contacts - Opportunities - Recurring Donations - Campaigns - Reports - Dashboards - NPSP Settings 10. Click **Next**. 11. On the User Profiles tab, choose the appropriate profiles. In the Trial, we assigned the app to all standard profiles. 12. Click **Save & Finish**. You should now see the new Lightning app in the Lightning App Manager list. And see the new tile in the App Launcher. When you click on the tile in the app launcher, you see the Getting Started tab in NPSP. ### Create an NPSP Administrator Lightning App The NPSP Lightning app that is included in the trial doesn't include some important admin-specific tabs (that existing NPSP orgs are accustomed to seeing by default). So, we recommend that you also create an Administrator Lightning app. Call it "NPSP Admin" (or something that you'll easily recognize in the App Launcher) and include any tabs that are relevant for admins in your org. Here are some suggestions: - Accounts - Contacts - Contact Merge - Dashboards - Engagement Plan Templates - NPSP Data Import - NPSP Data Import Batches - NPSP Settings - Reports ## Create List Views A list view is a filtered list based on one kind of record, such as Accounts or Contacts, that you access from the record tab. We recommend that you create list views for Accounts and Opportunities. **Account List Views** | List View Name | Filters | Fields | | --- | --- | --- | | Organization Accounts | Account Record Type = Organization | Account Name, Account Site, Billing State/Province, Phone, Type, Account Owner Alias | | All Accounts | N/A | Account Name, Billing State/Province, Phone, Total Gifts, Total Gifts Last N Days, Average Gift, Type, Account Record Type | | Household Accounts | Account Record Type = Household | Account Name, Formal Greeting, Informal Greeting. Total Gifts, Average Gift, Best Gift Year, Household Phone | **Opportunity List Views** | List View Name | Filters | Fields | | --- | --- | --- | | All Donations | Opportunity Record Type = Donation | Opportunity Name, Account Name, Amount, Close Date, Stage, Opportunity Owner Alias | We’ll create the first one together—a list view of Organization Accounts that displays a list of Accounts filtered by Record Type=Organization, and display fields Account Name, Account Site, Billing State/Province, Phone, Type, Account Owner Alias. Keep in mind that there are three parts to configuring a list view: 1. [Create the List View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a list view for NPSP."). 2. [Update the Display Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add fields on your NPSP list view."). 3. [Add Filters](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add filters to list views to easily find or edit different types of records in NPSP."). ### Create the List View Create a list view for NPSP. 1. Click the Accounts tab. 2. Click ![List View Controls button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/list_view_controls_button.png). 3. Click **New**. 4. In the Name field, enter Organization Accounts. 5. NPSP automatically generates a List API Name. 6. Select **All users can see this list view**. 7. Click **Save**. ### Update the Display Fields Add fields on your NPSP list view. 1. Select **Organization Accounts** from the list view dropdown. 2. Click ![List view controls button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/list_view_controls_button.png), then click **Select Fields to Display**. 3. Move the default fields from Visible Fields to Available Fields. 4. Move the following fields to the Visible Fields list: Account Name, Account Site, Billing State/Province, Phone, Type, Account Owner Alias. 5. Click **Save**. ### Add Filters Add filters to list views to easily find or edit different types of records in NPSP. 1. Select **Organization Accounts** from the list view dropdown. 2. Click ![List view filter icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/list_view_filter_icon.png). 3. Click **Add Filter**. 4. Select Account Record Type for the Field. 5. Select equals for the Operator. 6. Select Organization for the Value. 7. Click **Done**. 8. Click **Save**. 9. Now create the rest of the list views shown in [Create List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recommended_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you have the NPSP basics set up, we recommend adding these configurations to help your users find information and create records more quickly and easily."). ## Configure Compact Layouts Compact layouts determine what fields you see on the highlights panel of a record, and when you hover over a lookup field. They also determine the fields you see in the highlights area of a record on the Salesforce mobile app. Set up your compact layouts so that the fields your users need to view at a glance are front and center. It may not seem like a big deal, but small changes like this can make a big difference in user acceptance and overall happiness with NPSP. NPSP installs these compact layouts: - Contact: NPSP Contact Compact Layout - Account: NPSP Household Account, NPSP Organization Account - Opportunity: NPSP Donation Compact Layout - Campaign: NPSP Compact Layout Use these compact layouts as is, or use them as a starting point for your additional customizations. ### Clone Compact Layouts To Preserve Your Changes Have you ever customized a Compact Layout, tested it, deployed it … and then discovered a few weeks later that it had reverted to the default layout? If so, you're not alone. And no, you're not going crazy. The issue is that packaged Compact Layouts, unlike regular page layouts, get push upgraded whether you like it or not. This means that with any upgrades to NPSP, Compact Layouts for Accounts, Contacts, and other objects get pushed to your organization, overwriting any customizations you may have made. Which can lead to a lot of confusion, not to mention downright aggravation. Here's a quick, three-step process to avoid this frustration: 1. Clone the packaged Compact Layout. 2. Make changes to the cloned layout. 3. Set the cloned version as the primary Compact Layout. Let's walk through an example: The staff at Colorado Community Bakery know that it's important to respect how their customers want to be addressed. They want to add a custom field, Preferred Pronouns, to their Compact Layout for Contacts, so that this information is front and center. 1\. They start by cloning a packaged Compact Layout. ![Compact Layout screen with Clone button highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/compact_layout_clone_button.png) 2\. Next, they add their custom field to the cloned Compact Layout and click Save: ![Adding a custom field to a Compact Layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/compact_layout_create_new.png) 3\. Finally, they set the new cloned Compact Layout as the primary Compact Layout: ![Selecting the new cloned Compact Layout to be the primary Compact Layout.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/compact_layout_assignment.png) ![Contact Compact Layout showing custom field that was added.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/compact_layout_display.png) Since they're using a cloned Compact Layout rather than a packaged Compact Layout, they can now be confident that their customizations will remain in place throughout any product upgrades. ## Add “Mx.” to Salutation Field on Contact It's important to use the right salutation for each constituent in mailings and other communications. Add the value of Mx. to the Salutation field on Contact to include people who prefer it. The Contact Salutation field is not exposed in the Lightning setup UI. To edit this field, switch to the Salesforce Classic interface: 1. Click the View Profile icon. ![The View Profile icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/view_profile_icon.png) 2. Click **Switch to Salesforce Classic**. 3. Click **Setup**. 4. In the Quick Find box, enter Contacts, then click Fields under **Contacts**. 5. In the Contact Standard Fields section, click **Edit** next to the Salutation field. 6. Click **New**. 7. Enter Mx., then click **Save**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Your organization can add more custom salutations as needed. Once you’ve made your changes, switch back to Lightning Experience by clicking the **Switch to Lightning Experience** link. ![Switch to Lightning Experience link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/switch_to_lightning.png) ## Customize Gender Picklist Values for Relationships How the Gender Picklist values work and use translation workbench to customize values. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important This article describes advanced options for customizing NPSP Relationships. Be careful when using these options, as improper configuration can cause unexpected side effects in your Relationships records. ### Gender Picklist Values Overview If you want to use gender values other than Male and Female or add additional values, you can use Translation Workbench to edit these values. By default, NPSP Relationships use the Male and Female gender values to determine Reciprocal Relationships according to your [Manage Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior."). Simply editing the Gender picklist field is not sufficient if you want to change the default values and still have NPSP use gendered reciprocal relationships. For example, if you wanted to change the default gender values from Male to Male-Identifying and Female to Female-Identifying, just editing the picklist values in the Gender field without following the rest of the steps outlined in this document would cause NPSP to generate gender-neutral reciprocal Relationships, such as Sibling rather than Brother or Sister, or Sibling's Child rather than Niece or Nephew. The rest of this document shows you how you can both change NPSP's default gender values and still maintain gendered reciprocal relationships. ### Enable Translation Workbench Translation Workbench is a tool that lets you translate text in Salesforce into other languages. The tool also lets you change and customize text within the same language in managed packages such as NPSP. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Translation Workbench in the Quick Find box, then select **Translation Language Settings**. 3. Click **Enable**. You should see English in the list of Supported Languages, and it should be Active. If it's not Active, click **Edit**, select the Active checkbox, and add yourself as a Translator (see below). If you don't see English listed at all, you'll need to do this: 1. Click **Add**. 2. Select English as the Language. 3. Make sure Active is selected. 4. Under Identify Translators for This Language, select your name and click **Add** to move your name to the Selected List. 5. Click **Save** when you're finished. ### Translate the Default Gender Custom Labels Update the options in the Gender field. Now customize the labels: 1. From Setup, enter `Custom Labels` in the Quick Find box, then select **Custom Labels** under the User Interface menu. 2. Click the letter **M** to narrow down the list of Custom Labels. 3. Click **Male**. 4. Click **New Local Translations/Overrides.** 5. Select **English** as the language. 6. In the **Translation Text** box, enter the terms you want to use for the Male category. You can also provide a comma-delimited list. For example, Male-identifying, Transgender, or Nonbinary. 7. Click **Save** when complete. 8. Repeat this process for the Female Custom Label if necessary. Lastly, make sure that the Gender picklist field on the Contact object also includes the values you added via Translation. (See [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=updating_picklists.htm&language=en_US) in Salesforce Help and Training.) Once that's done, the NPSP can use your custom Gender values to auto-create reciprocal Relationships as defined in the Male/Female/Neutral table in Relationship Reciprocal Settings. ## Enable the Get Started with NPSP Page NPSP includes a Get Started page designed for new users who are at the beginning of their journeys with Nonprofit Success Pack. We very intentionally selected the content, links, and videos on the pages to help new users learn about different aspects of the Nonprofit Success Pack in a logical order so that they can quickly get up and running and on their way to being power users. ### Expose Tab 1. From Setup, enter Profile in the Quick Find box, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile that needs access to the tab. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Get Started with NPSP**. 5. Click **Edit** and change the tab setting to **Default On**. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for any profile that needs access. ### Grant Access to the Get Started Completion Checklist States 1. While still in Object Settings, click **Get Started Completion Checklist States**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. In the Object Permissions section, select **Read**, **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 4. In the Field Permissions section, select **Read Access** for all fields, and **Edit Access** for these fields: - Item Id - Owner - User 5. Click **Save**. ### Grant Access to `GS_ChecklistSetup` and `GS_ApplicationStatusController` Apex Classes 1. While still in the profile editor, click ![Show more actions](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) next to Object Settings and select **Apex Class Access**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Move `GS_ChecklistSetup` and `GS_ApplicationStatusController` to the Selected list. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Repeat these steps for any profile that needs access to the Get Started page. ### Grant Access to the Get Started Custom Metadata Types 1. While still in the Profile Editor, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) next to Apex Class Access and select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Add NPSP Get Started Checklist Item and NPSP Get Started Checklist Section to the Enabled Custom Metadata Types list. 4. Click **Save**. ### Add Tab to the Lightning App Add the Get Started with NPSP tab to the Nonprofit Success Pack Lightning App: 1. From Setup, enter App Manager in the Quick Find box, then click **App Manager**. 2. In the row for the Nonprofit Success Pack Lightning App, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 3. Under App Settings, click **Navigation Items**. 4. To add the tab for users: 1. Move **Get Started with NPSP** to the Selected Items list. 2. Click **Save**. 3. Under App Settings, click **User Profiles**. 4. Move any profiles that should have access to the Get Started with NPSP tab to the Selected Profiles list. 5. Click **Save**. # Recommended Data Import Sequence for EDA Follow these steps to import your data into EDA. - **[Choose Which Automation Features to Use](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Typically, you're integrating data into EDA from your Student Information System, course catalog, and other external systems using common data integration tools such as Salesforce APIs or Lightning Connect. - **[Step 1. Import General School Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start with general school information. - **[Step 2. Import Curriculum Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now, add data related to the structure and content of curriculum at your school. - **[Step 3. Import Student Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student information is next. - **[Step 4. Import Suspect Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data-import-sequence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you import your student data, you're ready to import data for potential students, also known as "suspects" or "prospects" in recruiting and admissions parlance. ## Choose Which Automation Features to Use Typically, you're integrating data into EDA from your Student Information System, course catalog, and other external systems using common data integration tools such as Salesforce APIs or Lightning Connect. Before you import any data, review the automation that affects imported data and our recommended import sequence. EDA has a number of automation features available thanks to Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM). It's important to understand the concepts to prevent unnecessary data from being created automatically. We recommend familiarizing yourself with [TDTM Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm) and [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Verify access to EDA Apex classes for all profiles and permission sets that need them.") before disabling any automation settings. After you're familiar with these concepts, take a look at this list of Trigger Handlers to learn what they control. **Fields on the Account Object** | Data Type | Created With Automation | Trigger Handler | | --- | --- | --- | | Administrative Account | If you're using the Administrative Account model and the Account field for a Contact is blank, the administrative account is automatically created when the Contact is created. | ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM | | Household Account | If you're using the Household Account model and the Account field for a Contact is blank, the household account is automatically created when the Contact is created. | ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM | **Fields on the Contact Object**
Data Type Created With Automation Trigger Handler
Mailing Address Primary Address Type Sets the default Address record. ADDR_Contact_TDTM
University Email Preferred Email: “University” Populates Contact's Email field. CON_Preferred_TDTM
Work Phone Preferred Phone: “Work” Populates Contact’s Phone field CON_Preferred_TDTM
Primary Education Institution Primary Department Primary Academic Program Creates Affiliation records for each. CON_PrimaryAffls_TDTM
Contacts' Relationships

Reciprocal Relationship records.

Note: Relationships in EDA are reciprocal, meaning for every Relationship record that relates a person to someone else, there is a second Relationship record that relates them back to that person. Reciprocal Relationship records are tedious and difficult to create manually, so we highly recommend that you leave this trigger enabled.

 REL_Relationships_TDTM
After determining your automation preferences, prepare to import your data in the following recommended sequence. ## Step 1. Import General School Information Start with general school information. ### Import School Accounts Every Account needs to have a record type. Record types can be the default record types that come with EDA, or you can create custom record types. As needed for your institution, create these Account records: - Educational Institutions for the top-level entity representing your institution, such as the entire university, other colleges, and so on. - University Departments that relate departments, schools, or campuses to the Courses that they are affiliated with - Academic Programs, for example, BS Computer Science - Sports Organizations - Business Organizations - Other custom Accounts. For example, you might want to track high schools for recruiting purposes or organizations (such as clubs or professional groups) that students or faculty are involved in. ### Import Faculty Data Next, import data for the faculty at your school. Faculty Contact-related data Every faculty member should be identified as a Contact. Faculty Contacts can use the Administrative Account model, or you can alternatively add them to the Educational Institution Account or Department Account. Credential-related Attributes Attributes with a Credential record type can be used to track licenses, certifications, or endorsements earned by staff. Contact Languages A language spoken by a specific person connected to your institution. For example, Contact Language records can track an instructor's fluency in multiple languages. Case, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response data Track behavior events such as an event a faculty member witnessed and reported. ### Import General School Data Finally, import data that is relevant to faculty, students, and the courses and activities that take place at your school. These include: Facilities Property assets like a classroom, a lecture hall, a laboratory, and other campus buildings. Facilities can also define relationships between property assets. For example, you could create a parent Facility record for the "Smith Science Building" with nested Facility records for the "East Wing" and "Lecture Hall 103." Languages A language spoken at your institution.  ## Step 2. Import Curriculum Information Now, add data related to the structure and content of curriculum at your school. Terms Past, present, or future terms can apply to the entire institution or to individual schools or departments. Courses Organized by department, level, and so on. Each course must have its own record. Time Blocks Representing a specific period of time, Time Blocks often relate to Course Offerings. Course Offerings Past, present, or future instances of a course linked to a Term and, optionally, a Primary Faculty member. Program Plans Tied to an Academic Program, Program Plans are specific to a given set of requirements. For example, you might have an Academic Program of BS in Computer Science, but separate Program Plans for BS in Computer Science (2019) and BS in Computer Science (2018) if the requirements changed from 2018 to 2019. Plan Requirements A specific course, a list of courses, or a general course requirement. ## Step 3. Import Student Information Student information is next. ### Import Student Accounts Create Account records for every student who has attended your school in the past and for those who are currently attending. Assign a record type to every Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If the ACCT\_IndividualAccounts\_TDTM Trigger Handler is enabled, Administrative Account or Household Account records are created automatically when you import Contacts in the next step, making it unnecessary to import student Accounts. Make sure each student Account is created as either an Administrative Account or a Household Account. ### Import Student Contacts Import additional data for student Contacts to continue creating a more complete view of the student's personal and academic life. TDTM may have already created Address and Affiliation records. Addresses One student can have many addresses, but only one is identified as the primary address. If the mailing address and Primary Address Type field are specified when a Contact is imported, a primary Address record is automatically created. Examples include campus address, home address, seasonal address such as housing during summer breaks or study abroad. Relationships Connect Contacts to other Contacts, such as family members or advisors. Affiliations Connect Contacts to Accounts, such as a department within the school or a sports team. If lookup fields on the Contact (such as Primary Education Institution, Primary Department, or Primary Academic Program) are set when you import Contacts, primary Affiliation records for each type are automatically created. ### Import Student Application Data After you import Address, Relationship, Affiliation, and Contact data, import information that provides insight into students' educational background and is relevant to their enrollment at your institution. Academic Certifications Track diplomas, degrees, or certifications that a student earned for completing a course of study. Credentials Track extracurricular badges, certifications, or licenses that a student has earned. Applications Store information about a student's application to an educational institution or program. Education History records Store data about a student's previous educational experience. Test and Test Scores Track an instance of a student taking a particular test and the scores resulting from a test or an overall grade standing. ### Import Program Enrollments Next, import Program Enrollments to easily track a student’s major, Program Plan, and Program Plan Requirements. ### Import Course Connections Add information about student progress in their program of study. In EDA Settings, under Course Connections, make sure that you've selected Course Connection Record Types and verified the record types before you import these records. Taking the time to add past Courses and Course Offerings is particularly important, as it allows you to represent a student’s full course history. ### Import Additional Student-Related Data Finally, add data that provides additional insight about your students. Student-related Attributes Attributes with a Student Characteristic record type track situations that might require additional support, such as whether a student is an International Student or has a Section 504 plan in place. Case, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response data Track behavior events, a student's role in such an event, and the response that resulted from the incident. Attendance Events Track a student's attendance. Contact Languages Track the languages used by students and their family members. Term Grades Track students' grades at milestones that you define. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Some of this data may have been imported when you imported similar faculty-related data. If so, verify that all student-related data is also present. ## Step 4. Import Suspect Information After you import your student data, you're ready to import data for potential students, also known as "suspects" or "prospects" in recruiting and admissions parlance. Suspects are people who haven't signaled interest in your institution, but whom you want to engage with marketing. In EDA, we recommend modeling suspects as Leads. When a suspect signals interest, they become a prospect and you convert their Lead record into Contact and Account—and optionally Opportunity—records. For more information about suspects and prospects, see [Model Suspects and Prospects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_model_suspects_and_prospects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In order to find the best-fit applicants for your institution, recruiting tracks suspects and prospects. Use the standard Lead and Contact Salesforce objects to track suspects and prospects, respectively. Here's why: Prospects have signaled interest in your institution, so creating a Contact record for them gives recruiting teams more robust detail to better engage with potential students. Suspects, on the other hand, haven't yet signaled interest so it's premature to create Contacts for them. When a suspect does raise their hand, convert the Lead to a Contact and Account."). Most institutions import suspects based on a list obtained from a testing service, recruiting event, or other source. The list often provides only basic details, such as a name and an email.  Before importing a suspect list, clean up your data set to align with the Lead object. Review how the Lead fields map to the Contact, Account, and Opportunity fields so that you're ready when it's time to convert Leads. Understanding the mappings helps you clean up and prepare your import list. For details, see [Lead Conversion Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sales.lead_conversion_mapping.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. In EDA, the most important Lead field is Company. The Company field is required and, depending on how you configure the Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts setting in EDA Settings, it can impact the Account Name on Account records that are created when you convert Leads. If Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts is configured with specified record types, Account names follow either the default EDA Account name format or the format specified in Administrative or Household Account Name Format in EDA Settings. If Automatically Rename Lead-Converted Accounts is not configured, standard Salesforce Account naming based on the Company field is used, so be sure to populate the Company field on Lead records with a value that is suitable as an Account name. If you're importing a .csv file, consider opening the file in a spreadsheet app and creating a formula that populates the Company field using the suspect's name and your required naming conventions. Here are some other things to consider when preparing your data set. - Does your institution use assignment rules for Leads? If so, what fields do you want included? - Does your institution have custom Lead fields to include? - Does your institution use Lead processes that rely on a specific value for the Lead Status field? After your import list is ready, create a Lead record for each suspect. # Reconcile Student Accounts Save staff time with automated account reconciliation that offers granular control and visibility. Provide students with a view of their financial obligations through a unified dashboard on the learner portal. To reduce administrative inquiries, students can access invoices, running balances, and full payment histories in one place. Students can also initiate payments and track their financials. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To reconcile accounts: Education Cloud Full Access
Here are the key stages to reconcile student accounts: 1. Order to Invoice: The revenue recognition phase. 1. Define billing policies, treatments, and treatment items to generate invoices that suit your financial model. See [Create Billing Policies, Treatments, and Treatment Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_policies_and_treatments_create.htm&language=en_US). 2. Define payment terms to set a due date for payments and collect payments in a timely manner.See [Create Payment Terms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_payment_terms.htm&language=en_US). 3. Create tax policies and their treatments to define the tax calculation for your invoices. See [Create Tax Policies and Treatments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_tax_policies_and_treatments_create.htm&language=en_US). 4. Commit the product, which posts the debt to the student's account. See [Generate Invoices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_invoice_generation.htm&language=en_US). 2. Credit Memo Handling: You have two paths: 1. Create a credit memo record (useful for general adjustments). See [Create and Apply Standalone Credit Memos](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_credit_memos_standalone_user_interface_create.htm&language=en_US). 2. Apply credit memo by using the Invoice related list. See [Create and Apply Credit Memos to Invoice Lines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_create_and_apply_credit_memos.htm&language=en_US). 3. Payment: The student verifies the generated invoice and makes the payment through the learner portal. 4. Billing or Invoice Settlement: Verification makes sure that every time money moves (or is reduced by a credit), the Invoice Settlement Information updates to reflect the new balance. See Also: [Manage Billing in Revenue Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing.htm&language=en_US) # Record Student Involvement in Activities Advisors can track and document a student's participation in academic and extracurricular activities. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To record an involvement: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Components for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_components_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give advisors the tools to manage student progress by adding career planning and life goals features to the Student Success app.") 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the student. 3. Go to the Student Involvement Groups tab. 4. Click **Add Involvement**. 5. Select an involvement group. 6. Enter a description for the involvement. 7. Select the start date and end date when the student will be active. 8. Select the role of the student for the involvement. 9. Select the student's level of involvement in the involvement group. 10. Select ‌whether the involvement relates to an academic term or an academic year, and then select the corresponding value. 11. Save your changes. # Recruiting and Admissions Consoles Education Cloud consoles give users a central place to focus on application reviews, see critical tasks, and take important next steps. When an admissions director or officer, recruiter, or reviewer opens the Recruitment & Admissions app, they arrive on a home page that's designed for their role and license type. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Users need the Education Cloud Objects and Components or Education Cloud Reviewer permission set, and the correct profile assigned to them, to access the consoles. **How**: - Create profiles for admissions directors, admissions officers, recruiters, and reviewers. - Create and edit home pages using Lightning App Builder. - Activate the home pages and assign them to the applicable profiles. See Also: - [Set Up Education Cloud Consoles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_education_cloud_consoles.htm) - [Understand the Admissions and Reviewer Consoles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_understand_the_admissions_and_reviewer_consoles.htm) # Recruitment & Admissions App Use the Education Cloud Recruitment & Admissions app to view and manage student applications, tasks, and appointments, track RFIs, manage prospects, draw insights from analytics, and more.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To work with the Recruitment & Admissions app: | Education Cloud Full Access | The Recruitment & Admissions app enables admissions officers and reviewers to stay on top of their tasks, maximizing productivity, while monitoring the overall health of the admissions pipeline in real time. You can customize the Recruitment & Admissions app to suit the requirements of your institution, such as create layouts and features specific to different roles using [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm&type=5). Here’s a summary of the default tabs on the Recruitment & Admissions app: - Home: Shows dashboards, appointments, and tasks based on the user’s role and permissions. For example, an admissions director or officer will see the Admissions Console, while an application reviewer will see the Reviewer Console. - Educational Info Requests: Lists all records of the Educational Info Request object (for RFIs). - Actionable Lists: Shows prospect lists that can be assigned to staff for targeted marketing. ## Customize Your Recruitment & Admissions App 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Recruitment & Admissions**. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for Lightning App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 3. Select a page from the list to edit, or click **New** to create a new one. 4. Customize the application to your requirements. You can drag and drop components, and modify them to create custom features. See [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm&type=5). # Recruitment and Admissions Education Cloud provides learners with a seamless experience from application to enrollment, while enabling staff to efficiently orchestrate the admissions process.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm&type=5). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Get Started with Recruitment and Admissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_started_with_recruitment_and_admissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the Recruitment and Admissions app and consoles in Education Cloud. Import your Common App data and set up permissions and sharing for applications. - **[Campus and Program Finder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_campus_and_program_finder.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Campus and Program Finder makes information about your campus, learning programs, and support programs publicly searchable on your Experience Cloud site. It helps applicants, students, and families browse and search for campuses, schools, and programs in their area. - **[Inquiry and Opportunity Management in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_and_opportunity_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Education Cloud's inquiry management flows to help learners sign up for communications, ask questions, and request to be contacted. Use Education Cloud objects and automation to forecast and track opportunities, and maintain a robust and profitable enrollment for your institution. - **[Get Started with Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_get_started_with_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare to create, accept, and manage applications in your institution. - **[Create Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Omnistudio components and Education Cloud objects to create applications for your institution. - **[Collect Recommendations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_the_recommendation_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save time and improve the experience for applicants, recommenders, and admissions staff. Recommender experience simplifies the recommendation process, from sending a survey invitation to populating the individual application task with recommendation details, and enabling recommendation reminders. - **[Manage Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up and manage the application process for your institution. # Recruitment and Admissions Discover how Education Cloud supports your recruitment and admissions activities with an online portal and powerful collaboration tools.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Prospective students and learners expect their higher education journey to include a connected, online experience. It's no longer acceptable to rely on phone or postal mail to collect important application information. Faculty and staff need a complete picture of the learners that they work with—no more data siloed across departments! Education Cloud is here to help your institution function seamlessly in the 21st century. The heart of the recruitment and admissions experience in Education Cloud is an online portal which lets learners: - Request information - Apply for admission - Upload admissions documents - Schedule appointments with support staff The learner portal collects information from prospective students and records it in Salesforce. But as every recruiter or admissions officer knows, there are a lot of interactions and documents to manage. Recruiting and Admissions Consoles are here to help. These consoles are your one-stop shop for managing your work and tracking your progress. Here are some ways in which the Recruitment & Admissions consoles help your faculty and staff: - Admissions officers can see a single, home page view of their assigned applications. - Recruiters can create and manage appointments with students. - Admissions directors can create lists of prospects and assign them to recruiters. - Recruiters can respond to and manage prospective students' requests for information. - Directors can track progress toward goals with a variety of KPIs reports. - Staff can check off tasks and plan work with a simple and intuitive interface. ![Admissions Console layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/admissions_console_2.png) See Also: - [Recruitment and Admissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_recruit_students_to_your_institution_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Education Cloud provides learners with a seamless experience from application to enrollment, while enabling staff to efficiently orchestrate the admissions process.") - [Recruitment and Admissions Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/recruitment-and-admissions.html) - [Manage Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up and manage the application process for your institution.") - [Appointment Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_appointments_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Education Cloud provides a central self-service system for managing appointments. Learners have visibility over your staff's availability in any department, based on their configured location and appointment channels. They can view and schedule appointments, and if you set up the virtual appointments feature, they can also join virtually. Your staff can also schedule appointments on behalf of learners from their records. Unifying all departments on a single scheduling tool increases your learners' ability to use all of your services.") # Recruitment and Admissions Performance Center Dashboard Monitor prospective and admitted students from first inquiry through enrollment with visibility across the recruitment and admissions funnel. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
The Recruitment and Admissions Performance Center dashboard shows the volume, conversion, and yield of the complete student journey across each stage of the recruitment and admissions funnel in the selected admissions cycle. | KPI | Calculation | | --- | --- | | Applicant Count This Cycle | Total applicants who started an application in the selected admissions cycle. | | Acceptance Rate | Percentage of applicants who received a decision of Admitted in the selected admissions cycle. | | Yield Rate | Percentage of admitted applicants who accepted the offer in the selected admissions cycle. | | Enrolled Count This Cycle | Total students enrolled in the selected admissions cycle. | The dashboard organizes the funnel into stages. Each stage shows an overview of the stage's count and key metrics, such as conversion rate, stage velocity, and time in stage, and also trend and analysis visualizations. | Stage | What It shows | | --- | --- | | Suspects | Key metrics for potential students, including lead quality and engagement. | | Prospects | Key metrics for prospective students, including volume by source and location. | | Applicants | Key metrics for applicants, including progress and admissions reviewer productivity. | | Admitted | Key metrics for admitted students, including engagement. | | Enrolled | Key metrics for enrolled students, including engagement and course registration. | | Registered | Key metrics for registered students. | The Milestone Date filter uses a different stage-specific date for each funnel stage. Each stage page shows only the records whose date falls within the selected range. For example, the Suspects page shows suspects whose academic interest received date falls within your selected range. | Stage | Filter Date | | --- | --- | | Suspects | Academic interest received date. | | Prospects | Academic interest received date. | | Applicants | Application applied date. | | Admitted | Application decision created date. | | Enrolled | Enrollment date on the academic term enrollment record. | | Registered | Registration date on the course offering participant record. | # Recruitment Insights The Recruitment Insights dashboard provides recruiters insights into the candidate recruitment pipeline and the status of RFIs to analyze recruitment status, prioritize prospects, and schedule appointments effectively.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
Here are examples of questions that the Recruitment Insights dashboard can answer: - How many candidates are in each stage? - How many candidates are stuck at which stage? - How many RFI requests are there in the pipeline? - Which lead source generated the most number of leads? The dashboard is divided into multiple panes with various charts to analyze and compare the recruitment data based on different KPIs. You can filter the application data based on: - Application Type: Filters applications based on the type. For example, the Transfer. - Application Creation Date: Filters applications based on the date range in which the application is created. - Compare To: Compare the application data with a previous period to show the progress. Recruitment Insights Dashboard | Section | Description | | --- | --- | | My Pipeline Health | Displays the application as a pipeline chart where you can see the count of applications in each stage. | | Response to Request for Information (RFI) | Displays the overall count of RFIs and the percentage of RFIs in each status. You can use this chart to track the progress of response to RFIs. | | Lead by Source | Displays the count applications received from each source to identify the high performing lead source and align future strategy to maximize reach. | # Recurring Donations Installments API Write Apex to query information about Recurring Donation Installments using the Installments API. The Recurring Donations Installments API is intended to meet the needs of customers and partners who require visibility into planned installments beyond the Next Year and Current Year totals provided out of the box. The Installments API provides access to installments calculated by active and paused schedules. Paused installments are omitted from the returned list of installments. In addition to the Installments API, we provide a [Schedules API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rd_schedules_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Write Apex to access information about the Recurring Donation Schedule object using the Schedules API.") which returns all Schedules associated with a Recurring Donation, including current, past, and paused schedules. The Installments API only queries installments calculated by NPSP, not actual Opportunity records, either Open or Closed. ## Call Format - **Global Class implementing the API**: Callable\_API - **Global Method**: call() - **Parameters**: Map | Name | Datatype | Required | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | StartDate | date | Yes | Default is Date.today() | | EndDate | date | No | Default is one year of installment data. | | RecordIds | string | Yes | Recurring Donation Ids. | ## JSON Response Format The JSON response format shows Installment information listed by Recurring Donation Id. | Name | Datatype | Required | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | scheduleId | string | Yes | The Schedule record this installment relates to. NOTE: The Schedule object is protected. Use the [Schedules API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rd_schedules_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Write Apex to access information about the Recurring Donation Schedule object using the Schedules API.") to access Schedule object info. | | recurringDonationId | string | Yes | The Recurring Donation record this installment relates to. | | paymentMethod | string | No | Payment method for this installment. For example, Check, Credit Card, ACH, etc. | | installmentAmount | integer | Yes | The amount for this installment, based on the Recurring Donation schedule. | | currencyCode | string | Yes | The currency ISO code for this installment. For example, USD. | | closeDate | date | Yes | The close date for this installment. | | campaignId | string | No | The Campaign record this installment relates to. | ## Code Sample and JSON Response In this example, we want to find the next 90 days of installment information for all active Recurring Donations. **Code Sample** ```java Map callMap = new Map(); Set Ids = new Map([SELECT Id FROM npe03__Recurring_Donation__c WHERE npsp__Status__c='Active']).keySet(); callMap.put('StartDate', Date.today()); callMap.put('EndDate', Date.today().addDays(90)); callMap.put('RecordIds', Ids); npsp.Callable_API apiTest = new npsp.Callable_API(); String jsonResponse = String.valueOf(apiTest.call('rd2.queryinstallments', callMap)); ``` **JSON Response** ```json { "a092D000003Vp8pQAC": [ { "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B1mFQAS", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003Vp8pQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "installmentAmount": 100, "currencyCode": "USD", "closeDate": "2020-12-04", "campaignId": null }, { "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B1mFQAS", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003Vp8pQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "installmentAmount": 100, "currencyCode": "USD", "closeDate": "2021-01-04", "campaignId": null }, { "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B1mFQAS", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003Vp8pQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "installmentAmount": 100, "currencyCode": "USD", "closeDate": "2021-02-04", "campaignId": null }, ], "a092D000003V4ngQAC": [ { "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B0AnQAK", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003V4ngQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "installmentAmount": 100, "currencyCode": "USD", "closeDate": "2020-12-01", "campaignId": null }, { "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B0AnQAK", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003V4ngQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "installmentAmount": 100, "currencyCode": "USD", "closeDate": "2021-01-01", "campaignId": null }, { "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B0AnQAK", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003V4ngQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "installmentAmount": 100, "currencyCode": "USD", "closeDate": "2021-02-01", "campaignId": null } ] } ``` # Recurring Donations Overview Learn about managing sustainer donations with Recurring Donations in NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Recurring Donations](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=32boOvJi-mI). Recurring giving is a dependable source of revenue for nonprofits. Donors who give regularly tend to continue giving for many years, and sometimes increase the amounts they donate. When donors want to adjust how and when they give in response to changes in their lives, your organization must be able to respond efficiently. You'll find the ability to do this and more with Recurring Donations in NPSP. In spring of 2020, the Salesforce.org fundraising team, in partnership with the nonprofit user community, rebuilt Recurring Donations for NPSP. This next generation of Recurring Donations offers an improved workflow for entering donation records, and updating schedule details such as amount or payment date. Recurring Donations also integrates with the [Salesforce.org Elevate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_welcome_to_elevate.htm) online donation platform. When we need to differentiate between the new and the old versions in our product documentation, we refer to the old Recurring Donations feature as "Legacy Recurring Donations" and the new feature as "Enhanced Recurring Donations." If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack before March 2021, your org might be configured to use Legacy Recurring Donations. Consider upgrading to Enhanced Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm)? # Recurring Donations Pause API Write Apex code to pause a Recurring Donation programmatically using the Pause API. With their recurring giving, your loyal donors provide your organization with a consistent source of funding. But life happens and a donor might request to temporarily suspend their giving due to travel, job loss, or unexpected expenses. While CRM users can [Pause a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_pause_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to temporarily suspend donations, and restart them, when your donor wants to stop giving for a period of time.") through the user interface, NPSP also provides an API for pausing and unpausing Recurring Donations programmatically. ## Call Format - **Global Class implementing the API**: Callable\_API - **Global Method**: call() - **Parameters**: Map | Name | Data Type | Required | | --- | --- | --- | | PauseData | Map | Yes | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can process up to 200 records in a single API call. If you have more records to process, use a batch or queueable job. ## PauseDataObject JSON Format Construct the JSON request format with PauseDataObject mapped by Recurring Donation ID. To pause a Recurring Donation, set the startDate and endDate, but set unPause to either false or null. | Name | Data Type | Required | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | startDate | Date | No | The pause start date | | endDate | Date | No | The pause end date | | statusReason | String | No | The pause reason. Values should match the Status Reason picklist. | | unPause | Boolean | No | Use true to unpause a Recurring Donation. | To unpause a Recurring Donation, only unPause needs to set to true. startDate and endDate should be null. ## JSON Response Format The JSON response format shows pause information mapped by Recurring Donation ID. | Name | Data Type | Required | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | startDate | Date | No | The pause start date | | endDate | Date | No | The pause end date | | statusReason | String | No | The pause reason | | unPause | Boolean | No | True means an unPause was requested. | | isSuccess | Boolean | Yes | True means a successful request. | | Error | String | Yes | A successful request returns 'OK'. A failed request returns an error message. | ## Code Sample and JSON Response **Code Sample** ```java // NOTE: Replace the "rd_id_n" in the set below with real recurring donation record ids Map rdPauseData = new Map{ 'rd_id_1' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('04/01/2021'), Date.Parse('06/01/2021'), 'Vacation' ), 'rd_id_2' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('07/01/2021'), Date.Parse('10/01/2021'), 'Job Change' ), 'rd_id_3' => new PauseData(true), /* Unpause an Rd */ 'rd_id_4' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('10/01/2021'), Date.Parse('05/01/2021'), 'Invalid Dates Test: end date before start date' ), 'rd_id_5' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('01/01/2025'), Date.Parse('05/01/2025'), 'valid Dates Test' ), 'rd_id_6' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('01/01/2019'), Date.Parse('03/01/2019'), 'Invalid Dates Test: start date in the past' ), 'rd_id_7' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('10/01/2021'), Date.Parse('10/01/2025'), 'Invalid Dates Test: start and end date is more than 12 months' ), '003C00342992343' => new PauseData( Date.Parse('10/01/2021'), Date.Parse('05/01/2021'), 'Invalid RdId Test: Id not valid' ) }; Map params = new Map { 'PauseData' => rdPauseData }; try { // Convert Pause Data to Maps for (Id key : rdPauseData.keySet()) { String JSONPauseData = JSON.serialize(rdPauseData.get(key)); rdPauseData.put(key, (Map)JSON.deserializeUntyped(JSONPauseData)); } Map params = new Map { 'PauseData' => rdPauseData }; // Convert Pause Data to Maps for (Id key : rdPauseData.keySet()) { String JSONPauseData = JSON.serialize(rdPauseData.get(key)); rdPauseData.put(key, (Map)JSON.deserializeUntyped(JSONPauseData)); } Map params = new Map { 'PauseData' => rdPauseData }; npsp.Callable_API apiTest = new npsp.Callable_API(); String jsonResponse = String.valueOf(apiTest.call('rd2.pause', params)); Map result = (Map)JSON.deserialize(jsonResponse, Map.class); } catch(Exception ex) { System.debug('- Error Caught ' + ex.getMessage()); } /** * Object structure that is passed to the api call with the RD data to pause * and is returned as the call response. */ private class PauseData { // Values passed TO the api: public Date startDate; public Date EndDate; public String statusReason; public Boolean unPause; // Values returned by the api: public Boolean isSuccess; public String error; // Constructor to define required values to pass to the api. public PauseData(Date startDate, Date endDate, String reason) { this.startDate = startDate; this.endDate = endDate; this.statusReason = reason; this.unPause = false; } // Constructor to unpause an Rd public PauseData(Boolean unPause) { this.unPause = unPause; } } ``` **JSON Response** ```json { "a092D000003Vp8pQAC": { "startDate" : 2021-06-14 "endDate" : 2021-12-16 "statusReason" : "vacation" "unPause" : false "isSuccess" : true "error" : "OK" }, "a092D000003V4nHQAC": { "unPause" : true "isSuccess" : true "error" : "OK" }, "a092D000003V4ngQAC": { "startDate" : 2021-06-14 "endDate" : 2021-01-12 "statusReason" : "vacation" "unPause" : false "isSuccess" : false "error" : "The pause End Date must be greater than the Start Date." }, "a092D000003V4nIQAC": { "startDate" : 2021-06-14 "endDate" : 2021-12-16 "unPause" : true "isSuccess" : false "error" : "UnPause requests cannot include Start Date or End Date." }, "a092D000003V4nJQAC": { "startDate" : 2021-06-14 "endDate" : 2025-12-16 "unPause" : true "isSuccess" : false "error" : "You can't pause Recurring Donations for more than a year. The pause End Date must be less than one year after the Start Date." }, } ``` # Recurring Donations Schedules API Write Apex to access information about the Recurring Donation Schedule object using the Schedules API. The Recurring Donations Schedules API is intended to meet the needs of customers and partners who require visibility into the protected Recurring Donation Schedule object. The Schedules API returns all Schedules associated with a Recurring Donation, including current, past, and paused schedules. In addition to the Schedules API, we provide an [Installments API](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rd_installments_api.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Write Apex to query information about Recurring Donation Installments using the Installments API.") which returns the projected installments generated from the schedules associated with the Recurring Donation. ## Call Format - Global Class implementing the API: npsp.Callable\_API - Global Method: npsp.call() - Parameters: Map | Name | Datatype | Required | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | RecordIds | string | Yes | Recurring Donation Id. | ## JSON Response Format The JSON response format shows Schedule information listed by Recurring Donation Id. | Name | Datatype | Required | Description | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | statusReason | string | No | Additional details for the Schedule. For example, a paused reason for a paused schedule. | | startDate | Date | Yes | The Schedule start date. | | scheduleId | string | Yes | The Id of this Schedule record. | | recurringDonationId | string | Yes | The Recurring Donation record this Schedule relates to. | | paymentMethod | string | No | Payment method for this Schedule. For example, Check, Credit Card, ACH, etc. | | lastModifiedDate | date | Yes | The date this Schedule was last modified. | | isPause | boolean | Yes | Identifies a paused Schedule. Pauses are implemented with a Schedule which runs in parallel with other Schedules. Installments which fall between startDate and endDate inclusive of a paused Schedule are skipped. | | isCurrent | boolean | Yes | Identifies a Schedule as currently running where startDate <= today and endDate is null or >= today. | | isActive | boolean | Yes | Identifies a Schedule as currently running or is a future Schedule where: endDate is null or >= today. All Schedules where isActive == true are considered in the creation of upcoming installments. | | installmentPeriod | string | Yes | Defines the installment schedule along with Installment Frequency. For example, if Installment Period is Monthly and Installment Frequency is 3, the schedule would be defined as "every 3 months". | | installmentFrequency | integer | Yes | Defines the installment schedule along with Installment Period. For example, if Installment Period is Monthly and Installment Frequency is 3, the schedule would be defined as "every 3 months". | | installmentAmount | integer | Yes | The amount for each installment Opportunity. | | endDate | date | No | The Schedule end date. | | dayOfMonth | string | No | Sets the specific day of the month for future installment Opportunities when the Installment Period is Monthly. | | currencyCode | string | Yes | The currency ISO code for this Schedule. For example, USD. | | createdDate | date | Yes | The date this Schedule record was created. | | campaignId | string | No | The Campaign record this Schedule relates to. | ## Code Sample and JSON Response In this example, we want to know Schedule information for two specific Recurring Donations. **Code Sample** ```java Map callMap = new Map(); callMap.put('RecordIds', new Set{'a092D000003Vp8pQAC','a092D000003V4ngQAC'}); npsp.Callable_API apiTest = new npsp.Callable_API(); String jsonResponse = String.valueOf(apiTest.call('rd2.queryschedules', callMap)); ``` **JSON Reponse** ```json { "a092D000003Vp8pQAC": [ { "statusReason": null, "startDate": "2020-11-04", "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B1mFQAS", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003Vp8pQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "lastModifiedDate": "2020-11-04T21:06:00.000Z", "isPause": false, "isCurrent": true, "isActive": true, "installmentPeriod": "Monthly", "installmentFrequency": 1, "installmentAmount": 100, "endDate": null, "dayOfMonth": "4", "currencyCode": "USD", "createdDate": "2020-11-04T21:06:00.000Z", "campaignId": null } ], "a092D000003V4ngQAC": [ { "statusReason": null, "startDate": "2017-11-01", "scheduleId": "a0n2D000001B0AnQAK", "recurringDonationId": "a092D000003V4ngQAC", "paymentMethod": "Check", "lastModifiedDate": "2020-11-04T17:42:56.000Z", "isPause": false, "isCurrent": true, "isActive": true, "installmentPeriod": "Monthly", "installmentFrequency": 1, "installmentAmount": 100, "endDate": null, "dayOfMonth": "1", "currencyCode": "USD", "createdDate": "2020-11-03T00:09:31.000Z", "campaignId": null } ] } ``` # Recurring Volunteers for Salesforce Event Review the general steps for setting up recurring volunteer events. Then, create the event hierarchy, jobs, shifts, and schedules. - **[Plan a Recurring Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the steps for planning a recurring event in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Create a Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_create_campaign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Campaign is the top level of your recurring event structure. - **[Create an Ongoing Job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_ongoing_job.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you have Jobs with multiple Shifts occurring in the future, you need an easy way to automate the creation of those Shifts. (It would be tedious to manually enter each one!) Volunteers for Salesforce' Job Recurrence Schedules do the work for you. - **[Schedule Recurring Shifts using Job Recurrence Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_shifts_jrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Job Recurrence Schedules provide an easy way to schedule multiple future Job shifts. You determine when and how often the shifts occur. - **[Sign Up a Recurring Volunteer using Volunteer Recurrence Schedules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_recurring_volunteer_vrs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you have ongoing Jobs (created using a Job Recurrence Schedule), you may be lucky enough to have dedicated volunteers who want to sign up for Shifts on a regular basis. You can use the Volunteers for Salesforce Volunteer Recurrence Schedule to easily set up a recurring schedule for a regular volunteer. You can specify when the schedule starts and ends, and which days of the week and month the volunteer wants to work. # Reference for GEM Learn about the items included in the GEM package, how to manually update your org, and some fundraising terminology used by GEM. - **[What's Included in the GEM Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_whats_included_in_pkg.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn which Apex classes, apps, custom fields,page layouts, permission sets, and tabs are included in the GEM package. - **[Get Your Org Up to Speed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_get_org_up_to_speed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Apply certain changes manually to update your org. - **[Terminology](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_terminology.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some fundraising terminology and concepts used in GEM. # Refund Donation Payments Document refunds from Payment records in NPSP. Donation entry mistakes, like an errant decimal or an extra digit, or a panicked call from a donor can be resolved quickly and easily with a refund. Document the refund in NPSP. To ensure the parent Opportunity contains the complete transaction history, always use the Refund button to create a refund. Don't directly edit a payment record to fix a donation mistake. 1. Go to the Opportunity that contains the payment you want to refund. 2. Open the Payment you want to refund. 3. Click **Refund**. 4. In **Refund Amount**, enter the refund amount: - To refund the payment in full, leave the default entry. - To refund a partial amount of the payment, enter the amount of the partial refund. 5. Click **Refund Payment**. When you refund a payment, NPSP: - Updates the Opportunity's Amount to reflect the remaining amount. - Leaves the original Payment record unchanged. - Adds a negative Payment record to the Opportunity. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If a payment is refunded, its fixed-amount GAU Allocations are automatically adjusted to a percentage that reflects the proportion of the original Allocation amounts. For example: if a Recurring Donation of $50 has two fixed-amount Allocations for $25 each, and then a payment is refunded by $25, the Allocation automatically adjusts to a 50% split. # Refund Management Automate the end-to-end refund process for student financial accounts. When your students drop courses or reduce orders, Student Financials automatically identifies original invoices, settles credit memos against outstanding balances, and initiates payment refunds. Your students receive timely, accurate disbursements, and you maintain a complete audit trail for compliance.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
- **[Set Up Refund Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_refund_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To automate the billing process and keep detailed records of your transactions, configure billing. - **[Link a Canceled Order to the Original Order](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_link_canceled_order_original_order.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Link Canceled Order to Original Order invocable action in a flow to connect a canceled order with its original order. - **[Issue Refunds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_issue_refunds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automate student refunds when they drop courses, plan adjustments, or fees are reduced. Calculate the overpayment, post a credit memo against the original invoice, and automatically return the funds to the student’s original gateway payment method while maintaining a clear audit trail in the credit memo record. # Relationship Relationship represents a connection between two Contacts. - **[Sample Uses for Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationship object represents Contact-to-Contact relationships. Relationship records are essential for keeping track of who's who, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - **[Configure Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up initial Relationship data for your educational institution and learn about the required steps with each Salesforce update. - **[Create a Relationship Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture connections between Contacts by creating Relationship records. - **[View Contacts' Relationship Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a Contact's newly created Relationship record is saved, we can view the Contact's record to see the Related Contact in the Relationships related list. In this example, we see on Rajesh Mukerjee's Contact record his relationship with his wife, identified by Relationship record R-000090. ## Sample Uses for Relationship The Relationship object represents Contact-to-Contact relationships. Relationship records are essential for keeping track of who's who, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - Any educational institution—Track students' immediate and extended family relationships, emergency contacts, friendships, and others within their personal networks. Track their school-based relationships, such as those with advisors or counselors, tutors, and coaches. Track instructors' relationships with other instructors, staff members, administrators, community members, and so on. - K-12—Track whether a Contact is allowed to receive information protected by HIPAA, FERPA, or other privacy laws, regulations, and policies. ## Configure Relationship Set up initial Relationship data for your educational institution and learn about the required steps with each Salesforce update. - **[Initial Configuration for Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enabling the use of Relationships requires setting up Reciprocal Relationships to manage the two-sided nature of data about Contacts' relationships with each other. The Reciprocal Relationships feature comes preconfigured with default settings, but it's common for institutions to customize them to track different Contacts' roles in Relationships, or to use a different reciprocal method. - **[Keep Up with Relationship Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Relationship Enabling the use of Relationships requires setting up Reciprocal Relationships to manage the two-sided nature of data about Contacts' relationships with each other. The Reciprocal Relationships feature comes preconfigured with default settings, but it's common for institutions to customize them to track different Contacts' roles in Relationships, or to use a different reciprocal method. It's essential to understand how to manage Relationship data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm) - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Relationship records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Relationship object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Relationship Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.111

In the existing Husband and Wife reciprocal settings, change Spouse to Partner.

  • Create a Partner reciprocal setting. Specify these values.

    • Name—Partner

    • Female—Wife

    • Male—Husband

    • Neutral—Partner

    • Active—Selected

    Note
    Note These updates are required to avoid Settings Health Check reporting errors for a missing Partner value. For details about editing reciprocal settings, see Configure Relationship Settings.

1.104

Add these picklist values to the Type field, as needed: Guardian, Dependent, Stepfather, Stepmother, Stepparent, Stepdaughter, Stepson, Stepchild, Foster Parent, Foster Daughter, Foster Son, Foster Child.
1.109

Add these picklist values to the Type field, as needed: Parent's Sibling; Niece; Nephew; Sibling's Child.

Note
Note This update is required to avoid Settings Health Check reporting errors for not finding these values.
## Create a Relationship Record Capture connections between Contacts by creating Relationship records. 1. From the Contact record that you're creating the Relationship from, click **New** in the Relationships related list. 2. Enter relevant details, noting these fields in particular.  - Contact—Filled in automatically with the name of the Contact whose record you started from. - Related Contact—Start typing the name of the person who has a relationship to the Contact, and select it if you see it suggested. If the Contact doesn't exist yet, click **New Contact** to create their record now. - Type—The kind of relationship, as described from the Related Contact's point of view. It can help to think of completing the sentence, is the of . In this example, Samrita Mukerjee is Rajesh Mukerjee's wife. ![Creating a new Relationship record from the Contact record of Rajesh Mukerjee, to reflect his relationship with Related Contact, Samrita Mukerjee, and specifying in the Type field that she is Rajesh's Wife.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/relationship_new_record_mukerjees.png) - Status—Current or Former. 3. Click **Save**. ## View Contacts' Relationship Records After a Contact's newly created Relationship record is saved, we can view the Contact's record to see the Related Contact in the Relationships related list. In this example, we see on Rajesh Mukerjee's Contact record his relationship with his wife, identified by Relationship record R-000090. ![The Relationships related list on Rajesh Mukerjee's Contact record shows his wife, Samrita Mukerjee, as a Related Contact.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/contact_record_relationship_related_contact_wife.png) The Reciprocal Relationship is created automatically when the Relationship record is saved. We can view the Contact record of the Related Contact to see the Relationship represented in the other direction. In this example, we see on Samrita's Contact record, in the Relationships related list, that Rajesh is her husband, identified by a different Relationship record R-000091.  ![The Relationships related list on Samrita Mukerjee's Contact record shows her husband, Rajesh Mukerjee, as a Related Contact.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/contact_record_relationship_related_contact_husband.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note EDA K-12 Architecture Kit doesn't come with a visualization tool for viewing Relationships (such as the Relationships Viewer in our sister product, Nonprofit Success Pack). # Relationship Relationship represents a connection between two Contacts. - **[Sample Uses for Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Relationship object represents Contact-to-Contact relationships. Relationship records are essential for keeping track of who's who, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - **[Configure Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up initial Relationship data for your educational institution and learn about the required steps with each Salesforce update. - **[Create a Relationship Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Capture connections between Contacts by creating Relationship records. - **[View Contacts' Relationship Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After a Contact's newly created Relationship record is saved, we can view the Contact's record to see the Related Contact in the Relationships related list. In this example, we see on Rajesh Mukerjee's Contact record his relationship with his wife, identified by Relationship record R-000090. ## Sample Uses for Relationship The Relationship object represents Contact-to-Contact relationships. Relationship records are essential for keeping track of who's who, on or off campus, both in the present and in the past. - Any educational institution—Track students' immediate and extended family relationships, emergency contacts, friendships, and others within their personal networks. Track their school-based relationships, such as those with advisors or counselors, tutors, and coaches. Track instructors' relationships with other instructors, staff members, administrators, community members, and so on. - K-12—Track whether a Contact is allowed to receive information protected by HIPAA, FERPA, or other privacy laws, regulations, and policies. ## Configure Relationship Set up initial Relationship data for your educational institution and learn about the required steps with each Salesforce update. - **[Initial Configuration for Relationship](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enabling the use of Relationships requires setting up Reciprocal Relationships to manage the two-sided nature of data about Contacts' relationships with each other. The Reciprocal Relationships feature comes preconfigured with default settings, but it's common for institutions to customize them to track different Contacts' roles in Relationships, or to use a different reciprocal method. - **[Keep Up with Relationship Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_relationship.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed. ### Initial Configuration for Relationship Enabling the use of Relationships requires setting up Reciprocal Relationships to manage the two-sided nature of data about Contacts' relationships with each other. The Reciprocal Relationships feature comes preconfigured with default settings, but it's common for institutions to customize them to track different Contacts' roles in Relationships, or to use a different reciprocal method. It's essential to understand how to manage Relationship data and configure related settings. Review these resources to make sure you have the full picture. - [Configure Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_relationships_settings.htm) - Various Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) rules control the creation, update, and deletion of Relationship records and related records. Review the classes affecting the Relationship object in [Apex Class Descriptions for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_apex_class_descriptions.htm). ### Keep Up with Relationship Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed.
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
EDA 1.111

In the existing Husband and Wife reciprocal settings, change Spouse to Partner.

  • Create a Partner reciprocal setting. Specify these values.

    • Name—Partner

    • Female—Wife

    • Male—Husband

    • Neutral—Partner

    • Active—Selected

    Note
    Note These updates are required to avoid Settings Health Check reporting errors for a missing Partner value. For details about editing reciprocal settings, see Configure Relationship Settings.

1.18

Add these picklist values to the Type field, as needed: Guardian, Dependent, Stepfather, Stepmother, Stepparent, Stepdaughter, Stepson, Stepchild, Foster Parent, Foster Daughter, Foster Son, Foster Child.
1.20

Add these picklist values to the Type field, as needed: Parent's Sibling; Niece; Nephew; Sibling's Child.

Note
Note This update is required to avoid Settings Health Check reporting errors for not finding these values.
## Create a Relationship Record Capture connections between Contacts by creating Relationship records. 1. From the Contact record that you're creating the Relationship from, click **New** in the Relationships related list. 2. Enter relevant details, noting these fields in particular.  - Contact—Filled in automatically with the name of the Contact whose record you started from. - Related Contact—Start typing the name of the person who has a relationship to the Contact, and select it if you see it suggested. If the Contact doesn't exist yet, click **New Contact** to create their record now. - Type—The kind of relationship, as described from the Related Contact's point of view. It can help to think of completing the sentence, is the of . In this example, Samrita Mukerjee is Rajesh Mukerjee's wife. ![Creating a new Relationship record from the Contact record of Rajesh Mukerjee, to reflect his relationship with Related Contact, Samrita Mukerjee, and specifying in the Type field that she is Rajesh's Wife.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/relationship_new_record_mukerjees.png) - Status—Current or Former. 3. Click **Save**. ## View Contacts' Relationship Records After a Contact's newly created Relationship record is saved, we can view the Contact's record to see the Related Contact in the Relationships related list. In this example, we see on Rajesh Mukerjee's Contact record his relationship with his wife, identified by Relationship record R-000090. ![The Relationships related list on Rajesh Mukerjee's Contact record shows his wife, Samrita Mukerjee, as a Related Contact.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/contact_record_relationship_related_contact_wife.png) The Reciprocal Relationship is created automatically when the Relationship record is saved. We can view the Contact record of the Related Contact to see the Relationship represented in the other direction. In this example, we see on Samrita's Contact record, in the Relationships related list, that Rajesh is her husband, identified by a different Relationship record R-000091.  ![The Relationships related list on Samrita Mukerjee's Contact record shows her husband, Rajesh Mukerjee, as a Related Contact.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/contact_record_relationship_related_contact_husband.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note EDA K-12 Architecture Kit doesn't come with a visualization tool for viewing Relationships (such as the Relationships Viewer in our sister product, Nonprofit Success Pack). # Release Note Changes Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first. ## June 21, 2023 - [Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_244_rn_grantmaking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Introducing Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking! Manage the whole lifecycle of the grants you give to stakeholders. Add details about the opportunities people or organizations can apply for. Provide an easy way to enter details of a budget down to the values for each category and period. Capture all of the information related to a grant application. Track the requirements after a grant's awarded. Provide a Grantmaking Experience Cloud site for your grant managers, applicants, and external reviewers to enter details directly in your grant records. Plus, use Nonprofit Cloud features to manage other aspects of your organization.") Moved release notes to their own section. ## July 17, 2023 - [Salesforce for Education Summer '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_edu_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Summer '23 Release, we expand Education Cloud's capabilities to add more features for managing student success and streamline your processes further. We also updated Accounting Subledger to support custom field mappings and job filtering based on criteria.") Updated Summer '23 release notes with licensing changes and additions. - [Elevate Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Convert Google Universal Analytics to Google Analytics 4. Set a date range for your payments and recurring donations export. Find these enhancements in Elevate in Summer '23.") Added release notes for the feature to close Elevate recurring donations and a notice about product retirement. ## May 5, 2023 - [Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_244_rn_grantmaking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Introducing Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking! Manage the whole lifecycle of the grants you give to stakeholders. Add details about the opportunities people or organizations can apply for. Provide an easy way to enter details of a budget down to the values for each category and period. Capture all of the information related to a grant application. Track the requirements after a grant's awarded. Provide a Grantmaking Experience Cloud site for your grant managers, applicants, and external reviewers to enter details directly in your grant records. Plus, use Nonprofit Cloud features to manage other aspects of your organization.") Added Grantmaking to Nonprofit Cloud release notes. ## May 3, 2023 - [Accounting Subledger Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Bring all your financial data to Accounting Subledger, including the data stored in custom fields. Choose what to process to generate relevant transaction journal records in a format that's ready to use for your Accounting teams.") Added Accounting Subledger to Nonprofit Cloud release notes. ## March 24, 2023 - [Salesforce.org Summer '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce.org Summer '23 Release Notes") Published preview release notes. # Release Note Changes Read about changes to the release notes, with the most recent changes first. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. ## October 10, 2023 Salesforce.org Winter '24 release notes changes from October 10, 2023. - [Nonprofit Cloud Case Management New and Changed Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_cm_new_and_changed_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Do more with the new Case Management objects.") Added ComplaintCase and PublicComplaint as new objects for Nonprofit Cloud Case Management. ## August 28, 2023 Salesforce.org Winter '24 release notes changes from August 28, 2023. - [Nonprofit Success Pack (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mp_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is now more secure than ever thanks to several small updates. In addition, the GitHub release notes now direct users to the Salesforce release notes. And the French translation of \"Ms.\" now aligns with the standard French abbreviation.") Added NPSP release notes. ## August 17, 2023 Salesforce.org Winter '24 release notes changes from August 17, 2023. - [New Flows for Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npc_fr_new_flows_for_nonprofit_cloud_for_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these new flows in Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising.") Added Process Gift Entries flow. ## August 16, 2023 Salesforce.org Winter '24 release notes changes from August 16, 2023. - [Salesforce.org Winter '24 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Salesforce.org Winter '24 Release Notes") Published preview release notes. # Remove Participants from Every Benefit Session on a Benefit Schedule at Once You can now remove participants from future benefit sessions in a benefit schedule by using the `Remove participants from schedule` API, and avoid the painstaking task of removing them individually from each benefit session. When you run the API, the participant's related Benefit Disbursement records are deleted, and the Benefit Schedule Assignment records are updated to indicate their participation end date for that benefit. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO [_Salesforce Help_: Remove Participants from a Benefit Schedule or Session](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_pm_remove_participants_from_a_benefit_session.htm) # Report on Alerts Explore sample Alert reports and a dashboard that come with Student Success Hub. Student Success Hub provides a sample dashboard, a set of underlying sample reports, and a custom report type that offer insight into student Cases that have related Alerts. Install the reports and dashboard from the Installation Manager and then customize them for your school or institution. The sample assets listed in the table are available to both K-12 and higher ed Student Success Hub orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Earlier versions of Student Success Hub installed folders named SAL Sample Dashboards and SAL Sample Alert Reports.
Type of Item Name Description

Custom report type (in the Other Reports category)

Cases with Alerts

Provides information about Student Record Cases that have support Alerts.

Sample dashboard

Alerts Dashboard

Keep tabs on the Alerts assigned to support staff.

Sample report

My Student Caseload

All of my students.

Sample report

My Resolved Alerts by Student

Resolved Alerts that I own and closed in the last 14 days, grouped by student.

Sample report

My Unresolved Alerts by Created Date

Unresolved Alerts that I own, grouped by creation date.

Sample report

My Unresolved Alerts by Student

Unresolved Alerts that I own, grouped by student.

Sample report

My Unresolved Alerts Created Last 7 Days

Unresolved Alerts that I own and created in the last 7 days.

Sample report

Unresolved Alerts by Owner

Unresolved Alerts for my students, grouped by owner.

Sample report

Unresolved Alerts for My Students

Unresolved Alerts for my students, grouped by student.
As you customize the reports and dashboard, consider these recommendations. - To enable reporting on Alert-related data from your own custom fields in Cases or Alerts, add those fields to the custom report type so that they can be included. - Update sharing of the sample report and dashboard folders as needed. By default, they're shared with all internal users. - Make reports and dashboards available to support staff by [adding them to the app navigation menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app.") or reminding support staff that they can access the reports and dashboard through the App Launcher. # Report on Recruiting and Admissions Bring application insights into one place and discover trends in your admissions cycle by using the Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator. - **[Learn About the Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_report_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator with Salesforce turns your recruiting and admissions data into actionable insights. See the current and historical volume of Applications your institution is receiving in a variety of formats. You can easily filter and customize the data into bar graphs, geographic heat maps, and lists. If you have enough historical data, you can also identify changes in yield and melt. Use the dashboards to better understand your recruitment funnel, meet your goals, and plan for the future. - **[Understand the Data Model Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_report_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The dashboards show data from various objects. - **[Connect Your Org to Tableau](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_report_connect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect using either Tableau Cloud or Tableau Desktop. - **[Explore the Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_report_explore.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Admissions Connect Tableau Accelerator includes multiple dashboards. - **[Best Practices for Using and Maintaining Your Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_report_customize.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some recommendations for working with Admissions Connect dashboards. # Report on Your Recruiting Territories Learn how to identify prospects and recruiting staff assigned to territories, trends in recruitment, and more. Reports related to territories can be powerful tools for your institution. Reports can answer basic questions, such as which recruiters are assigned to which territories, and who are the prospects in each territory. Reports can also help inform your institution about trends in recruitment, such as which engagement and outreach programs are successful for a specific territory. Data like this can help ensure that your team is investing in the right recruiting choices. Remember that you can only report on the data you have. To report on KPIs and other overarching initiatives, you have to gather and maintain the data for a prospect’s entire journey with your institution. You also need to be able to clearly differentiate between suspects, prospects, applicants, and enrolled students. EDA’s Affiliation object lets you track details about how a Contact is related to an Account. You can use the Role field on the Affiliation object to capture the progress of a prospect through the recruiting process. Your institution can also use the Opportunity object to track details related to a prospect’s likelihood of enrolling at your institution. These objects, combined with Account, Contact, and territory data, provide a 360-degree view into a prospect’s journey. For more information about how the Account, Contact, Affiliation, and Opportunity records work together, see  [Model Suspects and Prospects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_model_suspects_and_prospects.htm) in the EDA documentation. - **[Create Basic Custom Report Types for Recruiting Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create reports about your recruiting territories, first set up custom report types in Salesforce. Custom report types allow data from different objects to be viewed in a single report. - **[Create Basic Reports for Recruiting Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After creating the basic custom report types for territories, you can create these reports. - **[Tips for Creating Additional Recruiting Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_report.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you’re looking to create reports that go beyond the basics, having a clear plan for a report can help with your implementation. Ask yourself these questions. ## Create Basic Custom Report Types for Recruiting Reports To create reports about your recruiting territories, first set up custom report types in Salesforce. Custom report types allow data from different objects to be viewed in a single report. We recommend creating all of the custom reports types listed in [Create Custom Report Types for Enterprise Territory Management Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_create_custom_report_types.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. If you’re not sure how to create a custom report type, see [Create a Custom Report Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.reports_defining_report_types.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Create Basic Reports for Recruiting Territories After creating the basic custom report types for territories, you can create these reports. Report on Accounts Assigned to Territories See which Accounts are assigned to which territories. Report on Territories Without Assigned Accounts See which territories don't have assigned Accounts. Report on Users Not Assigned to Territories See which Users aren't assigned to territories. Report on Territories with Assigned Users See which Users are assigned to which territories. Report on Summarizable Account Fields by Territory Assess territory size by reporting on summarizable Account data. ## Tips for Creating Additional Recruiting Reports If you’re looking to create reports that go beyond the basics, having a clear plan for a report can help with your implementation. Ask yourself these questions. - What’s the goal of viewing the report? Example: See which prospects are in which territory and who is the assigned recruiter. - Who's going to view the report? Example: Recruiters and leadership. - What data—more specifically, which objects—will the report include? Example: Contacts, Accounts, Territories, and Users. - What fields do I want to see? Example: The prospect's name, the territory name, the recruiter's name. - Do I need to summarize or group any data? Example: Group the data by territory. If we continue with our example, we now know to create a new custom report type that relates Contacts, Accounts, Territories, and Users together. Then we can use this report type to create the report. ![Sample custom report type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/territory_crt_sample.png) If you’re using Opportunities and set up the Opportunity assignment filter, create a report that shows data from the Opportunity and its Territory field. # Reporting and Analytics Learn about reports and dashboards included in the nonprofit Case Management managed package and learn more about using Tableau for advanced reporting. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Case Management Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reporting makes it easy to extract meaningful data about your Clients and Programs. You can make copies of reports and filter them to include the Clients and Programs you manage, then add them to your personal dashboards so you can track progress. - **[Tableau for Advanced Reporting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Tableau Dashboard Accelerators with Salesforce to turn your client and program data into actionable insights that can help you improve your program performance and increase your organization's impact. # Reporting and Analytics in EDA See how Education Data Architecture provides insight and analysis for every stage of the student life cycle. - **[Create a List of Prospective Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_prospective_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to identify high school students who've expressed interest in academic programs at your college or university. - **[Create a List of Current Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_current_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to create a list of the students at your college or university who meet certain criteria. - **[Create a List of Parents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_list_of_parents.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to create a list of parents who have business affiliations that could help students with networking and job placement. - **[Create a List of Alumni](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_create_a_list_of_alumni.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In this common use case doc, we'll show you how to identify alumni who meet certain criteria. - **[Analyze Student Enrollment with Office of the President Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_student_enrollment_president_office_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring enrollment insights into one place and discover trends in campus diversity. - **[Analyze Application Data with the IPEDS Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_analyze_application_data_ipeds_tableau_accelerator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring application insights into one place and discover trends in your admissions cycle by using the Integrated Postsecondary Education Data System (IPEDS) Tableau Accelerator. # Represent Classes and Other Programs Identify how to set up courses and other programs in your school in the K-12 Architecture Kit. Elijah is ready to start third grade! He turned things around with the extra help he received at the end of second grade, and the staff at Valley Elementary want him to continue to shine. Let’s see how the school sets up the classes and programs that help him continue to learn and grow. - **[The Basics of Classes and Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use academic program accounts to represent classes, programs, and activities. - **[Describe Your School's Infrastructure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** So far so good! Valley Elementary has defined its Courses. But what times of the year are these Courses offered? What days, times of day, and in which rooms or spaces are they held? - **[A Closer Look at Classes and Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Course Offering object uses term, time block, and facility records to create a specific instance of a course. - **[Connect Students to Courses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Course Connection object in K-12 Architecture Kit to associate a student with a course offering. - **[Let's Review How K-12 Architecture Kit Represents Classes and Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_classes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Congratulations! We've given you a whole lot of information, and we realize following along can be challenging. Let's review what you've learned about the way Valley Elementary sets up grades, classes, and programs at their school. They used: ## The Basics of Classes and Programs Use academic program accounts to represent classes, programs, and activities. Earlier, we talked about different kinds of Accounts including Household Accounts (a container for people who live in the same household) and Educational Institution Accounts (a container for staff who work at the same place). For organizing data about classes and after-school programs, Valley Elementary uses yet another type of Account, _Academic Program Accounts._ Think of these Accounts as containers for classes and activities. For example, Valley Elementary uses six different Academic Program Account records to represent each grade from Kindergarten through fifth, and a single Schoolwide Assistance Academic Program Account record to represent support programs such as their after-school program. The classes and activities themselves are represented by _Courses_. Here's a look at some of the Courses that are available at Valley Elementary and the way they organize them under Academic Program Accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Note that a Course is not a specific instance of a class or activity that a student can enroll in; it doesn't have details about when or where a class is offered or who's teaching it. For that information, we'll take a look at Course Offerings, next. Then, in just a bit, we'll look a the way Valley Elementary enrolls students, like Elijah, in Courses. - When school staff define the third-grade Courses offered, they create a Course record for every class and associate it with the Third Grade Academic Program Account record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note In elementary schools, Courses tend to be grade-level specific, so organizing them under grade-level specific Academic Program Accounts makes sense. However, if you're at a middle or high school, you might organize Courses under subject matter-specific Academic Department Accounts. For example, a high school might organize all of their school's biology Courses under a record called **Biology Academic Department Account**. It's entirely up to you to decide what suits your school's needs best. - When staff define the support programs the school offers, they create additional Course records for each program and associate them with the Academic Program Account record called Schoolwide Assistance. ![Diagram of Academic Program Accounts as containers for Courses (like 3rd English or After-School Program)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/third-courses.jpg) ## Describe Your School's Infrastructure So far so good! Valley Elementary has defined its Courses. But what times of the year are these Courses offered? What days, times of day, and in which rooms or spaces are they held? Before building out the specific instances of Courses students can enroll in, Valley Elementary also defines: - The periods of time during a school year when Courses are offered; we call these _Terms_. - The periods of time during a school day when Courses can be held; we call these _Time Blocks_. - The places where Courses are held; we call these _Facilities_. Let's see how Valley Elementary sets up some of these records. ### Terms A Term can be a quarter, a semester, or some other academic period that Courses are offered. Since Valley Elementary is on the semester system, they create two _Term records_ (Semester I 2018/2019 and Semester II 2018/2019). They also create a top-level Term record to represent the entire school year. The semester Terms are nested under the school year Term. Creating these different records allows the school to report on data for an entire school year, or for just a specific semester. ![Diagram of the Valley Elementary Educational Institution Account with a school-year Term and nested semester Terms](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/terms.jpg) Terms are associated with an Account—in this case, the Valley Elementary Educational Institution Account. If Terms were the same for all schools in the Valley School District, we could associate Terms with the Valley School District Account instead, but since the high school follows a trimester schedule, we associate Terms with their school’s Account. ### Time Blocks _Time Block records_ define the periods of time when activities _might_ occur at Valley Elementary. The school can use these records to connect Courses to specific blocks of time when they're offered. Let’s take a look at a sampling of some of their Time Block records. ![Diagram of the Valley Elementary Educational Institution Account with Time Block records (like 7:30 AM-8:10 AM)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/time-blocks.jpg) ### Facilities _Facility records_ define the places where activities occur. The school can use these records to identify specific activity or Course locations. Here’s a small sampling of some of their Facility records. ![Diagram of the Valley Elementary Educational Institution Account with Facility records (like Room 201A or Library)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/facilities.jpg) Notice that Valley Elementary associates Facility records for the individual locations directly with the Valley Elementary Account. Alternatively, they could have created a top-level Facility record called Valley Elementary Campus and nested individual locations under it. This might be helpful at large campuses with multiple structures. ## A Closer Look at Classes and Programs The Course Offering object uses term, time block, and facility records to create a specific instance of a course. We've learned a lot about the different elements that factor into planning for Courses. Now, let's see how it all comes together. We get a little into the weeds with a closer look at how K-12 Architecture Kit manages these details, but don’t worry, we’ll surface for air soon. Let’s think about the first day students (and teachers) show up to a class. There are certain bits of information they’ll surely need to know, and K-12 Architecture Kit can be set up to capture it all. Questions might include: If I’m a teacher, who are my students? If I’m a student, who’s my teacher? In what room is the Course I’m teaching or attending? What time does the Course start? All of this information is collected in records that we call _Course Offerings._ Course Offerings are specific instances of Courses. They’re what students enroll in. For example, 3rd English is a Course that’s offered every school year, but Third Grade ELA Semester I 2018/2019 is the Course Offering (a specific instance of the 3rd Grade Course) that students can enroll in this semester of this year. Many details are captured in a Course Offering, including the: - Term it’s offered (Semester I 2018/2019). - Time Block when it’s held (8:15 AM-8:55 AM). - Person (Contact) who’s teaching it (Mrs. Valentin). - Facility where it’s held (Room 201A, which happens to be Mrs. Valentin’s home room). Let's see what these pieces look like when they're all connected to each other. ![Diagram of the Third Grade Academic Program Account with related Course Offering objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/course-offering-details.jpg) ## Connect Students to Courses Use the Course Connection object in K-12 Architecture Kit to associate a student with a course offering. When Elijah signs up for the third grade, here's what happens. 1. The staff specify Elijah's current grade level. 2. They enroll him in classes. 3. They re-enroll him in the after-school program and school-provided meals. Let's take a closer look at what's actually happening here and at the data records that represent his actual enrollment. We can actually view all of the records that represent him directly from Elijah's Contact record. - Elijah's Contact record shows related _Grade Enrollments_—records that track past and present grade levels. To indicate that he's entering the third grade, staff specify a Current Grade Level of Third Grade on his Contact record, which sets the status of his second grade Grade Enrollment record to "former." - His Contact record also shows related _Course Connections_—records that link a Contact to a Course Offering. Elijah’s Course Connections look like this. ![Diagram of Courses with Course Offerings and the Course Connections that connect students to them](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/complete-connections2.jpg) ## Let's Review How K-12 Architecture Kit Represents Classes and Programs Congratulations! We've given you a whole lot of information, and we realize following along can be challenging. Let's review what you've learned about the way Valley Elementary sets up grades, classes, and programs at their school. They used: - Academic Program Accounts to help organize Courses and other school programs and activities. - Courses to represent classes and activities offered by the school. - Course Offerings to represent the times and places where a specific instance of a Course is offered, including the person teaching the Course. - Course Connections to actually enroll students in Course Offerings. # Represent Contacts' Connections to Each Other and to Accounts Use Salesforce objects to identify how the people and programs in your school relate to each other. Think of all the connections between the people at your school and the activities and programs they're involved in. Without understanding these connections, or relationships, the people and activities have no context; they don't tell a story. For example, the relationship between our student, Elijah, and his grandmother tells us that a family member other than a parent is able to share important information about him. And his connection to the Schoolwide Assistance Account tells us he's receiving additional support. In K-12 Architecture Kit, we connect the dots using: - _Relationships_ to connect people (Contacts) to other people, like Elijah to his grandmother. - _Affiliations_ to connect people (Contacts) to the Accounts that contain the activities or programs they participate in, like Elijah's connection to the Schoolwide Assistance Account. When you create a Relationship, a “reciprocal relationship” that reflects this same relationship in the other direction is automatically created. For example, when we create a Relationship from Elijah's Contact record to his mother, Juliana Espozito, her Contact record also reflects that she has a son, Elijah. - **[Connections for Student Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relationships represented in Household Accounts include connections to family, but also other important people in a student's educational sphere. Remember that Contacts' connections to other people are represented by Relationships and connections to Accounts are represented by Affiliations. - **[Connections for Faculty and Others](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_contacts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contact records for faculty members show Relationships with other Contacts (like a principal or teacher). They also show Affiliations with Accounts like Educational Institution Accounts (like the school) or Academic Program Accounts (like Third Grade). Known as affiliated Accounts, these types of Accounts are distinct from Household Accounts. ## Connections for Student Contacts Relationships represented in Household Accounts include connections to family, but also other important people in a student's educational sphere. Remember that Contacts' connections to other people are represented by Relationships and connections to Accounts are represented by Affiliations. Let’s see what Elijah’s Relationships and Affiliations look like. ![Diagram of student Elijah Espozito's Relationships with people (like counselor or family) and Affiliations with Accounts (like school or grade).](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/household-acct-final.jpg) Notice that Elijah’s enrollment in the school's assistance programs creates an Affiliation with the Schoolwide Assistance Account. ## Connections for Faculty and Others Contact records for faculty members show Relationships with other Contacts (like a principal or teacher). They also show Affiliations with Accounts like Educational Institution Accounts (like the school) or Academic Program Accounts (like Third Grade). Known as affiliated Accounts, these types of Accounts are distinct from Household Accounts. Let’s see what Mrs. Valentin’s Relationships and Affiliations look like: ![Diagram of teacher Lorna Valentin's Relationships with people (like an H.R. rep, the school principal, and a student teacher/mentee) and Affiliations with Accounts (like Valley Elementary, Valley School District, and Third Grade)](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/valentin-acct.jpg) # Represent People and Your School Use Salesforce objects to represent students, faculty and staff, school district and schools, and community members. - **[Students and Their Households](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to represent students and their households in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Your District and Your Schools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now let's turn our attention to Valley Elementary, the K-5 school Elijah attends in the Valley School District. The school district also includes Valley Middle School and Valley High School. - **[Faculty and Other People](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how to represent teachers, staff, and other people involved with your school in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Let's Review How K-12 Architecture Kit Represents People](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_people.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We've covered a _lot_ of ground, and it can be easy to lose sight of some of the details. Let's see what you've learned so far about the way Valley Elementary organizes the data representing people in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Students and Their Households Understand how to represent students and their households in K-12 Architecture Kit. People are at the heart of Valley Elementary—students, and the family and friends they share households with. Let's see how this school uses K-12 Architecture Kit to represent students and their household members. In the world of Salesforce and K-12 Architecture Kit, people are modeled with _Contacts_. A Contact represents any individual person. Valley Elementary has created a _Contact record_ for Elijah, as well as a Contact record for each of the important people in Elijah's life. Valley Elementary also tracks Elijah's household so that staff can see whom he lives with and gain insight into his life beyond school. A household is represented by another type of record called an _Account_. Specifically, a _Household Account_. You can think of a Household Account as a container for one or more people (Contacts) who live together. (We'll see another type of Account in just a minute.) ![Diagram of the Espozito Household Account with student and family member Contacts.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/elijah-hh-simple.jpg) Elijah's Contact record includes information like his birthdate, contact information (address, phone, etc.), his primary household, and his current grade level. Throughout the years, our picture of Elijah's educational journey becomes richer, as his Contact record grows with related information about his grades, his attendance, and any behavior events. To sum up, Contacts represent people, Household Accounts group people in the same household together, and Contact records capture specific information about a specific person. ## Your District and Your Schools Now let's turn our attention to Valley Elementary, the K-5 school Elijah attends in the Valley School District. The school district also includes Valley Middle School and Valley High School. To represent each school and the district itself, we again use Account records. But instead of using Household Account records like we did to represent a household of Contacts (people) in Elijah's family, we use _Educational Institution Account records_. Similar to Household Accounts, Educational Institution Accounts are used to track information about schools and school districts, and to group together the people who work at the same educational institution like a school's principal, teachers, and support staff. Unlike Household Accounts, you can also use Educational Institution Accounts to represent how Accounts are related. For example, since the elementary, middle, and high school are all part of the Valley School District, they can be grouped together under a single school district record. In Salesforce lingo, the nested Account structure is called an _Account Hierarchy._ ![Diagram of Educational Institution Accounts with school Accounts nested under the Valley School District Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/school-district.jpg) These Accounts serve different purposes. - The Valley School District Account is a top-level Account for all schools and a container for district staff. - The Valley Elementary Account, Valley Middle School Account, and Valley High School Account are containers for the people and activities at each school. ## Faculty and Other People Understand how to represent teachers, staff, and other people involved with your school in K-12 Architecture Kit. Remember how Valley Elementary uses a Contact record to hold information about Elijah? They use Contact records to store information about other people, too—people like teachers, other staff, and even the owner of the neighborhood pizzeria who holds annual fundraisers for the school. Just like student Contacts, Contacts that represent teachers and staff are also associated with Accounts. Unlike student Contacts, which are associated with Household Accounts, faculty Contacts are connected to the Educational Institution Accounts where they work. For example, Mrs. Flores teaches at Valley Elementary, so her Contact record is under the Valley Elementary Account. Since Elijah's counselor works at various schools in the district, his Contact record is under the Valley School District Account. Now what about Donna, a pizzeria owner and valuable fund raiser for the Valley School District? She’s a person, so she gets her own Contact record, of course. As an independent business owner, she partners with the district, but isn’t directly related to the school or the district. When it comes to associating her with an Account, she’s associated with yet another type of Account known as a _Business Organization Account_. ![Diagram of other Contacts and associated Accounts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/k12_architecture_kit/images/other-contacts.jpg) As you can see, every Contact is always associated with some kind of Account. Salesforce requires this relationship as part of its overall data model, and provides commonly used types of Accounts right out of the box (along with the flexibility to create your own custom types). ## Let's Review How K-12 Architecture Kit Represents People We've covered a _lot_ of ground, and it can be easy to lose sight of some of the details. Let's see what you've learned so far about the way Valley Elementary organizes the data representing people in K-12 Architecture Kit. - Students and their guardians are represented as Contacts under Household Accounts. - Faculty and other people involved in the school are represented as Contacts under Educational Institution Accounts. - Contact records contain valuable information about the people they represent. - The school district and the schools in the district are represented with Educational Institution Accounts, with the schools nested under the district Account. - Community members like local business owners can be represented as Contacts under Business Organization Accounts. # Represent Special Characteristics Identify ways to track student performance, behavior, and characteristics in the K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Student Performance, Behavior, and Characteristics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_characteristics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How does Valley Elementary staff know if students are excelling or need help, are attending class and displaying good personal character, or are missing class or exhibiting concerning behavior? If a student has special needs, are they being met? These types of information are perhaps the most important pieces of the puzzle. Without them, Valley Elementary can't provide the educational experience its students, their families, and staff members deserve. - **[Faculty and Other Contacts' Accreditations, Achievements, and Characteristics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_represent_characteristics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** And what about staff and other people who are connected to students or the school in some way? Many of them worked hard to complete special accreditations or learn special language skills. . ## Student Performance, Behavior, and Characteristics How does Valley Elementary staff know if students are excelling or need help, are attending class and displaying good personal character, or are missing class or exhibiting concerning behavior? If a student has special needs, are they being met? These types of information are perhaps the most important pieces of the puzzle. Without them, Valley Elementary can't provide the educational experience its students, their families, and staff members deserve. This is where some special types of information come in handy. At a minimum, we want to know: - The grades a student receives for a specific grading period; we call these _Term Grades_. - The times when a student has been tardy or absent; we call these _Attendance Events_. - The achievements, accommodations, or family considerations a student might have; we call these _Attributes._ ## Faculty and Other Contacts' Accreditations, Achievements, and Characteristics And what about staff and other people who are connected to students or the school in some way? Many of them worked hard to complete special accreditations or learn special language skills. . For example, it's important to know that a volunteer has sufficient security clearances to work in a classroom, that a teacher has proper or even advanced credentials, and that an individual has special language skills, for example, American Sign Language. These types of information are represented as follows. - The type of credential or characteristic a person has and the dates when it's valid; we capture these as _Attributes_. - The language a person speaks and their fluency level; we call these _Contact Languages_. # Request for Information and Response Prospective students can connect with your staff and inquire about programs and services through your institution's Experience Cloud site. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the portal. **How**: After logging in to your institution's Experience Cloud site, users click **Request For Information**. They then click **New Request for Information** and submit the form. See Also: - [Request for Information Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_request_for_information_component.htm) # Required Configuration If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended. - **[Update Opportunity Stages, Sales Processes, and Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use Salesforce to track your organization's fundraising processes such as donations, matching gifts, grants, and membership management. To take full advantage of this functionality, configure Opportunity stages and record types. You also need to create additional sales processes. - **[Assign the Organization Record Type to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP installs two Account record types: Household Account and Organization. Household accounts are for individuals and families. Organization Accounts are for foundations that fund your work, other nonprofits that you partner with, corporations that sponsor your work, or companies that employ your donors and constituents. - **[Assign Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Maybe you already carefully tailored your page layouts to the way your users work, making sure the right fields are visible and grouped in a way that makes sense, and that all related information is easily accessible on each record. If so, congratulations! If not, take advantage of the NPSP custom page layouts. We designed them with typical nonprofit users in mind. You can customize them to meet your users' needs. - **[Restore the Standard New Button on the Opportunity Related List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The New Account Donation button on the Opportunity related list of an Account record doesn't work correctly in Lightning Experience. We recommend that you remove this button and restore the standard New button on the related list. - **[Override Lead Convert Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Even if your org isn't using Leads at this point, it's worth a few minutes to get the Lead Conversion page set up, so that you'll be ready to go if you decide to use Leads sometime down the road. - **[Add or Edit a New Opportunity Button on Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can add new Quick Actions on Contacts that let you create Opportunities directly from the Contact record. If you started using NPSP from a trial instance after November 15, 2016, you should have these buttons on Contacts. - **[Override Contact Delete Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Contact Delete page alerts you if the Contact you're trying to delete is the only member of their Household. If so, you get the option of deleting that Household Account record along with the Contact, so that you don't have orphaned Households cluttering up your org. - **[Enable the Manage Household Button](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you don't see the Manage Household button on your Household Account page, enable the button in Salesforce Setup. - **[Create Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Opportunity Contact Role records link a person (Contact) to a donation (Opportunity), and show what role the person played in getting you the donation. Some typical roles are Donor, Soft Credit, Household Member, and Solicitor, but you can create whatever roles make sense for your organization. - **[Configure Relationship Reciprocal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With NPSP, you can create Relationship records that show a connection between any two people. For example, you can track parent/child relationships, sibling relationships, mentor/mentee relationships, and more. - **[Activate Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP comes with a handful of useful workflow rules to manage emails and phone numbers, and to automatically send acknowledgment emails. The workflow rules are inactive by default. ## Update Opportunity Stages, Sales Processes, and Record Types You can use Salesforce to track your organization's fundraising processes such as donations, matching gifts, grants, and membership management. To take full advantage of this functionality, configure Opportunity stages and record types. You also need to create additional sales processes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Opportunity Sales Processes](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mf1fDmZwg38). If you’re not familiar with these terms, don’t worry, we’ll walk you through it all! To get started, here’s a brief explanation: - Stage: A picklist field on Opportunity records. The stage indicates which step of the sales process an Opportunity is in. Typical stages for a donation might include Prospecting, Pledged, Closed Won, or Closed Lost. - Sales Processes: A collection of stages that a business process moves through. - Record Type: The kind of Opportunity you’re tracking, for example, Donation, Grant, or Membership. Each record type is assigned a sales process. ### Create Opportunity Stage Values We'll walk you through an example to get you started. Let's create a stage called "Application Received." (We'll use this stage in a later step for the Grant Sales Process.)From Setup, click the Object Manager 1. From **Setup**, click the **Object Manager** 1. From **Setup**, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click the **Stage** field. 5. Under the Opportunity Stages Picklist Values, click **New**. 6. Enter the following details: - Stage Name: Application Received - Type: Open - Probability: 30% - Forecast Category: Pipeline - Description: Our organization has been notified that the grant application was received. 7. Save your changes. Now create the rest of the stages you need for your organization. Configure each of these stage values (if they don't already exist in your org). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The values in this table appear in the NPSP Trial and are only suggestions. Your organization can customize them to meet your needs or leave them as is. | Stage Name | API Name | Type | Probability | Forecast Category | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Application Submitted | Application Submitted | Open | 30% | Pipeline | | Awarded | Awarded | Closed/Won | 100% | Closed | | Cultivation | Cultivation | Open | 30% | Pipeline | | Declined | Declined | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | | Identification | Identification | Open | 10% | Pipeline | | In-Kind Not Yet Received | In-Kind Not Yet Received | Open | 50% | Omitted | | In-Kind Received | In-Kind Received | Closed/Won | 100% | Omitted | | LOI Submitted | LOI Submitted | Open | 20% | Pipeline | | Pledged | Pledged | Open | 50% | Pipeline | | Proposal/Review | Proposal/Review | Open | 60% | Best Case | | Solicitation | Solicitation | Open | 40% | Pipeline | | Verbal Commitment | Verbal Commitment | Open | 80% | Commit | | Withdrawn | Withdrawn | Closed/Lost | 0% | Omitted | ### Create Sales Processes to Match Your Business Processes A sales process in Salesforce is a collection of stages that an Opportunity could potentially move through. For example, a Donation sales process might include the stages Pledged, Closed Won, Closed Lost, and Declined. Create and configure a Donation sales process: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sales Processes and select **Sales Processes**. 2. Click **New**. 3. In the Existing Sales Process field, choose **Master**. 4. In the Sales Process name field, enter Donation. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Move the following values to the Selected Value list: - Pledged - Closed Won - Declined - Closed Lost 7. If there are values other than those listed in step 6 in the Selected Values list, move them to the Available Values list. ![Selected Stage values for the Donation Sales Process: Pledged, Closed Lost, Closed Won, Declined.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/donation_sales_process.png) 8. Save your changes. 9. Now create and configure sales processes for Grants, In-Kind Gifts, and Major Gifts as described in steps 2—7 with the values listed in this table. The NPSP Trial comes with these sales processes: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see some of the selected values in your org, you need to add them to the Opportunity Stage field first. Learn more in [Create Opportunity Stage Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "We'll walk you through an example to get you started. Let's create a stage called \"Application Received.\" (We'll use this stage in a later step for the Grant Sales Process.)From Setup, click the Object Manager"). | Sales Process | Selected Values | | --- | --- | | Donation | Pledged, Closed/Lost, Closed/Won, Declined | | Grant | Prospecting, LOI Submitted, Application Submitted, Withdrawn, Awarded, Declined | | In-Kind Gift | Prospecting, In-Kind Not Yet Received, In-Kind Received, Withdrawn | | Major Gift | Identification, Qualification, Cultivation, Solicitation, Proposal/Review, Verbal Commitment, Awarded, Closed/Won, Withdrawn, Declined | ### Create Opportunity Record Types Create these Opportunity record types to track different kinds of Opportunities in NPSP. - Donation - Grant - In-Kind Gift - Major Gift - Matching Gift - Membership Record types let you offer different business processes, picklist values, and page layouts to different users. We’ll walk you through how to create the Donation record type. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Enter the following information: - Existing Record Type: Master (the default value) - Record Type Label: Donation - Record Type Name: Donation - Sales Process: Donation - Description: Donation being prospected or already received 6. Select the **Active** checkbox. ![Defining the Donation Record type](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/donation_record_type.png) 7. Select **Make Available** for profiles that should have access to the Donation record type. 8. For enabled profiles, select **Make Default** to make it the default record type for users of that profile. 9. Click **Next**. 10. To apply one layout to all profiles, select **Donation Layout**. ![Assigning page layouts for a new record type. The Apply one layout to all profiles is selected with the value set to Donation Layout.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rec_type_pl_assign.jpg) 11. Save your changes. 12. Repeat these steps for each of the other five record types. Use these values:
Record Type Enter these values
Grant
  • Record Type label: Grant
  • Record Type Name: Grant
  • Sales Process: Grant
  • Page Layout: Grant Layout
In-Kind Gift
  • Record Type label: In-Kind Gift
  • Record Type Name: InKindGift
  • Sales Process: In-Kind Gift
  • Page Layout: In-Kind Gift Layout
Major Gift
  • Record Type label: Major Gift
  • Record Type Name: MajorGift
  • Sales Process: Major Gift
  • Page Layout: Major Gift Layout
Matching Gift
  • Record Type label: Matching Gift
  • Record Type Name: MatchingGift
  • Sales Process: Donation
  • Page Layout: Matching Gift Layout
Membership
  • Record Type label: Membership
  • Record Type Name: Membership
  • Sales Process: Donation
  • Page Layout: Membership Layout
## Assign the Organization Record Type to Profiles NPSP installs two Account record types: Household Account and Organization. Household accounts are for individuals and families. Organization Accounts are for foundations that fund your work, other nonprofits that you partner with, corporations that sponsor your work, or companies that employ your donors and constituents. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The instructions in this section apply only to the [Household Account model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend."), which is the recommended Account model for NPSP. For information on other Account models, see [Legacy Account Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_account_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "An account model describes the relationship between Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities. The Household Account Model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the one we strongly recommend. This article contains information about two legacy account models: The 1-to-1 Account Model, and the Individual Account Model."). NPSP automatically uses the Household Account record type to create Accounts when a Contact is created (and the Account Name is left blank). Because NPSP creates Household Accounts automatically, we recommend that you don't include the Household Account record type assignment for all your profiles. That way, users won't accidentally create an empty Household Account when intending to add an Organization Account. Assign the Organization record type and set it as the default: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, then click **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile that you want to edit so that it can create Organization accounts. 3. Scroll to the Record Type Settings section, and next to Accounts, click **Edit**. ![The Record Type Settings section on a Profile, with the Edit link next to Accounts highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/edit_record_type.png) 4. Move Organization to Selected Record Types. 5. Select Organization as the Default Record Type. ![Editing the Account Record Type setting for a profile. Organization is in the Selected Record Types list and is selected as the Default record type.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/account_rt_org_default.png) 6. Save your changes. Repeat the above steps for every profile that you want to create Organization Accounts. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If your Profiles pages look different from the above example, it's because you're using the Enhanced Profile User Instance. ## Assign Page Layouts Maybe you already carefully tailored your page layouts to the way your users work, making sure the right fields are visible and grouped in a way that makes sense, and that all related information is easily accessible on each record. If so, congratulations! If not, take advantage of the NPSP custom page layouts. We designed them with typical nonprofit users in mind. You can customize them to meet your users' needs. You can assign different page layouts for different profiles. For example, you could assign a Contact layout with fields related to giving totals for your Fund Development team, but a different layout without those fields for the rest of your staff. You can also assign page layouts by record type. For example, you can assign a layout that includes the Number of Household Members field for the Household Account record type, but a different layout for the Organization Account record type. In this example, we’ll assign the Household Layout to the Household Account record type for all Profiles. 1. From Setup, click the Object Manager tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 5. Click **Edit Assignment**. 6. Click the Household Account record type column header to select all profiles under it. 7. In the Page Layout to Use field, select **Household Lightning Layout** or **Household Layout** (depending on how you installed NPSP). 8. Save your changes. Change the Page Layout Assignment for each object as described below: **Account:** **Opportunity:** | Record Type | Page Layout | | --- | --- | | Master | Organization Layout | | Household | Household Lightning Layout or Household Layout | | Organization | Organization Lightning Layout or Household Layout | **Campaign:** | Record Type | Page Layout | | --- | --- | | Master | NPSP Campaign Layout | | Default | NPSP Campaign Layout | | Record Type | Page Layout | | --- | --- | | Master | Donation Layout | | Donation | Donation Layout | | Grant | Grant Layout | | In-Kind Gift | In-Kind Gift Layout | | Major Gift | Major Gift Layout | | Matching Gift | Matching Gift Layout | | Membership | Membership Layout | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Even if you’re happy with the page layouts you’ve already customized, it would be worth a look at the NPSP layouts to see what fields, buttons, related lists, and other features may be useful. For example, many orgs appreciate the Household Mailing List button on the Campaign layout, and the Edit button on the Household Account layout. Spin up a Sandbox and see what the NPSP layouts have to offer. ## Restore the Standard New Button on the Opportunity Related List The New Account Donation button on the Opportunity related list of an Account record doesn't work correctly in Lightning Experience. We recommend that you remove this button and restore the standard New button on the related list. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You only need to complete this configuration task if your org uses the Lightning Experience user interface. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Organization Layout**. 5. Scroll to the Opportunities related list and click ![Related List Properties icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/lex_wrench-icon.png). 6. In the Buttons section, click ![Plus icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/lex_plus_icon.png) to expand the section. 7. Under Standard Buttons, select **New**. 8. Under Custom Buttons, move **New Account Donation** from Selected Buttons to Available Buttons. ![Buttons area of related list properties screen, with the standard New button selected and the custom New Account Donation moved to the Available Buttons list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/new_donation_button_on_related_list.png) 9. Save your changes. ## Override Lead Convert Button Even if your org isn't using Leads at this point, it's worth a few minutes to get the Lead Conversion page set up, so that you'll be ready to go if you decide to use Leads sometime down the road. If you’re not familiar with Leads, see [Why and How to Use Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization. Once you're confident the person is going to donate, volunteer, or engage with your organization in some way, convert that Lead to a Contact or Account."). The NPSP Lead conversion page lets you define how to map certain fields, and handles properly creating a Household Account under the right circumstances. For more information on how NPSP Lead Conversion works, see [Convert a Lead to a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_a_lead_to_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality to convert a Lead to a Contact."). Before you convert leads, override the Lead Conversion button so that it appears on the Lead conversion page. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Lead**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links and Actions**. 4. In the Convert row, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Select **Visualforce page**, and choose LD\_LeadConvertOverride \[npsp\_\_LD\_LeadConvertOverride\]. ![Override Properties window, with the LD\_LeadConvertOverride page selected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/override_lead_convert_vf_page.png) 6. Save your changes. ## Add or Edit a New Opportunity Button on Contacts You can add new Quick Actions on Contacts that let you create Opportunities directly from the Contact record. If you started using NPSP from a trial instance after November 15, 2016, you should have these buttons on Contacts. - New Donation - New In-Kind Gift - New Major Gift - New Membership If you don't have these buttons, we recommend that you create Quick Actions for each Opportunity record type and add them to your Contact page layout. ### Create an Opportunity Action Button Based on how you set up your Contact Opportunity Action buttons, all the data, such as the Opportunity Name and Close Date, is correctly populated for you. We'll show you how to create a New Donation action, similar to the one in the NPSP trial. To learn more about Quick Actions, see [Create Global Quick Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=creating_global_actions.htm). 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. Click **New Action**. 5. Complete the record: 1. For Action Type, select **Create a Record**. 2. For Target Object, select **Opportunity**. 3. For the Relationship Field, select the **Primary Contact** field. 4. Select the Record Type that will be automatically assigned for the Opportunity. In this case, we're creating an Action for the **Donation** record type. 5. The Standard Label Type determines how the Action will appear on a record. We recommend selecting **New \[Record Type\]**. For example, since we chose the Donation record type, the Contact record will have an action called New Donation. 6. Give the Action a name. This name isn't visible to users. 7. We recommend leaving **Create Feed Item** deselected. This setting creates a Chatter post for every new Opportunity created with the action. 8. Save your changes. 6. Next, choose the fields that will appear in the pop up when the button is pushed. Drag any field to the preview area to include it; click ![Delete icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/remove_field_minus_icon.png) to remove a field. Fields marked with a \* are required. Hover over the field and select the wrench icon, to set a field as **Read-only** or **Required**. ![New Major Gift Action screen showing fields available to display on the popup when the new Action button is clicked: Opportunity Name, Close Date, Stage, Amount, Gift Strategy, and Qualified Date.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/new_major_gift_ple.png) 7. Save your work. 8. Next, set up predefined values that automatically populate fields on the new Opportunity record that is created from the action. For each new Opportunity, we want to set the Close Date to today, the Stage to Closed Won, and the Opportunity Name to autopopulate using this format: "Jasmine Klein Donation 1/24/2020." This makes creating Opportunities so much faster. 1. In the Predefined Field Values section, click **New**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You can choose to automatically populate fields, even if they don't appear on the above layout. For example, automatically populate default values for required fields, so users don't have to enter values each time. 2. From the Field Name list, select the **Opportunity Name** field. This is the field you want to populate automatically. 3. In the **Formula Value** field, enter: `Contact.FirstName & " " & Contact.LastName & " Donation " & TEXT(MONTH(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(DAY(TODAY())) & "/" & TEXT(YEAR(TODAY()))` 4. Save your changes. 9. Next, create the predefined value for the Close Date field. 1. In the Predefined Field Values section, click **New**. 2. From the Field Name list, select **Close Date**. 3. In **Formula Value**, enter TODAY(). 4. Save your changes. 10. Last, we'll create the predefined value for the Stage field. 1. In the Predefined Field Values section, click **New**. 2. From the Field Name list, select **Stage**. 3. In the Specific Value field, select **Closed Won**. 4. Save your changes. Now that you created the new Action, make sure it appears by adding it to your Contact page layout. 1. In the Object Manager, make sure you're still viewing the Contact object, then click **Page Layouts**. 2. Click the name of your Contact layout. 3. In the left pane of the top panel, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 4. On the right side, you'll see the new Action(s) you created. Drag the Action(s) into the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. Be sure to put the actions in the order you want to see them in the UI. ![Adding the New Donation action to the Contact page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/add_action_to_pl.png) 5. Save your change. Don't forget to create an Action for each of the Opportunity record types (and add them to the page layout). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you added the new Action to the page layout, but still can't see it on a Contact record, check to make sure that your profile (and any other profile that needs to see the Action) has access to the **Primary Contact** field. You can view field access using the Object Manager in Setup. ![Field Access for the Primary Contact field. The Visible checkbox is selected for all profiles.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/create_opp_profile_access.png) ### Edit an Opportunity Action Button NPSP comes with a number of ready-to-go Actions on Contact and Account that let you quickly create Opportunities, such as Donations and Memberships, for each Opportunity record type. Edit these Actions to meet your organization's needs. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact** or **Account** 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. Click the label for the Action you wish to edit. 5. Click **Edit Layout**. 6. Add or remove fields in the layout editor. 7. Save your changes. 8. Back on the Action layout, scroll to the Predefined Field Values list. Click **Edit** to edit any existing predefined value. Click **New** to create a new predefined field. 9. Save your changes. ## Override Contact Delete Button The NPSP Contact Delete page alerts you if the Contact you're trying to delete is the only member of their Household. If so, you get the option of deleting that Household Account record along with the Contact, so that you don't have orphaned Households cluttering up your org. Override the Contact Delete button, so that the alert and options described above are available. 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Buttons, Links and Actions**. 4. In the Delete row, click ![More actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Select **Visualforce page** and choose CON\_DeleteContactOverride \[npsp\_\_CON\_DeleteContactOverride\]. ![Overriding the Contact Delete button with a Visualforce page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/override_contact_button.png) 6. Save your changes. ## Enable the Manage Household Button If you don't see the Manage Household button on your Household Account page, enable the button in Salesforce Setup. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Manage Household button is available only if you're using the [Household Account model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend."). If you're not sure which Account model is configured in your org, see [Which Account Model Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_account_model_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article explains how to identify your Account Model, and which fields to analyze when troubleshooting Household Account record issues.") To enable the button in Lightning Experience: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager**tab and click **Account** from the list of objects. 3. Click **Page Layouts** **.** 4. Click **Household Layout**. 5. Select **Mobile & Lightning Actions** from the palette. 6. Drag the **Manage Household** button from the palette to the “Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions” area of the Account Detail section. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The buttons you see in your org's Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions area may vary from what's shown here. ![Page Layout editor with Manage Household button being added to Mobile and Lightning Actions area](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_hh_button_add_to_page_layout.png) 7. Click **Save**. To enable the Manage Households button for Salesforce Classic: 1. On the **Manage Household** page layout for Account, select **Buttons** from the palette. 2. Drag the **Manage Household** button from the list of buttons to the Custom Buttons area. ![Page Layout editor with Manage Household button being added from Buttons list to Custom Buttons area.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/manage_hh_button_custom_button.png) 3. Click **Save**. ## Create Opportunity Contact Roles Opportunity Contact Role records link a person (Contact) to a donation (Opportunity), and show what role the person played in getting you the donation. Some typical roles are Donor, Soft Credit, Household Member, and Solicitor, but you can create whatever roles make sense for your organization. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Contact Roles, then click **Contact Roles on Opportunities**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Double check the Inactive Values list to ensure that these values don’t already exist in your org. If you find one, simply click **Activate**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the following Roles if they aren't already listed: - Donor - Household Member - Soft Credit - Matched Donor - Honoree - Notification Recipient - Grant Manager - Decision Maker - Influencer - Solicitor - Workplace Giving - Other 4. Save your changes. ## Configure Relationship Reciprocal Settings With NPSP, you can create Relationship records that show a connection between any two people. For example, you can track parent/child relationships, sibling relationships, mentor/mentee relationships, and more. For a detailed explanation of all the Relationship Settings, read [Manage Relationship Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior."). ### Configure Settings Here's where you create those Relationship Reciprocal records—the ones that tell NPSP what kind of reciprocal record to auto create whenever you create a relationship record. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Relationships**, then click **Relationship Reciprocal Settings**. 3. Click **New Reciprocal Relationship**. 4. Enter values for **Name** and Neutral, for example, Parent and Child. If you’re tracking your constituents' genders, either through a custom field on Contact or with salutations, include values for **Male** (like Son), **Female** (like Daughter), and **Neutral** (like Child). ![Defining a new relationship reciprocal setting where the Name value is Parent, and the Neutral value is Child.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/new_rel_recip_setting.png) 5. Click **Create Reciprocal Relationship**. Create any additional relationship types that would be useful for your organization. To get you started, here are the Reciprocal Relationship records that come with the NPSP trial. Choose from these or create your own. | **NAME** | **MALE** | **FEMALE** | **NEUTRAL** | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Aunt | Nephew | Niece | Sibling's Child | | Child | Father | Mother | Parent | | Cousin | Cousin | Cousin | Cousin | | Daughter | Father | Mother | Parent | | Employee | Employer | Employer | Employer | | Employer | Employee | Employee | Employee | | Father | Son | Daughter | Child | | Grandchild | Grandfather | Grandmother | Grandparent | | Granddaughter | Grandfather | Grandmother | Grandparent | | Grandfather | Grandson | Granddaughter | Grandchild | | Grandmother | Grandson | Granddaughter | Grandchild | | Grandparent | Grandson | Granddaughter | Grandchild | | Grandson | Grandfather | Grandmother | Grandparent | | Husband | Husband | Wife | Spouse | | Mother | Son | Daughter | Child | | Parent | Son | Daughter | Child | | Partner | Partner | Partner | Partner | | Son | Father | Mother | Parent | | Spouse | Spouse | Spouse | Spouse | | Uncle | Nephew | Niece | Sibling's Child | | Wife | Husband | Wife | Spouse | ### (Optional) Create a Custom Gender Field on Contact If you have a valid reason to track your constituent's gender, create a custom picklist field on the Contact object. Recommended picklist values: - Male - Female - Non-Binary - Prefer Not To Say To create your custom field: 1. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Under Data Type, select **Picklist**, then click **Next**. 6. Enter Gender as the Field Label. 7. Select **Enter values**, with each value separated by a new line. 8. For values, enter Male, Female, Non-Binary, Prefer Not To Say. 9. Click **Next**. 10. Select field-level security for each profile, then click **Next**. 11. Select the Contact page layouts that should include the new field, then click **Save**. 12. Now that the custom gender field is created, use the steps in the [Configure Relationship Reciprocal Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended.") section to configure the reciprocal relationship for it, so that it can be applied when you create relationships. For more information on gender and reciprocal relationship settings, read [Manage Relationships Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manage_relationships_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This administrator-level document explains Relationships settings and how they affect Relationship behavior."). ## Activate Workflow Rules NPSP comes with a handful of useful workflow rules to manage emails and phone numbers, and to automatically send acknowledgment emails. The workflow rules are inactive by default. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you activate the Opportunity Email Acknowledgment rule, it's a good idea to configure your email template and follow the other steps in [Set Up Email Acknowledgments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_acknowledge_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Salesforce to send donation acknowledgment emails automatically when you enter gifts in NPSP."). This will ensure you have a chance to craft personal content and add your organization's logo before those emails get sent out! 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Workflow Rules, then click **Workflow Rules**. 2. Click **Activate** next to each rule. We recommend activating all except `Contact.Preferred_Phone__c WithHousehold` . # Required Post-Installation Tasks After you install PMM, complete the required post-installation tasks. - **[Grant Access to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_postinstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've installed PMM, it's time to give users access. - **[Import Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_postinstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you installed PMM into an org without NPSP, you'll need to import your Contact data to PMM. ## Grant Access to Users After you've installed PMM, it's time to give users access. ### Assign the Program Management Standard User Profile In order for your program staff to see PMM page layouts, they need to have permissions. To make this easy for you, we created a user profile that contains these permissions. You don't have to use it, but need to make sure whatever profile you do use has the same permissions in it. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, then click **Users**. 3. Click **Edit** next to a user. 4. Select the Salesforce user license. 5. Select the **Program Management Standard User** profile. 6. Click **Save**. ### Assign Program Management Permission Sets PMM includes these permission sets: - PMM: Manage: Assign to people who set the direction of your programs and need to configure Programs, Services, Program Engagements, Program Cohorts, and Service Deliveries in your org. This includes Salesforce admins, program directors, and program managers. - PMM: Deliver: Assign to the front line staff, case managers, and service providers who deliver your programs and services. People with this permission can see but not modify Programs, Program Cohorts, and Services. They can create and modify Program Engagements and Service Deliveries to support their day-to-day work. - PMM: View: Assign to executive staff or others who need visibility into program performance and service delivery to clients, but don't actually provide these services. People with this permission can view but not modify PMM data. Assign these PMM permission sets based on how your users will use PMM. 1. Click ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-program_management_module-264-0-0-production-enus/443b48d5-82c1-45d8-a7f7-2c07521b8b28/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then click **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the name of a PMM permission set. 4. Click **Manage Assignments**. 5. Click **Add Assignments**. 6. Select the appropriate users, then click **Assign**. For more information, see [Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.pmm_configure_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assign Program Management Module permission sets to give users the right level of access and keep your data secure."). ## Import Your Data If you installed PMM into an org without NPSP, you'll need to import your Contact data to PMM. Importing data is a complex topic. You can use the Salesforce [Data Import Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=import_with_data_import_wizard.htm&type=5) or a third-party data import tool that you're familiar with. However, If you plan to import a lot of data, we suggest that you work with an implementation partner. Before you import your data: 1. Clean your existing client data to make sure it's accurate, up-to-date, and free of duplicates. 2. Make sure field names on your data match Salesforce field names. This will make data mapping easier. 3. Import a small batch of records as a test before you commit to importing a large batch of records. # Required Records for the Student Management App To work as intended, Student Management requires certain records. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create records used in Student Management: Education Cloud Full Access
Ensure that you have records for these objects. - Person Account - Course - Course Offering - Course Offering Participant - Course Offering Participant Result (if courses have outcomes) - Academic Year - Academic Term - Academic Term Enrollment. Academic Term Enrollment records must be active and contain an enrollment date. # Resolve Holds on Students Manage and resolve holds in each student's case. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To resolve holds: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Open a student's case that has a hold assignment. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Contacts**. 2. Click the student's account. 3. Go to Cases in the Related tab, and then select any case. 2. From the Restrictions tab, select a hold that you assigned to the student. 3. Update the task status to track the student's progress. 4. Resolve the hold. # Restrict Data for OFM Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_restrict_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Outbound Funds Module. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Outbound Funds Module. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A constituent has reported that the personal data you have on file for them is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, they want you to stop processing their data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the constituent’s data to retain it. Then, delete their data from Salesforce.

Work with your constituent to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get their approval to resume processing her data.
A constituent has stopped engaging with your organization and no longer needs their data. However, they asked that you keep their data because they’re involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data but does not want you to process the data. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

Export the constituent’s data to retain it. Then, delete their data from Salesforce. The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Restrict Data Processing for Admissions Connect Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Admissions Connect. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Admissions Connect. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Admissions Connect. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
An applicant or constituent has reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate. Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy. Export Data

Export the person’s data to retain it. Then, delete the data from Salesforce.

Work with the person to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.

Alternatively, if your org uses the Individual object, use HasOptedOutProcessing via the SOAP API to flag the person’s data.
# Restrict Data Processing for EDA Learn how to manage restrictions on data processing in EDA. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Education Data Architecture. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Education Data Architecture. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A constituent has reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the constituent’s data to retain it. Then, delete her data from Salesforce.

Work with your constituent to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.
A student has been suspended and the school no longer needs his data. However, he asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data but does not want you to process the data. Export Data Export the student’s data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.
# Restrict Data Processing for EFN In order to comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Salesforce.org applications. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Einstein for Nonprofits. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Einstein for Nonprofits. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-einstein_for_nonprofits-264-0-0-production-enus/291bfb05-3242-402a-92b6-b757730f100a/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5) # Restrict Data Processing for Grants Management Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Grants Management. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Grants Management. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Grants Management. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A grantee has reported that the personal data you have on file for them is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, they want you to stop processing their data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the grantee’s data to retain it. Then, delete their data from Salesforce.

Work with your grantee to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get their approval to resume processing her data.
A grant has been fully disbursed and closed, and your organization no longer needs a grantee’s data. However, they asked that you keep their data because they’re involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data but does not want you to process the data. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your client:

  • Contact

  • Tasks

  • Calendar events

  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Funding Program

  • Funding Request

  • Funding Request Role

  • Requirement

  • Disbursement

Export the grantee’s data to retain it. Then, delete their data from Salesforce. The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable, such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Restrict Data Processing for NPSP Find out more about how to restrict data processing. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for NPSP. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for NPSP. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A constituent reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the constituent's data to retain it. Then, delete her data from Salesforce.

Work with your constituent to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.
A donor has stopped all charitable giving. You no longer need the data but the donor has asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data, but requested you stop all processing of the data. Export Data

Export the donor's data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.

NOTE: In order to preserve donation history, consider assigning Opportunities to an anonymous or placeholder Account.
A constituent has requested that you keep his data on file but does not want you to profile him or analyze the data in any way. Export Data

Export the constituent's data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.
# Restrict Data Processing for Student Success Hub Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Student Success Hub. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Student Success Hub. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Student Success Hub. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A constituent has reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate. Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy. Export Data

Export the constituent’s data to retain it. Then, delete her data from Salesforce.

Work with your constituent to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.
A student has been suspended. He asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data but does not want you to process the data. Export Data Export the student’s data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.
# Restrict Data Processing for Volunteers for Salesforce Learn how to restrict or limit data access and processing in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Volunteers for Salesforce. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Volunteers for Salesforce. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider

A constituent reported that the personal data you have on file for her is inaccurate.

Because of those errors, she wants you to stop processing her data until you’ve verified the data’s accuracy.

 Export Data

Export the constituent’s data to retain it. Then, delete her data from Salesforce.

Work with your constituent to verify the data’s accuracy. Then, get her approval to resume processing her data.
A constituent has stopped volunteering with your organization. You no longer need the data but the volunteer has asked that you keep his data because he’s involved in a legal proceeding that might require the data, but requested you stop all processing of the data. Export Data

Export the volunteer’s data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.

NOTE: In order to preserve Volunteer Hours metrics, consider assigning Volunteer Hours to an anonymous or placeholder Contact record.

A constituent has requested that you keep his data on file but does not want you to profile him or analyze the data in any way. Export Data Export the constituent’s data to retain it. Then, delete his data from Salesforce.
# Restrict Data Processing in IP How to restrict data access to comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations. - **[Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Insights Platform. ## Restrict Data Processing To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Insights Platform. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around restrictions of data processing. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Restriction of Processing: Restrict How to Process Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Restrict Data Processing for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_sales.htm&type=5) - [Restrict Data Processing for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=restriction_of_processing_platform.htm&type=5) # Revenues and Expenses After the Accounting Subledger job runs, it generates debit and credit entries differently for revenues and expenses.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
When creating accounting sets, always verify the type—revenue or expense—with your accounting team. Just as the transactions related to revenue and expenses are different, so are the debits and credits that we generate from them. Let's look at a few transaction journal records as examples. ## Revenues If you select Revenue for an accounting set, a transaction of US$150 generates a debit of $150 to your asset account, and a credit of $150 to your revenue account. | Date | Description | Account Type | Debit | Credit | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 5/15/2021 | Donation | Asset | $150 | — | | 5/15/2021 | Donation | Revenue | — | $150 | | — | — | — | $150 | $150 | ## Expenses Conversely, if you select Expense for your accounting set, then that same transaction generates a credit of $150 to your asset account, and a debit of $150 to your expense account. | Date | Description | Account Type | Debit | Credit | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | 5/15/2021 | Donation | Asset | — | $150 | | 5/15/2021 | Donation | Expense | $150 | — | | — | — | — | $150 | $150 | We recommend that you don't change an existing accounting set's record type after you generate transaction journal records. Instead, inactivate the existing accounting set and create another set with the correct type. # Review and Report on Student Surveys Review the insights gleaned from your student sentiment survey. Survey results can help you make informed changes with measurable impact. When reviewing survey responses, you might find that some of your survey questions need to be adjusted. Make sure that you meet with your support staff before creating a new version of the survey. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note How you and your survey administrators review survey results depends on how you've implemented the survey. - **[Review Individual Survey Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you sent unique survey links, users with the Survey Creator permission can review individual survey responses. - **[Review All Results for a Survey](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save time by reviewing all responses that you received for a student survey. - **[Create and Review Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reports are also a great way to track and share survey data. ## Review Individual Survey Results If you sent unique survey links, users with the Survey Creator permission can review individual survey responses. 1. Open the student's Contact record. 2. In the Survey Invitations related list, click **View Responses** on the survey invitation. ## Review All Results for a Survey Save time by reviewing all responses that you received for a student survey. 1. From the app navigation menu, select **Surveys**. 2. Click the action menu for the survey whose results you want to review, and then select **Open Latest Version**. 3. Click **Analyze**. ## Create and Review Reports Reports are also a great way to track and share survey data. - [Create a custom report type](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=task_create_survey_custom_report_type.htm). If the Analyze page in Survey Builder doesn't give you the information that you need, you can create a custom report type for survey responses. - [Create a custom report type to view specific responses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=task_create_survey_custom_report_type_questions.htm). You can create a custom report type to analyze the responses for ranking, rating, scoring, slider, and Net Promoter Score® (NPS®) question types. You can then view the responses for these question types in custom reports and dashboards at the survey-invitation level or survey-version level. # Review Applications When you review an application, you make an admissions recommendation and leave supporting comments. Use a list view as your starting point, either for Applications or Application Reviews. You can use the default My Application Reviews list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. See [Work with a List View for Rapid Reviews, Queue Pickup, and More](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "List views are your starting point for application verifications and reviews. List views help you keep track of what needs to be verified or reviewed."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Your Admissions Connect administrator customizes the Application record page for your institution’s admissions process. Your page might look different than what’s described here. - **[Access Your Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend opening the application page to start your review. From here you can familiarize yourself with the application. - **[Get Oriented with the Review Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The three-part review page neatly organizes application materials for your review. - **[Assess the Status of Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Are you asking yourself “What do the icons in the navigation mean?” Here’s a cheat sheet of how the requirement statuses map to the icons. - **[Review PDFs—Focus, Rotate Pages, and More](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The PDF viewer includes tools to help your review go smoothly. You can focus (enlarge the document), rotate pages, skip to the first or last page in the document, zoom, and even see a document outline if there is one. Explore the toolbar to see what else you can do. - **[Submit Your Recommendation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your admissions recommendation and comments are saved automatically while you review the application. You can make comments and a preliminary recommendation without submitting. - **[Update the Review Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Back on the application page, update the Application Review Status based on your admissions process. - **[Considerations for Reviewing Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you submit your admissions recommendation, the Review End Date is automatically filled out. You can’t edit this date unless you have special permissions. ## Access Your Review We recommend opening the application page to start your review. From here you can familiarize yourself with the application. - At the top of the page, note the current status of the application review process. - Review the overall progress and status of application requirements from the Application Checklist. - Check out comments from your peers in the Feed tab. - See a list of other reviewers assigned to the application from the Reviewers tab. When you’re ready to begin your review, click **Start My Review** or **Continue Review** from the Reviewer Snapshot.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you’re not assigned to review an application, the Reviewer Snapshot looks different.  ![Reviewer Snapshot component showing the Start My Review button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_snapshot.png) ## Get Oriented with the Review Page The three-part review page neatly organizes application materials for your review. ![Application Review page showing an expanded navigation, a transcript, and pending review comments](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_three_panel.png)
Left Region—Navigation Middle Region—Main Viewer Right Region—Review

The navigation region lets you quickly see the overall progress.

Use the navigation tree, which is like a table of contents for all the requirements. Required items are noted with a red asterisk. Each item shows a status icon. Click any requirement to jump to it in the main viewer.  Or use the Tab key to enter the navigation tree and the arrow keys to move around within the tree.  

The main region shows the selected requirement within a single scrollable view—which means that you can review each requirement without clicking to advance. 

PDFs display in a built-in viewer with tools like focus, zoom, and page rotation.  

Applicant-provided data, like their birthdate or other questions they answered, appear in line with documents. 

The review region lets you enter your review feedback. Just like an email draft, all of your comments and selections are saved automatically. So take notes as you go. 

You might see custom review questions based on how your team has configured the app.

You can also view a list of other assigned reviewers from the Reviewers tab. 
## Assess the Status of Requirements Are you asking yourself “What do the icons in the navigation mean?” Here’s a cheat sheet of how the requirement statuses map to the icons. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Not sure what a requirement heading is? It's the name of the first-level entry in the navigation. For example, Transcripts is a heading created from an Action Plan. And Official Transcript and Unofficial Transcript appear underneath because they are Action Plan Items.
Icon Checklist Status Documents Data Requirement Heading
Not Started icon; a gray ring Not Started No file is attached. The status is set to the default value. None of the requirements in this area are started.
Pending icon; a blue circle with three white dots inside it Pending  A file is attached and the status is set to New or Pending. The status is a non-default value, but has not been marked as Completed yet. 

If at least one requirement is pending or has been rejected, the rollup heading is pending. 
Completed icon; a green circle with a white check mark inside it Completed A file is attached and the status set to Accepted. The status is Completed. All required requirements in this area are completed. 
Rejected icon; a dark blue circle with a white arrow that points to the left inside it Rejected A file is attached and the status is set to Rejected. Not applicable. Not applicable.
## Review PDFs—Focus, Rotate Pages, and More The PDF viewer includes tools to help your review go smoothly. You can focus (enlarge the document), rotate pages, skip to the first or last page in the document, zoom, and even see a document outline if there is one. Explore the toolbar to see what else you can do. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Keep in mind that these tools are available for PDF files only. ![Reviewer Application Reader component showing the PDF viewer with all the help menus opened](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_pdf_viewer.png) To see the Accept and Reject buttons, you need document verification permissions. These buttons let you verify documents without leaving the page. After a document is accepted or rejected, you see a View Record button. Use this button if you have to update the status again. ## Submit Your Recommendation Your admissions recommendation and comments are saved automatically while you review the application. You can make comments and a preliminary recommendation without submitting. When you’re ready to submit, click **Submit My Recommendation**.  ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Once you submit your recommendation, you can’t change it. You can read the application again, but you won’t be able to update your recommendation or comments.  ![Reviewer Feedback component showing a submitted recommendation with comments](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_feedback_component_submitted.png) ## Update the Review Status Back on the application page, update the Application Review Status based on your admissions process. ![Path component showing an update to the Reviewed status](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_page_review_complete_status_update.png) ## Considerations for Reviewing Applications When you submit your admissions recommendation, the Review End Date is automatically filled out. You can’t edit this date unless you have special permissions. Your Admissions Connect administrator configures the record actions for the application review page. These actions may include, Edit, Change Owner, and Delete. Some of these actions require special permissions. Talk to your admissions team about what action you can take on the review page. # Review Applications When an applicant submits an application to your institution, the person who processes applications checks that the applicant provided all of the required information. With all of the information in place, the application is ready for review.
User Permissions Needed  
To review applications:

Education Cloud Full Access

OR

Education Cloud Limited Access
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
To open an application for review, use either the Admissions Console or Reviewer Console as your starting point. From here, you'll find applications that are assigned to you and you can familiarize yourself with the application. See [Understand the Admissions and Reviewer Consoles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_understand_the_admissions_and_reviewer_consoles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Admissions and Reviewer Consoles give admissions officers and application reviewers a central place to focus on application reviews, see critical tasks, and take important next steps."). - **[Get Oriented with the Review Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The review page neatly organizes application materials for your review. - **[Assess the Status of Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The navigation section of the individual application has different icons based on the status of each requirement. - **[Review Documents and Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review items that an applicant submits to your institution, including transcripts, letters of recommendation, and more. - **[Submit Your Recommendation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make a recommendation for an individual application to admit or deny the applicant. - **[Considerations for Reviewing Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare your org and users for the application review process. ## Get Oriented with the Review Page The review page neatly organizes application materials for your review. ![Application Review page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_individual_application_2.png) - See the overall progress in the navigation region. Each item shows a status icon (1). - Click a requirement in the navigation region to see the requirement in a single scrollable view. PDFs display in a built-in viewer with tools like focus, zoom, and page rotation. Applicant-provided data, like their birthdate or other questions they answered, appear in line with documents (2). - See application reviews that are currently assigned to you (3). - Enter comments and submit your recommendation (4). See Also: - [Set Up the Reviewer Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_reviewer_console.htm&language=en_US) ## Assess the Status of Requirements The navigation section of the individual application has different icons based on the status of each requirement. Here's how the requirement statuses map to the icons. | Icon | Checklist Status | Item Is A File | Item Is Data | Requirement Heading | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | ![Ready for Processing icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/readyforprocessingicon.png) | Ready for Processing | A file is attached and the status is set to Not Verified. | The status is Not Verified, but hasn't been marked as Accepted, Rejected, or Waived yet. | If at least one requirement is pending, the rollup heading is pending. | | ![Completed icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/completedicon.png) | Completed | A file is attached and the status set to Accepted or Waived. | The status is Accepted or Waived | All requirements in this area are completed. | | ![Rejected icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/rejectedicon.png) | Rejected | A file is attached and the status is set to Rejected. | The status is set to Rejected. | Not applicable. | ## Review Documents and Data Review items that an applicant submits to your institution, including transcripts, letters of recommendation, and more. To open a document in a preview window, click the name of a checklist item and then click the preview image. After you review the document, close the preview window. Some information, such as test scores, don't open in a separate preview window. You review the information in the application record. ## Submit Your Recommendation Make a recommendation for an individual application to admit or deny the applicant. 1. From the Recruitment & Admissions app, open an individual application record. The Admissions: Review Application component displays the rubric configured for the selected application. 2. Select a rating for each criteria. 3. Click **Next**. The review score that's calculated by the ratings that you provided is shown. 4. Select an option for the application recommendation. - **Pending** - **Admit** - **Admit with Conditions** - **Deny** 5. In Comments, enter any other relevant information. 6. Click **Submit**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important After you submit your recommendation, you can no longer change it, and can only view its contents. ## Considerations for Reviewing Applications Prepare your org and users for the application review process. - When reviewers submit their admissions recommendation, the Review End Date is automatically entered. They can't edit this date unless they have special permissions. - The Salesforce administrator configures the record actions for the application review page. These actions include, Edit, Change Owner, and Delete. Some of these actions require special permissions. Talk to your admissions team about what action you can take on the review page. # Review How Students Experience the Portal (Support Staff) Understand what students can do in a Student Success Hub portal. Your school's portal is the online collaboration space where students go to connect with their success teams and get things done. Students can grab their smartphones and schedule appointments, access support resources, and stay current on their assigned Tasks. Here are some highlights of the student's experience in the portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember, every student portal is unique. Yours might look and function differently from what we show here. - **[Managing Appointments in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students can schedule individual appointments, reserve a spot in a group appointment, and manage their appointments in the portal. Here's an overview of their experience. - **[How Group Availability and Reservations Work in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Scheduling Wizard is smart. It tracks how full group appointments are, and shows or hides group availability accordingly. - **[Viewing Success Team Membership in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students can see who's on their success team so they know who to ask for help. - **[Managing Success Plans in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students can see a list of their assigned and published Success Plans on a page in the portal. The page looks a little different on a mobile device than on the desktop, but it offers similar functionality in both experiences. - **[Managing Assigned Tasks in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The ability to access Tasks in the portal helps students discern and act on their most important to-do items. - **[Viewing and Creating Program Plans in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your Student Success Hub administrator has set up Pathways, your students can view Program Plans to make sure they're on the path to graduation. Students see the details of a Program Plan in an easy-to-read summary. They can also create Personal Program Plans to map out how they'll complete a Program Plan. - **[Collaborating and Communicating in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support conversations don't have to be limited to scheduled appointments. Your student portal offers students an easy way to ask a quick question or follow up on an open issue from a past appointment. In this example, our student, Stephanie, gets back to academic counselor Adrian after thinking about a peer tutoring opportunity. ## Managing Appointments in the Portal Students can schedule individual appointments, reserve a spot in a group appointment, and manage their appointments in the portal. Here's an overview of their experience. Students can view lists of upcoming, past, and canceled appointments. They can join virtual meetings with the tap or click of a button. They can also add or edit comments about what they want to discuss at upcoming appointments. Students see their comments on Appointment Detail pages if those pages are published. You can see student comments in the Appointment Manager and, if your admin has configured it, on the Appointment Attendee page in the Student Success Hub app. Depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator has configured the portal, students might be able to click the appointment subject or topic to view the appointment details. They might also be able to see an Agenda tab with a list of their scheduled appointments, calendar events, and courses. Students can have different scheduling options depending on the type of appointment that they want and what your Student Success Hub admin has configured in the portal. Typically, these are the ways that students can schedule appointments. - While checking their upcoming and past appointments, students can schedule an appointment with someone on their success team or in a Support Pool, or reserve a spot in a group appointment. - While looking up information on a staff member's User profile page, students can schedule an individual appointment with that person or reserve a spot in a group appointment. - While looking up information about a support department that may not be represented on their success team, such as Career Services, students can schedule an appointment with someone in that Support Pool. ![The Schedule an Appointment button is available on multiple pages in the portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_portal_appointment_schedule_launch_options.png) Scheduling a one-on-one appointment in the portal is easy. The Scheduling Wizard guides students through the process, including selecting an appointment time that works for everyone. Students can also find and reserve spots in appointments that you've defined in Group availability blocks. ![From left to right, students select a person, topic, date, time, and appointment location in the Scheduling Wizard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_scheduling_wizard_multipanel.png) Here are a few things to know about how students schedule and manage appointments. - When scheduling an appointment, students first see a list of Recent or Assigned support staff members. The Recent tab shows up to five people with whom the student has met in the last six months. On the Assigned tab, students can either immediately filter the list by the topic that they want to discuss, or select someone and then select a topic and subtopic. After selecting the person, topic, and subtopic, they select a date and time and, finally, a location. - Students can also use the Search field to find any support staff member assigned to them: an individual member of their success team or someone on a case team (in an assigned Support Pool). Autocomplete helps students quickly find the person that they're looking for, even before they finish typing the name. Results show alphabetically by first name. - Students can schedule appointments only with support staff who have created availability blocks, and they can schedule appointments only on the topics that the staff member has defined in those blocks. They can't schedule appointments for times or topics that someone is unavailable. - Students can reschedule appointments only with staff members who are directly assigned to the relevant case record. To reschedule an appointment with a staff member who is not assigned to their case record, students can cancel the original appointment and schedule a new one instead of using the reschedule function. - Although students can see a staff member's walk-in availability, they can't actually schedule a walk-in appointment. They can drop by the person's office during walk-in availability hours, and you can [log the walk-in appointment from the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to schedule support appointments with students in Student Success Hub."). - If no one on a student's success team is available to meet about a topic and you're using unassigned Support Pools, then the student can schedule an appointment with individuals in the unassigned Support Pool by selecting the Teams tab on the first page of the wizard. - Students who are willing to meet with anyone from their predefined teams can select Anyone on this team, then select the topic, date, time, and location for the appointment. They can choose from all scheduled, walk-in, and group appointments for all predefined team members who have availability to meet about that topic. - Students can use the Back button to return to earlier steps and change their selections. A progress bar at the top of every page helps them see how many steps are left to schedule the appointment. - When selecting the appointment date and time, students see the staff member's availability for 30 days from the current or selected date. Dates and times show in chronological order. - When there are multiple locations, topics, availability types, and staff members, students can see and choose from all their options, and filter on specific ones. The Scheduling Wizard provides immediate confirmation of scheduled appointments. On the confirmation page, students can click a button to add comments or to go to a list of their upcoming appointments. Students also receive an email confirmation. In addition, when an appointment is scheduled, the staff member's calendar is updated and the staff member also receives an email (unless otherwise specified in the staff member's email notification preferences). Student Success Hub doesn't send email confirmations for walk-ins. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For scheduling accuracy, students' personal settings need to specify the correct time zone. Students can verify and change their time zone in the portal. From any page header, they can access their personal settings by going to **My Settings** in the menu under their User icon. ## How Group Availability and Reservations Work in the Portal The Scheduling Wizard is smart. It tracks how full group appointments are, and shows or hides group availability accordingly. If at least one spot is available, the Scheduling Wizard shows group appointment availability to all of your students. If your Attendee Limit is 10, for example, the appointment shows in the wizard until 10 students reserve a spot. When the appointment is full, it no longer appears, and no one else can sign up. When a student reschedules or cancels a reservation, the wizard allows another student to reserve the newly-opened spot. To ensure that students can't double-book a spot, after they make a reservation, they no longer see that appointment available in the wizard. Students see the Group Appointment badge, rather than the Scheduled Appointment badge, on all group appointment cards in the portal (including group appointments created by support staff). If all students reschedule or cancel their reservations, the last attendee to reschedule or cancel cancels the appointment itself. The Scheduling Wizard reflects the updated availability. Attendees can leave comments for group appointments just as they can for other appointments. In the Appointment Manager, the status for students who cancel a reservation shows as Declined. ## Viewing Success Team Membership in the Portal Students can see who's on their success team so they know who to ask for help. Students can interact directly with any success team member who is a User \[1\]. They can schedule an appointment with and post questions to success team member Users. Success team members who are Contacts \[2\] are viewable but only reachable offline, outside of the portal. Students can view their success team members in an alphabetical list or grouped by how they were assigned to the student—as individual members of the success team or as members of a predefined case team. The Success Team list can also be filtered by role to show success team members by type. ![Users and Contacts in the success team list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_portal_success_team_member_types.png) ## Managing Success Plans in the Portal Students can see a list of their assigned and published Success Plans on a page in the portal. The page looks a little different on a mobile device than on the desktop, but it offers similar functionality in both experiences. The Success Plans list is organized by type—Academic, Career, Health, and Housing, for example. Active, completed, and canceled Success Plans are all included. A filter button lets students hide or show closed (completed or canceled) Success Plans. Students can expand any section to see the Success Plans that need the most attention and, most importantly, take action! For any Success Plan, they can: - See how many Tasks remain, how many are overdue, and which Task needs to be completed next. - Click to view the details of the Success Plan or Task. - Mark a Task as complete. ## Managing Assigned Tasks in the Portal The ability to access Tasks in the portal helps students discern and act on their most important to-do items. When a success team member assigns a Task to a student, the next time the student logs in to the portal, they see a notification in the header that lets them know they have work to do. ![The Task notification icon and the Notifications list in the portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_portal_task_notification.png) Students simply click a notification to see Task details. Your Student Success Hub administrator has likely also set up a way for students to see the Tasks that are assigned to them in a Success Plan, organized by priority and due date. Students may also be able to see their Success Plan Tasks interspersed with one-off Tasks. ## Viewing and Creating Program Plans in the Portal If your Student Success Hub administrator has set up Pathways, your students can view Program Plans to make sure they're on the path to graduation. Students see the details of a Program Plan in an easy-to-read summary. They can also create Personal Program Plans to map out how they'll complete a Program Plan. Students go to the My Programs page to see a list of all their Program Enrollments. ![Program Enrollments related list in the portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_my_programs_page.png) From there, they can click a Program Plan to view its details. ![Program Enrollment record page in the portal with a callout on the Program Plan field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_details.png) ![Program Plan record in the portal showing the Program Plan component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_details_list.png) They can also view all Program Plans from the Program Plans page. ![Program Plan related list in the portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_all_programs.png) To create their own Personal Program Plan, they can go to the Plan Builder tab. From here they can create plans with terms and courses to plot their path to complete the program. Students can even create multiple plans—like one with a summer term and one without. ![Program Plan Builder in the portal](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_personal_program_plan_sample.png) ## Collaborating and Communicating in the Portal Support conversations don't have to be limited to scheduled appointments. Your student portal offers students an easy way to ask a quick question or follow up on an open issue from a past appointment. In this example, our student, Stephanie, gets back to academic counselor Adrian after thinking about a peer tutoring opportunity. Stephanie posts on the appointment where she and Adrian discussed the topic. After she shares the post, Adrian gets notified in Student Success Hub and via email. He makes additional notes or schedules follow-ups as needed. ![Notification of student's post](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_notification_advisee_chatter_post.png) # Review Picklist Values for Education Cloud Fields To function properly and give your users a consistent experience, Education Cloud requires picklist values on certain fields.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Review Academic Level Picklist Values Use picklist values that work best for your institution. Some common values are included with Education Cloud, but you can add or remove values as needed for your institution. Review the picklist values for the Academic Level field on these objects: - Learning - Learning Course - Learning Program - Learning Achievement - Learner Profile ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Enter the same values consistently for these objects, as the values appear in several places within the learner portal. ## Review Application Category Picklist Values Review the picklist values for the Application Category field on the Preliminary Application Reference and Individual Application objects. Use picklist values that work best for your institution. Some common values are included with Education Cloud, but you can add or remove values as needed for your institution. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Enter the same values consistently for these objects, as they are used by student application records to properly set the final decision dates. ## Fields With Uneditable Picklists Some objects have picklist fields that you can't view or modify the picklist values.
Object Fields
Application Timeline Type
Course Offering Participant Result Participant Result Status
Employee Worker Type
Learning Type
Location Timezone
Person Disability

  • Status

  • Verified By
Person Education

  • Status

  • Verification Status
Preliminary Application Reference Application Type
Program Usage Type
Service Territory Member Territory Type
Work Type Group Group Type
- [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5) ## Review Participation Status Picklist Values Review the picklist values for the Participation Status field on the Course Offering Participant object. The Participation Status field is a dynamic picklist, which means that you create the values. For course registration, degree planning, and GPA calculation to work as designed, use these values. For reference, the table includes the corresponding API values that are used in each feature. | Picklist Value | API Mapping | | --- | --- | | Audit | ENROLLED | | Completed | COMPLETED | | Declined Waitlist | OTHER | | Dropped | DROPPED | | Enrolled | ENROLLED | | Facilitating | OTHER | | Failed | COMPLETED | | In Cart | IN\_CART | | On Hold | IN\_CART | | Transfer Credit | COMPLETED | | Waitlisted | WAITLISTED | | Withdrew | WITHDREW | See Also: - [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5) - [Set Up Course Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To streamline students' course registration on your Experience Cloud site, turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign the appropriate permission sets.") - [Org Setup for Intelligent Degree Planner](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org_for_intelligent_degree_planner.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To give your learners the best intelligent degree planning experience, consider the planner’s behavior when modeling your data, create a learner pathway global action, and configure sharing to suit the planner. You can also create learner pathway templates, or you can let your learners plan their pathways from scratch.") - [Academic Score Calculations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_academic_score_calculations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Calculate academic scores, such as term GPA, for students enrolled in an academic term by using configurable policy rules. Admins define the calculation logic once, and Education Cloud applies it to every enrollment in the term in a batch.") # Roles in the Documentation The Grants Management documentation is designed to guide admins through the basic setup of Grants Management. Following this documentation, you should have a functional portal for your grantseekers to visit, and your internal users will be able to perform grantmaking tasks, such as reviewing Funding Requests, inviting a grantseeker to apply, and managing milestones through Requirements.​ To help guide you through using Grants Management, we have developed terminology to help orient you and make set up a breeze. | Role | Description | | --- | --- | | Admin | Admin is short for Salesforce administrator, a person in your organization who configures and customizes Salesforce, including Grants Management. An admin sets up a Grants Management site and grants permissions to users. | | Grantmaker | A person in your organization who performs grantmaking duties, such as reviewing Funding Requests and setting up Disbursements. This is a general term for internal Grants Management users, although they may have different titles in your organization. | | Grantseeker | A person outside of your organization who is seeking funding from your organization. They may visit your portal and apply to Funding Programs directly, or a grantmaker may invite them to apply for a Funding Program. | | Grantee | A person outside of your organization who is awarded funding from your organization as the result of a Funding Request made in your portal. | # Rollups Overview Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically "roll up" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records. For example, the Total Gifts field on an Organization Account displays the total value of all the donations from that organization—it's the total value from across all the associated Opportunity records “rolled up” into one. There are multiple types of rollups available to Nonprofit Success Pack users. This can be confusing if you're trying to figure out what you're already using, what you can (or should) use, and how they all compare. But, before we get into what each one does, let's look at the history. Original Salesforce standard roll-up summary fields were created to work with [master-detail relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=overview_of_custom_object_relationships.htm), and therefore when rolling up Opportunity records, only work with Accounts. But that doesn't make sense for nonprofits, who need to track donors and donations, and need their rollups to be based on Contact information. Seeking to solve this problem for NPSP users, the NPSP team created a collection of out-of-box rollups. There are approximately 87 out-of-box rollups that appear on the Account, Contact, Recurring Donation, and General Accounting Units objects and roll up data related to Opportunity Amount and Close Date. NPSP users loved these rollups, but also wanted to be able to see more rollup information_._ So, the NPSP team thought “Why not let users define their own rollups?” Enter User Defined Rollups (UDR), a feature that allowed users to create rollups that work with custom fields. That solved everything, right? Well, as many of you know, the story doesn't end there! User Defined Rollups, which filled some of the users' needs that out-of-box rollups could not, left users wanting more. Users didn't want to be so limited in choosing what to roll up and what rollup types were available, and while many clever admins found ways to use UDR in combination with formula fields to cover more use cases than we had ever envisioned, they found the process time consuming and complicated. The NPSP team went back to the drawing board once more. After many long months of reviewing Community feature requests, strategizing, prototyping, revising, and coding... Customizable Rollups was born. Customizable Rollups provides the flexibility and functionality that users have long been asking for (and you can roll up Payments!). Read on to find out more. ## Customizable Rollups With Customizable Rollups, you have complete control and flexibility over the donor statistics your organization needs. You can create highly customized rollups that roll up either data from Opportunities, Payments, or Soft Credits (including Partial Soft Credits). (Yes, you read that right!) You can create custom donation rollup fields on Accounts, Contacts, General Allocation Units, or Recurring Donations and you can also edit the definition of legacy out-of-box rollups. We also provide the ability to edit which records are filtered out, just like in reports! You can even create your own filters and apply them to individual rollups. And with Customizable Rollups enabled, NPSP is compatible with Advanced Currency Management, which means your donor statistics can reflect changes in currency value over time. With legacy User Defined Rollups, you could take the largest gift and only copy that amount to your Target field. But, with Customizable Rollups, you can select the largest gift, and copy any field from that gift to your Target field. So for example, let's say you want to know what Campaign brought in the largest gift for an Account or Contact. You can create a rollup that finds the largest gift, and copies the Campaign from that Opportunity to your Target field. You can even create a lookup field directly to that gift or that Campaign! Customizable Rollups are available as part of NPSP when using the Household Account Model. They are enabled by default for all new NPSP Trials starting with version 3.155 (May 2019); all other orgs have to turn the feature on. And when you do, all existing out-of-box and User Defined Rollups are converted into Customizable Rollups so that you can edit and enhance them as needed. Note that if you have User Defined Rollups for the Household object in your organization, and you enable Customizable Rollups, those Household UDRs won't be be converted. For more information on Customizable Rollups, see the [Customizable Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm). ## NPSP Legacy Rollups NPSP includes approximately 87 out-of-box rollups. With these "donor statistic" rollups you can get a big picture view of a donor's history just by looking at their Contact record (instead of having to peruse actual donation history that is spread out over many related objects). For more information on legacy out-of-box rollups, see [NPSP Out-of-Box Donation Rollups (Legacy)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_opp_donation_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In the Nonprofit Success Pack, rollups are tallies of donations from different Opportunity records."). ## NPSP Legacy User Defined Rollups With User Defined Rollups, you can create new rollups on Accounts, Contacts, or Households (for those still using the One-to-One or Individual Bucket model). For more information, see [User Defined Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the basics of legacy user defined rollups. Create a user defined rollup and use formula fields to include or exclude fields in your rollups calculations."). # Run a Health Check in Your Org Health Check looks through your org for both data and configuration inconsistencies or errors and reports back the type of error along with a description. To run Health Check: 1. Click the App Launcher (![App launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), then click **Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP)**. 2. In the navigation bar, click **NPSP Settings**. 3. On the NPSP Settings page, click **System Tools**, then click **Health Check**. 4. Click **Run Health Check**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You have the option to Disable Record Data Health Checks when you run Health Check. If selected, Health Check only checks your NPSP configuration settings for problems. Select this option if your organization has a large volume of records and Health Check is having problems completing. For troubleshooting help, check out this list of [Common Health Check Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_common_health_check_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about errors you can encounter when you run a health check on your NPSP org."). # Run Accounting Subledger Jobs Configure and run Accounting Subledger jobs to generate transaction journal records. Choose which source records to process based on their ​​record date or record type. When the job runs, monitor its execution and identify errors in the Data Manager app or on the Monitor Workflow Services page in Setup. Specify when to run the Accounting Subledger job by using Flow Builder, or run it manually with the Subledger Job flow. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license is enabled, and where at least one active user has the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only users with the Manage Accounting Subledger or Run Accounting Subledger Job permission set can access this feature. See Also: - [Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_jobs.htm) # Run Accounting Subledger Jobs Manually Generate transaction journal records on-demand by running the Subledger Job flow.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To run Accounting Subledger jobs: | Run Accounting Subledger Job | Running the Accounting Subledger job manually can be especially useful to test a configuration change. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Run Subledger Job**. 3. Click **Run**. # Run the Data Processing Engine Definitions Run the Data Processing Engine definitions sequentially to migrate your data. After each run, confirm the accuracy of the migrated data before you proceed to run the next definition. To start migrating your data, run the Data Processing Engine definition EDA\_to\_EdCloud\_IntOrg\_CoreObjects\_UserRole\_Domain00\_DPE01. If the run is successful, validate the data, and then proceed to run the next definition. We recommend that you use the guided flow to run the Data Processing Engine definitions in the correct sequence. If you run the definitions in the wrong order, you might encounter errors or failed runs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - Running a definition again overwrites the migrated data. - Some definitions require a Var\_User field to run. Enter the User ID of the default owner of the records. - Ensure that the writeback user in the writeback node of the Data Processing Engine is the administrator. Alternatively, you can leave this field empty. Use Monitor Workflows Services during each Data Processing Engine definition run to check the run status. SEE ALSO: - [Run a Data Processing Engine Definition from the Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.task_definition_run_builder.htm&type=5) - [Monitor Your Data Processing Engine Definition Runs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.reference_data_processing_engine_monitor.htm&type=5) # Run the Data Processing Engine Definitions Run the Data Processing Engine definitions for each cluster sequentially to migrate your data. After each run, confirm the accuracy of the migrated data before you proceed to the next cluster. To start migrating your data, run the Data Processing Engine definition for cluster 1 of domain 1. If the run is successful, validate the data, and then proceed to run the definition for the next cluster. We recommend that you use the guided flow to run the Data Processing Engine definitions in the correct sequence. If you run the definitions in the wrong sequence, you might encounter errors or failed runs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Running a definition again overwrites the migrated data. Use Monitor Workflows Services during each Data Processing Engine definition run to check the run status. SEE ALSO: - [Run a Data Processing Engine Definition from the Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.task_definition_run_builder.htm&type=5) - [Monitor Your Data Processing Engine Definition Runs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.reference_data_processing_engine_monitor.htm&type=5) # Salesforce Configuration Basics for EDA Show new custom objects, create custom picklist values, add a lookup field, and use related lists and clone layouts to preserve your changes for EDA. ## Show a New Custom Object After a Product Release When we release new objects, they're not automatically displayed in your existing org, as not all objects are relevant to every role in the org. To make sure users see only the necessary objects, you can update object and security permissions for the profiles you assign. You can also control the visibility of these objects in your org by adding them to the App Launcher and the navigation bar. See Also: - [Object Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.users_profiles_object_perms.htm&type=5) - [Configure Object and Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=commerce.om_configure_object_level_security.htm&type=5) - [Personalize the Navigation Bar in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.user_userdisplay_tabs_lex.htm&type=5) - [App Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.identity_app_launcher.htm&type=5) - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5) ## Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values Customize fields and picklist values in EDA to meet the needs of your school. You can add another option to an existing field or create a custom field to capture some additional information. For example, you might want to track personal email on the Preferred Email field or alternate phone on the Preferred Phone field. To do this, create a custom email or phone field and add it as an option to the Preferred Email or Preferred Phone picklist. To use an existing but not preconfigured field as a picklist value for Preferred Email or Preferred Phone (for example, Assistant Phone), add the existing field label as a picklist option. See Also: - [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.updating_picklists.htm&type=5) - [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5) ## Create and Update Layouts If you want to add a field that's not in the palette to a page layout, create a lookup relationship. By using a lookup relationship, the object can "look up" to a field on a related object. For example, to add a Language field to the course offering page layout so that you can view the language a course is taught in, create a lookup to the language object. Then you can include the related object's fields to your page layout. Also, to include elements of an object, you must customize search layouts and compact layouts for selected objects. See Also: - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5) - [Customize Search Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ai.customizing_search_layouts.htm&type=5) - [Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.compact_layout_overview.htm&type=5) ## Use Related Lists to Show Related Records A CRM shows all related information for a record in one place through related lists. For example, from a student contact's detail page, you can see the related program enrollments, course connections, relationships, attributes, and the many other details that tell the student's story. The location of these lists, either on the Related tab or in the sidebar, depends on your org's settings. Technically, items in a related list are records with a lookup or master-detail relationship to another record. A related list is just a section of a record detail page that lists all the items related to that record. When viewing a related list, you see only the related records you have permission to see. And if you have permission to create a new record from within a related list, you can do that without ever leaving the contact detail page. See Also: - [Work with Related Lists on Records in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.basics_understanding_related_lists_lex.htm&type=5) ## Clone Compact Layouts to Preserve Your Changes (EDA) To safeguard your customizations against automatic updates, create a copy of packaged compact layouts. Unlike regular page layouts, packaged compact layouts in products such as NPSP and EDA receive push upgrades that can overwrite your compact layout. Use a cloned compact layout to protect your customizations. 1. Clone the packaged compact layout. 2. Change the cloned layout to include your custom fields. 3. Set the cloned version as the primary compact layout. See Also: - [Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.compact_layout_overview.htm&type=5) # Salesforce for Education Spring '23 Release Notes Salesforce for Education Spring '23 Release Notes - **[Accounting Subledger Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Spring ’23 brings a fresh start for Accounting Subledger, as it’s now built on the Salesforce platform, and designed to work with any Salesforce product. The next-generation Accounting Subledger draws the power of Salesforce to consolidate data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system. This consolidation helps you manage your accounting department and understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated, with unparalleled performance. - **[Admissions Connect Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.admissions_connect_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Admissions Connect (version 1.18) in Spring '23. - **[Data Mover Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_mover_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Data Mover (version 1.3.0.1) in Spring '23. - **[Education Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_cloud_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Spring ‘23 brings you the next-generation CRM for education. Education Cloud draws on the power of Salesforce to connect insights across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners—from prospective student to engaged alum. With Salesforce at the center of your institution's information technology solution, important tasks can be completed in less time, at scale, and in collaboration between departments. Create an Experience Cloud site to be your institution's learner portal where students start their higher education journey. From this site, prospective students can request information, schedule appointments, and apply to your institution. After a student submits their application, your admissions staff can verify, review, and decide on the application in the individual application record. - **[Education Data Architecture Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Education Data Architecture (version 1.121) in Spring '23. - **[Student Success Hub Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.student_success_hub_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.63) in Spring '23. # Salesforce for Education Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what’s new in Salesforce for Education in Summer '22. - **[Admissions Connect Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ac_admissions_connect_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in in Admissions Connect (version 1.17) in Summer '22. - **[Accounting Subledger Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_asl_accounting_subledger_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Accounting Subledger and Accounting Subledger for Industries (version 1.40 & version 1.7.0.1) in Summer '22. - **[Education Data Architecture Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_eda_education_data_architecture_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Education Data Architecture (version 1.120) in Summer '22. - **[Student Success Hub Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. # Salesforce for Education Summer '23 Release Notes In Summer '23 Release, we expand Education Cloud's capabilities to add more features for managing student success and streamline your processes further. We also updated Accounting Subledger to support custom field mappings and job filtering based on criteria. - **[Accounting Subledger Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.accounting_subledger_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Bring all your financial data to Accounting Subledger, including the data stored in custom fields. Choose what to process to generate relevant transaction journal records in a format that's ready to use for your Accounting teams. - **[Education Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_cloud_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Summer '23 expands Education Cloud to include features that support student success and streamline your institution's admissions processes for your staff and learners. Save time on manual tasks with automatic success team assignments and program management. Follow your learners' journey with a unified record view and dedicated director and advisor consoles. Cultivate your learners' success by tracking any roadblocks they encounter with care plans and alerts. Increase student engagement with new mobile-ready Student Success portal components, which give enrolled students access to all relevant information such as their advisors' drop-in availability. And with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education, connect more efficiently with your learners by using out-of-the box email templates. # Salesforce for Education Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's new in Salesforce for Education in Winter '23. - **[Data Mover Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_mover_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Data Mover (version 1.2.0.1) in Winter '23. - **[Student Success Hub Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.student_success_hub_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.62) in Winter '23. # Salesforce for Education Winter '24 Release Notes In Winter '24 Release, we expand Education Cloud's capabilities to add more features for managing student success and streamline your processes further. We also updated Accounting Subledger to support custom field mappings and job filtering based on criteria. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting with Spring '24, Salesforce for Education and Salesforce for Nonprofits release notes will be included in the main release notes. See [Salesforce Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.salesforce_release_notes.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[Education Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_cloud_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support alumni engagement, manage fundraising development activities and processes, strengthen course and learning program management, and give applicants an enhanced application process. Follow your alumni's user journey with a unified record view and a dedicated alumni relations console. Keep alumni engaged and connected with each other and with your institution by using new Alumni Relations portal components to create an alumni directory. Use Fundraising features to track opportunities, manage campaigns, and coordinate fundraising activities. Maintain your course catalog and easily build learning programs by using the intuitive and flexible Learning Program Plan Builder. - **[Data Mover Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_mover_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support and updates for Data Mover are scheduled to end in all Salesforce orgs as of Winter '24. You can continue to use Data Mover after Winter '24; however, we recommend that you use an alternative tool, such as Data Processing Engine, going forward. # Salesforce for Nonprofits Spring '23 Release Notes Salesforce for Nonprofits Spring '23 Release Notes - **[Case Management Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_package_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Case Management (version 1.34) in Spring '23. - **[Elevate Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Elevate-NPSP Connector (version 1.30) and Elevate in Spring '23. - **[Grants Management Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.grants_management_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Grants Management (version 1.23) in Spring '23. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_note_242s.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.6) in Spring '23. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes for Spring '23](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The new Nonprofit Cloud harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to Salesforce's full portfolio of innovative products and services. - **[Nonprofit Success Pack Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.225) in Spring '23. - **[Program Management Module Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.program_management_module_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Program Management Module (version 1.31) in Spring '23. # Salesforce for Nonprofits Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's new in Salesforce for Nonprofits in Summer '22. - **[Case Management Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_cm_case_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's Case Management (version 1.32) in Summer '22. - **[Data Integrity Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ip_data_integrity_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Summer '22. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_efn_einstein_for_nonprofits_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Summer '22. - **[Elevate Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_el_elevate_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Elevate, Elevate Payments API, and Elevate-NPSP Connector, in Summer ‘22. - **[Grants Management Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_gm_grants_management_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Grants Management (version 1.21) in Summer '22. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_mcngo_marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.4) in Summer '22. - **[Nonprofit Success Pack Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_npsp_nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in NPSP (version 3.220) in Summer ‘22. - **[Program Management Module Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_pmm_program_management_module_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Program Management Module (version 1.29) in Summer '22. # Salesforce for Nonprofits Summer '23 Release Notes In Summer '23 Release, we are growing our Nonprofit Cloud Salesforce platform presence with enhancements to the Program Management and Case Management features. These enhancements include the ability to add Dynamic Assessments to the Account and Contact objects, easier referral intake guided flow setup, simplified care plan template preview and visibility, new benefit guided flows, adding Action Plans and field level security, better program and benefit tracking, and giving you the ability to customize the benefit schedule workflow. We also updated Program Management Module and Nonprofit Case Management to help you find information faster. Elevate is now set to convert Google Universal Analytics to Google Analytics 4 and can help speed up your data exports by exporting multiple files and letting you set date ranges. - **[Case Management (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_mp_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find and complete information faster in Case Management (version 1.34) in Summer '23. Limit program engagements and services options to show only active ones on the bulk service deliveries page. Find program cohorts, program engagements, and services easier by scanning through alphabetized lists. - **[Elevate Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Convert Google Universal Analytics to Google Analytics 4. Set a date range for your payments and recurring donations export. Find these enhancements in Elevate in Summer '23. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Cloud now harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to the full portfolio of innovative Salesforce products and services. - **[Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_244_rn_grantmaking.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Introducing Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking! Manage the whole lifecycle of the grants you give to stakeholders. Add details about the opportunities people or organizations can apply for. Provide an easy way to enter details of a budget down to the values for each category and period. Capture all of the information related to a grant application. Track the requirements after a grant's awarded. Provide a Grantmaking Experience Cloud site for your grant managers, applicants, and external reviewers to enter details directly in your grant records. Plus, use Nonprofit Cloud features to manage other aspects of your organization. - **[Program Management Module Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.program_management_module_release_notes_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find and complete information faster in Program Management Module (version 1.32) in Summer '23. Limit program engagements and services options to show only active ones on the bulk service deliveries page. Find program cohorts, program engagements, and services easier by scanning through alphabetized lists. # Salesforce for Nonprofits Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's new in Salesforce for Nonprofits in Winter '23. - **[Case Management Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Case Management (version 1.33) in Winter '23. - **[Data Integrity Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.data_integrity_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Data Integrity (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - **[Einstein for Nonprofits Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.einstein_for_nonprofits_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Einstein for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. - **[Elevate Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Elevate in Winter '23. - **[Grants Management Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.grants_management_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Grants Management (version 1.22) in Winter '23. - **[Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.marketing_cloud_for_nonprofits_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Nonprofits (version 1.5) in Winter '23. - **[Nonprofit Success Pack Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Nonprofit Success Pack (version 3.223) in Winter '23. - **[Outbound Funds Module Release Note](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.outbound_funds_module_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Outbound Funds Module (version 1.27) in Winter '23. - **[Program Management Module Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.program_management_module_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Program Management Module (version 1.30) in Winter '23. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteers_for_salesforce_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's in Volunteers for Salesforce (version 3.122) in Winter ‘23. # Salesforce for Nonprofits Winter '24 Release Notes In Winter '24 Release, we're introducing Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising and Outcome Management. In addition, we're adding enhancements to the Grantmaking, Case Management, and Program Management features and improving accessibility with better color contrast in our managed packages. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting with Spring '24, Salesforce for Education and Salesforce for Nonprofits release notes will be included in the main release notes. See [Salesforce Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.salesforce_release_notes.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[Nonprofit Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud_release_notes_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Cloud now harnesses the power of the Salesforce Platform. By building on the platform, Nonprofit Cloud provides faster, easier access to the full portfolio of innovative Salesforce products and services. - **[Case Management (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.case_management_mp_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Case Management pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. - **[Elevate Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.elevate_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce is retiring the Elevate family of products. This affects Elevate Advanced Edition, Elevate Power of Us Editions, and all Add-ons. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on October 1, 2023, and we anticipate that the product will be deactivated on or after October 1, 2024. - **[foundationConnect Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_fc_release_notes_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. - **[Grants Management (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.grants_management_mp_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grants Management pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. - **[Nonprofit Success Pack (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_mp_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is now more secure than ever thanks to several small updates. In addition, the GitHub release notes now direct users to the Salesforce release notes. And the French translation of "Ms." now aligns with the standard French abbreviation. - **[Outbound Funds Module (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.outbound_funds_mp_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Outbound Funds pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. - **[Volunteers for Salesforce (Managed Package) Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteers_for_salesforce_mp_release_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. # Salesforce Fundamentals for NPSP Learn about the various ways to get help learning and using NPSP. - **[Get Started: Salesforce Fundamentals for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For nonprofits with limited resources, figuring out how to get started with the powerful Salesforce platform can feel overwhelming. But don't worry! We're here to help. - **[Fundamentals for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are so many ways to learn about Salesforce. How you approach it depends on your learning style and preferences. Want to learn online on your own time? Try Trailhead. Want to read through detailed documentation, get one-on-one assistance, or talk to your peers? We've got you covered on all fronts! We have an amazing collection of resources below designed to help you get started & be successful with Salesforce. - **[Trailhead](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Trailhead is the free, interactive and fun way to learn Salesforce. Learning paths called "trails" take you through the building blocks of the Salesforce platform. Start with these trails designed specifically to teach you how to use Nonprofit Success Pack at your nonprofit. - **[Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Knowledge base is a great place learn about the Nonprofit Success Pack and Salesforce. Learn about a few key articles to help deepen your understanding the NPSP product and how to use it. - **[Get One-on-One Assistance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Know who to reach out to for all your questions about Salesforce and Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Talk to Your Peers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes the best way to learn is by talking to people who "get you." We highly recommend joining the Getting Started group in the Trailblazer Community. For people who are new to Salesforce, this is the best place to search for answers and ask questions. - **[Attend an Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep an eye on the Customer Success calendar to stay in the loop on the latest events and webinars. You can filter by region and time zone and find events that work for you. - **[Get Official Salesforce Training](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_salesforce_fundamentals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you know that the only way you'll learn Salesforce is by sitting in a classroom and having a teacher check your work, don't worry -- we've got resources for you! There are a lot of training and certification options. ## Get Started: Salesforce Fundamentals for Nonprofits For nonprofits with limited resources, figuring out how to get started with the powerful Salesforce platform can feel overwhelming. But don't worry! We're here to help. ## Fundamentals for Nonprofits There are so many ways to learn about Salesforce. How you approach it depends on your learning style and preferences. Want to learn online on your own time? Try Trailhead. Want to read through detailed documentation, get one-on-one assistance, or talk to your peers? We've got you covered on all fronts! We have an amazing collection of resources below designed to help you get started & be successful with Salesforce. ## Trailhead Trailhead is the free, interactive and fun way to learn Salesforce. Learning paths called "trails" take you through the building blocks of the Salesforce platform. Start with these trails designed specifically to teach you how to use Nonprofit Success Pack at your nonprofit. [_Trailhead:_ Explore Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/explore-nonprofit-success-pack) [_Trailhead:_ Fundraise with Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/fundraise-with-nonprofit-success-pack-npsp) [_Trailhead:_ Manage Programs with Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/manage-programs-with-nonprofit-cloud) [_Trailhead:_ Engage Constituents with Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/engage-constituents-with-nonprofit-cloud) [_Trailhead:_ Administer the Nonprofit Success Pack](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/trails/nonprofit_fundraising) ## Documentation The Knowledge base is a great place learn about the Nonprofit Success Pack and Salesforce. Learn about a few key articles to help deepen your understanding the NPSP product and how to use it. - [Nonprofit Success Pack Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_success_pack.htm) - [How the Import Process Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_how_process_works.htm) - [Which Version of NPSP Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm) If you're interested in other topics, use search to find more documentation. ## Get One-on-One Assistance Know who to reach out to for all your questions about Salesforce and Nonprofit Success Pack. _**Account Executive**_ If you have questions about your Salesforce product, or are interested in other Salesforce products, you can contact your Account Executive. Log into your org to [find your Account Executive](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/). _**Consulting Partner**_ If you know you need major implementation support, we highly recommend hiring a consulting partner. Most partners include training hours in their scope of work, in which they teach you how to manage your Salesforce org on your own. Check out the Salesforce.org website to [Find a Certified Consulting Partner](https://www.salesforce.org/nonprofit/find-partner/). **_Ask an Expert_** This program lets customers ask a Salesforce employee product adoption, best-practice and how-to questions live. Find upcoming Ask An Expert sessions on the [Customer Success Event Calendar](https://pages.mail.salesforce.com/cloud-services/event-calendar#&product=.educationcloud%2c.nonprofitcloud). _**Technical Support**_ If you have a specific question about your Salesforce org, you can see [How to Create a Case on Salesforce Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000393090&type=1). Every Salesforce.org customer has access to a Standard Success Plan which includes access to Standard Support. _**Premier Success**_ If you would like more than just standard support, and want access to more 1:1 resources, you may be interested in purchasing a [Premier Success](https://www.salesforce.com/services/success-plans/overview/premier-success-plans/) plan. For more information about pricing for Premier Success, please reach out to us via the [Contact Me](https://www.salesforce.org/contact-us/) form. _**Pro Bono**_ Salesforce.org's Pro Bono Program matches nonprofits with Salesforce professionals to help them with specific Salesforce challenges. Check out our website to [Apply for Pro Bono Services](https://www.salesforce.org/volunteers/probono/). ## Talk to Your Peers Sometimes the best way to learn is by talking to people who "get you." We highly recommend joining the Getting Started group in the Trailblazer Community. For people who are new to Salesforce, this is the best place to search for answers and ask questions. See [Salesforce.org Get Started Hub](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khifsae). ## Attend an Event Keep an eye on the Customer Success calendar to stay in the loop on the latest events and webinars. You can filter by region and time zone and find events that work for you. See [Customer Success calendar](https://cloud.mail.salesforce.com/event-calendar/#&product=.nonprofitcloud%2c.educationcloud). ## Get Official Salesforce Training If you know that the only way you'll learn Salesforce is by sitting in a classroom and having a teacher check your work, don't worry -- we've got resources for you! There are a lot of training and certification options. - [Training & Certification Options for Salesforce.org Customers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_salesforce_training_certification_options.htm) - [Training Path for New Salesforce Sys Admin](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_getting_started_training_path_for_a_salesforce_sys_admin.htm) # Salesforce Scheduler Add-On License for Additional Appointments Accommodate more appointments with Salesforce Scheduler’s add-on license. Salesforce Scheduler Additional Appointments AddOn license offers an added capacity of 12,000 appointments. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled with Salesforce Scheduler. **How:** Contact your Salesforce representative to learn about purchasing the Salesforce Scheduler Additional Appointments AddOn license. # Salesforce.org Release Notes Release Notes for Salesforce.org products. - **[Salesforce.org Winter '24 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_246.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce.org Winter '24 Release Notes - **[Salesforce.org Summer '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce.org Summer '23 Release Notes - **[Salesforce.org Spring '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce.org Spring '23 Release Notes - **[Salesforce.org Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce.org Winter '23 Release Notes - **[Salesforce.org Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce.org Summer '22 Release Notes # Salesforce.org Spring '23 Release Notes Salesforce.org Spring '23 Release Notes - **[How to Use the Salesforce for Education and Nonprofit Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_edu_ngo_how_to_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How to Use the Salesforce for Nonprofit and Education Release Notes - **[Get Ready for the Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.get_ready_for_release_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what's coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often. - **[Salesforce for Education Spring '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_edu_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce for Education Spring '23 Release Notes - **[Salesforce for Nonprofits Spring '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_nonprofit_cloud_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce for Nonprofits Spring '23 Release Notes # Salesforce.org Summer '22 Release Notes Salesforce.org Summer '22 Release Notes - **[Salesforce for Education Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_education_cloud_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what’s new in Salesforce for Education in Summer '22. - **[Salesforce for Nonprofits Summer '22 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_nonprofit_cloud_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's new in Salesforce for Nonprofits in Summer '22. # Salesforce.org Summer '23 Release Notes Salesforce.org Summer '23 Release Notes - **[How to Use Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_how_to_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features in products for education and nonprofit institutions. We include setup information, tips to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success. - **[Get Ready for the Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.get_ready_for_release_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what's coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often. - **[Salesforce for Education Summer '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_edu_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Summer '23 Release, we expand Education Cloud's capabilities to add more features for managing student success and streamline your processes further. We also updated Accounting Subledger to support custom field mappings and job filtering based on criteria. - **[Salesforce for Nonprofits Summer '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_nonprofits_244.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Summer '23 Release, we are growing our Nonprofit Cloud Salesforce platform presence with enhancements to the Program Management and Case Management features. These enhancements include the ability to add Dynamic Assessments to the Account and Contact objects, easier referral intake guided flow setup, simplified care plan template preview and visibility, new benefit guided flows, adding Action Plans and field level security, better program and benefit tracking, and giving you the ability to customize the benefit schedule workflow. We also updated Program Management Module and Nonprofit Case Management to help you find information faster. Elevate is now set to convert Google Universal Analytics to Google Analytics 4 and can help speed up your data exports by exporting multiple files and letting you set date ranges. # Salesforce.org Winter '23 Release Notes Salesforce.org Winter '23 Release Notes - **[Salesforce for Education Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_education_cloud_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's new in Salesforce for Education in Winter '23. - **[Salesforce for Nonprofits Winter '23 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_nonprofit_cloud_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what's new in Salesforce for Nonprofits in Winter '23. # Salesforce.org Winter '24 Release Notes Salesforce.org Winter '24 Release Notes ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting with Spring '24, Salesforce for Education and Salesforce for Nonprofits release notes will be included in the main release notes. See [Salesforce Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=release-notes.salesforce_release_notes.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. - **[How to Use Salesforce.org Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.release_notes_sfdo_how_to.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Our release notes offer brief, high-level descriptions of enhancements and new features in products for education and nonprofit institutions. We include setup information, tips to help you get started, and best practices to ensure your continued success. - **[Get Ready for the Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.get_ready_for_release.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Reading the release notes is a great step in preparing for the release. These other resources help get you and your users ready for what's coming your way. We add resources throughout the release when they become available, so check back often. - **[Salesforce for Education Winter '24 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_edu.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Winter '24 Release, we expand Education Cloud's capabilities to add more features for managing student success and streamline your processes further. We also updated Accounting Subledger to support custom field mappings and job filtering based on criteria. - **[Salesforce for Nonprofits Winter '24 Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_sf_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Winter '24 Release, we're introducing Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising and Outcome Management. In addition, we're adding enhancements to the Grantmaking, Case Management, and Program Management features and improving accessibility with better color contrast in our managed packages. # Schedule a Batch Now that you'll be regularly uploading files, you don't want to worry about manually processing them. This is really useful for cases like the upcoming event signup example, where you have signups coming in at different times, and you want to regularly upload the new signups. You can automatically process an NPSP Data Import Batch using a scheduled job. The batch will be processed each day based on the schedule outlined for the scheduled job. After the batch processes, the date and time as well as the results of the batch process, are recorded on the NPSP Data Import Batch record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note It's important to keep in mind that all batches that are scheduled will run at the same time (as part of one batch job) 1. In the App Launcher, click **NPSP Data Import Batches**. 2. Find your batch and click on the Batch Name. 3. On the detail page, click **Edit**. 4. Select the **Process Using Scheduled Job** checkbox. ![Process Using Scheduled Job checkbox on an NPSP Data Import Batch](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/scheduled_job_checkbox.png) 5. Click **Save**. The batch will be processed based on the scheduled job time for the **NPSP 09 - Data Import Batch Processing** job. To find out what time that job will run, go to Setup and search for Scheduled Jobs. For information on changing the scheduled job time, see [Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). After the job runs and the records for this batch are processed, the Last Processed On field is updated with the date and time. The Records Successfully Processed and Records Failed fields are also updated accordingly. ![An NPSP Data Import Batch record showing when the batch was last processed, how many records were successfully processed and how many failed](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/processed_batch.png) **Recommendations:** - If you'd like to be notified of the results of the processed batch, create a [workflow rule](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=workflow_rules_new.htm) or [process](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=process_create.htm) with an email template based on an update to the Last Run field. That way, you can easily identify and fix any failures. - If you want a quick way to isolate records that failed for that processed batch, clone the "Failed Data Imports" list view on the NPSP Data Import object and add a filter for NPSP Data Import Batch equal to Batch Name. # Schedule a Gift Commitment Batch Processing Job in Education Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To schedule a gift commitment batch processing job:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
In the Summer ‘26 release, Fundraising enhanced performance and scalability for processing recurring gift commitments. NextGen Gift Processing runs batch jobs in parallel by default. It can run up to five batch job parts of two thousand records each in parallel to process more commitments in less time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you previously cloned the Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing flow, deactivate your current flow and then clone it again, because we improved the flow. If you decide not to turn on NextGen Commitment Processing, the original batch processing engine continues to work, though it won’t receive further updates. To use NextGen Commitment Processing, turn it on in Fundraising Settings and then follow these steps. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 1. In the new dialog, click **View All Automations**. 2. Deselect all boxes except **Scheduled**. 3. Click **Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing** under Templates. 3. Edit the Start element and set a schedule for the flow to run. 4. Click **Save** and enter a new name or leave the default name. 5. Activate the scheduled flow. 6. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Process Automation Settings, and then select **Process Automation Settings**. 7. Assign Default Workflow User to the admin user who runs the flow. The customized flow appears as a scheduled job on the All Scheduled Jobs page. Use Monitor Workflow Services to monitor the status and health of your batch jobs. When you process many gift commitments, consider increasing the value in the **Timeout** field. # Schedule a Gift Commitment Batch Processing Job in Nonprofit Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To schedule a gift commitment batch processing job:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
In the Summer ‘26 release, Fundraising enhanced performance and scalability for processing recurring gift commitments. NextGen Gift Processing runs batch jobs in parallel by default. It can run up to five batch job parts of two thousand records each in parallel to process more commitments in less time. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you previously cloned the Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing flow, deactivate your current flow and then clone it again, because we improved the flow. If you decide not to turn on NextGen Commitment Processing, the original batch processing engine continues to work, though it won’t receive further updates. To use NextGen Commitment Processing, turn it on in Fundraising Settings and then follow these steps. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 1. In the new dialog, click **View All Automations**. 2. Deselect all boxes except **Scheduled**. 3. Click **Coordinate Gift Commitment Processing** under Templates. 3. Edit the Start element and set a schedule for the flow to run. 4. Click **Save** and enter a new name or leave the default name. 5. Activate the scheduled flow. 6. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Process Automation Settings, and then select **Process Automation Settings**. 7. Assign Default Workflow User to the admin user who runs the flow. The customized flow appears as a scheduled job on the All Scheduled Jobs page. Use Monitor Workflow Services to monitor the status and health of your batch jobs. When you process many gift commitments, consider increasing the value in the **Timeout** field. # Schedule a Gift Commitment in Education Schedule a recurring or custom payment of a gift commitment from a donor. The scheduling options change based on the schedule type that you select when you create the gift commitment. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To schedule a gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to schedule. 3. Click **Manage Gift Commitment Schedule**, or under Gift Commitment Setup, next to Manage Gift Commitment Schedules, click **Manage**. When you create and manage gift schedules on the Gift Commitment page, Fundraising automatically creates or updates the gift transactions.​ If you don’t use this page, you must manually create or update the transactions. 4. If the gift is a recurring donation, provide this information. 1. Select a payment start date and optionally an end date. 2. Select the transaction period, for example, Monthly. Don’t select a transaction period of Custom if this commitment has a recurring schedule type. Custom is only a valid transaction period for commitments, like pledges or one-time gifts, with a custom schedule type. 3. If you selected Monthly as the transaction period, enter the day of the month to run the schedule. For example, enter 1 to run the schedule on the first day of the month, or enter 15 to run the schedule on the 15th day of the month. 4. Enter the interval at which you want to run the schedule. For example, if the transaction period is monthly, enter 3 to run the schedule after every 3 months. 5. Enter the recurring transaction amount. 6. Select a payment method and enter any associated payment instrument information, such as Last 4 and expiration dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 7. If needed, select a campaign. 5. If the gift is a non-recurring donation, provide this information. You can add up to 30 non-recurring donations to the donor record, and the schedules can overlap. For example, the due date for one gift can be between the start and end dates of another scheduled gift. 1. Click **Add Gift Commitment Schedule**, and select a start date, which is the transaction due date. 2. Select a payment method. 3. Enter the transaction amount. 4. Select a payment method and enter any associated payment instrument information, like Last 4 and expiration dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 5. If needed, select a campaign. 6. If you want to schedule another gift commitment, select **Add Gift Commitment Schedule**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift transactions are created for every schedule that you create or update when modifications are made to one or more standard or custom fields on a schedule. If you want to create a transaction for an existing schedule without changing any fields, work with your Salesforce admin to create a flow that calls the Manage Gift Commitment Schedule invocable action. Then, associate this flow with a new custom action on the associated gift commitment. 6. Save your changes. SEE ALSO # Schedule a Gift Commitment in Nonprofit Schedule a recurring or custom payment of a gift commitment from a donor. The scheduling options change based on the schedule type that you select when you create the gift commitment. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To schedule a gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to schedule. 3. Click **Manage Gift Commitment Schedule**, or under Gift Commitment Setup, next to Manage Gift Commitment Schedules, click **Manage**. When you create and manage gift schedules on the Gift Commitment page, Fundraising automatically creates or updates the gift transactions.​ If you don’t use this page, you must manually create or update the transactions. 4. If the gift is a recurring donation, provide this information. 1. Select a payment start date and optionally an end date. 2. Select the transaction period, for example, Monthly. Don’t select a transaction period of Custom if this commitment has a recurring schedule type. Custom is only a valid transaction period for commitments, like pledges or one-time gifts, with a custom schedule type. 3. If you selected Monthly as the transaction period, enter the day of the month to run the schedule. For example, enter 1 to run the schedule on the first day of the month, or enter 15 to run the schedule on the 15th day of the month. 4. Enter the interval at which you want to run the schedule. For example, if the transaction period is monthly, enter 3 to run the schedule after every 3 months. 5. Enter the recurring transaction amount. 6. Select a payment method and enter any associated payment instrument information, such as Last 4 and expiration dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 7. If needed, select a campaign. 5. If the gift is a non-recurring donation, provide this information. You can add up to 30 non-recurring donations to the donor record, and the schedules can overlap. For example, the due date for one gift can be between the start and end dates of another scheduled gift. 1. Click **Add Gift Commitment Schedule**, and select a start date, which is the transaction due date. 2. Select a payment method. 3. Enter the transaction amount. 4. Select a payment method and enter any associated payment instrument information, like Last 4 and expiration dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note A payment method of ACH or credit card, and at least the Last 4 field populated, adds a payment instrument lookup to the schedule. This lookup creates a payment instrument record if none previously existed. 5. If needed, select a campaign. 6. If you want to schedule another gift commitment, select **Add Gift Commitment Schedule**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Gift transactions are created for every schedule that you create or update when modifications are made to one or more standard or custom fields on a schedule. If you want to create a transaction for an existing schedule without changing any fields, work with your Salesforce admin to create a flow that calls the Manage Gift Commitment Schedule invocable action. Then, associate this flow with a new custom action on the associated gift commitment. 6. Save your changes. SEE ALSO # Schedule Accounting Subledger Jobs With Flow Builder Specify when to run the Accounting Subledger job to generate transaction journal records.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
User Permissions Needed  
To run Accounting Subledger jobs:

Manage Accounting Subledger

OR

Run Accounting Subledger Job
To create flows: Manage Flow
Before setting up the Accounting Subledger job schedule, make sure that you completed these prerequisites. - You turned on transaction journal creation. - You're a Salesforce Admin, or you meet all of these requirements: - You have the Manage Accounting Subledger or Run Accounting Subledger Job permission set assigned to you. - You have the Manage Flow permission set assigned. - You're the default workflow user. - At least one accounting set is active. We recommend that you run the Accounting Subledger job manually at least once to verify your configuration and confirm the results before scheduling the job. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**, **Schedule-Triggered Flow**, and then **Create**. 3. Click **Set Schedule**. 4. Enter a start date, start time, and frequency that serves the needs of your accounting team. A daily frequency exceeds the monthly allotment included in your license, so we recommend that you start with a cadence of one to two times a week, or less. For optimal performance, we recommend that you select a time outside business hours, and that you consult your accounting and finance teams to determine the best schedule. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Hover over ![Add element circle icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/flow_builder_small_circle_icon.png)and click ![Add element plus icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/resources-product/images/flow_builder_new_plus_sign_icon.png), and then **Subflow**. 7. Search for and then select **Subledger Job**. 8. Enter a label and, if needed, a description and then click **Done**. ![Example subflow for running Accounting Subledger](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/flow_add_subledger_element.png) 9. Save your changes. 10. Enter a flow label and, if needed, a description and then save your changes. ![Example Accounting Subledger job flow naming](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/flow_save_flow.png) 11. Save your changes. 12. Activate your flow. See Also: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Jobs can take up to two hours or more to be completed. - [Identify Your Salesforce Org's Default Workflow User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.workflow_defaultuser.htm&type=5) - [Run Accounting Subledger Jobs Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_run_jobs_manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Generate transaction journal records on-demand by running the Subledger Job flow.") - [Considerations for Scheduling Accounting Subledger Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.considerations_for_scheduling_accounting_subledger_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Evaluate your transactions and data needs to determine when to run Accounting jobs.") # Schedule Address Standardization Updates Decide which addresses to standardize, schedule one-time and recurring updates, and edit or skip scheduled update. - **[Before You Schedule Address Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before scheduling address standardization, decide which addresses you want to standardize. - **[Schedule Address Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Schedule a one-time address standardization update, or schedule recurring updates. - **[Manage Scheduled Address Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit or skip previously scheduled address standardization updates. ## Before You Schedule Address Standardization Updates Before scheduling address standardization, decide which addresses you want to standardize. - Create a standard integration user and enable the `npsp__Pre_Verification_Address__c` in the **Object Manager** under **Setup**. - To prevent addresses from being standardized, select **Exclude from Updates** on the Address record. For example, you may not want to update a vanity address that includes a secondary city associated with a zip code of a major city, which could be overwritten by a standardization update. - Addresses previously verified by either Data Integrity or NPSP have the **Verified** checkbox selected and are automatically excluded from future standardization updates. - If you want to include a previously verified address, deselect **Verified** on the Address record. - If you make edits to the Address record without deselecting the **Verified** checkbox, it is excluded from new standardization updates. ## Schedule Address Standardization Updates Schedule a one-time address standardization update, or schedule recurring updates. 1. Click the **Data Updates** tab. 2. Click **Schedule Updates**. 3. For **Update Type**, select **Select a job**. 4. For **Recurring Schedule**, select an update frequency, or choose **One-Time** to schedule a one-time update. 5. Specify a start date and time, based on your browser's time zone as set by your computer's operating system. 6. **Estimated Records** displays the total number records that are to be standardized. - Addresses for which standardization was previously attempted but not completed successfully are excluded from this count, for example for incomplete or ambiguous Address records with missing state or zip code. - If the `Ambiguous?` field is marked `True` for a specific Address record, then we don't get a standardized address back from Melissa Data, unless the record is rectified. 7. Choose the addresses to standardize: - Select **All address records** to standardize all Address records. - Select **Default addresses only** to only standardize addresses set as a Default Address. - Optionally select the **Campaign lookup** checkbox, search and click your preferred campaign. - If **Campaign lookup** is selected, only the campaign members for that campaign will be included in the standardization. 8. Review the estimated number of record updates. 9. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/images/icon_important.png) Important When manually entering time, U.S. users will typically use a AM/PM time format. Users outside of the U.S. may need to use a 24-hour format. ## Manage Scheduled Address Standardization Updates Edit or skip previously scheduled address standardization updates. 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the update in the Scheduled Address Updates section. 3. From the action menu next to the update, select one of the options: - **Edit this Update Only** to edit a one-time update or a single update in a recurring series. - **Edit All Updates in this Series** to edit all updates in a recurring series. - **Skip this Update** to skip an update. If you previously skipped an update, you can also select **Un-Skip this Update**. # Schedule Appointments for Students Schedule appointments with staff members for students from the account record page.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To to schedule appointments in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Before you schedule an appointment, complete these prerequisites. 1. Make sure that users have at least Read access to the Resource Assignment Type field on the Success Team object. See [Schedule Appointments with My Appointments Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_schedule_appointments_with_my_appointments_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the My Appointments Header Lightning web component from Education Cloud to provide an alternative, more efficient workflow to replace the standard workflow for scheduling appointments on your learner portal."). 2. Add the staff Appointment Scheduling component to your account record page. See [Set Up the Account Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure record pages for the Account object in Education Cloud."). 2. On the learner's person account record page, select **Staff Scheduler**. If you don't see Staff Scheduler, click **More**. ![The location of the Staff Scheduler option on the person account record page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_staff_scheduler.png) 3. Under Filters, enter this criteria. 1. Search for and select the support staff member or team. 2. Select a topic based on the selected support staff member or team. 3. Select the channel. 4. Click **Search**. 5. To book a meeting with a staff member, select a time from the list of results. You can sort the list of results to show the earliest available appointments or the staff most recently seen by the learner. 6. Enter any comments and schedule the appointment. # Schedule Appointments for Support Staff or Support Pools (Front-Desk Staff) Learn how front-desk staff can schedule appointments on behalf of support staff in Student Success Hub. - **[What to Know Before You Schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_schedule_front_desk.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's important to understand how support staff create availability on their calendars for support appointments, because their availability determines how you can schedule appointments for them. - **[Schedule an Appointment for a Support Staff Member or Support Pool](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_schedule_front_desk.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create appointments on behalf of support staff and Support Pools starting from the Appointment Scheduler component that your Student Success Hub admin has placed on a convenient page for you. ## What to Know Before You Schedule It's important to understand how support staff create availability on their calendars for support appointments, because their availability determines how you can schedule appointments for them. For all the details, see [Designate Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up staff availability."). Otherwise, here are the key takeaways to understand so that you can effectively create appointments on behalf of support staff and Support Pools. Every support staff member defines recurring blocks of times when they're available for support appointments—that is, days and times when they can meet with students. They can define three types of recurring availability: - Scheduled, for individual, one-on-one appointments with a student, - Walk-In, for times when a student can drop by for an unscheduled appointment, and - Group, for appointments with multiple students, who sign up for a spot in the appointment from your institution's student portal. Each availability block is associated with two things: - The Topics and Subtopics that the staff member is open to meet about and - One or more appointment locations, which is where (or how) they can meet. Appointment locations can be in person, on the phone, or virtual. As a front-desk staff person, you can only create appointments based on a support staff member's Scheduled availability. You can't see their Walk-In or Group availability, and you can't schedule appointments during those blocks of time. You can only create appointments to discuss Topics and Subtopics, on dates and times, and at locations that are defined in support staff members' Scheduled recurring availability blocks. However, you can schedule appointments regardless of the staff member's case team role on the student's success team. Say, for example, Adrian Morges provides Academic support on Stephanie Rhimes's success team and Career support on Stuart Sandlin's success team. You can schedule Adrian to meet with Stephanie about Internships, and to meet with Stuart about Degree Planning—as long as Adrian has defined Scheduled availability for both Academic and Career Topics. This gives you great flexibility, especially when you need to schedule urgent appointments for students. Finally, you can also create appointments for Support Pools that are based on predefined case teams. When you select a Support Pool as an appointment attendee, Student Success Hub lets you see and select Topics, Subtopics, dates, times, and Appointment Locations aggregated from all members of the Pool. ## Schedule an Appointment for a Support Staff Member or Support Pool Create appointments on behalf of support staff and Support Pools starting from the Appointment Scheduler component that your Student Success Hub admin has placed on a convenient page for you. 1. In the Appointment Scheduler component, click **New Appointment**. 2. Select the attendees. 1. In the Support Staff or Support Pool field, search for and select a staff member or Support Pool. If you select a staff member, Student Success Hub lets you specify the agenda, date, time, and location of the appointment based on the recurring Scheduled availability that person has defined. If you select a Support Pool, you specify the agenda, date, time, and location, based on the recurring Scheduled availability that everyone in the selected Pool has defined. 2. In the Attendee field, search for and select a student. You can search for a name, a phone number, an email address, or, if your admin has enabled it, a Student ID. 3. Specify the agenda. 1. Select a Topic and, if available, a Subtopic. If you selected a staff member as the attendee, Student Success Hub lets you select Topics and Subtopics based on the recurring Scheduled availability that person has defined. If you selected a Support Pool, you select Topics and Subtopics based on the recurring Scheduled availability that everyone in the selected Pool has defined. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If a staff member has defined Scheduled availability for a Topic or Subtopic but they're fully booked for that Topic or Subtopic, you can still see and select the Topic or Subtopic, but you won't be able to find any available times. 2. Optionally, enter a Description. 4. Specify the date and time in either of these ways. - Click **First Available** to find the first available appointment in the next seven days for the selected staff member or Support Pool and the selected Topic and Subtopic. - Select a day in the calendar and then select a time on that date. If you selected a staff member as the attendee, Student Success Hub shows the times that person is available to meet about the selected Topic and Subtopic. If you selected a Support Pool, Student Success Hub shows the times that everyone in the Pool is available to meet about the selected Topic and Subtopic. If no times are available on a given date, select a different date. 5. If multiple locations are available for the selected time, select one. 6. Save the appointment. Student Success Hub sends email notifications to the staff and student attendees. The staff member can see the appointment in the Appointment Manager, and the student can see the appointment in the student portal. They can cancel, reschedule, or change the location of the appointment, but they can't change the Topic or Subtopic on the agenda. ### See Also # Schedule Appointments on Behalf of Students Staff can schedule appointments on behalf of a learner from the learner's person account record. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: In the Student Success app, open the learner's person account record and click **Staff Scheduler**. Select the staff member or team, topic, and channel for the meeting, and then select a time. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Enable Your Staff to Schedule Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_enable_staff_schedule_appts.htm) # Schedule Appointments with My Appointments Header Use the My Appointments Header Lightning web component from Education Cloud to provide an alternative, more efficient workflow to replace the standard workflow for scheduling appointments on your learner portal.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Using this workflow, a student can check whether an advisor is available before selecting their preferred time slot to create the appointment. My Appointments Header is available by default on the Education Portal template. - **[Set Up My Appointments Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_my_appointments_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the My Appointments Header Lightning web component on your learner portal so students can schedule appointments. - **[Appointment Scheduling Experience Using My Appointments Header](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_scheduling_experience_my_appointments_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learners schedule appointments through your Education Portal. When you add the My Appointments Header to your portal, a student can check whether an advisor is available before selecting their preferred time slot to create the appointment. # Schedule National Change Of Address Updates Learn about considerations for scheduling NCOA updates and how to schedule, edit, and skip updates. - **[Before You Schedule NCOA Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_ncoa_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Data8 customers, if you're planning to schedule an NCOA update for UK addresses, you have the option of running a NCOA audit to get an estimate about the cost of processing these addresses. - **[Schedule NCOA Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_ncoa_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Schedule a one-time NCOA update, or schedule recurring updates. - **[Manage Scheduled NCOA Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_ncoa_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit or skip previously-scheduled NCOA updates. ## Before You Schedule NCOA Updates For Data8 customers, if you're planning to schedule an NCOA update for UK addresses, you have the option of running a NCOA audit to get an estimate about the cost of processing these addresses. 1. Click the **Address Updates** tab. Refresh the page to display the **Run NCOA Audit** button if you just entered your Data8 credentials. If the button still doesn’t display, wait a few minutes and refresh the page again. 2. Specify a start date and time, which is based on your browser's time zone as set by your computer's operating system. If your system time is after 11:45PM, you will be prompted to enter the next day's date. 3. Choose the set of addresses you want to update to get an accurate audit estimate: - Select **All address records** to choose all Address records, or - Select **Specified Records** and select one or both options: - **Default addresses only** to choose only addresses set as a Default Address. - **Addresses not reviewed for changes within** to choose addresses that haven't been evaluated for a change of address within the time frame you specify, as determined by the **NCOA Evaluation Date** field on the Address. For example, if you choose to update records not reviewed for changes within 30 days, addresses with an **NCOA Evaluation Date** more than 30 days ago will be evaluated. - (Optional) Select the Campaign lookup checkbox, search and click your preferred campaign. - If Campaign Lookup is selected, only the Campaign Members on that campaign will be included in the NCOA update job. 4. Review the estimated number of record updates. 5. Click **Run NCOA Audit** to schedule a job. You will receive an email directly from Data8 with the results of the audit when your job is processed. Before you schedule NCOA updates, exclude addresses you don't want to be updated. NCOA updates respect the Address Override setting on a Contact, however, the Contact's Address will still be updated unless you exclude it from Data Integrity updates. To prevent individual addresses from being updated, select **Exclude from Updates** on the Address record. ## Schedule NCOA Updates Schedule a one-time NCOA update, or schedule recurring updates. 1. Click the **Data Updates** tab. Refresh the page to display the **Schedule Updates** button if you just entered your Data8 or Melissa Data credentials. If the button still doesn’t display, wait a few minutes and refresh the page again. 2. Click **Schedule Updates**. 3. For Update Type, select **National Change of Address (NCOA)** and **Select a job**. 4. Select an update frequency, or select **One-Time** to schedule a one-time update. 5. Specify a start date and time, which is based on your browser's time zone as set by your computer's operating system. 6. **Estimated Records** displays the total number records that are to be updated. Addresses for which standardization was previously attempted but not completed successfully are excluded from this count, for example for incomplete or ambiguous Address records with missing state or zip code. If the `Ambiguous?` field is marked `True` for a specific Address record, then we don't get a standardized address back from Melissa Data, unless the record is rectified. 7. Choose the set of addresses you want to update: - Select **All address records** to choose all Address records, or - Select **Specified Records** and select one or both options: - **Default addresses only** to choose only addresses set as a Default Address. - **Addresses not reviewed for changes within** to choose addresses that haven't been evaluated for a change of address within the time frame you specify, as determined by the **NCOA Evaluation Date** field on the Address. For example, if you choose to update records not reviewed for changes within 30 days, addresses with an **NCOA Evaluation Date** more than 30 days ago will be evaluated. - Optionally, select the Campaign lookup checkbox, search and click your preferred campaign. - If Campaign Lookup is selected, only the Campaign Members on that campaign will be included in the NCOA update job. 8. Review the estimated number of record updates. 9. Click **Save**. ## Manage Scheduled NCOA Updates Edit or skip previously-scheduled NCOA updates. To delete a recurring standardization: 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the update in the Scheduled Address Updates section. 3. From the action menu next to the update, select one of the options: - **Edit this Update Only** to edit a one-time update or a single update in a recurring series. - **Edit All Updates in this Series** to edit all updates in a recurring series. - **Skip this Update** to skip an update. If you previously skipped an update, you can also select **Un-Skip this Update**. 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the **Recurring Updates** section. 3. From the action menu, click **Delete this Recurring Series**. 4. Click **confirm**. # Schedule Recurring Shifts using Job Recurrence Schedules Job Recurrence Schedules provide an easy way to schedule multiple future Job shifts. You determine when and how often the shifts occur. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create a Job Recurrence Schedule](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i29AdNl97gg). 1. In the Campaign's Volunteer Jobs related list, click on the Job name. 2. On the Job detail page, click the Related tab. 3. In the Job Recurrence Schedules related list, click **New**. ![New button on the Job Recurrence Schedules related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/new_job_recurrence_schedule.png) 4. Define how the Job and its Shifts repeat. - **Days of the Week**—The day(s) of the week that the event occurs. - **Weekly Occurrence**—How often the event occurs (every week, every other week, the first week of the month, second week of the month, and so on). - **Scheduled Start Date and Time**—The date of the first event in the series and what time each event starts. - **Scheduled End Date**—Date of the last event in the series (if there are a finite number of events). Leave this field blank if there is no end date. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note V4S only creates future Shifts for a certain number of months, specified in the Job Future Months V4S setting. Your admin can adjust this value. For more information, see [Configure Scheduling of Recurring Jobs and Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Automatic scheduling of Jobs and volunteers into the future saves a ton of repetitive data entry."). - **Duration**—How long, in hours, the event lasts. - **Desired Number of Volunteers**—The maximum number of volunteers who can sign up for each Shift. ![Create Job Recurrence Schedule form](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/create_jrs.png) 5. Click **Save**. You can [confirm the newly-created Shifts on the Shift Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_create_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If there are multiple dates or times when you need volunteers for a Job, you can set up Shifts so you can track which volunteers are coming when."). You can also set up a corresponding Volunteer Recurrence Schedule if you have volunteers who want to set up a recurring schedule based on the recurring Shifts. # Schedule RFM Score Calculation in Education Automate the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) score calculation DPE jobs by creating a flow that runs based on a specified date, time, and frequency. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a scheduled-triggered flow for Fundraising:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 3. Select **Start From Scratch** and click **Next**. 4. Select the **Schedule-Triggered Flow** template, and click **Create**. 5. In the Start node, click **Set Schedule**, and specify the date, time, and frequency to run the flow. 6. Click Add Element (![Add Element icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_addelement.png)) and select **Action**. 7. In the Category section, select **Data Processing Engine**. 8. In the Action field, select the **RFM Score Calculation** data processing engine definition. 9. Enter a label and API name for the flow. 10. Click **Save**. 11. Enter a flow label, save your changes, and then activate the flow. # Schedule RFM Score Calculation in Nonprofit Automate the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) score calculation DPE jobs by creating a flow that runs based on a specified date, time, and frequency. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a scheduled-triggered flow for Fundraising:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 3. Select **Start From Scratch** and click **Next**. 4. Select the **Schedule-Triggered Flow** template, and click **Create**. 5. In the Start node, click **Set Schedule**, and specify the date, time, and frequency to run the flow. 6. Click Add Element (![Add Element icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_addelement.png)) and select **Action**. 7. In the Category section, select **Data Processing Engine**. 8. In the Action field, select the **RFM Score Calculation** data processing engine definition. 9. Enter a label and API name for the flow. 10. Click **Save**. 11. Enter a flow label, save your changes, and then activate the flow. # Score Applications Create rubrics in Education Cloud to evaluate applicants and score them based on the criteria you define. Make more informed decisions about who to offer admission to and whom to waitlist. Use rubrics to promote equity in the admissions process. Creating, assigning, and using rubrics to score applications combines Salesforce objects, assessments, flows, and Omniscripts. The objects and flows are configured for institutions to use a single rubric when reviewing an Individual Application record. If your application process has different stages, like an application review, a phone interview, and an in-person interview, customize the objects and flows. This way, you can use a different rubric for each stage. - **[Prepare Your Org for Scoring Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prerequisites_for_scoring_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To prepare your Salesforce org for scoring applications, enable Discovery Framework, create a queue, and update the page layout for individual applications. - **[Create Rubric Assessment Questions with Apex Script](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_rubric_assessment_questions_with_apex_script.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run an Apex script to create the questions that align with the scoring integration procedure that’s used for rubrics. - **[Manually Create Rubric Assessment Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manually_create_rubric_assessment_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create or import your own assessment questions to use as rubric criteria. - **[Add Questions to a Rubric](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_questions_to_a_rubric.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Omniscript that includes assessment questions to use as a rubric to score applications. - **[Connect Rubrics to Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create configuration records to represent your application review and connect it to the Omniscripts that you use to score applications in Education Cloud. - **[Assign Application Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_application_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign Individual Application records to reviewers so that they can score applications. # Scoring Frameworks Help Increase Fundraising Success in Education Scoring frameworks, like the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary value (RFM) score, help to identify the donors who are the best fit for each of your campaigns or outreach programs. Matching your donors to specific outreach endeavors improves your fundraising success and your relationships with your constituents. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## About RFM Scores Determine who is a good candidate for a campaign by determining donors' RFM scores. Work smarter, not harder! Knowing your constituents and understanding their alignment to your campaigns is vital to successful and efficient engagement. The RFM score helps you identify the right prospects for a campaign or gift proposal. It can also help you determine the touchpoints that yield the best engagement, so that you can allocate resources more effectively in future campaigns. **What Are RFM Scores?** Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) score analysis is a tool you can use to identify your best donors based on their giving habits. The recency score represents the last time that the constituents donated. The frequency score represents how often constituents donate. And the Monetary Value score represents the amount that the constituents donated. The fields and objects that these scores are based on are defined during setup. The weight of each of these attributes is also determined during setup. These three individual scores are then aggregated into one combined RFM score. RFM scores are used for reporting, segmentation, and list building of donors. Specifically, RFM score analysis helps you: - Determine how many donations come from first-time as opposed to repeat donors. - Predict the constituents who are likely to donate again. - Predict the right amount to request in a gift solicitation. - Understand how best to turn occasional donors into regularly committed donors. - Identify the donors who haven’t donated in a while so that you can engage them and strengthen their relationship with you. **How Is the RFM Score Determined?** You can customize the way an RFM score is built. The individual components of the score can be pulled from the fields on the DonorGiftSummary object, or another object that's selected during RFM score configuration. Your Salesforce admin sets the source and destination objects and fields, and the ranges for each component of the score. The ranges are used to calculate the scores. Each donor to your organization receives an RFM score that represents the composite score of the recency, frequency, and monetary value of their gifts. You can also include the individual scores for recency, frequency, and monetary value on the Donor Gift Summary page or another page where your Salesforce admin places the scores. Marketers and fundraisers can pull reports or create lists or segments of constituents based on their RFM scores to craft campaigns and proposals specific to their giving habits. RFM scores help fundraisers predict the donors who are a good fit for campaigns and identify the donors who can become more committed constituents. ## Where is the Donor's RFM Score? Your Salesforce admin adds the RFM score to the Donor Profile page in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app or to another object page they've selected. The score is placed on the page with the Related Records Detail Display, usually near the donor's giving data rollups. ## How a Donor's RFM Score is Updated A donor's score is updated by running the Data Processing Engine job. If your Salesforce admin sets up a schedule for running the RFM Score Calculation data processing engine definition, the Donors' RFM scores get updated after the DPE job is completed. The scores get updated after every run of the scheduled job. If your admin doesn't set up a schedule for running the RFM Score Calculation DPE definition, the admin can run the job manually as needed. SEE ALSO: - [Configure RFM Scoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_rfm_scoring.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Schedule-Triggered Flow to Run the Data Processing Engine Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_schedule_triggered_flow_to_run_dpe_jobs.htm&language=en_US) - [Check the RFM Score Calculation Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_check_the_rfm_score_calculation_process.htm&language=en_US) - [Create and Activate Segments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=c360_a_segments.htm&language=en_US) - [Build a Report in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.reports_build_lex.htm&type=5) # Scoring Frameworks Help Increase Fundraising Success in Nonprofit Scoring frameworks, like the Recency, Frequency, and Monetary value (RFM) score, help to identify the donors who are the best fit for each of your campaigns or outreach programs. Matching your donors to specific outreach endeavors improves your fundraising success and your relationships with your constituents. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

## About RFM Scores Determine who is a good candidate for a campaign by determining donors' RFM scores. Work smarter, not harder! Knowing your constituents and understanding their alignment to your campaigns is vital to successful and efficient engagement. The RFM score helps you identify the right prospects for a campaign or gift proposal. It can also help you determine the touchpoints that yield the best engagement, so that you can allocate resources more effectively in future campaigns. **What Are RFM Scores?** Recency, Frequency, and Monetary Value (RFM) score analysis is a tool you can use to identify your best donors based on their giving habits. The recency score represents the last time that the constituents donated. The frequency score represents how often constituents donate. And the Monetary Value score represents the amount that the constituents donated. The fields and objects that these scores are based on are defined during setup. The weight of each of these attributes is also determined during setup. These three individual scores are then aggregated into one combined RFM score. RFM scores are used for reporting, segmentation, and list building of donors. Specifically, RFM score analysis helps you: - Determine how many donations come from first-time as opposed to repeat donors. - Predict the constituents who are likely to donate again. - Predict the right amount to request in a gift solicitation. - Understand how best to turn occasional donors into regularly committed donors. - Identify the donors who haven’t donated in a while so that you can engage them and strengthen their relationship with you. **How Is the RFM Score Determined?** You can customize the way an RFM score is built. The individual components of the score can be pulled from the fields on the DonorGiftSummary object, or another object that's selected during RFM score configuration. Your Salesforce admin sets the source and destination objects and fields, and the ranges for each component of the score. The ranges are used to calculate the scores. Each donor to your organization receives an RFM score that represents the composite score of the recency, frequency, and monetary value of their gifts. You can also include the individual scores for recency, frequency, and monetary value on the Donor Gift Summary page or another page where your Salesforce admin places the scores. Marketers and fundraisers can pull reports or create lists or segments of constituents based on their RFM scores to craft campaigns and proposals specific to their giving habits. RFM scores help fundraisers predict the donors who are a good fit for campaigns and identify the donors who can become more committed constituents. ## Where is the Donor's RFM Score? Your Salesforce admin adds the RFM score to the Donor Profile page in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app or to another object page they've selected. The score is placed on the page with the Related Records Detail Display, usually near the donor's giving data rollups. ## How a Donor's RFM Score is Updated A donor's score is updated by running the Data Processing Engine job. If your Salesforce admin sets up a schedule for running the RFM Score Calculation data processing engine definition, the Donors' RFM scores get updated after the DPE job is completed. The scores get updated after every run of the scheduled job. If your admin doesn't set up a schedule for running the RFM Score Calculation DPE definition, the admin can run the job manually as needed. SEE ALSO: - [Configure RFM Scoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_rfm_scoring.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Schedule-Triggered Flow to Run the Data Processing Engine Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_create_schedule_triggered_flow_to_run_dpe_jobs.htm&language=en_US) - [Check the RFM Score Calculation Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_check_the_rfm_score_calculation_process.htm&language=en_US) - [Create and Activate Segments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=c360_a_segments.htm&language=en_US) - [Build a Report in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.reports_build_lex.htm&type=5) # Search for a Client Use client search to find clients by first name, last name, preferred name, client id, or birthdate. **Client Search** is available at the bottom of all pages in the Case Management app. Client Search results are restricted to Contacts that have the **Client** checkbox selected on their Contact record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Client Search searches through all Contact text fields, not just Name or Client ID, so you may see more or fewer results than expected until you enter enough text. For example, a search for the name Carol may show Contacts whose address includes CA, until you type more of the name in the Client Search box. Use global search to search for non-client Contacts and other Salesforce objects, such as Accounts.  To search for a client: 1. Click **Client Search**. 2. Enter your search terms in **Search**. For example, First Name, Last Name, Preferred Name, Client ID, or Birthdate. Results will narrow as you type. 3. Click the client’s name in the results to see their Contact record. ![Client Search with beginning of client name yielding result](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/clientsearch.png) # Security and Permissions for Nonprofit Cloud Learn about the permission sets included in Nonprofit Cloud and how to assign them to users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
Assign permission sets to a single user or to multiple users. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). To give your users additional or fewer permissions, create a custom permission set for your org-specific permissions. Then, add your custom permission set to a permission set group that also includes the appropriate managed permission set. Use permission set groups in this way to make sure that your users always get access to new Nonprofit Cloud permissions and helps you add or remove specific permissions based on your users' needs. Learn more in [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm). Nonprofit Cloud includes managed permission sets for various Nonprofit Cloud features. Learn more about the features and assign the appropriate permissions for your users. Fundraising To use Fundraising features, assign Fundraising permission set groups to users. See [Fundraising Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&language=en_US). Program Management To use Program Management, assign a Program Management permission set to users. See [Program Management Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_editions.htm&language=en_US). Case Management To use Case Management, assign related permission sets to users. See [Care Plans Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_care_plans_editions.htm&language=en_US), [Case Referral Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_case_referral_intake_editions.htm&language=en_US), and [Complaint Management and Incident Tracking Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_complaints_incidents_editions.htm&language=en_US). Outcome Management To use Outcome Management, assign the Outcome Management permission set to users. See [Outcome Management Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.outcome_management_editions_security_permissions.htm&language=en_US). Grantmaking If you have Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking, assign the Grantmaking permission sets to users. See [Grantmaking Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_grantmaking_permission_sets.htm&language=en_US). Accounting Subledger Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting department. This consolidation helps you understand how and where funds are received, paid, and allocated. Action Plans Action plans define the tasks and other items needed to complete a business process. Each task includes a priority, a person assigned to it, and information on when to complete it. Create action plans templates to capture repeatable tasks. Actionable Segmentation Segment similar stakeholder profiles, curate them, and design timely and personalized stakeholder outreach programs with Actionable Segmentation. Actionable list definitions and actionable lists are the key elements of the Actionable Segmentation feature. ARC Access Actionable Relationship Center (ARC) helps users understand relationships among people and businesses by presenting them in a convenient and interactive display component. Business Milestones and Life Events Access The Business Milestones and Life Events shows life events for a person account and business milestones for a business account. Create event types and milestone types, activate or deactivate them, and make them unique. Data Pipelines Base User Data Processing Engine helps you transform data that's available in your Salesforce org and use the results to create or update records. Transform the data for standard and custom objects, and Analytics data sets by using Data Processing Engine definitions. Dynamic Assessment Access Provides internal users with access to Dynamic Assessment features and objects. Group Membership Enables Household and Group features in the org. Industries Service Excellence The Industries Service Excellence permission set give users access to Record Alerts, Identify verification, and Engagement objects. Interaction Summary Caseworkers and other users use interaction summaries to take detailed notes. Omnistudio User Assign this permission set to users who run Omniscripts, Omnistudio Data Mappers, Integration Procedures, and Flexcards. For example, in Case Management, with this permission set, users can create benefit schedules, view upcoming sessions, and view aggregated data after running DPE jobs. Query for Datapipelines User This permission set allows users to create new segments in actionable segmentation. # Security for Student Success Hub Student Success Hub provides a flexible approach to security that uses standard Salesforce profiles, permission sets, and sharing settings. This approach lets you expose different data sets to different groups of users. For example, staff and admins typically have more permissions than students. - **[Learn About Student Success Hub Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_about.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure security in Student Success Hub so that support staff have access to the tools they need to do their jobs and to use the app. - **[Student Success Hub Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up profiles for your staff, admins, and students, and grant the required access to Apex classes and relevant record types. - **[Student Success Hub Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. - **[Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses. # See Address Standardization Results View the results of address standardization results and learn how Data Integrity handles errors. - **[Address Standardization Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_address_standardization_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the results of an address standardization update. - **[Error Handling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_address_standardization_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Integrity has a robust system for logging transient Melissa Data and core API errors, as well as automatically attempting retries on failure. ## Address Standardization Results View the results of an address standardization update. 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the job in the **In Progress and Past Updates** section. Jobs can be in one of these states: - In progress jobs are indicated by an In Progress Ring icon. - Successfully completed jobs have a white checkmark inside a green circle. - Partially successful jobs are signified by a white checkmark inside an orange circle. 3. Click the address standardization update you want to see. 4. Click a tab to see results: - **Overview**: See the number of addresses standardized, the total number of addresses reviewed, and the number of errors. - **All Updates**: See the status for each address that was reviewed. You can also search by address or status. - **Details**: See details about the update, including the start and finish date and time. - **Errors**: See a list of errors that were found during the update. Run the job again if you get any errors. 5. Optionally, from the **All Updates** tab, click the **Download** button to obtain a CSV file with all addresses in the update, including the current address, prior address, and status. After an address standardization update, you'll also see these changes on Address records: - The **Verified** checkbox will be selected for all addresses that were evaluated in the update. - The **Verified Date** will be updated for all addresses that were evaluated in the update. - The **Ambiguous** checkbox will be selected on addresses for which no matching address was found. ## Error Handling Data Integrity has a robust system for logging transient Melissa Data and core API errors, as well as automatically attempting retries on failure. This system: - Breaks large requests for **Addresses** from the CRM into a number of batches, enabling job processing to continue regardless of failure for a subset of these batches. The average batch contains about 30,000 records. - Displays error count for partially successful address standardization jobs on the **Overview** tab of the results interface. Furthermore, after receiving an error: - Failed API calls to Melissa Data for Address Standardization, NCOA, and Contact Standardization updates are automatically retried in case of network errors. Each batch sent to Melissa Data contains up to 100 records. Data Integrity attempts 3 retries per batch. - Data Integrity automatically attempts retries following errors fetching access tokens from the CRM Core API. The application attempts up to 4 retries over 5 seconds. Data Integrity does not attempt a retry and the job fails in these scenarios: - Melissa Data SmartMover license key has expired or is invalid. - Melissa Data service is down. If you have a partially successful Address Standardization, NCOA, or Contact Standardization job: - Review the Data Integrity installation prerequisites and complete any missed steps. - View the [Manage Bulk Data Load Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.monitoring_async_api_jobs_overview.htm&type=5) within Salesforce Setup. Then run the job again. # See Contact Standardization Results Learn about the output of your Contact Standardization job. - **[Contact Standardization Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_contact_standardization_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the results of a Contact Standardization update. - **[Error Handling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_contact_standardization_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Integrity has a robust system for logging transient Melissa Data and core API errors, as well as automatically attempting retries on failure. ## Contact Standardization Results View the results of a Contact Standardization update. 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the job in the **In Progress and Past Updates** section. Jobs can be in one of these states: - In progress jobs are indicated by an In Progress Ring icon. - Successfully completed jobs have a white checkmark inside a green circle. - Partially successful jobs are signified by a white checkmark inside an orange circle. 3. Click the **Contact Standardization** update for the job results you want to see. 4. View the **Data Verification Dashboard** to see the following information about the job: - **Contacts Reviewed** - **Job Start Time** - **Job Duration** - **Errors** ## Error Handling Data Integrity has a robust system for logging transient Melissa Data and core API errors, as well as automatically attempting retries on failure. This system: - Breaks large requests for Contacts from the CRM into a number of batches, enabling job processing to continue regardless of failure for a subset of these batches. The average batch contains about 30,000 records. - Displays error count for partially successful Contact Standardization jobs on the Overview tab of the results interface. Furthermore, after receiving an error: - Failed API calls to Melissa Data for Contact Standardization, Address Standardization, and NCOA updates are automatically retried in case of network errors. Each batch sent to Melissa Data contains up to 100 records. Data Integrity attempts 3 retries per batch. - Data Integrity automatically attempts retries following errors fetching access tokens from the CRM Core API. The application attempts up to 4 retries over 5 seconds. Data Integrity does not attempt a retry and the job fails in these scenarios: - Melissa Data SmartMover license key has expired or is invalid. - Melissa Data service is down. If you have a partially successful Address Standardization, NCOA or Contact Standardization job: - Review the Data Integrity installation prerequisites and complete any missed steps. - View the [Manage Bulk Data Load Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.monitoring_async_api_jobs_overview.htm&type=5) within Salesforce **Setup**. Then run the job again. # See Results of National Change of Address Updates Learn how to review the results of an NCOA update and how Data Integrity handles errors. - **[NCOA Update Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_results_ncoa_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the results of an NCOA update. - **[Error Handling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_results_ncoa_update.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Integrity has a robust system for logging transient Melissa Data and core API errors, as well as automatically attempting retries on failure. ## NCOA Update Results See the results of an NCOA update. 1. Click the **Update Schedule** tab. 2. Find the update in the **In Progress and Past Updates** section. Jobs can be in one of these states: - In progress jobs are indicated by an In Progress Ring icon. - Successfully completed jobs have a white checkmark inside a green circle. - Partially successful jobs are signified by a white checkmark inside an orange circle. 3. Click the National Change of Address (NCOA) update you want to see. 4. Click a tab to see the results: - **Overview**: See the number of changed addresses found, the total number of addresses reviewed, and the number of errors. - **All Updates**: See the status for each address that was reviewed. You can also search by address or status. - **Details**: See details about the update, including the start and finish date and time. - **Errors**: See a list of errors that were found during the update. Run the job again if you get any errors. 5. Optionally, from the **All Updates** tab, click the **Download** button to obtain a CSV file with all addresses in the update, including the current address, prior address, and status. After an NCOA update, you'll also see these changes on Address records: - The **Verified** checkbox will be selected for addresses that were updated with a new address. - The **Verified Date** will be updated for addresses that were updated with a new address. - **NCOA Evaluation Date** will be updated to show the most recent date and time the address was evaluated for NCOA updates, regardless of if a new address was found. - **NCOA Result Code** will show the NCOA result code from Melissa Data. ## Error Handling Data Integrity has a robust system for logging transient Melissa Data and core API errors, as well as automatically attempting retries on failure. This system: - Breaks large requests for **Addresses** from the CRM into a number of batches, enabling job processing to continue regardless of failure for a subset of these batches. The average batch contains about 30,000 records. - Displays error count for partially successful address standardization jobs on the **Overview** tab of the results interface. Furthermore, after receiving an error: - Failed API calls to Melissa Data for address standardization and NCOA updates are automatically retried in case of network errors. Each batch sent to Melissa Data contains up to 100 records. Data Integrity attempts 3 retries per batch. - Data Integrity automatically attempts retries following errors fetching access tokens from the CRM Core API. The application attempts up to 4 retries over 5 seconds. Data Integrity does not attempt a retry and the job fails in these scenarios: - Melissa Data SmartMover license key has expired or is invalid. - Melissa Data service is down. # Self-Service Appointments in Education Cloud Education Cloud uses the power of Experience Cloud and the flexibility of Omnistudio to let you customize the appointment experience for your users.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Omniscript Appointment Setup Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_self_service_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the default Omniscript, or customize it to best suit your needs. Flexcards enable you to display or record more user data in the system, or even remove preconfigured data. When you're happy with your setup flow, enable it on your Experience site. - **[Appointment View for Your Learners and Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_self_service_appts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When your learners and staff members log in to the self-service portal, Salesforce shows their past and upcoming appointments, providing them with a comprehensive view of their schedule. ## Omniscript Appointment Setup Flow Use the default Omniscript, or customize it to best suit your needs. Flexcards enable you to display or record more user data in the system, or even remove preconfigured data. When you're happy with your setup flow, enable it on your Experience site.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Learners access appointment scheduling via an Experience site, while staff do so from the learner's person account record. See Also: - [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud.") ## Appointment View for Your Learners and Staff When your learners and staff members log in to the self-service portal, Salesforce shows their past and upcoming appointments, providing them with a comprehensive view of their schedule.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
If you build your own app, add the My Appointment component to the app’s utility bar to provide that view. See [Add the My Appointment Component to Your App Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_my_appt_utility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Education Cloud comes with a preconfigured app that offers a comprehensive view of your users' appointments. If you build your own app, add the My Appointment component to the app's utility bar to provide that view."). If you configure video calls with AWS Chime, users can start the call directly from the appointment utility. For video calls using external services, Salesforce shows the information from the Appointment Booking URL field. ![Example appointment view with AWS Chime](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_aws_call.png) ![Example appointment view with a non-AWS video service](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_non_aws_call.png) By default, the self-service portal shows to learners: - The name of the meeting attendees. - The appointment topic and subtopic if it exists. - The scheduled start time in their local time zone. - The appointment channel and location. Salesforce doesn’t show canceled appointments. Learners can join virtual appointments when all these conditions are met: - The appointment status is In Progress or Scheduled. - The current time is between the Earliest Start Permitted and Due Date times of the service appointment. See Also: - _Blog post_: [Unofficial SF: Email Appointment Confirmation with Video Conferencing Information (3rd Party) Included](https://unofficialsf.com/email-appointment-confirmation-with-video-conferencing-information-3rd-party-included/) - _Blog post_: [Unofficial SF: Create Zoom Meetings from Salesforce (with Scheduler)](https://unofficialsf.com/create-zoom-meetings-from-salesforce-with-scheduler/) # Send and Receive Student Success Alerts (Support Staff) Send alerts from the Student Success Alerts Slack app to support staff in Student Success Hub. Before you start using Student Success Alerts (SSA), add the app to your Slack Workspace and connect the app to Salesforce. Then start creating alerts directly in Slack and support staff receive them in Student Success Hub (SSH). - **[Connect Slack to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_send_and_receive_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Student Success Alerts to your Slack workspace. - **[Create a Student Success Alert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_send_and_receive_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a student success alert in Slack. - **[Receive Alerts in Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_send_and_receive_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a member of support staff creates a Student Success Alert in Slack, the alert routes to a student support member in Student Success Hub. This support member is the student’s assigned advisor or another member of the student’s support team. If the student doesn’t have an assigned support member or a team assigned, the alert is assigned to the person who created the alert. The alert appears on the student’s record, under the Alerts tab, and in the list of Alerts. ## Connect Slack to Salesforce Add Student Success Alerts to your Slack workspace. See [Add Apps in Your Personal Slack Sidebar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=slack.slack_apps_get_started.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Create a Student Success Alert Create a student success alert in Slack. 1. From the SSA app in Slack, either: - Click **Create Alert**. - Enter /student-alert in the message pane. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You can create an alert with the command entry from any channel in Slack. You don’t have to be in the SSA app to use it. The Create Alert window opens. 2. In the **Course** field, select the course the student is enrolled in. The dropdown list only includes the current courses the student is enrolled in that the alert creator teaches. If you aren’t a faculty member or there aren’t courses available, this field isn’t visible. 3. In the **Student** field, search for the student by name or email address, and select the student. 4. Select **Yes** if the student is aware of your concern. 5. Select the reason you’re concerned. 6. Enter details or comments about your concern. 7. If you’d like to be notified with updates to the alert status, select **Yes**. You receive these notifications in the SSA app. 8. Click **Create Alert**. ## Receive Alerts in Student Success Hub When a member of support staff creates a Student Success Alert in Slack, the alert routes to a student support member in Student Success Hub. This support member is the student’s assigned advisor or another member of the student’s support team. If the student doesn’t have an assigned support member or a team assigned, the alert is assigned to the person who created the alert. The alert appears on the student’s record, under the Alerts tab, and in the list of Alerts. The student’s support team member then reads details about the concern, takes mitigation steps as necessary to address the concern, and updates the alert status as they continue to work with the student. If the person who created the alert requested to be notified of status updates, updates to the alert appear in the Messages tab of the SSA app. # Send Course Load Details and Create Course Offering Channels Modify the EDU Course Operations: Create Course Load and Slack Channel flow after you create the Course Operations Agent. The updated flow calls the agent to send course load information and create course offering channels for faculty in Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations: Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows: Manage Flow
Before you start, [create the Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_operations_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure a Course Operations Agent that assists faculty to manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk students, and coordinate student support."). 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Course Operations: Create Course Load and Slack Channel**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. To change any of the default schedules, in the Start element, click **Scheduled Paths**, and then update the offset number and offset options. 5. After the Get Faculty Slack User element, add an element that calls the Course Operations Agent. The agent sends course load information to the faculty Slack user in a direct message in Slack. 1. After the Get Faculty Slack User element, click **Add Element**. 2. Search for and select the Course Operations Agent that you created. 3. Give the element a label and an API name. For example, name the element Get Course Load from Agent. 4. For Set Input Values, enter an agent request that gets the primary faculty's course load for the academic session. For example, enter Get course load for Primary Faculty ID {!LoopThroughPrimaryFacultyIds} for Academic Session ID {!$Record.Id}. 6. Complete the Default Outcome and the No paths of the Have Only Course Load? element. 1. For the Default Outcome path, add an element that calls the Course Operations Agent. The agent sends only course load information to the faculty Slack user in a direct message. For example, name the element Send Course Load to Faculty. For Agent Request, enter Send the course load {!GetCourseLoadFromAgent.agentResponse} to {!Get\_Faculty\_Slack\_User.facultyUserId} in a direct message. 2. For the No path, add an element that calls the Course Operations Agent. The agent sends the course load information to the faculty Slack user and asks if they want to create channels for their course offerings. For example, name the element Send Course Load and Ask Faculty to Create Channel. For Agent Request, enter Send the course load {!GetCourseLoadFromAgent.agentResponse} and ask "Would you like to create channels for course offerings?" to {!Get\_Faculty\_Slack\_User.facultyUserId} in a direct message. 7. Save and activate the flow. # Set Custom Field-Level Security Update security permissions for the profiles that you assign to your users so that they have the access that they need. - **[Set Custom Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_set_custom_field-level_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure profile access to fields for your educational institution. ## Set Custom Field-Level Security Configure profile access to fields for your educational institution. If the enhanced profile user interface is enabled, follow these steps. 1. In Setup, find and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. In the All Object Settings section, click the object whose settings you want to change. 5. Click **Edit** and set the appropriate permissions. 6. Save your changes. If the Enhanced Profile User Interface isn’t enabled, follow these steps. 1. In Setup, find and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile. 3. Under Custom Field-Level Security, find the setting that you want to update and click **View**. 4. Click **Edit** and set the appropriate permissions. 5. Save your changes. # Set Custom Field-Level Security Restrict K-12 Architecture Kit users' access to view and edit specific fields. - **[Set Custom Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_set_custom_field-level_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure profile access to fields for your educational institution. ## Set Custom Field-Level Security Configure profile access to fields for your educational institution. If the enhanced profile user interface is enabled, follow these steps. 1. In Setup, find and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. In the All Object Settings section, click the object whose settings you want to change. 5. Click **Edit** and set the appropriate permissions. 6. Save your changes. If the Enhanced Profile User Interface isn’t enabled, follow these steps. 1. In Setup, find and select **Profiles**. 2. Click a profile. 3. Under Custom Field-Level Security, find the setting that you want to update and click **View**. 4. Click **Edit** and set the appropriate permissions. 5. Save your changes. # Set Field-Level Security Configure field-level security for grantmakers. - **[Give Grantmakers Access to Multiple Application Forms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantmakers require access to the Application Form field if you want to use multiple application forms. ## Give Grantmakers Access to Multiple Application Forms Grantmakers require access to the Application Form field if you want to use multiple application forms. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Application Form field, make sure you have [set up multiple applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gm_set_multi_apps.htm) first. ### Funding Program Permissions Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create |   | | Edit | √ | | Delete |   | Field Permissions | Field Label | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Application Form | ApplicationForm\_\_c | √ | √ | # Set Field-Level Security Configure field-level security for admins, fundmakers, and reviewers. - **[Give Fundmakers Access to Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For admins and fundmakers to create, edit, and view Reviews, give Read, Edit, and Create access to the Review object. - **[Give Reviewers Access to Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give access for reviewers to complete a Review by granting Read and Edit access to the Review object. ## Give Fundmakers Access to Reviews For admins and fundmakers to create, edit, and view Reviews, give Read, Edit, and Create access to the Review object. | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete |   | ## Give Reviewers Access to Reviews Give access for reviewers to complete a Review by granting Read and Edit access to the Review object. | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create |   | | Edit | √ | | Delete |   | # Set Field-Level Security for Portal Users Create a permission set that gives portal users read and edit access to the fields that they need to book appointments.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set field-level security access: | Education Cloud Full Access | Before you begin, make sure that you [turn on Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you set up the appointment feature, turn on Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud."). 1. Create a custom permission set for portal users. See [Create a Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. In your new permission set, click **Object Settings**. 3. Click **Skill Requirements**. 4. Click **Edit** and select read access for Skill Level. 5. Save your changes. 6. Similarly, provide access to these fields:
Object Field Access Type
Account Operating Hours Read
Assigned Resource Required Resource Edit
Service Appointment
  • Address
  • Appointment Type
  • Arrival Window End Time
  • Arrival Window Start Time
  • Contact
 Edit
Service Appointment
  • Actual End Time
  • Actual Start Time
 Read
Service Resource Skill
  • Effective End Date
  • Skill Level
 Read
Service Territory Address Read
Service Territory Member
  • Effective End Date
  • Operating Hours
 Read
Success Team Resource Assignment Type Read
Work Type
  • Block Time After Appointment
  • Block Time After Unit
  • Block Time Before Appointment
  • Block Time Before Unit
  • Operating Hours
  • Timeframe End
  • Timeframe End Unit
  • Time Frame Start
  • Time Frame Start Unit
 Read
Work Type Group Additional Information Read
# Set Fiscal Year Rollups NPSP supports rollups and reports based on your organization's fiscal year, as long as you configure your fiscal year according to the instructions below. - **[Configure Your Fiscal Year](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_set_fiscal_year_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow these steps to configure your fiscal year. - **[Set Rollups Based on Fiscal Year](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_set_fiscal_year_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to configure Customizable Rollups to calculate based on fiscal year. ## Configure Your Fiscal Year Follow these steps to configure your fiscal year. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Fiscal Year in the Quick Find box, then select **Fiscal Year**. 3. Select the **Standard Fiscal Year** radio button. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important NPSP does not support Custom Fiscal Years. You must select Standard Fiscal Year for NPSP rollups and reports to work properly. 4. Select the **Fiscal Year Start Month** based on your organization's fiscal year. 5. In the **Fiscal Year is Based On** field, choose The ending month. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important NPSP requires that your fiscal year setting be based on the ending month so that rollups calculate correctly. ![Fiscal Year Information settings.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/fiscal_year_edit.png) 6. Click **Save**. ## Set Rollups Based on Fiscal Year Learn how to configure Customizable Rollups to calculate based on fiscal year. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series videos about [NPSP Set Fiscal Year Rollups](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9DZxip-Svw). 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click ****Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**.** 3. Click **Configure Customizable Rollups**. 4. To use fiscal year for an existing rollup, in the row for the rollup, click the down arrow and then click **Edit**. To create a new rollup that will use fiscal year, click **New**. 5. Select the **Use Fiscal Year** checkbox. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The **Use Fiscal Year** option only appears if the Operation field is set to Years Donated, Best Year, Best Year Total OR if the Time Frame field is set to Years Ago. ![Account Best Gift Year rollup edit screen with Use Fiscal Year checkbox selected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/fiscal_year.png) 6. Click **Save.** The rollup values update with the next nightly batch job. # Set Funding Program Visibility Configure who can access your funding programs. - **[Choose Who Sees Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every organization is different, which is why we put the decision about who is allowed to see your Funding Programs in your hands. By default, Funding Programs are not visible to guest users on your portal, but you can choose to give access to your users based on your organization's preferences. - **[Make Funding Programs Visible to Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Open your Funding Programs to be visible to all users, even those who aren't registered on your portal. This is important if your organization wants grantseekers to find your available Funding Programs organically. ## Choose Who Sees Funding Programs Every organization is different, which is why we put the decision about who is allowed to see your Funding Programs in your hands. By default, Funding Programs are not visible to guest users on your portal, but you can choose to give access to your users based on your organization's preferences. ### Public Access Public access to Funding Programs allows your grantseekers to view all Funding Programs, regardless of status. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Select **Public Read Only** for the Funding Program's default external access. 5. Click **Save**. ### Criteria-based Access If you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site_ installer, you already have a sharing rule that gives external users, such as a grantseekers, Read access to the Funding Request and Requirement objects based on the user's Account or Contact. If you used the _Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template_ installer, you can create a similar sharing rule. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Funding Program Sharing Rules, then click **New**. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Shared Based on Status. The Rule Name autofills. 5. Optionally, enter a Description. 6. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 7. Select the Field. In this example, select **Status**. 8. Select the Operator. In this example, **select not equal to**. 9. Enter the Value. In this example, enter Planned, Completed, Aborted. This hides any Funding Program with that status from the user. 10. Select **All Customer Portal Users** from the Shared with dropdown. 11. Click **Save**. ## Make Funding Programs Visible to Guest Users Open your Funding Programs to be visible to all users, even those who aren't registered on your portal. This is important if your organization wants grantseekers to find your available Funding Programs organically. ### Update the Guest User Profile 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, then click **All Sites**. 3. Click **Builder** for your site. 4. Click ![Settings](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/enable_access_settings_2.png) to open Settings. 5. ![Click the guest user profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/make_funding_programs_visible.png) 6. Scroll to Funding Program under Custom Field-Level Security, then click **View**. 7. Click **Edit**. 8. Ensure the guest user profile has Read access to all fields. 9. Click **Save**. ### Create a Sharing Rule 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Sharing in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 3. Scroll down to Funding Program Sharing Rules, then click **New**. 4. Enter a Label. For example, Guest Access. 5. Press tab to autofill the Rule Name. 6. Optionally, enter a Description. 7. Select **Guest user access, based on criteria**. 8. Select the Field. In this example, select **Status**. 9. Select the Operator. In this example, select **not equal to**. 10. Enter the Value. In this example, enter Planned, Completed, Aborted. This displays only active Funding Programs to guest users. 11. ![Configure the sharing rule](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/make_funding_programs_visible_2.png) 12. Click **Save**. # Set Gift Batch Defaults in Education To enter gift batches more quickly and with fewer errors, set gift batch default values to automatically set common values for gift batches. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift batch defaults:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Gift batch default values apply to new and empty rows in the Gift Entry Grid. You can't set defaults for read-only fields, which are indicated by a lock icon when you hover over them. 1. From an unprocessed gift batch, select **Set Batch Defaults** from the drop-down menu. The Set Batch Defaults grid opens. 2. Fill out the fields in the grid that have values that are common to all of the gifts in the batch. Fields include: gift received date, amount, payment method, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits for the gifts. 3. Choose a method to save your changes. 1. To save the default values without continuing on the gift batch, click **Save and Close**. 2. To save the default values before continuing on to the gift batch, click **Save and Continue**. # Set Gift Batch Defaults in Nonprofit To enter gift batches more quickly and with fewer errors, set gift batch default values to automatically set common values for gift batches. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create a gift batch defaults:

FundraisingAccess permission set
Gift batch default values apply to new and empty rows in the Gift Entry Grid. You can't set defaults for read-only fields, which are indicated by a lock icon when you hover over them. 1. From an unprocessed gift batch, select **Set Batch Defaults** from the drop-down menu. The Set Batch Defaults grid opens. 2. Fill out the fields in the grid that have values that are common to all of the gifts in the batch. Fields include: gift received date, amount, payment method, outreach source code, campaign, designations, and soft credits for the gifts. 3. Choose a method to save your changes. 1. To save the default values without continuing on the gift batch, click **Save and Close**. 2. To save the default values before continuing on to the gift batch, click **Save and Continue**. # Set Permissions and Make Objects Available to Users Grant users access to Campus and Program Finder on your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure permissions and assign permission sets: Education Cloud Full Access
1. Update the default [external](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_owd_external_setting.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [internal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.admin_sharing.htm&language=en_US) access for the Educational Institution Searchable Profile object to Public Read Only. The default external access sharing setting applies to site users with a Customer Community Plus license. 2. [Assign an Education Cloud permission set to Experience Cloud site guest users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Users get different access to Education Cloud based on the license assigned to them."). 1. For the Educational Institution Searchable Profile object, give guest users read access to all the fields. 2. In the cloned copy of the Education Cloud Guest Access permission set, select these System Permissions: **Access Education Cloud as Guest** and **Use Criteria-Based Search and Filter for Experience Cloud**. 3. Make your Campus and Program Finder page publicly available. 1. [Turn on Public Access to your page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_general_settings.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Turn on public access in your site settings so that unauthenticated users can see and interact with Campus and Program Finder. 2. [Publish your site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_publish.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Set Required Admin Permissions to Manage NPSP Settings Almost all Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) configuration is managed from the NPSP Settings tab. In NPSP Settings, you can change key NPSP behaviors, turn on NPSP features, run a system health check, and view error logs. System admins and users with a profile containing the necessary permissions can access the NPSP settings. To grant a profile access to manage NPSP Settings, [add these system permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_system_perms.htm&type=5) to the appropriate user profile. - Author Apex - Customize Application - Modify All Data These permissions also grant access to many areas of Setup as well as edit access to all records in your Salesforce org. Don't grant these permissions lightly! If you're not an experienced Salesforce admin, ask for help before making any of these changes. ## Troubleshoot NPSP Settings Access If you can’t access NPSP Settings in your sandbox or production environments, try these troubleshooting tips. - Make sure that NPSP is installed correctly. - Make sure that the required Apex class permission is assigned to the user. See Also: - [Troubleshoot the Nonprofit Success Pack](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot.htm&language=en_US) # Set the Default Verification Status on Person Education Object Create a flow to set a default value on the Person Education object's Verification Status field when anyone creates a Person Education record without a value in that field.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Because applicants don't have Write access to the Person Education object, this flow is necessary to ensure that the Person Education record has the status of Not Verified. ![Diagram showing the flow to set the default verification status on Person Education object.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/verification_status_person_education_flow.png) ## Flow Element Details | Flow Element | What Does It Do? | | --- | --- | | Start | The creation of a person education record that has no value in the Verification Status field triggers the flow. | | Set Default Verification Status | Sets the value of the Verification Status field to Not Verified. | See Also: - [Flow Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow.htm&type=5) # Set Up a Due Diligence Process Implement a due diligence process for your nonprofit organization by setting up Action Plans, tax status search, and more. - **[Set Up a Due Diligence Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_due_diligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help grantmakers complete your organization’s due diligence process for grantseeking organizations. Use Action Plans on Accounts to define due diligence steps, related tasks, and documents to collect. - **[Action Plans Permission Sets for Admins and Grantmakers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_give_users_access_action_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the permission sets necessary to access Action Plans. - **[Create an Action Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_action_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Action Plan Template is the blueprint for an Action Plan. Create an Action Plan Template and define Tasks, Document Checklist Items, or a combination of both. - **[Configure Tax Status Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configuretaxstatussearch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it easy for your staff to search for United States-based organizations based on their tax information. - **[Add Verification Items to Other Records (Optional)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_add_vi_to_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow grantmakers to see Verification Items and, if configured, search for an organization’s tax status from a Funding Request, Requirement, Disbursement, or Contact record by putting the Verification Items component on an object’s page layout. # Set Up a Due Diligence Process Help grantmakers complete your organization’s due diligence process for grantseeking organizations. Use Action Plans on Accounts to define due diligence steps, related tasks, and documents to collect. Let’s review what makes up an Action Plan. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Action Plans have a variety of other uses. See the [Learn About Action Plans](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/action-plans-in-financial-services-cloud/learn-about-action-plans) Trailhead for more information. Before a grantmaker can create Action Plans, you need to set up an _Action Plan Template_. Think of an Action Plan Template as the blueprint for an Action Plan, where you break down and guide your grantmaking staff through a common business process. These common processes can be captured in an Action Plan Template using Tasks and Document Checklist Items. - _Tasks_ are actionable steps that need to be taken to determine if a grantseeker is eligible for funding. For example, a Task to send an email requesting Form 990s and audited financial documents. - _Document Checklist Items_, otherwise known as Verification Items, are where grantmakers define what needs to be collected about a grantseeking organization and store it. Grantmakers can track the status of documentation and verify the tax status of United States-based organizations using a Verification Check (if configured) found on the Verification Items tab on an Account record. Verification Checks are only available on Document Checklist Items. For example, when a grantmaker receives requested documentation, they can create a Verification Check from a Document Checklist Item, upload the files, and change the status to Accepted. When you publish an Action Plan Template, grantmakers can create Action Plans from an Account record using the blueprint you created. When a grantmaker creates an Action Plan from a published Action Plan Template, they see the Tasks and Document Checklist Items you added. If you enable it, grantmakers can also add their own Tasks and Document Checklist Items to an Action Plan. # Set Up a Portal Set up an Admissions Connect portal so that unauthenticated guest users can interact with your institutions. For example, create a portal for applicants to upload documents and check on their application status, or for alumni to connect with one another. - **[Learn About Admissions Connect Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Portals, also called Experience Cloud sites or Communities, are a great way to give users access to just what they need in an easy-to-use web page. For example, you can limit access for some application reviewers, like external users who are alumni, because they don’t need access to Cases, Opportunities, and other Salesforce records. Or maybe you want to create an applicant portal to let applicants view, edit, and submit their Application. - **[Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect. - **[Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define the data that your portal users can access. - **[Create an Admissions Connect Portal and Set Up the Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up an Admissions Connect portal using the prebuilt template or a template that you created from another Experience Cloud site, and review the site's settings to ensure that it suits your institution’s needs. - **[Build Out an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every portal is different. It’s up to you and your admissions staff to decide what works best for your reviewers and applicants. When building your portal, refer to the Admissions Connect Components reference for a list of components that are supported in Experience Builder. - **[Verify Your Applicant Portal Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the tasks to help ensure that applicants are successful in the portal. # Set Up a Queue Waiting Room Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Queue Waiting Rooms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue waiting rooms allow support staff members, front-desk staff, and one-stop centers to manage the flow of walk-ins. - **[Queue Waiting Rooms Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Queue Waiting Room Resource object and some related custom settings were released in Student Success Hub 2.23; additional settings and configurations were released in Student Success Hub 2.29 and 2.30. - **[Queue Waiting Rooms Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue waiting rooms build on queue management functionality, which in turn builds on Support Pools. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Queue Waiting Rooms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue waiting rooms require that support staff members (and Student Success Hub admins) have access to the object being used to represent the waiting room—either Facility or a custom object—and to the Queue Waiting Room Resource object. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Queue Waiting Rooms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Facility object and the Queue Waiting Room Resource object. - **[Configure SSH Queuing Settings for Queue Waiting Rooms](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue waiting rooms use a number of SSH Queuing Settings. Some are used to define the waiting room object while others are used by the Lightning components in the queue waiting room site for self check-in. - **[Create the Facility Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To let support and front-desk staff quickly access a queue waiting room's resources, add the Queue Waiting Room Resources related list to Facility (or your custom object) record pages. - **[Update the Support Queue Case Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the Support Queue Case page layout to include several fields used with queue waiting room self check-in. - **[Create or Update the Queue Waiting Room Resource Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides a Queue Waiting Room Resource page layout called Queue Waiting Room Resource Layout. Learn how to create and assign it. - **[Update the Support Pool Page Layout for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Support Pool Layout - Student page layout provided by Student Success Hub includes the Photo URL field. - **[Create a Queue Waiting Room (Facility) Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a Facility (or custom object) record for your queue waiting room. - **[Create a Queue Waiting Room Resource Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create one or more Queue Waiting Room Resource records for your queue waiting room that link the available Support Pools or Users to the waiting room's Facility (or custom object) record. - **[Build the Queue Waiting Room Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A queue waiting room site consists of a Home page that lists your Facility (or custom object) waiting room records. The record detail page for each Facility contains only the Lightning components that enable the check-in process: SSH Queue Welcome Banner and SSH Queue Self Check-In. - **[Configure Access to the Queue Waiting Room Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Designate your queue waiting room site as public and configure it with the appropriate permissions and members. ## Learn About Queue Waiting Rooms Queue waiting rooms allow support staff members, front-desk staff, and one-stop centers to manage the flow of walk-ins. Is your front-desk staff tired of using a beat-up notepad and a dried-up ballpoint pen to manage students lining up for walk-in appointments? We've got a solution for that! Queue waiting rooms use two objects. 1. The Facility object (in the Education Data Architecture package) represents the waiting room's location. Alternatively, you can use your own custom object. 2. The Queue Waiting Room Resource object in Student Success Hub represents the resources (individual support staff member Users or Support Pools) whom students are waiting to see. The other aspect of queue waiting rooms is a simple Experience Cloud site—separate from the student portal—that's accessed on a tablet or kiosk device by unauthenticated users. The site lets students and their proxies check in to a Support Pool or support staff member's queue waiting room. Checking in creates a Support Queue Case record with the Status of Queued (if you're using the recommended statuses in [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.")). The support or front-desk staff member manually verifies the student's identity, and then moves the student's Support Queue Case record through the queue. Student Success Hub installs a sample queue waiting room that uses the Facility object for the waiting room location and the Campus One-Stop Support Pool for the queue waiting room resource. ## Queue Waiting Rooms Release Information The Queue Waiting Room Resource object and some related custom settings were released in Student Success Hub 2.23; additional settings and configurations were released in Student Success Hub 2.29 and 2.30. To get queue waiting rooms up and running, complete the tasks in this article in the order presented. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Queue Waiting Rooms Prerequisites Queue waiting rooms build on queue management functionality, which in turn builds on Support Pools. Before setting up a queue waiting room, make sure you've already set up Support Pools and queue management. See [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") for everything you need to do before continuing. ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Queue Waiting Rooms Queue waiting rooms require that support staff members (and Student Success Hub admins) have access to the object being used to represent the waiting room—either Facility or a custom object—and to the Queue Waiting Room Resource object. For the required Facility and Queue Waiting Room Resource permissions, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."). Students don't need object or field permissions to use queue waiting rooms. (You _will_ need to set permissions for the public queue waiting room site, but we'll do that when we build the site later.) ## Configure Sharing Settings for Queue Waiting Rooms Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Facility object and the Queue Waiting Room Resource object. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses.") and [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). If you're using a custom object to represent the waiting room, configure its sharing settings as documented for the Facility object. ## Configure SSH Queuing Settings for Queue Waiting Rooms Queue waiting rooms use a number of SSH Queuing Settings. Some are used to define the waiting room object while others are used by the Lightning components in the queue waiting room site for self check-in. Student Success Hub configures most of these queuing settings for you. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to SSH Queuing Settings and then click **Edit**. 3. Specify the fields that define the waiting room object. Waiting Room Object Identifies the object being used to represent the waiting room. Enter the API name of the object. We recommend using the default, `hed__Facility__c`, which is the EDA Facility object. Waiting Room Resource Lookup Field Connects the waiting room object to the Queue Waiting Room Resource object. Specify the API name of the field on the Queue Waiting Room Resource object that looks up to the waiting room object. The default, `WaitingRoom__c`, looks up to Facility `hed__Facility__c`. 4. Next, specify the fields that define the text that appears in the queue waiting room Lightning components on the site. Waiting Room Display Name Specify the API name of the field used to represent the name of the waiting room. The default, `Name`, uses the value in the Facility Name field on the Facility object. The Waiting Room Display Name appears at the top of the queueWelcomeBanner component in the heading, "Welcome to \[Waiting Room Display Name\]!" If Waiting Room Display Name is blank or misconfigured, the banner just says, "Welcome!" ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To ensure that the welcome banner reads properly, consider including the word "the" at the beginning of the Waiting Room Display Name value, or make it a possessive. For example, if the Waiting Room Display Name is just "Career Services Waiting Room," the banner will read, "Welcome to Career Services Waiting Room!" Instead, make the display name "the Career Services Waiting Room," so that the banner reads, "Welcome to the Career Services Waiting Room!" Waiting Room Description Specify the API name of the field used to represent the description of the waiting room. The default, `hed__Description__c`, uses the value in the Description field on the Facility object. The Waiting Room Description appears under the Waiting Room Display Name in the queueWelcomeBanner component. If Waiting Room Description is blank or misconfigured, no description text appears. Waiting Room Instructions Specify the API name of the field used to represent the message that appears when a student has successfully checked in to the waiting room. If you configure a field to display the instructions, they appear on the final page of the check-in process under the text, "You're Checked In." ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important - There's no Facility field that can easily be used for Waiting Room Instructions, so add a custom field for this purpose before you configure the Waiting Room Instructions custom setting. For more information, see [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. - If you're using a custom object for your queue waiting room, make sure it includes fields that map to each of these settings. - Student Success Hub does _not_ configure Waiting Room Instructions. By default, the field is blank. 5. Finally, if you want to collect additional student information during queue waiting room check-in, enable any of these optional fields. (By default, Student Success Hub selects them all.) Show Student ID for Self Check-In Select to display the Student ID field so that students can enter their student ID number when they join a waiting room. Show Phone for Self Check-In Notifications Select to display the Phone field so that students can provide a phone number where they can be reached by voice or text when it's their turn to be seen. Show Email for Self Check-In Notifications Select to display the Email field so that students can provide an email address where they can be reached when they're at the top of the queue. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Student Success Hub doesn't currently offer any automation for queue waiting room notifications. Staff members who are managing the queue waiting room can call, text, or email the student when they change the Case status to Ready, indicating the student is up next. Alternatively, you can integrate with a third-party notification system. 6. Save your changes. ## Create the Facility Page Layout To let support and front-desk staff quickly access a queue waiting room's resources, add the Queue Waiting Room Resources related list to Facility (or your custom object) record pages. Student Success Hub provides a Facility page layout that you can use for queue waiting rooms: Facility Layout. Here's how to create and assign it if you need to. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Facility**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, then click **New**. 3. Click the Existing Page Layout menu and choose **HEDA Facility Layout**. Then, name your new layout Facility Layout and click **Save**. 4. Remove all Standard Buttons from the page except Edit. 5. In the Information area of the page, include only these fields: Facility Name, Parent Facility, Account, Facility Type, Capacity, and Description. 6. In the System Information area of the page, include only these fields: Created By and Last Modified By. 7. Click **Related Lists** in the palette and drag Queue Waiting Room Resources to the Related Lists section of the page. (You should have four related lists: Queue Waiting Room Resources, Facilities, Course Offerings, and Course Offering Schedules.) 8. Click the wrench icon for the Queue Waiting Room Resources related list to open its properties. 9. Drag the Support Pool and User fields to the Selected Fields. 10. Click **OK**, then click **Save**. Now, assign the page layout to your support staff and System Administrator profiles. 11. On the Page Layouts page for the Facility object, click **Page Layout Assignment**, then click **Edit Assignment**. 12. Select the support staff and System Administrator profiles you're using and then select the Facility Layout from the Page Layout to Use menu. 13. Save your changes. ## Update the Support Queue Case Page Layout Update the Support Queue Case page layout to include several fields used with queue waiting room self check-in. Student Success Hub provides a Support Queue Case page layout that includes the fields you need for queue waiting room self check-in. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Case**. 2. Click **Case Page Layouts**, then click **Support Queue Case Layout**. 3. Make sure the Status and Case Owner fields are in the Case Information section of the page. 4. Add these fields to the layout if they're not there already. - Description, which displays the content from the Comments field of the queue waiting room self check-in form - Proxy, which indicates whether the attendee is a proxy for the student - Proxy Name, which is the Proxy Name on the queue waiting room self check-in form - Student ID, if you're asking for Student ID on the queue waiting room self check-in form - Web Email, which is the Email provided for queue waiting room self check-in notifications - Web Name, which is the Student Name on the queue waiting room self check-in form - Web Phone, which is the Phone provided for queue waiting room self check-in notifications 5. Save your changes. ## Create or Update the Queue Waiting Room Resource Page Layout Student Success Hub provides a Queue Waiting Room Resource page layout called Queue Waiting Room Resource Layout. Learn how to create and assign it. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Queue Waiting Room Resource**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **New**. 3. For Page Layout Name, enter Queue Waiting Room Resource Layout, and then click **Save**. 4. Edit the Standard Buttons on the page to include only Edit. 5. Add a one-column section under the Standard Buttons and call it Information. 6. Add the Waiting Room, User, Support Pool, and Sort Order fields to the Information section. 7. Create another one-column section, place it under Information, and call it System Information. 8. Add the Created By and Last Modified By fields to the System Information section. 9. Save your changes. Now, assign the page layout to your support staff and System Administrator profiles. 10. On the Page Layouts page for the Queue Waiting Room Resource object, click **Page Layout Assignment**, then click **Edit Assignment**. 11. Select the support staff and System Administrator profiles you're using and then select the Queue Waiting Room Resource Layout from the Page Layout to Use menu. 12. Save your changes. ## Update the Support Pool Page Layout for Students The Support Pool Layout - Student page layout provided by Student Success Hub includes the Photo URL field. If desired, you can display a photo next to a Support Pool's name in the queue waiting room check-in process. To do so, first add the Photo URL field to the Support Pool page layout used in your student portal. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Support Pool**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, then click **Support Pool Layout - Student**. 3. Drag the Photo URL field to the Information section of the Support Pool Detail layout. 4. Save your changes. Then, add a photo to a Support Pool record by specifying the Photo URL. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, select **Support Pools** from the app navigation menu. 2. Select the Support Pool for which you're adding a photo. 3. Click the pencil icon next to Photo URL and enter the URL where the photo is stored. The photo at the URL appears on the page when students choose to join the Support Pool's queue waiting room. ## Create a Queue Waiting Room (Facility) Record Create a Facility (or custom object) record for your queue waiting room. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, select **Facilities** from the app navigation menu. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see Facilities in the menu, scroll to the bottom, click **Edit**, and then click **Add More Items**. Select **Facilities** and then click **Add 1 Nav Item**. Then, click **Save**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Facility Name, for example, Campus One-Stop. 4. Enter any other details for the item, such as the Description. 5. Save your changes. ## Create a Queue Waiting Room Resource Record Create one or more Queue Waiting Room Resource records for your queue waiting room that link the available Support Pools or Users to the waiting room's Facility (or custom object) record. 1. On the record page for the Facility you just created, click **Related**. 2. In the Queue Waiting Room Resources related list, click **New**. 3. Specify the fields for the new record. Waiting Room The waiting room associated with the queue record. In this example, the related Facility record, **Campus One-Stop**, is selected by default. Support Pool The Support Pool that's available to meet with students in the queue at the waiting room location. The Support Pool must have a queue as its owner. User The support staff member User who's available to meet with students in the queue at the waiting room location. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You must choose a Support Pool _or_ a User. You can't choose both. Sort Order When multiple resources are available in a waiting room, the Sort Order determines how the member cards appear on the page when students check in. If Sort Order is blank for all resources, Support Pools appear first, then Users, both ordered alphabetically by first name. If only some records have a Sort Order, those appear first in ascending numerical order, followed (alphabetically) by records without a specified Sort Order. 4. Save your changes. ## Build the Queue Waiting Room Site A queue waiting room site consists of a Home page that lists your Facility (or custom object) waiting room records. The record detail page for each Facility contains only the Lightning components that enable the check-in process: SSH Queue Welcome Banner and SSH Queue Self Check-In. There should be no other pages, no search, no tabs, and no navigation on the site. In fact, for security and trust, it's important not to add anything else. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the **Build Your Own (Aura)** template. 4. Click **Get Started**, enter a Name and URL for the site, and then click **Create**. 5. When the site is created, click **Builder** in the Workspaces view. 6. On the Home page, delete the placeholder Let's Get Started component. 7. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_component_icon.png) and drag the **Record List** component to the Content region of the page. 8. In the component's Properties pane, for Object Name, choose **Facility**. 9. Choose **Compact** from the Layout menu to minimize page functionality. Now, customize the Record Detail page to use the queue waiting room Lightning components. 10. Click the **Pages** menu and select **Record Detail**. 11. Delete the Record Banner and Record Information Tabs components. 12. Click the ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_component_icon.png) and drag the **SSH Queue Welcome Banner** component to the Content Header region of the page. 13. Drag the **SSH Queue Self Check-In** component under the welcome banner. Stop there. Don't publish the site yet. You can preview it, but you won't see much because first you have to configure access to it. ## Configure Access to the Queue Waiting Room Site Designate your queue waiting room site as public and configure it with the appropriate permissions and members. 1. In the Builder workspace for your queue waiting room site, click ![Settings icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_settings_icon.png). 2. On the General tab, select **Public can access the site** and then go to Setup by clicking the profile name under Guest User Profile. Start by putting all of the required permissions in a Permission Set. 3. Select **Permission Sets** in the Setup menu. 4. Click **New** and create a Permission Set. - For Label, use an intuitive name such as Waiting Room Site Guest. - For Description, enter Permissions to access the public queue waiting room from the site. - For License, choose **None**. - Save the Permission Set. 5. In Object Settings for the Permission Set, enable access to these objects and fields. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Read and/or Edit access to other fields on these objects may also be enabled. - Cases: Create access to the object and Edit access to the Support Pool, Description, Location, Proxy, Proxy Name, Student ID, Subtopic, Topic, Web Email, Web Name, and Web Phone fields - Events: Read access to the Type field - Facilities (or your custom waiting room object): Read access to the object and to the Description and Display Name fields. Also, set the Tab Settings to **Available** and **Visible**. - Queue Topic Settings: Read access to the object - Queue Waiting Room Resources: Read access to the object and to the Support Pool, Sort Order, User, and Waiting Room fields - Role Topic Settings: Read access to the object - Support Pools: Read access to the object and to the Description and Photo URL fields - Topics: Read access to the object and to the Label, Parent Topic, and Sort Order fields 6. In Apex Class Access for the Permission Set, enable access to these Apex classes: FeatureGateController, JoinCheckinQueueController, and QueueSelfCheckInController. 7. In System Permissions for the Permission Set, enable Access Activities. Now assign your Permission Set to your site's guest user. 8. On your Guest User Profile page, click **View Users** and then click the Full Name of the user. 9. Under Permission Set Assignments, click **Edit Assignments**. 10. Add your Waiting Room Site Guest Permission Set to the list of Enabled Permission Sets and save your changes. Next, configure the minimum access required to the records used by the queue waiting room. By default, org-wide defaults for Experience Cloud site guest users are Private for all objects, so create sharing rules to extend them. 11. Search for and select **Sharing Settings**. 12. Create sharing rules to extend access to the Facility (or your custom waiting room object), Queue Waiting Room Resource, Support Pool, and Topic records used by the queue waiting room. - For Rule Type, choose **Guest user access, based on criteria** - For Criteria, specify what makes sense for your waiting room - For Share with, choose your site guest user - For Access Level, choose **Read Only** Hang in there, you're almost done. Next, configure your support staff User site members. 13. Make sure that all support staff Users who are a Queue Waiting Room Resource are members of the site (so their names, photos, and availability are accessible). See [Manage Your Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize site emails, add members, and preview, test, publish and promote your Student Success Hub portal."). 14. From the Administration workspace, go to the Preferences page and select **See other members of this site**. 15. Finally, preview, test, and activate the site. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For security, limit the IP range of your queue waiting room site to those of your college campus. # Set Up a Review Process Configure the Review Workspace fields and map the review statuses. - **[Manage Review Fields on the Review Workspace](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_review_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the fields a reviewer completes on the Review Workspace. - **[Set Up Submitted Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_submitted_statuses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define which Review Statuses equal a submitted state. # Set Up a Student Portal Complete these tasks to get a student portal up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Student Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students experience Student Success Hub through an Experience Cloud site that you build for them. This site, or portal, is a place where your students manage their appointments, track their tasks, and connect with their success team. Portals meet students where they live: on their phones and devices. - **[Student Portal Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student portals have been part of Student Success Hub since the beginning. They need to be updated to add support for new features as those features are released or enhanced. To get your student portal up and running, complete the tasks in this article. - **[Object and Field Permissions for Student Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make a feature available and functional in the student portal, set permissions for it. - **[Balance Visibility and Security in the Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students need to be able to see data about support staff . There are two main approaches to controlling this visibility. Each approach depends on a combination of sharing settings and membership settings, and each has its own requirements and implications. - **[Create Your Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Start creating the site from a Digital Experiences template. - **[Add Components to the Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you've created your site, you're ready to add components in the Experience Builder workspace. ## Learn About Student Portals Students experience Student Success Hub through an Experience Cloud site that you build for them. This site, or portal, is a place where your students manage their appointments, track their tasks, and connect with their success team. Portals meet students where they live: on their phones and devices. To get you started, Student Success Hub installs a sample unpublished student portal, called Student Success Hub Portal, that you can explore and use for ideas for your own higher ed institution. It's not meant to be used in production without customization. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The sample portal doesn't include any student members. To work with the sample portal, add a student profile in the site's Administration workspace. For instructions, see [Manage Your Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize site emails, add members, and preview, test, publish and promote your Student Success Hub portal."). Every student portal is unique, so we'll document the essentials you need to set up a basic, mobile-optimized site using the Salesforce Customer Service template. Then, we'll show you how to build some recommended functionality using some Student Success Hub Lightning components. But ultimately, you and your support staff get to decide how you want to design and build a site that best supports your students' experience with Student Success Hub. For a comprehensive guide to the many aspects of Experience Cloud sites not covered here, see [Set Up and Manage Experience Cloud Sites](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/latest/latest/en-us/sfdc/pdf/communities.pdf). ## Student Portal Release Information Student portals have been part of Student Success Hub since the beginning. They need to be updated to add support for new features as those features are released or enhanced. To get your student portal up and running, complete the tasks in this article. ## Object and Field Permissions for Student Portals To make a feature available and functional in the student portal, set permissions for it. See [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Balance Visibility and Security in the Student Portal Students need to be able to see data about support staff . There are two main approaches to controlling this visibility. Each approach depends on a combination of sharing settings and membership settings, and each has its own requirements and implications. Regardless of the approach you choose, first set up your organization-wide default sharing settings and site preferences. 1. From Setup, go to the Sharing Settings page and make sure that **Default External Access** for the User object is Private. You don't want students to have wide open access to all Users in your org. For details on how to configure sharing settings for other objects for portal security, see [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). 2. From the site's Administration workspace, go to the Preferences page and select **See other members of this site**. Next, consider the following two approaches.

Approach

What It Does

Requirements and Implications

Create a User sharing rule that shares (read only) Internal User records with Customer Portal Users.

Enables a student to see and schedule with a support staff member on their success team.

How you define the sharing rule (group membership versus criteria, roles versus groups, and so on) depends on how you've defined your Internal and site User role hierarchy.

If a support staff member is also a site member, the student can click the staff member's name to see their profile (and schedule an appointment directly from their profile page, if configured).

If a staff member is not a site member, the student clicking the staff member's name will encounter a permissions error.

Select Site User Visibility in Sharing Settings.

Enables any site member (as defined in the Members view in the site's Administration workspace) to see any other member.

You must add support staff members as site members—either by profile or permission set. Otherwise they won't be visible to students.

Important
Important Students can see support staff as well as other students in the site. This level of visibility typically brings with it the added responsibility of moderating the student portal. Consider this implication carefully if you choose this approach.
## Create Your Student Portal Start creating the site from a Digital Experiences template. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **All Sites**. (If you don't see this option, enable Digital Experiences first.) 2. Click **New**. 3. Select one of the templates that supports drag-and-drop components in Experience Builder (look for tiles that show the lightning bolt icon). For example, choose the Customer Service template. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name and the part of the site's URL that identifies the portal. 6. Click **Create**. ## Add Components to the Site Now that you've created your site, you're ready to add components in the Experience Builder workspace. See [Student Portal Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the custom Lightning components you can use in a Student Success Hub student portal.") to learn how to configure the components that work best for your institution's needs. # Set Up a Virtual Queued Support Experience Complete these tasks to allow students to check in to a virtual queue waiting room and join a web meeting for a fully remote support appointment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Virtual Queued Support Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the general steps to set up a virtual queue. - **[Configure the Virtual Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Replace your physical waiting room with a virtual one by adding your queue waiting room site to your institution's larger, authenticated Student Success Hub student portal. That way, students can securely join the queue from their mobile device or computer. - **[Create an Automated Email Notification Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a student is at the top of the queue, send an automated notification that includes a link so they can join the virtual meeting. - **[Review the Virtual Queued Support Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how students access and use a virtual queue. ## Learn About Virtual Queued Support Experiences Understand the general steps to set up a virtual queue. You remember the Before Time, right? When a waiting room was actually a room, with chairs and magazines and students staring at their phones, half-listening for their name to be called? With Student Success Hub, you can transform the physical waiting room at your campus one-stop or other support office—as well as the in-person appointments that students are waiting for—into a completely virtual queued support experience. Using just a bit of admin elbow grease, you can configure a virtual queue waiting room that students can join from anywhere, using their mobile device. When it's their turn to be seen, they receive a notification with a web meeting link, allowing them to join a virtual meeting with a support staff member. To create a virtual one-stop center or other virtual queued support experience, from the waiting room to the appointment itself, you need to do two things: First, make the queue waiting room available to students on an Experience Cloud site, preferably one that requires authentication. Second, use process automation to send a notification to students with a link to a web meeting. We'll show you a basic example of how to make a queue waiting room available in your student portal, and how to create a workflow automation process that sends an email notification to students. Use it as a starting point for your own institution's virtual queue management workflow. Before continuing, make sure you've [set up queue management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and [set up a queue waiting room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org."), including building and configuring access to a queue waiting room through a kiosk or tablet device. This setup article picks up where those tasks end. ## Configure the Virtual Queue Waiting Room Replace your physical waiting room with a virtual one by adding your queue waiting room site to your institution's larger, authenticated Student Success Hub student portal. That way, students can securely join the queue from their mobile device or computer. 1. In Setup, locate the static URL for your queue waiting room site. Search for and then select **All Sites**. Then, look at the URL column for the site. Add the URL as a button on your student portal Home page, or create a dedicated page for the one-stop center's virtual check-ins. Whatever works for your institution. You could even add the link to a page on your institution's website. 2. Since we're going to send students an email notification when someone is ready to meet with them, students need to provide an email address when they join the queue waiting room. Make sure the **Show Email for Check-In Notifications** field is selected in SSH Queuing Settings, and deselect Show Phone for Self Check-In Notifications. That way, the Email field will appear and be required on the queue waiting room self check-in form. You might also want to customize the Waiting Room Instructions, which appear when the student has successfully checked in to the waiting room. For example, write something like, You'll receive an email with a web meeting link when someone is ready to see you. For more information about the fields, see [Set Up a Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Create an Automated Email Notification Process When a student is at the top of the queue, send an automated notification that includes a link so they can join the virtual meeting. Using Process Builder is one way to automate the sending of those notifications. If you integrate with a third-party SMS system, you can automate text-based notifications, but for our basic workflow, we'll use built-in Salesforce email functionality. Our sample process depends on two items: the email itself, which contains the meeting link, and an alert that generates the email to the student Contact. The process sends the email when someone is ready to see the student. ### Create the Email Template with the Web Meeting Link Use a Salesforce email template to create an email that includes a web meeting link. The email is sent to the waiting student when someone is ready to meet with them. 1. In Setup, search for and then select **Classic Email Templates**. 2. Click **New Template**. 3. Choose the type of template you want to use, such as **Custom**. 4. Store the template in the Folder of choice and give it a name like Queue Case Ready. 5. Select **Available for Use**. 6. For Subject, enter something like A Support Staff Member Is Ready to See You. 7. Use the merge fields to include the Case custom Location field in the body of the email. For example, the email body might say: A support staff member is ready to meet with you. Click the link to join the meeting. {!Case.sfal\_\_Location\_\_c} 8. Create the text-only version of the email and save the template. 9. Send a test email to make sure the template reads as expected. ### Create the Email Alert Create an email alert that generates an email, based on the template, to the student Contact who's waiting in the queue. The alert doesn't actually send the email. Process Builder uses it to send the email. For more information about email alerts, see [Email Alert Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_wfalerts.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. 1. In Setup, search for and then select **Email Alerts**. 2. Click **New Email Alert**. 3. Specify email alert details. Description and Unique Name For the description, enter your email template, Queue Case Ready. Press Tab to automatically populate the Unique Name field. Object Select **Case**. Email Template Select **Queue Case Ready**. Recipient Type and Recipients For Search, select **Related Contact**. Then, add **Related Contact: Contact Name** to the Selected Recipients list. 4. Save your changes. ### Create the Process that Sends the Email Finally, create a process that sends the email alert when a staff member changes the Status of the Case to Ready. 1. In Setup, search for and then select **Process Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the process Queue Case Ready, and press Tab to automatically populate the API Name field. 4. Instruct the process to start when **A record changes**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Build the process based on the Case object. For criteria, instruct the process to send the email alert immediately when the Case Status is set to Ready. You may want to set other conditions as well, such as requiring Record Type to be Support Queue. It's up to you. The process looks something like this. ![Process Builder criteria for Case Status set to Ready and Record Type set to Support Queue](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_queue_virtual_process.png) 7. Save and activate the process. ## Review the Virtual Queued Support Experience Understand how students access and use a virtual queue. Using their phone or computer, the student joins the queue waiting room from your student portal. They provide their email address under Notification Information when they sign in. ![The queue waiting room self check-in form with the Student Name and Email fields populated](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_queue_virtual_checkin.png) When the student signs in, the Case is added to the support queue, as usual. ![A Case in the queue, with the Queued status](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_queue_virtual_caseadded.png) In Student Success Hub, when the support staff member is ready to meet, they go to the Support Queue Case record detail page, enter the web meeting link in the Location to Meet field in the Queue Actions panel, and click **Ready**. ![The Queue Actions panel with a web meeting URL in the Location to Meet field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_queue_virtual_locationtomeet.png) The Queue Case Ready process you created earlier sends the email notification to the student. The support staff member associates the Case with the Contact record, and then they can join the web meeting, too. # Set Up a Volunteers for Salesforce Website Create and customize your website to provide a self-service portal for volunteers, and determine who can access information. - **[Set Up Your Volunteers for Salesforce Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_make_part_web.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how you can save time when you manage volunteering activities by creating Volunteers for Salesforce pages that you embed in an existing website. - **[Customize Your Volunteers for Salesforce Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_customize_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand which pages you can customize on your volunteer website, and how. - **[Configure Data Access for Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_configure_data_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Determine how volunteers interact with information on your website, and who can access data. # Set Up Academic Session Record Page Configure the record page for the academic session object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the academic session record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_session_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the Academic Session object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_session_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the academic session record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_session_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the Academic Session object in Lightning App Builder. Create a record page for the academic session object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, add components to it. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the academic session record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Academic Session record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/academic_session.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Academic Session**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Academic Session Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Academic Term Enrollment Record Page Configure the record page for the academic term enrollment object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the academic term enrollment record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_enrollment_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the academic term enrollment object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_enrollment_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the academic term enrollment record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_enrollment_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the academic term enrollment object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, add components to it. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the academic term enrollment record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Academic Term Enrollment record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/academic_term_enrollment.png) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Academic Term Enrollment**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Academic Term Enrollment Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Academic Term Record Page Configure the record page for the academic term object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the academic term record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the academic term object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the academic term record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the academic term object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, add components to it. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the academic term record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Academic Term record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/academic_term.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Academic Term**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Academic Term Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Academic Year Record Page Configure the record page for the academic year object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the academic year record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_year_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the academic year object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_year_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the academic year record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_year_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the academic year object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the academic year record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Academic Year record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/academic_year.png) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Academic Year**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Academic Year Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Account Update Request Provide a simple way for grantseekers to request an update to their organization’s information. - **[Learn About Account Update Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_acct_update_req.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An Account Update Request is a way for a grantseeker to share their organization's information with you and have their organization associated with their Contact record. When a grantseeker starts a request, they complete a form with important information about their organization, such as the organization's name, address, and phone number. This information comes to your org in the form of a Case. After a grantmaker reviews the request, the request is either reviewed and approved or denied through deleting the Case or simply not acting on it. - **[Set Up Matching and Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_acct_update_req.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The way an Account Update Request is processed is dependent on the grantmaker’s actions and your org’s duplicate and matching rules. If duplicate and matching rules aren’t set up, a new Account will be created for the organization when the request is approved, even if there is an existing Account. ## Learn About Account Update Requests An Account Update Request is a way for a grantseeker to share their organization's information with you and have their organization associated with their Contact record. When a grantseeker starts a request, they complete a form with important information about their organization, such as the organization's name, address, and phone number. This information comes to your org in the form of a Case. After a grantmaker reviews the request, the request is either reviewed and approved or denied through deleting the Case or simply not acting on it. So what happens when a request is approved? There are a few paths an Account Update Request can take when a grantmaker processes it, depending on your org's [duplicate](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=duplicate_rules_map_of_reference.htm&type=5) and [matching rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=matching_rule_map_of_reference.htm&type=5). - If a grantseeker submits a request for an organization that doesn’t have an existing Account record, an Account is created for the organization and is associated with the grantseeker’s Contact. For example, a new grantseeker, Ali Melik, submits a request for the Portree Arts Council. Since the Portree Arts Council is a new organization, an Account is created for them. The Portree Arts Council Account is also associated with Ali’s Contact record. - If a grantseeker submits a request for an organization with an existing Account, the existing Account is associated with the grantseeker’s Contact. For example, a newly hired program officer, Ellen Perez, submits a request to associate her organization, STEPS, to her profile in the grantee portal. STEPS is a long-standing grantee and has an existing Account. Depending on the duplicate and matching rules set up by an org, the grantmaker can select the existing Account record for STEPS, which is then associated with Ellen’s Contact record. - If an Account is created that's a duplicate of an existing Account, a new Account is created for the grantseeker’s organization despite the matching Account. For example, the Six Sides Fund has a duplicate rule that matches on the address field. Two grantseeking organizations, STEPS and Portree Arts Council, have a co-shared workspace. Since both STEPS and Portree Arts Council have the same address, a separate Account exists for each organization. ## Set Up Matching and Duplicate Rules The way an Account Update Request is processed is dependent on the grantmaker’s actions and your org’s duplicate and matching rules. If duplicate and matching rules aren’t set up, a new Account will be created for the organization when the request is approved, even if there is an existing Account. ### Create a Matching Rule 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Matching in the Quick Find box, then click **Matching Rules**. 3. Click **New Rule**. 4. Select an Object. For example, **Account**. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Enter a Rule Name. For example, Account Name Matching Rule. 7. Optionally, enter a Description. 8. Select a Field. For example, **Account Name**. 9. Select a Matching Method, such as **Exact** or **Fuzzy**. 10. Select **Match Black Fields** if you want blank fields to be considered matches on your matching rule. Otherwise, leave unselected. 11. Click **Save**. 12. Click **Activate**. ### Create a Duplicate Rule 1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Duplicate in the Quick Find box, then click **Duplicate Rules**. 3. Click **New Rule**, then select an object. For example, select **Account**. 4. Enter a Rule Name, such as Account Name Duplicate Rule. 5. Optionally, enter a Description. 6. Select if you want to enforce sharing rules or bypass sharing rules. In this example, select **Enforce sharing rules**. 7. Select **Block** from Action On Create and Action On Edit. 8. Select the matching rule that was just created. For example, **Account Name Matching Rule**. 9. Optionally, select conditions for the duplicate rule to run. 10. Click **Save**. 11. Click **Activate**. # Set Up Accounting Field Mappings Copy data from your source CRM objects' fields to custom fields on the Transaction Journal object, and choose whether to retain or update the copied value when your source data changes. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license is enabled, with Data Pipelines turned on and at least one active user with the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger permission set can access this feature. **How**: Create and add custom fields to the Transaction Journal object and to its page layout. Map source fields to those custom fields by creating accounting field mappings on an accounting set. If you’re editing an existing accounting set, deactivate it first. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Transaction Journal Fields in Accounting Subledger (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_tj_fields.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Accounting Field Mappings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_field_mappings.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Create Accounting Field Mappings (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_create_accounting_field_mappings.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Manage Accounting Sets (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_manage_accounting_sets.htm) # Set Up Accounting Sets Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records. Specify which objects—standard or custom—and fields store your source data and how to generate transaction journal records from it. Accounting sets support from one to four objects, including the Fund Account object. Each accounting set represents a set of financial data, such as revenue from gifts or expenses from fees. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license is enabled, and where at least one active user has the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only Salesforce admins with the Manage Accounting Subledger permission set can access this feature. See Also: - [Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_sets.htm) # Set Up Admission Reviews Simplify the application review process by providing a streamlined, centralized, and customizable experience that increases efficiency and productivity for your admissions staff. - **[Configure Application Review Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application Reviews can be assigned using automation or manually from the Application or Application Review record pages. You can even use a mass action from the Application list view to select multiple Applications and assign multiple reviewers. Most institutions use a combination of automation and manual assignment. - **[Customize the Application Review Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the application review setup and configure it to suit your staff’s tasks. - **[Set Up Reviewer Feedback Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the questions that you want your reviewers to consider when they assess applicants. - **[Set Up Quick Document Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let verifiers and other members of your admissions staff verify application documents directly from the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components or the Document Checklist Item record page. From the Document Checklist Item record page, admissions staff can also upload new versions of documents and automatically see the updated document in the preview. # Set Up Admissions Connect App Basics Get started with the Admissions Connect app by assigning the default Lightning record pages and setting up the navigation menu. - **[Assign Lightning Record Pages as the App Default](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides Lightning record pages that get assigned to the Admissions Connect app during installation. We provide Lightning pages for the Application, Application Review, Application Material Type, and Document Checklist Item objects. - **[Add Items to the App Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, the Admissions Connect app includes Applications, Application Reviews, Accounts, Contacts, and Document Checklist Items navigation menu items. You can add other items to the navigation menu. ## Assign Lightning Record Pages as the App Default Admissions Connect provides Lightning record pages that get assigned to the Admissions Connect app during installation. We provide Lightning pages for the Application, Application Review, Application Material Type, and Document Checklist Item objects. For full details about these Lightning pages, see [Admissions Connect Default Page Configurations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_default_page_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides default page layouts, compact layouts, Lightning record pages, and other assets for many of the objects that the app uses. Most assets are unmanaged, which means you don't receive updates automatically. Use the information in this article to keep up-to-date with releases."). Verify that the default Lightning pages are assigned to the Admissions Connect app. To see which Lightning pages are assigned to the Admissions Connect app, complete these steps.  1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Click **Edit** in the action menu dropdown for the Admissions Connect app. 3. Click **Pages** in the top banner. A menu shows with a list of the Lightning pages assigned to the app. 4. Optionally, click **Open Page** to see the list of Lightning pages in a table view. 5. Click **Cancel** or the back button to return to Setup. To assign a Lightning page to the app, complete these steps. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click the Lightning page you want to assign. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Click **Activation**. 5. Click **App Default** and then click **Assign as App Default**. 6. Select the Admissions Connect app, then click **Next**. 7. Save your changes and use the back button to return to Setup. ## Add Items to the App Navigation Menu By default, the Admissions Connect app includes Applications, Application Reviews, Accounts, Contacts, and Document Checklist Items navigation menu items. You can add other items to the navigation menu. We recommend you give only select members of your admissions staff access to the Action Plan Template, Application Material Mapping, and Application Material Type objects. Typically, only administrative staff, such as an Admissions Director, work with these objects.  First, add an item to the app navigation menu. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. On the row for Admissions Connect, click the dropdown menu and click **Edit**. 3. Click **Navigation Items**, then add the item you want, like **Action Plan Templates**, to the Selected Items list. 4. Save your changes. Next, set tab visibility for the new items in a permission set or profile. The default Admissions Connect permission sets already include some basic tab visibility. For more information, see [Admissions Connect Permission Set Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note For some objects you can only set tab visibility on the profile. This applies to these objects: Accounts, Action Plans, Action Plan Templates, and Document Checklist Items.  To update tab visibility in a permission set: 1. From Setup, search for and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click the name of the permissions set you want to edit. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click an object name, then click **Edit**. 5. In the Tab Settings, select the Visible checkbox. 6. Save your changes. To update tab visibility in a profile: 1. From Setup, search for and select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the profile name. 3. In the Tab Settings section, update the tab settings to include the new objects. 4. Save your changes. See Also: [Tab Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=permissions_tab_settings_ref.htm) in Salesforce Help # Set Up Advanced Search Help students find course sections that meet their specific criteria by configuring Advanced Search. Then, make Advanced Search available on your Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations and configure Advanced Search: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you start, [set up Course Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make upcoming and past courses and section details easily searchable on your Experience Cloud site, configure Course Search.") and [turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). 1. Update your existing course offering records in bulk to populate the Availability Status field automatically. Use Data Loader, an Apex script, or another method of your choice. This record update makes sure that Advanced Search returns accurate availability results for course offerings created before Summer '26. If you have many closed courses, set those course offerings to Closed for completed academic sessions. Then update only current and future course offering records. 2. To use the Section Meeting Days search field, [set up the Section Meeting Days field for Advanced Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_meeting_days_for_advanced_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide students with a search field based on section meeting days. To use the Section Meeting Days field in Advanced Search, grant field access and update the day-of-week fields on course offering schedule records by modifying a flow."). The setup process requires you to modify a flow to update the day-of-week fields on course offering schedule records and grant the necessary field access. 3. Make Advanced Search available on your Experience Cloud site. 1. From Setup, find and select **Digital Experiences**, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Open the Experience Builder of your Experience Cloud site. 3. On your Course Search page in Experience Builder, click the **Course Search** component. 4. In the Advanced Search Fields section on the configuration panel, select the search fields that you want to make available in Advanced Search. 5. To add more fields, in the Additional Advanced Search Fields section, click **Select**, and then add up to 15 fields. Advanced Search supports date, checkbox, picklist, and number fields on the Course Offering, Learning Course, and Learning objects. 6. Save your selections. 7. Publish the site. # Set Up Alerts Get Alerts up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Learn About Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Alerts help support staff stay on top of concerns about grades, attendance, and other areas that impede student success. The Alert custom object is included with Student Success Hub. Every Alert is related to a Student Record Case and, of course, to the student Contact associated with that Case. - **[Alerts Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Alert custom object was released with Student Success Hub 1.1, and Alerts have been enhanced in subsequent releases. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the required permissions for the Alert object and fields. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Alert object. - **[Customize and Assign Alert Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Alert record types determine the types of Alerts that support staff can create. - **[Assign the Compact Layout to the Alert Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides the Alerts Compact Layout. Make it the primary layout so that it appears on the Alert Lightning record page. - **[Confirm or Customize the Alerts Related Lists on the Student Record Case Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Record Case Layout page layout included with Student Success Hub includes an Alerts tab with two Alerts related lists: one for Unresolved Alerts and one for Resolved Alerts. Review them now and customize them if desired. - **[Confirm or Customize Alerts List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub includes a My Open Alerts list view that allows support staff to quickly and easily view pending Alerts. The list view includes all Alerts that are owned by the support staff User and are unresolved—that is, whose Status is not a Closed value. - **[Confirm or Customize the Lightning Record Page for Alert Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To give support staff a detailed view of Alert records, Student Success Hub includes a Lightning record page layout called Support Alert. - **[Create Additional Alert Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Alert object is related to Course Connection and Program Enrollment through preconfigured Alert relationships. Do your support staff members want to receive Alerts for other reasons, such as for attendance or behavior issues? If so, create Alert relationships for other Contact-related objects using the Alert Relationship custom metadata type. Just remember, the Alert object can have only one relationship at a time. - **[Enable Status History Tracking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Field history tracking is enabled by default on the Alert custom object. We recommend that you also enable tracking for the Alert Status field, for comprehensive tracking of an Alert's status history. - **[Enable Mass Updating of Alert Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it easy for support staff to update the statuses of multiple Alerts at once. For mass updating Alert statuses for multiple students, set up Alerts list views for that purpose. For mass updating Alert statuses for an individual student, you can enable an option in the Alert related lists on the Student Record Case. However, this option isn't recommended if you use different statuses for different Alert record types. - **[Control Alert Assignment Feed Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When an Alert is assigned to someone other than the User who updated the Alert—that is, when the Alert record is edited and results in assignment to another User—Student Success Hub posts an update to the Alert's Chatter feed. The post @mentions the assigned User, notifying the assignee and followers of the Alert about the assignment. To turn off these automatic posts, disable the trigger handler that creates them. ## Learn About Alerts Alerts help support staff stay on top of concerns about grades, attendance, and other areas that impede student success. The Alert custom object is included with Student Success Hub. Every Alert is related to a Student Record Case and, of course, to the student Contact associated with that Case. Alerts can also be related to: - a Program Enrollment record, - a Course Connection record, - a Case record other than the Student Record Case, or - any other object that can be related to the Contact, such as a Term Grade record or even another Alert record. However, the Alert object can only have one Alert Relationship at a time. Student Success Hub provides triggers that enforce referential integrity when Alert records are created and updated, including automatically relating the Alert to the active Student Record Case for the specified student Contact, and the correct Program Enrollment, Course Connection, or another object, if one is specified. Student Success Hub also provides a preconfigured, customizable set of Alert record types that include the reasons for concern. For example, the Academic Alert record type offers reasons such as Grade Concern, Attendance Concern, and Academic Integrity (in higher ed orgs) or Grade Concern, Missing/Late Assignment, and Participation Concern (in K-12 orgs). ## Alerts Release Information The Alert custom object was released with Student Success Hub 1.1, and Alerts have been enhanced in subsequent releases. To get Alerts up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don’t know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note In higher ed orgs, Student Success Hub installs a Lightning record page for Alerts and a compact layout for the Alert page's highlights panel. It also adds the Alerts object to the app navigation menu and provides other configurations. If you didn't install the higher ed Alert configurations provided by Student Success Hub, or if you originally installed an earlier version of Student Success Hub that doesn't include them, complete [these additional Alert setup tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these Alert setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier.") as needed for your org. Then return to this article and continue. ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Alerts Learn about the required permissions for the Alert object and fields. See [Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."), [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Alerts Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Alert object. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Customize and Assign Alert Record Types Alert record types determine the types of Alerts that support staff can create. In higher ed orgs, Student Success Hub installs these Alert record types: Academic, Career, Financial Aid, Health, and Housing. In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub provides these default Alert record types: Academic, Attendance, Behavior, Career, Financial Aid, Health, and Housing. Each record type has an associated set of default reasons for concern, defined in the Alert object's Reason picklist field. Some picklist values are shared across record types, while others are unique to one record type. For example, consider the default Reason value Missing/Late Application. It's shared by the Career, Financial Aid, and Housing record types. In contrast, Missing/Late Assignment is a Reason only for the Academic record type. Customize the record types and their associated reasons as needed, and then assign the record types to the support staff profile. See [Assign Alert and Success Plan Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_assign_record_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give staff and admins access to record types needed to work with Alerts and Success Plans in Student Success Hub."). ## Assign the Compact Layout to the Alert Record Page Student Success Hub provides the Alerts Compact Layout. Make it the primary layout so that it appears on the Alert Lightning record page. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. On the Compact Layouts page, click **Compact Layout Assignment** and then click **Edit Assignment**. 3. Set Primary Contact Layout to **Alerts Compact Layout**. 4. Save your changes. ## Confirm or Customize the Alerts Related Lists on the Student Record Case Page The Student Record Case Layout page layout included with Student Success Hub includes an Alerts tab with two Alerts related lists: one for Unresolved Alerts and one for Resolved Alerts. Review them now and customize them if desired. 1. In Student Success Hub, go to a Student Record Case page. 2. Click the **Alerts** tab. If desired, edit the component—for example, remove the Resolved Alerts related list or remove the Change Status button from the Resolved Alerts related list. 3. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/resources-product/images/setup.png) and choose **Edit Page**. 4. Make your edits and save your changes. If you're using a different Student Record Case layout, here's how to manually add the Alerts related lists to the page. 1. On any Student Record Case record, click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/resources-product/images/setup.png) in the page header and select **Edit Page**. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, click the Tabs component and in the Properties pane, click **Add Tab**. 3. Click the newly added tab in the Tabs list, change the Tab Label to **Custom**, and for the Custom Tab Label, enter Alerts. 4. Click **Done**. 5. If desired, drag the Alerts tab to a different position in the Tabs list. For example, make it appear first and make it the Default Tab for the page. Now, add two instances of the Alerts Related List component to the page: one for unresolved Alerts and one for resolved Alerts. 6. With the Alerts tab selected in the Tabs component on the page, drag the Alerts Related List component from the menu of components to the Alerts tab. Then drag another one below the first. By default, the two related lists show Unresolved Alerts, so change one to show resolved Alerts. 7. Select the second Unresolved Alerts component and, in the Properties pane, set the Status field to Resolved. Also, verify whether to Hide or Show New Button on this component. 8. Save your changes. Now you have two Alerts related lists on the Student Record Case: one for Unresolved Alerts and one for Resolved Alerts. ## Confirm or Customize Alerts List Views In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub includes a My Open Alerts list view that allows support staff to quickly and easily view pending Alerts. The list view includes all Alerts that are owned by the support staff User and are unresolved—that is, whose Status is not a Closed value. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, choose **Alerts** from the app navigation menu and select the My Open Alerts list view. It includes these fields: - Student Contact - Alert # - Record Type - Priority - Reason - Status - Created Date 2. Customize the Visible Fields and create other list views as desired. Be sure to keep Record Type, because record types determine the reason for the Alert. 3. Save your changes. If you need to, here's how create a similar Alerts list view to give support staff the information they need to process Alerts in their caseloads. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, choose **Alerts** from the app navigation menu and select the All list view. 2. Click ![List View Controls icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_list_view_controls_icon.png) and select **Select Fields to Display**. 3. Make sure these fields are in the Visible Fields list: Student Contact, Alert #, Record Type, Student Record, Reason, Status, Created By, and Created Date. 4. Save your changes. ## Confirm or Customize the Lightning Record Page for Alert Records To give support staff a detailed view of Alert records, Student Success Hub includes a Lightning record page layout called Support Alert. In K-12 orgs, the layout features a path to guide support staff through the Alert process. A sample Attendance Alert path is included. If your org doesn't include the path, you can add it, and you can customize the path to work with other Alert record types. You can customize the page layout in other ways, too. For example, add the Case field to the layout to give your support staff a way to quickly create a Case escalation from an Alert record. From Setup, search for and then select **Lightning App Builder**, then click **Edit** for the Support Alert page. ![The K-12 Support Alert Lightning record page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_alert_path.png) ## Create Additional Alert Relationships The Alert object is related to Course Connection and Program Enrollment through preconfigured Alert relationships. Do your support staff members want to receive Alerts for other reasons, such as for attendance or behavior issues? If so, create Alert relationships for other Contact-related objects using the Alert Relationship custom metadata type. Just remember, the Alert object can have only one relationship at a time. ### Create a Lookup Field for the Related Object 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then click **New**. 3. Select **Lookup Relationship** as the data type and click **Next**. 4. Choose an object to relate to the Alert. For example, choose **Attendance Event**. Click **Next**. 5. Enter a Field Label and Field Name. For example, enter Attendance Event Lookup for the Field Label, and then press Tab to populate Attendance\_Event\_Lookup for the Field Name. Click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Lookup filters make sure support staff get only the Alerts related to a specific student. For example, the filter criteria Alert: Student Contact ID EQUALS Program Enrollment: Contact ID filters out enrollments that aren't related to a student. 6. Set the appropriate field-level security. Click **Next**. 7. Select the page layouts that should include the new field. Click **Next**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't add the Related Record Name and Related Record ID fields to any page layouts. Otherwise, someone might update them manually. 8. Name the related lists. 9. Save your changes. ### Create an Alert Relationship Custom Metadata Type 1. From Setup, search for then select **Custom Metadata Types**. 2. Click **Manage Records** next to Alert Relationship. 3. Click **New**. 4. Enter a value for Label and Alert Relationship Name. 5. Enter a value for Relationship Field on Alert Object. Make sure this value is the API name of the field, otherwise the configuration won't work. For example, if you created a field named Attendance\_Event\_Lookup when you created the lookup field earlier, enter Attendance\_Event\_Lookup\_\_c here. 6. Save your changes. On the Alert record, the Related To field might take a couple of minutes to populate. If you don't see it after a few minutes, check the permissions and field-level security on the object you're trying to relate. ## Enable Status History Tracking Field history tracking is enabled by default on the Alert custom object. We recommend that you also enable tracking for the Alert Status field, for comprehensive tracking of an Alert's status history. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. On the Fields & Relationships page, click **Set History Tracking**. 3. Select the **Status** field. 4. Save your changes. ## Enable Mass Updating of Alert Statuses Make it easy for support staff to update the statuses of multiple Alerts at once. For mass updating Alert statuses for multiple students, set up Alerts list views for that purpose. For mass updating Alert statuses for an individual student, you can enable an option in the Alert related lists on the Student Record Case. However, this option isn't recommended if you use different statuses for different Alert record types. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also configure Alerts list views and related lists with buttons that allow support staff to create Cases and apply Success Plans to multiple Alerts at once. These mass actions can be applied even when Alerts are of different record types. See [Set Up Mass Actions for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_mass_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your support staff to use mass action buttons to create Cases and apply Success Plans for multiple Alerts."). ### Enable Mass Updates from Alerts List Views 1. Go to a custom Alerts list view or create a new one. 2. Filter the list view to show a single record type only. List views showing multiple record types can't be configured to allow mass editing. 1. From the list view controls menu, select **Edit List Filters**. 2. Click **Add Filter**. 3. Specify the Record Type field, the equals operator, and the record type value that you're filtering for, and then click **Done**. 4. Save your changes. 3. Repeat the steps to create filtered list views for other Alert record types as needed. Your filtered Alerts list views now show checkboxes that support staff can use to select multiple Alerts (of the specified record type) and mass update those Alert statuses. ### Enable Mass Updates from the Alerts Related Lists on Student Record Cases Student Success Hub enables mass updates on the Alerts related lists on the included Student Record Case Lightning page layout. If you're using a different Student Record Case layout or need to enable mass updates manually, here's how. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important If you use different statuses for different Alert record types, don't enable mass updates from the Alerts related list on Student Record Cases. Instead, allow mass status updates only from the Alert object list view. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit** and then select **Allow Mass Status Update in Alert Related List**. 4. Save your changes. This change makes two items visible in the Alerts related lists on Student Record Cases: checkboxes for selecting multiple Alerts, and a Change Status button for applying a mass status update. ![The Unresolved Alerts related list with call-outs on the disabled Change Status button and the row selectors](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_alert_mass_action.png) ## Control Alert Assignment Feed Updates When an Alert is assigned to someone other than the User who updated the Alert—that is, when the Alert record is edited and results in assignment to another User—Student Success Hub posts an update to the Alert's Chatter feed. The post @mentions the assigned User, notifying the assignee and followers of the Alert about the assignment. To turn off these automatic posts, disable the trigger handler that creates them. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Other options for disabling feed updates include disabling feed tracking on the Alert object or disabling Chatter for your org. Disabling by using these options prevents the trigger handler from running. 1. Click ![The App Launcher icon, which is a grid of dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_app_launcher_icon.png) and search for and then select **Trigger Handlers**. 2. Select a list view, such as All - Main Fields, that shows trigger handlers with their TDTM class names. 3. Click the action menu for the sfal.AlertNotification\_TDTM class and select **Edit**. 4. Deselect the Active field. 5. If you're permanently disabling Alert assignment feed updates, also select the User Managed field to prevent the trigger handler from reactivating after future updates to the Student Success Hub. 6. Save your changes. # Set Up Alumni Relations Use Alumni Relations in Education Cloud to manage and engage with alumni from your educational institution in a centralized location.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up Alumni Relations:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
- **[Enable Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Alumni Relations to manage and engage with alumni from your educational institution in a single centralized location. - **[Alumni Relations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Alumni Relations app enables your alumni team members to manage alumni information and help alumni stay engaged and invested in their alma mater. ## Enable Alumni Relations Use Alumni Relations to manage and engage with alumni from your educational institution in a single centralized location. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important You must enable Education Cloud before you can enable Alumni Relations. After you enable Alumni Relations, you can't disable it. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on Alumni Relations. ## Alumni Relations App The Alumni Relations app enables your alumni team members to manage alumni information and help alumni stay engaged and invested in their alma mater. Customize the Alumni Relations app to suit the requirements of your institution, such as create layouts and features specific to different roles using Lightning App Builder. ### Customize Your App 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Alumni**. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Lightning App Builder**. 3. Select a page from the list to edit, or click **New** to create one. 4. Customize the application to your requirements. Add components and modify them to create custom features as desired. ### See Also - [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm&type=5) # Set Up an Academic Interval Structure Build an academic interval structure to accurately represent your institution's schedule. This structure uses the academic year to define the entire year. Within that year, the academic term specifies periods for reporting and course offerings, which can also contain other nested time periods. Finally, the academic session specifies the exact time periods when courses are offered. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up an academic calendar: Education Cloud Full Access
By structuring your year, terms, and sessions together, you create accurate, specific timeframes that streamline your reporting and course management workflows. See [Model Your Academic Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_your_academic_calendar.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up an Education Portal Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
You can use the Education Portal template to serve a variety of constituents with one Experience Cloud site. To ensure that portal users can only access the features they need, you can use audiences and permission sets to control component visibility. Applicants, students, alumni, and even learners with overlapping roles can use a single login to access virtually everything they need to engage with your institution. For example, a student applying for their next degree and an alum applying for continued learning can manage all their activities in the same portal. Constituents can use your portal to register for your institution, apply to courses and programs, track and manage applications, raise requests for information, schedule appointments, search the alumni directory, and complete other tasks. The Education Portal template comes with components designed to support applicants, students, alumni, and various combinations of these roles. You can configure pages and components and control access to them based on your institution's processes and your constituents' needs. These tabs are available in the template by default: - Home: Contains tabs that show the created applications and requests for information (RFIs) raised by the applicant, as well as task and appointment lists. - Applications: Lists the applications created by the portal user, with statuses and details. Portal users can also start new applications from here. - Requests for Information: Lists RFIs raised by the applicant, with statuses and details. - Appointments: Lists appointments scheduled between the portal user and staff members. Portal users can also schedule appointments from here. - Success Team: Contains two tabs that show contact information of success team members and other support resources assigned to the portal user. Portal users can search for resources and schedule appointments from here. - Support Programs: Contains two tabs where portal users can search for support programs and view the details of the programs they're enrolled in. - Learning Programs: Lists the portal user's learning program plans. - Alumni Profile: Shows the fields that portal users can populate with personal information to create their own profiles. - Directory: Contains a searchable list of public profiles. - Financial Status at a Glance: Shows financial status summary, including total charges, adjustments, balance due, next due date, and payment status. Assign the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set to your users to grant them access to the portal. While the Education Portal template includes education-specific components for convenience, you can also build a portal from scratch. See [Build and Customize Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.exp_cloud_build.htm&type=5). - **[Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build a portal for your applicants, students, and alumni to access your institution's services. - **[Set Up Your Portal for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_portal_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get your Education portal ready to accept and manage applications. - **[Student Success Components for Your Learner Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_success_components_for_your_learner_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use student success components from Education Cloud to enhance your institution’s learner portal with self-service capabilities for learners. - **[Financial Aid Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how the financial aid components display data and calculate totals for students, prospects, and staff. - **[Set Up Your Portal for Financial Aid Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_portal_for_financial_aid_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide all Experience Cloud users with self-service answers to financial aid questions and the ability to submit inquiries. For authenticated students, deliver clear financial aid data and integrate external systems to perform financial aid actions. - **[Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_portal_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give students self-service access to their financial accounts in your learner portal. After setup, students can view their balances and academic-year charges and pay invoices online. Assign permissions, set object access, connect a merchant account, and build the Student Financials page in Experience Builder. - **[Set Up Your Alumni Community](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to brand your alumni community in Education Cloud, add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes to provide an enhanced alumni experience. - **[Set Up Your Learner Portal for Delegated Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_portal_for_delegated_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to create a My Proxies page, add the My Proxies component to it, configure portal navigation, and publish the updated learner portal. - **[Add Users to Your Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_users_to_your_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant access to your Education Cloud Experience Site by assigning a license, a profile, and permissions to portal users. - **[Education Portal Access Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_portal_access_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use permission sets, system permissions, and audiences together to control portal access and visibility by user role. Permission sets grant access and group portal users by role, system permissions link permission sets to audiences, and audiences determine the portal user groups that have access to each portal page and component. # Set Up an Experience Site for Appointments in Education Cloud Education Cloud comes with a preconfigured Education Applicant Portal template that enables learners to access the scheduling feature. These steps are only required if you want to create your own portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up an Experience site for Education Cloud:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **New**, and then choose a template such as **Build Your Own (Aura)**. 3. Click **Get Started**. 4. Enter a name, complete the URL, and then click **Create**. 5. Click **Builder**, and then ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/exp_builder_component_icon.png). 6. Search for and then drag the **My Appointment** component onto your canvas. 7. Open the Pages menu on the top toolbar, and then click **New Page**. ![Experience Site Builder New Page button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_scheduler_exp_new_page.png) 8. Click **Standard Page**, and then **New Blank Page**. 9. Choose a layout, and then click **Next**. 10. Enter a name and a URL, for example Schedule Appointments and schedule-appointments. 11. Enter an API Name, for example ScheduleAppointment\_\_c, and then click **Create**. 12. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/exp_builder_component_icon.png). 13. Search for and then drag the **Omniscript** component onto your canvas. 14. Select the **EDUScheduler/StudentAppointment** type. 15. Open the Pages menu on the top toolbar, and then click **Home**. 16. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/exp_builder_component_icon.png). 17. Search for and then drag the **Flexcard** component onto your canvas. 18. Select the **EDUSchedulerScheduleAppointmentSite Flexcard** name. 19. In the **Exposed Attributes** field, enter the name of the page that you created for the Omniscript component in this format: {"ApiPageName" : ""}. In our example, this value is {"ApiPageName" : "ScheduleAppointment\_\_c"}. 20. Apply other customizations as necessary. 21. Click **Publish** twice, and then **Got It**. For information about using the preconfigured template, see [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). # Set Up and Install Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit Set up Fundraising Intelligence to access dashboards and analytics. To set up Fundraising Intelligence, you need to create and map Data 360 assets and ingest Data 360 data. | REQUIRED EDITIONS | | --- | | Available in: Lightning Experience | | Available with: Nonprofit Cloud or Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking in **Enterprise**, **Performance**, and **Unlimited** Editions |
User Permissions Needed  
To view the setup page for Fundraising Intelligence:
  • User is System Admin
  • Fundraising Admin Permission Set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note The Analytics Apps and Template functionality included as a part of Tableau Next is available in English only. ## Launch the Guided Setup Use the Fundraising Intelligence guided setup to guide your configuration of Data 360, Tableau Next, and Fundraising Intelligence. - From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising Intelligence, and then select **Fundraising Intelligence**. - As you progress through the setup steps, refresh the page to view the completed steps. Completed steps are marked with a green check mark. ## Configure Access to Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit Assign permissions to view and manage Fundraising Intelligence. 1. Expand **Configure Access to Fundraising Intelligence**. 2. To assign the Fundraising Intelligence Admin permission set to authorized admins, click **Assign Admin Permissions**. The Permission Sets page opens where you can assign the Data Cloud Admin and Fundraising Intelligence Admin permission sets to the admin user. 3. To assign the Fundraising Intelligence User permission set to Fundraising users, click **Assign View Permission**. The Permission Sets page opens where you can assign the Data Cloud User, Fundraising Intelligence User and the Tableau Next Limited Consumer or Tableau Next Included App Business User permission sets to the users who need view-only access. ## Set Up Data 360 for Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit Connect your Salesforce org to Data 360 to access and analyze your fundraising data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Before you set up Data 360, ensure that: - Current user is system admin - Fundraising is enabled in your Salesforce org - User has Data 360 Architect access 1. Expand **Set Up Data Cloud Prerequisites**. 2. Read and accept the disclaimer about the different privacy and security protections followed by Tableau Next services. 3. To enable Data 360, click **Configure**, make sure “SSOT Package” is set to “Install”, then click **Get Started**. Your current org automatically connects to Data 360. 4. To connect a different org to Data 360, in the Connect to Data 360 step, click **Connect**. The Data 360 Salesforce CRM Configuration page opens, where you can connect additional orgs. 5. If you previously configured Data 360 without the single source of truth (SSOT) package, in the Install the Single Source of Truth Package step, click **Install**. 6. To provide Data 360 users access to Fundraising Intelligence, click **Configure Data Cloud Access**. This action gives Data 360 users read and view access to Fundraising objects and fields, and assigns the Fundraising user permission set to the integration user. This access is not Create, Read, Update, Delete (CRUD) compliant. Users with access to Fundraising Intelligence are able to see all metrics on the dashboards, including those coming from objects or fields they don't have read access to. 7. To create Fundraising data streams, click **Create Data Streams**. The Data Stream page opens. 8. Create the data streams. 1. On the Data Streams tab, click **New**. 2. Select **Salesforce CRM** and click **Next**. 3. Make sure that Data Bundles is selected. 4. Under Standard Data Bundles, click **Fundraising Data Bundle**, and click **Next**. By default, All Fundraising Data Bundle objects are selected. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Make sure that the data space where you want to install Fundraising Intelligence is selected, and click **Next**. 7. On the Data Stream Bundle Configuration Details page, click **Deploy**. The data streams appear in the Data Streams tab. 9. To make sure that all of the data streams have ingested the data, on each data stream page, click **Refresh Now**. Make sure that each data stream shows the Success for Last Run Status confirmation. After the initial run of the data streams, the Salesforce CRM connector conducts full and incremental refreshes on a set schedule, requiring no action from you. SEE ALSO: - [Plan Your Data 360 Data Strategy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_plan_data_strategy.htm&language=en_US) - [Connect Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_ingestion.htm&language=en_US) - [Data Stream Schedule in Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_stream_schedule.htm&language=en_US) ## Install Fundraising Intelligence in Nonprofit After your Nonprofit Cloud data is ingested into Data 360, you’re ready to install Fundraising Intelligence. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Before you install Fundraising Intelligence, to make sure that all the data streams have ingested the data, on each data stream page, click **Refresh Now**. Wait until each data stream shows Success for Last Run Status. After the initial run of the data streams, the Salesforce CRM connector conducts full and incremental refreshes on a set schedule, requiring no action from you. 1. Expand **Set Up Fundraising Intelligence**. 2. To begin installation, click **Install**. If you have multiple data spaces, select the same one where you deployed Fundraising Data Streams. Installation can take up to 10 minutes to complete. If your installation fails, refresh the page. If a “Fundraising Intelligence” tab is visible, delete the App, then try the installation again after all the data streams have successfully ingested data. SEE ALSO: - [Embed Fundraising Intelligence Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_embed_fundraising_intelligence_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enhance user visibility into the Fundraising Analytics App by embedding its dashboards in Lightning Experience pages. The dashboards are automatically embedded in homepages when the app is installed. If your homepages have been customized, manually add the Fundraising Analytics Dashboard component by using the Lightning App Builder.") - [Fundraising Intelligence Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_fundraising_intelligence_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Maximize fundraising effectiveness with the Fundraising Intelligence dashboards. These dashboards provide detailed donor metrics, campaign analytics, and organizational health data. Use these insights to enhance donor engagement and optimize campaign strategies, directly improving fundraising outcomes.") # Set Up Application Campus Preferences Configure the Omnistudio components that let applicants select and rank preferred campus locations during the application process.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure campus preferences and view and edit applicants' preference data:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin
To view applicants' preference data: Education Cloud Reviewer
To select preferred campus locations on the applicant portal: Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access
The campus preferences feature uses several Omnistudio components that work together to show applicants a list of campuses, capture their selections, and save the data to the application: - **EDUAdmissions\_CampusPref\_English\_1 Omniscript**: The container that an applicant sees during the campus selection stage of the application. - **EDUAdmissionsCampusPref Flexcard**: Shows the Campus Selector Lightning web component, which displays the list of available campuses. - **EDUAdmissionsCampusPrefSequencer Flexcard**: Shows the Campus Selector Sequencer Lightning web component, which lets applicants rank their selected campuses. - **EDUAdmissionsGetCampusPref Data Mapper**: Retrieves the list of campuses to display. The data mapper queries educational institution offering records that are active and associated with the application's program term application timeline. The data mapper returns the linked educational institution account name and ID for each offering. - **EDUAdmissionsSaveCampusPref Data Mapper**: Saves the applicant's ranked campus selections as individual application task item records related to the application's individual application task. Before you clone and activate these components, you set up the data that determines which campuses appear in the application portal. The portal reads from educational institution offering records, which link an educational institution account to a program term application timeline. The educational institution account represents the campus, and the program term application timeline represents the program a student is applying to. The application portal uses these offering records to show applicants only the campuses that offer the program they're applying to. For example, when an applicant applies to a nursing program, only the campuses that offer nursing appear in the list of options. Your educational institution account records can include both your own campuses and external schools that you do business with. An offering record is what makes one of your campuses appear as an option in the application portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The campus preferences feature includes the applicant-facing components only. To display campus preferences data to internal reviewers, build a custom Flexcard and create a matching application render method record and application render method assignment for the internal review pages. 1. Create one educational institution account record for each campus that you want to appear as an option in the application portal. If the account already exists in Salesforce, you can skip this step. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Accounts**. 2. Click **New**, and then select an account record type that matches your campus, such as Secondary School or College. 3. Enter the campus details, and save your changes. Repeat for each campus. 2. Create one educational institution offering record for each campus that applicants can rank for a specific program. Each offering record links an educational institution account to a program term application timeline. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Educational Institution Offerings**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Educational Institution Account, search for and select the campus's account. 4. For Program Term Application Timeline, search for and select the application timeline for the program that the campus is associated with. 5. Select **Active**. 6. Save your changes. Repeat for each campus and program combination. 3. Share each campus's educational institution account record with portal users. Portal users can select a campus only if its account record is shared with them. Use manual sharing or sharing rules to grant portal users access. If a campus's account isn't shared, applicants don't see the campus in the Select Campuses window even when an active educational institution offering record exists. See [Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.sharing_rules_overview.htm&language=en_US). 4. Clone and activate the EDUAdmissions\_CampusPref\_English\_1 Omniscript that displays the Flexcards and Lightning web components for the campus preferences feature. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **OmniScripts**. 2. Expand **EDUAdmissions\_CampusPref\_English\_1**, and click the version that you want to copy. 3. Click **New Version**. 4. Save your changes. 5. Activate your Omniscript. 5. Clone and activate the EDUAdmissionsCampusPref Flexcard that shows the Campus Selector Lightning web component. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Flexcards**. 2. Expand **EDUAdmissionsCampusPref**, and click the version that you want to copy. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. Update the name, and then click **Clone**. 5. Click **Activate**. 6. Similarly, clone and activate the EDUAdmissionsCampusPrefSequencer Flexcard that shows the Campus Selector Sequencer Lightning web component. 7. Clone and activate the EDUAdmissionsGetCampusPref Data Mapper that gets the school or campus records to appear in the Select Campuses view. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Data Mappers**. 2. Click **EDUAdmissionsGetCampusPref**. 3. Click **Clone**. 4. Update the name, and then save your changes. 5. Click **Activate**. 8. Similarly, clone and activate the EDUAdmissionsSaveCampusPref Data Mapper that saves the selected schools or campus records. 9. Create an application render method record that references your cloned copy of the EDUAdmissions\_CampusPref\_English\_1 Omniscript. See [Connect Rubrics to Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create configuration records to represent your application review and connect it to the Omniscripts that you use to score applications in Education Cloud."). 10. Expose the campus preferences feature to applicants by creating an application stage definition record and other dynamic application records. See [Connect Rubrics to Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_rubrics_to_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create configuration records to represent your application review and connect it to the Omniscripts that you use to score applications in Education Cloud."). 11. Create a custom Omnistudio Flexcard to display campus preferences data to internal reviewers, and create an application render method record and application render method assignment for that Flexcard. The applicant-facing components save the selected campuses to individual application task item records related to each application. Because the campus preferences feature includes only the applicant-facing components, the internal review experience is something that you build to match your own admissions process. After setup is complete, applicants can search for and select campuses during the campus preferences stage of the application, and then rank their selections in order of preference. When an applicant submits their campus selections, each ranked campus is saved as an individual application task item record related to the application's individual application task. Each record links the task to the campus's account ID. Reviewers and internal users can access preference data through these records. To use this data in custom queries or reporting, query the individual application task item records and use the account ID to look up the related educational institution account. # Set Up Application Decision Record Page Configure the record page for the application decision object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the application decision record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_decision_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the application decision object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_decision_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the application decision record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_decision_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the application decision object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the application decision record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Application Decision record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/application_decision.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column. - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Application Decision**. 3. Click Page Layouts and click **Application Decision Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Application Record Type Configuration in Education Cloud To use applications with Education Cloud, configure an application record type for the individual application object. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Application RecordType Config, and then select **Application RecordType Config**. 2. Click **New Application RecordType Config**. 3. Enter a label. 4. In Application Usage Type, select **Education Cloud**. 5. In Object Name, select **Individual Application**. 6. In Record Type Name, enter the label of the record type that you created, and then save your changes. # Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components. ## Before You Begin To set up your Application requirements and Action Plans, complete the steps in this article. Before beginning, we recommend that you have a [detailed plan for all of your requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool."). For a jump start creating your Action Plans, use our [quick start sample assets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_sample.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides sample assets to help you get started with Action Plans and other configurations. Modify these assets to work for your institution, or clone them for a quick start. Here’s a list of the sample assets we provide.").  ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important To complete these steps, you need to be [assigned the correct permissions sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets.") and [access to the objects in the Admissions Connect app](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get started with the Admissions Connect app by assigning the default Lightning record pages and setting up the navigation menu."). Typically, only admissions directors or Admissions Connect administrators set up requirements and Action Plans. If you’re unable to follow along with the steps, revisit your permissions. Unless otherwise noted in a task, all setup tasks are required. The tasks are listed here in the order in which you should complete them. Sometimes we link to other, standalone articles for detailed instructions.  - **[Create Document Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Document Types identify the types of documents applicants must upload or attach to their Application, such as a letter of recommendation or an unofficial copy of their transcript. Your applicants might be uploading these documents from a portal or other website. In Salesforce, these documents are attached to a Document Checklist Item record that’s associated with an Action Plan record. - **[Create Field Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Admissions Connect, field sets are mainly used to let you display and collect data in Action Plan Items that are Tasks. Field sets can represent the questions on your application or the form-field information you want answered, like date of birth, education history, or parent’s education. - **[Create Application Material Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application Material Types provide the display details for Action Plan Template Items that are Tasks. You specify object information about the data you'll show. Then, to specify the exact data, you provide a field set or choose specific data from a JSON object. After your Application Material Type records are created, use them in Application Material Mapping records to specify how the data is shown in relation to other application requirements. - **[Create Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Action Plans let admissions staff and applicants know what requirements must be completed and submitted. In order to assign Action Plans, you first need to create Action Plan Templates. - **[Create Application Material Mapping Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Application Material Mappings bring everything together: They allow Action Plans and child Action Plan Items to display in the Admissions Connect components. The mapping records specify the order in which the Action Plans display in the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components. The order determines how verifiers, reviewers, and applicants view the application requirements. ## Create Document Types Document Types identify the types of documents applicants must upload or attach to their Application, such as a letter of recommendation or an unofficial copy of their transcript. Your applicants might be uploading these documents from a portal or other website. In Salesforce, these documents are attached to a Document Checklist Item record that’s associated with an Action Plan record. Create Document Types for any items that you want your applicants to upload. We recommend that you create all of your Document Types at once. Typical Document Types include: - Recommendation - Test Score - Transcript - Resume ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Document Types aren't required to implement Admissions Connect. However, we recommend creating them as they can help with future reporting needs and potential integrations. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Document Type**. To view the Document Type page, you need the Document Checklist permission set. This permission is included by default in the Admissions Connect permission sets. 2. Click **New Document Type**. 3. Fill out the details. Label Enter the name of the document applicants will upload. Name Enter an API name. Is Active Selected. You can deactivate a Document Type when you don't need it anymore. Description Enter details about this Document Type. 4. Save your changes. ## Create Field Sets In Admissions Connect, field sets are mainly used to let you display and collect data in Action Plan Items that are Tasks. Field sets can represent the questions on your application or the form-field information you want answered, like date of birth, education history, or parent’s education. The field sets you create for Task data get specified in Application Material Type records, which in turn get associated with Application Material Mapping records. The mapping record defines where the Task appears among the other application requirements.  We recommend creating a unique field set for each Task. Think about a situation in which you want to display 10 fields for first-year applicants, but only 5 of those fields for transfer applicants. You can't reuse the same field set in this scenario. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Make sure that you give your admissions staff and applicants permissions for all the fields in the field set and the object. Otherwise, they won't be able to see the data in the Admissions Connect components. Field sets can also be used to configure other Admissions Connect features, like custom application review feedback questions. The steps to create field sets are the same, regardless of whether you're setting them up to display Action Plan Items that are Tasks or for review questions. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click an object name and then click **Field Sets**. 2. On the Field Sets page, click **New**. 3. Fill out the details. Field Set Label Enter the name for this field set. Field Set Name Enter an API name. This name will later be specified in the Application Material Type record.  Where is this used Provide a brief description. 4. Save your changes. 5. Drag the fields you want to the In the Field Set region. Make sure to drag the fields into the In the Field Set region, not the Available for the Field Set region. 6. Optionally, specify fields as Required. If you're creating an applicant portal and plan to let applicants fill out these fields, required fields help applicants know exactly what's required to submit a complete application. 7. Save your changes. For more information, see [Creating and Editing Field Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_editing_field_sets.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Create Application Material Types Application Material Types provide the display details for Action Plan Template Items that are Tasks. You specify object information about the data you'll show. Then, to specify the exact data, you provide a field set or choose specific data from a JSON object. After your Application Material Type records are created, use them in Application Material Mapping records to specify how the data is shown in relation to other application requirements. You can create Application Material Type records to display data for the Application and Contact objects, or for a child object that has a direct lookup to one of these objects. For example, you can create an Application Material Type record to show details from an applicant’s Contact record and another to show details from the applicant’s Education History records. Keep in mind that multiple Action Plan Template Items can use the same Application Material Type. For example, if you plan to create separate Action Plan Templates for undergraduate and graduate applicants, you could use the same Application Material Type to show applicant details in two different Action Plan Template Items. 1. In the Admissions Connect app, select **Application Material Types** from the app navigation menu and click **New**. 2. Fill out the details, noting these fields in particular. Application Material Type Name Enter a name. We recommend using a brief but descriptive name about what type of data you're displaying. Consider a name that complements an Action Plan Template Item name. Description Enter a brief description.  Source Object Select Contact or Application.  Data Source Type Select Field Set if display data is stored in the fields defined in a field set. Select JSON if display data is stored in an EDA JSON field. Child Object To display data from an object with a lookup to Contact or Application, specify the API name of the related child object. Remember, all related child object records are displayed. Admissions Connect doesn't limit the number of records returned. Make sure to give your users Read access to all the fields in the field set and to the Child Object. Otherwise, they can't see the related data in the Admissions Connect components. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Applicants can't edit fields for child records that show in the applicant portal. Child Object Filter Field If specifying a Child Object, optionally enter the API name of the checkbox field that determines whether the child record is shown. This field must be a checkbox or formula checkbox field on the specified Child Object. If this field is selected, the record is shown. If deselected, it's not. Child Object Sort By Field If specifying a Child Object, optionally enter the API name of the field used to sort the child records. This field must be a field on the specified Child object. If blank, records are sorted by LastModifiedDate. Child Object Sort Direction If specifying a Child Object, optionally choose a sort order for the child records. If blank, sorting is descending. Field Set for Display If specifying Data Source Type as a field set, enter the API name of your field set. 3. Save your changes. 4. If you selected JSON for Data Source Type, click **Edit JSON Display**. Then select the desired data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you select child data, always select its parent data. If an applicant doesn’t have data in the JSON field, nothing is shown in the Admissions Connect components. 5. Save your changes. If you're stuck configuring Application Material Type records for child object data, just work backwards, thinking about the exact data you want to show. For example, let’s say you want to show the names of an applicant’s parents so that verifiers can search for legacy status. You create a custom formula checkbox field called isParent with the formula OR(ISPICKVAL(hed\_\_Type\_\_c, "Father"),ISPICKVAL(hed\_\_Type\_\_c, "Mother"),ISPICKVAL(hed\_\_Type\_\_c, "Parent")). That way only the parents' records for an applicant are returned for the Relationship object. Your Application Material Type specifies these values. - Source Object: Contact - Child Object: hed\_\_Relationship\_\_c - Field Set for Display: Applicant\_Family\_Details - Child Object Filter Field: isParent\_\_c - Child Object Sort By Field: Name - Child Object Sort Direction: Ascending After you configure an Application Material Type record for JSON, keep in mind that updating the Source Object or Child Object fields makes the JSON Display settings invalid. The Application JSON, Contact JSON, and Education History JSON fields each have different JSON data to choose from. ## Create Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items Action Plans let admissions staff and applicants know what requirements must be completed and submitted. In order to assign Action Plans, you first need to create Action Plan Templates. For a refresher, see [How Are Action Plans Created](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what Actions Plans are and how you can use them in Admissions Connect to define application requirements."). Remember that each Action Plan Template must have one or more child Action Plan Template Items. 1. In the Admissions Connect app, select **Action Plan Templates** from the app navigation menu and click **New**. 2. Fill out the details.  Name Enter a name that helps your admission staff quickly identify this Action Plan Template. We recommend that you tell your admissions staff to enter this same name when manually assigning Action Plans.  Template Owner Leave this as yourself or choose someone else on your staff that you want to own and manage Action Plan Templates.  Description Enter a brief description. We suggest noting what child items are included. Let users add items to action plans Select this checkbox to allow admissions staff to create ad hoc documents and Tasks after an Action Plan has been assigned to an Application. For example, you might want to allow staff to upload an image of a receipt for miscellaneous fees, or maybe an applicant needs to submit an additional letter of recommendation. For more information on ad hoc items, see [Configure Application Requirement Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assign Action Plans to Applications so that admissions staff and applicants learn about requirements and next steps.")  Action Plan Type Leave set to Industries.  Target Object Select Application. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note To assign Action Plans to Applications later, you must specify Application for this field. 3. Save your changes. 4. To create child Action Plan Template Items that are Tasks, click **New Task**. Remember that Tasks let you collect and display field-level data from an object.  Subject A user can't edit Action Plan Items when assigning an Action Plan, which means the name you enter here is the name that's displayed in the Admissions Connect components for Action Plan Items that are Tasks. Priority Select a priority.  Days Once the Action Plan is assigned, the applicant will have this many days to fill out the data before the Task is overdue. If you plan to import data from another system, like Common App, this number is less important (but still required) because the data is automatically added on import and doesn't require a due date.  Required Select this checkbox to indicate that this Task is required for the Application. Comments Enter a brief description for users about this Task. Prerequisite Tasks Don’t use this functionality in Admissions Connect. If you do, admissions staff won’t see the Task until the prerequisite Task is complete. In addition, applicants see an error and can’t view their Application. Don’t worry if you don’t see this field. Prerequisite Tasks are only available for new (unpublished) Action Plan Templates after you create an initial Task. Assigned To If the Task is for someone on the admissions team, leave this field assigned to the Action Plan Creator or assign it to a specific User. If you import application data using a third-party tool, consider creating automation that sets this field to the user running the import. If the Task shows field-level data that you want applicants to fill out in a portal, assign it to the applicant. 5. Save your changes. 6. To create child Action Plan Template Items that are Document Checklist Items, click **New Document Checklist Item**. Remember that Document Checklist Items are types of documents that applicants or users upload to the Application, like a PDF or image file. Name A user can't edit Action Plan Items when assigning an Action Plan, which means the name you enter here is the name that's displayed in the Admissions Connect components for Action Plan Items that are Document Checklist Items. Document Type Select one of your [Document Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). Instructions Enter a brief description for users about this document. Required Select this checkbox to indicate that this document is required for the Application. 7. Save your changes. 8. When you're done creating child Action Plan Template Items, click **Publish Template**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important After an Action Plan Template is published, you can’t edit it—which means you can’t modify or add child Action Plan Items, and you can't modify any Action Plan settings. Action Plan Templates must be published in order to apply them to an Application. The Document Checklist Items and Tasks that you add to an Action Plan Template are technically Action Plan Template Items until the Action Plan Template is assigned to an Application. You won’t be able to see these records in the Document Checklist Item and Task list views until you assign the Action Plan Template.  As requirements change, you can deactivate a template or clone it to make a new template. When you clone it, you create a new version of the template. You can’t delete Action Plan Templates.  ## Create Application Material Mapping Records Application Material Mappings bring everything together: They allow Action Plans and child Action Plan Items to display in the Admissions Connect components. The mapping records specify the order in which the Action Plans display in the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components. The order determines how verifiers, reviewers, and applicants view the application requirements. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note All of your Action Plan Templates and Action Plan Template Items must have associated Application Material Mapping records. If they don't, assigned Action Plans display as sequence 1 items in alphabetical order in the Admissions Connect app, which might not be what you expect. In a portal, items without a mapping record don't show at all. Ad hoc Action Plan Items don't have mapping records. These items show below other peer Action Plan Items in alphabetical order. If you're using a portal, see [https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac\_setup\_portal.htm](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ac_setup_portal.htm). When creating mapping records, there are three types of records you might create. The fields you specify in the mapping records are different for each type.
Type of Mapping Record Fields to Specify
Parent Action Plan

  • Action Plan Template 

  • Sequence
Child Action Plan Item for a Task

  • Action Plan Template Item

  • Sequence

  • Application Material Type
Child Action Plan Item for a Document Checklist Item

  • Action Plan Template Item

  • Sequence
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note There are other optional fields that control applicant settings. We’ll get to those later. With your [planning spreadsheet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your Application Material Mappings are the overall plan for how your Application requirements appear. Think of the mapping records as a table of contents for an Application. We recommend that you plan all of your application requirements before creating any Action Plan Template or Application Material Mapping records. A good plan will make your implementation go smoother and faster. A spreadsheet can be a great planning tool.") in hand, create all your mapping records at one time. Keep in mind that some columns in the planning spreadsheet are Setup configuration and not fields on the Application Material Mapping record. 1. In the Admissions Connect app, select **Application Material Mappings** from the app navigation menu. 2. Select the All list view, then click **New**. 3. Fill out the details based on what type of mapping record you’re creating. When searching lookups, only the most recent records display by default. You might need to enter the name of the record and press Enter to see full search results. Action Plan Template If you're configuring the display of an Action Plan, specify the Action Plan Template record associated with this mapping record. If you're configuring the display of an Action Plan Item, leave this field blank. Action Plan Template Item If you're configuring the display of an Action Plan Item, specify the Action Plan Template Item record associated with this mapping record. If you're configuring the display of an Action Plan, leave this field blank. Application Material Type If you're configuring the display of an Action Plan Item that is a Task, specify the associated Application Material Type record that provides display details. Otherwise leave this field blank. Sequence Enter a positive whole number, starting with 1, to specify the display order of this item relative to other items at the same level. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip We recommend using whole numbers (like 1.00) for parent Action Plan Templates and decimals for the same whole number (like 1.10) for corresponding child Action Plan Template Items. This can help you sort mapping records in a list view. Just keep in mind that if you update a Sequence field later, the Sequence fields of child Action Plan Template Items aren't updated automatically. The Sequence field for Action Plan Templates is relative to other Action Plan Templates. Likewise, the Sequence field for Action Plan Template Items is relative to other related Action Plan Template Items for the same Action Plan Template. If more than one Action Plan Templates or Action Plan Template Items specify the same sequence, they are sorted alphabetically within that sequence. 4. Customize applicant portal settings using these fields. Show Navigation to Applicants Indicates whether applicants see an item in the portal.  Applies to: Action Plans and Action Plan Items Show Content to Applicants Indicates whether applicants see the document or data in the portal. If this field isn't selected, applicants see either a default message that the content can't be shown or a custom message that you define in Applicant Hidden Content Message. Requires that: Show Navigation to Applicants is selected Applies to: Action Plan Items (Document Checklist Items and Tasks) Let Applicants Upload Files Indicates whether applicants can upload files in the portal. Requires that: - Show Navigation to Applicants is selected - Show Content to Applicants is selected - The Document Checklist Item allows upload, which is determined by its Status or the state of the Application record. For information, see [Verify Your Applicant Portal Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the tasks to help ensure that applicants are successful in the portal."). - The applicant is the owner of the latest version of the pending or rejected document. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Applicants can't upload a file if an admissions staff member uploads a file before them because the applicant is no longer the owner of the document. Applies to: Action Plan Items (Document Checklist Items only) Applicant Instruction Message Enter a custom message to let applicants know how to submit a document or complete a hidden Task. For documents that haven’t been uploaded yet, these settings are required. - Show Navigation to Applicants is selected - Show Content to Applicants is selected For Tasks that have a Status of Not Started, these settings are required. - Show Navigation to Applicants is selected - Show Content to Applicants is not selected Applies to: Action Plan Items (Document Checklist Items and Tasks) Applicant Hidden Content Message Enter a custom message to let applicants know relevant details, including that an item is visible only to the institution. The Applicant Instruction Message overrides this message when a document hasn't been uploaded yet or the Task status is Not Started. Requires that: - Show Navigation to Applicants is selected - Show Content to Applicants is _not_ selected Applies to: Action Plans and Action Plan Items (Document Checklist Items and Tasks) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note On mobile devices, this message doesn’t show for parent Action Plans in an applicant portal. It only shows for Action Plan Items. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note For Tasks created from an Action Plan Template Item, in other words a non-ad hoc Task, the Admissions Connect applicant settings override the Public setting (isVisibleInSelfService on Task). For example, if a Task is marked as Public, but the Application Material Mapping record for that item isn’t configured with Show Navigation to Applicants, the Task isn’t visible to applicants in the portal. ### Next Steps # Set Up Application Review Record Page Configure the record page for the application review object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the application review record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_review_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the application review object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_review_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the application review record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_review_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the application review object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the application review record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Application Review record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/application_review.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Application Review**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Application Review Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Application Timeline Record Page Configure the record page for the application timeline object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the application timeline record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the application timeline object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the application timeline record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the application timeline object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the application timeline record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Application Timeline record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/application_timeline.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activities** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Application Timeline**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Application Timeline** Layout. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Appointment Categories in Education Cloud If you're migrating from Student Success Hub, to use appointments with Education Cloud, create appointment categories. 1. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 2. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 3. Enter and run this code for the drop-in appointment category: ``` AppointmentCategory newCategory1 = new AppointmentCategory(); newCategory1.Name = 'Drop In'; newCategory1.IsScheduled = false; newCategory1.IsDropIn = true; insert newCategory1; ``` 4. Enter and run this code for the scheduled appointment category: ``` AppointmentCategory newCategory2 = new AppointmentCategory(); newCategory2.Name = 'Scheduled'; newCategory2.IsScheduled = true; newCategory2.IsDropIn = false; insert newCategory2; ``` # Set Up Appointment Data by Using Manage Appointments Appointment scheduling requires configuring several foundational elements. Set up these elements to provide simplified, intuitive guidance to administrators and advisors for managing appointments within Education Cloud. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To prepare the appointment scheduling elements: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin, [set up manage appointment components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_manage_appointment_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get clear guidance at every stage to quickly set up appointment topics, assign staff, and set up their availability. These components significantly reduce the configuration time and potential errors."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Manage Appointments**. 2. Configure these elements. | Elements | Purpose | | --- | --- | | [Engagement Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create engagement channels that your staff uses to meet learners.") | Define how advisors connect with learners (e.g., phone, video). | | [Appointment Categories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create appointment categories whether an appointment is a drop-in appointment or a scheduled one.") | Determine whether an appointment is scheduled or a drop-in. | | [Operating Hours](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the operating hours to determine staff member availability.") | Define the time boundaries for service territories used to manage advisors. | | [Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create territories where your staff takes appointments.") | Define the geographic or organizational locations where your advisors work. | | [Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up success teams to determine which case teams are available for appointments.") | Define case team records that learners can schedule appointments with. | | [Staff Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add staff members available for appointments.") | Relate staff to service territories and appointment availability. | | [Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure work type groups to create appointment topics that you can assign to appointments.") | Define the subject or reason a student can book an appointment for. | ## Create Engagement Channels Create engagement channels that your staff uses to meet learners. 1. Under Configure, select **Engagement Channels**. 2. On the Engagement Channels page, click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the engagement channel. 4. Select a contact point type. 5. Select **Active**. 6. Save your changes. ## Create Appointment Categories Create appointment categories whether an appointment is a drop-in appointment or a scheduled one. 1. Under Configure, select **Appointment Categories**. 2. On the Appointment Categories page, click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the appointment category. 4. Select whether an appointment is a drop-in appointment, a regular appointment, or a group appointment. 5. Save your changes. ## Create Operating Hours Configure the operating hours to determine staff member availability. 1. Under Configure, select **Operating Hours**. 2. On the Operating Hours page, click **New**. 3. Enter a name. 4. Select a time zone. 5. Save your changes. ## Create Territories Create territories where your staff takes appointments. 1. Under Configure, select **Territories**. 2. On the Territories page, click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the territory. 4. If your territory is part of a larger territory, select a parent territory, if needed. 5. Select operating hours for the territory, which indicate when appointments within the territory take place. 6. Select Active to be able to add members to the territory or associate it with appointments. 7. Enter an address. 8. Save your changes. ## Create Success Teams Set up success teams to determine which case teams are available for appointments. 1. Under Configure, select **Success Teams**. 2. On the Success Teams page, click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the team. 4. Select the record type of the case teams that you want to make bookable. 5. Enter the predefined case team that represents the case team. 6. To let learners schedule appointments with the case team through the self-service portal, select **Allow Self-Scheduling**. 7. Select the account for your institution's department that’s related to the success team, if needed. 8. To turn on the success team record, select **Is Active**. 9. Save your changes. ## Create Staff Members (Service Resource) Add staff members available for appointments. Before you begin: - Create users - Create territories 1. Under Manage, select **Staff Members**. 2. On the Staff Members page, click **New**. 3. Enter a name and select a user. 4. Select **Active** so that you can assign the staff member to appointments. 5. Click **Next**. 6. Select a service territory. 7. Select a territory type to indicate whether the territory is a primary or secondary territory for the staff member. The primary territory is where the staff member works most often. Secondary territory is a territory where the staff member can be assigned, if needed. A staff member can have more than one secondary territory but only one primary territory. 8. Select the start and end date and time when the staff member is available. This helps find staff members who work in the correct territories and within the specified hours. 9. Select the territories the staff member is available 10. If a staff member can work in multiple territories, click **Add Territories** to assign a primary and secondary service territory location. Your planners can then schedule members in both territories. 11. Save your changes. ## Create Appointment Topics Configure work type groups to create appointment topics that you can assign to appointments. Before you begin: - Create users - Create territories - Create appointment categories - Create engagement channels 1. Under Manage, select **Appointment Topics**. 2. On the Appointment Topics page, click **New**. 3. Enter a topic (work type group) name. 4. Leave the group type to **Default**. 5. Select **Active** so that you can select this topic for appointments.. 6. Populate the appointment details, such as estimated duration, duration type 7. Select the appointment category, whether it’s for drop-in or scheduled appointment. 8. Select the appointment engagement channels. You can also select if all engagement channels are supported. 9. Select territories for the appointment. 10. Select the case team role related to the appointment topic. For example, an admissions topic can include an admissions counselor and financial advisor roles. See [Automate Case Creation and Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&language=en_US&type=5#ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment). 11. Save your changes. When you create an appointment topic, a work type group record and a work type record are automatically created. To avoid issues with appointment scheduling, create no more than 4,000 appointment topics. # Set Up Appointment Data Manually Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Configure Operating Hours for Service Territories Operating hours are required when you create service territories. However, Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud uses shifts rather than operating hours to determine staff member availability. Shifts allow for more flexibility such as multiple locations.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Create Operating Hours in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_oh_and_ts.htm&type=5) - [Create Shifts in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_shifts.htm&type=5) ## Create Service Resources for Your Staff Create service resources to store staff information, and to relate staff members with service territories and appointment types.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Although you already represent your staff members as users, and contacts or person accounts, model them as service resources to make them available for appointments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Similarly to user records, you can't delete service resources. To exclude staff members from appointment scheduling, deselect the **Active** check box on their service resource record. Deactivating their user record also deactivates the service resource record. See Also: - [Create Service Resources in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_resources.htm&type=5) - [Guidelines for Managing Service Resources in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_resource_guidelines.htm&type=5) ## Create Service Territories for Education Cloud Set up service territories to group appointments by common characteristics. A service territory is usually a high-level shared location such as a campus.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
To include on a service territory record the actual location where staff members take appointments, make sure to configure that location when you set up your institution. The Service Territories related list on a service resource's record page shows all service territories that that service resource belongs to. See Also: - [Create a Service Territory](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.workforce_engagement_service_territory.htm&type=5) - [Model Your Campus](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_your_campus.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Model your campus in Education Cloud as an organizational structure of accounts and a network of physical facilities. Represent your institution and its colleges as accounts, and manage buildings, spaces, and their uses as locations.") ## Create Engagement Channel Types for Education Cloud Create engagement channel types such as in-person or phone that your staff uses to connect with learners.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See [Create Engagement Channel Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_engagement_channels_types.htm&type=5). ## Create Appointment Topics for Education Cloud Configure work type groups to represent appointment topics such as academic advising. Then, relate a case team role to a work type group via a work type group role.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create appointment topics for Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | Create standalone, unrelated appointments topics, or structure them in a hierarchy. If you set up the latter, create the parent topics first. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Work Type Groups**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name. 4. Leave the group type to Default. 5. Select **Active**. 6. If the topic is the subtopic to another topic, select its parent topic. 7. Populate other fields as needed, and then save your changes. 8. On the new work type group, click **Related**. 9. Click **New** in the Work Type Group Role section. 10. Enter the case team role related to the appointment topic, and then save your changes. See [Automate Case Creation and Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). 11. To assign multiple roles to the topic, repeat steps 9–10 for each role. For example, an admissions work type group can include an admissions counselor and financial advisor roles. 12. Save your changes. ## Create Topic Templates for Education Cloud Configure work types to represent appointment details that serve as templates. Work types enable you to save time and makes it easier to standardize appointment scheduling.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
After you create work types, assign them to appointment topics (work type groups), engagement channel types, and service territories. Education Cloud uses these mappings to filter the appointment topics to show to learners. For example, limit topics by: - Engagement channels: Sensitive topics for in-person appointments only. - Locations: Longer appointments for the office closest to the staff member’s home. - Skills: Required expertise for advanced topics. To create topic templates: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Work Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name, an estimated duration, and a duration type. 4. If needed, specify whether the template is for drop-ins or scheduled appointments. From the **Appointment Category** dropdown, choose one of these options: - Select a category. - Click **New Appointment Category**, populate the required fields, and then save your changes. Repeat these steps for all your appointment categories. When Salesforce filters the available drop-in slots, it excludes topics whose work type relates to a scheduled category or with no category. 5. Populate other fields as needed, and then save your changes. 6. On the new work type, click **Related**. 7. Click **New** in the Work Type Group Member section. 8. Select a work type group, and then save your changes. 9. Click **New** in the Engagement Channel Work Type section. 10. Select an engagement channel type, and then save your changes. If you select multiple channels and configure drop-ins, Salesforce only shows drop-in time slots for in-person shifts. 11. Click **New** in the Service Territory Work Types section. 12. Select a service territory, and then save your changes. 13. If you assigned skills to service resources and want Salesforce to consider skills when filtering bookable staff, click **New** in the Skills Requirements section. See Assign Skills to [Service Resources in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_assign_skills.htm&type=5). 14. Select the service resource’s skills, and then save your changes. See [Create Work Types in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_work_types.htm&type=5). ## Create Shifts for Your Staff Configure flexible shifts for your staff for easy scheduling, and assign one or more appointment topics to those shifts.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
After you create shifts, we recommend that you review the shifts on the staff member's profile. This verification ensures that your learners see accurate time slots on the self-service portal, especially for drop-in availability. See Also: - [Create Shifts in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_shifts.htm&type=5) - [Considerations for Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_considerations_shifts.htm&type=5) - [Create Appointment Topics for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling.") - [Create Engagement Channel Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_engagement_channels_types.htm&type=5) # Set Up Appointment Layouts Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to create appointments and see the data they need on Appointment records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Create a Global Action for Creating Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable support staff to create appointments from the global actions menu on any page in Student Success Hub. Edit the global publisher layout to add the Create Appointment button. - **[Create Custom Quick Actions for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add custom quick actions to the page layout you're using for Appointment records so that support staff can easily take action on their appointments. You can create actions that invoke apptActionsQuickAction or apptCancel, which are Lightning components included with Student Success Hub. - **[Create a Support Event Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your support staff might navigate to an Appointment record from their Calendars, which opens the Event record detail page. Student Success Hub installs a page layout for these records, called Support Event Layout, that you can use as is or customize. It even assigns the layout to the support staff and System Administrator profiles. - **[Create a Support Time Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support Time is such a central part of your support staff workflow that we recommend using a dedicated page layout for it, separate from other Event record types. A dedicated layout can surface the data most relevant to support availability and optimize navigation for support staff creating one-off availability. Student Success Hub installs a page layout for these records, called Support Time Layout, that you can use as is or customize. It even assigns the layout to the support staff and System Administrator profiles. ## Create a Global Action for Creating Appointments Enable support staff to create appointments from the global actions menu on any page in Student Success Hub. Edit the global publisher layout to add the Create Appointment button. 1. From Setup, click **Publisher Layouts**. 2. Click **Edit** next to Global Layout. 3. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 4. In the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section, click the wrench icon. 5. Drag the **Create Appointment** button to this section. 6. Save your layout changes. 7. In the Student Success Hub app, click the global actions menu in the header and verify that Create Appointment is available. ![The Global Actions menu in the Student Success Hub app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_appt_action_global.png) ## Create Custom Quick Actions for Appointments Add custom quick actions to the page layout you're using for Appointment records so that support staff can easily take action on their appointments. You can create actions that invoke apptActionsQuickAction or apptCancel, which are Lightning components included with Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Only appointment attendees can use the quick actions to cancel appointments. Non-attendees such as system administrators must open the Appointment record and change the support staff member attendee's Status to Cancelled. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Appointment**. 2. Go to the Buttons, Links, and Actions page, then click **New Action**. Now, configure the action. 3. For Action Type, select **Lightning Component**. 4. For Lightning Component, select **apptActionsQuickAction** or **apptCancel**. The apptActionsQuickAction component displays a window that lets support staff edit or cancel the appointment. The apptCancel component just cancels an appointment. 5. Give the action a label to use on the button. For example, Appointment Actions or Cancel Appointment. 6. Give the action a name, which is visible to admins only. For example, Appointment\_Actions or Cancel\_Appointment. 7. Edit the other fields as needed or accept the defaults. 8. Save your changes. ## Create a Support Event Page Layout Your support staff might navigate to an Appointment record from their Calendars, which opens the Event record detail page. Student Success Hub installs a page layout for these records, called Support Event Layout, that you can use as is or customize. It even assigns the layout to the support staff and System Administrator profiles. We recommend keeping the fields on the support Event page layout to a minimum and setting any visible fields as read only in field properties. For example, we recommend making sure that the Description field is read only. Limit interactions on the Event records associated with Appointment records to discourage support staff from editing the Event records directly. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Event**. 2. Click **Page Layouts** and select **Support Event Layout**. To create a layout manually, click **New** and base the layout on the Event Layout. 3. Review the fields on the page to make sure that only the necessary fields are included. Also consider making them read only. 4. Save your changes. Now, assign the support Event page layout to the Support Event record type. Remember that Student Success Hub assigns the Support Event Layout for you. 5. On the Page Layouts page, click **Page Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. 7. Click the Page Layout To Use menu and select your support Event layout. Then, click the System Administrator and support staff profiles (Cmd-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple). 8. Save your assignments. ## Create a Support Time Page Layout Support Time is such a central part of your support staff workflow that we recommend using a dedicated page layout for it, separate from other Event record types. A dedicated layout can surface the data most relevant to support availability and optimize navigation for support staff creating one-off availability. Student Success Hub installs a page layout for these records, called Support Time Layout, that you can use as is or customize. It even assigns the layout to the support staff and System Administrator profiles. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Event**. 2. Click **Page Layouts** and select **Support Time Layout**. To create a layout manually, click **New** and base the layout on the Event Layout. 3. Review the fields on the page and remove unnecessary ones. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip You can move the Name and Related To fields to a section called Not Needed, since you don't want support staff filling these fields out for general availability. 4. Save your changes. Now, assign the support Event page layout to the Support Time record type. Remember that Student Success Hub assigns the Support Time Layout for you. 5. On the Page Layouts page, click **Page Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. 7. Click the Page Layout To Use menu and select your support time layout. Then, click the System Administrator and support staff profiles (Cmd-click or Ctrl-click to select multiple). 8. Save your assignments. # Set Up Appointment Objects and Topics Configure the appointment objects and topics to support your institution’s scheduling needs. - **[Learn About Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_appointment_topics_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the custom Topic objects and how they're used in appointment scheduling in Student Success Hub orgs. - **[Set Up Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get appointment topics up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up the Appointment Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get the appointment objects up and running in your Student Success Hub org. # Set Up Appointment Scheduling Set up calendar access for staff availability, create appointment layouts that suit your needs, and configure virtual appointments and front-desk scheduling. - **[Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability. - **[Set Up Appointment Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to create appointments and see the data they need on Appointment records. - **[Set Up Virtual Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow your staff to conduct virtual support appointments in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get front-desk appointment scheduling up and running in your Student Success Hub org. # Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Education Cloud Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, and control who can schedule appointments, and how. Fine-tune sharing settings to control the learners' and staff's access to Salesforce objects, and create and assign permission sets to represent your staff's availability. Build a data model that supports your institution—staff members and teams, locations, appointment topics, and much more—to create a flexible and powerful appointment scheduling solution. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: To turn on Salesforce Scheduler, go to the Salesforce Scheduler Settings page in Setup. Set up all appointment data using Education Cloud objects. See Also: - [Set Up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_scheduler.htm) # Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Your Org Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Set Up Event Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Event record types are used to manage calendar data. Together with the appointment objects, they distinguish between the types of time that support staff members use to organize their days. Student Success Hub provides three Event record types: Support Event, Support Time, and Standard. - **[Set Up Organization-Level Appointment and Availability Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** SSH Hierarchy Settings in Custom Settings specify a set of record types and Event types required for scheduling appointments and support availability. Update the record type custom settings to match the Event record types that you've created. Also verify the Event Type custom settings that you'll use for tracking availability for support versus time actually spent supporting students in appointments. - **[Configure the Event Type Picklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Type picklist values on the Event object to align with the types of support availability and appointments. You can also use the picklist values to help build reports that show what types of appointments support staff have versus their availability. Student Success Hub provides some Event Type picklist values for you. - **[Customize Values for the Appointment Type Picklist](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Type picklist values on the Appointment object so that Appointment records are created with the appropriate values for walk-ins and scheduled appointments, and are configured with your desired default value. - **[Verify Calendar Sharing Settings for Support Staff Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub allows support staff members to schedule appointments for each other. By default, a support staff User who schedules appointments for another support staff User can access that person's Calendar. ## Set Up Event Record Types Event record types are used to manage calendar data. Together with the appointment objects, they distinguish between the types of time that support staff members use to organize their days. Student Success Hub provides three Event record types: Support Event, Support Time, and Standard.

Event Record Type Label

What the Event Represents for Support Staff

Support Event

"I'm booked with a student at this time."

An appointment that has been scheduled for one student or a group, or a walk-in appointment. Student Success Hub uses this record type along with the Appointment object to track appointment Events.

Support Time

"I'm available for appointments at this time."

A block of time that a support staff member has designated as available for meeting with students. Support staff can define three types of availability: for scheduled appointments with one or more students, for walk-in appointments, or for group appointments reserved by students in the portal. Support staff can configure availability as a one-off Event or a recurring series of Events.

If support staff members haven't designated any Support Time Events, students can't schedule appointments with them.

Standard

"I'm not available to meet with students at this time."

Any other type of scheduled Event. Indicates the times when a staff member isn't available for appointments because of other meetings, personal appointments, and so on. If a Standard Event overlaps with any scheduled availability, the Event overrides the availability. Student Success Hub avoids scheduling appointments during non-support Events.
![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Keep in mind that _record types_ on the Event object are different from the _Type picklist_ on the Event object. You set them up separately. Event record types are required for maintaining data about support staff availability to meet with students. Values for the Type picklist distinguish between types of actual support Events. For details about configuring the Event Type picklist, see [Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability."). To edit and review the Event record type values: 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Event**. 2. Go to the Record Types page. 3. Review the Support Event record type and customize the default name, as needed. Then, edit the Type picklist for the Support Event record type and make sure that Scheduled, Walk-In, and Group are the only Selected Values. 4. Review the Support Time record type and customize the default name, as needed. Then, edit the Type picklist for the Support Time record type and make sure that Scheduled, Walk-In, and Group are the only Selected Values. 5. Review the Standard record type and customize the default name. For example, name it Non-Support Event. Then, edit the Type picklist for the Non-Support Event record type. Be sure to only select the non-support values such as Call, Email, Meeting, and Other. Keep these record type values' API names (record type names) handy because you'll need to update a series of Custom Settings with these values. ## Set Up Organization-Level Appointment and Availability Settings SSH Hierarchy Settings in Custom Settings specify a set of record types and Event types required for scheduling appointments and support availability. Update the record type custom settings to match the Event record types that you've created. Also verify the Event Type custom settings that you'll use for tracking availability for support versus time actually spent supporting students in appointments. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to SSH Hierarchy Settings. 3. View the Default Organization Level Value settings and click **Edit**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For new installations, your settings are sometimes empty. If you don't see the Edit button, click **New** to auto-populate most fields with preset values, then click **Save**. Then click **Edit** again and proceed with the next steps. For a complete list of the settings, see [Student Success Hub Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings."). 4. Specify the custom settings for Event record types. (Refer to the Event record types that you [set up earlier](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability.").) Support Event Record Type Specify the Record Type Name of the record type used for support Events (AdvisingEvent in our example). Support Time Event Record Type Specify the Record Type Name of the record type used for availability Events (AdvisingTime in our example). 5. Verify and customize, as needed, the custom setting for Event Type that designates walk-in appointments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Student Success Hub saves walk-in appointments as a specific Type of support Event. So, it uses the Type field on the Event object instead of the record type. If you prefer different terminology for walk-ins, such as calling them drop-ins instead, customize the preset value. Walk-In Appointment Event Type Specify the value to display when indicating that a support Event is a walk-in appointment. Default value: Walk-In Appointment. 6. Verify and customize, as needed, the custom settings for Event Types that designate support availability. These values are displayed to both support staff and students, so make sure you specify values that clearly distinguish between the types and that are universally appropriate. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip The app uses these values with the Type picklist values in the Event object throughout the app. For example, the available times in the Appointment Manager and in support staff members' availability recurrence schedules show these availability Event Type values. If your org uses translation, your users see the translated versions of these values. Check that the values that you specify here match the API Names of their corresponding values in the Type picklist in the Event object. Also, be sure that you set up translations for the Type picklist values. Walk-In Availability Event Type Specify the value to display when indicating that an availability Event is for walk-in appointments. Default value: Walk-In. Scheduled Availability Event Type Specify the value to display when indicating that an availability Event is for appointments scheduled in advance. Default value: Scheduled. Group Availability Event Type Specify the value to display when indicating that an availability Event is for group appointments that students can sign up for in the portal. No default value is provided, however, Student Success Hub provides the value Group. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For complete instructions on how to get Group availability working in your org, see [Set Up Group Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Group availability up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). 7. Save your changes. ## Configure the Event Type Picklist Customize the Type picklist values on the Event object to align with the types of support availability and appointments. You can also use the picklist values to help build reports that show what types of appointments support staff have versus their availability. Student Success Hub provides some Event Type picklist values for you. ### Add Picklist Values 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Copy the value in Walk-In Appointment Event Type. In our example, it's Walk-In Appointment. 4. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Event**. 5. On the Fields & Relationships page, click the **Type** field. 6. In the Event Type Picklist Values section, click **New**. 7. Paste your copied value in the text box, and select the Support Event record type. 8. Save your changes. 9. Verify the newly added picklist value. ![The Event Type picklist values with a call-out on Walk-In Appointment](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_appt_type_picklist_values_walkin.png) 10. Add these other Event Type picklist values, if they're not already present. 1. Walk-In Availability Event Type—Add the value specified in custom settings to the Support Time record type. 2. Scheduled Availability Event Type—Add the value specified in custom settings to the Support Time record type. 3. Group Availability Event Type—Add the value specified in custom settings to the Support Time record type. 4. Scheduled Appointment—This value isn't specified elsewhere but we recommend adding it to enhance your reporting capabilities. Specify a value, such as Scheduled Appointment, add it to the Support Event record type, and set it as the default for the Support Event record type. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note There's no group appointment type. To track time that support staff spends in appointments created from Group availability, build a report that filters on appointments whose Type equals Scheduled and Discoverable equals True. For more information about building reports, see [Create Reports with the Report Builder](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/lex_implementation_reports_dashboards/lex_implementation_reports_dashboards_using_report_builder) in Trailhead. 11. Verify that the Type picklist now includes all the appropriate values. ![The picklist values with a call-out on the new values](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_appt_type_picklist_values_all.png) ### Configure Translations for Picklist Values Installing SSH includes unmanaged metadata that creates additional values for the Type picklist field on the Event object. However, the new picklist values aren't translated. For detailed instructions about translating these picklist values, see [Translate Metadata Labels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.entering_translated_terms.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize Values for the Appointment Type Picklist Customize the Type picklist values on the Appointment object so that Appointment records are created with the appropriate values for walk-ins and scheduled appointments, and are configured with your desired default value. Remember, there's no group appointment type. Group appointments scheduled by support staff use the Scheduled availability type, and group appointments reserved by students in the portal use the Group availability type. The difference is that Appointment records created from Group availability set the Discoverable field. So, students can reserve those group appointments in the Scheduling Wizard in the portal. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Appointment**. 2. On the Fields & Relationships page, click **Type**. 3. Review the values for scheduled and walk-in Appointments, along with the specified default value. 4. Customize these values as needed. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip For consistency, we recommend that these values match the Event type values in your custom settings and the Event type picklist. However, it's not required. ## Verify Calendar Sharing Settings for Support Staff Scheduling Student Success Hub allows support staff members to schedule appointments for each other. By default, a support staff User who schedules appointments for another support staff User can access that person's Calendar. For information about organization-wide default sharing for the Calendar object, see [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Support staff scheduling appointments for each other is different from front-desk or administrative staff scheduling appointments for support staff members or Support Pools. For more information, see [Set Up Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get front-desk appointment scheduling up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). # Set Up Appointment Topics Complete these tasks to get appointment topics up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Appointment Topics Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The appointment topic objects—Topic, Role Topic Setting, and User Topic Setting—were released with Student Success Hub 2.17. The Queue Topic Setting object was released with Student Success Hub 2.22. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update your profiles with object and field permissions for the Topic, Role Topic Setting, and User Topic Setting objects. If you're using queue management, update your profiles for the Queue Topic Setting object, too. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure you update your default org-wide sharing settings for the Topic objects. - **[Add Topics to the App Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For convenience, add the Topic item to the app navigation menu. - **[Create and Edit Appointment Topics and Subtopics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and edit appointment Topics, including their User Topic Settings and Role Topic Settings, from the Student Success Hub app. - **[Create and Edit Queuing Topics and Subtopics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topics and Subtopics that are used with the queue management support model are stored in the Queue Topic Setting object, which has a child relationship to the Topic and Support Pool objects. As a result, Queue Topic Settings are available only to Support Pools that use queue management, and not to individual support staff members who use a queue to manage walk-in hours. ## Appointment Topics Release Information The appointment topic objects—Topic, Role Topic Setting, and User Topic Setting—were released with Student Success Hub 2.17. The Queue Topic Setting object was released with Student Success Hub 2.22. To get appointment topics up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Appointment Topics Update your profiles with object and field permissions for the Topic, Role Topic Setting, and User Topic Setting objects. If you're using queue management, update your profiles for the Queue Topic Setting object, too. As part of setting object permissions, check the Tab Settings for the Topic object. Give tab access only to profiles that you want creating records. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To help you maintain Topic settings, consider creating a permission set with Create and Edit permissions and field-level security for the objects, then assign it to a few trusted users. See [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal.") for permissions requirements for the Topic objects. ## Configure Sharing Settings for Appointment Topics Make sure you update your default org-wide sharing settings for the Topic objects. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Add Topics to the App Navigation Menu For convenience, add the Topic item to the app navigation menu. See [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). ## Create and Edit Appointment Topics and Subtopics Create and edit appointment Topics, including their User Topic Settings and Role Topic Settings, from the Student Success Hub app. This task is completed typically by Student Success Hub administrators, but support staff can also complete this task if they have the right permissions. Let's first make sure that you understand how the Topic objects work together. ![A Topic record showing the Subtopics, User Topic Settings, and Role Topic Settings related lists](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_custom_topic_relationships.png) - The Topic object is where you specify the topic of discussion for an appointment. You create a parent Topic (1) and, optionally, child Topics, which are listed in the Subtopics related list (2). Throughout Student Success Hub, Subtopics are available in picklists and appear in related lists and Lightning components only if they're defined for a parent Topic. Otherwise, only the parent Topic appears for selection. - The User Topic Setting object is where your support staff members' individual settings per Topic get saved. For example, an appointment duration that varies for each Topic. (3) - The Role Topic Setting object lets you associate case team member roles with Topics. This association determines who shows as available for a specific appointment Topic when students schedule an appointment. (4) - If you're using queue management, the Queue Topic Setting object lets you associate Support Pools with Topics. This association ensures that only the Topics relevant to a queue are available to staff managing the queue. Here's how to create a Topic and its associated settings. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, select **Topics** from the app navigation menu. If you don't see Topics, see [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). 2. To create a Topic, click **New**. To edit a Topic, select one from the list view. 3. Specify the appropriate fields. Topic Name Topic Names can be general or specific, such as Academic or Degree Planning. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip We recommend that you limit the name to 25 characters. Names longer than 25 characters get truncated in the Appointment Wizard. Sort Order Control a Topic's display order within the Topic picklist, such as forcing a topic named Other to display last. Parent Topic If the Topic is a parent Topic, leave this field blank. If the Topic is a child Topic, search for and select the parent Topic. 4. Save the Topic. 5. To see a list of the Topic's related Subtopics, User Topic Settings, and Role Topic Settings, click **Related** on the Topic's record page. If you're using queue management, you also see Queue Topic Settings. 6. To create associated records for the Topic, click **New** on a related list. For Subtopics, specify the appropriate Topic fields. For User Topic Settings, it's recommended that you not enter the values here. Instead, have support staff specify them in their individual availability settings. Setting ID An auto-generated ID for this record. User A lookup to the associated support staff User record. Topic This field is auto-filled with the associated Topic. Default Appointment Duration The default appointment duration in minutes for the Topic and User. For Role Topic Settings, specify the appropriate fields. Setting ID Leave this field blank. It's an auto-generated ID for this record. Role Name The name of the case team member role associated with the setting. Match the exact spelling and casing of the Member Role Name from the associated Case Team Member Role record. For more information, see [Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). Topic This field is auto-filled with the associated Topic. 7. Save your changes. ## Create and Edit Queuing Topics and Subtopics Topics and Subtopics that are used with the queue management support model are stored in the Queue Topic Setting object, which has a child relationship to the Topic and Support Pool objects. As a result, Queue Topic Settings are available only to Support Pools that use queue management, and not to individual support staff members who use a queue to manage walk-in hours. Queue Topic Settings allow you to restrict the topics that appear for a specific Support Pool. So, for example, when a staff member adds someone to the Career Services Support Pool queue, they don’t see Financial Aid topics cluttering the list of available Career topics. Queue Topic Settings also let you make topics available to a queue but not to students who are scheduling appointments using the Scheduling Wizard. For example, a Student ID Request might be a common service for a one-stop shop, but not something commonly addressed during scheduled appointments. Before you create Queue Topic Settings, we recommend that you first create the regular Topics and Subtopics eligible for use with Support Pool queues. Then it's easy to map the Topics and Subtopics to their respective Support Pools. This mapping determines the Topic and Subtopic picklist values that appear when adding someone to a queue. The Queue Topic Setting mapping is flexible and, as with regular Topics and Subtopics, the display of picklist values is guided by this logic: - A Topic can exist and appear without a Subtopic. - A Subtopic appears only when a parent Topic is defined. To help illustrate the logic, here's a table with some example data and the resultant behavior in the Add to Queue form.

Topic

Parent Topic

Topic Mapped to a Queue Topic Setting?

Picklist Behavior in Add to Queue Window

Academic

  

Yes

The Topic picklist includes Academic. When Academic is selected, the Subtopic picklist appears.

Degree Planning

Academic

No

When Academic is selected as the Topic, Degree Planning doesn't show as an available Subtopic.

Course Authorization

Academic

Yes

When Academic is selected as the Topic, Course Authorization shows as an available Subtopic.

Student ID Request

  

Yes

The Topic picklist includes Student ID Request. When selected, the Subtopic picklist doesn't appear.

Replacement Card

Student ID Request

No

Replacement Card doesn't show as a Subtopic because even though it has a parent Topic mapped to the queue, the Subtopic itself isn't mapped to the queue.

General Question

  

Yes

The Topic picklist includes General Question. When selected, the Subtopic picklist doesn't appear.

Billing

  

No

The Topic picklist doesn't include Billing.

Financial Hold

Billing

Yes

Financial Hold doesn't show as a Subtopic because the parent Topic isn't mapped to the queue.
You create Queue Topic Settings using the related list on either a Topic record page or a Support Pool record page. When you set up queue management, specify your Queue Topic Settings right after you set up the Support Pool. Let's try it that way. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, select **Support Pools** from the navigation menu. 2. Select the Pool for which you want to create Queue Topic Settings (for example, Career Services), and click the **Related** tab. 3. In the Queue Topic Settings related list, click **New**. 4. Click in the **Topic** field and either: 1. Select an existing Topic, or 2. Select **New Topic** and then specify a Topic Name and, optionally, a Sort Order and a Parent Topic. For details on the fields see [Set Up Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get appointment topics up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Only parent topics show in the Topic picklist. 5. Save the Topic and then save the Queue Topic Setting. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you have several existing Topics that you want to map to Queue Topic Settings, it's easier to start from the Topics page. Click the Topic name, then click the **Related** tab on the Topic record page and create records from the Queue Topic Settings related list. Queue Topic Settings have a child relationship to Topics and Support Pools. This relationship means that you can't edit the Topics from the Queue Topic Settings related list on a Support Pool record page or from the Queue Topic Settings page. To edit a Queue Topic Setting, go to the Topics page and select **Edit** from the record's action menu. You can, however, delete a Queue Topic Setting from anywhere you can access a Queue Topic Setting record. Locations include the Topics page, the Queue Topic Settings page, and the Queue Topic Settings related list on the Topic or Support Pool record page. # Set Up Attendance Define how your institution captures and resolves attendance. Create attendance codes, define an attendance policy, add the sources that capture attendance, and rank how Attendance resolves signals when sources disagree. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up Attendance: | Education Cloud Full Access | An admin prepares the structure for Attendance, including the codes, the policy, trusted sources, and how source signals resolve. Your institution then integrates its own systems and devices, such as a card reader, a learning management system, or a voice agent, to send attendance signals into that structure for your daily operations. 1. To track attendance outcomes, create a code set for each outcome, such as present, absent, tardy, excused absence, or early departure. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Code Sets**, and then click **New**. 2. Enter a name that identifies the code. 3. Enter a code that your systems and reports use for the outcome. 4. Make the code active so that it's available for use. 5. If the code applies to only part of the year, set effective start and end dates. 6. Save your changes. 2. To define how attendance is captured and interpreted, create an attendance policy for each set of rules. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Attendance Policies**, and then click **New**. 2. Enter a name. 3. Make the policy active so that it's available for use. 4. Select an attendance model. 5. Select a submission mode. The mode determines whether the attendance-taking event submits entries by the full roster or by exception. 6. Save your changes. 3. Create an attendance source type for each channel that captures attendance. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Attendance Source Types**, and then click **New**. 2. Enter a name, such as Instructor Submission, Card Swipe, or Parent Call. 3. Select a code. 4. Save your changes. 4. Create an attendance policy source type for each source that a policy uses. The policy source type connects a source to the policy and ranks its priority in the resolution. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Attendance Policy Source Types**, and then click **New**. 2. Select an attendance policy. 3. Select an attendance source type. 4. Assign a priority. 5. If you want this source's signals to resolve entries without manual review, select **Auto Resolve**. 6. Save your changes. 5. Assign the attendance policy to the academic records that it governs. Select the applicable attendance policy on a learning program, learning course, or course offering record. # Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups in Education Use a schedule-triggered flow to automatically receive updates to your fundraising rollup calculations. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure automatic updates for Fundraising rollups:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Prerequisites: - [Enable person accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - [Enable Data Pipelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.sdp_setup_enable.htm&language=en_US). - [Set up a Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_setup.htm&language=en_US). - Make sure that the DonorGiftSummary, GiftDesignation, and OutreachSummary definitions are available in the Data Processing Engine Definitions table. - Make sure that users have access to the objects and fields that are used in the DPE definitions. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then under Process Automation, select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 3. Select **Schedule-Triggered Flow**. 4. Set the schedule to run the flow. 5. Add an action element. 6. Search for and select the **Manage Fundraising DPE Definitions** invocable action. 7. Enter Automatic Rollup Updates or your preferred label as the action. 8. Create resources for the date input values. 1. From Toolbox Manager, click **New Resource**. 2. Select **Formula** as the resource type. 3. Enter an API name that describes the current calendar year formula. For example, enter CURRENTCALENDARYEAR as the formula for the current calendar year. 4. Select **Date** as the data type. 5. Enter this formula: DATE(YEAR({!$Flow.CurrentDate}),1,1). 6. Similarly, create formula resources for the Last Calendar Year by using the formula DATE(YEAR({!$Flow.CurrentDate})-1, 1, 1), and Last Two Calendar Year by using the formula DATE(YEAR({!$Flow.CurrentDate})-2, 1, 1). 9. Add the three formulas that you created to the corresponding input date fields. 10. For each of the three DPE definitions, select **True** to include the definition in the action, or select **False** to exclude it from the action. 11. Add a fault path to the action element. To receive an email in case of an action fail, add a [send email action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_ref_elements_actions_sendemail.htm&language=en_US) that's triggered by the fault path. 12. Add a Batch Job Loop element after the action element. 1. Add a loop element. 2. Enter a name for the element in the Label field. For example, enter Batch Job Loop. 3. Search for and select **Output from Manage Fundraising DPE Definition** as the collection variable, and then click **Batch Job IDs List**. 13. Inside the loop, add a Wait for Conditions logic element and name it Wait For Batch Job To Complete. 14. Add a Wait Configuration labeled Batch Job Complete. 1. Add the All Conditions Are Met (AND) wait condition. 2. Select **Current Item from Loop Batch Job Loop** as the wait condition resource. 3. Select **Does Not Equal** as the operator. 4. Select **Blank Value (Empty String)** as the value. 5. On the Resume Event tab, select **Wait Until A Platform Event Message is Received**. 6. Select **Batch Job Status Changed Event** as the platform event. 7. Select **All Conditions Are Met (AND)** as the condition requirement. 8. Select **Batch Job** as the field and **Current Item from Loop Batch\_Job** as the value. 15. Add another Wait Configuration labeled Time Out After A Day. 1. Add the All Conditions Are Met (AND) wait condition. 2. Select **Current Item from Loop Batch Job Loop** as the wait condition resource. 3. Select **Does Not Equal** as the operator. 4. Select **Blank Value (Empty String)** as the value. 5. On the Resume Event tab, select **Wait Until A Specified Time**. 6. Set the date and time to wait for this event to be completed. For example: for a flow that's scheduled to run daily, select **Running Flow Interview**, and then **Interview Start Time** as the base time, **24** as the offset number, and **Hours** as the offset unit. Note: Don't wait more than 24 hours on a flow scheduled to run daily. 7. Leave the default path as is. 16. Save your changes. 17. Give the flow a label and an API name, and save the changes. 18. Click **Activate**. The Fundraising rollup calculations are updated automatically based on the schedule that you set in the flow. After the schedule-triggered flow runs, you can see the job progress in the table of recent batch jobs in Batch Jobs in Salesforce. # Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups in Nonprofit Use a schedule-triggered flow to automatically receive updates to your fundraising rollup calculations. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To configure automatic updates for Fundraising rollups:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Prerequisites: - [Enable person accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - [Enable Data Pipelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.sdp_setup_enable.htm&language=en_US). - [Set up a Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_setup.htm&language=en_US). - Make sure that the DonorGiftSummary, GiftDesignation, and OutreachSummary definitions are available in the Data Processing Engine Definitions table. - Make sure that users have access to the objects and fields that are used in the DPE definitions. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then under Process Automation, select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 3. Select **Schedule-Triggered Flow**. 4. Set the schedule to run the flow. 5. Add an action element. 6. Search for and select the **Manage Fundraising DPE Definitions** invocable action. 7. Enter Automatic Rollup Updates or your preferred label as the action. 8. Create resources for the date input values. 1. From Toolbox Manager, click **New Resource**. 2. Select **Formula** as the resource type. 3. Enter an API name that describes the current calendar year formula. For example, enter CURRENTCALENDARYEAR as the formula for the current calendar year. 4. Select **Date** as the data type. 5. Enter this formula: DATE(YEAR({!$Flow.CurrentDate}),1,1). 6. Similarly, create formula resources for the Last Calendar Year by using the formula DATE(YEAR({!$Flow.CurrentDate})-1, 1, 1), and Last Two Calendar Year by using the formula DATE(YEAR({!$Flow.CurrentDate})-2, 1, 1). 9. Add the three formulas that you created to the corresponding input date fields. 10. For each of the three DPE definitions, select **True** to include the definition in the action, or select **False** to exclude it from the action. 11. Add a fault path to the action element. To receive an email in case of an action fail, add a [send email action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_ref_elements_actions_sendemail.htm&language=en_US) that's triggered by the fault path. 12. Add a Batch Job Loop element after the action element. 1. Add a loop element. 2. Enter a name for the element in the Label field. For example, enter Batch Job Loop. 3. Search for and select **Output from Manage Fundraising DPE Definition** as the collection variable, and then click **Batch Job IDs List**. 13. Inside the loop, add a Wait for Conditions logic element and name it Wait For Batch Job To Complete. 14. Add a Wait Configuration labeled Batch Job Complete. 1. Add the All Conditions Are Met (AND) wait condition. 2. Select **Current Item from Loop Batch Job Loop** as the wait condition resource. 3. Select **Does Not Equal** as the operator. 4. Select **Blank Value (Empty String)** as the value. 5. On the Resume Event tab, select **Wait Until A Platform Event Message is Received**. 6. Select **Batch Job Status Changed Event** as the platform event. 7. Select **All Conditions Are Met (AND)** as the condition requirement. 8. Select **Batch Job** as the field and **Current Item from Loop Batch\_Job** as the value. 15. Add another Wait Configuration labeled Time Out After A Day. 1. Add the All Conditions Are Met (AND) wait condition. 2. Select **Current Item from Loop Batch Job Loop** as the wait condition resource. 3. Select **Does Not Equal** as the operator. 4. Select **Blank Value (Empty String)** as the value. 5. On the Resume Event tab, select **Wait Until A Specified Time**. 6. Set the date and time to wait for this event to be completed. For example: for a flow that's scheduled to run daily, select **Running Flow Interview**, and then **Interview Start Time** as the base time, **24** as the offset number, and **Hours** as the offset unit. Note: Don't wait more than 24 hours on a flow scheduled to run daily. 7. Leave the default path as is. 16. Save your changes. 17. Give the flow a label and an API name, and save the changes. 18. Click **Activate**. The Fundraising rollup calculations are updated automatically based on the schedule that you set in the flow. After the schedule-triggered flow runs, you can see the job progress in the table of recent batch jobs in Batch Jobs in Salesforce. # Set Up Backup Models Activate and configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights by using Backup Models. Backup Models should be enabled at the same time that you invoke Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB) from the Einstein for Nonprofits app. You can also activate or deactivate Backup Models later. The Backup Model job is a [batchable Apex](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?language=en_us&type=5&id=sf.code_schedule_batch_apex.htm). However, Salesforce recommends that you enable Backup Models during initial activation. If Backup Models are enabled at the same time as EPB, the results from EPB appear on the Contact cards. If EPB is unable to model the dataset and generate predictions due to insufficient data volumes in the org or an application error, then the results from Backup Models are shown instead. If Backup Models aren’t enabled during initial activation, then a failure by EPB to generate scores results in a lack of data for Contact cards. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-einstein_for_nonprofits-264-0-0-production-enus/291bfb05-3242-402a-92b6-b757730f100a/images/icon_note.png) Note If a score is generated and then predictions are disabled, the prediction still persists on the Contact card. The likelihood of the insights being stale is high. ## Activate Backup Models for the First Time To activate Backup Models for the first time: 1. From App Launcher, open the **Einstein for Nonprofits** app. 2. Click the **Get Started** tab. 3. Click the **Einstein Platform** or **Backup Model** tile. 4. Select **Default Backup Model Schedule**. The Backup Model job is controlled by the APEX scheduler and runs on the default schedule. ## Subsequent Configuration of Backup Models You can activate or deactivate one or more Backup Models. Deactivating all Backup Models prevents the scheduled Backup Model job from running. To activate or deactivate Backup Models after the first time: 1. Launch the **Einstein for Nonprofits** app from the App Launcher. 2. Click the **Get Started** tab. 3. Click the **Backup Model** tile. 4. To activate or deactivate the generation of predictions, on the Backup Models Status page, click **Edit**, and then select or deselect the checkboxes. 5. Click **Save**. You can modify the default schedule for Backup Models from **Setup**. ## Display Backup Model Predictions Backup Models provide you with predictive metrics while the data in your org grows to meet thresholds that allow EPB to successfully generate its own metrics. You can view predictive insight percent probability scores on each constituent’s Contact card. Modify the page layout for the Contact object to display these scores by using Custom Lightning Web Components. # Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Components for Advisors Give advisors the tools to manage student progress by adding career planning and life goals features to the Student Success app. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org and configure apps with Lightning App Builder: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Configure Resume Assessment and View Assessment pages for the Student Success app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **App Page** and then click **Next**. 4. For Label, enter Resume Assessment and then click **Next**. 5. Select a layout and click **Done**. 6. From the Components list, drag the **Omniscript for Experience Cloud** component onto the canvas. 7. Save your changes. 8. Click **Activate**, and add the Resume Assessment page to the Student Success app. 9. Save your changes. 10. Copy and save the API name of the new page, which you need later when configuring the Student Assessment component. 11. Similarly, create a View Assessment app page and add it to the Student Success app. 2. Configure the case record page in the Student Success app so advisors can see all relevant information on the Case record. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. In Lightning App Builder, drag and drop the Student Competencies component onto the page. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat the steps for Student Involvement Groups, Student Goals, and Student Assessments components. 7. When configuring the Student Assessments component, enter the API names for the Resume Assessment and View Assessments app pages that you created earlier. # Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Infrastructure To provide the career planning and life goals experience for students on the portal, Charlie, the Connected University advisor, creates assessments, involvement groups, and competencies. These records serve as the foundation for what students see and interact with. ![The connected university advisor, creates assessments, involvement groups, and competencies.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_goals_admin_flow.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This example uses common portal configurations and field values. Customize these settings to meet your institution's needs. 1. Create assessment questions to use in career or preference assessments. See [Create an Intake Assessment Question](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_intake_assessment_question.htm&language=en_US&type=5). | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Learning Patterns | | Question Text | What’s your go-to way to learn something new? | | Category | Preference | To make this question the active version, select **Active**. Similarly, create assessment questions for these questions: - Which words would your friends use to describe you? - How do you prefer to learn a complex topic? - How do you prefer to work? 2. Create an Omniscript assessment form for career and interest assessments. See [Create a Career and Interest Assessment Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_career_interest_assessment_library.htm&language=en_US). | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Discovery Framework Usage Type | Career and Life Goals | Omniscript Details | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Discovery Framework Usage Type | Career and Life Goals | | Name | Strengths Snapshot | | Language | English | | Type | StudentAffinity | | Subtype | StudentAffinity | | Step Name | Strengths Snapshot | To find the questions, search by Preference category, and then drag selected questions to the appropriate step. 3. Build the Omniscript for the assessment that students can attempt on the portal and activate the assessment to publish it to the student portal. See [Create a Career and Interest Assessment Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_career_interest_assessment_library.htm&language=en_US). 4. Create an involvement group to represent a campus club or organization. See [Create Involvement Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_involvement_groups.htm&language=en_US). To set up a campus club named The Ink Society and link it to learning competencies at Connected University, create the involvement group for The Ink Society. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Record Type | CRM originated | | Name | The Ink Society | | Description | For students who love creative writing, spoken word, and storytelling | | Founding Date | 05/01/2024 | | Type | Club | | Category | Recreational | | Activity Season | All Seasons | | Mode | Hybrid | | Status | Active | | Self-Enrollment | True | | Student Leader | Jenny John | | Student Leader Role | President | 5. Create competency records to represent competencies students can earn. See [Create Competencies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_competencies.htm&language=en_US). Competency 1 | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Record Type | CRM originated | | Name | Creative Thinking | | Type | Interpersonal Skill | Competency 2 | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Record Type | CRM originated | | Name | Written Communication | | Type | Interpersonal Skill | 6. Associate the first competency with the involvement group by creating a Competency Related record. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Involvement Group | The Ink Society | | Competency | Creative Thinking | 7. Associate a second competency by creating another Competency Related record. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Involvement Group | The Ink Society | | Competency | Written Communication | # Set Up Case Record Page for Advising Configure the case record page in Student Success for advising.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the case record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
Before you begin, provide at least read access to these fields. The Program Enrollments tab uses Omnistudio Data Mappers to show benefit disbursement information for the advisee.
Object Fields
Benefit Disbursement
  • Benefit Session
  • Status
  • Start Date
  • End Date
  • Application Date
Program Enrollment Contact
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. From the list, select any case to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. In Lightning App Builder, add tabs for appointments, record alerts, and tasks. 1. Click the Tabs component to view its properties. 2. Click **Add Tab**. 3. Select the new tab, then select the tab label as Appointments. If the specific label isn’t available in the list, select **Custom** and enter the label. 4. Similarly, add tabs for Record Alerts and Tasks. 5. Add dynamic related lists for upcoming, in progress, and completed appointments under the Appointments tab. 1. From the Components list, drag the **Tabs** component to under the Appointments tab. 2. On the tab properties, add these tabs: Upcoming, In Progress, and Completed. 3. From the Components list, drag the **Dynamic Related List - Single** component to under the Upcoming tab. 4. From the list properties, under Related List, find and select **Service Appointments**. 5. Under Related List Filters, click **Add Filter** to add and configure filters as required to show upcoming appointments. 6. Under Actions, remove **New**. 7. Similarly, add and format the **Dynamic Related List - Single** component for the In Progress and Completed tabs. 6. Repeat step 5 to add dynamic related lists for upcoming, in progress, and completed record alerts under the Record Alerts tab. 7. Add a related list for open activities to the Tasks tab. 1. From the Components list, drag the **Related List - Single** component to under the Tasks tab. 2. On the list properties, under Related List, find and select **Open Activities**. See [Set the Default Activities View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.customize_records_record_activities_view_set.htm&type=5). 8. From the Components list, drag the **Action Launcher** component to the page. For detailed configuration steps, see [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5). 9. Save your changes. # Set Up Cases for Appointments and Student Tasks Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to work with Student Record Cases in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Configure the Appointments Related Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_appointments_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Record Case Lightning page layout that Student Success Hub installs includes three Appointments related lists on the Appointments tab of the page: Upcoming Appointments, Past Appointments, and Cancelled Appointments. If you're using a different Case page layout, learn how to add the three related lists to the page. - **[Configure the Tasks Related Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_appointments_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can give support staff the option to create tasks from the Tasks related lists in a Student Record Case. Specify in the Task Related List component whether to show or hide the button for creating a new task. - **[Consider Displaying the Activity Related List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_appointments_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Activity related list in the Activity tab shows both Tasks and Events related to the Student Record Case. If you display the Activity related list in the app, make sure you review with your support staff members these details about using it. - **[Add the Task Mass Action Button to Cases List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_appointments_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give support staff the option to create a task for one or more students from Cases list views. ## Configure the Appointments Related Lists The Student Record Case Lightning page layout that Student Success Hub installs includes three Appointments related lists on the Appointments tab of the page: Upcoming Appointments, Past Appointments, and Cancelled Appointments. If you're using a different Case page layout, learn how to add the three related lists to the page. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to any Student Record Case record. 2. From the page header, click the gear icon. Select **Edit Page** to open the Lightning App Builder. 3. Go to the Appointments tab. 4. From the menu of components, drag the **Appointments Related List** component to the Appointments tab in the page canvas. 5. In the component's Properties pane: 1. Set the Status to **Upcoming**, **Past**, or **Cancelled**. 2. If desired, change the value of the Show New Button field to show or hide the New button in the related list. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to add the other two Appointments related lists. 7. Save your changes and exit Lightning App Builder. ## Configure the Tasks Related Lists You can give support staff the option to create tasks from the Tasks related lists in a Student Record Case. Specify in the Task Related List component whether to show or hide the button for creating a new task. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to any Student Record Case record. 2. Go to the Tasks related list and see whether each instance of the related list shows the New button. 3. To show or hide the New button: 1. From the page header, click the gear icon. Select **Edit Page** to open the Lightning App Builder. 2. In the Tabs component, select the Tasks related list. You may need to first click **More** and select Tasks from the menu. 3. Select an instance of the Task Related List component, such as Completed Tasks, and then in the Properties pane, change the value of the Show New Button field. 4. Save your changes. 4. Activate the page before you return to the Student Record Case and verify your updated configuration. ## Consider Displaying the Activity Related List The Activity related list in the Activity tab shows both Tasks and Events related to the Student Record Case. If you display the Activity related list in the app, make sure you review with your support staff members these details about using it. - The Activity related list lets support staff manage all the Tasks _related_ to a student, including Tasks assigned to the student and Tasks assigned to other people, such as someone on the student's success team. In contrast, the Tasks related list shows only the Tasks _assigned_ to the student. If you don't display the Activity related list, support staff are limited to viewing Tasks assigned to the student in the Tasks related list. - Appointment data is shown on the Appointments tab in the Upcoming Appointments and Past Appointments related lists. The Activity related list does not show Appointments. If your school tracks any Events that are related to the Student Record Case (that is, Events other than Appointments), and it's useful for support staff to see those Events, then it can be useful to display the Activity related list. - Do _not_ use the New Event button on the Activity related list to create Appointments. ## Add the Task Mass Action Button to Cases List Views Give support staff the option to create a task for one or more students from Cases list views. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Keep in mind that any mass actions you add to Cases list views are visible by all users. 1. Add the custom task button to Cases list views. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Case**. 2. On the Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic page, click the action menu for the List View row and select **Edit**. 3. Add the Create Student Task custom buttons to the Selected Buttons list. 4. Save your changes. 2. Give support staff access to the page that opens when they click the Create Student Task button. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the support staff profile. 3. In the Visualforce Page Access section, verify that the CreateTaskMassAction item is in the Enabled Visualforce Pages list. 4. Save your changes 3. Verify that the button appears in the app and works as expected. 1. Log in to the Student Success Hub app as a support staff member and click **Cases**. 2. Select a Cases list view, such as **My Students**. 3. Confirm that the Create Student Task button appears at the top of the page. 4. Test the button by selecting the checkbox next to one or more students, and then clicking **Create Student Task**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The selected Cases must be Student Record Cases and their associated Contacts must also have an associated Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login user. 5. Enter task details and save your changes. 6. Verify that the selected students are assigned the task. # Set Up Cases List Views Customize Cases list views to make them more productive for support staff who use Student Success Hub. - **[Learn About Cases List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_list_views.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub (SSH) provides both K-12 and higher ed orgs a list view that shows support staff a list of their student Cases. - **[Add the Email Mass Action Button to Cases List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_list_views.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give support staff the option to send an email to one or more students from Cases list views. - **[Consider Creating Custom List Views of Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_list_views.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use data imported from integration systems that connect to standard or custom Salesforce objects to create custom student Case list views. These systems include your student information system (SIS) or learning management system (LMS). For example, show all of a support staff member's first-year students with an undeclared major, or all of a support staff member's students who are at risk. ## Learn About Cases List Views Student Success Hub (SSH) provides both K-12 and higher ed orgs a list view that shows support staff a list of their student Cases. The list view, My Students, includes all Cases that the support staff User owns and whose Status isn't Closed. Support staff can access this list by selecting **Cases** from the app navigation menu and choosing **My Students** from the list view menu. ## Add the Email Mass Action Button to Cases List Views Give support staff the option to send an email to one or more students from Cases list views. ### Before You Begin with Mass Actions Before you add the mass action button, consider how mass actions work in SSH. - Mass actions on Cases list views are visible to all users. - The mass action button uses SSH terminology (Email Students). - The selected Cases must be Student Record Cases and their associated Contact records must have a valid email address. See [Verify Email Deliverability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_email_verify_deliverability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure you can send email to students in Student Success Hub."). - When a staff member sends an email, the From Email field appears blank unless the staff member has the View Setup and Configuration system permission. When the From Email field is blank, the email is sent from the staff member's User email address. - SSH sends the email to each student individually. Students don't see other recipients in the To field. - Emails that you send count against the 5,000 mass email limit. See [Mass Email Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.limitations_email_mass.htm&type=5). ### Add the Email Mass Action Button to Cases List Views Add and test the email mass action button. 1. Add the email button. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Case**. 2. Click **List View Button Layout**. 3. In the List View row, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/actionsmenu.png) and select **Edit**. 4. Add the **Email Students** custom button to the Selected Buttons list. 5. Save your changes. 2. Give the support staff profile access to the VisualForce Page that the email action opens. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the support staff profile. 3. In the Enabled Visualforce Page Access section, verify that the sfal.SendEmailMassAction item is enabled. If not, click **Edit** and add it to the Enabled Visualforce Pages list. 4. Save your changes. 3. Verify that the button is available in student Cases list views. 1. Log in to the SSH app as a support staff member and choose **Cases** from the app navigation menu. 2. Select a Cases list view such as My Students. 3. Verify that the Email Students button appears. 4. Test the email button. 1. Select the checkbox next to one or more students and then click **Email Students**. 2. Write the email message and send the email. 3. Verify that the selected students receive the email. ## Consider Creating Custom List Views of Students You can use data imported from integration systems that connect to standard or custom Salesforce objects to create custom student Case list views. These systems include your student information system (SIS) or learning management system (LMS). For example, show all of a support staff member's first-year students with an undeclared major, or all of a support staff member's students who are at risk. Before you create a custom student Case list view, you must make this data available to the student's Case record. Create rollup summary fields, formulas, or triggers to populate the data. These methods let you filter student list views using data that isn't directly available on the Case record. # Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up features: | Education Cloud Full Access |
Feature Steps
Accounting Subledger

  1. Add Accounting Subledger users.

  2. Set up data pipelines for Accounting Subledger.

  3. Assign Accounting Subledger permission sets. See Accounting Subledger Setup.
Action Launcher

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Action Launcher, and then select Set Up Action Launcher.

  2. Turn on Action Launcher.
Actionable Relationship Center

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Actionable Relationship Center, and then select Set Up Actionable Relationship Center.

  2. Turn on Actionable Relationship Center.
Actionable Segmentation

See Enable Actionable Segmentation.
Care Plans

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Program and Case Management, and then select Care Plan Settings.

  2. Turn on Create and manage care plans.
Case Proceedings

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Program and Case Management, and then select Case Proceedings Settings.

  2. Turn on Create and manage case proceedings.

  3. Add picklist values to the Status field on the Complaint Participant object. See Configure Case and Complaint Participants.

Note
Note Only required for program management and student success features.
Case Referrals

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Program and Case Management, and then select Case Referrals Settings.

  2. Turn on Create and manage referrals.
Clause Management

See Configure Clause Category.
Contacts to Multiple Accounts

See Set Up Contacts to Multiple Accounts.
Decision Tables

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Business Rules Engine, and then select Business Rules Engine Settings.

  2. Turn on Industries Cloud Common Decision Tables Access.
Disclosure and Compliance Hub

See Disclosure and Compliance Hub.
Discovery Framework

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Discovery Framework, and then select General Settings.

  2. Turn on Discovery Framework.
Document Checklist

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Document Checklist, and then select Document Checklist Settings.

  2. Turn on Checklist Items with Attachments.
Einstein Academic Insights

  1. In Setup, find and select Set Up Education Cloud.

  2. Under Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud, turn on Einstein Academic Insights.

Important
Important To use Einstein Academic Insights, you must purchase Data Cloud as part of an add-on or as a standalone license. To purchase an add-on license, contact your Salesforce account executive.
Einstein Advising Summary

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud and select it.

  2. Under Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud, turn on Einstein Advising Summary.
Einstein Generative AI

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein Setup, and then select Einstein Setup under Einstein Generative AI.

  2. Turn on Einstein.
Group Membership

See Set Up Group Membership.
Intelligent Document Reader

See Intelligent Document Reader.

Important
Important Turning on Intelligent Document Reader in Government Cloud and Government Cloud Plus organizations can send data outside the authorization boundary. Contact your Salesforce account executive for more details.
Intelligent Question Generation

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Discovery Framework, and then select General Settings.

  2. Turn on Intelligent Question Generation.
Interaction Summaries

See Enable and Configure Interaction Summaries.
Interest Tags

See Enable Interest Tags.
Marketing Cloud for Education

See Marketing Cloud for Education.
Omnistudio

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Omnistudio, and then select Omnistudio Settings.

  2. Turn on Omnistudio Metadata.

  3. Turn off Managed Package Runtime.

  4. Turn on Deploy Custom Lightning Web Components in Standard Runtime.
Outcome Management

See Outcome Management Setup. After you enable Outcome Management, create and assign a permission set to users.

  1. Clone the Education Cloud Full Access permission set.

  2. Update the system permissions for the new permission set.

    1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets and select Permission Sets.

    2. Click your new Outcome Management permission set.

    3. Click System Permissions, and then click Edit.

    4. Add permissions: For CRM users, select Manage Outcomes and Run Flows. For Experience Cloud users, select Manage Outcomes.

    5. Save your changes.

  3. Assign the permission set to users who need Outcome Management. See Assign a Permission Set to Users.
Program and Benefit Management

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Benefit Management, and then select Program and Benefit Management Settings.

  2. Turn on Create and manage your programs, benefits, and goals.

  3. Turn on Allow users to access all benefit assignment and goal assignment records when the user has access to the benefit assignment and goal assignment's parent records.

Note
Note Only required for program management, mentoring, and student success features.
Record Alerts

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Record Alert Settings, and then select Record Alert Access.

  2. Turn on Turn On Record Alert Access.
Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud

See Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud.
Stage Management

  1. Turn on Stage Management.

  2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select Permission Sets.

  3. Click New.

  4. Enter a label for the permission set. Press Tab to automatically fill the API name.

  5. Select Education Cloud - Full Access as the license and save your changes.

  6. Click System Permissions, and then click Edit.

  7. Select Dynamic Common Orchestrator User and save your changes.

  8. Next to System Permissions, click the Actions menu icon, and then select Object Settings.

  9. Click Fulfillment Plans, and then click Edit.

  10. Select Read, Create, Edit, and Delete as the object permissions.

  11. Save your changes.

  12. Similarly, assign Read, Create, Edit, and Delete object permissions for Fulfillment Steps, Fulfillment Step Dependencies, Fulfillment Step Sources, and Stage Transition Entries.
Timeline

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Timeline, and then select Video Calls Settings.

  2. Turn on Timeline.
Video Calls

  1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Video Calls, and then select Video Calls Settings.

  2. Turn on Video Calls.
# Set Up Contact and Case Page Layouts Configure the Contact and Case page layouts in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Learn About Contact and Case Record Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_contact_case_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub includes default page layouts, compact layouts, and other assets for the Contact and Case objects. Review and customize these assets as needed for your school or institution. For example, you might want to change the fields in the highlights panel, or remove or add buttons. - **[Customize the Contact or Case Record Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_contact_case_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To edit the page layout, such as to change the order of the fields, buttons, or related lists on the page, do the following. - **[Customize the Case Compact Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_contact_case_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The compact layout controls which fields appear in the highlights panel at the top of the record page. If desired, add or remove fields from the Case compact layout. - **[Confirm the Contact and Case Layout Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_contact_case_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whichever page layouts you're using for Contact and Case records, make sure they're assigned to the proper profiles. ## Learn About Contact and Case Record Page Layouts Student Success Hub includes default page layouts, compact layouts, and other assets for the Contact and Case objects. Review and customize these assets as needed for your school or institution. For example, you might want to change the fields in the highlights panel, or remove or add buttons. In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub provides these Contact and Case assets. - Contact object—The Student Support Contact Layout page layout, assigned to the support staff profile - Case object—The Student Record Case Layout page layout and Student Record compact layout, also assigned to the support staff profile In higher ed orgs, Student Success Hub provides these Contact and Case assets. - Contact object - The Support Contact Layout page layout, assigned to the support staff and System Administrator profiles - The Contact Layout - Student page layout, assigned to the student profile - Case object - The Student Record Case Layout page layout, assigned to the support staff and System Administrator profiles - The Student Record compact layout, assigned to the support staff profile - The Case Layout - Student page layout, assigned to the student profile ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For information about the Support Queue Case layout and compact layout, see [Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Customize the Contact or Case Record Page Layout To edit the page layout, such as to change the order of the fields, buttons, or related lists on the page, do the following. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note In orgs licensed and configured for student Users and Experience Cloud sites, we recommend displaying a minimal set of fields in the Case Layout - Student page layout so that students don't see more than they need to. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object whose layout you want to edit. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click the page layout name. 3. Edit the layout and save your changes. For more information, see [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layoutcustomize_pd.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Customize the Case Compact Layout The compact layout controls which fields appear in the highlights panel at the top of the record page. If desired, add or remove fields from the Case compact layout. 1. From Setup, in **Object Manager**, click **Case**. 2. Click **Compact Layouts**, and then click **Student Record**. 3. Edit the layout and save your changes. For more information, see [Compact Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=compact_layout_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Confirm the Contact and Case Layout Assignments Whichever page layouts you're using for Contact and Case records, make sure they're assigned to the proper profiles. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the **Contact** or **Case** object. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **Page Layout Assignment**. 3. Click **Edit Assignment**. 4. Click **Page Layout To Use** and select the layout you want to assign. 5. Click the profile you want to assign it to and save your changes. # Set Up Corporate Relations Give admins and advancement officers access to Corporate Relations features and objects. Create active versions of the flows to update partnership placement records and update outcome counts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up Corporate Relations:

Corporate Relations Admin

OR

Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows: Manage Flow
To run flows: Run Flows
Three levels of permissions grant access to Corporate Relations features. To give the appropriate access to admins and advancement officers, assign only one permission set to each user. Education Cloud Corporate Relations Admin Users can set up Corporate Relations, and access Corporate Relations objects and features and Outcome Management fields. Education Cloud Full Access with the Outcome Management permission Users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can set up Corporate Relations. To access all of the objects and fields included in Corporate Relations, users also need the Outcome Management permission. Education Cloud Advancement Officer Users can view Corporate Relations records and Outcome Management fields. 1. Turn on Outcome Management. 1. From Setup, find and select **Outcome Management Settings**. 2. Turn on **Outcome Management**. 2. Turn on Corporate Relations. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on **Set Up Corporate Relations**. 3. Create and assign the Education Cloud Advancement Officer permission set to advancement officers. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Clone **Education Cloud Advancement Officer**. 3. Assign the permission set to the appropriate users. 4. Similarly, create and assign the Education Cloud Corporate Relations Admin permission set to admin users. 5. To give admin users access to more Education Cloud objects, create and assign the Education Cloud Full Access permission set with the Manage Outcome permission. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Clone **Education Cloud Full Access**. 3. In the cloned version of Education Cloud Full Access, click **System Permissions**. 4. For **Manage Outcomes**, select **Enabled**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Assign the permission set to the appropriate users. 6. Create your own active version of the EDU Corporate Relations: Create Outcomes and Assignments flow. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Corporate Relations: Create Outcomes and Assignments**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Save and activate the flow. SEE ALSO - [Assign Permission Sets to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Set Up Course Offering Participant Record Page Configure the record page for the course offering participant object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the course offering participant record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the course offering participant object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the course offering participant record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the course offering participant object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the course offering participant record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown on this template. ![Course Offering Participant record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/course_offering_participant.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Enrollee Count and Waitlist Count don't recognize custom picklist values for Participation Status and Waitlist fields. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Course Offering Participant**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Course Offering Participant Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Course Offering Participant Result Record Page Configure the record page for the course offering participant result object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the course offering participant result record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_result_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the course offering participant result object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_result_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the course offering participant result record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_result_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the course offering participant result object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the course offering participant result record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Course Offering Participant Result record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/course_offering_participant_result.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component. Be sure to remove the **Related** tab (3). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (4). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (5). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Course Offering Participant Result**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Course Offering Participant Result Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Course Offering Schedule Record Page Configure the record page for the course offering schedule object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the course offering schedule record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the course offering schedule object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the course offering schedule record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the course offering schedule object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, add components to it. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the course offering schedule record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Course Offering Schedule record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/course_offering_schedule.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Course Offering Schedule**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Course Offering Schedule Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Course Offering Schedule Template Record Page Configure the record page for the course offering schedule template object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the course offering schedule template record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_template_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the course offering schedule template object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_template_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the course offering schedule template record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_template_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the course offering schedule template object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the course offering schedule template record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Course Offering Schedule Template record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/course_offering_schedule_template.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column. - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Course Offering Schedule Template**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Course Offering Schedule Template Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Course Operations Agent Configure a Course Operations Agent that assists faculty to manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk students, and coordinate student support. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To set up Course Operations Topics in Agentforce:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin
Before you start: - [Turn on Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_turn_on_context_service.htm&language=en_US&type=5) - [Prepare your org for the Course Operations Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prep_org_for_course_operations_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide agent actions with the required data. Define at-risk criteria, supply data for course offering participant insights, create an advising record type for cases, and create employee records for faculty members.") - [Configure Slack for Education flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_slack_for_education_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize flows to support course operations and student success workflows. These flows enhance real-time collaboration directly in Slack.") 1. [Set up Education Cloud for Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas."). 2. [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). 3. Turn on Course Operations Agent. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud, turn on **Course Operations Agent**. 4. Assign these permissions to all users. See [Assign Permission Sets to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them."). - Education Cloud Full Access - Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access - Prompt Template User - Agentforce for Education Cloud Access - Omnistudio User 5. Assign the Omnistudio Admin permission set to admin users. 6. [Create an agent from the Agentforce Employee Agent template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US). As part of the setup process, customize your agent settings and add [the Course Operations subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_operations_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Course Operations Agent assists your faculty directly in Slack. This assistant helps faculty manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk learners, and coordinate student support. With centralized course operations and student support, faculty can focus on teaching and student engagement and less on administrative tasks."). For example, in **Settings**: - For Agent Details, enter a description: An AI assistant for faculty. - For System, enter agent-level instructions: Help faculty by creating a Slack channel for each course offering, publishing a canvas for the course syllabus, and maintaining participant lists. 7. [Remove any unnecessary subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_remove.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 8. [Provide users with access to the agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Course Registration To streamline students' course registration on your Experience Cloud site, turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign the appropriate permission sets. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud add-on
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advanced Academic Operations and assign permission sets to users: Education Cloud Full Access
To edit relevant objects: Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
Before you begin, complete these prerequisites: - [Set up Course Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To make upcoming and past courses and section details easily searchable on your Experience Cloud site, configure Course Search.") so that students can search for courses and view course details. - [Set up picklist values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_picklist_values.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To function properly and give your users a consistent experience, Education Cloud requires picklist values on certain fields.") for the Participation Status field on the Course Offering Participant object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Advanced Academic Operations turns on the Course Registration portal and several save hooks and automations. These automations can prevent your existing custom student information system portal from running properly. For example, Advanced Academic Operations prevents overenrollment or double enrollment. Contact your Salesforce admin to discuss your options. 1. [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). Activate Advanced Academic Operations in Set Up Education Cloud. 2. [Assign relevant permissions to your users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). - For Salesforce admins, assign Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access. - For Experience Cloud users, assign Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Access. 3. Set up your academic term enrollment record page. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then select **Academic Term Enrollment**. 2. Click **Page Layouts** and then click **Academic Term Enrollment Layout**. 3. Make sure that the Academic Term Registration Timeline field is in the Information section under Academic Term Enrollment Detail. 4. Save your changes. 4. Set up your academic term registration timeline record page. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then select **Academic Term Registration Timeline**. 2. Click **Page Layouts** and then click **Academic Term Registration Timeline Layout**. 3. Make sure that the Default, Eligibility Criteria, and Published fields are in the Information section under Academic Term Registration Timeline Detail. 4. Save your changes. 5. Turn on course registration for each student. 1. Create an academic term enrollment record and relate it to the corresponding academic term. 2. In Learner Contact, search for a student and select the student. 3. Enter the enrollment date, enrollment reason, and enrollment status. 4. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you try to assign a student multiple academic term enrollment records in the same academic term, only the most recently created academic term enrollment record applies. 6. Create a registration window for each student for a specific term. 1. On the same academic term enrollment record, from the Academic Term Registration Timeline field, create a record. 2. Select the corresponding academic term. 3. Set opening and closing dates for the registration. 4. To make this academic term registration timeline the default registration window, select **Published** and **Default**. 5. Save your changes. 7. Give students access to view their own academic term enrollment records. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. In the Sharing Sets section, click **New**. 3. Enter a label and sharing set name. 4. Move the profile that you use for students to the Selected Profiles column. 5. In Configure Access, click **Set Up**, and then set these mappings. - Select **Contact** as the user. - Select **LearnerContact** as the target academic term enrollment. - Select **Read Only** as the access level. 6. Click **Update**. 7. Save your changes. 8. If necessary, verify the settings of the holds that block students from course registration. See [Create Records for Restrictions in Prepare the Data for Holds](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_holds.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5). After a student registers for a course, Education Cloud creates a course offering participant record with an enrolled status. This record links the student’s account, the course offering, and academic term enrollment records together. To view all enrollments in a specific section of a course, go to Course Offerings, select a record, and view all course offering participant records in the related list. If the Course Offering Participant related list isn't visible, add it to the Course Offering page layout. # Set Up Course Search To make upcoming and past courses and section details easily searchable on your Experience Cloud site, configure Course Search. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up Course Search and assign permission sets to users: Education Cloud Full Access
Before your start, make sure that you have configured learning courses and course offerings. 1. Assign Permissions to your users. See [Education Cloud Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them."). - Assign the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set to Students. - Assign the Education Cloud Guest Access permission set unauthenticated guest users. 2. Give Experience Cloud users access to the Course Offering object. Course offerings are sections of a learning course. Course offering records relate to an academic session within an academic term. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select your cloned version of the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set. 3. Click **Object Settings** and then find and select **Course Offerings**. 4. In the Object Permissions section, select **Enabled** for View All Fields. 3. Make sure that your organization-wide sharing settings give users access to objects that you want them to see in Course Search. For example, Course Offering, Academic Term, Academic Session, and Learning Achievement. See [Set Your External Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.security_owd_external_setting.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 4. To make sure that unauthenticated guest users can use Course Search, give them Read access to the Waitlist Status field on Course Offering. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select your cloned version of the Education Cloud Guest Access permission set. 3. Click **Object Settings**, and then select **Course Offerings**. 4. Click **Edit**. 5. For Field Permissions, select **Read Access** for Waitlist Status. 6. Save your changes. 7. If you have added custom fields to the Course Offering, Learning, and Learning Course objects, repeat these steps to give guest users Read access to these fields. 5. Add Course Search to a page on your Experience Cloud site. 1. From Setup, find and select **Digital Experiences**, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Open the Experience Builder of your Experience Cloud site and then select the page that you want to add Course Search to. Alternatively, create a standard page for Course Search depending on your intended user experience. 3. From the Components panel, drag **Course Search** onto the page canvas. If you created a page for Course Search, make the page publicly available. 6. Customize the details that you want to show in Course Search. 1. On your Course Search page in Experience Builder, click the **Course Search** component. 2. In the Configure Course Search Results section on the configuration panel, click **Select**, and then add up to five selected fields. There’s no validation to stop you from adding more than five fields, but only the first five are shown on the page. 3. Save your selections. 4. Similarly, add up to 10 selected fields to Course Details Fields. Accept the default options to show learning foundation items and learning achievements in the course overview. 5. Similarly, add up to five selected fields to Course Section Details. 6. If you don’t want to include the Subject field in Course Search, in the Basic Search section, deselect **Subject**. 7. Publish your changes. Course Search presents up to 15 academic terms for your search. To help students and staff make degree completion plans based on historical course offering data, make past academic terms show up in Course Search by setting an end date that’s before today’s date. To make an upcoming academic term show up in Course Search and available for enrollment in Course Registration, set the record to active. If necessary, create a course offering schedule for each course offering to show section days and times in Course Search. To make a section’s days and times appear in Course Search, use the recurrence pattern builder on each course offering schedule record. For example, set the course offering frequency to weekly and to repeat on Mondays and Wednesdays. SEE ALSO - [Create a Learning Course](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_learning_course.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Wizard in the Education Cloud Academic Operations app to create a learning course.") - [Model Your Academic Calendar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_your_academic_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your academic year, terms, and sessions.") - [Model Courses and Curricula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_courses_and_curricula.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud objects to model your institution's learnings, courses, course offerings, and schedules.") # Set Up Data 360 for Education Cloud Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To turn on Data 360: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Develop a data strategy for your Data 360 implementation within Education Cloud. 1. [Plan your Data 360 data strategy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_plan_data_strategy.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Learn about protecting your data in the agentic landscape](https://admin.salesforce.com/blog/2025/data-cloud-governance-protecting-your-data-agentforce). 3. [Learn about Data 360 governance](https://admin.salesforce.com/blog/2025/data-cloud-governance-protecting-your-data-agentforce). 2. Prepare your Salesforce org to use Data 360. 1. [Turn on Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_setup_provision.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Create Data 360 users and assign permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_setup_walkthrough.htm&language=en_US). 3. [Assign permission sets to users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_userpermissions.htm&language=en_US). 3. Set up data spaces. 1. [Organize your data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_spaces.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Assign fiscal calendars to data spaces](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_standard_fiscal_calendar_setup.htm&language=en_US). 4. Connect your data sources. 1. [Connect an education data source in Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_an_education_data_source_to_data_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To ingest education data into Data 360, connect your external data source to Data 360."). 2. [Set up data targets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_connection_tasks.htm&language=en_US). 5. Finalize your setup. 1. [Turn on Data 360 features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_feature_manager.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Complete general setup tasks for Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_admin_maintenance_tasks.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Data 360 for Education: Alumni Engagement Metrics Set up the Data Cloud, Einstein, and Education Cloud elements of the engagement visualization component for Alumni Engagement Metrics.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To configure Alumni Engagement Metrics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager

1. Enable Einstein for Education Cloud. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Expand the **Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud** section. 3. Click **Go to Einstein Setup** and then turn on Einstein. 4. In Set Up Education Cloud, expand **Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud**, and then turn on Einstein Engagement Visualization. 2. Update the Data 360 Salesforce Connector Permission Set. 1. In Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Data Cloud Salesforce Connector Permission Set**. 3. Click **System Permissions**, and then click **Edit**. 4. Select **Access Education Cloud Objects** and **Fundraising User**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png), and then click **Object Settings**. 7. Click an object, and then click **Edit**. 8. In Object Permissions, select **View All Records**. 9. In Field Permissions, select **Read Access**. 10. Save your changes. 3. Create data streams to ingest engagement data. It can be external or from within your Education Cloud org. See [Create a Salesforce CRM Data Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US). 4. Map the DMOs that you want to use in the engagement visualization component. See [Map Data Model Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_map_custom_data_model_objects.htm&language=en_US). 5. Create a ruleset forl your data platform for linking multiple sources of data into a unified profile. See [Identity Resolution Rulesets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_identity_resolution_ruleset.htm&language=en_US). 6. Create calculated insights to define and calculate metrics in Data 360. See [Create a Calculated Insight Using SQL](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_get_started_with_calculated_insights.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note In the SQL Query section, paste the code that you want to use from [Alumni Engagement Metrics Calculated Insights Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_calculated_insights_definitions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these sample calculated insights when you set up Alumni Engagement Metrics."). 7. Create a flow for the grounding data. See [Alumni Engagement Metrics Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_engagement_metrics_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create flows that query DMO records that you want to use as grounding data in the prompt templates for Alumni Engagement Metrics."). 8. Create a prompt template for Alumni Metrics. 1. In Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Click **New Prompt Template**. 3. Select **Engagement Visualization** as the prompt template type. 4. Enter a name for the prompt template. Press Tab to automatically fill the API name. 5. Click **Next**. 6. In Prompt Template Workspace, enter the prompt for your flow. See [Alumni Engagement Metrics Sample Prompts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_engagement_metrics_sample_prompts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these sample prompts for the Engagement Visualization prompt template type when you set up Alumni Engagement Metrics."). 7. In Resource, find and select your flow. 8. Save and activate your prompt template. See Also: [Create a Prompt Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.prompt_builder_build_template.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up Data 360 for Education: Financial Aid Set up the Data 360 and Agentforce for Education elements required to ingest and map your external financial aid management system data. Your data grounds the Financial Aid agent and powers the financial aid Lightning web components, ensuring that both can provide personalized, accurate information about a student's financial aid package. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
User Permissions Needed
To configure Data 360 for Financial Aid:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data Cloud Admin

AND

Data Cloud Architect
Before you begin, review the field values that the financial aid components require. The components and agent display data correctly only when your source data uses the expected values. If your system uses different values, you must remap them before you map your data to the DMOs. See [Financial Aid Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how the financial aid components display data and calculate totals for students, prospects, and staff."). 1. Update the **Data 360 Salesforce Connector Permission Set**. 1. In **Setup**, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Data Cloud Salesforce Connector Permission Set**. 3. Click **System Permissions**, and then click **Edit**. 4. Select **Access Education Cloud Objects**. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click **Object Settings**. 7. Ensure that the permission set includes **Read Access** and **View All Records** for the required financial aid objects. 8. Save your changes. 2. Create data streams to ingest financial aid data from your external financial aid management system. For detailed instructions, see [Create a Salesforce CRM Data Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US). 3. Map the Data Model Objects (DMOs) that support **Person Account** creation in this order: ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Populate the Individual DMO first because other DMOs link to it.
IndividualDmo Represents the student.
ContactPointEmailDmo

Stores the student's email address. Set PrimaryFlag to true for the primary email.
ContactPointPhoneDmo Stores the student's phone number.
ContactPointAddressDmo Stores the mailing address for residency determination and tuition calculation.
Salesforce uses these DMOs to authenticate users. 4. Map the **Financial Aid DMOs** to your financial aid system in this specific order: - BenefitDmo - LearnerFinancialAidApplicationDmo - ApplicationDmo - BenefitAssignmentDmo - RequiredDocumentDmo - BenefitDisbursementPeriodDmo - LearnerCostSummaryDmo - LearnerCostItemDmo - LearnerFinancialAidStandingDmo - BenefitDisbursementDmo - BenefitDisbursementHoldDmo For more information, see [Financial Aid Data Model Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_financial_aid_data_model_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Map your external financial aid management system data to the Salesforce financial aid Data Model Objects (DMOs) to model the financial aid lifecycle from application to disbursement."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your financial aid management system uses different values than the Data Model Objects expect, such as different status codes or type names, create formula fields on your Data Streams to transform the values during ingestion. In your Data Stream, click **New Formula Field**, write a transformation formula, such as a CASE statement, and map the formula field to the DMO instead of the original source field. This approach preserves your original source values while ensuring compatibility with Financial Aid components. 5. Activate your configured data streams to begin data ingestion. 6. Create an Identity Resolution ruleset to match records from your financial aid system to Salesforce Person Accounts. Create the ruleset on the Individual object, and use FINA as the Ruleset ID. Configure match rules to use Fuzzy Name (first name: Fuzzy - Medium Precision, last name: Exact) and Normalized Email (Exact Normalized). After publishing and running the ruleset, confirm a non-zero data consolidation rate. See [Identity Resolution Rulesets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_identity_resolution_ruleset.htm&language=en_US). 7. Create a data governance policy that grants Financial Aid data access to Experience Cloud portal users. 1. In **Setup**, find and select **Data Cloud**, and then select **Data Governance**. 2. Click **Policies**, and then click **New**. 3. Create an object-level security (OLS) permit policy using the `ExternalData.Visibility.Portal` tag. This out-of-the-box tag belongs to the Portal access level classification. The policy grants authenticated portal users access to tagged data while restricting each user to data associated with their verified contact record. 4. In Data Cloud, go to **Data Models**, and for each Financial Aid DMO, click **Manage Tags** and attach the `ExternalData.Visibility.Portal` tag to the object and its fields. Tag the following DMOs: - Unified Individual FINA - Unified Link Individual FINA - Individual - Benefit - Benefit Assignment - Benefit Disbursement - Benefit Disbursement Hold - Benefit Disbursement Period - Application - Learner Financial Aid Application - Learner Financial Aid Standing - Learner Cost Summary - Learner Cost Item - Required Document Authenticated Experience Cloud portal users can query Financial Aid data from Data Cloud. Each user sees only data associated with their verified contact record. 8. Optionally, validate that the data graph contains the expected financial aid data. 1. In Data Cloud, open **Data Explorer**. In the **Select an Object Type** dropdown, select **Data Graphs**, and then select your Financial Aid data graph from the **Select an Object** dropdown. 2. Search for a specific student record and confirm that a Contact Id is present as one of the unified individual IDs. - **[Financial Aid Data Model Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_financial_aid_data_model_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Map your external financial aid management system data to the Salesforce financial aid Data Model Objects (DMOs) to model the financial aid lifecycle from application to disbursement. # Set Up Data 360 to Run Accounting Subledger Jobs Switch between Data 360 and CRM Analytics as the runtime for Accounting Subledger Data Processing Engine jobs. Set the org-wide runtime without reconfiguring entire job definitions. Turn Data 360 on and off to align accounting operations with your data strategy. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Data 360 and the Accounting Subledger Growth add-on
User Permissions Needed
To access and manage Accounting Subledger features: Manage Accounting Subledger
To set up Data 360: Data Cloud Architect Full Access
1. From Setup, find and select **Accounting Settings**. 2. Click **Set Up Data Cloud for Accounting Subledger**. 3. If you haven’t configured Data 360 for your org, set up Data 360. 1. In the Turn On and Configure Data Cloud section, click **Set Up Data Cloud**. 2. Follow the guided setup to complete the setup. 4. Update object and field permissions for Transaction Journal in the Data Cloud Salesforce Connector permission set. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select the Data Cloud Salesforce Connector permission set. 3. Click **Object Settings** and select **Transaction Journal**. 4. In Object Permissions, select **Create** and **Edit**. 5. In Field Permissions, select **Create** and **Edit** for all fields. 6. Save your changes. 5. Similarly, update the object and field permissions of other objects that your Accounting Subledger jobs access. 1. Assign at least Read access for object permissions. 2. Assign at least Read access to all fields. 3. Save your changes. 6. From Setup, find and select **Accounting Settings**, and then turn on **Turn On Data Cloud Runtime for Accounting Subledger**. 7. Set up Data 360 as the runtime for existing Accounting Subledger jobs. 1. From Setup, find and select **Accounting Sets**. 2. Next to each active accounting set, from the **Action** dropdown, select **Deactivate**. 3. From the **Action** dropdown, select **Activate**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note After you activate your accounting sets, wait for Data 360 to complete data streams sync, and complete the run of existing Accounting Subledger jobs. If you run a job before the sync completes, the creation of transaction journals could fail for recently created records, or create unexpected transaction journals. Now, Data 360 is the system-wide processing engine for your Accounting Subledger jobs. [Create and activate accounting sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records.") and run jobs [manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_run_jobs_manually.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Generate transaction journal records on-demand by running the Subledger Job flow.") or [on a schedule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_schedule_jobs_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Specify when to run the Accounting Subledger job to generate transaction journal records."). To switch to Customer Relationship Management Analytics as the processing engine for your Accounting Subledger jobs, from Setup, find and select **Accounting Settings**, and then turn off **Turn On Data Cloud Runtime for Accounting Subledger**. Then, deactivate existing accounting sets and activate them again. SEE ALSO - [Turn on Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_setup_provision.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Set Up Data Bundles for Volunteer Management The Volunteer Management data bundle is a tool to quickly and easily map your Volunteer Management objects to data model objects in Data Cloud. After you’ve mapped your objects, you can take advantage of Data Cloud’s tools and analytics and combine your Salesforce data with additional data streams for a complete view of your organization’s stakeholders. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To use Volunteer Management: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
To connect your data to Data 360:

Data 360 Architect permission set
Follow these steps to connect your Volunteer Management data to Data 360. ## Set Up the Data Bundle Use the Volunteer Management data bundle guided setup to configure Data 360, create and map Data 360 assets, and ingest Data 360 data for Volunteer Management. ### Find the Guided Setup Before you begin, fulfill these prerequisites. - Current user is a system admin. - Volunteer Management is enabled in your Salesforce org. - Data 360 is purchased for your Salesforce org. Go to the guided setup for your data bundle. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Intelligence, and then select Volunteer Management Intelligence. 2. Accept the disclaimer. As you progress through the setup steps, refresh the page to view the completed steps. Completed steps are marked with a green check mark. ### Set Up Data 360 1. Assign user permissions to give yourself and other users access to Data Cloud features and data. 1. Assign the Data 360 Architect permission set to yourself (the admin user) and any other admins. 2. Assign the Data 360 User permissions set to your users. 2. To connect your Salesforce org to Data 360, click **Connect an Org**. Your Salesforce org is shown as connected in the Standard Connections table. If you want to connect other data, from the Standard Data Bundles table, in the row for the bundle that you want to connect, select **Install**. 3. If you have data stored in Marketing Cloud or Commerce Cloud, or in a third party source like Snowflake, Amazon S3, or Google Cloud Storage, click **Connectors Guidance** to open help to create connections to your data. 4. To complete the Set Up Data 360 checklist, click **Go to Data Cloud**. 5. Return to the Volunteer Management Intelligence setup page. ### Configure Data 360 User Access Provide the integration user with write access to the Volunteer Management objects and fields. 1. From the Volunteer Management Intelligence setup page, go to the Configure Data 360 User Access step. 2. Click **Configure Data Cloud Access**. The configuration is completed automatically. ### Create Data Streams 1. From the Volunteer Management Intelligence setup page, go to the Create Data Streams step. 2. Click **Create Data Streams**. 3. Create data streams. 1. Click **New**. 2. Select **Salesforce CRM** and then click **Next**. 3. Select the Salesforce org that you want to ingest data from. 4. Select the data bundle that you want to use to bring your CRM data into Data 360. For example: Select **Volunteer Management Data Bundle** to bring that data into Data Cloud. 5. Click **Next** through the menus. 4. Select your Data Space and click **Deploy**. # Set Up Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger Complete the requirements to enable Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
User Permissions Needed  
To assign permission sets:

Assign Permission Sets

AND

View Setup and Configuration
To enable Data Pipelines:

Data Pipelines Base User permission set

AND

System Administrator profile
Accounting Subledger’s accounting sets rely on the Data Processing Engine to generate accounting data. To use Data Processing Engine, assign at least one active user to the Data Pipelines Base User permission set, and turn on Data Pipelines. That user can then manage accounting sets and run Accounting Subledger jobs using flows or invocable actions. ## Assign Users to the Data Pipelines Base User Permission Set 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Data Pipelines Base User**. 3. Click **Manage Assignments** and then **Add Assignments**. 4. Select the checkboxes next to the names of the users to assign to the permission set, and then click **Assign**. 5. Save your changes. ## Enable Data Pipelines for Accounting Subledger 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Pipelines, and then select **Getting Started**. 2. Turn on **Data Pipelines**. If you can't find Data Pipelines in Setup after you're assigned the Data Pipelines Base User permission set, refresh the browser tab. See [Enable Data Pipelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.reference_data_processing_engine_requirements.htm&type=5) # Set Up Document Generation in Education Enable server-side documentation generation to automatically generate gift acknowledgement and tax receipt documents. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up Document Generation:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you set up Gift Acknowledgments, turn on person accounts. Give Salesforce admins the DocGen Designer permission set license and the SalesforceCRM Content User license. Give all users the DocGen User permission set. If you don't see these permission sets, make sure that you Salesforce account executive provisions the DocGen SKU for your org that's available at no additional cost. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). f you don’t see the DocGen permission set licenses in your Salesforce org, contact your Salesforce account executive. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Doc, and select **General Settings**. 2. Turn on **Design Document Templates in Salesforce**. 3. Go to **Document Generation Settings**. 4. Click **New**. 5. In the Label field, enter DocumentGenerationSetting. 6. In the Document Template Library Name field, enter DocGenDocumentTemplateLibrary. 7. Click **Enable Server-Side Documentation Generation**. 8. In Preview Type, select **PDF**. 9. Click **Create**. # Set Up Document Generation in Nonprofit Enable server-side documentation generation to automatically generate gift acknowledgement and tax receipt documents. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up Document Generation:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
Before you set up Gift Acknowledgments, turn on person accounts. Give Salesforce admins the DocGen Designer permission set license and the SalesforceCRM Content User license. Give all users the DocGen User permission set. If you don't see these permission sets, make sure that you Salesforce account executive provisions the DocGen SKU for your org that's available at no additional cost. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). f you don’t see the DocGen permission set licenses in your Salesforce org, contact your Salesforce account executive. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Doc, and select **General Settings**. 2. Turn on **Design Document Templates in Salesforce**. 3. Go to **Document Generation Settings**. 4. Click **New**. 5. In the Label field, enter DocumentGenerationSetting. 6. In the Document Template Library Name field, enter DocGenDocumentTemplateLibrary. 7. Click **Enable Server-Side Documentation Generation**. 8. In Preview Type, select **PDF**. 9. Click **Create**. # Set Up Donor Briefs in Education Automatically generate a donor brief for a board meeting or major donor solicitation by using customized templates and add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts for quick access. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Configure Donor Brief Generation in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_donor_briefs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable document generation settings and create a public group to provide template access for donor brief generation. - **[Format Donor Briefs by Applying Custom Templates in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_format_donor_briefs_by_using_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides a sample template for donor briefs. This sample is a starting point for customizing templates for your org. - **[Add Donor Briefs in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_donor_briefs_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To generate your donor brief, upload customized donor brief templates and add them to your template library. Select a library template to generate a brief formatted to its specifications. - **[Add the Create Donor Brief Button to Page Layouts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_create_donor_brief_button_to_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To quickly generate donor briefs, you can add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts as either a Platform Action or as an Action Launcher button. # Set Up Donor Briefs in Nonprofit Automatically generate a donor brief for a board meeting or major donor solicitation by using customized templates and add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts for quick access. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Configure Donor Brief Generation in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_donor_briefs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable document generation settings and create a public group to provide template access for donor brief generation. - **[Format Donor Briefs by Applying Custom Templates in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_format_donor_briefs_by_using_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides a sample template for donor briefs. This sample is a starting point for customizing templates for your org. - **[Add Donor Briefs in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_donor_briefs_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To generate your donor brief, upload customized donor brief templates and add them to your template library. Select a library template to generate a brief formatted to its specifications. - **[Add the Create Donor Brief Button to Page Layouts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_create_donor_brief_button_to_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To quickly generate donor briefs, you can add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts as either a Platform Action or as an Action Launcher button. # Set Up Donor Profiles in Education Customize the donor profile page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnership app to contain the necessary financial, demographic, and relationship information for a donor or prospect. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
- **[Show Account Relationships on the Donor Profile in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_show_account_relationships_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To show account relationships on the donor profile, add a graph. - **[Show Donor Information in a Summary Card in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_see_donor_information_summary_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Summary Card lists a person or partner's photo, name, and key information. You can include custom fields. - **[Add the RFM Score to the Donor Profile in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_the_rfm_score_to_the_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To see the individual scores or aggregated RFM score, add it to the Related Records Detail Display on the Donor Profile. # Set Up Donor Profiles in Nonprofit Customize the donor profile page in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnership app to contain the necessary financial, demographic, and relationship information for a donor or prospect. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
- **[Show Account Relationships on the Donor Profile in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_show_account_relationships_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To show account relationships on the donor profile, add a graph. - **[Show Donor Information in a Summary Card in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_see_donor_information_summary_card.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A Summary Card lists a person or partner's photo, name, and key information. You can include custom fields. - **[Add the RFM Score to the Donor Profile in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_the_rfm_score_to_the_donor_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To see the individual scores or aggregated RFM score, add it to the Related Records Detail Display on the Donor Profile. # Set Up Drop-In Appointments Support learners seeking ad-hoc help from your staff by setting up drop-in shifts for in-person appointments. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can view drop-in appointments using the self-service portal. **How**: To turn on drop-in shift creation for your staff, set the Shift object’s sharing setting to Public Read Only. Then, create a drop-in appointment category and relate it to a work type set up for in-person appointments shifts. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Configure Sharing Settings for Appointments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_configure_sharing_appt.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Appointment Objects in Education Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_appt_objects.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Appointment Availability in Education Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_appt_availability.htm) - [_Salesforce Help_: Create Topic Templates for Education Cloud (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_create_topic_templates.htm) # Set Up Duplicate Detection Create Matching Rules and Duplicate Rules, and run a duplicate job to see a list of duplicate records. Before you can see a list of duplicate record sets on the Contact Merge page, you'll need to: 1. Create Matching Rules to tell Salesforce how to look for duplicates. 2. Create Duplicate Rules to tell Salesforce what to do when it finds duplicates as they're created, or 3. Run a Duplicate Job to find existing duplicates. # Set Up Duplicate Rules in Your Target Org Create rules to remove duplicate records on the account, contact, and lead objects in your target (Education Cloud) org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Apply the same rules in your source and target orgs to ensure that all records are migrated correctly. 1. Deactivate the standard duplicate rules for the lead, account, and contact objects in your target (Education Cloud) org: 1. Log in to your target org with Education Cloud. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Duplicate Rules, and then select **Duplicate Rules**. 3. Select **Standard Lead Duplicate Rule**, and then click **Deactivate**. 4. Similarly, deactivate the standard duplicate rules for Account and Contact. 2. Create duplicate rules for the account, contact, and lead objects in your target org: 1. Make note of the active duplicate rules for the account, contact, and lead objects in your source org. 2. Create the same rules in your target (Education Cloud) org and activate them. SEE ALSO: - [Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.duplicate_rules_map_of_reference.htm&type=5) # Set Up Education Cloud Use the guided setup to turn on Education Cloud for your org, and then configure apps and features. Make sure that you assign the Education Cloud Full Access permission set to yourself, as the admin. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm&type=5). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Turn On Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on Education Cloud to support the entire learner experience, including managing applications, scheduling, courses, and facilities. - **[Turn On Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_person_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up person accounts to represent individual students, staff, applicants, alumni, and other users in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes. - **[Manage Education Cloud Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_education_cloud_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add users to Education Cloud and give them the access that they need. - **[Set Up Education Cloud Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_record_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Follow our suggested layouts to create record pages for these Education Cloud objects. - **[Institutional Data for Regional Reporting and Intelligence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_institutional_data_for_regional_reporting_and_intelligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your education data structures to meet region-specific reporting standards and institutional requirements across global regulatory frameworks. Region-specific data structures bring reporting alignment into your existing Education Cloud org without data-mapping exercises, data duplication, and custom processes. - **[Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes. - **[Set Up the Education Proxy Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_education_proxy_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and activate an Education Proxy Portal, assign proxy profiles, and then configure the portal to support delegated access. Support proxy scenarios across all educational levels. In K-12, parents can manage households, applications, and student information, while in higher education, designated proxies can securely access records and perform tasks that students delegate. - **[Student Information System and Learning Management Systems Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_sis_lms_integration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** MuleSoft Anypoint and Flow connectors synchronize data between your student information system (SIS) and learning management systems (LMS). Out-of-the-box Anypoint connectors integrate with Canvas, Moodle, Blackboard, and D2L Brightspace. For simpler use cases with fewer transformations, use a Flow-based Canvas connector. - **[Academic Calendar Setup with AI Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_headless_academic_calendar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A guided session builds an academic calendar for your institution, including terms, registration windows, and add and drop deadlines. When you describe your calendar dates or provide a source file to a coding agent, the agent validates the dates and creates the academic year, term, and session records. This foundation supports registration, enrollment, and student communications. - **[Multi-Campus Institutional Hierarchy Configuration with AI Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_headless_institutional_hierarchy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A guided session builds a multi-campus account hierarchy that represents your institution's system, campuses, colleges, and departments. When you describe your campus structure or provide a source document to a coding agent, the agent analyzes the source and creates the account hierarchy. This foundation supports enrollment, reporting, and role-based access. - **[Education Cloud Org Configuration with AI Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_headless_edu_org_configuration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A guided session sets up a foundation for your Education Cloud org. Describe your institution's goals to a coding agent. The agent analyzes your org and turns on domain features that meet your priorities, such as Student Success, Academic Operations, or Recruitment and Admissions. # Set Up Education Cloud for Agentforce Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
User Permissions Needed
To set up Agentforce for Education Cloud: Education Cloud Full Access
1. [Enable Education Cloud in your Salesforce org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on Education Cloud to support the entire learner experience, including managing applications, scheduling, courses, and facilities."). 2. [Turn on Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). 3. [Turn on Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_setup_enable.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Education Cloud Record Pages Follow our suggested layouts to create record pages for these Education Cloud objects.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Set Up Academic Session Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_session_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the academic session object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Academic Term Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the academic term object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Academic Term Enrollment Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_term_enrollment_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the academic term enrollment object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Academic Year Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_academic_year_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the academic year object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up the Account Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure record pages for the Account object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Application Decision Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_decision_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the application decision object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Application Review Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_review_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the application review object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Application Timeline Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the application timeline object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Case Record Page for Advising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_case_record_page_for_advising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the case record page in Student Success for advising. - **[Set Up Course Offering Participant Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the course offering participant object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Course Offering Participant Result Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_participant_result_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the course offering participant result object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Course Offering Schedule Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the course offering schedule object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Course Offering Schedule Template Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_course_offering_schedule_template_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the course offering schedule template object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learner Program Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learner program object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learner Program Requirement Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learner program requirement object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Achievement Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_achievement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning achievement object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Course Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_course_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning course object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Foundation Item Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_foundation_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning foundation item object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Outcome Item Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_outcome_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning outcome item object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Program Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning program object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Program Plan Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning program plan object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Learning Program Plan Requirement Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the learning program plan requirement object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Program Term Application Timeline Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_program_term_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the record page for the program term application timeline object in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up Prospect Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_prospect_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the prospect record page for the account (person account) object in Education Cloud. # Set Up Education Intelligence To access dashboards, visualizations, metrics, and the Education Cloud Semantic Data Model (SDM), install Education Intelligence. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
User Permissions Needed
To install Education Intelligence:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Tableau Unmetered Admin or Tableau Next Admin

AND

Data Cloud Architect
## Prerequisites for the Education Intelligence Installation Before you install Education Intelligence, complete these steps. 1. [Set up Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360."). 2. [Turn on Tableau Next](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_admin_enable_tableau.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. [Turn on Metric Insight Summary](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_admin_enable_metric_insight.htm&type=5&language=en_US) in Tableau Next Setup. Only turn on Metric Insight Summary. The TableauFollowMetrics permission set isn’t a requirement. 4. [Install the C360 semantic model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.sales_insights_install_c360sdm.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. [Install the Education Cloud data kit bundle](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_deploy_an_education_data_kit_data_stream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deploy an Education data kit data stream to collect data from Education Cloud and store it in Data 360."). For more information on the Education Cloud data kit bundle, see [Education Data Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_data_kit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Populate your Data 360 implementation with the Education data kit. The data kit packages Data 360 components, such as data streams and calculated insights, and helps you deploy the components in your org. Use the components to import learner data into Data 360, fuel actionable insights, and power custom applications across the learner lifecycle."). ## Install Education Intelligence 1. From Setup, find and select **Templated Apps**. 2. Click **Templates**. 3. Find **Education Intelligence**, and from the **Action** dropdown, click **Create App**. 4. Select the data space that you deploy your Education Cloud data streams to. See [Deploy an Education Data Kit Data Stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_deploy_an_education_data_kit_data_stream.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Deploy an Education data kit data stream to collect data from Education Cloud and store it in Data 360."). Make sure that you [associate this data space with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_spaces_associate_perm_sets.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. Click **Next**. 6. To rename the app, enter an app name. 7. Click **Create**. 8. On the Monitor page in the App Hub, track the installation progress. If anything fails, find error details on this page. 9. To get updates to Education Intelligence, update the app. 1. From Setup, find and select **App Hub**. 2. Find Education Intelligence, and from the **Action** dropdown, click **Update**. 3. Complete the update by using the guided setup. 10. If you’ve updated the app or if your previous update attempt failed, reconfigure the app or create another version. To reconfigure the app, from the **Action** dropdown in Education Intelligence, click **Reconfigure**. To create another version of the app, click **Create as New**. Then complete the update by using the guided setup. Now, you can access the Tableau Next components and the Education Cloud SDM in the Education Intelligence app. From the App Launcher, find and select **Tableau Next**, and then from the search bar, find and select **Education Intelligence**. To make sure that the insights come from the correct data streams, deploy the related data stream bundles. See [Education Intelligence Considerations and Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_intelligence_considerations_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the information in this section to make sure that you set up your org correctly for the installation. To support your installation and visualizations, review the requirements for your org data, Data 360, and Tableau Next."). # Set Up Einstein Academic Insights Enable the required org preferences and configure the components to use Einstein Academic Insights.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up Einstein Academic Insights:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data 360 Admin

AND

Data Pipelines Base User

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce Admin

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Omnistudio Admin

AND

Omnistudio User

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Prompt Template User

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
- [Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&language=en_US) is enabled. - [Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US) is set up for Education Cloud. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Einstein Academic Insights uses Einstein Generative AI and consumes Einstein Requests. Einstein Generative AI Features are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation for more information. 1. Enable the required org preferences. 1. In Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud, turn on Einstein AI. 3. Turn on Einstein for Education Cloud. 4. Turn on Einstein Academic Insights. 5. Turn on Einstein Engagement Visualization. 2. Provide the necessary permissions to users. 1. In Setup, find and select **Users**. 2. Select the user that you want to give access to. 3. Under Permission Set Assignments, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add these permission sets: Education Cloud Full Access, Einstein for Education Cloud Access, Einstein for Service Innovations, and Prompt Template User. 5. Save your changes. 3. Add a tab for student insights to the case record page layout. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case record. 3. Click **Setup**, and then click **Edit Page**. 4. Click the Tabs component, and then click **Add Tab**. 5. Select **Custom** for the tab label, and enter a name. For example, enter Insights. 6. Click **Done**. 4. Add and configure an Engagement Panel component for academic insights. 1. Drag the Engagement Panel component to the new tab. 2. Enter a title. For example, enter Academic Insights. 3. Enable **Use prompt response**. 4. Select **Generate Academic Insights** for the prompt template. 5. Enable **Show prompt response button**. 6. If needed, enter other relevant details. 7. Save your changes. 5. Similarly, add and configure an Engagement Panel component for current term insights by using the Generate Current Term Insights prompt template. 6. Add a tab for student insights to the course offering participant record page layout. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Course Offering Participant**. 2. Click any course offering participant to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then click **Edit Page**. 4. Click the Tabs component, and then click **Add Tab**. 5. Select **Custom** for the tab label, and enter a name. For example, enter Insights. 6. Click **Done**. 7. Add and configure the Einstein Summary component. 1. Drag the Einstein Summary component to the new tab. 2. Select **Field Generation** for the prompt template type. 3. Select **Generate Course Offering Participant Insights** for the prompt template name. 4. If needed, enter other relevant details. 5. Save your changes. 8. [Set up Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360.") and populate the data. # Set Up Einstein Advising Summary Enable Einstein and configure the Einstein Summary component to use Einstein Advising Summary. - Student Success is enabled. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Student Success in Education Cloud to provide proactive and personalized support to learners across academics, financial aid, careers, and life goals."). - Einstein is enabled. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - Discovery Framework is enabled. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes.").
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education add-on license. Einstein generative AI is available in Lightning Experience.

To purchase the Agentforce for Education add-on, contact your Salesforce account executive.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up Einstein Advising Summary:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Einstein Advising Summary uses Einstein Generative AI and consumes Einstein Requests. Einstein Generative AI Features are provided on a separate infrastructure with different security protections and physical hosting locations than the Services. See Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation for more information. 1. Enable Einstein for Education Cloud. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud and select it. 2. Under Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud, turn on Einstein AI. 3. Turn on Einstein for Education Cloud. 4. Turn on Einstein Advising Summary. 2. Provide the necessary permissions to users. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users and select it. 2. Click the user that you want to give access to. 3. Under Permission Set Assignments, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Add these permission sets. - Education Cloud Full Access - Einstein for Education Cloud Access - Einstein for Service Innovations - Prompt Template User 5. Save your changes. 3. Add a tab for advising summaries to the case record page layout. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then click **Edit Page**. 4. Click the Tabs component, and then click **Add Tab**. 5. Select **Custom** for the tab label, and enter a name. Enter Advising Summaries. 6. Click **Done**. 4. Add and configure the Einstein Summary component. 1. Drag the Einstein Summary component to the new tab. 2. Select **Field Generation** for the prompt template type. 3. Select **Summarize Advising Case** for the prompt template name. 4. Save your changes. # Set Up Einstein Generative AI (Beta) To use summarization tools and to create a board version of grant applications, set up Salesforce with Nonprofit Cloud features and Einstein generative AI. Then add the Einstein Summary component to your page layouts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
User Permissions Needed
To set up Einstein Generative AI:

Context Service Admin

AND

Context Service Runtime

AND

CopilotSalesforceUserPSG permission set group

AND

Einstein Copilot for Salesforce Admin

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations

AND

Prompt Template Manager
To set up Program Management:

Advanced Program Management permission set

OR

Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To set up Outcome Management:

Outcome Management permission set

OR

Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To set up Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking: Grantmaking Manager permission set
To set up Fundraising:
  • FundraisingAccess permission set
  • Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. [Set up Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_set_up_nonprofit_cloud_parent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete prerequisites for Nonprofit Cloud and turn on the features you want to use to manage fundraising, programs, case referrals, care plans, outcomes, and volunteers."). 2. Turn on Nonprofit Cloud features. 1. Set up [Program Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 2. Set up [Outcome Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.outcome_management_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. Set up [Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_set_up_grantmaking.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 4. Set up [Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US). 3. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Nonprofit, select and turn on **Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI Settings**. 4. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter context, and in Context Service Settings, turn on **Context Definitions**. 5. Add the Einstein Program and Benefits Summary to page layouts. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Program Management**, and open a program. 2. From ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png), click **Edit Page**. 3. In the Lightning App Builder, from the Components list, drag Einstein Summary to a pane on the program page. 4. Give Einstein Summary a header label and a button label. For example, enter Summarize Program for the header and Generate for the button label. 5. Select **Record Summary** as the prompt template type. 6. In Prompt Templates, select **Summarize Program and Benefits**. 7. Save your changes and activate the page. 6. Add the Notes Summary to page layouts. 1. From any individual account page, click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png), and select **Edit Page**. 2. In the Lightning App Builder, from the Components list, drag Einstein Summary to a pane on the Account Record page. 3. Give Einstein Summary a header label and a button label. For example, enter Summarize Notes as the header label and Generate as the button label. 4. Select **Record Summary** as the prompt template type. 5. In Prompt Templates, select **Summarize Notes**. 6. Save your changes and activate the page. 7. Add the Board Version of Grant Application to page layouts. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select Grantmaking and open an individual application. 2. From ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png), select **Edit Page**. 3. In the Lightning App Builder, from the Components list, drag Einstein Summary to a pane on the program page. 4. Give Einstein Summary a header label and a button label. For example, enter Board Version of Application as the header label and Generate as the button label. 5. Select **Record Summary** prompt template type. 6. In Prompt Templates, select **Create Board Version Application**. 7. Save your changes and activate the page. 8. Add the Funding Award Summary to page layouts. 1. From the Grantmaking app, open a funding award. 2. From ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/nonprofit_cloud/images/Setup_Menu_Gear_Icon.png), select **Edit Page**. 3. In the Lightning App Builder, from the Components list, drag Einstein Summary to a pane on the program page. 4. Give Einstein Summary a header label and a button label. For example, enter Summarize Funding Award as the header label and Generate as the button label. 5. For the Prompt Template Type field, select the **Record Summary** prompt template type. 6. For Prompt Templates, select **Summarize Funding Award**. 7. Save your changes and activate the page. # Set Up Email for Appointments Complete these tasks to configure when and how Student Success Hub sends appointment-related emails to support staff and students. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. Email notifications are automatically generated for attendees—staff and students—for appointments scheduled in advance. The notifications include an attached .ics calendar file, which is used for calendar updates. Out of the box, notifications are sent when an appointment is scheduled, rescheduled, or canceled. - **[Set Up Appointment Notification Email Custom Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can choose to turn off some or all of the default appointment notification emails. - **[Set Up an Email ID for Appointment Emails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, Appointment Emails are sent from whoever triggered the action—you, a support staff member, or a student. For example, if a student books an appointment in the Scheduling Wizard, the confirmation email is sent from the student’s email address. Likewise, if the support staff member books an appointment from the Appointment Manager, the confirmation email is sent from the support staff member’s email address. To create a consistent email experience, you can set up emails to send from a default From field. ## Set Up Appointment Notification Email Custom Settings You can choose to turn off some or all of the default appointment notification emails. From Setup, search for then select **Custom Settings**. Click **Manage** next to SSH Hierarchy Settings. Review the email-related custom settings.
Setting Description

Appointment Emails

If selected:

  • Email notifications are sent, with the specific types based on the value of the Appointment Email Opt In setting.
  • Support staff get access to individually manage their own Email Notification Settings in their Availability Settings.

If deselected:

  • Email notifications aren't sent and Email Notification Settings are hidden from support staff.
Note
Note The email contents themselves can't be customized. If you prefer to create and use your own custom email templates, you can. Deselect Appointment Emails and use process automation to send customized versions. The system-generated .ics file is available only for Student Success Hub emails, not custom emails.

Appointment Email Opt In

Applies only if the Appointment Emails setting is selected. The integer value represents the combination of appointment emails that an individual support staff member has chosen to receive. Don't edit the organization-level value. When individual support staff members edit their Email Notification Settings, the appropriate value is derived and saved automatically in their individual user custom settings—you don't need to specify a value for each individually.

Valid values:

  • 7 = All emails (confirmation, update, and cancellation)
  • 6 = Update and cancellation only
  • 5 = Confirmation and cancellation only
  • 4 = Cancellation only
  • 3 = Confirmation and update only
  • 2 = Update only
  • 1 = Confirmation only
  • 0 = No emails
Turn Off Email Attachments for Students

By default, Appointment emails for students include attached .ics (calendar) files. You can turn off these attachments.
Disable Support Staff Email Attachments

By default, Appointment emails for support staff and the appointment organizer include attached .ics (calendar) files. You can disable these attachments.

Note
Note This setting overrides the Don't attach ICS file for organizer setting.
Email ID for Appointment Emails

This setting allows all Appointment emails to be sent from a default From field. This value is not an email address.
Don’t Attach ICS File for Organizer

By default, Appointment emails include an ICS file for the appointment organizer. You can disable these attachments.

Note
Note Don’t use this setting if you’re using the Disable Support Staff Email Attachments setting.
## Set Up an Email ID for Appointment Emails By default, Appointment Emails are sent from whoever triggered the action—you, a support staff member, or a student. For example, if a student books an appointment in the Scheduling Wizard, the confirmation email is sent from the student’s email address. Likewise, if the support staff member books an appointment from the Appointment Manager, the confirmation email is sent from the support staff member’s email address. To create a consistent email experience, you can set up emails to send from a default From field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Email ID for Appointment Emails works only for Appointment emails. For all other email communication, the running user is the sender. For example, if a support staff member sends the student an email directly, the From field is the support staff member’s email. To set up your default Appointment email, complete these steps. 1. Create an org-wide email address. From Setup, go to the Organization-Wide Email Addresses page. Specify a display name and email address, and set access for your profiles. Make sure to give your System Administrator, support staff, and student profiles access. 2. Verify the email address. Open your email client and look for an email from Salesforce. Click the confirmation link to verify the address. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important You must verify the email address for this feature to work. 3. Get the ID associated with the email address. Use Workbench or Data Loader to look at the OrgWideEmailAddress object. Find the email you specified in the Address field and then copy the ID value associated with the email address. ![The email ID in the Data Loader extract.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_data_loader_email_id.png) 4. Update the SSH Hierarchy Settings. From Setup, go to the Custom Settings page and click **Manage** next to the SSH Hierarchy Settings. Enter the record ID from step 3 for the Email ID for Appointment Emails settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note To see SSH Hierarchy Settings, you need the Customize Application user permission. See [Create Custom Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.cs_about.htm&type=5). # Set Up Email Templates Use email templates to create branded emails with standardized content for emails sent from Student Success Hub. Salutations, signatures, and other standardized content in emails sent from SSH are determined by the email template that’s used. Classic email templates can use your institution's letterhead to customize the email. These templates can be designed as text, HTML (using Classic Letterhead), Custom (without using Classic Letterhead) or Visualforce. When an email template is created in SSH, it can be applied to any email sent from SSH. New email templates can be added, or sample email templates can be edited to customize them for your needs and institution. - **[Set Up Your Letterhead in SSH](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_email_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Send personalized emails by including your institution’s letterhead. - **[Create an Email Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_email_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up standardized content for your emails by using email templates. ## Set Up Your Letterhead in SSH Send personalized emails by including your institution’s letterhead. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find Box, enter Email, then select **Email**. 2. Choose **Classic Letterheads**, then click **Next**. 3. Click **New Letterhead**. 4. Select **Available for Use**. 5. Name your letterhead. 6. Optionally, add a description of your letterhead. Only internal SSH users see this description. 7. Save your letterhead. 8. To customize your letterhead, from the Letterhead Sample Test page, add a logo, customize the background color, adjust the header and footer, or choose colors for the body. 9. Save your work. ## Create an Email Template Set up standardized content for your emails by using email templates. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Email, then select **Email**. 2. Choose **Classic Email Templates**, then **New Template**. 3. To use your letterhead, choose **HTML**, then click **Next**. 4. If you want to start using this email template right away, select **Available for Use**. 5. Fill out the following required fields. 1. Folder—Choose the folder where you want to keep the template. 2. Email Template Name—Name the template something that indicates its use. 3. Template Unique Name—This field is auto completed based on your Email Template name. 4. Classic Letterhead—Choose your letterhead. 5. Email Layout—Choose the email layout you want to use with this template. 6. Encoding—Choose the kind of encoding you want this template to use. (Usually Unicode UTF-8 is appropriate.) 6. Optionally, add a description of the email template. 7. Optionally, enter a subject line that will be used with this email template. 8. Click **Next**. 9. Customize your email content by entering the email template text in the Subject field and body fields. This is where you can create an email salutation and signature for your email. You can also customize the text by using the Formatting Controls at the top of the page. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Select which, if any, fields you want to merge. 12. Click **Copy text from HTML version** to create a text-only version for accessibility purposes. 13. Save your changes. # Set Up Engagement Channel Types in Education Cloud Engagement channel types store the channels that the staff use to meet learners. If you're migrating data from Student Success Hub, to use appointments with Education Cloud, create engagement channel types. 1. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 2. Click **Debug**, and then click **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 3. Enter and run this code for the video engagement channel type: ``` EngagementChannelType newType1 = new EngagementChannelType(); newType1.Name = 'Video'; newType1.IsActive = true; newType1.ContactPointType = 'Video'; newType1.UsageType = 'Salesforce Scheduler'; insert newType1; ``` 4. Enter and run this code for the phone engagement channel type: ``` EngagementChannelType newType2 = new EngagementChannelType(); newType2.Name = 'Phone'; newType2.IsActive = true; newType2.ContactPointType = 'Phone'; newType2.UsageType = 'Salesforce Scheduler'; insert newType2; ``` 5. Enter and run this code for the in-person engagement channel type: ``` EngagementChannelType newType3 = new EngagementChannelType(); newType3.Name = 'In Person'; newType3.IsActive = true; newType3.ContactPointType = 'InPerson'; newType3.UsageType = 'Salesforce Scheduler'; insert newType3; ``` # Set Up Faculty Access Management Configure the roles and access rules that define faculty access. Then create active versions of the flows that create sharing. Set up Data Processing Engine (DPE) definitions and run jobs on a schedule so that access stays accurate over time. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure roles, access, and mappings: Education Cloud Full Access
To configure flows: Manage Flow
To set up and run Data Processing Engine jobs:
  • Customize Application
  • Modify All Data
  • Data Pipelines Base User
Before you start, if you haven't enabled Data Pipelines, complete [prerequisites for Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_org_prefs.htm&language=en_US). A share record grants record-level access. A faculty member's effective access combines their Salesforce permissions and the sharing that Faculty Access Management creates. 1. [Set your internal organization-wide sharing default](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.admin_sharing.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to Private for the objects that hold course and student data, such as attendance and course offering participant records. Adjust the default internal access only for the objects that you want to share with faculty. 2. Define academic roles. Create an academic role record for each access profile with which you share records. 3. Define each academic role's access to each object. To define which objects an academic role can access and at which level, create one academic role object access record for each object. 4. Map your institution's source roles to academic roles. Create one academic role mapping record for each value that your institution uses. 5. Create employee records for all instructors, including faculty members and teaching assistants. Faculty Access Management grants access to the user who's linked to an instructor through an employee record (API name `Employee2`). To create faculty employee records, customize the Create Employee flow. For an example of a customized flow, see [Simplify Employee Record Creation for Faculty](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_simplify_faculty_employee2_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Create Employee flow to collect specific information when it creates employee records for faculty. Agent actions use these fields to identify faculty Slack users."). 6. Create your own active versions of only the Faculty Access Management flows that match the objects whose access you grant to faculty. These are the Faculty Access Management flow templates: - EDU Course Operations: Create Attendance Entry Share Records - EDU Course Operations: Create Attendance Recording Share Records - EDU Course Operations: Create Attendance Source Data Share Records - EDU Course Operations: Create Course Offering Participant Share Records - EDU Course Operations: Create Course Offering Participant Result Share Records - EDU Course Operations: Create Course Offering Participant Activity Grade Share Records ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The Faculty Access Management flows determine each faculty member's access from the Academic Role field on the course offering participant record. However, the Teacher participant affiliation doesn't set that field on its own. If your course offering participants lack an academic role, create a flow that populates the Academic Role field so that the flows and DPE jobs can grant and maintain access. 7. To keep faculty access accurate, clone and activate each DPE definition template that matches the objects whose access you grant to faculty. See [Customize Data Processing Engine Template Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_extend_definitions.htm&type=5&language=en_US). These definitions maintain faculty access after share records are created. Accept all default configurations. - Process Faculty Access Management Shares maintains faculty access to course offering, course offering participant, course offering participant result, and course offering participant activity grade records. - Process Faculty Access Management Attendance Source Data Shares maintains faculty access to attendance entry, attendance recording, and attendance source data records. 8. Run each DPE job one time after activation. See [Run a Data Processing Engine Definition from the Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_definition_run_builder.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The first run applies access to existing records and takes longer to finish. However, only the definition's data-processing time counts toward your org's monthly Data Processing Engine limit. See [Data Processing Engine Limits and Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_limits.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and [Track Your Data Processing Engine Usage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_usage.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 9. To run each DPE job at a regular interval, create a schedule-triggered flow for each job. See [Run a Data Processing Engine Definition in Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_run.htm&language=en_US). In addition to its schedule, you can run each definition on demand to refresh existing shares each time you change an academic role's access rules. # Set Up Flows for Opportunity Management Clone and configure Education Cloud flows to create opportunities and convert leads based on academic interests.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To configure flows: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. In Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**. 3. Select **Use a Template**. 4. Select **EDU Cloud: Generate Opportunities from an Academic Interest**. 5. Click **Create**. 6. In Toolbox Manager, click **ErrorEmailAddess**. 7. In Value, enter your Salesforce admin's email address, and then click **Done**. 8. Save your changes. 9. Enter a flow label. Press Tab to automatically populate the API name. 10. Save and activate your flow. 11. Similarly, clone and update the EDU Cloud: Lead Conversion Academic Interest Updates flow. # Set Up for Earlier Versions of Student Success Hub Review the requirements for setting up earlier versions of Student Success Hub. - **[Additional Success Plan Setup for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_success_plans_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these Success Plan setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.18 or earlier. - **[Additional Alert Setup for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these Alert setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier. - **[Automate Alert Workflows for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the automated Alert workflow processes included in Student Success Hub. # Set Up foundationConnect Security Understand and configure the user permissions for your foundationConnect portals. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-foundation_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/4412bd03-b109-4e35-8baf-6d18e783b100/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce is retiring foundationConnect. As part of this product retirement, the ability to renew subscriptions to this product will end on January 31, 2025, and the product will be deactivated on January 31, 2026. Grantmaking is available as a new product option. Learn more in [Grantmaking](https://www.salesforce.org/products/grantmaking/) and contact your Account Executive with any questions. - **[Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have the access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. - **[Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Amendments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.configure_gp_community_user_permissions_amendments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting the Amendments feature. - **[Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Benchmarks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_benchmarks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting the Benchmarks feature. - **[Configure Community User Permissions on the Grantee Portal When Using Grantee Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_community_user_permissions_granteereports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your grantseekers, grantees, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields supporting Grantee Reports. - **[Configure Guest User Permissions on the Grantee Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_gp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your guest users, such as grantseekers who do not have a login to your Grantee Portal, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. - **[Configure Community User Permissions on the Reviewer Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_community_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your reviewers and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. - **[Configure Guest User Permissions on the Reviewer Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fc_configure_rp_guest_user_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your guest users, such as reviewers who do not have a login to your Reviewer Portal, and System Administrators have access they need to standard and custom objects and fields. # Set Up Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Complete these tasks to get front-desk appointment scheduling up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support staff aren't the only ones who schedule support appointments. Administrative assistants, front desk coordinators, part-time student employees—a whole host of people help support staff in creating appointments. Is a student standing at the front desk, foot tapping, ready to schedule? No worries. Front-desk staff can click a button to quickly create appointments for support staff and students using a dedicated form that helps them easily find the best day, time, and location to meet. - **[Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Front-desk appointment scheduling was released with Student Success Hub 2.53 (Summer '21). - **[Set Object and Field Permissions for Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Front-desk staff who schedule appointments for support staff need permissions to access the objects and fields used for appointments and availability. These permissions are different from the permissions that support staff need to create and manage their own appointments, however, so create a profile for your front-desk staff and assign it these minimum object and field permissions. - **[Set Apex Class Access for Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The component that front-desk staff use to schedule appointments relies on three Apex classes. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the objects used by front-desk appointment scheduling: Appointment, Appointment Attendee, Appointment Location, Availability, Availability Location, Availability Topic, Case, Support Pool, and Topic. - **[Add the Appointment Scheduler Highlights Panel to Lightning Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Front-desk staff access their New Appointment form from a custom Lightning component built just for them. Add the component to any Lightning page where it will be useful. For example, add it to a custom Student Success Hub Home page created especially for front-desk staff. Or, add it to the student Contact record detail page, to the Appointments tab on Student Record Case pages, or to all three locations—whatever makes sense for your institution. - **[Understand How Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_front_desk_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Front-desk staff creates appointments on the SSH Appointment Scheduler Highlights Panel to schedule appointments between a student and a support staff member, including members of a Support Pool. Although the form looks similar to the form that support staff use to schedule their own appointments, there are some differences. ## Learn About Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Support staff aren't the only ones who schedule support appointments. Administrative assistants, front desk coordinators, part-time student employees—a whole host of people help support staff in creating appointments. Is a student standing at the front desk, foot tapping, ready to schedule? No worries. Front-desk staff can click a button to quickly create appointments for support staff and students using a dedicated form that helps them easily find the best day, time, and location to meet. Front-desk staff can schedule individual appointments between a student and a support staff member or a member of a Support Pool. They can't schedule group or walk-in appointments. After an appointment is scheduled, support staff members can use the Appointment Manager to reschedule or cancel it, and students can reschedule or cancel it from the portal. Front-desk staff can't reschedule or cancel the appointments they create for others. Front-desk appointment scheduling uses a custom Lightning component to access a New Appointment form that accommodates front-desk staff scheduling needs. ## Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Release Information Front-desk appointment scheduling was released with Student Success Hub 2.53 (Summer '21). To get front-desk appointment scheduling up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Check Your Student Success Hub Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set Object and Field Permissions for Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Front-desk staff who schedule appointments for support staff need permissions to access the objects and fields used for appointments and availability. These permissions are different from the permissions that support staff need to create and manage their own appointments, however, so create a profile for your front-desk staff and assign it these minimum object and field permissions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Don't create the front-desk staff profile based on the support staff profile you're using. Instead, create it based on a Standard User profile. It's safer to start with a basic profile and add permissions than to start from a profile that has permissions you need to remove. If you create a permission set instead of a profile, the same principle applies: Don't clone the support staff permission set that's included with Student Success Hub. Instead, create a new permission set and assign the minimal permissions that front-desk staff need to do their jobs. Finally, we recommend that you assign the Student Success Hub app to the front-desk profile or permission set.
Object Object Permissions Field Permissions

Account

 Read (granted in the Standard User profile)

Read Access on Case Team Name

Appointment

Read, Create, Edit

Edit Access on all fields

Appointment Attendee

Read, Create, Edit

Edit Access on all fields

Appointment Location

Read

Read Access on all fields

Availability

Read

Read Access on Attendee Limit

Availability Location

Read

Read Access on all fields

Availability Topic

Read

Read Access on all fields

Case

Read

Contact

Read

Read Access on Student ID, or whatever field (if any) you're using for Student IDs

Event

Read Access on Location, Name and Type

Role Topic Setting

Read

  
Support Pool Read Read Access on Case Team Name and Description (all fields except Photo URL and Account)

Task

  

Read Access on Related To

Topic

Read

Read Access on all fields
## Set Apex Class Access for Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling The component that front-desk staff use to schedule appointments relies on three Apex classes. Student Success Hub includes access to these Apex classes on the support staff profile. Here's how to add them to a front-desk staff profile—and to your System Administrator profile. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're using a permission set instead of a profile, complete this task but search for and select **Permission Sets**, then click the Permission Set Label for your front-desk staff. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click the Profile Name for your front-desk staff and then click **Apex Class Access**. 3. Click **Edit** and drag these classes to the Enabled Apex Classes list. - sfal.AppointmentSchedulerController - sfal.AppointmentSchedulerLookupResult - sfal.AppointmentSchedulerViewModel - sfal.FeatureGateController 4. Save your changes and repeat for the System Administrator profile. ## Configure Sharing Settings for Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the objects used by front-desk appointment scheduling: Appointment, Appointment Attendee, Appointment Location, Availability, Availability Location, Availability Topic, Case, Support Pool, and Topic. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Add the Appointment Scheduler Highlights Panel to Lightning Page Layouts Front-desk staff access their New Appointment form from a custom Lightning component built just for them. Add the component to any Lightning page where it will be useful. For example, add it to a custom Student Success Hub Home page created especially for front-desk staff. Or, add it to the student Contact record detail page, to the Appointments tab on Student Record Case pages, or to all three locations—whatever makes sense for your institution. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to the page where you want to add the component. For example, click the app navigation menu and select **Home** to go to the Student Success Hub Home page. 2. From the page header, click the gear icon and select **Edit Page**. 3. In the Lightning App Builder, from the Components pane, drag the SSH Appointment Scheduler Highlights Panel to the page canvas. 4. Save your changes and exit Lightning App Builder. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Make sure to assign the page layout with the SSH Appointment Scheduler Highlights Panel to your front-desk staff profile so that front-desk staff can access it. ## Understand How Front-Desk Appointment Scheduling Works Front-desk staff creates appointments on the SSH Appointment Scheduler Highlights Panel to schedule appointments between a student and a support staff member, including members of a Support Pool. Although the form looks similar to the form that support staff use to schedule their own appointments, there are some differences. - Front-desk staff can select individual staff members or Support Pools with predefined case teams as attendees. When scheduling for an individual staff member, they create appointments regardless of the staff member's case team role on the student's success team. Front-desk staff can schedule a student to meet with any staff member who has defined availability to meet about any Topic or Subtopic. This gives front-desk staff more flexibility, especially when they need to schedule urgent appointments for students. - Front-desk staff can search for and select student attendees by any searchable Contact field, including Name, Phone, Email, and Student ID (if configured). - After selecting attendees and a Topic and Subtopic, front-desk staff can choose from dates, times, and locations that the selected staff member or Support Pool members have defined in their Availability Settings. The Date and Time selectors show only staff members' recurring Scheduled availability. They don't show Walk-In or Group availability, and front-desk staff can't create walk-in or group appointments. - Front-desk staff can't create one-off appointments of a custom length like support staff members can using the New Appointment form that opens from the Appointment Manager. However, the New Appointment form that front-desk staff use recognizes and respects custom appointment lengths that the support staff member has defined in their Availability Settings. - There's no Appointment Subject field on the New Appointment form for front-desk staff, but there is an optional Description field. - When scheduling for a Support Pool, the Available Times panel shows all members of the Pool with availability for the selected Topic and Subtopic. When multiple members have availability, they're sorted alphabetically by last name: Adam Aaronson is always at the top of the list and Zelda Ziegler is always at the bottom. Remind staff to scroll the list so they don't overload Adam's schedule just because he's at the top of the list. - The form only shows availability for staff members who have migrated their Availability Settings to use location-based availability. - The staff member and student who are invited to the appointment both receive email notifications, just like they do when support staff and students schedule appointments themselves. They can reschedule or cancel the appointment, and change its location, but they can't change the Topic or Subtopic on the agenda. # Set Up Fundraising in Education Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Fundraising Prerequisites in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_prerequisites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To prepare your org for Fundraising, assign permission sets, enable person accounts, and turn on and set up Fundraising. - **[Configure Fundraising Rollup and Summary Calculations in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_configure_fundraising_rollup_and_summary_calculations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Fundraising with Data Processing Engine to calculate Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) scores. - **[Keep Your Accounting System Accurate in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_keep_your_accounting_system_accurate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting. Using Accounting Subledger (included with Fundraising) helps you track your Fundraising accounting in your accounting system. - **[Access Data from Different Sources and Segment Campaign Audiences in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_access_data_different_sources_segment_campaign_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Donor and partner data can come from all kinds of sources and can be stored in multiple places. To access data from different sources in your Salesforce org, map objects from Fundraising to Data Cloud by using a data kit. - **[Process Fundraising Records Automatically with Batch Management in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_process_records_automatically_with_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Batch Management to streamline your fundraising operations. Batch Management lets you automate record processing in scheduled flows, so you can manage a high volume of standard and custom object records efficiently. Create batch jobs and set filter criteria to select records for processing. Track the progress and status of batch jobs and their components after execution. - **[Schedule a Gift Commitment Batch Processing Job in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_schedule_gift_commitment_processing_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters. - **[Set Up Donor Briefs in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_configure_donor_briefs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically generate a donor brief for a board meeting or major donor solicitation by using customized templates and add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts for quick access. - **[Set Up Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments_and_tax_receipts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your users quickly and easily create gift acknowledgments and tax receipts for donors. You can create these individually or in batches. - **[Customize Fundraising Page Layouts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_customize_fundraising_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tailor the Fundraising pages to meet your needs. For example, include a non-monetary assets section on the Gift Commitment page or add a field to indicate if a commitment is verbal or written. # Set Up Fundraising in Nonprofit Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

- **[Fundraising Prerequisites in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_prerequisites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To prepare your org for Fundraising, assign permission sets, enable person accounts, and turn on and set up Fundraising. - **[Configure Fundraising Rollup and Summary Calculations in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_fundraising_rollup_and_summary_calculations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Fundraising with Data Processing Engine to calculate Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) scores. - **[Keep Your Accounting System Accurate in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_keep_your_accounting_system_accurate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting. Using Accounting Subledger (included with Fundraising) helps you track your Fundraising accounting in your accounting system. - **[Access Data from Different Sources and Segment Campaign Audiences in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_access_data_different_sources_segment_campaign_audiences.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Donor and partner data can come from all kinds of sources and can be stored in multiple places. To access data from different sources in your Salesforce org, map objects from Fundraising to Data Cloud by using a data kit. - **[Process Fundraising Records Automatically with Batch Management in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_process_records_automatically_with_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Batch Management to streamline your fundraising operations. Batch Management lets you automate record processing in scheduled flows, so you can manage a high volume of standard and custom object records efficiently. Create batch jobs and set filter criteria to select records for processing. Track the progress and status of batch jobs and their components after execution. - **[Schedule a Gift Commitment Batch Processing Job in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_schedule_gift_commitment_processing_batch_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enter large volumes of gift commitments at one time to improve efficiency and data accuracy. Run batch jobs with a flow to update commitment records based on transactions, schedules, and other parameters. - **[Set Up Donor Briefs in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_donor_briefs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically generate a donor brief for a board meeting or major donor solicitation by using customized templates and add the Create Donor Brief button to page layouts for quick access. - **[Set Up Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments_and_tax_receipts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your users quickly and easily create gift acknowledgments and tax receipts for donors. You can create these individually or in batches. - **[Customize Fundraising Page Layouts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_customize_fundraising_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Tailor the Fundraising pages to meet your needs. For example, include a non-monetary assets section on the Gift Commitment page or add a field to indicate if a commitment is verbal or written. # Set Up Fundseeker Portal Access Configure security options such as profiles, permissions, and sharing settings for your fundseeker portal. - **[Assign Fundseeker Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_assign_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the available Outbound Funds Module profiles and their default access to the fundseeker portal. - **[Set Funding Program Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure who can access your funding programs. - **[Give Fundseekers Access to Apply to Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_grantseekers_apply_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up permissions to define how your funding applicants access the fundseeker portal. - **[Allow Fundseekers to Submit Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_allow_submit_apps.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure sharing settings so that fundseekers can submit applications. - **[Allow Fundseekers to See Funding Requests and Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_sharing_set.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you used the Outbound Funds Module Fundseeker Starter Portal Template and Build Site installer, you already have a sharing set that gives external users, such as a fundseekers, Read access to the Funding Request and Requirement objects based on the user’s Account or Contact. # Set Up Fundseeker Portal Registration Configure how applicants register on the fundseeker portal. - **[Configure Manual Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manual_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your organization may want to manually register users instead of allowing them to register themselves. This can be done with a few configurations. - **[Configure Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_self_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up self-registration if you want guest users to be able to register for an account on your portal. # Set Up General Accounting Units for Allocations Configure General Accounting Units to designate portions of gifts to multiple funds. _Allocations_ (sometimes referred to as designations) are used to designate portions of a donor's gift to multiple funds through General Accounting Units (GAUs). During setup, create GAUs for funds that are eligible to receive donations. It's also very important that you edit your org's Default General Accounting Unit. GEM automatically assigns the Default General Accounting Unit to any Opportunity (and its Payments) that doesn't have Allocations. - **[Create Your Own GAUs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_general_acct_units_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a custom General Accounting Unit. - **[Update Default GAU](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_general_acct_units_allocs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set the default General Accounting Unit for your org. ## Create Your Own GAUs Create a custom General Accounting Unit. To create a new GAU: 1. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png), find and select **General Accounting Units**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Give your GAU a name. 4. Make sure **Active** is selected. Don't worry about entering anything in the Allocation Information or Allocation Totals fields; NPSP fills these in automatically. 5. Optionally, enter a Description. 6. Click **Save**. ## Update Default GAU Set the default General Accounting Unit for your org. Set the default GAU to match the GAU your org prefers to use. 1. Go to the NPSP Settings tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Click **Donations**, then click **GAU Allocations**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Under **Default General Accounting Unit**, select the name of the GAU that you want to receive all unallocated Payments. 5. Click **Save**. Or, you can simply rename the Default GAU record to something more descriptive for your institution. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/images/icon_important.png) Important If the GAU Allocation record set in Default General Accounting Unit is deleted, the Payment Allocations Enabled setting (also in NPSP Settings) is automatically disabled. Re-enable it by specifying the **Default General Accounting Unit**, then enabling **Payment Allocations Enabled**. # Set Up Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Education Help your users quickly and easily create gift acknowledgments and tax receipts for donors. You can create these individually or in batches. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Enable person accounts before you set up Gift Acknowledgments. Before you set up Gift Acknowledgments, give admins the DocGen Designer permission set license and the SalesforceCRM Content User license. Give all users the DocGen User permission set. Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - **[Format Gift Acknowledgments, Receipts, Donor Reports by Using Templates in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_format_gift_acknowledgments_and_receipts_with_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides sample templates for batch gift acknowledgments and single donation tax receipts. These samples are a starting point for customizing templates for your organization. - **[Set Up Document Generation in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable server-side documentation generation to automatically generate gift acknowledgement and tax receipt documents. - **[Provide Template Access for Acknowledgment Generation in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_provide_template_access_for_acknowledgment_generation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a public group to assign users with the permissions and access to generate gift acknowledgments. - **[Add Gift Acknowledgment and Tax Receipt Templates in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_gift_acknowledgment_and_tax_receipt_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates to generate your gift receipt letters. - **[Add Generate Document Button to Page Layouts in Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_add_generate_document_button_to_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To access single acknowledgment generation, add the Generate Document button to the page layouts. # Set Up Gift Acknowledgments and Tax Receipts in Nonprofit Help your users quickly and easily create gift acknowledgments and tax receipts for donors. You can create these individually or in batches. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Enable person accounts before you set up Gift Acknowledgments. Before you set up Gift Acknowledgments, give admins the DocGen Designer permission set license and the SalesforceCRM Content User license. Give all users the DocGen User permission set. Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). - **[Format Gift Acknowledgments, Receipts, Donor Reports by Using Templates in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_format_gift_acknowledgments_and_receipts_with_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce provides sample templates for batch gift acknowledgments and single donation tax receipts. These samples are a starting point for customizing templates for your organization. - **[Set Up Document Generation in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_gift_acknowledgments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable server-side documentation generation to automatically generate gift acknowledgement and tax receipt documents. - **[Provide Template Access for Acknowledgment Generation in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_provide_template_access_for_acknowledgment_generation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a public group to assign users with the permissions and access to generate gift acknowledgments. - **[Add Gift Acknowledgment and Tax Receipt Templates in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_gift_acknowledgment_and_tax_receipt_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add gift acknowledgment and tax receipt templates to generate your gift receipt letters. - **[Add Generate Document Button to Page Layouts in Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_add_generate_document_button_to_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To access single acknowledgment generation, add the Generate Document button to the page layouts. # Set Up Grantseeker Access Configure security access such as profiles, permissions, sharing settings, and more. - **[Assign Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_assign_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the available Grants Management profiles and their default access to the grants portal. - **[GM Set Funding Program Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_funding_program_visibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure who can access the funding programs. - **[GM Give Grantseekers Access to Apply to Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_grantseekers_apply_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up permissions to define how your users access the grants portal. - **[GM Give Grantseekers Access to Submit Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_give_users_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up sharing sets to define how your users access the grants portal. - **[Allow Grantseekers to See Funding Requests and Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_sharing_set.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you used the Grants Management and Build Community installer, you already have a sharing set that gives external users, such as a grantseekers, Read access to the Funding Request and Requirement objects based on the user’s Account or Contact. - **[Enable Funding Request Collaboration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_enable_fnd_request_collab.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare Salesforce and your grants portal for applicants to collaborate on Funding Requests. # Set Up Group Availability Complete these tasks to get Group availability up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Group Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You know what they say: There aren't enough hours in the day—unless your support staff start using Group availability. - **[Group Availability Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Group availability was released with Student Success Hub 2.50 (Spring '21). - **[Group Availability Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Group availability requires location- and topic-based availability. Make sure they're set up first. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Group Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Group availability requires access to the Attendee Limit and Discoverable fields on the Appointment object, and to the Attendee Limit field on the Availability object. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Group Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Availability object. - **[Configure the Group Availability Event Type in Custom Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At the org level, group availability uses a Custom Setting called Group Availability Event Type. This setting defines a type of Event and a type of Availability that indicate availability for group appointments that students can sign up for in the portal. - **[Configure the Event Group Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that you have a group availability type defined for your org, add it to the objects that use it, starting with Event. - **[Configure the Availability Group Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Next, add the group type to the Availability object. - **[Update the Appointment Detail Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the Appointment record detail page layout to include the Attendee Limit field. ## Learn About Group Availability You know what they say: There aren't enough hours in the day—unless your support staff start using Group availability. Group availability is a third type of availability, along with Scheduled and Walk-In. It allows support staff to create recurring blocks of available time dedicated to appointments with groups of students. Support staff specify how many students can attend, the topic they're available to discuss, and, of course, when and where they're available. Then, students reserve a spot in the group appointment in the portal. Group availability is great for small workshops or clinics on frequently covered topics such as resume-writing, study abroad preparation, and other standard advising fare. Group availability is different from the group appointment support that we introduced in Student Success Hub 2.40 (Summer '20). Starting with Student Success Hub 2.40, support staff can use the Scheduled availability type to invite multiple students (and other support staff ) to an appointment. With the Group availability type, however, students reserve spots in a group appointment in the portal. The net result for support staff and students alike is the same: a scheduled group appointment. The difference is the appointment's underlying availability type and who creates the appointment: the support staff member in Student Success Hub (using Scheduled availability) or students in the portal (using Group availability). For example, every January and February, Ada Guzman is deluged by students who want to meet about summer internships. She doesn't have time to hold appointments with each student individually, and she knows that if she schedules students herself—individually or in groups—many will simply cancel or reschedule. She wants students to reserve a spot in a group appointment about summer internships at their convenience. So Ada creates a recurring block of availability from 3 PM to 5 PM every day for those two months dedicated to virtual group appointments about summer internships. She sets the maximum number of students (Attendee Limit) at those appointments to 15. She also defines a separate recurring group availability block for in-person group appointments about summer internships, for which she defines a maximum of 5 attendees.  ![The Current and Past Availability table showing recurring Scheduled, Group, and Walk-In availability blocks](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_advisor_group_availability_example.png) Now Ada's students can reserve a spot at any of several group appointments, some in-person and some virtual, about summer internships. Appointments during group availability blocks show in the Scheduling Wizard as long as at least one spot is open—that is, as long as the number of students with reserved attendance is below the Attendee Limit. ## Group Availability Release Information Group availability was released with Student Success Hub 2.50 (Spring '21). To get group availability up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Group Availability Prerequisites Group availability requires location- and topic-based availability. Make sure they're set up first. See [Set Up Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get location-based availability (flex scheduling) up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and [Set Up Topic-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Topic-based availability up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") before continuing. ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Group Availability Group availability requires access to the Attendee Limit and Discoverable fields on the Appointment object, and to the Attendee Limit field on the Availability object. Attendee Limit indicates the maximum number of students who can attend the appointment. The limit, which is 500, doesn't include the support staff member who owns the appointment. Attendee Limit is first defined on the Availability object, however, once an appointment in a group availability block is created, the Attendee Limit for the individual appointment is tracked on the Appointment record, independently of the Availability object. Discoverable determines whether an appointment in a group availability block is visible to and can be reserved by students in the portal. Discoverable appointments appear in the Scheduling Wizard as long as the number of students who have reserved a spot at the group appointment is less than the Attendee Limit. _Discoverable is a system field used by Student Success Hub. Do not edit it._ See [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal.") for the necessary permissions. ## Configure Sharing Settings for Group Availability Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Availability object. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Configure the Group Availability Event Type in Custom Settings At the org level, group availability uses a Custom Setting called Group Availability Event Type. This setting defines a type of Event and a type of Availability that indicate availability for group appointments that students can sign up for in the portal. The value in the Group Availability Event Type custom setting appears in all Event Type picklists in Student Success Hub, including support staff members' Availability Settings. Students also see the value in the Scheduling Wizard in the portal. Student Success Hub provides the value Group for the Group Availability Event Type custom setting. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to SSH Hierarchy Settings and then click **Edit**. 3. In the Group Availability Event Type field, confirm the value Group or enter a value to represent group availability. 4. Save your changes. Make note of the value you use for Group Availability Event Type. You'll need it to define the Event and Availability Type picklists next. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For information about the other org-level availability custom settings, see [Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability."). ## Configure the Event Group Type Now that you have a group availability type defined for your org, add it to the objects that use it, starting with Event. Student Success Hub provides a Group Event Type picklist value for you. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, select **Event**. 2. On the Fields & Relationships page, click **Type**. 3. In the Values section, confirm there's a picklist value whose API Name corresponds to your Group Availability Event Type custom setting. 1. If necessary, click **New** and enter the value, such as Group, in the text box. Then select the Support Event record type and save your changes. 2. Alternatively, click **Edit** next to the Group value, change the Label and API Name to correspond to your custom Group Availability Event Type custom setting, and save your changes. When you're done, you should have three values that correspond to your three availability types, for example, Walk-In, Scheduled, and Group. ## Configure the Availability Group Type Next, add the group type to the Availability object. Student Success Hub provides a Group Availability Type picklist value for you. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, select **Availability**. 2. On the Fields & Relationships page, click **Type**. 3. In the Values section, confirm there's a picklist value whose API Name corresponds to your Group Availability Event Type custom setting. 1. If necessary, click **New**, enter the value, such as Group, in the text box, and save your changes. 2. Alternatively, click **Edit** next to the Group value, change the Label and API Name to correspond to your custom Group Availability Event Type custom setting, and save your changes. When you're done, you should have three values that correspond to your three availability types, for example, Walk-In, Scheduled, and Group. After you've defined group availability in Custom Settings and on the Event and Availability objects, then support staff can create recurring availability blocks whose type is Group (or your custom value), and specify an Attendee Limit for appointments during the block. ## Update the Appointment Detail Page Layout Update the Appointment record detail page layout to include the Attendee Limit field. Don't add the Discoverable field to the layout, because support staff shouldn't be able to edit it. Student Success Hub uses Discoverable under the hood to show appointments in Group availability blocks in the portal based on whether or not the Attendee Limit is reached. And don't add either field to any Appointment page layout that students access through the portal. Student Success Hub includes the Attendee Limit field on the Appointment Layout for you. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Appointment**. 2. On the Page Layouts page, click **Appointment Layout** (or whatever layout you're using). 3. Drag the **Attendee Limit** field from the palette to the Information area of the Appointment Detail page. 4. Save your changes. # Set Up Individual Application in Education Cloud To store the preferences of an applicant during enrollment, set up the individual application object in Education Cloud. 1. From the object management settings for individual applications, go to Record Types. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the label and name for the record type. 4. Select **Active**. 5. Select the profiles that require access to the record type. 6. Select the page layout for the record type, and then save your changes. 7. Similarly, create additional record types as needed. # Set Up Inquiry Flows Configure the Education Cloud inquiry management flows.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up inquiry flows: | Education Cloud Full Access | Because some inquiries are relatively general and some require more personalized attention, inquiry management screen flows cover a variety of scenarios. - The EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Sign Up for Information flow processes a student or prospect's request to receive regular updates and communications from your institution. Use the data collected in this flow to enroll a prospect in a Marketing Cloud journey, using Marketing Cloud Connect. - The EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Connect With Us flow connects prospects and students with your staff by creating a contact request record. - The EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Submit an Inquiry Form flow creates a case record and associates it with an educational info request when a student completes the form. These subflows help consolidate the processes related to the screen flows. - EDU Admissions: Process Person Account - EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing ## Clone and Configure Inquiry Subflows 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Find and select **EDU Admissions: Process Person Account**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name for the new flow. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. In How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing–Access All Data**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Updating sharing to System Context Without Sharing–Access All Data is required to make the flows function for guest users. However, make this update only if it aligns with your institution's security model. 7. Save and activate the flow. 8. Similarly, clone and configure the EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing subflow. ## Clone and Configure the Inquiry Screen Flows 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Connect With Us**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Enter a name and API name for the flow. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. In How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing–Access All Data**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To make the flows function for guest users, you must update sharing to System Context Without Sharing–Access All Data. However, make this update only if it aligns to your institution's security model. See [Change the Flow Run Context](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_distribute_system_mode.htm&type=5). 7. Save your changes. 8. Add a subflow element after the original EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow element. 9. Select your cloned version of the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow. 10. Enter a label and API name. 11. Update the variables to match the original version. 1. Turn on incomingPersonAccount to include the input value, and enter personAccountInfo. 2. Select **Manually assign variables**. 3. Enter {!personAccountInfo} as the incomingPersonAccount output value. 4. Enter {!isNewPersonAccount} as the isNewPersonAccount output value. 12. Delete the original EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow element. 13. Similarly, replace the EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing subflow and update these variables. 1. Enter academicInterestTemplate as the academicInterestTemplate input value. 2. Enter personAccountInfo as the incomingPersonAccount input value. 3. Enter isNewPersonAccount as the isNewPersonAccount input value. 4. Enter selectedLearningProgramIds as the selectedLearningProgramIds input value. 14. Save and activate the flow. 15. Similarly, repeat the process for the EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Sign Up for Information and EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Submit an Inquiry Form flows. # Set Up K-12 Architecture Kit Prepare your data for K-12 Architecture Kit, learn about dashboards and reports, and customize page layouts and record types. - **[Migrate Data in K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_migrate_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prepare to migrate your data to K-12 Architecture Kit​. - **[Build Sample Data in Your K-12 Architecture Kit Trial Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_build_trial_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create student, school, and course offering sample data in a trial org. - **[Learn About the K-12 Architecture Kit Dashboard and Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_dashboard_reports.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track student and school characteristics with dashboards and reports in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Consider Customizing Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_page_layout_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize page layouts and record types in K-12 Architecture Kit to meet the needs of your school. # Set Up Learner Enrollment Set up the individual application record page and configure the necessary permissions to enroll learners. ### Required Editions Academic Operations is enabled in your org. See [Set Up the Academic Operations App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm).
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up learner enrollment: Education Cloud Full Access
1. If the Enroll Admitted Student action isn’t available on the individual application record page, then: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Individual Applications**. 2. Click on any individual application to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then click **Edit Page**. 4. Select the highlights panel, and then click **Add Action**. 5. Select **Enroll Admitted Student**, and then click **Done**. 6. Save your changes and activate the page. See [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm). 2. Provide users the necessary permissions to run flows: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets and select it. 2. Click **Clone** next to Education Cloud Full Access. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click on your permission set. 6. Click **App Permissions**. 7. Click **Edit**, select **Run Flows**, and then save your changes. 8. Assign the new permission set to your staff users. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). SEE ALSO: - [Learner Enrollment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_enrollment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Enroll Admitted Student action on the individual application record page in Education Cloud to enroll an admitted student into a learning program. Automate the enrollment process with Salesforce flows to enroll multiple students.") # Set Up Learner Program Record Page Configure the record page for the learner program object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learner program record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learner program object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learner program record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learner program object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learner program record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learner Program record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learner_program.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learner Program**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learner Program Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Learner Program Requirement Record Page Configure the record page for the learner program requirement object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learner program requirement record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learner program requirement object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learner program requirement record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_program_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learner program requirement object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learner program requirement record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learner Program Requirement record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learner_program_requirement.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learner Program Requirement**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learner Program Requirement Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Learning Achievement Record Page Configure the record page for the learning achievement object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learning achievement record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_achievement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning achievement object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_achievement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning achievement record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_achievement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning achievement object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move directly to the next section. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learning achievement record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learning Achievement record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_achievement.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4) - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning Achievement**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Achievement Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Learning Course Record Page Configure the record page for the learning course object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the learning course record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
- **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_course_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning course object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Learning Course Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_course_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning course record page to show details, related lists, activity, notes, and files. - **[Finish the Learning Course Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_course_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning course object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). ## Add Components to the Learning Course Record Page Add components to the learning course record page to show details, related lists, activity, notes, and files. Add the components as shown in this screenshot. ![Learning course record page layout template with callouts on the components to add to the page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_course.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you add components to the record page. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). 1. Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). 2. Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). 3. Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). 4. Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). 5. Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Change the tab names to Activity and Notes & Files (5). 6. Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). 7. Click **Notes & Files** and add the **Related List - Single** component (7). For Related List, select **Notes**. 8. Add the **Related List - Single** component below Notes (7). For Related List, select **Files**. 9. Save your work. ## Finish the Learning Course Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Enable Notes To show the Notes related list on the record page, enable Notes. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Notes, and then select **Notes Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Notes****.** 3. Save your changes. ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning Course**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Course Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). # Set Up Learning Equivalency for Registrar To map an equivalency between the external and internal learnings, configure the Learning Equivalency record page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up learning equivalency for registrar: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Equivalencies**. 2. Select a learning equivalency to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. In Lightning App Builder, click **Add Tab**. 5. Select **Learning Equivalency Mapping** as the tab label, and then click **Done**. 6. Drag and drop the **Learning Equivalency Mapping** component onto the tab. 7. Save your changes and activate the page. SEE ALSO: - [Define Learning Equivalency Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up learning records and equivalencies to evaluate applicants’ prior learning for transfer credit. Map source achievements to the achievements your institution grants, then publish and activate the equivalency. These rules serve as the source of truth for your articulation and admissions staff.") - [Manage Transfer Credit Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_transfer_credit_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Evaluate transfer credit requests to determine which prior academic credits meet your institution’s requirements. The registrar reviews submitted materials to establish which previously earned credits meet necessary standards. The final list of accepted transfer credits determines the applicant's time to complete a degree.") # Set Up Learning Equivalency Rules Set up learning records and equivalencies to evaluate applicants’ prior learning for transfer credit. Map source achievements to the achievements your institution grants, then publish and activate the equivalency. These rules serve as the source of truth for your articulation and admissions staff. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To prepare data for transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
To establish a functional rule, configure these objects. ![Shows the flow of information in transfer credits](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/edu_transfer_credit_objects_flow.png) Before establishing equivalency rules, model external and internal curricula with learning, achievement, and outcome records. - [Define a high-level learning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) to identify the curriculum subject matter, such as Introductory Psychology. - [Create an external learning record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) to track learning activities offered by an external organization or institution. External learning is a child of the learning object. - Create a learning course to represent a formal course offered by a college or university. - [Create a learning achievement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help applicants earn credit for their work, connect a learning to a learning achievement by using the learning outcome item. Define a source learning achievement for an external course and a target learning achievement for an internal course.") to represents the recognized result of a learning activity. - [Generate a learning outcome item](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To help applicants earn credit for their work, connect a learning to a learning achievement by using the learning outcome item. Define a source learning achievement for an external course and a target learning achievement for an internal course.") to connect a learning record to a learning achievement. This record defines the learning outcomes (skills or knowledge) that are satisfied when an achievement is earned. - [Create a learning equivalency](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define a relationship between your institution and an external provider to track the agreement status and valid date ranges.") to define the relationship between your institution and an external provider. This record tracks the agreement status and valid date ranges. - [Create a learning equivalency achievement mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To define the logic used to articulate and suggest credits, specify the source achievement from the applicant and the target achievement granted by your institution.") to specify the source achievement (from the applicant) and the target achievement (granted by your institution). SEE ALSO - [Academic Operations Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/academic-operations.html) - [Education Cloud Standard Objects](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_standard_objects.htm) ## Create Learning Records ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the External Learning Wizard to create external learnings and relate them to learning outcomes. See [Define External Learning by Using the External Learning Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the External Learning Wizard to create external learnings, relate them to key and additional learning outcomes, and set valid date ranges and duration."). 1. Create a learning record for any academic activity to represent the high-level subjects for both the source and target institutions. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learnings**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the learning. 4. For courses coming from other institutions, select **External Learning** as the type. 5. Select the institution that provides the learning as the provider. 6. Enter the learning details. 7. Save your changes. 2. If the learning type is External Learning, define the specific external details. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learnings**. 2. Select an learning record where the learning type is External Learning. 3. On the Related tab, in the External Learnings section, click **New**. 4. Enter a name for the external learning. 5. Enter a unique identifier and select a field of study. 6. Select the type of external learning. 7. Save your changes. ## Connect Learnings to Achievements To help applicants earn credit for their work, connect a learning to a learning achievement by using the learning outcome item. Define a source learning achievement for an external course and a target learning achievement for an internal course. 1. Create learning achievement records to represent the successful completion of the external course and the internal course. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Achievements**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Achievement Group** as the record type. 4. Enter a name for the learning achievement. 5. Enter all relevant information about the new learning achievement. 6. Save your changes. 7. Similarly, create additional learning achievements for the **Achievement Group All**, **Learning Course**, or **Learning Program** record types. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use **Achievement Group All** record type if multiple courses are required (AND condition) to earn one credit. 2. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the External Learning Wizard to create external learnings and relate them to learning outcomes. See [Define External Learning by Using the External Learning Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the External Learning Wizard to create external learnings, relate them to key and additional learning outcomes, and set valid date ranges and duration."). To connect the external and internal learnings and achievements, create learning outcome item records. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Outcome Items**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the learning associated with an external learning. 4. Select the learning achievement for the required learning record type. 5. Enter the minimum letter grade and minimum numeric grade. 6. Enter the outcome item details. 7. Save your changes. 8. Similarly, create a learning outcome item record for an internal learning to identify the achievement that an applicant earns after a successful transfer. ## Define External Learning by Using the External Learning Wizard Use the External Learning Wizard to create external learnings, relate them to key and additional learning outcomes, and set valid date ranges and duration. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **External Learning**. 2. Click **New from External Learning Wizard**. 3. Enter a name for the external learning. 4. Select the active dates. 5. Enter the duration to complete the learning and select a duration unit. 6. Select an academic level. 7. Enter a unique identifier and select a field of study. 8. Select the type of external learning. 9. Enter a description. 10. Click **Next**. 11. Define key learning outcomes. If there are multiple outcomes, set one as primary. 12. Define additional learning outcomes. 13. Click **Create External Learning**. ## Create a Learning Equivalency Define a relationship between your institution and an external provider to track the agreement status and valid date ranges. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the Learning Equivalency Wizard to define relationships between external and internal learnings and the learning programs. See [Define Learning Equivalency By Using the Learning Equivalency Wizard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Learning Equivalency Wizard to define relationships between external and internal learnings and the learning programs, and the valid date ranges for the learning equivalency."). 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Equivalencies**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the learning equivalency. 4. Select a type of learning equivalency. - To make the learning equivalency available to all learners, select **General**. - To create custom methods, select **Discrete**. 5. To apply the rule only for credits earned during valid periods, enter the **Start Date** and **End Date**. 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't publish and activate a learning equivalency at the same time. Create the learning equivalency without publishing, map it to an achievement, and then publish and activate the record. ## Define Learning Equivalency by Using the Learning Equivalency Wizard Use the Learning Equivalency Wizard to define relationships between external and internal learnings and the learning programs, and the valid date ranges for the learning equivalency. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Equivalencies**. 2. Click **New from Learning Equivalency Wizard**. 3. On the External Learnings tab, click **Add External Learning** to map the external learning from transferring institutions to your internal learning. Select external learning and enter the learning information, such as minimum letter and numeric grades, duration and duration unit. Select the equivalency logic, and add more external learnings if needed. 4. On the Internal Learnings tab, click **Add External Learning** to select internal learning equivalent to the selected external learning. Select the internal learning and enter the learning information, such as minimum letter and numeric grades, duration and duration unit. Select the equivalency logic, and add more internal learnings if needed. 5. On the Learning Program Requirements tab, select learning program requirements for the learning equivalency. Make this equivalency available for all learning programs, or restrict to specified learning programs. 6. On the Learning Equivalency Details tab, enter the learning equivalency information, such as name, type, start and end dates, and learning category. 7. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't publish and activate a learning equivalency at the same time. Create the learning equivalency without publishing, map it to an achievement, and then publish and activate the record. ## Map Achievements To define the logic used to articulate and suggest credits, specify the source achievement from the applicant and the target achievement granted by your institution. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Equivalency Achievement Mappings**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the learning equivalency. 4. Select a source learning achievement for the external course. 5. Select a target learning achievement for the internal course. 6. Save your changes. ## Publish and Activate the Learning Equivalency After mapping the learning equivalency to learning achievements, publish and activate the record to make it available for credit suggestions. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learning Equivalencies**. 2. Select the learning equivalency mapped to the source and target learning achievements in learning equivalency achievement mapping. 3. From the actions menu, select **Edit**. 4. To publish the learning equivalency, select **Published**. 5. Save your changes. 6. To activate the published learning equivalency, select **Active**. 7. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't publish and activate a learning equivalency. Create the learning equivalency without publishing, map the learning equivalency to an achievement, try publishing, and then try activating. ## Example 1: Standard 1:1 Course Equivalency To map an applicant’s English Composition 1 credit from Greenwich Bay Community College to Connected Campus ENGL 1001, follow these steps. 1. Create a learning record for English Composition 1 at Greenwich Bay Community. | Field | Source Learning Value | | --- | --- | | Name | English Composition 1 | | Description | Foundational writing course | | Type | External Learning | | Provider | Greenwich Bay Community College | | Duration | 3 | | Duration Unit | Credit Hours | 2. Create a learning record for ENGL 1001 at Connected Campus. | Field | Target Learning Value | | --- | --- | | Name | ENGL 1001: Writing I | | Description | Internal core writing requirement. | | Type | Learning Course | | Provider | Connected Campus | | Duration | 3 | | Duration Unit | Credit Hours | 3. Create external learning and learning course records to link the details to the learning records. External Learning | Field | External Learning Value | | --- | --- | | Name | GBCC ENG 101 Detail | | Learning | English Composition 1 | | Type | Education | | Description | Standard freshman composition | | Status | Transferable | Learning Course | Field | Learning Course Value | | --- | --- | | Name | ENGL 1001 - Writing I | | Learning | ENGL 1001: Writing I | 4. Create a source learning achievement record. | Field | Source Achievement Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Completed ENG 101 (GBCC) | | Record Type | Achievement Group All | | Issuer | Greenwich Bay Community College | 5. Create a target learning achievement record. | Field | Target Achievement Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Credit for ENGL 1001 (CC) | | Record Type | Achievement Group All | | Issuer | Connected Campus | 6. Link the English Composition 1 learning to the Greenwich Bay Community College’s ENG 101 achievement by using a learning outcome item. | Field | Source Outcome Item Value | | --- | --- | | Learning | English Composition 1 | | Learning Achievement | Completed ENG 101 (GBCC) | | Minimum Numeric Grade | 8 | | Minimum Letter Grade | B | 7. Link the ENGL 1001 learning to the Connected Campus ENGL 1001 achievement by using a target learning outcome item. | Field | Target Outcome Item Value | | --- | --- | | Learning | ENGL 1001: Writing I | | Learning Achievement | Credit for ENGL 1001 (CC) | | Minimum Numeric Grade | – | | Minimum Letter Grade | TC | 8. Create a Standard Writing Equivalency learning equivalency record. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | GBCC ENG 101 to CC ENGL 1001 | | Type | General | | Start Date | 12/01/2025 | 9. Create a learning equivalency achievement mapping. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Learning Equivalency | GBCC ENG 101 to CC ENGL 1001 | | Source | Completed ENG 101 (GBCC) | | Target | Credit for ENGL 1001 (CC) | 10. Publish and activate the learning equivalency. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | GBCC ENG 101 to CC ENGL 1001 | | Active | True | | Published | True | ## Example 2: Complex Many-to-Many Mapping To map an applicant’s ENG 101 AND ENG 102 credit from Greenwich Bay Community College (GBCC) to Connected Campus (ENGL 1001 AND 1002) OR (COMM 1001 AND 1002), follow these steps. 1. Create learning records.
Learning Record Field Values
Source Learning 1
  • Name: English Composition 1
  • Type: External Learning
  • Provider: Greenwich Bay Community College
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
Source Learning 2
  • Name: English Composition 2
  • Type: External Learning
  • Provider: Greenwich Bay Community College
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
Target Learning 3
  • NameENGL 1001: Writing I
  • Type: Learning Course
  • Provider: Connected Campus
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
Target Learning 4
  • NameENGL 1002: Writing II
  • Type: Learning Course
  • Provider: Connected Campus
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
Target Learning 5
  • NameCOMM 1001: Intro to Comm
  • Type: Learning Course
  • Provider: Connected Campus
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
Target Learning 6
  • Name COMM 1002: Public Speaking
  • Type: Learning Course
  • Provider: Connected Campus
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
2. Create external learning and learning course records to link the details to the learning records. External Learnings: Link the external learning to the source learnings.
Learning Record Name Field Values
English Composition 1
  • Learning: English Composition 1
  • Type: Education
  • Status: Transferable
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
English Composition 2
  • Learning: English Composition 2
  • Type: Education
  • Status: Transferable
  • Duration: 3
  • Duration Unit: Credit Hours
Learning Courses: Link the learning courses to the target learnings.
Learning Course Name Field Values
ENGL 1001: Writing I
  • Learning: ENGL 1001: Writing I
  • Course Number: 1001
  • Subject Abbreviation: ENGL
ENGL 1002: Writing II
  • Learning: ENGL 1002: Writing II
  • Course Number: 1002
  • Subject Abbreviation: ENGL
COMM 1001: Intro to Comm
  • Learning: COMM 1001: Intro to Comm
  • Course Number: 1001
  • Subject Abbreviation: COMM
COMM 1002: Public Speaking
  • Learning: COMM 1002: Public Speaking
  • Course Number: 1002
  • Subject Abbreviation: COMM
3. Create a source learning achievement record. Create achievements that group individual courses together. | Field | Source Achievement | Target Achievement A | Target Achievement B | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Name | GBCC Writing Bundle (101 & 102) | CC English Core (1001 & 1002) | CC Comm Core (1001 & 1002) | | Record Type | Achievement Group All | Achievement Group All | Achievement Group All | | Issuer | Greenwich Bay Community College | Connected Campus | Connected Campus | | Field of Study | English | English | Communication | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the Achievement Group All record type if an applicant is to complete every course (AND condition) linked to that achievement. Use the Achievement Group record type, or any designated OR record type if any one course in the group satisfies the requirement. 4. Link the learnings to the achievements by using learning outcome items. | Learning (Master) | Learning Achievement (Parent) | Minimum Numeric Grade | Minimum Letter Grade | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | English Composition 1 | GBCC Writing Bundle (101 & 102) | 8 | B | | English Composition 2 | GBCC Writing Bundle (101 & 102) | 8 | B | | ENGL 1001: Writing I | CC English Core (1001 & 1002) | – | TC | | ENGL 1002: Writing II | CC English Core (1001 & 1002) | – | TC | | COMM 1001: Intro to Comm | CC Comm Core (1001 & 1002) | – | TC | | COMM 1002: Public Speaking | CC Comm Core (1001 & 1002) | – | TC | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Minimum grade information is required only on the source records. 5. Create a learning equivalency record. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | GBCC to CC Multi-Path Writing Agreement | | Type | General | | Start Date | 12/01/2025 | 6. Create learning equivalency achievement mappings. | Learning Equivalency Achievement Mapping | Learning Equivalency | Source Achievement | Target Achievement | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | GBCC to CC Mapping 1 | GBCC to CC Multi-Path Writing Agreement | GBCC Writing Bundle | CC English Core (1001 & 1002) | | GBCC to CC Mapping 2 | GBCC to CC Multi-Path Writing Agreement | GBCC Writing Bundle | CC Comm Core (1001 & 1002) | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The same source achievement is used in both the learning equivalency achievement mappings. If one source can lead to multiple target options, create multiple learning equivalency achievement mapping records pointing to the same source, but different targets. 7. Publish and activate the learning equivalency. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | GBCC to CC Multi-Path Writing Agreement | | Active | True | | Published | True | # Set Up Learning Foundation Item Record Page Configure the record page for the learning foundation item object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learning foundation item record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_foundation_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning foundation item object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_foundation_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning foundation record page to show highlights and details. - **[Activate the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_foundation_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning foundation item object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, add components to it. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learning foundation record page to show highlights and details. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learning Foundation Item record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_foundation_item.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column. Be sure to remove the **Related** tab (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). # Set Up Learning Objects in Education Cloud If a required field on a target object doesn’t have the corresponding lookup in the source object, the migration run fails. Create dummy records on such target objects to avoid failures due to unavailable lookup fields. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Learnings**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For name, enter Dummy, and then save your changes. 4. Similarly, create dummy records on Learning Program, Learning Program Plan, Learning Achievement, and Learning Outcome Item. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note When you create dummy records for the child objects, learning program plan, and learning outcome item, associate them with the dummy records of the parent objects, learning program, and learning achievement, respectively. # Set Up Learning Outcome Item Record Page Configure the record page for the learning outcome item object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learning outcome item record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_outcome_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning outcome item object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_outcome_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning outcome item record page to show details and related lists. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_outcome_item_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning outcome item object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learning outcome item record page to show details and related lists. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learning Outcome Item record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_outcome_item.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2) - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning Outcome Item**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Outcome Item Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Learning Program Plan Record Page Configure the record page for the learning program plan object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learning program plan record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning program plan object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning program plan record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning program plan object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learning program plan record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learning Program Plan record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_program_plan.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5) - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning Program Plan**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Program Plan Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Learning Program Plan Requirement Record Page Configure the record page for the learning program plan requirement object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learning program plan requirement record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning program plan requirement object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning program plan requirement record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_plan_requirement_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning program plan requirement object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learning program plan requirement record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learning Program Plan Requirement record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_program_plan_requirement.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning Program Plan Requirement**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Program Plan Requirement Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Learning Program Record Page Configure the record page for the learning program object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the learning program record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
- **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning program plan requirement object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Learning Program Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning program record page to show details, related lists, activity, notes, and files. - **[Finish the Learning Program Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_program_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning program plan requirement object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Learning Program Record Page Add components to the learning program record page to show details, related lists, activity, notes, and files. Add the components as shown in this screenshot. ![Learning program record page layout template with callouts on the components to add to the page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning_program.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you add components to the record page. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). 1. Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). 2. Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). 3. Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). 4. Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). 5. Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Change the tab names to Activity and Notes & Files (5). 6. Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). 7. Click **Notes & Files** and add the **Related List - Single** component (7). For Related List, select **Notes**. 8. Add another **Related List - Single** component below Notes (7). For Related List, select **Files**. 9. Save your work. ## Finish the Learning Program Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Enable Notes To show the Notes related list on the record page, enable Notes. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Notes, and then select **Notes Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Notes**. 3. Save your changes. ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning Program**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Program Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). # Set Up Learning Record Page Configure the record page for the learning object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the learning record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the learning object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the learning record page to show details, related lists, and activity. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the learning object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the learning record page to show details, related lists, and activity. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Learning record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/learning.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4), - Drag the **Tabs** component to the right column. Remove one of the tabs and change the remaining tab name to Activity (5). - Click **Activity** and add the **Activities** component (6). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Learning**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Learning Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Location-Based Availability Complete these tasks to get location-based availability (flex scheduling) up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Time management has never been more challenging for support staff in higher education, because it's not just about coordinating when you can meet, but also where. - **[Location-Based Availability Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Appointment Location, Availability, and Availability Location objects were released with Student Success Hub 2.46 (Winter '21). - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Location-based availability requires access to the Availability, Appointment Location, and Availability Location objects. Support staff and students also need Edit access to Appointment Location and several other fields on the Appointment object. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Availability, Appointment Location, and Availability Location objects. - **[Add the Appointment Location Field to Appointment Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the Appointment Detail page layout to include the Appointment Location field. That way, everyone who views the Appointment Details—support staff in the app and students in the portal—can see where the appointment is taking place. - **[Understand Support Staff Users' First Experience with Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support staff users' first experiences with location-based availability depends on whether you manually enabled the new model in an existing org, or whether it's automatically enabled in a new org. ## Learn About Location-Based Availability Time management has never been more challenging for support staff in higher education, because it's not just about coordinating when you can meet, but also where. Location-based availability allows support staff to designate blocks of time to meet with students, and associate those availability blocks with one or more locations. For example, say an academic support staff member, Adrian Morges, works from home three days a week. When he's home, he can meet with students by phone (his mobile phone) and virtually, using the university's approved web-conferencing tool. One day a week he's on campus, where he can meet with students in-person in his office, by phone (his office or his mobile phone), or virtually. And on Fridays he has to juggle childcare and he never knows where he'll be, so scheduled appointments must be voice calls on his mobile phone. Adrian and support staff like him rely on the flexible scheduling made possible by associating their availability with specific locations—including virtual locations. Location-based availability uses these custom objects. Availability The Availability object stores blocks of time when a support staff member can meet with students. Each Availability record consists of a series of Event records and includes the type of availability, either walk-in, scheduled, or group. Appointment Location The Appointment Location object stores the locations where a support staff member can meet with students. Appointment Location records include such details as the type of location (in-person, phone, or virtual) and the information students need to attend the meeting. For example, phone locations include the phone number, in-person locations include the building and room name or number, and virtual locations include a meeting link. Availability Location A junction object, Availability Location associates a support staff member's Availability and Appointment Location records. Here's how these custom objects, shown in yellow, relate to one another and to the standard Salesforce Event and User objects, shown in blue. ![The lookup relationships between the Availability, Availability Location, and Appointment Location custom objects and the Event and User standard objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_erd_loc_based_avail.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note To ensure that location-based availability works as expected, do _not_ customize the Availability Location object beyond what's described in this setup article. ## Location-Based Availability Release Information The Appointment Location, Availability, and Availability Location objects were released with Student Success Hub 2.46 (Winter '21). To get location-based availability up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Location-Based Availability Location-based availability requires access to the Availability, Appointment Location, and Availability Location objects. Support staff and students also need Edit access to Appointment Location and several other fields on the Appointment object. See [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Location-Based Availability Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Availability, Appointment Location, and Availability Location objects. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Add the Appointment Location Field to Appointment Records Update the Appointment Detail page layout to include the Appointment Location field. That way, everyone who views the Appointment Details—support staff in the app and students in the portal—can see where the appointment is taking place. 1. In Setup, in Object Manager, click **Appointment**. 2. On the Page Layouts page, click the **Appointment Layout**. 3. Drag the **Appointment Location** field from the palette to the Information area of the Appointment Detail page. Place it below the End field. 4. Optionally, remove the Location field from the page. Or, you can wait and remove the Location field at a later time, when you're sure your support staff users don't have any legacy, Event-based appointments on their schedule. 5. Save your changes. ## Understand Support Staff Users' First Experience with Location-Based Availability Support staff users' first experiences with location-based availability depends on whether you manually enabled the new model in an existing org, or whether it's automatically enabled in a new org. After location-based availability is manually enabled in an existing org, Student Success Hub maps existing appointment locations (values from the Location text field on the Appointment object) to the location-based availability model. When support staff first visit their Availability Settings page post-enablement, they must acknowledge a message about the change. Then, they see their existing locations mapped to Appointment Location records whose Type is Other. Support staff need to review the migrated records, change their Type from Other to In Person, Phone, or Virtual as needed, and add any optional Additional Details. Existing recurring availability blocks remain in the old, text-based Location field. Optionally, support staff can update existing recurring availability blocks with the appropriate Appointment Locations. In an org with location-based availability automatically enabled, Student Success Hub provides two default Appointment Locations records whose Type is Other: one is named In Person and one is named By Phone. Support staff need to review these default Appointment Location records, change them to the correct Type, and add other details. After reviewing migrated or default Appointment Locations, support staff can create new Appointment Locations as well as new availability blocks associated with one or more Appointment Locations. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important When rolling out location-based availability in an existing org, give your support staff some advance notice and encourage them to dedicate some time to updating their Availability Settings. # Set Up Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education Leverage the power of Marketing Cloud Engagement with a prebuilt connector that retrieves up-to-date Education Cloud data for your marketing campaigns. Communicate efficiently with learners with out-of-the box templates to support your recruitment, admissions, and student success activities. Schedule automated emails to remind learners of upcoming application deadlines, or appointment confirmations after they schedule a meeting with your staff. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: Create a synchronized data source for Education Cloud, create automations to populate Education Cloud data extensions, and then schedule email campaigns. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm) # Set Up Mass Actions for Alerts Set up your support staff to use mass action buttons to create Cases and apply Success Plans for multiple Alerts. - **[Learn About Mass Actions for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_mass_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The sooner support staff know when a student is at risk—for failing a class, for missing a financial aid application deadline, or for something else—the sooner they can take action. Help your support staff act quickly on Alerts by using buttons to create Cases and Success Plans from multiple Alerts at once. - **[Add Mass Action Buttons to Alerts List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_mass_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The sooner support staff know when a student is at risk—for failing a class, for missing a financial aid application deadline, or for something else—the sooner they can take action. Help your support staff act quickly on Alerts by using buttons to create Cases and Success Plans from multiple Alerts at once. - **[Add Alert Mass Actions to Student Record Case Related Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_mass_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Starting with Student Success Hub 2.57 (Winter ’22), Student Success Hub includes the Create Case and Apply Success Plan buttons on the Student Record Lightning Case page layout that it installs. If you didn't install the layout or if you originally installed an earlier version of Student Success Hub, here's how to add the buttons manually. ## Learn About Mass Actions for Alerts The sooner support staff know when a student is at risk—for failing a class, for missing a financial aid application deadline, or for something else—the sooner they can take action. Help your support staff act quickly on Alerts by using buttons to create Cases and Success Plans from multiple Alerts at once. With the Create Case mass action button, support staff can select up to 50 Alerts, including Alerts of different record types, and then create a Case of the same record type for each Alert, all at one time. They can create Cases for record types that you, as admin, make available to them. With the Apply Success Plan mass action button, support staff can also select up to 50 Alerts of different record types, and then apply the same Success Plan Template to each Alert. The newly created Success Plans are related to the student record Case associated with the Alerts, and aren’t related to the Alerts themselves. Add the buttons to Alerts list views so that support staff can create Cases and apply Success Plans to multiple Alerts for multiple students at one time. And add the buttons to the Alerts tab of the Student Record Case page so that support staff can create Cases and apply Success Plans to multiple Alerts for the same student at one time. You can also add the Apply Success Plan button to Cases list views. See [Set Up Success Plans, Templates, and Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Success Plans up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important The mass action buttons on Alerts list views depend on a custom setting that's also used to mass update Alert statuses. So before you add the mass action buttons to Alerts list views, [enable mass updating of Alert statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get Alerts up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Add Mass Action Buttons to Alerts List Views The sooner support staff know when a student is at risk—for failing a class, for missing a financial aid application deadline, or for something else—the sooner they can take action. Help your support staff act quickly on Alerts by using buttons to create Cases and Success Plans from multiple Alerts at once. 1. Add the mass action buttons to Alerts list views. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Alert**. 2. On the Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic page, click the action menu for the List View row, and then select **Edit**. 3. Under Custom Buttons, add **Create Case** and **Apply Success Plan** to Selected Buttons. 4. Save your changes. 2. Give support staff access to the Visualforce pages needed to create Cases and apply Success Plans from multiple Alerts. 1. In Setup, on the support staff profile page, click **Visualforce Page Access**, and then click **Edit**. 2. Add **CreateCaseFromAlertMassAction** and **ApplySuccessPlanTemplateMassActionAlerts** to the list of Enabled Visualforce Pages. 3. Save your changes. 3. Verify and test the buttons. 1. Log in to the Student Success Hub app as a support staff user and select **Alerts** from the app navigation menu. 2. Select an Alerts list view such as **All** or **My Open Alerts**. 3. Look for the Create Case and Apply Success Plan buttons at the top of the page. 4. Test each button in turn by selecting the checkbox next to one or more Alerts and clicking **Create Case** or **Apply Success Plan**. 5. Fill out the details and save your changes. 6. Select **Cases** or **Success Plans** from the app navigation menu and confirm that the records were created. ## Add Alert Mass Actions to Student Record Case Related Lists Starting with Student Success Hub 2.57 (Winter ’22), Student Success Hub includes the Create Case and Apply Success Plan buttons on the Student Record Lightning Case page layout that it installs. If you didn't install the layout or if you originally installed an earlier version of Student Success Hub, here's how to add the buttons manually. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to any Student Record Case record. 2. Click ![A gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_icon.png) in the page header and select **Edit Page** to open the Lightning App Builder. 3. In the page canvas, select the tab for Alerts, and then select the **Unresolved Alerts** related list. 4. In the Alerts Related List properties pane, select **Show Apply Success Plan Button** and **Show Create Case Button**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Mentoring Set up Mentoring in Education Cloud to provide and manage mentoring benefits and programs that connect learners with mentors based on shared interests and goals.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permission Needed  
To enable and configure Mentoring:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
- **[Enable Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Mentoring to create and manage mentoring programs, to strengthen relationships between mentors and mentees, and to assign benefits. - **[Dependent Features for Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable features to get all functionalities of the Mentoring app. - **[Set Up the Mentoring App Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Mentoring app home page to review mentoring information and manage mentor and mentee relationships. - **[Update Page Layouts for Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the benefit assignment and account record pages to be used with Mentoring. - **[External Sharing Settings for Mentoring](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_mentoring.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The external sharing settings specified in your org-wide defaults apply to users with a Customer Community Plus license. See Set Your External Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults. ## Enable Mentoring Use Mentoring to create and manage mentoring programs, to strengthen relationships between mentors and mentees, and to assign benefits. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important You must enable Education Cloud before you can enable Mentoring. After you enable Mentoring, you can't disable it. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on Mentoring. ## Dependent Features for Mentoring Enable features to get all functionalities of the Mentoring app. | Dependent Feature | How the feature helps | | --- | --- | | Discovery Framework | Create and manage assessments. | | Interaction Summaries | Track meetings and sessions between mentors and mentees. | | Program and Benefit Management | Create mentoring programs and assign benefits to users. | | Record Alerts | Indicate what mentoring needs require attention now or soon. | | Timeline | See a history of mentoring activities. | See Also: - [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes.") ## Set Up the Mentoring App Home Page Use the Mentoring app home page to review mentoring information and manage mentor and mentee relationships.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the Mentoring app home page: | Education Cloud Full Access | On the Mentoring home page, facilitators can see benefit assignments, benefit providers, and daily and upcoming tasks. They can also manage the assessments that are used for the mentoring program. ![Mentoring app home page layout with callouts for each section](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_home.png) - See benefit assignment records that don't have a mentor assigned to the enrollee (1). - See records for users who serve as mentors and the type of benefit that they provide to mentees (2). - See the tasks that are due today. Click **View All** to see all tasks (3). - Manage the assessments that are used to connect a mentee with a mentor (4). Use Lightning App Builder to set up the Mentoring home page. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Mentoring**. 2. From Setup, find and select **Lightning App Builder**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select **Home Page**, and then click **Next**. 5. In Label, enter Mentoring, and then click **Next**. 6. Click **Clone Salesforce Default Page**. 7. Select **Mentoring App Home Page**, and then click **Done**. 8. Make any additional configurations, and save your changes. ### Considerations for Benefit Assignments List Views Enabling Mentoring creates the Unmatched Benefit Assignment list view for the Benefit Assignment object. This list view shows all benefit assignments where provider offering isn't specified. To include fields from the Benefit object, add that list view to the Mentoring home page and add filters to match your Mentoring benefits. If you delete the Unmatched Benefit Assignments list view and replace it with a different list view, the Mentoring app home page doesn't show a list view for benefit assignments. If the list view gets deleted, create a list view and make sure that you set these parameters. 1. Set the API name to UnmatchedBenefitAssignments. 2. Make sure that all users can see the new list view. 3. For Filter by Owner, select **All Benefit Assignments**. 4. Add a filter. 1. For field, select **Provider**. 2. For operator, select **equals**. 3. Leave the value unspecified. See Also: - [Create or Clone a List View in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.customviews_lex.htm&type=5) ## Update Page Layouts for Mentoring Configure the benefit assignment and account record pages to be used with Mentoring. ### Create a Benefit Page Layout for Mentees Create a page layout for the Benefit object to use in the mentee Experience Cloud site portal. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Benefit**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **New**. 3. From Existing Page Layout, select **Benefit Layout**. 4. Enter a name, such as Mentee Benefit Layout. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click **Buttons**. 7. Remove all buttons from the page layout, and then save your changes. 8. Click **New Page Layout Assignment**, and then click **Edit**. 9. Select your mentee profile. 10. From Page Layout To Use, select your mentee benefit page layout, and then save your changes. ### Add Provider Field to the Benefit Assignment Page Layout A mentoring facilitator can match a mentor and mentee by specifying the contact value for the provider field on the benefit assignment record page. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Benefit Assignment**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **Benefit Assignment Layout**. 3. Click **Fields**, and then drag **Provider** to the Benefit & Enrollment Details section. 4. Save your changes. ### Update the Person Account Record Page Add related lists that support Mentoring to the account record page. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Person Account**. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **Person Account Layout**. 3. Click **Related Lists**, and then add these related lists to the page layout. - Person Contact - Provider Offerings - Person Contact Program Enrollments - Program Enrollments 4. Save your changes. ## External Sharing Settings for Mentoring The external sharing settings specified in your org-wide defaults apply to users with a Customer Community Plus license. See Set Your External Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults. Update the external sharing settings for the objects that are used in the Mentoring app. See Also: | Object | Access Type | | --- | --- | | Action Plans | Private | | Assessment | Private | | Assessment Question | Public Read Only | | Assessment Question Set | Public Read Only | | Benefit Type | Public Read Only | | Benefit Assignment | Private | | Person Public Profile Preference Set | Private | | Program | Public Read Only | | Provider Offering | Private | | Service Resource | Public Read Only | | Unit of Measure | Public Read Only | - [Set Your External Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_owd_external_setting.htm&type=5) # Set Up Mentoring Facilitators Create a permission set and set sharing rules to provide mentoring facilitators with the access that they need to support your mentoring program.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To manage Mentoring facilitators: | Education Cloud Full Access | ## Create Permission Set for Mentoring Facilitators 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. In Education Cloud Full Access permission set, click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label and an API name for your mentoring facilitator permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click your mentoring facilitator permission set. 6. Click **App Permissions**. 7. Click **Edit**, select **Run Flows**, and then save your changes. 8. Click **Permission Set Overview**, and then click **Object Settings**. 9. Click **Action Plans**, and then click **Edit**. 10. From Object Permissions, select **View All Records**. 11. Save your changes. 12. Similarly, set permissions for these objects. - Assessment - Assessment Question - Assessment Question Set - Benefit Type - Constituent Role - Program - Provider Offering - Unit of Measure Assign the new permission set to your mentoring facilitator public group. See Also: - [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&type=5) ## Create a Public Group for Mentoring Facilitators 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Public Groups, and then select **Public Groups**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a label, such as Mentoring Facilitator. 4. From the Available Members list, select the members who you want to assign to the group, and then move them to the Selected Members list. 5. Save your changes. ## Create Sharing Rules for the Mentoring Facilitator 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. For Program Enrollment Sharing Rules, click **New**. 3. In Label, enter Active Program Enrollment Sharing. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 4. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 5. For criteria, set these values. 1. From Field, select **Is Active**. 2. From Operator, select **equals**. 3. From Value, select **True**. 6. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select your mentoring facilitators public group. 7. From Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 8. Save your changes. 9. For Benefit Assignment Sharing Rules, click **New**. 10. In Label, enter Benefit Assignment Mentoring. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 11. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 12. For Criteria, set these values. 1. From Field, select **Status**. 2. From Operator, select **equals**. 3. From Value, select the status fields. 13. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select your mentoring facilitators public group. 14. From Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 15. Save your changes. 16. For Benefit Type Sharing Rules, click **New**. 17. In Label, enter Benefit Type Mentoring. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 18. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 19. For Criteria, set these values. 1. From Field, select **Status**. 2. From Operator, select **equals**. 3. From Value, select the status fields. 20. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select your mentoring facilitators public group. 21. From Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 22. Save your changes. 23. For Document Clause Sharing Rules, click **New**. 24. For Label, enter Document Clause Mentoring. Press Tab to automatically fill the Rule Name field. 25. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 26. For Criteria, set these values. 1. From Field, select **Status**. 2. From Operator, select **equals**. 3. From Value, select the status fields. 27. From Share with, select **Public Groups**, and then select your mentoring facilitators public group. 28. From Access Level, select **Read/Write**. 29. Save your changes. # Set Up My Appointments Header Set up the My Appointments Header Lightning web component on your learner portal so students can schedule appointments.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up My Appointments Header:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences
Before you begin, set field-level security access to the fields that are necessary for portal users to book appointments. See [Set Field-Level Security for Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_portal_user_perms_appt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a permission set that gives portal users read and edit access to the fields that they need to book appointments."). 1. [Set up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_scheduler.htm&language=en_US). 2. Set up My Appointments Header on your learner portal: 1. In Setup, find and select **All Sites**. 2. Create or select a site. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). 3. Click **Components**, and then drag My Appointments Header to your preferred location on the page. 4. Apply other customizations as necessary, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&language=en_US). 3. If present, select the My Appointments component and delete it. # Set up National Change of Address Provider Set up your Melissa Data SmartMover license for US or Canadian addresses. Similarly, set up your contract with Data8 for UK addresses. ## Obtain and Set up a Melissa Data SmartMover License To use National Change of Address features, purchase your own Melissa Data [SmartMover](https://www.melissa.com/resources/data-sheets/pdf/des-ncoalink-pp.pdf) license: 1. Obtain a Smart Mover license by emailing NCOASalesForceActivation@MelissaData.com. 2. You will receive a Melissa Data user ID. 3. A Melissa Data representative will send you a Postal Acknowledgment Form to fill out and return. Once you have your Melissa Data user ID, add it to Data Integrity: 1. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher Icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), search for and click **Data Integrity**. 2. Click the **Settings** tab. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the National Change of Address Provider section, enter your Melissa Data user ID into the license ID field. 5. Click **Save**. ## Set up a Contract with Data8 To use National Change of Address features for addresses in the UK: 1. Set up your contract with Data8 by emailing clientservices@data-8.co.uk. 2. You will receive a Data8 Client ID, Client Secret, and a Workflow Name. Once you have your Data8 credentials, add the information to Data Integrity: 1. From the App Launcher ![App Launcher Icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-insights_platform-264-0-0-production-enus/b395891b-0de5-4183-969e-3a0bd782bfe8/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png), search for and click **Data Integrity**. 2. Click the **Settings** tab. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the National Change of Address Provider section, enter the values for Data8 Client ID, Client Secret and Workflow Name. 5. Click **Save**. # Set Up New Features and Activate Major Releases Learn how to activate an EDA release for the latest release enhancements and bug fixes. - **[About EDA Releases and Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.set_up_new_features_and_activate_major_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We release major new versions of EDA three times a year. In addition, every two weeks we release minor updates (bug fixes and enhancements), with occasional exceptions for holidays and major Salesforce releases. - **[Activate a Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.set_up_new_features_and_activate_major_releases.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** EDA administrators have until the next major release to set up new features and activate the current release. ## About EDA Releases and Versions We release major new versions of EDA three times a year. In addition, every two weeks we release minor updates (bug fixes and enhancements), with occasional exceptions for holidays and major Salesforce releases. We use the standard versioning convention in which the number to the left of the dot identifies the major release and the number to the right of the dot identifies the minor release. So for example, 2.x is newer than any version numbered 1.x, and 2.24 is 21 releases newer than 2.3. See our article, [Keep Up with Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) for more information on releases and release dates. ## Activate a Release EDA administrators have until the next major release to set up new features and activate the current release. Many new features and enhancements in major releases are behind a release gate. Release gates allow us to upgrade your instance to the most recent version of EDA while keeping selected (gated) functionality from going live in your org. With release gates, your orgs always get the push upgrade, and you can control when you activate the functionality that's behind the gate. When we push a major release to Sandbox, we activate the current release on all sandboxes that are still on the previous release. See our article, [Keep Up with Salesforce.org Releases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_keep_up_w_rels.htm) for more information on releases and release dates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Not every release will have gated features. Be sure to read the EDA release card in the Release Management section of Education Cloud Settings. Here's how to set up new features and activate a release. 1. On the day of the major Sandbox release, go to the Education Cloud Settings page and click **Go to Release Management** to read about the new features. Think about and plan for the best time to set them up. 2. Before the next major Sandbox release, follow the links from the EDA Release Manager to the documentation and in your sandbox environment complete the required setup tasks for each new feature or enhancement. If desired, further customize the feature for your institution. Not every new feature requires setup. When setup is required, however, you might need to perform one or more of these tasks. - Set or verify object and field permissions for system administrator and other profiles - Assign Apex class access to profiles - Configure sharing settings for relevant objects - Configure record types and picklists - Configure object tabs, related lists, and list views - Create or customize Lightning record pages or Lightning components - Complete other, feature-specific setup tasks 3. When all gated features are configured in your sandbox environment, on the Education Cloud Settings page, in the Release Management component, click **Activate Current Release**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_important.png) Important Be sure you're ready to activate when you click the button. Once a release is activated, it can't be deactivated. 4. Verify that everything works as expected in Sandbox. 5. In Production, repeat the configuration and activate the release. Then verify that everything works as expected in Production, too. It's important to complete all required setup for each release's new features even if you don't intend to use the features in your org. Security settings are especially critical to keep up-to-date. _Setting up new features within one major release and keeping security settings current helps prevent your users from experiencing errors_. # Set Up Outreach Source Codes in Education Set the outreach source code parameters and generation formula. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up outreach source codes:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then select **Outreach Source Codes**. 2. To set the parameters for unique outreach source code URLs, set custom objects and fields for the UTM Source, UTM Medium, and UTM Campaign parameters. Though you can select your preferred settings, the suggested settings are: - For UTM Source, select Outreach Source Code for the custom object and SourceCode for the custom field. - For UTM Medium, select Outreach Source Code for the custom object and MessageChannel for the custom field. - For UTM Campaign, select Campaign for the custom object and Id for the custom field. 3. Turn on Outreach Source Code Generation. The Code Formula Structure section opens. 4. Set the outreach source code formula structure. 1. Select the reference fields that you want to use in the code. 2. Choose the function category for the code generation formula. 3. Select the function for the formula. If a function isn’t available in the list, use a custom formula field that has access to all functions, and reference that custom field in the formula editor. 4. Choose an operator for the formula. This formula determines how the automatically generated source codes are structured. For example, to automatically generate source codes that identify the platform for the message channel and the campaign name, use this formula: IF(ISBLANK({MessageChannelPlatform}), {Campaign.Name}, {MessageChannelPlatform}) + SUBSTR({Name}, 0, 4). Using this formula, the outreach via an Instagram® ad for the Chameleon Fun Run campaign generates InstagramCham for the outreach source code. 5. Continue to add references, functions, and operators until your formula contains all the information that you want to capture in the code. 6. To confirm that your formula is valid, click **Validate Syntax**. If there are errors in your syntax, fix your formula before you save the formula. 7. Save your changes. Outreach source codes are now generated automatically and are formatted according to your selections. # Set Up Outreach Source Codes in Nonprofit Set the outreach source code parameters and generation formula. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up outreach source codes:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Fundraising, and then select **Outreach Source Codes**. 2. To set the parameters for unique outreach source code URLs, set custom objects and fields for the UTM Source, UTM Medium, and UTM Campaign parameters. Though you can select your preferred settings, the suggested settings are: - For UTM Source, select Outreach Source Code for the custom object and SourceCode for the custom field. - For UTM Medium, select Outreach Source Code for the custom object and MessageChannel for the custom field. - For UTM Campaign, select Campaign for the custom object and Id for the custom field. 3. Turn on Outreach Source Code Generation. The Code Formula Structure section opens. 4. Set the outreach source code formula structure. 1. Select the reference fields that you want to use in the code. 2. Choose the function category for the code generation formula. 3. Select the function for the formula. If a function isn’t available in the list, use a custom formula field that has access to all functions, and reference that custom field in the formula editor. 4. Choose an operator for the formula. This formula determines how the automatically generated source codes are structured. For example, to automatically generate source codes that identify the platform for the message channel and the campaign name, use this formula: IF(ISBLANK({MessageChannelPlatform}), {Campaign.Name}, {MessageChannelPlatform}) + SUBSTR({Name}, 0, 4). Using this formula, the outreach via an Instagram® ad for the Chameleon Fun Run campaign generates InstagramCham for the outreach source code. 5. Continue to add references, functions, and operators until your formula contains all the information that you want to capture in the code. 6. To confirm that your formula is valid, click **Validate Syntax**. If there are errors in your syntax, fix your formula before you save the formula. 7. Save your changes. Outreach source codes are now generated automatically and are formatted according to your selections. # Set Up Page Layouts for Transaction Journal Records Configure your own page layout for the Transaction Journal object to best fit your users' needs, and assign them to your user profiles.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create page layouts: | Customize Application | | To assign page layouts: | Manage Profiles and Permission Sets | ## Configure Page Layouts 1. From the object management settings for transaction journal, go to **Page Layouts**, and then click **New**. 2. Enter a page layout name, and then save your changes. 3. We recommend that you add at least these fields and any custom fields that you added: - Accrual Journal Entry - Booking Date - Created By - Credit Amount - Comment - Debit Amount - Due Date - External Transaction ID - Fund Account Value - General Ledger Code - Journal Type - Last Modified Date - Payment Date - Payment Method - Transaction Amount - Write Off Journal Entry ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note The Booking Date is the transaction date of the transaction journal record. ![Example page layout for transaction journal records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/accounting_subledger/images/tj_page_layout.png) 4. Save your changes. ## Assign Page Layouts 1. If you're not already on the Page Layouts page, from the object management settings for transaction journal, go to **Page Layouts**, and then click **Page Layout Assignment**. 2. Click **Edit Assignment**. 3. From the **​​Page Layout To Use** dropdown list, select the page layout that you created. 4. Select the rows for all profiles that can view transaction journal records. 5. Save your changes. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layout.htm&type=5). # Set Up Pathways Complete these tasks to get Pathways up and running in your Student Success Hub higher ed org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Pathways Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Like Student Success Hub, Pathways is a managed package. Version 1.1 was released with Student Success Hub 2.21. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub you originally installed. - **[Pathways Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Pathways, umbrella Plan Requirements must specify either a Program Plan or a Parent Plan Requirement. In EDA Settings, verify that users can specify one or the other, but not both. - **[Install the Pathways Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install Pathways manually if you originally installed an earlier version of Student Success Hub. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Pathways requires access to these objects. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For Pathways, we recommend modifying your default organization-wide default sharing settings for these objects. - **[Prepare Your School’s Data for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Pathways, your org needs records for Courses, Plan Requirements, Program Plans, and Terms. - **[Make Program Plans Available to Support Staff and Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update your app and portal to allow support staff and students to view Program Plans in a summarized component. - **[Make Personal Program Plans Available to Support Staff and Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update your app and portal to allow support staff and students to build Personal Program Plans to explore different scenarios for completing Program Plans and achieving their degree. ## Pathways Release Information Like Student Success Hub, Pathways is a managed package. Version 1.1 was released with Student Success Hub 2.21. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The tasks required to set up Pathways are listed here in the order in which you should complete them. Some of the tasks are quite complex, so sometimes we link to other, standalone articles for detailed instructions. ## Pathways Prerequisites To use Pathways, umbrella Plan Requirements must specify either a Program Plan or a Parent Plan Requirement. In EDA Settings, verify that users can specify one or the other, but not both. 1. On the Education Cloud Settings tab, in Education Data Architecture, click **Settings**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t see the Education Cloud Settings tab, learn how to configure it in [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm) in the EDA documentation. 2. In EDA Settings, verify that Plan Requirement Hierarchy is selected. If it's not, click **Edit**. 3. Select **Plan Requirement Hierarchy**. 4. Save your changes. ## Install the Pathways Package Install Pathways manually if you originally installed an earlier version of Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Pathways package installs automatically with Student Success Hub 2.21 and later. 1. Go to the [Pathways installer page](https://install.salesforce.org/products/pathways). 2. Log in to the correct Salesforce org. 3. Wait for the installer to retrieve information about your org. 4. Click **Install**. The installation may take a while. Check your email for confirmation that the installation was successful. ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Pathways Pathways requires access to these objects. - Account - Contact - Course - Course Bookmark - Personal Program Plan - Personal Program Plan Course - Personal Program Plan Term - Plan Requirement - Program Enrollment - Program Plan - Term For the required object and field permissions, see [Configure Support Staff Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give support staff the object and field permissions they need to use Pathways in Student Success Hub."), [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."), and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Pathways For Pathways, we recommend modifying your default organization-wide default sharing settings for these objects. - Account - Course Bookmark - Personal Program Plan - Plan Requirements and Program Plan - Program Enrollment For details, see [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Prepare Your School’s Data for Pathways To use Pathways, your org needs records for Courses, Plan Requirements, Program Plans, and Terms. See [Create Your School's Data for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Course, Term, Program Plan, and Plan Requirements data for Pathways to use."). ## Make Program Plans Available to Support Staff and Students Update your app and portal to allow support staff and students to view Program Plans in a summarized component. See [Set Up Pathways to View Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to view Program Plans and Program Enrollments in Student Success Hub."). ## Make Personal Program Plans Available to Support Staff and Students Update your app and portal to allow support staff and students to build Personal Program Plans to explore different scenarios for completing Program Plans and achieving their degree. See [Set Up Pathways to Build Personal Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_build_personal_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to create Personal Program Plans in Student Success Hub."). # Set Up Pathways to Build Personal Program Plans Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to create Personal Program Plans in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Give Support Staff Access to Personal Program Plans in the App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_build_personal_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you give support staff access to Program Plans, give them the ability to create Personal Program Plans. - **[Give Students Access to Personal Program Plans in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_build_personal_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you give students access to Program Plans, give them the ability to create Personal Program Plans. ## Give Support Staff Access to Personal Program Plans in the App After you give support staff access to Program Plans, give them the ability to create Personal Program Plans. See [Set Up Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Pathways up and running in your Student Success Hub higher ed org."). ### Add a Program Plans Related List to the Student Record Case To let support staff create a new Personal Program Plan for a student, add a Program Plans related list to the Student Record Case. 1. From any Student Record Case, click the gear icon and select **Edit Page**. 2. Select the Tabs component and add a new tab with a custom tab label called Program Plans. Customize this label as you see fit—just try to keep it short so that it fits easily on the page. 3. Click **Done**. 4. Select the tab you just created and drag the **Personal Program Plans Related List** component to the tab. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also add this component to other places, such as in a standard navigation app on the Contact page. ### Add Plan Builder to the Personal Program Plan Record Page 1. From any Student Record Case, click the gear icon and click **Edit Page**. 2. Select the Tabs component and add a new tab with a custom tab label called Plan Builder. Customize this label as you see fit. 3. Click **Done**. 4. Select the tab you just created and drag the **Plan Builder** component to the tab. 5. Save your changes. 6. Return to the tab you created and select **Plan Builder** as the Default Tab. 7. Save your changes again. ### Add Personal Program Plans to the Student Success Hub App To let support staff view all the Personal Program Plans they have access to, add the Personal Program Plans item to the navigation menu. 1. Verify that your support staff profile has access to the Personal Program Plans tab. 2. Add the Personal Program Plans item to the app. See [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). ## Give Students Access to Personal Program Plans in the Portal After you give students access to Program Plans, give them the ability to create Personal Program Plans. See [Set Up Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Pathways up and running in your Student Success Hub higher ed org."). 1. Set up the Plan Builder page. 1. In Experience Builder, from the Pages menu, click **New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page** and choose a full-width column layout. 3. Click **Next**. 4. Name your page. We recommend naming it Plan Builder. 5. Drag the SSH Program Plan Builder component to the Content section. 2. Add the Plan Builder page to the navigation menu. 1. In Experience Builder, select the Navigation Menu component and in the property editor click **Edit Default Navigation**. 2. Click **Add Menu Item**. - For Name, enter a label, such as Plan Builder. - For Type, select **Site Page**. - For Page, select **Plan Builder**. 3. Click **Save Menu**. 3. Preview and publish your changes. 1. Click **Preview** to check out your changes before you publish. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To test the student experience with a Personal Program Plan, create a sample plan for a test student user. 2. To save your changes, click **Publish**. On the confirmation screen, click **Publish** again. # Set Up Pathways to View Program Plans Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to view Program Plans and Program Enrollments in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Give Support Staff Access to Program Plans in the App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Student Success Hub app to give your support staff access to a student's Program Enrollment and all the available Program Plans. - **[Give Students Access to Program Plans in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To set up Pathways in your student portal, create a page for Program Enrollments and Program Plans. - **[Personal Program Plan Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the limitations of personal program plans. ## Give Support Staff Access to Program Plans in the App Configure the Student Success Hub app to give your support staff access to a student's Program Enrollment and all the available Program Plans. ### Add a Program Plans Related List to the Student Record Case To let support staff quickly access a student's Program Enrollments, add a Program Plans related list to the Student Record Case. 1. From any Student Record Case, click the gear icon and click **Edit Page**. 2. Select the Tabs component and add a new tab with a custom tab label called Programs. 3. Select the Program tab and drag the Related List - Single component to the tab. 4. Configure the Related List - Single properties as follows: - Parent Record: Contact Name - Related List: Program Enrollments ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see this option in the dropdown, edit your Contact page layout in Setup and add the Program Enrollments related list. 5. Save your changes. 6. From the Object Manager in Setup, open your Contact page layout. This page might be the EDA Contact Layout or your custom page layout. 7. Click **Related Lists** in the palette and then click the wrench icon next to the Program Enrollments related list. 8. Add the **Program Plan** field to the Selected Fields and move it up to the top of the list. 9. Click **OK**, then click **Save**. ### Add Program Plans to the Student Success Hub App To let support staff view all the available Program Plans, add the Program Plans item to the navigation menu. 1. Verify that your support staff profile has access to the Program Plan tab. 2. Add the Program Plans item to the Student Success Hub app. For detailed steps see, [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). ### Update the Program Plan Record Page Edit the Program Plan page to add two Pathways components. 1. From the Program Plan record page, click the gear icon and click **Edit Page**. 2. Remove the Highlights Panel and replace it with the SSH Program Plan Highlights component. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note You can't customize the fields the Program Plan Highlights component displays. 3. Select the Tabs component and add a new tab with a custom tab label called Requirement Summary. 4. Select the Requirement Summary tab and drag the SSH Program Plan Summary component to the tab. 5. Save your changes. ## Give Students Access to Program Plans in the Portal To set up Pathways in your student portal, create a page for Program Enrollments and Program Plans. 1. Set up the Program Plans page. 1. In the Experience Builder, from the Pages menu, click **New Page**. 2. Select **Object Pages**. 3. Select **Program Plan** and click **Create**. 4. In the Pages menu, select **Program Plan Detail**. 5. If there are components already on the page, delete them. 6. Drag the SSH Program Plan Highlights component into the Content Header section. 7. Drag the SSH Program Plan Summary component into the Body section. 2. Add Program Enrollments and Program Plans to the navigation menu. 1. In Experience Builder, select the Navigation Menu component and in the property editor, click **Edit Default Navigation**. 2. Click **Add Menu Item**. - For Name, enter a label, such as My Programs. - For Type, select **Salesforce Object**. - For Object Type, select **Program Enrollment**. - For Default, select **All**. 3. Click **Add Menu Item**. - For Name, enter a label, such as All Programs. - For Type, select **Salesforce Object**. - For Object Type, select **Program Plan**. - For Default, select **All**. 4. Click **Save Menu**. 3. Preview and publish your changes. 1. Click **Preview** to check out your changes before you publish. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Log in to the portal as a student who has a Program Enrollment. From their Program Enrollment page, you can open the Program Plan page. Verify that your field level security is configured correctly for both pages. 2. To save your changes, click **Publish**. On the confirmation screen, click **Publish** again. ## Personal Program Plan Limitations Understand the limitations of personal program plans. Keep this limitation in mind when you use personal program plans. - Cloned personal program plans can't include placeholder courses. # Set Up Payment Methods Customize the Payment Method field to add the types of payments your organization receives. Donations come in many forms, from cash to stock to in-kind gifts, and some don’t even take the form of standard currency. GEM supports any kind of donated gift, but only a few are included by default. You can add more by customizing the Payment Method field. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click **Payment**. 4. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 5. Click **Payment Method**. 6. Scroll down to the Values related list and click **New**. 7. Enter values (one per line), then click **Save**. For more information, see [Add or Edit Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=updating_picklists.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. # Set Up Payment Plans To help students meet their payment commitments, offer flexible payment options that spread tuition across multiple installments and match their financial accounts and debt situations. Configure monthly, quarterly, or custom schedules that match your billing cycles and automate payment collection through integrated gateways. Your students track their plan status and upcoming auto-debits in real time from the learner portal. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up payment plans: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin: - [Turn on Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US) - Configure student financial account management options, [Prepare Your Org for Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_your_org_for_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable student financial account management options and configure the necessary permissions for students and staff."). To set up payment plans: 1. To define the frequency and count of payment installments, create a payment schedule distribution method. 2. To represent a payment plan option visible to students, create a payment schedule treatment record in the Draft status. 3. To link the payment schedule treatment to the payment schedule distribution method, create a payment schedule treatment detail record and activate the payment schedule treatment. See [Define Payment Plan Types to Create Payment Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.collections_create_payment_plan_types.htm&language=en_US). 4. To schedule payments at different times, create a payment schedule. 5. To process each item of payment, create a payment schedule item. See [Payment Schedules and Payment Schedule Items](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_payment_schedules_and_payment_schedule_items_auto_manual.htm&language=en_US). See Also: [Set Up Payment Plans to Manage Financial Hardships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.collections_setup_payment_plans_for_financial_hardships.htm&language=en_US) - **[Configure Automated Payment Collection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_automated_payment_collection.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To automatically process payments for your transactions, your admins set up a payment scheduler with specific filters, such as the desired run frequency and matching criteria. Payment batch runs process existing payment schedules and payment schedule items to collect the corresponding payments and then apply them to invoices based on the payment application level. # Set Up Permissions and Access Update object permissions for the profiles that you assign to your users so that they see the objects that they need. - **[Set Custom Object Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_set_up_permissions_and_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure profile access to custom objects for your educational institution. ## Set Custom Object Permissions Configure profile access to custom objects for your educational institution. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Next to the profile that you want to update, click **Edit**. 3. Under Custom Tab Settings, select **Default On** for the tabs that you want to make available to this profile from the App Launcher, navigation menus, and so on. 4. Under Custom Object Permissions, set the appropriate permissions. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Permissions and Access Restrict K-12 Architecture Kit users' access to tabs and objects. - **[Set Custom Object Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_set_up_permissions_and_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure profile access to custom objects for your educational institution. ## Set Custom Object Permissions Configure profile access to custom objects for your educational institution. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Next to the profile that you want to update, click **Edit**. 3. Under Custom Tab Settings, select **Default On** for the tabs that you want to make available to this profile from the App Launcher, navigation menus, and so on. 4. Under Custom Object Permissions, set the appropriate permissions. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce in Education Use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce to get insights into philanthropic and wealth data, answer questions about prospects, and create party philanthropic research profiles, research request cases, and research profile canvases in Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To set up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin
Before you begin, make sure to complete these prerequisites: - [Turn on Fundraising in your org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_enable_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising."). - [Turn on Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_turn_on_context_service.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Configure flows for Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_config_flows_research_profile_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management subagent uses flows to create research request cases and research profiles. Modify the existing flows based on your organization’s needs and specific business logic."). - Set up Agentforce for your [Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US) or [Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&language=en_US) org. 1. Create data to ground the agent responses. See [Grounding Data for Philanthropic Research Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_grounding_data_for_philanthropic_research_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create data that aligns with the philanthropic research topics to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs."). 2. Turn on Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce. 1. From Setup, find and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Turn on **Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce**. 3. Assign the necessary permissions to users. - Fundraising Access (Nonprofit users only) - [Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them.") (Education users only) - Agentforce for Fundraising Access - Context Service Runtime - Prompt Template User 4. [Create an agent from the Agentforce Employee Agent template.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US) As part of the setup process, customize your agent settings and add the [Philanthropic Research subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Leverage these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty."). For example, in **Settings**: - For Agent Details, enter a description: An AI assistant for philanthropic researchers and relationship officers. - For System, enter agent-level instructions: Help philanthropic researchers by creating philanthropic assessments, summarizing the philanthropic milestones and wealth capacities of prospects, answering related questions, and creating research profiles and research profile canvases in Slack. 5. [Remove any unnecessary subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_remove.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 6. [Provide users with access to the agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce in Nonprofit Use Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce to get insights into philanthropic and wealth data, answer questions about prospects, and create party philanthropic research profiles, research request cases, and research profile canvases in Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To set up Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin
Before you begin, make sure to complete these prerequisites: - [Turn on Fundraising in your org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_enable_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use Fundraising in your org, turn on Fundraising."). - [Turn on Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_turn_on_context_service.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - [Configure flows for Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_config_flows_research_profile_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Management subagent uses flows to create research request cases and research profiles. Modify the existing flows based on your organization’s needs and specific business logic."). - Set up Agentforce for your [Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US) or [Nonprofit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&language=en_US) org. 1. Create data to ground the agent responses. See [Grounding Data for Philanthropic Research Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_grounding_data_for_philanthropic_research_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create data that aligns with the philanthropic research topics to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs."). 2. Turn on Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce. 1. From Setup, find and select **Fundraising Settings**. 2. Turn on **Philanthropic Research Topics in Agentforce**. 3. Assign the necessary permissions to users. - Fundraising Access (Nonprofit users only) - [Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported products and editions for Fundraising. Then check out how your product handles permissions and how to assign them.") (Education users only) - Agentforce for Fundraising Access - Context Service Runtime - Prompt Template User 4. [Create an agent from the Agentforce Employee Agent template.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US) As part of the setup process, customize your agent settings and add the [Philanthropic Research subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_philanthropic_research_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Philanthropic Research subagents in Agentforce to optimize your philanthropic engagement and research efforts. Leverage these insights to tailor outreach, build personalized engagement strategies, and foster deeper relationships with donors and increase their loyalty."). For example, in **Settings**: - For Agent Details, enter a description: An AI assistant for philanthropic researchers and relationship officers. - For System, enter agent-level instructions: Help philanthropic researchers by creating philanthropic assessments, summarizing the philanthropic milestones and wealth capacities of prospects, answering related questions, and creating research profiles and research profile canvases in Slack. 5. [Remove any unnecessary subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_remove.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 6. [Provide users with access to the agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US). # Set up Predictive Insights using EPB Configure Einstein for Nonprofits to generate and display predictive insights using Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB). ## Configure Predictive Insights Ensure that user-level and object-level permissions are configured for Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB). Predictive scores are generated for your data in three stages: labeling, training, and scoring. **Labeling** Labeling starts automatically as soon as Einstein for Nonprofits installs. The Train Models? window pops-up after labeling is complete. 1. Navigate to the Einstein for Nonprofits app. 2. Click **Get Started** from the landing page. 3. Click the **Train Models** button on the Train Models? window. - The Train Models? window might not be visible immediately. You can see it after Einstein for Nonprofits has completed preparing your data for model training. - You must click the **Train Models** button to train the models for your org. Otherwise you will be prompted to do so repeatedly and won’t be able to generate predictions. - This action schedules a new Apex job which needs to be completed prior to the models displaying on EPB. The jobs are queued and might take some time to complete depending on which other processes are running in your org at that time. **Training** Training adds information to the models at the org level to help predict one-time donors, recurring donors and top donors. 1. Click the Einstein Platform tile to check if the models in EPB are in Pending state. 2. Wait for the models to transition to the Ready for Review state. - If the models failed because there is [insufficient data with less than 400 rows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5), then use [Backup Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_predictive_insights_using_backup_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how Einstein for Nonprofits uses Backup Models to generate predictive insights for your org.") to generate predictive insights instead.​ - ​The models continue to display a ​Model Failed​ status until the batch jobs are successfully run again, even if additional data is added. By default these jobs remain in a failed state for 1 month. **Scoring** Scoring adds percentile probability scores to each individual Contact record. 1. Select Enable from the drop-down menu for each model in EPB to turn on scoring. It might take up to 24 hours for scores to be displayed on individual Contact cards. You can’t generate predictions until models are trained. 2. Learn about [the required edition and permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder.htm&type=5) and [considerations for setting up EPB](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5) to add intelligence to your apps. You can [edit EPB predictions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_edit.htm&type=5) after they are live. However, editing a prediction isn't recommended because the edits are overwritten at the time of the next release. ## Display Predictive Insights Einstein for Nonprofits generates predictions about the likelihood to become a first time donor and the likelihood to become a recurring donor for all constituents. However, we only generate predictions about the likelihood to become a top donor for those constituents who have donated in the last three years. You can view predictive insights on the EPB dashboard or on the constituent’s Contact cards: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-einstein_for_nonprofits-264-0-0-production-enus/291bfb05-3242-402a-92b6-b757730f100a/images/icon_note.png) Note If a score is generated and then predictions are disabled, the prediction still persists on the Contact card. The likelihood of the insights being stale is high. - View the results on the [Einstein Prediction Builder scorecard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_scorecard.htm&type=5) after your prediction finishes building. - View predictive insight percent probability scores on each constituent’s Contact card. Modify the page layout for the Contact object to show these scores by using Custom Lightning Web Components. # Set Up Program Term Application Timeline Record Page Configure the record page for the program term application timeline object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To set up the program term application timeline record page: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_program_term_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the program term application timeline object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_program_term_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to the program term application timeline record page to show highlights, details, and related lists. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_program_term_application_timeline_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the program term application timeline object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add components to the program term application timeline record page to show highlights, details, and related lists. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Program Term Application Timeline record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/program_term_application_timeline.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Highlights Panel** component to the top section (1). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the left column (2). - Click **Details** and add the **Record Detail** component (3). - Click **Related** and add the **Related Lists** component (4). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. ### Activate Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Program Term Application Timeline**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Program Term Application Timeline Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Prospect Record Page Configure the prospect record page for the account (person account) object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the prospect record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
- **[Create a Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_prospect_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a record page for the account object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Add Components to the Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_prospect_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add and configure Lightning Web Components to the prospect record page. - **[Finish Page Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_prospect_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ## Create a Record Page Create a record page for the account object in Lightning App Builder. See [Create and Configure Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages.htm&type=5). After you create the page, move on to the next section to add components. ## Add Components to the Record Page Add and configure Lightning Web Components to the prospect record page. Add the components as shown in this template. ![Prospect record page template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/prospect_record_page.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag a **Flexcard** component (1) to the left and enter the Flexcard Name as EDUAdmissionsPersonProfileCard. - Drag a **Timeline** component (2) to the left (below the flexcard). If you are unable to view the component, see [Set Up a Timeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.timeline_client_information.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Action Launcher** component (3) to the top section. To configure this component, see [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Tabs** component (4) below the Action Launcher. In the component properties to the right, create these tabs, and then configure them: - Details: Add and configure the **Record Detail** component here. See [Record Detail](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.rss_record_detail.htm&type=5). - Related: Add and configure the **Related Lists** component here. See [Record Related List](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?language=en_us&id=sf.rss_record_related_list.htm&type=5). - Schedule Appointment: Add the **Flexcard** component here, and configure it with the Flexcard name as EDUSchedulerScheduleAppointment. - Engage: Add and configure the **Actionable List Engagement** component here. See [Actionable List Engagement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.actionable_list_engagement.htm&type=5). - Drag a **Flexcard** component (5) to the right and enter the Flexcard Name as EDUAdmissionsRFIListFromAccountContainer. - Drag the **Actions & Recommendations** component (6) to the right (below the flexcard). After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Finish Page Setup Finish configuring the record page, and then activate it. ### Activate the Record Page After you configure your page, make it visible to your users. See [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5). ### Edit Page Layout To prevent duplication, we recommend that you remove **Notes & Attachments** from the Related Lists component. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Select **Account**. 3. Click **Page Layouts** and click **Account Layout**. 4. Click **Related Lists** under Account Layout and remove **Notes & Attachments**. 5. Save your changes. # Set Up Pulse Checks Configure your org preferences and object sharing settings to enable pulse checks. - Student Success is enabled in your org. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm). - Discovery Framework is enabled in your org. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes.").
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up Pulse Checks:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences
1. Enable Pulse Checks in your org: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud and select it. 2. Turn on Pulse Checks. 2. Provide access to the assessment question object: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings and select it. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Configure the access: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Assessment Question | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | 3. Use sharing sets to provide your Experience site users access to these objects: | Object | Access Level | | --- | --- | | Assessment Envelope | Read/Write | | Program Enrollment | Read Only | See [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm). 4. To enable recurring pulse checks, use the Orchestration Flow for Recurrence Scheduler flow template to create a flow, and then activate it. See [Activate the Recurrence Schedule Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_action_plans_admin_activate_recurring_schedule_flow.htm). 5. Designate the default workflow user: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Process Automation Settings and select it. 2. Select the default workflow user. 3. Save your changes. 6. Create a permission set for your portal users so they can access the pulse checks and submit their responses: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets and select it. 2. Click **Clone** next to Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the permission set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Click your permission set. 6. Click **Object Settings**. 7. Click **Omni Processes**, and then click **Edit**. 8. Enable read access for these fields: Active, Language, SubType, Type, and Web Component Enabled. 9. Save your changes. 10. Assign the new permissions set to your portal user group. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). 7. Add pulse checks to your learner portal, so learners can view the pulse checks assigned to them and submit their responses. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites and select it. 2. Select a site, or click **New** to create one. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm). 3. Click on the Action Center component to select it. 4. On the Action Center dropdown menu, select **Pulse Checks** if it’s not enabled. 5. Apply additional customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm). # Set Up Queue Management Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Queue Management Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue management was released with Student Success Hub 2.20. - **[Queue Management Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're implementing queue management in conjunction with Support Pools, set up Support Pools first. Also, if you want students to be able to schedule appointments with support staff in an unassigned Support Pool, create a predefined case team. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the required object accesses for queue management. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the relevant objects. - **[Update the Status Field on the Case Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue management uses a Support Queue Case record type to track student requests to meet with a support staff member. To move a Case through a queue, update the Status field on the Case object with new picklist values. - **[Create a Support Process for the Queue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use queue management, create a support process that specifies the Case Status values used for queuing cases. - **[Create the Support Queue Case Page Layout](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides a Support Queue Case layout that you can use as is or customize. Learn how to create and assign the included layout. - **[Create the Support Queue Case Record Type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Support Queue Case record type represents a student's request to meet with someone during walk-in hours or at a front desk, such as a one-stop center. When a student is added to a queue, a Case record is created using this record type. The Support Queue Case, or queuing case for short, tracks the student's progress through the queue. This queuing case might result in an appointment or it might be fulfilled more simply, for example, if the student just needs a copy of their transcript. - **[Configure the Support Queue Case Record Type for Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign the Support Queue Case record type to the profiles of users who need to add students to queues. - **[Create Lightning Record Pages for Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To let your support and front-desk staff work with queues, create Lightning record pages for Support Pools and Support Queue Cases. If you want to use queue management for an individual support staff member's walk-in hours, update the User record page, too. - **[Manage the SSH Queuing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings map your Support Queue Case record type and queuing Case Status values to the fields used in queue management. - **[Configure Queue Topics and Subtopics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Queue management uses Topics and Subtopics that are stored in the Queue Topic Setting object. - **[Create a Queue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to complete setting up queue management. ## Queue Management Release Information Queue management was released with Student Success Hub 2.20. To get queue management up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don’t know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The tasks required to set up queue management are listed here in the order in which you should complete them. Sometimes we link to other, standalone articles for detailed instructions. ## Queue Management Prerequisites If you're implementing queue management in conjunction with Support Pools, set up Support Pools first. Also, if you want students to be able to schedule appointments with support staff in an unassigned Support Pool, create a predefined case team. We'll show you how to set up queue management assuming you're using them with Support Pools. See [Set Up Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get Support Pools up and running in your Student Success Hub org."), [Get Started with Support Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn the many ways that Student Success Hub helps you support students."), and [Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Queue Management Review the required object accesses for queue management. Set up access to these objects: - Appointment - Case - Queue Topic Setting - Queue Waiting Room Resource - Role Topic Setting - Support Pool - Topic - User Topic Setting For the required queue management object and field permissions, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Queue Management Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the relevant objects. - Case - Queue Topic Setting - Role Topic Setting - Support Pool - Topic - User Topic Setting For details, see [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Update the Status Field on the Case Object Queue management uses a Support Queue Case record type to track student requests to meet with a support staff member. To move a Case through a queue, update the Status field on the Case object with new picklist values. Student Success Hub provides Status values for moving Case records through a support queue in higher ed orgs. Here's how to create the values that Student Success Hub installs. 1. From the Object Manager in Setup, click **Case**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, then **Status**. 3. In the Case Status Picklist Values list, click **New**. 4. Enter the Status values you want to use for your queuing cases. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The values you specify here are used in the [SSH Queuing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and other queue management configurations. If you want to use different values to align with your queue management process, that's no problem. You also don't have to set the statuses to a Closed value if that doesn't align with your process. We recommend the following. Queued The student has been added to the queue. Ready The support staff member is ready to meet with the student. The student is notified or called in the waiting room. Abandoned The student never showed after being notified that the support staff member was ready to meet. By default, this status is a Closed value. Referred The queuing Case is closed and an appointment was created. The student and support staff member are now meeting, or a future appointment has been scheduled. By default, this status is a Closed value. Depending on how you want to implement queue management, you might not want to make this a Closed value. Fulfilled The queuing Case is closed and the student's request is addressed. This value can be used when the Case doesn't result in an appointment—for example, when a student just wanted a copy of their transcript—or after an appointment when the support staff member confirms the student's issue is resolved. By default, this status is a Closed value. 5. Save your changes. 6. Edit the values, such as Fulfilled, that you want to set as Closed. ## Create a Support Process for the Queue To use queue management, create a support process that specifies the Case Status values used for queuing cases. Student Success Hub provides a process, called Support Queue, that you can use as a starting point. However, it requires customization. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Support Processes**. 2. Click the **Support Queue** support process name, if available. Otherwise, click **New**. 3. For a new process, enter a Support Process Name, such as Support Queue, and then click **Save**. 4. Move only the [queuing Case Status values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") to the Selected Values list. 5. For the Default value, select **Queued**. 6. Save your changes. ## Create the Support Queue Case Page Layout Student Success Hub provides a Support Queue Case layout that you can use as is or customize. Learn how to create and assign the included layout. 1. From the Object Manager in Setup, click **Case**. 2. Click **Case Page Layouts**, then **New**. 3. For Page Layout Name, enter Support Queue Case Layout, then click **Save**. 4. Edit the standard buttons on the page to include only Edit and Change Owner. 5. Create sections on the page that contain these fields.
Section Fields

Who Needs Assistance?

Contact Name, Student ID, Proxy, Proxy Name, Web Name, Web Email, Web Phone

What Do They Need Help With?

Topic, Subtopic, Subject, Description

Reporting & Administrative Details

Status, Priority, Support Pool, Case Origin

System Information

Created By, Last Modified By
6. Remove Mobile Cards. 7. For Related Lists, include Activity History, Appointments, Notes, and Open Activities. 8. Save your changes. Now, assign the page layout to your support staff and System Administrator profiles. 9. On the Page Layouts page for the Case object, click **Page Layout Assignment**, then click **Edit Assignment**. 10. Select the support staff and System Administrator profiles you're using and then select the Support Queue Case Layout from the Page Layout to Use menu. 11. Save your changes. ## Create the Support Queue Case Record Type The Support Queue Case record type represents a student's request to meet with someone during walk-in hours or at a front desk, such as a one-stop center. When a student is added to a queue, a Case record is created using this record type. The Support Queue Case, or queuing case for short, tracks the student's progress through the queue. This queuing case might result in an appointment or it might be fulfilled more simply, for example, if the student just needs a copy of their transcript. Student Success Hub provides the Support Queue Case record type. If you need to create it, here's how. 1. From the Object Manager in Setup, click **Case**. 2. Click **Record Types**, then click **New**. 3. For Record Type Name, enter Support Queue. 4. For Support Process, select **Support Queue**. 5. Select **Active**. Don't worry about enabling the record type for profiles. We'll do that in a moment. 6. Click **Next**. 7. Assign a page layout. Select the **Support Queue Case Layout** and apply it to all profiles. 8. Save your changes. ## Configure the Support Queue Case Record Type for Profiles Assign the Support Queue Case record type to the profiles of users who need to add students to queues. For details, see [Assign Record Types for Appointments and Portals to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_record_types_appts_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Assign record types to support staff and student profiles for using appointments and portals in Student Success Hub orgs."). ## Create Lightning Record Pages for Queue Management To let your support and front-desk staff work with queues, create Lightning record pages for Support Pools and Support Queue Cases. If you want to use queue management for an individual support staff member's walk-in hours, update the User record page, too. Student Success Hub includes these Lightning record pages for you: Support Pool (for Support Pool records) and Support Queue (for Support Queue Case records). They use two custom components specifically for queue management: SSH Queue Quick Action and SSH Queue Case Actions. The main elements for the pages are outlined below. If this is your first time creating a Lightning record page, see [Additional Alert Setup for Earlier Versions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_alerts_earlier.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these Alert setup tasks if you originally installed Student Success Hub 1.7 or earlier."). The steps documented there are more detailed and are similar to the pages mentioned below. When you finish creating the pages, remember to activate them for the appropriate profiles and record types. ### Support Pools

Element

What to Specify

Type of page

Record Page

Label

Support Pool

Object

Support Pool

Page Template

Header and Right Sidebar

Top header region

Highlights Panel component

Main region

Tabs component with these tabs and components:

  • Details tab—Record Detail component

  • Related tab—Related Lists component

Right sidebar

SSH Queue Quick Add component

### Support Queue Cases

Element

What to Specify

Type of page

Record Page

Label

Support Queue

Object

Case

Page Template

Header, Subheader, Right Sidebar

Top header region

Highlights Panel component

Subheader region

Path component

  • Set the Format to Linear

  • Select Hide path update button

The Path component gives users a visual guide through the queue. Path uses the Case Status values you set up for queue management. Student Success Hub includes a Path for Support Queue Cases.

Tip
Tip The Path component works best with one Closed status. If this doesn't work for your queue management process, you can remove the component from the page.

If you need to create a Path manually, you can create one in Setup on the Path Setting page. See Guide Users with Path in Salesforce Help for more information. Here's what you'll need to set up a Path for queuing cases.

  • Path Name: SSH Queue Case Status

  • Object: Case

  • Record Type: Support Queue

  • Picklist: Status

Main region

Tabs component with these tabs and components:

  • Details tab—Record Detail component (set as the Default Tab)

  • Related tab—Related Lists component

Right sidebar

SSH Queue Case Actions component

### Users To use queue management for an individual support staff member, edit the standard Lightning record page for Users and add the **SSH Queue Quick Add** component. ## Manage the SSH Queuing Settings The SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings map your Support Queue Case record type and queuing Case Status values to the fields used in queue management. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to SSH Queuing Settings. 3. View the Default Organization Level Value settings and click **Edit**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For new installs, these settings are sometimes blank. If you don't see the Edit button, click **New** to auto-populate most fields with default values, then click **Save**. Then click **Edit** and proceed with the next steps. For a complete list of the settings, see [Student Success Hub Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings."). 4. For Support Queue Case Record Type, enter the Record Type Name (the API Name) for the [Support Queue Case record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") that you set up earlier. 5. For Support Queue Status fields, enter the values you defined earlier for the [Status field on the Case object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). 6. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For information on the waiting room and check-in fields, see [Set Up a Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Configure Queue Topics and Subtopics Queue management uses Topics and Subtopics that are stored in the Queue Topic Setting object. Queue Topic Settings allow you to restrict the Topics that appear for specific Support Pools. So before you can start using queues, [Set Up Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get appointment topics up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). ## Create a Queue Learn how to complete setting up queue management. Are you still with us? Congratulations, you made it to the last queue management setup task! It's finally time to create an actual queue so that support and front-desk staff can prioritize and assign queuing cases. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Queues**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Label, enter a name for your queue. For example, One-Stop Queue or Support staff member Walk-in Queue. 4. In the Supported Objects section, add Support Pool and Case to the Selected Objects list. 5. In the Queue Members section, add the users you want to manage the queue. 6. Save your changes. # Set Up Quick Document Verification Let verifiers and other members of your admissions staff verify application documents directly from the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components or the Document Checklist Item record page. From the Document Checklist Item record page, admissions staff can also upload new versions of documents and automatically see the updated document in the preview. - **[How Document Verification Works](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With the right permissions, Users see Accept and Reject buttons when viewing application documents. Clicking one of the buttons updates the Status field on the Document Checklist Item record. Keep in mind that once a User has the correct permissions, they see the document verification buttons on all Document Checklist Items. You can’t specify which Document Checklist Items show the buttons. - **[Verify Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure to assign your users the Document Checklist Item Layout - Admissions Staff page layout. Also make sure our Lightning record page for Document Checklist Items is the default page for the Admissions Connect app. - **[Configure Permissions and Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete the tasks to allow staff to use the verification buttons. - **[Set Up a List View for Rapid Document Verification](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let admissions staff verify documents in rapid succession using split view. Create a list view for Document Checklist Items that meet specific criteria, such as all Document Checklist Items with a Pending status. With split view open to your list view, staff can click each record and quickly accept or reject the documents. - **[Customize the Document Verification Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_doc_verification.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you want users to update the status of documents only when certain conditions exist, set up validation rules on the Document Checklist Item object. For example, set up a validation rule so that staff can only accept or reject Document Checklist Items with files attached or for Applications with a certain status. ## How Document Verification Works With the right permissions, Users see Accept and Reject buttons when viewing application documents. Clicking one of the buttons updates the Status field on the Document Checklist Item record. Keep in mind that once a User has the correct permissions, they see the document verification buttons on all Document Checklist Items. You can’t specify which Document Checklist Items show the buttons. When rejecting a document, staff members can select a reason the document was rejected and leave additional rejection comments. If you have an applicant portal, applicants see the rejection reason and rejection comments in the portal. You can't disable this visibility. After a document is accepted or rejected, admissions staff can change its status or upload a new file using the View Record button in the Application Checklist and Reviewer Application Reader components. ![Official Transcript requirement with Reject and Accept buttons](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_materials_reader_doc_verification_buttons.png) ## Verify Page Layouts Make sure to assign your users the Document Checklist Item Layout - Admissions Staff page layout. Also make sure our Lightning record page for Document Checklist Items is the default page for the Admissions Connect app. See [Set Up User Profiles for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create user profiles, set up app access, assign page layouts, and customize object and tab visibility.") and [Set Up Admissions Connect App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get started with the Admissions Connect app by assigning the default Lightning record pages and setting up the navigation menu."). ## Configure Permissions and Sharing Complete the tasks to allow staff to use the verification buttons. 1. Assign users the Admissions Connect - Access Apex Classes for Document Verification permission set. 2. Ensure the user has these additional permissions. - Read and Edit on the Document Checklist Item object - Read and Edit on these Document Checklist Item fields: Accepted, Rejection Comment, Rejection Reason, and Status - Read and Edit on the Action Plan object - Edit on the Action Plan object field Status 3. Ensure the internal sharing settings for Action Plans and Document Checklist Items are set to Public Read/Write. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If a user only has Read access on the Document Checklist Item object, the button to Accept a document still shows. However, when they click the button, they receive an error because they don’t have Edit access. If you don’t want all users to be able to edit Document Checklist Items, clone the existing Lightning record page layout, remove the Accept button from the Highlights panel, and then assign this new Lightning record page to those users. ## Set Up a List View for Rapid Document Verification Let admissions staff verify documents in rapid succession using split view. Create a list view for Document Checklist Items that meet specific criteria, such as all Document Checklist Items with a Pending status. With split view open to your list view, staff can click each record and quickly accept or reject the documents. ![Admissions Connect app showing split view for Document Checklist Items open while also viewing a Document Checklist Item record page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/dci_rapid_verificaiton_via_splitview.png) To set up a list view, see [Create and Customize List Views for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your staff stay focused by setting up list views that best support your institution’s application review process."). ## Customize the Document Verification Experience If you want users to update the status of documents only when certain conditions exist, set up validation rules on the Document Checklist Item object. For example, set up a validation rule so that staff can only accept or reject Document Checklist Items with files attached or for Applications with a certain status. For more information, see [Validation Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.fields_about_field_validation.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Without validation rules, users can accept and reject Document Checklist Items that don’t have a file attached. Lastly, consider customizing the picklist values for the Rejection Reason field or customizing the Reject action. # Set Up Record Alert Category in Education Cloud If you're migrating data from Student Success Hub, to use alerts in Education Cloud, create a record alert category for each record type on the alert object. 1. From the object management settings for alerts, go to Record Types. 2. Note all listed record types. 3. From Setup, click **Developer Console**. 4. Click **File**, and then click **Open**. 5. Under Entity Type, click **Objects**, select **RecordAlertCategory**, and then click **Open**. 6. Select the **Id**, **DeveloperName**, **SystemModstamp**, and **CreatedDate** fields. 7. Click **Query**, and then click **Execute**. 8. Create a record alert category for a record type on the alert object: 1. Click **Create New**. 2. Enter the required details for the record type and save your changes. The record names must match. 3. Similarly, create record alert categories for all the record types on the alert object. 9. To view the new records, on the Developer Console, click **Refresh Grid**. # Set Up Refund Management To automate the billing process and keep detailed records of your transactions, configure billing. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up refunds:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Education Cloud Student Financials Access

AND

Billing Operations User permission set

AND

Payment Operations User permission set
Before you begin: - [Turn on Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US) - Configure student financial account management options, [Prepare Your Org for Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_your_org_for_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable student financial account management options and configure the necessary permissions for students and staff."). - To automatically convert negative invoice lines into credit memo lines, make sure that your Billing admin turns on Convert Negative Invoice Lines to Credit Memo Lines. See [Set Up Credit Memo Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.billing_setup_credit_memo_features_enable.htm&language=en_US). To set up refunds: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under **Set Up Student Financial Account Management**, click **Configure Billing and Payments**. 3. To issue refunds to your customers when they reduce or cancel an order, turn on **Issue Refunds and Settle Balances**. 4. To select a credit application level, set **Credit and Payment Application Level**. 1. To apply credits to a specific line on invoices, select **Invoice Line**. 2. To apply credits to the total rolled-up balance of invoices, select **Invoice**. If your Salesforce org has the Revenue Management Billing license, the label of this setting is Credit and Payment Application Level. 5. To automate settlement of invoices by applying credits to posted invoices, turn on **Apply Credits to Posted Invoices**. # Set Up Registration Configure whether users can register themselves, or your staff creates credentials for them. - **[GM Configure Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_configure_selfregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Grants Management for self-registration by assigning a profile, enabling the feature, and assigning users to profiles and users to accounts. - **[GM Use Manual Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_manualregistration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Grants Management for manual registration by updating the contact page layout and creating a login for the grantseeker. # Set Up Reviewer Feedback Questions Configure the questions that you want your reviewers to consider when they assess applicants. - **[Learn About Custom Review Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help your institution find best-fit applicants, ask your application reviewers the right questions. That way, reviewers can align and focus on what matters most. - **[Create Custom Fields for Review Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From Setup, in Object Manager, create a custom field for each question that you want to ask on the Application Review object. - **[Create a Field Set for Your Review Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From Setup, in Object Manager, create a field set on the Application Review object for the custom fields you created. Follow the same steps you used to create field sets for Action Plan Items that are Tasks. - **[Associate Your Field Set with the Review Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit the default Application Review Lightning record page to configure the Reviewer Feedback component. - **[Configure Visibility Settings to Show Reviewers Specific Questions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_reviews_feedback_questions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To show specific questions to certain reviewers, customize the visibility settings of the Reviewer Feedback component in Lightning App Builder. For example, create different questions for undergraduate and graduate applications. Or maybe you want to show subject-specific questions to reviewers in the Computer Science department. Keep your filter logic for visibility settings simple. ## Learn About Custom Review Questions To help your institution find best-fit applicants, ask your application reviewers the right questions. That way, reviewers can align and focus on what matters most. To set up custom review feedback questions, create custom fields for your questions, add them to a field set, and then configure the Reviewer Feedback component to show the field set. You can even configure the component's visibility settings so that only specific questions show for certain reviewers or when the application meets specific criteria. For example, create a multi-picklist field called Core Skills and a picklist field called Writing Ability. ![Custom questions in the Reviewer Feedback component for Core Skills and Writing Ability.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_feedback_component_custom.png) ## Create Custom Fields for Review Questions From Setup, in Object Manager, create a custom field for each question that you want to ask on the Application Review object. For more information, see [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5). ### Considerations for Creating Custom Fields - To make sure reviewers enter a value for a field before they submit their recommendation, select **Required** when you define the field. See [Require Field Input to Ensure Data Quality](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.fields_about_universally_required_fields.htm&type=5). - Specify help text to provide reviewers with additional guidance for the question. For example, use help text to include details about how to use a rubric. - Formula, Time, and dependent lookup fields aren't supported in the component. - The component doesn't support individual record types. - Rich-text fields provide plain text entry in the component. ## Create a Field Set for Your Review Questions From Setup, in Object Manager, create a field set on the Application Review object for the custom fields you created. Follow the same steps you used to create field sets for Action Plan Items that are Tasks. See [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). ### Considerations for Creating Field Sets - The Comments and Admissions Recommendation fields always show in the component, even if you don't include them in the field set. If you do include these fields, the order you specify for them in the field set is what shows in the component. If you don't include them, the fields show in the component after the field set. - Don't add these Application Review fields in the field set as they show as read-only in the component: - Applicant - Application Review Name - Owner - Reviewer - Submitted ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note We also recommend you don't add Review End Date. Updating this field automatically submits and closes the review without the user clicking **Submit My Recommendation**. - You can specify a field in your field set as required, even if the field isn't universally required. - Fields from related objects, like Application, aren't supported. For example, if you add the Application Term field to the field set, the component shows an error. - Make sure to give your reviewers permissions to edit all the fields in the field set. Otherwise, the Reviewer Feedback component shows an error. ## Associate Your Field Set with the Review Component Edit the default Application Review Lightning record page to configure the Reviewer Feedback component. 1. From the Lightning App Builder page, click the **Reviewer Feedback** component. 2. In the properties pane, enter the API name of your field set into the Feedback Field Set property. 3. Save your changes. When you're done, open an Application Review record to see your questions in action. ### See Also: [Customize the Lightning Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize page layouts, record page components, and more to make it easy for your staff to access and manage applications.") ## Configure Visibility Settings to Show Reviewers Specific Questions To show specific questions to certain reviewers, customize the visibility settings of the Reviewer Feedback component in Lightning App Builder. For example, create different questions for undergraduate and graduate applications. Or maybe you want to show subject-specific questions to reviewers in the Computer Science department. Keep your filter logic for visibility settings simple. For quick setup, we recommend that you edit the default Application Review Lightning record page and add multiple instances of the Reviewer Feedback component to the page. Then configure visibility settings for each instance of the component. Alternatively, you can create multiple versions of the Application Review Lightning record page and assign each page based on user profiles. You can then also configure visibility settings for the component on each version of the page. If you use this approach, clone the default Application Review page to get started. To configure the visibility of each instance of the component on the page: 1. In the properties pane for the Reviewer Feedback component, under Set Component Visibility click **Add Filter**. 2. Under Filter Type, click **Advanced**. You can also set up filters based on the Application Review record fields and the device type. The advanced filters give you the most flexibility. 3. Under Field, click **Select**. 4. Select a field type, then a field. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Select **User** to filter by Department, Profile, Role, and License Type. Select **Permissions** to filter by standard and custom permissions. Select **Record** to filter by Application fields. 5. Click **Done**. 6. Select an Operator and enter a Value. 7. Click **Done**. 8. Save your changes. After you’re done, test thoroughly to ensure that the component displays only once on the page for each group of reviewers. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note To set up custom questions in reviewer portals, specify a field set for the Feedback Field Set property in Experience Builder. Then, use audiences to assign component visibility. Some visibility filters that are available in Lightning App Builder aren't available in audience filters for Experience Builder. ### See Also: [Dynamic Lightning Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.lightning_page_components_visibility.htm&type=5) # Set Up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, and configure sharing and permissions settings. Then, create the supporting data types for appointment data modeling.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Before you set up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, make sure that your admin has the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license assigned. - **[Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you set up the appointment feature, turn on Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud. - **[Enable Shifts in Scheduling Policy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Cloud uses shifts from the staff's service territory to determine their available time slots. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_sharing_appt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Control how staff members and learners access data with sharing settings. - **[Set Field-Level Security for Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_update_portal_user_perms_appt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a permission set that gives portal users read and edit access to the fields that they need to book appointments. - **[Assign Permission Sets to Appointment Users in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_perm_sets_appt_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create permission sets for appointments, assign them to your staff members and learners. # Set Up School Data Bring your institution’s data into Admissions Connect and set up your users to efficiently manage all of your admissions operations in one place. - **[Import Your Data into Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect gives you a complete view into your institution’s recruiting and admissions experience—from information about prospects and applicants, like their education history, to information about your institution, like degree programs and terms. - **[Create Users for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every person who uses Admissions Connect must have a User record in Salesforce. How you create your User records depends on who will be using Admissions Connect. Admissions staff or other people who work for your institution are internal users. These users can only use the Admissions Connect app. People who don’t work for your institution, like alumni reviewers or applicants, are external users. These users can only use an Experience Cloud portal. # Set Up Section Meeting Days for Advanced Search Provide students with a search field based on section meeting days. To use the Section Meeting Days field in Advanced Search, grant field access and update the day-of-week fields on course offering schedule records by modifying a flow. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To grant access to objects and fields: Education Cloud Full Access
To modify flows: Manage Flow
Before you start, [set up Advanced Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_advanced_search.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help students find course sections that meet their specific criteria by configuring Advanced Search. Then, make Advanced Search available on your Experience Cloud site."). 1. To make sure that students and staff can select meeting days in Advanced Search, give them access to the day-of-week fields on Course Offering Schedule. 1. From Setup, find and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select the cloned version of a permission set that you assign to students and staff who use Course Search. 3. Click **Object Settings**, select **Course Offering Schedules**, and then click **Edit**. 4. For Field Permissions, select **Read Access** for Is Monday, Is Tuesday, Is Wednesday, Is Thursday, Is Friday, Is Saturday, and Is Sunday. 5. Save your changes. 2. Modify the Student Information: Parse Recurrence Pattern flow to re-populate the day-of-week fields on existing course offering schedule records. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Student Information: Parse Recurrence Pattern**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label and API name. 5. Click the **Start** element. 6. In Set Entry Conditions, for Condition Requirements, select **None**. This change removes the formula in the original flow. Restore the formula after running the flow. 7. Save and activate the flow. 3. Update all existing course offering schedule records to trigger the flow and bulk update the day-of-week fields. Use Data Loader, an Apex script, or another method of your choice. 4. Restore the entry conditions in the Start element after the bulk update completes. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select the version of the Student Information: Parse Recurrence Pattern flow that you modified. 3. Click **Deactivate**. 4. Click the **Start** element. 5. In Set Entry Conditions, for Condition Requirements, select **Formula Evaluates to True**, and then enter the formula from the original flow. 6. Save and activate the flow. # Set Up Security Learn about security and permissions in Salesforce and the permission sets included in the Case Management managed package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_per_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Extend user access to the nonprofit Case Management managed package features by using permission sets. - **[Create Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_sharing_rules.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Some organizations use a model where case managers share ownership of the client relationship. In this model, a variety of case managers deliver services to a client during the service period. Create sharing rules to let different case managers edit a client's case-related data. # Set Up Security Configure the permissions in your org to give every user at your institution the right level of access. - **[EDA Security Model Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_security_model_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Designing your security and sharing model is an essential part of your implementation. Its many aspects are more than we can cover here. Controlling security in Salesforce takes a systematic, multi-layered approach at all levels of your org. However, we do highlight considerations for administrators managing sensitive student data. - **[Set Custom Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_set_custom_field-level_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update security permissions for the profiles that you assign to your users so that they have the access that they need. - **[Set Up Permissions and Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_set_up_permissions_and_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update object permissions for the profiles that you assign to your users so that they see the objects that they need. # Set Up Security Review the available Grants Management security settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Use Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the available permission sets in Grants Management and create permission sets for due diligence and budget management. - **[Set Field-Level Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure field-level security for grantmakers. - **[Grants Management Permissions Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find details about the Grants Management permission sets including object, field, Apex class, and Visualforce page access. # Set Up Security Controls Configure and assign permission sets and page layouts to give your users access to the information they need. As with any Salesforce implementation, you set up security in GEM so that users only have access to what's required to do their jobs. We recommend certain settings for profiles, permissions, and page layouts, based on what GEM requires for object, field, and app access.  We don't cover other security considerations, such as organization-wide defaults, sharing rules, or role hierarchies. It's up to you to determine what's appropriate for your institution's security model. - **[Set Up Gift User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_security_controls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Accounting Subledger and GEM Gift Entry permission sets to grant users access to gift entry objects and data. - **[Assign Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_security_controls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign permission sets to the users who you want to grant access to gift entry functionality. - **[Assign Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gem_set_up_security_controls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the page layouts that come with GEM and NPSP, and assign them to users based on the information they need to see and work with. ## Set Up Gift User Permissions Use the Accounting Subledger and GEM Gift Entry permission sets to grant users access to gift entry objects and data. Permission sets define how users access objects and data, and what they can do within the application. Each user in an org has only one profile, but you can assign a user multiple permission sets. GEM includes a single permission set, called Gift Entry, that grants access to GEM functionality. For more information on what's in this permission set, see [GEM Gift Entry Permission Set Contents](https://salesforce.quip.com/buchajzqynnb). You can't edit this permission set, but you can clone it and add more permissions to suit your organization's guidelines and regulations. Just be sure not to remove any of the included permissions. Assign the Accounting Subledger permission set, or a cloned version, to all GEM users. For more information about cloning or updating permission sets, see [Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=perm_sets_overview.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Assign Permission Sets Assign permission sets to the users who you want to grant access to gift entry functionality. After you've configured a permission set, assign it to users. Don’t forget, you can assign more than one permission set to a user. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the permission set you're assigning. 4. Click **Manage Assignments**. 5. Click **Add Assignments**. 6. Select the users being assigned. 7. Click **Assign**. 8. Click **Done**. ## Assign Page Layouts Learn about the page layouts that come with GEM and NPSP, and assign them to users based on the information they need to see and work with. As you prepare to work with data in your org, take care of a few page layout configuration and assignment tasks now so it’s easier to verify your data. You'll see how the provided page layouts display information about donors and donations. Later on, you can change these layouts or customize your own page layouts with fields and related lists provided by GEM. Here are the page layouts to assign: | Object | Page Layout | Assign to | | --- | --- | --- | | Contact | GEM Contact Layout | All record types for any user profiles needing to see donation information | | Account | GEM Household Layout | Household Account record type, any user profiles needing to see donation information | | Account | GEM Organization Layout | Other Account record types, any user profiles needing to see donation information | | Opportunity | GEM Gift Layout | All donation-related record types, any user profiles needing to see donation information | | NPSP Data Import | GEM Gift Layout | Any user profiles needing to see donation information | 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-gift_entry_manager-264-0-0-production-enus/06e55002-f089-4a3e-bc0c-67a1c776fdd3/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Click the **Object Manager** tab. 3. In the list of objects, click the name of the object you're configuring. 4. Click **Page Layouts**. 5. Click **Page Layout Assignment**. 6. Click **Edit Assignment**. Assign the appropriate page layout. 7. Click **Save**. 8. Click the **Object Manager** tab again. Repeat this process for the objects listed. # Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal Define the data that your portal users can access. - **[Understand the Basics of Portal Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The first step in setting up your portal is to design and implement a security model that works for your institution. There are a lot of ways to approach security. You’ll probably use a combination of org-wide default sharing settings, permission sets, sharing sets, and more. - **[Set Up Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Everyone who uses a portal must be identified as a User in your org. - **[Assign Permission Sets to Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A permission set is one way to assign object and field permissions so that reviewers and applicants can use Admissions Connect components in a portal. Permission sets can also control membership for your portal. - **[Update Org-Wide Default External Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sharing settings ensure that portal Users can see Application data and documents in the portal. The external sharing settings specified in your org-wide defaults apply to Users with a Customer Community Plus license. - **[Extend Record Access for Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up your org-wide default sharing settings, extend your sharing model for external Users to give them access to Applications, Application Reviews, and other EDA records as appropriate. You can use sharing sets, Apex managed sharing, or even manually share records. You want to ensure that applicants can only access their own application information and that external reviewers only see application information that they’re assigned to review. ## Understand the Basics of Portal Security The first step in setting up your portal is to design and implement a security model that works for your institution. There are a lot of ways to approach security. You’ll probably use a combination of org-wide default sharing settings, permission sets, sharing sets, and more. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Portals only support external users who don't work for your institution, like alumni reviewers and applicants. Make sure that your security model accounts for these users. This article will help you get started, but for detailed considerations on portal security, see [Secure Your Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_secure_community.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Set Up Portal Users Everyone who uses a portal must be identified as a User in your org. For instructions on how to create external users, see [Create Users for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Every person who uses Admissions Connect must have a User record in Salesforce. How you create your User records depends on who will be using Admissions Connect. Admissions staff or other people who work for your institution are internal users. These users can only use the Admissions Connect app. People who don’t work for your institution, like alumni reviewers or applicants, are external users. These users can only use an Experience Cloud portal."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note External Users must have a Customer Community Plus license. Don’t assign internal users a community-based license. Keep in mind that Customer Community Plus licenses require Roles to be associated with an Account. When portals support more than 50,000 Users at a time, consider optimizing Account Roles for external Users, if appropriate for your security model. The **Use person role for first site user in partner and customer accounts** setting controls this optimization and you enable it before creating your portal Users. Once you enable role optimization, portal Users that belong to Accounts owned by the same Salesforce User share the same role. This consideration makes role-based sharing risky because doing so means that portal Users can access each other’s records. If you plan to optimize Account Roles, we recommend that you don’t use role-based sharing. For full details, see [Optimize Account Roles to Improve Performance and Scale Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Also consider the limits on the number of Roles and community-based Users that you can have in your org. For limitation details, see [Communities User Licenses](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.users_license_types_communities.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Assign Permission Sets to Portal Users A permission set is one way to assign object and field permissions so that reviewers and applicants can use Admissions Connect components in a portal. Permission sets can also control membership for your portal. Each portal User must be assigned the required permission sets and an appropriate role-based permission set. Admissions Connect provides an unmanaged permission set for external reviewers (Admissions Connect - Review Applications for External Users) and applicants (Admissions Connect - Submit Applications). For detailed information about the required permission sets and how to assign them, see [Assign the Admissions Connect Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important The provided permission sets include the minimum required access to use Admissions Connect in a portal. These permission sets are unmanaged, which means you must keep them up-to-date, using the information in [Admissions Connect Permission Set Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution."). Don't forget that applicants and reviewers need field-level access for all the fields in Action Plan Items that are Tasks. If you plan to allow applicants to edit fields, make sure you grant Edit access, too. Add this access to the default permission sets, or create an additional permission set just for this access. Without access to these fields, portal Users see an error. Also make sure to review automation for Admissions Connect and your portal carefully, as additional User permissions can sometimes be required that aren't provided in our default permission sets. For example, if you allow applicants to create Application records and automation is triggered that assigns Action Plan Templates (including child Tasks and Document Checklist Items), additional Create and Edit permissions on various objects (such as Action Plan Templates, Action Plans, and Document Checklist Items) can be required. After you've assigned portal Users a permission set, you can use the permission set to control portal membership. For instructions, see [Add Members to Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_customize_members.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Update Org-Wide Default External Sharing Settings Sharing settings ensure that portal Users can see Application data and documents in the portal. The external sharing settings specified in your org-wide defaults apply to Users with a Customer Community Plus license. Review [Configure Sharing Settings for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Your organization-wide default sharing settings give you a baseline level of access for each object and enable you to extend that level of access to your Admissions Connect users.") to see our recommendations for external sharing settings. ## Extend Record Access for Portal Users After you set up your org-wide default sharing settings, extend your sharing model for external Users to give them access to Applications, Application Reviews, and other EDA records as appropriate. You can use sharing sets, Apex managed sharing, or even manually share records. You want to ensure that applicants can only access their own application information and that external reviewers only see application information that they’re assigned to review. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Our security recommendations assume that applicants don't own their Application record. If applicants do own their Application records, there's an increased security risk if you're using role-based sharing. ### For Applicants Here’s a sample sharing set for applicants that provides access based on the external User’s Contact record. | Object | Access Determined By | Access Level | | --- | --- | --- | | Application | User:Contact = Application:hed\_\_Applicant\_\_c | Read/Write | | Contact | User:Contact = Contact:Id | Read/Write | | Education History | User:Contact = Education History:hed\_\_Contact\_\_c | Read Only | | Relationship | User:Contact = Relationship:hed\_\_Contact\_\_c | Read Only | | Test | User:Contact = Test:hed\_\_Contact\_\_c | Read Only | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Typically, Application object access is required in all sharing sets for applicants. However, Education History, Relationship, and Test are just examples of Child Objects that could be specified in Application Material Type records. Make sure your sharing set includes object access for each Child Object in your Application Material Types, otherwise applicants see an error when viewing the portal. ### For External Reviewers We don’t have a sample sharing set for external reviewers. Instead, we recommend that you manually share records or use Apex managed sharing to ensure your external reviewers have access to the records they need. See Also: [Set Up Sharing Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help [Manual Sharing](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.granting_access_to_records.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help [Understanding Sharing](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_bulk_sharing_understanding.htm) in the Apex Developer Guide # Set Up Security for the Student Success Chatbot Decide how you want to manage the chatbot's permissions. - **[Determine Your Approach to Chatbot Security](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When setting up a chatbot in Einstein Bot Builder, always specify a Bot User. Just like a real user, the Bot User has a profile and associated permissions that determine what the chatbot can access and do. Here are the options that you can use to manage the chatbot's access. - **[Assign Chatbot Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Regardless of what security approach you choose, make sure that the Student Success chatbot and the System Administrator profile have these permissions. ## Determine Your Approach to Chatbot Security When setting up a chatbot in Einstein Bot Builder, always specify a Bot User. Just like a real user, the Bot User has a profile and associated permissions that determine what the chatbot can access and do. Here are the options that you can use to manage the chatbot's access. Use the Basic Chatbot User and permission set The Basic Chatbot User is provided as part of the core Einstein Bot functionality and doesn't use a Salesforce user license in your org. You won't see Basic Chatbot User listed on the Users page in Setup, because it's specific to Einstein Bots. The Basic Chatbot User is assigned the sfdc.chatbot.service.permset permission set. You can't assign any other permission set to it. If you have other bots or create new bots that also use the Basic Chatbot User, keep in mind that they all have access to all of the permissions in sfdc.chatbot.service.permset. To use the Basic Chatbot User with the Student Success chatbot, update the sfdc.chatbot.service.permset permission set with the [required Student Success chatbot permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Decide how you want to manage the chatbot's permissions."). Assign an existing User as the Bot User and use the person's permissions This approach lets you use an existing user's permissions and doesn't require you to use a license. The chatbot has the same permissions as the user. Emails sent from the chatbot will appear to be sent from this user. Create a custom User and use the default permission set or a custom permission set This approach gives you the most flexibility but requires that you use a Salesforce user license when creating the User record. If you want to create a custom permission set, we recommend that you clone the sfdc.chatbot.service.permset permission set. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When creating a new User or using an existing User, we recommend that the user have a Standard user license. The license must provide access to Flows and Tasks. ## Assign Chatbot Permissions Regardless of what security approach you choose, make sure that the Student Success chatbot and the System Administrator profile have these permissions. - Object Settings for Tasks - Assign Edit permission to the Status field - Assign Read permission to the Assigned To, Bot Messaging Remind Date, Bot Messaging Remind Today, and Subject fields - Object Settings for Contacts - Assign Read and Edit permissions for the object - Assign Edit permission to these fields: Bot Messaging Advanced Notice, Bot Messaging End Pause, Bot Messaging Opt-In, Bot Messaging Opt-In Date, Bot Messaging Opt-In Modified By - Assign Read permission to the Bot Messaging Allowed field - Object Settings for Success Plans - Assign Read and Edit permissions for the object - Assign Read permission to these fields: Created By, Is Case Student Record, Last Modified By, Open Tasks, Overdue Tasks, Owner, Plan Name, Record Type, Status, Student Contact, and Tasks - Assign Edit permission to these fields: Open Tasks, Overdue Tasks, Owner, Plan Name, Record Type, Status, Student Contact, and Tasks - System Permissions - Select the **Access Activities** option - Select the **Run Flows** option For more information about the custom fields that the chatbot installs, see [Configure the Student Success Chatbot's Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the chatbot's custom fields on the Contact and Activity objects."). # Set Up Service Territories for Education Cloud If you're migrating from Student Success Hub, to use group appointments with Education Cloud, configure service territories. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Service Territories**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter Default Campus as the name. 4. Select the operating hours: 1. Select **New Operating Hours**. 2. Enter Campus Operating Hours as the name. 3. Select the time zone and save your changes. 4. Select **Campus Operating Hours** as the operating hours. 5. Select **Active** and save your changes. # Set Up Skills in Education Cloud Create skills to identify your staff's area of expertise, and assign them so that learners can meet the staff members who are best suited for their needs. When you set up topic templates (work types), related the same skills to the relevant work types.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Create Skills in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_create_skills.htm&type=5) - [Assign Skills to Service Resources in Salesforce Scheduler](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_assign_skills.htm&type=5) - [Create Topic Templates for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling.") # Set Up SSH to Sync with Work Calendars Use Einstein Activity Capture with Student Success Hub (SSH) to keep your Microsoft or Google calendar in sync with Salesforce. - **[How is Calendar Data Synced?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** How data syncs between Salesforce and calendars depends on what changes are made and where they’re made. - **[Set Up SSH to Sync Calendars](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can sync work calendars to SSH, you need to enable Einstein Activity Capture and a custom setting. ## How is Calendar Data Synced? How data syncs between Salesforce and calendars depends on what changes are made and where they’re made. - Appointments made in Salesforce sync to the connected Microsoft® calendar or Google Calendar™. Appointments made in Microsoft or Google calendars don’t sync to the Salesforce calendar. - Updates to existing appointments sync in both directions regardless of which calendar the update was made in. - Deleted appointments are removed from both calendars regardless of which calendar the appointment was deleted from. - Einstein Activity Capture can sync Availability with Microsoft Exchange® accounts, but not with Google or Microsoft Outlook®. Availability created in SSH is a recurring event series. For more Availability sync options, try a third-party calendar sync solution that supports recurring events. ## Set Up SSH to Sync Calendars Before you can sync work calendars to SSH, you need to enable Einstein Activity Capture and a custom setting. - **[Enable Einstein Activity Capture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Einstein Activity Capture enables connection between Salesforce and your calendar applications. If this has been enabled previously, you can skip these steps. - **[Update SSH Hierarchy Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prevent duplicate appointments from appearing on Google calendar agendas. ### Enable Einstein Activity Capture Einstein Activity Capture enables connection between Salesforce and your calendar applications. If this has been enabled previously, you can skip these steps. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Einstein Activity Capture, then select **Settings**. 2. Click **Get Started**. 3. Read and accept the terms of service. 4. Click **Try Einstein**. 5. Choose your email and calendar service, then click **Next**. 6. Enter a unique name for your configuration. 7. Optionally, enter a description of your configuration, then click **Next**. 8. Review your sync settings for emails, events, and contacts, then click **Next**. 9. To remove deleted appointments from both synced calendars, instead of just from the calendar where the deletion occurred, choose **Remove deleted events** in the Events settings. 10. Review the rest of the advanced settings for Emails, Events, and Contacts, then click **Next**. 11. Choose the Users or Profiles that you want the configuration to apply to, then click **Next**. 12. If you have email addresses or domains that you’d like to exclude from calendar syncs and the activity timeline of related Salesforce records, add them. For more information on excluding addresses, read [Exclude Certain Emails and Events from Being Added to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.aac_add_excluded_addresses_for_org.htm&type=5). 13. Click **Next**. 14. Choose if you want users to share activities on the timeline of related Salesforce records, then click **Next**. 15. Click **Finish**. ### Update SSH Hierarchy Settings Prevent duplicate appointments from appearing on Google calendar agendas. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom settings, then select **Custom settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. At the bottom of the SSH Hierarchy Settings page do one of the following options: - Click **New** to provide settings for a user or profile - Click **Edit** next to the user or profile that you want to disable ICS file calendar attachments. 4. Select **Don’t attach ICS file for organizer** and save your change. 5. Repeat these steps for all users or profiles who sync their calendars to SSH. # Set Up Student Advising Topics in Agentforce Enable Student Advising Topics in Agentforce to answer and support advisors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
User Permissions Needed
To set up Student Advising Topics in Agentforce:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Agentforce for Education Cloud

AND

Prompt Template Manager

AND

Agentforce Default Admin

AND

Data Cloud Admin
1. Ensure that [Data Cloud for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US) is set up. 2. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US). 3. Turn on Student Advising Topics in Agentforce. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud, turn on **Student Advising Agent**. 4. Assign these permissions to users: Education Cloud Full Access, Prompt Template User, and Access Agentforce for Education Cloud. See [Assign Permission Sets to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&language=en_US). 5. If not done already, [create data to ground the agent's responses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_grounding_data_for_student_advising_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create data and knowledge articles that align with the student advising subagents to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs."). 6. Create a Data Cloud data model object (DMO) as the data source for the Find Campus Resources agent action. 1. [Create a custom DMO](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_custom_data_model_object.htm&language=en_US) with these values: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Object Label | Search Resource | | Object Category | Other | 2. Add fields with these values: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Search Resource ID | Text | | Name | Text | | Description | Text | | Additional Details | Text | | Usage Type | Text | 3. Enable **Primary Key** for Search Resource ID. 4. Save your changes. 7. [Create data streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US) from these objects and map them to the Search Resource object: Program, Involvement Group, Learning Course, Action Plan Template, and Care Plan Template. If needed, you can map data streams from additional Salesforce and external objects. 8. [Create a hybrid search index](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_search_index_easy_setup_search_index.htm&language=en_US) for the Search Resource object. A default retriever is created and can be viewed in Einstein Studio. 9. Configure the Get Campus Resources prompt template with the retriever. 1. In Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Under Prompt Templates, click **Get Campus Resources**. 3. Click **Save As**, and then click **Save as a New Version**. 4. Scroll to the end of the prompt, find \*\*Campus Resources\*\*, and delete the placeholder text for the retriever. 5. Click **Insert Resource**, select **Einstein Search**, and then select the retriever created in the previous step. 6. To view the retriever's template settings, click the retriever inserted in the prompt. 7. For Search Text, enter Input:Query. 8. Select the output fields. For example, select search record ID, chunk, and data source. 9. Enter the number of results. For example, enter 15. 10. Provide any other relevant details. 11. Save and activate the prompt template. 10. [Create an agent from the Agentforce Employee Agent template.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US) For example: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Advising Agent | | Description | An AI assistant for advisors, delivering student summaries, policy insights, campus resource recommendations, and automating next best actions. | | Role | Help student advisors by generating an advising summary for a student, answering questions by retrieving information from policy documents or campus resources, and automating administrative tasks by creating tasks and cases. | | Company | Connected University is a higher education institution with over 9,000 students, offering a range of undergraduate and graduate programs. | 11. Add the Student Advising and Campus Engagement topic to the agent. See [Add a Topic from the Asset Library](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_topics_add_standard.htm&language=en_US). 12. [Assign a data library to the agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_setup_data_sources.htm&language=en_US). 1. For Data Type, select **Knowledge**. 2. Under Identifying Fields, select **Summary** and **Answer**. 3. Under Content Fields, select all the fields. 4. Enable **Show Sources**. 5. Save your changes. 13. [Provide users with access to the agent.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US) 14. To ensure that the agent has access to the latest knowledge articles, [refresh your data streams in Data Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_stream_schedule.htm&language=en_US). See Also: - [Ground with Knowledge Using Retrieval Augmented Generation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.prompt_builder_ground_rag.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up Student Recruitment Agent Flows Clone and configure the Student Recruitment Agent flows for unauthenticated users.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To configure flows: | Education Cloud Full Access | There are two templates for creating the Student Recruitment Agent. All flows in the Student Recruitment - Authenticated template function without any configuration. To use the Student Recruitment - Unauthenticated template, clone and modify these flows. ## Clone Campaign, Person Account Processing, and Academic Interest Flows For unauthenticated users to access the Student Recruitment Agent, clone the EDU Admissions: Get Planned Campaigns, EDU Admissions: Process Person Account, and EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing flows. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Admissions: Get Planned Campaigns**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label and API name. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 7. Save and activate your flow. 8. Repeat this process for these flows. - EDU Admissions: Process Person Account - EDU Cloud: Inquiry: Academic Interest Processing ## Clone and Modify Create Campus Tour Registration Flow For unauthenticated users to access the Student Recruitment Agent, clone the EDU Admissions: Create Campus Tour Registration flow and replace the Process Account subflow element. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Admissions: Create Campus Tour Registration**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label and API name. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 7. Save your changes. 8. From the toolbox, select **DefaultUserOwnerId**. 9. In Value, enter the system admin user ID. 10. Click **Done**. 11. Replace the Process Person Account subflow element. 1. After the Process Person Account element, click **Add element**, and then select **Subflow**. 2. Select your new version of the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow. 3. Enter a label and API name. 4. Turn on incomingPersonAccount, and then enter {!PersonAccountDetails}. 5. Update the remaining elements in your flow to reference the new subflow element. 6. Delete the original Process Person Account subflow element. 12. Save and activate the flow. ## Clone and Modify Academic Interest and Create Inquiry Flows For unauthenticated users to access the Student Recruitment Agent, clone the EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest and EDU Admissions: Create Inquiry flows and replace subflow elements. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest**. 3. Click **Save As New Flow**. 4. Enter a label and API name. 5. Click **Show Advanced**. 6. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 7. Save your changes. 8. From the toolbox, select **DefaultUserOwnerId**. 9. In Value, enter the system admin user ID. 10. Click **Done**. 11. Replace the Process Person Account subflow element. 1. After the Process Person Account element, click **Add element**, and then select **Subflow**. 2. Select your new version of the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account subflow. 3. Enter a label and API name. 4. Turn on incomingPersonAccount, and then enter {!PersonAccountDetails}. 5. Update the remaining elements in your flow to reference the new subflow element. 6. Delete the original Process Person Account subflow element. 12. Replace the Process Academic Interest subflow element. 1. After the Process Academic Interest subflow element, click **Add element**, and then select **Subflow**. 2. Select your new version of the EDU Admissions: Process Academic Interest subflow. 3. Enter a label and API name. 4. Turn on academicTermId, and then enter {!AcademicInterestDetails} 5. Turn on incomingPersonAccount, and then enter {!ProcessPersonAccount.incomingPersonAccount}. Change the API name to match your new version of the subflow. 6. Turn on isNewPersonAccount, and then enter {!ProcessPersonAccount.isNewPersonAccount}. Change the API name to match your new version of the subflow. 7. Turn on selectedLearningProgramIds, and then enter {!learningProgramIds}. 8. Select **Manually assign variables (advanced)**. 9. For newAcademicInterestIds, enter {!academicInterestIds}. 10. Delete the original Create Academic Interest subflow element. 13. Save and activate your flow. 14. Repeat this process for the EDU Admissions: Create Inquiry flow. # Set Up Student Success Alerts Set up Student Success Alerts so your support staff can create and send alerts about students directly from Slack to SSH. - **[Student Success Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To create an alert, support staff fill out a form in Slack. The form allows users to enter details about the student and reason for the alert. SSA can also update the user about actions taken on the alert. - **[Tour the App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let’s explore how the Student Success Alerts Slack App works. - **[Before You Install Student Success Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To start using Student Success Alerts, make sure to have the latest version of Student Success Hub and the new Student Success Alerts managed package installed. - **[Set Up Slack and Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you can set up Student Success Alerts, your version of SSH needs to be up to date, and you need the SSA managed package installed. You also need your AE to provide Identity licenses, the Student Success Alerts Managed Package PSLs, and the Student Success Alerts Slack App PSLs for your SSA users. - **[Customize Alert Reasons](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** SSA comes with a standard set of reasons and a default record type for the alert. If these alert reasons don’t meet your needs, you can customize the list to include alert reasons that you define or to remove alert reasons from the list that you don’t need. You can also change the default record type for the alert reason. ## Student Success Alerts To create an alert, support staff fill out a form in Slack. The form allows users to enter details about the student and reason for the alert. SSA can also update the user about actions taken on the alert. When the user submits the Slack form, support staff see the new alert in SSH. Admins can assign specific support staff members to each student and the assigned staff member receives alerts about the student. Support staff then view the alert on the student’s Case record and take the necessary next steps to reach out to the student. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce makes privacy and data security a top priority. This value applies to SSA as it does to all Salesforce products. To learn more about Salesforce's commitment to privacy, read the [Privacy Information](https://www.salesforce.com/company/privacy/) page. ## Tour the App Let’s explore how the Student Success Alerts Slack App works. When you open the app, the first place you land is the Home tab. The tab includes the following information: - Create An Alert. Submits a new alert. - Manage Alerts. View all, unresolved, or resolved alerts that you created. On the Messages tab, create a new alert using the /student-alert command, read an onboarding message about how to use the app, and see your alert history. You also see details about your new alerts and alert status updates on this tab. On the About tab, get information about the app, an admin configuration option, an App Homepage option, and as with all tabs, create a new alert with the /student-alert command. ## Before You Install Student Success Alerts To start using Student Success Alerts, make sure to have the latest version of Student Success Hub and the new Student Success Alerts managed package installed. In addition to installing the latest managed packages, you need an appropriate license and permissions to use SSA. Users who have a Salesforce Platform (CRM) license won’t need another license to use SSA. Give users who don’t have read and write access to SSH, (likely faculty or teaching support staff) a courtesy Identity license that provides access to SSA. To get Identity licenses for your SSA users, contact your Account Executive (AE). All users also need Student Success Alerts Managed Package and Student Success Alerts Slack App permission set licenses (PSLs) and the Student Success Alerts permission set to use SSA. Work with your AE to get these two permission set licenses. The Student Success Alerts permission set is delivered with the latest managed package release. See [Keep Student Success Hub Up-To-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set Up Slack and Salesforce Before you can set up Student Success Alerts, your version of SSH needs to be up to date, and you need the SSA managed package installed. You also need your AE to provide Identity licenses, the Student Success Alerts Managed Package PSLs, and the Student Success Alerts Slack App PSLs for your SSA users. ### Step 1: Connect Slack to Salesforce and Add SSA For instructions, see [Enable Salesforce for Slack Integrations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=slack.slack_apps_enable.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When you're done, click the **Student Success Alerts** app in Slack. If you don't see the welcome message from Student Success Alerts on the **Messages** tab, refresh Slack. ### Step 2: Add the Permission Set Licenses to Users 1. In Salesforce, from Setup, search for Users and select **Users**. 2. Choose which kind of users you want to license for Student Success Alerts: - For users with Salesforce or Salesforce Platform licenses, click the user you want to provide with SSA access. - For users who don’t access Salesforce (like faculty members) create new users with a courtesy Identity license. Complete the next step from the new user’s setup page. 3. Click **Permission Set License Assignments**. 4. Click **Edit Assignments**. 5. Select **Student Success Alerts Managed Package** and **Student Success Alerts Slack App Permission Set Licenses**. 6. Save your changes. 7. Repeat these steps for all of your SSA users. ### Step 3: Assign Users to the Slack App Permission Set 1. In Salesforce, from Setup, search for Permission Sets and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Student Success Alerts User**. 3. Click **Manage Assignments**. 4. Click **Add Assignments**. 5. Select all users you want to allow to use the SSA Slack app. 6. Click **Assign**. 7. Review the list and click **Done**. ### Step 4: Invite Users to SSA 1. In your Slack app, click the name of your Slack Workspace, then choose **Settings & administration** | **Manage members**. 2. In the new window, select **Invite People**. 3. Enter the email addresses of the support staff you provided the SSA User permission set to. To expedite this process, you can copy and paste a comma separated list. 4. Make sure **Member** is selected as the invite type and click **Send**. Slack and Salesforce send emails to the support staff members to set up their accounts and connect the two apps. ### Step 5: Create Contact Records for Staff Users For each teaching staff user, create both a User record and a Contact record. The User record allows staff members to use the Slack app. The Contact record identifies the primary faculty of a given course. Create a contact record for each faculty member who’s assigned to the SSA permission set. Match these fields on the Contact record to the corresponding User fields: - First Name - Last Name - Email If your institution doesn’t manage their Courses, Course Offerings, and Course Connections in Salesforce, skip this step. If you don’t manage course information in Salesforce, Student Success Alerts won’t include the student’s course information. ### Step 6: Create Student Contact Records Each time a Student Success Alert is submitted in Slack, the student’s case record is updated in Salesforce. Read [Create Student Case Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_student.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create a Contact and Case record for each student in your Student Success Hub org.") for steps to create a student case record. ### Step 7: Route Alerts to Support Staff To route an alert to the appropriate support staff member, add the staff member to the student’s case record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t assign a support staff member to the student, the staff member who created the alert is assigned. Read [Create an Alert Assignment Rule](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use assignment rules to automatically assign Alerts to the most appropriate support staff User.") for details. 1. Go to the student’s Contact record. 2. Under Cases, select the student’s Case. 3. Open the **Team** tab. 4. Click **Add Member**, and add the individual support staff member or the support staff team. 5. Choose the **Case Team Role**. 6. Save your work. 7. Repeat these steps for all students. ## Customize Alert Reasons SSA comes with a standard set of reasons and a default record type for the alert. If these alert reasons don’t meet your needs, you can customize the list to include alert reasons that you define or to remove alert reasons from the list that you don’t need. You can also change the default record type for the alert reason. ### Provide Your Own List of Alert Reasons SSA includes nine options for alert reasons. You can customize the list to include alert reasons that you define or to remove alert reasons from the list that you don’t need. If you’re new to managing picklist fields, learn more with the [Picklist Administration](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/picklist_admin) on Trailhead. ### Set a Different Default Record Type for Alert Reason Salesforce sets the default record type for an SSA reason to Academic. Change the default record type for an alert reason to fit your institution’s needs. 1. From Setup, search for Profiles and select **Profiles**. 2. Click the profile that’s assigned to staff members who are SSA users. 3. Click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Alerts**. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Select another Record Type as the **Default Record Type**. 7. Save your changes. # Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app. - **[Configure Your Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Student Success Hub Home page to give your support staff what they need to get right to work. - **[Add Items to the App Navigation Menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, Student Success Hub includes key objects, such as Success Plans and Success Plan Templates, as items in the app navigation menu. Learn how to add other items to the menu, such as Alerts or Attendance Events, to give support staff access to the object's list views. - **[Optimize Tab Navigation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Specify how you want records to open in the app: as a top-level workspace tab or as a subtab of something else. For support staff working with multiple student records, we recommend that you customize how tabs display for certain objects to optimize for usability and clarity. - **[Add Notes to the Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Notes support continuity and provide shared historical context for the student and the success team. Student Success Hub uses Notes, Salesforce's enhanced note-taking tool, to allow support staff to create and manage notes that respect students' confidentiality rights. Give your support staff easy access to Notes by adding it to the utility bar. - **[Show Student IDs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most schools and universities assign a unique student ID to each student for identification purposes. It can be helpful for support staff to see the student ID with a student's name. Specify the Contact field to use for student ID so that student IDs can be displayed and searched in the app, such as when applying a Success Plan. - **[Confirm Admin Access to the SSH Settings Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To verify that certain features are enabled, you as an admin need access to the SSH Settings page. Support staff don't need access to this page. - **[Add a Custom Shortcut to an External System](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give support staff one-click shortcuts to student data that lives in an external system such as a Student Information System or a system such as Degree Works. Create a custom shortcut that lets support staff click a button to go directly from the Student Record Case to the student's record in that external system. Here's an example showing how to add a Degree Audit shortcut button to the highlights panel on the Student Record Case detail page. - **[Set Up a Knowledge Base in Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your institution uses Lightning Knowledge to maintain a library of content, you can add the Knowledge component to the Student Success Hub app. Making Knowledge readily accessible helps support staff find articles relevant to their student Cases from within the app. ## Configure Your Home Page Customize the Student Success Hub Home page to give your support staff what they need to get right to work. Student Success Hub provides higher ed orgs with a default Home page layout that includes the Today's Tasks, Today's Events, Chatter Feed, Recent Items, and the Students Not Served components. Customize it further, if desired, or customize whatever Home page layout you're using. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, click the app navigation menu and choose **Home**. 2. Click the gear icon and choose **Edit Page**. 3. Drag standard or custom components from the list on the left onto the page canvas and position them as desired. For example, add Today's Tasks, Today's Events, Chatter Feed, and Recent Items to the page. 4. Remove components you don't want on the page by clicking the trashcan icon on the unwanted component. For example, delete Quarterly Performance and Key Deals - Recent Opportunities if they're present. 5. Save your changes. 6. If you’re prompted to Activate the page, assign it to the Student Success Hub app, the support staff profile, and other profiles as appropriate. 7. Exit Lightning App Builder and verify that the page looks the way you want it to. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note For more information about customizing your Home page, see [Build a Custom Home Page for Lightning Experience](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/lightning_app_builder/lightning_app_builder_homepage) in Trailhead. ## Add Items to the App Navigation Menu By default, Student Success Hub includes key objects, such as Success Plans and Success Plan Templates, as items in the app navigation menu. Learn how to add other items to the menu, such as Alerts or Attendance Events, to give support staff access to the object's list views. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Student Success Hub and select **Edit**. 3. Click **Navigation Items**, then add the item you want to Selected Items. 4. Save your changes. After adding an object as a navigation item in the app, remember to set profile access for it. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. On the Object Settings page for the object, under Tab Settings, select **Default On**. ## Optimize Tab Navigation Specify how you want records to open in the app: as a top-level workspace tab or as a subtab of something else. For support staff working with multiple student records, we recommend that you customize how tabs display for certain objects to optimize for usability and clarity. For example, Case records open by default as workspace tabs. Unfortunately, the workspace tab label for Student Record Cases displays the Case number, and support staff likely won't recognize 00001003, for example, as student Stephanie. It's more helpful to make Cases open as subtabs of Contact records so that the Contact name displays in the top tab, the Student Record Case displays in one subtab, and the Contact displays again in another subtab. It can also be useful to show Alerts as subtabs of the Student Record Case. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Student Success Hub and select **Edit**. 3. On the Navigation Rules page, select the **Cases** object from the list. 4. Set Cases to open as Subtabs of Contact (Contact). 5. Select the **Alerts** object from the list. 6. Set Alerts to open as Subtabs of Student Record (Case). 7. Save your changes. ## Add Notes to the Utility Bar Notes support continuity and provide shared historical context for the student and the success team. Student Success Hub uses Notes, Salesforce's enhanced note-taking tool, to allow support staff to create and manage notes that respect students' confidentiality rights. Give your support staff easy access to Notes by adding it to the utility bar. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Student Success Hub and select **Edit**. 3. On the Utility Items page, click **Add Utility Item**. 4. Select **Notes**. 5. Save your changes and then click **Back** to return to Setup. 6. In the Student Success Hub app, verify that the utility bar shows Notes. You may need to refresh the page. ## Show Student IDs Most schools and universities assign a unique student ID to each student for identification purposes. It can be helpful for support staff to see the student ID with a student's name. Specify the Contact field to use for student ID so that student IDs can be displayed and searched in the app, such as when applying a Success Plan. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. For **Student ID Field**, specify the API name of the Contact field used to store student IDs. In higher ed orgs, Student Success Hub specifies Student\_ID\_\_c by default. In K-12 orgs, it specifies k12kit\_\_Student\_ID\_\_c by default. 5. Save your changes. In orgs that are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites, student IDs can also be searched in student lookup fields in these locations. - Add to Queue - Apply Success Plan - New Appointment - New Walk-In Student IDs also appear next to the student name in an Event's Subject line, in a support staff member's Calendar appointments when the support staff member owns the Event, and in the Attendee Snapshot in the Appointment Manager. ## Confirm Admin Access to the SSH Settings Page To verify that certain features are enabled, you as an admin need access to the SSH Settings page. Support staff don't need access to this page. 1. Review the default Tab Settings for your profiles. The SSH Settings tab should be set to Tab Hidden for all profiles except for the System Administrator profile. For the System Administrator profile, the Tab Setting should be Default On. Student Success Hub configures these Tab Settings on the support staff and System Administrator profiles it includes in higher ed orgs. If necessary, update your profiles. 2. To access the Installation Manager tab on the SSH Settings page, make sure that the Customize Application permission is enabled on your System Administrator profile. Customize Application is listed in System Permissions. Student Success Hub configures this permission on the System Administrator profile it installs. In addition, make sure that the System Administrator profile has access to these Apex classes: sfal.InstallerAuthorizationController, sfal.InstallerTypeSelectionController, and sfal.SalSettingsController. 3. If desired, add the SSH Settings item to the Student Success Hub app menu. For instructions, see [Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). In higher ed orgs, Student Success Hub includes SSH Settings in the app navigation menu. ## Add a Custom Shortcut to an External System Give support staff one-click shortcuts to student data that lives in an external system such as a Student Information System or a system such as Degree Works. Create a custom shortcut that lets support staff click a button to go directly from the Student Record Case to the student's record in that external system. Here's an example showing how to add a Degree Audit shortcut button to the highlights panel on the Student Record Case detail page. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Case**. 2. On the Buttons, Links, and Actions page, click **New Button or Link**. 3. Fill out the details. 1. Enter a Label, for example, Degree Audit, and press Tab to populate the Name field. 2. For Display Type, choose **Detail Page Button**. 3. In the text editor, enter the shortcut's target URL. To dynamically include student-specific data in the URL (such as a custom external ID), use the merge field options above the editor to insert merge field values from the Case, Contact, or other object. Remember to check your syntax. 4. Save your changes and click **OK** to acknowledge the reminder to add your button to a page layout. Now, add the custom button to the Case layout. 5. In Object Manager, on Case, on the Case Page Layouts page, click **Student Record Case Layout**. 6. In the palette, click **Buttons**, and then look for your custom button. 7. Drag the custom Degree Audit button to the Custom Buttons section of the page layout, in the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 8. Optionally, if you want to remove unnecessary standard buttons in the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section, click the wrench icon and drag buttons you don't want back to the palette. 9. Save your changes. 10. Log in as a support staff member and view a student record to verify that the custom shortcut button displays and clicks through to your target URL. ## Set Up a Knowledge Base in Student Success Hub If your institution uses Lightning Knowledge to maintain a library of content, you can add the Knowledge component to the Student Success Hub app. Making Knowledge readily accessible helps support staff find articles relevant to their student Cases from within the app. Here's how to display the Knowledge component in Student Success Hub. For Lightning Knowledge implementation details, see [Build Your Knowledge Base in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=knowledge_lightning_parent_admin.htm) in Salesforce Help. 1. Verify that you have the required permissions to set up Knowledge. 1. From the Salesforce header, click your profile photo, then click **Settings**. 2. Click **Advanced User Details**. 3. On your user detail page, if Knowledge User isn't enabled, enable it. 2. Verify that you've enabled Lightning Knowledge. 3. In the Student Success Hub app, go to any Student Record Case record. 4. From the page header, click the gear icon. Select **Edit Page** to open the Lightning App Builder. 5. From the menu of components, drag the **Knowledge** component to the page canvas, and save your changes. 6. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. **Edit** the support staff profile and in the Knowledge Base Permissions section, give support staff at least Read access. 7. From Setup, search for and then select **Users**. For every support staff member who needs access, **Edit** the User record to enable the Knowledge User permission. 8. Log in as a support staff member and verify that the Knowledge component appears in the app. # Set Up Submitted Statuses Define which Review Statuses equal a submitted state. Define which statuses on a Review mean the review has been submitted. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Metadata in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Grants Management: Review Status Mapping, click **Manage Records.** 4. Edit the existing Submitted record or create a new one. 5. Enter a **Label** for the setting and press Tab to automatically enter the **Review Status Configuration Name**. 6. Select **Default Submitted**. 7. Enter the Status picklist API Name. 8. Save your work. # Set Up Success Plans, Templates, and Tasks Complete these tasks to get Success Plans up and running in your Student Success Hub org. # Set Up Success Teams Configure case team objects, create success team records, and assign support staff to learner advising cases. ### Required Editions
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up success teams: Education Cloud Full Access
To set up success teams, configure Salesforce case team objects, create success team records, and assign support staff to learner advising cases. 1. Define case team roles to specify the type of support staff and their level of access to advising case data. See [Set up Case Team Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.caseteam_setup.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create predefined case teams that group staff members and their roles into reusable teams. See [Predefine Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.caseteam_predefine_team.htm&language=en_US). 3. Create success team records and configure appointment scheduling availability by using Manage Appointments. See [Set Up Appointment Data by Using Manage Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_elements_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Appointment scheduling requires configuring several foundational elements. Set up these elements to provide simplified, intuitive guidance to administrators and advisors for managing appointments within Education Cloud."). 4. Map unassigned predefined case teams to success team records to define which staff members are available for appointment scheduling. See [Map Case Teams to Success Teams to Define Appointment Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_map_case_teams_to_success_teams_to_define_appointment_availability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success teams determine which case teams (assigned or unassigned) or staff members are available for scheduling using the case record type."). 5. Assign success teams to learner advising cases. Use flow templates to automate case creation and team assignment at scale, or assign teams manually on a learner's Student Record Case. See [.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_case_creation_and_assignment.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud flow templates to automate case creation and resolution, and to assign support staff to students."). See Also: - [Success Teams for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success teams connect learners with the advisors and support staff who help them throughout their entire educational journey.") - [How Success Teams Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_how_success_teams_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Salesforce case objects to model success teams in an educational institution. Define advising workspaces, staff roles, and team structures.") - [Support Pool Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_and_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success team records determine which support pools are available for a given advising workspace and whether learners can book appointments directly.") # Set Up Success Teams Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Success Teams Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Success teams were released with Student Success Hub 1.0, and have been enhanced in subsequent releases. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Success teams leverage the Case, Contact, and User objects. For the required permissions, see these articles. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Case, Contact, and User objects. - **[Bulk Upload Success Team Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you want to transfer success team assignments from an external system or upload large numbers of teams and assignments, you can use the Salesforce Bulk API to define success teams. If you're an advanced administrator, integrator, or developer who is proficient with Salesforce APIs and bulk data uploads, define your success teams in CSV or other formats and then use your data loader tool of choice to quickly create success teams. - **[Customize or Create Case Team Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Every success team member must have a specific role. Roles determine more than just the type of membership—they determine whether the member has read, write, or no access to student data (notwithstanding access that may be allowed by any sharing rules and the member's profile). - **[Create Predefined Case Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If support staff often assign the same set of individuals to a success team, you can create predefined case teams. A predefined case team can be assigned to a success team in a single action, with support roles for each case team member already specified. In orgs with student users and a portal, predefined case teams are also used with unassigned Support Pools. When a predefined case team's membership is updated, the changes are reflected on the success teams and Support Pools that use it, so data stays up-to-date when personnel changes. - **[Assign Individual Success Team Members](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've defined case team roles, you and your support staff can assign individual Users and Contacts to student success teams. - **[Assign Predefined Case Teams to Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you've created predefined case teams, you and your support staff can assign a predefined case team as a member of a success team. This assignment associates both the individual case team members as well as the predefined case team with the Student Record Case. When you make the assignment, you don't have to specify roles for the team members because the roles are specified in the predefined case team itself. ## Success Teams Release Information Success teams were released with Student Success Hub 1.0, and have been enhanced in subsequent releases. To get success teams up and running, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Check Your Student Success Hub Version History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Success Teams Success teams leverage the Case, Contact, and User objects. For the required permissions, see these articles. ## Configure Sharing Settings for Success Teams Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Case, Contact, and User objects. For details, see [Configure Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Bulk Upload Success Team Data If you want to transfer success team assignments from an external system or upload large numbers of teams and assignments, you can use the Salesforce Bulk API to define success teams. If you're an advanced administrator, integrator, or developer who is proficient with Salesforce APIs and bulk data uploads, define your success teams in CSV or other formats and then use your data loader tool of choice to quickly create success teams. Here's how Salesforce objects correspond to the entities related to success teams, and how you can create them via API. - **CaseTeamRole**—Create case team roles. - **CaseTeamMember**—Create a User's or Contact's membership in the success team associated with a specified Case (Student Record). References existing User or Contact records, Case records, and CaseTeamRole records. - **CaseTeamTemplate**—Create predefined case teams. - **CaseTeamTemplateMember**—Assign a User or Contact to an existing predefined case team, with a specified CaseTeamRole. References existing User or Contact records, CaseTeamTemplate records, and CaseTeamRole records. - **CaseTeamTemplateRecord**—Associate a predefined case team with a specified Case. The CaseTeamTemplateMembershipRecord object type references existing CaseTeamTemplate records and Case records. For reference, here's a diagram of the success team entities. ![Entity relationship diagram showing how User, Contact, and Case make success teams](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_erd_case.png) For details on the object fields, relationships, and values, see the [Object Reference for Salesforce and Lightning Platform](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.object_reference.meta/object_reference/sforce_api_objects_concepts.htm). For details on creating records, see the [Bulk API Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.api_asynch.meta/api_asynch/asynch_api_intro.htm) or your data import tool documentation. ## Customize or Create Case Team Roles Every success team member must have a specific role. Roles determine more than just the type of membership—they determine whether the member has read, write, or no access to student data (notwithstanding access that may be allowed by any sharing rules and the member's profile). In orgs with student users and a portal, case team roles also determine whether the member is visible to students in the portal, and are used to associate support staff members with the appointment Topics they're available to meet about. In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub includes four default case team roles: Counselor, Principal, Social Worker, and Teacher. You can use them as is, rename them, clone them, or create additional custom case team roles that make sense for your school. In higher ed orgs, create case team roles manually. We recommend you create five roles: Academic, Career, Financial Aid, Health, and Housing. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Case Team Roles**. 2. (K-12 orgs) Review the default case team roles: Click any Member Role Name or the **Edit** action for any role to change its name or settings. 3. To create a custom case team role, click **New**. 4. Enter a Member Role Name, such as Academic or Career, and specify the role's Case Access to the Student Record Case and related data, if any: Private (user can't access the record), Read Only (user can view the record and add associated records to it but can't edit the record or add notes or attachments), or Read/Write (user can view and edit the record and add associated records, notes, and attachments to it). 5. Save the role and create others as needed. ## Create Predefined Case Teams If support staff often assign the same set of individuals to a success team, you can create predefined case teams. A predefined case team can be assigned to a success team in a single action, with support roles for each case team member already specified. In orgs with student users and a portal, predefined case teams are also used with unassigned Support Pools. When a predefined case team's membership is updated, the changes are reflected on the success teams and Support Pools that use it, so data stays up-to-date when personnel changes. In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub includes a default predefined case team: Student Success Team. You can add team members to this predefined case team and use it for your school, or create your own custom predefined case team. In higher ed orgs, create your predefined case teams manually. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Predefined Case Teams**. 2. (K-12 orgs) Click the **Edit** action for the Student Success Team to change its name, description, or members. 3. To create a custom predefined case team, click **New**. 4. Enter a short Team Name. Each predefined case team name must be unique. 5. Optionally, enter a Description. Both the Team Name and Description are visible in student portals. 6. Select either Users or Contacts as team members, and assign each person a Member Role. 7. If your org has a student portal, select **Visible in Customer Portal** to make team members visible to students in the portal. 8. Save your changes. ## Assign Individual Success Team Members After you've defined case team roles, you and your support staff can assign individual Users and Contacts to student success teams. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Orgs using appointments must configure appointment Topics before assigning success team members to students. The three Topic objects—Topic, Role Topic Settings, and User Topic Settings—combine to organize and surface who is available to meet with students on which support topics. Complete the configuration described in [Set Up Appointment Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get appointment topics up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") and then come back and continue setting up your success teams. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to the student's Student Record Case. 2. Go to the Team related list, and then click **Add Member**. You might need to click **More** first. 3. Begin typing the name of the User or Contact to add. 4. Select the User or Contact, then choose the member's Case Team Role. 5. Save your changes. ## Assign Predefined Case Teams to Success Teams If you've created predefined case teams, you and your support staff can assign a predefined case team as a member of a success team. This assignment associates both the individual case team members as well as the predefined case team with the Student Record Case. When you make the assignment, you don't have to specify roles for the team members because the roles are specified in the predefined case team itself. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to the student's Student Record Case. 2. Go to the Team related list, and then click **Add Member**. 3. Begin typing the name of the predefined case team to add. 4. Select the predefined case team. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note In addition to manually assigning case teams, you can use Process Builder or flows to automate assignment. For advanced cases, Process Builder can run Apex classes that have [invocable](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexcode.meta/apexcode/apex_classes_annotation_invocablemethod.htm) methods. # Set Up Support Pools Complete these tasks to get Support Pools up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Support Pools Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Support Pools and the Support Pool custom object were released in Student Success Hub 2.3. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For support staff, student, System Administrator, and any other profiles requiring access to Support Pools, verify each profile's access to the Support Pool custom object and its fields. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review and verify your org-wide default sharing settings for the Support Pool object. - **[Create a Custom Support Pool Record Layout for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give your support staff a Support Pool record page layout that includes the fields and details they need the most. - **[Create Predefined Case Teams for Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For every department operating as a Support Pool, create a predefined case team that includes the appropriate members. - **[Configure Search Layouts for Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend adding Support Pool fields to Lookup Dialogs, Search Filter Fields, Search Results, and Tab search layouts. Add fields to other search layouts as needed. - **[Create Support Pool Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With your predefined case teams created and populated, now create a corresponding Support Pool record for each predefined case team. ## Support Pools Release Information Support Pools and the Support Pool custom object were released in Student Success Hub 2.3. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Support Pools For support staff, student, System Administrator, and any other profiles requiring access to Support Pools, verify each profile's access to the Support Pool custom object and its fields. For the required Support Pool object and field permissions, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Support Pools Review and verify your org-wide default sharing settings for the Support Pool object. For recommendations, see [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Create a Custom Support Pool Record Layout for Support Staff Give your support staff a Support Pool record page layout that includes the fields and details they need the most. Student Success Hub provides a layout, called Support Pool Layout, with higher ed orgs. You can use it as is or customize it. Here's how to create the layout if you need to. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Support Pool**. 2. On the Page Layouts page, click **New**, enter the Page Layout Name Support Pool Layout, and then click **Save**. 3. Remove all of the Quick Actions in the Salesforce Classic Publisher. (You may have to override the global publisher layout.) 4. In the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section, remove all but the Edit and Change Owner buttons. 5. In the Support Pool Detail area, in the Information section, include these fields: Pool Name, Description, Owner, Case Team Name, and Account. 6. For Related Lists, include Cases, Queue Topic Settings, and Queue Waiting Room Resources. 7. Save your changes. Now, assign the layout to the support staff and System Administrator profiles. (The Support Pool Layout that comes with Student Success Hub is assigned to the support staff and System Administrator profiles that Student Success Hub installs.) 8. On the Page Layouts page for the Support Pool object, click **Page Layout Assignment**, then click **Edit Assignment**. 9. Click the support staff and System Administrator profiles you're using and then click the Page Layout To Use menu and select **Support Pool Layout**. 10. Save your changes. ## Create Predefined Case Teams for Support Pools For every department operating as a Support Pool, create a predefined case team that includes the appropriate members. You may have already created some predefined case teams for assignment to success teams. The process of creating predefined case teams for Support Pools is the same. If you're using predefined case teams for success team management, you may want to use some of the same teams to also represent Support Pools. See [Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org."). Make sure that you keep predefined case team membership current so that the right support staff members are available for appointment scheduling. For example, if there are no members on a team or the only members on a team are Contacts and not Users, students won't have any Support Pools available to them. ## Configure Search Layouts for Support Pools We recommend adding Support Pool fields to Lookup Dialogs, Search Filter Fields, Search Results, and Tab search layouts. Add fields to other search layouts as needed. Student Success Hub provides Support Pool search layouts, which you can customize if desired. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Support Pool**. 2. On the Search Layouts page, click the arrow in the search layout row that you're updating and click **Edit**. 3. Add these Available Fields to the Selected Fields list in this order: Pool Name, Case Team Name, Description, Account, Created By, and Created Date. 4. Save your changes. 5. Repeat these additions as needed for other types of search layouts. ## Create Support Pool Records With your predefined case teams created and populated, now create a corresponding Support Pool record for each predefined case team. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, from the app navigation menu, select **Support Pools**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you don't see Support Pools among the options, check your profile to make sure the Tab Settings for the Support Pool object is Default On and, if necessary, [add the object to the app navigation menu](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app."). 2. Click **New**. 3. Specify fields as needed. Pool Name A name for the Support Pool. Description A description that helps students understand the Support Pool's function. Case Team Name The Case Team Name of the Pool's corresponding predefined case team. This value must exactly match the value of the predefined case team's Team Name field, otherwise, students won't be able to schedule appointments with this Support Pool in the portal. 4. Save the record. # Set Up Support Pools for Your Portal Give students a way to schedule appointments with Support Pools from a record detail page in the portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Create a Custom Support Pool Record Layout for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a custom Support Pool page layout for students that includes the Schedule an Appointment button and excludes the administrative actions that students shouldn't have access to. Assign it to the student profile you're using. - **[Configure Scheduling with Support Pools in the Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make the Support Pool page layout available in your student portal. ## Create a Custom Support Pool Record Layout for Students Create a custom Support Pool page layout for students that includes the Schedule an Appointment button and excludes the administrative actions that students shouldn't have access to. Assign it to the student profile you're using. Student Success Hub provides higher ed orgs with a Support Pool record layout for this purpose. Called Support Pool Layout - Student, it's assigned to the two student profiles that are also installed with the org. Here's how to create the layout if you need to. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Support Pool**. 2. On the Page Layouts page, click **Support Pool Layout**, the Support Pool page layout for your support staff. 3. In the palette, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 4. Drag **Schedule an Appointment** to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section in the layout. 5. Drag all other buttons from this section (Edit, Sharing, and Delete) back to the palette, leaving only Schedule an Appointment. 6. From the Save menu, select **Save As**. 7. Give the layout a name, such as Support Pool Layout - Student. 8. Save the layout. Now, assign the new layout to the student profile. (The layout included with Student Success Hub is assigned to the student profiles it installs.) 9. On the Page Layouts page for the Support Pool object, click **Page Layout Assignment** , then click **Edit Assignment**. 10. Click the student profile you're using and then click the Page Layout to Use menu and select **Support Pool Layout - Student**. 11. Save your changes. ## Configure Scheduling with Support Pools in the Portal Make the Support Pool page layout available in your student portal. We'll show how to do it using a standard object component on a standard page, but you can provide access to the page in other ways, such as through the navigation menu or a custom page. 1. In Experience Builder for your site, from the Pages menu, click **New Page** at the bottom of the menu. 2. Select **Object Pages** and then select the Support Pool object. 3. Click **Create**, and then click **Create** again on the confirmation page. The Support Pool Detail, Support Pool List, and Support Pool Related List pages now appear in the Pages menu. Now, give students a way to navigate to Support Pool records. For example, add the Record List component to the Home page. 4. In Experience Builder, from the Pages menu, select the Home page (or other page of your choosing). 5. Click ![Components icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_builder_component_icon.png) in the sidebar, then scroll to the Record List component and drag it to the editable content region of the page. 6. In the component's Properties pane, for Object Name, select **Support Pool**. 7. Edit the Number of Records and Layout options as needed. 8. Preview the page on both large and small devices, and when you're ready, publish your changes. If a student runs into issues when rescheduling an appointment with a specific support pool member, do one of the following options: - Assign the support pool member to the student's case record. - Instruct the student to cancel the appointment and schedule a new one. # Set Up Territory Management for Recruiting Enable Enterprise Territory Management and set up default access, territories, Account assignment rules, and assign Users on your recruiting team. - **[Prepare Prospect Records for Territory Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about why a prospect’s Account record is important and how to get your prospect data ready to use with Enterprise Territory Management. - **[Enable Territory Management for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To enable Enterprise Territory Management and customize default settings, users need Customize Application permission. - **[Create Recruiting Territory Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Territory types help you organize territories based on key characteristics, such as Geographic, State, City, Geocode, or First-Gen. Create types that make sense for your recruiting team. These types can later be used in reports. - **[Create a Recruiting Territory Model and Individual Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A territory model connects all the moving parts—individual territories, Account assignment rules, and user assignments. We recommend planning out your model before entering it into Salesforce. Write down the territories you want to create and the Account criteria that each territory will use. - **[Create Recruiting Territory Assignment Rules for Account Criteria](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Territory assignment rules define the Account criteria that are used to assign the territory. - **[Assign Territories to Recruiting Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With your territories and Account assignment rules in place, it’s time to assign your recruiters to territories. Don't overload recruiters with too many Accounts. Typically, most institutions know the regions or focus areas that have the biggest groups of prospects. Review and adjust your user assignments as your prospect pool changes or when you adjust your territory hierarchy. - **[Set Up Recruiting Territories for Opportunities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your institution is using Opportunities, you can assign territories to them. To set this up, you create and deploy an Apex class (Salesforce provides sample code that you can use as is) and enable the Opportunity assignment filter in Territory Settings. After your model is active, you run the filter to assign the territories based on date ranges, the status of the Opportunity, or you can set it up to run every time an opportunity is created. Alternatively, you can manually assign a territory to an Opportunity. - **[Activate Your Territory Model and Run Assignment Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_territories_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you’re happy with your territories, Account rules, and assigned Users, activate your model and run assignment rules. ## Prepare Prospect Records for Territory Management Learn about why a prospect’s Account record is important and how to get your prospect data ready to use with Enterprise Territory Management. ## Enable Territory Management for Admissions Connect To enable Enterprise Territory Management and customize default settings, users need Customize Application permission. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Territory Settings**. 2. Click **Enable Enterprise Territory Management**. 3. Define the Default Access Levels for your institution. We recommend these settings. - Account Access: View and edit accounts assigned to the territory - Contact Access: View and edit all contacts associated with accounts in the territory - Opportunity Access: View all opportunities associated with accounts in the territory - Case Access: View all cases associated with accounts in the territory 4. Optionally, if you’re using Opportunities, define Opportunity Access for Parent Territories and specify an Assignment Filter. 5. Save your changes. For more information about these settings, see [Enable Features for Enterprise Territory Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_manage_organization_territories.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Create Recruiting Territory Types Territory types help you organize territories based on key characteristics, such as Geographic, State, City, Geocode, or First-Gen. Create types that make sense for your recruiting team. These types can later be used in reports. For details and required permissions, see [Create Territory Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_create_territory_type.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Create a Recruiting Territory Model and Individual Territories A territory model connects all the moving parts—individual territories, Account assignment rules, and user assignments. We recommend planning out your model before entering it into Salesforce. Write down the territories you want to create and the Account criteria that each territory will use. Here’s what a sample territory model looks like. ![Sample territory model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/territory_model_sample.png) For details and required permissions, see [Create a Territory Model Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=tm2_create_terr_model.htm) and [Create Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_create_territory.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Create Recruiting Territory Assignment Rules for Account Criteria Territory assignment rules define the Account criteria that are used to assign the territory. For example, a rule for the territory called City: Sacramento has the following criteria: (`Account: Billing City` EQUALS Sacramento) AND (`Account: Billing State/Province` EQUALS California). The state is specified as an AND operator so that only Accounts from Sacramento, California, are included and not Accounts from other states with the same city. It’s common to adjust your rules as you work with more prospect data. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important Make sure that your rules are marked as Active so that they run when an Account record is created or updated. For details and required permissions, see [Create Rules to Assign Accounts to Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_assign_accounts_by_rules.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Assign Territories to Recruiting Staff With your territories and Account assignment rules in place, it’s time to assign your recruiters to territories. Don't overload recruiters with too many Accounts. Typically, most institutions know the regions or focus areas that have the biggest groups of prospects. Review and adjust your user assignments as your prospect pool changes or when you adjust your territory hierarchy. For details and required permissions, see [Assign Users to Territories](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_assign_users_to_territories.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ## Set Up Recruiting Territories for Opportunities If your institution is using Opportunities, you can assign territories to them. To set this up, you create and deploy an Apex class (Salesforce provides sample code that you can use as is) and enable the Opportunity assignment filter in Territory Settings. After your model is active, you run the filter to assign the territories based on date ranges, the status of the Opportunity, or you can set it up to run every time an opportunity is created. Alternatively, you can manually assign a territory to an Opportunity. For details, see the _[Enterprise Territory Management Implementation Guide](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/latest/latest/en-us/sfdc/pdf/salesforce_implementing_territory_mgmt2_guide.pdf)_ and look at these topics.  - How Does Filter-Based Opportunity Territory Assignment Work? - Set Up and Deploy Filter-Based Opportunity Territory Assignment - Assign a Territory Manually to an Opportunity To copy the sample Apex class, see [OpportunityTerritory2AssignmentFilter Global Interface](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexref.meta/apexref/apex_interface_territorymgmt_opportunityterritory2assignmentfilter.htm) in the _[Apex Reference Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.apexref.meta/apexref/apex_ref_guide.htm)_ . ## Activate Your Territory Model and Run Assignment Rules When you’re happy with your territories, Account rules, and assigned Users, activate your model and run assignment rules. 1. [Preview the assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_preview_account_assignments.htm&type=5). Preview your Account assignments while they're in the planning stage. From the hierarchy view, click **Run Assignment Rules**. 2. [Activate the model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_activate_territory_model.htm&type=5). When you activate your model, Accounts are shared and assigned to Users based on your assignment rules. From the hierarchy view, click **Activate**. 3. Run Account assignment rules. You can run assignment rules for the whole model or for individual territories. To run the assignment rules for the whole model, from the hierarchy view, click **Run Assignment Rules**. To run the assignment rule for a single territory, see [Run Assignment Rules for a Territory](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_run_assignment_rules.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help. 4. Optionally, [run the Opportunity assignment filter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.tm2_run_ota_filter.htm&type=5). If you've enabled the Opportunity assignment filter, you can run the filter from the hierarchy view. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To help your recruiting staff easily find territory details, create an Account list view for each territory and update the Account page layout with the Assigned Territories or Users in Assigned Territories related lists. ![Sample Account with assigned Territories](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/territory_account_related_list.png) # Set Up the Academic Operations App Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To turn on and configure Academic Operations: | Education Cloud Full Access | | To turn on Automatically Validate Pathway Selections: | View Setup | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up the Academic Operations App, turn on **Academic Operations**. If prompted to confirm, click **Turn On**. 3. To automatically validate prerequisite and corequisite requirements when a learner drops a course in the pathway canvas, under Set Up Academic Operations, turn on **Automatically Validate Pathway Selections**. This setting is off by default. When this setting is on, the **Verify Program Requirements** button doesn't appear in the Learner Pathway Builder because validation runs automatically. 4. To set up the learning objects, expand the dropdown menu. 1. Under Create Learning Achievement Record Types, click **Create Record Types** and then create at least three record types. 1. In Object Manager, on the Record Types page for Learning Achievement, click **New**. 2. On the New Record Type page, choose the Existing Record Type as **Master**. 3. Enter the record type label as Learning Course. 4. Enter the record type name as Learning\_Course. 5. Optionally, provide a description for the record type. 6. Select **Active**. 7. Select the profile permissions, and then click **Next**. 8. Save your work. 9. Repeat these steps to create Learning Program and Achievement Group record types. If you’re using [Einstein Skills Generator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_einstein_skills_generator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use generative AI to find skills and associate them with your learning courses and learning programs with Einstein Skills Generator."), create a Skill record type. 10. If required, create additional record types such as degree and diploma. | Record Type Label | Record Type Name | | --- | --- | | Learning Course | Learning\_Course | | Learning Program | Learning\_Program | | Achievement Group | Achievement\_Group | | Achievement Group All | Achievement\_Group\_All | | Skill | Skill | | Degree | Degree | | Diploma | Diploma | 2. To map learning achievement types to record types, under Set Up Learning Achievement Configuration, click **Set Up Learning Achievement Types**. 1. Click **New Learning Achievement Configuration**. 2. Enter a name for the configuration and then press Tab to automatically populate the API name. For example, enter Learning Course. 3. For Learning Achievement Type, select **Learning Course**. 4. For Learning Achievement Record Type, select **Learning\_Course**. 5. Enter any other details, and then save your changes. 6. Repeat to create learning achievement configurations named Learning Program and Achievement Group. If you’re using Einstein Skills Generator, create a learning achievement configuration named Skill. 7. If required, create custom learning achievement configurations such as degree and diploma. | Name | API Name | Learning Achievement Type | Learning Achievement Record Type | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Learning Course | LearningCourse | Learning Course | Learning\_Course | | Learning Program | LearningProgram | Learning Program | Learning\_Program | | Achievement Group | AchievementGroup | Achievement Group | Achievement\_Group | | Achievement Group All | Achievement\_Group\_All | Achievement Group All | Achievement\_Group\_All | | Skill | Skill | Skill | Skill | | Degree | Degree | Custom | Degree | | Diploma | Diploma | Custom | Diploma | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Every learning achievement type requires at least one learning achievement configuration record. The Learning Course, Learning Program, and Achievement Group learning achievement configuration records can’t be deleted. 5. Update the sharing settings on objects required for the Program Plan Builder: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify the default internal access for these objects: | Object | Default Internal Access | | --- | --- | | Learning | Public Read/Write | | Learning Achievement | Public Read Only | You can also control this access with [Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_about_sharing_rules.htm&type=5). Anyone who creates program plans needs sharing and edit access to the relevant learning objects. 4. Make the Linked Only field visible for the Learning Course object. 1. From the object management settings for learning courses, go to **Fields & Relationships**. 2. Click **Linked Only**. 3. Click **View Field Accessibility.** 4. In the Field accessibility for Field dropdown, select **Linked Only**. 5. In the System Administrator row, click **Editable**. 6. In the Field-Level Security area, select **Visible** for the System Administrator profile. 7. Click **Save**. For more information about default sharing settings, see [Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_owd_about.htm&type=5). SEE ALSO: - [Education Cloud Developer Guide](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.edu_cloud_dev_guide.meta/edu_cloud_dev_guide/edu_cloud_intro.htm) # Set Up the Account Record Page Configure record pages for the Account object in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Account record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
- **[Create Account Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create record pages for students and alumni for the Account object in Lightning App Builder. - **[Set Up a Relationship Graph for Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a relationship graph in Actionable Relationship Center that you can use on the Account record page. - **[Add Components to the Account Record Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add and configure Lightning Web Components to the student and alumni Account record pages. - **[Activate the Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you configure your pages, make them the default record pages for the Student Success and Alumni Relations apps. - **[Set Up the Person Account Record Page for Financial Aid Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_account_record_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Equip staff with a comprehensive view of a student's financial aid data directly in Salesforce. By configuring Lightning web components on the Person Account record page, staff can access student applications, awards, cost estimates, and disbursements without navigating to external systems. ## Create Account Record Pages Create record pages for students and alumni for the Account object in Lightning App Builder. ### Create a Student Record Page 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Manager, and then select **App Manager**. 2. Next to Student Success, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) , and then select **Edit**. 3. Click **Pages**, and then select **New Page**. 4. Click **Record Page**, and then click **Next**. 5. Enter a label for the record page. For example, enter Student Record Page. 6. In the Object field, search for and then select **Account**. 7. Under Choose Page Template, select **Three Regions**, and then click **Done**. ### Create an Alumni Record Page 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Manager, and then select **App Manager**. 2. Next to Alumni, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) , and then select **Edit**. 3. Click **Pages**, and then select **New Page**. 4. Click **Record Page**, and then click **Next**. 5. Enter a label for the record page. For example, enter Alumni Record Page. 6. In the Object field, search for and then select **Account**. 7. Under Choose Page Template, select **Three Regions**, and then click **Done**. ## Set Up a Relationship Graph for Person Accounts Set up a relationship graph in Actionable Relationship Center that you can use on the Account record page. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Account Settings, and then select **Account Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**, and then save your changes. 4. In the Quick Find box, enter Group Membership Settings, and then select **Group Membership Settings**. 5. Enable Group Membership. 6. In the Quick Find box, enter Actionable Relationship Center, and then select **Actionable Relationship Center**. 7. Click **New Relationship Graph**. 8. Select **Education Cloud Person Account Relations**, and then click **Create Graph**. 9. Enter a label and developer name, and then save your changes. ## Add Components to the Account Record Page Add and configure Lightning Web Components to the student and alumni Account record pages. ### Student Record Page ![Student Account page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_student_record_page.png) With the student Account record page open in Lightning App builder, add these components to the page.
Component Configuration Steps
Student Profile Flexcard (1)
  1. Drag the Flexcard component into the left column.
  2. In the Flexcard Name menu, select EDUStudentProfileCard.
Advising Center Flexcard (1)
  1. Drag the Flexcard component below the student profile Flexcard, or where desired.
  2. In the Flexcard Name menu, select EDUStuSuccessAdvisingCenter.
Timeline (1) Drag the Timeline component to the left column below the student profile or advising center Flexcard component.
Action Launcher (2)
  1. Drag the Action Launcher component to the center column.
  2. To associate actions with a record page, create an Action Launcher deployment.
Tabs (3)
  1. Drag the Tabs component to the center column.
  2. Set up these tabs:
    1. Cases
    2. Interaction Summary
    3. Academics
    4. Appointments
    5. Staff Scheduler
Cases (3)
  1. Select the Cases tab.
  2. Add and configure the Related List-Single component for Cases.
Interaction Summary (3)
  1. Select the Interaction Summary tab.
  2. Add the Interaction Summaries component.
Academics (3)
  1. Select the Academics tab.
  2. Add and configure the Related List-Single component for Academic Term Enrollments.
Appointments (3)
  1. Select the Appointments tab.
  2. Add and configure the Related List-Single component for Appointments.
Staff Scheduler (3)
  1. Select the Staff Scheduler tab.
  2. Add and configure the Staff Appointment Scheduling component.
  3. Apply other customizations as necessary.
Interest Tags (4) Drag the Interest Tags component to the right column.
### Alumni Record Page ![Alumni Account record page layout template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_alumni_account_record_page.png)
Component Configuration Steps
Highlights Panel (1) Drag the Highlights Panel component to the center column.
Alumni Profile Card (2)
  1. Drag the Flexcard component to the left column.
  2. In the Flexcard Name menu, select EDUAlumniProfile.
Timeline (3)
  1. Drag the Timeline component to the left column below the Alumni Profile card.
  2. For Timeline Configuration, select Alumni Activities.
  3. Click OK.
Action Launcher (4)
  1. Drag the Action Launcher component to the center column below the Highlights Panel.
  2. To associate actions with a record page, create an Action Launcher deployment.
Life Events (5) Drag the Events and Milestones component to the center column below the Action Launcher.
Tabs (6)
  1. Drag the Tabs component to the center column below the Life Events component.
  2. Set up these tabs:
    1. Engagement
    2. Relationships
    3. Education
    4. Employment
    5. Details
    6. Portal Profile Preference
    7. Related
Engagement (6)
  1. Select the Engagement tab.
  2. Add the Flexcard component and for the name, select ServiceExcellenceGenericAlertCard.
  3. For Maximum Number of Alerts (1-20), enter 3.
  4. Below the Flexcard component, add the Dynamic Related List-Single component.
  5. For Related List, select Cases.
  6. For Related List Type, select List.
  7. For Number of Records to Display, enter 3.
Relationships (6)
  1. Select the Relationships tab.
  2. Add the ARC Relationship Graph component.
Education (6)
  1. Select the Education tab.
  2. Add the Related List-Single component.
  3. For Related List, select Person Education.
  4. Add the Related List-Single component.
  5. For Related List, select Person Academic Credentials.
Employment (6)
  1. Select the Employment tab.
  2. Add the Related List-Single component.
  3. For Related List, select Person Employments.
Details (6)
  1. Click the Details tab.
  2. Add the Record Detail component.
Portal Profile Preference (6)
  1. Select the Portal Profile Preference tab.
  2. Add the Related List-Single component.
  3. For Related List, select Person Public Profile Preference Sets.
  4. For Related List Type, select Enhanced List.
Related (6)
  1. Select the Related tab.
  2. Add the Related Lists component.
Interest Tags (7)

Drag the Interest Tags component to the right column.
After you add the components, save your changes and continue to the next section. ## Activate the Record Pages After you configure your pages, make them the default record pages for the Student Success and Alumni Relations apps. See Also: - [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5) - [Model Faculty, Staff, Students, and Alumni](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_faculty_staff_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Person Account object to model faculty, staff, students, and alumni.") - [View Events Using Timeline in Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.timeline.htm&type=5) - [Create an Action Launcher Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.create_an_action_launcher_deployment.htm&type=5) - [Related List - Single](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.rss_related_record_list_single.htm&type=5) - [Activate Lightning Experience Record Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_activate.htm&type=5) ## Set Up the Person Account Record Page for Financial Aid Insights Equip staff with a comprehensive view of a student's financial aid data directly in Salesforce. By configuring Lightning web components on the Person Account record page, staff can access student applications, awards, cost estimates, and disbursements without navigating to external systems. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
User Permissions Needed
To update the Person Account page and configure components: Education Cloud Full Access
### Configure the Financial Aid Year Filter for Staff The Financial Aid Year Filter is a required component that must be present on the page to use other financial aid components. 1. Open an active Person Account record page in Lightning App Builder. 2. Optionally, add a new tab for financial aid insights. 3. Drag the **Financial Aid Year Filter** component onto the page. You can add one instance of the component per page. 4. Select the component to open the properties pane. 5. Deselect **Show help button**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The button is supported only in Experience Cloud. 6. Optionally, select **Show external link button** and configure the **External Link Button URL** to enable staff to navigate directly to your external financial aid management system. 7. Save your changes. ### Configure Financial Aid Information Components for Staff Add any combination of optional financial aid components to the Person Account record page. 1. In Lightning App Builder, drag any of these components onto your Person Account record page. You can arrange them in tabs or accordions for better organization. - Financial Aid Highlights - Financial Aid Overview - Financial Aid Checklist - Financial Aid Applications - Financial Aid Awards - Financial Aid Disbursements For details about how each component displays data and calculates totals, see [Financial Aid Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how the financial aid components display data and calculate totals for students, prospects, and staff."). 2. For any component with an external link, configure the **Show external link button**, **External Link Button Label**, and **External Link Button URL** attributes. 3. Save and activate the page. # Set Up the Admissions Connect App Streamline application reviews, increase applicant engagement, and facilitate collaboration across institutions with the Admissions Connect app. Configure the navigation, record pages, and more, to suit your institution’s needs. - **[Set Up Admissions Connect App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get started with the Admissions Connect app by assigning the default Lightning record pages and setting up the navigation menu. - **[Customize Record Pages for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize page layouts, record page components, and more to make it easy for your staff to access and manage applications. - **[Create and Customize List Views for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help your staff stay focused by setting up list views that best support your institution’s application review process. # Set Up the Admissions Console Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app that shows admissions data, reviews, and tasks.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Admissions Console:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
The admissions console is where you can see high-level data insights related to the status of applicants for your institution. You can also see the reviews assigned to you, along with your daily and upcoming tasks and events. - **[Create a Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_admissions_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Lightning App Builder to create an admissions console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. - **[Add Components to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_admissions_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Lightning web components on your Admissions Console home page. - **[Activate the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_admissions_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate your home page and assign it to the profiles that you want to have access. ## Create a Home Page Use Lightning App Builder to create an admissions console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Home Page** and then click **Next**. 4. In the Label field, enter Admissions Console and then click **Next**. 5. Select **Standard Home Page** and click **Finish**. Now that you created your home page, add components to the console. ## Add Components to the Home Page Configure Lightning web components on your Admissions Console home page. ![Admissions Console home page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/admissions_console.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Education Analytics Dashboard** component to the top section (1). - In the component properties to the right, for Dashboard, select **Recruitment and Admissions Insights**. If you can't select a dashboard, make sure that Education Analytics is set up. See [Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators."). - Drag the **Tabs** component to the section just below Education Analytics Dashboard. Change the tab names to Ready for Decision and My Reviews (2). - Click **Ready for Decision**, add the **List View** component, and set these fields (3): - For the Object field, select **Individual Application**. - For the Filter field, select **Ready for Decision**. - Click **My Reviews**, add the **List View** component, and set these fields (4): - For the Object field, select **Application Review**. - For the Filter field, select **My Reviews**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To keep the home page within the window and to avoid scrolling, we recommend that you set the number of records to be shown in the Ready for Decision and My Reviews List View components to a value between 10–15. - Drag the **Today's Tasks** component to the right column (5). - Drag the **List View** component to the right column, just below Today's Tasks, and set these items (6): - For the Object field, select **Event**. - For the Filter field, select **My Upcoming Events**. - For the Number of Records to Display field, enter 2. After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Activate the Home Page Activate your home page and assign it to the profiles that you want to have access. 1. Click **Activate**. 2. Select **App and Profile**. 3. Click **Assign to Apps and Profiles**. 4. For Lightning Apps, select **Recruitment & Admissions** and click **Next**. 5. For Profiles, select the profiles that you want to have access to the home page and click **Next**. # Set Up the Advisor Console On the advisor console in the Student Success app, advisors can create and assign care plans, create alerts, view analytics dashboards for student success, view advisor insights and KPIs, and more. This home page is available out-of-the-box with Education Cloud, no additional setup is required.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Advisor Console:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
![Advisor console](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/advisorconsole_studentsuccess.png) # Set Up the Alumni Relations Console Create an Alumni Relations app home page where a coordinator or manager can review alumni information and identify opportunities for engagement.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Alumni Relations Console:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
- **[Explore the Alumni Relations Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_alumni_relations_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Alumni Relations Console gives alumni coordinators a central place to focus on alumni engagement. - **[Create a Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_alumni_relations_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Lightning App Builder to create a home page for the Alumni Relations app. - **[Add Components to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_alumni_relations_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the CRM Analytics Dashboard component to your home page. - **[Save and Activate the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_alumni_relations_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. ## Explore the Alumni Relations Console The Alumni Relations Console gives alumni coordinators a central place to focus on alumni engagement. ![Alumni Relations dashboard layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_alumni_crma_dashboard.png) The dashboard has multiple charts that visualize alumni engagement based on key performance indicators (KPIs). - Filter information by college or department (1). - See the number of alumni with open alerts (2). - See the number of alumni with open cases (3). - See the number of alumni in your org and the number who have created an account on your portal (4). - See the number of learning achievements alumni have earned from other institutions (5). - See the number of learning achievements alumni have earned from your institution (6). - See the occupations in which alumni are employed (7). ## Create a Home Page Use Lightning App Builder to create a home page for the Alumni Relations app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Home Page** and then click **Next**. 4. For Label, enter Alumni Console and then click **Next**. 5. Select **Standard Home Page** and click **Done**. Now that your home page is created, add components to it. ## Add Components to the Home Page Add the CRM Analytics Dashboard component to your home page. 1. Drag the **CRM Analytics Dashboard** component to the top section. 2. In the component properties, for Dashboard, select **Alumni Engagement Insights**. If you can't select a dashboard, make sure that Education Analytics is set up. See [Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators."). ## Save and Activate the Home Page Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. 1. After you save your changes, click **Activate**. 2. Select **App and Profile**. 3. Click **Assign to Apps and Profiles**. 4. For Lightning Apps, select **Alumni** and click **Next**. 5. For Profiles, select the profiles that you want to have access to the home page and click **Next**. 6. Save your changes. # Set Up the Appointment Objects Complete these tasks to get the appointment objects up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About the Appointment Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects are included with Student Success Hub higher ed orgs. Together with the Event object, they store data about the who, what, when, where, and why of appointments. - **[Appointment Objects Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects were released with Student Success Hub 2.10. Support for scheduled group appointments was added in Student Success Hub 2.40. As long as you configure Appointments and Appointment Attendees as described in this setup article, scheduled group appointments will be available in your org. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Appointments and Appointment Attendees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the required object and field permissions for the Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Appointments and Appointment Attendees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the required sharing settings for appointments and appointment attendees. - **[Verify and Customize the Appointment and Appointment Attendee Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub installs page layouts for Appointment and Appointment Attendee records in higher ed orgs. Review and customize these layouts as needed for your institution. For example, you might want to change the fields in the details panel, remove or add buttons, or add related lists. - **[Create and Assign a Compact Layout for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The compact layout controls which fields appear in the highlights panel at the top of a record page and the fields a user sees when they hover over a lookup relationship field. Create an Appointment compact layout and configure it to show the fields you want. - **[Configure Optional Appointment Functionality](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure any or all of these features to enhance the way your support staff and students work with appointments. You can also set them up later, if desired. - **[Considerations for Appointment Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_objects.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the appointment objects work so that you can use them more effectively. ## Learn About the Appointment Objects The Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects are included with Student Success Hub higher ed orgs. Together with the Event object, they store data about the who, what, when, where, and why of appointments. For each support appointment, Student Success Hub creates: - One Appointment record - One Appointment Attendee record for the support staff member and one for each attendee who has a Student Record Case or a User record - One Event record for the support staff member and one for each attendee who has a Student Record Case or a User record The Event records store some appointment-related data that's essential for representing appointments on support staff members' Calendars and for calendar sync integrations. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important To use the appointment objects, your students must have either a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login user license. Otherwise, support staff members can't schedule appointments for students, and students can't schedule or manage appointments in the portal. Some configuration of the Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects is required. ## Appointment Objects Release Information The Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects were released with Student Success Hub 2.10. Support for scheduled group appointments was added in Student Success Hub 2.40. As long as you configure Appointments and Appointment Attendees as described in this setup article, scheduled group appointments will be available in your org. To get appointments up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Appointments and Appointment Attendees Learn about the required object and field permissions for the Appointment and Appointment Attendee objects. See [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Appointments and Appointment Attendees Learn about the required sharing settings for appointments and appointment attendees. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Verify and Customize the Appointment and Appointment Attendee Layouts Student Success Hub installs page layouts for Appointment and Appointment Attendee records in higher ed orgs. Review and customize these layouts as needed for your institution. For example, you might want to change the fields in the details panel, remove or add buttons, or add related lists. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object for the layout you want to edit. 2. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click the page layout name. 3. Edit the layout and save your changes. For more information, see [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_layoutcustomize_pd.htm&type=5). ## Create and Assign a Compact Layout for Appointments The compact layout controls which fields appear in the highlights panel at the top of a record page and the fields a user sees when they hover over a lookup relationship field. Create an Appointment compact layout and configure it to show the fields you want. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Appointment**. 2. On the Compact Layouts page, click **New**. 3. For the label, enter Appointment Compact Layout. 4. For the API name, enter Appointment\_Compact\_Layout. 5. Add these fields to the Selected Fields list: Appointment Subject, Type, Topic, and Subtopic. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If desired, add other fields. The highlights panel shows the first Selected Field in the panel header, and the next six fields within the panel itself. Additional fields specified in the compact layout may not fit in the highlights panel. 6. Save your changes. 7. Click **Compact Layout Assignment**, then click **Edit Assignment**. 8. Set the Primary Compact Layout to Appointment Compact Layout. By default, all record types are set to Inherit from Primary, so they will inherit from the updated primary compact layout after you save. 9. Save your changes. ## Configure Optional Appointment Functionality Configure any or all of these features to enhance the way your support staff and students work with appointments. You can also set them up later, if desired. - [Set Up Appointment Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to create appointments and see the data they need on Appointment records.") (recommended) - [Set Up Cases for Appointments and Student Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_appointments_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to work with Student Record Cases in Student Success Hub.") - Display the Appointment Actions menu in the student portal. See [Student Portal Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the custom Lightning components you can use in a Student Success Hub student portal."). - [Set Up Virtual Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Allow your staff to conduct virtual support appointments in your Student Success Hub org.") ## Considerations for Appointment Objects Understand how the appointment objects work so that you can use them more effectively. - Don't let your support staff create or edit appointments from the Calendar. By default, Student Success Hub prevents support staff from editing Events that have an associated Appointment record. Tell support staff to create and edit appointments only from the Appointment Manager or the Appointments tab on the Student Record Case. - By default, there's no Cancel button on the Appointment record page. To cancel an appointment, do any of the following. - Use the Appointment Manager. - Edit the Status field on the support staff member's Appointment Attendee record. - Add a custom action to the Appointment page layout. See [Set Up Appointment Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to create appointments and see the data they need on Appointment records."). - Comments captured from support staff and students when appointments are canceled are stored on the Appointment Attendee object in the Status Comments field. Cancellation comments are included in cancellation emails. - To use the Add Comments button in the portal, students must have Read and Edit access to the Comments field on the Appointment Attendee object. Otherwise, the Add Comments button doesn't display. - To see comments from a student in the Appointment Manager, support staff need Read access to the Comments field on the Appointment Attendee object. Otherwise, the field is blank. - Some data is mapped from Appointment and Appointment Attendee records to the Event record for calendar sync integrations as shown in the following table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note This table doesn't list all of the Appointment and Appointment Attendee fields. It lists only the main fields that are mapped to the Event record.

Appointment Fields

Appointment Attendee Fields

  

Event Fields

Appointment Subject1

   

Subject1

Created By

    

Created By

Description2

   

Description2

End

    

End

Last Modified By

    

Last Modified By

Location

    

Location

Owner3

Attendee3

 

Assigned To3

Start

    

Start

Subtopic1, 4

     

Topic1, 4

     
 

Appointment Attendee

  

  • Related To

  • Event Record Type
**Notes:** 1. For individual appointments, the Subject on the support staff-owned Event record includes the student's name, Student ID (if enabled), and the Appointment Subject. For group appointments, it includes Multiple Attendees (_n_) and the Appointment Subject. If the Appointment Subject isn't specified, Student Success Hub uses the Topic and Subtopic. 2. For individual appointments, the Description on the support staff-owned Event record includes the Appointment description, a student's comments, and a link to the Student Record Case. For group appointments, it only includes the Appointment description. 3. The Owner field on the Appointment object points to the support staff member's User ID. The Attendee field on the Appointment Attendee records and the Assigned To field on the Event records are set to the attendee's User ID (which can either be a support staff member or a student). 4. Topics and Subtopics are sourced from the Topic object. # Set Up the Attendance Management Agent Set up the Attendance Management Agent so that parents and guardians can resolve their student's absences by phone. Complete these tasks in order. Each task builds on the one before it. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Einstein for Education Cloud add-on, Data 360, Marketing Cloud Next with the Salesforce Message Credits - SMS add-on and at least one Salesforce SMS Code Lease add-on, an applicable Salesforce Voice add-on, applicable Agentforce add-on licenses, and Slack.

For more support on Marketing Cloud Next, Salesforce Voice, and Agentforce add-on licenses, contact your Salesforce account executive.
User Permissions Needed
To set up the Attendance Management Agent:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations Admin Access
To set up SMS prerequisites: Data Cloud Architect
To send SMS messages:

Marketing Cloud Admin

OR

Marketing Cloud Manager
To configure inbound call routing: The appropriate Agentforce Contact Center or Salesforce Voice permission set
## Prepare Your Org for the Attendance Management Agent Set up the data and features that the Attendance Management Agent depends on. 1. Set up Attendance Management so that your org creates the attendance entry and attendance source data records that the agent reads and resolves. Attendance Management doesn't include an app or interface in this release. See [Set Up Attendance](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_attendance.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define how your institution captures and resolves attendance. Create attendance codes, define an attendance policy, add the sources that capture attendance, and rank how Attendance resolves signals when sources disagree."). 2. Turn on Advanced Academic Operations. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. In the Set Up Academic Operations area, turn on **Advanced Academic Operations**. 3. Create an attendance source type named Parent Voice Call. The attendance flows look for a source type with this name by default. To use a different name, change the value of the ParentVoiceCallSourceTypeName variable when you configure the attendance flows. If no source type matches, the agent tells the caller that the required attendance source type isn't configured. ## Configure Attendance Flows The Attendance Management Agent template includes two flows that read and update attendance. Set both flows to run in system mode, and then activate them. You can also change the source type name that the flows look for and add your own caller verification checks. 1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **EDU Attendance: Get Attendance Information from Incoming Call**. 3. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 4. If your attendance source type for voice calls has a name other than Parent Voice Call, change the value of the ParentVoiceCallSourceTypeName variable to match. 5. Optionally, to add your own caller verification checks, configure the customInputParameter input variable. If you use this variable, update your agent configuration to match. 6. Save and activate the flow. 7. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 8. Select **EDU Attendance: Create Attendance Feedback from Incoming Call**. 9. From How to Run the Flow, select **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 10. Optionally, to add your own caller verification checks, configure the customInputParameter input variable. If you use this variable, update your agent configuration to match. 11. Save and activate the flow. ## Configure Agentforce Voice for the Attendance Management Agent Set up Agentforce Voice so that your org can receive calls from parents and guardians. You connect the calls to the agent when you build it. 1. Enable Salesforce Voice and connect your telephony provider. Complete the [Agentforce Voice prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agentforce_voice_setup_prereqs.htm&language=en_US), then follow [Connect a Service Agent to Partner Telephony](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_connect_telephony_parent.htm&language=en_US). 2. Open the Agentforce Voice Setup page. See [Launch Agentforce Voice Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_agentforce_voice_setup.htm&language=en_US). 3. Provision the phone number that parents and guardians call. How you get the number depends on your telephony model: provision a number natively in Salesforce, claim a number in Amazon Connect, or get a number from your partner telephony provider. The number is ready when its status is Live. 4. Create the voice channel that uses the phone number. 5. Turn on call recording. ## Build the Attendance Management Agent Create the agent from its template, add the action that stores each caller's explanation, activate the agent, and route incoming calls to it. 1. Create the flow that stores each caller's explanation. 1. Create an autolaunched flow that runs in **System Context Without Sharing - Access All Data**. 2. Add a text input variable for the caller's feedback. 3. Add a text collection variable that accepts input and returns output. 4. Add an assignment that adds the feedback to the collection. 5. Save and activate the flow. 2. Create the agent from the Attendance Management Agent template. For agent creation and configuration details, see [Create a Voice-Enabled Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_voice.htm&language=en_US). 3. Select or create the bot user that the agent runs as. 4. Set the agent's name and general settings. 5. Set the agent's voice persona. 6. Create an action named Add Feedback to Collection that calls the flow that stores each caller's explanation. Map the flow's feedback input to the caller's reason. Map the feedback collection input and output to the caller-reason collection so that the agent keeps every reason from the call. 7. Add the **Add Feedback to Collection** action to the **Attendance Feedback and Resolution** subagent. This subagent already includes the Get Attendance Info action and the Resolve Attendance Source Data action. 8. Edit the subagent's placeholder instructions so that the agent uses the Add Feedback to Collection action to store each reason that the caller gives. The placeholder text includes an example. 9. Save the agent, commit the version, and activate the agent. An agent that isn't committed and active doesn't accept calls. 10. Build the Omni-Channel routing flow from the Voice Calls Routed to Agents and Queues flow template so that incoming calls reach the Attendance Management Agent. See [Configure Call Routing for Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_call_routing_escalation.htm&language=en_US). 11. Bind the routing flow to the agent. See [Add a Telephony Connection](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_add_telephony_connection.htm&language=en_US). ## Set Up SMS Notification Prerequisites Set up the data, sender identity, and content that your org needs before it can text parents and guardians about absences. For an overview, see [Parent SMS Quick Start](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mktg_quick_start_parent_sms.htm&language=en_US). 1. Confirm that your org has Marketing Cloud Next and the Salesforce Message Credits - SMS add-on, then enable Marketing Cloud Next. 2. Map the phone number of each parent or guardian to the Formatted E164 Phone Number field on the Contact Point Phone data model object. 3. Configure Data 360 identity resolution so that matching records resolve into a unified individual. Set your match rules so that the phone number of each parent or guardian resolves to the unified individual that receives the SMS message. See [Configure Data 360 Identity Resolution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mktg_admin_sms_quick_start.htm&language=en_US). 4. Register an SMS brand, then register an SMS campaign. See [Request an SMS Brand and Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mktg_admin_sms_quick_start_request_assets.htm&language=en_US). 5. Request an SMS code with the 10-digit long code type. After the code is approved, activate it, and then activate **Send and Receive Messages via Flow**. 6. Update your communication subscription to use the SMS code. Then collect or import opt-in consent for the SMS channel so that the phone number of each parent or guardian is opted in. See [Set Up Receiver Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mktg_admin_sms_quick_start_manage_audience.htm&language=en_US). 7. Create the SMS message that parents and guardians receive. See [Create the SMS Content](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=mktg.mktg_content_sms_create.htm&language=en_US). ## Send SMS Notifications to Parents and Guardians Build a flow that texts the parent or guardian when a student's attendance status changes to Absent. 1. Create an Automation Event-Triggered Flow. 2. For the trigger event, select **Prospect, Lead, Contact or Related Record Change**, and then select the attendance entry object. 3. For the related record, select the parent or guardian contact. 4. Set the flow to run when a record is updated and the student's attendance status is **Absent**. 5. Add a **Send SMS Message** element that sends your SMS message to the parent or guardian. In the element, select your SMS code and your communication subscription. 6. Save and activate the flow. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note A Marketing Cloud problem with the unified individual merge field can stop a customer-built flow from sending the SMS message. When this happens, the cause is the Marketing Cloud merge field, not the flow you built. ## Send Slack Notifications to Faculty After an absence resolves, a flow notifies the responsible faculty member in Slack. 1. [Connect Salesforce and Slack](https://slack.com/help/articles/30754346665747-Connect-Salesforce-and-Slack). 2. Confirm that each instructor has an employee record linked to their contact. The faculty flow uses this link to find the instructor's Slack user. You can update your employee creation process if instructors don't have these records. For an example of a customized flow, see [Simplify Employee Record Creation for Faculty](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_simplify_faculty_employee2_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the Create Employee flow to collect specific information when it creates employee records for faculty. Agent actions use these fields to identify faculty Slack users."). 3. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 4. Select **EDU Attendance: Send Attendance Feedback to Faculty**. 5. Click **Save As New Flow**, and then enter a label and API name. This flow runs when an attendance entry resolves. It finds the responsible faculty member's Slack user and sends them a direct message. If your attendance source type for voice calls has a name other than Parent Voice Call, change the value of the ParentVoiceCallSourceTypeName variable in your version to match. 6. Activate your version of the flow. # Set Up the Course Search Agent Configure the Course Search Agent to answer questions and support both students and advisors. Create an Agentforce Service agent for users on your Experience Cloud site. Create an Agentforce Employee agent for Standard Users of Education Cloud, such as advisors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the Agentforce for Education Cloud add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To set up Course Search FAQ topics in Agentforce:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Einstein for Education Cloud Access

AND

Agentforce Default Admin

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager
## Configure the Course Search Agent 1. [Set up Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360."). 2. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas."). 3. Turn on the Course Search Agent. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud, turn on **Course Search Agent**. 4. [Turn on Advanced Academic Operations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_advanced_academic_operations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Advanced Academic Operations to extend Education Cloud with student information system (SIS) capabilities that streamline and automate academic processes."). 5. [Create a hybrid search index for the Learning Course object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_search_index_easy_setup_search_index.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 6. [Create a custom data retriever](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_ai_retriever_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for the Learning Course data model object. 7. Use the data retriever to configure the Get Learning Courses prompt template. 1. In Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Under Prompt Templates, select **Get Learning Courses**. 3. Click **Save As**, and then click **Save as a New Version**. 4. Scroll to the end of the prompt, find \*\*Courses\*\*, and delete the placeholder text for the retriever. 5. Click **Insert Resource**, select **Einstein Search**, and then select the retriever that you created. 6. To view the retriever's template settings, click the retriever inserted in the prompt. 7. In Search Text, enter Input:Query. 8. Select all of the output fields. 9. Enter the number of results. 10. Save and activate the prompt template. ## Create the Course Search Agent for Experience Cloud Users 1. [Create an Agent from an Agentforce Service Agent template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). As part of the setup process, customize your agent settings and add the Course Search FAQ subagent. For example, in **Settings**: - For Agent Details, enter a description: Recommend relevant courses based on the queries raised by students or users. - For System, enter agent-level instructions: As an AI assistant for academic advisors, your role is to recommend courses based on provided info. If no relevant match is found, you won't fabricate suggestions or use external knowledge. You'll state there's insufficient info. - For System, enter a welcome message: Hi, I'm your personal course search agent! I can provide you with information on courses and answer your questions. I may make mistakes, so be sure to check my work. How can I help? 2. [Remove any unnecessary subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_remove.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 3. Add the agent to your Experience Cloud site. See [Connect a Service Agent to Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_messaging.htm&language=en_US&type=5). 4. The Course Search Agent shows users the JSON output from actions in addition to course information. Customize your Experience Cloud site to improve the user experience and control what the agent shows. 1. [Add markup to the page ``](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&type=5&language=en_US) by entering this script. ``` ``` 2. In Security & Privacy, [select a security level](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_scriptlevel.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For Security Level, select **Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts**. 3. Add your Experience Cloud site as a trusted site for scripts. See [Where to Allow Hosts of Script Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_allow.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To locate the URL of your site, from Setup, find and select **Digital Experiences**, and then click **All Sites**. Find the URL of your site in the All Sites list view. 4. Publish your site. 5. Make your agent available to unauthenticated guest users. See [Set Up the Experience Site for Self-Service Scheduling Guest Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=service.mfs_appointment_assistant_sss_user_profile.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ## Create the Course Search Agent for Advisors and Admins 1. Assign these permission sets to the advisor user. See [Assign Permission Sets to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Education Cloud Full Access - Data Cloud User - Einstein for Education Cloud Access - Prompt Template User 2. [Create an Agent from an Agentforce Employee Agent template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). As part of the setup process, customize your agent settings and add the Course Search FAQ subagent. For example, in **Settings**: - For Agent Details, enter a description: Recommend relevant courses based on the queries raised by students or users. - For System, enter agent-level instructions: As an AI assistant for academic advisors, your role is to recommend courses based on provided info. If no relevant match is found, you won't fabricate suggestions or use external knowledge. You'll state there's insufficient info. - For System, enter a welcome message: Hi, I'm your personal course search agent! I can provide you with information on courses and answer your questions. I may make mistakes, so be sure to check my work. How can I help? 3. [Remove any unnecessary subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_remove.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 4. Give both admins and advisors access to the Course Search Agent that you created by using permission sets or profiles. See [Manage Employee Agent Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US&type=5). Admins can use an Employee agent only with an explicit access grant. # Set Up the Director Console for Recruitment and Admissions Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app, where a director can see admissions and recruitment analytics, create actionable lists and assign them to staff.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Director Console for Recruitment and Admissions:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
- **[Create a Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_rna.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Lightning App Builder to create a director console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. - **[Add Components to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_rna.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Lightning web components on your Director Console home page for Recruitment & Admissions. - **[Activate the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_rna.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. ## Create a Home Page Use Lightning App Builder to create a director console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Home Page** and then click **Next**. 4. In the Label field, enter Director Console and then click **Next**. 5. Select **Standard Home Page** and click **Finish**. Now that you created your home page, add components to the console. ## Add Components to the Home Page Configure Lightning web components on your Director Console home page for Recruitment & Admissions. ![Director Console](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/director_console.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Education Analytics Dashboard** component (1) to the top section. - In the component properties to the right, for Dashboard, select **Recruitment and Admissions Insights**. If you can't select a dashboard, make sure that Education Analytics is set up. See [Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators."). Optionally, you can add the Today's Tasks and List View components: - Drag the **Today's Tasks** component to the right column. - Drag the **List View** component to the right column, below Today's Tasks, and set these items: - Object: Select **Event**. - Filter: Select **My Upcoming Events**. - Number of Records to Display: Enter 2. After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Activate the Home Page Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. 1. Click **Activate**. 2. Select **App and Profile**. 3. Click **Assign to Apps and Profiles**. 4. For Lightning Apps, select **Recruitment & Admissions** and click **Next**. 5. For Profiles, select the profiles that you want to have access to the home page and click **Next**. # Set Up the Director Console for Student Success Create a home page for the Student Success app, where a director can create programs and benefits, assign advisors, view analytics dashboards for student success, view institutional Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and more.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Director Console for Student Success:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
- **[Create a Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_ss.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Lightning App Builder to create a director console home page for the Student Success app. - **[Add Components to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_ss.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Lightning web components on your Director Console home page for Student Success. - **[Activate the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_ss.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. ## Create a Home Page Use Lightning App Builder to create a director console home page for the Student Success app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Home Page** and then click **Next**. 4. In the Label field, enter Director Console and then click **Next**. 5. Select **Standard Home Page** and click **Finish**. Now that you created your home page, add components to the console. ## Add Components to the Home Page Configure Lightning web components on your Director Console home page for Student Success. ![Director console for Student Success](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/directorconsole_studentsuccess.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **CRM Analytics Dashboard** component (1) to the top section. - In the component properties to the right, for Dashboard, select **Student Success**. If you can't select a dashboard, make sure that Education Analytics is set up. See [Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators."). - Drag the **Tabs** component (2) below the dashboard component. - Add the custom tabs Students, Open Alerts, and Advisors. - Drag the **CRM Analytics Dashboard** component to the Students tab, and select Dashboard as **Education Students Without Success Team**. - Drag the **CRM Analytics Dashboard** component to the Open Alert tab, and select Dashboard as **Education Directors Open Alerts**. - Drag the **CRM Analytics Dashboard** component to the Advisors tab, and select Dashboard as **Education Advisors List**. - Drag the **Tabs** component (3) to the sidebar on the right of the page. - Add the custom tabs Upcoming Events and Due Tasks. - Add the **Today's Events** component to the Upcoming Events tab. - Add the **Today's Tasks** component to the Due Tasks tab. After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Activate the Home Page Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. 1. Click **Activate**. 2. Select **App and Profile**. 3. Click **Assign to Apps and Profiles**. 4. For Lightning Apps, select **Student Success** and click **Next**. 5. For Profiles, select the profiles that you want to have access to the home page and click **Next**. # Set Up the Donor Support Agent in Education Configure the Donor Support Agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud:

FundraisingExperienceCloud

AND

Manage Donations with Agentforce in Experience Cloud
Clone the FundraisingExperienceCloud and Manage Donations with Agentforce permission sets for your donors to use the agent in your Experience Cloud site. Provide object and field permissions as described in [Donor Support Agent Permission Set Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_donor_support_agent_perm_set_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give your agent the access to manage gift commitments by setting the object and field permissions for your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set."). 1. Make sure that Fundraising is enabled in your org. 2. Set up Agentforce in your org. For Education Cloud, see [Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US&type=5). 3. Turn on the Donor Support Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Nonprofit, and then select **AI Settings**. 2. Turn on the **Donor Support Agent**. If you don’t see this agent in AI Settings for Nonprofit Cloud, try refreshing the page. 4. If you haven’t already, [set up and configure your org for Experience Cloud sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. If you haven’t already, [create an Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_creating.htm&language=en_US). 6. On your Experience Cloud site’s Administration settings, go to Members, and add **Customer Community Plus Login User** and **Customer Community Plus User** to your selected profiles and save. 7. Provide permission to use external profiles on your site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital, and then under Digital Experiences click **Settings**. 2. Under Role and User Settings, select **Allow using standard external profiles for self-registration, user creation, and login**. If you see a warning about using external profiles, click OK. 3. Save your changes. 8. [Create an agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US&type=5) from the Agentforce Employee Agent template. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Be sure to add the Manage Gift Commitments subagent. 9. Turn on Omni-Channel. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Omni, and then under Omni-Channel, click **Omni-Channel Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Omni-Channel**. 3. Next to Define login behavior when an agent using Omni-Channel opens a new window or tab, select **Automatically log agents in to Omni-Channel in the new window or tab**. 4. Save your work. 10. Create a routing configuration for your Omni-Channel. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Routing, and then under Omni-Channel, click **Routing Configurations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Provide a name for your agent routing configuration. 4. Under Routing Settings, enter a priority of 1 and for Routing Model, select **Most Available**. Leave the Capacity Type default of Inherited. 5. Under Work Item Size, for Units of Capacity, enter 2. 6. Save your work. 11. Relate this routing configuration to a queue. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Queue, and then under Users click **Queues**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For the Label and Queue Name, enter Messaging Queue. 4. Under Supported Objects, add **Messaging Session** to the Selected Objects list. 5. Under Queue Members, search **Users** and add your Salesforce admin as a selected member. 6. Search **Customer Portal Users** and add your portal users to the selected members list. 7. Save your work. 12. Create an Omni-Channel Flow. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter flows, and then under Process Automation, click **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**, and search for and select **Omni-Channel Flow**. 3. Add a Route Work element to the flow. 4. For the element, provide a Label and API Name and keep the number of records to route set to Single. 5. For Record ID Variable, select **New Resource**. 6. On the New Resource window, for Resource Type, select **Variable**, for API Name, enter recordid, for Data Type, select **Text**, and for Availability Outside the Flow, select **Available for Input**. 7. Click **Done**. 8. For Service Channel, select **Messaging**. 9. Route to **Agentforce Employee Agent**. 10. For Agentforce Employee Agent, search for the agent you created and select it. 11. For Fallback Queue, select **Use Variable**, and for the Fallback Queue ID, enter {!Route\_Work}. 12. Activate the flow. 13. Create a messaging channel. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Messaging, and then under Feature Settings click **Messaging Settings**. 2. Turn on **Messaging**. 3. Click **New Channel**. 4. On the Add a Channel window, click **Start** and select **Enhanced Chat** as the channel type. 5. Give your channel a name, developer name, and keep Web as the development type. 6. In the Domain field, enter the domain of your Experience Cloud site. This name is the portion of your site’s URL that begins with “my”. Find the name of your site by going to All Sites in Feature Settings, and copying the last portion of the site’s URL. For example: my.pc-xmpl-site.com/. 7. Click **Next**. 8. For Routing Type, select **Omni-Flow**, for Flow Definition, select the Omni-Channel flow you created previously, and for FallBack Queue, search for and select **Messaging Queue**. 9. Click **Save**. 10. Accept the terms and conditions and click **Save**.Channel creation can take several minutes. 14. On the Enhanced Chat page, under User Verification, select **Add User Verification** and **Save**. 15. Create an embedded service deployment. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Embed, and then under Embedded Service click **Embedded Service Deployments**. 2. Click **New Deployment**. 3. Select **Enhanced Chat** and click **Next**. 4. Select **Web** and click **Next**. 5. Enter a name for your embedded service deployment. For example, Embedded Agent. 6. In the Domain field, enter your Experience Cloud site’s domain name. For example, my.pc-xmpl.site.com/. 7. Select the messaging channel that you made in the previous steps and click **Save**. 16. Add all forms of your site URL to the CORS allowed list. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter cors, and then under Security click **CORS**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter https://\*. For example, https://\*my.pc-xmpl.site.com. 17. Add embedded messaging to your Experience Cloud site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter site, and then under Digital Experiences click **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Builder**. 3. Click **Components**, select **Embedded Messaging**, and drag it to the top of your site page. 4. In the Embedded Web Deployment field of the component, select the agent you created. 5. Select **Add credential-based user verification**. 6. Publish the site. 18. Add sharing sets to your digital experience. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital, and then under Digital Experiences click **Settings**. 2. Scroll to Sharing Sets and click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the Label and Sharing Set Name. For example, Donor Sharing. 4. Add the **Customer Community Plus Login User** and the **Customer Community Plus User** to the selected profiles list. 5. Add the Account, Gift Commitment, Gift Transaction, and Payment Instrument objects to the selected objects list. 6. Configure read/write access to the selected objects. - For the Account object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Account:PersonContact. - For the Gift Commitment object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Gift Commitment:Donor.PersonContact. - For the Gift Transaction object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Gift Transaction:Donor.PersonContact. - For the Payment Instrument object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Payment Instrument:Account.PersonContact. 7. Save your work. SEE ALSO: - [Configure Digital Experiences Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_settings.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&language=en_US) - [Enable Object Permissions in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_objects_and_fields.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Field Permissions in Permission Sets and Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_profiles_fls.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up the Donor Support Agent in Nonprofit Configure the Donor Support Agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud:

FundraisingExperienceCloud

AND

Manage Donations with Agentforce in Experience Cloud
Clone the FundraisingExperienceCloud and Manage Donations with Agentforce permission sets for your donors to use the agent in your Experience Cloud site. Provide object and field permissions as described in [Donor Support Agent Permission Set Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_donor_support_agent_perm_set_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give your agent the access to manage gift commitments by setting the object and field permissions for your cloned FundraisingExperienceCloud permission set."). 1. Make sure that Fundraising is enabled in your org. 2. Set up Agentforce in your org. For Nonprofit Cloud, see [Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&language=en_US&type=5). 3. Turn on the Donor Support Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Nonprofit, and then select **AI Settings**. 2. Turn on the **Donor Support Agent**. If you don’t see this agent in AI Settings for Nonprofit Cloud, try refreshing the page. 4. If you haven’t already, [set up and configure your org for Experience Cloud sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_setup_maintain_communities.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. If you haven’t already, [create an Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_creating.htm&language=en_US). 6. On your Experience Cloud site’s Administration settings, go to Members, and add **Customer Community Plus Login User** and **Customer Community Plus User** to your selected profiles and save. 7. Provide permission to use external profiles on your site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital, and then under Digital Experiences click **Settings**. 2. Under Role and User Settings, select **Allow using standard external profiles for self-registration, user creation, and login**. If you see a warning about using external profiles, click OK. 3. Save your changes. 8. [Create an agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US&type=5) from the Agentforce Employee Agent template. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Be sure to add the Manage Gift Commitments subagent. 9. Turn on Omni-Channel. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Omni, and then under Omni-Channel, click **Omni-Channel Settings**. 2. Select **Enable Omni-Channel**. 3. Next to Define login behavior when an agent using Omni-Channel opens a new window or tab, select **Automatically log agents in to Omni-Channel in the new window or tab**. 4. Save your work. 10. Create a routing configuration for your Omni-Channel. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Routing, and then under Omni-Channel, click **Routing Configurations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Provide a name for your agent routing configuration. 4. Under Routing Settings, enter a priority of 1 and for Routing Model, select **Most Available**. Leave the Capacity Type default of Inherited. 5. Under Work Item Size, for Units of Capacity, enter 2. 6. Save your work. 11. Relate this routing configuration to a queue. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Queue, and then under Users click **Queues**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For the Label and Queue Name, enter Messaging Queue. 4. Under Supported Objects, add **Messaging Session** to the Selected Objects list. 5. Under Queue Members, search **Users** and add your Salesforce admin as a selected member. 6. Search **Customer Portal Users** and add your portal users to the selected members list. 7. Save your work. 12. Create an Omni-Channel Flow. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter flows, and then under Process Automation, click **Flows**. 2. Click **New Flow**, and search for and select **Omni-Channel Flow**. 3. Add a Route Work element to the flow. 4. For the element, provide a Label and API Name and keep the number of records to route set to Single. 5. For Record ID Variable, select **New Resource**. 6. On the New Resource window, for Resource Type, select **Variable**, for API Name, enter recordid, for Data Type, select **Text**, and for Availability Outside the Flow, select **Available for Input**. 7. Click **Done**. 8. For Service Channel, select **Messaging**. 9. Route to **Agentforce Employee Agent**. 10. For Agentforce Employee Agent, search for the agent you created and select it. 11. For Fallback Queue, select **Use Variable**, and for the Fallback Queue ID, enter {!Route\_Work}. 12. Activate the flow. 13. Create a messaging channel. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Messaging, and then under Feature Settings click **Messaging Settings**. 2. Turn on **Messaging**. 3. Click **New Channel**. 4. On the Add a Channel window, click **Start** and select **Enhanced Chat** as the channel type. 5. Give your channel a name, developer name, and keep Web as the development type. 6. In the Domain field, enter the domain of your Experience Cloud site. This name is the portion of your site’s URL that begins with “my”. Find the name of your site by going to All Sites in Feature Settings, and copying the last portion of the site’s URL. For example: my.pc-xmpl-site.com/. 7. Click **Next**. 8. For Routing Type, select **Omni-Flow**, for Flow Definition, select the Omni-Channel flow you created previously, and for FallBack Queue, search for and select **Messaging Queue**. 9. Click **Save**. 10. Accept the terms and conditions and click **Save**.Channel creation can take several minutes. 14. On the Enhanced Chat page, under User Verification, select **Add User Verification** and **Save**. 15. Create an embedded service deployment. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Embed, and then under Embedded Service click **Embedded Service Deployments**. 2. Click **New Deployment**. 3. Select **Enhanced Chat** and click **Next**. 4. Select **Web** and click **Next**. 5. Enter a name for your embedded service deployment. For example, Embedded Agent. 6. In the Domain field, enter your Experience Cloud site’s domain name. For example, my.pc-xmpl.site.com/. 7. Select the messaging channel that you made in the previous steps and click **Save**. 16. Add all forms of your site URL to the CORS allowed list. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter cors, and then under Security click **CORS**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter https://\*. For example, https://\*my.pc-xmpl.site.com. 17. Add embedded messaging to your Experience Cloud site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter site, and then under Digital Experiences click **All Sites**. 2. Next to your site, click **Builder**. 3. Click **Components**, select **Embedded Messaging**, and drag it to the top of your site page. 4. In the Embedded Web Deployment field of the component, select the agent you created. 5. Select **Add credential-based user verification**. 6. Publish the site. 18. Add sharing sets to your digital experience. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital, and then under Digital Experiences click **Settings**. 2. Scroll to Sharing Sets and click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the Label and Sharing Set Name. For example, Donor Sharing. 4. Add the **Customer Community Plus Login User** and the **Customer Community Plus User** to the selected profiles list. 5. Add the Account, Gift Commitment, Gift Transaction, and Payment Instrument objects to the selected objects list. 6. Configure read/write access to the selected objects. - For the Account object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Account:PersonContact. - For the Gift Commitment object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Gift Commitment:Donor.PersonContact. - For the Gift Transaction object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Gift Transaction:Donor.PersonContact. - For the Payment Instrument object, determine access by User:Account.PersonContact = Payment Instrument:Account.PersonContact. 7. Save your work. SEE ALSO: - [Configure Digital Experiences Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_settings.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&language=en_US) - [Enable Object Permissions in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_objects_and_fields.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Field Permissions in Permission Sets and Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.users_profiles_fls.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up the Education Analytics App Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To enable and configure Education Analytics:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
## Prerequisites - Enable all Education Cloud dependent features. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - Assign Request for Information (RFI) to the case object as a record type. ## Configure Education Analytics 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up the Education Analytics App, click **Configure Education Analytics**. 3. To assign administrator permissions, under Set Up Permissions, click **Assign Permission Set**. 1. From the list of permissions, click **CRM Analytics for Education Admin**. 2. Click **Manage Assignments**, and then click **Add Assignments**. 3. Select the user, click **Assign**, and then click **Done**. 4. Under Set Up CRM Analytics, click **Set Up**, and then click **Enable CRM Analytics**. 1. Under Set Up CRM Analytics, click **Assign Permission Set**. 2. From the list of permissions, click **Education Cloud Full Access**. 3. Click **Manage Assignments**, and then click **Add Assignments**. 4. From the list of users, click the user with the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 5. Click **Assign**, and then click **Done**. 5. Under Set Up Education Analytics, click **Enable**. The app installation might take some time. For information on how to view the status of your request, see [Auto-Install Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.bi_auto_install_requests.htm&type=5). 6. Under Set Up Access to Analytics, assign permissions sets to additional users to view or manage analytics. ## Refresh Analytics Data Schedule a refresh of the Education Analytics app to make sure that your app uses the latest data. See [Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?language=en_us&id=sf.bi_templates_schedule_dataflow.htm&type=5). To manually trigger an instant data refresh: 1. From App Launcher, find and select **Analytics Studio**. 2. Under Collections, click **Data Manager**. 3. Click **Connections**, click the dropdown for SFDC\_LOCAL, and then select **Run Now**. 4. Click Recipes, and then find and run these recipes. - Education App Education Analytics - Education App Education Analytics User - Education\_Analytics Education Analytics SS - Education\_Analytics Education - Alumni Engagement 5. To view the status of the jobs, click **Jobs Monitor**, and then click **Refresh**. SEE ALSO: - [Education Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_understand_education_analytics_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use CRM Analytics in Education Cloud to create and embed customized dashboards in the app consoles for directors, recruiters, reviewers, admissions officers, and advisors. Education Analytics works seamlessly with existing Education Cloud features, enabling institutions to improve processes and learner metrics. Analytics dashboards and institutional key performance indicators (KPIs) provide insights into recruitment, admissions, learner engagement, and student success.") # Set Up the Education Proxy Portal Create and activate an Education Proxy Portal, assign proxy profiles, and then configure the portal to support delegated access. Support proxy scenarios across all educational levels. In K-12, parents can manage households, applications, and student information, while in higher education, designated proxies can securely access records and perform tasks that students delegate. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and the Revenue Cloud Billing license
User Permissions Needed
To set up the proxy portal:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&language=en_US). You’re also a site member, either as a Salesforce admin or as an Experience admin, publisher, or builder. To set up the proxy portal for delegated access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. On the Digital Experiences page, click **New**. 3. On the Lightning Experience guided flow, choose the **Education Proxy Portal** template. To develop a custom site, select **Build Your Own**. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a site name, and then click **Create**. 6. Click **Administration**. 7. Click **Members**. 8. Add your proxy profiles to the Selected Profiles section. 9. Click **Settings**. 10. Click **Activate**, and then confirm the activation. 11. Apply additional customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&language=en_US). If errors occur when you create an Experience Cloud site, verify that these Apex classes are available in your org. To see your Apex classes, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Apex Classes, and then select **Apex Classes**. - `SiteLoginController` - `SiteLoginControllerTest` - `SiteRegisterController` - `SiteRegisterControllerTest` If your org doesn't have the required Apex classes, retrieve the missing classes from another org, such as a sandbox, and then deploy them to your org. See [Choose Your Tools for Developing and Deploying Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.code_tools_ant.htm&language=en_US). - **[Configure Proxy Self-Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_proxy_self_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up your proxy portal so that when a student adds a proxy, the proxy self-registers. Setup includes enabling standard external profiles, configuring the registration page, and creating email templates. Registered proxies join your Experience Cloud site directly from the login page. # Set Up the Financial Aid Agent Configure the Financial Aid Agent to display personalized financial aid information to students and prospects using Data 360 and Agentforce. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
User Permissions Needed
To set up and create an AI agent for Education Cloud:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Agentforce Service Agents

AND

Data Cloud Admin

AND

Manage AI Agents

AND

Data Cloud Architect
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important The Financial Aid Agent and portal components for unauthenticated users require Data Cloud guest and portal user access. Verify that this feature is available in your org before configuring Experience Cloud portal access. 1. Turn on Data 360 and enable Person Accounts. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Cloud Setup, and select **Get Started** to provision Data 360. 2. From Setup, find and select **Person Accounts**, and ensure they are enabled. This step is required for one-time password email verification to work. 2. To provide the agent access to your institution's financial aid data, ensure that your financial aid management system is mapped to Data 360. Ensure that your source data uses the field values the agent expects. If your source system uses different values, use a formula field on the data stream to remap them before mapping to the DMO. See [Financial Aid Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how the financial aid components display data and calculate totals for students, prospects, and staff."). 3. Configure CDP feature mapping. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Data Space Mappings**. 2. Select **New**, set these values, and then save your changes. - **Data Space**: your data space - **Feature**: Financial Aid 4. Set up the Data Graph for Financial Aid. 1. In Data Cloud, create a Data Graph from the Financial Aid Data Kit. To change the refresh frequency, clone the Data Graph and adjust the schedule on the clone. If you clone the Data Graph, note the API name of the clone. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Configure Financial Aid**. 3. In the Financial Aid Data Graph section, enter the API name of your Data Graph in the **Data Graph API Name** field, and then save your changes. The default is Financial\_Aid\_Clone. If you cloned the Data Graph, enter the API name of your clone. The system validates that the Data Graph exists before saving. 5. Turn on the Financial Aid Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. In the **Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud** section, turn on **Financial Aid Inquiry Agent**. 6. Build and configure the agents in **Agentforce Studio**. 1. From the App Launcher, select **Agentforce Studio**. 2. Create an Agentforce Service Agent (ASA) for unauthenticated public portal prospects. 3. Add the **Describe Financial Aid Awards** topic to the agent. Salesforce automatically imports the prompt templates, invocable actions, and verification actions. 7. Assign these permission sets to the agent user: - Agentforce Service Agent Object Access - Agentforce Service Agent Secure Base - Data Cloud User - Education Cloud AI Agent Access - Einstein for Education Cloud Access - Financial Aid Agent Access - Prompt Template User - Run Flows 8. Set up the email verification process. 1. [Create a filter](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_asset_filters.htm&type=5&language=en_US) that restricts access to verified users. Name the filter Verified User, select **All conditions must be met**, and add these conditions: - **isVerified** Equals True - **VerifiedCustomerId** Is Not Empty 9. Configure the actions in the **Describe Financial Aid Awards** subagent. 1. On the Subagents panel, select **Describe Financial Aid Awards**, and then click the **This Subagent's Actions** tab. 2. Select the **Send Email Verification Code** action, and map this variable to its output. | Variable | Output | | --- | --- | | authenticationKey | Authentication Key | 3. Select the **Verify Email Code** action, and map this variable to its input. | Variable | Input | | --- | --- | | authenticationKey | Authentication Key | 4. Map these variables to the outputs of the **Verify Email Code** action. | Variable | Output | | --- | --- | | isVerified | Is Verified | | VerifiedCustomerId | Verified Contact ID | 5. Select the **Answer Financial Aid Question** action. On the **Learner ID** input, from the Map to Variable dropdown, select **VerifiedCustomerId**. 6. On the **Answer Financial Aid Question** action's details panel, select the **Verified User** filter. Save your changes. 10. Ensure that individual records imported from your financial aid management system into Data 360 are synced to Salesforce CRM as Person Accounts. The agent's identity verification relies on matching a Data 360 individual to a CRM Person Account. To implement this sync, use your organization's extract, transform, and load (ETL) tool, such as MuleSoft, Informatica, or Salesforce Data Loader, to create Person Account records in Salesforce CRM using the same data set being imported into Data Cloud. This approach gives you full control over timing, transformation, error handling, and audit trails. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Configure your extract, transform, and load process to check whether a matching Person Account already exists in CRM before creating a new one to avoid duplicates. 11. Enable enhanced event logs to keep a record of agent interactions for compliance review. See [Enable Enhanced Event Logs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_setup_enhanced_event_logs.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 12. Activate and deploy the agent to Experience Cloud. 1. In Agentforce Studio, open the agent and click **Activate**. 2. From Setup, configure your Messaging Channels and Embedded Service Deployments. 3. In Experience Builder, drag your **ASA** component to your public financial aid page. 13. To improve the user experience, turn off streaming responses on your Experience Cloud site. 1. [Add markup to the page ``](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&type=5&language=en_US) by entering this script. ``` ``` 2. In Security & Privacy, [select a security level](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_scriptlevel.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For Security Level, select **Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts**. 3. Add your Experience Cloud site as a trusted site for scripts. See [Where to Allow Hosts of Script Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_allow.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To locate the URL of your site, from Setup, find and select **Digital Experiences**, and then click **All Sites**. Find the URL of your site in the All Sites list view. 4. Publish your site. # Set Up the Fundseeker Experience Set up a fundseeker portal by using Experience Cloud to streamline funding requests. - **[Create a Fundseeker Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_a_fundseeker_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a portal for fundseekers, configure its pages to suit your organization’s needs, and then publish it to make it available to everyone. - **[Set Up Fundseeker Portal Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_up_fundseeker_portal_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure security options such as profiles, permissions, and sharing settings for your fundseeker portal. - **[Set Up Fundseeker Portal Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_set_up_fundseeker_portal_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure how applicants register on the fundseeker portal. - **[Customize Fundseeker Application Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_customize_fundseeker_application_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about ways to use automation in Outbound Funds Module to help you manage funding requests more efficiently. # Set Up the Grants Experience Portal Create a grants portal and configure user registration. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Create a Grants Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_grants_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a grants portal for your users, configure its pages to suit your organization’s needs, and then publish it to make it available to everyone. - **[Set Up Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_registration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure whether users can register themselves, or your staff creates credentials for them. # Set Up the Grantseeker Experience Set up a grantseeker portal using Experience Cloud to streamline your funding request processes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Set Up Grantseeker Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_grantseeker_access.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure security access such as profiles, permissions, sharing settings, and more. - **[Let Grantseekers Update Their Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_let_grantseekers_update_their_inforrmation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up access for grantseekers so that they can update their organization's information. Review the available optional settings, such as updating global action or quick actions, to help the process be more efficient. - **[Customize Grantseekers Application Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_customize_app_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See the automation available in Grants Management that can help you manage funding requests more efficiently. # Set Up the Grantsmaker Experience Support your organization's grantmakers by setting up robust due diligence and review processes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Set Up a Due Diligence Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_due_diligence_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Implement a due diligence process for your nonprofit organization by setting up Action Plans, tax status search, and more. - **[Set Up a Review Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_set_up_review_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Review Workspace fields and map the review statuses. # Set Up the Org and Learner Portal for Career Planning and Life Goals John, the Connected University admin, sets up the org for career planning and life goals, adds and configures the career planning and life goals components to the learner portal, and gives advisors the tools to manage student progress. To establish the infrastructure for student career planning, John completes the main phases of configuration. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This example uses common portal configurations and field values. Customize these settings to meet your institution's needs. - [Set up the org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US): Turn on Student Success and Discovery Framework in org-wide settings. Configure default object access, custom profiles, permission sets, and record types for competencies, involvement groups, and assessments. Customize picklist values for fields like activity season, proficiency level, and verification status. - [Set up the learner portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_portal_career_planning_life_goals_components.htm&language=en_US): Use Experience Builder to add and configure a career planning and life goals hub for students page. - [Set up components for advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_components_advisors.htm&language=en_US): Customize the Student Success app for advisors to track a student’s progress. Add career planning components to case record pages, and build dedicated app pages for resume and assessment workflows. # Set Up the Policy Rules Framework Configure the student information system policy rules framework to scale your processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up the policy rules framework: Education Cloud Full Access
Before you begin, make sure that you [complete the necessary requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_policy_rules_framework_prerequisites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you set up the Policy Rules Framework in Education Cloud, make sure that Advanced Academic Operations is turned on and that you create the required Decision Explainer records. Decision Explainer records capture logs for every rule run, so you can see how and why a decision, such as student eligibility or score calculation, was made."). 1. [Create and activate a context definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_create_context_definitions.htm&language=en_US) for the process. 2. To define a policy rule, [create an expression set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.create_and_configure_the_expression_set_version.htm&language=en_US) of the applicable usage type, and relate the context definition created in the previous step to the expression set. 3. Create a record of the object associated with the process, and relate it to the expression set. For example, for the registration timeline eligibility verification process, create an academic term registration timeline record and relate it to the appropriate expression set of the applicable usage type. 4. [Build an auto-launched flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.flow_build.htm&language=en_US) to run the expression set by ID. 5. [Create a batch job](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.task_create_batch_job.htm&language=en_US) to invoke the flow created in the previous step. 6. If needed, configure [Decision Explainer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.concept_decision_explainer.htm&language=en_US) to store and show logs of the batch jobs for audit requirements. # Set Up the Recruiter Console Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app for recruiters.​
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Recruiter Console:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
The recruiter console is where you can see recruitment analytics, along with daily and upcoming tasks and events. - **[Create a Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_recruiter_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Lightning App Builder to create a recruiter console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. - **[Add Components to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_recruiter_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Lightning web components on your Recruiter Console home page. - **[Activate the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_recruiter_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. ## Create a Home Page Use Lightning App Builder to create a recruiter console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Home Page** and then click **Next**. 4. In the Label field, enter Recruiter Console and then click **Next**. 5. Select **Standard Home Page** and click **Finish**. Now that you created your home page, add components to the console. ## Add Components to the Home Page Configure Lightning web components on your Recruiter Console home page. ![Recruiter Console](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/recruiter_console.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **Education Analytics Dashboard** component (1) to the top section. - In the component properties to the right, for Dashboard, select **Recruitment Insights**. If you can't select a dashboard, make sure that Education Analytics is set up. See [Set Up the Education Analytics App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_education_analytics_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Analytics in Education Cloud to monitor institutional health and get insights from dashboards and key performance indicators."). - Drag the **Today's Tasks** component (2) to the right column. - Drag the **List View** component (3) to the right column, below Today's Tasks, and set these items: - Object: Select **Event**. - Filter: Select **My Upcoming Events**. - Number of Records to Display: Enter 2. After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Activate the Home Page Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. 1. Click **Activate**. 2. Select **App and Profile**. 3. Click **Assign to Apps and Profiles**. 4. For Lightning Apps, select **Recruitment & Admissions** and click **Next**. 5. For Profiles, select the profiles that you want to have access to the home page and click **Next**. # Set Up the Referral Intake Guided Flow Quickly with Prebuilt Components Customize and activate prebuilt OmniStudio components to set up a guided flow for referral intake. Previously, you had to download an OmniStudio DataPack, deploy OmniStudio components in your Public Sector Solutions org, and then set up the guided flow. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. # Set Up the Reviewer Console Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app for application reviewers.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up the Reviewer Console:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

CRM Analytics for Education Cloud Admin
The reviewer console is where you can see the reviews assigned to you, along with your daily and upcoming tasks and events. - **[Create a Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_reviewer_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Lightning App Builder to create a reviewer console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. - **[Add Components to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_reviewer_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Lightning web components on your Reviewer Console home page. - **[Activate the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_reviewer_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. ## Create a Home Page Use Lightning App Builder to create a reviewer console home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **Home Page** and then click **Next**. 4. In the Label field, enter Reviewer Console and then click **Next**. 5. Select **Standard Home Page** and click **Finish**. Now that you created your home page, add components to the console. ## Add Components to the Home Page Configure Lightning web components on your Reviewer Console home page. ![Reviewer Console home page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/reviewer_console.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You must customize some tabs when you replicate this template. See [Add and Customize Tabs on Lightning Pages Using the Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_customize_lex_pages_add_tabs.htm&type=5). - Drag the **List View** component to the top section and set these fields (1): - For the Object field, select **Application Review**. - For the Filter field, select **My Reviews**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To keep the home page within the window and to avoid scrolling, we recommend that you set the number of records to be shown in the Ready for Decision and My Reviews List View components to 25. - Drag the **Today's Tasks** component to the right column (2). - Drag the **List View** component to the right column, just below Today's Tasks, and set these items (3): - Object: Select **Event**. - Filter: Select **My Upcoming Events**. - Number of Records to Display: Enter 2. After you add the components, save your changes and move on to the next section. ## Activate the Home Page Activate your home page and assign the home page to the profiles that you want to have access. 1. Click **Activate**. 2. Select **App and Profile**. 3. Click **Assign to Apps and Profiles**. 4. For Lightning Apps, select **Recruitment & Admissions** and click **Next**. 5. For Profiles, select the profiles that you want to have access to the home page and click **Next**. # Set Up the Student Financials Agent Configure the Student Financials Agent to answer student questions about fees. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and Revenue Cloud Billing licenses, and the applicable Agentforce add-on license. For more support, contact your Salesforce account executive.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and create an AI agent for Education Cloud:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Agentforce Service Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
1. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US). 2. Assign these permission sets to the student user: - Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access - Einstein for Education Cloud Access - Prompt Template User - Run Flows - Salesforce Pricing Runtime User - Education Cloud Student Financials for Experience Cloud Access - Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Access - Billing Einstein Experience Cloud User - Billing Experience Cloud User 3. Make sure that these object permissions are set in the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set. - Academic Term: Read - Academic Session: Read - Academic Year: Read - Academic Term Enrollment: Read - Account: Read 4. Make sure that these object permissions are set in the Education Cloud Student Financials for Experience Cloud Access permission set. - Order: Read - Order Product: Read - Academic Order: Read 5. In the Education Cloud Student Financials for Experience Cloud Access permission set, set the field-level security for the Order Details Identifier field on the Academic Order object to Visible. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Education Cloud Student Financials for Experience Cloud Access**. 3. Click **Object Settings**, and then click **Academic Order**. 4. Click **Edit**, select **Read Access** for **Order Details Identifier**, and then save your changes. 6. Update the sharing settings on objects required for the Student Financials Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify the default internal and external access for these objects. | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Order | Controlled by Parent | Controlled by Parent | | Academic Year | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Academic Term | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Academic Session | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Product | Public Read/Write | Public Read | 4. Save your changes. 7. Create a sharing set for students to access their Account and Academic Term Enrollment records. See [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&language=en_US). 8. Provide staff users the permissions to run flows. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission Sets, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Clone** next to **Education Cloud Full Access**. 3. Enter a label and an API name for the permission set, and then save your changes. 4. Click the new permission set, and then click **App Permissions**. 5. Click **Edit**, select **Run Flows**, and then save your changes. 6. Assign the new permission set to your staff users. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US). 9. Configure the EDU Student Financials: Get Fee Details for Academic Order flow and its related features to meet your needs. 10. Turn on the Student Financials Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on **Set Up Student Financial Account Management**. 3. Expand **Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud**. 4. Turn on **Student Financial Account Management Agent**. 11. [Create a Student Financial Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US) from an Agentforce Employee Agent template. 12. Configure the Student Financials Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Launch Student Financial Agent in Agentforce Builder. 3. From the sidebar, select **Subagents**. 4. On the Subagents panel, click **New**, and then select **Add from Asset Library**. 5. Select these subagents and then click **Finish**. - Student Account Management - Student Fee Management - Student Billing Inquiries 6. Use the tabs to access additional configuration options. 7. Save and activate the agent. 13. Add your agent to your Experience Cloud site portal. 1. For authenticated users, see [Connect an Employee Agent to Employee Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_deploy_emp.htm&language=en_US). 2. For unauthenticated users, see [Connect a Service Agent to Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_messaging.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up the Student Goals Agent for Advisors Configure the assistive Student Goals Agent for advisors to help advisors support students in setting well-defined, actionable goals in Education Cloud. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Agentforce for Education Cloud, and Flex Credits Metering add-on licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and create an AI agent for Education Cloud: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas."). 2. Assign these permission sets to the advisor user: - Education Cloud Full Access - Agentforce for Education Cloud Access - Prompt Template User - Data Cloud User 3. Set these object permissions in your Education Cloud Full Access permission set. - Involvement Group Members: Read - Person Competencies: Read - Person Traits: Read - Person Affinities: Read - Contact Profile: Read - Academic Term Enrollment: Read - Learner Program: Read - Goal Assignment: Create - Omni Process: Read - Assessment: Read - Assessment Question Response: Read 4. In App Permissions for your Education Cloud Full Access permission set, turn on Run Flows. 5. The EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow supports involvement groups, Discovery Framework-based assessments, learner programs, and student details (affinities, competencies, and traits). Configure the flow and its related features to meet your needs. See [Collect Data to Ground Agent Recommendations for Student Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_ground_agent_recommendations_for_student_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Collect student data using the EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow to ground agent recommendations, ensuring they are personalized and context-aware. More available information generally improves agent performance."). 6. Turn on student goals. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Setup Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on Set Up Student Goals. 7. Turn on the Student Goals Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. ExpandSet Up Agentforce for Education Cloud. 3. Turn on **Student Goals Agent**. 8. If not done, create data to ground the agent's responses. 1. [Turn on Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_setup_provision.htm&language=en_US) 2. Create a Data 360 data model object (DMO) as the data source for the Find Campus Resources agent action. [Create a custom DMO](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_custom_data_model_object.htm&language=en_US) with these values:
Field Value
Object Label Search Resource
Object Category

Other
Add fields with these values: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Search Resource ID | Text | | Name | Text | | Description | Text | | Additional Details | Text | | Usage Type | Text | Turn on Primary Key for Search Resource ID. Save your changes. 3. [Create data streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US) from these objects and map them to the Search Resource object: Program, Involvement Group, Learning Course, Action Plan Template, and Care Plan Template. If needed, you can map data streams from other Salesforce and external objects. 4. [Create a hybrid search index](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_search_index_easy_setup_search_index.htm&language=en_US) for the Search Resource object. A default retriever is created and can be viewed in AI Models, formerly Einstein Studio. 5. Configure the Get Campus Resources prompt template with the retriever. In Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. Under Prompt Templates, click **Get Campus Resources**. Click **Save As**, and then click **Save as a New Version**. Scroll to the end of the prompt, find \*\*Campus Resources\*\*, and delete the placeholder text for the retriever. Click **Insert Resource**, select **Einstein Search**, and then select the retriever created in the previous step. To view the retriever's template settings, click the retriever inserted in the prompt. For Search Text, enter Input:Query. Select the output fields. For example, select search record ID, source record id, chunk, and data source. Enter the number of results. For example, enter 15. Provide any other relevant details. Save and activate the prompt template. 9. Create an assistive Student Goals agent for advisors from an [Agentforce Employee Agent template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US). As part of the setup process, add the Advising Assist Student Goals topic to your agent. 10. Complete your setup and customize the Student Goals Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Open your Student Goals Agent. 3. Use the tabs to access more configuration options. See [Manage Agent Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.copilot_setup_settings.htm&language=en_US). 11. Control user access to individual Agentforce Employee agents (AEAs) by using permission sets or profiles. See [Manage Employee Agent Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US). See Also: - [Education Cloud Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them.") - [Configure Permissions and Access in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_permissions_access.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Your Internal Organization-Wide Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.admin_sharing.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up the Student Goals Agent for Students Configure the autonomous Student Goals Agent for students to define and achieve life goals. The AI-powered guidance is based on the student's profile, preferences, and assessment insights within the Experience Cloud site. Students can find information about campus resources, such as services, activities, clubs, programs, courses, or action plans. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Einstein for Education Cloud, and Flex Credits Metering add-on licenses.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and create an AI agent for Education Cloud: Education Cloud Full Access
1. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas."). 2. Assign these permission sets to the student user: - Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access - Einstein for Education Cloud Access - Prompt Template User - Data Cloud User 3. Set these object permissions in your Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set. - Involvement Group Members: Read - Person Competencies: Read - Person Traits: Read - Person Affinities: Read - Contact Profile: Read - Academic Term Enrollment: Read - Learner Program: Read - Goal Assignment: Create - Account: Read - Omni Process: Read - Assessment: Read - Assessment Question Response: Read 4. Share these object records by using sharing sets or org-wide sharing. See [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&language=en_US). 5. In App Permissions for your Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set, turn on Run Flows. 6. The EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow supports involvement groups, Discovery Framework-based assessments, learner programs, and student details (affinities, competencies, and traits). Configure the flow and its related features to meet your needs. See [Collect Data to Ground Agent Recommendations for Student Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_ground_agent_recommendations_for_student_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Collect student data using the EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow to ground agent recommendations, ensuring they are personalized and context-aware. More available information generally improves agent performance."). 7. Turn on student goals. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Setup Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on Set Up Student Goals. 8. Turn on the Student Goals Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Expand Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud. 3. Turn on **Student Goals Agent**. 9. If not done, create data to ground the agent's responses. 1. [Turn on Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_setup_provision.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create a Data 360 data model object (DMO) as the data source for the Find Campus Resources agent action. [Create a custom DMO](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_custom_data_model_object.htm&language=en_US) with these values:
Field Value
Object Label Search Resource
Object Category

Other
Add fields with these values: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Search Resource ID | Text | | Name | Text | | Description | Text | | Additional Details | Text | | Usage Type | Text | Turn on Primary Key for Search Resource ID. Save your changes. 3. [Create data streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US) from these objects and map them to the Search Resource object: Program, Involvement Group, Learning Course, Action Plan Template, and Care Plan Template. If needed, you can map data streams from other Salesforce and external objects. 4. [Create a hybrid search index](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_search_index_easy_setup_search_index.htm&language=en_US) for the Search Resource object. A default retriever is created and can be viewed in AI Models, formerly Einstein Studio. 5. Configure the Get Campus Resources prompt template with the retriever. In Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. Under Prompt Templates, click **Get Campus Resources**. Click **Save As**, and then click **Save as a New Version**. Scroll to the end of the prompt, find \*\*Campus Resources\*\*, and delete the placeholder text for the retriever. Click **Insert Resource**, select **Einstein Search**, and then select the retriever created in the previous step. To view the retriever's template settings, click the retriever inserted in the prompt. For Search Text, enter Input:Query. Select the output fields. For example, select search record ID, source record id, chunk, and data source. Enter the number of results. For example, enter 15. Provide any other relevant details. Save and activate the prompt template. 10. Create an autonomous Student Goals agent for students from an [Agentforce Employee Agent template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US). As part of the setup process, add the Self Serve Student Goals topic to your agent. 11. Complete your setup and customize the Student Goals Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Open your Student Goals Agent. 3. Use the tabs to access more configuration options. See [Manage Agent Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.copilot_setup_settings.htm&language=en_US). 12. Add the Student Goals Agent for students agent to your [Experience Cloud site with Messaging for Web](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_deploy_emp_messaging.htm&language=en_US). 13. Control user access to individual Agentforce Employee agents (AEAs) by using permission sets or profiles. See [Manage Employee Agent Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US). See Also: - [Education Cloud Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them.") - [Configure Permissions and Access in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_permissions_access.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Your Internal Organization-Wide Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.admin_sharing.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up the Student Management App Centralize key information in student records: emergency contacts, relationships, student contact information, and enrollment data. Streamline administrative processes and give students, staff, and faculty a better experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To enable and configure Student Management: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up the Student Management App, turn on **Student Management**. When prompted to confirm, click **Turn On**. # Set Up the Student Profile Configure a profile so that students can access Student Success Hub in a portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. Student Success Hub installs two student profiles that you can work from: SSH Sample Student Profile, which is based on the Customer Community Plus license, and SSH Sample Student Login Profile, based on the Customer Community Plus Login license. They have identical permissions; the only difference is the license. We recommend that you clone one, which preserves the profile's permissions and access settings. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Look for SSH Sample Student Profile or SSH Sample Student Login Profile and click **Clone**. 3. Rename the profile and save it. 4. Then, [configure student permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal.") as needed. # Set Up the Student Recruitment Agent Configure the Student Recruitment Agent to answer questions about your school’s learning programs, support programs, application process, and campus information. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and create an AI agent for Education Cloud:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Agentforce Service Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
1. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Agentforce in Education Cloud to create AI-powered virtual agents to help students, parents, and staff get the information they need, when they need it. Einstein Generative AI for Education Cloud powers the virtual agents that can answer questions about admissions, enrollment, financial aid, and other relevant areas."). 2. Clone, customize, and assign the Education Cloud AI Agent Access permission set to internal AI agent users. 1. Set these object and field permissions.
Object Object Permissions Field Permissions
Academic Interest Create, Read
  • Academic Term: Read, Edit
  • Account: Read, Edit
  • Contact: Read, Edit
  • Contact Request: Read, Edit
  • Educational Info Request: Read, Edit
  • Learning Program: Read, Edit
  • Received Date: Read, Edit
  • Subscription: Read, Edit
Academic Term Read
  • Active: Read
  • Start Date: Read
Account Create, Read Use default selections.
Action Plan Read Use default selections.
Action Plan Template Read Use default selections.
Application Stage Definition Read Use default selections.
Application Timeline Read
  • Application Category: Read
  • Application Close Date: Read
  • Application Close Date Time: Read
  • Application Open Date: Read
Campaign Read Use default selections.
Contact Read Account: Read
Contact Request Read Use default selections.
Educational Info Request Read Use default selections.
Individual Application Task Read Application Stage Definition: Read
Learning Read Academic Level: Read
Learning Program Read
  • Academic Level: Read
  • Active: Read
Preliminary Application Reference Read Use default selections.
Program Term Application Timeline Read
  • Academic Term: Read
  • Action Plan Template Version: Read
  • Application Timeline: Read
  • Learning Program: Read
2. Select these system permissions: - Access Education Cloud Components - Access Education Cloud Objects - Permission to access the Action Plans feature 3. For internal sharing, give Public Read Only access to these objects: - Academic Interest - Academic Term - Action Plan Template - Application Timeline - Learning - Program Term Application Timeline 4. For the Campus, Tours, Visits, and Events Registration topic, add Recruitment Event as a picklist value for the Type field on the Campaign object. 5. Define campaign sharing rules for campus tours. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Sharing Settings**. 2. From Manage sharing settings for:, select **Campaigns**. 3. In the Campaign Sharing Rules related list, click **New**. 4. Enter Campus Tours as the label. Press tab to automatically create the rule name. 5. Select **Based on criteria** as the rule type. 6. Select the records to share: - Field: **Type**. - Operator: **Equals** - Value: Recruitment Event 7. In the Select the users to share with section, select **Portal Roles** and a portal account. 8. Select **Read Only** as the campaign access. 6. For the Create Admissions Application topic, create and configure record types for the Individual Application object. 1. [Create an Individual Application record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_individual_application_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To store the preferences of an applicant during enrollment, set up the individual application object in Education Cloud."). Assign this record type to the Customer Community Plus, Einstein Agent User, and System Administrator profiles. 2. [Configure an application record type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_application_record_type_configuration_in_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To use applications with Education Cloud, configure an application record type for the individual application object."). 7. For the Create Admissions Application topic, create a filter and assign it to the **Create Admissions Application** action. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Open your Student Recruitment Agent, and click the **Topics** tab. 3. Select the **Create Admissions Application** topic, and then click the **This Topic's Actions** tab. 4. Select the **Create Admissions Application** action, and then click **Edit**. 5. In the Filter section, click **New Filter**. 6. Enter a name. 7. Set the filter condition. | Resources | Operator | | --- | --- | | Contact Id | Is Not Empty | 8. Save your changes. 8. [Create data streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US) for the Learning Program object to get CRM data into Data Cloud. 9. [Create a hybrid search index](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_search_index_easy_setup_search_index.htm&language=en_US) for the Learning Program data stream. 10. To include the application close time in the agent's deadline responses, add the **Application Close Date Time** field to the Application Timeline data artifacts. The agent returns the close time in UTC rather than the applicant's local timezone. 1. Add the field to the Application Timeline [data stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_add_new_source_fields.htm&language=en_US) and [hybrid search index](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_search_index_easy_setup_search_index.htm&language=en_US). 2. Add the field to the Application Timeline [data retriever](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_ai_retriever_create.htm&language=en_US&type=5). 3. [Clone the standard prompt template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.prompt_builder_build_template.htm&language=en_US) so that it uses the updated data retriever. 11. [Create knowledge articles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_recruitment_agent_knowledge_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create knowledge articles to ground the Student Recruitment Agent’s responses. The Student Recruitment Agent includes a topic, Admissions And Enrollments FAQ, that uses the Answer Questions with Knowledge action.") to ground the responses. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note When you create your agent in a later step, you set up a data library for the agent to reference your knowledge articles. 12. Turn on the Student Recruitment Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Expand **Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud**. 3. Turn on Enable Student Recruitment Agent. 13. [Create an agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_setup_create.htm&language=en_US) for prospects, students, and parents. 1. For authenticated users, create an agent from an Agentforce employee agent template. 2. For unauthenticated users, create an agent from an Agentforce service agent template. 3. Add the [Student Recruitment Agent topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_recruitment_agent_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) subagents to answer questions, create Academic Interest records, and start applications. You can also provide information about campus tours, visits, and events. These subagents ensure prospective students receive the information they need. This leads to a smoother and more informed enrollment process.") from the asset library to your agent. 14. Complete your setup and customize the Student Recruitment Agent. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Agentforce Agents**. 2. Open your Student Recruitment Agent. 3. Use the tabs to access more configuration options. 15. Manage access to agents. 1. For authenticated users, see [Manage Employee Agent Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_manage_aea_access.htm&language=en_US). 2. For unauthenticated users, see [Best Practices for Agent User Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_user.htm&language=en_US). 16. Add your agent to your Experience Cloud site portal. - For authenticated users, see [Connect an Employee Agent to Employee Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_deploy_emp.htm&language=en_US). - For unauthenticated users, see [Connect a Service Agent to Messaging](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_messaging.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can connect an inbound channel, such as an Experience Cloud site, to only one agent at a time. Create one Experience Cloud site for authenticated users and another for unauthenticated users. 17. The Student Recruitment Agent shows users the JSON output from actions. Customize your Experience Cloud site to improve the user experience and control what the agent shows. 1. [Add markup to the page ``](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&type=5&language=en_US) by entering this script. ``` ``` 2. In Security & Privacy, [select a security level](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_scriptlevel.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For Security Level, select **Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts**. 3. Add your Experience Cloud site as a trusted site for scripts. See [Where to Allow Hosts of Script Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_allow.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To locate the URL of your site, from Setup, find and select **Digital Experiences**, and then click **All Sites**. Find the URL of your site in the All Sites list view. 4. Publish your site. See Also: - [Education Cloud Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_education_cloud_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported editions for Education Cloud. Then learn about permissions and how to assign them.") - [Configure Permissions and Access in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_permissions_access.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Your Internal Organization-Wide Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.admin_sharing.htm&language=en_US) # Set Up the Student Snapshot Let support staff quickly see key details by configuring the Student Snapshot component on the Student Record Case page. - **[Learn About the Student Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Snapshot, a Lightning web component that appears on the Student Record Case page, highlights essential details about a student. The default configuration depends on the Student Success Hub version you install. - **[Allow Student Snapshot Field Customization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Allow customization of the fields that appear in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case page. - **[Customize the Student Snapshot Field Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To highlight the data that's most important to see at a glance, you can customize the fields that appear in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case page. Use the Student Snapshot Details field set that comes with Student Success Hub. - **[Use a Student's Chosen Full Name in the Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, the Student Snapshot shows the first and last name from the student's Contact record, which tends to be the student's legal name. However, you can show a student's chosen full name instead. The chosen full name is the name the student prefers, which could differ from their legal name. - **[Add Student Photos to the Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub allows you to add photos to the Snapshot so that support staff have a picture of the student to go with the name. - **[Customize the Item Counters in the Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The counters that appear by default in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case page depend on the Student Success Hub version that you install. - **[Show the Snapshot on Lightning Record Pages for Other Case Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Snapshot shows data related to the student's open Case record, but the data—and the component—can be shown on page layouts for other Case record types. ## Learn About the Student Snapshot The Student Snapshot, a Lightning web component that appears on the Student Record Case page, highlights essential details about a student. The default configuration depends on the Student Success Hub version you install. By default, the K-12 Student Snapshot shows: - The student Contact's name. - A photo of the student, if one is provided. - A headline field that shows the student Contact's related Account. - Item counters, including the number of unresolved Alerts and the number of open Success Plans associated with the student's Case. - Detail fields that include the student's Case Status and their email address. ![The K-12 Student Snapshot component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_student_snapshot_k12.png) By default, the higher ed Student Snapshot shows: - The student Contact's name. - A photo of the student, if one is specified. The photo is either the student's User photo, which the student uploads to the portal, or one that you [upload and define using a custom setting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let support staff quickly see key details by configuring the Student Snapshot component on the Student Record Case page."). - Headline fields that show the student Contact's primary academic program and the student Contact's primary department affiliation, if specified. - Item counters that include the number of incomplete Tasks, the number of unresolved Alerts, and the number of upcoming scheduled appointments. - Detail fields that show the date of the student's last appointment with a support staff member, the Status of the Student Record Case, and the student's FERPA status (an EDA Contact field). ![The higher ed Student Snapshot component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_student_snapshot_hed.png) The Student Snapshot is highly customizable. You can change the content of the headline, detail fields, and item counters. You can also show a student's chosen full name instead of their legal name. And you can [upload photos](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Let support staff quickly see key details by configuring the Student Snapshot component on the Student Record Case page.") to give support staff a picture to go with the student's name. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When Salesforce is licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites, an abridged version of the Student Snapshot appears in the Appointment Manager, where it's called the Attendee Snapshot. You can't customize the fields and counters in the Attendee Snapshot. The Attendee Snapshot always shows the date of the student's last appointment, if any, and the Tasks and Alerts counters. ## Allow Student Snapshot Field Customization Allow customization of the fields that appear in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case page. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Configure the Student Snapshot settings. 1. Select **Customize Student Snapshot Fields**. You can restore the default configuration at any time. In new Student Success Hub installations, Customize Student Snapshot Fields is selected by default. 2. For Student Snapshot Headline Fields, specify how many headline fields to show. You can show up to 4. If you don't want any headline fields, enter 0. 5. Save your changes. After you allow Snapshot field customization, edit the field set to show the data you want support staff to see. ## Customize the Student Snapshot Field Set To highlight the data that's most important to see at a glance, you can customize the fields that appear in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case page. Use the Student Snapshot Details field set that comes with Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Editing the Student Snapshot Details field set is the only way to customize Student Snapshot fields. Other field sets are not supported. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, select **Case**, then select **Field Sets**. 2. Next to Student Snapshot Details, select **Edit** from the dropdown menu. 3. Drag fields you want in the field set. 4. Save your changes. 5. Go to any Student Record Case, refresh the page, and confirm your changes. Keep in mind these guidelines when selecting fields. - You can use standard, custom, or EDA fields from the Student Record Case, related Contact, or related Account. If you created a K-12 Student Success Hub org, you can also use K-12 Architecture Kit fields from the Student Record Case, related Contact, or related Account. - Headline fields appear prominently under the student's name. For example, if you specify a value of 2 in the Student Snapshot Headline Fields custom setting, the Snapshot displays the first two fields in the list as headlines—without field labels and with hyperlinks if they're lookup fields. This means that only fields showing self-explanatory values are well-suited to serve as headlines. Checkbox fields and variants of date/time fields are _not_ good headline candidates. - The vertical order of the In the Field Set list reflects the display order in the Snapshot. Headline fields, if any, show at the top of the Snapshot under the student's name. All other fields display below the item counters. - Formatting is optimized for the type of data in the field. Lookup field values render as hyperlinks. Rich text area fields retain their formatting, which means you can include images in the Snapshot—icons, thumbnails, badges, even animated GIFs! - Fields that don't have a value don't appear in the Snapshot—except checkboxes, which show even if the box is not selected. - Encrypted fields aren't supported. - The field set can have up to 25 fields through lookup relationships. Fields can only span one level away from the entity. ## Use a Student's Chosen Full Name in the Snapshot By default, the Student Snapshot shows the first and last name from the student's Contact record, which tends to be the student's legal name. However, you can show a student's chosen full name instead. The chosen full name is the name the student prefers, which could differ from their legal name. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Chosen Full Name Field, enter the API name of the field you're using for a chosen name. For example, enter hed\_\_Chosen\_Full\_Name\_\_c to use the Chosen Full Name field provided in EDA and K-12 Architecture Kit. The value of your selected field needs to include the student's salutation, first name, last name, suffixes, and so on. 5. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When Salesforce is licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites, the chosen full name also shows in the Attendee Snapshot in the Appointment Manager. If you want support staff to also see the student's chosen full name elsewhere in Student Success Hub, you'll need to update the layouts, related lists, and fields where it appears in the app. You can also consider mapping student legal names to a custom field. Deciding where else to display the chosen name is entirely up to you. Here are some ideas. - Contact page layout - Contact search layouts - Fields on the Contacts related list - Compact layouts, such as the one used by the highlights panel on the Student Record Case - Fields on actions, such as the one used by the Related Record component that displays a student's Contact Details on the Student Record Case (sometimes you need to create a new update action) - Other layouts that display the Contact Name, such as Program Enrollment and other EDA and K-12 Architecture Kit layouts. Sometimes you need to use a formula field or other method to populate the chosen name field on certain objects. ## Add Student Photos to the Snapshot Student Success Hub allows you to add photos to the Snapshot so that support staff have a picture of the student to go with the name. First, define the field on the Contact object that will contain the photo—or more precisely, that will contain the ID of the latest document version (Content Version) of the photo. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, select **Contact**. 2. Select **Fields & Relationships,** then click **New**. 3. For Data Type, select **Text**, then click **Next**. 4. For Field Label, enter a value such as Student Photo. The Field Name is automatically populated with Student\_Photo. 5. For Length, specify 18, then click **Next**. 6. Make sure the field is visible on the System Administrator and support staff profiles, then click **Next**. 7. Include the Student Photo field on any Contact page layouts you use. 8. Save the field. Next, tell the Student Snapshot to use your newly created field to retrieve the photo. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Custom Settings, then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Next to SSH Hierarchy Settings, click **Manage**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Contact Photo File ID Field, enter the API name of the field on the Contact object that you're using to contain the photo's Content Version. For example, enter Student\_Photo\_\_c. 5. Save your changes. Now that Student Success Hub is configured to find student photos for the Snapshot, upload photos for it to use and associate each photo with the correct student Contact record. For best results, use photos with a 1:1 (square) aspect ratio. ### Upload photos to the Contact Record BULK UPLOAD To upload photos in bulk—such as to use the photos from your institution's Student Information System (SIS) or Student ID system—use Data Loader to insert the files to the Content Version object and to associate each photo with the correct Contact record. For instructions, see [Insert files with Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000314772&type=1&mode=1) in Salesforce Help. And watch the Salesforce How-To Series video: [How to Insert Files with Data Loader](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r0zLAd3mEsM) SINGLE UPLOAD To upload a single photo for a single student—say, for testing—go to the student's Contact record. On the Files related list, click Upload Files and upload a .gif, .png, or .jpg image for the record. For more information, see [Attach Files to Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=experience.collab_files_attach_records.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. Find the uploaded photo's Content Version by using Data Loader or by running a SOQL query, and enter it in the Student Photo field you created on the Contact object. ### Upload photos to the Contact Record ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When Salesforce is licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites, if a student has uploaded a profile picture _and_ you have configured a Salesforce File to use as a photo, the Salesforce File overrides the profile picture and shows in the Snapshot. If there's no profile picture and no Salesforce File, a placeholder icon shows. ## Customize the Item Counters in the Snapshot The counters that appear by default in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case page depend on the Student Success Hub version that you install. In SSH for higher ed, the default Snapshot shows the number of incomplete Tasks, the number of unresolved Alerts, and the number of upcoming scheduled appointments for the student. In In SSH for K-12, the default Snapshot shows the number of unresolved Alerts and the number of open Success Plans for the student. You can show up to three counters and choose the information they show. - Alerts - Appointments - Success Plans - Tasks Of course, your institution's Salesforce must be licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites in order for the Appointments and Tasks counters to show data. And support staff must have the necessary permissions to view the selected objects in order to see the counters. For details, see [Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") 1. In Student Success Hub, open a Student Record Case record. 2. Click the Setup icon and select **Edit Page**. 3. Select the Student Snapshot in the Lightning page canvas. 4. In the component's properties pane, select the items you want to show (up to three). To not show any counters in the Snapshot, deselect all options. Show Appointment Information If selected, the Student Snapshot shows the number of upcoming appointments and the date of the student's last appointment. Show Tasks If selected, the Student Snapshot shows the number of incomplete Tasks assigned to the student. Show Alerts If selected, the Student Snapshot shows the number of unresolved Alerts associated with the student. Show Success Plans If selected, the Student Snapshot shows the number of open Success Plans associated with the Student Record Case, including both published and non-published Success Plans. 5. Save your changes and exit Lightning App Builder. Your changes appear on the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case. ## Show the Snapshot on Lightning Record Pages for Other Case Types The Student Snapshot shows data related to the student's open Case record, but the data—and the component—can be shown on page layouts for other Case record types. For example, maybe you'd like to see it on Cases your institution uses to track IT tickets. If so, you can add the Student Snapshot to the Lightning page layouts for those Case record types. Remember: The Snapshot only shows data associated with Student Case Records whose Status is an Open value. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note To see the data, Users who work with those Case pages must have the necessary permissions to view the objects used by the Snapshot. For details, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") . 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, select **Case**. 2. Click **Lightning Record Pages** and click the page for the desired record type. For example, click **Support Queue**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Drag **Student Snapshot** from the Components panel to the Lightning page canvas and position it where you want it to appear. 5. If desired, in the properties pane, select different items to show in the Snapshot. Changes affect the Snapshot as it appears only on the Lightning record page you're editing, not the Student Record Case page. 6. Save your changes and exit Lightning App Builder. # Set Up the Student Success App Configure Student Success in Education Cloud to provide proactive and personalized support to learners across academics, financial aid, careers, and life goals.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable and configure Student Success: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up the Student Success App, turn on **Student Success**. If prompted to confirm, click **Turn On**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note When enabled: - The Student Success app is available from the App Launcher. - Configuration settings for the Timeline component are available. To use Timeline, enable it. - Picklist values for Education Cloud are available for fields on objects case and program management objects. 3. Create a support process. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Support Processes, and then select **Support Processes**. 2. Click **New**. 3. For Existing Support Process, select **Master**. 4. Enter a support process name. For example, enter Student Advising. 5. Optionally, enter a description for the support process. 6. Save your work. 7. Leave Case Status as is, and then click **Save**. 4. Create case record types for learner advising. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Create Advising Case Record Types, click **Create Case Record Types**. 3. In Object Manager, on the Record Types page for Case, click **New**. 4. For Existing Record Type, select **Master**. 5. Enter a record type label and then press Tab to automatically populate the record type name.. For example, enter Health. 6. For Support Process, select **Student Advising**. 7. Optionally, provide a description for the record type. 8. Select **Active**. 9. Select profile permissions, and then click **Next**. 10. Save your work. 5. Create success teams for learners. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Success Teams, click **Set Up Success Teams**. 3. On the Success Teams page, click **New**. 4. Enter a name for the success team. 5. Select the case record type. 6. Select a case team. 7. Provide any other details, and then save your changes. 6. Enable care plans for learners. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Care Plans, click **Enable Care Plans**. 3. On the Care Plan Settings page, turn on care plans. 7. Enable Salesforce Scheduler. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Salesforce Scheduler, click **Set Up Salesforce Scheduler**. See [Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before you set up the appointment feature, turn on Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud."). # Set Up the Student Success Hub App Configure Student Success Hub so that support staff can start using it, and customize it to fit your institution's needs. - **[Set Up Student Success Hub App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks for basic configuration of your Student Success Hub app. - **[Set Up Contact and Case Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_contact_case_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Contact and Case page layouts in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up the Student Snapshot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_snapshot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let support staff quickly see key details by configuring the Student Snapshot component on the Student Record Case page. - **[Customize the Student Details Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_student_details.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Student Details component in the Student Success Hub app to show the most relevant data for your support staff. - **[Set Up Cases List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_list_views.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize Cases list views to make them more productive for support staff who use Student Success Hub. - **[Configure the Appointment Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_manager.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to make it easy for support staff to work with the Appointment Manager in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up Cases for Appointments and Student Tasks](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_cases_appointments_tasks.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to make it easier for support staff to work with Student Record Cases in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up Your Support Staff to Better Serve All Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to allow support staff to identify students who haven't had a recent support appointment. # Set Up the Volunteer Management Agent The Volunteer Management Agent helps your team manage volunteer shift capacity and coverage. Configure the Shift Capacity and Coverage subagent to add those capabilities to an Agentforce Employee Agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Volunteer Management is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents

AND

Manage Volunteer Data
1. Make sure that Volunteer Management is enabled in your org. For more information, see [Set Up Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Volunteer Management for your organization. Assign permissions, turn on the feature, configure locations and operating hours, and set a default status for job position assignments."). 2. Set Up Agentforce in your org. - For Nonprofit Cloud, see [Agentforce for Nonprofit Cloud Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_agentforce_for_nonprofit_cloud_prerequisites.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get your Nonprofit Cloud org set up to implement Agentforce agents."). - For Education Cloud, see [Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US). 3. [Create an agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US) from the Agentforce Employee Agent template, or edit an existing agent that’s based on the Agentforce Employee Agent. 4. Add the Shift Capacity and Coverage subagent to the agent. 1. In Agent Builder, go to **Topics**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Click **Add from Asset Library**, and select the **Shift Capacity and Coverage** topic. # Set Up Topic-Based Availability Complete these tasks to get Topic-based availability up and running in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Topic-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** No one likes to talk about Christmas in June, and support staff typically don't conduct graduation audits in September. Help support staff optimize their scheduling through the seasons by using Topic-based availability, which lets them associate their recurring availability blocks with appointment Topics and Subtopics. - **[Topic-Based Availability Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Availability Topic object was released with Student Success Hub 2.46 (Winter '21). - **[Topic-Based Availability Requirements and Limits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topic-based availability requires the location-based availability data model. Make sure it's set up first. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Topic-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Topic-based availability requires access to the Availability Topic object. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Topic-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Availability Topic object. - **[Understand the Support Staff Experience with Topic-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After permissions and sharing settings are configured for Availability Topic, support staff can choose from a multi-select Topic picklist on the New Availability form. The Topic picklist displays Topic:Subtopic pairs; support staff can select one, some, all, or none of the items. Choosing no Topics in the picklist is equivalent to selecting all Topics. As with selecting from the Location multi-select picklist in the New Availability form, support staff must save their selections before specifying the times and frequency of the recurring availability block. ## Learn About Topic-Based Availability No one likes to talk about Christmas in June, and support staff typically don't conduct graduation audits in September. Help support staff optimize their scheduling through the seasons by using Topic-based availability, which lets them associate their recurring availability blocks with appointment Topics and Subtopics. For example, support staff can set up a recurring block during August and September dedicated to scheduling, and a different block for March through May dedicated to graduation audits. They can add additional Topics to those availability blocks as desired, so they can also be available to discuss study abroad planning, for example, whenever it's a hot topic with students. Topic-based availability uses the Availability Topic custom object, a junction object that relates a support staff member's Availability and Topic records. Here's how the Availability Topic object relates to Availability and Topic, as well as to the standard Salesforce Event and User objects, shown in blue. ![A diagram showing the lookup relationships between the Availability, Availability Topic, and Topic custom objects and the Event and User standard objects](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_erd_topic_based_avail.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important To ensure that topic-based availability works as expected, do _not_ customize the Availability Topic object beyond what's described in this setup article. ## Topic-Based Availability Release Information The Availability Topic object was released with Student Success Hub 2.46 (Winter '21). To get Topic-based availability up and running in your org, complete the tasks in this article. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don't know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Topic-Based Availability Requirements and Limits Topic-based availability requires the location-based availability data model. Make sure it's set up first. Relate fewer than 200 Availability Topics with each Availability. Exceeding this limit prevents you from deleting the Availability due to Salesforce platform query limits. See [Set Up Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get location-based availability (flex scheduling) up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") for everything you need to do before continuing. ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Topic-Based Availability Topic-based availability requires access to the Availability Topic object. See [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Topic-Based Availability Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Availability Topic object. See [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Understand the Support Staff Experience with Topic-Based Availability After permissions and sharing settings are configured for Availability Topic, support staff can choose from a multi-select Topic picklist on the New Availability form. The Topic picklist displays Topic:Subtopic pairs; support staff can select one, some, all, or none of the items. Choosing no Topics in the picklist is equivalent to selecting all Topics. As with selecting from the Location multi-select picklist in the New Availability form, support staff must save their selections before specifying the times and frequency of the recurring availability block. ![The Topic multi-select picklist with the Academic:Scheduling and Academic:Study Abroad pairs selected, and saved.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_setup_availability_topic_picklists.png) When support staff schedule appointments using the Predefined Availability tab in the New Appointment form, they can choose any time slot in their recurring availability blocks, regardless of which Topics (and locations) they've associated with the blocks. This ability to override their defined Availability Settings gives support staff the greatest amount of flexibility and control over their scheduling. Students, however, _can't_ override a staff member's Availability Settings when scheduling appointments in the portal. When you enable Topic-based availability, encourage your support staff to review existing recurring availability blocks and update them with the appropriate Topics and Subtopics. By default, existing availability blocks are associated with all Topic and Subtopics. # Set Up Transfer Credit Agent Configure the Transfer Credit Agent to provide estimates of transferable credits for unauthenticated guest users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To set up the Transfer Credit Agent:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Agentforce Service Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents

AND

Data Cloud Architect

AND

Prompt Template Manager
## Prerequisites for Transfer Credit Agent Configuration 1. [Set up your org for Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them."). 2. [Prepare the data for Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up learning records and equivalencies to evaluate applicants’ prior learning for transfer credit. Map source achievements to the achievements your institution grants, then publish and activate the equivalency. These rules serve as the source of truth for your articulation and admissions staff."). 3. [Configure the Transfer Credit Agent flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_transfer_credit_agent_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To give unauthenticated guest users access to the Transfer Credit Agent, clone and modify the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account and EDU Admissions: Create Prior Learning Evaluation flows."). 4. [Set up Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 5. [Set up Agentforce for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_agentforce_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US&type=5). ## Configure Data 360 Resources for the Transfer Credit Agent 1. [Create a data stream](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_create_crm_data_stream.htm&language=en_US&type=5) for each of the Account, External Learning, and Learning Program objects to ingest Salesforce CRM data into Data 360. For the Account data stream, include the Is Person Account field. For the External Learning data stream, include the Provider and Active fields. 2. [Create a formula field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_formula_expression_library.htm&type=5&language=en_US) in the External Learning data stream. This formula field turns the Active text field into a boolean field. When providing the details, 1. Give the field a distinct label. For example, Active Formula. 2. For Formula Return Type, select **Boolean**. 3. From the Attributes tab, select **Active**. 4. For Transformation Formula, update the formula to make the Active text field a boolean field. 3. Map the formula field that you created to the Is Active field on the External Learning data model object. 1. From the Data Streams tab, find and select the External Learning data stream that you created. 2. Click **Start Data Mapping**. 3. On the Data Model entities canvas, click **Select Objects**. 4. Add **External Learning** and click **Done**. 5. On the External Learning data stream canvas, select the formula field that you created. 6. Click the Is Active field on the Data Model entities canvas to establish the mapping connection. A confirmation appears with an arrow connecting the fields. 7. Save your changes. 8. On the External Learning data stream page, click **Refresh Now** to ingest the data into the data model object. 4. Map the Is Person Account field in the Account data stream to a custom Is Person Account field on the Account data model object. 1. From the Data Streams tab, find and select the Account data stream that you created. 2. Click **Start Data Mapping**. 3. On the Data Model entities canvas, click **Select Objects**. 4. Add **Account** and click **Done**. 5. On the Data Model entities canvas, expand **Unmapped**, and then click **Add New Field**. 6. Enter Is Person Account as the field label and API name, and then select **Text** as the data type. 7. Save your changes. 8. Map Is Person Account in the Account data stream to Is Person Account on the Account data model object. 9. Refresh the Account data stream to ingest the data into the data model object. 5. [Create a hybrid search index](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_hybridsearch_index_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for each of the Account, External Learning, and Learning Program objects. 1. For Chunking, add these fields to Account and External Learning. - Account: Is Person Account - External Learning: Provider, Name, Status, and Field of Study If needed, add more fields that you want to use for searching and filtering. 2. For Fields for Filtering, add these fields to Account and External Learning. - Account: Is Person Account - External Learning: Provider and Is Active If needed, add more fields that you want to use for filtering. 6. [Create an individual data retriever](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_ai_retriever_create.htm&language=en_US&type=5) for each of the Account, External Learning, and Learning Program objects. 1. For Define Retriever Results, define a filter to narrow the search results for Account and External Learning. - For Account, add this condition. | Dynamic | Field | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Unselected | Is Person Account | Equal To | False | - For External Learning, add these conditions. | Dynamic | Field | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Unselected | Is Active | Equal To | True | | Selected | Provider | Equal To | {$Provider} | 2. For Configure Retriever Results, specify these fields to return for Account and External Learning. - For Account, Account Id. - For External Learning, specify Name, External Learning Id, Learning, Status, Provider, and Is Active. To present more information to the users, add more fields to return. ## Update Prompt Templates for the Transfer Credit Agent 1. Use the data retriever to update the Get External Learning Data prompt template. 1. From Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Under Prompt Templates, select **Get External Learning Data**. 3. Click **Save As** and click **Save as a New Version**. 4. Scroll to the end of the prompt, find PLACEHOLDER\_FOR\_DATA\_RETRIEVER, and then delete the placeholder text. 5. Click **Insert Resource**, and under Actions, select **Search**. 6. Click **Configure Search**, and then select the retriever that you created for External Learning. 7. In Search Text, enter Input:externalLearningNames. 8. For Output Fields, select the fields that you specified to return in the External Learning data retriever. 9. For pre-filter, select **input:institutionID**. 10. Apply and insert the resource. 11. Save and activate the prompt template. 2. Similarly, update the Get Institution Data and Get Learning Programs prompt templates. 1. For Get Institution Data, only update the Search Text field. Enter Input:institutionName. 2. For Get Learning Programs, only update the Search Text field. Enter Input:learningProgramName. ## Create the Transfer Credit Agent 1. Turn on the Transfer Credit Agent. 1. From Setup, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Under Set Up Agentforce for Education Cloud, turn on **Student Recruitment and Transfer Credit Agent**. 2. [Create an Agentforce Service agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_setup.htm&language=en_US&type=5) for guest users. As part of the setup process, add the Transfer Credit Equivalency subagent and customize the subagent instructions. Customization makes sure that the agent provides accurate information about your institution that matches your academic policies and terminology. 3. [Remove any unnecessary subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_topics_remove.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 4. [Update the email address for the Einstein Agent User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000387986&type=1&language=en_US). Replace the default email address with an email address that you can access. 5. Verify the email address for the Einstein Agent User. See [Requirements to Send Email from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_email_verification_requirements.htm&language=en_US&type=5). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important To send and receive email verification codes to guest users, the Transfer Credit Agent requires domain-level and user-level email verification. Email delivery fails if either the Einstein Agent User's email address or the email-sending domain is unverified. 6. Clone, customize, and assign the Education Cloud AI Agent Access permission set to the Einstein Agent User. 1. Set these object and field permissions in your permission set.
Object Object permissions Field permissions
Account Read, Create, Edit Read for these fields:
  • Account Name
  • Account Owner
Contact Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Email
Course Credit Transfer Application Read, Create, Edit Read and Edit for these fields:
  • Learning Name
  • Learning Identifier
  • Requested Learning
  • Provider
  • Learning Letter Grade
  • Learning Numeric Grade
  • Type
  • Learning Academic Season
  • Learning Academic Year
  • Learning Duration
  • Prior Learning Evaluation
  • Owner Name
  • For Estimate
External Learning Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Learning
  • Provider
  • Active
Learning Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Type
  • Previous Learning Version
  • Revised Learning Version
  • Learning System ID
  • Version
Learning Achievement Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Record Type
Learning Course Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Learning
  • Provider
  • Active From Date
  • Active To Date
  • CIP Code
  • Academic Level
  • Active
  • Description
  • Linked Only
  • Course Type
  • Previous Learning Version
  • Revised Learning Version
  • Learning System ID
  • Version
Learning Equivalency Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Active
  • Published
  • Start Date
  • End Date
  • Type
  • Category
  • Status
Learning Equivalency Learning Read Read for these fields:
  • Learning
  • Learning Equivalency
Learning Equivalency Achievement Mapping Read Read for these fields:
  • Learning Equivalency
  • Source
  • Target
Learning Outcome Item Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Learning
  • Learning Achievement
  • Duration
  • Duration Unit
  • Category
  • Minimum Numeric Grade
  • Minimum Letter Grade
  • Primary
  • Created Date
Learning Program Read Read for these fields:
  • Name
  • Academic Level
  • Active
Prior Learning Evaluation Read, Create, Edit Read and Edit for these fields:
  • Name
  • Account
  • Contact
  • Owner Name
  • Parent Prior Learning Evaluation
  • Request
  • Result
Product Read Use default selections.
2. Assign these record types to the Account object. - Business - College - Military - Person Account - Secondary School 3. Select these system permissions. - Access Education Cloud Components - Access Education Cloud Objects - Permission to access the Action Plans feature 4. For internal sharing, update your org-wide sharing settings to give Public Read Only access to these objects. - Learning - Learning Equivalency ## Configure the Transfer Credit Agent Modify these agent actions to verify a guest user's identity before creating any data about them. These configurations make sure that the agent generates data and shares it with a guest user securely. 1. In the Agent Builder, create a filter and add it to the Create Prior Learning Evaluation action. See [Features in Actions Available for Reasoning in Building Agents in Canvas View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_canvas.htm&type=5&language=en_US). The filter checks the value of the `isVerified` variable. Your agent only calls the Create Prior Learning Evaluation action when the filter condition is met. Name the filter isVerified, and then set the filter condition. | Resources | Operator | Value | | --- | --- | --- | | isVerified | Equal | True | 2. [Create variables](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_builder_variables_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US) to store and reuse the verification email address, account ID, contact ID, and verified email address of a guest user. Give each variable an easily identifiable name. For example: | Name | API Name | Data Type | Allow value to be set by API | Allow LLM to use value | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Verification Email Address | verificationEmailAddress | Text | Selected | Unselected | | Verified Account ID | verifiedAccountId | Text | Selected | Unselected | | Verified Contact ID | verifiedContactId | Text | Selected | Unselected | | Verified Email Address | verifiedEmailAddress | Text | Selected | Unselected | 3. Map the `authenticationKey` variable and the `verificationEmailAddress` variable that you created to the outputs of the EDU Cloud: Send Email Verification action. See [Create Variables in Agentforce Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_builder_variables_create.htm&type=5&language=en_US). These mappings pass two values that are used to validate the user's identity to the EDU Cloud: Verify Email Code action: the authentication key and verification code combination, and the user-provided email address. 4. Map these variables to the inputs of the EDU Cloud: Verify Email Code action. These mappings make sure that the EDU Cloud: Verify Email Code action captures the authentication key and verification code combination, and also the verification email address. | Variable | Input | | --- | --- | | authenticationKey | Authentication Key | | verificationEmailAddress | Verification Email Address | 5. Map these variables to the outputs of the EDU Cloud: Verify Email Code action. | Variable | Output | | --- | --- | | isVerified | Is Verified | | verifiedEmailAddress | Verified Email Address | | verifiedContactId | Verified Contact ID | | verifiedAccountId | Verified Account ID | ## Set Up the Transfer Credit Agent for Experience Cloud Users 1. [Add the agent to your portal on the Experience Cloud site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_messaging.htm&language=en_US&type=5). 2. The Transfer Credit Agent shows users the JSON output from actions in addition to prior learning equivalencies. Customize your Experience Cloud site to improve the user experience and control what the agent shows. 1. [Add markup to the page ``](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_builder_page_head.htm&type=5&language=en_US) by entering this script. ``` ``` 2. In Security & Privacy, [select a security level](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_scriptlevel.htm&type=5&language=en_US). For Security Level, select **Relaxed CSP: Permit Access to Inline Scripts and Allowed Hosts**. 3. Add your Experience Cloud site as a trusted site for scripts. See [Where to Allow Hosts of Script Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_security_csp_allow.htm&type=5&language=en_US). To locate the URL of your site, from Setup, find and select **Digital Experiences**, and then click **All Sites**. Find the URL of your site in the All Sites list view. 4. Publish your site. # Set Up Transfer Credit for Applicants Configure the TransferCreditWrapper Omniscript, add a Transfer Credit dynamic application stage, and set up Experience Cloud access so that applicants can submit transfer credit information. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To create and activate versions of Omnistudio components:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Omnistudio Admin

AND

Omnistudio User
## Prerequisites for the Transfer Credit Stage 1. [Set up an education portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes."). 2. [Create supporting records for applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_supporting_records_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud."). ## Configure the Transfer Credit Stage 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **OmniScripts**. 2. Select the Omniscript named TransferCreditWrapper, with the type EDUAdmissions. 3. Click **New Version**. 4. Click the **Transfer Credits** element. 5. Click the **transferCreditPageWrapper** element. 6. In the Custom LWC Properties panel, expand the Custom Lightning Web Component Properties section. 7. To make sure that each transfer credit type collects its corresponding document type, specify the property sources for their respective property names. The Transfer Credit Application stage includes the Education, Examination, Military, Employment, and Other types by default. To locate the record ID of a document type, from Setup, find and select **Document Type**, and click a document type. Look for its ID in the URL. For example, if the Unofficial Transcript document type URL is https://my.demo.com/lightning/setup/DocumentType/page?address=%2F0deSG000001NGxx, the record type ID is 0deSG000001NGxx. 1. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Transcript record type as the property source of educationDocumentTypeId. 2. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Score Report record type as the property source of examinationDocumentTypeId. 3. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Military Experience Document record type as the property source of militaryDocumentTypeId. 4. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Work Verification Letter record type as the property source of employmentDocumentTypeId. 5. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Prior Learning Document record type as the property source of otherDocumentTypeId. 8. To remove a transfer credit type from the application, find the property name `isTypeEnabled`, and then enter false as its property source. For example, if your institution doesn't accept transfer credits from military experience, remove the Military type. Find isMilitaryEnabled, and enter false as the property source. Leave the instruction, document type record ID, and record type fields unchanged. 9. To further tailor the application experience, update these properties. - isEditMode: Controls whether the applicant can view or edit their transfer credit application. If applicants can edit application tasks, set the property source to true. If applicants can’t edit application tasks, set the property source to false. See [Configure Application Submission and Management Options for Applicants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_portal_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get your Education portal ready to accept and manage applications."). - isAllVsSomeVisible: Shows or hides options to evaluate all or specific items. To render these options, isEditMode must be true. - allCoursesConsidered: Determines what appears when isAllVsSomeVisible is false. Customize this property to show either a message that all courses are considered or the **Add** button and table. - isTranscriptRequired: Controls whether the application requires at least one document that corresponds to the transfer credit type. For example, a transcript, score report, verification letter, or similar supporting document. 10. Click **Activate**. ## Create the Transfer Credit Stage for Dynamic Applications 1. Define the Transfer Credit Application stage. See the Define Your Application Stages section in [Set Up Your Application Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_application_stages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create application stage definition records to represent the different stages of your application, and copy and use Education Cloud Omniscripts and Flexcards to collect and show applicant information."). 2. Create an application render method for Transfer Credit. See the Create Application Render Method Records section in [Build Your Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_build_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Application Render Method records and Application Render Method Assignment records to build your application. Application render method records identify the Omniscript or Flexcard used to collect or show information. Application Render Method Assignment records link Application Render Methods with Application Stage Definitions."). For Method Record, select **Omni Process**, and then find and select the copy of the Omniscript that you previously created. For Method Type, select **Omniscript**. 3. Create an application render method assignment record for Transfer Credit. See the Create Application Render Method Assignment Records section in [Build Your Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_build_your_application.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Application Render Method records and Application Render Method Assignment records to build your application. Application render method records identify the Omniscript or Flexcard used to collect or show information. Application Render Method Assignment records link Application Render Methods with Application Stage Definitions."). For Application Render Method, find and select the application render method that you created for Transfer Credit. For Application Component, select the application stage definition that you selected for Transfer Credit. 4. Create an action plan template, or select an existing one. See the Create an Action Plan Template section in [Create and Set Up an Action Plan Template for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an action plan template to represent your application, add each application stage definition record as tasks to your action plan template, and assign the template to a Program Term Application Timeline record."). 5. Add a Transfer Credit Stage individual application task to your action plan template. See the Add Tasks to Your Action Plan Template section in [Create and Set Up an Action Plan Template for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an action plan template to represent your application, add each application stage definition record as tasks to your action plan template, and assign the template to a Program Term Application Timeline record."). 6. Make sure that you have a program term application timeline record that’s associated with your action plan template. See the Create Program Term Application Timeline Records section in [Create Supporting Records for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_supporting_records_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create the required records for the application process in Education Cloud."). 7. Alternatively, add the action plan template that represents your application to an existing program term application timeline record. See the Assign Your Action Plan Template to a Program Term Application Timeline section in [Create and Set Up an Action Plan Template for Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_and_set_up_an_action_plan_template_for_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an action plan template to represent your application, add each application stage definition record as tasks to your action plan template, and assign the template to a Program Term Application Timeline record."). ## Customize Access to Transfer Credit Applications on the Experience Cloud Site 1. Assign the required permissions to the student. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter `Users`, and then select **Users**. 2. Click the student’s name. 3. Verify that the user license is **Customer Community Plus** and the profile is **Customer Community Plus User**. 4. In the Permission Set License Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 5. Select these permission set licenses. \- Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud \- Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User \- Omnistudio \- Omnistudio Runtime for Communities 6. Save your changes. 7. In the Permission Set Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 8. Select these permission sets. \- Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access \- Omnistudio User \- Omnistudio Experience Cloud User \- Product Catalog Management Viewer \- Unified Catalog Community User 9. Save your changes. 2. [Create a sharing set for external users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&type=5&language=en_US) who request transfer credit estimates in the application portal. 3. Give users access to these objects, access lookups, and access levels. | Object | Access determined by | Access Level | | --- | --- | --- | | Account | User:Account.PersonContact = Account:PersonContact | Read/Write | | Course Credit Transfer Application | User:Contact = Course Credit Transfer Application:PriorLearningEvaluation.Contact | Read Only | | Prior Learning Evaluation | User:Contact = Prior Learning Evaluation:Contact | Read/Write | 4. Make sure that you provide access to the profiles that you assign to external users. 5. Save your changes. SEE ALSO - [Create Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Omnistudio components and Education Cloud objects to create applications for your institution.") # Set Up Transfer Credit Requests from an Experience Cloud Site Current students can request official transfer credit for prior learning directly from an Experience Cloud site. Students open the transfer credit application from a Unified Catalog service, add their prior learning, and submit a request. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up transfer credit requests from an Experience Cloud site: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin, [set up your org for transfer credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them."). That setup creates the Transfer Credit Request record type on the case object and the picklist values that the transfer credit application uses. 1. Clone the TransferCreditPetitionWrapper Omniscript to collect transfer credit request details from current students. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **OmniScripts**. 2. Find and select the Omniscript named TransferCreditPetitionWrapper, with the type EDUAdmissions. 3. Click **New Version** to clone the Omniscript. 2. In the cloned Omniscript, configure the Custom LWC Properties. 1. Click the Transfer Credits element. 2. Click the transferCreditPageWrapper element. 3. In the Custom LWC Properties panel, expand the Custom Lightning Web Component Properties section. 4. To make sure that each transfer credit type collects its corresponding document type, specify the property sources for their respective property names. The Transfer Credit Application stage includes the Education, Examination, Military, Employment, and Other types by default. To locate the record ID of a document type, from Setup, find and select Document Type, and click a document type. Look for its ID in the URL. For example, if the Unofficial Transcript document type URL is https://my.demo.com/lightning/setup/DocumentType/page?address=%2F0deSG000001NGxx, the record type ID is 0deSG000001NGxx. 1. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Transcript record type as the property source of educationDocumentTypeId. 2. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Score Report record type as the property source of examinationDocumentTypeId. 3. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Military Experience Document record type as the property source of militaryDocumentTypeId. 4. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Work Verification Letter record type as the property source of employmentDocumentTypeId. 5. Enter the ID of the Unofficial Prior Learning Document record type as the property source of otherDocumentTypeId. 5. To remove a transfer credit type from the application, find the property name isTypeEnabled, and then enter false as its property source. For example, if your institution doesn't accept transfer credits from military experience, remove the Military type. Find isMilitaryEnabled, and enter false as the property source. Leave the instruction, document type record ID, and record type fields unchanged. 6. To further tailor the application experience, update these properties. - isEditMode: Controls whether the applicant can view or edit their transfer credit application. If applicants can edit application tasks, set the property source to true. If applicants can't edit application tasks, set the property source to false. The default value is true. See [Configure Application Submission and Management Options for Applicants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_edit_view_confirm_submit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Build additional checkpoints and flexibility into the dynamic admissions application process. Give applicants the options to edit, view, confirm, sign, submit, and cancel their applications. Choose which application details and progress indicators appear on the Application Details and Application List components. Provide applicants the option to withdraw an application after submission."). - isAllVsSomeVisible: Shows or hides options to evaluate all or specific items. To render these options, set isEditMode to true. - allCoursesConsidered: Determines what appears when isAllVsSomeVisible is false. Customize this property to show either a message that all courses are considered or the Add button and table. - isTranscriptRequired: Controls whether the application requires at least one document that corresponds to the transfer credit type. For example, a transcript, score report, verification letter, or similar supporting document. 7. Click **Activate**. 3. In Unified Catalog, create a service that uses your cloned Omniscript as its intake form. When you define the intake form for the service, select your cloned TransferCreditPetitionWrapper Omniscript. See [Create a Service in Unified Catalog](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_service_unified_catalog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Unified Catalog to create a service request that you can tailor to your needs."). 4. Add the Unified Catalog component to your Experience Cloud site, and set its Record ID to the catalog that you created, so that current students submit transfer credit requests from the site. See [Set Up Your Learner Portal with Petitions and Waivers Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learner_portal_petitions_waivers_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Experience Builder to add the petitions and waivers components to your learner portal, and then configure them."). 5. Add a Submitted value to the case status field so that current students track their transfer credit request. 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**, and then select **Case**. 2. Click **Fields & Relationships**, and then click **Status**. 3. Under Case Status Picklist Values, click **New**. 4. Enter Submitted. 5. For the record type, select the Transfer Credit Request record type. 6. Save your changes. 6. Grant current students access to the case and course credit transfer application records that the transfer credit application uses. 1. Clone the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set, and grant access to the case and course credit transfer application objects and their fields, as described in the portal permissions step of [Set Up Your Org for Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them."). 2. Assign your cloned permission set to the current students who request transfer credit from the site. Each request creates a transfer credit case and the related course credit transfer application records. SEE ALSO - [Set Up Your Org for Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them.") - [Create a Service in Unified Catalog](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_service_unified_catalog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Unified Catalog to create a service request that you can tailor to your needs.") # Set Up Transfer Credit Support and Utilization Metrics Create the support process and configure the utilization metrics that summarize inbound credits and their impact on requirement completion. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org for transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. Create a support process. See [Create a Support Program in Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_edc_create_support_program.htm&language=en_US). 2. Create a new version, customize, and use the EDUTransferCreditsUtilizationMetrics omniscript to display transfer credit metric summaries. By default, you can view the inbound credit utilization rate and the calculated requirement completion impact. See Create and Activate Versions of Omnistudio Components on [Set Up Your Application Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_application_stages.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up User Profiles for Admissions Connect Create user profiles, set up app access, assign page layouts, and customize object and tab visibility. - **[Identify or Create User Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Profiles define how users access objects and data, and what they can do within the application. When you create users, you assign a profile to each one. Admissions Connect doesn't provide default profiles. Instead, we provide default permission sets that can be assigned to users. Use any profile you like, or create new ones specific to roles on your admissions team. It’s totally up to you. For example, you could create role-specific profiles, such as Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage for your admissions directors and other admissions administrative staff. - **[Enable App Access](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable access to the Admissions Connect app for your user profiles, including the System Administrator. - **[Set the Default App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make Admissions Connect the default app for your profiles. - **[Assign Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admissions Connect provides default page layouts that you must assign to profiles, including the System Administrator. We provide page layouts for the Application, Application Review, Application Material Mapping, Application Material Type, and Document Checklist Item objects. - **[Configure App Items and Visibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Different profiles require different access to objects in the Admissions Connect app. ## Identify or Create User Profiles Profiles define how users access objects and data, and what they can do within the application. When you create users, you assign a profile to each one. Admissions Connect doesn't provide default profiles. Instead, we provide default permission sets that can be assigned to users. Use any profile you like, or create new ones specific to roles on your admissions team. It’s totally up to you. For example, you could create role-specific profiles, such as Admissions Connect - Set Up and Manage for your admissions directors and other admissions administrative staff. To align your profile names with our default permissions sets, see [Assign the Admissions Connect Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_security_permission_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Admissions Connect provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets."). Keep in mind that each user can only be assigned one profile. For help, see [Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_userprofiles.htm&type=5) and [Create or Clone Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=users_profiles_cloning.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help.  After you create or identify what profiles you’re going to use for Admissions Connect, assign them to your users when you create their User record. See [Create Users for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_data_import_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Every person who uses Admissions Connect must have a User record in Salesforce. How you create your User records depends on who will be using Admissions Connect. Admissions staff or other people who work for your institution are internal users. These users can only use the Admissions Connect app. People who don’t work for your institution, like alumni reviewers or applicants, are external users. These users can only use an Experience Cloud portal."). ## Enable App Access Enable access to the Admissions Connect app for your user profiles, including the System Administrator. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Select the action menu for Admissions Connect and click **Edit**. 3. On the User Profiles page, add your profiles to Selected Profiles. 4. Save your changes. ## Set the Default App Make Admissions Connect the default app for your profiles. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **Edit** next to a profile name. 3. In the Custom App Settings section, select Admissions Connect as the Default app. 4. Save your changes. ## Assign Page Layouts Admissions Connect provides default page layouts that you must assign to profiles, including the System Administrator. We provide page layouts for the Application, Application Review, Application Material Mapping, Application Material Type, and Document Checklist Item objects. For details about these layouts, see [Customize Record Pages for Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_page.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize page layouts, record page components, and more to make it easy for your staff to access and manage applications."). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If you're already using EDA, assign your admissions staff the Admissions Connect Application page layout as they might already be assigned the default EDA layout. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click the object you want to assign a page layout for. 2. Click **Page Layouts**. 3. Click **Page Layout Assignment**, then click **Edit Assignment**. 4. Select the Admissions Connect page layout in the dropdown menu, then click on each profile name you want to assign the layout to. 5. Save your changes. ## Configure App Items and Visibility Different profiles require different access to objects in the Admissions Connect app. The [Admissions Connect permission sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_permset_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the permission sets that are required for each role in your institution.") include default object access and tab visibility settings. Customize these default settings for your institution or use them as-is. To configure the app’s navigation and set tab visibility, see [Set Up Admissions Connect App Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_app_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get started with the Admissions Connect app by assigning the default Lightning record pages and setting up the navigation menu."). # Set Up User Profiles for Staff and Admins Configure profiles for support staff and administrative Student Success Hub users. When configuring profiles, some admins prefer to work in the enhanced profile user interface while others prefer the original profile user interface. You can switch between the two in Setup. Search for and select **User Management Settings**, then turn the Enhanced Profile User Interface on and off as needed. The following instructions assume you're working with the enhanced profile user interface. - **[Customize the Support Staff Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone the sample staff profile to preserve its permissions settings and get a good start at creating a custom profile for your support staff. - **[Enable App Access for Support Staff and Admins](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** App access is enabled on the support staff and System Administrator profiles included with Student Success Hub. If you're using different profiles, enable app access for them. ## Customize the Support Staff Profile Clone the sample staff profile to preserve its permissions settings and get a good start at creating a custom profile for your support staff. For more information, see [Full Configuration Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to install Student Success Hub for K-12, including the core managed packages, unmanaged metadata configurations, and sample data."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Full Configuration Plan is only available in the Student Success Hub for K-12 installer. Higher education institutions that install SSH should clone the Standard User profile and then assign the required permissions for their support staff. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, search for and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **New Profile**. 3. On the Clone Profile page, for Existing Profile, select the sample support staff profile that SSH installed. Otherwise, select **Standard User**. 4. Enter a Profile Name, such as Support Staff, and save your profile. 5. Then, [Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") or [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."). ## Enable App Access for Support Staff and Admins App access is enabled on the support staff and System Administrator profiles included with Student Success Hub. If you're using different profiles, enable app access for them. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **App Manager**. 2. Click the action menu for Student Success Hub and select **Edit**. 3. Select **User Profiles**, and add your support staff and System Administrator profiles to Selected Profiles. 4. Save your changes. # Set Up Video Call Service for Virtual Calls To use the Virtual Calls feature, deploy AWS Services via the AWS Console or AWS Command Line Interface.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See [Configure External Video Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.ls_video_call_configure_external_video_service.htm). # Set Up Virtual Appointments Host appointments from anywhere by setting up virtual calls with Amazon Web Services (AWS) Chime SDK or another video call service. Education Cloud's appointment feature seamlessly integrates with AWS, and lets your users join calls directly from the Salesforce app or the self-service portal. Turn on closed captioning to meet accessibility standards to support all your learners. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set and who meet these requirements can access this feature: - Have an AWS account dedicated to the Salesforce Virtual Calls Console application workload. - Can run an AWS CloudFormation template. - Have access to the AWS Console or AWS Command Line Interface. **How**: - Create a connected app on the App Manager page in Setup. - Deploy AWS services using the AWS Partner Solution. - Create named credentials for virtual calls on the Name Credentials page in Setup. - Add a page for virtual calls on your Experience site. - Configure virtual calls on the Video Call Configuration page in Setup. - Add the video call component to your app utility bar on the App Manager page in Setup. See Also: - [Set Up Virtual Appointments With AWS Chime](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_virtual_appt_aws.htm) - [Amazon Web Service (AWS)](https://aws.amazon.com/solutions/partners/salesforce-industries-virtual-calls/) # Set Up Virtual Appointments Allow your staff to conduct virtual support appointments in your Student Success Hub org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. Appointments can take place anywhere—in person, on the phone, or virtually. Student Success Hub makes it easy for support staff and students to meet virtually. Using a virtual Appointment Location, support staff can associate a static meeting URL with an appointment. Then, they can join the meeting at the designated start time through the Appointment Manager. Students can join the virtual meeting with a click or tap from the portal—they can even schedule appointments at a staff member's virtual Appointment Location using the Scheduling Wizard component. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note When you schedule an appointment, participants get an email notification that includes a .ics file. They can use that file to record the event on their calendar, but it doesn't include a link to join the meeting. To enable virtual appointments, [set up location-based availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to get location-based availability (flex scheduling) up and running in your Student Success Hub org.") in your org. Then, tell your support staff to add virtual Appointment Locations to their Availability Settings as described in [Designate Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up staff availability."). Finally, make sure the relevant fields are on the Appointment record detail page layout. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Appointment**. 2. Go to **Page Layouts** and select **Appointment Layout**. 3. If necessary, drag the following fields to the Appointment Detail layout: - **Appointment Location** - **Web Meeting** - **Web Meeting Link** - **Additional Connection Information** 4. Save your changes. # Set Up Virtual Appointments With AWS Chime After you configure Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, set up virtual appointments with Amazon Web Services (AWS) Chime SDK to add audio and video capabilities to the learners' portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Make sure that your Salesforce Scheduler setup includes user permissions and appointment data configuration. See [Set Up Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_scheduler.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Salesforce Scheduler for Education Cloud, and configure sharing and permissions settings. Then, create the supporting data types for appointment data modeling.") and [Set Up Appointment Data Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling."). When staff members join an AWS Chime call, they have the moderator role, which gives them more control over the meeting than learners who join as regular attendees. For example, moderators can mute all participants, or end the meeting for everyone. As a best practice, meeting hosts should always verbally inform attendees at the start of the meeting or in advance of the meeting if they are going to record it. We recommend that meeting attendees be informed how the video will be recorded, used, and shared. Meeting hosts should also offer attendees options to participate without having their image or voice recorded, such as allowing them to attend with no video or audio, and the option to pose questions only in the text chat window. There are numerous reasons a meeting participant may choose to have their video or audio off, including but not limited to: fatigue from constant video engagement, concerns about personal appearance, competing obligations to care for family members, desire for privacy about their physical location or with whom they live, weak or lack of internet connection, and more. All of these may disproportionately affect historically marginalized or underrepresented communities. - **[Check Virtual Call Licenses and Permissions for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_virtual_call_licenses_perms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To configure virtual calls for self-service, admins require specific licenses and permissions. - **[Amazon Account Requirements for Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_amazon_account_req.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the requirements for using your Amazon Account for Virtual Calls. - **[Enable Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_virtual_calls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you enable Virtual Calls, confirm that you configured Salesforce Scheduler. - **[Connect Amazon to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_connect_amazon_sf.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Virtual Calls in Education Cloud, create a connected app to connect Amazon to Salesforce. - **[Set Up Video Call Service for Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_video_call_service.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use the Virtual Calls feature, deploy AWS Services via the AWS Console or AWS Command Line Interface. - **[Create Named Credentials for Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_named_credentials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a named credential to enter the URL of an AWS Chime callout endpoint and its required authentication parameters. Then, enter the named credential as a callout endpoint to let Salesforce handle all authentication to AWS Chime. - **[Create a Page for Virtual Calls on Your Experience Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_page_virtual_calls_exp_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Virtual Calls requires a separate page on your Experience site to add a component for it. - **[Configure Virtual Calls](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_config_virtual_calls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you set up your AWS account and connection to Salesforce, configure video appointments. - **[Add the Video Call Component to Your App Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_video_call_utility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make it easy for your users to join a virtual call by adding the video call component to the Salesforce utility bar. # Set Up Volunteer Management Set up Volunteer Management for your organization. Assign permissions, turn on the feature, configure locations and operating hours, and set a default status for job position assignments. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use Volunteer Management: Manage Volunteer Data permission set
## Assign Volunteer Management Permission Sets Provide users with the necessary access to use Volunteer Management features. Before you set up Volunteer Management, [enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). 1. Assign the Manage Volunteer Data permission set to your users. 2. To access your Experience cloud site, assign users the Manage Volunteer Work in Experience Cloud permission set. 3. To access your Experience Cloud site as a guest, assign the Volunteer Management in Experience Cloud Guest Access permission set. 4. To set up and use Agentforce in Volunteer Management, assign the Use Volunteer Agent (beta) permission set. 5. To make all fields across the objects readable by all users, set the organization-wide sharing settings default for Volunteer Management objects to Public Read Only. For greater access, set the default to Public Read/Write. SEE ALSO: [Volunteer Management Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the supported products and editions for Volunteer Management. Then learn about how your product handles permissions and how to assign them.") ## Turn On and Set Up Volunteer Management To manage volunteers in Salesforce, turn on Volunteer Management and configure settings for locations, operating hours, and job position assignment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Try out Volunteer Management in a sandbox before turning it on in your Salesforce org. After you turn on Volunteer Management, you can't turn it off. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Volunteer, and then select **Volunteer Management Settings**. 2. Turn on Volunteer Management. 3. Set up locations. 1. From the Object Manager, on the Location object, add picklist values for the Location Type field. 2. Save your changes. 3. From the Locations page in Salesforce, click **New**. 4. Provide the location **Name**, **Location Type**, and other details as necessary. 5. To add an additional location, click **Save & New**, or click **Save** to complete your work. 4. Set up operating hours. 1. From the Operating Hours page in Salesforce, click **New**. 2. Provide a name and a time zone for the new operating hours. 3. To save additional operating hours, click **Save & New**, or click **Save** to complete your work. 5. Set a default value for the Status field on the Job Position Assignment object. For example, select **Upcoming**, or **In Progress** as the default status for job position assignments. ## Create Locations To help users and volunteers better understand where opportunities are, create locations in Salesforce for your organization and initiatives. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Locations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the location. 4. Select a **Location Type**. 5. Provide other details of the location, such as a time zone, address, driving directions, a description, an external reference, and parent location. 6. Save your work. 7. Repeat this task for all of your locations. ## Create Competencies Define the skills needed for your initiatives so you can match the right volunteers to the right positions. Create competencies that meet the needs of the job positions that support your initiatives. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Competencies**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the competency. 4. Describe the competency. 5. Save your work. 6. Repeat this task for all of your competencies. ## Create Examinations Create examinations that qualify volunteers for licenses or permits that are required or preferred to work with your organization. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Examinations**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Name the examination. 4. Describe the examination. 5. Save your work. 6. Repeat this task for all examinations to license or permit volunteers. # Set Up Volunteer Management with AI Tools Use these steps to set up and configure Volunteer Management by using Claude Code or Agentforce Vibes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Agentforce 1 Nonprofits editions with a Volunteer Management license.
User Permissions Needed | Permission | Purpose | | --- | --- | | Admin profile | To turn on Volunteer Management and assign permission sets | | Manage Volunteer Data permission set (provided to the Salesforce Admin by the agent during setup) | To create and manage Volunteer Management records | Before you begin, confirm that you have: - An org with Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, or Agentforce 1 edition and a Nonprofit Cloud license with Volunteer Management - Claude Code with the Salesforce CLI installed, or access to Agentforce Vibes - Person Accounts enabled (recommended) The agent uses four Volunteer Management skills to guide you through the setup. First, the agent enables the module and assigns permissions. Then it interviews you about your volunteer programs and recommends a record structure. After you confirm the plan, the agent creates records in the correct dependency order. 1. Connect your agent to your Salesforce org. - **For Claude Code:** Install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. - **For Agentforce Vibes:** Authenticate to your org. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. You can manage them from the Skills page, under Toolkit, in Agentforce Vibes. 2. Connect to the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). Turn on Volunteer Management and Assign Permissions 1. Ask the agent to set up Volunteer Management. For example: "Set up Volunteer Management for my org." The agent checks your org state, enables the Volunteer Management module, and assigns the Manage Volunteer Data permission set to the admin user. 2. **Optional:** Ask the agent to create more users and assign permissions. For example: "Sarah Chen needs access too — sarah.chen@example.org." If possible, the agent creates the user record and assigns the Manage Volunteer Data permission set. Plan Your Volunteer Program Structure 1. Describe your volunteer programs to the agent. For example: "We run a weekly food distribution every Saturday at our warehouse. Three roles: Setup Crew, Distribution Lead, and Cleanup. The Distribution Lead needs a food safety certification." Describe your programs in your own words. You don't have to use Volunteer Management terminology. The agent asks questions to clarify details about scheduling, volunteer capacity per role, qualification requirements, and locations. 2. Answer the agent's questions about your programs. Provide details such as the number of volunteers per role, specific qualifications, and whether the schedule is recurring. The agent uses your answers to classify each program and determine the right level of complexity. 3. Review the agent's recommended structure and confirm the plan. The agent proposes a record structure that can include Volunteer Initiatives, Positions, Job Positions, Shifts, and Qualifications. It explains why it recommends each component. For example, the agent recommends a Position template for roles used across programs. For simpler roles, it recommends direct Job Positions without a template. After you confirm, the agent logs your decisions and prepares a record creation summary. Create records. 1. Review the agent's creation summary and approve record creation. The agent shows a summary of the records that it plans to create. For example: "I'll create 1 Competency, 1 Volunteer Initiative, 1 Position template, 3 Job Positions, 3 Shifts, and 1 Position Qualification. About 10 records total." 2. If the agent recommends picklist fields with values that don’t match your use cases, ask the agent to add the values you need to the picklist. Use the API name of the picklist so that the agent knows exactly which field to update. For each record, the agent provides guidance on requirements and which fields to populate. 3. Confirm that the agent can create the records. The agent creates records in dependency order: Competencies, Volunteer Initiatives, Positions, Job Positions, Shifts, and Qualifications. For each record, the agent provides guidance on requirements and which fields to populate. The agent creates all records, generates field values, and links them in the correct hierarchy. Verify and review next steps. 1. Review the agent's verification summary and next-steps checklist. The agent validates the configuration by checking object relationships and record completeness. It produces a decision log of what was built and why. Common remaining tasks include: - Add volunteers as Person Accounts. - Assign competencies to qualified volunteers. - Set up the Experience Cloud volunteer sign-up portal. - Run volunteer matching to fill shifts when you're ready for operations. Volunteer Management is on, users have permissions, and your volunteer program contains records. The agent's decision log and next-steps checklist guide you through any remaining manual configuration. To verify your setup, check that the Volunteer Management application is active, your users have permission sets, and your records appear in the correct hierarchy. Ask the agent to summarize what it configured if you need a consolidated view. # Set Up Your Alumni Community Use Experience Builder to brand your alumni community in Education Cloud, add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes to provide an enhanced alumni experience. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your alumni community:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Be a member of the site AND View Setup and Configuration AND an experience admin, publisher, or builder in that site
- **[Before You Begin: Give Access to Related Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For users to be able to see the public profiles of other alumni, give alumni users access to required objects. - **[Create an Alumni Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Experience Cloud site for alumni profile pages and your alumni directory. - **[Assign Members to the Alumni Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give users who are assigned your alumni profile access to your Experience Cloud site. - **[Create an Alumni Profile Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a page to your Experience Cloud site for your alumni directory. - **[Set Up the Alumni Profile Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Alumni Profile component to your Experience Cloud site and set up navigation. - **[Create an Alumni Directory](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a page to your Experience Cloud site for your alumni directory. - **[Set Up the Alumni Directory Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Person Public Profile component to your Experience Cloud site and set up navigation. - **[Set Up Site Navigation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the default navigation for your alumni Experience Cloud site. - **[Activate Your Alumni Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete your alumni community setup by activating your Experience Cloud site. - **[Set Up and Maintain Person Public Profile Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_alumni_community.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Processing Engine (DPE) and flows to set up and manage person public profile records for alumni users. This DPE process also resolves duplicate person public profile and person public profile preference set records. ## Before You Begin: Give Access to Related Objects For users to be able to see the public profiles of other alumni, give alumni users access to required objects. Make sure that alumni users have access to these objects. | Object | What does it store? | | --- | --- | | Contact Profile | Demographic details for an account. | | Person Academic Credential | Credentials related to the alumni user, such as degrees, certificates, or badges. | | Person Education | Information about professional education for a person. | | Person Employment | Information about a person's employment. | | Person Public Profile | Information about an alumni user that's shown on their public profile. | | Person Public Profile Preference Set | Information about an alumni user that's shown on their public profile. | | User | Represents the person who can log in to the community. | ## Create an Alumni Experience Cloud Site Create an Experience Cloud site for alumni profile pages and your alumni directory. 1. Make sure that Digital Experiences is enabled. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Select **Customer Service** and then click **Get Started**. 5. For Name, enter Alumni, and for URL, enter alumni. 6. Click **Create**. ## Assign Members to the Alumni Experience Cloud Site Give users who are assigned your alumni profile access to your Experience Cloud site. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your Alumni community site, click **Workspaces**, and then select **Administration**. 3. Click **Members**. 4. Under Select Profiles, for Search, select **Customer**. 5. Add your alumni profile to the Selected Profiles column. 6. Save your changes. ## Create an Alumni Profile Page Add a page to your Experience Cloud site for your alumni directory. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Builder** for your Experience Cloud site. 3. Click ![Experience Cloud Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloudgear.png), and then click **New Page**. 4. Select **Standard Page**. 5. Select **1 full-width column**, and then click **Next**. 6. For Name, enter My Alumni Profile. The URL field fills automatically. 7. Click **Create**. ## Set Up the Alumni Profile Page Add the Alumni Profile component to your Experience Cloud site and set up navigation. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important The Alumni Profile component contains information from the Person Education and Person Employment objects. To make sure that the user sees the necessary fields from those objects, create new default page layouts for each object and assign them to your alumni users. See [Create Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layoutcreate.htm). 1. In Experience Builder, on the My Alumni Profile page, click ![Experience Cloud Components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png). 2. Drag the **Alumni Profile** component to the Content area. 3. Preview and publish your changes. ## Create an Alumni Directory Add a page to your Experience Cloud site for your alumni directory. 1. In Experience Builder for your site, click ![Experience Cloud Page Properties](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloudgear.png), and then click **New Page**. 2. Select **Object Pages**. 3. Select **Person Public Profile**. 4. Click **Create** and then click **Create** again. ## Set Up the Alumni Directory Page Add the Person Public Profile component to your Experience Cloud site and set up navigation. 1. In Experience Builder for your site, on the Person Public Profile page, delete the components in the Content area. 2. Click ![Experience Cloud Components](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_expcloud_components.png), and then drag the **Alumni Person Public Profile** component to the Content area. 3. For the Person Public Profile record Id field, enter {!recordId}. 4. Edit the Global Search component to include Person Public Profile records in search results. See [Global Search Box](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.rss_search_global_no_publisher.htm). 5. Preview and publish your changes. ### Directory Search Considerations - If you delete the Person Public Profile record for an alumni user whose profile is set to Public, users who try to access the profile from a saved link or bookmark see an Invalid Page error message. To customize this error page for your institution, see [Assigning Salesforce Site Error Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.sites_error_pages.htm). - If you make changes to a user's Person Public Profile record, the user's profile can't be searched until the system indexes the new or changed records. - You can't search list views in Experience Cloud on a mobile device. See [Considerations for List Views and Related Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.basics_list_views_lex_considerations.htm). ## Set Up Site Navigation Create the default navigation for your alumni Experience Cloud site. 1. In Experience Builder for your site, on the My Alumni Profile page, select the Navigation Menu component, and in the property editor, click **Edit Default Navigation**. 2. Click **Add Menu Item**, and then specify these values. 1. For Name, enter My Alumni Profile. 2. For Type, select **Site Page**. 3. For Page, select **My Alumni Profile**. 3. Save your changes. 4. From the Pages menu, select the Person Public Profile page. Then, select the Navigation Menu component, and in the property editor, click **Edit Default Navigation**. 5. Click **Add Menu Item**, and then specify these values. 1. For Name, enter Alumni Directory. 2. For Type, select **Salesforce Object**. 3. For Object Type, select **Person Public Profile**. 6. Save your changes. ## Activate Your Alumni Experience Cloud Site Complete your alumni community setup by activating your Experience Cloud site. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Preview and test your site before you activate it. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Next to your alumni Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces**, and then select **Administration**. 3. Click **Settings**. 4. Click **Activate**, and then click **OK**. ## Set Up and Maintain Person Public Profile Records Use Data Processing Engine (DPE) and flows to set up and manage person public profile records for alumni users. This DPE process also resolves duplicate person public profile and person public profile preference set records. ### Before You Begin Before you start creating and managing Person Public Profile records, make sure that: - Education Cloud is enabled in your org. - The admin user has the Data Pipelines Base User Permission Set assigned to them. - The Alumni Relations app is enabled. ### Create a DPE Definition 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Data Processing Engine, and then select **Data Processing Engine**. 2. Click **Update Public Profile Records with Latest CRM Data**. 3. Click ![Actions menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) , and then select **Save As**. 4. Leave the default field entries, and then save your work. 5. Click **Activate**. 6. To run your DPE definition, click **Run Definition**, or set up a schedule-triggered flow. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note After the flow runs, users see updates to their person public profiles. By default, the flow runs weekly, but you can set it to run daily. ### Configure a Default Workflow User Designate an active user who has the Data Pipelines Base User permission set as the default workflow user. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Process Automation, and then select **Process Automation Settings**. 2. For Default Workflow User, search for and select a user who has the Data Pipelines Base User permission set assigned to them. 3. Save your changes. ### Create a Schedule-Triggered Flow from a Template 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. Click **Education Cloud: Run Alumni Profile Management Job**. 3. Click **Save As**, and then enter a name for your flow. 4. Save and activate the flow. ### Customize the DPE Process After you clone the DPE template, if you want to customize the logic or mappings, you can optionally set up a separate schedule-triggered flow. 1. Create a manual flow from a template. 1. Click **Education Cloud: Run Profile Management Job**. 2. Click **Save As**, and then enter a name for your flow. 3. Save and activate the flow. 2. Create a schedule triggered flow that invokes your manual flow as a subflow. See Also: - [Use a Schedule-Triggered Flow to Schedule a Data Processing Engine Definition](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_pm_use_a_schedule-triggered_flow_to_schedule_a_data_processing_engine_definition.htm) - [Flow Element: Subflow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow_ref_elements_subflow.htm) # Set Up Your Application Stages Create application stage definition records to represent the different stages of your application, and copy and use Education Cloud Omniscripts and Flexcards to collect and show applicant information.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Watch the video to see how to define your application stages. If you aren’t able to watch the view in full screen, open the video on a new tab: [Create Applications with Salesforce for Education: Define Application Stages](https://salesforce.vidyard.com/watch/ouUzgz15QqUtRyphKBEBfw). - **[Define Your Application Stages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_application_stages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create application stage definition records to represent the different stages of your application. - **[Create and Activate Versions of Omnistudio Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_application_stages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Copy and use Education Cloud Flexcards and Omniscripts to show and collect applicant information. ## Define Your Application Stages Create application stage definition records to represent the different stages of your application. | User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To define application stages: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Application Stage Definitions**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the application stage definition, such as Profile Stage. 4. Select the name of the owner of the application stage definition. 5. If needed, enter a description for the application stage definition. 6. Select **Recruitment and Admissions** as the type. 7. Save your changes. ## Create and Activate Versions of Omnistudio Components Copy and use Education Cloud Flexcards and Omniscripts to show and collect applicant information.
User Permissions Needed  
To create and activate versions of Omnistudio components:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
### Make Versions of Flexcards Create your own versions of the Flexcards that you want to use to show applicant information to application reviewers. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Flexcards**. 2. Select the Flexcard that corresponds to your application stage definition. For example, EDUAdmissionsProfileSection. 3. Select the version that you want to copy. 4. Click **Clone**. 5. Update the name. If necessary, update other attributes. 6. Save your changes and click **Activate**. 7. Similarly, clone and activate each Flexcard that you want to use in your application. ### Make Versions of Omniscripts Create your own versions of the Omniscripts that you want to use to collect applicant information in your application. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **OmniScripts**. 2. Select the Omniscript that corresponds to your application stage definition. For example, select the Omniscript named NewSecondaryEducationSection, with the type EDUAdmissions. 3. Click the version that you want to copy. 4. Click **New Version**. 5. If necessary, update the embedded Flexcards with the cloned versions. 1. Expand a **Step** element. For example, Secondary or High School Education. 2. Click the **Custom LWC** component. For example, KnownSecondaryEducationCard. 3. In Custom LWC Properties, enter the name of your cloned Flexcard. 6. Click **Activate**. 7. Similarly, create a version for each Omniscript that you want to use in your application. See Also: - [Omnistudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_standard.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_considerations_for_using_omnistudio_with_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud.") # Set Up Your Experience Cloud Site for Clients Create a client portal that helps clients stay on track and continue making progress on their goals. Ready to get started? Let's create your site and set up user access. - **[Manage the Client Site Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_set_up_your_expereince_cloud_site_for_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make your site visible to others by adjusting permission sets and Apex class access. - **[Create the Client Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_set_up_your_expereince_cloud_site_for_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create an Experience Cloud Site for your clients. - **[Set Up User Access to Your Client Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_set_up_your_expereince_cloud_site_for_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create sharing rules and use sharing sets to grant users the appropriate access to data on your client site. - **[Modify the Action Items and Action Item Template Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_set_up_your_expereince_cloud_site_for_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In order for the components to work correctly, make sure the Action Items object includes two specific actions as well as the status picker, and that the Action Items and Action Item Template page layouts include the description field. ## Manage the Client Site Permissions Make your site visible to others by adjusting permission sets and Apex class access. 1. Clone the **Case Management: View** permission set. Name the clone Site Client: View. 2. Remove casemanagement from the Enabled Apps list. 3. Go back to the overview and click **Apex Class Access**. 4. Click **Edit** and add MyTeamController and MyTeamServices to the enabled classes. ## Create the Client Site Create an Experience Cloud Site for your clients. 1. From Setup, enter Digital Experiences in the Quick Find box, and then click **All Sites**. If you haven't set up an Experience Cloud site before, click **Settings** instead. 1. Select **Enable Digital Experiences**. 2. Enter a domain name and click **Check Availability** to make sure it's not already in use. We suggest that you use something recognizable to your users, such as your organization name. 3. Check the domain name's availability. You may need to try variations of the name until you find one that's unique. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the Build Your Own (Aura) template. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Enter a name for your site. 6. Optionally, add a suffix for your site URL. 7. Click **Create**. ## Set Up User Access to Your Client Site Create sharing rules and use sharing sets to grant users the appropriate access to data on your client site. In order to make sure the case management components are visible to the people you want to see them, you need to set up access using sharing rules or sharing sets. You can achieve this a number of ways and be sure to consider the unique needs of your organization, but here's an example of how we would set up permissions for a client using Case plans.
Component Sharing Setup
Component Description Sharing Setup
CM: Case Plan Displays the Goals and Action Items related to a Case Plan.

Sharing can be done using sharing sets. For example, you could share the Case Plan based on the Contact associated to the Case Plan.

Fields the user will require read access on will depend on the fields in the related field sets
CM: Case Plan Progress Displays the progress made on each Case Plan.

Sharing can be done using sharing sets. For example, you could share the Case Plan based on the Contact associated to the Case Plan.

Suggested fields with read access:

  • Object: caseman__CasePlan__c

    • caseman__Status__c

    • caseman__Contact__c

  • Object: caseman__Goal__c

    • caseman__CompleteActionItems__c

    • caseman__IncompleteActionItems__c
CM: Action Items Displays upcoming and overdue action items (due in 7 days or less).

Sharing controlled by Case Plan.

Suggested fields with read access:

  • Object: caseman__ActionItem__c

    • caseman__Goal__c

    • caseman__DueDate__c

    • caseman__Status__c
CM: Action Item Status Picker Displays the status options the client can set the record to.

Suggested fields with read/write access:

  • Object: caseman_ActionItem__c

    • caseman__Status__c
CM: My Team Displays information about the owners of the contacts case plan and program engagement records. Sharing can be done with Sharing Settings.
Check out [Create Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_sharing_rules_create.htm&type=5) for more info on sharing rules and sharing sets. ## Modify the Action Items and Action Item Template Objects In order for the components to work correctly, make sure the Action Items object includes two specific actions as well as the status picker, and that the Action Items and Action Item Template page layouts include the description field. 1. In Setup, click the Object Manager tab. 2. Click **Action Item**. 3. Select Page Layouts, then click **Action Item Layout**. 4. In the Fields panel, drag Description into your layout. 5. If you installed a version of Case Management earlier than 1.30, drag Status into the Action Item layout as well. 6. In the top panel, click **Mobile & Lightning Actions**. 7. In the description of the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section, click the linked text to override the predefined actions. 8. From the top panel, drag the Post and File actions to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 9. Save your changes. 10. Enter Objects and Fields in the Quick Find box, and then click **Object Manager**. 11. Click **Action Item Template**. 12. Select Page Layouts and then click **Action Item Template Layout**. 13. In the Fields panel, drag Description to your layout. 14. Save your changes. # Set Up Your Learner Portal for Delegated Access Use Experience Builder to create a My Proxies page, add the My Proxies component to it, configure portal navigation, and publish the updated learner portal. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and the Revenue Cloud Billing license
User Permissions Needed
To set up your learner portal for delegated access:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration
Before you begin: - To create an Experience Cloud site, first turn on Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&language=en_US). - Become a site member as a Salesforce admin, Experience admin, publisher, or builder. - To configure pages and components, and control access to them, set up a learner portal. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). To set up your learner portal for delegated access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Create a site or open an existing site. 1. To create an Experience Cloud site, see [Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). 2. To use an existing Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces** for the site. 3. Under My Workspaces, click **Builder**. 4. Add and configure a My Proxies page. 1. At the top of the page, click the Page Properties icon, and then select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, select a layout, and then click **Next**. 3. Enter My Proxies as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. 4. On the My Proxies page, click the Page Properties icon. 5. In the upper-left corner, click **Components**. Find the My Proxies component, and then drag it to the My Proxies page. We recommend the name My Proxies, but you can change it to suit your institution’s needs. 5. Configure the theme navigation menu. 1. Click the theme navigation menu to view its settings. 2. Set Max Items to Display to the number of menu items to show. 3. Click **Edit Default Navigation**, and then select **Add Menu Item**. 4. Configure the menu for My Proxies: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | My Proxies | | Type | Site Page | | Page | My Proxies | 5. Save your changes. 6. Apply additional customizations as required, and then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Your Learner Portal for Drop In Appointments Add a page to your Experience site where learners can select a topic and add themselves to the waitlist for a drop-in appointment. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To set up your learner portal with the OmniScript component: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Create or select a site. 3. Create a page for waitlist check-ins: 1. Click the Page Properties icon, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, and then choose a preferred layout for the page. 3. Enter a name for the page. For example, Student Waitlist Check-in. 4. Enter the necessary details, and then click **Create**. Note the URL for the waitlist page. For example, /waitlistpage. 4. Add and configure the OmniScript component: 1. Click **Components**, and then drag the OmniScript component to your preferred location on the new page. 2. In the component properties, select **Scheduler** as the type, and then select **DropInAppointment** as the subtype. 5. Configure the SchedulerDropInAppointment OmniScript to show upcoming appointments: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **OmniScripts**. 2. Select **Scheduler/DropInAppointment**, and then select the latest version. 3. To clone the OmniScript, click **New Version**. 4. Select the **SetNavigationStep** element. 5. Under Properties, click **Edit Properties as JSON**. 6. Enter the URL of the upcoming appointments tab on your Experience site for AppointmentPageName. For example: ``` "AppointmentPageName": "/s/appointments/ServiceAppointment/Upcoming" ``` 7. Click **Close JSON Editor**. 8. To activate the OmniScript, click **Activate Version**. 6. Apply additional customizations as necessary, then preview and publish the site. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Provide a tailored self-service site for a variety of learners with Experience Builder. Brand your portal and add ready-to-use or custom Lightning components, layouts, and themes.") - [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&type=5) # Set Up Your Learner Portal with Career Planning and Life Goals Components Use Experience Builder to add the career planning and life goals components to your learner portal, and then configure them. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your learner portal with career planning and life goals components:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Omnistudio Admin permission set

AND

Omnistudio Admin User permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&language=en_US). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Do one of these actions: 1. To create an Experience Cloud site, see [Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). 2. To use an existing Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces** for the site. 3. Under My Workspaces, click **Builder**. 4. Remove components that aren’t necessary. 5. Add and configure an involvement groups page. 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, choose a preferred layout for the page, and then click **Next**. 3. Enter `Involvement Groups` as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. 4. On the Involvement Groups page, click the page properties. 5. Copy and save the API name, which you need when configuring the Involvement Groups and Competencies component. 6. Create an involvement group record page. 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Object Pages**. 3. Select **Involvement Group** and click **Create**. 4. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select the Involvement Group Detail page. 5. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Involvement Group Competencies** component and drag it to the Involvement Group Detail page. The Involvement Group record page is displayed when you open an involvement group from the Involvement Groups page you created in step 5. 7. Add and configure a view assessment page. 1. Do one of these actions: 2. To create a view assessment page, click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 3. Select **Standard Page**, choose a preferred layout for the page, and then click **Next**. 4. Enter View Assessment as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. 5. To use an existing Assessment View page, open the page from Page Properties. 6. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Omniscript for Experience Cloud** component and drag it to the page. 7. On the View Assessment page, click the page properties. 8. Copy and save the API name, which you need when configuring the View Assessment page. 8. Add and configure a completed assessment view page. 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, choose a preferred layout for the page, and then click **Next**. 3. Enter Completed Assessment as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. 4. On the Completed Assessment page, click the page properties. 5. Copy and save the API name, which you need when configuring the Completed Assessment page. 6. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Completed Assessment** component and drag it to the page. 9. Add and configure a career planning and life goals hub for students page. 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, choose a preferred layout for the page, and then click **Next**. 3. Enter Career Planning and Life Goals as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. 4. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Tab Layout** component and drag it to the page. Use the properties pane to add the custom tabs: Involvement Groups and Competencies, Goals, and Assessments. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note We recommend these custom tabs, but you can change the names to suit your organization's needs. 10. Configure the Involvement Groups and Competencies tab. 1. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Student Competencies** component and drag it to the Involvement Groups and Competencies tab. 2. In the Student Competencies component properties, click **Select** to add Interested, or Acquired, or both in Tabs to Show. 3. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Student Involvement Groups** component and drag it to the Involvement Groups and Competencies tab. 4. In the Student Involvement Groups component properties, add the involvement group page API name you created in step 5 in Involvement Groups Page API Name. 11. Configure the Goals tab. 1. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Student Goals** component and drag it to the Goals tab. 12. Configure the Assessments tab. 1. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Assessment Library** component and drag it to the Assessments tab. 2. In the Assessment Library component properties, add the view assessment page API name in API name for Take Assessment Page. 3. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Student Assessments** component and drag it to the Assessments tab. 4. In the Student Assessments component properties, add the view assessment page API name you created in step 7 in API name for View Assessment Page. 5. Add the completed assessment page API name you created in step 8 in API name for View Completed Assessment Page. 13. Add and configure a goal assignment record page. 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Object Pages**. 3. Select **Goal Assignment** and click **Create**. 4. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select the Goal Assignment Detail page. 5. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Related Tasks** component and drag it to the Goal Assignment Detail page. The Goal Assignment record page is displayed when you open a goal from the Goals tab you configured in step 11. 14. Configure the theme navigation menu. 1. Click the theme navigation menu to view its settings. 2. Set the Max Items to Display as required. 3. Click **Edit Default Navigation**, and then select **Add Menu Item**. 4. Configure the menu item for Career Planning and Life Goals: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Career Planning and Life Goals | | Type | Site Page | | Page | Career Planning and Life Goals | 5. Save your changes. 15. Apply additional customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&language=en_US). Here's what the published Careers and Life Goals hub page looks like. ![Career Planning and Life Goals hub on Experience Site](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_career_planning_life_goals_hub.png) # Set Up Your Learner Portal with Petitions and Waivers Components Use Experience Builder to add the petitions and waivers components to your learner portal, and then configure them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your learner portal with petitions and waivers components:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Omnistudio Admin permission set

AND

Omnistudio Admin User permission set
Before you begin: - To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&language=en_US). - Be a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an experience admin, publisher, or builder. - To configure pages and components, and control access to them, set up a learner portal. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). 1. Assign the required permission set licenses to the student. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click the student’s name. 3. Make sure that the user license is **Customer Community Plus** and the profile is **Customer Community Plus User**. 4. In the Permission Set License Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 5. Select these permission set licenses. - Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User - Omnistudio User - Product Catalog Management Viewer - Unified Catalog Community User 6. Save your changes. 7. In the Permission Set Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 8. Select these permission sets. - Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User - Omnistudio User - Product Catalog Management Viewer - Unified Catalog Community User 9. Save your changes. 2. Enable access to the required objects. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Catalog | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Omni Process | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Product | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Product Configuration Flow | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Product Configuration Flow Parameter | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Product Component Group | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Product Component Group Override | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Product Related Component Override | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Service Catalog Request | Public Read/Write | Public Read/Write | 4. Save your changes. 3. Apply Public Read only permission to any other Education Cloud objects needed to execute the forms. 4. To ensure fields are visible, apply Visible field-level security on these object fields for the Customer Community Plus User profile.
Object Fields
Omni Process Compilation

Content

Sequence
Case Case Source
Product UsedFor
5. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 6. Do one of these actions: \- To create an Experience Cloud site, see [Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US&type=5). \- To use an existing Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces** for the site. 7. Under My Workspaces, click **Builder**. 8. Remove unnecessary components. 9. Add and configure a unified catalog page. 1. Do one of these actions: \- To create a unified catalog page, click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**, select **Standard Page**, select a preferred layout, and then click **Next**. Enter unified catalog as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. \- To use an existing page, open the page from Page Properties. 2. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Unified Catalog** component and drag it to the page. 3. In Record ID, enter the ID of the catalog that you created. See [Create a Service in Unified Catalog](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_service_unified_catalog.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Unified Catalog to create a service request that you can tailor to your needs."). 10. Apply additional customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Financials Give students self-service access to their financial accounts in your learner portal. After setup, students can view their balances and academic-year charges and pay invoices online. Assign permissions, set object access, connect a merchant account, and build the Student Financials page in Experience Builder. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud license and the Revenue Cloud Billing license
User Permissions Needed
To set up your learner portal with student financials components:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration
Before you begin: - To create an Experience Cloud site, first turn on Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&language=en_US). - Be a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an experience admin, publisher, or builder. - To set up student financial account management options and configure the necessary permissions for students and staff, set up student financials. See [Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Bridge the gap between students and their financial accounts by setting up your fee management framework in Education Cloud. Load tuition and fees for each academic interval and apply fees to learning programs and courses. Additionally, you can incorporate the Students Financials agent to help students view their account balances, get a detailed breakdown of their fees, and obtain more information about a given fee."). - To configure pages and components, and control access to them, set up a learner portal. See [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). To set up your learner portal for Student Financials: 1. Assign the required permissions to the student. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click the student’s name. 3. Make sure that the user license is **Customer Community Plus** and the profile is **Customer Community Login User**. 4. In the Permission Set License Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 5. Select these permission set licenses. - Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud - Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User - Billing Advanced Experience Cloud User - Education Cloud Student Financials for Experience Cloud User - Omnistudio - Omnistudio Runtime for Communities 6. Save your changes. 7. In the Permission Set Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 8. Select these permission sets. - Education Cloud Advanced Academic Operations for Experience Cloud Access - Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access - Education Cloud Student Financials for Experience Cloud Access - Billing Experience Cloud User - Billing Einstein Experience Cloud User - Omnistudio User - Omnistudio Experience Cloud User 9. Save your changes. 2. Provide the required Omnistudio permissions for portal users: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter `Permission`, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. From the list, find Omnistudio User and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label, API name, and description. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new permission set. 6. Click **Object Settings**. 7. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object Name | Object Permissions | | --- | --- | | Data Mappers | Read, View All Fields | | Flexcards | Read, View All Fields | | Integration Procedures | Read, View All Fields | | Omni Data Transformation Items | Read, View All Fields | | Omni Data Transformations | Read, View All Fields | | Omni Electronic Signature Templates | Read, View All Fields | | Omni Global Auto Numbers | Read, Edit, View All Fields | | Omni Process Compilations | Read, View All Fields | | Omni Process Elements | Read, View All Fields | | Omni Processes | Read, View All Fields | | OmniScripts | Read, View All Fields | | OmniScript Saved Sessions | Read, Create, Edit, Delete | | Omni UI Cards | Read, View All Fields | 8. Save your changes. 9. Assign the new permissions set to the student. See [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm). 3. Set access to the required objects. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter `Sharing Settings`, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Invoice | Public Read/Write | Private | | Academic Year | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Academic Term | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Academic Session | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Product | Public Read/Write | Public Read | | Billing Schedule Group | Public Read | Public Read | | CreditMemo | Public Read/Write | Public Read | 4. Save your changes. 4. Apply Public Read only permission to any other Education Cloud objects that you need for the forms. 5. Create a sharing set for students to access their invoice records. See [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&language=en_US). 6. Configure a merchant account and add payment methods to that account. See [Salesforce Payments Merchant Accounts and Payment Methods](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=commerce.payments_merchacct_pms_overview.htm&language=en_US). Make note of the Merchant Account ID as you need it to configure the Payment Checkout page in a later step. 7. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 8. Do one of these actions: 1. To create an Experience Cloud site, see [Create an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). 2. To use an existing Experience Cloud site, click **Workspaces** for the site. 9. Under My Workspaces, click **Builder**. 10. Remove unnecessary components. 11. If you're using an existing Experience Cloud site, add and configure a student financials page. To get the latest version of a component on an existing page, remove the old component and add it again. 1. Do one of these actions: - To create a student financials page, click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**, select **Standard Page**, select a preferred layout, and then click **Next**. Enter Student Financials as the name, enter a URL, and click **Create**. - To use an existing page, open the page from Page Properties. 2. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Financial Status at a Glance** component and drag it to the page. We recommend these attribute names, but you can change and reorder them. 3. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the Tab Layout component and drag it to the page. Use the properties pane to add the custom tabs: Accounts Overview, Academic Year Charges, and Billing and Payments. We recommend these custom tabs, but you can change the names to suit your organization's needs. 4. On the Accounts Overview tab, click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Accounts Overview** component and drag it to the Accounts Overview tab. 5. On the Academic Year Charges tab, click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Academic Year Charges** component and drag it to the Academic Year Charges tab. 6. On the Billing and Payments tab, click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **runtime\_revenue\_foundation:postedInvoices** component and drag it to the Billing and Payments tab. 7. Publish the page. 12. Add and configure a payment plan page. 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, choose a preferred layout for the page, and then click **Next**. 3. Enter New Payment Plan as the name, enter new-payment-plan for the URL, and click **Create**. 4. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Omniscript** component and drag it to the page. 5. Select the type as StuFinancials. 6. Select the sub type as PaymentPlan. 7. Select the language. 8. Save your changes. 9. Publish the page. 13. Configure the Payment Checkout page. 1. Open the Payment Checkout page from the page properties. 2. In Merchant Account ID, enter the merchant account ID that you created. 3. Publish the page. 14. To turn on student payments, set up a channel for payment data to flow from the payment gateway to Salesforce Payments. See [Set Up a Channel Manually for Payment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=commerce.payments_data_channel_setup.htm&language=en_US). 15. Apply other customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Success Components Use Experience Builder to add student success components to your learner portal, and then configure them.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up your learner portal with student success components:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Create and Set Up Experiences

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To create an Experience Cloud site, first enable Digital Experiences for your org and register the domain. See [Enable Digital Experiences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.networks_enable.htm&type=5). Also make sure that you're a member of the site, either as a Salesforce admin, or an experience admin, publisher, or builder. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites,and then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the **Education Portal** template. 4. Click **Get Started**. 5. Provide a name for the site, and then click **Create**. 6. Under My Workspaces, click **Builder**. 7. Remove components that aren’t necessary. 8. Add and configure an advisor profile page: 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, and then choose a preferred layout for the page. 3. Enter a name and URL, enter API Name as AdvisorProfile, and save your changes. Alternatively, use the `AdvisorPageName` variable to call a custom page. 4. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Flexcard** component and drag it to the new page. 5. On the flexcard's properties on the right pane, enter the name EDUStudentAdvisorProfile and enter the exposed attributes as {"StaffId": "{!StaffId}"}. 9. Add and configure a success teams page: 1. Click the Page Properties icon on top, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, and then choose a preferred layout for the page. 3. Enter Success Teams as the name, enter a URL, and then save your changes. Alternatively, use the `SuccessTeamPageName` variable to call a custom page. 4. Drag the **Tabs** component to the page, and then use the properties pane to add the custom tabs Assigned to Me and Additional Support. 5. Drag the **Flexcard** component to the Assigned to Me tab, and in the properties, enter EDUStudentSuccessTeamsAssignedToMe as the name. 6. Drag the **Flexcard** component to the Available to Everyone tab, and in the properties, enter EDUStudentSuccessTeamsAvailableToEveryone as the name. 10. Configure a home page for support programs: 1. Click the Page Properties icon on the top left, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, then choose **Flexible Layout** and click **Next**. 3. Enter a name, URL, and API Name. For example, Program Home, ProgramHome, and ProgramHome respectively. 4. Click **Create**. 5. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Flexcard** component and drag it to the new page. 6. On the flexcard's properties on the right pane, enter the name EDUProgramMgmtProgramHome. 11. Configure an object page for program: 1. Click the Page Properties icon, and then click **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Object Pages**. 3. Under New Object Pages, select **Program**, and then click **Next**. 4. Click **Create**. 5. On the Program Detail page, remove components that aren’t necessary. 6. Click **Components**, then drag the **Flexcard** component to the new page. 7. On the flexcard's properties on the right pane, enter the name EDUProgramMgmtProgramOverview. 12. Similarly, configure object pages for program enrollment, action plans, and care plans using these components: | Component Type | Component Name | | --- | --- | | Flexcard | EDUProgramMgmtPgmEnrlRecordPage | | Other | Action Plan Record Page | | Other | Care Plan Record Page | 13. Configure an assessments page: 1. Click the Page Properties icon on the top left, and select **\+ New Page**. 2. Select **Standard Page**, then choose **Flexible Layout** and click **Next**. 3. Enter the name AssessmentView, then enter a URL and save your changes. Alternatively, use the AssessmentPageName field in the EDUProgramMgmtProgramHome and EDUProgramMgmtProgramOverview Flexcards' properties to specify a custom page. 4. Click **Create**. 5. Click **Components** on the top left, find and select the **Omniscript for Experience Cloud** component and drag it to the new page. 14. Configure the theme navigation menu: 1. Click the theme navigation menu to view its settings. 2. Set the Max Items to Display as required. 3. Click **Edit Default Navigation**, and then select **Add Menu Item**. 4. Configure the menu item for success teams: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Success Teams | | Type | Site Page | | Page | Success Teams | 5. Similarly, create a menu item for programs with these values: | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Name | Programs | | Type | Site Page | | Page | Program Home | 6. Save your changes. 15. Configure the home page sidebar: 1. On the home page, drag the **Tabs** component to the sidebar and add the custom tabs Success Teams, Appointments, and Care Plans. 2. Drag a **Flexcard** component to each tab, and configure them:
Tab Flexcard Name
Success Teams EDUStudentRecentlyAssignedSuccessTeam
Appointments EDUStudentMyAppointmentsHeader
Note
Note When a user clicks Schedule Appointment, the workflow to create an appointment appears as a popup. Alternatively, use the Appointments page available with the Education Applicant Portal template.
Care Plans EDUStudentRecentlyAssignedCarePlan
3. Drag the **My Appointments** component below the flexcard on the Appointments tab. 16. Apply additional customizations as required, then preview and publish the site. See [Customize Sites with Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.community_designer_overview.htm&type=5). # Set Up Your Org Turn on features and set up permissions to prepare your org for data migration to Education Cloud. 1. Log in to your org. 2. Turn on Education Cloud: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud. 2. Under Feature Settings, select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 3. Turn on Education Cloud. 3. Set up permissions: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Education Cloud Full Access**, and then click **Manage Assignments**. 3. If users with the System Administrator and Analytics Cloud Integration User profiles aren't included in the list, add them. 4. Turn on person accounts. See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&type=5). 5. If you’re migrating from Student Success Hub, turn on group membership: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Group Membership, and then select **Group Membership Settings**. 2. Turn on Create and manage households and groups. 6. Set up contact-to-account relationship: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Account Settings, and then select **Account Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**, and save your changes. 7. If you’re migrating from Student Success Hub, turn on care plans: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Care Plan, and then select **Care Plan Settings**. 2. Turn on Create and manage care plans. 8. If you don’t have edit access to objects and fields, provide the access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator**. 3. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Affiliation**, and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Field Permissions, enable edit access for all fields, and then save your changes. 6. If you’re migrating data from Education Data Architecture, similarly provide edit access for these source and target (Education Cloud) objects: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The objects available in your org depend on the installed managed package. | Source Object Label | Source Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Relationship | hed\_\_Relationship\_\_c | | Contact | Contact | | Contact Language | hed\_\_Contact\_Language\_\_c | | Education History | hed\_\_Education\_History\_\_c | | NPSP Affiliation | hed\_\_Affiliation\_\_c | | Facility | hed\_\_Facility\_\_c | | Term | hed\_\_Term\_\_c | | Course | hed\_\_Course\_\_c | | Account | Account | | Program Plan | hed\_\_Program\_Plan\_\_c | | Course Offering | hed\_\_Course\_Offering\_\_c | | Course Offering Schedule | hed\_\_Course\_Offering\_Schedule\_\_c | | Plan Requirement | hed\_\_Plan\_Requirement\_\_c | | Program Enrollment | hed\_\_Program\_Enrollment\_\_c | | Course Connection | hed\_\_Course\_Enrollment\_\_c | | Term Grade | hed\_\_Term\_Grade\_\_c | | Application | hed\_\_Application\_\_c | | Test | hed\_\_Test\_\_c | | Test Score | hed\_\_Test\_Score\_\_c | | Target Object Label | Target Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Party Role Relationship | PartyRoleRelation | | Contact Profile | ContactProfile | | Person Language | PersonLanguage | | Account Contact Relationship | AccountContactRelation | | Contact Contact Relationship | ContactContactRelation | | Location | Location | | Academic Year | AcademicYear | | Academic Term | AcademicTerm | | Academic Session | AcademicSession | | Learning | Learning | | Learning Course | LearningCourse | | Learning Program | LearningProgram | | Learning Achievement | LearningAchievement | | Learning Program Plan | LearningProgramPlan | | Course Offering | CourseOffering | | Learning Outcome Item | LearningOutcomeItem | | Course Offering Schedule | CourseOfferingSchedule | | Learning Program Plan Requirement | LearningProgramPlanRequirement | | Learner Program | LearnerProgram | | Academic Term Enrollment | AcademicTermEnrollment | | Course Offering Participant | CourseOfferingParticipant | | Course Offering Participant Result | CourseOfferingParticipantResult | | Individual Application | IndividualApplication | | Program Term Application Timeline | ProgramTermApplnTimeline | | Person Examination | PersonExamination | | Application Timeline | ApplicationTimeline | | Examination | Examination | 7. If you’re migrating data from Student Success Hub, similarly provide edit access for these source and target (Education Cloud) objects: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The objects available in your org depend on the installed managed package. | Source Object Label | Source Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Alert | sfal\_\_Alert\_\_c | | Success Plan Template | sfal\_\_SuccessPlanTemplate\_\_c | | Success Plan | sfal\_\_SuccessPlan\_\_c | | Appointment | sfal\_\_Appointment\_\_c | | Appointment Attendee | sfal\_\_AppointmentAttendee\_\_c | | Topic | sfal\_\_Topic\_\_c | | Appointment Location | sfal\_\_AppointmentLocation\_\_c | | Role Topic Setting | sfal\_\_RoleTopicSetting\_\_c | | Target Object Label | Target Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Record Alert | RecordAlert | | Care Plan Template | CarePlanTemplate | | Case Participant | CaseParticipant | | Care Plan | CarePlan | | Service Resource | ServiceResource | | Work Type Group | WorkTypeGroup | | Service Appointment | ServiceAppointment | | Work Type Group Role | WorkTypeGroupRole | | Service Territory Member | ServiceTerritoryMember | | Assigned Resource | AssignedResource | | Service Territory | ServiceTerritory | 8. If you're migrating data from Admissions Connect, similarly provide edit access for these source and target (Education Cloud) objects: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The objects available in your org depend on the installed managed package. | Source Object Label | Source Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Application | hed\_\_Application\_\_c | | Application Timeline | ApplicationTimeline | | Application Review | randa\_\_Application\_Review\_\_c | | Target Object Label | Target Object API Name | | --- | --- | | Application Timeline | ApplicationTimeline | | Application Review | ApplicationReview | | Individual Application | IndividualApplication | 9. Similarly, provide edit access for the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 10. Set up these permissions to work with Data Pipelines: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Data Pipelines Base User**, and then click **Manage Assignments**. 3. If users with the System Administrator and Analytics Cloud Integration User profiles aren't included in the list, add them. 11. Turn on Data Pipelines: 1. From Setup, In the Quick Find box, enter Data Pipelines, and then select **Get Started**. 2. Turn on Data Pipelines. 12. Set up permissions to work with the Data Processing Engine. See [Permissions to Work with Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.concept_data_processing_engine_permission.htm&type=5). # Set Up Your Org for Appointment Topics and Availability in Education Cloud Get clear guidance at every stage to quickly set up appointment topics, assign staff, and set up their availability. These components significantly reduce the configuration time and potential errors. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org and configure apps with Lightning App Builder: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you set up your org to manage appointments, enable Student Success. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&language=en_US&type=5). 1. To configure appointment data, provide the required permissions for staff members and system administrators: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter `Permission`, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. From the list, find Education Cloud Full Access and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label, API name, and description. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new permission set. 6. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 7. Select **Engagement Channel Types**, and then click **Edit**. 8. Under Object Permissions, select **Create**, **Edit**, and **Delete**. 9. Similarly, provide access to these object fields as shown in the table. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note These object and field permissions aren't included in the Education Cloud Full Access permission set. Add these permissions to your cloned permission set.
Appointment Data Object Object Permissions Field Required Field Permission
Appointment Categories Appointment Category Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
Operating Hours Operating Hours Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
Territories Service Territory Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
Success Teams

Success Team

 Read

IsActive

CanSelfSchedule

ResourceAssignmentType

AccountId

 Read, Edit
Appointment Topics Work Type Group Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
Appointment Topics Work Type Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
Appointment Topics Work Type Group Role Read CaseTeamRole Read, Edit
Staff Members Service Resource Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
  Shift Create, Read, Edit, Delete All fields Read, Edit
10. Save your changes. 11. Make sure that the permission set is assigned to the staff members and system administrators. 2. For school administrators to set up appointment scheduling topics, assign staff, and complete necessary prerequisites, configure the Manage Appointments page for the Student Success app. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If there are no customizations required, you can use the Manage Appointments standard page. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **App Page** and then click **Next**. 4. For Label, enter Manage Appointments and then click **Next**. 5. Select **One Region** and click **Done**. 6. From the Components list, drag the **Manage Appointments** component onto the canvas. 7. If needed, customize the display names for the Appointment Topics, Staff Members, Engagement Channels, Appointment Categories, Operating Hours, Territories, and Success Teams tabs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The customized display name isn't used for the New or Edit window titles or field names. 8. Select the optional fields to show on the page. 9. Save your changes. 10. Click **Activate**, and add the Manage Appointments page to the Student Success app. 11. Save your changes. 3. To manage an advisor’s own and their colleagues' availability, configure the Manage Availability page for the Student Success app. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Builder, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select **App Page** and then click **Next**. 4. For Label, enter Manage Availability and then click **Next**. 5. Select **One Region** and click **Done**. 6. From the Components list, drag the **Manage Availability** component onto the canvas. 7. If needed, customize the display names for the Appointment Topics, Engagement Channels, and Territories tabs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The display name isn't used for the New or Edit window headings or field names. 8. Select the optional fields to show on the page. 9. When configuring availability, to show appointment topics based on the selected staff (service resource), select **Filter topics by case team roles**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The filtering is based on the roles assigned to staff (service resources) through predefined case teams. Roles associated with staff as part of individual case team member addition in a student’s advising case are not considered. 10. Save your changes. 11. Select **Activate**, and add the Manage Availability page to the Student Success app. 12. Save your changes. # Set Up Your Org for Automatic Resource Assignment Configure your org so service resources can be automatically assigned to appointments. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To configure your org and create assignment policies: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Add Resource Assignment Type to the success team page layout: 1. From the object management settings for success team, go to **Page Layouts**. 2. Click **Fields**. 3. Drag **Resource Assignment Type** to the Success Team Detail page layout. 4. Save your changes. 2. Enable Appointment Distribution, and then enable Aggregate Resource Use. 3. Create an assignment policy and specify the parameters for resource utilization. 4. Link the assignment policy to the default scheduling policy. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If no assignment policy is in effect, the appointment distribution is random. SEE ALSO: - [Enable Appointment Distribution Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_enable_appt_distribution_settings.htm&type=5) - [Define an Appointment Assignment Policy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_define_an_appt_assignment_policy.htm&type=5) - [Link Your Appointment Assignment Policy to a Scheduling Policy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_link_appt_assign_policy_to_scheduling_policy.htm&type=5) # Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals Configure your org to allow learners to define and achieve career and life goals based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Configure the advisors profile permissions to manage student’s career and life goals. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org for career planning and life goals components:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Omnistudio Admin permission set

AND

Omni Studio Designer

AND

Omni Studio Runtime
Before you set up your org for career and life goals: - Enable Student Success. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&language=en_US). - Enable Discovery Framework. See [Set Up Common Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - In Program and Benefit Management settings, enable the **Allow users to access all benefit assignment and goal assignment records when the user has access to the benefit assignment and goal assignment's parent records** setting. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). When this setting is enabled, the sharing setting of GoalAssignment is inherited from its parent record. - By default, students can't access person competency records that they don't own but were created for them. These records may not be shareable using sharing rules. To set up access to students for such person competency records, update the owner of the person competency records to the student person ID. See [Sharing and Record Access Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.managing_the_sharing_model.htm&type=5&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can follow a similar pattern for any data that’s not shareable using sharing rules. 1. Set up your org to manage student goals, skills, and involvement groups. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Turn on Set Up Student Goals. 2. Enable users to pause and complete the draft assessment at a later time. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Discovery Framework, and then select **General Settings**. 2. Turn on Save Assessment As Draft. 3. Enable access to required objects. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Omni process | Public Read Only | Private | | Assessment Question | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Involvement Group | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Competency | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | 4. Save your changes. 4. Provide the required profile permissions for managing tasks: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. From the list, find Customer Community Plus User and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a profile name. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new profile and click **Edit**. 6. Under General User Permissions, enable **Access Activities** and **Edit Tasks**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Make sure that the profile is added to the portal user. 5. Provide the required advisor profile permissions for managing tasks: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. From the list, find Standard User and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a profile name. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new profile and click **Edit**. 6. Under General User Permissions, enable **Access Activities** and **Edit Tasks**. 7. Save your changes. 8. Make sure that the profile is added to the advisor user. 6. To make sure that a separate record type is used when a student creates competencies from the portal, create a competency record type. 1. From the object management settings for competency, go to **Record Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a record type label, and then press Tab to automatically fill the record type name. 4. Select the profile that you created in step 4 as the profile that you want to grant access to this record type. 5. Select the page layout that users with this profile see for records with this record type. 6. Save your changes. 7. To make sure that a separate record type is used when an advisor creates competencies from the CRM, create a competency record type. 1. From the object management settings for competency, go to **Record Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a record type label, and then press Tab to automatically fill the record type name. 4. Select the profile that you created in step 5 as the profile that you want to grant access to this record type. 5. Select the page layout that users with this profile see for records with this record type. 6. Save your changes. 8. To make sure that a separate record type is used when a student creates involvement groups from the portal, create an involvement group record type. 1. From the object management settings for involvement group, go to **Record Types**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a record type label, and then press Tab to automatically fill the record type name. 4. Select the profile that you created in step 4 as the profile that you want to grant access to this record type. 5. Select the page layout that users with this profile see for records with this record type. 6. Save your changes. 9. Provide the required permissions for portal users: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. From the list, find Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label, API name, and description. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new permission set. 6. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 7. Select **Competencies**, and then click **Edit**. 8. Under Object Permissions, select **Create** and **Edit**. 9. Under Field Permissions, select **Read Access**. 10. Similarly, provide access to these object fields as shown in the table. | Object | Object Permissions | Field | Required Field Permission | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | OmniProcess | Read, Create, Edit | IsActive, Description, Language, SubType, Type, IsWebCompEnabled | Read | | Assessment | Read, Create, Edit | ContactID, OmniProcessId | Read, Edit | | AssessmentQuestionResponse | Read | ResponseValue | Read | | OmniProcessCompilation | Read | All fields | Read | | OmniScriptSavedSession | Read, Create, Edit | All fields | Read, Edit | | InvolvementGroup | Read, Create, Edit | All fields | Read, Edit | | InvolvementGroupMember | Read, Create, Edit | All fields | Read, Edit | | PersonCompetency | Read, Create, Edit | All fields | Read, Edit | | CompetencyRelatedObject | Read | All fields | Read | | GoalAssignment | Read, Create, Edit | CustomGoalName, Description, TargetCompletionDate, StartDate, Category, Status | Read, Edit | 11. Save your changes. 12. Assign the permission set to a student portal user. 10. Provide the required permissions for advisors: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. From the list, find Education Cloud Full Access and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label, API name, and description. 4. Save your changes. 5. Select your new permission set. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 6. Select **Competency**, and then click **Edit**. 7. Under Object Permissions, select **Read** and **Edit**. 8. Under Field Permissions, select **Read Access** and **Edit Access** for all fields. 9. Similarly, provide access to these object fields as shown in the table. | Object | Object Permissions | Field | Required Field Permission | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Assessment | Read, Create, Edit | ContactID, OmniProcessId | Read, Edit | | AssessmentQuestionResponse | Read | ResponseValue | Read | | CompetencyRelatedObject | Read | All fields | Read | | InvolvementGroupMember | Read, Create, Edit | All fields | Read, Edit | | PersonCompetency | Read, Create, Edit | All fields | Read, Edit | | GoalAssignment | Read, Create, Edit | CustomGoalName, Description, TargetCompletionDate, StartDate, Category, Status | Read, Edit | | Task | Read | AccountId | Read, Edit | | OpenActivity | Read | AccountId | Read, Edit | 10. Save your changes. 11. Assign the permission set to an advisor. 11. Configure the page layout of the Goal Assignment object: 1. From the object management settings for goal assignment, go to **Page Layouts**. 2. Select an existing page layout or create a new one. 3. Click **Fields**, and then drag **CustomGoalName** and **Category** to the Goal Assignment Detail section. 4. Save your changes. 12. Configure picklist values for these object fields.
Object Fields
Involvement Group
  • Activity Season
  • Category
  • Leader
  • Mode
  • Role
  • Status
  • Type
Involvement Group Member Role
Competency Category
Person Competency
  • Proficiency Level
  • Verification Status
Person Trait
  • Category
  • Source Type
Person Affinity
  • Category
  • Sub Category
  • Source
1. From the object management settings for the object, go to **Fields & Relationships**. 2. Add the picklist values. 3. Save your changes. 13. Create a sharing set for the users who apply for themselves. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Do one of these actions: To create a sharing setting, under Sharing Sets, click **New**. Enter a label name for the sharing setting. To use an existing sharing setting, click **Edit** action for the sharing setting. 3. Under Select Profiles, add your student profile to Selected Profiles. 4. Select the Account object. 5. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up**. Select these fields: User: **Account.PersonContact** Target Account: **PersonContact** Access Level: **Read/Write** 6. Click **Update**. 7. Select the Involvement Group Member object. 8. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up**. 9. Select these fields: User: **User.Contact** Target Involvement Group Member: **Contact** Access Level: **Read/Write** 10. Click **Update**. 11. Save your changes. 14. Add the Open Activities related list to the Goal Assignment object page layout: 1. From the object management settings for goal assignment, go to **Page Layouts**. 2. In the Page Layout Editor, drag **Open Activities** into the Related Lists section of the page layout, and then save your changes. 3. Click **Page Layout Assignment** and assign the layout to the advisor profile. 15. To make sure your users can see related activities on the record, ensure their default record page view in Salesforce is set to **Related Lists**. See [Personalize Your Record Activities View Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.user_record_activities_view_set.htm&language=en_US). 16. To view resumed and completed assessments created in the CRM in the portal, provide your Experience site users access to these objects by using sharing sets. See [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm&language=en_US).
ObjectAccess Level
AssessmentRead/Write
Assessment Question ResponseRead/Write
# Set Up Your Org for Delegated Access Set up Delegated Access Management, assign permissions, configure student-proxy relationships and record sharing, and add the My Proxies component to case and contact record pages. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org for delegated access management:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

View Setup and Configuration

AND

Manage Delegated Access and Related Objects permission set
Before you set up your org for delegated access: - Enable Student Success. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&language=en_US). - By default, students can't access records that they don't own but were created for them. These records may not be shareable using sharing rules. To give students access to these records, change the record owner to the student’s person ID. See [Sharing and Record Access Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.managing_the_sharing_model.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Follow a similar pattern for any data that’s not shareable using sharing rules. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Check out this feature in Salesforce Go! Find a guided setup experience, explore more content, discover related features, and monitor feature usage. See [Discover and Set Up Features With Salesforce Go](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.setup_salesforce_go.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Configure Delegated Access Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_delegated_access_automation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automate the access delegation lifecycle with record-triggered flows and scheduled flows. The flows create delegated users and contact-contact relationships from access requests, keep request records in sync when proxy users sign up or are deactivated, and identify access delegation requests that require updates. ## Set Up Your Org To manage delegated access, set up your org. 1. From the gear icon, select **Salesforce Go**, and then search for Delegated Access Management on the Salesforce Go Home page. 2. Turn on **Delegated Access Management**. 3. To assign permission sets or permission set groups to users for delegated access within Salesforce Go, find **Manage User Access for Staff and Students**, and then click **Manage**. | permission set | Users | | --- | --- | | Manage Delegated Access and Related Objects | Advisors and portal users | | View Delegated Access and Related Objects | Proxy users | 4. To define access boundaries and allow users to delegate access to specific information to trusted proxies, set up these features within Salesforce Go. - Student success basics - Delegate access data sets - Delegate access definition permission sets - Data access definitions - Proxy management on the learner portal - Record sharing - Access delegation flows - Field history tracking for access delegation request status ## Turn On Group Membership To create contact-contact relationships when a student adds a proxy, turn on Group Membership. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Group Membership, and then select **Group Membership Settings**. 2. Turn on **Create and manage households and groups**. ## Create Party Role Relationships To identify the relationship between the student and the proxy, create party role relationships. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Party Role Relationships**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the role name. For example, enter Guardian. 4. Enter the related role name. For example, enter Child. 5. For Relationship Object Name, select **Contact Contact Relationship**. 6. Save your changes, and repeat to create party role relationships for other proxies. ## Configure Object Access Enable access to required objects. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Party Role Relationship | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | 4. Save your changes. ## Create a Sharing Set For Students For students who submit their own requests, create a sharing set. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Digital Experiences, and then select **Settings**. 2. Do one of these actions: - To create a sharing setting, under Sharing Sets, click **New** and then enter a label. - To update an existing sharing set, click **Edit** for the sharing set. 3. Under Select Profiles, add your student profile to Selected Profiles. 4. Select the Access Delegation Request object. 5. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up**. 6. Select these fields: - User:Contact - Access Delegation Request:AccessDelegatedBy.Contact - Access Level: Read Only 7. Click **Update**. 8. Save your changes. 9. Select the Contact Contact Relationship object. 10. In the Configure Access section, click **Set Up**. 11. Select these fields: - User:Contact - Contact Contact Relationship: Contact - Access Level: Read Only 12. Click **Update**. 13. Save your changes. ## Configure Case or Contact Record Page For advisors to see all relevant information on the case or contact record, configure the case or contact record page. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case to view its record page. 3. Click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. 4. In Lightning App Builder, drag the My Proxies component onto the page. 5. Customize the component to your requirements. 6. Save your changes and activate the page. 7. Repeat these steps for a contact record. # Set Up Your Org for Drop In Appointments Configure your org to enable drop in appointments, and add the QR Code component to the waitlist record page for the staff. | USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED |   | | --- | --- | | To set up your org and configure apps with Lightning App Builder: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Enable drop in appointments. 2. Provide access to the necessary objects. See [Configure Sharing Settings for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_sharing_appt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Control how staff members and learners access data with sharing settings."). 3. Similarly provide Public Read/Write as the default external access to the waitlist object. 4. Create work types for the drop-in appointment category, and assign it to a service territory. 5. Add the QR Code component to the waitlist record page: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Waitlists**. 2. Create or select a waitlist. 3. From Setup, click **Edit Page**. 4. In Lightning App Builder, drag the QR Code component to your preferred location on the page. 5. In the component properties, select **Link** as the target URL field. 6. Apply additional customizations as required, and then save your changes. 6. Add the My Appointment component to your app utility bar. SEE ALSO: - [Enable Drop In Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.ls_enable_drop_in_appointments_setting.htm&type=5) - [Set Up Appointment Data Manually](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_appointment_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand and manually set up all the required objects in Education Cloud for appointment scheduling.") - [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm&type=5) - [Add the My Appointment Component to Your App Utility Bar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_my_appt_utility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Education Cloud comes with a preconfigured app that offers a comprehensive view of your users' appointments. If you build your own app, add the My Appointment component to the app's utility bar to provide that view.") # Set Up Your Org for Petitions and Waivers Configure your org to allow learners to request petitions and upload documents. Configure the Salesforce admin’s permissions to manage student petitions and waivers. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org for petitions and waivers components:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Omnistudio Admin permission set

AND

Omnistudio Designer

AND

Omnistudio Runtime
To create context definitions: Context Service Admin
1. Enable access to the required objects. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Sharing Settings, and then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Omni process | Public Read Only | Private | 4. Save your changes. 2. Assign the required permission set licenses to the Salesforce admin. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select **Users**. 2. Click the admin’s name. 3. In the Permission Set License Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 4. Select these permission set licenses. \- Education Cloud Full Access \- Context Service Admin \- Omnistudio Admin \- Omnistudio User \- Product Catalog Management Administrator \- Product Catalog Management Viewer \- Product Discovery User \- Unified Catalog Admin \- Unified Catalog Agent \- Unified Catalog Community User 5. Save your changes. 6. In the Permission Set Assignments related list, click **Edit Assignments**. 7. Select these permission sets. \- Education Cloud Full Access \- Context Service Admin \- Omnistudio Admin \- Omnistudio User \- Product Catalog Management Designer \- Product Catalog Management Viewer \- Product Discovery User \- Unified Catalog Admin \- Unified Catalog Agent \- Unified Catalog Community User 8. Save your changes. 3. To enable intake forms that use Omniscripts, turn on OmniStudio metadata. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Omnistudio Settings, and then select **Omnistudio Settings**. 2. Turn on Omnistudio Metadata. 4. To use load and manage context definitions, turn on Context Definitions. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Context Service Settings, and then select **Context Service Settings**. 2. Turn on Context Definitions. 5. [Set up Unified Catalog](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.uc_unified_catalog_setup.htm&language=en_US). Unified Catalog makes it easier for users and processes to find, manage, and reuse catalog items. # Set Up Your Org for Student Success Components Configure your org to allow learners to view information and interact with student success components on your learner portal.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up your org for student success components:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

Omni Studio Designer

AND

Omni Studio Runtime
## Prerequisites - Student Success is enabled. See [Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Student Success in Education Cloud to provide proactive and personalized support to learners across academics, financial aid, careers, and life goals."). - Program and Benefit Management settings are enabled. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - Discovery Framework is enabled. See [Set Up Common Features That Extend Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_common_features.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on features that support the capabilities your institution needs to streamline workflows, personalize engagement, and drive better outcomes."). - The Omnistudio package is installed. See [Install or Upgrade the Omnistudio Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.os_install_or_upgrade_the_omnistudio_package.htm&type=5). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Education Cloud only supports Omnistudio Designer on a managed package at this time. 1. Configure visibility of personal information fields: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Object Manager**. 2. From the list of objects, click **User**. 3. Select **Field Sets**, and then click **PersonalInfo\_EPIM**. 4. Remove address fields such as Street, City, State/Province, Country, and Zip/Postal Code from the field set. 5. Remove Fax, Phone, Mobile, Email, and Photo fields as well. 6. Save your changes to the field set. The excluded fields are now visible to users. 7. Enable additional permissions to allow external users to view the personal contact information. See [Share Personal Contact Information Within Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.networks_contact_info_visibility.htm&language=en_US). 2. Enable program and benefit management: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Program and Benefit Management Settings**. 2. Enable **Create and manage your programs, benefits, and goals**. 3. Enable **Allow users to access all benefit assignment and goal assignment records when the user has access to the benefit assignment and goal assignment's parent records**. 3. Enable access to required objects: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Under Default Sharing Settings, click **Edit**. 3. Modify access for objects as shown: | Object | Default Internal Access | Default External Access | | --- | --- | --- | | Action Plan | Public Read Only | Private | | Action Plan Template | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Assessment Question | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Benefit Assignment | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Benefit Type | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Goal Assignment | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Goal Definition | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Program | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Program Enrollment | Public Read Only | Private | | Service Resource | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Success Team | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | Unit of Measure | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | | User | Public Read Only | Public Read Only | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note - A user can view a case only if they’re listed as a contact for the case. See [Cases Available for Customer Portal Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000384975&type=1). - To enable users to add tasks to action plans created by a different user, provide Public Read/Write as the default internal access and default external access for action plans. - To use an action plan template with tasks that are assigned to different users, the user must have access to the respective user records. . 4. Save your changes. 4. Provide the required profile permissions for managing tasks: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. From the list, find Customer Community Plus Login User and click **Edit**. 3. Under General User Permissions, enable **Access Activities** and **Edit Tasks**. 4. Save your changes. 5. Configure the page layout of the care plan object: 1. From Setup, find and select **Object Manager**. 2. From the list of objects, select **Care Plan**, and then click **Page Layouts**. 3. Create and configure a page layout. For example, click **Related Lists**, then add **Open Activities**, **Benefit Assignments**, and **Goal Assignments** to view them as related lists of the care plan. 4. Repeat the previous step to configure the page layout for benefit assignment, goal assignment, and task objects. 5. Click **Page Layouts**, and then click **Page Layout Assignment** to assign the new layout to the required profiles. 6. Configure the page layout of the program object: 1. From Setup, find and select **Object Manager**. 2. From the list of objects, select **Program**, and then click **Page Layouts**. 3. Click Fields, and then drag **Success Team** to the Program Detail section. 4. Repeat the previous step for **Omni Process** and **Show on Learner Portal**. 5. Save your changes. 7. Provide the required permissions for portal users to use Action Center: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. From the list, find Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access and click **Clone**. 3. Enter a label, API name, and description. 4. Click **Save**. 5. Select your new permission set. 6. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 7. Select **Action Plans**, and then click **Edit**. 8. Under Object Permissions, select **Create** and **Edit**. 9. Under Field Permissions, select **Read Access**. 10. Similarly, provide access to these object fields as shown in the table. | Object | Field | Required Permission | | --- | --- | --- | | Program Enrollment | Contact | Read | | Program Enrollment | Is Active | Read | | Care Plan | Start Date | Read | | Care Plan | End Date | Read | | Care Plan | Description | Read | 11. Save your changes. 8. Configure the page layout of the action plan template assignment object: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Object Manager, and then select **Object Manager**. 2. From the list of objects, select **Action Plan Template Assignment**, and then click **Page Layouts**. 3. Select an existing page layout or create a new one. 4. Click Fields, and then drag **Associated Record Type** to the Action Plan Template Assignment Detail section. 5. Save your changes. 9. Configure the page layout of the action plan template object: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Action Plan Template**. 2. Under Setup, click **Edit Object**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click Fields, and then drag **Show on Learner Portal** to the Action Plan Template Detail section. 5. Save your changes. 10. Provide the required permissions to portal users for program enrollment: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Select the permission set created in step 9. 3. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 4. Select **Program Enrollments**, then click **Edit**. 5. Under Object Permissions, enable **Read**, **Create**, and **Edit**. 6. Save your changes. 7. Repeat steps h to i for **Benefit Assignments**. 11. For process automation, designate a default workflow user. [See Identify Your Salesforce Org’s Default Workflow User](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.workflow_defaultuser.htm&type=5). 12. Activate flows to automatically create and update benefit disbursements: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Flows, and then select **Flows**. 2. From the list, click **EDU Cloud: Batch Generate Benefit Disbursements for Service Appointments**. 3. Click **Save As**. 4. Enter a flow label, flow API name, and description. 5. Save your changes. 6. Click **Activate**. 7. Repeat steps a to f for the **EDU Cloud: Update Benefit Disbursement by Service Appointment** flow. # Set Up Your Org for Transfer Credits Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To set up your org for transfer credits: Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Transfer credit processing lets learners submit prior coursework or other learning for evaluation toward program requirements. To support this process in Education Cloud, configure learner and staff access, the pages used to review applications, document and record types, and transfer credit utilization metrics. - **[Configure Access and Sharing for Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_access_and_sharing_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign permission sets, update sharing settings, and grant staff and portal users access to transfer credit records and flows. - **[Configure Page Layouts and Record Pages for Transfer Credit Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_page_layouts_and_record_pages_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the buttons, fields, related lists, and tabs that staff use to review transfer credit applications and academic review requests. - **[Configure Transfer Credit Data and Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit_data_and_record_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Define transcript document types, picklist values, and record types for learning achievements, source accounts, and transfer credit cases. - **[Set Up Transfer Credit Support and Utilization Metrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit_support_and_utilization_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create the support process and configure the utilization metrics that summarize inbound credits and their impact on requirement completion. # Set Up Your Portal for Applications Get your Education portal ready to accept and manage applications. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Configure your Education portal to display the New Application component, connect it to your data, and control how students move through the application process. - **[Configure Your Site for Dynamic Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_your_site_for_dynamic_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create your Experience Cloud site, configure it to support dynamic applications. - **[Dynamic Applications Data Sources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_dynamic_application_data_sources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The New Application window shows up to four picklist fields, depending on your selections in the design attributes panel. Options in all picklists except Student are based on filtering the Program Term Application Timeline (PTAT) record. - **[Configure the New Application Window](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_the_new_application_window.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the New Application window the way you want it to appear in your portal. - **[Configure Application Submission and Management Options for Applicants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_edit_view_confirm_submit.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Build additional checkpoints and flexibility into the dynamic admissions application process. Give applicants the options to edit, view, confirm, sign, submit, and cancel their applications. Choose which application details and progress indicators appear on the Application Details and Application List components. Provide applicants the option to withdraw an application after submission. # Set Up Your Portal for Financial Aid Insights Provide all Experience Cloud users with self-service answers to financial aid questions and the ability to submit inquiries. For authenticated students, deliver clear financial aid data and integrate external systems to perform financial aid actions.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To update the Experience Cloud site and configure components: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important The Financial Aid Agent and portal components for unauthenticated users require Data Cloud guest and portal user access. Verify that this feature is available in your org before configuring Experience Cloud portal access. ## Configure the Financial Aid Year Filter The Financial Aid Year Filter component is a required component on any page that includes other financial aid components. It acts as a data provider, fetching and distributing data to all other financial aid components on the page, and allows users to select different financial aid award years. Before you begin, set up a screen flow to enable students to submit inquiries, if needed. You can clone and configure the Submit Inquiry flow. For more information, see [Inquiry and Opportunity Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_inquiry_and_opportunity_management.htm&type=5&language=en_US). 1. In Experience Builder, create a new page for applicants and students to access the financial aid components. 2. Drag the **Financial Aid Year Filter** component onto the page. You can add only one instance of the component to each page. 3. Select the component to open the design attributes panel. 4. To allow users to submit inquiries directly from the portal, select **Show help button**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note This field isn’t supported on the Person Account record page. 5. Enter a custom **Help Button Label**. 6. In the **Help Button Flow API Name** field, enter the API name of the screen flow to run when a user clicks the help button. For example, you can clone and select the Submit Inquiry flow. 7. Optionally, select **Show external link button** and configure the **External Link Button URL** to enable applicants to navigate directly to your external financial aid management system. ## Configure Financial Aid Information Components for Students You can add any combination of optional financial aid components to your page. The components automatically connect to the Financial Aid Year Filter component, which loads the student's data. 1. In Experience Builder, drag any of these components onto your page. You can arrange them in tabs or accordions for better organization. - Financial Aid Highlights - Financial Aid Overview - Financial Aid Checklist - Financial Aid Applications - Financial Aid Awards - Financial Aid Disbursements For details about how each component displays data and calculates totals, see [Financial Aid Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_financial_aid_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how the financial aid components display data and calculate totals for students, prospects, and staff."). 2. For any component with an external link, configure the **Show external link button**, **External Link Button Label**, and **External Link Button URL** attributes to navigate to your external systems. ## Configure Financial Aid FAQs Enable current students to access financial aid FAQs. 1. Create Knowledge articles to answer questions about financial aid policies and processes, and other frequently asked questions. 2. Expose these articles in your portal. # Set Up Your Salesforce Site The first step on the website integration adventure is to set up your Salesforce Site. It's a quick process. Ready? Let's jump in! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Set up your Salesforce site based on your organization's business needs. Because we don't know your particular business needs, some of our suggestions won't apply to your organization. - **[Enable Salesforce Sites with a Domain Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_create_activate_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Sites by claiming a domain name for your organization's Sites presence. - **[Create a Site to Host Volunteers for Salesforce Pages](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_create_activate_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The next step in setting up your website is to create the site that will host the Volunteers for Salesforce pages. - **[Create a Custom robots.txt File](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_create_activate_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The robots.txt file uses include and exclude rules to inform web spiders and robots about which areas of your site to index. You can create a Visualforce page to host the information. Search engines will use the file to index your site pages. ## Enable Salesforce Sites with a Domain Name Enable Sites by claiming a domain name for your organization's Sites presence. If your organization already has a Sites domain, you can use it instead of creating one specifically for hosting V4S on your website. The Sites domain is a custom domain that's separate from any subdomain that your org may have registered using the My Domain feature in Salesforce. The domain name that you choose for the Sites domain can be the same as the one you use for My Domain, since they're not related. 1. From Setup, enter Sites in the Quick Find box, then select **Sites**. 2. Enter a domain name, which is typically your organization's name or a variation of it. Then click **Check Availability**. ![Check availability or domain name](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/domain_check_availability.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important After you register the domain in the next step, you can't change it. That's not a big deal if you're just using Sites for Volunteers for Salesforce pages that you're hosting on your organization's own website (since website visitors don't see this domain name).But in the future you may decide to expose Sites pages directly, so choose something reasonable. 3. Acknowledge that you have read and accepted the Sites Terms of Use, then click **Register My Domain**. 4. Click **OK** to confirm registration. Voila! You've enabled Salesforce Sites. ## Create a Site to Host Volunteers for Salesforce Pages The next step in setting up your website is to create the site that will host the Volunteers for Salesforce pages. 1. On the Sites page, click **New**. ![New button on the Sites list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/create_new_site_button.png) 2. Enter the required information. ![New Site details](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/newsitedetails.png) - Site Label—Enter a descriptive label, in case you love using Sites so much that you decide to create other Sites in the future. - Site Name—Review the unique name that's automatically filled in for you. - Site Contact—Choose yourself or another system administrator. - Default Web Address—The URL suffix is optional. Enter it only if you want your Sites URL to point to a directory more specific than the default Salesforce URL. If you do enter a value here, include it later whenever you specify URLs to your Sites pages. - Active—Select this option to make your site accessible for testing right away. - Active Site Home Page—For now, set the home page to use the default Under Construction Visualforce page. Click the Search icon, then select the UnderConstruction Visualforce page. - Clickjack Protection Level—Set to **Allow framing by the same origin only (Recommended)**. To allow Sites to be IFRAMEd into your website, consider a less secure level. See [Enable Clickjack Protection in Site.com](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.siteforce_clickjacking_enable.htm&type=5). - Lightning Features for Guest Users—This feature isn't needed for V4S pages. Disable Lightning Features for Guest Users to enhance security and prevent unnecessary access to your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note For more on Salesforce Site Security, read the [Salesforce Help docs](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.salesforce_platform_portal_implementation_guide.meta/salesforce_platform_portal_implementation_guide/sites_security.htm). 3. **Save** your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you create a Salesforce site, Salesforce automatically creates a site guest user. In any site created before the Salesforce Summer '21 release, the email address for the site guest user record was that of the Salesforce user who created the site. After the Salesforce Summer '21 release, the system generates a dummy email address to use in the site guest user record. If you plan to use the guest site user as the sender of automated emails triggered by workflow rules, you must update the site guest user email address to a valid email. From your site, click **Public Access Settings**, then **Assigned Users**. Click **Edit** next to the site guest user name and update the email address. For more information, see the [Salesforce Summer '21 Release Notes.](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_experiences_update_guest_email.htm&type=5&release=232) ## Create a Custom robots.txt File The robots.txt file uses include and exclude rules to inform web spiders and robots about which areas of your site to index. You can create a Visualforce page to host the information. Search engines will use the file to index your site pages. ### Create a Visualforce Page 1. From Setup, enter Visualforce Pages in the Quick Find box, then select **Visualforce Pages**. 2. Click **New**. ![Create new Visualforce page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/visualforcev4snew.png) 3. Enter Robot.txt in the Label field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note The Name field will automatically generate based on the Label field. Feel free to edit. 4. Delete the placeholder Visualforce Markup. ![Placeholder Visualforce Markup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/visualforcemarkupv4s.png) 5. Paste your robot.txt. 6. **Save** your changes. ### Sample Robot.txt If your org doesn't have its own, you can use this sample robot.txt: ```java Allow: /GW__Volunteers__PersonalSiteJobListing?* Disallow: / ``` Here's what the different lines of code mean: `Allow: /GW__Volunteers__PersonalSiteJobListing?*` = Allows the Job listing page with your parameters to be open to bots. `Disallow: /` = Hides everything from all bots. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Some Volunteers for Salesforce site URLs include /volunteers at the end (for example, www.mydomain.org/volunteers). If your URL looks like this, you'll need to update the Allow row to include the directory. The robot.txt should read "Allow: /volunteers/GW\_\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteJobListing?\*" For more on what robots.txt is and an example of how to create one, [visit the Salesforce Help docs](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_seo_configure.htm&type=5). # Set Up Your Source Org Turn on features and set up permissions to prepare your source org for data migration. 1. Log in to your source org. 2. Enable event management: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Scheduler, and then select **Salesforce Scheduler Settings**. 2. Turn on Event Management. 3. Enable activity settings: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Activity, and then select **Activity Settings**. 2. Select **Allow Users to Relate Multiple Contacts to Tasks and Events** and then click **Submit**. # Set Up Your Support Staff to Better Serve All Students Complete these tasks to allow support staff to identify students who haven't had a recent support appointment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Learn About Students Not Served](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Sometimes, students don't connect with their support staff as often as necessary. Maybe the student has canceled several appointments, or has yet to make a first-time appointment. The Students Not Served component helps support staff identify and serve these students. - **[Students Not Served Release Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students Not Served was released with Student Success Hub 2.38. Complete the required tasks to get Students Not Served up and running in your org. - **[Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Students Not Served](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Using Students Not Served requires support staff to have access to fields on the Prediction object. - **[Configure Sharing Settings for Students Not Served](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Prediction object. - **[Set the Student Appointment Interval](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In SSH Hierarchy Settings, set the Student Appointment Interval to define the number of days after which a student is considered "not served." For example, if the interval is set to 180 days, then any student who hasn't met with a support staff member in that period is not served. - **[Add Students Not Served to the Home Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add the Students Not Served component to the Student Success Hub Home page so that support staff can easily identify students with whom they need to meet. - **[Schedule a Job to Collect Last Appointment Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To make sure the Students Not Served component always displays an up-to-date list of unserved students, schedule an Apex job to run on a recurring basis. The job collects the date and the Topic of the last appointment between the student and a support staff. - **[Show Support Staff How to Use Students Not Served](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_students_not_served.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn what information the Students Not Served component provides to support staff. ## Learn About Students Not Served Sometimes, students don't connect with their support staff as often as necessary. Maybe the student has canceled several appointments, or has yet to make a first-time appointment. The Students Not Served component helps support staff identify and serve these students. The component shows a list that looks like a standard list view, but functions differently. It pulls together data from multiple objects, including Appointment, Case, and User, and is designed to live on the Student Success Hub app Home page. Students Not Served reveals data from the Prediction object, a custom object that gathers data about the last time a student met with a support staff member and the Topic of that appointment. Students Not Served relies on a custom setting in SSH Hierarchy Settings called Student Appointment Interval. The setting defines the time period that constitutes a student being "not served." For example, if you set the interval to the default 180 days, then a student who hasn't met with a support staff member in 181 days or longer is considered "not served" in the staff member's list. Students Not Served shows all students whose Case Status is an Open value as well as those with a Closed value that is inactive. Students with Case Status that is a Closed and active value don't show in Students Not Served. Read on to learn how to set up Students Not Served. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Due to the nature of the Prediction object and its associated Apex class, do _no_t customize or configure it beyond what's described in this setup article. ## Students Not Served Release Information Students Not Served was released with Student Success Hub 2.38. Complete the required tasks to get Students Not Served up and running in your org. Unless otherwise noted at the beginning of the task, all setup tasks are required regardless of the version of Student Success Hub that you originally installed. If you don’t know which version you started with, see [Keep Student Success Hub Up-to-Date](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_keep_up_to_date.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Stay informed about Salesforce.org product updates and release schedule."). ## Set or Verify Object and Field Permissions for Students Not Served Using Students Not Served requires support staff to have access to fields on the Prediction object. For the required permissions, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."). ## Configure Sharing Settings for Students Not Served Verify your default organization-wide sharing settings for the Prediction object. For details, see [Student Success Hub Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). ## Set the Student Appointment Interval In SSH Hierarchy Settings, set the Student Appointment Interval to define the number of days after which a student is considered "not served." For example, if the interval is set to 180 days, then any student who hasn't met with a support staff member in that period is not served. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **SSH Hierarchy Settings**, then click **Edit** next to Student Appointment Interval. 3. Under General Options, set an appointment interval. The default is 180 days. 4. Save your changes. ## Add Students Not Served to the Home Page Add the Students Not Served component to the Student Success Hub Home page so that support staff can easily identify students with whom they need to meet. Student Success Hub provides a default Home page layout that includes the Students Not Served component. 1. On the Student Success Hub Home page, click the gear icon and choose **Edit Page**. 2. Drag the **Students Not Served** component to the page canvas. Or, if you're using the Home page provided by Student Success Hub, reposition the component if desired. 3. Save your changes. 4. If you’re prompted to Activate the page, you can assign it to the Student Success Hub app, the support staff profile, and other profiles as appropriate. 5. Exit Lightning App Builder. 6. Verify that the component appears on the page. ![The Students Not Served component showing the list of My Students Not Served on the Student Success Hub Home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_students_not_served_home.png) ## Schedule a Job to Collect Last Appointment Data To make sure the Students Not Served component always displays an up-to-date list of unserved students, schedule an Apex job to run on a recurring basis. The job collects the date and the Topic of the last appointment between the student and a support staff. Student Success Hub provides a scheduled Apex batch job called Students Not Served that runs every 24 hours, at midnight. To view it, go to the Scheduled Jobs page in Setup. Keep in mind that scheduled Apex jobs can't be edited. If you want to run the job at a different time or on a different frequency, or if you didn't install the job with Student Success Hub, create your own scheduled Apex job to collect the list of unserved students. If you create a second job, be sure to delete the Student Success Hub job so that it doesn't run in addition to the job you create. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Apex Classes**. 2. Click **Schedule Apex**. 3. Enter a Job Name, then click the lookup icon next to the Apex Class field and search for and select **AppointmentPredictionSchedulable**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you can't find this class using search, cancel and return to the list of Apex classes in your org. Click **Compile all classes**, wait for confirmation of successful compilation, and then click **Schedule Apex** and look for the class again. 4. For scheduled Frequency, select Weekly or Monthly and then specify the cadence. For example, schedule the job to run weekly on Mondays or on the first Sunday of every month. 5. Select the Start and End dates, and your Preferred Start Time. 6. Save your changes. 7. Verify that your newly created job appears in the Scheduled Jobs list. For more help, see [Schedule Jobs Using the Apex Scheduler](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/asynchronous_apex/async_apex_scheduled) in Trailhead. If you'd like the job to run more frequently—even hourly—see the "Using the System.Schedule Method" topic to learn how to customize the CRON expression used for scheduling. You can also run the job at any time—perhaps to test it before you schedule it to recur—from the Developer Console. 1. Click the **Setup** menu and choose **Developer Console**. 2. Click the **Debug** menu and choose **Open Execute Anonymous Window**. 3. Paste this Apex code in the window and then click **Execute**. `Database.executeBatch(new sfal.AppointmentPredictionBatchable());` ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important If you deactivate a support staff User, be sure to remove that person from any predefined case teams. The scheduled Apex job will fail if it encounters any deactivated support staff who have Prediction data associated with a predefined case team. ## Show Support Staff How to Use Students Not Served Learn what information the Students Not Served component provides to support staff. - Click the list view dropdown menu to choose a view. - **My Students Not Served**, the default, shows the not-served students assigned to the support staff User. - **All Students Not Served** shows the not-served students assigned to the support staff User and, if you've enabled access, the not-served students assigned to other staff on the User's case team or success team. - **My Students' Last Appointments** shows all students, both served and not served during the Student Appointment Interval, assigned to the support staff User. - **All Students' Last Appointments**, the most comprehensive list, shows the most recent appointment for all students—served and not served—for all support staff on a case team or success team, as long as you've enabled that visibility. - Click a student's Name to go to their Case record. - Sort by Name, Last Appointment Date, Last Appointment Topic, or Support Staff Member (if other support staff members' students are listed). - Select one or more students and create a task for them or send an email to them. Be sure to let support staff know that although the Students Not Served component looks like a standard list view, it's not. - Standard functions such as Search and inline editing aren't available. - The list views can't be customized. - You can't create reports from the data in the Students Not Served component. - The data is only as fresh as the most recent Apex job. For example, say a support staff member schedules an appointment with a student in the not-served list. That student will remain in the not-served list until the next scheduled Apex job runs. (To that end, it's a good idea to let support staff know how frequently you've scheduled the jobs and your defined Student Appointment Interval.) It's also important for support staff to understand who appears in their not-served lists. They'll always see students who are assigned to them. They'll see students who are assigned to other staff on their case team or success team only if you, as admin, grant access to those records through Sharing Settings or a sharing rule. # Set Up Your Support Staff to Manage Their Availability Complete these tasks to allow support staff to manage their appointment availability in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Allow Support Staff to Manage Their Appointment Availability Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_availability_staff_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a component to the User record page that lets support staff specify their individual appointment availability settings. - **[Allow Support Staff to Customize Appointment Lengths by Topic](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_availability_staff_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As an administrator, in custom settings, you set a default length for all appointments. (Student Success Hub sets it to 50 minutes, otherwise the default is 30 minutes. Either way, you can change it.) However, one size usually doesn't fit all, and your support staff might want their appointments to be different lengths depending on the topic of discussion. - **[Instruct Your Support Staff to Designate Their Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_availability_staff_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you've configured the SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings component, your support staff can designate exactly when they're available for appointments—and equally important, when they're not. ## Allow Support Staff to Manage Their Appointment Availability Settings Add a component to the User record page that lets support staff specify their individual appointment availability settings. 1. In the Student Success Hub app, go to your User record: Click the View profile icon in the page header, and then click your name. 2. In the page header, click the gear icon and select **Edit Page** to open the Lightning App Builder. 3. From the menu of components, drag SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings to the page canvas. We recommend placing it under the User contact details for easy access. 4. Save your changes. 5. If you're ready to Activate the page now, you can assign it to the Student Success Hub app, the support staff profile, and other entities as appropriate. 6. Click **Back** to exit Lightning App Builder. 7. If you've activated the User Record page with your changes, back on the User record page, verify that the appointment availability component appears. If you've specified an organization-wide default or per-support staff member availability settings in Custom Settings, those values appear here. Remember that support staff can access their individual settings from both their User Record page and also from the gear icon in the Appointment Manager. ## Allow Support Staff to Customize Appointment Lengths by Topic As an administrator, in custom settings, you set a default length for all appointments. (Student Success Hub sets it to 50 minutes, otherwise the default is 30 minutes. Either way, you can change it.) However, one size usually doesn't fit all, and your support staff might want their appointments to be different lengths depending on the topic of discussion. For example, one staff member may want appointments about Academic topics to be 30 minutes and appointments about Career topics to be 45 minutes; someone else might want Academic appointments to be 20 minutes and Career appointments to be 30 minutes. A third person might also want appointments to be different lengths for different subtopics. For example, they might want Graduation Audits to be 60 minutes and Degree Planning appointments to be 45 minutes. Student Success Hub offers a custom setting that gives support staff this flexibility and enables it by default. Here's how to enable it if you need to. 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Custom Settings**. 2. Click **Manage** next to SSH Hierarchy Settings and then click **Edit**. 3. Select **Enable Custom Appointment Length**. 4. Make sure Custom Appointment Length Opt-In is deselected. The opt-in field only enables custom appointment lengths for the running user; you want to give all support staff the ability to use custom appointment lengths. 5. Save your changes. After you save the custom setting, support staff can turn on Custom Appointment Lengths on their Availability Settings (Edit Appointment Availability) page. Support staff can create custom appointment lengths for up to 200 topics. If your institution uses more than 200 topics, use a Private sharing setting on Topic and create sharing rules to grant different groups of users Edit access to different groups of topics. ![Custom Appointment Lengths on the Availability Settings page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_appt_availability_settings.png) ## Instruct Your Support Staff to Designate Their Availability After you've configured the SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings component, your support staff can designate exactly when they're available for appointments—and equally important, when they're not. Make sure you review with your support staff how to manage their availability. - Verify their individual time zones. Also, make sure that your students know to set their individual time zone settings in the portal, after you've set it up. - Verify their Appointment Buffer, which gives them time between back-to-back scheduled appointments to wrap up and prepare for the next. - Enable and specify Custom Appointment Lengths by topic and subtopic on their Availability Settings page, if you've enabled the custom setting. See [Specify Your Scheduling Preferences and Recurring Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up staff availability."). Encourage support staff to only enable custom appointment lengths when they're sure they want to use them. Turning custom appointment lengths on and off can potentially result in lost data. - Create their recurring availability blocks in their individual Availability Settings for scheduled, walk-in, and group appointments. We recommend that support staff create availability for no more than a term at a time, to avoid exceeding the maximum number of occurrences allowed per recurrence. For a weekly series, the limit is 53. In other words, if someone schedules a recurring series for Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, every week, a series starting in late August can be scheduled out into approximately mid-December (three occurrences per week times 17 weeks, for a total of 51 occurrences). - For exceptions to recurring availability, go to their Calendars and either edit or remove a specific recurrence of Support Time or schedule a non-support Event that overrides the recurrence (make sure the non-support Event is marked Busy), or make one-off updates to their walk-in availability from the Appointment Manager. - Avoid marking the All-Day Event setting for any type of Event used to establish or remove availability. Student Success Hub ignores all-day Events and doesn't consider them when determining someone's availability. Always use start and end times instead. To indicate actual Events spanning an entire day or multiple days, such as a vacation, support staff can specify a 12 AM start time on the start date and a 12 AM end time on the end date, along with marking the Event Busy to override availability. For Events that occur on a specific date but are purely informational, such as a birthday reminder, support staff should mark the Event Free so that it doesn't affect availability. - To block availability for non-support Events, mark the event Busy. Out of Office doesn't block existing availability. - If support staff have a non-support Event marked Busy that spans multiple days, any scheduled or group availability that conflicts with the multi-day Event is removed. Walk-in availability, however, is _not_ removed. Remind support staff to delete their availability if they're not available because of a multi-day Event. - Create one-off, date-specific availability on their Calendars. For details, see [Keep Your Calendar Up-to-Date with Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub."). # Set Up Your Target Org Turn on features and set up permissions to prepare your new org with Education Cloud for data migration. 1. Log in to your target org where Education Cloud is installed. 2. Turn on Education Cloud: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud. 2. Under Feature Settings, select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 3. Turn on Education Cloud. 3. Set up permissions: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Education Cloud Full Access**, and then click **Manage Assignments**. 3. If users with the System Administrator and Analytics Cloud Integration User profiles aren't included in the list, add them. 4. Turn on group membership: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Group Membership, and then select **Group Membership Settings**. 2. Turn on Create and manage households and groups. 5. Turn on care plans: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Care Plan, and then select **Care Plan Settings**. 2. Turn on Create and manage care plans. 6. Turn on person accounts. See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&language=en_US). 7. Turn on historical trending reports: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Historical Trending, and then select **Historical Trending**. 2. From the list of objects, select **Case**. 3. Select **Enable Historical Trending**, and then click **Save**. 4. Similarly, turn on historical trending for Opportunity. 8. Set up contact-to-account relationship: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Account Settings, and then select **Account Settings**. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Allow users to relate a contact to multiple accounts**, and save your changes. 9. If you don’t have edit access to objects and fields, provide the access: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Profiles, and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator**. 3. Under Apps, click **Object Settings**. 4. Click **Academic Session**, and then click **Edit**. 5. Under Field Permissions, enable edit access for all fields, and then save your changes. 6. Similarly, provide edit access for these target (Education Cloud) objects:
Target Object Label Target Object API Name
Academic Session AcademicSession
Academic Term AcademicTerm
Academic Term Enrollment AcademicTermEnrollment
Academic Year AcademicYear
Account Account
Account Contact Relationship AccountContactRelation
Application Review ApplicationReview
Application Timeline ApplicationTimeline
Appointment Category AppointmentCategory
Assigned Resource AssignedResource
Care Plan CarePlan
Care Plan Template CarePlanTemplate
Case Case
Case Participant CaseParticipant
Contact Contact
Contact Contact Relationship ContactContactRelation
Contact Profile ContactProfile
Course Offering CourseOffering
Course Offering Participant CourseOfferingParticipant
Course Offering Participant Result CourseOfferingPtcpResult
Course Offering Schedule CourseOfferingSchedule
Engagement Channel Type EngagementChannelType
Event Event
Examination Examination
Geo Country GeoCountry
Individual Application IndividualApplication
Lead Lead
Learner Program LearnerProgram
Learning Learning
Learning Achievement LearningAchievement
Learning Course LearningCourse
Learning Outcome Item LearningOutcomeItem
Learning Program LearningProgram
Learning Program Plan LearningProgramPlan
Learning Program Plan Requirement LearningProgramPlanRqmt
Location Location
Opportunity Opportunity
Party Relationship Group PartyRelationshipGroup
Party Role Relationship PartyRoleRelation
Person Education PersonEducation
Person Examination PersonExamination
Person Language PersonLanguage
Program Enrollment ProgramEnrollment

Program Term Application Timeline

 ProgramTermApplnTimeline
Record Alert RecordAlert
Service Appointment ServiceAppointment
Service Resource ServiceResource
Service Territory Service Territory
Service Territory Member ServiceTerritoryMember
Task Task
User User
Work Type Group WorkTypeGroup
Work Type Group Role WorkTypeGroupRole
10. Similarly, provide edit access to the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. 11. Set up these permissions to work with Data Pipelines: 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Permission, and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Data Pipelines Base User**, and then click **Manage Assignments**. 3. If users with the System Administrator and Analytics Cloud Integration User profiles aren't included in the list, add them. 12. Turn on Data Pipelines: 1. From Setup, In the Quick Find box, enter Data Pipelines, and then select **Get Started**. 2. Turn on Data Pipelines. 13. Set up permissions to work with the Data Processing Engine. See [Data Processing Engine Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.dpe_setup.htm&language=en_US). # Set Up Your Volunteers for Salesforce Website Understand how you can save time when you manage volunteering activities by creating Volunteers for Salesforce pages that you embed in an existing website. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As an admin, you can embed Volunteers for Salesforce pages directly in your website so that volunteers can sign themselves up for jobs and track their own volunteer history. This part of setup and configuration is optional. - **[Decide Which Pages to Add to Your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_decide_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Which Volunteers for Salesforce pages do you want to make available on your website? Pick and choose the ones that make sense. They work independently of each other. - **[Website Integration—A Tag Team Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_integration.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce features and tools and streamline working with your web developer to integrate your website. - **[Set Up Your Salesforce Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_create_activate_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The first step on the website integration adventure is to set up your Salesforce Site. It's a quick process. Ready? Let's jump in! - **[Activate Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_activate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You already activated your site when you created it. But it never hurts to double check. - **[Test Load the Volunteers for Salesforce Signup Page on Your Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_test_load.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's time for the first big reveal. Let's see how your Site looks and verify that it works. # Settings Health Check Identify configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings. - **[Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run Settings Health Check to look for configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings in Setup. - **[Access Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The way you access Settings Health Check depends on the version of EDA you originally installed. - **[Run Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run settings health check from Education Cloud Settings in Education Data Architecture. - **[Settings Health Check Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep these guidelines in mind for specific checks. ## Settings Health Check Run Settings Health Check to look for configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings in Setup. Settings Health Check reports passed and failed validations and recommends fixes for errors it finds. Settings Health Check validates EDA Settings related to Accounts, Affiliation mappings, Reciprocal settings, and Course Connections. For example, if more than one Affiliation mapping specifies the same Account record type, that validation fails. If a mapping involves an Account record type that isn't marked Active in Setup or doesn't exist, those validations fail, too. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note My Domain must be enabled in your org or you won’t be able to access Settings Health Check. To verify that it’s enabled, go to Setup, then search for and select **My Domain**. To learn more, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Access Settings Health Check The way you access Settings Health Check depends on the version of EDA you originally installed. - If you started with EDA 1.114 or earlier and you can see the Health Check tab in your org, remove access to it for all profiles and, instead, access Health Check from the Education Cloud Settings tab. - If you started with EDA 1.114 or later, access Settings Health Check from the Education Cloud Settings tab. To add the Education Cloud Settings tab to your org, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). ## Run Settings Health Check Run settings health check from Education Cloud Settings in Education Data Architecture. From the Education Cloud Settings tab: 1. From Tools, click **Go to Settings Health Check**. 2. Click **Run Settings Health Check**. 3. When Settings Health Check completes, follow the recommended fix for any failed checks, and then rerun Settings Health Check. ## Settings Health Check Guidelines Keep these guidelines in mind for specific checks.
Settings Type Validation Logic
Affiliation Mappings

  • Validation applies to all Affiliation mappings, including preconfigured and custom mappings.

  • Account record types used in Affiliation mappings fail validation unless they're marked Active.

  • Validation of Auto-Enrollment Status and Auto-Enrollment Role values applies to only the Affiliation mappings that have Auto-Enrollment selected.
Course Connections Student and Faculty Course Connection record type validation applies only if Course Connection Record Types is enabled in EDA Settings.
Reciprocal Relationships

  • Validation applies to all Reciprocal Relationships, including preconfigured and custom settings.

  • Validation applies to all Reciprocal Relationships even if they aren’t marked Active.

  • Validation assumes that you're using List Setting as the Reciprocal Method for creating Reciprocal Relationships. If you're using the Value Inversion method, validation still applies, but reported errors aren't meaningful.

Note
Note For details about avoiding Settings Health Check failures, see Configure Relationship Settings and Relationship.
# Settings Health Check Identify configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings. - **[Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run Settings Health Check to look for configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings in Setup. - **[Access Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The way you access Settings Health Check depends on the version of EDA you originally installed. - **[Run Settings Health Check](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Run settings health check from Education Cloud Settings in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Settings Health Check Guidelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_settings_health_check.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep these guidelines in mind for specific checks. ## Settings Health Check Run Settings Health Check to look for configuration errors in EDA Settings and related settings in Setup. Settings Health Check reports passed and failed validations and recommends fixes for errors it finds. Settings Health Check validates EDA Settings related to Accounts, Affiliation mappings, Reciprocal settings, and Course Connections. For example, if more than one Affiliation mapping specifies the same Account record type, that validation fails. If a mapping involves an Account record type that isn't marked Active in Setup or doesn't exist, those validations fail, too. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note My Domain must be enabled in your org or you won’t be able to access Settings Health Check. To verify that it’s enabled, go to Setup, then search for and select **My Domain**. To learn more, see [My Domain](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=domain_name_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help. ## Access Settings Health Check The way you access Settings Health Check depends on the version of EDA you originally installed. - If you started with EDA 1.114 or earlier and you can see the Health Check tab in your org, remove access to it for all profiles and, instead, access Health Check from the Education Cloud Settings tab. - If you started with EDA 1.114 or later, access Settings Health Check from the Education Cloud Settings tab. To add the Education Cloud Settings tab to your org, see [Education Cloud Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_education_cloud_settings.htm). ## Run Settings Health Check Run settings health check from Education Cloud Settings in K-12 Architecture Kit. From the Education Cloud Settings tab: 1. From Tools, click **Go to Settings Health Check**. 2. Click **Run Settings Health Check**. 3. When Settings Health Check completes, follow the recommended fix for any failed checks, and then rerun Settings Health Check. ## Settings Health Check Guidelines Keep these guidelines in mind for specific checks.
Settings Type Validation Logic
Affiliation Mappings

  • Validation applies to all Affiliation mappings, including preconfigured and custom mappings.

  • Account record types used in Affiliation mappings fail validation unless they're marked Active.

  • Validation of Auto-Enrollment Status and Auto-Enrollment Role values applies to only the Affiliation mappings that have Auto-Enrollment selected.
Course Connections Student and Faculty Course Connection record type validation applies only if Course Connection Record Types is enabled in EDA Settings.
Reciprocal Relationships

  • Validation applies to all Reciprocal Relationships, including preconfigured and custom settings.

  • Validation applies to all Reciprocal Relationships even if they aren’t marked Active.

  • Validation assumes that you're using List Setting as the Reciprocal Method for creating Reciprocal Relationships. If you're using the Value Inversion method, validation still applies, but reported errors aren't meaningful.

Note
Note For details about avoiding Settings Health Check failures, see Configure Relationship Settings and Relationship.
# Setup for Earlier Versions Create the automated flows that copy address data from Contact and Affiliation records into Account records. If you installed Admissions Connect version 1.16 and earlier, you won’t get the following flows by default. - Sample: Copy Contact Address to Account - Sample: Copy Affiliation Address to Account You can install all unmanaged flows from the [Admissions Connect Flow Installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/admissions-connect/latest/sample-flows). Or, you can create these flows on your own Here's how. ## Create the Sample: Copy Contact Address Flow 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Flow**. 2. Click **New Flow**, select **Record-Triggered Flow**, and then click **Next**. 3. Click **Auto-Layout** and then enter these values.
Field Value
Object Contact
Trigger the Flow When A record is created or updated
Conditions Requirements Any Condition Is Met (OR)

Condition 1:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 1:

  • MailingStreet

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 2:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 2:

  • MailingPostalCode

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 3:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 3:

  • MailingState

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 4:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 4:

  • MailingCountry

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 5:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 5:

  • MailingCity

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 6:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 6:

  • CreatedDate

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 7:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 7:

  • hed__Mailing_County__c

  • Is Changed

  • True

When to Run the Flow for Updated Records Every time a record is updated and meets the conditions requirements
Optimize the Flow for Actions and Related Records
4. Click **Done**. 5. Add a **Get Records** element and then enter these values. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Label | EDA Settings | | API Name | Get\_EDA\_Settings | | Object | **Hierarchy Settings** | | Condition Requirements | **None—Get All Hierarchy Settings Records** | | Sort Order | **Not Sorted** | | How Many Records to Store | **Only the first record** | | How to Store Record Data | **Automatically store all fields** | 6. Click **Done**. 7. Add another **Get Records** element and then enter these values.
Field Value
Label Account Record Type
API Name Get_Account
Object Account
Condition Requirements All Conditions Are Met (AND)

Condition 1:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 1:

  • Id

  • Equals

  • $Record > Account ID

Condition 2:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 2:

  • RecordTypeId

  • Equals

  • Hierarchy Settings from Get_EDA_Settings > Administrative Account Record Type

Sort Order Not Sorted
How Many Records to Store Only the first record
How to Store Record Data Automatically store all fields
8. Click **Done**. 9. Add a **Decision** element and then enter these values.
Field Value
Label Verify Account Record Type
API Name Check_Account_Found
Label Match
Outcome API Name Account_Found
Condition Requirements to Execute Outcome All Conditions Are Met (AND)

  • Resource

  • Operator

  • Value

  • Account from Get_Account

  • Is Null

  • False

When to Execute Outcome If the condition requirements are met
10. Click **Default Outcome** and then enter a Label of No Match. 11. Click **Done**. 12. Add an **End** element after the No Match outcome. 13. Add an **Assignment** element after the Match outcome and then enter these values.
Field Value
Label Stage Account Billing Address
API Name Assign_Account_Billing_Address

Variable 1:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 1:

  • Account from Get_Account > Billing Street

  • Equals

  • $Record > Mailing Street

Variable 2:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 2:

  • Account from Get_Account > Billing County

  • Equals

  • $Record > Mailing County

Variable 3:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 3:

  • Account from Get_Account > Billing City

  • Equals

  • $Record > Mailing City

Variable 4:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 4:

  • Account from Get_Account > Billing ZIP/Postal Code

  • Equals

  • $Record > Mailing Zip/Postal Code

Variable 5:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 5:

  • Account from Get_Account > Billing State/Province

  • Equals

  • $Record > Mailing State/Province

Variable 6:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 6:

  • Account from Get_Account > Billing Country

  • Equals

  • $Record > Mailing Country

14. Click **Done**. 15. Add an **Update Records** element after the Assignment element and then enter these values. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Label | Copy Address to Account | | API Name | Update\_Account | | How to Find Records to Update and Set Their Values | **Use the IDs and all field values from a record or record collection** | | Record or Record Collection | **Account from Get\_Account** | 16. Click **Done**. 17. Save your flow. 1. Enter a Flow Label, for example, Sample: Copy Contact Address to Account. 2. Enter a Flow API Name, for example, Sample\_Copy\_Contact\_Address\_to\_Account. 3. Save your changes. 18. Click **Activate**. ## Create the Sample: Copy Affiliation Address to Account 1. From Setup, search for and then select **Flow**. 2. Click **New Flow**, select **Record-Triggered Flow**, and then click **Next**. 3. Click **Auto-Layout** and then enter these values.
Field Value
Object Contact
Trigger the Flow When A record is created or updated
Condition Requirements Any Condition Is Met (OR)

Condition 1:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 1:

  • Primary_Educational_Institution__c

  • Is Changed

  • True

Condition 2:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 2:

  • Primary_Educational_Institution__c

  • Is Null

  • False

When to Run the Flow for Updated Records Every time a record is updated and meets the condition requirements
Optimize the Flow for Actions and Related Records
4. Click **Done**. 5. Add a **Get Records** element and then enter these values. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Label | EDA Settings | | API Name | EDA\_Settings | | Object | **Hierarchy Settings** | | Condition Requirements | **None—Get All Hierarchy Settings Records** | | Sort Order | **Not Sorted** | | How Many Records to Store | **Only the first record** | | How to Store Record Data | **Automatically store all fields** | 6. Click **Done**. 7. Add another **Get Records** element and then enter these values.
Field Value
Label Account Record Type
API Name Account_Record_Type
Object Account
Condition Requirements All Conditions Are Met (AND)

Condition 1:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 1:

  • Id

  • Equals

  • $Record > Account ID

Condition 2:

  • Field

  • Operator

  • Value

Condition 2:

  • RecordTypeId

  • Equals

  • Hierarchy Settings from EDA_Settings > Administrative Account Record Type

Sort Order Not Sorted
How Many Records to Store Only the first record
How to Store Record Data Automatically store all fields
8. Click **Done**. 9. Add a **Decision** element and then enter these values.
Field Value
Label Verify Account Record Type
API Name Verify_Account_Record_Type
Label Match
Outcome API Name Account_Found
Condition Requirements to Execute Outcome All Conditions Are Met (AND)

  • Resource

  • Operator

  • Value

  • Account from Account_Record_Type

  • Is Null

  • False

When to Execute Outcome If the condition requirements are met
10. Click **Default Outcome** and then enter a Label of No Match. 11. Click **Done**. 12. Add an **End** element after the No Match outcome. 13. Add an **Assignment** element after the Match outcome and then enter these values.
Field Value
Label Stage Account Billing Address
API Name Stage_Account_Billing_Address

Variable 1:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 1:

  • Account from Account_Record_Type > Billing Street

  • Equals

  • $Record > Primary Educational Institution > Billing Street

Variable 2:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 2:

  • Account from Account_Record_Type > Billing City

  • Equals

  • $Record > Primary Educational Institution > Billing City

Variable 3:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 3:

  • Account from Account_Record_Type > Billing Country

  • Equals

  • $Record > Primary Educational Institution > Billing Country

Variable 4:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 4:

  • Account from Account_Record_Type > Billing State/Province

  • Equals

  • $Record > Primary Educational Institution > Billing State/Province

Variable 5:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 5:

  • Account from Account_Record_Type > Billing Zip/Postal Code

  • Equals

  • $Record > Primary Educational Institution > Billing Zip/Postal Code

Variable 6:

  • Variable

  • Operator

  • Value

Variable 6:

  • Account from Account_Record_Type > Billing County

  • Equals

  • $Record > Primary Educational Institution > Billing County

14. Click **Done**. 15. Add an **Update Records** element after the Assignment element and then enter these values. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Label | Copy Address to Account | | API Name | Update\_Account | | How to Find Records to Update and Set Their Values | **Use the IDs and all field values from a record or record collection** | | Record or Record Collection | **Account from Account\_Record\_Type** | 16. Click **Done**. 17. Save your flow. 1. Enter a Flow Label, for example, Sample: Copy Affiliation Address to Account. 2. Enter a Flow API Name, for example, Sample\_Copy\_Primary\_Education\_Institution\_Affiliation\_Address\_to\_Account. 3. Save your changes. 18. Click **Activate**. # SFDC Migration Package License License for the use of Education Cloud's Data Migration Kit. © 2024, salesforce.com, Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, Salesforce, Inc. or one of its Affiliates ("Salesforce" or "Licensor") grants you ("Licensee") certain limited rights to the use of SFDC Migration Package ("Work"). For purposes of this License, said Work shall be deemed to include the original work of authorship, whether in Source or Object forms (as defined herein), and be covered by such copyright notices as may be identified herein. ## 1\. Definitions “Affiliate” shall mean any entity that directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with the subject entity. “Control,” for purposes of this definition, means direct or indirect ownership or control of more than 50% of the voting interests of the subject entity. Salesforce.org LLC is an Affiliate of Salesforce, Inc. "Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications constitute, as a whole, the expression of an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof shall not themselves be deemed Derivative Works. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions herein provided, and including the accompanying appendix. "Source" form shall mean the software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. "Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. ## 2\. License grant Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the Licensor grants to the Licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable, and non-sublicensable limited right to use the Work. Except as and only to the extent permitted by applicable law, the Licensee may not copy, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt, modify, or create any Derivative Works of the Work, any updates, or any part thereof. Any attempt to do so shall constitute a violation of this License and the Licensor’s rights. ## 3\. Ownership Licensor retains sole and exclusive ownership of, and holds all rights, titles, and interests in, to, under, and relating to the Work. If the Licensee acquires any rights in the Work by operation of law or otherwise, the Licensee hereby irrevocably assigns such rights and ownership to Licensor without further action by either party. The Licensee agrees not to dispute or challenge or assist any person or entity in disputing or challenging the Licensor’s rights in and to the Work. ## 4\. License notices The Licensee shall ensure that any use or redistribution of the Work will include the notices described in the below License Appendix. ## 5\. Third-party rights Notwithstanding any other provision of this License to the contrary, nothing in this License will be deemed to be a grant by the Licensor of a license, sublicense, or other grant of a right to the Licensee to use any third-party rights or any rights under any third-party license that cannot be licensed, sublicensed, or granted without the consent, approval, or agreement or another party, unless such consent, approval, or agreement is first obtained by the Licensee. ## 6\. Reservation of rights This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work. The Licensor reserves all rights not expressly granted to Licensee under this License, including, but not limited to all intellectual property and proprietary rights. No use by the Licensor of the Work in any medium or manner will be deemed to interfere with the limited permissions made to the Licensee by the Licensor herein. The names of the Licensor may not be used by the Licensee or another third party to endorse or promote products derived from this Work without specific prior written permission. ## 7\. Disclaimer of representations, warranties, and liabilities THIS WORK IS PROVIDED BY THE LICENSOR "AS IS" AND AS AVAILABLE. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU AGREE THAT ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES FROM LICENSOR OR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE OR IF A REMEDY OTHERWISE FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IF THE FOREGOING DISCLAIMER WILL NOT APPLY TO SOME EXTENT BECAUSE PROHIBITED BY LAW, THEN YOU AGREE TO WAIVE ALL CLAIMS OF DAMAGE, LIABILITY, OR INDEMNIFICATION OBLIGATION WHICH YOU MAY HAVE AGAINST SALESFORCE, ITS AFFILIATES OR ANY THIRD-PARTY HOSTING PROVIDERS.. ANY OTHER AGREEMENT YOU OR YOUR ENTITY MAY HAVE WITH SALESFORCE, OR ITS AFFILIATES REGARDING THE USE OF PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, DO NOT APPLY TO YOUR USE OF THIS WORK. YOU AGREE THAT THIS WORK IS DEEMED TO NOT BE SERVICES UNDER ANY PRODUCT OR SERVICES AGREEMENT WITH SALESFORCE OR ITS AFFILIATES. YOU ARE PROHIBITED FROM SUBMITTING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION AS DEFINED UNDER 45 CFR § 160.103 INTO THIS WORK.. ## 8\. Termination Licensor reserves the right to terminate this License at any time, with or without cause. Upon termination of this License for any reason, all rights licensed under this License will revert immediately to the Licensor and the Licensee shall cease all use of the Work, and erase all digital copies of the Work in its control and possession, or, at Licensor’s request, return or destroy any tangible copies of the Work. ## 9\. Interpretation For the purposes of this License: a. The words “include,” “includes,” and “including” are deemed to be followed by the words “without limitation,”; b. The word “or” is not exclusive; and c. The words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereby,” “hereto,” and “hereunder,” refer to this License as a whole. This License is intended to be construed without regard to any presumption or rule requiring construction or interpretation against the party drafting an instrument or causing any instrument to be drafted. ## 10\. Amendment or modification The Licensor may amend or modify the terms of this license at any time, with effect upon modification and replacement of the preceding License version. Licensee’s continued use or retention of the Work after such modification or replacement will be deemed consent to said changes. ## 11\. Governing law and venue This License shall be governed exclusively by, and construed exclusively in accordance with, the laws of the United States and the State of California, without regard to its conflict of laws provisions. The state and federal courts located in San Francisco, California shall have exclusive jurisdiction to adjudicate any dispute arising out of or relating to this License. Each party hereby consents to the jurisdiction of such courts and waives any right it may otherwise have to challenge the appropriateness of such forums. # Sharing Considerations for Applications Consider how and when to share application information with applicants.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Before you set up your application, review these sharing considerations. - Update your sharing settings so that portal users can see their application data and documents in the portal. - Application decision records are automatically shared with Experience Cloud users on the date you set for the decision release and early application release. You can set these dates on the application timeline object. - If a Decision Release Date value isn't entered, application decision records aren’t shared with portal users. - If the Decision Release Date value is in the future, application decision records are shared on that date. - If the Decision Release Date value is the current date or in the past, application decision records are shared immediately. - For rolling admissions decisions, as previously noted, records are shared immediately when the Decision Release Date value is the current date or in the past. Alternatively, you can enter the same values in Application Open Date and Decision Release Date. This setup shares decision records as soon as they’re created, within the application time frame. - Test the performance of your Experience Cloud site to account for all situations involving many users or high traffic, such as sharing application decisions on a specific day or time. See [Performance and Scale of Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=experience.exp_cloud_plan_performance_scale.htm&language=en_US). ## Update External Sharing Settings The external sharing settings specified in your org-wide defaults apply to users with a Customer Community Plus license. See [Set Your External Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.security_owd_external_setting.htm&type=5). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note The settings in this table are suggestions. Set access to each object to suit your implementation and needs.
Object Access Type
Academic Term Public Read Only
Academic Year Public Read Only
Action Plan Template Public Read Only
Application Decision

Private

Important
Important The default setting for application decision is Private. To avoid errors, don't change this setting for external users. You can disable automatic sharing.
Application Render Method Public Read Only
Application Stage Definition Public Read Only
Application Timeline Public Read Only
Contact Private
Contact Contact Relationship Private
Examination Public Read Only
Geo Country Public Read Only
Individual Application Private
Individual Application Task Private
Learning Public Read Only
Omni Data Transformation Public Read Only
Omni Process Public Read Only
Omni UI Card Public Read Only
Party Role Relationship Public Read Only
Person Education Private
Person Employment Private
Person Examination Private
Person Language Private
Preliminary Application Reference Private
Program Term Application Timeline Public Read Only
## Update Internal Sharing Settings For users to see relevant objects, make sure that your sharing settings are correctly configured. For example, update the default internal sharing settings so that users can see contacts and applications created by a portal user. These default sharing settings apply to users with a Standard User profile and with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set. See [Set Your Internal Organization-Wide Sharing Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.admin_sharing.htm&type=5). # Sharing Sets for Learners To enable learners to view only their own degree plans, create sharing sets where their contact is set on the lookup to contact on the pathway record.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Follow the steps to [Create a Sharing Set for Experience Cloud Site Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.networks_setting_light_users.htm). We recommend using sharing sets for: - Learner Pathway - Learner Program - Course Offering Participant # Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility Learn about shield platform encryption compatibility. - **[Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide extra protection to your sensitive information with Shield Platform Encryption. - **[What is Shield Platform Encryption?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Shield Platform Encryption is an add-on feature for Salesforce that allows you to encrypt your data at rest, rather than just during transmission over a network. - **[Enabling Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When using Shield Platform Encryption, be aware that you can't encrypt certain fields, particularly with SOQL queries and formulas. - **[Known Limitations: Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn the limitations of encrypting standard or custom fields. - **[Known Limitations: Functionality](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enabling encryption doesn't result in any known limitations on functionality. - **[Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_shield_platform_encryption_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out these resources to learn more about Shield Platform Encryption. ## Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility Provide extra protection to your sensitive information with Shield Platform Encryption. ## What is Shield Platform Encryption? Shield Platform Encryption is an add-on feature for Salesforce that allows you to encrypt your data at rest, rather than just during transmission over a network. [Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) allows you to protect data in some standard fields, certain types of custom fields, files and attachments that are stored on the platform, and search indexes. [Standard encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.fields_about_encrypted_fields.htm&type=5&language=en_US) is included with your Salesforce licenses. Shield Platform Encryption requires an additional fee. The encryption type for standard encryption is 128-bit Advanced Encryption Standard, while Shield is 256-bit. Standard encryption provides an encrypted text field type, while Shield Platform Encryption can be applied to many different types of fields, files, attachments, and search indexes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Shield Platform Encryption isn't for everyone. Consider the industry your organization works in, your regulatory requirements, contractual obligations, and internal policies before deciding to enable Shield Platform Encryption. ## Enabling Shield Platform Encryption When using Shield Platform Encryption, be aware that you can't encrypt certain fields, particularly with SOQL queries and formulas. ## Known Limitations: Fields Learn the limitations of encrypting standard or custom fields. Read [General Shield Platform Encryption Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_considerations_general.htm&language=en_US) for more information. You can't encrypt the Session Start field on the Service Session object, the Delivery Date field on the Service Delivery object, or the Application Date field on the Program Engagement object. You also can’t encrypt the Related ID field on the Client Note Relationship object, the Client ID and Photo File ID fields on the Contact object, or the Due Date field on the Action Item object. ## Known Limitations: Functionality Enabling encryption doesn't result in any known limitations on functionality. ## Resources Check out these resources to learn more about Shield Platform Encryption. - [Shield Platform Encryption Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/spe_admins) - [Tradeoffs and Limitations of Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_considerations.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Shield Platform Encryption Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_best_practices.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Strengthen Your Data’s Security with Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_overview.htm&type=5&language=en_US) - [Shield Platform Encryption White Paper](https://www.salesforce.com/form/conf/platform/platform-encryption-architecture/?conf-redirect=true) - [General Shield Platform Encryption Considerations](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.securityimplguide.meta/securityimplguide/security_pe_considerations_general.htm) # Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility with NPSP Find out more about Shield Platform Encryption compatibility. - **[What is Shield Platform Encryption?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Shield Platform Encryption is an add-on feature for Salesforce that allows you to encrypt your data at rest, rather than just during transmission over a network. It allows you to protect data in some standard fields, certain types of custom fields, files and attachments that are stored on the platform, and search indexes. - **[Enabling Shield Platform Encryption in NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Shield Platform Encryption is compatible with NPSP, with some known limitations. - **[Known Limitations: Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We tested encryption of fields that are part of NPSP or are referenced by NPSP code and found that some of them can't be encrypted. - **[Known Limitations: Functionality](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Certain NPSP functions won't work as expected if you enable encryption in these scenarios. - **[Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some resources for you to peruse. ## What is Shield Platform Encryption? Shield Platform Encryption is an add-on feature for Salesforce that allows you to encrypt your data at rest, rather than just during transmission over a network. It allows you to protect data in some standard fields, certain types of custom fields, files and attachments that are stored on the platform, and search indexes. [Standard encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_about_encrypted_fields.htm) is included with your Salesforce licenses. [Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_pe_overview.htm&type=5) requires an additional fee. The encryption type for standard encryption is 128-bit Advanced Encryption Standard, while Shield is 256-bit. Standard encryption provides an encrypted text field type, while Shield Platform Encryption can be applied to many different types of fields, files, attachments, and search indexes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Shield Platform Encryption isn’t for everyone. Consider the industry your organization works in, your regulatory requirements, contractual obligations, and internal policies before deciding to enable Shield Platform Encryption. ## Enabling Shield Platform Encryption in NPSP Shield Platform Encryption is compatible with NPSP, with some known limitations. The types of limitations are: - **Installation**—Install NPSP before you enable Shield Platform Encryption on the **Opportunity Name** field. If encryption is enabled on Opportunity Name, the NPSP installer will fail. You can remove encryption on Opportunity Name, and then run the installer successfully. - **Fields**—You can’t encrypt certain fields due to the way they are used in NPSP, particularly with SOQL queries and formulas. - **Functionality**—Some fields that you can encrypt may cause some unexpected behavior if you enable encryption. See [Shield Platform Encryption Compatibility with NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_shield_compatibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about Shield Platform Encryption compatibility.") for more information. ## Known Limitations: Fields We tested encryption of fields that are part of NPSP or are referenced by NPSP code and found that some of them can't be encrypted. You can encrypt standard or custom fields, with some limitations. Read [General Shield Platform Encryption Considerations](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.securityimplguide.meta/securityimplguide/security_pe_considerations_general.htm) for more information. **You can't encrypt the following NPSP fields:** | Object | Field | | --- | --- | | Account | Membership Join Date | | Account | Membership End Date | | Address | Verification Status | | Affiliation | End Date | | NPSP Data Import | Account1 Import Status | | NPSP Data Import | Account1 Name | | NPSP Data Import | Account1 Website | | NPSP Data Import | ApexJobId | | NPSP Data Import | Contact1 First Name | | NPSP Data Import | Contact1 Last Name | | NPSP Data Import | Contact1 Import Status | | NPSP Data Import | Contact1 Title | | NPSP Data Import | Home City | | Opportunity | Name | ## Known Limitations: Functionality Certain NPSP functions won't work as expected if you enable encryption in these scenarios. - When you use an encrypted field as a matching field in the Data Import Wizard, **NPSP Data Import** fails (for example, Email or Phone). - If you use an Opportunity source field that is encrypted in a **User Defined Rollup**, the rollup will fail. - While using NPSP Legacy Rollups, if you encrypt Membership Start Date, you can’t save Opportunities with data in this field and the **nightly Contact and Account rollups** fail. Encryption on Membership Start Date does work with Customizable Rollups, however. Learn more in [Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically \"roll up\" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records."). - If you encrypt the Role Name field on the Partial Soft Credit object, the **nightly Soft Credit rollups** fail. - The Individual Account model is not supported with encryption enabled on the **Account Name field**. We recommend that you migrate to the Household Account model if you want to encrypt Account Name. Learn more in [What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") - Encryption of fields in the **NPSP Data Import** object is not supported. Be aware that if you encrypt fields on the Account or Contact object, and import data with NPSP Data Import, only the Account or Contact fields are encrypted—not copies of that data stored in the NPSP Data Import object. - NPSP Data Import can't perform **Custom Unique Id matching** on Accounts and Contacts with an encrypted field. - The **Merge** **Contacts** list button on Contact list views doesn't work if you encrypt Contact Name. - If you turn Probabilistic Encryption on for the Contact Name field, you will be unable to install NPSP or receive push upgrades. Switch the Encryption Type to Deterministic to resolve the issue. ## Resources Here are some resources for you to peruse. - [Shield Platform Encryption Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/modules/spe_admins) - [Tradeoffs and Limitations of Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_considerations.htm&language=en_US) - [Platform Encryption Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=security_pe_best_practices.htm&language=en_US) - [Strengthen Your Data’s Security with Shield Platform Encryption](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_pe_overview.htm&language=en_US) # Show Account Relationships on the Donor Profile in Education To show account relationships on the donor profile, add a graph. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Actionable, and then select **Actionable Relationship Center**. 2. Click **New Relationship Graph**. 3. Under Default Templates, select **Fundraising Business Account Relations** or **Fundraising Person Account Relations**. You can create only one graph at a time. To create both graphs, repeat these steps. 4. Click **Create Graph**. 5. For Label, enter a name that describes the graph, and click the Developer Name field to auto-populate it. 6. Save your work # Show Account Relationships on the Donor Profile in Nonprofit To show account relationships on the donor profile, add a graph. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Actionable, and then select **Actionable Relationship Center**. 2. Click **New Relationship Graph**. 3. Under Default Templates, select **Fundraising Business Account Relations** or **Fundraising Person Account Relations**. You can create only one graph at a time. To create both graphs, repeat these steps. 4. Click **Create Graph**. 5. For Label, enter a name that describes the graph, and click the Developer Name field to auto-populate it. 6. Save your work # Show Donor Information in a Summary Card in Education A Summary Card lists a person or partner's photo, name, and key information. You can include custom fields. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Lightning, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. On the page where you want to place the Summary Card, click **Edit** . 3. From the Components list, drag the **Summary Card** component to where you want it to appear on the page. 4. If needed, in the component, enter a name for this summary to replace the record name. 5. Click **Select** and move the fields that you want to include in the Summary Card to the Selected list. Recommended fields include First Name, Last Name, Billing Address, and Billing City. 6. (Optional) To add a filter to determine when the summary is visible, under Set Component Visibility, click **Add Filter**. 7. Save your work. 8. Activate the page when it's ready. You can also activate the page anytime by editing it. To make the page visible to users, activate it as an App Default. If you chose Campaign or Account as the object for this component, activate it as App Default and select the Fundraising apps where you want the component to appear. Campaign and Account home page customizations don't appear if the page is activated as an Org Default. SEE ALSO - [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5) - [Actionable Relationship Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_arc_overview.htm&type=5) - [Add the Action Launcher Component to a Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.add_the_action_launcher_component_to_a_page.htm&type=5) - [Assign Page Layouts to Profiles or Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.layouts_assigning.htm&type=5) - [Create an Action Launcher Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.create_an_action_launcher_deployment.htm&type=5) - [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5) - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5) # Show Donor Information in a Summary Card in Nonprofit A Summary Card lists a person or partner's photo, name, and key information. You can include custom fields. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To set up donor profiles:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Lightning, and then select **Lightning App Builder**. 2. On the page where you want to place the Summary Card, click **Edit** . 3. From the Components list, drag the **Summary Card** component to where you want it to appear on the page. 4. If needed, in the component, enter a name for this summary to replace the record name. 5. Click **Select** and move the fields that you want to include in the Summary Card to the Selected list. Recommended fields include First Name, Last Name, Billing Address, and Billing City. 6. (Optional) To add a filter to determine when the summary is visible, under Set Component Visibility, click **Add Filter**. 7. Save your work. 8. Activate the page when it's ready. You can also activate the page anytime by editing it. To make the page visible to users, activate it as an App Default. If you chose Campaign or Account as the object for this component, activate it as App Default and select the Fundraising apps where you want the component to appear. Campaign and Account home page customizations don't appear if the page is activated as an Org Default. SEE ALSO - [Action Launcher](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.the_action_launcher_component.htm&type=5) - [Actionable Relationship Center](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_arc_overview.htm&type=5) - [Add the Action Launcher Component to a Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.add_the_action_launcher_component_to_a_page.htm&type=5) - [Assign Page Layouts to Profiles or Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.layouts_assigning.htm&type=5) - [Create an Action Launcher Deployment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.create_an_action_launcher_deployment.htm&type=5) - [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5) - [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&type=5) # Show Full Names Instead of Nicknames in the Appointment Experience Site Configure the appointment setup flow's name display for clarity.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To edit Experience site settings in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter All Sites, and then select **All Sites**. 2. Click **Workspaces** next to your Experience site. 3. Click **Administration**, and then **Preferences**. 4. Deselect **Show nicknames**. 5. Save your changes. # Show Household Information on Student Management Records Add a relationship graph to student records to show household information. Use the graphs to view a student's household members, including parents, guardians, and siblings. You can also view the relationships between the household members. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To add relationship graphs to student records: Education Cloud Full Access
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Actionable Relationship Center**. 2. Click **New Relationship Graph**. 3. From Default templates, select **Education Cloud Person Account Relations**, and then click **Create Graph**. 4. Enter a label and a developer name for the template, and then save your changes. 5. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Lightning App Builder**. 6. Next to the Student Management Person Account Record Page, click **Edit**. 7. In Lightning App Builder, drag the **ARC Relationship Graph** component onto the page. 8. Select the graph that you previously created as the graph name. 9. Enter a label for the graph. 10. Save your changes. See Also: - [Create a Relationship Graph in ARC](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.fsc_admin_arc_create_relationship_graph.htm&type=5&language=en_US) # Show Research Profile Cards in Slack in Education The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Canvas Management subagent creates the Research Profile Summary canvas in Slack. To show research profile record cards on the canvas, add your org’s domain URL to the Create Slack Canvas Layout for Party Philanthropic Research Profile prompt template. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To configure prompt templates:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Prompt Template Manager
1. From Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Under Prompt Templates, select **Create Slack Canvas Layout for Party Philanthropic Research Profile**. 3. Click **Save As**, and then click **Save as a New Version**. 4. Scroll to the end of the prompt and find !\[ResearchProfile\](/{!$Input:ResearchProfile.Id}). 5. Add your org’s domain URL to /{!$Input:ResearchProfile.Id}. For example, !\[ResearchProfile\](https://my.demo.com/lightning/{!$Input:ResearchProfile.Id}). 6. Save and activate the prompt template. # Show Research Profile Cards in Slack in Nonprofit The Party Philanthropic Research Profile Canvas Management subagent creates the Research Profile Summary canvas in Slack. To show research profile record cards on the canvas, add your org’s domain URL to the Create Slack Canvas Layout for Party Philanthropic Research Profile prompt template. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Education Cloud: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Nonprofit Cloud: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with the applicable Agentforce add-on license
User Permissions Needed
To configure prompt templates:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group

AND

Prompt Template Manager
1. From Setup, find and select **Prompt Builder**. 2. Under Prompt Templates, select **Create Slack Canvas Layout for Party Philanthropic Research Profile**. 3. Click **Save As**, and then click **Save as a New Version**. 4. Scroll to the end of the prompt and find !\[ResearchProfile\](/{!$Input:ResearchProfile.Id}). 5. Add your org’s domain URL to /{!$Input:ResearchProfile.Id}. For example, !\[ResearchProfile\](https://my.demo.com/lightning/{!$Input:ResearchProfile.Id}). 6. Save and activate the prompt template. # Sign Up a Recurring Volunteer using Volunteer Recurrence Schedules When you have ongoing Jobs (created using a Job Recurrence Schedule), you may be lucky enough to have dedicated volunteers who want to sign up for Shifts on a regular basis. You can use the Volunteers for Salesforce Volunteer Recurrence Schedule to easily set up a recurring schedule for a regular volunteer. You can specify when the schedule starts and ends, and which days of the week and month the volunteer wants to work. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Create a Recurring Volunteer Schedule](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RKq7LdDlQPw). 1. Click the Volunteer Jobs tab, then select a Job that has multiple Shifts that were created using a Job Recurrence Schedule. 2. Click the Related tab. 3. In the Volunteer Recurrence Schedules related list, click **New Volunteer Recurrence Schedule**. 4. Optionally, copy the Job's recurrence schedule by selecting it from the Job Recurrence Schedule drop-down. ![Copy schedule to VRS from JRS](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/copy_jrs.png) 5. Enter the Contact's name. You can use the lookup to search for the Contact. 6. Update the start date, end date, and duration as necessary. Although the Job is ongoing, the volunteer may want to participate for a certain time period. 7. For the Volunteer Hours Status, select Confirmed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you select a Status of Confirmed or Completed, the Volunteer Status field on the Contact is automatically updated to Active. ![VRS information](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/vrs_info.png) 8. Update the days of the week and weekly occurrence as needed. For example, if the Job occurs every Monday, but the volunteer can only make it every other Monday, you can make that change here. ![VRS days of the week and weekly occurrence](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/vrs_days_of_week.png) 9. Enter the number of volunteers. This will typically be 1, unless the volunteer represents a group of people. 10. Click **Save**. You'll see the Volunteer Recurrence Schedule details. If you want to see the results of your hard work, click on the Job name in the Volunteer Recurrence Schedule details. Back on the Job detail page, click Related, then check out the Volunteer Hours list. You should see the upcoming scheduled hours you just created. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note To avoid duplicate Hours, create partial Volunteer Recurrence Schedules that don't overlap within a Job Recurrence Schedule. ![Scheduled shifts on the Volunteer Hours related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/vrs_vol_hours.png) # Simplify Employee Record Creation for Faculty Customize the Create Employee flow to collect specific information when it creates employee records for faculty. Agent actions use these fields to identify faculty Slack users. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To configure flows:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Manage Flow
1. From Setup, find and select **Flows**. 2. Select **Create Employee**. 3. Click **Save as New Flow**. 4. Simplify your flow to collect employee details, create a contact ID and a user ID, and create an employee record. Customize the flow based on how your institution defines and handles employee record creation. The example only presents one possible approach. 5. Save and activate the flow. ![Example](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_example.png) Example Create a simplified flow with four elements after the Start element. ![A simplified Create Employee Record flow containing four elements after Start: Collect Employee Details, Get Contact From Email, Get User From Email, and Create Employee2 Record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/course_ops_agent_simple_eployee2_flow.png) 1. Use the existing Collect Employee Details screen flow element to collect details about a faculty member. The details later populate the corresponding fields on their employee record. Modify the form to include at least these required fields: Employee Number, Email, Employee Status, and Status Start Date. 2. Add a Get Records element that gets the contact ID from the email address that's associated with a faculty member's person account. Name the element Get Contact From Email, and add a filter condition where Email equals Collect Employee Details > Email > Value. 3. Add a Get Records element that gets the user ID from the email address that's associated with a faculty member's person account. Name the element Get User From Email, and add a filter condition where Email equals Collect Employee Details > Email > Value. 4. Use the existing Create Employee2 Record element to create an employee record. Set these required field values to populate the employee record. | Field | Value | | --- | --- | | Contact ID | Contact from Get Contact From Email > Contact ID | | Employee Number | Collect Employee Details > Employee Number | | Employee Status | Collect Employee Details > Employee Status | | Status Start Date | Collect Employee Details > Status Start Date | | User ID | User from Get User From Email > User ID | # Skip Reversal Logic to Reduce Processing Time Reduce Accounting Subledger's processing time by bypassing reversal logic and current value field mapping.
REQUIRED EDITIONS AND USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable Skip Reversal Logic: | Manage Accounting Subledger | With Skip Reversal Logic, Accounting Subledger treats reversals as adjustments and current value field mappings as point-in-time field mappings. It ignores mapping from secondary objects in three-object models and tertiary objects in four-object models. Because all entries use point-in-time values, adjustment journals aren't created when the payment method changes, even if Create Adjustments When Payment Method Changes is turned on. To make sure that the Skip Reversal Logic setting takes effect, turn it on before you activate your accounting set. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Accounting, and select **Accounting Settings**. 2. Turn on Skip Reversal Logic. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_important.png) Important To see a performance improvement, deactivate and reactivate existing accounting sets after you enable Skip Reversal Logic. # Slack Channels for Nonprofit Cloud Integrate Nonprofit record pages with Slack channels for real-time collaboration. Communicate directly within a record page and keep all team members connected, because conversations are accessible in both Salesforce and Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
With Salesforce Channels in Nonprofit Cloud, you can connect with teammates across Salesforce and Slack, meeting them where they work best. CRM users can use the Slack Channel Lightning web component on the record page to add to the conversation. Slack users see a preview of record details in the dedicated channel and can respond to the conversation directly in Slack. These objects are good candidates for Salesforce Channels in Nonprofit Cloud: - Objects that endure for months or years with your teams, such as Program or Account. - Objects that are for short-term tasks and involve collaboration with subject matter experts, such as Incident or Gift Refund. - Objects that require more complex coordination and collaboration, such as Care Plan or Application. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_important.png) Important Update your Slack Integration User permission set to give access to the objects that you want to integrate with Slack before you set up Salesforce Channels. See [Enable Object Permissions in Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_objects_and_fields.htm&language=en_US). Users inherit permissions from Salesforce. Anyone can be a member of a Salesforce Channel, regardless of their CRM license, but they can't interact with the record or view the details tab. Users with Salesforce licenses can view details in work previews. To set up Salesforce Channels in Nonprofit Cloud, see [Set Up Salesforce Channels in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=slack.slack_salesforce_channels_setup.htm&type=5&language=en_US). # Slack for Education Turn Education data and workflows across the learner lifecycle into real-time collaboration in Slack. Faculty, students, and staff can engage with timely, relevant data and AI-driven automation directly in their everyday workspace. This integration reduces administrative burden and helps your institution act faster to enhance student success. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and Slack
- **[Slack for Education Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_slack_for_education_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize flows to support course operations and student success workflows. These flows enhance real-time collaboration directly in Slack. - **[Course Operations Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_course_operations_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Course Operations Agent assists your faculty directly in Slack. This assistant helps faculty manage courses, engage with students and teaching assistants, identify at-risk learners, and coordinate student support. With centralized course operations and student support, faculty can focus on teaching and student engagement and less on administrative tasks. # Slack for Education Flows Customize flows to support course operations and student success workflows. These flows enhance real-time collaboration directly in Slack. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create Record Alerts and Post Student Progress](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_record_alerts_post_progress.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure flows to create student record alerts and send course offering participant insights directly to Slack. - **[Simplify Employee Record Creation for Faculty](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_simplify_faculty_employee2_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Create Employee flow to collect specific information when it creates employee records for faculty. Agent actions use these fields to identify faculty Slack users. - **[Identify Faculty Slack Users for Agent Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_identify_faculty_slack_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Several Slack for Education flows reference the EDU Course Operations: Get Faculty Slack User in a subflow element. Modify this flow to make sure that related agent actions accurately identify a faculty Slack user based on their employee record. - **[Send Course Load Details and Create Course Offering Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_send_course_load_create_channel.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Modify the EDU Course Operations: Create Course Load and Slack Channel flow after you create the Course Operations Agent. The updated flow calls the agent to send course load information and create course offering channels for faculty in Slack. # Soft Credits Overview Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence. - **[What is a Soft Credit?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence. - **[Soft Credits and Opportunity Contact Roles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Most soft credits use an Opportunity Contact Role (OCR). OCRs connect a Contact to an Opportunity and define a role for each Contact. - **[Types of Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP includes both automated and manual soft credits. - **[Soft Credit Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP aggregates soft credit totals using rollup fields. You can find soft credit rollup fields in the Soft Credit Total section of a Contact record. - **[A Word About the Nightly Batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_soft_credits_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofit Success Pack calculates soft credit rollups in its nightly batch, so you won't see an immediate change to a Contact's soft credit rollup fields right after you assign them a soft credit Contact Role. If you want to see updates immediately, your administrator can manually recalculate rollups. ## What is a Soft Credit? Soft credits are a fundraising concept that represent recognition of credit for donations. Soft credits help you to better understand a donor's history and their level of influence. In Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), many soft credits are assigned automatically, and you can assign soft credits manually. NPSP summarizes soft credit history using roll up fields. A common example of a soft credit is a matching gift: Jane Smith gives $100 to your organization, and her company matches the $100, resulting in a $200 donation. In NPSP, you track the first $100 as a hard credit (the actual money that came from Jane), and the matched $100 as a soft credit because Jane influenced, but didn't donate, the money. Soft credits come in many types and apply to both people (Contacts) and organizations (Accounts). ## Soft Credits and Opportunity Contact Roles Most soft credits use an Opportunity Contact Role (OCR). OCRs connect a Contact to an Opportunity and define a role for each Contact. For example, Jane might be the Donor on an Opportunity, while John might be an Influencer. You track both Contacts, and their respective roles, with Opportunity Contact Roles because both people helped bring in the donation. Nonprofit Success Pack comes with the following Opportunity Contact Roles out-of-the-box: - Donor - Household Member - Soft Credit - Matched Donor - Honoree - Notification Recipient - Grant Manager - Decision Maker - Influencer - Solicitor - Workplace Giving - Other ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note OCRs are completely customizable by your database administrator. The admin can edit the out-of-box roles, create new roles, and control which roles count as a soft credit. Learn more in [Configure Automated and Manual Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_config_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about configuring automated and manual soft credits."). Not all Opportunity Contact Roles count as soft credits. **If your admin designates that an OCR should count as a soft credit, then any Contact assigned that OCR receives a soft credit**. Your administrator can help you understand which OCRs are configured to count as soft credits in your org. So, how do you assign soft credits when entering gift information? Most of the time it happens automatically. Read on to learn more. ## Types of Soft Credits NPSP includes both automated and manual soft credits. ### Automated Soft Credits Automated soft credits are tracked in NPSP using Opportunity Contact Roles (OCRs) and include these types: [Household Member Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") Everyone in a Household receives credit for a donation made by any other Household member. The donor receives a hard credit for the gift and everyone else receives the Household Member soft credit. [Matching Gift Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_work_with_matching_gifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Tracking Matching Gifts in Salesforce is a three-step process.") Matching Gifts track a donation that a corporation made as a match for a donation from one of their employees. The employee gets automatically assigned a Matched Donor soft credit. [Tribute Gift Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_tribute_opportunities_honor_and_memorial_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofit Success Pack enables you to capture important details about donations made in honor or in memory of someone. You can track who the donation was made in honor of, as well as who should be notified about the donation and how best to notify them.") Tribute Gifts track donations given in honor of or in memory of someone. Depending on the type of Tribute Gift, NPSP assigns either the Honoree or Notification Recipient soft credit. [Relationship Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") NPSP assigns soft credits to Contacts associated with Relationship records. For example, your organization wants to recognize gifts that board members help to bring in by assigning a soft credit each time donors with whom they have a Relationship record in NPSP make donations. [Affiliation Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") NPSP assigns soft credits to Contacts for Organizational donations based on Affiliation records. For example, the members of a family foundation want to receive a soft credit for every donation made by their family foundation. [Primary Contact Soft Credits on an Organizational Gift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically.") NPSP assigns soft credits to Contacts that are the Primary Contact on Organizational gifts. For example, the owner of a small business wants to receive soft credit each time their company makes a donation. ### Manual Soft Credits Create manual soft credits when you need to assign partial soft credits, assign soft credits to organizations, or for any special soft credit scenarios that arise. [Manually Assigned Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits.") Create an Opportunity Contact Role manually to assign a single soft credit. This is useful for unique scenarios that aren't covered by automated soft credits. [Partial Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits.") Create Partial Soft Credit records to assign portions of a soft credit to one or more Contacts. For example, let's say your board of directors assist with fundraising. If two board members work together to win a large contribution from a major donor, you could use Partial Soft Credits to assign 50% of the soft credit for the major gift to each board member. [Account Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits.") Create Account Soft Credit records to assign soft credit to a company or organization. Sometimes one company might use another company to manage its corporate philanthropy and giving programs. For example, Universal Containers (UC) owns a philanthropic subsidiary company, called GivePlenty, that disburses corporate grants to nonprofits. When GivePlenty awards grants to nonprofit organizations, the check is written by GivePlenty, so they get the hard credit. In this scenario, you could assign Account Soft Credits to Universal Containers to recognize the involvement of the parent company. Account Contact Soft Credit Rollups Account Contact Soft Credit rollups aggregate all Household members' soft credits and roll them up to the Household. Your administrator can enable these rollups using Customizable Rollups. Learn more in [Manually Create Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Nonprofit Success Pack to manage full and partial soft credits."). ## Soft Credit Rollups NPSP aggregates soft credit totals using rollup fields. You can find soft credit rollup fields in the Soft Credit Total section of a Contact record. NPSP aggregates soft credit totals using rollup fields. There are many soft credit rollups for Contacts that come out-of-box in NPSP. If you're using Customizable Rollups, your administrator can add more soft credit rollups, including rollups that aggregate soft credits for all Contacts in a Household and roll them up to the Household Account. Learn more in [Customizable Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records."). You can find soft credit rollup fields in the Soft Credit Total section of a Contact record. ![Soft credits on the Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/soft_creds_oview_sctotals.png) In NPSP, you can have multiple Opportunity Contact Roles (OCRs) and overlapping filter group criteria, which can cause inaccurate soft credit rollup values. To avoid issues with rollups: - Use the same filter group across similar kinds of rollups. - Avoid creating filter groups with overlapping filter rule criteria. - Construct filter rules so that rollups include only the required records. ## A Word About the Nightly Batch Nonprofit Success Pack calculates soft credit rollups in its nightly batch, so you won't see an immediate change to a Contact's soft credit rollup fields right after you assign them a soft credit Contact Role. If you want to see updates immediately, your administrator can manually recalculate rollups. Learn more in [Manually Recalculate Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build."). # Source Records Eligibility Accounting Subledger applies eligibility criteria to select source records to process.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
Accounting Subledger only considers source records based on criteria that you define on the accounting set. Then, it generates transaction journal records for source records that meet the mapping and field requirements described in this table. We update the transaction journal records if a paid or written off record is later changed. See [Configure Accounting Set Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_configure_accounting_set_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you map source fields to accounting set destination fields, configure how Accounting Subledger generates transaction journal records for each accounting set.") and [Amount Corrections](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_adjust_payment_expense_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If there's a mistake in the payment amount, edit the record and then save your changes. For amount increases, decreases, or adjustments, we create delta amounts to account for the difference. For significant changes, such as a change to payment dates or funds, or if a payment is refunded, we reverse the record, and then create another record with the revised values."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Not all Amount fields apply, as they depend on the object model selected for the accounting set.
If, on the Source Record... Then, Map these Fields from the Source Record
Checkbox mapped to Payment Paid is selected
  • Fund Name
  • Payment Method (not required but recommended)
  • Payment Paid Date
  • All mapped Amount fields:
    • Fund Account Allocation Amount
    • Overall Amount
    • Payment/Expense Account
Checkbox mapped to Written-Off is selected
  • Fund Name
  • Payment Paid Date
  • All mapped Amount fields:
    • Fund Account Allocation Amount
    • Overall Amount
    • Payment/Expense Amount
Checkbox mapped to Generate Expected Revenue/Expense is selected
  • Payment Scheduled Date
  • All mapped Amount fields:
    • Fund Account Allocation Amount
    • Overall Amount
    • Payment/Expense Amount
To prevent incomplete or inaccurate results, consider creating your own validation rules to enforce these data requirements when you edit source records. # Specify a Default Mailing Address for a Household or Organization Indicate when a mailing address is the default for the household and contact.Learn how to specify a default address in NPSP. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Mark a Default Address.](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=65bnOBc_f-g) - **[Mark an Address as Default](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_specify_default_mail_addr_for_household_or_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Marking an Address as the default specifies that it is the Address to send mailings to. - **[Mark a New Address as Default if the Household Moves](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_specify_default_mail_addr_for_household_or_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a new address and mark it as the household's default address. The previous default address and all contacts related to the household are updated. ## Mark an Address as Default Marking an Address as the default specifies that it is the Address to send mailings to. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This functionality is available only if you're using the Household Account model. For more information, see [What is the Household Account Model?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_is_an_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend.") When you mark an Address as default, NPSP: - Copies that Address to the related Household or Organization Account's Billing Address fields. - Copies that Address to the Mailing Address fields of each Contact who's connected to the Household (Household Accounts only). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Default Mailing Addresses aren't copied to Contacts who have an Address Override. See [Override the Default Household Address for a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_override_the_default_address_for_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you have a Contact who prefers to receive their individual mailings at a different address than the default Household address, you can accommodate them by setting an Address Override."). To mark an Address as default: 1. In the Nonprofit Success Pack, search for the Household or Organization (for example, “Smith Household”), or click the **Accounts** tab to see a list of recent Accounts. 2. Click the Account Name of the Household or Organization Account whose addresses you want to edit. 3. Scroll down to the Addresses related list, find the Address record you'd like to set as the default, and click **Edit**. ![Edit Action on the Addresses related list](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ho_default_addr_edit_address.png) 4. Select the **Default Address** checkbox, and click **Save**. ![The Default Checkbox on the Address record is selected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ho_default_addr_defaddrbehavior.png) You now see the default Address in the Mailing Address and Household Mailing Address fields on the Contact record. ![Since the default checkbox on the new Address is checked, the Address is copied to the Mailing Address and Household Mailing Address fields on the Contact record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/ho_default_addr_oncontact.png) ## Mark a New Address as Default if the Household Moves Create a new address and mark it as the household's default address. The previous default address and all contacts related to the household are updated. 1. [Create the new address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_update_addr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add or update an address for Contacts, Households, or Organizations in NPSP.") for the Household Account. 2. Mark the new address as the Default Address (procedure above), and click **Save**. Behind the scenes: - On the previous default Address, the **Default Address** checkbox is unchecked. - On the previous default Address, the Latest End Date field is populated with today's date. - The Household Account and related Contacts are updated with the new default Address. # Specify a Preferred Phone Number and Email Address for a Contact Salesforce comes out-of-box with one email and one phone field. This is a great start, but often people have more than one phone and email. NPSP adds several custom phone and email fields, so that you can track a Contact's business and personal emails, as well as mobile, office, and home phones. NPSP also lets you specify a Preferred Email and Preferred Phone. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Specify Primary Email & Phone](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zXZvbbVucbY) When you specify a Preferred Phone or Preferred Email, NPSP automatically copies your selection into the standard Salesforce Phone or Email field. For example, if you select "Mobile" as the Preferred Phone, NPSP copies the value from the Mobile Phone field into the standard Phone field. ![Contact record with Preferred Phone set to Mobile, and Mobile phone number copied to the Phone field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/preferred_phone.png) Benefits of setting a Preferred Phone and Preferred Email include: - The ability to display a Contact's preferred contact information in reports, list views, and related lists. - The ability to use Mass Email and Request Updates features. To update a Contact's Preferred Phone or Preferred Email: 1. In Nonprofit Success Pack, search for the Contact whose information you want to edit, or click the Contacts tab and select the Contact from the list of recent Contacts. 2. On the Contact record, click **Edit**. 3. Under Contact Information, select a Preferred Phone or Preferred Email. 4. Click **Save**. # Specify a Seasonal Address Learn how to set up a Seasonal Address. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Seasonal Address](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aRFWFtESymU). You can set up a Seasonal Address with start and end dates for a Household or Organization Account, so that the Seasonal Address is automatically set as the Mailing Address at the specified start date. When the end date is reached, Salesforce copies the original Address back to the Address fields. To set up a Seasonal Address: 1. [Create a new Address](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_or_update_addr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Add or update an address for Contacts, Households, or Organizations in NPSP.") for the Household or Organization Account. 2. On the Address Edit page, enter the Seasonal Information: **Seasonal Start Month**, **Seasonal Start Day**, **Seasonal End Month**, and **Seasonal End Day**. Don't select a year, because we don't want this particular date range to expire until you change or delete it. 3. Click **Save**. When the Seasonal Address start date is reached, Salesforce automatically copies the Address to the Account's Billing Address fields. If it's a Household Account, Salesforce also copies the seasonal address to the Mailing Address for all related Contacts who do not have an Address Override. ![The seasonal address is copied to the billing address field on the Account (and to the Mailing Address field on related Contacts) when the seasonal start date is reached](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/npsp_seasonal_address.png) Be sure that the Account or Contact where you'd like to specify a Seasonal Address also has a default address. If you create a Seasonal Address with no other default address, you'll get an error when NPSP tries to switch to or from the Seasonal Address. ## Seasonal Address Updates Salesforce runs the Seasonal Address Updates scheduled job that sets seasonal addresses as the mailing address once per night. If you set up a new Seasonal Address that should be in effect on January 1st, for example, you won't see it copied to the Mailing Addresses until the next day (January 2nd), after the nightly scheduled job has run. The exception to this is when you set the start date for the Seasonal Address to today's date—in this case, the change will take effect immediately. # Speed Up Payment and Recurring Donation Exports Limit the scope of your payment and recurring donation exports in Elevate by adding a date range. To improve the speed of exports, Elevate exports multiple files when your request includes more than 10,000 records. **Where**: This change applies to users with access to the Elevate admin portal. **Who**: Users who export payments and recurring donations in the Elevate admin portal. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Export All Payments (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.el_export_all_payments.htm) # Split Party Relationship Groups Using a Guided Workflow Move members, related contacts, groups, and business accounts from a party relationship group to another existing group or a new group using the Split workflow. Specify member roles and relationships and the relationships of related contacts, groups, and business accounts in the split group. Review related information such as cases and complaints associated with the original group, move required records to the split group, and create reminder tasks to review any records later. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program and Case Management is enabled. # Staff Assisted Proxy Management and Access Delegation Student advisors can grant parents, guardians, and other proxies access to selected student information for a specified time period. Select the delegated access definitions that determine which categories of information the proxy can access. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To grant delegated access to proxy users:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set

AND

Manage Delegated Access and Related Objects

To grant delegated access to a proxy user: 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases** or **Contacts**. 2. Open a student case or contact. 3. In the My Proxies section, click **New**. 4. Enter the proxy name details. 5. Select a relationship. 6. Enter an email address. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Turn on the delegated access definitions for the categories that the proxy can access. Proxies can access only data that the student has access to. 9. Set the start and end dates for access. 10. Save your changes. # Standard Field Mapping for Legacy Recurring Donations When NPSP creates child Opportunity records for a Recurring Donation, it copies the value of several fields from the Recurring Donation onto the Opportunity records. This is a big time saver, as it means you don't have to manually enter values for all those fields on each Opportunity record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note As of April 29th, 2020, Nonprofit Success Pack offers a new version of Recurring Donations. For instructions on using this new version, see the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). If you're unsure which version of Recurring Donations you're using, see [Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_of_rds_am_i_using.htm) - **[Standard Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_standard_field_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** This table describes how NPSP maps fields from the Recurring Donation to its child Opportunity records when the Recurring Donation is first created. - **[Custom Field Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_recurring_donations_standard_field_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's great that NPSP automatically copies key information from standard Recurring Donation fields to Opportunity fields. But what if you want to map custom fields as well? You're in luck because NPSP lets you do just that! ## Standard Field Mapping This table describes how NPSP maps fields from the Recurring Donation to its child Opportunity records when the Recurring Donation is first created. If you edit the Recurring Donation record, **NPSP deletes and re-inserts any related open stage Opportunity records**, which can result in lost data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note For a refresher on what Open Ended and Fixed Length Recurring Donations are, refer to [Recurring Donations: Overview and Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_legacy_recur_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create either open-ended or fixed-length recurring donations to track a donor's intent to give regularly into the future. These records are named automatically.").
Recurring Donation Field Opportunity Field Explanation Open Ended/ Fixed Length
Created By Created By NPSP copies the value of the Created By field from the Recurring Donation to the Opportunity records. Both
Owner Owner NPSP copies the value of the Owner field from the Recurring Donation to the Opportunity records. Both
Organization Account Name

NPSP copies the Organization name from the Recurring Donation to the Account Name field on the Opportunity records.

Note
Note If the Recurring Donation Organization field is blank and the Contact field is populated, NPSP copies that Contact's Account to each Opportunity's Account Name.
 Both
Contact Primary Contact

NPSP copies the value of the Contact field on the Recurring Donation to the Primary Contact field on the Opportunity records.

Note
Note If the Recurring Donation Organization field is blank and the Contact field is populated, NPSP copies that Contact's Account to each Opportunity's Account Name.
 Both
Date Established Close Date

NPSP copies the value of the Date Established field on the Recurring Donation to the first Opportunity's Close Date field.

Note
Note If the Next Donation Date on the Recurring Donation record is populated, NPSP copies the Next Donation Date instead of Date Established to the first Opportunity's Close Date field.
Both
Next Donation Date Close Date NPSP copies the Next Donation Date from the Recurring Donation to the first Opportunity's Close Date field. Both
Installment Period Close Date NPSP uses the Installment Period on the Recurring Donation to calculate Close Dates for all Opportunities after the first one. For example, if the Installment Period is monthly, and the Next Donation Date is 2/1/18, the first Opportunity's Close Date will be 2/1/18 and the next Opportunity's Close Date will be 3/1/18. Both
Amount Amount For Open-Ended Recurring Donations, the value in the Amount field is copied to each Opportunity record. Open Ended
Amount Amount

For Fixed-Length Recurring Donations, the Opportunity Amount depends on the value of both the Schedule Type and Installments fields.

If Schedule Type is set to Multiply By, then all related Opportunities inherit the same value as the Recurring Donation Amount.

If Schedule Type is set to Divide By, then all related Opportunities inherit an equal fraction of the Recurring Donation Amount. For example, if a Recurring Donation Amount is $2400, and the Installments field is set to 12, NPSP sets the amount of each Opportunity to $200.

 Fixed Length
Campaign Primary Campaign Source

NPSP copies the value of the Campaign field on the Recurring Donation to the Primary Campaign Source field on the Opportunities.

Note
Note If the Add Campaign to All Opportunities option is selected in NPSP Settings | Recurring Donations, NPSP populates the Campaign field on all related Opportunities. Otherwise NPSP populates the Campaign field on only the first Opportunity record
 Both
CurrencyISOCode CurrencyISOCode

NPSP copies the CurrencyISOCode value from the Recurring Donation to the CurrencyISOCode on each Opportunity.

Note
Note This applies only to organizations using Multiple Currencies.
Both
Recurring Donation Stage Name Custom Label Stage The default Stage for all Opportunities in a Recurring Donation is Pledged. This default can be changed by altering the Recurring Donation Stage Name Custom Label. For more information, see Customize Labels. Both
GAU Allocations GAU Allocations

You can add related Allocations to the Recurring Donation record itself. NPSP then clones the Recurring Donation GAU Allocation records to each Opportunity. Allocation Amounts created as percentage based are set using the Opportunity Amount, not the Recurring Donation amount.

Note
Note If you update the Recurring Donation Allocations, NPSP updates any open Opportunity's Allocations. Also, NPSP will replace any pre-existing Allocations from a related Campaign with the Recurring Donation Allocations
 Both
## Custom Field Mapping It's great that NPSP automatically copies key information from standard Recurring Donation fields to Opportunity fields. But what if you want to map custom fields as well? You're in luck because NPSP lets you do just that! For more information, see [Map Recurring Donation Fields to Custom Opportunity Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_recurring_donation_fields_to_opp_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to map fields from Recurring Donation records to Opportunity records, so that NPSP copies the data to each new installment Opportunity."). # Standard NPSP Data Import Fields This article includes reference information about the fields in the NPSP Data Import object, the mapping to target NPSP objects, and information about columns in the NPSP Data Importer Templates. This article includes reference information about the fields in the NPSP Data Import object, the mapping to target NPSP objects, and information about columns in the [NPSP Data Importer Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these templates to import your data into Salesforce using the NPSP Data Importer object."), especially requirements for date fields. The NPSP Data Import object contains Contact, Account, Address, Opportunity, Payment, and other fields for import, Gift Entry, or Salesforce.org Elevate. An NPSP Data Import object can contain up to two Contacts and two Accounts for each record. For data import, the majority of the fields are optional, and the NPSP Data Importer will use smart default values for fields that contain no data. In addition to the field mapping described in this article, Elevate includes Advanced Mapping specific to payment processing. Learn more in [Advanced Mappings for Elevate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_elevate_adv_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP includes field mappings that allow transactions to flow from Elevate into NPSP."). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Make sure your dates are in the format supported by your data import tool. - If you're using the Salesforce Data Import Wizard for your import, use dates in your locale format. In the US, this means MM/DD/YY. For example: 12/31/14. - If you're using the external Salesforce (Apex) Data Loader tool for your import, use the YYYY-MM-DD date format. This format is _not_ the native Excel date format, and you'll need to reformat all of the columns that contain dates. See this [Help and Training article](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=faq_import_general_wrong_date.htm&language=en_US) for more information. - **[Contact Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Contact fields define information about the primary Contact. Salesforce automatically creates a Household Account for each new Contact1 that you enter. - **[Household Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Household fields define information about Contact1 and Contact2's Household Account record. - **[Account Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Account1 and Account2 fields are used to match or create Organizational Accounts, and to create an affiliation between the appropriate Contact and Organizational Account. - **[Home Address Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If any of the Home Address fields are specified, Salesforce creates an Address object for the Household, and copies the address to each Contact's Mailing Address fields, and the Household Account's Billing Address fields. - **[Donation Information Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If any of the Donation Information fields are specified, Salesforce creates an Opportunity and associates it with either Contact1 (and the Contact's Household), or Account1. - **[Opportunity Contact Role Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Opportunity Contact Role fields define soft credit Opportunity Contact Role information for Account1 Organization donations. - **[Recurring Donation Information Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When Recurring Donation Information fields are specified, Salesforce creates a Recurring Donation associated with either Contact1 (and the Contact's Household), or Account1. - **[Campaign Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Campaign fields define a Campaign associated with a Recurring Donation, Opportunity, and/or Contact. Set a Campaign Member Status to create Campaign Member records for Contact1 and Contact2. - **[GAU Allocation Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The GAU Allocation fields define GAU Allocation information for the donation. Define up to two GAU Allocations for each donation in your import file. - **[System Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_standard_di_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The System fields capture information about the import including import statuses and information about the NPSP Data Import record. ## Contact Fields The Contact fields define information about the primary Contact. Salesforce automatically creates a Household Account for each new Contact1 that you enter. These are the Contact1 fields in the NPSP Data Import object. | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | Contact1 Salutation | The salutation for the Contact, such as Mr., Mrs., Dr., and so on. | Optional. | | Contact1 First Name | The Contact's first name. | Optional. | | Contact1 Last Name | The Contact's last name. | Required, if you are including any other fields from Contact1. | | Contact1 Birthdate | The Contact's birthdate. | Optional. Use the correct date format supported by your import tool. | | Contact1 Title | The Contact's title. | Optional. | | Contact1 Personal Email | The Contact's personal or home email. | Optional, but matching to existing Contacts by Email requires at least one of the Email fields to be provided in order to find a match. | | Contact1 Work Email | The Contact's work email. | Optional, but matching to existing Contacts by Email requires at least one of the Email fields to be provided in order to find a match. | | Contact1 Alternate Email | An additional email for the Contact. | Optional, but matching to existing Contacts by Email requires at least one of the Email fields to be provided in order to find a match. | | Contact1 Preferred Email | Specifies which of the three Email fields is the preferred one to use for communication with the Contact. If specified, it must match one of the picklist values: Personal, Work, or Alternate. | Optional. | | Contact1 Home Phone | The Contact's home phone. | Optional. | | Contact1 Work Phone | The Contact's work phone. | Optional. | | Contact1 Mobile Phone | The Contact's mobile phone. | Optional. | | Contact1 Other Phone | The Contact's other phone. | Optional. | | Contact1 Preferred Phone | Specifies which of the four Phone fields is the preferred one to use for calling the Contact. If specified, it must match one of the picklist values: Home, Work, Mobile, or Other. | Optional. | | Contact1 Imported | The Contact's Salesforce ID to match against. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after dry run or processing. | The same fields exist for Contact2, and you use them the same way to add or update a secondary member of the household. ## Household Fields The Household fields define information about Contact1 and Contact2's Household Account record. These are the fields in the NPSP Data Import object that map to a Household Account record. We provided the Household Phone field as an example to follow if you want to set up additional custom fields for the Household. To create additional fields, follow the directions in [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | Household Phone | The Household's phone number | Optional. | | Household Account Imported | The Household account's Salesforce ID to match against. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after dry run or processing. | ## Account Fields The Account1 and Account2 fields are used to match or create Organizational Accounts, and to create an affiliation between the appropriate Contact and Organizational Account. The Account1 and Account2 fields are used to match or create Organizational Accounts, and to create an affiliation between the appropriate Contact and Organizational Account. The organization for Account1 will be entered into the **Primary Affiliation** field for Contact1, and NPSP will create an Affiliation record representing this connection. Likewise, Account2 will be entered as the **Primary Affiliation** for Contact2. The Account1 and Account2 address fields are used to update the Organizational Account, not the Contact (Household) Address. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important The Account fields in the template are used to create optional **Organizational Accounts** with which the related Contacts are affiliated. **Don't enter Household information in the template's Account fields, because the Account fields are for Organizational Account information only**. These are the Account1 fields in the NPSP Data Import object. | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | Account1 Name | The Account's name. | Required, if you are including any other fields from Account1. | | Account1 Street | The Account's billing street. | Optional. | | Account1 City | The Account's billing city. | Optional. | | Account1 State/Province | The Account's billing state or province. | Optional. | | Account1 Zip/Postal Code | The Account's billing Zip/postal code. | Optional. | | Account1 Country | The Account's billing country. | Optional. | | Account1 Phone | The Account's phone. | Optional. | | Account1 Website | The Account's website. | Optional. | | Account1 Imported | The Account's Salesforce ID to match against. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after dry run or processing. | The same fields exist for Account2, and you use them the same way. ## Home Address Fields If any of the Home Address fields are specified, Salesforce creates an Address object for the Household, and copies the address to each Contact's Mailing Address fields, and the Household Account's Billing Address fields. These are the Home Address fields in the NPSP Data Import object. | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | Home Street | The household's street | Optional. | | Home City | The household's city | Optional. | | Home State/Province | The household's state or province | Optional. | | Home Zip/Postal Code | The household's Zip/postal code | Optional. | | Home Country | The household's country | Optional. | | Home Address Imported | The Address's Salesforce ID to match against. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after dry run or processing. | ## Donation Information Fields If any of the Donation Information fields are specified, Salesforce creates an Opportunity and associates it with either Contact1 (and the Contact's Household), or Account1. These are the Donation Information fields in the NPSP Data Import object. | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | Donation Donor | "Contact1" if an individual donation, or "Account1" if an organizational donation. | Optional. Will be treated as "Contact1" if left empty. | | Donation Amount | The donation amount. | Required, if you are including any other fields for Donation Information. | | Donation Date | The date you received the donation. | Optional. Will use the current date if left empty. Use the date format supported by your import tool. | | Donation Honoree Information | Contact information, such as email, address, or phone the donor provided for the tribute honoree. | Optional. | | Donation Honoree Name | The honoree name as provided by the donor. | Optional. | | Donation Name | A unique name to identify the donation. | Optional. Will be automatically generated by the NPSP if left empty. | | Donation Notification Message | A personalized message for the notification recipient. | Optional. | | Donation Notification Preference | Indicates how the notification recipient should be notified. For example, by email or phone. | Optional. Must match values in corresponding picklist. | | Donation Notification Recipient Email | The email address for the person receiving the notification. | Optional. | | Donation Notification Recipient Info | Contact information, such as address or phone the donor provided for the notification recipient. | Optional. | | Donation Notification Recipient Name | The name of the person to notify of this tribute gift. | Optional. | | Donation Record Type Name | The name of an Opportunity Record Type to use for the donation. | Optional. Will use the Salesforce User's default Opportunity Record Type if left empty. | | Donation Tribute Type | Indicates whether the donation is in honor or in memory of an individual. | Optional. Must match values in corresponding picklist. | | Donation Type | The type of donation. | Optional. Must match values in corresponding picklist. | | Donation Stage | The stage of the donation opportunity. | Optional. Must match values in corresponding picklist. Will use an active Closed Won Stage if left empty, meaning that the donation has been completed. | | Donation Description | A description of the donation. | Optional. | | Donation Member Level | The member level corresponding to the donation. | Optional. Must match values in corresponding picklist. | | Donation Membership Origin | The origin of the donor's membership. | Optional. Must match values in corresponding picklist. | | Donation Membership Start Date | The start date of the membership if the donation is for membership. | Optional. Use the correct date format supported by your import tool. | | Donation Membership End Date | The end date of the membership if the donation is for membership. | Optional. Use the correct date format supported by your import tool. | | Payment Method | The method of payment used for the donation. | Optional. If Payments are enabled, will copy this value to the Opportunity's Payment object. Must match values in corresponding picklist. | | Payment Check/Reference Number | The check or payment number for the donation. | Optional. If Payments are enabled, will copy this value to the Opportunity's Payment object. | | Payment Paid | Indicates the Payment was paid. | Optional. Use the correct syntax for your import tool. | | Donation Imported | The Donation (Opportunity's) Salesforce ID to match against. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after dry run or processing. | | Donation Possible Matches | A comma separated list of Salesforce IDs of Opportunities that matched the Data Import record's Donation Matching fields. | Automatically populated by NPSP. | | Payment Imported | The Payment's Salesforce ID to match against. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after dry run or processing. | | Payment Possible Matches | A comma separated list of Salesforce IDs of Payments that matched the Data Import record's Donation Matching fields. | Optional. | | Donation Elevate Recurring ID | The external, unique ID of the Recurring Donation in Elevate that this donation Opportunity is linked to. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Authorization Token | Authorization token for a transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Authorized Date | The date and time the transaction was authorized. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Authorized UTC Timestamp | The exact date and time (down to the millisecond) from the payment gateway that this transaction was successfully authorized. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Card Expiration Month | The expiration month of the card used for this transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Card Expiration Year | The expiration year of the card used for this transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Card Last 4 | The last four digits of the card used for this transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Card Network | The card network of the card used for this transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Declined Reason | Provides detail about why a transaction was declined. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Donor Cover Amount | The amount the donor paid in addition to their donation amount, often to help cover transaction fees or to add a tip to their donation. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Elevate Created Date | The date and time the transaction was created. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Elevate Created UTC Timestamp | The exact date and time (down to the millisecond) from Elevate that the transaction was created. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Elevate ID | The unique ID for this transaction from Elevate. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Elevate Original Payment ID | For refunds only. Shows the ID of the original payment transaction from Elevate. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Gateway ID | The ID of the payment gateway that processed this transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Gateway Payment ID | The unique ID for this transaction from the payment gateway. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Origin ID | The ID for the system where the transaction was initiated. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Origin Name | The name of the system where the transaction was initiated. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Origin Type | The type of system used to initiate the transaction. Available values include Engagement Hub, Giving Page, Payments API, Salesforce. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Status | The status of the transaction from Elevate. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Type | Indicates the type of transaction. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Elevate Transaction Fee | The amount the donor paid in addition to their donation amount, often to help cover transaction fees or to add a tip to their donation. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Gateway Transaction Fee | The transaction fee charged by Elevate. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | Payment Total Transaction Fees | The transaction fee charged by your payment gateway. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | UTM Source | Google Analytics parameter for tracking the referring source. For example, website or newsletter. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | UTM Medium | Google Analytics parameter for tracking how the URL was shared. For example, email or banner\_ad. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | UTM Campaign | Google Analytics parameter for tracking the name or solicitation code of the outreach effort. For example, spring\_2021\_fundraiser. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | UTM Content | Google Analytics parameter for differentiating similar content or links within a solicitation. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | | UTM Keyword Terms | Google Analytics parameter for tracking paid search terms. | Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration. | ## Opportunity Contact Role Fields The Opportunity Contact Role fields define soft credit Opportunity Contact Role information for Account1 Organization donations. The Opportunity Contact Role fields define soft credit Opportunity Contact Role information for Account1 Organization donations. You're able to define an Opportunity Contact Role for Contact1 and a separate role for Contact2 for each Account1 Organization donation in your import file. Opportunity Contact Role 1 fields are for Contact1 and Opportunity Contact Role 2 fields are for Contact2. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You must use Advanced Mapping instead of Help Text mapping to use these fields. See [Advanced Mapping Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adv_mapping_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities.") for more information. These are the Opportunity Contact Role 1 fields in the NPSP Data Import object. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Opportunity Contact Role fields should only be used for Organization donations connected to Account1. For individual donations from Contact1, rely on the NPSP automation for assigning the primary donor and Household Member soft credit Opportunity Contact Roles. For more information, see [Automated Soft Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_automated_soft_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to create soft credits automatically."). | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | Opportunity Contact Role 1: Role | The role you'd like to assign to Contact1 for this donation. | Must match one of your existing Opportunity Contact Roles. | | Opportunity Contact Role 1: Imported | The Salesforce ID for the Opportunity Contact Role. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after processing. | The same fields exist for Opportunity Contact Role 2, and you use them the same way to add or update a role for Contact 2. ## Recurring Donation Information Fields When Recurring Donation Information fields are specified, Salesforce creates a Recurring Donation associated with either Contact1 (and the Contact's Household), or Account1. When Recurring Donation Information fields are specified, Salesforce creates a Recurring Donation associated with either Contact1 (and the Contact's Household), or Account1. If you specify both Donation Information and Recurring Donation Information fields, Salesforce relates the Opportunity to the Recurring Donation as its first installment. These are the Donation Information fields in the NPSP Data Import object.
Field Label Description Required or Default Behavior
Recurring Donation Amount The amount for each installment Opportunity. Required.
Recurring Donation Date Established The initial inception date for this Recurring Donation. The default is the current date. Optional. NPSP uses the current date if this is left blank.
Recurring Donation Day of Month Sets the specific day of the month for future installment Opportunities when the Installment Period is Monthly. If you select 29 or 30, the installment date will be the last day of the month for months that don't have that many days. Required when the Installment Period is Monthly.
Recurring Donation Effective Date The date that new or updated schedule information (Amount, Day of Month, etc.) for this Recurring Donation takes effect. The default is the current date. Optional. NPSP uses the current date if this is left blank.
Recurring Donation Elevate Recurring ID The external, unique ID of the related Recurring Donation in Elevate. Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration.
Recurring Donation End Date The date on which this Recurring Donation was closed. Optional.
Recurring Donation Import Status The status given when NPSP Data Importer tries to create the Recurring Donation.

Automatically populated by NPSP Gift Entry.

If using Data Importer, and providing a Donation Import value, manually set the Recurring Donation Import Status to Matched or User-Selected Match.
Recurring Donation Imported The Salesforce ID for the Recurring Donation. Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP automatically populates after dry run or processing.
Recurring Donation Installment Frequency The Installment Frequency along with Installment Period defines the installment schedule of this Recurring Donation. For example, if Installment Period is Monthly and Installment Frequency is 3, the schedule is defined as "every 3 months". Optional. If left blank, NPSP sets the value to 1 on the target Recurring Donation record.
Recurring Donation Installment Period The Installment Period along with Installment Frequency defines the installment schedule of this Recurring Donation. For example, if Installment Period is Monthly and Installment Frequency is 3, the schedule is defined as "every 3 months". Required.
Recurring Donation Name Leave blank if you have a Recurring Donation Name Format selected in NPSP Settings. Otherwise, enter your own name. Required, unless you have a Recurring Donation Name Format selected in NPSP Settings.
Recurring Donation Payment Method The form of payment for this Recurring Donation. NPSP automatically copies the selected value to each related Payment record. Optional.
Recurring Donation Planned Installments Number of installments you expect to receive. Only used when Recurring Type is Fixed. Required when Recurring Type is Fixed.
Recurring Donation Recurring Type Open indicates an ongoing Recurring Donation. Fixed indicates a Recurring Donation that has a specific number of installments. For Fixed, you must also populate the Number of Planned Installments field. Optional. If left blank, NPSP sets the value to Open on the target Recurring Donation record.
Recurring Donation Status Indicates if this Recurring Donation is actively in use, temporarily suspended, or closed. Optional. If left blank, NPSP sets the value to Active on the target Recurring Donation record.
Recurring Donation Status Reason The reason this Recurring Donation has its current Status value. Required when the Status is Closed or Paused.
## Campaign Fields The Campaign fields define a Campaign associated with a Recurring Donation, Opportunity, and/or Contact. Set a Campaign Member Status to create Campaign Member records for Contact1 and Contact2.
Field Label Description Required or Default Behavior
Campaign Name For associating a Campaign with a Recurring Donation, Opportunity, and/ or Contact. Optional. If specified, NPSP tries to match to an existing Campaign by name. If no match is found, NPSP creates a new Campaign.
Campaign Member Status For setting a Campaign Member Status. Optional. If specified along with a Campaign Name or Donation Campaign Source, NPSP creates a Campaign Member for Contact1 and Contact2.
Donation Campaign Source The Salesforce ID of a Campaign to associate the Donation with.

Optional. If specified, will match an existing Campaign by Campaign ID.

If both the Donation Campaign Name and Donation Campaign Source are specified, NPSP will use the ID from the Donation Campaign Source.
## GAU Allocation Fields The GAU Allocation fields define GAU Allocation information for the donation. Define up to two GAU Allocations for each donation in your import file. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You must use Advanced Mapping instead of Help Text mapping to use these fields. See [Advanced Mapping Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adv_mapping_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities.") for more information. These are the GAU Allocation 1 fields in the NPSP Data Import object. | Field Label | Description | Required or Default Behavior | | --- | --- | --- | | GAU Allocation 1: GAU | The Salesforce ID for the GAU. | Required if you want to designate a GAU Allocation for the donation. If you're using the Data Import Wizard you must indicate it's a Salesforce ID on the Import screen. For more information, see [Upload Data from the Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_upload_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer."). | | GAU Allocation 1: Amount | The monetary amount for this allocation. | You must enter either an amount or a percent (but not both) for the GAU Allocation. | | GAU Allocation 1: Percent | The percent of the donation total for this allocation. | You must enter either an amount or a percent (but not both) for the GAU Allocation. | | GAU Allocation 1: Imported | The Salesforce ID for the GAU Allocation. | Optional. If not populated with an ID prior to import, NPSP will automatically populate after processing. | The same fields exist for GAU Allocation 2, and you use them the same way to add or update a secondary GAU Allocation on the donation. ## System Fields The System fields capture information about the import including import statuses and information about the NPSP Data Import record. The System fields capture information about the import including import statuses and information about the NPSP Data Import record. Unless noted otherwise in the table below, the possible statuses for each target object (Account, Contact, Opportunity, etc.) are:
Field Label Description Required or Default Behavior
Account1 or Account2 Import Status Indicates if an Account was created or matched an existing Account. Automatically populated by NPSP.
ApexJobId

The ApexJobID of the Batch Job that processed the record.

 Automatically populated by NPSP.
Contact1 or Contact2 Import Status Indicates if a Contact was created or matched an existing Contact. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Contact1 Consent Message The text of the Elevate Giving Page consent message. Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration.
Created By The Salesforce User who created the NPSP Data Import record. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Data Import ID The auto-numbered name of the NPSP Data Import record. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Donation Campaign Import Status Indicates if a Campaign in the Donation Campaign Source or Donation Campaign Name field matched against an existing Campaign or if a new Campaign was created. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Donation Import Status Indicates if an Opportunity was created or matched an existing Opportunity. If you see the Best Match Used status, we used the best match that falls within the Number of Days from Donation Date specified AND is closest to the Donation Date.

Automatically populated by NPSP Gift Entry.

If using Data Importer, and providing a Donation Import value, manually set the Donation Import Status to Matched or User-Selected Match.

Elevate Custom Metadata Custom metadata from Elevate Giving Pages. Formatted as JSON. Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration.
Failure Information Description of what caused the NPSP Data Import record to fail to be imported. Automatically populated by NPSP.
GAU Allocation 1 or GAU Allocation 2: Import Status Indicates if a GAU Allocation was created or matched an existing GAU Allocation. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Home Address Import Status Indicates if a Household Address was created or matched an existing Address. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Imported Date The date and time the NPSP Data Import record was successfully imported. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Last Modified By Salesforce User who last updated the NPSP Data Import record. Automatically populated by NPSP.
NPSP Data Import Batch Lookup to the NPSP Data Import Batch this record belongs to. If you'd like to add files in your CSV to an NPSP Data Import Batch, include the batch's Salesforce ID in this column. Optional or automatically populated by NPSP.
Opportunity Contact Role 1 or Opportunity Contact Role 2: ImportStatus Indicates if an Opportunity Contact Role was created or matched an existing Opportunity Contact Role. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Owner Salesforce User is the Owner the NPSP Data Import record. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Payment ACH Consent Message The Elevate Giving Page consent message the donor agreed to. Populated by Salesforce.org Elevate integration.
Payment Import Status Indicates if a Payment was created or matched an existing Payment. If you see the Best Match Used status, we used the best match that falls within the Number of Days from Donation Date specified AND is closest to the Donation Date. Automatically populated by NPSP.
Status

Indicates the result of the Dry Run or Data Import processing. Possible statuses are:

  • Imported—The NPSP Data Import record was successfully processed in Salesforce.

  • Failed—The NPSP Data Import record was not imported.

  • Dry Run — Validated—Dry Run was successful and the record is ready to be imported into the appropriate objects.

  • Dry Run — Error—Dry Run was unsuccessful and the NPSP Data Import record will not be processed until errors are resolved.

  • Any System errors which caused an issue with this import.

 Automatically populated by NPSP.
- **Matched**: The imported record matched an existing Salesforce record. - **Created**: A new record was created because matching is disabled OR there were no matching records in Salesforce. - **Best Match Used**: More than one existing record in Salesforce matched the imported record. - **Matched by Id:** Either the Salesforce ID for the record was included in the import file and used to match an existing Salesforce record or Dry Run found the record ID. - **Match None**: Only used during Dry Run. There are no records in Salesforce that match the value listed in the field. A new record will be created when the import is processed. - Any System errors which caused an issue with this import. # Standardize Addresses Learn how to schedule and manage address standardization. - **[How Data Integrity Manages Address Standardization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_address_stand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Incorrectly formatted addresses are costly and can lead to undeliverable mail. Address standardization in Data Integrity helps you avoid incorrectly formatted addresses by making updates based on the specific standards of your locale's postal authority. This includes city names, street abbreviations, and more. - **[Schedule Address Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_addresses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Decide which addresses to standardize, schedule one-time and recurring updates, and edit or skip scheduled update. - **[See Address Standardization Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_address_standardization_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** View the results of address standardization results and learn how Data Integrity handles errors. # Standardize Contacts Learn how you can update data about your Contacts with scheduled updates. Manage contact standardization update results and learn about error handling. - **[About Contact Standardization](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_about_contact_standarization_header.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about how to update data about your Contacts. - **[Contact Standardization Updates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_schedule_contact_standardization_updates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about how to set up or manage a Contact Standardization job. - **[See Contact Standardization Results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ip_see_contact_standardization_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the output of your Contact Standardization job. # State and Country Picklists for EDA Understand how EDA uses State and Country Picklists. - **[State and Country Picklists for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_eda_state_and_country_picklists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** State and Country Picklists let users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists, instead of entering state and country data into text fields. State and Country Picklists help protect data integrity by preventing typos, alternate spellings, and junk data. ## State and Country Picklists for EDA State and Country Picklists let users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists, instead of entering state and country data into text fields. State and Country Picklists help protect data integrity by preventing typos, alternate spellings, and junk data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note See [Let Users Select State and Country from Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_state_country_picklists_overview.htm&type=5) to learn how to set up and configure this feature. EDA supports State and Country Picklists with these limitations: - **Must use predefined State and Country abbreviations on Address records**. On Address records, use the same abbreviations for State and Country as defined in the State and Country Picklists configuration. EDA will write the full name of the State and Country on related Accounts and Contacts. For example, if you use both US and CA on the Address record you get United States and California on the Account and Contact records. If you use alternate spellings (such as USA), EDA will display an error. # State and Country Picklists for EDA Understand how EDA uses State and Country Picklists. - **[State and Country Picklists for EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_eda_state_and_country_picklists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** State and Country Picklists let users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists, instead of entering state and country data into text fields. State and Country Picklists help protect data integrity by preventing typos, alternate spellings, and junk data. ## State and Country Picklists for EDA State and Country Picklists let users select states and countries from predefined, standardized lists, instead of entering state and country data into text fields. State and Country Picklists help protect data integrity by preventing typos, alternate spellings, and junk data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note See [Let Users Select State and Country from Picklists](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_state_country_picklists_overview.htm&type=5) to learn how to set up and configure this feature. EDA supports State and Country Picklists with these limitations: - **Must use predefined State and Country abbreviations on Address records**. On Address records, use the same abbreviations for State and Country as defined in the State and Country Picklists configuration. EDA will write the full name of the State and Country on related Accounts and Contacts. For example, if you use both US and CA on the Address record you get United States and California on the Account and Contact records. If you use alternate spellings (such as USA), EDA will display an error. # Stay in Touch with your Volunteers An important part of attracting and retaining good volunteers is making sure they feel connected to your organization and appreciated by the people who work there. Imagine signing up to volunteer for an event months before it happens, but never receiving a reminder. Or spending time volunteering at an event, but never receiving acknowledgment of your time or a simple thank you note. Appreciating your volunteers by staying in touch is key to ensuring that they come back to volunteer again. Even for a small organization, staying on top of volunteer management can be close to a full time job. And when your organization runs multiple events with thousands of volunteers, managing thank yous, providing timely information to your volunteers, and finding volunteers with specific skills can be a daunting task. Fortunately, V4S takes the headache out of volunteer management. With Volunteers for Salesforce, you can automate custom emails to volunteers when they sign up or complete a Shift. You can also easily manually email volunteers as needed. - **[About Email Automation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_stay_in_touch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Managing emails to volunteers can be incredibly time consuming. Volunteers for Salesforce makes it easy by providing preconfigured email templates for all the typical volunteer emails. In addition, Volunteers for Salesforce includes workflow rules that trigger the emails automatically, and at the appropriate time. - **[Manually Email Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_stay_in_touch.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are times when you may need to email volunteers on the fly. For example, you may need to inform a small group of volunteers that an event has been canceled because you didn't get enough participants. Or you may want to send one last (additional) reminder about an upcoming Shift. This is easy to do with Volunteers for Salesforce. ## About Email Automation Managing emails to volunteers can be incredibly time consuming. Volunteers for Salesforce makes it easy by providing preconfigured email templates for all the typical volunteer emails. In addition, Volunteers for Salesforce includes workflow rules that trigger the emails automatically, and at the appropriate time. If the out-of-box email templates don't exactly meet your needs, you can always clone them to create your own personalized version, or create your own from scratch. For information on email templates, see [Manage Email Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_emailtemplates.htm) in the Salesforce Help & Training. To find the list of V4S email templates: 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Email templates in the Quick Find box, then select **Email Templates**. 3. From the folder drop-down list, select Volunteers Email Templates. ![List of Volunteers for Salesforce email templates](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_templates.png) 4. To view a template, click the template name. Let's take a peek at the Volunteer Job Signup Thank You. ![The Volunteers for Salesforce thank you email template](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/email_template_thank_you_small.png) The template consists of text and merge fields that pull data from the V4S objects and fields. You can click Edit here to edit the content of the template. Let's see what the basic, text version of this email to the volunteer looks like. ![Example Thank You email with text](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/example_email.png) Of course you can always customize it to build a beautiful HTML version complete with your logo, photos, and more! ## Manually Email Volunteers There are times when you may need to email volunteers on the fly. For example, you may need to inform a small group of volunteers that an event has been canceled because you didn't get enough participants. Or you may want to send one last (additional) reminder about an upcoming Shift. This is easy to do with Volunteers for Salesforce. 1. Go to the Shift that you need to send an email about. You can get there from the Shift calendar or the Volunteer Job. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note You can also send a mass email from the Volunteer Job detail page. 2. On the Volunteer Shift detail page, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) in the upper right corner, then click **Mass Email Volunteers**. ![Selecting Mass Email Volunteers from the drop-down menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_email_volunteers_drop_down.png) 3. On the Mass Email Volunteers page, fill in the necessary fields: - **From (1)**—Select the person to receive replies sent by the volunteers. - **Email volunteers with Status (2)**—You can limit email to volunteers with a certain status or choose None to email all volunteers who signed up. - **Include Contacts only once (3)**—This option prevents Contacts from receiving the same email more than once. It's useful if you're using the Mass Email Volunteers from the Job level, because you might have a Contact who is signed up for more than one Shift. - **Log an Activity for each email (4)**—This option creates an activity record linked to the volunteer's Contact record. This is useful if you want to track all your communications with a Contact. - **Template based on object (5)**—The object you choose must match the object that the email template is based on. - **Email Template (6)**—Choose the email template you want to use for your email. You can choose any template that is in the Volunteers Email Templates folder. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note Use the **View Template** or **Edit Template links (7)** to open a new window where you can view or modify templates in the Volunteers Email Template folder. If you modify a template or create a new template in this window, you'll need to refresh the Mass Email Volunteers page to see the new or modified template. ![Email template with callouts](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/mass_email_volunteers.png) 4. Click **Send**. You now have all the tools you need to confidently manage your volunteer relationships. So go forth and connect with—and inspire—your volunteers! # Student Advising Topics in Agentforce Use Student Advising Topics in Agentforce to assist and optimize your advising team's efforts. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. With Student Advising Topics in Agentforce enabled, an advisor can use the agent to: - Summarize advising cases to quickly understand them. - Get answers to questions from students about campus resources, such as facilities, services, activities, clubs, programs, and action plans. For example, "What are some campus resources that can help me improve my communication skills?" - Get answers to questions from students about campus policies. For example, "Would my financial aid apply to the Study Abroad program?" - Follow up proactively by suggesting the next-best actions, such as creating to-dos or cases. Student Advising Topics in Agentforce includes the Student Advising and Campus Engagement agent subagent with these standard actions from Education Cloud: - [Summarize Advising Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_ref_edu_summarize_advising_case.htm&language=en_US) - [Find Advising Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_ref_edu_find_advising_cases.htm&language=en_US) - [Find Campus Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_ref_edu_find_campus_resources.htm&language=en_US) - **[Student Advising Topics in Agentforce Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_advising_topics_in_agentforce_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Student Advising Topics in Agentforce, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Grounding Data for Student Advising Subagents](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_grounding_data_for_student_advising_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create data and knowledge articles that align with the student advising subagents to ground agent responses. The more information available to the agent, the better it performs. - **[Set Up Student Advising Topics in Agentforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_student_advising_topics_in_agentforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Student Advising Topics in Agentforce to answer and support advisors. # Student Advising Topics in Agentforce Considerations To use Student Advising Topics in Agentforce, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
## Language and Locale Support Student Advising Topics in Agentforce supports English in these locales. | Language | Locale | Code | | --- | --- | --- | | English | English (United States) | en\_US | | English | English (United Kingdom) | en\_GB | ## Large Language Model Support Student Advising Topics in Agentforce supports these geo-aware models. | Model | | --- | | OpenAI and Azure OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni) | | OpenAI and Azure OpenAI GPT-4o Mini | Agent actions can make calls to other predefined LLMs. Bring-Your-Own-Model isn’t supported, but custom actions that execute prompt templates can use any Salesforce-managed model. See [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US&type=5). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Student Advising Topics in Agentforce supports the Trust Layer services supported by the [Agentforce Employee Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US&type=5) type. ## Data Cloud One Support Student Advising Topics in Agentforce is supported in Data Cloud One companion orgs. ## Other Limitations - Review objects that represent student information and update the records that are used to generate advising summaries. - Ensure compliance to institutional policies and data privacy requirements with appropriate access controls. - Configure the prompt for the Find Campus Resources agent action with the default search retriever that's based on a data model object. # Student Financials Bridge the gap between students and their financial accounts by setting up your fee management framework in Education Cloud. Load tuition and fees for each academic interval and apply fees to learning programs and courses. Additionally, you can incorporate the Students Financials agent to help students view their account balances, get a detailed breakdown of their fees, and obtain more information about a given fee.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and the Revenue Cloud Billing licenses.
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Student Financials requires the Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and Revenue Cloud Billing licenses. To increase the number of billing events, add the Revenue Cloud Billing Events add-on license. For more information, see [Student Financials Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials_agent_for_education_cloud.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - **[Prepare Your Org for Student Financials](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_your_org_for_student_financials.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable student financial account management options and configure the necessary permissions for students and staff. - **[Define Fee Structure](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_define_fee_structure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Model student fees, such as tuition and meal plans, by using products grouped into price books. Associate these price books with specific academic terms or years to manage fees that change over time or vary by student. - **[Compute Fees](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_compute_fees.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create academic orders for learners by using the Create Learner Order invocable action. Incorporate pricing resources into your workflows to set up customized academic order pricing. - **[Refund Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_refund_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automate the end-to-end refund process for student financial accounts. When your students drop courses or reduce orders, Student Financials automatically identifies original invoices, settles credit memos against outstanding balances, and initiates payment refunds. Your students receive timely, accurate disbursements, and you maintain a complete audit trail for compliance. - **[Set Up Payment Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_payment_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help students meet their payment commitments, offer flexible payment options that spread tuition across multiple installments and match their financial accounts and debt situations. Configure monthly, quarterly, or custom schedules that match your billing cycles and automate payment collection through integrated gateways. Your students track their plan status and upcoming auto-debits in real time from the learner portal. - **[Reconcile Student Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_reconcile_student_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Save staff time with automated account reconciliation that offers granular control and visibility. Provide students with a view of their financial obligations through a unified dashboard on the learner portal. To reduce administrative inquiries, students can access invoices, running balances, and full payment histories in one place. Students can also initiate payments and track their financials. # Student Financials Agent Considerations To use Student Financials Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and Revenue Cloud Billing licenses, and the applicable Agentforce add-on license. For more support, contact your Salesforce account executive.
## Language and Locale Support Student Financials Agent supports the languages and locales supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Generative AI Supported Languages and Locales](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_languages.htm&language=en_US). ## Large Language Model Support Student Financials Agent supports the models supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Student Financials Agent supports the Trust Layer services provided on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Trust Layer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_trust_layer.htm&language=en_US). Ask your Salesforce admin about which Einstein Trust Layer services are enabled in your org and available for Student Financials Agent. ## Usage Types Billed by Student Financials Agent Student Financials Agent uses generative AI to ingest, store, and process data. You’re billed in these categories when you use Student Financials Agent. Before deployment, work with your Salesforce account team to confirm license availability and plan credit usage. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This feature has access to Digital Wallet, a free account management tool that offers near real-time consumption data for enabled products across your active contracts. Access Digital Wallet and start tracking your org’s usage. To learn more, see [About Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_about.htm&language=en_US). | Digital Wallet Card | Usage Type | Description | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Flex Credits | Standard Action | Usage is determined by the number of standard agent actions. See [Flex Credits Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&language=en_US). | Applies to authenticated and unauthenticated Student Financials Agent interactions | | Conversations | Agentforce: ASA Messaging | Usage is calculated based on conversation windows. See [Agentforce Conversations Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_usage_conversations.htm&language=en_US&type=5). | Applies to unauthenticated Student Financials Agent interactions | When you use Student Financials Agent, credits can be consumed in usage types on other consumption cards by related features such as [Agentforce Data Library or Audit and Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_audit_feedback_usage_types.htm&language=en_US). # Student Financials Agent for Education Cloud Use the Student Financials Agent to help your students retrieve their account balances and understand the fees included. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and Revenue Cloud Billing licenses, and the applicable Agentforce add-on license. For more support, contact your Salesforce account executive.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. - **[Student Financials Agent Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials_agent_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Student Financials Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Student Financials Agent Subagents and Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_financials_agent_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use student financial subagents to answer questions about term fees, account balances, billing history, invoices, payment due dates, payment plans, and line-item charges. These subagents work together and use relevant context from previous results to provide clear, detailed responses about a student’s financial account. - **[Set Up the Student Financials Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_financials_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Student Financials Agent to answer student questions about fees. # Student Financials Agent Subagents and Actions Use student financial subagents to answer questions about term fees, account balances, billing history, invoices, payment due dates, payment plans, and line-item charges. These subagents work together and use relevant context from previous results to provide clear, detailed responses about a student’s financial account. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Revenue Cloud Advanced, and Revenue Cloud Billing licenses, and the applicable Agentforce add-on license. For more support, contact your Salesforce account executive.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. The Student Financials Agent includes these subagents and actions:
Subagent Description Included Actions
Student Fee Management Provides detailed fee breakdowns and fee explanations for specific academic terms. This subagent answers questions about fee amounts, fee descriptions, and optional fee types. The subagent uses context from previous results to streamline the explanation process.
Student Account Management Provides total fee balances for specific attendance dates. The subagent also provides a fee breakdown and details about the account history. Get Account Balance
Student Billing Inquiries Provides billing details for student’s financial accounts, including invoices, payment due dates, payment plan schedules, and invoice line item charges.
To retrieve fee information, the agent queries these objects: - Academic Term - Academic Term Enrollment - Academic Order - Order Product - Billing Schedule - Credit Memo - Invoice - Invoice Line # Student Goals Agent Considerations To use Student Goals Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
## Non-Deterministic Nature of AI The Student Goals Agent uses generative AI, so it may produce varied responses for the same input, even within the same session. This variability is an inherent feature of large language models. It is crucial to communicate this to students upfront so they understand that the agent's suggestions aren't fixed or absolute. This sets realistic expectations and prevents reliance on a single, definitive answer. ## Responsible Use of Student Data The agent leverages specific student attributes to provide personalized recommendations, including but not limited to: - Academic Data: Major, GPA, academic standing, year of study, first-generation status, and dual-degree enrollment. - Engagement Data: Membership in campus groups and involvement activities. - Self-Reported Information: Results from career, preference, and personality assessments. Before deployment, universities must: - Ensure Transparency: Clearly inform students what data is being used, why it's being used, and how it informs the agent's recommendations. - Update Disclosures: If any modifications are made to the prompt grounding flow, the data use policy must be updated to reflect these changes. - Provide Control: Give students the option to opt out or seek clarification on their data's use. ## Recommendations Are Guidance, Not Directives Remind students that the agent's suggestions are intended to be a starting point for exploration, not a prescriptive plan. - They aren't obligated to accept any recommendation - Critical thinking is encouraged, and they should evaluate the relevance and value of all suggestions. - The agent isn't a substitute for human advisors, mentors, or counselors. Encourage students to always discuss significant goals and plans with human experts. ## Establish Clear Usage Boundaries To ensure the agent is used effectively and safely, universities should establish and communicate clear guidelines. - A concise onboarding guide that explains the agent's purpose. - Examples of appropriate queries and use cases. - A clear statement that the tool is a supplemental aid, not a replacement for human guidance. ## Handling Sensitive and Vulnerable Interactions Given its direct interaction with students, the agent may encounter sensitive topics, such as: - Self-harm or suicidal ideation - Inappropriate, aggressive, or concerning language - Mentions of emotional distress Universities should proactively manage these risks. - [Enable audit trails](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_feedback_about.htm&language=en_US): Monitor usage patterns, tag frequencies, and trace individual sessions in the Command Center. - Implement Custom Safety Workflows: While Agentforce has a built-in TRUST layer, institutions should create their own custom workflows to address specific campus needs. - Define Clear Escalation Protocols: Establish a clear protocol for routing high-risk interactions to appropriate human support, such as a campus mental health team or crisis counselor. - Communicate AI's Limitations: Be transparent with students that the agent cannot provide professional help in crisis situations. ## Promoting Student Awareness and Informed Use To empower students to use the agent responsibly, encourage them to: - View the agent as a co-pilot, not a final authority - Seek diverse human perspectives when interpreting and acting on AI recommendations - Use the tool as a starting point for deeper advising conversations with academic advisors, career counselors, and mentors ## Language and Locale Support Student Goals Agent supports the languages and locales supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Generative AI Supported Languages and Locales](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_languages.htm&language=en_US). ## Large Language Model Support Student Goals Agent supports the models supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Student Goals Agent supports the Trust Layer services provided on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Trust Layer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_trust_layer.htm&language=en_US). Ask your system administrator about which Einstein Trust Layer services are enabled in your org and available for Student Goals Agent. ## Usage Types Billed By Student Goals Agent Student Goals Agent uses generative AI and Data Cloud to ingest, store, and process data. You’re billed in these categories when you use Student Goals Agent. Before deployment, work with your Salesforce account team to confirm license availability and plan credit usage. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This feature has access to Digital Wallet, a free account management tool that offers near real-time consumption data for enabled products across your active contracts. Access Digital Wallet and start tracking your org’s usage. To learn more, see [About Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_about.htm&language=en_US). | Digital Wallet Card | Usage Type | Description | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Flex Credits | Standard Action | Usage is determined by the number of standard agent actions. See [Flex Credits Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&language=en_US). | Applies to authenticated and unauthenticated Student Goals Agent interactions. | When you use Student Goals Agent, credits can be consumed in usage types on other consumption cards by related features such as [Agentforce Data Library or Audit and Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_audit_feedback_usage_types.htm&language=en_US). # Student Goals Agent for Education Cloud Use the Student Goals Agent to help your students get specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) goal recommendations with AI-powered guidance based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Assist students in getting campus resource recommendations, including courses, support programs, and involvement groups that can keep students on track to achieve their goals. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
- **[Student Goals Agent Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_goals_agent_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Student Goals Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Student Goals Agent Subagents and Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_goals_agent_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Student Goals Agent to help your students define and achieve life goals with AI-powered guidance based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. You can find information on campus resources such as services, activities, clubs, programs, courses, or action plans. - **[Collect Data to Ground Agent Recommendations for Student Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_ground_agent_recommendations_for_student_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Collect student data using the EDU Cloud: Get Learner Details flow to ground agent recommendations, ensuring they are personalized and context-aware. More available information generally improves agent performance. - **[Set Up the Student Goals Agent for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_goals_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the assistive Student Goals Agent for advisors to help advisors support students in setting well-defined, actionable goals in Education Cloud. - **[Set Up the Student Goals Agent for Students](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_goals_agent_for_students.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the autonomous Student Goals Agent for students to define and achieve life goals. The AI-powered guidance is based on the student's profile, preferences, and assessment insights within the Experience Cloud site. Students can find information about campus resources, such as services, activities, clubs, programs, courses, or action plans. # Student Goals Agent Subagents and Actions Use the Student Goals Agent to help your students define and achieve life goals with AI-powered guidance based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. You can find information on campus resources such as services, activities, clubs, programs, courses, or action plans.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. The Student Goals Agent includes these subagents and actions:
Subagent Description Included Actions
Self Serve Student Goals Use this subagent to discover formalized, personalized, and actionable goals. This includes suggesting SMART goals across key areas such as career, academics, wellness, personal and professional skills, and engagement for career readiness and holistic development. Empower students by creating goals with specific names and target completion dates. Also, find campus resource recommendations to achieve goals.

Suggest Student Goals

Create Goal

Find Campus Resources
Advising Assist Student Goals

Use this subagent to assist an advisor to support a student in discovering formalized, personalized, and actionable goals. The capabilities include:

  • Suggest Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, and Time-bound (SMART) goals for a student across key areas such as career, academics, wellness, personal and professional skills, and engagement for career readiness and holistic development.
  • Create goals for a student with a specific name and target completion date.
  • Find campus resource recommendations to achieve goals.

Suggest Student Goals

Create Goal

Find Campus Resources
Student Goals Agent is designed to provide quick responses to users, saving valuable time for your staff. However, some queries require personal attention. To redirect unanswered conversations to a human representative, set up an escalation subagent. See [Route Conversations from a Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_escalation.htm&language=en_US). # Student Information System and Learning Management Systems Integration MuleSoft Anypoint and Flow connectors synchronize data between your student information system (SIS) and learning management systems (LMS). Out-of-the-box Anypoint connectors integrate with Canvas, Moodle, Blackboard, and D2L Brightspace. For simpler use cases with fewer transformations, use a Flow-based Canvas connector.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
The Flow connector requires the MuleSoft for Flow: Integration add-on.
The MuleSoft Anypoint connectors require the MuleSoft Integration SF - Starter or the MuleSoft Integration SF - Advanced add-on.
Depending on the data to synchronize, create Mule flows to leverage the connectors. Use the pre-built integration connectors to: - Automate user provisioning in the LMS with SIS data - Create and manage course sections - Synchronize enrollments for faculty, teaching staff, and students. By establishing a bi-directional data flow, the connectors synchronize course structures and assessment components, push final and component grades from the LMS to the SIS, and more. Anypoint Connector for Blackboard (Beta) Create a Mule flow to leverage the connector to synchronize data with Blackboard. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Anypoint Connector for Blackboard is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. See [Anypoint Connector for Blackboard](https://docs.mulesoft.com/blackboard-connector/latest/). Anypoint Connector for Canvas Create a Mule flow to leverage the connector to synchronize data with Canvas. See [Anypoint Connector for Canvas](https://docs.mulesoft.com/canvas-connector/latest/). Anypoint Connector for D2L Brightspace (Beta) Create a Mule flow to leverage the connector to synchronize data with D2L Brightspace. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Anypoint Connector for D2L Brightspace is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. See [Anypoint Connector for D2L Brightspace](https://docs.mulesoft.com/d2l-brightspace-connector/latest/). Anypoint Connector for Moodle (Beta) Create a Mule flow to leverage the connector to synchronize data with Moodle. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Anypoint Connector for Moodle is a pilot or beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this pilot or beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. See [Anypoint Connector for Moodle](https://docs.mulesoft.com/moodle-connector/latest/). MuleSoft for Flow: Integration connectors, Canvas Connector Create a Mule flow to leverage the connector for simpler use cases with fewer transformations between the student information system and Canvas. See: - Canvas Connector at [MuleSoft for Flow: Integration connectors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.automate_flow_ref_third_party_canvas.htm&language=en_US) - [Create a Flow with a Third-Party Connector as an Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.automate_build_flow_esct_third_party_as_action.htm&language=en_US&type=5) # Student Information System Policy Rules Use extensible policy rules in Education Cloud to scale operations and establish transparent and auditable processes. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
To support education-specific operations at scale, the student information system rules framework uses: - [Context Definitions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.context_service_context_definitions.htm&language=en_US) Context definitions ensure efficient data access at every step of the process. - [Expression Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.expression_sets.htm&language=en_US) Expression sets calculate business rules using connected steps built from variables, constants, conditions, calculations, lookups, and aggregations. - [About Automation with Salesforce Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.automate_about.htm&language=en_US) Salesforce Flow tools help you quickly set up and change automation solutions. - [Batch Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.concept_batch_management.htm&language=en_US) Batch Management helps companies optimize business processes that handle a high volume of standard and custom object records. For a typical process, the steps involved in the framework are: 1. A screen flow, Omniprocess, or Lightning web component triggers a platform event, such as a grade point average (GPA) calculation or eligibility check for an academic term registration timeline. 2. The platform event triggers an event-triggered flow. 3. The event-triggered flow engages the batch management framework. 4. The batch management framework engages an auto-launched flow. 5. The flow runs an invocable action to get batch jobs by ID. 6. The flow runs another invocable action to run an expression set (policy rule) by ID. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note You can customize and use the invocable action, ExecuteExprSetWithContext, available with Education Cloud. 7. The expression set with a predefined context definition calculates the results. 8. A business element configured in the expression set stores the log of the calculation run. 9. The logs are shown on a custom UI component based on Decision Explainer. Customize the rules framework based on your institution’s processes and specific requirements. These features are available with Education Cloud: - [Eligibility Verification and Assignment for Registration Timelines](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_eligibility_verification_and_assignment_for_registration_timelines.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Education Cloud uses the student information system policy rules framework to verify which students enrolled in an academic term qualify for a registration timeline. After verification, the same framework assigns that timeline to the students who qualify. Verification and assignment are two related phases.") - [Academic Score Calculations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_academic_score_calculations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Calculate academic scores, such as term GPA, for students enrolled in an academic term by using configurable policy rules. Admins define the calculation logic once, and Education Cloud applies it to every enrollment in the term in a batch.") # Student Insights for Advisors Use Data Cloud to import student data from external systems into Education Cloud, and then use Einstein generative AI to get relevant, holistic insights on students.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Features powered by Generative AI can produce inaccurate or harmful responses. Review the output for accuracy and safety. You assume responsibility for how the outcomes of Agents and other AI features are applied to your organization. - **[Einstein Academic Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_einstein_academic_insights.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** With Einstein generative AI, get academic insights on individual students that indicate how well they’re doing and identify areas where they need assistance. Use Visual Indicator to show a student’s performance in the current term based on their course component scores. - **[Visual Indicator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_visual_indicator.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Visual Indicator in Education Cloud to give advisors a quick view of a student’s performance in the enrolled courses of the current academic term. Based on the student’s course component scores, Visual Indicator shows their course performance in customizable categories such as At Risk, On Track, and Needs Attention. - **[Use Student Insights From Non-Default Data Space](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_use_student_insights_non_default_data_space.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, Student Insights uses data from the default data space. If you have data in a custom data space, you must map the data space in Data 360 to the features in Education Cloud. # Student Management Give staff and faculty quick access to important student information. In a single, accessible view, include emergency contacts, relationships, student contact information, and enrollment data in student records. Add a relationship graph to convey students’ relationships to households. Assign access to advisors, registrars, and faculty. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Student Management App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_management_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Management app consolidates important student information in a single view with three tabs. - **[Set Up the Student Management App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_management_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Centralize key information in student records: emergency contacts, relationships, student contact information, and enrollment data. Streamline administrative processes and give students, staff, and faculty a better experience. - **[Enable Student Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_student_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consolidate important student information in a single view. - **[Turn On Required Settings for the Student Management App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_turn_on_required_settings_for_the_student_management_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Turn on settings required for the Student Management App. - **[Required Records for the Student Management App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_required_records_for_the_student_management_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To work as intended, Student Management requires certain records. - **[Assign the Student Management Account Record Page to Student Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_student_management_account_record_page_to_student_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Replace the regular person account layout with the student record layout by assigning Student Management Account Record Page to the person account record type. Then assign the page to profiles for advisors and registrars. - **[Customize Person Account Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_display_multiple_addresses_on_student_management_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add Contact Point Addresses, Contact Point Phones, and Contact Point Emails to the Person Account page layout. Add a dynamic related list to the Student Management Account Record Page layout to display the emergency contacts associated with person accounts. - **[Show Household Information on Student Management Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_display_household_information_on_student_management_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add a relationship graph to student records to show household information. Use the graphs to view a student's household members, including parents, guardians, and siblings. You can also view the relationships between the household members. # Student Management App The Student Management app consolidates important student information in a single view with three tabs. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Each tab includes the learner’s primary contact information and the programs they're enrolled in. ## Learner Profile The Learner Profile tab shows personal details (1), emergency contacts (2), additional contact information (3), citizenship information (4), demographic information (5), and household and relationship information (6). ![Student Managment Learner Profile](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_student_management_learner_profile.png) ## Standardized Tests The Standardized Tests tab lists the results of standardized tests a student has taken. ![Student Management Standardized Tests](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_student_management_tests.png) ## Academic Enrollment The Academic Enrollment tab shows an enrollment summary and enrollment details for the selected term. ![Student Management Academic Enrollment](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_student_management_academic_enrollment.png) # Student Portal Components Learn about the custom Lightning components you can use in a Student Success Hub student portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. Student Success Hub provides several custom Lightning components for student portals. Some are compatible only with certain pages, so make sure you add components to the appropriate pages. You can also customize pages with other Lightning components, such as object pages that display object details and related records. - **[SSH Appointment Action Menu Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Appointment Action Menu component gives students a button to allow them to quickly reschedule or cancel appointments from the Appointment Detail page. - **[SSH Appointment Scheduler Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Appointment Scheduler component allows students to view upcoming, past, and canceled appointments, and to access the Scheduling Wizard. - **[SSH Assigned Tasks Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Assigned Tasks component lets students view their assigned Tasks. The component looks a little different on a mobile device than on the desktop, but it offers similar functionality in both experiences. Tasks are organized by priority and due date to help students focus on the items that need the most attention. If accessed in the context of a specific Success Plan, the component shows the Tasks that are assigned under the Success Plan. If accessed directly, the component shows the Tasks assigned in a Success Plan as well as individual, one-off Tasks assigned to the student. - **[SSH Launchpad Agenda Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Launchpad Agenda component gives students a consolidated view of their scheduled appointments, courses, and calendar Events, such as a study group session or a doctor’s appointment. - **[SSH Program Plan Builder Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Program Plan Builder component allows students to create Personal Program Plans that detail the Courses to take each Term. - **[SSH Program Plan Highlights Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Program Plan Highlights component displays a header that contains key Program Plan fields. Use the SSH Program Plan Highlights component with the SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component. - **[SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component displays a header that contains key Program Plan fields. Use the SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component with the SSH Program Plan Highlights component. - **[SSH Scheduling Wizard Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Scheduling Wizard component lets students schedule individual appointments with a support staff member, check for walk-in availability, and reserve a spot in a group appointment. Students choose options in the wizard so that they can meet with the staff member best suited to help at a convenient time and location. - **[SSH Success Plan Progress Bar Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Success Plan Progress Bar component gives students a visual indication of their progress toward completing the Tasks in a Success Plan. - **[SSH Success Plans Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Success Plans component lets students see all of the published Success Plans assigned to them. The component looks a little different on a mobile device than on the desktop, but it offers similar functionality in both experiences. It groups Success Plans into sections by type. Each section and Success Plan can be toggled open or closed. Each Success Plan shows the number of remaining and overdue Tasks and allows students to take action on any Task. - **[SSH Success Team Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Success Team component lets students see the members of their success team. - **[SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH Support Staff Member Appointment Settings component shows a support staff member's appointment availability, including their working hours and the locations where they can meet. - **[SSH User Profile Schedule Button Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The SSH User Profile Schedule Button component allows students to schedule an appointment when they view a support staff member's User Profile page. ## SSH Appointment Action Menu Component The SSH Appointment Action Menu component gives students a button to allow them to quickly reschedule or cancel appointments from the Appointment Detail page. To offer the Reschedule or Cancel button, create a custom Appointment object page in the portal and then place this component on the Appointment Detail page. When a student taps or clicks Reschedule or Cancel for a group appointment that a support staff member scheduled, they're prompted to cancel their own attendance and told to contact the appointment organizer (staff member) if they need to reschedule. When a student reschedules an individual appointment or a reservation for a group appointment that they signed up for in the portal, they're sent to the Scheduling Wizard and can choose a different appointment of the same type for the same topic. They can also just cancel and not reschedule. For all group appointments, if the student is the last remaining attendee besides the organizer, then canceling their attendance cancels the appointment itself. ![The SSH Appointment Action Menu component with a callout on the Reschedule or Cancel button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_appointment_action_menu.png) ## SSH Appointment Scheduler Component The SSH Appointment Scheduler component allows students to view upcoming, past, and canceled appointments, and to access the Scheduling Wizard. Place the component on a page where it's convenient for students to access and manage their appointments. For example, create a custom page called My Appointments. The appointment card may show the Topic, Subtopic, or Appointment Subject as a link that opens the Appointment record. Student Success Hub turns off the link by default. If you want students to be able to access the Appointment record, turn on the link. See [Turn Off Student Appointment Record Link](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings.") in your SSH Hierarchy Custom Settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note As a security best practice, don't make Appointment records available in the portal. If you do, lock down fields as much as possible on the page layout used by students. That way students can't, for example, change appointments to times or locations that are unavailable to support staff. Also, be sure to disable the Appointment Attendee related list to ensure privacy and security for other attendees of group appointments. For virtual appointments, the component displays a Join Web Meeting button that the student can tap or click to enter the meeting. When a student taps or clicks Reschedule or Cancel for a group appointment that a support staff member scheduled, they're prompted to cancel their own attendance and told to contact the appointment organizer (support staff member) if they need to reschedule. When a student taps or clicks Reschedule or Cancel for an individual appointment or for a group appointment that they signed up for in the portal, they're sent to the Scheduling Wizard and can choose a different appointment of the same type for the same topic. They can also just cancel and not reschedule. If they're the last remaining attendee besides the organizer in the group appointment—any group appointment—then canceling their attendance cancels the appointment itself. ![The SSH Appointment Scheduler component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_appointment_scheduler.png) ## SSH Assigned Tasks Component The SSH Assigned Tasks component lets students view their assigned Tasks. The component looks a little different on a mobile device than on the desktop, but it offers similar functionality in both experiences. Tasks are organized by priority and due date to help students focus on the items that need the most attention. If accessed in the context of a specific Success Plan, the component shows the Tasks that are assigned under the Success Plan. If accessed directly, the component shows the Tasks assigned in a Success Plan as well as individual, one-off Tasks assigned to the student. Place the Assigned Tasks component on a page where it's convenient for students to see a list of their assigned Tasks. For example: - Create a page called My Tasks to show both the Tasks assigned under Success Plans and the one-off Tasks unrelated to a Success Plan. - Create custom object pages for the Success Plan object, and on the Success Plan Detail page, create a Tasks tab to show the Tasks specific to a Success Plan. For instructions on how to set up both a My Tasks page and a Success Plan Detail page with a Tasks tab, see [Additional Success Plan Setup for Higher Ed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Student Success Hub app and your student portal to use Success Plans and Tasks."). ![The SSH Assigned Tasks component as it appears on a Success Plan Detail page on the desktop](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_assigned_tasks.png) ## SSH Launchpad Agenda Component The SSH Launchpad Agenda component gives students a consolidated view of their scheduled appointments, courses, and calendar Events, such as a study group session or a doctor’s appointment. Place the component on the Home page or on a page called My Agenda. If you create a new page, remember to add it to the navigation bar. ![The SSH Launchpad Agenda component showing ENG-201, a scheduled appointment, and a Calculus study group](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_launchpad_agenda.png) To set up the Launchpad Agenda: - Set the necessary object permissions and field-level security for these EDA objects: Course, Course Connection, Course Offering, Course Offering Schedule, Facility, and Term. See [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal."). - Review and update sharing settings for these EDA objects: Course Connection, Course Offering Schedule, and Facility. See [Configure Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses."). - If you want calendar Events to show in the Agenda, give students a way to create or sync events. Add the Calendar component to a page in your portal. Remember to test the student experience. - If you want Courses to show up in the Agenda, import that data first. See [Import Your School's Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_data_import_school.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create data to represent your educational institution in Student Success Hub."). Keep in mind that if you have holidays set up, Courses don’t display on specified holidays (however, Events and appointments will show). - The appointment card may show the Topic, Subtopic, or Appointment Subject as a link that opens the Appointment record. Student Success Hub turns off the link by default. If you want students to be able to access the Appointment record, turn on the link. See [Turn Off Student Appointment Record Link](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings.") in your SSH Hierarchy Custom Settings. ## SSH Program Plan Builder Component The SSH Program Plan Builder component allows students to create Personal Program Plans that detail the Courses to take each Term. Place this component on a page that can be accessed from a tab or from the navigation menu. For information, see [Set Up Pathways to Build Personal Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_build_personal_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to create Personal Program Plans in Student Success Hub."). ![The SSH Program Plan Builder component showing Courses for Fall 2019 and Spring 2020](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_personal_program_plan_sample.png) ## SSH Program Plan Highlights Component The SSH Program Plan Highlights component displays a header that contains key Program Plan fields. Use the SSH Program Plan Highlights component with the SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component. Place the component on a page where it's convenient for students to see the details of a Program Plan. See [Set Up Pathways to View Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to view Program Plans and Program Enrollments in Student Success Hub."). ![The SSH Program Plan Highlights component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_highlights.png) ## SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary Component The SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component displays a header that contains key Program Plan fields. Use the SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component with the SSH Program Plan Highlights component. Place the component on a page where it's convenient for students to see the details of a Program Plan. See [Set Up Pathways to View Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to view Program Plans and Program Enrollments in Student Success Hub."). ![The SSH Program Plan Requirements Summary component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_req_summary.png) ## SSH Scheduling Wizard Component The SSH Scheduling Wizard component lets students schedule individual appointments with a support staff member, check for walk-in availability, and reserve a spot in a group appointment. Students choose options in the wizard so that they can meet with the staff member best suited to help at a convenient time and location. Place this component on a custom page that you create specifically for scheduling appointments. In the SSH Scheduling Wizard component properties panel, enter the API name of the page on your site with the SSH Appointment Scheduler component. This page opens when a student successfully schedules an appointment using the wizard. If you don't enter the Upcoming Appointments Page API Name, the wizard sends students to the site Home page when they successfully schedule an appointment. On any other pages that also include or call the Scheduling Wizard, specify the API name of the custom page that you created for the Scheduling Wizard component. For example, on your User Profile page, select the SSH User Profile Schedule Button component and enter the Scheduling Wizard Site Page API Name. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To find the API name of a portal page, in Experience Builder, select the page in the Pages menu, click ![A blue gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_page_properties_icon.png), and look in the API Name field. You can also add the component to the portal's navigation menu so that students can click Schedule an Appointment from anywhere on the site. ![The staff member selection page (left) and the appointment scheduled page (right) of the SSH Scheduling Wizard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_scheduling_wizard_first_last.png) ## SSH Success Plan Progress Bar Component The SSH Success Plan Progress Bar component gives students a visual indication of their progress toward completing the Tasks in a Success Plan. Place the component at the top of a Success Plan Detail page above the SSH Assigned Tasks component. For setup instructions, see [Additional Success Plan Setup for Higher Ed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_plans_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Student Success Hub app and your student portal to use Success Plans and Tasks."). ![The SSH Success Plan Progress Bar component on a Success Plan Detail page on the desktop](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_success_plan_progress_bar.png) ## SSH Success Plans Component The SSH Success Plans component lets students see all of the published Success Plans assigned to them. The component looks a little different on a mobile device than on the desktop, but it offers similar functionality in both experiences. It groups Success Plans into sections by type. Each section and Success Plan can be toggled open or closed. Each Success Plan shows the number of remaining and overdue Tasks and allows students to take action on any Task. Place the component on a page where it's convenient for students to see a list of their Success Plans. For example, create a page called My Success Plans. ![The SSH Success Plans component on the desktop](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_success_plans.png) ## SSH Success Team Component The SSH Success Team component lets students see the members of their success team. Place the component on a page where it's convenient for students to see their success team, such as the Home page or a custom page. ![The SSH Success Team component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_success_team.png) ## SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings Component The SSH Support Staff Member Appointment Settings component shows a support staff member's appointment availability, including their working hours and the locations where they can meet. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Use this component only on the User Profile page. ![The SSH Support Staff Appointment Settings component](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_appointment_settings.png) ## SSH User Profile Schedule Button Component The SSH User Profile Schedule Button component allows students to schedule an appointment when they view a support staff member's User Profile page. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Use the SSH User Profile Schedule Button component only on the User Profile page. We recommend placing it above the User Profile or User Profile Detail component. Placing it on other pages can interfere with other components and cause errors. To show their phone numbers and email address on their User Profile page, support staff must go to their profile in Salesforce Classic and set the visibility for these fields to External. For more information, see [Share Personal Contact Information Within Experience Cloud Sites](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_contact_info_visibility.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help. ![The SSH User Profile Schedule Button component on a support staff member's User Profile portal page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_portal_component_user_profile_schedule_button.png) # Student Profile Management Create, update, and maintain a digital record of a student's competencies, traits, and affinities throughout their academic and personal journey.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
- **[Create Competencies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_competencies.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A student's competencies are crucial for guiding their development. Students can track this progress in the portal throughout their academic journey, including competencies acquired through coursework, cocurricular and extracurricular activities, and off-campus experiences like internships and community service. - **[Create Person Competencies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_person_competencies.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Advisors create person competencies to understand each student's starting point, enabling more personalized guidance and support. Students can self-enroll for these competencies through the portal. When a student enrolls for an involvement group through the portal, the competencies related to the involvement group are shown. Students can then add these as interested or acquired competencies. Students can also create their own person competencies through the portal. - **[Create Person Traits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_person_traits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a list of a student’s traits in Education Cloud to reflect their current profile, such as strengths and opportunities. - **[Create Person Affinities](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_person_affinities.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a list of student affinities in Education Cloud to reflect their past and current interests. # Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) Subagents and Actions Use Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) subagents to answer questions, create Academic Interest records, and start applications. You can also provide information about campus tours, visits, and events. These subagents ensure prospective students receive the information they need. This leads to a smoother and more informed enrollment process.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. The Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) includes these subagents and actions:
Subagent Description Included Actions
Admissions and Enrollments FAQ Use this subagent to answer questions and provide information based on your knowledge articles.
Admissions Application Use this subagent to create an application for a student.
Campus Tours, Visits, and Events Registration Use this subagent to assist users in registering for campus tours, campus visits, or campus events.
Request for Information Use this subagent to create an academic interest record when the user explicitly says that they want a recruiter to contact them. For example, “I want a recruiter to contact me.” Only use this topic if the user indicates interest in a specific learning program.
Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) is designed to provide quick responses to users, saving valuable time for your staff. However, some queries require personal attention. To redirect unanswered conversations to a human representative, set up an escalation subagent. See [Route Conversations from a Service Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.service_agent_escalation.htm&language=en_US). As part of the escalation subagent, you can include the Create Inquiry action. This action creates a case, an educational info request, and an academic interest raised by prospective students, parents, or counselors. Call this action when there isn’t an answer to the user’s question. See [Create Inquiry](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_ref_ec_create_inquiry.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Some of the actions use flows. We recommend that you clone the flows and update the actions with your new versions. See [Editing Standard Agent Action Reference Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_actions_edit_reference.htm&language=en_US). # Student Recruitment Agent Considerations To use Student Recruitment Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
## Language and Locale Support Student Recruitment Agent supports the languages and locales supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Generative AI Supported Languages and Locales](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_languages.htm&language=en_US). ## Large Language Model Support Student Recruitment Agent supports the models supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Student Recruitment Agent supports the Trust Layer services provided on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Trust Layer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_trust_layer.htm&language=en_US). Ask your system administrator about which Einstein Trust Layer services are enabled in your org and available for Student Recruitment Agent. ## Usage Types Billed By Student Recruitment Agent Student Recruitment Agent uses generative AI and Data Cloud to ingest, store, and process data. You’re billed in these categories when you use Student Recruitment Agent. Before deployment, work with your Salesforce account team to confirm license availability and plan credit usage. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This feature has access to Digital Wallet, a free account management tool that offers near real-time consumption data for enabled products across your active contracts. Access Digital Wallet and start tracking your org’s usage. To learn more, see [About Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_about.htm&language=en_US). | Digital Wallet Card | Usage Type | Description | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Flex Credits | Standard Action | Usage is determined by the number of standard agent actions. See [Flex Credits Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&language=en_US). | Applies to authenticated and unauthenticated Student Recruitment Agent interactions. | | Conversations | Agentforce: ASA Messaging | Usage is calculated based on conversation windows. See [Agentforce Conversations Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_usage_conversations.htm&language=en_US). | Applies to unauthenticated Student Recruitment Agent interactions. | When you use Student Recruitment Agent, credits can be consumed in usage types on other consumption cards by related features such as [Agentforce Data Library or Audit and Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_audit_feedback_usage_types.htm&language=en_US). # Student Recruitment Agent Creation with AI Tools A guided session creates a draft Student Recruitment Agent to answer prospective students' admissions questions, capture inquiries, and register them for campus events. When you describe your recruitment process to a coding agent, it turns on platform features, configures permissions and Data 360 grounding, and builds the draft agent for you to finalize and deploy. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Scenario A Salesforce admin at your institution wants to deploy a Student Recruitment Agent to help the admissions team automate repetitive inquiries about programs, applications, and campus visits. Rather than completing dozens of manual configuration steps across multiple setup areas, the admin connects a coding agent to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) and describes the recruitment process. The agent turns on required features, configures permissions and sharing, builds Data 360 grounding, and creates a draft agent in one guided session. The admin then adds content and deploys the agent. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. For more information, see [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). ## Requirements - Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, or Developer Edition with Education Cloud, in Lightning Experience - These licenses and add-ons: - Education Cloud - Einstein for Education Cloud - Data 360 - Applicable Agentforce add-on licenses - Education Cloud Full Access permission set. The agent checks for and assigns the required permission sets based on your privileges, so it never grants access that you don't have. - Education Cloud foundation turned on and Person Accounts turned on. See Agentforce Education Org Configuration with AI Tools. - Data 360 licensed and provisioned in your org. The coding agent uses Data 360 but doesn't provision it. - A coding agent, such as Agentforce Vibes or Claude Code, connected to the Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) with access to Education Cloud setup skills. For Agentforce Vibes, no installation is required. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. You can manage them from the Skills page, under Toolkit, in Agentforce Vibes. For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. ## Suggested Technology and Experience Recommended for Salesforce admins who are comfortable with Setup and with running a coding agent against a connected org. No prior experience with a specific skill is required. ## Related Documentation - [Student Recruitment Agent for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_agent_student_recruitment_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your school assess and recruit new students. The agent can answer questions about your school, programs, and admissions processes. The agent can also help students apply to your school.") - [Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide) - [Salesforce Development Plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) - [Get Started with Agentforce Vibes](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/agentforcevibes/guide/afv-get-started.html) ## Agentic Tips - Decide which agent type is required before you start. The coding agent configures an agent for unauthenticated users, an agent for authenticated users, or both. Each agent deploys to its own Experience Cloud site. - Describe your goal in your own words. For example: - "The admissions team is getting overwhelmed with prospective student questions. I'd like to set up the Student Recruitment Agent to help handle inquiries about programs, applications, and campus information." - "Set up the Student Recruitment Agent for prospective students." - Approve each change. The agent explains what it's about to do and pauses for your confirmation before it turns on a feature or creates, updates, or deletes a record. - Plan for grounding content. When the agent reaches knowledge grounding, it offers to draft placeholder articles, asks you to supply your own, or asks you to defer. The agent can't answer well until it has access to published, admissions-relevant knowledge. - Avoid pasting credentials into a prompt. The agent acts as your authenticated user through the connected org. ## Design Considerations - The coding agent creates a draft agent. It doesn't create your admissions data, such as academic terms, programs, or applications, and it doesn't publish knowledge. You add your data and content and finish deployment. - Plan to complete several steps manually. Review the coding agent's list of follow-up tasks. See [Set Up the Student Recruitment Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_recruitment_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the Student Recruitment Agent to answer questions about your school’s learning programs, support programs, application process, and campus information.") for setup details. ## Create the Student Recruitment Agent with a Coding Agent Describe your recruitment process to a coding agent to create a draft Student Recruitment Agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To run setup skills through a coding agent: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Headless 360 MCP Server is a beta service that is subject to the Beta Services Terms at [Agreements - Salesforce.com](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/agreements/) or a written Unified Pilot Agreement if executed by Customer, and applicable terms in the [Product Terms Directory](https://ptd.salesforce.com/). Use of this beta service is at the Customer's sole discretion. Before you start: - [Set up your org](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/setup-overview.html) for the Salesforce Hosted MCP Servers, including an External Client App with the `mcp_api` scope. - Activate the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). - [Connect your coding agents.](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/client-connection-overview.html) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html), which provides Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. Then, create the Student Recruitment Agent. 1. Ask the coding agent to set up the Student Recruitment Agent, and specify whether you want an authenticated agent, unauthenticated agent, or both. 2. Review the report as the agent turns on required platform features and verifies that licenses and permissions are in place. 3. Have the agent configure the required permission sets, sharing, and object access. 4. When prompted, select how to handle knowledge articles while the agent sets up Data 360 grounding. 5. Have the agent create the Student Recruitment Agent in draft. 6. In Salesforce, complete manual steps that the coding agent lists. 7. Add your admissions data and published knowledge, customize the draft agent, and deploy it. # Student Recruitment Agent for Education Cloud Help your school assess and recruit new students. The agent can answer questions about your school, programs, and admissions processes. The agent can also help students apply to your school. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
- **[Student Recruitment Agent Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_recruitment_agent_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Student Recruitment Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) Subagents and Actions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_recruitment_agent_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Student Recruitment Agent (Beta) subagents to answer questions, create Academic Interest records, and start applications. You can also provide information about campus tours, visits, and events. These subagents ensure prospective students receive the information they need. This leads to a smoother and more informed enrollment process. - **[Knowledge Articles for the Student Recruitment Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_recruitment_agent_knowledge_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create knowledge articles to ground the Student Recruitment Agent’s responses. The Student Recruitment Agent includes a topic, Admissions And Enrollments FAQ, that uses the Answer Questions with Knowledge action. - **[Set Up Student Recruitment Agent Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_student_recruitment_agent_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Clone and configure the Student Recruitment Agent flows for unauthenticated users. - **[Set Up the Student Recruitment Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_recruitment_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Student Recruitment Agent to answer questions about your school’s learning programs, support programs, application process, and campus information. - **[Student Recruitment Agent Creation with AI Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_headless_student_recruitment_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A guided session creates a draft Student Recruitment Agent to answer prospective students' admissions questions, capture inquiries, and register them for campus events. When you describe your recruitment process to a coding agent, it turns on platform features, configures permissions and Data 360 grounding, and builds the draft agent for you to finalize and deploy. # Student Success Learn how Education Cloud provides you with powerful tools to support learner success.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
To provide a rewarding learning experience, educational institutions must clearly understand and support learner requirements. These requirements can vary from career counseling for an individual to orientation for a large batch of freshmen. Institutions need to monitor delivery of services and initiatives at scale, oversee advisor assignments, and track learner progress. Education Cloud equips your institution with the right tools to effectively meet these requirements and drive student success. Here are some ways you can use Education Cloud to support the learner journey: - Model programs with non-scholastic benefits, then schedule and track benefit disbursements. - Create alerts to get notified about learner performance. - Offer case-based advising, assign and manage success teams, and create personalized care plans. - Create custom record pages and consoles for directors and advisors. - Get insights with analytics and monitor institutional Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) for student success. - Enhance your learner self-service portal with student success components. - Enable advisors and learners to conveniently schedule appointments and collaborate. ## Example At Valley School District, high school counselor Devi Gill's job has never been more challenging. A year of remote learning required her to coordinate the delivery of books, tablet devices, and Wi-Fi hotspots to students such as Elijah, who lives with his grandmother, and to help seniors with college applications from a distance. Over at Callaras University, academic advisor Adrian Morges is busy, too. When he checks his email this morning, he sees that one student rescheduled an appointment to talk about degree planning, and he's meeting with two students later in the day. - At 10 AM: Stephanie, a sophomore, hasn't registered for next semester's classes. She's dragging her feet and questioning her choice of major. - At 2 PM: Stuart, a transfer student, needs a plan to get back on track after a year of health and financial issues hurt his academic performance. Luckily for Devi and Adrian, their institutions use Education Cloud’s Student Success app, providing them with a robust set of tools to impart equitable, unified, and collaborative support to their students. With the Student Success app in K-12 schools, teachers, counselors, and other support staff such as Devi: - Have the data they need to support students — grades, notes, pending tasks, deadlines — all in one place. - Can easily collaborate to identify and deliver assistance to students by using personalized care plans. - Are alerted to students who need support based on the ABCs: attendance, behavior, and courses. - Can securely track tasks, interactions, and services provided to students and measure the impact of interventions and programs. With the Student Success app in higher education, support staff can make use of all these features and use additional tools to foster focused conversations with students about educational success. Counselors, coaches, advisors, and other higher ed support staff like Adrian can: - Schedule and manage in-person, phone, and virtual appointments with students in just a few clicks. - Create and manage alerts especially for college and university students, such as for academics, careers, financial aid, and housing. - Assign tasks directly to students to help them achieve a goal or reach a milestone. - Communicate with students by using a dedicated portal, where students can see who's on their success team, schedule appointments for support services, and stay on top of their assigned tasks. Education Cloud empowers educators to provide proactive and personalized support to every Elijah, Stephanie, and Stuart in their care. ## See Also: - [Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_support_student_success_in_your_institution_2.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Education Cloud to help your learners achieve their academic objectives.") - [Student Success Data Model](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/data-models/guide/student-success.html) # Student Success Use Education Cloud to help your learners achieve their academic objectives.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Salesforce for Education, which includes integrated platform solutions and managed packages. This article provides information about Education Cloud, a platform solution. For information about managed package products, see [Admissions Connect](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.admissions_connect.htm), [Education Data Architecture](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.education_data_architecture.htm), or [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Enable Student Success in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_enable_student_success_in_your_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Enable Student Success to create a central place that offers support to learners for academics, athletics, health, financial aid, and more. - **[Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Education Cloud Student Success app to offer an equitable, unified, and collaborative student support experience. - **[Set Up the Advisor Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_advisor_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the advisor console in the Student Success app, advisors can create and assign care plans, create alerts, view analytics dashboards for student success, view advisor insights and KPIs, and more. This home page is available out-of-the-box with Education Cloud, no additional setup is required. - **[Set Up the Director Console for Student Success](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_ss.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a home page for the Student Success app, where a director can create programs and benefits, assign advisors, view analytics dashboards for student success, view institutional Key Performance Indicators (KPIs), and more. - **[Sharing Sets for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_sharing_sets_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To enable learners to view only their own degree plans, create sharing sets where their contact is set on the lookup to contact on the pathway record. - **[Support Learners with Care Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_support_learners_with_care_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Student Success app from Education Cloud to create personalized care plans that help learners achieve educational success. - **[Add Members or Case Teams to an Advising Case](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_add_members_or_case_teams_to_an_advising_case.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add individual members or teams to the success team of an advising case. - **[Intake Assessments for Support Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_intake_assessments_for_support_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Administer intake assessments during program enrollment to understand the learner's requirements and determine how best to support them. - **[Monitor Learner Performance with Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_monitor_learner_performance_with_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use record alerts in Education Cloud to monitor learner performance with respect to attendance, grades, and other metrics. - **[Success Teams for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Success teams connect learners with the advisors and support staff who help them throughout their entire educational journey. - **[Einstein Advising Summary for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_einstein_advising_summary_for_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein generative AI in Education Cloud to get an advising summary that can help you quickly understand a learner’s advising case. Get the details you need to prepare for an appointment or make decisions on short notice. - **[Action Center for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_action_center_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Action Center Lightning web component on your Experience site to help learners keep track of their care plans, action plans, and tasks. - **[Intelligent Degree Planning](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_intelligent_degree_planning.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give learners a dynamic degree planning experience with Intelligent Degree Planner in the Student Success app. - **[Intelligent Program Comparison Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_intelligent_program_comparison_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Intelligent Program Comparison Engine gives learners a side-by-side comparison of the learning program that they're enrolled in with up to three other programs that they're considering. - **[Learner Profiles for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_profile_for_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Learner Profile object stores student data aggregated from multiple objects. Therefore, the learner profile record page in Education Cloud provides a unified, actionable view of students. Find all the relevant details in one location where you can search, filter, and sort through learner profiles to create criteria-based list views. Then use the list views to take bulk actions. - **[Learner Progress for Learners and Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_progress_for_learners_and_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Include the Learner Progress component from Education Cloud on your Experience Cloud site so that learners can track their academic advancement. Advisors see Learner Progress as a tab on a learner’s case record page in Student Success. - **[Learner Progress Summary for Learners and Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_progress_summary_for_learners_and_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Learner Progress Summary in Education Cloud to view a learner’s academic highlights. - **[Student Insights for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_insights_for_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Data Cloud to import student data from external systems into Education Cloud, and then use Einstein generative AI to get relevant, holistic insights on students. - **[Learner Watchlist for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_learner_watchlist_for_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Watchlist in Education Cloud to proactively monitor learners who require enhanced support. Ensure timely intervention to provide personalized assistance to help learners succeed. - **[Pulse Checks for Learner Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_pulse_checks_for_learner_feedback.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Pulse Checks in Education Cloud to get learner feedback and assess their engagement, satisfaction, and overall wellbeing. - **[Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_career_planning_life_goals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Offer personalized guidance and comprehensive tools to help students define and achieve career and life goals based on their profile, preferences, and assessment insights. Students can access a library of career and interest assessments, explore campus involvement groups, track memberships and associated roles in involvement groups, and manage their profile and preferences more efficiently. Empower students to be career-ready by setting up action plans for goals by leveraging campus resources. Advisors can access the involvement groups and a library of career and interest assessments, and recommend the right fit to students based on the student's profile, preferences, assessment insights, and so on. # Student Success App The new Student Success app provides a central place for your institution to offer proactive and personalized support to learners for academics, sports, health, financial aid, and so on. Get insights from analytics dashboards, view in-depth learner information using the student snapshot component, monitor learner progress and create alerts, design programs and individualized care plans, and assign and manage success teams. When an advisor or a director opens the app, they see a home page with features curated for their role and license type. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: Enable the Student Success app in Setup. Then, from App Launcher, find and select **Student Success**. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Student Success App (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_student_success_app.htm) # Student Success App Use the Education Cloud Student Success app to offer an equitable, unified, and collaborative student support experience.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The Student Success app provides a central place to track and drive learner success at the individual learner level across your institution. You can customize the app to suit the requirements of your institution, such as create layouts or add components using [Lightning App Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.lightning_app_builder_overview.htm). When a director or advisor opens the app, the home page shows features tailored for their specific role and license type. Here’s a summary of what a director can do: - Assign advisors and manage success teams - Manage alerts on learner records - Manage care plans, goals, and tasks. - Manage programs, benefits, benefit schedules, and disbursements. - View institutional Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) on student success, and get insights through analytics dashboards. Advisors can: - Create and manage alerts on learner records - Create and manage care plans, goals, and tasks, and assign them to students. - Enroll learners into programs and benefits - View KPIs on student success, and get insights through analytics dashboards. - View programs, benefits, benefit schedules, and disbursements. - **[Set Up the Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Student Success in Education Cloud to provide proactive and personalized support to learners across academics, financial aid, careers, and life goals. - **[Customize Your Student Success App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_customize_your_student_success_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize the Student Success app to suit the requirements of your institution, such as by creating layouts and features specific to different roles using Lightning App Builder. # Student Success Components for Your Learner Portal Use Experience Builder to enhance your institution's learner portal with new mobile-ready Lightning web components for student success. From the learner portal, learners can conveniently schedule and manage appointments, view their assigned success teams and care plans, and manage their tasks. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience and all versions of the mobile app in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can create or modify sites in Experience Builder. Only users with the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud Access permission set can access the learner portal. **How**: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. Select your learner portal from the list, then add and configure each component. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Student Success Components for Your Learner Portal (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_student_success_components_for_your_learner_portal.htm) # Student Success Components for Your Learner Portal Use student success components from Education Cloud to enhance your institution’s learner portal with self-service capabilities for learners.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
With Experience Builder, you can build a site for your enrolled learners with custom layouts, themes, and branding. You can add features using ready-to-use or custom Lightning web components. To learn how Salesforce Lightning Experience makes building web pages simple, see [Build and Customize Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=experience.exp_cloud_build.htm&type=5). Lightning Web Components for student success bring self-service capabilities to your learner portal. Here’s a summary of what a learner can do: - View their success team and assigned advisors. - View advisor details, post questions, and check their availability. - View past and upcoming appointments, and schedule and manage appointments. - View and enroll into support programs, and take assessments. - View their care plans, goals, and benefits. - View and manage their tasks and action plans. - Set, update, and track specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) career and life goals. The learner portal is supported on mobile devices, which allow learners to view details of their care plans and success teams, and schedule appointments with advisors on the go. - **[Set Up Your Org for Student Success Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_org_for_student_success_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your org to allow learners to view information and interact with student success components on your learner portal. - **[Set Up Your Learner Portal with Student Success Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_your_learner_portal_with_student_success_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Experience Builder to add student success components to your learner portal, and then configure them. # Student Success Hub Accessibility Standards Learn how Student Success Hub strives for inclusive design. Student Success Hub is designed with accessibility in mind. We're committed to providing an on-demand enterprise app accessible to all individuals, including users working with assistive devices, such as speech recognition software and screen readers. To help meet our goal of inclusive design, Lightning Experience and Student Success Hub strive for compliance with Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1 level AA, aligning to the Revised 508 Standards, and EN 301 549 international standards. You can find Accessibility Conformance Reports (ACRs) for Student Success Hub and other Salesforce products on our [Product Accessibility Status](https://www.salesforce.com/company/legal/508_accessibility/) page. You can also visit [Accessibility Standards](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=accessibility_overview.htm) in Salesforce Help for general recommendations on screen readers, browsers, and more. # Student Success Hub Alerts Student Success Alerts (SSA) allows support staff (like faculty members or teaching assistants) to raise concerns about students in Slack. The SSA Slack app is integrated with Student Success Hub (SSH). Support staff receive the alert in SSH so they can quickly intervene to help students get back on track. - **[Set Up Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get Alerts up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up Mass Actions for Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_mass_actions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up your support staff to use mass action buttons to create Cases and apply Success Plans for multiple Alerts. - **[Automate Alert Resolution and Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_resolution_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use workflow automation to speed the resolution and creation of Alerts in Student Success Hub. - **[Automate Alert Assignment](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_alerts_auto_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use assignment rules to automatically assign Alerts to the most appropriate support staff User. - **[Create and Manage Alerts (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Alerts to take action when you have concerns about a student who needs support. Monitor Alerts at a glance and respond to Alerts that others create. - **[Set Up Student Success Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Student Success Alerts so your support staff can create and send alerts about students directly from Slack to SSH. - **[Send and Receive Student Success Alerts (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_send_and_receive_student_success_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Send alerts from the Student Success Alerts Slack app to support staff in Student Success Hub. - **[Take Action on Alerts (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_take_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Take action on Alerts: Keep the Priority, Status, Comments, and other fields up-to-date, and close Alerts when the issue is resolved. # Student Success Hub and Program Management Module Manage programs for groups of students such as for after-school enrichment activities or tutoring support programs. - **[Use Program Management Module with Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complement one-on-one student support with managed intervention, tutoring, and other types of group programs in Student Success Hub. # Student Success Hub App The Student Success Hub app consolidates the many data layers that you access every day. Whether tracking progress on a Success Plan, viewing and acting on Alerts, or documenting decisions and next steps in your Notes, Student Success Hub helps to keep you organized and on task. - **[Set Up the Student Success Hub App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Student Success Hub so that support staff can start using it, and customize it to fit your institution's needs. - **[Get to Know Student Success Hub App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_get_to_know_the_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Familiarize yourself with the Student Success Hub app, and learn how to access student information, customize the app for your institution, and manage appointments. # Student Success Hub Appointment Scheduling for Support Staff Help support staff understand availability options and recommendations for calendar management. Built to strengthen connections and provide equitable support, **Student Success Hub** is a complete student services solution for K-12 and higher education institutions. **Appointment Scheduling**, a feature of Student Success Hub, allows support staff to manage their calendar and designate how and when they meet with students. See [Appointment Scheduling for Support Staff Guide](http://sforce.co/Appointment-Scheduling-for-Advisors). # Student Success Hub Appointments Take advantage of flexible solutions for managing appointments, such as check-ins and queue management. And configure channels that cater to your institution’s needs, including walk-in and group appointments, and in-person and virtual advising sessions. Student Success Hub makes it easy for both staff and learners to manage their time and reach their goals. - **[Set Up Appointment Objects and Topics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_appointment_objects_and_topics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the appointment objects and topics to support your institution’s scheduling needs. - **[Set Up Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_appointment_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up calendar access for staff availability, create appointment layouts that suit your needs, and configure virtual appointments and front-desk scheduling. - **[Student Success Hub Flexible Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_flex_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By using location-based availability, or flexible scheduling, your support staff can designate blocks of time to meet with students, and associate those availability blocks with one or more locations. - **[Student Success Hub Manage Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_manage_availability_and_appointments_advisor.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage appointment availability in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up SSH to Sync with Work Calendars](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Einstein Activity Capture with Student Success Hub (SSH) to keep your Microsoft or Google calendar in sync with Salesforce. - **[Manage Calendar Sync (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_manage_calendar_sync.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To manage your SSH appointments with your work calendar application, connect it to SSH. You can stop syncing your work calendar by disconnecting it. To remove all SSH calendar content from your work calendar, you can delete it from SSH. - **[Student Success Hub Appointment Scheduling for Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_student_success_hub_appointment_scheduling_for_support_staff.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help support staff understand availability options and recommendations for calendar management. # Student Success Hub Chatbot The Student Success Hub chatbot uses outbound messages, Process Builder, Omni-Channel, Einstein Bots, and flows. Set up these components to help students keep up with their tasks. - **[Meet the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_meet.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Help students keep up with tasks by using the Student Success Chatbot. - **[Install the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the operational requirements, prerequisites, and how to install the Student Success Chatbot. - **[Verify and Assign Permissions to Configure the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Student Success Chatbot user. - **[Set Up Security for the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Decide how you want to manage the chatbot's permissions. - **[Get Your Org Ready for the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_org_prep.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to set up your org to use the Student Success chatbot. - **[Configure the Student Success Chatbot's Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the chatbot's custom fields on the Contact and Activity objects. - **[Understand What the Student Success Chatbot Does](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_understand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how the chatbot engages with students and uses flows. - **[Configure the Student Success Chatbot in Einstein Bot Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_einstein.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these chatbot setup tasks in Einstein Bot Builder. - **[Deploy the Student Success Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_deploy.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Test the chatbot and add it to a messaging channel or an Experience Cloud site. # Student Success Hub Content Management Learn how consent management applies to Student Success Hub. - **[Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about consent management for Student Success Hub. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. ## Consent Management for Your Product Learn about consent management for Student Success Hub. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations. When managing consent and certain other data privacy preferences, you may consider using Salesforce’s new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0). The Individual object is neither pre-enabled in your system nor pre-configured to work with Salesforce.org applications, but you can enable and implement it using Salesforce customization tools. Whether and how best to utilize the Individual object for your organization is up to you. Salesforce.org will continue to evaluate the Individual object and how we may support it in future releases of our applications. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent consent-related requests. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with and it ensures that the user's data is not used for future modeling. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Store Customers’ Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management: Track Customer Consent](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management.htm&type=5) - [Enable Tracking and Storage of Certain Data Privacy Preferences](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_setup_data_privacy.htm&type=5) - [Best Practices for Tracking Data Privacy](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_things_to_know_privacy_records.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_marketing.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Pardot](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_pardot.htm&type=5) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Consent Management for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_sales.htm&type=5) - [Consent Management for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=consent_management_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A student doesn't want to receive calls, emails, or postal mail from your organization.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

You may consider deleting information in these Contact or Lead fields:

  • Phone
  • Home Phone
  • Other Phone
  • Mobile
  • Email
  • Mailing Address
  • Other Address

Student Success Hub is built on the EDA framework, which also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email
  • University Email
  • Work Email
  • Work Phone
  • Address Object

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact
Some of your students don’t want to hear from your organization unless they specifically opt in.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

Delete Records

For Contacts and Leads, consider these options:

  • Email Opt Out
  • Do Not Call
  • Do Not Contact

Consider deleting phone numbers, email addresses, and mailing addresses, unless your constituents give you consent to use them. Refrain from sending marketing materials.

Don’t forget to remove data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
A student has requested that you do not store his email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Leads

You may consider deleting information in fields that store your student’s email address and phone number. Student Success Hub is built on the EDA framework, which also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email
  • University Email
  • Work Email
  • Work Phone
  • Address Object

Consider removing data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
# Student Success Hub Custom Settings Reference Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings. - **[SSH Hierarchy Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** These settings primarily control appointments and availability. - **[SSH Queuing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the settings that control queue management functionality in Student Success Hub orgs. These settings are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites. ## SSH Hierarchy Settings These settings primarily control appointments and availability. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed Student Success Hub before version 1.11, you might see additional fields that were previously used for specifying availability and have since been deprecated.

Field

Description

Can Support Staff Specify a Different Individual Default Value?

Advance Notice

The default minimum number of hours that an appointment can be scheduled before its start time.

Yes

Allow Mass Update in Alerts Related List

Shows checkboxes and a Change Status button on Alerts related lists on Student Record Cases so that support staff can make updates to multiple Alert statuses at once.

No

Appointment Buffer (minutes)

The default number of minutes between back-to-back scheduled appointments. When a value is specified, it becomes the default buffer for all support staff. However, individual users can override the value and set their own buffer in their Availability Settings.

Yes

Appointment Email Opt In

An integer representing the combination of appointment emails that a support staff member has chosen to receive (assuming the related field, Appointment Emails, is enabled). Do not edit the organization-level value. When individual support staff members edit their Email Notification Settings, the appropriate value is derived and saved automatically in the user's custom settings—you don't need to specify a value for each individually.

Valid values:

  • 7 = All emails (confirmation, update, and cancellation)
  • 6 = Update and cancellation only
  • 5 = Confirmation and cancellation only
  • 4 = Cancellation only
  • 3 = Confirmation and update only
  • 2 = Update only
  • 1 = Confirmation only
  • 0 = No emails

Yes

Appointment Emails

Indicates whether Student Success Hub appointment email notifications are sent to both support staff and students. If enabled, also gives support staff access to individually manage their own Email Notification Settings (see the related field, Appointment Email Opt In). If disabled, Student Success Hub doesn't send appointment email notifications and Email Notification Settings are hidden from support staff.

No

Appointment Length

The default appointment length in minutes.

Yes

Appointment Locations

Meeting locations. List multiple locations separated by semicolons.

Yes

Chosen Full Name Field

Display a student’s chosen name instead of their legal name in the Student Snapshot on the Student Record Case and in the Attendee Snapshot in the Appointment Manager.

Enter the API name of the field used for a chosen name, such as hed_Chosen_Full_Name__c provided in EDA. If this setting or the specified field is blank, Student Success Hub displays the Name field from the Contact record.

To display the chosen name in other places, customize the associated page layouts. See Set Up the Student Snapshot.

No

Contact Photo File ID Field

The API name of the field on the Contact object that contains the LatestPublishedVersionId for the Contact's photo.

Yes

Custom Appointment Length Opt-In

If the related custom setting, Enable Custom Appointment Length, is enabled, indicates that a support staff member has set custom Appointment lengths by Topic or Subtopic. Do not edit the organization-level value. When individual support staff members opt in to set custom lengths, this setting is automatically enabled in their user custom settings.

Yes

Customize Student Snapshot Fields

Indicates whether the Student Snapshot can be changed from its default configuration. If enabled, you can customize which fields are displayed using an included custom field set and the related custom setting, Student Snapshot Headline Fields. If disabled, the Student Snapshot shows the fields that come preconfigured with Student Success Hub.

No

Disable Enhanced Notes

Indicates whether the Add Note actions are visible in the Action menus when viewing a support Event in the Appointment Manager. If you're using your own custom object to manage support notes instead of using Salesforce Enhanced Notes, select this setting to hide the Add Note actions and prevent taking notes with Enhanced Notes. If not selected, support staff can see the Add Note actions and use them to create Enhanced Notes.

No

Disable Support Staff Email Attachments

Indicates whether a .ics (calendar) file should be attached to appointment emails to support staff.

No

Display Student ID in Event Subject

If the related custom setting, Student ID Field, is enabled, this setting controls whether a student's student ID displays in the Subject of an Event record in Calendar appointments.

No

Email ID for Appointment Emails

Indicates that appointment emails are sent from a default From field. This value is not an email address. See Set Up Email for Appointments.

No

Enable Custom Appointment Length

Allows support staff to set their own custom appointment lengths by topic or subtopic. This setting makes visible the Custom Appointment Lengths option on their Availability Settings page. If this setting is deselected, the Appointment Length custom setting value is used.

No
Group Availability Event Type

A type of Event and a type of Availability that indicate availability for group appointments that students can sign up for in a portal.

 No

Location

The entity, such as your institution, that the custom setting applies to.

No
Require Comments Select this field to require comments when students schedule an appointment. No

Scheduled Availability Event Type

The type of Event used to indicate availability for scheduled support appointments, such as Scheduled.

No
Student Appointment Interval The time period, in days, used to determine whether a student is served. A student who hasn't had an appointment during the interval is "not served." No

Student ID Field

The API name of the Contact field used for a student ID. If specified, student ID values can display with student names to uniquely identify students and can be searched in certain student lookup fields. If blank, student ID values don't display and can't be searched.

See the related custom setting, Display Student ID in Event Subject.

No

Student Record Case Record Type

The API name of the Case record type for student records.

No

Student Snapshot Headline Fields

If the related custom setting, Customize Student Snapshot Fields, is enabled, this setting indicates the number of headline fields displayed in the Student Snapshot.

No

Support Event Record Type

The API name of the Event record type that identifies a support appointment.

No

Support Time Event Record Type

The API name of the Event record type that identifies the times a User is available for appointments to be scheduled.

No

Turn Off Email Attachments for Students

Indicates whether a .ics (calendar) file should be attached to appointment emails to students.

No

Turn off Student Appointment Record Link

Indicates whether the appointment card in the student portal includes a link to the Appointment record page.

No

Walk-In Appointment Event Type

The type of Event used to indicate a walk-in appointment.

No

Walk-In Availability Event Type

The type of Event used to indicate availability for walk-in appointments. The value provided here is used in the New Walk-In button in the Appointment Manager.

No
## SSH Queuing Settings Review the settings that control queue management functionality in Student Success Hub orgs. These settings are licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites.

Field

Description

Show Email for Check-In Notifications

Indicates whether the Email field appears on the Queue Waiting Room self check-in page.

Show Phone for Check-In Notifications

Indicates whether the Phone field appears on the Queue Waiting Room self-check-in page.

Show Student ID for Self Check-In

Indicates whether the Student ID field appears on the Queue Waiting Room self check-in page.

Support Queue Case Record Type

The API name of the Case record type that identifies a Support Queue Case. The default record type is SupportQueue.

Support Queue Status - Abandoned Cases

The status to use on a Support Queue Case to represent that the attendee didn't show up when called or notified. The default status is Abandoned.

Support Queue Status - Fulfilled Cases

The status to use on a Support Queue Case to represent that the attendee’s request was resolved. The default status is Fulfilled.

Support Queue Status - Queued Cases

The status to use on a Support Queue Case to represent that the attendee has been added to the queue and is waiting to see someone. The default status is Queued.

Support Queue Status - Ready Cases

The status to use on a Support Queue Case to represent that the attendee is ready to meet with someone. The default status is Ready.

Support Queue Status - Referred Cases

The status to use on a Support Queue Case to represent that the attendee showed up and an Appointment was created. The default status is Referred.

Waiting Room Description

The API name of the field used to represent the displayed description of the Queue Waiting Room. The default value is hed__Description__c. The description appears under the Waiting Room Display Name in the queueWelcomeBanner component.

Waiting Room Display Name

The API name of the field used to represent the display name of the waiting room. The default value is Name. The name appears at the top of the queueWelcomeBanner component.

Waiting Room Object

The name of the object used to represent waiting rooms. The default value is hed__Facility__c.

Waiting Room Resource Lookup Field

The name of the field on the Waiting Room Resource object that looks up to the waiting room object. The default value is WaitingRoom__c.

Waiting Room Instructions

The API name of the field used to represent the message that appears when waiting room self check-in is successful. By default, the field is unspecified, so no instructions appear. If specified, the instructions appear on the final page of the check-in process, under the text confirming successful check-in.
# Student Success Hub Data Deletion Learn how to manage data deletion requests in Student Success Hub. - **[Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data deletion for Student Success Hub. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. ## Data Deletion for Your Product Learn about data deletion for Student Success Hub. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations. Not all deletion methods completely erase records from the database. Deleting a record may only move it to the [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5), and therefore personal data can still be accessed and restored. If you are required under a law or otherwise to ensure records are erased, be sure that you understand how record deletion works within Salesforce, and how to remove personal data from your instance in ways that meet your obligations. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data deletion. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Deletion: Delete Personal Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion.htm&type=5) - [Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_deleting_records.htm&type=5) - [Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=home_delete.htm&type=5) - [Empty Specific Records out of the Recycle Bin](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000206726&type=1) - [Hard Delete Records](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000135460&type=1) - [Data Backup](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000352139&type=1&mode=1) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information provided in the table below, review: - [Data Deletion for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Deletion for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_deletion_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A student has withdrawn from school and wants all of her data removed from the system.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Consider deleting these records and field data for your student:

  • Contact
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events (Appointments)
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

Consider deactivating the student’s related Community User account and remove any personal information stored on the User record.

You may also need to delete:

  • Cases
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Alerts
  • Course Connections
  • Program Enrollments
  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Accounts

Be aware deleting certain student records could create conflicts with various requirements around data retention. If so, you may consider anonymizing but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A support staff member has retired and the university requests that you remove all data associated with him.

Delete Records

Deactivate (Delete) Users

In addition to deactivating the individual's User record and deleting their Contact record, consider deleting:

  • Tasks
  • Cases
  • Calendar events (Appointments)
  • Any personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also need to delete:

  • Notes
  • Alerts
  • Addresses
  • Course Offerings
  • Leads
  • Accounts

Be aware deleting certain student records could create conflicts with various requirements around data retention. If so, you may consider anonymizing but should weigh all the options with a legal advisor.

If you maintain a Sandbox environment, you may want to refresh the environment afterward to remove that constituent’s data from it, or log into the Sandbox and manually remove the data.
A constituent doesn't want you to store her email address and phone number.

Manage Contacts

Manage Accounts

Manage Custom Objects

Deactivate (Delete) Users

Consider deleting data in any fields that store your constituent’s email address and phone number.

Student Success Hub is built on the EDA framework which also includes these custom email and phone fields and objects:

  • Alternate Email
  • University Email
  • Work Email
  • Work Phone
  • Address Object

If you’ve created other records or activities related to your constituent, consider removing her email address and phone number from those records too.

You may need to deactivate the related Community User account and remove the user email address. Remind your constituent that they will no longer be able to use the Student Success Hub student portal.

You may also want to remove data from Salesforce standard Email and Phone fields as well.
# Student Success Hub Data Portability Learn how to manage data portability in Student Success Hub. - **[Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about data portability for Student Success Hub. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. ## Data Portability for Your Product Learn about data portability for Student Success Hub. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule. Keep in mind that addressing constituent requests, including those provided for under the GDPR, can be challenging. A one-size-fits-all strategy may not always work, and you may need to adjust your approach when balancing organizational needs and legal obligations. For example, if exporting personal data to satisfy a GDPR data portability request may violate someone else’s rights, you might consider narrowing the fields in scope rather than exporting all data. If deleting personal data to satisfy a GDPR erasure request may conflict with other requirements around record preservation, you might consider anonymizing certain fields rather than wholesale deletion. As always, there are pros and cons to each approach, including legal and business impacts and risks, and you are responsible for your own compliance obligations in your use of the Salesforce Services and Salesforce.org applications. You should work with your advisors, including legal counsel, to determine whether you are covered under a legal requirement, and come up with a compliance plan that’s best for your organization. Salesforce resources: - [Data Portability: Give Customers Their Data when They Want It](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability.htm&type=5) - [Export Backup Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) - [Export results of SOQL query from workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000205697&type=1) - [Export Data with Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.208.0.dataloader.meta/dataloader/exporting_data.htm) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important Remember to review both Salesforce Platform documentation AND Salesforce.org product-specific documentation. In addition to the information in this table, review: - [Data Export for Sales Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_sales.htm&type=5) - [Data Export for Salesforce Platform](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=data_portability_platform.htm&type=5)
Common Constituent Request Actions to Consider Things to Consider
A student is moving out of state and won’t be attending your university anymore. He wants to take his information with him. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your student.

  • User
  • Contact
  • Cases
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events (Appointments)
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Accounts
  • Course Connections
  • Program Enrollments
  • Alerts

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
A student peer counselor is being assigned to a new position. She asked for the personal data you collected from her. Export Data

Personal data can exist in many different records and fields.

Consider exporting these records and fields for your student.

  • User
  • Contact
  • Cases
  • Tasks
  • Calendar events (Appointments)
  • Personal data in unindexed, free-text fields

You can find personal data in unindexed fields by exporting the data, and then searching for the information.

You may also consider exporting:

  • Leads
  • Notes
  • Addresses
  • Affiliations
  • Relationships
  • Accounts
  • Course Connections
  • Program Enrollments
  • Alerts

The export file should be in a structured, commonly used, machine-readable format that is transferable such as a .csv.

And if that person no longer wants you to keep the personal data you’ve collected, you can delete it.
# Student Success Hub Documentation Streamline your educational services and support students on their academic journey. Automate communications, delivery advising experiences, and help students achieve their goals. - **[Learn About Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create connected support processes. Configure standard Salesforce elements such as list views or page layouts to help your staff be more efficient. Your staff can then focus on building better relationships with your students and boosting student success. - **[Install Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete the prerequisites and install the package that best suits the needs of your educational institution. - **[Security for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides a flexible approach to security that uses standard Salesforce profiles, permission sets, and sharing settings. This approach lets you expose different data sets to different groups of users. For example, staff and admins typically have more permissions than students. - **[Manage Student Success Hub Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up data to represent faculty, staff, and students at your institution. - **[Student Success Hub Email](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up emails to streamline communications between staff and students. - **[Student Success Hub App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success Hub app consolidates the many data layers that you access every day. Whether tracking progress on a Success Plan, viewing and acting on Alerts, or documenting decisions and next steps in your Notes, Student Success Hub helps to keep you organized and on task. - **[Student Success Hub Support Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how Student Success Hub helps you support students. Success Teams focus on making students successful, while Support Pools focus on specific subjects. And queues help you manage appointments efficiently when students want to connect with your staff. - **[Student Success Hub Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Take advantage of flexible solutions for managing appointments, such as check-ins and queue management. And configure channels that cater to your institution’s needs, including walk-in and group appointments, and in-person and virtual advising sessions. Student Success Hub makes it easy for both staff and learners to manage their time and reach their goals. - **[Student Success Hub Portals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up an Experience Cloud site that students access to manage their tasks and connect with staff. Customize it to suit the needs of your institution and your students, such as by adding Lightning components or configuring email templates. - **[Student Success Hub Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Stay on top of your students’ goals and progress by creating, managing, and sharing notes related to student Cases. - **[Student Success Hub Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Alerts (SSA) allows support staff (like faculty members or teaching assistants) to raise concerns about students in Slack. The SSA Slack app is integrated with Student Success Hub (SSH). Support staff receive the alert in SSH so they can quickly intervene to help students get back on track. - **[Student Success Hub Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Pathways so that your students can easily access program information to ask questions and make informed decisions about degree or credential requirements at your institution. - **[Student Success Hub Chatbot](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_chatbot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success Hub chatbot uses outbound messages, Process Builder, Omni-Channel, Einstein Bots, and flows. Set up these components to help students keep up with their tasks. - **[Student Success Hub Reporting and Analytics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reporting_and_analytics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the sample reports included with Student Success Hub and customize them to fit your needs. Learn how the Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator helps your staff get actionable insights. - **[Student Success Hub Surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up surveys to understand your students’ experiences, distribute survey responses, and review and report on survey responses. - **[Student Success Hub and Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_program_management_module.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage programs for groups of students such as for after-school enrichment activities or tutoring support programs. - **[Student Success Hub Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review additional information for implementing Student Success Hub, such as custom configurations, troubleshooting tips, and version information. # Student Success Hub Email Set up emails to streamline communications between staff and students. - **[Verify Email Deliverability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_email_verify_deliverability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure you can send email to students in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up Email for Appointments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to configure when and how Student Success Hub sends appointment-related emails to support staff and students. - **[Manage Email Communications (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_email.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to send and track email using Student Success Hub. - **[Manage Email for Appointments (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_email_appointments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage emails related to appointments in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up Email Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_email_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use email templates to create branded emails with standardized content for emails sent from Student Success Hub. # Student Success Hub Entity Relationship Diagrams See how Student Success Hub, EDA, K-12 Architecture Kit, and Salesforce standard objects relate. Get familiar with the relationships between the objects and entities in Student Success Hub by reviewing the relationships in the diagrams. To learn more about the Student Success Hub data model, use Schema Builder, the visual inspection tool in Setup. When implementing Student Success Hub, consider the entire Education Data Architecture (EDA) and K-12 Architecture Kit data models because they represent the 360-degree view of a student. For more information, see [EDA Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_entity_relationship_diagram.htm) and [K-12 Architecture Kit Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_erd.htm). - **[Student Success Hub K-12 Entity Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub extends the Contact-centered data model used by K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Student Success Hub Higher Ed Entity Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_learn_data_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In higher ed orgs—or any org licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites—Student Success Hub uses EDA as the foundation of the same Contact-centered data model. ## Student Success Hub K-12 Entity Relationships In K-12 orgs, Student Success Hub extends the Contact-centered data model used by K-12 Architecture Kit. Every student Contact is related to a single Case that represents the entirety of a student's interactions, activities, and assigned support staff. A Case is a standard Salesforce object, customized to serve as the Student Record Case. This Student Record Case has a related success team, Tasks, Success Plans, Alerts, and more. Student Success Hub also uses Case Team Members, Case Team Roles, and standard Task and Event objects. ![Student Success Hub K-12 entity relationships](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_erd_k12.png) ## Student Success Hub Higher Ed Entity Relationships In higher ed orgs—or any org licensed and configured for student users and Experience Cloud sites—Student Success Hub uses EDA as the foundation of the same Contact-centered data model. In this model, student Contact is related to a single Case that represents the entirety of a student's interactions, activities, and assigned support staff. In higher ed orgs, a Student Record Case can be related to success teams, Tasks, Success Plans, Alerts, Appointments, Support Pools, and to the objects used by Pathways, the degree-planning tool. ![Student Success Hub data model that uses EDA](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_erd_hed.png) # Student Success Hub Feature Telemetry Understand the feature and usage metrics that Student Success Hub collects. Student Success Hub Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. This information provides us with valuable insight into how Student Success Hub is used by our customers. We use this information to understand the level of usage and adoption of various Student Success Hub features. **No personally identifiable information is collected through Student Success Hub Feature Telemetry**. We only collect information about what features an organization has enabled or not. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (True/False), Integer, and Date. Currently, Boolean and Date are collected. Student Success Hub Feature Telemetry collects this information: - Whether the current major release is activated in the org. - The type of org, Sandbox or Production, in which the release was activated. - The date on which the major release was activated in the org. # Student Success Hub Flexible Scheduling By using location-based availability, or flexible scheduling, your support staff can designate blocks of time to meet with students, and associate those availability blocks with one or more locations. - **[Set Up Location-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_loc.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get location-based availability (flex scheduling) up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up Topic-Based Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_topic.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get Topic-based availability up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up Group Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_availability_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get Group availability up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up Your Support Staff to Manage Their Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_availability_staff_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to allow support staff to manage their appointment availability in Student Success Hub. # Student Success Hub General Documentation Learn about additional Student Success Hub configurations, such as custom settings, permission sets, and Apex classes. Review installation information for your org, accessibility standards, and translation considerations. - **[Student Success Hub Custom Settings Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings. - **[Student Success Hub K-12 Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand what's included in the installation plans for K-12 Student Success Hub orgs. - **[Student Success Hub Higher Ed Installation Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand what's included in the installation plans for higher ed Student Success Hub orgs. - **[Student Success Hub Object Permissions by Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_object_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review a table that indicates the last time each object's permissions were affected by a Student Success Hub release. - **[Apex Class Descriptions for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_apex_class_descriptions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the Apex classes managed by Table-Driven Trigger Management in Student Success Hub. - **[Student Success Hub Accessibility Standards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_accessibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Student Success Hub strives for inclusive design. - **[Language Translations for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_translations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide your users a translated version of Student Success Hub, giving them the option to work in a different language. # Student Success Hub Higher Ed Installation Reference Understand what's included in the installation plans for higher ed Student Success Hub orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Higher Ed Installation Suggestions and Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Discover ways to help ensure a smooth installation of Student Success Hub for higher education. - **[Higher Ed Base Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The base plan installs the minimal core packages required to run Student Success Hub: Education Data Architecture, Student Success Hub, and Pathways. It also installs required unpackaged metadata. The base plan is required for all orgs. - **[Higher Ed Metadata Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Higher Ed metadata plans provide sample reports, dashboards, and permission sets that you can customize for your institution. Customizing with sample metadata saves time and reduces errors. ## Higher Ed Installation Suggestions and Best Practices Discover ways to help ensure a smooth installation of Student Success Hub for higher education. - We recommend that you execute all of the steps in the installer plans, including optional steps. Completing all steps reduces errors and ensures that you have all of the configurations in place for customizing your org. - Some recommended steps require the successful completion of earlier recommended steps. If you skip recommended steps and encounter errors, re-run the installer with all recommended steps selected. - We recommend that you install SSH into a new org that has no customizations. Installing SSH into an existing org can affect your custom metadata. - Do _not_ deploy optional metadata configurations directly to a live production environment. Instead, deploy to a new sandbox environment, customize configurations for your org, and then migrate to production. ## Higher Ed Base Plan The base plan installs the minimal core packages required to run Student Success Hub: Education Data Architecture, Student Success Hub, and Pathways. It also installs required unpackaged metadata. The base plan is required for all orgs. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note After you install SSH, there's some configuration that you need to do before you get started. To install the additional plans (such as Sample Support Reports and Dashboards or Sample Permission Sets), complete the following tasks. For details, see [Install Student Success Hub for Higher Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to install Student Success Hub for a higher ed org, including the core managed packages and required unmanaged metadata.").
Step Description Installation

EDA - Account Record Types

Deploys Account record types for EDA.

Required

EDA - Contact Key Affiliation Fields

Deploys Contact Key Affiliation fields for EDA.

Required

Install EDA

Updates or installs the Education Data Architecture managed package.

Required

EDA - Case Behavior Record Types

Deploys Case Behavior record types for EDA.

Required

EDA - Course Connection Record Types

Deploys Course Connection record types for EDA.

Required

EDA - Facility Display Name Formula Field

Deploys the Facility Display Name formula field for EDA.

Required
EDA - Health Check Validates EDA Settings related to Accounts, Affiliation mappings, Reciprocal Relationships, and Course Connections. Required

Install Pathways

Updates or installs the Pathways managed package.

Required

Student Success Hub - Prerequisite Record Types

Deploys required record types for the Event and Case objects.

Required

Install SSH

Installs the latest version of the Student Success Hub managed package.

Required

Student Success Hub - Unpackaged Metadata

Deploys unpackaged metadata, including record types, custom tabs, and metadata associated with Lightning pages.

Required

Student Success Hub - Custom Settings

Inserts Student Success Hub custom settings.

Optional, recommended
Student Success Hub - Lightning App Deploys the Student Success Hub Lightning app. Required
## Higher Ed Metadata Plans Higher Ed metadata plans provide sample reports, dashboards, and permission sets that you can customize for your institution. Customizing with sample metadata saves time and reduces errors. Install these plans by using the Installation Manager on the SSH Settings page in the Student Success Hub app. For instructions, see [Add Metadata to Your Student Success Hub Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_metadata.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Installation Manager in the Student Success Hub app to add unmanaged metadata to your org."). Sample Reports and Dashboards A sample dashboard and a set of underlying reports for Alerts. Sample Support Reports and Dashboards Sample reports and dashboards for staff and managers to assess student needs, trends, and team workloads. Sample Permission Sets Permission sets for higher ed support staff and student users. # Student Success Hub K-12 Installation Reference Understand what's included in the installation plans for K-12 Student Success Hub orgs. - **[K-12 Installation Suggestions and Best Practices](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Discover ways to help ensure a smooth installation of Student Success Hub for K-12. - **[K-12 Base Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The base plan installs the minimal, core packages required to run Student Success Hub: K-12 Architecture Kit, Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub. It also installs unpackaged metadata. - **[Full Configuration Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The full configuration plan deploys optional unmanaged metadata such as record types, page layouts, and profiles and permission sets. We recommend that all customers install the full configuration plan to help get Student Success Hub up and running. Install the full configuration plan after installing the base plan, and then customize the metadata for your school. - **[Sample Data Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The sample data plan deploys optional sample data that you can use to test or demo features. Sample data includes student and counselor personas (Users), district and school Accounts, and roles. Install the sample data plan after installing the base and full configuration plans. We recommend the sample data plan for partners. - **[K-12 Metadata Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_install_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Install these plans by using the Installation Manager on the SSH Settings page in the Student Success Hub app. ## K-12 Installation Suggestions and Best Practices Discover ways to help ensure a smooth installation of Student Success Hub for K-12. - We recommend that you execute all of the steps in the installer plans, including optional steps. Completing all steps reduces errors and ensures that you have all of the configurations in place for customizing your org. - Some recommended steps require the successful completion of earlier recommended steps. If you skip recommended steps and encounter errors, re-run the installer with all recommended steps selected. - We recommend that you install SSH into a new org that has no customizations. Installing SSH into an existing org can affect your custom metadata. - Do **_not_** deploy optional metadata configurations directly to a live production environment. Instead, deploy to a new sandbox environment, customize configurations for your org, and then migrate to production. ## K-12 Base Plan The base plan installs the minimal, core packages required to run Student Success Hub: K-12 Architecture Kit, Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub. It also installs unpackaged metadata.
Step Description Installation

EDA - Account Record Types

Deploys Account record types for EDA.

Required

EDA - Contact Key Affiliation Fields

Deploys Contact Key Affiliation fields for EDA.

Required

Install EDA

Updates or installs the Education Data Architecture managed package.

Required

EDA - Case Behavior Record Types

Deploys Case Behavior record types for EDA.

Required

EDA - Course Connection Record Types

Deploys Course Connection record types for EDA.

Required

EDA - Facility Display Name Formula Field

Deploys the Facility Display Name formula field for EDA.

Required
EDA - Health Check Validates EDA Settings related to Accounts, Affiliation mappings, Reciprocal Relationships, and Course Connections. Required

Student Success Hub - Prerequisite Record Types

Deploys required record types for the Event and Case objects.

Required

Install SSH

Installs the latest version of the Student Success Hub managed package.

Required

Student Success Hub - Unpackaged Metadata

Deploys unpackaged metadata, including record types, custom tabs, and metadata associated with Lightning pages.

Required

Student Success Hub - Custom Settings

Inserts Student Success Hub custom settings.

Optional, recommended

K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Application Type Picklist Values

Deploys picklist values for the Application Type field on the K-12 Architecture Kit Application object.

Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Behavior Response Type Picklist Values

Deploys picklist values for the Type field on the K-12 Architecture Kit Behavior Response object.

Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Case Category Type Picklist Values

Deploys picklist values for the K-12 Architecture Kit custom Category field on the Case object.

Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Case Location Type Picklist Values

Deploys picklist values for the K-12 Architecture Kit custom Location field on the Case object.

Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Behavior Involvement Role Picklist Values

Deploys picklist values for the Role field on the K-12 Architecture Kit Behavior Involvement object.

Required
K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Relationship Type Picklist Values Deploys picklist values for the Type field on the K-12 Architecture Kit Relationship object. Required
K-12 Architecture Kit - Add Contact Gender Picklist and RecordType Values Deploys picklist values for the K-12 Architecture Kit custom Gender field and custom record types for the Contact object. Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Prerequisite Record Types

Deploys required record types for the Account, Case, Contact, Behavior Involvement, and Behavior Response objects.

Required

Install K-12 Architecture Kit

Installs the latest version of the K-12 Architecture Kit managed package.

Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Metadata and Configuration

Deploys unpackaged metadata for K-12 Architecture Kit including record types, Reports and Dashboards, metadata associated with Lightning pages, object customizations, object translations, and translation settings.

Required

K-12 Architecture Kit - Course Connections

Enables Course Connections in K-12 Architecture Kit.

Required

Deploy K-12 Architecture Kit App Tile

Deploys the K-12 Architecture Kit Lightning app.

Required
## Full Configuration Plan The full configuration plan deploys optional unmanaged metadata such as record types, page layouts, and profiles and permission sets. We recommend that all customers install the full configuration plan to help get Student Success Hub up and running. Install the full configuration plan after installing the base plan, and then customize the metadata for your school.
Step Description Installation

Student Success Hub - Unpackaged Metadata

Deploys unpackaged K-12 metadata including Reports and Dashboards, Flows, page layouts, object customizations, the Attendance path on the Alert object, quick actions, user roles, and metadata associated with Lightning pages.

Optional, recommended

Student Success Hub - Sample Sharing Rules

Deploys sample sharing rules for the Alert, Success Plan, and Success Plan Template objects.

Optional, recommended

Student Success Hub - Lightning App and Support Staff Profile

Deploys the Student Success Hub Lightning app and the K-12 support staff profile.

Optional, recommended

Student Success Hub - Support Staff Permission Set

Deploys a permission set for the support staff profile.

Optional, recommended
## Sample Data Plan The sample data plan deploys optional sample data that you can use to test or demo features. Sample data includes student and counselor personas (Users), district and school Accounts, and roles. Install the sample data plan after installing the base and full configuration plans. We recommend the sample data plan for partners.
Step Description Installation

Student Success Hub - Sample Data

Deploys unpackaged K-12 sample data to the org, including Account data, Alerts, Cases, Contacts, Success Plan Templates, and Users.

Required
Student Success Hub - Sample Student Photo Uploads a photo for the Student Success Hub student persona. Optional, recommended

Student Success Hub - Sample Counselor Photo

Uploads a photo for the Student Success Hub counselor persona.

Optional, recommended
## K-12 Metadata Plans Install these plans by using the Installation Manager on the SSH Settings page in the Student Success Hub app. For instructions, see [Add Metadata to Your Student Success Hub Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_install_metadata.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use the Installation Manager in the Student Success Hub app to add unmanaged metadata to your org."). Sample Reports and Dashboards A sample dashboard and a set of underlying reports for Alerts. Sample Support Reports and Dashboards Sample reports and dashboards for staff and managers to assess student needs, trends, and team workloads. Sample Permission Set A permission set for K-12 support staff. # Student Success Hub Manage Availability Learn how to manage appointment availability in Student Success Hub. - **[Designate Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_availability_designate.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to set up staff availability. - **[Keep Your Calendar Up-to-Date with Your Availability (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_calendar_keep_updated.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to manage your Calendar in Student Success Hub. - **[Create Appointments (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_create.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to schedule support appointments with students in Student Success Hub. - **[Manage Appointments (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointment_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to edit appointment details, track no shows, and cancel appointments in Student Success Hub. - **[Schedule Appointments for Support Staff or Support Pools (Front-Desk Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_appointments_schedule_front_desk.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how front-desk staff can schedule appointments on behalf of support staff in Student Success Hub. # Student Success Hub Notes Stay on top of your students’ goals and progress by creating, managing, and sharing notes related to student Cases. - **[Create and Edit Notes (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to access, create, and format notes related to a student Case in Student Success Hub. - **[Manage Notes (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_notes_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to control the visibility of support notes, work with shared notes, and more in Student Success Hub. # Student Success Hub Object Permissions by Release Review a table that indicates the last time each object's permissions were affected by a Student Success Hub release. For instructions on how to update object permissions and to see the current minimum required permissions for each object, see these articles.

Object

Student Success Hub Version Introduced

Last Modified Version

Last Modified Version Production Release Date

Account (Salesforce)

1.3

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Alert

1.1

2.57

November 16, 2021

Appointment

2.10

2.50

March 9, 2021

Appointment Attendee

2.10

2.14

July 2, 2019

Appointment Location

2.38

2.38

July 28, 2020

Availability

2.36

2.50

March 9, 2021

Availability Location

2.38

2.38

July 28, 2020

Availability Topic

2.46

2.46

November 5, 2020

Case (Salesforce)

1.3

2.57

November 16, 2021

Contact (Salesforce)

1.3

2.30

March 24, 2020

Course (EDA)

2.17

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Course Bookmark

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Course Connection (EDA)

2.17

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Course Offering (EDA)

2.17

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Course Offering Schedule (EDA)

2.17

2.17

 August 13, 2019

Event (Salesforce)

1.3

2.20

September 24, 2019

Facility (EDA)

2.17

2.29

March 10, 2020

Personal Program Plan

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Personal Program Plan Course

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.27 (Pathways 1.5)

January 28, 2020

Personal Program Plan Term

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Plan Requirement (EDA)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Prediction

2.38

2.38

July 28, 2020

Program Enrollment (EDA)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.33 (Pathways 1.1)

May 5, 2020

Program Plan (EDA)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Queue Topic Setting

2.22

2.22

November 5, 2019

Queue Waiting Room Resource

2.23

2.29

March 10, 2020

Relationship (EDA)

1.3

1.3

January 9, 2018

Role Topic Setting

2.14

2.14

July 2, 2019

Success Plan

1.19

2.33

May 5, 2020

Success Plan Template

2.16

2.16

July 30, 2019

Success Plan Template Task

2.16

2.16

 July 30, 2019

Support Pool

2.3

2.29

March 10, 2020

Task (Salesforce)

1.3

2.4

December 11, 2018

Term (EDA)

1.3

2.21 (Pathways 1.1)

October 22, 2019

Topic

2.14

2.14

July 2, 2019

User Topic Setting

2.14

2.14

July 2, 2019
# Student Success Hub Objects and Fields Access documents with descriptions of the objects and fields used by Student Success Hub. For descriptions of the objects and fields used by Student Success Hub, see these Quip documents (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). - View [Student Success Hub Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/gtp0AQUWk63Z#UXZACAt8jMB). - View [K-12 Architecture Kit Objects and Fields.](https://salesforce.quip.com/5vJqAdU8K2VY#bGMACADdzf3) - View [EDA Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/ZwCuATuQHw18#eLFACA4Ijws). # Student Success Hub Pathways Set up Pathways so that your students can easily access program information to ask questions and make informed decisions about degree or credential requirements at your institution. - **[Meet Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_meet.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how Pathways can help students chart a course to graduation. - **[Set Up Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get Pathways up and running in your Student Success Hub higher ed org. - **[Create Your School's Data for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Course, Term, Program Plan, and Plan Requirements data for Pathways to use. - **[Learn How Program Plans Work with Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how Pathways uses EDA Program Plan and Plan Requirement records. - **[Set Up Pathways to View Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_view_program_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to view Program Plans and Program Enrollments in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up Pathways to Build Personal Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_pathways_build_personal_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to give support staff and students the ability to create Personal Program Plans in Student Success Hub. - **[Work with Pathways (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_pathways_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to view Program Plans and create Personal Program Plans to help your students chart a course to graduation. # Student Success Hub Permissions Student Success Hub provides permission sets to help you manage access to objects, fields, and the app. Permission sets are additive—they only grant access, they can’t take it away. You can assign multiple permission sets as needed, and it doesn't matter what profile a user has. Keep in mind that Users can have only one profile, but they can have multiple permission sets. - **[Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub. - **[Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub. - **[Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal. - **[Configure Support Staff Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give support staff the object and field permissions they need to use Pathways in Student Success Hub. - **[Configure Student Permissions for Pathways](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_pathways_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Pathways in the portal. # Student Success Hub Portals Set up an Experience Cloud site that students access to manage their tasks and connect with staff. Customize it to suit the needs of your institution and your students, such as by adding Lightning components or configuring email templates. - **[Set Up a Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get a student portal up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Student Portal Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_components.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the custom Lightning components you can use in a Student Success Hub student portal. - **[Build Out Your Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_build.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add components to new and existing pages in a Student Success Hub portal, and customize the site for overall usability. - **[Manage Your Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Customize site emails, add members, and preview, test, publish and promote your Student Success Hub portal. - **[Review How Students Experience the Portal (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand what students can do in a Student Success Hub portal. # Student Success Hub Product Information for GDPR Learn how Student Success Hub complies with General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR). - **[Product Information for GDPR](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_product_info_for_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Student Success Hub. ## Product Information for GDPR Details about European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance for Salesforce and Salesforce.org products including Student Success Hub. The European Union (E.U.) General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) was passed in 2016 with the intent of harmonizing European data protection laws into a single set of rules, while setting a new global gold standard for data protection and privacy. In effect on May 25, 2018, the GDPR is one of the most comprehensive and strictest regulations of its kind in the world. At its core, the GDPR boils down to three key pillars: - **Security**: Keep data safe and secure, and prevent unauthorized access or processing. - **Accountability**: Require companies to be accountable and transparent in how they collect, process, and protect personal data. - **Individual Rights**: Put control back into the hands of the individual to determine how their data is collected and used, such that companies are expected to process personal data on the individual’s terms. If you process personal data related to your organization’s establishment within the European Union (E.U.), from or about persons within the E.U. or outside of the E.U. but where E.U. law applies, you may be subject to the GDPR. We advise you to consult with legal professionals to determine whether your company falls under GDPR requirements. Salesforce has provided extensive information on its [website](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr) with guidance to help accelerate your GDPR compliance journey within Salesforce, including for the [Salesforce Platform](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/platform/), [Sales Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/sales/), [Service Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/service/), [Community Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/community/), [Marketing Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/marketing/), [Commerce Cloud](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/commerce/), and [Pardot](https://www.salesforce.com/gdpr/pardot/). Salesforce.org has similarly analyzed our products built on the Salesforce Platform against GDPR requirements, identified and deployed enhancements, and generated documentation to help our customers meet their compliance objectives. As such, the following documentation is intended to supplement the guidance provided by Salesforce with use cases, examples, tips, and other considerations specific to our applications, including the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S), Education Data Architecture (EDA), and Student Success Hub (SSH). As an important reminder, while the information provided here and from Salesforce is intended to help you navigate possible ways to meet your compliance needs, these are only guides and not determinative or guarantees of satisfying any legal rule. It is up to you to determine whether your use of the Salesforce Services or Salesforce.org applications is covered by, or compliant with, a law or regulation. We suggest you consult with a legal professional regarding your legal obligations. ### Data Deletion You may need to delete customer data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and considerations that may help you determine how best to approach deletion requirements as they apply to your organization. [Data Deletion for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data_deletion.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data deletion for Student Success Hub. Under various data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to delete personal data of a constituent, such as in response to a GDPR right of erasure request. The following are examples of common requests, considerations, and related procedures to help you determine an action plan for complying with data erasure situations."). ### Consent Management The GDPR, as well as other data protection and privacy regulations, imposes requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent, and other rights of subjects including objections to processing personal data. To help inform your approach to meeting these obligations, we provide examples of common constituent requests, tips, and other considerations. Don’t forget to also check out the new [Individual object](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=individuals_store_data_privacy.htm&type=0) from Salesforce for tracking privacy preferences within your organization for Contacts, Leads, Person Accounts, and custom objects. [Consent Management for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_consent_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about consent management for Student Success Hub. Various data protection and privacy laws, such as the GDPR, impose requirements around obtaining, maintaining, and withdrawing consent and otherwise honoring certain preferences of individuals in the processing of their personal information. We provide examples, considerations, and tips to help you determine ways to comply with constituent preferences around contact with, or from, your organizations."). ### Restriction of Processing You may need to restrict or limit access and processing of data in order to comply with data protection and privacy regulations, including the GDPR. We provide examples on ways to restrict forms of data processing so you can make decisions on how best to comply with such requirements as they apply to your organization. [Restrict Data Processing](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_restrict_data_processing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "To comply with certain data protection and privacy regulations, you may be required to restrict certain of your constituents' data within Salesforce, including for Student Success Hub."). ### Data Portability The GDPR grants individuals in certain situations the right to get an export of their data. We provide examples of common requests and things to consider when evaluating your approach to data exports. [Data Portability for Your Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_data_portability.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about data portability for Student Success Hub. When your constituents request it, prepare and pack up the data you've received from them so that you can work toward complying with GDPR data portability and export requirements. We offer the following examples of common requests and considerations to help you plan how best to honor constituent requests around data portability. These are only suggestions for your review, and not guaranteed steps for ensuring compliance with any legal rule."). # Student Success Hub Profiles Set up profiles for your staff, admins, and students, and grant the required access to Apex classes and relevant record types. - **[Set Up User Profiles for Staff and Admins](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_profiles.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure profiles for support staff and administrative Student Success Hub users. - **[Set Up the Student Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_profiles_student.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure a profile so that students can access Student Success Hub in a portal. - **[Assign Apex Class Access to the System Admin Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.assign_apex_class_access_for_the_system_admin_profile.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant system admins access to the required Apex classes. - **[Assign Apex Class Access to the K-12 Support Staff Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_apex_assign_staff_k12.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant K-12 support staff access to required Apex classes. - **[Assign Apex Class Access to the Higher Ed Support Staff Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_apex_assign_staff_hed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give higher ed support staff access to the required Apex classes to use Student Success Hub. - **[Assign Apex Class Access to the Student Profile](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_apex_student.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give students access to the Apex classes they need to use a Student Success Hub portal. - **[Assign Alert and Success Plan Record Types to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_assign_record_types.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give staff and admins access to record types needed to work with Alerts and Success Plans in Student Success Hub. - **[Assign Record Types for Appointments and Portals to Profiles](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_record_types_appts_portals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign record types to support staff and student profiles for using appointments and portals in Student Success Hub orgs. # Student Success Hub Queues Set up queue management, customize it for your students, and learn how to create virtual waiting rooms for students. - **[Set Up Queue Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get queue management up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Manage Queues (Support and Front-Desk Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to guide students through a queue while they wait to meet with a support staff member. - **[Set Up a Queue Waiting Room](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_waiting_rooms.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get a queue waiting room up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Manage a Queue Waiting Room (Support and Front-Desk Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_queue_wait_room_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to open a queue waiting room and use it to manage students who drop by for an appointment. - **[Set Up a Virtual Queued Support Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_queue_virtual.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to allow students to check in to a virtual queue waiting room and join a web meeting for a fully remote support appointment. # Student Success Hub Reference Review additional information for implementing Student Success Hub, such as custom configurations, troubleshooting tips, and version information. - **[Student Success Hub General Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_general.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about additional Student Success Hub configurations, such as custom settings, permission sets, and Apex classes. Review installation information for your org, accessibility standards, and translation considerations. - **[Troubleshooting Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_troubleshooting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to fix some common errors that can occur in Student Success Hub. - **[Set Up for Earlier Versions of Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_for_earlier_versions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the requirements for setting up earlier versions of Student Success Hub. - **[GDPR for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Student Success Hub. # Student Success Hub Release Notes Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.63) in Spring '23. - **[Critical Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.student_success_hub_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Beginning March 14, 2023, Student Success Hub customers will receive license entitlements to the features of the new Education Cloud product in their Salesforce org. You can't use Education Cloud alongside Student Success Hub in your org, but Education Cloud includes some capabilities that work with Student Success Hub, such as OmniStudio, Business Rules Engine, and more. Do not enable the new Education Cloud data model or Person Accounts in a production instance that has Student Success Hub implemented. This is not a supported configuration and might cause undesired behavior in your instance. Check with your Salesforce admin for more information. ## Critical Changes Beginning March 14, 2023, Student Success Hub customers will receive license entitlements to the features of the new Education Cloud product in their Salesforce org. You can't use Education Cloud alongside Student Success Hub in your org, but Education Cloud includes some capabilities that work with Student Success Hub, such as OmniStudio, Business Rules Engine, and more. Do not enable the new Education Cloud data model or Person Accounts in a production instance that has Student Success Hub implemented. This is not a supported configuration and might cause undesired behavior in your instance. Check with your Salesforce admin for more information. See [Education Cloud Release Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.education_cloud_release_notes_242.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Spring ‘23 brings you the next-generation CRM for education. Education Cloud draws on the power of Salesforce to connect insights across recruitment, admissions, and student success for a unified view of every learner's journey. A single source of truth creates a complete student profile, so your institution can offer personalized experiences that translate into successful lifetime learners—from prospective student to engaged alum. With Salesforce at the center of your institution's information technology solution, important tasks can be completed in less time, at scale, and in collaboration between departments. Create an Experience Cloud site to be your institution's learner portal where students start their higher education journey. From this site, prospective students can request information, schedule appointments, and apply to your institution. After a student submits their application, your admissions staff can verify, review, and decide on the application in the individual application record."). ## Changes Review the fixes and minor enhancements in Student Success Hub (version 2.63) in Spring '23. - The Scheduling Wizard has been updated to address alignment issues in the Recent tab. - We fixed a bug that caused group appointments to show the wrong appointment statuses for attendees. - We fixed a bug that caused a new appointment to be created when rescheduling an appointment in the student community. - We fixed a bug that prevented the Walk-In Appointment Event Type from being included in Walk-In Details. - We fixed a bug that caused the unexpected error message "Cannot add property index, object is not extensible" when creating a case from an alert. # Student Success Hub Reporting and Analytics Use the sample reports included with Student Success Hub and customize them to fit your needs. Learn how the Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator helps your staff get actionable insights. - **[Report on Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore sample Alert reports and a dashboard that come with Student Success Hub. - **[Support Staff Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_support_staff.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore sample support staff reports and a dashboard that come with Student Success Hub. - **[Support Manager Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_support_managers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Explore sample support manager reports and a dashboard that come with Student Success Hub. - **[Analyze Student Success Data with the Tableau Accelerator](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_reporting_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Visualize student and support staff data and make informed decisions by using the Student Success Hub Tableau Accelerator. # Student Success Hub Sharing Settings Review and edit the org-wide default sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses. In Setup, review the default organization-wide sharing settings for the objects that Student Success Hub uses. Edit them to extend or restrict access as needed. You can, of course, also use sharing rules to fine-tune access beyond the organization-wide default options. 1. From Setup, search for then select **Sharing Settings**. 2. Review an object's Organization-Wide Defaults. Edit them or create sharing rules according to the recommendations here, if appropriate. Default Internal Access applies to support staff using the Student Success Hub app. Default External Access applies to students using Student Success Hub in the portal. If your org doesn't include a portal, Default Internal Access doesn't apply to you. For details about enabling external organization-wide defaults, see [Setting the External Organization-Wide Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=security_owd_external_setting.htm) in Salesforce Help. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Objects that are used for appointments and portals require a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Account Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Account is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. - **[Alert Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In higher ed orgs, the organization-wide default sharing setting for Alert is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. Alerts may contain sensitive information, so as part of setting up Alerts, we strongly encourage you to restrict baseline access to Alert records. We recommend changing sharing settings to Private for both internal and external access. - **[Appointment and Appointment Attendee Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Appointment is Private for both internal and external access. Student Success Hub automatically shares appointments created by an Organizer with an Attendee. - **[Appointment Location Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Appointment Location is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows a support staff member's Appointment Locations to be used by other support staff and by students in the portal when scheduling appointments with that person. If you have concerns about privacy, change external access to Private and use a sharing rule to allow access only to students in a specific role or group. - **[Availability Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Availability is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows support staff and students in the portal to see a support staff member's availability, but not edit it. - **[Availability Location Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Availability Location is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows a support staff member's Availability Locations to be used by other support staff members and by students in the portal when scheduling appointments with that person. If you have concerns about privacy, change external access to Private and use a sharing rule to allow access only to students in a specific role or group. - **[Availability Topic Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Availability Topic is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows a support staff member's Availability Topic to be used by students in the portal when scheduling appointments with that person. If you have concerns about privacy, change external access to Private and use a sharing rule to allow access only to students in a specific role or group. - **[Calendar Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Calendar is Hide Details and Add Events. This setting allows support staff members to schedule appointments for each other by default, and allows them to add Events to each others' calendars. The User creating the Event can see whether the other User has time available for scheduling, but can't see any other details about Events in the other User's calendar. - **[Case Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Case is Public Read/Write/Transfer for internal access and Private for external access. - **[Contact Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For internal access, determine what makes sense for your institution. For example, specify Private or Public Read Only and use sharing rules to expand access as needed. - **[Course Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A course's parent is an Account. The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course is Controlled by Parent, for both internal and external access. You can't change this setting. - **[Course Bookmark Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course Bookmark is Private for both internal and external access. As part of setting up Pathways, we recommend setting internal access to Public Read/Write. Then, use sharing rules and sharing sets to extend access to students. For example, from the Digital Experiences Settings page, create a sharing set associated with your student profile that restricts records to those assigned to the Contact user. - **[Course Connection Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course Connection is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. Change internal access if it makes sense for your school. - **[Course Offering Schedule Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course Offering Schedule is Public Read Only for external access. Keep it that way if you're setting up Launchpad Agenda. Students need access to Course Offering Schedule and Facility to see their Courses in the Launchpad Agenda component in the portal. - **[Facility Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Facility is Private for external access. As part of setting up Launchpad Agenda, we recommend setting external access to Public Read Only. Students need access to Course Offering Schedule and Facility to see their Courses in the Launchpad Agenda component in the portal. - **[Personal Program Plan Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Personal Program Plan is Private for both internal and external access. As part of setting up Pathways, we recommend setting internal access to Public Read/Write. You can use sharing rules and sharing sets to extend access to students. For example, from the Digital Experiences Settings page, create a sharing set associated with your student profile that restricts records to those assigned to the Contact user. - **[Plan Requirement and Program Plan Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for both Plan Requirement and Program Plan is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. - **[Prediction Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Prediction is Private for both internal and external access. - **[Program Enrollment Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Program Enrollment is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. - **[Queue Waiting Room Resource Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Queue Waiting Room Resource is Public Read Only for internal access and Private for external access. Students don't need access to Queue Waiting Room Resource records. - **[Success Plan and Success Plan Template Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for both Success Plan and Success Plan Template is Private for internal and external access. As part of setting up Success Plans and Success Plan Templates, change defaults and/or create sharing rules to extend access as needed. For example, you may want to create a sharing rule to ensure that all support staff can view all Success Plans and Success Plan Templates. Student Success Hub installs sample sharing rules for both Success Plans and Success Plan Templates to get you started. - **[Support Pool Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Support Pool is Private for both internal and external access. - **[Topic Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for Topic is Public Read/write for internal access and Public Read Only for external access. We recommend that you change the default to Public Read Only for both internal and external access. If you want to let users create or edit Topics, or customize appointment lengths by Topic, use a sharing rule. Student Success Hub includes a sample to get you started. - **[User Sharing Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_sharing_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The organization-wide default sharing setting for User is Public Read Only for internal access. As part of setting up success teams, don't further restrict internal access. Otherwise, users won't be able to look up and collaborate with other success team members. ## Account Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Account is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. As part of setting up Launchpad Agenda or Pathways, we recommend that you keep external access Private and use sharing rules to expand access as needed. For example, you can set up a sharing rule to allow students to see Accounts related to a specific department or academic program. Student Success Hub installs a couple of samples in higher ed orgs to get you started. In K-12 orgs, consider setting internal access to Private and using sharing rules to expand access-based criteria that make sense for your school or district. ## Alert Sharing Settings In higher ed orgs, the organization-wide default sharing setting for Alert is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. Alerts may contain sensitive information, so as part of setting up Alerts, we strongly encourage you to restrict baseline access to Alert records. We recommend changing sharing settings to Private for both internal and external access. In K-12 orgs, the organization-wide default sharing setting for Alert is Public Read/Write for internal and external access. Because Alerts may contain sensitive information, we strongly encourage you to restrict access to Alert records as much as possible and set internal access to Private. By default, the creator of each Alert is the owner of the Alert. With organization-wide default sharing set to Private, the Alert owner has full edit access. Others who can access an Alert include: - The Alert creator, even if the Alert owner has changed. When the Alert is created, Student Success Hub creates a manual sharing record that gives the creator full edit access. - Users above the Alert owner and creator in the role hierarchy, if you've granted access using hierarchies. - Users to whom you've extended sharing, using sharing rules. This includes users above them in the role hierarchy, if you've granted access using hierarchies. Student Success Hub includes a sample sharing rule for Alerts in both K-12 and higher ed orgs. ## Appointment and Appointment Attendee Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Appointment is Private for both internal and external access. Student Success Hub automatically shares appointments created by an Organizer with an Attendee. For example, when a support staff member creates an appointment for a student, the appointment is shared with the student, which lets them see the appointment in the portal. This automation is controlled by a trigger with the class name `AttendeeAppointmentSharing_TDTM`. Only disable this trigger if you plan to create your own sharing rules. Sharing for Appointment Attendee is Controlled by Parent and can't be edited independently of sharing for Appointment. ## Appointment Location Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Appointment Location is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows a support staff member's Appointment Locations to be used by other support staff and by students in the portal when scheduling appointments with that person. If you have concerns about privacy, change external access to Private and use a sharing rule to allow access only to students in a specific role or group. ## Availability Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Availability is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows support staff and students in the portal to see a support staff member's availability, but not edit it. ## Availability Location Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Availability Location is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows a support staff member's Availability Locations to be used by other support staff members and by students in the portal when scheduling appointments with that person. If you have concerns about privacy, change external access to Private and use a sharing rule to allow access only to students in a specific role or group. ## Availability Topic Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Availability Topic is Public Read Only for both internal and external access. This setting allows a support staff member's Availability Topic to be used by students in the portal when scheduling appointments with that person. If you have concerns about privacy, change external access to Private and use a sharing rule to allow access only to students in a specific role or group. ## Calendar Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Calendar is Hide Details and Add Events. This setting allows support staff members to schedule appointments for each other by default, and allows them to add Events to each others' calendars. The User creating the Event can see whether the other User has time available for scheduling, but can't see any other details about Events in the other User's calendar. See [Set Up Appointment Scheduling for Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_appt_schedule_org.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up your org's appointment scheduling settings so that support staff can individually manage their own availability."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Support staff can choose to extend access to their Calendars by editing their own sharing settings. On the Calendar tab, they can click the action menu next to the My Events calendar and select **Share Calendar** to specify different levels of access. ## Case Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Case is Public Read/Write/Transfer for internal access and Private for external access. We recommend keeping Default External Access as Private. For Default Internal Access, do what makes sense for your institution. For example, you may set internal access to Private and create a sharing rule that shares Student Record Cases with support staff. Student Success Hub installs a sample sharing set in higher ed orgs that gives students in the portal access to their Cases and Course Connections. ## Contact Sharing Settings For internal access, determine what makes sense for your institution. For example, specify Private or Public Read Only and use sharing rules to expand access as needed. As part of setting up success teams in a portal, set the Default External Access to Private. This allows Contacts' names to appear in the Success Team component in the portal, but doesn't display those names as hyperlinks. (Typically, you don't want students to have access to Contact record detail pages, but you _do_ want to show that a Contact is on someone's success team.) Specifying any other configuration for Default External Access to Contact can cause problems: Either Contact names won't be visible in the Success Team component, or they'll be visible and link to error pages or to other Contact record pages. ## Course Sharing Settings A course's parent is an Account. The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course is Controlled by Parent, for both internal and external access. You can't change this setting. ## Course Bookmark Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course Bookmark is Private for both internal and external access. As part of setting up Pathways, we recommend setting internal access to Public Read/Write. Then, use sharing rules and sharing sets to extend access to students. For example, from the Digital Experiences Settings page, create a sharing set associated with your student profile that restricts records to those assigned to the Contact user. ## Course Connection Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course Connection is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. Change internal access if it makes sense for your school. Keep in mind, Course Connections may contain sensitive information. If external access is Public Read Only—or any other public level—all users in a portal can view all Course Connections, whether theirs or not. When setting up Launchpad Agenda in a portal, we recommend keeping external access Private and using sharing rules and sharing sets to extend access to students. For example, from the Digital Experiences Settings page, create a sharing set associated with your student profile that restricts records to those assigned to the Contact user. Student Success Hub installs a sample sharing set that you can use for this purpose. ## Course Offering Schedule Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Course Offering Schedule is Public Read Only for external access. Keep it that way if you're setting up Launchpad Agenda. Students need access to Course Offering Schedule and Facility to see their Courses in the Launchpad Agenda component in the portal. ## Facility Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Facility is Private for external access. As part of setting up Launchpad Agenda, we recommend setting external access to Public Read Only. Students need access to Course Offering Schedule and Facility to see their Courses in the Launchpad Agenda component in the portal. If you're using the Facility object for Queue Waiting Rooms, we recommend setting internal access to Public Read Only or Public Read/Write (the default). ## Personal Program Plan Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Personal Program Plan is Private for both internal and external access. As part of setting up Pathways, we recommend setting internal access to Public Read/Write. You can use sharing rules and sharing sets to extend access to students. For example, from the Digital Experiences Settings page, create a sharing set associated with your student profile that restricts records to those assigned to the Contact user. ## Plan Requirement and Program Plan Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for both Plan Requirement and Program Plan is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. As part of setting up Pathways, we recommend the following: - If you have Plan Requirement records that you don't want support staff to see, set internal access on both objects to Private. - If you want all of your Plan Requirement records to be shared with support staff, change internal access on both objects as Public Read Only. Then, if you only want certain staff members to edit Plan Requirements, create sharing rules to extend access to the internal users that you want to edit Plan Requirements. ## Prediction Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Prediction is Private for both internal and external access. To allow support staff who are using the Students Not Served component to see students who are on their case team or success team but whose records they don't own, you can either: - Change Default Internal Access to Public Read Only, or - (Recommended) Keep Default Internal Access as Private and create a sharing rule to give support staff access to records owned by other staff members on their case team or success team. ## Program Enrollment Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Program Enrollment is Public Read/Write for internal access and Private for external access. Change internal access if it makes sense for your school. Keep in mind that Program Enrollments may contain sensitive information, and be sure you adhere to FERPA regulations. Program Enrollment records may contain sensitive information, so if you're using Student Success Hub for other purposes, such as advancement, and you don't want to share these records with all internal users, you may want to set both external and internal access to Private. Then, extend access with sharing rules and sharing sets (making sure that you adhere to your institution's FERPA regulations). For example, from the Digital Experiences Settings page, create a sharing set associated with your student profile that restricts records to those that include the Contact's ID. ## Queue Waiting Room Resource Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Queue Waiting Room Resource is Public Read Only for internal access and Private for external access. Students don't need access to Queue Waiting Room Resource records. ## Success Plan and Success Plan Template Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for both Success Plan and Success Plan Template is Private for internal and external access. As part of setting up Success Plans and Success Plan Templates, change defaults and/or create sharing rules to extend access as needed. For example, you may want to create a sharing rule to ensure that all support staff can view all Success Plans and Success Plan Templates. Student Success Hub installs sample sharing rules for both Success Plans and Success Plan Templates to get you started. ## Support Pool Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Support Pool is Private for both internal and external access. As part of setting up Support Pools, you can either: - Change the Default External Access to Public Read Only, which makes all Support Pools visible to all students, or - (Recommended) Keep Default External Access as Private and create a sharing rule to give students Read access to one or more specific Support Pools. ## Topic Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for Topic is Public Read/write for internal access and Public Read Only for external access. We recommend that you change the default to Public Read Only for both internal and external access. If you want to let users create or edit Topics, or customize appointment lengths by Topic, use a sharing rule. Student Success Hub includes a sample to get you started. Sharing for the related Queue Topic Setting, Role Topic Setting, and User Topic Setting objects is Controlled by Parent and can't be edited independently of sharing for Topic. ## User Sharing Settings The organization-wide default sharing setting for User is Public Read Only for internal access. As part of setting up success teams, don't further restrict internal access. Otherwise, users won't be able to look up and collaborate with other success team members. Default external access is Private. Keep it that way. You don't want students in a portal to have wide open access to all Users in your org. However, in order for appointment scheduling to work in the portal, create a sharing rule to share Users who have the support staff role with students in the portal. Student Success Hub installs a sample in higher ed orgs to get you started. # Student Success Hub Summer '22 Release Notes Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issues that we fixed in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[New Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new metadata in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[Student Success Alerts Slack App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Alerts (SSA) allows support staff (like faculty members or teaching assistants) to raise concerns about students in Slack. The SSA Slack app is integrated with Student Success Hub. Support staff receive the alert in SSH so they can quickly intervene to help students get back on track. - **[Appointments Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for applicants management in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[Tasks Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the improvements for tasks in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[Fixes and Minor Enhancements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We improved the Flexible snapshot so that inaccessible field labels are not shown. ### Student Success Alerts Slack App Student Success Alerts (SSA) allows support staff (like faculty members or teaching assistants) to raise concerns about students in Slack. The SSA Slack app is integrated with Student Success Hub. Support staff receive the alert in SSH so they can quickly intervene to help students get back on track. Learn more about [Set Up Student Success Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ssh_set_up_student_success_alerts.htm) . ### Appointments Enhancements Learn about the improvements for applicants management in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - Support staff and admins can now sync their Student Success Hub appointments with their work calendars using Salesforce calendar sync tools. Learn more about calendar sync in [Set Up SSH to Sync with Work Calendars](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ssh_sync_ssh_appointments_with_work_calendars.htm). - We've enabled Reports on the Appointment object by default so that new customers don't have to manually enable the Appointments report. Existing customers can select **Allow Reporting** on the appointment to enable reports. - We improved the functioning of canceled and upcoming group appointments to ensure that the appointments statuses are properly updated. This improvement fixes a [known issue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22."). ### Tasks Enhancements Learn about the improvements for tasks in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - We enhanced the Flexible Snapshot to include success plan tasks in the task count_._ - We improved the Number of Overdue Tasks counter to use the community user's time zone instead of GMT. This keeps the number of overdue tasks in success plans from being inconsistent due to differing time zones. - We improved the tasks list so that inactive tasks are no longer placed on the tasks list when the success plan template is applied. This improvement fixes a [known issue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22."). ### Fixes and Minor Enhancements We improved the Flexible snapshot so that inaccessible field labels are not shown. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issues that we fixed in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - [Known Issue:](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000020uw3qae&title=sfdo-advisorlink-appointments-scheduled-from-portal-is-associated-with-closed-advisee-case-record-instead-of-open-one) Student Advisor Link - Appointments Scheduled from portal are associated with closed advisee case record instead of open ones. - [Known Issue:](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000012xzlqae&title=sfdo-studentsuccesshub-inactive-success-plan-tasks-are-visible-in-the-student-community) Student Success Hub - Inactive Success Plan Tasks are visible in the Student Community. - [Known Issue:](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v0000012gfyqa2&title=sfdo-advisorlink-topics-are-not-populating-in-the-new-scheduling-wizard-upon-selecting-the-anyone-on-this-team-option-on-the-assign-tab) Student Advisor Link - Topics are not populating in the new Scheduling Wizard upon selecting the Anyone on this team option on the Assign tab. ## New Metadata Learn about the new metadata in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - **[Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.rn_ssh_student_success_hub_release_notes_238.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the new field metadata in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. ### Fields Learn about the new field metadata in Student Success Hub (version 2.60) in Summer '22. - Custom Settings: Don't include automatic .ICS attachment for organizer # Student Success Hub Support Models Understand how Student Success Hub helps you support students. Success Teams focus on making students successful, while Support Pools focus on specific subjects. And queues help you manage appointments efficiently when students want to connect with your staff. - **[Get Started with Support Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn the many ways that Student Success Hub helps you support students. - **[Student Success Hub Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Success Teams and manage their members. - **[Student Success Hub Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Support Pools and add them to your student portal. - **[Student Success Hub Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_queuing.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up queue management, customize it for your students, and learn how to create virtual waiting rooms for students. # Student Success Hub Support Pools Set up Support Pools and add them to your student portal. - **[Set Up Support Pools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get Support Pools up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Set Up Support Pools for Your Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_support_pools_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Give students a way to schedule appointments with Support Pools from a record detail page in the portal. # Student Success Hub Surveys Set up surveys to understand your students’ experiences, distribute survey responses, and review and report on survey responses. - **[Collect Student Feedback Using Sentiment Surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_collect.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce Surveys to collect feedback from students on their support, program, and school experience at your institution. - **[Distribute a Student Survey](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_distribute.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Get your student sentiment survey into the world. - **[Review and Report on Student Surveys](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_surveys_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the insights gleaned from your student sentiment survey. # Student Success Hub Teams Set up Success Teams and manage their members. - **[Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Complete these tasks to get success teams up and running in your Student Success Hub org. - **[Manage Success Teams (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_success_team_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to add and remove people from a student's success team. # Student Success Hub Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Student Success Hub (version 2.62) in Winter '23. - **[Changes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.student_success_hub_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the enhancements in Student Success Hub (version 2.62) in Winter '23. - **[Issues Closed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.student_success_hub_release_notes_240.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the issue that we fixed in Student Success Hub (version 2.62) in Winter '23. ## Changes Learn about the enhancements in Student Success Hub (version 2.62) in Winter '23. ### Student Success Hub Fixes and Minor Enhancements - We fixed a bug where Shield Platform Encryption was preventing upgrades to SSH Production orgs when the Subject field on Case was encrypted. - To avoid unexpected errors when trying to Enable Custom Appointment Length in Appointment Manager Settings, we now show up to 500 topics. - You can now make comments required for topics in the Scheduling Wizard using a new checkbox in the SSH Hierarchy Settings. ### Student Success Alerts Slack App - Support Staff can now enter /student-alert-help into the Slack app and get an overview of Student Success Alerts and how to get support. - Because Student Success Alerts doesn't respond directly to user messages, we disabled input in the messages tab. ## Issues Closed Learn about the issue that we fixed in Student Success Hub (version 2.62) in Winter '23. - [Known Issue](https://trailblazer.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p4v000001t7iwqay&title=ssh-shield-platform-encryption-preventing-push-upgrades-to-ssh-production-orgs-when-subject-field-on-case-has-been-encrypted): Shield Platform Encryption preventing push upgrades to SSH Production orgs when "Subject" field on Case has been encrypted. # Student Success Visualizations and Metrics Student Success key performance indicators give advisors actionable insights about learners' academic progress, well-being, and engagement. Use these indicators to measure the effectiveness of advising programs and make data-driven decisions to support learners. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
Student Success visualizations and metrics provide valuable insights into a student's academic journey. ## Visualizations Academic Standing Visualization: Text showing a student's current academic standing Data source: Learner Profile Courses and Grades Visualization: Table showing key data points relating to course offering and academic performance Data sources: Course Offering, Course Offering Participant, Course Offering Participant Result, Learning Course, and Academic Term Credits per Term Visualization: Bar chart showing course credits per academic term Data sources: Learning Course and Academic Term GPA per Term Visualization: Line graph depicting the overall GPA for each academic term Data sources: Academic Term Enrollment and Academic Term ## Metrics Cumulative GPA Metric: Overall GPA of a student Data source: Learner Profile # Submit Application Learn what's included in the flow that automates submitting an application. The Submit Application flow automates how a grantseeker’s application is submitted to an organization. The flow retrieves the application record, makes sure the user is both a site user and owner of the application, and updates the application before it is submitted. Without this flow, the grantseeker’s application can’t be submitted to your organization for review.
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Get Records: Application Retrieves the application (Funding Request) record. If no application exists, an error occurs.
3. Decision: Is Submittable? Checks if the user is a site user and the owner of the application. If both are true, the user is directed to the next step.
4. Screen: Confirm User Wants to Submit Presents the user a message confirming they want to submit the application.
5. Get Records: Community User Contact Retrieves the user’s Contact information.
6. Assignment: Change Application Owner and Status

Updates fields on the application (Funding Request), including:

  • The Funding Request Owner updates with the site user’s Contact information

  • The Funding Request Status changes to Submitted
7. Update Records: Update Application Updates the application.
8. Email Alert Sends an email to the grantseeker that the application is submitted.
9. Screen: Submit Success Presents a confirmation message that the application is submitted.
![Overview of the Submit Application flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/grants_management/images/submit_application.jpg) # Submit Application The Submit Application flow automates how an application is submitted to an organization. The flow retrieves the application record, makes sure the user is both a site user and owner of the application, and updates the application before it is submitted. Without this flow, the application can’t be submitted to your organization for review. ![Overview of the Submit Application flow.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/submitapplicationflowofm.png)
Flow Element Action
1. Start  
2. Get Records: Application Retrieves the application (Funding Request) record. If no application exists, an error occurs.
3. Decision: Is Submittable? Checks if the user is a site user and the owner of the application. If both are true, the user is directed to the next step.
4. Screen: Confirm User Wants to Submit Presents the user a message confirming they want to submit the application.
5. Get Records: Community User Contact Retrieves the user’s Contact information.
6. Assignment: Change Application Owner and Status

Updates fields on the application (Funding Request), including:

  • The Funding Request Owner updates with the site user’s Contact information

  • The Funding Request Status changes to Submitted
7. Update Records: Update Application Updates the application.
8. Screen: Submit Success Presents a confirmation message that the application is submitted.
# Success for Your Nonprofit Learn how one nonprofit uses Einstein for Nonprofits to identify first-time or high-potential donors. To learn more about using Einstein for Nonprofits, we’d like to introduce you to Max Bristol, a fictitious admin at SF Scholars. SF Scholars is an imaginary nonprofit that promotes social and economic equity through educational enrichment and college readiness programs. While both Max and SF Scholars are fictional, we think you’ll relate to their challenges. Max manages a large database with many constituents and plans campaigns and marketing events. He wants to increase the amount of donations for students at the nonprofit, but finds it challenging to identify constituents who are ready to donate, or make large donations. Max sometimes feels overwhelmed with the task of planning effective campaigns. Max has heard about nonprofits using AI, including Einstein apps from Salesforce, to identify their most promising donors. But he doesn't know how to code or train a predictive analytics model to look for patterns in his organization's data. And there's no room in the SF Scholars budget to pay for that expertise. No problem! Einstein for Nonprofits has custom AI for admins like Max. He can choose to: - Reach out to constituents who expressed their passion for this cause by converting them to first-time donors. - Review insights at a glance to understand which supporters have repeatedly donated to the nonprofit and are committed to equity through education. - Opt to plan his next campaign around constituents who have given the most. By using Einstein for Nonprofits, Max now leverages predictive insights to ensure that campaigns and marketing dollars achieve fundraising targets. He just points. Clicks. And predicts! # Success Teams for Learners Success teams connect learners with the advisors and support staff who help them throughout their entire educational journey.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
A learner's success team represents the full network of support staff involved in their journey. A team can include academic advisors, financial aid counselors, career coaches, wellbeing specialists, and other campus staff. Because learner support often spans multiple domains, a learner can have multiple advising workspaces—such as academic, career, or wellbeing—each represented by its own case. Together, the people and teams connected across these workspaces form the learner's broader success team. Within each advising workspace, support can come from: - Assigned members—individual staff directly assigned to the learner's case. - Assigned teams—specialized groups assigned to support the learner for a specific advising need. - Support pools—teams of unassigned staff available to all learners for a particular advising category. ## What Learners Can Do On a learner portal configured with success team components, learners can: - View their assigned success teams and available support pools by advising category. - Search for advisors, review advisor details, and check drop-in availability. - Ask questions and connect with the right support staff. - Schedule appointments with advisors and support pools. Learn more about [Student Success components for your learner portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_success_components_for_your_learner_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use student success components from Education Cloud to enhance your institution’s learner portal with self-service capabilities for learners."). - **[How Success Teams Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_how_success_teams_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Salesforce case objects to model success teams in an educational institution. Define advising workspaces, staff roles, and team structures. - **[Support Pool Appointment Scheduling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_and_scheduling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Success team records determine which support pools are available for a given advising workspace and whether learners can book appointments directly. - **[Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure case team objects, create success team records, and assign support staff to learner advising cases. # Support Advancement in Education Cloud Use Education Cloud, Alumni Relations, Fundraising, and Data 360 to support the advancement, development, and fundraising operations in your institution.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
A strong advancement team is holistic in its approach to achieving its goals. The leadership often oversees an organization’s communications, brand management, and public affairs, as well as development and fundraising. Education Cloud includes the tools that you need to support your advancement efforts. - Alumni Relations—Use the Alumni Relations app to manage and engage with alumni from your educational institution in a single centralized location. Review, update, and enter information about alumni in the CRM, and use Experience Builder to create an alumni community. See [Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_alumni_relations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about the powerful tools that Education Cloud provides to engage with alumni from your institution."). - Alumni Engagement Metrics—Use Data 360 and Einstein generative AI to track alumni activities and provide informative translations of that data to give you a true sense of the level of engagement. See [Data 360 for Education: Alumni Engagement Metrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_alumni_engagement_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand the full picture of alumni and supporter engagement with the help of Einstein and Data 360 through Alumni Engagement Metrics. Tailor the configurable component to a wide variety of use cases and extend engagement visualization capabilities throughout your Education Cloud org."). - Fundraising—Set up and configure Fundraising in Education Cloud to support advancement in your institution. Configure Fundraising features, page layouts, and gift operation processes to help engage donors, manage gifts, and drive successful advancement programs. Advancement in higher education makes sure that the educational institutions meet the evolving needs of students, teachers, and society. Activities such as fundraising, alumni relations, public relations, strategic planning, and community engagement, all contribute to advancing the mission of the institution. # Support Learners with Care Plans Directors and advisors can now create personalized care plans with goals and tasks to help learners achieve their objectives. Use care plan templates to quickly create care plans with frequently used goals or tasks. Use the bulk operation to apply care plans to multiple record alerts at a time. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Objects and Components permission set can access this feature. **How**: In the Student Success app, on the advisor or director console, click **Care Plans** on the dropdown menu and follow the care plan creation workflow. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: Care Plans (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_support_learners_with_care_plans.htm) # Support Learners with Care Plans Use the Student Success app from Education Cloud to create personalized care plans that help learners achieve educational success.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Each individual is different and so are their learning needs. To ensure a rewarding learning experience, it is critical to understand learner requirements and support them. Institutions employ advisors to counsel learners on various aspects of their learning journey, and help them overcome challenges. With care plans in Education Cloud, advisors can conveniently track each case, and assign goals and tasks that guide learners to take steps towards achieving their objectives. As an advisor, you can create care plans customized to the needs of the learner. In addition to goals and tasks, you can add specific benefits to a care plan, and the learner is automatically enrolled in the program that contains the benefits. You can apply a care plan directly on a learner’s case, or on an alert created over the learner’s case. To learn more, see [Care Plans for Program and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_care_plans.htm&language=en_US). On the advisor console in the Student Success app, from the dropdown navigation menu, you can launch workflows to create care plans, care plan templates, goals, and benefits. ![Navigation menu on the advisor console](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/advisorconsole_studentsuccess_navmenu.png) The mobile-friendly learner portal enables learners to view details of their care plans, success teams, and schedule appointments with advisors on the go. - **[Create a Care Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_care_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a care plan to help the learner overcome challenges and achieve their learning objectives. - **[Create a Care Plan Template](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_care_plan_template.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a care plan template with frequently used benefits and goals that can be reused to create care plans. - **[Apply Care Plans to Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_apply_care_plans_to_alerts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Apply a care plan to record alerts to support the respective learners. # Support Manager Reports Explore sample support manager reports and a dashboard that come with Student Success Hub. Student Success Hub provides a sample dashboard and a set of underlying sample reports and custom report types that help support managers see trends around student needs and provide insight into their teams' workloads. Install the reports and dashboard from the Installation Manager and then customize them for your school or institution.

Type of Item

Name

Description

Included with

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Appointments

Identifies Appointment records.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Appointments with Attendees

Identifies Appointments with at least one related Appointment Attendees record.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Other Reports category)

Cases with Alerts for Support

Identifies Student Record Cases with at least one related support Alert.

Higher ed, K-12

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Cases with Case Teams

Identifies Cases with related Case Team Member records.

Higher ed, K-12

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Cases without Appointments

Identifies Cases without related Appointment records.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Accounts & Contacts category)

Contacts with Course Offerings with Course Connect

Identifies Contacts with related Course Offerings and related Course Connections.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Success Plans with Activities

Identifies Success Plans with at least one related Activities record.

Higher ed, K-12

Custom report type (in the Administrative Reports category)

Users with Managers

Identifies Users with at least one related User (Manager) record.

Higher ed, K-12

Dashboards folder

SSH Support Manager Dashboard

Contains the sample dashboard.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample dashboard

SSH Sample Support Manager Dashboard

See how effectively support staff reach students and how your team is performing across key indicators.

Higher ed, K-12

Reports folder

SSH Sample Support Manager Reports

Contains sample reports on appointments, Success Plans, Alerts, Cases, and Users.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Team's Upcoming Appointments

Details about Support Events in the next 7 days for support staff on my team, grouped by start date and location.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Team's Appointment Topics

Appointment topics for support staff on my team, grouped by calendar quarter.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Team's Open and Overdue Tasks

Sums of all open and overdue Tasks in open Success Plans for support staff on my team, grouped by Success Plan.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Overdue Tasks in My Team's Success Plans

The percentage of Tasks that are overdue in open Success Plans for support staff on my team, grouped by student.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Team's Student Caseload

The number of students assigned to each support staff member on my team.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Team's Open Alerts by Student

Details about open Alerts for support staff on my team, grouped by student.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Team's Alerts by Month

The total number of Alerts owned by support staff on my team by month, based on Created Date.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Team's Open Alerts by Type

The number of open Alerts for support staff on my team, grouped by record type.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Team's Logins

The date when support staff on my team last logged in to Student Success Hub.

Higher ed, K-12
# Support Pool Appointment Scheduling Success team records determine which support pools are available for a given advising workspace and whether learners can book appointments directly.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Success teams and Appointment Scheduler work together to connect learners with the right advisors. Success team records bridge your support pools (unassigned predefined case teams) to appointment availability by linking each team to a case record type. An advisor must meet these requirements to be available for scheduling: - Be a member of the associated predefined case team. - Be configured as a service resource. - Have a success team record that links a predefined case team to an advising case record type. ## Schedule Appointments on Self-Service Portal Set up success teams to determine which case teams are available for appointments. For learners to schedule appointments with a support pool through the self-service portal, turn on Allow Self-Scheduling on the success team record. When self-scheduling is turned off, staff can still schedule appointments with that support pool on the learner's behalf. This setup makes sure that appointment availability aligns with each institution's advising model while preserving flexibility across support teams. See Also: - [Success Teams for Learners](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_success_teams_for_learners.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Success teams connect learners with the advisors and support staff who help them throughout their entire educational journey.") - [How Success Teams Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_how_success_teams_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Salesforce case objects to model success teams in an educational institution. Define advising workspaces, staff roles, and team structures.") - [Set Up Success Teams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_success_teams.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure case team objects, create success team records, and assign support staff to learner advising cases.") # Support Staff Reports Explore sample support staff reports and a dashboard that come with Student Success Hub. Student Success Hub provides a sample dashboard and a set of underlying sample reports and custom report types that help support staff see trends around student needs and offer insight into their workloads. Install the reports and dashboard from the Installation Manager and then customize them for your school or institution.

Type of Item

Name

Description

Included with

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Appointments

Identifies Appointment records.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Appointments with Attendees

Identifies Appointments with at least one related Appointment Attendees record.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Other Reports category)

Cases with Alerts for Support

Identifies Student Record Cases with at least one related support Alert.

Higher ed, K-12

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Cases with Case Teams

Identifies Cases with related Case Team Member records.

Higher ed, K-12

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Cases without Appointments

Identifies Cases without related Appointment records.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Accounts & Contacts category)

Contacts with Course Offerings with Course Connect

Identifies Contacts with related Course Offerings and related Course Connections.

Higher ed

Custom report type (in the Activities category)

Success Plans with Activities

Identifies Success Plans with at least one related Activities record.

Higher ed, K-12

Dashboards folder

SSH Support Staff Dashboard

Contains the sample dashboard.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample dashboard

SSH Sample Support Staff Dashboard

See how effectively support staff reach students and how students are performing across key indicators.

Higher ed, K-12

Reports folder

SSH Sample Support Staff Reports

Contains sample reports on appointments, Success Plans, Alerts, Cases, courses, and attendance.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Appointments over Time

The number of appointments I've had with students during a date range.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Appointments Averaged over Time

The number of appointments I've had with students, averaged by week.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Upcoming Appointments

The number of appointments scheduled with me in the next 7 days.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Appointment Totals Across Date Ranges

The number of appointments I've had with students this year compared to last year.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Appointment Topics

The topics I've discussed with students during appointments.

Higher ed

Sample report

Students Who Missed Appointments

Students who were no-shows or who cancelled appointments with members of my team.

Higher ed

Sample report

Students with No Current Appointments

Students supported by my team who don't have any Appointment records in the current calendar quarter.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Upcoming Appointment Topics

The topics I will discuss with students during appointments in the next 7 days.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Team's Upcoming Appointments

Appointments scheduled between students and my team in the next 7 days.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Open and Overdue Success Plan Tasks

Sums of all open and overdue Tasks in open Success Plans in my caseload, grouped by Success Plan.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Overdue Tasks in My Success Plans

Overdue Tasks in all open Success Plans in my caseload, grouped by student.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Open vs. Overdue Success Plan Tasks

Sums of all, open, and overdue Tasks in open Success Plans, grouped by Success Plan owner.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Average Time to Close My Alerts

The average number of days it takes for Alerts that I own to close, by record type.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Alerts over Time

The total number of Alerts that I own by month, based on Created Date.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Students with Open Alerts

Students supported by my team who have open Alerts.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Open Alerts Older Than 14 Days

The number of open Alerts that were created more than 14 days ago, grouped by record type.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

Average Time to Close Queue Cases

The average number of days it takes for my team's Support Queue Cases to close, by Case owner.

Higher ed

Sample report

My Students' Open Cases by Type

The statuses of open Cases related to my students, grouped by Case record type.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Students with Open Cases

The details of open Cases for students in my caseload, grouped by student.

Higher ed, K-12

Sample report

My Students Not Enrolled Next Term

Students in my caseload who don't have any Course Connection records for the next term.

Higher ed

Sample report

Students with Excessive Absences

Students who have more than 3 absences in the last 7 days.

Higher ed, K-12
# Support Students with Personalized Insights To turn data into personalized support for individual students, add metrics and visualizations to a student's contact record page. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
User Permissions Needed
To embed Tableau Next components in a record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Tableau Unmetered Admin or Tableau Next Admin
1. [Embed visualizations in each student's contact record page.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_embed_viz.htm&type=5&language=en_US) 2. [Embed the metrics in each student's contact record page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_embed_metric.htm&type=5&language=en_US). Select the semantic data model that's in use in your workspace. 3. To receive personalized insights for each student, [filter these values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=analytics.tua_embed_filter_values.htm&type=5&language=en_US) for embedded visualizations and metrics. | Visualization | Field | Record Value | | --- | --- | --- | | Academic Standing | Contact on Learner Profile | Contact Id | | Courses and Grades | Participant Contact on Course Offering Participant | Contact Id | | Credits per Term | Participant Contact on Course Offering Participant | Contact Id | | GPA per Term | Learner Contact on Academic Term Enrollment | Contact Id | | Metric | Dimension | Record Value | | --- | --- | --- | | Cumulative GPA | Contact on Learner Profile | Contact Id | # Support Your Donors by Responding Quickly to Requests Support your donors with fast action on their requests in the Donor Support console. Review the timeline for a quick view of the requests, such as for changing commitment schedules and pausing or resuming a commitment. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: These features apply to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Fundraising is enabled. **Who**: Users with the FundraisingAccess permission set and the Fundraising\_User or Fundraising\_Admin permission set group can access the Donor Support console. # Table-Driven Trigger Management Learn about what Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) is and how you might want to use it to customize your NPSP org. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) is a tool to manage your code in Salesforce and control how Apex behaves. Apex is the programming language used to build complex automation in Salesforce, and TDTM is a framework for managing that code. - **[What Is TDTM?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Table-driven trigger management (TDTM) is a tool for automation—and automation is one of the big benefits of using Salesforce. - **[Disable Specific Pieces of Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Disable code related to your automated processes to control whether and when certain pieces of code operate. - **[Create Your Own Custom Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're developing your own custom Apex code or integrating an external system with Salesforce, you should familiarize yourself with the TDTM architecture. Salesforce and many expert developers recommend that you have only on one trigger for each object (one for Contacts, one for Accounts, and so on). - **[Control the Order in Which Your Code Executes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your organization has been using Salesforce for a while, it's likely that you'll identify where more automation could save time. While tools like Process Builder and workflow can do some of these things, custom Apex code is sometimes more appropriate. As you develop custom code, it becomes really important to manage the order in which your code fires, which is why TDTM is so helpful. - **[Summing Up](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tdtm_advanced_configuration_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** TDTM allows organizations to grow and more easily add complexity to their databases while still maintaining control over the scope and sequence of process automation. ## Introduction Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) is a tool to manage your code in Salesforce and control how Apex behaves. Apex is the programming language used to build complex automation in Salesforce, and TDTM is a framework for managing that code. We're here to demystify TDTM—what it is and why it's such a powerful tool for nonprofits and educational institutions using applications like Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and Education Data Architecture (EDA) from Salesforce.org. ## What Is TDTM? Table-driven trigger management (TDTM) is a tool for automation—and automation is one of the big benefits of using Salesforce. For example, when a Contact record in Salesforce is added, updated, or deleted, we often want other things to happen automatically—update an address or a value on an Account. You may be familiar with using Process Builder or workflows in Salesforce to automate business processes. Some of the more complex processes are built with another automation tool called Apex triggers. Apex triggers are simply another way of handling automation, using code rather than a feature like workflow. NPSP relies heavily on triggers. For example, a trigger on the Contact object can automatically update address data when the Contact is updated. Other triggers are used to roll up or summarize data from related records to a parent record. Triggers come standard with NPSP, and TDTM is the framework for managing them. In practice, TDTM has several uses. TDTM lets you: - Disable specific pieces of code - Build your own custom code that works in conjunction with NPSP - Control the order in which the code executes An important part of using TDTM is understanding the Trigger Handler custom object. Fields on the object manage the behavior of the triggers built within the TDTM framework. With just a few clicks, you can change the way your code behaves. For more information, read [Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.NPSP_Manage_Trigger_Handlers.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Be aware that Trigger Handler records **are not** copied to Developer, Developer Pro, or Partial sandboxes when you create one. ## Disable Specific Pieces of Code Disable code related to your automated processes to control whether and when certain pieces of code operate. You might need to disable code when you: - Import large sets of data (many thousands of records at once) - Integrate with external systems - Troubleshoot code errors For more about disabling code with TDTM, see [Disable Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.NPSP_Disable_Trigger_Handlers.htm&language=en_US). ## Create Your Own Custom Code If you're developing your own custom Apex code or integrating an external system with Salesforce, you should familiarize yourself with the TDTM architecture. Salesforce and many expert developers recommend that you have only on one trigger for each object (one for Contacts, one for Accounts, and so on). It's easy to mistakenly create new triggers and end up with many triggers for the same object, which is absolutely not a Salesforce best practice. When you learn how to extend TDTM functionality into your code, you don't need to create new triggers—you just use the trigger that already exists in TDTM to pass environment data to your custom Apex classes. By using the existing TDTM infrastructure instead of creating your own, you get the most reliable and efficient behavior as a result. For a technical deep dive into TDTM design, see [Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.NPSP_Deploy_Apex_TDTM.htm&language=en_US). ## Control the Order in Which Your Code Executes If your organization has been using Salesforce for a while, it's likely that you'll identify where more automation could save time. While tools like Process Builder and workflow can do some of these things, custom Apex code is sometimes more appropriate. As you develop custom code, it becomes really important to manage the order in which your code fires, which is why TDTM is so helpful. TDTM ensures that things happen in the order you expect them to happen. For example, you wouldn't put on your shoes without putting your socks on first, right? TDTM lets you tell Salesforce to ALWAYS put the socks on first, then the shoes, and so on. Otherwise, things happen in an indeterminate order, which is really just a fancy way of saying that potentially you could end up wearing your socks over your shoes (or have one piece of code firing before another, and not in the order you want). Apex triggers do not come with a way to control the order of operation but TDTM fills that gap. ## Summing Up TDTM allows organizations to grow and more easily add complexity to their databases while still maintaining control over the scope and sequence of process automation. If the examples we've covered don't sound like the sorts of things your organization is doing now, or you only partially followed what we're talking about, then chances are it's OK for you to leave the default TDTM behavior as is. However, organizations do change over time and you may find that you need to engage with TDTM down the road. Just put a pin in it for now and remember its intended use for the future. # Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) Overview Understand how EDA uses TDTM to manage your code in Salesforce and control how Apex behaves. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) is a tool to manage your code in Salesforce and control how Apex behaves. Apex is the programming language used to build complex automation in Salesforce, and TDTM is a framework for managing that code. - **[What Is TDTM?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Table-driven trigger management (TDTM) is a tool for automation—and automation is one of the big benefits of using Salesforce. - **[Disable Specific Pieces of Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Disable code related to your automated processes to control whether and when certain pieces of code operate. - **[Create Your Own Custom Code](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're developing your own custom Apex code or integrating an external system with Salesforce, you should familiarize yourself with the TDTM architecture. Salesforce and many expert developers recommend that you have only on one trigger for each object (one for Contacts, one for Accounts, and so on). - **[Control the Order in Which Your Code Executes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your organization has been using Salesforce for a while, it's likely that you'll identify where more automation could save time. While tools like Process Builder and workflow can do some of these things, custom Apex code is sometimes more appropriate. As you develop custom code, it becomes really important to manage the order in which your code fires, which is why TDTM is so helpful. - **[Summing Up](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_tdtm_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** TDTM allows organizations to grow and more easily add complexity to their databases while still maintaining control over the scope and sequence of process automation. ## Introduction Table-Driven Trigger Management (TDTM) is a tool to manage your code in Salesforce and control how Apex behaves. Apex is the programming language used to build complex automation in Salesforce, and TDTM is a framework for managing that code. We're here to demystify TDTM—what it is and why it's such a powerful tool for nonprofits and educational institutions using applications like Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) and Education Data Architecture (EDA) from Salesforce.org. ## What Is TDTM? Table-driven trigger management (TDTM) is a tool for automation—and automation is one of the big benefits of using Salesforce. For example, when a Contact record in Salesforce is added, updated, or deleted, we often want other things to happen automatically—update an address or a value on an Account. You may be familiar with using Process Builder or workflows in Salesforce to automate business processes. Some of the more complex processes are built with another automation tool called Apex triggers. Apex triggers are simply another way of handling automation, using code rather than a feature like workflow. Education Data Architecture relies heavily on triggers. For example, a trigger on the Contact object can automatically update address data when the Contact is updated. Other triggers are used to roll up or summarize data from related records to a parent record. Triggers come standard with Education Data Architecture, and TDTM is the framework for managing them. In practice, TDTM has several uses. TDTM lets you: - Disable specific pieces of code - Build your own custom code that works in conjunction with Education Data Architecture - Control the order in which the code executes An important part of using TDTM is understanding the Trigger Handler custom object. Fields on the object manage the behavior of the triggers built within the TDTM framework. With just a few clicks, you can change the way your code behaves. For more information, read [Manage Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.EDA_Manage_Trigger_Handlers.htm&language=en_US). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Be aware that Trigger Handler records **are not** copied to Developer, Developer Pro, or Partial sandboxes when you create one. ## Disable Specific Pieces of Code Disable code related to your automated processes to control whether and when certain pieces of code operate. You might need to disable code when you: - Import large sets of data (many thousands of records at once) - Integrate with external systems - Troubleshoot code errors For more about disabling code with TDTM, see [Disable Trigger Handlers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.EDA_Disable_Trigger_Handlers.htm&language=en_US). ## Create Your Own Custom Code If you're developing your own custom Apex code or integrating an external system with Salesforce, you should familiarize yourself with the TDTM architecture. Salesforce and many expert developers recommend that you have only on one trigger for each object (one for Contacts, one for Accounts, and so on). It's easy to mistakenly create new triggers and end up with many triggers for the same object, which is absolutely not a Salesforce best practice. When you learn how to extend TDTM functionality into your code, you don't need to create new triggers—you just use the trigger that already exists in TDTM to pass environment data to your custom Apex classes. By using the existing TDTM infrastructure instead of creating your own, you get the most reliable and efficient behavior as a result. For a technical deep dive into TDTM design, see [Deploy a Custom Apex Class in the TDTM Framework](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.EDA_Deploy_Apex_TDTM.htm&language=en_US). ## Control the Order in Which Your Code Executes If your organization has been using Salesforce for a while, it's likely that you'll identify where more automation could save time. While tools like Process Builder and workflow can do some of these things, custom Apex code is sometimes more appropriate. As you develop custom code, it becomes really important to manage the order in which your code fires, which is why TDTM is so helpful. TDTM ensures that things happen in the order you expect them to happen. For example, you wouldn't put on your shoes without putting your socks on first, right? TDTM lets you tell Salesforce to ALWAYS put the socks on first, then the shoes, and so on. Otherwise, things happen in an indeterminate order, which is really just a fancy way of saying that potentially you could end up wearing your socks over your shoes (or have one piece of code firing before another, and not in the order you want). Apex triggers do not come with a way to control the order of operation but TDTM fills that gap. ## Summing Up TDTM allows organizations to grow and more easily add complexity to their databases while still maintaining control over the scope and sequence of process automation. If the examples we've covered don't sound like the sorts of things your organization is doing now, or you only partially followed what we're talking about, then chances are it's OK for you to leave the default TDTM behavior as is. However, organizations do change over time and you may find that you need to engage with TDTM down the road. Just put a pin in it for now and remember its intended use for the future. # Tableau for Advanced Reporting Use Tableau Dashboard Accelerators with Salesforce to turn your client and program data into actionable insights that can help you improve your program performance and increase your organization's impact. For example, get insights about things like how well your clients are being served, if your services are leading to successful program completion, and if your organization is on track for meeting service delivery goals. For details, see [Tableau Dashboard Accelerators](https://www.tableau.com/products/dashboard-starters-downloads). If you already use Tableau, simply connect Tableau to your Salesforce org to start with ready-made dashboards, then customize the dashboards to fit your data needs. If you're new to Tableau, purchase at least one Creator license to get started, or check to see if you're eligible for a [Tableau license donation](https://www.tableau.com/foundation/license-donations). You can also [start a free 14-day trial](https://www.tableau.com/products/desktop/download). - **[Connect Tableau to Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect your Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop account to Salesforce. - **[Best Practice for Tableau Dashboard Accelerators](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To maximize the benefits of your Tableau Dashboard Accelerators, follow the best practices whenever possible. - **[Explore the Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Gain valuable insights into your client and program data by using the CRM Analytics dashboards. ## Connect Tableau to Salesforce Connect your Tableau Online or Tableau Desktop account to Salesforce. ### Use Tableau Online 1. Go to [Tableau Online](https://sso.online.tableau.com/public/idp/sso) and log in. 2. On the home page, click **Dashboard Starters**. If you didn't land on the home page, click **Home**, then click **See All**. 3. On the Starters page, set your Data Sources filter to **Salesforce**. 4. Click the Dashboard Starter that you want to use. 5. Click **Sign in to Salesforce** and log in. ### Use Tableau Desktop 1. Download the [Salesforce Nonprofit Program Management](https://exchange.tableau.com/products/415?version=2021.2) accelerator. 2. From the Tableau Desktop home page, click the workbook you want to open. 3. In the Data menu, select each data source that you want to use, then select **Edit Data Source** **.** 4. Log in and select **Allow** to give access to your data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note If worksheets are blank, navigate to the worksheet, then replace reference fields by right-clicking on the fields with red exclamation marks as necessary. ## Best Practice for Tableau Dashboard Accelerators To maximize the benefits of your Tableau Dashboard Accelerators, follow the best practices whenever possible. - Keep your dashboards fresh with the most current data in your org. See [Keep Data Fresh](https://help.tableau.com/current/online/en-us/to_keep_data_fresh.htm). - Customize your dashboards with formatting to enhance analysis and presentation. See [Format Your Work](https://help.tableau.com/current/pro/desktop/en-us/formatting.htm). You can also remove filters that aren't relevant and add your own. - Export Tableau data to various file types for use in presentations or other communications. - Get help by logging a [support case with Tableau](https://www.tableau.com/support/case). ## Explore the Dashboards Gain valuable insights into your client and program data by using the CRM Analytics dashboards. - **[Intake](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See if your clients are being served in a timely manner using the Intake dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Intake tab. - **[Client Enrollment and Participation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See an overview of your clients and the programs they're enrolled in using the Client Enrollment and Participation Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Clients tab. - **[Service Delivery Trends](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See a high-level view of Service Delivery trends and learn if you're on track to meet Service Delivery goals using the Service Delivery Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Service Delivery tab. - **[Client Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how clients are performing based on Services used and Assessments using the Client Assessments dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Assessments tab. - **[Staff Capacity & Client Service](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how staff are performing and managing clients using the Staff Capacity & Client Service dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Staff Capacity tab. - **[Additional Resources](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.tableau_advanced_reporting.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out these resources to learn more about Tableau. ### Intake See if your clients are being served in a timely manner using the Intake dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Intake tab. ![Intake dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/intake_callouts.png) 1. Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, Owner, or a date range (Start Date and End Date). 2. Set Goals: Select a number of average days to close an Inbound Referral. This will change the line of the Average Days to Close Inbound Referral chart. 3. Charts: - Inbound Referrals: Number of Inbound Referral Cases created by month. - New Inbound Referrals: Number of Inbound Referral Cases with a status of New, by month. - Closed Inbound Referrals: Number of Inbound Referrals with a status of Closed, by month. - Average Days to Close Inbound Referrals: The difference between the Case Created Date and Case Closed Date. Compare this to the goal that you set. - Number of Open Intakes: Number of Intake records where the stage is Not Started, In Progress, Awaiting Client Input, or In Review, by month the Intake was created. - Waitlisted Engagements: The number of Program Engagements with a status of Waitlisted, by month. 4. Selections: Show by Program Name, Program Issue Area, or Owner. Sort by New Inbound Referrals, Closed Inbound Referrals, Days to Close Inbound Referrals, Open Intakes, or Waitlisted. Sort by keeps your Show by selections, but further determines the order in which rows appear. 5. Same charts shown as #3, shown with further detail based on your Show by selections. ### Client Enrollment and Participation See an overview of your clients and the programs they're enrolled in using the Client Enrollment and Participation Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Clients tab. ![Client Enrollment and Participation Trends dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/client_enrollment_callouts.png) 1. Filter: Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, or a date range (Engagement Start Date and Engagement End Date). 2. Charts: - Number of Clients: How many unique participants had Program Engagements in any status. - Average Programs per Client: How many Program Engagements each Contact has. - Average Days in Program: Time between the Program Engagement's start date and either end date or today's date, if there isn't an end date. - Clients by Engagement Stage: Shows current Program Engagements. - Clients by Location: Larger circles represent more clients. The map can be changed from US to another geographic location. - Clients by Age: Grouped into default age buckets of 5 years, but can be customized. 3. Client Program Mix: Programs used simultaneously. For example, 114 clients are enrolled in intensive case management; 34 of those 114 are also enrolled in job training. ### Service Delivery Trends See a high-level view of Service Delivery trends and learn if you're on track to meet Service Delivery goals using the Service Delivery Trends dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Service Delivery tab. ![Service Delivery Trends dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/service_delivery_callouts.png) 1. Service Delivery Count: Shows all Programs and Services to show those used most often. This chart is not affected by the filters in #2. 2. Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, or Service Name. Program Issue Area and Program Name narrow down options on the Service Name filter, and you must select a Service Name to use the charts. The Unit of Measurement associated with the selected Service Name dictates chart titles. This dashboard doesn't have a date range filter; it always shows year-over-year data. 3. Charts: - \[Unit of Measurement\] Delivered (for example, Kits Delivered): Choose to compare this year's data to the previous year or goal. If you choose the goal, enter the goal in Service Yearly Goal. - Clients Receiving \[Unit of Measurement\] (for example, Clients Receiving Kits): Choose to compare this year's data to the previous year or goal. If you choose the goal, enter the goal in Clients Yearly Goal. - Average \[Unit of Measurement\] per Client (for example, Average Kits per Client): Service delivered divided by the clients receiving the Service. 4. By Service Provider: Shows the same data as shown in #3, broken down by Service Provider. 5. \[Unit of Measurement\] by State (for example, Kits by State): Larger circles represent more units. The map can be changed to another location or level or granularity. ### Client Assessments See how clients are performing based on Services used and Assessments using the Client Assessments dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Assessments tab. ![Client Assessments dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/client_assessments_callouts.png) 1. Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, or a date range (Assessment Completed Start Date and Assessment Completed To Date). To add additional filters such as Record Type to compare types of Assessments, see [Adding Filters to Dashboards](https://kb.tableau.com/articles/howto/adding-filters-to-dashboards) in the Tableau Knowledge Base . 2. Set Goal: Set a Total Score Goal. 3. Average Total Score: Compares the total score field of the last Assessment for each client to the set goal. 4. Average % Change in Score: The change in Assessment scores between the first Assessment and the last, shown as a percentage. 5. Demographic Breakdown: Average Total Score by Age Group (grouped by age in 5-year increments, but this can be customized) and Average Total Score by State. Larger circles represent a higher average score. The map can be changed to another location or level of granularity. 6. Service Efficacy: Compares Services delivered and Assessment results. ### Staff Capacity & Client Service See how staff are performing and managing clients using the Staff Capacity & Client Service dashboard. Access this dashboard from the Staff Capacity tab. ![Staff Capacity & Client Service dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/resources-product/images/staff_capacity_callouts.png) 1. Filter data by Program Issue Area, Program Name, Owner, or a date range (Engagement Start Date and Engagement End Date). 2. Set Goals: Set Average Days since Participation Goal and Client per Staff Goal. 3. Charts: - Stage by Start Month: Shows Program Engagements based on the month the Program Engagement started, with the colors indicating the current stage. Refer to the legend at the bottom to see which color corresponds to which stage. - Program Engagement Stage: Shows the current Stage of all Program Engagements created during the selected date range. - Average Days Since Participation: Compared to goal, shows a breakdown by date range in 0-30, 31-60, 61-90, and 90+ day increments (for example, how many clients have participated in 0-30 days). - % of Case Plan Goals Complete: For all Case Plan Goals created during the time frame, what percentage are completed, and how many days they took to complete. - Clients per Staff: Total number of active Program Engagements divided by owners of Program Engagements. 4. Selections: Show by Program Name, Program Issue Area, or Owner. Sort by Engagements, Clients per Staff, Average Days Since Participation, or % of Goals Completed. Sort by keeps your Show by selections, but further determines the order in which rows appear. ### Additional Resources Check out these resources to learn more about Tableau. - [Tableau Basics for Nonprofits Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/tableau-basics-for-nonprofits) - [Tableau Support - Knowledge Base](https://www.tableau.com/support/knowledgebase) - [Tableau Desktop and Web Authoring Help](https://www.tableau.com/support/help?_ga=2.122432207.53292504.1601650353-825761632.1601650353&_fsi=bwsfkjzr) # Tableau Next for Education Tableau Next for Education unifies data by using the Data 360 semantic layer and Agentforce AI for context to deliver personalized and actionable insights. Education Intelligence is a data-driven solution that bundles semantic data models and academic metrics. Use this solution to track the learner lifecycle and determine how your programs meet learners' needs. The combination of academic data, key performance indicators (KPIs), and AI help your institution measure programmatic effectiveness and enhance student success. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud, Data 360, and Tableau Next
- **[Education Intelligence Considerations and Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_intelligence_considerations_requirements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the information in this section to make sure that you set up your org correctly for the installation. To support your installation and visualizations, review the requirements for your org data, Data 360, and Tableau Next. - **[Set Up Education Intelligence](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_edu_intelligence.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To access dashboards, visualizations, metrics, and the Education Cloud Semantic Data Model (SDM), install Education Intelligence. - **[Student Success Visualizations and Metrics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_student_success_viz_metrics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success key performance indicators give advisors actionable insights about learners' academic progress, well-being, and engagement. Use these indicators to measure the effectiveness of advising programs and make data-driven decisions to support learners. - **[Education Intelligence Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_edu_intelligence_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Education Intelligence dashboards are data-driven solutions that show key performance metrics of academic operations and the learner lifecycle. # Tableau with NPSP Tableau Dashboards for Nonprofit Fundraising combine the power of NPSP and Tableau, providing three ready-made dashboards for insights on your revenue, donors, campaigns, and more. Your dashboards and reports can be connected to your org and running in minutes. After opening the dashboards in Tableau, you can fully customize them to fit your preferences. After opening the dashboards in Tableau, you can fully customize them to fit your preferences. Alternatively, you can quickly turn your user data into actionable insights with Tableau while you familiarize yourself with the robust reporting capabilities in NPSP. Learn more in the [NPSP Reports Workbook](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_reports_workbook.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide introduces nonprofit administrators to the NPSP reports and demonstrates how you can customize the reports to meet your organization's needs."). Here is an example of a Tableau Dashboard Starter screen: ![Tableau\_fundraising\_overview\_dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/tableau_fundraising_overview_screen.jpeg) - **[Try Out Tableau Dashboard Starters with NPSP](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_tableau.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Download and install the Salesforce Nonprofit Fundraising accelerator for Tableau. ## Try Out Tableau Dashboard Starters with NPSP Download and install the Salesforce Nonprofit Fundraising accelerator for Tableau. To get started, [visit the Tableau website](https://www.tableau.com/products/dashboard-starters-downloads) to find and download the Salesforce Nonprofit Fundraising accelerator. **Additional Resources** [Tableau Dashboards for Nonprofit Fundraising Trailhead](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/tableau-basics-for-nonprofits) [Tableau Support - Knowledge Base](https://www.tableau.com/support/knowledgebase) [Tableau Desktop and Web Authoring Help](https://www.tableau.com/support/help) # Tailor User Access to Education Cloud Features Provide your users access to the features that they need by using the new standard permission set, Education Cloud Limited Access. This permission set grants wider access to Education Cloud features than Education Cloud Reviewer. For clarity, consistency, and to accommodate additional use cases, the Education Cloud Reviewer license is now Education Cloud Limited Access. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Customers who have purchased these Education Cloud products experience this change: - Part-Time Reviewer - RUL Admissions Connect - Sales **How**: Look for the new permission set license in Setup under Company Information. Find the new permission set in Setup under Permission Sets. The Education Cloud Limited Access license has two permission sets that can be assigned to users. Education Cloud Reviewer Gives users access to Education Cloud application review features. Education Cloud Limited Access Combines access to objects and features required for Student Success use cases with the permissions included in Education Cloud Reviewer. **When**: The name change and new standard permission set take effect on July 17, 2023. See Also: - _Salesforce Help_: [Manage Education Cloud Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_manage_education_cloud_users.htm) # Take Action on Alerts (Support Staff) Take action on Alerts: Keep the Priority, Status, Comments, and other fields up-to-date, and close Alerts when the issue is resolved. - **[Act on an Alert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_take_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Edit an Alert record to keep its Priority, Status and other fields up-to-date. Some Alert records include a handy path at the top of the page. The path provides a simple way to move the Alert through its statuses until it's resolved. - **[Mass Update Alert Statuses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_take_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To help you keep Alert statuses current, your Student Success Hub administrator may have enabled these options that let you update the statuses of multiple Alerts at once. - **[Create a Case from an Alert](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_take_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If the concern being tracked in an Alert calls for escalation, you can create a Case directly from the student's Alert record. - **[Create Cases from Multiple Alerts with a Mass Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_take_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you want to escalate many Alerts in the same way, save time by creating Cases from multiple Alerts. You can create multiple Cases from multiple Alerts for multiple students from an Alerts list view. Or you can create multiple Cases from multiple Alerts for one student from a student record Case page. - **[Create Success Plans from Multiple Alerts with a Mass Action](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_take_action.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you want to address multiple Alerts by using the same Success Plan Template, Student Success Hub gives you two options. You can create Success Plans from multiple Alerts for multiple students from an Alerts list view. This method creates one Success Plan for each student with an Alert. You can create one Success Plan for one student from multiple Alerts from a student record Case page. ## Act on an Alert Edit an Alert record to keep its Priority, Status and other fields up-to-date. Some Alert records include a handy path at the top of the page. The path provides a simple way to move the Alert through its statuses until it's resolved. 1. Open an Alert from an Alert list view or from a student record. 2. If the Alert has a path, you can: - Change the Alert's status by clicking a new status in the path and then clicking **Mark as Current Status**. - Expand the path by clicking the arrow on the left, then click **Edit** to change the Student Contact, Priority, Status, or Reason. Save your change. 3. Change details about the Alert by doing any of the following. - Click **Edit** in the highlights bar, change any fields, and save your changes. - Click the pencil icon for any field in the detail panel, change the value, and save your change. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Working on a Kanban board is also a convenient way to update Alerts statuses. From an Alert list view, click the Display as icon and select **Kanban**. Choose to Group By **Status** and then click **Save**. Then, drag Alert cards from one Status column to another. ![Select the Kanban list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_alerts_act_kanban.png) ## Mass Update Alert Statuses To help you keep Alert statuses current, your Student Success Hub administrator may have enabled these options that let you update the statuses of multiple Alerts at once. ### Mass Update Alert Statuses from the Alerts List Update the status of multiple Alerts of the same record type from an Alerts list view. You can even update the status of Alerts for multiple students from this page. 1. On the Alerts page, select a list view that filters Alerts by record type. 2. Select the checkboxes for one or more Alerts. You can select up to 200. 3. Hover over the Status field of any selected Alert and click the pencil icon. 4. Select a different status, select **Update selected items**, and click **Apply**. ![Change the Status value and, if you're updating multiple Alerts, select the multiple update option](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_alerts_mass_update_list_view_options.png) 5. Save your work. ### Mass Update Alert Statuses from the Student Record Update the status of multiple Alerts at once, including Alerts of different record types, from a student record. You can only update the status of Alerts for the individual student from this page. 1. On the student record Case, go to the **Alerts** tab. 2. Select the checkboxes for one or more Alerts and click **Change Status**. ![Select multiple Alerts on a student record and click Change Status](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_alerts_mass_update_case_record.png) 3. Select a status and save your changes. ## Create a Case from an Alert If the concern being tracked in an Alert calls for escalation, you can create a Case directly from the student's Alert record. 1. [Access the Alert record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_alerts_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Alerts to take action when you have concerns about a student who needs support. Monitor Alerts at a glance and respond to Alerts that others create.") for the student. 2. Click in the Case field and select **New Case**. 3. Select the appropriate record type and click **Next**. 4. Enter the Case details. 5. Save your changes to the Case record and then save your changes to the Alert record. The newly created Case is associated with the Alert that prompted the escalation. ## Create Cases from Multiple Alerts with a Mass Action When you want to escalate many Alerts in the same way, save time by creating Cases from multiple Alerts. You can create multiple Cases from multiple Alerts for multiple students from an Alerts list view. Or you can create multiple Cases from multiple Alerts for one student from a student record Case page. Either way, you create one Case for each selected Alert. You can select Alerts of different record types, but the Cases that you create are all of the same record type. 1. On an Alerts list view page or on the Alerts tab of a student record Case, select the checkboxes for one or more Alerts. You can select up to 50. 2. Click **Create Case**. 3. Select a record type and then click **Next**. You can only choose from record types that your Student Success Hub admin makes available to you, and you can't select the Student Record type. Ask your admin if you need access to a record type that's not listed. If you only have permission for one Case record type, Student Success Hub selects it automatically and takes you directly to the form where you can fill out other Case details. 4. Complete these fields. Priority The Priority options such as Low, Medium, and High depend on the selected record type. Case Owner By default, you're selected as the Case Owner because you're creating the Cases. But you can search for and select either a different support staff user or a queue that's associated with the Case object. Type Select the type of Case that you're creating, such as Problem or Question. The options depend on the selected record type. By default, this field is empty or a value associated with the selected record type. Case Reason Select the reason that you're creating the Cases. By default, no reason is selected unless there's a default value associated with the selected record type. Status Select a status for the Cases. By default, no status is selected unless there's a default value associated with the selected record type. Subject Enter a subject that applies to all of the Cases that you're creating. Description Enter a description that applies to all of the Cases that you're creating. Case Origin By default, the origin is blank or a value associated with the record type that you selected. 5. Save your changes. If Student Success Hub encounters a problem creating any of the Cases, it displays an error message and no Cases are created. To see your new Case records: - Select **Cases** from the app navigation menu and then an appropriate list view, or - On the student record Case page, click the **Related Cases** tab. If you don't see Related Cases, click **More** first. ## Create Success Plans from Multiple Alerts with a Mass Action When you want to address multiple Alerts by using the same Success Plan Template, Student Success Hub gives you two options. You can create Success Plans from multiple Alerts for multiple students from an Alerts list view. This method creates one Success Plan for each student with an Alert. You can create one Success Plan for one student from multiple Alerts from a student record Case page. 1. On an Alerts list view page or on the Alerts tab of a student record Case, select the checkboxes for one or more Alerts. You can select up to 50. 2. Click **Apply Success Plan**. 3. Confirm or change the students in the Apply To field. If you started from an Alerts list view and a student was assigned to more than one of the Alerts that you selected, their name appears one time, and Student Success Hub creates only one Success Plan for them. The option to apply an existing Success Plan Template is selected. If you started from an Alerts list view, you can't create a Success Plan from scratch. 4. Click **Next**. 5. Search for and select a template. You can filter search results to view templates owned by you or for a specific record type. 6. Click **Apply**. If Student Success Hub encounters a problem creating any of the Success Plans, it displays an error message and no Success Plans are created. To see your new Success Plan records: - Select **Success Plans** from the app navigation menu and then an appropriate list view, or - On the student record Case page, click the **Success Plans** tab and look in the Open Success Plans related list. If you don't see Success Plans, click **More** first. After the template is applied, you can customize the tasks for each Success Plan and assign the tasks to the appropriate individuals. # Take Client Notes Client Notes are a flexible way to track client conversations, time spent with them, or your work on their behalf. You can also connect Service Deliveries, and add important files to a Client Note. - **[Add Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To track details of a session with a client, create a client note. - **[Lock Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Prevent client notes from being overwritten or modified by adding validation rules that stop someone from changing the notes after the draft is inactive. - **[Create a Service Delivery from Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Log interactions that were captured in Client Notes as a Service Delivery. - **[Add Files to Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add relevant files to client notes. - **[Search for Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Search for notes by fields on a Client Note or use list views to filter for notes based on list view criteria. - **[Create Client Notes List Views](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On the Client Notes tab, use list views to show only certain notes. By default, there are three list views: All Notes, My Notes, and Notes for My Program Engagements. Create additional list views as needed. - **[View and Print Client Note History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To review important client information, view and print client note history directly from the contact record. - **[Use Quick Text for Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Our version of Quick Text helps you record notes consistently and save time by inserting predefined messages in Client Notes. For example, you could have Quick Text that includes sections for intake information to help make sure you capture the data you need. ## Add Client Notes To track details of a session with a client, create a client note. In this example, Robin Brooks is a client considering a medical assistant career path and calls to discuss her plans with her case manager. 1. On a client’s Contact record, click **Client Notes**, then click **New Note**. 2. If available, select a Record Type. To change an already-selected record type, go to the Contact related to the Note. Then in the Related tab, click the Client Note and select a new record type. 3. Enter a descriptive subject. For example, Robin Considering a Medical Assistant Career Path. 4. Optionally, find and select a related Program Engagement. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note To select a related Program Engagement record, the client note must already have a client associated (saved) with the client note. 5. Enter the **Interaction Date**. 6. Select the **Type of Interaction**. 7. To use a note template, click **Add Quick Text** to select or create a template. 8. Enter relevant Tags and click **Assign** to apply an existing tag or **Create** to make a new tag. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Creating tags requires special permissions. 9. Enter details for the Client Note. For example, Met with Robin and discussed medical assistant jobs as a longer-term career path. 10. Leave **Draft** set to Active to add more details later. Or, if you've set up note locking, click the toggle to lock the Client Note and prevent future editing. 11. Optionally, click **Relate to More Records** to access the Client Note from another record. For example, you might relate a Client Note to the client's Contact record, Case Plan, or a Service Delivery. Additionally, if the Service applies to an entire Household rather than to an individual Contact, you should relate the Client Note to a Household Account. 1. Select the record type from the dropdown, for example, Account, then search for and select the record. 2. Click **Create**. 3. Repeat for any other record you want to relate this note to. 4. Click **Done**. The ![Green checkmark icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/autosavedicon.png) confirms that the Client Note is automatically saved. To create additional notes, click **New** in the left panel. ## Lock Client Notes Prevent client notes from being overwritten or modified by adding validation rules that stop someone from changing the notes after the draft is inactive. To add a validation rule that locks a client note: 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager** and select Client Note. 2. Click **Validation Rules**. 3. Click **New**. 4. Add a name and a description for your rule. Use something like "Client Note Lock Rule" so you can quickly scan and find it later if you need to. 5. Set up the condition formula. For example, you could use: NOT(caseman\_\_Draft\_\_c)&&ISCHANGED(caseman\_\_Content\_\_c) as the formula. 6. Add the error message you want to show when someone tries to write in a locked note and select the Top of Page location. 7. Save your work. ## Create a Service Delivery from Client Notes Log interactions that were captured in Client Notes as a Service Delivery. If your organization uses Service Deliveries, you can log interactions captured in Client Notes as a Service Delivery. For example, if you created Client Notes during a half-hour meeting with Robin, you can record a half-hour Service Delivery as part of the Job Readiness Coaching Service. 1. From the Client Note, click **Manage Services**. 2. Find and select a **Program Engagement**. 3. Select the associated **Service**. 4. Enter the **Delivery Date**. 5. Enter a **Quantity**, based on the Unit of Measurement. In this example, the Unit of Measurement is hours. 6. To add more Service Deliveries, click **\+ Add Entry**. 7. Click **Done**. A ![Green checkmark icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/autosavedicon.png) confirms that each Service Delivery is saved. You can also use the Service Deliveries section on the Service Deliveries tab to view the Service Deliveries. Click the Service Delivery Name to view details and confirm that it's related to the Client Note. ## Add Files to Client Notes Add relevant files to client notes. 1. Save your note, then click **Add Files** at the bottom of the note. 2. Click **Upload** and select one or more files to upload. You can also drag files. 3. If your note has an assigned Contact, optionally select **Share with Contact record?** to attach the file to a Contact record, and the note. 4. A checkmark confirms that your file uploaded successfully. Click **Done**. 5. Click **Done** again. Added files show on Related Records & Files on the note. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Clicking the X next to a file in Related Records & Files deletes the file and any reference to it from other records. ## Search for Client Notes Search for notes by fields on a Client Note or use list views to filter for notes based on list view criteria. To search for notes, click the Client Notes tab on the navigation bar or click **Go to My Notes** on the Home page. You can search by fields on a Client Note, such as Subject or Description, or by Client Name. You can also use list views to filter for specific notes based on the list view criteria. By default, there are three Client Notes list views: All Notes, My Notes, and Notes for My Program Engagements. You can create additional list views as needed. See [Take Client Notes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_notes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Client Notes are a flexible way to track client conversations, time spent with them, or your work on their behalf. You can also connect Service Deliveries, and add important files to a Client Note."). To search for notes: 1. In the search bar, enter a client name or other criteria to search by. 2. Optionally, click the filter icon to filter notes by Draft status or by Tags applied to the note. Related records appear as links to the record so you can easily access them. Hover over related records to see compact details. ## Create Client Notes List Views On the Client Notes tab, use list views to show only certain notes. By default, there are three list views: All Notes, My Notes, and Notes for My Program Engagements. Create additional list views as needed. 1. From the App Launcher, search for and select **Client Notes**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_important.png) Important There are two entries for Client Notes. Be sure to choose the first one in the list. It will take you to the Recently Viewed list for the Client Notes object. 2. Click the dropdown next to Recently Viewed to see all list views. 3. Click **All Notes** to view the All Notes list view. 4. Click ![List view controls dropdown](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/list_view_controls.png) to access list view controls. 5. Click **Clone**. 6. Give the list view a name. The API name autopopulates. 7. Choose who can see the list view, then click **Save**. 8. Add filter criteria. For example, if you want to include notes for Client Intakes, you would add the filter Subject contains intake. 9. Click **Save**. Now, when you go to the Client Notes tab, you'll see your new list view. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the new list view, refresh your browser. ## View and Print Client Note History To review important client information, view and print client note history directly from the contact record. To easily review important information about clients with fewer clicks and in less time, it's important to have their Client Note history all in one place. View, filter, and print this information directly from the Contact record. 1. On a client's Contact record, click the **Client Notes** tab. You can filter the list. - To show notes from a specific time period, enter a **Start Date** and an **End Date**. - To reorder the list, change the Display order. - To show notes for specific Program Engagements, Record Types or creators, click **Filter**, then select the appropriate items. The available filters depend on the data. For example, if all of the notes are created by the same person, the Created by filter doesn't display. - To show notes with a specific tag or keyword, click **Filter**, then enter the tags or keywords in the appropriate fields. 2. To hide details for all Notes, click **Hide Details**. To hide details for a specific note, click the minus symbol on the note. Hiding details is useful for Case Managers who want to quickly scan through the contents of each note. 3. To create a new Note, click **New Note**. 4. To print the note history, click **Print**. You can print out the entire body of notes or use filter to first narrow the selection on the page and just print those. ## Use Quick Text for Client Notes Our version of Quick Text helps you record notes consistently and save time by inserting predefined messages in Client Notes. For example, you could have Quick Text that includes sections for intake information to help make sure you capture the data you need. New to Quick Text? Check out this [Set Up and Use Quick Text](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.quick_text_setting_up.htm&type=5) for lots more information. Before you begin, add the Client Notes channel to the Quick Text object so that Quick Text appears in Client Notes. Note: if your users already create Quick Text using the Quick Text object and want to use those messages in Client Notes, they need to add the Client Notes channel to their text. 1. Open the Quick Text object in Object Manager, then click **Channels** in the Fields & Relationships section. 2. In Channel Picklist Values, click **New** and enter Client Notes . 3. Save your work. There are a few things to know about using Quick Text for Client Notes. - Merge fields in Client Notes aren’t supported. - Add new text messages to folders in the Quick Text record page, not in the Client Notes component. - If the button for Quick Text is disabled, check to see if the user has access to the Quick Text object and that the Quick Text [feature is enabled](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=service.quick_text_enable.htm&type=5). - To share quick text with other users, add the text to a folder and share the folder with them. # Tax Status Search Glossary Understand what raw JSON data is received from Candid Premier (formerly known as GuideStar) when a grantmaker searches for an organization’s tax information from the Verification Items tab.
Field Description
Top-Level Response Fields
code HTTP response status code.
data The container object holding all nonprofit profile data, organized into five sections: summary, programs, financials, operations, and charitycheck.
errors List of errors encountered.
message Diagnostic message for response status.
took Time taken for the request to process.
Summary Data
address_line_1 Organization address street name.
address_line_2 Organization address suite or apartment number.
addresses Address entry in summary.addresses. Usually an office of an organization.
addresses.address_line_1 Address line 1.
addresses.address_line_2 Address line 2.
addresses.address_type Address type.
addresses.city Address city.
addresses.country Address country.
addresses.postal_code Address postal code.
addresses.state Address state.
affiliation_code A single digit code designating the type of organization (Central, Intermediate, or Independent) if there’s no group exemption or (Central, Intermediate, Independent, or Subordinate) if there’s a group exemption.
affiliation_description Description of what the affiliation code means.
also_known_as Comma-separated string of names associated with the organization.
city Organization address city.
contact_email Primary contact email.
contact_fax Primary contact fax number.
contact_name Primary contact name.
contact_phone Primary contact phone number.
contact_title Primary contact title.
county Organization address county.
deductibility_code The deductibility code signifies whether contributions made to an organization are deductible.
deductibility_description Deductibility code description.
demographics_status Description of demographics status that can be shown to a funder or donor.
demographics_status_nonprofit Description of demographics status that can be shown to a nonprofit.
donation_page Link to the donation page of the organization.
donation_to_ein EIN that should be used for charitable donations.
donation_to_name Organization name that should be used for charitable donations.
ein Employee Identification Number.
fax Organization fax number.
feedback_responses Specific feedback response questions answered by the organization.
first_on_bmf_date First time organization appeared on the BMF.
fiscal_year_end When the fiscal year ends for the organization.
fiscal_year_start When the fiscal year begins for the organization.
forms_1023_1024 Application for the organization to gain tax-exempt status.
govt_registered_name Legal organization name.
gs_financial_trends_analysis_pdf URL of API call to the FTA PDF API endpoint to download the organization's financial trends analysis PDF.
gs_pro_pdf URL of API call to the Pro PDF API endpoint to download the organization's profile PDF.
gs_profile_update_level Guidestar.org organization profile seal of transparency level.
gs_profile_update_level_logo URL to Guidestar.org seal image.
gs_public_report Guidestar.org organization profile URL.
is_national_hq Whether this organization is the national headquarters.
is_non_bmf_org Is the organization not on the BMF.
keywords Keywords added by the organization to their profile.
last_on_bmf_date Last time an organization appeared on the BMF.
latitude Latitude of the center of the zip code of an organization's mailing address.
letters_of_determination IRS letter of determination information.
letters_of_dissolution IRS letter of dissolution information.
logo_url Organization logo URL.
longitude Longitude of the center of the zip code of an organization's mailing address.
mission Organization mission statement.
naics_code North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) information.
naics_code.naics_code NAICS code.
naics_code.naics_description NAICS code description.
ntee_code National Taxonomy of Exempt Entities (NTEE) Code.
ntee_codes National Taxonomy of Exempt Entities (NTEE) code information.
ntee_codes.ntee_code NTEE code.
ntee_codes.primary_code NTEE primary code.
ntee_codes.primary_description NTEE primary description.
ntee_codes.sub_code NTEE subcode.
ntee_codes.sub_description NTEE subcode description.
org_collect_feedback Has this organization filled the 'How we listen' section of their profile.
org_feedback_example Response to 'How is your organization collecting feedback?'
org_learn_more Did the organization indicate that they had an interest in learning more about feedback practices.
org_quiz_interest Did the organization indicate that they had an interest in taking GuideStar's feedback quiz.
organization_name Organization name.
other_documents A document the organization uploaded to GuideStar.
pcs_codes The Philanthropy Classification System (PCS) is Candid's taxonomy, describing the work of grantmakers, recipient organizations, and the philanthropic transactions between those entities.
pcs_codes.pcs_code PCS code.
pcs_codes.pcs_description PCS code description.
pcs_codes.pcs_facet PCS facet name.
pcs_codes.pcs_parent_code PCS parent code.
pcs_codes.pcs_parent_description PCS parent code description.
photos Images uploaded by the organization.
platinum_evaluation_documents External evaluations that support your organization's progress or results.
platinum_evaluation_documents.document_name Name of evaluation document.
platinum_evaluation_documents.document_url URL of evaluation document.
platinum_evaluation_documents.document_year Year of evaluation document.
profile_data_change_dates Contains the last change datetimes for several key data values.
profile_data_change_dates.dei_last_modified Datetime of last update to organization demographics information.
profile_data_change_dates.fundraising_contact_email_last_modified Datetime of last update to fundraising contact email address.
profile_data_change_dates.org_website_last_modified Datetime of last update to organization website address.
profile_data_change_dates.payment_address_last_modified Datetime of last update to payment address.
profile_data_change_dates.primary_address_last_modified Datetime of last update to primary address.
profile_data_change_dates.primary_contact_email_last_modified Datetime of last update to primary contact email address.
profile_data_change_dates.seal_last_modified Datetime of last update to organization seal level.
profile_sdg_codes UN sustainable development goals associated with the organization's profile.
profile_sdg_codes.description UN sustainable development goal description.
profile_sdg_codes.id UN sustainable development goal number.
ruling_year Year that organization started operating as a non-profit.
sdg UN sustainable development goals.
sdg.description UN sustainable development goal description.
sdg.id UN sustainable development goal number.
sic_codes Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) information.
sic_codes.sic_code SIC code.
sic_codes.sic_description SIC code description.
social_media_urls A social media URL related to the organization.
state Organization address state.
subsection_code Subsection Codes are the codes shown under section 501(c) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, which define the category under which an organization may be exempt.
subsection_description Description of organization subsection code.
telephone_numbers Telephone number associated with the organization.
telephone_numbers.telephone_number Telephone number entered by the organization.
telephone_numbers.telephone_type Description of telephone number.
videos Video information added by organization.
website_url Organization website URL.
year_founded Year that an organization was founded.
zip Organization address zip code.
Programs Data
charting_impact_answers General question and answer pair that’s used to describe organizational impact.
charting_impact_answers.answer Answer text.
charting_impact_answers.question Question text.
platinum_metrics Program metrics entered by the organization.
programs Information about an organization's program as entered by the organization.
programs.areas_served Geographic area served by the program.
programs.budget Program budget in dollars.
programs.description Program description.
programs.name Program name.
programs.target_population First target population that the program is targeting.
programs.target_population2 The second target population that the program is targeting.
Financials Data
accounting_ratios Financial ratios that are calculated from the organization's Form 990 data.
accounting_ratios.fringe_rate The cost of employee benefits divided by the wages paid to employees. Calculated by using the formula: Pensions plus Benefits plus Payroll Tax Totals divided by Current Compensation plus Total Wages.
accounting_ratios.liquidity The ratio of an organization's capacity to repay its current liabilities through cash and cash equivalents. Calculated by using the Quick Ratio: (Cash + Savings + Short Term Investments + Accounts Receivable) / Total Liabilities.
accounting_ratios.months_of_cash A measurement of how long an organization can operate using cash and cash reserves at current expense levels. Calculated using the formula: Cash plus Savings divided by Total Expenses minus Depreciation divided by 12 months.
accounting_ratios.net_gain_loss The amount of net gain or net loss.
accounting_ratios.year The fiscal year.
annual_reports Annual reports uploaded by the organization.
f990_financials IRS Form 990 financials.
f990ez_financials IRS Form 990-EZ financials.
financial_documents IRS 990 document, possibly uploaded by the organization.
financial_documents.form990_name File name document uploaded as.
financial_documents.form990_source Source of document.
financial_documents.form990_url URL to access this document.
financial_documents.form990_year Year file pertains to.
financial_statements Audited financial statements uploaded by the organization.
financial_statements.auditing_company The company that audited the financials.
financial_statements.doc_name The name of the uploaded document.
financial_statements.document_url The URL of the document.
financial_statements.fiscal_year_end When the fiscal year ends.
financial_trends_analysis Financial Trends Analysis for 990 filers.
forms_990T IRS Form 990-T documents.
most_recent_year_financials Current, or most recent, fiscal year (FY) financial information. Because this information could come from multiple 990 form types, many of the fields are normalized.
most_recent_year_financials.assets_total Total monetary amount of assets, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.cash_and_equivalent_assets Cash and equivalent assets, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.data_source Source of current financial information.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_accounting Accounting expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_administration Administration expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_advertising_promotion Advertising expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_fundraising Fundraising expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_gifts_grants_paid Gifts and grants paid expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_info_technology IT expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_insurance Insurance expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_interest Interest expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_investment_management Investment management expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_legal Legal expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_operating_admin Admin operating expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_pension_plan Pension plan expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_professional_fees Professional fees expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_professional_fundraising Professional fundraising expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_program_services Program services expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_publications Publication expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expense_salaries_employee_benefits Salary and other employee benefit expense, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.expenses_total Total expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.fiscal_year The FY as a number.
most_recent_year_financials.form_type The IRS 990 form type the data in this object is based off of.
most_recent_year_financials.investments_bonds Bond investments gain/loss, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.investments_other Other investments gain/loss, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.investments_stock Stock investment gain/loss, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.investments_us_government U.S. bond investment gain/loss, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.land_buildings_equipment Land, buildings, equipment end of year value, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.months_of_cash A measurement of how long an organization can operate using cash and cash reserves at current expense levels. Calculated using the formula: Cash plus Savings divided by Total Expenses minus Depreciation divided by 12 months.
most_recent_year_financials.net_fixed_assets_LBE Land, buildings, and equipment fixed assets, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.net_gain_loss Net gain/loss this FY, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.notes_payable_mortgages Mortgages and notes payable to unrelated 3rd parties, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.other_assets Other assets end of year value, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.period_begin Start date of the FY that this current financial object covers.
most_recent_year_financials.period_end End date of the fiscal year that this current financial object covers.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_contributions Contributions revenue, that is donations, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_govt_grants Government grants revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_investments Investments revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_other Other revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_program_services Program services revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_sales Sales revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.revenue_special_events Special events revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.total_expense_disbursements Disbursement expenses, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.total_liabilities Total monetary value of liabilities, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.total_revenue Total revenue, in USD.
most_recent_year_financials.unrestricted_net_assets Unrestricted net assets, in USD.
pf990_financials IRS Form 990-PF financials.
pf990_financials.adjusted_net_income Adjusted net income.
pf990_financials.cash_equivalent_investible_assets Cash non-interest-bearing Fair Market Value plus Savings and temporary cash investments Fair Market Value.
pf990_financials.contributions Contributions not included in 8a.
pf990_financials.expense_accounting Accounting fees.
pf990_financials.expense_interest Interest expenses.
pf990_financials.expense_legal Legal fees.
pf990_financials.expense_pension_plans Pension plans, employee benefits expenses.
pf990_financials.expense_professional_fees Other professional fees.
pf990_financials.expense_publications Printing and publications expenses.
pf990_financials.income_total Total revenue — Current Year.
pf990_financials.investments_bonds Investments in corporate bonds.
pf990_financials.investments_other Other investments.
pf990_financials.investments_stocks Investments in corporate stock.
pf990_financials.investments_us_state_govt Investments in U.S. and state government obligations.
pf990_financials.land_buildings_equipment Land, buildings, and equipment: basis.
pf990_financials.net_assets Total assets Fair Market Value minus Total liabilities Book Value.
pf990_financials.net_investment_income Net investment income.
pf990_financials.other_assets Other assets.
pf990_financials.period_begin Tax year begins date.
pf990_financials.period_end Tax year end date.
pf990_financials.total_assets Total assets.
pf990_financials.total_expenses Total functional expenses.
pf990_financials.total_liabilities Total liabilities.
pf990_financials.total_operating_expenses Total operating and administrative expenses.
Operations Data
blog_url URL of organization blog.
board_chair_affiliation The company board chairperson is associated with.
board_chair_name Name of the board chairperson.
board_chair_term_end End year of board chair term.
board_chair_term_start Start year of board chair term.
board_co_chair_affiliation Company board co-chairperson is associated with.
board_co_chair_name Name of board co-chairperson.
board_co_chair_term_end End year of board co-chair term.
board_co_chair_term_start Start year of board co-chair term.
board_leadership_practices Question and answer pairs about the organization's board leadership practices.
board_leadership_practices.answer Answer text.
board_leadership_practices.question Question text.
board_of_directors Board of directors members.
board_of_directors.company The company the board member works for.
board_of_directors.name The board member's first and last name.
co_leader_name Organization co-leader name.
co_leader_profile Organization co-leader profile.
contractors Independent contractors paid more than $100,000 reported on Form 990.
contractors.address The contractor's address.
contractors.compensation The contractor's compensation.
contractors.name The contractor's name.
contractors.service_type The type of service the contractor provided.
demographics DEI demographics data for the organization.
employees_greater_than_100K Number of employees that are paid at least $100k.
fundraising_contact_email Email address of primary fundraising contact.
fundraising_contact_name Name of primary fundraising contact.
fundraising_contact_phone Phone number of primary fundraising contact.
fundraising_contact_title Title of primary fundraising contact.
highest_paid_employees The five highest-paid employees (other than officers/directors) reported on Form 990.
leader_name Organization leader name.
leader_profile Organization leader profile.
no_of_employees Number of employees of the organization.
no_of_volunteers Number of volunteers at an organization.
officers_directors_key_employees Officers, directors, and key employees reported on Form 990.
officers_directors_key_employees.compensation The salary for the staff member's position.
officers_directors_key_employees.hours Hours spent on their position.
officers_directors_key_employees.name The board member's first and last name.
officers_directors_key_employees.other_compensation Benefits provided by the organization.
officers_directors_key_employees.related_compensation Salary from other related organizations.
officers_directors_key_employees.title The board member's title.
officers_directors_key_employees.type The type of positions they have.
organization_details_year The year details in operations are from.
preparer_firm_address Tax preparation firm address.
preparer_firm_ein Tax preparation firm EIN.
preparer_firm_name Tax preparation firm name.
preparer_firm_phone Tax preparation firm phone number.
Charity Check Data
address_line1 Address of the organization.
address_line2 Additional address information.
adv_ruling_month This is the month on an advanced ruling recognizing the organization's exempt status.
adv_ruling_year This is the year on an advanced ruling recognizing the organization's exempt status.
bmf_church_message A message indicating that although the organization isn’t on the IRS BMF, their filing requirement code shows that they’re a church or religious organization and are therefore not required to appear on the IRS BMF to establish their status.
bmf_ein EIN (Employer Identification Number) as it appears in the Business Master File.
bmf_organization_name Organization name as it appears in the Business Master File.
bmf_status If the organization appears in the Business Master File.
bmf_subsection Subsection code as it appears in the Business Master File. This code identifies the type of tax-exempt organization and is often used to determine if contributions to them are tax deductible.
bulletin_number If the organization was listed in an Internal Revenue Bulletin, the bulletin number is listed here.
bulletin_url URL link to the IRB.
charity_check_last_modified The date the Charity Check report was last modified.
city City of the organization's address.
effective_date Effective date of the IRB.
ein Employer Identification Number.
exempt_status_code The EO Status Code defines the type of exemption held by the organization.
filing_req_code This indicates the primary return(s) the organization is required to file.
foundation_509a_status Non-private foundation status.
foundation_code Organizations can select IRS foundation codes to describe their organization type.
foundation_code_description Textual description of the foundation code.
foundation_type_code Organizations can select IRS foundation codes to describe their organization type.
foundation_type_description Textual description of the foundation code.
group_exemption This is a 4-digit IRS-internal number assigned to parent organizations holding group exemption letters. Subordinate organizations in group exemptions inherit the Pub78 status of the parent organization.
irb_last_modified The date of the GuideStar IRB last modification.
irs_bmf_pub78_conflict Indicates whether the Business Master File and Publication 78 data are reporting the organization differently regarding its classification as a private foundation.
most_recent_bmf Date of the most recent IRS Business Master File.
most_recent_irb Date of the most recent Internal Revenue Bulletin.
most_recent_pub78 Date of most recent Publication 78.
ofac_status Indicates whether this organization has been listed by OFAC on the Specially Designated National (SDN) List, also known as the Terrorist Watch List.
organization_id A unique number identifying organizations and organizational entities.
organization_info_last_modified The date the organization's information was last updated.
organization_name The public name recognized by the IRS.
organization_name_aka Organization name "Also Known As".
organization_types Organization types and deductibility information as it appears in Publication 78.
organization_types.deductibility_limitation In general, an individual who itemizes deductions may deduct contributions to most charitable organizations up to 50% of their gross income. Individuals generally may deduct charitable contributions to other organizations up to 30% of their adjusted gross income. These limitations and organizational status are indicated.
organization_types.deductibility_status_description Deductibility Status Codes.
organization_types.organization_type Type of organization and use of contribution as it appears in the Publication 78.
parent_organizations Parent organizations associated with this organization under a group exemption.
parent_organizations.ein EIN of parent organization.
parent_organizations.group_exemption This is a four-digit internal number assigned to parent organizations holding group exemption letters.
parent_organizations.organization_name Name of Parent Organization.
pub78_church_message A message indicating that although the organization isn’t on the Pub78, their filing requirement code shows that they’re a religious organization and are therefore not required to appear on the Pub78 to establish their status.
pub78_city City of the organization as it appears in the Publication 78 data.
pub78_ein EIN (Employer Identification Number) as it appears in the Publication 78 data.
pub78_indicator Indicator for understanding an organization's Publication 78 data. Subordinate organizations in group exemptions inherit the Pub78 status of the parent organization.
pub78_organization_name Organization name as it appears in the Publication 78 data.
pub78_state The state of the organization as it appears in the Publication 78 data.
pub78_verified Whether the organization is listed on the most current Publication 78. Also known as the Cumulative List of Organizations, IRS Publication 78 lists all organizations to which charitable contributions are tax deductible.
reinstatement_date Date of reinstatement, if any.
report_date The date and time the Charity Check API returned the result. Reported in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
revocation_code Indicates the revocation code provided by the IRS in the Automatic Revocation file.
revocation_date Date of revocation.
ruling_month This is the month on a ruling or determination letter recognizing the organization's exempt status.
ruling_year This is the year on a ruling or determination letter recognizing the organization's exempt status.
state State (abbreviation) of the organization's address.
state_name State (full name) of the organization's address.
subsection_description Subsection code description as it relates to the subsection code that appears in the Business Master File. This code identifies the type of tax-exempt organization and is often used to determine if contributions to them are tax deductible.
zip ZIP code of the organization's address.
# Term Term represents an academic period when your institution is in session. - **[Sample Uses for Term](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Term object defines not only the dates when a Course is offered, but also the Term Type, Grading Period Sequence, Instructional Days, and a Parent Term (if it's part of a period defined by a larger Term). - **[Configure Term](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create Term Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Term records for specific periods of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Term data. ## Sample Uses for Term The Term object defines not only the dates when a Course is offered, but also the Term Type, Grading Period Sequence, Instructional Days, and a Parent Term (if it's part of a period defined by a larger Term). - University—Set up one set of Terms for the Business School and a different set for the Law School. - Any educational institution—Specify a hierarchy of Terms, such as a 2018-2019 School Year parent Term with nested child Terms, 2018-2019 School Year Fall Semester and 2018-2019 School Year Spring Semester. ## Configure Term Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Keep Up With Term Updates
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.67
  • Add the Parent Term, Type, Instructional Days, and Grading Period Sequence fields to the Term page layout.
  • Add the Terms related list to the appropriate Account page layout (for example, the Organization Layout).

Learn about updating page layouts in Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.

## Create Term Records Create Term records for specific periods of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Term data. Before you create a Term, you must have an Account set up to relate to it (for example, an Account that represents the entire school, or a school within a school). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When creating Term records, consider: - Specifying "Part of Term" for the Type option if you offer six-week mini-terms or you segment your summer session into periods A through D. - Providing details about a Term’s relationship to other Terms. For example, enter the Parent Term that a Term is nested under, or enter a Grading Period Sequence that this Term represents ("1" for the first quarter, “2” for the second quarter, and so on). With Terms, you can define as many levels of detail as needed for your institution’s model. For example, some schools define an Academic Year with a Summer Term that then has Summer 1 (8 weeks) and Summer 2 (8 weeks) nested under it. 1. From an Account record, like a Department, click **New** in the Terms related list. 2. Enter start and end dates for the Term. Don’t change the Account name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. Click **Save & New**, and continue creating additional Term records as needed. # Term Term represents an academic period when your institution is in session. - **[Sample Uses for Term](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Term object defines not only the dates when a Course is offered, but also the Term Type, Grading Period Sequence, Instructional Days, and a Parent Term (if it's part of a period defined by a larger Term). - **[Create Term Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Term records for specific periods of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Term data. ## Sample Uses for Term The Term object defines not only the dates when a Course is offered, but also the Term Type, Grading Period Sequence, Instructional Days, and a Parent Term (if it's part of a period defined by a larger Term). - University—Set up one set of Terms for the Business School and a different set for the Law School. - Any educational institution—Specify a hierarchy of Terms, such as a 2018-2019 School Year parent Term with nested child Terms, 2018-2019 School Year Fall Semester and 2018-2019 School Year Spring Semester. ## Create Term Records Create Term records for specific periods of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Term data. Before you create a Term, you must have an Account set up to relate to it (for example, an Account that represents the entire school, or a school within a school). ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When creating Term records, consider: - Specifying "Part of Term" for the Type option if you offer six-week mini-terms or you segment your summer session into periods A through D. - Providing details about a Term’s relationship to other Terms. For example, enter the Parent Term that a Term is nested under, or enter a Grading Period Sequence that this Term represents ("1" for the first quarter, “2” for the second quarter, and so on). With Terms, you can define as many levels of detail as needed for your institution’s model. For example, some schools define an Academic Year with a Summer Term that then has Summer 1 (8 weeks) and Summer 2 (8 weeks) nested under it. 1. From an Account record, like a Department, click **New** in the Terms related list. 2. Enter start and end dates for the Term. Don’t change the Account name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. Click **Save & New**, and continue creating additional Term records as needed. # Term Grade Term Grade stores student grades for a specific grading period. - **[Sample Uses for Term Grade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Term Grades are intended for tracking student grades. You can use them to mark grade milestones for a single Course Connection that spans multiple Terms, or multiple grade milestones for a single Term. - **[Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because Term Grades are used to capture a grade a student receives for a specific Course or Term, it's a good idea to have a Course Connection and Term already defined so you can associate the Term Grade with them. The fields aren't required to create a Term Grade, but having them in place is a good practice. - **[Configure Term Grade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the steps required to maintain the data. - **[Create Term Grade Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create term grade records from contacts, course offerings, or course connections in Education Data Architecture. ## Sample Uses for Term Grade Term Grades are intended for tracking student grades. You can use them to mark grade milestones for a single Course Connection that spans multiple Terms, or multiple grade milestones for a single Term. You can track Term Grades using numerical, percentage, or letter values. Let's look at some possible uses for the Term Grade object. - University—Specify the grade that a student receives for a Course they’re taking for a specific period of time. For example, create a Term Grade record for a midterm grade, another for a final grade, and, if needed, one for a corrected grade. - K-12—Specify grades for a full-year Course. For example, if a student is enrolled in a Course that spans a full year, create one Term Grade record for Semester 1 grading period, and another for Semester 2 grading period. And create a Term Grade record for the final grade for the Course itself. - Online institution—Track self-paced online courses with a series of eight-week Terms that have a Term Grade record associated with each. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When considering using Term Grade: - Don’t use Term Grades as a general gradebook for assignments, quizzes, and the like. Instead, use Term Grade records to track key grades for a given Term, like mid-term exams or final grades. - Create your own Type of Term Grade for any specific grading period within a Term. - Track the final grade a student receives for a specific Course Connection with the Grade field on a Course Connection instead of Term Grade. ## Prerequisites Because Term Grades are used to capture a grade a student receives for a specific Course or Term, it's a good idea to have a Course Connection and Term already defined so you can associate the Term Grade with them. The fields aren't required to create a Term Grade, but having them in place is a good practice. ## Configure Term Grade Learn about the steps required to maintain the data. ### Keep Up with Term Grade Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of EDA you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.74
  • Add the Term Grades related list to the HEDA Course Enrollment Layout.

  • Customize the HEDA Term Grade Layout to best support your use case. We recommend requiring important fields like Term, Term Grade, or Course Connection.
1.84
## Create Term Grade Records Create term grade records from contacts, course offerings, or course connections in Education Data Architecture. Before you create a Term Grade record, create the record from which you want to track Term Grades. This will typically be a Contact, Course Offering, or Course Connection. 1. Enter Term Grade details. Don’t change the Contact or Course Connection names. 2. Click **Save**. # Term Grade Term Grade stores student grades for a specific grading period. - **[Sample Uses for Term Grade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Term Grades are intended for tracking student grades. You can use them to mark grade milestones for a single Course Connection that spans multiple Terms, or multiple grade milestones for a single Term. - **[Prerequisites](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Because Term Grades are used to capture a grade a student receives for a specific Course or Term, it's a good idea to have a Course Connection and Term already defined so you can associate the Term Grade with them. The fields aren't required to create a Term Grade, but having them in place is a good practice. - **[Create Term Grade Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_term_grades.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create term grade records from contacts, course offerings, or course connections in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Term Grade Term Grades are intended for tracking student grades. You can use them to mark grade milestones for a single Course Connection that spans multiple Terms, or multiple grade milestones for a single Term. You can track Term Grades using numerical, percentage, or letter values. Let's look at some possible uses for the Term Grade object. - University—Specify the grade that a student receives for a Course they’re taking for a specific period of time. For example, create a Term Grade record for a midterm grade, another for a final grade, and, if needed, one for a corrected grade. - K-12—Specify grades for a full-year Course. For example, if a student is enrolled in a Course that spans a full year, create one Term Grade record for Semester 1 grading period, and another for Semester 2 grading period. And create a Term Grade record for the final grade for the Course itself. - Online institution—Track self-paced online courses with a series of eight-week Terms that have a Term Grade record associated with each. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When considering using Term Grade: - Don’t use Term Grades as a general gradebook for assignments, quizzes, and the like. Instead, use Term Grade records to track key grades for a given Term, like mid-term exams or final grades. - Create your own Type of Term Grade for any specific grading period within a Term. - Track the final grade a student receives for a specific Course Connection with the Grade field on a Course Connection instead of Term Grade. ## Prerequisites Because Term Grades are used to capture a grade a student receives for a specific Course or Term, it's a good idea to have a Course Connection and Term already defined so you can associate the Term Grade with them. The fields aren't required to create a Term Grade, but having them in place is a good practice. ## Create Term Grade Records Create term grade records from contacts, course offerings, or course connections in K-12 Architecture Kit. Before you create a Term Grade record, create the record from which you want to track Term Grades. This will typically be a Contact, Course Offering, or Course Connection. 1. Enter Term Grade details. Don’t change the Contact or Course Connection names. 2. Click **Save**. # Terminology Review some fundraising terminology and concepts used in GEM. GEM introduces a lot of new concepts to the Salesforce world. While they’re long-established in the fundraising world, a terminology review might be helpful to folks in the Salesforce ecosystem who aren’t as well-versed in this area. We also define a handful of GEM concepts that might be helpful to advancement personnel. Allocation (or designation or fund) A specific destination for received revenue, such as a particular building fund or academic department. Often chosen by the donor, but anything not defined is automatically allocated by GEM to a default fund (General Accounting Unit). General Accounting Unit (GAU) A Salesforce object used to indicate individual allocations (designations or funds). Payment A Salesforce object used to record a pledged or received payment from a donor. GEM doesn't recognize Payment records as paid until the Paid field is selected. Revenue Any kind of gift. Can be a monetary value, gift in-kind, stock, or any other gift your institution accepts. Soft Credit An individual who is given credit for making or influencing a donation, even if they're not the actual donor. Examples include members of the household, the owner of a donating organization, or the original donor on a matched gift. State A value that is applied to Opportunity Stages. Allows Stages to retain their original names and still be designated as Committed or Finalized. # Test An instance of a student taking a test. - **[Sample Uses for Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's look at some possible uses for the Test object. - **[Configure Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the test object to use in Education Data Architecture. - **[Create a Test Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create test records from a contact record or from the Tests object in Education Data Architecture. ## Sample Uses for Test Let's look at some possible uses for the Test object. - University—Relate a Test with an Application to track a prospective student's completion of required tests (for example, the GMAT for a graduate Business program). - K-12—Identify any AP tests or standardized tests (for example, PSAT, SAT, or ACT) a student has completed. ## Configure Test Set up the test object to use in Education Data Architecture. ### Initial Configuration Tasks Depending on your requirements, consider adding the Tests related list to the Contact page layout. If your institution tracks different types of tests than the ones provided by default, you can also update the picklist values for the Test Type field. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm) and picklist values in [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_add_custom_picklist_values.htm). ### Add Test Definition Custom Metadata Type to Test Records With Custom Metadata Types, you can create your own setup objects whose records are metadata rather than data. You can add a definition of a test that includes general information including the name, type, and description of the test. You can also indicate the unique credentialing identifiers for the test and the organization that issues the test. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, search for and select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Test Definition, click **Manage Records**. 4. Enter the relevant information and click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Test Definition. ### Keep Up with Test Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add the following fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Credits Earned

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date
## Create a Test Record Create test records from a contact record or from the Tests object in Education Data Architecture. 1. If the Contact record has a Tests related list, click **New** in the related list. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Tests**, and click **New**. 2. Enter relevant details about this Test. 3. Click **Save**. Or, if you're creating multiple Test records, click **Save & New**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Test Score records to track the results of these tests. See [Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_test_score.htm). # Test An instance of a student taking a test. - **[Sample Uses for Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's look at some possible uses for the Test object. - **[Configure Test](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the test object to use in K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Create a Test Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create test records from a contact record or from the Tests object in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Test Let's look at some possible uses for the Test object. - University—Relate a Test with an Application to track a prospective student's completion of required tests (for example, the GMAT for a graduate Business program). - K-12—Identify any AP tests or standardized tests (for example, PSAT, SAT, or ACT) a student has completed. ## Configure Test Set up the test object to use in K-12 Architecture Kit. ### Initial Configuration Tasks Depending on your requirements, consider adding the Tests related list to the Contact page layout. If your institution tracks different types of tests than the ones provided by default, you can also update the picklist values for the Test Type field. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.k12_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm) and picklist values in [Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_add_custom_picklist_values.htm). ### Add Test Definition Custom Metadata Type to Test Records With Custom Metadata Types, you can create your own setup objects whose records are metadata rather than data. You can add a definition of a test that includes general information including the name, type, and description of the test. You can also indicate the unique credentialing identifiers for the test and the organization that issues the test. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, search for and select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Test Definition, click **Manage Records**. 4. Enter the relevant information and click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Test Definition. ### Keep Up with Test Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add the following fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Credits Earned

    • Verification Status

    • Verification Status Date
1.8

Create a K-12 All Tests list view:

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All tests

  • Display order: Test Name, Contact, Test Type, Test Date. See Create or Clone a List View.

  • Create a K12 Test Compact Layout with fields in this order: Test Name, Contact, Test Type, Test Date
 

Add quick actions to the Test layout:

Add the following quick actions to the Test page layout to make them available from Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions bar: Edit, New Note, Printable View, Change Owner, Clone, and Delete.
 

Configure the New Case quick action:

  1. Ensure the correct user profiles have permission to specify a new record type for the Case object.

  2. Edit the unmanaged New Case global action to specify an Incident record type for Case.

  3. On the Test page layout, replace the default New Case quick action with the New Case action provided in this update. If you see two New Case quick actions, use the unmanaged one (not k12kit__New Case).
## Create a Test Record Create test records from a contact record or from the Tests object in K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. If the Contact record has a Tests related list, click **New** in the related list. If not, from the App Launcher, find and select **Tests**, and click **New**. 2. Enter relevant details about this Test. 3. Click **Save**. Or, if you're creating multiple Test records, click **Save & New**. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip As a next step, create Test Score records to track the results of these tests. See [Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_test_score.htm). # Test and Activate an Education Cloud Agent Test your AI agent to ensure that it's dependable and trustworthy. When it's ready for your customers, activate the agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license.
User Permissions Needed
To test and activate an AI agent for Education Cloud: Education Cloud Full Access
1. [Test your agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_testing_center.htm&language=en_US) to make sure that it will perform reliably for your users. 2. [Activate your agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.copilot_setup_activate_deactivate.htm&language=en_US) to make it available to users. # Test and Review Configurations Create test data to check your configuration and review the workflow rules to make sure they are what you need for your organization. - **[Enter Some Test Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** What better way to celebrate your newly configured app than to enter some volunteer records and create a test campaign with jobs and a few shifts? This is a great time to do it because, if you continue on to the last part of Volunteers for Salesforce configuration (adding Volunteers for Salesforce pages to your website), having test data makes it easier to see how Volunteers for Salesforce content looks on your website. - **[Review Volunteer Hours Workflow Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_test.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When entering hours, volunteers don't always fill in an End Date or a Planned Start Date & Time. If these fields are left empty, Volunteers for Salesforce uses workflow rules to automatically fill them in: the End Date is set to the Start Date that the volunteer entered, and the Planned Start Date & Time is set to the Shift's Start Date & Time. ## Enter Some Test Data What better way to celebrate your newly configured app than to enter some volunteer records and create a test campaign with jobs and a few shifts? This is a great time to do it because, if you continue on to the last part of Volunteers for Salesforce configuration (adding Volunteers for Salesforce pages to your website), having test data makes it easier to see how Volunteers for Salesforce content looks on your website. We recommend creating these test records: - A Contact - A Campaign with a one-time Job and a few Shifts - A Campaign with a Recurring Job and a few Recurring Shifts into the future - Some completed hours for the Contact in both the one-time and recurring Jobs For detailed instructions on creating Campaigns, Jobs, and Shifts, read up on how to [plan a one-time event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_one_time_event.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can plan your one-time event as you wish, but we have some steps that we think will help."). ## Review Volunteer Hours Workflow Rules When entering hours, volunteers don't always fill in an End Date or a Planned Start Date & Time. If these fields are left empty, Volunteers for Salesforce uses workflow rules to automatically fill them in: the End Date is set to the Start Date that the volunteer entered, and the Planned Start Date & Time is set to the Shift's Start Date & Time. Review the Volunteer Hours workflow rules. Then decide if you want to keep them as is, deactivate them, or clone them to edit the values. 1. From Setup, enter Workflow Rules in the Quick Find box, then select **Workflow Rules**. 2. Review these rules, deactivate unneeded ones, and clone any that require editing. - Volunteer Hours - Set End Date - Volunteer Hours - Set Planned Start Date & Time ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you clone a rule, be sure to deactivate the original before you activate your new rule. Otherwise, you'll have dueling rules which could yield unexpected results. # Test Customizable Rollups in your Sandbox Before enabling Customizable Rollups in your Production org, we highly recommend testing and validating the results in a Full or Partial Sandbox. The best way to validate rollup values after enabling Customizable Rollups is to use field history tracking. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Make sure that Customizable Rollups is NOT enabled in your org when you start this process. - **[Track Field History](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_test_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By enabling field history on the rollup target fields on Accounts, Contacts, and General Accounting Units (GAU), you can easily identify changes to rollup field values after switching to Customizable Rollups. - **[Expected Differences](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_test_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The first time Customizable Rollups jobs are run, there may be changes to a few of the rollup fields. ## Track Field History By enabling field history on the rollup target fields on Accounts, Contacts, and General Accounting Units (GAU), you can easily identify changes to rollup field values after switching to Customizable Rollups. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Bulk Data Processes**. Run the Rollup Donations Batch and Rollup Allocations Batch jobs. 3. After those jobs have successfully completed, [enable field history](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.security_field_history_tracking.htm&type=5&language=en_US) on the rollup target fields on the Account, Contact, and GAU objects. 4. Add the Field History related lists (Account History, Contact History and General Accounting Unit History) to the appropriate page layouts. 5. In **NPSP Settings**, go to ****Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**** and enable Customizable Rollups. 6. In **NPSP Settings**, go to **Bulk Data Processes** and run the Rollup Donations Batch and Rollup Allocations Batch jobs. 7. Spot check (or use a report) to look at changes to the rollup fields that you enabled field history on. ## Expected Differences The first time Customizable Rollups jobs are run, there may be changes to a few of the rollup fields. Here are some reasons why the data may be different: ![A History related list showing differences in calculations from legacy rollups to Customizable Rollups](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/crlp_calc_diffs.png) - **Average Gift**: There may be a rounding difference in how Customizable Rollups calculates and stores the Average Gift amount on the Contact and Account record. In the image above, the amounts appear to be the same but behind the scenes there is a difference in the decimal places, causing Salesforce to _think_ the field values are different. - **Last and First Gift Amount**: With legacy rollups, there isn't consistent logic for determining the very first or very last gift when there was more than one gift on the same date. When Customizable Rollups is enabled, the First and Last Gift Amounts are explicitly determined by looking at the CreatedDate timestamp on the Opportunity record. This ensures that the First Gift Amount is actually from the very first Opportunity created on the earliest date and the Last Gift Amount is the from the very last Opportunity created on the latest date. - **N Day Rollups**: If Customizable Rollups jobs are run the day after legacy rollups were run, you may see a change to Gifts in the Last N Days (since the rollup jobs were run on different days). This is completely normal. To avoid N Day differences when comparing Legacy Rollup results to Customizable Rollup results, be sure to run the legacy rollup job before the Customizable Rollups jobs on the same day. - **Multicurrency**: Legacy rollups convert everything into the corporate currency and then back into the Contact or Account's currency. This causes some inaccuracies in conversion. Customizable Rollups calculations for multicurrency are more accurate, and they support Advanced Multicurrency (with Dated Exchange Rates). - **Contact Roles**: There may be some discrepancies in hard credit rollup calculations for Household gifts, if the Primary Contact on the Opportunity is different than the Primary Opportunity Contact Role. That is because Customizable Rollups look at the Primary Contact on the Opportunity, while legacy rollups look at the Opportunity Contact Role marked as Primary. # Test Load the Volunteers for Salesforce Signup Page on Your Site It's time for the first big reveal. Let's see how your Site looks and verify that it works. 1. Click the Site URL. ![Site URL link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_url.png) 2. As expected, the Under Construction page loads. (It's the Visualforce page that you specified as the Active Site Home Page when you created the Site.) ![Site Under Construction page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_under_construction.png) 3. In your browser's address bar, add this text to the end of the Site's URL: /GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS (Note the two underscore characters between _Volunteers_and _VolunteersSignupFS_.) The full URL looks something like this (where mydomain is the custom domain that you registered): http://mydomain.force.com/GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS If you specified a Default Web Address when you created your site, include the label in the URL, like so: http://mydomain.force.com/yoursitelabel/GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS 4. Hit **Enter** to load the page. Now we're in business! Check out the Volunteers Signup page. ![Volunteer Signup page on the site](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/site_vol_signup_page.png) 5. Enter some test data in the form and submit it. Create a new volunteer and use your own email address so you can see how thank-you and notification emails look. 6. Back in Salesforce, find the newly created Contact. The Volunteer Status field shows New Sign Up. ![Contact that was created from the web signup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/contact_new_web_signup.png) Curious how the other V4S pages look? Feel free to preview them now. | To See This Page | Add This to the Site URL | | --- | --- | | Generic Volunteer Signup Page | /GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignup or /⁠GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersSignupFS | | Calendar Page | /GW\_Volunteers\_\_JobCalendar | | Job Listings Page | /GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListing or /⁠GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListingFS | | Volunteer Report Hours Page | /GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersReportHours | | Personal Site Contact Lookup | /GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactLookup | | Personal Site Contact Info (For now, loading this page redirects you to the Personal Site Contact Lookup page, because we haven't done the required configuration for the Personal Site.) | /GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo | Great work! Having a functional volunteer signup web form is a huge milestone. Next, customize and format the signup form so that it looks and feels consistent with the rest of your website. When you know the general customization principles for the signup page, it's easy to apply them to other pages. # Test Score The score on a section of a specific test or a composite score. - **[Sample Uses for Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relate a Test Score with a Test to track a prospective student's composite (overall) scores on tests like the SAT or GRE. Alternatively, track section-specific scores to assess student readiness for a post-high school education. - **[Configure Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Test Score object up to date and add custom metadata. - **[Create a Test Score Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create a test score record in Education Data Architecture. ## Sample Uses for Test Score Relate a Test Score with a Test to track a prospective student's composite (overall) scores on tests like the SAT or GRE. Alternatively, track section-specific scores to assess student readiness for a post-high school education. For example, consider individually tracking the math, evidence-based reading, and writing scores of the SAT to determine which subjects students need more help preparing for. ## Configure Test Score Keep the Test Score object up to date and add custom metadata. ### Keep Up with Test Score Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.118

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add the following fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Letter Score

    • Status
### Add Custom Metadata to Test Score Records With Custom Metadata Types, you can create your own setup objects whose records are metadata rather than data. You can add a definition of a test score that includes how the test is graded, the scoring range, and the passing value. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, search for and select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Test Score Definition, click **Manage Records**. 4. Enter the relevant information and click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Test Score Definition. ## Create a Test Score Record Use these steps to create a test score record in Education Data Architecture. 1. From the Test record related to this score, click **New** on the Test Scores related list. 2. Enter relevant details about this Test Score. 3. Click **Save**. Or, if you're creating multiple Test Score records, click **Save & New**. # Test Score The score on a section of a specific test or a composite score. - **[Sample Uses for Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Relate a Test Score with a Test to track a prospective student's composite (overall) scores on tests like the SAT or GRE. Alternatively, track section-specific scores to assess student readiness for a post-high school education. - **[Configure Test Score](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Keep the Test Score object up to date and add custom metadata. - **[Create a Test Score Record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_test_score.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to create a test score record in K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Sample Uses for Test Score Relate a Test Score with a Test to track a prospective student's composite (overall) scores on tests like the SAT or GRE. Alternatively, track section-specific scores to assess student readiness for a post-high school education. For example, consider individually tracking the math, evidence-based reading, and writing scores of the SAT to determine which subjects students need more help preparing for. ## Configure Test Score Keep the Test Score object up to date and add custom metadata. ### Keep Up with Test Score Updates Consider these updates, depending on which version of K-12 Architecture Kit you originally installed:
If Installed Before Version Configuration Task
1.22

For more information, see Add Custom Fields and Picklist Values.

  • Add the following fields to your page layouts, as needed.

    • Credentialing Identifier

    • Letter Score

    • Status
1.8

Create a K-12 All Test Scores list view:

  • Sharing Settings: All users can see this list view

  • Filter by Owner: All test scores

  • Display order: Test Score Name, Test Type, Subject Area, Score, Percentile. See Create or Clone a List View.

  • Add K-12 All Test Scores as a related list on Test. For more information, see Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release.

  • Compact Layout with fields in this order: Test Name, Contact, Test Type, Test Date
 

Add the following quick actions to the Test Score page layout to make them available from Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions bar: Edit, New Note, Printable View, Change Owner, Clone, and Delete.
 

Configure the New Case quick action:

  1. Ensure the correct user profiles have permission to specify a new record type for the Case object.

  2. Edit the unmanaged New Case global action to specify an Incident record type for Case.

  3. On the Test Score page layout, replace the default New Case quick action with the New Case action provided in this update. If you see two New Case quick actions, use the unmanaged one (not k12kit__New Case).
### Add Custom Metadata to Test Score Records With Custom Metadata Types, you can create your own setup objects whose records are metadata rather than data. You can add a definition of a test score that includes how the test is graded, the scoring range, and the passing value. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. In the Quick Find box, search for and select **Custom Metadata Types**. 3. Next to Test Score Definition, click **Manage Records**. 4. Enter the relevant information and click **Save**. Or click **Save & New** to create another Test Score Definition. ## Create a Test Score Record Use these steps to create a test score record in K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. From the Test record related to this score, click **New** on the Test Scores related list. 2. Enter relevant details about this Test Score. 3. Click **Save**. Or, if you're creating multiple Test Score records, click **Save & New**. # Test Your Customized Sites Pages When you're happy with your Site's contents and styling, make sure that the pages load and look as intended before handing them over to your web developer. If you've implemented some, but not all of the available V4S pages, then some of these test cases may not apply. 1. Fill out the Contact Lookup form for your existing test Contact. 2. Click through in the confirmation email and confirm access to the existing Contact's Personal Site. 3. Fill out the Contact Lookup form for a new volunteer. 4. Confirm that the new signup creates the appropriate Lead or Contact record. 5. If creating Leads from signups, confirm that upon lead conversion, volunteer data is copied correctly from Lead records to the Contact records. 6. Confirm that volunteers can see volunteer jobs, sign up for shifts, and receive properly configured thank you emails and reminder emails. 7. Confirm that your volunteer coordinator receives notification emails. 8. Confirm that links to external signups work. 9. Confirm that volunteers can report their hours. 10. Spot check any customized terminology or translations. # Things to Know Before Enabling Customizable Rollups If you're starting from an NPSP Trial in version 3.155 (May 2019), Customizable Rollups are enabled by default. All other orgs will need to enable Customizable Rollups. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important _Customizable Rollups are only available in orgs using NPSP and the Household Account Model._ If you don't know which version of NPSP you're using, check out [Which Version of NPSP Am I Using?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed.") to find out. [Enabling Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them.") automatically makes the following changes in your org: - Convert existing NPSP Donor Statistics settings into Customizable Rollups settings - Convert existing out-of-box and User Defined Rollups to Customizable Rollups ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you have User Defined Rollups for the Household object in your organization, and you enable Customizable Rollups, those Household User Defined Rollups won't be be converted, because the Household object is deprecated in the Household Account Model. - Remove NPSP Settings page for User Defined Rollups - Remove NPSP Settings page for Donor Statistics - Remove and modify existing NPSP Settings options for rollups, as follows:
NPSP Setting Location Action Notes
Enable Soft Credits NPSP Settings | Donations | Contact Roles Removed Defined in Customizable Rollups
Soft Credit Roles NPSP Settings | Donations | Contact Roles Removed Defined in a filter group in Customizable Rollups
Rollup N Day Value NPSP Settings | Donations | Donor Statistics Removed Defined in Customizable Rollups
Use Fiscal Year for Rollups NPSP Settings | Donations | Donor Statistics Removed Defined in Customizable Rollups
Rollup Batch Size NPSP Settings | Donations | Donor Statistics Moved NPSP Settings | Bulk Data Processes | Batch Process Settings

Opp Rec Types Excluded for Account Rollup, Opp Types Excluded for Account Rollup, Opp Rec Types Excluded for Contact Rollup, Opp Types Excluded for Contact Rollup

NPSP Settings | Donations | Donor Statistics Removed Defined in a filter group in Customizable Rollups

Rollup N Day Value

 NPSP Settings | Donations | GAU Allocations Removed Defined in Customizable Rollups

Use Fiscal Year for Rollups

 NPSP Settings | Donations | GAU Allocations Removed Defined in Customizable Rollups

Membership Record Type Names

NPSP Settings | Donations | Memberships Removed Defined in a filter group in Customizable Rollups
Enabling Customizable Rollups also creates batch jobs that run nightly to calculate rollups. These batch jobs replace the old rollups batch jobs and are named as follows: - NPSP 01A - Customizable Rollups - Account Hard Credit - NPSP 01B - Customizable Rollups - Account Hard Credit Skew - NPSP 02A - Customizable Rollups - Contact Hard Credit - NPSP 02B - Customizable Rollups - Contact Hard Credit Skew - NPSP 03A - Customizable Rollups - Account-level Contact Soft Credit - NPSP 03B - Customizable Rollups - Account Soft Credit - NPSP 03C - Customizable Rollups - Account-level Contact Soft Credit Skew - NPSP 03D - Customizable Rollups - Account Soft Credit Skew - NPSP 04A - Customizable Rollups - Contact Soft Credit - NPSP 04B - Customizable Rollups - Contact Soft Credit Skew - NPSP 05 - Customizable Rollups - General Accounting Units - NPSP 06A - Customizable Rollups - Recurring Donations - NPSP 06B - Customizable Rollups - Recurring Donations Skew The new jobs are scheduled to start at 11 p.m., by default, and run at staggered times. If you want the jobs to run at a different time, you'll need to manually reschedule them. For more information, see [Edit or Reschedule NPSP Scheduled Jobs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_edit_or_reschedule_scheduled_jobs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about editing or rescheduling NPSP scheduled jobs."). You can also change the batch size for each job. Go to **NPSP Settings | Batch Process Settings** and update the appropriate Batch Job Size fields. We recommend that you [enable and try out Customizable Rollups in a Sandbox org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_test_custom_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before enabling Customizable Rollups in your Production org, we highly recommend testing and validating the results in a Full or Partial Sandbox. The best way to validate rollup values after enabling Customizable Rollups is to use field history tracking.") before turning it on in your Production org. That will allow you to test it out and confirm that you're seeing expected results. Keep in mind that you can also easily move any **new** rollups and filter groups you create in your Sandbox org to your Production org by [deploying the Custom Metadata Types](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=changesets_inbound_deploy.htm) that define them. Note that you can't use change sets to deploy NPSP out-of-box rollups into Production. # Time Block Time Block represents a specific period of time, often as it relates to Course Offerings. - **[Sample Uses for Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's look at some possible uses for the Time Block object. - **[Prerequisites for Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create a Time Block, it's a good idea to have an Account set up to relate it to (for example, an Account that represents the entire school, or a school within a school). - **[Configure Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. - **[Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data. ## Sample Uses for Time Block Let's look at some possible uses for the Time Block object. - University—Define the hours when specific courses are offered. - K-12—Define the hours when class periods are held. - Any educational institution—Specify hours when certain facilities are available for use. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note When deciding how to use Time Block, it's important to consider its relationship with Course Offering and Course Offering Schedule. See [Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data.") for more information. ## Prerequisites for Time Block Before you create a Time Block, it's a good idea to have an Account set up to relate it to (for example, an Account that represents the entire school, or a school within a school). ## Configure Time Block Consider these updates, depending on which version of Education Data Architecture you originally installed. ### Keep Up with Time Block Updates | If Installed Before Version | Configuration Task | | --- | --- | | 1.74 | Add the Time Blocks related list to the appropriate Account page layouts. Learn about updating page layouts in [Display a New Custom Object After a Product Release](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_display_cust_obj_post_rel.htm). | ## Create Time Block Records Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When creating Time Block records: - Use Time Block on a Course Offering only if you don’t expect to use the Course Offering Schedule object, which tracks the same kind of data. - If you do use Time Block on a Course Offering and you create a Course Offering Schedule, the Time Block's Start Time and End Time on the Course Offering is _not_ copied to the Start Time and End Time on the Course Offering Schedule records. - If you choose to use the Time Block on the Course Offering Schedule, the Start Time and End Time on the Course Offering Schedule automatically populates from the Time Block record. We recommend that you not manually update Course Offering Schedule values if you are using Time Blocks. Manual updates prompt an error asking you to adjust the start and end times to match the Time Block upon saving. 1. From an Account record, like an Educational Institution, click **New** in the Time Blocks related list. 2. Enter a name for the Time Block and start and end times. Don’t change the Account name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. Click **Save & New**, and continue creating additional Time Block records as needed. # Time Block Time Block represents a specific period of time, often as it relates to Course Offerings. - **[Sample Uses for Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Let's look at some possible uses for the Time Block object. - **[Prerequisites for Time Block](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create a Time Block, it's a good idea to have an Account set up to relate it to (for example, an Account that represents the entire school, or a school within a school). - **[Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data. ## Sample Uses for Time Block Let's look at some possible uses for the Time Block object. - University—Define the hours when specific courses are offered. - K-12—Define the hours when class periods are held. - Any educational institution—Specify hours when certain facilities are available for use. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note When deciding how to use Time Block, it's important to consider its relationship with Course Offering and Course Offering Schedule. See [Create Time Block Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_time_block.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data.") for more information. ## Prerequisites for Time Block Before you create a Time Block, it's a good idea to have an Account set up to relate it to (for example, an Account that represents the entire school, or a school within a school). ## Create Time Block Records Create Time Block records for specific blocks of time you want to track at your school. Typically, you create multiple records when you first start implementing Time Block data. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_tip.png) Tip When creating Time Block records: - Use Time Block on a Course Offering only if you don’t expect to use the Course Offering Schedule object, which tracks the same kind of data. - If you do use Time Block on a Course Offering and you create a Course Offering Schedule, the Time Block's Start Time and End Time on the Course Offering is _not_ copied to the Start Time and End Time on the Course Offering Schedule records. - If you choose to use the Time Block on the Course Offering Schedule, the Start Time and End Time on the Course Offering Schedule automatically populates from the Time Block record. We recommend that you not manually update Course Offering Schedule values if you are using Time Blocks. Manual updates prompt an error asking you to adjust the start and end times to match the Time Block upon saving. 1. From an Account record, like an Educational Institution, click **New** in the Time Blocks related list. 2. Enter a name for the Time Block and start and end times. Don’t change the Account name. 3. Fill in optional fields as needed. Click **Save & New**, and continue creating additional Time Block records as needed. # Track Additional Details for a Benefit Participant With Field Sets Review benefit-specific additional details while tracking participant attendance by using custom fields in field sets on the Benefit Disbursement object. For example, if you’re running a counseling session, you can capture additional details such as participants' mental health, any prior experience of attending such workshops, and so on. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program Management is enabled. SEE ALSO [_Salesforce Help_: Track Attendance and Disbursements for Benefit Participants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_pm_track_attendance_and_disbursements_for_benefit_participants.htm) # Track and Identify Your Volunteers In Volunteers for Salesforce, Contact records are highly important because they are used to track all of your volunteers—active, inactive, and prospective. Each Contact record contains a volunteer's phone, email, and address, their special skills, the days and times they're available to volunteer, their volunteer status, and a Volunteer Hours related list where you can see how many hours they've committed to your organization. - **[Create a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_track.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create new Contacts to track potential and current Volunteers in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Capture Volunteer Skills and Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_track.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Often when planning an event, you know that you need volunteers with special skills. For example, the local kitchen where Sarah volunteers needs people with food preparation skills. And when the kitchen's web developer recently revamped the website, she recruited volunteers with computer skills. - **[Find Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_track.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you've entered skills and availability information for some of your volunteers, you can use the Find Volunteers feature to locate volunteers you need for a specific type of job. ## Create a Contact Create new Contacts to track potential and current Volunteers in Volunteers for Salesforce. 1. Click the Contacts tab. If you don't see the Contacts tab, click the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), then click **All Items**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter the person's name, email, address, and any other information you have. 4. Click **Save**. ## Capture Volunteer Skills and Availability Often when planning an event, you know that you need volunteers with special skills. For example, the local kitchen where Sarah volunteers needs people with food preparation skills. And when the kitchen's web developer recently revamped the website, she recruited volunteers with computer skills. Volunteers for Salesforce provides fields on the Contact to track a volunteer's skills, status (whether the volunteer is active or not), and availability (days and times during the week). These fields are conveniently located in a Volunteer Information section on the Contact record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see these fields, you might need to edit your Contact page layout to include them. Administrators can also customize the values in each field to match the needs of your organization. See [Capture Volunteer Skills and Availability](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_track.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Volunteers for Salesforce, Contact records are highly important because they are used to track all of your volunteers—active, inactive, and prospective. Each Contact record contains a volunteer's phone, email, and address, their special skills, the days and times they're available to volunteer, their volunteer status, and a Volunteer Hours related list where you can see how many hours they've committed to your organization.") for more information. 1. Navigate to the volunteer's Contact record. 2. In the Volunteer Information section, double-click on one of the fields to edit. 3. Enter information as needed. Pay special attention to these fields, as they are useful when trying to find specific volunteers: - **Volunteer Status**—the status of the volunteer. Values include Active, Inactive, New Sign Up, and Prospective. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note When you assign a Volunteer to a job or shift and select a Status of Confirmed or Completed, the Volunteer Status field is automatically updated to Active. - **Volunteer Skills**—the special skills the volunteer possesses. Ctrl+click to select multiple values. - **Volunteer Availability**—the days and times of day that the Contact is available to volunteer. Ctrl+click to select multiple values. ![Entering volunteer skills and availability](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_skills_availability.png) 4. Click **Save**. Now you can use this information to [find volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_track.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Volunteers for Salesforce, Contact records are highly important because they are used to track all of your volunteers—active, inactive, and prospective. Each Contact record contains a volunteer's phone, email, and address, their special skills, the days and times they're available to volunteer, their volunteer status, and a Volunteer Hours related list where you can see how many hours they've committed to your organization."). ## Find Volunteers If you've entered skills and availability information for some of your volunteers, you can use the Find Volunteers feature to locate volunteers you need for a specific type of job. 1. Click the Find Volunteers tab. 2. Choose your criteria. By default, you can search using the volunteer-specific fields: Volunteer Status, Volunteer Availability, and Volunteer Skills. Admins can also expand the search criteria to include more Contact fields. See [Configure Fields on the Find Volunteers Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization.") for more information. ![Find Volunteers page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/find_volunteers.png) 3. Click **Find** to see a list of matching Contacts. ![Entering criteria to find volunteers](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/find_volunteers_results.png) Once you find the volunteers you need, you can [assign them to a Job or Shift](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_manage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "There are multiple ways to assign volunteers to Shifts, including allowing volunteers to sign up directly from your website (more on that in Sign Up for a Job Shift.) You can also sign up volunteers yourself by assigning them to Shifts in Volunteers for Salesforce.") right from the results section of the page. # Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups in Education Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note To use this feature, the person account page must be set as an org-wide default. Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). In the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, two sections show donor and gift-related metrics: The Donor Giving Summary is on the Overview tab of the donor's business account page. The Gift Designation Summary is on the Gift Designation Page. If you don't see the Donor Giving Summary or the Gift Designation Summary in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, it probably hasn't been set up yet. To find information on how to set up these rollups, see the articles linked at the end of this page. Learn more about the Data Processing Engine calculations in the developer documentation for [DonorGiftSummary](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_donorgiftsummary.htm) and [GiftDesignation](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_giftdesignation.htm). ## Donor Giving Summary Rollups The Donor Giving Summary is on the donor's account page in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app. You can change which data is shown in the summary by editing it in the Lightning App Builder. The Donor Giving Summary is automatically updated after it receives data from the related objects. Recurring Gift Summary Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Total Paid Recurring Installments, Total Paid Recurring Installments Amount, First Recurring Gift Start Date, Current Recurring Gift Start Date, and Last Recurring Gift Payment Date. Soft Credit Summary Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Soft Credit Count, Last Soft Credit Amount, Last Soft Credit Date, First Soft Credit Date, First Soft Credit Amount Highest Soft Credit Date, Highest Soft Credit Amount, Total Hard and Soft Credits, Total Hard and Soft Credit Amount. Notable Gift Metrics Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Best Gift Year, Gift Count, First Gift Amount, First Gift Campaign, Highest Gift Amount, Highest Gift Year Amount, and Average Gift Amount. Gift History Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: First Gift Date, Second Gift Date, Last Two Years Gift Count, Gifts Two Years Ago Amount, Last Year Gift Count, Gifts Last Year Amount, Lowest Gift Amount, and Total Gifts Amount. Gift Year Summary Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Gifts This Year Amount, Current Year Gift Count, Days Since Last Gift, Last Gift Amount, and Last Gift Date. Pledged Revenue Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Booked Pledges and Total Bookable Revenue. This rollup shows the total value of formally committed (written) pledges and the total value of all transactions and booked pledges minus any transactions associated with booked pledges from the donor. For example: Pledged revenue = \[(Total formally committed pledges) + (Total transactions and booked pledges)\] - (Transactions associated with booked pledges from the donor). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see pledged revenue data in the rollups, add Booked Pledges and Total Bookable Revenue to the Donor Gift Summary and then run the DonorGiftSummary DPE job. ## Gift Designation Rollups The Gift Designation page in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app updates the gift data as you record designations. You can change which data is shown in the summary by editing it in the Lightning App Builder. Overall Statistics Lists the following metrics from the Gift Designation object: the First Paid Transaction Date, Last Paid Transaction Date, Total Transaction Count, Total Transaction Amount, Lowest Transaction Amount, Highest Transaction Amount, and Average Transaction Amount. Statistics by Year Lists the following metrics from the Gift Designation object: the Current Year Transaction Count, Current Year Transaction Amount, Last Year Transaction Count, Last Year Transaction Amount, Last Two Year Transaction Count, and Last Two Year Transaction Amount. SEE ALSO [Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_start_configure_new_data_processing_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Actionable Lists and Fundraising rollups and summaries with Data Pipelines and Data Processing Engine.") [Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use a schedule-triggered flow to automatically receive updates to your fundraising rollup calculations.") # Track Gift and Donor Trends with Rollups in Nonprofit Metrics related to donor giving and gift designations are available at a glance in the Fundraising Philanthropy and Partnerships app. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note To use this feature, the person account page must be set as an org-wide default. Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). In the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, two sections show donor and gift-related metrics: The Donor Giving Summary is on the Overview tab of the donor's business account page. The Gift Designation Summary is on the Gift Designation Page. If you don't see the Donor Giving Summary or the Gift Designation Summary in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, it probably hasn't been set up yet. To find information on how to set up these rollups, see the articles linked at the end of this page. Learn more about the Data Processing Engine calculations in the developer documentation for [DonorGiftSummary](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_donorgiftsummary.htm) and [GiftDesignation](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_giftdesignation.htm). ## Donor Giving Summary Rollups The Donor Giving Summary is on the donor's account page in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app. You can change which data is shown in the summary by editing it in the Lightning App Builder. The Donor Giving Summary is automatically updated after it receives data from the related objects. Recurring Gift Summary Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Total Paid Recurring Installments, Total Paid Recurring Installments Amount, First Recurring Gift Start Date, Current Recurring Gift Start Date, and Last Recurring Gift Payment Date. Soft Credit Summary Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Soft Credit Count, Last Soft Credit Amount, Last Soft Credit Date, First Soft Credit Date, First Soft Credit Amount Highest Soft Credit Date, Highest Soft Credit Amount, Total Hard and Soft Credits, Total Hard and Soft Credit Amount. Notable Gift Metrics Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Best Gift Year, Gift Count, First Gift Amount, First Gift Campaign, Highest Gift Amount, Highest Gift Year Amount, and Average Gift Amount. Gift History Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: First Gift Date, Second Gift Date, Last Two Years Gift Count, Gifts Two Years Ago Amount, Last Year Gift Count, Gifts Last Year Amount, Lowest Gift Amount, and Total Gifts Amount. Gift Year Summary Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Gifts This Year Amount, Current Year Gift Count, Days Since Last Gift, Last Gift Amount, and Last Gift Date. Pledged Revenue Rolls up this data from the Donor Gift Summary object: Booked Pledges and Total Bookable Revenue. This rollup shows the total value of formally committed (written) pledges and the total value of all transactions and booked pledges minus any transactions associated with booked pledges from the donor. For example: Pledged revenue = \[(Total formally committed pledges) + (Total transactions and booked pledges)\] - (Transactions associated with booked pledges from the donor). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see pledged revenue data in the rollups, add Booked Pledges and Total Bookable Revenue to the Donor Gift Summary and then run the DonorGiftSummary DPE job. ## Gift Designation Rollups The Gift Designation page in the Philanthropy and Partnerships app updates the gift data as you record designations. You can change which data is shown in the summary by editing it in the Lightning App Builder. Overall Statistics Lists the following metrics from the Gift Designation object: the First Paid Transaction Date, Last Paid Transaction Date, Total Transaction Count, Total Transaction Amount, Lowest Transaction Amount, Highest Transaction Amount, and Average Transaction Amount. Statistics by Year Lists the following metrics from the Gift Designation object: the Current Year Transaction Count, Current Year Transaction Amount, Last Year Transaction Count, Last Year Transaction Amount, Last Two Year Transaction Count, and Last Two Year Transaction Amount. SEE ALSO [Clone Templates for Fundraising Data Rollups and Lists](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_start_configure_new_data_processing_engine.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create Actionable Lists and Fundraising rollups and summaries with Data Pipelines and Data Processing Engine.") [Set Up Automatic Updates For Fundraising Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_automatic_updates_for_fundraising_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use a schedule-triggered flow to automatically receive updates to your fundraising rollup calculations.") # Track Outreach Trends With Rollups in Education Get data on individual campaigns in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Use the Fundraising campaign and outreach source code to see metrics related to campaigns at a glance. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Outreach Summary on your Campaign and Outreach Source Code pages in the Fundraising apps, see [Set Up and Configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US). Learn more about the Data Processing Engine calculations in the developer documentation for [OutreachSummary](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_outreachsummary.htm). Outreach Summary data rollups are available on the Campaign and Outreach Source Code objects. The Campaign Summary can be found on the Campaign page in any of the four Fundraising apps. The Outreach Source Code Summary can be found on the Outreach Source Code page in any of the four Fundraising apps. The Campaign and Outreach Source Code summaries update automatically when the components receive data from their related objects. You can change the data shown in the Outreach Summary by editing it in the Lightning App Builder. These summaries include rollups of the following campaign data. Campaign Summary or Outreach Source Code Summary Rolls up data from Gift Count, Response Rate, and Total Gift Transaction Amount from the Campaign object. Donor Counts Rolls up data from Donor Count, Onetime Donor Count, and Recurring Donor Count from the Campaign object. Gift Averages Rolls up data from Average Gift Amount, Average Onetime Gift Amount, and Average Recurring Gift Amount from the Campaign object. SEE ALSO: - [Configure Fundraising Rollup and Summary Calculations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_configure_fundraising_rollup_and_summary_calculations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Fundraising with Data Processing Engine to calculate Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) scores.") # Track Outreach Trends With Rollups in Nonprofit Get data on individual campaigns in Fundraising. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Use the Fundraising campaign and outreach source code to see metrics related to campaigns at a glance. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the Outreach Summary on your Campaign and Outreach Source Code pages in the Fundraising apps, see [Set Up and Configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_configure_fundraising.htm&language=en_US). Learn more about the Data Processing Engine calculations in the developer documentation for [OutreachSummary](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.nonprofit_cloud.meta/nonprofit_cloud/npc_fundraising_api_objects_outreachsummary.htm). Outreach Summary data rollups are available on the Campaign and Outreach Source Code objects. The Campaign Summary can be found on the Campaign page in any of the four Fundraising apps. The Outreach Source Code Summary can be found on the Outreach Source Code page in any of the four Fundraising apps. The Campaign and Outreach Source Code summaries update automatically when the components receive data from their related objects. You can change the data shown in the Outreach Summary by editing it in the Lightning App Builder. These summaries include rollups of the following campaign data. Campaign Summary or Outreach Source Code Summary Rolls up data from Gift Count, Response Rate, and Total Gift Transaction Amount from the Campaign object. Donor Counts Rolls up data from Donor Count, Onetime Donor Count, and Recurring Donor Count from the Campaign object. Gift Averages Rolls up data from Average Gift Amount, Average Onetime Gift Amount, and Average Recurring Gift Amount from the Campaign object. SEE ALSO: - [Configure Fundraising Rollup and Summary Calculations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_configure_fundraising_rollup_and_summary_calculations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Fundraising with Data Processing Engine to calculate Recency, Frequency, Monetary Value (RFM) scores.") # Track Program and Benefit Activities Chronologically Use the Timeline component to get a comprehensive and chronological view of your program and benefit activities. View all your past, current, and upcoming sessions or participant interactions for a program or benefit in one place. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Program Management is enabled. See Also: - [_Salesforce Help_: View Events Using Timeline in Salesforce (can be outdated or unavailable during release preview)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.timeline.htm&type=5) # Track the Impact of Education Programs Use Outcome Management to define, measure, and evaluate the impact of your institution's outcome strategy. To achieve the desired outcomes, an educational institution creates various programs, such as for advising, mentoring, and other non-scholastic programs.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Outcome Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.outcome_management.htm&type=5) # Track Upgrades, Downgrades, and Other Recurring Giving Changes Track and report on monthly and other recurring giving changes including upgrades, downgrades, payment method updates, schedule changes, and status changes. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_track_rd_changes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Recurring giving rarely stays the same. Donors increase or decrease their giving, pause their giving, and change forms of payment. By monitoring those changes over time, you gain valuable insights about your sustaining donors. - **[Change Log In Action: Upgrade a Recurring Donation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_track_rd_changes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** See how the Recurring Donation Change Log works by walking through a typical donation change scenario. - **[Report on Recurring Donation Change Logs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_track_rd_changes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Viewing all changes to your Recurring Donations together in a report is a powerful way to analyze the performance of your sustainer program. ## Overview Recurring giving rarely stays the same. Donors increase or decrease their giving, pause their giving, and change forms of payment. By monitoring those changes over time, you gain valuable insights about your sustaining donors. Recurring giving rarely stays the same. Donors increase or decrease their giving, pause their giving, change forms of payment, and other changes. By monitoring those changes over time, you gain valuable insights about your sustaining donors. Standard Salesforce tools only get you part of the way. The Recurring Donation Change Log helps complete the picture. The Recurring Donation Change Log helps answers questions like: - How well are the monthly giving upgrade appeals working - Are lapsed donors rejoining - How many donors converted from credit cards to ACH direct deposits? When you update a Recurring Donation, the Recurring Donation Change Log automatically records those changes. View the change details directly on Recurring Donation records and in reports. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note **Administrators**: Learn how to configure the Recurring Donation Change Log in [Configure Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set security permissions, deploy components, and configure settings to use Recurring Donations in your org."). ## Change Log In Action: Upgrade a Recurring Donation See how the Recurring Donation Change Log works by walking through a typical donation change scenario. Upgrading the amount of a monthly donation is a great way to illustrate how the Recurring Donation Change Log works. Let's walk through an example scenario. Andrea Millman has been a monthly donor for almost a year now. As part of your organization's fundraising strategy, you send out an upgrade appeal around a recurring donor's one-year anniversary. Your organization uses Campaigns in Salesforce to track fundraising appeals. Andrea originally became a monthly donor during your New Member Acquisition 2020 Campaign. Now your organization has sent out an upgrade appeal through the Monthly Donor Upgrade 2021 Campaign. In response to your solicitation, Andrea upgrades her donation from $50 per month to $75 per month. To enter the upgrade: 1. Locate the Recurring Donation to upgrade. 2. Edit and change the Amount as requested by the donor. In our example, enter $75. Notice that Change Type automatically updates to Upgrade. 3. Update the Campaign. In our example, use the Monthly Donor Upgrade 2021 Campaign. 4. Save the Recurring Donation. Find the Change Log component on the Recurring Donation page layout and notice the changes tracked there. ![Recurring Donation Change Log component showing an upgrade from $50 per month to $75.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/change-log-component.png) Andrea continues to increase her giving for the following year, but then asks to pause her giving for a few months before resuming again. Once she resumes, she changes her payment method from Credit Card to ACH. The Change Log component only shows the most recent changes. To see the entire timeline of changes to a Recurring Donation, click **View All** in the Change Log component. ![A complete Change Log showing all five Change Log records.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/change-log-full.png) The Recurring Donation Change Log automatically assigns a Change Type of Upgrade or Downgrade, when the Amount or Annual Value changes. NPSP also creates a Change Log when the Status, Campaign, or Payment Method change, but doesn’t assign a Change Type. Talk to your administrator about configuring additional Change Types for these scenarios. ## Report on Recurring Donation Change Logs Viewing all changes to your Recurring Donations together in a report is a powerful way to analyze the performance of your sustainer program. To create a Recurring Donation Change Log report: 1. Go to Reports. 2. Create a new report with the **Recurring Donations with Recurring Donation Change Logs** report type. 3. Adjust the Show me filter as needed and add or remove columns to suit your needs. These columns are a good start: 1. Recurring Donation Name 2. Previous Amount 3. New Amount 4. Change Type (from Recurring Donation Change Log: Info) 5. Status (from Recurring Donation: Info) 6. Previous Status 7. New Status 8. Effective Date (from Recurring Donation Change Log: Info) 9. Recurring Donation Change Log Num. Set this column to Sort Ascending. 4. Save and run the report. ![Recurring Donation Change Log report.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/change-log-report.png) Our example includes a formula that shows the Amount Change for each Recurring Donation Change Log. Add a row-level formula field to calculate the amount change. Learn how to use formulas in reports, in [Write a Row-Level Formula](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=analytics.reports_formulas_row_level_add.htm&type=5). # Track Volunteer Participation with Reports and Dashboards Volunteers for Salesforce includes reports and dashboards that provide a ton of useful information about your volunteer program. You can use these reports and dashboards to analyze volunteer trends so that you can decide where to focus your volunteer efforts. Volunteers for Salesforce includes more than 25 reports and one dashboard. - **[View the Volunteers Dashboard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteers Dashboard provides a ton of valuable data for the Volunteer Manager. - **[View Volunteers Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce provides over 25 valuable reports out-of-the-box. You can use them as is, or customize them to meet your needs. ## View the Volunteers Dashboard The Volunteers Dashboard provides a ton of valuable data for the Volunteer Manager. | Component | Description | | --- | --- | | Volunteer Leaderboard (Top Volunteers by Lifetime Hours) | A list of the top volunteers with the most lifetime hours. | | Top Volunteers by Recent Hours | A list of the top volunteers for the current and previous calendar year. | | Volunteers Last Month | A list of volunteers, and the number of hours worked, in the last month. | | Total Hours this Year | A gauge showing the total number of hours that volunteers have completed this calendar year. | | Total Volunteers This Year | A gauge showing the total number of volunteers who completed hours for your organization this calendar year. | | Volunteer Hours by Month | A chart showing the sum of total hours worked by month (this calendar year and the previous calendar year). | | Unique Volunteers this Year | A chart showing the number of volunteers who worked for your organization this calendar year. Each volunteer is counted only once, even if they volunteered for multiple Jobs or Shifts. | | Volunteers by Status | A chart showing the volunteers categorized by volunteer status (Active, Inactive, New Signup, Prospect). | To see the Volunteers dashboard in action: 1. Click the Dashboards tab. If you don't see this tab, click the App Launcher (![App launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), expand All Items, then click Dashboards. 2. In the left nav, click **All Folders**. 3. Click the Volunteer Dashboards folder. 4. Click **Volunteers Dashboard**. The dashboard appears. ![Volunteer Dashboard](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/volunteer_dashboard.png) ## View Volunteers Reports Volunteers for Salesforce provides over 25 valuable reports out-of-the-box. You can use them as is, or customize them to meet your needs. To see the Volunteers reports: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you decide to customize an out-of-box report, we recommend that you save it with a different name so that you preserve the original report. 1. Click the Reports tab. If you don't see this tab, click the App Launcher (![App launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)), expand All Items, then click **Reports**. 2. In the left nav, click **All Folders**. 3. Click **Volunteer Reports**. ![Navigation to get to Volunteers for Salesforce reports](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/reports_nav.png) The list of reports appears. 4. Click a report name to run the report, view details, or customize. - **[Volunteers Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_reports_dashboards.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the reports that come packaged with Volunteers for Salesforce. ### Volunteers Reports Learn about the reports that come packaged with Volunteers for Salesforce. | Report | Description | | --- | --- | | Active Volunteers | List of Contacts with Volunteer Status set to Active. | | Available Volunteer Jobs | All Volunteer Jobs that are ongoing, or still need volunteers. | | Hours detached from their VRS | A list of Volunteer Hours that were created by a Volunteer Recurrence Schedule (VRS), but were detached because they no longer meet the VRS's criteria. | | Inactive Volunteers | List of Contacts with Volunteer Status set to Inactive. | | New Sign Ups - Contacts | List of Contacts with Volunteer Status set to New Sign Up. | | New Sign Ups - Leads | List of Leads with Volunteer Status set to New Sign Up. | | Prospective Volunteers | List of Contacts with Volunteer Status set to Prospect. | | Recent Volunteers | List of volunteers whose Last Volunteer Date occurred in the past 120 days. | | Shifts detached from their JRS | A list of Volunteer Shifts that were created by a Job Recurrence Schedule (JRS), but were detached from the JRS because they no longer meet its criteria. | | Top Volunteers by Lifetime Hours | FOR DASHBOARD: List of total hours a volunteer has worked. | | Top Volunteers by Recent Hours | FOR DASHBOARD: List of total hours a volunteer has worked during a specified time period. | | Unassigned Volunteers | Contacts with either Active, Prospect, or New Sign Up set as the Volunteer Status, who don't have current Volunteer Hours assigned. | | Unique Volunteers | Total amount of unique volunteers by Campaign and Job. | | Upcoming Shifts Needing Volunteers | A list of Shifts in the future that don't have the desired number of volunteers signed up. | | Upcoming Shifts with Volunteers | A list of upcoming Shifts with volunteers confirmed. Can be used as a check-in sheet. | | Upcoming Volunteers | A list of Volunteers who have upcoming Volunteers Hours (signed up for a Shift or Job) in the next 30 days. | | Volunteer Hours by Account/Org | Total Volunteer Hours for all time, by Account/org. | | Volunteer Hours by Campaign | Total Volunteers Hours for all time, by Campaign. | | Volunteer Hours by Job | Total Volunteer Hours for all time, by Volunteer Job. | | Volunteer Hours by Month | FOR DASHBOARD: Total Volunteer Hours for the current and previous calendar years, grouped by month. | | Volunteer Hours by Month Matrix | A matrix report that shows the sum of hours volunteered by month for each Volunteer. | | Volunteer Hours for Dashboard | FOR DASHBOARD: Total Volunteer Hours for each Volunteer. | | Volunteer Jobs with Shift Summary | Lists all Jobs (grouped by Campaign), their Shifts, volunteers signed up, desired number of volunteers, and volunteers still needed. | | Volunteer Roster | Lists all Volunteers for the specified Campaign, Job, and Shift (used by Roster buttons on the Shift Calendar). | | Volunteers Active Last Month | List of Volunteers who completed Volunteer Hours last month. | | Volunteers by Account | List of all Volunteers, grouped by Account. | | Volunteers by Availability | List of all Volunteers, grouped by availability (value in the Volunteer Availability field on the Contact). | | Volunteers by Skill | List of all Volunteers, grouped by skill. | | Volunteers Daily Roster | List of upcoming Volunteers by Shift Start Date & Time. | | Volunteers Last Month | FOR DASHBOARD: Volunteers who completed a Shift in the last month. | | Volunteers This Year | FOR DASHBOARD: Volunteers who completed a Shift this year. | | Volunteers with a Volunteer Status | List of Contacts that have the Volunteer Status set to any value. | # Track Your Work with Activities and Calendar Learn how to use standard Salesforce activities and calendar functionality in your case management work. - **[Log a Call](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_activities_calendar_workflow_funct.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** It's important to log all interactions with a client, including calls. For example, after you call a client's mother to schedule an appointment, log the call on the client’s Contact record. - **[Create an Event](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_activities_calendar_workflow_funct.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up appointments using standard Salesforce Events. Events appear on the Calendar View, which you access by clicking the Calendar tab. In addition, Events can sync with Outlook or Google calendars, so all your calendars can align. - **[Create a Task](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_activities_calendar_workflow_funct.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use tasks to set reminders for important items you need to take action on. - **[Calendar View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_activities_calendar_workflow_funct.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Go to the Calendar tab to see your appointments and events. ## Log a Call It's important to log all interactions with a client, including calls. For example, after you call a client's mother to schedule an appointment, log the call on the client’s Contact record. 1. Navigate to the Client’s Contact record. 2. Scroll to the Activity Panel and click **Log A Call.** 3. Enter a subject that describes the nature of the call. For example, Schedule appointment. 4. Relate the Task to a client record object (such as Case Plan) by clicking the down arrow in the Related To field and selecting the kind of record you want to relate. Then, search for and select the appropriate record. 5. Click **Save**. ![Log a Call tab showing Subject, Comments, Name, and Related To](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/logcall.png) ## Create an Event Set up appointments using standard Salesforce Events. Events appear on the Calendar View, which you access by clicking the Calendar tab. In addition, Events can sync with Outlook or Google calendars, so all your calendars can align. 1. Navigate to the client's Contact record. 2. Scroll to the Activity Panel and click ****New Event**.** 3. Enter a subject that describes the nature of the event. For example, Client appointment. 4. Select when the event starts and ends. 5. Relate the Event to a client record object (such as Case Plan) by clicking the down arrow in the Related To field and selecting the kind of record you want to relate. Then, search for and select the appropriate record. 6. Assign the Event to yourself. 7. Optionally, enter a Location. 8. Click **Save**. ![New Event showing Subject, Start and End date and time, and more](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/newevent.png) ## Create a Task Use tasks to set reminders for important items you need to take action on. 1. Navigate to the client's Contact record. 2. Scroll to the Activity Panel on the lower right and select **New Task**. 3. Enter a **Subject** that will help you remember what the task is for. 4. Set a due date. 5. Relate the Task to a client record object (such as Case Plan) by clicking the down arrow in the Related To field and selecting the kind of record you want to relate. Then, search for and select the appropriate record. 6. Assign the task to a user. 7. Choose a **Status**. 8. Click **Save**. ![New Task showing Subject, Due Date, Name, Related To, and more](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/newtask.png) ## Calendar View Go to the Calendar tab to see your appointments and events. Click the **Calendar** tab to see your calendar, including the Events you create. ![Calendar view showing scheduled events](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/calendarview.png) # Transaction Journal Fields in Accounting Subledger The Transaction Journal object includes multiple fields to help you understand the generated data related to your financial transactions. Accounting Subledger creates transaction journal records automatically for new or changed CRM financial records (sometimes called source records in this documentation).
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
- **[Journal Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** On a transaction journal record, the Journal Type field indicates whether it's an allocation, a payment, or a transaction. - **[Amounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Track amounts on transaction journal records using the Debit Amount and Credit Amount fields. - **[Dates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger includes these date fields, some of which are on the Transaction Journal object. - **[Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you need to report on financial information from fields that aren't on the default Transaction Journal object, create and add custom fields to that object and to its page layout, and then set up accounting field mappings. ## Journal Types On a transaction journal record, the Journal Type field indicates whether it's an allocation, a payment, or a transaction. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note To prevent processing errors, we recommend that you don’t edit or delete journal types. Allocation Represents a specific amount of expected revenue or expense. For example, a scheduled payment on a committed gift is considered expected revenue (sometimes called a pledge). When a record is committed or promised, Accounting Subledger creates one allocation journal record for each fund account related to the record for a certain amount of committed revenue. We create such records only for amounts that are pledged ahead of time and with payment to follow later. They're not created for amounts that are paid immediately. Transaction Represents the whole, unallocated amount for paid records (not the pledged, expected amount). Accounting Subledger creates one transaction journal record for each record that's marked as paid, unless you configured cash flow grouping by fund on the associated accounting set. In this case, we don't create any transaction journal records. This journal type isn't related to the record's fund account allocations. Payment Represents the allocated amount by fund account for paid records (not the pledged, expected amount). Accounting Subledger creates one payment journal record for each fund account allocation on each record that's marked as paid, unless you configured cash flow grouping by fund on the associated accounting set. In this case, we create two payment journal records for each fund account’s allocation on each record that's marked paid (one for the debit and one for the credit). For more information about creating journal records of transaction and payment types for debits and credits, see [Cash Flow Grouping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_cf_grouping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure how to group transaction journal records. Depending on the type of cash flows, identify them by fund account, or fund account and due date."). ## Amounts Track amounts on transaction journal records using the Debit Amount and Credit Amount fields. ## Dates Accounting Subledger includes these date fields, some of which are on the Transaction Journal object. Committed Date A field on the source record that represents the date on which the record becomes committed. Salesforce sets this date to the date on which the source record's checkbox mapped to Generate Expected Revenue/Expense is selected. This selection tells Accounting Subledger to start processing the record as an expected revenue or expense. Due Date (Transaction Journal) Salesforce populates this date on allocation type journal records only if you enable grouping cash flows by due date on the associated accounting set. It shows the date on which the revenue or expense is scheduled to arrive and is copied from the related record’s scheduled date. Payment Date (Transaction Journal) The date on which the related record was marked as paid, as indicated in the field that you map to the associated accounting set's Payment Date. Transaction Date (Transaction Journal) The date on which revenue or expense is first expected, received, or adjusted. For allocation type journal records, these variables determine the transaction date. - If the related record's committed date is before or on the current date and no transaction journal records exist, then Salesforce sets the transaction date to the committed date. - If the related record's committed date is before or on the current date and there are transaction journal records, then Salesforce sets the transaction date to the current date. - If the related record's committed date is in the future, then Salesforce sets the transaction date to the current date. By default, a transaction journal record's transaction date corresponds to the date on which the record is created, which is when the Accounting Subledger job runs. To use a different transaction date, map a date field from your source records to the Transaction Date field of the associated accounting set. For example, you can use the date of the transaction activity itself. See [Accounting Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_sets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Map your financial data to the Accounting Subledger data model using accounting sets, and configure settings for each set to generate transaction journal records."). If you map your own transaction date, here's how Salesforce sets it for paid and expected revenue and expenses. | Type of Revenue or Expense | If... | Then, for the Transaction Journal Records... | Otherwise... | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Paid | The source record's transaction date is populated. | Use the source record's transaction date. | Use the current date. | | Paid or expected | The source record's transaction date isn't populated. | Use the current date. | — | | Paid or expected | The accounting set has no date mapped to the Transaction Date field. | Use the current date. | — | | Expected | The source record's checkbox mapped to Generate Expected Revenue/Expense is selected. | Compare the committed date to the current date. If the committed date is before or on the current date, use the committed date as the transaction date. | Use the source record's transaction date. | ## Custom Fields If you need to report on financial information from fields that aren't on the default Transaction Journal object, create and add custom fields to that object and to its page layout, and then set up accounting field mappings. See [Set Up Page Layouts for Transaction Journal Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure your own page layout for the Transaction Journal object to best fit your users' needs, and assign them to your user profiles.") and [Accounting Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create accounting field mappings to bring your data to custom fields on transaction journal records."). # Transaction Journal Records in Accounting Subledger The Transaction Journal object is the core of Accounting Subledger. It stores your financial transactions in a format optimized for export to your accounting system. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Starting in March 2023, Salesforce offers Accounting Subledger built on the core Salesforce platform. This article provides information about that product. For information about the managed packaged version of Accounting Subledger, see [Accounting Subledger Legacy Documentation](https://sfdo-docs.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/Accounting_Subledger_Legacy_Documentation.pdf). If you're not sure which version your institution uses, check with your Salesforce administrator. - **[Transaction Journal Fields in Accounting Subledger](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Transaction Journal object includes multiple fields to help you understand the generated data related to your financial transactions. Accounting Subledger creates transaction journal records automatically for new or changed CRM financial records (sometimes called source records in this documentation). - **[Source Records Eligibility](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_source_records_eligibility.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger applies eligibility criteria to select source records to process. - **[Accounting States and Data Generation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_states_and_data_generation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger considers the accounting state of your source data when generating transaction journal records. - **[Debits and Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_debits_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Accounting Subledger follows specific definitions to determine debit and credit amount types. - **[GL Codes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_gl_codes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In an accounting system, each line in a general ledger is assigned an account or a fund account. The GL Code field on the Transaction Journal object identifies each account. We assign GL codes based on accounting set fields. - **[Revenues and Expenses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_revenues_expenses.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After the Accounting Subledger job runs, it generates debit and credit entries differently for revenues and expenses. - **[Set Up Page Layouts for Transaction Journal Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_page_layouts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure your own page layout for the Transaction Journal object to best fit your users' needs, and assign them to your user profiles. - **[Payment Methods](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_tj_payment_method_changes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure payment methods and their impact on transaction journal records. - **[Cash Flow Grouping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_cf_grouping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure how to group transaction journal records. Depending on the type of cash flows, identify them by fund account, or fund account and due date. - **[Accounting Field Mappings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_accounting_field_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create accounting field mappings to bring your data to custom fields on transaction journal records. - **[Troubleshoot Issues with Transaction Journal Record Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_troubleshoot_transaction_journal_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To troubleshoot challenges with the creation of transaction journal records in Accounting Subledger, check your org setup and subledger job. # Transfer Credit Create and manage transfer equivalency relationships and the entire transfer credit process from a single place in Education Cloud that automatically matches and suggests credits. Registrars can use the guided process to review submitted documentation and to articulate transfer credit requests. Applicants request estimates for transferable credits directly in the application portal on the Experience Cloud site. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Provide eligible applicants with the means to accelerate their learning journey, helping them save time, effort, and fees by granting transfer credits. The registrar staff can consider an applicant's transfer credit application if the applicant has: - Prior learning experience from another educational institution in the same or similar offering - Relevant work experience that qualifies them to be of higher academic standing - Certifications from recognized institutions or assessment standards, such as prior learning assessments or the College-Level Examination Program - Military experience Registrars configure a Transfer Credit stage in admissions applications to receive transfer credit evaluation requests. Applicants can request transfer credit estimates for prior learning directly on the [Experience Cloud application portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_transfer_credit_requests_from_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Current students can request official transfer credit for prior learning directly from an Experience Cloud site. Students open the transfer credit application from a Unified Catalog service, add their prior learning, and submit a request."). To request estimates, applicants enter prior learning details and upload supporting documents. If they received unofficial transfer credit estimates from the [Transfer Credit Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_transfer_credit_agent.htm&language=en_US), applicants can reuse these to prefill their applications. When an applicant submits their information, the application automatically creates official transfer credit requests. When the applicant enrolls, the approved transfer credits apply toward their program requirements. ## Example: Prospective applicant who wants to transfer to your institution John, a transfer applicant, is seeking to transition from a sending institution (community college) to your university's Computer Science program. During the admissions cycle, John submits his official academic transcripts for a formal transfer credit evaluation. The Office of the Registrar reviews his coursework to determine articulation. They analyze his Math 181: Calculus 1 (4 Credits) against the university's MATH 31A: Differential and Integral Calculus (4 semester units). By reviewing the course syllabus and learning outcomes, the registrar establishes a direct equivalency. - **[Set Up Your Org for Transfer Credits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure Education Cloud so learners can submit transfer credit requests and transcripts, and staff can review and process them. - **[Set Up Transfer Credit for Applicants](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_transfer_credits_for_applicants.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the TransferCreditWrapper Omniscript, add a Transfer Credit dynamic application stage, and set up Experience Cloud access so that applicants can submit transfer credit information. - **[Set Up Transfer Credit Requests from an Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_transfer_credit_requests_from_site.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Current students can request official transfer credit for prior learning directly from an Experience Cloud site. Students open the transfer credit application from a Unified Catalog service, add their prior learning, and submit a request. - **[Set Up Learning Equivalency Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_prepare_data_for_transfer_credits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up learning records and equivalencies to evaluate applicants’ prior learning for transfer credit. Map source achievements to the achievements your institution grants, then publish and activate the equivalency. These rules serve as the source of truth for your articulation and admissions staff. - **[Set Up Learning Equivalency for Registrar](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_learning_equivalency_registrar.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To map an equivalency between the external and internal learnings, configure the Learning Equivalency record page. - **[Manage Transfer Credit Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_manage_transfer_credit_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Evaluate transfer credit requests to determine which prior academic credits meet your institution’s requirements. The registrar reviews submitted materials to establish which previously earned credits meet necessary standards. The final list of accepted transfer credits determines the applicant's time to complete a degree. # Transfer Credit Agent for Education Cloud Transfer Credit Agent helps prospective students make application decisions by providing estimates on transferable credits right in an agent session. It reduces the response time for evaluations and saves previous estimates to give students continuous access. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer with Education Cloud and the applicable Agentforce add-on license
Use the Transfer Credit Agent to determine the transfer credit equivalencies for courses, examinations, work experience, military experience, and other prior learning that a prospective student completed at external institutions. An unauthenticated guest user can save the equivalency estimates generated in an agent session and use them in their application for transfer credits. The agent verifies the identity of the guest user before saving their transfer credit estimates. The Transfer Credit Agent includes one subagent and these actions.
Subagent Description Agent Action

Transfer Credit Equivalency

Use this topic to determine the transfer credit equivalencies for courses, examinations, work experience, military experience, and other prior learning that the user completed at external institutions.
- **[Configure Transfer Credit Agent Flows](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_configure_transfer_credit_agent_flows.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To give unauthenticated guest users access to the Transfer Credit Agent, clone and modify the EDU Admissions: Process Person Account and EDU Admissions: Create Prior Learning Evaluation flows. - **[Set Up Transfer Credit Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_transfer_credit_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure the Transfer Credit Agent to provide estimates of transferable credits for unauthenticated guest users. # Transform Education Cloud Data with Data Processing Engine Use Data Processing Engine (DPE) to transform the data that's available in your Salesforce org and write back the transformation results as new or updated records. For example, you can use DPE and flows to set up and maintain person public profile records for your alumni community.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
See Also: - [Data Processing Engine](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.concept_data_processing_engine.htm) # Translate Volunteers for Salesforce into Other Languages or Customize Terminology To help Volunteers for Salesforce speak the language of your volunteer program, you can replace the existing onscreen text (labels) with alternate text that uses your organization's terminology. Or you can translate all terms in the app into another language. V4S is available in these languages: - Dutch (nl\_NL) - English (en) - French (fr) - German (de) - Japanese (ja) - Spanish (es) ## Enable the Translation Workbench Use the Translation Workbench, a standard Salesforce tool, to manage translations into other languages and custom terms in the same language. Enable it for the languages you support, and then see how it handles common tasks for translation and customizing terminology. 1. From Setup, enter Translation Settings in the Quick Find box, then select **Translation Language Settings**. 2. If this is your first time enabling the Translation Workbench, click **Enable**. The Translation Workbench displays the supported languages. ![Supported Languages in the Translation Workbench](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/translation_workbench_supported_languages.png) 3. For each language you support: 1. Either **Edit** an existing supported language or **Add** a new one. 2. If you're adding translations for a language, assign translators by moving users' names to the Selected List. 3. While the translation is in progress, leave the Active setting disabled. Remember to come back when the language is ready for use and make it Active, which makes it available to users who choose it as their personal language. 4. **Save** your changes. ## Override the Term for a Field or Button A common terminology task is replacing an out-of-the-box term with your own term. Let's override a term for a button to see how to do overrides in the same language. 1. From Setup, enter Override in the Quick Find box, then select **Override**. 2. Specify the item to override. ![Filter criteria for selecting the items to override](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/translation_workbench_override_filter_criteria.png) 1. Select the **Volunteers for Salesforce** Package. 2. Select the Language. 3. Select a Setup Component from the list of translatable customizations. Only certain components can be overridden or translated. 4. Select the Object that has the item to override. This final criteria determines which values can be changed. ![Items eligible for override](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/translation_workbench_override_eligible_items.png) 3. Double-click in the Label Override column, in the appropriate row, and enter the new label value. 4. Repeat the label override as need for other items. 5. **Save** your changes. ## Edit Custom Labels The Volunteers for Salesforce Sites pages use labels whose values can be changed. While you can't directly edit these label values, you can override the default value by "translating" them into English or any of our other supported languages. For example, you may want to translate some of these labels: | Label | Description | Site page the label appears on | | --- | --- | --- | | labelColorValues | The color scheme for Jobs and Shifts on the JobCalendar. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_JobCalendar | | labelContactInfoLookupTitle | The title for the Contact Info lookup form. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactLookup | | labelContactLookupInstructions | Instruction text for filling out the Contact Info lookup form. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactLookup | | labelEventInThePast | The text that displays for past shifts. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListingFS | | labelExternalSignupURL | The link text for an External sign up URL. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_VolunteersJobListingFS | | labelPersonalSiteContactInfoTitle | The link text for viewing your information on the Personal Site page. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo | | labelPersonalSiteJobCalendarTitle | The text for the Job Calendar link at the top of the Personal Site page. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo | | labelPersonalSiteJobListingTitle | The text for the Job Listing link at the top of the Personal Site page. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo | | labelPersonalSiteReportHoursTitle | The text for the Report Hours link at the top of the Personal Site page. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo | | labelPersonalSiteTitle | The title that appears on top of the Personal Site page. | GW\_Volunteers\_\_PersonalSiteContactInfo | 1. From Setup, enter Custom Labels in the Quick Find box, then click **Custom Labels**. 2. In the list of labels, click the name of the label you want to edit. 3. Click **New Local Translations/Overrides**. 4. Select your language. 5. In the Translation Text box, enter the label you want to use. ![Translate custom label](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/translate_custom_labels.png) 6. Click **Save**. If you go to the Site page where this label is used, you see the new text. ![Website showinng updated label](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/custom_label_on_site.png) ## Translate the Contact Volunteer Skills Picklist Translate the values in a picklist so that you see how to translate terms into another language. 1. From Setup, enter Translate in the Quick Find box, then select **Translate**. 2. Specify the item to translate. ![Filter criteria for selecting the items to translate](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/translation_workbench_translate_filter_criteria.png) 1. Select the language you're translating into. 2. Select **Picklist Value** for Setup Component. 3. Select the **Contact** Object. 3. Find Volunteer Skills in the menu, then click +. 4. Double-click in the Label Translation column for each term, and enter the translation for the picklist value. ![Enter a translation for the picklist value](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/translation_workbench_translate_picklist_value.png) 5. Repeat the label translation as needed for other items. 6. **Save** your changes. ## Export All Translatable Terms for a Language Export a translation file for a language to generate a list of all the translatable terms. The exported file can help your first-time translations and also help translators stay on top of label changes that affect their translations. 1. From Setup, enter Export in the Quick Find box, then select **Export**. 2. Select **Bilingual**. 3. Click **Export**. 4. Look for the email from Salesforce confirming the export is done. 5. If you're working in Lightning Experience, [switch to Salesforce Classic](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=lex_switching_uis.htm) so you can access Documents. 6. Go to the **Documents** tab. If you don't see the Documents tab, click the + icon at the end of the tab bar, then click **Documents** in the list of All Tabs.) 7. Go to the My Personal Documents folder. Next to the name of your exported .zip file, click **View** to save the file to your computer. 8. On your computer, extract the .zip file to get a translation file for each language that your Salesforce org has enabled. .stf files are tab-delimited text files in the Salesforce translation format. 9. We recommend renaming the file extension from .stf to .txt, so that when you open it in a spreadsheet program like Microsoft Excel, you can specify how the file is structured. If you're warned that renaming file might cause it to become unusable, confirm that you do want to rename it. 10. Open the file in your spreadsheet program. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_tip.png) Tip If your spreadsheet program can't locate the .txt file, verify that it's looking amongst all file types, not just its own proprietary format. 11. Follow your program's instructions for importing the data. The following steps assume you're using Excel. 12. Choose the Delimited file type, with Tab delimiters. 13. Review both sections in the file to plan your edits. Translated terms Update a translation by overwriting the current translation, in Column C. Untranslated terms Specify a translation by overwriting the values in Column B. 14. Save your changes in the spreadsheet. If asked whether to keep it in the current format, choose Yes. 15. Close Excel. If asked whether to save again, choose No. 16. If you renamed the file extension from .stf to .txt, rename it again to .stf. 17. Clean up a formatting issue that Excel introduces. 1. Open the file in a text editor such as Notepad. 2. Open the text editor's feature that lets you find and replace text. 3. Find all double quotation marks (") and replace them with no value. 4. Using the text editor's Save As option, specify that the file uses UTF-8 encoding. 5. Save the file. Now you're ready to import the translations into V4S. ## Import a Translation File Import an edited translation file back in to Volunteers for Salesforce to add or update your language translations. 1. From Setup, enter Import in the Quick Find box, then select **Import**. 2. Click **Choose File**. 3. Select the .stf export file that you created or select a .zip file containing multiple .stf files. 4. Click **Import**. 5. Look for the email from Salesforce confirming a successful import or reporting import errors. If there are errors, look in the Documents tab for details. # Translate Your Education Cloud Data Create translated values for fields on applications so that applicants see content in their preferred language. The system displays translated values based on each user's locale setting.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Provide translated field values for the objects used in dynamic applications so that applicants work in their preferred language. When an applicant opens the Experience Cloud site, the system checks the user's locale setting and displays translated values where available. If no translation exists for a field, the system displays the original value. You create translated values in two ways. Enter translations directly on each record with the Translations related list, which is the fastest path for a few records. To translate many records at once, use Translation Workbench. Data translation translates the name and description fields by default. In Translation Workbench, you can also enable translation for these field types: text, multiline text, long text area, rich text area, and URL. ## Before You Begin - Enable Translation Workbench and add the languages that you want to support. See [Enable or Disable Translation Workbench](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customize_wbench.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Turn on Data Translation. See [Enable Data Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.data_translation_enable.htm&type=5&language=en_US). - Configure your applications, including stage definitions, render methods, and timelines. ## Translate Values on a Record Add the Translations related list to the record pages for the objects that you translate, such as academic terms and learning programs. Then enter translated names and descriptions for each language directly on the record. 1. In Setup, open the Lightning record page for the object that you translate, such as Academic Term. 2. Add the Translations related list to the page, and then save and activate the page. 3. Open a record, and in the Translations related list, add, edit, or delete the translated name and description for each language that you support. ## Translate Values in Bulk with Translation Workbench To translate many records at once, export the values from Translation Workbench, translate them, and import them. 1. In Translation Workbench, export the records for the object that you want to translate. 2. Translate the exported values into your supported languages. 3. Import the translated values into Salesforce. For applications, prioritize these objects: academic terms, learning programs, application stage definitions, and learning courses. These objects contain the names and descriptions that applicants see on the site. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Some Education Cloud objects that support translation, including the application stage definition, don't yet appear in the object list on the Data Translation Settings page. To manage translated values for these objects, use the Translations related list on the record or use Translation Workbench. ## What Applicants See When applicants open the Experience Cloud site, the system displays translated values based on their locale setting. Translations appear in these areas of the applicant experience. - The Academic Term and Learning Program fields in the New Application window - The names and descriptions for application stages throughout the application process - Learning program names on application lists and details If a translated value doesn't exist for a field in the applicant's language, the system displays the original value. # Troubleshoot Custom Settings Configuration Make sure your Custom Settings are configured for appointments in Student Success Hub. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. A lot of appointment availability and appointment scheduling functionality relies on [SSH Hierarchy Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the SSH Hierarchy Settings and SSH Queuing Settings in Custom Settings.") in Custom Settings. These settings allow you to customize the use of record types, Event types, appointment locations, and more. The Default Organization Level Value must have all values specified. Upon installation, some of these values are already set. Others require some setup. Keep in mind these guidelines: - When specifying record type values in custom settings, use the API name, not the label. For example, use SupportEvent, not Support Event. - Custom settings records are automatically created for individual users at the time that they update their appointment availability settings. If Student Success Hub isn't working correctly for one support staff member but works for other users with the same role, profile, and assigned permission sets, consider checking the SSH Hierarchy Settings record for the individual user. - Once Student Success Hub is configured in production, any sandbox created from production maintains the correct custom settings. However, custom settings data can't be moved between environments via change set or metadata deployment. Any new environment requires that you configure those settings again manually. # Troubleshoot Field-Level Security Permissions Fix permissions errors that occur in Student Success Hub. Before retrieving or saving any information, Student Success Hub checks to make sure the current user (support staff, student, or administrator) has the necessary level of access on every field involved in the operation. [Configure K-12 Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_k12_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give K-12 support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."), [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub."), and [Configure Student Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_student_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give students the object and field permissions they need to use Student Success Hub from the portal.") detail the _minimum_ required object- and field-level permissions. You may want to make other information, such as other EDA or K-12 Architecture Kit data, available to support staff or students. **If a user encounters an error in the app or in the portal, it's often because field-level security isn't configured correctly on the user's profile or permission set.** It's easy to miss an item. Pay close attention when you initially configure permissions and check your work thoroughly. When troubleshooting, double-check and even triple-check them again. # Troubleshoot Invalid NPSP Data Import Help Text Mappings (Legacy) The legacy NPSP method to connect NPSP Data Import fields to the target fields is through the NPSP Data Import field's Help Text. The most common challenge with the Help Text method is it requires very specific syntax following the format ObjectGroup.FieldName. For example, a valid Help Text mapping to the Personal Email field for Contact1 in your import file is Contact1.npe01\_\_HomeEmail\_\_c. Unfortunately, there isn't a way to validate Help Text to make sure the mappings are set up correctly. You likely won't know there is a problem until you try importing and either your import fails or particular target fields don't receive the information you thought they would. No doubt this has led to many exasperated admins. Read on to determine what may have gone awry with your field mappings. - **[Invalid Object Group API Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** First, it's important to understand Object Groups. Object Groups are slightly different than objects. Object Groups are collections of field mappings that tell the NPSP Data Importer tool what types of records (e.g. Contacts, Opportunities, Payments, etc.) to create or update. NPSP is able to link records within a single row of your import to one another because fields mappings are bundled in Object Groups in this way. - **[Invalid Field API Name](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Field API Name needs to match the target field exactly. - **[Incompatible Data Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For the most part, when you set up the field on the NPSP Data Importer object, you must select the same field type as the custom field you're mapping to. For example, if the field on the Contact record was a Date field, you'd select Date. - **[Improperly Named Unique ID Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The name of the NPSP field is important when you're creating a field that corresponds to a Unique ID field. In order to see any values in the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields in the Data Importer Configuration options, the field you want to map must be marked as Unique and External ID. - **[Two NPSP Data Import Fields Mapped to Same Target Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_ht_mappings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Each NPSP Data Import field should only be mapped to a single target field. If you map two NPSP Data Import fields to the same target field and you have information in both NPSP Data Import fields, the field that processes last will be the value that is imported into the target field. ## Invalid Object Group API Name First, it's important to understand Object Groups. Object Groups are slightly different than objects. Object Groups are collections of field mappings that tell the NPSP Data Importer tool what types of records (e.g. Contacts, Opportunities, Payments, etc.) to create or update. NPSP is able to link records within a single row of your import to one another because fields mappings are bundled in Object Groups in this way. Let's look at the two Contact1 and Contact2 Object Groups as an example. These are linked directly to their Household Accounts. At times, you may want to include two Contacts in a single household. To achieve this, in your import file enter the first Contact in the Contact1 columns and the second Contact in the Contact2 columns. When Contact1 is created, NPSP creates a Household Account for Contact1. Because of the Contact1 and Contact2 Object Mappings, Contact2 is added to Contact1’s Household Account when you import the file. Help Text mapping only supports the following Object Groups: - Account1 - Not the Household Account; an Organization Account affiliated with Contact1. - Account2 - Not the Household Account; an Organization Account affiliated with Contact2. - Household - The Household Account. - Contact1 - The primary Contact. - Contact2 - The other Contact or Contacts in a household. - Address - The household address. - Opportunity - Donation fields. - Payment - Payments related to the Opportunity. The Object Group component of the Help Text mapping must conform to one of the Object Groups above. Some examples of invalid Object Group mappings: - Account.Name: Doesn't include which Organization Account the field is on. Specify either Account1 or Account2. - Acccount1.Name: Account1 is misspelled. - Account\_1.Name: There shouldn't be a space—represented by the underscore—between Account and 1. - Account3.Name: Help Text mapping only supports Account1 and Account2 Object Groups. In addition, you can't map to an Object Group that isn’t listed above. Examples of these invalid mappings are: - npe5\_\_Affiliation\_\_c.Name: You can’t map directly to the NPSP Affiliation object, but if you complete the information for Account1 or Account2 in the import file, NPSP will automatically create an Affiliation between Contact1 and Account1 or Contact2 and Account2. - Allocation\_\_c.Name: Help Text mapping doesn't support mapping to GAU Allocations on Opportunities. If you convert to Advanced Mapping, GAU Allocation mapping will be set up for you. See [Configure NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions.") for more information. - npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donation\_\_c.Name: You can’t map to the NPSP Recurring Donation object with Help Text mapping, but if you convert to Advanced Mapping, you can set up this custom mapping. Read more in [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). ## Invalid Field API Name The Field API Name needs to match the target field exactly. This includes the number of underscores, that pesky \_\_c at the end of custom fields, and capitalization. Some specific examples of invalid field API name mappings are: - Account1.name: Name must be capitalized. This mapping should be Account1.Name. - Account1.npsp\_\_Matching\_Gift\_Company: This is almost the full API name, but it’s missing \_\_c on the end that is on every custom field. It should be Account1.npsp\_\_Matching\_Gift\_Company\_\_c. - Account1.npsp\_\_MatchingGiftCompany\_\_c: The API name for Matching Gift Company has underscores between the words. - Account1.MailingCity: This is a tricky one! MailingCity is a valid API name for a field, but Mailing City isn’t a field that exists on the Account object; it’s on the Contact object. The mapping for a city field on the Account object should be either Account1.BillingCity or Account1.ShippingCity. - Account1.\[a field that doesn't exist\]: If you’ve not created a field on the target object, you don’t have its API name. The foolproof way to make sure you’re using the correct API name is to go to the target object, copy the whole API name of the field, and paste it in the FieldName piece of the mapping. Pro tip: open the target object field list in a separate browser window and the create the corresponding NPSP Data Import fields in another window. ## Incompatible Data Types For the most part, when you set up the field on the NPSP Data Importer object, you must select the same field type as the custom field you're mapping to. For example, if the field on the Contact record was a Date field, you'd select Date. There are two notable exceptions: - When the target field is a relationship field (lookup or master/detail). - When the target field is a checkbox. Relationship fields—lookup or master/detail—must be mapped as Salesforce IDs. This includes the standard Owner field, which is related to the User object. For a relationship field, the NPSP Data Import field should be a Text field of 18 characters to accommodate the 15 or 18 digit Salesforce ID (not the Name) of the related record. In order to allow more flexibility around checkbox fields, the NPSP Data Import field that will send information to a target checkbox field should be a picklist. This picklist translates what you want to see in the checkbox field (the checkbox as checked or unchecked) to their Boolean equivalents (True for checked and False for unchecked). Through NPSP Data Import, you'll be able to uncheck a previously checked checkbox field or even leave a checkbox field completely unchanged by leaving that cell empty. Read more about mapping [Checkbox Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Checkbox fields get a little tricky when you're trying to process them in a data import tool. In order to allow you more flexibility around checkbox fields in NPSP Data Import, the corresponding field should be a picklist."). ## Improperly Named Unique ID Field The name of the NPSP field is important when you're creating a field that corresponds to a Unique ID field. In order to see any values in the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields in the Data Importer Configuration options, the field you want to map must be marked as Unique and External ID. Additionally, for Unique ID fields, you must create two corresponding fields, one for Contact1 and one for Contact2 (or Account1 and Account2) and they must be named properly. The corresponding fields should NOT be marked as Unique and External ID. Read more in [Important Information about Unique ID Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_map_using_help_text.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Naming is important when you're creating corresponding Unique ID fields. In order to see any values in the Contact Custom Unique ID or Account Custom Unique ID fields in the Data Importer Configuration options, the field you want to map must be marked as Unique and External ID."). ## Two NPSP Data Import Fields Mapped to Same Target Field Each NPSP Data Import field should only be mapped to a single target field. If you map two NPSP Data Import fields to the same target field and you have information in both NPSP Data Import fields, the field that processes last will be the value that is imported into the target field. Probably the most common way this happens is where two different NPSP Data Import fields are created by different users at different times. Let's say you have a field on the Contact object named **Preferred Name**. Years ago, one of your admins created an NPSP Data Import field named **Contact1 Casual Name** and used Help Text mapping to send information from **Contact1 Casual Name** to **Preferred Name** for Contact1. More recently, a new admin didn't notice the **Contact1 Casual Name** field and created a new NPSP Data Import field named **Contact1 Nickname** and also mapped it to **Preferred Name**. Here's how this setup goes sideways. Another admin prepping data for an upcoming import sees both **Contact1 Casual Name** and **Contact1 Nickname** in the CSV template, and for a supporter named Robert 'The Bobster' Miller, the admin enters Bob in the **Contact1 Casual Name** column and The Bobster in **Contact1 Nickname**. When the import is processed, the NPSP Data Import field processed second—let's say **Contact1 Nickname**, The Bobster—overwrites the **Contact1 Casual Name** value and the **Preferred Name** field ends up with The Bobster. Before you know it, your major gifts officer calls Mr. Miller The Bobster. And that might be ok if Bob's not into the whole brevity thing, but more likely it's a nickname only his closest friends use. So be sure to check your field mappings carefully and completely. # Troubleshoot Issues with Transaction Journal Record Creation To troubleshoot challenges with the creation of transaction journal records in Accounting Subledger, check your org setup and subledger job. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-accounting_subledger-264-0-0-production-enus/157531ff-70d1-4f66-a3f6-8bad55ae5e5d/images/icon_note.png) Note Accounting Subledger doesn’t support manual creation of transaction journal records. ## Check Your Basic Setup If you're having problems with the creation of transaction journal records, try these troubleshooting tips. - Make sure that your org has the required Accounting Subledger licenses. - Assign the appropriate permission set to the Admin user, including the Data Pipelines Base User, Manage Accounting Subledger, and Run Accounting Subledger Job permission sets. - Assign the appropriate feature permission set, such as Fundraising Access or Grantmaking Manager permission set, to the Integration User. - Set field-level security for all fields on the objects that are used in your Accounting Set for the Analytics Cloud Integration User and Admin profiles. - Enable Transaction Journal Creation in Accounting Settings. - Make sure that you can create and activate an Accounting Set. - Enable Data Pipelines in your org. - Verify that the client's data in the org matches the Accounting Set configuration. ## No Transaction Journal Created After a Subledger Job Run If a subledger job finishes but doesn't create a transaction journal record, try these steps. - Remove any filter criteria in the accounting set and then run the subledger job again. - Create a simple accounting set with a single-object model, for example, by using only the Opportunity object. Deactivate all other accounting sets and run the subledger job with only this accounting set. If the transaction journal record is created, then it's possible that there's something wrong with the configuration of your accounting set. - Create and run a simple Data Processing Engine (DPE) definition. Accounting Subledger relies on DPE to process data and create transaction journal records. If the DPE job fails, check DPE for potential issues. See Also: - [Accounting Subledger Basics](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_basics.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare consistent gift revenue and payment data for fundraising and finance services.") - [Accounting Subledger Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Before configuring and running Accounting Subledger, complete the required setup tasks.") - [Enable Transaction Journal Creation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_enable_transaction_journal_creation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you configure accounting sets and complete all of the other requirements, turn on transaction journal creation.") - [Accounting Subledger Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_limitations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Troubleshoot the limits, limitations, and setup considerations for running Accounting Subledger.") # Troubleshoot Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Resolve errors and configuration issues in Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. - **[Fix Get Started Page Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Resolve errors that occur on the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Get Started page. - **[Synchronize Data Extensions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a synchronized data extension during the Get Started workflow to allow data to flow from CRM to Marketing Cloud. - **[Update Email Asset Colors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Change the theme color for an email asset after it's deployed. - **[Still Need Help?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.mcngo_troubleshoot.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect with community resources for additional help with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. ## Fix Get Started Page Errors Resolve errors that occur on the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Get Started page. If you encounter errors when working through the Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Get Started page, ensure that you: - Have the necessary system permissions. - Performed the necessary steps in the process. The Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries Get Started page is modeled on the [Marketing Cloud Connect Setup](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/marketing-cloud-connect) module in Trailhead. To resolve issues you experience in the Get Started page, follow the instructions in the Trailhead module. ## Synchronize Data Extensions Create a synchronized data extension during the Get Started workflow to allow data to flow from CRM to Marketing Cloud. If you deploy assets without setting up the synchronized data extensions, assets are deployed but the SQL query automations are not. An error message appears about 10 minutes after deployment indicating data failure. [Synchronize Your Salesforce Data with Marketing Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.mcngo_sync_data.htm&type=5) prior to deploying assets. ## Update Email Asset Colors Change the theme color for an email asset after it's deployed. You can customize assets with your organization’s branding before you deploy them on the Get Started page. To change the theme color for an email asset after it's deployed: 1. Log in to Marketing Cloud. 2. Go to **Email Studio** | **Email**. 3. Click **Content**. 4. Select an asset to edit. Be sure to select an asset where the type is Template, not Template-Based Email. 5. Click **Edit**, and then **Edit Content**. 6. Click **Code View**. 7. Find the AMPscript line that sets the theme color. For example: `SET @companyColor = TreatAsContent('#000000')` Here, the color code is #000000. 8. Enter a new color code. 9. Save your changes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-marketing_cloud_engagement_for_industries-264-0-0-production-enus/aec596ef-4ddd-4400-b2ea-8ee44afa8417/images/icon_note.png) Note The theme color update isn't visible when you view the asset. You will see the updated color when you preview and send the email. To update existing emails that use a template where you updated the theme color: 1. Go to **Email Studio** | **Email**. 2. Select an email to edit. 3. Click **Edit**, and then **Edit Properties**. 4. Find the Template Changed warning message and click **Update Email Now**. 5. Click **Next** and save your changes. ## Still Need Help? Connect with community resources for additional help with Marketing Cloud Engagement for Industries. Join the [Trailblazer Community](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/trailblazercommunity) and reach out for help. This online community is where users connect with other Trailblazers to share ideas and ask for help. If you're still having trouble, contact Salesforce Support. See Also: - [Trailhead: Marketing Cloud Connect Setup](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/en/content/learn/modules/marketing-cloud-connect) - [Marketing Cloud Troubleshooting Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=mktg.mc_co_troubleshooting_guide.htm&type=5) # Troubleshoot NPSP Data Importer Errors Learn how to find and fix NPSP Data Import errors. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand why errors can occur when you use NPSP Data Importer. - **[Error Examples](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are many reasons why failures occur. - **[View Data Import Wizard Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When using the Data Import Wizard to import your data into NPSP, errors are captured in Bulk Data Load Jobs results files and error notification emails from Salesforce. - **[View Failed NPSP Data Import Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can find details about errors that occur during NPSP Data Importer processing on failed NPSP Data Import records. These errors aren't logged in the NPSP Error Log. - **[Still Need Help?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to contact Salesforce Support. ## Overview Understand why errors can occur when you use NPSP Data Importer. Errors can occur when you enter data through Gift Entry or import spreadsheets using Data Import Wizard and NPSP Data Importer. Some required data might be missing, data can be improperly formatted, or maybe there are customizations in your org preventing the import from successfully processing. Despite the best efforts of you and your staff, your data import or data entry can sometimes fail. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note  Learn more about data clean up and preparing your spreadsheet for import in [Clean and Format Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Learn more about the NPSP Data Importer and Advanced Mapping in [How NPSP Data Importer Processes Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_how_di_works.htm). Data import errors occur when: - NPSP can't create NPSP Data Import records. When you use the Data Import Wizard to import data into the NPSP Data Import object, you'll see these errors in Bulk Data Load Jobs results files and error notification emails from Salesforce. Learn more in [Open the result file from Bulk Data Load Job page](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000333604&type=1&mode=1). When using Gift Entry, the error is reported on screen to the user. - NPSP Data Importer can't create or update the target records (Accounts, Contacts, etc.). NPSP captures these errors in the Status and Failure Reason fields on as NPSP Data Import records. The NPSP Data Importer process can also partially fail, meaning that it creates some, but not all, NPSP records. Learn more in [View Failed NPSP Data Import Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_troubleshoot_di_errors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "You can find details about errors that occur during NPSP Data Importer processing on failed NPSP Data Import records. These errors aren't logged in the NPSP Error Log."). ## Error Examples There are many reasons why failures occur. Let's look at some example errors and their causes:
Cause Error Result Error Location Example Error Message
Validation rule on the NPSP Data Import object Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record Bulk Data Load Jobs (when using the Data Import Wizard) FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION, You must have a Mobile Phone for all Contacts processed through NPSP Data Import.: []
Required custom field on the NPSP Data Import object Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record Bulk Data Load Jobs (when using the Data Import Wizard)

REQUIRED_FIELD_MISSING, Required fields are missing: [External Batch Number]: [External Batch Number]
Required field or validation rule on the NPSP Data Import object Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record On screen when using Gift Entry ,"DMLErrorFieldNameMapping":}Id not specified in an update call
Improperly formatted email address Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record Bulk Data Load Jobs (when using the Data Import Wizard) INVALID_EMAIL_ADDRESS:Contact1 Personal Email: invalid email address: importtest.org:npsp__Contact1_Personal_Email__c --
Currency symbol included in Donation Amount Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record Bulk Data Load Jobs (when using the Data Import Wizard) INVALID_FIELD:Failed to deserialize field at col 8. Due to, '$225.00' is not valid for the type xsd:double:npsp__Donation_Amount__c --
Improperly formatted Donation Date Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record Bulk Data Load Jobs (when using the Data Import Wizard) INVALID_FIELD:Failed to deserialize field at col 9. Due to, 'Jan 1st 2021' is not a valid value for the type xsd:date:npsp__Donation_Date__c --
Invalid Id for Contact1 Imported Salesforce couldn't create the NPSP Data Import record Bulk Data Load Jobs (when using the Data Import Wizard) MALFORMED_ID:Contact1 Imported: id value of incorrect type: 0034u00002XHNRLXXX:npsp__Contact1Imported__c --
Missing Contact1 Last Name Salesforce couldn't create the Contact record NPSP Data Import record You must specify Last Name.
Before Insert trigger on the Opportunity object Salesforce couldn't create the Opportunity and Payment record NPSP Data Import record npsp.TDTM_Opportunity: execution of AfterInsert caused by: System.DmlException: Insert failed. First exception on row 0; first error: CANNOT_INSERT_UPDATE_ACTIVATE_ENTITY, oppProcesses: execution of AfterUpdate caused by: System.FinalException: Record is read-only (): [] (npsp)
Required custom field on the Payment object Salesforce couldn't create the Payment record NPSP Data Import record (or on screen when using Gift Entry) Required fields are missing:custom_phone
## View Data Import Wizard Errors When using the Data Import Wizard to import your data into NPSP, errors are captured in Bulk Data Load Jobs results files and error notification emails from Salesforce. Learn more in [View Bulk Data Load Job Details](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=xcloud.monitoring_async_api_jobs_details.htm&type=5) and [Open the result file from Bulk Data Load Job page](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000333604&type=1&mode=1). ## View Failed NPSP Data Import Records You can find details about errors that occur during NPSP Data Importer processing on failed NPSP Data Import records. These errors aren't logged in the NPSP Error Log. Failed NPSP Data Import records have a Status value of Failed. This status means that the NPSP Data Importer either completely or partially failed to process the record. Learn more about why the record failed in the record's Failure Information field. ### Create and Subscribe to a Failed NPSP Data Import Records Report While you can view NPSP Data Import records individually and with list views, there's no built-in method for receiving notifications from NPSP when there are failed NPSP Data Import records. To receive notifications, create and subscribe to a custom report. 1. Click the **Reports** tab. 2. Click **New Report**. 3. Search for and select **NPSP Data Imports**. 4. Click **Continue**. 5. Click **Filters**. 6. Click **Show me**, select **All npsp data imports**, then click **Apply**. 7. In Add filter, search for and select **Status**. 8. Select **Failed** and click **Apply**. 9. Click **Outline**. 10. In Add column, search for and select **Failure Information**. 11. Add additional columns to include in the report. 12. Click **Save & Run**. 13. Enter a Report Name such as Failed Data Imports. 14. Choose a Folder where you'd like to store the report and click **Save**. 15. Next to Edit, click the arrow and select **Subscribe**. 16. Choose a Frequency (we recommend Daily) and a Time. 17. Save the report. According to the frequency you chose, Salesforce sends an email with a report summary and a link to view the report. ### Analyze Failed NPSP Data Import Records Let's look at a failed NPSP Data Import record in detail. In this example, a validation rule on the Payment object prevented NPSP Data Importer from creating or updating one or more records. But how can you tell which records? ![NPSP Data Importer record with a Status of Failed.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/failed-di-record.png) Within an NPSP Data Import record, you'll see Imported and Import Status fields for each record NPSP Data Importer tried to create or update. When NPSP Data Importer can't create or update a record, the Imported field is blank and the Import Status describes what happened. ![Payment Imported fields, with Payment Imported blank and Payment Import Status = Missing Batch Number.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/missing-payment.png) Let's look at the Imported and Import Status fields to understand which records the NPSP Data Importer successfully processed. | Field Name | Field Data | Result | | --- | --- | --- | | Contact1 Imported | Donor's Name | Successful - NPSP created the donor's Contact record. | | Contact1 Import Status | Created | Successful - NPSP created the donor's Contact record. | | Household Account Imported | Donor's Household Name | Successful - NPSP created the donor's Household Account. | | Donation Imported | Donation Name | Successful - NPSP created the donation Opportunity record. | | Donation Import Status | Created | Successful - NPSP created the donation Opportunity record. | | Payment Imported | _Blank_ | Failure - NPSP couldn't create the donation Payment record. | | Payment Imported Status | Missing Batch Number | Failure - NPSP couldn't create the donation Payment record. | From this field data we can see that the donor's Contact, Household Account, and Opportunity records were created, but not the Payment record. ### Resolve a Failed NPSP Data Import For this example, you could resolve the issue by disabling or adjusting the validation rule so that it doesn't execute when using Gift Entry or during data import. For more information see [Managing Validation Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_managing_field_validation.htm&type=5). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Once the validation rule no longer prevents NPSP Data Importer from processing successfully, you must reprocess the previously failed NPSP Data Import records. To reprocess failed NPSP Data Import records: 1. Open the App Launcher and click **NPSP Data Imports**. 2. Select the **Failed Data Imports** list view. 3. Click **Import All Data Import Records**. If you selected some records to import, click **Import Selected Data Import Records**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Start Data Import reprocesses all failed Data Import records. 4. Click **Begin Data Import Process**. 5. When the data import process completes, you'll see the results including the number of records processed, imported, and failed. Click **Close** to return to the NPSP Data Import tab. ## Still Need Help? Learn how to contact Salesforce Support. If you’re still having problems with Gift Entry or data import, open a support case. See [How to Create a Case on Salesforce Help](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=000393090&type=1). # Troubleshoot Related Lists That Don't Display Learn how to solve the problem of related lists not showing in Student Success Hub. If a related list isn't appearing on a Lightning page (such as Success Plans), check the page layout for that object for the user's profile that can't see it. Many of the EDA or K-12 Architecture Kit related lists on the Student Record Case Lightning page actually point to data related to the parent Contact—not the Case. This means the related list also needs to be included on the _Contact_ page layout assigned to the user. # Troubleshoot the Nonprofit Success Pack Understand how to resolve common configuration issues in NPSP and where to look for additional help. # Troubleshoot the Student Portal Learn ways to resolve common problems with building and managing your Student Success Hub portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license, such as through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. - **[Errors in Experience Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When setting up a student portal in Experience Builder, you often see errors about not being able to show your success team or not being able to retrieve your Case record. These error messages are expected and normal. In Experience Builder, your System Administrator user is treated as the active user when displaying Lightning components in preview mode. Since your admin user account doesn't have a student Case, or a Contact, or an assigned success team, the components think there's a data problem and report the error. - **[Prevent Your Site from Using the Salesforce Email Composer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Under certain conditions, Experience Cloud sites send emails using the Salesforce Email Composer instead of the site user's default (native) email app. Student portals use the Salesforce Email Composer when these three conditions are met. - **[Locked Out of Site Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Did you accidentally remove the System Administrator profile from the Members list in the Administration workspace? And now you can see your site in the Digital Experiences All Sites list, but the Workspaces and Builder links are gone, so you can no longer manage the site? - **[Site Deployment Limitations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you use change sets to migrate a site between sandbox and production orgs, keep in mind some considerations. - **[Too Many User Roles Created](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When a new student User is created for an Experience Cloud site, a new Role for that User is also created that references the student's Account (likely an Administrative or Household Account). This is default functionality for Customer Community Plus users and works fine if there are multiple Contacts within the same Account. However, when using Administrative or Household Accounts, this means a Role is created for every student User. A large number of User Roles can introduce performance issues and be subject to Salesforce limits on the number of User Roles per org. ## Errors in Experience Builder When setting up a student portal in Experience Builder, you often see errors about not being able to show your success team or not being able to retrieve your Case record. These error messages are expected and normal. In Experience Builder, your System Administrator user is treated as the active user when displaying Lightning components in preview mode. Since your admin user account doesn't have a student Case, or a Contact, or an assigned success team, the components think there's a data problem and report the error. You can do configuration in Experience Builder as an admin, but you can only preview the site and see valid data when you're logged in as a student. If you do see the same errors when logged into the site as a student, make sure that: - The student has a properly configured Student Record Case (where the Case's record type matches the Student Record Case Record Type configured in custom settings). - **All** field-level security permissions are configured correctly for the student profile. ## Prevent Your Site from Using the Salesforce Email Composer Under certain conditions, Experience Cloud sites send emails using the Salesforce Email Composer instead of the site user's default (native) email app. Student portals use the Salesforce Email Composer when these three conditions are met. - The UserPreferencesNativeEmailClient field is false, which is the default. AND - The student profile allows student users to send emails from Salesforce. (This is a required permission for Student Success Hub student profiles—the Send Email system permission is required on the student profile in order for appointment email notifications to work as intended.) AND - The Global Publisher Layout assigned to the student profile includes the Email action in the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions area of the layout. (The default Global Layout assigned to the student profile includes the Email action on the page.) The Salesforce Email Composer allows users to send emails from within Salesforce—or from within a Student Success Hub student portal, in our case. However, the Salesforce Email Composer may give students access to templates, merge fields, and other areas of the Student Success Hub that should be unavailable to them.  To prevent the Salesforce Email Composer from being used in your student portal—in other words, to ensure that a student's default email app is used when the student clicks a mailto email link for a support staff member—take either or both of these actions. - When creating new student Users using the Data Import Wizard, Data Loader, or Apex, set UserPreferencesNativeEmailClient to true. - Modify the Global Publisher Layout that's assigned to the student profile so that it doesn't include the Email action button. ## Locked Out of Site Management Did you accidentally remove the System Administrator profile from the Members list in the Administration workspace? And now you can see your site in the Digital Experiences All Sites list, but the Workspaces and Builder links are gone, so you can no longer manage the site? Here's the fix: [Add a Digital Experience site member if either the 'Manage' or 'Workspaces' link is not available](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000212095&type=1). ## Site Deployment Limitations If you use change sets to migrate a site between sandbox and production orgs, keep in mind some considerations. - A change set cannot create a site. You must create a site in the target environment first (make sure the name and template version match). - Deploying an update to a site overwrites all settings and pages in the target org. You can't just deploy updates to a single page. So while initial deployment of a site to a target org is very useful, updates introduce more risk of losing configuration. You still have the option of making changes manually in the target org and publishing when ready. - If a navigation menu item points to a custom list view, make sure to include that custom list view in your change set. It does not get added (or identified) automatically via dependencies. - There are other considerations, too. See [Considerations for Deploying Experience Cloud Sites with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_migrate_considerations.htm). Make sure to review the unsupported settings and features list for items you need to configure manually in the target org. See [Deploy Your Experience Cloud Site with Change Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_migrate_changesets.htm). ## Too Many User Roles Created When a new student User is created for an Experience Cloud site, a new Role for that User is also created that references the student's Account (likely an Administrative or Household Account). This is default functionality for Customer Community Plus users and works fine if there are multiple Contacts within the same Account. However, when using Administrative or Household Accounts, this means a Role is created for every student User. A large number of User Roles can introduce performance issues and be subject to Salesforce limits on the number of User Roles per org. In cases where there's only one Contact per Account, you can associate all Experience Cloud site Users with a central Role. You can maintain the necessary security and visibility while significantly reducing the number of User Roles. For details, see [Optimize Account Roles to Improve Performance and Scale Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=networks_partners_optimize_roles.htm) in Salesforce Help. # Troubleshooting Student Success Hub Learn how to fix some common errors that can occur in Student Success Hub. - **[Troubleshoot Field-Level Security Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_fls.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fix permissions errors that occur in Student Success Hub. - **[Troubleshoot Custom Settings Configuration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_custom_settings.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Make sure your Custom Settings are configured for appointments in Student Success Hub. - **[Troubleshoot Related Lists That Don't Display](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_related_lists.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to solve the problem of related lists not showing in Student Success Hub. - **[Troubleshoot the Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_reference_troubleshoot_portal.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn ways to resolve common problems with building and managing your Student Success Hub portal. # Turn On and Configure Nonprofit Cloud Features In your Nonprofit Cloud org, you can use any or all of the available features. As you set up each feature, learn about Industries shared features and how to use them for different types of roles. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
User Permissions Needed
To set up Fundraising:

FundraisingAccess permission set

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
To set up Program Management:

Advanced Program Management permission set
To set up Case Referrals:

Case Referral permission set
To set up Complaints:

Complaints Management Access permission set
To set up Care Plans:

Care Plans Access permission set
To set up Outcome Management:

Outcome Management permission set
To set up Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking: Grantmaking Manager permission set
To set up Volunteer Management Manage Volunteer Data permission set
1. [Turn on and configure Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_fr_set_up_fundraising.htm&language=en_US). Engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with tools for strategic planning and data-driven insights. 2. [Turn on and configure Program Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_prog_mgmt_prereqs.htm&language=en_US). Increase productivity, eliminate data silos, and empower staff who manage and deliver programs to make timely decisions. 3. [Turn on and configure Case Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_case_referral_intake_prereqs.htm&language=en_US). Equip your team with tools for intake, assessments, and guided care plans. 4. [Turn on and configure Complaints](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_complaints_incidents_flow_prereqs.htm&language=en_US). Document incidents or concerns reported by individuals about someone’s personal health, safety, behavior, or well-being. 5. [Turn on and configure Care Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.prog_case_mgmt_care_plans_prereqs.htm&language=en_US). Create personalized care plans to help individuals overcome challenges and accomplish life goals. 6. [Turn on and configure Outcome Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.outcome_management_get_started.htm&language=en_US). Define your impact strategy or theory of change, collect your data, track your progress, and evaluate the effectiveness of your programs. 7. [Turn on and configure Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.grmk_get_started_with_grantmaking.htm&language=en_US). Use tools to give grants and manage your nonprofit work, and streamline the grant management process for both funders and applicants. 8. [Set Up Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Volunteer Management for your organization. Assign permissions, turn on the feature, configure locations and operating hours, and set a default status for job position assignments.") Manage volunteers in Salesforce, gain deep insight into your volunteer data, and improve volunteer management by using robust automation processes. # Turn On Education Cloud Turn on Education Cloud to support the entire learner experience, including managing applications, scheduling, courses, and facilities.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important After you enable Education Cloud, you can't disable it. 1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Education Cloud. 2. Under Feature Settings, select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 3. Turn on Education Cloud. After enabling Education Cloud, proceed to configure apps and features in your org. # Turn on Einstein Generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Education To use the Einstein features in the Prospect Research: Create Research Request and Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details flows, turn on Einstein generative AI in your Salesforce org. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
## Turn On Advancement Generative AI in Education Cloud To use Einstein generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Education Cloud, turn on Advancement Generative AI. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advancement Generative AI in Education Cloud:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Expand Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud. 3. Make sure that Einstein AI is turned on. 4. Turn on **Enable Advancement Generative AI**. ## Turn On Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI To use Einstein generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit Cloud, turn on Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI:

Context Service Admin

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI**. 2. Turn on **Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI**. # Turn on Einstein Generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit To use the Einstein features in the Prospect Research: Create Research Request and Prospect Research: Get Interaction or Philanthropic Details flows, turn on Einstein generative AI in your Salesforce org. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud or Education Cloud and the Einstein for Sales, Einstein for Service, or Einstein Platform add-ons
## Turn On Advancement Generative AI in Education Cloud To use Einstein generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Education Cloud, turn on Advancement Generative AI. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Advancement Generative AI in Education Cloud:  
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 2. Expand Set Up Einstein for Education Cloud. 3. Make sure that Einstein AI is turned on. 4. Turn on **Enable Advancement Generative AI**. ## Turn On Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI To use Einstein generative AI for Philanthropic Research in Nonprofit Cloud, turn on Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI. ### Required Editions
User Permissions Needed
To turn on Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI:

Context Service Admin

AND

Einstein for Service Innovations
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI**. 2. Turn on **Nonprofit Cloud Generative AI**. # Turn On Person Accounts Set up person accounts to represent individual students, staff, applicants, alumni, and other users in Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To enable person accounts: | Education Cloud Full Access | In Education Cloud, data about individual people, such as students, faculty, alumni, and external contacts, is stored in the Account object as Person Accounts. Person Accounts combine account and contact information into a single record. See [Enable Person Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&language=en_US). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important When you enable Person Accounts, create these record types for the Account object: Business Account, Secondary School, and College. See [Create Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.creating_record_types.htm&type=5). # Turn On Required Settings for the Student Management App Turn on settings required for the Student Management App. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To turn on settings used in Student Management: Education Cloud Full Access
1. [Set up the Academic Operations app](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_academic_operations_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure Academic Operations in Education Cloud to create academic courses and programs, define learning outcomes, manage academic schedules, and configure eligibility and policy rules."). Be sure to complete all setup steps for Academic Operations. 2. Turn on additional settings. 1. [Enable person accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.account_person_enable.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Enable contacts to relate to multiple accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.shared_contacts_set_up.htm&language=en_US). 3. [Set up group membership](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_set_up.htm&language=en_US). SEE ALSO: - [Model Households, Groups, and Organizations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_model_households.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up relationships to define how your learners and other accounts connect with one another, such as for representing households.") - [How Education Cloud Models Groups and Relationships](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.group_membership_how_education_cloud_models_groups_relationships.htm&language=en_US) # Understand Addresses in EDA Learn how addresses are tracked and stored in EDA. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students are nomadic. They live in a residence hall one year, off-campus the next. They study abroad for a term. They go home for the summer—or not. In short: They have lots of addresses. - **[Manage Multiple Addresses in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contacts and Accounts in EDA can have one or more addresses. - **[Understand Where EDA Stores Address Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you maintain only one address per Contact or Account, EDA stores the address data on the Contact or Account record. That part is straightforward. When you use multiple addresses, however, EDA uses a third object: Address. - **[Use Multiple Addresses for Contacts with Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Contacts with multiple addresses, such as for seasonal residences, by using Household Accounts. - **[Manage Multiple Addresses for Other Types of Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While Education Data Architecture allows multiple addresses for Administrative, institutional, and organizational Accounts, it doesn't synchronize them the way it does for Household Accounts. - **[Manage Addresses When Multiple Addresses Are Off](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're not using multiple addresses on Administrative or organizational Accounts, or their Contacts, simply update addresses directly on the Contact or Account record. - **[Multiple Addresses and Data Storage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** One final important consideration about multiple addresses is data storage. ## Introduction Students are nomadic. They live in a residence hall one year, off-campus the next. They study abroad for a term. They go home for the summer—or not. In short: They have lots of addresses. So do faculty, staff, and administrators—work and home addresses, each, at a minimum. Even academic departments and programs sometimes have addresses that need to be stored and managed in Education Data Architecture (EDA).   Fortunately, EDA offers robust address management that allows you to: - Track and manage multiple addresses for students and other Contacts using the Household Account model. - Keep multiple addresses for a student synchronized on related Contact, Household Account, and Address records. - Differentiate addresses among the Contacts in a Household—for example, have one mailing address for the student and a different mailing address for the student's parent or guardian. - Maintain one or more addresses for students and other Contacts using the Administrative Account model, as well as for institutional and organizational Accounts such as Academic Programs and University Departments. EDA's address management functionality is powerful—and potentially confusing. This article covers in detail: - How to turn multiple addresses on and off in your org - Where EDA stores address data - How to use multiple addresses for student Contacts with Household Accounts - How to manage addresses for other types of Accounts - Storage considerations for using multiple addresses - Next steps for configuring and managing addresses in your org So pour yourself a cup of coffee and get comfortable while you learn all about addresses in EDA. ## Manage Multiple Addresses in Your Org Contacts and Accounts in EDA can have one or more addresses. Multiple addresses are on by default for Household Accounts and they can't be turned off. They're also on for: - Contacts - Administrative Accounts - Business Organization Accounts They're off by default for all other Account types, but you can change nearly all of the defaults in EDA Settings. You'll find instructions on how to change the defaults in the article [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm), but before you change anything, keep reading to make sure you understand the implications of using multiple addresses in each context. ## Understand Where EDA Stores Address Data When you maintain only one address per Contact or Account, EDA stores the address data on the Contact or Account record. That part is straightforward. When you use multiple addresses, however, EDA uses a third object: Address. Let's dive deep into the data that Address, Contact, and Account records store, and how the objects relate, when you track multiple addresses for student Contacts with a Household Account. This scenario is probably the most complex—and most common—reason for using multiple addresses, so EDA provides some specialized synchronization to keep the data in sync, while preserving flexibility for seasonal and other address variations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Read this section even if you're not using Household Accounts as a container Account. It provides a foundation for understanding multiple addresses on Administrative Accounts and other Account record types. ![Diagram showing Address record on the left and related Household Account and Contact records on the right](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_data_model_hh_accounts.png) Address Address is a custom EDA object that stores address and address seasonality information. Each Address record looks up to an Account record _or_ a Contact record, however, EDA synchronizes address data on the Address record with both the related Contact and Household Account records. Each Address record is one of these types: Home, Work, Vacation Residence, or Other. These types come out of the box with EDA; you can create others. Address records also contain a Default Address checkbox. The Default Address is the current, active address on the related Contact and Household Account records—the one where you send postal mail. Only one Address record can be the Default Address for all related Contact and Household Account records.  Finally, Address records contain fields that let you define a date range, or season, for when the address is in effect. You can see the last time an Address record was used by its Latest Start Date and Latest End Date fields. Contact Every Contact record can store two addresses: a Mailing Address and an Other Address. Both are custom compound fields. - Mailing Address includes Mailing Street, Mailing City, Mailing State/Province, and other component "mailing" fields. - Other Address includes Other Street, Other City, Other State/Province, and so on. As with Address records, each Contact address has a type: Home, Work, Vacation Residence, or Other. EDA syncs the Contact's Mailing Address with its related Address record and with the Billing Address on its related Household Account record. After the initial sync, EDA continues to treat the Contact's Mailing Address as the source of truth, and the Address record ID shows in the Contact record's Current Address field. The value of the Current Address changes depending on which Address record is marked as Default Address and whether dates for a seasonal address are in effect. The Current Address field on the Contact record looks up to the related Address record that stores the Mailing Address for the Contact. Under certain conditions, EDA also syncs the Contact's Other Address to the Household Account record—but just once. (Don't worry. We explain what EDA synchronizes, and when, in just a minute.) Finally, Contact records include a Do Not Automatically Update checkbox. This field allows you to maintain a separate mailing address for that Household Contact. For example, select Do Not Automatically Update on the parent or guardian Contact record within a student's household. That way, when the student moves out of the residence hall and you update their mailing address, the Mailing Address on their parent's Contact record isn't affected. Account Account is a standard Salesforce object design for CRM, so its address fields are named for a business audience. Every Account record can store two addresses: a Billing Address and a Shipping Address. As with Mailing Address and Other Address on a Contact record, Billing Address and Shipping Address are custom compound fields. However, unlike the addresses on Address and Contact, neither Billing Address nor Shipping Address has a type. EDA syncs the Household Account's Billing Address with its related Address record and with the Mailing Address on its related Contact record. The Shipping Address is synced once, from the related Contact's Other Address if and when you create a Contact record that contains an Other Address. Household Account records also have the Current Address field, which looks up to the Address object and shows you the Address record ID for the Billing Address. That's how Address, Contact, and Household Accounts relate in the abstract. Now let's learn how they work in practice. ## Use Multiple Addresses for Contacts with Household Accounts Set up Contacts with multiple addresses, such as for seasonal residences, by using Household Accounts. ### Create a New Contact Record Whenever you create a new independent Contact—meaning a Contact that isn't under an existing Household Account—always start from the Contact record when filling in the address. Contact records store more complete data about the individual than the Household Account record. And, importantly, saving the new Contact automatically creates related and synced Household Account and Address records so that your baseline data is accurate from the beginning.  The inverse isn't true: Saving a new Household Account doesn't automatically create related Contact and Address records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note This scenario presumes your default Account model is Household. For details, see [Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm). When you create a new Contact record with the Account Name field blank and one or more of the address fields populated, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a related Household Account record and syncs the Contact's Mailing Address to the Account's Billing Address. If provided, it also syncs the Contact's Other Address to the Account's Shipping Address. This is the only time that EDA K-12 Architecture Kit syncs the Contact's Other Address to the Household Account's Shipping Address. - Creates a related Address record and syncs the Contact's Mailing Address to the mailing address fields on the Address record. It also assigns the Primary Address Type from the Contact record to the Address Type on the Address record, and automatically selects the Default Address checkbox. If no Primary Address Type is specified, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit defaults to Home. - Makes the Contact's Mailing Address the Current Address. Voila! The addresses are synchronized on all three records, and the Contact's Mailing Address becomes the Default Address and the Current Address. ![From left to right, a Contact, Address, and Account record for Sophia Rivera with the address 123 Main Street](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_hh_composite.png) ### Add a New Contact to an Existing Household When you add a new household member (Contact) to a Household Account, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Automatically populates the new Contact's Mailing Address with the Household Account's address. - Relates the Household's existing Address record to the new Contact's Mailing Address. - Applies the Address Type on the existing Address record for the Household to the new Contact's Mailing Address. ![A Contact record for Marcella Rivera with the Mailing Address 123 Main Street](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_hh_second_contact.png) If you choose to enter a Mailing Address for the new Contact because their address is now the current, primary address for the Household Account, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a new Address record for the new mailing address. - Makes the new Address record the default for the Household Account and for all of the household's Contacts (unless any Contact has Do Not Automatically Update selected). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note There's one circumstance in which EDA K-12 Architecture Kit ignores the Do Not Automatically Update field. When creating a new household Contact, if you leave the Mailing Address fields blank and you select Do Not Automatically Update, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit disregards the selection and instead populates the Contact's Mailing Address with the Household Account's Billing Address. Do Not Automatically Update is selected on the new Contact record, however, and is in effect for subsequent updates. ### Update an Address When a Household Member Moves When the student or someone in their household moves, addresses need to reflect the change. By default, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit keeps the Billing Address on the Household Account synchronized with the Mailing Address on all of the household's Contacts—unless any Contact record has Do Not Automatically Update selected. When Do Not Automatically Update is selected, that Contact's mailing address is not synced with the Household Account's address change. You can update the address for everyone under a Household Account in any of these ways. - (Recommended) Create a new Address record from the Addresses related list on the Account and set it as the Default Address. - Edit the Billing Address on the Account record. - Edit the Mailing Address on any of the household's Contact records. When you do so, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a new Address record and sets it as the Default Address. - Updates the Billing Address on the Household Account and the Mailing Address on all of the household's Contacts with the new address (except for Contacts who have Do Not Automatically Update selected). See [Create Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact."). ### Create a Seasonal Address The seasonal fields on Address records allow you to automatically make the address current for a specified period of time. Say student Sophia is going to spend a term in Paris (lucky Sophia). Create an Address record for her Left Bank residence and use the seasonal fields to indicate when the address is in effect—that is, when it's the Current Address on Sophia's Contact and Account records. ![A seasonal Address record for a Paris address from February 1 to April 30, 2022](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_seasonal.png) In this example, Boulevard Saint-Germain is Sophia's address from February 1 to April 30, 2022. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit processes seasonal address updates as part of overnight scheduled jobs on the seasonal start date. If you want the address to go into effect on February 1, for example, specify a start date of January 31. However, if the start date is the current date or in the past, the seasonal address takes effect right away. When a seasonal address is in effect, it becomes the Current Address on the related Contact and Account records—in other words, the seasonal Address record syncs to the Contact and Account records and becomes the current Contact Mailing Address and the current Account Billing Address. After the seasonal end date, either another seasonal address takes its place, or the Address record marked as Default Address is restored as the Current Address for the related Account and Contact records. Of course, unless Sophia's whole family is going with her to Paris, be sure you mark the Contact records for the other members of her household as Do Not Automatically Update. ### Considerations for Using Multiple Addresses with Household Accounts We like to think of Address, Contact, and Account as a three-legged stool: EDA K-12 Architecture Kit can synchronize multiple Household Account addresses across all three objects, and when it does, the data is just as you expect it to be and the stool is balanced and stable. But it's easy to make the stool wobble: You update or add an address, and you don't see the change propagated on a related record.  Here are a few more things to know about multiple address management for Household Accounts that can help prevent unwanted surprises, unexpected results, and an annoyingly unsteady stool. - Household Accounts always have multiple addresses enabled in EDA K-12 Architecture Kit. They can't be turned off, and they're in effect even if you turn off multiple addresses for Contacts. Be aware that Household Account appears in EDA Address Settings to be not enabled for multiple addresses, even though it is. - By default, Address records created from the Addresses related list on the Contact page aren't synchronized with the related Household Account. You must manually select the Parent Account when you create the Address record. As a result, we recommend always creating additional addresses for a Household Account from the Addresses related list on the Account, not from the related list on a member Contact. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit automatically synchronizes additional addresses from the Household Account to the Contact. - Don't rely on the Addresses related list on the Contact page for an accurate list of all related Address records. It doesn't show addresses created from the related Household Account page. For example, when you create additional Contacts for a Household Account from the Contacts related list on the Account record, you can see the Address record in the Household Account's Addresses related list, but not in the new Contact's Addresses related list. - When you need to edit an address (as opposed to creating a new address), always edit the Address record rather than editing the related Contact's Mailing Address or Account's Billing Address. Editing the Address record itself ensures that the data is synchronized to both the Contact and the Account. See [Edit Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact."). - You can mark Address records as inactive when they shouldn't be used. For details, see [Mark an Address as Inactive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When someone moves and doesn’t provide an updated address, or when an address shouldn’t receive mail for some other reason, mark the address as inactive."). ## Manage Multiple Addresses for Other Types of Accounts While Education Data Architecture allows multiple addresses for Administrative, institutional, and organizational Accounts, it doesn't synchronize them the way it does for Household Accounts. ### Create a New Contact Record for a Non-Household Account When you use multiple addresses on non-Household Accounts and you first create a new Contact record with the Account Name field empty and the address data populated, Education Data Architecture: - Creates a related Address record and syncs the Contact's Mailing Address to the Address record. - Assigns the Primary Address Type from the Contact record to the Address Type on the Address record. If no Primary Address Type is specified, Education Data Architecture defaults to Home. - Selects the Default Address checkbox on the Address record. - Makes the Contact's Mailing Address the Current Address. - Creates a related Account record whose address fields are empty. ![Diagram of an Address record, left, synced with a Contact record, right, and a related institutional or organizational Account, above the Contact](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_data_model_i_and_o_accounts.png) If you want the Contact's Mailing Address to be the related Account's Billing Address, manually fill in the Account's Billing Address fields. Even though the addresses are the same, they don't share an Address record and they aren't synchronized. If you update either address, manually update the other to keep them in sync. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note It's possible to specify the Address record created from the new Contact in the related Account's Current Address field. However, doing so merely attaches the Address record to the Account. The Billing Address doesn't update (synchronize) with the mailing address on the Address record. ### Create a New Non-Household Account When you use multiple addresses on non-Household Accounts and you first create a new Account record with a Billing Address, Education Data Architecture: - Creates a related Address record and syncs the Billing Address to the mailing address on the Address record. - Selects the Default Address checkbox on the Address record. - Makes the Account's Billing Address the Current Address. Then, when you create a Contact under this Account, Education Data Architecture populates the Contact's Mailing Address with the Account's Billing Address, but it creates a new Address record even though the addresses are the same. The Account's Billing Address and the Contact's Mailing Address don't share an Address record and aren't synchronized. If you update either address, manually update the other to keep them in sync. ### Address Updates to Non-Household Accounts Additional addresses created for non-Household Accounts or their Contacts aren't synchronized. ![Diagram of an Address record synced with an Administrative Account, and a different Address record synced with a Contact](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda_address_data_model_admin_accounts.png) The new Address record is always related to the Contact or the Account record that you start from. When you create the Address, you can manually specify the Parent Contact (when you start from an Account) or Parent Account (when you start from a Contact) to also relate the new Address record to that record. But the Address record is only related, not synchronized: Setting it as the Current Address or Default Address doesn't update the Contact's Mailing Address (if you started from an Account) or the Account's Billing Address (if you started from a Contact). When you need to edit an address for a Contact or a non-Household Account, you can edit the Address record or the address fields on the Contact or Account record. Edits made to the Contact's Mailing Address or the Account's Billing Address are synced with the Address record, and vice versa. Just remember that the edits don't also sync with the related Contact's address (if you edit the Account's address) or the related Account's address (if you edit the Contact's address). Finally, you can specify additional seasonal addresses for non-Household Accounts. See [Create Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact.") and [Edit Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact."). ## Manage Addresses When Multiple Addresses Are Off If you're not using multiple addresses on Administrative or organizational Accounts, or their Contacts, simply update addresses directly on the Contact or Account record. Go to the record, click **Edit**, and make and save your changes. The Contact or Account record is updated. The Address object isn't used when multiple addresses are off, and there's nothing to synchronize. ## Multiple Addresses and Data Storage One final important consideration about multiple addresses is data storage. Every Address record uses 2 KB of data storage. While that doesn't sound like a lot, it adds up. If you have 10,000 students who each have two addresses in a year—one during the academic year and one during the summer—that's 20 MB on student Address records. Over four or six years, that's 80 MB to 120 MB. Add in addresses for studying abroad, for family members who move, for faculty at home and at work, and you can see how address data storage continues to climb. As an EDA admin, it's important to stay aware of your org's storage. In Setup, search for and select **Storage Usage**. The Current Data Storage Usage table shows the number of records, amount of storage, and percentage of storage used by each Salesforce object, in descending order of usage. Look for Addresses. If or when the Address storage grows too large, consider deleting old address records—especially seasonal addresses. However, be sure to keep any addresses for recruiting and admissions or advancement.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note The Latest Start Date and Latest End Date fields on Address records tell you the last time the Address was the Current Address. They are helpful in determining whether addresses are out of date and can be deleted. For most institutions, address storage isn't a major roadblock. However, if storage is a concern, we recommend that you still use multiple addresses on student Household Accounts, but not on Administrative or organizational Accounts. The automatic syncing of address data across Address, Account, and Contact records over a student's nomadic tenure at your institution is typically worth the trade-off. # Understand Addresses in EDA Learn how addresses are tracked and stored in EDA. - **[Introduction](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Students are nomadic. They live in a residence hall one year, off-campus the next. They study abroad for a term. They go home for the summer—or not. In short: They have lots of addresses. - **[Manage Multiple Addresses in Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contacts and Accounts in EDA can have one or more addresses. - **[Understand Where EDA Stores Address Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you maintain only one address per Contact or Account, EDA stores the address data on the Contact or Account record. That part is straightforward. When you use multiple addresses, however, EDA uses a third object: Address. - **[Use Multiple Addresses for Contacts with Household Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Contacts with multiple addresses, such as for seasonal residences, by using Household Accounts. - **[Manage Multiple Addresses for Other Types of Accounts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** While K-12 Architecture Kit allows multiple addresses for Administrative, institutional, and organizational Accounts, it doesn't synchronize them the way it does for Household Accounts. - **[Manage Addresses When Multiple Addresses Are Off](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you're not using multiple addresses on Administrative or organizational Accounts, or their Contacts, simply update addresses directly on the Contact or Account record. - **[Multiple Addresses and Data Storage](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_understand_addresses_in_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** One final important consideration about multiple addresses is data storage. ## Introduction Students are nomadic. They live in a residence hall one year, off-campus the next. They study abroad for a term. They go home for the summer—or not. In short: They have lots of addresses. So do faculty, staff, and administrators—work and home addresses, each, at a minimum. Even academic departments and programs sometimes have addresses that need to be stored and managed in Education Data Architecture (EDA).   Fortunately, EDA offers robust address management that allows you to: - Track and manage multiple addresses for students and other Contacts using the Household Account model. - Keep multiple addresses for a student synchronized on related Contact, Household Account, and Address records. - Differentiate addresses among the Contacts in a Household—for example, have one mailing address for the student and a different mailing address for the student's parent or guardian. - Maintain one or more addresses for students and other Contacts using the Administrative Account model, as well as for institutional and organizational Accounts such as Academic Programs and University Departments. EDA's address management functionality is powerful—and potentially confusing. This article covers in detail: - How to turn multiple addresses on and off in your org - Where EDA stores address data - How to use multiple addresses for student Contacts with Household Accounts - How to manage addresses for other types of Accounts - Storage considerations for using multiple addresses - Next steps for configuring and managing addresses in your org So pour yourself a cup of coffee and get comfortable while you learn all about addresses in EDA. ## Manage Multiple Addresses in Your Org Contacts and Accounts in EDA can have one or more addresses. Multiple addresses are on by default for Household Accounts and they can't be turned off. They're also on for: - Contacts - Administrative Accounts - Business Organization Accounts They're off by default for all other Account types, but you can change nearly all of the defaults in EDA Settings. You'll find instructions on how to change the defaults in the article [Configure Address Settings](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_configure_addresses.htm), but before you change anything, keep reading to make sure you understand the implications of using multiple addresses in each context. ## Understand Where EDA Stores Address Data When you maintain only one address per Contact or Account, EDA stores the address data on the Contact or Account record. That part is straightforward. When you use multiple addresses, however, EDA uses a third object: Address. Let's dive deep into the data that Address, Contact, and Account records store, and how the objects relate, when you track multiple addresses for student Contacts with a Household Account. This scenario is probably the most complex—and most common—reason for using multiple addresses, so EDA provides some specialized synchronization to keep the data in sync, while preserving flexibility for seasonal and other address variations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note Read this section even if you're not using Household Accounts as a container Account. It provides a foundation for understanding multiple addresses on Administrative Accounts and other Account record types. ![Diagram showing Address record on the left and related Household Account and Contact records on the right](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_data_model_hh_accounts.png) Address Address is a custom EDA object that stores address and address seasonality information. Each Address record looks up to an Account record _or_ a Contact record, however, EDA synchronizes address data on the Address record with both the related Contact and Household Account records. Each Address record is one of these types: Home, Work, Vacation Residence, or Other. These types come out of the box with EDA; you can create others. Address records also contain a Default Address checkbox. The Default Address is the current, active address on the related Contact and Household Account records—the one where you send postal mail. Only one Address record can be the Default Address for all related Contact and Household Account records.  Finally, Address records contain fields that let you define a date range, or season, for when the address is in effect. You can see the last time an Address record was used by its Latest Start Date and Latest End Date fields. Contact Every Contact record can store two addresses: a Mailing Address and an Other Address. Both are custom compound fields. - Mailing Address includes Mailing Street, Mailing City, Mailing State/Province, and other component "mailing" fields. - Other Address includes Other Street, Other City, Other State/Province, and so on. As with Address records, each Contact address has a type: Home, Work, Vacation Residence, or Other. EDA syncs the Contact's Mailing Address with its related Address record and with the Billing Address on its related Household Account record. After the initial sync, EDA continues to treat the Contact's Mailing Address as the source of truth, and the Address record ID shows in the Contact record's Current Address field. The value of the Current Address changes depending on which Address record is marked as Default Address and whether dates for a seasonal address are in effect. The Current Address field on the Contact record looks up to the related Address record that stores the Mailing Address for the Contact. Under certain conditions, EDA also syncs the Contact's Other Address to the Household Account record—but just once. (Don't worry. We explain what EDA synchronizes, and when, in just a minute.) Finally, Contact records include a Do Not Automatically Update checkbox. This field allows you to maintain a separate mailing address for that Household Contact. For example, select Do Not Automatically Update on the parent or guardian Contact record within a student's household. That way, when the student moves out of the residence hall and you update their mailing address, the Mailing Address on their parent's Contact record isn't affected. Account Account is a standard Salesforce object design for CRM, so its address fields are named for a business audience. Every Account record can store two addresses: a Billing Address and a Shipping Address. As with Mailing Address and Other Address on a Contact record, Billing Address and Shipping Address are custom compound fields. However, unlike the addresses on Address and Contact, neither Billing Address nor Shipping Address has a type. EDA syncs the Household Account's Billing Address with its related Address record and with the Mailing Address on its related Contact record. The Shipping Address is synced once, from the related Contact's Other Address if and when you create a Contact record that contains an Other Address. Household Account records also have the Current Address field, which looks up to the Address object and shows you the Address record ID for the Billing Address. That's how Address, Contact, and Household Accounts relate in the abstract. Now let's learn how they work in practice. ## Use Multiple Addresses for Contacts with Household Accounts Set up Contacts with multiple addresses, such as for seasonal residences, by using Household Accounts. ### Create a New Contact Record Whenever you create a new independent Contact—meaning a Contact that isn't under an existing Household Account—always start from the Contact record when filling in the address. Contact records store more complete data about the individual than the Household Account record. And, importantly, saving the new Contact automatically creates related and synced Household Account and Address records so that your baseline data is accurate from the beginning.  The inverse isn't true: Saving a new Household Account doesn't automatically create related Contact and Address records. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note This scenario presumes your default Account model is Household. For details, see [Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.eda_contact.htm). When you create a new Contact record with the Account Name field blank and one or more of the address fields populated, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a related Household Account record and syncs the Contact's Mailing Address to the Account's Billing Address. If provided, it also syncs the Contact's Other Address to the Account's Shipping Address. This is the only time that EDA K-12 Architecture Kit syncs the Contact's Other Address to the Household Account's Shipping Address. - Creates a related Address record and syncs the Contact's Mailing Address to the mailing address fields on the Address record. It also assigns the Primary Address Type from the Contact record to the Address Type on the Address record, and automatically selects the Default Address checkbox. If no Primary Address Type is specified, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit defaults to Home. - Makes the Contact's Mailing Address the Current Address. Voila! The addresses are synchronized on all three records, and the Contact's Mailing Address becomes the Default Address and the Current Address. ![From left to right, a Contact, Address, and Account record for Sophia Rivera with the address 123 Main Street](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_hh_composite.png) ### Add a New Contact to an Existing Household When you add a new household member (Contact) to a Household Account, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Automatically populates the new Contact's Mailing Address with the Household Account's address. - Relates the Household's existing Address record to the new Contact's Mailing Address. - Applies the Address Type on the existing Address record for the Household to the new Contact's Mailing Address. ![A Contact record for Marcella Rivera with the Mailing Address 123 Main Street](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_hh_second_contact.png) If you choose to enter a Mailing Address for the new Contact because their address is now the current, primary address for the Household Account, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a new Address record for the new mailing address. - Makes the new Address record the default for the Household Account and for all of the household's Contacts (unless any Contact has Do Not Automatically Update selected). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note There's one circumstance in which EDA K-12 Architecture Kit ignores the Do Not Automatically Update field. When creating a new household Contact, if you leave the Mailing Address fields blank and you select Do Not Automatically Update, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit disregards the selection and instead populates the Contact's Mailing Address with the Household Account's Billing Address. Do Not Automatically Update is selected on the new Contact record, however, and is in effect for subsequent updates. ### Update an Address When a Household Member Moves When the student or someone in their household moves, addresses need to reflect the change. By default, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit keeps the Billing Address on the Household Account synchronized with the Mailing Address on all of the household's Contacts—unless any Contact record has Do Not Automatically Update selected. When Do Not Automatically Update is selected, that Contact's mailing address is not synced with the Household Account's address change. You can update the address for everyone under a Household Account in any of these ways. - (Recommended) Create a new Address record from the Addresses related list on the Account and set it as the Default Address. - Edit the Billing Address on the Account record. - Edit the Mailing Address on any of the household's Contact records. When you do so, EDA K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a new Address record and sets it as the Default Address. - Updates the Billing Address on the Household Account and the Mailing Address on all of the household's Contacts with the new address (except for Contacts who have Do Not Automatically Update selected). See [Create Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact."). ### Create a Seasonal Address The seasonal fields on Address records allow you to automatically make the address current for a specified period of time. Say student Sophia is going to spend a term in Paris (lucky Sophia). Create an Address record for her Left Bank residence and use the seasonal fields to indicate when the address is in effect—that is, when it's the Current Address on Sophia's Contact and Account records. ![A seasonal Address record for a Paris address from February 1 to April 30, 2022](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_seasonal.png) In this example, Boulevard Saint-Germain is Sophia's address from February 1 to April 30, 2022. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit processes seasonal address updates as part of overnight scheduled jobs on the seasonal start date. If you want the address to go into effect on February 1, for example, specify a start date of January 31. However, if the start date is the current date or in the past, the seasonal address takes effect right away. When a seasonal address is in effect, it becomes the Current Address on the related Contact and Account records—in other words, the seasonal Address record syncs to the Contact and Account records and becomes the current Contact Mailing Address and the current Account Billing Address. After the seasonal end date, either another seasonal address takes its place, or the Address record marked as Default Address is restored as the Current Address for the related Account and Contact records. Of course, unless Sophia's whole family is going with her to Paris, be sure you mark the Contact records for the other members of her household as Do Not Automatically Update. ### Considerations for Using Multiple Addresses with Household Accounts We like to think of Address, Contact, and Account as a three-legged stool: EDA K-12 Architecture Kit can synchronize multiple Household Account addresses across all three objects, and when it does, the data is just as you expect it to be and the stool is balanced and stable. But it's easy to make the stool wobble: You update or add an address, and you don't see the change propagated on a related record.  Here are a few more things to know about multiple address management for Household Accounts that can help prevent unwanted surprises, unexpected results, and an annoyingly unsteady stool. - Household Accounts always have multiple addresses enabled in EDA K-12 Architecture Kit. They can't be turned off, and they're in effect even if you turn off multiple addresses for Contacts. Be aware that Household Account appears in EDA Address Settings to be not enabled for multiple addresses, even though it is. - By default, Address records created from the Addresses related list on the Contact page aren't synchronized with the related Household Account. You must manually select the Parent Account when you create the Address record. As a result, we recommend always creating additional addresses for a Household Account from the Addresses related list on the Account, not from the related list on a member Contact. EDA K-12 Architecture Kit automatically synchronizes additional addresses from the Household Account to the Contact. - Don't rely on the Addresses related list on the Contact page for an accurate list of all related Address records. It doesn't show addresses created from the related Household Account page. For example, when you create additional Contacts for a Household Account from the Contacts related list on the Account record, you can see the Address record in the Household Account's Addresses related list, but not in the new Contact's Addresses related list. - When you need to edit an address (as opposed to creating a new address), always edit the Address record rather than editing the related Contact's Mailing Address or Account's Billing Address. Editing the Address record itself ensures that the data is synchronized to both the Contact and the Account. See [Edit Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact."). - You can mark Address records as inactive when they shouldn't be used. For details, see [Mark an Address as Inactive](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When someone moves and doesn’t provide an updated address, or when an address shouldn’t receive mail for some other reason, mark the address as inactive."). ## Manage Multiple Addresses for Other Types of Accounts While K-12 Architecture Kit allows multiple addresses for Administrative, institutional, and organizational Accounts, it doesn't synchronize them the way it does for Household Accounts. ### Create a New Contact Record for a Non-Household Account When you use multiple addresses on non-Household Accounts and you first create a new Contact record with the Account Name field empty and the address data populated, K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a related Address record and syncs the Contact's Mailing Address to the Address record. - Assigns the Primary Address Type from the Contact record to the Address Type on the Address record. If no Primary Address Type is specified, K-12 Architecture Kit defaults to Home. - Selects the Default Address checkbox on the Address record. - Makes the Contact's Mailing Address the Current Address. - Creates a related Account record whose address fields are empty. ![Diagram of an Address record, left, synced with a Contact record, right, and a related institutional or organizational Account, above the Contact](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_data_model_i_and_o_accounts.png) If you want the Contact's Mailing Address to be the related Account's Billing Address, manually fill in the Account's Billing Address fields. Even though the addresses are the same, they don't share an Address record and they aren't synchronized. If you update either address, manually update the other to keep them in sync. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note It's possible to specify the Address record created from the new Contact in the related Account's Current Address field. However, doing so merely attaches the Address record to the Account. The Billing Address doesn't update (synchronize) with the mailing address on the Address record. ### Create a New Non-Household Account When you use multiple addresses on non-Household Accounts and you first create a new Account record with a Billing Address, K-12 Architecture Kit: - Creates a related Address record and syncs the Billing Address to the mailing address on the Address record. - Selects the Default Address checkbox on the Address record. - Makes the Account's Billing Address the Current Address. Then, when you create a Contact under this Account, K-12 Architecture Kit populates the Contact's Mailing Address with the Account's Billing Address, but it creates a new Address record even though the addresses are the same. The Account's Billing Address and the Contact's Mailing Address don't share an Address record and aren't synchronized. If you update either address, manually update the other to keep them in sync. ### Address Updates to Non-Household Accounts Additional addresses created for non-Household Accounts or their Contacts aren't synchronized. ![Diagram of an Address record synced with an Administrative Account, and a different Address record synced with a Contact](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/eda_address_data_model_admin_accounts.png) The new Address record is always related to the Contact or the Account record that you start from. When you create the Address, you can manually specify the Parent Contact (when you start from an Account) or Parent Account (when you start from a Contact) to also relate the new Address record to that record. But the Address record is only related, not synchronized: Setting it as the Current Address or Default Address doesn't update the Contact's Mailing Address (if you started from an Account) or the Account's Billing Address (if you started from a Contact). When you need to edit an address for a Contact or a non-Household Account, you can edit the Address record or the address fields on the Contact or Account record. Edits made to the Contact's Mailing Address or the Account's Billing Address are synced with the Address record, and vice versa. Just remember that the edits don't also sync with the related Contact's address (if you edit the Account's address) or the related Account's address (if you edit the Contact's address). Finally, you can specify additional seasonal addresses for non-Household Accounts. See [Create Address Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Create an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact.") and [Edit Addresses](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_address.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Update an address record from the Addresses related list for an account or contact."). ## Manage Addresses When Multiple Addresses Are Off If you're not using multiple addresses on Administrative or organizational Accounts, or their Contacts, simply update addresses directly on the Contact or Account record. Go to the record, click **Edit**, and make and save your changes. The Contact or Account record is updated. The Address object isn't used when multiple addresses are off, and there's nothing to synchronize. ## Multiple Addresses and Data Storage One final important consideration about multiple addresses is data storage. Every Address record uses 2 KB of data storage. While that doesn't sound like a lot, it adds up. If you have 10,000 students who each have two addresses in a year—one during the academic year and one during the summer—that's 20 MB on student Address records. Over four or six years, that's 80 MB to 120 MB. Add in addresses for studying abroad, for family members who move, for faculty at home and at work, and you can see how address data storage continues to climb. As an EDA admin, it's important to stay aware of your org's storage. In Setup, search for and select **Storage Usage**. The Current Data Storage Usage table shows the number of records, amount of storage, and percentage of storage used by each Salesforce object, in descending order of usage. Look for Addresses. If or when the Address storage grows too large, consider deleting old address records—especially seasonal addresses. However, be sure to keep any addresses for recruiting and admissions or advancement.  ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note The Latest Start Date and Latest End Date fields on Address records tell you the last time the Address was the Current Address. They are helpful in determining whether addresses are out of date and can be deleted. For most institutions, address storage isn't a major roadblock. However, if storage is a concern, we recommend that you still use multiple addresses on student Household Accounts, but not on Administrative or organizational Accounts. The automatic syncing of address data across Address, Account, and Contact records over a student's nomadic tenure at your institution is typically worth the trade-off. # Understand Backup Models Results Learn about Backup Model results for your org. Backup Models and Einstein Prediction Builder (EPB) both generate predictive insights based on data in your org. The main difference between the two is that EPB needs a [minimum threshold of records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_considerations.htm&type=5) to be able to generate predictions. However, the predictive insights from either job can be used to understand the likelihood of constituents becoming a first-time, recurring, or top donors. The output of Backup Models jobs can be interpreted in the same way as [EPB predictive insights results](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.efn_epb_predictive_insights_results.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn about EPB results for your org."). Predictive insights are displayed on Contact cards for individual constituents. Based on user configuration and consent management settings, the following output can be displayed on Contact cards: - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with. # Understand EPB Predictive Insights Results Learn about EPB results for your org. After your predictions are generated, review the predictive insights in the [Einstein Prediction Builder Scorecard](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.custom_ai_prediction_builder_scorecard.htm&type=5). Check out big-picture metrics, such as prediction quality and top predictors. Drill in on details, such as impact, correlation, and weight of each predictor. Predictive insights are displayed on Contact cards for individual constituents. Based on user configuration and consent management settings, the following output can be displayed on Contact cards: - No results are displayed if the predictive metrics fields are not populated. - If the Don't Profile field is checked, then a yellow warning icon and a **Don't Profile** badge are displayed on the Predictive Metrics header when predictive metrics are loaded. The Don't Profile field is located on the individual record that the Contact is associated with. To learn more about your scorecard metrics and prediction quality, see [Einstein Prediction Builder: Understanding Your Scorecard Metrics and Prediction Quality](https://admin.salesforce.com/blog/2020/einstein-prediction-builder-understanding-your-scorecard-metrics-and-prediction-quality). # Understand Field Mappings This article explains Field Mappings, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data Field Mappings are a key component of Advanced Mapping. Field Mappings connect fields on the NPSP Data Import object—where you initially bring data into Salesforce—to fields on the target object—Account, Contact, Opportunity, or other objects.  For example, let’s look at data for Billing City on the Account object. When you gather Billing City data from a Gift Entry or Elevate form, or import it using an import tool, the data is first stored in a field called Account1 City on the NPSP Data Import object. Ultimately, that data needs to get to the Billing City field on the Account object. A Field Mapping record connects those two fields. The Field Mapping record within Advanced Mapping looks like this:![Field Mapping record showing Account1 City field linked to BillingCity field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/am2_billing_city_field_mapping.png) Advanced Mapping comes with the Field Mappings that cover typical data entry and import scenarios. For most organizations, no additional customization is needed. However, if you want to import data into a custom field, or include a custom field on a Gift Entry or Elevate form, create a Field Mapping record and complete some other necessary customizations. For more information, see [Customize Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_use_advanced_mapping.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize Advanced Mapping for data import if you want to map data into an object or field that hasn't yet been mapped."). # Understand Object Groups This article explains Object Groups, a key component of Advanced Mapping, which is the logic used to process Gift Entry, Elevate, and imported data. An Object Group is a container for a collection of Field Mappings. In addition to holding Field Mappings, Object Groups tell the NPSP Data Importer tool what types of records (e.g. Accounts, Contacts, Opportunities, etc.) to create or update. The object type is specified in the Object Name field: ![Object Group showing Object Name of Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/am2_object_name.png) Object Groups also tell the NPSP Data Importer tool how to relate records to each other. For example, GAU Allocation 1 and GAU Allocation 2 are both a child of the Opportunity Object Group: ![GAU Allocation Object Groups showing they each have a child relationship to the Opportunity Object Group](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/am2_allocation_object_groups.png) These Object Groups allow you to include data for an Opportunity, along with data for two different GAU Allocations for that Opportunity, all in the same row of your import spreadsheet. Advanced Mapping comes with several Object Groups already configured. If you have a previously unmapped custom object with fields you want to include in your data import or Gift Entry form, create a new Object Group then complete some additional customizations. For more information, see [Connect a New Object in Advanced Mapping](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_am2_connect_new_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping comes with Contacts, Accounts, Opportunities, and other objects already mapped. You can connect additional objects that are directly related to Contacts, Accounts, or Opportunities."). # Understand the Admissions and Reviewer Consoles The Admissions and Reviewer Consoles give admissions officers and application reviewers a central place to focus on application reviews, see critical tasks, and take important next steps.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When you open the Recruitment & Admissions app, you arrive on a home page that's designed for your role and license type. Education Cloud has separate consoles for the admissions officer and application reviewer. - **[Set Up the Admissions Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_admissions_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app that shows admissions data, reviews, and tasks. - **[Set Up the Director Console for Recruitment and Admissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_director_console_rna.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app, where a director can see admissions and recruitment analytics, create actionable lists and assign them to staff. - **[Set Up the Recruiter Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_recruiter_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app for recruiters.​ - **[Set Up the Reviewer Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_reviewer_console.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a home page for the Recruitment & Admissions app for application reviewers. ## Explore the Consoles Each console gives both admissions officers and application reviewers a place to see the application reviews assigned to them, along with their daily and upcoming tasks and events. Admissions officers can also see high-level data insights related to the status of applicants for their institution. ### Admissions Console The Admissions Console is for the admissions officers in your institution. These users have the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license. Because they have the broadest access to Education Cloud, they have more data and information to work with. ![Admissions Console](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/admissions_console.png) - See application volume, status of application reviews, admission efficiency, incomplete applications, and applications ready for a decision (1). - See lists of applications that are ready for a decision, incomplete applications, and applications that are assigned for review (2). - See tasks that are due today. Click **View All** to see all tasks (3). - See upcoming events and tasks that are due soon (4). ### Reviewer Console The Reviewer Console is for the people who conduct application reviews for your institution. Reviewers can be anyone in your institution or external partners. These users have the Education Cloud Reviewer permission set license. This gives them access to the elements that they need to view and approve applications. ![Reviewer Console](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/reviewer_console.png) - See a list of the applications that are assigned for review (1). - View tasks that are due today. Click **View All** to see all tasks (2). - View upcoming events and tasks that are due soon (3). SEE ALSO: - [Set Up the Admissions Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_admissions_console.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Up the Reviewer Console](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_the_reviewer_console.htm&language=en_US) # Understand the Data Model Requirements The dashboards show data from various objects. - Account with Academic Program and Educational Institution record types - Address - Application - Contact - Education History - Term - User In addition, the model also uses geomarket codes from College Board. The dashboards use a generic data model that can easily fit the needs of most institutions. If creating your own data model, here's how to structure the data. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To view a visual representation of the data model in Tableau, click the **Data Source** tab. ## Application and User To filter data in the dashboard by staff member or manager, you have User records structured using this parent-child relationship.  - User - User Application records specify an Owner (OwnerId) field that points to an employee at your institution. In addition, each User record specifies another employee in the Manager (ManagerId) field. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note The data model requires that employees, not applicants, own Application records. Let’s look at how this model works for a recruiter named Cali Nguyen. Application Record | Application Name | Applicant | Applying To | Owner | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | APP-0123 | Marla Gianni | B.S. Computer Science | Cali Nguyen | User Record | Name | Title | Manager | | --- | --- | --- | | Cali Nguyen | Admissions Recruiter | Dimitri Trapalis | | Dimitri Trapalis | Admissions Director | \-- | ## Application and Account (for Academic Programs) To filter data in the dashboard by program, you have Account records structured using this parent-child relationship. - Institution (record type is Educational Institution) - Department (record type is University Department) - Program (record type is Academic Program) The program Account record is specified in the Applying To field on the Application record. Let’s look at how this model works for a student named Marla Gianni. Application Record | Application Name | Applicant | Applying To | Application Status | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | APP-0123 | Marla Gianni | B.S. Computer Science | Incomplete | Account Records | Account Name | Account Record Type | Parent Account | | --- | --- | --- | | B.S. Computer Science | Academic Program | Department of Computer Science | | Department of Computer Science | University Department | Connected University | | Connected University | Educational Institution | \-- | ## Education History and Account (for Educational Institutions) To filter data in the dashboard by High School District or High School, you have Account records structured using this parent-child relationship.  - District (record type is Educational Institution) - High School (record type is Educational Institution) The high school's Account is specified in the Educational Institution Account (hed\_\_Account\_\_c) field of the Contact's related Education History record. If you’re not using Accounts to identify school districts, you can still filter for high schools. Also, keep in mind that there's no qualifying logic to determine if the Account is for a high school. Therefore, college-related data can show up in the High School filter. Let’s look at how this model works for a student named Marla Gianni. Education History Record | Education History Name | Contact | Educational Institution Account | | --- | --- | --- | | EH-1234 | Marla Gianni | Trailhead Academy High School | Account Records | Account Name | Account Record Type | Parent Account | | --- | --- | --- | | Trailhead Academy High School | Educational Institution | Village East School District | | Village East School District | Educational Institution | \-- | # Understand What the Student Success Chatbot Does Learn how the chatbot engages with students and uses flows. - **[How Does the Chatbot Initiate Conversation?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_understand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot combines a number of Salesforce tools. - **[What Conversations Can the Chatbot Have?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_understand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot includes menu items that allow students to manage their SMS notification preferences, view and update the status of Tasks in their Success Plans, and learn how to connect with members of their success team. - **[How Does the Chatbot Get Information?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_understand.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Flows power the logic that’s used in Student Success chatbot conversations. ## How Does the Chatbot Initiate Conversation? The Student Success chatbot combines a number of Salesforce tools. - Outbound Messages - Process Builder - Omni-Channel - Einstein Bots - Flows Initially, the Student Success chatbot—an Einstein bot—uses a scheduled flow, Student Success Chatbot: Welcome, and a messaging template to invite students to engage with it. Omni-Channel receives the student's first reply Omni-Channel and passes it to the chatbot as an inbound message, allowing the conversation to continue. The chatbot uses other flows to fetch data about the student Contact and their open Tasks. ## What Conversations Can the Chatbot Have? The Student Success chatbot includes menu items that allow students to manage their SMS notification preferences, view and update the status of Tasks in their Success Plans, and learn how to connect with members of their success team. ## How Does the Chatbot Get Information? Flows power the logic that’s used in Student Success chatbot conversations. Student Identification When a student initiates a conversation with the Student Success chatbot via SMS, the bot runs a flow to retrieve the student's Contact information. Tasks When a student chooses to view their Tasks, they can view all open Tasks or Tasks that are due on the current day. The Student Success chatbot runs a flow to retrieve information on the Tasks that the student wants to see. Preferences When a student chooses to update their notification preferences—for example, to pause notifications for 7 days—the Student Success chatbot runs a flow to update the Bot Messaging fields on the student's Contact record and to update the Bot Messaging reminder fields on the student's Task records. # Understand What's Included with Education Cloud Education Cloud provides educational institutions with a specialized data model and tools that support the entire learning experience. The platform includes features and capabilities for recruitment and admissions, academic operations, student success, mentoring, alumni relations, and fundraising. Educational institutions facilitate the journeys of many different stakeholders. They create and maintain recruitment and application processes, organize academic courses and programs, manage student support programs, and more. Education Cloud uses Salesforce's platform along with a specialized data model to build applications that help support the entire learning experience.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
## Salesforce's Platform Education Cloud is built on Salesforce's platform. This combination means that Education Cloud is equipped with features and capabilities that give you a 360-degree view of your prospects and students so that you can serve them best. And Education Cloud is secure, flexible, and customizable, letting you implement it in your institution and tailor it to meet your needs. ## The Education Cloud Data Model Enhance different aspects of the educational experience and institutional management​ with the Education Cloud data model. The model includes apps for Recruitment and Admissions, Academic Operations, Student Success, Mentoring, Alumni Relations, and Fundraising. Recruitment and Admissions provides learners with a seamless experience from application to enrollment, while enabling staff to efficiently orchestrate the admissions process. With Academic Operations, you can manage your institution's academic offerings, including courses, programs, and custom learning options. Student Success gives you tools to support students in your institution, including program management and alerts that inform you about learner performance. Use Mentoring to create and manage mentoring programs, strengthen relationships between mentors and mentees, assign benefits, and manage assessments. Alumni Relations lets alumni stay connected to your school and other alumni. It also lets staff manage and interact with alumni in a central place. With Fundraising, engage donors, raise funds, and drive outcomes with tools for strategic planning and data-driven insights. See [Developer Resources for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_developer_resources.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn where to find developer resources including the entity relationship diagram (ERD), object reference, and apex reference."). ## The Toolkit To automate cumbersome, paper-based processes, Education Cloud includes a collection of components and tools that put the platform and data model to work. The toolkit includes Omnistudio, Action Plans, Actionable Relationship Center (ARC), Business Rules Engine, among other components, services, and tools. For example, you can create dynamic applications and create scoring rubrics to speed up the admissions process.​ To explore use cases for common features, see [Extend Education Cloud with Common Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_extend_education_cloud_with_common_features.htm&language=en_US). ## Experience Cloud Begin by configuring the Experience Cloud Education Portal template, and provide a single, secure online portal that applicants, students, alumni, and even learners with overlapping roles can use to access nearly everything they need to engage with your institution. Configure pages and components and control access to them based on your institution's processes and your constituents' needs. To create a self-service site for learners, see [Set Up an Education Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_an_education_portal.htm&language=en_US). # Understand What's Included with Student Success Hub Learn about license requirements and K-12 and higher ed configurations in Student Success Hub. Depending on the type of license you have and the options you choose when you install Student Success Hub, it provides a combination of managed packages, unmanaged metadata configurations, and sample data for a K-12 school or for a higher education institution. Features that students use, such as appointments and portals, require either a Customer Community Plus license or a Customer Community Plus Login license. These licenses can be provisioned through Experience Cloud for Learner Success. For details on features that require student user licensing, see the tables. With the purchase of these licenses, K-12 orgs can also use unmanaged configurations for these features. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_important.png) Important For usage restrictions that apply to this product, see the information for Service Cloud in [this document](https://www.salesforce.com/content/dam/web/en_us/www/documents/legal/misc/sales-service-contractual-restrictions.pdf). ## Managed Packages |   | K-12 Orgs | Higher Ed Orgs | | --- | --- | --- | | EDA | √ | √ | | K-12 Architecture Kit | √ | — | | Student Success Hub | √ | √ | | Pathways | — | √ | ## Unmanaged Configurations and Sample Data |   | K-12 Orgs | Higher Ed Orgs | | --- | --- | --- | | Alerts | √ | √ | | Appointments | — | Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license. | | Notes | √ | √ | | Queue Management | — | Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license. | | Sample Data | √ | √ | | Sample Reports and Dashboards | √ | √ | | Student Portal | — | Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license. | | Student Record Cases | √ | √ | | Students Not Served | — | Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license. | | Success Plans and Success Plan Templates | Can be assigned to support staff | Can be assigned to support staff or to students (with a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license). | | Success Teams | √ | √ | | Support Pools | — | Requires a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license. | | Tasks | Can be assigned to support staff | Can be assigned to support staff or to students (with a Customer Community Plus or Customer Community Plus Login license). | # Uninstall EDA Follow these steps to uninstall EDA. - **[Uninstall the Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend that only Salesforce admins or implementation partners uninstall Education Data Architecture. The uninstall process can take several hours or more to complete, and your users should not access Salesforce while you're uninstalling Education Data Architecture. - **[Back Up Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you uninstall a package, the process deletes all of its components, custom fields, and data from your Salesforce organization. - **[Remove Profile Access to EDA](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that EDA isn't the default app. - **[Delete the App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete the Education Data Architecture app as part uninstalling the product. - **[Delete Page Layouts for Standard Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You must delete the Education Data Architecture page layouts. - **[Remove Elements from Custom Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have any Education Data Architecture page elements (such as buttons or related lists) on non-Education Data Architecture page layouts, you must remove them. - **[Uninstall the Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you remove all Education Data Architecture components, uninstall the package. - **[Uninstall Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete these Education Data Architecture record types. - **[Delete Behavior Management Support Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete behavior management support processes as part of uninstalling Education Data Architecture. - **[Remove EDA Unmanaged Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete these EDA unmanaged fields. ## Uninstall the Product We recommend that only Salesforce admins or implementation partners uninstall Education Data Architecture. The uninstall process can take several hours or more to complete, and your users should not access Salesforce while you're uninstalling Education Data Architecture. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If the uninstall process fails due to scheduled jobs, file a support ticket to disable them. For more information, go to [Create a Technical Support Case with Salesforce Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_how_to_create_a_tech_support_case.htm). ## Back Up Your Data When you uninstall a package, the process deletes all of its components, custom fields, and data from your Salesforce organization. Be sure you understand the impact uninstalling Education Data Architecture has on your org. [Follow these directions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) to save a local copy of your data if you want to reimport that data to new custom fields. ## Remove Profile Access to EDA For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that EDA isn't the default app. - **[Remove Profile Access to the EDA Classic App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that the EDA classic app isn't the default app. - **[Remove Profile Access to the Education Data Architecture Lightning App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that the Education Data Architecture Lightning app isn't the default app. ### Remove Profile Access to the EDA Classic App For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that the EDA classic app isn't the default app. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box and then select **Profiles**. 2. Next to System Administrator, click **Edit**. 3. For the EDA rows, make sure that Default is deselected. If it's selected, select a different default app. You can leave the EDA rows Visible. 4. Save your changes. 5. Repeat these steps for all custom profiles, including the ones that you aren't actively using. ### Remove Profile Access to the Education Data Architecture Lightning App For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that the Education Data Architecture Lightning app isn't the default app. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator** and then click **Edit**. 3. For the Education Data Architecture rows, make sure that Default is deselected. If it's selected, select a different default app. You can leave the Education Data Architecture rows Visible. 4. Save your changes. 5. Repeat these steps for all custom profiles, including the ones that you aren't actively using. ## Delete the App Delete the Education Data Architecture app as part uninstalling the product. 1. From Setup, enter App in the Quick Find box and then select **App Manager**. 2. Next to Education Data Architecture, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and then select **Delete**. 3. Click **Delete** again to confirm. ## Delete Page Layouts for Standard Objects You must delete the Education Data Architecture page layouts. Sometimes, you'll need to assign or create a non-Education Data Architecture page layout so that your standard objects still have an active page layout. Delete these Education Data Architecture page layouts from the following objects: | Object Name | Page Layout to Delete | | --- | --- | | Account | HEDA Household Layout | | Account | HEDA Organization Layout | | Case | EDA Incident Layout | | Contact | HEDA Contact Layout | 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. In the row for the page layout you want to delete, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and then select **Delete**. 5. Click **Delete** to confirm. 6. To replace the layout that you're deleting, select a non-Education Data Architecture Page Layout. If there isn't another page layout listed in the Replace with Page Layout menu, you can [create one](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=customize_layoutcreate.htm&language=en_US). If you do so, don't copy the layout from an existing Education Data Architecture layout, but create one from scratch. 7. Click **Replace**. 8. Repeat these steps for each page layout listed in the table. ## Remove Elements from Custom Layouts If you have any Education Data Architecture page elements (such as buttons or related lists) on non-Education Data Architecture page layouts, you must remove them. ## Uninstall the Package After you remove all Education Data Architecture components, uninstall the package. 1. From Setup, enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 2. Click **Uninstall** next to the package name. 3. Select the checkbox next to **Yes, I want to uninstall this package and permanently delete all associated components**. 4. Click **Uninstall**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note If the uninstall doesn't succeed the first time you try it, there might be additional Education Data Architecture components that you need to remove. You are presented with a list of remaining components for each package as you try the uninstall. Remove the additional components and try the uninstall again until you can uninstall all the packages. ## Uninstall Record Types Delete these Education Data Architecture record types. Step 1: Remove Access to Education Data Architecture Record Types 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator**. 3. Under Record Type Settings, next to the object name, click **Edit**. 4. Under Available Record Types, move all record types to the Available Record Types column. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat these steps for all custom profiles, including the ones that you aren't actively using. Step 2: Deactivate Education Data Architecture Record Types 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click the record type that you want to deactivate, and then click **Edit**. 5. Deselect the **Active** checkbox. 6. Save your changes. 7. Repeat these steps for each record type listed in the table. Step 3: Delete Education Data Architecture Record Types 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. In the row for the page layout that you want to delete, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)and then select **Delete**. 5. Click **Delete** again to confirm. 6. Repeat these steps for each record type listed in the table. | Object Name | Record Type to Delete | | --- | --- | | Account | Academic Program | | Account | Administrative | | Account | Business Organization | | Account | Educational Institution | | Account | Household Account | | Account | Sports Organization | | Account | University Department | | Case | Incident | ## Delete Behavior Management Support Process Delete behavior management support processes as part of uninstalling Education Data Architecture. 1. From Setup, enter Support in the Quick Find box and then select **Support Processes**. 2. Next to Behavior Management, click **Delete**. 3. Click **OK** to confirm. ## Remove EDA Unmanaged Fields Delete these EDA unmanaged fields. | Object Name | Field to Delete | | --- | --- | | Account | Credentialing Identifier | | Contact | Credentialing Identifier | | Contact | Primary Academic Program | | Contact | Primary Department | | Contact | Primary Educational Institution | | Contact | Primary Sports Organization | 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Fields and Relationships**. 4. Next to the field that you want to delete, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and then select **Delete**. 5. Click **Delete** again to confirm. # Uninstall K-12 Architecture Kit Follow these steps to uninstall your app. - **[Uninstall the Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We recommend that only Salesforce admins or implementation partners uninstall K-12 Architecture Kit. The uninstall process can take several hours or more to complete, and your users should not access Salesforce while you're uninstalling K-12 Architecture Kit. - **[Back Up Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you uninstall a package, the process deletes all of its components, custom fields, and data from your Salesforce organization. - **[Remove Profile Access to K-12 Architecture Kit](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that K-12 Architecture Kit isn't the default app. - **[Delete the App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete the K-12 Architecture Kit app as part uninstalling the product. - **[Delete Page Layouts for Standard Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You must delete the K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts. - **[Remove Elements from Custom Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have any K-12 Architecture Kit page elements (such as buttons or related lists) on non-K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts, you must remove them. - **[Uninstall the Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you remove all K-12 Architecture Kit components, uninstall the package. - **[Uninstall Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete these K-12 Architecture Kit record types. - **[Delete Behavior Management Support Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_uninstall_eda.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete behavior management support processes as part of uninstalling K-12 Architecture Kit. ## Uninstall the Product We recommend that only Salesforce admins or implementation partners uninstall K-12 Architecture Kit. The uninstall process can take several hours or more to complete, and your users should not access Salesforce while you're uninstalling K-12 Architecture Kit. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If the uninstall process fails due to scheduled jobs, file a support ticket to disable them. For more information, go to [Create a Technical Support Case with Salesforce Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_how_to_create_a_tech_support_case.htm). ## Back Up Your Data When you uninstall a package, the process deletes all of its components, custom fields, and data from your Salesforce organization. Be sure you understand the impact uninstalling K-12 Architecture Kit has on your org. [Follow these directions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_exportdata.htm&type=5) to save a local copy of your data if you want to reimport that data to new custom fields. ## Remove Profile Access to K-12 Architecture Kit For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that K-12 Architecture Kit isn't the default app. 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator** and then click **Edit**. 3. For the K-12 Architecture Kit rows, make sure that Default is deselected. If it's selected, select a different default app. You can leave the K-12 Architecture Kit rows Visible. 4. Save your changes. 5. Repeat these steps for all custom profiles, including the ones that you aren't actively using. ## Delete the App Delete the K-12 Architecture Kit app as part uninstalling the product. 1. From Setup, enter App in the Quick Find box and then select **App Manager**. 2. Next to K-12 Architecture Kit, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and then select **Delete**. 3. Click **Delete** again to confirm. ## Delete Page Layouts for Standard Objects You must delete the K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts. Sometimes, you'll need to assign or create a non-K-12 Architecture Kit page layout so that your standard objects still have an active page layout. Delete these K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts from the following objects: | Object Name | Page Layout to Delete | | --- | --- | | Account | K12 Kit Academic Department Layout | | Account | K12 Kit Academic Program Layout | | Account | K12 Kit Educational Institution Layout | | Account | K12 Kit Household Layout | | Account | K12 Kit Organization Layout | | Account | K12 Kit Sports Organization Layout | | Case | K12 Kit Incident Layout | | Case | K12 Kit Positive Behavior Layout | | Contact | K12 Kit Faculty Staff Layout | | Contact | K12 Kit Guardian Layout | | Contact | K12 Kit Student Layout | 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. In the row for the page layout you want to delete, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) and then select **Delete**. 5. Click **Delete** to confirm. 6. To replace the layout that you're deleting, select a non-K-12 Architecture Kit Page Layout. If there isn't another page layout listed in the Replace with Page Layout menu, you can [create one](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=customize_layoutcreate.htm&language=en_US). If you do so, don't copy the layout from an existing K-12 Architecture Kit layout, but create one from scratch. 7. Click **Replace**. 8. Repeat these steps for each page layout listed in the table. ## Remove Elements from Custom Layouts If you have any K-12 Architecture Kit page elements (such as buttons or related lists) on non-K-12 Architecture Kit page layouts, you must remove them. ## Uninstall the Package After you remove all K-12 Architecture Kit components, uninstall the package. 1. From Setup, enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 2. Click **Uninstall** next to the package name. 3. Select the checkbox next to **Yes, I want to uninstall this package and permanently delete all associated components**. 4. Click **Uninstall**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/images/icon_note.png) Note If the uninstall doesn't succeed the first time you try it, there might be additional K-12 Architecture Kit components that you need to remove. You are presented with a list of remaining components for each package as you try the uninstall. Remove the additional components and try the uninstall again until you can uninstall all the packages. ## Uninstall Record Types Delete these K-12 Architecture Kit record types. Step 1: Remove Access to K-12 Architecture Kit Record Types 1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box and then select **Profiles**. 2. Click **System Administrator**. 3. Under Record Type Settings, next to the object name, click **Edit**. 4. Under Available Record Types, move all record types to the Available Record Types column. 5. Save your changes. 6. Repeat these steps for all custom profiles, including the ones that you aren't actively using. Step 2: Deactivate K-12 Architecture Kit Record Types 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. Click the record type that you want to deactivate, and then click **Edit**. 5. Deselect the **Active** checkbox. 6. Save your changes. 7. Repeat these steps for each record type listed in the table. Step 3: Delete K-12 Architecture Kit Record Types 1. From Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click the name of one of the objects listed in the table. 3. Click **Record Types**. 4. In the row for the page layout that you want to delete, click ![Show more options](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-k12_architecture_kit-264-0-0-production-enus/aa53d0d1-adc5-4af6-adb8-c34704f68202/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png)and then select **Delete**. 5. Click **Delete** again to confirm. 6. Repeat these steps for each record type listed in the table. | Object Name | Record Type to Delete | | --- | --- | | Case | Positive Behavior | ## Delete Behavior Management Support Process Delete behavior management support processes as part of uninstalling K-12 Architecture Kit. 1. From Setup, enter Support in the Quick Find box and then select **Support Processes**. 2. Next to Behavior Management, click **Delete**. 3. Click **OK** to confirm. # Uninstall NPSP This article provides instructions for uninstalling a default version of NPSP from your Salesforce organization. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you're installing the latest version of NPSP, you do not need to uninstall any previous versions. Additionally, you should only uninstall NPSP if you no longer need to use it. Uninstalling will not help troubleshoot issues, and may result in data loss. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To uninstall the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) you must uninstall all of its related packages. NPSP version 3.0 or later includes these packages. - **[Back Up Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you uninstall a package, all of its components, custom fields and data are deleted from your Salesforce organization. Be sure you understand the impact uninstalling NPSP will have on your org! - **[Remove Profile Access to the NPSP App](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that NPSP isn't the default app. - **[Delete NPSP Page Layouts for Standard Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete the NPSP page layouts before you can uninstall. In some cases you need to assign or create a non-NPSP page layout so that your standard objects still have an active page layout. - **[Remove NPSP Elements from Non-NPSP Custom Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you included any NPSP page elements (such as buttons or related lists) on non-NPSP page layouts, you must remove them. Note that these are just some of the most common customizations that are possible. - **[Remove NPSP Lightning Record Pages as Defaults](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove the Lightning record pages as the org default. - **[Revert Button Overrides to Default](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** NPSP changes the behavior of these standard Salesforce buttons. - **[Delete NPSP Custom Metadata](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Delete NPSP custom metadata types before you uninstall NPSP. - **[Remove NPSP Home Visualforce Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The NPSP Home Visualforce page was included in some versions of the NPSP trial. If you find you have this page, you should remove it. - **[Remove Level Components](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Remove NPSP picklist values from the Target field and replace with non-NPSP value. - **[Uninstall NPSP Packages in the Correct Order](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_uninstall.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now you should be able to uninstall the six NPSP Packages. You must uninstall the NPSP Packages in this exact order. ## Overview To uninstall the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) you must uninstall all of its related packages. NPSP version 3.0 or later includes these packages. - Affiliations - Contacts & Organizations - Households - Nonprofit Success Pack - Recurring Donations - Relationships Only a system administrator or implementation partner should uninstall NPSP. The uninstall process can take several hours or even longer to complete. Your users should not access Salesforce while you're uninstalling NPSP. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important If you want to remove NPSP, you **must** uninstall all six packages following the step-by-step instructions below. When you uninstall a package, wait until you receive an email confirmation that the package has uninstalled before proceeding with the next one. **Failure to follow the steps in the correct order prevents packages from being removed successfully.** If you uninstall only the Nonprofit Success Pack package without removing the others, your org may be left in an unstable state, as there is code and functionality in the Nonprofit Success Pack packages that the other packages rely on. ### Alternatives to Uninstalling Because NPSP contains so many components, it can be difficult to uninstall especially if your organization has been using NPSP for a while or you've extended NPSP with your own customizations. Instead of uninstalling, you might consider moving to a new Salesforce org. In this scenario, you're starting over with a new Salesforce implementation, so you'll be re-building from the ground up. [Contact your Account Executive](https://www.salesforce.com/campaign/your-account/) or implementation partner to discuss options. ## Back Up Your Data When you uninstall a package, all of its components, custom fields and data are deleted from your Salesforce organization. Be sure you understand the impact uninstalling NPSP will have on your org! Learn how to back up your data in [Export Backup Data from Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=xcloud.admin_exportdata.htm&type=5). ## Remove Profile Access to the NPSP App For the System Administrator profile and each custom profile, make sure that NPSP isn't the default app. 1. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select **Profiles**. 3. Click **System Administrator**, then click **Assigned Apps**. 4. For the Nonprofit Success Pack rows, make sure that **Default** is not selected. If it is, click **Edit** and select a different default app. You can leave the Nonprofit Success Pack rows Visible. 5. Click **Save**. 6. Repeat these steps for all custom profiles, even profiles that you aren't actively using. ## Delete NPSP Page Layouts for Standard Objects Delete the NPSP page layouts before you can uninstall. In some cases you need to assign or create a non-NPSP page layout so that your standard objects still have an active page layout. Delete and replace these NPSP page layouts: | **Object Name** | **Page Layout to Delete** | | --- | --- | | Account | Household Layout | | Account | Organization Layout | | Account | Household Lightning Layout | | Account | Organization Lightning Layout | | Campaign | NPSP Campaign Layout | | Contact | Contact Layout | | Contact | Contact Lightning Layout | | Opportunity | Donation Layout | | Opportunity | In-Kind Layout | | Opportunity | Grant Layout | | Opportunity | Major Gift Layout | | Opportunity | Matching Gift Layout | | Opportunity | Membership Layout | 1. From Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. ![Object Manager tab in the Setup window.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_objmgrtab.png) 2. In the list of objects, click the name of one of the objects listed above. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. In the row for the page layout you want to delete, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Delete**. 5. To replace the layout you're deleting, select a non-NPSP Page Layout. If there isn't another page layout listed in the **Replace with Page Layout** menu, you may need to [create one](https://help.salesforce.com/apex/htviewhelpdoc?id=customize_layoutcreate.htm&language=en_US). If you need to create a new layout, don't copy the layout from an existing NPSP layout. In some cases you may need to create a page layout from scratch. 6. Click **Replace**. 7. Repeat these steps for each page layout listed above. ![Page Layout Delete page showing the Replace button highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_replacepl.png) ## Remove NPSP Elements from Non-NPSP Custom Page Layouts If you included any NPSP page elements (such as buttons or related lists) on non-NPSP page layouts, you must remove them. Note that these are just some of the most common customizations that are possible. ### Account Remove the **New Account Donation** button. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Account**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click the page layout name. 5. On the Opportunities related list, click the wrench icon. 6. In the Buttons section, click **Revert to Defaults** to remove the custom **New Account Donation** button and enable the standard **New** button. ![Page Layout Buttons section, showing the Revert to Defaults button highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_reverttodefaults.png) 7. Click **OK**. 8. Click **Save**. ### Campaign Remove the **Household Mailing List** button and the **GAU Allocations** related list. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Campaign**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click the page layout name. 5. Drag the **Household Mailing List** button from the Custom Button section to the field section at the top of the page. 6. Remove the **GAU Allocations** related list by clicking ![Button to remove a related list from a page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_removerl.png) on its title bar. 7. Click **Save**. ### Contact Remove the **Relationships Viewer, Recalculate Rollups** and **New Contact Donation** buttons. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click the page layout name. 5. Drag the **Relationships Viewer** button from the Custom Button section to the field section at the top of the page. 6. Drag the **Recalculate Rollups** button from the Custom Button section to the field section at the top of the page. 7. Drag the **Recalculate Rollups** button from the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section to the field section at the top of the page. 8. On the Opportunities related list, click the wrench icon. 9. In the Buttons section, click **Revert to Defaults** to remove the **New Contact Donation** button and enable the standard **New** button. 10. Click **OK**. 11. Click **Save**. Delete the **New Donation**, **New Membership**, **New Major Gift**, and **New In-Kind Gift** actions: 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Contact**. 3. In the row for New Donation, click arrow, then click **Delete**. 4. Repeat these steps for New Membership, New Major Gift, and New In-Kind Gift. ### Opportunities Remove the **Matching Donation**, **Email Acknowledgment**, **Manage Soft Credits**, and **Refresh Name** buttons and **GAU Allocations**, **Partial Soft Credits**, and **Payments** related lists. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click the page layout name. 5. Drag the **Matching Donation**, **Email Acknowledgment**, **Manage Soft Credits**, and **Refresh Name** buttons from the Custom Button section to the field section at the top of the page. 6. Drag the **Manage Soft Credits** button from the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section to the field section at the top of the page. 7. Remove the **GAU Allocations**, **Partial Soft Credits**, and **Payments** related lists by clicking ![Button for removing a related list from a page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_removerl.png) on their title bars. 8. Click **Save**. Remove the **Email Acknowledgment** button from the Opportunities Search layouts. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Search Layouts**. 4. In the row for the Default Layout, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Click the left arrow to remove **Email Acknowledgments** from the Selected Buttons. 6. Click **Save**. Remove the **Email Acknowledgment** button from Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic: 1. In **Setup**, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click Search Layouts for Salesforce Classic. 4. In the row for List view, click the arrow, then click **Edit**. 5. Click the left arrow to remove **Email Acknowledgments** from the Selected Buttons. 6. Click **Save**. Remove the **Partial Soft Credits** related list from Opportunity page layouts: 1. In **Setup**, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**, then click **Donation Layout**. 4. Scroll down to the Related Lists section. 5. Click Remove Related List in the Partial Soft Credits related list. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for all other Opportunity page layouts. Delete the **New Deliverable** action: 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Opportunity**. 3. In the row for New Deliverable, click the arrow, then click **Delete**. ### Recurring Donations Remove the **Recalculate Rollups**, and **Refresh Opportunities** buttons and the **GAU Allocations** related list: 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Recurring Donation**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click the page layout name. 5. Drag the ****Recalculate Rollups**, and **Refresh Opportunities**** buttons from the Custom Button section to the field section at the top of the page. 6. Remove the **GAU Allocations** related list by clicking ![Button for removing a related list from a page layout](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_removerl.png)on its title bar. 7. Click **Save**. Remove the **Active Schedules** and **Upcoming Installments** Lightning components from Lightning record pages. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click **Recurring Donation**. 3. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 4. Click the page layout name. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Find the Active Schedules component on the layout and click remove. ![Remove Lightning component icon highlighted.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall-remove-lightning-component.png) 7. Find the Upcoming Installment component on the layout and click remove. 8. Click **Save**. ## Remove NPSP Lightning Record Pages as Defaults Remove the Lightning record pages as the org default. - NPSP Account Record Page - NPSP Contact Record Page - NPSP Campaign Record Page - NPSP Lead Record Page - NPSP Opportunity Record Page - NPSP GAU Allocation - NPSP General Accounting Unit To remove a Lightning record page as the org default: 1. From **Setup**, enter Lightning App Builder in the Quick Find box, then click **Lightning App Builder**. 2. Click **Edit** next to the record page name. 3. Click **Activation**. 4. Click **Remove as Org Default**. 5. Click **Next**. Select **System Default** (or any non-NPSP Lightning record page). 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for all NPSP Lightning record pages listed above. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note You may also need to remove the record pages as the app default. After clicking **Activation**, click **App Default** and follow the rest of the steps outlined above. ## Revert Button Overrides to Default NPSP changes the behavior of these standard Salesforce buttons. | **Object Name** | **Button Name** | | --- | --- | | Contact | Delete | | Lead | Convert | Before uninstalling NPSP, you must restore the behavior to use default Salesforce pages. 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. In the list of objects, click the name of one of the objects listed above. 3. Click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 4. In the row with the button to be deleted, click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Edit**. 5. Select **No Override (use default)**. ![Override properties on a Button, showing that there is No Override (use default).](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_nooverride.png) 6. Click **Save**. 7. Repeat these steps for each button listed above. ## Delete NPSP Custom Metadata Delete NPSP custom metadata types before you uninstall NPSP. Delete records for these NPSP Custom Metadata Types: - Data Import Field Mapping - Data Import Field Mapping Sets - Data Import Object Mapping - Data Import Object Mapping Set - Filter Group - Filter Rule - Opportunity Stage to State Mapping - Recurring Donation Status Mapping - Rollup To delete Custom Metadata Type records: 1. In **NPSP Settings**, click **Donations** | **Customizable Rollups**. Click the toggle to disable Customizable Rollups. 2. Click **System Tools** | **Advanced Mapping for Data Import & Gift Entry**. Click the toggle to disable Advanced Mapping. 3. In **Setup**, enter Custom Metadata Types in the Quick Find and click **Custom Metadata Types**. 4. Click **Manage Records** next to Data Import Field Mapping. 5. Click **Del** next to each record until you've deleted all records. 6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for the remaining Custom Metadata Types listed above. ## Remove NPSP Home Visualforce Page The NPSP Home Visualforce page was included in some versions of the NPSP trial. If you find you have this page, you should remove it. 1. In Setup, search for Visualforce. 2. Click on **Visualforce Pages**. 3. Click N on the alphabet bar to navigate to pages that begin with N. 4. Click **Del** to the left of the NPSP\_Home page. ![Del link highlighted next to the NPSP\_Home page.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_dellink.png) ## Remove Level Components Remove NPSP picklist values from the Target field and replace with non-NPSP value. 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Level**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Click **Target**. 5. In the Values section, click **New**. 6. Enter Placeholder, then click **Save**. This step is necessary because a picklist must have at least one active value. 7. In the Values section, click **Del** next to Account. Click Ok in the pop-up window. 8. Select Replace value on records with blank value. 9. Click Save. 10. Repeat steps 7 - 9 for the Contact picklist value. Delete and erase the **Level** and **Previous Level** fields on the Account object. 1. In Setup, click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Account**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. In the row for Level, click the arrow and click **Delete**. 5. Click **Delete** in the pop-up window. 6. In the row for Previous Level, click the arrow and click **Delete**. 7. Click **Delete** in the pop-up window. 8. Click your profile picture and click **Switch to Salesforce Classic**. 9. Click **Setup**. 10. Enter Accounts in the Quick Find box. 11. Click **Fields**. 12. Scroll to the bottom of the Account Custom Fields & Relationships section. 13. Click **Deleted Fields**. 14. In the row for Level, click **Erase**. 15. Select Yes, I want to permanently delete the custom field, and click **Delete**. 16. In the row for Previous Level, click **Erase**. 17. Select Yes, I want to permanently delete the custom field, and click **Delete**. 18. Click **Switch to Lightning Experience**. ## Uninstall NPSP Packages in the Correct Order Now you should be able to uninstall the six NPSP Packages. You must uninstall the NPSP Packages in this exact order. 1. Nonprofit Starter Pack/Nonprofit Success Pack 2. Affiliations 3. Relationships 4. Recurring Donations 5. Households 6. Contacts & Organizations To uninstall a package: 1. From Setup, enter **Installed Packages** in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 2. Click **Uninstall** next to the package name. ![The Uninstall link in the Installed Packages list.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/uninstall_npsp_uninstallaction.png) 3. Check the box next to **Yes, I want to uninstall this package and permanently delete all associated components**. You can also select the option to save object data for 48 hours. 4. Click **Uninstall**. 5. **Wait for an email** that confirms that the uninstall was successful before moving on to the next package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The uninstall might not succeed the first time you try it. There may be additional NPSP components that you need to remove. You'll be presented with a list of remaining components for each package as you try the uninstall. Remove the additional components and try the uninstall again until you can uninstall all the packages. **Congratulations! You survived the uninstall experience.** # Update a Case Plan Update the overall status and information about client progress. - **[Update Overall Case Plan Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_update_a_case_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a Client progresses with their Case Plan, you will need to update the status. - **[Update Client Progress](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_update_a_case_plan.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a Client progresses through their Case Plan, you'll need to make updates to the status of Action Items and update Action Item Due Dates. It's quick and easy to do this on the Case Plan Detail. ## Update Overall Case Plan Status As a Client progresses with their Case Plan, you will need to update the status. In this example, we'll indicate that the Case Plan is now In Progress and add a Description that will show up in the highlight panel. From the Case Plan Detail View: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note The Case Plan Status represents the case manager's general assessment of the Case Plan as a whole. It is _not_ a rollup of other statuses. 1. Click **Edit**. 2. Select **In Progress** from the Status picklist. Your Salesforce Administrator can customize the values in this picklist. 3. Set the In Progress Date and add a brief description of the Case Plan. ![Case Plan Status updated to In Progress](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/updatecaseplan.png) 4. Click **Save**. ## Update Client Progress As a Client progresses through their Case Plan, you'll need to make updates to the status of Action Items and update Action Item Due Dates. It's quick and easy to do this on the Case Plan Detail. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Click a goal's chevron ![Chevron icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/chevron.png) to view action items, due dates, and statuses. 1. Click ![Chevron icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/chevron.png) to open the first goal. 2. Click the![Pencil icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/pencilicon_1.png) and mark finished action items **Completed**. You can also add new goals or action items if needed. 3. Mark the goal status **Completed** when you're confident that your Client has reached their goal. 4. Click **Save**. As you complete Action Items, the progress bar for the Goal automatically updates. ![Status updates on Goal and Action Item to show client progress](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/case_management/images/updateclientprogress.png) # Update Benefit Assignment Record Page Create and add a button to launch the flow to compare and assign mentors. When you run the screen flow on the benefit assignment page, the flow uses the fields from the mentoring profile to compare a mentee with potential mentors.
User Permissions Needed  
To update record pages:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Screenshot of a benefit assignment record page with the Assign a Provider button added to it](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_benefit_assignment.png) 1. From the object management settings for Benefit Assignment, select **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 2. Click **New Button or Link**. 3. In Label, enter Assign a Provider. Press Tab to automatically fill the Name field. 4. From Display Type, select **Detail Page Button**. 5. From Behavior, select **Display in new window**. 6. From Content Source, select **URL**. 7. In the text box, enter the URL for your copy of the Mentoring: Match Mentor and Mentee screen flow. Make sure to include the input variable for Benefit Assignment and a return URL. For example, /flow/?BenefitAssignmentId={!BenefitAssignment.Id}&retUrl=/{!BenefitAssignment.Id}. 8. Save your changes. 9. From the object management settings for Benefit Assignment, select **Page Layouts**. 10. Click the page layout that you want to add the button to. 11. In Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions, click **override the predefined actions**. 12. Click **Buttons**, and then drag **Assign a Provider** to the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning Experience Actions section. 13. Arrange the buttons as necessary, and then save your changes. # Update Person Account Page Layout in Education Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To update the person account page layout:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Fields from the Contact Point Address Object Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout. To use the seasonal, Is Primary, Is Undeliverable, standardization, and change address fields, add them to the Contact Point Address page layout. Then, in the Lightning App Builder, apply Contact Point Address as a related list to the Person Account page layout. ## See the Donor Giving Summary on the Person Account Page Make it easy to track donations by adding the Donor Giving Summary on the individual person account page. 1. In the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, go to a person account page. 2. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon.png) and select **Edit Page**. 3. Click **Save**. 4. Click **Activate**. 5. On the Org Default tab, click **Assign as Org Default**. 6. Select either **Desktop** or **Desktop and phone**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Save your work. # Update Person Account Page Layout in Nonprofit Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To update the person account page layout:

Customize Application

AND

Modify All Data

AND

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Person accounts were not built to work with Nonprofit Success Pack and therefore, are not supported for use with NPSP. If Person Accounts are not already enabled in your org, don't enable them. Once you turn on Person Accounts in your organization, you can't turn the feature off. See NPSP and Person Accounts in [NPSP FAQ](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_faq.htm&language=en_US). ## Fields from the Contact Point Address Object Manage multiple addresses by using fields from the Contact Point Address object on the Person Account page layout. To use the seasonal, Is Primary, Is Undeliverable, standardization, and change address fields, add them to the Contact Point Address page layout. Then, in the Lightning App Builder, apply Contact Point Address as a related list to the Person Account page layout. ## See the Donor Giving Summary on the Person Account Page Make it easy to track donations by adding the Donor Giving Summary on the individual person account page. 1. In the Philanthropy and Partnerships app, go to a person account page. 2. Click ![Setup](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/setup_gear_icon.png) and select **Edit Page**. 3. Click **Save**. 4. Click **Activate**. 5. On the Org Default tab, click **Assign as Org Default**. 6. Select either **Desktop** or **Desktop and phone**. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Save your work. # Update Philanthropic Research Page Layouts in Education Add buttons to Philanthropic Research record pages to easily launch the Philanthropic Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence and Create Research Request Case flows. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To create and add a button to page layouts:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the object management settings for Party Philanthropic Indicator, click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 2. Click **New Button or Link**. 3. In Label, enter Verify Indicator. Press Tab to automatically fill the Name field. 4. Select **Detail Page Button** as the display type. 5. Select **Display in new window** as the behavior. 6. Select **URL** as the content source. 7. In the text box, enter the URL for your copy of the Prospect Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence flow. Make sure to include the input variable for Party Philanthropic Indicator and a return URL. For example, /flow/?PartyPhilanthropicIndicatorId={!PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.Id }&retUrl=/{!IF( ISNULL( PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.PartyPhilanthropicOccurrenceId) , PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.Id , PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.PartyPhilanthropicOccurrenceId)}. 8. Save your changes. 9. Add the new Verify Indicator button to your Party Philanthropic Indicator page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&language=en_US). 10. Similarly, create a Request Research button configured with the Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case flow, and add the button to the Interaction Summary, Party Philanthropic Assessment, Party Philanthropic Indicator, Party Philanthropic Milestone, and Party Philanthropic Occurrence page layouts. # Update Philanthropic Research Page Layouts in Nonprofit Add buttons to Philanthropic Research record pages to easily launch the Philanthropic Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence and Create Research Request Case flows. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To create and add a button to page layouts:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group
1. From the object management settings for Party Philanthropic Indicator, click **Buttons, Links, and Actions**. 2. Click **New Button or Link**. 3. In Label, enter Verify Indicator. Press Tab to automatically fill the Name field. 4. Select **Detail Page Button** as the display type. 5. Select **Display in new window** as the behavior. 6. Select **URL** as the content source. 7. In the text box, enter the URL for your copy of the Prospect Research: Promote Party Philanthropic Indicator to Party Philanthropic Occurrence flow. Make sure to include the input variable for Party Philanthropic Indicator and a return URL. For example, /flow/?PartyPhilanthropicIndicatorId={!PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.Id }&retUrl=/{!IF( ISNULL( PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.PartyPhilanthropicOccurrenceId) , PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.Id , PartyPhilanthropicIndicator.PartyPhilanthropicOccurrenceId)}. 8. Save your changes. 9. Add the new Verify Indicator button to your Party Philanthropic Indicator page layout. See [Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.customize_layout.htm&language=en_US). 10. Similarly, create a Request Research button configured with the Prospect Research: Create Research Request Case flow, and add the button to the Interaction Summary, Party Philanthropic Assessment, Party Philanthropic Indicator, Party Philanthropic Milestone, and Party Philanthropic Occurrence page layouts. # Update Records for Opportunity Management Flow Add fields to the Learning Program record for the EDU Cloud: Create Opportunities from an Academic Interest flow. Also make sure that Academic Term records have a close date. The flow references Learning Program and Academic Term records to create an Opportunity record based on an academic interest.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To update page layouts and records: | Education Cloud Full Access | 1. Add these fields to the Learning Program page layout. See [Customize Page Layouts with the Enhanced Page Layout Editor](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.layouts_customize_ple.htm&type=5). - Create Opportunities - Group Opportunities - Product 2. Update the Learning Program record that you want to create opportunities for. - Select **Create Opportunities** to run the EDU Cloud: Generate Opportunities from an Academic Interest flow when a prospect selects this learning program in the Sign Up for Information form. - Select **Group Opportunities** to create a single opportunity for all learning programs that the prospect selects in the form. - Enter a product that's associated with the learning program. See [Products and Price Books](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sales.products_pricebooks.htm&language=en_US). 3. Make sure that your Academic Term records have a registration close date. The flow uses that date to populate the close date on the Opportunity record. # Update the Mentoring Profile Record Page Create and add fields to the mentoring profile record page that you want to use to compare and match mentors with a mentee.
User Permissions Needed  
To update the mentoring profile record page:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
![Screenshot showing the mentoring profile card for a mentee](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_profile.png) Here are examples of fields that you can use to match a mentor with a mentee. - Industry or field of study - Channel (virtual or in person) - Days Available - Times Available - Skills - Location ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Mentoring profile doesn't support Lookup Relationship, Master-Detail Relationship, and System fields to compare Mentoring participants. ## Create a Flow to Create Mentoring Profile Records Build a record-triggered flow to automatically create Mentoring Profile records when mentors and mentees complete an assessment. ![Screenshot showing the elements of a flow used to update and create mentoring profile records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/ec_mentoring_profile_flow.png) ## Flow Element Details See Also: | Flow Element | What Does It Do? | | --- | --- | | Start | Flow is initiated when assessment question responses are created. | | Get Records: Get Assessment Question Responses Records | Finds the assessment question response records where the ParentAssessmentId lookup field is equal to the ID of the parent assessment record. | | Loop: For each Assessment Question Response | Loop through child assessment question responses. | | Assignment: Set Common Fields | Sets the fields to be mapped to the mentoring profile record. | | Get Records: Get Program Enrollment | Gets the program enrollment record associated with the assessment to determine if a mentoring profile for a mentee is needed. | | Get Records: Get Provider Offering | Gets the provider offering record associated with the assessment to determine if a mentoring profile for a mentor is needed. | | Decision: Mentor or Mentee Mentoring Profile? | Determines whether the mentoring profile record to create is for a mentor or mentee. | | Assignment: Set Mentor Fields | Sets the fields on the mentoring profile record for a mentor. | | Assignment: Set Mentee Fields | Sets the fields on the mentoring profile record for a mentee. | | Get Records: Get Existing Mentoring Profile | Gets the existing mentoring records associated with the program enrollment and provider offering records. | | Decision: Create or Update Mentoring Profile | Determines if there are mentoring profile records associated with the program enrollment or provider offering records associated with the assessment record that launched the flow. | | Create Records: Create Mentoring Profile | Creates the mentoring profile records in the collection with field values assigned from the assessment question response records mapped fields. | | Assignment: Assign Mentoring Profile ID | Assigns the mentoring profile ID, if it exists, to prepare the record for update. | | Update Records: Update Mentoring Profile | Updates the mentoring profile records in the collection with field values assigned from the assessment question response records mapped fields. | - [Create Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.adding_fields.htm&type=5) - [Compare and Select Mentors by Using a Screen Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_compare_and_assign_mentors_using_a_screen_flow.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use a screen flow to compare a mentee with potential mentors, and then assign a mentor to the mentee. Use the fields on the Mentoring participants' mentoring profile record to identify a match.") - [Flow Builder](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.flow.htm&type=5) # Update the Schedule of an Annual Recurring Donation Learn how to update the schedule of an annual Recurring Donation when your donor asks to change their donation date. The workflow for changing the schedule of an annual Recurring Donation is slightly different than for monthly Recurring Donations. 1. Change the Effective Date to the date of the following year. 2. [Remove the extra installment by pausing it](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_pause_a_recurring_donation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to temporarily suspend donations, and restart them, when your donor wants to stop giving for a period of time."). NPSP removes the extra installment from the schedule, updates the open Opportunity to the new donation date, and updates the Next Donation Date field. Let's look at an example. It's the year 2020 and you have have a Recurring Donation that recurs every October 26th. After your donor makes their annual donation, they request that you change the recurring date to November 26th for the following year. To change the date of an annual Recurring Donation: 1. Locate the Recurring Donation you wish to update. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Change the Effective Date to Nov 26, 2021. 4. Click **Save**. Now look at the Upcoming Installments. Notice that there's two installments in 2021. ![Upcoming Installments component showing two installments in 2021.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/two-annual-installments.png) This happens because the new schedule doesn't take effect until Nov 2021, so there's still an Oct 2021 installment from the old schedule. Also notice that the Next Installment Date is 10/26/2021 and there are two schedules in the Active Schedules component. Your donor probably doesn't want to pay an annual installment in October and then again in November of the same year, so you need to remove the extra installment by pausing it. To pause the extra installment:When you pause the extra installment, NPSP does the following: 1. Locate the Recurring Donation you wish to update. 2. Click **Pause**. 3. Select the extra installment, in this case, the 10/26/2021 installment. 4. Select a **Paused Reason**. 5. Click **Save**. - Removes the extra installment from the schedule - Updates the Close Date on the open installment Opportunity to 11/26/2021 - Updates the Next Installment Date to 11/26/2021 # Upgrade or Downgrade a Recurring Gift Commitment in Education You can change the amount of a recurring gift commitment, the schedule, or what the gift is allocated for. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To upgrade or downgrade a recurring gift commitment:

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. At the top of the record, click **Upgrade | Downgrade**. 4. Select the gift commitment schedule you want to change. 5. Update the information as needed. 6. If you want the change to apply to the entire schedule, enter the start and end dates in the Effective From and Effective To fields. Existing unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the effective dates are removed. 7. Save your changes. # Upgrade or Downgrade a Recurring Gift Commitment in Nonprofit You can change the amount of a recurring gift commitment, the schedule, or what the gift is allocated for. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

User Permissions Needed  
To upgrade or downgrade a recurring gift commitment:

FundraisingAccess permission set
1. From the App Launcher (![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/resources-product/images/fundraising/icon_applauncher.png)), find and select **Gift Commitments**. 2. Select the gift commitment that you want to change. 3. At the top of the record, click **Upgrade | Downgrade**. 4. Select the gift commitment schedule you want to change. 5. Update the information as needed. 6. If you want the change to apply to the entire schedule, enter the start and end dates in the Effective From and Effective To fields. Existing unpaid gift transactions with due dates that fall within the effective dates are removed. 7. Save your changes. # Upgrade Outbound Funds Module If you were an early adopter of Outbound Funds Module and are using a version prior to 1.15, the Funding Request object has a master-detail relationship to the Funding Program object. This relationship was updated in version 1.15 (released July 2019) to be a lookup relationship that allows for greater flexibility and scalability. Salesforce.org introduced automatic push upgrades to Outbound Funds in version 1.17, so if you are using version 1.17 or higher, you don't need to take any action. - **[1\. Export Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Export your data, specifically from the Funding Program and Funding Request objects, before making modifications. - **[2\. Install the Temporary Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you’ve exported your data, install a temporary package of Outbound Funds Module. This package removes the master-detail field on the Funding Request and removes all related fields, such as rollups on the Funding Program and Reports. - **[3\. Delete Dependencies](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now that your data is exported and the temporary package is installed, there are several fields and Reports, along with any automation you have previously set up, that need to be deleted. Deleting data sounds scary, but we’ll walk you through each area that may be impacted. - **[4\. Install the Latest Package](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Now, you’re ready to install the latest upgrade package. - **[5\. Configure Your Org](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_upgrade.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Update the Funding Request object and then add the Funding Program and Owner fields to the Funding Program page layout. ## 1\. Export Your Data Export your data, specifically from the Funding Program and Funding Request objects, before making modifications. See [Export Data](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=exporting_data.htm&type=5). ## 2\. Install the Temporary Package After you’ve exported your data, install a temporary package of Outbound Funds Module. This package removes the master-detail field on the Funding Request and removes all related fields, such as rollups on the Funding Program and Reports. 1. Navigate to the [temporary package installer](https://login.salesforce.com/?ec=302&starturl=%2fpackaging%2finstallpackage.apexp%3fp0%3d04tf4000004pq3g). 2. Select **Install for Admins Only**. 3. Select the **I acknowledge** statement. 4. Click **Upgrade**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_important.png) Important This package doesn’t upgrade Outbound Funds Module to the latest version. ## 3\. Delete Dependencies Now that your data is exported and the temporary package is installed, there are several fields and Reports, along with any automation you have previously set up, that need to be deleted. Deleting data sounds scary, but we’ll walk you through each area that may be impacted. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_important.png) Important Make sure your data is exported and saved before deleting any data. If you perform a hard delete, you won’t be able to access it again. ### Funding Program Delete the master-detail fields from the Funding Program object that reference Funding Requests. Additionally, delete any custom roll-up fields from the Funding Request to the Funding Program. 1. From ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Funding Program**. 3. Click **Fields & Relationships**. 4. Delete the following fields by clicking ![Show more button](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png) then selecting **Delete**. 1. outfunds\_\_Available\_Amount\_\_c formula 2. outfunds\_\_Requested\_Total\_\_c 3. outfunds\_\_Pending\_Disbursement\_Total\_\_c 4. outfunds\_\_Disbursed\_Total\_\_c 5. outfunds\_\_Awarded\_Total\_\_c ![Delete the specified fields from the Funding Program object.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_upgrade1.png) 5. Click your profile image, then select **Switch to Salesforce Classic**. 6. Click **Setup**. 7. Search for then select **Funding Program**. 8. Click **Deleted Fields**. 9. Click **Erase**. 10. Select **Yes, I want to permanently delete the custom field**. 11. Click **Delete**. 12. Repeat this for all fields deleted in step 4. 13. Click **Switch to Lightning Experience**. ### Funding Program Lightning Page If you have created a Lightning Page to display Funding Requests as a related list on the Funding Program, remove it from your Funding Program Lightning Record Page layout. This is only required if you created a custom Funding Program Lightning Record Page. 1. From ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Funding Program**. 3. Click **Lightning Record Pages**. 4. Click your custom Lightning Record Page. 5. Click **Edit**. 6. Remove the Funding Request related list and any other Lightning components that reference Funding Requests. 7. Click **Save**. ### Workflows Delete or deactivate any automation, such as processes or flows, that link Funding Program and Funding Request. See [Delete a Process Version](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.process_delete.htm&type=5) or [Activate or Deactivate a Flow](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=platform.flow_distribute_activate.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help for more information. ### Reports Delete existing Reports that reference the Funding Request object, including custom-made reports. 1. From ![App Launcher](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/app_launcher_grey.png), find and select **Reports**. 2. Click **All Reports**. 3. Remove these reports by clicking (down arrow), then selecting **Delete**: 1. Funding Program Analytics 2. Awarded Requests by Year by Program 3. Awarded Requests Sorted by Program Codes 4. Delete any custom reports that reference the Funding Request. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/images/icon_note.png) Note If you need help finding custom reports, see [Find the Report Type used by a Report](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000327673&type=1&mode=1) in Salesforce Help. ### Funding Request Delete the Funding Program field from the Funding Request. 1. Click your profile image, then select **Switch to Salesforce Classic**. 2. Click **Setup**. 3. In the Quick Find Box, search for then select **Funding Request**. 4. Under Custom Fields & Relationships, click **Del** next to Funding Program (Funding\_Program\_\_c). 5. Select **Yes, I want to delete the relationship**. 6. Click **Delete**. ## 4\. Install the Latest Package Now, you’re ready to install the latest upgrade package. 1. Navigate to the [upgrade package installer](https://install.salesforce.org/products/outbound-funds). 2. Select **Install for All Users**. 3. Click **Upgrade**. ## 5\. Configure Your Org Update the Funding Request object and then add the Funding Program and Owner fields to the Funding Program page layout. ### Update Funding Request Update the FundingProgram\_\_c field on the Funding Request object with the original value before upgrading from the Funding\_Program\_\_c field on the Funding Request. This should be part of your exported data. ### Add Funding Request as a Related List Add Funding Requests as a Related List on Funding Programs. 1. From ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Funding Program**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Funding Program Layout**. 5. Drag and drop Funding Requests into Related Lists. 6. Click **Save**. 7. Click **Yes** to overwrite a user’s related list customizations. ### Update the Funding Program Page Layout Add the Funding Program and Owner fields to the Funding Program Page Layout. ![Add the Funding Program and Owner fields to the Funding Program Page Layout.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/outbound_funds_module/images/ofm_upgrade3.png) 1. From ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-outbound_funds_module-264-0-0-production-enus/2f847b24-f1f1-4ef3-9181-163efc8e0a07/resources-product/images/setup.png), click **Object Manager**. 2. Click **Funding Program**. 3. Click **Page Layouts**. 4. Click **Funding Program Layout**. 5. Drag and drop Funding Program then Owner into the Information section of the Funding Program Detail. 6. Click **Save**. # Upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack from a Previous Version of NPSP This guide is for users considering the upgrade from a previous version of NPSP to the latest version. [Upgrade to Nonprofit Success Pack from a Previous Version of NPSP](https://s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/sfdo-docs/npsp_upgrade_guide.pdf) (in PDF format) This guide provides information on the upgrade process, including prerequisites and how long the process will take. It walks you step-by-step through the upgrade process, from testing in your Sandbox org to installing in your Production org. It also provides detailed post upgrade steps and troubleshooting tips. ## Audience and Prerequisites To use this guide to successfully upgrade, you must be a System Administrator for your Salesforce organization with a reasonable amount of experience. You should be comfortable with basic admin tasks, such as creating fields and tabs, managing user profiles, and managing record types. You should also have fairly in-depth knowledge of your Salesforce organization setup. # Upload Data from the Template Learn how to upload data from a spreadsheet to the NPSP Data Importer. Now, let's use the Data Import Wizard to upload the template into the NPSP Data Import custom object. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the NPSP Data Imports tab see [Configure NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions."). 1. Click the App Launcher (![App launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. In the All Items section, click **NPSP Data Imports**. 3. Click **Import**. ![Import button on the NPSP Data Imports page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/npsp_data_imports_import.png) 4. In the "What kind of data are you importing?" section, make sure the Custom objects tab is selected, and then click **NPSP Data Imports**. 5. In the "What do you want to do?" section, select **Add new records**. - If you're importing your data for the first time, or know that you will be matching to existing data based only on Name, Email or Phone, then leave all the options in this section set to \--None-- (unless you are mapping one of the ID fields). Be sure to leave **Match by** as \--None-- regardless. ![Import data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/upload_wizard_1.png) - If your spreadsheet has Salesforce IDs for GAU Allocations or you'd like the NPSP Data Importer to match against existing Contact, Account, Donation or Payment records later in the process, select the appropriate value from the What do you want to do? section in the Import Wizard. Be sure to leave **Match by** set to \--None--. Note that you'll need to populate the corresponding Imported field (e.g. Contact1 Imported, Contact2 Imported, Account1 Imported, Account2 Imported, Household Account Imported) with the 15- or 18-character Salesforce ID in the template file you're importing. For example, we populated the Contact1 Imported field (in the template) with Contact1's Salesforce ID. So, under **Which Contact field in your file do you want to match against to set the Contact1 Imported Lookup field?**, we select Salesforce.com ID. ![Import Wizard match ID](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/import_match_id.png) 6. In the Where is your data located? section, either drag your completed template file to the drop zone or browse for the file to upload it. 7. Click **Next**. 8. Verify that the field mappings are correct and make any changes if necessary. Because you're using the template, the column headers should exactly match the field names or field labels in the NPSP Data Import object you're uploading to. If one of your fields is unexpectedly unmapped or isn't available for mapping, look for these common issues: - If you're matching by ID and the Imported field is unmapped, you likely selected the wrong field or value in the What do you want to do? section of the Data Import Wizard. - The Salesforce Data Import Wizard automatically maps your columns to fields when the column name matches the field name. If your column header doesn't match and the field is unmapped, you can manually map template fields to object fields right here in the wizard. - You must have Advanced Mapping enabled to map to some fields in NPSP. For more information, see [Configure NPSP Data Importer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Prepare your organization for importing data from spreadsheets by following these NPSP Data Importer set up instructions."). 9. Click **Next**. 10. Review the import summary. 11. Click **Start Import**. Your import starts and displays a confirmation message that lets you click through to the Bulk Data Load Jobs page, where you can monitor the status of the data upload. The first part of the import process is done! You're ready to [Verify Data Upload](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_upload.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Make sure the data from your template uploaded successfully to the NPSP Data Import custom object."). # Use Action Plans to Efficiently Track Tasks and Documents for Your Programs and Benefits Define a checklist of operational tasks and documentation requirements or approvals for your programs and benefits by using action plans. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Program Management is enabled. # Use AI Tools for Volunteer Management Set up, configure, and populate Volunteer Management by using headless operations with an AI agent. Work from the command line or another agent channel to manage volunteer programs without navigating the Salesforce UI. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Agentforce 1 Nonprofit editions with a Volunteer Management license.
AI agents can set up Volunteer Management, assign permissions, plan a program structure, and create records. The agent uses skills that encode domain knowledge about the Volunteer Management data model, configuration patterns, and best practices. It guides you through decisions, recommends the right level of complexity for your programs, and creates records after you confirm the plan.
Business Goal Workflow Summary Capabilities
Turn on Volunteer Management, plan a program structure, and create records without navigating the Salesforce UI. An admin or SI partner asks the agent to set up Volunteer Management. The agent enables the module, assigns permissions, interviews you about your programs, recommends a record structure, and creates records in the correct order. See Volunteer Management AI Tools Considerations.
- **[Volunteer Management AI Tools Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_ai_tools_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Admins and SI partners ask an agent to turn on Volunteer Management, assign permissions, plan a volunteer program structure, and create records. Work from the command line or another agent channel to go from a blank org to an operational volunteer program. - **[Set Up Volunteer Management with AI Tools](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_ai_tools_setup_task.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these steps to set up and configure Volunteer Management by using Claude Code or Agentforce Vibes. - **[Volunteer Management AI Skills Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_ai_tools_setup_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use these skills to set up and configure Volunteer Management by using an AI agent. # Use Data Loader to Extract and Load Data Download the required SDL files and then use Data Loader to extract and load your data into the target shadow objects. Ensure that: - [EDA Migration Shadow Objects](https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installpackage.apexp?p0=04t4u000000pjht) is installed in your target (Education Cloud) org - Data Loader is installed in your source and target orgs. See [Download and Install Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.dataloader.meta/dataloader/loader_install_mac.htm). 1. Download the SDL files from your target (Education Cloud) org: 1. Log in to your target (Education Cloud) org. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Static Resources, and then select **Static Resources**. 3. Select **EDA\_EDC\_Org2Org\_SDLs** from the list. 4. Click **View file**. A compressed (.zip) file is saved to your local machine. 5. Extract the SDL files from the compressed file. 2. Use Data Loader to export the data from your source org into a CSV (.csv) file. See [Using Data Loader](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.dataloader.meta/dataloader/configuring_the_data_loader.htm).
EDA Object API Name Shadow Object Name Shadow Object API Name SDL File Name
Account EDA Shadow Account_V1 EDA_Shadow_Account_V1__c EDA_Shadow_Account
Contact EDA Shadow Contact EDA_Shadow_Contact__c EDA_Shadow_Contact
User EDA Shadow User EDA_Shadow_User__c

UserMigration_LimitedFields

EDA_Shadow_User
Opportunity EDA Shadow Opportunity EDA_Shadow_Opportunity__c EDA_Shadow_Opportunity
Case EDA Shadow Case EDA_Shadow_Case__c EDA_Shadow_Case
Lead EDA Shadow Lead EDA_Shadow_Lead__c EDA Shadow Lead
UserRole EDA Shadow UserRole EDA_Shadow_UserRole__c EDA_Shadow_UserRole
RecordType EDA Shadow RecordType EDA_Shadow_RecordType__c EDA_Shadow_RecordType
BusinessHours EDA Shadow Business Hours EDA_Shadow_Business_Hours__c EDA_Shadow_BusinessHours
hed__Relationship__c EDA Shadow Relationship EDA_Shadow_hed_Relationship__c EDA Shadow Relationship
hed__Contact_Language__c EDA Shadow ContactLanguage EDA_Shadow_hed_Contact_Language__c EDA Shadow ContactLanguage
hed__Education_History__c EDA Shadow EducationHistory EDA_Shadow_hed_EducationHistory__c EDA_Shadow_EducationHistory
hed__Affiliation__c EDA Shadow NPSP Affiliation EDA_Shadow_hed_Affiliation__c EDA Shadow NPSP Affiliation
hed__Facility__c EDA Shadow Facility EDA_Shadow_hed_Facility__c EDA Shadow Facility
hed__Term__c EDA Shadow Term EDA_Shadow_hed_Term__c EDA Shadow Term
hed__Course__c EDA_Shadow_Course EDA_Shadow_hed_Course__c EDA Shadow Course
hed__Course_Offering__c EDA Shadow CourseOffering EDA_Shadow_hed_CourseOffering__c EDA Shadow hed CourseOffering
hed__Program_Plan__c EDA Shadow program plan EDA_Shadow_program_plan__c EDA Shadow ProgramPlan
hed__Course_Offering_Schedule__c EDA Shadow Course Offering Schedule EDA_Shadow_hed_Course_Offering_Schedule__c EDA_Shadow_CourseOfferingSchedule
hed__Plan_Requirement__c EDA Shadow Plan Requirement EDA_Shadow_Plan_Requirement__c EDA Shadow PlanRequirement
hed__Program_Enrollment__c EDA Shadow ProgramEnrollment EDA_Shadow_hed_Program_Enrollment__c EDA Shadow ProgramEnrollment
hed__Course_Enrollment__c EDA Shadow CourseConnection EDA_Shadow_hed_Course_Enrollment__c EDA Shadow CourseConnection
hed__Term_Grade__c EDA Shadow Term Grade EDA_Shadow_hed_Term_Grade__c EDA Shadow Term Grade
SSH_Shadow_sfal_Alert__c SSH_Shadow_Alert SSH_Shadow_sfal_Alert__c Shadow_Alert
sfal__SuccessPlanTemplate__c SSH_Shadow_SuccessPlanTemplate SSH_Shadow_sfal_SuccessPlanTemplate__c SSH Shadow SuccessPlanTemplate
sfal__SuccessPlan__c SSH Shadow SuccessPlan SSH_Shadow_sfal_SuccessPlan__c SSH Shadow SuccessPlan
hed__Application__c AC Shadow Application AC_Shadow_hed_Application__c AC Shadow Application
hed__Test__c AC Shadow Test AC_Shadow_hed_Test__c AC Shadow Test
hed__Test_Score__c AC Shadow TestScore AC_Shadow_hed_Test_Score__c AC Shadow TestScore
randa__Application_Review__c AC Shadow ApplicationReview AC_Shadow_randa_Application_Review__c AC Shadow ApplicationReview
sfal__Topic__c SSH Shadow Topic SSH_Shadow_sfal_Topic__c SSH Shadow Topic
sfal__Appointment__c SSH Shadow Appointment SSH_Shadow_sfal_Appointment__c SSH Shadow Appointment
sfal__AppointmentAttendee__c SSH Shadow Appointment Attendee SSH_Shadow_sfal_AppointmentAttendee__c SSH Shadow Appointment Attendee
sfal__RoleTopicSetting__c SSH Shadow Role Topic Setting SSH_Shadow_sfal_RoleTopicSetting__c SSH Shadow RoleTopicSetting
sfal__AppointmentLocation__c SSH_Shadow_Appointment Location SSH_Shadow_sfal_AppointmentLocation__c SSH Shadow AppointmentLocation
Shadow_Event__c Shadow Event Shadow_Event__c Shadow_Event__c
Shadow_Task__c Shadow Task Shadow_Task__c Shadow_Task__c
3. Use Data Loader to import the data in the CSV file into your target (Education Cloud) org. SEE ALSO: - [Data Loader](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.data_loader.htm&type=5) # Use Dynamic Assessments with Accounts, Contacts, and Cases Do more with dynamic assessments by creating them for accounts, contacts, and cases. For example, create an assessment for an individual or a group of individuals to determine whether they're eligible for a benefit or service. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions. # Use Dynamic Assessments with Programs Do more with dynamic assessments by creating them for programs. For example, create a questionnaire to evaluate program-level feedback and identify a trend based on the scores. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Program and Case Management is enabled. SEE ALSO: [Salesforce Help: Set Up Dynamic Assessments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npc_cm_set_up_dynamic_assessments.htm) # Use Education Cloud for Advancement and Alumni Relations Education Cloud for Advancement and Alumni Relations enables alumni relations team members to keep track of alumni to help them stay engaged and invested in their alma mater. Gain insights from analytics dashboards, and monitor achievements, milestones, interests, and more to ensure that the engagement is meaningful to your institution and alumni. When an alumni relations coordinator or manager opens the app, they arrive on a home page with features curated for their role and license type. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can access the Alumni Relations app. **How**: Enable the Alumni Relations app in Setup. Then, from App Launcher, find and select **Alumni**. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Set Up Alumni Relations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_alumni_relations.htm) # Use Flows to Manage Applications Create flows to assist in application reviews and manage records.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
| User Permissions Needed |   | | --- | --- | | To create flows in Education Cloud: | Education Cloud Full Access | - **[Automate the Application Review Process](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_automate_the_application_review_process.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use flows to automatically move an individual application through the review process. - **[Create a Flow to Delete Person Examination Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_create_a_flow_to_delete_person_examination_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Automatically delete child records when you delete a parent Person Examination record. - **[Set the Default Verification Status on Person Education Object](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_the_default_verification_status_on_person_education_object.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a flow to set a default value on the Person Education object's Verification Status field when anyone creates a Person Education record without a value in that field. # Use Fundraising with Education Cloud Use Fundraising with Education Cloud to track opportunities, manage campaigns, and coordinate other fundraising activities. Fundraising is now included with Education Cloud to help streamline those processes. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can access Fundraising. **How**: Enable Fundraising for your Education Cloud org, and then create and assign a permission set for the users that you want to have access to Fundraising. ## See Also [_Salesforce Help:_ Manage Fundraising with Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_use_fundraising_with_education_cloud.htm) # Use Grants Management Use Grants Management to manage all your grants activities, from funding requests to budgets and reviews and more. Grantseekers can also complete the due diligence process. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Manage Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Manage funding programs so that grantseekers can apply for funds. - **[Manage Funding Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_funding_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up funding requests to track applications, associated constituents, and requirements and create disbursements. - **[Create a Budget and a Budget Allocation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_create_budget_budget_allo.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use budgets and budget allocations to track planned and awarded funds for a particular time period. - **[Complete Due Diligence for Grantseekers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_complete_due_diligence_for_grantseekers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grantseekers can complete the due diligence process by using Action Plans, Verification Checks, and Tax Status Search. - **[Manage Account Update Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_manage_acct_update_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Respond to grantseekers' requests to update their organizations’ information. - **[Manage Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Evaluate grantseekers' requests, submit your review, and provide feedback. # Use Guided Setup to Set Up Education Cloud Set up Education Cloud quickly and easily with guided setup. Use guided setup to turn on features, install apps, and configure basic settings. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can access guided setup. **How**: From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Set Up Education Cloud, and then select **Set Up Education Cloud**. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Set Up Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_education_cloud.htm) # Use Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education for Alumni Relations Efficiently communicate with alumni by using out-of-the-box templates to support your alumni activities. Schedule automated emails to tell alumni about your institution's mission and to welcome them to the alumni portal. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can access Marketing Cloud Engagement. **How**: Create a synchronized data source for Education Cloud, create automations to populate Education Cloud data extensions, and then schedule email campaigns. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Marketing Cloud Engagement for Education](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.mc_engagement_education.htm) # Use Omnistudio with Education Cloud Get prepared to use Omnistudio with Education Cloud.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed  
To use Omnistudio with Education Cloud:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

OmniStudio Admin

AND

OmniStudio User
## Omnistudio Prerequisites for Education Cloud Get ready to use Omnistudio in Education Cloud. Before you customize the application form, make sure that you complete the prerequisites. 1. [Learn about and turn on Omnistudio Standard Designer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_designers_common.htm&language=en_US). 2. [Assign the Omnistudio Admin permission set licenses to yourself](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_permission_sets_licenses.htm&language=en_US). We also recommend that you use these resources to learn the basics of Omnistudio, Omniscripts, Omnistudio Data Mappers, and Integration Procedures. - [Trailhead: OmniStudio Basics](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/content/learn/modules/omnistudio-basics) - [Omnistudio Documentation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sf.os_omnistudio.htm&language=en_US) - [Omnistudio Data Mappers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_dataraptors_45587.htm&language=en_US) - [Omnistudio Integration Procedures](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.os_omnistudio_integration_procedures_48334.htm&language=en_US) To test Omnistudio in an existing sandbox, either refresh the sandbox to add Omnistudio licenses to the sandbox, or [match production and sandbox licenses without a sandbox refresh](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=000386961&language=en_US). ## Omnistudio Components for Education Cloud Access the descriptions, relationships, and use cases for the Omnistudio components that are used in Education Cloud. For descriptions and use cases of the Omniscripts, Flexcards, Data Mappers, and Integration Procedures, see this Quip document (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). For more information, see [Education Cloud Omnistudio Components](https://salesforce.quip.com/qZPFA9rm3Jyz). ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_important.png) Important Clone the Education Cloud Omnistudio components that you want to use, even if you don't intend to customize them. ## Omnistudio and Translations Some labels aren't translated due to technical limitations. See [Omnistudio](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.os_omnistudio.htm). ## Troubleshoot Omniscript Errors If you get an error message that says that an Omniscript is not working, deactivate and then reactivate the Omniscript. 1. In the App Launcher, find and select **Omniscripts**. 2. In the Omniscripts list, select the Omniscript that was mentioned in the error message. 3. Click **Deactivate Version**. 4. After the Omniscript is deactivated, click **Done**. 5. Click **Activate Version**. 6. After the Omniscript is activated, click **Done**. # Use Outbound Funds Module Set up funding programs and funding requests to manage the fundseekers’ applications. Share those records with your team and provide feedback. If needed, create disbursements for your expenditures. Learn about localization and translation for Outbound Funds Module. - **[Manage Funding Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create funding programs from the App Launcher in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Manage Funding Requests](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_funding_requests.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up funding requests to track applications, associated constituents, requirements, and create disbursements in Outbound Funds Module. - **[Create and Share Reviews](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_create_share_reviews.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and share Funding Request reviews with your team. - **[Complete a Review](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_complete_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Provide feedback on a fundseeker's application. - **[Manage Expenditures](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_manage_expenditures.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Manage Expenditures feature allows you to link a Disbursement record to an existing General Accounting Unit using the GAU Expenditures object to track which account the disbursed funds come from. This is only available if you are an existing NPSP user and installed the NPSP Extension of Outbound Funds Module. - **[Outbound Funds Module and Translation](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ofm_and_translation.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how Outbound Funds Module is localized and how to manage translations. # Use Outbound Funds Module Outbound Funds Module is a flexible and scalable solution designed to meet every nonprofit organization's unique needs to manage outgoing funds. Here are some example use cases: - Competitive grants - Non-competitive grants - Individual grants - Challenge or matching grants - Scholarships - Designated funds - Donor-advised funds - Internal programmatic requests Don’t let this list stop you from exploring other uses. The possibilities are endless. For an in depth overview of Outbound Funds Module, see [Outbound Funds Walkthrough](https://youtu.be/gcLrYoDPTxE). # Use Permission Sets Review the available permission sets in Grants Management and create permission sets for due diligence and budget management. - **[Grants Management Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assign users to the Grants Management permission sets to quickly provide access. - **[Create a Due Diligence Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Configure object and field-level permissions for a due diligence permission set. - **[Create a Budget Management Permission Set](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_use_permissionsets.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up a budget management permission set and update it to match your nonprofit organization’s needs. ## Grants Management Permission Sets Assign users to the Grants Management permission sets to quickly provide access. Grants Management has several permission sets that give access to features important to the grantmaking process. You can't change managed permission sets. If you need to give grantmakers additional access, we recommend creating a new permission set for those same users and adding the permissions the users need. Then, add the managed permission set and your custom permission set to a permission set group to assign to your users. Learn more about [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm&type=5) in the Salesforce Help. For more information about what's in these permission sets, see [Grants Management Permissions Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.gm_permissions_reference.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find details about the Grants Management permission sets including object, field, Apex class, and Visualforce page access.").
Permission Set Description Assign To
ActionPlans Gives access to use Action Plans. Salesforce admins and grantmakers who create Action Plans.
Document Checklist Gives access to use Document Checklist Items. Salesforce admins and grantmakers who create Document Checklist Items on Action Plans.
Grants Management Base Access Gives basic access to Apex classes that are required to use Grants Management. Internal users who use Grants Management.
Grants Management: Review Workspace - Configure Workspace Lets users to Read, Create, and Edit Reviews and the Review Workspace. Salesforce admins and grantmakers who create Reviews and configure Review Workspaces.
Grants Management: Review Workspace - Evaluate Funding Request Lets users to Read and Edit Reviews. Salesforce admins and grantmakers who review Funding Requests.
Invitation Wizard

Gives access to use the Invitation Wizard functionality, which lets grantmakers invite grantseekers to apply for funding.

Note
Note

If a user other than a Salesforce admin uses the Invitation Wizard, these additional permissions are required:

  • Object and field-level access to Contact, Funding Request, and User objects.

  • Organization-wide default internal sharing for the User object set to at least Public Read Only.

  • Transfer Record system permission.

  • Manage Users system permission.

 Internal users, including grantmakers, who invite external users to apply for funding.
Manage Grants Gives access to Grants Management and is required to use Grants Management. Internal users who use Grants Management.
Verification - Manage Gives access to use Verification Checks on Document Checklist Items in an Action Plan. Salesforce admins and grantmakers who create Verification Checks.
1. Click ![Setup icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), then click **Setup**. 2. Enter Permission in the Quick Find Box, then select **Permission Sets**. 3. Click the permission set that you want to assign. 4. Click **Manage Assignments**. 5. Click **Add Assignments**. 6. Select the users to assign to this permission set. These should be users that are performing internal tasks in Grants Management. 7. Click **Assign**. 8. Click **Done**. ## Create a Due Diligence Permission Set Configure object and field-level permissions for a due diligence permission set. 1. From ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), search for and then select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a Label. For example, Due Diligence. 4. Press tab to autofill the API Name. 5. Leave None as License. 6. Click **Save**. ### Configure Object and Field-Level Permissions 1. Click **Object Settings**. 2. Click the object you want to configure. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. Specify the minimum Object Permissions and Field Permissions shown in the tables. 5. Save your changes. 6. Navigate back to Permission Set Overview. ### Action Plan Permissions Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete |   | Field Permissions | Field Label | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Status | ActionPlanState | √ | √ | ### Action Plan Template Permissions Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete |   | ### Document Checklist Item Permissions Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Create | √ | | Edit | √ | | Delete |   | Field Permissions | Field Label | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Accepted | IsAccepted | √ | √ | | Frozen | IsFrozen | √ | √ | | Instructions | Instructions | √ | √ | | Required | IsRequired | √ | √ | | Uploaded By | UploadedById | √ | √ | ### Verification Check Permissions Object Permissions | Permission Name | Enabled | | --- | --- | | Read | √ | | Edit | √ | | Create | √ | | Delete |   | Field Permissions | Field Label | Field Name | Read Access | Edit Access | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Comments | Comments\_\_c | √ | √ | | Date Verified | DateVerified\_\_c | √ | √ | | Document Checklist Item | DocumentChecklistItem\_\_c | √ | √ | | Status | Status\_\_c | √ | √ | ## Create a Budget Management Permission Set Set up a budget management permission set and update it to match your nonprofit organization’s needs. 1. From ![Setup gear icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-grants_management-264-0-0-production-enus/d4e7b98d-b7c0-4567-9e74-1c2abf270665/resources-product/images/setup.png), search for and select **Permission Sets**. 2. Click **Clone** next to Budget Management. 3. Enter a Label. For example, Budget Management for Grants. 4. Update the API Name. 5. Save the cloned permission set. 6. Click your cloned permission set. 7. Click **Object Settings** to configure object visibility and field-level permissions for the Budget Allocations object: 1. Click Budget Allocations. 2. Click **Edit**. 3. Select **Available** and **Visible** for Tab Settings. 4. Give **Read** or **Edit** access to fields. 5. Save your changes. 8. Configure visibility and permissions for the Budgets object. 9. Return to the Permission Set Overview. 10. Assign the permission set to users. # Use Program Management Module with Student Success Hub Complement one-on-one student support with managed intervention, tutoring, and other types of group programs in Student Success Hub. - **[Understand How Program Management Module Enhances Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Student Success Hub provides many ways for educators and staff to support students. Success Plans, Tasks, and Alerts, for example, allow you to provide individualized support that gives each student the personalized attention they need to succeed in school. - **[Example Programs and Services for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Program Management Module (PMM) uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects as well several of its own custom objects. Understand the objects and terminology that the package uses so that you can put PMM to work effectively in an educational setting. - **[A Note About "Programs"](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** As a Student Success Hub administrator, you probably got a little nervous when you read that PMM uses a custom object called Programs and another called Program Engagements. - **[Install PMM for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The free, open-source PMM managed package includes essential metadata and code, such as objects, fields, page layouts, list views, and reports. It also includes an unmanaged Program Management Standard User profile that you can assign to support staff who need access to PMM page layouts and data. - **[Configure PMM Security for Your Support Staff](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Grant your support staff access to PMM using the unpackaged user profile and permission sets that PMM installs. - **[Configure PMM Picklists for Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Before you create any Programs or Services, be sure to configure these picklists on the required objects. - **[Add Programs and Services to Student Record Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_pmm_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** By default, PMM shows Program Engagements and Service Deliveries information in related lists on the Contact record, which you can see in both the Student Success Hub and PMM apps ## Understand How Program Management Module Enhances Student Success Hub Student Success Hub provides many ways for educators and staff to support students. Success Plans, Tasks, and Alerts, for example, allow you to provide individualized support that gives each student the personalized attention they need to succeed in school. To help you manage programs for groups of students—for example, after-school enrichment activities, tutoring support programs, intervention programs, meal delivery, and winter coat distribution—add Salesforce.org Program Management Module to your Student Success Hub org. Program Management Module (PMM) provides a simple but powerfully flexible data model for managing and delivering programs and services to many constituents. Although it's typically used with Salesforce.org Nonprofit Success Pack, PMM can also be used to deliver programs and services in education. By installing the PMM package into your Student Success Hub org, you can: - Create programs for group interventions and services you want to offer at your school, district, college, or university. - Track the students who enroll or participate in the programs and services. - See lists of participants or recipients grouped by criteria, such as students who get reading assistance, grouped by grade level. - View reports to see trends in program utilization and performance. ## Example Programs and Services for Student Success Hub Program Management Module (PMM) uses the standard Salesforce Account and Contact objects as well several of its own custom objects. Understand the objects and terminology that the package uses so that you can put PMM to work effectively in an educational setting. Programs are thematic areas that reflect an organization's mission. Services are the activities that make up a program. Related objects for Programs and Services include Program Engagement, Program Cohort, Service Delivery, Service Schedule, Service Participant, and Service Session. For definitions of these objects, see [Manage Your Programs with Program Management Module (PMM)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_overview.htm). To understand their relationships, see [PMM Entity Relationship Diagram](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_erd.htm). Here are some examples of how to use the objects together to create programs and services in K-12 schools. ### Example: Trauma Counseling Your high school offers small-group trauma counseling for students who receive referrals from a therapist. - Program: Trauma Counseling - Program Cohort: Students who have a referral from a therapist during the 2021-2022 school year - Program Engagement: Ninth-grader Mimi, whose father died recently, is enrolled in the program - Service: Weekly Trauma Counseling, measured by hours attended - Service Schedule: Tuesdays from 4 PM to 5 PM - Service Participant: Mimi is signed up - Service Session: Tuesday, April 6, is one session of weekly trauma counseling - Service Delivery: Mimi attended one hour of trauma counseling on April 6 ### Example: Summer Meal Delivery Your district provides free meals to students during the summer. Once a week, volunteers pick up meals from a distribution center and deliver them to students who are signed up. - Program: Summer Meal Program - Program Cohort: The program is open to students in the district who are 18 and younger for summer 2021 - Program Engagement: Ezmae and her twin brother Izaak, third-graders in your school, are both enrolled in the program - Service: Weekly Meal Delivery - Service Schedule: A week's worth of meals is delivered every Thursday - Service Participant: Ezmae and Izaak each receive a week's worth of meals every Thursday - Service Session: Thursday, August 11, is one session of weekly meal delivery - Service Delivery: Esmae and Izaac each received a week's worth of meals, including breakfast, lunch, dinner, snacks, and fresh fruits and vegetables, on August 11 ### Example: After-School Test Prep Your district offers after-school study prep for juniors and seniors who plan to take the SAT or ACT standardized test. Test prep is open to students in multiple high schools, and is offered in multiple sessions during the school year. Your district offers separate study prep for each test. - Program: Standardized Test Preparation - Program Cohort: Students are grouped by grade level and by the high school that they attend - Program Engagement: Elijah is enrolled in the program - Service: This program has two Services: SAT Prep and ACT Prep. The Unit of Measurement used to track both Services is hours. - Service Schedule: SAT Prep is offered on Tuesdays and Thursdays from 3 PM to 5 PM during spring semester. ACT Prep is offered at the same time on Mondays and Wednesdays. - Service Participant: Elijah is a participant in the ACT Test Prep Service - Service Session: Monday, March 15, is one session of the ACT Test Prep Service - Service Delivery: Elijah attended two hours of ACT Test Prep on March 15 ## A Note About "Programs" As a Student Success Hub administrator, you probably got a little nervous when you read that PMM uses a custom object called Programs and another called Program Engagements. As you know, K-12 Architecture Kit and EDA include the Program Plan and Program Enrollment custom objects. They also include an Account record type called Academic Program. Understanding what "program" means in each of these contexts can help you keep them straight. In PMM, Programs comprise services (activities) that have the same theme and that benefit a constituency. Program Engagements represent the people (or things) that benefit from the Program.  A PMM Program may be educational or academic in nature—for example, after-school tutoring or test prep—but it doesn't have to be. And when a PMM Program pertains to a student's academic success, it doesn't represent a school's core academic offerings. In K-12 Architecture Kit and EDA, the Account record type Academic Program, the Program Plan object, and the Plan Requirement object collectively model a school's academic offerings. Use them to track how your school's learning offerings are structured and administered, and what they require for enrollment and completion. If desired, you can use "programs" liberally in K-12 Architecture Kit or EDA to also model programs such as after-school tutoring or summer meal delivery. Using PMM, however, provides the benefit of a holistic set of objects, fields, and reporting capabilities that are dedicated to program management. As a result, PMM gives you much more control, and flexibility, in creating and managing programs that extend beyond the scope of core academic offerings. ## Install PMM for Student Success Hub The free, open-source PMM managed package includes essential metadata and code, such as objects, fields, page layouts, list views, and reports. It also includes an unmanaged Program Management Standard User profile that you can assign to support staff who need access to PMM page layouts and data. When you install PMM, be sure to: - Install, configure, and test PMM in your Student Success Hub Sandbox environment before installing it into your Production org. - Log out of all Salesforce orgs except the Student Success Hub org to which you want to add PMM. Consider using an incognito window to ensure you install in the correct org. See [Install Program Management Module](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_install.htm) in the PMM documentation for complete instructions on installing PMM into an existing Salesforce org. When the installation completes, click ![App Launcher icon, which is a grid of dots](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_app_launcher_icon.png), then search for and select **Program Management**. ![The Program Management Module Home page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pmm_app.png) ## Configure PMM Security for Your Support Staff Grant your support staff access to PMM using the unpackaged user profile and permission sets that PMM installs. See [Grant Access to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_postinstall.htm) in PMM documentation. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note If you install PMM into a Salesforce org that already has Student Success Hub installed and configured with student data, you don't have to import student Contact data into PMM. You can ignore the Import Your Data topic in the PMM required post-installation tasks article. Then, [Create Sharing Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_create_shar_rules.htm) as necessary for your org and [Grant Users Access to Reports and Dashboards](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_folder_sharing_reports_dash.htm). ## Configure PMM Picklists for Student Success Hub Before you create any Programs or Services, be sure to configure these picklists on the required objects.
Object Field Suggested Values

Program

Program Issue Area

Advocacy, Counseling, Education, Employment, Food and Nutrition, Housing, Legal
 

Status

Active, Planned, Completed, Canceled

Program Cohort

Status

Active, Planned, Completed, Canceled

Program Engagement

Role

Client, Volunteer, Service Provider

Stage

Applied, Application Denied, Waitlisted, Enrolled, Active, Completed, Withdrawn

Service

Status

Active, Planned, Completed, Canceled
For instructions, see [Customize Picklist Values](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.pmm_customize_picklist_values.htm) in the PMM documentation. ## Add Programs and Services to Student Record Cases By default, PMM shows Program Engagements and Service Deliveries information in related lists on the Contact record, which you can see in both the Student Success Hub and PMM apps To make it even easier for support staff to see a student's participation in PMM Programs and Services, add the Programs and Services related lists to your student record Lightning Case page. 1. From Setup, in Object Manager, click **Case**. 2. Click Lightning Record Pages, then click the name of the page you're using, such as **Student Record**. 3. Click **Edit**. 4. In the Lightning page canvas, select the Tabs component. 5. In the properties pane, click **Add Tab**. Lightning App Builder adds a default Details tab to the component. Let's change it to Programs. 6. In the properties pane, click the **Details** tab label, select **Programs**, and then click **Done**. Now add the Program Engagements related list to the Programs tab. 7. In the Tabs component, select **Programs**. (It may be nested under **More**.) 8. From the Components panel, drag **Related List - Single** to the placeholder area of the Programs tab. 9. In the properties pane for the Related List - Single component: 1. For Parent Record, select **Contact Name**. 2. For Related List, select **Program Engagements**. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 to add Services. 1. In the Tabs properties pane, change the Details tab to **Services**. 2. In the Related List - Single component properties pane, for Parent Record, select **Contact Name**. For Related List, select **Services**. 11. If desired, click in the Tabs component again and, in the properties pane, drag the tabs into the order you want them to appear, from left to right. 12. Save your changes and exit the Lightning App Builder. ![The Services tab on a student record Case page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pmm_case_services_tab.png) With Programs and Services on your student record Lightning Case page, support staff have a unified, 360-degree view of the support services a student is receiving. # Use Student Insights From Non-Default Data Space By default, Student Insights uses data from the default data space. If you have data in a custom data space, you must map the data space in Data 360 to the features in Education Cloud.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To use Student Insights from non-default data space:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data 360 Admin

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
1. Get your Education Cloud org ready to use Data 360 by [setting up Data 360](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&language=en_US). 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, find and select **Set Up Education Cloud**. 3. Under Set Up the Basics, click **Set Up Data Space Mapping**. 4. Click **New**. 5. Select your data space and for the feature select **Student Success**. 6. Save your changes. # Use the Academic Operations App to Manage Learning and Academic Operations Use the Learning Wizard in Academic Operations to create courses, programs, and customized learning offerings, define learning requirements and outcomes, and manage academic schedules. Use the Learning Program Builder to represent and organize the components of a well-defined learning plan, including required and elective courses, so that your staff can set up learners for timely degree completion. See a summary of the learner's academic details on the updated account record page. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can access the Education Cloud Academic Operations app. **How**: Enable the Academic Operations app in Setup. Then, from App Launcher, find and select **Academic Operations**. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Manage Academic Operations in Your Institution](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_manage_academic_operations.htm) # Use the Donor Meeting Notes Subagent After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create a record of their donor meetings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To use the Donor Engagement Agent:

Fundraising_User permission set group

AND

Agentforce For Fundraising Access permission set

AND

Prompt Template User
With the Donor Meeting Notes subagent, gift officers use an agent to capture, edit, and save notes from donor meetings as Interaction Summaries in Salesforce. The Donor Meeting Notes subagent contains the Prepare Donor Meeting Notes action. Here are some examples of requests that a gift officer can use with the agent. | Request Example | Result | | --- | --- | | I just met with \[donor name\] and discussed \[purpose of the meeting\]. \[highlights of the meeting\] | The agent confirms the correct donor account and then turns the provided raw notes, the donor account, and the current date into a structured interaction summary for the user’s review. | | Save | Creates an interaction record with meeting date and type. Then creates an interaction summary that’s linked to the interaction record and to the donor’s account. | # Use the Donor Meeting Notes Subagent After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create a record of their donor meetings. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To use the Donor Engagement Agent:

Fundraising_User permission set group

AND

Agentforce For Fundraising Access permission set

AND

Prompt Template User
With the Donor Meeting Notes subagent, gift officers use an agent to capture, edit, and save notes from donor meetings as Interaction Summaries in Salesforce. The Donor Meeting Notes subagent contains the Prepare Donor Meeting Notes action. Here are some examples of requests that a gift officer can use with the agent. | Request Example | Result | | --- | --- | | I just met with \[donor name\] and discussed \[purpose of the meeting\]. \[highlights of the meeting\] | The agent confirms the correct donor account and then turns the provided raw notes, the donor account, and the current date into a structured interaction summary for the user’s review. | | Save | Creates an interaction record with meeting date and type. Then creates an interaction summary that’s linked to the interaction record and to the donor’s account. | # Use the Donor Profile Efficiently and thoroughly evaluate donors' suitability for major gifts requests.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To use Interest Tags with Fundraising:

OR

Modified Education Cloud Full Access permission set
The Donor Profile simplifies the process of identifying, qualifying, and managing information on prospective donors. When you're researching prospects, the Donor Profile shows you the information you need to gauge a person or partner's likelihood of making a major gift. Use the Donor Profile to: - Determine if a donor qualifies for a specific request and their willingness to give by evaluating a prospect's giving history. - Tailor discussions and outreach engagements to donors by familiarizing yourself with a donor's background. - Understand a donor's giving philosophy and habits by reviewing their giving history. - Track and celebrate a donor's milestones—such as birthdays, graduations, and anniversaries—Use them to personalize communications and build a stronger relationship with the donor. - Receive alerts on donor communications and activities that enable you to start relevant and timely interactions that further builds your relationship. - Create interaction summaries that record your communications and engagements with the donor. - Upload pertinent notes and files on the Notes and Files tab. - Quickly familiarize yourself with the donor's interests by viewing their Interest Tags. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising.") - [Interaction Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_interaction_summaries.htm&type=5) - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5) - [Events and Milestones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_life_events_business_milestones_overview.htm&type=5) - [Record Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts.htm&type=5) # Use the Donor Profile Efficiently and thoroughly evaluate donors' suitability for major gifts requests.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To use Interest Tags with Fundraising:

Fundraising_Admin permission set group

OR

Fundraising_User permission set group
The Donor Profile simplifies the process of identifying, qualifying, and managing information on prospective donors. When you're researching prospects, the Donor Profile shows you the information you need to gauge a person or partner's likelihood of making a major gift. Use the Donor Profile to: - Determine if a donor qualifies for a specific request and their willingness to give by evaluating a prospect's giving history. - Tailor discussions and outreach engagements to donors by familiarizing yourself with a donor's background. - Understand a donor's giving philosophy and habits by reviewing their giving history. - Track and celebrate a donor's milestones—such as birthdays, graduations, and anniversaries—Use them to personalize communications and build a stronger relationship with the donor. - Receive alerts on donor communications and activities that enable you to start relevant and timely interactions that further builds your relationship. - Create interaction summaries that record your communications and engagements with the donor. - Upload pertinent notes and files on the Notes and Files tab. - Quickly familiarize yourself with the donor's interests by viewing their Interest Tags. SEE ALSO: - [Set Up Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.fundraising_set_up_fundraising.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Enable Fundraising, configure user profiles, users, and permissions, and set up key features and automation so users can get started using Fundraising.") - [Interaction Summaries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_interaction_summaries.htm&type=5) - [Interest Tags](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_interest_tags.htm&type=5) - [Events and Milestones](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.fsc_admin_life_events_business_milestones_overview.htm&type=5) - [Record Alerts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=ind.record_alerts.htm&type=5) # Use the Donor Task Management Subagent After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To use the Donor Engagement Agent:

Fundraising_User permission set group

AND

Agentforce For Fundraising Access permission set
With the Donor Task Management subagent, gift officers can use an agent to create follow-up tasks and reminders in Salesforce. To create tasks or reminders, the Donor Task Management subagent contains the Create a To-Do action. To update an existing task, the subagent uses the Extract Fields and Values From User Input action and the Update Record action. Here are some examples of requests that a gift officer can use with the agent. | Request Example | Result | | --- | --- | | Create tasks from the next steps and have them due on Monday | The agent creates the tasks that are related to the interaction that was previously discussed and that note the requested due date. | | Create a new task to \[task details\] related to \[donor\] | The agent creates the task as described by the user and that is related to the donor mentioned in the request. | # Use the Donor Task Management Subagent After you set up the Donor Engagement Agent, gift officers can use the agent to create tasks and reminders to follow up with donors. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To use the Donor Engagement Agent:

Fundraising_User permission set group

AND

Agentforce For Fundraising Access permission set
With the Donor Task Management subagent, gift officers can use an agent to create follow-up tasks and reminders in Salesforce. To create tasks or reminders, the Donor Task Management subagent contains the Create a To-Do action. To update an existing task, the subagent uses the Extract Fields and Values From User Input action and the Update Record action. Here are some examples of requests that a gift officer can use with the agent. | Request Example | Result | | --- | --- | | Create tasks from the next steps and have them due on Monday | The agent creates the tasks that are related to the interaction that was previously discussed and that note the requested due date. | | Create a new task to \[task details\] related to \[donor\] | The agent creates the task as described by the user and that is related to the donor mentioned in the request. | # Use the Field-Level Security Setting to Restrict Your Users' Access Restrict your users’ access to view and edit specific fields by using field-level security on the Program, Program Enrollment, Benefit Assignment, and Benefit Disbursement objects. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise and Unlimited editions where Program Management is enabled. # Use the Guided Flow for Migration to Education Cloud Use the guided flow to ensure that you complete the migration steps in the right sequence. 1. Log in to your org. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Visualforce. 3. Under Custom Code, select **Visualforce Pages**. 4. Select **EDA\_EDC\_OrgtoOrg\_MigrationGuidedSetup\_VF** from the list. 5. To open the guided flow, click **Preview**. 6. Follow the steps in the guided flow to migrate your data to Education Cloud. # Use the Guided Flow for Migration to Education Cloud Use the guided flow to ensure that you complete the migration steps in the right sequence. 1. Log in to your org. 2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Visualforce. 3. Under Custom Code, select **Visualforce Pages**. 4. Select **EDA\_EDC\_MIGRATION\_GUIDED\_SETUP\_VF** from the list. 5. To open the guided flow, click **Preview**. 6. Follow the steps in the guided flow to migrate your data to Education Cloud. # Use the Manage Gift Commitments Subagent in Education After you set up the Donor Support agent, donors can access the agent from your Experience Cloud site donor portal. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud

FundraisingExperienceCloud

AND

Manage Donations with Agentforce in Experience Cloud
With the Manage Gift Commitments subagent, a donor can use the agent to accomplish these tasks. - Pause a recurring gift commitment - Resume a paused recurring gift commitment - Permanently close a recurring gift commitment - Change the amount of a recurring gift commitment Here are some examples of requests that a donor can use with the agent. | Request Example | Result | | --- | --- | | Can I see my donations? | The agent returns the name, status, and schedule type of the active recurring gift commitment for the user’s account and asks if the user would like to proceed with managing the commitment and if yes, what action they’d like to take. | | Pause | The agent asks for the start date for the pause, and if applicable, the end date. | | Start pause today and pause for 3 months | The agent returns confirmation that the recurring donation is paused starting today and resumes at the end of three months. The agent asks the user to confirm this result is correct. | | Cancel my recurring donation | The agent returns the name, status, and schedule type of the active recurring gift commitment for the user’s account and asks if the user would like to proceed with canceling this commitment. | | Change the amount of my monthly donation | The agent returns the name, status, and schedule type of the active recurring gift commitment for the user’s account and asks if the user would like to proceed with changing the amount of this monthly commitment. | SEE ALSO: - [Test Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_test.htm&language=en_US) # Use the Manage Gift Commitments Subagent in Nonprofit After you set up the Donor Support agent, donors can access the agent from your Experience Cloud site donor portal. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Fundraising is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To set up and use an AI agent for Nonprofit Cloud:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents
To use the Donor Support Agent in Experience Cloud

FundraisingExperienceCloud

AND

Manage Donations with Agentforce in Experience Cloud
With the Manage Gift Commitments subagent, a donor can use the agent to accomplish these tasks. - Pause a recurring gift commitment - Resume a paused recurring gift commitment - Permanently close a recurring gift commitment - Change the amount of a recurring gift commitment Here are some examples of requests that a donor can use with the agent. | Request Example | Result | | --- | --- | | Can I see my donations? | The agent returns the name, status, and schedule type of the active recurring gift commitment for the user’s account and asks if the user would like to proceed with managing the commitment and if yes, what action they’d like to take. | | Pause | The agent asks for the start date for the pause, and if applicable, the end date. | | Start pause today and pause for 3 months | The agent returns confirmation that the recurring donation is paused starting today and resumes at the end of three months. The agent asks the user to confirm this result is correct. | | Cancel my recurring donation | The agent returns the name, status, and schedule type of the active recurring gift commitment for the user’s account and asks if the user would like to proceed with canceling this commitment. | | Change the amount of my monthly donation | The agent returns the name, status, and schedule type of the active recurring gift commitment for the user’s account and asks if the user would like to proceed with changing the amount of this monthly commitment. | SEE ALSO: - [Test Your Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_parent_test.htm&language=en_US) # Use the Nonprofit Experience Manager App Now that you've installed the app and set up user access, let's add communication and subscription management. - **[Create Communications for Your Experience Cloud Site](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Data Use Purposes represent the communications and subscriptions for your site. For example, a data use purpose could be monthly email newsletters. - **[Add Communications to Your Site with the Preference Manager Component](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After relating a communication to a Data Use Purpose, you need to expose it on your site using the Preference Manager Component. You can include up to 10 types of Data Use Purposes in the component. - **[Map Site Registration Fields to Contact Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up mappings so that information entered into registration fields automatically maps to a Contact record, preventing the creation of duplicate records - **[Set Up Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ecngo_use_the_nonprofit_experience_manager_app.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up duplicate rules to ensure that Salesforce doesn't create duplicate Contacts when people register on your Nonprofit Experience Cloud site. For example, set up a duplicate rule for Email so that a person can't register multiple times with the same email address. ## Create Communications for Your Experience Cloud Site Data Use Purposes represent the communications and subscriptions for your site. For example, a data use purpose could be monthly email newsletters. 1. In the Nonprofit Experience Manager app, click the **Data Use Purpose** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Enter a name for the communication. 4. Optionally, enter a description. 5. Make sure to include the opt-out checkbox. 6. Save your work. ## Add Communications to Your Site with the Preference Manager Component After relating a communication to a Data Use Purpose, you need to expose it on your site using the Preference Manager Component. You can include up to 10 types of Data Use Purposes in the component. 1. In the Quick Find box in Setup, enter Sites, then select **All Sites** under Digital Experiences. 2. In the row for your site, click **Builder**. 3. Click the Preference Manager component on your page. If the component isn't on your page, drag it over from the Custom Components section of the Components list. 4. In a Communication Preference field, select your communication. 5. In the corresponding Communication Type field, select the method of communication. 6. Be sure to preview, then publish the changes to your site. 7. Have more than 10 communications you want to display? Add another Preference Manager component to the page and follow the same steps. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_experience_manager_app-264-0-0-production-enus/054f9658-b8c6-4a0d-9bba-cbb49d333698/images/icon_note.png) Note If you later delete a Data Use Purpose, make sure you also remove it from the Preference Manager and republish your site. ## Map Site Registration Fields to Contact Fields Set up mappings so that information entered into registration fields automatically maps to a Contact record, preventing the creation of duplicate records 1. Click the **Contact Registration Mapping** tab. 2. Click **New**. 3. Select the Registration Field to map. 4. Select one or more Contact fields to map to and move them to the Selected list. 5. Save your work. ## Set Up Duplicate Rules Set up duplicate rules to ensure that Salesforce doesn't create duplicate Contacts when people register on your Nonprofit Experience Cloud site. For example, set up a duplicate rule for Email so that a person can't register multiple times with the same email address. 1. In the Quick Find box in Setup, enter duplicate rules, then click Duplicate Rules. 2. Click **New Rule**, the select **Contact**. 3. Give the rule a name and description. 4. Select the Record-Level Security. 5. Choose what you want to have happen when duplicate information is entered. 6. Set the conditions you want to use for the fields. 7. Save and activate the rule. [Customize Duplicate Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sales.duplicate_rules_create.htm&type=5) has more detailed instructions if you want a bit more info. # Use the Shift Capacity and Coverage Subagent Use the Shift Capacity and Coverage subagent to find underfilled volunteer shifts, review open roles, and identify available volunteers who match those roles. Volunteer managers can access the agent from any page in the Nonprofit Cloud CRM. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Volunteer Management is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
User Permissions Needed
To view and edit records in Volunteer Management: Manage Volunteer Data
To set up and use the agent:

Manage Agentforce Employee Agents

AND

Manage AI Agents

AND

Manage Volunteer Data
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note If you installed this topic when it was a beta, remove it and re-install it to get the latest instructions and actions. With the Shift Capacity and Coverage subagent, a volunteer manager can use the agent to: - Identify when volunteer shift capacity is low. - Get a clear view of which roles are unfilled. - See who is available for unfilled roles. - Easily identify and match the best qualified volunteers for open roles. Here are some examples of utterances that a volunteer manager can use with the agent.
Request Example Result
Are there any shifts next week with sign-ups below 75%? The agent returns the Job Position Shift records for shifts over the next seven days that are below the 75% capacity threshold.
Do we need to fill any shifts this weekend for the Food Pantry volunteer initiatives? The agent returns the Job Position shift records that are below 100% for the stated volunteer initiative and dates.
Do any job position shifts from now until the end of May have insufficient sign-ups? The agent returns the Job Position Shift records that take place through May 31st with capacity that’s below the set threshold.
Are any shifts for the Summer Gala lower than 50%? The agent returns the Job Position Shift records for the Summer Gala with their current capacity.

Find volunteers for the Beach Clean Up shift on [date]

OR

Find volunteers for JPS-0-00001234

The agent returns how many volunteers matched the criteria of the shift.

You can then create a list view to use platform functionality to reach out to the volunteer about signing up for the shift.
# Use the Updated Case Record Page to View Advising Details Enhance the case Lightning record page to enable advisors to view advising engagements for the case, add case team members, and schedule appointments. The updated page includes tabs for advising, program enrollments, appointments, tasks, and record alerts, and the Action Launcher component, which provides quick access to frequently used actions. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where the Education Cloud license is enabled. **Who**: Only users with the Education Cloud Full Access permission set can create or modify pages in Lightning App Builder. **How**: In Student Success, on a case record page, click **Setup**, and then select **Edit Page**. Make and save your changes, and then activate the page. ## See Also: [_Salesforce Help:_ Set Up Case Record Page for Advising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_case_record_page_for_advising.htm) # User Defined Rollups (Legacy) Review the basics of legacy user defined rollups. Create a user defined rollup and use formula fields to include or exclude fields in your rollups calculations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This article was written at the 2017 NPSP Sprint in Baltimore by these amazing community members: Steve Backman, Tricia Booser, Ben Chastain, Jason Cook, Tim Forbes, Dean Graham, Megan Himan, Ben Mozenter, Loren Serfass, Michael Smith, Emily Wilson, and Jenna Zelenetz. - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** User Defined Rollups (UDR) let users that work with custom fields on Opportunities summarize that information on Accounts or Contacts. Organizations can create a User Defined Rollup to summarize information based on an Opportunity record, and push that summary information to a field on the Account or Contact record (or Households, for those still using the One-to-One or Individual Bucket model). - **[Create a User Defined Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a User Defined Rollup and display the result on the Contact, Account, or Household object. This is an example of creating a rollup for Total Remaining Payment Balance for a Contact. - **[Use Formula Fields with User Defined Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Although there is no way to directly add filters to User Defined Rollups (UDR), you can create formula fields on the Opportunity object with logic to include or exclude records based on criteria you specify. You then use these formula fields as the source Opportunity Field in your User Defined Rollup. ## Overview User Defined Rollups (UDR) let users that work with custom fields on Opportunities summarize that information on Accounts or Contacts. Organizations can create a User Defined Rollup to summarize information based on an Opportunity record, and push that summary information to a field on the Account or Contact record (or Households, for those still using the One-to-One or Individual Bucket model). UDRs are calculated based on Closed/Won Opportunities just like out-of-box NPSP rollups, but you define the Opportunity field to roll up, how it will roll up, and in what custom field the rollup data should appear. Most powerfully, organizations can extend UDRs [using formula filters](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the basics of legacy user defined rollups. Create a user defined rollup and use formula fields to include or exclude fields in your rollups calculations.") to summarize only certain subsets of Opportunities. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip In May 2018 (version 3.129), we introduced [Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_customizable_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rolling up donor data is an essential part of fundraising with the Nonprofit Success Pack. And, since every nonprofit is unique, it is especially important that you're able to roll up exactly the data you need, and to the right records.") . With Customizable Rollups, you can roll up Payments (in addition to Opportunities), create filters to include or exclude data, and easily roll up data from more than two years ago. And when you [enable Customizable Rollups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_enable_customizable_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Turn on functionality to define which fields to roll up and the filters to use. If Customizable Rollups aren't necessary for your organization, disable or reset them.") , we'll convert all out-of-box NPSP rollups and any UDRs you've created into Customizable Rollups so that you can update them as needed. To learn more about all of the different types of rollups available in the Nonprofit Success Pack, see the [Rollups Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_rollups_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollup fields are custom fields that display information from other related records, including aggregate totals. To think of this another way, rollup fields allow information from Opportunities or Payments to automatically \"roll up\" and appear on a related Account, Contact, General Accounting Unit, or Recurring Donation records."). ## Create a User Defined Rollup Create a User Defined Rollup and display the result on the Contact, Account, or Household object. This is an example of creating a rollup for Total Remaining Payment Balance for a Contact. 1. In Setup, create the custom field that will contain your rollup information. The field must be of the same data type as the field you will be rolling up (the Opportunity Field). For our example, you'd create a field with the Type = Currency and name it Total Remaining Payment Balance. 2. Go to NPSP Settings. If you don't see the NPSP Settings tab, you can find it using the App Launcher. 3. Click **Donations | User Defined Rollups**. 4. Click **New User Defined Rollup**. 5. Fill in the required fields. To follow along with the example, enter these values: 1. Opportunity Field = Remaining Balance 2. Rollup Operation = SUM 3. Target Object = Contact 4. Target Field = Total Remaining Payment Balance (Remember, this is the custom field we asked you to create in step 1.) ![Creating a new User Defined Rollup for Total Remaining Payment Balance](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/udr_create.png) 6. Click **Create Rollup**. User Defined Rollups are calculated nightly as part of a batch. You can also [manually recalculate](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_manually_recalculate_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Rollups are calculated in batch jobs as part of the nightly build.") them. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip To build more filtering functionality into your UDRs, you can also [use formula fields as the source Opportunity Field](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the basics of legacy user defined rollups. Create a user defined rollup and use formula fields to include or exclude fields in your rollups calculations."). ## Use Formula Fields with User Defined Rollups Although there is no way to directly add filters to User Defined Rollups (UDR), you can create formula fields on the Opportunity object with logic to include or exclude records based on criteria you specify. You then use these formula fields as the source Opportunity Field in your User Defined Rollup. For example, you may want to prioritize sustaining donor engagement by displaying recurring donation data on Contacts. To do this, you could create UDRs that aggregate current recurring giving and lifetime recurring giving data. To filter Opportunities to only include those associated with Recurring Donations, you could create formula fields and use them in your UDRs. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip With Customizable Rollups, you can easily create groups of filter rules and apply them directly to your rollups. To learn more, check out the [Customizable Rollups article on creating filter groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_a_filter_group.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Find out more about creating filter groups."). To use a formula field to filter your User Defined Rollup, follow these high level steps: 1. [Create the formula field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_formulas.htm) on the Opportunity object. This will be the Opportunity Field you select for your UDR. 2. [Create a custom field](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) on either the Account, Contact, or Household object. This will be the Target Field that will contain your rollup data. 3. [Create the User Defined Rollup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_user_defined_rollups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review the basics of legacy user defined rollups. Create a user defined rollup and use formula fields to include or exclude fields in your rollups calculations."). Below are some example User Defined Rollups that use formula fields. ### Example 1: First Active Recurring Date & Last Active Recurring Date This example creates a UDR that finds and displays the Close Date of the earliest Opportunity associated with a current, active Recurring Donation. You can use the same formula field to create a UDR that displays the Close Date of the most recent Opportunity associated with a current, active Recurring Donation. 1. Create a formula field on the Opportunity object (to use as the Opportunity Field). 1. Data Type = Formula 2. Field Label = Recurring Date: Active 3. Formula Return Type = Date 4. Formula = `IF ( ISPICKVAL ( npe03__Recurring_Donation__r.npe03__Open_Ended_Status__c, "Open" ), CloseDate , NULL)` 2. Create a custom field on the Contact object (to use as the Target Field). 1. Data Type = Date 2. Field Label = First Active Recurring Date 3. Description = A date field displaying the Close Date of the earliest Opportunity associated with a current, active Recurring Donation. 3. Create a User Defined Rollup with these values: 1. Opportunity Field = Recurring Date: Active 2. Rollup Operation = MIN 3. Target Object = Contact 4. Target Field = First Active Recurring Date To create a User Defined Rollup for the Last Active Recurring Date: 1. Create a custom field on the Contact object (to use as the Target Field). 1. Data Type = Date 2. Field Label = Last Active Recurring Date 3. Description = A date field displaying the Close Date of the most recent Opportunity associated with a current, active Recurring Donation. 2. Create a User Defined Rollup with these values: 1. Opportunity Field = Recurring Date: Active 2. Rollup Operation = MAX 3. Target Object = Contact 4. Target Field = Last Active Recurring Date ### Example 2: First Ever Recurring Date & Last Ever Recurring Date This example creates a UDR that finds and displays the Close Date of the earliest Opportunity associated with any Recurring Donation. You can use the same formula field to create a UDR that displays the most recent Opportunity associated with any Recurring Donation. 1. Create a formula field on the Opportunity object (to use as the Opportunity Field). 1. Data Type = Formula field 2. Field Label = Recurring Date: Ever 3. Formula Return Type = Date 4. Formula = IF ( NOT ( ISBLANK(npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donation\_\_c)), CloseDate , NULL) 2. Create a custom field on the Contact object (to use as the Target Field). 1. Data Type = Date 2. Name = First Ever Recurring Date 3. Description = A date field displaying the Close Date of the earliest Opportunity associated with any Recurring Donation. 3. Create a User Defined Rollup with these values: 1. Opportunity Field = Recurring Date: Ever 2. Rollup Operation = MIN 3. Target Object = Contact 4. Target Field = First Ever Recurring Date To create a UDR for Last Ever Recurring Date: 1. Create a custom field on the Contact object (to use as the Target Field). 1. Data Type = Date 2. Field Label = Last Ever Recurring Date 3. Description = A date field displaying the Close Date of the most recent Opportunity associated with any Recurring Donation. 2. Create a User Defined Rollup with these vales: 1. Opportunity Field = Recurring Date: Ever 2. Rollup Operation = MAX 3. Target Object = Contact 4. Target Field = Last Ever Recurring Date ### Example 3: Recurring Donation Amount This example creates a UDR that finds and displays the Recurring Donation Amount value, if the Opportunity is associated with a Recurring Donation record whose Open Ended Status is set to Open. 1. Create a formula field on the Opportunity object (to use as the Opportunity Field). 1. Data Type = Formula field 2. Field Label = Recurring Donation Amount 3. Formula Return Type = Currency 4. Decimal Places = 2 5. Formula = IF ( ISPICKVAL ( npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donation\_\_r.npe03\_\_Open\_Ended\_Status\_\_c, "Open" ), npe03\_\_Recurring\_Donation\_\_r.npe03\_\_Amount\_\_c , NULL) 2. Create a field on the Contact object (to use as the Target Field). 1. Data Type = Currency 2. Field Label = Recurring Donation Amount 3. Description = A currency field displaying the Donation Amount value of a current, active Recurring Donation. 3. Create a User Defined Rollup with these values: 1. Opportunity Field = Recurring Donation Amount 2. Rollup Operation = MAX 3. Target Object = Contact 4. Target Field = Recurring Donation Amount ![The list of User Defined Rollups that were created by following the examples in this article.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/udr_examples.png) # User Roles and Permissions Consider a user's role before assigning permissions.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The permission sets in Education Cloud give users access to the elements that they need to be successful. As you get ready to use Education Cloud, consider the roles in your institution and the access they need. Let's look at some different roles and see what licenses are good for them. ## Admissions Director Dimitri Trapalis is the Admissions Director for Astro University. It's Dmitri's responsibility to develop and implement the recruitment and admissions strategy, budget, and vision. Because their role requires access to a broad set of data in Education Cloud, the appropriate permission set license for Dimitri is either Education Cloud Full Access or Education Cloud Limited Access. ## Academic Advisor Yui Sato is an Academic Advisor at Cloudy College. Yui's job is to help create a class of learners to meet enrollment and institutional revenue targets. Yui needs access to information about course and program enrollments, schedules, admissions data, and more. Because Yui needs access to much of Education Cloud, the appropriate permission set license for them is Education Cloud Full Access. ## Application Reviewer Regina Altman reviews admissions applications for Astro University. She's responsible for application intake and review, and doesn't need access to anything beyond what's required for applications. The permission set license for Regina is Education Cloud Limited Access. ## Prospective Student Stephanie Rhimes is interested in becoming a student at Cloudy College. To submit an application, request information, or schedule an admissions interview, Stephanie needs the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User permission set license. ## Recruiter Marquis Bryant is a recruiter for Cloudy College. He's responsible for representing Cloudy at college fairs, on-campus events, conferences, and recruitment events. He supports prospective students throughout the admissions process, by communicating application requirements and deadlines. Marquis needs the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license. ## System Administrator Nina Brown is the Salesforce admin at Cloudy College. She leads the ongoing development and configuration of Cloudy's Salesforce deployment, ensuring that it works seamlessly across campus. Nina acts as the subject matter expert on the critical CRM processes at the college. Nina needs the Education Cloud Full Access permission set license. # Using NPSP Data Import Templates Start here to learn how to use the NPSP Data Import Templates for your imports. Open one of the [NPSP Data Importer Templates](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_data_importer_templates.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these templates to import your data into Salesforce using the NPSP Data Importer object.") in your favorite spreadsheet application so you can see how the data needs to be structured. - Each row contains the data you’re importing into Contacts, Accounts, Addresses, Opportunities, or other objects. - Each column represents a field on one of several objects. Some fields require special formatting such as email, postal code, and ID fields. To understand the correct data formats, refer to the instructions included in each template. Add or remove fields from the template to suit your import requirements. Don’t forget to configure Advanced Mapping for any fields you add to the template. For guidance, see [Advanced Mapping Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_adv_mapping_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Advanced Mapping gives you the flexibility to send data to most Salesforce objects related to Contacts, Accounts, and Opportunities."). Now that you're familiar with the template and understand the expected data structure, you're ready to [Clean and Format Your Data](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_clean_format_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn to clean and format your data prior to importing it into Salesforce. Improperly formatted data causes errors during import."). # Validate the Migrated Data Plan and test the migrated data to ensure its accuracy and completeness. We recommend that you create test plans for each run, and for post migration of all data. The test plans must include comprehensive data validation procedures to ensure data accuracy, completeness, and integrity. After each successful Data Processing Engine definition run, validate the migrated data: - Verify the record counts. - Run data quality checks. - Compare the migrated data against your current system's data. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Data migration to Education Cloud doesn’t remove data from the source objects. You must update your user profiles, reports, and any other configurations to ensure that only the newly migrated data in Education Cloud is used and represented. # Verify and Assign Permissions to Configure the Student Success Chatbot Configure the Student Success Chatbot user. Identify one or more Salesforce Users to serve these functions: - Be the chatbot administrator. Typically this is a Salesforce admin. - Be the running user of the chatbot. As a security best practice, make the running user of the chatbot a different user from the chatbot administrator. Configure the necessary User and object permissions for the person responsible for setting up the Student Success chatbot. Typically, this person is a Salesforce admin, which means some of these permissions are sometimes already enabled. - **[User Permissions for Chatbot Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From the chatbot's User record, make sure that these options are selected. - **[Student Success Hub and Digital Engagement Permissions for Chatbot Setup](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Student Success chatbot is built on Student Success Hub and Digital Engagement. Make sure that you assign the necessary Student Success Hub and Digital Engagement permissions to the person who sets up the chatbot. ## User Permissions for Chatbot Setup From the chatbot's User record, make sure that these options are selected. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note These settings can't be controlled by using a permission set. - Flow User - Service Cloud User ## Student Success Hub and Digital Engagement Permissions for Chatbot Setup The Student Success chatbot is built on Student Success Hub and Digital Engagement. Make sure that you assign the necessary Student Success Hub and Digital Engagement permissions to the person who sets up the chatbot. For more information about these permissions, see [Configure Higher Ed Support Staff Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_security_perms_staff_hed_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give higher ed support staff the object and field permissions they need to work in Student Success Hub.") and [Set Up Messaging Channels](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sf.livemessage_setup.htm&type=5). The chatbot administrator also needs permissions for the custom fields that the Student Success chatbot installs. For more information, see [Configure the Student Success Chatbot's Custom Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_chatbot_custom_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure the chatbot's custom fields on the Contact and Activity objects."). # Verify Applications When you verify an application, you check for overall completeness, looking at the data and documents provided by the applicant. You’ll probably look at transcripts, letters of recommendation, and more. Use an Applications list view as your starting point, then open individual application records. You can use the default All list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. as your starting point, then open individual application records. You can use the default All list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. See [Work with a List View for Rapid Reviews, Queue Pickup, and More](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "List views are your starting point for application verifications and reviews. List views help you keep track of what needs to be verified or reviewed."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note Your Admissions Connect administrator customizes the Application record page for your institution’s admissions process. Your page might look different from what’s described here. - **[View and Update the Application Status](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** At the top of the page, you can see the status of an application in the review process. - **[Assess the Overall Progress](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Application Checklist area includes a progress bar with the overall completion of the requirements. You can refresh the progress bar and lists at any time. - **[Accept, Reject, or Update a Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In the Application Checklist, requirements are grouped in two lists: Incomplete Application Checklist Items and Completed Application Checklist Items. - **[Take Actions on the Application—Send an Email or Add a Note](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Your Admissions Connect administrator configures the actions you can take on the application. You might be able to email the applicant or add a note. - **[Log Verification Comments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** From the Feed you can leave comments about the application and its requirements. ## View and Update the Application Status At the top of the page, you can see the status of an application in the review process. To update the status, click the new status, then click **Mark as Current Application Review Status**. You can even review guidance from your team using the caret button to the left of the path. ![Path component with the Guidance for Success region expanded](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_update_status.png) ## Assess the Overall Progress The Application Checklist area includes a progress bar with the overall completion of the requirements. You can refresh the progress bar and lists at any time. ![Application Checklist component with a callout on the refresh icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_refresh_checklist.png) ## Accept, Reject, or Update a Requirement In the Application Checklist, requirements are grouped in two lists: Incomplete Application Checklist Items and Completed Application Checklist Items. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_tip.png) Tip There are lots of ways to verify documents and data in Admissions Connect. This section covers how to do that from the Application Checklist on the Application record. You can also verify requirements when [working on an Application Review record](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "When you review an application, you make an admissions recommendation and leave supporting comments. Use a list view as your starting point, either for Applications or Application Reviews. You can use the default My Application Reviews list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created."), using a [custom list view](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "List views are your starting point for application verifications and reviews. List views help you keep track of what needs to be verified or reviewed."), or directly on the Task or Document Checklist Item record. The way you verify documents and data are different, and the names of items in the list don't always indicate if they're documents or data. After you click on a checklist item, it'll be clear whether you're verifying a document, such as a transcript, or data, such as the applicant's birth date and address. ### For Documents 1. Click the name of a checklist item from the Incomplete Items list to open the document in a preview window. ![Incomplete Items list in the Application Checklist with a callout around a Checklist Item link](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_preview_link.png) 2. Review the document and then click **Reject** or **Accept**. Clicking Accept or Reject updates the Status field for the document's Document Checklist Item record, which stores the attachment. 3. If you reject the document, select a reason and leave any comments, such as how the applicant can submit a new document. Then click **Reject**. 4. Close the preview window. If you click a document that's already accepted or rejected, you won't see the Accept and Reject buttons. Instead, you see a View Record button. Click this button to update the document's status directly from the Document Checklist Item record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don’t see the Accept, Reject, or View Record buttons, you might still be able to update the record’s Status field directly. Click the row-level action menu for the item and select **View Record**. Then update the Status field. If you still can’t update the record, ask your Admissions Connect administrator for help. ### For Data 1. Click the name of a checklist item from the Incomplete Items list. The data opens in a preview window. 2. After reviewing the data in the preview, close the preview window. 3. Click the row-level action menu for the item and select **View Record**. ![Incomplete Items list in the Application Checklist with a callout on the View Record link in the action menu for a Checklist Item row](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_view_record_link.png) 4. In the Task record that opens for the data, update the Status field using one of these methods. - Click **Mark Complete**. - In the top-right of the page, click the action menu, then select **Change Status** or **Edit**. - In the Details tab, click the pencil icon next to the Status field and select a status. 5. Save your changes. A requirement moves from the incomplete list to the complete list of the Application Checklist when: - For documents, the Status field on the Document Checklist Item record is Accepted. - For data, the Status field on the Task record is Completed. ## Take Actions on the Application—Send an Email or Add a Note Your Admissions Connect administrator configures the actions you can take on the application. You might be able to email the applicant or add a note. ![Application page highlights panel with a callout on the available actions for the page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_page_actions.png) ## Log Verification Comments From the Feed you can leave comments about the application and its requirements. ![Application page Feed region showing a comment from a verifier](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_verify_chatter_post.png) ### See Also: # Verify Applications When you verify an application, you look at the data and documents that the applicant has provided and check them for completeness.
User Permissions Needed  
To verify applications:

Education Cloud Full Access

OR

Education Cloud Limited Access
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
The items that an applicant submits depend on your institution's requirements and can include transcripts, letters of recommendation, and more. Use the Admissions Console or Reviewer Console as your starting point, then open individual application records. - **[Get Oriented with the Verification Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The verification page neatly organizes application materials for your review. - **[Accept, Reject, or Update a Requirement](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review a required item for an individual application, set the item's approval status, and manage files and records attached to the item. - **[Add Documents to an Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If an applicant sends you a last-minute letter of recommendation, or another essay that they want to include with their materials, you can add the document to their individual application record. - **[Add Examination Records to an Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you get test results from an applicant, you can add them to the individual application record. ## Get Oriented with the Verification Page The verification page neatly organizes application materials for your review. ![Image showing the individual application record.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/application_verification_page.png) - See the status of the application review process (1). - See the overall progress in the navigation region. Each item shows a status icon. Click a requirement to jump to it in the main viewer (2). - Set the approval status of an item (3). - Edit the approval status of an item (4). - See the number of records that still need verification (5). ## Accept, Reject, or Update a Requirement Review a required item for an individual application, set the item's approval status, and manage files and records attached to the item. 1. Click a requirement in the navigation region to verify the data and documents that the applicant has provided. Items for you to verify have the label Ready for Processing along with action buttons to mark their approval status. 2. Mark the approval status for documents or data in the individual application record. To open a document in a preview window, click the name of a checklist item. Some details, such as test scores, don't open in a separate preview window. You verify the information in the application record. 3. To edit a record, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) and select **Edit**. Make and save your changes. 4. After you review the item, click **Waive**, **Reject**, or **Approve**. Clicking Approve or Reject updates the status field for the document's Document Checklist Item record, which stores the attachment. To change the status, click **Edit Status**, select a new status, and save your changes. 5. To change the status of a requirement, click **Edit Status**, select a new status, and save your changes. 6. To delete a file or record from an application: 1. Next to the item, click ![Actions menu icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/education_cloud/images/actionsmenu.png) and select **Delete**. 2. Click **Delete**. ## Add Documents to an Application If an applicant sends you a last-minute letter of recommendation, or another essay that they want to include with their materials, you can add the document to their individual application record. 1. From the app, open an individual application record. 2. Click **Files** and then click **New**. 3. Enter all relevant information about the new item. 4. Click **Upload Files**, select the file that you want to upload, and then click **Done**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/89403874-2a89-4126-b574-9db175c14f28/images/icon_note.png) Note Closing the window without deleting the uploaded file removes the file from the individual application record, but not from Salesforce. 5. Save your changes. View the new document on the application review page and the list of Document Checklist Items. ## Add Examination Records to an Application If you get test results from an applicant, you can add them to the individual application record. 1. From the Recruitment & Admissions app, open an individual application record. 2. Click **Test Results** and then click **New**. 3. Enter the relevant information for the test result and save your changes. 4. To add subject-specific scores to a test record, click **New Score** on the record, enter the relevant information, and save your changes. # Verify Data Upload Make sure the data from your template uploaded successfully to the NPSP Data Import custom object. 1. In Salesforce, click the NPSP Data Imports tab. If you don't see NPSP Data Imports, you can find it in the App Launcher. 2. Choose the To Be Imported list view to see records uploaded to the object. Keep in mind that while your data has been uploaded into Salesforce, it hasn't been added to (that is, "imported" into) any NPSP objects yet. ![NPSP Data Imports tab](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/lightning_data_to_be_imported.png) 3. Spot-check some records to make sure all were uploaded correctly. Make sure the information in the CSV went to the correct fields on the NPSP Data Import object. If you mapped a Salesforce ID with the data wizard and it's not appropriate for the type of record, the Imported field for that Object Group will be blank. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If your CSV data didn't populate all of the fields you expected in the NPSP Data Import records, you may have run into a Data Import Wizard limitation. Please see this [Data Import Wizard Known Issue](https://success.salesforce.com/issues_view?id=a1p3a0000017xyiqay) for more information. Delete any columns you aren't using in your import to get around this limitation. If you'd like to import more than 65 columns, use an API-based import tool such as Salesforce Data Loader. If for some reason your data did not upload correctly, or there were errors during the import process, you might want to delete all of the import records and start over again. (See [Delete Imported Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_delete_imported_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "After you've successfully imported your records, you can optionally reduce data storage by deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object. Deleting the intermediate data in the NPSP Data Import object does not delete your new Account, Contact, or Opportunity donation records.").) Before re-doing your import, go back and review your CSV import file carefully. Simple things like leaving a "$" in the donation field, leaving a leading space like " Smith," or leaving out an "@" in an email address will cause import errors. _Make sure that every single row in your spreadsheet is cleaned and ready for import_. Look good to go? Do a Dry Run to make sure your data will import successfully. See [Verify Your Upload with Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import.") for more information. # Verify Email Deliverability Make sure you can send email to students in Student Success Hub. Make sure that your org has the appropriate deliverability settings for sending email and that students are set up to receive email. - Verify that all student Contact records have email addresses. For younger students, verify that their parent or guardian Contact records have email addresses. - Verify your org's email deliverability settings. From Setup, search for then select **Deliverability**. Under Access to Send Email, set the Access level to **All email**. - If your org includes a student portal, in the Administration workspace in Experience Builder, review the setup of Emails to make sure that email templates show the content you want and that students don't receive welcome emails until you're ready to open the portal's doors. See [Manage Your Student Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_setup_portal_manage.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize site emails, add members, and preview, test, publish and promote your Student Success Hub portal."). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note - When working in your sandbox, avoid populating actual email addresses, because setting the Access level to All email sends email to people whose records are involved in your testing efforts. - Student Success Hub installs a sample student email address. Remove or edit the address to avoid generating undeliverable messages. # Verify Permission Sets for Experience Site Users Make sure that learners and staff have the required permissions to access the Experience site and schedule appointments.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Experience site appointment users require the Education Cloud for Experience Cloud User permission set license. We support the Customer Community Plus user license. See [Assign an Education Cloud Permission Set License to Users](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_assign_an_education_cloud_permission_set_license_to_users.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Users get different access to Education Cloud based on the license assigned to them."). # Verify Your Admissions Connect Staff Review Setup Configure list views to stay on top of applications and learn how to add reviewers to manage applications. Reviewers can then verify or upload documents and make the final admission decision. - **[Work with a List View for Rapid Reviews, Queue Pickup, and More](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** List views are your starting point for application verifications and reviews. List views help you keep track of what needs to be verified or reviewed. - **[Add a Reviewer](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_add_reviewer.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can quickly add a reviewer directly from the Application or Application Review record pages. Or you can use the Application list view to select multiple Applications and assign multiple reviewers. - **[Verify Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you verify an application, you check for overall completeness, looking at the data and documents provided by the applicant. You’ll probably look at transcripts, letters of recommendation, and more. Use an Applications list view as your starting point, then open individual application records. You can use the default All list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. as your starting point, then open individual application records. You can use the default All list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. - **[Review Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_application_review.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you review an application, you make an admissions recommendation and leave supporting comments. Use a list view as your starting point, either for Applications or Application Reviews. You can use the default My Application Reviews list view, one created by your admissions team, or one that you created. - **[Assign Requirements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_requirements_assign.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can assign requirements directly from an application. Say an applicant makes a mistake or changes their mind about what degree program to apply for. That might mean additional requirements are needed. Or maybe your institution handles a small amount of applications and you assign requirements individually. - **[Add Ad Hoc Documents or Tasks to an Application](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_requirements_add.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Add one-off documents and tasks to an assigned Action Plan to show the items in the Application Checklist and on the Application Review page. - **[Make a Final Admissions Decision](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_staff_admissions_decision.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you make a final admissions decision, update the Application Status and Application Decision Date fields on the application record. You can make these updates directly on an application record, or you can mass edit these fields from an application list view. # Verify Your Applicant Portal Setup Review the tasks to help ensure that applicants are successful in the portal. - **[Verify Applicant Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The default Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set includes the minimum level of portal access that applicants need. Don’t forget to also grant additional access based on the records and fields you plan to show in the portal. To allow applicants to edit field-level data, this access is crucial. - **[Verify Applicant Settings in Mapping Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Applicant portal settings defined in Application Material Mapping records determine what applicants see and what they can do in the portal. - **[Understand Application Completion and Submission](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Application’s status and submission window determine how Applications show in the applicant portal and whether they can be submitted. The status is controlled by the Application Status field and the submission window is controlled by the Open Date and Due Date fields. - **[Understand How Document and Task Statuses Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_applicant_verify.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Status of Document Checklist Items shows differently for applicants. Admissions Connect also provides basic automation for updating statuses based on applicant actions, such as uploading a document. Make sure you understand how document statuses work in an applicant portal. ## Verify Applicant Permissions The default Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set includes the minimum level of portal access that applicants need. Don’t forget to also grant additional access based on the records and fields you plan to show in the portal. To allow applicants to edit field-level data, this access is crucial. If you used the Applicant Portal Template as a sample for creating your applicant portal, be sure to grant applicants access to the ApplicantCommunityHomePageController apex class. For details about setting up applicant permissions, see [Set Up Security for an Admissions Connect Portal](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_security.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the data that your portal users can access."). ## Verify Applicant Settings in Mapping Records Applicant portal settings defined in Application Material Mapping records determine what applicants see and what they can do in the portal. For details about these settings, including the prerequisites for these settings to work, see [Set Up Application Requirements and Action Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_requirements_setup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Define the document types that applicants can upload, the fields and information that are visible to applicants, and the application requirements. Then, configure how to implement these elements together in the Admissions Connect components."). ## Understand Application Completion and Submission The Application’s status and submission window determine how Applications show in the applicant portal and whether they can be submitted. The status is controlled by the Application Status field and the submission window is controlled by the Open Date and Due Date fields. When thinking about Application submission, try visualizing a series of switches that control the state of an Application. The first switch is the applicant’s access to the Application Status, Open Date, and Due Date fields. The second switch is the value of the Application Status field. And the third switch, which is optional, is the submission window. We’ll go over how all of these switches work together in detail.  Applicants need Read and Edit access to the Application Status field. They also need Read access to the Open Date and Due Date fields. We include this access by default in the Admissions Connect - Submit Applications permission set.  - If an applicant has Read access on these fields, they see the Application record in a read-only or editable state depending on the Application Status value and the submission window. - If they don't have Read access, they see the Application record in a read-only state and they can’t submit it regardless of the Application Status value or submission window. When an applicant has the necessary access, here's how the Application Status maps to read-only and editable states.
Application Status Value Application State Can the Application Be Submitted?
Started, Incomplete, or not specified

Editable, depending on the applicant’s access to the fields and records shown

Note
Note If a document is approved before the application is submitted, the applicant can’t upload a new version unless the document is Rejected. Tasks, however, can still be edited after they’re marked Complete.
 Yes
Submitted, Received, In Review, Waitlist, or other custom values*

Read-only, except for these items:

  • Incomplete Tasks, which have any status value other than Completed

  • Document Checklist Items with a status of Rejected

Note
Note If an applicant submits their application without submitting optional documents (which means the item wasn't marked as Required), the document can only be submitted if its status is updated to Rejected.
 No, because the Application is already submitted.
Admit, Admit with Conditions, Deny, Deferred Offer, Accepted Offer, and Declined Offer Read-only No, because the Application is already submitted and a final decision issued.
\*Custom Application Status values can’t automatically move the Application into a fully editable state. Use custom status values only for application submission. If you’ve configured a [submission window](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect.") with the Open Date and Due Date fields, the window also determines the Application state and whether applicants can submit their Applications. Remember, defining a submission window is optional. | Submission Window | Application State | Can the Application Be Submitted? | | --- | --- | --- | | Not open - The Open Date is in the future. | Read-only | No | | Open - The Open Date is in the present or has passed but the Due Date is in the future. | Editable or read-only depending on the Application Status value. | Determined by the Application Status value. | | Closed - The Due Date has passed. | Read-only | No | If setting up a custom value for application submission, update the Status for Submission property on the Applicant Application Header component to add the API name of your custom picklist value. That way, when applicants click the Submit Application button, the Application Status value for their Application record updates to match your custom submission value. For example, you could set the property to the existing status of Received to indicate an application was submitted. Just don't set this property to the existing Incomplete or Started values. To help applicants understand what's needed to submit their application, we show a percent complete in the Checklist Progress shown in the Application Application Viewer component. When the progress is 100% complete, applicants can submit their Application. The percent complete calculations include only Required documents and Tasks that the applicant can see in the portal. Admissions staff sometimes see a different percent complete, which is calculated based on all Required items regardless of applicant visibility or ownership. Be aware of these scenarios where an applicant can’t take action on a required item, which also means that they could be blocked from submitting their application. - If you assign a required Task to someone on your admissions team and it shows in the applicant portal, applicants can’t update the Task because it’s not assigned to them. - If you configure a required document that doesn't allow applicants to upload documents. - If a required document is uploaded by someone other than the applicant and then marked as rejected, the applicant can’t upload a new version of the document because they aren't the owner of the document anymore. - If a required Task shows data in a related list, which means the item’s corresponding Application Material Type record specifies a Child Object, applicants can’t update the Task. To ensure applicants are successful, consider providing a custom Applicant Instruction Message or detailed Rejection Comment explaining how applicants can complete these items, since they can't do it themselves. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_important.png) Important If you're using ad hoc Tasks, make sure to review [Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect.") as some of these items can impact submission. ## Understand How Document and Task Statuses Work The Status of Document Checklist Items shows differently for applicants. Admissions Connect also provides basic automation for updating statuses based on applicant actions, such as uploading a document. Make sure you understand how document statuses work in an applicant portal. For more information, see [Considerations for Document Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_management_docs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Review some considerations before starting to work with documents in Admissions Connect."). The Status of Tasks are updated automatically as the applicant works on their application.  - If only some the Required fields are filled out, the Status is updated to In Progress. - If all the Required fields are filled out, the Status is updated to Completed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/images/icon_note.png) Note If automation or an admissions staff member fills out all the Required fields for a Task, it can show as incomplete until the applicant tries to update the information. For more information about how Tasks work in an applicant portal, see [Plan Your Applicant Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_portal_plan_applicant.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set up an applicant portal for Admissions Connect."). # Verify Your Upload with Dry Run Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import. - **[Do a Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A dry run goes through the Contact1, Account1, Contact2, Account2, Home Address, and Donations and identifies potential matches, but doesn't actually process the records into your org. - **[Resolve Dry Run Errors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After the dry run completes, the summary page lists how many records were processed and any errors encountered. ## Do a Dry Run A dry run goes through the Contact1, Account1, Contact2, Account2, Home Address, and Donations and identifies potential matches, but doesn't actually process the records into your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note A dry run only looks at Donations that are open Opportunities and unpaid Payments; it doesn't include Closed/Won Opportunities. You can do a dry run on all uploaded records that haven't been successfully imported yet or on a specific batch. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Dry runs look for and attempt to identify matches in existing records, so you should only do a dry run if you already have records in your org. Read more about configuring batch size and matching options in [Configure NPSP Data Importer Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_di_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure your NPSP Data Importer options for batch size and duplicate record matching."). If you'd like to save these configuration options for future imports, see [Batch Import Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_import_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The ability to import data in batches can be very useful. Batch Data Import allows you to have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options (instead of using the default settings)."). 1. To do a dry run on all uploaded records that haven't been successfully imported yet: 1. In the NPSP Data Imports tab, go to the To Be Imported list view. 2. Click **Start Data Import**. 2. To do a dry run on a specific batch (see [Batch Import Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_batch_import_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The ability to import data in batches can be very useful. Batch Data Import allows you to have different groups of data import records that you want to process differently, using their own set of unique configuration options (instead of using the default settings).") for more information): 1. From the App Launcher, click **NPSP Data Import Batches**. 2. Find the batch you want to put through a dry run and click the Batch Name. 3. Click **Process Batch**. 3. On the summary page, click **Begin Dry Run**. ![Begin Dry Run button on the NPSP Data Import page](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/import_dry_run.png) You can monitor progress on the status page as the dry run proceeds; it may take a few minutes for the import to start. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_important.png) Important Leave this tab open until the dry run finishes so you can see the detailed results. 4. Wait for the status page to show a status of Completed and a summary of the results. ![A screen that shows when dry run processed without any errors.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_processed_success.png) If the status page shows a green Completed status, you're ready to [Process Your Import](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity."). An orange Error status means you need to [Verify Your Upload with Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import."). ## Resolve Dry Run Errors After the dry run completes, the summary page lists how many records were processed and any errors encountered. ![Screen showing that there were errors during your dry run.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_processed_with_errors.png) To review and resolve these errors: 1. Click **Close** to return to either the NPSP Data Imports tab (if you started the dry run from the To Be Imported list view) or the batch record. 2. Dry run records have two possible statuses: Dry Run - Validated or Dry Run - Error. Use the list views with these names to review the records that were part of the dry run. From there, you can drill down into a record to see more information. ![On the NPSP Data Imports page, if you click on the default list view, you see the options for the Dry Run - Errors and Dry Run - Validated list views](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_list_views.png) Within a record, you'll see the overall status and the different Import Statuses for each item the dry run tried to match against. - **Dry Run - Matched** - **Dry Run - Matched None** - **Dry Run - Best Matched Used** (used for Donations only) - **Dry Run - Matched by Id** (used for Donations only) - **Ignored** (used only for Addresses) If your dry run had errors, you'll also see them in the Import Status fields. For example, in this record the overall status is **Dry Run - Error** because even though the Contact1 was matched, there was an error with the Donation Opportunity. ![An NPSP Data Import record that was part of a dry run, showing the different dry run statues](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_record_with_error.png) If you scroll down to the Opportunity and Payment sections, you also see the specific errors in the Import Status fields. ![The Donations section of an NPSP Data Import record that was part of a dry run, with the Import Status fields highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/dry_run_record_err_donation_detail.png) After you've resolved all of your errors, [do another Dry Run](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_verify_with_dry_run.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Once you import records into NPSP, you can't hit the undo button. And that can be problematic if you accidentally import records that you had previously imported, resulting in duplicate records in your org. It can also be problematic if the wrong record is matched and you've updated it with data from a different record. Doing a dry run allows you to see if there are any potential matches before you import."). If the status page shows a green Completed status, you're ready to [process your import!](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_process_import.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use NPSP Data Importer to send your data in the NPSP Data Import staging object to target objects such as Account, Contact, and Opportunity.") # Verify, Review, and Decide on Applications Work with an application through each step of the approval process.
Editions Needed
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
When a prospective student submits an application to your institution, the application goes through the review and approval process. First, the admissions officer verifies that the application is complete and that the provided information is acceptable. Next, reviewers for your institution go over the application and recommend whether or not to admit the applicant. Finally, the admissions director reviews the recommendations and makes a final decision. - **[Verify Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_verify_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you verify an application, you look at the data and documents that the applicant has provided and check them for completeness. - **[Review Applications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_review_applications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When an applicant submits an application to your institution, the person who processes applications checks that the applicant provided all of the required information. With all of the information in place, the application is ready for review. - **[Make a Final Admissions Decision](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_make_a_final_admissions_decision.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After the application has been through the review process, it's ready for a final decision. You make the final application decision directly on an individual application record. We recommend that you access the individual application from the Admissions Console. # View and Attempt Career and Interest Assessments Advisors can view a student's assessment status and responses, and collaborate on new assessments to generate personalized career and goal recommendations. ### Required Editions
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
User Permissions Needed
To view and attempt assessments:

Education Cloud Full Access permission set
Before you begin: - [Set Up Your Org for Career Planning and Life Goals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_org_for_career_planning_and_life_goals.htm&language=en_US) - [Set Up Career Planning and Life Goals Components for Advisors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_set_up_career_planning_life_goals_components_advisors.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Give advisors the tools to manage student progress by adding career planning and life goals features to the Student Success app.") 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Select a case record for the student. 3. Go to the Student Assessments tab. 4. To view assessment status and responses already started by the student. - On the In Progress tab, select an assessment to view the questions and student responses. - On the Completed tab, select an assessment to view the completed responses and final assessment status. 5. To collaborate with students on an assessment. 1. Select an assessment and enter responses collaboratively with the student. # View NPSP Errors Use the error log in NPSP settings to learn more about issues in your org. From the **NPSP Settings** tab, click **System Tools** | **Error Log**.A variety of information is provided for notification and debugging purposes when working with errors. The error log contains these fields: ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see the **NPSP Settings** tab in your org, you can find it in the App Launcher. - **DateTime** \- The date and time that the error occurred. - **Error Type** - The type of exception (error) that occurred. - **Full Message** - The error message provided by the system. - **Object Type** - Type of object on which the error occurred, if known. - **Record URL** - A link to the record that caused the error, if available. - **Stack Trace** - Stack trace for the thrown error, if available at runtime. ![Error Log screen](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/error_handling_errlog.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note NPSP errors will only be stored if Error Handling is enabled in **System Tools** | **Error Notifications**. See [Configure Error Handling](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_error_handling.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "In Nonprofit Success Pack, when you enable error handling, errors are centrally trapped, collected, and stored in a single location based on your preferences.") for more information. # View Transaction Journal Records After the Accounting Subledger job runs, view the generated financial transactions on the Transaction Journal object in a format optimized for export to your accounting system. Transaction journal records include multiple fields to help you understand the generated data related to your financial transactions. Accounting Subledger creates transaction journal records automatically for new or changed CRM financial records. **Where**: This change applies to Lightning Experience in Performance, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Accounting Subledger license is enabled, and where at least one active user has the Data Pipelines Base User permission assigned. **Who**: Only users with the Access Accounting Subledger Starter or Access Accounting Subledger Growth permission set can access this feature. See Also: - [Accounting Subledger Data Export](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.asl_export.htm) # View Trigger Handlers Trigger Handlers are records just like any other, so you can create list views to filter and sort the records. Access the Trigger Handler records via the Trigger Handlers tab. 1. Click the **Trigger Handlers** tab. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/images/icon_note.png) Note Sometimes the Trigger Handler tab isn't visible by default. If you don't see it, click the More tab. If you still don't see it, from the App Launcher, find and select Trigger Handlers. (Items are listed alphabetically.) **Only System Administrators** should have access to the Trigger Handler tab. As a best practice, remove access for all other Profiles. 2. Select the **All** list view to see the full list of Trigger Handler records. ![Trigger Handler Tab with All List View](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/resources-product/images/eda-trigger-handlers-tab.png) # Visual Indicator Use Visual Indicator in Education Cloud to give advisors a quick view of a student’s performance in the enrolled courses of the current academic term. Based on the student’s course component scores, Visual Indicator shows their course performance in customizable categories such as At Risk, On Track, and Needs Attention.
Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with with these enabled licenses and add-ons:

  • Education Cloud license
  • Agentforce for Education add-on license
  • Data 360 as part of an Agentforce add-on or as a standalone license
Visual Indicator uses these resources in Education Cloud: Education Cloud Resources for Visual Indicator | Resource Name | Resource Type | Description | | --- | --- | --- | | LearnerPerformanceIndicator | Omniscript | Shows information in a predefined format based on a decision matrix. | | GetCourseScoreCategories | Integration Procedure | Gets a student’s scores from GetCourseOfferingParticipants, calculates final scores by using the Course Score Calculation expression set, and returns the categorized course scores. | | Course Score Calculation | Expression Set | Calculates a learner’s score percentage in a course based on the weighted average of its components. | | CourseScoreCategorization | Decision Matrix | Defines the course score categories, and the text and icon format for each category. | ## Set Up Visual Indicator Show a student’s performance in the current academic term by setting up the Visual Indicator component. Set up a visual indicator to perform the course GPA calculation using expression sets or Data Cloud Calculated Insights.
USER PERMISSIONS NEEDED  
To set up Visual Indicator:

Education Cloud Full Access

AND

Data Cloud Admin

AND

Data Pipelines Base User

AND

Omnistudio Admin

AND

View Setup & Configuration

AND

Customize Application
1. Add a tab for student insights to the case record page layout. 1. From the App Launcher, find and select **Cases**. 2. Click any case record. 3. Click **Setup**, and then click **Edit Page**. 4. Click the Tabs component, and then click **Add Tab**. 5. Select **Custom** for the tab label, and enter a name. For example, enter Insights. 6. Click **Done**. 2. Add the Visual Indicator component to the page layout: 1. Drag the Omniscript component to the new tab. 2. Select the type as **EDUStudentSuccess**. 3. Select the sub type as **LearnerPerformanceIndicator**. 4. Save your changes. 3. [Create a standard decision matrix](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.create_standard_decision_matrices_0.htm&language=en_US) with the name CourseScoreCategorization. 1. Add these columns to the decision matrix: | Column Header | Header Type | Data Type | | --- | --- | --- | | ScorePercentage | Input | Number Range | | Icon | Output | Text | | IconColor | Output | Text | | CategoryColor | Output | Text | | Status | Output | Text | 2. Save your changes. 3. Click **Activate**. 4. Refresh the [data streams](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_data_streams.htm&type=5&language=en_US) and make sure that these required fields have valid values in Data Cloud:
Data Model Object Field
Course Offering Ptcp Activity Grade
  • ssot__Name__c
  • ssot__ScoreNumber__c
  • ssot__ScoreStatus__c
  • ssot__MaximumMarksNumber__c
  • ssot__CourseOfferingRubricId__c
Course Offering Rubric
  • ssot__WeightingNumber__c
  • ssot__InstancesQuantity__c
5. To perform the course GPA calculation, use expression sets or Data Cloud Calculated Insights. - Create an expression set by using the Ready\_to\_Use\_Course\_Score\_Calculation template and change the score calculation logic with custom logic. - As an alternative to the expression set, use Data Cloud Calculated Insights. 1. Create a calculated insight or use the Student Course Percentage Calculator calculated insight that is available in the Education Cloud data kit. 2. From the App Launcher, find and select **Omnistudio Integration Procedures**. 3. Create a new version of the EduStuSuccess/GetCourseScoreCategories integration procedure. 4. Open the new version of the EduStuSuccess/GetCourseScoreCategories integration procedure. 5. Deactivate the GetCourseComponentGrades remote action and the CalculateCourseScorePercentage expression set action. 6. Activate the GetCalculatedInsight remote action. 7. Enter values for calculatedInsightName, insightDimension, and insightMeasure. 8. Select GetCourseScoreCategorization decision matrix action. 9. In the Matrix Input Parameters section, for Data Source, replace CalculateCourseScorePercentage:Percent:CourseScorePercentage with GetCalculatedInsight:Percent:CourseScorePercentage. 10. Activate the integration procedure version. 11. Ensure that the EDUStudentSuccess/LearnerPerformanceIndicator OmniScript uses the new integration procedure version. See Also: - [Data 360 for Education Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ec_data_cloud_for_education_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Connect, organize, and unify large volumes of disparate student data and educational data by using the power of Data 360. Then use that data to deliver insights across the complete educational journey of a learner from prospect to engaged alumnus.") - [Expression Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ind.expression_sets.htm&language=en_US) - [Authoring Methods for Insights](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=data.c360_a_authoring_methods_for_insights.htm&language=en_US) # Visualizations for Planned Gift Types in Education The planned gift record page offers dynamic visualizations that automatically adapt to the structure of specific gift types. Select a gift type to get a Flexcard that shows only the fields that matter most, which streamlines review and data entry. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Education Cloud
Dynamic gift visualizations help relationship officers manage complex gifts with greater clarity and context. For example, create a planned gift record and select the Charitable Gift Annuity gift type. This selection generates a Flexcard that shows fields, terms, and visual summaries specific to the charitable gift annuity type. These Flexcards highlight fields specific to the corresponding planned gift types. ## Bequest Specific Amount (BSA) These fields highlight the likelihood, amount, and timing of a bequest realization. - Expected Amount: the forecast for the gift pipeline - Probability Factor: prioritizes and weighs gifts - Revocable Gift: indicates the firmness of commitment - Bequest Realization Date: forecasts the receipt of funds ## Bequest Specific Percentage (BSP) These fields prioritize research officers’ attention by projecting institutional benefit from estate gifts. - Expected Estate Value: the foundation for calculating gift value - Residuary Share: defines the institution’s proportion - Expected Amount: the expected return from the estate - Probability Factor: the likelihood of receipt - Bequest Realization: critical for financial and stewardship planning ## Charitable Lead Annuity Trust (CLAT) These fields highlight the timing, payout liability, and long-term institutional benefit. - Principal Amount: sets the basis for value projections and payouts - Maturity Date: determines income stream - Term (Years): indicates the length of obligations - Present Value: sets the foundation for performance tracking - Term End Date: indicates when the institution expects the remainder ## Charitable Remainder Unitrust (CRUT) These fields help relationship officers balance stewardship duties with institutional benefit forecasting. - Principal Amount: indicates gift size and planning complexity - Estimated Maturity Date: sets the planning milestone - Future Value: the projected amount that the institution receives - Net Value: the institutional benefit after deductions - Payout Rate: the annual obligation to the donor ## Deferred Gift Annuity (DGA) These fields highlight future impact and the required follow-up over time. - Deferred Future Value: the projected value at the end of deferral - First Payment Date: supports payout planning - Deferral Period (Years): critical to growth and planning - Payout Rate: determines future expense to the institution - Present Value: helps evaluate current gift impact ## Immediate Gift Annuity (ICGA) These fields highlight immediate obligations and long-term benefits. - Principal Amount: sets expectations for impact - Net Value: presents the key metric for institutional return - Payout Frequency: shows cost and stewardship cadence - Future Value: the total expected benefit - Amount Received: tracks stewardship to date ## Life Insurance Irrevocable Interest (LIII) These fields highlight financial exposure and the timing for benefit. - Face Value: the maximum gift value - Premium Amount: the cost of maintaining the policy - Future Value: the expected institutional benefit - Maturity Date: the expected date for gift realization - Probability Factor: indicates the certainty of an eventual payout ## Pooled Income Fund (PIF) These fields assess income stream, stewardship needs, and institutional return. - Units Held: indicates the donor’s share in the fund - Units Value: the basis for calculating gift value - Future Value: the projected institutional benefit - Net Value: the actual institutional gain after obligations - Maturity Date: the expected date when the institution receives the remainder # Visualizations for Planned Gift Types in Nonprofit The planned gift record page offers dynamic visualizations that automatically adapt to the structure of specific gift types. Select a gift type to get a Flexcard that shows only the fields that matter most, which streamlines review and data entry. ### Required Editions
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience

Available in: Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud

Dynamic gift visualizations help relationship officers manage complex gifts with greater clarity and context. For example, create a planned gift record and select the Charitable Gift Annuity gift type. This selection generates a Flexcard that shows fields, terms, and visual summaries specific to the charitable gift annuity type. These Flexcards highlight fields specific to the corresponding planned gift types. ## Bequest Specific Amount (BSA) These fields highlight the likelihood, amount, and timing of a bequest realization. - Expected Amount: the forecast for the gift pipeline - Probability Factor: prioritizes and weighs gifts - Revocable Gift: indicates the firmness of commitment - Bequest Realization Date: forecasts the receipt of funds ## Bequest Specific Percentage (BSP) These fields prioritize research officers’ attention by projecting institutional benefit from estate gifts. - Expected Estate Value: the foundation for calculating gift value - Residuary Share: defines the institution’s proportion - Expected Amount: the expected return from the estate - Probability Factor: the likelihood of receipt - Bequest Realization: critical for financial and stewardship planning ## Charitable Lead Annuity Trust (CLAT) These fields highlight the timing, payout liability, and long-term institutional benefit. - Principal Amount: sets the basis for value projections and payouts - Maturity Date: determines income stream - Term (Years): indicates the length of obligations - Present Value: sets the foundation for performance tracking - Term End Date: indicates when the institution expects the remainder ## Charitable Remainder Unitrust (CRUT) These fields help relationship officers balance stewardship duties with institutional benefit forecasting. - Principal Amount: indicates gift size and planning complexity - Estimated Maturity Date: sets the planning milestone - Future Value: the projected amount that the institution receives - Net Value: the institutional benefit after deductions - Payout Rate: the annual obligation to the donor ## Deferred Gift Annuity (DGA) These fields highlight future impact and the required follow-up over time. - Deferred Future Value: the projected value at the end of deferral - First Payment Date: supports payout planning - Deferral Period (Years): critical to growth and planning - Payout Rate: determines future expense to the institution - Present Value: helps evaluate current gift impact ## Immediate Gift Annuity (ICGA) These fields highlight immediate obligations and long-term benefits. - Principal Amount: sets expectations for impact - Net Value: presents the key metric for institutional return - Payout Frequency: shows cost and stewardship cadence - Future Value: the total expected benefit - Amount Received: tracks stewardship to date ## Life Insurance Irrevocable Interest (LIII) These fields highlight financial exposure and the timing for benefit. - Face Value: the maximum gift value - Premium Amount: the cost of maintaining the policy - Future Value: the expected institutional benefit - Maturity Date: the expected date for gift realization - Probability Factor: indicates the certainty of an eventual payout ## Pooled Income Fund (PIF) These fields assess income stream, stewardship needs, and institutional return. - Units Held: indicates the donor’s share in the fund - Units Value: the basis for calculating gift value - Future Value: the projected institutional benefit - Net Value: the actual institutional gain after obligations - Maturity Date: the expected date when the institution receives the remainder # Volunteer Assignments Assignments in Volunteer Management streamline volunteer scheduling to maximize your initiatives’ impacts. Efficiently schedule volunteers so that you have adequate volunteer coverage while minimizing administrative burdens. With flexible assignment options, volunteer managers can easily assign volunteers to shifts, track hours, and align activities with organizational goals. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
- **[Assign Volunteers to Job Position Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_assign_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Efficiently schedule volunteers to shifts and positions by using Nonprofit Cloud's Volunteer Management tools. To maintain adequate coverage of your volunteer initiatives, assign volunteers individually to shifts. # Volunteer Initiatives Quickly set up and manage volunteer initiatives, so that volunteers can help your organization reach its goals. Initiatives are staffed by volunteer jobs with specified shifts. After you create volunteer initiatives with the job positions and shifts that serve it, use matching criteria to find the most qualified and appropriate volunteer to fill the shift. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
- **[Create Volunteer Initiatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_volunteer_initiatives.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up initiatives for volunteers to help your organization accomplish its goals. Specify start and end dates, the number of volunteers needed, and the total number of volunteer hours to be filled. - **[Create Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create positions for your organization to delineate functional roles that are characterized by specific duties and responsibilities. You can also specify skills and qualifications that are required to hold the position. Positions can be used across multiple volunteer initiatives. - **[Create Position Qualifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_position_qualifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create a position, create qualifications for that position to define the requirements that apply across all related job positions. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the role. - **[Create Job Positions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_positions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create volunteer initiatives, create job positions that support those initiatives. Job positions are customized roles for working your initiatives with shifts and qualifications that help you match the perfect volunteers for the initiatives. - **[Create Job Position Qualifications](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_qualifications.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** After you create a job position, create qualifications to make sure that volunteers meet the requirements for the job position. Job position qualifications are additive and apply only to the specific job position. Set qualifications to help you determine who's the right volunteer for the job. - **[Create Job Position Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_create_job_position_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** A job position shift is a specific work shift that’s associated with a job position or a related recurrence schedule. After developing a volunteer initiative and creating job positions for it, create work shifts that volunteers who meet the position qualifications can fill. - **[Match Volunteers to Volunteer Initiative Job Positions and Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_match_to_job_positions_and_shifts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find volunteers by using smart matching criteria to search for the right volunteers for an initiative’s job position and job position shifts. The matching criteria include qualifications, shift or date-and-time range, location. Intelligently matched volunteers are the closest fit for the open shifts of a volunteer initiative and position. # Volunteer Management Use Volunteer Management to streamline program management, enhance the volunteer experience, track hours, and report metrics. In Experience Cloud, create a portal to post opportunities for volunteers to browse, search, and sign up for volunteer opportunities. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions where Volunteer Management is enabled.
- **[Volunteer Management Editions and Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review the supported products and editions for Volunteer Management. Then learn about how your product handles permissions and how to assign them. - **[Use AI Tools for Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_ai_tools.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up, configure, and populate Volunteer Management by using headless operations with an AI agent. Work from the command line or another agent channel to manage volunteer programs without navigating the Salesforce UI. - **[Set Up Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up Volunteer Management for your organization. Assign permissions, turn on the feature, configure locations and operating hours, and set a default status for job position assignments. - **[Enable and Configure Features for Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_configure_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up the components and tools that give you deeper insight into your volunteer data and provide automation around volunteer management processes. - **[Configure Volunteer Details](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_configure_volunteer_details.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To better match volunteers to positions in Volunteer Management, configure their location availability and competencies. If you require examinations of your volunteers, add examination results. Make this information easy to find by adding it to the Person Account page layout. - **[Set Up Data Bundles for Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_intelligence_setup_vol_mgmt.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Management data bundle is a tool to quickly and easily map your Volunteer Management objects to data model objects in Data Cloud. After you’ve mapped your objects, you can take advantage of Data Cloud’s tools and analytics and combine your Salesforce data with additional data streams for a complete view of your organization’s stakeholders. - **[Volunteer Initiatives](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_volunteer_initiative.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Quickly set up and manage volunteer initiatives, so that volunteers can help your organization reach its goals. Initiatives are staffed by volunteer jobs with specified shifts. After you create volunteer initiatives with the job positions and shifts that serve it, use matching criteria to find the most qualified and appropriate volunteer to fill the shift. - **[Volunteer Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_volunteer_assignments.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Assignments in Volunteer Management streamline volunteer scheduling to maximize your initiatives’ impacts. Efficiently schedule volunteers so that you have adequate volunteer coverage while minimizing administrative burdens. With flexible assignment options, volunteer managers can easily assign volunteers to shifts, track hours, and align activities with organizational goals. - **[Volunteer Management Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Efficiently manage volunteer shifts and initiatives, reducing administrative tasks and improving engagement. Access the Shift Capacity and Coverage topic in the Agent Builder to identify unfilled shifts and find suitable volunteers to fill them. # Volunteer Management Agent Efficiently manage volunteer shifts and initiatives, reducing administrative tasks and improving engagement. Access the Shift Capacity and Coverage topic in the Agent Builder to identify unfilled shifts and find suitable volunteers to fill them. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Volunteer Management is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_note.png) Note Beginning in April 2026, agent topics are now called subagents. There are no changes to functionality. During this transition, you may see a mix of the new and previous terms in our documentation. With the Shift Capacity and Coverage topic, volunteer managers can use agents to identify unfilled volunteer shifts. The Shift Capacity and Coverage topic contains the [Find Unfilled Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_ref_volunteer_mgmt_find_unfilled_shifts.htm&language=en_US) and the [Match Volunteers to Shifts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_ref_volunteer_mgmt_match_volunteers_to_shifts.htm&language=en_US) actions. - **[Volunteer Management Agent Considerations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_agent_considerations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To use Volunteer Management Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. - **[Set Up the Volunteer Management Agent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The Volunteer Management Agent helps your team manage volunteer shift capacity and coverage. Configure the Shift Capacity and Coverage subagent to add those capabilities to an Agentforce Employee Agent. - **[Use the Shift Capacity and Coverage Subagent](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_use_the_volunteer_management_agent.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Shift Capacity and Coverage subagent to find underfilled volunteer shifts, review open roles, and identify available volunteers who match those roles. Volunteer managers can access the agent from any page in the Nonprofit Cloud CRM. # Volunteer Management Agent Considerations To use Volunteer Management Agent, consider supported functionality, usage, limitations and allowances, limits, and other issues. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited and Developer Editions with an Agentforce or Einstein for Sales, Service, Platform, or Industry add-on license, where Volunteer Management is enabled. Requires each user to have the Agentforce or Einstein add-on to access the actions.
## Language and Locale Support Volunteer Management Agent supports the languages and locales supported on the Salesforce generative AI platform, as described in [Einstein Generative AI Supported Languages and Locales](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_platform_languages.htm&language=en_US). ## Large Language Model Support Volunteer Management Agent supports OpenAI GPT-4o (GPT 4 Omni). See [Large Language Model Support](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.generative_ai_large_language_model_support.htm&language=en_US). ## Einstein Trust Layer Service Support Volunteer Management Agent supports the Trust Layer services supported by the [Agentforce Employee Agent type](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.agent_employee_agent_considerations.htm&language=en_US&type=5). ## Usage Types Billed By Volunteer Management Agent Volunteer Management Agent uses generative AI and Data 360 to ingest, store, and process data. You’re billed in these categories when you use Volunteer Management Agent. Before deployment, work with your Salesforce account team to confirm license availability and plan credit usage. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_cloud-264-0-0-production-enus/b335b49f-b06d-4153-a454-da90077289d9/images/icon_tip.png) Tip This feature has access to Digital Wallet, an account management tool, available at no additional cost, that offers near real-time consumption data for enabled products across your active contracts. Access Digital Wallet and start tracking your org’s usage. To learn more, see [About Digital Wallet](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=xcloud.wallet_about.htm&language=en_US). | Digital Wallet Card | Usage Type | Description | Notes | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Flex Credits | Standard Action | Usage is determined by the number of standard agent actions. | See [Flex Credits Billable Usage Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.usage_flex_credits.htm&language=en_US). | When you use Volunteer Management Agent, credits can be consumed in usage types on other consumption cards by related features such as [Agentforce Data Library or Audit and Feedback](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=ai.data_library_parent.htm&language=en_US). # Volunteer Management AI Skills Reference Use these skills to set up and configure Volunteer Management by using an AI agent. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Agentforce 1 Nonprofit editions with a Volunteer Management license.
| Skill | Description | Availability | Sample Prompt | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | industries-volunteermanagementsettings-configure | Turns on the Volunteer Management module and assigns the Manage Volunteer Data permission set to admin and standard users. | [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html) | "Set up Volunteer Management for my org." | | nonprofit-volunteer-management-model-get | Provides the agent with a reference model of the Volunteer Management object hierarchy. Encodes object purposes, object relationships, field-level security, and design principles such as "start simple." Maps how user intent translates to the correct objects and fields. All other Volunteer Management skills reference this one. | [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html) | "Help me understand how Volunteer Management objects relate to each other." | | nonprofit-volunteer-management-structure-generate | Interviews you about your volunteer programs and classifies each program type. Asks about scheduling, roles, skill requirements, capacity, and locations. Recommends a record structure including whether you need a Volunteer Initiative hierarchy, reusable Position templates, shifts, and qualifications. Explains the trade-offs and waits for your confirmation before proceeding. | [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html) | "I have 3 volunteer programs with different scheduling. Help me structure them correctly." | | nonprofit-volunteer-management-records-create | Creates and populates records based on your confirmed structure plan. Classifies fields by importance and identifies which fields are required. Provides guidance for each field before creating records with your input. Creates records in the correct dependency order. | [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html) | "Create the records for my weekly food distribution program." | ## Skill Availability All Volunteer Management skills are available through the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). For Agentforce Vibes, skills load automatically when you authenticate. For Claude Code, install the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) to access skills through hosted MCP servers. ## Objects Created Depending on your program structure, the agent can create records for the these Volunteer Management objects. - **Competency:** Skills or certifications that volunteers can hold, such as food safety certification or CPR training. - **Volunteer Initiative:** A container for volunteer programs. Programs can be organized in a parent-child hierarchy for programs with multiple sub-programs. - **Position:** A reusable template for volunteer roles that appear across multiple programs or locations, such as a Distribution Lead. - **Job Position:** A specific role within a Volunteer Initiative, with defined capacity and optional qualification requirements. - **Job Position Shift:** A time-bound assignment block within a Job Position, such as a Saturday 7 AM to 10 AM setup shift. - **Position Qualification / Job Position Qualification:** Links a Competency to a Position or Job Position to define the qualifications volunteers need for that role. # Volunteer Management AI Tools Considerations Admins and SI partners ask an agent to turn on Volunteer Management, assign permissions, plan a volunteer program structure, and create records. Work from the command line or another agent channel to go from a blank org to an operational volunteer program. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available with: Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, and Agentforce 1 Nonprofit editions with a Volunteer Management license.
Volunteer Management has a flexible data model that supports any nonprofit's volunteering needs. That flexibility can also be a barrier when you don't know which objects to use, how they connect, or when to introduce complexity. With headless setup, an agent interviews you about your programs and recommends the right configuration. The agent navigates the data model so you can focus on your volunteer programs. The agent uses four complementary skills. One skill handles org configuration and permissions. Another encodes the data model so the agent understands object relationships and design principles. A third skill interviews you about your programs and recommends a record structure. The fourth skill creates and populates records based on your confirmed plan. See [Volunteer Management AI Skills Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_ai_tools_setup_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these skills to set up and configure Volunteer Management by using an AI agent.") for skill details. ## Scenario Carlos is an SI partner supporting Bridges Community Alliance, a mid-size nonprofit with 50 staff and 200 active volunteers. Bridges runs weekly food distribution events, monthly community clean-ups, and a year-round youth mentoring program. Each program has different volunteer roles, shift patterns, and skill requirements. **The problem:** Setting up Volunteer Management requires deep familiarity with the object hierarchy, configuration patterns, and data model design principles. Carlos doesn't have that expertise and doesn't want to over-build or under-build the system. **The solution:** Carlos asks an agent to set up Volunteer Management. The agent enables the module, assigns permissions, and interviews Carlos about each program. For the food distribution, the agent recommends a Volunteer Initiative, Job Positions, and Job Position Shifts. It also recommends a Position template for the reusable Distribution Lead role. **The outcome:** Carlos goes from a blank org to a fully configured volunteer program. Manual setup steps that took days now take hours. The agent logs every configuration decision and surfaces the remaining manual steps for Carlos. ## Requirements - Enterprise, Unlimited, Developer, or Agentforce 1 edition - Nonprofit Cloud which includes a Volunteer Management license - Admin profile - Person Accounts enabled (recommended) - Claude Code with the Salesforce CLI, or Agentforce Vibes ## Suggested Technology and Experience Use Claude Code with the Salesforce CLI or Agentforce Vibes connected to your org. Agentforce Vibes installs, enables, and updates AI Skills automatically. Claude Code uses the [Salesforce Development plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) to provide Salesforce-specific skills and org context through hosted Model Context Protocol (MCP) servers. Connect to the [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html). Then, describe the org that you want to set up. The coding agent configures the baseline settings. After the agent turns on Volunteer Management and assigns the permission sets, ask the agent to complete tasks so you can use Volunteer Management. These Volunteer Management skills support this use case. See [Volunteer Management AI Skills Reference](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_ai_tools_setup_ref.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use these skills to set up and configure Volunteer Management by using an AI agent.") for details, parameters, and sample prompts. | Skill | Purpose | Availability | Required | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | industries-volunteermanagementsettings-configure | Turns on Volunteer Management and assigns permission sets. | Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) | Yes | | nonprofit-volunteer-management-model-get | Provides the agent with a reference model of the Volunteer Management object hierarchy, relationships, and design principles. All other skills reference this one. | Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) | Yes | | nonprofit-volunteer-management-structure-generate | Interviews you about your volunteer programs, classifies each program type, and recommends a record structure. | Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) | Yes | | nonprofit-volunteer-management-records-create | Creates and populates records based on your confirmed structure. Provides guidance on required and recommended fields. | Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta) | Yes | Recommended for Salesforce admins and SI partners comfortable navigating Salesforce setup. You don’t need prior Volunteer Management experience. Intermediate-level Salesforce knowledge is helpful. ## Related Documentation - [Salesforce Development Plugin](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/salesforce-skills-plugins/guide/overview.html) - [Headless 360 MCP Server (Beta)](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/platform/hosted-mcp-servers/guide/headless-360-mcp.html) - [Salesforce Skills Repository](https://github.com/forcedotcom/sf-skills/tree/main/skills) - [Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Volunteer Management to streamline program management, enhance the volunteer experience, track hours, and report metrics. In Experience Cloud, create a portal to post opportunities for volunteers to browse, search, and sign up for volunteer opportunities.") - [Set Up Volunteer Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_set_up_volunteer_management.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Set up Volunteer Management for your organization. Assign permissions, turn on the feature, configure locations and operating hours, and set a default status for job position assignments.") ## Agent Tips **Recommended prompts** - "Help me set up Volunteer Management from scratch." - Add Distribution Center to the LocationType values. - "I have 3 volunteer programs with different scheduling. Help me structure them correctly." - "Help me understand how Volunteer Management objects relate to each other." - "Help me plan Volunteer Management." - "Create job positions in my org." - "Add five weekly shifts to the \[volunteer initiative name\] job positions." - "We need food safety certification as a requirement for our Distribution Lead role." **Approvals** The agent asks for your confirmation before enabling features, assigning permissions, or creating records. Review each recommendation before you approve it. The agent recommends a structure and explains the trade-offs. You decide whether to proceed. **You provide the context** Describe your volunteer programs, including scheduling patterns, volunteer roles, qualification requirements, locations, and capacity per role. The more detail that you provide, the better the agent's recommendations. You don't need to know Volunteer Management terminology. Describe your programs in your own words. **Interaction pattern** Start with a broad request, such as "Help me set up Volunteer Management." The agent asks questions to clarify details about your programs, proposes a structure, and waits for your confirmation before creating records. Work through one program at a time for the best results. ## Design Considerations - Volunteer Management recommends the use of Person Accounts. If Person Accounts aren't on, the agent recommends turning them on but doesn't block the setup. - Create recurring shifts individually. The recurrence engine doesn’t fully support Volunteer Management, so the agent creates each shift as a separate record. - The agent acts with the permissions of the authenticated user and can't exceed them. - The agent queries existing records before creating ones to avoid duplicates. If your org has Volunteer Management data, the agent accounts for it. - These skills address Volunteer Management setup and structure. The skills don’t include day-to-day operations such as matching, shift filling, and assignment workflows. - The skills are for Agentforce for Nonprofit Volunteer Management. They don't apply to Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) or Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S). # Volunteer Management Editions and Permissions Review the supported products and editions for Volunteer Management. Then learn about how your product handles permissions and how to assign them. - [User Interface](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Editions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Required Volunteer Management Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) - [Customizing Permissions](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.volunteer_mgmt_editions_and_permissions.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) ## User Interface The Volunteer Management feature is available in Lightning Experience. ## Editions Volunteer Management is available in Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions. ## Required Volunteer Management Permissions To use Volunteer Management, Salesforce admins and users need the permission set. Typically, a Salesforce admin assigns a permission set or permission set group, which includes this user permission. Multiple products include this feature. The products and licenses in your Salesforce org determine which permission set or permissions set group is available. Review the Volunteer Management permission sets.
Permission Set Available In These Products Notes
Manage Volunteer Data
  • Nonprofit Cloud
  • Education Cloud
 This permission set gives access to the Volunteer Management permission set license, user permissions, and all objects and fields.
Manage Volunteer Work in Experience Cloud
  • Nonprofit Cloud
  • Education Cloud
 Assign this permission set to people who use Volunteer Management features in an Experience Cloud portal.
Volunteer Management in Experience Cloud Guest Access
  • Nonprofit Cloud
  • Education Cloud
 Create a customized muting permission set to allow guest users to sign up for volunteer opportunities with Volunteer Management in Experience Cloud.
Don't see your product here? Contact your account executive for more information. To see what’s included in a permission set, click **View Summary** on the permission set’s detail page in Setup. Review your cloud’s documentation, too. ## Customizing Permissions If you customize this feature, such as adding fields, create a custom permission set. To remove user permissions from the default permission set, create a muting permission set. Then, use permission set groups to assign users the default permission set in addition to your custom permission sets and muting permission set. This approach makes sure that users always have the latest default permissions and is an alternative to cloning permission sets. SEE ALSO: - [Manage Permission Set Assignments](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_sets_manage_assignments.htm&language=en_US) - [Muting Permission Sets](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups_muting.htm&language=en_US) - [Permission Set Groups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=platform.perm_set_groups.htm&language=en_US) # Volunteers for Salesforce (Managed Package) Release Notes Volunteers for Salesforce pages are now compliant with the color contrast requirements of Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.1. The compliance improves accessibility for users who find it difficult to differentiate between some color combinations. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-sfdo_release_notes_238_246-264-0-0-production-enus/830d4be9-0622-467c-a27f-f6b75050abf0/images/icon_note.png) Note This release is in preview. Features described in this document don't become generally available until the latest general availability date that Salesforce announces for this release. Before then, and where features are noted as beta, pilot, or developer preview, we can't guarantee general availability within any particular time frame or at all. Make your purchase decisions only on the basis of generally available products and features. Linked documentation might not include the new features or the links in these release notes might not work yet. **Where:** This change applies to Lightning Experience in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer editions where Volunteers for Salesforce is installed. # Volunteers for Salesforce and Your Salesforce Instance Volunteers for Salesforce uses some standard Salesforce objects—Contacts and Campaigns—to manage volunteers. Volunteers for Salesforce also introduces custom objects into your Salesforce org.
Type of Object Object Name Description
Standard Contact Represents a volunteer.
Campaign Represents a volunteer event or initiative.
Custom Volunteer Job Tracks jobs to fill and skills needed.
Volunteer Shift Tracks dates, times, and number of volunteers needed for a job.
Volunteer Hours Tracks the hours a volunteer spends with your organization.
Job Recurrence Schedule Sets up a series of recurring Shifts for a job.
Volunteer Recurrence Schedule Sets up a recurring schedule for a specific volunteer on a specific job.
This diagram shows how some of the V4S objects work together: ![Structure of how objects are used in V4S.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/nonprofit_volunteer_management_structure.png) ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important The Volunteers for Salesforce articles assume that the Admin for your org performed all required setup. If you see differences in the way your instance looks, or you notice fields are missing, talk to your Admin and point them to that documentation. - **[Getting Around in Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_intro_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can find the Volunteers for Salesforce app in the App Launcher. - **[New Fields Added to Standard Objects](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_user_intro_salesforce.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Contacts in Volunteers for Salesforce are used to track volunteers. It's important to have additional data on those Contacts that is specific to volunteer management. ## Getting Around in Volunteers for Salesforce You can find the Volunteers for Salesforce app in the App Launcher. 1. Click the App Launcher ( ![App launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png) ) at the end of the navigation bar in Salesforce. 2. Click Volunteers. ![Volunteers in the App Launcher menu](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4s_in_app_menu.png) Within the Volunteers app, you see the Volunteers tabs. ![Tabs that show up in the Volunteers app](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4s_tabs.png) - **Volunteers Help**—Go to the V4S Help page. - **Volunteers Wizard**—Create new Campaigns, Jobs, and Shifts. - **Volunteer Jobs**—Manage volunteer Jobs. - **Shift Calendar**—See all volunteer Shifts in a calendar view. - **Find Volunteers**—Filter volunteers to find the right one for the Job. ## New Fields Added to Standard Objects Contacts in Volunteers for Salesforce are used to track volunteers. It's important to have additional data on those Contacts that is specific to volunteer management. Volunteers for Salesforce introduces these new fields on Contacts: - Volunteer Status - Volunteer Skills - Volunteer Availability - Volunteer Hours - Volunteer Notes - Volunteer Organization - Volunteer Manager Notes - First Volunteer Date - Last Volunteer Date - Volunteer Last Web Signup Date - Volunteer Auto-Reminder Email Opt Out ![Volunteer fields on the Contact record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/contact_volunteer_fields.png) Volunteers for Salesforce introduces these new fields on Campaigns: - Number of Volunteers - Volunteer Completed Hours - Volunteers Still Needed - Volunteer Jobs - Volunteer Shifts - Volunteer Website Time Zone ![Volunteer fields on a Campaign record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/campaign_volunteer_fields.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note These fields must be added to the appropriate page layouts by the Admin for your Salesforce org. For details, see [Configure Fields in Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_config_fields.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize and configure fields in Volunteers for Salesforce to fit the needs of your organization."). # Volunteers for Salesforce Entity Relationship Diagram This diagram shows the relationship between Volunteers for Salesforce Custom Objects and Salesforce Standard Objects. [Volunteers for Salesforce Entity Relationship Diagram](https://s3-us-west-2.amazonaws.com/sfdo-docs/V4S_Entity_Relationship_Diagram.pdf) (in PDF format) # Volunteers for Salesforce FAQ Review some frequently asked questions for using, administering, and troubleshooting Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[General](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out some frequently asked questions for using Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Administration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Check out some frequently asked questions for administering Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Troubleshooting](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review solutions to common issues that occur in Volunteers for Salesforce. ## General Check out some frequently asked questions for using Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Do I have to use Volunteer Job Shifts?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** No. Volunteers for Salesforce works with or without Shifts. You can just track volunteer activity at the Job level if you don't want to use Shifts. - **[How do I track Jobs that aren't tied to a specific event or Campaign?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce requires that Jobs are created as children of a Campaign. This allows the application to provide rollup summary information about Volunteers and their Hours. For Jobs that aren't tied to a specific event, simply create a placeholder Volunteer Campaign. For example, you might create a Campaign called Office Volunteer Jobs and use it to track all of the ongoing office Jobs that your volunteers help with. - **[How should I manage Jobs and Shifts that occur on a regular basis?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce supports Job Recurrence Schedules (JRS) and Volunteer Recurrence Schedules (VRS). With a JRS, you can set up Job Shifts that repeat into the future at a schedule you specify. With a VRS, you can easily schedule a volunteer for a specific repeating Job or Shift. - **[Does Volunteers for Salesforce include rollup summary fields?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Yes. Volunteers for Salesforce adds the following rollup summary fields. - **[How do I make sure that Shifts show the correct time zone to the user viewing the Shift on my website?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are multiple factors that affect time zones in Volunteers for Salesforce, so it's important to understand how they work. - **[What kind of Salesforce user license do I need to use Volunteers for Salesforce?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use Volunteers for Salesforce with any Salesforce user license that has at least Read access to Campaigns. ### Do I have to use Volunteer Job Shifts? No. Volunteers for Salesforce works with or without Shifts. You can just track volunteer activity at the Job level if you don't want to use Shifts. ### How do I track Jobs that aren't tied to a specific event or Campaign? Volunteers for Salesforce requires that Jobs are created as children of a Campaign. This allows the application to provide rollup summary information about Volunteers and their Hours. For Jobs that aren't tied to a specific event, simply create a placeholder Volunteer Campaign. For example, you might create a Campaign called Office Volunteer Jobs and use it to track all of the ongoing office Jobs that your volunteers help with. ### How should I manage Jobs and Shifts that occur on a regular basis? Volunteers for Salesforce supports Job Recurrence Schedules (JRS) and Volunteer Recurrence Schedules (VRS). With a JRS, you can set up Job Shifts that repeat into the future at a schedule you specify. With a VRS, you can easily schedule a volunteer for a specific repeating Job or Shift. You can also use the Volunteers Wizard to copy Jobs and Shifts from one volunteer event to the next. This is useful if you have an annual event with similar or the same Jobs every time. ### Does Volunteers for Salesforce include rollup summary fields? Yes. Volunteers for Salesforce adds the following rollup summary fields.
Object # of Rollup Summary Fields
Campaign 5
Contact 3
Volunteer Jobs 5
By default, Salesforce limits you to 10 rollup summary fields per object. You can request that Salesforce increase your limit per object by entering a Case with Salesforce Support. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important If you have six or more Campaign rollup summary fields, Volunteers for Salesforce will fail to install. You must have Salesforce increase your rollup summary field limit before installing. ### How do I make sure that Shifts show the correct time zone to the user viewing the Shift on my website? There are multiple factors that affect time zones in Volunteers for Salesforce, so it's important to understand how they work. - When you save a Shift's Start Date and Time, Salesforce assumes the time zone specified in your Salesforce user account, and saves the Date and Time internally in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). - If a Salesforce user views the Shift in Salesforce, the Shift Start Date and Time is displayed in the time zone specified in that user's Salesforce account (even if it's a different time zone than yours). - When a person views the Shift on your website, either from the Job Calendar or Job Listing page, the Start Date and Time are based on the following (in order): - The Job's Volunteer Website Time Zone (if set) - The Campaign's Volunteer Website Time Zone (if set) - The Site Guest User Profile's Time Zone (if set) - GMT So, if the Jobs/Shifts for a particular Campaign are in multiple time zones because they are in different locations, set the Volunteer Website Time Zone on the Job to ensure that the Start Date and Time appear in the correct time zone for the user viewing the Shift. ### What kind of Salesforce user license do I need to use Volunteers for Salesforce? You can use Volunteers for Salesforce with any Salesforce user license that has at least Read access to Campaigns. ## Administration Check out some frequently asked questions for administering Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Can I add new fields to the Volunteer Signup form?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Yes. We provide versions of our signup pages that use Salesforce field sets. This allows you to customize which Contact fields appear on the forms. - **[I want to add some fields to the signup form using field sets. Can I make them required?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Salesforce only allows you to mark custom fields created in your org as required in field sets. Standard fields, such as Primary Address, and custom fields in the Volunteers for Salesforce package can't be marked as required. ### Can I add new fields to the Volunteer Signup form? Yes. We provide versions of our signup pages that use Salesforce field sets. This allows you to customize which Contact fields appear on the forms. For more information on customizing the signup form, see [Customize the Volunteer Signup Page](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_customize_volunteer_signup.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Customize the contents of the Volunteer Signup page, and make it look and feel like an integral part of your website."). ### I want to add some fields to the signup form using field sets. Can I make them required? Salesforce only allows you to mark custom fields created in your org as required in field sets. Standard fields, such as Primary Address, and custom fields in the Volunteers for Salesforce package can't be marked as required. ## Troubleshooting Review solutions to common issues that occur in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Why don't Shifts appear as full on my website even though the requested number of volunteers have signed up?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Web pages continue to display a signup link as long as the Shift's Volunteers Still Needed field is greater than zero. - **[Why is a new Contact created in Volunteers for Salesforce when an existing Contact signs up for the Job or Shift from the website?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The most likely cause of duplicate Contacts from web signups is Sharing Settings. If sharing is set to a restrictive setting (such as Private), the app can't see the existing Contact, so it creates a new one. - **[Why is the Volunteers for Salesforce app failing to install with the error "Apex Classes(org id) vol\_ctrl\_volunteersbulkenterhours.CodeCoverageTests() System.AssertException: Assertion Failed"?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand the tasks that our test code completes during installation. - **[Why can't some users create Volunteer records?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If Volunteers for Salesforce was installed without specifying Install for All Users, then only the profile of the person who installed Volunteers for Salesforce has access. If you haven't added data to Volunteers for Salesforce yet, uninstall and reinstall the package. Be sure to choose Install for All Users this time. - **[Why don't I see all the Volunteer Wizard fields?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** To see all the Volunteer Wizard fields, you must have access to them. Make sure your profile has access to the Volunteers for Salesforce application, its pages, and its objects and fields. - **[Why don't the Volunteer Sign Up and Job Listing pages work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Setting up Salesforce Sites and adjusting all permissions for the pages correctly can be tricky. - **[Why do I see an Authorization Required error when I look at my Sites pages or Personal Sites pages?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If there is an issue when a page loads, Salesforce displays its standard error page with error information. Because Sites pages are running without a logged in user, Salesforce won't display the standard error page and shows the Authorization Required error instead. We recommend testing your Sites pages while logged into your Salesforce instance so that you see the appropriate underlying error. - **[Why do I see an error about External Signup Url fields?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You may see an error, like the one below, about External Signup Url fields when you edit a Volunteer Job record, create a new Job Recurrence Schedule or Volunteer Recurrence Schedule, or manually process the Recurrence Schedules batch. Additionally, your volunteers may see this error when they attempt to edit their hours on your Volunteer site. - **[Site Guest User Email Issue](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_faq.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you create a Salesforce site, Salesforce automatically creates a site guest user. In any site created before the Salesforce Summer '21 release, the email address for the site guest user record was that of the Salesforce user who created the site. After the Salesforce Summer '21 release, the system generates a dummy email address to use in the site guest user record. If you plan to use the guest site user as the sender of automated emails triggered by workflow rules, you must update the site guest user email address to a valid email. ### Why don't Shifts appear as full on my website even though the requested number of volunteers have signed up? Web pages continue to display a signup link as long as the Shift's Volunteers Still Needed field is greater than zero. Only volunteers with a Volunteer Hours Status of `Confirmed` or `Completed` count against this number. By default, people who sign up on your website using a signup link have a Volunteer Hours Status of `Web Sign Up` (this ensures they get emails), but that means these signups don't count against the **Volunteers Still Needed** amount. To get the Shift to display as full, do one of the following: - Manually change Volunteer Hours with the Status `Web Sign Up` to `Confirmed` - Reduce the Number of **Volunteers Still Needed** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note If you want web signups to automatically be set to `Confirmed`, you can write a workflow rule to update the Volunteer Hours Status. For more information, see [Configure How Volunteers for Salesforce Handles Sign-Ups](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_vol_signups.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Streamline your volunteer sign-up process by setting up automation such as automated confirmations or record creation rules."). ### Why is a new Contact created in Volunteers for Salesforce when an existing Contact signs up for the Job or Shift from the website? The most likely cause of duplicate Contacts from web signups is Sharing Settings. If sharing is set to a restrictive setting (such as Private), the app can't see the existing Contact, so it creates a new one. To resolve this issue: 1. From Setup, enter Sharing Settings in the Quick Find box, then click **Sharing Settings**. 2. Ensure that the Default Internal Sharing is set as follows: - **Account**: Public Read/Write - **Contact**: Controlled by Parent or Public Read/Write - **Campaign**: Public Read/Write or Public Full Access 3. Click **Save**. ![Important](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_important.png) Important The changes above have implications for your entire organization. The suggested settings mean that all users in your org can access all Accounts, Contacts, and Campaigns. Most nonprofits want that level of transparency, but some may be concerned about keeping donor information private to only certain members of the team. So proceed with caution and make sure that changing these settings won't interfere with your org's intentions. And keep in mind that there are ways of hiding information while keeping these objects public, such as hiding specific fields by profile. ### Why is the Volunteers for Salesforce app failing to install with the error "Apex Classes(org id) vol\_ctrl\_volunteersbulkenterhours.CodeCoverageTests() System.AssertException: Assertion Failed"? Understand the tasks that our test code completes during installation. - Creates an Account - Creates a Contact - Creates a Campaign - Adds the Contact to the Campaign - Tests the specific volunteer objects (Jobs, Shifts, Hours) If you don't have Create and Edit permissions on all of these objects, the installation fails. Make sure that a System Administrator installs V4S, since they have appropriate permissions. Additionally, if you have any required fields or validation rules on any of these objects, they may prevent the app from creating the objects listed above, and therefore, tests may not run successfully. ### Why can't some users create Volunteer records? If Volunteers for Salesforce was installed without specifying Install for All Users, then only the profile of the person who installed Volunteers for Salesforce has access. If you haven't added data to Volunteers for Salesforce yet, uninstall and reinstall the package. Be sure to choose Install for All Users this time. ![Select Install for All Users](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4s_faq_install.png) If you have volunteer data in V4S that you need to preserve, manually enable the following for each custom profile that needs access (you can't modify these values on standard Salesforce profiles). ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/images/icon_note.png) Note This section assumes you're using the Enhanced Profile User Interface. If you're using the Original Profile User Interface, these settings are in different areas. - **Assigned Apps**—Make sure Volunteers is set as Visible. - **Object Settings**—For each V4S object (Volunteer Jobs, Volunteer Shifts, Volunteer Hours, Job Recurrence Schedules, Volunteer Recurrence Schedules, Contacts, Leads, and Campaigns), edit as follows: - Set Tab Settings to Visible - Assign V4S record types and page layouts. - Set object permissions to Read, Create, Edit, Delete. - Set field permissions on all V4S fields to Read and Edit. - **Apex Class Access**—Make sure all classes that start with the prefix `GW_Volunteers` are added to the Enabled Apex Classes. - **Visualforce Page Access**—Make sure that all pages that start with the prefix `GW_Volunteers` are added to the Enabled Visualforce Pages. ### Why don't I see all the Volunteer Wizard fields? To see all the Volunteer Wizard fields, you must have access to them. Make sure your profile has access to the Volunteers for Salesforce application, its pages, and its objects and fields. ### Why don't the Volunteer Sign Up and Job Listing pages work? Setting up Salesforce Sites and adjusting all permissions for the pages correctly can be tricky. You should carefully review Make Volunteers for Salesforce Part of Your Website, starting with [Decide Which Pages to Add to Your Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_website_decide_pages.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Which Volunteers for Salesforce pages do you want to make available on your website? Pick and choose the ones that make sense. They work independently of each other.") and ensure you followed the steps exactly as written. Here's a list of common issues we've seen people run into: - When the package was installed, security wasn't granted to all users. - The Site was created, but wasn't activated. - You filled in the Default Web Address field when editing your Site, but didn't account for it in the URL. - Your Site wasn't set up to work in an iFrame. - The permissions for your site weren't correctly set (in the Site's Guest User Profile). - The Sharing Settings for the Campaign are set to Private. - The Volunteer objects are marked as In Development instead of Deployed. This can happen if you're upgrading from a very old version and forgot to deploy the package. ### Why do I see an Authorization Required error when I look at my Sites pages or Personal Sites pages? If there is an issue when a page loads, Salesforce displays its standard error page with error information. Because Sites pages are running without a logged in user, Salesforce won't display the standard error page and shows the Authorization Required error instead. We recommend testing your Sites pages while logged into your Salesforce instance so that you see the appropriate underlying error. ### Why do I see an error about External Signup Url fields? You may see an error, like the one below, about External Signup Url fields when you edit a Volunteer Job record, create a new Job Recurrence Schedule or Volunteer Recurrence Schedule, or manually process the Recurrence Schedules batch. Additionally, your volunteers may see this error when they attempt to edit their hours on your Volunteer site. ``` Insert failed. First exception on row 0; first error: FIELD_CUSTOM_VALIDATION_EXCEPTION, Please enter a valid URL: [External_Signup_Url__c], ``` This error occurs if the External Signup Url field values on the Volunteer Job object don't start with http, https, or mailto. To resolve this issue: 1. Fix the problematic External Signup Url values. We recommend using a report to identify them. 1. Create a custom report using the Volunteer Jobs with Shifts & Hours report type. 2. Add External Signup URL as a column. 3. Add a filter for External Signup URL, with the Operator set to Does not contain, and the value set to http,https,mailto. 2. [Run the batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Automatic scheduling of Jobs and volunteers into the future saves a ton of repetitive data entry."). Alternatively, you can temporarily disable the validation rule: 1. In Setup, click the **Object Manager** tab. 2. Click **Volunteer Job**, then click **Validation Rules**. 3. Click **Edit** in the row for ValidateExternalSignupUrl. 4. Temporarily deactivate this validation rule by deselecting the **Active** checkbox. 5. [Run the batch](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_setup_config_recurring_jobs_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Automatic scheduling of Jobs and volunteers into the future saves a ton of repetitive data entry."). 6. Activate the ValidateExternalSignupUrl validation rule. ### Site Guest User Email Issue When you create a Salesforce site, Salesforce automatically creates a site guest user. In any site created before the Salesforce Summer '21 release, the email address for the site guest user record was that of the Salesforce user who created the site. After the Salesforce Summer '21 release, the system generates a dummy email address to use in the site guest user record. If you plan to use the guest site user as the sender of automated emails triggered by workflow rules, you must update the site guest user email address to a valid email. From your site, click **Public Access Settings**, then **Assigned Users**. Click **Edit** next to the site guest user name and update the email address. For more information, see the [Salesforce Summer '21 Release Notes.](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=release-notes.rn_experiences_update_guest_email.htm&type=5&release=232) # Volunteers for Salesforce Feature Telemetry Volunteers for Salesforce Feature Telemetry collects feature and usage metrics when customers use our products. These metrics give Salesforce.org valuable insights into how our customers are using Volunteers for Salesforce. We use this information to understand usage and adoption of various Volunteers for Salesforce features. We do not collect personally identifiable information through V4S Feature Telemetry. The only information we collect is related to what features an organization enables. Three data types can be collected: Boolean (true/false), Integer (a whole number), and Date (MM/YY). We currently collect Boolean and Integer data. V4S Feature Telemetry is collected during the push upgrade process. Here’s a list of data we’re currently collecting: - Count of Campaigns that have Volunteer Jobs associated with them - Count of Contacts with Volunteer Last Web Signup Date field populated - Count of Contacts with Volunteer Last Web Signup Date within 365 days - Count of Volunteer Jobs created within 365 days - Count of Volunteer Jobs where Display on Website checkbox is checked - Count of all Volunteer Shifts - Count of Volunteer Shifts created within 365 days - Count of Job Recurrence Schedules - Is Grant Guest Users Update Access enabled To give you a better picture of what the data looks like, here’s a sample telemetry record: ![Screenshot of Feature Parameter that details which data is being collected.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/v4stelemetryscreenshot.png) For information about your privacy and how feature management works, read: - [Salesforce.Org Privacy Policy](https://www.salesforce.org/legal-information/privacy-policy/) - [Salesforce Feature Management](https://developer.salesforce.com/docs/atlas.en-us.packagingguide.meta/packagingguide/fma_manage_features.htm) # Volunteers for Salesforce Managed Package Manage your volunteering programs, events, and people by using the Volunteers for Salesforce managed package. Track and view volunteers, jobs, shifts, and more, all in one location, making it easy to match volunteers’ skills and availability with the right opportunities. Create a site that constituents can use to find volunteer opportunities and sign up for shifts, and that saves the data in Salesforce. - **[Learn About Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_learn.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how Volunteers for Salesforce helps your organization manage volunteer activities, and learn about the supporting data model. - **[Get Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_get.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Whether you’re an existing Salesforce user or a new Trailblazer, learn how to get and install Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Configure Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_configure.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up volunteers’ skills and availability, job scheduling, notifications, and other fields. Then, test your configuration to confirm that it suits your organization’s needs. - **[Set Up a Volunteers for Salesforce Website](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_set_up_web.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and customize your website to provide a self-service portal for volunteers, and determine who can access information. - **[Manage Volunteers for Salesforce Events](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_manage_events.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Set up single or recurring events in Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[Manage Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_track_vols.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand which objects you use to manage volunteers and how to set up people, skills, and shifts. Access prebuilt reports and dashboards that show your organization’s volunteering activities. - **[Engage Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_engage_volunteers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Connect with your volunteers by sending emails, and set up your website to help volunteers learn about opportunities. - **[General Volunteers for Salesforce Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_gen_info.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Review some frequently asked questions about Volunteers for Salesforce, and learn how to access release resources, collect metrics, and more. - **[GDPR for Volunteers for Salesforce](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_gdpr.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Understand how the European Union General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) affects Volunteers for Salesforce. - **[For Developers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.v4s_for_developers.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Volunteers for Salesforce is an open source, BSD-licensed package. Developer contributions and involvement are welcomed and encouraged. All packages and source are currently hosted on GitHub using git. # Volunteers for Salesforce Objects and Fields Learn what custom objects and fields are included in Volunteers for Salesforce. This is a useful resource for developers and admins to explore and understand the Volunteers for Salesforce data schema in depth. View [Volunteers for Salesforce Objects and Fields](https://salesforce.quip.com/FEp0AOdWp5tc#LKMACABlJRr) (best viewed in the Quip app, Google Chrome browser, or Mozilla Firefox browser). # Volunteers for Salesforce Winter '23 Release Notes Learn what's in Volunteers for Salesforce (version 3.122) in Winter ‘23. ## Changes We made several security enhancements, which could change what's on a user's screen. If your users aren't seeing what they expect, check to make sure they have access to these fields: - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Job\_\_c - Name - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Campaign\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Display\_On\_Website\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Website\_Time\_Zone\_\_c - Account - Name - Contact - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Hours\_\_c - Email - When NPSP is installed - npe01\_\_AlternateEmail\_\_c - npe01\_\_HomeEmail\_\_c - npe01\_\_WorkEmail\_\_c - Campaign - Name - IsActive - StartDate - RecordTypeId - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Website\_Time\_Zone\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Hours\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Shift\_Start\_Date\_Time\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Contact\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Hours\_Worked\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Status\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Start\_Date\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Shift\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Start\_Date\_Time\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Duration\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Volunteer\_Job\_\_c - GW\_Volunteers\_\_Description\_\_c # Ways to Transfer Your Accounting Data Accounting Subledger creates accounting data that you can transfer to your accounting software with minimal effort via reports or integration.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
- **[Export via Reports](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_ways_transfer_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Export accounting data into a CSV file, edit that file as needed, and then import it into the destination system. We recommend this method when you want to review accounting data before import. - **[Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_ways_transfer_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** There are multiple ways to import Accounting Subledger's data automatically into your accounting system. - **[Considerations for Reports and Integration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_ways_transfer_data.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** In Accounting Subledger, you can create custom objects and fields to generate transaction journal records. Make sure that you add your new custom fields to your integration or export reports. ## Export via Reports Export accounting data into a CSV file, edit that file as needed, and then import it into the destination system. We recommend this method when you want to review accounting data before import. To have the latest accounting data, you can start the Accounting Subledger job manually to generate transaction journal records. Refer to your accounting software's documentation for information on required data and formatting. ## Integration There are multiple ways to import Accounting Subledger's data automatically into your accounting system. - Develop a custom integration solution to send or retrieve accounting data on a defined cadence, typically using Apex on the Salesforce side. Some accounting software allows for code execution on the same server. - Use a middleware solution (such as Mulesoft) that moves data between systems automatically. - Some accounting systems are built directly on the Salesforce platform. Additional development can be required to ensure data compatibility. You can automate as much or as little of the process as you like. If you're not sure where to begin, contact Salesforce Customer Support for recommendations on partners experienced in automation, specifically with Accounting Subledger. Keep in mind these considerations when setting up an integration. - Custom solutions offer greater control over the integration, but require someone to write and maintain them over time. Don't think of a developed solution as a one-and-done solution. - Middleware is often simple to set up and maintain, but comes with additional cost. And not all middleware solutions are alike; some solutions are more complicated and require advanced expertise. ## Considerations for Reports and Integration In Accounting Subledger, you can create custom objects and fields to generate transaction journal records. Make sure that you add your new custom fields to your integration or export reports. If you enable multiple currencies, you can add currency-related fields to your integration or export reports. Keep in mind these behaviors. - Salesforce adds a Currency field to every object with a field of the currency data type. This field contains the currency code of the record's primary currency, such as USD, MXN, or GBP. - Every field of the currency data type has a counterpart with (converted) appended to the field label. For example, Accounting Subledger has a Debit Amount field, and enabling multiple currencies creates a Debit Amount (converted) field. To display the conversion rate on a record, create a custom field on the Transaction Journal object with these values: - Name: Exchange Rate - Type: Formula (Number) - Formula: CURRENCYRATE(TEXT(CurrencyIsoCode)) See [Manage Multiple Currencies](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=admin_currency.htm&type=5). # Website Integration—A Tag Team Event Use Salesforce features and tools and streamline working with your web developer to integrate your website. A lot of folks find website integration intimidating because it touches Visualforce, Apex, and other parts of Salesforce that involve code. While it's more involved than the installation and configuration you've done so far, you don't have to do it alone. Website integration is a tag team event in which you and your web developer work together, in sequence. You lay the groundwork on the Salesforce side of things by using a Salesforce feature called Sites to create web pages that display the V4S data that you want to make public. The V4S Sites pages contain the content. How then does the web developer embed the V4S pages into your public website? The answer, friends, is IFRAMEs. They're HTML tags, with each tag representing a page of Volunteers for Salesforce content. You give the IFRAME tags to your developer, who inserts them into the HTML of your organization's webpages—essentially creating a page within a page. Here's how you and your web developer work together to make the pages go live on your website. ![A diagram showing what parts of the website setup an admin is responsible for, and which parts a developer helps with](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-volunteers_for_salesforce-264-0-0-production-enus/1854165a-1e96-498b-9cfb-c6516fed9d92/volunteers_for_salesforce/images/website_responsibilities.png) # Welcome to Accounting Subledger: From CRM to Finance Give accounting teams neatly packaged financial CRM data for record keeping.
REQUIRED EDITIONS
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions with Accounting Subledger
- **[Financial Insights Are More Important Than Ever Before](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_welcome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you capture financial information within Salesforce, you want to be able to share it with accountants, leadership teams, and others who can act on accurate, up-to-date information that complies with financial reporting standards. You want a complete view of your company or institution's financial situation, so you know where it stands and make informed decisions. - **[A Higher Ed Perspective](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_welcome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Accounting Subledger to scale your university's accounting processes. - **[A Fundraising Perspective](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.asl_welcome.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Accounting Subledger to manage the fundraising tasks for your nonprofit organization. ## Financial Insights Are More Important Than Ever Before When you capture financial information within Salesforce, you want to be able to share it with accountants, leadership teams, and others who can act on accurate, up-to-date information that complies with financial reporting standards. You want a complete view of your company or institution's financial situation, so you know where it stands and make informed decisions. This task is already a tall order when you have only a few sources of revenue and expense. It becomes exponentially harder when you have to monitor many incoming and outgoing streams. Various departments typically have their own processes and timelines for entering and tracking funds. Allocations to different fund accounts in the back office can be a mystery to a Salesforce admin who's far removed from finance management. And accounting teams often have to reconcile the differences whenever they receive disparate or incomplete data, making it harder to close the books each month. In short, your finance and accounting teams must efficiently forecast and project revenue, but limited business visibility and siloed processes make it difficult. Accounting Subledger bridges this ever-growing gap between accounting and other departments, with features that enable your teams to: - Improve communication and partnership with finance and accounting. - Access and act on insights from your financial data. - Hone strategy to maximize resources and drive financial impact while maintaining compliance. - Discover and address financial challenges with accurate, up-to-date financial projections. - Generate debits and credits from Salesforce records—automatically formatted for export to your accounting systems. Accounting Subledger supports cash and accrual accounting. Cash accounting tracks funds only when they’re received or disbursed. Accrual accounting tracks funds after they’re committed, meaning there's a binding legal promise that the funds will be paid or disbursed. In both cases, we track the initial information for accounting and make adjustments whenever changes occur. Set fund account allocations as granularly as you need them—even down to the payment. No need to create separate records for one payment with a different allocation split! And track expense data as well. Let's peek into a couple of institutions to see Accounting Subledger in action. ## A Higher Ed Perspective Use Accounting Subledger to scale your university's accounting processes. As the Salesforce admin for Astro University, Maria works with many different teams across campus who track incoming revenue and outgoing expense transactions in Salesforce such as for: - Application fees - Advancement efforts - Licensing revenue - Scholarship funds - Student services These teams generate data in Salesforce and then manually export it to third-party systems that collect, organize, and format the information. The export is done via dozens of spreadsheets and requires multiple steps and rework to get accurate data before it’s ready to be shared with accounting. Maria knows that the accounting department relies on all of this information to recognize and allocate funds appropriately. But as her institution’s use of Salesforce grows, this manual process has become disjointed and frustrating. Teams spend a long time perfecting how financial data is entered into various systems. Maria knows that her colleagues already have a lot on their plate and wants to do all that she can to help. Over spring break, she happens to tune into Trailhead Live. The webinar is all about Accounting Subledger and highlights solutions for how the university can scale its accounting processes. At the webinar, Maria learned that: - Teams can generate debits and credits within Salesforce! No more manual export and data reconciliation in separate spreadsheets before forwarding the data to accounting. - Accounting sets map CRM financial information, stored in any standard or custom object, to an accounting-friendly format. - Accounting field mappings help admins format data one time and then map it to as many accounting systems as needed. Maria can't wait to use her Salesforce smarts to bring Accounting Subledger to campus and help so many of the university's functions collaborate better. ## A Fundraising Perspective Use Accounting Subledger to manage the fundraising tasks for your nonprofit organization. As the Senior Accountant for Learning Empowerment, an educational support nonprofit, Sam is the resident authority on all things finance. On a typical day, she answers accounting-related questions, gathers necessary documents for payments and invoices, and most of all, manages the institution's ledgers. As Learning Empowerment grows, those tasks have gotten bigger and more complicated. The institution now provides support services for individuals with disabilities at 20 locations across three states. Practically overnight, Sam's world has gone from a reasonably manageable workload of manual accounting to an overwhelming avalanche of work that she can barely handle. She's now juggling the requirements and regulations of three different states, as well as a vastly larger donation amounts and funds. She also spends a much longer time asking questions to the fundraising team, especially during each month's reconciliation. Knowing how busy they are, she wishes that she could be more autonomous but there's no other way for her to get around it. But then Learning Empowerment's Salesforce admin enables Accounting Subledger, and things begin to brighten. The fundraising team continues to enter gifts without any disruption, and Salesforce automatically generates accounting records overnight. And even better, those records are in the format of standard journal entries, with support for double entry journals! Sam no longer needs to manually reenter gifts in a separate accounting system. Accounting records are designed to be sent to third-party accounting software with minimal data manipulation. Previously, Sam spent over a third of her time reconciling the books monthly, and that was on the slow months. Now, two months later, Sam focuses on helping co-workers and volunteers instead. She regularly exports accounting records from Salesforce and imports them to her accounting software. But she's also working with the IT department to set up an automatic integration that would free her up even more. Learning Empowerment just announced plans to expand to more locations in another state, but this time, not only is Sam ready; she's excited to take it on! # Welcome to Your EDA Data Model Orientation Start your Education Data Architecture (EDA) implementation with a solid understanding of the Salesforce data model for primary, secondary, and higher education. # What are Campaigns and How Do They Work? Nonprofits use Campaigns to plan and track fundraising appeals, solicitations, events, advocacy campaigns, and other outreach activities. - **[What is a Campaign?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The word Campaign has many possible meanings for nonprofit and higher education organizations. For example, a capital campaign is a major fundraising effort to support construction of a new facility. Organizations with a strong programmatic element often describe their initiatives, such as protecting a new wilderness area, as a campaign. Marketers see a campaign as a way to reach out to constituents to build awareness and ask for support. - **[How do Campaigns Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Campaigns have special properties in Salesforce that make them a useful tool for many different scenarios. - **[Campaign Use Cases](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Campaigns are such a versatile tool. It's fantastic that one object can do so much! - **[Considerations when using Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some important things to keep in mind when setting up and using Campaigns. - **[Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series Videos](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series videos about managing Campaigns. - **[Resources for Further Information](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn more about implementing Campaigns. ## What is a Campaign? The word Campaign has many possible meanings for nonprofit and higher education organizations. For example, a capital campaign is a major fundraising effort to support construction of a new facility. Organizations with a strong programmatic element often describe their initiatives, such as protecting a new wilderness area, as a campaign. Marketers see a campaign as a way to reach out to constituents to build awareness and ask for support. In Salesforce, you can use a Campaign to represent all of these scenarios. Nonprofit and higher education organizations use Campaigns in these and many other creative ways. At a basic level, Campaigns group people together in your database so that you can ask them to take some sort of action and track the results. Campaigns combine several sources of data in one place to make it easier to analyze the results of a call to action. They are excellent at summarizing information related to constituents (Leads or Contacts) and money (Opportunities). For example, a Campaign could summarize the number of people targeted in a fundraising appeal, how many responded, and the amount of money raised. A different Campaign could summarize the number of people invited to an event, attendance, cancellations, and a count of those who made a donation at the event. Let’s take a closer look at how Campaigns work and the details of some common use cases. ## How do Campaigns Work? Campaigns have special properties in Salesforce that make them a useful tool for many different scenarios. Here are four properties and why they are important. - **[Campaigns Group Leads and Contacts Together](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You might regularly work with both Leads and Contacts as part of your constituent outreach and Campaigns make it easy to complete the following tasks. - **[Campaigns Track Opportunities Too](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Campaigns are excellent at summarizing information–like number of attendees or amount of money raised—because they show the relationship between people and contributions. - **[Campaigns Have Hierarchy](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If you have several courses within a semester, or several tactics within a fundraising goal, you may want to group campaigns and summarize the total amount of Contacts or Opportunities. - **[Campaigns Can be Archived](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Many organizations have a plethora of Campaigns at any given time. The Active checkbox controls whether Campaigns appear in lookups when you add Contacts and Leads. ### Campaigns Group Leads and Contacts Together You might regularly work with both Leads and Contacts as part of your constituent outreach and Campaigns make it easy to complete the following tasks. - **Create lists of people.** After you [add people to your Campaign](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_members_adding_parent.htm&type=5), you have a list that you can use for outreach and reporting. Campaigns also avoid duplicating the same Lead or Contact, if it is already associated with the Campaign. - **Track the status of engagement.** People are related to Campaigns through a [Campaign Member](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_managemembers.htm&type=5) record. The Campaign Member links the Lead or Contact to the Campaign and has a field for tracking the Campaign Member Status. You can use the Status to track who has received a mailing, appeal, or invite, who responded to it, and so forth. - **Track the effectiveness of your outreach or fundraising efforts.** A person who starts out as a Lead can be converted to a Contact and a related Opportunity. Salesforce Campaign functionality summarizes the number of converted Leads and Closed Opportunities. Learn more in [Why and How to Use Leads](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization. Once you're confident the person is going to donate, volunteer, or engage with your organization in some way, convert that Lead to a Contact or Account."). - **Engage with donors and volunteers.** Many organizations use a sign up form to find new volunteers, clients or donors. An easy way to do this is with a [Web-to-Lead](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000006417&type=1) form that is connected to a Campaign. Salesforce campaign functionality tracks these new people and shows which outreach tactic connected them to you. ### Campaigns Track Opportunities Too Campaigns are excellent at summarizing information–like number of attendees or amount of money raised—because they show the relationship between people and contributions. In the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), you can automatically add a donor to a Campaign when they make a donation. Learn more in [Create and Update Campaign Members Through an Opportunity](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_update_campaign_members_through_an_opp.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Configure NPSP to automatically add a Contact to a Campaign when you enter a donation."). In addition, you can: - Use Record Types or Opportunity Types to track different types of Opportunities, even if all of the revenue came through the same fundraising tactic (Campaign record). Some examples of revenue types could be Registration/Tickets, Donations at Event, Items bought, Auction items purchased, etc. - Compare the effectiveness of different fundraising tactics. Imagine you had a Gala and an Auction. You can use Campaigns to compare the number and value of Opportunities and see which tactic was more effective. ### Campaigns Have Hierarchy If you have several courses within a semester, or several tactics within a fundraising goal, you may want to group campaigns and summarize the total amount of Contacts or Opportunities. Use [Campaign Hierarchies](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_hierarchy_setup.htm&type=5) to achieve this. Let’s look at an example of how a Campaign Hierarchy works. Let’s say you're running a Spring Appeal that consists of four email blasts, a direct mailing to your major donors, and a gala banquet. Create each of those as a Campaign and relate them to the Spring Appeal 2018 Campaign using the Parent Campaign field. On the parent Campaign, you can see the aggregated amount of money you've raised as well as the money raised by the individual Campaigns. You can then compare which tactics are the most effective in your fundraising. ![Campaign Hierarchy for Spring Appeal 2018](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/campaign_hierarchy.png) ### Campaigns Can be Archived Many organizations have a plethora of Campaigns at any given time. The Active checkbox controls whether Campaigns appear in lookups when you add Contacts and Leads. By unchecking the Active checkbox, you archive a Campaign. You can still use global search to find archived Campaigns. ## Campaign Use Cases Campaigns are such a versatile tool. It's fantastic that one object can do so much! Let's look at some common use cases. - **[Segmentation and Outreach](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** One of the primary uses of Campaigns is to create lists of people, usually for sending them email or direct mail. - **[Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Fundraising Campaigns can track the effectiveness of your fundraising effort. - **[Event Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Campaigns are very useful for events. Use Campaign Member Status to track the attendance status of your invitees. - **[Program Registration](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_what_are_campaigns_how_they_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** You can use Campaigns to track classes, workshops, and conferences with conference sessions by using different Campaign types and leveraging the parent Campaign hierarchy. ### Segmentation and Outreach One of the primary uses of Campaigns is to create lists of people, usually for sending them email or direct mail. In the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP), use the Household Mailing List report to export your mailing list with only one member per household included. No duplicate mailings! Lists or groups you might consider building as Campaigns include Board Members, Media Contacts, Fundraising Prospects, or People who are interested in Program Area X or Y. For more ideas on categorizing Contacts in NPSP, see [An Introduction to Categorizing Contacts in Salesforce for Nonprofits](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_intro_to_categorizing_contacts_salesforce_for_nonprofits.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Most organizations have a need to group Contacts together based on common interests, activities, or role. If you want to quickly and easily be able to see which people in your database are volunteers, clients, or major donors, for instance, you have to set up Salesforce to make it easy to group those Contacts for viewing, segmenting lists for campaigns, and reporting."). ### Fundraising Fundraising Campaigns can track the effectiveness of your fundraising effort. You send requests for money to people and if they make a donation, you select the Campaign in the Opportunity's Primary Campaign Source field and mark the donor as Responded. Standard Campaign fields can be used to track the results and calculate ROI: - **Total Contacts:** The number of people in your outreach that you’re already engaged with. - **Total Leads:** The number of people in your outreach that are prospects. - **Total Converted Leads:** The number of people that this Campaign helped to convert. - **Total Responses:** The number of people you've marked as Responded. - **Total Value and Number of Won Donations:** The number and amount the Campaign has brought in. You can also track how these numbers stack up across a hierarchy of Campaigns (see Campaign Hierarchy section above). There's plenty of information available, even for the most statistic-obsessed development team! ### Event Management Campaigns are very useful for events. Use Campaign Member Status to track the attendance status of your invitees. For example, you can create statuses for Invited, RSVP - YES, RSVP - NO, Attended, Canceled, and so on. Additionally, you can update the Campaign Member Status for Contacts and Leads as their attendance status changes. Be sure to only mark people as Responded if they participated or attended; that way, you get an accurate count of the people who came to the event. You can also log the registration fees as an Opportunity with your event Campaign as the Primary Campaign Source. You can customize your page layout for the events with fields like an Account lookup for Location, date/time fields for Setup Time, Start Time, End Time etc. You can even upload documents like directions, fundraising pitches, powerpoint slides, and more right on the Campaign record. Keep in mind that there are many integrations and third-party apps that leverage Campaigns for additional functionality such as email marketing, marketing automation, and online donation tools ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Explore [Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.volunteers_for_salesforce.htm) to see a great example of how to use Campaigns for volunteer event management. If you want to explore many of the concepts of Campaign management in V4S with a real world example, check out the [Manage Volunteers for Nonprofits](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trails/nonprofit_volunteer) Trailhead. See Also: [Campaign Member Status](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_customize_member_status_lex.htm&type=5) ### Program Registration You can use Campaigns to track classes, workshops, and conferences with conference sessions by using different Campaign types and leveraging the parent Campaign hierarchy. As a program director, you can set up a parent Campaign for the Spring Conference. The Spring Conference has three sessions. Each of these sessions has a Campaign record, linked to the parent Spring Conference Campaign. The people who attend the conference sessions become Campaign Members of the particular session which they are attending. Use the Campaign Member Status field to differentiate between those who were invited, those who registered, and those who actually attended. You can add custom fields to the Campaign Member records if you need to track additional information such as lodging information for the attendees, conference roles (presenter, attendee, sponsor, vendor, etc), meal preferences, and more. If there is payment associated with the conference or sessions, you can link the Opportunities to the specific child Campaign record (for example, the session they attended), and then summarize at each parent Campaign level. ## Considerations when using Campaigns Here are some important things to keep in mind when setting up and using Campaigns. - Each person can only be in a Campaign once. To show how Campaign Members change over time, you can update their member status. - Each Opportunity can only have one Primary Campaign; if you need to relate an Opportunity to more than one Campaign, consider using [Campaign Influence.](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_influence_customizable.htm) - Create a naming convention for the Campaign Name field. Campaign Name is how you commonly find Campaigns in search, reports, and lookup fields. It’s important that similar Campaigns share the same name format. For example: Annual Fund Spring Appeal 2018 & Annual Fund Fall Appeal 2018. - Campaigns have a [hierarchy limit](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_hierarchy_setup.htm&type=5) of five meaning that your hierarchy can contain a Parent Campaign and four Campaigns under it. You should keep this in mind if you choose to group campaigns by year and program area, because that only leaves three hierarchy levels remaining to capture tactics and other campaign characteristics. - To make new Campaign records, someone with the System Administrator profile needs to check the [Marketing User checkbox](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=faq_campaigns_who_has_access.htm&type=5) on each User record. - Cloning campaigns doesn't clone Campaign Member Status options, or Campaign Members. To copy members from one Campaign to another, you can create a Campaign with Campaign Members report filtered to include the source Campaign. Then use the Add to Campaign action to add the members to your new Campaign. Alternatively, use a third party app that can clone Campaigns and Members. - You can classify Campaigns using Record Type and/or the Campaign Type field. Use these fields strategically to create an intuitive way of categorizing your Campaigns. Record Type could represent the “big bucket” idea and Type the specific activity or channel. For example you could have a Record Type called Appeal and Types such as: Direct Mail, Email, Phone Bank, etc. You can also create a Campaign Subtype field using a [dependent picklist](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=fields_defining_field_dependencies.htm&type=5) if you need another level of specificity. - Campaigns themselves are not meant to be a marketing automation tool, but rather made to integrate with other third party solutions. ## Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series Videos Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series videos about managing Campaigns. - Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [What are Campaigns? Why Would Nonprofits Use Them?](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=J6p2Mh88J20) - Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Add Donations to Campaigns](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l0gZghPX0TM) - Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [How To Add Campaign Members](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1bpTdZa80KQ) - Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [How To Use Campaign Hierarchy](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HXf7TNCCBbM) ## Resources for Further Information Learn more about implementing Campaigns. - [Campaigns for Fundraising Implementation Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_campaign_guide.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "This guide is intended to help nonprofit administrators plan and implement Campaigns and Campaign hierarchies to support fundraising. Learn how Campaigns can be used to track fundraising appeals, event invitations, and key performance metrics.") - [Salesforce Campaign Implementation Guide, Winter ‘17](https://resources.docs.salesforce.com/204/latest/en-us/sfdc/pdf/salesforce_campaign_implementation_guide.pdf) - [Salesforce Documentation: Add Members to Campaigns](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_members_adding_parent.htm&type=5) - [Salesforce Documentation: Campaign Influence](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=campaigns_influence_customizable.htm) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Special thanks to Samantha Shain, Trish Perkins, Sara Monostra, Abby Morrow, Hua Ping Tan, Donna Whitig, Sandy Whitten, Danielle Landaal, Bill Florio, and Ashima Saigal for their contributions to this document. # What Happens When I Delete an Account? When you delete an Account, NPSP deletes associated Recurring Donations, Allocations, and Relationships in addition to standard Salesforce detail records. If there are associated Closed/Won Opportunities or Cases (with any status), you won't be able to delete the Account. You must first delete these records manually before you can delete the Account. # What is the Household Account Model? The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend. Salesforce was originally designed as a "Business-to-Business" (B2B) application. In the traditional B2B scenario, companies track other companies they sell to (Accounts). Each Account has people associated with it (Contacts), as well as "deals" (Opportunities). How all of these things relate to and interact with each other in Salesforce is known as an _account model_. ![Account model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/account_model_diagram_v01.png) For the typical nonprofit, the B2B scenario doesn't apply. Rather than companies and deals, nonprofits generally care about people, relationships, and donations. Enter the Household Account model. In the Household Account model, people (Contact records) are grouped together into households (Account records). And donations (Opportunity records) are associated with people and households. ![Household Account model](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/account_model_diagram_v02.png) The Household Account model supports many sophisticated features, including Contact management for Household members, and address management. The Household Account model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the account model we strongly recommend. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Household Account model also supports organization Accounts (for example, other businesses, nonprofits, and religious organizations.) We recommend that you include all of your Contacts as members of a Household Account, and show relationships to organization accounts using Affiliations. For more information, see [Add and Manage Organization Accounts.](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_add_and_manage_organization_accounts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Organization Accounts allow your nonprofit to keep track of entities that are not individual constituents or households. Learn how to add and manage Organization Accounts.") Nonprofit Success Pack supports two legacy account models. For more information, see [Legacy Account Models](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_legacy_account_models.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "An account model describes the relationship between Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities. The Household Account Model is the default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack, and the one we strongly recommend. This article contains information about two legacy account models: The 1-to-1 Account Model, and the Individual Account Model."). # What's Education Data Architecture (EDA)? Education Data Architecture is a community-driven data architecture designed to help educational institutions use Salesforce out-of-the-box. EDA standardizes the starting point for educational institutions building out a CRM. It provides a **core and common** data model that supports the entire K-20 student journey. It's an open source architecture—anyone can view the source code in GitHub. It's been developed in close collaboration with our customers, partners, and the K-20 community to foster **common acceptance**. Solutions built on EDA share the same **open and flexible**, extendable framework that accommodates a range of use cases and end-user customization. With EDA, you get an architecture along with preconfigured objects, logic and functionality, and automation, tailored for education right out of the box. The EDA framework, supported by the Salesforce Platform, can serve as the foundation for managing data and data relationships across your entire institution, in departments like these: - Advising - Alumni and Advancement - Business Enablement (Housing, IT Help Desk, Facilities, Security) - Faculty - Finance - Marketing - Recruiting and Admissions - Registrar ![EDA overview](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-education_data_architecture-264-0-0-production-enus/6bcf23e4-1d0f-4cd5-8405-b8e231f03ed0/education_data_architecture/images/what_is_eda_diagram.png) EDA can give your student-facing staff a consolidated, 360-degree view of who students are, where they come from, what their interests are, and who they interact with. Build out your architecture to easily see students': - Relationships with other people, such as parents, advisors, or teammates - Organizations they're related to, such as schools, academic departments, or sports organizations - Courses and degree programs - Address information, including seasonal addresses - And much more . . . You might adopt EDA on its own or as part of other Salesforce.org offerings. For example, [Student Success Hub](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.student_success_hub.htm) is built on EDA and enables a personalized, streamlined student experience with advising and other student services. [Gift Entry Manager](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.gift_entry_manager.htm), also built on EDA, facilitates fundraising in advancement offices by tracking gifts, payments, and accounting data. EDA is customizable for the many varied use cases we find in education. And, because it's built on the Salesforce Platform, your users can easily access the EDA app from mobile devices. To be clear, EDA is neither a point solution nor a product in the traditional sense. It doesn't include functionality that's transactional or financial in nature, and it likely can't replace your LMS (Learning Management System) or SIS (Student Information System). Instead, it integrates with and complements those systems, providing a single place to track constituent information for that invaluable 360-degree view. Connecting all these data points around a student enables deeper, more meaningful engagement at every stage of the student journey. For details about extending EDA with other solutions, see [EDA Limitations and Extension Options](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_limitations_and_extension_options.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Keep in mind these limitations and extension options with Education Data Architecture."). As you get started, remember that you're not alone—institutions are ready to share EDA best practices and support. Join the [Education Data Architecture Group](https://trailhead.salesforce.com/trailblazer-community/groups/0f94s000000khi4sae?tab=discussion&sort=last_modified_date_desc) today and join the conversation! # What's Included in Nonprofit Cloud Nonprofit Cloud unifies tools for fundraising, program and case management, outcome management, and, optionally, grantmaking. Each of these tools builds on Salesforce’s platform and other shared features. ### Required Editions
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Developer Editions with Nonprofit Cloud.
- [Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_whats_included_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) If your nonprofit raises money from individual donors, turn on Fundraising features. These tools help you nurture relationships, use data to drive fundraising, and boost efficiency and productivity in any type of fundraising. - [Nonprofit Cloud for Program and Case Management](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_whats_included_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) Manage the services that your organization delivers with the suite of impact features in Nonprofit Cloud. - [Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_whats_included_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) If your organization provides grants of currency or goods, talk to your Salesforce account executive about using Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking. With Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking, you get the tools included in Nonprofit Cloud plus purpose-built tools that help you plan, manage, and measure outbound grants. - [Salesforce's Platform and Shared Features](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npc_whats_included_in_nonprofit_cloud.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5) Nonprofit Cloud is part of Salesforce Industries, which means that you get to use features that are shared across Industries products. These features, along with standard platform features, can solve complex business problems such as automating processes, managing productivity, getting deeper insights, and handling data. ## Nonprofit Cloud for Fundraising If your nonprofit raises money from individual donors, turn on Fundraising features. Nurture relationships, use data to drive fundraising, and boost efficiency and productivity in any type of fundraising. Fundraising includes these apps that group common tasks and jobs for different roles. Fundraising Operations Helps your team perform the essential tasks of fundraising. Gift processors can efficiently enter and process batch gifts, add donor commitments, and update or pause gift commitment schedules. Donor support officers get tools to track and respond to donor requests. Donor Engagement Assists with mass-market fundraisers and helps campaign managers track and manage multichannel fundraising efforts. It collects engagement and donation data through campaigns, outreach source codes, and gift commitments to make managing outreach efforts fast and effective. Philanthropy & Partnerships Provides tools to cultivate and solicit major gifts. Major gift officers, relationship managers, and grant writers can research donors and grantmakers, and then track interactions and progress. Fundraising Strategy Provides a high-level understanding of your fundraising data and activities. Executives and fundraising managers use this app to monitor progress and plan for future fundraising efforts. These apps come together so that your fundraising team works in one system on a standard data model to track all of their work. With a unified view of each donor, your team can raise more money more efficiently by minimizing duplication or conflicts. ## Nonprofit Cloud for Program and Case Management Use Nonprofit Cloud to manage the services your organization provides. Help people facing challenges such as unemployment, homelessness, family issues, abuse, and neglect. Run community programs like food banks, animal rescue, and elder care. Provide and track programs that clean up natural habitats. Set up and track company programs that give back to the community. Run programs to help and guide students and support youth growth. Depending on your mission and operations, turn on these tools to manage your mission-driven services. Manage Programs and Benefits Program Management provides a data model to track your programs, benefits, and benefit disbursements. It also gives you the tools to schedule benefit disbursements and track attendance. Process Referral Requests and Intake Case Referral Intake provides tools for inbound and outbound participant referrals, converting them to cases for assessment and follow-up. Use features such as guided flows to streamline the intake process for your team and program participants. Create Personalized Care Plans Care Plans provides a way to create, manage, and share personalized plans to help program participants reach their goals. Start from standardized templates you define, and customize care plans for each participant’s needs. Collect and Validate Assessments Discovery Framework helps you design and organize assessments that evaluate program participants during intake and throughout their participation. Take Notes of Client Interactions Interaction Summaries provides tools to capture and store detailed notes of meetings and conversations with students, clients, caseworkers, advisors, partners, and others. Protect the confidentiality of notes, add next steps, and quickly find notes from previous interactions. Manage Your Outcome Strategy Outcome Management is an impact measurement tool that defines, measures, and evaluates your outcome strategy. Link your outcome strategy to programs and benefits in Salesforce. Use the data that you collect to create reports on outcomes. Then, share the reports with the communities you serve, your board, your donors, and other relevant stakeholders. Document Incidents and Concerns Complaint Management and Incident Tracking provides tools to track unforeseen incidents in program participants’ lives and help resolve them. Select these tools in a Nonprofit Cloud trial org and set up the ones that make sense for your organization. For example, if you don’t employ case managers or social workers to manage individual cases, only use Program Management to track programs and benefits. ## Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking If your organization provides grants of currency or goods, talk to your Salesforce account executive about using Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking. With Nonprofit Cloud for Grantmaking, you get the tools included in Nonprofit Cloud plus purpose-built tools that help you plan, manage, and measure outbound grants. Grantmaking gives you a unified view of your funding programs through the planning, delivery, and evaluation stages. Plus, a site template for Experience Cloud helps you create an online portal to communicate and collaborate with your grantees. Like Nonprofit Cloud’s program and case management features, Grantmaking also works with Outcome Management to measure progress and report on results. ## Salesforce's Platform and Shared Features Nonprofit Cloud is part of Salesforce Industries, which means that you get to use features that are shared across Industries products. These features, along with standard platform features, can help you solve complex business problems, like automating processes, managing productivity, getting deeper insights, and managing data. ​Here are just a few examples of the tools included in Nonprofit Cloud. Automate Processes and Data In addition to using standard tools like Flow Builder, you can automate processes with other features. For example, Data Processing Engine transforms data in your Salesforce org and writes the results to create or update records. Use Data Processing Engine to generate rollup field data for both programs and fundraising. Manage Productivity and Tasks Boost your team’s efficiency with features that help standardize tasks, quickly start actions, and track day-to-day operations. For example, both fundraisers and program staff can use Interaction Summaries to keep detailed, permanent notes of their discussions with stakeholders. The same tool can capture an intake conversation with a program participant or a meeting with a prospective donor. Get Deeper Insights into Stakeholders Nonprofit Cloud includes tools to analyze and visualize your interactions with stakeholders. For example, the Timeline component provides a comprehensive, chronological, and interactive view of stakeholders’ activities in a single place. When any user works with the stakeholder, they can easily see a complete history of interactions. Manage Data Security Whether you’re dealing with sensitive program participant information or financial information about your donors, security is key. Nonprofit Cloud includes data security tools, such as Identity Verification, that help protect a participant's information, prevent unauthorized use, and comply with data regulations. Integrate with Other Solutions Fundraisers, program staff, and others can all work in Nonprofit Cloud, but it also includes tools to integrate with other solutions. For example, Accounting Subledger consolidates data between Salesforce CRM and your accounting system to help you manage your accounting. Use Accounting Subledger (included with Nonprofit Cloud) to help track your fundraising accounting in your accounting system. Learn more about Salesforce’s platform tools and Industries shared features. Learn how to use the features when you set up fundraising, program and case management, outcome management, or grantmaking. # What's Included in the GEM Package Learn which Apex classes, apps, custom fields,page layouts, permission sets, and tabs are included in the GEM package. The following items are installed in the GEM package. This list highlights the most notable items; it's not a comprehensive list of every component. ## Managed Packages - Gift Entry Manager ## Apex Classes (TDTM classes only) - AFFL\_SyncToNPSP\_TDTM - NPSP\_Account\_TDTM - REL\_SyncToNPSP\_TDTM - TDTM\_Glue - UTIL\_ManageRelatedNPSPRecords\_TDTM ## Apps - Gift Entry Manager ## Custom Fields (not including fields on new objects) - hed\_\_Affiliation\_\_c - gem\_\_Related\_Opportunity\_Contact\_Role\_\_c - hed\_\_Relationship\_\_c - gem\_\_Related\_Opportunity\_Contact\_Role\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Do\_Not\_Automatically\_Create\_Payment\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Acknowledgment\_Status\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Honoree\_Contact\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Honoree\_Name\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Matching\_Gift\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Matching\_Gift\_Account\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Matching\_Gift\_Employer\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Matching\_Gift\_Status\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Notification\_Message\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Notification\_Recipient\_Contact\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Donation\_Tribute\_Type\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Notification\_Recipient\_Name\_\_c - npsp\_\_DataImport\_\_c - gem\_\_Post\_Process\_Object\_JSON\_\_c ## Page Layouts (not including layouts on new objects) - Account - GEM Household Layout - Account - GEM Organization Layout - Contact - GEM Contact Layout - NPSP Data Import - GEM Gift Layout - Opportunity - GEM Gift Layout - Opportunity - Single Gift Entry Customization - Payment - Payment Layout ## Permission Sets - Gift Entry ## Tabs - Single Gift Entry ## More Information GEM also installs EDA and NPSP, which include their own items. See [EDA Data Dictionary](https://salesforce.quip.com/cajzanydf6gp) and [NPSP Data Dictionary](https://salesforce.quip.com/yd1wasdz1m1q) for more information. # What's Installed Learn about the packages installed with EDA, and identify the components that you can modify. - **[What's Installed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.eda_whats_installed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install Education Data Architecture, you get: ## What's Installed When you install Education Data Architecture, you get: - A managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code. These components, such as objects and fields, can't be modified by your org. They're locked with limited edit access to allow the managed package to be upgraded later. - An unmanaged package that contains metadata-like permission sets on standard objects and various record types. Except for the Administrative and Household Account record types, which the Education Data Architecture account model requires, System Administrators can modify or delete unmanaged package metadata. For details about managed and unmanaged packages, see [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm) in Salesforce Help. # What's Installed with K-12 Architecture Kit Learn about the packages installed with K-12 Architecture Kit, and identify the components that you can modify. - **[What's Installed](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.k12_whats_installed.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you install K-12 Architecture Kit, you get: ## What's Installed When you install K-12 Architecture Kit, you get: - A managed package that contains essential metadata and custom code. These components, such as objects and fields, can't be modified by your org. They're locked with limited edit access to allow the managed package to be upgraded later. - An unmanaged package that contains metadata-like permission sets on standard objects and various record types. Except for the Administrative and Household Account record types, which the K-12 Architecture Kit account model requires, System Administrators can modify or delete unmanaged package metadata. For details about managed and unmanaged packages, see [Understanding Packages](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=sharing_apps.htm) in Salesforce Help. # Which Account Model Am I Using? This article explains how to identify your Account Model, and which fields to analyze when troubleshooting Household Account record issues. - **[Identify Your Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_account_model_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Open NPSP Settings to learn what account model you're using. - **[Troubleshoot Account Model Fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_account_model_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** When you change the account model in NPSP Settings, you determine the Account Model for new Accounts going forward. Existing Accounts created using a different Account Model aren't automatically updated. If your org updated the Account Model but did not convert the existing Accounts, troubleshoot and update the Account Record Type, \_SYSTEM:AccountType, and \_SYSTEM:IsIndividual fields on individual Account records ## Identify Your Account Model Open NPSP Settings to learn what account model you're using. 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. In NPSP Settings, click **People** | **Account Model**. Your Account Model is shown in the Account Model field. ![People - Account Model page showing the Account Model field](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/which_acct_model_settings_acct_model_field2.png) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Changing the Account Model in NPSP Settings does not update existing Accounts. It only sets the Account Model for Account records created from that point forward. See [Change My Account Model](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_change_my_account_model.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The default account model for Nonprofit Success Pack is the Household Account model, which is the account model we strongly recommend. Only experienced Salesforce Administrators should consider changing an organization's account model.") for more information. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you're on an earlier version of Nonprofit Success Pack, such as Nonprofit Starter Pack, look for your Account Model on the Contacts Settings tab. ## Troubleshoot Account Model Fields When you change the account model in NPSP Settings, you determine the Account Model for new Accounts going forward. Existing Accounts created using a different Account Model aren't automatically updated. If your org updated the Account Model but did not convert the existing Accounts, troubleshoot and update the Account Record Type, \_SYSTEM:AccountType, and \_SYSTEM:IsIndividual fields on individual Account records ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you don't see these fields on your Account record page, add them to the Account page layout. After you finish troubleshooting, we recommend removing them from the page layout. For more information on adjusting page layouts, see [Configure Page Layouts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.sfdo_edit_page_layouts.htm). ### Account Record Type If your Account Model is set to Household Account, the Household Account Record Type tells NPSP which record type to use when automatically creating Household Accounts: ![Household Account Record Type field with the value of Household Account](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/which_acct_model_hh_acct_rt.png) In this example, when you're troubleshooting any Household Account, you should see "Household Account" listed as the record type. If you see a different record type, update the record type accordingly. ### \_SYSTEM:AccountType \_SYSTEM:AccountType should match your organization's Account model: If the value of the \_SYSTEM:AccountType field doesn't match the Account Model for your organization, update the field accordingly. | For this Account Model: | \_SYSTEM:AccountType should be: | | --- | --- | | Household Account Model | Household Account | | One-to-One Individual Model | One-to-One Individual | | Individual Bucket Model | Individual Bucket | ### \_SYSTEM: IsIndividual This field should be selected on all Household Account records, regardless of your Account model. If you have a Household Account where this field is not selected, edit the record to select the field. # Which Version of NPSP Am I Using? This article will help you figure out which NPSP product you have installed. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Lookup Installed Packages](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OryKnkt2228). - **[Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn about the difference between version 2 and 3 of Nonprofit Success Pack. - **[Determine Your NPSP Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_which_version_am_i_using.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Steps for understanding how to determine which version of NPSP is installed. ## Overview Learn about the difference between version 2 and 3 of Nonprofit Success Pack. NPSP starting with version number 3 is the current version of the NPSP product. If you have version 3.x installed, you automatically receive NPSP updates. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Even though you automatically receive updates, some new features require additional installation. See [Feature Configuration Overview](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_feat_config_overview.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "NPSP introduces many new features over time. If you aren't starting from a new Trial, you have to enable or configure those features before you can use them. And as an admin, you have control over what to implement in your org (and when).") for more information. The previous version of NPSP, known as Nonprofit Starter Pack, requires a manual upgrade process to move to Nonprofit Success Pack. Read on to see how to determine which version of the product you have installed. ## Determine Your NPSP Product Steps for understanding how to determine which version of NPSP is installed. 1. From Setup, enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, then click **Installed Packages**. 2. Review the list of installed packages. If you see Nonprofit Success Pack in the list of installed packages, you have the most up-to-date version of the NPSP Product. ![List of installed packages with Nonprofit Success Pack highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/list_of_installed_packages.jpg) If you don't have Nonprofit Success Pack installed, but see packages from Salesforce.org or Salesforce.com Foundation with Version Numbers starting with 1 or 2, you have the older product Nonprofit Starter Pack. ![List of installed packages with Publisher and Version Number columns highlighted](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/starter_pack_packages_1.jpg) See [If You Already Have NPSP and Want to Upgrade](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_install.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) is a series of managed packages, installed on top of Salesforce Enterprise or Unlimited Edition. Learn how to install or upgrade NPSP and how to resolve common installation errors.") for information on upgrading from Starter Pack to Nonprofit Success Pack. # Which Version of Recurring Donations Am I Using? A Salesforce system administrator can determine the version of recurring donations installed in your org. To determine which version of Recurring Donations is active in your org, a system administrator should: 1. Click the **NPSP Settings** tab. If you don't see the tab, find it in the App Launcher (![App Launcher icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/app_launcher_icon.png)). 2. Click **Recurring Donations** | **Recurring Donations**. 3. Click **Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations**. 1. If you DO NOT see **Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations**, then your org is already using Enhanced Recurring Donations. No further action is needed. 2. If you DO see **Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations**, evaluate the status of your org. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note If you see a blank page after clicking Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations, you're missing the required permissions for that page. Assign the apex classes listed in [Configure Recurring Donations](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_configure_recurring_donations.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Learn how to set security permissions, deploy components, and configure settings to use Recurring Donations in your org.") to your profile. ## Evaluate the Status of Your Org 1. If all upgrade steps show a green checkmark, your org is using Enhanced Recurring Donations and the upgrade process is complete. No further action is needed. ![The Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations page with all steps complete](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/enable-complete.png) 2. If step 2 is checked, but subsequent steps aren't checked, your org is using Enhanced Recurring Donations, but your data might still be in the Legacy Recurring Donations format. This is highly problematic! Complete the upgrade process as soon as you can. ![The Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations page with some steps not complete.](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/upgrade-not-complete.png) 3. If step 2 is set to Disabled, you're using Legacy Recurring Donations. If you're ready to upgrade, follow the instructions in the [Enhanced Recurring Donations Upgrade Guide](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.npsp_enhanced_rd_upgrade_guide.htm). ![The Upgrade to Enhanced Recurring Donations page with step 2, Enable Enhanced Recurring Donations, incomplete](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/rd2-disabled.png) # Why and How to Use Leads Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization. Once you're confident the person is going to donate, volunteer, or engage with your organization in some way, convert that Lead to a Contact or Account. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video: [Why and How to Use Leads](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TdvU51ogQ-Y) ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note This article was written at the 2017 NPSP Sprint in Baltimore by these amazing community members: Justin Barss, Billy Daly, Lynda En, Maggie Epps, Cori O'Brien Paluck, Beth Saunders, Samantha Shain, Tim Weeks. A special thank you to Cori O'Brien Paluck for leading the group effort. - **[What is a Lead and How Does it Work?](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Nonprofits can use Leads to document an expression of interest for any number of interactions, especially when there is a clear goal to qualify the interest before creating other records like a Contact. Defining a clear Lead process can help you collect data and convert the data into other records at the click of a button. - **[Leads vs. Contacts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** We mentioned that Leads are typically used to qualify interest before creating a Contact, but you might still be wondering when to use one over the other. Think of it this way: Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization in some way. - **[When to Use Leads (Examples)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Here are some common examples of how an org might use Leads. We also outlined at a high level what you'll need to set up in Salesforce if you'd like to use Leads in a similar way. ## What is a Lead and How Does it Work? Nonprofits can use Leads to document an expression of interest for any number of interactions, especially when there is a clear goal to qualify the interest before creating other records like a Contact. Defining a clear Lead process can help you collect data and convert the data into other records at the click of a button. Traditionally, a Lead represents a sales prospect (a person or organization) that expresses interest in the goods or services a company offers. From a standard Salesforce point of view, a Lead is a record that collects data about a prospect before you're sure that the person will have a lasting relationship with your organization. Leads in Salesforce have loads of built in functionality including field mapping, ownership auto-assignment, and the ability to convert to a Contact, Account, and Opportunity once you want to fully integrate them with the rest of your data. Also, the native Lead conversion process can be extended to trigger the creation of a custom object using Salesforce automation. You don't have to be a money-making company to find Leads useful! Read on to discover some common use cases that can help you decide if Leads are right for your organization. ## Leads vs. Contacts We mentioned that Leads are typically used to qualify interest before creating a Contact, but you might still be wondering when to use one over the other. Think of it this way: Leads are more temporary than Contacts. Use Leads to record that someone may be interested in interacting with your organization in some way. In addition, Leads are also a safe way to capture interest from your website while making sure you're not getting duplicate or spam records. Once you feel confident the person is going to donate, volunteer, or engage with your organization in some way. [convert that Lead to a Contact](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_a_lead_to_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality to convert a Lead to a Contact.") (or Account). ## When to Use Leads (Examples) Here are some common examples of how an org might use Leads. We also outlined at a high level what you'll need to set up in Salesforce if you'd like to use Leads in a similar way. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Web-to-Lead forms are your friend. They are a simple form that can be embedded right on your website and they don't require any custom field mapping. You can also use third-party form tools for your more complex forms, which handle duplicates and multiple object touches a bit better. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_tip.png) Tip On Web-to-Lead forms, the "Company" field is required. When you're collecting data for individuals, you can include instructions to enter "Self" in the company field. Code in the Lead Conversion Visualforce page handles creating a Household Account for the new Contact if the Company is "Self", "Individual" or an exact match of the Lead's First/Last Name. - **[Example 1: Organization Selling a Product](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An organization working for racial justice is selling Black Lives Matter t-shirts to the community. A neighbor who wants to put in a large order fills out a general Contact Us Form on the organization's website, requesting information about bulk discounts. This request is recorded as a Lead. Once the organization confirms that the neighbor's interest is genuine, they convert the Lead to a Contact, Account, and Opportunity, and get that order out! - **[Example 2: Organization Recruiting Volunteers](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An organization has strict guidelines for volunteers to participate in certain programs. The volunteer roles may require specific skills, certifications, or other prerequisites (such as background checks or security clearance). The org needs to understand how many applicants do not pass these tests, and who is currently in the qualification process. - **[Example 3: Organization Researching Potential Donors](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** An organization is collecting wealth data for prospective major donors who are identified through Board member referrals, demographic-based search, or other external means. Before adding these prospects to existing donor (Contact) records, the org wants to ensure they meet the engagement level criteria. - **[Example 4: Determining if People are Qualified to use an Organization's Services](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_why_and_how_to_use_leads.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** People may call in, email, fill out a web form, or walk into a center looking for more information. Perhaps the organization can't provide services to the individual (for qualification reasons) or they lack resources that the person needs, but the organization is able to track the area of the constituent's need and refer them to another organization. Board members need to know where the unmet needs are to help with budgeting and strategy, and to communicate referrals to partner organizations. ### Example 1: Organization Selling a Product An organization working for racial justice is selling Black Lives Matter t-shirts to the community. A neighbor who wants to put in a large order fills out a general Contact Us Form on the organization's website, requesting information about bulk discounts. This request is recorded as a Lead. Once the organization confirms that the neighbor's interest is genuine, they convert the Lead to a Contact, Account, and Opportunity, and get that order out! With this process, the organization can report on number of t-shirt inquiries, as well as how many of those inquiries turn into actual sales. To set up a similar process in your org: 1. [Create a Web-to-Lead form](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=setting_up_web-to-lead.htm) and embed it on your website as a Contact Us form. This is a great way to capture interest about your product or service. 2. Create and map custom fields: - [Create custom fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) to track information particular to your products or services, such as t-shirt size. - [Map custom and standard Lead fields](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_a_lead_to_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality to convert a Lead to a Contact.") to corresponding fields on Contact, Account, and Opportunity. . 3. [Report on Lead conversion](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=000175908&language=en_us&type=1). Use standard Salesforce reports to report on how many inquiries turn into actual sales. ### Example 2: Organization Recruiting Volunteers An organization has strict guidelines for volunteers to participate in certain programs. The volunteer roles may require specific skills, certifications, or other prerequisites (such as background checks or security clearance). The org needs to understand how many applicants do not pass these tests, and who is currently in the qualification process. The org can use Leads to track the applicant through the qualification process. Once the applicant is qualified, they can convert the Lead into a Contact. To set this up in your org: 1. [Create a Web-to-Lead form](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=setting_up_web-to-lead.htm) and embed it on your website. This is the form that applicants can fill out to express interest in volunteering with your company. 2. Set up your Lead statuses. Web-to-Lead forms are a great way to capture volunteer interest, but they also introduce a bunch of new Leads. You can use Lead Statuses to organize these new Leads. 3. Create a [Lead Dashboard](https://admin.salesforce.com/3-reports-marketers-will-love) to monitor applicants through the different stages of qualification. ### Example 3: Organization Researching Potential Donors An organization is collecting wealth data for prospective major donors who are identified through Board member referrals, demographic-based search, or other external means. Before adding these prospects to existing donor (Contact) records, the org wants to ensure they meet the engagement level criteria. If they meet the criteria, [the Lead is converted to a Contact or Account](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_convert_a_lead_to_a_contact.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "The Nonprofit Success Pack includes a Lead conversion utility that provides specialized functionality to convert a Lead to a Contact."), and the information is handed off to the org's Development Officer. To set this up in your org: 1. [Create custom fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) that your NPO uses to qualify prospects. Once the Lead is converted, you can [map these Lead fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_mapleads_guidelines.htm) to the fields on the subsequently created Contact, Account, or Opportunity record. 2. [Create Assignment Rules](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=customize_leadrules.htm&type=0) to automatically assign new Leads to users in your company, and notify them when a new Lead is created and assigned to them. 3. [Create Queues](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=queues_overview.htm) of multiple users in your org who can manage Leads. That way when staff are going on vacation, you can assign Leads to the Queue. 4. [Create an Engagement Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_create_and_manage_engagement_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Use Engagement Plans to automatically create a series of predefined tasks to support donor prospecting, stewardship, and moves management.") and assign it to your Leads. Engagement Plans are predetermined sets of tasks that you can use to follow up on and engage with a Lead. ### Example 4: Determining if People are Qualified to use an Organization's Services People may call in, email, fill out a web form, or walk into a center looking for more information. Perhaps the organization can't provide services to the individual (for qualification reasons) or they lack resources that the person needs, but the organization is able to track the area of the constituent's need and refer them to another organization. Board members need to know where the unmet needs are to help with budgeting and strategy, and to communicate referrals to partner organizations. To set this up in your org: 1. [Create a Web-to-Lead form](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=setting_up_web-to-lead.htm) and embed it on your website. People who come to your website can use this form to inquire about resources or services. 2. [Create custom fields](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=adding_fields.htm) to track the areas/services/resources that people are inquiring about. You can also create a lookup field so that you can track the Account(s) you're referring people to. 3. Create reports to track inquiries that have and have not been converted (grouped by area). # Why it Matters Volunteers are critical to many nonprofits. Volunteers for Salesforce gives you a way to manage your relationships with them. "I never want the day to end." That's Sarah, a volunteer at a local community kitchen in Seattle, Washington. Sarah has two great passions in life—cooking and other people. The food she prepares goes out to cancer patients and their families who no longer have the time or the ability to cook. Sarah's connections at the kitchen remind her of what's really important to her. Volunteering connects her directly with her community, takes her outside of herself, and helps her appreciate the responsibility we all have towards each other. When volunteering and connection inspire such big feelings, who would ever want the day to end? Sarah is one of hundreds of volunteers that the community kitchen tracks with Volunteers for Salesforce (V4S)—an application for volunteer management that has transformed nonprofit organizations and their efforts worldwide. Volunteers are the lifeblood of so many nonprofit organizations like yours, and V4S provides a way to effectively manage volunteer relationships. In a world of so much distraction and competing priorities, tools like V4S are crucial for helping organizations connect with—and inspire—their Sarah's. V4S helps you: - Manage the volunteer jobs an organization needs filled - Track the hours and shifts a volunteer works - Track the skills volunteers have and match volunteers by skills and availability - Display a calendar of jobs and shifts on an organization's website and allow volunteers to sign up directly from the calendar - Send reminder and thank you emails Salesforce.org offers Volunteers for Salesforce along with the Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP). Both are free for any qualifying 501(c)(3) organization. The Volunteers for Salesforce articles show you how to use V4S, and demonstrates how you too can help create days you and your volunteers never want to end. # Work with a List View for Rapid Reviews, Queue Pickup, and More List views are your starting point for application verifications and reviews. List views help you keep track of what needs to be verified or reviewed. You can [create your own list view](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ac_config_list_view.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Help your staff stay focused by setting up list views that best support your institution’s application review process.") or use one created by your admissions team.  Let’s look at the My Application Reviews list. 1. From the Admissions Connect app, select **Application Reviews** from the navigation menu. ![Navigation menu with the Application Reviews item selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/app_nav_menu.png) 2. In the list view drop down, select **My Application Reviews**. ![List view dropdown expanded to show the My Application Review option selected](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/app_list_view_dropdown.png) From here, you can access the reviews that are assigned to you. You can sort any column and even edit the list view to show different fields. If you're a member of an Application Review queue, a list view set up for the queue is a quick way to pick up reviews. From the list view, open an Application Review record and click **Change Owner** to assign the review to yourself. Or you can use the drop-down action menu from the list view to change the owner. When you view a record, like an Application Review, you can still access your list by using split view. Just click the vertical bar at the left of the page to open or close the list. When you're done with your review, open split view to access your next record for review. ![Application Review page with split view expanded and a callout on the button that closes and opens split view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-admissions_connect-264-0-0-production-enus/00d22f0a-1ca4-4493-a967-a738a2defcb1/admissions_connect/images/application_review_page_split_view.png) See Also:  [Work with List Views in Lightning Experience](https://help.salesforce.com/articleview?id=basics_understanding_list_views_lex.htm&type=5) in Salesforce Help # Work with Case-Based Student Records (Support Staff) Learn what's contained in a student record Case and different ways to access student record Cases in Student Success Hub. - **[Learn About Case-Based Student Records](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_case_based_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** All support-related data for a student is associated with a single, primary Case, the student record. When a student enrolls or matriculates, your institution opens a Case and assigns a unique Case number to track notes, tasks, and other data for the student's entire educational journey, from the first day of school through graduation. - **[Access Student Records from a Full-Screen List View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_case_based_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The full-screen list view offers the most comprehensive list of your students. In the full-screen list view, you can take actions for multiple students at once, such as sending an email to a group of students or applying a Success Plan. - **[Access Student Records from a Compact List View](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_case_based_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** The compact student list view is great for when you need to quickly look up a student record in Student Success Hub. - **[Access Records Using Search](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_app_case_based_records.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to search for student records in Student Success Hub. ## Learn About Case-Based Student Records All support-related data for a student is associated with a single, primary Case, the student record. When a student enrolls or matriculates, your institution opens a Case and assigns a unique Case number to track notes, tasks, and other data for the student's entire educational journey, from the first day of school through graduation. We sometimes call this type of Case a student record Case, to distinguish it from other types of Cases that may be used to manage non-student support services, like IT Help Desk tickets. Student Success Hub functionality is built to work with open Student Record Cases. For example, in orgs that support appointments, you'll experience errors if you try to schedule an appointment with a student whose Case record is closed. The student record Case doesn't tell you the whole story about the student, of course. Academic and personal data—that is, data not specific to student support—is stored under a restricted and separate (but related) student Contact record. This data can include information about courses, grades, and other school or campus affiliations. You usually don't have to keep track of exactly what's related to the Contact record versus the Case record. Student Success Hub keeps track for you and saves data in the right places. You can see key Case-related data in the Student Snapshot \[1\] and Contact-related data in the Student Details panel \[2\]. These convenient panels give you a unified, high-level picture of the student, so you can better understand the whole person that you're supporting. ![The Student Snapshot component and the Student Details panel, showing Contact and Case record data](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_cases_student_snapshot.png) Permissions are an important area where the different data sources matter, because they affect what you can access. As a support staff member, it's obviously appropriate that you have permissions to view and edit your support-related data on the student record Case. It's also appropriate for your school to restrict your access to academic and personal data on the student Contact. Your Student Success Hub administrator configures Student Success Hub to control Case and Contact permissions for necessary access and visibility. Your Student Success Hub administrator has created one or more lists for you to view your student Cases. Use the lists provided and remember that you can also quickly access records using search. ## Access Student Records from a Full-Screen List View The full-screen list view offers the most comprehensive list of your students. In the full-screen list view, you can take actions for multiple students at once, such as sending an email to a group of students or applying a Success Plan. 1. Click the app navigation menu arrow and select **Cases**. 2. Click the list view menu arrow and select a list of student records, such as My Students. ![Select a list of student records, such as My Students, from the list view menu arrow](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_cases_list_view_selector.png) ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip Need a specific list view that shows a filtered subset of your students, such as first-year students or varsity athletes? Ask your Student Success Hub administrator. 3. Click a case number to open the student record. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note Clicking the student's name opens the student _Contact_, not the student record _Case_. Remember, Contact records contain data about the student's courses, grades, and other school affiliations, not data about student support. ## Access Student Records from a Compact List View The compact student list view is great for when you need to quickly look up a student record in Student Success Hub. Expand the compact list view, also known as split-view, locate the student you want, and open their record Case. When you're done, click again to close the list view. 1. If you don't see the compact list view on the left, look for the split-view arrow icon at the left edge of the browser window. Click the arrow or anywhere on the vertical bar to open (and close) the view. ![Click the split-view icon to expand the compact list view](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_cases_split_view_collapsed.png) 2. When split-view is open, click the list view selector and select a list of student records, such as My Students, from the menu. ![Select a list of students, such as My Students, from the list view selector](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_cases_split_view_selector.png) 3. Click a case number to open the student record. ## Access Records Using Search Learn how to search for student records in Student Success Hub. Start typing in the search field at the top of the page to locate student records or other data. Search for students by name, phone, a Case number, and so on. As you start typing search terms, suggestions appear in the dropdown list to help you quickly locate records that you're permitted to access. ![Start typing in the search box at the top of the page to find records](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_user_global_search.png) # Work with Clients Learn how to manage your work, work with referrals and intakes, and manage case plans and clients in the nonprofit Case Management managed package. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Manage Your Work](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_your_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Find your way around the nonprofit Case Management managed package. Use Activities and Calendars. - **[Work with Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Work with inbound and outbound referrals to track client referrals. - **[Work with Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_intakes.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create and edit intakes and manage your intake pipeline. - **[Manage Case Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_case_plans.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create a case plan, create goal and action item templates, and use case plans. - **[Manage Clients](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_client_work.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create client records. Search for a client. Manage client information, program engagement, client notes, and assessments in the nonprofit Case Management managed package. # Work with Intakes Create and edit intakes and manage your intake pipeline. - **[Create and Edit Intakes](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_intake_new_clients.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Intakes to collect information about potential clients so you can evaluate how to best help them. - **[Manage the Intake Pipeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_intake_pipeline.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Intake reports to see Intakes in your organization. # Work with Matching Gifts Tracking Matching Gifts in Salesforce is a three-step process. We love matching gifts! They usually mean double the money for your organization. But to track them in Salesforce, you'll need to do three important things (in this order): ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Watch the Nonprofit Salesforce How-To Series video about [Matching Gifts](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uTpbJ6YAooo). ## Identify and Track Matching Organizations Start by tracking organizations that provide matching gifts (we'll show you how in a second), as that will make the process of selecting the correct Account a bit easier later on. You'll also want to track other information about the organization so that you'll know what to expect from particular organizations. For example, here's a section from the Account record page for Orange Company—an organization that matches employee donations. To track Orange Company as a matching company, we simply check the **Matching Gift Company** option in the Matching Gift Information section of the Account record. We've also entered some other information—the company's matching gift percentage, the gift administrator contact information, deadline information, and so on. None of these fields are required for using matching gifts, but selecting **Matching Gift Company** at the very least makes identifying these companies much easier in list views and reports. ## Create the Matching-Eligible Gift Now let's step through the process. Elise Malloy is an employee of Orange Company. She donates $50 and tells you that her company will match. This is important, because accurately tracking a matching gift in Salesforce actually begins with the donor's gift—the gift that will be matched. 1. Enter Elise Malloy's gift like any other donation, however, in the Matching Gift section: 1. Indicate that the **Matching Gift Account** is `Orange Company`. (You can use the lookup field to find Orange Company in Salesforce.) 2. Mark the **Matching Gift Status** as **Potential** or **Submitted**. (You may need to review the Company's matching gift policies to see if there is additional work you need to do to solicit the gift.) 2. **Save** Elise Malloy's new donation, just like any other record. ### A side note . . . Often, donations will come in from web forms that you might have integrated with your Salesforce organization. You'll want to keep track of those to make sure the information your donors enter matches your information in Salesforce. For example, Mariann Smith also works for Orange Company and wants to have her donation matched. But she's submitted her $25 donation through a web form, and the Matching Gift Employer text field contains the name she manually provided: You'll want to edit Mariann's Opportunity record to connect the correct **Matching Gift Account** (Orange Company) to her donation. ## Create the Matching Gift from the Organization Weeks later, a check for $75 arrives from Orange Company, indicating it's a matching gift for Elise and Mariann's donations. (We're providing this use case because it's a very common one, but you could just as easily receive a matching check for a single donation.) 1. Navigate to the Orange Company Account record. 2. Click **New** on the Opportunities related list to create a new Opportunity. 3. Select **Matching Gift** as the record type. 4. Complete the details in the gift as you typically would for an Organization donation. You are not entering any matching details quite yet. 5. **Save** the record. 6. On the Opportunities related list, click the name of the new Opportunity you just created. 7. Click ![Show more actions icon](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/resources-product/images/show_more_actions_icon.png), then click **Find Matched Gifts.** The Nonprofit Success Pack lists any unmatched Closed/Won Opportunities that specify Orange Company as the **Matching Account.** ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note The Find Matched Gifts feature returns a maximum of 1000 Opportunities. 8. Select the Opportunities that should be matched to this donation, and make sure the total matches what you expect. 9. If you don't find the gift you are expecting, click **Find More Gifts** and enter as much as you know about the gift in the dialog box and click **Search** to find the right ones. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce calculates the Total Matching Gift amount automatically, based on the Matching Gift Percent field you've specified on the Account record. If you leave that field blank, Salesforce automatically uses the Opportunity amount instead. For example, if the Company matches at 200%, a donor would be credited $100 for an original gift of $50. You can adjust this amount later if you don't want to use the default value. 10. Click **Save**. ### But what happens when . . . ...the donor doesn't indicate that their company will match their gift? You can still find those donations, and connect them to a company's matching gift. Let's say that the Orange Company has sent you a $75 check—a match for Elise Malloy's $50 donation and Mario Hernandez's (not Mariann Smith's) $25 donation. Mario, however, didn't mention that he worked for Orange Company when he made the gift. 1. Select Elise's gift, and then click **Find More Gifts**. 2. In the Find More Gifts dialog box, enter as much as you know about the gift and click **Search**. (Enter search criteria that will return as few results as possible. Don't search for all gifts in 2014 to match against, for example.) Salesforce adds potential Opportunities to the list so you can select the ones that apply. 3. Select the matching gifts you're interested in and then click **Save**. Back on the company donation's related lists, you'll see some new information: ![View results of matched gifts as soft credits](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/nonprofit_success_pack/images/match_gifts_donationsrl.png) 1. **Contact Roles** are automatically created for the matched donors, with the Role that's specified for Matching Gift Donors in **NPSP Settings** | **Donations** | **Contact Roles**. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Existing Contact Roles will not be overwritten by a Matching Gift Role, if the matched donor already has a Contact Role. 2. **Partial Soft Credits** are created for the amount of each donor's original gift. If the company did not match the entire amount of the original donation, you can edit the amount through the **Manage Soft Credits** button. 3. The individual original gifts are listed in the **Matched Gifts** related list. Back on the original donor gift record, you can see that Salesforce has updated the **Matching Gift Status** to Received, and linked the **Matching Gift** field to the company's matching gift. On the donor's Contact record, you can see that Elise has received hard credit for her $50 gift, and just $50 soft credit for the $75 matching gift! ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-nonprofit_success_pack-264-0-0-production-enus/bd2879e2-2bdc-4012-aa32-dc0c697c4538/images/icon_note.png) Note Remember that you won't see soft credits reflected on the Contact record immediately. You either need to wait overnight for the calculations to happen automatically, or you can manually run a rollup batch update in **NPSP Settings** | **Bulk Data Processes** | **Rollup Donations Batch**. # Work with Pathways (Support Staff) Learn how to view Program Plans and create Personal Program Plans to help your students chart a course to graduation. - **[View Program Plans](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_pathways_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your Student Success Hub administrator has set up Pathways, you can view a Program Plan's details to make sure a student stays on the right path. - **[Create a Personal Program Plan](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_pathways_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator set up Pathways, you can create a Personal Program Plan for a student to help them know what courses to take in each term. - **[Make Flexible Plans with Course Placeholders](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_pathways_use.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** If your Student Success Hub administrator has enabled access, you and your students can add Course Placeholders to a Personal Program Plan. A Course Placeholder is a "saved spot" that indicates an intention to take a certain type of course and number of credit hours, without picking the specific course yet. For example, your student might need to take a five-credit-hour Upper Elective in the Spring Term, but isn't sure yet if it should be Game Theory in Statistics, Advanced Quantitative Reasoning, or some other course. A Course Placeholder named "Upper Elective" with five credit hours designated indicates the student's intended plan. ## View Program Plans If your Student Success Hub administrator has set up Pathways, you can view a Program Plan's details to make sure a student stays on the right path. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip A student must have a Program Enrollment to review their Program Plan. If a student doesn't have a Program Enrollment, you can still review all the available Program Plans. Just select **Program Plans** from the navigation menu. 1. From the student record Case, click the **Programs** tab. You might need to click **More** first. 2. Click the Program Plan link. ![Program Enrollments for Parent Contact related list with a callout on the Program Plan link for a record](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_link.png) 3. On the Program Plan record page, click the Requirement Summary tab. From here you can review the details of the plan. ![On the Program Plan record page, Requirement Summary showing requirements, electives, and total credit hours](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_pathways_program_plan_req_summary_tab.png) See [Review How Students Experience the Portal (Support Staff)](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.ssh_user_portal_review_student_experience.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "Understand what students can do in a Student Success Hub portal.") to understand the student experience with Pathways. ## Create a Personal Program Plan Depending on how your Student Success Hub administrator set up Pathways, you can create a Personal Program Plan for a student to help them know what courses to take in each term. ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_note.png) Note The Program Plan Builder is designed to be flexible. You can add courses and terms in any valid combination. For example, you can drag the same course to the same term more than once, for instance, for a student who wants to take two independent studies in one term. The clone function for a Personal Program Plan replicates only that plan's record details and does not include child records like terms and courses. 1. From the student record Case or Contact page, click the **Program Plans** tab. You might need to click **More** first. 2. In the Personal Program Plans related list, click **New Plan**. 3. Enter the plan name, and select a starting term. The Assigned To field is automatically populated. 4. Click **Create Plan**. 5. To add predefined terms to the plan, click **Add Term**. For example, Fall 2019. 6. Search for courses, and drag them to a term or use the action menu to add them. Students can view and edit the Personal Program Plan in the portal. ![Program Plan Builder](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/student_success_hub/images/ssh_personal_program_plan_sample.png) ## Make Flexible Plans with Course Placeholders If your Student Success Hub administrator has enabled access, you and your students can add Course Placeholders to a Personal Program Plan. A Course Placeholder is a "saved spot" that indicates an intention to take a certain type of course and number of credit hours, without picking the specific course yet. For example, your student might need to take a five-credit-hour Upper Elective in the Spring Term, but isn't sure yet if it should be Game Theory in Statistics, Advanced Quantitative Reasoning, or some other course. A Course Placeholder named "Upper Elective" with five credit hours designated indicates the student's intended plan. Here's how to add a Course Placeholder to a Personal Plan Builder. 1. Click the action menu for a Term and select **Add Placeholder to Term**. 2. Enter a **Placeholder Name**. For example, Upper Elective. 3. Enter **Credit Hours**. For example, 5 hours. 4. Save the placeholder. The Course Placeholder appears in the selected Term. ![Tip](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-student_success_hub-264-0-0-production-enus/b7ac11a0-381d-499e-afd5-05e856602032/images/icon_tip.png) Tip After you create a Course Placeholder, you can drag it to another term if needed. You can also edit or remove it from a Personal Program Plan at any time. # Work with Programs and Services Create programs, program engagements, program cohorts, and service deliveries in the nonprofit Case Management managed package ![Note](https://sf-zdocs-cdn-prod.zoominsoftware.com/tdta-sfdo-case_management-264-0-0-production-enus/4bf5cafc-4c98-4543-b5bf-3b2a6d34e498/images/icon_note.png) Note Salesforce offers managed package solutions for nonprofits in addition to the integrated platform solution Nonprofit Cloud. This content provides information about a nonprofit managed package. Find the Nonprofit Cloud documentation in [Nonprofit Cloud](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleview?id=sfdo.nonprofit_cloud.htm). If you're not sure which version your organization uses, check with your Salesforce admin. - **[Create Programs](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_programs.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn how to create programs - **[Create Program Engagements](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_engagements.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Learn to create program engagements - **[Create Program Cohorts](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_program_cohorts.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create your program cohorts. - **[Create Services and Service Deliveries](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_create_svcs_and_svc_dels.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Create services, create bulk service deliveries, schedule services, see recent service sessions, and track attendance. # Work with Referrals Work with inbound and outbound referrals to track client referrals. - **[Inbound Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_inbound_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Inbound Referrals to track clients who have been referred to your organization. - **[Outbound Referrals](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_outbound_referrals.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use Outbound Referrals to track the referrals that you make for clients to other organizations. - **[Manage the Referral Pipeline](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.cm_manage_referral_pipeline.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5)** Use the Referral reports to see Referrals in your organization. # Working with Opportunity Sales Processes Learn how to update Opportunity stages and sales processes in NPSP. For information on Opportunity stages and sales processes, see [Update Opportunity Stages, Sales Processes, and Record Types](https://help.salesforce.com/s/articleView?id=sfdo.npsp_required_config.htm&release=264.0.0&type=5 "If you installed Nonprofit Success Pack (NPSP) from the installer, perform these configuration steps to make NPSP function as intended.").